Konica Minolta ineo 951 Logiciels - Konica Minolta Revenir à l'accueil Voir une liste d'imprimantes Vous souhaitez un imprimante ou un photocopieur Konica, contactez nous

Search Results: 1 - 50 of more than 1000 

OS	Emulation	Language	Title	Version	Release Date	Link
UNIX	PostScript	English	Unix Print Utility	1.8	2010-01-21
Solaris	PostScript	English	Unix Print Utility	1.8	2010-01-21
Linux	PostScript	English	Unix Print Utility	1.8	2010-01-21
Windows 2000	PCL6	English	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 EN) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2000	PCL6	English	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 EN) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2003	PCL6	English	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 EN) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows XP (32 bit)	PCL6	English	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 EN) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Vista (32 bit)	PCL6	English	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 EN) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2008 (32 bit)	PCL6	English	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 EN) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows 7 (32 bit)	PCL6	English	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 EN) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2003 (64 bit)	PCL6	English	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 EN) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows XP (64 bit)	PCL6	English	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 EN) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Vista (64 bit)	PCL6	English	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 EN) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows 7 (64 bit)	PCL6	English	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 EN) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2008 R2 (64 bit)	PCL6	English	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 EN) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows 2000	PCL6	French	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 FR) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2000	PCL6	French	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 FR) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2003	PCL6	French	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 FR) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows XP (32 bit)	PCL6	French	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 FR) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Vista (32 bit)	PCL6	French	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 FR) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2008 (32 bit)	PCL6	French	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 FR) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows 7 (32 bit)	PCL6	French	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 FR) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2003 (64 bit)	PCL6	French	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 FR) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows XP (64 bit)	PCL6	French	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 FR) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Vista (64 bit)	PCL6	French	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 FR) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows 7 (64 bit)	PCL6	French	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 FR) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2008 R2 (64 bit)	PCL6	French	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 FR) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows 2000	PCL6	German	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 DE) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2000	PCL6	German	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 DE) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2003	PCL6	German	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 DE) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows XP (32 bit)	PCL6	German	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 DE) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Vista (32 bit)	PCL6	German	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 DE) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2008 (32 bit)	PCL6	German	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 DE) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows 7 (32 bit)	PCL6	German	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 DE) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2003 (64 bit)	PCL6	German	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 DE) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows XP (64 bit)	PCL6	German	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 DE) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Vista (64 bit)	PCL6	German	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 DE) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows 7 (64 bit)	PCL6	German	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 DE) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2008 R2 (64 bit)	PCL6	German	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 DE) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows 2000	PCL6	Italian	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 IT) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2000	PCL6	Italian	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 IT) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2003	PCL6	Italian	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 IT) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows XP (32 bit)	PCL6	Italian	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 IT) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Vista (32 bit)	PCL6	Italian	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 IT) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2008 (32 bit)	PCL6	Italian	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 IT) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows 7 (32 bit)	PCL6	Italian	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 IT) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2003 (64 bit)	PCL6	Italian	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 IT) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows XP (64 bit)	PCL6	Italian	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 IT) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Vista (64 bit)	PCL6	Italian	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 IT) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows 7 (64 bit)	PCL6	Italian	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 IT) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01

Search Results: 1 - 50 of more than 1000 

Search Results:  51 - 100 of more than 1000 

OS	Emulation	Language	Title	Version	Release Date	Link
Windows Server 2008 R2 (64 bit)	PCL6	Italian	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 IT) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows 2000	PCL6	Spanish	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 ES) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2000	PCL6	Spanish	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 ES) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2003	PCL6	Spanish	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 ES) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows XP (32 bit)	PCL6	Spanish	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 ES) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Vista (32 bit)	PCL6	Spanish	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 ES) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2008 (32 bit)	PCL6	Spanish	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 ES) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows 7 (32 bit)	PCL6	Spanish	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 ES) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2003 (64 bit)	PCL6	Spanish	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 ES) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows XP (64 bit)	PCL6	Spanish	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 ES) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Vista (64 bit)	PCL6	Spanish	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 ES) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows 7 (64 bit)	PCL6	Spanish	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 ES) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2008 R2 (64 bit)	PCL6	Spanish	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 ES) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows 2000	PCL6	Portuguese	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 PT) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2000	PCL6	Portuguese	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 PT) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2003	PCL6	Portuguese	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 PT) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows XP (32 bit)	PCL6	Portuguese	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 PT) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Vista (32 bit)	PCL6	Portuguese	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 PT) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2008 (32 bit)	PCL6	Portuguese	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 PT) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows 7 (32 bit)	PCL6	Portuguese	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 PT) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2003 (64 bit)	PCL6	Portuguese	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 PT) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows XP (64 bit)	PCL6	Portuguese	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 PT) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Vista (64 bit)	PCL6	Portuguese	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 PT) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows 7 (64 bit)	PCL6	Portuguese	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 PT) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2008 R2 (64 bit)	PCL6	Portuguese	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 PT) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows 2000	PCL6	Dutch	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 NL) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2000	PCL6	Dutch	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 NL) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2003	PCL6	Dutch	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 NL) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows XP (32 bit)	PCL6	Dutch	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 NL) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Vista (32 bit)	PCL6	Dutch	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 NL) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2008 (32 bit)	PCL6	Dutch	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 NL) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows 7 (32 bit)	PCL6	Dutch	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 NL) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2003 (64 bit)	PCL6	Dutch	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 NL) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows XP (64 bit)	PCL6	Dutch	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 NL) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Vista (64 bit)	PCL6	Dutch	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 NL) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows 7 (64 bit)	PCL6	Dutch	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 NL) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2008 R2 (64 bit)	PCL6	Dutch	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 NL) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows 2000	PCL6	Danish	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 DA) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2000	PCL6	Danish	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 DA) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2003	PCL6	Danish	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 DA) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows XP (32 bit)	PCL6	Danish	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 DA) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Vista (32 bit)	PCL6	Danish	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 DA) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2008 (32 bit)	PCL6	Danish	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 DA) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows 7 (32 bit)	PCL6	Danish	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 DA) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2003 (64 bit)	PCL6	Danish	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 DA) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows XP (64 bit)	PCL6	Danish	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 DA) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Vista (64 bit)	PCL6	Danish	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 DA) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows 7 (64 bit)	PCL6	Danish	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 DA) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows Server 2008 R2 (64 bit)	PCL6	Danish	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 DA) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01
Windows 2000	PCL6	Finnish	PCL6 driver (1.1.0.0 FI) for Generic 95BW-2 Series	1.1.0.0	2012-06-01

Search Results:  51 - 100 of more than 1000 

Konica-Minolta-User-s-Guide-FS-520-1.1.0-2007-08-28English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C252-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-User-Manual-bizhub-C252-Phase3-complete-set-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-User-s-Guide-User-s-Guide-Ver1.1-1.1-2011-01-08-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-452-552-652-652DS-Quick-Guide-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-452-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-220-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-220-280-360-User-s-Guides-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-250-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-12-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-User-s-Guide-ColorCentro-IC-601-Ver1.0-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-11-Manuels

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 20:31  5.5M  

 Konica-Minolta-Bizhu..> 24-Mar-2013 20:29  2.8M  

 Konica-Minolta-D-162..> 24-Mar-2013 20:29  2.8M  

 Konica-Minolta-Bizhu..> 24-Mar-2013 20:28  2.8M  

 Konica-Minolta-Bizhu..> 24-Mar-2013 20:28  2.8M  

 Konica-Minolta-Docum..> 24-Mar-2013 10:18  4.1M  

 Konica-Minolta-Bizhu..> 24-Mar-2013 10:18  2.8M  

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:17  2.8M  

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:17  5.3M  

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:15  5.0M  

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:14  4.2M  

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:13  4.2M  

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:12  4.2M  

 Konica-Minolta-Docum..> 24-Mar-2013 10:11  5.8M  

 Konica-Minolta-ineo-..> 24-Mar-2013 10:10  3.5M

Konica-Minolta-IC-305-Francais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Magicolor-1600W-Francais-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C280-Francais-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C10-Francais-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-751-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C220-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-PRO-1200-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-PRO-C6000L-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-250-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C10-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C20P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-282-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-PRO-951-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-751-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-PRO-951-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-PRO-1051-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-PagePRO-1350W-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-PagePRO-1350W-Francais-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-PagePRO-1350EN-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Magicolor-2550-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C10P-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-200-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-IC-402-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C253P-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-C252-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-600-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C250-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C450P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C10-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-8-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-C252-2-Logiciels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C451-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C452-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Konica-Minolta-FAX-1610-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-Anglais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-600-Francais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C280-Francais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C353-Francais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C25-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-PRO-1200-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4690MF-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-451-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-750-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-5501-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C200-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-350-Anglais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-160f-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Ineo-650-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-IC-303-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-IC-402-Manuels

Konica-business-hub-C284-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-Italie-4-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-CN5001Pro-Allemand-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-business-hub-PRESS-1052-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-223-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-213-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-business-hub-PRO-C6000L-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-business-hub-PRESS-1250-P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-550-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-1051-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-D131F-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C30P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-ineo-283-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C220-Danois-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-353-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-751-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-35P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-654-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-PRESS-1052-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-20P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-200-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-20-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-165-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-8460CK-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-8650CK-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7460CK-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450II-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-160-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-160f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-PRO-C5501-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-421-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-500-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-PageScope-Cabinet-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-130f-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-AU-201-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C35P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-CF2001-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-4-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-3-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-mc1650ENUserGuide.pdf-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub423SeriesAdvancedFunctionOperationsUserGuide.pdf-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhubC35FacsimileUserGuide.pdf-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhubC35Printer_Copier_ScannerUserGuide.pdf-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhubC550UserGuideBoxOper.pdf-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C203-C253-C353-Short-Guide-Poster-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-PagePro-1300W-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-IC-302-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C10P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-501-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bihub-423-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-203-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-223-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-282-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-282-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-211-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-1600f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-164-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhubC452_C552_C552DS_C652_C652DSCopyOperationsUserGuide.pdf-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-40P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C450-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C250-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-601-3-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-IC-408-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-362-282-222-Francais-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-601-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-D191F-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-Ineo-7000-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Francais-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Francais-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-Ineo-951-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-Ineo-1052-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Ineo-25-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-163-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-253-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-282-Francais-documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Di2510-Di3010-Di3510-Advanced-Information-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C550-bizhub-C451-bizhub-C203-bizhub-C253-bizhub-C353-bizhub-C650-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C203-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-PageScope-Account-Manager-Ver.2.1-User-s-Guide-EFIGS-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C554-C454-C364-C284-C224-User-Guides-part-1-2-French-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-162-210-copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-552-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-130f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-PRO-PRESS-C6000-C7000_ug_Expert-Guide-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2400W-User-Documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-User-Manual-bizhub-C252-Phase3-complete-set-Documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C200-Phase2-User-Manuals-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C200-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C10-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-163-211-User-Manual-Copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-1600f-User-Manual-Copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-131f-190f-User-Manual-Manuels

Konica-bizhub-131f-190f-Advanced-Information-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-190f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C253-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C253-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Francais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-1690MF-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-362-282-222-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C220-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-36-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Anglais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Pays-Bas-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-283-Russe-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-222-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C203-C253-C353-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-601-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C452-bizhub-C552-bizhub-C652DS-bizhub-C652-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C554-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-652-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C224-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C652DS-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub_c652-c652ds-c552-c452-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-bizhub-C10P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-bizhub-C10-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-7823-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C20-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C25-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-1600W-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-7823-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5670EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5650EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-7823-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450II-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-8650DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7300-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Imprimante-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4690MF-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4695MF-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2500W-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5570-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5550-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5450-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5440DL-Couleur-Manuels

- Chèques personnels - Chèques de voyage - Mandats - Certificats de dépôt - Obligations ou autres titres de dettes - Titres de valeur - Coupons alimentaires - Timbres poste (oblitérés ou N°) - Chèques ou traites tirés par des agences gouvernementales - Timbres fiscaux (oblitérés ou non) - Passeports - Papiers d'immigration - Permis de conduire et carte grise - Actes et titres de propriété - Cartes d'identification, badges ou insignes - Les oeuvres protégées sans l'autorisation du propriétaire des droits. Par ailleurs, il est rigoureusement interdit de copier des billets de monnaie nationale ou étrangère, ou de copier des oeuvres d'art sans la permission du propriétaire des droits. Si vous avez des doutes sur la nature d'un original, consultez un conseiller juridique. REMARQUE Afin d'interdire la reproduction illégale de certains originaux, comme la monnaie papier, cette machine est équipée d'une fonction anti-contrefaçon. A cause de la fonction anti-contrefaçon dont la machine est équipée, il peut arriver que les images soient déformées. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-19 1.9 Introduction aux Guides de l'utilisateur 1 1.9 Introduction aux Guides de l'utilisateur Les Guides de l'utilisateur pour cette machine englobent un manuel sur le DVD du Guide de l'utilisateur. Pour des descriptions plus détaillées des fonctions ou des opérations d'entretien, consultez le Guide de l'utilisateur sur le DVD du Guide de l'utilisateur. Introduction au manuel [Guide rapide Opérations Copie/Impression/Fax/Numérisation/Boîte] Ce Guide de l'utilisateur décrit les procédures d'exploitation et les fonctions les plus utilisées afin de vous permettre d'utiliser immédiatement cette machine. Ce guide contient également des notes et des précautions à suivre pour garantir l'utilisation en toute sécurité de cette machine ainsi que des détails sur les marques de fabrique et les copyrights. Assurez-vous de lire ce manuel avant d'utiliser la machine. Introduction au DVD du Guide de l'utilisateur [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie] Ce Guide utilisateur décrit les détails des opérations en mode Copie et les réglages de cette machine. - Caractéristiques des originaux et du papier copie - Fonction Copie - Entretien de la machine - Incidents [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Zoom Écran] Ce Guide de l'utilisateur décrit les détails des procédures d'exploitation du mode Zoom écran. - Fonction Copie - Fonction Numérisation - Fonction Fax G3 - Fonction Fax réseau [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression] Ce Guide de l'utilisateur décrit les détails des fonctions de l'imprimante. - Fonctions Imprimante - Configurer le pilote d'imprimante [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte] Ce Guide de l'utilisateur décrit les détails des fonctions de boîte utilisant le disque dur. - Enregistrer des données dans des boîtes - Extraire les données des boîtes - Imprimer et transférer les données des boîtes [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau] Ce Guide de l'utilisateur décrit les détails relatifs au transfert de données numérisées. - Scan vers E-mail, Émission FTP, Émission SMB, Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur, WebDAV et Service Web - Fax G3 - Adresse IP Fax, Fax Internet [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Pilote Fax] Ce Guide de l'utilisateur décrit les détails relatifs à la fonction de pilote Fax qui transmet directement des télécopies depuis un ordinateur. - FAX PC [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau] Ce Guide de l'utilisateur décrit les détails relatifs aux méthodes de réglage de chaque fonction utilisant la connexion réseau. - Paramètres Réseau - Paramètres avec Web Connection 1 Introduction aux Guides de l'utilisateur 1-20 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.9 [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations de Fonction Avancée] Ce Guide de l'utilisateur décrit les détails des fonctions qui deviennent disponibles en enregistrant le kit de licence en option et en se connectant à une application. - Fonction Navigateur Web - Image Panel - Fonctions de traitement PDF - PDF adressable - Fonction My Panel et My Address ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-21 1.10 Fonctions disponibles 1 1.10 Fonctions disponibles ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS est un périphérique numérique couleur multi-fonctions destiné à faciliter le flux de travail et satisfaisant n'importe quel environnement d'application ou de bureau. En plus des fonctions de copie, de fax, de numérisation et d'impression essentielles à chaque entreprise, cette machine offre des fonctions de réseau et de boîte destinées à supporter de manière efficace la gestion des documents. Ces options peuvent également être utilisées si le contrôleur image IC-412 v1.1 en option a été installé. Copie Lecture Fax Ligne téléphonique Réseau Imprimante Boîte Boîte Fonctions avancées Internet Ordinateur Réseau Ordinateur Réseau Serveur FTP Serveur de messagerie Serveur WebDAV 1 Fonctions disponibles 1-22 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.10 Opérations Copie Possibilité d'imprimer à grande vitesse Des copies brillantes en couleur, noir et blanc ou toute autre couleur monochrome peuvent être produites pour satisfaire tous les besoins. Les nombreuses fonctions d'application sont d'un grand secours pour réduire les frais de bureau et augmenter l'efficacité. Opérations Impression Lors de l'impression à partir de l'ordinateur, divers réglages peuvent être spécifiés, comme par exemple, le format du papier, la qualité de l'image, la tonalité couleur et la mise en page. Utilisation d'une fonction d'impression sécurisée, l'impression de documents importants peut être protégée par un mot de passe. Le pilote de l'imprimante s'installe facilement à partir du CD-ROM fourni. Opérations Boîte Les documents numérisés à l'aide de cette machine, les documents de télécopie reçus ou les données de l'ordinateur peuvent être stockées. Ces données archivées peuvent être récupérées en cas de besoin ou peuvent être transférées ou imprimées. Les boîtes utilisateur privé peuvent être configurées pour être utilisées par des personnes précises et la boîte utilisateur public est disponible à un nombre quelconque d'utilisateurs. Opérations Fax Non seulement les documents numérisés avec cette machine, mais aussi les documents archivés dans les boîtes utilisateur et les données de l'ordinateur peuvent être faxés. Un seul fax peut être simultanément envoyé à plusieurs destinataires et il est possible de faire suivre un fax réceptionné. Pour l'utilisation des fonctions Fax, un kit Fax FK-502 en option doit être installé. Opérations Réseau L'impression via une connexion réseau est possible. Les données numérisées par cette machine et les données des boîtes utilisateur peuvent aisément être transmises sur le réseau. L'utilisation du panneau de contrôle pour spécifier une destination permet de transmettre les données à un serveur FTP ou à tout autre ordinateur réseau, de les transmettre en fichier joint à un e-mail ou une télécopie peut être envoyée sur Internet. Opérations de numérisation Les documents papier peuvent rapidement être convertis en données numériques. Les données converties peuvent facilement être transmises sur le réseau. De plus, vous pouvez utiliser cette machine comme scanner avec de nombreuses applications compatibles TWAIN. Fonctions avancées Cette machine fournit des fonctions avancées permettant à l'utilisateur d'accéder à des contenus sur Internet par l'intermédiaire du panneau de commande (navigateur Web), d'utiliser l'interface utilisateur intuitive et facile à comprendre (Image Panel) ou de créer un fichier PDF adressable (PDF adressable). Pour utiliser ces fonctions, il faut un kit de mise à niveau UK-203 en option ainsi que l'une des i-options LK-101 v2, LK-102 ou LK-105. La connexions aux applications vous permet d'utiliser My Panel ou My Address. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez personnaliser le panneau de contrôle ou le Carnet d'adresses pour chaque utilisateur. Cette fonction permet à chaque utilisateur d'utiliser le panneau de contrôle ou le carnet d'adresses personnalisé de la même manière sur n'importe quel MFP relié aux applications. Pour utiliser ces fonctions, il faut un kit de mise à niveau UK-203 en option et des applications. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-23 1.11 Tableau de commande 1 1.11 Tableau de commande Le panneau de contrôle se compose de l'écran tactile qui peut être utilisé pour spécifier des réglages pour les diverses fonctions et les différentes touches comme la touche [Départ] et la touche [Arrêt]. Les opérations exécutables à l'aide de ces touches sont décrites ci-après. Dans ce guide, [ ] indique les touches sur le panneau de contrôle et les boutons sur l'écran tactile. N° Nom du composant Description 1 Écran tactile Affiche divers écrans et messages. Permet de spécifier les divers réglages par une pression directe sur l'écran tactile. 2 Voyant Alimentation S'allume en bleu quand la machine est mise sous tension au moyen de l'interrupteur principal. 3 Interrupteur d'alimentation auxiliaire S'actionne pour activer/désactiver les fonctions machine. En position Arrêt, il fait passer la machine en mode Économie d'énergie. 4 Touche [Eco. Énergie] Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Economie d'énergie. Quand la machine est en mode Économie d'énergie, le voyant de la touche [Eco. Énergie] s'éclaire en vert et l'écran tactile s'éteint. Pour annuler le mode Économie d'énergie, pressez une nouvelle fois la touche [Eco Énergie]. 5 Touche [Programmes] Appuyer dessus pour enregistrer (stocker) les paramètres de copie/fax/numérisation souhaités en tant que programme ou pour rappeler un programme enregistré. 6 Touche [Utilitaire/Compteur] Appuyez pour afficher l'écran Utilitaire/Compteur. 7 Touche [Réinitialiser] Appuyez sur cette touche pour effacer tous les réglages (à l'exception des réglages programmés) sélectionnés sur le panneau de contrôle et l'écran tactile. 1 Tableau de commande 1-24 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.11 dPour info Pour plus de détails, voir le chapitre 4 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. 8 Touche [Interruption] Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Interruption. Quand la machine est en mode Interruption, le voyant de la touche s'allume en vert et le message "Mode Interruption en cours." s'affiche à l'écran. Pour annuler le mode Interruption, appuyez une nouvelle fois sur la touche [Interruption]. 9 Touche [Arrêt] Une pression sur cette touche en cours de copie, de numérisation ou d'impression stoppe temporairement l'opération. 10 Touche [Epreuve] Appuyez sur cette touche pour imprimer un exemplaire d'essai avant l'impression d'un grand nombre de copies. Il est possible aussi d'afficher une image de finition avec les réglages proposés sur l'écran tactile. 11 Touche [Départ] Appuyez sur cette touche pour lancer l'opération de copie, de numérisation ou de télécopie. 12 Voyant Données Clignote en bleu pendant la réception d'une tâche d'impression. S'allume en bleu quand une tâche est en attente ou en cours d'impression. S'allume en bleu quand il y a des données fax sauvegardées ou non imprimées. 13 Touche [C] (correction) Appuyez sur cette touche pour effacer une valeur (par exemple, le nombre de copies, un taux zoom ou un format) introduite au moyen du clavier numérique. 14 Clavier numérique Utilisez ce clavier pour saisir le nombre de copies, le taux d'agrandissement, le numéro de fax et d'autres réglages. 15 Touche [Aide] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran Aide qui permet d'afficher à l'écran la description des différentes fonctions et des détails des opérations. 16 Touche [Zoom Ecran] Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Zoom Écran. Si vous procédez à l'authentification via Authentication Manager, il ne passe pas en mode Zoom Écran. 17 Touche [Accessibilité] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran permettant de spécifier les paramètres des fonctions d'accessibilité utilisateur. 18 Touche [Code] Si les réglages Authentification Utilisateur ou Compte Département ont été appliqués, appuyez sur la touche [Code] après avoir entré le nom d'utilisateur et mot de passe (pour l'authentification utilisateur) ou le nom de compte et le mot de passe (pour Compte Département) pour pouvoir utiliser cette machine. 19 Molette [Contraste] Permet de régler la luminosité de l'écran tactile. 20 Touche [Boîte] Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Boîte utilisateur. Lorsque la machine est en mode Boîte, le voyant de la touche [Boîte] s'éclaire en vert. 21 Touche [Fax/Numérisation] Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Fax/Numérisation. Lorsque la machine est en mode Fax/Numérisation, le voyant de la touche [Fax/Numérisation] s'éclaire en vert. 22 Touche [Copie] Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Copie. (Par défaut, la machine est en mode Copie.) Lorsque la machine est en mode Copie, le voyant de la touche s'allume en vert. N° Nom du composant Description ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-25 1.12 Fonction Aide 1 1.12 Fonction Aide Cette machine dispose d'une fonction Aide, qui par le biais d'animations, affiche la description fonctionnelle de l'écran ou vous permet de contrôler une procédure de fonctionnement. Ecran Aide Vous pouvez afficher la description fonctionnelle et la procédure de fonctionnement sur l'écran tactile. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez vérifier un point que vous ne comprenez pas à l'écran tout en effectuant une procédure. % Affichage de l'écran Aide. % Après avoir appuyé sur la touche [Aide], l'Aide s'affiche en fonction de l'écran affiché. 1 Fonction Aide 1-26 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.12 L'écran du Menu Aide comprend les menus suivants. A partir de l'écran du menu, vous pouvez trouver l'écran cible en fonction du niveau de besoin ou de fonction. Vous pouvez aussi contrôler le niveau de l'écran affiché sur le panneau de gauche de l'écran du Menu Aide. Élément Description [Fonction] Appuyer sur [Fonction] pour afficher le menu Aide classé en fonction des noms de fonction qui apparaissent à l'écran. C'est très utile pour contrôler un aperçu de fonction. [Recherche par opération] Une pression sur [Recherche par opération] affiche des exemples d'opérations disponibles sur cette machine ainsi que leurs descriptions, le tout classé par fonction. De plus, une pression sur [Aller à fonct.] affiche l'écran de configuration de la fonction actuellement affichée. [Table fonctions] Une pression sur [Table fonctions] affiche la liste des fonctions et des éléments de réglage sous forme hiérarchique. C'est très utile pour visualiser la description de la fonction ou de l'élément de configuration que vous voulez contrôler. [Autres fonctions] Une pression sur [Autres fonctions] affiche le menu Aide pour les fonctions et les réglages disponibles permettant une utilisation plus confortable de cette machine. De plus, une pression sur [Aller à fonct.] affiche l'écran de configuration de la fonction actuellement affichée. [Nom et Fonction des pièces] Une pression sur [Nom et Fonction des pièces] affiche les touches matérielles (boutons de commande) et les touches en option installées pour contrôler le rôle de chaque touche. [Informations SAV/ Administrateur] Une pression sur [Informations SAV/Administrateur] affiche le nom de l'administrateur, le numéro d'extension et l'adresse e-mail. [Rempl. consommabl./ Procéd. traitement] Une pression sur [Rempl. consommabl./Procéd. traitement] utilise une animation pour afficher la procédure de remplacement des consommables ou vider le collecteur de perforation en recourant à une animation. En cas de pression sur [Lancer Assistant], l'assistant animé va démarrer. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-27 1.12 Fonction Aide 1 Sur l'écran Aide, appuyez sur le bouton ou le numéro de bouton affiché sur l'écran à l'aide du pavé numérique et sélectionnez l'élément souhaité. Exemple : [Fonction] ö [Copie] ö [Couleur] 1 Fonction Aide 1-28 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.12 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-29 1.12 Fonction Aide 1 Exemple d'écran Aide Exemple : [Fonction] ö [Copie] ö [Couleur] Exemple : [Recherche par opération] ö [Copie] ö [Sélect. couleur de copie imprim.] ö [Copie identique à l'original] Référence - Si vous visionnez l'écran Aide depuis une autre fonction que celle qui est actuellement sélectionnée, [Aller à fonct.] ne peut pas être sélectionné. Par exemple, si vous vous trouvez en mode Fax/Numérisation, [Aller à fonct.] sur l'écran Aide pour le mode Copie, qui est une fonction autre que le mode Fax/Numérisation, ne peut pas être sélectionné. - Si [Recherche par opération] -> [Copie] -> [Numériser docs spéciaux] est sélectionné, les instructions et l'animation sont affichés afin de permettre à l'utilisateur de voir la procédure de mise en place d'un original. Toutefois, [Lancer Assistant] ne s'affiche pas dans l'animation pour la mise en place d'un original. Exemple : [Table fonctions] ö [Copie] 1 Fonction Aide 1-30 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.12 Référence - Sur l'écran Carte Fonctions, les fonctions disponibles et les éléments de réglage sont affichés sous forme hiérarchique. Sélectionnez un élément souhaité sur pour le visionner sur l'écran Aide. Exemple : [Remplacer consommables/Procédure de traitement] ö [Remplacer cartouche toner] Référence - Pour de plus amples détails sur l'assistant animé, consultez les page 1-30 de ce guide. - Pour des détails sur le mode de remplacement des consommables ou les procédures d'opération voir page 1-61 de ce guide. - Appuyez sur [Fermer] sur l'écran Aide pour remonter d'un niveau dans la structure de menu. Appuyez sur [Quitter] pour sortir du mode Aide et retourner à l'écran affiché avant d'avoir appuyé sur la touche [Aide]. Appuyez sur [Vers Menu] pour afficher l'écran du Menu Aide. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'écran Assistance, voir le chapitre 4 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. Assistant animé Assistant animé est une fonction vous permettant de recourir à une animation pour contrôler la procédure de dégagement d'un bourrage papier ou d'agrafes ou pour remplacer des consommables tels qu'une cartouche de toner. Vous pouvez dégager un bourrage ou remplacer des consommables tout en contrôlant la procédure sur l'écran tactile. Exemple de traitement d'un bourrage papier ou d'un bourrage d'agrafes (bourrage papier dans le bac 1) 1 Appuyez sur [Lancer Assistant] pour contrôler la procédure d'utilisation. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-31 1.12 Fonction Aide 1 Vous transfère à l'étape suivante. Vous fait retourner à l'étape précédente. Vous pouvez recontrôler la procédure. 1 Fonction Aide 1-32 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.12 Quand un bourrage papier est correctement dégagé, l'écran de désactivation de l'avertissement apparaît. dPour info Pour des détails sur le mode de dégagement de bourrages de papier ou d'agrafes, voir page 1-43 de ce guide. Exemple de remplacement de consommable (remplacement d'une cartouche de toner) 1 Appuyez sur [Lancer Assistant] pour contrôler la procédure de remplacement. % Appuyez sur la touche [Aide] pour afficher l'écran du Menu Aide. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-33 1.12 Fonction Aide 1 Vous transfère à l'étape suivante. Vous fait retourner à l'étape précédente. 1 Fonction Aide 1-34 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.12 Référence - Si [Recherche par opération] ö [Remplacer consommables.] est sélectionné sur l'écran de Menu Aide, vous pouvez aussi contrôler la procédure pour dégager un bourrage de papier ou d'agrafes ou remplacer des consommables. - Pour plus de détails sur le mode de remplacement des consommables, consultez les page 1-61 de ce guide. - Pour de plus amples détails sur l'écran Aide, consultez les page 1-25 de ce guide. Vous pouvez recontrôler la procédure. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-35 1.13 Mise sous/hors tension de la machine 1 1.13 Mise sous/hors tension de la machine Cette machine possède deux boutons d'alimentation : l'interrupteur d'alimentation principal et l'interrupteur d'alimentation auxiliaire. Interrupteur général Cet interrupteur active ou désactive toutes les fonctions de la machine. Normalement, l'interrupteur général reste ouvert. Interrupteur d'alimentation auxiliaire S'actionne pour activer/désactiver les fonctions machine. En position Arrêt, il fait passer la machine en mode Économie d'énergie. Mise en marche de la machine Mise hors tension de la machine Interrupteur général Interrupteur d'alimentation auxiliaire 1 Mise sous/hors tension de la machine 1-36 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.13 REMARQUE Lors de la mise hors tension puis de la remise sous tension de la machine, attendre au-moins 10 secondes avant de la rallumer. En cas d'activation trop peu de temps après avoir été mis hors tension, il peut arriver que la machine ne fonctionne pas correctement. Ne pas éteindre la machine pendant qu'elle est en cours d'impression, cela pourrait générer un bourrage papier. Ne pas éteindre la machine pendant qu'elle fonctionne, sinon les données en cours de numérisation, de transmission ou les tâches mises en file d'attente seront supprimées. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 3 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-37 1.14 Charger du papier 1 1.14 Charger du papier Suivre la procédure décrite ci-après pour charger le papier dans les différents magasins papier. Charger du papier dans le magasin 1 et le magasin 2 Suivez la procédure décrite ci-après pour charger le papier dans le magasin 1 et le magasin 2. 1 Faire glisser les réglettes latérales sur le format du papier à charger. 1 Charger du papier 1-38 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.14 2 Charger le papier dans le magasin. % Charger le papier, face à imprimer orientée vers le haut. % Ne pas charger trop de pages pour éviter que le haut de la pile ne dépasse le repère ,. % Peut recevoir jusqu'à 500 feuilles de papier ordinaire. Pour plus de détails sur le nombre de feuilles de papier épais qu'il est possible de charger, voir le chapitre 12 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 8 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. Charger du papier dans le magasin 3 et le magasin 4 Suivez la procédure décrite ci-après pour charger le papier dans le magasin 3 et le magasin 4. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-39 1.14 Charger du papier 1 % Chargez le papier dans le magasin. % Soulevez le rouleau de prise papier et chargez le papier de sorte que la surface à imprimer soit orientée vers le haut. % Ne pas charger trop de pages pour éviter que le haut de la pile ne dépasse le repère ,. % Le magasin 3 peut recevoir un maximum de 1 500 feuilles de papier ordinaire. Le magasin 4 peut recevoir un maximum de 1 000 feuilles de papier ordinaire. Pour plus de détails sur le nombre de feuilles de papier épais pouvant être chargées, consultez le chapitre 12 du Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie]. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 8 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. Magasin 3 Magasin 4 1 Charger du papier 1-40 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.14 Charger du papier dans l'unité grande capacité Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous pour charger du papier dans l'unité grande capacité LU-301 et LU-204. Procédez de même pour charger du papier dans l'unité grande capacité LU-301 et LU-204. La procédure suivante décrit comment charger le papier dans le magasin grande capacité LU-301. % Chargez le papier dans le magasin. % Soulevez le rouleau de prise papier et chargez le papier de sorte que la surface à imprimer soit orientée vers le bas. % Ne pas charger trop de pages pour éviter que le haut de la pile ne dépasse le repère ,. % L'unité grande capacité LU-301 peut contenir jusqu'à 3 000 feuilles de papier ordinaire. % L'unité grande capacité LU-204 peu contenir jusqu'à 2 500 feuilles de papier ordinaire. % Pour plus de détails sur le nombre de feuilles de papier épais pouvant être chargées, consultez le chapitre 12 du Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie]. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 8 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-41 1.14 Charger du papier 1 Chargement du papier dans le plateau d'introduction Vous pouvez charger manuellement du papier dans l'introducteur manuel si vous désirez copier sur du papier dont le format n'est pas chargé dans un magasin papier ou si vous désirez copier sur des enveloppes, des transparents de rétroprojection ou tout autre papier spécial. Suivre la procédure décrite ci-après pour charger le papier dans l'introducteur manuel. 1 Ouvrir l'introducteur manuel. % Tirez l'extension plateau pour charger du papier de grand format. 2 Charger le papier dans le magasin. % Charger le papier, face à imprimer orientée vers le bas. % Ne pas charger trop de pages pour éviter que le haut de la pile ne dépasse le repère ,. % Peut recevoir jusqu'à 150 feuilles de papier ordinaire. % Faites glisser les guides latéraux au format du papier à charger. 1 Charger du papier 1-42 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.14 3 Sur l'écran tactile, sélectionner le type de papier. % Appuyez sur [ ] et [ ] jusqu'à ce que le type de papier souhaité apparaisse. % Si vous chargez des planches d'étiquettes, sélectionnez [Épais 1]. % En cas de chargement d'un format papier non standard, spécifier le paramètre Format Papier. % Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des paramètres de format et de type du papier, voir le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. % L'impression sur des transparents de rétroprojection est uniquement possible en noir. Référence - L'introducteur manuel peut recevoir les types et quantités de papier suivants. Papier ordinaire (17 lb jusqu'à 23-15/16 lb (64 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) : jusqu'à 150 feuilles Papier recto seul (17 lb à 23-15/16 lb (64 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) : jusqu'à 150 feuilles Papier spécial (17 lb à 23-15/16 lb (64 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) : jusqu'à 150 feuilles Papier à en-tête (17 lb à 23-15/16 lb (64 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) : jusqu'à 150 feuilles Papier couleur (17 lb à 23-15/16 lb (64 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) : jusqu'à 150 feuilles Papier épais 1 (24-3/16 lb à 31-15/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 120 g/m2)) : jusqu'à 100 feuilles Papier épais 1+ (32-3/16 lb à 41-3/4 lb (121 g/m2 à 157 g/m2)) : jusqu'à 80 feuilles Papier épais 2 (42 lb à 55-5/8 lb (158 g/m2 à 209 g/m2)) : jusqu'à 70 feuilles Papier épais 3 (55-7/8 lb à 68-1/8 lb) (210 g/m2 à 256 g/m2) : jusqu'à 60 feuilles Papier épais 4 (68-3/8 lb à 79-13/16 lb) (257 g/m2 à 300 g/m2) : jusqu'à 50 feuilles Transparents de rétroprojection : jusqu'à 20 feuilles Enveloppes : jusqu'à 10 Planches d'étiquettes : jusqu'à 50 feuilles Vous pouvez charger du papier utilisateur avec les réglages de cette machine. Pour plus de détails, contacter le S.A.V. - Les formats de papier suivant peuvent être spécifiés pour l'introducteur manuel. Papier de format standard : 12-1/4 e 18 w, 12 e 18 w à 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A3 w à B6 w, A6 w, 8 e 13 w*1, 16K w/v, 8K w Format papier non standard : largeur : 3-9/16 pouces à 12-1/4 pouces (90 mm à 311,1 mm) ; longueur : 5-1/2 pouces à 47-1/4 pouces (139,7 mm à 1 200 mm) *1 Il existe six formats Foolscap : 8-1/2 e 13-1/2 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 220 e 330 mm w et 8 e 13 w. Chacun de ces formats peut être sélectionné. Pour plus de détails, contacter le S.A.V. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 8 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-43 1.15 Dégagement de bourrages de papier et d'agrafes 1 1.15 Dégagement de bourrages de papier et d'agrafes En cas de bourrage de papier ou d'agrafes, un écran similaire à celui illustré ci-dessous s'affiche pour indiquer l'emplacement du bourrage. Pour dégager le bourrage, contrôler l'emplacement indiqué sur l'écran et effectuez ensuite l'opération nécessaire conformément à l'assistant. Un "cercle numéroté" clignotant indique l'emplacement du bourrage de papier/d'agrafes. Appuyez sur [Lancer Assistant] pour dégager le papier conformément à l'assistant. Si vous n'êtes pas arrivé à dégager les bourrages papier, le message "Il reste du papier dans l'appareil. Dégager papier selon les instructions." apparaît. Réessayez de dégager le papier conformément à l'assistant. N° Élément Description 1 [Lancer Assistant] Une pression sur le bouton va lancer une animation pour commencer à afficher la procédure de dégagement d'un bourrage de papier ou d'agrafes. 2 Numéros d'emplacement du bourrage papier ou d'agrafes Affiche une liste des numéros d'emplacement des bourrages de papier et d'agrafes. 1 2 1 Dégagement de bourrages de papier et d'agrafes 1-44 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.15 Emplacements bourrage papier/bourrage d'agrafes Référence - Pour des détails sur le mode de dégagement de bourrages papier dans l'unité principal, voir page 1-45 à page 1-48 de ce manuel. - Pour des détails sur le mode de dégagement de bourrages papier dans l'unité de finition FS-526, voir la page 1-49 de ce manuel. - Pour des détails sur le mode de dégagement de bourrages papier dans l'unité de finition FS-527, voir la page 1-51 de ce manuel. - Pour des détails sur le mode de dégagement de bourrages papier dans le séparateur de travaux JS-504, voir la page 1-53 de ce manuel. - Pour des détails sur le mode de dégagement de bourrages papier dans l'unité de pliage en Z ZU-606, voir la page 1-54 de ce manuel. - Pour des détails sur le mode de dégagement de bourrages papier dans l'unité d'insertion de feuilles PI-505, voir la page 1-55 de ce manuel. - Pour des détails sur le mode de dégagement de bourrages papier dans le séparateur de travaux JS-602, voir la page 1-56 de ce manuel. - Pour des détails sur le mode de dégagement de bourrages papier dans l'unité de finition FS-526, voir la page 1-57 de ce manuel. - Pour des détails sur le mode de dégagement d'un bourrage d'agrafes dans la piqueuse à cheval SD-508, voir la page 1-58 de ce manuel. - Pour des détails sur le mode de dégagement d'un bourrage d'agrafes dans l'unité de finition FS-527, voir la page 1-59 de ce manuel. - Pour des détails sur le mode de dégagement d'un bourrage d'agrafes dans la piqueuse à cheval SD-509, voir la page 1-60 de ce manuel. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-45 1.15 Dégagement de bourrages de papier et d'agrafes 1 Dégager les bourrages papier (ADF): ineo+ 452/552/652 La procédure suivante décrit comment dégager des bourrages papier survenus dans l'ADF. REMARQUE Ne pas relever le bac des originaux avec le bac de sortie des originaux. 1 Dégagement de bourrages de papier et d'agrafes 1-46 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.15 Dégager les bourrages papier (ADF): ineo+ 652DS La procédure suivante décrit comment dégager des bourrages papier survenus dans l'ADF. 1 2 3 4 5 7 6 24 25 23 22 1 2 1 1 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-47 1.15 Dégagement de bourrages de papier et d'agrafes 1 Dégager les bourrages papier (porte latérale droite) La procédure suivante décrit comment dégager des bourrages papier survenus dans la porte latérale droite. 7 ATTENTION Le tour de l'unité de fixation est extrêmement chaud. - Toucher d'autres endroits que les leviers et molettes indiqués peut entraîner des brûlures. En cas de brûlure, rincez immédiatement la peau à l'eau froide puis consultez un médecin. 7 ATTENTION Précautions pour éviter de renverser le toner. - Veiller à ne pas renverser de toner dans la machine, sur les vêtements ou sur les mains. - Si les mains sont en contact avec le toner, les laver immédiatement à l'eau et au savon. - En cas de projection de toner dans les yeux, les rincer immédiatement à l'eau puis consultez un médecin. 1 Dégagement de bourrages de papier et d'agrafes 1-48 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.15 Dégager les bourrages papier (magasin papier) La procédure suivante décrit comment dégager des bourrages papier survenus dans le magasin papier. Cette illustration montre un exemple avec l'unité grande capacité LU-301 en option installée. REMARQUE Pour fermer la porte supérieure côté droit, appuyez au centre de la porte supérieure côté droit pour fermer la porte correctement. Veillez à ne pas toucher la surface du film ou du rouleau de prise papier avec vos mains. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-49 1.15 Dégagement de bourrages de papier et d'agrafes 1 Dégager les bourrages papier (unité de finition FS-526) La procédure suivante décrit comment dégager des bourrages papier survenus dans l'unité de finition FS-526. L'emplacement du bourrage papier dans l'unité de finition diffère en fonction des réglages de finition sélectionnés. Cette figure montre un exemple avec la piqueuse à cheval SD-508 et le kit de perforation PK-516 installés sur l'unité de finition FS-526 en option. 36 35 32 33 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1 Tige de détection 1 Dégagement de bourrages de papier et d'agrafes 1-50 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.15 REMARQUE Ne pas forcer sur la tige de détection de l'unité de transport horizontal pour l'enfoncer ou l'extraire, sinon cela risque d'endommager l'unité de transport horizontal. L'emplacement du bourrage papier dans l'unité de finition diffère en fonction des réglages de finition sélectionnés. Cette figure montre un exemple avec la piqueuse à cheval SD-508 et le kit de perforation PK-516 installés sur l'unité de finition FS-526 en option. REMARQUE Lors du déplacement de la piqueuse à cheval, ne pas attraper autre chose que la poignée au risque de vous faire pincer la main ou les doigts. Piqueuse à cheval ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-51 1.15 Dégagement de bourrages de papier et d'agrafes 1 Dégager les bourrages papier (unité de finition FS-527) La procédure suivante décrit comment dégager des bourrages papier survenus dans l'unité de finition FS-527. L'emplacement du bourrage papier dans l'unité de finition diffère en fonction des réglages de finition sélectionnés. Cette figure montre un exemple avec la piqueuse à cheval SD-509 et le kit de perforation PK-517 installés sur l'unité de finition FS-527 en option. 32 31 33 35 34 1 Dégagement de bourrages de papier et d'agrafes 1-52 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.15 L'emplacement du bourrage papier dans l'unité de finition diffère en fonction des réglages de finition sélectionnés. Cette figure montre un exemple avec la piqueuse à cheval SD-509 et le kit de perforation PK-517 installés sur l'unité de finition FS-527 en option. REMARQUE Lors du déplacement de la piqueuse à cheval, ne pas attraper autre chose que la poignée au risque de vous faire pincer la main ou les doigts. Piqueuse à cheval ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-53 1.15 Dégagement de bourrages de papier et d'agrafes 1 Dégagement des bourrages de papier (séparateur de travaux JS-504) La procédure suivante décrit comment dégager des bourrages papier survenus dans le séparateur de travaux JS-504. Cette illustration montre un exemple où le séparateur de travaux JS-504 en option est installé. 1 Dégagement de bourrages de papier et d'agrafes 1-54 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.15 Dégagement des bourrages de papier (unité de pliage en Z ZU-606) La procédure suivante décrit comment dégager des bourrages papier survenus dans l'unité de pliage en Z ZU-606. L'emplacement du bourrage papier dans l'unité de pliage en Z ZU-606 diffère en fonction des réglages de finition sélectionnés. Cette illustration montre un exemple où l'unité de pliage en Z ZU-606 est installée dans l'unité de finition FS-526 en option. REMARQUE Lors du déplacement de l'unité de pliage en Z ZU-606, ne saisissez aucune partie autre que la poignée encastrée. Vous pouvez autrement vous pincer la main ou les doigts. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-55 1.15 Dégagement de bourrages de papier et d'agrafes 1 Dégagement des bourrages de papier (unité d'insertion de feuilles PI-505) La procédure suivante décrit comment dégager des bourrages papier survenus dans l'unité d'insertion de feuilles PI-505. Cette illustration montre un exemple où l'unité d'insertion de feuilles PI-505 est installée dans l'unité de finition en option FS-526. REMARQUE Prenez soin de ne pas vous pincer un doigt en retournant la partie supérieure de l'unité d'insertion de feuilles PI-505. 1 Dégagement de bourrages de papier et d'agrafes 1-56 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.15 Dégagement des bourrages de papier (séparateur de travaux JS-602) La procédure suivante décrit comment dégager des bourrages papier survenus dans le séparateur de travaux JS-602. Cette illustration montre un exemple où le séparateur de travaux JS-602 est installé dans l'unité de finition en option FS-526. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-57 1.15 Dégagement de bourrages de papier et d'agrafes 1 Dégager les bourrages d'agrafes (module de finition FS-526) La procédure suivante décrit comment dégager des bourrages d'agrafes survenus dans l'unité de finition FS-526. Cette illustration montre un exemple avec la piqueuse à cheval SD-508 et le kit de perforation PK-516 installés sur l'unité de finition FS-526 en option. REMARQUE Opérez avec précaution lors de l'extraction des agrafes coincées au risque de vous blesser. 1 Dégagement de bourrages de papier et d'agrafes 1-58 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.15 Dégager les bourrages d'agrafes (piqueuse à cheval SD-508) La procédure suivante décrit comment dégager les bourrages d'agrafes survenus dans la piqueuse à cheval SD-508. Cette illustration montre un exemple avec la piqueuse à cheval SD-508 et le kit de perforation PK-516 installés sur l'unité de finition FS-526 en option. REMARQUE Lors du déplacement de la piqueuse à cheval, ne pas saisir une partie autre que la poignée au risque de vous faire pincer la main ou les doigts. Piqueuse à cheval ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-59 1.15 Dégagement de bourrages de papier et d'agrafes 1 Dégager les bourrages d'agrafes (module de finition FS-527) La procédure suivante décrit comment dégager des bourrages d'agrafes survenus dans l'unité de finition FS-527. Cette figure montre un exemple avec la piqueuse à cheval SD-509 et le kit de perforation PK-517 installés sur l'unité de finition FS-527 en option. REMARQUE Opérez avec précaution lors de l'extraction des agrafes coincées au risque de vous blesser. 35 1 Dégagement de bourrages de papier et d'agrafes 1-60 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.15 Dégager les bourrages d'agrafes (piqueuse à cheval SD-509) La procédure suivante décrit comment dégager les bourrages d'agrafes survenus dans la piqueuse à cheval SD-509. Cette figure montre un exemple avec la piqueuse à cheval SD-509 et le kit de perforation PK-517 installés sur l'unité de finition FS-527 en option. REMARQUE Lors du déplacement de la piqueuse à cheval, ne pas attraper autre chose que la poignée au risque de vous faire pincer la main ou les doigts. 34 Piqueuse à cheval ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-61 1.16 Remplacer les consommables 1 1.16 Remplacer les consommables Quand il est temps de remplacer les consommables ou d'effectuer toute autre opération, par exemple, lorsque la cartouche de toner est vide ou le flacon de toner usagé est plein, un message invitant l'utilisateur à remplacer les consommables ou à prendre une mesure appropriée s'affiche sur l'écran tactile. Si un tel message s'affiche, suivez la procédure appropriée pour remplacer les consommables ou prendre la mesure appropriée. Quand le toner est sur le point d'être épuisé, le message suivant s'affiche (si l'utilisateur est habilité à le remplacer.). dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la procédure de remplacement, consultez les page 1-64 de ce guide. Boîte de déchets de perforation Cartouches de toner Cartouche d'agrafes Bac de récupération toner usagé Unité image 1 Remplacer les consommables 1-62 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.16 Quand le moment est venu de remplacer une unité image, le message suivant s'affiche (si l'utilisateur est habilité à la remplacer.). dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la procédure de remplacement, consultez les page 1-66 de ce guide. Quand le flacon de toner usagé est plein, le message suivant s'affiche (si l'utilisateur est habilité à le remplacer.). dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la procédure de remplacement, consultez les page 1-65 de ce guide. Quand il n'y a plus d'agrafes dans l'unité de finition, le message suivant apparaît. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-63 1.16 Remplacer les consommables 1 dPour info Pour des détails sur la procédure de remplacement pour l'unité de finition FS-526, voir la page 1-68 de ce manuel. Pour des détails sur la procédure de remplacement pour la piqueuse à cheval SD-508, voir la page 1-69 de ce manuel. Pour des détails sur la procédure de remplacement pour l'unité de finition FS-527, voir page 1-70 de ce guide. Pour des détails sur la procédure de remplacement pour la piqueuse à cheval SD-509, voir page 1-71 de ce guide. Quand le collecteur de perforation est plein, le message suivant s'affiche (si l'utilisateur est habilité à le vider). dPour info Pour des détails sur la procédure de vidage pour l'unité de finition FS-526, voir la page 1-72 de ce manuel. Pour des détails sur la procédure de vidage pour l'unité de finition FS-527, voir la page 1-73 de ce manuel. Pour des détails sur la procédure de vidage pour l'unité pliage en Z ZU-606, voir la page 1-74 de ce manuel. 1 Remplacer les consommables 1-64 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.16 Remplacement de la cartouche de toner La procédure suivante décrit comment remplacer une cartouche de toner. La procédure de remplacement de la cartouche de toner est la même pour toutes les couleurs de toner. La procédure de remplacement de la cartouche de toner noir est décrite à titre d'exemple. REMARQUE Installer la cartouche de toner dans la position indiquée par l'étiquette en couleur. Tout tentative d'installation par la force se solde par un échec. Avant d'installer la cartouche de toner neuve, la secouer de haut en bas cinq à six fois. Si une cartouche de toner autre que la noire est vide, l'impression peut continuer avec le toner noir. Appuyez sur [Continuer], et sélectionnez ensuite la tâche à imprimer. 7 ATTENTION Manipulation du toner et des cartouches de toner - Ne pas brûler le toner ni les cartouches de toner. - Des projections de toner peuvent causer des brûlures. Cartouche toner neuve Bande adhésive ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-65 1.16 Remplacer les consommables 1 7 ATTENTION Précautions pour éviter de renverser le toner - Veiller à ne pas renverser de toner dans la machine, sur les vêtements ou sur les mains. - Si les mains sont en contact avec le toner, les laver immédiatement à l'eau et au savon. - En cas de projection de toner dans les yeux, les rincer immédiatement à l'eau puis consultez un médecin. Remplacer le flacon de toner usagé La procédure suivante décrit comment remplacer le flacon de toner usagé. REMARQUE Conservez le flacon de toner usagé après y avoir mis un capuchon dans le sachet en plastique à l'intérieur du carton d'emballage à l'attention du technicien S.A.V. Nouveau Flacon Toner Usagé 1 Remplacer les consommables 1-66 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.16 7 ATTENTION Manipulation du toner et du flacon de toner usagé - Ne pas brûler le toner ni les cartouches de toner. - Des projections de toner peuvent causer des brûlures. 7 ATTENTION Précautions pour éviter de renverser le toner - Veiller à ne pas renverser de toner dans la machine, sur les vêtements ou sur les mains. - Si les mains sont en contact avec le toner, les laver immédiatement à l'eau et au savon. - En cas de projection de toner dans les yeux, les rincer immédiatement à l'eau puis consultez un médecin. Remplacer une unité image La procédure suivante décrit comment remplacer une unité image. Jaune, Magenta, Cyan ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-67 1.16 Remplacer les consommables 1 REMARQUE Lors du remplacement d'une unité image autre que la noire, incliner l'unité image neuve vers la gauche et la secouer légèrement deux fois dans le sens de l'inclinaison, puis l'incliner vers la droite et la secouer légèrement deux fois dans le sens de l'inclinaison. Conserver les unités image dans leur sachet en plastique noir à l'intérieur de leur carton d'emballage à l'attention du technicien S.A.V. L'unité image est très sensible à la lumière. Laissez l'unité image dans son sachet en plastique noir jusqu'au moment de l'installation. Si une unité image autre que la noire est vide, l'impression peut continuer en utilisant la noire. Appuyez sur [Continuer] et sélectionnez ensuite la tâche à imprimer. 7 ATTENTION Précautions pour éviter de renverser le toner - Veiller à ne pas renverser de toner dans la machine, sur les vêtements ou sur les mains. - Si les mains sont en contact avec le toner, les laver immédiatement à l'eau et au savon. - En cas de projection de toner dans les yeux, les rincer immédiatement à l'eau puis consultez un médecin. 1 Remplacer les consommables 1-68 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.16 Remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes (module de finition FS-526) La procédure suivante décrit comment remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes pour l'unité de finition FS-526. Cette figure montre un exemple avec la piqueuse à cheval SD-508 et le kit de perforation PK-516 installés sur l'unité de finition FS-526 en option. REMARQUE Lors du remplacement de la cartouche d'agrafes, vérifiez-bien que le message est affiché. En cas de remplacement de la cartouche d'agrafes avant affichage du message, une défaillance s'ensuivra. Ne pas retirer les cartouches restantes sinon la machine ne pourra pas agrafer une fois que la cartouche aura été remplacée. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-69 1.16 Remplacer les consommables 1 Remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes (piqueuse à cheval SD-508) La procédure suivante décrit comment remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes pour la piqueuse à cheval SD-508. Cette illustration montre un exemple avec la piqueuse à cheval SD-508 et le kit de perforation PK-516 installés sur l'unité de finition FS-526 en option. REMARQUE Lors du déplacement de la piqueuse à cheval, ne pas saisir une partie autre que la poignée au risque de vous faire pincer la main ou les doigts. Lors du remplacement de la cartouche d'agrafes, vérifiez-bien que le message est affiché. En cas de remplacement de la cartouche d'agrafes avant affichage du message, une défaillance s'ensuivra. Ne pas retirer les cartouches restantes sinon la machine ne pourra pas agrafer une fois que la cartouche aura été remplacée. Piqueuse à cheval 1 Remplacer les consommables 1-70 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.16 Remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes (module de finition FS-527) La procédure suivante décrit comment remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes pour l'unité de finition FS-527. Cette figure montre un exemple avec la piqueuse à cheval SD-509 et le kit de perforation PK-517 installés sur l'unité de finition FS-527 en option. REMARQUE Lors du remplacement de la cartouche d'agrafes, vérifiez-bien que le message est affiché. En cas de remplacement de la cartouche d'agrafes avant affichage du message, une défaillance s'ensuivra. Ne pas retirer les cartouches restantes sinon la machine ne pourra pas agrafer une fois que la cartouche aura été remplacée. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-71 1.16 Remplacer les consommables 1 Remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes (piqueuse à cheval SD-509) La procédure suivante décrit comment remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes pour la piqueuse à cheval SD-509. Cette figure montre un exemple avec la piqueuse à cheval SD-509 et le kit de perforation PK-517 installés sur l'unité de finition FS-527 en option. REMARQUE Lors du déplacement de la piqueuse à cheval, ne pas attraper autre chose que la poignée au risque de vous faire pincer la main ou les doigts. Lors du remplacement de la cartouche d'agrafes, vérifiez-bien que le message est affiché. En cas de remplacement de la cartouche d'agrafes avant affichage du message, une défaillance s'ensuivra. Ne pas retirer les cartouches restantes sinon la machine ne pourra pas agrafer une fois que la cartouche aura été remplacée. Piqueuse à cheval 1 Remplacer les consommables 1-72 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.16 Vider le collecteur de perforation (unité de finition FS-526) La procédure suivante décrit comment vider le collecteur de perforation pour l'unité de finition FS-526. Cette illustration montre un exemple avec la piqueuse à cheval SD-508 et le kit de perforation PK-516 installés sur l'unité de finition FS-526 en option. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-73 1.16 Remplacer les consommables 1 Vider le collecteur de perforation (unité de finition FS-527) La procédure suivante décrit comment vider le collecteur de perforation pour l'unité de finition FS-527. Cette illustration montre un exemple avec la piqueuse à cheval SD-509 et le kit de perforation PK-517 installés sur l'unité de finition FS-527 en option. 1 Remplacer les consommables 1-74 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.16 Vider le collecteur de perforation (unité de pliage en Z ZU-606) La procédure suivante décrit comment vider le collecteur de perforation pour l'unité de pliage en Z ZU-606. Cette illustration montre un exemple où l'unité de pliage en Z ZU-606 est installée dans l'unité de finition FS-526. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-75 1.17 Options 1 1.17 Options Cette section décrit la configuration des options installées sur cette machine. L'ajout d'options permet de satisfaire divers besoins bureautiques. ineo+ 552/652/652DS N° Nom Description 1 Unité principale L'original est numérisé par la section scanner, puis l'image numérisée est imprimée par la section imprimante. 2 Unité d'authentification (type biométrique) AU-101 Permet d'identifier l'utilisateur en lisant les motifs des veines du doigt. La table de travail est nécessaire pour installer l'unité 3 Unité d'authentification d'authentification. (type biométrique) AU-102 4 Unité d'authentification (type carte IC) AU-201 Procède à l'authentification de l'utilisateur en lisant les informations enregistrées sur la carte IC. La table de travail est nécessaire pour installer l'unité d'authentification. 5 Table de travail WT-506 Offre un espace plan permettant de poser temporairement un original ou d'autres objets. Également utilisée quand l'unité d'authentification est installée. 6 Support clavier KH-101 Installer ce kit pour utiliser un clavier compact. Pour plus de détails sur les claviers compacts, contactez votre S.A.V. 7 Bac de sortie OT-503 Récupère les pages imprimées. 8 Kit de montage MK-715 Utilisé pour l'impression bannière. • Cette option risque de ne pas être disponible selon la zone commerciale. 9 Contrôleur image IC-412 v1.1 Permet d'utiliser cette machine comme imprimante couleur réseau. 10 Unité grande capacité LU-301 Peut recevoir un maximum de 3000 feuilles de papier A4. 56 7 2 3 1 4 11 10 8 16 9 17 15 19 20 21 18 14 13 12 1 Options 1-76 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.17 11 Unité grande capacité LU-204 Peut recevoir un maximum de 2 500 feuilles de papier A4. Pour changer le format papier, contactez votre S.A.V. 12 Piqueuse à cheval SD-509 Installé sur l'unité de finition pour permettre le mode Pli/Reliure. 13 Unité de finition FS-527 Permet de trier, de grouper et d'agrafer les feuilles imprimées avant des les restituer. 14 Unité de perforation PK-517 Installé sur l'unité de finition pour perforer des trous. 15 Séparateur travaux JS-603 Installer cette unité sur l'unité de finition. Utilisée pour sortir les feuilles de papier imprimées. 16 Unité de pliage en Z ZU-606 Installée sur l'unité de finition pour permettre le pliage en Z ou la perforation. 17 Piqueuse à cheval SD-508 Installé sur l'unité de finition pour permettre le mode Pli/Reliure. 18 Unité de finition FS-526 Permet de trier, de grouper et d'agrafer les feuilles imprimées avant des les restituer. 19 Unité de perforation PK-516 Installé sur l'unité de finition pour perforer des trous. 20 Insertion feuilles PI-505 Installée sur l'unité de finition pour permettre l'insertion d'une couverture dans les feuilles copiées. Cette unité vous permet aussi d'utiliser manuellement l'unité de finition (seule le bas inférieur est disponible). 21 Séparateur travaux JS-602 Installer cette unité sur l'unité de finition. Utilisée pour sortir les feuilles de papier imprimées. Aucune illustration n'est disponible car les options sont à l'intérieur de la machine. 22 Kit Fax FK-502 Permet d'utiliser cette machine comme un télécopieur. Permet en outre de connecter plusieurs lignes téléphoniques. 23 Unité Tampon SP-501 Applique un tampon sur les originaux numérisés. 24 Tampon de rechange ÉM 2 Tampon de rechange pour l'unité Tampon. 25 Kit de montage MK-720 Fixer ce kit pour installer un kit Fax en option. 26 Kit d'interface locale EK-604 Installer ce kit pour utiliser un clavier compact. Pour plus de détails sur les claviers compacts, contactez votre S.A.V. 27 Kit d'interface locale EK-605 Installer ce kit en cas d'utilisation de la fonction de connexion avec un clavier compact ou un téléphone mobile ou un agenda électronique compatible Bluetooth. Un périphérique de réception Bluetooth est intégré dans ce kit. 28 Kit d'interface vidéo VI-505 Nécessaire pour installer le contrôleur image sur cette machine. 29 Kit Accélérateur de numérisation SA-502 Crée des images à grande vitesse lors de l'envoi de numérisations. 30 Kit Sécurité SC-507 Vous permet d'utiliser la fonction de Pare-copie ou Copie Prot. MdP. Ce kit permet d'éviter la copie non autorisée. 31 Option Internet LK-101 v2 Permet d'utiliser les fonctions Navigateur Web et Image Panel sur le panneau de contrôle. 32 Option Internet LK-102 Permet le cryptage de documents PDF avec un ID numérique en joignant une signature électrique, et de spécifier les propriétés pour la distribution d'un document PDF avec la fonction Numérisation ou Boîte. 33 i-Option LK-105 Propose la fonction PDF adressable. N° Nom Description ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-77 1.17 Options 1 dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 2 du [Guide de l'opérateur Opérations Copie]. ineo+ 452 34 Kit de mise à niveau UK-203 Nécessaire en cas d'utilisation de la fonction Navigateur Web, Image panel, traitement PDF, PDF adressablePDF adressable, My Panel or My Address. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez augmenter le nombre de langues susceptibles d'être affichées sur le panneau de commande de cette machine (9 max.). N° Nom Description 1 Unité principale L'original est numérisé par la section scanner, puis l'image numérisée est imprimée par la section imprimante. 2 Unité d'authentification (type biométrique) AU-101 Permet d'identifier l'utilisateur en lisant les motifs des veines du doigt. La table de travail est nécessaire pour installer l'unité 3 Unité d'authentification d'authentification. (type biométrique) AU-102 4 Unité d'authentification (type carte IC) AU-201 Procède à l'authentification de l'utilisateur en lisant les informations enregistrées sur la carte IC. La table de travail est nécessaire pour installer l'unité d'authentification. 5 Table de travail WT-506 Offre un espace plan permettant de poser temporairement un original ou d'autres objets. Également utilisée quand l'unité d'authentification est installée. 6 Support clavier KH-101 Installer ce kit pour utiliser un clavier compact. Pour plus de détails sur les claviers compacts, contactez votre S.A.V. N° Nom Description 1 Options 1-78 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.17 7 Bac de sortie OT-503 Récupère les pages imprimées. 8 Kit de montage MK-715 Utilisé pour l'impression bannière. • Cette option risque de ne pas être disponible selon la zone commerciale. 9 Contrôleur image IC-412 v1.1 Permet d'utiliser cette machine comme imprimante couleur réseau. 10 Unité grande capacité LU-301 Peut recevoir un maximum de 3000 feuilles de papier A4. 11 Unité grande capacité LU-204 Peut recevoir un maximum de 2 500 feuilles de papier A4. Pour changer le format papier, contactez votre S.A.V. 12 Piqueuse à cheval SD-509 Installé sur l'unité de finition pour permettre le mode Pli/Reliure. 13 Unité de finition FS-527 Permet de trier, de grouper et d'agrafer les feuilles imprimées avant des les restituer. 14 Unité de perforation PK-517 Installé sur l'unité de finition pour perforer des trous. 15 Séparateur travaux JS-603 Installer cette unité sur l'unité de finition. Utilisée pour sortir les feuilles de papier imprimées. 16 Séparateur travaux JS-504 Vous permet de trier les feuilles imprimées si cette unité est installée dans le bac de sortie de l'unité principale. Aucune illustration n'est disponible car les options sont à l'intérieur de la machine. 17 Kit Fax FK-502 Permet d'utiliser cette machine comme un télécopieur. Permet en outre de connecter plusieurs lignes téléphoniques. 18 Unité Tampon SP-501 Applique un tampon sur les originaux numérisés. 19 Tampon de rechange ÉM 2 Tampon de rechange pour l'unité Tampon. 20 Kit de montage MK-720 Fixer ce kit pour installer un kit Fax en option. 21 Kit d'interface locale EK-604 Installer ce kit pour utiliser un clavier compact. Pour plus de détails sur les claviers compacts, contactez votre S.A.V. 22 Kit d'interface locale EK-605 Installer ce kit en cas d'utilisation de la fonction de connexion avec un clavier compact ou un téléphone mobile ou un agenda électronique compatible Bluetooth. Un périphérique de réception Bluetooth est intégré dans ce kit. 23 Kit d'interface vidéo VI-505 Nécessaire pour installer le contrôleur image sur cette machine. 24 Kit Accélérateur de numérisation SA-502 Crée des images à grande vitesse lors de l'envoi de numérisations. 25 Kit Sécurité SC-507 Vous permet d'utiliser la fonction de Pare-copie ou Copie Prot. MdP. Ce kit permet d'éviter la copie non autorisée. 26 Option Internet LK-101 v2 Permet d'utiliser les fonctions Navigateur Web et Image Panel sur le panneau de contrôle. 27 Option Internet LK-102 Permet le cryptage de documents PDF avec un ID numérique en joignant une signature électrique, et de spécifier les propriétés pour la distribution d'un document PDF avec la fonction Numérisation ou Boîte. 28 i-Option LK-105 Propose la fonction PDF adressable. 29 Kit de mise à niveau UK-203 Nécessaire en cas d'utilisation de la fonction Navigateur Web, Image panel, traitement PDF, PDF adressablePDF adressable, My Panel or My Address. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez augmenter le nombre de langues susceptibles d'être affichées sur le panneau de commande de cette machine (9 max.). N° Nom Description ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1-79 1.17 Options 1 dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 2 du [Guide de l'opérateur Opérations Copie]. 30 Chauffage HT-508 Installer cette unité dans le plateau pour déshumidifier le papier. La déshumidification empêche le plateau d'absorber l'humidité. • Cette option risque de ne pas être disponible selon la zone commerciale. N° Nom Description 1 Options 1-80 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 1.17 2 Opérations de base ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2-3 2.1 Opérations élémentaires de copie 2 2 Opérations de base 2.1 Opérations élémentaires de copie Cette section contient des informations sur les opérations générales pour la copie. 1 Chargez le document à copier. % Si un écran s'affiche pour y saisir le nom d'utilisateur/nom de compte et le mot de passe, taper les informations nécessaires et appuyer ensuite sur la touche [Connexion] ou appuyer sur la touche [Code]. Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 10 ou le chapitre 11 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. 2 Opérations élémentaires de copie 2-4 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2.1 2 Sélectionner les réglage de l'écran de base. % Couleur : sélectionner si le document est censé être copié en couleur ou en noir et blanc. Par défaut, "Couleur Auto" est sélectionné. % Papier : sélectionner le magasin papier à utiliser. Par défaut, "Auto" est sélectionné. % Zoom : pour effectuer des copies agrandies ou réduites, modifier le zoom. Par défaut, "100%" (Pleine page) est sélectionné. % Recto-Verso/Combinaison : modifier le réglage en cas de copie de documents recto-verso ou de réalisation de copies recto-verso de documents recto. De plus, plusieurs pages de document peuvent être combinées sur une seule page imprimée. Par défaut, "Recto > Recto" est sélectionné. % Programme de finition : affiche le bouton du programme de finition assigné à la fonction de finition utilisée fréquemment. Vous pouvez configurer les fonctions de finition enregistrées en une fois. Le réglage usine par défait est Tri/(Décalé) Non/Agrafage en coin : en haut à gauche. % Finition : les pages imprimées peuvent être triées par pages ou par copies. En outre, les pages peuvent être agrafées ou des trous peuvent y être perforés. % Numér. Séparée : sélectionner ce paramètre pour numériser un document en différents lots. Un document numérisé en différents lots peut être traité comme une seule et même tâche de copie. % Ne pas pivoter : sélectionner ce paramètre pour imprimer des copies sans faire pivoter l'image pour l'adapter à l'orientation du papier chargé. % Language Selection (Sélection Langue) : affiche l'écran Sélection Langue pour indiquer la langue à afficher sur l'écran tactile. % Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. 3 Taper le nombre souhaité de copies. % Pour modifier le nombre de copies, appuyer sur la touche [C] (correction) et taper le nombre souhaité. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2-5 2.1 Opérations élémentaires de copie 2 % Pour utiliser les diverses fonctions de copie, appuyer sur [Applications] et spécifier ensuite les réglages souhaités. Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. % Pour numériser plusieurs originaux sur la vitre d'exposition, sélectionner [Numér. séparée]. Après avoir numérisé la première page de l'original, charger la deuxième page et appuyer une nouvelle fois sur [Départ]. Répéter cette procédure jusqu'à ce que toutes les pages soient numérisées. Une fois la dernière page numérisée, appuyer sur [Finition] et appuyer sur la touche [Départ]. % Pour arrêter la numérisation ou l'impression, appuyer sur la touche [Arrêt]. % Pour interrompre la tâche de copie, appuyer une nouvelle fois sur la touche [Interruption]. % Pour numériser le document suivant tout en imprimant (réserver une tâche de copie), placer le document suivant et appuyer sur la touche [Départ]. % Pour plus de détails, voir le chapitre 4 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. 2 Opération d'impression de base 2-6 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2.2 2.2 Opération d'impression de base Cette section contient des informations sur les opérations générales pour l'impression. Envoi de données imprimées Envoyer les données d'impression à cette machine à partir d'une application de l'ordinateur par l'intermédiaire du pilote d'imprimante. Les pilotes d'imprimante suivants peuvent être utilisés avec cette machine. Windows : Pilote PCL Pilote PostScript Pilote XPS Macintosh : Pilote PPD Postscript OS X Pilote PPD Postscript OS 9 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2-7 2.2 Opération d'impression de base 2 Avant d'imprimer Pour imprimer, le pilote d'imprimante doit d'abord être installé sur l'ordinateur à utiliser. Le pilote d'imprimante s'installe facilement grâce à l'assistant d'installation sur le CD-ROM fourni. (pour Windows) dPour info Pour imprimer, il faut d'abord spécifier les paramètres réseau. Les paramètres réseau devraient être spécifiés par l'administrateur. Les Paramètres réseau peuvent aussi être spécifiés en utilisant Web Connection. Impression 1 Créer un document dans l'application et sélectionner ensuite la commande d'impression. % Dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimer, sélectionner l'imprimante. 1 2 2 Opération d'impression de base 2-8 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2.2 % Si nécessaire, afficher la boîte de dialogue des paramètres du pilote d'imprimante et spécifier les réglages d'impression, comme l'agrafage. 1 2 3 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2-9 2.2 Opération d'impression de base 2 2 Les pages et le nombre spécifiés de copies sont imprimés. % Si "Impression Sécurisée", "Enr. ds Bte Util" ou "Impression épreuve" a été sélectionné dans la zone de liste déroulante "Type de sortie" du pilote d'imprimante, le document est enregistré dans une boîte utilisateur ou dans la mémoire de cette machine. Imprimer le document à partir du panneau de contrôle de la machine. 2 Opération de Fax de base 2-10 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2.3 2.3 Opération de Fax de base Cette section contient des informations sur les opérations générales pour l'envoi de Fax. 1 Changer le mode. % Si un écran s'affiche pour y saisir le nom d'utilisateur/nom de compte et le code d’accès, taper les informations nécessaires et appuyer ensuite sur la touche [Connexion] ou appuyer sur la touche [Code]. Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 10 ou le chapitre 11 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2-11 2.3 Opération de Fax de base 2 2 Sélectionnez la destination. % Si des numéros de fax sont déjà enregistrés, il est possible de sélectionner une destination enregistrée. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de destinations, consultez les page 5-3 de ce guide. % En cas de saisie directe du numéro de fax, taper le numéro sur le pavé numérique. % Un document peut être simultanément envoyé à plusieurs destinations (Émission par Diffusion). Pour plus de détails sur l'envoi d'un document à plusieurs destinations, voir page 5-10 de ce guide. % Si nécessaire, appuyer sur [Param. Numéris.], [Réglages Original] ou sur [Réglages de communication] et spécifier les réglages souhaités. Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 3 Chargez le document à télécopier. 2 Opération de Fax de base 2-12 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2.3 % Pour numériser un document impossible à charger dans le chargeur ADF (un document épais ou un document sur papier fin), le placer sur la vitre d'exposition. % Insérer l'original dans le chargeur ADF côté à envoyer orienté vers le haut. % Pour contrôler les destinations et les réglages spécifiés pour les fonctions, appuyer sur la touche [Vérif. Régl. Tâche]. Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 3 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. % Appuyez sur la touche [Epreuve] avant d'appuyer sur la touche [Départ] pour afficher sur l'écran tactile une image d'aperçu des réglages actuellement spécifiés. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. % Pour numériser plusieurs originaux sur la vitre d'exposition, sélectionner [Numér. séparée]. Après avoir numérisé la première page de l'original, charger la deuxième page et appuyer une nouvelle fois sur [Départ]. Répéter cette procédure jusqu'à ce que toutes les pages soient numérisées. Une fois la dernière page numérisée, appuyer sur [Finition] et appuyer sur la touche [Départ]. dPour info Pour arrêter l'émission après avoir appuyé sur la touche [Départ], appuyer sur [Liste Tâches], puis sur [Détails Tâche] et supprimer ensuite la tâche à arrêter. Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 3 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2-13 2.3 Opération de Fax de base 2 2 1 3 2 Opération de numérisation de base 2-14 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2.4 2.4 Opération de numérisation de base Cette section contient des informations sur les opérations générales pour envoyer des données numérisées. Émission de données numérisées Un document numérisé avec cette machine peut être envoyé comme fichier de données. Les méthodes d'émission sont les suivantes. - Scan vers E-mail : les données numérisées sont envoyées comme fichier joint à un e-mail. - Émission FTP : les données numérisées sont envoyées sur un serveur FTP. - Émission SMB : les données numérisées sont envoyées vers un dossier partagé sur un ordinateur du réseau. - Émission WebDAV : les données numérisées sont envoyées sur un serveur WebDAV. - Fonction Services Web : il est possible d'émettre une commande de numérisation à partir d'un ordinateur sur le réseau ou de procéder à la numérisation en fonction du besoin à partir de la machine et d'envoyer les données numérisées à l'ordinateur. Disponible pour utilisation sous Windows Vista. Cette fonction n'est pas disponible si le contrôleur image IC-412 v1.1 en option a été installé. Référence - Les données stockées dans la boîte utilisateur de cette machine peuvent aussi être envoyées. - Si l'authentification utilisateur est activée, vous pouvez aussi utiliser la fonction "Scan to Home" qui envoie les données numérisées à votre ordinateur ou utiliser la fonction "Scan to Me" qui envoie les données numérisées à votre adresse e-mail. Émission SMB Fonction Services Web Émission FTP Émission WebDAV Scan vers E-mail ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2-15 2.4 Opération de numérisation de base 2 1 Changer le mode. % Si un écran s'affiche pour y saisir le nom d'utilisateur/nom de compte et le code d’accès, taper les informations nécessaires et appuyer ensuite sur la touche [Connexion] ou appuyer sur la touche [Code]. Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 10 ou le chapitre 11 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. 2 Sélectionnez la destination. % Si des destinations sont déjà enregistrées, il est possible de sélectionner une destination enregistrée. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de destinations, consultez les page 6-3 de ce guide. 2 Opération de numérisation de base 2-16 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2.4 % Pour taper directement l'adresse de destination, appuyer sur [Saisie dir.], sélectionnez la méthode d'émission et taper ensuite l'adresse de destination. % Un document peut être simultanément envoyé à plusieurs destinations (Émission par Diffusion). Pour plus de détails sur l'envoi d'un document à plusieurs destinations, voir page 6-22 de ce guide. % Si nécessaire, appuyer sur [Param. Numéris.], [Réglages Original] ou [Réglages de communication] et spécifier les réglages souhaités. Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. % Appuyez sur la touche [Epreuve] avant d'appuyer sur la touche [Départ] pour afficher sur l'écran tactile une image d'aperçu des réglages actuellement spécifiés. 3 Chargez le document à numériser. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. % Pour numériser plusieurs originaux sur la vitre d'exposition, sélectionner [Numér. séparée]. Après avoir numérisé la première page de l'original, charger la deuxième page et appuyer une nouvelle fois sur [Départ]. Répéter cette procédure jusqu'à ce que toutes les pages soient numérisées. Une fois la dernière page numérisée, appuyer sur [Finition] et appuyer sur la touche [Départ]. 1 2 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2-17 2.4 Opération de numérisation de base 2 dPour info Les paramètres réseau doivent être spécifiés avant de pouvoir envoyer les données numérisées. Les paramètres réseau devraient être spécifiés par l'administrateur. Les Paramètres réseau peuvent aussi être spécifiés en utilisant Web Connection. Pour plus de facilité, spécifier à l'avance tous les réglages autres que les paramètres réseau en fonction de l'application souhaitée. Opération de boîte de base (2 enregistrer des boîtes utilisateur) 2-18 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2.5 2.5 Opération de boîte de base (enregistrer des boîtes utilisateur) Pour utiliser les fonctions du mode Boîte utilisateur, il faut d'abord créer les boîtes. La procédure suivante décrit comment enregistrer des boîtes utilisateur publiques, privées et de groupe. Opérations Boîte Ces fonctions permettent d'enregistrer les données de document sur le disque dur installé sur la machine et de les récupérer en cas de nécessité. En plus des données numérisées avec cette machine, les données créées sur l'ordinateur et les données envoyées depuis un autre périphérique multi-fonctions peuvent être enregistrées dans cette boîte utilisateur. Il est possible d'enregistrer les boîtes utilisateur suivantes. Types de boîtes utilisateur Description Boîtes Utilisateur Public Ces boîtes partagées sont accessibles à tous. L'accès peut être contrôlé si un mot de passe est spécifié. Boîtes Utilisateur Privé Boîtes individuelles uniquement accessibles aux utilisateurs connectés correspondants lorsqu'un système d'authentification est en place. Boîtes Groupe Boîtes accessibles uniquement aux utilisateurs appartenant au compte (groupe) spécifique et connectés en cas d'application de réglages de Compte Département. Boîtes Utilisateur Bulletin Board Cette boîte peut être utilisée pour partager les documents via la ligne de télécopie et même avec des destinataires non présents sur le réseau. (La machine de réception doit être compatibles avec les F-codes.) Afin d'utiliser ces opérations de boîte, le kit Fax en option doit être installé. Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 7 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/ Fax/Fax Réseau]. Boîtes Utilisateur Relais Cette boîte permet d'utiliser cette machine comme station relais. (La fonction d'émission relais utilise les F-codes.) Afin d'utiliser ces opérations de boîte, le kit Fax en option doit être installé. Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 7 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Boîtes Annotation Cette boîte permet d'ajouter une image de la date/l'heure ou un numéro d'annotation sur les données de document enregistrées avec la fonction Numérisation. Cette boîte est enregistrée en mode Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 8 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. Boîte ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2-19 2.5 Opération de boîte de base (enregistrer des boîtes utilisateur) 2 1 Afficher l'écran d'enregistrement des boîtes utilisateur. Opération de boîte de base (2 enregistrer des boîtes utilisateur) 2-20 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2.5 2 Appuyer sur [Nouveau]. % Pour modifier les réglages pour une boîte utilisateur enregistrée, sélectionner la boîte dont il faut modifier les réglages et appuyer sur [Modifier]. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2-21 2.5 Opération de boîte de base (enregistrer des boîtes utilisateur) 2 % Pour supprimer une boîte utilisateur enregistrée, sélectionner la boîte et appuyer ensuite [Supprimer]. 3 Spécifier les paramètres désirés. % N° Boîte: spécifier le numéro de boîte utilisateur. Appuyer sur [N° Boîte] et taper le numéro de la boîte sur le pavé numérique. % Nom Boîte : spécifier le nom de la boîte utilisateur. Appuyer sur [Nom Boîte] et taper ensuite le nom de la boîte sur le clavier qui s'affiche sur l'écran tactile. % Code d’accès : spécifier un mot de passe pour protéger la boîte enregistrée. Appuyer sur [Code d'accès] et taper ensuite le nom de la boîte sur le clavier qui s'affiche sur l'écran tactile. % Index : sélectionner les caractères d'index utilisés pour organiser les boîtes utilisateur enregistrées. En sélectionnant les caractères d'index appropriés (par exemple, "TUV" pour une boîte intitulée "Tokyo office"), la boîte peut être aisément retrouvée. Appuyer sur [Index] et sélectionner ensuite les caractères d'index appropriés parmi ceux qui s'affichent. Opération de boîte de base (2 enregistrer des boîtes utilisateur) 2-22 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2.5 % Type : sélectionner si la boîte à enregistrer doit être une boîte publique, privée ou de groupe. [Privé] apparaît à côté de "Type" si vous vous êtes connecté alors que des réglages d'authentification ont été appliqués. [Groupe] apparaît à côté de "Type" si vous vous êtes connecté alors que des réglages de compte département ont été appliqués. % Délai suppression auto document : spécifier la durée de conservation du document enregistré dans la boîte avant sa suppression automatique. % Récept confid. : spécifier si des fax confidentiels peuvent être reçus ou non. En cas de réception d'un fax confidentiel, un mot de passe est également spécifié. % Lors de l'enregistrement d'une boîte utilisateur, les paramètres doivent être spécifiés pour le nom de boîte. Assurez-vous que ces paramètres soient bien spécifiés. Référence - Des boîtes utilisateur privées peuvent être créées et utilisées par des utilisateurs enregistrés avec authentification utilisateur. En créant des boîtes utilisateur pour utilisateurs authentifiés, le contenu des boîtes ne peut pas être consulté ou utilisé par d'autres utilisateurs. Par exemple, si l'utilisateur authentifié A est connecté, seules les boîtes enregistrées pour A apparaissent à l'écran. Comme les boîtes enregistrées pour un utilisateur authentifié B n'apparaissent pas, elles ne peuvent pas être utilisées. - Nous recommandons d'enregistrer les documents hautement confidentiels dans des boîtes utilisateur privées. Des boîtes de groupe peuvent être créées et utilisées par des comptes (groupes) enregistrés avec Compte Département. Comme pour les boîtes utilisateur privées, en créant des boîtes de groupe pour chaque compte, les membres d'autres comptes ne pourront pas consulter ni utiliser le contenu des boîtes. Nous recommandons d'enregistrer les données à partager au sein d'un groupe dans des boîtes de groupe. Boîte 1 Boîte 2 Boîte 3 Boîte 4 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2-23 2.6 Opération de boîte de base (enregistrer des données dans une boîte utilisateur) 2 2.6 Opération de boîte de base (enregistrer des données dans une boîte utilisateur) Les procédures suivantes décrivent comment enregistrer des données dans des boîtes utilisateur. Les données peuvent être enregistrées dans des boîtes en mode Copie, Fax/Numérisation, Boîte et Impression. Enregistrer des données dans une boîte utilisateur en mode Copie 1 Appuyez sur [Enr. ds Bte Util]. Opération de boîte de base (enregistrer des données 2 dans une boîte utilisateur) 2-24 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2.6 2 Sélectionnez la boîte où le document doit être enregistré. % Il est aussi possible de spécifier la boîte utilisateur en appuyant sur [Défin. N° Boîte Util] et en tapant le numéro de la boîte. % Pour rechercher un nom de boîte utilisateur, appuyer sur [Cherch. Boîte]. 3 Contrôler le nom du document. % Le nom de document automatiquement spécifié par défaut apparaît. % Pour changer le nom du document, appuyer sur [Nom Document] et taper le nom sur le clavier qui s'est affiché sur l'écran tactile. 1 2 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2-25 2.6 Opération de boîte de base (enregistrer des données dans une boîte utilisateur) 2 4 Charger le document à enregistrer. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. % Lors de l'enregistrement d'un document dans une boîte utilisateur avec une fonction du mode Copie, régler "Impress. par page" sur "Oui" pour imprimer le document et l'enregistrer simultanément. Opération de boîte de base (enregistrer des données 2 dans une boîte utilisateur) 2-26 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2.6 Enregistrer des données dans une boîte utilisateur en mode Fax/ Numérisation 1 Appuyer sur [Boîte]. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2-27 2.6 Opération de boîte de base (enregistrer des données dans une boîte utilisateur) 2 2 Sélectionner la boîte où le document doit être enregistré. % Il est aussi possible de spécifier la boîte utilisateur en appuyant sur [Défin. N° Boîte Util] et en tapant le numéro de la boîte. % Pour rechercher un nom de boîte utilisateur, appuyer sur [Cherch. Boîte]. 3 Contrôler le nom du document. % Le nom de document automatiquement spécifié par défaut apparaît. % Pour changer le nom du document, appuyer sur [Nom Document] et taper le nom sur le clavier qui s'est affiché sur l'écran tactile. 1 2 Opération de boîte de base (enregistrer des données 2 dans une boîte utilisateur) 2-28 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2.6 4 Charger le document à enregistrer. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. % Lors de l'enregistrement d'un document dans une boîte utilisateur avec une fonction du mode Fax/Numérisation, le fait de spécifier une autre destination permet d'envoyer le document en même qu'il est enregistré. dPour info Une boîte utilisateur enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses ou enregistrées en tant que destination de groupe est appelée "Destination Boîte utilisateur". Les données peuvent aussi être enregistrées dans une boîte utilisateur en indiquant une destination boîte utilisateur comme destinataire du fax ou des données numérisées. Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2-29 2.6 Opération de boîte de base (enregistrer des données dans une boîte utilisateur) 2 Enregistrer des données dans une boîte utilisateur en mode Boîte 1 Sélectionner la boîte où le document doit être enregistré. 2 Appuyer sur [Enreg. doc.]. % Il est aussi possible de spécifier la boîte utilisateur en appuyant sur [Défin. N° Boîte Util] et en tapant le numéro de la boîte. % Pour rechercher un nom de boîte utilisateur, appuyer sur [Cherch. Boîte]. % Après avoir appuyé sur [Enreg. doc.], il est possible de sélectionner une boîte pour y enregistrer un document. % Si nécessaire, vous pouvez directement enregistrer un document archivé dans une mémoire externe, un téléphone mobile ou un agenda électronique depuis une boîte utilisateur. % Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions liées à l'utilisation d'une mémoire externe, voir page 2-38 de ce guide. % Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation d'un document dans un téléphone mobile ou un agenda électronique, voir page 2-46 de ce guide. Opération de boîte de base (enregistrer des données 2 dans une boîte utilisateur) 2-30 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2.6 3 Contrôler le nom du document. % Le nom de document automatiquement spécifié par défaut apparaît. % Pour changer le nom du document, appuyer sur [Nom Document] et taper le nom sur le clavier qui s'est affiché sur l'écran tactile. % Pour spécifier des paramètres tels que la qualité de l'image et l'orientation du document, appuyer sur [Param. Numéris.] ou sur [Réglages Original]. Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 6 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. 4 Charger le document à enregistrer. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2-31 2.6 Opération de boîte de base (enregistrer des données dans une boîte utilisateur) 2 % L'opération peut aussi être lancée en appuyant sur [Départ]. dPour info Les données d'impression transférées via le pilote d'imprimante peuvent être enregistrées dans des boîtes utilisateur. Pour de plus amples détails sur l'enregistrement de données dans des boîtes avec les fonction d'imprimante, voir page 4-6 de ce guide. 2 Opération de boîte de base (utiliser des documents enregistrés) 2-32 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2.7 2.7 Opération de boîte de base (utiliser des documents enregistrés) Les procédures suivantes décrivent comment imprimer et envoyer des données enregistrées dans des boîtes utilisateur. Mode Boîte Utilisateur Les données enregistrées dans une boîte peuvent être imprimées ou envoyées à loisir. Ce qui s'avère utile dans les cas suivants. - Pour réimprimer des documents précédemment imprimés : les documents peuvent rapidement être imprimés sans recourir à un ordinateur ni à une application. - Pour sauvegarder des documents papier sous forme de données à gérer : de grandes quantité de documents papier peuvent être enregistrées sous forme de données et stockées dans un format compact, ce qui permet de réduire l'espace de bureau nécessaire. - Pour transmettre et partager efficacement des documents : les documents peuvent aisément être transmis sur un réseau sans recourir à un ordinateur. - Pour imprimer des documents figurant sur une mémoire externe : les documents enregistrés dans une mémoire externe peuvent être imprimés en la branchant directement sur la machine sans passer par un ordinateur. La connexion sans fil vous aussi permet d'envoyer des données vers un téléphone mobile ou un agenda électronique. dPour info Vous pouvez archiver ou modifier les données sauvegardées dans une boîte. Si nécessaire, il est possible de déplacer les données sauvegardées ou de supprimer une page d'un document. Les opérations liées aux données sauvegardées dans des boîtes peuvent aussi être effectuées avec Web Connection à partir d'un navigateur Web sur un ordinateur. Web Connection vous permet de rechercher les données dans des boîtes ou d'imprimer ou d'envoyer des données sans quitter votre bureau. L'importation des données depuis une boîte vers l'ordinateur est facilitée. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-16 de ce guide. Consulter également le chapitre 9 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. Boîte ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2-33 2.7 Opération de boîte de base (utiliser des documents enregistrés) 2 Imprimer des documents enregistrés 1 Sélectionner la boîte utilisateur contenant le document à imprimer et appuyer ensuite sur [Utilis/Archiv]. % Si un mot de passe a été spécifié pour la boîte, taper le mot de passe et appuyer ensuite sur [Valider]. % Il est possible de connecter une mémoire externe pour y envoyer des données archivées en mémoire. La connexion sans fil vous permet aussi d'envoyer des données vers un téléphone mobile ou un agenda électronique. % Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions liées à l'utilisation d'une mémoire externe, voir page 2-38 de ce guide. % Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation d'un document dans un téléphone mobile ou un agenda électronique, voir page 2-46 de ce guide. 1 2 1 2 2 Opération de boîte de base (utiliser des documents enregistrés) 2-34 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2.7 2 Sélectionner le document à imprimer et appuyer sur [Imprimer]. % Depuis l'écran Imprimer, il est possible de spécifier des réglages de Finition et d'autres tels que le nombre de copies. % Si plusieurs éléments de données sont sélectionnés, [Combinaison] est activé et il est possible d'imprimer simultanément plusieurs éléments de données enregistrés. Jusqu'à 10 données peuvent être imprimées simultanément. Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 7 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. % Appuyer sur [Aperçu] pour contrôler l'aperçu. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. % L'opération peut aussi être lancée en appuyant sur [Départ]. 1 2 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2-35 2.7 Opération de boîte de base (utiliser des documents enregistrés) 2 Envoyer des documents enregistrés 1 Sélectionner la boîte utilisateur contenant le document à envoyer et appuyer ensuite sur [Utilis/Archiv]. % Si un mot de passe a été spécifié pour la boîte, taper le mot de passe et appuyer ensuite sur [Valider]. 1 2 1 2 2 Opération de boîte de base (utiliser des documents enregistrés) 2-36 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2.7 2 Appuyer sur [Envoyer], sélectionner le document à envoyer et appuyer ensuite sur [Envoyer]. % Si plusieurs éléments de données sont sélectionnés, [Lier EMI] est activé et il est possible d'imprimer simultanément plusieurs éléments de données enregistrés. Jusqu'à 10 données peuvent être envoyées simultanément. Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 7 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. 3 Sélectionnez la destination. % Si des destinations sont déjà enregistrées, il est possible de sélectionner une destination enregistrée. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de destinations, consultez les page 6-3 de ce guide. % Pour taper directement l'adresse de destination, appuyer sur [Saisie dir.], sélectionnez la méthode d'émission et taper ensuite l'adresse de destination. % Vous pouvez envoyer un document à plusieurs destinataires en même temps. Pour plus de détails sur l'envoi d'un document à plusieurs destinations, voir page 6-22 de ce guide. % Si nécessaire, appuyer sur [Réglages de communication] et spécifier les paramètres souhaités. Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 7 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. % Appuyer sur [Aperçu] pour contrôler l'aperçu. 2 3 1 1 2 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2-37 2.7 Opération de boîte de base (utiliser des documents enregistrés) 2 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ]. % L'opération peut aussi être lancée en appuyant sur [Départ]. 2 Utiliser une mémoire externe 2-38 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2.8 2.8 Utiliser une mémoire externe Les procédures suivantes décrivent comment utiliser la mémoire externe. Un document peut être imprimé à partir de la mémoire externe ou enregistré dans la mémoire externe sans recourir à un ordinateur. En outre, un document archivé dans une boîte utilisateur peut être enregistré dans la mémoire externe, ou un document dans la mémoire externe peut être enregistré dans une boîte utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 2 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. Référence - Connecter le périphérique de mémoire externe à la prise USB. dPour info Lors de l'enregistrement d'un document stocké en mémoire externe dans une Boîte Utilisateur ou de l'enregistrement dans la mémoire externe d'un document numérisé, configurer les réglages à l'avance. Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 8 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. Imprimer un document en mémoire externe 1 Connecter la mémoire externe à cette machine et appuyer sur [Imprimer un document à partir de la mémoire externe.]. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2-39 2.8 Utiliser une mémoire externe 2 % Si une mémoire externe est déjà connectée, appuyer sur [Utilis/Archiv] sur l'écran de la fonction Boîte Utilis. Pour plus de détails sur [Utilis/Archiv], consulter le chapitre 7 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. 2 Sélectionnez un document et appuyez sur [Imprimer]. 1 3 2 1 2 2 Utiliser une mémoire externe 2-40 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2.8 3 Vérifier Réglages Impression % Les réglages d'impression peuvent être modifiés lors de l'impression d'un document. Pour plus de détails sur la manière de configurer les réglages d'impression lors de l'impression d'un document, consulter le chapitre 7 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. 4 Appuyez sur [Départ]. % Vous pouvez aussi appuyer sur [Départ] pour démarrer une tâche. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2-41 2.8 Utiliser une mémoire externe 2 Enregistrer un document numérisé en mémoire externe 1 Connecter la mémoire externe à cette machine et appuyer sur [Enregistrer un document dans la mémoire externe.]. % Si une mémoire externe est déjà connectée, appuyer sur [Enreg. doc.] sur l'écran de la fonction Boîte Utilis. 3 2 1 2 Utiliser une mémoire externe 2-42 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2.8 2 Contrôler le nom du document. % Le nom d'un document peut être également modifié au moment de l'enregistrer. Pour plus de détails sur la manière de configurer les réglages de numérisation ou d'original lors de l'enregistrement d'un document, consulter le chapitre 6 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. 3 Positionner l'original et appuyer sur [Départ]. % Vous pouvez aussi appuyer sur [Départ] pour démarrer une tâche. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2-43 2.8 Utiliser une mémoire externe 2 Enregistrer un document stocké en mémoire externe dans une Boîte utilisateur 1 Connecter la mémoire externe à cette machine et appuyer sur [Enregistrer un document contenu dans la mémoire externe vers une Boîte.]. % Si une mémoire externe est déjà connectée, appuyer sur [Utilis/Archiv] sur l'écran de la fonction Boîte Utilis. Pour plus de détails sur [Utilis/Archiv], consulter le chapitre 7 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. 3 2 1 2 Utiliser une mémoire externe 2-44 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2.8 2 Sélectionner un document et appuyer sur [Enr. ds Bte Util]. 3 Sélectionner une boîte utilisateur. % Le nom d'un document peut être également modifié au moment de l'enregistrer. 4 Appuyez sur [Départ]. % Vous pouvez aussi appuyer sur [Départ] pour démarrer une tâche. 3 2 1 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2-45 2.8 Utiliser une mémoire externe 2 dPour info Si nécessaire, il est possible d'enregistrer en mémoire externe un document dans une boîte utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 7 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. Utiliser un document dans un téléphone mobile ou un agenda électronique 2 compatible Bluetooth 2-46 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2.9 2.9 Utiliser un document dans un téléphone mobile ou un agenda électronique compatible Bluetooth Les procédures suivantes décrivent comment utiliser un document enregistré dans un téléphone mobile ou un agenda électronique sur cette machine. Un document dans un téléphone mobile ou un agenda électronique peut être imprimé ou enregistré dans une Boîte utilisateur. Référence - Pour utiliser un document archivé dans un téléphone ou un agenda électronique sur cette machine, le kit d'interface locale EK-605 en option est nécessaire. Dans ce cas, configurer à l'avance le réglage réseau. Pour plus de détails, contacter le S.A.V. - Cette fonction risque de ne pas être disponible sur cette machine en fonction du modèle de téléphone mobile ou d'agenda électronique utilisé ou des formats de fichier pris en charge. Enregistrer un document stocké sur un terminal mobile dans une Boîte utilisateur 1 Sélectionner [Mobile/PDA] et appuyer sur [Utilis/Archiv]. 2 1 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2-47 2.9 Utiliser un document dans un téléphone mobile ou un agenda électronique compatible Bluetooth 2 2 Appuyez sur [Enr. ds Bte Util]. 3 Sélectionner une boîte utilisateur. 2 1 Utiliser un document dans un téléphone mobile ou un agenda électronique 2 compatible Bluetooth 2-48 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2.9 4 Vérifier le code PIN et utiliser le téléphone mobile ou l'agenda électronique. dPour info Pour recevoir un fichier depuis un téléphone mobile ou un agenda électronique, sélectionner cette machine, spécifier le fichier et entrer le code PIN dans le téléphone mobile ou l'agenda électronique après l'affichage du code PIN sur le panneau de commande. Les actions à effectuer sur le téléphone mobile ou l'agenda électronique varient en fonction du modèle. Pour plus de détails sur les actions à effectuer sur téléphone mobile ou agenda électronique, consulter la notice du téléphone mobile ou de l'agenda électronique. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2-49 2.9 Utiliser un document dans un téléphone mobile ou un agenda électronique compatible Bluetooth 2 Imprimer un document dans un terminal mobile 1 Sélectionner [Mobile/PDA] et appuyer sur [Utilis/Archiv]. 2 Appuyer sur [Impression] 2 1 Utiliser un document dans un téléphone mobile ou un agenda électronique 2 compatible Bluetooth 2-50 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 2.9 3 Vérifier le code PIN et utiliser le téléphone mobile ou l'agenda électronique. % Les réglages d'impression peuvent être modifiés dans Régl.Utilisateur lors de l'impression d'un document. Pour plus de détails sur la manière de configurer les réglages d'impression lors de l'impression d'un document, consulter le chapitre 13 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'impression d'un document dans un terminal mobile, consulter le chapitre 8 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte] ou le chapitre 12 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. dPour info Pour recevoir un fichier depuis un téléphone mobile ou un agenda électronique, sélectionner cette machine, spécifier le fichier et entrer le code PIN dans le téléphone mobile ou l'agenda électronique après l'affichage du code PIN sur le panneau de commande. Les actions à effectuer sur le téléphone mobile ou l'agenda électronique varient en fonction du modèle. Pour plus de détails sur les actions à effectuer sur téléphone mobile ou agenda électronique, consulter la notice du téléphone mobile ou de l'agenda électronique. 3 Opérations de copie utiles ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3-3 3.1 Spécifier les réglages de base pour la copie rapide 3 3 Opérations de copie utiles 3.1 Spécifier les réglages de base pour la copie rapide L'écran peut être personnalisé, via l'écran Copie Rapide pour faciliter l'accès aux fonctions de copie. Écran Copie rapide Les réglages de copie de base sont disponibles sur un seul écran. Appuyer sur [ ] sur l'écran pour afficher d'autres réglages tels que d'autres réglages Couleur. 3 Spécifier les réglages de base pour la copie rapide 3-4 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3.1 dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 6 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. N° Élément Description 1 Réglages Couleur Sélectionnez la couleur d'impression. 2 Réglages Papier Sélectionner le type et le format du papier à copier. 3 Réglages Zoom Le facteur zoom permet de réaliser une copie sur un format différent de celui de l'original ou encore d'agrandir ou de réduire le format de l'image copiée. 4 Réglages Recto/Recto-vers Sélectionner si le document et la copie sont recto ou recto-verso. 5 Réglages de combinaison Sélectionner le réglage pour combiner des pages de document dans des copies. 6 Touche [Numér. Séparée] Sélectionner si un document numérisé en différents lots doit être traité comme une seule et même tâche de copie. 7 Réglages Finition Sélectionner les paramètres de tri, de groupage, de décalage, d'agrafage ou de perforation. 8 Onglet De base Permet d'afficher l'écran de base. 9 Onglet Réglage Original Appuyer ici pour afficher l'écran Réglage Original. 10 Onglet Qualité/Densité Appuyer ici pour afficher l'écran Qualité/Densité. 11 Onglet Applications Permet d'afficher l'écran Application. 8 1 2 8 7 6 3 4 5 9 10 11 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3-5 3.2 Réduction de la consommation de papier pendant la copie 3 3.2 Réduction de la consommation de papier pendant la copie Les copies recto-verso (impression sur les deux faces du papier) et les copies combinées (réduction de plusieurs pages et impression de ces dernières sur une seule feuille de papier) sont pratiques pour réduire la consommation de papier et l'espace de bureau nécessaire pour le stockage. Effectuer des copies recto-verso En cas d'impression d'un grand nombre de documents recto, imprimer sur les deux faces du papier pour réduire par 2 la consommation de papier. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. 1 2 3 Réduction de la consommation de papier pendant la copie 3-6 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3.2 Copies combinées Sélectionner "2 en 1", "4 en 1" ou "8 en 1", en fonction du nombre de pages qu'il est possible d'imprimer sur une seule page. Combinez ces réglages avec la copie recto-verso pour réduire encore plus la consommation de papier. 1 2 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3-7 3.2 Réduction de la consommation de papier pendant la copie 3 dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. Si "4 en 1" ou "8 en 1" est sélectionné, il est possible de choisir la mise en page. 1 2 3 Copier un grande nombre de pages de documents à la fois 3-8 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3.3 3.3 Copier un grande nombre de pages de documents à la fois Si le nombre de pages de document à copier est trop important pour être inséré dans le chargeur ADF, le document peut être divisé en lots qui sont numérisés séparément. Une fois que toutes les pages du document sont numérisées, les copies peuvent être imprimées ensemble. C'est pratique pour imprimer plusieurs copies d'un document contenant un grand nombre de pages. Numérisation séparée Répéter cette opération jusqu'à ce que toutes les pages du document soient numérisées. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3-9 3.3 Copier un grande nombre de pages de documents à la fois 3 Référence - Les documents qui ne peuvent pas être chargés dans le chargeur ADF seront placés sur la vitre d'exposition. Les documents peuvent aussi être numérisés en lots séparés à partir de la vitre d'exposition. - Pour modifier les réglages, appuyer sur [Modifier Paramet.]. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. 3 Production d'un livret à partir de copies 3-10 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3.4 3.4 Production d'un livret à partir de copies Les copies peuvent être reliées au centre pour obtenir une finition similaire à des magazines et des brochures. L'utilisation de la fonction "Livret" ou "Catalogue Original" dépend de la mise en page du document original. Livret Pour un document contenant des pages individuelles, sélectionner la fonction "Livret". L'ordre des pages du document numérisé est automatiquement configuré et des copies recto-verso sont imprimées. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3-11 3.4 Production d'un livret à partir de copies 3 dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. Catalogue Original Pour une brochure dont les agrafes centrales ont été retirées, sélectionner la fonction "Catalogue Original". Le document sera copié et relié au centre pour créer des copies identiques à la brochure d'origine. 1 2 3 Production d'un livret à partir de copies 3-12 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3.4 dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3-13 3.5 Effacer les ombres de document sur les copies 3 3.5 Effacer les ombres de document sur les copies Effacement bords Il est possible de supprimer de la copie des zones indésirables à la périphérie du document, comme par exemple, le bandeau d'informations en tête des télécopies ou la trace des perforations pour classeur. 3 Effacer les ombres de document sur les copies 3-14 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3.5 Référence - Permet de supprimer la même largeur tout autour du document ou des bandes de largeur différente sur chaque bord du document. - La largeur du cadre à effacer peut se régler entre 1/16 pouce et 2 pouces (0,1 et 50,0 mm). dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. 1 2 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3-15 3.6 Imprimer des copies agrandies/réduites sur du papier de format différent 3 3.6 Imprimer des copies agrandies/réduites sur du papier de format différent Zoom Auto Des copies peuvent être réalisées avec le taux de zoom automatiquement sélectionné en fonction du format du document chargé et du format papier spécifié. 3 Imprimer des copies agrandies/réduites sur du papier de format différent 3-16 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3.6 Référence - Si [Auto] est sélectionné comme paramètre de Zoom, le paramètre Papier [Auto] ne peut pas être sélectionné. Sélectionner le magasin papier contenant le format de papier désiré. Référence - En cas de copie sur un papier de format supérieur au document, charger le document selon la même orientation que le papier. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. 1 2 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3-17 3.7 Copier des livres ouverts sur des feuilles de papier séparées 3 3.7 Copier des livres ouverts sur des feuilles de papier séparées Copie livre Les pages en vis à vis, d'un livre ouvert ou d'une brochure par exemple, peuvent être copiées sur des pages indépendantes. Cette fonction vous permet de copier avec le chargeur ADF ouvert en plaçant l'original sur la vitre d'exposition. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez placer une image originale au centre de la page. 3 Copier des livres ouverts sur des feuilles de papier séparées 3-18 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3.7 1 2 1 2 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3-19 3.7 Copier des livres ouverts sur des feuilles de papier séparées 3 Référence - Les paramètres de Numérisation Livre suivantes sont disponibles. Les paramètres peuvent être spécifiés pour copier les pages de couverture et de dos d'un livre. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. Paramètre Description Double page Les deux pages d'un livre ouvert sont imprimées sur la même page. Séparation Des copies distinctes de chacune des pages d'un livre ouvert sont imprimées dans l'ordre des pages du document. Couvert. Face La couverture et les copies distinctes de chacune des pages d'un livre ouvert sont imprimées dans l'ordre des pages du document. Couv. Face et Dos La couverture, les copies distinctes de chacune des pages d'un livre ouvert et le dos sont imprimées dans l'ordre des pages du document. 3 Ajout de pages de garde/couverture en cours de copie 3-20 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3.8 3.8 Ajout de pages de garde/couverture en cours de copie Paramètres En cas de copie sur du papier pour pages de garde différent du papier du corps de texte du document, au lieu de copier les pages de garde et de document séparément, le document entier peut être copié simultanément en utilisant les différents types de papier. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3-21 3.8 Ajout de pages de garde/couverture en cours de copie 3 Référence - Utiliser du papier de même format pour les pages de garde et pour le corps principal du document et chargez-les selon la même orientation dans les magasins papier. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. 1 2 Sélectionner le magasin papier contenant le papier à utiliser pour imprimer les pages de garde. 1 2 3 Relier avec des agrafes et perforer des trous dans les copies 3-22 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3.9 3.9 Relier avec des agrafes et perforer des trous dans les copies Agrafer/Perforer Les copies de documents de plusieurs pages peuvent être copiées et agrafées ensemble. Il est possible de spécifier des réglages pour agrafer le document en coin ou en deux points. Les réglages d'agrafage sont uniquement disponibles si le module de finition en option est installé. Il est possible de perforer les copies pour archivage. Les paramètres de Perforation ne sont disponibles que si l'unité de finition en option et le kit de perforation sont installés. Perfo. [2 trous] Agraf. [En coin] Agraf. [2 positions] ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3-23 3.9 Relier avec des agrafes et perforer des trous dans les copies 3 Référence - Si le bouton Programme Finition est utilisé, vous pouvez configurer en une fois les fonctions de finition enregistrées. - Le paramètre Agrafage permet d'utiliser les papiers suivants. Grammage du papier : Quand l'unité de finition FS-526 est installée Papier ordinaire (17 lb à 23-15/16 lb (64 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) Papier épais 1/1+/2 (24-3/16 lb à 55-5/8 lb (91g/m2 à 209 g/m2)) (Peut aussi être utilisé comme page de couverture) Quand l'unité de finition FS-527 est installée Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) Papier épais 1/1+/2/3/4 (24-3/16 lb à 55-5/8 lb (91g/m2 à 209 g/m2)) Formats papier : Quand l'unité de finition FS-526 est installée 11e17 w à 5-1/2e8-1/2 w/v, 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w/v, A3 w à A5 v, foolscap*1, 8K w, 16K w/v Quand l'unité de finition FS-527 est installée 11e17 w à 8-1/2e11 w/v, A3 w à A5 v 2 1 En cas de sélection du paramètre Perfo., spécifier la position de perforation des trous. 2 1 3 Relier avec des agrafes et perforer des trous dans les copies 3-24 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3.9 - Le papier suivant peut être utilisé avec les paramètres de perforation. Grammage du papier : Quand l'unité de finition FS-526 et le kit de perforation PK-516 sont installés 15-15/16 lb à 79-13/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 300 g/m2) Quand l'unité de finition FS-526 et l'unité de pliage en Z ZU-606 sont installées 17 lb à 23-15/16 lb (64 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) Quand l'unité de finition FS-527 et le kit de perforation PK-517 sont installés 15-15/16 lb à 68-1/8 lb (60g/m2 à 256 g/m2) Formats papier : Quand l'unité de finition FS-526 et le kit de perforation PK-516 sont installés Réglage Perforation "4 trous" : 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 v, 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 v, A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 8K w, 16K v Quand l'unité de finition FS-526 et l'unité de pliage en Z ZU-606 sont installés Réglage Perforation "4 trous" : A3 w à A4 v, 8K w, 16K v Quand l'unité de finition FS-527 et le kit de perforation PK-517 sont installés Réglage Perforation "4 trous" : A3 w à A4 v, B5 v Le nombre de trous perforés diffère suivant le pays (la région) où l'unité est installée. Pour plus de détails, contacter le S.A.V. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3-25 3.10 Copier sur des enveloppes 3 3.10 Copier sur des enveloppes Introducteur manuel Utiliser l'introducteur manuel pour réaliser des copies sur des enveloppes. En cas de copie sur des enveloppes, l'orientation du document et du papier est extrêmement importante. 1 Positionner le document et le papier. % Charger le papier avec la face à imprimée orientée vers le bas. Original Enveloppe Face à imprimer 3 Copier sur des enveloppes 3-26 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3.10 2 Spécifier le type et le format de papier. % En cas de chargement d'enveloppes, sélectionner le réglage [Enveloppe] pour Type de papier. Sélectionner un format coïncidant avec le format de l'enveloppe chargée. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 et le chapitre 8 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3-27 3.11 Rappel aisé de fonctions fréquemment utilisées 3 3.11 Rappel aisé de fonctions fréquemment utilisées Enregistrer/rappeler des programmes Les fonctions fréquemment utilisées peuvent être enregistrées comme programme de copie. Le programme de copie enregistré peut être facilement rappelé et utilisé. Enregistrer un programme Commencer par spécifier les fonctions à enregistrer. 1 2 3 Rappel aisé de fonctions fréquemment utilisées 3-28 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3.11 Référence - Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 30 programmes copie maximum. Rappeler un programme 2 1 1 2 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3-29 3.11 Rappel aisé de fonctions fréquemment utilisées 3 dPour info Pour plus de détails, voir le chapitre 4 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. Touches de raccourci/Réglages rapides Les fonctions fréquemment utilisées peuvent être créées en tant que touches de raccourci ou touche de réglage facile sur l'écran Fonctions de base. Jusqu'à deux touches de raccourci peuvent être créées. Vous pouvez créer jusqu'à quatre touches de réglage facile. 3 Rappel aisé de fonctions fréquemment utilisées 3-30 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3.11 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3-31 3.11 Rappel aisé de fonctions fréquemment utilisées 3 Référence - Lorsque le contrôleur image IC-412 v1.1 en option est installé, seule une touche de raccourci peut être activée. - Si deux touches de raccourci sont configurées, [Language Selection] (Sélection Langue) ne s'affiche pas. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 6 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. 1 3 2 Pour touche de raccourci La touche de raccourci est créée. La touche de réglage facile est créée. 3 Vérification des copies 3-32 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3.12 3.12 Vérification des copies Epreuve de copie Avant d'imprimer un grand nombre de copies, une épreuve ou une image d'impression peut être vérifiée comme image d'aperçu. Ce qui permet de corriger les erreurs de copie avant d'imprimer un grand nombre de copies. Sélectionnez les paramètres de copie désirés. Sélectionner le mode de contrôle. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3-33 3.12 Vérification des copies 3 Pour imprimer et contrôler Une épreuve est imprimée. Vérifiez l'épreuve. 3 Vérification des copies 3-34 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3.12 Référence - Un document peut être imprimé pour des besoins de confirmation lorsque vous spécifier des copies multiples. - Pour modifier les paramètres sélectionnés après avoir vérifié l'épreuve, appuyer sur [Modifier Paramet.] et modifier les paramètres. - Si l'original a été introduit dans le chargeur ADF, l'impression de l'épreuve commence sans que l'écran n'apparaisse pour confirmer que la numérisation de l'original est terminée. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3-35 3.12 Vérification des copies 3 Pour contrôler avec une image d'aperçu Référence - Pour modifier les paramètres sélectionnés après avoir vérifié l'image d'aperçu, appuyer sur [Voir Pages] et modifier les paramètres. dPour info Pour plus de détails, voir le chapitre 4 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. 3 Contrôler le nombre d'impressions 3-36 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3.13 3.13 Contrôler le nombre d'impressions Compteur Il est possible de contrôler pour diverses fonctions le nombre total de pages imprimées ainsi que le nombre détaillé d'impressions, comme le nombre des impressions en noir et blanc. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3-37 3.13 Contrôler le nombre d'impressions 3 Total : affiche le nombre total de pages copiées avec le paramètre "Noir", le paramètre "Couleurs", le paramètre "1 couleur", le paramètre "2 coul." et le total pour tous les paramètres de couleur. Gd format : affiche le nombre total de pages copiées sur du papier grand format avec le paramètre "Noir", le paramètre "Couleurs", le paramètre "1 couleur", le paramètre "2 coul." et le nombre total pour tous les paramètres de couleur. Total Couleur (Copie + Impress) : affiche le nombre total de pages copiées et imprimées avec le paramètre "Noir", le paramètre "Couleurs" et le paramètre "2 coul.". Référence - Pour imprimer la liste, appuyer sur [Impression]. - Pour voir la quantité de toner utilisé, appuyer sur [Taux de couverture]. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 8 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. Les informations suivantes peuvent être consultées sur l'onglet Copie. 3 Réduire la consommation d'électricité 3-38 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3.14 3.14 Réduire la consommation d'électricité Cette machine est équipée de deux modes d'économie d'énergie destinés à économiser de l'électricité. De plus, le programmateur hebdomadaire permet de limiter l'utilisation de la machine en cas de programmation de jours et de périodes de non utilisation de la machine. Les réglages de ces fonctions peuvent être spécifiés à partir du mode Administrateur. Mode Éco. Énergie et Veille Si aucune opération n'est effectuée sur la machine à l'issue du délai spécifié, la machine passe automatiquement dans un mode où elle consomme moins d'électricité. Si aucune opération n'est effectuée sur la machine pendant 15 minutes, l'écran tactile s'éteint et la machine passe en mode Éco. Si aucune opération n'a lieu pendant 30 minutes, la machine passe en mode veille, ce qui permet une économie plus importante d'électricité (réglage usine). dPour info Pour plus de détails, voir le chapitre 4 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. Activation manuelle d'un mode d'économie d'énergie Au lieu d'attendre la durée spécifiée, la machine peut être réglée pour passer dans un mode d'économie d'énergie afin de faire des économies d'énergie. Par défaut, la machine est réglée en usine pour passer en mode Éco. Énergie après une pression sur la touche [Eco. Énergie]. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3-39 3.14 Réduire la consommation d'électricité 3 Programmateur hebdomadaire Il est possible de paramétrer la machine pour la faire passer automatiquement en mode Veille selon un planning défini par l'administrateur afin de limiter l'utilisation de la machine. Vous pouvez spécifier l'heure de mise sous et hors tension de la machine séparément pour chaque jour de la semaine et même spécifier les jours de fonctionnement par date. dPour info Pour plus de détails, voir le chapitre 7 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. Copier pendant que le programmateur hebdomadaire est activé Les limitations du programmateur hebdomadaire peuvent être temporairement annulées pour pouvoir utiliser la machine. Commencer par entrer les heures de fonctionnement afin d'annuler les limitations. Un mot de passe pour les heures de non-fonctionnement doit être spécifié en mode Administrateur. 1 2 3 Réduire la consommation d'électricité 3-40 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 3.14 1 2 4 Opérations d'impression utiles ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 4-3 4.1 Sélection du papier 4 4 Opérations d'impression utiles 4.1 Sélection du papier Orientation original Sélectionner "Portrait" ou "Paysage" comme orientation d'impression sur le papier. Pilotes Windows PCL/PS/XPS : onglet de base Pilote Macintosh OS X : Attributs de page dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 et le chapitre 10 du [Guide de l'opérateur Opérations Impression]. Format Original et Format Papier Sélectionner le format papier du document et le format du papier utilisé pour l'impression. Pilotes Windows PCL/PS/XPS : onglet de base Pilote Macintosh OS X : Attributs de page dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 ou le chapitre 10 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. Portrait Paysage Format orig. Format papier 4 Sélection du papier 4-4 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 4.1 Zoom Spécifier le taux d'agrandissement ou de réduction. L'original est automatiquement agrandi ou réduit au format qui est spécifié ici lorsque son format est différent du paramètre "Format original" et que "Zoom" est réglé sur "Auto". Pilotes Windows PCL/PS/XPS : onglet de base Pilote Macintosh OS X : Attributs de page Référence - Le pilote PCL/PS Windows dispose aussi de la fonction "Prise en charge Trait Fin" pour empêcher les traits fins de devenir flous en cas d'impression dans un format réduit. (onglet Autres) dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 ou le chapitre 10 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. Magasin (Type de papier) Sélectionner le magasin papier contenant le papier destiné à être imprimé. Si les magasins papier contiennent différents types de papier, le type de papier désiré peut être sélectionné en choisissant un autre magasin papier. Pilotes Windows PCL/PS/XPS : onglet de base Pilote Macintosh OS X : Magasin/Bac de sortie dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 ou le chapitre 10 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. Zoom- Zoom+ Original Bac ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 4-5 4.1 Sélection du papier 4 Copies et Tri/Décalage En cas d'impression de plusieurs copies, sélectionner la fonction "Tri" pour imprimer chaque copie en tant que jeu complet (1, 2, 3, ..., 1, 2, 3, ...). En outre, en cas de sélection de la fonction "Décalage", chaque copie est sortie décalée soit vers l'avant soit vers l'arrière. Pilotes Windows PCL/PS/XPS : onglet de base Pilote Macintosh OS X : Méthode Sortie Référence - La fonction "Décalage" est uniquement disponible avec les unités de finition autorisant le décalage des pages. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 ou le chapitre 10 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. Tri Décalage 4 Gestion et limitation de l'impression 4-6 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 4.2 4.2 Gestion et limitation de l'impression Impression sécurisée Un mot de passe peut être spécifié pour le document. Cette fonction s'avère utile pour imprimer des documents confidentiels puisque le document ne peut être récupéré qu'après la saisie du mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle de la machine. Pilotes Windows PCL/PS/XPS : onglet de base Pilote Macintosh OS X : Méthode Sortie dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 ou le chapitre 10 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur Le document peut être enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur spécifiée. Comme les données peuvent être imprimées à n'importe quel moment, cette option s'avère utile pour organiser les documents dans les boîtes utilisateur publiques ou privées en fonction du contenu des documents. Pilotes Windows PCL/PS/XPS : onglet de base Pilote Macintosh OS X : Méthode Sortie dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 ou le chapitre 10 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. Boîte Mot de passe Boîte ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 4-7 4.2 Gestion et limitation de l'impression 4 Impression épreuve Avant d'imprimer un grand nombre de copies, il est recommandé d'imprimer d'abord une épreuve afin de la contrôler. Ce qui permet d'éviter l'impression d'erreurs sur tous les documents. Pilotes Windows PCL/PS/XPS : onglet de base Pilote Macintosh OS X : Méthode Sortie dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 ou le chapitre 10 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. Identification Utilisateur/Suivi Compte Si des réglages d'authentification utilisateur ou de compte département ont été spécifiés sur la machine, l'enregistrement des informations d'utilisateur et de compte à l'aide du pilote d'imprimante permet à la machine de contrôler si les données de la tâche d'impression envoyée proviennent d'un utilisateur ou d'un compte enregistré. Pilotes Windows PCL/PS/XPS : onglet de base Pilote Macintosh OS X : Méthode Sortie dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 ou le chapitre 10 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. 5 jeux Un seul jeu est imprimé. Vérifier l'épreuve. Vérifier OK ID utilisateur ou nom de compte Vérification de l'utilisateur ou vérification OK ! du compte de l'utilisateur 4 Gestion et limitation de l'impression 4-8 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 4.2 ID & Imprimer Utilisateur avec un nom d'utilisateur et un mot de passe, puis impression des tâches d'impression enregistrées dans la boîte ID & Imprimer de cette machine, quand l'authentification utilisateur est activée. Comme l'impression s'effectue après exécution de l'authentification utilisateur via le panneau de contrôle de cette machine, cette fonction est utilisée pour imprimer des documents hautement confidentiels. Pilotes Windows PCL/PS/XPS : onglet de base Pilote Macintosh OS X : Méthode Sortie dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 ou le chapitre 10 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. Boîte OK ! Vérification utilisateur ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 4-9 4.3 Réduction de la consommation de papier pendant l'impression 4 4.3 Réduction de la consommation de papier pendant l'impression Combinaison L'impression N en 1 qui réduit plusieurs pages de document pour les imprimer ensemble sur une seule feuille de papier est utile pour économiser le nombre de pages imprimées. Pilotes Windows PCL/PS/XPS : onglet Disposition dPour info Pour plus de détails, voir le chapitre 9 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. Impression recto-verso/livret Les pages de document peuvent être imprimées sur les deux faces du papier ou sous la forme d'un livret (livre ouvert et relié au centre). Cette fonction est utile pour relier un document de plusieurs pages. Impression recto-verso Impression Livret Pilotes Windows PCL/PS/XPS : onglet Disposition Pilote Macintosh OS X : Disposition/Finition Référence - De même, l'utilisation de la fonction "Chapitre" s'avère pratique pour spécifier quelle page sera imprimée au recto d'une feuille de papier dans un document recto-verso ou comme livret. - La fonction "Sauter pages vierges" qui n'imprime pas les pages vierges en cas d'impression à partir du pilote Windows PCL/XPS s'avère pratique pour réduire la consommation de papier. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 ou le chapitre 10 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. 2 en 1 4 en 1 6 en 1 9 en 1 16 en 1 Reliure Gauche Reliure haute 4 Ajuster la position d'impression 4-10 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 4.4 4.4 Ajuster la position d'impression Sens de reliure et marge de reliure Spécifier la position de reliure pour relier des documents. Les pilotes Windows PCL/PS/XPS permettent aussi de régler la quantité de marge de page. Pilotes Windows PCL/PS/XPS : onglet Disposition Pilote Macintosh OS X : Disposition/Finition dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 ou le chapitre 10 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. Décalage d'image La page entière peut être décalée puis imprimée par exemple en cas de réglage des marges de gauche et de droite. Pilotes Windows PCL/PS/XPS : onglet Disposition Pilote Macintosh OS X : Disposition/Finition dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 ou le chapitre 10 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. La marge de reliure peut également être ajustée. Reliure Gauche Reliure haute Reliure Droite Décalage en haut Décalage en bas Décalage Décalage en bas Décalage à gauche Décalage à droite Décalage à droite Décalage à gauche en haut ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 4-11 4.5 Finition de documents 4 4.5 Finition de documents Agrafage et perforation Les documents imprimés peuvent être reliés à l'aide d'agrafes ou des trous peuvent y être perforés. Pilotes Windows PCL/PS/XPS : onglet Finition Pilote Macintosh OS X : Disposition/Finition Référence - Les réglages Agrafage ne sont disponibles que si l'unité de finition, en option, a été installée. - Pour utiliser les réglages de perforation, les unité de finition et kit de perforation en option ou l'unité de finition FS-526 et l'unité de pliage en Z ZU-606 sont requis. - En sélectionnant un bac de sortie, il est possible de spécifier la destination de sortie. - Sélectionner le réglage de la disposition du papier pour indiquer s'il faut privilégier le produit fini ou la rentabilité comme méthode de réglage de la position de reliure. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 ou le chapitre 10 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. Agrafage au centre et pliage Sélectionner s'il faut plier le document terminé en deux ou en trois, le plier en deux et l'agrafer, le plier en deux avec pli montagne d'un des moitiés. Pilotes Windows PCL/PS/XPS : onglet Finition Pilote Macintosh OS X : Disposition/Finition Référence - Les réglages Agrafage au centre et pliage et Pliage ne sont disponibles que si l'unité de finition et la piqueuse à cheval ont été installées. - Pour utiliser le "Pliage en 3", les unité de finition FS-526 et piqueuse à cheval SD-508 en option sont requises. - Le réglage "Pliage Z" est disponible si les unité de pliage en Z ZU-606 et unité de finition FS-526 en option ont été installées. Pour utiliser le réglage Pliage Z, régler le paramètre "Format papier" du logiciel d'application ou du pilote de l'imprimante sur la valeur de format papier indiquée au paramètre (Pliage Z (A3, B4, 11e17, 8K) /Pliage Z (8-1/2e14)) qui est sélectionné dans la liste déroulante. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 ou le chapitre 10 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. Perforer Agrafage Pliage en 2 Relier au centre Pliage en 3 Pliage Z 4 Ajouter du papier différent 4-12 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 4.6 4.6 Ajouter du papier différent Mode Couverture Les couvertures et les dos peuvent être imprimés sur du papier différent. Sélectionner si l'alimentation des couvertures s'effectue depuis un magasin papier ou depuis le plateau de l'unité d'insertion de feuilles PI-505. Pilotes Windows PCL/PS/XPS : onglet Mode Couverture Pilote Macintosh OS X : Mode Couverture/Intercalaire sur transparent dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 ou le chapitre 10 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. Intercalaire sur transparent Les intercalaires peuvent être éjectées entre des transparents de rétroprojection au moment de leur impression. Pilotes Windows PCL/PS/XPS : onglet Mode Couverture Pilote Macintosh OS X : Mode Couverture/Intercalaire sur transparent dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 ou le chapitre 10 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. Couvert. Face Couverture Dos ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 4-13 4.6 Ajouter du papier différent 4 Paramétrage par page Une méthode d'impression différente et un magasin papier différent peuvent être sélectionnés pour chaque page. C'est pratique pour changer de magasin de papier en cas d'impression d'un grand nombre de pages. Page 1 : imprimée recto avec du papier depuis le bac 1 Page 2 : imprimée recto avec du papier depuis le bac 2 Troisième feuille : insertion d'une page vierge depuis le bac 1 Pages 3 à 6 : imprimées recto-verso avec du papier depuis le bac 1 Pilotes Windows PCL/PS/XPS : onglet Mode Couverture Pilote Macintosh OS X : Paramétrage par page dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 ou le chapitre 10 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. Ajouter du 4 texte et des images lors de l'impression 4-14 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 4.7 4.7 Ajouter du texte et des images lors de l'impression Filigrane Le document peut être imprimé en surimprimant un filigrane (tampon de texte). Pilotes PCL/PS/XPS Windows : onglet Tampon/Composition dPour info Pour plus de détails, voir le chapitre 9 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. Surimpression Le document peut être imprimé en surimprimant des données surimprimées séparées. Pilotes PCL/PS/XPS Windows : onglet Tampon/Composition dPour info Pour plus de détails, voir le chapitre 9 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. Sécurité Copie Spécifier un motif spécial ou un mot de passe pour empêcher la copie. Il existe quatre fonctions de protection contre la copie : Protection Copie, Tampon Répétable, Pare-copie et Copie Prot. MdP. - Pour utiliser les fonctions "Pare-copie" et "Copie Prot. MdP", le kit sécurité SC-507 en option est nécessaire. Pilotes PCL/PS/XPS Windows : onglet Tampon/Composition Pilote Macintosh OS X : Tampon/Composition dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 ou le chapitre 10 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. Confidential New Product New Product Données de surimpression Données originales Imprimé Copié ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 4-15 4.7 Ajouter du texte et des images lors de l'impression 4 Date/Heure et Numéro de page Le document peut être imprimé en ajoutant la date/l'heure ou le numéro de page. Pilotes PCL/PS/XPS Windows : onglet Tampon/Composition Pilote Macintosh OS X : Tampon/Composition dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 ou le chapitre 10 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. Tête/Pied de page Les informations enregistrées avec cette machine comme en-tête/pied de page peuvent être ajoutées lors de l'impression du document. Pilotes PCL/PS/XPS Windows : onglet Tampon/Composition Pilote Macintosh OS X : Tampon/Composition Référence - Afin de pouvoir utiliser des en-têtes et des pieds de page, il faut d'abord enregistrer une en-tête ou un pied de page sur la machine. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 ou le chapitre 10 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. 4 Ajuster la qualité de l'image 4-16 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 4.8 4.8 Ajuster la qualité de l'image Sélectionner couleur et réglage qualité Le document peut être imprimé en niveaux de gris ou il est possible de régler la qualité de l'image, comme la tonalité par exemple. Référence La fonction Amélioration Bord peut être spécifiée pour accentuer le bord des caractères, des graphismes et des images afin de rendre les petits caractères plus visibles. La fonction Économie Toner peut être spécifiée pour contrôler la densité d'impression et réduire la consommation de toner. - Le profil ICC peut être spécifié pour le pilote PS Windows et le pilote Macintosh OS X. - Le pilote XPS Windows dispose de la fonction "Motif" qui spécifie la finesse des motifs graphiques. - La pilote PCL Windows dispose de la fonction "Motif" qui spécifie la finesse des motifs graphiques ainsi que de la fonction "Compression image" qui spécifie le taux de compression appliqué à une image graphique. - Les pilotes PS Windows PS et Macintosh OS X disposent de la fonction "Piégeage Auto" qui imprime de manière à empêcher la création d'un espace blanc autour d'une image ainsi que de la fonction "Surimpression Noire" qui imprime de manière à empêcher la création d'un espace blanc autour d'un caractère ou d'une image en noir. Pilotes Windows PCL/PS/XPS : onglet Qualité Pilote Macintosh OS X : Qualité dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 ou le chapitre 10 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. Paramètres couleurs Le document peut être imprimé avec la qualité d'image compatible avec le contenu du document. Pilotes Windows PCL/PS/XPS : onglet Qualité Pilote Macintosh OS X : Qualité dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 ou le chapitre 10 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. Imprimer avec les réglages du profil couleur Imprimer en niveaux de gris Document Photo DTP Internet CAO ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 4-17 4.8 Ajuster la qualité de l'image 4 Mode brillant Le document peut être imprimé avec une finition brillant. Pilotes Windows PCL/PS/XPS : onglet Qualité Pilote Macintosh OS X : Qualité dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 ou le chapitre 10 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. 4 Utilisation des polices de l'imprimante 4-18 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 4.9 4.9 Utilisation des polices de l'imprimante Réglages Polices Le document peut être imprimé en remplaçant les polices TrueType par les polices de l'imprimante. Pilotes PCL/PS Windows : Onglet Qualité Référence - L'utilisation des polices d'imprimante permet de réduire le temps d'impression mais il risque d'y avoir une différence entre le document affiché et le résultat de l'impression. - "Réglages Police" peut être configuré à l'aide du pilote PS ou PCL Windows. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. Police TrueType (police 1) Police d'imprimante (police 2) ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 4-19 4.10 Configurer un pilote d'imprimante facile à utiliser 4 4.10 Configurer un pilote d'imprimante facile à utiliser My Tab Vous pouvez configurer "My Tab" vous permettant d'enregistrer de manière collective les fonctions de pilote d'imprimante fréquemment utilisées sur un onglet et de personnaliser le contenu à afficher sur l'onglet. My Tab vous permet de modifier sur un seul écran les réglages des fonctions fréquemment utilisées. Pilotes Windows PCL/PS/XPS : My Tab dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. 4 Configurer un pilote d'imprimante facile à utiliser 4-20 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 4.10 5 Opérations de Fax utiles ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 5-3 5.1 Enregistrement de numéros de fax fréquemment utilisés 5 5 Opérations de Fax utiles 5.1 Enregistrement de numéros de fax fréquemment utilisés Il est possible d'enregistrer des destinations fréquemment utilisées. Les destinations peuvent être enregistrées dans le carnet d'adresses ou en tant que groupe de destinations. Destinations du Carnet d'adresses En enregistrant une destination fréquemment utilisée dans le Carnet d'adresses, il est très facile de rappeler la destination en appuyant sur un bouton du Carnet d'adresses. Ouvrir l'écran d'enregistrement des destinations 5 Enregistrement de numéros de fax fréquemment utilisés 5-4 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 5.1 Enregistrer un numéro de Fax Écran d'enregistrement des destinations ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 5-5 5.1 Enregistrement de numéros de fax fréquemment utilisés 5 • No. : tapez le numéro d'enregistrement sur le clavier numérique. • Nom : spécifier le nom du numéro de fax à enregistrer. • Numéro Fax : taper le numéro de fax à enregistrer sur le clavier. • Index : sélectionner les caractères d'index utilisés pour organiser les numéros de fax. La sélection de caractères d'index appropriés pour le nom enregistré permet de retrouver aisément le numéro de fax. • Icône : si i-Option LK-101 v2 est activé sur cette machine, sélectionner une icône. 2 1 2 1 5 Enregistrement de numéros de fax fréquemment utilisés 5-6 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 5.1 dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Groupe de Destinations Plusieurs destinations peuvent être enregistrées ensemble en tant que groupe unique. Les destinations pouvant être enregistrées en tant que groupe de destinations doivent être enregistrées dans le carnet d'adresses. Pour enregistrer un groupe de destinations, il faut d'abord enregistrer les destinations individuelles dans le carnet d'adresses. % Sur l'écran Enregistr. Dest Numérisation/Fax, appuyer sur [Groupe]. 2 1 3 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 5-7 5.1 Enregistrement de numéros de fax fréquemment utilisés 5 dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Enregistrer la destination programme Il est possible d'enregistrer les réglages de numérisation, d'émission et de destination sur une seule touche. Ce sont des destinations programme. Les destinations programme enregistrées peuvent être facilement rappelées et utilisées. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Écran Destination 5 Contrôler les opérations de Fax effectuées jusqu'ici 5-8 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 5.2 5.2 Contrôler les opérations de Fax effectuées jusqu'ici Liste communications Il est possible d'afficher dans un rapport et d'imprimer un journal des émissions et des réceptions. La rapport d'émission, le rapport de réception et le rapport d'activité, combinant les rapports d'émission et de réception sont disponibles sur l'écran Liste communication. 2 1 3 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 5-9 5.2 Contrôler les opérations de Fax effectuées jusqu'ici 5 dPour info Le rapport d'activité peut être imprimé de manière périodique. Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 8 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Les tâches de télécopie qu'il n'a pas été possible d'envoyer sont automatiquement enregistrées dans la boîte Retransmission Fax. Les tâches enregistrées dans la boîte Retransmission Fax peuvent être envoyées manuellement. Les réglages doivent être spécifiés en mode Administrateur pour enregistrer automatiquement les tâches dans la boîte Retransmission Fax. Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 10 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Sélectionner le rapport à imprimer. 1 2 Sélectionner le nombre de rapports à imprimer. 5 Émission simultanée à plusieurs destinataires 5-10 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 5.3 5.3 Émission simultanée à plusieurs destinataires Vous pouvez envoyer un document à plusieurs destinataires en une seule opération. Cette opération s'appelle "Transmission de diffusion". Transmission de diffusion Les destinataires peuvent être spécifiés pour les transmissions de diffusion en tapant la destination sur le clavier ou en sélectionnant une destination enregistrée. En outre, les destinataires peuvent être spécifiés en combinant les deux méthodes. Entrer une destination sur le clavier ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 5-11 5.3 Émission simultanée à plusieurs destinataires 5 dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Appuyer sur [Prochaine Dest.] pour afficher un écran pour saisir la deuxième destination. Une destination peut également être saisie à partir du panneau de contrôle. 2 1 Une destination peut également être indiquée en tapant son numéro d'enregistrement. 5 Émission simultanée à plusieurs destinataires 5-12 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 5.3 Sélectionner une destination enregistrée Référence - On peut spécifier un maximum de 625 destinations. Les destinations peuvent être spécifiées selon la combinaison suivante. Carnet d'adresses : 500 adresses Saisie dir. : 100 adresses fax, 5 adresses e-mail, adresses Fax Internet ou or adresses IP Fax, 5 adresses SMB, 5 adresses FTP, 5 adresses de boîte, 5 adresses WebDAV dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Sélectionner les différentes destinations censées recevoir l'émission. Les destinations actuellement sélectionnées peuvent être contrôlées ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 5-13 5.4 Sélectionner les informations de source d'émission enregistrée 5 5.4 Sélectionner les informations de source d'émission enregistrée Réglages des informations de source d'émission Fax Les informations de source d'émission enregistrée (nom de la source d'émission et ID Fax) peuvent être sélectionnées et modifiées. From : User01 From : Group03 5 Sélectionner les informations de source d'émission enregistrée 5-14 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 5.4 Référence - Les informations de source d'émission sont spécifiées en mode Administrateur. Consulter l'administrateur de la machine pour le mot de passe Administrateur. - Les informations de source d'émission sont enregistrées par l'administrateur. Consulter l'administrateur de la machine pour les informations enregistrées. - L'administrateur peut définir la position d'impression des informations de source d'émission à l'extérieur ou à l'intérieur du document ou les régler pour ne pas être imprimées. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 10 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 2 1 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 5-15 5.5 Numérisation des documents à envoyer 5 5.5 Numérisation des documents à envoyer Param. Numéris. L'écran Param. Numéris. permet de modifier les paramètres tels que la qualité de l'image, la définition et le contraste du document numérisé. N° Paramètre Description 1 Type original Le document peut être numérisé en fonction de son contenu. 2 Recto/Recto-Vers Sélectionnez "R/V" lors de la numérisation de documents recto/verso. 3 Définition Plus les chiffres sont grands, plus l'image est claire. 4 Type Fichier Ce paramètre n'est pas disponible en cas d'envoi vers un numéro de fax. 5 Contraste Sélectionner s'il faut assombrir ou éclaircir les couleurs des données numérisées. 6 Couleur Ce paramètre n'est pas disponible en cas d'envoi vers un numéro de fax. 7 Format numérisation Spécifier la taille du document à numériser. Cette fonction s'avère utile pour n'envoyer qu'une portion du document par fax. 8 Nom Document Ce paramètre n'est pas disponible en cas d'envoi vers un numéro de fax. 9 Numér. séparée Sélectionner ce paramètre pour envoyer ensemble un document numérisé en lots séparés. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 5 Numérisation des documents à envoyer 5-16 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 5.5 Ajustement Image Applications dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. N° Paramètre Description 1 Suppression Fond Permet de régler la densité du fond quand l'impression au verso peut être reproduite sur le recto de la copie ou lorsque le fond de l'original est en couleur. 2 Netteté Permet d'ajuster le paramètre quand les bords du texte ne sont pas nets. N° Paramètre Description 1 Effacem. Bords Les ombres qui apparaissent lors de la numérisation d'un document peuvent être effacées. 2 Page par page Spécifier le réglage approprié pour numériser un livre. 3 Annotation Le document à envoyer peut être enregistré dans la boîte Annotation. 4 Tampon/Surimpression Permet d'envoyer le document en ajoutant la date, l'heure, le numéro de page et un texte prédéfini. 5 Impress. par page Un document en cours de télécopie peut être simultanément copié. 6 Tampon Émission Si vous envoyez le fax à l'aide du chargeur ADF, vous pouvez vérifier si chaque page a été numérisée en tamponnant l'original une fois la numérisation terminée. L'encre du tampon est un consommable. 1 2 1 4 2 3 5 6 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 5-17 5.6 Envoyer des documents avec une commande en provenance du destinataire 5 5.6 Envoyer des documents avec une commande en provenance du destinataire Émission en relève Enregistrer les données pour les documents numérisés sur la machine de l'expéditeur et les envoyer sur demande du destinataire porte le nom d'"émission en relève". Un document envoyé par l'intermédiaire de la fonction "Émis. en relève (TX)" est archivé dans la boîte Émission en relève de cette machine, puis envoyé à la réception d'une requête du destinataire. Demande d'envoi de données Expéditeur Destinataire Boîte Utilisateur Émission en relève 5 Envoyer des documents avec une commande en provenance du destinataire 5-18 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 5.6 Référence - En mode d'émission en relève, c'est le destinataire qui supporte le coût de l'émission. - Pour demander qu'une machine envoie des données avec une émission en relève, appuyer sur [Émis. en relève (TX)] sur l'écran Param. méthod communication et spécifier ensuite l'expéditeur afin de recevoir les données. - L'émission Bulletin en relève peut être utilisée si le télécopieur du destinataire prend en charge les fonctions F-Code. 2 1 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 5-19 5.6 Envoyer des documents avec une commande en provenance du destinataire 5 dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 5 Réduire les frais de communication 5-20 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 5.7 5.7 Réduire les frais de communication Procéder à une émission destinée à plusieurs destinataires longue distance (distribution relais) Pour envoyer un document à plusieurs destinataires, le document peut être envoyé à un destinataire représentatif et ce même destinataire représentatif (station relais) peut envoyer le document aux destinataires restants. Référence - Pour procéder à une émission de diffusion relais, il faut spécifier la Boîte Utilisateur Relais et la destination dans la station de relais. Pour le réglage de la destination, il faut spécifier à l'avance un groupe en tant que destination. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 7 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Émission utilisant les frais de transmission de nuit (émission différée) Les réglages de destination peuvent être spécifiés et le document peut être numérisé pendant la journée et l'émission peut être envoyée tard dans la nuit à l'heure spécifiée quand les frais téléphoniques sont moindres. Référence - Afin d'envoyer le fax tard dans la nuit, il faut spécifier l'émission différée lors de l'envoi du document. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. L'expéditeur ne règle que les coûts d'émission à la station relais. Station relais Le document numérisé est envoyé à l'heure spécifiée. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 5-21 5.8 Réduire les frais de communication (utiliser Internet/Intranet) 5 5.8 Réduire les frais de communication (utiliser Internet/Intranet) Faxer par Internet Via Internet, un document numérisé peut être envoyé comme fichier joint à un message électronique. Les frais d'émission sont compris dans les frais Internet. Référence - Fax Internet permet de transmettre un original en couleur. - Le fichier joint est au format TIFF. - Pour plus de détails sur l'envoi de fax via Internet, consultez les page 5-22 de ce guide. - Avant de pouvoir utiliser la fonction d'envoi de fax via Internet, l'administrateur doit spécifier divers paramètres. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 2 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Faxer par adresse IP Spécifier l'adresse IP, le Nom Serveur ou l'adresse email du destinataire en tant que destination pour établir une communication sur un réseau intranet tel que celui d'une entreprise. Référence - Adresse IP Fax permet l'émission et la réception des documents en couleur. - Avant de pouvoir utiliser la fonction d'envoi de fax par adresse IP, l'administrateur doit spécifier divers paramètres. - L'envoi de Fax par Adresse IP est uniquement disponible entre les modèles Develop compatibles ou entre des modèles compatibles avec la norme SMTP direct recommandée par la CIAJ (Communications and Information network Association of Japan). Nous ne pouvons pas garantir un fonctionnement correct avec des modèles autres que ceux qui sont compatibles. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 2 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Internet 5 Envoyer des documents par e-mail 5-22 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 5.9 5.9 Envoyer des documents par e-mail Faxer par Internet Via Internet, un document numérisé peut être envoyé comme fichier joint à un message électronique. Les frais d'émission sont compris dans les frais Internet. Lorsque la destination est enregistrée 3 2 1 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 5-23 5.9 Envoyer des documents par e-mail 5 Lorsque la destination est saisie directement dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 2 1 2 1 5 Réduire les frais d'impression 5-24 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 5.10 5.10 Réduire les frais d'impression Boîte utilisateur réception mémoire obligatoire Les fax reçus peuvent être enregistrés dans une boîte utilisateur sous forme de données et imprimés au moment voulu. N'imprimer que les documents faxés nécessaires parmi la totalité des documents faxés reçus améliore la sécurité et réduit les frais d'impression. Imprimer des données dans la Boîte Utilisateur Réception Mémoire Obligatoire Boîte Mémoire Obligatoire Réception Réception ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 5-25 5.10 Réduire les frais d'impression 5 Référence - Un mot de passe peut être spécifié pour la Boîte Utilisateur Réception Mémoire Obligatoire. - Les réglages de la Boîte Utilisateur Réception Mémoire Obligatoire s'effectuent en mode Administrateur. Le mot de passe administrateur est obligatoire pour spécifier les paramètres. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 7 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 3 2 1 2 1 5 Envoyer des documents confidentiels 5-26 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 5.11 5.11 Envoyer des documents confidentiels Émission F-Code Lors de l'envoi de documents, une boîte utilisateur confidentielle (adresse SUB) et le mot de passe d'émission (ID émission) peuvent être spécifiés en plus du numéro de fax de la destination afin de préserver la confidentialité du document. Adresse SUB 1 2 3 4 ID d'émission **** Confidentiel Boîte Réception Utilisateur ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 5-27 5.11 Envoyer des documents confidentiels 5 Référence - Pour pouvoir réaliser une émission F-Code, une boîte confidentielle et un ID d'émission doivent être spécifiés sur la machine du destinataire. - Une émission F-Code ne peut être utilisée que si le télécopieur du destinataire prend en charge les fonctions F-Code. 2 1 5 Faire suivre des données reçues 5-28 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 5.12 dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 5.12 Faire suivre des données reçues Faire suivre un Fax Les données de fax reçues peuvent être transférées vers une destination précédemment spécifiée. Référence - Les réglages de Faire suivre des fax s'effectuent en mode Administrateur. Le mot de passe administrateur est obligatoire pour spécifier les paramètres. - En mode Administrateur, les paramètres peuvent être spécifiés pour imprimer les données d'un fax reçu, même depuis la machine, lorsque le fax est réacheminé ou pour que la machine n'imprime les données réacheminées que si une erreur survient. - Si Faire suivre le fax est spécifié, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser les paramètres Réception Mémoire, Récept. Fax PC ni Boîte Utilisateur TSI. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 10 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Réception ET Transfert Boîte ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 5-29 5.13 Faxer des données directement depuis un ordinateur 5 5.13 Faxer des données directement depuis un ordinateur Envoyer un fax par ordinateur Les données créées sur l'ordinateur peuvent être envoyées à un télécopieur de destination avec les mêmes réglages que ceux avec lesquels elles sont imprimées. Afin d'utiliser l'envoi de fax par ordinateur, il faut d'abord installer le pilote Fax. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 4 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Pilote Fax]. Les réglages du fax peuvent être spécifiés. 1 2 Une destination peut être sélectionnée à partir du carnet d'adresses. 3 1 2 5 Faxer des données directement depuis un ordinateur 5-30 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 5.13 6 Opérations Scanner réseau utiles ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 6-3 6.1 Enregistrer des destinations fréquemment utilisées 6 6 Opérations Scanner réseau utiles 6.1 Enregistrer des destinations fréquemment utilisées Il est possible d'enregistrer des destinations fréquemment utilisées. Les destinations peuvent être enregistrées dans le carnet d'adresses ou en tant que groupe de destinations. Destinations du Carnet d'adresses En enregistrant une destination fréquemment utilisée dans le Carnet d'adresses, il est très facile de rappeler la destination en appuyant sur un bouton du Carnet d'adresses. Ouvrir l'écran d'enregistrement des destinations 6 Enregistrer des destinations fréquemment utilisées 6-4 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 6.1 Enregistrer une adresse E-mail Écran d'enregistrement des destinations ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 6-5 6.1 Enregistrer des destinations fréquemment utilisées 6 • No. : tapez le numéro d'enregistrement sur le clavier numérique. • Nom : spécifier le nom de l'adresse e-mail à enregistrer. • Adresse Email : taper l'adresse e-mail sur le clavier qui s'affiche sur l'écran tactile. • Index : sélectionner les caractères d'index utilisés pour organiser les adresses e-mail. La sélection de caractères d'index appropriés pour le nom enregistré permet de retrouver aisément l'adresse e-mail. • Icône : si i-Option LK-101 v2 est activé sur cette machine, sélectionner une icône. 2 1 2 1 6 Enregistrer des destinations fréquemment utilisées 6-6 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 6.1 dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Groupe de Destinations Plusieurs destinations peuvent être enregistrées ensemble en tant que groupe unique. Les destinations pouvant être enregistrées en tant que groupe de destinations doivent être enregistrées dans le carnet d'adresses. Pour enregistrer un groupe de destinations, il faut d'abord enregistrer les destinations individuelles dans le carnet d'adresses. % Sur l'écran Enregistr. Dest Numérisation/Fax, appuyer sur [Groupe]. 1 2 3 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 6-7 6.1 Enregistrer des destinations fréquemment utilisées 6 dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Enregistrer la destination programme Il est possible d'enregistrer les réglages de numérisation, d'émission et de destination sur une seule touche. Ce sont des destinations programme. Les destinations programme enregistrées peuvent être facilement rappelées et utilisées. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Écran Destination 6 Envoyer du texte fin et des images nettes 6-8 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 6.2 6.2 Envoyer du texte fin et des images nettes L'ampleur des détails (définition) et la méthode de numérisation (selon que le document comporte du texte ou des images) peuvent être spécifiés lors de la numérisation d'un document. Un document de bonne qualité peut être envoyé en combinant ces paramètres. Ajustement de la définition Lors de l'envoi de texte fin et d'images, une image de meilleure qualité peut être envoyée en indiquant une définition supérieure. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 6-9 6.2 Envoyer du texte fin et des images nettes 6 Référence - Plus la définition est élevée, plus les données seront volumineuses. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Sélectionner un réglage de Type d'original Sélectionner la méthode de numérisation appropriée pour les types texte et image du document. 2 1 6 Envoyer du texte fin et des images nettes 6-10 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 6.2 N° Paramètre Description 1 Texte Sélectionnez ce réglage pour les documents composés de texte uniquement. 2 Texte/Phot Sélectionner ce réglage pour les documents comportant à la fois du texte et des photos. 3 Photo Sélectionnez ce réglage pour les documents composés de photos uniquement. 4 Original Tramé Sélectionnez ce réglage pour les documents composés de texte plutôt flou. 5 Papier Copié Sélectionnez ce réglage pour les documents de densité égale produits par un copieur ou une imprimante. 1 4 2 3 5 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 6-11 6.2 Envoyer du texte fin et des images nettes 6 dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Si "Texte/Phot" ou "Photo" est sélectionné, le type de photo peut être sélectionné. 6 Émission avec les réglages de couleur et de type de fichier sélectionnés 6-12 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 6.3 6.3 Émission avec les réglages de couleur et de type de fichier sélectionnés Sélectionner les réglages Couleur et Type Fichier Type Fichier 1 2 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 6-13 6.3 Émission avec les réglages de couleur et de type de fichier sélectionnés 6 Couleur dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Sélectionner les réglages Type de Fichier et Couleur Sélectionner le réglage Couleur en fonction du type de document à numériser. Toutefois, certains réglages risquent de ne pas être disponibles en fonction de la méthode d'émission sélectionnée et du réglage Type Fichier. Les réglages Couleur sont disponibles lors de l'enregistrement de documents numérisés dans des boîtes utilisateur, lors de l'envoi de données par e-mail ou de la transmission de données sur un réseau. Les réglages Couleur ne sont pas disponibles pour l'émission de fax. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Type Fichier Description PDF Ce type de fichier peut s'afficher dans Adobe Reader. Un format de fichier PDF crypté est également disponible. PDF compact Ce type de fichier peut s'afficher dans Adobe Reader. Comme une compression plus importante est utilisée, la quantité de données est moins importante qu'avec un format PDF normal. Un fichier PDF Compact peut également être utilisé comme fichier PDF crypté ou PDF Contours. TIFF Sélectionnez ce réglage pour enregistrer les données au format TIFF (noir et blanc). JPEG Sélectionnez ce réglage pour enregistrer les données au format JPEG (couleur). Un fichier est créé pour chaque page du document. XPS Sélectionnez ce réglage pour enregistrer les données au format XPS. XPS compact Sélectionnez ce réglage pour une compression des données supérieure au format XPS et enregistrez. Comme une compression plus importante est utilisée, la quantité de données est moins importante qu'avec un format XPS normal. Réglage Type de Fichier PDF PDF compact TIFF JPEG XPS XPS compact Réglage Couleur Couleur Auto o o o o o o Couleurs o o o o o o Échelle gris o o o o o o Noir o - o - o - 6 Émission avec ajout du numéro de page ou de l'heure 6-14 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 6.4 6.4 Émission avec ajout du numéro de page ou de l'heure Le numéro de page ou la date/l'heure peut être ajouté au document numérisé. Le numéro de page et la date/l'heure peuvent être ajoutés simultanément. Numéro de page Le numéro de page peut être ajouté au document à envoyer. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 6-15 6.4 Émission avec ajout du numéro de page ou de l'heure 6 Référence - Si [Détails Texte] est actionné, il est possible de spécifier la couleur, la taille ou le type du texte. - Les numéros de page peuvent également être ajoutés avec les réglages d'en-tête/de pied de page. Les réglages d'en-tête/de pied de page s'effectuent en mode Administrateur. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 6 Émission avec ajout du numéro de page ou de l'heure 6-16 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 6.4 Ajouter la date et l'heure La date et l'heure de la numérisation peuvent être ajoutées au document à envoyer. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 6-17 6.4 Émission avec ajout du numéro de page ou de l'heure 6 Référence - Si [Détails Texte] est actionné, il est possible de spécifier la couleur, la taille ou le type du texte. - La date/l'heure peut également être ajoutée avec les réglages d'en-tête/de pied de page. Les réglages d'en-tête/de pied de page s'effectuent en mode Administrateur. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 6 Émission en ajustant la couleur du fond 6-18 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 6.5 6.5 Émission en ajustant la couleur du fond Niveau Suppression Fond Quand l'impression au verso peut être reproduite sur le recto de la copie ou lorsque le fond de l'original est en couleur, il est possible de régler la densité du fond pour émettre des données numérisées nettes. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 6-19 6.5 Émission en ajustant la couleur du fond 6 dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 6 Émettre des données en effaçant les ombres 6-20 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 6.6 6.6 Émettre des données en effaçant les ombres Effacement bords Il est possible d'envoyer les numérisations en effaçant les zones indésirables à la périphérie du document, comme par exemple, le bandeau d'informations en tête des télécopies ou les ombres produites par les perforations. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 6-21 6.6 Émettre des données en effaçant les ombres 6 Référence - Permet de supprimer la même largeur tout autour du document ou des bandes de largeur différente sur chaque bord du document. - La largeur du cadre à effacer peut se régler entre 1/16 pouce et 2 pouces (0,1 et 50,0 mm). dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 2 1 6 Émission vers des destinataires multiples 6-22 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 6.7 6.7 Émission vers des destinataires multiples Recherche d'une destination enregistrée Sélectionner un destinataire enregistré dans le carnet d'adresses. 3 1 2 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 6-23 6.7 Émission vers des destinataires multiples 6 Référence - Les destinations indésirables peuvent être supprimées sous "Destin. Multi-Diff." ou les réglages peuvent être modifiés. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Les destinations groupe qui comportent plusieurs destinations enregistrées ensemble à l'avance peuvent s'avérer utiles lors de la sélection des destinations. 1 2 1 2 6 Envoyer des documents par e-mail 6-24 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 6.8 6.8 Envoyer des documents par e-mail Émissions par e-mail Les données numérisées peuvent être envoyées comme fichier joint à un e-mail en indiquant l'adresse e-mail. % Sélectionner une destination enregistrée ou taper directement l'adresse e-mail. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Internet ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 6-25 6.8 Envoyer des documents par e-mail 6 Changer l'objet de l'e-mail ou nom du fichier joint L'objet du message électronique et le nom du fichier peuvent être changés lors de l'envoi de données numérisées par e-mail. • Nom Document : le fichier joint peut être renommé. • Sujet : l'objet de l'e-mail peut être changé. • Corps txte : permet de saisir le texte de l'e-mail. 6 Envoyer des documents par e-mail 6-26 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 6.8 dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 6-27 6.9 Contrôler les émissions effectuées jusqu'ici 6 6.9 Contrôler les émissions effectuées jusqu'ici Tâches en cours/Historique des tâches Le journal de transmission englobe la liste Tâches en cours qui permet de contrôler les tâches en cours d'exécution et la liste Historiq. tâches qui permet de contrôler les tâches d'émission effectuées. 6 Contrôler les émissions effectuées jusqu'ici 6-28 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 6.9 Référence - Les tâches en cours d'émission et les tâches mises en file d'attente avant émission s'affichent sur la liste Tâches en cours. - Les tâches déjà envoyées s'affichent sur la liste Historiq. tâches. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 3 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 7 Opérations de boîte utiles ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 7-3 7.1 Modifier le nom d'un document enregistré 7 7 Opérations de boîte utiles 7.1 Modifier le nom d'un document enregistré Modif. Nom Le nom d'un document enregistré dans une boîte utilisateur peut être modifié. Les documents noms affectés d'un nom lors de leur enregistrement peuvent être renommés d'une manière plus facile à retenir. 1 2 7 Modifier le nom d'un document enregistré 7-4 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 7.1 Référence - Le nom du document est le nom du fichier envoyé. Changer le nom du document tout en tenant compte des conditions du serveur de destination. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 7 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. 1 2 1 2 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 7-5 7.2 Numériser des documents recto-verso 7 7.2 Numériser des documents recto-verso Param. Numéris. Lors de l'enregistrement des données dans une boîte en mode Boîte, appuyer sur [Param. Numéris.] pour modifier les paramètres de numérisation du document. Pour numériser des documents recto-verso, sélectionner "R/V" sur l'écran Paramètres Numérisation. 1 2 7 Numériser des documents recto-verso 7-6 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 7.2 Référence - Depuis l'écran Paramètres Numérisation, non seulement le réglage dédié aux documents recto-verso peut être spécifié, mais il est également possible de spécifier les réglages relatifs à la qualité d'image du document et au format de fichier des données à enregistrer. - Lors de la numérisation d'un document recto-verso en mode Fax/Numérisation, spécifier le réglage "R/V" sur l'écran Paramètres Numérisation exactement comme spécifié en mode Boîte. - Comme le réglage par défaut est "Recto", bien veiller à spécifier le réglage "R/V" sur l'écran Paramètres Numérisation pour enregistrer un document recto-verso dans une boîte utilisateur. De plus, si le paramètre "R/V" est spécifié sur l'écran Paramètres Numérisation, veiller à actionner [Orientation original] et [Position Reliure] sur l'écran Paramètres d'original et sélectionner les réglages appropriés pour le document chargé. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 6 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 7-7 7.3 Supprimer automatiquement les données dans les boîtes Utilisateur 7 7.3 Supprimer automatiquement les données dans les boîtes Utilisateur Délai suppression auto document La durée pendant laquelle les données restent enregistrées dans les boîtes peut être définie pour chaque boîte. Après expiration de la durée spécifiée, les données restent enregistrées dans les boîtes seront automatiquement supprimées. Spécifier un paramètre pour "Délai suppression auto document" lors de l'enregistrement d'une boîte. Référence - Pour modifier le réglage Délai suppression auto document pour une boîte déjà enregistrée, appuyer sur [Modifier] pour la boîte utilisateur. 7 Supprimer automatiquement les données dans les boîtes Utilisateur 7-8 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 7.3 2 1 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 7-9 7.3 Supprimer automatiquement les données dans les boîtes Utilisateur 7 dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 8 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. 2 1 7 Imprimer/envoyer plusieurs données combinées 7-10 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 7.4 7.4 Imprimer/envoyer plusieurs données combinées Combinaison/Lier EMI Deux données ou plus enregistrées dans les boîtes peuvent être imprimées ou envoyées. Lorsque "Combinaison" est sélectionné 2 1 2 1 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 7-11 7.4 Imprimer/envoyer plusieurs données combinées 7 Lorsque "Lier EMI" est sélectionné Spécifier l'ordre de combinaison des données. Spécifier les paramètres de finition et imprimer les données. 1 2 1 2 7 Imprimer/envoyer plusieurs données combinées 7-12 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 7.4 Spécifier l'ordre de combinaison des données. Sélectionner la destination et envoyer les données. 3 2 1 2 1 1 2 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 7-13 7.4 Imprimer/envoyer plusieurs données combinées 7 Référence - Il n'est pas possible d'envoyer les données enregistrées dans une boîte à une destination incapable de numériser (Fax G3, Fax Internet ou Adresse IP fax). dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 7 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. 7 Modifier les réglages de finition avant d'imprimer les données enregistrées 7-14 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 7.5 7.5 Modifier les réglages de finition avant d'imprimer les données enregistrées Finition Avant d'imprimer les données enregistrées dans une boîte, il est possible de modifier les réglages de finition. 1 2 2 1 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 7-15 7.5 Modifier les réglages de finition avant d'imprimer les données enregistrées 7 Paramètres de finition disponibles Les réglages de finition disponibles dépendent des options installées. Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 5 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 7 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. Réglage Description Tri Sélectionnez ce réglage pour séparer chaque jeu d'un document multi-pages. Groupe Sélectionnez ce réglage pour séparer les copies de chaque page d'un document multi-pages. Décalé Si aucune unité de finition n'est installée Si les conditions de tri sont réunies, les copies, une fois imprimées, sont éjectées et triées par empilage croisé. Si une unité de finition est installée Les copies sont éjectées de manière décalée pour les séparer. Agraf. Les copies peuvent être agrafées en coin ou en deux emplacements. Perfo. Il est possible de perforer les copies pour archivage. Pliage/Agrafage central et Pliage Pliage en 2 Sélectionnez ce réglage pour plier les copies en 2 avant de les éjecter. Agraf. Centre/Pliage Sélectionner ce réglage pour agrafer les copies en deux points le long du centre plus pour plier les copies en deux avant de les éjecter. Pliage en 3 Sélectionnez ce réglage pour plier les copies en trois avant de les éjecter. Pliage Z Sélectionner s'il faut plier le document terminé en deux ou en trois, le plier en deux et l'agrafer, le plier en deux avec pli montagne d'un des moitiés. (Formats pris en charge par le pliage Z : 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w et 8Kw) 2 1 Réalisation d'opérations 7 de boîte depuis un ordinateur 7-16 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 7.6 7.6 Réalisation d'opérations de boîte depuis un ordinateur Web Connection Web Connection permet de créer des boîtes utilisateur et d'effectuer des opérations sur les données dans les boîtes utilisateur. Vous pouvez utiliser les données stockées dans les boîtes depuis l'ordinateur de votre bureau. Entrez l'adresse IP de cette machine dans la zone "Adresse" du navigateur Web pour utiliser Web Connection pour vous connecter à cette machine. Les opérations suivantes peuvent être effectuées depuis l'onglet Boîte de Web Connection. - Créer/Modifier/Supprimer des boîtes utilisateur. - Imprimer/envoyer des données dans des boîtes. - Télécharger des données depuis une boîte vers un ordinateur. - Copier/déplacer/supprimer des données dans les boîtes. A propos de Web Connection Web Connection est un gestionnaire de périphérique intégré à cette machine. À partir d'un navigateur Internet installé sur un ordinateur relié au réseau, vous pouvez définir des paramètres de machine avec Web Connection. Les opérations de base suivantes peuvent être effectuées depuis Web Connection. - Contrôler diverses informations sur la machine. - Contrôler une tâche. - Procéder à des opérations avec les données dans les boîtes. - Impression directe. - Enregistrer/modifier des destinations. - Réglages environnement MFP, sécurité, authentification, réseau, imprimante et fax. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 9 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. 8 Fonctions avancées ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 8-3 8.1 Fonctions avancées 8 8 Fonctions avancées 8.1 Fonctions avancées Diverses fonctions améliorant l'opérabilité d'un MFP sont appelées "fonctions avancées". Il existe deux types de fonctions avancées - les fonctions utilisables en enregistrant i-Option LK-101 v2/LK- 102/LK-105 sur le MFP et les fonctions utilisables en association avec des applications (Gestionnaire My Panel Manager). La présentation de chaque fonction est la suivante. Fonctions i-Option LK-101 v2 Référence - Si le dispositif de gestion de chargement est installé sur le MFP, les fonctions Image Panel ne sont pas disponibles. Fonctions i-Option LK-102 Fonctions i-option LK-105 Référence - La disponibilité de la fonctions avancée est subordonnée à l'utilisation du kit de mise à niveau, UK-203 fourni en option. Pour plus de détails sur l'achat de l'équipement en option, consultez votre technicien S.A.V. - Pour utiliser la fonction i-Option LK-101 v2, LK-102 ou LK-105 sur le MFP, enregistrer i-Option LK-101 v2, LK-102 ou LK-105 sur le MFP pour activer la fonction. Fonction Présentation Navigateur Web Le panneau de contrôle de l'imprimante multifonctions connectée au réseau vous permet d'accéder à Internet ou un intranet et d'en afficher et imprimer le contenu. Avec un navigateur Web, vous pouvez aussi accéder via Web Connection, à la MFP connectée au réseau et aux documents enregistrés dans ses boîtes utilisateurs. Image Panel Image Panel est une nouvelle interface intuitive et facile à comprendre du panneau. Ce "panneau" vous aide à facilement visualiser le cycle d'opérations complet depuis le chargement jusqu'à l'émission d'un document. Vous pouvez ajouter des données photo aux destinations en numérotation abrégée à l'aide de Web Connection. Les données photographiques enregistrées sont appliquées à la liste d'adresses d'Image Panel. Fonction Présentation Traitement PDF Lors de l'envoi de documents au format PDF au moyen des fonctions de numérisation ou les fonctions Boîte utilisateur, il est possible de crypter un fichier PDF par un mot de passe ou un identifiant numérique, d'ajouter une signature numérique et de spécifier les propriétés. Fonction Présentation PDF adressable Cette fonction vous permet de coller des données de texte transparent dans le texte reconnu par le ROC et de créer un fichier PDF adressable. Vous pouvez créer un fichier PDF adressable lors de l'enregistrement ou de l'envoi d'un original comme fichier PDF via la fonction de numérisation ou Boîte Utilisateur. 8 Fonctions avancées 8-4 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 8.1 Référence - Pour plus de détails sur la fonction i-Option LK-101 v2, LK-102 ou LK-105, consulter le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Fonction Avancée (i-option)]. - Pour de plus amples détails sur la procédure d'enregistrement d'i-Option LK-101 v2, LK-102 ou LK-105 sur le MFP, voir page 8-5 de ce guide. - Quand i-Option LK-101 v2 ou LK-105 est activé, la touche [Boîte] du panneau de contrôle agit comme touche de menu d'application et [Fax/Numérisation] ou [Copie] comme touche d'application. - Pour utiliser la fonction ajoutée, appuyer sur la touche de menu d'application pour afficher le menu d'application. Vous pouvez aussi affecter les fonctions ajoutées aux deux touches d'application. - Pour plus de détails, consulter le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Fonction Avancée (i-option)]. Fonctions disponibles avec My Panel Manager Référence - La disponibilité de la fonctions avancée est subordonnée à l'utilisation du kit de mise à niveau, UK-203 fourni en option. Pour plus de détails sur l'achat de l'équipement en option, consultez votre technicien S.A.V. - Les fonctions à associer aux applications devraient être activées depuis l'application utilisée. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de la fonction, voir le manuel relatif à l'application. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur My Panel Manager, voir le guide de My Panel Manager. Pour les opérations de panneau MFP lorsque le MFP est connecté à My Panel Manager, consulter le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Fonction Avancée (i-option)]. Fonction Présentation My Panel La fonction My Panel, l'environnement du panneau de contrôle (My Panel), personnalisé par un utilisateur en fonction de l'application, est géré de manière centralisée sur le serveur et l'utilisateur peut obtenir le tableau My Panel auprès de la MFP sélectionnée. My Address Book Grâce à la fonction My Address Book, le carnet d'adresses personnel (My Address Book) est géré de manière centralisée sur le serveur, et l'utilisateur peut accéder au carnet d'adresses personnel My Address Book de la MFP sélectionnée. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 8-5 8.2 Pour enregistrer i-Option LK-101 v2/LK-102/LK-105 8 8.2 Pour enregistrer i-Option LK-101 v2/LK-102/LK-105 Pour utiliser les fonctions d'i-Option LK-101 v2/LK-102/LK-105, l'i-Option LK-101 v2/LK-102/LK-105 doit être enregistrée sur le MFP. Cette section décrit la procédure d'enregistrement d'i-Option LK-101 v2/LK-102/LK-105 sur le MFP. Confirmez le cycle d'opérations suivant et pour des détails sur les réglages, voir la description page 8-5 de ce guide. Enregistrer i-Option LK-101 v2/LK-102/LK-105 Il existe deux méthodes pour enregistrer i-Option LK-101 v2/LK-102/LK-105 sur le MFP. - Depuis le panneau de contrôle de la MFP - Depuis Web Connection C'est la procédure d'enregistrement depuis le panneau de contrôle de la MFP qui est décrite ici. Procédure d'activation des fonctions i-Option LK-101 v2/LK-102/LK-105 1 Achat de l'i-Option LK-101 v2/LK-102/LK-105. % Acheter i-Option LK-101 v2/LK-102/LK-105 v2 à l'avance. i-Option LK-101 v2/LK-102/LK-105 contient le certificat clé. Le certificat clé contient les informations suivantes : Description du produit Numéro de clé Nombre de périphériques autorisés L'URL du site Internet du Serveur de Gestion des Licences (License Management Server - LMS) % Pour plus de détails sur l'achat de l'i-Option LK-101 v2/LK-102/LK-105, contactez votre S.A.V. 2 Envoyer un code-requête. % Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur]. Acheter i-Option LK-101 v2/LK-102/LK-105. Envoyez depuis le panneau de contrôle de la MFP, un code requête. Depuis l'ordinateur, procédez à l'enregistrement auprès du serveur de gestions de licences (License Management Server - LMS). Depuis le panneau de contrôle du MFP, activez les fonctions i-Option LK-101 v2/LK-102/LK-105. 8 Pour enregistrer i-Option LK-101 v2/LK-102/LK-105 8-6 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 8.2 % Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur]. % Tapez le mot de passe administrateur et appuyez ensuite sur [Valider]. % Appuyez sur [Paramètres de Licence]. 1 2 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 8-7 8.2 Pour enregistrer i-Option LK-101 v2/LK-102/LK-105 8 % Appuyez sur [Obtenir Code Requête]. % Appuyez sur [Oui] et ensuite sur [Valider]. % Appuyez sur [Impression] pour imprimer le code-requête. 1 2 8 Pour enregistrer i-Option LK-101 v2/LK-102/LK-105 8-8 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 8.2 3 Enregistrement sur le serveur de gestion des licences (License Management Server - LMS). % Accédez au site Web du serveur de gestion des licences (License Management Server - LMS). % Sélectionnez une langue. % Tapez le numéro de série et le code-requête obtenu après l'envoi d'un code-requête, puis cliquez sur la touche [Next]. 1 2 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 8-9 8.2 Pour enregistrer i-Option LK-101 v2/LK-102/LK-105 8 % Tapez le numéro de clé contenu dans le certificat-clé, sélectionnez les options d'enregistrement, puis cliquez sur la touche [Next]. % Confirmez les informations d'enregistrement, et cliquez sur la touche [Generate License Code]. 1 2 8 Pour enregistrer i-Option LK-101 v2/LK-102/LK-105 8-10 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 8.2 % Le code de licence et le code de fonction sont émis. Le code de licence et le code de fonction sont nécessaires pour activer les fonctions i-Option LK-101 v2/LK-102/LK-105. 4 Activer les fonctions i-Option LK-101 v2/LK-102/LK-105. % Sur l'écran des Réglages de licence des Réglages Administrateur, appuyer sur [Installer Licence]. % Appuyez sur [Code Fonction] pour saisir le code de fonction obtenu. 1 2 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 8-11 8.2 Pour enregistrer i-Option LK-101 v2/LK-102/LK-105 8 % Appuyez sur [Code de Licence], et entrez le code de licence qui a été émis. % Appuyez sur [Installer]. % Appuyez sur [Oui] et ensuite sur [Valider]. % Éteignez l'interrupteur principal et rallumez-le. 1 2 8 Pour enregistrer i-Option LK-101 v2/LK-102/LK-105 8-12 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 8.2 Référence - Après avoir activé la fonction, placez l'interrupteur en position Arrêt, puis patientez 10 secondes environ avant de le ramener en position Marche. Sinon, la machine pourrait ne pas fonctionner correctement. - Sur l'écran Paramètres de Licence, dans Réglages Administrateur, appuyez sur [Liste fonctions activées] pour consulter la liste des fonctions activées. 9 Incidents ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 9-3 9.1 Incidents 9 9 Incidents 9.1 Incidents Cette section décrit les procédures de dépannage courantes sous la forme de questions et de réponses. Si le problème subsiste, même après exécution de la procédure décrite, contactez votre S.A.V. Pourquoi la machine ne peut-elle être mise sous tension ? Cette machine est dotée de deux interrupteurs. Réponse Vérifier les points suivants. - Vérifier que le connecteur d'alimentation de la machine est bien inséré dans la prise électrique. Par ailleurs, s'assurer que le disjoncteur ne s'est pas déclenché. - S'assurer que la machine a été mise sous tension via l'interrupteur d'alimentation auxiliaire et l'interrupteur d'alimentation principale. REMARQUE Si la machine ne s'allume pas après vérification des points indiqués, contactez votre S.A.V. Pourquoi aucun écran n'apparaît-il sur l'écran tactile ? Si aucune opération n'a lieu à l'issue du délai spécifié, l'écran tactile s'éteint et la machine passe automatiquement dans un mode où elle consomme moins d'électricité. 9 Incidents 9-4 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 9.1 Réponse Vérifier les points suivants. - Utiliser la molette [Contraste] sur le panneau de contrôle pour ajuster la luminosité de l'écran sur l'écran tactile. - Effleurer l'écran tactile. Il n'y a aucun problème si l'écran tactile s'allume. Si la machine est en mode Eco. Énergie, tout effleurement de l'écran tactile ou toute pression sur une touche du panneau de contrôle annule le mode Eco. Énergie. - Appuyez sur la touche [Eco. Énerg.] du panneau de contrôle. Si le programmateur hebdomadaire a réglé la machine en mode Veille, un écran s'affiche sur l'écran tactile lors de l'actionnement de la touche [Eco. Énergie]. Entrez les informations indiquées à l'écran pour être en mesure d'utiliser la machine en dehors des heures de travail. - S'assurer que la machine a été mise sous tension via l'interrupteur d'alimentation auxiliaire et l'interrupteur d'alimentation principale. REMARQUE Si aucun écran n'apparaît sur l'écran tactile après vérification des points indiqués, contactez votre S.A.V. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 9-5 9.1 Incidents 9 Pour un message comme Remplacement de consommable ou Entretien de nettoyage apparaît ? Quand les consommables utilisés par cette machine sont presque épuisés, un avertissement relatif à la période de remplacement apparaît. Ce message s'affiche quant la vitre de numérisation est sale. Réponse Remplacez les consommables affichés ou nettoyez la vitre de numérisation. Le consommable est épuisé quand un message apparaît indiquant qu'il faut remplacer le consommable. La copie est possible pendant un court laps de temps après affichage du message mais vous devriez préparer les consommables au plus vite. - Pour une cartouche de toner Après affichage du message "Toner (Y) bas. Remplacer lorsqu'indiqué.", le message "Remplacer cartouche de toner (X)." apparaît. Remplacez la cartouche de toner conformément à votre convention d'entretien. - Pour une unité image Quand le message "Remplacer les unités suivantes." apparaît, préparez-vous à remplacer l'unité image selon votre convention d'entretien. REMARQUE Si le message reste affiché après le remplacement ou le nettoyage, contactez votre S.A.V. Pourquoi le message de bourrage reste-t-il affiché ? Il se peut qu'un bourrage soit survenu à un emplacement autre que celui qui est indiqué à l'écran. Contrôler l'emplacement indiqué sur l'écran affiché. 9 Incidents 9-6 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 9.1 Réponse Vérifier les points suivants. - S'assurer qu'aucun papier déchiré n'est resté dans le composant indiqué par le numéro sur l'écran tactile. S'il est impossible de dégager le papier, contactez votre S.A.V. - Ouvrir puis refermer la porte indiquée par le numéro sur l'écran tactile. Le message ne doit pas resté affiché après exécution de cette opération. REMARQUE Si l'avertissement de bourrage reste affiché après avoir contrôlé les éléments indiqués, contactez votre S.A.V. Qu'est ce que la stabilisation image ? Afin que cette machine puisse conserver une reproduction stable des couleurs, elle est dotée d'une fonction de réglage automatique de la qualité d'impression. Le réglage de la qualité d'impression s'appelle "Stabilisation image". Réponse La stabilisation d'image est effectuée après l'impression d'un grand nombre de copies ou en cas de variations de température ou d'humidité à l'intérieur de la machine. Une fois la stabilisation d'image terminée, patienter jusqu'à ce que l'impression reprenne automatiquement. REMARQUE Si l'opération de stabilisation d'image ne se termine pas après un certain temps, contactez votre S.A.V. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 9-7 9.1 Incidents 9 Pourquoi un message d'erreur est-il apparu ? Il existe trois types d'erreurs ; des erreurs pouvant être corrigées en ouvrant/fermant la porte avant inférieure, des erreurs pouvant être corrigées en mettant hors tension/sous tension et des erreurs ne pouvant pas être corrigées. Il convient alors de suivre les instructions affichées à l'écran. Si l'erreur ne peut être corrigée ou résolue, contacter le S.A.V en lui communiquant le code d'erreur. Réponse Il convient alors de suivre les instructions affichées à l'écran. REMARQUE Si le message reste affiché, noter le code d'erreur qui s'est affiché à l'écran, débrancher la machine de la prise électrique et contacter le S.A.V. 9 Incidents 9-8 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 9.1 10 Paramètres Réglages Utilisateur ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 10-3 10.1 Afficher l'écran des réglages utilisateur 10 10 Paramètres Réglages Utilisateur Les paramètres des Réglages Utilisateur permettent de modifier les réglages machine communs et les réglages de fonctions spécifiques en fonction des conditions et de l'environnement d'utilisation. 10.1 Afficher l'écran des réglages utilisateur Diverses fonctions peuvent être spécifiées à partir de l'écran Régl. Utilisateur. Référence - Pour changer les réglages par défaut du mode Fax/Numérisation, appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Numérisation] et ensuite sur la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur]. dPour info Pour plus de détails, consulter le chapitre 6 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. 10 Réglages spécifiables 10-4 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 10.2 10.2 Réglages spécifiables Les réglages peuvent être spécifiés pour les paramètres dans les cinq catégories suivantes sur l'écran Réglages Utilisateur. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres des Réglages Copieur, consulter le chapitre 6 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. Pour plus de détails sur les Paramètres Numérisation/Fax, consulter le chapitre 9 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres des Réglages Imprimantes, consulter le chapitre 13 du [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. Réglage Système La langue d'affichage de l'écran tactile, les unités de mesure et les réglages des modes d'économie d'énergie peuvent être modifiés. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 10-5 10.2 Réglages spécifiables 10 Paramètres Affichage Perso L'écran de la partie gauche de l'écran tactile et les réglages de l'écran de base peuvent être modifiés. Réglages Copieur Il est possible de modifier les réglages des fonctions de copie pour faciliter l'exécution des opérations. 10 Réglages spécifiables 10-6 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 10.2 Paramètres Numérisation/Fax Il est possible de modifier les réglages des fonctions de fax/numérisation pour faciliter l'exécution des opérations. Réglages imprimante Il est possible de modifier les réglages des fonctions d'impression pour faciliter l'exécution des opérations. 11 Annexe ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 11-3 11.1 Glossaire 11 11 Annexe 11.1 Glossaire Élément Description Agraf. Centre/Pliage C'est la fonction de finition qui éjecte le papier plié en deux et agrafé en deux points le long du centre. Agrafage Cette fonction de finition éjecte les copies reliées par des agrafes lors de la copie de documents comportant deux pages ou plus. Boîte C'est la fonction d'émission au cours de laquelle l'émission d'un fax est lancée par une opération effectuée par la machine de réception. Avec l'émission en relève, c'est le destinataire qui règle les frais d'appel puisque le document à envoyer est stocké dans la mémoire de la machine émettrice jusqu'à ce que le destinataire déclenche l'émission en envoyant une commande de réception. Confidentiel Généralement, cela se réfère à de la correspondance uniquement ouverte par la personne à laquelle elle est adressée. Sur cette machine, cela se réfère à la fonction (appelée émission confidentielle) qui envoie un fax à une personne donnée. Comme les émissions confidentielles utilisent des boîtes utilisateur confidentielles configurées sur la machine, ces émissions peuvent être utilisées si la machine de réception est également équipée de la fonction d'émission confidentielle. Diffusion Cette fonction s'appelle "transmission de diffusion" sur cette machine. C'est la fonction qui envoie un fax à plusieurs destinataires en une seule et même opération. Éco. Énergie C'est le mode automatiquement activé par la machine pour économiser de l'énergie quand aucune opération n'est effectuée pendant un délai spécifié. Un autre mode d'économie d'énergie est le mode Veille. La machine économise plus d'énergie en mode Veille qu'en mode Éco. Énergie. Économie d'énergie C'est la fonction d'activation d'un mode d'économie d'énergie (mode Éco. Énergie ou mode Veille). Il est possible de régler manuellement la machine sur un mode d'économie d'énergie en appuyant sur la touche [Eco. Énergie]. Enreg. dans Boîte utilisateur C'est la fonction permettant d'enregistrer les données numérisées avec une opération de copie, de fax ou de numérisation dans une boîte configurée sur la machine. Les données enregistrées dans la boîte peuvent être émises ou faxées. Fonctions Sécurité C'est le nom générique des différentes fonctions d'augmentation de la sécurité des informations destinées à empêcher la divulgation des informations, par exemple pour que les données confidentielles enregistrées sur la machine ne soient pas divulguées à des tiers et ces différents réglages ne peuvent être modifiés que par la personne titulaire du mot de passe. Groupe Cette fonction de finition éjecte les copies page par page lors de l'impression de deux copies ou plus d'un document de plusieurs pages. Nom de la source de transmission C'est la fonction qui spécifie depuis la machine d'émission si les informations de la source de transmission sont imprimées par la machine de réception en haut des documents de fax reçus. Seule la machine d'émission peut spécifier si ces informations sont imprimées ou non et spécifier le nom qui sera imprimé. Opérations de numérisation La numérisation du document s'appelle "numérisation" et les méthodes d'envoi ou d'enregistrement des données numérisées s'appellent fonctions de numérisation. Ces fonctions de numérisation englobent les émissions par e-mail où les données numérisées sont envoyées à une adresse e-mail sous forme de fichier joint, en plus des émissions FTP, des émissions SMB, des émissions WebDAV, de la fonction Service Web, de l'enregistrement dans des boîtes et de l'utilisation de la numérisation. Perforer Il est possible de perforer les copies pour archivage. Pliage en 2 C'est la fonction de finition dédiée au pliage en deux du papier une fois qu'il est imprimé. 11 Glossaire 11-4 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 11.1 Programmateur hebdomadaire Cette option permet d'activer le mode Veille pour la machine aux horaires indiqués. Les périodes (jour et heure) de non utilisation de la machine peuvent être spécifiées pour que la machine bascule automatiquement dans un mode permettant d'économiser de l'énergie. Tâche Il s'agit des informations d'opération enregistrées sur la machine après application des réglages. Les opérations de copie et de numérisation après une pression sur la touche [Départ] et après que la commande d'impression est envoyée depuis un ordinateur sont toutes enregistrées sur la machine et portent le nom de tâches. Tri Cette fonction de finition éjecte les copies par jeu lors de l'impression de deux copies ou plus d'un document de plusieurs pages. Veille C'est le mode automatiquement activé par la machine pour économiser de l'énergie quand aucune opération n'est effectuée pendant un délai spécifié. Un autre mode d'économie d'énergie est le mode Éco. Énergie. La machine économise plus d'énergie en mode Veille qu'en mode Éco. Énergie. Élément Description ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 11-5 11.2 Marques commerciales et droits de reproduction 11 11.2 Marques commerciales et droits de reproduction Netscape est une marque déposée de Netscape Communications Corporation aux USA et dans d'autres pays. Mozilla et Firefox sont des marques commerciales de Mozilla Foundation. Novell et Novell NetWare sont des marques déposées enregistrées de Novell, Inc. aux Etats-Unis et dans d'autres pays. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT et Windows Vista sont des marques déposées enregistrées ou des marques commerciales de Microsoft Corporation aux Etats-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. PowerPC est une marque commerciale de IBM Corporation aux Etats-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Apple, Macintosh et Mac os sont des marques déposées enregistrées de Apple Computer, Inc. Safari est une marque déposée de Apple Computer, Inc. Adobe, le logo d'Adobe, Acrobat et PostScript sont des marques déposées ou commerciales d'Adobe Systems Incorporated aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Ethernet est une marque déposée de Xerox Corporation. PCL est une marque déposée de Hewlett-Packard Company Limited. CUPS et le logo CUPS sont la marque déposée de Easy Software Products. Cette machine et Box Operator s'appuient en partie sur les travaux du Groupe Indépendant JPEG. Compact-VJE Copyright 1986-2009 Yahoo Japan Corp. RC4® est une marque commerciale ou une marque déposée de RSA Security Inc. aux USA et dans d'autres pays. RSA® est une marque commerciale ou une marque déposée de RSA Security Inc. RSA BSAFE® est une marque commerciale ou une marque déposée de RSA Security Inc. aux USA et dans d'autres pays. Informations de licence Ce produit comprend un logiciel cryptographique RSA BSAFE de RSA Security Inc. Déclaration NetFront ce produit contient NetFront, le logiciel de navigation Internet d'ACCESS Co., Ltd. NetFront est une marque commerciale ou une marque déposée d' ACCESS Co., Ltd. au Japon et dans d'autres pays. Copyright © 2004 Adobe Systems Incorporated. Tous droits réservés. Brevets en instance. Ce produit contient Adobe® Flash® Player sous licence d'Adobe Systems Incorporated. Copyright © 1995-2007 Adobe Macromedia Software LLC. Tous droits réservés. Adobe et Flash sont soit des marques déposées ou des marques commerciales d'Adobe Systems Incorporated aux USA et dans d'autres pays. Advanced Wnn "Advanced Wnn" © OMRON SOFTWARE CO., Ltd. 2006 Tous droits réservés. ABBYY et FineReader sont des marques déposées enregistrées de ABBYY Software House. Tous les autres produits ou noms de marque sont des marques de fabrique ou des marques déposées de leurs propriétaires respectifs. 11 Marques commerciales et droits de reproduction 11-6 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 11.2 Déclaration OpenSSL OpenSSL License Copyright © 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. Tous droits réservés. Toute redistribution et utilisation sous forme source ou binaire, avec ou sans modification, est autorisée sous réserve de satisfaction des conditions suivantes : 1. Les redistributions de code source doivent conserver l'avis de copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité suivante. 2. Les redistributions sous forme binaire doivent reproduire l'avis de copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité ci-dessous dans la documentation et/ou les autres documents fournis avec la distribution. 3. Tous les documents publicitaires mentionnant des fonctions ou l'utilisation de ce logiciel doivent contenir la déclaration suivante : "Ce produit contient un logiciel développé par OpenSSL Project pour utilisation dans le OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)" 4. Les noms "OpenSSL Toolkit" et "OpenSSL Project" ne doivent pas être utilisés pour exploiter ou promouvoir des produits dérivés de ce logiciel dans accord écrit préalable. Pour l'accord écrit, contacter openssl-core@openssl.org. 5. Les produits dérivés de ce logiciel ne peuvent pas s'appeler "OpenSSL" et "OpenSSL" ne doit pas figurer dans leurs noms sans l'accord écrit préalable de OpenSSL Project. 6. Toute redistribution sous quelque forme que ce soit doit faire mention de la déclaration suivante : "Ce produit contient un logiciel développé par OpenSSL Project pour utilisation dans le OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)" CE LOGICEL EST FOURNI PAR LE OpenSSL PROJECT "TEL QUEL" ET TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE EXPRESSE ET IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, SANS TOUTEFOIS S'Y LIMITER, LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE QUALITE MARCHANDE ET D'APTITUDE POUR UNE APPLICATION SPECIFIQUE SERA REJETEE. EN AUCUN CAS, LE OpenSSL PROJECT OU SES COLLABORATEURS NE SAURONT ÊTRE TENUS POUR RESPONSABLES DES MOINDRES DOMMAGES DIRECTS, INDIRECTS, ACCIDENTELS, SPÉCIAUX, EXEMPLAIRES OU CONSÉCUTIFS (Y COMPRIS, SANS TOUTEFOIS S'Y LIMITER, L'APPROVISIONNEMENT OU LE REMPLACEMENT DE MARCHANDISES OU DES SERVICES ; LA PERTE D'EXPLOITATION, DE DONNÉES, DE BÉNÉFICES OU L'INTERRUPTION D'ACTIVITE) ENCOURUS ET EN MATIÈRE DE RESPONSABILITÉ, QU'IL S'AGISSE D'UNE RESPONSABILITÉ CONTRACTUELLE, D'UNE RESPONSABILITÉ CIVILE ABSOLUE OU DÉLICTUELLE (Y COMPRIS EN CAS DE NÉGLIGENCE OU AUTRE) ÉMANANT DE L'UTILISATION DE CE LOGICIEL, MÊME SI VOUS ÊTES AVERTIS DE L'EVENTUALITE D'UN TEL DOMMAGE. Ce produit contient un logiciel cryptographique créé par Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). Ce produit contient un logiciel créé par Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Original SSLeay License Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) Tous droits réservés. Ce progiciel est une implémentation SSL rédigée par Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). L'implémentation a été écrite de manière conforme aux SSL Netscape. Cette bibliothèque est libre de droits pour l'utilisation commerciale et non commerciale tant que les conditions suivantes sont satisfaites. Les conditions suivantes s'appliquent à l'ensemble des codes trouvés dans cette distribution, qu'il soit de type RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., et non pas uniquement au code SSL. La documentation SSL jointe à cette distribution est soumise aux mêmes dispositions de copyright, à cette différence près que le détenteur est Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Le Copyright reste la propriété d'Eric Young et, en tant que tel, il est interdit de supprimer toute mention de Copyright figurant dans le code. Si ce progiciel est utilisé au sein d'un produit, Eric Young doit être cité comme étant l'auteur des parties de la bibliothèque utilisée. Cela peut être sous la forme d'un message texte au démarrage du programme ou dans la documentation (en ligne ou dans le manuel) fourni avec le progiciel. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 11-7 11.2 Marques commerciales et droits de reproduction 11 Toute redistribution et utilisation sous forme source ou binaire, avec ou sans modification, est autorisée sous réserve de satisfaction des conditions suivantes : 1. Les redistributions de code source doivent conserver l'avis de copyright, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité suivante. 2. Les redistributions sous forme binaire doivent reproduire l'avis de copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité ci-dessous dans la documentation et/ou les autres documents fournis avec la distribution. 3. Tous les documents publicitaires mentionnant les fonctions ou l'utilisation de ce logiciel doivent contenir la déclaration suivante : "Ce produit contient un logiciel cryptographique créé par Eric Young (eay@crypt-soft.com)" Le terme 'e-cryptographique' peut être ignoré si les routines de la bibliothèque utilisée ne sont pas cryptographiées. 4. Si vous incluez du code spécifique Windows (ou tout dérivé de ce dernier) du dossier apps (code d'application), vous devez ajouter une déclaration : "Ce produit contient un logiciel créé par Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)" CE LOGICIEL EST FOURNI PAR ERIC YOUNG "TEL QUEL" ET TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE EXPRESSE ET IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, SANS TOUTEFOIS S'Y LIMITER, LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET D'APTITUDE POUR UNE APPLICATION SPECIFIQUE SERA REJETÉE. EN AUCUN CAS, L'AUTEUR OU SES COLLABORATEURS NE SAURONT ÊTRE TENUS POUR RESPONSABLES DES MOINDRES DOMMAGES DIRECTS, INDIRECTS, ACCIDENTELS, SPÉCIAUX, EXEMPLAIRES OU CONSÉCUTIFS (Y COMPRIS, SANS TOUTEFOIS S'Y LIMITER, L'APPROVISIONNEMENT OU LE REMPLACEMENT DE MARCHANDISES OU DES SERVICES ; LA PERTE D'EXPLOITATION, D'ACTIVITE) ENCOURUS ET EN MATIÈRE DE RESPONSABILITÉ, QU'IL S'AGISSE D'UNE RESPONSABILITÉ CONTRACTUELLE, D'UNE RESPONSABILITÉ CIVILE ABSOLUE OU DÉLICTUELLE (Y COMPRIS EN CAS DE NÉGLIGENCE OU AUTRE) ÉMANANT DE L'UTILISATION DE CE LOGICIEL, MÊME SI VOUS ÊTES AVERTIS DE L'ÉVENTUALITÉ D'UN TEL DOMMAGE. La licence et les termes de distribution de toute version publiquement disponible ou dérivé de ce code ne peuvent pas être modifiés. C'est-à-dire qu'il n'est pas possible de se contenter de copier ce code pour l'insérer dans une autre licence de distribution y compris la licence GNU Public Licence. Licence NetSNMP Partie 1 : avis de copyright CMU/UCD : (de type BSD) Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000 Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California Tous droits réservés Vous avez l'autorisation d'utiliser, de copier, de modifier et de distribuer ce logiciel et sa documentation à tout effet et sans contrepartie financière à condition que la mention de copyright ci-dessus figure sur tous les exemplaires et que, tant la mention de copyright ci-dessus que la mention d'autorisation apparaissent sur la documentation qui les accompagne, et que le nom de CMU et le nom The Regents of the University of California ne soient pas utilisés dans de la publicité ou dans la publicité relative à la distribution du logiciel sans autorisation spécifique écrite. CMU ET THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA EXCLUENT TOUTES GARANTIES CONCERNANT CE LOGICIEL, Y COMPRIS TOUTES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET D'ADÉQUATION À UN BESOIN PARTICULIER. EN AUCUN CAS, CMU OU LES RESPONSABLES DE L'UNIVERSITÉ DE CALIFORNIE NE SAURONT ÊTRE TENUS POUR RESPONSABLES DES MOINDRES DOMMAGES SPÉCIAUX, DIRECTS, INDIRECTS, ETC. OU CONSÉCUTIFS A LA PERTE D'EXPLOITATION, DE DONNÉES OU DE BÉNÉFICES ; QU'IL S'AGISSE D'UNE RESPONSABILITÉ CONTRACTUELLE, D'UNE RESPONSABILITÉ CIVILE (EN CAS DE NÉGLIGENCE) OU D'UNE RESPONSABILITÉ DÉLICTUELLE ÉMANANT DE OU EN LIAISON AVEC L'UTILISATION DE CE LOGICIEL. Partie 2 : avis de copyright Networks Associates Technology, Inc. (BSD) Copyright © 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc Tous droits réservés. Toute redistribution et utilisation sous forme source ou binaire, avec ou sans modification, est autorisée sous réserve de satisfaction des conditions suivantes : * Les redistributions de code source doivent conserver l'avis de copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité suivante. * Les redistributions sous forme binaire doivent reproduire l'avis de copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité ci-dessous dans la documentation et/ou les autres documents fournis avec la distribution. * Ni le nom Networks Associates Technology, Inc ni les noms de ses collaborateurs ne doivent être utilisés pour assurer la promotion de produits dérivés de ce logiciel sans autorisation spécifique préalable et par écrit. 11 Marques commerciales et droits de reproduction 11-8 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 11.2 CE LOGICIEL EST FOURNI "EN L'ÉTAT" PAR LES DÉTENTEURS DU COPYRIGHT ET LEURS COLLABORATEURS ET TOUTES GARANTIES EXPRESSES OU IMPLICITES, Y COMPRIS MAIS SANS S'Y LIMITER LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE COMMERCIALITÉ ET D'ADÉQUATION À UN BESOIN PARTICULIER SONT EXCLUES. EN AUCUN CAS, LES DÉTENTEURS DU COPYRIGHT ET LES COLLABORATEURS NE SAURONT ÊTRE TENUS POUR RESPONSABLES DE TOUT DOMMAGE DIRECT, INDIRECT, ACCIDENTEL, SPÉCIAL, EXEMPLAIRE OU CONSÉCUTIF (Y COMPRIS, SANS TOUTEFOIS S'Y LIMITER, L'APPROVISIONNEMENT DE MARCHANDISES OU DE SERVICES DE REMPLACEMENT ; LA PERTE D'EXPLOITATION, DE DONNÉES, DE PROFITS OU L'INTERRUPTION D'ACTIVITÉ) QUELLE QU'EN SOIT LA CAUSE ET QUELLE QUE SOIT LA THÉORIE DE RESPONSABILITÉ, QU'IL S'AGISSE D'UNE RESPONSABILITÉ CONTRACTUELLE, RESPONSABILITÉ CIVILE ABSOLUE OU DÉLICTUELLE (Y COMPRIS EN CAS DE NÉGLIGENCE OU AUTRE) ÉMANANT DE L'UTILISATION DE CE LOGICIEL, MÊME S'ILS ONT ÉTÉ AVERTIS DE L'ÉVENTUALITÉ D'UN TEL DOMMAGE. Partie 3 : avis de copyright Cambridge Broadband Ltd. (BSD) Les portions de ce code sont sous copyright © 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd. Tous droits réservés. Toute redistribution et utilisation sous forme source ou binaire, avec ou sans modification, est autorisée sous réserve de satisfaction des conditions suivantes : * Les redistributions de code source doivent conserver l'avis de copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité suivante. * Les redistributions sous forme binaire doivent reproduire l'avis de copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité ci-dessous dans la documentation et/ou les autres documents fournis avec la distribution. * Le nom de Cambridge Broadband Ltd. ne doit pas être utilisé pour assurer la promotion de produits dérivés de ce logiciel sans autorisation spécifique préalable et par écrit. CE LOGICIEL EST FOURNIT "EN L'ÉTAT" PAR LE DÉTENTEUR DU COPYRIGHT ET TOUTES GARANTIES EXPRESSES OU IMPLICITES, Y COMPRIS MAIS SANS S'Y LIMITER LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET D'ADÉQUATION À UN BESOIN PARTICULIER SONT EXCLUES. EN AUCUN CAS, LE DÉTENTEUR DU COPYRIGHT NE SAURA ÊTRE TENU POUR RESPONSABLE DE TOUT DOMMAGE DIRECT, INDIRECT, ACCIDENTEL, SPÉCIAL, EXEMPLAIRE OU CONSÉCUTIF (Y COMPRIS, SANS TOUTEFOIS S'Y LIMITER, L'APPROVISIONNEMENT DE MARCHANDISES OU DE SERVICES DE REMPLACEMENT ; LA PERTE D'EXPLOITATION, DE DONNÉES, DE PROFITS OU L'INTERRUPTION D'ACTIVITÉ) QUELLE QU'EN SOIT LA CAUSE ET QUELLE QUE SOIT LA THÉORIE DE RESPONSABILITÉ, QU'IL S'AGISSE D'UNE RESPONSABILITÉ CONTRACTUELLE, RESPONSABILITÉ CIVILE ABSOLUE OU DÉLICTUELLE (Y COMPRIS EN CAS DE NÉGLIGENCE OU AUTRE) ÉMANANT DE L'UTILISATION DE CE LOGICIEL, MÊME S'IL A ÉTÉ AVERTI DE L'ÉVENTUALITÉ D'UN TEL DOMMAGE. Partie 4 : avis de copyright Sun Microsystems, Inc. (BSD) Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A. Tous droits réservés. L'utilisation est autorisée conformément aux clauses de la licence ci-dessous. Cette distribution peut comporter du matériel développé par des tiers. Sun, Sun Microsystems, le logo Sun et Solaris sont des marques commerciales ou des marques déposées enregistrées de Sun Microsystems, Inc. aux Etats-Unis et dans d'autres pays. Toute redistribution et utilisation sous forme source ou binaire, avec ou sans modification, est autorisée sous réserve de satisfaction des conditions suivantes : * Les redistributions de code source doivent conserver l'avis de copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité suivante. * Les redistributions sous forme binaire doivent reproduire l'avis de copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité ci-dessous dans la documentation et/ou les autres documents fournis avec la distribution. * Ni le nom Sun Microsystems, Inc ni les noms de ses collaborateurs ne doivent être utilisés pour assurer la promotion de produits dérivés de ce logiciel sans autorisation spécifique préalable et par écrit. CE LOGICIEL EST FOURNI "EN L'ÉTAT" PAR LES DÉTENTEURS DU COPYRIGHT ET LEURS COLLABORATEURS ET TOUTES GARANTIES EXPRESSES OU IMPLICITES, Y COMPRIS MAIS SANS S'Y LIMITER LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE COMMERCIALITÉ ET D'ADÉQUATION À UN BESOIN PARTICULIER SONT EXCLUES. EN AUCUN CAS, LES DÉTENTEURS DU COPYRIGHT ET LES COLLABORATEURS NE SAURONT ÊTRE TENUS POUR RESPONSABLES DE TOUT DOMMAGE DIRECT, INDIRECT, ACCIDENTEL, SPÉCIAL, EXEMPLAIRE OU CONSÉCUTIF (Y COMPRIS, SANS TOUTEFOIS S'Y LIMITER, L'APPROVISIONNEMENT DE MARCHANDISES OU DE SERVICES DE REMPLACEMENT ; LA PERTE D'EXPLOITATION, DE DONNÉES, DE PROFITS OU L'INTERRUPTION D'ACTIVITÉ) QUELLE QU'EN SOIT LA CAUSE ET QUELLE QUE SOIT LA THÉORIE DE RESPONSABILITÉ, QU'IL S'AGISSE D'UNE RESPONSABILITÉ CONTRACTUELLE, RESPONSABILITÉ CIVILE ABSOLUE OU DÉLICTUELLE (Y COMPRIS EN CAS DE NÉGLIGENCE OU AUTRE) ÉMANANT DE L'UTILISATION DE CE LOGICIEL, MÊME S'ILS ONT ÉTÉ AVERTIS DE L'ÉVENTUALITÉ D'UN TEL DOMMAGE. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 11-9 11.2 Marques commerciales et droits de reproduction 11 Partie 5 : avis de copyright Sparta, Inc (BSD) Copyright © 2003-2004, Sparta, Inc. Tous droits réservés. Toute redistribution et utilisation sous forme source ou binaire, avec ou sans modification, est autorisée sous réserve de satisfaction des conditions suivantes : * Les redistributions de code source doivent conserver l'avis de copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité suivante. * Les redistributions sous forme binaire doivent reproduire l'avis de copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité ci-dessous dans la documentation et/ou les autres documents fournis avec la distribution. * Ni le nom Sparta, Inc ni les noms de ses collaborateurs ne doivent être utilisés pour assurer la promotion de produits dérivés de ce logiciel sans autorisation spécifique préalable et par écrit. CE LOGICIEL EST FOURNI "EN L'ÉTAT" PAR LES DÉTENTEURS DU COPYRIGHT ET LEURS COLLABORATEURS ET TOUTES GARANTIES EXPRESSES OU IMPLICITES, Y COMPRIS MAIS SANS S'Y LIMITER LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE COMMERCIALITÉ ET D'ADÉQUATION À UN BESOIN PARTICULIER SONT EXCLUES. EN AUCUN CAS, LES DÉTENTEURS DU COPYRIGHT ET LES COLLABORATEURS NE SAURONT ÊTRE TENUS POUR RESPONSABLES DE TOUT DOMMAGE DIRECT, INDIRECT, ACCIDENTEL, SPÉCIAL, EXEMPLAIRE OU CONSÉCUTIF (Y COMPRIS, SANS TOUTEFOIS S'Y LIMITER, L'APPROVISIONNEMENT DE MARCHANDISES OU DE SERVICES DE REMPLACEMENT ; LA PERTE D'EXPLOITATION, DE DONNÉES, DE PROFITS OU L'INTERRUPTION D'ACTIVITÉ) QUELLE QU'EN SOIT LA CAUSE ET QUELLE QUE SOIT LA THÉORIE DE RESPONSABILITÉ, QU'IL S'AGISSE D'UNE RESPONSABILITÉ CONTRACTUELLE, RESPONSABILITÉ CIVILE ABSOLUE OU DÉLICTUELLE (Y COMPRIS EN CAS DE NÉGLIGENCE OU AUTRE) ÉMANANT DE L'UTILISATION DE CE LOGICIEL, MÊME S'ILS ONT ÉTÉ AVERTIS DE L'ÉVENTUALITÉ D'UN TEL DOMMAGE. Partie 6 : avis de copyright Cisco/BUPTNIC (BSD) Copyright © 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications. Tous droits réservés. Toute redistribution et utilisation sous forme source ou binaire, avec ou sans modification, est autorisée sous réserve de satisfaction des conditions suivantes : * Les redistributions de code source doivent conserver l'avis de copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité suivante. * Les redistributions sous forme binaire doivent reproduire l'avis de copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité ci-dessous dans la documentation et/ou les autres documents fournis avec la distribution. * Ni le nom Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts et Telecommunications, ni les noms de leurs collaborateurs ne doivent être utilisés pour assurer la promotion de produits dérivés de ce logiciel sans autorisation spécifique préalable et par écrit. CE LOGICIEL EST FOURNI "EN L'ÉTAT" PAR LES DÉTENTEURS DU COPYRIGHT ET LEURS COLLABORATEURS ET TOUTES GARANTIES EXPRESSES OU IMPLICITES, Y COMPRIS MAIS SANS S'Y LIMITER LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE COMMERCIABILITÉ ET D'ADÉQUATION À UN BESOIN PARTICULIER SONT EXCLUES. EN AUCUN CAS, LES DÉTENTEURS DU COPYRIGHT ET LES COLLABORATEURS NE SAURONT ÊTRE TENUS POUR RESPONSABLES DE TOUT DOMMAGE DIRECT, INDIRECT, ACCIDENTEL, SPÉCIAL, EXEMPLAIRE OU CONSÉCUTIF (Y COMPRIS, SANS TOUTEFOIS S'Y LIMITER, L'APPROVISIONNEMENT DE MARCHANDISES OU DE SERVICES DE REMPLACEMENT ; LA PERTE D'EXPLOITATION, DE DONNÉES, DE PROFITS OU L'INTERRUPTION D'ACTIVITÉ) QUELLE QU'EN SOIT LA CAUSE ET QUELLE QUE SOIT LA THÉORIE DE RESPONSABILITÉ, QU'IL S'AGISSE D'UNE RESPONSABILITÉ CONTRACTUELLE, RESPONSABILITÉ CIVILE ABSOLUE OU DÉLICTUELLE (Y COMPRIS EN CAS DE NÉGLIGENCE OU AUTRE) ÉMANANT DE L'UTILISATION DE CE LOGICIEL, MÊME S'ILS ONT ÉTÉ AVERTIS DE L'ÉVENTUALITÉ D'UN TEL DOMMAGE. 11 Marques commerciales et droits de reproduction 11-10 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 11.2 Kerberos Copyright © 1985-2007 par le Massachusetts Institute of Technology. Tous droits réservés. L'exportation de ce logiciel hors des États-Unis d'Amérique peut nécessiter une licence spéciale du Gouvernement des États-Unis. Il est de la responsabilité de chaque personne ou entreprise envisageant l'exportation de se procurer une telle licence avant toute exportation. DANS LE CADRE DE CETTE CONTRAINTE, vous avez l'autorisation d'utiliser, de copier, de modifier et de distribuer ce logiciel et sa documentation à tout effet et sans contrepartie financière à condition que la mention de copyright ci-dessus figure sur tous les exemplaires et que, tant la mention de copyright ci-dessus que la mention d'autorisation apparaissent sur la documentation qui les accompagne, et que le nom de M.I.T. ne soit pas utilisé dans de la publicité ou dans la publicité relative à la distribution du logiciel sans autorisation spécifique écrite préalable. Par ailleurs, si vous modifiez ce logiciel, vous devez étiqueter votre logiciel en tant que logiciel modifié et le distribuer de manière à ne pas le confondre avec le logiciel MIT d'origine. M.I.T. ne fait aucune déclaration quant à l'adéquation de ce logiciel à quelque usage que ce soit. Il est fourni "tel quel" sans garantie expresse ni implicite. CE LOGICIEL EST FOURNI "TEL QUEL" ET SANS GARANTIE IMPLICITE EXPRESSE ET IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, SANS LIMITATION, LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE QUALITE MARCHANDE ET D'APTITUDE POUR UNE APPLICATION SPECIFIQUE. Les fichiers de code source individuels sont la propriété (copyright) de MIT, Cygnus Support, Novell, OpenVision Technologies, Oracle, Red Hat, Sun Microsystems, FundsXpress et autres. Project Athena, Athena, Athena MUSE, Discuss, Hesiod, Kerberos, Moira, and Zephyr sont des marques commerciales de l'Institut technologique du Massachusetts (MIT). Aucun usage commercial de ces marques commerciales ne peut être fait sans l'autorisation écrite préalable du MIT. "Usage commercial" désigne l'utilisation d'un nom dans un produit ou autre pour faire des bénéfices. Cela N'EMPÊCHE PAS une entreprise commerciale de se référer aux marques commerciales du MIT avec pour objet de transmettre les informations (sachant qu'une telle action implique la reconnaissance de leur statut de marque commerciale). Des portions de src/lib/crypto ont le copyright suivant : Copyright © 1998 par la FundsXpress, INC. Tous droits réservés. L'exportation de ce logiciel hors des États-Unis d'Amérique peut nécessiter une licence spéciale du Gouvernement des États-Unis. Il est de la responsabilité de chaque personne ou entreprise envisageant l'exportation de se procurer une telle licence avant toute exportation. DANS LE CADRE DE CETTE CONTRAINTE, vous avez l'autorisation d'utiliser, de copier, de modifier et de distribuer ce logiciel et sa documentation à tout effet et sans contrepartie financière à condition que la mention de copyright ci-dessus figure sur tous les exemplaires et que, tant la mention de copyright ci-dessus que la mention d'autorisation apparaissent sur la documentation qui les accompagne, et que le nom de FundsXpress ne soit pas utilisé dans de la publicité ou dans la publicité relative à la distribution du logiciel sans autorisation spécifique écrite préalable. FundsXpress ne fait aucune déclaration quant à l'adéquation de ce logiciel à quelque usage que ce soit. Il est fourni "tel quel" sans garantie expresse ni implicite. CE LOGICIEL EST FOURNI "TEL QUEL" ET SANS GARANTIE IMPLICITE EXPRESSE ET IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, SANS LIMITATION, LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE QUALITE MARCHANDE ET D'APTITUDE POUR UNE APPLICATION SPECIFIQUE. L'implémentation du générateur Yarrow de nombres pseudo-aléatoires dans src/lib/crypto/yarrow possède le copyright suivant : Copyright 2000 par Zero-Knowledge Systems, Inc. L'autorisation d'utiliser, de copier, de modifier et de distribuer et de vendre ce logiciel et sa documentation à tout effet et sans contrepartie financière à condition que la mention de copyright ci-dessus figure sur tous les exemplaires et que, tant la mention de copyright ci-dessus que la mention d'autorisation apparaissent sur la documentation qui les accompagne, et que le nom de Zero-Knowledge Systems, Inc. ne soit pas utilisé dans de la publicité ou dans la publicité relative à la distribution du logiciel sans autorisation spécifique écrite préalable. Zero-Knowledge Systems, Inc. ne fait aucune déclaration quant à l'adéquation de ce logiciel à quelque usage que ce soit. Il est fourni "tel quel" sans garantie expresse ni implicite. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 11-11 11.2 Marques commerciales et droits de reproduction 11 ZERO-KNOWLEDGE SYSTEMS, INC. RENONCE À TOUTE GARANTIE EU ÉGARD À CE LOGICIEL, Y COMPRIS TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET D'APTITUDE, EN AUCUN CAS ? L'implémentation de l'algorithme de cryptage AES dans src/lib/crypto/aes possède le copyright suivant : Copyright © 2001, Dr Brian Gladman , Worcester, UK. Tous droits réservés. TERMES DE LICENCE La distribution et l'utilisation libres de ce logiciel tant sous forme source que binaire est autorisée (avec ou sans modifications) sous réserve que : 1. Les distributions de code source conservent l'avis de copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité suivante ; 2. les distributions sous forme binaire conservent l'avis de copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité suivante dans la documentation et/ou tout autre document associé ; 3. le nom du titulaire du copyright ne soit pas utilisé pour exploiter des produits élaborés à l'aide de ce logiciel sans autorisation écrite spécifique. DÉCHARGE DE RESPONSABILITÉ Ce logiciel est fourni 'tel quel' sans garantie explicite ou implicite eu égard à la moindre propriété, y compris, sans toutefois s'y limiter, l'exactitude et l'aptitude à un besoin particulier. Des portions contribuées par Red Hat, y compris l'ossature des plug-ins de pré-authentification, contiennent le copyright suivant : Copyright © 2006 Red Hat, Inc. Copyright de portions © 2006 Massachusetts Institute of Technology Tous droits réservés. Toute redistribution et utilisation sous forme source ou binaire, avec ou sans modification, est autorisée sous réserve de satisfaction des conditions suivantes : * Les redistributions de code source doivent conserver l'avis de copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité suivante. * Les redistributions sous forme binaire doivent reproduire l'avis de copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité ci-dessous dans la documentation et/ou les autres documents fournis avec la distribution. * Ni le nom red Hat, Inc ni les noms de ses collaborateurs ne doivent être utilisés pour assurer la promotion de produits dérivés de ce logiciel sans autorisation spécifique préalable et par écrit. CE LOGICIEL EST FOURNI "EN L'ÉTAT" PAR LES DÉTENTEURS DU COPYRIGHT ET LEURS COLLABORATEURS ET TOUTES GARANTIES EXPRESSES OU IMPLICITES, Y COMPRIS MAIS SANS S'Y LIMITER LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE COMMERCIABILITÉ ET D'ADÉQUATION À UN BESOIN PARTICULIER SONT EXCLUES. EN AUCUN CAS, LE DÉTENTEUR DU COPYRIGHT ET LES COLLABORATEURS NE SAURONT ÊTRE TENUS POUR RESPONSABLES DE TOUT DOMMAGE DIRECT, INDIRECT, ACCIDENTEL, SPÉCIAL, EXEMPLAIRE OU CONSÉCUTIF (Y COMPRIS, SANS TOUTEFOIS S'Y LIMITER, L'APPROVISIONNEMENT DE MARCHANDISES OU DE SERVICES DE REMPLACEMENT ; LA PERTE D'EXPLOITATION, DE DONNÉES, DE PROFITS OU L'INTERRUPTION D'ACTIVITÉ) QUELLE QU'EN SOIT LA CAUSE ET QUELLE QUE SOIT LA THÉORIE DE RESPONSABILITÉ, QU'IL S'AGISSE D'UNE RESPONSABILITÉ CONTRACTUELLE, RESPONSABILITÉ CIVILE ABSOLUE OU DÉLICTUELLE (Y COMPRIS EN CAS DE NÉGLIGENCE OU AUTRE) ÉMANANT DE L'UTILISATION DE CE LOGICIEL, MÊME SI VOUS ÊTES AVERTIS DE L'ÉVENTUALITÉ D'UN TEL DOMMAGE. Des portions financées par le "Sandia National Laboratory" et développée par le "Center for Information Technology Integration" de l'Université du Michigan, y compris l'implémentation PKINIT sont soumises à la licence suivante : COPYRIGHT © 2006-2007 LES RESPONSABLES DE L'UNIVERSITÉ DU MICHIGAN Tous droits réservés. 11 Marques commerciales et droits de reproduction 11-12 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 11.2 Une autorisation est accordée pour utiliser, copier, créer des ouvrages dérivés et redistribuer ce logiciel et ses ouvrages dérivés à tout effet tant que le nom de l'Université du Michigan n'est pas utilisé dans la publicité ou dans la publicité relative à l'utilisation ou à la distribution de ce logiciel sans autorisation spécifique écrite préalable. Si l'avis de copyright ci-dessus ou toute autre identification de l'Université du Michigan est incluse dans une copie d'une quelconque portion de ce logiciel, la décharge de responsabilité ci-dessous doit également y figurer. CE LOGICIEL EST FOURNI TEL QUEL, SANS DÉCLARATION DE L'UNIVERSITÉ DU MICHIGAN QUANT À SON APTITUDE À QUELQU'OBJET QUE CE SOIT ET SANS GARANTIE DE L'UNIVERSITÉ du MICHIGAN, EXPRESSE OU IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS SANS LIMITATION LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET D'APTITUDE À UN OBJET PARTICULIER. LES RESPONSABLES DE L'UNIVERSITÉ DU MICHIGAN NE SAURONT ÊTRE TENUS POUR RESPONSABLES DE TOUT DOMMAGE, Y COMPRIS LES DOMMAGES SPÉCIAUX, INDIRECTS, ACCIDENTELS OU CONSÉCUTIFS, EU ÉGARD À LA MOINDRE RÉCLAMATION ÉMANANT DE OU EN RELATION AVEC L'UTILISATION DE CE LOGICIEL, MÊME SI LA PERSONNE A ÉTÉ PRÉVENUE OU EST PRÉVENUE PLUS TARD DE L'ÉVENTUALITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES. Le fichier pkcs11.h inclus dans le code PKINIT possède la licence suivante : Copyright 2006 g10 Code GmbH Copyright 2006 Andreas Jellinghaus Ce logiciel est un gratuiciel ; en guise d'exception spéciale, l'auteur accorde la permission illimitée de le copier et/ou de le distribuer, avec ou sans modifications, tant que cet avis est conservé. Ce fichier est distribué dans l'espoir qu'il sera utile, mais SANS AUCUNE GARANTIE, dans la limite autorisée par la loi ; sans même la garantie implicite, de QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ou D'APTITUDE À UN OBJET SPÉCIFIQUE. WPA-Supplicant Copyright © 2003-2005, Jouni Malinen et collaborateurs Tous droits réservés. Toute redistribution et utilisation sous forme source ou binaire, avec ou sans modification, est autorisée sous réserve de satisfaction des conditions suivantes : 1. Les redistributions de code source doivent conserver l'avis de copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité suivante. 2. Les redistributions sous forme binaire doivent reproduire l'avis de copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité ci-dessous dans la documentation et/ou les autres documents fournis avec la distribution. 3. Il n'est pas permis d'utiliser le nom du/des titulaire(s) de copyright énumérés ci-dessus ni les noms de ses/leurs collaborateurs pour exploiter ou promouvoir des produits dérivés de ce logiciel sans autorisation écrite préalable et spécifique. CE LOGICIEL EST FOURNI "EN L'ÉTAT" PAR LES DÉTENTEURS DU COPYRIGHT ET LEURS COLLABORATEURS ET TOUTES GARANTIES EXPRESSES OU IMPLICITES, Y COMPRIS MAIS SANS S'Y LIMITER LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE COMMERCIABILITÉ ET D'ADÉQUATION À UN BESOIN PARTICULIER SONT EXCLUES. EN AUCUN CAS, LE DÉTENTEUR DU COPYRIGHT ET LES COLLABORATEURS NE SAURONT ÊTRE TENUS POUR RESPONSABLES DE TOUT DOMMAGE DIRECT, INDIRECT, ACCIDENTEL, SPÉCIAL, EXEMPLAIRE OU CONSÉCUTIF (Y COMPRIS, SANS TOUTEFOIS S'Y LIMITER, L'APPROVISIONNEMENT DE MARCHANDISES OU DE SERVICES DE REMPLACEMENT ; LA PERTE D'EXPLOITATION, DE DONNÉES, DE PROFITS OU L'INTERRUPTION D'ACTIVITÉ) QUELLE QU'EN SOIT LA CAUSE ET QUELLE QUE SOIT LA THÉORIE DE RESPONSABILITÉ, QU'IL S'AGISSE D'UNE RESPONSABILITÉ CONTRACTUELLE, RESPONSABILITÉ CIVILE ABSOLUE OU DÉLICTUELLE (Y COMPRIS EN CAS DE NÉGLIGENCE OU AUTRE) ÉMANANT DE L'UTILISATION DE CE LOGICIEL, MÊME SI VOUS ÊTES AVERTIS DE L'ÉVENTUALITÉ D'UN TEL DOMMAGE. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 11-13 11.2 Marques commerciales et droits de reproduction 11 Mersenne Twister Un programme C pour MT19937, avec initialisation améliorée 2002/1/26. Codé par Takuji Nishimura et Makoto Matsumoto. Avant toute utilisation, initialisez l'état en utilisant init_genrand(seed) ou init_by_array(init_key, key_length). Copyright © 1997-2002, Makoto Matsumoto and Takuji Nishimura, Tous droits réservés. Toute redistribution et utilisation sous forme source ou binaire, avec ou sans modification, est autorisée sous réserve de satisfaction des conditions suivantes : 1. Les redistributions de code source doivent conserver l'avis de copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité suivante. 2. Les redistributions sous forme binaire doivent reproduire l'avis de copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité ci-dessous dans la documentation et/ou les autres documents fournis avec la distribution. 3. Les noms des contribuants ne peuvent pas être utilisés pour parrainer ou promouvoir des produits dérivés de ce logiciel sans autorisation préalable écrite et spécifique. CE LOGICIEL EST FOURNI "EN L'ÉTAT" PAR LES DÉTENTEURS DU COPYRIGHT ET LEURS COLLABORATEURS ET TOUTES GARANTIES EXPRESSES OU IMPLICITES, Y COMPRIS MAIS SANS S'Y LIMITER LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE COMMERCIABILITÉ ET D'ADÉQUATION À UN BESOIN PARTICULIER SONT EXCLUES. EN AUCUN CAS, LE DÉTENTEUR DU COPYRIGHT ET LES COLLABORATEURS NE SAURONT ÊTRE TENUS POUR RESPONSABLES DE TOUT DOMMAGE DIRECT, INDIRECT, ACCIDENTEL, SPÉCIAL, EXEMPLAIRE OU CONSÉCUTIF (Y COMPRIS, SANS TOUTEFOIS S'Y LIMITER, L'APPROVISIONNEMENT DE MARCHANDISES OU DE SERVICES DE REMPLACEMENT ; LA PERTE D'EXPLOITATION, DE DONNÉES, DE PROFITS OU L'INTERRUPTION D'ACTIVITÉ) QUELLE QU'EN SOIT LA CAUSE ET QUELLE QUE SOIT LA THÉORIE DE RESPONSABILITÉ, QU'IL S'AGISSE D'UNE RESPONSABILITÉ CONTRACTUELLE, RESPONSABILITÉ CIVILE ABSOLUE OU DÉLICTUELLE (Y COMPRIS EN CAS DE NÉGLIGENCE OU AUTRE) ÉMANANT DE L'UTILISATION DE CE LOGICIEL, MÊME SI VOUS ÊTES AVERTIS DE L'ÉVENTUALITÉ D'UN TEL DOMMAGE. Toute réaction en retour est la bienvenue. http://www.math.sci.hiroshima-u.ac.jp/~m-mat/MT/emt.html email : m-mat @ math.sci.hiroshima-u.ac.jp (remove space) Remarque Toute reproduction partielle ou totale du guide de l'utilisateur est interdite sans autorisation. Les informations figurant dans le guide de l'utilisateur sont susceptibles d'être modifiées sans préavis. 11 Licence d'utilisation du logiciel 11-14 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 11.3 11.3 Licence d'utilisation du logiciel Ce package contient les éléments suivants fournis par KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. (KMBT) : logiciel inclus comme partie intégrante du système d'impression ("Logiciel d'impression"), les données vectorisées numériquement encodées et lisibles par la machine codées au format spécial et sous forme cryptée ("Programmes de polices"), un autre logiciel fonctionnant sur un système informatique à utiliser en association avec le logiciel d'impression ("Logiciel Hôte") ainsi que de la documentation écrite explicative ("Documentation"). L'utilisation du terme "Logiciel" renvoie au logiciel d'impression, aux programmes de polices et/ou au logiciel hôte et regroupe également l'ensemble des mises à jour, des versions modifiées, des ajouts et des copies du logiciel. L'octroi de licence du Logiciel est soumis aux termes du présent contrat. KMBT vous accorde une sous-licence non-exclusive pour utiliser le Logiciel et la Documentation sous réserve que vous respectiez les points suivants : 1. Vous pouvez utiliser le Logiciel et les programmes de polices associés pour reproduire des images sur le ou les périphérique(s) de sortie sous licence, uniquement pour vos propres besoins professionnels internes. 2. En plus de la licence pour les Programmes de polices mentionnés à la section 1 ci-dessus, vous pouvez utiliser les programmes de polices romaines pour reproduire les poids, les styles et les versions des lettres, chiffres, caractères et symboles ("Types de caractères") sur l'afficheur ou l'écran pour vos propres besoins professionnels internes. 3. Vous pouvez faire une copie de sauvegarde du Logiciel Hôte, à condition que votre copie de sauvegarde ne soit pas installée ni utilisée sur un autre ordinateur. Par dérogation aux restrictions cidessus, vous pouvez installer le logiciel sur plusieurs ordinateurs uniquement pour utilisation avec un ou plusieurs systèmes d'impression fonctionnant avec le Logiciel d'impression. 4. Vous pouvez céder ses droits dans le cadre de ce contrat à un cessionnaire de tous les droits et intérêts que le titulaire de la licence possède sur ledit Logiciel ou ladite Documentation ("Cessionnaire") sous réserve de remettre au cessionnaire toutes les copies dudit Logiciel ou de ladite Documentation. et le cessionnaire accepte d'être lié par toutes les clauses et conditions du présent Contrat. 5. Vous vous engagez à ne pas modifier, adapter ni traduire le Logiciel et la Documentation. 6. Vous acceptez de ne pas essayer de modifier, désassembler, décoder, de décompiler le Logiciel ni de faire de l'ingénierie inverse. 7. Le titre et la propriété du Logiciel et de la Documentation restent ceux de KMBT et de son concédant de licence. 8. Les marques commerciales seront utilisées conformément aux pratiques en cours, y compris en ce qui concerne l'identification du nom du propriétaire de la marque commerciale. Les marques commerciales ne peuvent être utilisées que pour identifier les impressions produites par le Logiciel. L'utilisation d'une quelconque marque commerciale ne vous accorde aucun droit de propriété sur cette dernière. 9. Vous n'avez pas le droit de louer, donner à bail, sous-licencier, prêter ni transférer des versions ou des copies du Logiciel que le Concessionnaire n'utilise pas, ou un Logiciel enregistré sur un support non utilisé, sauf en tant que partie du transfert permanent de tout le Logiciel et de toute la Documentation tel que décrit ci-dessus. 10. EN AUCUN CAS, KMBT OU SON CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE NE SAURAIT ÊTRE TENU POUR RESPONSABLE A VOTRE PLACE EN CAS DU MOINDRE DOMMAGE IMMATÉRIEL, ACCESSOIRE INDIRECT, DOMMAGE-INTERÊTS PUNITIF OU SPÉCIAL, Y COMPRIS LES PERTES DE BÉNÉFICES OU LES PERTES D'ÉCONOMIES, MÊME SI LA POSSIBILITE DE TELS DOMMAGES A ÉTÉ SIGNALÉ A KMBT OU EN CAS DE PLAINTE D'UN TIERS. KMBT OU SON CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE DÉMENT TOUTES GARANTIES QUANT AU LOGICIEL, EXPLICITE OU IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, SANS RESTRICTION, TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE DE VALEUR COMMERCIALE, D'APTITUDE À UN EMPLOI PARTICULIER, TOUTE PROPRIÉTÉ ET NON-VIOLATION DE DROITS DE TIERS. CERTAINS ÉTATS OU JURIDICTIONS N'AUTORISANT PAS L'EXCLUSION OU LA LIMITATION DES DOMMAGES ACCIDENTELS, CONSÉCUTIFS OU SPÉCIAUX, LES LIMITATIONS SUSMENTIONNÉES PEUVENT NE PAS S'APPLIQUER À VOUS. 11. Avis aux utilisateurs finaux appartenant à l'administration US : le Logiciel est un "article commercial" tel que défini dans la disposition 48 C.F.R. 2.101 et comprend le "logiciel commercial" et la "documentation du logiciel commercial" tels que définis dans la disposition 48 C.F.R. 12.212. En accord avec les termes du 48 C.F.R. 12.212 et 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 à 227.7202-4, tous les utilisateurs finals du gouvernement américain achètent le Logiciel uniquement avec les droits énoncés au présent. 12. Vous acceptez de ne pas exporter le Logiciel sous quelque forme que ce soit en infraction de toute législation et réglementation en vigueur en matière de contrôle des exportations de n'importe quel pays. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 11-15 11.4 À propos de Adobe Color Profile 11 11.4 À propos de Adobe Color Profile ADOBE SYSTEMS INCORPORATED CONTRAT DE LICENCE COLOR PROFILE AVIS À l'INTENTION DE L'UTILISATEUR : VEUILLEZ LIRE CE CONTRAT ATTENTIVEMENT. EN UTILISANT TOUT OU PARTIE DE CE LOGICIEL, VOUS ACCEPTEZ LA TOTALITÉ DES TERMES ET CONDITIONS DU PRÉSENT CONTRAT. SI VOUS N'ACCEPTEZ PAS LES TERMES ET CONDITIONS DU PRÉSENT CONTRAT, N'UTILISEZ PAS CE LOGICIEL. 1. DÉFINITIONS : Dans le présent contrat, le terme "Adobe" désigne Adobe Systems Incorporated, une société du Delaware, sise 345 Park Avenue, San José, Californie 95110. "Logiciel" désigne le logiciel et tous les éléments associés qui accompagnent ce contrat. 2. LICENCE Dans les limites établies par le présent contrat, Adobe vous accorde le droit universel, nonexclusif, non-cessible, d'utiliser le Logiciel sans contrepartie de royalties et de le reproduire et de l'afficher en public. Adobe vous accorde aussi le droit de distribuer le Logiciel seulement (a) intégré à des fichiers image informatiques intégrés, ou (b) tout seul. Aucune autre distribution du Logiciel n'est autorisée ; y compris mais sans s'y limiter, la distribution du Logiciel lorsqu'il est intégré ou associé comme partie d'un logiciel d'application. Tous les profils individuels doivent être référencés par leur chaîne de description de Profil ICC. Vous n'êtes pas autorisé à modifier le Logiciel. Adobe n'est tenu à aucune obligation de fournir une assistance aux termes de ce contrat, y compris les mises à niveau ou les futures versions du Logiciel. Aux termes de ce contrat, il ne vous est conféré aucun droit sur le Logiciel au titre de la propriété intellectuelle. Les seuls droits sur le Logiciel qui vous sont accordés sont ceux qui le sont dans le cadre du présent contrat. 3. DISTRIBUTION Si vous choisissez de distribuer le Logiciel, vous devez le faire en sachant que vous acceptez de garantir Adobe contre toute perte, préjudice ou charges résultant de toute plainte, recours ou actions en justice au titre de la dite distribution, y compris mais sans s'y limiter, votre défaut à vous conformer aux termes de la présente Section 3. Si vous distribuez le Logiciel de manière individuelle, vous devez le faire en conformité avec les termes du présent Contrat ou avec votre propre accord de licence qui (a) satisfait aux termes et conditions de ce Contrat ; (b) qui exclut effectivement toute garantie et conditions, expresse ou implicite, pour le compte d'Adobe ; (c) qui rejette effectivement toute responsabilité pour dommages pour le compte d'Adobe ; (d) qui mentionne que toute disposition différente de celles du présent Contrat est accordée par vous seul et non par Adobe et (e) qui indique que le Logiciel est disponible auprès de vous et auprès d'Adobe et informe les détenteurs de la licence comment l'obtenir de manière raisonnable ou par des moyens fréquemment usités pour l'échange de logiciels. Tout Logiciel distribué doit inclure les avis de copyright d'Adobe tels qu'inclus dans le Logiciel que vous a fourni Adobe. 4. EXCLUSION DE GARANTIE Adobe vous concède le droit d'utiliser le Logiciel "TEL QUEL". Adobe ne prend aucun engagement quant à l'adéquation du Logiciel à vous permettre d'obtenir un résultat particulier. Adobe ne saurait être tenu responsable de toute perte ou dommage résultant de ce Contrat ou de la distribution ou de l'utilisation du Logiciel ou des autres éléments du produit. ADOBE ET SES FOURNISSEURS NE PEUVENT PAS GARANTIR ET NE GARANTISSENT DONC PAS LES PERFORMANCES OU LES RÉSULTATS QUE VOUS POUVEZ OBTENIR EN UTILISANT LE LOGICIEL, À L'EXCEPTION DE TOUTE GARANTIE, CONDITION, DÉCLARATION OU TERME, QUI, DE PAR LA LOI APPLICABLE DANS VOTRE JURIDICTION ET AU NIVEAU PRÉVU PAR CELLE-CI, NE SAURAIT OU NE POURRAIT ÊTRE EXCLUE, ET ADOBE ET SES FOURNISSEURS N'ACCORDENT AUCUNE GARANTIE, CONDITION, DÉCLARATION OU TERME, EXPRESS OU IMPLICITE, QUE CE SOIT DE PAR LA LÉGISLATION, DROIT PRIVÉ, COUTUME, USAGE OU AUTRE EN CE QUI CONCERNE LES AUTRES ASPECTS, NOTAMMENT MAIS SANS S'Y LIMITER, L'ABSENCE DE VIOLATION DES DROITS DE LA TIERCE PARTIE, L'INTÉGRATION, LA QUALITÉ SATISFAISANTE OU L'ADÉQUATION À UN BESOIN PARTICULIER. IL EST POSSIBLE QUE VOUS PUISSIEZ VOUS PRÉVALOIR DE DROITS SUPPLÉMENTAIRES SELON LA JURIDICTION DONT VOUS DÉPENDEZ ; Les clauses des Sections 4, 5 et 6 resteront en vigueur après l'extinction du Contrat quelle qu'en soit la cause, mais cela ne saurait en rien constituer ou impliquer un droit ininterrompu à utiliser le Logiciel postérieurement à l'expiration du présent Contrat. 11 À propos de Adobe Color Profile 11-16 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 11.4 5. LIMITATION DE RESPONSABILITÉ EN AUCUN CAS ADOBE OU SES FOURNISSEURS NE POURRA ÊTRE TENU POUR RESPONSABLE ENVERS VOUS DE DOMMAGES, RÉCLAMATIONS OU COÛTS, QUELS QU'ILS SOIENT OU DE TOUT DOMMAGE DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSÉCUTIF, OU DE TOUT MANQUE À GAGNER, MÊME SI UN REPRÉSENTANT D'ADOBE A ÉTÉ AVERTI DE LA POSSIBILITÉ DE CES PERTES, DOMMAGES, RÉCLAMATIONS OU COÛTS OU DE TOUTE RÉCLAMATION DÉPOSÉE PAR UN TIERS. LES LIMITATIONS ET EXCLUSIONS CI-DESSUS S'APPLIQUENT DANS LA LIMITE PRÉVUE PAR LA LOI APPLICABLE DANS VOTRE JURIDICTION. LA RESPONSABILITÉ CONJOINTE D'ADOBE ET DE SES FOURNISSEURS AUX TERMES DE OU EN RELATION AVEC CE CONTRAT SERA LIMITÉE AU MONTANT PAYÉ POUR LE LOGICIEL. Rien dans le présent Contrat ne limite la responsabilité d'Adobe envers vous en cas de décès ou de dommages corporels causés par la négligence d'Adobe ou en cas de délit de dol (tromperie). Adobe agit au nom de ses fournisseurs aux fins d'exclure et/ou de limiter les obligations, garanties et responsabilités telles que prévues dans le présent Contrat, mais à aucun égard ni à aucune autre fin. 6. MARQUES COMMERCIALES Adobe et le logo Adobe sont les marques déposées ou les marques commerciales d'Adobe aux USA et dans d'autres pays. Sauf pour y faire référence, il n'est pas autorisé d'utiliser ces marques commerciales pas plus que toute autre marque commerciale ou logo d'Adobe sans en avoir obtenu préalablement le consentement écrit d'Adobe. 7. DURÉE Ce contrat est en vigueur jusqu'à ce qu'il prenne fin. Adobe a le droit de mettre un terme au présent Contrat immédiatement en cas de manquement de votre part à une quelconque disposition au présent. En cas de semblable résiliation, vous devez retourner à Adobe toutes les copies intégrales ou partielles du Logiciel en votre possession ou sous votre contrôle. 8. RÈGLEMENTATIONS ADMINISTRATIVES Si une partie du Logiciel est considérée comme un produit soumis à l'exportation contrôlée aux termes de l'Export Administration Act des USA ou de toute autre législation, restriction ou réglementation concernant l'exportation (ci-après désignées "Lois relatives à l'Exportation"), vous déclarez et confirmez que vous n'êtes pas citoyen d'une nation sous embargo et que vous n'y résidez pas (notamment mais non exhaustivement, Iran, Irak, Syrie, Soudan, Libye, Cuba, Corée du Nord et Serbie) et que rien d'autre dans les Lois relatives à l'Exportation ne vous empêche de recevoir le Logiciel légalement. Tous les droits d'utilisation du Logiciel sont concédés avec la condition que ces droits sont frappés de caducité en cas de violation d'une des clauses de ce contrat. 9. NATIONALITÉ DU CONTRAT Le présent contrat sera régi et interprété selon le droit positif en vigueur dans l'état de Californie et qui préside aux contrats conclus et destinés à être exécutés en Californie entre résidents Californiens. Ce contrat ne sera pas régi par les règles en matière de conflit de lois d'une juridiction quelconque ni par la Convention des Nations Unies sur les contrats de vente internationale de marchandises dont l'application est expressément exclue. Tous les litiges résultant de ou en rapport avec ou dans le cadre de ce Contrat seront exclusivement portés à l'arbitrage de la juridiction du Comté de Santa Clara, Californie, USA. 10. DISPOSITIONS GÉNÉRALES Vous ne pouvez céder vos droits ou obligations concédés dans le cadre de ce Contrat sans l'accord écrit préalable d'Adobe. Aucune des clauses de ce Contrat ne sera réputée avoir été suspendue par tout écrit ou assentiment de la part d'Adobe, ses agents, ou ses employés, sauf à l'avoir été par un document écrit visé par un signataire autorisé d'Adobe. S'il existe un conflit de langue entre ce Contrat et tout autre contrat inclus dans le Logiciel, les dispositions dudit contrat inclus s'appliqueront. Si vous ou Adobe avez recours à des membres du barreau pour faire appliquer tout droit né de ou en relation avec ce Contrat, la partie qui aura été confirmée dans son droit sera fondée à récupérer les honoraires qu'elle aura versés. Vous reconnaissez avoir lu et compris ce Contrat et qu'il constitue la déclaration complète et exclusive de votre contrat avec Adobe se substituant à tout accord antérieur, oral ou écrit, conclu entre Adobe et vous eu égard à la concession d'une licence du Logiciel en votre faveur. Aucune modification des termes de ce Contrat ne sera opposable à Adobe à moins d'en avoir obtenu l'autorisation écrite et préalable, visée par un signataire autorisé d'Adobe. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 11-17 11.5 Profil ICC pour TOYO INK Standard Color on Coated paper (TOYO Offset Coated 2.0) 11 11.5 Profil ICC pour TOYO INK Standard Color on Coated paper (TOYO Offset Coated 2.0) Ce profil ICC (TOYO Offset Coated 2.0) caractérise l'impression offset sur papier couché et elle est totalement compatible avec le format de profil ICC. À propos de "TOYO INK Standard Color on Coated paper" Il s'agit de la norme pour la reproduction couleur des presses offset feuilles à feuilles sur papier couché, élaborée par TOYO INK MFG.CO., LTD. ("TOYO INK"). Cette norme est établie à partir d'un test d'impression réalisé avec les encres TOYO INK pour presse offset à feuilles et dans les conditions d'impression propres à TOYO INK. "TOYO INK Standard Color on Coated paper" est compatible avec "JAPAN COLOR". Convention 1. La reproduction d'images sur une imprimante ou un écran à l'aide de ce profil ICC ne concorde pas tout à fait avec la Couleur Standard TOYO INK sur papier couché. 2. Tous et chacun des copyrights concernant ce Profil ICC demeurent la propriété de TOYO INK ; par conséquent, vous n'êtes pas autorisés à céder, fournir, louer, distribuer, divulguer ou concéder à une tierce partie un quelconque droit sur ce Profil ICC sans l'autorisation écrite et préalable de TOYO INK. 3. En aucun cas, TOYO INK, ses administrateurs, cadres, employés ou agents, ne seront responsables envers vous de tout dommage consécutif, ou accessoire, direct ou indirect, (y compris les préjudices de perte de bénéfices commerciaux, perte de données professionnelles, interruption d'activité, et autres) résultant de l'utilisation ou de l'impossibilité d'utiliser ce Profil ICC. 4. TOYO INK ne sera pas tenu de répondre aux questions en rapport avec ce Profil ICC. 5. Tous les noms de sociétés et de produits mentionnés dans ce document sont les marques commerciales ou les marques déposées de leurs détenteurs respectifs. Ce Profil ICC créé par GretagMacbeth ProfileMaker et TOYO INK s'est vu concédé par GretagMacbeth AG une certaine licence de distribution. TOYO Offset Coated 2.0 © TOYO INK MFG. CO., LTD. 2004 11 CONTRAT DE LICENCE POUR PROFIL DIC STANDARD COLOR 11-18 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 11.6 11.6 CONTRAT DE LICENCE POUR PROFIL DIC STANDARD COLOR IMPORTANT : VEUILLEZ LIRE CE CONTRAT DE LICENCE POUR PROFIL STANDARD COLOR (LE "CONTRAT DE LICENCE") AVEC ATTENTION AVANT D'UTILISER LE PROFIL DIC STANDARD COLOR, Y COMPRIS LES DIC STANDARD COLOR SFC1.0.1, DIC STANDARD COLOR SFC1.0.2, DIC STANDARD COLOR SFM1.0.2, DIC STANDARD COLOR SFU1.0.2, FOURNIS ICI PAR DIC, ET D'UTILISER TOUTE DOCUMENTATION EN LIGNE OU ÉLECTRONIQUE CORRESPONDANTE AINSI QUE TOUTES MISE À JOUR OU MISE À NIVEAU QUI VOUS SONT FOURNIES (COLLECTIVEMENT DÉSIGNÉES PAR LE TERME "PROFIL"). CE CONTRAT DE LICENCE EST UN ENGAGEMENT JURIDIQUE ENTRE VOUS (SOIT EN TANT QUE PERSONNE PHYSIQUE, SOIT EN TANT QUE PERSONNE MORALE SI VOUS AVEZ ACQUIS LE PRODUIT POUR UNE SOCIÉTÉ) ET LA SOCIÉTÉ JAPONAISE DAINIPPON INK & CHEMICALS, INC., (DÉSIGNÉE "DIC"). CE CONTRAT DE LICENCE VOUS CONCÈDE UNE LICENCE D'UTILISATION DU PROFIL ET CONTIENT DES INFORMATIONS DE GARANTIE ET DE DÉNI DE RESPONSABILITÉ. SI VOUS N'ACCEPTEZ PAS D'ÊTRE LIÉ PAR L'ENSEMBLE DE CES DISPOSITIONS, VOUS N'AVEZ PAS LE DROIT D'UTILISER LE PROFIL. 1. Concession de Licence DIC vous accorde le droit, à titre non onéreux, non exclusif et non cessible, d'utiliser le Profil et de permettre à vos employés et agents autorisés, s'il y a lieu, d'utiliser le Profil, dans le cadre exclusif de leur travail pour vous, sous réserve que s'appliquent toutes les limitations et restrictions établies dans le présent Contrat de Licence. 2. Propriété La licence précitée vous confère un droit limité d'utiliser le Profil. Si vous détenez les droits sur le support contenant le Profil enregistré, DIC n'en demeure pas moins le détenteur de tout droit, titre et intérêt, y compris les droits de reproduction et de la propriété intellectuelle, sur le Profil et toutes ses copies. Tous les droits non spécifiquement concédés dans ce Contrat de licence, y compris tous les copyrights restent la propriété de DIC. 3. Terme a. Le présent contrat reste en vigueur tant que les parties n'y mettent pas fin. b. Vous pouvez mettre un terme au présent Contrat de licence en signalant à DIC par écrit votre intention de résilier ce Contrat de licence et en détruisant toutes les copies du Profil en votre possession ou sous votre contrôle. c. DIC peut mettre un terme à ce Contrat de licence sans préavis si vous manquez à vous conformer à l'une de des dispositions et conditions de ce Contrat de licence (soit directement ou par l'intermédiaire de vos employés ou agents), avec effet rétroactif jusqu'au moment dudit manquement. Dans pareil cas, vous devez immédiatement cesser d'utiliser le Profil et en détruire toutes les copies en votre possession ou sous votre contrôle. d. Toutes les dispositions de ce Contrat de licence liées à l'exonération de garantie (Section 5) et à la limitation de responsabilité (Section 6) survivront à toute résiliation du présent Contrat de licence. 4. Licence : Méthode et restrictions a. Vous êtes autorisé à installer le Profil sur un seul ordinateur de bureau, sous réserve que, nonobstant toute disposition contraire contenue dans les présentes, vous n'utilisiez pas le Profil sur un système ou un partage de réseau, n'installiez pas le Profil en même temps sur plusieurs ordinateurs, ou ne transfériez pas par voie informatique ou par réseau le Profil d'un ordinateur à un autre. b. Vous ne pouvez pas faire de copies ni en distribuer, ne pouvez pas corriger, altérer, fusionner, modifier, adapter, concéder en sous-licence, céder, vendre, louer, offrir ni distribuer le Profil en tout ou partie, ni modifier le Profil ou créer des ouvrages dérivés basés sur le Profil. c. Vous reconnaissez que le Profil n'est pas destiné à une utilisation qui pourrait entraîner la mort ou des dommages corporels ou des dommages à l'environnement et vous confirmez ici ne pas utiliser le Profil à une telle utilisation. d. Vous n'utiliserez pas le Profil pour développer un logiciel ou toute autre technologie ayant la même fonction principale que le Profil, y compris, mais sans s'y limiter, l'utilisation du Profil dans toute procédure de développement ou d'essai visant à développer un logiciel similaire ou toute autre technologie, ou pour déterminer si ledit logiciel ou ladite technologie fonctionne d'une manière similaire au Profil. e. DIC et les autres marques commerciales figurant dans le Profil sont des marques commerciales ou des marques déposées de DIC au Japon et/ou dans d'autres pays. Vous n'avez pas le droit d'effacer ou d'altérer la moindre marque commerciale, les marques, les noms de produit, le logo, le copyright ou les autres avis de propriété, les légendes, les symboles ou les étiquettes du Profil. Ce Contrat de licence ne vous autorise pas à utiliser les noms de DIC ou de ses donneurs de licence ni la moindre de leurs marques commerciales respectives. ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 11-19 11.6 CONTRAT DE LICENCE POUR PROFIL DIC STANDARD COLOR 11 5. EXONÉRATION DE GARANTIE a. LE PROFIL VOUS EST FOURNI GRATUITEMENT ET "TEL QUEL", CONFORMÉMENT AUX TERMES ET CONDITIONS DE CE CONTRAT DE LICENCE. DIC NE FOURNIT AUCUN SUPPORT TECHNIQUE, GARANTIE OU SOLUTION CORRECTIVE POUR LE PROFIL. b. DIC RENONCE A TOUTE GARANTIE ET DÉCLARATIONS, EXPRESSES, IMPLICITES OU AUTRES, Y COMPRIS MAIS SANS S'Y LIMITER, LES GARANTIES DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE OU D'APTITUDE À UN USAGE PARTICULIER, DE NON-CONTREFAÇON, DE TITRE ET DE JOUISSANCE TRANQUILLE. L'ENTIÈRE RESPONSABILITÉ VOUS REVIENT EN CE QUI CONCERNE TOUS LES RISQUES LIÉS À VOTRE UTILISATION DU PROFIL ; DIC NE GARANTIT PAS QUE LE PROFIL EST EXEMPT DE DÉFAUTS ET DE VICES OU QU'IL FONCTIONNERA SANS INTERRUPTION ET N'EST PAS RESPONSABLE DE LA CORRECTION NI DE LA RÉPARATION DES DÉFAUTS OU DES VICES, QUE CE SOIT GRATUITEMENT OU SUR FACTURE. AUCUN DROIT OU SOLUTION N'EST ACCORDÉ SAUF À ÊTRE EXPRESSÉMENT INDIQUÉ ICI. 6. LIMITATION DE RESPONSABILITÉ DIC NE SERA PAS RESPONSABLE ENVERS VOUS OU TOUTE PARTIE TIERCE DE TOUT DOMMAGE DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPÉCIAL, RELATIF, MAJORÉ, CONSÉCUTIF (Y COMPRIS MAIS SANS S'Y LIMITER, LES DOMMAGES D'INCAPACITÉ À UTILISER LE PRODUIT OU ACCÉDER AUX DONNÉES, LA PERTE D'ACTIVITÉ, DE BÉNÉFICES, INTERRUPTION D'ACTIVITÉ OU AUTRE), RÉSULTANT DE L'UTILISATION OU DE L'IMPOSSIBLITÉ D'UTILISER LE PROFIL ET FONDÉ SUR TOUT THÉORIE DE RESPONSABILITÉ Y COMPRIS RUPTURE DE CONTRAT, RUPTURE DE GARANTIE, DÉLIT CIVIL (Y COMPRIS LA NÉGLIGENCE), RESPONSABILITÉ DU PRODUIT OU AUTRE, MÊME SI DIC OU SES REPRÉSENTANTS ÉTAIENT INFORMÉS DE LA POSSIBILITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES. LES LIMITATIONS DE RESPONSABILITÉ CI-DESSUS S'APPLIQUENT À TOUS LES ASPECTS DE CE CONTRAT DE LICENCE. 7. Généralités a. Ce Contrat de licence sera régi et interprété conformément aux lois du Japon, sans faire suite aux principes de conflit de lois. Si une des clauses de ce Contrat de Licence devait être déclarée illégale par décision d'un tribunal de juridiction compétente, cette clause sera appliquée jusqu'à due concurrence de ce que la loi permet, et toutes les autres clauses de ce Contrat de Licence resteront pleinement effectives. Vous accepter ici l'exclusivité de la juridiction du Tokyo District Court pour trancher tout litige né de ce Contrat de Licence. b. Ce Contrat de licence constitue le contrat complet entre les parties eu égard à son objet et remplace et annule l'ensemble des contrats ou accords contemporains, qu'ils soient oraux ou écrits. Vous reconnaissez que toute disposition différente ou supplémentaire figurant dans toute notification ou document écrit émis par vous en rapport avec le Profil dont la licence d'utilisation est ici concédée sera sans effet. c. Tout manquement ou retard de DIC à exercer l'un de ses droits dans le cadre de ce Contrat de licence ou en cas de la moindre rupture de ce Contrat de licence ne sera pas réputé comme une renonciation à ces droits ou à la rupture. 11 i-Option LK-105 Contrat Licence Utilisateur Final 11-20 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 11.7 11.7 i-Option LK-105 Contrat Licence Utilisateur Final Les logiciels ("Logiciels") incluant LK-105 d'i-Option sont fournis par KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC (KMBT). 1. Vous acceptez de ne pas reproduire, modifier ou adapter le Programme. Il vous interdit d'autoriser un tiers à utiliser le Programme ou à le transférer à un tiers. 2. Vous acceptez de ne pas essayer de modifier, désassembler, décoder, de décompiler le Programme ni de faire de l'ingénierie inverse. 3. KMBT ou son concédant de licence sont les propriétaires des droits d'auteur et tout autre droit de propriété intellectuelle. Aucun droit d'auteur ni autre droit de propriété intellectuelle ne peut vous être cédé par l'octroi qui vous a été fait d'une licence d'utilisation du Programme. 4. EN AUCUN CAS, KMBT OU SON CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE NE SAURAIT ÊTRE TENU POUR RESPONSABLE A VOTRE PLACE EN CAS DU MOINDRE DOMMAGE IMMATÉRIEL, ACCESSOIRE INDIRECT, DOMMAGE-INTERÊTS PUNITIF OU SPÉCIAL, Y COMPRIS LES PERTES DE BÉNÉFICES OU LES PERTES D'ÉCONOMIES, MÊME SI LA POSSIBILITE DE TELS DOMMAGES A ÉTÉ SIGNALÉE A KMBT OU EN CAS DE PLAINTE D'UN TIERS. KMBT OU SON CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE DÉMENT TOUTES GARANTIES QUANT AU PROGRAMME, EXPLICITE OU IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, SANS RESTRICTION, TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE DE VALEUR COMMERCIALE, D'APTITUDE À UN EMPLOI PARTICULIER, TOUTE PROPRIÉTÉ ET NON-VIOLATION DE DROITS DE TIERS. CERTAINS ÉTATS OU JURIDICTIONS N'AUTORISANT PAS L'EXCLUSION OU LA LIMITATION DES DOMMAGES ACCIDENTELS, CONSÉCUTIFS OU SPÉCIAUX, LES LIMITATIONS SUSMENTIONNÉES PEUVENT NE PAS S'APPLIQUER À VOUS. 5. Vous acceptez de ne pas exporter le Programme sous quelque forme que ce soit en infraction de toute législation et réglementation en vigueur en matière de contrôle des exportations de n'importe quel pays. 6. Avis à l'attention des utilisateurs Finals travaillant pour le gouvernement (cette disposition ne s'applique qu'aux utilisateurs finals du gouvernement américain) Le programme est un "article commercial", tel que ce terme est défini dans le 48 C.F.R.2.101, constitué d'un "logiciel informatique commercial" et d'une "documentation de logiciel informatique commercial" tel que lesdits termes sont utilisés dans le 48 C.F.R. 12.212. En accord avec les termes du 48 C.F.R. 12.212 et 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 à 227.7202-4, tous les utilisateurs finals du gouvernement américain achètent le Programme uniquement avec les droits énoncés au présent. 7. Cette licence prend automatiquement fin en cas de manquement de votre part au respect d'un terme ou d'une condition quelconque de ce Contrat, auquel cas vous acceptez d'arrêter immédiatement d'utiliser le Programme. 8. Ce Contrat sera régi par les lois du Japon. 12 Index ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 12-3 12 12 Index A Agenda électronique 2-46 Agrafage 3-22 Alimentation 1-17 Aperçu 3-32 Avertissements et étiquettes de précaution 1-13 B Bluetooth 2-46 Boîte Groupe 2-18 Boîte utilisateur privée 2-18 Boîte utilisateur réception mémoire obligatoire 5-24 C Catalogue Original 3-10 Certificat-clé 8-5 Charger du papier 1-37, 1-38, 1-40, 1-41 Code-requête 8-5 Combinaison 4-9, 7-10 Compteurs 3-36 Copie combinée 3-6 Copie recto-verso 3-5 Couleur 6-12 D Date/Heure 4-15, 6-14 Destination Boîte Utilisateur 2-26 Destination programme 5-7, 6-7 Décalage 4-5 Décalage vertical 4-10 Déclarations réglementaires 1-8 Définition 6-8 Dégagement de bourrages de papier et d'agrafes 1-43 Dégager les bourrages d'agrafes dans l'unité de finition FS-527 1-59 Dégager les bourrages d’agrafes dans la piqueuse à cheval SD-509 1-60 Dégager les bourrages papier (ADF) 1-45, 1-46 Dégager les bourrages papier dans l'unité de finition FS-527 1-51 Dégager les bourrages papier dans l’unité de finition FS-526 1-49 Dégager les bourrages papier dans la porte latérale droite 1-47 Dégager les bourrages papier dans le magasin papier 1-48 Documents recto-verso 7-5 E Effacement bords 3-13, 6-20 Emission par e-mail 6-24 Enregistrer dans une boîte utilisateur 2-23, 4-6 Enregistrer un groupe de destinations 5-3, 6-3 Enregistrer un programme 3-27 Enregistrer une destination dans le Carnet d'adresses 5-3, 6-3 Enveloppe 3-25 Environnement d'exploitation 1-17 Envoi de Fax 2-10 Envoyer un fax par ordinateur 5-29 Epreuve de copie 3-32 Espace requis 1-15 É Écran Copie Rapide 3-3 Émission différée 5-20 Émission en relève 5-17 Émission relais 5-20 F Faire suivre un Fax 5-28 Faxer par adresse IP 5-21 Faxer par Internet 5-21 Filigrane 4-14 Finition 3-22, 4-11, 7-14 Fonction Aide 1-25 Fonction Avancée 8-3 I ID & Imprimer 4-8 Image qualité 4-16 Impression épreuve 4-7 Impression Livret 4-9 Impression Recto-Verso 4-9 Impression sécurisée 4-6 Incidents 9-3 Informations relatives à la sécurité 1-4 Intercalaire sur transparent 4-12 Introducteur manuel 3-25 i-Option LK-101 v2/LK-102/LK-105 8-5 L Lier EMI 7-10 Liste communications 5-8 Liste des tâches en cours 6-27 Liste Historique tâches 6-27 Livret 3-10 M Marge de reliure 4-10 Marques commerciales et droits de reproduction 11-5 Mise sous/hors tension 1-35 Mode brillant 4-17 Mode couverture 4-12 12-4 ineo+ 452/552/652/652DS 12 Mode Eco. Énergie 3-38 Mode Veille 3-38 Modif. Nom 7-3 My Tab 4-19 N Niveau Suppression Fond 6-18 Numérisat. livre 3-17 Numérisation séparée 3-8 Numéro de page 4-15, 6-14 O Options 1-75 P Page de garde 3-20 Panneau de contrôle 1-23 Paramétrage par page 4-13 Paramètres 3-20 Paramètres Numérisation 5-15, 7-5 Perforer 3-22 Programmateur hebdomadaire 3-38 R Rechercher une destination 6-22 Remplacement de la cartouche de toner 1-64 Remplacement des consommables 1-61 Remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes pour l'unité de finition FS-527 1-70 Remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes pour la piqueuse à cheval FS-508 1-69 Remplacer la cartouche d’agrafes pour l’unité de finition FS-526 1-68 Remplacer la cartouche d’agrafes pour la piqueuse à cheval SD-509 1-71 Remplacer le flacon de toner usagé 1-65 Remplacer une unité image 1-66 Réglage Couleur 4-16 Réglage des informations de source d'émission Fax 5-13 Réglage qualité 4-16 Réglages polices 4-18 Réglages rapides 3-29 Réglages Utilisateur 10-3 S Serveur de gestion de licences (License Management Server - LMS) 8-5 Sécurité Copie 4-14 Sélectionner couleur 4-16 Sélectionner les destinations 2-10, 2-14 Stabilisation Image 9-6 Supprimer un document 7-7 Surimpression 4-14 T Téléphone mobile 2-46 Tête/Pied de page 4-15 Touche de raccourci 3-29 Transmission de diffusion 5-10 Transmission F-Code 5-26 Tri 4-5 Type Fichier 6-12 Type original 6-9 U Utiliser des documents enregistrés 2-32 V Vider le collecteur de perforation dans l'unité de finition FS-526 1-72 Vider le collecteur de perforation dans l'unité de pliage en Z ZU-606 1-74 Vider le collecteur de perforation dans l’unité de finition FS-527 1-73 W Web Connection 7-16 Z Zoom 4-4 Zoom Auto 3-15 Zoom+/Zoom- 3-15 Advanced Function Operations ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) Contents-1 Table of contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome .......................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.1 User's guides ..................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.2 User's Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.2 Use conditions................................................................................................................................. 1-4 1.3 Conventions used in this manual .................................................................................................. 1-5 1.3.1 Symbols used in this manual ............................................................................................................. 1-5 To use this machine safely................................................................................................................. 1-5 Procedural instruction........................................................................................................................ 1-5 Key symbols....................................................................................................................................... 1-6 1.3.2 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6 Original and paper sizes .................................................................................................................... 1-6 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6 2 Overview 2.1 Overview of each function ............................................................................................................. 2-3 2.1.1 Supported function table ................................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.2 Key layout after the function is expanded ......................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.3 Functions available with expanded functions.................................................................................... 2-4 3 Assigning Application Keys 3.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.1.1 Key layout after the function is expanded ......................................................................................... 3-3 3.1.2 [Application Menu] ............................................................................................................................. 3-4 3.2 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2.................................................................................... 3-5 3.2.1 [Application Key Settings] .................................................................................................................. 3-5 4 Web Browser Function 4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 4-3 4.1.1 Available operations with the Web Browser function ........................................................................ 4-3 4.1.2 Specifications..................................................................................................................................... 4-4 Specifications for Web Browser ........................................................................................................ 4-4 Restrictions on Flash Player .............................................................................................................. 4-4 4.2 Displaying Web Browser ................................................................................................................ 4-5 4.3 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser............................................................. 4-6 4.3.1 Restricting the use of the Web browser in the MFP .......................................................................... 4-6 [Web Browser Setting] ....................................................................................................................... 4-6 4.3.2 Restricting the use of Web browser for each user ............................................................................ 4-7 [Function Permission]......................................................................................................................... 4-7 4.3.3 Restricting the use of local contents ................................................................................................. 4-8 [Web browser contents access]......................................................................................................... 4-8 4.4 Basic operation ............................................................................................................................... 4-9 4.4.1 Screen components........................................................................................................................... 4-9 4.4.2 Operating instructions...................................................................................................................... 4-10 Operation using the Touch Panel .................................................................................................... 4-10 Operation using the Keypad ............................................................................................................ 4-10 4.4.3 How to enter text ............................................................................................................................. 4-10 Entering text..................................................................................................................................... 4-10 Contents-2 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4.4.4 Screen display mode ....................................................................................................................... 4-11 [Normal]............................................................................................................................................ 4-11 [Just-Fit Rendering].......................................................................................................................... 4-11 [Smart-Fit Rendering]....................................................................................................................... 4-11 4.4.5 Specifying speaker volume.............................................................................................................. 4-11 4.5 Toolbar ........................................................................................................................................... 4-12 4.5.1 Description of the toolbar ................................................................................................................ 4-12 4.5.2 [Favorites] - [List].............................................................................................................................. 4-13 List of favorites................................................................................................................................. 4-13 4.5.3 [Favorites] - [Add]............................................................................................................................. 4-13 4.5.4 [Address] .......................................................................................................................................... 4-14 4.5.5 [History] ............................................................................................................................................ 4-14 [Display History] ............................................................................................................................... 4-14 4.5.6 [Print]................................................................................................................................................ 4-15 4.5.7 [Menu] .............................................................................................................................................. 4-15 4.6 Configuring the Web Browser settings....................................................................................... 4-16 4.6.1 [Page Operation] .............................................................................................................................. 4-16 4.6.2 [Display]............................................................................................................................................ 4-16 4.6.3 [Manage windows] ........................................................................................................................... 4-17 4.6.4 [Settings] .......................................................................................................................................... 4-17 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file .......................................................................... 4-18 4.7.1 Printing a document file ................................................................................................................... 4-18 4.7.2 Displaying a document file............................................................................................................... 4-20 4.7.3 Saving a document file .................................................................................................................... 4-21 4.8 Uploading a document file ........................................................................................................... 4-22 4.8.1 Restrictions ...................................................................................................................................... 4-22 4.8.2 Uploading a scanned document file ................................................................................................ 4-22 4.8.3 Uploading a document file in a User Box ........................................................................................ 4-23 5 PageScope Web Connection (Web Browser Function) 5.1 Using PageScope Web Connection .............................................................................................. 5-3 5.1.1 Prior check......................................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.1.2 How to access ................................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2 Screen components........................................................................................................................ 5-4 5.3 Logging in and logging out ............................................................................................................ 5-5 5.3.1 Login .................................................................................................................................................. 5-5 5.3.2 Logout................................................................................................................................................ 5-5 5.4 Using the User Box function .......................................................................................................... 5-6 5.4.1 Open User Box .................................................................................................................................. 5-6 [Open User Box]................................................................................................................................. 5-6 [File List] ............................................................................................................................................. 5-7 5.4.2 Document operations ........................................................................................................................ 5-8 Printing a document........................................................................................................................... 5-8 Deleting a document........................................................................................................................ 5-10 6 Image Panel 6.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 6-3 Features ............................................................................................................................................. 6-3 6.2 Displaying the Image Panel............................................................................................................ 6-4 6.3 Operating Image Panel................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.3.1 Screen components........................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.3.2 General operation .............................................................................................................................. 6-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) Contents-3 6.3.3 Reading a document.......................................................................................................................... 6-8 Scanning a document ........................................................................................................................ 6-8 Retrieving from User Box................................................................................................................... 6-9 Retrieving a document from an external memory............................................................................ 6-10 Using data saved in a cellular phone or PDA .................................................................................. 6-11 6.3.4 Editing the document....................................................................................................................... 6-12 [Preview]........................................................................................................................................... 6-12 [Document/Page] - [Edit Document] ................................................................................................ 6-12 [Document/Page] - [Combine Documents]...................................................................................... 6-13 [Document/Page] - [Document Settings] ......................................................................................... 6-14 [Return to Scan Dest.]...................................................................................................................... 6-14 6.3.5 Specifying a destination................................................................................................................... 6-15 Printing............................................................................................................................................. 6-15 Specifying destinations.................................................................................................................... 6-16 Saving a document in an external memory ..................................................................................... 6-16 6.3.6 Checking the send tray .................................................................................................................... 6-17 Send Tray......................................................................................................................................... 6-17 [Check TX Tray]................................................................................................................................ 6-17 6.3.7 Sending data from a cellular phone or PDA .................................................................................... 6-18 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book ................................................................................... 6-19 6.4.1 Specifications of photo data............................................................................................................ 6-19 6.4.2 Registering photo data .................................................................................................................... 6-20 6.5 Customizing Image Panel ............................................................................................................ 6-22 6.5.1 Customizing the Read Data area ..................................................................................................... 6-22 6.5.2 Customizing the Document Destination area .................................................................................. 6-23 6.5.3 Deleting a registered shortcut icon.................................................................................................. 6-24 7 PDF Processing Function 7.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 7-3 Available operations with the PDF processing function .................................................................... 7-3 7.2 PDF document properties .............................................................................................................. 7-4 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature ............................................................ 7-5 7.3.1 Password-based encryption.............................................................................................................. 7-5 7.3.2 Digital ID-based encryption ............................................................................................................... 7-6 7.4 Direct Print....................................................................................................................................... 7-8 8 Searchable PDF function 8.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 8-3 Precautions when creating searchable PDF files .............................................................................. 8-3 Recognizable character size.............................................................................................................. 8-3 8.2 Configuring the OCR operation setting ........................................................................................ 8-4 [OCR Operation Setting] .................................................................................................................... 8-4 8.3 Configuring the searchable PDF setting....................................................................................... 8-5 9 My Panel Function 9.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.1 Available operations with My Panel ................................................................................................... 9-3 Customizable items ........................................................................................................................... 9-3 Functions available by linking to the Web browser ........................................................................... 9-3 Functions available with Image Panel................................................................................................ 9-4 9.1.2 My Panel acquisition procedure ........................................................................................................ 9-4 9.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Panel function ..................................................................................... 9-4 9.2 Displaying My Panel........................................................................................................................ 9-5 9.2.1 Main Menu ......................................................................................................................................... 9-5 9.2.2 Displaying Main Menu........................................................................................................................ 9-5 Contents-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9.3 Customizing My Panel.................................................................................................................... 9-6 9.3.1 [My Panel Settings] ............................................................................................................................ 9-6 9.3.2 Displaying [My Panel Settings]........................................................................................................... 9-7 9.3.3 [Language Setting] ............................................................................................................................. 9-8 9.3.4 [Measurement Unit Settings].............................................................................................................. 9-8 9.3.5 [Copier Settings] ................................................................................................................................ 9-9 [Default Tab]....................................................................................................................................... 9-9 [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] .................................................................................................... 9-9 [Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4] ............................................................................................. 9-10 [Default Tab Density Settings].......................................................................................................... 9-10 9.3.6 [Scan/Fax Settings] .......................................................................................................................... 9-11 [Default Tab]..................................................................................................................................... 9-11 [Address Book Index Default] .......................................................................................................... 9-12 [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] .................................................................................................. 9-12 [Default Address Book] .................................................................................................................... 9-13 [Default Address Type]..................................................................................................................... 9-13 9.3.7 [User Box Settings] .......................................................................................................................... 9-13 [Default Tab]..................................................................................................................................... 9-13 [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] .................................................................................................. 9-14 9.3.8 [Color Selection Settings] ................................................................................................................ 9-14 9.3.9 [Main Menu Settings] ....................................................................................................................... 9-15 Main menu button............................................................................................................................ 9-15 Registering a main menu button...................................................................................................... 9-15 9.3.10 [Initial Screen Settings] .................................................................................................................... 9-16 10 My Address function 10.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 10-3 10.1.1 Classification of address books....................................................................................................... 10-3 Public address book ........................................................................................................................ 10-3 My Address Book ............................................................................................................................ 10-3 10.1.2 My Address Book acquisition procedure......................................................................................... 10-4 10.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Address function ............................................................................... 10-4 10.2 Registering and editing a destination ......................................................................................... 10-5 10.2.1 Address Book .................................................................................................................................. 10-5 10.2.2 Group ............................................................................................................................................... 10-6 10.3 Copying destinations between address books.......................................................................... 10-8 10.3.1 Copying destinations from the public address book to My Address Book..................................... 10-8 10.3.2 Copying destinations from My Address Book to the public address book ..................................... 10-9 10.4 Using My Address Book when sending a document............................................................... 10-10 10.4.1 Specifying destinations.................................................................................................................. 10-10 10.4.2 Searching for destinations ............................................................................................................. 10-10 11 Index 11.1 Index by item ................................................................................................................................. 11-3 11.2 Index by button.............................................................................................................................. 11-4 1 Introduction ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 1-3 1.1 Welcome 1 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome Thank you for purchasing this machine. This User's Guide describes the overview and usage of functions available by registering an optional license kit to this machine, and functions available by connecting it to an application. To use each function effectively, please read this User's Guide. 1.1.1 User's guides Printed manual Overview [Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations] This manual describes operating procedures and the functions that are most frequently used in order to enable you to begin using this machine immediately. This manual also contains notes and precautions that should be followed to ensure safe usage of this machine. Please be sure to read this manual before using this machine. This manual describes details on trademarks and copyrights. • Trademarks and copyrights User's guide DVD manuals Overview [User's Guide Copy Operations] This manual describes details on copy mode operations and the settings of this machine. • Specifications of originals and copy paper • Copy function • Maintaining this machine • Troubleshooting [User's Guide Enlarge Display Operations] This manual describes details on operating procedures of the enlarge display mode. • Copy function • Scanning function • G3 fax function • Network fax function [User's Guide Print Operations] This manual describes details on printer functions. • Printer function • Setting the printer driver [User's Guide Box Operations] This manual describes details on the boxed functions using the hard disk. • Saving data in user boxes • Retrieving data from user boxes • Transferring and printing data from user boxes [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations] This manual describes details on transmitting scanned data. • E-mail TX, FTP TX, SMB TX, Save in User Box, Web- DAV TX, Web Services • G3 fax • IP Address Fax, Internet Fax [User's Guide Fax Driver Operations] This manual describes details on the fax driver function that transmits faxes directly from a computer. • PC-FAX [User's Guide Network Administrator] This manual describes details on setting methods for each function using the network connection. • Network settings • Settings using Web Connection 1 Use conditions 1-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 1.2 1.1.2 User's Guide This User's Guide is intended for users ranging from those using this machine for the first time to administrators. It describes basic operations, functions that enable more convenient operations, simple troubleshooting operations, and various setting methods of this machine. Note that basic technical knowledge about the product is required to enable users to perform troubleshooting operation. Limit your troubleshooting operations to the areas explained in this manual. Should you experience any problems, please contact our service representative. 1.2 Use conditions Enabling i-Option LK-101 v2 allows you to access the Internet from the Control Panel of the MFP. Users will bear a responsibility for contents accessed, downloaded, and uploaded using Web Browser in the MFP, and other communicated contents. Users shall conform to the company rules and laws of the country where this machine is used. Develop GmbH and its group businesses will not bear any responsibility for use of the Internet by users. [User's Guide Advanced Function Operations] This manual describes details on functions that become available by registering the optional license kit and by connecting to an application. • Web browser function • Image panel • PDF Processing Function • Searchable PDF • My panel and My address functions User's guide DVD manuals Overview ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 1-5 1.3 Conventions used in this manual 1 1.3 Conventions used in this manual 1.3.1 Symbols used in this manual Symbols are used in this manual to express various types of information. The following describes each symbol related to correct and safe usage of this machine. To use this machine safely 7 WARNING - This symbol indicates that a failure to heed the instructions may lead to death or serious injury. 7 CAUTION - This symbol indicates that negligence of the instructions may lead to mishandling that may cause injury or property damage. NOTICE This symbol indicates a risk that may result in damage to this machine or documents. Follow the instructions to avoid property damage. Procedural instruction 0 This check mark indicates an option that is required in order to use conditions or functions that are prerequisite for a procedure. 1 This format number "1" represents the first step. 2 This format number represents the order of serial steps. % This symbol indicates a supplementary explanation of a procedural instruction. % This symbol indicates transition of the Control Panel to access a desired menu item. This symbol indicates a desired page. The operation procedures are described using illustrations. 1 Conventions used in this manual 1-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 1.3 dReference This symbol indicates a reference. View the reference as required. Key symbols [ ] Key names on the touch panel or computer screen, or a name of user's guide are indicated by these brackets. Bold text Key names on the control panel, part names, product names and option names are indicated in bold text. 1.3.2 Original and paper indications Original and paper sizes The following explains the indication for originals and paper described in this manual. When indicating the original or paper size, the Y side represents the width and the X side the length. Original and paper indications w indicates the paper size with the length (X) being longer than the width (Y). v indicates the paper size with the length (X) being shorter than the width (Y). 2 Overview ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 2-3 2.1 Overview of each function 2 2 Overview 2.1 Overview of each function The following describes the overview of each function. Reference - To use the advanced function, an optional Upgrade Kit UK-203 is required. - For details on the license kit registration and enabling functions on MFPs, refer to the [Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations]. - To connect the function to the application, enable it at the application side. For details on enabling the function, refer to the manual for the corresponding application. 2.1.1 Supported function table The following table shows the supported functions for the license kits and applications. 2.1.2 Key layout after the function is expanded Adding the Web Browser function, Image Panel function or My Panel function changes the usage of the User Box, Fax/Scan, and Copy keys on the Control Panel. - The User Box key functions as an Application Menu, and the Fax/Scan and Copy keys function as application keys. - Press Application Menu to display the [Application Menu], which allows you to switch to the added function. - To fit the use status, the function to be assigned to the application key can be changed. For details, refer to page 3-3. Web Browser Image Panel PDF processing Searchable PDF i-Option LK-101 v2 o o − − i-Option LK-102 − − o − i-Option LK-105 − − − o My Panel My Address My Panel Manager o o 2 Overview of each function 2-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 2.1 2.1.3 Functions available with expanded functions The following describes the overview of each function. For details, refer to the reference described below. Reference - When the accounting management device is installed in the MFP, Image Panel cannot be used. Function Overview Reference Web Browser This function can be used by registering i-Option LK-101 v2 in the MFP. By using the Control Panel of the MFP connected to the network, you can access to the Internet or intranet and display or print the contents. Also, through a Web browser, you can operate Web Connection of the MFP connected to the network and use documents saved in User Boxes. p. 4-3 p. 5-3 Image Panel This function can be used by registering i-Option LK-101 v2 in the MFP. Image Panel is a new intuitive and easy-to-understand panel interface. This panel helps you easily image the entire operation flow from loading to sending a document. You can add photo data to the one-touch destinations using Web Connection. The registered photo data is applied to the address list of Image Panel. p. 6-3 PDF processing This function can be used by registering i-Option LK-102 in the MFP. Performs password- or digital ID-based encryption of PDF, adds a digital signature, and configures property settings when distributing documents in the PDF format using the scan or User Box function. p. 7-3 Searchable PDF This function is available when i-Option LK-105 is registered with the MFP. You can create a text searchable PDF file by pasting transparent text data on the area of a document in which characters are recognized through an OCR process. You can create a searchable PDF file when saving or sending an original in the PDF format using the scan or User Box functions. p. 8-3 My Panel This function is used in connection with the My Panel Manager. Available by centrally managing the environment of the Control Panel customized by the user depending on the application (My Panel), and then obtaining My Panel on the MFP selected by the user. p. 9-3 My Address This function is used in connection with the My Panel Manager. Available by centrally managing the personal address book (My Address Book) by the server, and then obtaining My Address Book on the MFP selected by the user. p. 10-3 3 Assigning Application Keys ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3-3 3.1 Overview 3 3 Assigning Application Keys 3.1 Overview The following describes the key layout and [Application Menu] of the Control Panel. 3.1.1 Key layout after the function is expanded Adding the Web Browser function, Image Panel function or My Panel function allows User Box to function as Application Menu, and Fax/Scan and Copy as application keys. Reference - The Web Browser and Image Panel functions can be used by registering i-Option LK-101 v2 in the MFP. - The My Panel function is used in connection with the My Panel Manager. No. Name Description 1 Application menu Press this key to display the [Application Menu]. You cannot assign a different function to this key. If a function is added, attach a Application Menu sticker (included in the Upgrade Kit UK-203) to change the key name on the Control Panel. For details, refer to page 3-4. 2 Application key 1 The fax/scan function is assigned by default. The administrator can assign a different function to this key. If the function assigned to the key is changed, attach a sticker describing the new function (included in the Upgrade Kit UK-203) to change the key name on the Control Panel. For details on assigning a function, refer to page 3-5. 1 2 3 3 Overview 3-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3.1 3.1.2 [Application Menu] Press Application Menu to display the [Application Menu]. To use a function not assigned to the application key 1 or 2, you can switch functions to a desired one from the [Application Menu]. 3 Application key 2 The copy function is assigned by default. The administrator can assign a different function to this key. If the function assigned to the key is changed, attach a sticker describing the new function (included in the Upgrade Kit UK-203) to change the key name on the Control Panel. For details on assigning a function, refer to page 3-5. No. Name Description ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3-5 3.2 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2 3 3.2 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2 To fit the use status, the function to be assigned to the application keys 1 and 2 can be changed. 3.2.1 [Application Key Settings] To assign a function to the application keys 1 and 2, use [Application Key Settings]. 1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility]. 2 Press [Administrator Settings]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [System Settings]. 5 In [System Settings] (2/2), press [Application Key Settings]. 6 Select an application key ([Key 1] or [Key 2]) to which you assign a function. 3 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2 3-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3.2 7 Select a function to be assigned. 8 Press [OK]. The function is assigned to the application key. 4 Web Browser Function ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-3 4.1 Overview 4 4 Web Browser Function 4.1 Overview The Web Browser function prints, displays, and saves contents on the Internet or intranet by accessing them from the Control Panel of the MFP connected to the network. Reference - This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-101 v2 registered. 4.1.1 Available operations with the Web Browser function The Web Browser function allows you to perform the following operations. - Displaying and printing Web contents on the Internet or intranet. - Displaying, printing, and saving a document file on the Internet or intranet. - Uploading a scanned document file or a document file saved in a User Box to a server on the Internet or intranet. - Sharing documents in the User Box of MFPs on the network using Web Connection. - When the My Panel function is available, you can personalize the user operation environment of the Web browser by linking the Web browser with My Panel. dReference For details on using Web Connection from the Control Panel, refer to page 5-3. For details on My Panel, refer to page 9-3. 4 Overview 4-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4.1 4.1.2 Specifications Specifications for Web Browser The following shows the major specifications of the Web Browser installed in the MFP. Restrictions on Flash Player There are following restrictions on the Flash Player installed in Web Browser. - The function to generate an event by key operations is not supported. - The functions to paste or obtain data such as character strings from the clipboard are not supported. - The context menu is not supported. - The print function of Flash is not supported. - The functions to execute JavaScript from Flash or operate Flash from JavaScript are not supported. - The screen without a window (pop-up) is not supported. - The favorite function of Flash is not supported. - The function to communicate data in real time using the Flash Media Server is not supported. - The XMLSocket-based communication function is not supported. Item Specifications Browser engine NetFront Supported protocols HTTP (HTTP/0.9, 1.0, 1.1), HTTPS, TCP/IP Supported markup language HTML 4.01, XHTML 1.1/Basic Supported style sheet Part of CSS1 and 2 Supported script language Part of JavaScript 1.5, ECMAScript 3rd Edition, Ajax (limited to the scope supported by JavaScript) Supported DOM Part of Level 1 and 2 Supported format JPEG, BMP, PNG, GIF, animation GIF, PDF, Flash 7.0 and earlier Supported SSL/TLS versions SSL 2.0, SSL 3.0, TLS 1.0 Supported character codes Japanese (Shift_JIS), Japanese (ISO-2022-JP), Japanese (EUC-JP), Chinese Simplified (GB2312), Chinese Traditional (Big5), Western European (ISO-8859- 1), Unicode (UTF-8) Display mode Normal, Just-Fit Rendering, Smart-Fit Rendering PDF viewer Adobe® Reader® LE Flash player Adobe® Flash® Player 7 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-5 4.2 Displaying Web Browser 4 4.2 Displaying Web Browser In [Application Menu], press [Web Browser]. The page specified as the home is displayed. Reference - If a login user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel and the user presses [Web Browser], the Web browser setting and information related to the user is downloaded to the MFP from the server. If the user has specified a personal home page, that page is displayed. - When the Web browser starts, you can specify whether to display the home page or the last page that was visited. For details, refer to page 4-17. dReference For details on the [Application Menu], refer to page 3-4. For details on My Panel, refer to page 9-3. 4 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser 4-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4.3 4.3 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser If you do not want to allow use of the Web browser in the MFP, you can restrict its use without disabling the license kit. Also, you can restrict use of the Web browser for each user. 4.3.1 Restricting the use of the Web browser in the MFP If you do not want to allow use of the Web browser, you can restrict its use without disabling the license kit. [Web Browser Setting] 1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility]. 2 Press [Administrator Settings]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [Network Settings]. 5 In [Network Settings] (2/2), press [Web Browser Setting]. 6 Select [Invalid], and then press [OK]. Reference - If [Web Browser Setting] is set to [Invalid], [Web Browser] is hidden in the [Application Menu]. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-7 4.3 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser 4 4.3.2 Restricting the use of Web browser for each user If user management is performed in the MFP, you can restrict use of the Web browser for each user. [Function Permission] 1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility]. 2 Press [Administrator Settings]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [User Authentication/ Account Track]. 5 In [User Authentication Settings], press [User Registration]. 6 Select the user you want to restrict use of the Web browser, and press [Edit]. % If you want to restrict public users to use the Web browser, press [ ] and select [Public]. 7 Press [Function Permission]. 8 In [Function Permission] (3/3), specify [Web Browser] to [Restrict], and press [OK]. Reference - This setting is not available if [Invalid] is specified in [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings] ö[Web Browser Setting]. - Configuring the function permission of the public user is available when public user access is allowed in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[General Settings]ö[Public User Access]. - If users are managed in the external server, you can configure the default settings for function permissions to users who log in to the MFP using external server authentication for the first time. To configure it, select [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings] ö[Administrative Settings]ö[Default Function Permission]ö[Web Browser]. For details on [Default Function Permission], refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 4 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser 4-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4.3 4.3.3 Restricting the use of local contents If the Web browser is used through the use of an application that interacts with the Web browser, you can access the files (pre-installed contents, image files, help files, etc.) saved in the HDD of the MFP from the Web browser. The administrator can restrict the use of files saved in the HDD of the MFP from the Web browser as required. Reference - For details on the application that interacts with the Web browser, contact your service representative. [Web browser contents access] 1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility]. 2 Press [Administrator Settings]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [Security Settings]. 5 Press [Security Details]. 6 In [Security Details] (4/4), specify [Web browser contents access] to [Restrict], and press [OK]. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-9 4.4 Basic operation 4 4.4 Basic operation 4.4.1 Screen components The Web browser screen has the following components. Reference - When the optional local connection kit is installed in the MFP, sound from Web pages or Flash contents can be output through the speaker in the local connection kit. The speaker volume can be adjustable using the speaker icon. For details, refer to page 4-11. No. Name Description 1 Toolbar Operates Web Browser or configure the Web Browser settings. It is always displayed on the Web Browser screen. For details, refer to page 4-12. 2 Scroll bar Appears on the right of the screen when all display contents are not displayed vertically in one screen. Appears at the bottom of the screen when all display contents are not displayed horizontally in one screen. 3 Window When multiple windows are displayed, you can switch the window using the tab located at the bottom of the screen. Press [e] in the active tab to close the window. 4 Icon The icon that represents the connection status appears when loading contents. If the optional local connection kit is installed in the MFP, the speaker icon is displayed. 1 4 3 2 4 Basic operation 4-10 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4.4 4.4.2 Operating instructions Operate Web Browser mainly on the Touch Panel. You can perform some of the operations from the Keypad of the Control Panel. Reference - Using the Stylus Pen to operate the Touch Panel provides operating comfort. Operation using the Touch Panel Operate Web Browser mainly on the Touch Panel. - To select an item, press a desired item. - If a link is provided in the contents, press the link to jump to it. - If you need to enter characters, press the entry form in the dialog box or contents. The keyboard screen appears. To enter characters, use the keyboard screen. - To scroll the screen, press [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] on the scroll bar. Operation using the Keypad You can use the Keypad in the Control Panel to enter numeric values or select items in the list. 4.4.3 How to enter text If you need to enter characters, press the entry form in the dialog box or contents. The keyboard screen appears. Entering text Press the character you want to enter in the keyboard screen. - To enter uppercase letters or symbols, press [Shift]. - You can also enter numbers using the Keypad. Reference - To change a character in the entered text, press [ ] or [ ] to move the cursor to the character to be changed, press [Delete], and then enter the desired letter or number. - To delete all characters entered, press C (clear) in the Control Panel. - To revert to the setting when the keyboard was displayed, press [Undo]. - Some buttons may not appear, depending on the characters being entered. - When entering character codes on multiple lines is allowed, the linefeed button appears. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-11 4.4 Basic operation 4 4.4.4 Screen display mode There are three types of display modes for the Web Browser screen. [Normal] This is the display mode same as that for the normal Web Browser. Content is not adjusted to the screen size. Scroll the screen horizontally and vertically when browsing it. (The default is set to [Normal]. ) [Just-Fit Rendering] The content layout is maintained and a page is displayed by reducing its width to fit the screen. Scroll the screen horizontally and vertically when browsing it. [Smart-Fit Rendering] The table is divided and laid out vertically to fit the width of the screen. Scroll the screen horizontally and vertically when browsing it. The layout may be changed depending on the page to be displayed. dReference For details on changing the display mode, refer to page 4-16. 4.4.5 Specifying speaker volume When the optional local connection kit is installed in the MFP, sound from Web pages or Flash contents can be output through the speaker in the local connection kit. If a speaker is connected to the MFP, the speaker icon is displayed at the bottom left of the Web browser. Press the speaker icon to display the Volume screen where you can control the speaker volume. - To increase the volume one level, press [Higher], or the # key on the Control Panel. - To reduce the volume one level, press [Lower], or the * key on the Control Panel. - Pressing [Mute] outputs no sound. In addition, the speaker icon changes to the speaker mute icon. 4 Toolbar 4-12 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4.5 4.5 Toolbar The toolbar on the top of the Web Browser screen allows you to perform various operations and configure various settings. 4.5.1 Description of the toolbar The following shows the functions of the buttons on the toolbar. Icon Name Description Back Brings you back to the previous page. Next Brings you to the next page. Reload/Abort Reloads the currently displayed page to update the contents. If you press this button while loading a page, the loading stops. Home Displays the page registered as the home. For details on changing the home page, refer to page 4-16. [Favorites] - [List] Displays the list of registered favorites. For details, refer to page 4-13. [Favorites] - [Add] Adds the URL of the currently displayed page to the favorites. Adding a URL to the favorites requires the administrator authority. For details, refer to page 4-13. [Address] Brings you to the screen to enter a URL. For details, refer to page 4-14. [History] Displays the list of pages displayed up till then. For details, refer to page 4-14. [Print] Prints the currently displayed contents. For details, refer to page 4-15. [Menu] Configure the Web browser settings. There are two types of menus; one for the user and one for the administrator. For details, refer to page 4-15. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-13 4.5 Toolbar 4 4.5.2 [Favorites] - [List] Press [List] to display the list of the registered favorites using the thumbnails. Selecting a favorite allows you to access the corresponding URL. Reference - If the user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel, the list of favorites for the user who is managed in the server is displayed. List of favorites Press to display the list of operations available for the item. From this list, select the desired operation. The following shows the available operations. 4.5.3 [Favorites] - [Add] (Adding a URL to the favorites requires the administrator authority. ) Pressing [Add] prompts you to enter the administrator password. Enter the administrator password and press [OK]. The registration screen appears. Check the contents and press [OK]. The URL of the displayed page is added to the favorites. The MFP can hold up to 100 favorites. - To register the thumbnail images of the page to be added to the favorites, select the [Register Thumbnail] check box on the registration screen. - It is registered with the title previously given to the contents. To change the title, press the entry form for the title on the registration screen, and then change the title. Reference - For users using the Web browser by linking to My Panel, administrator authority is not required. My Panel can hold up to 20 favorites for each user. Item Description [List View]/[Thumbnail View] Switches the favorites display between the list display and thumbnail view. [Address View]/[Title View] Switches the display of favorites between the address view and title view. [Delete All] Deletes all registered favorites. Deleting the favorites requires the administrator authority. [Close] Closes the list of favorites. Item Description [Open New Window] Opens the selected favorite with a new window. [Edit] Edits the title and address of the selected favorite. Editing the favorites requires the administrator authority. [Up] Brings you above the selected favorite. Use this button when the list of favorites is displayed in the list view. [Down] Brings you below the selected favorite. Use this button when the list of favorites is displayed in the list view. [Delete] Deletes the selected favorite. Deleting the favorites requires the administrator authority. [Close] Closes this screen. 4 Toolbar 4-14 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4.5 4.5.4 [Address] Press [Address] to display the screen for entering the address. Press the entry form to display the keyboard screen. Enter the URL of the page to be displayed, and press [OK] or [Open New Window]. Press [Input History] to display the list of input history. You can reference the past inputs. The MFP can hold up to 100 input history records. Reference - If you display the screen for entering the address, you see the URL of the page being displayed. To delete the URL currently shown, display the keyboard screen and press [Delete]. Press C (clear) in the Control Panel to delete all data entries. - If the user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel, the list of input history records for the user who is managed in the server is displayed. My Panel can hold up to 20 input history records for each user. 4.5.5 [History] Press [History] to display the display history screen. From the list of display history, select a page to be displayed again. The MFP can hold up to 100 display history records. Reference - If the user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel, the list of display history records for the user who is managed in the server is displayed. My Panel can hold up to 20 display history records for each user. [Display History] Press to display the list of operations available for the item. From this list, select the desired operation. The following shows the available operations. Item Description [Address View]/[Title View] Switches the display history between the address view and title view. [Delete All] Deletes all registered entries in the display history. Deleting the display history requires the administrator authority. [Close] Closes the list of display history. Item Description [Open New Window] Loads the selected display history with a new window. [Delete] Deletes the selected display history. Deleting the display history requires the administrator authority. [Close] Closes this screen. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-15 4.5 Toolbar 4 4.5.6 [Print] Press [Print] to display the Print screen. Configure the print settings, and then press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. The displayed contents are printed. Reference - If you attempt to print a Web page or JPEG or other image that takes up a large amount of memory, a scan error may occur and printing will be disabled. - The setting value of [Finishing] varies depending on which options are installed. – The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. – The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. – The Fold and Center Staple & Fold functions can be used when a saddle stitcher is installed on the optional finisher. 4.5.7 [Menu] Press [Menu] to configure the Web Browser settings. There are two types of menus; one for the user and one for the administrator. For details, refer to page 4-16. Item Description [Color] Specify whether to print originals in color or black-and-white. [Paper] Select the size of paper for printing. [Simplex/Duplex] Select whether to print in 2-sided mode. [Stamp Settings] Specify whether to print the [Title], [URL], [Date/Time], and [Page Number]. [Finishing] Configure settings for collating, grouping, offsetting. stapling, hole punching, folding, or binding. 4 Configuring the Web Browser settings 4-16 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4.6 4.6 Configuring the Web Browser settings Pressing [Menu] in the tool bar displays the menu for the user. Users can only view the Web browser operation settings and information. The administrator of the MFP can configure the operating environment and security settings in addition to the Web browser operation settings. To display the administrator menu, press [Administrator] in the menu screen, and enter the administrator password. 4.6.1 [Page Operation] In the [Page Operation] tab, configure the settings for page operation. Reference - Items with * are displayed only for the administrator menu. - [Use for Home Page] is displayed for users using the Web browser by linking to My Panel. 4.6.2 [Display] In the [Display] tab, configure settings for displaying contents. The administrator of the MFP can configure the settings to hide or display images and animations, enable or disable JavaScript, and make detailed setting related to the contents display. Item Description [Use for Home Page]* Registers the displayed page as the home page. [Page Memo] Displays the page saved as a page memo. Selecting the page memo from the list displays the corresponding page. Press to display the list of operations available for the item. From this list, select the desired operation. [Save as Page Memo] Saves the displayed page as it is. [Zoom Display] Press [Zoom Display] to display the key to enlarge or reduce the page display size. Press the key to adjust the page display size. Item Description [Display Mode] Select the display mode for Web Browser from [Normal], [Just-Fit Rendering], and [Smart-Fit Rendering]. For details, refer to page 4-11. [Encoding] Specify the encode type to be used when displaying contents. [Detail Settings] Configure settings for displaying contents. • [Image]: Select this check box to display images. • [Animation]: Select this check box to display animation GIF. • [Table]: Select this check box to recognize the table in HTML and adjust the layout. • [JavaScript]: Select this check box to enable JavaScript in contents. • [CSS]: Select this check box to enable CSS in contents. • [Ward Wrap]: Select this check box to enable the word wrap in contents. • [Line Boundary Char. Check]: Select this check box to enable the line boundary character check in contents. • [Rapid-Render]: Select this check box to enable the Rapid-Render function. • [Pop-Up Window]: Select this check box to allow displaying the pop-up window. • [Offline Permission]: Select this check box to allow the use of the contents off-line. • [Auto Flash Playback]: Select this check box to automatically play a Flash content. • [Enable Offline Display]: Select this check box to enable viewing of the contents off-line. Displayed when [Offline Permission] is allowed by the administrator. [Color Selection Setting] Select a color for the selected item ([Green], [Blue], [Yellow], or [Orange]). ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-17 4.6 Configuring the Web Browser settings 4 4.6.3 [Manage windows] In the [Manage windows] tab, operate the window. Up to five windows can be opened. 4.6.4 [Settings] The [Settings] tab allows you to check and reset the Web browser information. The administrator of the MFP can configure the operating environment and security settings of the Web browser. Reference - Items with * are displayed only for the administrator menu. - The following settings are available for users using the Web browser by linking to My Panel. – [Startup Settings] – Setting for deleting [Cookies] – Setting for deleting [Authentication Information] - My Panel can hold up to 20 items of cookies and authentication information for each user. Item Description [Create new window] Displays the contents of the URL registered as the home page with a new window. [Open in new window] Displays the link destination page with a new window. [Close active window] Closes the active window. [Close other windows] Closes all windows. This is not selectable when only one window is open. Item Description [Startup Settings]* Specify whether to display the page registered as the home page or the last page being displayed when you exited Web Browser previously, at the startup of Web Browser. [Security]* Configure SSL or TLS setting, or display a root certificate or CA certificate. [Cookies]* Configure settings to receive and delete cookies. This menu is also used to delete all cookies saved in the MFP. [Cache]* Configure settings to use and delete caches. This menu is also used to delete all caches saved in the MFP. [Proxy]* Configure the settings for use of proxy. To use the proxy, register the address and port for the proxy server. If proxy authentication is required, register the ID and password for use in proxy authentication. [Authentication Information]* Specify the timing to delete the authentication information you have entered in the contents. This menu is also used to delete all authentication information saved in the MFP. [Access Log]* Check for access history of all users. You can check the [ID], [User Name], [URL] and [Access]. [Web Browser Information] Displays Web Browser information. [Reset] Restart the Web browser. 4 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4-18 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4.7 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file If a link to a document file is provided in the displayed contents, you can print, display, or save the document file. - The PDF and XPS formats are supported for the document files. - You cannot display an XPS file. Press the link to the document file in the contents to display the top screen of the document file. 4.7.1 Printing a document file Press [Print] to display the Print screen. Configure the print settings, and then press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. The document file is downloaded and printed. Item Description [Color] Specify whether to print originals in color or black-and-white. [Paper] Select the size of paper for printing. [Simplex/Duplex] Select whether to print in 2-sided mode. [Stamp Settings] Press this button to specify whether to print a [Date/Time] and [Page Number]. [Finishing] Configure settings for collating, grouping, offsetting. stapling, hole punching, folding, or binding. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-19 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4 Reference - If you attempt to print a document file that takes up a large amount of memory, a scan error may occur and printing will be disabled. - If the downloaded PDF is encrypted, it is saved in the Encryption PDF User Box without being printed. - The setting value of [Finishing] varies depending on which options are installed. – The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. – The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. – The Fold and Center Staple & Fold functions can be used when a saddle stitcher is installed on the optional finisher. 4 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4-20 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4.7 4.7.2 Displaying a document file Press [View] to display the link destination PDF file. The toolbar on the top of the screen allows you to enlarge, reduce, print, or save the PDF file. Key Description Brings you back to the top page. Brings you back to the previous page. Brings you to the next page. Brings you to the last page. Rotates the display 90 degrees clockwise. Increases the zoom ratio. Reduces the zoom ratio. Displays according to the width of the display area. Displays the entire page. Select the User Box to save the document file. Configure the print settings, and print the document file. Displays the splash window (displayed momentarily when the software activates). Closes the screen. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-21 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4 4.7.3 Saving a document file Press [Save]. The User Box selection screen is displayed. Select the User Box to save the file, press[OK], and then [Start] or Start. Then the document file is saved in the User Box. Reference - To save a document file to a User Box, you must register the User Box in the MFP in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. - When printing a document file (full color) that was saved in a User Box from the Web browser, you cannot specify [Zoom] or [Combine]. 4 Uploading a document file 4-22 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4.8 4.8 Uploading a document file If document files are shared on the server, you can upload a scanned document file or a document file in a User Box to the server using a Web Browser. This section explains how to upload a document file, using the following upload site as an example. Example 4.8.1 Restrictions Note that there are following restrictions to use this function. - PDF, TIFF, or XPS is the type of a document file that can be uploaded. A document cannot be divided to upload. - Multiple document files cannot be uploaded at the same time. - The user cannot manually edit the file name text box. - If you perform one of the following operations after selecting a document file to be uploaded, the job is deleted together with the selected document file. – The System Auto Reset function has been started. – The Web browser has been closed. – The upload site has been updated by operating the toolbar of the Web browser. – The Web browser has been restarted. – The user has logged out during login processing. – The sub power switch has been turned off. – Reset has been pressed to reset the panel. 4.8.2 Uploading a scanned document file The following explains the procedure to upload a scanned document file. Reference - This procedure is not available for users who are disabled from scanning data. - The file format cannot be set to JPEG when scanning an original to be uploaded. 1 Display the upload site using the Web browser of the MFP. 2 Press the button to select a document file to be uploaded. % In this example, press [Browse]. Item Description [Browse] Press this button to select a document file to be uploaded. "type" is set to "file" in the Input tag of HTML. [OK] Press this button to upload a document file. "type" is set to "submit" in the Input tag of HTML. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-23 4.8 Uploading a document file 4 3 Press [Scan]. 4 Place the original to be uploaded on the MFP. 5 Configure the scan settings, and press [Start] or the Start key. % If Proof Copy is selected, you can check finishing. After scanning is completed, the file name is displayed in the text box. 6 Press the button to start uploading. % In this example, press [OK]. Uploading of a document file then starts. 4.8.3 Uploading a document file in a User Box The following explains the procedure to upload a document file retrieved from a User Box. Reference - This procedure is not available for users who are disabled from accessing the saved documents. - Before uploading a document file in a User Box, create a User Box to save the document file in. - Only the Public User Box and Personal User Box can be selected. - The file format cannot be set to JPEG when selecting a document file to be uploaded from a User Box. When selecting a JPEG document file saved in a User Box, the file format is changed to PDF. If necessary, specify the appropriate file format before uploading a document file. - When uploading a document file saved in a User Box while Page Separation is enabled, Page Separation is canceled and changed to Multi Page. 1 Display the upload site using the Web browser of the MFP. 2 Press the button to select a document file to be uploaded. % In this example, press [Browse]. 4 Uploading a document file 4-24 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4.8 3 Press the [User Box] key. 4 Select a desired User Box, and press [Use Document]. 5 Select a document file to be uploaded, and press [File Settings]. % Select multiple document files and press [Combine]; they can be combined as one file. The combination order can be changed as required. % Select a document file and press [Document Details] to check the date and time the document file was saved and to preview the image. 6 Configure the file setting, and press [Start] or the Start key. % Press [Application] to configure the stamp or page number print setting. The file name appears in the text box. 7 Press the button to start uploading. % In this example, press [OK]. Uploading of a document file then starts. 5 Web Connection (Web Browser Function) ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 5-3 5.1 Using Web Connection 5 5 Web Connection (Web Browser Function) 5.1 Using Web Connection Web Connection is a device management utility that is supported by the HTTP server built in this machine. To use this utility, directly access the MFP connected to the network using Web Browser. To use this utility using Web Browser installed in the MFP, only the User Box function is available. This chapter describes how to use documents in the User Box of the MFP on the network by operating Web Connection using the Web Browser installed in the MFP. Reference - This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-101 v2 registered. - i-Option LK-101 v2 must be registered also in the MFP access destination. - For details on using the Web Browser installed in the MFP, refer to page 4-3. - To operate Web Connection from a Web browser of your computer, you can use various functions such as the status check, setting change, and network setting functions of the MFP. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 5.1.1 Prior check The most recent information may not appear in Web Connection screens because older versions of pages are saved in the cache for the Web browser. In addition, problems may occur when the cache is used. When using Web Connection, disable the cache for the Web browser. Reference - Changing the cache settings requires the administrator authority. 1 Press [Menu] on the toolbar of the Web browser. 2 Press [Administrator]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press the [Settings] tab, and then select [Cache]. 5 Clear the [Use cache] check box, and then press [OK]. 5.1.2 How to access Start the Web browser, and then specify the IP address of the MFP to be accessed. 1 Press [Address] on the toolbar of the Web browser. 2 Press the entry form to display the keyboard screen. 3 Enter the IP address of the MFP to be accessed, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [OK] or [Open New Window]. The Web Connection screen appears. Reference - If you have specified to not receive cookies for Web browser settings, Web Connection screen does not appear. For details on configuring cookie settings, refer to page 4-17. - If you display the screen for entering the address, you see the URL of the page being displayed. To delete the URL currently shown, display the keyboard screen and press [Delete]. Press C (clear) in the Control Panel to delete all URL entries. 5 Screen components 5-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 5.2 5.2 Screen components The Web Connection screen is constructed as shown below. No. Name Description 1 Login user name Displays the icon of the current mode and the name of the user who is logged on (public, registered user, or account). 2 [Logout] Press this button to log out from the current mode. 3 Help Press this button to reference the online manual. 4 Contents display Displays the contents of Web Connection. 1 2 3 4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 5-5 5.3 Logging in and logging out 5 5.3 Logging in and logging out If you have specified to perform User Authentication or Account Track on the MFP, the login screen appears after displaying Web Connection. Reference - If you have not specified to perform User Authentication or Account Track, the screen displayed when you logged in as a public user appears. - To use Web Connection using the Web Browser installed in the MFP, its administrator mode is not available. 5.3.1 Login Select whether to log in as a public user or registered user. If External Server Authentication is selected, select an external authentication server. Enter the required information, and press [Login]. Select a display language if necessary. Reference - The User Boxes that can be accessed vary depending on the logged in user or account track. 5.3.2 Logout Press [Logout] on the upper right of the screen to display a logout confirmation screen. Press [OK]. The login screen appears again. 5 Using the User Box function 5-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 5.4 5.4 Using the User Box function To use Web Connection using the Web Browser installed in the MFP, the following operations are available as the User Box function. - Operating documents in the User Box on the MFP being used or a different MFP connected to the network. - Using the Public, Personal, and Group User Boxes as User Box Types. - Displaying, printing, and deleting a document in the User Box. 5.4.1 Open User Box Logging in using Web Connection displays the list of User Boxes (Public, Personal, and Group User Boxes) registered in the accessed MFP. [Open User Box] Select a desired User Box name ([User Box Name]) at User Box List. Alternatively, directly enter a User Box number ([User Box Number]) and User Box password ([User Box Password]), and then press [OK]. Reference - When you select a User Box name ([User Box Name]) with a password specified in [User Box List], a screen for entering the password appears. [Open User Box] [User Box List] Item Description [User Box Number] Enter the User Box number to be opened. [User Box Password] If a password is set to the target User Box, enter the password. Item Description [Search from Index] Switch the index display according to the indexes selected when creating a User Box. [Page (Display by 50 cases)] When this machine contains 50 or more User Boxes, specify the desired page to change the display. User Box List Displays the [User Box Number], [User Box Name], [Type] and [Time Stored]. A key icon appears beside User Boxes where a password has been specified. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 5-7 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 [File List] Select a User Box in [Open User Box]. The basic information of the User Box is displayed with a list of the documents saved in the User Box. Item Description [Thumbnail View] Specify whether to view the thumbnail images of the document. Set to [OFF] for list display. [Specify operation] Select an operation. For details, refer to page 5-8. [Changes the display] Press this button to display the [Select] check box beside all documents with which the selected operation can be performed. [Select] Displays a check box beside all documents with which the selected operation can be performed. [Thumbnail] Displays thumbnail images of the document. [Document Name] Displays the name of the document. [Number of Originals] Displays the number of originals in a document. [Edit Name] Press this button to change the document name. 5 Using the User Box function 5-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 5.4 5.4.2 Document operations A selected document can be printed or deleted. Printing a document 1 Select [Print] from [Specify operation], and then press [Changes the display]. A check box appears beside all printable documents. 2 Select the check box for the document to be printed, and then press [Print Setting]. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 5-9 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 3 Configure necessary settings, and then press [OK]. % In [Page Range], select whether to print all pages of the selected document or to print by specifying a page range. % In [Change order], you can change the print order when printing multiple documents. 4 Press [Open File]. 5 Press [Print]. % If [View] is pressed, a PDF file appears. To print the displayed PDF file, press . 6 Configure print settings, and then press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. Reference - If the [Function Version] of the destination MFP is not [Version 3], press [Open File] in Step 4 to display the PDF file on the panel. To print the displayed PDF file, press . To check the function version of the MFP, select [Device Information] in [Utility]. 5 Using the User Box function 5-10 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 5.4 Deleting a document 1 Select [Delete] from [Specify operation], and then press [Changes the display]. A check box appears beside the documents that can be deleted. 2 Select the check box for the document to be deleted, and then press [Delete]. % Select the [Check/Uncheck (applied to all the documents )] check box to select all documents. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 5-11 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 3 Check the document name to be deleted, and then press [OK]. The document is deleted. 5 Using the User Box function 5-12 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 5.4 6 Image Panel ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-3 6.1 Overview 6 6 Image Panel 6.1 Overview Image Panel is a new intuitive and easy-to-understand panel interface. Reference - This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-101 v2 registered. - If [User Authentication/ Account Track] ö [Scan to Authorized Folder Settings] is set to [Limit] in [Administrator Settings], Image Panel cannot be used. Features Image Panel divides the operation workflow into three processes, "reading a document", "editing a document", and "specifying a destination", which can be operated on one screen. This allows you to easily understand the entire operation workflow and operation in progress. Image Panel focuses on operability. Therefore, the functions available in Image Panel are limited compared with the conventional panel. When the My Panel and My Address function are available, you can customize the Image Panel screen as a user-specific screen. dReference For details on the My Panel function, refer to page 9-3. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-3. 6 Displaying the Image Panel 6-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6.2 6.2 Displaying the Image Panel In [Application Menu], press [Image Panel] to display the Image Panel top screen. dReference For details on the [Application Menu], refer to page 3-4. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-5 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6.3.1 Screen components The Image Panel screen consists of the following. No. Name Description 1 Login Information area Displays the user name and icon of the user who is currently logged in. 2 Read Data area Scan a document, retrieve a document from a User Box or external memory, and send data from a cellular phone or PDA. 3 Desktop area Documents read in the Read Data area are displayed in a thumbnail view or list view. 4 List Display/Thumbnail View switching Switches the desktop area display between the list display and thumbnail view. 5 Message area Displays an auxiliary message such as operating instructions. 6 Status area Displays the date and current time. If an alert occurs, an alert icon appears. 7 Edit tool area Edit the page, combine and change settings of the document after it is scanned. 8 Send Tray/Edit Tool display switching Switches the display between the send tray and edit tool display. For details on the send tray, refer to page 6-17. 9 Document Destination area Specify a destination of the read document from [Print] or [Destination List]. 1 3 4 5 6 9 8 7 2 6 Operating Image Panel 6-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6.3 6.3.2 General operation The following describes the operation flow from document reading processing to sending processing by showing operations of Image Panel in order of "reading a document", "editing a document", and "specifying a destination". Reference - You can specify a destination first, and then read a document. In the Read Data area, read or retrieve a document. • To scan a document, place the document, and then press [Scan]. Configure the scan settings as needed, and then start to read the document. For details, refer to page 6-8. • To use a document saved in a User Box, select the User Box from [Document Source List], and select the document you want to retrieve. For details, refer to page 6-9. • To use a document saved in an external memory, select [External Memory] from [Document Source List], and select the document you want to retrieve. For details, refer to page 6-10. • To use data saved in a cellular phone or PDA, select [Mobile] from [Document Source List]. For details, refer to page 6-11. Select [Scan] Select [Document Source List]. In the Edit Tool area, edit the read document. For details, refer to page 6-12. In the Document Destination area, specify a destination of the read document. • To print, press [Print]. For details, refer to page 6-15. • To send the document, select a destination from [Destination List]. For details, refer to page 6-16. • To save data in an external memory, press [External Memory] in the Destination List screen. For details, refer to page 6-16. Select [Print]. Select [Destination List] ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-7 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 If you specify an address, the send tray appears. For details, refer to page 6-17. Press Start to send the document. • To send data from a cellular phone or PDA, press Start to display a PIN code. Enter the PIN code in the cellular phone or PDA to send data to the MFP. Data is sent to the specified destination. For details, refer to page 6-18. 6 Operating Image Panel 6-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6.3 6.3.3 Reading a document Scan a document, retrieve a document from a User Box or external memory, and send data from a cellular phone or PDA. Scanning a document Press [Scan] to display the Scan Settings screen. Configure the scan settings as needed, and then press [Scan]. Reference - Only one document can be scanned. Item Description [Original Type] Select the image quality from [Text], [Text/Photo], [Photo], [Dot Matrix Original] and [Copied Paper] according to the contents of the original to be scanned. [Simplex/Duplex] Select either to scan a 1-sided original or 2-sided original. [Resolution] Select the scan resolution from [200 e 100dpi (Standard)], [200 e 200dpi (Fine)], [300 e 300dpi], [400 e 400dpi (Super Fine)] and [600 e 600dpi (Ultra Fine)]. [File Type] Select a file type from [PDF], [Compact PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS] and [Compact XPS]. Select whether to save the whole scanned pages as one file, or to divide a file in specified number of pages in order to save data. You cannot select [Multi Page] if [JPEG] is selected for file type. To send divided files by attaching them to an E-mail, specify [E-mail Attachment Method]. Select [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail] to attach all divided files to one E-mail message. Select [One (1) File per E-Mail] to send E-mail messages for each divided file. Selecting [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Outline PDF]. If i-Option LK-102 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF]or [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Encryption] and [PDF Document Properties]. For details on the function, refer to page 7-3. If i-Option LK-105 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF]or [Compact PDF] for the file type allows you to specify [Searchable PDF]. For details on the function, refer to page 8-3. [Density] Adjust the density for scanning. [Color] Select the scan color from [Auto Color], [Full Color], [Gray Scale] and [Black]. [Document Name] Specify the document name. [Separate Scan] Press this button to divide scanning of the document into several times. It is useful for the following cases. • When the number of pages of a document is too many, and it cannot be loaded into the ADF • When placing the originals on the original glass • When 1-sided originals and 2-sided originals are mixed ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-9 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 Retrieving from User Box Select a User Box from [Document Source List] to display the Use Document screen. Select a document to be retrieved, and then press [OK]. Reference - If a password has been specified for the selected User Box, the password input screen appears. Enter the password. - Only one User Box can be selected. - Up to 10 documents can be retrieved from a User Box at one time. - If a User Box is specified as a destination, you cannot retrieve more than one document. - If [Print]is specified as a destination, you cannot retrieve more than one document. - You cannot specify the User Box, from which you retrieved the document, as the destination. Item Description [Edit Name] Press this button to change the name of the selected document. [Document Details] Press this button to check the detailed information or preview image of the selected document. 6 Operating Image Panel 6-10 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6.3 Retrieving a document from an external memory Select [External Memory] from [Document Source List] to display the list of documents saved in the external memory. Select a document to be retrieved, and then press [OK]. Reference - To retrieve a document from an external memory, you must configure the following settings in the MFP depending on the purpose of the document to be used. – To print a retrieved document, in [Administrator Settings]ö[System Settings]ö[User Box Settings] ö[External Memory Function Settings], set [Print Document] to [ON]. To additionally perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[Print] to [Allow] for each user. – To save a retrieved document in a User Box, in [Administrator Settings]ö[System Settings]ö[User Box Settings]ö[External Memory Function Settings], set [External Memory Document Scan] to [ON]. To additionally perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[External Memory Document Scan] to [Allow] for each user. - The available file formats are PDF, TIFF, JPEG, and XPS. - Up to 200 documents can be retrieved from an external memory. - To open a folder, select the one you want to open, and then press [Open]. - You cannot specify a JPEG document together with any other format at the same time. - If a document has been retrieved from an external memory, you cannot read the document using [Scan] or [Document Source List]. - You can only specify either [Print] or a User Box as a destination of a document retrieved from an external memory. Also, you can specify only one User Box as a destination. To save a document in a User Box, you must create a User Box and register the User Box in the address book in advance. - If other than User Box is specified as a destination, you cannot select [External Memory]. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-11 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 Using data saved in a cellular phone or PDA Select [Mobile] from [Document Source List]. Selecting [Mobile/PDA] and pressing [OK] displays the cellular phone icon on the desktop area. Reference - To connect the MFP to a cellular phone or PDA, install the optional Local Interface Kit EK-605 in the MFP. Additionally, configure the following settings in the MFP. – Set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[Bluetooth Setting] to [Enable]. Also, set [Administrator Settings]ö[System Connection]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] to [Allow]. – To perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA] to [Allow] for each user. - If [Mobile/PDA] is selected, you cannot read a document using [Scan] or [Document Source List]. - You can only specify either [Print] or a User Box as a destination for sending data from a cellular phone or PDA. Also, you can specify only one User Box as a destination. To save a document in a User Box, you must create a User Box and register the User Box in the address book in advance. - If other than [Print] or a User Box is specified as a destination, you cannot select [Mobile]. - This machine supports RepliGo version 2.1.0.9. - To print an XHTML file, since a linked file is retrieved using the WebDAV client function, you must configure the following settings in the MFP in advance. – Set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[WebDAV Settings]ö[WebDAV Client Settings] to [ON]. – To connect via a proxy, register a proxy server in [Proxy Server Address] of [WebDAV Client Settings]. Additionally, set [User Settings]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting]ö[Proxy Server Use] to [Yes]. – In [User Settings]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting]ö[Link File Error Notification], specify the operation for the machine to execute when it is unable to retrieve the linked file. dReference For details on how to send data from a cellular phone or PDA, refer to page 6-18. The function to connect the MFP to a cellular phone or PDA is available even if the license kit is not registered. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations] and [User's Guide Print Operations]. Item Specifications Communication protocol Bluetooth Ver. 2.0 + EDR Supporting profile OPP/BPP/SPP Supporting file type PDF/CPDF/XPS/CXPS/TIFF/JPEG/XHTML/RepliGo Supporting XHTML file Character code: UTF-8, Shift-JIS, ISO-8859 Extension of link file: JPEG, JPG, PNG 6 Operating Image Panel 6-12 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6.3 6.3.4 Editing the document Edit the read document. Reference - When using data saved in a cellular phone or PDA, you cannot check the preview image or edit the data. [Preview] Press this button to check the detailed information or preview image of the selected document. Reference - For a document retrieved from an external memory, the [Preview] function is not available. - For a combined document, the preview function is available only for the first document. [Document/Page] - [Edit Document] Edit the pages of a selected document. You can rotate the page that has been scanned in the wrong direction, or delete an unnecessary page. For a document consisting of multiple pages, you can move pages to change the page order. Also, you can preview the pages to check the page content. Reference - If you have selected multiple documents, the edit page function is not available. - If you have selected a combined document, the edit page function is not available. Item Description [Odd Page] Press this button to select the odd page. [Even Page] Press this button to select the even page. [Preview /Set Range] Press this button to preview the page. [Delete Page] Press this button to delete the selected page. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-13 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 [Document/Page] - [Combine Documents] Combine selected multiple documents. You can use [Move] to change the combination order. Reference - You can only select either [Print] or [Destination List] as a destination of a combined document. - Up to 10 documents can be combined at one time. - You cannot combine a scanned document with a document retrieved from a User Box. [Rotate Page] Press this button to rotate the selected page. The allowable rotation angles are left 90 degrees, right 90 degrees, and 180 degrees. [Move Page] Press this button to change the order by moving the selected page. While checking the thumbnail images, you can select the moving position. Item Description 6 Operating Image Panel 6-14 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6.3 [Document/Page] - [Document Settings] Configure settings for sending the selected document. You can change the resolution of the document, file type, and color setting. Reference - If you have selected multiple documents, the document setting function is not available. - If you have selected a document retrieved from an external memory, the document setting function is not available. [Return to Scan Dest.] Press [Return to Scan Dest.] to restore the selected document to the source location. - The scanned document is deleted from the MFP. - The document retrieved from a User Box is restored to the source User Box. Item Description [Resolution] Select the scan resolution from [Settings when saving], [200 e 100dpi (Standard)], [200 e 200dpi (Fine)], [300 e 300dpi], [400 e 400dpi (Super Fine)] and [600 e 600dpi (Ultra Fine)]. [File Type] Select the file format for sending data from [PDF], [Compact PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS] and [Compact XPS]. Select whether to save the whole scanned pages as one file, or to divide a file in specified number of pages in order to save data. You cannot select [Multi Page] if [JPEG] is selected for file type. To send divided files by attaching them to an E-mail, specify [E-mail Attachment Method]. Select [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail] to attach all divided files to one E-mail message. Select [One (1) File per E-Mail] to send E-mail messages for each divided file. Selecting [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Outline PDF]. If i-Option LK-102 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF]or [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Encryption] and [PDF Document Properties]. For details on the function, refer to page 7-3. If i-Option LK-105 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF]or [Compact PDF] for the file type allows you to specify [Searchable PDF]. For details on the function, refer to page 8-3. [Color] Select the scan color for sending data from [Use Existing Color Setting], [Full Color], [Gray Scale] and [Black]. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-15 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3.5 Specifying a destination Specify a destination of the read document. Printing Press [Print] to print data directly from the MFP. Configure the print settings, and then press [OK]. Reference - If you have scanned multiple documents, the print setting function will not be available. - When you print a combined document, [Combine] and [Zoom] are not available. - When printing a document with an embedded password using the password copy function, you cannot specify [Combine] or [Zoom]. For details on the password copy function, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. - When you print a document that has been retrieved from an external memory, [Use Existing Color Setting], [Combine] and [Zoom] are not available. - When you print a document of JPEG, XPS, or Compact XPS format that has been retrieved from an external memory, [2-Sided] is not available. Also, Staple and Punch are not available for the [Finishing] setting. - When printing data saved in a cellular phone or PDA, you can only check the print settings. To change print settings, select [User Settings]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting]ö[Print]. Reference - The setting value of [Finishing] varies depending on which option is installed. – The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. – The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. - [Continuous Print] is displayed when multiple documents are combined using the editing tool, and then [Print] is selected as a destination. Item Description [Copies:] Specify the number of copies to be printed using the Keypad. [Print] Select whether to print in 2-sided mode. [Color] Specify whether to print originals in color or black-and-white. [Finishing] Press this button to configure settings for collating, grouping, stapling, or hole punching. [Combine] Press this button to specify whether to combine pages. Multiple pages of a document can be combined and printed on a single page. [Zoom] Press this button to specify a zoom ratio for the document. [Continuous Print] This function is available when printing combined documents in the 2-sided print mode. Multiple document are printed continuously when they are combined. When printing in 2-Sided mode, and the document ends on the front side of a sheet of paper, select whether to start printing of the next document on the back side of the sheet or on the front side of a new sheet. 6 Operating Image Panel 6-16 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6.3 Specifying destinations From [Destination List], select an address to which you want to send a document. Press the [Search] tab to reference one-touch destinations registered in the main unit. Press the [Group] tab to reference the group list registered in the main unit. Reference - If you have read multiple documents, the User Box function will not be available. - If My address function is available, pressing [My Address] allows you to view My Address Book. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-3. - If you have specified an address, you can check the send tray by pressing [Verify Address Tray/ Remote Address Setting]. - E-mail addresses for which a certificate is registered are displayed with a key icon. - You can only specify User Boxes as an address book destination of a document retrieved from an external memory or a document saved in a cellular phone or PDA. Saving a document in an external memory Select [External Memory] from [Destination List], and press [OK]. Reference - To save data in an external memory, in [Administrator Settings]ö[System Settings]ö[User Box Settings] ö[External Memory Function Settings], set [Save Document] to [ON]. To additionally perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[Save to External Memory] to [Allow] for each user. - If [Print] or a destination is specified as a destination, you cannot select [External Memory]. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-17 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3.6 Checking the send tray Send Tray If you specify an address, the send tray appears. The send tray displays the icon for the destination you have specified. [Check TX Tray] Press the icon of the send tray to display the Check Send To screen, where you can check the list of specified destinations. If an E-mail address is specified as a destination, you can specify settings for the E-mail encryption and digital signature attachment. No. Name Description 1 Dest. Settings icon Press the Dest. Settings icon to display the Check Send To screen, where you can check the list of specified destinations. 2 Destination icon Displays the icons for destinations. Press the icon for the desired destination to display the Check Send To screen, where you can check the detail information of the destination. 1 2 Item Description [Remote Address Settings] Press this button to configure settings for E-mail encryption based on S/MIME and digital signature attachment. This setting is available when [ON] is selected for [S/MIME Communication Settings] of [Administrator Settings], and E-mail is selected. [Detail] Press this button to check the detailed information of the address. 6 Operating Image Panel 6-18 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6.3 Reference - To encrypt an E-mail message and attach a digital signature using S/MIME, set [Administrator Settings] ö[Network Settings]ö[E-Mail Settings]ö[S/MIME Communication Settings] to [ON]. - To encrypt an E-mail, a certificate must be registered in the E-mail address. - To attach a digital signature to an E-mail message, the device certificate must be registered in the MFP. Also, set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[E-Mail Settings]ö[S/MIME Communication Settings]ö[Digital Signature] to [Always add signature] or [Select when sending]. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 6.3.7 Sending data from a cellular phone or PDA Selecting a destination and pressing Start displays the PIN code on the Control Panel. Specify the data you want to use and the MFP to send data in the cellular phone or PDA. Then enter the PIN code to send data to the MFP. Reference - You can only specify either [Print] or a User Box as a destination for sending data from a cellular phone or PDA. Also, you can specify only one User Box as a destination. To save a document in a User Box, you must create a User Box and register the User Box in the address book in advance. – For details on how to create a User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. – For details on how to register a destination to the address book, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. - For the operation of a cellular phone or PDA, refer to the operation manual of the cellular phone or PDA. - The communication speed may be reduced or communication may be interrupted by obstacles, signal quality, magnetic field or static electricity. - Documents and image data may not be sent correctly depending on the security setting of the cellular phone or PDA. [Delete] Press this button to delete the selected address. Item Description ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-19 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book 6 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book From the Web browser on your computer, you can use Web Connection to add photo data to registered one-touch destinations. The registered photo data is applied to the [Destination List] of Image Panel. dReference For details on Web Connection, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 6.4.1 Specifications of photo data The specifications for registerable photo data are as shown below. Reference - Photo data is not enlarged or reduced during photo data registration process. Item Specifications File Type BMP format, 24-bit color, uncompressed Image size 48 e 48 pixels Data size 6,966 bytes 6 Registering a photo in the address book 6-20 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6.4 6.4.2 Registering photo data Register photo data by operating Web Connection from the Web browser on your computer. Reference - To add photo data to the address book, you must register one-touch destinations in advance. - When the My Address function is available, you can add photo data to one-touch destinations in My Address Book. - Photo data can be registered in My Address Book only when you log in as a registered user. 1 Log in to the user mode or administrator mode. 2 Select [Store Address]. 3 Select [Photo/Icon]. 4 Select the one-touch destination to which you want to add photo data, and then click [Edit]. % When the photo data is registered, [Photo/Icon] is displayed in [Photo]. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-21 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book 6 5 Select [Register Photo]. 6 Click [Browse], and then specify the folder where the photo data you want to add is saved. 7 Press [OK]. The photo data is added to the one-touch destination. 6 Customizing Image Panel 6-22 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6.5 6.5 Customizing Image Panel When the My Panel and My Address function are available, you can customize the Image Panel screen as a user-specific screen. To customize the Image Panel screen, the following conditions are required. - The My Panel and My Address functions are available on the MFP. - Perform user authentication, and then log in as a registered user. dReference For details on the My Panel function, refer to page 9-3. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-3. 6.5.1 Customizing the Read Data area Shortcut icons for frequently used User Boxes can be registered in the Read Data area. 1 In [Data Source], press [Document Source List]. 2 Press [Customize Basic Screen]. 3 Select the User Box you want to register in the basic screen, and select the location in the Read Data area. % If you have selected a location that is already registered in the basic screen, the data is overwritten. % You cannot register a User Box that is already registered in the basic screen to another location in the basic screen. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-23 6.5 Customizing Image Panel 6 4 Press [OK]. A shortcut icon is registered. 6.5.2 Customizing the Document Destination area Shortcut icons for frequently used destinations can be registered in the Document Destination area. 1 Press [Destination List] in the [Data Destination] area. 2 Press [Customize Basic Screen]. 3 Select the destination you want to register in the basic screen, and select the location in the Document Destination area. % If you have selected a location that is already registered in the basic screen, the data is overwritten. % You cannot register a destination that is already registered in the basic screen to another location in the basic screen. 6 Customizing Image Panel 6-24 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6.5 4 Press [OK]. A shortcut icon is registered. 6.5.3 Deleting a registered shortcut icon 1 Press [Customize Basic Screen]. 2 Select an icon you want to delete. 3 Press [Delete]. 4 Press [OK]. The shortcut icon is deleted. 7 PDF Processing Function ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-3 7.1 Overview 7 7 PDF Processing Function 7.1 Overview The PDF processing function allows you to specify the security level for distributing a scanned document and a document saved in a User Box, such as by encrypting a document or adding a digital signature as required. Reference - This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-102 registered. Available operations with the PDF processing function The PDF processing function allows you to perform the following operations. - Configuring the PDF document property settings when distributing it with the scan or User Box function (p. 7-4). - Encrypting a PDF document using a password or digital ID (public key) when distributing it with the scan or User Box function (p. 7-5). - Adding a digital signature when distributing an encrypted PDF document (p. 7-5). - An AES-encrypted PDF document can be printed using the direct print mode (p. 7-8). dReference For details on the scan function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. For details on User Box functions, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. 7 PDF document properties 7-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.2 7.2 PDF document properties Selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] as a file type when distributing a scanned document or document saved in a User Box allows you to configure the PDF document property settings. Reference - When saving a document in a User Box using [Save Document] of the User Box function, you cannot configure the PDF document property settings. - When sending a document in a User Box in the PDF format to other device using Web Connection, you can configure the PDF document property settings. Item Description [Title] If [No] is selected for [Apply file name.], specify the title of the PDF document (up to 64 characters). [Apply file name.] Specify whether to apply the file name as the name of the PDF document. [Author] Enter the author of the PDF document (up to 64 characters). When user authentication is performed, the login name is entered as the author name. [Subject] Enter the sub-title of the PDF document (up to 64 characters). [Keywords] Enter the keywords of the PDF document (up to 64 characters). ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-5 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature 7 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature Selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] as a file type when distributing a scanned document or document saved in a User Box allows you to enhance security for the PDF document by encrypting it using a password or the digital ID of a user (public key). When a device certificate is registered in the MFP, a PDF document can be distributed with a digital signature added. Adding a digital signature certifies the author (MFP) of the sent document and guarantees that the document has not been modified after being signed. Reference - Using Web Connection, you can encrypt and add a digital signature to send a document in a User Box to another device in the PDF format. - To add a digital signature, it is necessary to encrypt the PDF document using a password or digital ID. 7.3.1 Password-based encryption To encrypt a document using a password, configure the following settings. Item Description [Encryption Target] Select an encryption target. Selecting [Other than Metadata] excludes the item specified in [PDF Document Properties] from the encryption target. Selecting [Other than Metadata] does not allow you to select [Low Level] for Encryption Level. [Encryption Type] Select [Password]. [Signature] When a device certificate has been registered in the MFP, specify whether to add a digital signature. For details on registering a device certificate in the MFP, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. [Encryption Level] Select an encryption level. • [Low Level]: RC4 encoding method (40-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 3.0 or later • [High Level 1]: RC4 encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 5.0 or later • [High Level 2]: AES encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 7.0 or later [Password] Enter the password required to open a PDF document. Enter the password twice for confirmation. [Document Permissions] Enter the password required to change the document permissions. Enter the password twice for confirmation. You cannot use the same password as that specified in [Password]. After you have configured document permissions, press [Detail Settings] to configure the detailed permission settings. The set values vary depending on the encryption level. 7 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature 7-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.3 [Detail Settings] 7.3.2 Digital ID-based encryption To encrypt a document using the digital ID of a user, configure the following settings. Item Description [Printing Allowed] Specify whether to permit printing of a PDF document. [Low Resolution] is selectable when [High Level 1] or [High Level 2] is selected for Encryption Level. [Enable copying of text, images and other content] Specify whether to enable copying of text, images and other content. [Changes Allowed] Specify the permission level related to making changes to a PDF document. • Select [Inserting, deleting and rotating pages] to insert, delete or rotate the page. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Filling in form fields and signing.] to enter information in the form and add a digital signature. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Commenting, filling in form fields and signing] to add comments, enter information in the form and add a digital signature. • Select [Page layout, filling in form fields and signing.] to insert, delete or rotate the page, enter information in the form and add a digital signature. Configure this setting for encryption at a lower security level. • Select [Any except extracting pages] to edit a document, create the form field and enter information to it, add comments, and add a digital signature. Item Description [Encryption Target] Select an encryption target. Selecting [Other than Metadata] excludes the item specified in [PDF Document Properties] from the encryption target. [Encryption Type] Select [Digital ID]. Select [Digital ID] to display the screen for selecting destinations. The screen for selecting an address displays a list of E-mail addresses with registered digital IDs for S/MIME sending. Specify a digital ID to be used for encryption by selecting an E-mail address. Selecting [Same as destination] uses the digital ID of the address; you do not need to specify a digital ID on this screen. Specification of the digital ID is independent of specification of an address; therefore, you need to specify an address separately. [Signature] When a device certificate has been registered in the MFP, specify whether to add a digital signature. For details on registering a device certificate in the MFP, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-7 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature 7 [Detail Settings] Reference - Digital ID-based encryption requires registering the certificate of a user in an E-mail address in advance. For details on registering the certificate of a user in an E-mail address, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. - You can specify up to 100 digital IDs. - The specifiable digital ID depends on the apply level of a user. - When saving a PDF document in a User Box, you cannot encrypt it using a digital ID. - When encrypting a PDF document and creating a searchable PDF document at the same time, the following settings are not available if [Adjust Rotation] is set to [Adjust] in the searchable PDF setting. – [Encryption Type]: [Digital ID] – [Encryption Level]: [High Level 2] – [Encryption Target]: [Other than Metadata] – [Signature]: [Yes] - For details on the searchable PDF function, refer to page 8-3. [Encryption Level] Select an encryption level. To encrypt a document using a digital ID, you cannot select [Low Level] for Encryption Level. • [High Level 1]: RC4 encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 5.0 or later • [High Level 2]: AES encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 7.0 or later Item Description [Printing Allowed] Specify whether to permit printing of a PDF document. [Enable copying of text, images and other content] Specify whether to enable copying of text, images and other content. [Changes Allowed] Specify the permission level related to making changes to a PDF document. • Select [Inserting, deleting and rotating pages] to insert, delete or rotate the page. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Filling in form fields and signing.] to enter information in the form and add a digital signature. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Commenting, filling in form fields and signing] to add comments, enter information in the form and add a digital signature. • Select [Page layout, filling in form fields and signing.] to insert, delete or rotate the page, enter information in the form and add a digital signature. Configure this setting for encryption at a lower security level. • Select [Any except extracting pages] to edit a document, create the form field and enter information to it, add comments, and add a digital signature. Item Description 7 Direct Print 7-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.4 7.4 Direct Print An AES-encrypted PDF document can be printed in the direct print mode. User Web Connection to print documents in the direct print mode. Log in as a public user or registered user, and then select [Direct Print]. Click [Browse] to locate the file, and then click [OK]. dReference For details on Web Connection, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. 8 Searchable PDF function ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-3 8.1 Overview 8 8 Searchable PDF function 8.1 Overview Searchable PDF refers to a function that creates a text searchable PDF file by pasting transparent text data on the area of a document in which characters are recognized through an OCR process. You can create a searchable PDF file when saving or sending an original in the PDF or compact PDF format using the scan or User Box function. The searchable PDF function supports multiple languages. When creating a searchable PDF file, select an appropriate language according to the original for correct OCR processing. Also, you can improve the accuracy of OCR processing by automatically correcting the page direction. If you want to manage paper-based documents in electronic format, it will be convenient to use the searchable PDF function to convert documents into a text-searchable PDF file. Reference - This function is available when i-Option LK-105 is registered with the MFP. - For details on the scan function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. - For details on User Box functions, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. Precautions when creating searchable PDF files Depending on the original condition, there may be some problems recognizing the text, the text may become garbled, or other problems may arise. Example - The characters that the MFP does not support will not be correctly recognized. - If any language different from that used in the original is selected when creating a searchable PDF file, text will not be correctly recognized. - If the page direction is not set to be corrected automatically, and the direction of the specified original does not match the direction of the text, text will not be correctly recognized. dReference For details on the setting to automatically correct the page direction, refer to page 8-5. Recognizable character size Reference - When creating a searchable PDF file, a resolution over 300 dpi cannot be specified for scanning. Japanese European language Asian language Resolution 200 dpi 12 pt to 142 pt 9 pt to 142 pt 20 pt to 142 pt 300 dpi 8 pt to 96 pt 6 pt to 96 pt 12 pt to 96 pt 8 Configuring the OCR operation setting 8-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8.2 8.2 Configuring the OCR operation setting Before creating a searchable PDF file, you can specify whether to give priority to accuracy or speed for OCR processing. [OCR Operation Setting] 1 Press Utility/Counter. 2 Press [User Settings]. 3 Press [Scan/Fax Settings]. 4 In [Scan/Fax Settings] (2/2), press [OCR Operation Setting]. 5 Select the OCR operation, and press [OK]. % [Prioritize Quality]: Give priority to recognition accuracy of an original text. Also, inclination of the original is adjusted automatically. % [Prioritize Speed]: Give priority to OCR processing speed. Inclination of the original is not adjusted. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-5 8.3 Configuring the searchable PDF setting 8 8.3 Configuring the searchable PDF setting You can create a searchable PDF file by selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] for file type when saving or sending an original in the PDF format using the Scan and User Box functions. dReference For details on how to specify the file type when using the Scan function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. For details on how to specify the file type when using the User Box function, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. Reference - If [Compact PDF] is selected for [File Type] to create a searchable PDF file, the OCR processing speed may be faster than when [PDF] is selected. - When creating a searchable PDF file, [Resolution] cannot be set to [400 e 400dpi (Super Fine)] or [600 e 600dpi (Ultra Fine)]. - To create a searchable PDF file and encrypt a PDF file at the same time, if any of the following settings are specified, [Adjust Rotation] cannot be set to [Adjust] in the PDF encryption setting. – [Encryption Type]: [Digital ID] – [Encryption Level]: [High Level 2] – [Encryption Target]: [Other than Metadata] – [Signature]: [Yes] - For details on how to encrypt a PDF file, refer to page 7-5. - For [Japanese], [Chinese], [Korean] and [Taiwanese], the text direction (vertical or horizontal writing) is recognized automatically. However, for [Chinese], [Korean] and [Taiwanese], if both vertical and horizontal text directions are used on the same page, the original is processed based on one or the other. Item Description [Language Selection] Select a language to use to create a searchable PDF file. Text will not be correctly recognized unless an appropriate language is selected according to the original. [Adjust Rotation] Specify whether to automatically rotate each page to correct it according to the text direction detected through an OCR process. If the page direction is not corrected automatically, and the direction of the specified original does not match the direction of the text, text will not be correctly recognized. 8 Configuring the searchable PDF setting 8-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8.3 9 My Panel Function ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-3 9.1 Overview 9 9 My Panel Function 9.1 Overview The My Panel function allows the user to centrally manage the environment of the Control Panel customized by the user according to the application (My Panel), and to obtain My Panel on the MFP selected by the user. Using My Panel provides the same operationality on multiple MFPs in network environment. dReference This function is used in connection with the My Panel Manager. For details on enabling the function, refer to the My Panel Manager manual. You can also configure My Panel settings using the My Panel Manager. For details, refer to the My Panel Manager manual. 9.1.1 Available operations with My Panel My Panel allows you to personalize the Control Panel so that frequently-used functions are preferentially displayed. Also, if the Web browser or Image Panel is available, by linking it with My Panel Manager, you can manage the Web browser settings and information for each user, and personalize the Image Panel screen. Customizable items My Panel allows you to customize the following items. - Specification of a language displayed on the Control Panel - Specification of a measurement unit to be displayed when entering numbers - Initial display settings for the basic screen of the Copy function and registration of short-cut keys and setting value keys to be arranged in the basic screen - Initial display settings for the basic screen of the fax/scan function and registration of shortcut keys - Initial display settings for the basic screen of the User Box function and registration of shortcut keys - Specification of the color of selected buttons of the Control Panel - Display of the My Panel main menu - Display of the initial screen of the Control Panel Functions available by linking to the Web browser You can personalize the operation environment of the Web browser by linking the Web browser with My Panel. My Panel allows you to manage the following settings and information for each user. - Home page - Favorites - Display history of contents - URL input history - Cookie - Authentication information dReference Register a home page and favorites using the Web browser. Display history, input history, cookies, authentication information are automatically stored in the server as the user uses the Web browser. For details on how to use the Web browser, refer to page 4-3. You can edit the registration information of a home page and favorites using My Panel Manager. For details, refer to the manual. 9 Overview 9-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9.1 Functions available with Image Panel By linking the Image Panel with My Panel or My Address Book, you can register shortcuts for the document source and destination in the basic screen of Image Panel to personalize the operation environment of Image Panel. Also, you can refer to My Address Book to specify a destination to send data to. dReference For details on customizing the Image Panel screen, refer to page 6-22. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-3. 9.1.2 My Panel acquisition procedure Perform user authentication on the selected MFP. If the user authentication is succeeded, the MFP automatically accesses the server to obtain My Panel of the user who is logged in. The user can use My Panel while logged in to the MFP. My Panel is not available after the user logs out. 9.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Panel function The following are restrictions on the use of My Panel. - Registering, editing and deleting My Panel are available only for the user who owns the My Panel. The administrator of the MFP cannot operate My Panel. - When you access My Panel for the first time, the language, measurement unit and color selection settings comply with the settings in the MFP. - When you access My Panel for the first time, the main menu of My Panel is displayed in the initial screen. - Only the setting memory (copy program and fax/scan program) registered on the MFP you use is available. - Depending on the functions or option installation status of the MFP on which My Panel is used, the operating environment specified as My Panel may not be available. - When registering, editing, or deleting My panel, an error may occur depending on the connection status to the server. If an error occurs, check the network connection. My Panel is available My Panel is available Server (manages My Panel) (3) Obtain My Panel (2) Access the server (1) Perform authentication My Panel is not available • Authentication failed • Log out • Failed to obtain My Panel,etc. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-5 9.2 Displaying My Panel 9 9.2 Displaying My Panel 9.2.1 Main Menu Main Menu appears first when displaying My Panel. In Main Menu, you can freely lay out frequently used functions and shortcut keys to the setting memory. In Main Menu, 12 types of shortcut keys can be registered. For details on configuring settings for Main Menu, refer to page 9-15. 9.2.2 Displaying Main Menu When using the My Panel function, you can change the initial screen to be displayed after user authentication is succeeded. To display Main Menu for My Panel from a different initial screen, use the [Application Menu]. In [Application Menu], press [My Panel] to display Main Menu of My Panel. dReference The initial screen displayed after user authentication is succeeded can be changed in [My Panel Settings] Settings. For details, refer to page 9-16. For details on the [Application Menu], refer to page 3-4. 9 Customizing My Panel 9-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9.3 9.3 Customizing My Panel Customize My Panel in [My Panel Settings] of [Utility]. 9.3.1 [My Panel Settings] Customizable items are as follows. Item Description [Language Setting] Select a language to be used on My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-8. [Measurement Unit Settings] Select a measurement unit to be used when displaying values on My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-8. [Copier Settings] Specify the initial display settings for the basic screen of the Copy function and register short-cut keys and setting value keys to be arranged in the basic screen. For details, refer to page 9-9. [Scan/Fax Settings] Initial display settings for the basic screen of the fax/scan function and registration of shortcut keys For details, refer to page 9-11. [User Box Settings] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen of the User Box function and register shortcut keys. For details, refer to page 9-13. [Color Selection Settings] Select a color for the selected buttons on My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-14. [Main Menu Settings] Register the main menu buttons on the Main Menu screen of My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-15. [Initial Screen Settings] Specify the initial screen to be displayed after user authentication is succeeded. For details, refer to page 9-16. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-7 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.2 Displaying [My Panel Settings] When the My Panel function is available, [My Panel Settings] appears in [Utility]. 1 Log in as a registered user. 2 Press Utility/Counter. 3 Press [My Panel Settings]. The My Panel Settings screen appears. 9 Customizing My Panel 9-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9.3 9.3.3 [Language Setting] Select a language to be used on My Panel from the languages available on the MFP. 9.3.4 [Measurement Unit Settings] Select a length unit to be used on My Panel. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-9 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.5 [Copier Settings] Specify the initial display settings for the basic screen of the Copy function and register short-cut keys and setting value keys to be arranged in the basic screen. [Default Tab] Configure the default display settings for the basic screen in the copy mode. [Basic] displays normal basic display. [Quick Copy] displays the setting items of basic settings screen in a single screen. It can be used to specify multiple setting at one time. [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] Lay out shortcut keys for frequently used copy application functions on the basic screen. Up to two shortcut keys can be laid out. Reference - When the optional Image Controller IC-412 v1.1 is installed, only one shortcut key can be programmed for the basic screen. 9 Customizing My Panel 9-10 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9.3 [Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4] Arrange the setting values of the Copy function and copy program keys in the basic screen. By arranging the frequently-used setting values and copy program keys in the basic screen, you can configure the copy settings easily only by pressing the key. You can arrange up to four keys. dReference To arrange a copy program in the basic screen, you must register the copy program in advance. For details on how to register a copy program, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. [Default Tab Density Settings] Place the key to adjust the copy density on the basic screen. Reference - When placing the density adjustment key on the basic screen, [Quick Settings 3] and [Quick Settings 4] are not available. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-11 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.6 [Scan/Fax Settings] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen of the fax/scan function and register shortcut keys. [Default Tab] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen in the fax/scan function. 9 Customizing My Panel 9-12 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9.3 [Address Book Index Default] To use the public address book, specify the type of an index to be displayed initially in [Address Book]. By default, [My Address Book] is selected. dReference For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-3. [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] Lay out shortcut keys for frequently used fax/scan application functions on the basic screen. Up to two shortcut keys can be laid out. Reference - When the optional Image Controller IC-412 v1.1 is installed, only one shortcut key can be programmed for the basic screen. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-13 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 [Default Address Book] Configure settings for the default screen of [Address Book]. [Default Address Type] When displaying an address book by address type, specify an address type to be displayed by default. 9.3.7 [User Box Settings] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen of the User Box function and register shortcut keys. [Default Tab] Configure the default display settings for the basic screen (after User Box is pressed on the Control Panel) in the User Box mode. 9 Customizing My Panel 9-14 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9.3 [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] Lay out shortcut keys for User Boxes frequently used when using a User Box document on the basic screen. Up to two shortcut keys can be laid out. Reference - When the optional Image Controller IC-412 v1.1 is installed, only one shortcut key can be programmed for the basic screen. 9.3.8 [Color Selection Settings] Select a color for the selected buttons on My Panel. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-15 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.9 [Main Menu Settings] Customize the main menu of My Panel. You can freely lay out frequently used functions and shortcut keys to the setting memory (copy programs and fax/scan programs) in Main Menu. Main menu button The shortcut key displayed in Main Menu is called the main menu button, and up to 12 types can be registered. To register the set memory (copy programs and fax/scan programs) as main menu buttons, press [Icon] to select icons for the setting memory to be displayed on Main Menu. Registering a main menu button [Function], [Copy Function Settings], [Scan/Fax Function Settings], [Copy Program Settings], and [Scan/Fax Program Settings] can be assigned as main menu buttons. Item Description [Function] Registers a shortcut key to each of [Copy], [Scan/Fax], [User Box], [Image Panel], and [Web Browser] functions. Shortcut key for the Web Browser or Image Panel functions can be registered in Main Menu only when its function is enabled. [Copy Function Settings] Register shortcut keys in Copy Function Settings for each of [Color], [Paper Setting], [Zoom], [Duplex/Combine], and [Finishing]. [Scan/Fax Function Settings] Register shortcut keys in Scan/Fax Function Settings for each of [Scan Settings], [Original Settings] and [Comm. Settings]. [Copy Program Settings] Register a shortcut key to the copier setting memory (copy program) registered in the MFP. Press [Icon] in the Main Menu Settings screen. You can select setting memory icons to be displayed on Main Menu. The shortcut key for the setting memory is available only on the MFP with the setting memory registered. For details on registering the copier setting memory (copy program), refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. [Scan/Fax Program Settings] Register a shortcut key to the fax/scan setting memory (fax/scan program) registered in the MFP. Press [Icon] in the Main Menu Settings screen. You can select setting memory icons to be displayed on Main Menu. The shortcut key for the setting memory is available only on the MFP with the setting memory registered. For details on registering the fax/scan setting memory (fax/scan program), refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 9 Customizing My Panel 9-16 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9.3 9.3.10 [Initial Screen Settings] Specify the initial screen to be displayed after user authentication is succeeded. By default, the My Panel main menu is displayed as the initial screen. Reference - Shortcut key for the Web Browser or Image Panel functions can be registered in the initial screen only when its function is enabled. 10 My Address function ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 10-3 10.1 Overview 10 10 My Address function 10.1 Overview The My Address function allows the user to centrally manage the personal address book (My Address Book) on the server, and to obtain My Address Book on the MFP selected by the user. Using My Address Book allows you to use the same address book on multiple MFPs in your network environment without registering addresses individually on each MFP. dReference This function is used in connection with the My Panel Manager. For details on enabling the function, refer to the My Panel Manager manual. You can also add entries to My Address Book using My Panel Manager. For details, refer to the My Panel Manager manual. 10.1.1 Classification of address books When the My Address function is available, you can use the following two kinds of address books. Public address book Public address book refers to an address book accessible to anyone registered in the main unit of the MFP selected by the user. The public address book is provided with the following features. - In the public address book. one-touch destinations, groups, and programs can be registered. - Since the public address book is registered in the main unit of the MFP, available destinations depend on the selected MFP. - The user or administrator can register, edit, or delete the public address book. - If registration and editing of destinations by a user is restricted by the administrator, registration or editing of the public address book is not possible. My Address Book My Address Book refers to a server-managed address book accessible only to the user. My Address Book is provided with the following features. - In My Address Book, one-touch destinations and groups can be registered. - Since the My Address function is obtained from the server on the MFP selected by the user, it is available on any MFP in which the My Address function is available. - Only the specified user can register, edit or delete My Panel. 10 Overview 10-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 10.1 10.1.2 My Address Book acquisition procedure Perform user authentication on the selected MFP. If the user authentication is succeeded, the MFP automatically accesses the server to obtain My Address Book of the user who is logged in. The user can use My Address Book while logged in to the MFP. My Address Book is not available after the user logs out. 10.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Address function There are following restrictions on My Address Book. - Only the user who owns My Address Book can register, edit or delete My Address Book. The administrator of the MFP cannot operate My Address Book. - My Address Book can contain up to 100 one-touch destinations and up to 10 groups (up to 100 onetouch destinations per group). - If the number of registered destinations in My Address Book exceeds the maximum value, a new destination cannot be registered. - Program cannot be registered in My Address Book. - Destination search by index is not possible in My Address Book. - User Box is available only on the MFPs with registered destinations. - Depending on the MFP settings or options installed in the MFP on which My Address Book is used, sending that has been specified in the address book may not be performed. - When registering, editing, or deleting My address book, an error may occur depending on the connection status to the server. If an error occurs, check the network connection. My Address Book is available My Address Book is available Server (manages My Address Book) (3) Obtain My Address Book (2) Access the server (1) Perform authentication My Address Book is not available • Authentication failed • Log out • Failed to obtain My Panel, etc. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 10-5 10.2 Registering and editing a destination 10 10.2 Registering and editing a destination Register frequently used personal addresses in My Address Book. Addresses can be registered using any of the following methods. - Using the Control Panel of the MFP - Using Web Connection from a computer on the network - Using the My Panel Manager In My Address Book, one-touch destinations and groups can be registered. This section describes how to register addresses from the Control Panel of the MFP. 10.2.1 Address Book Frequently used fax numbers and E-mail addresses, and registered User Boxes can be registered as onetouch destinations. Up to 100 one-touch destinations can be registered in My Address Book. 1 Log in as a registered user. 2 Press Utility/Counter. 3 Press [One-Touch/User Box Registration]. 4 Press [Create One-Touch Destination]. 5 Press [Address Book (Personal)]. % To add one-touch destinations to the shared address book, press [Address Book (Public)]. A list of personal one-touch destinations appears. 6 Press [New]. % To edit a registered destination, select the destination, and then press [Edit]. % To delete a registered address, select the destination, and then press [Delete]. % To check a registered address, select the address, and then press [Check Job Set.]. 10 Registering and editing a destination 10-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 10.2 7 Select the type of address to be registered, and then configure settings for required items. dReference For details of the address book entries, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 10.2.2 Group Multiple one-touch destinations in My Address Book can be grouped, and registered as a group. In My Address Book, up to 10 groups (up to 100 one-touch destinations per group) can be registered. 1 Log in as a registered user. 2 Press Utility/Counter. 3 Press [One-Touch/User Box Registration]. 4 Press [Create One-Touch Destination]. 5 Press [Group]. A list of groups appears. 6 Press [Personal], and then press [New]. % To edit a registered group, select the group, and then press [Edit]. % To delete a registered group, select the group, and then press [Delete]. % To check a registered group, select the group, and then press [Check Job Set.]. % Press [Public] to display the public groups. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 10-7 10.2 Registering and editing a destination 10 7 Check that a personal group is selected as a registration destination, and then configure settings for required items. % Select [Select Group]. The addresses registered in My Address Book are displayed. Select onetouch destination to be grouped. dReference For details on registration contents of the group, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 10 Copying destinations between address books 10-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 10.3 10.3 Copying destinations between address books Registered one-touch destinations can be copied between the public address book and My Address Book. Reference - Groups cannot be copied between the public address book and My Address Book. 10.3.1 Copying destinations from the public address book to My Address Book Addresses registered in the public address book can be copied to My Address Book. 1 Display [Create One-Touch Destination]. 2 Press [Address Book (Public)]. 3 Select the type of address to be copied. A list of registered address books of the selected address type appears. 4 Select an address to be copied, and then press [Copy to Personal Addr.]. 5 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen, and then press [OK]. The selected address is copied. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 10-9 10.3 Copying destinations between address books 10 10.3.2 Copying destinations from My Address Book to the public address book Destinations registered in My Address Book can be copied to the public address book. 1 Display [Create One-Touch Destination]. 2 Press [Address Book (Personal)]. A list of personal one-touch destinations appears. 3 Select an address to be copied, and then press [Copy to Shared Addr.]. 4 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen, and then press [OK]. The selected address is copied. 10 Using My Address Book when sending a document 10-10 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 10.4 10.4 Using My Address Book when sending a document Use My Address Book to specify a destination when sending a document using the Scan/Fax functions, or sending a document in a User Box. 10.4.1 Specifying destinations When the My Address function is available, the following screen appears when specifying an address. Addresses registered in My Address Book appears by address type. Select the desired destination. To select an address registered in the public address book, press [Public]. 10.4.2 Searching for destinations If a desired address is not found, you can search for it. In the screen for specifying a destination, press [Search]. To search for destinations based on the registered address type, press [Address Type]. To search for destinations based on the name and a part of registration contents, press [Detail Search]. 11 Index ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 11-3 11.1 Index by item 11 11 Index 11.1 Index by item A Accessing 5-3 Acquiring my panel 9-4 Address book 10-5 Application key 3-3, 3-5 Application menu 3-4 C Cache 5-3 Cellular phone/PDA 6-11, 6-18 Customizing 3-5, 6-22, 9-6 D Deleting 5-10 Display mode of web browser 4-11 Displaying 4-20 E Entering text in web browser 4-10 External memory 6-16 F Flash player 4-4 G Group 10-6 I Image panel 2-4, 6-3, 6-4, 6-22 Image panel operation 6-6 J Just-fit rendering 4-11 L Logging in 5-5 Logging out 5-5 M Main menu 9-5 My address 2-4, 10-3 My address book 10-3, 10-10 My address book acquisition 10-4 My panel 2-4, 9-3, 9-5 My panel settings 9-6 O OCR 8-4 Opening user boxes 5-6 Operating web browser 4-10 P PDF processing 2-4, 7-3 Photo 6-19 PIN code 6-18 Print 6-15 Printing 4-18, 5-8 Public address book 10-3 R Restriction of web browser 4-6 Restrictions on my address 10-4 Restrictions on my panel 9-4 S Saving 4-21 Scanning 6-8 Screen components of image panel 6-5 Screen components of Web Connection 5-4 Screen components of web browser 4-9 Searchable PDF 2-4, 8-3, 8-5 Send tray 6-17 Smart-fit rendering 4-11 Speaker 4-11 Specifications 4-4, 6-19 Specifications for web browser 4-4 T Toolbar 4-12 U Upload 4-22 User box 5-6, 6-9 W Web browser 2-4, 4-3, 4-5 Web browser information 4-17 Web browser settings 4-16 Web Connection 5-3 11-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 11 Index by button 11.2 11.2 Index by button A Access log 4-17 Address 4-14 Address Book (Personal) 10-5 Address Book Index Default 9-12 Application key 1 3-3 Application key 2 3-4 Application Key Settings 3-5 Application menu 3-4 Application menu key 3-3 Authentication information 4-17 C Cache 4-17 Cellular Phone 6-11 Color Selection Settings 9-14 Combine Documents 6-13 Cookie 4-17 Copier Settings 9-9 Copy to Personal Addr. 10-8 Copy to Shared Addr. 10-9 D Default Address Book 9-13 Default Address Type 9-13 Default Tab 9-9, 9-11, 9-13 Default Tab Density Settings 9-10 Destination List 6-16 Digital ID 7-6 Direct Print 7-8 Display 4-16 Document Settings 6-14 Document Source List 6-9 Document/Page 6-12, 6-13, 6-14 E Edit Document 6-12 Encryption 7-5 External memory 6-10, 6-16 F Favorites (Add) 4-13 Favorites (List) 4-13 Function Permission 4-7 G Group 10-6 H History 4-14 I Initial Screen Settings 9-16 L Language Setting 9-8 M Main Menu Settings 9-15 Manage windows 4-17 Measurement Unit Settings 9-8 Menu 4-16 My Panel Settings 9-6 O OCR operation setting 8-4 P Page Operation 4-16 Password 7-5 PDF Document Properties 7-4 Photo/Icon 6-20 Preview 6-12 Print 4-15, 6-15 Proxy 4-17 Q Quick Settings 9-10 R Return to Scan Dest. 6-14 S Scan 6-8 Scan/Fax Settings 9-11 Security 4-17 Settings 4-17 Shortcut key 9-9, 9-12, 9-14 U User Box Settings 9-13 W Web browser contents access 4-8 Web browser setting 4-6 Box operations ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) Contents-1 Table of contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome .......................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.1 User's guides ..................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.2 User's Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.2 Conventions used in this manual .................................................................................................. 1-5 1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual ............................................................................................................. 1-5 To use this machine safely................................................................................................................. 1-5 Procedural instruction........................................................................................................................ 1-5 Key symbols....................................................................................................................................... 1-6 1.2.2 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6 Original and paper sizes .................................................................................................................... 1-6 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6 1.3 To check the function you want to use......................................................................................... 1-7 Understanding Operation Flow.......................................................................................................... 1-7 Using Menu Tree................................................................................................................................ 1-7 2 User Box Function Overview 2.1 User Box functions ......................................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.1 Available User Box functions ............................................................................................................. 2-3 Saving documents ............................................................................................................................. 2-3 Using documents............................................................................................................................... 2-4 Organizing documents....................................................................................................................... 2-6 2.1.2 Configuring settings for using the User Box functions ...................................................................... 2-7 Registering a User Box ...................................................................................................................... 2-7 When using this machine as a relay device ....................................................................................... 2-7 The User Box to which data is saved for memory reception............................................................. 2-7 2.2 Information ...................................................................................................................................... 2-8 2.2.1 User authentication............................................................................................................................ 2-8 MFP authentication............................................................................................................................ 2-8 External server authentication ........................................................................................................... 2-8 Account track authentication ............................................................................................................. 2-9 2.2.2 Restriction of box registration............................................................................................................ 2-9 Public/Personal/Group User Boxes ................................................................................................... 2-9 Bulletin Board User Box..................................................................................................................... 2-9 Polling TX User Box ........................................................................................................................... 2-9 Memory RX User Box ........................................................................................................................ 2-9 Relay User Box ................................................................................................................................ 2-10 2.2.3 Restriction of file name .................................................................................................................... 2-10 2.3 Authentication and accessible User Boxes................................................................................ 2-11 2.3.1 When User Authentication or Account Track is not enabled........................................................... 2-11 2.3.2 When only user authentication is enabled ....................................................................................... 2-11 2.3.3 When only account track is enabled................................................................................................ 2-12 2.3.4 When user authentication and account track are enabled and synchronized................................. 2-12 2.3.5 When user authentication and account track are enabled but not synchronized ........................... 2-14 3 Control Panel/Liquid Crystal Display 3.1 Control panel ................................................................................................................................... 3-2 3.2 Touch panel ..................................................................................................................................... 3-4 3.2.1 Screen component............................................................................................................................. 3-4 Icons that appear in the touch panel ................................................................................................. 3-4 3.2.2 Display and operation of Left panel ................................................................................................... 3-5 Job List .............................................................................................................................................. 3-6 Contents-2 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) Job List - Delete................................................................................................................................. 3-6 Job List - Job Details ......................................................................................................................... 3-7 User Box information ....................................................................................................................... 3-12 Use/File - Detail................................................................................................................................ 3-12 Use/File - Check Job Settings ......................................................................................................... 3-12 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Destination Settings ..................................................................... 3-13 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Document Setting Contents ......................................................... 3-13 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Communication Settings .............................................................. 3-14 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Check E-Mail Settings.................................................................. 3-14 Preview ............................................................................................................................................ 3-14 Preview ............................................................................................................................................ 3-15 Preview (Print/Combine) .................................................................................................................. 3-15 Preview (Send/Bind TX) ................................................................................................................... 3-16 4 User Box Operation Flow 4.1 Saving documents in User Boxes.................................................................................................. 4-3 4.2 Printing documents from a User Box............................................................................................ 4-5 4.3 Sending documents from a User Box ........................................................................................... 4-8 4.4 Saving a document in an external memory ................................................................................ 4-11 4.5 Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box.............................................. 4-13 4.6 Printing a document from an external memory ......................................................................... 4-15 4.7 Filing documents in a User Box................................................................................................... 4-17 4.8 Printing a Document Saved in a Cellular Phone or PDA ........................................................... 4-19 4.9 Saving a Document Stored in a Cellular Phone or PDA to a User Box.................................... 4-21 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode ................................................................................................ 4-23 4.10.1 Save Document................................................................................................................................ 4-23 Public, Personal, or Group User Box............................................................................................... 4-23 System User Box ............................................................................................................................. 4-24 4.10.2 Use/File ............................................................................................................................................ 4-26 Print (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes) ................................................................................. 4-26 Send (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes) ................................................................................ 4-29 Filing Settings (for public/personal/group User Boxes) ................................................................... 4-32 Application (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes)....................................................................... 4-33 System User Box ............................................................................................................................. 4-34 5 Accessing the User Box mode 5.1 Accessing the User Box mode ...................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2 User Box Operation Menu.............................................................................................................. 5-4 5.2.1 Save Document.................................................................................................................................. 5-4 5.2.2 Use/File .............................................................................................................................................. 5-4 6 Save Document 6.1 Save Document Overview.............................................................................................................. 6-3 6.1.1 Functions ........................................................................................................................................... 6-3 Public/Personal/Group User Boxes ................................................................................................... 6-3 Annotation User Box.......................................................................................................................... 6-3 External Memory................................................................................................................................ 6-3 6.1.2 Initial Window of Save Document...................................................................................................... 6-4 Public/Personal/Group User Boxes ................................................................................................... 6-4 System User Box ............................................................................................................................... 6-4 6.1.3 Save Document window .................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.2 Scan Settings .................................................................................................................................. 6-6 6.2.1 Basic - Original Type.......................................................................................................................... 6-6 6.2.2 Basic - Simplex/Duplex ..................................................................................................................... 6-7 6.2.3 Basic - Resolution.............................................................................................................................. 6-7 6.2.4 Basic - File Type ................................................................................................................................ 6-8 File Type............................................................................................................................................. 6-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) Contents-3 Encryption .......................................................................................................................................... 6-9 Encryption - Detail Settings ............................................................................................................... 6-9 Outline PDF...................................................................................................................................... 6-11 Scan Setting..................................................................................................................................... 6-11 6.2.5 Basic - Density................................................................................................................................. 6-12 6.2.6 Basic - Color .................................................................................................................................... 6-12 6.2.7 Scan Size ......................................................................................................................................... 6-13 Standard size ................................................................................................................................... 6-13 Custom Size..................................................................................................................................... 6-13 Photo Size........................................................................................................................................ 6-13 6.2.8 Image Adjustment............................................................................................................................ 6-14 Background Removal ...................................................................................................................... 6-14 Sharpness ........................................................................................................................................ 6-15 6.2.9 Application - Frame Erase ............................................................................................................... 6-15 6.2.10 Application - Book Copy.................................................................................................................. 6-16 Book copy method .......................................................................................................................... 6-16 Book Erase - Frame Erase ............................................................................................................... 6-16 Book Erase - Center Erase .............................................................................................................. 6-17 Binding Position ............................................................................................................................... 6-17 6.2.11 Separate Scan ................................................................................................................................. 6-18 6.3 Original Settings............................................................................................................................ 6-19 6.3.1 Special Original ................................................................................................................................ 6-19 6.3.2 Direction Settings - Original Direction ............................................................................................. 6-19 6.3.3 Direction Settings - Binding Position ............................................................................................... 6-20 6.3.4 Despeckle ........................................................................................................................................ 6-20 7 Use/File 7.1 Overview of the Use/File operations............................................................................................. 7-3 7.1.1 Functions of Use/File ......................................................................................................................... 7-3 Printing a document........................................................................................................................... 7-3 Sending.............................................................................................................................................. 7-3 Filing................................................................................................................................................... 7-3 Application settings ........................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.2 Detail of the Use Document screen ................................................................................................... 7-4 7.1.3 If a password is specified for a User Box .......................................................................................... 7-5 7.2 Print .................................................................................................................................................. 7-6 7.2.1 Overview of the Print tab ................................................................................................................... 7-6 Description of the Print tab ................................................................................................................ 7-6 Print.................................................................................................................................................... 7-6 Combine............................................................................................................................................. 7-7 7.2.2 Print.................................................................................................................................................... 7-7 7.2.3 Combine............................................................................................................................................. 7-8 Document Order ................................................................................................................................ 7-8 Configurable items to combine and print documents ....................................................................... 7-8 7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) .................................................................... 7-9 7.3.1 Copies................................................................................................................................................ 7-9 7.3.2 1-Sided/2-Sided................................................................................................................................. 7-9 7.3.3 Color ................................................................................................................................................ 7-10 7.3.4 Finishing........................................................................................................................................... 7-10 Sort/Group ....................................................................................................................................... 7-11 Offset ............................................................................................................................................... 7-11 Staple ............................................................................................................................................... 7-11 Staple - Position Setting .................................................................................................................. 7-11 Punch............................................................................................................................................... 7-11 Punch - Position Setting .................................................................................................................. 7-12 Fold/Bind.......................................................................................................................................... 7-12 7.3.5 Combine........................................................................................................................................... 7-13 7.3.6 Zoom................................................................................................................................................ 7-14 7.3.7 Continuous Print .............................................................................................................................. 7-15 Contents-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) ........................................................ 7-16 7.4.1 Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 7-16 Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 7-16 Image Shift ....................................................................................................................................... 7-16 Image Shift - Change Back Shift ..................................................................................................... 7-17 7.4.2 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert ............................................................................................................. 7-17 7.4.3 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Cover Sheet...................................................................................... 7-18 7.4.4 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Insert Sheet ...................................................................................... 7-19 7.4.5 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Chapters........................................................................................... 7-20 7.4.6 Stamp/Composition......................................................................................................................... 7-21 7.4.7 Stamp/Composition - Date/Time..................................................................................................... 7-21 7.4.8 Stamp/Composition - Page Number ............................................................................................... 7-22 Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 7-22 Insert Sheet Setting ......................................................................................................................... 7-23 7.4.9 Stamp/Composition - Stamp........................................................................................................... 7-23 7.4.10 Stamp/Composition -Copy Security -Copy Protect ........................................................................ 7-24 Copy Protect Type........................................................................................................................... 7-25 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-25 Position ............................................................................................................................................ 7-25 7.4.11 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard........................................................................ 7-26 Copy Guard Type............................................................................................................................. 7-26 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-27 7.4.12 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy.................................................................. 7-27 Stamp Type...................................................................................................................................... 7-28 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-28 7.4.13 Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat .............................................................................................. 7-28 Stamp Repeat Type ......................................................................................................................... 7-29 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-29 Position ............................................................................................................................................ 7-29 7.4.14 Stamp/Composition - Header/Footer .............................................................................................. 7-30 Check/Change Temporarily ............................................................................................................. 7-30 7.4.15 Stamp/Composition - Registered Overlay....................................................................................... 7-31 Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 7-31 Overlay Setting................................................................................................................................. 7-32 7.5 Send ............................................................................................................................................... 7-33 7.5.1 Overview of the Transmission Settings............................................................................................ 7-33 Description of the Send tab ............................................................................................................. 7-33 Send................................................................................................................................................. 7-34 Bind TX............................................................................................................................................. 7-34 7.5.2 Transmission Settings...................................................................................................................... 7-35 7.5.3 Combine........................................................................................................................................... 7-36 Document Order .............................................................................................................................. 7-36 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)............................................................................... 7-37 7.6.1 Address Book - Search.................................................................................................................... 7-37 Address Type................................................................................................................................... 7-37 Index ................................................................................................................................................ 7-38 Detail Search.................................................................................................................................... 7-38 Detail Search - Search options ........................................................................................................ 7-39 7.6.2 Direct Input ...................................................................................................................................... 7-39 7.6.3 Direct Input - Fax ............................................................................................................................. 7-40 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-40 When the Confirm Address (TX) function is specified: .................................................................... 7-40 7.6.4 Direct Input - E-mail......................................................................................................................... 7-40 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-40 7.6.5 Direct Input - Internet Fax................................................................................................................ 7-41 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-41 Receiver RX Ability........................................................................................................................... 7-41 7.6.6 Direct Input - IP Address Fax........................................................................................................... 7-42 7.6.7 Direct Input - PC (SMB) ................................................................................................................... 7-42 Host Name ....................................................................................................................................... 7-42 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) Contents-5 File Path ........................................................................................................................................... 7-42 User Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-42 Password ......................................................................................................................................... 7-42 Reference......................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-43 7.6.8 Direct Input - FTP............................................................................................................................. 7-43 Host Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-43 File Path ........................................................................................................................................... 7-43 User Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Password ......................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-43 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-43 7.6.9 Direct Input - WebDAV..................................................................................................................... 7-44 Host Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-44 File Path ........................................................................................................................................... 7-44 User Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-44 Password ......................................................................................................................................... 7-44 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-44 Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-44 7.6.10 Job History....................................................................................................................................... 7-45 7.6.11 Address Search................................................................................................................................ 7-45 7.6.12 LDAP Search - Search..................................................................................................................... 7-46 7.6.13 LDAP Search - Advanced Search.................................................................................................... 7-46 Name................................................................................................................................................ 7-46 E-mail Addr. ..................................................................................................................................... 7-46 Fax Number ..................................................................................................................................... 7-46 Last Name........................................................................................................................................ 7-46 First Name........................................................................................................................................ 7-46 City................................................................................................................................................... 7-46 Company Name............................................................................................................................... 7-47 Department ...................................................................................................................................... 7-47 OR/AND/STARTS WITH/ENDS WITH.............................................................................................. 7-47 7.6.14 Overview of the Document Settings ................................................................................................ 7-47 7.6.15 Document Settings - Resolution...................................................................................................... 7-47 7.6.16 Document Settings - File Type ........................................................................................................ 7-48 File Type........................................................................................................................................... 7-48 Encryption ........................................................................................................................................ 7-49 Encryption - Detail Settings ............................................................................................................. 7-49 Stamp Composition ......................................................................................................................... 7-51 Outline PDF...................................................................................................................................... 7-51 Scan Setting..................................................................................................................................... 7-52 7.6.17 Document Settings - Color .............................................................................................................. 7-52 7.6.18 Overview of the Communication Settings ....................................................................................... 7-53 7.6.19 Communication Settings - Line Setting ........................................................................................... 7-53 Description of Line Settings............................................................................................................. 7-53 Overseas TX..................................................................................................................................... 7-53 ECM OFF ......................................................................................................................................... 7-54 V.34 OFF .......................................................................................................................................... 7-54 Check Dest. & Send......................................................................................................................... 7-54 Select Line ....................................................................................................................................... 7-54 7.6.20 Communication Settings - E-Mail Settings...................................................................................... 7-55 E-mail Settings................................................................................................................................. 7-55 Document Name.............................................................................................................................. 7-55 Subject ............................................................................................................................................. 7-55 From................................................................................................................................................. 7-56 Body................................................................................................................................................. 7-56 7.6.21 Communication Settings - URL Notification Setting ....................................................................... 7-57 URL Notification............................................................................................................................... 7-57 Detail Search.................................................................................................................................... 7-57 Direct Input ...................................................................................................................................... 7-57 7.6.22 Communication Settings - Communication Method Settings ......................................................... 7-58 Timer transmission (Timer TX).......................................................................................................... 7-58 Contents-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) Password transmission (Password TX)............................................................................................ 7-59 F-Code transmission (F-Code TX) ................................................................................................... 7-59 7.6.23 Communication Settings - E-mail Encryption.................................................................................. 7-60 7.6.24 Communication Settings - Digital Signature.................................................................................... 7-60 7.6.25 Communication Settings - Fax Header Settings ............................................................................. 7-60 7.6.26 Overview of the Application settings ............................................................................................... 7-61 7.6.27 Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time ............................................................................... 7-61 7.6.28 Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number.......................................................................... 7-61 7.6.29 Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp ..................................................................................... 7-61 7.6.30 Application - Stamp/Composition - Header/Footer......................................................................... 7-61 7.6.31 Application - Send & Print................................................................................................................ 7-62 7.7 Filing Settings (Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes) ........................................................... 7-63 7.7.1 Overview of the Filing Settings ........................................................................................................ 7-63 Description of the Filing Settings tab............................................................................................... 7-63 7.7.2 Deleting documents ......................................................................................................................... 7-64 7.7.3 Edit Name ........................................................................................................................................ 7-64 7.7.4 Moving documents .......................................................................................................................... 7-64 7.7.5 Copy................................................................................................................................................. 7-65 7.7.6 Save in external memory ................................................................................................................. 7-65 Document Settings .......................................................................................................................... 7-66 Document Settings - Resolution...................................................................................................... 7-66 Document Settings -File Type ......................................................................................................... 7-67 Document Settings - Color .............................................................................................................. 7-67 7.7.7 Document Details............................................................................................................................. 7-68 Displaying detailed information........................................................................................................ 7-68 Preview ............................................................................................................................................ 7-68 7.8 Application..................................................................................................................................... 7-69 7.8.1 Overview of the Application settings ............................................................................................... 7-69 Description of the Application tab ................................................................................................... 7-69 7.8.2 Edit Document ................................................................................................................................. 7-70 Edit Document - Delete Page .......................................................................................................... 7-70 Edit Document - Rotate Page.......................................................................................................... 7-71 Edit Document - Move Page............................................................................................................ 7-73 Preview/Set Range .......................................................................................................................... 7-75 Preview/Specify by Input ................................................................................................................. 7-75 7.8.3 Register Overlay............................................................................................................................... 7-77 Register Overlay - New.................................................................................................................... 7-78 Register Overlay - Overwrite............................................................................................................ 7-79 Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-80 7.9 Bulletin Board User Box (System User Box)............................................................................... 7-81 7.9.1 Overview of the Bulletin Board User Boxes..................................................................................... 7-81 7.9.2 Bulletin Board User Box screen....................................................................................................... 7-81 7.9.3 Printing a document in a Bulletin Board User Box .......................................................................... 7-81 7.9.4 Deleting a document in the Bulletin Board User Box ...................................................................... 7-81 7.10 Polling TX User Box (System User Box)...................................................................................... 7-82 7.10.1 Overview of the Polling Transmission User Boxes .......................................................................... 7-82 7.10.2 Printing a document in the Polling TX User Box.............................................................................. 7-82 7.10.3 Deleting a document in the Polling TX User Box............................................................................. 7-82 7.11 Secure Document User Box (System User Box) ........................................................................ 7-83 7.11.1 Overview of the Secure Document User Box .................................................................................. 7-83 7.11.2 Authentication procedure 1 ............................................................................................................. 7-83 7.11.3 Authentication procedure 2 ............................................................................................................. 7-83 7.11.4 Print - Printing .................................................................................................................................. 7-84 Copies.............................................................................................................................................. 7-84 Print.................................................................................................................................................. 7-84 Color ................................................................................................................................................ 7-84 Finishing........................................................................................................................................... 7-84 Combine........................................................................................................................................... 7-84 Zoom................................................................................................................................................ 7-84 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) Contents-7 Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 7-84 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert ............................................................................................................. 7-84 Stamp/Composition......................................................................................................................... 7-84 7.11.5 Filing Settings .................................................................................................................................. 7-85 7.12 Memory RX User Box (System User Box)................................................................................... 7-86 7.12.1 Overview of the Memory RX User Box ............................................................................................ 7-86 7.12.2 Print.................................................................................................................................................. 7-86 7.12.3 Filing Settings .................................................................................................................................. 7-86 7.13 Annotation User Box (System User Box) .................................................................................... 7-87 7.13.1 Overview of the Annotation User Box.............................................................................................. 7-87 7.13.2 Print - Basic ..................................................................................................................................... 7-87 7.13.3 Print - Page Margin .......................................................................................................................... 7-87 7.13.4 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Cover Sheet........................................................................... 7-88 7.13.5 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Insert Sheet ........................................................................... 7-88 7.13.6 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Chapters................................................................................ 7-88 7.13.7 Print - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time .......................................................................................... 7-88 7.13.8 Print - Stamp/Composition - Page Number .................................................................................... 7-88 7.13.9 Print - Stamp/Composition - Stamp................................................................................................ 7-88 7.13.10 Printing Preferences - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect .................................. 7-88 7.13.11 Printing Preferences - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard.................................... 7-88 7.13.12 Print - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy....................................................... 7-88 7.13.13 Print - Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat ................................................................................... 7-88 7.13.14 Print - Stamp/Composition - Registered Overlay ............................................................................ 7-88 7.13.15 Description of the Send tab ............................................................................................................. 7-88 7.13.16 Send - Direct Input - E-mail ............................................................................................................. 7-88 7.13.17 Send - Direct Input - PC (SMB)........................................................................................................ 7-88 7.13.18 Send - Direct Input - FTP................................................................................................................. 7-89 7.13.19 Send - Direct Input - WebDAV......................................................................................................... 7-89 7.13.20 Send - Job History........................................................................................................................... 7-89 7.13.21 Send - LDAP Search - Search ......................................................................................................... 7-89 7.13.22 Send - LDAP Search - Advanced Search........................................................................................ 7-89 7.13.23 Send - Document Settings - Resolution .......................................................................................... 7-89 7.13.24 Send - Document Settings - File Type............................................................................................. 7-89 7.13.25 Send - Document Settings - Color .................................................................................................. 7-89 7.13.26 Send - Communication Settings - E-mail Settings .......................................................................... 7-89 7.13.27 Send - Communication Settings - URL Notification Setting............................................................ 7-89 7.13.28 Send - Communication Settings - E-mail Encryption...................................................................... 7-89 7.13.29 Send - Communication Settings - Digital Signature........................................................................ 7-89 7.13.30 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time.................................................................... 7-89 7.13.31 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number .............................................................. 7-89 7.13.32 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp.......................................................................... 7-90 7.13.33 Send - Application - Send & Print.................................................................................................... 7-90 7.13.34 Send - Application - Stamp Element ............................................................................................... 7-90 Secondary Field ............................................................................................................................... 7-90 Date/Time......................................................................................................................................... 7-90 Density ............................................................................................................................................. 7-90 Number Type ................................................................................................................................... 7-91 Print Position.................................................................................................................................... 7-91 7.13.35 Filing Settings .................................................................................................................................. 7-92 7.13.36 Application - Register Overlay ......................................................................................................... 7-92 7.14 Fax Retransmit User Box (System User Box)............................................................................. 7-93 7.14.1 Overview of the Fax Retransmit User Box....................................................................................... 7-93 7.14.2 Print - Proof Print ............................................................................................................................. 7-93 7.14.3 Send - Fax........................................................................................................................................ 7-93 7.14.4 Filing Settings - Delete..................................................................................................................... 7-94 7.15 Password Encrypted PDF User Box (System User Box) ........................................................... 7-95 Contents-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.15.1 Overview of the Password Encrypted PDF User Box...................................................................... 7-95 7.15.2 Print/Save −Print/Save..................................................................................................................... 7-95 7.15.3 Filing Settings - Delete..................................................................................................................... 7-95 7.16 ID & Print User Box (System User Box)....................................................................................... 7-96 7.16.1 Overview of the ID & Print User Box................................................................................................ 7-96 Viewing documents.......................................................................................................................... 7-96 7.16.2 Print - Print....................................................................................................................................... 7-97 7.16.3 Filing Settings - Delete..................................................................................................................... 7-97 7.17 External Memory (System User Box) .......................................................................................... 7-98 7.17.1 External memory device .................................................................................................................. 7-98 Supported external memory devices............................................................................................... 7-98 Connecting the external memory device ......................................................................................... 7-98 7.17.2 External memory screen .................................................................................................................. 7-99 Entering a file path ........................................................................................................................... 7-99 Selecting a file.................................................................................................................................. 7-99 Printing encrypted PDF data............................................................................................................ 7-99 Moving to the parent folder.............................................................................................................. 7-99 Opening a folder .............................................................................................................................. 7-99 Print.................................................................................................................................................. 7-99 Document Details........................................................................................................................... 7-100 7.17.3 Print - Basic ................................................................................................................................... 7-100 Copies............................................................................................................................................ 7-100 Color .............................................................................................................................................. 7-100 Print................................................................................................................................................ 7-100 Binding Position ............................................................................................................................. 7-100 Finishing......................................................................................................................................... 7-100 Paper.............................................................................................................................................. 7-101 7.17.4 Print- Application ........................................................................................................................... 7-101 Stamp/Composition - Date/Time................................................................................................... 7-101 Stamp/Composition - Page Number ............................................................................................. 7-101 Stamp/Composition - Stamp......................................................................................................... 7-101 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect .................................................................... 7-101 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard...................................................................... 7-101 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy................................................................ 7-101 Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat ............................................................................................ 7-101 7.17.5 Filing Settings−Save in User Box................................................................................................... 7-102 7.18 Mobile/PDA (System User Box) ................................................................................................. 7-103 7.18.1 Operating environment .................................................................................................................. 7-103 7.18.2 Mobile/PDA - Print ......................................................................................................................... 7-104 Entering the PIN code.................................................................................................................... 7-104 Check printing preferences............................................................................................................ 7-104 7.18.3 Mobile/PDA - Save......................................................................................................................... 7-105 Entering the PIN code.................................................................................................................... 7-105 8 User Box Settings 8.1 Menu tree of User Box Settings..................................................................................................... 8-3 8.1.1 User mode ......................................................................................................................................... 8-3 8.1.2 Administrator Settings ....................................................................................................................... 8-4 8.2 User mode settings......................................................................................................................... 8-6 8.2.1 Creating a User Box........................................................................................................................... 8-6 Public, Personal, or Group User Box................................................................................................. 8-6 Delete Empty User Box(es) (Administrator Settings) ......................................................................... 8-7 Bulletin Board User Box..................................................................................................................... 8-7 Relay User Box .................................................................................................................................. 8-9 8.2.2 Custom Display Settings - User Box Setting................................................................................... 8-10 Default Tab....................................................................................................................................... 8-10 Shortcut key..................................................................................................................................... 8-10 8.2.3 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Link File Error Notification ................................................................ 8-11 8.2.4 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Proxy Server Use.............................................................................. 8-11 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) Contents-9 8.2.5 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Print Settings .................................................................................... 8-12 Basic - Print ..................................................................................................................................... 8-12 Basic - Color .................................................................................................................................... 8-12 Basic - Paper ................................................................................................................................... 8-12 Basic - Finishing............................................................................................................................... 8-13 Application - Margin......................................................................................................................... 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time ............................................................................... 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number.......................................................................... 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp ..................................................................................... 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect................................................. 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard .................................................. 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy ............................................ 8-13 Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat ......................................................................... 8-14 8.3 Administrator Settings.................................................................................................................. 8-15 8.3.1 User Box permissions...................................................................................................................... 8-15 User types........................................................................................................................................ 8-15 Public User Box and Personal or Group User Box.......................................................................... 8-15 8.3.2 Creating a User Box......................................................................................................................... 8-16 8.3.3 Creating Public, Personal, or Group User Box ................................................................................ 8-16 8.3.4 Creating Bulletin Board User Box.................................................................................................... 8-16 8.3.5 Creating Relay User Box.................................................................................................................. 8-16 8.3.6 Creating Annotation User Box ......................................................................................................... 8-17 8.3.7 Maximum Number of User Boxes.................................................................................................... 8-19 Public, Personal, or Group User Box............................................................................................... 8-19 Max. No. Of Use Boxes ................................................................................................................... 8-19 Maximum Number of User Boxes.................................................................................................... 8-19 8.3.8 User Box Setting.............................................................................................................................. 8-20 Delete Unused User Box.................................................................................................................. 8-20 Delete Secure Print Documents....................................................................................................... 8-20 Auto Delete Secure Document ........................................................................................................ 8-21 Encrypted PDF Delete Time............................................................................................................. 8-21 ID & Print Delete Time...................................................................................................................... 8-22 Document Hold Setting.................................................................................................................... 8-22 External Memory Function Settings................................................................................................. 8-23 Allow/Restrict User Box................................................................................................................... 8-23 ID & Print Delete after Print Setting.................................................................................................. 8-24 Document Delete Time Setting ........................................................................................................ 8-24 ID & Print Settings............................................................................................................................ 8-25 8.3.9 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting ............................................................................................................. 8-25 8.3.10 User Box Administrator Setting ....................................................................................................... 8-26 Setting User Box administrator........................................................................................................ 8-26 Logging in to this machine as the User Box administrator.............................................................. 8-26 Administrator's available functions .................................................................................................. 8-26 8.3.11 Security Details ................................................................................................................................ 8-27 Security Print Only ........................................................................................................................... 8-27 8.3.12 HDD Settings ................................................................................................................................... 8-27 Check HDD Capacity ....................................................................................................................... 8-27 Overwrite HDD Data......................................................................................................................... 8-28 Overwrite All Data ............................................................................................................................ 8-29 HDD Lock Password........................................................................................................................ 8-30 Format HDD..................................................................................................................................... 8-31 HDD Encryption Setting................................................................................................................... 8-31 8.3.13 Stamp Settings ................................................................................................................................ 8-32 Apply Stamps................................................................................................................................... 8-32 9 Web Connection 9.1 Using Web Connection................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.1 Operating environment ...................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.2 Accessing Web Connection............................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.3 Web browser cache ........................................................................................................................... 9-4 For Internet Explorer .......................................................................................................................... 9-4 Contents-10 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) For Netscape Navigator ..................................................................................................................... 9-4 For Mozilla Firefox.............................................................................................................................. 9-4 9.1.4 Online help function ........................................................................................................................... 9-4 9.2 Login and logout ............................................................................................................................. 9-5 9.2.1 Login and logout flows....................................................................................................................... 9-5 When User Authentication or Account Track is not enabled............................................................. 9-5 When User Authentication or Account Track is enabled ................................................................... 9-7 9.2.2 Logout................................................................................................................................................ 9-8 9.2.3 Login .................................................................................................................................................. 9-9 Login options ..................................................................................................................................... 9-9 Logging in as a public user .............................................................................................................. 9-10 Logging in as a registered user........................................................................................................ 9-11 Logging in to administrator mode.................................................................................................... 9-12 Display mode in administrator mode ............................................................................................... 9-14 Logging in as a User Box administrator........................................................................................... 9-15 9.3 Page Configuration....................................................................................................................... 9-16 9.4 User Mode Overview .................................................................................................................... 9-18 9.4.1 Information ....................................................................................................................................... 9-18 9.4.2 Job ................................................................................................................................................... 9-19 9.4.3 User Boxes....................................................................................................................................... 9-19 9.4.4 Direct Print ....................................................................................................................................... 9-20 9.4.5 Store Address .................................................................................................................................. 9-21 9.4.6 Customize ........................................................................................................................................ 9-22 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box............................................................................................ 9-23 9.5.1 Listing the documents saved in a User Box .................................................................................... 9-23 Open User Box ................................................................................................................................ 9-23 File List............................................................................................................................................. 9-24 9.5.2 Printing a document......................................................................................................................... 9-25 9.5.3 Sending a document to another machine........................................................................................ 9-28 9.5.4 Downloading document data to your computer .............................................................................. 9-31 9.5.5 Moving or copying a document to another User Box...................................................................... 9-34 9.5.6 Deleting a document........................................................................................................................ 9-35 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview ..................................................................................................... 9-37 9.6.1 Maintenance .................................................................................................................................... 9-37 9.6.2 System Settings............................................................................................................................... 9-38 9.6.3 Security ............................................................................................................................................ 9-39 9.6.4 User Authentication/Account Track................................................................................................. 9-39 9.6.5 Network............................................................................................................................................ 9-40 9.6.6 User Boxes....................................................................................................................................... 9-41 9.6.7 Printer Settings ................................................................................................................................ 9-42 9.6.8 Store Address .................................................................................................................................. 9-43 9.6.9 Fax Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 9-44 9.6.10 Setting for each purpose ................................................................................................................. 9-45 10 Appendix 10.1 Error message list......................................................................................................................... 10-3 10.2 Glossary ......................................................................................................................................... 10-4 11 Index 11.1 Index by item ................................................................................................................................. 11-3 11.2 Index by button.............................................................................................................................. 11-6 1 Introduction ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 1-3 1.1 Welcome 1 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome Thank you for purchasing this machine. This User's Guide describes the functions, operating instructions, precautions for correct operation, and simple troubleshooting guidelines of this machine. In order to obtain maximum performance from this product and use it effectively, please read this User's Guide as necessary. 1.1.1 User's guides Printed manual Overview [Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations] This manual describes operating procedures and the functions that are most frequently used in order to enable you to begin using this machine immediately. This manual also contains notes and precautions that should be followed to ensure safe usage of this machine. Please be sure to read this manual before using this machine. This manual describes details on trademarks and copyrights. • Trademarks and copyrights User's guide DVD manuals Overview [User's Guide Copy Operations] This manual describes details on copy mode operations and the settings of this machine. • Specifications of originals and copy paper • Copy function • Maintaining this machine • Troubleshooting [User's Guide Enlarge Display Operations] This manual describes details on operating procedures of the enlarge display mode. • Copy function • Scanning function • G3 fax function • Network fax function [User's Guide Print Operations] This manual describes details on printer functions. • Printer function • Setting the printer driver [User's Guide Box Operations] This manual describes details on the boxed functions using the hard disk. • Saving data in user boxes • Retrieving data from user boxes • Transferring and printing data from user boxes [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations] This manual describes details on transmitting scanned data. • E-mail TX, FTP TX, SMB TX, Save in User Box, Web- DAV TX, Web Services • G3 fax • IP Address Fax, Internet Fax [User's Guide Fax Driver Operations] This manual describes details on the fax driver function that transmits faxes directly from a computer. • PC-FAX [User's Guide Network Administrator] This manual describes details on setting methods for each function using the network connection. • Network settings • Settings using Web Connection 1 Welcome 1-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 1.1 1.1.2 User's Guide This User's Guide is intended for users ranging from those using this machine for the first time to administrators. It describes basic operations, functions that enable more convenient operations, simple troubleshooting operations, and various setting methods of this machine. Note that basic technical knowledge about the product is required to enable users to perform maintenance work or troubleshooting operations. Limit your troubleshooting operations to the areas explained in this manual. Should you experience any problems, please contact our service representative. [User's Guide Advanced Function Operations] This manual describes details on functions that become available by registering the optional license kit and by connecting to an application. • Web browser function • Image panel • PDF Processing Function • Searchable PDF • My panel and My address functions User's guide DVD manuals Overview ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 1-5 1.2 Conventions used in this manual 1 1.2 Conventions used in this manual 1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual Symbols are used in this manual to express various types of information. The following describes each symbol related to correct and safe usage of this machine. To use this machine safely 7 WARNING - This symbol indicates that a failure to heed the instructions may lead to death or serious injury. 7 CAUTION - This symbol indicates that negligence of the instructions may lead to mishandling that may cause injury or property damage. NOTICE This symbol indicates a risk that may result in damage to this machine or documents. Follow the instructions to avoid property damage. Procedural instruction 0 This check mark indicates an option that is required in order to use conditions or functions that are prerequisite for a procedure. 1 This format number "1" represents the first step. 2 This format number represents the order of serial steps. % This symbol indicates a supplementary explanation of a procedural instruction. % This symbol indicates transition of the control panel to access a desired menu item. This symbol indicates a desired page. The operation procedures are described using illustrations. 1 Conventions used in this manual 1-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 1.2 dReference This symbol indicates a reference. View the reference as required. Key symbols [ ] Key names on the touch panel or computer screen, or a name of a user's guide are indicated by these brackets. Bold text Key names, part names, product names and option names on the control panel are indicated in bold text. 1.2.2 Original and paper indications Original and paper sizes The following explains the indication for originals and paper described in this manual. When indicating the original or paper size, the Y side represents the width and the X side the length. Original and paper indications w indicates the paper size with the length (X) being longer than the width (Y). v indicates the paper size with the length (X) being shorter than the width (Y). ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 1-7 1.3 To check the function you want to use 1 1.3 To check the function you want to use This manual contains details on setting up the functions. Understanding Operation Flow This manual provides a chapter "User Box Operation Flow" that describes how to use the major functions of this machine. The flow charts in the chapter will help you understand the general flow of operations such as saving and printing data. Clicking the link in the flow chart takes you to the relevant function setting pages where you can see more detail. Using Menu Tree Various functions can be configured for this machine. For information on what button to select to find specific setting items and the list of items that can be configured, refer to the Menu tree pages. In the menu tree pages, there is a hierarchy of functions under each button. Clicking the link in the menu tree takes you to the relevant function setting pages where you can see more details. 1 To check the function you want to use 1-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 1.3 2 User Box Function Overview ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 2-3 2.1 User Box functions 2 2 User Box Function Overview 2.1 User Box functions The User Box functions allow you to save document data to the machine's internal hard disk and later print them. Documents that can be saved are data scanned for copying and saved scan data. To save data to a box, create the box, and then save the data to the specified box. The saved data can be printed, sent by E-mail, transferred via FTP, or sent to a computer as may be necessary. Using the User Box functions enables you to save the effort involved in scanning originals repeatedly or saving data to each computer. 2.1.1 Available User Box functions Saving documents Data can be saved to the following boxes. *1 For details on how to send documents for print job from a computer and save them in the User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. User Box Description Reference Public/Personal/Group User Boxes (*1) Save a document copied or scanned using this machine. You can also save a document that was print-instructed through a computer connected to a network. Some User Authentication or Account Track settings restrict users who can use User Boxes such as the Personal or Group User Box. p. 6-3 Annotation User Box Save document data to be printed and sent with an image of the date/time or an annotation number to documents saved in Scan mode. p. 6-3 External Memory This item appears when an external memory device is installed. • You can save all scanned documents directly in an external memory connected to this machine. • You can save a document stored in a User Box in an external memory. • You can save a file stored in an external memory in a User Box. p. 6-3 Mobile/PDA Save a document stored in a cellular phone or PDA in the Public, Personal, or Group User Box. p. 7-105 2 User Box functions 2-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 2.1 1 Mobile/PDA 2 Fax 3 Computer 4 FTP server, etc. 5 Original 6 External Memory Using documents Use the document data saved in boxes. Depending on the box, you can use the data as follows: 2 4 5 6 1 3 User Box Description Reference Public/Personal/Group User Boxes (*1) Print and send saved documents. You can also select multiple documents for printing/transmission. Some User Authentication or Account Track settings restrict users who can use User Boxes such as the Personal or Group User Box. p. 7-9 Bulletin Board User Box This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed. You can print a document saved in the Bulletin Board User Box. p. 7-81 Polling TX User Box (*2) This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed. You can print documents sent via polling. p. 7-82 Secure Document User Box (*3) Print saved documents. Enter an ID and password for printing. p. 7-83 Memory RX User Box (*2) This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed. You can confirm and print the fax document received though the memory RX setting. p. 7-86 Annotation User Box Print or transmit document data saved in Scan mode with an image of the date/time or an annotation number. p. 7-87 Fax Retransmit User Box (*2) This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed. With this User Box, you can resend a saved document or print it for confirmation. p. 7-93 Password Encrypted PDF User Box (*4) Print a saved password encrypted PDF document. Encrypted PDF files saved in an external memory and sent for print jobs are also saved in this box. The predefined password is required for printing. p. 7-95 ID & Print User Box This item appears when user authentication settings are configured. You can log in as a user and print a document sent for print jobs from the printer driver. p. 7-96 External Memory This item appears when an external memory device is installed. You can print documents saved in an external memory connected to this machine. p. 7-98 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 2-5 2.1 User Box functions 2 *1 For details on how to send documents for print job from a computer and save them in the User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. *2 For details on polling transmission, polling reception, memory reception, and file retransmission, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. *3 For details on how to save documents to the Secure Document User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. *4 For print instruction of an encrypted PDF, refer to the Direct Print manual or the direct print in the Web Connection online help. 1 Fax 2 Computer 3 E-mail, etc. 4 FTP server, etc. 5 Cellular phone or PDA 6 External memory 7 Printout Cellular Phone or PDA Print a document saved in a cellular phone or PDA. You can save a document stored in a cellular phone or PDA in the Public, Personal, or Group User Box. p. 7-104 User Box Description Reference 4 6 7 1 2 3 5 2 User Box functions 2-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 2.1 Organizing documents Organize documents by renaming the saved document, changing the boxes where they are saved, or duplicating or deleting them. 1 Mobile/PDA 2 External Memory User Box Delete Edit Name Move Copy Save in User Box Save in USB memory (when external memory is connected) Document Details Public/Personal/Group User Boxes o o o o − o o Bulletin Board User Box o − − − − − − Polling TX User Box o − − − − − − Secure Document User Box o o − − − − o Memory RX User Box o o − − − − o Annotation User Box o o − − − − o Fax Retransmit User Box o − − − − − o Password Encrypted PDF User Box o − − − − − o ID & Print User Box o − − − − − o External Memory, Mobile/ PDA − − − − o − o 2 1 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 2-7 2.1 User Box functions 2 2.1.2 Configuring settings for using the User Box functions Before using the User Box functions, the following settings should be configured. Registering a User Box Save the User Box where documents will be registered. Configure boxes by using the machine's touch panel or by using Web Connection from a Web browser on a computer on the network. Reference - The following User Boxes are configurable. – Public/Personal/Group User Boxes(p. 8-6) – Bulletin Board User Box (when using the bulletin board function) (p. 8-7) – Annotation User Box (p. 8-17) When using this machine as a relay device If the optional Fax Kit is installed, and you want to use this machine for relaying fax transmission, create a Relay User Box for saving documents temporarily before they are relayed. (p. 8-9) To create a Relay User Box, specify in advance the group containing fax numbers of relay destinations. The User Box to which data is saved for memory reception If the optional Fax Kit is installed, and you do not want to print while receiving data, configure the memory reception settings. dReference For details on how to configure memory reception settings, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 2 Information 2-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 2.2 2.2 Information This section describes information you should know before using the User Box functions. 2.2.1 User authentication To use this machine, some devices have been preset so that you must enter an account or user name and a password. For details on the account or user name available for using the devices, contact your administrator. MFP authentication Enter the user name and password, and then press either [Login] in the touch panel or the Access key on the control panel. External server authentication Enter the user name and password, and then press either [Login] in the touch panel or the Access key on the control panel. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 2-9 2.2 Information 2 Account track authentication Enter the account name and password, and then press either [Login] in the touch panel or the Access key on the control panel. Reference - When user authentication is enabled, the only the boxes accessible by the logged in users are displayed. For details, refer to page 2-11. - If a user enters an incorrect password a specified number of times when Mode 2 is selected in Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error in Administrator Settings, the user is locked, and cannot use the control panel. For details on how to disable Prohibit Functions When Authentication Error, contact your administrator. - If Authentication Manager is used for authentication, ask your server administrator about the login procedure. - When you use the optional Authentication Unit for authentication, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations] for the login procedure. 2.2.2 Restriction of box registration Public/Personal/Group User Boxes The User Box functions provide Public User Boxes, which can be used by more than one person, Personal User Boxes, which can be used only by a single person, and Group User Boxes, which can be used by the users who are logged in as members of the User Box owner account. The following lists the limitations on those User Boxes: - Before saving documents, create a User Box to save data. - Up to 1,000 User Boxes can be created. - Up to 200 documents can be saved in a single User Box. - A total of 10,000 pages can be saved in all User Boxes. - A total of 3,000 documents can be saved in all User Boxes. Bulletin Board User Box Reference - Up to 10 Bulletin Board User Boxes can be created. - Only one document can be saved in a single Bulletin Board User Box. Polling TX User Box Only one document can be saved in a single User Box. Memory RX User Box Up to 500 documents can be saved in the Memory RX User Box. 2 Information 2-10 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 2.2 Relay User Box Reference - Up to 5 Relay User Boxes can be created. - Only one document can be saved in a single Relay User Box. 2.2.3 Restriction of file name Name document data to be saved. Reference - The names can contain up to 30 characters. - You can edit the names after the documents have been saved. - Press this button to specify the name when saving data. Otherwise, a predefined name is applied to the data. The following elements are combined to create a name. The following describes elements of an example document name "C36C_1011102315230". Item Description C This character indicates the mode when the document is saved. "S" appears for documents saved in the Fax/Scan mode screen or the User Box screen. C: Copy S: Fax/Scan, User Box P: Print 36C-1 This represents the name of the device that scanned the data. The factory default is "(product name)". You can change this name in [Device Name] in [Administrator/ Machine Settings] in Administrator Settings. Use up to 10 characters. 11102315230 This indicates the year (last two digits), month, day, hour and minute when the data was scanned. If a series of documents are scanned at the same time (minute), serial numbers are attached to the last digits. _0001 This indicates the page when multi-page data is scanned. This numeral does not appear in the Document Name column, but is added automatically as part of the name when the file is transmitted. Consider this part for FTP or other transmission when a server has restriction regarding file names. .TIF This is the extension for the specified data format. The characters do not appear in the Document Name column, but is added automatically as part of the name when the file is transmitted. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 2-11 2.3 Authentication and accessible User Boxes 2 2.3 Authentication and accessible User Boxes When you apply user authentication and account track settings, the accessible User Boxes and the permissions change as shown in the following. Configure the user authentication and account track settings according to the desired functions. 2.3.1 When User Authentication or Account Track is not enabled Reference - Users can access all Public User Boxes. - User Boxes created by users and administrators are Public User Boxes. - Users cannot create any User Boxes when the Allow/Restrict User Box is set to Restrict in Administrator Settings. 2.3.2 When only user authentication is enabled Reference - Users can access all Public User Boxes and only Personal User Boxes that the user has created. - The Personal User Boxes are inaccessible by other users. - Press this button to set up a User Box administrator. - A User Box administrator can access all Public User Boxes and all Personal User Boxes. - If you delete authentication data by canceling user authentication settings or changing authentication methods, all Personal User Boxes become Public User Boxes. Create and access Public User Box User 1 User 2 Access allowed Personal User Box of user 2 Personal User Box of user 1 Public User Box User Box administrator 2 Authentication and accessible User Boxes 2-12 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 2.3 2.3.3 When only account track is enabled Reference - Users can access all Public User Boxes and only Group User Boxes of accounts that the user belongs to. - If you delete authentication data by canceling account track settings or changing authentication methods, all Group User Boxes become Public User Boxes. 2.3.4 When user authentication and account track are enabled and synchronized As the account for users has been registered in advance, users cannot access Group User Boxes of accounts that they do not belong to. Account B Public User Box Account A Access allowed Group User Box of account A Group User Box of account B Account A Account B User 1 User 2 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 2-13 2.3 Authentication and accessible User Boxes 2 Reference - Users can access all Public User Boxes, only Group User Boxes of the account that the user belongs to, and only Personal User Boxes that the user has created. - The Personal User Boxes are inaccessible by other users. - Press this button to set up a User Box administrator. - A User Box administrator can access all Public User Boxes, all Personal User Boxes and all Group User Boxes. - If you delete authentication data by canceling user authentication settings or changing authentication methods, all Personal User Boxes and all group boxes become Public User Boxes. User 1 User 2 Account A Account B Public User Box Personal User Box of user 1 Group User Box of account A Personal User Box of user 2 Group User Box of account B Access allowed User Box administrator 2 Authentication and accessible User Boxes 2-14 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 2.3 2.3.5 When user authentication and account track are enabled but not synchronized As the account for a user has not been registered in advance, a user must enter an account name and password when logging in. Each time a user logging in, the user can access the Group User Boxes of a different account by as a member of the account. Reference - Users can access all Public User Boxes and only Personal User Boxes that the user has created. - The Personal User Boxes are inaccessible by other users. - A user can access Group User Boxes of an account simply by entering an account name and password of the account when logging in. - Press this button to set up a User Box administrator. - A User Box administrator can access all Public User Boxes, all Personal User Boxes and all Group User Boxes. - If you delete authentication data by canceling user authentication settings or changing authentication methods, all Personal User Boxes and all group boxes become Public User Boxes. Account A Account B User 1 User 1 Access allowed Access permitted through entry of account name and password User Box administrator Public User Box Personal User Box of user 1 Group User Box of account A Group User Box of account B 3 Control Panel/Liquid Crystal Display 3 Control panel 3-2 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3.1 3 Control Panel/Liquid Crystal Display 3.1 Control panel Use the control panel for User Box mode operation. The following describes the buttons and switches in the control panel. No. Name Description 1 Touch Panel Various screens and messages are displayed. Configure the various settings by directly touching the panel. 2 Power Indicator Lights up in blue when the machine is turned on with the main power switch. 3 Sub Power Switch Press this switch to turn on/off machine operations, including copying, printing and scanning. When turned off, the machine enters an energy conservation state. 4 Power Save Press this key to enter Power Save mode. While the machine is in Power Save mode, the indicator on the Power Save key lights up in green and the touch panel goes off. To exit from Power Save mode, press the Power Save key again. 5 Mode Memory Press this key to register (store) the desired copy/scan settings as a program or to recall a registered copy/scan program. 6 Utility/Counter Press this key to display the Utility screen and the Meter Count screen. 7 Reset Press this key to clear all settings (except programmed settings) entered using the control panel and touch panel. 8 Interrupt Press this key to enter Interrupt mode. While the machine is in Interrupt mode, the indicator on the Interrupt key lights up in green and the message "Now in Interrupt mode." appears on the touch panel. To cancel Interrupt mode, press the Interrupt key again. 9 Stop Pressing the Stop key during scanning temporarily stops the scan operation. 1 2 5 4 6 3 7 8 9 1413 10 15 16 17 18 12 11 19 20 21 22 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3-3 3.1 Control panel 3 7 CAUTION - Do not apply extreme pressure to the touch panel, otherwise the touch panel may be scratched or damaged. Never push down on the touch panel with force, and never use a hard or pointed object to make a selection in the touch panel. 10 Proof Copy Press this key to print a single proof copy to be checked before printing a large number of copies. You can check the finishing state on the touch panel by pressing this key before scanning or copying. • This key is not available when saving documents by pressing the User Box key. • To check the preview image when saving in a User Box, press the Fax/Scan key. For checking preview procedure, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 11 Start Press this key to start scanning. When this machine is ready to begin a scan operation, the indicator on the Start key lights up in blue. If the indicator on the Start key lights up in orange, scan operation cannot be started. Press this key to restart a stopped job. 12 Data Indicator Flashes in blue while a print job is being received. Lights up in blue when data is being printed. 13 C Press this key to erase a value (such as the number of copies, a zoom ratio, or a size) entered using the keypad. 14 Keypad Press this key to enter the number of copies, zoom ratio, and various other settings. 15 Guidance Press this key to display the Guidance screen. From this screen, you can view descriptions of the various functions and details of operations. 16 Enlarge Display Press this key to enter Enlarge Display mode. If you use Authentication Manager for authentication, the Enlarge Display screen is not available. 17 Accessibility Press this key to display the screen for configuring settings for user accessibility functions. 18 Access If user authentication or account track settings have been applied, press this key after entering the user name and password (for user authentication) or the account name and password (for account track) in order to use this machine. Press this key to log off from the machine as well. 19 Brightness adjustment dial Use this dial to adjust the brightness of the touch panel. 20 User Box Press this key to enter User Box mode. While the machine is in User Box mode, the indicator on the User Box key lights up in green. 21 Fax/Scan Press this key to enter Fax/Scan mode. While the machine is in Fax/Scan mode, the indicator on the Fax/Scan key lights up in green. For details on the fax and scan functions, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 22 Copy Press this key to enter Copy mode. (As a default, the machine is in Copy mode.) While the machine is in Copy mode, the indicator on the Copy key lights up in green. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. No. Name Description 3 Touch panel 3-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3.2 3.2 Touch panel 3.2.1 Screen component Icons that appear in the touch panel Icons indicating the status of this machine may appear in the icon display area. The following icons may be displayed. No. Name Description 1 Message display area Displays the status of the machine and details on operation procedures. 2 Functions/settings display area Displays tabs and buttons for displaying screens containing various functions. Use this area to configure various functions. Press a tab or button to display the corresponding screen for configuring the settings. 3 Icon display area Displays icons, which indicate the status of jobs and the machine, and shortcut keys. 4 Left panel Displays various buttons, such as [Job List] to display the jobs that are currently being performed/queued (waiting) to be performed, and [Check Job] to display the result of the specified settings. For details on the display and description of the left panel, refer to page 3-5. 5 Toner supply indicators Show the amount of toner remaining for yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C), and black (K). 4 5 1 2 3 Icon Description Indicates that data is being sent from the machine, regardless of the current mode. Indicates that the machine is receiving data, regardless of the current mode. Indicates that an error occurred during an image stabilization operation, a print operation or a scan operation. Press this icon to view a screen containing a warning code. If the warning screen has been closed while a warning occurs, press this button to display the warning screen again. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3-5 3.2 Touch panel 3 3.2.2 Display and operation of Left panel In the left panel of the touch panel, there are buttons for checking the status of jobs and the configuration of the machine. The following buttons are available in the left panel in the User Box mode. Appears when there is a message indicating that consumables must be replaced or the machine requires maintenance. Press this icon to display the message, and then perform the replacement or maintenance procedure. Appears when an error occurs with the connection to the POP server. Indicates that there is no paper in the paper tray. Indicates that very little paper remains in the paper tray. If the optional Image Controller IC-412 v1.1 is installed, pressing this icon displays the setting screen for the Image Controller IC-412 v1.1. Indicates that the enhanced security mode is enabled. Indicates that an external memory device is connected to the machine. Indicates that a nonstandard external memory has been connected to this machine, therefore, USB connection is not enabled. Indicates that the job is in the waiting-for-redial status because, for example, the recipient's line is busy when sending with the G3 Fax or IP Address Fax function. Icon Description No. Name Description 1 [Job List] Press this button to check the job currently being performed and the job log. 2 [Check Job] Press this button to check information of the selected User Box, and various settings of the scan, print and transmission functions. 3 [Preview] Press this button to check the preview image of a saved document. 1 2 3 3 Touch panel 3-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3.2 Job List A command to perform an operation such as saving data to a User Box, or printing or sending saved documents is called a job. Select [Job List] to display the job currently being performed. Job List - Delete Press this button to delete the job in process to cancel the operation. Select the job from the job list, and then press [Delete]. Check the message that appears, and delete the job. No documents in a User Box will be deleted even if the job currently being run is deleted. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3-7 3.2 Touch panel 3 Job List - Job Details Press this button to view the list of jobs being performed and the job log for confirmation. There are the following four types of jobs: Item Description [Print] Lists print jobs for copying, computer printing, and received faxes. [Send] Lists scanner and fax transmission jobs. [Receive] Lists fax reception jobs. [Save] Lists jobs with documents being saved in User Boxes. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the user who stored the document. Status: Displays the status of the job (receiving/queued/printing/printing stopped/print error/deleting). Document Name: File name being printed. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. Copies: Displays the number of copies to be printed. [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Delete] Press this button to delete the selected job. [Increase Priority] Press this button to change the priority of the job. • If you set Changing Job Priority in Administrator Settings to "Restrict", you cannot specify the output priority of the jobs. • If the setting is specified so that the current print job can be interrupted, printing is interrupted and printing of the job given priority begins. Printing of the interrupted job restarts automatically once printing for the job given priority is finished. [Release Held Job] Press this button to change the settings of a stored job, or print or delete the job. [Check Job Set.] Press this button to check the settings of the selected job. Press either [ Back] or [Forward ] to check the settings. [Detail] Press this button to check the registration source/user name, file name, output tray, stored time, number of original pages and number of copies for the selected job. To delete a job, press [Delete]. 3 Touch panel 3-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3.2 Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. - To view scanned images, you must set "Job History Thumbnail Display" to "ON" in Administrator Settings in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the user who stored the document. Document Name: File name being printed. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. Copies: Displays the number of copies to be printed. Result: Displays the result of the operation (completed successfully/deleted due to error/deleted by user/part of mode cancelled). [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs] Switch to display the job type. [Detail] Press this button to check the job result, error details, registration source/user name, file name, output tray, stored time, number of original pages and number of copies for the selected job. [Scanned Image] Select the job to display the scanned image. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. Address Type: Displays the destination type (including fax, E-Mail, FTP, PC (SMB), WebDAV, and TWAIN). "TWAIN" appears for the job that is sent via Web service. Status: Displays the status of the job (sending/queued/dialing/pending for redial/deleting). Address: Displays the fax number, E-mail address, User Box name, etc. of the recipient's machine. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Timer TX Job] Displays the status of the reserved transmission in the memory. To delete a job, press [Delete]. [L1][L2] These buttons appear when two fax kits are installed. Press one of these buttons. The job list of the selected line appears. [Delete] Press this button to delete the selected job. [Redial] Select a job of which the status is set to "Waiting To Redial", to perform redialing. [Check Job Set.] Press this button to check the settings of the selected job. Press either [ Back] or [Forward ] to check the settings. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3-9 3.2 Touch panel 3 Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. - To view scanned images, you must set "Job History Thumbnail Display" to "ON" in Administrator Settings in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. [Detail] Press this button to check the registration source/user name, file name, destination type, destination, stored time, communication, number of original pages and external server information for the selected job. To delete a job, press [Delete]. • The external server information that is available by pressing [Detail] appears only when using external server authentication. • [Type] is displayed only when the destination is a fax, Internet fax, or IP address fax. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. Address Type: Displays the destination type (including fax, E-Mail, FTP, PC (SMB), WebDAV, and TWAIN). "TWAIN" appears for the job that is sent via Web service. Address: Displays the fax number, E-mail address, User Box name, etc. of the recipient's machine. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. Result: Displays the result of the operation (completed successfully/deleted due to error/deleted by user). "Error detected" is also displayed for broadcasting. [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs] Switch to display the job type. [Comm. List] Displays the list of scanner and fax transmission (sent/received) jobs. You can print Activity Report, TX Report and RX Report in respective list screens. [Detail] Press this button to check the result, error details, registration source/user name, file name, destination type, destination, stored time, communication, number of original pages and external server information for the selected job. • The external server information that is available by pressing [Detail] appears only when using external server authentication. • [Type] is displayed only when the destination is a fax, Internet fax, or IP address fax. [Scanned Image] Select the job to display the scanned image. Item Description 3 Touch panel 3-10 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3.2 Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the user who stored the document. Status: Displays the status of the job (receiving/dialing (Polling RX)/queued/printing/printing stopped/print error/saving to memory/deleting). Document Name: Displays the name of the received or saved document. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: The number of original pages that were received. [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Delete] Press this button to delete the selected job. [Redial] Select a job of which the status is set to "Waiting To Redial", to perform redialing. [Forward] Forwards the fax received and stored in the memory (in-memory proxy reception). Specify the recipients either by selecting destinations registered in the address book or by entering directly. [Detail] Press this button to check the registration source/user name, file name, output tray, stored time, transmission time, and number of original pages for the selected job. To delete a job, press [Delete]. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the user who stored the document. Document Name: Displays the name of the received or saved document. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. Result: Displays the result of the operation (completed successfully/deleted due to error/deleted by user/part of mode cancelled). [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs] Switch to display the job type. [Comm. List] Displays the list of scanner and fax transmission (sent/received) jobs. You can print Activity Report, TX Report and RX Report in respective list screens. [Detail] Press this button to check the job result, error details, registration source/user name, file name, output tray, stored time and number of original pages for the selected job. [Received Image] Select the job to display the received image. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3-11 3.2 Touch panel 3 Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. - To view received images, you must set "Job History Thumbnail Display" to "ON" in Administrator Settings in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. Reference - When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by logged in users cannot be viewed. - The names of confidential documents are not displayed. - To view saved images, you must set "Job History Thumbnail Display" to "ON" in Administrator Settings in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the user who stored the document. Status: Displays the status of the job (receiving, saving to memory, deleting). Document Name: Displays the name of the saved document. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Delete] Press this button to delete the selected job. [Detail] Press this button to check the registration source/user name, file name, User Box, stored time, and number of original pages for the selected job. To delete a job, press [Delete]. Item Description List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued. User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the user who stored the document. Document Name: Displays the name of the saved document. Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued. Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original. Result: Displays the result of the operation (completed successfully/deleted due to error/deleted by user/part of mode cancelled). [ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at one time, press these buttons to display other jobs. [Deleted Jobs]/[Finished Jobs]/[All Jobs] Switch to display the job type. [Comm. List] Displays the list of scanner and fax transmission (sent/received) jobs. You can print Activity Report, TX Report and RX Report in respective list screens. [Detail] Press this button to check the result, error details, registration source/user name, file name, destination User Box, stored time and number of original pages for the selected job. [Saved Image] Select the job to display the saved image. 3 Touch panel 3-12 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3.2 User Box information Displays the User Box information when you select a User Box. Use/File - Detail Press [Detail] on the lower left of the Use Document screen to check the time stored, user name, document name, the number of pages, and job number of the selected document. Reference - When you select multiple documents, use [ ][ ] to switch pages. dReference For checking preview image, refer to page 3-14. Use/File - Check Job Settings Select [Send] or [Bind TX] in the Send tab to display the address entry screen. [Check Job Settings] is displayed on the lower left of the screen. Reference - Press [Check Job Settings] to check the following settings. – Destination Settings – Document Setting Contents – Communication Settings (Not displayed when Combine is enabled.) – Check E-Mail Settings ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3-13 3.2 Touch panel 3 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Destination Settings Displays the list of destinations that are registered in the machine. Reference - To add a directly entered destination to the address book, select the destination, and press [Store Address]. - To check the detailed information of the destination, select a destination, and press [Details]. - To delete a destination, select one you want to delete, and then press [Delete]. dReference For details on how to register a destination to the address book, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Use/File - Check Job Settings - Document Setting Contents View the list of resolution, file type, and color settings. 3 Touch panel 3-14 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3.2 Use/File - Check Job Settings - Communication Settings You can check the line settings and transmission method settings. Press either [ Back] or [Forward ] to check the settings. Use/File - Check Job Settings - Check E-Mail Settings Check the document name, subject, From address and message body to send E-mail messages. Preview Check the preview image of the selected document when using or filing documents. Press [Preview] to select one document. The image of the first page is displayed in the left panel. Reference - For a document with multiple pages, only the image of the first page can be viewed. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3-15 3.2 Touch panel 3 Preview Press [Detail] to enlarge the preview image. Enlarge the image of the document to check details. The image can be magnified 2 times, 4 times or 8 times. To view the desired portion of the enlarged image, use the scroll bars located in the right and the bottom of the image. Preview (Print/Combine) Preview the page image of printing result by pressing the [Preview] - [Detail] in the left panel when you have selected [Print] or [Combine]. Reference - For a document with multiple pages, images of all pages can be viewed. Item Description [ Prev. Page]/ [Next Page ] If the saved document contains multiple pages, use these buttons to switch the display to another page. [Zoom] Enlarge the image of the document to check details. The image can be magnified 2 times, 4 times or 8 times. To view the desired portion of the enlarged image, use the scroll bars located in the right and the bottom of the image. [Rotate Image] : Rotates the currently displayed page by 180 degrees to show the image. [Rotate Pages]: Select if the saved document contains multiple pages. • You can select multiple images in the page to be rotated. • [Odd Page]: Select images in the odd numbered pages. • [Even Page]: Select images in the even numbered pages. • [Select All]: Select images in all pages. • [Rotation Angle]: Click [180°] to rotate a page. [View Finishing] Displays the specified settings as icons and text in the preview image. Cancel [View Finishing] to erase the icons and text so that only the image appears in the screen. 3 Touch panel 3-16 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3.2 Preview (Send/Bind TX) Preview the page image of sending result by pressing the [Preview] - [Detail] in the left panel when you have selected [Send] or [Bind TX]. Item Description [Scan] Displays the preview for E-mail TX/PC (FTP)/File TX (SMB)/File TX (WebDAV) operations. [Fax] Press this button to display the preview for G3 fax, IP address fax, or Internet fax operations. [ Prev. Page]/ [Next Page ] If the saved document contains multiple pages, use these buttons to switch the display to another page. [Zoom] Enlarge the image of the document to check details. The image can be magnified 2 times, 4 times or 8 times. To view the desired portion of the enlarged image, use the scroll bars located in the right and the bottom of the image. [Rotate Image] When [Scan] is selected in [Preview] : Rotates the currently displayed page 90 degrees anti-clockwise to show the image. : Rotates the currently displayed page 90 degrees clockwise to show the image. [Rotate Pages]: Select if the saved document contains multiple pages. • You can select multiple images in the page to be rotated. • [Odd Page]: Select images in the odd numbered pages. • [Even Page]: Select images in the even numbered pages. • [Select All]: Select images in all pages. • [Rotation Angle]: Select [Left 90°], [Right 90°], or [180°] as the rotation angle. When the destination is a fax, an image is sent at 180 degrees if [Left 90°] is selected in [Rotation Angle] and at 0 degrees if [Right 90°] is selected. If TIFF or JPEG is selected as the file format to read a long original, the rotation mode may not be specified. When [Fax] is selected in [Preview] : Rotates the currently displayed page by 180 degrees to show the image. [Rotate Pages]: Select if the saved document contains multiple pages. • You can select multiple images in the page to be rotated. • [Odd Page]: Select images in the odd numbered pages. • [Even Page]: Select images in the even numbered pages. • [Select All]: Select images in all pages. • [Rotation Angle]: Click [180°] to rotate a page. [Delete Page] Displayed when the saved document contains multiple pages while [Send] is selected. You can select multiple images in the page to be deleted. [Odd Page]: Select images in the odd numbered pages. [Even Page]: Select images in the even numbered pages. All pages cannot be deleted. [View Finishing] View the finishing image with the configured settings, including printing the data, applied. When you cancel [View Finishing], only the image appears in the screen. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3-17 3.2 Touch panel 3 Reference - If you select [Bind TX], the Delete Page function becomes unavailable. - If you select [Send] for multiple documents, the rotate page and delete page functions become unavailable. 3 Touch panel 3-18 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 3.2 4 User Box Operation Flow ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-3 4.1 Saving documents in User Boxes 4 4 User Box Operation Flow 4.1 Saving documents in User Boxes This section describes the steps for saving documents in Public User Boxes. Press the User Box key in the control panel Select the desired User Box, and then press [Save Document] Configure the document name (p. 6-5), scan settings (p. 6-6) and original settings (p. 6-19) 4 Saving documents in User Boxes 4-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4.1 Reference - When saving an original with an embedded password, the password entry screen appears. Enter the password and press [OK] to start saving. - You cannot save an original with copy guard embedded. Load the original Press [Start] or the Start key in the control panel ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-5 4.2 Printing documents from a User Box 4 4.2 Printing documents from a User Box This section describes the steps for printing documents saved in Public User Boxes. Press the User Box key in the control panel Select the desired User Box, and then press [Use/File] Select the [Print] tab Select documents 4 Printing documents from a User Box 4-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4.2 If you have selected a single document, press [Print] (p. 7-6) When selecting multiple documents and printing them using added functions, press [Combine] (p. 7-7) Configure the printing order (bind order) (p. 7-8) Configure basic and application settings (p. 7-9, p. 7-16) Configure basic and application settings (p. 7-9, p. 7-16) To confirm the contents, display the preview (p. 3-15) ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-7 4.2 Printing documents from a User Box 4 Press [Start] or the Start key in the control panel 4 Sending documents from a User Box 4-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4.3 4.3 Sending documents from a User Box This section describes the steps for sending documents saved in Public User Boxes. Press the User Box key in the control panel Select the desired User Box, and then press [Use/File] Select the [Send] tab Select documents ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-9 4.3 Sending documents from a User Box 4 If you have selected a single document, press [Send]. (p. 7-33) When selecting multiple documents and specifying the file type or stamp, press [Bind TX] (p. 7-33) Configure the sending order (bind order) (p. 7-8) Specify the destination Address Book Direct Input Job History (The job history of fax, Internet fax, or IP address fax is not displayed when Bind TX is selected. ) Address Search Also specify a scan/fax program. For details on scan/fax programs, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 4 Sending documents from a User Box 4-10 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4.3 Configure document, communication, and application settings (p. 7-47) Configure document, communication, and application settings (p. 7-47) To confirm the contents, display the preview (p. 3-16) Press [Start] or the Start key in the control panel ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-11 4.4 Saving a document in an external memory 4 4.4 Saving a document in an external memory This section describes the steps for saving scanned images in the external memory. Press User Box in the control panel while the external memory is connected to this machine Connect the external memory to this machine, and then press [Save a document to External Memory.] Press [Save Document] Press [User Box] Select the [System User Box] tab. Press [External Memory], then [OK] 4 Saving a document in an external memory 4-12 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4.4 Reference - When saving an original with an embedded password, the password entry screen appears. Enter the password and press [OK] to start saving. - You cannot save an original with copy guard embedded. - A function to save a document in external memory is set to OFF (not saved) in the factory setting. In addition, it is set to OFF (cannot be saved) by the user function settings when user authentication is enabled. To save a document in external memory, change the setting to enable you to save a document in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 8-23. Configure the document name (p. 6-5), scan settings (p. 6-6) and original settings (p. 6-19) Load the original Press [Start] or the Start key in the control panel ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-13 4.5 Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box 4 4.5 Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box This section describes the steps for saving a document stored in the external memory to a User Box. Press User Box in the control panel while the external memory is connected to this machine Connect the external memory to this machine, and then press [Save a document from External Memory to a User Box.] Select the [System User Box] tab. Press [External Memory], then [Use/File] Press the [Filing Settings] tab Select a document, and then press [Save to User Box] 4 Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box 4-14 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4.5 Reference - A function to save documents in an external memory is set to OFF (cannot be saved) by factory default. In addition, it is set to OFF (cannot be saved) by the user function settings when user authentication is enabled. To save a document from the external memory into a User Box, change the setting to enable you to save a document in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 8-23. Specify the User Box and document name (p. 7-102) Press [Start] or the Start key in the control panel ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-15 4.6 Printing a document from an external memory 4 4.6 Printing a document from an external memory This section describes the steps for printing documents saved in the external memory. Press User Box in the control panel while the external memory is connected to this machine Connect the external memory to this machine, and then press [Print a document from External Memory.] Select the [System User Box] tab, and then press [External Memory] Press [Use/File] Select a file, and then press [Print] (p. 7-99) 4 Printing a document from an external memory 4-16 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4.6 Reference - A function to save documents in an external memory is set to OFF (cannot be saved) by factory default. In addition, it is set to OFF (cannot be saved) by the user function settings when user authentication is enabled. To save a document from the external memory into a User Box, change the setting to enable you to save a document in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 8-23. Configure print settings (p. 7-100) Press [Start] or the Start key in the control panel ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-17 4.7 Filing documents in a User Box 4 4.7 Filing documents in a User Box This section describes the steps for filing documents saved in Public User Boxes. Press the User Box key in the control panel Select the desired User Box, and then press [Use/File] Select the [Filing Settings] tab Select documents, and then select a function (p. 7-63) 4 Filing documents in a User Box 4-18 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4.7 dReference To delete the documents, refer to page 7-64. To rename the documents, refer to page 7-64. To move the documents to other User Boxes, refer to page 7-64. To copy the documents to other User Boxes, refer to page 7-65. To save a document in the external memory, refer to page 7-65. To check information of the documents or preview the documents, refer to page 7-68. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-19 4.8 Printing a Document Saved in a Cellular Phone or PDA 4 4.8 Printing a Document Saved in a Cellular Phone or PDA This section describes the steps to print a document saved in a cellular phone or PDA. Press the User Box key in the control panel Select the [System User Box] tab. Press [Mobile/ PDA], then [Use/File] Press [Print List] To check printing preferences, press [Check Print Settings] 4 Printing a Document Saved in a Cellular Phone or PDA 4-20 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4.8 dReference To configure print settings from a cellular phone or PDA, refer to page 8-12. Enter the PIN code displayed in the control panel to the cellular phone or PDA (p. 7-103) ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-21 4.9 Saving a Document Stored in a Cellular Phone or PDA to a User Box 4 4.9 Saving a Document Stored in a Cellular Phone or PDA to a User Box This section describes the steps to save a document stored in a cellular phone or PDA to a User Box. Press the User Box key in the control panel Select the [System User Box] tab. Press [Mobile/ PDA], then [Use/File] Press [Save in User Box] Select the desired User Box, and then press [OK] 4 Saving a Document Stored in a Cellular Phone or PDA to a User Box 4-22 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4.9 Enter the PIN code displayed in the control panel to the cellular phone or PDA (p. 7-104) ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-23 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode This section describes the configuration and settings for the functions available in the User Box mode. 4.10.1 Save Document Public, Personal, or Group User Box The following shows the menu tree for saving documents in Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes. First level Second level Third level Fourth level [User Box] (p. 6-5) [Document Name] (p. 6-5) [Scan Settings] [Original Type] (p. 6-6) [Simplex/Duplex] (p. 6-7) [Resolution] (p. 6-7) [File Type] [File Type] (p. 6-8) [Encryption] (p. 6-9) [Outline PDF] (p. 6-11) [Scan Setting] (p. 6-11) [Density] (p. 6-12) [Color] (p. 6-12) [Scan Size] (p. 6-13) [Image Adjustment] [Background Removal] (p. 6-14) [Sharpness] (p. 6-15) [Application] [Frame Erase] (p. 6-15) [Book Copy] (p. 6-16) [Separate Scan] (p. 6-18) [Original Settings] [Special Original] (p. 6-19) [Mixed Original] [Z-Folded Original] [Long Original] [Direction Settings] [Original Direction] (p. 6-19) [Binding Position] (p. 6-20) [Auto] [Top] [Left] [Despeckle] (p. 6-20) 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-24 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4.10 System User Box The following shows the menu tree for saving documents in System User Boxes. First level Second level Third level Fourth level [Annotation User Box] [User Box] (p. 6-5) [Document Name] (p. 6-5) [Scan Settings] [Original Type] (p. 6-6) [Simplex/Duplex] (p. 6-7) [Resolution] (p. 6-7) [File Type] [File Type] (p. 6-8) [Encryption] (p. 6-9) [Outline PDF] (p. 6-11) [Scan Setting] (p. 6-11) [Density] (p. 6-12) [Color] (p. 6-12) [Scan Size] (p. 6-13) [Image Adjustment] [Background Removal] (p. 6-14) [Sharpness] (p. 6-15) [Application] [Frame Erase] (p. 6-15) [Book Copy] (p. 6-16) [Separate Scan] (p. 6-18) [Original Settings] [Special Original] (p. 6-19) [Mixed Original] [Z-Folded Original] [Long Original] [Direction Settings] [Original Direction] (p. 6-19) [Binding Position] (p. 6-20) [Despeckle] (p. 6-20) ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-25 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 [External Memory] [User Box] (p. 6-5) [Document Name] (p. 6-5) [Scan Settings] [Original Type] (p. 6-6) [Simplex/Duplex] (p. 6-7) [Resolution] (p. 6-7) [File Type] [File Type] (p. 6-8) [Encryption] (p. 6-9) [Outline PDF] (p. 6-11) [Scan Setting] (p. 6-11) [Density] (p. 6-12) [Color] (p. 6-12) [Scan Size] (p. 6-13) [Image Adjustment] [Background Removal] (p. 6-14) [Sharpness] (p. 6-15) [Application] [Frame Erase] (p. 6-15) [Book Copy] (p. 6-16) [Separate Scan] (p. 6-18) [Original Settings] [Special Original] (p. 6-19) [Mixed Original] [Z-Folded Original] [Long Original] [Direction Settings] [Original Direction] (p. 6-19) [Binding Position] (p. 6-20) [Despeckle] (p. 6-20) [Mobile/PDA] [Save in User Box] (p. 7-103) First level Second level Third level Fourth level 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-26 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4.10 4.10.2 Use/File Print (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes) The following shows the menu tree for using or filing documents in Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes, and configuring print settings. The following describes items available using the framed buttons. First level Second level Third level Fourth level [Print] [Copies:] (p. 7-9) [Print] (p. 7-9) [1-Sided] [2-Sided] [Color] (p. 7-10) [Full Color] [Black] [Use Existing Color Setting] [Finishing] (p. 7-10) [Sort] (p. 7-11) [Group] (p. 7-11) [Offset] (p. 7-11) [Staple] (p. 7-11) [Punch] (p. 7-11) [Fold/Bind] (p. 7-12) [Half-Fold] [Center Staple & Fold] [Combine] (p. 7-13) [Combine Pages] [Combine Direction] [Zoom] (p. 7-14) [Existing Setting] [Manual] [Full Size] [Minimal] [Fixed Zoom] [User Preset Zoom] [Page Margin] (p. 7-16) [Margin Position] [Adjust Value] [Image Shift] (p. 7-16) [Vertical Shift] [Horizontal Shift] [Change Back Shift] ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-27 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 [Sheet/Cover/ Chapter Insert] [Cover Sheet] (p. 7-18) [Front Cover] [Back Cover] [Insert Sheet] (p. 7-19) [Insert Paper] [Insert Type] [Chapters] (p. 7-20) [Chapter Paper] [Stamp/Composition] (p. 7-21) [Date/Time] (p. 7-21) [Date Format] [Time Format] [Pages] [Print Position] [Text Details] [Page Number] (p. 7-22) [Starting Page Number] [Page Number Type] [Starting Chapter Number] [Insert Sheet Setting] (p. 7-23) [Print Position] [Text Details] [Stamp] (p. 7-23) [Stamp Type/Preset Stamps] [Pages] [Text Size] [Text Color] [Print Position] [Copy Security] [Copy Protect] (p. 7-25) [Copy Guard] (p. 7-26) [Password Copy] (p. 7-27) [Stamp Repeat] (p. 7-28) [Stamp Repeat Type] (p. 7-29) [Detail Settings] (p. 7-29) [Position] (p. 7-29) [Header/Footer] (p. 7-30) [Recall Header/ Footer] [Mode Check] [Registered Overlay] (p. 7-31) [Recall Overlay Image] [Pages] First level Second level Third level Fourth level 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-28 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4.10 [Combine] [Copies:] (p. 7-9) [Print] (p. 7-9) [1-Sided] [2-Sided] [Color] (p. 7-10) [Full Color] [Black] [Use Existing Color Setting] [Finishing] (p. 7-10) [Offset] (p. 7-11) [Staple] (p. 7-11) [Punch] (p. 7-11) [Fold/Bind] (p. 7-12) [Half-Fold] [Center Staple & Fold] [Continuous Print] (p. 7-15) [Page Margin] (p. 7-16) [Margin Position] [Adjust Value] [Image Shift] (p. 7-16) [Vertical Shift] [Horizontal Shift] [Change Back Shift] [Stamp/Composition] [Date/Time] (p. 7-21) [Date Format] [Time Format] [Pages] [Print Position] [Text Details] [Page Number] (p. 7-22) [Starting Page Number] [Page Number Type] [Starting Chapter Number] [Print Position] [Text Details] [Stamp] (p. 7-23) [Stamp Type/Preset Stamps] [Pages] [Text Size] [Text Color] [Print Position] [Copy Security] (p. 7-24) [Copy Protect] (p. 7-25) [Copy Guard] (p. 7-26) [Password Copy] (p. 7-27) First level Second level Third level Fourth level ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-29 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 Send (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes) The following shows the Use/File - Send menu tree for Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes. The following describes items available using the framed buttons. [Stamp Repeat] (p. 7-28) [Stamp Repeat Type] (p. 7-29) [Detail Settings] (p. 7-29) [Position] (p. 7-29) [Header/Footer] (p. 7-30) [Recall Header/ Footer] [Mode Check] [Registered Overlay] (p. 7-31) [Recall Overlay Image] [Pages] [Document Details] [Preview] (p. 7-68) First level Second level Third level Fourth level First level Second level Third level Fourth level [Send] [Address Book] [Search] (p. 7-37) [Direct Input] [Fax] (p. 7-40) [Fax Number] [E-Mail] (p. 7-40) [Internet Fax] (p. 7-41) [RX Ability (Destination)] (p. 7-41) [IP Address Fax] (p. 7-42) [Address] [Port Number] [Destination Machine Type] [PC (SMB)] (p. 7-42) [Host Name] [File Path] [User Name] [Password] [Reference] 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-30 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4.10 [FTP] (p. 7-43) [Host Name] [File Path] [User Name] [Password] [Detailed Settings] [WebDAV] (p. 7-44) [Host Name] [File Path] [User Name] [Password] [Detailed Settings] [Job History] (p. 7-45) [Address Search] (p. 7-45) [Search] (p. 7-46) [Advanced Search] (p. 7-46) [Document Settings] [Resolution] (p. 7-47) [File Type] (p. 7-48) [File Type] (p. 7-48) [Encryption] (p. 7-49) [Stamp Composition] (p. 7-51) [Outline PDF] (p. 7-51) [Scan Setting] (p. 7-52) [Color] (p. 7-52) [Use Existing Color Setting] [Full Color] [Gray Scale] [Black] [Communication Settings] [Line Settings] (p. 7-53) [Overseas TX] (p. 7-53) [ECM OFF] (p. 7-54) [V.34 OFF] (p. 7-54) [Check Dest. & Send] (p. 7-54) [Select Line] (p. 7-54) [E-Mail Settings] (p. 7-55) [Document Name] (p. 7-55) [Subject] (p. 7-55) [From] (p. 7-56) [Body] (p. 7-56) [URL Notification Setting] (p. 7-57) [Address Book] [Detail Search] [Direct Input] First level Second level Third level Fourth level ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-31 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 [Communication Method Settings] (p. 7-58) [Timer TX] (p. 7-58) [Password TX] (p. 7-59) [F-Code TX] (p. 7-59) [E-Mail Encryption] (p. 7-60) [Digital Signature] (p. 7-60) [Fax Header Settings] (p. 7-60) [Application] [Stamp/Composition] [Date/Time] (p. 7-21) [Page Number] (p. 7-22) [Stamp] (p. 7-23) [Header/Footer] (p. 7-30) [Send & Print] (p. 7-62) [Copies:] [Simplex/Duplex] [Staple] [Bind TX] [Address Book] [Search] (p. 7-37) [Direct Input] [E-Mail] (p. 7-40) [PC (SMB)] (p. 7-42) [Host Name] [File Path] [User Name] [Password] [Reference] [FTP] (p. 7-43) [Host Name] [File Path] [User Name] [Password] [Detailed Settings] [WebDAV] (p. 7-44) [Host Name] [File Path] [User Name] [Password] [Detailed Settings] [Job History] (p. 7-45) [Address Search] (p. 7-45) [Search] (p. 7-46) [Advanced Search] (p. 7-46) First level Second level Third level Fourth level 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-32 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4.10 Filing Settings (for public/personal/group User Boxes) The following shows the Use/File - Filing Settings menu tree for Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes. The following describes items available using the framed buttons. [Document Settings] [File Type] (p. 7-48) [File Type] (p. 7-48) [Encryption] (p. 7-49) [Stamp Composition] (p. 7-51) [Outline PDF] (p. 7-51) [Scan Setting] (p. 7-52) [Communication Settings] [E-Mail Settings] (p. 7-55) [Document Name] (p. 7-55) [Subject] (p. 7-55) [From] (p. 7-56) [Body] (p. 7-56) [URL Notification Setting] (p. 7-57) [Address Book] [Detail Search] [Direct Input] [E-Mail Encryption] (p. 7-60) [Digital Signature] (p. 7-60) [Application] [Stamp/Composition] [Date/Time] (p. 7-21) [Page Number] (p. 7-22) [Stamp] (p. 7-23) [Header/Footer] (p. 7-30) [Send & Print] [Copies:] [Simplex/Duplex] [Staple] [Document Details] [Preview] (p. 7-68) First level Second level Third level Fourth level ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-33 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 Application (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes) The following shows the File/Use - Application menu tree for Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes. The following describes items available using the framed buttons. First level Second level Third level Fourth level [Delete] (p. 7-64) [Edit Name] (p. 7-64) [Move] (p. 7-64) [Copy] (p. 7-65) [Save to External Memory.] (p. 7-65) [Document Details] [Preview] (p. 7-68) First level Second level Third level Fourth level [Edit Document] [Delete Page] (p. 7-70) [Rotate Page] (p. 7-71) [Move Page] (p. 7-73) [Preview] (p. 7-75) [Preview /Set Range] (p. 7-75) [Register Overlay] (p. 7-77) [Overlay Image] [Edit] [New] (p. 7-78) [Overwrite] (p. 7-79) [Detail Settings] (p. 7-80) [Density] [Color] [Document Details] [Preview] 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-34 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4.10 System User Box The following shows the Use/File menu tree for System User Boxes. First level Second level Third level Fourth level [Bulletin Board User Box] (p. 7-81) [Polling TX User Box] (p. 7-82) [Secure Document User Box] [Print] [Copies:] (p. 7-84) [Print] (p. 7-84) [1-Sided] [2-Sided] [Color] (p. 7-10) [Full Color] [Black] [Use Existing Color Setting] [Finishing] (p. 7-10) [Sort] [Group] [Offset] [Staple] [Punch] [Fold/Bind] (p. 7-12) [Combine] (p. 7-13) [Combine Pages] [Combine Direction] [Zoom] (p. 7-14) [Existing Setting] [Manual] [Full Size] [Minimal] [Fixed Zoom] [User Preset Zoom] [Page Margin] (p. 7-16) [Margin Position] [Adjust Value] [Image Shift] [Sheet/Cover/ Chapter Insert] (p. 7-17) [Cover Sheet] [Insert Sheet] [Chapters] ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-35 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 [Stamp/Composition] (p. 7-21) [Date/Time] [Page Number] [Stamp] [Copy Security] [Stamp Repeat] [Header/Footer] [Registered Overlay] [Filing Settings] (p. 7-85) [Delete] [Edit Name] [Document Details] [Preview] (p. 7-68) [Compulsory Memory RX User Box] [Print] (p. 7-86) [Filing Settings] (p. 7-86) [Delete] [Edit Name] [Document Details] [Preview] (p. 7-68) [Annotation User Box] [Print-Print] [Copies:] (p. 7-9) [Print] (p. 7-9) [1-Sided] [2-Sided] [Color] (p. 7-10) [Full Color] [Black] [Use Existing Color Setting] [Finishing] (p. 7-10) [Sort] [Group] [Offset] [Staple] [Punch] [Fold/Bind] (p. 7-12) [Combine] (p. 7-13) [Combine Pages] [Combine Direction] [Zoom] (p. 7-14) [Existing Setting] [Manual] [Full Size] [Minimal] [Fixed Zoom] [User Preset Zoom] [Page Margin] (p. 7-16) [Margin Position] [Adjust Value] [Image Shift] First level Second level Third level Fourth level 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-36 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4.10 [Sheet/Cover/ Chapter Insert] [Cover Sheet] (p. 7-18) [Insert Sheet] (p. 7-19) [Chapters] (p. 7-20) [Stamp/Composition] (p. 7-21) [Date/Time] (p. 7-21) [Page Number] (p. 7-22) [Stamp] (p. 7-23) [Copy Security] (p. 7-24) [Stamp Repeat] (p. 7-28) [Registered Overlay] (p. 7-31) [Send-Send] [Address Book] (p. 7-37) [Direct Input] [E-Mail] (p. 7-40) [PC (SMB)] (p. 7-42) [FTP] (p. 7-43) [WebDAV] (p. 7-44) [Job History] (p. 7-45) [Address Search] (p. 7-45) [Search] (p. 7-46) [Advanced Search] (p. 7-46) [Document Settings] [Resolution] (p. 7-47) [File Type] (p. 7-48) [Color] (p. 7-52) [Communication Settings] [E-mail Settings] (p. 7-55) [URL Notification Setting] (p. 7-57) [E-Mail Encryption] (p. 7-60) [Digital Signature] (p. 7-60) [Application] [Stamp/Composition] (p. 7-21) [Send & Print] (p. 7-62) [Stamp Element] (p. 7-90) [Filing Settings] (p. 7-92) [Delete] [Edit Name] [Application] [Register Overlay] (p. 7-77) [Document Details] [Preview] (p. 7-68) First level Second level Third level Fourth level ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4-37 4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4 [Fax Retransmit User Box] [Print] [Proof Print] (p. 7-93) [Send] [Fax] (p. 7-93) [Filing Settings] [Delete] (p. 7-94) [Document Details] [Preview] [Password Encrypted PDF User Box] [Print/Save] [Print/Save] (p. 7-95) [Filing Settings] [Delete] (p. 7-95) [Document Details] [ID & Print User Box] [Print] [Print] (p. 7-97) [Filing Settings] [Delete] (p. 7-97) [Document Details] [Preview] (p. 7-68) [External Memory] [Print] [Copies:] (p. 7-100) [Color] (p. 7-100) [Full Color] [Black] [Print] (p. 7-100) [1-Sided] [2-Sided] [Binding Position] (p. 7-100) [Top] [Left] [Right] [Finishing] (p. 7-10) [Sort] [Group] [Offset] [Staple] [Punch] [Fold/Bind] [Paper] (p. 7-101) [Stamp/Composition] [Date/Time] (p. 7-21) [Page Number] (p. 7-22) [Stamp] (p. 7-23) [Copy Security] (p. 7-24) [Stamp Repeat] (p. 7-28) [Filing Settings] [Save to User Box] [User Box] [Document Name] [Document Details] [Mobile/PDA] [Print List] [Check Print Settings] (p. 7-104) [Save in User Box] (p. 7-105) First level Second level Third level Fourth level 4 Menu tree of the User Box mode 4-38 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 4.10 5 Accessing the User Box mode ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 5-3 5.1 Accessing the User Box mode 5 5 Accessing the User Box mode 5.1 Accessing the User Box mode Before starting this procedure, turn this machine on. When this machine is ready to copy data, the basic settings screen appears. To access the User Box mode, press the User Box key in the control panel. The User Box mode window appears. Lightly press the desired button in the window to display menus or functions. Then select the target one. 5 User Box Operation Menu 5-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 5.2 5.2 User Box Operation Menu Accessing the User Box mode enables you to select the operation menus below. 5.2.1 Save Document Scan the original loaded on this machine and save it in a User Box. You can specify the name or image quality of an original when saving it. dReference For details on the Save Document function, refer to page 6-4. For details on the Save Document menu structure, refer to page 4-23. 5.2.2 Use/File Print or send a document saved in a User Box. When printing a document, you can specify the number of sets or page margins. When sending a document, you can specify the file type. If necessary, you can rename or move a document saved in a User Box, or copy a document to another User Box. dReference For details on the Use/File function, refer to page 7-3. For details on the Use/File menu structure, refer to page 4-26. 6 Save Document ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-3 6.1 Save Document Overview 6 6 Save Document 6.1 Save Document Overview 6.1.1 Functions Save Document enables you to directly specify a destination User Box when saving a document in the User Box mode. Using Save Document, document are saved in the same way as when scanned data is saved. Public/Personal/Group User Boxes You can save a document copied or scanned using this machine. You can also save a document that was print-instructed through a computer connected to a network. Some User Authentication or Account Track settings limit users who can use User Boxes such as the Personal or Group User Box. Annotation User Box If you want to print or send a document with the date and time or filing number image, save the document in the Annotation User Box. To use this box, select the [System User Box] tab, and then press [Annotation User Box]. External Memory You can directly save a scanned document in the external memory connected to this machine. To use this function, check that the external memory is connected to the USB connector of this machine, select the [System User Box] tab, and then press [External Memory]. Otherwise, on the screen that is displayed when the external memory device has been connected to the USB connector, press [Save a document to External Memory.]. Reference - A function to save a document to the external memory or to save a document stored in the external memory to a User Box is set to OFF (cannot be saved) in the factory default. In addition, it is set to OFF (cannot be saved) by the user function settings when user authentication is enabled. To save a document in external memory, change the setting to enable you to save a document in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 8-23. dReference For information on the available external memory, refer to page 7-98. 6 Save Document Overview 6-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6.1 6.1.2 Initial Window of Save Document Public/Personal/Group User Boxes Select the [Public], [Personal], or [Group] tab to display a list of User Boxes you can save a document in. Specify the desired User Box. System User Box Select the [System User Box] tab to display a list of User Boxes you can save a document in. Specify the desired User Box. Reference - If [Annotation User Box] is selected, further specify the desired User Box. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-5 6.1 Save Document Overview 6 6.1.3 Save Document window The available setting items in the Save Document screen are as follows. Reference - For the external memory, you cannot change the destination User Box. - To save a document in external memory, change the setting to enable you to save a document in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 8-23. Item Description [User Box] For Public, Personal, Group and Annotation User Boxes, you can change the destination User Box for saving a document. To change the User Box, press [User Box] and select a User Box. • If there is no User Box with the specified number, a new Public User Box is automatically created. [Document Name] Press this button to display a keyboard to enter a document name. Enter the document name in the control panel. [Scan Settings] Configure detailed settings for scanning the document. For details, refer to page 6-6. [Original Settings] Configure the detailed settings for the original type and original direction. For details, refer to page 6-19. 6 Scan Settings 6-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6.2 6.2 Scan Settings Press [Scan Settings] in the Save Document tab to configure the detailed scan settings. 6.2.1 Basic - Original Type Select the original type based on the original contents. The available original types are as follows. If you select [Text/Photo] or [Photo], you can also specify the photo type. Item Description [Text] Original that consists of only text. [Text/Photo] Original that consists of both text and photos (halftone). [Photo] Original that consists of only photos (halftone). [Dot Matrix Original] Original with faint-printing in whole. [Copied Paper] Original with even density that was printed using a copier or printer. Item Description [Photo Paper] Select this setting for a photo printed on printing paper. [Printed Photo] Select this setting for printed photos such as in books or magazines. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-7 6.2 Scan Settings 6 6.2.2 Basic - Simplex/Duplex Select whether to scan one or both sides of the original. 6.2.3 Basic - Resolution Select the resolution for scanning. Reference - The amount of data increases depending on the selected resolution, and you may not be able to save data in an external memory. If you cannot save data, reduce the resolution and retry saving it. Item Description [1-Sided] Scans one side of the original. [2-Sided] Scans both sides of the original. [Cover + 2-Sided] Scans the first page of the original as a cover in the single-sided mode, and also scans the remaining pages in the double-sided mode. 6 Scan Settings 6-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6.2 6.2.4 Basic - File Type Select the file type to save scanned data. File Type The available file types are as follows. dReference You can specify the compression format when saving a TIFF file in color. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. You cannot specify some file formats depending on the Color settings. The following shows the combinations of the File Type and Color settings. Reference - Even if you have selected the file type when saving a document in a User Box, you must specify the file type when downloading the data of the document. - If you select [JPEG], [Page Separation] is automatically selected and set to [1 Every X Page(s)] in Scan Setting. Item Description [PDF] Saves data in PDF format. [Compact PDF] Further compressed PDF file. This format is useful when saving a scanned full color data. [TIFF] Saves data in TIFF format. [JPEG] Saves data in JPEG format. [XPS] Saves data in XPS format. [Compact XPS] Saves data in further compressed XPS file. Auto Color Full Color Gray scale Black PDF o o o o Compact PDF o o o − TIFF o o o o JPEG o o o − XPS o o o o Compact XPS o o o − ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-9 6.2 Scan Settings 6 Encryption If the [PDF] or [Compact PDF] is selected for the file format, the encryption level can be specified. Reference - You cannot check the contents of an encrypted document in the preview screen. Encryption - Detail Settings Configure the detailed permission settings when the document permission is specified on the Encryption screen. Item Description Encryption Level Select the encryption level. [Password] Enter the password necessary to open encrypted data (up to 32 characters). For confirmation, enter the password twice. [Document Permissions] Enter the password necessary to change document permissions (up to 32 characters). For confirmation, enter the password twice. 6 Scan Settings 6-10 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6.2 Press [Forward ] to further configure Changes Allowed settings. Item Description [Printing Allowed] Select whether to allow or restrict printing data. [Low Resolution] appears when the Encryption Level is set to [High level]. [Enable copying of text, images and other content] Select whether to allow or restrict extracting text images. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-11 6.2 Scan Settings 6 Outline PDF Configure this item when [Compact PDF] is selected for the file type. This function performs outline processing for characters, ensuring a smooth display image. It is also available when editing data using an application such as Adobe Illustrator. dReference This function enables you to specify the accuracy of outline processing when creating outline PDF data. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Scan Setting Specify whether to save all pages of a document to one file, or to save each page to one file. Reference - If you select [Page Separation] when saving a document in a User Box, the selection of Page Separation is stored, and then the document is saved as a [Multi Page] file. - The selection of Page Separation is enabled when sending data to an E-Mail, PC (SMB), or FTP destination. Item Description [Changes Allowed] Select the permission level about changes to the document, including signing, entering, or commenting data. Item Description [Multi Page] Creates all the scanned originals as one file. This item cannot be specified together with [JPEG]. [Page Separation] Separates the scanned data to save every specified number of pages to one file. Use the keypad to enter the number of pages to be saved in one file. [E-mail Attachment Method] Specify the method to use to attach a file to an E-mail when Page Separation is selected. • [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail]: Attaches all files to one E-mail. • [One (1) File per E-Mail]: Attaches one file to one E-mail. 6 Scan Settings 6-12 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6.2 6.2.5 Basic - Density Adjust the density for the scanned document. 6.2.6 Basic - Color Specify whether to scan original in color or black-and-white. Some color settings may not be available, depending on the selected File Type settings. The following shows the combinations of the File Type and Color settings. Item Description [Auto Color] Automatically detects the color of the original and scans it to fit the original setting. [Full Color] Scans the original in full color. [Gray Scale] Select this setting for originals with high-level halftone such as black-and-white photos. [Black] Select this setting for originals with distinct black and white areas, such as line drawings. Auto Color Full Color Gray scale Black PDF o o o o Compact PDF o o o − TIFF o o o o JPEG o o o − XPS o o o o Compact XPS o o o − ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-13 6.2 Scan Settings 6 6.2.7 Scan Size Select the paper size of the original to be scanned. Standard size Press [Auto] to automatically detect the size of the first page in the original when scanning. To scan the original with a predetermined paper size, select that size. Custom Size Enter the dimensions of a custom size other than the standard sizes. Reference - X-direction: Enter a value from 2 to 7 inches (30.0 to 432.0 mm). - Y-direction: Enter a value from 2 to 11-11/16 inches (30.0 to 297.0 mm). Photo Size Select the 3 e 5 or 2-1/4 e 3-1/4 size for photographs. 6 Scan Settings 6-14 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6.2 6.2.8 Image Adjustment Adjust the background density or sharpness for the scanned document. Background Removal Adjust the background density of the scanned original. When scanning a colored-paper original, the background color may be scanned resulting in the entire image becoming dark. To avoid this, you can adjust the background density. Select the background removal method, and specify the level. To automatically adjust the density, press [Auto]. Reference - To prevent the dark part in the back side from being scanned as shade, select [Bleed Removal]. - To scan an original with the colored background such as a map, select [Paper Discoloration Adj]. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-15 6.2 Scan Settings 6 Sharpness This settings allows you to sharpen character edges or other borders for the scanned document. 6.2.9 Application - Frame Erase Configure the setting for erasing frames on a two-page spread. Reference - If you have specified the frame width to be erased in the Frame Erase setting of the Book Copy function, the same value is automatically configured for this [Frame Erase] function. - To erase all frames with the same width, specify a numeric value between 1/16 and 2 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm) under [Frame]. - To individually specify the top, left, right, and bottom widths, press the desired button and specify a numeric value for that side. - To not erase frames, press [None]. 6 Scan Settings 6-16 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6.2 6.2.10 Application - Book Copy Configure settings to scan a two-page spread. Settings include scanning method, binding positions and erasing unwanted areas. For paper size of the original, select the size of the spread. Book copy method Select the scanning method. Book Erase - Frame Erase Configure the setting for erasing frames on a two-page spread. Reference - If you have specified the frame width to be erased in the Frame Erase function, the same value is automatically configured for this [Frame Erase] setting of the Book Copy function. - To erase all frames with the same width, specify a numeric value between 1/16 and 2 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm) under [Frame]. - To individually specify the top, left, right, and bottom widths, press the desired button and specify a numeric value for that side. - To not erase frames, press [None]. Item Description [Book Spread] Scans a two-page spread as a single page. [Separation] Scans a two-page spread as two pages (left and right). [Front Cover] Scans the first page as a front cover. [Front + Back Covers] Scans the first page as a front cover, the second page as a back cover, and the third and subsequent pages as a body. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-17 6.2 Scan Settings 6 Book Erase - Center Erase Configure settings to erase the shaded part around the binding position in the center of the original. Reference - Use the keypad or press [-] or [+] to enter a numeric value between 1/16 and 1-3/16 inches (0.1 and 30.0 mm). Binding Position If you have selected Separation, Front Cover, or Front + Back Covers, press [Binding Position], and then select the binding position. 6 Scan Settings 6-18 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6.2 6.2.11 Separate Scan The scan operation can be divided into several sessions by types of originals, for example, when all pages of originals cannot be loaded into the ADF, when the originals are placed on the original glass, or when singlesided originals and double-sided originals are mixed. Press [Separate Scan] to highlight the display. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6-19 6.3 Original Settings 6 6.3 Original Settings Specify the type of original that is loaded, for example, if it contains mixed page sizes or Z-folded originals. Under Original Settings, you can select two or more items at the same time. 6.3.1 Special Original The available setting items are as follows. 6.3.2 Direction Settings - Original Direction Select the orientation of the original. After the document is scanned, the data is processed so that it is correctly oriented. Item Contents [Mixed Original] Select this setting when loading originals with different sizes together into the ADF. The scanning speed will be lowered because the size of each page is detected before it is scanned. [Z-Folded Original] Select this setting to detect the size of a Z-folded original by the length fed through the ADF. [Long Original] Select this setting for originals that are longer than the standard size. 6 Original Settings 6-20 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 6.3 6.3.3 Direction Settings - Binding Position Select the binding position of the original when it has punched holes or is stapled. When a double-sized original is scanned, the binding position is corrected on the back side. 6.3.4 Despeckle Reduces the influence of a dirt of the slit glass upon the scanned image when loading an original in the ADF. Reference - Specifying Despeckle will drop the scanning speed. - If the slit glass is too dirty, clean it. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. Item Description [Auto] Sets the binding position to the long side if the size is 11-11/16 inches (297 mm) or smaller, or the short side otherwise. [Top] Select this setting if the original is loaded with the binding position at the top. [Left] Select this setting if the original is loaded with the binding position at the top. 7 Use/File ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-3 7.1 Overview of the Use/File operations 7 7 Use/File 7.1 Overview of the Use/File operations 7.1.1 Functions of Use/File Printing a document You can print a document that was saved in a User Box in the Copy, Fax/Scan, print instruction, or Fax reception mode. You can add finishing settings such as the number of copies or 2-sided print settings when printing the document. In addition, you can specify Combine to print two or more documents at the same time. Sending You can distribute a document that was saved in a User Box in the Copy, Fax/Scan, print instruction, or Receive mode, for example, by E-mail or fax. You can add finishing or transmission settings when distributing the document. You can also specify Bind TX to select two or more documents and distribute them at the same time. Filing You can perform various document filing operations such as moving or copying documents between User Boxes. You can also save a document stored in a User Box in the external memory. Application settings You can move or rotate pages in saved documents, or register overlay images. 7 Overview of the Use/File operations 7-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.1 7.1.2 Detail of the Use Document screen Select the User Box where you want to print and distribute documents. The following screen is displayed. This section describes the setting items, pointing to the Public User Box as an example. No. Name Description 1 [Print] Configure settings to print the selected documents. (p. 7-6) 2 [Send] Configure the destination and other settings to send the selected documents. (p. 7-33) 3 [Filing Settings] Rename, move, or copy the selected documents. (p. 7-63) 4 [Application] Edit the selected document on a page-basis or register overlay images. (p. 7-69) 5 [Save Document] Select this tab to display the Save Document screen. The Use/File settings you have configured are canceled. 6 − Displays the number and name of the specified User Box. 7 − Displays a list of the documents saved in the User Box. 8 [ ][ ] If the specified User Box contains seven or more documents, use [ ] or [ ] to scroll up or down the list. 9 [Select All] Press this button to select all documents in the specified User Box. 10 [Reset] Press this button to reset all documents in the User Box. 11 [Detail View]/[Thumbnail View] Press this button to switch the display format of saved documents. [Thumbnail View]: A reduced image of the first page, number of pages, and document name of each document are displayed. [Detail View]: The time stored, user name, and document name of each document are displayed. Every time you press the [Time Stored] column header, the documents are sorted in ascending or descending order of the time stored alternately. 12 Print Settings/Transmission Settings/ Filing Settings/ Application Settings Configurable items for the selected tab are displayed. 13 [Document Details] Press this button to check the detailed information or preview image of the document. 4 6 7 1 2 3 11 12 9 10 13 5 8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-5 7.1 Overview of the Use/File operations 7 7.1.3 If a password is specified for a User Box If a password is specified for a User Box, the password entry screen appears. Enter the password, and press [OK]. 7 Print 7-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.2 7.2 Print 7.2.1 Overview of the Print tab Description of the Print tab Select the [Print] tab to display the following screen. The available setting items for [Print] are as follows. dReference For details on other items, refer to page 7-4. Print Press [Print] to display the following screen. In the Print screen, the two categories of the configurable items are provided: [Basic] and [Application]. No. Name Description 1 [Print] Configure settings to print the selected documents. If you have selected multiple documents, the document print setting function is not available. (p. 7-7) 2 [Combine] Configure the printing order or other setting to print two or more document selected. (p. 7-8) 2 1 No. Name Description 1 [Basic] Configure the basic settings such as the number of copies and 1-Sized or 2-Sized printing. 1 2 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-7 7.2 Print 7 Combine Press [Combine], and then configure Combine settings to display the following screen. In the Combine screen, two categories of the configurable items are provided: [Basic] and [Application]. 7.2.2 Print In the Print - Print Details screen, configure or change the following functions. Reference - Fold/Bind can be configured when the optional Finisher is installed. - The punch settings can be configured when the Punch Kit is installed on the optional Finisher. 2 [Application] Configure the more complicated settings such as the page margin and stamp. No. Name Description No. Name Description 1 [Basic] Configure the basic settings such as the number of copies and 1-Sized or 2-Sized printing. 2 [Application] Configure the more complicated settings such as the page margin and stamp. 1 2 Item Description [Copies:] Specify the number of copies. [Print] Select either 1-Sided Print or 2-Sided Print. [Color] Configure color settings to print documents. [Finishing] Configure settings such as for sorting or grouping, stapling, punching, or folding or center stapling. [Combine] Configure settings to print multiple (2, 4, or 8) pages on one page when printing a multi-page document. Specify the number of sheets per page and the combination order. [Zoom] Configure settings to enlarge or reduce an image when printing documents. Select the magnification. [Page Margin] The page margin is set to the left, right, or top of paper. You can shift the image part according to the page margin. [Sheet/Cover/ Chapter Insert] Configure settings to insert a cover sheet, insert sheets between selected pages, or insert sheets for separating chapters. [Stamp/Composition] Configure settings to print the determined items such as date and time or stamp. 7 Print 7-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.2 7.2.3 Combine Document Order After selecting documents, press [Combine] to display the document order selection screen. Documents will be printed in the order they are displayed in this screen. When this screen appears, the documents are displayed in the order they were selected. Reference - To change the order, select a reorder source document, then a reorder destination document. If a document has a watermark at the head, the same watermark is also printed for the second and subsequent documents. If a document does not have a watermark at the head, no watermark is printed even when it is specified for some of the second and subsequent documents. Configurable items to combine and print documents In the Combine - Print Details screen, configure or change the settings for the following functions. Reference - Fold/Bind can be configured when the optional Finisher is installed. - The punch settings can be configured when the Punch Kit is installed on the optional Finisher. - When combining and printing document, you cannot select the Sort, or Group function. Item Description [Copies:] Specify the number of copies. [Print] Select either 1-Sided Print or 2-Sided Print. [Color] Configure color settings to print documents. [Finishing] Configure settings such as for offsetting, stapling, punching, or folding or center stapling. [Continuous Print] Configure this item when [2-Sided] is selected in [Print]. Specify whether, after printing an odd-page document, to print the first page of the next document on the back side of the last page of the first document. [Page Margin] The page margin is set to the left, right, or top of paper. You can shift the image part according to the page margin. [Stamp/Composition] Configure settings to print the determined items such as date and time or stamp. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-9 7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7.3.1 Copies Use the keypad to enter the number of copies. The allowable range is 1 to 9999. Reference - To reset the setting to 1, press the [C] key on the control panel. 7.3.2 1-Sided/2-Sided Select whether to print one side or both sides of sheets of paper. 7 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-10 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.3 7.3.3 Color Configure color settings to print documents. Reference - [Full Color]: Prints a document in full color. – You can print documents saved in this machine in full color even if they are saved in black and white. - [Black]: Prints a document in black and white. - [Use Existing Color Setting]: Prints a document with the color settings used when it was saved. 7.3.4 Finishing Configure sorting, grouping, finishing and other settings. dReference When the finisher is installed, you can change the ejection method in Administrator Settings. For the Offset function, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-11 7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Sort/Group Selecting Sort feeds copies by set. Selecting Group feeds copies by page. Offset Select Yes to sort sheets by set or page so that the user knows where the document is separated. When the finisher is installed, the printed sheets are fed while shifting them for each separation. When the finisher is not installed, the printed sheets are fed while alternately sorting them. Staple Printed sheets are stapled at a corner or two points. Staple - Position Setting If you select the type of stapling, specify the position. The following screen shows an example of [2 Position]. Punch Printed sheets are punched for filing. 7 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-12 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.3 Punch - Position Setting Specify hole positions. Fold/Bind Configure the following settings when a finisher is installed. Item Description [Half-Fold] Folds printed sheets of paper before being fed. [Center Staple & Fold] Staples printed sheets of paper at two center points and folds them in two before being fed. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-13 7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Select the desired function. 7.3.5 Combine A multi-page original is combined and printed on one page. Item Description [2in1] Combines a 2-page original into one page. [4in1] Combines a 4-page original into one page. You can select the combining order of original pages. [8in1] Combines An 8-page original into one page. You can select the combining order of original pages. 7 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-14 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.3 7.3.6 Zoom The images can be enlarged or reduced when they are printed. Specify the magnification. Reference - Regardless of the Use Existing Color Setting or Original Type setting, you can print documents saved in A4 v size in enlarged A3 w size. To rotate and enlarge the image as shown in the example, you must previously set [Enlargement Rotation] to [Allow] in the Utility menu. For details on the enlargement rotation, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. Item Description [Existing Setting] Prints A document with the magnification that was specified when it was saved. [Manual] Specify the magnification between 25.0% and 400.0% on a 0.1% basis. Use the keypad to directly enter the magnification. [Full Size] Prints a document with the size specified when it was saved, without being enlarged or reduced. [Minimal] Reduces a document slightly to leave margin around the image. [+][-] Press this button to adjust the zoom ratio of the image on a 0.1% basis. [Fixed Zoom] Specify the fixed magnification that is preset in this machine. This setting is useful when enlarging or reducing documents to a standard size. [User Preset Zoom] In addition to fixed magnifications, preset frequently used magnifications in advance and use them later. • You can preset up to three magnifications. dReference For details on presetting magnifications, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-15 7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.3.7 Continuous Print You can select this setting if you have selected 2-Sided printing when combining and printing documents. Multiple document are printed continuously when they are combined and printed. When printing in 2-Sided mode, select whether, if printing a document ends on the front side of a sheet of paper, to start printing of the next document on the back side of the sheet or on the front side of a new sheet. Reference - [Yes]: The next document is printed continuously from the back side of the last page of the previous document. - [No]: The next document is printed from the front side of a new sheet. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-16 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.4 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7.4.1 Page Margin The page margin is set to the left, right, or top of paper. It can assure a punching or stapling space. Page Margin Image Shift When a page margin is created, the image can be shifted according the position of the margin. You can specify the shift length to move the image to the left, right, top, or bottom within 1/16 to 10 inches (0.1 to 250.0 mm) to fit the page margin position. Reference - Specify the page margin width on a 1/16 inch (0.1 mm) basis by pressing [-] or [+]. - To set the margin width to 0 inch (0 mm), press [No Shift]. Item Description [Margin Position] Select the margin position. [Auto Zoom]: A page margin position along the long side of the paper is selected if the original length is 11-11/16 inches (297 mm) or less. A page margin is created along the short side of the paper if the original length exceeds 11-11/16 inches (297 mm). [Top]: Select this setting to position a margin on the top. [Left]: Select this setting to position a margin on the left. [Right]: Select this setting to position a margin on the right. [Adjust Value] Specify the width of a page margin between 1/16 and 3/4 inches (0.1 and 20.0 mm). To set the margin width to 0 inch (0 mm), press [None]. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-17 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Image Shift - Change Back Shift To create a page margin in 2-Sided printing mode, press [Change Back Shift] to specify the image shift length on the back side. You can specify the shift length to move the image to the left, right, top, or bottom within 1/16 to 10 inches (0.1 to 250.0 mm) to fit the page margin position. Reference - Specify the page margin width on a 1/16 inch (0.1 mm) basis by pressing [-] or [+]. - To set the margin width to 0 inch (0 mm), press [No Shift]. 7.4.2 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert You can configure the Cover Sheet, Insert Sheet, or Chapters function. Item Description [Cover Sheet] Prints documents with front and back covers. [Insert Sheet] Inserts colored sheets or other type of paper before the specified pages when documents are printed. [Chapters] Configure this setting when printing documents in 2-Sided printing mode. Documents are printed while pages are fed so that the specified pages, the first page of each chapter for example, necessarily turns to the front side. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-18 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.4 7.4.3 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Cover Sheet Documents are printed with front and back covers. The available setting items are as follows. The following shows the front and back cover settings. Item Description [Front Cover]/ [Back Cover] Configure settings for front and back covers. For details, refer to the table below. [Paper] Select a paper tray in the following cases. • When [Front (Copy)] or [Front (Blank)] is selected for [Front Cover] • When [Back (Copy)] or [Back (Blank)] is selected for [Back Cover] Item Description Front Cover None A front cover is not attached to a document. Front (Copy) The first page of a document is printed on the front cover sheet. The second page is printed on the back side of the front cover sheet when [2-Sided] printing is selected. Front (Blank) A blank sheet is inserted before the first page of a document. Back Cover None A back cover is not attached to a document. Back (Copy) The last page of a document is printed on the back cover sheet. The last two pages are printed on the front and back sides of the back cover sheet when [2-Sided] printing is selected. Back (Blank) A blank sheet is inserted after the last page of a document. ABC COVERABC ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-19 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Reference - Load the front and back cover sheets in the tray in advance. - To add cover sheet setting when printing the document that you copied and saved in a User Box, either one of the following conditions must have been satisfied when you saved the document. – A paper tray was specified – Cover Sheets were configured 7.4.4 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Insert Sheet Colored sheets or other type of paper are inserted before the specified pages when documents are printed. You can configure the setting to insert sheets into up to 30 positions in an original of up to 999 pages. The available setting items are as follows. Select [Copy] or [Blank] in Insert Type. Configure the setting as follows depending on whether you select 1- Sided or 2-Sided printing. Example: When page "6" is specified Item Description Page specification/[ Sort] Specify a page you want to insert a sheet into. Press a page button, and use the keypad to enter the desired page number. To sort the entered pages in ascending order, press [Sort]. [Insert Paper] Select a tray to load the sheets to be inserted. Check that sheets are loaded with the same size and orientation as for the printing paper. [Insert Type] Specify whether to print a document on the inserted sheets (Copy) or leave them blank (Blank). For details, refer to the table below. Item Description [Copy] (when 1- Sided is selected) A sheet is inserted as the sixth sheet and the sixth page of the document is printed on that sheet. [Copy] (when 2- Sided is selected) The back side of the third sheet is left blank. A specified sheet is inserted as the fourth sheet and the sixth and seventh pages of the document are printed on that sheet. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-20 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.4 7.4.5 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Chapters You can configure this setting when printing documents in 2-Sided printing mode. Documents are printed while pages are fed so that the specified pages, the first page of each chapter for example, necessarily turns to the front side. You can configure the setting to insert sheets into up to 30 positions in an original of up to 999 pages. The available setting items are as follows. [Blank] (when 1- Sided is selected) A specified sheet is inserted after the sixth page. [Blank] (when 2- Sided is selected) A specified sheet is inserted as the fourth sheet. When you specify an odd pages, the back side of the inserted sheet is left blank. Item Description Item Description Page specification/[ Sort] Specify front-sided pages. Press a page button, and use the keypad to enter the desired page number. To sort the entered pages in ascending order, press [Sort]. [Chapter Paper] To copy document data on chapter sheets, select [Copy Insert] and select a chapter paper tray. Check that sheets are loaded with the same size and orientation as for the printing paper. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-21 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.4.6 Stamp/Composition In Stamp/Composition screen, you can configure the following functions. 7.4.7 Stamp/Composition - Date/Time The date and time of printing are printed on the pages. Item Description [Date/Time] The date and time of printing are printed on the pages. [Page Number] A page number is printed on all pages of a document. [Stamp] A preset character string such as "URGENT" is printed on pages. [Copy Protect] Hidden text is printed on all pages to prevent unauthorized copying. [Copy Guard] A stamp is printed on all pages as a copy guard. [Password Copy] A document is printed with an embedded password on all pages to prevent unauthorized copying. [Stamp Repeat] Text or an image is repeatedly printed on all pages. [Header/Footer] A header or footer is printed on pages. • This item is not displayed when the header or footer is not registered. dReference For details on how to register a header or footer, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations] or [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. [Registered Overlay] A registered image is overlaid on printed pages. • This item is not displayed when no overlay image is registered. dReference For details on how to register an overlay image, refer to page 7-77. Item Description [Date Format] Select the format for the date. [Time Format] Specify whether to add the time, and select the format to display the time. [Pages] Select whether to print the date and time on all pages or the first page only. [Print Position] Specify the print position. To fine-adjust the print position, press [Adjust Position]. Specify the shift length of the print position to the left, right, top or bottom using a value between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm). [Text Details] Specify the details of text to be printed. • Text Color: Select the printing color from black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan, or magenta. • Text Size: Select the printing text size from 8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt, or 14 pt. • Text Type: Select the font type from Times Roman or Helvetica. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-22 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.4 7.4.8 Stamp/Composition - Page Number The page number is printed on all pages of the document. Settings Item Description [Starting Page Number] Specify the starting page number. [Starting Chapter Number] Specify the starting chapter number. [Page Number Type] Select the format to display a page number. [Insert Sheet Setting] Specify whether to print a page number on an inserted sheet. For the available settings, refer to page 7-23. [Print Position] Specify the print position. To fine-adjust the print position, press [Adjust Position]. Specify the shift length of the print position to the left, right, top or bottom using a value between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm). [Text Details] Specify the details of text to be printed. • [Text Color]: Select the printing color from black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan, or magenta. • [Text Size]: Select the printing text size from 8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt, or 14 pt. • [Text Type]: Select the font type from Times Roman or Helvetica. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-23 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Insert Sheet Setting Specify whether to print a page number on inserted sheets. 7.4.9 Stamp/Composition - Stamp A preset character string such as "URGENT" is printed on pages. Item Description [Cover Sheet] [Print on Front and Back Cover] A page number is printed on the front and back covers. [Print on Back Cover only] A page number is not printed on the front cover. [Do not print Page Number] A page number is printed on neither the front cover nor the back cover. [Insert Sheet (Copy)] [Print Page #] A page number is printed on inserted copy sheets. [Do Not Print #] A page number is not printed on inserted copy sheets. [Skip the Page(s)] Inserted copy sheets are not counted. Page numbers are not printed. [Insert (Blank)] [Do Not Print #] Page numbers are not printed on inserted blank sheets. [Skip the Page(s)] Inserted blank sheets are not counted. Page numbers are not printed. Item Description [Stamp Type/Preset Stamps] Select a stamp type such as URGENT, PLEASE REPLY, or DO NOT COPY. Pages Select whether to print the date and time on all pages or the first page only. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-24 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.4 7.4.10 Stamp/Composition -Copy Security -Copy Protect Hidden text is printed on all pages to prevent unauthorized copying. When a document printed with copy protection text is copied, the hidden text appears clearly repeated throughout the pages of the copies so that the reader knows that it is a copy. Configure the setting for the copy protect to be applied. You can apply up to eight strings or stamps. If you set the angle of strings or stamps to 45 degrees (or -45 degrees), however, the number of areas in which you can place strings or stamps is limited to 4. In the Copy Protect screen, you can configure the following settings. [Text Size] Select the printing text size from Minimal or Standard. [Text Color] Select the printing color from black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan, or magenta. [Print Position] Specify the print position. To fine-adjust the print position, press [Adjust Position]. Specify the shift length of the print position to the left, right, top or bottom using a value between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches (0.1 and 50.0 mm). Item Description Item Description [Copy Protect Type] Select a type of copy protect to be printed. [Detail Settings] Press this button to specify the color, density, and text size of copy protect to be printed. [Position] Press this button to specify the angle and printing order of copy protect to be printed. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-25 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Copy Protect Type Detail Settings Press [Detail Settings] to specify the text color, density, background pattern, and other items. Position In the Copy Protect setting screen, press [Position] to specify the print position by angling the selected stamp or leaving a space. Configure the following settings. - Setting an angle of the copy protect within the area (+45 degrees/0 degrees/-45 degrees) - Inserting a space between copy protects - Reordering printing order of copy protect - Deleting the copy protect or space Item Description [Registered Stamp] Press this button to apply the stamp images that were pre-registered with the utility software. • Use Copy Protection Utility to register stamps. For details, refer to the relevant utility software manual. • Registered stamps may require multiple areas depending on their contents. [Preset Stamp] Press this button to apply a standard string such as Invalid Copy, Copy, or Private as a preset stamp. One stamp requires one area. [Date/Time] Press this button to apply the date and time the document was registered. • [Date Format] requires one area. • [Time Format] requires one area. [Other] Press this button to specify the job number, serial number, and distribution control number the document was registered with. • [Job Number]: The job number for the print job is printed. A job number requires one area. • [Serial Number]: The serial number assigned to this machine is printed. The serial number requires one area. The serial number is assigned at the time of shipment of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative. • [Distribution Control Number]: The entered number of copies is printed. A distribution control number requires one area. Enter the distribution control number, and select "Number Only" or "Put zeros in front(total 8-digits)" as the output format. Item Description [Text/Background Color] Select the text and background colors from black, magenta, or cyan. [Density] Select the density from the light, standard, or dark. [Copy Protect Pattern] Select the pattern and contrast to be applied when the copy is reproduced. Select the patter from Emboss Text or Emboss Background. [Text Size] Select the printing text size from Minimal, Standard, or Large. [Pattern Overwrite] Select pattern printing from Front (Overwrite) or Back. [Background Pattern] Select the background pattern from eight types. Item Description [Change Pos./Delete] Select a copy protect to be changed, and then press [Change Position]/[Insert Space]/[Delete]. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-26 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.4 7.4.11 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard To prevent unauthorized copying, this function prints a text such as "Invalid Copy" or "Private" or information such as Date/Time on all pages of paper as a copy guard (copy inhibit information) when printing. A page with a copy guard printed on it cannot be copied or saved in a User Box. Configure the setting for the copy guard to be applied. You can apply up to 6 copy guards. For Copy Guard, you can configure the following settings. Copy Guard Type Item Description [Copy Guard Type] Select a type of copy guard. [Detail Settings] Specify the color, pattern, and text size of the selected copy guard. REPORT Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft REPORT Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft REPORT Item Description [Preset Stamp] Press this button to apply a standard string such as Invalid Copy, Copy, or Private as a preset stamp. One stamp requires one area. [Date/Time] Press this button to apply the date and time the document was registered. • [Date Format] requires one area. • [Time Format] requires one area. [Other] Press this button to specify the job number, serial number, and distribution control number the document was registered with. • [Job Number]: The job number for the print job is printed. A job number requires one area. • [Serial Number]: The serial number assigned to this machine is printed. The serial number requires one area. The serial number is assigned at the time of shipment of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative. • [Distribution Control Number]: The entered number of copies is printed. A distribution control number requires one area. Enter the distribution control number, and select "Number Only" or "Put zeros in front(total 8-digits)" as the output format. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-27 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Detail Settings Press [Detail Settings] to specify the text color, contrast, background pattern, and other items. 7.4.12 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy To prevent unauthorized copying, this function configures stamp settings for a text such as "Invalid Copy" or "Private" or information such as Date/Time on all pages of paper, and prints with an embedded password. When a sheet of paper with an embedded password is copied, scanned, or saved in a User Box, the currently running job is suspended, and the password entry screen is displayed. In this case, enter the password to carry out the desired operation. To enable Password Copy, select [Yes], and press [Password] to specify the password. Reference - For confirmation, enter the password twice in the control panel. If a password is specified, you can configure a stamp. You can apply up to 6 stamps. Item Description [Text/Background Color] Select the text and background colors from black, magenta, or cyan. [Copy Guard Pattern] Specify the contrast of a copy guard. [Emboss Background] is selected for the pattern. [Text Size] Select the printing text size from Minimal, Standard, or Large. [Background Pattern] Select the background pattern from eight types. Item Description [Stamp Type] Select the type of stamps. [Detail Settings] Specify the color, pattern, and text size of the selected stamp. Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft REPORT REPORT Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft REPORT 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-28 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.4 Stamp Type Detail Settings Press [Detail Settings] to specify the text color, contrast, background pattern, and other items. 7.4.13 Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat Text or an image is repeatedly printed on all pages. Copy Protect stamps are used to prevent recopying. However, Stamp Repeat stamps can be recopied. You can apply up to eight strings or stamps. If you set the angle of strings or stamps to 45 degrees (or -45 degrees), however, the number of areas in which you can place strings or stamps is limited to 4. In the Stamp Repeat screen, you can configure the following settings. Item Description [Preset Stamp] Press this button to apply a standard string such as Invalid Copy, Copy, or Private as a preset stamp. One stamp requires one area. [Date/Time] Press this button to apply the date and time the document was registered. • [Date Format] requires one area. • [Time Format] requires one area. [Other] Press this button to specify the job number, serial number, and distribution control number the document was registered with. • [Job Number]: The job number for the print job is printed. A job number requires one area. • [Serial Number]: The serial number assigned to this machine is printed. The serial number requires one area. The serial number is assigned at the time of shipment of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative. • [Distribution Control Number]: The entered number of copies is printed. A distribution control number requires one area. Enter the distribution control number, and select "Number Only" or "Put zeros in front(total 8-digits)" as the output format. Item Description [Text/Background Color] Select the text and background colors from black, magenta, or cyan. [Password Copy Pattern] Specify the contrast of a pattern. [Emboss Background] is selected for the pattern. [Text Size] Select the printing text size from Minimal, Standard, or Large. [Background Pattern] Select the background pattern from eight types. Item Description [Stamp Repeat Type] Select a type of stamp repeat to be printed. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-29 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Stamp Repeat Type Detail Settings Press [Detail Settings] to specify the text color, density, and other items. Position In the Stamp Repeat setting screen, press [Position] to determine the print position of the stamp, for example, by angling the stamp or leaving a space. Configure the following settings. - Setting an angle of the stamp repeat within the area (+45 degrees/0 degrees/45 degrees) - Inserting a space between stamp repeats - Reordering printing order of stamp repeat - Deleting the stamp repeat or space [Detail Settings] Specify the color, density, and text size of stamp repeat to be printed. [Position] Select the angle or printing order of stamp repeat to be printed. Item Description Item Description [Registered Stamp] Press this button to apply the stamp images that were pre-registered with the utility software. • Use Copy Protection Utility to register stamps. For details, refer to the relevant utility software manual. • Registered stamps may require multiple areas depending on their contents. [Preset Stamp] Press this button to apply a standard string such as Invalid Copy, Copy, or Private as a preset stamp. One stamp requires one area. [Date/Time] Press this button to apply the date and time the document was registered. • [Date Format] requires one area. • [Time Format] requires one area. [Other] Press this button to specify the job number, serial number, and distribution control number the document was registered with. • [Job Number]: The job number for the print job is printed. A job number requires one area. • [Serial Number]: The serial number assigned to this machine is printed. The serial number requires one area. The serial number is assigned at the time of shipment of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative. • [Distribution Control Number]: The entered number of copies is printed. A distribution control number requires one area. Enter the distribution control number, and select "Number Only" or "Put zeros in front(total 8-digits)" as the output format. Item Description [Text Color] Select the text and background colors from black, magenta, or cyan. [Density] Select the density from the light, standard, or dark. [Text Size] Select the printing text size from Minimal, Standard, or Large. [Pattern Overwrite] Select pattern printing from [Front (Overwrite)], [Transparent], or [Back]. Item Description [Change Pos./Delete] Select Stamp Repeat to be changed, and press [Change Position]/[Insert Space]/[Delete] to specify. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-30 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.4 7.4.14 Stamp/Composition - Header/Footer Configure settings to insert the header or footer. To insert the header or footer, you must register their contents in Administrator Settings in advance. Press Check/Change Temporarily to temporarily change and print the contents of the registered header and footer. dReference For details on how to register the header or footer, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Check/Change Temporarily In the Header/Footer setting screen, press [Check/Change Temporarily] to change the registered header or footer. Item Description [Recall Header/ Footer] Select the desired ones from the registered headers and footers. [Check/Change Temporarily] Press this button to check or change the selected header or footer. For details, refer to page 7-30. [Reset] Press this button to cancel the use of the temporarily changed header or footer. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-31 7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.4.15 Stamp/Composition - Registered Overlay Settings A registered image is overlaid and printed on the specified pages. Select [Yes] to use an overlay image. Reference - Overlay images can be registered in Copy mode as well as in User Box mode. An overlay image that was registered in Copy mode can be used for printing a document in the User Box. An overlay image that was registered from an image in the User Box can be used in Copy mode. dReference For details on how to register an overlay image, refer to page 7-77. Item Description [Header Settings], [Footer Settings] Specify whether to print the header and footer. Press [Print] to configure the following setting. • [Text]: Specify a header or footer text in the touch panel. • [Date/Time]: Configure the date and time settings for the header or footer. • [Other]: Configure setting to add the distribution control number, job number, or serial number to the header or footer. The serial number is assigned at the time of shipment of this machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative. [Pages] Select whether to print the header and footer on all pages or the first page only. [Text Details] Specify the details of text to be printed. • [Text Color]: Select the printing color from black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan, or magenta. • [Text Size]: Select the printing text size from 8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt, or 14 pt. • [Text Type]: Select the font type from Times Roman or Helvetica. Item Description [Recall Overlay Image] Specify whether to print a registered overlay image on the front or back side. Press an item to select an overlay image and configures its setting. For details, refer to page 7-32. [Pages] Select whether to print the selected overlay image on all pages or the first page only. 7 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-32 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.4 Overlay Setting Select an overlay image and configure it settings. You can also preview the image. Reference - The following shows three methods for composing an overlay. – [Transparent]: Increases the brightness of the overlay image to be superimposed. This setting prevents an original from being hidden by the composed overlay image. – [Background Composition (Original)]: Composes the original as the background. The overlay image is superimposed on the original when they are printed. – [Back]: Composes the overlay image as the background. The original is superimposed on the overlay image when they are printed. Item Description [Thumbnail View]/[Display Name] In the thumb-nail view, you can check overlay images. In the Display Name mode, you can check overlay images using their file names. Select the desired overlay image. [Detail Settings] Press this button to specify how to compose an overlay image. • [Density]: Use the keypad to enter the density of an overlay image (using a value between 20 to 100%). • [Color]: Select the color of overlay image from full color, black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan, or magenta. • [Composition]: Select Transparent, Background Composition (Original) or Back to specify how to compose an overlay image. [Image Details] Press this button to check the details of the overlay image including the preview image, size, and color. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-33 7.5 Send 7 7.5 Send 7.5.1 Overview of the Transmission Settings You can use the following functions to send a document saved in a User Box. Using these functions enables you to easily send data by only registering destinations in this machine without transferring data via computers. Description of the Send tab Press [Send] to display the following screen. The available setting items for [Transmission Settings] are as follows. dReference For details on other items, refer to page 7-4. Item Description Fax Sends document data by fax. E-mail Sends document data as an attachment file of an E-mail. Internet Fax Sends document data as an attachment file of an E-mail via an intranet or Internet. IP Address Fax Sends document data to the destination specified with the IP address (host name) or E-mail address of the destination. PC (SMB) Sends document data to the shared folder in the specified computer. FTP Sends document data to the specified FTP server. WebDAV Sends document data to the specified server via network. No. Item Description 1 [Send] Configure the destination and other settings to send the selected documents. If you have selected multiple documents, [Document Settings] and [Application] are not available. (p. 7-35) 2 [Bind TX] Configure the printing order or other setting to print two or more document selected. (p. 7-36) 1 2 7 Send 7-34 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.5 Send Press [Send] to display the following screen. You can configure transmission destination and additional functions. Bind TX Press [Bind TX] to display the following screen after specifying the bind order. Some destination types or function are not displayed since multiple documents are sent. No. Item Description 1 Configure the destinations Configure the destinations. (p. 7-37) 2 Configure the functions Configure the functions that can be added when transmitting documents. (p. 7-47) 1 2 No. Item Description 1 Configure the destinations Configure the destinations. (p. 7-37) 2 Configure the functions Configure the functions that can be added when transmitting documents. (p. 7-47) 1 2 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-35 7.5 Send 7 7.5.2 Transmission Settings Press [Send] to specify destinations and functions that can be added when transmitting documents. Reference - [Direct Input] is not displayed when Manual Destination Input is set to Restrict in [Security Settings] in Administrator Settings. No. Item Description 1 [Address Book] Press this button to select the recipient from the pre-registered destinations. 2 [Direct Input] Press this button to directly enter unregistered destinations. 3 [Job History] Select the recipients from the transmission log. 4 [Address Search] Press this button to search for the registered address when the LDAP server is used. 5 [Group] Press this button to list the registered group addresses. 6 [Search] Press this button to search the address book for destination. 7 [Document Settings] Press this button to specify the resolution, file type, or color when sending a document. 8 [Communication Settings] Press this button to configure communication settings. 9 [Application] Press this button to specify additional functions such as Stamp or Page Print. 1 2 3 4 9 5 6 7 8 7 Send 7-36 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.5 7.5.3 Combine Document Order After selecting documents, press [Bind TX] to display the binding order selection screen. Documents will be printed in the order they are displayed in this screen. When this screen appears, the documents are displayed in the order they were selected. Reference - To change the order, select a reorder source document, then a reorder destination document. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-37 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7.6.1 Address Book - Search Search for transmission destinations. The following methods are available to search for the registered destinations. Address Type Press this button to search for the destination by address type that was specified when the destination is registered. dReference For details on the [Default Address Book] setting, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. The [Search] screen is displayed when you press [Search] if [Default Address Book] is set to [Index] in [User Settings] - [Custom Display Settings] - [Scan/Fax Settings] in the Utility menu. No. Item Description 1 [Address Type] Registers addresses by registered type. 1 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-38 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.6 Index The Index screen appears by index that was specified when they were registered. The [Index] screen is displayed when you press [Search] if [Default Address Book] is set to [Address Type] in [User Settings] - [Custom Display Settings] - [Scan/Fax Settings] in the Utility menu. Detail Search Enter the address name or a part of the address to search for the destination address. Select either [Name] or [Address], and enter an index. No. Item Description 1 [Index] Displays addresses by registered index. 1 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-39 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Detail Search - Search options In the Detail Search screen, select a condition to display search options. Select the additional search conditions, and press [OK]. Reference - To configure whether to display the search option screen and options displayed on that screen, use [Search Option Settings] in the setting menu. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 7.6.2 Direct Input Directly enter an unregistered destination as a recipient. Reference - When Manual Destination Input is set to Individual Management in [Security Settings] in Administrator Settings, Direct Input is not available except for Fax. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-40 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.6 7.6.3 Direct Input - Fax Enter the fax number in the touch panel. Next Destination Press this button to continuously specify another destination. When the Confirm Address (TX) function is specified: You are prompted to enter the fax number again after pressing [OK]. Enter the fax number, and press [Start]. Reference - [Next Destination] can be selected on the second input screen. dReference For details on the Confirm Address (TX) function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 7.6.4 Direct Input - E-mail Enter the E-mail address in the touch panel. Reference - You can register the frequently used user names or domain names and call them when sending E-mail messages. Before you use this function, you must register the prefix and suffix in Administrator Settings. For details on the prefix and suffix, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. Next Destination Press this button to continuously specify another destination. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-41 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.6.5 Direct Input - Internet Fax Enter the E-mail address in the touch panel. Reference - You can register the frequently used user names or domain names and call them when sending E-mail messages. Before you use this function, you must register the prefix and suffix in Administrator Settings. For details on the prefix and suffix, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. Next Destination Press this button to continuously specify another destination. Receiver RX Ability Select settings that are receivable in the Internet Fax destination. You can select multiple receivable settings. Item Description [Compression Type] Select JPEG Color, JPEG (Grayscale), MMR, MR, or MH. [Paper Size] Select A3, B4 or A4. [Resolution] 600e600 dpi (Ultra Fine), 400e400 dpi (Super Fine), 200e200 dpi (Fine), or 200e100 dpi (Standard). 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-42 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.6 7.6.6 Direct Input - IP Address Fax Enter the IP Address Fax destination. 7.6.7 Direct Input - PC (SMB) Directly enter the PC (SMB) address. Host Name Specify the host name or IP address of the destination in the touch panel. File Path Enter the path of the destination folder in the touch panel. User Name Enter the login user name in the touch panel. Password Enter the login user password in the touch panel. Item Description [Address] Enter the IP address (host name) or E-mail address of the destination. [Port Number] Use the keypad to enter the sending port number (using a value from 1 to 65535). [Destination Machine Type] Select [Color] when the destination machine supports color printing. [Next Destination] Press this button to continuously specify another destination. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-43 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Reference Check the folder information on the destination computer. Next Destination Press this button to continuously specify another destination. 7.6.8 Direct Input - FTP Directly enter the FTP address. Host Name Specify the host name or IP address of the destination in the touch panel. File Path Enter the path of the destination folder in the touch panel. User Name Enter the login user name in the touch panel. Press [Anonymous] to enter "anonymous". Password Enter the login user password in the touch panel. Detail Settings Press this button to configure the more detailed settings. Next Destination Press this button to continuously specify another destination. Item Description [Port Number] Enter a port number. [PASV] Specify whether to use the PASV mode. [Proxy] Specify whether to use a proxy server. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-44 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.6 7.6.9 Direct Input - WebDAV Directly enter the WebDAV destination. Host Name Specify the host name or IP address of the destination in the touch panel. File Path Enter the path of the destination folder in the touch panel. User Name Enter the login user name in the touch panel. Password Enter the login user password in the touch panel. Detail Settings Press this button to configure the more detailed settings. Next Destination Press this button to continuously specify another destination. Item Description [Port Number] Enter a port number. [Proxy] Specify whether to use a proxy server. [SSL Settings] Specify whether to use SSL for sending. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-45 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.6.10 Job History Job History displays the latest five fax destinations that this machine have sent faxes to. You can select destinations from this history. 7.6.11 Address Search The [Address Search] tab is displayed when the LDAP server is configured in Administrator Settings. Reference - For details on the LDAP server setting, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator] - Enabling LDAP. - The display position of [Address Search] tab varies depending on user settings. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-46 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.6 7.6.12 LDAP Search - Search Enter a search keyword and press [Start Search] to search for the destination address in the specified LDAP server. 7.6.13 LDAP Search - Advanced Search Specify multiple search conditions to search for the target address. Name Enter the name in the touch panel. E-mail Addr. Enter the E-mail address in the touch panel. Fax Number Enter the fax number in the touch panel. Last Name Enter the last name in the touch panel. First Name Enter the first name in the touch panel. City Enter the city name in the touch panel. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-47 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Company Name Enter the company name in the touch panel. Department Enter the department in the touch panel. OR/AND/STARTS WITH/ENDS WITH Select the search condition from OR, AND, STARTS WITH, or ENDS WITH. When not specifying any conditions, press [No]. 7.6.14 Overview of the Document Settings Configure document settings such as the resolution or file type. 7.6.15 Document Settings - Resolution Select the resolution for sending faxes. Reference - This function is not available when performing Bind TX. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-48 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.6 7.6.16 Document Settings - File Type Specify the file type of data being transmitted. File Type The available file types are as follows. Reference - JPEG cannot be selected when binding and sending multiple documents. - If you select JPEG, [Page Separation] is automatically selected and set to [1 Every X Page(s)] in Scan Setting. - You can specify the compression format when saving a TIFF file in color. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Item Description [PDF] Saves data in PDF format. [Compact PDF] Further compressed PDF file. [TIFF] Saves data in TIFF format. [JPEG] Saves data in JPEG format. [XPS] Saves data in XPS format. [Compact XPS] Saves data in further compressed XPS file. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-49 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Encryption If the [PDF] or [Compact PDF] is selected for the file format, the encryption level can be specified. Encryption - Detail Settings Configure the detailed permission settings when the document permission is specified in [Encryption]. Item Description [Encryption Level] Select the encryption level. [Password] Configure this item when you select the password for the encryption type. Enter the password necessary to open encrypted data (up to 32 characters). For confirmation, enter the password twice. [Document Permissions] Configure this item when you select the password for the encryption type. Enter the password necessary to change document permissions (up to 32 characters). For confirmation, enter the password twice. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-50 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.6 Press [Forward ] to further configure Changes Allowed settings. Item Description [Printing Allowed] Select whether to allow or restrict printing data. [Low Resolution] appears when the Encryption Level is set to [High level]. [Enable copying of text, images and other content] Select whether to allow or restrict extracting text images. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-51 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Stamp Composition Press this button to select how to compose the contents to be added in Stamp/Composition. Outline PDF Outline PDF can be selected when Compact PDF is selected for the file type. This function performs outline processing for characters, ensuring a smooth display image. It can also be edited using an application such as Adobe Illustrator. dReference This function enables you to specify the accuracy of outline processing when creating outline PDF data. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Item Description [Changes Allowed] Select the permission level about changes to the document, including signing, entering, or commenting data. Item Description [Image] Select this setting to insert the text as an image. [Text] Select this setting to insert the text as text. • The date, time, page number, header, or footer is composed as text. • The stamp is composed as an image. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-52 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.6 Scan Setting Specify a collection of data. 7.6.17 Document Settings - Color Configure color settings to send documents. Data that has been saved using this machine contains the full color data even if it is saved in gray scale or black and white; therefore, it can be changed to full color when it is sent. Reference - This function is not available when performing Bind TX. - A document that has been saved in gray scale or black and white using a different machine does not contain the full color data; therefore, it cannot be changed to full color when it is sent. Item Description [Multi Page] Creates all the scanned originals as one file. This item cannot be specified together with the JPEG file type. [Page Separation] Separates the scanned data to save every specified number of pages to one file. Use the keypad to enter the number of pages to be saved in one file. • [Page Separation] cannot be selected when binding and sending multiple documents. [E-mail Attachment Method] Specify the method to use to attach a file to an E-mail when Page Separation is selected. • [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail]: Attaches all files to one E-mail. • [One (1) File per E-Mail]: Attaches one file to one E-mail. Item Description [Use Existing Color Setting] Sends documents with the color setting used when they were saved. [Full Color] Sends documents in full color. [Gray Scale] Sends documents in gray scale. [Black] Sends documents in black and white. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-53 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.6.18 Overview of the Communication Settings Configure communication lines, digital signature, and other communication settings. 7.6.19 Communication Settings - Line Setting Description of Line Settings Configure line settings for fax transmission. Overseas TX Faxes are sent to locations with poor communication conditions at a lower baud rate. Reference - This function cannot be used together with the following functions. – Polling TX – Polling RX – Bulletin board 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-54 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.6 ECM OFF The Error Correction Mode (ECM) is turned off when sending data. ECM is an error correction mode defined by ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector). Fax machines equipped with the ECM feature communicate with each other, confirming that the data sent is free of errors. Thus, communication can be made free from disturbances due to line noises, etc. If noises frequently occur, it may take a slightly long time to complete a communication compared with ECM OFF. After sending has been ended, this machine automatically returns to ECM ON. Reference - This machine sends faxes in ECM ON unless ECM OFF is specified. - This function cannot be used together with the following functions. – Polling RX – Polling TX – V.34 OFF – Bulletin board registration – Bulletin board polling reception V.34 OFF V34 is a communication mode used for super G3 fax communication. When the remote machine or this machine is connected to a telephone line via PBX, however, you may not establish a communication in the super G3 mode depending on telephone line conditions. In this case, it is recommended that you turn V34 off to send data. After sending has been completed, this machine automatically returns to the V34 mode. Reference - This function cannot be used together with the following functions. – Polling RX – Polling TX – Bulletin board registration – Bulletin board polling reception – ECM OFF Check Dest. & Send The specified fax number is compared with the remote fax number (CSI) and data is sent only when those fax numbers match. If they do not match, the communication will fail; therefore preventing a sending error. Reference - To use the Check Dest. & Send, you must register the local fax number in the remote machine in advance. Select Line You can specify [Line 1] or [Line 2] for sending data when two optional Fax Kit are installed. Specify the line used for transmission. If you select [Not Set], either Line 1 or Line 2 whichever is not busy is used for transmission. If both lines are idle, Line 1 is used first. Reference - You cannot specify a line when [Line 2 Setting] is set to [RX Only] in [Multi Line Settings]. For details on the Multi Line Usage function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. - To use two lines as external and extension lines, be sure to specify the line to be used. If you select [Not Set], a sending failure may occur. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-55 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.6.20 Communication Settings - E-Mail Settings E-mail Settings Specify the document name, subject, From address and message body for sending e-mail messages. Document Name The name of the file to be saved is displayed. This document name can also be specified in the [File Document] screen. The document name whichever is specified later will be applied to this column. You can enter up to 30 characters. Subject The text specified in the Utility menu is automatically displayed. To change the contents, press [Direct Input]. You can enter up to 64 characters. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-56 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.6 From Displays the E-mail address of the administrator specified in the Utility menu. Reference - The E-mail address of this machine is used for Internet faxing. - You cannot directly enter the address when [Change the "From" Address] is set to Restrict in Administrator Settings - [System Settings] - [Restrict User Access] - [Restrict Access to Job Settings]. For details on the [Change the "From" Address] setting, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Body The E-mail body specified in the Utility menu is displayed. To change the contents, press [Direct Input]. You can enter up to 256 characters. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-57 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.6.21 Communication Settings - URL Notification Setting URL Notification Use the URL Notification function to specify the E-mail address to be notified about the completion of a job and data location. The URL contains information for linking to a User Box. Click the link in the text to directly move to the User Box screen. Reference - A destination for the User Box in the main unit, FTP, PC (SMB), and WebDAV operation can be specified for the destination in URL Notification Setting. - URL Notification Setting does not function when sending E-mails or faxes. - If the authentication mode or User Box password is enabled, the password input screen corresponding to each respective authentication status appears. On completion of all authentication processing, the User Box screen appears. Detail Search You can search for E-mail addresses from the registered destinations. Enter the address name or a part of the address to search for the destination address. Select either [Name] or [Destination], and enter an index. Direct Input Enter the E-mail address in the touch panel. Reference - You can register the frequently used user names or domain names and call them when sending E-mail messages. Before you use this function, you must register the prefix and suffix in Administrator Settings. For details on the prefix and suffix, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-58 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.6 7.6.22 Communication Settings - Communication Method Settings Specify how to send or receive data. Timer transmission (Timer TX) Specify the sending time. Transmitting faxes in discount telephone rate hours such as late at night or early in the morning will reduce the cost. Use the keypad to specify the communication starting time. Reference - It is specified in hours and minutes. - You cannot specify the date. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-59 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 Password transmission (Password TX) Use this function to send a document by attaching a password. If the recipient's fax machine is set to closed network reception, the sender's fax machine should transmit the same password as used for the closed network reception. Reference - You can use this function only when the remote machine is our model and supports the closed network reception (with password) function. - Use the keypad to enter the password. F-Code transmission (F-Code TX) This function allows you send documents to a specific User Box of the remote machine by entering the SUB address and the password. F-Code TX can be used for the confidential transmission and relay transmission functions. Reference - To use the F-Code for transmission, the remote machine must support the F-Code function. Item Description Confidential TX Documents are sent to the Confidential RX User Box of the remote machine. Enter the destination User Box number in the SUB Address box and the confidential transmission password in the Password box. Relay TX Documents are sent to the Relay Distribution User Box of the remote machine when the remote machine supports the relay distribution function. Enter the Relay Distribution User Box number in the SUB Address box and the password in the Password box. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-60 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.6 7.6.23 Communication Settings - E-mail Encryption This item is displayed when [S/MIME Communication Settings] is set to [ON] in Administrator Settings - [Network Settings] - [E-Mail Settings]. Specify whether to encrypt E-mails to be sent from this machine. dReference For details on the S/MIME Communication Settings, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 7.6.24 Communication Settings - Digital Signature This item is displayed when [S/MIME Communication Settings] is set to [ON] in Administrator Settings - [Network Settings] - [E-Mail Settings]. Select whether to add a digital signature to E-mails to be sent from this machine. Reference - You may not be able to add a digital signature or you may be forced to add a digital signature depending on the S/MIME communication settings. dReference For details on the S/MIME Communication Settings, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 7.6.25 Communication Settings - Fax Header Settings Specify whether to attach sender information (TTI) when sending documents. Select the sender name from the sender name list. Reference - To register the contents of the header information to be added to the original, use [Header Information] in the Utility menu. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. - To register how the header information will be added, use [Header/Footer Position] in the Utility menu. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-61 7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7 7.6.26 Overview of the Application settings Configure the other settings (Stamp/Composition, and Send & Print) that are available for sending documents. 7.6.27 Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-21. 7.6.28 Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-22. 7.6.29 Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-23. 7.6.30 Application - Stamp/Composition - Header/Footer For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-30. 7 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) 7-62 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.6 7.6.31 Application - Send & Print Specify whether to print documents while being sent. Also configure print settings. Item Description [Copies:] Use the keypad to enter the number of copies. A number between 1 and 9999 can be specified. [Simplex/Duplex] Select 1-Sided or 2-Sided. [Staple] Select whether to staple the printed sheets. [Staple - Position Setting] If you select the type of stapling, specify the position. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-63 7.7 Filing Settings (Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes) 7 7.7 Filing Settings (Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes) 7.7.1 Overview of the Filing Settings You can rename or delete documents saved in a Public, Personal, or Group User Box so that the documents in the box are organized. The available functions are as follows. Description of the Filing Settings tab Press [Filing Settings] to display the following screen. The available setting items for [Filing Settings] are as follows. dReference For details on other items, refer to page 7-4. Item Description Delete Deletes an unnecessary document such as a document that you have printed or sent. Edit Name Renames a saved document. Move Moves the data of a saved document to another Public, Personal, or Group User Box. Copy Copies the data of a saved document to another Public, Personal, or Group User Box. Save in external memory Saves a document from a User Box into the external memory, which is connected to this machine. Document Details Enables you to check the date and time a document has been saved as well as a preview image. No. Item Description 1 [Delete] Deletes the selected document. 2 [Edit Name] Renames the selected document. 3 [Move] Configure settings to move the selected document. 4 [Copy] Configure settings to copy the selected document. 5 [Save to External Memory.] Saves the selected document in the external memory. 2 3 4 5 1 Filing Settings (Pub 7 lic, Personal, or Group User Boxes) 7-64 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.7 7.7.2 Deleting documents You can delete unnecessary files, for example the files you have already printed. You can select multiple files and delete them at the same time. After checking document details, press [Delete]. 7.7.3 Edit Name Renames a saved document. Enter a new name in the touch panel. Reference - The new document name will be used as the file name when it is set. Note that when you rename the document that you plan to send, consider the naming and other conditions forced by the destination server. - If necessary, you can rename the document just before you send it. 7.7.4 Moving documents Move a saved document to another User Box. For the destination User Box, a Public, Personal, or Group User Box can be selected. Select the destination User Box, check document data, and then press Start on the control panel or [Start] in the touch panel. Reference - The contents displayed in a Personal or Group User Box vary depending on the logged in user. - You do not need to enter the password even if it is specified in the destination User Box. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-65 7.7 Filing Settings (Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes) 7 7.7.5 Copy Copy the data of a saved document to another User Box. For the destination User Box, a Public , Personal, or Group User Box can be selected. Select the destination User Box, check document data, and then press Start on the control panel or [Start] in the touch panel. Reference - The contents displayed in a Personal or Group User Box vary depending on the logged in user. - You do not need to enter the password even if it is specified in the destination User Box. 7.7.6 Save in external memory You can save a document stored in a User Box to the external memory. Pressing [Document Settings], to configure the settings of a document to be saved. Reference - For information on the external memory, refer to page 7-98. - Multiple documents can be saved collectively. - A document cannot be renamed while it is being saved. Before saving a document, change the file name as appropriate. Filing Settings (Pub 7 lic, Personal, or Group User Boxes) 7-66 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.7 Document Settings You can specify the resolution, file type, and color of the document to be saved. If you select multiple documents, settings are reflected in all documents. Document Settings - Resolution Select the resolution of the document to be saved. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-67 7.7 Filing Settings (Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes) 7 Document Settings -File Type When specifying the file type, select [Yes]. The available setting items are as follows. Document Settings - Color For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-52. Item Description [File Type] Select the file type for the file to be saved. [Encryption] If the PDF or Compact PDF is selected for the file format, the encryption level can be specified. For details, refer to page 7-49. [Outline PDF] Configure this item when you select Compact PDF for the file type. For details, refer to page 7-51. Filing Settings (Pub 7 lic, Personal, or Group User Boxes) 7-68 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.7 7.7.7 Document Details Check the details of a saved document in the touch panel. Displaying detailed information Select a document, and press [Document Details] to check. The following information is displayed. Preview In the Document Details screen, press [Preview] to check the preview image of the saved document. You can view the image at full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. After you have changed the display size, use the scroll bars located in the right and the bottom of the image to view to the desired portion. Reference - For a document with multiple pages, only the image of the first page can be viewed. Item Description [Registered Time] Displays the date and time the document was registered. [User Name] Displays the user name or mode (SCAN, COPY, or PRINT) by which the document was registered. [Document Name] Displays the name of the document. [No. of Pages] Displays the number of pages in the document. [Job No.] Displays the job number when the document was registered. [ ][ ] If multiple documents are selected, use [ ] or [ ] to switch them. [Preview] Press this button to change to the Preview screen. For details, refer to page 7-68. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-69 7.8 Application 7 7.8 Application 7.8.1 Overview of the Application settings You can edit a document saved in a Public, Personal, or Group User Box by changing the order of or delete pages in the document. You can also register the image of a saved document to be overlaid on the printed data. The available functions are as follows. Description of the Application tab Press [Application] to display the following screen. The available setting items for [Application Settings] are as follows. dReference For details on other items, refer to page 7-4. Item Description Edit Document Deletes, rotates, or moves the selected page. Register Overlay Registers the image of a saved document to be overlaid on the printed data. Document Details Enables you to check the date and time a document has been saved as well as a preview image. No. Item Description 1 [Edit Document] Deletes, rotates, or moves the selected page. 2 [Register Overlay] Registers the image of a saved document to be overlaid on the printed data. 1 2 7 Application 7-70 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.8 7.8.2 Edit Document Select a document and press [Edit Document]. The Edit Document screen is displayed. To view the image of a document page before editing it, press the [Preview /Set Range]. For details, refer to page 7-75. Edit Document - Delete Page You can delete a specific page from a saved document. For example, you can delete blank pages to reduce the amount of data. 0 If you delete the only page of a document, the whole document will be deleted. 0 You will be unable to undo the deletion or restore the deleted pages because they are overwritten when they are deleted. If you will need the unchanged version of the document, make a backup copy of the document in advance. For details on how to copy a document, refer to page 7-65. 1 Select a page to be deleted, and then press [Delete Page]. % To select only odd pages, press [Odd Page]. % To select only even pages, press [Even Page]. % After selecting [Odd Page] or [Even Page], you can use a page key to select the desired page or cancel the selection. 2 Check that the specified page has been deleted from the screen. % At this time, the specified page is not deleted from document data. % In this example, the specified pages (pages 1, 3, and 4) have been deleted. 3 To completely delete the pages, press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. % To cancel the deletion, press [Cancel] to return to the Application screen. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-71 7.8 Application 7 4 Check the information of the displayed screen. To delete the pages, select [Save]. % To cancel the deletion, press [Do Not Save] to return to the Edit Document screen. The selected pages are deleted and the document is saved. Edit Document - Rotate Page You can rotate the specified pages in a saved document. When a double-sided original has been scanned, the top and bottom may be reversed page by page or the orientation may be different depending on the original orientation. In this case, you can rotate selected pages so that the whole document will be viewed more easily. 0 You will be unable to restore the pages because they are overwritten when they are rotated. If you will need the unchanged version of the document, make a backup copy of the document in advance. For details on how to copy a document, refer to page 7-65. 1 Select a page to be rotated, and then press [Rotate Page]. % To select only odd pages, press [Odd Page]. % To select only even pages, press [Even Page]. % After selecting [Odd Page] or [Even Page], you can use a page key to select the desired page or cancel the selection. The preview images of the selected pages are displayed together with the rotation setting screen. 7 Application 7-72 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.8 2 While checking the preview image, select the rotation angle. % You can select a rotation angle from left 90 degrees, right 90 degrees, and 180 degrees. % In this example, [Left 90°] is selected. 3 Press [OK]. 4 If you are sure to rotate the selected pages, press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. % In the example, the specified pages (pages 1 and 2) have been rotated. % At this time, the document data is not changed. 5 Check the information of the displayed screen. To rotate the pages, select [Save]. % To cancel the rotation, press [Do Not Save] to return to the Edit Document screen. The selected pages are rotated and the document is saved. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-73 7.8 Application 7 Edit Document - Move Page You can change the order of the pages within a saved document by moving the specified pages. 0 You cannot rotate the only page of a document. 0 You will be unable to restore the pages because they are overwritten when they are moved. If you will need the unchanged version of the document, make a backup copy of the document in advance. For details on how to copy a document, refer to page 7-65. 0 You can directly enter the page number you want the selected page move to. This is useful when a document consists of many pages. For details, refer to page 7-75. 1 Select a page to be moved, and then press [Move Page]. % Only one page can be moved at a time. To move two or more pages, repeat the above steps for each of the pages you want to move. % The example demonstrates how to move page 6 to between pages 2 and 3. The destination setting screen is displayed. 2 While checking the screen, select the moving position. % To move the selected page to the beginning of the document, press [Top]. % To move the selected page to the end of the document, press [Last Page]. % To move the selected page to between pages, press between them. 3 Press [OK]. 7 Application 7-74 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.8 4 If you are sure to move the selected page, press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. % At this time, the document data is not changed. 5 Check the information of the displayed screen. To move the page, select [Save]. % To cancel the movement, press [Do Not Save] to return to the Edit Document screen. The selected page is moved and the document is saved. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-75 7.8 Application 7 Preview/Set Range You can specify a range of pages and check preview images when the selected document consists of multiple pages. You can also change the display size. Preview/Specify by Input This item is displayed when [Move Page] is selected. When too many pages are saved, specify the destination page by entering the page number. The following shows a procedure to specify the destination of the move operation. 1 In the Move Page screen, press [Preview]. The Preview/Specify by Input screen is displayed. Item Description [ Prev. Page] Moves to the previous page. [Next Page ] Press this button to move to the next page. [Zoom] You can view the image at full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. After you have changed the display size, use the scroll bars located in the right and the bottom of the image to view to the desired portion. [Set Page Range] Specify the range of pages to be checked. Use the keypad to enter a number in [From:] and [To:] respectively. Then press [Display Page] to preview the specified starting or ending page. To set [From:] or [To:] to the page being previewed, select the button and then press [Match Display]. 7 Application 7-76 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.8 2 Display the previous or next page of the destination. % Press [ Prev. Page] or [Next Page ], or use the keypad to enter a page number and press [View]. % You can use [Zoom] to view the selected pages at full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. After you have changed the display size, use the scroll bars located in the right and the bottom of the image to view to the desired portion. 3 Specify the insertion position. % To move before the displayed page, press [Before]. % To move after the displayed page, press [After]. 4 Press [OK]. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-77 7.8 Application 7 7.8.3 Register Overlay Register a document saved in a User Box as an overlay image. You can overlay the selected image to a printed document using [Stamp/Composition] in the Print tab. This function is useful when you want to print the images (such as company or product logos) that are not provided by this machine (stamps and page numbers are those provided by this machine). Reference - You can register up to 100 overlay images. - When you select a multi-page document, the first page is registered as an overlay image. 7 Application 7-78 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.8 Register Overlay - New Register a new overlay image. 1 Select a document and press [Register Overlay]. 2 Press an unregistered image button and press [New]. 3 Enter the name of the overlay image to be registered, and press [OK]. % You can enter up to 16 characters. 4 Press [Start]. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-79 7.8 Application 7 Register Overlay - Overwrite You can overwrite the registered overlay image with new one. 1 Select a document and press [Register Overlay]. 2 Press the image button to be overwritten, and press [Overwrite]. 3 Check the displayed message, and press [Overwrite]. 4 Press [Start]. The overlay image is overwritten. 7 Application 7-80 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.8 Detail Settings Configure the density or color of the newly registered or overwritten overlay image. % Select the button of a target overlay image, and press [Detail Settings]. After configuring settings, press [OK]. Item Description [Density] Specify the density of the image. Use the keypad to enter the density using a value between 20 and 100%. [Color] Specify the color of the overlay image. [Full Color]: Prints a document in full color. [Black]: Prints a document in black and white. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-81 7.9 Bulletin Board User Box (System User Box) 7 7.9 Bulletin Board User Box (System User Box) 7.9.1 Overview of the Bulletin Board User Boxes The Bulletin Board User Box is used to register a browsing document. A document registered in the Bulletin Board User Box is sent by the polling transmission function when a polling request is issued from the remote machine. 7.9.2 Bulletin Board User Box screen Select the [Bulletin Board User Box] in the [System] tab to display registered Bulletin Board User Boxes. Select the Bulletin Board User Box that contains the document registered in this machine. 7.9.3 Printing a document in a Bulletin Board User Box You can print a document saved in the Bulletin Board User Box. Check the preview or information of the document, press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. 7.9.4 Deleting a document in the Bulletin Board User Box You can save only one document in one Bulletin Board User Box. To register a new document in the Bulletin Board User Box, delete the existing document, and send a new document to the Bulletin Board User Box. To delete the document saved in the Bulletin Board User Box, check its registration time or source, and press [Delete]. 7 Polling TX User Box (System User Box) 7-82 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.10 7.10 Polling TX User Box (System User Box) 7.10.1 Overview of the Polling Transmission User Boxes The Polling TX User Box is used to save a document to be sent in response to a request from a receiver. The process of saving a specific document in the Polling TX User Box is called polling transmission. 7.10.2 Printing a document in the Polling TX User Box You can print a document saved in the Polling TX User Box. Check the preview or information of the document, press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. Reference - You can register a document in the Polling TX User Box as an overlay image. For details on how to register an overlay image, refer to page 7-78. 7.10.3 Deleting a document in the Polling TX User Box You can save only one document in the Polling TX User Box. To register a new document in the Polling TX User Box, delete the existing document, and perform polling transmission of a new document. To delete the document saved in the Polling TX User Box, check its registration time or source, and press [Delete]. dReference For details on the polling transmission procedure, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-83 7.11 Secure Document User Box (System User Box) 7 7.11 Secure Document User Box (System User Box) 7.11.1 Overview of the Secure Document User Box The Secure Document User Box is used to save a document that was printed with the specified ID and password. To print a document, you must enter the ID and password. The authentication procedure varies depending on the Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error setting in Administrator Settings - [Security Settings] - [Security Details]. For details, contact the administrator of this machine. dReference For details on how to save a secure document, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. 7.11.2 Authentication procedure 1 Follow the procedure below when Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error is set to [Mode 1] in [Security Settings] - [Security Details] of Administrator Settings. 7.11.3 Authentication procedure 2 Follow the procedure below when Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error is set to [Mode 2] in [Security Settings] - [Security Details] of Administrator Settings. Reference - If [Mode 2] is selected, enter the password for each document even when the ID is the same. This is because you need to select the document first before entering the password. Therefore, the security level in this mode is higher than mode 1. Press [Secure Document User Box] Enter the ID of the secure document Enter the password of the secure document A list of documents appears Select the document to be printed, and configure print settings Press [Secure Document User Box] Enter the ID of the secure document A list of documents appears Select the document to be printed, and enter the password of the secure document 7 Secure Document User Box (System User Box) 7-84 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.11 7.11.4 Print - Printing You can add some functions to a document saved in the Secure Document User Box when printing the document. Copies Use the keypad to enter the number of copies. A number between 1 and 9999 can be specified. Print Select 1-Sided or 2-Sided. Color For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-10. Finishing For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-10. Combine For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-13. Zoom For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-14. Page Margin For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-16. Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-17. Stamp/Composition For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-21. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-85 7.11 Secure Document User Box (System User Box) 7 7.11.5 Filing Settings You can handle a document saved in the Secure Document User Box. Reference - To delete all documents in the Secure Document User Box at a time, select [User Box Settings] - [Delete Secure Print Documents] in Administrator Settings. For details, refer to page 8-20. The available setting items are as follows. Item Description [Delete] Deletes an unnecessary document such as a document that you have printed. [Edit Name] Renames a saved document. [Document Details] Enables you to check the date and time a document has been saved as well as a preview image. 7 Memory RX User Box (System User Box) 7-86 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.12 7.12 Memory RX User Box (System User Box) 7.12.1 Overview of the Memory RX User Box The Memory RX User Box is used to save a received document in the memory and print it as required. When memory reception is enabled, a received document is automatically saved in the Memory RX User Box. To check a document saved in the Memory RX User Box, select [Compulsory Memory RX User Box] in the [System User Box] tab, and then enter the password that was specified when memory reception was enabled. dReference For details on how to specify the password for memory reception settings, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 7.12.2 Print Select a document to be printed, and press [Print]. After the specified document has been printed, data is deleted automatically. 7.12.3 Filing Settings You can handle a document saved in the Memory RX User Box. The available setting items are as follows. Item Description [Delete] Deletes a document that does not need to be printed. [Edit Name] Renames a saved document. [Document Details] Enables you to check the date and time a document has been saved as well as a preview image. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-87 7.13 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7 7.13 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7.13.1 Overview of the Annotation User Box Annotation User Boxes are used to automatically assign a number to a saved documents and add the number when printing or sending the document. You can pre-register the number to be assigned when creating the User Box and change it when printing or sending documents. For the functions you can configure when printing or sending documents, refer to page 7-9 and the sections that follow. Select [Annotation User Box] in the [System User Box] tab, and press [Use/File]. The registered Annotation User Boxes are displayed. Reference - Go to Administrator Settings to register the Annotation User Box. For details, refer to page 8-17. - For the types of numbers that can be printed in Annotation User Boxes, refer to page 7-90. - To print the numbers specified in the Annotation User Box without saving a document in the User Box, set Auto Document Delete Time to [Do Not Keep]. This is useful for managing the numbers that are added to the copied documents. Specify the Auto Document Delete Time when you create an Annotation User Box. For details, refer to page 8-17. If you open a User Box, you can configure print and transmission settings. 7.13.2 Print - Basic For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-9. 7.13.3 Print - Page Margin For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-16. 7 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7-88 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.13 7.13.4 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Cover Sheet For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-18. 7.13.5 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Insert Sheet For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-19. 7.13.6 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Chapters For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-20. 7.13.7 Print - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-21. 7.13.8 Print - Stamp/Composition - Page Number For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-22. 7.13.9 Print - Stamp/Composition - Stamp For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-23. 7.13.10 Printing Preferences - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-24. 7.13.11 Printing Preferences - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-26. 7.13.12 Print - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-27. 7.13.13 Print - Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-28. 7.13.14 Print - Stamp/Composition - Registered Overlay For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-31. 7.13.15 Description of the Send tab For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-33. 7.13.16 Send - Direct Input - E-mail For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-40. 7.13.17 Send - Direct Input - PC (SMB) For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-42. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-89 7.13 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7 7.13.18 Send - Direct Input - FTP For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-43. 7.13.19 Send - Direct Input - WebDAV For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-44. 7.13.20 Send - Job History For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-45. 7.13.21 Send - LDAP Search - Search For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-46. 7.13.22 Send - LDAP Search - Advanced Search For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-46. 7.13.23 Send - Document Settings - Resolution For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-47. 7.13.24 Send - Document Settings - File Type For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-48. 7.13.25 Send - Document Settings - Color For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-52. 7.13.26 Send - Communication Settings - E-mail Settings For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-55. 7.13.27 Send - Communication Settings - URL Notification Setting For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-57. 7.13.28 Send - Communication Settings - E-mail Encryption For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-60. 7.13.29 Send - Communication Settings - Digital Signature For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-60. 7.13.30 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-61. 7.13.31 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-61. 7 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7-90 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.13 7.13.32 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-61. 7.13.33 Send - Application - Send & Print For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-62. 7.13.34 Send - Application - Stamp Element Secondary Field Add text to a number to be printed. You can enter up to 20 characters. Date/Time Select the format for the date and time to be printed. Density Select the density for the annotation numbers to be printed. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-91 7.13 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7 Number Type Select the output format (number of digits) for the annotation numbers to be printed. Print Position Select the printing position. 7 Annotation User Box (System User Box) 7-92 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.13 7.13.35 Filing Settings You can handle a document saved in an Annotation User Box. The available setting items are as follows. 7.13.36 Application - Register Overlay For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-77. Item Description [Delete] Deletes an unnecessary document such as a document that you have printed. [Edit Name] Renames a saved document. [Document Details] Enables you to check the date and time a document has been saved as well as a preview image. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-93 7.14 Fax Retransmit User Box (System User Box) 7 7.14 Fax Retransmit User Box (System User Box) 7.14.1 Overview of the Fax Retransmit User Box The Fax Retransmit User Box is used to save a document, which was unable to be sent after the number of redials reached the value specified in Line Parameter Settings because the remote machine was busy when sending the fax for a predetermined time period. With this User Box, you can print for conformation or resend a saved document later. Select [Fax Retransmit User Box] in the [System User Box] tab, and press [Use/File]. A list of saved documents are displayed. Reference - Before you can save a document in the Fax Retransmit User Box, you must enable the Fax Retransmit User Box in the [Fax Settings] of Administrator Settings. For details on settings, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 7.14.2 Print - Proof Print Before retransmitting a saved document, you can print the document for conformation. Data is not deleted after being printed. Select a document to be printed, and press [Proof Print]. Check document information, and press [Start]. 7.14.3 Send - Fax Retransmit a saved document. Select a document, select the [Send] tab, and press [Fax]. Reference - You can specify a new destination when retransmitting a document. You can specify the new destination in Address Book, Direct Input, or Job History. - You can configure transmission settings when you retransmit a saved document. You can also configure line and fax header settings. For details, refer to page 7-53 and page 7-60. - After document sending has been completed, data is deleted automatically. 7 Fax Retransmit User Box (System User Box) 7-94 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.14 7.14.4 Filing Settings - Delete Stop retransmission and delete the target document. Select a document, select the [Filing Settings] tab, and press [Delete]. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-95 7.15 Password Encrypted PDF User Box (System User Box) 7 7.15 Password Encrypted PDF User Box (System User Box) 7.15.1 Overview of the Password Encrypted PDF User Box When you use Web Connection or Direct Print to print a PDF file that has been saved with a password configured, or you print an encrypt PDF data that has been saved in the external memory, the data is automatically saved in the Password Encrypted PDF User Box. Select [Password Encrypted PDF User Box] in the [System User Box] tab, and press [Use/File]. A list of saved documents are displayed. Reference - Only password encrypted PDF data saved by the user who is logged in is displayed when User Authentication is enabled in this machine. 7.15.2 Print/Save −Print/Save Select a document to be printed or saved, and press [Print/Save]. When printing or saving a document, enter the password assigned to the PDF file. After printing or saving has been completed, documents in the Password Encrypted PDF User Box are deleted automatically. Reference - Whether to print or save is specified in the direct print instruction issued from your computer. You cannot change a print instruction to a save instruction or vice versa. 7.15.3 Filing Settings - Delete You can delete a saved document if it does not need to be printed. Select a document to be deleted, and press [Delete]. 7 ID & Print User Box (System User Box) 7-96 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.16 7.16 ID & Print User Box (System User Box) 7.16.1 Overview of the ID & Print User Box Viewing documents This item appears when user authentication settings are configured. A document saved in this User Box can be printed by the user of the document when the user is logged in to the machine. When you print a document from a computer over the network to this machine by entering the user name and password, the document is temporarily saved in the ID & Print User Box. % Select [ID & Print User Box] in the [System User Box] tab, and press [Use/File]. A list of saved documents are displayed. Reference - When there are documents saved in the ID & Print User Box, the following buttons are displayed in the login screen. Enter the user name and password, and press the desired button. – [Begin Printing]: Press this button to print documents saved in the ID & Print User Box without logging in to this machine. – [Print & Login]: Press this button to login to this machine and print the documents saved in the ID & Print User Box. – [Login]: Press this button to log in to this machine but not print the documents. After you are logged in, you can print or delete documents saved in the ID & Print User Box. - Documents can be saved in the ID & Print User Box even when user authentication is not enabled. In addition, jobs saved by public users can be saved in the ID & Print User Box. For details, refer to page 8-25. - After printing documents has been completed, the data in the ID & Print User Box is deleted automatically. A confirmation screen for confirming if you are sure to delete the data appears depending on the settings in Administrator Settings. dReference For details on how to print a document from a computer to the ID & Print User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-97 7.16 ID & Print User Box (System User Box) 7 7.16.2 Print - Print 1 Select a document to be printed, and press [Print]. 2 Select whether to delete the document after printing. 7.16.3 Filing Settings - Delete Select a document to be deleted, and press [Delete]. 7 External Memory (System User Box) 7-98 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.17 7.17 External Memory (System User Box) 7.17.1 External memory device Supported external memory devices Requirements for external memory devices of this machine are as follows. - USB flash memory device that supports the USB (1.1/2.0) interface - FAT32-formatted memory device Connecting the external memory device 0 Use the USB connector on the side that is near the control panel. Do not use the USB connector near the rear side because it is used for optional devices. 0 Do not disconnect the external memory device while saving a document in the external memory device or printing a document saved in the external memory device. 0 Do not use the USB device (hard disk or USB hub) other than the USB flash memory device. 0 Do not connect or disconnect the USB memory when the hourglass is being displayed in the control panel while this machine is active. 0 Do not disconnect the USB memory just after connecting it. % Connect the external memory device to the USB connector on the side of this machine. When the external memory device is connected, an icon appears at the bottom of the screen and the following screen is displayed. If you will immediately use the external memory, select the intended purpose. When not using the exert memory, select [Close]. Reference - The intended purpose of the external memory to be displayed varies depending on the administrator settings. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-99 7.17 External Memory (System User Box) 7 7.17.2 External memory screen When the external memory device is connected, select [External Memory] to display the folder structure. Entering a file path In the touch panel, you can specify the file path to the folder containing the document to be printed. Press [File Path], and enter the file path. Reference - Make sure that the total length of the file path and file name do not exceed 250 characters. If the number of characters exceeds the limit, the file list is not displayed. Selecting a file You can print the following file types: PDF, JPEG, TIFF, and XPS. Select a document of one of these types from the list. Reference - 2-sided printing, punching, or stapling are not supported for JPEG and XPS files. - Printing is not possible when printing is restricted by Security Settings of a PDF file. - This machine supports printing of PDF Version 1.6 or earlier. - Only the files of printable file types are displayed in the list. - File access fails when the total length of the file path and file name exceeds 250 characters. - Up to 200 printable files are displayed in the folder of the specified file path. If the folder contains 200 or more files, it may take time to display the file list screen. Printing encrypted PDF data To print the encrypted PDF data saved in the external memory device, select the data in the External Memory screen and print the data. When the print command is issued, the encrypted PDF data in the external memory is saved in the Password Encrypted PDF User Box of this machine. Access the Password Encrypted PDF User Box of this machine, and then print the data. dReference For the Password Encrypted PDF User Box, refer to page 7-95. Moving to the parent folder To move to the parent folder, press [Up]. Opening a folder To check the contents of a specific folder, press [Open]. Print Select a document to be printed, and press [Print]. The Print Details screen is displayed. 7 External Memory (System User Box) 7-100 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.17 Document Details You can check the modification date, file name, and other properties of the selected document. 7.17.3 Print - Basic Press [Print] to display the following screen. Copies Use the keypad to enter the number of copies. A number between 1 and 9999 can be specified. Color Specify whether to print the document in color or black and white. Print Select 1-Sided or 2-Sided. Binding Position When you select 2-Sided in [Print], select the binding position. Finishing For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-10. Reference - 2-sided printing, punching, or stapling are not supported for JPEG and XPS files. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-101 7.17 External Memory (System User Box) 7 Paper Select a tray to load printing paper. 7.17.4 Print- Application Stamp/Composition - Date/Time For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-21. Stamp/Composition - Page Number For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-22. Stamp/Composition - Stamp For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-23. Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-24. Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-26. Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-27. Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-28. 7 External Memory (System User Box) 7-102 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.17 7.17.5 Filing Settings−Save in User Box This function saves a document stored in the external memory in a User Box. Specify the User Box and document name, and press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. Item Description [User Box] Select the Public, Personal, or Group User Box to save data in. [Document Name] Specify the name of the document to be saved. • If you select multiple files, you cannot specify the document name. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-103 7.18 Mobile/PDA (System User Box) 7 7.18 Mobile/PDA (System User Box) This function enables you to print a document stored in a cellular phone or PDA via a Bluetooth communication or to save such a document in a User Box. 7.18.1 Operating environment The cellular phones and PDAs that can be connected to this machine and the printable file must satisfy the following conditions. Reference - To print documents from a cellular phone or PDA, the optional Local Interface Kit EK-605 is required. The settings for enabling a Bluetooth communication are also required. Contact your service representative in advance. - If you cannot access the link file when attempting to print an XHTML file, the document will either not be printed or will be printed in a black frame depending on the setting in [User Settings] − [Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] − [Link File Error Notification]. - To access the link file for printing an XHTML file, [WebDAV Settings] of this machine is required. - To use a proxy for connection, register a proxy server in [Administrator Settings] - [Network Settings] - [WebDAV Settings] - [WebDAV Client Settings] - [Host Address], and set [User Settings] - [Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] - [Proxy Server Use] to [ON]. - The communication speed may drop or communication may be interrupted due to obstacles, signal quality, magnetic field or static electricity. - Protected documents and image data may not be sent depending on the security setting of the cellular phone or PDA. Communication protocol Bluetooth Ver. 2.0 + EDR Supporting profile OPP/BPP/SPP/BIP/HCRP Supporting file type PDF/CPDF/XPS/CXPS/TIFF/JPEG/XHTML/RepliGo • For XHTML file types, the machine supports the character code of UTF-8/Shift- JIS/ISO-8859 and the link file extensions of JPEG/JPG/PNG. • This machine supports RepliGo version 2.1.0.9. 7 Mobile/PDA (System User Box) 7-104 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.18 7.18.2 Mobile/PDA - Print Reference - To save a file stored in a cellular phone or PDA in a User Box, or to print such a file, configure the appropriate setting in Administrator Settings in advance. For details, refer to page 8-25. To use a Bluetooth communication, the Bluetooth setting must be enabled in this machine. For details, refer to [User's Guide Network Administrator]. - When user authentication is specified on this machine, even a registered user cannot print a document unless printing from a cellular phone or PDA is allowed in the machine setting. For user authentication, contact the administrator of this machine. Entering the PIN code If you enter the 4-digit PIN code from a cellular phone or PDA, a connection is established, and data is sent to this machine to be printed. Reference - Check the PIN code in the instruction manual or in the setting instructions of the cellular phone or PDA. Check printing preferences You can check the overview of the settings to print the received data. dReference To configure print settings, select [Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] in the Utility menu. For details, refer to page 8-12. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7-105 7.18 Mobile/PDA (System User Box) 7 7.18.3 Mobile/PDA - Save Entering the PIN code If you enter the 4-digit PIN code from a cellular phone or PDA, a connection is established, and data is sent to this machine to be saved in a User Box. Reference - Check the PIN code in the instruction manual or in the setting instructions of the cellular phone or PDA. 7 Mobile/PDA (System User Box) 7-106 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 7.18 8 User Box Settings ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-3 8.1 Menu tree of User Box Settings 8 8 User Box Settings 8.1 Menu tree of User Box Settings The following shows the menus and items used to configure User Box settings in the Utility menu. 8.1.1 User mode First level Second level Third level Fourth level 1 [One-Touch/User Box Registration] 2 [Create User Box] (p. 8-6) 1 [Public/Personal User Box] (p. 8-6) [New] [Edit] [Delete] 2 [Bulletin Board User Box] (p. 8-7) [New] [Edit] [Delete] 3 [Relay User Box] (p. 8-9) [New] [Edit] [Delete] 2 [User Settings] 2 [Custom Display Settings] 3 [User Box Settings] (p. 8-10) [Default Tab] [Shortcut Key 1] [Shortcut Key 2] [Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] [Link File Error Notification] (p. 8-11) [Proxy Server Use] (p. 8-11) [Print] (p. 8-12) [Print] [Color] [Paper] [Finishing] [Page Margin] [Stamp/Composition] 8 Menu tree of User Box Settings 8-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8.1 8.1.2 Administrator Settings First level Second level Third level Fourth level 1 [System Settings] 0 [User Box Settings] (p. 8-20) 1 [Delete Unused User Box] (p. 8-20) 2 [Delete Secure Print Documents] (p. 8-20) 3 [Auto Delete Secure Document] (p. 8-21) 4 [Encrypted PDF Delete Time] (p. 8-21) 5 [ID & Print Delete Time] (p. 8-22) 6 [Document Hold Setting] (p. 8-22) 7 [External Memory Function Settings] (p. 8-23) [Save Document] [Print Document] [External Memory Document Scan] 8 [Allow/Restrict User Box] (p. 8-23) 9 [ID & Print Delete after Print Setting] (p. 8-24) 0 [Document Delete Time Setting] (p. 8-24) ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-5 8.1 Menu tree of User Box Settings 8 3 [One-Touch/User Box Registration] 2 [Create User Box] (p. 8-16) 1 [Public/Personal User Box] (p. 8-6) [New] [Edit] [Delete] [Delete Empty User Box(es)] (p. 8-7) 2 [Bulletin Board User Box] (p. 8-7) [New] [Edit] [Delete] 3 [Relay User Box] (p. 8-9) [New] [Edit] [Delete] 4 [Annotation User Box] (p. 8-17) [New] [Edit] [Delete] 4 [Maximum Number of User Boxes] (p. 8-19) [Max. No. of Use Boxes] [Maximum Number of User Boxes] 4 [User Authentication/ Account Track] 2 [User Authentication Settings] 1 [Administrative Setting] [ID & Print Settings] (p. 8-25) 9 [System Connection] 5 [Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] (p. 8-25) 0 [Security Settings] 2 [User Box Administrator Setting] (p. 8-26) 4 [Security Details] [Secure Print Only] (p. 8-27) 6 [HDD Settings] 1 [Check HDD Capacity] (p. 8-27) 2 [Overwrite HDD Data] (p. 8-28) [Overwrite Method] [Encryption Priority] [Overwrite Priority] 3 [Overwrite All Data] (p. 8-29) 4 [HDD Lock Password] (p. 8-30) 5 [Format HDD] (p. 8-31) 6 [HDD Encryption Setting] (p. 8-31) 8 [Stamp Settings] 1 [Apply Stamps] (p. 8-32) [Printing] [Sending] First level Second level Third level Fourth level 8 User mode settings 8-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8.2 8.2 User mode settings 8.2.1 Creating a User Box Public, Personal, or Group User Box Create a Public, Personal, or Group User Box. You can configure the following items when create a User Box. Reference - To change the setting of a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Edit]. - If [Edit] is selected, you cannot change the User Box number. - To delete a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Delete]. Page (1/2) Item Description [User Box No.] Automatically displays an unassigned number. To specify a User Box number, press [User Box No.], and use the keypad to enter the User Box number between 1 and 999999999. [User Box Name] Press [User Box Name], and enter the User Box name in the control panel (up to 20 characters). Specifying different User Box numbers enables you to create User Boxes with the same name. [Password] Specify a password to limit access to the User Box. Press [Password], and enter the password in the control panel (up to 8 characters). [Index] Select the index type. [Type] Select [Public], [Personal], or [Group] depending on User Authentication or Account Track settings. If [Personal] is selected, specify the owner user. To select the owner user, use the owner user change page. If [Group] is selected, specify the owner account. To select the owner account, use the Change Owner screen. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-7 8.2 User mode settings 8 Page (2/2) Delete Empty User Box(es) (Administrator Settings) Automatically searches for and deletes an empty User Box if the Public, Personal, or Group User Box is created in Administrator Settings. Press [Delete Empty User Box(es)] in the Create User Box screen. Bulletin Board User Box Create a Bulletin Board User Box. You can create up to 10 Bulletin Board User Boxes. The available setting items are as follows. Reference - To change the setting of a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Edit]. - If [Edit] is selected, you cannot change the User Box number. - To delete a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Delete]. Item Description [Auto Document Delete Time] Specify the period from the date/time when a document was saved in or last retrieved form a User Box to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically. • In Delete Time, you can specify the time in addition to the number of days. To specify the time, enter the numeric value on a 1-minute basis in the range from 5 minutes to 12 hours. • When not deleting a document, select [Save]. • Depending on the settings in Administrator Settings, you may not be able to operate. [Confidential RX] This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed. Select whether to add the confidential RX function to a User Box. When adding the confidential RX function, enter the confidential RX password. • For confirmation, enter the confidential RX password again. 8 User mode settings 8-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8.2 Page (1/2) Page (2/2) Item Description [User Box No.] Automatically displays an unassigned number. To specify a User Box number, press [User Box No.], and use the keypad to enter the User Box number between 1 and 999999999. [User Box Name] Press [User Box Name], and enter the User Box name in the control panel (up to 20 characters). Specifying different User Box numbers enables you to create User Boxes with the same name. [Password] Specify a password to limit access to the User Box. Press [Password], and enter the password in the control panel (up to 8 characters). [Type] Select [Public], [Personal], or [Group] depending on User Authentication or Account Track settings. If [Personal] is selected, specify the owner user. To select the owner user, use the owner user change page. If [Group] is selected, specify the owner account. To select the owner account, use the Change Owner page. Item Description [Auto Document Delete Time] Specify the period from the date/time when a document was saved in or last retrieved form a User Box to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically. • In Delete Time, you can specify the time in addition to the number of days. To specify the time, enter the numeric value on a 1-minute basis in the range from 5 minutes to 12 hours. • When not deleting a document, select [Save]. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-9 8.2 User mode settings 8 Relay User Box You can create up to five Relay User Boxes. The creation and editing setting items are as follows. Reference - To change the setting of a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Edit]. - If [Edit] is selected, you cannot change the User Box number. - To delete a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Delete]. dReference For details on how to register the header or footer, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. Item Description [User Box No.] Automatically displays an unassigned number. To specify a User Box number, press [User Box No.], and use the keypad to enter the User Box number between 1 and 999999999. [User Box Name] Press [User Box Name], and enter the User Box name in the control panel (up to 20 characters). Specifying different User Box numbers enables you to create User Boxes with the same name. [Relay Destination] Select a relay destination to send data from the Relay User Box. Pre-register the relay destination as a group destination. • When registering a group destination as a relay destination, be sure to set Abbreviation Dial in the group destination in advance. [Relay TX Password] Specify a password to limit access to the User Box. Press [Relay TX Password], and enter the password in the control panel (up to 8 characters). 8 User mode settings 8-10 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8.2 8.2.2 Custom Display Settings - User Box Setting You can customize the User Box screen to fit your operating environment. Default Tab Specify the User Box page to be displayed after pressing [User Box] key on the control panel. Reference - [Public]: Displays the Public User Box page. - [Personal]: Displays the Personal User Box page when User Authentication is enabled. - [System]: Displays the System User Box page. - [Group]: Displays the Group User Box page when Account Track is enabled. Shortcut key This function enables you to add up to two shortcut keys in the area on the lower right of the page. It is available when registering the frequently used System User Box as a shortcut key. Reference - A shortcut key is displayed only in the User Box mode after pressing the [User Box] key. Switching to the Fax/Scan or Copy mode does not display the target User Box shortcut key. - If Shortcut Key 1 is configured, [Language Selection] is not displayed. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-11 8.2 User mode settings 8 8.2.3 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Link File Error Notification This function enables you to specify processing to be performed if you cannot access a link file when attempting to print an XHTML file from a cellular phone or PDA. (Default: [ON]) - [ON]: Prints a link file in a black frame. - [OFF]: Does not print a link file part. 8.2.4 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Proxy Server Use This function enables you to specify whether to use a proxy server to access a link file when printing an XHTML file from a cellular phone or PDA. (Default: [OFF]) - [ON]: Uses a proxy server. - [OFF]: Does not use a proxy server. Reference - To use a proxy server for connection, register the desired proxy server in [Administrator Settings] - [Network Settings] - [WebDAV Settings] - [WebDAV Client Settings] - [Proxy Server Address]. For details, refer to [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 8 User mode settings 8-12 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8.2 8.2.5 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Print Settings When using a cellular phone or PDA to print a document through this machine, configure print settings. Basic - Print Select 1-Sided or 2-Sided. Basic - Color Select Full Color or Black. Basic - Paper Select the printing paper size if the sent data does not contain paper size information. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-13 8.2 User mode settings 8 Basic - Finishing Specify Fold/Bind, Staple, or Punch. Application - Margin Select the margin position. Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-21. Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-22. Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-23. Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-24. Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-26. Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-27. 8 User mode settings 8-14 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8.2 Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat For the setting procedure, refer to page 7-28. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-15 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 8.3 Administrator Settings 8.3.1 User Box permissions User types This machine is intended for users of various positions. The User Box function therefore provides [User Box Administrator] in addition to the administrator of this machine. The following shows the users and their available User Box types. Reference - To log in to this machine as the User Box administrator, execute the following steps when setting User Authentication. – Enter "boxadmin" in the User Name box. – Enter the password specified in page 8-26 in the Password box. Public User Box and Personal or Group User Box The following shows the available functions of the (1) Public User Box that can be accessed by all users and the (2) Personal or Group User Box that can be accessed only by specific users. *1 The registered users can handle only the User Boxes that were created by them. *2 The User Box administrator and administrator can handle User Boxes without entering the password even if it is specified for the User Boxes. Item Description Public user When user authentication is disabled, every user is logged in as a public user. Registered user User registered by the administrator when User Authentication is enabled. User Box administrator User who logs in as the User Box administrator when User Authentication is enabled. This user can access all User Boxes regardless of whether a password is specified. Administrator User who manages this machine. This user can create, change, or delete all User Boxes regardless of whether a password is specified. Function Create User Box Check, download, or delete a document Change User Box setting Delete User Box User Box type Public Personal or Group Public Personal or Group Public Personal or Group Public Personal or Group Public user o − o − o − o − Registered user o o o o*1 o o*1 o o*1 User Box administrator o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 Administrator o o − − o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 8 Administrator Settings 8-16 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8.3 8.3.2 Creating a User Box You can register a new User Box. The following describes the types of the User Boxes that can be registered. Reference - Disabling User Authentication or Account Track saves the User Box registered as a Personal or Group User Box as a Public User Box. The User Box name however remains unchanged. - When User Authentication or Account Track is enabled, enter the ID and password when logging in to this machine. After this, be sure to press [Login] or the Access key in the control panel to complete authentication processing. If authentication is not completed, you cannot create a Personal or Group User Box. - When the optional Fax Kit is installed, you can configure confidential RX (F-Code TX) settings as the Public, Personal, or Group User Box extension function. For details on the confidential RX function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. - When the setting for User Authentication is configured, you can specify a User Box administrator. A User Box administrator can access all Public, Personal, and Group User Boxes. Reference - If [Password Rules] is enabled, you cannot create the password that is less than eight characters. - When the registered User Box password contains less than eight characters, change it to eight characters before setting Password Rules to ON. For details on Password Rules, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. 8.3.3 Creating Public, Personal, or Group User Box For details, refer to page 8-6. 8.3.4 Creating Bulletin Board User Box For details, refer to page 8-7. 8.3.5 Creating Relay User Box For details, refer to page 8-9. Item Description Public User Box Public User Box that can be accessed by everyone. Personal User Box Personal User Box that can be accessed by only the login user when User Authentication is enabled. Group User Box User Box that can be accessed by only the user in the login account when Account Track is enabled. Bulletin Board User Box User Box used to perform Bulletin Polling TX or RX with F codes. This item is available when the optional Fax Kit is installed. Relay User Box User Box used to save relay data when using this machine as a relay distribution station to perform relay distribution with F codes. This item is available when the optional Fax Kit is installed. Annotation User Box User Box used to print or send a saved document with the date/time or filing number image. Specify the type of the text to be added when using this User Box. When registering this User Box, specify the administrator mode. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-17 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 8.3.6 Creating Annotation User Box Create an Annotation User Box. You can configure the following items when create a User Box. Reference - To change the setting of a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Edit]. - If [Edit] is selected, you cannot change the User Box number. - To delete a created User Box, select the target User Box and press [Delete]. Page (1/3) Reference - If [Password Rules] is enabled, you cannot create the password that is less than eight characters. - When the registered User Box password contains less than eight characters, change it to eight characters before setting Password Rules to ON. For details on Password Rules, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. Item Description [User Box No.] Automatically displays an unassigned number. To specify a User Box number, press [User Box No.], and use the keypad to enter the User Box number between 1 and 999999999. [User Box Name] Press [User Box Name], and enter the User Box name in the control panel (up to 20 characters). Specifying different User Box numbers enables you to create User Boxes with the same name. [Password] Specify a password to limit access to the User Box. Press [Password], and enter the password in the control panel (up to 8 characters). 8 Administrator Settings 8-18 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8.3 Page (2/3) Page (3/3) Item Description [Count Up] Select whether to count the annotation number by job or by page. [Secondary Field] Add text to the number to be printed (up to 20 characters). [Date/Time] Select the format to display the date and time to be printed. [Density] Select the density of the annotation numbers to be printed. [Number Type] Select the output format (number of digits) of the annotation numbers to be printed. [Print Position] Select the printing position. [Primary Field] Add any text (up to 40 characters). Item Description [Auto Document Delete Time] Specify the period from the date/time when a document was saved in or last retrieved form a User Box to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically. • In Delete Time, you can specify the time in addition to the number of days. To specify the time, enter the numeric value on a 1-minute basis in the range from 5 minutes to 12 hours. • When not deleting a document, select [Save]. • To use a document to give an annotation only without saving or using it for copying, select [Do Not Keep]. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-19 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 8.3.7 Maximum Number of User Boxes Specify the maximum number of User Boxes that can be created for each user. Public, Personal, or Group User Box Select [Public], [Personal], or [Group] depending on User Authentication or Account Track settings. Max. No. Of Use Boxes To specify the maximum number of User Boxes, select [ON]. To not specify the limit and allow users to create an infinite number of User Boxes, select [OFF]. Maximum Number of User Boxes The allowable range of the maximum number of User Boxes is 0 to 1000. Use the keypad to enter the maximum number of User Boxes, and press [Apply] to determine it. Reference - If the maximum number of User Boxes is set to "0", you cannot create new ones. - When the selected user already sets the number of User Boxes to 3, the allowable range of the maximum number of User Boxes changes 3 to 1000. 8 Administrator Settings 8-20 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8.3 8.3.8 User Box Setting Delete Unused User Box Delete a User Box with no document saved, as an unnecessary User Box. To delete a User Box, confirm the message that appears and select [Yes]. Delete Secure Print Documents This function deletes all documents saved in the Secure Document User Box. To delete the User Box, confirm the message and select [Yes]. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-21 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 Auto Delete Secure Document Specify the period from the date/time when a secure document was saved or last retrieved to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically. Reference - In Delete Time, specify 5 minutes to 12 hours (on a 1-minute basis), 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 7 days, or 30 days. - When not deleting a document, select [Save]. Encrypted PDF Delete Time Specify the period from the date/time when an encrypted PDF document was saved or last retrieved to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically. Reference - In Delete Time, specify 5 minutes to 12 hours (on a 1-minute basis), 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 7 days, or 30 days. - When not deleting a document, select [Save]. 8 Administrator Settings 8-22 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8.3 ID & Print Delete Time Specify the period from the date/time when a document was saved in or last retrieved from the ID & Print User Box to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically. Reference - In Delete Time, specify 5 minutes to 12 hours (on a 1-minute basis), 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 7 days, or 30 days. - When not deleting a document, select [Save]. Document Hold Setting Specify whether to save a document in a User Box when sending or printing it. Reference - When deleting a document after printing or sending, select [Yes]. To display a deletion confirmation screen when printing or sending, select [ON] on the deletion selection screen. - To delete a document after printing or sending the document, select [No]. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-23 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 External Memory Function Settings Set the function of the external memory connected to this machine to ON or OFF. Reference - A function to save a document in external memory is set to OFF (not saved) in the factory setting. It is also set to OFF (not saved) in the user function setting when User Authentication is enabled. To save a document in external memory, change the setting to enable you to save a document in Administrator Settings. Allow/Restrict User Box Specify whether to release functions so that the user can create, edit, or delete a User Box. Reference - To enable the user to handle those functions, select [Allow]. - When not enabling the user to handle those functions, select [Prohibit]. Only the administrator can then create, edit, or delete a User Box. Item Description [Save Document] Select whether to save (ON) or not save (OFF) scanned documents or documents stored in a User Box to the external memory. [Print Document] Select whether to print (ON) or not print (OFF) documents saved in the external memory using the [Use/File] function. [External Memory Document Scan] Scan a document in the external memory and select whether to save (ON) or not save (OFF) it in a User Box. 8 Administrator Settings 8-24 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8.3 ID & Print Delete after Print Setting Select whether to check that the document saved in the ID & Print User Box has been deleted after printed. Reference - To check with the user whether to delete the target document, select [Confirm with User]. - To delete the target document without checking with the user after printing, select [Always Delete]. Document Delete Time Setting This function enables the administrator to specify the period from the date/time when a document was saved in or retrieved from a User Box to the date/time when it is to be deleted automatically when the user cannot specify the document deletion time. When automatically specifying the document deletion time, select [Yes] and sec the deletion time. Reference - In Delete Time, specify 5 minutes to 12 hours (on a 1-minute basis), 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 7 days, or 30 days. - When not deleting a document, select [Save]. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-25 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 ID & Print Settings Configure settings for ID & Print User Box. Reference - A public user job is printed or saved when public user printing is enabled. - A user-unauthorized job is printed or saved when Print without Authentication is enabled. - For details on printing by public users and Print without Authentication, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. 8.3.9 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting Select whether to allow or restrict the function for using a cellular phone or PDA. Item Description [ID & Print] [ON]: Saves all the Normal Print and Authentication & Print jobs, which were requested from a registered user, in the ID & Print User Box. [OFF]: Saves the Authentication & Print job, which was requested from a registered user, in the ID & Print User Box. The Normal Print job is output without being saved in the User Box. [Public User] [Print Immediately]: Outputs a public user job or user-unauthorized job without saving it in the User Box. [Save]: Saves a public user job or user-unauthorized job in the ID & Print User Box. 8 Administrator Settings 8-26 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8.3 8.3.10 User Box Administrator Setting The User Box administrator is available when User Authentication is enabled. If you log in to this machine as the User Box administrator, you can reference the contents of all the created User Boxes regardless of whether the password is specified. Setting User Box administrator To set a User Box administrator, select [Allow], and press [Password Setting] to register the User Box administrator's password. Reference - For confirmation, enter the password twice. - If [Password Rules] is enabled, you cannot create the password that is less than eight characters. - When the registered User Box password is less than eight characters, change it to eight characters before enable "Password Rules". For details on Password Rules, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. Logging in to this machine as the User Box administrator Enter the following items in the login screen. User name: boxadmin Password: Password determined in the User Box Administrator Setting screen Administrator's available functions The following functions are available when you log in as the User Box administrator. - Creating Public, Personal, or Group User Box - Checking, downloading, or deleting documents saved in all User Boxes - Changing all User Box settings - Deleting all User Boxes ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-27 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 8.3.11 Security Details Security Print Only Use this setting to specify to enable only Secure Print when issuing the print command from the printer driver. To print a document, you must enter the ID and password. 8.3.12 HDD Settings Check HDD Capacity You can check the occupied and free spaces in the HDD. 8 Administrator Settings 8-28 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8.3 Overwrite HDD Data You can specify how to overwrite and delete HDD data. When image data saved in the HDD becomes unnecessary, this function overwrites meaningless data in all areas that contain the image data to destroy the original data. This function also destroys the non-image data structure to prevent a data leak when the installed HDD has been stolen. The available setting items are as follows. (Default: Mode 1) Reference - When changing Encryption Priority or Overwrite Priority setting, format the HDD after rebooting this machine. However, be careful that data is erased by formatting the HDD. - For the data erased by formatting the HDD, refer to page 8-31. Item Description [Mode 1] Overwritten with 0x00 [Mode 2] Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with letter "A" (0x61) Verified [Encryption Priority] Performs encryption processing at a higher security level. In HDD Encryption Setting, however, data overwriting is performed unlike [Mode 1] or [Mode 2] setting. Always specify [Encryption Priority]. [Overwrite Priority] In HDD Encryption Setting, however, data overwriting is performed based on [Mode 1] or [Mode 2] setting. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-29 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 Overwrite All Data This function overwrites and deletes all data in the total capacity of the HDD. 0 This function is available when disposing of this machine. Before performing this function, be sure to consult your service representative. 0 While overwriting and deleting data, do not turn the main power switch off and on. % To overwrite and delete data, select the HDD overwrite method, and press [Delete]. Overwrite and delete processing is performed after this machine has been rebooted. The available setting items are as follows. Reference - It takes approximately 40 minutes to execute Mode 1. Item Description [Mode 1] Overwritten with 0x00 [Mode 2] Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers Overwritten with 0x00 [Mode 3] Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers Verified [Mode 4] Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff [Mode 5] Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff [Mode 6] Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with specified 512-byte data [Mode 7] Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0xaa [Mode 8] Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0xaa Verified 8 Administrator Settings 8-30 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8.3 HDD Lock Password You can specify the password to lock the HDD. 0 Be sure to keep the specified password carefully so that you will never forget it. Forgetting the password will require a large amount of recovery work. % Specify the password, and reboot this machine. The HDD password is specified. Reference - Enter the HDD password using 20 characters. Note that all the characters must not be the same. - If you have already specified the HDD password, [Change] and [Release] appears. You can change or release the HDD password. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8-31 8.3 Administrator Settings 8 Format HDD This function formats the HDD. 0 To turn the main power switch off and on, first turn the main power off, and then turn it on after 10 or more seconds have elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure. % To format the HDD, select [Yes] to follow the displayed messages. After formatting has been completed, reboot this machine. Reference - Using the Web Connection export function backs up user registration information or address data. For details, refer to the Web Connection online help. - The following shows the data deleted by formatting the HDD. – Program – Address Book – Authentication method setting – User authentication setting – Account track setting – User Box – User Box setting – Documents in User Boxes – Confidential User Box setting – Bulletin Board User Box setting HDD Encryption Setting You can configure HDD encryption setting. Specifying a 20-character encryption passphrase for the HDD prevents the user from easily reading the data saved in the HDD. 0 Be sure to keep the specified encryption passphrase carefully so that you will never forget it. 0 The encryption passphrase setting must be configured by the administrator of this machine. 0 To turn the main power switch off and on, first turn the main power off, and then turn it on after 10 or more seconds have elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure. % Specify the encryption passphrase, and reboot this machine. The encryption passphrase setting then becomes available. Reference - Enter the encryption passphrase using 20 characters. Note that all the characters must not be the same. - Encryption passphrase setting becomes available after this machine has been rebooted. 8 Administrator Settings 8-32 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 8.3 8.3.13 Stamp Settings Apply Stamps This function applies the predetermined stamp to all documents to be output from this machine, ensuring security. Specify whether to apply a stamp when printing or sending. To apply stamps, select [Apply], and then configure settings for the stamp to be added continuously. Reference - The following shows the types of the stamps that can be applied to the printed data. – Date/Time – Page Number – Stamp – Copy Security (Copy Protect, Copy Guard, Password Copy) – Stamp Repeat – Header/Footer – Registered Overlay - The following shows the types of the stamps that can be applied to the transmitted data. – Date/Time – Page Number – Stamp – Header/Footer dReference For details on the stamp setting, refer to page 7-21. 9 Web Connection ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-3 9.1 Using Web Connection 9 9 Web Connection 9.1 Using Web Connection Web Connection is a device control utility provided by the HTTP server built in the printer controller. Using a Web browser on a computer connected to the network, you can change machine settings and check the status of the machine. Using this utility, you can configure some settings, which are to be handled in the control panel of this machine, through your computer, and also smoothly enter characters. 9.1.1 Operating environment 9.1.2 Accessing Web Connection 0 Start the Web browser to access Web Connection. 0 If User Authentication is enabled, enter the user name and password. For details, refer to page 9-11. 0 For details on setting the IP address of this machine, refer to [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 0 Web Connection has two view modes: Flash and HTML. For details, refer to page 9-9. 1 Start the Web browser. 2 Enter the IP address of the machine in the URL field, and then press [Enter]. http:/// Example: When the IP address of this machine is 192.168.1.20: - http://192.168.1.20/ When IPv6 is set to "ON" while a browser other than Internet Explorer 6 is used: - Enter the IPv6 address enclosed in brackets ([ ]). – http://[IPv6 address of the machine]/ Example: When the IPv6 address of this machine is fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f16: - http://[fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f16]/ - If IPv6 is set to "ON" while Internet Explorer is used, add "fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f IPv6_MFP_1" to the hosts file in advance, and specify the address with the domain name. The main menu or login page appears. Operating environment Network Ethernet (TCP/IP) Applications on computer Web browser: • Microsoft Internet Explorer Ver. 6/7/8 (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) • Netscape Navigator 7.02 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) • Mozilla Firefox 1.0 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) • Netscape Navigator 7.02 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) • Mozilla Firefox 1.0 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) • Netscape Navigator 7.02 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) • Mozilla Firefox 1.0 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled) Adobe® Flash® Player: • Plug-in Ver.7.0 or later required to select Flash as the display format. • Plug-in Ver.9.0 or later required to use the Data Management Utility (font/macro data management). 9 Using Web Connection 9-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9.1 9.1.3 Web browser cache The Web browser has the cache function; therefore, the latest information may not be shown in the page displayed using Web Connection. Using the cache function may result in an operation failure. When using Web Connection, disable the cache function on the Web browser. Reference - Some Web browser versions may provide different menus and item names. For details, refer to the Help for the Web browser. - With the cache function enabled, timeout occurs in the administrator mode, and after that, how many time you try to access, just timeout recurs. It results in the control panel of this machine being locked, and you cannot handle the control panel. In this case, turn the main power off, and then turn it on again. To avoid this problem, disable the cache function. For Internet Explorer 1 Select [Internet Options] in the [Tools] menu. 2 In the [General] tab, select [Temporary Internet files] - [Settings]. 3 Select [Every visit to the page], and click [OK]. For Netscape Navigator 1 Select [Preferences] in the [Edit] menu. 2 In [Category] on the left, select [Advanced] - [Cache]. 3 In [Document in cache is compared to document on network], select [Every time]. For Mozilla Firefox 1 Select [Options] in the [Tools] menu. 2 Select [Privacy], and then click [Settings] in the Private Data section. 3 Select the [Cache] check box under [Private Data] select the [Clear private data when closing Firefox] check box under [Settings], and then click [OK]. 9.1.4 Online help function After logging in to Web Connection, click ; you can display the online help for the currently configured function. Reference - To display the online help, connect your computer to the Internet. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-5 9.2 Login and logout 9 9.2 Login and logout 9.2.1 Login and logout flows Accessing with Web Connection displays the login page when User Authentication or Account Track is enabled, and displays the login page in the public user mode when User Authentication or Account Track is not enabled. When re-logging in to this machine as a different user or as an administrator, log out once, and log in again. When User Authentication or Account Track is not enabled You are automatically logged in as a public user. To log in as an administrator, log out once. 9 Login and logout 9-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9.2 Login as an administrator again. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-7 9.2 Login and logout 9 When User Authentication or Account Track is enabled If Authentication Manager is used for authentication, ask your server administrator about the login procedure. The User Authentication or Account Track page appears. Enter the required items to log in. To log in as a different user or as an administrator, log out once. 9 Login and logout 9-8 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9.2 9.2.2 Logout Click [Logout] or [To Login Screen] at the upper right of the window. A logout confirmation page appears. Click [OK] to return to the login page. Reference - The login page that appears differs depending on whether Authentication is enabled in this machine. - When logged in as a public user, [To Login Screen] appears. When logged in as a registered user or an administrator, [Logout] appears. - If timeout occurred because no operation was performed for the specified period during login or if authentication setting was changed using the control panel while logging in to the user mode, you will automatically log out of the mode. - For details on how to specify the timeout period of the user or administrator modes, refer to page 9-39. Log in again. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-9 9.2 Login and logout 9 9.2.3 Login Web Connection provides the user or administrator mode depending on how to log in. If necessary, you can log in to the user mode as an administrator or User Box administrator depending on user authentication or User Box administrator setting. Reference - You can log in as a User Box administrator when the User Box administrator is enabled using the control panel. For details on the User Box administrator setting, permissions, and password, refer to the page 8-26. - Logging in to the user mode as an administrator enables you to perform job deletion processing, which is not available in the administrator. - In the login page, select the desired Data Management Utility. For details on Data Management Utility, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. Login options You can select items as required when logging in. Reference - If Flash is selected in View Mode, the following items are displayed using Flash. – Status icons and messages – Status of [Paper Tray] in [Information] - [Device Information] – Status of [Job] Item Description Language Select the language to display information in. View Mode Select Flash or HTML. • To use the read-out software, select HTML. • In the IPv6 environment, select HTML. • To select Flash, prepare Flash Player. User Assist Select the [Display dialog box in case of warning.] check box to display the dialog box when a warning has occurred or during operation after login. 9 Login and logout 9-10 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9.2 Logging in as a public user If user authentication is not enabled on the machine, you will be logging in as a public user. In the login page, select [Public User], and click [Login]. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-11 9.2 Login and logout 9 Logging in as a registered user Specify the registered user name and password to log in when User Authentication is enabled in this machine. % In the login page, enter the user name and the password, and click [Login]. Reference - If Account Track is enabled, also enter the account name and password. - To select a user name from a list, click [User List]. - If External Server Authentication is enabled, select a server. - To log in to the user mode as an administrator, select [Administrator] - [Administrator (User Mode)], and enter the administrator password. - If [Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error] in Administrator Settings is set to Mode 2 and a user enters an incorrect password the specified number of times, that user will be locked out and will no longer be able to use the machine. For details on how to disable Prohibit Functions When Authentication Error, contact your administrator. - [User List] is available only when User Name List is set to [ON]. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. 9 Login and logout 9-12 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9.2 Logging in to administrator mode To configure the system or network setting, log in to the administrator mode. 1 Select [Administrator] and click [Login]. 2 Enter the administrator password in the page that appears, and then click [OK]. % To log in to the user mode as an administrator, select [Administrator (User Mode)], and enter the administrator password. % Logging in to the administrator mode locks the control panel of this machine, and you will not be able to use it. % Depending on the status of this machine, you may not be able to log in to the administrator mode. % If [Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error] in the Administrator Settings is set to Mode 2 and an incorrect password is entered the specified number of times, it is no longer possible to log in to the administrator mode. For details on the Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error parameter, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. % The password entry page varies depending on the machine settings. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-13 9.2 Login and logout 9 % You can display the explanation of functions (Help) when necessary. To display Help, select [ON] in Display Setting. [On Mouse]: Point the cursor to display Help. [On Focus]: Select an item to display Help. 9 Login and logout 9-14 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9.2 Display mode in administrator mode In [System Settings] - [Display Setting], the display mode in the administrator mode can be selected from [Tab Function Display] or [List Function Display]. This manual shows an example where the [List Function Display] is set as the display mode. In either display mode, the available items are the same. In the default setting, the screen is displayed in [Tab Function Display]. In [Tab Function Display], click the desired icon to change the menu. In [List Function Display], change the menu from the list box. Select the desired menu in the drop-down list, click [Display]. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-15 9.2 Login and logout 9 Logging in as a User Box administrator You can log in to the user mode as an administrator to delete a job when User Authentication is enabled in this machine. If necessary, you can log in to the user mode as a User Box administrator when the User Box administrator is enabled using the control panel. % In the login page, select [Administrator] and click [Login]. % To log in to the user mode as a User Box administrator, select [User Box Administrator], and enter the User Box administrator's password. Reference - To log in to the user mode as an administrator, select [Administrator] - [Administrator (User Mode)], and enter the administrator password. - If [Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error] in the Administrator Settings is set to Mode 2 and an incorrect password is entered the specified number of times, it is no longer possible to log in to the administrator mode. For details on the Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error parameter, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. - The password entry page varies depending on the machine settings. - You can display the explanation of functions (Help) when necessary. To display Help, select [ON] in Display Setting. – [On Mouse]: Point the cursor to display Help. – [On Focus]: Select an item to display Help. 9 Page Configuration 9-16 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9.3 9.3 Page Configuration Logging in to Web Connection displays the page that is configured as shown below. This example shows the items in Information - Device Information. Reference - The contents of the Web Connection pages vary depending on the options installed in this machine or the settings of this machine. No. Item Description 1 Login user name Displays the current login mode icon and user name (public, administrator, User Box administrator, registered user, or account). Click the user name to display the login user name. 2 Status display Displays the status of the printer and scanner sections of this machine with icons and messages. Clicking the desired icon when an error occurs displays the information (Consumable Info, Paper Tray, or user registration page) associated with the icon to enable you to check the status. 3 Message display Displays the operating status of this machine. 4 [To Login Screen]/ [Logout] Click this button to log out the current mode and log in again. When logged in as a public user, [To Login Screen] appears. When logged in as a registered user or an administrator, [Logout] appears. 1 2 3 4 10 5 6 7 8 9 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-17 9.3 Page Configuration 9 5 [Change Password] Click this button to jump to the user password change page. This button appears only in the user mode page in which you logged in as a registered user. 6 Help You can display the online help for the currently configured function. For the specified pages, refer to "Online Assistance" in page 9-18. 7 Refresh Click this icon to refresh the information displayed in the page. 8 Icon Select the category of the item to be displayed. The following icons are displayed in the user mode. • Information • Job • User Box • Direct Print • Store Address • Customize 9 Menu Displays information and setting for the selected icon. The menu that appears in this area varies depending on which icon was selected. 10 Information and settings Displays the details of the item selected in the menu. No. Item Description 9 User Mode Overview 9-18 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9.4 9.4 User Mode Overview Logging in to the user mode enables you to configure the following functions. 9.4.1 Information dReference You can also check the explanation of the user mode in the Web Connection online help or Web Connection manual included in the application DVD-ROM. For details on the online help, refer to page 9-4. Item Description [Device Information] Enables you to check the components, options, consumables, and meter counts of this machine. [Online Assistance] Enables you to check the online assistance about this product. [Change User Password] Changes the password of the login user. [Function Permission Information] Enables you to check the function permission information about the user or account. [Network Setting Information] Enables you to check the network settings of this machine. [Print Setting Information] Enables you to check the printer controller settings of this machine. [Print Information] Prints font or configuration information. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-19 9.4 User Mode Overview 9 9.4.2 Job 9.4.3 User Boxes dReference For details on how to handle User Boxes, refer to page 9-23. Item Description [Current Jobs] Enables you to check the currently executed job or queued jobs. [Job History] Enables you to check the executed jobs. [Communication List] Enables you to check the completed transmission and reception jobs. Item Description [Open User Box] Opens the currently created User Box (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) to enable you to print, send, or download a document saved in the User Box or to change the User Box setting. [Create User Box] Enables to create a new User Box. 9 User Mode Overview 9-20 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9.4 9.4.4 Direct Print Reference - [Direct Print] may not be displayed depending on settings in the administrator mode. [Open System User Box] Displayed when the optional Fax Kit is installed. This function opens the System User Box (Bulletin Board, Polling TX, Memory RX, or Relay User Box) to enable you to handle a document saved in the User Box or change the User Box setting. [Create System User Box] Displayed when the optional Fax Kit is installed. This function enables you to create a new Bulletin Board or Relay User Box. Item Description Item Description [Direct Print] Specify a file saved in the computer to print it using this machine. If necessary, you can select [Application Setting] to save a document in the specified User Box. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-21 9.4 User Mode Overview 9 9.4.5 Store Address [Store Address] may not be displayed depending on settings in the administrator mode. Item Description [Address Book] Enables you to check the address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Group] Enables you to check the group address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Program] Enables you to check the program address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Temporary One-Touch] Enables you to check the temporary program address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Subject] Enables you to register or change up to 10 subjects when sending E-mails. [Text] Enables you to register or change up to 10 body messages when sending E-mails. 9 User Mode Overview 9-22 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9.4 9.4.6 Customize Enables you to specify the initial page after logging in. Item Description [Option] Enables you to configure the settings displayed in the initial page after logging in to this machine. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-23 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box The [Open User Box] menu supports the following functions. - Listing the documents saved in a User Box - Printing a document - Sending a document to another machine - Downloading and saving document data in your computer - Moving or copying a document to another User Box - Deleting a document 9.5.1 Listing the documents saved in a User Box Logging in displays a list of the User Boxes (Public, Personal, and Group User Boxes) created in the accessed MFP. Open User Box Select the target User Box name in the User Box list. Otherwise, enter the User Box number and password, and click [OK]. Reference - Selecting a User Box name with a password displays the password entry page. "Open User Box" is displayed as shown below depending on the User Authentication or Account Track settings. - [Open User Box(Public)]: Displayed when User Authentication is not enabled. - [Open User Box(Public/Personal)]: Displayed when User Authentication is enabled. - [Open User Box(Public/Group)]: Displayed when Account Track is enabled. - [Open User Box(Public/Group/Personal)]: Displayed when User Authentication and Account Track are enabled. Item Description [User Box Number] Enter the number of the User Box to be opened. [User Box Password] If a password is set to the target User Box, enter the password. 9 Handling a document in a User Box 9-24 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9.5 File List Selecting a User Box displays its basic information and also lists the documents saved in the User Box. Item Description [Search from Index] Displays a list of User Boxes for each index, which was selected when creating a User Box. [Page (Display by 50 cases)] When this machine contains 50 or more User Boxes, specify the desired page to change the display. [User Box List] Displays the User Box number, User Box name, User Box type, and creation date and time. A User Box with a password is displayed by a keyshaped icon. Item Description [User Box Settings] Click this button to change the User Box name, index, extension, or password setting. [Delete User Box] Click this button to delete the displayed User Box. • Deleting a User Box erases all the documents saved in the User Box. Thumbnail View To view a thumbnail image for each document, click [ON]. When you do not view thumbnail images, click [OFF]. Specify operation Select the target operation, for example, printing, moving, copying, or deleting a document, sending to another machine, or downloading to your computer. For details, refer to page 9-25. [Changes the display] Select the target operation, and click this button to display the "Select" check box for the document that can be handled by the target function. Select Displays a check box for the document that can be handled by the selected function. Thumbnail Displays the image of the first page when the thumbnail image display function is enabled. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-25 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9 Reference - If 11 or more documents are saved, [Page (Display by 10 cases)] is displayed. 9.5.2 Printing a document 1 Select [Specify operation] - [Print], and click [Changes the display]. The select check box is displayed for printable documents. Document Name Displays a document name. Number of Originals Displays the number of originals in a document. [Edit Name] Click this button to rename a document. Item Description 9 Handling a document in a User Box 9-26 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9.5 2 Select the check box of the target document, and click [Print Setting]. 3 Configure print settings. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-27 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9 % If multiple documents are selected while Combine is set to [OFF], Basic Setting and Application Setting will become unavailable. % [Save Print Settings] is not displayed when multiple documents are selected. 4 Click [OK]. Printing starts. 5 Click [OK]. You then return to the File List page. Item Description [Change order] Displayed when multiple documents are selected. This function enables you to change the printing order. Click the target document, and select [Top], [Up], [Down], [Bottom], or [Undo]. When checking a thumbnail image for each document, click [Thumbnail View]. [Combine] Displayed when multiple documents are selected. This function prints the selected documents as one. [Basic Setting] Configure the number of sets, 2-sided printing, color, and finishing settings. [Application Setting] Configure more detailed setting such as Page Margin or Stamp. When using this function, click [Display]. [Save Print Settings] Select whether to save print setting. 9 Handling a document in a User Box 9-28 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9.5 9.5.3 Sending a document to another machine 1 Select [Specify operation] - [Send to other device], and click [Changes the display]. The select check box is displayed for documents that can be sent. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-29 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9 2 Select the check box of the target document, and click [TX Setting]. 9 Handling a document in a User Box 9-30 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9.5 3 Configure send settings. Item Description [Specify destination] Click [Search from List] to select the destination in the address book. When checking the destination list, click [Check Destination]. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-31 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9 % If multiple documents are selected while Combine is set to [OFF], File Type, Communication Settings, or Application Setting will become unavailable. 4 Click [OK]. Sending starts. 5 Click [OK]. You then return to the File List page. 9.5.4 Downloading document data to your computer 1 Select [Specify operation] - [Download to PC], and click [Changes the display]. The select check box is displayed for available documents. [Change order] Displayed when multiple documents are selected. This function enables you to change the sending order. Click the target document, and select [Top], [Up], [Down], [Bottom], or [Undo]. When checking a thumbnail image for each document, click [Thumbnail View]. [Bind TX] Displayed when multiple documents are selected. This function sends the selected documents as one. [File Type] Specify the file type and encryption contents for a file to be sent. [Communication Setting] Configure E-mail settings or specify the URL notification destination. When using this function, click [Display]. [Application Setting] Configure more detailed setting such as Stamp or Send & Print. When using this function, click [Display]. Item Description 9 Handling a document in a User Box 9-32 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9.5 2 Select the check box of the target document, and click [Download Setting]. 3 Configure settings. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-33 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9 4 Click [OK]. 5 When [Preparation for download has been completed] has appeared, click [Download]. The File Download page appears. 6 Click [Save]. 7 Specify the saving place and file name, and click [Save]. 8 Click [Back]. You then return to the File List page. Item Description [Change order] Displayed when multiple documents are selected. This function collects pages in the order in which they are displayed, and prints them as one document. If necessary, you can change that order. Click the target document, and select [Top], [Up], [Down], [Bottom], or [Undo]. When checking a thumbnail image for each document, click [Thumbnail View]. [File Format] Select the file type for the file to be saved. [Page Range] Download all pages or specify the range of successive pages. 9 Handling a document in a User Box 9-34 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9.5 9.5.5 Moving or copying a document to another User Box 1 Select [Specify operation] - [Move/Copy], and click [Changes the display]. The check box for selecting an available document is displayed. 2 Select the check box of the target document, and click [Move/Copy Setting]. % You cannot select multiple documents. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-35 9.5 Handling a document in a User Box 9 3 Configure settings. 4 Click [OK]. This moves or copies the document. 5 Click [OK]. You then return to the File List page. 9.5.6 Deleting a document 1 Select [Specify operation] - [Delete], and click [Changes the display]. The check box for selecting an available document is displayed. Item Description [User Box Number] Select the User Box to move or copy a document from the User Box List. [Copy] Select this check box to copy a document to the target User Box. 9 Handling a document in a User Box 9-36 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9.5 2 Select the check box of the target document, and click [Delete]. % To select or unselect all documents, select the [Check/Uncheck] check box. 3 Check the document name to be deleted, and click [OK]. % When checking a thumbnail image for each document, click [Thumbnail View]. 4 Click [OK]. This deletes a document(s), and returns you to the File List page. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-37 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview 9 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview Logging in to the administrator mode enables you to use the following functions. dReference For details on the administrator mode, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. The administrator modes are classified into two display modes: [Tab Function Display] and [List Function Display]. This manual shows an example where the [List Function Display] is set as the display mode. For details, refer to page 9-14. 9.6.1 Maintenance Item Description [Meter Count] Enables you to check the meter count of this machine. [ROM Version] Enables you to check the ROM version. [Import/Export] Saves (exports) setting information of this machine as a file, or writes (imports) it from a file to this machine. [Status Notification Setting] Configure the function to be reported to a registered user when an error has occurred in this machine. Specify the destination and items to notify a registered user of an error. [Total Counter Notification Setting] Configure the setting to notify the target user of the total counter by E-mail, and register the E-mail address of the destination. [Date/Time Setting] Specify the date and time displayed in this machine. [Timer Setting] Configure Power Save or Weekly Timer Setting in this machine. [Network Error Code Display Setting] Specify whether to display the network error code. 9 Administrator Mode Overview 9-38 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9.6 9.6.2 System Settings Reference - To use this machine as a scanner with the application software under TWAIN, install the dedicated driver software TWAIN. For details, refer to the TWAIN driver manual in the DVD supplied together with this machine. [Reset] Clears all settings for the network, controller and destinations. [License Settings] Allows you to issue a license and enable functions. Also, a request code can be issued. [Edit Font/Macro] Adds font or macro. [Job Log] Allows you to create and download log data of the jobs that were executed in this machine. Item Description Item Description [Machine Setting] Changes the registration information of this machine. [Register Support Information] Specify support information (such as contact name, corporate URL, or online manual URL) of this machine. To display this information, select [Information] - [Online Assistance]. [Network TWAIN] Specify the time to release the operation lock when scanning (excluding push-scanning). If necessary, configure settings to enable saving or reading a document in or from the external memory. [User Box Setting] Define the User Box functions such as deleting an unnecessary User Box or specifying the document deletion time. If necessary, configure settings to enable saving or reading a document in or from the external memory. [Stamp Settings] Register a header or footer. [Blank Page Print Settings] Specify whether to print contents configured in [Stamp/Composition] on blank pages. [Skip Job Operation Settings] Specify whether to skip a job. [Flash Display Setting] Specify whether to allow or restrict the flash display. [System Connection Setting] Configure the automatic setting of Prefix/Suffix or the setting for printing data in a cellular phone. [Display Setting] Select the display mode in the administrator mode from [Tab Function Display] or [List Function Display]. [Outline PDF Setting] Specify whether to outline text. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-39 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview 9 9.6.3 Security [Administrator Password Setting] is not displayed when: - The SSL certificate is not installed - Enhanced Security Mode is set to "ON" - [Mode using SSL/TLS] is set to [None] in [Security] - [PKI Settings] - [SSL Setting] even though a device certificate is already registered 9.6.4 User Authentication/Account Track Item Description [PKI Settings] Register device certificates and configure the SSL, protocol, or external certificate settings. [Certificate Verification Settings] Specify the items to validate a certificate. [Address Reference Setting] When giving destination access permission, specify a reference allowed group name or access allowed level. [Restrict User Access] Specify the function to restrict user operations. [Copy Security] Specify whether to use the copy guard or password copy function. [Auto Logout] Specify the time to automatically log out the administrator or user mode. [Administrator Password Setting] Specify the password to log in to the administrator mode. 9 Administrator Mode Overview 9-40 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9.6 9.6.5 Network Item Description [General Settings] Configure the User Authentication or Account Track setting in this machine. To enable authentication, configure the number of assigned counters or the When Number of Jobs Reach Maximum setting. [User Authentication Setting] When enabling User Authentication, register the target user or configure user setting. [Account Track Settings] When enabling Account Track, register and edit the target account. [External Server Settings] When enabling external server authentication, register the external server. [Public User Box Setting] Specify the upper limit of the number of User Boxes. [User/Account Common Setting] Specify whether to print data in single color or two-color mode. [Scan to Home Settings] Configure the setting to send a file to the Home folder. [Scan to Authorized Folder Settings] Configure settings to restrict manual TX destinations. Item Description [TCP/IP Setting] Configure the TCP/IP setting when connecting this machine via network. [E-mail Setting] Configure the settings to send or receive E-mails (including Internet fax), and specify the extension function such as E-mail authentication. [LDAP Setting] Configure the settings to register the LDAP server. [IPP Setting] Configure the IPP print setting. [FTP Setting] Configure the settings to use this machine as an FTP client or server. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-41 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview 9 9.6.6 User Boxes Logging in to the administrator mode enables you to handle a User Box without entering the password when opening it. [SNMP Setting] Configure SNMP settings. [SMB Setting] Configure the SMB client, WINS, or SMB print setting. [Web Service Settings] Configure the settings to perform scanning or printing using Web services. [Bonjour Setting] Configure Bonjour settings. [NetWare Setting] Configure NetWare settings. [AppleTalk Setting] Configure AppleTalk settings. [Network Fax Setting] Configure the direct SMTP TX or direct SMTP RX settings. [WebDAV Settings] Configure the WebDAV settings. [OpenAPI Setting] Configure the OpenAPI settings. [TCP Socket Setting] Configure the TCP Socket settings to have a data communication between this machine and the application software in your computer. [IEEE802.1x Authentication Setting] Configure IEEE802.1X authentication settings. [LLTD Setting] Select whether to enable or disable LLTD. [SSDP Settings] Configure the SSDP settings. [Bluetooth Setting] Select whether to enable or disable Bluetooth. • To enable a Bluetooth communication, contact your service representative in advance. Item Description Item Description [Open User Box] Opens the currently created User Box (Public, Group, or Personal User Box) to enable you to change the User Box setting. • Document operations are not available in the administrator mode. • User Box operations are available even if a password is specified for the target User Box. [Create User Box] Enables to create a new User Box. 9 Administrator Mode Overview 9-42 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9.6 9.6.7 Printer Settings [Open System User Box] Open the System User Box (Bulletin Board, Relay, or Annotation User Box) to enable you to handle a document saved in the User Box or change the User Box setting. • The Bulletin Board and Relay User Boxes are available when the optional Fax Kit is installed. [Create System User Box] Create a new Bulletin Board, Relay, or Annotation User Box. Item Description Item Description [Basic Setting] Specify the default values of the printer. [PCL Setting] Specify the default values in the PCL mode. [PS Setting] Specify the default values in the PS mode. [TIFF Setting] Specify the paper to print TIFF images. [XPS Settings] Configure the XPS print settings. [Interface Setting] Specify the timeout period of the interface. [Direct Print Settings] Configure the settings to enable direct printing using Web Connection. [Assign Account to Acquire Device Info] Select whether to specify a password to obtain device information through the printer driver. If [ON] is selected, specify the password. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-43 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview 9 9.6.8 Store Address Item Description [Address Book] Enables you to check the address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Group] Enables you to check the group address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Program] Enables you to check the program address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Temporary One-Touch] Enables you to check the temporary program address book registered in this machine or to register and change an address. [Subject] Registers up to 10 subjects when sending E-mails. [Text] Registers up to 10 body messages to be used when sending E-mails. [Application Registration] Registers application settings and server addresses when using the applications such as RightFax Server registered in the external server. Registering applications and servers enables you to automatically connect to the server of the selected application. • [Application Registration] is not displayed when the optional Fax Kit is installed. [Prefix/Suffix] Registers Prefix or Suffix to be added as destination information when Emailing. 9 Administrator Mode Overview 9-44 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9.6 9.6.9 Fax Settings Item Description [Header/Footer Position] Configure the setting to print the sender or receiving information. [Line Parameter Setting] Specify the fax line such as Dialing Method. [TX/RX Settings] Configure the paper, User Box, and other settings for sending or receiving data. [Function Setting] Configure the fax settings for Memory RX or Network Fax. [PBX Connection Setting] Specify the outside line at PBX connection. [Report Settings] Configure the setting for a report, for example, Activity Report, to be output when sending or receiving data. [Multi Line Settings] Specify the parameters and functions of the extended line. • This item is displayed when a line is extended. [Network Fax Setting] Configure the setting to use network fax. [Header Information] Registers sender information and fax number when sending data. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9-45 9.6 Administrator Mode Overview 9 9.6.10 Setting for each purpose Configure the settings according to the instructions shown in the window for items requiring multiple settings. The available setting items are as follows. - Configure the settings for sending a scanned document - Configure the network print settings - Restrict users using this machine Reference - As the setting procedure proceeds, its progress flow is displayed on the left. - If setting is cancelled, you will return to the Setting for each purpose page after the items that were configured before cancellation have been applied. 9 Administrator Mode Overview 9-46 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 9.6 10 Appendix ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 10-3 10.1 Error message list 10 10 Appendix 10.1 Error message list If an error message appears, perform the corresponding operation described below. dReference For details on the network settings, refer to [User's Guide Network Administrator]. Message Cause and remedy Unable to connect to the network. Make sure that the network cable is correctly connected. In addition, make sure that Network Settings in Administrator Settings have been correctly configured. The address for the communication method cannot be selected since the number of addresses has exceeded the maximum allowed for broadcasting. The number of destinations specified exceeds the number possible for a broadcast transmission. Reduce the number of broadcast destinations, or send the transmission in multiple batches. Document could not be saved in user box due to insufficient HDD capacity. Check log. The hard disk is full. Delete unnecessary data, and then try saving the data again. The number of registered user boxes has reached the max. allowance. The number of registered user boxes has reached the maximum allowed. The number of User Boxes that can be registered has reached the maximum number possible. The number of documents saved in the User Box has reached its maximum. The number of documents saved in the User Box has reached its maximum. The number of documents that can be saved in a User Box has reached the maximum number possible. The number of programmed jobs has reached the max. allowance. Wait until a programmed job is completed. The number of jobs that can be programmed has reached the maximum number possible. Wait until a job has been completed, or delete a current job. 10 Glossary 10-4 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 10.2 10.2 Glossary Term Description 10Base-T/100Base- TX/1000Base-T A set of specifications under the Ethernet standards. Those cables that consist of twisted copper wire pairs are used. The transmission speed of 10Base-T is 10 Mbps, of 100Base-TX is 100 Mbps, and of 1000Base-T is 1000 Mbps. Adobe® Flash® Software or its file format developed by Adobe Systems Inc. (formerly by Macromedia, Inc.), used to create a content by compiling vector-graphic animations and sounds. The software allows handling interactive contents using keyboard or mouse. The files can be kept relatively compact and accessed from a Web browser with dedicated plug-in software. Anonymous FTP While normal FTP sites are protected by an account name and password, this type of FTP site can be used by anyone without a password by simply entering anonymous as the account name. Authentication & print A function that allows you to print the job sent from the printer driver during user authentication. Auto IP A function to obtain an IP address automatically. If one fails to get an IP address via DHCP, the auto IP gets an IP address from the space of "169.254.0.0". bit The abbreviation for binary digit. The smallest unit of information (data quantity) handled by a computer or printer. A bit uses only a 0 or a 1 to indicate data. Bitmap Font A font using a collection of dots to present characters. Jagged edges are conspicuous for the larger size Bitmap Font characters. BMP The abbreviation for bitmap. This is a file format for saving image data. (The file extension is ".bmp".) Commonly used on Windows platforms. BMP covers the color depth from monochrome (2 values) to full color (16,777,216 colors). BMP images are not suitable for compressed storage. Byte A byte indicates a unit of information (data quantity) handled by a computer or printer. A byte consists of eight bits. Compact PDF A compression method for minimizing the data size using the PDF format, used for digitalizing color documents. Compact PDF allows high compression performance by identifying the text and image regions, and applying the resolution and compression method optimized for each region. The compact PDF method can be selected in this machine when using the scanning function to digitalize documents. Contrast The difference in intensity between the light and dark parts of the image (light/dark variation). "Low contrast" indicates an image with little light/dark variation, while "High contrast" an image with large light/dark variation. Default An initial setting. The settings selected in advance and enabled when the machine is turned on, or the settings selected in advance and enabled when the function is activated. Default Gateway A device, such as a computer or router, used as a "gateway" to access computers on different LANs. Density The amount of density of an image. Density Compensation A color tone correction function used for output devices such as printers and displays. DHCP The acronym for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. used for a client computer on the TCP/IP network to load network configuration automatically from a server. Just using a DHCP server to centrally manage IP addresses of the DHCP clients enables you to construct a network without IP address conflicts or other troubles. Dither A method of presenting the quasi-shading of gray using black and white colors. This method is easier to process than error diffusion, but may stir some unevenness on the image. DNS The acronym for Domain Name System. DNS allows for obtaining the IP address corresponding to a host name in network environments. This system enables a user to access other computers on the network by specifying host names instead of elusive and non-intuitive IP addresses. ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 10-5 10.2 Glossary 10 DPI (dpi) The acronym for Dots Per Inch. A unit of resolution used for printers and scanners. This indicates the number of dots used to represent an inch. The higher this value, the higher the resolution. Driver Software that works as a bridge between a computer and a peripheral device. Ethernet A standard for LAN transmission lines. File extension Characters added to a file name for the recognition of the file format. The file extension is added after a dot of a file name, for example, ".bmp" or ".jpg". FTP The acronym for File Transfer Protocol. This is a protocol used for transferring files via the Internet, an intranet or other TCP/IP network. Gradation The shading levels of an image. Larger number of the levels can reproduce smoother transition of the shading. Gray scale A form of presenting monochrome image by using the gradation information shifting from black to white. Halftone A method for presenting the shading of an image by using different sizes of black and white dots. Hard disk A large capacity storage device for storing data. The data is retained even after the power is turned off. HTTP The acronym for HyperText Transfer Protocol. This is a protocol used to send or receive data between a Web server and a client (such as a Web browser). HTTP can exchange files such as images, sounds, and movies that are associated with documents, including their presentation formats and other information. Install To install hardware, operating systems, applications, printer drivers, or other software on to a computer. IP Address An address or a code used to identify an individual network device on the Internet. IPv4 (Internet Protocol version 4), a protocol widely used today, adopts a 32- bit number for an IP address separated into four sections. An example of an IPv4 IP address is: 192.168.1.10. On the other hand, IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), the next generation protocol, adopts 128-bit IP addresses. An IP address is assigned to every computer or other device connected to the Internet. JPEG The acronym for Joint Photographic Experts Group, One of the file formats used to save image data. (The file extension is ".jpg".) The compression ratio is generally 1/10 to 1/100. JPEG is an effective method to compress photographs and other natural images. Kerberos A network authentication system used for Windows 2000 or later, used as the Active Directory authentication. Kerberos arranges an authentic site within the network to provide two-phase authentication processes of users login and the use of network resources, allowing users to be securely and efficiently authenticated. LAN The acronym for Local Area Network. This is a network constructed by connecting computers on the same floor, in the same building, or in neighboring buildings. LDAP The acronym for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol, a protocol used to access a database that can manage E-mail addresses and environmental information of network users on the Internet, intranet, or other TCP/IP network. Memory A storage device used for storing data temporarily. Some types of memory retain data even after the power is turned off, while others not. Multi Page TIFF A TIFF file that contains multiple pages. OS The acronym for Operating System. This is base software used to control the system of a computer. Windows, MacOS, or UNIX is an OS. PASV The abbreviation for PASsiVe, a mode used to connect to an FTP server from within a firewall. If this mode is not selected, the firewall regards the access as unauthorized and blocks the connection, disabling any file transmission. PDF The acronym for Portable Document Format. This is an electronically formatted document with file extension of ".pdf". PDF is based on the PostScript format. You can use the free Adobe Reader software to view PDF documents. Pixel The smallest constitutional unit of an image. Pixel indicates an image pixel, the smallest constitutional unit of an image. Term Description 10 Glossary 10-6 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 10.2 Plug and play A mechanism used to immediately detect a peripheral device when it is plugged into a computer, and search for an appropriate driver automatically, so that the device becomes operable. Port Number A number used to identify the transmission port assigned to each process running on a computer on the network. The same port cannot be used by multiple processes. PPI The acronym for Pixels Per Inch, Measuring unit for resolution, particularly for monitors and scanners. It indicates how many pixels are contained per inch. Preview A function allowing you to view an image before being processed for printing or scanning. Print job A print request transmitted from a computer to a printing device. Printer driver Software that works as a bridge between a computer and a printer. Property Attribute information. When using a printer driver, various functions can be specified in the file properties. By using properties of a file, you can check the attribute information about the file. Protocol A rule enabling a computer to communicate with other computers or peripherals. Proxy server A server that is installed to act as an intermediary connection between each client and different servers to effectively ensure security over the entire system for Internet connections. Resolution The resolution value indicates how much detail of an object can be reproduced precisely on an image or a print matter. Scanning The reading of an image in scanner operation by moving aligned image sensors step by step. The direction of moving image sensors is called the main scanning direction, and the direction of image sensors alignment is called the sub-scanning direction. Screen frequency The density of dots used to create the image. Single-page TIFF A TIFF file that contains only a single page. SMB The acronym for Server Message Block. This is a protocol for sharing files and printers mainly over the Windows network. SSL/TLS The acronym for Secure Socket Layer/Transport Layer Security, an encoding method used to securely transmit data between the Web server and a browser. Subnet mask A value used to divide a TCP/IP network into small networks (subnetworks). This is used to identify how many higher-order bits of an IP address are used for the network address. TCP/IP The acronym for Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. It is a de facto standard protocol widely used for the Internet. An IP address is used to identify each network device. Thumbnail A function of displaying the content of an image or document file by a small image (image displayed when the file is opened). TIFF The acronym for Tagged Image File Format, One of the file formats used for saving image data. (The file extension is ".tif".) By using the "tag" indicating the data type, information for various image formats can be saved in a single image data. TWAIN An interface standard defined for between imaging devices including scanners and digital cameras and applications including graphics software. To use a TWAIN compatible device, a relevant TWAIN driver is required. Uninstallation To delete software installed on a computer. USB The acronym for Universal Serial Bus. This is a general-purpose interface defined for connecting a mouse, printer, and other devices with a computer. Web browser Software used to view Web pages. Typical Web browsers include Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator. Term Description 11 Index ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 11-3 11.1 Index by item 11 11 Index 11.1 Index by item Numerics 1-sided/2-sided 7-9 A Accessing 9-3 Address book - search 7-37 Address search 7-45 Address type 7-37 Administrator settings 8-4, 8-15 Allow/restrict user box 8-23 Annotation user box 6-3, 7-87, 8-17 Application 7-61, 7-69 Application - book copy 6-16 Application - frame erase 6-15 Apply stamps 8-32 Auto delete secure document 8-21 B Background removal 6-14 Basic - color 6-12 Basic - density 6-12 Basic - file type 6-8 Basic - original type 6-6 Basic - resolution 6-7 Basic - simplex/duplex 6-7 Bind TX 7-34 Binding position 6-17 Body 7-56 Book copy method 6-16 Book erase - center erase 6-17 Book erase - frame erase 6-16 Bulletin board user box 7-81, 8-7 C Cellular phone/PDA setting 8-12, 8-25 Chapters 7-20 Check dest. & send 7-54 Check HDD capacity 8-27 Check printing preferences 7-104 Check/change temporarily 7-30 City 7-46 Color 7-10, 7-67 Combine 7-7, 7-13 Communication method settings 7-58 Communication settings 7-53 Company name 7-47 Continuous print 7-15 Control panel 3-2 Copies 7-9 Copy 7-65 Copy guard type 7-26 Copy protect 7-24 Cover sheet 7-18 Creating a user box 8-6, 8-16 Custom display settings 8-10 Custom size 6-13 Customize 9-22 D Date/time 7-21 Default tab 8-10 Delete empty user box(es) (Administrator settings) 8-7 Delete page 7-70 Delete secure print documents 8-20 Delete unused user box 8-20 Deleting documents 7-64 Density 7-90 Department 7-47 Despeckle 6-20 Detail 3-10 Detail search 7-38, 7-57 Detail settings 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-29, 7-43, 7-44, 7-80 Digital signature 7-60 Direct input 7-39, 7-57 Direct print 9-20 Direction settings - binding position 6-20 Direction settings - original direction 6-19 Displaying detailed information 7-68 Document delete time setting 8-24 Document details 7-68, 7-100 Document hold setting 8-22 Document name 7-55 Download 9-31 E ECM OFF 7-54 Edit document 7-70 Edit name 7-64 E-mail 7-40 E-mail addr. 7-46 E-mail encryption 7-60 E-mail settings 7-55 Encrypted PDF data 7-99 Encrypted PDF delete time 8-21 Encryption 6-9, 7-49 Encryption - detail settings 6-9, 7-49 Entering the PIN code 7-104 Error message list 10-3 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 11-4 11.1 Index by item 11 External memory 4-11, 4-15, 6-3, 7-98 External memory function settings 8-23 F Fax 7-40 Fax header settings 7-60 Fax number 7-46 Fax retransmit user box 7-93 Fax settings 9-44 F-code transmission 7-59 File list 9-24 File name 2-10 File path 7-42, 7-43, 7-44, 7-99 File type 6-8, 7-48, 7-67 Filing 4-17 Filing settings 7-63 Finishing 7-10 First name 7-46 Fold/bind 7-12 Format HDD 8-31 From 7-56 FTP 7-43 G Glossary 10-4 Group 7-11 H HDD encryption setting 8-31 HDD lock password 8-30 HDD settings 8-27 Header/footer 7-30 Host name 7-42, 7-43, 7-44 I Icons 3-4 ID & print delete after print setting 8-24 ID & print delete time 8-22 ID & print settings 8-25 ID & print user box 7-96 Image adjustment 6-14 Image shift - change back shift 7-17 Index 7-38 Information 9-18 Insert sheet 7-19 Insert sheet setting 7-23 Internet fax 7-41 IP address fax 7-42 J Job 9-19 Job history 7-45 Job list 3-6 Job list - delete 3-6 Job list - job details 3-7 L Last name 7-46 LDAP search - advanced search 7-46 LDAP search - search 7-46 Left panel 3-5 Line setting 7-53 Link file error notification 8-11 M Maintenance 9-37 Maximum number of user boxes 8-19 Memory RX user box 7-86 Menu tree 1-7, 4-23, 8-3 Mobile/PDA 7-103 Move page 7-73 Move/copy 9-34 Moving documents 7-64 N Name 7-46 Network 9-40 New 7-78 Next destination 7-43, 7-44 Number type 7-91 O Offset 7-11 Online help 9-4 Operating environment 9-3 OR/AND/STARTS WITH/ENDS WITH 7-47 Organizing documents 2-6 Original settings 6-19 Outline PDF 6-11, 7-51 Overlay setting 7-32 Overseas TX 7-53 Overwrite 7-79 Overwrite all data 8-29 Overwrite HDD data 8-28 P Page configuration 9-16 Page margin 7-16 Page number 7-22 Paper 7-101 Password 7-42, 7-43, 7-44 Password encrypted PDF user box 7-95 Password transmission 7-59 PC (SMB) 7-42 Photo size 6-13 Polling TX user box 7-82 Position 7-25, 7-29 Preview 3-14, 3-15, 7-68 Preview/set range 7-75 Preview/specify by Input 7-75 Print 7-6, 7-7, 9-25 Print - application 7-16 Print - basic 7-9, 7-100 Print position 7-91 Print/save 7-95 11-5 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 11 Index by item 11.1 Printer settings 9-42 Printing 4-5, 4-15 Proxy server use 8-11 Punch 7-11 Punch - position setting 7-12 R Receiver RX ability 7-41 Reference 7-43 Register overlay 7-77 Registered overlay 7-31 Relay user box 8-9 Resolution 7-47, 7-66 Rotate page 7-71 S Save in external memory 7-65 Save in user box 7-102 Saving 4-3, 4-11 Saving documents 2-3, 6-3 Scan setting 6-11, 7-52 Scan settings 6-6 Scan size 6-13 Search options 7-39 Secondary field 7-90 Secure document user box 7-83 Security 9-39 Security details 8-27 Security print only 8-27 Select line 7-54 Send 7-33, 7-34, 9-28 Send & print 7-62 Sending 4-8 Separate scan 6-18 Setting for each purpose 9-45 Sharpness 6-15 Sheet/cover/chapter Insert 7-17 Shortcut key 8-10 Sort 7-11 Special original 6-19 Stamp 7-23 Stamp composition 7-51 Stamp element 7-90 Stamp repeat 7-28 Stamp settings 8-32 Stamp type 7-28 Stamp/composition 7-21 Standard size 6-13 Staple 7-11 Staple - position setting 7-11 Store address 9-21, 9-43 Subject 7-55 System settings 9-38 System user box 6-4 T Timer transmission 7-58 Touch panel 3-4 U URL notification setting 7-57 Use/file 7-3 Use/file - check job settings 3-12 Use/file - check job settings - check e-mail settings 3-14 Use/file - check job settings - communication settings 3-14 Use/file - check job settings - destination settings 3-13 Use/file - check job settings - document setting contents 3-13 Use/file - details 3-12 User authentication 2-8 User authentication/account track 9-39 User box administrator setting 8-26 User box setting 8-10, 8-20 User boxes 9-19, 9-41 User name 7-42, 7-43, 7-44 Using documents 2-4 V V.34 OFF 7-54 W Web browser cache 9-4 Web Connection 9-3 WebDAV 7-44 Z Zoom 7-14 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 11-6 11.2 Index by button 11 11.2 Index by button Numerics 1-Sided 6-7 2in1 7-13 2-Sided 6-7 4in1 7-13 8in1 7-13 A Address Type 7-37 Advanced Search 7-46 All Jobs 3-8, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11 Allow/Restrict User Box 8-23 Annotation User Box 7-87, 8-17 Application 7-35 Apply Stamps 8-32 Auto 6-20 Auto Color 6-12 Auto Delete Secure Document 8-21 B Back (Blank) 7-18 Back (Copy) 7-18 Background Pattern 7-25, 7-27, 7-28 Background Removal 6-14 Bind TX 7-33 Binding Position 6-17, 6-20 Black 6-12, 7-52 Blank 7-20 Body 7-56 Book Copy 6-16 Book Spread 6-16 Bulletin Board User Box 7-81, 8-7 C Center Erase 6-17 Center Staple & Fold 7-12 Change Pos./Delete 7-25, 7-29 Chapter Paper 7-20 Chapters 7-17 Check HDD Capacity 8-27 Check Job 3-5 Check Job Set. 3-7, 3-8 Check Job Settings 3-12 Check/Change Temporarily 7-30 City 7-46 Color 6-12, 7-52, 7-80 Combine 7-6, 7-7, 7-13 Comm. List 3-9, 3-10, 3-11 Communication Method Settings 7-58 Communication Settings 7-35 Compact PDF 6-8, 7-48 Compact XPS 6-8, 7-48 Company Name 7-47 Compulsory Memory RX User Box 7-86 Continuous Print 7-8, 7-15 Copied Paper 6-6 Copy 7-19, 7-63, 7-65 Copy Guard Pattern 7-27 Copy Protect 7-21, 7-24 Copy Protect Pattern 7-25 Cover + 2-Sided 6-7 Cover Sheet 7-17 Custom Display Settings - User Box Setting 8-10 Custom Size 6-13 D Date/Time 7-21, 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29, 7-90, 8-18 Default Tab 8-10 Delete 3-6, 3-7, 3-8, 3-10, 3-11, 7-63, 7-85, 7-86, 7-92, 7-94, 7-95, 7-97 Delete Page 3-16 Delete Secure Print Documents 8-20 Delete Unused User Box 8-20 Deleted Jobs 3-8, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11 Deleting 7-64 Density 6-12, 7-25, 7-29, 7-80, 7-90, 8-18 Department 7-47 Despeckle 6-20 Detail 3-7, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12 Detail Search 7-38 Detail Settings 6-9, 7-24, 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-29, 7-32, 7-43, 7-44, 7-80 Detail View 7-4 Digital Signature 7-60 Display Name 7-32 Do Not Print # 7-23 Do Not Print Page Number 7-23 Document Delete Time Setting 8-24 Document Details 7-4, 7-63, 7-68, 7-69, 7-85, 7-86, 7-92, 7-100 Document Hold Setting 8-22 Document Name 6-5, 7-55 Document Permissions 6-9, 7-49 Document Settings 7-35 Dot Matrix Original 6-6 E ECM OFF 7-54 Edit Document 7-69 Edit Name 7-63, 7-64, 7-85, 7-86, 7-92 E-mail 7-40 E-mail Addr. 7-46 E-mail Encryption 7-60 E-Mail Settings 7-55 Encrypted PDF Delete Time 8-21 Encryption 6-9, 7-49 Encryption Priority 8-28 Existing Setting 7-14 11-7 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 11 Index by button 11.2 External Memory 7-98 External Memory Document Scan 8-23 External Memory Function Settings 8-23 F Fax 3-16, 7-40, 7-93 Fax Header Settings 7-60 Fax Number 7-46 F-Code transmission 7-59 File Path 7-42, 7-43, 7-44 File Type 6-8, 7-48 Finished Jobs 3-8, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11 Finishing 7-7, 7-8 First Name 7-46 Fold/Bind 7-12 Format HDD 8-31 Forward 3-10 Frame Erase 6-15, 6-16 From 7-56 Front (Blank) 7-18 Front (Copy) 7-18 Front + Back Cover 6-16 Front Cover 6-16 FTP 7-43 Full Color 6-12, 7-52 Full Size 7-14 G Gray Scale 6-12, 7-52 Group 7-35 H Half-Fold 7-12 HDD Encryption Setting 8-31 HDD Lock Password 8-30 HDD Settings 8-27 Header/Footer 7-21, 7-30 Host Name 7-42, 7-43, 7-44 I ID & Print Delete after Print Setting 8-24 ID & Print Delete Time 8-22 ID & Print Settings 8-25 ID & Print User Box 7-96 Image 7-51 Image Adjustment 6-14 Image Details 7-32 Image Shift 7-16 Increase Priority 3-7 Index 7-38, 8-6 Insert Paper 7-19 Insert Sheet 7-17 Insert Sheet Setting 7-22 Insert Type 7-19 Internet Fax 7-41 IP Address Fax 7-42 J Job Details 3-7 Job List 3-5, 3-6 JPEG 6-8, 7-48 L L1 3-8 L2 3-8 Last Name 7-46 Left 6-20 Line Setting 7-53 Long Original 6-19 M Manual 7-14 Maximum Number of User Boxes 8-19 Minimal 7-14 Mixed Original 6-19 Mode 1 8-28 Mode 2 8-28 Move 7-63 Moving documents 7-64 Multi Page 6-11, 7-52 N Name 7-46 New 7-78 Next Destination 7-42, 7-43, 7-44 Next Page 3-15, 3-16, 7-75 Number Type 7-91, 8-18 O OR/AND/STARTS WITH/ENDS WITH 7-47 Original Direction 6-19 Original Settings 6-5, 6-19 Original Type 6-6 Other 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29 Overseas TX 7-53 Overwrite 7-79 Overwrite All Data 8-29 Overwrite Priority 8-28 P Page Margin 7-7, 7-8, 7-16 Page Number 7-21, 7-22 Page Separation 6-11, 7-52 Paper 7-101 Password 6-9, 7-42, 7-43, 7-44, 7-49, 8-6, 8-8, 8-17 Password Copy Pattern 7-28 Password Encrypted PDF User Box 7-95 Password transmission 7-59 Pattern Overwrite 7-25, 7-29 PC (SMB) 7-42 PDF 6-8, 7-48 Photo 6-6 Photo Size 6-13 ineo+ 220/280/360 (Version 2) 11-8 11.2 Index by button 11 Polling TX User Box 7-82 Position 7-24, 7-25, 7-29 Position Setting 7-11 Preset Stamp 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29 Prev. Page 3-15, 3-16, 7-75 Preview 3-5, 3-14, 7-68 Preview/Set Range 7-75 Preview/Specify by Input 7-75 Primary Field 8-18 Print 7-6, 7-97, 7-99 Print Document 8-23 Print on Back Cover only 7-23 Print on Front and Back Cover 7-23 Print page # 7-23 Print Position 7-21, 7-22, 7-24, 7-91, 8-18 Proof Print 7-93 Public, Personal, or Group User Box 8-6 R Receiver RX Ability 7-41 Redial 3-8, 3-10 Reference 7-43 Register Overlay 7-69, 7-77, 7-92 Registered Overlay 7-21, 7-31 Registered Stamp 7-25, 7-29 Relay Destination 8-9 Relay TX Password 8-9 Relay User Box 8-9 Release Held Job 3-7 Reset 7-4 Resolution 6-7, 7-47 S Save Document 7-4, 8-23 Scan 3-16 Scan Settings 6-5 Scan Size 6-13 Search 7-35, 7-37, 7-46 Secondary Field 7-90, 8-18 Secure Document User Box 7-83 Security Print Only 8-27 Select All 7-4 Send & Print 7-62 Separate Scan 6-18 Separation 6-16 Sharpness 6-15 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert 7-7 Shortcut key 8-10 Simplex/Duplex 6-7 Skip the Page(s) 7-23 Sort 7-19, 7-20 Stamp 7-21, 7-23 Stamp Composition 7-51 Stamp Element 7-90 Stamp Repeat 7-21, 7-28 Stamp/Composition 7-7, 7-8, 7-61 Subject 7-55 T Text 6-6, 7-51 Text Color 7-24, 7-29 Text Details 7-21, 7-22, 7-31 Text Size 7-24, 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-29 Text/Background Color 7-25, 7-27, 7-28 Text/Photo 6-6 Thumbnail View 7-4, 7-32 TIFF 6-8, 7-48 Timer transmission 7-58 Timer TX Job 3-8 Top 6-20 U URL Notification Setting 7-57 Use Existing Color Setting 7-52 User Box 6-5 User Box Administrator Setting 8-26 User Box Name 8-6, 8-8, 8-9, 8-17 User Box No 8-8, 8-9, 8-17 User Box No. 8-6 User Box Setting 8-20 User Name 7-42, 7-43, 7-44 V V.34 OFF 7-54 View Finishing 3-15, 3-16 W WebDAV 7-44 X XPS 6-8, 7-48 Z Z-Folded Original 6-19 Box operations bizhub C252 Contents-1 Contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome............................................................................................ 1-3 1.2 Energy Star®..................................................................................... 1-4 What is an ENERGY STAR® product? .......................................... 1-4 1.3 Trademarks and registered trademarks......................................... 1-5 License information........................................................................ 1-5 OpenSSL Statement ...................................................................... 1-6 1.4 About this manual............................................................................. 1-9 Structure of the manual ................................................................. 1-9 Notation........................................................................................ 1-10 Screens, windows and dialog boxes ........................................... 1-10 1.5 Explanation of manual conventions.............................................. 1-11 Safety advices.............................................................................. 1-11 Sequence of action ...................................................................... 1-11 Tips .............................................................................................. 1-12 Special text markings................................................................... 1-12 1.6 User manuals .................................................................................. 1-13 User manual [Copy Operations]................................................... 1-13 User manual [Network Scanner Operations]................................ 1-13 User manual [Box Operations] ............................. 1-13 User manual [Enlarge Display Operations] .................................. 1-13 User manual [FK-502 Facsimile Operations] ............................... 1-13 User manual [Network Facsimile Operations].............................. 1-13 User manual [Print Operations] .................................................... 1-14 2 Overview of the box functions 2.1 Box functions .................................................................................... 2-3 Types of boxes............................................................................... 2-4 2.2 Available box functions.................................................................... 2-5 Saving documents ......................................................................... 2-5 Moving/copying box documents ................................................... 2-5 Changing a document name.......................................................... 2-5 Deleting a document...................................................................... 2-5 Changing settings .......................................................................... 2-5 Printing a document....................................................................... 2-5 Transmitting a document ............................................................... 2-6 Faxing a document ........................................................................ 2-6 Contents-2 bizhub C252 2.3 Specifying settings for using the box functions ............................. 2-7 Registering and specifying settings for boxes................................ 2-7 3 Saving documents 3.1 Information on saving documents ................................................... 3-3 User authentication......................................................................... 3-3 Registering boxes ........................................................................... 3-5 Naming documents......................................................................... 3-6 3.2 Saving copies in boxes ..................................................................... 3-7 Settings that can be saved and changed ....................................... 3-7 Saving copy documents ................................................................. 3-8 3.3 Saving scans in boxes..................................................................... 3-11 Using a box destination ................................................................ 3-11 To save data to a box destination ................................................ 3-13 To save data to the specified box ................................................ 3-15 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4.1 Displaying the box mode screen...................................................... 4-3 Viewing documents saved in boxes ............................................... 4-3 Searching for a box name............................................................... 4-5 4.2 Deleting document data ................................................................... 4-6 To delete data................................................................................. 4-6 4.3 Changing the document name......................................................... 4-7 To change the document name...................................................... 4-7 4.4 Moving document data ..................................................................... 4-8 To move a document...................................................................... 4-8 4.5 Copying document data.................................................................. 4-10 To copy a document..................................................................... 4-10 4.6 Printing document data .................................................................. 4-12 To print a document ..................................................................... 4-14 To change the number of copies.................................................. 4-15 To specify single-sided/double-sided printing ............................. 4-16 Specifying finishing settings ......................................................... 4-17 To specify the finishing settings ................................................... 4-18 To bind the copies at the center (“Fold & Staple” function) ......... 4-20 Adding a binding margin............................................................... 4-21 To specify the page margin settings............................................. 4-22 Adding cover pages (“Cover Mode” function) .............................. 4-23 To specify the cover mode settings.............................................. 4-24 bizhub C252 Contents-3 Printing the date/time (“Date/Time” function) .............................. 4-26 To specify the “Date/Time” function ............................................ 4-27 Printing page numbers (“Page #” function).................................. 4-29 To specify the “Page #” function ................................................. 4-30 Printing distribution numbers (“Set Numbering” function)........... 4-33 To specify the “Set Numbering” function .................................... 4-34 4.7 Printing a proof copy...................................................................... 4-36 To print a proof copy ................................................................... 4-36 4.8 Combined printing.......................................................................... 4-38 To print a document..................................................................... 4-40 To change the number of copies ................................................. 4-42 To specify single-sided/double-sided printing ............................ 4-43 Specifying finishing settings ........................................................ 4-44 To specify the finishing settings................................................... 4-45 To bind the copies at the center (“Fold & Staple” function)......... 4-47 Printing the date/time (“Date/Time” function) .............................. 4-48 To specify the “Date/Time” function ............................................ 4-49 Adding a binding margin.............................................................. 4-51 To specify the page margin settings............................................ 4-52 Printing distribution numbers (“Set Numbering” function)........... 4-53 To specify the “Set Numbering” function .................................... 4-54 Printing page numbers (“Page #” function).................................. 4-55 To specify the “Page #” function ................................................. 4-56 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5.1 Editing document data..................................................................... 5-3 5.2 Routing .............................................................................................. 5-4 Routing types................................................................................. 5-4 Transmission methods................................................................... 5-5 Available settings ........................................................................... 5-5 To route data.................................................................................. 5-6 5.3 Specifying destinations.................................................................... 5-7 To specify a program as the destination........................................ 5-7 To select a destination from a group ............................................. 5-9 To select a destination from the address book ........................... 5-11 Searching for a destination .......................................................... 5-13 To directly specify the e-mail destination .................................... 5-15 Directly specifying an FTP destination......................................... 5-17 To directly specify an FTP destination......................................... 5-18 Directly specifying an SMB destination ....................................... 5-20 To directly specify an SMB destination ....................................... 5-21 Contents-4 bizhub C252 5.4 Checking settings before routing .................................................. 5-23 Checking the document information ............................................ 5-23 To check information .................................................................... 5-24 Specifying the file format .............................................................. 5-26 To specify the file format .............................................................. 5-27 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6.1 Editing document data...................................................................... 6-3 6.2 Routing ............................................................................................... 6-4 Routing types.................................................................................. 6-4 Transmission methods.................................................................... 6-4 Available settings............................................................................ 6-5 To route data .................................................................................. 6-6 6.3 Specifying destinations..................................................................... 6-8 To specify a program as the destination ........................................ 6-8 To select a destination from a group ............................................ 6-10 To select a destination from the address book ............................ 6-12 Searching for a destination........................................................... 6-14 To directly specify the e-mail destination ..................................... 6-16 Directly specifying an FTP destination.......................................... 6-18 To directly specify an FTP destination.......................................... 6-19 Directly specifying an SMB destination ........................................ 6-21 To directly specify an SMB destination ........................................ 6-22 6.4 Checking settings before routing .................................................. 6-24 Checking the document information ............................................ 6-24 To check information .................................................................... 6-24 Changing the text ......................................................................... 6-26 To change the stamp elements .................................................... 6-27 7 Control panel settings 7.1 Specifying settings from the control panel..................................... 7-3 Utility mode parameters.................................................................. 7-3 Box permissions ............................................................................. 7-3 Additional information..................................................................... 7-4 7.2 Registering boxes.............................................................................. 7-5 Registering public/personal user boxes ......................................... 7-6 To register a box............................................................................. 7-7 7.3 Displaying the administrator setting screen................................. 7-10 To display the administrator setting screen.................................. 7-10 7.4 Specifying user box settings .......................................................... 7-12 To delete unused user boxes ....................................................... 7-12 bizhub C252 Contents-5 7.5 Specifying box administrator settings.......................................... 7-13 To specify the “User Box Admin. Setting” parameter ................. 7-14 7.6 Specifying HDD setting parameters ............................................. 7-16 To check the hard disk capacity .................................................. 7-17 To overwrite temporary data........................................................ 7-18 Overwrite all data ......................................................................... 7-22 To overwrite all data..................................................................... 7-23 To specify the hard disk locking password ................................. 7-25 To specify hard disk encryption................................................... 7-27 To format the hard disk................................................................ 7-30 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8.1 Settings that can be specified using PageScope Web Connection ............................................................................... 8-3 User mode...................................................................................... 8-3 Administrator mode ....................................................................... 8-4 8.2 Using PageScope Web Connection................................................ 8-5 System requirements ..................................................................... 8-5 Accessing PageScope Web Connection ....................................... 8-6 Structure of pages ......................................................................... 8-7 Web browser cache ....................................................................... 8-9 For Internet Explorer ...................................................................... 8-9 For Netscape Navigator ................................................................. 8-9 8.3 Logging on and logging off............................................................ 8-10 Logging off ................................................................................... 8-10 To log off ...................................................................................... 8-10 Logging on to user mode (public user) ........................................ 8-12 Logging on to user mode (registered user/box administrator) .... 8-14 To log on as a registered user/box administrator ........................ 8-14 Logging on to administrator mode............................................... 8-16 To log on to administrator mode.................................................. 8-16 8.4 Opening a box (User mode) ........................................................... 8-19 Opening boxes............................................................................. 8-19 To open a box .............................................................................. 8-21 Checking box information and downloading documents ............ 8-22 Changing the box settings ........................................................... 8-24 Deleting a box .............................................................................. 8-26 8.5 Creating boxes (User mode).......................................................... 8-27 To create a box ............................................................................ 8-29 Contents-6 bizhub C252 8.6 Opening a box (Administrator mode) ............................................ 8-30 Opening boxes.............................................................................. 8-30 To open a box............................................................................... 8-31 Changing the box settings............................................................ 8-32 Deleting a box............................................................................... 8-34 8.7 Creating boxes (Administrator mode) ........................................... 8-35 To create a box............................................................................. 8-35 8.8 Specifying box administrator settings (Administrator mode) ..... 8-36 9 Appendix 9.1 Error message list ............................................................................. 9-3 9.2 Entering text....................................................................................... 9-4 To type text ..................................................................................... 9-6 List of available characters ............................................................. 9-6 9.3 Glossary.............................................................................................. 9-7 9.4 Index ................................................................................................. 9-11 1 Introduction Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-3 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome Thank you for choosing a Konica Minolta digital electrophotographic copier. This User manual contains details on the operations required to use the Box functions of bizhub C252 and the precautions on their use. Carefully read this manual before using these functions. If software (such as PageScope Job Spooler, HDDTWAIN or PageScope Box Operator) other than that described in this User manual has been installed, data saved in a box can be used from a computer on the network. Since the operation differs for each software, refer to the manual for the corresponding software for details. After reading this User manual, store it in the designated holder. In order to ensure that this machine is used correctly and safely, carefully read the "Installation and Operation Precautions" in the User manual [Copy Operations] before using the machine. 1 Introduction 1-4 bizhub C252 1.2 Energy Star® As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, we have determined that this machine meets the ENERGY STAR® Guidelines for energy efficiency. What is an ENERGY STAR® product? An ENERGY STAR® product has a special feature that allows it to automatically switch to a "low-power mode" after a period of inactivity. An ENERGY STAR® product uses energy more efficiently, saves you money on utility bills and helps protect the environment. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-5 1.3 Trademarks and registered trademarks KONICA MINOLTA, KONICA MINOLTA Logo, and The essentials of imaging are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. PageScope and bizhub are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Netscape Communications, the Netscape Communications logo, Netscape Navigator, Netscape Communicator, and Netscape are trademarks of Netscape Communications Corporation. This machine and PageScope Box Operator are based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Compact-VJE Copyright 1986-2003 VACS Corp. RC4® is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. RSA® is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. RSA BSAFE® is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. License information This product includes RSA BSAFE Cryptographic software from RSA Security Inc. 1 Introduction 1-6 bizhub C252 OpenSSL Statement OpenSSL License Copyright © 1998-2000 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)" 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact opensslcore@ openssl.org. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@crypt-Soft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-7 Original SSLeay License Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, Ihash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@crypt-soft.com)" The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related. 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tin Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT 1 Introduction 1-8 bizhub C252 (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.] All other product names mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-9 1.4 About this manual This user manual covers the bizhub C252 box functions. This section introduces the structure of the manual and notations used for product names, etc. This manual is intended for users who understand the basic operations of computers and the machine. For the operating procedures of Windows or Macintosh operating system and application programs, refer to the respective manuals. In addition, software, such as HDDTWAIN and PageScope Box Operator, which are used with the Box functions of this machine, are also available. Users of these software should refer to the corresponding manuals on the User Software CD-ROM. Structure of the manual This manual consists of the following chapters. Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Overview of the box functions Chapter 3 Saving documents Chapter 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box Chapter 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box Chapter 6 Routing a document from the system user box Chapter 7 Control panel settings Chapter 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection Chapter 9 Appendix 1 Introduction 1-10 bizhub C252 Notation Screens, windows and dialog boxes The touch panel screens and PageScope Web Connection windows and dialog boxes that appear in this manual show a machine with optional ADF (automatic document feeder) DF-601 installed. Product name Notation in the manual bizhub C252 This machine, C252 Microsoft Windows 98 Windows 98 Microsoft Windows Me Windows Me Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 Windows NT 4.0 Microsoft Windows 2000 Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows XP Windows XP When the operating systems above are written together Windows 98/Me Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-11 1.5 Explanation of manual conventions The marks and text formats used in this manual are described below. Safety advices 6 DANGER Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in fatal or critical injuries in fact of electrical power. % Observe all dangers in order to prevent injuries. 7 WARNING Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in serious injuries or property damage. % Observe all warnings in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use of the machine. 7 CAUTION Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in slight injuries or property damage. % Observe all cautions in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use of the machine. Sequence of action 1 The number 1 as formatted here indicates the first step of a sequence of actions. 2 Subsequent numbers as formatted here indicate subsequent steps of a sequence of actions. ? Text formatted in this style provides additional assistance. % Text formatted in this style describes the action that will ensure the desired results are achieved. An illustration inserted here shows what operations must be performed. 1 Introduction 1-12 bizhub C252 Tips 2 Note Text highlighted in this manner contains useful information and tips to ensure safe use of the machine. 2 Reminder Text highlighted in this manner contains information that should be reminded. ! Detail Text highlighted in this manner contains references for more detailed information. Special text markings [Stop] key The names of keys on the control panel are written as shown above. MACHINE SETTING Display texts are written as shown above. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-13 1.6 User manuals The following user manuals have been prepared for this machine. User manual [Copy Operations] This manual contains details on basic operations and the operating procedures for the various copy functions. - Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for copy functions, including precautions on installation/use, turning the machine on/off, loading paper, and troubleshooting operations such as clearing paper misfeeds. User manual [Network Scanner Operations] This manual contains details on specifying network settings for standard equipment and on operations for scanning functions. - Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for network functions and for using Scan to E-Mail, Scan to FTP and Scan to SMB. User manual [Box Operations] This manual contains details on operating procedures for using the boxes. - Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for using the boxes on the hard disk. User manual [Enlarge Display Operations] This manual contains details on operating procedures for using copy, network scanner and fax functions in Enlarge Display mode. - Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures in Enlarge Display mode. User manual [FK-502 Facsimile Operations] This manual contains details on operating procedures for faxing. - Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for fax functions when the fax kit is installed. User manual [Network Facsimile Operations] This manual contains details on operating procedures for network faxing. - Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for using the network fax functions (Internet faxing, SIP faxing and IP address faxing). 1 Introduction 1-14 bizhub C252 User manual [Print Operations] This manual contains details on operating procedures using the standard built-in printer controller. - For details on the printing functions, refer to user manual (PDF file) on User Software CD-ROM. 2 Overview of the box functions Overview of the box functions 2 bizhub C252 2-3 2 Overview of the box functions 2.1 Box functions The Box functions allow document data to be saved on the machine’s internal hard disk and later printed. Documents that can be saved are data scanned for copying, received faxes, and saved scan data. To save data to a box, create the box, and then save the data to the specified box. The saved data can be printed, sent by e-mail, forwarded to an FTP site, or sent to a computer. If the Box functions are used, documents can easily be scanned repeatedly and the data can be saved on separate computers. 2 Overview of the box functions 2-4 bizhub C252 Types of boxes Various types of boxes are available for different uses. With this machine, 1,000 boxes can be created. The boxes can be given any number between 1 and 999,999,999. - Public/personal user boxes Two box types can be specified: "Public" and "Personal". Public user boxes can be used by all users. Access to the box can be controlled by specifying a password for the box. Personal user boxes can be used by certain individuals. If user authentication settings have been applied, the box can only be accessed by users that have logged on. - System user boxes These are boxes that were already set up when the machine was purchased. There are six types of system user boxes. For details on using the system user boxes, refer to the corresponding user manual. Box name Description Bulletin Board User Box This appears when optional fax kit FK-502 is installed. Documents can be saved in this box, which can be used like a bulletin board. Up to 10 additional boxes can be created within the bulletin board user box. For details, refer to the User manual [Facsimile Operations]. Polling TX User Box This appears when optional fax kit FK-502 is installed. Data can be registered in this box for polling transmissions. For details, refer to the User manual [Facsimile Operations]. Secure Print User Box Confidential documents can be saved in this box. A password must be entered in order to access the document. Up to 200 documents can be saved. For details, refer to the User manual [Print Operations]. Memory RX User Box This appears when optional fax kit FK-502 is installed. Received fax documents will be saved in this box when “Memory RX” is set to “ON”. When a fax that you do not wish to print out is received, it can be saved and printed when desired. For details, refer to the User manual [Facsimile Operations]. Annotation User Box This box is used when adding an image of the date/time or number to document data saved in Scan mode before routing it. For details on saving documents in annotation user boxes, refer to the User manual [Network Scanner Operations]. Re-TX User Box This appears when optional fax kit FK-502 is installed. A document that, even after redialing, could not be sent because the recipient’s line is busy is temporarily saved in this box. The saved document can later be sent to the same recipient. For details, refer to the User manual [Facsimile Operations]. Overview of the box functions 2 bizhub C252 2-5 2.2 Available box functions Saving documents Copies made using this machine, sent faxes, and scanned document data can all be saved in boxes. For details on saving using each function, refer to the pages indicated below or refer to the User manual [Facsimile Operations]. For copy data, refer to "Saving copies in boxes" on page 3-7. For scan data, refer to "Saving scans in boxes" on page 3-11. Faxing: User manual [Facsimile Operations] Printing: User manual [Print Operations] Moving/copying box documents Document data saved in a box can be moved or copied to a different box. For details, refer to "Moving document data" on page 4-8 and "Copying document data" on page 4-10. Changing a document name The name given to document data can be changed. For details, refer to the "Changing the document name" on page 4-7. Deleting a document Data that has already been printed or is no longer needed can be deleted. For details, refer to "Deleting document data" on page 4-6. Changing settings Before printing document data, settings can be specified, such as the finishing settings, the binding position and whether or not a cover sheet is added. For details, refer to "Printing document data" on page 4-12. Printing a document Document data saved in Copy mode or saved with the printer driver can be printed. Each document can be printed separately or up to 10 documents can be selected and printed together. This is called "combined printing". If optional scan accelerator kit SA-501 is installed, data saved from Scan mode can also be printed. If optional scan accelerator kit SA-501 is installed, data saved from Scan mode can also be printed. For details on printing, refer to "Printing document data" on page 4-12. For details on combined printing, refer to "Combined printing" on page 4-38. 2 Overview of the box functions 2-6 bizhub C252 Transmitting a document Document data saved in Scan mode can be sent as an e-mail attachment or to an FTP site or a shared folder on a computer. In addition, a fax document saved in a box can be routed. For details, refer to the User manual [Facsimile Operations]. Faxing a document Document data saved in Fax mode can be sent as a fax. For details, refer to the User manual [Facsimile Operations]. Overview of the box functions 2 bizhub C252 2-7 2.3 Specifying settings for using the box functions Before using the Box functions, the following settings should be specified. Registering and specifying settings for boxes Register the boxes where data will be saved. Boxes can be set up by using the machine’s touch panel or by using PageScope Web Connection from a Web browser on a computer on the network. ! Detail For registering and specifying settings for recipients, refer to the following sections. "Registering boxes" on page 7-5 "Opening a box (User mode)" on page 8-19 2 Overview of the box functions 2-8 bizhub C252 3 Saving documents Saving documents 3 bizhub C252 3-3 3 Saving documents 3.1 Information on saving documents Keep in mind the following information before saving documents. 2 Note For details on saving fax documents, refer to the User manual [Facsimile Operations] User authentication This machine can be set so that an account or user name and a password must be entered in order to use the machine. Contact the administrator for details on the account or user name for using the machine. With user authentication Type in the user name and password, and then press the [Access] key. 3 Saving documents 3-4 bizhub C252 With account track Type in the account name and password, and then press the [Access] key. 2 Note With user authentication, the only boxes that are displayed are those that can be accessed by the user that is logged on. With account track, all boxes are considered shared boxes. If "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error" in Administrator mode is set to "Mode 2" and a user enters an incorrect password the specified number of times, that user is locked out and can no longer use the machine. Contact the administrator to cancel operation restrictions. Saving documents 3 bizhub C252 3-5 Registering boxes Before document data can be saved, a box must be created to save the data in. Up to 1,000 boxes can be created. Up to 200 documents can be saved in a single box. A total of 9,000 pages can be saved in all boxes. A total of 3,000 documents can be saved in all boxes. There are public user boxes, which can be used by more than one person, and personal user boxes, which can be used only by a single person. For details on registering boxes, refer to "Registering boxes" on page 7-5 and "Opening a box (User mode)" on page 8-19. 3 Saving documents 3-6 bizhub C252 Naming documents Document data that is saved can be given a name. - The names can contain a maximum of 30 characters. - The names can also be changed after they are saved. - The names can be specified when the data is saved; however, if the data is saved without a name specified, a preset name is applied. - Names are created by combining the following elements. As an example, the document name "CKMBT_C25204102315230" is described. Element Description C This letter indicates the mode when the document was saved. C: Copy F: Fax S: Scan P: Printing KMBT_C252 This represents the name of the device that scanned the data. The factory default is "KMBT_C252". This name can be changed with the "Input Machine Address" parameter on the Administrator/Machine Setting screen in Administrator mode. A name of up to 10 characters can be specified. 04102315230 This indicates the year (last two digits), month, day, hour and minutes when the data was scanned. The last digit is a serial number if the document is part of a series of scans. _0001 This indicates the page when multi-page data is scanned. This numeral does not appear in the Document Name screen; however, it is added automatically as part of the name when the file is routed. Add this part to the name according to the naming conditions of the server to receive files, for example, when sending data by FTP. .JPG This is the extension for the specified data format. These characters do not appear in the Document Name screen; however, they are added automatically as part of the name when the file is routed. Saving documents 3 bizhub C252 3-7 3.2 Saving copies in boxes Settings that can be saved and changed Within the various functions that can be specified before making copies, there are functions whose settings can be saved and there are functions that cannot be saved but can be set when printing. The functions whose settings can be saved and those that can be changed are listed below. ! Detail The "Fold & Staple" function can be selected only if optional finisher FS-603 is installed. The hole punch function is available only when optional finishers FS-603 and punch kit are installed. Function type Function Can be saved Can be set when printing Number of copies × o Paper tray selection o × Output tray selection o × Basic screen settings Color o × Paper o × Zoom o × Simplex/Duplex o o Fold & Staple o o Sort/Group o o Punch o o Staple o o Combine Originals Combine Originals o × Quality/Density Original Type o × Density o × Background Removal o × Application Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert o × Edit Color o × Page Margin o o Stamp o o 3 Saving documents 3-8 bizhub C252 Saving copy documents The following procedure describes how to save a copy document in a box. 1 Press the [Copy] key in the control panel. 2 Touch [Save in User Box]. A screen for selecting a box appears. 3 Select the box where the data is to be saved. Select the tab that contains the box where the data is to be saved, and then touch the button for the box. To specify a box number, touch [User Box #], and then type in the number of the box. The button for the selected box appears selected. ? Is a password required when saving data? % It is not necessary to enter the password when saving data, even if a password has been specified for the box. Saving documents 3 bizhub C252 3-9 4 Select whether or not a copy will also be printed when the data is saved. To print a copy, touch [Yes] under "Make copies also?". 5 Check the name of the document to be saved. Touch [Document Name]. 6 The default name appears beside "Document Name". – To change the name, touch [Delete] until the characters are deleted, and then type in the new name. – To erase all of the text, press the [C] (clear) key. 7 After typing in the name, touch [OK]. 3 Saving documents 3-10 bizhub C252 8 Touch [OK]. The Copy mode screen appears again. If the function was set, [Save in User Box] appears selected. 9 Specify the necessary copy settings. 10 Load the document into the optional ADF or place it on the original glass. 11 Press the [Start] key in the control panel. – If "Yes" under "Make copies also?" was selected, the scanned document is copied and the document data is saved in the specified box. – If "No" under "Make copies also?" was selected, the scanned document data is saved in the specified box. 2 Note For details on the copy settings, refer to the User manual [Copy Operations]. For details on printing the document saved in a box, refer to "Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box" on page 4-3. Saving documents 3 bizhub C252 3-11 3.3 Saving scans in boxes Scanned images can be saved in boxes. Box destinations can be registered in the address book, or a box destination can be specified directly. The following procedure describes how to specify a box as a destination and how to use the Direct Input tab. Using a box destination A destination where a box has been registered is called a "box destination". Box destinations are saved on the Address Book tab and are indicated by "B" on their buttons. The following procedure describes how to save data to a specified box destination that has already been registered. 3 Saving documents 3-12 bizhub C252 2 Note If a box destination is used, the document is automatically saved with the default name. To specify whether or not the marks indicating the destination type are displayed, touch [2 User Setting] in the Utility screen, then [2 Display Setting], then [2 Scan Basic Screen Default Setting], and then specify a setting for the "Address Type Symbol Display" parameter. For details, refer to User manual [Copy Operations]. 2 Note E-mail destinations are indicated by "E", FTP destinations are indicated by "F", and SMB destinations are indicated by "S". Saving documents 3 bizhub C252 3-13 To save data to a box destination 1 Press the [Scan] key in the control panel. The Scan mode screen appears. 2 Touch [Address Book]. The registered destinations are displayed. 3 Touch the button for the box where the data is to be saved. ? Why is [LDAP Search] not displayed on the Address Book tab? % If the "Manual Destination Input" parameter on the Security Details screen (displayed by touching [Security Setting] on the Administrator Setting screen) is set to "Restrict", [LDAP Search] does not appear on the Address Book tab. 4 Specify the necessary scan settings. 5 Load the document into the optional ADF or place it on the original glass. 3 Saving documents 3-14 bizhub C252 6 Press the [Start] key in the control panel. The document is scanned and the document data is saved. ! Detail For details on the scan settings, refer to the User manual [Network Scanner Operations]. Saving documents 3 bizhub C252 3-15 To save data to the specified box Specifying the box where the data is to be saved directly from the control panel is called "direct input". 1 Press the [Scan] key in the control panel. The Scan mode screen appears. 2 Touch [Direct Input]. ? Why is the Direct Input tab not displayed? % If the "Manual Destination Input" parameter on the Security Details screen (displayed by touching [Security Setting] on the Administrator Setting screen) is set to "Restrict", the Direct Input tab does not appear. 3 Touch [Save in User Box]. A screen for selecting a box appears. 3 Saving documents 3-16 bizhub C252 4 Select the box where the data is to be saved. Select the tab that contains the box where the data is to be saved, and then touch the button for the box. To specify a box number, touch [User Box Number], and then type in the number of the box. The button for the selected box appears selected. ? Which box recipients can be specified for a single transmission? % Only one box recipient can be specified, but multiple e-mail and fax recipients can be specified. 5 Check the name of the document to be saved. Touch [Document Name]. 6 The default name appears beside "Document Name". – To change the name, touch [Delete] until the characters are deleted, and then type in the new name. – To erase all of the text, press the [C] (clear) key. Saving documents 3 bizhub C252 3-17 7 After typing in the name, touch [OK]. 8 Touch [OK]. The Direct Input tab appears again. The number of the specified box appears under "Broadcast Destinations". ? Why can’t the name of the document be changed after returning to the Direct Input tab? % To change the document name after returning to the Direct Input tab, touch [Document Name]. 9 Specify the necessary transmission settings. 10 Load the document into the optional ADF or place it on the original glass. 11 Press the [Start] key in the control panel. ! Detail For details on the scan settings, refer to the User manual [Network Scanner Operations]. 3 Saving documents 3-18 bizhub C252 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-3 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4.1 Displaying the box mode screen The documents that can be printed from a box are those that were saved in the box from Copy or Fax mode or during computer printing. 2 Reminder If optional scan accelerator kit SA-501 is installed, data saved from Scan mode can also be printed. Viewing documents saved in boxes The following procedure describes how to check the list of documents saved in boxes. 1 Press the [Box] key in the control panel. 2 From the Public User Box tab or the Personal User Box tab, touch the button for the desired box. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-4 bizhub C252 ? Why does [Personal User Box] not appear? % The Personal User Box tab displays only boxes registered to the user that is logged on with user authentication. 3 If a password has been set for the box, type in the password, and then touch [OK]. – The list of documents saved in the box is displayed. 2 Reminder If "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error" in Administrator mode is set to "Mode 2" and a box user enters an incorrect password the specified number of times, that box is locked out and can no longer use the machine. Contact the administrator to cancel operation restrictions. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-5 Searching for a box name The desired box can be searched for by its name. 1 From the screen containing a list of the boxes, touch [Search by Name]. 2 The boxes matching the box search text appear. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-6 bizhub C252 4.2 Deleting document data To delete data Data that has already been printed or is no longer needed can be deleted. 1 Select the document to be deleted. 2 Touch [Delete]. 3 Check the document information that appeared, and then touch [Yes] to delete the document. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-7 4.3 Changing the document name To change the document name The name of the saved document can be changed. 1 Select the document to be renamed. 2 Touch [Edit Name]. 3 The current name appears beside "Document Name". Type in the new name. 4 Touch [OK]. 2 Note The document name is the name of the file sent by e-mail or to an FTP or SMB server. Specify a document name according to the routing conditions of the destination server. The document name can also be changed when the document is sent. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-8 bizhub C252 4.4 Moving document data 2 Note A document cannot be moved if multiple documents are selected. To move a document Document data currently saved in a box can be moved to a different public user box/personal user box. 1 Select the document to be moved. 2 Touch [Move/Copy]. 3 Under "Action", touch [Move]. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-9 4 Touch the button for the box where the document is to be moved. ? Is a password required for moving data to a different box? % It is not necessary to enter the password when moving data to a different box, even if a password has been specified for the box. 5 Check the settings, and then touch [OK]. The data is moved. 2 Note The date and time that the document is moved is recorded under "Time Stored". 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-10 bizhub C252 4.5 Copying document data 2 Note A document cannot be copied if multiple documents are selected. To copy a document Document data currently saved in a box can be copied to a different public user box/personal user box. 1 Select the document to be copied. 2 Touch [Move/Copy]. 3 Under "Action", touch [Copy]. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-11 4 Touch the button for the box where the document is to be copied. ? Is a password required for copying data to a different box? % It is not necessary to enter the password when copying data to a different box, even if a password has been specified for the box. 5 Check the settings, and then touch [OK]. The data is copied into the selected box. 2 Note The date and time that the document is copied is recorded under "Time Stored". 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-12 bizhub C252 4.6 Printing document data A document saved in a box from Copy mode, Fax mode or during computer printing can be printed. When printing the document, additional settings, such as those for the number of copies and double-sided printing, can be specified. In addition, a proof copy can be printed as a sample before printing or multiple documents can be combined and printed. ! Detail For details on printing a proof copy, refer to "Printing a proof copy" on page 4-36. ! Detail For details on combining multiple documents for printing, refer to "Combined printing" on page 4-38. The "Fold & Staple" function can be selected only if optional finisher FS-603 is installed. The hole punch function is available only when optional finishers FS-603 and punch kit are installed. 2 Note If optional scan accelerator kit SA-501 is installed, data saved from Scan mode can be printed. If optional scan accelerator kit SA-501 is installed and data saved from Scan mode is being printed, [Cover Mode] cannot be selected in the Change Setting screen. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-13 2 Note Double-sided printing is available only if optional automatic duplex unit AD-503 is installed. Available functions Description Page reference # of Sets Specifies the number of copies to be printed. p. 4-15 1-Sided/2-Sided Select whether a single-sided or double-sided copy is to be printed. p. 4-16 Finishing Select whether to sort or group the documents. In addition, Staple and Punch settings can also be specified. p. 4-18 Fold & Staple Documents can be folded at their center and bound with staples. p. 4-20 Page Margin The document can be printed with a binding margin. p. 4-22 Cover Mode Documents can be printed with cover pages added to the front and back. p. 4-24 Stamp The document can be printed with the date/time, page number or distribution number. p. 4-26 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-14 bizhub C252 To print a document 1 Select the document to be printed. 2 Touch [Print]. 3 Check the document information that appeared. To check detailed information, touch [ ] or [ ]. 4 To specify a setting, such as the number of copies, touch [Change Setting] under "Print". 5 Press the [Start] key in the control panel. ! Detail For details on changing the settings, refer to the descriptions starting with "To change the number of copies" on page 4-42. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-15 To change the number of copies Specify the number of copies to be printed. The number of copies can be set between 1 and 999. % Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. – To reset the number of copies to "1", press the [C] (clear) key. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-16 bizhub C252 To specify single-sided/double-sided printing Specify whether a single-sided or double-sided copy of the document is to be printed. % Touch [1-Sided] or [2-Sided]. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-17 Specifying finishing settings Select whether to sort or group the documents. In addition, Staple and Punch settings can also be specified. The following settings can be specified. Setting Description Sort Feeds out copies by sets. Group Feeds out copies by pages. Offset Separates the sets or pages of the copies. Staple Staples copies in the corner or at two locations. The stapling position can also be selected. Punch Punching holes in copies. The position of the punched holes can also be selected. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-18 bizhub C252 To specify the finishing settings 1 Touch [Finishing]. 2 Touch [Sort] or [Group]. To separate the copies, touch [Offset]. 3 Select the desired Staple and Punch settings. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-19 4 To specify the positions of the staples and punched holes, touch [Position Setting]. 5 Touch the button for the desired position. – If the "Corner" Staple setting is selected – If the "2 Position" Staple setting is selected 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-20 bizhub C252 To bind the copies at the center (“Fold & Staple” function) Documents can be folded at their center and bound with staples. 1 Touch [Fold & Staple]. 2 Touch [OK]. 2 Note "Sort" on the Finishing screen is also selected. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-21 Adding a binding margin The document can be printed with a binding margin. The following settings can be specified. Function Description Page Margin The binding margin can be added to the left side, right side or top of the page. The width of the binding margin can be set between 1/16 in and 3/4 in. If "Auto" is selected, a binding margin along the long side of the paper is selected if the document length is 11 45/64" or less. If the document length is more than 11 45/64", a binding margin along the short side of the paper is selected. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-22 bizhub C252 To specify the page margin settings 1 Touch [Page Margin]. 2 Select the desired position for the binding margin, and then touch [-] or [+] to specify the width of the binding margin. – The width of the binding margin can be set in 1/16 in increments. – To set the binding margin to 0 in, touch [None]. Only the binding position can be specified. 3 Touch [OK]. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-23 Adding cover pages (“Cover Mode” function) Documents can be printed with cover pages added to the front and back. First, load the paper trays with the paper for the front cover page and the back cover page. The following settings can be specified. 2 Note If a setting for the "Cover Mode" function is to be specified when printing a copied document, either of the following conditions must be met when saving the document in a user box. A paper drawer is specified. A setting is selected for the "Cover Mode" function. Setting Description "Front (Copy)" under "Front Cover" The first page of the document is printed onto the paper for the front cover page. If "2-Sided" was selected, the second page of the document is printed onto the back of the front cover page. "Front (Blank)" under "Front Cover" A blank page is added as the first page of the document. "Back (Copy)" under "Back Cover" The last page of the document is printed onto the paper for the back cover page. If "2-Sided" was selected, the second to last page of the document is printed onto the back cover page. "Back (Blank)" under "Back Cover" A blank page is added as the last page of the document. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-24 bizhub C252 ! Detail Double-sided printing is available only if optional automatic duplex unit AD-503 is installed. To specify the cover mode settings 1 Touch [Cover Mode]. 2 Select the desired cover page format. 3 Specify the paper trays loaded with the paper for the front cover page and back cover page. Touch [Front Cover Paper] or [Back Cover Paper]. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-25 4 Select the paper tray. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-26 bizhub C252 Printing the date/time (“Date/Time” function) The printing date and time can be printed on all pages of the document. Settings can be specified for the following. The following settings are available under "Pages". Item Description Date Type Select the format for the date. Time Type Select the format for the time. Pages Specify the pages to be printed on. Setting Description Cover Only The date/time is printed only on the cover page. All Pages The date/time is printed on all pages. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-27 To specify the “Date/Time” function 1 Touch [Stamp]. 2 Touch [Date/Time]. 3 Under "Date Type", select the format for the date. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-28 bizhub C252 4 Under "Time Type", select the format for the time. 5 Under "Pages", select the pages that the date/time is to be printed on. 6 To change the printing position, touch [Print Position]. 7 Select the printing position. To make fine adjustments to the printing position, touch [Change Adjustment]. 8 Specify the adjustment for moving the printing position up and down and to the left and right. 9 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next four screens that appear. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-29 Printing page numbers (“Page #” function) Page numbers can be printed on all pages of the document. Settings can be specified for the following. The following settings can be specified for printing on inserted pages. Item Description Start No. Specify the starting chapter and page numbers. Page No. Type Select the format for the page number. Insert Sheet Setting Select whether or not page numbers are printed on the inserted paper. Setting Description Cover Mode All Pages The page number is printed on all pages, including the front and back cover pages. Except for Front Cover The page number is not printed on the front cover page. Do Not Print Page # The page number is not printed on the front and back cover pages. Insert (Copy) Print Page # A copied insertion is counted as a page, and the page number is printed on it. Do Not Print Page # A copied insertion is counted as a page, but the page number is not printed on it. Skip the Page(s) A copied insertion is not counted as a page, but the page number is not printed on it. Insert (Blank) Do Not Print Page # A blank insertion is counted as a page, but the page number is not printed on it. Skip the Page(s) A blank insertion is not counted as a page, and the page number is not printed on it. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-30 bizhub C252 To specify the “Page #” function 1 Touch [Stamp]. 2 Touch [Page #]. 3 Under "Start No.", type in the starting page and chapter numbers. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-31 4 Under "Page No. Type", select the page number format. 5 If there are inserted pages, specify whether or not page numbers are printed on them. Touch [Insert Sheet Setting]. 6 Select how page numbers are printed on inserted pages, and then touch [OK]. 7 To change the printing position, touch [Print Position]. 8 Select the printing position. To make fine adjustments to the printing position, touch [Change Adjustment]. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-32 bizhub C252 9 Specify the adjustment for moving the printing position up and down and to the left and right. 10 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next four screens that appear. 2 Note The Chapter settings are applied only when "1-1, 1-2 ..." is selected under "Page No. Type". Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-33 Printing distribution numbers (“Set Numbering” function) Distribution numbers can be printed on all pages of the document. Settings can be specified for the following. The following settings can be selected as the pages to be printed on. Item Description Start Number Specify the starting distribution number. Text Color Select the text color for the distribution numbers. Pages Specify the pages to be printed on. Setting Description Cover Only The distribution number is printed only on the cover page. All Pages The distribution number is printed on all pages. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-34 bizhub C252 To specify the “Set Numbering” function 1 Touch [Stamp]. 2 Touch [Set Numbering]. 3 Under "Start Number", use the keypad to specify the starting number. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-35 4 Under "Text Color", select the desired color. 5 Under "Pages", select the pages that the distribution numbers are to be printed on. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-36 bizhub C252 4.7 Printing a proof copy The contents of the document can be checked. 2 Note A proof copy cannot be printed if multiple documents are selected. Print proof copies one document at a time. To print a proof copy 1 Select the document to be proofed. 2 Touch [Proof Print]. 3 Check the document information that appeared. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-37 4 Press the [Start] key in the control panel. 2 Note Only the first page is printed. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-38 bizhub C252 4.8 Combined printing Multiple documents can be printed together. Up to 10 documents can be selected to be printed together. Additional settings, such as those for the number of copies, can be specified for the selected document. ! Detail For details on changing the settings, refer to descriptions starting with "To change the number of copies" on page 4-42. ! Detail Documents saved in a box and having a front cover, back cover and blank insertion in addition to Image Repeat and OHP Interleave settings specified cannot be combined and printed. Double-sided printing is available only if optional automatic duplex unit AD-503 is installed. The "Fold & Staple" function can be selected only if optional finisher FS-603 is installed. The hole punch function is available only when optional finishers FS-603 and punch kit are installed. Available functions Description Page reference # of Sets Specifies the number of copies to be printed. p. 4-42 1-Sided/2-Sided Select whether a single-sided or double-sided copy is to be printed. p. 4-43 Finishing Select whether to sort or group the documents. In addition, Staple and Punch settings can also be specified. p. 4-45 Fold & Staple Documents can be folded at their center and bound with staples. p. 4-47 Page Margin The document can be printed with a binding margin. p. 4-52 Date/Time The printing date and time can be printed on all pages of the document. p. 4-49 Set Numbering Distribution numbers can be printed on all pages of the document. p. 4-54 Page # Page numbers can be printed on all pages of the document. p. 4-56 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-39 2 Note If optional scan accelerator kit SA-501 is installed, data saved from Scan mode can be printed. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-40 bizhub C252 To print a document 1 Touch [Combine]. The list of documents appears. 2 Select the document to be printed. The selected document is highlighted, and its bind number appears on the right side. 3 Touch [Combine] in the lower-right corner. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-41 4 Check the document information that appeared. To check detailed information, touch [ ] or [ ]. 5 To specify a setting, such as the number of copies of each document, touch [Print]. 6 Press the [Start] key in the control panel. ! Detail For details on changing the settings, refer to descriptions starting with "To change the number of copies" on page 4-42. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-42 bizhub C252 To change the number of copies Specify the number of copies to be printed. The number of copies can be set between 1 and 999. % Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. – To reset the number of copies to "1", press the [C] (clear) key. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-43 To specify single-sided/double-sided printing Specify whether a single-sided or double-sided copy of the document is to be printed. % Touch [1-Sided] or [2-Sided]. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-44 bizhub C252 Specifying finishing settings Select whether or not the copies are separated. In addition, Staple and Punch settings can be specified. The following settings can be specified. Setting Description Offset Separates the sets or pages of the copies. Staple Staples copies in the corner or at two locations. The stapling position can also be selected. Punch Punching holes in copies. The position of the punched holes can also be selected. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-45 To specify the finishing settings 1 Touch [Finishing]. 2 To separate the copies, touch [Offset]. 3 Select the desired Staple and Punch settings. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-46 bizhub C252 4 To specify the positions of the staples and punched holes, touch [Position Setting]. 5 Touch the button for the desired position. – If the "Corner" Staple setting is selected – If the "2 Position" Staple setting is selected 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-47 To bind the copies at the center (“Fold & Staple” function) Documents can be folded at their center and bound with staples. 1 Touch [Fold & Staple]. 2 Touch [OK]. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-48 bizhub C252 Printing the date/time (“Date/Time” function) The printing date and time can be printed on all pages of the document. Settings can be specified for the following. The following settings are available under "Pages". Item Description Date Type Select the format for the date. Time Type Select the format for the time. Pages Specify the pages to be printed on. Setting Description Cover Only The date/time is printed only on the cover page. All Pages The date/time is printed on all pages. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-49 To specify the “Date/Time” function 1 Touch [Date/Time]. 2 Under "Date Type", select the format for the date. 3 Under "Time Type", select the format for the time. 4 Under "Pages", select the pages that the date/time is to be printed on. 5 To specify the printing position, touch [Print Position]. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-50 bizhub C252 6 Select the printing position. To make fine adjustments to the printing position, touch [Change Adjustment]. 7 Specify the adjustment for moving the printing position up and down and to the left and right. 8 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next four screens that appear. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-51 Adding a binding margin The document can be printed with a binding margin. The following settings can be specified. Function Description Page Margin The binding margin can be added to the left side, right side or top of the page. The width of the binding margin can be set between 1/16 in and 3/4 in. If "Auto" is selected, a binding margin along the long side of the paper is selected if the document length is 11 45/64" or less. If the document length is more than 11 45/64", a binding margin along the short side of the paper is selected. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-52 bizhub C252 To specify the page margin settings 1 Touch [Page Margin]. 2 Select the desired position for the binding margin, and then touch [-] or [+] to specify the width of the binding margin. – The width of the binding margin can be set in 1/16 in increments. – To set the binding margin to 0 in, touch [None]. Only the binding position can be specified. 3 Touch [OK]. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-53 Printing distribution numbers (“Set Numbering” function) Distribution numbers can be printed on all pages of the document. Settings can be specified for the following. The following settings can be selected as the pages to be printed on. Item Description Start Number Specify the starting distribution number. Text Color Select the text color for the distribution numbers. Pages Specify the pages to be printed on. Setting Description Cover Only The distribution number is printed only on the cover page. All Pages The distribution number is printed on all pages. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-54 bizhub C252 To specify the “Set Numbering” function 1 Touch [Set Numbering]. 2 Under "Start Number", use the keypad to specify the starting number. 3 Under "Text Color", select the desired color. 4 Under "Pages", select the pages that the distribution numbers are to be printed on. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-55 Printing page numbers (“Page #” function) Page numbers can be printed on all pages of the document. Settings can be specified for the following. Item Description Start No. Specify the starting chapter and page numbers. Page No. Type Select the format for the page number. 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-56 bizhub C252 To specify the “Page #” function 1 Touch [Page #]. 2 Under "Start No.", type in the starting page and chapter numbers. 3 Under "Page No. Type", select the desired page number format. 4 To specify the printing position, touch [Print Position]. Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4 bizhub C252 4-57 5 Select the printing position. To make fine adjustments to the printing position, touch [Change Adjustment]. 6 Specify the adjustment for moving the printing position up and down and to the left and right. 7 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next four screens that appear. 2 Note The Chapter settings are applied only when "1-1, 1-2 ..." is selected under "Page No. Type". 4 Printing a document from a public user box/personal user box 4-58 bizhub C252 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5 bizhub C252 5-3 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5.1 Editing document data From the Route tab, document data can be edited in addition to being routed. Function Description Delete Data that has already been sent or is no longer needed can be deleted. For details, refer to "Deleting document data" on page 4-6. Edit Name The name of the saved document can be changed. For details, refer to "Changing the document name" on page 4-7. Move/Copy Document data currently saved in a box can be moved or copied to a different public user box/personal user box. For details on moving document data, refer to "Moving document data" on page 4-8. For details on copying document data, refer to "Copying document data" on page 4-10. 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5-4 bizhub C252 5.2 Routing Document data saved in a box from Scan mode or Fax mode can be sent via the network. The data can easily be routed by simply registering a destination with this machine instead of by sending the data through different computers. 2 Note Data saved from Fax mode can be sent with the fax image resolution. Routing types Document data saved in boxes can be routed in three different ways. Type Description E-Mail Direct Input Document data is sent as an e-mail attachment. File (FTP) Direct Input Document data is uploaded to the specified FTP server. File (SMB) Direct Input Document data is sent to a shared folder on the specified computer. Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5 bizhub C252 5-5 Transmission methods Select one of the four routing methods according to the desired transmission purpose and use. Destinations can be specified using any combination of these methods. Available settings The following settings can be specified. Method Description Page reference Program Multiple preset routing types are programmed with this method. p. 5-7 Group Multiple destinations can be registered with this method. This is convenient for always sending data to the same people. p. 5-9 Address book Select different destinations from those registered in the address book. p. 5-11 Direct input With this method, destinations for email transmissions, FTP transmissions and SMB transmissions are entered directly from the control panel. This is used when routing data to a destination that is not already registered. E-mail transmission: p. 5-15 FTP transmission: p. 5-18 SMB transmission: p. 5-21 Setting Description Destinations Shows the destination number and number of destinations. Transmission method Select the desired method for specifying the destination. Document Info. Shows various information, such as the name, date and time that the transmission document was registered. File Type Select the format for the file that is to be transmitted. 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5-6 bizhub C252 To route data 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. A screen appears, allowing you to specify the destination. 2 Specify the destination by using the programs and groups. 3 If necessary, check the document information and specify the data format. 4 Press the [Start] key in the control panel. 2 Note To change the print settings specified with a program, select the destination program, and then change the settings. If there are limitations on the document name due to the destination server conditions, it may not be possible to send the transmission. Contact your network administrator for information when specifying the document name during a transmission. Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5 bizhub C252 5-7 5.3 Specifying destinations To specify a program as the destination 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. The Route screen appears. 2 Touch [Select from Program]. 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5-8 bizhub C252 3 Touch the button for the program where the data is to be sent. The button for the selected program appears selected. 4 Touch [OK]. Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5 bizhub C252 5-9 To select a destination from a group 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. The Route screen appears. 2 Touch [Select from Group]. 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5-10 bizhub C252 3 Touch the button for the group where the data is to be sent. The list of the addresses registered in the group appears. 4 Select the destinations. – To send the data to all addresses in the group, touch [Select All]. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5 bizhub C252 5-11 To select a destination from the address book 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. The Route screen appears. 2 Touch [Select from Address Book]. 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5-12 bizhub C252 3 Touch the button for the destination where the data is to be sent. – The desired destination can be searched for. For details, refer to "Searching for a destination" on page 5-13. The button for the selected destination appears selected. 4 Touch [OK]. 2 Note If the "Manual Destination Input" parameter on the Security Details screen (displayed by touching [Security Setting] on the Administrator Setting screen) is set to "Restrict", [LDAP Search] does not appear. Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5 bizhub C252 5-13 Searching for a destination Follow the procedure described below to search for the desired destination. - Detail Search Type in the name of the destination or part of the address to search for the corresponding address. - LDAP Search Search the addresses registered in the LDAP server for the address that corresponds to the conditions. To perform a Basic Search, type in the search text. To search with multiple conditions, perform a Advanced Search. For a basic search For an advanced search 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5-14 bizhub C252 2 Reminder For details on an LDAP search and specifying settings for the LDAP server, refer to the User manual [Network Scanner Operations]. An LDAP search is possible only if "Select from Address Book" was selected. Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5 bizhub C252 5-15 To directly specify the e-mail destination 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. The Route screen appears. 2 Touch [E-Mail Direct Input]. A screen appears, allowing an address to be entered. 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5-16 bizhub C252 3 Type in the e-mail address of the destination. To specify an additional address, touch [Next Dest.]. 4 Touch [OK]. 2 Note Frequently entered user names and domain names can be registered to be recalled and used again. First, prefixes and suffixes must be registered in Administrator mode. Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5 bizhub C252 5-17 Directly specifying an FTP destination The following settings can be specified for the FTP destination. To specify more advanced FTP settings, touch [Detail Setting]. Setting Description Host Name Type in the host name or IP address for the destination. Destination Folder Type in the path of the destination folder. User Name Type in the user name for logging on. Password Type in the password. Setting Description Port Number Shows the port number. PASV mode Select whether or not the PASV (passive) mode is used. Proxy Select whether or not a proxy server is used. 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5-18 bizhub C252 To directly specify an FTP destination 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. The Route screen appears. 2 Touch [File (FTP) Direct Input]. The Scan to FTP screen appears. Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5 bizhub C252 5-19 3 Type in the information for the FTP server. To specify an additional FTP server, touch [Next Dest.], and then enter the information. 4 Touch [OK]. 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5-20 bizhub C252 Directly specifying an SMB destination The following settings can be specified. Setting Description Host Name Type in the host name or IP address for the destination. Destination Folder Type in the path of the destination folder. User Name Type in the user name for logging on. Password Type in the password. Reference Click to check the structure of the folders on the destination computer. This can be used to directly specify the destination folder. Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5 bizhub C252 5-21 To directly specify an SMB destination 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. The Route screen appears. 2 Touch [File (SMB) Direct Input]. The Scan to SMB screen appears. 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5-22 bizhub C252 3 Type in the destination information. To specify an additional SMB server, touch [Next Dest.], and then enter the information. 4 Touch [OK]. Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5 bizhub C252 5-23 5.4 Checking settings before routing Checking the document information The following document information can be checked. Item Description Time Stored Shows the date and time that the data was saved. Job No. Shows the number of the registered job. User Name Shows the name of the user that saved the data. Document Name Shows the name of the document. 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5-24 bizhub C252 To check information 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. The Route screen appears. 2 Touch [Document Info.]. The Document Info. screen appears. Touch [ ] or [ ] to display the next screen of document information. Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5 bizhub C252 5-25 3 Touch [OK]. 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5-26 bizhub C252 Specifying the file format Data can be routed in the following file formats. In addition, there are settings for specifying how much of the saved data is converted. The encryption level can be selected if "File Type" was set to "PDF" or "Compact PDF". Settings can be specified for the following. Format Description PDF Sends data in the PDF format. TIFF Sends data in the TIFF format. JPEG Sends data in the JPEG format. Compact PDF Sends data in the compact PDF format. Setting Description Single Page A single file is created for each page of the document. Multi-Page A single file is created from the entire document. Item Description Encryption Level Select the encryption level. Password Enter the password necessary to open encrypted data. Type in a password of 32 characters or less. For confirmation, type in the password twice. Permissions Enter the password necessary to change document permissions. Type in a password of 32 characters or less. For confirmation, type in the password twice. Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5 bizhub C252 5-27 To specify the file format 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. The Route screen appears. 2 Touch [File Type]. 3 Select the format of the file to be sent and select the scan setting. 5 Routing a document from a public user box/personal user box 5-28 bizhub C252 4 If "PDF" or "Compact PDF" was selected, touch [Encrypt]. 5 Specify the encryption settings. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 6 Routing a document from the system user box Routing a document from the system user box 6 bizhub C252 6-3 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6.1 Editing document data From the Route tab, document data can be edited in addition to being routed. ! Detail For details on creating annotation user boxes and saving documents in them, refer to the User manual [Network Scanner Operations]. Function Description Delete Data that has already been sent or is no longer needed can be deleted. For details, refer to "Deleting document data" on page 4-6. Edit Name The name of the saved document can be changed. For details, refer to "Changing the document name" on page 4-7. 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6-4 bizhub C252 6.2 Routing Document data saved in an Annotation User box from Scan mode can be sent via the network. The data can easily be routed by simply registering a destination with this machine instead of by sending the data through different computers. Routing types Document data saved in Annotation User boxes can be routed in three different ways. Transmission methods Select one of the four routing methods according to the desired transmission purpose and use. Destinations can be specified using any combination of these methods. Type Description E-Mail Direct Input Document data is sent as an e-mail attachment. File (FTP) Direct Input Document data is uploaded to the specified FTP server. File (SMB) Direct Input Document data is sent to a shared folder on the specified computer. Method Description Page Reference Program Multiple preset routing types are programmed with this method. p. 6-8 Group Multiple destinations can be registered with this method. This is convenient for always sending data to the same people. p. 6-10 Address book Select different destinations from those registered in the address book. p. 6-12 Direct input With this method, destinations for email transmissions, FTP transmissions and SMB transmissions are entered directly from the control panel. This is used when routing data to a destination that is not already registered. E-mail transmission: p. 6-16 FTP transmission: p. 6-19 SMB transmission: p. 6-22 Routing a document from the system user box 6 bizhub C252 6-5 Available settings The following settings can be specified. Setting Description Destinations Shows the destination number and number of destinations. Transmission method Select the desired method for specifying the destination. Document Info. Shows various information, such as the name, date and time that the transmission document was registered. Edit Stamp Elements Specify the text to be printed. 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6-6 bizhub C252 To route data 1 On the System User Box tab, touch [Annotation User Box]. – The Annotation User boxes can also be used from the Public User Box screen. For details on using the boxes from the Public User Box screen, refer to "Routing" on page 5-4. 2 Select the annotation user box. Routing a document from the system user box 6 bizhub C252 6-7 3 Select the document, and touch [Route]. – To select all documents, touch [Select All]. To deselect all documents, touch [Reset]. A screen appears, allowing you to specify the destination. 4 Specify the destination by using the programs and groups. 5 If necessary, check the document information and specify the text. 6 Press the [Start] key in the control panel. 2 Note To change the print settings specified with a program, select the destination program, and then change the settings. If there are limitations on the document name due to the destination server conditions, it may not be possible to send the transmission. Contact your network administrator for information when specifying the document name during a transmission. 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6-8 bizhub C252 6.3 Specifying destinations To specify a program as the destination 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. – To select all documents, touch [Select All]. To deselect all documents, touch [Reset]. The Route screen appears. 2 Touch [Select from Program]. Routing a document from the system user box 6 bizhub C252 6-9 3 Touch the button for the program where the data is to be sent. The button for the selected program appears selected. 4 Touch [OK]. 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6-10 bizhub C252 To select a destination from a group 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. – To select all documents, touch [Select All]. To deselect all documents, touch [Reset]. The Route screen appears. 2 Touch [Select from Group]. Routing a document from the system user box 6 bizhub C252 6-11 3 Touch the button for the group where the data is to be sent. The list of the addresses registered in the group appears. 4 Select the destinations. – To send the data to all addresses in the group, touch [Select All]. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6-12 bizhub C252 To select a destination from the address book 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. – To select all documents, touch [Select All]. To deselect all documents, touch [Reset]. The Route screen appears. 2 Touch [Select from Address Book]. Routing a document from the system user box 6 bizhub C252 6-13 3 Touch the button for the destination where the data is to be sent. – The desired destination can be searched for. For details, refer to "Searching for a destination" on page 5-13. The button for the selected destination appears selected. 4 Touch [OK]. 2 Note If the "Manual Destination Input" parameter on the Security Details screen (displayed by touching [Security Setting] on the Administrator Setting screen) is set to "Restrict", [LDAP Search] does not appear. An LDAP search is possible only if "Select from Address Book" was selected. 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6-14 bizhub C252 Searching for a destination Follow the procedure described below to search for the desired destination. - Detail Search Type in the name of the destination or part of the address to search for the corresponding address. - LDAP Search Search the addresses registered in the LDAP server for the address that corresponds to the conditions. To perform a Basic Search, type in the search text. To search with multiple conditions, perform a Advanced Search. For a basic search For an advanced search Routing a document from the system user box 6 bizhub C252 6-15 2 Reminder For details on an LDAP search and specifying settings for the LDAP server, refer to the User manual [Network Scanner Operations]. 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6-16 bizhub C252 To directly specify the e-mail destination 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. – To select all documents, touch [Select All]. To deselect all documents, touch [Reset]. The Route screen appears. 2 Touch [E-Mail Direct Input]. A screen appears, allowing an address to be entered. Routing a document from the system user box 6 bizhub C252 6-17 3 Type in the e-mail address of the destination. To specify an additional address, touch [Next Dest.]. 4 Touch [OK]. 2 Note Frequently entered user names and domain names can be registered to be recalled and used again. First, prefixes and suffixes must be registered in Administrator mode. 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6-18 bizhub C252 Directly specifying an FTP destination The following settings can be specified for the FTP destination. To specify more advanced FTP settings, touch [Detail Setting]. 2 Note To select all documents, touch [Select All]. To deselect all documents, touch [Reset]. Setting Description Host Name Type in the host name or IP address for the destination. Destination Folder Type in the path of the destination folder. User Name Type in the user name for logging on. Password Type in the password. Setting Description Port Number Shows the port number. PASV mode Select whether or not the PASV (passive) mode is used. Proxy Select whether or not a proxy server is used. Routing a document from the system user box 6 bizhub C252 6-19 To directly specify an FTP destination 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. The Route screen appears. 2 Touch [File (FTP) Direct Input]. The Scan to FTP screen appears. 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6-20 bizhub C252 3 Type in the information for the FTP server. To specify an additional FTP server, touch [Next Dest.], and then enter the information. 4 Touch [OK]. Routing a document from the system user box 6 bizhub C252 6-21 Directly specifying an SMB destination The following settings can be specified. 2 Note To select all documents, touch [Select All]. To deselect all documents, touch [Reset]. Setting Description Host Name Type in the host name or IP address for the destination. Destination Folder Type in the path of the destination folder. User Name Type in the user name for logging on. Password Type in the password. Reference Click to check the structure of the folders on the destination computer. This can be used to directly specify the destination folder. 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6-22 bizhub C252 To directly specify an SMB destination 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. The Route screen appears. 2 Touch [File (SMB) Direct Input]. The Scan to SMB screen appears. Routing a document from the system user box 6 bizhub C252 6-23 3 Type in the destination information. To specify an additional SMB server, touch [Next Dest.], and then enter the information. 4 Touch [OK]. 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6-24 bizhub C252 6.4 Checking settings before routing Checking the document information The following document information can be checked. 2 Note To select all documents, touch [Select All]. To deselect all documents, touch [Reset]. To check information 1 Select the document, and touch [Route]. The Route screen appears. Item Description Time Stored Shows the date and time that the data was saved. Job No. Shows the number of the registered job. User Name Shows the name of the user that saved the data. Document Name Shows the name of the document. Routing a document from the system user box 6 bizhub C252 6-25 2 Touch [Document Info.]. The Document Info. screen appears. Touch [ ] or [ ] to display the next screen of document information. 3 Touch [OK]. 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6-26 bizhub C252 Changing the text Previously specified text or the count is set for annotation user boxes. This information can be changed while printing. Settings can be specified for the following. Item Description Secondery Field Text can be added to the number that is printed. A maximum of 20 characters can be entered. Date/Time Select the format for the date and time that is printed. Density Select the density for the numbers that are printed. Number Type Select the output format (number of digits) for the numbers that are printed. Print Position Select the printing position. Routing a document from the system user box 6 bizhub C252 6-27 To change the stamp elements 1 Select the document, and then touch [Route]. The Route screen appears. 2 Touch [Edit Stamp Elements]. The Edit Stamp Elements screen appears. 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6-28 bizhub C252 3 Touch the button for the setting to be changed, and then change the setting. – Touch [Secondary Field], type in the text to be added, and then touch [OK]. – Touch [Date/Time], select the format for the date and time to be printed, and then touch [OK]. Routing a document from the system user box 6 bizhub C252 6-29 – Touch [Density], touch the button for the desired text density, and then touch [OK]. – Touch [Number Type], select the format for the numbering, and then touch [OK]. – Touch [Print Position], select the printing position, and then touch [OK]. 6 Routing a document from the system user box 6-30 bizhub C252 2 Note To select all documents, touch [Select All]. To deselect all documents, touch [Reset]. 7 Control panel settings Control panel settings 7 bizhub C252 7-3 7 Control panel settings 7.1 Specifying settings from the control panel Various basic settings and advanced parameters for using this machine can be set from the Utility mode. This chapter describes the procedures for setting the Utility mode parameters for the Box functions. 2 Note For details on registering bulletin board user boxes, refer to the User manual [Facsimile Operations]. For details on registering annotation user boxes, refer to the User manual [Network Scanner Operations]. Utility mode parameters The following Utility mode parameters are described in this manual. Box permissions Users of various levels can access this machine. Other than machine administrators, box administrators can use Box functions. The following types of users can access boxes. User types Parameter Description Page reference One-Touch Registration New boxes can be created. p. 7-5 Administrator Setting Specify settings for managing the boxes. p. 7-10 p. 7-12 p. 7-13 p. 7-16 Type Description Public user Users for accessing when user authentication settings have not been applied Registered user Users registered by the administrator when user authentication settings have been applied Box administrator Users that can access User mode as a box administrator when user authentication settings have been applied Administrator Administrator managing the machine 7 Control panel settings 7-4 bizhub C252 Additional information To log on to User mode as the box administrator, type "boxadmin" as the user name and type the password specified in "Specifying box administrator settings" on page 7-13. Operations that can be performed *1 Only boxes created by the registered user *2 Box administrators and administrators can perform operations without entering the password, even if a password has been set for the box. 2 Reminder The following operations are performed from PageScope Web Connection. For details, refer to Chapter 8, "Settings that can be specified using PageScope Web Connection" on page 8-3. Operation Create boxes View/download/ delete documents Change box settings Delete boxes Box type Public user boxes Personal user boxes Public user boxes Personal user boxes Public user boxes Personal user boxes Public user boxes Personal user boxes Public user o × o × o × o × Registered user o o o o*1 o o*1 o o Box administrator o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 Administrator o*2 × × × o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 Control panel settings 7 bizhub C252 7-5 7.2 Registering boxes New boxes can be registered. The following types of boxes can be registered. 2 Note The mailbox transmission function can be specified for a box. If user authentication settings have been applied, be sure to type in the user name and password, and press the "Access" key. If authentication settings have not been applied, personal user boxes cannot be created. Type Description Public User Box Shared box that anyone can use Personal User Box Box for an individual that can only be accessed by users that have logged on if user authentication settings have been applied Bulletin Board User Box Bulletin box registered on the Bulletin Board User Box screen displayed from the System User Box tab For details, refer to the User manual [Facsimile Operations]. Annotation User Box This box is used when adding an image of the date/time or number to document data saved in Scan mode before routing it. The type of text to be added can be specified during routing. Annotation user boxes are registered in Administrator mode. For details, refer to the User manual [Network Scanner Operations]. 7 Control panel settings 7-6 bizhub C252 Registering public/personal user boxes The following information can be entered in each screen. 2 Note If user authentication is canceled after personal user boxes are created, the personal user boxes become public user boxes. 2 Reminder If "Password Rules" is set to "ON", a password containing less than 8 characters cannot be registered. If a box password containing less than 8 characters has already been registered, change the password so that it contains 8 characters before setting "Password Rules" to "ON". For details on the password rules, refer to the User manual [Copy Operations]. Item Description User Box No. Touch [User Box No.], and then use the keyboard to type in the user box number. Name Touch [Name], and then use the keyboard that appears to type in the user box name. Password Touch [Password], and then use the keyboard that appears to type in the password. Index Touch [Index], and then select the search characters. Type Touch [Public] or [Personal]. If [Personal] was selected, the owner name appears. To change the user, touch [Change Owner], and then select a different user. Auto Delete Document Select the time until the document is deleted after it is saved in the box. Advanced Functions This appears when optional fax kit FK-502 is installed. Select whether or not the confidential reception function is used with the box. To use the confidential reception function, type in the password for confidential reception. Control panel settings 7 bizhub C252 7-7 To register a box 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [1 One-Touch Registration]. 3 Touch [3 User Box]. The User Box screen appears. 7 Control panel settings 7-8 bizhub C252 4 Touch [1 Public/Personal User Box]. 5 Touch [New]. The registration screen 1/2 appears. 6 Specify the desired box settings. Control panel settings 7 bizhub C252 7-9 7 Touch [Fwd.]. The registration screen 2/2 appears. 8 Specify the desired settings. 9 Touch [OK]. 10 Touch [Close]. The box is registered. 7 Control panel settings 7-10 bizhub C252 7.3 Displaying the administrator setting screen To display the administrator setting screen 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [3 Administrator Setting]. – An item in the Utility mode menus can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired button. For "3 Administrator Setting", press the [3] key in the keypad. 3 Type in the password, and then touch [OK]. For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 9-4. Control panel settings 7 bizhub C252 7-11 4 The Administrator Setting screen appears. 2 Note If the optional fax kit is not installed, [8 Fax Setting] does not appear. To quit specifying the Utility mode setting, touch [Exit] in the sub display area or press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, cancel the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax, Scan or Box mode appears. 2 Reminder If "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error" in Administrator mode is set to "Mode 2" and an incorrect administrator password is entered the specified number of times, it is no longer possible to enter Administrator mode. For details on the "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error" parameter, refer to the User manual [Copy Operations]. 7 Control panel settings 7-12 bizhub C252 7.4 Specifying user box settings Boxes that are no longer needed should be deleted. To delete unused user boxes Boxes containing no saved documents can be deleted as unused boxes. 1 In the Administrator Setting screen, touch [System Setting]. 2 In the System Setting screen, touch [0 User Box Setting]. 3 In the User Box Setting screen, touch [1 Delete Unused User Box]. 4 To delete the boxes, touch [Yes]. Control panel settings 7 bizhub C252 7-13 7.5 Specifying box administrator settings Select whether or not use by the box administrator is permitted. (The default setting is "Restrict".) When logging on as the box administrator, type "boxadmin" as the user name in the user authentication screen, and then type in the password specified in step 5. Relationship with other settings - If "User Authentication" and "Account Track" are both set to "OFF", "Allow" cannot be selected. 2 Note For details on operations that can be performed by box administrators, refer to "Box permissions" on page 7-3. 2 Reminder If "Password Rules" is set to "ON", a password containing less than 8 characters cannot be registered. If a box password containing less than 8 characters has already been registered, change the password so that it contains 8 characters before setting "Password Rules" to "ON". For details on the password rules, refer to the User manual [Copy Operations]. 7 Control panel settings 7-14 bizhub C252 To specify the “User Box Admin. Setting” parameter 1 In the Administrator Setting screen, touch [Security Setting]. 2 In the Security Setting screen, touch [2 User Box Admin. Setting]. The User Box Admin. Setting screen appears. 3 Touch the button for the desired setting. – If [Restrict] was selected, continue with step 4. – If [Allow] was selected, [Password] appears. Skip to step 5 to specify the password. (The default password is "PASSWORD".) 4 Touch [OK]. Use by the box administrator is restricted. This completes the procedure for restricting use by the box administrator. Control panel settings 7 bizhub C252 7-15 5 Touch [Password]. A screen appears, allowing the password for the box administrator to be specified. 6 Type in the password, and then touch [OK]. A screen for retyping the password appears. 7 Type in the password specified in step 6, and then touch [OK]. The password for the box administrator is specified and use by the box administrator is permitted. ! Detail For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 9-4. 2 Note To cancel the setting, touch [Cancel]. 7 Control panel settings 7-16 bizhub C252 7.6 Specifying HDD setting parameters Various hard disk operations are available, such as those for erasing data from the hard disk and for checking the amount of free space on the hard disk. The following parameters are available. ! Detail The following data is erased when the hard disk is formatted. Program destinations Abbreviated destinations Authentication method settings User authentication settings Account track settings User boxes Box settings Documents in boxes Secure print user box settings Bulletin board user box settings Parameter Description Check HDD Capacity Displays the amount of hard disk space that is used and remaining Temporary Data Overwrite Setting Select either "Mode 1" or "Mode 2" as the method for overwriting data on the hard disk. Select whether encrypting or overwriting is given priority when the security kit is installed. Overwrite All Data Overwrites all data HDD Lock Password Specifies the hard disk locking password HDD Encryption Setting Specify the setting for encrypting the data on the hard disk. A setting is required only when the security kit is installed. HDD Formatting Formats the hard disk. Control panel settings 7 bizhub C252 7-17 To check the hard disk capacity The amount of space on the hard disk can be checked. 1 In the Administrator Setting screen, touch [Security Setting]. 2 In the Security Setting screen, touch [6 HDD Setting]. 3 In the HDD Setting screen, touch [1 Check HDD Capacity]. The Check HDD Capacity screen appears. 4 Touch [Close]. The HDD Setting screen appears again. 7 Control panel settings 7-18 bizhub C252 To overwrite temporary data The setting for overwriting data on the hard disk can be specified. (The default setting is "Mode 1".) This machine destroys data by overwriting all data in the entire area where an image was stored when that image data on the hard disk is considered unnecessary. In addition, destroying the structure of data other than image data prevents the disclosure of the data in case the hard disk is stolen. Mode 1: Overwritten with 0x00 Mode 2: Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with the letter "A" (0x61) % Verified 1 In the Administrator Setting screen, touch [Security Setting]. 2 In the Security Setting screen, touch [6 HDD Setting]. 3 In the HDD Setting screen, touch [2 Temporary Data Overwrite Setting]. The Temporary Data Overwrite Setting screen appears. If the security kit is not installed: If the security kit is installed: Control panel settings 7 bizhub C252 7-19 4 Select the method for overwriting temporary data. – Select "Encryption Priority" when performing high-level security encryption processing. However, data overwriting with encryption of the hard disk differs depending on whether "Mode 1" or "Mode 2" is selected. Normally, "Encryption Priority" is selected. – If "Overwrite Priority" is selected, data overwriting with encryption of the hard disk is performed depending on whether "Mode 1" or "Mode 2" is selected. Select this setting when the format of the data written to the hard disk is considered important. – If the security kit is installed, select "Encryption Priority" or "Overwrite Priority". 5 Touch [OK]. – If "Encryption Priority" and "Overwrite Priority" was changed, continue with step 6. The mode for overwriting temporary data is specified. 7 Control panel settings 7-20 bizhub C252 6 If a message appears, asking whether to reformat the hard disk, touch [Yes]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [No]. 7 Follow the instructions in the screen to restart the machine. 8 When an error message appears, indicating that the encryption key does not match, the Administrator Setting screen appears. In this screen, touch [HDD Format]. Control panel settings 7 bizhub C252 7-21 2 Reminder When turning the main power switch off, then on again, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on, otherwise the copier may not function normally. 2 Note In order to enable the setting specified in the Temporary Data Overwrite Setting screen, "Overwrite Temporary Data" on the Security Details screen must be set to "ON". 7 Control panel settings 7-22 bizhub C252 Overwrite all data The machine can be set to overwrite all data on the hard disk. With this procedure, all information on this machine is erased. Before performing this operation, be sure to consult with your service representative. The methods for overwriting data are described below. Setting Description Mode 1 Overwritten with 0x00 Mode 2 Overwritten with random 1-byte numbers % Overwritten with random 1-byte numbers % Overwritten with 0x00 Mode 3 Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with random 1- byte numbers % Verified Mode 4 Overwritten with random 1-byte numbers % Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff Mode 5 Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff Mode 6 Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with 512 bytes of the specified data Mode 7 Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with 0xaa Mode 8 Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with 0x00 % Overwritten with 0xff % Overwritten with 0xaa % Verified Control panel settings 7 bizhub C252 7-23 To overwrite all data 1 In the Administrator Setting screen, touch [Security Setting]. 2 In the Security Setting screen, touch [6 HDD Setting]. 3 In the HDD Setting screen, touch [3 Overwrite All Data]. The Overwrite All Data screen appears. 4 Select the desired method for overwriting data on the hard disk, and then click [Overwrite]. – The length of time to perform mode 1 is about 40 minutes. A confirmation message appears, asking whether or not to overwrite the data. 7 Control panel settings 7-24 bizhub C252 5 To overwrite the data, touch [Yes]. – To return to the Overwrite All Data screen without overwriting the data, touch [No]. The message "Overwriting all data was completed. Turn OFF main SW and ON" appears. 6 Follow the instructions in the screen to restart the machine. The data on the hard disk is overwritten. 2 Reminder While the data is being overwritten, do not use the main power switch to turn the machine off and on. When turning the main power switch OFF then ON, wait for 10 seconds or longer before turning it ON again; otherwise the copier may not function normally. Control panel settings 7 bizhub C252 7-25 To specify the hard disk locking password The password for locking the hard disk can be specified. The hard disk locking password is extremely important in order to protect the data on the hard disk. Keep the password in a safe place so that it will not be lost. 1 In the Administrator Setting screen, touch [Security Setting]. 2 In the Security Setting screen, touch [6 HDD Setting]. 3 In the HDD Setting screen, touch [4 HDD Lock Password]. – The Register HDD Lock Password screen appears. – If a hard disk locking password has already been specified, touch [6 HDD Lock Password] to display a screen that contains the current password. From the displayed screen, the password can be changed or the hard disk locking password can be canceled. 4 Type in the password (20 characters long), and then touch [OK]. A screen for retyping the password appears. 5 Type in the password specified in step 4, and then touch [OK]. The message "HDD password is registered. Turn main switch OFF and ON" appears. 6 Follow the instructions in the screen to restart the machine. The hard disk locking password is set. 7 Control panel settings 7-26 bizhub C252 2 Reminder Be sure to keep the password in a safe place so that it will not be lost. If the password is lost, significant restoration operations will be required for recovery. 2 Note Do not specify a password that is 20 times the same character. 2 Reminder Be sure to keep the specified password in a safe place so that it will not be lost. When turning the main power switch OFF then ON, wait for 10 seconds or longer before turning it ON again; otherwise the copier may not function normally. ! Detail For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 9-4. 2 Note To cancel the setting, touch [Cancel]. Control panel settings 7 bizhub C252 7-27 To specify hard disk encryption If the security kit is installed, the machine can be set to encrypt the hard disk. The setting for the "HDD Encryption Setting" parameter must be specified by the machine’s administrator. [HDD Encryption Setting] appears when optional security kit SC-503 is installed. If the encryption key is specified or changed, data saved on the hard disk may no longer be available. 1 In the Administrator Setting screen, touch [Security Setting]. 2 In the Security Setting screen, touch [6 HDD Setting]. 3 In the HDD Setting screen, touch [6 HDD Encryption Setting]. The Register Encryption Key screen appears. 4 Type in the encryption key (20 characters long), and then touch [OK]. – The encryption key must contain 20 characters. – Do not specify an encryption key that is 20 times the same character. – Be sure to keep the specified encryption key in a safe place so that it will not be lost. The Register Encryption Key screen appears again. 7 Control panel settings 7-28 bizhub C252 5 Type the encryption key specified in step 4, and then touch [OK]. The message "Turn the main switch OFF and ON." appears. 6 Follow the instructions in the screen and use the main power switch to turn off the machine. – When turning the main power switch off, then on again, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on, otherwise the copier may not function normally. 7 Use the main power switch to turn on the machine. An error message appears, indicating that the encryption key does not match. 8 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – When an error message appears, indicating that the encryption key does not match, the Administrator Setting screen appears. Control panel settings 7 bizhub C252 7-29 9 In the Encryption Key failure screen, touch [HDD Format]. – If [Reset Encryption Key] is touched, the Register Encryption Key screen appears. If authentication of the encryption key failed, specify the encryption key again. 10 Restart the machine. The hard disk is encrypted. 2 Reminder When turning the main power switch off, then on again, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on, otherwise the copier may not function normally. 7 Control panel settings 7-30 bizhub C252 To format the hard disk The hard disk can be formatted. When the hard disk is formatted, the data saved on the hard disk is erased. 1 In the Administrator Setting screen, touch [Security Setting]. 2 In the Security Setting screen, touch [6 HDD Setting]. 3 In the HDD Setting screen, touch [5 HDD Formatting]. A confirmation message appears, asking whether or not to format the hard disk. 4 To format the hard disk, touch [Yes]. – To return to the HDD Setting screen without formatting the hard disk, touch [No]. A screen appears, indicating that the hard disk is being formatted, and the hard disk is formatted. Control panel settings 7 bizhub C252 7-31 5 Restart the machine. The hard disk is formatted. 2 Reminder When turning the main power switch off, then on again, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on, otherwise the copier may not function normally. 7 Control panel settings 7-32 bizhub C252 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-3 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8.1 Settings that can be specified using PageScope Web Connection PageScope Web Connection is a device management utility supported by the HTTP server integrated into the device. Using a Web browser on a computer connected to the network, machine settings can be specified from PageScope Web Connection. When changing settings, operations such as typing text can be performed more easily from your computer. The following Box function settings can be specified. User mode The following settings can be specified by all users. 2 Note A password does not need to be entered when logged on as the box administrator. Only users logged on as a registered user can monitor or create private user boxes. Setting Description User Box tab Open User Box Operations, for example, to download or delete a saved document, can be performed after a box number and password have been specified. In addition, attributes, such as the box password and owner, can be changed. The following boxes can be opened. • Public/personal user boxes Create User Box The following boxes can be created. • Public/personal user boxes 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-4 bizhub C252 Administrator mode The following more advanced settings can be specified by the administrator. Setting Description User Box tab Open User Box Operations, for example, to download or delete a saved document, can be performed after a box number has been specified. In addition, attributes, such as the box password and owner, can be changed. The following boxes can be opened. • Public/personal user boxes Create User Box The following boxes can be created. • Public user boxes User Box Admin. Settings Whether or not box administrator settings have been specified can be viewed. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-5 8.2 Using PageScope Web Connection System requirements ! Detail PageScope Web Connection is a device management utility supported by the HTTP server integrated into the printer controller. Using a Web browser on a computer connected to the network, machine settings can be specified from PageScope Web Connection. For details on the display formats, refer to "Logging on and logging off" on page 8-10. Item Operating environment Network Ethernet (TCP/IP protocol) Computer applications Compatible Web browsers: Microsoft Internet Explorer Ver.6 or later recommended (*) (JavaScript enabled and Cookie enabled), Netscape Navigator Ver.7.02 or later (JavaScript enabled and Cookie enabled) Macromedia® Flash® (plug-in version 7.0 or later required if “Flash” is selected as the display format) (*) If Internet Explorer Ver. 5.5 is being used, Microsoft XML parser MSXML3.X must be installed. 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-6 bizhub C252 Accessing PageScope Web Connection PageScope Web Connection can be accessed directly from a Web browser. 1 Start the Web browser. 2 In the Address bar, type the IP address of the this machine, and then press the [Enter] key. – http:/// Example: If the IP address of this machine is 192.168.1.20 http://192.168.1.20/ ! Detail When SSL/TLS is enabled, the URL becomes: https:/// Even if "http://" is entered, the URL at "https://" is automatically accessed. 2 Note If user authentication is enabled, a page for entering the user name and password appears before you can operate the machine. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-7 Structure of pages The page that appears immediately after PageScope Web Connection is accessed is called the User mode page. This page appears after logging on to the application as a public user. The pages of PageScope Web Connection are constructed as shown below. ! Detail For details on logging on, refer to "Logging on and logging off" on page 8-10. 12 3 11 5 6 10 8 12 4 7 9 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-8 bizhub C252 No. Item Description 1 Konica Minolta logo Click the logo to go to the Konica Minolta Web site at the following URL. http://konicaminolta.com/ 2 PageScope Web Connection logo Click the logo to display the version information for PageScope Web Connection. 3 Logon mode The mode (public, registered user or administrator) of the user that is currently logged on is displayed. 4 [Logout] button Click to log off from the current mode. 5 Status display The statuses of this machine’s printer section and scanner section are displayed using icons. 6 Message display If an error occurred in the machine, the status of the malfunction/error and other error information are displayed. 7 Help The page specified in "Online Manual URL" is displayed. 8 Refresh button Click to update the displayed page. 9 Device name The name of the device currently being accessed is displayed. 10 Tabs Select the category of the page to be displayed. The following tabs are displayed in User mode. • System • Job • User Box • Print • Scan 11 Menus Information and settings for the selected tab are listed. The menu that appears differs depending on the tab that is selected. 12 Information and settings Details of the item selected from the menu are displayed. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-9 Web browser cache The newest information may not appear in the PageScope Web Connection pages because older versions of pages are saved in the cache for the Web browser. In addition, the following problems may occur when the cache is used. When using PageScope Web Connection, disable the cache for the Web browser. 2 Note If the utility is used with the cache enabled and Administrator mode was timed out, the timeout page may appear even after the utility is accessed again. In addition, since the machine’s control panel remains locked and cannot be used, the machine must be restarted. In order to avoid this problem, disable the cache. 2 Note The menus and commands may vary depending on the Web browser version. For details, refer to Help for the Web browser. For Internet Explorer 1 On the "Tools" menu, click "Internet Options". 2 On the General tab, click [Settings] under "Temporary Internet files". 3 Select "Every visit to the page", and then click [OK]. For Netscape Navigator 1 On the "Edit" menu, click "Preferences". 2 In the "Category" box on the left side of the dialog box, click "Advanced", then "Cache". 3 Under "Compare the page in the cache to the page on the network:", select "Every time I view the page". 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-10 bizhub C252 8.3 Logging on and logging off When PageScope Web Connection is accessed, the page for a public user appears. In order to log on as a registered user or an administrator when user authentication is performed, it is necessary to log off first, then log on again. Logging off 2 Note When logged on, a timeout occurs and you will automatically be logged off if no operation is performed for a specified length of time. The timeout period for User mode and Administrator mode can be specified in the page that appears by clicking "Authentication (Network Tab)", then "Auto Logout" in Administrator mode. To log off 1 Click [Logout] at the upper left of the window. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-11 The user is logged off, and the Login page appears. 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-12 bizhub C252 Logging on to user mode (public user) There are two procedures for logging on to User mode: one for a registered user and one for a public user. If user authentication is not performed, log on as a public user. 1 In the Login page, select "Public User". – If necessary, select the language and display format. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-13 2 Click [Login]. The User mode page appears. 2 Note If "Flash" is selected as the display format, the following will appear using the Flash feature. Flash Player is required to use the Flash feature. Status icons and messages Page display when "Input Tray" is selected in the menu below "Device Information" on the System tab Page display of the Job tab If a screen reading software is used, we recommend selecting "HTML" as the display format. 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-14 bizhub C252 Logging on to user mode (registered user/box administrator) There are two procedures for logging on to User mode: one for a registered user and one for a public user. The following procedure describes how to perform user authentication and log on with a specific user name. 2 Note Click the icon to the right of the "User Name" box, and then select a user name from the list. To log on as a registered user/box administrator 1 In the Login page, type the user name and the password. – To log on as the box administrator, type "boxadmin" as the user name and type the password specified in "Specifying box administrator settings (Administrator mode)" on page 8-36. – If necessary, select the language and display format. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-15 2 Click [Login]. The User mode page appears. 2 Note If "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error" in Administrator mode is set to "Mode 2" and a user enters an incorrect password the specified number of times, that user is locked out and can no longer use the machine. Contact the administrator to cancel operation restrictions. If a screen reading software is used, we recommend selecting “HTML” as the display format. 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-16 bizhub C252 Logging on to administrator mode In order to specify system and network settings, log on to Administrator mode. 2 Note When logged on to Administrator mode, the control panel of this machine is locked and cannot be used. Depending on the status of the machine, you may not be able to log on to Administrator mode. To log on to administrator mode 1 In the Login page, select "Administrator". – If necessary, select the language and display format. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-17 2 Type in the password for the machine’s administrator, and then click [OK]. The administrator mode page appears. 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-18 bizhub C252 2 Reminder If "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error" in Administrator mode is set to "Mode 2" and an incorrect administrator password is entered the specified number of times, it is no longer possible to enter Administrator mode. For details on the "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error" parameter, refer to the User manual [Copy Operations]. If a screen reading software is used, we recommend selecting “HTML” as the display format. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-19 8.4 Opening a box (User mode) Files in boxes used with Box functions can be viewed, downloaded or deleted. Opening boxes The list of boxes currently created and the list of data saved in those boxes can be viewed. 2 Reminder If "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error" in Administrator mode is set to "Mode 2" and a box user enters an incorrect password the specified number of times, that box is locked out and can no longer use the machine. Contact the administrator to cancel operation restrictions. 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-20 bizhub C252 Open public/personal user box Public/personal user box list Item Description User Box No. Type in the number of the box to be opened. User Box Password Type in the password if a password has been set for the box. Item Description Page (Display by 50 cases) If there are more than 50 boxes, specify the page to be displayed. Search from Index Displays the list of boxes according the index search characters selected when the box was created. Box list Displays the box number, box name, owner’s name and date/time that the box was created. appears beside boxes that have a password specified. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-21 To open a box 1 Select the box type, and then click [Next]. 2 In the "User Box No." box, type the box number. 3 In the "User Box Password" box, type the password. 4 Click [OK]. A list of the documents saved in the specified box is displayed. 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-22 bizhub C252 Checking box information and downloading documents The basic box information and the list of documents saved in the box can be viewed. In addition, documents can be deleted, downloaded, renamed or moved/copied. 2 Note The documents that can be downloaded are those saved in Scan mode. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-23 Box detail information Document list Item Description Refresh to the new information Click to display the most recent information. User Box No. Displays the number of the box. User Box Name Displays the name of the box. Index Displays the search characters for the box. Documentation Auto Delete Time Displays the length of time until documents are deleted from the box. [User Box Setting] button Click this button to specify basic box settings. [Delete User Box] button Click this button to delete the box. Item Description Document Name Displays the name of the document. Time Stored Displays the date/time that the document was registered. Click this icon to display detailed information for the document. Indicates documents that can be downloaded. Click this icon to download the document to a computer. Specify the type of data to be downloaded and the range of pages, and then click [OK]. Click this icon to delete the document. Click this icon to change the name of the document. Click this icon to move/copy the document to a different box. 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-24 bizhub C252 Changing the box settings To change the box settings, click [User Box Setting] in the Box Detail Information page. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-25 When changing the box attributes, specify information for the following, and then click [Apply]. 2 Reminder The following appear with personal user boxes. User Box Owner is changed. User Box Type Owner Name Item Description User Box No. Displays the box number. This cannot be changed. User Box Name Type in a box name of a maximum of 20 characters. Index Type in the characters used for indexing. To add the box to the "Main" group, select the check box. Documentation Auto Delete Time Select the length of time that a document is stored in the box. User Box Password is changed. Select this check box to change the password for the box. Current Password Type in the current password of a maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters. New Password Type in the new password. Enter 8 or less numbers. The plus sign (+) and quotation mark (“) cannot be used. Retype New Password Type in the new password again for confirmation. User Box Owner is changed. Select this check box to change the box type or the owner of the box. User Box Type Select either "Public" or "Personal" as the box type. Owner Name If "Personal" was selected as the box type, type in an owner’s name of 64 or less characters. 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-26 bizhub C252 Deleting a box The currently open box can be deleted. 1 In the Box Detail Information page, click [Delete User Box]. 2 Check the displayed information, and then click [OK] to delete the box. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-27 8.5 Creating boxes (User mode) New boxes can be created. Specify settings for the following when creating new boxes. For public/personal boxes 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-28 bizhub C252 Item Description User Box No. Type in a box number between 1 and 999,999,999. Up to 1,000 boxes can be created. User Box Name Type in a box name of a maximum of 20 characters. User Box Password Type in a password of a maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters. The plus sign (+) and quotation mark (“) cannot be used. Retype User Box Password Type in the password again for confirmation. Index Type in the characters used for indexing. To add the box to the "Main" group, select the check box. User Box Type Select either "Public" or "Personal" as the box type. Owner Name If "Personal" was selected as the box type, type in an owner’s name of 64 or less characters. Documentation Auto Delete Time Select the length of time that a document is stored in the box. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-29 To create a box 1 Select the type of box to be created, and then click [Next]. 2 Specify the necessary settings, and then click [Apply]. 2 Reminder If "Password Rules" is set to "ON", a password containing less than 8 characters cannot be registered. If a box password containing less than 8 characters has already been registered, change the password so that it contains 8 characters before setting "Password Rules" to "ON". For details on the password rules, refer to the User manual [Copy Operations]. 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-30 bizhub C252 8.6 Opening a box (Administrator mode) When logged on to Administrator mode, the settings of boxes can be changed or the boxes can be deleted without the box password being entered. Opening boxes The list of boxes currently created and the list of data saved in those boxes can be viewed. Open public/private user box Public/personal user box list Item Description User Box No. Type in the number of the box to be opened. Item Description Page (Display by 50 cases) If there are more than 50 boxes, specify the page to be displayed. Search from Index Displays the list of boxes according the index search characters selected when the box was created. Box list Displays the box number, box name, owner’s name and date/time that the box was created. appears beside boxes that have a password specified. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-31 To open a box 1 Select the box type, and then click [Next]. 2 In the "User Box No." box, type the box number. 3 Click [OK]. A list of the documents saved in the specified box is displayed. 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-32 bizhub C252 Changing the box settings To change the box settings, click [User Box Setting] in the Box Detail Information page. When changing the box attributes, specify information for the following, and then click [Apply]. Item Description User Box No. Displays the box number. This cannot be changed. User Box Name Type in a box name of a maximum of 20 characters. Index Type in the characters used for indexing. To add the box to the "Main" group, select the check box. Documentation Auto Delete Time Select the length of time that a document is stored in the box. User Box Password is changed. Select this check box to change the password for the box. New Password Type in the new password of a maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters. The plus sign (+) and quotation mark (“) cannot be used. Retype New Password Type in the new password again for confirmation. User Box Owner is changed. Select this check box to change the box type or the owner of the box. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-33 2 Reminder The following appear with personal user boxes. User Box Owner is changed. User Box Type Owner Name 2 Reminder If "Password Rules" is set to "ON", a password containing less than 8 characters cannot be registered. User Box Type Select either "Public" or "Personal" as the box type. Owner Name If "Personal" was selected as the box type, type in an owner’s name of 64 or less characters. Item Description 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-34 bizhub C252 Deleting a box The currently open box can be deleted. 1 In the Box Detail Information page, click [Delete User Box]. 2 Check the displayed information, and then click [OK] to delete the box. Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8 bizhub C252 8-35 8.7 Creating boxes (Administrator mode) New boxes can be created. Only shared boxes can be created in Administrator mode. To create a box 1 Select the type of box to be created, and then click [Next]. 2 Specify the necessary settings, and then click [Apply]. – For details on the settings, refer to "Creating boxes (User mode)" on page 8-27. 8 Specifying settings using PageScope Web Connection 8-36 bizhub C252 8.8 Specifying box administrator settings (Administrator mode) The box can be checked to see whether or not box administrator settings have been specified. ! Detail The box administrator can monitor documents in public and personal user boxes without a password. From the control panel of the machine or the Login page of PageScope Web Connection, log on with the ID "boxadmin", and then type in the specified password. 9 Appendix Appendix 9 bizhub C252 9-3 9 Appendix 9.1 Error message list If any of the following error messages appear, perform the operations described below. Message Cause and remedy Cannot connect to the network. A connection to the network could not be established. Check if the network cable is correctly connected. In addition, check that the Network Setting parameters on the Administrator Setting screen have been correctly specified. The destination cannot be selected because the number of destinations has exceeded the max. number of broadcasting possible. The number of destinations specified exceeds the number possible for a broadcast transmission. Reduce the number of broadcast destinations, or send the transmission in multiple batches. Image could not be saved in User Box due to insufficient capacity in HDD. Please check Job History. The hard disk is full. Delete unnecessary data, and then try saving the image. The number of User Box has reached its maximum. The number of user boxes that can be registered has reached the maximum number possible. Delete unnecessary user boxes, and then try registering new boxes. The number of documents in User Box has reached its maximum. The number of documents that can be saved in a user box has reached the maximum number possible. Delete unnecessary documents, and then try saving the document. The number of jobs has reached its maximum. Please wait until a job is completed. The number of jobs that can be programmed has reached the maximum number possible. Wait until a job has been completed, or delete a current job. 9 Appendix 9-4 bizhub C252 9.2 Entering text The following procedure describes how to use the keyboard that appears in the touch panel for typing in the names of registered accounts and custom paper sizes. The keypad can also be used to type in numbers. Any of the following keyboards may appear. Example Password input screen: Screen for entering the name of a custom paper size: Appendix 9 bizhub C252 9-5 Touching [Shift] switches the keyboard display between lowercase letters (numbers) and uppercase letters (symbols). 9 Appendix 9-6 bizhub C252 To type text % Touch the button for the desired character from the keyboard that appeared. – To type in uppercase letters or symbols, touch [Shift]. – Numbers can also be typed in with the keypad. The entered characters appear in the text box. 2 Note To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. To clear all entered text, press the [C] (clear) key. ! Detail To change a character in the entered text, touch [ ] and [ ] to move the cursor to the character to be changed, touch [Delete], and then type in the desired letter or number. List of available characters space Alphanumeric characters/ symbols Appendix 9 bizhub C252 9-7 9.3 Glossary Term Definition 10Base-T/100Base- TX/1000Base-T An Ethernet standard, which is a cable consisting of twisted copper wire pairs. The transmission speed of 10Base-T is 10 Mbps, of 100Base-TX is 100 Mbps, and of 1000Base-T is 1000 Mbps. anonymous FTP While normal FTP sites are protected by an account name and password, this type of FTP site can be used by anyone without a password by simply entering "anonymous" as the account name. Auto IP A function for automatically acquiring the IP address. If acquisition of the IP address failed with DHCP, an IP address is acquired from the address space of 169.254.0.0. bit Abbreviation for Binary Digit. The smallest unit of information (data quantity) on a computer or printer. Displays data using 0 or 1. Bit-mapped Font Fonts that are represented by a set of dots to form the character. Dithering may occur if the character size is increased. BMP Abbreviation for Bitmap. A file format for saving image data which uses the .bmp extension. Commonly used on Windows platforms. You can specify the color depth from monochrome (2 values) to full color (16,777,216 colors). Images are not usually compressed when saved. Byte Unit of information (data quantity) on a computer or printer. Configured as 1 byte equals 8 bits. Compact PDF Compression method for reducing the data amount using the PDF format when converting color documents to data. The highest compression efficiency is achieved by identifying the text and image regions and using the resolution and compression method most appropriate for each region. The compact PDF format can be selected when converting documents to data using the scanning functions of this machine. Contrast The difference in intensity between the light and dark parts of the image (light/dark variation). An image with little light/dark variation is said to have a low contrast, and an image with large light/dark variation is said to have a high contrast. Default The initial settings. The settings first selected when the machine is turned on, or the settings first specified when the function is selected. Default Gateway A device, such as a computer or router, used as a "gateway" to access computers not on the same LAN Density An indication of the amount of darkness in the image Density Adjustment The function that adjusts the color tones of an output device, such as a printer or monitor DHCP Abbreviation for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol in which a client computer on a TCP/IP network automatically specifies the network settings from the server. With collective management of the IP address for DHCP clients on the DHCP server, you can avoid duplication of an address and you can build a network easily. Dither A method of using only black and white to create the illusion of different shades of gray. The process is simpler than with error diffusion; however, some irregularities may occur. 9 Appendix 9-8 bizhub C252 DNS Abbreviation for Domain Name System. A system that acquires the supported IP addresses from host names in a network environment. DNS allows the user to access other computers over a network by specifying host names, instead of difficult to memorize and understand IP addresses. DPI (dpi) Abbreviation for Dots Per Inch. A resolution unit used by printers and scanners. Indicates how many dots per inch are represented in an image. The higher the value, the higher the resolution. Driver Software that works as a bridge between a computer and a peripheral device. Ethernet LAN transmission line standard File Extension The characters added to the file name in order to differentiate file formats. The file extension is added after a period, for example, ".bmp" or ".jpg". FTP Abbreviation for File Transfer Protocol. A protocol for transferring files over the Internet or an intranet on the TCP/IP network. Gradation The light and dark levels of an image. As the number increases, smoother brightness variations can be reproduced. Grayscale Monochrome image expressive form using the gradation information from black to white Halftone The method of producing the light and dark parts of an image through varying sizes of black and white dots Hard Disk Large capacity storage device for storing data. The data can be stored even if the power is turned off. HTTP Abbreviation for HyperText Transfer Protocol. A protocol used to send and receive data between a Web server and a client (Web browser). Documents containing images, recordings, and video clips can be exchanged with the expressive form information. Install To install hardware, operating systems, applications, printer drivers on to a computer IP Address A code (address) that is used to identify individual network devices over the Internet. A maximum of three digits for four numbers are displayed such as 192.168.1.10. IP addresses are assigned to devices, including computers, which are connected to the Internet. J2RE Abbreviation for Java 2 Runtime Environment. One type of JavaVirtual Machine (Java VM) in a program operating environment written in the object-oriented language Java, developed by Sun Microsystems. This is required to run applications that were created with Java. Java A programming language developed by Sun Microsystems that runs on most computers regardless of the installed hardware and operating system. However, in order to run Java applications, an operating environment called "Java Virtual Machine (Java VM)" is required. JPEG Abbreviation for Joint Photographic Experts Group. One of the file formats for saving image data. (The file extension is ".jpg".) The compression ratio is roughly 1/10 to 1/100. This format uses an effective method in the compression of continuous-tone images, such as photographs. Term Definition Appendix 9 bizhub C252 9-9 Kerberos A type of network authentication system used by Windows 2000 or later. Used in Active Directory authentication. Users can be safely and efficiently authenticated with a two-phase authentication (user logon and network resource usage) on a dependable site set up on the network. LAN Abbreviation for Local Area Network. A network which connects computers on the same floor, in the same building, or in neighboring buildings. LDAP Abbreviation for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol. On a TCP/IP network, such as the Internet or an intranet, this protocol is used to access a database for managing environment information and the email addresses of network users. Macromedia® Flash® Software developed by Macromedia, Inc. and used to create data combining vector-graphic animation and sound, and the format of this data file. The bidirectional content can be manipulated using a keyboard and a mouse. The files can be kept relatively compact, and they can be accessed with the Web browser plug-in. Memory Storage device for storing data temporally. When the power is turned off the data may or may not be erased. Multi-Page TIFF A single TIFF file that contains multiple pages OS Abbreviation for Operating System. Basic software for controlling the system of a computer. PASV Abbreviation for PASsiVe. A mode for connecting to an FTP server from within a firewall. If this mode is not specified, the firewall will be considered inaccessible and the connection will be terminated, preventing the file from being sent. PDF Abbreviation for Portable Document Format. An electronically formatted document which uses the .pdf extension. Based on the Post- Script format, you can use the free Adobe Reader software to view documents. Pixel An image pixel. The smallest unit of an image. Plug-and-play Ability to automatically find and use the appropriate driver when a peripheral device is connected to a computer Port Number The number that identifies the transmission port for each process running on a computer on the network. The same port cannot be used by multiple processes. PPI Abbreviation for Pixels Per Inch. Measuring unit for resolution, particularly for monitors and scanners. This measurement indicates the number of image pixels contained within 1 inch. Preview A function that allows you to view an image before processing a print or scan job Print Job Print request transmitted from a computer to a printing device Property Attribute information When using a printer driver, various functions can be specified in the file properties. In the file properties, you can check the attribute information of the file. Protocol The rules that allow computers to communicate with other computers or peripheral devices Term Definition 9 Appendix 9-10 bizhub C252 Proxy Server A server that is installed to act as an intermediary connection between each client and different servers to effectively ensure security over the entire system for Internet connections Resolution Displays the ability to reproduce the details of images and print matter correctly Scanning With the scanning operation of the scanner, an image is read while the row of image sensors is gradually moved. The direction that the image sensors are moved is called the main scanning direction, and the direction in which the image sensors are arranged is called the sub-scanning direction. Screen Frequency Indicates the density of dots used to create the image Single-Page TIFF A single TIFF file that contains only a single page SMB Abbreviation for Server Message Block. A protocol that shares files and printers over a network and which is mainly used by Microsoft Windows. SSL/TLS Abbreviation for Secure Socket Layer/Transport Layer Security. The encoding method for safely transmitting data between the Web server and browser. Subnet Mask The unit used to divide a TCP/IP network into small networks (subnetworks). It is used to identify the bits in a network address that are higher than the IP address. TCP/IP Abbreviation for Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. The de facto standard protocol used by the Internet that uses IP addresses to identify each network device. Thumbnail A small image that shows the contents of the image or document file (the image displayed when the file was opened) TIFF Abbreviation for Tagged Image File Format. One of the file formats for saving image data. (The file extension is ".tif".) Depending on the tag indicating the data type, information for various image formats can be saved in a single image data. TWAIN The interface standard for imaging devices, such as scanners and digital cameras, and for applications, such as graphics software. In order to use a TWAIN-compliant device, the TWAIN driver is required. Uninstall To delete software installed on a computer USB Abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. A general interface standard for connecting a mouse, printer, and other devices to a computer. Web Browser Software such as Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator for viewing Web pages Term Definition Appendix 9 bizhub C252 9-11 9.4 Index A Account name 3-3 Account track 3-3 Address book destination 5-11, 6-12 Administrator mode 8-4, 8-16 Administrator setting screen 7-10 Administrator settings 7-13 B Binding 4-20, 4-47 Binding margin 4-21, 4-51 Box administrator 8-14 Box administrator settings 7-13 Box destination 3-11 Box functions 2-5 Box mode screen 4-3 Box name search 4-5 Box registration 7-5 Box types 2-4 C Center binding 4-20, 4-47 Changing document names from machine 4-7 Checking document information from machine 5-23, 6-24 Checking routing information 5-23, 6-24 Combined printing 4-38 Compact PDF 5-26 Copy number 4-15, 4-42 Copying document data 4-10 Cover mode 4-23 Cover pages 4-23 Creating boxes 7-5 D Date 4-26, 4-48 Delete unused user box 7-12 Deleting document data 4-6 Destinations 3-11, 5-7, 5-9, 5-11, 5-15, 5-17, 5-20, 6-8, 6-10, 6-12, 6-16, 6-18, 6-21 Direct input 3-15 Document information check from machine 5-23, 6-24 Document name change from machine 4-7 Document viewing 4-3 Double-sided/single-sided printing 4-16, 4-43 E Editing document data 5-3 E-mail destination 5-15, 6-16 Entering text 9-4 F File format 5-26 File type 5-26 Finishing settings 4-17, 4-44 FTP destination 5-17, 6-18 G Glossary 9-7 Group destination 5-9, 6-10 H Hard disk capacity 7-17 Hard disk password 7-25 Hard disk settings 7-16 HDD settings 7-16 L Login 8-12, 8-14, 8-16 Logout 8-10 9 Appendix 9-12 bizhub C252 M Margin setting 4-22, 4-52 Moving document data 4-8 Multiple document printing 4-38 N Number of copies 4-15, 4-42 O Overwrite 7-18 Overwrite all data 7-22 Overwriting data 7-22 P Page # 4-29, 4-55 Page margin 4-22, 4-52 PageScope Web Connection 8-5 Password 3-3, 7-25 Personal user box 4-3, 5-3, 7-6 Printing document data 4-12 Printing document data from public user box/personal user box 4-3 Program destination 5-7, 6-8 Proof copy 4-36 Public user 8-12 Public user box 4-3, 5-3, 7-6 R Registered user 8-14 Registering boxes 7-5 Routing document data 5-6, 6-6 Routing document data from public user box/personal user box 5-3 Routing information check 6-24 Routing information check 5-23 Routing transmission methods 5-5, 6-4 Routing types 5-4, 6-4 S Sample copy 4-36 Saving copy documents 3-7 Saving document data to specified box 3-15 Saving scans 3-11 Searching for box names 4-5 Single-sided/double-sided printing 4-16, 4-43 SMB destination 5-20, 6-21 Stapling 4-20, 4-47 T Test print 4-36 Text entry 9-4 Time 4-26, 4-48 Transmission methods 5-5, 6-4 U User authentication 3-3 User box administrator setting 7-14 User manual/CD-ROM 1-13 User mode 8-3 User name 3-3 V Viewing document data 4-3 W Web browser cache Copy operations bizhub C252 Contents-1 Contents 1 Introduction Energy Star®.................................................................................. 1-3 What is an ENERGY STAR® product? .......................................... 1-3 1.1 Trademarks and registered trademarks......................................... 1-4 OpenSSL Statement ...................................................................... 1-5 1.2 Available features ............................................................................. 1-8 Selecting the print color ................................................................. 1-8 Automatically selecting the paper.................................................. 1-8 Adjusting copies to the size of the paper ...................................... 1-8 Specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios ............... 1-8 Scanning the document in separate batches ................................ 1-8 Center binding................................................................................ 1-9 Sorting copies ................................................................................ 1-9 Stapling copies .............................................................................. 1-9 Punching holes in copies ............................................................. 1-10 Copying multiple document pages onto a single page ............... 1-10 Copying a document containing various page sizes ................... 1-10 Adjusting copies according to the image quality of the original .. 1-11 Inserting paper between copies of overhead projector transparencies.............................................................................. 1-11 Adding a cover page.................................................................... 1-11 Inserting different paper into copies ............................................ 1-12 Inserting pages from a different document at specified locations in a copy ....................................................................... 1-12 Printing double-sided copies with the specified page on the front side........................................................................... 1-13 Copying with reversed colors ...................................................... 1-13 Printing a mirror image................................................................. 1-13 Copying with a background color................................................ 1-14 Improving the copy color quality.................................................. 1-14 Separately copying a page spread .............................................. 1-14 Creating booklets from copies of pamphlets............................... 1-14 Repeating copy images ............................................................... 1-15 Printing the enlarged image on multiple pages ........................... 1-15 Making copies for filing................................................................ 1-15 Copying with the page layout of a magazine............................... 1-16 Erasing sections of copies ........................................................... 1-16 Adjusting the image to fit the paper size ..................................... 1-16 Printing distribution numbers or copy protection text on copies...................................................................................... 1-17 Contents-2 bizhub C252 Managing jobs .............................................................................. 1-17 Programming copy settings.......................................................... 1-17 Checking the copy settings .......................................................... 1-17 Enlarging the size of text in touch panel screens ......................... 1-17 Displaying explanations of functions and settings ....................... 1-17 Interrupting a copy job.................................................................. 1-18 Printing a sample copy ................................................................. 1-18 1.3 Adjust color parameters ................................................................. 1-19 1.4 General information about color.................................................... 1-21 1.5 Relationship between hue, brightness and saturation (color model) .................................................................................... 1-22 1.6 “Red” parameter.............................................................................. 1-23 1.7 “Green” parameter .......................................................................... 1-24 1.8 “Blue” parameter............................................................................. 1-25 1.9 “Color Balance” parameter (CMYK color adjustment) ................ 1-26 1.10 “Brightness” parameter .................................................................. 1-28 1.11 “Contrast” parameter...................................................................... 1-29 1.12 “Saturation” parameter................................................................... 1-30 1.13 “Sharpness” parameter .................................................................. 1-31 1.14 “Hue” parameter.............................................................................. 1-32 1.15 “Copy Density” parameter.............................................................. 1-33 1.16 “Single Color” function ................................................................... 1-34 1.17 “2 Color” function............................................................................ 1-35 1.18 “Background Color” function......................................................... 1-36 1.19 “Neg-/Pos. Reverse” function........................................................ 1-37 Monotone copy............................................................................. 1-37 Full-color copy and “Background Color” function........................ 1-38 1.20 “Mirror Image” function.................................................................. 1-39 1.21 Explanation of manual conventions............................................... 1-40 Safety advices............................................................................... 1-40 Sequence of action....................................................................... 1-40 Tips ............................................................................................... 1-41 Special text markings ................................................................... 1-41 1.22 Descriptions and symbols for documents and paper.................. 1-42 “Width” and “Length” ................................................................... 1-42 Paper Orientation.......................................................................... 1-42 bizhub C252 Contents-3 1.23 User manuals .................................................................................. 1-43 User manual [Copy Operations] ........................... 1-43 User manual [Network Scanner Operations]................................ 1-43 User manual [Box Operations] ..................................................... 1-43 User manual [Enlarge Display Operations] .................................. 1-43 User manual [FK-502 Facsimile Operations] ............................... 1-43 User manual [Network Facsimile Operations].............................. 1-43 User manual [Print Operations] .................................................... 1-44 1.24 Legal restrictions on copying........................................................ 1-45 2 Installation and operation precautions 2.1 Safety information ............................................................................ 2-3 Warning and precaution symbols .................................................. 2-3 Meaning of symbols....................................................................... 2-4 Disassemble and modification....................................................... 2-4 Power cord..................................................................................... 2-5 Power source ................................................................................. 2-6 Power plug ..................................................................................... 2-7 Grounding ...................................................................................... 2-7 Installation...................................................................................... 2-8 Ventilation ...................................................................................... 2-9 Actions in response to troubles ..................................................... 2-9 Consumables ............................................................................... 2-10 When moving the machine .......................................................... 2-11 Before successive holidays.......................................................... 2-11 2.2 Regulation notices.......................................................................... 2-12 CE Marking (Declaration of Conformity) for users of the European Union (EU).................................................................... 2-12 USER INSTRUCTIONS FCC PART 15 - RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES (for U.S.A. users) .......................................................... 2-12 INTERFERENCE-CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD (ICES-003 ISSUE 4) (for Canada users) ....................................... 2-12 For users in countries not subject to class B regulations............ 2-13 Laser safety.................................................................................. 2-13 Internal laser radiation.................................................................. 2-13 CDRH regulations ........................................................................ 2-14 For European users...................................................................... 2-15 For Denmark users....................................................................... 2-15 For Finland, Sweden users .......................................................... 2-15 For Norway users......................................................................... 2-16 Laser safety labely ....................................................................... 2-17 Ozone release .............................................................................. 2-18 Acoustic noise (for European users only)..................................... 2-18 For EU member states only ......................................................... 2-18 Contents-4 bizhub C252 2.3 Caution notations and labels.......................................................... 2-19 2.4 Space requirements ........................................................................ 2-20 2.5 Operation precautions .................................................................... 2-21 Power source................................................................................ 2-21 Operating environment ................................................................. 2-21 Storage of copies.......................................................................... 2-21 3 Before making copies 3.1 Part names and their functions........................................................ 3-3 Options ........................................................................................... 3-3 Outside of machine......................................................................... 3-6 Inside of machine.......................................................................... 3-12 Finisher FS-603/punch kit PK-501 ............................................... 3-14 Finisher FS-501/job separator JS-601.......................................... 3-16 Saddle stitcher SD-503/mailbin kit MT-501 ................................. 3-18 Finisher FS-514/output tray OT-601/punch kit PK-510................ 3-19 Control panel ................................................................................ 3-22 Basic settings screen (Basic screen) ............................................ 3-25 Icons that appear in the screen .................................................... 3-27 3.2 Adjusting the angle of the control panel ....................................... 3-28 To adjust the angle of the control panel ....................................... 3-28 3.3 Turning on the Main Power and the Auxiliary Power................... 3-30 To turn on the machine................................................................. 3-30 To scan during warm-up............................................................... 3-32 To turn off the machine................................................................. 3-34 Automatically canceling the settings (automatic panel reset) ................................................................. 3-35 Automatically canceling the mode screen (automatic system reset)............................................................... 3-35 Automatically conserving energy (Low Power mode)................... 3-36 Automatically conserving energy (Sleep mode)............................ 3-37 Manually conserving energy ......................................................... 3-38 Automatically turning the machine on/off (weekly timer) .............. 3-39 Controlling each user’s use of this machine (user authentication) ..................................................................... 3-41 Controlling each account’s use of this machine (account track) .............................................................................. 3-46 3.4 Loading paper into the 1st tray ...................................................... 3-49 To load paper (1st tray) ................................................................. 3-49 3.5 Loading paper into the 2nd, 3rd or 4th tray .................................. 3-55 To load paper (2nd, 3rd or 4th tray) .............................................. 3-55 bizhub C252 Contents-5 3.6 Loading paper into the LCT........................................................... 3-57 To load paper (LCT) ..................................................................... 3-57 3.7 Loading paper into the bypass tray .............................................. 3-59 To load paper (bypass tray) ......................................................... 3-59 4 Basic copy operations 4.1 General copy operation.................................................................... 4-3 To make a copy ............................................................................. 4-3 4.2 Operations that cannot be combined............................................. 4-6 Operations where the setting specified last is given priority ......... 4-6 Operations where the setting specified first is given priority ......... 4-8 4.3 Feeding the document ..................................................................... 4-9 To load the document into the ADF............................................... 4-9 To place the document on the original glass............................... 4-11 Scanning the document in separate batches (“Separate Scan” setting)............................................................. 4-13 Scanning a multi-page document from the original glass ........... 4-18 4.4 Specifying original settings ........................................................... 4-24 Copying documents of mixed sizes (“Mixed Original” setting) ............................................................. 4-24 Copying thick documents (“Thick Original” setting) .................... 4-26 Selecting the document orientation (Original Direction settings) .......................................................... 4-28 To specify an original direction setting ........................................ 4-30 Selecting the position of the binding margin (Margin settings)........................................................................... 4-32 To specify a margin setting.......................................................... 4-34 To change scan settings for each document............................... 4-36 4.5 Selecting a color setting ................................................................ 4-40 To select a color setting............................................................... 4-41 4.6 Selecting a paper setting............................................................... 4-43 Automatically selecting the paper size (“Auto Paper Select” setting) ....................................................... 4-44 Manually selecting the desired paper size................................... 4-45 Contents-6 bizhub C252 4.7 Specifying a zoom setting .............................................................. 4-46 Automatically selecting the zoom ratio (“Auto Zoom” setting) ................................................................... 4-46 Specifying the same zoom ratio as the document (“×1.0” setting) .............................................................................. 4-48 Slightly reducing the copy (“Minimal” setting) .............................. 4-49 Selecting a preset zoom ratio (enlarge and reduce settings) ....... 4-50 Typing In the zoom ratio (XY Zoom setting).................................. 4-51 Typing In separate X and Y zoom ratios (independent zoom settings) ........................................................ 4-53 Selecting a stored zoom ratio....................................................... 4-56 Storing the desired zoom ratio ..................................................... 4-57 4.8 Selecting the document and copy type settings (Simplex/Duplex settings)............................................................... 4-59 To select single-sided copies ....................................................... 4-60 To select double-sided copies ..................................................... 4-62 4.9 Selecting the quality of the document........................................... 4-65 Loading documents with small print or photos (Original Type settings) ................................................................. 4-65 To specify an original type setting ................................................ 4-67 4.10 Specifying the density settings ...................................................... 4-70 Adjusting the print density (Density settings)................................ 4-71 Adjusting the background density (Background Removal settings).................................................... 4-73 Adjusting the reproduction quality of text..................................... 4-75 4.11 Selecting a combine originals setting ........................................... 4-77 Copying multiple document pages onto a single page (Combine Originals) ...................................................................... 4-79 4.12 Selecting finishing settings ............................................................ 4-81 Separating copies by sets (“Sort” setting).................................... 4-84 Separating copies by pages (“Group” setting) ............................. 4-86 Stapling copies (Staple settings) .................................................. 4-88 To bind copies with staples .......................................................... 4-91 Punching holes in copies (Punch settings) ................................... 4-93 To punch holes in copies.............................................................. 4-94 4.13 Specifying center binding............................................................... 4-96 To bind copies at the center (“Fold & Staple”): Finisher FS-603............................................................................. 4-99 To bind copies at the center (“Fold & Staple”): Finisher FS-514........................................................................... 4-101 bizhub C252 Contents-7 4.14 Scanning the next document to be copied while a copy job is being printed (next job reservation) ........................................ 4-103 To reserve a copy job ................................................................ 4-103 4.15 Stopping scanning/printing ......................................................... 4-105 To stop scanning/printing .......................................................... 4-105 4.16 Deleting a stopped job................................................................. 4-106 To delete a stopped job............................................................. 4-106 5 Additional copy operations 5.1 Checking the copy settings (Mode Check) .................................... 5-3 To check the settings..................................................................... 5-3 To change the settings................................................................... 5-5 5.2 Printing a proof copy to be checked (Proof Copy) ........................ 5-6 To make test prints ........................................................................ 5-6 5.3 Interrupting a copy job (Interrupt mode) ........................................ 5-9 To interrupt a copy job................................................................... 5-9 5.4 Registering copy programs (Mode Memory) ............................... 5-11 To store a copy program ............................................................. 5-11 To delete a copy program............................................................ 5-14 5.5 Copying with programmed copy settings (Mode Memory) ........ 5-15 To recall a stored job ................................................................... 5-15 5.6 Displaying function descriptions (Help)........................................ 5-18 Overview of Help Screens............................................................ 5-18 To display the Main Help Menu screen ....................................... 5-22 To display the Help screen while specifying a setting ................. 5-24 5.7 Specifying control panel settings (Accessibility mode) .............. 5-25 Displaying the Accessibility Setting Screen................................. 5-25 To set the “Key Repeat Start/Interval Time” function .................. 5-25 To set the “Enlarge Display Timer Setting” function.................... 5-28 To set the “Message Display Time” function............................... 5-31 To set the “Sound Setting” function ............................................ 5-33 To set the “Touch Panel Adj.” function........................................ 5-36 To set the “Auto Reset Notification” function .............................. 5-38 To set the “Enlarge Display Confirmation Screen” function ........ 5-41 Contents-8 bizhub C252 6 Troubleshooting 6.1 When the message “malfunction detected.” appears (call technical representative) .......................................................... 6-3 To call the technical representative ................................................ 6-5 6.2 When the message “Misfeed detected.” appears.......................... 6-6 Location of Paper misfeed.............................................................. 6-6 Paper misfeed indications .............................................................. 6-8 To clear a paper misfeed in the bypass tray................................. 6-10 To clear a paper misfeed in the automatic duplex unit................. 6-11 To clear a paper misfeed in the 1st tray ....................................... 6-12 To clear a paper misfeed in the 2nd tray ...................................... 6-13 To clear a paper misfeed in a paper tray (3rd or 4th tray) ............ 6-14 To clear a paper misfeed in the LCT............................................. 6-15 To clear a paper misfeed in the right-side door............................ 6-16 To clear a paper misfeed in the fusing unit................................... 6-19 To clear a banner paper misfeed.................................................. 6-22 To clear a paper misfeed in the ADF ............................................ 6-27 To clear a paper misfeed in finisher FS-501................................. 6-31 To clear a paper misfeed in finisher FS-603................................. 6-35 To clear a paper misfeed in the finisher FS-514........................... 6-39 To clear a paper misfeed in the mailbin........................................ 6-42 To clear a paper misfeed in the saddle stitcher............................ 6-44 6.3 When the message “Replenish paper.” appears.......................... 6-46 To replenish paper ........................................................................ 6-46 6.4 When the message “... Not enough remaining memory.” appears............................................................................................. 6-47 Memory becomes full while scanning........................................... 6-47 Memory becomes full while queuing a job ................................... 6-48 6.5 When “Please replace following unit(s).” appears ....................... 6-49 6.6 When the message “Need to replace XXXX.” appears................ 6-50 6.7 Simple troubleshooting................................................................... 6-52 Main unit ....................................................................................... 6-52 ADF ............................................................................................... 6-55 Finisher ......................................................................................... 6-55 6.8 Main messages and their remedies............................................... 6-56 bizhub C252 Contents-9 7 Specifications 7.1 Specifications ................................................................................... 7-3 bizhub C252................................................................................... 7-3 Automatic duplex unit .................................................................... 7-6 Option specifications ..................................................................... 7-6 Automatic document feeder DF-601 ............................................. 7-6 Paper feed cabinet PC-103 ........................................................... 7-7 Paper feed cabinet PC-203 ........................................................... 7-8 Paper feed cabinet PC-403 ........................................................... 7-8 Finisher FS-603.............................................................................. 7-9 Punch kit PK-501 ......................................................................... 7-10 Finisher FS-501............................................................................ 7-10 Job separator JS-601 .................................................................. 7-11 Finisher FS-514............................................................................ 7-11 Punch kit PK-510 ......................................................................... 7-12 Saddle stitcher SD-503................................................................ 7-12 Output tray OT-601...................................................................... 7-12 Mailbin kit MT-501 ....................................................................... 7-13 8 Copy paper/original documents 8.1 Copy paper........................................................................................ 8-3 Possible paper sizes ...................................................................... 8-3 Paper types and paper capacities ................................................. 8-5 Special paper ................................................................................. 8-6 Precautions for paper .................................................................... 8-8 Paper storage................................................................................. 8-8 Auto tray switch feature ................................................................. 8-9 Order for Selecting the Paper trays ............................................... 8-9 8.2 Selecting the paper settings.......................................................... 8-10 To automatically detect the paper size (“Auto Paper Select” setting) ....................................................... 8-10 To specify a paper size (set size settings).................................... 8-12 To specify a non-standard paper size (Custom Size settings) .... 8-15 To store a non-standard paper size (Custom Size settings)........ 8-18 To specify a setting for oversized paper (Oversized Paper settings) ........................................................... 8-22 To specify a setting for special paper .......................................... 8-25 To print double-sided copies manually........................................ 8-27 Contents-10 bizhub C252 8.3 Original documents......................................................................... 8-29 Documents that can be loaded into the ADF ............................... 8-29 Precautions for loading documents into the ADF......................... 8-31 Documents that can be placed on the original glass ................... 8-31 Precautions for positioning documents on the original glass....... 8-32 9 Application functions 9.1 Inserting paper between overhead projector transparencies (“OHP Interleave” function) .............................................................. 9-3 To copy using the “OHP Interleave” function................................. 9-4 9.2 Adding cover pages (“Cover Mode” function) ................................ 9-7 To copy using the “Cover Mode” function ..................................... 9-8 9.3 Inserting different paper into copies (“Insert Sheet” function) ................................................................. 9-11 To copy using the “Insert Sheet” function.................................... 9-13 9.4 Inserting copies of a different document for a specified page (“Insert Image” function)................................................................. 9-16 To copy using the “Insert Image” function ................................... 9-17 9.5 Specifying pages to be printed on the front side (“Chapters” function) ...................................................................... 9-21 To copy using the “Chapters” function ........................................ 9-22 9.6 Scanning documents with different settings and printing copies all together (“Program Job” function)................. 9-25 To copy using the “Program Job” function .................................. 9-26 9.7 Producing separate copies of each page in a page spread (“Book Copy” function) ................................................................... 9-30 To copy using the “Book Copy” function ..................................... 9-31 9.8 Copying pamphlets (“Booklet Original” function) ........................ 9-36 To copy using the “Booklet Original” function.............................. 9-37 9.9 Tiling copy images (“Image Repeat” function) ............................. 9-40 To copy using the “Image Repeat” function................................. 9-41 9.10 Copying an enlarged image on multiple pages (“Poster Mode” function) ................................................................ 9-45 To copy using the “Poster Mode” function .................................. 9-45 9.11 Copying with the page layout of a magazine (“Booklet” function)......................................................................... 9-51 To copy using the “Booklet” function ........................................... 9-52 9.12 Copying with image colors inversed (“Neg-/Pos. Reverse” function)...................................................... 9-54 To copy using the “Neg-/Pos. Reverse” function......................... 9-55 bizhub C252 Contents-11 9.13 Copying in a mirror image (“Mirror Image” function).................. 9-56 To copy using the “Mirror Image” function.................................. 9-56 9.14 Adding a background color to copies (“Background Color” function)...................................................... 9-60 To copy using the “Background Color” function ......................... 9-60 9.15 Adjusting the copy color quality (Adjust Color parameters) ...... 9-63 To adjust the Adjust Color parameters ........................................ 9-64 Checking the Print Result of the Adjust Color Settings (Sample Copy).............................................................................. 9-66 To make sample copies ............................................................... 9-67 9.16 Adding filing margins to copies (“Page Margin” function) ......... 9-68 To copy using the “Page Margin” function .................................. 9-69 9.17 Erasing specified areas of copies (“Erase” function).................. 9-71 To copy using the “Erase” function ............................................. 9-71 9.18 Adjusting the image to fit the paper (Image Adjustment settings).......................................................... 9-73 To copy using the Image Adjustment settings............................. 9-74 9.19 Printing the Date/Time, page number or distribution number on copies (Stamp functions) ............................................................... 9-77 Printing the Date/Time (“Date/Time” function)............................. 9-78 To copy using the “Date/Time” function...................................... 9-78 Printing the page number (“Page #” function) ............................. 9-81 To copy using the “Page #” function ........................................... 9-81 Printing the distribution number (“Set Numbering” function) ...... 9-85 To copy using the “Set Numbering” function .............................. 9-85 Printing copy protection text (“Copy Protect” function) .............. 9-87 To copy using the “Copy Protect” function ................................. 9-87 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10.1 Replacing the toner cartridge ....................................................... 10-3 To replace the toner cartridge...................................................... 10-6 10.2 Replacing the staples..................................................................... 10-9 To replace the staple cartridge for finisher FS-501 ................... 10-10 To replace the staple cartridge for finisher FS-603 ................... 10-13 To replace the staple cartridge in the finisher FS-514............... 10-17 To replace the staple cartridge in saddle stitcher...................... 10-19 Contents-12 bizhub C252 10.3 Clearing a staple jam .................................................................... 10-22 To clear jammed staples in finisher FS-501 ............................... 10-24 To clear jammed staples in finisher FS-603 ............................... 10-26 To clear jammed staples in the finisher FS-514 ......................... 10-32 To clear jammed staples in the saddle stitcher .......................... 10-36 10.4 Emptying the waste containers.................................................... 10-39 To empty the hole-punch waste container for finisher FS-603 ........................................................................................ 10-42 To empty the hole-punch waste container for finisher FS-514 ........................................................................................ 10-43 10.5 Replacing the waste toner box .................................................... 10-44 To replace the waste toner box .................................................. 10-46 11 Care of the machine 11.1 Cleaning ........................................................................................... 11-3 Housing......................................................................................... 11-3 Original glass ................................................................................ 11-3 Control panel ................................................................................ 11-4 Document transfer belt ................................................................. 11-5 Original cover pad......................................................................... 11-6 Paper Take-Up roller..................................................................... 11-6 Electrostatic charger wire ............................................................. 11-7 Print head...................................................................................... 11-8 11.2 Viewing counters (Meter Count) .................................................... 11-9 Viewing counters .......................................................................... 11-9 To view the counters..................................................................... 11-9 Viewing the coverage rate .......................................................... 11-11 To view the coverage rate........................................................... 11-11 11.3 When the message “Preventive maintenance time.” appears........................................................................................... 11-12 bizhub C252 Contents-13 12 Managing jobs (Job List) 12.1 Overview of the Job List screen.................................................... 12-3 Jobs ............................................................................................. 12-3 Multi-Job feature.......................................................................... 12-4 Job list screens ............................................................................ 12-5 12.2 Performing operations on jobs...................................................... 12-8 To delete a job ............................................................................. 12-8 To check the job settings........................................................... 12-10 Displayed information ................................................................ 12-11 To check the job details............................................................. 12-12 To display current jobs (held jobs and active jobs lists) ............ 12-13 To display Job History ............................................................... 12-14 To print a sample copy of a stored job ...................................... 12-15 To print a stored job................................................................... 12-17 To increase priority for printing .................................................. 12-19 13 Utility 13.1 Overview of utility mode parameters............................................ 13-3 List of registration information and parameters ........................... 13-3 13.2 Selecting a destination register .................................................. 13-23 Scan ........................................................................................... 13-23 Fax ............................................................................................. 13-23 User box..................................................................................... 13-24 Displaying the destination register screen................................. 13-25 13.3 Specifying user settings............................................................... 13-27 System setting ........................................................................... 13-27 Display setting............................................................................ 13-30 Initial setting............................................................................... 13-32 Copier setting............................................................................. 13-33 Scanner setting .......................................................................... 13-35 Printer setting............................................................................. 13-35 Displaying the Utility Setting screen .......................................... 13-36 13.4 Specifying administrator settings ............................................... 13-38 System setting ........................................................................... 13-38 Administrator/machine setting................................................... 13-49 One-Touch registration .............................................................. 13-49 User authentication/account track............................................. 13-50 Network setting.......................................................................... 13-53 Copier setting............................................................................. 13-54 Printer setting............................................................................. 13-55 Contents-14 bizhub C252 Fax setting .................................................................................. 13-55 System connection ..................................................................... 13-56 Security setting ........................................................................... 13-56 Displaying the Administrator Setting screen............................... 13-61 13.5 Overview of weekly timer settings............................................... 13-63 Requisite ..................................................................................... 13-63 13.6 Adjusting the printer ..................................................................... 13-64 Adjusting the starting print position at the leading edge position.................................................................. 13-64 Adjusting the starting print position at the left edge................... 13-66 Adjusting the starting print position for the second side............ 13-68 Adjusting printing according to the media.................................. 13-70 13.7 Adjusting the finisher (FS-603) ..................................................... 13-73 Adjusting the center stapling position ........................................ 13-73 Adjusting the center folding position .......................................... 13-75 13.8 Adjusting the finisher (FS-514) ..................................................... 13-77 Adjusting the center folding position .......................................... 13-77 Adjusting the center stapling position ........................................ 13-81 Adjusting the horizontal punch position ..................................... 13-84 Adjusting the angle of punched holes ........................................ 13-87 13.9 Adjusting the color registration ................................................... 13-89 Adjusting the color registration for yellow, magenta and cyan ..................................................................................... 13-89 13.10 Adjusting the gradation levels...................................................... 13-92 Requisite ..................................................................................... 13-92 13.11 Authentication method ................................................................. 13-95 User authentication and account track....................................... 13-95 When user authentication and account track are synchronized......................................................................... 13-96 When user authentication and account track are used separately..................................................................... 13-97 To select an authentication method ........................................... 13-98 13.12 User authentication setting ........................................................ 13-102 Administrative setting—user name list ..................................... 13-102 Default function permission ...................................................... 13-104 To specify the default function permissions ............................. 13-104 Authenticating public users ...................................................... 13-106 User registration ....................................................................... 13-107 User counter ............................................................................. 13-113 To check the counter ................................................................ 13-115 bizhub C252 Contents-15 13.13 Account track setting................................................................. 13-117 Account track registration........................................................ 13-117 Account track counter.............................................................. 13-122 To check the counter ............................................................... 13-124 13.14 Password rules ........................................................................... 13-125 Conditions of the password rules ............................................ 13-125 13.15 Enhanced security settings ....................................................... 13-127 13.16 Viewing the status of the consumables.................................... 13-131 Displaying the unit life indicator screen ................................... 13-131 14 Appendix 14.1 Entering text.................................................................................... 14-3 To type text .................................................................................. 14-5 List of available characters .......................................................... 14-5 14.2 Glossary........................................................................................... 14-6 14.3 Index .............................................................................................. 14-12 Contents-16 bizhub C252 1 Introduction Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-3 1 Introduction Thank you for choosing this machine. This manual contains details on the operation of the various functions of the machine, precautions on its use, and basic troubleshooting procedures. In order to ensure that this machine is used correctly and efficiently, carefully read this manual before using the machine. After reading the manual, store it in the designated holder so that it can easily be referred to when questions or problems arise during operation. The illustrations used in this manual may appear slightly different from views of the actual equipment. Energy Star® As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, we have determined that this machine meets the ENERGY STAR® Guidelines for energy efficiency. What is an ENERGY STAR® product? An ENERGY STAR® product has a special feature that allows it to automatically switch to a "low-power mode" after a period of inactivity. An ENERGY STAR® product uses energy more efficiently, saves you money on utility bills and helps protect the environment. 1 Introduction 1-4 bizhub C252 1.1 Trademarks and registered trademarks KONICA MINOLTA, KONICA MINOLTA Logo, and The essentials of imaging are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. PageScope and bizhub are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Netscape Communications, the Netscape Communications logo, Netscape Navigator, Netscape Communicator, and Netscape are trademarks of Netscape Communications Corporation. This machine and PageScope Box Operator are based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Compact-VJE Copyright 1986-2003 VACS Corp. RC4® is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. RSA® is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. RSA BSAFE® is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. License information This product includes RSA BSAFE Cryptographic software from RSA Security Inc. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-5 OpenSSL Statement OpenSSL License Copyright © 1998-2000 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)" 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact opensslcore@ openssl.org. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@crypt-Soft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). 1 Introduction 1-6 bizhub C252 Original SSLeay License Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, Ihash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@crypt-soft.com)" The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related. 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tin Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-7 (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.] All other product names mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies 1 Introduction 1-8 bizhub C252 1.2 Available features Selecting the print color The color used to print copies can be specified, for example, the copy can be printed in full color or in black and white. For details, refer to "Selecting a color setting" on page 4-40. Automatically selecting the paper The most appropriate paper size can automatically be selected based on the size of the loaded document and the specified zoom ratio. For details, refer to "Automatically selecting the paper size (“Auto Paper Select” setting)" on page 4-44. Adjusting copies to the size of the paper The most appropriate zoom ratio can automatically be selected based on the size of the loaded document and the specified paper size. For details, refer to "Automatically selecting the zoom ratio (“Auto Zoom” setting)" on page 4-46. Specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios By specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios, copies of the document can be resized as desired. For details, refer to "Typing In separate X and Y zoom ratios (independent zoom settings)" on page 4-53. Scanning the document in separate batches A document with a large number of pages can be divided and scanned in separate batches. Double-sided copies can be produced by using the original glass or the document pages can be alternately loaded onto the original glass or into the ADF, and then all pages can be copied together as a single job. For details, refer to "Scanning the document in separate batches (“Separate Scan” setting)" on page 4-13 and "Scanning a multi-page document from the original glass" on page 4-18. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-9 Center binding Copies can be folded at their center and bound with staples. For details, refer to "To bind copies at the center (“Fold & Staple”): Finisher FS-603" on page 4-99. Sorting copies The finishing method for copies can be selected. For details, refer to "Separating copies by sets (“Sort” setting)" on page 4-84, "Separating copies by pages (“Group” setting)" on page 4-86. Stapling copies Multi-page documents can be copied and stapled together. For details, refer to "Stapling copies (Staple settings)" on page 4-88. 1 Introduction 1-10 bizhub C252 Punching holes in copies Holes for filing can be punched in the copies. For details, refer to "Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)" on page 4-93. Copying multiple document pages onto a single page Multiple pages of the document can be printed together on a single page. For details, refer to "Copying multiple document pages onto a single page (Combine Originals)" on page 4-79. Copying a document containing various page sizes A document with various page sizes can be scanned and copied together. For details, refer to "Copying documents of mixed sizes (“Mixed Original” setting)" on page 4-24. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-11 Adjusting copies according to the image quality of the original The copies can be adjusted according to the image quality of the document. For details, refer to "Loading documents with small print or photos (Original Type settings)" on page 4-65 or "Adjusting the print density (Density settings)" on page 4-71. Inserting paper between copies of overhead projector transparencies In order to prevent overhead projector transparencies from becoming stuck to each other, a page (interleaf) can be inserted between the transparency copies. For details, refer to "Inserting paper between overhead projector transparencies (“OHP Interleave” function)" on page 9-3. Adding a cover page Cover pages can be added to copies, or copies can be made using different paper (for example, colored paper) for only the cover pages. For details, refer to "Adding cover pages (“Cover Mode” function)" on page 9-7. 1 Introduction 1-12 bizhub C252 Inserting different paper into copies Different paper (such as colored paper) can be inserted for specified pages in the copies. For details, refer to "Inserting different paper into copies (“Insert Sheet” function)" on page 9-11. Inserting pages from a different document at specified locations in a copy A document scanned later can be inserted for specified pages in a document scanned earlier for copying. For details, refer to "Inserting copies of a different document for a specified page (“Insert Image” function)" on page 9-16. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-13 Printing double-sided copies with the specified page on the front side Double-sided copies can be printed with the specified pages on the front side. For details, refer to "Specifying pages to be printed on the front side (“Chapters” function)" on page 9-21. Copying with reversed colors A document can be copied with the light- and dark-colored areas of the document image inversed. With Color setting "Full Color", copies are printed with the hues and brightness inversed. With Color setting "Black" or "Single Color", copies are printed with the hues inversed. For details, refer to "Copying with image colors inversed (“Neg-/Pos. Reverse” function)" on page 9-54. Printing a mirror image A document can be copied in its mirror image. For details, refer to "Copying in a mirror image (“Mirror Image” function)" on page 9-56. 2 1 Introduction 1-14 bizhub C252 Copying with a background color A document can be copied using one of the 18 colors available as the color of the background (blank areas). For details, refer to "Adding a background color to copies (“Background Color” function)" on page 9-60. Improving the copy color quality You can adjust color copies to the quality for the desired image. For details, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality (Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63. Separately copying a page spread A page spread, such as in an open book or catalog, can be copied onto separate pages. For details, refer to "Producing separate copies of each page in a page spread (“Book Copy” function)" on page 9-30. Creating booklets from copies of pamphlets Pamphlets with their staples removed can be copied and bound with staples. For details, refer to "Copying pamphlets (“Booklet Original” function)" on page 9-36. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-15 Repeating copy images A document image can be repeatedly printed on a single sheet of paper. For details, refer to "Tiling copy images (“Image Repeat” function)" on page 9-40. Printing the enlarged image on multiple pages A single document page can be automatically split into parts with each part printed enlarged. For details, refer to "Copying an enlarged image on multiple pages (“Poster Mode” function)" on page 9-45. Making copies for filing Copies can be printed with a filing margin so they can easily be stored in filing binders. For details, refer to "Adding filing margins to copies (“Page Margin” function)" on page 9-68. 1 Introduction 1-16 bizhub C252 Copying with the page layout of a magazine Copies can be made with the pages arranged in a layout for center binding, such as for a magazine. For details, refer to "Copying with the page layout of a magazine (“Booklet” function)" on page 9-51. Erasing sections of copies Areas, such as the shadows of punched holes and transmission information in received faxes, can be erased in copies. For details, refer to "Erasing specified areas of copies (“Erase” function)" on page 9-71. Adjusting the image to fit the paper size When the copy paper is larger than the original document, copies can be printed so that the document image fills the paper. For details, refer to "Adjusting the image to fit the paper (Image Adjustment settings)" on page 9-73. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-17 Printing distribution numbers or copy protection text on copies Pages numbers or copy protection text (hidden text that prevents improper copying) can be printed on copies, or each copy set can be printed with distribution numbers. For details, refer to "Printing the Date/Time, page number or distribution number on copies (Stamp functions)" on page 9-77. Managing jobs The print status of copy jobs can be checked and the jobs can be managed. For details, refer to "Managing jobs (Job List)" on page 12-3. Programming copy settings Frequently used copy settings can be programmed and recalled to be used with other copy jobs. For details, refer to "Registering copy programs (Mode Memory)" on page 5-11. Checking the copy settings Screens showing the current copy settings can be displayed. From these screens, the copy settings can also be changed. For details, refer to "Checking the copy settings (Mode Check)" on page 5-3. Enlarging the size of text in touch panel screens The text and buttons in the touch panel can be displayed in a larger size that is easier to read, allowing basic operations to be easily performed. For details, refer to the Enlarge Display Operations of the User manual. Displaying explanations of functions and settings The name and function of parts and details of functions and settings appears in the Help screens. For details, refer to "Displaying function descriptions (Help)" on page 5-18. 1 Introduction 1-18 bizhub C252 Interrupting a copy job The copy job being printed can be interrupted in order for a different copy job to be printed. For details, refer to "Interrupting a copy job (Interrupt mode)" on page 5-9. Printing a sample copy Before printing a large number of copies, a single sample copy can be printed so that it can be checked. For details, refer to "Printing a proof copy to be checked (Proof Copy)" on page 5-6. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-19 1.3 Adjust color parameters This section provides copy samples that are a helpful reference for setting the wide variety of parameters, functions and settings available with this fullcolor copier. Section Description Section Description General Information About Color Provides information on hue, brightness and saturation (p. 1-21) "Contrast" Parameter Provides information on the adjustment of the contrast level (p. 1-29) "Red" Parameter Provides information on the adjustment of the red hues (p. 1-23) "Saturation" Parameter Provides information on the adjustment of the vividness (p. 1-30) "Green" Parameter Provides information on the adjustment of the green hues (p. 1-24) "Sharpness" Parameter Provides information on the adjustment of the sharpness of text (p. 1-31) "Blue" Parameter Provides information on the adjustment of the blue hues (p. 1-25) "Hue" Parameter Provides information on the adjustment of the hue (p. 1-32) "Color Balance" Parameter Provides information on the adjustment of the density of the colors CMYK (p. 1-26) "Copy Density" Parameter Provides information on the adjustment of the copy density (p. 1-33) "Brightness" Parameter Provides information on the adjustment of the brightness (p. 1-28) "Single Color" Function Provides information on copying with a single selected color (monotone) (p. 1-34) 1 Introduction 1-20 bizhub C252 * Since the print samples provided are photographs, they may slightly differ in color with actual color copies. "2 Color" Function Provides information on copying using only black and one selected color (p. 1-35) "Neg-/Pos. Reverse" Function Provides information on copying a document with the light- and darkcolored areas of the image inversed (p. 1-37) "Background Color" Function Provides information on copying with the selected background color (p. 1-36) "Mirror Image" Function Provides information on producing a copy in the mirror image of the original document (p. 1-39) Section Description Section Description Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-21 1.4 General information about color Everybody has an idea of what hue an object has, for example, an apple is red, a lemon is yellow, and the sky is blue. Hue is the tint by which the color of an is classified as red, yellow, blue, etc. Brightness is the degree of lightness in which makes it a light color or a dark color. For example, when comparing the yellow of a lemon and the yellow of a grapefruit, it is obvious that the yellow of the lemon is brighter. But what about when comparing the yellow of a lemon and the red of a bean? Obviously, the yellow of the lemon is brighter. Brightness is the this degree of lightness that enables comparison regardless of the hue. What makes the difference between the By saying that the lemon is a more vivid difference between the two colors is stated yellow of a lemon and the yellos of a pear? yellow and the pear is a duller yellow, the in terms of saturation,as opposed to brightness. As opposed to hue and brightness, saturation is the characteristic that indicates the degree of vividness. 1 Introduction 1-22 bizhub C252 1.5 Relationship between hue, brightness and saturation (color model) Hue, brightness and saturation are the elements that we call the "three attributes of color". We can think of their affects using the solid object shown in figure 1, where the outer edge is the hue, the vertical axis is the brightness, and the horizontal axis from the center is the saturation. Assigning colors to the solid object, representing the three attributes of color, shown in figure 1 produces the color model shown in figure 2. Although the level of saturation differs for each hue and degree of brightness, creating a complex color model, we can get a better understanding of the conditions under which the hue, brightness and saturation vary. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-23 1.6 “Red” parameter This parameter can be used to adjust the degree of red in the image to one of 19 levels. For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality (Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63. 1 Introduction 1-24 bizhub C252 1.7 “Green” parameter This parameter can be used to adjust the degree of green in the image to one of 19 levels. For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality (Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-25 1.8 “Blue” parameter This parameter can be used to adjust the degree of blue in the image to one of 19 levels. For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality (Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63. 1 Introduction 1-26 bizhub C252 1.9 “Color Balance” parameter (CMYK color adjustment) By mixing the four toner colors (yellow, magenta, and cyan in addition to black) in a full-color copy, the colors of the document can be reproduced. Changing the amount of each color of toner enables the tints in the copy to be finely adjusted. Each color can be adjusted to any of 19 levels. For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality (Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63. Adjusting the black tinge Increasing the amount of black Decreasing the amount of black Black Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-27 Y G B R M C 1 Introduction 1-28 bizhub C252 1.10 “Brightness” parameter This parameter can be used to finely adjust the brightness of the image to one of 19 levels. For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality (Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-29 1.11 “Contrast” parameter This parameter can be used to finely adjust the image to one of 19 levels between soft/smooth and crisp. For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality (Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63. 1 Introduction 1-30 bizhub C252 1.12 “Saturation” parameter This parameter can be used to finely adjust the vividness of the image to one of 19 levels. For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality (Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-31 1.13 “Sharpness” parameter This parameter can be used to adjust the amount of contours in text and images to one of 7 levels. For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality (Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63. 1 Introduction 1-32 bizhub C252 1.14 “Hue” parameter This parameter can be used to finely adjust the hue of the image to one of 19 levels. For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality (Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-33 1.15 “Copy Density” parameter This parameter can be used to finely adjust the light and shading of the image to one of 19 levels. For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality (Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63. 1 Introduction 1-34 bizhub C252 1.16 “Single Color” function This function allows you to copy a document using only one of the 21 colors available. For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Selecting a color setting" on page 4-40. Yellow Magenta Cyan Red Green Orange Pumpkin Yellow Green Teal Blue Aquamarine Pink Purple Plum Maroon Copper Red Forest Green Brown Camel Sepia 2 Sepia 1 Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-35 1.17 “2 Color” function This setting allows you to produce copies with the black areas of the document printed in black and the color areas of the document printed in one of the six colors available. For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Selecting a color setting" on page 4-40. Yellow Magenta Red Cyan Green Blue HAPPY BIRTHDAY HAPPY BIRTHDAY HAPPY BIRTHDAY HAPPY BIRTHDAY HAPPY BIRTHDAY HAPPY BIRTHDAY HAPPY BIRTHDAY 1 Introduction 1-36 bizhub C252 1.18 “Background Color” function This function allows you to copy a document using one of the 18 colors available as the color of the background (blank areas). For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Adding a background color to copies (“Background Color” function)" on page 9-60. Yellow Magenta Cyan Red Green Orange Pumpkin Yellow Green Teal Blue Aquamarine Pink Purple Plum Maroon Forest Green Brown Camel Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-37 1.19 “Neg-/Pos. Reverse” function This function allows you to copy a document with the light-colored areas and the dark-colored areas of the image inversed. For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Copying with image colors inversed (“Neg-/Pos. Reverse” function)" on page 9-54. Monotone copy Yellow Magenta Cyan Red Green Orange Pumpkin Yellow Green Teal Blue Aquamarine Pink Purple Plum Maroon Copper Red Forest Green Brown Camel Sepia 2 Sepia 1 1 Introduction 1-38 bizhub C252 Full-color copy and “Background Color” function Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-39 1.20 “Mirror Image” function This function allows you to copy a mirror image of the original document. For details on the setting procedure, refer to "Copying in a mirror image (“Mirror Image” function)" on page 9-56. 1 Introduction 1-40 bizhub C252 1.21 Explanation of manual conventions The marks and text formats used in this manual are described below. Safety advices 6 DANGER Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in fatal or critical injuries in fact of electrical power. % Observe all dangers in order to prevent injuries. 7 WARNING Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in serious injuries or property damage. % Observe all warnings in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use of the machine. 7 CAUTION Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in slight injuries or property damage. % Observe all cautions in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use of the machine. Sequence of action 1 The number 1 as formatted here indicates the first step of a sequence of actions. 2 Subsequent numbers as formatted here indicate subsequent steps of a sequence of actions. ? Text formatted in this style provides additional assistance. % Text formatted in this style describes the action that will ensure the desired results are achieved. An illustration inserted here shows what operations must be performed. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-41 Tips 2 Note Text highlighted in this manner contains useful information and tips to ensure safe use of the machine. 2 Reminder Text highlighted in this manner contains information that should be reminded. ! Detail Text highlighted in this manner contains references for more detailed information. Special text markings [Stop] key The names of keys on the control panel are written as shown above. MACHINE SETTING Display texts are written as shown above. 1 Introduction 1-42 bizhub C252 1.22 Descriptions and symbols for documents and paper The use of words and symbols in this manual are explained below. “Width” and “Length” Whenever paper dimensions are mentioned in this manual, the first value always refers to the width of the paper (shown as "Y" in the illustration) and the second to the length (shown as "X"). Paper Orientation Lengthwise (w) If the width (Y) of the paper is shorter than the length (X), the paper has a vertical or portrait orientation, indicated by w. Crosswise (v) If the width (Y) of the paper is longer than the length (X), the paper has a horizontal or landscape orientation, indicated by v. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-43 1.23 User manuals The following User manuals have been prepared for this machine. User manual [Copy Operations] This manual contains details on basic operations and the operating procedures for the various copy functions. - Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for copy functions, including precautions on installation/use, turning the machine on/off, loading paper, and troubleshooting operations such as clearing paper misfeeds. User manual [Network Scanner Operations] This manual contains details on specifying network settings for standard equipment and on operations for scanning functions. - Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for network functions and for using Scan to E-Mail, Scan to FTP and Scan to SMB. User manual [Box Operations] This manual contains details on operating procedures for using the boxes. - Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for using the boxes on the hard disk. User manual [Enlarge Display Operations] This manual contains details on operating procedures for using copy, network scanner and fax functions in Enlarge Display mode. - Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures in Enlarge Display mode. User manual [FK-502 Facsimile Operations] This manual contains details on operating procedures for faxing. - Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for fax functions when the fax kit is installed. User manual [Network Facsimile Operations] This manual contains details on operating procedures for network faxing. - Refer to this User manual for details on operating procedures for using the network fax functions (Internet faxing, SIP faxing and IP address faxing). 1 Introduction 1-44 bizhub C252 User manual [Print Operations] This manual contains details on operating procedures using the standard built-in printer controller. - For details on the printing functions, refer to user manual (PDF file) on User Software CD-ROM. Introduction 1 bizhub C252 1-45 1.24 Legal restrictions on copying Certain types of documents must never be copied with the purpose or intent to pass copies of such documents off as the originals. The following is not a complete list, but is meant to be used as a guide to responsible copying. Financial Instruments - Personal checks - Traveler’s checks - Money orders - Certificates of deposit - Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness - Stock certificates Legal Documents - Food stamps - Postage stamps (canceled or uncanceled) - Checks or drafts drawn by government agencies - Internal revenue stamps (canceled or uncanceled) - Passports - Immigration papers - Motor vehicle licenses and titles - House and property titles and deeds General - Identification cards, badges, or insignias - Copyrighted works without permission of the copyright owner In addition, it is prohibited under any circumstances to copy domestic or foreign currencies, or works of art without permission of the copyright owner. When in doubt about the nature of a document, consult with legal counsel. ! Detail In order to prohibit the illegal reproduction of certain documents, such as paper currency, this machine is equipped with a counterfeit prevention feature. Due to the counterfeit prevention feature that this machine is equipped with, images may be distorted. 1 Introduction 1-46 bizhub C252 2 Installation and operation precautions Installation and operation precautions 2 bizhub C252 2-3 2 Installation and operation precautions 2.1 Safety information This section contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To achieve optimum utility of this device, all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual. Please read the following section before connecting the machine to the supply. It contains important information related to user safety and preventing equipment problems. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine. Make sure you observe all of the precautions appear in each section of this manual. KM_Ver.01E_C 2 Note Some parts of the contents of this section may not correspond with the purchased product. Warning and precaution symbols The following indicators are used on the warning labels or in this manual to categorize the level of safety warnings. 7 WARNING Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death. % Do not ignore this safety advices. 7 CAUTION Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property. % Do not ignore this safety advices. 2 Installation and operation precautions 2-4 bizhub C252 Meaning of symbols Disassemble and modification 7 WARNING Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death. % Do not ignore this safety advices. Symbol Meaning Example Meaning A triangle indicates a danger against which you should take precaution. This symbol warns against possible causes of burns. A diagonal line indicates a prohibited course of action. This symbol warns against dismantling the device. A black circle indicates an imperative course of action. This symbol indicates you must unplug the device. Warning Symbol • Do not attempt to remove the covers and panels which have been fixed to the product. Some products have a high-voltage part or a laser beam source inside that could cause an electrical shock or blindness. • Do not modify this product, as a fire, electrical shock, or breakdown could result. If the product employs a laser, the laser beam source could cause blindness. Installation and operation precautions 2 bizhub C252 2-5 Power cord 7 WARNING Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death. % Do not ignore this safety advices. Warning Symbol • Use only the power cord supplied in the package. If a power cord is not supplied, only use the power cord and plug that is specified in POWER CORD INSTRUCTION. Failure to use this cord could result in a fire or electrical shock. • Use the power cord supplied in the package only for this machine and NEVER use it for any other product. Failure to observe this precaution could result in a fire or electrical shock. • Do not scratch, abrade, place a heavy object on, heat, twist, bend, pull on, or damage the power cord. Use of a damaged power cord (exposed core wire, broken wire, etc.) could result in a fire or breakdown. Should any of these conditions be found, immediately turn OFF the power switch, unplug the power cord from the power outlet, and then call your authorized service representative. 2 Installation and operation precautions 2-6 bizhub C252 Power source 7 WARNING Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death. % Do not ignore this safety advices. 7 CAUTION Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property. % Do not ignore this safety advices. Warning Symbol • Use only the specified power source voltage. Failure to do that could result in a fire or electrical shock. • Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having the same configuration as the plug. Use of an adapter leads to the product connecting to inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity, grounding), and may result in fire or shock. If proper wall outlet is not available, the customer shall ask qualified electrician for the installation. • Do not use a multiple outlet adapter nor an extension cord in principle. Use of an adapter or an extension cord could cause a fire or electrical shock. Contact your authorized service representative if an extension cord is required. • Consult your authorized service representative before connecting other equipment on the same wall outlet. Overload could result in a fire. Caution Symbol • The outlet must be near the equipment and easily accessible. Otherwise you can not pull out the power plug when an emergency occurs. Installation and operation precautions 2 bizhub C252 2-7 Power plug 7 WARNING Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death. % Do not ignore this safety advices. 7 CAUTION Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property. % Do not ignore this safety advices. Grounding 7 WARNING Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death. % Do not ignore this safety advices. Warning Symbol • Do not unplug and plug in the power cord with a wet hand, as an electrical shock could result. • Plug the power cord all the way into the power outlet. Failure to do this could result in a fire or electrical shock. Caution Symbol • Do not tug the power cord when unplugging. Pulling on the power cord could damage the cord, resulting in a fire or electrical shock. • Remove the power plug from the outlet more than one time a year and clean the area between the plug terminals. Dust that accumulates between the plug terminals may cause a fire. Warning Symbol • Connect the power cord to an electrical outlet that is equipped with a grounding terminal. 2 Installation and operation precautions 2-8 bizhub C252 Installation 7 WARNING Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death. % Do not ignore this safety advices. 7 CAUTION Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property. % Do not ignore this safety advices. Warning Symbol • Do not place a flower vase or other container that contains water, or metal clips or other small metallic objects on this product. Spilled water or metallic objects dropped inside the product could result in a fire, electrical shock, or breakdown. Should a piece of metal, water, or any other similar foreign matter get inside the product, immediately turn OFF the power switch, unplug the power cord from the power outlet, and then call your authorized service representative. Caution Symbol • After installing this product, mount it on a secure base. If the unit moves or falls, it may cause personal injury. • Do not place the product in a dusty place, or a site exposed to soot or steam, near a kitchen table, bath, or a humidifier. A fire, electrical shock, or breakdown could result. • Do not place this product on an unstable or tilted bench, or in a location subject to a lot of vibration and shock. It could drop or fall, causing personal injury or mechanical breakdown. • Do not let any object plug the ventilation holes of this product. Heat could accumulate inside the product, resulting in a fire or malfunction. • Do not use flammable sprays, liquids, or gases near this product, as a fire could result. Installation and operation precautions 2 bizhub C252 2-9 Ventilation 7 CAUTION Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property. % Do not ignore this safety advices. Actions in response to troubles 7 WARNING Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death. % Do not ignore this safety advices. Caution Symbol • Always use this product in a well ventilated location. Operating the product in a poorly ventilated room for an extended period of time could injure your health. Ventilate the room at regular intervals. Warning Symbol • Do not keep using this product, if this product becomes inordinately hot or emits smoke, or unusual odor or noise. Immediately turn OFF the power switch, unplug the power cord from the power outlet, and then call your authorized service representative. If you keep on using it as is, a fire or electrical shock could result. • Do not keep using this product, if this product has been dropped or its cover damaged. Immediately turn OFF the power switch, unplug the power cord from the power outlet, and then call your authorized service representative. If you keep on using it as is, a fire or electrical shock could result. 2 Installation and operation precautions 2-10 bizhub C252 7 CAUTION Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property. % Do not ignore this safety advices. Consumables 7 WARNING Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death. % Do not ignore this safety advices. 7 CAUTION Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property. % Do not ignore this safety advices. Caution Symbol • The inside of this product has areas subject to high temperature, which may cause burns. When checking the inside of the unit for malfunctions such as a paper misfeed, do not touch the locations (around the fusing unit, etc.) which are indicated by a "Caution HOT" caution label. Warning Symbol • Do not throw the toner cartridge or toner into an open flame. The hot toner may scatter and cause burns or other damage. Caution Symbol • Do not leave a toner unit or drum unit in a place within easy reach of children. Licking or ingesting any of these things could injure your health. • Do not store toner units and PC drum units near a floppy disk or watch that are susceptible to magnetism. They could cause these products to malfunction. Installation and operation precautions 2 bizhub C252 2-11 When moving the machine 7 CAUTION Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property. % Do not ignore this safety advices. Before successive holidays When the optional Fax Kit FK-502 is not installed: 7 CAUTION Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property. % Do not ignore this safety advices. Caution Symbol • Whenever moving this product, be sure to disconnect the power cord and other cables. Failure to do this could damage the cord or cable, resulting in a fire, electrical shock, or breakdown. • When moving this product, always hold it by the locations specified in the user manual or other documents. If the unit falls it may cause severe personal injury. The product may also be damaged or malfunction. Caution Symbol • Unplug the product when you will not use the product for long periods of time. 2 Installation and operation precautions 2-12 bizhub C252 2.2 Regulation notices CE Marking (Declaration of Conformity) for users of the European Union (EU) This product complies with the following EU directives: 89/336/EEC, 73/23/EEC and 93/68/EEC directives. This declaration is valid for the area of the European Union. This device must be used with a shielded network (10 Base-T/100 Base-TX) cable and a shielded parallel cable. The use of non-shielded cables is likely to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under CISPR rules and local rules. USER INSTRUCTIONS FCC PART 15 - RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES (for U.S.A. users) NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. 7 WARNING The design and production of this unit conform to FCC regulations, and any changes or modifications must be registered with the FCC and are subject to FCC control. Any changes made by the purchaser or user without first contacting the manufacturer will be subject to penalty under FCC regulations. % This device must be used with a shielded network (10 Base-T/100 Base-TX) cable and a shielded parallel cable. The use of non-shielded cables is likely to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under FCC rules. INTERFERENCE-CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD (ICES-003 ISSUE 4) (for Canada users) This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. Installation and operation precautions 2 bizhub C252 2-13 For users in countries not subject to class B regulations 7 WARNING Interference with radio communications: % This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. % This device must be used with a shielded network (10 Base-T/100 Base-TX) cable and a shielded parallel cable. The use of non-shielded cables is likely to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under CISPR rules and local rules. Laser safety This is a digital machine which operates using a laser. There is no possibility of danger from the laser provided the machine is operated according to the instructions in this manual. Since radiation emitted by the laser is completely confined within protective housing, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation. This machine is certified as a Class 1 laser product: This means the machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation. Internal laser radiation 7 WARNING This product employs a Class 3B laser diode that emits an invisible laser beam. % The laser diode and the scanning polygon mirror are incorporated in the print head unit. % The print head unit is NOT A FIELD SERVICE ITEM: Therefore, the print head unit should not be opened under any circumstances. Specification Maximum Average Radiation Power 8.0 μW at the laser aperture of the print head unit Wavelength 775-800 nm 2 Installation and operation precautions 2-14 bizhub C252 CDRH regulations This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under Radiation Performance Standard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990. Compliance is mandatory for Laser products marketed in the United States and is reported to the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS). This means that the device does not produce hazardous laser radiation. The label shown on page 2-13 indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States. 7 CAUTION Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure. % This is a semiconductor laser. The maximum power of the laser diode is 10 mW and the wavelength is 775-800 nm. Laser Aperture of the Print Head Unit Print Head Installation and operation precautions 2 bizhub C252 2-15 For European users 7 CAUTION Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure. % This is a semiconductor laser. The maximum power of the laser diode is 10 mW and the wavelength is 775-800 nm. For Denmark users 7 ADVARSEL Usynlig laserstråling ved åbning, når sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion. % Usynlig laserstråling ved åbning, når sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion. Undgå udsættelse for stråling. Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC 60825-1 sikkerheds kravene. Dette er en halvlederlaser. Laserdiodens højeste styrke er 10 mW og bølgelængden er 775-800 nm. For Finland, Sweden users LOUKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT 7 VAROITUS Tämä on puolijohdelaser. % Laitteen Käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle. Tämä on puolijohdelaser. Laserdiodin sunrin teho on 10 mW ja aallonpituus on 775-800 nm. 2 Installation and operation precautions 2-16 bizhub C252 7 VARNING Det här är en halvledarlaser. % Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i denna bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1. Det här är en halvledarlaser. Den maximala effekten för laserdioden är 10 mW och våglängden är 775-800 nm. 7 VAROITUS Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle. % Älä katso säteeseen. 7 VARNING Osynlig laserstrålning när denna del är öppnad och spärren är urkopplad. % Betrakta ej strålen. For Norway users 7 ADVARSEL! Dette en halvleder laser. % Dersom apparatet brukes på annen måte enn spesifisert i denne bruksanvisning, kan brukeren utsettes for unsynlig laserstråling som overskrider grensen for laser klass 1. Dette en halvleder laser. Maksimal effekt till laserdiode er 10 mW og bølgelengde er 775-800 nm. Installation and operation precautions 2 bizhub C252 2-17 Laser safety labely A laser safety label is attached to the outside of the machine, as shown below. * Only for the U.S.A. 2 Installation and operation precautions 2-18 bizhub C252 Ozone release 7 CAUTION Locate the Machine in a Well Ventilated Room % A negligible amount of ozone is generated during normal operation of this machine. An unpleasant odor may, however, be created in poorly ventilated rooms during extensive machine operations. For a comfortable, healthy, and safe operating environment, it is recommended that the room well ventilated. 7 ATTENTION Une quantité d’ozone négligable est dégagée pendant le fonctionnement de l’appareil quand celui-ci est utilisé normalement. Cependant, une odeur désagréable peut être ressentie dans les pièces dont l’aération est insuffisante et lorsque une utilisation prolongée de l’appareil est effectuée. Pour avoir la certitude de travailler dans un environnement réunissant des conditions de confort, santé et de sécurité, il est préférable de bien aérer la pièce ou se trouve l’appareil. % Placer l’appareil dans une pièce largement ventilée. Acoustic noise (for European users only) Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung 3. GPSGV: Der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB(A) oder weniger gemäss EN ISO 7779. For EU member states only This symbol means: Do not dispose of this product together with your household waste! Please refer to the information of your local community or contact our dealers regrading the proper handling of end-oflife electric and electronic equipments. Recycling of this product will help to conserve natural resources and prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health caused by inappropriate waste handling. This product complies with RoHS (2002/95/EC) Directive. Installation and operation precautions 2 bizhub C252 2-19 2.3 Caution notations and labels Safety precaution notations and labels appear on this machine at the following positions. Be very careful that an accident does not occur when operations such as removing paper misfeeds are performed. It is illegal to copy certain types of documents. Never copy such documents. Do not alter or remove any covers or panels attached to this machine, otherwise you may be exposed to laser radiation. Do not burn used imaging units. Toner expelled from the fire is dangerous. Do not burn used toner cartridges. Toner expelled from the fire is dangerous. CAUTION CAUTION WARNING Do not burn the used waste-toner box. Toner expelled from the fire is dangerous. CAUTION Do not position the used waste-toner box so that it is standing on end or tilted, otherwise toner may spill. WARNING WARNING The area around the fusing unit is extremely hot. Touching any part other than those indicated may result in burns. CAUTION 2 Installation and operation precautions 2-20 bizhub C252 2.4 Space requirements To ensure that machine operation, consumables replenishing, part replacement, and regular maintenance can easily be performed, adhere to the recommended space requirements detailed below. 2 Reminder Be sure to allow a clearance of 100 mm (4 in.) or more at the back of this machine for the ventilation duct. C252+DF-601+FS514+PC-403+SD-503+OT-601 Unit: mm (inch) 190 (7-1/2) 1212 (47-3/4) 341 (13-1/2) 394 (15-1/2) 755 (29-3/4) 100 (4) 312 (12-1/4) 1208 (47-1/2) Installation and operation precautions 2 bizhub C252 2-21 2.5 Operation precautions To ensure the optimum performance of this machine, observe the precautions described below. Power source The power source requirements are as follows. - Voltage fluctuation: Maximum ± 10% (at 220 to 240 V AC) - Frequency fluctuation: Maximum ± 3 Hz (at 50 Hz) – Use a power source with as little voltage or frequency fluctuations as possible. Operating environment The environmental requirements for correct operation of the machine are as follows. - Temperature: 10°C (50°F) to 30°C (86°F) with fluctuations of no more than 10°C (18°F) within an hour - Humidity: 15% to 85% with fluctuations of no more than 20% within an hour Storage of copies To store copies, follow the recommendation listed below. - Copies that are to be kept for a long time should be kept where they are not exposed to light in order to prevent them from fading. - Adhesive that contains solvent (e.g., spray glue) may dissolve the toner on copies. - Color copies have a thicker layer of toner than normal black-and-white copies. Therefore, when a color copy is folded, the toner at the fold may peel off. 2 Installation and operation precautions 2-22 bizhub C252 3 Before making copies Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-3 3 Before making copies 3.1 Part names and their functions Options 1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 3 Before making copies 3-4 bizhub C252 No. Part Name Description 1 Automatic Document Feeder DF-601 Automatically feeds one document sheet at a time for scanning, and automatically turns over doublesided documents for scanning Referred to as the "ADF" throughout the manual. 2 Original Cover OC-501 Presses down on the loaded document to keep it in place Referred to as the "original cover" throughout the manual. 3 Working Table WT-501 Provides an area to temporarily place a document or other materials 4 Fax Multi Line ML-501 Installed to increase the telephone lines available for faxing 5 Desk DK-502 Allows this machine to be set up on the floor Referred to as the "desk" throughout the manual. 6 Paper Feed Cabinet PC-103 The top tray can be loaded with up to 500 sheets of paper, and the bottom tray can be used as storage. Referred to as the "single paper feed cabinet" throughout the manual. 7 Paper Feed Cabinet PC-203 Both the top and bottom trays can each be loaded with up to 500 sheets of paper. Referred to as the "double paper feed cabinet" throughout the manual. 8 Paper Feed Cabinet PC-403 Can be loaded with up to 2,500 sheets of paper Referred to as the "LCT" throughout the manual. 9 Finisher FS-514 Feeds out finished printed pages. The "Sort" setting (separating by copy set), "Group" setting (separating by page), and Staple settings (corner stapling and two-point stapling) are available. 10 Output Tray OT-601 Copy output tray installed onto the finisher FS-514 and used for separating printed pages Referred to as the "optional finishing tray" throughout the manual. 11 Punch Kit PK-501 Allows hole punching to be used if installed onto finisher FS-603 12 Mailbin Kit MT-501 Installed onto the finisher FS-514 to divide printed pages and feed them into the appropriate tray assigned to a specific individual or group (only with computer printing) Referred to as the "mailbin" throughout the manual. 13 Saddle Stitcher SD-503 Installed onto the finisher FS-514 to allow copies to be bound or folded at the center Referred to as the "saddle stitcher" throughout the manual. 14 Finisher FS-603 Feeds out printed pages. The "Offset" setting (separating), Staple settings (stapling), and "Fold & Staple" function (binding) are available. • In order to install the finisher, the main unit must be installed on the desk, on the LCT, on the single paper feed cabinet, or on the double paper feed cabinet. Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-5 * Parts marked with an asterisk (*) are internal options and therefore are not shown in the illustration. 2 Reminder In order to maintain the functionality and quality of the machine, be sure to use the desk or paper feed cabinet when installing the machine on the floor. 2 Note Either FS-501 or FS-603 can be installed on this machine as options. A kit is required in order to install FS-501 or FS-603. For details, contact your technical representative. 15 Punch Kit PK-510 Allows hole punching to be used if installed onto finisher FS-514 16 Finisher FS-501 Finishes printed pages according to the selected Output setting (sorting or stapling), then feeds out the pages • In order to install the finisher, the main unit must be installed on the desk, on the LCT, or on the single paper feed cabinet or the double paper feed cabinet. 17 Job Separator JS-601 Copy exit tray installed on finisher FS-501 Referred to as the "job separator" throughout the manual. 18 Main unit The document is scanned by the scanner section, and the scanned image is printed by the printer section. Referred to as the "machine", the "main unit", or the "C252" throughout the manual. 19 Fax Kit FK-502* Allows this machine to be used as a fax machine 20 Mount Kit MK-706* Required to mount the fax kit and local interface kit 21 Mount Kit MK-704* Installed when using this machine as a fax machine 22 Scan Accelerator Kit SA-501* Creates images at high speed when sending scans, and allows scan jobs saved in boxes to be printed. 23 Local Interface Kit EK-702* Used for making a local connection between this machine and the computer 24 Dehumidifer Heater 1C* Installed in the paper feed cabinet or desk to prevent humidity from collecting in the paper 25 Security Kit SC-503* Installed to encode the data saved on the hard disk so that the hard disk can be used more safely. No. Part Name Description 3 Before making copies 3-6 bizhub C252 Outside of machine * The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional original cover and LCT installed. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-7 No. Part Name Description 1 Original cover pad Presses down on the loaded document to keep it in place 2 Automatic duplex unit Turns over the paper for double-sided printing 3 Multiple bypass tray Used when printing onto paper with a size not loaded into a paper tray or onto thick paper, overhead projector transparencies, postcards, envelopes or label sheets Holds up to 100 sheets of plain paper, 20 sheets of thick paper, overhead projector transparencies, postcards or label sheets, or 10 envelopes Referred to as the "bypass tray" throughout the manual. (See p. 3-59.) 4 LCT Can be loaded with up to 2,500 sheets of plain paper 5 Tray release button Pressed in order to pull out the paper tray for the LCT 6 2nd tray Can be loaded with up to 500 sheets of plain paper (See p. 3-55.) 7 1st tray Can be loaded with up to 250 sheets of plain paper, can be set to different paper sizes, and can be loaded with up to 20 sheets of thick paper, overhead projector transparencies, postcards, label sheets, or envelopes (See p. 3-49.) 8 Front door Opened when replacing a toner cartridge or turning the main power switch on and off. (See p. 10-6.) 9 Copy exit tray Collects printed pages 3 Before making copies 3-8 bizhub C252 * The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional ADF and double paper feed cabinet installed. 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 12 10 11 12 Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-9 No. Part Name Description 10 Document feed tray Loaded with documents facing up (See p. 4-9.) 11 Document exit tray Collects documents that have been scanned 12 Misfeed-clearing cover Opened when clearing document misfeeds 13 [Power] (auxiliary power) key Pressed to turn on/off machine operations, for example, for copying, printing or scanning When turned off, the machine enters a state where it conserves energy. 14 Automatic duplex unit release lever Used to open the automatic duplex unit door when clearing paper misfeeds 15 Automatic duplex unit door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the automatic duplex unit 16 Upper right-side door release lever Used to open the upper right-side door 17 Center right-side door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds from the 2nd tray 18 Center right-side door release lever Used to open the center right-side door 19 Lower right-side door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds from the 3rd or 4th trays or from the LCT 20 Lower right-side door release lever Used to open the lower right-side door when clearing paper misfeeds 21 4th tray/storage tray Used for storage when the single paper feed cabinet is installed Can be loaded with up to 500 sheets of plain paper when the double paper feed cabinet is installed (See p. 3-55.) 22 3rd tray Can be loaded with up to 500 sheets of plain paper (See p. 3-55.) 23 Control panel Used to specify the various settings (See p. 3-22.) 24 Adjustable document guide Adjusted to the width of the document (See p. 4-9.) 3 Before making copies 3-10 bizhub C252 * The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional ADF, LCT, fax multi line and dehumidifier heater installed. 25 27 28 30 31 32 33 35 36 37 29 39 38 26 Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-11 No. Part Name Description 25 ADF connector Used for connecting the ADF hookup cord 26 Filter 1 Collects the toner dust generated in the machine 27 Power connector Used for connecting the power cord 28 Dehumidifier heater power switch Used to turn the dehumidifier heater on and off. Turning on the dehumidifier heater reduces moisture in the paper. This switch is used when the optional dehumidifier heater is installed. 29 Filter 2 Collects the toner dust generated in the machine 30 TEL jack 2 Used for connecting a telephone 31 LINE jack 2 Used for connecting a general subscriber line. This jack is used when the optional fax multi line is installed. 32 TEL jack 1 Used for connecting a telephone 33 LINE jack 1 Used for connecting the general subscriber line 34 IEEE1284 port (type C) Used for connecting the parallel cable from the computer 35 USB port (type B) USB 2.0/1.1-compliant Used for connecting a USB cable from the computer 36 Internal controller port Used for connecting the internal controller 37 Network connector (10 Base-T/100 Base -TX) Used for connecting the network cable when this machine is used for network printing and network scanning 38 Ozone filter Collects the ozone generated in the machine 39 Finisher connector Used for connecting the finisher hookup cord 3 Before making copies 3-12 bizhub C252 Inside of machine No. Part Name Description 1 Original glass Place a document on the glass so that it can be scanned. (See p. 4-11.) 2 Document transfer belt Feeds the document loaded into the ADF 3 Fusing unit cover Opened when clearing paper misfeeds in the fusing unit 4 M2 release levers Used when printing on envelopes. Used when clearing paper misfeeds in the fusing unit. 5 Main unit right-side door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds from inside the main unit 6 Unlocking knob Used when removing the imaging units 7 Imaging unit Creates the print image 8 Charger-cleaning tool Used to clean the electrostatic charger wire, for example, when incorrect copies are produced (See p. 11-7.) 7 6 5 1 2 3 4 9 8 10 13 11 12 14 15 16 Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-13 9 Print head glass cleaning tool Used to clean the surface of the print head glass, for example, when replacing the imaging unit 10 Waste toner box Collects used waste toner 11 Waste toner box release lever Used when removing the waste toner box 12 Main power switch Used to turn the machine on and off (See p. 3-30) 13 Total counter Shows the total number of pages that have been printed 14 Locking tab Used when removing the toner cartridges 15 Toner cartridges There are four toner cartridges: cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y) and black (K). The combination of the four toners generates full-color images. 16 Document scales Position the document so that it is aligned with the scales. Also, use the scales to measure the loaded document. (See p. 4-11.) No. Part Name Description 3 Before making copies 3-14 bizhub C252 Finisher FS-603/punch kit PK-501 No. Part Name Description 1 Exit tray 1 Collects printed pages 2 Upper door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds (See p. 6-35.) 3 Horizontal transport unit cover Opened when clearing paper misfeeds from the horizontal transport unit (See p. 6-35.) 4 Hole-punch waste container Removed when emptying hole-punch waste that has accumulated from using the Punch settings (See p. 10-42.) 5 Misfeed-clearing guide Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher (See p. 6-35.) 6 Right-side door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher (See p. 6-35.) 2 3 4 5 7 6 1 13 12 10 11 9 8 Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-15 * Parts marked with an asterisk (*) are installed within the finisher and therefore are not shown in the illustration. 7 Exit tray 2 Collects copies printed using the "Fold & Staple" setting 8 Misfeed-clearing dial in folding section Turned when clearing paper misfeeds in the folding section (See p. 6-35.) 9 Staple cartridge holder Removed from the stapler unit when clearing jammed staples or replacing the staple cartridge (See p. 10-13, p. 10-26.) 10 Misfeed-clearing dial 1 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher (See p. 6-35.) 11 Misfeed-clearing dial 2 Turned when clearing jammed staples or replacing the staple cartridge, or for moving the staple cartridge holder out to the front (See p. 10-26.) 12 Stapler unit Pulled out when clearing jammed staples or replacing the staple cartridge (See p. 10-13, p. 10-26.) 13 Front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing the staple cartridge (See p. 10-13, p. 10-26.) 14 Punch kit* Punches holes for filing printed pages when punch kit PK-501 is installed onto finisher FS-603 No. Part Name Description 3 Before making copies 3-16 bizhub C252 Finisher FS-501/job separator JS-601 No. Part Name Description 1 Front door FN4 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher (See p. 6-31.) 2 Misfeed-clearing dials FN5 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher (See p. 6-31.) 3 Exit tray 2 Collects printed pages 4 Exit tray 1 Collects printed pages 5 Exit tray 3 Feeds out printed pages when job separator JS- 601 is installed onto finisher FS-501 6 Job separator cover Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the job separator (See p. 6-31.) 7 Misfeed-clearing guide FN3 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher (See p. 6-31.) 13 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 12 Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-17 8 Misfeed-clearing guide FN2 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher (See p. 6-31.) 9 Upper cover FN1 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher (See p. 6-31.) 10 Horizontal transport unit cover Opened when clearing paper misfeeds from the horizontal transport unit (See p. 6-31.) 11 Misfeed-clearing guide FN7 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher (See p. 6-31.) 12 Stapler Used to staple pages 13 Jammed-staple-clearing dial Turned when clearing jammed staples or replacing the staple cartridge, or for moving the stapler to the center (See p. 10-10, p. 10-24.) No. Part Name Description 3 Before making copies 3-18 bizhub C252 Saddle stitcher SD-503/mailbin kit MT-501 Saddle stitcher SD-503 Mailbin kit MT-501 No. Part name Description 1 Copy output tray Collects copies 2 Misfeed-clearing door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher No. Part name Description 3 Mailbins Collects printed pages 4 Misfeed-clearing door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds 5 Lever [FN7] Opened when clearing paper misfeeds 4 3 5 2 1 Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-19 Finisher FS-514/output tray OT-601/punch kit PK-510 1 13 2 3 4 5 6 7 12 11 10 9 8 3 Before making copies 3-20 bizhub C252 Finisher FS-514 Output tray OT-601 Punch kit PK-510 Parts marked with an asterisk (*) are installed within the finisher and therefore are not shown in the illustration. No. Part name Description 1 Output tray 1 Collects copies that are fed out 2 Output tray 2 Collects copies that are fed out 3 Dial [FN6] Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher 4 Dial [FN5] Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher 5 Dial [FN4] Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher 6 Dial [FN2] Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher 7 Lever [FN1] Raised when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher 8 Hole-punch waste container Removed when emptying hole-punch waste that has accumulated from using the punch settings 9 Lever [FN3] Lowered when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher 10 Stapler Moved to the front when clearing jammed staples 11 Staple cartridge holder Removed from the stapler when replacing the staple cartridge or clearing jammed staples 12 Dial Turned to move the stapler to the front when clearing jammed staples No. Part name Description 13 Optional output tray Collects copies No. Part name Description 14 Punch Kit* Punches holes for filing printed pages when punch kit PK-510 is installed onto finisher FS- 514 Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-21 Precautions for using the finisher: - When moving the finisher, do not grab the exit tray. - Do not place objects below the output trays of the finisher. - Do not place objects on top of the saddle stitcher or mailbin kit. 3 Before making copies 3-22 bizhub C252 Control panel No. Part Name Description 1 [Power Save] key Press to enter Low Power mode. While the machine is in Low Power mode, the indicator on the [Power Save] key lights up in green and the touch panel goes off. To cancel Low Power mode, press the [Power Save] key again. 2 Touch panel Displays various screens and messages. Specify the various settings by directly touching the panel. 3 [Access] key If user authentication or account track settings have been applied, press this key after entering the user name and password (for user authentication) or the account name and password (for account track) in order to use this machine. 4 [Box] key Press to enter Box mode. While the machine is in Box mode, the indicator on the [Box] key lights up in green. For details, refer to the Box Operations of the User manual. 5 [Fax] key Press to enter Fax mode. While the machine is in Fax mode, the indicator on the [Fax] key lights up in green. For details, refer to the Facsimle Operations and the Network Facsimile Operations of the User manual. 6 [Scan] key Press to enter Scan mode. While the machine is in Scan mode, the indicator on the [Scan] key lights up in green. For details, refer to the Network Scanner Operations of the User manual. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 21 20 1918 17 15 13 22 23 24 16 14 Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-23 7 [Copy] key Press to enter Copy mode. (As a default, the machine is in Copy mode.) While the machine is in Copy mode, the indicator on the [Copy] key lights up in green. 8 [Reset] key Press to clear all settings (except programmed settings) entered in the control panel and touch panel. 9 [Interrupt] key Press to enter Interrupt mode. While the machine is in Interrupt mode, the indicator on the [Interrupt] key lights up in green and the message "Now in Interrupt mode." appears on the touch panel. To cancel Interrupt mode, press the [Interrupt] key again. 10 [Power] (auxiliary power) key Press to turn on/off machine operations, for example, for copying, printing or scanning. When turned off, the machine enters a state where it conserves energy. 11 [Stop] key Press the [Stop] key during copying to stop the copy operation. 12 [Start] key Press to start copying. When this machine is ready to begin copying, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in green. If the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange, copying cannot begin. Press to restart a stopped job. For details on jobs, refer to "Managing jobs (Job List)" on page 12-3. 13 Main Power indicator Lights up in green when the machine is turned on with the main power switch 14 Data indicator Flashes in green while a print job is being received Lights up in green while a print job is queued to be printed or while it is printing 15 [Proof Copy] key Press to print a single sample copy to be checked before printing a large number of copies. (See p. 5-6.) 16 Keypad Use to type in the number of copies to be produced. Use to type in the zoom ratio. Use to type in the various settings. 17 [C] (clear) key Press to erase a value (such as the number of copies, a zoom ratio, or a size) entered using the keypad. 18 [Mode Check] key Press to display screens showing the specified settings. 19 [Utility/Counter] key Press to display the Meter Count screen and the Utility screen. 20 [Mode Memory] key Press to register the desired copy settings as a program or to recall a registered copy program. (See p. 5-15.) 21 Contrast dial Use to adjust the contrast of the touch panel. 22 [Enlarge Display] key Press to enter Enlarge Display mode. No. Part Name Description 3 Before making copies 3-24 bizhub C252 2 Reminder Do not apply extreme pressure to the touch panel, otherwise it may be scratched or damaged. Never push down on the touch panel with force, and never use a hard or pointed object to make a selection in the touch panel. 23 [Accessibility] key Press to display the screen for specifying user accessibility functions. 24 [Help] key Press to display the Main Help Menu screen, where descriptions of the various functions and details of operations can be displayed. (See p. 5-18.) No. Part Name Description Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-25 Basic settings screen (Basic screen) When the machine is ready to begin making copies after being turned on, the Basic screen appears. To activate a function or to select a setting, lightly touch the desired button in the touch panel. TYPE 1 TYPE 2 2 3 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 2 3 10 5 9 8 6 7 4 3 Before making copies 3-26 bizhub C252 ! Detail The Basic screen (TYPE1 or TYPE2) that appears can be set with the "Copy Initial Screen Setting" parameter in the Display Setting screen (displayed from the User Setting screen). The arrangement of the buttons and screens differ with TYPE1 and TYPE2; however, the functions that can be set are the same. As a default, "TYPE1" is selected. This manual contains descriptions of procedures using the Basic screen that appears when "TYPE1" is selected. For details on switching between the two types of Basic screens, refer to "Display setting" on page 13-30. If settings have been changed from the factory defaults, the tab for the screen containing the changed settings appears framed with a solid line. No. Item Name Description 1 Sub display area The results of operations and settings are displayed. 2 [Job List] button Jobs currently being performed or waiting to be performed are displayed. Various commands for checking and managing jobs are available. (See p. 12-3.) 3 Message display area The status of the machine and details on operations that must be performed are displayed here. 4 Functions/settings display Tabs and buttons for displaying screens containing various functions are displayed. Touch a tab or button to display the corresponding screen for specifying the settings. 5 Image display An image of the specified settings, such as stapling and hole punching, are displayed. 6 [Finishing] button Touch to specify settings for collating, uncollating, stapling, or hole punching. (See p. 4-81.) 7 [Fold & Staple] button Touch to specify the function for folding and binding pages. 8 [Save in User Box] button Touch to save the data of scanned image in a box. Various commands are available to specify the box where the data is to be saved and whether or not the data is printed when it is saved. For details, refer to the Box Operations of the User manual. 9 [Separate Scan] button Touch to scan the document in separate batches. A document scanned in different batches can be treated as a single copy job. (See p. 4-13.) 10 Icon display area Icons indicating the status of jobs and the machine are displayed. Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-27 Icons that appear in the screen Icon Description Indicates that data is being sent from the machine, regardless of the current mode Indicates that this machine is receiving data, regardless of the current mode Indicates that an error occurred during an image stabilization operation, a print operation or a scan operation Touch this icon to view a screen containing a warning code. If the warning screen was closed when a warning occurred, touch this button to display the warning screen again. Indicates that paper is not loaded in the paper tray Indicates that not much paper remains in the paper tray Indicates that "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON" 3 Before making copies 3-28 bizhub C252 3.2 Adjusting the angle of the control panel The control panel can be adjusted to any of three angles. Adjust the control panel to the angle that allows for easy operation. To adjust the angle of the control panel 1 Pull the control panel release lever toward you, and then push down on the control panel. The control panel stops at the middle position. 1 Upper position (base position) 2 Middle position 3 Lower position Control panel release lever Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-29 2 To adjust the control panel to an even steeper angle, pull the control panel release lever toward you, and then push down on the control panel. The control panel stops at the lower position. 3 To return the control panel to the upper position, pull the control panel release lever toward you, and then pull up on the control panel. 3 Before making copies 3-30 bizhub C252 3.3 Turning on the Main Power and the Auxiliary Power This machine has two power controls: the main power switch and the [Power] (auxiliary power) key. To turn on the machine The main power switch turns on/off all functions of the machine. Normally, the main power switch is turned on. The [Power] (auxiliary power) key turns on/off machine operations, for example, for copying, printing or scanning. When the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is turned off, the machine enters a state where it conserves energy. 1 Open the machine’s front door, and then set the main power switch to [ | ]. 2 Close the front door. 3 Press the [Power] (auxiliary power) button. Check that the touch panel is turned on. Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-31 ! Detail When the control panel is turned on by pressing the [Power] (auxiliary power) button, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange, and a screen indicating that the machine is starting up appears. After a few seconds, the message "Now warming up. Ready to scan." appears on the touch panel, and the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in green, indicating that a job can now be queued. The default settings are those that are selected immediately after the machine is turned on (the power switch is set to “n”) and before any setting is specified from the control panel or touch panel, and those that are selected when the [Reset] key is pressed to cancel all settings specified from the control panel or touch panel. The default settings can be changed. For details, refer to "Initial setting" on page 13-32. The factory default settings are the settings that were selected when this machine was sent from the factory. 2 Note A job can also be queued while the machine is warming up after the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is pressed. For details, refer to "To scan during warm-up" on page 3-32. After the machine has finished warming up, the scanned image will be printed. The machine takes about 110 seconds to warm up at normal room temperature (23°C) when the control panel is turned on using the [Power] (auxiliary power) key after the machine is turned on using the main power switch. 3 Before making copies 3-32 bizhub C252 To scan during warm-up 1 Press the [Power] (auxiliary power) button. The indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange. ? How is the machine turned on? % For details on turning on the machine, refer to "To turn on the machine" on page 3-30. 2 Check that the message "Now warming up. Ready to scan." appears on the touch panel . – After the warm-up message is displayed, the Basic screen appears. The indicator on the [Start] key lights up in green. 3 Position the document to be copied. ? How is the document positioned? % For details on positioning the document to be copied, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 4 Specify any necessary copy settings. 5 Using the keypad, specify the desired number of copies. ? How is the number of copies specified? % For details on specifying the number of copies, refer to "General copy operation" on page 4-3. 6 Press the [Start] key. The document is scanned, and the job is added to the list of queued jobs. 7 Check that the document has finished being scanned, and then position the next document. Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-33 8 Specify new copy settings and the desired number of copies, and then press the [Start] key. – After the machine has finished warming up, the jobs will automatically be printed in the order that they were queued. ? How is the printing of a job stopped? % Press the [Stop] key. For details, refer to "Stopping scanning/printing" on page 4-105. ! Detail While the machine is warming up to begin printing after it is turned on using the [Power] (auxiliary power) key, copy settings can be specified and a document can be scanned to reserve a copy job. After the machine has finished warming up, the copies are automatically printed. The print order can be changed or jobs can be deleted from the Current Jobs list of the Job List screen. For details, refer to "Managing jobs (Job List)" on page 12-3. 3 Before making copies 3-34 bizhub C252 To turn off the machine 1 Press the [Power] (auxiliary power) button. – Check that the touch panel is turned off. 2 Open the machine’s front door. 3 Set the main power switch to [o]. 4 Close the front door. 2 Reminder When the main power switch is turned off, then on again, wait at least 10 seconds to turn it on after turning it off. If there is no wait period between turning the main power switch off, then on again, the machine may not function properly. Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch or the [Power] (auxiliary power) key while it is making copies or printing, otherwise a paper misfeed may occur. Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch or the [Power] (auxiliary power) key while it is scanning or sending or receiving data, otherwise all scanned data or transmission data will be deleted. Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch while a queued job or stored data is waiting to be printed, otherwise the jobs will be deleted. ! Detail The following are cleared when the main power switch and [Power] (auxiliary power) key are turned off. Settings that have not been programmed Jobs queued to be printed Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-35 Automatically canceling the settings (automatic panel reset) If the [Reset] key is not pressed and no operation is performed for a specified length of time, settings that have not been programmed, such as the number of copies, are cleared and return to their default settings. This is the automatic panel reset operation. As the factory default, the automatic panel reset operation is performed after 1 minute. ! Detail The length of time until the automatic panel reset operation is performed and whether or not it is performed can be set from the Utility mode. For details, refer to "System setting" on page 13-38. Whether or not the automatic panel reset operation is performed when there is a change of user can be set from the Utility mode. For details, refer to "System setting" on page 13-38. Automatically canceling the mode screen (automatic system reset) If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the screen is automatically changed to that for the mode given priority. This is the automatic system reset operation. As the factory default, the Copy mode screen is displayed after 1 minute. ! Detail The mode screen that is displayed when the automatic system reset operation is performed can be changed from the Utility mode. For details, refer to "System setting" on page 13-38. 3 Before making copies 3-36 bizhub C252 Automatically conserving energy (Low Power mode) If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the touch panel goes off and the machine automatically enters a mode where it conserves energy. This is the Low Power mode. The machine can receive jobs even while it is in Low Power mode. As the factory default, the machine enters Low Power mode after 15 minutes. To recover from Low Power mode 1 Press the [Power Save] key. 2 The machine can receive jobs while it is warming up. – The touch panel comes on again and, after the machine has finished warming up, it is ready to begin printing (within 30 seconds at normal room temperature (23°C)). 2 Note As the factory default, pressing the [Power Save] key causes the machine to enter Low Power mode. Settings in the Administrator mode can be changed to put the machine in Sleep mode instead. For details, refer to "System setting" on page 13-38. The Low Power mode can also be canceled by pressing any key in the control panel or by touching the touch panel. ! Detail The length of time until the machine enters Low Power mode can be changed. For details, refer to "System setting" on page 13-27, page 13-38. Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-37 Automatically conserving energy (Sleep mode) If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the machine automatically enters a mode where it conserves energy. Although the machine conserves more energy in Sleep mode than in Low Power mode, the machine must warm up when Sleep mode is canceled to begin printing again, therefore taking more preparation time than Low Power mode. As the factory default, the machine enters Sleep mode after 30 minutes. To recover from Sleep mode 1 Press the [Power Save] key. 2 The machine can receive jobs while it is warming up. – The touch panel comes on again and, after the machine has finished warming up, it is ready to begin printing (within 110 seconds at normal room temperature (23°C)). 2 Note The Sleep mode can also be canceled by pressing any key in the control panel or by touching the touch panel. ! Detail As the factory default, the machine enters Low Power mode if no operation is performed for 15 minutes, and then the machine enters Sleep mode after 30 minutes have elapsed. The length of time until the machine enters Sleep mode can be changed. For details, refer to "System setting" on page 13-27, page 13-38. 3 Before making copies 3-38 bizhub C252 Manually conserving energy The machine can be manually set to an energy conservation mode. % Press the [Power Save] key (or press the [Power] (auxiliary power) button). – As the factory default, the machine enters Low Power mode. ! Detail Whether the machine enters Low Power mode or Sleep mode when the [Power Save] key is pressed can be set from the Administrator mode. For details, refer to "System setting" on page 13-38. Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-39 Automatically turning the machine on/off (weekly timer) The machine can be set to automatically enter Sleep mode according to a usage schedule determined by the administrator or limitations on the use of the machine can be specified. This is the weekly timer. Follow the procedure described below to use the machine while the weekly timer is being used. 1 Press the [Power Save] key. ? How is the weekly timer set? % For details on setting the weekly timer, refer to "System setting" on page 13-38. 2 Type in the password (up to 8 digits) for non-business hours. ? How is the password for non-business hours specified? % For details on specifying the password for non-business hours, refer to "System setting" on page 13-38. 3 Touch [OK]. The message "Access restricted due to weekly timer. Input amount of time prior to entering Sleep Mode." appears on the touch panel. 3 Before making copies 3-40 bizhub C252 4 Using the keypad, type in the length of time until the machine enters Sleep mode again. Specify a length of time between 5 minutes and 9 hours and 59 minutes. ? How can a single digit be input? % First, type in "0". If a minutes setting of less than 5 is entered, the setting changes to 5 minutes. In addition, a minutes setting of 60 or more cannot be specified. 5 Touch [OK]. The message "Ready to copy." appears on the touch panel. 2 Note As the factory default, the weekly timer is not set. If the message "Access restricted due to weekly timer. Input amount of time prior to entering Sleep Mode." or "Access restricted due to weekly timer. Input password to interrupt timer." appears after the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is pressed, the weekly timer is set. ! Detail During the set time, the copy operations can be performed as usual. From the Password for Non-Business Hours screen (displayed from Administrator mode), the machine can be set so that the screen for entering the password for non-business hours is not displayed. The default setting for the "Password for Non-Business Hours" parameter is "OFF" (the screen is not displayed). Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-41 Controlling each user’s use of this machine (user authentication) If user authentication settings have been specified by the administrator, only users that have been registered can use this machine. 0 When user authentication has been set, only users that enter passwords for specified accounts can use this machine. 0 Contact your administrator for account passwords. 0 A total of 1000 users and accounts can be registered. 1 Touch [User Name]. – If "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON", [Public User Access] and [List] do not appear. 3 Before making copies 3-42 bizhub C252 – If "Active Directory" was selected for external server authentication, [Domain Name] appears with the name of the default server. Touch [Domain Name] to display the names of servers registered with "Active Directory", and then select the desired server. For details on specifying settings for an external server, refer to "To select an authentication method" on page 13-98. 2 Type in the user name, and then touch [OK]. Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-43 3 Touch [Password]. 4 Type in the password, and then touch [OK]. 5 Press the [Access] key. The Basic screen appears. 6 Make copies using the desired copy settings. 3 Before making copies 3-44 bizhub C252 7 When you are finished printing, press the [Access] key. A message appears, requesting confirmation to log off. 8 Touch [Yes]. The user authentication screen appears again. ! Detail For details on specifying user authentication settings, refer to "User authentication/account track" on page 13-50. Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-45 2 Note The user authentication settings can be used together with the account track settings. If the "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" parameter is set to "Synchronize", complete user authentication, and then log on by using the account track input screen. User authentication settings can be specified using the User Authentication Setting parameters in Administrator mode, available from the Utility mode. Settings should be specified by the administrator. If a list of user names can be displayed, the desired user name can be selected from the list. Touch [List], touch the button for the desired user name to select it, and then touch [OK]. Users who have no access to a user name and password can touch [Public User Access] to use this machine. For details on specifying public user settings, refer to "To select an authentication method" on page 13-98 and "Authenticating public users" on page 13-106. If account track settings have been applied, the account track screen appears. However, if "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" has been set to "Synchronize", the account track screen does not appear if the users and accounts are synchronized. 3 Before making copies 3-46 bizhub C252 Controlling each account’s use of this machine (account track) If account track has been set by the administrator, only users of registered accounts can use this machine. In addition, the number of prints produced with each account can be controlled. This is account track. 0 When account track has been set, only users that enter passwords for specified accounts can use this machine. 0 Contact your administrator for account passwords. 0 A total of 1000 users and accounts can be registered. 1 Touch [Account Name]. – If the Administrator mode settings have been set to "Password Only", touch [Input], and then continue with step 4. Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-47 2 Type in the account name, and then touch [OK]. 3 Touch [Password]. 4 Type in the password, and then touch [OK]. 3 Before making copies 3-48 bizhub C252 5 Press the [Access] key. The Basic screen appears. 6 Make copies using the desired copy settings. 7 When you are finished printing, press the [Access] key. A message appears, requesting confirmation to log off. 8 Touch [Yes]. The account track screen appears again. ! Detail If "Account Track Input Method" on the General Settings screen of Administrator mode was set to "Password Only", log on is possible by only entering the password. For details, refer to "User authentication/account track" on page 13-50. The accounts can be managed using the User Authentication Setting and Account Track Setting functions in Administrator mode, available from the Utility mode. Settings should be specified by the administrator. For details on specifying account track settings, refer to "User authentication/account track" on page 13-50. Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-49 3.4 Loading paper into the 1st tray To load paper (1st tray) 1 Pull out the 1st tray. 2 Press down on the paper-lifting plate until it locks into place. 3 Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of paper to be loaded. ? How is non-standard sized paper loaded? % First load the paper, and then adjust the lateral guides to the size of the loaded paper. Paper-lifting plate Paper take-up roller Lateral guide 3 Before making copies 3-50 bizhub C252 4 For paper exceeding A3 size, adjust the trailing-edge guides as shown in the illustration. 5 Load the paper into the tray so that the side of the paper to be printed on (the side facing up when the package was unwrapped) faces up. – Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces down. ? How is curled paper loaded? % Flatten the paper before loading it. ? How many sheets of paper and other media can be loaded? % No more than 250 sheets of plain paper can be loaded. No more than 20 sheets of thick paper, overhead projector transparencies, postcards, label sheets or envelopes can be loaded. % Do not load so many sheets of plain paper that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark. 6 Close the 1st tray. – If envelopes are loaded, continue with step 7. Trailing-edge guide , mark Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-51 7 Pull up the upper right-side door release lever, and then open the upper right-side door. 8 Push up the fusing unit cover. 9 Push down the left and right release levers M2 to the position. 10 Close the fusing unit cover. 11 Close the upper right-side door. – After printing envelopes, return the left and right M2 release levers to their center positions. M2 3 Before making copies 3-52 bizhub C252 ! Detail When loading paper exceeding A3 size into the 1st tray, the paper can have a width up to 311.1 mm and a length up to 457.2 mm. For details on specifying the paper size for the 1st tray, refer to "To specify a paper size (set size settings)" on page 8-12. If special paper is loaded, the paper type setting must be specified. For details, refer to "To specify a setting for special paper" on page 8-25. 2 Reminder Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper take-up roller with your hands. If the lateral guides are not positioned correctly for the loaded paper, the paper size will not be correctly detected. Be sure to adjust the lateral guides to the size of the loaded paper. Before loading envelopes, press them down to make sure that all air is removed, and make sure that the folds of the flaps are firmly pressed, otherwise the envelopes may become wrinkled or a paper misfeed may occur. When loading envelopes, load them in the w orientation with the flap side down, as shown in the illustration. If the envelopes are loaded with the flap side up, a paper misfeed may occur. The flap side of envelopes cannot be printed on. Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-53 When loading overhead projector transparencies, load them in the v orientation, as shown in the illustration. Do not load overhead projector transparencies in the w orientation. When loading postcards, load them in the w orientation, as shown in the illustration. Do not load postcards in the v orientation. 3 Before making copies 3-54 bizhub C252 Be sure to load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces down. Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-55 3.5 Loading paper into the 2nd, 3rd or 4th tray To load paper (2nd, 3rd or 4th tray) 1 Pull out the paper tray. 2 Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of paper to be loaded. 3 Load the paper into the tray so that the side of the paper to be printed on (the side facing up when the package was unwrapped) faces up. Lateral guide Film , mark 3 Before making copies 3-56 bizhub C252 – Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces down. ? How is curled paper loaded? % Flatten the paper before loading it. ? How many sheets of paper can be loaded? % No more than 500 sheets of plain paper can be loaded. In addition, no more than150 sheets of thick paper can be loaded. % Do not load so many sheets of plain paper that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark. 4 Close the paper tray. 2 Reminder If the lateral guides are not positioned correctly for the loaded paper, the paper size will not be correctly detected. Be sure to adjust the lateral guides to the size of the loaded paper. For details on the paper that can be loaded into the 2nd tray, 3rd tray and 4th tray, refer to "Copy paper/original documents" on page 8-3. Be careful not to touch the film. 2 Note To print on overhead projector transparencies and envelopes, use the bypass tray or the 1st tray. Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-57 3.6 Loading paper into the LCT To load paper (LCT) 0 If the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is turned off, even while the main power switch is on, the LCT cannot be pulled out, even after the tray release button is pressed. Be sure that the machine is turned on with the [Power] (auxiliary power) key. 1 Press the tray release button. 2 Pull out the LCT. 3 Load the paper into the right side of the LCT so that the side of the paper to be printed on (the side facing up when the package was unwrapped) faces up. ? How is curled paper loaded? % Flatten the paper before loading it. Film , mark 3 Before making copies 3-58 bizhub C252 4 Load the paper into the left side of the LCT so that the side of the paper to be printed on (the side facing up when the package was unwrapped) faces up. – Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces down. 5 Close the LCT. 2 Reminder Be careful not to touch the film. Do not load so many sheets of paper that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark. For details on the paper that can be loaded into the LCT, refer to "Copy paper/original documents" on page 8-3. 2 Note If the machine has entered Low Power mode or Sleep mode, the LCT cannot be pulled out, even after the tray release button is pressed. Be sure to first cancel Low Power mode or Sleep mode. , mark Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-59 3.7 Loading paper into the bypass tray Paper can be fed manually through the bypass tray if you wish to copy onto paper that is not loaded into a paper tray, or if you wish to copy onto thick paper, postcards, envelopes, overhead projector transparencies or label sheets. To load paper (bypass tray) 1 Open the bypass tray. – When loading large-sized paper, pull out the tray extension. 2 With the side to be printed on facing down, insert the paper as much as possible into the feed slot. 3 Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of paper being loaded. Tray extension Lateral guides 3 Before making copies 3-60 bizhub C252 4 Select the paper type. – To print on colored paper, envelopes, or letterheads, touch [ ], and then select the paper type. – If “A6 Card w” is selected, the paper type is automatically set to "Thick 2". – If envelopes are loaded, continue with step 5. – For details on selecting a setting for non-standard-size paper, refer to "To specify a non-standard paper size (Custom Size settings)" on page 8-15. – For details on selecting a setting for wide paper, refer to "To specify a setting for oversized paper (Oversized Paper settings)" on page 8-22. – For details on special paper, refer to "Special paper" on page 8-6. ? What should be done if media other than postcards are inserted? % Select the appropriate paper type. ? What paper type is selected when label sheets are loaded? % Select "Thick 1". Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-61 5 Pull up the upper right-side door release lever, and then open the upper right-side door. 6 Push up the fusing unit cover. 7 Push down the left and right release levers M2 to the position. 8 Close the fusing unit cover. 9 Close the upper right-side door. M2 3 Before making copies 3-62 bizhub C252 2 Reminder After printing on envelopes, return the left and right M2 release levers to their center positions, otherwise decreased image quality may result when printing on plain paper. Do not load so many sheets that the top of the stack is higher than the + mark. Push the paper guides firmly up against the edges of the paper. When loading postcards, load them in the w orientation, as shown in the illustration. Do not load postcards in the v orientation. A maximum of 20 postcards can be loaded into the bypass tray. Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-63 When loading overhead projector transparencies, load them in the v orientation, as shown in the illustration. Do not load overhead projector transparencies in the w orientation. A maximum of 20 overhead projector transparencies can be loaded into the bypass tray. Before loading envelopes, press them down to make sure that all air is removed, and make sure that the folds of the flaps are firmly pressed, otherwise the envelopes may become wrinkled or a paper misfeed may occur. 3 Before making copies 3-64 bizhub C252 When loading envelopes, load them with the flap side up, as shown in the illustration. If the envelopes are loaded with the flap side down, a paper misfeed may occur. The flap side of envelopes cannot be printed on. A maximum of 10 envelopes can be loaded into the bypass tray. Flap side Before making copies 3 bizhub C252 3-65 When loading label sheets, load them in the w orientation, as shown in the illustration. Do not load label sheets in the v orientation. A maximum of 20 label sheets can be loaded into the bypass tray. Be sure to load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces up. 2 Note The image will be printed on the surface of the paper facing down when the paper is loaded into the bypass tray. Side to be printed on 3 Before making copies 3-66 bizhub C252 ! Detail For details on specifying the paper size for the bypass tray, refer to "To specify a paper size (set size settings)" on page 8-12. For details on the paper sizes, refer to "Copy paper" on page 8-3. 4 Basic copy operations Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-3 4 Basic copy operations 4.1 General copy operation This section contains information on the general operation for making copies. The following procedure describes how to copy a single-sided document using basic copy operations. 2 Note Some settings cannot be used together. For details on the settings that cannot be combined, refer to "Operations that cannot be combined" on page 4-6. To make a copy 1 Press the [Copy] key to display the Basic screen in Copy mode. 2 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 4 Basic copy operations 4-4 bizhub C252 3 Specify the necessary copy settings. – The default settings when this machine is purchased are listed below. [Color]: Auto Color [Paper]: Auto Paper Select [Zoom]: Full size (e 1.000) [Simplex/Duplex]: 1 1 [Quality/Density]: Text/Photo – For details on specifying Original settings, refer to "Specifying original settings" on page 4-24. – For details on selecting a Color setting, refer to "Selecting a color setting" on page 4-40. – For details on selecting a Paper setting, refer to "Selecting a paper setting" on page 4-43. – For details on specifying a Zoom setting, refer to "Specifying a zoom setting" on page 4-46. – For details on specifying a Simplex/Duplex setting, refer to "Selecting the document and copy type settings (Simplex/Duplex settings)" on page 4-59. – For details on selecting the quality of the document, refer to "Selecting the quality of the document" on page 4-65. – For details on specifying the density settings, refer to "Specifying the density settings" on page 4-70. – For details on selecting a Combine Originals setting, refer to "Selecting a combine originals setting" on page 4-77. – For details on selecting Finishing settings, refer to "Selecting finishing settings" on page 4-81. – For details on specifying the "Fold & Staple" function, refer to "Specifying center binding" on page 4-96. – For details on specifying settings for the Application functions, refer to "Application functions" on page 9-3. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-5 4 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. – If the number of copies was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then specify the correct number of copies. 5 Press the [Start] key. – To stop the copy operation being performed, press the [Stop] key. For details, refer to "Stopping scanning/printing" on page 4-105. – The next copy operation can be queued while a copy operation is being performed. For details, refer to "Scanning the next document to be copied while a copy job is being printed (next job reservation)" on page 4-103. 4 Basic copy operations 4-6 bizhub C252 4.2 Operations that cannot be combined Certain copy settings cannot be used together. Specifying settings that cannot be combined will result in one of the following occurring. - The setting specified last is given priority. (The setting specified first is canceled.) - The setting specified first is given priority. (A warning message appears.) Operations where the setting specified last is given priority The procedure for setting the "Booklet" function after selecting the "2 Position" Staple setting is described below. 1 Select the [ 2 Position] Staple setting. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-7 2 Set the "Booklet" function. The "2 Position" Staple setting is automatically cancelled, and the "Booklet" function is set. To select the "2 Position" Staple setting, cancel the "Booklet" function, and then select the "2 Position" setting. 4 Basic copy operations 4-8 bizhub C252 Operations where the setting specified first is given priority If a warning message appears, indicating that settings cannot be combined, those settings cannot be specified together. The procedure for selecting the "2 Position" Staple setting after setting the "Booklet" function is described below. 1 Set the "Booklet" function. 2 Select the "2 Position" Staple setting. The message "This mode is not available with Booklet." appears and the "2 Position" Staple setting cannot be selected. The "Booklet" function remains selected and the "2 Position" Staple setting is canceled. To select the "2 Position" Staple setting, cancel the "Booklet" function, and then select the "2 Position" setting. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-9 4.3 Feeding the document The document can be fed in either of the following two ways. Be sure to position the document correctly according to the type of document being copied. To load the document into the ADF 0 The ADF is an option. 0 For details on the types of documents that can be loaded into the ADF, refer to "Original documents" on page 8-29. 0 Do not load documents that are bound together, for example, with paper clips or staples. 0 Do not load more than 100 sheets or so many sheets that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark, otherwise a document misfeed or damage to the document or machine may occur. However, a document that exceeds 100 pages can be scanned in separate batches. For details, refer to "Scanning the document in separate batches (“Separate Scan” setting)" on page 4-13. 0 If the document is not loaded correctly, the document may not be fed in straight or a document misfeed or damage to the document may occur. 1 Slide the adjustable document guides to fit the size of the document. – If large-sized documents are to be loaded, pull out the document support. Document Feed Method Features Using the ADF By using the ADF, a multi-page document can be fed automatically. This feed method can also be used with double-sided documents, and is perfect for multi-page double-sided documents. Using the original glass The document is placed directly on the original glass, then scanned. This method is best with books and other documents that cannot be fed through the ADF. Document support 4 Basic copy operations 4-10 bizhub C252 2 Load the document face up in the document feed tray. – Load the document pages so that the top of the document is toward the back or the right side of the machine. 3 Adjust the document guides to the size of the document. – For details on loading documents of mixed sizes, refer to "Copying documents of mixed sizes (“Mixed Original” setting)" on page 4-24. – For details on loading thick documents, refer to "Copying thick documents (“Thick Original” setting)" on page 4-26. – For details on selecting the document orientation, refer to "Selecting the document orientation (Original Direction settings)" on page 4-28. – For details on selecting the position of the binding margin, refer to "Selecting the position of the binding margin (Margin settings)" on page 4-32. Adjustable document guide Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-11 To place the document on the original glass 0 For details on the types of documents that can be placed on the original glass, refer to "Original documents" on page 8-29. 0 When placing the document on the original glass, be sure to lift open the ADF at least 20°. If the document is placed on the original glass without the ADF being lifted at least 20°, the correct document size will not be detected. 0 Do not place objects weighing more than 2 kg on the original glass. In addition, do not press down extremely hard on a book spread placed on the original glass, otherwise the original glass may be damaged. 0 For thick books or large objects, make the copy without closing the original cover, or ADF if it is installed. When a document is being scanned with the original cover or ADF open, do not look directly at the light that may shine through the original glass. Although the light that shines through the original glass is bright, it is not a laser beam and, therefore, is not as dangerous. 1 Lift open the original cover, or the ADF if it is installed. 2 Position the document face down onto the original glass. – Load the document pages so that the top of the document is toward the back or the left side of the machine. When loaded in the v orientation: When loaded in the w orientation: 4 Basic copy operations 4-12 bizhub C252 3 Align the document with the mark in the back-left corner of the document scales. – For details on selecting the document orientation, refer to "Selecting the document orientation (Original Direction settings)" on page 4-28. – For details on selecting the position of the binding margin, refer "Selecting the position of the binding margin (Margin settings)" on page 4-32. – For transparent or translucent documents, place a blank sheet of paper of the same size as the document over the document. – For bound documents spread over two facing pages, such as a book or magazine, position the top of the document toward the back of this machine and align the document with the mark in the back-left corner of the document scales, as shown. 4 Close the original cover, or the ADF if it is installed. Document scales Blank sheet of paper Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-13 Scanning the document in separate batches (“Separate Scan” setting) A large document can be divided and scanned in a number of batches. A maximum of 100 document pages can be loaded into the ADF at one time. However, by copying with the "Separate Scan" setting, a document that exceeds 100 pages can be scanned and treated as a single copy job. In addition, the scanning location can be switched between the original glass and the ADF during the scanning operation. 0 The loading capacity of the ADF is 100 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2) or 38 sheets of thick paper (210 g/m2). 0 Either "Auto Print" or "Batch Print" can be selected as the print setting when scanning with the "Separate Scan" setting. The default setting is "Auto Print". For details on selecting the print setting for scanning with the "Separate Scan" setting, refer to "Copier setting" on page 13-33. 0 For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 1 Position the document to be copied. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Separate Scan]. – To cancel the "Separate Scan" setting, touch [Separate Scan] again to deselect it. 4 Basic copy operations 4-14 bizhub C252 3 Press the [Start] key. Scanning begins. – If the "Print Setting for Separate Scan" parameter is set to "Batch Print", touch [Finish] in the following screen, which appears while the document is scanned with the ADF, to continue to step 5. 4 Load the next batch of the document, and then press the [Start] key. – Repeat this step until all pages of the document have been scanned. – If the document cannot be loaded into the ADF, place it on the original glass. For details on the types of documents that can be loaded into the ADF, refer to "Original documents" on page 8-29. – The amount of memory available can be checked beside "Memory" in the upper-right corner of the Basic screen. – To delete the image data, press the [Stop] key, and then delete the job. For details, refer to "Stopping scanning/printing" on page 4-105. – To change the scanning settings, touch [Change Setting]. For details on changing the scanning settings, refer to "To change scan settings for each document" on page 4-36. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-15 – The buttons that appear in the Change Setting screen differ depending on the specified settings. Settings for the following can be changed. Simplex/Duplex, Bind, Zoom, Frame Erase, Center Erase, Original Size 5 After all document pages have been scanned, touch [Finish]. 4 Basic copy operations 4-16 bizhub C252 – If the "Print Setting for Separate Scan" parameter is set to "Batch Print", touch [Yes] in the screen that appears, requesting confirmation that scanning of the document is finished. Otherwise, touch [No] is touched to return to step 3. 6 Press the [Start] key. – If the "Print Setting for Separate Scan" parameter is set to "Batch Print", touch [Print] or press the [Start] key. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-17 – If the "Print Setting for Separate Scan" parameter is set to "Batch Print", the copy settings can be changed. To change the copy settings, touch [Change Setting], and then touch [OK] after changing the settings as desired. Otherwise, touch [Cancel Change] to cancel the changes to the settings. 4 Basic copy operations 4-18 bizhub C252 Scanning a multi-page document from the original glass When making double-sided or combined copies using the original glass, place each page of a multi-page document on the original glass to scan it. The following procedure describes how to place single-sided document pages on the original glass to make double-sided copies. 0 Either "Auto Print" or "Batch Print" can be selected as the print setting when scanning with the "Separate Scan" setting. The default setting is "Auto Print". For details on selecting the print setting for scanning with the "Separate Scan" setting, refer to "Copier setting" on page 13-33. 1 Lift open the original cover, or the ADF if it is installed. 2 Position the first page or the first side of the document face down onto the original glass. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "To place the document on the original glass" on page 4-11. 3 Close the original cover, or the ADF if it is installed. When loaded in the v orientation: When loaded in the w orientation: Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-19 4 In the Basic screen, touch [Simplex/Duplex]. The Simplex/Duplex screen appears. 5 Touch [1%2]. – The screens that appear differ depending on the options that are installed. 4 Basic copy operations 4-20 bizhub C252 6 Touch [Binding Direction], select the binding position for the copies, and then touch [OK]. – For details on specifying the binding position, refer to "To select double-sided copies" on page 4-62. 7 Touch [Original Direction], select the orientation of the loaded document, and then touch [OK]. – For details on specifying the document orientation, refer to "Selecting the document orientation (Original Direction settings)" on page 4-28. 8 Touch [OK]. 9 Press the [Start] key. Scanning begins. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-21 10 Load the next batch of the document, and then press the [Start] key. – Repeat this step until all pages of the document have been scanned. – The amount of memory available can be checked beside "Memory" in the upper-right corner of the Basic screen. – To delete the image data, press the [Stop] key, and then delete the job. For details, refer to "Stopping scanning/printing" on page 4-105. – To change the scanning settings, touch [Change Setting]. For details on changing the scanning settings, refer to "To change scan settings for each document" on page 4-36. – The buttons that appear in the Change Setting screen differ depending on the specified settings. Settings for the following can be changed. Simplex/Duplex, Bind, Zoom, Frame Erase, Center Erase, Original Size 11 After all document pages have been scanned, touch [Finish]. 4 Basic copy operations 4-22 bizhub C252 – If the "Print Setting for Separate Scan" parameter is set to "Batch Print", touch [Yes] in the screen that appears, requesting confirmation that scanning of the document is finished. Otherwise, touch [No] is touched to return to step 9. 12 Press the [Start] key. – If the "Print Setting for Separate Scan" parameter is set to "Batch Print", touch [Print] or press the [Start] key. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-23 – If the "Print Setting for Separate Scan" parameter is set to "Batch Print", the copy settings can be changed. To change the copy settings, touch [Change Setting], and then touch [OK] after changing the settings as desired. Otherwise, touch [Cancel Change] to cancel the changes to the settings. 4 Basic copy operations 4-24 bizhub C252 4.4 Specifying original settings The following procedure describes how to specify the type of document to be copied. Copying documents of mixed sizes (“Mixed Original” setting) Documents of different sizes can be loaded together into the ADF to be fed and scanned one by one automatically. The possible combinations of document sizes differ depending on the widest document loaded (position of the adjustable document guides of the ADF). 0 Do not load more than 100 sheets or so many sheets that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark, otherwise a document misfeed or damage to the document or machine may occur. However, a document that exceeds 100 pages can be scanned in separate batches. For details, refer to "Scanning the document in separate batches (“Separate Scan” setting)" on page 4-13. 0 If the document is not loaded correctly, the document may not be fed in straight or a document misfeed or damage to the document may occur. 1 Slide the adjustable document guides to fit the size of the largest page. – If large-sized documents are to be loaded, pull out the document support. – For details on the document sizes that can be mixed in the ADF, refer to "Documents that can be loaded into the ADF" on page 8-29. 2 Arrange the document pages so that the side to be copied (first page) faces up, as shown in the illustration. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-25 3 Load the document face up in the document feed tray. Slide the adjustable document guides against the edges of the document. – Load the document pages into the ADF so that the top of the pages is toward the back or the left side of the machine. 4 In the Basic screen, touch [Combine Originals]. The Combine Originals and Original settings screen appears. 5 Touch [Mixed Original]. – To cancel the "Mixed Original" setting, touch [Mixed Original] again to deselect it. Adjustable document guide 4 Basic copy operations 4-26 bizhub C252 Copying thick documents (“Thick Original” setting) When copying thick documents with a weight of 129 g/m2 to 210 g/m2 loaded into the ADF, select the "Thick Original" setting. 0 When the "Thick Original" setting is selected, a maximum of 38 document pages can be loaded into the ADF. For details on thick documents, refer to "Original documents" on page 8-29. 0 For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 1 Position the document to be copied. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Combine Originals]. The Combine Originals and Original settings screen appears. Adjustable document guide Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-27 3 Touch [Thick Original]. 4 Basic copy operations 4-28 bizhub C252 Selecting the document orientation (Original Direction settings) When copying double-sided documents, making double-sided copies, or using a Combine Originals setting, specify the document orientation, otherwise the copies may not be printed in the correct page order or correct front and back page arrangement. 2 Note The default setting is the first setting (with the top of the document at the top (toward the back of the machine)). Document Loading Orientation Using the ADF Using the Original Glass Icon Description Select this setting for a document loaded with the top toward the back of this machine. Select this setting for a document loaded with the top toward the front of this machine. • Select this setting for a document loaded into the ADF with the top of the document toward the left side of this machine. • Select this setting for a document placed on the original glass with the top of the document toward the right side of this machine. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-29 • Select this setting for a document loaded into the ADF with the top of the document toward the right side of this machine. • Select this setting for a document placed on the original glass with the top of the document toward the left side of this machine. Using the ADF Using the Original Glass Icon Description 4 Basic copy operations 4-30 bizhub C252 To specify an original direction setting 0 For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 1 Position the document to be copied. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Combine Originals]. The Combine Originals and Original settings screen appears. 3 Touch [Original Direction]. The Original Direction screen appears. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-31 4 Touch the button for the orientation of the loaded document, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Basic copy operations 4-32 bizhub C252 Selecting the position of the binding margin (Margin settings) If a double-sided document is loaded into the ADF, specify the position of the top of the back side of the document by specifying the binding margin position for the document. 2 Note The default setting is "Auto". Document Binding Margin Position Margin Setting Icon Description Select this setting if the document is loaded with the binding margin at the left. Select this setting if the document is loaded with the binding margin at the right. Select this setting if the document is loaded with the binding margin at the top. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-33 When the document length is 297 mm or less: Select this setting to automatically select the position of the binding margin. If the document length is 297 mm or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the document length is more than 297 mm, a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected. 2 Note If "Auto" is selected, the binding margin is set at the top or at the left. When the document length is more than 297 mm: Margin Setting Icon Description 4 Basic copy operations 4-34 bizhub C252 To specify a margin setting 0 For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 1 Position the document to be copied. – When loading a document with a binding margin, position the top of the document toward the back of the machine. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Combine Originals]. The Combine Originals and Original settings screen appears. 3 Touch [Margin]. The Page Margin screen appears. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-35 4 Touch the button for the desired margin position, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Basic copy operations 4-36 bizhub C252 To change scan settings for each document When copying using the "Separate Scan" setting or when multi-page documents are placed on the original glass, the scan settings can be changed for each document. The following procedure describes how to change the settings when the "Separate Scan" setting is used. 1 Position the document to be copied. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Separate Scan]. 3 Press the [Start] key. Scanning begins. 4 Touch [Change Setting]. A screen appears, allowing you to change the settings. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-37 5 Touch the key of the setting to be changed, select the desired setting, and then touch [OK]. – The buttons that appear in the Change Setting screen differ depending on the specified settings. Settings for the following can be changed. Simplex/Duplex, Bind, Zoom, Frame Erase, Center Erase, Original Size 4 Basic copy operations 4-38 bizhub C252 – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel Change]. Simplex/Duplex screen Original Bind Position screen Center Erase screen Original Size Setting screen Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-39 – For details on specifying the Zoom setting, refer to "Specifying a zoom setting" on page 4-46. For details on specifying a zoom ratio, refer to "Erasing specified areas of copies (“Erase” function)" on page 9-71. 4 Basic copy operations 4-40 bizhub C252 4.5 Selecting a color setting The following five Color settings are available. 2 Note The default setting is "Auto Color". Color Setting Description Auto Color Select this setting to automatically detect whether the scanned document is in color or in black and white, and then select the appropriate Color setting ("Full Color" or "Black"). Full Color Select this setting to print the copy in full color, regardless of whether the scanned document is in color or in black and white. 2 Color Select this setting to print all areas of the scanned document determined to be in color with the specified color, and print all areas determined to be black in black. (The color used for the areas printed in color are: red, yellow, blue, magenta, green or cyan. Refer to page 1-35.) Black Select this setting to print the copy in black and white, regardless of whether the scanned document is in color or in black and white. Single Color Select this setting to print copies in the specified color, regardless of whether the scanned document is in color or in black and white. (The color used for printing the copy can be set to one of the 21 available. Refer to page 1-34.) When the "Single Color" setting is selected, the following two methods for reproducing gradations in documents are available. Relative luminosity: The document will be copied using monocolor concentration variations to express color differences (color shading that can be seen with the eye) and gradation levels. This enables the color of markers, the blue lines in graphing paper and the red of stamps to be distinctly reproduced in copies. Average brightness: The document will be copied using monocolor concentration variations to only express gradation levels, regardless of the color differences in the original document. This is useful for producing monocolor copies of documents containing gradation differences, such as magazines and newspapers, and for offsetting the yellow tint in documents that have yellowed. To select this method, touch [Solid]. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-41 To select a color setting The following procedure describes how to select a Color setting. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Color]. The Color screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the desired Color setting. 4 Basic copy operations 4-42 bizhub C252 – If the "2 Color" setting was selected, touch the button for the desired color, and then touch [OK]. One of the colors for the "2 Color" setting is black, which cannot be changed. In this step, touch the button for the second color. – If the "Single Color" setting was selected, touch the button for the desired color, and then touch [OK]. – Touch [ Back] or [Fwd. ], and then select the desired color. If desired, touch [Solid]. – If the "Solid" setting is not selected, the relative luminosity method is selected. – To use the average brightness method for reproducing gradations in monocolor documents, touch [Solid]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-43 4.6 Selecting a paper setting The paper size can be selected automatically according to the document size or it can be specified manually. Specify the paper size according to the corresponding procedure, depending on the desired copy settings. 2 Note If a setting for special paper is selected for a paper tray, that tray is not selected automatically with the "Auto Paper Select" setting. (However, a paper tray set to "Single Side Only" is given priority to be selected.) This setting is useful for paper trays loaded with special paper. For details, refer to "To specify a setting for special paper" on page 8-25. The default setting is "Auto Paper Select". For details on the operations that cannot be combined, refer to "Operations that cannot be combined" on page 4-6. The "Auto Zoom" and "Auto Paper Select" settings cannot be selected at the same time. If the "Auto Zoom" setting was selected, the Zoom screen appears. In the Zoom screen, specify the desired zoom setting. 4 Basic copy operations 4-44 bizhub C252 Automatically selecting the paper size (“Auto Paper Select” setting) The size of the loaded document is detected, and copies are produced using paper of the same size. If the "×1.0" Zoom setting was specified, paper of the same size as the document is selected. If the zoom ratio was increased or decreased, a paper size that corresponds to the specified zoom ratio is automatically selected. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Touch [Auto Paper Select]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-45 Manually selecting the desired paper size 0 By also selecting the "Auto Zoom" setting, the most appropriate zoom ratio is selected based on the size of the loaded document and the specified paper size. For details on the "Auto Zoom" setting, refer to "Automatically selecting the paper size (“Auto Paper Select” setting)" on page 4-44. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Select the paper tray loaded with the desired paper. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 4 Basic copy operations 4-46 bizhub C252 4.7 Specifying a zoom setting The zoom ratio can be set in order to make a copy on paper with a size different than the document or to enlarge or reduce the size of the copy image. The following procedure describes how to specify the Zoom setting. Automatically selecting the zoom ratio (“Auto Zoom” setting) The most appropriate zoom ratio is automatically selected based on the size of the loaded document and the specified paper size. 0 The default setting is "×1.0". 0 The "Auto Zoom" and "Auto Paper Select" settings cannot be selected together. If the "Auto Paper Select" setting was selected, the Paper screen appears. In the Paper screen, specify the desired Paper setting. 0 If the "Auto Zoom" setting is selected and an enlargement is to be copied on paper larger than the document, load the document with the same orientation as the paper. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-47 2 Touch [Auto Zoom]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 4 Basic copy operations 4-48 bizhub C252 Specifying the same zoom ratio as the document (“×1.0” setting) A copy that is the same size as the document (e1.000) is produced. 0 The default setting is "×1.0". 0 Touch [+] to enlarge the zoom ratio, and touch [–] to reduce the zoom ratio in e0.001 intervals. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch [×1.0]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-49 Slightly reducing the copy (“Minimal” setting) A document image can be printed slightly smaller (x0.930) than the original document size. 0 The default setting is "×1.0". 0 Touch [+] to enlarge the zoom ratio, and touch [–] to reduce the zoom ratio in e 0.001 increments. 0 The zoom ratio of the "Minimal" setting can be changed (between e0.900 and e0.999). For details on changing the zoom ratio for the "Minimal" setting, refer to "Storing the desired zoom ratio" on page 4-57. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch [Minimal]. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 4 Basic copy operations 4-50 bizhub C252 Selecting a preset zoom ratio (enlarge and reduce settings) The most appropriate zoom ratio can be selected for copying from a common standard document size to a standard paper size. 0 The default setting is "×1.0". 0 Touch [+] to enlarge the zoom ratio, and touch [–] to reduce the zoom ratio in e0.001 increments. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the appropriate zoom ratio according to the document and paper sizes. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-51 Typing In the zoom ratio (XY Zoom setting) By using the keypad, a zoom ratio between e0.250 and e4.000 can be typed in directly without changing the height-to-width ratio. 0 If a value outside of the allowable range is specified, the message "Input Error" appears. Type in a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 0 The entered zoom ratio can be stored. For details on storing the zoom ratio, refer to "Storing the desired zoom ratio" on page 4-57. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch [XY Zoom]. 4 Basic copy operations 4-52 bizhub C252 3 Use the keypad to type in the desired zoom ratio. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-53 Typing In separate X and Y zoom ratios (independent zoom settings) By using the keypad, separate zoom ratios can be typed in directly for the horizontal direction (between e0.250 and e 4.000) and for the vertical direction (between e0.250 and e4.000). By combining different horizontal and vertical zoom ratios, the copy image can be adjusted as shown in the following illustration. 0 If a value outside of the allowable range is specified, the message "Input Error" appears. Type in a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 4 Basic copy operations 4-54 bizhub C252 2 Touch [XY Zoom]. 3 Touch [X] under "Set Individual Zoom", and then use the keypad to type in the desired zoom ratio (between e0.250 and e4.000) for the X direction. 4 Touch [Y] under "Set Individual Zoom", and then use the keypad to type in the desired zoom ratio (between e0.250 and e4.000) for the Y direction. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-55 – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. 4 Basic copy operations 4-56 bizhub C252 Selecting a stored zoom ratio Copy zoom ratios that have been stored can be recalled to be used when desired. In addition, stored copy zoom ratios can be changed. 0 The default setting is "×1.0". 0 Touch [+] to enlarge the zoom ratio, and touch [–] to reduce the zoom ratio in e 0.001 increments. 0 Stored zoom ratios can be changed to desired zoom ratios. For details on storing zoom ratios, refer to "Storing the desired zoom ratio" on page 4-57. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the desired zoom ratio. 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-57 Storing the desired zoom ratio Three frequently used zoom ratios and the zoom ratio for the "Minimal" setting can be stored. 0 If a value outside of the allowable range is specified, the message "Input Error" appears. Type in a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 0 The default zoom ratios (e4.000, e2.000 and e0.500) are stored. When a new zoom ratio is stored, it overwrites the zoom ratio stored with the selected button. 0 To store a "Minimal" zoom ratio, type in the desired zoom ratio between e0.900 and e0.999. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom]. The Zoom screen appears. 2 Touch [XY Zoom]. 4 Basic copy operations 4-58 bizhub C252 3 Use the keypad to type in the desired zoom ratio (between e0.250 and e4.000). – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Touch [Set Zoom]. 5 Touch the button or [Minimal] where the new zoom ratio is to be stored. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. The specified zoom ratio is stored. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-59 4.8 Selecting the document and copy type settings (Simplex/Duplex settings) The type of document and copy can be specified. The following four Simplex/Duplex settings are available. The following procedures describe how to select a Simplex/Duplex setting. Simplex/Duplex Description 1%1 Select this setting to produce single-sided copies from single-sided documents. 1%2 Select this setting to produce one double-sided copy from two single-sided documents. 2%1 Select this setting to produce two single-sided copies from one double-sided document. 2%2 Select this setting to produce double-sided copies from double-sided documents. 4 Basic copy operations 4-60 bizhub C252 To select single-sided copies 0 The default setting is "1%1". 0 For details on using the original glass to scan multiple document pages, refer to "Scanning a multi-page document from the original glass" on page 4-18. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Simplex/Duplex]. The Simplex/Duplex screen appears. 2 Touch [1%1] or [2%1]. – If "2%1" is selected, specify the binding direction and the original direction, otherwise the copies will not be printed as desired. – If the binding position for the document is set to "Auto", the position of the binding margin is automatically selected. A binding margin along the long side of the paper is selected if the document length is 297 mm or less. If the document length is more than 297 mm, a binding margin along the short side of the paper is selected. – If the binding position for the document is set to "Auto", the binding margin is set at the top or at the left. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-61 – The screens that appear differ depending on the options that are installed. – For a double-sided document, touch [Binding Direction], select the binding position for the document, and then touch [OK]. 3 Touch [Original Direction], select the orientation of the loaded document, and then touch [OK]. – For details on specifying the document orientation, refer to "Selecting the document orientation (Original Direction settings)" on page 4-28. 4 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 4 Basic copy operations 4-62 bizhub C252 To select double-sided copies 0 The default setting is "1%1". 0 For details on using the original glass to scan multiple document pages, refer to "Scanning a multi-page document from the original glass" on page 4-18. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Simplex/Duplex]. The Simplex/Duplex screen appears. 2 Touch [1%2] or [2%2]. – Specify the binding direction and the original direction, otherwise the copies will not be printed as desired. – If the binding position for the document is set to "Auto", the position of the binding margin is automatically selected. A binding margin along the long side of the paper is selected if the document length is 297 mm or less. If the document length is more than 297 mm, a binding margin along the short side of the paper is selected. – If the binding position for the document is set to "Auto", the binding margin is set at the top or at the left. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-63 – If the binding position for the copy is set to "Auto", the binding position is automatically determined according to the orientation of the loaded document. If the document length is 297 mm or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the document length is more than 297 mm, a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected. – If the binding position for the copy is set to "Auto", the binding position is set at the top or at the left. 3 Touch [Binding Direction]. – For a single-sided document, select the binding position for the copy, and then touch [OK]. – For a double-sided document, select the binding positions for the document and the copy, and then touch [OK]. 4 Basic copy operations 4-64 bizhub C252 4 Touch [Original Direction], select the orientation of the loaded document, and then touch [OK]. – For details on specifying the document orientation, refer to "Selecting the document orientation (Original Direction settings)" on page 4-28. 5 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-65 4.9 Selecting the quality of the document Loading documents with small print or photos (Original Type settings) Select the setting for the text and image type of the document to better adjust the copy quality. The Original Type settings are available. 2 Note The default setting is "Printed Photo" in the "Text/Photo" category. Icon Description Text Select this setting when copying documents containing only text. The edges of copied text are reproduced with sharpness, providing an image that is easy to read. Text/Photo Photo Paper Select this setting when copying photos from documents containing both text and images onto photographic paper. A smooth copy image is produced. Printed Photo Select this setting when copying printed documents containing both text and images, such as pamphlets or catalogs. Photo Photo Paper Select this setting when copying photos from documents onto photographic paper. Select this setting to produce better reproductions of halftone document images (photographs, etc.) that cannot be reproduced with the usual settings. A smooth copy image is produced. Printed Photo Select this setting when copying printed documents, such as pamphlets or catalogs. Select this setting to produce better reproductions of halftone document images (photographs, etc.) that cannot be reproduced with the usual settings. 4 Basic copy operations 4-66 bizhub C252 The following procedure describes how to select an Original Type setting. Special Quality Map Select this setting when copying documents with a background color or documents containing pencil markings or fine colored lines. A sharp copy image is produced. Dot Matrix Original Select this setting when copying documents consisting only of text that appears faint (such as that written with a pencil). The copied text is reproduced so that it is darker, providing text that is easy to read. Copied Paper Select this setting when copying images (documents) printed with this machine. Icon Description Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-67 To specify an original type setting 0 For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 1 Position the document to be copied. 2 In the Basic screen, touch [Quality/Density]. The Quality/Density screen appears. 3 Touch the button for the quality setting most appropriate for the loaded document. – For a document that contains only text, touch [Text]. – For a document that contains both text and photos, touch [Text/Photo] to display the Photo Type screen. Touch the button for the appropriate setting, and then touch [OK]. 4 Basic copy operations 4-68 bizhub C252 – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – For a document that contains photos, touch [Photo] to display the Photo Type screen. Touch the button for the appropriate setting, and then touch [OK]. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-69 – For a document that contains maps or faint text, touch [Special Quality] to display the Special Quality screen. Touch the button for the appropriate setting, and then touch [OK]. The Quality/Density screen appears again. 4 Basic copy operations 4-70 bizhub C252 4.10 Specifying the density settings The density can be adjusted to print a copy that is darker or lighter than the current print result. The following three density adjustments are available. The following procedures describe how to specify the density settings. Density Settings Description Density The density of the print image can be adjusted to one of nine levels. Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level. Touch [Std.] to select the middle setting of the nine levels. Background Removal The density of the background color of the document can be adjusted to one of nine levels. Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the background density is lightened or darkened by one level. Touch [Std.] to select the seventh setting from the "Light" end. Touch [Auto] to automatically adjust the level of the background density according to the document being copied. Text Enhancement Select one of nine settings for the reproduction quality of text when copying documents consisting of text that overlaps images such as illustrations or graphs (text with a background). Each time [Lighter Text] or [Darker Text] is touched, the text density is lightened or darkened by one level. To emphasize the text on the background, touch [Darker Text] to adjust the setting toward +. To de-emphasize the text on the background, touch [Lighter Text] to adjust the setting toward –. Touch [Std.] to select the middle setting of the nine levels. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-71 Adjusting the print density (Density settings) 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Quality/Density]. The Quality/Density screen appears. 2 Touch [Change] under "Density". The Density screen appears. 4 Basic copy operations 4-72 bizhub C252 3 Select the desired Density setting. – Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level. – To select the center setting (default setting), touch [Std.]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Touch [OK]. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-73 Adjusting the background density (Background Removal settings) 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Quality/Density]. The Quality/Density screen appears. 2 Touch [Change] under "Background Removal". The Background Removal screen appears. 4 Basic copy operations 4-74 bizhub C252 3 Select the desired background density setting. – Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level. – To select the third setting from the right (default setting), touch [Std.]. – Touch [Auto] to automatically adjust the level of the background density according to the document being copied. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Touch [OK]. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-75 Adjusting the reproduction quality of text 0 The default setting is "0". 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Quality/Density]. The Quality/Density screen appears. 2 Touch [Text Enhancement]. The Text Enhancement screen appears. 4 Basic copy operations 4-76 bizhub C252 3 Select the desired text density setting. – Each time [Lighter Text] or [Darker Text] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level. – Touch [Std.] to select the middle setting ("0") of the nine levels. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Touch [OK]. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-77 4.11 Selecting a combine originals setting Document images of multiple pages (2, 4 or 8 pages) can be combined and printed on a single page, reducing paper use. ! Detail When a Combine Originals setting is selected, the auto display zoom ratio is selected, and the document image is copied at a reduced size. The auto display zoom ratios for each setting are listed below. 2 in 1: e0.707 4 in 1: e0.500 8 in 1: e0.353 2 Note The default setting is the Auto Display Zoom Ratio. By using the "Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet" parameter in Utility mode, the machine can be set so that the auto display zoom ratios are not recalled. For details, refer to "Copier setting" on page 13-33. 4 Basic copy operations 4-78 bizhub C252 The following three Combine Originals settings are available. Combine Originals Setting Description 2 in 1 Select this setting to print two document pages on one page. 4 in 1 Select this setting to print four document pages on one page. The page arrangement (Numbering Direction settings) can be specified. 8 in 1 Select this setting to print eight document pages on one page. The page arrangement (Numbering Direction settings) can be specified. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-79 The following procedure describes how to select a Combine Originals setting. Copying multiple document pages onto a single page (Combine Originals) 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Combine Originals]. The Combine Originals and Original settings screen appears. 2 Select the desired combination of pages. – Select the page arrangement according to the orientation and number of pages. If "4 in 1" or "8 in 1" was selected, the page arrangement for "Vertical" and "Horizontal" can be viewed in the sub display area. However, this appears only if the "Sub Screen Display Type" parameter in Utility mode is set to "Setting value". 4 Basic copy operations 4-80 bizhub C252 – If "4 in 1" or "8 in 1" was selected, touch [Horizontal] or [Vertical] to specify the page arrangement. – To cancel the setting, touch the button again to deselect it. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-81 4.12 Selecting finishing settings Various settings are available for sorting and finishing copies when they are fed into the copy exit tray. 2 Note The factory default setting is "Group". ! Detail If no finisher is installed and the following conditions are met, printed copies can be fed out and sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern. A4- or B5-size paper is used. Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray. The "Auto Paper Select" setting is selected. The "Auto Paper Select" setting is not selected when the "Mixed Original" setting is selected. 2 Note From Administrator mode, the machine can be set so that copies are fed out without being shifted when the finisher FS-514 is installed. As a factory default, "Offset by Each Job Setting" is set to "ON". For details on specifying the setting for offset feeding when the finisher FS-514 is installed, refer to "System setting" on page 13-38. 4 Basic copy operations 4-82 bizhub C252 The following five Finishing settings are available. Finishing Setting Description Sort Select this setting to separate each set of a multi-page document (collated). Group Select this setting to separate the copies of each page in a multi-page document (uncollated). Offset If the sorting conditions are met, printed copies are fed out and sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern. The copies are fed out and stacked on top of each other with each set shifted to separate it. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-83 The following procedures describe how to select Finishing settings. 2 Note The Staple settings and Punch settings differ depending on the installed finisher. Available Staple and Punch settings Staple Select one of these settings to bind the copies with a staple in the corner or with two staples. Punch Select this setting to punch holes (4 holes) in the copies for filing them. Finishing Setting Description Finisher FS-603 Finisher FS-501 Finisher FS-514 Staple settings" Corner" & "2 Position" o — o Staple setting "Corner" o o o Punch setting With punch kit PK-501 installed o — With punch kit PK-510 installed o 4 Basic copy operations 4-84 bizhub C252 Separating copies by sets (“Sort” setting) 0 The factory default setting is "Group". 0 If "Offset" is selected while no finisher is installed, printed copies will be fed out and sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern if the following conditions are met. 0 A4- or B5-size paper is used. 0 Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray. 0 The "Auto Paper Select" setting is selected. 0 The "Auto Paper Select" setting is not selected when the "Mixed Original" setting is selected. 0 If "Offset" is selected while a finisher is installed, printed copies are fed out and stacked on top of each other with each set shifted to separate it. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 2 Touch [Sort]. – To separate each set of copies, touch [Offset]. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-85 – To specify the output tray, touch the button for the desired tray under "Output Tray". 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 4 Basic copy operations 4-86 bizhub C252 Separating copies by pages (“Group” setting) 0 The default setting is "Group". 0 If "Offset" is selected while no finisher is installed, printed copies will be fed out and sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern if the following conditions are met. 0 A4- or B5-size paper is used. 0 Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray. 0 The "Auto Paper Select" setting is selected. 0 The "Auto Paper Select" setting is not selected when the "Mixed Original" setting is selected. 0 If "Offset" is selected while a finisher is installed, printed copies are fed out and stacked on top of each other with each set shifted to separate it. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-87 2 Touch [Group]. – To separate each set of pages, touch [Offset]. – To specify the output tray, touch the button for the desired tray under "Output Tray". 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. 4 Basic copy operations 4-88 bizhub C252 Stapling copies (Staple settings) Copies can be fed out stapled either in the corner or at two places. When Finisher FS-603 is installed Paper Weight Paper Size Loading Capacity (detected with either measurement) 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 A4 w/v, B5 w/v 1,000 sheets 150 mm A3 w, B4 w 500 sheets 75 mm Number of Bound Pages Maximum Number of Sets One place towards the back One place towards the front Two places A4 w or smaller 2 sheets 100 sets 40 sets 40 sets 3 to 5 sheets 80 sets 40 sets 40 sets 6 to 10 sheets 60 sets 40 sets 40 sets 11 to 20 sheets 30 sets 30 sets 30 sets 21 to 30 sheets 30 sets 30 sets 30 sets 31 to 50 sheets 30 sets/1,000 sheets 30 sets/1,000 sheets 30 sets/1,000 sheets B4 w or larger 2 sheets 100 sets 50 sets 50 sets 3 to 5 sheets 80 sets 40 sets 40 sets 6 to 10 sheets 40 sets 40 sets 40 sets 11 to 20 sheets 30 sets/1,000 sheets 30 sets/1,000 sheets 30 sets/1,000 sheets 21 to 25 sheets 30 sets/1,000 sheets 30 sets/1,000 sheets 30 sets/1,000 sheets Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-89 When Finisher FS-501 is installed ! Detail In order for the copies to be stapled, all of the following conditions must be met. The paper width must be between 182 mm and 297 mm. The paper length must be between 182 mm and 432 mm. If the "Mixed Original" setting is selected, all copies must have the same paper width. If a Staple setting is selected, the "Sort" setting is automatically selected. A Staple setting cannot be used together with the "Offset" setting. If a Staple setting is to be selected, select the orientation in which the document is positioned and the orientation of the page to be stapled, otherwise the copies may not be stapled as desired. For details on specifying the document orientation, refer to "Selecting the document orientation (Original Direction settings)" on page 4-28. Paper Weight Paper Size Loading Capacity (detected with either measurement) 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 A4 w/v, B5 w/v 1,000 sheets 150 mm A3 w, B4 w 500 sheets 75 mm Number of Bound Pages Maximum Number of Sets 2 sheets 100 sets 200 sheets 3 to 5 sheets 80 sets 400 sheets 6 to 10 sheets 60 sets 600 sheets 11 to 20 sheets 40 sets 800 sheets 21 to 30 sheets 33 sets 1,000 sheets 4 Basic copy operations 4-90 bizhub C252 When Finisher FS-514 is installed Examples of the possible number of bound pages - 50 sheets of 90 g/m2 paper - 2 sheets of 209 g/m2 paper + 48 sheets of 90 g/m2 paper - Maximum of 30 sheets of 91 to 150 g/m2 paper ! Detail In order for the copies to be stapled, all of the following conditions must be met. The paper width must be between 182 mm and 297 mm. The paper length must be between 148.5 mm and 431.8 mm. If the "Mixed Original" setting is selected, all copies must have the same paper width. If a Staple setting is selected, the "Sort" setting is automatically selected. A Staple setting cannot be used together with the "Offset" setting. If a Staple setting is to be selected, select the orientation in which the original is positioned and the orientation of the page to be stapled, otherwise the copies may not be stapled as desired. For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the document orientation (Original Direction settings)" on page 4-28. Tray Paper Weight Paper Size Loading Capacity Finishing tray 1 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 A3 w to A5 v 32 mm 91 g/m2 to 120 g/m2 Finishing tray 2 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 A3 w to A5 v A4 w or less: 132 mm B4 w or more: 64.5 mm 91 g/m2 to 120 g/m2 Optional finishing tray 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 A3 w to A5 v 24 mm 91 g/m2 to 120 g/m2 Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-91 To bind copies with staples 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 2 Under "Staple", touch either [Corner] or [2 Position]. – To cancel the Staple settings, touch [Corner] or [2 Position] again to deselect it. [2 Position] is available only if finisher FS-603 or finisher FS-514 is installed. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – To specify the output tray, touch the button for the desired tray under "Output Tray". 4 Basic copy operations 4-92 bizhub C252 3 Touch [Position], and then touch the button for the desired position. – Touch [Auto] to automatically determine the stapling position according to the orientation of the loaded document. If the document length is 297 mm or less, the long side of the paper is stapled. If the document length is more than 297 mm, the short side of the paper is stapled. – If "Auto" is selected, the stapling position is set at the top or at the left. – To cancel changes to the stapling position, touch [Cancel]. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-93 Punching holes in copies (Punch settings) ! Detail In order for holes to be punched in the copies, all of the following conditions must be met. The paper width must be between 280 mm and 297 mm. The paper length must be between 182 mm and 432 mm. If the "Mixed Original" setting is selected, all copies must have the same paper width. If a Punch setting is to be selected, select the orientation in which the document is positioned. If an Original Direction setting is not selected, holes may not be punched in the copies as desired. For details on specifying the document orientation, refer to "Selecting the document orientation (Original Direction settings)" on page 4-28. 2 Note Holes can be punched in the paper that is fed out if punch kit PK-501 is installed on optional finisher FS-603 or punch kit PK-510 is installed on optional finisher FS-514. Paper Weight Paper Size 60 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 A3 w, A4 v 4 Basic copy operations 4-94 bizhub C252 To punch holes in copies 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing]. The Finishing screen appears. 2 Touch [4holes]. – To cancel the Punch setting, touch [4holes] again to deselect it. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – To specify the output tray, touch the button for the desired tray under "Output Tray". Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-95 3 Touch [Position], and then touch the button for the desired position. – Touch [Auto] to automatically determine the position of the punched holes according to the orientation of the loaded document. If the document length is 297 mm or less, the holes are punched along the long side of the paper. If the document length is more than 297 mm, the holes are punched along the short side of the paper. – If "Auto" is selected, the punched hole position is set at the top or at the left. – To cancel changes to the punched hole position, touch [Cancel]. 4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. 4 Basic copy operations 4-96 bizhub C252 4.13 Specifying center binding The paper that is fed out can be folded in half and stapled at two places along the vertical center. “Center Staple” + “Fold” settings (folded in half and stapled at the center in two places) “Fold” setting (folded in half) Document (The “Booklet” function is automatically set.) “Center Staple” setting (stapled at the center in two places) Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-97 When Finisher FS-603 is installed * The number of sheets that can be bound together differs depending on the paper weight. 64 g/m2 paper: 15 sheets 80 g/m2 paper: 10 sheets ! Detail In order for copies to be bound at the center, all of the following conditions must be met. The paper width must be between 210 mm and 297 mm. The paper length must be between 279 mm and 432 mm. Paper Weight Paper Size Number of Bound Pages 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 A3 w, B4 w, A4 w 2 sheets to 15 sheets* Number of Bound Pages Maximum Number of Sets 2 sheets to 5 sheets 20 sets 6 sheets to 10 sheets 10 sets 11 sheets to 15 sheets* 10 sets 4 Basic copy operations 4-98 bizhub C252 When Finisher FS-514 is installed Examples of the possible number of bound pages - 2 to 15 sheets of 90 g/m2 paper (maximum of 60 pages) - 1 sheet of 50 to 209 g/m2 paper + 14 sheets of 50 to 90 g/m2 paper (maximum of 60 pages) - Maximum of 13 sheets of 91 to 120 g/m2 paper - Maximum of 10 sheets of 121 to 150 g/m2 paper - Maximum of 8 sheets of 151 to 209 g/m2 paper ! Detail In order for copies to be bound at the center or folded in half, all of the following conditions must be met. The paper width must be between 182 mm and 297 mm. The paper length must be between 257 mm and 431.8 mm. 2 Note The "Fold & Staple" setting is available when finisher FS-603 is installed or if the saddle stitcher is installed on optional finisher FS-514. The "Fold" setting is available when the saddle stitcher is installed on optional finisher FS-514. Paper Weight Paper Size Loading Capacity (detected in either measurement) 50 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 B5 w, A4 w, B4 w, or A3 w 200 sheets or 20 sets 91 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 — Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-99 To bind copies at the center (“Fold & Staple”): Finisher FS-603 0 When the "Fold & Staple" setting is selected, the following default settings are automatically selected. 1%2", "Sort", "Booklet", Auto display zoom ratio when a Booklet setting is selected (e0.707) 0 If "Yes" is selected under "Center Erase", an area of 10 mm along the binding is erased. 0 If paper misfeeds often occur when "No" is selected under "Center Erase", select "Yes" to reduce the number of paper misfeeds. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Fold & Staple]. The Center Erase screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the desired Center Erase setting. – To erase the area along the center, touch [Yes]. To not erase the area along the center, touch [No]. – To cancel the "Fold & Staple" setting, touch [OFF]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Basic copy operations 4-100 bizhub C252 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-101 To bind copies at the center (“Fold & Staple”): Finisher FS-514 0 When the "Fold & Staple" setting is selected, the following default settings are automatically selected. "1%2", "Sort", "Booklet", Auto display zoom ratio when a Booklet setting is selected (e0.707) 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Fold & Staple]. The Center Erase screen appears. 2 Specify the desired center binding and folding settings. – To staple copies at the center in two places, touch [Center Staple]. – To fold copies in half, touch [Fold]. – To fold copies in half and staple them at the center in two places, touch [Center Staple] and [Fold]. – To cancel the "Fold & Staple" setting, touch [OFF]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Basic copy operations 4-102 bizhub C252 3 Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-103 4.14 Scanning the next document to be copied while a copy job is being printed (next job reservation) The settings for the next copy job can be specified and the document can be scanned while a copy operation is being performed so that it can be printed once the current copy operation is finished. To reserve a copy job 0 Up to 61 copy jobs, including the current copy job, can be reserved. 0 A copy job can be reserved after scanning of the loaded document is finished. A copy job cannot be reserved while a document is being scanned. 0 If Utility Setting parameter "Copy Operating Screen" is set to "ON", [Program Next Job] appears. Touch [Program Next Job], and then specify the copy settings for the next copy job. For details on specifying the "Copy Operating Screen" parameter, refer to "Display setting" on page 13-30. 0 For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 0 To cancel a reserved copy job, display the Basic screen for the reserved copy job, and then press the [Stop] key. For details, refer to "Performing operations on jobs" on page 12-8. 1 Press the [Start] key to begin scanning and outputting the current copy job. – The Basic screen for reserving a copy job appears. 4 Basic copy operations 4-104 bizhub C252 2 When the message "Ready to accept another job." appears, copy settings can be specified for the next copy job. 3 Press the [Start] key. 4 After the current copy job is finished, the next copy job begins. – When the current copy job is finished, the copy settings for the next copy job are automatically displayed and the copy operation begins. Basic copy operations 4 bizhub C252 4-105 4.15 Stopping scanning/printing The following procedure describes how to stop scanning the document and stop the printing operation. To stop scanning/printing 0 If a document is being scanned for a job, pressing the [Stop] key stops scanning. 0 For details on deleting a stopped job, refer to "Deleting a stopped job" on page 4-106. 1 Press the [Stop] key while a document is being scanned or a job is being printed. Scanning/printing stops. The Stopped Jobs screen appears. 2 To continue all stopped jobs, press the [Start] key 4 Basic copy operations 4-106 bizhub C252 4.16 Deleting a stopped job The following procedure describes how to delete a stopped job. To delete a stopped job 0 For details on stopping a job being printed, refer to "Stopping scanning/printing" on page 4-105. 0 Select only one job at a time to be deleted. 0 To continue the stopped job, press the [Start] key. 1 Press the [Stop] key while a document is being scanned or a job is being printed. Scanning/printing stops. The Stopped Jobs screen appears. 2 Select the job to be deleted, and then touch [Delete]. The selected job is deleted. 5 Additional copy operations Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-3 5 Additional copy operations 5.1 Checking the copy settings (Mode Check) From the Mode Check screens, the current copy settings can be checked and changed if desired. To check the settings 1 Press the [Mode Check] key. 5 Additional copy operations 5-4 bizhub C252 The Mode Check screen appears. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-5 2 After checking the settings, touch [Job End] or press the [Mode Check] key. The Basic screen appears again. ! Detail There are four Mode Check screens. The number of the currently displayed screen appears to the right of the screen title. To display the previous screen, touch [ Back]. To display the next screen, touch [Fwd. ]. The buttons for functions where the setting has been changed from the default appear selected. To change the settings 1 Press the [Mode Check] key. 2 Touch [ Back] or [Fwd. ] until the button for the function to be changed is displayed. 3 Touch the button for the setting that you wish to change. The screen for specifying the setting appears. 4 Follow the appropriate procedure to change the setting. 5 Additional copy operations 5-6 bizhub C252 5.2 Printing a proof copy to be checked (Proof Copy) Before printing a large number of copies, a single proof copy can first be printed to be checked. This prevents copy errors from occurring. To make test prints 1 Position the document to be copied. (Refer to page 4-9 for details.) 2 Select the desired copy settings. 3 Press the [Proof Copy] key. A single proof copy is printed. 4 Check the sample copy. – If the sample copy was printed as desired, skip to step 8. – To change the copy settings, continue with step 5. 5 Touch [Change Setting] in the screen that appeared when the sample copy is printed. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-7 6 In the Change Job Setting screen, change the copy settings as desired, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel Change]. ? Why is the button for the setting that I wish to change not displayed? The copy setting cannot be changed. % If the copy settings cannot be changed, stop printing the proof copy. Then, press the [Reset] key to cancel the copy settings, and then specify the desired settings. 7 Press the [Proof Copy] key to print another sample copy. – If copying stops while the proof copy screen is displayed after the proof copy was printed, press the [Reset] key. Otherwise, from the list of jobs on the sub display area, select the proof copy job that stopped, and then touch [Delete]. In the screen that appears, requesting confirmation to delete the copy program, touch [Yes]. 5 Additional copy operations 5-8 bizhub C252 – If an automatic system reset operation is performed while the proof copy for a job is being checked, that job is stored in the memory. – If the "System Auto Reset" parameter is set to "OFF", the job is added to the Held Jobs list after no job is performed for one minute. – To stop the proof copy while scanning or printing, perform the operation described in "Stopping scanning/printing" on page 4-105. – If multiple copies have been specified, another sample copy can be printed. – The number under "# of Sets" in the Change Setting screen is the number of copies that will be printed when [Print] is touched. – The number under "Number of Sets" in the screen that appeared when a sample copy is printed indicates the number of copies that are sample copies/total number of copies specified. – The number under "Number of Pages" in the screen that appeared when a sample copy is printed indicates the number of copies that are sample copies/the number of pages in the sample copy. 8 Touch [Print]. The remaining copies are queued as a copy job. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-9 5.3 Interrupting a copy job (Interrupt mode) The current jobs can be temporarily interrupted so a document can be copied with different copy settings. This is convenient for quickly making a copy. ! Detail For details on making a copy after printing of the current job is finished, refer to "To increase priority for printing" on page 12-19. To interrupt a copy job 1 Position the document to be copied. (For details, refer to page 4-9.) 2 Press the [Interrupt] key. – If a job is being printed, the message "Job is stopping." appears. The indicator on the [Interrupt] key lights up in green and printing of the current job stops. ? What settings are selected when the [Interrupt] key is pressed? % When the [Interrupt] key is pressed, all functions and settings are reset to their defaults. ? Why is the [Interrupt] key not available? % The [Interrupt] key cannot be pressed while a document is being scanned. 3 Select the desired copy settings. 4 Press the [Start] key. Printing begins for the job that the previous job was interrupted for. 5 After the interrupting job is finished printing, press the [Interrupt] key. The indicator on the [Interrupt] key goes off, and Interrupt mode is canceled. The settings return to those specified before printing was interrupted. 5 Additional copy operations 5-10 bizhub C252 2 Note If the interrupting job is cancelled, printing for the interrupted job automatically restarts. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-11 5.4 Registering copy programs (Mode Memory) Up to 15 copy programs can be registered. A name of up to 16 characters can be specified for the registered copy programs. To store a copy program 1 Using the touch panel buttons and control panel keys, specify the copy settings to be registered in the copy program. ? Can the current settings be checked? % To check the currently specified copy settings, press the [Mode Check] key. For details, refer to "Checking the copy settings (Mode Check)" on page 5-3. 2 Press the [Mode Memory] key. The Recall Copy Program screen appears. 3 Touch [Program Registration]. The Program Name screen appears. ? Why is [Program Registration] not available? % If 15 copy programs have been registered, delete an unnecessary copy program. For details on deleting copy programs, refer to "To delete a copy program" on page 5-14. 5 Additional copy operations 5-12 bizhub C252 4 Use the keyboard that appears in the touch panel to type in the name of the copy program. – A name of up to 16 characters can be specified for the registered copy program. (For details, refer to page 14-3.) 5 After typing in the name, touch [OK]. – The copy program can be given the same name as a copy program that has already been registered. The Recall Copy Program screen appears again. The copy program is registered and a button with the entered copy program name appears. ? Can the copy program name be corrected? % To change the entered copy program name, touch the button whose name is to be changed, and then touch [Edit Name]. The Edit Name screen appears. Return to step 4. ? Can the specified settings for a copy program be checked? % To check the programmed copy settings, touch the button for the desired copy program, and then touch [Check Job]. For details, refer to "Copying with programmed copy settings (Mode Memory)" on page 5-15. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-13 ? How is job deleted? % Touch the button for the desired copy program, and then touch [Del.]. In the screen that appears, requesting confirmation to delete the copy program, touch [Yes] to delete the selected copy program. 6 Touch [OK] or [Cancel]. – To return to the Basic screen, press the [Mode Memory] key. ! Detail Copy programs cannot be changed. If a copy program is selected where the "Restrict Access to Saved Program Jobs" parameter has been set, [Edit Name] and [Del.] do not appear. For details, refer to "System setting" on page 13-38. To stop registering the program, press the [Reset] key or the [Mode Memory] key. No matter which screen is displayed, the registration is cancelled. Otherwise, continue to touch [Cancel] until the Basic screen is displayed. 5 Additional copy operations 5-14 bizhub C252 To delete a copy program 1 In the Recall Copy Program screen, touch the button for the copy program to be deleted. 2 Touch [Del.]. A message appears, requesting confirmation to delete the copy program. 3 Touch [Yes]. The Recall Copy Program screen appears again. The copy settings registered in the copy program are erased. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-15 5.5 Copying with programmed copy settings (Mode Memory) To recall a stored job Programmed copy settings can be recalled to be used again for copying. 1 Position the document to be copied. (For details, refer to page 4-9.) 2 Press the [Mode Memory] key. The Recall Copy Program screen appears. 3 Touch the button for the copy program registered with the desired copy settings. – If the copy settings in the selected copy program are not to be checked, skip to step 8. 5 Additional copy operations 5-16 bizhub C252 4 Touch [Check Job]. The Mode Check screens for the copy job appear. The buttons for functions where the setting has been changed from the default appear selected. 5 Check the copy settings registered with the selected copy program. 6 Touch [Job End]. The Recall Copy Program screen appears again. ? Can different settings be displayed? % To display the previous screen, touch [ Back]. To display the next screen, touch [Fwd. ]. 7 Again touch the button for the program with the desired copy settings. – If [OK] is touched with no copy program selected, the Basic screen appears again without a copy program recalled. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-17 8 Touch [OK]. The programmed copy settings are recalled and the Basic screen appears again. 9 Press the [Start] key. Copying begins with the recalled copy settings. 2 Note To stop recalling the copy program, press the [Reset] key or the [Mode Memory] key, or touch [Cancel]. The copy settings cannot be changed from the Mode Check screens. 5 Additional copy operations 5-18 bizhub C252 5.6 Displaying function descriptions (Help) Descriptions of the various functions and details of operations can be viewed. There are two methods for displaying the Help screens. - Main Help Menu screen (from the Basic screen) - Setting Help screens (from screens other than the Basic screen) Overview of Help Screens The Help feature provides of the following menus. Main Help Menu screen (1st level) Item Description [Copy], [Scan], [Fax], [Box], [Job List], [Banner Printing] Displays the Help menu for the corresponding mode [Name and function of each part] Displays the Help menu for the name and function of each part Use to check the description of the main unit and its options. [Service/Administrator Information] Displays the name, extension number and e-mail address of the administrator Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-19 ! Detail Items in the Main Help Menu and the Help Menu screens can be selected by touching the button or by pressing the key in the keypad for the number of the desired item. To display the next screen higher in the menu structure, touch [ ]. Touch [Exit] to quit the Help mode and return to the screen that was displayed before the [Help] key was pressed. Help Menu screen (2nd level) (Example: [Copy]) Item Description [Basic], [Combine Originals], [Quality/Density], [Application] Displays the first Help screen for each description [Functionality Map] Displays the Function Map screen, which contains a chart of the available functions and settings 5 Additional copy operations 5-20 bizhub C252 ! Detail The items displayed in the Help menu for the name and function of each part differ depending on the options that are installed. Help screens (3rd level) (Example: [Copy], then [Basic]) ! Detail The numbers to the right of the screen title ("1/4" in the previous screen) indicate the number of the currently displayed screen/total number of Help screens for the displayed item. To display the previous screen, touch [ Back]. To display the next screen, touch [Fwd. ]. To view detailed descriptions (in the 4th level of the Help screens), touch [Detail], if it appears in the screen. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-21 Function maps (Example: [Copy]) A chart of the available functions and settings are displayed in the function maps. Select an item from the chart for the Help screen that you wish to view. ! Detail There are six Function Map screens for Copy mode. The top number indicates the number of the six screens that is currently displayed. To display the previous screen, touch [ ]. To display the next screen, touch [ ]. Press the key in the keypad for the number of the desired item in the Function Map screen. To return to the Help Menu screen, touch [ ] in the Help screen displayed by selecting an item in a Function Map screen. 5 Additional copy operations 5-22 bizhub C252 To display the Main Help Menu screen When a Help screen can be displayed, appears in the upper-left corner of the screen. 0 The Help screens cannot be displayed when the following operations are being performed. While scanning, while printing, while printing a proof copy, during Enlarge Display mode, during Accessibility mode 0 While the Help screens are displayed, the following keys are not available. [Start], [Stop], [C] (clear), [Interrupt], [Proof Copy], [Access], [Mode Memory], [Enlarge Display], [Mode Check] 1 With the Basic screen displayed, press the [Help] key. The Main Help Menu screen appears. 2 Touch [Copy] or press the [1] key in the keypad. The Help Menu [Copy] screen appears. ? Is there more information about the buttons of the Help screens? % Refer to "Overview of Help Screens" on page 5-18. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-23 3 Touch the button for the desired information or press the key in the keypad for the number to the left of the desired information to display the corresponding Help screen. 4 After checking the Help information, touch [Exit] or press the [Help] key. The Basic screen appears again. 5 Additional copy operations 5-24 bizhub C252 To display the Help screen while specifying a setting Help can be displayed for the copy settings that are being specified. 1 Display the setting screen for the desired copy setting, and then press the [Help] key. A Help screen containing details of the functions and operations. ? Why is there no Help information for some functions in the Help Menu screen? % Depending on the displayed screen, there may be no Help information for some functions. ? Is there more information about the buttons of the Help screens? % Refer to "Overview of Help Screens" on page 5-18. 2 After checking the Help information, touch [Exit] or press the [Help] key. – To display the next screen higher in the menu structure than the displayed Help Menu screen, touch [ ]. The screen that was displayed before the [Help] key was pressed appears again. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-25 5.7 Specifying control panel settings (Accessibility mode) This section contains details on the procedures for specifying control panel settings and adjusting the touch panel. Displaying the Accessibility Setting Screen % Press the [Accessibility] key. The Accessibility Setting screen appears. To set the “Key Repeat Start/Interval Time” function The length of time until the value begins to change after a touch panel button is held down and the length of time for the value to change to the next number can be specified. The factory default setting for "Time To Start" is 0.8 second and the factory default setting for "Interval" is 0.3 second. 0 The settings specified for the "Key Repeat Start/Interval Time" function are only applied in the Enlarge Display mode. 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen. (To display the screen, refer to page 5-25) 2 Touch [Key Repeat Start/Interval Time] or press the [1] key in the keypad. 5 Additional copy operations 5-26 bizhub C252 The Key Repeat Start/Interval Time screen appears. 3 Touch [+] and [–] to specify the starting time and the interval for the key repeat feature. – Both settings can be set between 0.1 and 3.0 seconds in 0.1- second intervals. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Touch [OK]. The Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-27 2 Note The Enlarge Display mode is compatible with basic copy, scanning and fax functions. The function and setting names and the illustrations are displayed at a larger size so that they can be seen more easily. For details on the Enlarge Display mode, refer to the Enlarge Display Operations of the User manual. ! Detail To return to the Basic screen from the Accessibility Setting screen, press the [Accessibility] key or the [Reset] key. 5 Additional copy operations 5-28 bizhub C252 To set the “Enlarge Display Timer Setting” function When the automatic panel reset operation is performed, a message requesting confirmation to cancel Enlarge Display mode can be displayed. In addition, it is possible to specify the length of time that the message requesting confirmation to cancel Enlarge Display mode is displayed. The factory default setting is "OFF". 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen. (To display the screen, refer to page 5-25) 2 Touch [Enlarge Display Timer Setting] or press the [2] key in the keypad. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-29 The Enlarge Display Timer Setting screen appears. 3 Select the desired setting. – To not display the message requesting confirmation to cancel Enlarge Display mode, touch [OFF]. – To display the message requesting confirmation to cancel Enlarge Display mode, touch the button ([30 sec.], [60 sec.], [90 sec.] or [120 sec.]) for the length of time that the message is to be displayed. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Touch [OK]. The Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 5 Additional copy operations 5-30 bizhub C252 2 Note The Enlarge Display mode is compatible with basic copy, scanning and fax functions. The function and setting names and the illustrations are displayed at a larger size so that they can be seen more easily. For details on the Enlarge Display mode, refer to the Enlarge Display Operations of the User manual. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-31 To set the “Message Display Time” function It is possible to specify the length of time for displaying warning messages, which appear, for example, when an incorrect operation is performed. The factory default setting is "3 sec.". 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen. (To display the screen, refer to page 5-25) 2 Touch [Message Display Time] or press the [3] key in the keypad. The Message Display Time screen appears. 5 Additional copy operations 5-32 bizhub C252 3 Select setting for the desired amount of time that messages are displayed. – Select whether messages are displayed for 3 seconds or for 5 seconds. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Touch [OK]. The Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-33 To set the “Sound Setting” function Specify the sound that is produced when a key is pressed. In addition, you can set whether or not a sound is produced when a control panel key is pressed or a touch panel button is touched. The factory default setting for "Accept Sound Setting" is "ON". 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen. (To display the screen, refer to page 5-25) 2 Touch [Sound Setting] or press the [4] key in the keypad. The Sound Setting screen appears. 5 Additional copy operations 5-34 bizhub C252 3 Touch [Key Accept Sound/Key Refuse Sound] or press the [1] key in the keypad. The Key Accept Sound/Key Refuse Sound screen appears. 4 Specify the setting for "Accept Sound Setting". – To produce a sound, touch [ON]. To not produce a sound, touch [OFF]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-35 5 Touch [OK]. The Sound Setting screen appears again. 6 Touch [Close]. The Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 7 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 5 Additional copy operations 5-36 bizhub C252 To set the “Touch Panel Adj.” function If the touch panel buttons do not respond correctly, the position of buttons in the touch panel may not be correctly aligned with the position of the actual touch sensor and may need to be adjusted. 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen. (To display the screen, refer to page 5-25) 2 Touch [Touch Panel Adj.] or press the [5] key in the keypad. The Touch Panel Adjustment screen appears. ? Why does the machine not respond when [Touch Panel Adj.] is touched? The touch sensors are not aligned on the touch panel. % Press the [5] key in the keypad. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-37 3 Touch the four check points ( ), making sure that a sound is produced with each. – The check points ( ) can be touched in any order. – To reset the adjustment, press the [C] (clear) key, and then touch the four check points ( ). If the check points have been touched correctly, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in green. 4 Press the [Start] key. The touch panel is adjusted, and the Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note If the touch panel cannot be adjusted, contact the technical representative. ! Detail To cancel the touch panel adjustment, press the [Stop] key or the [Reset] key. 5 Additional copy operations 5-38 bizhub C252 To set the “Auto Reset Notification” function When the automatic panel reset operation is performed, a message can be displayed, requesting confirmation to reset the settings in Enlarge Display mode. In addition, it is possible to specify when the message is displayed, requesting confirmation to reset the settings in Enlarge Display mode. The factory default setting is "OFF". 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen. (To display the screen, refer to page 5-25) 2 Touch [Auto Reset Notification] or press the [6] key in the keypad. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-39 The Auto Reset Notification screen appears. 3 Touch the button for the desired display time. – To not display the message requesting confirmation to reset the settings in Enlarge Display mode, touch [OFF]. – To display the message requesting confirmation to reset the settings in Enlarge Display mode, touch the button ([30 sec.], [60 sec.], [90 sec.] or [120 sec.]) for the length of time that the message is to be displayed. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Touch [OK]. The Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 5 Touch [Close], or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 5 Additional copy operations 5-40 bizhub C252 2 Note The Enlarge Display mode is compatible with basic copy, scanning and fax functions. With the Enlarge Display mode, text and illustrations are displayed at a larger size so that they can be seen more easily. For details on the Enlarge Display mode, refer to the User manual [Enlarge Display Operations]. If the time setting is the same for the automatic panel reset operation and the automatic system reset operation, the display of the message requesting confirmation to cancel Enlarge Display mode is given priority and the message requesting confirmation to reset the settings in Enlarge Display mode is not displayed. Additional copy operations 5 bizhub C252 5-41 To set the “Enlarge Display Confirmation Screen” function When the [Enlarge Display] key is pressed to change the display of the screen, a message can be displayed, requesting confirmation to reset the settings to their defaults. The factory default setting is "No". 1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen. (To display the screen, refer to page 5-25) 2 Touch [Enlarge Display Confirmation Screen] or press the [7] key in the keypad. The Enlarge Display Confirmation Screen screen appears. 5 Additional copy operations 5-42 bizhub C252 3 Select whether or not the message is displayed. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 4 Touch [OK]. The Accessibility Setting screen appears again. 5 Touch [Close], or press the [Accessibility] key. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note The Enlarge Display mode is compatible with basic copy, scanning and fax functions. With the Enlarge Display mode, text and illustrations are displayed at a larger size so that they can be seen more easily. For details on the Enlarge Display mode, refer to the User manual [Enlarge Display Operations]. If [No] is touched in the message requesting confirmation to enter Enlarge Display mode, the screens are not changed. 6 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-3 6 Troubleshooting 6.1 When the message “malfunction detected.” appears (call technical representative) If a malfunction that cannot be corrected by the user occurred, the message "Malfunction detected. Please call your Technical Representative." appears. (call technical representative screen) The phone number and fax number for the usual technical representative appears in the center of the call technical representative screen. Display in Enlarge Display mode If a malfunction occurs, the screen shown below appears. 6 Troubleshooting 6-4 bizhub C252 Touch to display the message shown in the following illustration. Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-5 To call the technical representative 1 Write down the malfunction code (for example, C-0001) in the call technical representative screen. 2 Press the [Power] (auxiliary power) button to turn off the control panel. 3 Use the main power switch to turn off the machine. 4 Unplug the machine. 5 Contact the technical representative, and inform them of the malfunction code. 2 Reminder Since the machine may be damaged, contact the technical representative according to the procedure described above as soon as the call technical representative screen appears. 6 Troubleshooting 6-6 bizhub C252 6.2 When the message “Misfeed detected.” appears If a misfeed occurs during copying or printing, the message "Misfeed detected." appears and the location of the misfeed is indicated in the screen. (misfeed screen) At this time, copying and printing cannot continue until the misfeed is adequately cleared. Location of Paper misfeed A flashing “o” indicates the location of the paper misfeed. In addition, a lit “o” indicates areas where paper may have been misfed and that should be checked. Example: Screen when a paper misfeed occurs in a paper tray 2 Note The procedure for clearing a misfed paper differs depending on where the misfeed occurs. Determine the misfeed location by looking at the illustration displayed with the error message, and then clear the misfeed according to the appropriate procedure. Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-7 Display in Enlarge Display mode If a paper misfeed occurs, the screen shown below appears. Touch to display the message shown in the following illustration. 6 Troubleshooting 6-8 bizhub C252 Paper misfeed indications 1 2 3 4 5 6 11 7 9 10 8 No. Description 1 A paper misfeed in the ADF (p. 6-27) 2 A paper misfeed in the fusing unit (p. 6-19) 3 A paper misfeed in the main unit (p. 6-16) 4 A paper misfeed in the bypass tray (p. 6-10) 5 A paper misfeed in the LCT (p. 6-15) 6 A paper misfeed in finisher FS-501/job separator JS-601 (p. 6-31) 7 A paper misfeed in the automatic duplex unit (p. 6-11) 8 A paper misfeed in the 1st tray (p. 6-12) 9 A paper misfeed in the 2nd tray (p. 6-13) 10 A paper misfeed in the 3rd or 4th tray (p. 6-14) 11 A paper misfeed in finisher FS-603 (p. 6-35) Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-9 12 13 14 No. Description 12 A paper misfeed in the saddle stitcher (p. 6-44) 13 A paper misfeed in the mailbin (p. 6-42) 14 A paper misfeed in finisher FS-514 (p. 6-39) 6 Troubleshooting 6-10 bizhub C252 To clear a paper misfeed in the bypass tray 1 Remove all paper from the bypass tray. 2 If the misfed paper cannot be removed, open the upper right-side door, and then carefully pull out any misfed paper. 3 Close the upper right-side door. ! Detail For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 6-8. Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-11 To clear a paper misfeed in the automatic duplex unit 1 Open the automatic duplex unit door. 2 Carefully pull out any misfed paper. 3 Close the automatic duplex unit door. ! Detail For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 6-8. 6 Troubleshooting 6-12 bizhub C252 To clear a paper misfeed in the 1st tray 1 Pull up the upper right-side door release lever, and then open the upper right-side door. 2 Carefully pull out any misfed paper. 3 Close the upper right-side door. 4 Pull out the 1st tray, and then remove any misfed paper. 5 Close the 1st tray. 2 Reminder Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper take-up roller with your hands. ! Detail For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 6-8. Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-13 To clear a paper misfeed in the 2nd tray 1 Pull up the center right-side door release lever, and then open the center right-side door. 2 Carefully pull out any misfed paper. 3 Close the center right-side door. 4 Pull out the 2nd tray, and then remove any misfed paper. 5 Close the 2nd tray. 2 Reminder Be careful not to touch the film with your hands. 6 Troubleshooting 6-14 bizhub C252 To clear a paper misfeed in a paper tray (3rd or 4th tray) 1 Pull up the lower right-side door release lever, and then open the lower right-side door. 2 Carefully pull out any misfed paper. 3 Close the lower right-side door. 4 Pull out the paper tray, and then remove any misfed paper. 5 Close the paper tray. 2 Reminder Be careful not to touch the film. ! Detail For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 6-8. Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-15 To clear a paper misfeed in the LCT 1 Pull up the lower right-side door release lever, and then open the lower right-side door. 2 Carefully pull out any misfed paper. 3 Close the lower right-side door. 4 Press the tray release button, pull out the LCT, and then remove any misfed paper. 5 Close the LCT. 2 Reminder Be careful not to touch the film. ! Detail For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 6-8. 6 Troubleshooting 6-16 bizhub C252 To clear a paper misfeed in the right-side door 1 Pull out the paper tray being used, and then remove any paper remaining in the tray. 2 Load the paper into the paper tray again, and then close the tray. 3 Pull up the upper right-side door release lever, and then open the upper right-side door. 4 Open inside cover M1. Paper take-up roller M1 Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-17 5 Pull out any paper caught in the timing roller section. 7 CAUTION The area around the fusing unit is extremely hot. %Touching anything other than the indicated levers and dials may result in burns. If you get burnt, immediately cool the skin under cold water, and then seek professional medical attention. Timing roller Fusing unit 6 Troubleshooting 6-18 bizhub C252 2 Reminder If the paper is misfed as described below, contact your technical representative. The paper is wrapped around the timing roller. The paper is folded or shredded by the timing roller. Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper take-up roller (in the 1st tray) or the film (in the 2nd, 3rd and 4th trays and in the LCT) with your hands. Decreased copy quality may result if the surface of the image transfer belt or the image transfer roller is touched. Be careful not to touch the surface of the image transfer belt or the image transfer roller. ! Detail For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 6-8. Image transfer belt Image transfer roller Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-19 To clear a paper misfeed in the fusing unit 1 Pull up the upper right-side door release lever, and then open the upper right-side door. 2 Push up the fusing unit cover, and then pull out any misfed paper. 3 Push up the M2 release levers. Since the M2 release levers may be difficult to move, push them up forcefully one at a time. – Do not manually return the M2 release levers to their original positions. They will return to their original positions when the fusing unit cover is closed. – When returning the M2 release levers to their original positions, do not move them with your hand. 4 Pull out any misfed paper. 6 Troubleshooting 6-20 bizhub C252 5 Pull inside cover M3 toward you to open it, and then pull out any paper caught in the fusing unit. 6 Close the fusing unit cover. – When closing the fusing unit cover, also return the M2 release levers to their original positions. 7 Close the upper right-side door. Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-21 7 CAUTION The area around the fusing unit is extremely hot. %Touching anything other than the indicated levers and dials may result in burns. If you get burnt, immediately cool the skin under cold water, and then seek professional medical attention. 2 Reminder If the paper is misfed as described below, contact your technical representative. The paper is wrapped around the roller in the fusing unit. The paper is folded or shredded by the roller in the fusing unit. The paper that was removed tore and partly remains in the fusing unit. Decreased copy quality may result if the surface of the image transfer belt or the image transfer roller is touched. Be careful not to touch the surface of the image transfer belt or the image transfer roller. ! Detail For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 6-8. Fusing unit Image transfer belt Image transfer roller 6 Troubleshooting 6-22 bizhub C252 To clear a banner paper misfeed 1 Pull up the upper right-side door release lever, and then open the upper right-side door. – If the end of the paper cannot be seen or cannot be grabbed, pull out the paper in the direction of the arrow. 2 Open inside cover M1. M1 Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-23 3 Pull out any paper caught in the timing roller section. 4 Push up the M2 release levers. Since the M2 release levers may be difficult to move, push them up forcefully one at a time. – Do not manually return the M2 release levers to their original positions. They will return to their original positions when the fusing unit cover is closed. – When returning the M2 release levers to their original positions, do not move them with your hand. 5 Push up the fusing unit cover, and then pull out any misfed paper. Timing roller 6 Troubleshooting 6-24 bizhub C252 6 Pull out any misfed paper. 7 Pull inside cover M3 toward you to open it, and then pull out any paper caught in the fusing unit. 8 Close the fusing unit cover. – When closing the fusing unit cover, also return the M2 release levers to their original positions. 9 Close the upper right-side door. Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-25 7 CAUTION The area around the fusing unit is extremely hot. %Touching anything other than the indicated levers and dials may result in burns. If you get burnt, immediately cool the skin under cold water, and then seek professional medical attention. Fusing unit 6 Troubleshooting 6-26 bizhub C252 2 Reminder If the paper is misfed as described below, contact your technical representative. The paper is wrapped around the roller in the fusing unit. The paper is folded or shredded by the roller in the fusing unit. The paper that was removed tore and partly remains in the fusing unit. 2 Reminder Decreased copy quality may result if the surface of the image transfer belt or the image transfer roller is touched. Be careful not to touch the surface of the image transfer belt or the image transfer roller. Image transfer belt Image transfer roller Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-27 To clear a paper misfeed in the ADF 7 CAUTION Precaution when lowering the document exit tray and the document feed tray. % While lowering the document exit tray and the document feed tray, do not press on the document exit tray support or the document feed tray support, otherwise your hand may be pinched by the trays. 1 Open the misfeed-clearing cover on the left side of the ADF, and then carefully pull out any documents from the document feed tray. 2 Open the misfeed-clearing cover on the right side of the ADF. Turn the dial counterclockwise to feed out any misfed documents, and then carefully pull out the documents. 3 Push down on the guide. Turn the dial to feed out any misfed documents, and then carefully pull out the documents. Guide 6 Troubleshooting 6-28 bizhub C252 4 Carefully open the document exit tray and the document feed tray as far as possible. – Make sure that the trays remain open with the document exit tray support and the document feed tray support locked into place. 5 Turn the dial to feed out any misfed documents, and then carefully pull out the documents. 6 Lower the document exit tray and the document feed tray. Document Document feed tray support exit tray support Document Document feed tray support exit tray support Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-29 7 Open the ADF, and then carefully pull out any misfed documents. 8 Remove any documents on the original glass, and then close the ADF. 9 Close the left-side and right-side misfeed-clearing covers. 10 Reload the documents according to the instructions that appear on the touch panel. 6 Troubleshooting 6-30 bizhub C252 ! Detail For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 6-8. Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-31 To clear a paper misfeed in finisher FS-501 1 Slide the finisher away from the machine. 2 Open the horizontal transport unit cover, and then remove any misfed paper. 3 Close the horizontal transport unit cover. 4 Open front door FN4. 6 Troubleshooting 6-32 bizhub C252 5 Turn misfeed-clearing dials FN5 clockwise at the same time. ? What should be done if the paper can be seen from the exit tray? % Turn misfeed-clearing dials FN5 counterclockwise at the same time to feed out any misfed paper. 6 Close front door FN4. 7 While holding misfeed-clearing guide FN7 open, pull out any misfed paper. 8 Open upper cover FN1. 9 Open misfeed-clearing guide FN2, and then pull out any misfed paper. Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-33 10 While holding misfeed-clearing guide FN3 open, pull out any misfed paper. 11 Close upper cover FN1. 12 If job separator JS-601 is installed: Open the job separator cover. – If job separator JS-601 is not installed, skip to step 15. 13 Remove any misfed paper. 14 Close the job separator cover. 15 While holding misfeed-clearing guide FN6 open, pull out any misfed paper. 6 Troubleshooting 6-34 bizhub C252 16 Slide the finisher back against the machine. 7 CAUTION Metallic parts on the inside of the upper cover are very hot. %Touching any part other than the paper may result in burns. ! Detail For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 6-8. Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-35 To clear a paper misfeed in finisher FS-603 1 Slide the finisher away from the machine. 2 Open the horizontal transport unit cover, and then remove any misfed paper. 3 Close the horizontal transport unit cover. 4 Open the front door of the finisher. 6 Troubleshooting 6-36 bizhub C252 5 Turn misfeed-clearing dial 1 clockwise until the removal indicator is completely blue. ? What should be done if the misfeed-clearing dial 1 is turned too far? % Turn the misfeed-clearing dial 1 counterclockwise to finely adjust it. 6 Open the upper door of the finisher, and then pull out any paper in the feed section. 7 Close the upper door. 8 Remove all paper fed into the exit tray 1. Removal indicator Misfeedclearing dial 1 Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-37 9 Open the misfeed-clearing guide for the finisher, and then remove any misfed paper. 10 Open the right-side door, and then pull out any misfed paper in the transport section. 11 If the paper could not be removed in step 10, turn the misfeed-clearing dial in the folding section clockwise. Feed the paper into the exit tray 2, and then pull it out. 12 Close the front door of the finisher. Misfeed-clearing dial in the folding section 6 Troubleshooting 6-38 bizhub C252 13 Slide the finisher back against the machine. 2 Reminder If the message "Misfeed detected." appears, be sure to open the front door, turn the misfeed-clearing dial until the removal indicator is completely blue, and then remove the paper. If the paper is pulled out with too much force, the finisher may be damaged. Do not pull paper remaining in the transfer unit out with too much force, otherwise the folding unit may be damaged. Be careful that your fingers are not pinched when the front door is closed. For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 6-8. Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-39 To clear a paper misfeed in the finisher FS-514 1 Pull the finisher release lever 1 to unlock the finisher. 2 Grab the finisher at "2", and then slide the finisher away from the main unit. – To move the finisher away from the main unit, be sure to grab it at "2". Do not grab the mailbins or saddle stitcher to move the finisher, otherwise they may be damaged. 3 Open the front door. 4 Raise lever FN1, turn dial FN2, and then pull out any paper. 1 2 FN1 FN2 6 Troubleshooting 6-40 bizhub C252 5 Lower guide FN3, and then pull out any paper. – If the punch kit is installed, pull out the hole-punch waste container FN3.1. 6 Return guide FN3 to its original position. – If the punch kit is installed, insert hole-punch waste container FN3.1 in its original position. 7 Turn dial FN4 to feed the paper, open the transport unit cover, and then pull out any paper. FN3 FN3.1 FN4 Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-41 8 Turn dial FN5 or dial FN6, and then pull out any paper. 9 Return the finisher to its original position. – When returning the finisher to its original position, do not grab the handle on the front door, the control panel, the mailbins, or the saddle stitcher. ! Detail For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 6-8. FN6 FN5 6 Troubleshooting 6-42 bizhub C252 To clear a paper misfeed in the mailbin 1 Open the front door. 2 Turn dial FN5 or dial FN6 to feed out the paper. 3 While pressing down lever FN7, pull out any paper. 4 Pull handle FN8 to open the misfeedclearing door. FN6 FN5 FN7 FN8 Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-43 5 Pull out any paper in the mailbin. 6 Close the misfeed-clearing door. 7 Close the front door. ! Detail For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 6-8. 6 Troubleshooting 6-44 bizhub C252 To clear a paper misfeed in the saddle stitcher 1 Open the front door. 2 Turn dial FN5 or dial FN6 to feed out the paper. 3 Remove all paper from the finishing tray. 4 Open the misfeed-clearing door, and then pull out any paper. FN6 FN5 Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-45 5 Close the misfeed-clearing door. 6 Close the front door. ! Detail For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 6-8. 6 Troubleshooting 6-46 bizhub C252 6.3 When the message “Replenish paper.” appears If a tray has run out of paper while copying or after printing, the message "Replenish paper." appears. To replenish paper % Check which paper tray appears highlighted in the touch panel, and then load it with paper. ! Detail For details on loading paper into the paper trays, refer to "Loading paper into the 1st tray" on page 3-49, "Loading paper into the 2nd, 3rd or 4th tray" on page 3-55, "Loading paper into the LCT" on page 3-57, and "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 3-59. Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-47 6.4 When the message “... Not enough remaining memory.” appears This machine uses the memory to produce copies. When the amount of memory available is limited while copy operations are being performed, the message "Not enough memory to continue the job." or "The job has been deleted. Not enough remaining memory." appears. Continue the operation according to the corresponding instructions. Memory becomes full while scanning This message appears when the memory becomes full and scanning stops while scanning in Copy mode. To print all pages that have been scanned, touch [Print]. To delete the job for the scanned pages, touch [Delete]. Display in Enlarge Display mode 6 Troubleshooting 6-48 bizhub C252 Memory becomes full while queuing a job This message appears when the memory becomes full and the scanned job was deleted while scanning a document for a job to be queued. Check the number of pages counted for the document, and then adjust the number of pages in the job to be queued. Display in Enlarge Display mode Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-49 6.5 When “Please replace following unit(s).” appears When it is almost time to replace supplies or a part within this machine, the message shown in the following illustration appears, warning about the replacement period. Display in Enlarge Display mode ! Detail When the message appears, replace the specified supplies or part according to your maintenance agreement. After the message "Please replace following unit(s).", the message "Need to replace XXXX." appears and the machine stops operating. The number of pages that can be printed from the time that the message "Please replace following unit(s)." appears until the time that the message "Need to replace XXXX." appears differs depending on the printing conditions and the supplies or part. 6 Troubleshooting 6-50 bizhub C252 6.6 When the message “Need to replace XXXX.” appears When it is time to replace supplies or a part within this machine, the message shown in the following illustration appears, indicating that the part or supplies should be replaced, and the machine stops operating. As an example, the message indicating that the yellow imaging unit should be replaced (when replaceable by the user) is shown below. Display in Enlarge Display mode When the time to replace supplies or a part is reached, a screen similar to the one shown below appears. Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-51 Touch to display the message shown in the following illustration. 2 Note When the message appears, replace the specified supplies or part according to your maintenance agreement. 2 Reminder Do not throw away used supplies or parts. Instead, keep them in their boxes to be collected by your technical representative. 6 Troubleshooting 6-52 bizhub C252 6.7 Simple troubleshooting Main unit Symptom Possible Cause Remedy The machine does not start up when the main power switch is turned on. Is no power supplied from the electrical outlet? Correctly insert the power supply plug into the electrical outlet. Has the [Power] (auxiliary power) key been turned on? Turn on the [Power] (auxiliary power) key. The machine does not start copying. Is the right-side door of the machine open? Securely close the right-side door of the machine. Is there no paper that matches the document? Load paper of the appropriate size into the paper tray. The printed output is too light. Is the copy density set too light? Touch [Dark] in the Density screen to copy at the desired copy density. (See p. 4-71.) Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. (See p. 3-49, p. 3-55, p. 3-57 and p. 3-59.) The printed output is too dark. Is the copy density set too dark? Touch [Light] in the Density screen to copy at the desired copy density. (See p. 4-71.) Was the document not pressed close enough against the original glass? Position the document so that it is pressed closely against the original glass. (See p. 4-11.) The printed output is blurry. Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. (See p. 3-49, p. 3-55, p. 3-57 and p. 3-59.) Was the document not pressed close enough against the original glass? Position the document so that it is pressed closely against the original glass. (See p. 4-11.) Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-53 There are dark specks or spots throughout the printed output. There are streaks in the printed output. Is the original glass dirty? Wipe the glass with a soft, dry cloth. (See p. 11-3.) Is the document transfer belt dirty? Clean the document transfer belt with a soft cloth dampened with a mild detergent. (See p. 11-5.) Was the original document printed on highly translucent material, such as diazo photosensitive paper or overhead projector transparencies? Place a blank sheet of paper on top of the document. (See p. 4-11.) Is a double-sided document being copied? If a thin double-sided document is being copied, the information on the back side may be reproduced in the copy. Touch [Light] on the Background Removal screen to select a lighter background density. (See p. 4-73.) Is the electrostatic charger wire dirty? Use the charger-cleaning tool to clean the electrostatic charger. (See p. 11-7.) The image is not aligned properly on the paper. Is the document incorrectly positioned? Correctly position the document against the document scales. (See p. 4-11.) Load the document into the ADF, and slide the adjustable document guides to fit the size of the document. (See p. 4-9.) Is the document incorrectly positioned in the ADF? If the document cannot be fed correctly through the ADF, make copies by positioning the document on the original glass. (See p. 4-11.) Is the original glass dirty (while using the ADF)? Wipe the glass with a soft, dry cloth. (See p. 11-3.) Are the adjustable document guides incorrectly positioned against the edges of the document? Slide the document guides against the edges of the document. Was curled paper loaded into the paper tray? Flatten the paper before loading it. The printed page is curled. Was paper that curls easily (as with recycled paper) used? Remove the paper from the paper tray, turn it over, and then load it again. Replace the paper with paper that is not damp. Symptom Possible Cause Remedy 6 Troubleshooting 6-54 bizhub C252 The edge of the printed output is dirty. Is the document transfer belt dirty? Clean the document transfer belt with a soft cloth dampened with a mild detergent. (See p. 11-5.) Was the selected paper size larger than the document (with a Zoom setting of "×1.000")? Select a paper size that is the same size as the document. Otherwise, select the "Auto Zoom" setting to enlarge the copy to the selected paper size. (See p. 4-46.) Is the orientation of the document different from the orientation of the paper (with a Zoom setting of "×1.000")? Select a paper size that is the same size as the document. Otherwise, select a paper orientation that is the same as that of the document. Was the copy reduced to a size smaller than the paper (with a reduced zoom ratio specified)? Select a zoom ratio that adjusts the document size to the selected paper size. (See p. 4-46.) Otherwise, select the "Auto Zoom" setting to reduce the copy to the selected paper size. (See p. 4-46.) Even though the paper misfeed was cleared, copies cannot be produced. Are there paper misfeeds at other locations? Check the touch panel for other paper misfeed indications, and then remove any misfed paper at all other locations. (See "Paper misfeed indications" on page 6-8.) Printing with the "2%1" or "2%2" Simplex/Duplex settings are not possible. Have settings been selected that cannot be combined? Check the combinations of the selected settings. Copying is not possible even though the password is entered on a machine with user authentication/account track set. Did the message "Your account has reached its maximum color-copy (black-copy) allowance." appear? Contact your administrator. Symptom Possible Cause Remedy Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-55 ADF Finisher If any message other than those listed above appears, perform the operation described in the message. If the problem is not corrected after the described operation is performed, contact your technical representative. Symptom Possible Cause Remedy The document is not fed. Is the ADF slightly open? Securely close the ADF. Is the document one that does not meet the specifications? Check that the document is correctly placed on the original glass. Is the document correctly loaded? Position the document correctly. (See p. 4-9.) Symptom Possible Cause Remedy The finisher cannot be used. Is no power supplied to the connector? Check that the cord is correctly inserted into the connector. The pages cannot be stapled. Have the staples run out? Replace the staple cartridge. (See p. 10-9.) The staple is incorrectly positioned by 90º. Are the staples positioned as specified? Select the desired position for the staples. (See p. 4-88.) The pages that were fed out were not uniformly loaded and the punched holes or staples are incorrectly positioned. Is the paper curled? Remove the paper from the paper tray, turn it over, and then load it again. Is there a gap between the lateral guides in the paper tray and the side of the paper? Slide the lateral guides in the paper tray against the side of the paper so that there is no gap. Even though a Punch setting was selected, holes are not punched. (when punch kit is installed on finisher) Did the message "Remove punch scraps." appear? Empty the hole-punch waste container. 6 Troubleshooting 6-56 bizhub C252 6.8 Main messages and their remedies Message Cause Remedy Original left on glass. The document was left on the original glass. Remove the document from the original glass. Matching paper size is not available. Select paper size. Paper of a suitable size is not loaded in a paper tray. Either select a different copy size or load paper of a suitable size. Place paper in Bypass Tray. Paper of a suitable size is not loaded in the bypass tray. Load paper of the appropriate size into the bypass tray. Original size cannot be detected. Select paper size. 1) The document is not positioned correctly. 2) A document with a nonstandard size or with a size too small to be detected is loaded. 1) Position the document correctly. 2) Select the correct paper size. Image will not fit on selected paper size. Place the originals different direction. The image does not fit in the paper. Load the document turned 90°. This mode is not available with XXX. Functions that cannot be used together are selected. Make copies using only one of the functions. Output Tray has reached its maximum capacity. Please remove all pages from % tray. Since the maximum amount of copies for the indicated finisher exit tray has been exceeded, the machine is unable to make copies. Remove all copies from the indicated tray. Input User Name and Password to login and press the Access key. User authentication settings have been specified. Copies cannot be made unless a user name and its correct password are entered. Type in your user name and password. (See "Controlling each user’s use of this machine (user authentication)" on page 3-41.) Input Account Name and Password to login and press the Access key. Account track settings have been specified. Copies cannot be made unless an account name and its correct password are entered. Type in your account name and password. (See "Controlling each account’s use of this machine (account track)" on page 3-46.) Your account has reached its maximum color-copy (black-copy) allowance. The limit on the number of copies that can be made has been reached. Contact your administrator. Close % Section properly. Since a machine door or cover is open or an option is not installed correctly, the machine is unable to make copies. Make sure that all doors and covers are closed and that all options are installed correctly. Troubleshooting 6 bizhub C252 6-57 Please insert Fusing Unit and close all doors. The fusing unit is not installed correctly. Reinstall the supplies or parts, or contact your technical representative. Please install toner cartridge, and close all doors. The indicated toner cartridge is not installed correctly. Please insert Waste Toner Box and close all doors. The waste-toner box is not installed correctly. Please insert Image Transfer Belt Unit and close all doors. The image transfer belt unit is not installed correctly. Replenish paper. The indicated tray has run out of paper. Load paper into the indicated tray. (See "Loading paper into the 1st tray" on page 3-49, "Loading paper into the 2nd, 3rd or 4th tray" on page 3-55, "Loading paper into the LCT" on page 3-57, and "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 3-59.) Toner cartridge (X) needs to be replaced soon. The toner for the indicated color is about to run out. Prepare to replace the toner cartridge according to your maintenance agreement. There is no Toner. Since the toner for the indicated color has run out, the machine is unable to make copies. Replace the toner cartridge according to your maintenance agreement. Stapler empty. Replace Staple Cartridge or cancel Staple mode. The staples have run out. Replace the staple cartridge. See "Replacing the staples" on page 10-9. Misfeed detected. Since a paper misfeed occurred, the machine is unable to make copies. Clear the paper misfeed. (See "When the message “Misfeed detected.” appears" on page 6-6.) Reinsert the following # of originals. After clearing a paper misfeed, it is necessary to reload certain pages of the document that have already been fed through the ADF. Load the indicated document pages into the ADF. Malfunction detected. Please call your Technical Representative. The machine malfunctioned and is unable to make copies. Inform your technical representative of the code displayed on the touch panel. Now Downloading Program Data from Firmware server. 1) CS Remote Care was activated by the technical representative. 2) Internet ISW is being downloaded. Do not turn off the machine with the [Power] (auxiliary power) key while this message is displayed. After turning off the machine with the [Power] (auxiliary power) key, turn off the main power switch, and then contact the technical representative. Message Cause Remedy 6 Troubleshooting 6-58 bizhub C252 If any message other than those listed above appears, perform the operation described in the message. Cannot be accessed due to unauthorized access. Please contact your Administrator. The authentication information has become invalid since the authentication attempts have failed the specified number of times. Contact the administrator of the machine. The Administrator Password is not valid due to unauthorized access. The administrator password has become invalid since the authentication attempts have failed the specified number of times. Turn the machine off, then on again. Turn off the main power switch, and then wait about 10 seconds before turning it on again. Message Cause Remedy 7 Specifications Specifications 7 bizhub C252 7-3 7 Specifications 7.1 Specifications bizhub C252 Specifications Type Desktop/freestanding scanner/printer Document holder Stationary (mirror scanning) Photoconductor OPC Luminous source White inert gas fluorescent lamp Copying system Dry-type electrophotographic method Developing system HMT developing method (HMT-OR) Fusing system Roller fixing Resolution Scanning: 600 dpi; Printing: 600 dpi e 600 dpi equivalent Document Types: Sheets, books (spreads), three-dimensional objects Size: Maximum A3 w (11 e 17 w) Weight: 2 kg (three-dimensional objects) Paper Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2)**, thick paper 1 (91 to 150 g/m2)*, thick paper 2 (151 to 209 g/m2)*, thick paper 3 (210 to 256 g/m2)*, overhead projector transparencies*, letterheads, colored paper, envelopes*, label sheets*, banner paper (127 to 160 g/m2) * Can only be fed through the 1st tray or the bypass tray ** Can only be fed through the bypass tray. Copy sizes 1st tray: A3 w to B6 w, A6 w, A3 Wide (12-1/4 e 18 w), 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 8 e 13 w*1 Width: 90 to 311.1 mm; Length: 139.7 to 457.2 mm 2nd tray: A3 w to B5 w/v, 11 e 17 w to 8-1/2 e 11 w/v Bypass tray: A3 w to B6 w, A6 w, A3 Wide (12-1/4 e 18 w), Banner paper, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 8 e 13 w*1 Width: 90 to 311.1 mm; Length: 139.7 to 1200 mm 7 Specifications 7-4 bizhub C252 *1 There are five Foolscap sizes: 220 mm e 330 mm, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w and 8 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes can be selected. For details, contact the technical representative. *2 The indicated space requirements represent the space required to pull away the finisher and to open the upper right-side door, front door and the paper drawers. Paper tray capacity 1st tray: Plain paper: 250 sheets Thick paper 1/2/3, overhead projector transparencies, label sheets, envelopes: 20 sheets or less 2nd tray: Plain paper: 500 sheets Bypass tray: Plain paper: 100 sheets Thick paper 1/2/3, overhead projector transparencies, label sheets: 20 sheets or less Envelopes: 10 sheets or less Banner paper: 1 sheet Copy exit tray capacity Plain paper: 350 sheets; Thick paper: 20 sheets; Overhead projector transparencies: 1 sheet Warm-up time Less than 110 seconds (at room temperature (23 degrees Celsius)) Image loss width Leading edge: 4.2 mm; Trailing edge: 4.2 mm*3; Rear edge: 3 mm*4; Front edge: 3 mm*4 First copy Full color: 11.7 seconds or less Black: 8.4 seconds or less Print speed Full color/black: 13 ppm (A3 w), 14 ppm (B4 w), 25 ppm (A4 v), 16 ppm (A4 w), 25 ppm (B5 v), 14 ppm (B5 w), 25 ppm (A5 v), 19 ppm (A5 w) (using the 1st tray) Magnification ratios e1.0 (full size): e1.000 ± 1.0% or less Enlarge: e1.154, e1.224, e1.414, e2.000 Reduce: e0.866, e0.816, e0.707, e0.500 Minimal (e0.930)* Zoom: e0.250 to e4.000 (in 0.001 increments) Stored zoom ratios: 3 * "Minimal" zoom ratio (e0.900 to e 0.999) Multiple copies 1 to 999 sheets Density control Copy density: Manual (9 levels); Background density: Automatic and manual (9 levels) Power requirements 220 to 240 V, 10 A, 50 Hz Power consumption Less than 1,500 W Dimensions 650 mm (W) e 755 mm (D) e 771 mm (H) Space requirements*2 1.743 mm (W) e 1.149 mm (D) Memory (available hard disk space) 512 MB (40 GB) Weight Approx. 95 kg Specifications Specifications 7 bizhub C252 7-5 *3 3 mm only when receiving faxes *4 4.2 mm only when printing In order to incorporate improvements, these product specifications are subject to change without notice. 7 Specifications 7-6 bizhub C252 Automatic duplex unit There are five Foolscap sizes: 220 mm e 330 mm w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w and 8 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes can be selected. For details, contact the technical representative. Option specifications Automatic document feeder DF-601 Specifications Paper types Plain paper (64 to 90 g/m2), thick paper 1 (91 to 150 g/m2), thick paper 2 (151 to 209 g/m2), thick paper 3 (210 to 256 g/m2) Paper sizes A3 w to A5 w/v, A3 Wide (12 e 18 w), 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w/v Width: 139.7 to 311.1 mm; Length: 148 to 457.2 mm Power requirements Supplied from main unit Power consumption Less than 17 W Dimensions 110 mm (W) e 440 mm (D) e 345 mm (H) Weight Approx. 3 kg Specifications Document feed methods Plain paper: Single-sided and double-sided documents Thick paper: Single-sided documents (129 to 210 g/m2) "Mixed Original" function: Combination of single-sided and double-sided documents Document types Single-sided: Plain paper (35 to 210 g/m2) Double-sided or mixed: Plain paper (50 to 110 g/m2) Document sizes Single-sided/double-sided documents: A3 w to B6 w Mixed document sizes: Refer to Table 1. Capacity of document feeder Single-sided/double-sided documents: Maximum 100 sheets (80 g/m2) Thick originals: Maximum 38 sheets (210 g/m2) Mixed document sizes: Maximum 100 sheets (80 g/m2) Power requirements Supplied from main unit Power consumption Less than 60 W Dimensions 586 mm (W) e 519 mm (D) e 135 mm (H) Weight Approx. 14 kg Specifications 7 bizhub C252 7-7 Table 1: Possible combinations for mixed document sizes o: Possible —: Not possible Paper feed cabinet PC-103 Maximum Document Width / Document Size A3 w A4 v B4 w B5 v A4 w A5 v B5 w A5 w A3 w o o — — — — — — A4 v o o — — — — — — B4 w o o o o — — — — B5 v o o o o — — — — A4 w o o o o o o — — A5 v — — o o o o — — B5 w — — o o o o o — A5 w — — — — — — o o Specifications Paper types Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2) Paper sizes A3 w to A5 w, 11 e 17 w to 8-1/2 e 11 w/v Tray paper capacity 3rd tray: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) Power requirements Supplied from main unit Power consumption Less than 15 W Dimensions 570 mm (W) e 548 mm (D) e 263 mm (H) Weight Approx. 24 kg Unit structure 1 paper tray 7 Specifications 7-8 bizhub C252 Paper feed cabinet PC-203 Paper feed cabinet PC-403 Specifications Paper types Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2) Paper sizes A3 w to A5 w, 11 e 17 w to 8-1/2 e 11 w/v Tray paper capacity Upper tray (3rd tray): 500 sheets (80 g/m2) Lower tray (4th tray): 500 sheets (80 g/m2) Power requirements Supplied from main unit Power consumption Less than 15 W Dimensions 570 mm (W) e 548 mm (D) e 263 mm (H) Weight Approx. 28 kg Unit structure 2 paper trays Specifications Paper types Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2) Paper sizes A4 v Tray paper capacity 2,500 sheets (80 g/m2) Power requirements Supplied from main unit Power consumption Less than 45 W Dimensions 570 mm (W) e 548 mm (D) e 263 mm (H) Weight Approx. 28 kg Specifications 7 bizhub C252 7-9 Finisher FS-603 * The number of pages that can be bound together differs depending on the paper weight. If 64 g/m2 paper is used, 6 to 15 pages can be bound together. If 80 g/m2 paper is used, 6 to 10 pages can be bound together. Specifications Exit trays Exit tray 1, exit tray 2 Settings Normal settings: "Group", "Sort", "Offset/Group", "Offset/ Sort", "Offset/Staple", and "Saddle Staple" Paper types Exit tray 1: "Group/Sort" setting: Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2), thick paper 1 (91 to 150 g/m2), thick paper 2 (151 to 209 g/m2), thick paper 3 (210 to 256 g/m2), envelopes, overhead projector transparencies, label sheets "Offset/Sort" setting, "Offset/Group" setting: Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2) Staple: Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2) Exit tray 2: Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2) Paper sizes Exit tray 1: "Group" setting: A3 w to B5 w/v, A3 Wide (12-1/4 e 18 w) "Sort" setting: A3 w to A5 v "Staple" setting: A3 w to B5 w/v Exit tray 2: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w Paper capacity Exit tray 1: Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2): 1,000 sheets of A4 w-size paper or smaller, or 500 sheets of B4 w-size paper or larger Thick paper 1 (91 to 150 g/m2), thick paper 2 (151 to 209 g/m2), thick paper 3 (210 to 256 g/m2), envelopes, overhead projector transparencies, label sheets: 20 sheets Exit tray 2: 10 copies (6 to 15 bound pages)* 20 copies (2 to 5 bound pages) Amount of shift 20 mm Staple settings Exit tray 1: Paper sizes (no. of bound pages): A4 w/v, B5 w/v (2 to 50 pages), A3 w, B4 w (2 to 25 pages) Exit tray 2: Paper sizes (no. of bound pages): A3 w to A4 w (2 to 15 pages) Power requirements Supplied from main unit Power consumption Less than 65 W Dimensions 601 mm (W) e 603 mm (D) e 933 mm (H) Weight Approx. 42 kg (including the horizontal transport unit) Consumables Staples MS-5D (5,000 staples for stapling 50 sheets) e 1 7 Specifications 7-10 bizhub C252 Punch kit PK-501 Finisher FS-501 Specifications Number of punched holes 4 Paper types Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2), thick paper 1 (91 to 150 g/m2), thick paper 2 (151 to 209 g/m2) Paper sizes A3 w, A4 v Power requirements Supplied from finisher Dimensions 90 mm (W) e 560 mm (D) e 170 mm (H) Weight Approx. 3 kg Specifications Exit trays Exit tray 1, exit tray 2 Settings "Sort", "Group", "Offset/Sort", "Offset/Group", and Staple settings Paper types Exit tray 1: "Group" setting: Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2), thick paper 1 (91 to 150 g/m2), thick paper 2 (151 to 209 g/m2), thick paper 3 (210 to 256 g/m2), overhead projector transparencies, envelopes, label sheets Exit tray 2: "Sort", "Group", "Offset/Sort", "Offset/Group" settings: Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2), thick paper 1 (91 to 150 g/m2), thick paper 2 (151 to 209 g/m2) Staple settings: Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2) Paper sizes Exit tray 1: A3 wide to B5 w/v Exit tray 2: A3 wide to B5 w/v Paper capacity Exit tray 1: Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2): 250 sheets Thick paper 1/2/3 (91 to 256 g/m2), overhead projector transparencies, envelopes, label sheets: 20 sheets Exit tray 2: Plain paper (80 g/m2): 1,000 sheets of A4 w or smaller, or 500 sheets of B4 w or larger Amount of shift 30 mm Staple settings Paper sizes (no. of bound pages): A3 w to B5 w/v (2 to 30 sheets) Power requirements Supplied from main unit Power consumption Less than 63 W Dimensions 538 mm (W) e 637 mm (D) e 978 mm (H) Weight Approx. 38 kg (including the horizontal transport unit) Consumables Staples MS-3C (3,000 staples for stapling 30 sheets) e 1 Specifications 7 bizhub C252 7-11 Job separator JS-601 Finisher FS-514 Specifications Exit trays Exit tray 3 Paper types Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2) Paper sizes A3 w to B5 w/v Paper capacity 100 sheets Dimensions 341 mm (W) e 527 mm (D) e 149 mm (H) Weight Approx. 2 kg Specifications Finishing trays Finishing tray 1, finishing tray 2 Feed settings "Sort", "Group", "Sort"/"Offset", "Group"/"Offset", and "Sort" and Staple Paper types Finishing tray 1, finishing tray 2: Plain paper (50 to 90 g/m2) Thick paper (91 to 256 g/m2), overhead projector transparencies, postcards, envelopes, label sheets, letterheads Punch settings: Plain paper (50 to 209 g/m2) Staple settings: Plain paper (50 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 to 120 g/m2)* * "Cover Mode" function: Thick paper (91 to 209 g/m2) Paper sizes A3 w to B6 w, A6 w, A3 Wide w (12-1/4 e 18 w) Paper capacity Output tray 1: Plain paper (50 to 90 g/m2): 200 sheets Thick paper (91 to 256 g/m2), overhead projector transparencies, postcards, envelopes, or label sheets, letterheads: 20 sheets Output tray 2: Plain paper (50 to 90 g/m2): 1,000 sheets of A4 w or smaller, or 500 sheets of B4 w or larger Thick paper (91 to 256 g/m2), overhead projector transparencies, postcards, envelopes, or label sheets, letterheads: 20 sheets Amount of shift 30 mm Staple settings Paper sizes (no. of bound pages): A3 w to A5 v (2 to 50 sheets) Punch settings Paper sizes: A3 w, A4 v, B5 w Number of punched holes: 4 Power requirements Supplied from main unit Power consumption Less than 66 W Dimensions 352 mm (W) e 471 mm (D) e 573 mm (H) When the tray is pulled out: 435 mm (W) Weight 33.2 kg Consumables Staples SK-602 (containing 5,000 staples) e 1 7 Specifications 7-12 bizhub C252 Punch kit PK-510 Saddle stitcher SD-503 Output tray OT-601 Specifications Punched holes 4 Paper types Plain paper (50 to 209 g/m2) Paper sizes A3 w, A4 v, B5w Power requirements Supplied from finisher Dimensions 114 mm (W) e 461 mm (D) e 106 mm (H) Weight Approx. 1.9 kg Specifications Number of bins 1 bin Paper types Plain paper (50 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 to 209 g/m2) Paper sizes A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, B5 w Paper capacity Plain paper (50 to 90 g/m2): Maximum 200 sheets or 20 sets Staple settings Number of bound pages: 2 to 15 sheets Dimensions 445 mm (W) e 203 mm (D) e 478 mm (H) When the tray is pulled out: 576 mm (W) e 281 mm (D) Weight 7.4 kg Consumables MS-2C cartridge (for 2,000) e 1 Power requirements Supplied from finisher Specifications Number of bins 1 bin Paper capacity Plain paper (50 to 90 g/m2): Maximum 200 sheets Thick paper (91 to 256 g/m2), postcards, envelopes, overhead projector transparencies, or label sheets, letterheads: Maximum 20 sheets Dimensions 282 mm (W) e 368 mm (D) e 57 mm (H) Weight 0.7 kg Specifications 7 bizhub C252 7-13 Mailbin kit MT-501 Specifications Number of bins 4 bins Paper types Plain paper (50 to 90 g/m2) Paper sizes A4 v, B5 v, A5 w Paper capacity Maximum 125 sheets per bin Dimensions 340 mm (W) e 509 mm (D) e 387 mm (H) Weight Approx. 8 kg (unit weight) Power requirements Supplied from finisher 7 Specifications 7-14 bizhub C252 8 Copy paper/original documents Copy paper/original documents 8 bizhub C252 8-3 8 Copy paper/original documents 8.1 Copy paper Use paper that meets the following specifications. Possible paper sizes Non-standard-sized paper: * Banner paper Paper width: 210 mm to 297 mm Paper length: 457.3 mm to 1200 mm Paper Source Paper Width Paper Length Bypass tray* 90.0 mm to 311.1 mm 139.7 mm to 1200 mm 1st tray 90.0 mm to 311.1 mm 139.7 mm to 457.2 mm 2nd tray — — Single/Double paper feed cabinets LCT Double-sided copies 139.7 mm to 311.1 mm 148 mm to 457.2 mm 8 Copy paper/original documents 8-4 bizhub C252 Standard-sized paper: *1 There are five Foolscap sizes: 220 e 330 mm, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w and 8 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes can be selected. For details, contact the technical representative. *2 Can be used when optional punch kit is installed on finisher. Paper Source Paper Size Bypass tray A3 w to B6 w, A6 w, A3 Wide (12-1/4 e 18 w), 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 8 e 13 w*1 1st tray A3 w to B6 w, A6 w, A3 Wide (12-1/4 e 18 w), 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 8 e 13 w*1 2nd tray A3 w to B5 w/v, 11 e 17 w to 8-1/2 e 11 w/v Single/Double paper feed cabinets A3 w to A5 w, 11 e 17 w to 8-1/2 e 11 w/v LCT A4 v Double-sided copies A3 w to A5 w, A3 Wide (12-1/4 e 18 w), 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8- 1/2 w, Foolscap (220 mm e 330 mm w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8 e 13 w)*1 Finisher FS-603 Exit tray 1: "Group"/"Sort" setting: A3 w to B5 w/v, A3 Wide (12-1/4 e 18 w) "Offset/Group" setting, "Offset/Sort" setting: A3 w to A5 v "Offset/Sort/Staple" setting: A3 w to B5 w/v Punch setting: A3 w, A4 v*2 Exit tray 2: A3 w to A4 w Finisher FS-501 Exit tray 1: "Group"/"Sort" setting: A3 w to B5 w/v, A3 Wide (12-1/4 e 18 w) Exit tray 2: "Offset/Group" setting, "Offset/Sort" setting: A3 w to B5 w/v, A3 Wide (12-1/4 e 18 w) "Staple" setting: A3 w to B5 w/v Job separator JS-601 A3 w to B5 w/v Finisher FS-514 Finishing tray 1, 2 and optional Output Tray A3 w to B6 w, A6 w, A3 Wide (12-1/4 e 18 w) "Group"/"Sort" settings: A3 w to A5 v Staple settings: A3 w to A5 v Punch settings: A3 w, A4 v, B5 w*2 Output Tray OT-601 Saddle Stitcher SD-503 Fold & staple: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, B5 w Mailbin Kit MT-501 A4 v, B5 v, A5 w Copy exit tray (standard) A3 w to B6 w, A6 w, A3 Wide (12-1/4 e 18 w), 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v Copy paper/original documents 8 bizhub C252 8-5 Paper types and paper capacities Paper Type Plain Paper Thick Paper 1 Thick Paper 2 Thick Paper 3 Weight (g/m2) 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 91 g/m2 to 150 g/m2 151 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 210 g/m2 to 256 g/m2 Paper Source, Etc. Bypass tray 100 sheets 20 sheets or less 20 sheets or less 20 sheets or less 1st tray 250 sheets 20 sheets or less 20 sheets or less 20 sheets or less 2nd tray 500 sheets — — — Single/Double paper feed cabinets 500 sheets/ 1,000 sheets — — — LCT 2,500 sheets — — — Double-sided copies o o o o Paper Type Overhead Projector Transparencies Postcards Envelopes Label Sheets Banner Paper 127 g/m2 to 160 g/m2 Paper Source, Etc. Bypass tray 20 sheets or less (A4 v only) 20 sheets or less 10 envelopes or less 20 sheets or less 1 sheet 1st tray 20 sheets or less (A4 v only) 20 sheets or less 10 envelopes or less 20 sheets or less — 2nd tray — — — — — Single/Double paper feed cabinets — — — — — LCT — — — — — Double-sided copies — — — — — 8 Copy paper/original documents 8-6 bizhub C252 Special paper Paper other than plain paper, such as overhead projector transparencies and colored paper, is called special paper. Be sure to select a special paper setting for paper trays loaded with media such as overhead projector transparencies and colored paper in order to prevent operating errors. Paper Type Icon Description Plain Paper Single Side Only Select this setting when paper that should not be used with double-sided copying (for example, when one side has already been printed on) is loaded as plain paper with a weight of 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2. A paper tray with this setting is given priority when the "Auto Paper Select" setting is specified. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected during double-sided copying. Special Paper Select this setting when special paper, for example, high-quality paper, is loaded as plain paper with a weight of 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto Paper Select" setting is specified or when the paper trays are switched automatically. Letterhead Select this setting when paper already printed with a company name or preset text is loaded as plain paper with a weight of 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto Paper Select" setting is specified or when the paper trays are switched automatically. Colored Paper Select this setting when colored paper is loaded as plain paper with a weight of 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto Paper Select" setting is specified or when the paper trays are switched automatically. OHP Select this setting when overhead projector transparencies are loaded. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto Paper Select" setting is specified or when the paper trays are switched automatically. Thick 1 Select this setting when the thick paper that is loaded has a weight of 91 g/m2 to 150 g/m2. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto Paper Select" setting is specified or when the paper trays are switched automatically. Thick 2 Select this setting when the thick paper that is loaded has a weight of 151 g/m2 to 209 g/m2. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto Paper Select" setting is specified or when the paper trays are switched automatically. Copy paper/original documents 8 bizhub C252 8-7 Thick 3 Select this setting when the thick paper that is loaded has a weight of 210 g/m2 to 256 g/m2. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto Paper Select" setting is specified or when the paper trays are switched automatically. Envelope Select this setting when envelopes are loaded. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto Paper Select" setting is specified or when the paper trays are switched automatically. Duplex 2nd-Side Normal Select these settings when loading paper that has already been printed on one side. "Duplex 2nd-Side" can be selected only normal, thick 1, thick 2 or thick 3 paper is loaded in the 1st tray or the bypass tray. Thick 1 Thick 2 Thick 3 Paper Type Icon Description 8 Copy paper/original documents 8-8 bizhub C252 Precautions for paper The following types of paper should not be used, otherwise decreased print quality, paper misfeeds or damage to the machine may occur. - Overhead projector transparencies that have already been fed through the machine (even if the transparency is still blank) - Paper that has been printed on by a heat-transfer printer or an inkjet printer - Paper that is either extremely thick or extremely thin - Folded, curled, wrinkled, or torn paper - Paper that has been left unwrapped for a long period of time - Damp paper, perforated paper, or paper with punched holes - Extremely smooth or extremely rough paper, or paper with an uneven surface - Paper that has been treated, such as carbon-backed, heat-sensitive or pressure-sensitive paper - Paper that has been decorated with foil or embossing - Paper of a non-standard shape (not rectangular) - Paper that is bound with glue, staples or paper clips - Paper with labels attached - Paper with ribbons, hooks, buttons, etc. attached Paper storage Observe the following precautions when storing the paper. - Store paper in a cool, dark location with little humidity. - If the paper becomes damp, paper misfeeds may occur. Paper that has not been loaded should be kept wrapped or placed in a plastic bag and stored in a cool, dark location with little humidity. - Store the paper laying flat, not standing on its edge. Curled paper may cause paper misfeeds. - Keep paper out of the reach of children. Copy paper/original documents 8 bizhub C252 8-9 Auto tray switch feature If the selected paper tray runs out of paper while a job is being printed and a different paper tray is loaded with paper meeting the following conditions, the other paper tray is automatically selected so printing can continue. If the optional LCT is installed, a maximum of 3,400 copies (with A4 v paper) can be made continuously. (The paper tray is automatically switched only if the "Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF" parameter in the Utility mode is set to "Allow".) Operating Conditions - The paper is the same size. - The paper is positioned in the same orientation. - The paper is the same type. - Paper trays that are selected when the paper tray is automatically switched. ! Detail For details on the specifying the paper trays that are selected when the paper tray is automatically switched, refer to "System setting" on page 13-27. Order for Selecting the Paper trays As a factory default, when a different paper tray is automatically selected, the next paper tray in the following list is chosen. 2nd tray % 3rd tray % 4th tray % 1st tray ! Detail To change the order in which the paper trays are selected, refer to "System setting" on page 13-27. 8 Copy paper/original documents 8-10 bizhub C252 8.2 Selecting the paper settings This section describes the procedures for specifying the size and type of paper loaded in each paper tray. ! Detail For details on loading the paper into the 1st tray, refer to "Loading paper into the 1st tray" on page 3-49. For details on loading the paper into the bypass tray, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 3-59. To automatically detect the paper size (“Auto Paper Select” setting) The size of the paper loaded into the 1st tray and the bypass tray can be detected automatically. The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for automatically detecting the paper loaded into the 1st tray. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. Copy paper/original documents 8 bizhub C252 8-11 2 Touch the button for the 1st tray. – To specify automatic detection for the bypass tray, touch the button for the bypass tray. 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. 4 Touch [Auto Detect]. As a default, "Auto Detect" is selected. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. 8 Copy paper/original documents 8-12 bizhub C252 To specify a paper size (set size settings) The paper size for the 1st tray and the bypass tray can be set so that the paper tray can be used with the specified paper size. This is useful, for example, when the size of the paper that is loaded cannot be automatically detected (such as with postcards or paper in inch sizes). The following procedure describes how to specify the postcard setting for the 1st tray. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the 1st tray. – To set the paper size for the bypass tray, touch the button for the bypass tray. Copy paper/original documents 8 bizhub C252 8-13 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. 4 Touch [Standard Size]. The Standard Size screen appears. 5 Touch [ ] twice, and then touch [A6 Card w]. – Touch [ ] and [ ] until the button for the desired paper size is displayed. – If “A6 Card w” is selected, "Thick 2" is automatically selected. If paper other than postcards is loaded, change the paper type setting. For details on the paper type settings, refer to "To specify a setting for special paper" on page 8-25. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again. The paper size for the 1st tray is set. 8 Copy paper/original documents 8-14 bizhub C252 2 Reminder If paper other than the specified paper size is loaded, a paper misfeed may occur since the paper size is not automatically detected. Copy paper/original documents 8 bizhub C252 8-15 To specify a non-standard paper size (Custom Size settings) Non-standard-sized paper can be loaded into the 1st tray or the bypass tray. If non-standard-sized paper is loaded, it will be necessary to enter the paper size. The following procedure describes how to specify the size of non-standard paper loaded into the 1st tray. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the 1st tray. – To set the paper size for the bypass tray, touch the button for the bypass tray. 8 Copy paper/original documents 8-16 bizhub C252 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. 4 Touch [Custom Size]. The Custom Size screen appears. 5 Type in the length (X) and width (Y) of the paper. – Make sure that [X] is selected, and then use the keypad to type in the length of side X. (139.7 mm to 457.2 mm) – Touch [Y] to select it, and then use the keypad to type in the length of side Y. (90.0 mm to 311.1 mm) – If a value outside of the allowable range is specified, the message "Input Error" appears. Type in a value within the allowable range. – If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. Copy paper/original documents 8 bizhub C252 8-17 ? Can paper sizes be stored? % Five non-standard paper sizes can be stored. % To recall a stored paper size, touch the corresponding memory key. % The names "memory1" through "memory5" can be changed. For details on changing the names, refer to "To store a non-standard paper size (Custom Size settings)" on page 8-18. % For details on storing paper sizes, refer to "To store a non-standard paper size (Custom Size settings)" on page 8-18. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again. 8 Copy paper/original documents 8-18 bizhub C252 To store a non-standard paper size (Custom Size settings) Five non-standard paper sizes can be stored. Storing paper sizes that are used often allows the paper size to be quickly selected, without having to re-enter the setting. The following procedure describes how to store a non-standard paper size for the 1st tray. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the 1st tray. – To specify a setting for special paper for the bypass tray, touch the button for the bypass tray. Copy paper/original documents 8 bizhub C252 8-19 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. 4 Touch [Custom Size]. 5 Specify the X and Y sides of the paper, and then touch [Store]. – Make sure that [X] is selected, and then use the keypad to type in the length of side X. (139.7 mm to 457.2 mm) – Touch [Y] to select it, and then use the keypad to type in the length of side Y. (90.0 mm to 311.1 mm) – Check the illustration in the screen for the sides that are considered X and Y. – If a value outside of the allowable range is specified, the message "Input Error" appears. Type in a value within the allowable range. – If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 8 Copy paper/original documents 8-20 bizhub C252 6 Touch the memory key where the paper size is to be stored. – To change the name of a memory key, touch [Custom Name], and then touch the key to be renamed. Using the keyboard that appears, type in the name of the key, touch [OK], and then touch [OK] again. – For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 14-3. Copy paper/original documents 8 bizhub C252 8-21 7 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next four screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again. 8 Copy paper/original documents 8-22 bizhub C252 To specify a setting for oversized paper (Oversized Paper settings) Oversized paper can be loaded into the 1st tray or the bypass tray. Oversized paper is a size larger than the standard size and allows copies of standard-sized documents to be printed so that there is no loss at the edges. For example, if A3 Wide paper is used, an area up to 311.1 mm e 457.2 mm can be printed, allowing the entire area of an A3-size document to be printed. If oversized paper is loaded, it will be necessary to enter the paper size. The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for oversized paper loaded into the 1st tray. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the 1st tray. – To set the paper size for the bypass tray, touch the button for the bypass tray. Copy paper/original documents 8 bizhub C252 8-23 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. 4 Touch [Oversized Paper]. The Oversized Paper screen appears. 5 Select the size of the paper to be loaded. – To select a paper size in inches, touch [Inches]. The list of paper sizes in inches appears. 6 To change the size, touch [Change Size]. The Change Size screen for oversized paper appears. 8 Copy paper/original documents 8-24 bizhub C252 7 Specify the X and Y sides of the paper, and then touch [OK]. – Touch either [X] or [Y], press the [C] (clear) key to clear the current setting, and then use the keypad to type in the size. – To specify a paper size of 12 e 18 w, touch [12 e 18 w]. – If a value outside the allowable range is specified, the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. The allowable range differs depending on the paper sizes. – If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. 8 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note The selected size button is programmed with the entered paper size, so that the paper size is available to be selected again without having to be typed in. In addition, the size can be changed. Copy paper/original documents 8 bizhub C252 8-25 To specify a setting for special paper If a setting for special paper, such as overhead projector transparencies and other special paper, is selected for a paper tray, that tray is not selected automatically with the "Auto Paper Select" setting or the ATS feature. However, a paper tray set to "Single Side Only" is given priority when the "Auto Paper Select" setting is specified or when the paper trays are switched automatically. The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for oversized paper loaded into the 1st tray. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the 1st tray. – To set the paper size for the bypass tray, touch the button for the bypass tray. 8 Copy paper/original documents 8-26 bizhub C252 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. 4 Specify the appropriate setting for the type of special paper loaded. – Touch the button for the desired special paper. ? What types of paper can be loaded in the paper tray? % There are limits on the types of paper that can be loaded in a paper tray. For details on the type of paper that can loaded, refer to "Specifications" on page 7-3, "Paper feed cabinet PC-103" on page 7-7. % If postcards were loaded, select "Thick 2". 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Reminder If overhead projector transparencies or thick paper is loaded into the paper tray, be sure to select the corresponding paper type, otherwise a paper misfeed may occur. Copy paper/original documents 8 bizhub C252 8-27 To print double-sided copies manually If the document to be copied cannot be fed through the automatic duplex unit, touch [Duplex 2nd-Side] to print double-sided copies. The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for paper already printed on one side and loaded into the 1st tray. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper]. The Paper screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the 1st tray. – A paper tray set to "Duplex 2nd-Side" is not selected when the "Auto Paper Select" setting is selected. – To specify a setting for special paper for the bypass tray, touch the button for the bypass tray. 8 Copy paper/original documents 8-28 bizhub C252 3 Touch [Change Tray Settings]. 4 Touch [Duplex 2nd-Side]. 5 Select the setting for the type of used paper that is loaded. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again. Copy paper/original documents 8 bizhub C252 8-29 8.3 Original documents When making copies, load the document into the ADF or position it on the original glass. To copy documents that cannot be loaded into the ADF, position them on the original glass. Documents that can be loaded into the ADF There are three methods for using the ADF. - Normal method - For documents of mixed sizes - For documents on thick paper There are limits on the types of documents that can be loaded with each method. Normal method For documents of mixed sizes Single-Sided Documents Double-Sided Documents Document paper type/Weight Plain Paper: 35 g/m2 to 128 g/m2 Plain Paper: 50 g/m2 to 110 g/m2 Document size A3 w to B6 w 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v Paper capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2 paper) Single-Sided Documents Double-Sided Documents Document paper type/Weight Plain Paper: 50 g/m2 to 110 g/m2 Document size Refer to "Mixed originals paper sizes". Paper capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2 paper) 8 Copy paper/original documents 8-30 bizhub C252 Mixed originals paper sizes The following chart shows the possible combinations of standard-sized paper that can be used with the "Mixed Original" setting. o: Possible —: Not possible ! Detail *1Indicates the width of the widest document size of the mixed originals (width of the adjustable document guides of the ADF) *2Indicates document sizes that can be specified together with the maximum document width For documents on thick paper Maximum Document Width* / A3 w A4 v B4 w B5 v A4 w A5 v B5 w A5 w Document Size*2 A3 w o o — — — — — — A4 v o o — — — — — — B4 w o o o o — — — — B5 v o o o o — — — — A4 w o o o o o o — — A5 v — — o o o o o — B5 w — — o o o o o o A5 w — — — — — — — o Single-Sided Documents Document paper type/Weight Thick paper: 129 g/m2 to 210 g/m2 Document size A3 w to B6 w 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v Paper capacity 38 sheets (210 g/m2 paper) Copy paper/original documents 8 bizhub C252 8-31 Precautions for loading documents into the ADF The following types of documents should not be loaded into the ADF, otherwise paper misfeeds or damage to the document may occur. - Wrinkled, folded, curled, or torn documents - Highly translucent or transparent documents, such as overhead transparencies or diazo photosensitive paper - Coated documents such as carbon-backed paper - Documents printed on paper thicker than 211 g/m2 - Documents printed on paper thicker than 111 g/m2 during double-sided copying - Documents that are bound, for example, with staples or paper clips - Documents that are bound in a book or booklet - Documents that are bound together with glue - Document pages that have been cut or contain cutouts - Label sheets - Offset printing masters - Documents with binder holes - Documents that have just been printed with this machine 2 Reminder Before loading folded documents, such as those folded in half or in three, into the ADF, be sure to flatten the pages. Documents that can be placed on the original glass To copy documents that cannot be loaded into the ADF, position them on the original glass. Original Glass Documents Document type Sheets, books (spreads), three-dimensional objects Document size A3 w to A5 w 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w Maximum weight 2 kg 8 Copy paper/original documents 8-32 bizhub C252 Precautions for positioning documents on the original glass Observe the following precautions when placing the document on the original glass. - The size of documents printed on paper in inch sizes (such as 11 e 17, 8-1/2 e 14, 8-1/2 e 11) cannot be automatically detected. The setting must be specified by the technical representative. For details, contact the technical representative. - If a document of non-standard paper size is loaded, the "Auto Paper Select" and "Auto Zoom" settings cannot be used since the document size cannot be detected automatically. If a document of non-standard paper size is loaded, select the size of the paper to be copied. - If highly translucent or transparent documents, such as overhead transparencies or diazo photosensitive paper, are loaded, the document size cannot be detected automatically. Place a blank sheet of paper of the same size over the document. - Do not place objects exceeding 2 kg on the original glass, otherwise the original glass may be damaged. - If a book is placed on the original glass, do not press it down extremely hard, otherwise the original glass may be damaged. 9 Application functions Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-3 9 Application functions 9.1 Inserting paper between overhead projector transparencies (“OHP Interleave” function) In order to prevent copies printed onto overhead projector transparencies from sticking together as a result of the heat that is produced during copying, paper (interleaf) can be inserted between the transparencies ! Detail For details on loading overhead projector transparencies, refer to "Paper types and paper capacities" on page 8-5, "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 3-59. 9 Application functions 9-4 bizhub C252 To copy using the “OHP Interleave” function 0 The Finishing setting cannot be changed. 0 The number of copies is set to "1" and cannot be changed. 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 2 Load overhead projector transparencies into the bypass tray or the 1st tray. Load the interleaf paper into the desired paper tray. – Use interleaf paper with the same size as the overhead projector transparencies, and load them in the v orientation. 3 Touch [OHP], and then touch [OK]. – If the overhead projector transparencies are loaded into the 1st tray, touch [Paper], select the 1st tray, and then touch [Change Tray Settings]. The Paper screen appears. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-5 4 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears. 5 Touch [OHP Interleave]. The OHP Interleave screen appears. 9 Application functions 9-6 bizhub C252 6 Select the paper tray loaded with the interleaf paper. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – To cancel the "OHP Interleave" function, touch [OFF]. 7 Touch [OK]. 8 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 9 Press the [Start] key. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-7 9.2 Adding cover pages (“Cover Mode” function) Copies can be made using paper different from the cover pages and main body of the document (excluding the cover pages) and cover pages can be added using paper different from the copy. The following types of cover pages and front and back cover page settings are available. Setting Description Front (Copy) The first page of the document is copied onto paper for the front cover sheet. With double-sided copying, the second page of the document is copied onto the back of the front cover sheet. Front (Blank) Paper for the front cover sheet is added as the first page of the copy. The same operation is performed with double-sided copying. Back (Copy) The last page of the document is copied onto paper for the back cover sheet. With double-sided copying, a double-sided copy of the last two pages of the document is printed on paper for the back cover sheet if the document contains an even number of pages. Back (Blank) Paper for the back cover sheet is added after the last page of the copy. The same operation is performed with double-sided copying. 9 Application functions 9-8 bizhub C252 To copy using the “Cover Mode” function 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. – For a document that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the document in separate batches (“Separate Scan” setting)" on page 4-13. 2 Load the paper for the cover pages and the paper for the main body of the document into separate paper trays. – Use paper with the same size for the cover pages and for the main body of the document, and load them in the same orientation. 3 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. – For details on loading paper when using thick paper for the cover page, refer to "Paper types and paper capacities" on page 8-5, "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 3-59. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-9 4 Touch [Cover Mode]. The Cover Mode screen appears. 5 Select the desired cover sheet format. – The default setting for the paper tray loaded with cover pages can be specified from the Utility mode. For details, refer to "Copier setting" on page 13-33. – To cancel changes to the copy settings, touch [Cancel]. – To cancel the "Cover Mode" function, touch [OFF]. 6 Depending on the desired setting, touch [Front Cover Paper] or [Back Cover Paper]. The corresponding Cover Paper screen appears. 9 Application functions 9-10 bizhub C252 7 Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the cover pages. 8 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 9 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 10 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 11 Press the [Start] key. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-11 9.3 Inserting different paper into copies (“Insert Sheet” function) Different paper (such as colored paper) can be inserted for specified pages in the copies. There are settings ("Copy" and "Blank") for selecting whether or not the inserted pages are printed. When the settings are combined with singlesided copying or double-sided copying, the copies are printed as shown below. If "Copy" is set, the document is copied as shown below when the specified paper is inserted for the specified page. When page 6 is specified If "Blank" was set, the specified paper is inserted after the specified page. When page 5 is specified Finishing Description Single-sided copies The specified paper is inserted for the 6th page of the copy, and the 6th page of the document is copied onto it. Double-sided copies The back side of the 3rd page of the copy is left blank, the specified paper is inserted for the 4th page of the copy, and a double-sided copy of the 6th and 7th pages of the document are printed onto it. Finishing Description Single-sided copies The specified paper is inserted as the 6th page of the copy. Double-sided copies The back side of the 3rd page of the copy is left blank, and the specified paper is inserted for the 4th page of the copy. 9 Application functions 9-12 bizhub C252 ! Detail The specified paper can be inserted at a maximum of 15 locations within a document of up to 999 pages. In double-sided documents, one double-sided page is considered to be two pages (one for the front and one for the back). Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-13 To copy using the “Insert Sheet” function 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. – For a document that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the document in separate batches (“Separate Scan” setting)" on page 4-13. 2 Load the paper to be inserted and the paper for the main body of the copy into separate paper trays. – Make sure that the paper loaded for the insertion and for the copy have the same size and orientation. 3 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. – For details on loading paper when using thick paper for the insertions, refer to "Paper types and paper capacities" on page 8-5 and "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 3-59. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears. 9 Application functions 9-14 bizhub C252 4 Touch [Insert Sheet]. The Insert Sheet screen appears. 5 Using the keypad, specify the pages where the paper is to be inserted. – When [Select] is touched, the entered page is specified. – After the page number is specified, the page numbers are arranged in order, starting with the lowest number. – To remove a page number that has been specified, touch [Edit], touch the button for the page to be removed, and then press the [C] (clear) key. – If the same page number is entered twice, the same page number is specified, and there is no change to the print result. – If the entered page number is greater than the number of pages in the document, paper is not inserted. 6 Touch [Insert Paper]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – To cancel the "Insert Sheet" function, touch [OFF]. The Insert Paper screen appears. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-15 7 Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the insertion sheets, and then touch [OK]. 8 Touch [Copy] or [Blank] under "Insert Type". – If "Copy" is set, the document is copied with the specified paper inserted for the specified page. – If "Blank" is set, the specified paper is inserted after the specified page. 9 Touch [OK]. 10 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 11 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 12 Press the [Start] key. 9 Application functions 9-16 bizhub C252 9.4 Inserting copies of a different document for a specified page (“Insert Image” function) A multi-page document later scanned from the original glass can be inserted at the specified location in a document first scanned with the ADF. The inserted document is added after the specified pages. ! Detail A separate document can be inserted at a maximum of 15 locations within a document of up to 999 pages. In double-sided documents, one double-sided page is considered to be two pages (one for the front and one for the back). Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-17 To copy using the “Insert Image” function 1 Load the document into the ADF. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. – For a document that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the document in separate batches (“Separate Scan” setting)" on page 4-13. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears. 3 Touch [Insert Image]. The Insert Image screen appears. 9 Application functions 9-18 bizhub C252 4 Using the keypad, specify the pages where the image is to be inserted. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – To cancel the "Insert Image" function, touch [OFF]. – The inserted document is added after the specified page. – When [Select] is touched, the entered page is specified. – After the page number is specified, the page numbers are arranged in order, starting with the lowest number. – To remove a page number that has been specified, touch [Edit], touch the button for the page to be removed, and then press the [C] (clear) key. – If the total number of pages in the document to be inserted is greater than the number of pages that are specified, the remaining pages of the insertion document are added at the end of the document. – If the total number of pages in the document to be inserted is less than the number of pages that are specified, nothing is inserted at the specified locations greater than the total number of pages in the document. – If the same page number is specified twice, two insertion documents are added at the specified location. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-19 – If the specified page number is greater than the total number of pages in the main document, the corresponding insertion document page is added at the end of the document copy. 5 Touch [OK]. 6 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 8 Press the [Start] key. Scanning begins. 9 Place the document to be inserted on the original glass. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 9 Application functions 9-20 bizhub C252 10 Press the [Start] key. Scanning begins. 11 Touch [Finish]. – To insert a multi-page document, repeat steps 9 and 10 until all pages of the insertion document are scanned in the order that they are to be inserted. 12 Press the [Start] key. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-21 9.5 Specifying pages to be printed on the front side (“Chapters” function) When making double-sided copies, the pages specified as the first page of a chapter can be printed on the front side of the paper. If the document was arranged so that the specified page would be printed on the back side of a page, the page is left blank and the specified page is printed on the front side of the next page. In addition, the specified page can be printed on different paper. ! Detail A maximum of 15 pages can be specified to be printed on the front side of the paper within a document of up to 999 pages. In double-sided documents, one double-sided page is considered to be two pages (one for the front and one for the back). 9 Application functions 9-22 bizhub C252 To copy using the “Chapters” function Make sure that the paper loaded for the first page of the chapter and for the copy have the same size and orientation. 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. – For a document that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the document in separate batches (“Separate Scan” setting)" on page 4-13. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears. 3 Touch [Chapters]. The Chapters (editing) screen appears. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-23 4 Using the keypad, specify the first page of the chapters. – When [Select] is touched, the entered page is specified. – After the page number is specified, the page numbers are arranged in order, starting with the lowest number. – To remove a page number that has been specified, touch [Edit], touch the button for the page to be removed, and then press the [C] (clear) key. – Set "Simplex/Duplex" to "1 % 2". – If the same page number is entered twice, the same page number is specified, and there is no change to the print result. – If the specified page number is greater than the number of pages in the document, that page number is ignored. 5 Touch [Copy Insert] or [None] under "Chapter Paper". – If "None" is selected, all pages of the copy are printed on the same paper. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – To cancel the "Chapters" function, touch [OFF]. 9 Application functions 9-24 bizhub C252 – If "Copy Insert" is selected, [Chapter Paper] appears. Touch [Chapter Paper], select the paper to be used for the first page of the chapter, and then touch [OK]. 6 Touch [OK]. 7 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 8 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 9 Press the [Start] key. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-25 9.6 Scanning documents with different settings and printing copies all together (“Program Job” function) Loaded document pages can be scanned with different settings and their copies can be printed together. Different Zoom or Paper settings can be specified for a part of the document or Finishing settings or the "Set Numbering" function can be set after the entire document is scanned, and then all copies can be printed together. 2 Note Ten document batches can be set. 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 4 2 3 3 2 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 1 1 0001REPORT Document 2 Document 1 Document 3 9 Application functions 9-26 bizhub C252 To copy using the “Program Job” function 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. – When saving scanned data in a box, some scanned data may be lost if more than 9,000 pages are saved in the box. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears. 3 Touch [Program Job], and then touch [OK]. 4 Select the desired copy settings, and then press the [Start] key. – To print a single copy to be checked, touch [Proof Copy] key. Scanning begins. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-27 5 Select [Fix], and then touch [OK]. – To change the copy settings, select [Retry], and then touch [Change Setting]. – If the document is placed on the original glass, touch [Finish] in the screen that appears, requesting confirmation that scanning of the document is finished. 6 Position the next document batch, and then touch [Change Setting]. 9 Application functions 9-28 bizhub C252 7 Select the desired copy settings, and then press the [Start] key. – To print a single copy to be checked, touch [Proof Copy] key. – Repeat steps 6 and 7 until all document batches have been scanned. The amount of memory available can be checked beside "Memory" in the upper-right corner of the screen. In addition, the number of document batches can be checked beside "Number of Sep. Scans". – If not enough space is available in the memory, a message appears. Select whether to delete the last part of the data and scan it again, delete the last part of the data and print, or delete all of the document data. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel Change]. Scanning begins. After scanning is finished, select [Fix], and then touch [OK]. ? Is there more information about the settings? % Refer to the appropriate section. 8 After all document pages have been scanned, touch [Finish]. A message appears, requesting confirmation that scanning is finished. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-29 9 Select [Yes], and then touch [OK]. – To change the copy settings, select [No], and then touch [Change Setting]. 10 Specify any other desired copy settings. – Touch [Print], and then specify the printing method for the entire scanned document. ? Is there more information about the settings? % Refer to the appropriate section. 11 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 12 Touch [Execute] or press the [Start] key. – If [Cancel] is touched, a message appears, requesting confirmation to delete the data. To stop printing, select [Yes], and then touch [OK]. 9 Application functions 9-30 bizhub C252 9.7 Producing separate copies of each page in a page spread (“Book Copy” function) An open book or catalog can be copied with the left and right pages on separate sheets of paper. The following copy methods are available, and there are settings for adding just a front cover or both front and back covers. Setting Description Book Spread Copies of the left and right pages of the page spread are printed on the same page without being separated. Separation Separate copies of each page in the page spreads are printed in the document page order. The document is scanned to fit the size of paper that will be used. Front Cover The front cover and separate copies of each page in the page spreads are printed in the document page order. Front and Back Cover The front cover, separate copies of each page in the page spreads and the back cover are printed in the document page order. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-31 To copy using the “Book Copy” function 0 Place the document on the original glass. 1 Place the pages on the original glass, starting with the first page. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. – To add copies of the covers, load them first. ? How are the front and back covers copied? % Scan the front cover, then the back cover, and then scan the remainder of the document. 2 Load the paper to be used into the desired paper tray. 3 Touch [Application], and then touch [Book Copy/Repeat]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Book Copy/Repeat screen appears. 9 Application functions 9-32 bizhub C252 4 Touch [Book Copy]. The Book Scanning screen appears. [Booklet Original] appears if optional finisher FS-603 is installed or the saddle stitcher is installed on optional finisher FS-514. 5 Touch the button for the desired setting. – If [Separation], [Front Cover] or [Front and Back Cover] is selected, "Position" appears. Select the binding position of the document. – If necessary, touch [Erase] or [Center Erase] under "Book Erase". Select the desired area to be erased, touch [–] and [+] to specify the width to be erased, and then touch [OK]. – When using the keypad to specify the settings, press the [C] (clear) key, and then type in the setting. – If a Book Erase function is specified, touch [Image Adjustment] in the Application screen, touch [Standard Size], and then specify the size of the document. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-33 – To cancel the "Book Copy" function, touch [OFF]. ? What do the Book Erase functions do? % The shadow of the book binding and the shadow of the book edges can be erased from the copies. The "Erase" and "Center Erase" functions can be used together. ? How are settings specified for the “Erase” function? % Refer to "Erasing specified areas of copies (“Erase” function)" on page 9-71. In addition, if the "Erase" function in the Application screen is specified, [Erase] under "Book Erase" will be selected. ? What happens when a value outside of the allowable range is specified? % The message "Input Error" appears. If "Input Error" appears or if the erased width was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then specify the correct value. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Center Erase screen 9 Application functions 9-34 bizhub C252 7 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper], and then select the paper tray loaded with the paper. 8 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 9 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 10 Press the [Start] key. – For details on scanning the document, refer to "Scanning a multipage document from the original glass" on page 4-18. Scanning begins. ? How are documents with multiple pages scanned? % Position the next page and repeat step 10 until all pages of the document are scanned. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-35 11 After all document pages have been scanned, touch [Finish]. – If "Front and Back Cover" was selected, the back cover is scanned after the front cover, and then all page spreads are scanned in order. – If "Front Cover" was selected, all page spreads are scanned in order after the front cover. 12 Press the [Start] key. 9 Application functions 9-36 bizhub C252 9.8 Copying pamphlets (“Booklet Original” function) A pamphlet with its staples removed can be copied and bound with staples at the center to create copies of the original pamphlet. ! Detail For details on stapling, refer to "Specifying center binding" on page 4-96. The number of sheets that can be stapled together is no more than 15 and differs depending on the paper type. For details, refer to "Specifying center binding" on page 4-96. Setting Description Center Erase ON The pages are copied with a 10-mm margin at the center of the document (area bound with staples). Center Erase OFF Copies are made of the entire page, including the center of the document (area bound with staples). Staples Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-37 To copy using the “Booklet Original” function 0 This function is available if optional finisher FS-603 is installed or the saddle stitcher is installed on optional finisher FS-514. 1 Position the document to be copied. – Load a booklet with the staples removed. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. – When using the original glass, position the pages in order, starting with the side that includes the first page, then the side that includes the second page, then the side that includes the third page. – When using the ADF, load the pages with the side that includes the first page on top. 9 Application functions 9-38 bizhub C252 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Book Copy/Repeat]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Book Copy/Repeat screen appears. 3 Touch [Booklet Original]. The Booklet Original screen appears. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-39 4 Touch either [Center Erase ON] or [Center Erase OFF]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – To cancel the "Booklet Original" function, touch [OFF]. 5 Touch [OK]. 6 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 8 Press the [Start] key. – If the document is placed on the original glass, scanning begins. Touch [Finish], and then press the [Start] key to begin printing. – For details on scanning the document from the original glass, refer to "Scanning a multi-page document from the original glass" on page 4-18. 9 Application functions 9-40 bizhub C252 9.9 Tiling copy images (“Image Repeat” function) A single document image can be copied repeatedly onto a single sheet of paper. The copies are produced with the number of repeats automatically adjusted according to the document and paper sizes and the zoom ratio. The following repeating formats and settings are available. Setting Description With Margin Multiple copies are printed of the entire image within the specified area. The area around the image appears as a margin. Without Margin Multiple copies of the selected area of the image are printed to fill the paper; however, a part of the image may be cut off. Document "With Margin" setting "Without Margin" setting Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-41 To copy using the “Image Repeat” function 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 2 Load the paper to be used into the desired paper tray. 3 Touch [Application], and then touch [Book Copy/Repeat]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Book Copy/Repeat screen appears. 4 Touch [Image Repeat]. The Image Repeat screen appears. [Booklet Original] appears if the saddle stitcher is installed on optional finisher FS-514 or optional finisher FS-603 is installed. 9 Application functions 9-42 bizhub C252 5 Select the layout method. 6 Check the scanning size under "Scan Range", touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. – If the document size does not appear under "Scan Range"or to specify the scanning area, touch [Set Range], and then specify the area to be scanned from any of the screens. – When the document is loaded into the ADF, the document size is automatically detected when the [Start] key is pressed, so no document size appears under "Scan Range". – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-43 – To cancel the "Image Repeat" function, touch [OFF]. ? Can sizes in inches be displayed? % Touch [ ] or [ ] to display a different list of sizes. If [Custom Size] is touched, the Custom Size screen appears. If [Photo Size] is touched, the Photo Size screen appears. Standard Size screen Custom Size screen Photo Size screen 9 Application functions 9-44 bizhub C252 ? Can any size be specified? % Any size can be specified from the Custom Size screen. Touch [X] or [Y] to select the dimension, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to specify the correct value. ? What happens when a value outside of the allowable range is specified? % The message "Input Error" appears. If "Input Error" appears or if the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then specify the correct value. 7 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper], and then select the paper tray loaded with the paper. 8 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 9 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 10 Press the [Start] key. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-45 9.10 Copying an enlarged image on multiple pages (“Poster Mode” function) A document image can be divided, and each section of the image can be printed enlarged. The finished size can be specified by the image size, zoom ratio or paper size. To copy using the “Poster Mode” function 1 Position the document onto the original glass. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Book Copy/Repeat]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Book Copy/Repeat screen appears. 9 Application functions 9-46 bizhub C252 3 Touch [Poster Mode]. The Poster Mode screen appears. [Booklet Original] appears if optional finisher FS-603 is installed or the saddle stitcher is installed on optional finisher FS-514. 4 Touch [Image Size], [Zoom] or [Paper Size] under "Finished Size". – The factory default setting for the finished size is "A2". Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-47 – Touch [Image Size], select the finished image size, and then touch [OK]. – If [Inches] is touched, a screen containing preset sizes in inches appears. – If [Custom Size] is touched, the Custom Size screen appears. Touch [X] or [Y] to select the dimension, and then use the keypad to specify the desired value. – Touch [Zoom], use the keypad to type in the desired value, and then touch [OK]. 9 Application functions 9-48 bizhub C252 – Touch [Paper Size], select the finished paper size, and then touch [OK]. 5 Check the document size under "Original Size" and then touch [OK] – If the document size does not appear or to specify the document size, touch [Standard Size] and then specify the document size from any of the screens. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-49 – When the document is loaded into the ADF, the document size does not appear. If a standard-sized document is loaded, the document size is automatically detected after the [Start] key is pressed. If a non-standard-sized document is loaded, the document size is not detected. Therefore, specify the document size in the Custom Size screen, and then press the [Start] key. Standard Size screen Custom Size screen Photo Size screen 9 Application functions 9-50 bizhub C252 ? Can sizes in inches be displayed? % Touch [ ] or [ ] to display a different list of sizes. If [Custom Size] is touched, the Custom Size screen appears. If [Photo Size] is touched, the Photo Size screen appears. ? Can any size be specified? % Any size can be specified from the Custom Size screen. Touch [X] or [Y] to select the dimension, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to specify the correct value. ? What happens when a value outside of the allowable range is specified? % The message "Input Error" appears. If "Input Error" appears or if the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then specify the correct value. 6 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. The number of copies is set to "1" and cannot be changed. 7 Press the [Start] key. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-51 9.11 Copying with the page layout of a magazine (“Booklet” function) The page order of the scanned document is automatically arranged to produce double-sided copies in a page layout for center binding, such as for a magazine. ! Detail Generally, a multiple of 4 document pages is required with a single-sided document, and a multiple of 2 document pages is required with a doublesided document. If there are not enough pages, blank pages are automatically added at the end. For details on stapling, refer to "Specifying center binding" on page 4-96. For a document that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the document in separate batches (“Separate Scan” setting)" on page 4-13. The binding margin width is automatically specified. 9 Application functions 9-52 bizhub C252 To copy using the “Booklet” function 0 This function is available if optional finisher FS-603 is installed or the saddle stitcher is installed on optional finisher FS-514. 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Booklet]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. 3 Touch either [Left Bind] or [Right Bind]. – If the document contains only pages in the landscape orientation, they will be bound at the top, regardless of which setting is selected. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – To cancel the "Booklet" function, touch [OFF]. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-53 4 Touch [OK]. 5 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 6 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 7 Press the [Start] key. 9 Application functions 9-54 bizhub C252 9.12 Copying with image colors inversed (“Neg-/Pos. Reverse” function) A document can be copied with the light- and dark-colored areas or the colors (gradations) of the image inversed. ! Detail If the "Single Color" function is set, the colors are inversed with the selected color. If the "Background Color" function is set, the colors, including the selected background color, are inversed. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-55 To copy using the “Neg-/Pos. Reverse” function 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Edit Color]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Edit Color screen appears. 3 Touch [Neg-/Pos. Reverse]. ? How is the “Neg-/Pos. Reverse” function canceled? % Touch [Neg-/Pos. Reverse] again. 4 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 5 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 6 Press the [Start] key. 9 Application functions 9-56 bizhub C252 9.13 Copying in a mirror image (“Mirror Image” function) A copy can be printed in the mirror image of the original document. To copy using the “Mirror Image” function 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Edit Color]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Edit Color screen appears. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-57 3 Touch [Mirror Image]. The Mirror Image screen appears. 4 Check the document size under "Original Size", and then touch [OK]. – If the document size does not appear or to specify the document size, touch [Standard Size], and then specify the document size from any of the screens. – When the document is loaded into the ADF, the document size does not appear. If a standard-sized document is loaded, the document size is automatically detected after the [Start] key is pressed. If a non-standard-sized document is loaded, the document size is not detected. Therefore, specify the document size in the Custom Size screen, and then press the [Start] key. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 9 Application functions 9-58 bizhub C252 – To cancel the "Mirror Image" function, touch [OFF]. ? Can sizes in inches be displayed? % Touch[ ] or [ ] to display a different list of sizes. If [Custom Size] is touched, the Custom Size screen appears. If [Photo Size] is touched, the Photo Size screen appears. ? Can any size be specified? % Any size can be specified from the Custom Size screen. Touch [X] or [Y] to select the dimension, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to specify the correct value. Standard Size screen Custom Size screen Photo Size screen Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-59 ? What happens when a value outside of the allowable range is specified? % The message "Input Error" appears. If "Input Error" appears or if the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then specify the correct value. 5 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 6 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 7 Press the [Start] key. 9 Application functions 9-60 bizhub C252 9.14 Adding a background color to copies (“Background Color” function) This function allows you to copy a document using one of the 18 colors available as the color of the background (blank areas). ! Detail For sample images of the "Background Color" function, refer to "“Background Color” function" on page 1-36. To copy using the “Background Color” function 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Edit Color]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Edit Color screen appears. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-61 3 Touch [Background Color]. The Background Color screen appears. 4 Select the desired background color. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – To cancel the "Background Color" function, touch [OFF]. ? Can other background colors displayed? % Touch [ Back] or [Fwd. ] to display a different list of colors. 5 Touch [OK]. 9 Application functions 9-62 bizhub C252 6 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 8 Press the [Start] key. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-63 9.15 Adjusting the copy color quality (Adjust Color parameters) You can adjust the quality of color copies as desired. There are 10 Adjust Color parameters that can be used in any combination. In addition, you can check the specified settings by printing a sample copy. ! Detail To print a sample copy in order to check the print result with the current settings, touch [Sample Copy]. For details about sample copies, refer to "Checking the Print Result of the Adjust Color Settings (Sample Copy)" on page 9-66. Setting Description Brightness This parameter can be used to make the image either lighter or darker. Contrast This parameter can be used to make the image either crisper or smoother. Saturation This parameter can be used to adjust the vividness of the colors in the image. Red This parameter can be used to adjust the level of red in the image. Green This parameter can be used to adjust the level of green in the image. Blue This parameter can be used to adjust the level of blue in the image. Hue The hue is divided into red, blue and yellow. By adjusting the hue, the image can be made either more reddish or more bluish. Copy Density This parameter can be used to adjust the copy density. Sharpness This parameter emphasizes the edges of text so that they can be read more easily. In addition, this parameter can be used to make an overly sharp image softer or a blurry image clearer. Color Balance This parameter can be used to adjust the individual concentrations of yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C), and black (K). • Increasing the amount of yellow and magenta or decreasing the amount of cyan increases the red tinge. • Increasing the amount of yellow and cyan or decreasing the amount of magenta increases the green tinge. • Increasing the amount of magenta and cyan or decreasing the amount of yellow increases the blue tinge. • Increasing the amount of yellow or decreasing the amount of magenta and cyan increases the yellow tinge. • Increasing the amount of black increases the black tinge. 9 Application functions 9-64 bizhub C252 To adjust the Adjust Color parameters As an example, the procedure for adjusting the Brightness parameter is described below. 1 Touch [Application], and then touch [Edit Color]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Edit Color screen appears. 2 Touch [Adjust Color]. From the Adjust Color screen, select the desired parameter. The Adjust Color screen appears. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-65 3 Touch [Brightness] in the Adjust Color screen. The Darker <-> Lighter (Brightness) screen appears. 4 Touch [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] to change the setting. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – To cancel the "Brightness" parameter, touch [OFF]. – The "Sharpness" parameter can only be specified in single increments. – In the Color Balance screen, touch the button for a color, and then specify the adjustment setting. ? How can a setting be specified for the Adjust Color parameter? % To change the setting, touch [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] to specify a setting between -3 and +3 in increments of 1 or 1/3. 5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 2 Note Even though the setting can be specified in increments of 1/3, the setting will appear at the nearest full increment in the Adjust Color screen. 9 Application functions 9-66 bizhub C252 Checking the Print Result of the Adjust Color Settings (Sample Copy) You can make a sample copy of your document to see how it will appear with the currently specified color adjustment settings. As an example, the procedure for the Brightness parameter is described below. ! Detail For details on displaying the screen for each Adjust Color parameter, refer to "Adjusting the copy color quality (Adjust Color parameters)" on page 9-63. 2 Note [Sample Copy] does not appear in the Color Balance screen. When the Sample Copy screen is displayed, no key other than [Reset] or [Start] can be used. Place the document on the original glass with the image to be checked positioned within the sample area. The sample copy will be printed even if the edges of the document extend off the original glass. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-67 To make sample copies 1 Touch [Sample Copy] in the Darker ´ Lighter (Brightness) screen. The Sample Copy screen appears. 2 Load paper of a size listed under "Paper that can be used" into the paper tray. 3 Place the document within the sample area of the original glass. 4 Press the [Start] key. 2 Note After the sample copy is printed, the parameter screen appears again. Each sample copy that is printed is counted in the print counter. 9 Application functions 9-68 bizhub C252 9.16 Adding filing margins to copies (“Page Margin” function) Copies can be printed with a filing margin so that the pages can easily be filed. When making double-sided copies, the image orientation can adjusted by specifying the position of the filing margin. In addition, the image orientation can adjusted without creating a filing margin. ! Detail If the positions of the staples or punched holes are different from the binding position, the positions of the staples or punched holes are given priority. 3 3 ABC DEF GHI ABC DEF GHI 1 2 BC EF HI “Left” setting “Top” setting “Right” setting Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-69 To copy using the “Page Margin” function 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Page Margin]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Page Margin screen appears. 3 Specify the position of the filing margin. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – To cancel the "Page Margin" function, touch [OFF]. – If "Auto" is selected, the binding margin is set at the top or at the left. 9 Application functions 9-70 bizhub C252 ? What happens when “Auto” is specified? % The factory default setting is "Auto". Touch [Auto] to automatically determine the binding position according to the orientation of the loaded document. If the document length is 297 mm or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the document length is more than 297 mm, a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected. 4 Using the keypad, specify the margin width. – If "None" is selected, the margin width is set to 0 mm. When making double-sided copies, the image orientation can adjusted without creating a filing margin. ? What happens when a value outside of the allowable range is specified? % The message "Input Error" appears. If "Input Error" appears or if the filing margin was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then specify the correct value. ? How can the entered margin position be corrected? % Without changing the margin width, change the margin position. 5 Touch [OK]. 6 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 8 Press the [Start] key. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-71 9.17 Erasing specified areas of copies (“Erase” function) Copies can be produced by erasing unwanted areas around the document, such as the transmission information on received faxes and the shadows of punched holes. With frame erasing, the same width can be erased along all four sides of the document or a different width can be erased along each side of the document. To copy using the “Erase” function 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Erase]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Erase screen appears. A A A: 0.0 mm to 50.0 mm 9 Application functions 9-72 bizhub C252 3 Specify the area to be erased. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – To cancel the "Erase" function, touch [OFF]. ? What happens when [Frame] is selected? % The same width is erased on all four sides of the document. The factory default setting is "Frame". ? Can the settings be combined? % "Frame" cannot be combined with the other settings ("Top", "Left", "Right" or "Bottom"). 4 Touch [-], [+] or [None] to specify the width to be erased. – To specify a different width to be erased depending on the position, specify different settings for "Top", "Left", "Right", and "Bottom". – When using the keypad to specify the settings, press the [C] (clear) key, and then specify the setting. ? What happens when a value outside of the allowable range is specified? % The message "Input Error" appears. If "Input Error" appears or if the erased width was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then specify the correct value. 5 Touch [OK]. 6 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 8 Press the [Start] key. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-73 9.18 Adjusting the image to fit the paper (Image Adjustment settings) When the copy paper is larger than the original document, copies can be made with the document image centered and enlarged to fill the paper. The image can be adjusted in any of the following ways. Setting Description Full Size The area that contains the entire image is centered and enlarged to the size of the paper. "Centering" is also selected automatically. Center Zoom The image is enlarged to the size of the paper so that the paper is filled. However, some parts of the image may be lost. "Centering" is also selected automatically. Centering The image is centered in the paper without being enlarged. Full Size Center Zoom Centering 9 Application functions 9-74 bizhub C252 To copy using the Image Adjustment settings 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. – If "Full Size" or "Center Zoom" is to be set, position the document on the original glass. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Image Adjustment]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Image Adjustment screen appears. 3 Touch the button for the desired setting. – If "Full Size" or "Center Zoom" is selected, "Centering" is also selected. – Only "Centering" can also be selected. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel] – To cancel the Image Adjustment settings, touch [OFF]. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-75 4 Check the document size under "Original Size", and then touch [OK]. – If the document size does not appear or to specify the document size, touch [Standard Size], and then specify the document size from any of the screens. – When the document is loaded into the ADF, the document size does not appear. If a standard-sized document is loaded, the document size is automatically detected after the [Start] key is pressed. If a non-standard-sized document is loaded, the document size is not detected. Therefore, specify the document size in the Custom Size screen, and then press the [Start] key. Standard Size screen Custom Size screen Photo Size screen 9 Application functions 9-76 bizhub C252 ? Can sizes in inches be displayed? % Touch [ ] or [ ] to display a different list of sizes. If [Custom Size] is touched, the Custom Size screen appears. If [Photo Size] is touched, the Photo Size screen appears. ? Can any size be specified? % Any size can be specified from the Custom Size screen. Touch [X] or [Y] to select the dimension, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to specify the correct value. ? What happens when a value outside of the allowable range is specified? % The message "Input Error" appears. If "Input Error" appears or if the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then specify the correct value. 5 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 6 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 7 Press the [Start] key. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-77 9.19 Printing the Date/Time, page number or distribution number on copies (Stamp functions) The date/time or page number can be added to copies at the specified location, or a distribution number can be added when multiple copies are made. The following Stamp functions are available and can be combined. Setting Description Reference Date/Time Select a format and print the date or time on the specified pages. Refer to p. 9-78. Page # Select a format and print page numbers starting with the specified page number. Refer to p. 9-81. Set Numbering Print a four-digit distribution number in the background of each set of copies. Refer to p. 9-85. Copy Protect Print copies with copy protection text (hidden text that prevents improper copying), such as a preset stamp or the date. Refer to p. 9-87. 9 Application functions 9-78 bizhub C252 Printing the Date/Time (“Date/Time” function) To copy using the “Date/Time” function 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Stamp screen appears. 3 Touch [Date/Time]. The Date/Time screen appears. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-79 4 Touch the buttons for the desired settings under "Date Type", "Time Type" and "Pages". – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – To cancel the "Date/Time" function, touch [OFF]. – To print the stamp only on the front cover page, touch [Cover Only]. – The stamp will not be printed on blank pages inserted using the "Cover Mode", "Insert Sheet" and "Chapters" functions. ? Can the time be omitted? % If "None" is selected, the time is not printed. 5 Touch [Print Position], and then select the printing position. 9 Application functions 9-80 bizhub C252 – To make fine adjustments to the printing position, touch [Change Adjustment]. Select the desired direction under "Left & Right Adjustment" or "Top & Bottom Adjustment", use the keypad or touch [–] and [+] to specify the adjustment setting, and then touch [OK]. ? What are the limits on the adjustment amount? % The print position can be finely adjusted in 0.1 mm increments. ? Can no adjustments be made? % To make no left/right or up/down adjustments, touch [No Adj.]. ? What happens when a value outside of the allowable range is specified? % The message "Input Error" appears. If "Input Error" appears or if the adjustment value was incorrectly entered, touch [No Adj.] or press the [C] (clear) key, and then specify the correct value. 6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. 7 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 8 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 9 Press the [Start] key. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-81 Printing the page number (“Page #” function) To copy using the “Page #” function 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Stamp screen appears. 3 Touch [Page #]. The Page # screen appears. 9 Application functions 9-82 bizhub C252 4 Using the keypad, type in the starting page number. – If necessary, touch [Chapter], and then use the keypad to type in the chapter number. – The setting for "Page #" can be set to a number between –99999 and 99999, and the setting for "Chapter" can be set to a number between –100 and 100. When specifying a starting number, switch the number between positive and negative by pressing the [ ] key. If a negative value is specified, the numbers are not printed until the numbering reaches 1. For example, if "–1" was specified, the numbers are printed starting with "1" on the third copied page. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – To cancel the "Page #" function, touch [OFF]. 5 Specify the page number format. 6 Touch [Print Position], and then select the printing position. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-83 – To make fine adjustments to the printing position, touch [Change Adjustment]. Select the desired direction under "Left & Right Adjustment" or "Top & Bottom Adjustment", use the keypad or touch [–] and [+] to specify the adjustment setting, and then touch [OK]. – To also specify settings for Application functions "Cover Mode", "Insert Sheet" and "Chapters", touch [Insert Sheet Setting], and then select the settings for the pages to be printed. – Blank pages inserted using the "Cover Mode", "Insert Sheet" and "Chapters" functions are only counted, but page numbers are not printed on them. – If "Except for Front Cover" or "Do Not Print Page #" is selected under "Cover Mode", page numbers are printed starting with "2" in single-sided copies and starting with "3" in double-sided copies. 9 Application functions 9-84 bizhub C252 – If "Do Not Print Page #" is selected, inserted pages are only counted, but page numbers are not printed on them. If "Skip the page(s)" is selected, inserted pages are not counted and page numbers are not printed on them. ? What are the limits on the adjustment amount? % The print position can be finely adjusted in 0.1 mm increments. ? Can no adjustments be made? % To make no left/right or up/down adjustments, touch [No Adj.]. ? What happens when a value outside of the allowable range is specified? % The message "Input Error" appears. If "Input Error" appears or if the adjustment value was incorrectly entered, touch [No Adj.] or press the [C] (clear) key, and then specify the correct value. 7 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Stamp screen appears again. 8 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 9 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 10 Press the [Start] key. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-85 Printing the distribution number (“Set Numbering” function) ! Detail The distribution number is normally printed as a four-digit number. If "Start Number" is set to "1", "0001" is printed. To copy using the “Set Numbering” function 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Stamp screen appears. 3 Touch [Set Numbering]. The Set Numbering screen appears. 9 Application functions 9-86 bizhub C252 4 Using the keypad, type in the starting number. – The starting number can be set between 0 and 9999. – To print the stamp only on the front cover page, touch [Cover Only]. – The stamp will not be printed on blank pages inserted using the "Cover Mode", "Insert Sheet" and "Chapters" functions. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. – To cancel the "Set Numbering" function, touch [OFF]. 5 Touch a button under "Text Color" and under "Pages" to specify the desired settings. – Pages printed with the "Black" Color setting and "Red" or "Blue" selected under "Text Color" are counted as 2-color prints. – If the color of the stamp text is different from the second color selected when "Color" was set to "2 Color", copies are included in the Full Color counter. 6 Touch [OK]. 7 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 8 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 9 Press the [Start] key. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-87 Printing copy protection text (“Copy Protect” function) ! Detail If the "Copy Protect" function is set, hidden text is printed in order to prevent improper copying. When a document printed with copy protection text is copied, the hidden text appears clearly repeated in the copies so that the reader knows that it is a copy. The copy protection text is printed on all pages. Specific pages cannot be specified. To copy using the “Copy Protect” function 1 Position the document to be copied. – For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 4-9. 2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp]. – To cancel all settings for the Application functions, touch [Reset]. The Stamp screen appears. 3 3 2 2 1 1 REPORT 3 3 2 1 2 1 REPORT 3 3 Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft 2 2 Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft Draft 1 1 REPORT 9 Application functions 9-88 bizhub C252 3 Touch [Copy Protect]. The Copy Protect screen appears. 4 Select the format for the copy protection text. – To cancel the "Copy Protect" function, touch [OFF]. Touching [OFF] in the settings screen for the format of copy protection text only cancels the settings in that screen. – The selected copy protection text formats appear in a column at the center of the screen. Up to eight text lines can be combined. – If more than eight text lines are selected, the new ones are added at the top of the column, replacing the ones at the bottom. – If [Registered Stamp] or [Fixed Stamp] was touched, a screen containing buttons for the available stamps appears. Touch the button for the desired stamp, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-89 – Multiple registered stamps or preset stamps cannot be selected. – If [Date/Time] was touched, the Copy Protect>Date/Time screen appears. Select the desired settings under "Date Type" and "Time Type", and then touch [OK]. – The copy protection date and time that is printed is the date and time when the document is scanned. – If [Serial Number] key is touched, the serial number for this machine is printed. – For details on specifying the serial number, contact your technical representative. – If necessary, touch [Detail Settings], and then change the copy protection settings. Touch the desired button in the Copy Protect>Detail Setting screen, and then change the setting in the screen that appears. 9 Application functions 9-90 bizhub C252 – The factory default settings are listed below. [Color]: Black, [Density]: Standard, [Pattern]: Embossed (Pattern Contrast 0), [Size]: Normal, [Pattern Overwrite]: Front Color screen Density screen Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-91 – The settings under "Pattern Contrast" in the Pattern screen can only be specified in single increments between –2 and +2. Pattern Size screen Pattern Overwrite screen Pattern screen 9 Application functions 9-92 bizhub C252 – If necessary, touch [Position], and then change the printing angle in the Position screen. Select desired angle, and then touch [OK]. – If necessary, touch [Change Position/Delete] in the Position screen, and then change the arrangement of the text in the Position Change/Delete screen. – If there are no more than four lines in the selected copy protection text, the angle can be changed. – To change the arrangement, touch [Change Position], select the copy protection text to be moved, and then touch either [Up] or [Down]. Application functions 9 bizhub C252 9-93 – To add space to the copy protection text, touch [Insert Space]. Touch either [Up] or [Down] to move the arrow that appeared beside the specified formats for the copy protection text, and then touch [Insert]. – To delete the copy protection text, touch [Delete], and then touch the button for the copy protection text to be deleted. 5 Touch [OK]. 6 If necessary, specify any other copy settings. 7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. 8 Press the [Start] key. 9 Application functions 9-94 bizhub C252 2 Note If the document is a single color and "Magenta" or "Cyan" was selected as the color for the copy protection text, the copies will be counted as having two colors in the Total counter. The same will occur if the document is a single color other than black and the color for the copy protection text is set to "Black". 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-3 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10.1 Replacing the toner cartridge When the toner is about to run out, the advanced warning message shown below appears. ! Detail About 1000 (A4) pages can be printed after the message "Toner Cartridge (X) needs to be replaced soon." appears. When the message appears, prepare to replace the toner cartridge according to your maintenance agreement. When the message "There is no toner." appears, the machine stops operating. 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-4 bizhub C252 When the toner is empty, the warning message shown below appears and copies can no longer be made. 2 Note When the message appears, replace the toner cartridge according to your maintenance agreement. ! Detail For details on replacing the toner cartridges, refer to "To replace the toner cartridge" on page 10-6. Display in Enlarge Display mode When the toner is empty, the screen shown below appears. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-5 Touch to display the message shown below. 7 CAUTION Handling toner and the toner cartridges % Do not throw toner or the toner cartridge into a fire. % Toner expelled from the fire may cause burns. 7 CAUTION Precautions for toner spills % Be careful not to spill toner inside the machine or get toner on your clothes or hands. % If your hands become soiled with toner, immediately wash them with soap and water. % If toner gets in your eyes, immediately flush them with water, and then seek professional medical attention. 2 Reminder Do not replace the toner cartridge until the message "There is no Toner." appears. In addition, do not replace the toner cartridge of any color other than the one indicated in the message on the touch panel. 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-6 bizhub C252 To replace the toner cartridge The procedure for replacing any of the toner cartridges (yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C) or black (K)) is the same. Example: Replacing the black toner cartridge 0 When replacing the black toner cartridge, be sure to replace filter 2. A new filter 2 is included in the package with the black toner cartridge. 0 When replacing the black toner cartridge, be sure to clean the electrostatic charger wire. For details on cleaning the electrostatic charger wire, refer to "Electrostatic charger wire" on page 11-7. 1 Open the machine’s front door. 2 Pull up the locking tab of the empty toner cartridge to unlock it. Pull out the toner cartridge as far as possible, and then pull it up to remove it. ? How are used toner cartridge disposed of? % Do not throw away used toner cartridges. Instead, keep them in their boxes to be collected by your technical representative. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-7 3 Prepare the new toner cartridge. – Make sure that the toner cartridge is the same color as the label in the cartridge compartment. ? Can a toner cartridge of a different color be installed? % The toner cartridge of a color different than the one that was removed cannot be installed. If the wrong toner cartridge is installed with extreme force, the machine may be damaged. 4 Remove the new toner cartridge from its packaging, and then shake the cartridge up and down 5 to 10 times. – The toner within the toner cartridge may have become compacted. If it has, be sure to shake the toner cartridge until the toner is mostly broken up before installing the cartridge. 5 Align the toner cartridge with the slots in the machine, and then insert the cartridge until the locking tab locks into place. – When inserting the new toner cartridge, fully insert it until it snaps into place. 6 Close the front door. ? Why can’t the door be closed securely? % Check that the toner cartridge is fully inserted. 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-8 bizhub C252 2 Note Check that a toner cartridge of the same color as the one to be replaced has been prepared. 2 Reminder Be careful about the installation location of the toner cartridges, since it is different for other colors. The shape of the black toner cartridge is different from the shapes of the toner cartridges for the other colors. When installing the new filter 2, fully insert it until it snaps into place. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-9 10.2 Replacing the staples When finisher is installed and is about to run out of staples, the message shown below appears. Display in Enlarge Display mode ! Detail Be sure to replace the staple cartridge only after the message appears, otherwise the machine may be damaged. 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-10 bizhub C252 To replace the staple cartridge for finisher FS-501 1 Slide the finisher away from the machine. 2 Turn the jammed-staple-clearing dial to the left in order to position stapler at the center. 3 Pull the staple cartridge holder toward you from stapler, as described in the touch panel messages. Staple cartridge holders Stapler Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-11 4 Remove the staple cartridge from the staple case. 5 Load the new staple cartridge into the staple cartridge holder. – Fully insert the staple cartridge as far as possible. 6 Peel the tape off of the staple cartridge. 7 Insert the staple cartridge holder until it locks into place. Staple cartridge 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-12 bizhub C252 8 Slide the finisher back against the machine. 2 Reminder Be sure to replace the staple cartridge only after the message appears, otherwise the machine may be damaged. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-13 To replace the staple cartridge for finisher FS-603 1 Open the front door of the finisher. 2 Turn misfeed-clearing dial 1 clockwise until the removal indicator is completely blue. ? What should be done if the misfeed-clearing dial 1 is turned too far? % Turn the misfeed-clearing dial 1 counterclockwise to finely adjust it. 3 Slowly pull out the stapler unit as far as possible. Removal indicator Misfeedclearing dial 1 Stapler unit 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-14 bizhub C252 4 Grasp both sides of the staple cartridge holder, lift it up, and then pull it out. 5 Press the button marked "PUSH" on the side of the staple cartridge holder. The staple case is released. 6 Pull up the staple case. Staple cartridge holder Staple cartridge holder Staple case Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-15 7 Remove the staple cartridge from the staple case. 8 Load the new staple cartridge into the staple cartridge holder. – Fully insert the staple cartridge as far as possible. 9 Press the staple case down. 10 Peel the tape off of the staple cartridge. Staple cartridge 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-16 bizhub C252 11 Insert the staple cartridge holder, making sure the tabs on the holder slide along the rails in the compartment. 12 Insert the staple cartridge holder until it locks into place. – Check that the staple cartridge holder is securely installed. 13 Carefully move the stapler unit back into its original position. 14 Close the front door. 2 Reminder Be sure to replace the staple cartridge only after the message appears, otherwise the machine may be damaged. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-17 To replace the staple cartridge in the finisher FS-514 1 Open the front door. 2 Remove the staple cartridge holder. – Pull the staple cartridge holder toward you to remove it. – Only touch the blue parts of the staple cartridge. 3 Remove the empty cartridge from the staple cartridge holder. 4 Load the new staple cartridge into the staple cartridge holder. – Do not remove the remaining staples, otherwise the machine will not be able to staple after the cartridge is replaced. 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-18 bizhub C252 5 Insert the staple cartridge holder, making sure the tabs on the holder slide along the rails in the compartment. – Check that the staple cartridge holder is securely installed. 6 Close the front door. 2 Reminder Replace the staple cartridge only after the message has appeared. If the staple cartridge is replaced before the message appears, the machine may be damaged. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-19 To replace the staple cartridge in saddle stitcher 1 Raise the copy output tray, and then push down the staple cartridge holder and remove it. 2 Press in the area marked "PUSH" to unlock the staple cartridge holder. 3 Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple cartridge holder. PUSH 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-20 bizhub C252 4 Load the new staple cartridge into the staple cartridge holder. 5 Slowly pull off the seal. 6 Insert the staple cartridge holder, and then push it up until it locks into place. – When inserting the staple cartridge holder, be sure to insert it so that it faces the correct direction. 7 Return the copy output tray to its original position. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-21 8 Pull the handle of the misfeedclearing door to open it, and then close it. 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-22 bizhub C252 10.3 Clearing a staple jam If a staple jam occurs in the finisher, the message shown below appears. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-23 2 Reminder Be careful when clearing jammed staples since injuries may result. If the staples become jammed, follow the procedure described below. If the paper is pulled out with too much force, the stapler may be damaged. 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-24 bizhub C252 To clear jammed staples in finisher FS-501 1 Slide the finisher away from the machine. 2 Turn the jammed-staple-clearing dial to the left in order to position stapler at the center. 3 Pull the staple cartridge holder out toward you. Stapler Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-25 4 Swing open the shutter of the staple cartridge holder, and then pull out one sheet of staples. 5 Return the shutter of the staple cartridge holder to its original position. 6 Insert the staple cartridge holder until it locks into place. 7 Slide the finisher back against the machine. 2 Reminder If stapling still cannot be resumed, even after performing the above procedure, contact your technical representative. Sheet of staples Shutter 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-26 bizhub C252 To clear jammed staples in finisher FS-603 0 If the message "Staple mode cannot be used." appears, be sure to perform the following procedure. If the following procedure is not followed and the paper is pulled out with too much force, the stapler unit may be damaged. 1 Slide the finisher away from the machine. 2 Open the horizontal transport unit cover, and then remove any misfed paper. 3 Close the horizontal transport unit cover. 4 Open the misfeed-clearing guide for the finisher, and then remove any misfed paper. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-27 5 Open the front door of the finisher. 6 Turn misfeed-clearing dial 1 clockwise until the removal indicator is completely blue. ? If the misfeed-clearing dial 1 is turned too far % Turn the misfeed-clearing dial 1 counterclockwise to finely adjust it. 7 Remove all paper fed into the exit tray 1. Removal indicator Misfeedclearing dial 1 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-28 bizhub C252 8 Open the Right-side door, and then pull out any misfed paper in the transport section. 9 Clockwise turn the misfeed-clearing dial in the folding section. Feed out into the exit tray 2 the paper that could not be fed out in step 8, and then pull out the paper. 10 Slowly pull out the stapler unit as far as possible. Misfeed-clearing dial in the folding section Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-29 11 Turn misfeed-clearing dial 2 clockwise until the cartridge removal indicators are aligned. The staple cartridge moves to a position from where it can be removed. ? What should be done if the misfeed-clearing dial 2 is turned too far? % Turn the misfeed-clearing dial 2 counterclockwise to adjust it so the cartridge removal indicators are aligned. 12 Grasp both sides of the staple cartridge holder, lift it up, and then pull it out. 13 Swing open the shutter of the staple cartridge. Removal 2 position Staple cartridge holder 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-30 bizhub C252 14 Pull out toward you the two staples jammed at the end of the staple cartridge. ? What happens if both staples are not removed? % Stapling cannot continue correctly. 15 Return the shutter of the staple cartridge to its original position. 16 Insert the staple cartridge holder, making sure the tabs on the holder slide along the rails in the compartment. 17 Insert the staple cartridge holder until it locks into place. – Check that the staple cartridge holder is securely installed. 18 Carefully move the stapler unit back into its original position. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-31 19 Close the front door. 20 Slide the finisher back against the machine. 2 Reminder Do not pull out paper with too much force, otherwise the folding unit may be damaged. 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-32 bizhub C252 To clear jammed staples in the finisher FS-514 1 Remove all paper from the finisher. 2 Open the front door. 3 Raise lever FN1, turn lever FN2, and then pull out any paper. 4 Lower guide FN3, and then pull out any paper. FN1 FN2 FN3 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-33 – If the punch kit is installed, pull out the hole-punch waste container FN3.1. 5 Return guide FN3 to its original position. – If the punch kit is installed, insert hole-punch waste container FN3.1 in its original position. 6 Turn dial FN4 to feed the paper, open the transport unit cover, and then pull out any paper. 7 Turn dial FN5 or dial FN6, and then pull out any paper. FN3.1 FN4 FN6 FN5 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-34 bizhub C252 8 Turn the dial to the left to move the stapler toward the front. 9 Remove the staple cartridge holder. – Pull the staple cartridge holder toward you to remove it. – Only touch the blue parts of the staple cartridge. 10 Swing open the shutter of the staple cartridge holder, and then pull out one sheet of staples. 11 Return the shutter of the staple cartridge holder to its original position. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-35 12 Insert the staple cartridge holder, making sure the tabs on the holder slide along the rails in the compartment. – Check that the staple cartridge holder is securely installed. 13 Close the front door. 2 Reminder If stapling still cannot be resumed, even after performing the above procedure, contact your technical representative. 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-36 bizhub C252 To clear jammed staples in the saddle stitcher 1 Open the front door. 2 Raise lever FN1, turn lever FN2, and then pull out any paper. 3 Lower guide FN3, and then pull out any paper. – If the punch kit is installed, pull out the hole-punch waste container FN3.1. FN1 FN2 FN3 FN3.1 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-37 4 Return guide FN3 to its original position. – If the punch kit is installed, insert hole-punch waste container FN3.1 in its original position. 5 Turn dial FN4 to feed the paper, open the transport unit cover, and then pull out any paper. 6 Turn dial FN5 or dial FN6, and then pull out any paper. 7 Open the misfeed-clearing door, and then pull out any paper. 8 Close the misfeed-clearing door. FN4 FN6 FN5 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-38 bizhub C252 9 Raise the finishing tray, and then push down the staple cartridge holder and remove it. 10 Swing open the shutter of the staple cartridge holder, and then pull out one sheet of staples. 11 Return the shutter of the staple cartridge holder to its original position. 12 Insert the staple cartridge holder, and then push it down until it locks into place. 13 Return the copy output tray to its original position. 14 Close the front door. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-39 10.4 Emptying the waste containers If the hole-punch waste container in punch kit installed on finisher becomes full, the message shown below appears (if it can be emptied by the user). 2 Note The setting for emptying the hole-punch waste container should be specified by the technical representative. For details, contact the technical representative. The default setting is "Service". If a message appears, immediately contact the technical representative. Display for the Punch Dust Box setting 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-40 bizhub C252 Display while a job is being performed ! Detail When performed by user If the hole-punch waste container has become full while a job is being performed, the job being performed is paused. To continue the job without canceling the Punch setting, empty the hole-punch waste container. To cancel the Punch setting and continue the job, touch [Cancel Punch]. When performed by technical representative If the hole-punch waste container has become full while a job is being performed, the job being performed is paused. To continue the job, touch [Cancel Punch]. However, the continued job is printed without holes being punched. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-41 Display in Enlarge Display mode 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-42 bizhub C252 To empty the hole-punch waste container for finisher FS-603 Follow the procedure described below to empty the hole-punch waste container. 1 Slide the finisher away from the machine. 2 Pull out the hole-punch waste container. 3 Empty the hole-punch waste container. 4 Install the hole-punch waste container into its original position. 5 Slide the finisher back against the machine. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-43 To empty the hole-punch waste container for finisher FS-514 Follow the procedure described below to empty the hole-punch waste container. 1 Open the front door. 2 Pull out the hole-punch waste container FN3.1. 3 Empty the hole-punch waste container. 4 Insert the hole-punch waste container at its original position. 5 Close the front door. FN3.1 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-44 bizhub C252 10.5 Replacing the waste toner box When it is almost time to replace the waste toner box (and if it is replaceable by the user), the message shown in the following illustration appears, warning about the replacement period. 2 Reminder When the message appears, replace the specified supplies or part according to your maintenance agreement. ! Detail The number of copies that can be made from the time that the message "Please have Waste Toner Box replaced soon." appears until the time that the message "Waste Toner Box needs replacing. Follow the Replacing Instruction." appears differs depending on the specified copy settings and the part/supplies. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-45 When it is time to replace the waste toner box (and if it is replaceable by the user), the message "Waste Toner Box needs replacing. Follow the Replacing Instruction." appears and the machine stops operating. Display in Enlarge Display mode When the time to replace the part is reached, the following screen appears. Touch to display the message shown below. 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-46 bizhub C252 To replace the waste toner box Follow the procedure described below to replace the waste toner box. 1 Open the machine’s front door. 2 Pull the waste toner release lever. 3 Remove the waste toner box. 4 Install the new waste toner box. Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10 bizhub C252 10-47 5 Remove filter 1, and then install the new filter 1. 6 Close the front door. 7 CAUTION Handling toner and the toner cartridges % Do not throw toner or the waste toner box into a fire. % Toner expelled from the fire may cause burns. 7 CAUTION Precautions for toner spills % Be careful not to spill toner inside the machine or get toner on your clothes or hands. % If your hands become soiled with toner, immediately wash them with soap and water. % If toner gets in your eyes, immediately flush them with water, and then seek professional medical attention. 10 Replacing toner cartridges and staples and emptying waste containers 10-48 bizhub C252 2 Reminder Do not tilt the removed waste toner box, otherwise waste toner may spill. Do not throw away used waste toner boxes. Instead, keep them in their boxes to be collected by your technical representative. 11 Care of the machine Care of the machine 11 bizhub C252 11-3 11 Care of the machine 11.1 Cleaning This section describes the procedures for cleaning each part. Housing 1 Clean the surface of the housing by wiping it with a soft cloth dampened with a mild household detergent. 2 Reminder Be sure to turn off the machine (set the power switch to “o”) before cleaning it. Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the housing. Original glass % Clean the surface of the original glass by wiping it with a soft, dry cloth. 2 Reminder Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the original glass. 11 Care of the machine 11-4 bizhub C252 Control panel % Clean the control panel by wiping it with a soft, dry cloth. 2 Reminder Pressing too hard on the control panel or the touch panel may damage them. In addition, never use a mild household detergent, glass cleaner, benzene or thinner to clean the control panel or touch panel. Care of the machine 11 bizhub C252 11-5 Document transfer belt 1 Clean the document transfer belt by wiping it with a soft cloth dampened with a mild household detergent. 2 Carefully slide the belt to the left to expose a hidden area of the belt. 3 Clean the newly exposed surface of the belt by wiping it with a soft cloth dampened with a mild household detergent (as in step 1). Repeat the above step until the entire surface of the document transfer belt has been wiped clean. 2 Reminder Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the document transfer belt. 11 Care of the machine 11-6 bizhub C252 Original cover pad % Clean the surface of the pad by wiping it with a soft cloth dampened with a mild household detergent. 2 Reminder Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the original cover pad. Paper Take-Up roller % Clean the paper take-up rollers by wiping them with a soft, dry cloth. 2 Reminder Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the paper takeup roller. Care of the machine 11 bizhub C252 11-7 Electrostatic charger wire If the electrostatic charger wire is dirty, streaks will appear though the printed images. If this occurs, follow the procedure described below to clean the electrostatic charger wire. 1 Open the machine’s front door. 2 Slowly pull out the charger-cleaning tool as far as possible. Next, slowly push in the charger-cleaning tool as much as possible. Repeat the above operations three times. 3 Securely insert each charger-cleaning tool, and then close the front door. 11 Care of the machine 11-8 bizhub C252 Print head If the print head becomes dirty, decreased print quality may result. If this occurs, clean the print head according to the following procedure. 1 Open the machine’s front door. 2 Remove the cleaning tool from the machine’s front door. 3 Insert the cleaning tool into the print head cleaning opening, pull it out, and then repeat this back and forth movement two or three times. Care of the machine 11 bizhub C252 11-9 11.2 Viewing counters (Meter Count) Viewing counters The Meter Count screen can be displayed so that the total number of prints since counting started can be viewed. In addition, the list of counters can be printed. To view the counters 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [Details] in the sub display area. The list of counters appears. ? Can the list of counters be printed? % Touch [Print], select the paper size, and then press the [Start] key. 11 Care of the machine 11-10 bizhub C252 3 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. 2 Note The list of counters can be displayed even while the machine is copying or printing. Care of the machine 11 bizhub C252 11-11 Viewing the coverage rate The amount of toner that was used can be viewed in the Toner Coverage screen. To view the coverage rate 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [Details] in the sub display area. The list of counters appears. 3 Touch [Toner Coverage]. 4 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again. 11 Care of the machine 11-12 bizhub C252 11.3 When the message “Preventive maintenance time.” appears If the message "Preventive maintenance time." appears, contact your technical representative and request a periodic maintenance inspection. 12 Managing jobs (Job List) Managing jobs (Job List) 12 bizhub C252 12-3 12 Managing jobs (Job List) 12.1 Overview of the Job List screen Jobs Specifying the desired copy settings, then pressing the [Start] key queues the copy operation in this machine. This queued operation is called a job. In the same way, operations for making scans and computer printouts are also queued as jobs. - Jobs that are being performed and the job log can be checked from the Job List screen. - Jobs are printed starting with the one at the top of the Current Jobs list. - Jobs are numbered in the order that they were programmed and are queued to be performed (printed). 2 Note The job number identifies the job; it does not indicate the printing order. In addition, the job number does not change until the job is deleted. By using the "Increase Priority" function, the selected job can be moved to the front of the queue so that it is printed first. 12 Managing jobs (Job List) 12-4 bizhub C252 Multi-Job feature Queued jobs are managed by the machine. - While one job is being printed, another job can be queued. A total of 251 jobs can be queued. - The number of jobs possible for each function is listed below. (The values listed below are for reference and may differ from the actual values depending on other settings.) – Copy mode: 5 – Interrupt mode: 1 – Scan mode: 5 – TWAIN (Push, Pull): 1 – Printing: 10 – Faxes (Quick transmissions): 1 – Faxes (Memory transmissions): 50 – Faxes (Timer TX): 20 – Received faxes: 100 – Faxes (Polling RX): 1 – Faxes (Polling TX): 1 – Shared: 56 – Total: 251 - When one job is finished being printed, the next queued print job automatically begins. 2 Note Up to 251 jobs, including print jobs, scanner transmission jobs, fax transmission jobs and received fax/saved jobs, can be queued. Managing jobs (Job List) 12 bizhub C252 12-5 Job list screens An overview of the Job List screens is provided below. - From the Job List screen, the following tabs for various specific functions can be displayed. – Print: Lists print jobs for copying, computer printing, and received faxes – Scan: Lists scanner transmission jobs – Fax TX: Lists fax transmission jobs – RX/User Box: Lists received fax jobs and print jobs saved in boxes 2 Note As the factory default, "Job List Default" is set to "Current Print Jobs". For details on changing the default display for the Job List screen, refer to "Display setting" on page 13-30. The screen for each function listed above can be displayed from any other Job List screen. However, if the screen is changed while a setting is being changed, that setting is canceled. - A Current Jobs list and a Job History list can be displayed for each function. – Current Jobs: Lists jobs that are queued and being performed, allowing you to check the current status of the machine – Job History: Lists jobs that have been completed, including jobs that were not performed due to an error, allowing you to check the history and results of all jobs - The type of jobs to be displayed can be selected from the Current Jobs list and Job History list. For example, the lists of stored jobs and active jobs are displayed in the Current Jobs list on the Print tab, and the lists of deleted jobs, completed jobs and all jobs are displayed in the Job History list. The types of jobs that can be selected differ depending on the selected tab. 12 Managing jobs (Job List) 12-6 bizhub C252 - The function of each button in the Job List screens is described below. Name Description [Print] A selected button indicates which job list is currently displayed. Displays the Print tab of the Job List screen [Scan] Displays the Scan tab of the Job List screen For details, refer to the Network Scanner Operations of the User manual. [Fax TX] Displays the Fax TX tab of the Job List screen For details, refer to the Facsimile Operations and the Network Facsimile Operations of the User manual. [RX/User Box] Displays the RX/User Box tab of the Job List screen For details, refer to the Facsimile Operations and the Network Facsimile Operations of the User manual. [Current Jobs] Switches from Job History to Current Jobs This lists the jobs that are currently being performed and the jobs are queued (waiting) to be performed. [Job History] Switches from Current Jobs to Job History. This lists the completed jobs. [Held Jobs] [Active Jobs] (displayed on the Current Jobs list of the Print tab) Specifies the type of jobs displayed in the Job List screen Change the display mode by touching the appropriate button. The buttons that appear differ depending on the tab or list (Current Jobs or Job History) that is displayed. [Exit] Quits Job List mode and returns to the screen that was displayed before [Job List] was touched [Delete]*1 Deletes job selected in the Current Jobs list. For details, refer to "To delete a job" on page 12-8. [Increase Priority] (displayed on the Current Jobs list of the Print tab) Selects the next job to be printed after the current job is finished. For details, refer to "To increase priority for printing" on page 12-19. The buttons that appear differ depending on the tab or list (Current Jobs or Job History) that is displayed. [Check Job]*1 Displays screens for checking the settings for the job selected in the Current Jobs list. For details, refer to "To check the job settings" on page 12-10. Managing jobs (Job List) 12 bizhub C252 12-7 *1 Displayed when the Current Jobs list is displayed. The following information is listed in the Print tab. [Detail] Displays screens for checking the status, results, error details, user name, queued time, completed time and number of copies for jobs in the job lists. For details, refer to "Displayed information" on page 12-11. [ ]/[ ] arrows When there are more jobs than the five that can be displayed at one time, touch these arrows to display jobs higher or lower in the list (higher or lower in the printing order). Name Description Item Name Description No. Job identification number assigned when the job is queued User Name Displays the type (source) of the job. "COPY" is displayed for copy jobs. Status (Current Jobs list only) Displays the status of the job Document Name Displays the name of the file for print jobs sent from a computer If user authentication settings have been applied, the names of documents are not displayed for other users. The names of confidential documents are not displayed for other users. Time Stored Displays the time that the job was queued # of Pgs. Displays the number of pages in the original document # of Sets Displays the number of printed pages With jobs listed as "Printing" in the Current Jobs list, a count of the number of pages printed is displayed. Result (Job History list only) Displays the result of the operation (Job Complete, Error Cleared, Deleted by User, Mode cancelled from conflict) 12 Managing jobs (Job List) 12-8 bizhub C252 12.2 Performing operations on jobs To delete a job A queued job or job being printed (job in the Active Jobs list) can be deleted. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Job List]. The Job List screen appears. 2 In the Print tab, display the job to be deleted. – Jobs in the Job History list cannot be deleted. 3 Select the job to be deleted, and then touch [Delete]. – If the job to be deleted is not displayed, touch [ ] and [ ] until the desired job is displayed. – If an incorrect job was selected, select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it. A message requesting confirmation to delete the job appears. Managing jobs (Job List) 12 bizhub C252 12-9 4 Check the information that is displayed, and then touch [Yes] if the correct job is indicated. – To quit deleting the job, touch [No]. The screen displayed before [Delete] was touched appears again, and the job is deleted from the Current Jobs list. 5 Touch [Exit] or press the [Reset] key. The screen that was displayed before [Job List] was touched appears again. 2 Note If user authentication settings have been applied and the machine is set so that jobs cannot be deleted by other users, the job is not deleted. 12 Managing jobs (Job List) 12-10 bizhub C252 To check the job settings Job settings for stored jobs, jobs being printed, jobs queued to be printed and held jobs can be checked. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Job List]. The Job List screen appears. 2 Display the list containing the job whose settings are to be checked. 3 Select the job whose settings are to be checked, and then touch [Check Job]. – If an incorrect job was selected, select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it. – The Mode Check screen appears. – The contents and number of Mode Check screens differ depending on the job that was selected. – The number to the left of [ Back] indicates the number of the currently displayed screen/the total number of screens. – To display the previous screen, touch [ Back]. To display the next screen, touch [Fwd. ]. 4 To finish checking the settings, touch [Close] or [Exit], or press the [Reset] key. – To return to the screen displayed before [Check Job] was touched, touch [Close]. – To return to the Basic screen, touch [Exit] or press the [Reset] key. Managing jobs (Job List) 12 bizhub C252 12-11 Displayed information The following information can be checked from the Job List screen. - Print tab Status (Receiving, Waiting, Printing, Printing Stopped, Print Error, Job Stored)*1, Result (Job complete, Error cleared, Deleted by User, Deleted Due To Error)*2, Error Detail*2, Document Name, User Name, Start Time, End Time, # of pgs., # of Sets, Output Tray - Scan tab Status (Transferring, Dialing, Waiting)*1, Result (Job complete, Error cleared, User Delete)*2, Error Detail*2, Address, Type, User Name, Time of Storage, End Time, # of pgs., File Name, No. of Dest (number of jobs being sent/number of specified recipients)*3 - Fax TX tab Status (Transferring, Waiting, Dialing, Redial Waiting)*1, Result (Job Complete, Error cleared, User Delete, Deleted Due To Error)*2, Error Detail*2, Address, Type, User Name, TX No., Time of Storage, Start Time*4, End Time, TX Time, # of pgs., Page Sent (number of jobs being sent/number of specified recipients)*3 - RX/User Box tab Detailed Status of Queued Job, Status (Receiving, Dialing)*1, Result (Job complete, Error cleared, User Delete, Deleted Due To Error)*2, Error Detail*2, RX User Box (box number/box name), User Name, Time Stored, # of pgs., # of Sets, Output Tray, File Name *1Displayed only for jobs in the Current Jobs list *2Displayed only for jobs in the Job History list *3Displayed only for Current Jobs transmitted to multiple recipients *4Displayed only for timer transmission jobs 12 Managing jobs (Job List) 12-12 bizhub C252 To check the job details 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Job List]. The Job List screen appears. 2 Display the list containing the job whose details are to be checked. 3 Select the job whose details are to be checked, and then touch [Detail]. – If an incorrect job was selected, select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it. The Check Detail screen appears. 4 After the desired information has been checked, touch [Close] or [Exit] or press the [Reset] key. – To return to the screen displayed before [Detail] was touched, touch [Close]. – To return to the Basic screen, touch [Exit] or press the [Reset] key. ! Detail To delete a queued job or job being performed, touch [Delete] in the Check Detail screen. If [Detail] appears in the Check Detail screen for a job selected from the Scan or Fax TX tab, detailed information is available on the multiple recipients that the data was sent to with broadcast transmission. To view the information, touch [Detail]. Managing jobs (Job List) 12 bizhub C252 12-13 To display current jobs (held jobs and active jobs lists) The lists of received print jobs for Copy mode and Fax mode and for computer printing is displayed. 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Job List]. The Job List screen appears. 2 Touch the button for the desired list. – Held Jobs: Displays only stored jobs – Active Jobs: Displays only jobs that are being performed ! Detail For details on the function of each button, refer to "Job list screens" on page 12-5. Proof copies of stored jobs can be printed. For details, refer to "To print a sample copy of a stored job" on page 12-15. Stored jobs can be printed from the Release Held Job screen. For details, refer to "To print a stored job" on page 12-17. To give priority for output to a job, touch [Increase Priority] in the Active Jobs list. For details, refer to "To increase priority for printing" on page 12-19. 12 Managing jobs (Job List) 12-14 bizhub C252 To display Job History 1 In the Basic screen, touch [Job List]. The Job List screen appears. 2 Touch [Job History]. The Job History screen appears. 3 Touch the button for the desired list. – Deleted Jobs: Displays only jobs that were deleted before they were finished – Finished Jobs: Displays only jobs that were correctly completed – Active Jobs: Displays all jobs Managing jobs (Job List) 12 bizhub C252 12-15 To print a sample copy of a stored job A single copy of a stored job can be printed in order to be checked. The Held Jobs list contains jobs such as those for which a proof copy was being printed when the automatic system reset operation was performed and proof print jobs for data in the boxes. 1 Display the Held Jobs list in the Current Jobs list of the Print tab. 2 Touch [Release Held Job]. The Release Held Job screen appears. 3 From the job list, select the job whose sample copy is to be printed, and then touch [Proof Print]. – If the job to be removed from the Held Jobs list is not displayed, touch [ ] and [ ] until the desired job is displayed. – If an incorrect job was selected, touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it. ? How is the printing of a sample copy stopped? % Press the [Stop] key. 12 Managing jobs (Job List) 12-16 bizhub C252 4 Touch [OK]. – After the single sample copy is printed, check the print result. ! Detail To change the settings, touch [Change setting] in the Release Held Job screen. For details, refer to "To print a stored job" below. Managing jobs (Job List) 12 bizhub C252 12-17 To print a stored job A job is removed from the Held Jobs list and printed. 1 Display the Held Jobs list in the Current Jobs list of the Print tab. 2 Touch [Release Held Job]. The Release Held Job screen appears. 3 Select the job to be removed from the Held Jobs list. – If the job to be removed from the Held Jobs list is not displayed, touch [ ] and [ ] until the desired job is displayed. – If an incorrect job was selected, select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it. – To continue without changing the specified copy settings, skip to step 6. 4 Touch [Change Setting]. – To display [Change Setting], touch [Print]. The Change Setting screen appears. 12 Managing jobs (Job List) 12-18 bizhub C252 5 In the Change Setting screen, change the copy settings as desired, and then touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. ? Is there more information about the settings? % Refer to the appropriate section. 6 In the Release Held Job screen, touch [OK]. The stored job appears in the Active Jobs list and is printed. ? Can a sample copy be printed? % For details on printing a sample copy, refer to "To print a sample copy of a stored job" on page 12-15. ? How is the removal of a job from the Held Jobs list stopped? % Touch [Cancel]. Managing jobs (Job List) 12 bizhub C252 12-19 To increase priority for printing The next job to be printed after the current job being printed can be selected. If an Administrator mode function was set so that the output priority of jobs cannot be changed, [Increase Priority] does not appear and the output priority of the jobs cannot be specified. If the job currently being printed can be interrupted, printing is interrupted and printing of the job given priority begins. Printing of the interrupted job is automatically restarted once printing for the job given priority is finished. If the job currently being printed cannot be interrupted (a job has already been interrupted or a job was already given priority), printing is interrupted after printing for the current job is finished. 1 Display the Active Jobs list in the Current Jobs list of the Print tab. 2 Touch [Increase Priority]. The Increase Priority screen appears. 3 In the job list, touch the button for the job to be given priority to select it, and then touch [OK]. 12 Managing jobs (Job List) 12-20 bizhub C252 – If the job to be given priority is not displayed, touch [ ] and [ ] until the desired job is displayed. – If an incorrect job was selected, select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it. The selected job moves to the top of the list and printing of the job begins. ? How is the changing of the output priority stopped? % Touch [Cancel]. 13 Utility Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-3 13 Utility 13.1 Overview of utility mode parameters List of registration information and parameters This section describes the buttons available when the [Utility/Counter] key is pressed. 2 Note The buttons that appear in the screens differ depending on the specified settings. Utility/Counter One-Touch Registration (p. 13-23) [1] Scan (p. 13-23) [1] Address Book [1] E-Mail [2] FTP [3] SMB [4] User Box [2] Group [3] Program [4] Subject/ Text (for E-mail) [1] Subject [2] Text [2] Fax (p. 13-23) [1] Address Book [1] Abbr. Dial [2] E-Mail [3] User Box [4] IP Address Fax Destination [5] Internet Fax Address [2] Group [3] Program [4] Subject/ Text (for E-mail) [1] Subject [2] Text 13 Utility 13-4 bizhub C252 One-Touch Registration (p. 13-23) [3] User Box (p. 13-24) [1] Public/ Personal User Box [2] Bulletin Board User Box [3] Relay User Box User Setting (p. 13-27) [1] System Setting (p. 13-27) [1] Language Selection [2] Measurement Unit Setting [3] Paper Tray Setting [1] Auto Tray Select Setting [2] Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF [3] No Matching Paper in Tray Setting [4] Print Lists [4] Auto Color Level Adjustment [5] Power Save Setting Low Power Mode Setting Sleep Mode Setting [6] Output Setting [1] Print/Fax Output Setting Print Fax [2] Output Tray Setting [3] Bin Setting [7] AE Level Adjustment Utility/Counter Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-5 User Setting (p. 13-27) [2] Display Setting (p. 13-30) [1] Sub Screen Display ON/OFF [2] Scan Basic Screen Default Setting Default Tab Program Default Address Book Default Index Address Type Symbol Display [3] Fax Basic Screen Default Setting Default Tab Default Program Address Book Default Index Address Type Symbol Display No. of Characters for Dest. Display [4] Copy Screen Copy Operating Screen [5] Fax Active Screen TX Display RX Display [6] Copy Initial Screen Setting [7] Job List Default Utility/Counter 13 Utility 13-6 bizhub C252 User Setting (p. 13-27) [3] Initial Setting (p. 13-32) [4] Copier Setting (p. 13-33) Auto Paper Select for Small Originals Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple Auto Zoom for Combine/ Booklet Sort/Group Auto change When AMS Direction is Incorrect Auto Zoom (Platen) Auto Zoom (ADF) Select Tray when APS Off Select Tray for Insert Sheet Print Setting for Separate Scan Print Jobs During Copy Operation [5] Scanner Setting (p. 13-35) JPEG Compression Level Black Compression Level TWAIN Lock Time Utility/Counter Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-7 User Setting (p. 13-27) [6] Printer Setting (p. 13-35) [1] Basic Setting PDL Setting Number of Sets Original Direction Spool Print Jobs in HDD before RIP A4/A3 <-> LTR/LGR Auto Switch Banner Setting [2] Paper Setting Paper Tray Default Paper Size 2-Sided Print Bind Direction Staple Hole-Punch Banner Paper Tray [3] PCL Setting [1] Font Setting Internal Disk Soft [2] Symbol Set [3] Font Size [4] Line/Page [5] CR/LF Mapping [4] PS Setting PS Error Print [5] Print Reports Configuration Page Demo Page PCL Font List PS Font List Utility/Counter 13 Utility 13-8 bizhub C252 Administrator Setting (p. 13-38) [1] System Setting (p. 13-38) [1] Power Save Setting Low Power Mode Setting Sleep Mode Setting Power Save Key Entering Power Save Mode (Fax) [2] Output Setting [1] Print/Fax Output Settings Printer Fax [2] Output Tray Setting [3] Bin Setting [4] Offset by Each Job Setting [3] Date/Time Setting [4] Daylight Savings Time Setting [5] Weekly Timer Setting [1] Weekly Timer ON/OFF Setting [2] Time Setting [3] Date Setting [4] Select Time for Power Save [5] Password for Non-Business Hours Utility/Counter Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-9 Administrator Setting (p. 13-38) [1] System Setting (p. 13-38) [6] Restrict User Access [1] Restrict Access to Saved Program Jobs [2] Delete Saved Program Jobs [3] Restrict Access to Job Settings Changing Job Priority Deleting Other User’s Jobs Registering and Changing Addresses Changing Zoom Ratio Changing the "From" Address [4] Restrict Operation Setting Restrict Fax Broadcasting [7] Expert Adjustment [1] AE Level Adjustment [2] Printer Adjutment [1] Leading Edge Adjustment [2] Centering [3] Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) [4] Media Adjustment [5] Erase Leading Edge [3] Finisher Adjustment [1] Center Staple Position [2] Fold Position [3] Punch Horizontal Position [4] Punch Resist Loop Size Utility/Counter 13 Utility 13-10 bizhub C252 Administrator Setting (p. 13-38) [1] System Setting (p. 13-38) [7] Expert Adjustment [4] Density Adjustment Thick Paper Image Density- Yellow Thick Paper Image Density- Magenta Thick Paper Image Density- Cyan Thick Paper Image Density- Black Black Image Density [5] Image Stabilization [7] Color Registration Adjust [1] Color Registration Adjust (Yellow) [2] Color Registration Adjust (Magenta) [3] Color Registration Adjust (Cyan) [8] Gradation Adjustment [1] Copy [2] Printer (Gradation) [3] Printer (Resolution) [9] Scanner Adjustment Leading Edgae Adjustment Centering Horizontal Adjustment Vertical Adjustment Utility/Counter Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-11 Administrator Setting (p. 13-38) [1] System Setting (p. 13-38) [7] Expert Adjustment [0] ADF Adjustment [1] Centering [2] Original Stop Position [3] Centering Auto Adjustment [4] Auto Adj. of Stop Position [8] List/ Counter [1] Management List Job Setting List [2] Paper Size/Type Counter [9] Reset Setting [1] System Auto Reset [2] Auto Reset [3] Job Reset When Account is changed When Original is set on ADF When NEXT JOB is selected Staple Setting Original Set/Bind Direction Reset Data After Job [0] User Box Setting [1] Delete Unused User Box [2] Delete Secure Print Documents [3] Auto Delete Secure Documents Utility/Counter 13 Utility 13-12 bizhub C252 Administrator Setting (p. 13-38) [1] System Setting (p. 13-38) [1] Standard Size Setting Original Glass Original Size Detect Foolscap Size Setting [2] Administrator/ Machine Setting (p. 13-49) [1] Administrator Registration [2] Input Machine Address [3] One- Touch Registration (p. 13-49) [1] Scan [1] Address Book [1] E-Mail [2] FTP [3] SMB [4] User Box [2] Group [3] Program [4] Subject/ Text (for E-Mail) [1] Subject [2] Text [2] Fax [1] Address Book [1] Addr. Dial [2] E-Mail [3] User Box [4] IP Address Fax Destination [5] Internet Fax Address [2] Group [3] Program [4] Subject/ Text (for E-Mail) [1] Subject [2] Text Utility/Counter Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-13 Administrator Setting (p. 13-38) [3] One- Touch Registration (p. 13-49) [3] User Box [1] Public/ Personal User Box [2] Bulletin Board User Box [3] Relay User Box [4] Annotation User Box [4] One- Touch Registration List [1] Address Book List [2] Group List [3] Program List [4] E-Mail Subject/Text List [4] User Authentication/ Account Track (p. 13-50) [1] General Settings [2] User Authentication Setting [1] Administrative Setting User Name List Default Function Permission Public User Key [2] User Registration [3] User Counter [3] Account Track Setting [1] Account Track Registration [2] Account Track Counter [4] Print without Authentication [5] Counter List Utility/Counter 13 Utility 13-14 bizhub C252 Administrator Setting (p. 13-38) [5] Network Setting (p. 13-53) [1] TCP/IP Setting [2] NetWare Setting [3] http Server Setting Support Operation Printer Information [4] FTP Setting [5] SMB Setting [6] Apple Talk Setting [7] LDAP Setting [1] Enabling LDAP [2] Setting Up LDAP [3] Default LDAP Server Setting [8] E-Mail Setting [1] E-Mail TX (SMTP) [2] E-Mail RX (POP) Utility/Counter Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-15 Administrator Setting (p. 13-38) [5] Network Setting (p. 13-53) [9] Detail Setting [1] Device Setting [2] Time Adjustment Setting [3] Status Notification Setting [1] Notification Address Setting [2] Notification Item Setting [3] Notification Time Setting [4] Total Counter Report Setting [5] PING confirmation [6] SLP Setting [7] LPD Setting [8] Prefix/Suffix Setting [1] ON/OFF Setting [2] Prefix/Suffix Setting [9] Action for Invalid Certifications Utility/Counter 13 Utility 13-16 bizhub C252 Administrator Setting (p. 13-38) [5] Network Setting (p. 13-53) [0] SNMP Setting [1] Bonjour Setting [2] TCP Socket Setting [3] Network Fax Setting [1] Network Fax Function Setting IPAddress Fax SIP-Fax Internet Fax [2] SMTP TX Setting [3] SMTP RX Setting [6] Copier Setting (p. 13-54) Auto Zoom (Platen) Auto Zoom (ADF) Select Tray when APS OFF Select Tray for Insert Sheet Print Jobs During Copy Operation [7] Printer Setting (p. 13-55) [1] I/F Timeout [2] Parallel I/F [3] IEEE 1284/USB Utility/Counter Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-17 Administrator Setting (p. 13-38) [8] Fax Setting (p. 13-55) [1] Header Information [2] Header/ Footer Position Header Position To Name Footer Position [3] Telephone Line Settings Dialing Method Receive Mode Number of RX Call Rings Number of Redials Redial Interval Line Monitor Sound Line Monitor Sound Volume [4] TX/RX Setting Duplex Print (RX) Inch Paper Priority Over A4 Print Paper Selection Print Paper Size Incorrect User Box No.Entry Tray Selection for RX Print Utility/Counter 13 Utility 13-18 bizhub C252 Administrator Setting (p. 13-38) [8] Fax Setting (p. 13-55) [4] TX/RX Setting Min. Reduction for RX Print Print Separate Fax Pages File After Polling TX No. of Sets (RX) [5] Function Setting [1] Function ON/OFF Setting F-Code TX Relay RX Relay Print Destination Check Display Function [3] Memory RX [4] Closed Netword RX [5] Forward TX Setting [7] Incomplete TX Hold [8] PC-Fax RX Setting [9] TSI User Box Setting [6] PBX CN Set Utility/Counter Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-19 Administrator Setting (p. 13-38) [8] Fax Setting (p. 13-55) [7] Report Settings Activity Report TX Report Sequential TX Report Timer Reservation TX Report Confidential RX Report Bulletin TX Report Relay TX Result Report Relay Request RX Report PC-Fax TX Error Report Broadcast Result Report TX Result Report Check Network Fax RX Error Report MDN Message DSN Message Receipt Mail Text [8] Job Settings List Utility/Counter 13 Utility 13-20 bizhub C252 Administrator Setting (p. 13-38) [8] Fax Setting (p. 13-55) [9] Multi Lines Setting [1] Telephone Line Settings Dialing Method Number of RX Call Rings Line Monitor Sound [2] Function Setting PC-FAX TX Setting [3] Multi Lines Setting [4] Sender Fax No. [0] Network Fax Setting [1] Black Compression Level [2] SIP Adaptor Connection Check [3] Internet Fax RX Ability [4] I-Fax Advanced Settings Utility/Counter Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-21 Administrator Setting (p. 13-38) [9] System Connection (p. 13-56) [1] OpenAPI Setting Access Setting Port No. SSL Authentication [2] Call Remote Center [3] Prefix/Suffix Auto Setting [0] Security Setting (p. 13-56) [1] Administrator Password [2] User Box Admin. Setting [3] Administrator Security Level [4] Security Details Password Rules Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error Release Manual Destination Input Print Data Capture Secure Document Access Method Restrict Fax TX [5] Enhanced Security Mode Utility/Counter 13 Utility 13-22 bizhub C252 Administrator Setting (p. 13-38) [0] Security Setting (p. 13-56) [6] HDD Setting [1] Check HDD Capacity [2] Temporary Data Overwrite Setting [3] Overwrite All Data [4] HDD Lock Password [5] HDD Formatting [6] HDD Encryption Setting [7] Management Function Setting [1] Function Settings [2] Max. No. of Sets to Copy Setting [3] Network Function Setting [4] Authentication Time Setting [8] Delete Registered Stamp Check Consumable Life (p. 13-131) Banner Printing Meter Count Details Print Toner Coverage Copy Print Scan/Fax Other Utility/Counter Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-23 13.2 Selecting a destination register This section describes the main parameters and operations that can be performed after pressing the [Utility/Counter] key, then touching [1 One- Touch Registration]. Scan 2 Note If user authentication has been set to "ON", [1 One-Touch Registration] does not appear when no user has logged on. However, after a user has logged on, [1 One-Touch Registration] appears. Fax 2 Note [2 Fax] appears only when fax kit FK-502 is installed or when Internet fax functions are available. Parameter Description Address Book Register recipients for scanning. For details, refer to the Network Scanner Operations of the User manual. Group Program Subject/Text (for E-mail) Parameter Description Address Book Register recipients for faxing. For details, refer to the Facsimile Operations and the Network Facsimile Operations of Group the User manual. Program Subject/Text (for E-mail) 13 Utility 13-24 bizhub C252 User box 2 Note [2 Bulletin Board User Box] and [3 Relay User Box] appear only when fax kit FK-502 is installed or when Internet fax functions are available. Parameter Description Public/Personal User Box Register recipients for boxes. For details, refer to the Box Operations of the User manual. Bulletin Board User Box Relay User Box Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-25 Displaying the destination register screen The following procedure describes how to display the One-Touch Registration Screen. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [1 One-Touch Registration]. – An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired button. For "One-Touch Registration" press the [1] key in the keypad. The One-Touch Registration screen appears. 13 Utility 13-26 bizhub C252 2 Note To quit specifying the Utility mode setting, touch [Exit] in the sub display area or press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, cancel the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax, Scan or Box mode appears. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-27 13.3 Specifying user settings This section describes the main parameters and operations that can be performed after pressing the [Utility/Counter] key, then touching [2 User Setting]. System setting Language Selection Measurement Unit Setting Paper Tray Setting Description Default Setting Select the language of the Touch Panel messages. English Description Default Setting Select one of the following as the measurement units in which values are displayed in the touch panel. mm (Numerical Value), inch (Numerical Value), inch (Fraction) mm (Numerical Value) Parameter Description Default Setting Auto Tray Select Setting Select the paper trays that are selected automatically when the Auto Paper Select setting is performed. In addition, specify the priority of the paper trays when the ATS feature is performed. Tray 2 % Tray 3 % Tray 4 % Tray 1 Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF Select whether or not a paper tray loaded with paper of the same size is selected automatically when a paper tray becomes empty while printing copies. Restrict No Matching Paper in Tray Setting Select the operation that is performed when there is no paper of the corresponding size in the specified paper tray. • Stop Printing (Tray Fixed): The machine stops operating. • Switch Trays (Tray Priority): Whether or not the specified paper tray contains paper of the corresponding size is determined and, if it does not, a different paper tray is selected if it contains paper of the corresponding size. Stop Printing (Tray Fixed) Print Lists Select the paper tray used for printing lists, such as the sales counter and consumables indicators. Tray 1 13 Utility 13-28 bizhub C252 Auto Color Level Adjustment Power Save Setting 2 Note If the "Administrator Security Level" parameter in Administrator mode was set, [Power Save] does not appear. ! Detail For details on the "Administrator Security Level" parameter, refer to "Security setting" on page 13-56. Description Default Setting Adjust the reference level for detecting a color or black-and-white document when the "Auto Color" setting is selected. The reference level can be set to one of 5 settings. 3 (standard) Parameter Description Default Setting Low Power Mode Setting Specify the desired length of time (between 10 and 240 minutes) until the machine enters Low Power mode. 15 minutes Sleep Mode Setting Specify the desired length of time (between 15 and 240 minutes) until the machine enters Sleep mode. 30 minutes Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-29 Output Setting 2 Reminder The "Output Tray Setting" parameter is available only if optional finisher FS-501 or finisher FS-514 is installed. [Bin Setting] only appears if the mailbin kit is installed. "Tray 2" appears for the "Bin Setting" parameter only if the output tray is installed. AE Level Adjustment 2 Note If the "Administrator Security Level" parameter in Administrator mode was set to "Level 2", [Output Setting] and [AE Level Adjustment] also appear. Parameter Description Print/Fax Output Setting Specify settings for faxing and printing. For details, refer to the Facsimile Operations and Print Operations of the User manual. Output Tray Setting Select the copy exit tray for each type of job (copies, printouts, faxes and reports). Finisher FS-501 Copy: Tray 2 Print: Tray 2 Report Output: Tray 1 Fax: Tray 1 Finisher FS-514 Copy: Tray 1 Print: Tray 1 Report Output: Tray 3 Fax: Tray 3 Bin Setting The output tray 1 can be specified as mailbin 5 and the optional output tray can be specified as mailbin 6. Disable Description Default Setting Specify the initial value for auto exposure. The higher the setting, the more that the document background is emphasized. 2 (standard) 13 Utility 13-30 bizhub C252 Display setting Sub Screen Display ON/OFF Scan Basic Screen Default Setting Fax Basic Screen Default Setting Description Default Setting Sub Screen Display Type • Setting value: An image of the selected setting is displayed. • Job List: A list of the jobs that are being performed is displayed. Setting value Parameter Description Default Tab Specify settings for scanning. For details, refer to the Network Scanner Operations of the User manual. Program Default Address Book Default Index Address Type Symbol Display Parameter Description Default Tab Specify settings for faxing. For details, refer to the Facsimile Operations and the Network Facsimile Operations of the User manual. Default Program Address Book Default Index Address Type Symbol Display No. of Characters for Dest. Display Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-31 Copy Screen Fax Active Screen Copy Initial Screen Setting Job List Default Parameter Description Default Setting Copy Operating Screen Select the screen that is displayed while printing. • ON: A copy job can be reserved by touching [Program Next Job] in the screen with the message "Now printing.", which appears during printing. • OFF: A copy job can be reserved while the Basic screen in Copy mode is displayed. OFF Parameter Description TX Display Specify settings for faxing. For details, refer to the Facsimile Operations and the Network Facsimile Operations of the User manual. RX Display Description Default Setting Specify the default display for the Basic screen in Copy mode. • TYPE1: Buttons for selecting functions and the current settings are displayed in the Basic screen. • TYPE2: Some buttons for selecting functions are displayed in the Basic screen, and the current settings are highlighted. TYPE1 Description Default Setting Select the job list displayed as the default in the Job List screen. • Current Print Jobs: The Current Jobs list appears on the Print tab. • Print Job History: The Job History list appears on the Print tab. Current Print Jobs 13 Utility 13-32 bizhub C252 Initial setting 2 Reminder To change the default settings for Scan mode or Fax mode, press the [Scan] or [Fax] key, enter Utility mode, and then select a setting for this parameter. ! Detail For details on the default settings and the factory default settings, refer to "Automatically canceling the settings (automatic panel reset)" on page 3-35. Description Default Setting Specify the default settings for Copy mode. The copy settings selected when the machine is turned on (the power switch is set to “n”) or the [Reset] key is pressed can be specified. • Current Setting: The settings specified from the touch panel before Utility mode was entered are set as the default settings for Copy mode. • Factory Default: The factory default settings are set as the default settings for Copy mode. Factory Default Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-33 Copier setting Parameter Description Default Setting Auto Paper Select for Small Original Select whether copying is permitted when the "Auto Paper Select" setting is selected and either no document is placed on the original glass or the document placed on the original glass is too small for its size to be detected. • Copy on Small Size: The document size is determined to be A5, and copies are produced on A5-size paper. • Copy on A4: The document size is determined to be A4, and copies are produced on A4-size paper. • Prohibit Copy: Copies cannot be produced since the document size cannot be detected. Before pressing the [Start] key, the paper tray (paper to be printed on) must be selected. Prohibit Copy Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple Select whether or not the "Booklet" function is selected automatically when the "Fold & Staple" setting is selected. This parameter is available only if optional finisher FS-603 or saddle stitcher is installed. Auto Select Booklet Auto Zoom For Combine/ Booklet Select whether or not the preset zoom ratios are automatically selected when "Auto Paper Select" is set and a Combine Originals or Booklet setting is selected. • Auto Display Zoom Ratio: The following zoom ratios are set. 2 in 1, Booklet e 0.707 4 in 1 e 0.500 8 in 1 e 0.353 • OFF: No zoom ratio is selected automatically. Auto Display Zoom Ratio Sort/Group Auto Change Select whether or not the "Sort" setting is automatically selected when 2 or more copies are set to be printed in a single job. • ON: When a document is loaded into the ADF and the [Start] key is pressed, the "Group" setting is automatically selected if the document consists of only one page or the "Sort" setting is automatically selected if the document consists of two or more pages. • OFF: The "Sort" and "Group" settings are not selected automatically. ON 13 Utility 13-34 bizhub C252 When AMS Direction is Incorrect Select whether or not printing continues when the paper and document orientations are different with the "Auto Paper Select" setting selected. • Print: The Zoom setting is automatically set and the copy is printed on paper of the specified size in the specified orientation. • Delete Job: The job is deleted, and no copies are printed. Print Auto Zoom (Platen) Select whether or not a Zoom setting is automatically selected when a paper tray is selected (except when "Auto Paper Select" is set) while a document is placed on the original glass. OFF Auto Zoom (ADF) Select whether or not a Zoom setting is automatically selected when a paper tray is selected (except when "Auto Paper Select" is set) while a document is loaded into the ADF. ON Select Tray when APS OFF Select which paper tray is selected when the "Auto Paper Select" setting is canceled. • Tray Before APS ON: The paper tray that was being used before the "Auto Paper Select" setting was selected is selected. • Default Tray: The 1st tray is used. Tray Before APS ON Select Tray for Insert Sheet Select the default paper tray loaded with paper for the cover pages, inserted pages and chapter title pages. Tray 2 Print Setting for Separate Scan Select whether copies are printed as the document is being scanned or after the entire document has been scanned when scanning a document in separate batches or when scanning a multiplepage document from the original glass. • Auto Print: Printing of copies that can be printed begins while the document is being scanned. • Batch Print: Printing begins after all pages of the document have been scanned. Auto Print Print Jobs During Copy Operation Select whether or not print data or fax data can be accepted for printing while a copy operation is being performed. • Accept: Print data and fax data can be accepted and printed. • Receive Only: Print data and fax data is printed after the copy operation is finished. Accept Parameter Description Default Setting Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-35 2 Note If the "Administrator Security Level" parameter in Administrator mode was set, [Auto Zoom (Platen)], [Auto Zoom (ADF)], [Select Tray when APS OFF], and [Select Tray for Insert Sheet] do not appear. If the "Administrator Security Level" parameter in Administrator mode was set to "Level 2", [Print Jobs During Copy Operation] does not appear. ! Detail For details on the "Administrator Security Level" parameter, refer to "Security setting" on page 13-56. Scanner setting Printer setting Parameter Description JPEG Compression Level Specify settings for scanning. For details, refer to the Network Scanner Operations of the User manual. Black Compression Level TWAIN Lock Time Parameter Description Basic Setting Specify settings for printing. For details, refer to the Print Operations of the User manual. Paper Setting PCL Setting PS Setting Print Reports The Print function settings can be printed as a report. For details, refer to the Print Operations of the User manual. 13 Utility 13-36 bizhub C252 Displaying the Utility Setting screen The following procedure describes how to display the User Setting Screen. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [2 User Setting]. – An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired button. For "2 User Setting", press the [2] key in the keypad. The User Setting screen appears. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-37 2 Note To quit specifying the User mode setting, touch [Exit] in the sub display area or press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, cancel the User mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax, Scan or Box mode appears. ! Detail For details on "Banner Printing", refer to the User manual [Print Operations]. 13 Utility 13-38 bizhub C252 13.4 Specifying administrator settings This section describes the main parameters and operations that can be performed after pressing the [Utility/Counter] key, then touching [3 Administrator Setting]. System setting Power Save Setting Parameter Description Default Setting Low Power Mode Setting Specify the desired length of time (between 10 and 240 minutes) until the machine enters Low Power mode. 15 minutes Sleep Mode Setting Specify the desired length of time (between 15 and 240 minutes) until the machine enters Sleep mode. 30 minutes Power Save Key Select which low power mode is entered when the [Power Save] key is pressed. • Low Power: The touch panel goes off and the machine enters a mode where it conserves energy. • Sleep: Although the machine conserves more energy in Sleep mode than in Low Power mode, the machine must warm up when Sleep mode is canceled, therefore taking more preparation time than Low Power mode. Low Power Entering Power Save Mode (Fax) Specify settings for faxing. For details, refer to the Facsimile Operations and the Network Facsimile Operations of the User manual. Normal Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-39 Output Setting 2 Reminder The "Output Tray Setting" parameter is available only if optional finisher FS-501 or finisher FS-514 is installed. [Bin Setting] only appears if the mailbin kit is installed. "Tray 2" appears for the "Bin Setting" parameter only if the output tray is installed. [Offset by Each Job Setting] appears only if finisher FS-514 is installed. Parameter Description Default Setting Print/Fax Output Settings Specify settings for faxing and printing. For details, refer to the Facsimile Operations and Print Operations of the User manual. Output Tray Setting Select the copy exit tray for each type of job (copies, printouts, faxes and reports). Finisher FS-501 Copy: Tray 2 Print: Tray 2 Report Output: Tray 1 Fax: Tray 1 Finisher FS-514 Copy: Tray 1 Print: Tray 1 Report Output: Tray 3 Fax: Tray 3 Bin Setting The output tray 1 can be specified as mailbin 5 and the optional output tray can be specified as mailbin 6. Disable Offset by Each Job Setting Select whether or not printed copies are fed out shifted when "Offset" is selected while a finisher FS-514 is installed. • ON: Pages are fed out shifted. • OFF: Pages are fed out without being shifted. ON 13 Utility 13-40 bizhub C252 Date/Time Setting Daylight Saving Time Setting Weekly Timer Setting ! Detail If the weekly timer is set, the machine will be turned on/off at the specified time. Settings can be specified to require a password in order to turn the machine on or to allow fax and print jobs to be received after the machine has been turned off by the timer. Various weekly timer settings in the Weekly Timer Setting screen can be combined. For details on the various settings, refer to "Overview of weekly timer settings" on page 13-63. Description Default Setting Specify the current date and time. In addition, the time zone can be set between -12:00 and 13:00 (in 30-minute increments). Time Zone: +00:00 Description Default Setting Select whether or not the machine’s internal clock observes daylight saving time. If "ON" is selected, a setting appears so that the length of time for adjusting the current time can be set. The daylight saving time can be set between 1 and 150 minutes in 1-minute increments. OFF Parameter Description Default Setting Weekly Timer ON/OFF Setting Select whether or not the weekly timer function is used. OFF Time Setting Specify the time of each day that the machine is turned on/off. – Date Setting Specify the individual dates or the days of the week that the machine is turned on/off. – Select Time for Power Save If the machine is turned off at a specific time, for example, during the lunch break, the time for turning the machine off and on can be specified. OFF Password for Non-Business Hours If the machine is turned off with a weekly timer, select whether or not use is limited with a password. In addition, if "ON" is selected, specify the password that must be entered. OFF Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-41 Restrict User Access Parameter Description Default Setting Restrict Access to Saved Program Jobs Select the registered copy programs that are prevented from being changed or deleted. – Delete Saved Program Jobs Select the registered copy programs to be delete. – Restrict Access to Job Settings Changing Job Priority Select whether or not to allow the print priority of jobs to be changed. Allow Deleting Other User’s Jobs Select whether or not jobs from other users can deleted when the user authentication settings have been specified. Restrict Registering and Changing Addresses Select whether or not to allow registered recipients to be changed. Allow Changing Zoom Ratio Select whether or not to allow stored zoom ratios to be changed. Allow Changing the "From" Address Select whether or not to allow the specified From address to be changed. Allow Restrict Operation Setting Restrict Fax Broadcasting Select whether to prevent multiple recipients from being specified for fax transmissions. OFF 13 Utility 13-42 bizhub C252 Expert Adjustment Parameter Description Default Setting AE Level Adjustment Set the initial value for auto exposure between 0 and 4. The higher the setting, the more that the document background is emphasized. 2 (standard) Printer Adjustment Leading Edge Adjustment Adjust the starting print position between –3.0 and 3.0 mm at the leading edge of the paper (with respect to the paper feed direction). Adjustments can be specified for each paper type. 0.0 mm Centering Adjust the starting print position between –3.0 mm and 3.0 mm at the left edge of the paper (with respect to the paper feed direction). Adjustments can be specified for each paper tray. 0.0 mm Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) Adjust the starting print position between –3.0 mm and 3.0 mm at the left edge of the paper for the second side during automatic double-sided copying. Adjustments can be specified for each paper tray. 0.0 mm Media Adjustment If the print image is flawed (missing print, white spots, or uneven printing) due to the characteristics of the type of paper that is used, adjust this parameter between –5 and +5 according to the paper type. – Erase Leading Edge The width of the area erased from the leading edge (margin) can be adjusted to 4 mm, 5 mm, or 7 mm. For details on making this adjustment, contact your technical representative. 4 mm Finisher Adjustment Center Staple Position** Adjust the center stapling position between –10 mm and 10 mm for printing with the "Fold & Staple" setting. 0 mm Fold Position** Adjust the center folding position between –10 mm and 10 mm for printing with the "Half Fold" setting. 0 mm Punch Horizontal Position** Adjust the horizontal position of the punched holes between –10 mm and +10 mm. 0 mm Punch Resist Loop Size** The hole-punching shift for double-sided printing and outputting cover pages can be adjusted in 1 mm increments. 0 mm Center Staple Position* Adjust the center stapling position between –7 mm and 7 mm for printing with the "Fold & Staple" setting. 0 mm Half-Fold Position* Adjust the center folding position between –7 mm and 7 mm for printing with the "Half Fold" setting. 0 mm Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-43 Density Adjustment Thick Paper Image Density– Yellow Adjust the image density for printing on thick paper, overhead projector transparencies, or envelopes. The density can be adjusted separately for each color (yellow, magenta, cyan and black for a color image and the black image density). The higher the setting, the darker the density. Adjust the setting for yellow, magenta, cyan and black between –5 and +5. Adjust the setting for "Black Image Density" between –2 and +2. 0 Thick Paper Image Density– Magenta 0 Thick Paper Image Density– Cyan 0 Thick Paper Image Density– Black 0 Black Image Density 0 Image Stabilization Perform an image stabilization if the image is incorrect, even after the gradation levels have been adjusted. • Image Stabilization Only: Perform normal image stabilization. • Initialize + Image Stabilization: Select when a good result was not achieved after "Image Stabilization Only" was selected. – Color Registration Adjust Color Registration Adjust (Yellow) Adjust the color registration if color shifts can be seen in the print result. – Color Registration Adjust (Magenta) – Color Registration Adjust (Cyan) – Gradation Adjustment Copy Adjust the gradation if there are changes in the color gradations of the print image. The adjustment is made with stress on increasing the number of images stored in the memory. – Printer (Gradation) Adjust the gradation if there are changes in the color gradations of the print image. The adjustment is made with stress on the gradations in images. – Printer (Resolution) Adjust the gradation if there are changes in the color gradations of the print image. The adjustment is made with stress on the reproducibility of text and lines. – Parameter Description Default Setting 13 Utility 13-44 bizhub C252 Scanner Adjustment Leading Edge Adjustment The starting scanning position (document feed direction) of the document can be adjusted. For details on making this adjustment, contact your technical representative. Centering The starting scanning position (transverse document feed direction) of the document can be adjusted. For details on making this adjustment, contact your technical representative. Horizontal Adjustment If the copy image is distorted (stretched or compressed), the zoom ratio in the transverse document feed direction for the scanner can be adjusted. For details on making this adjustment, contact your technical representative. Vertical Adjustment If the copy image is distorted (stretched or compressed), the zoom ratio in the document feed direction for the scanner can be adjusted. For details on making this adjustment, contact your technical representative. ADF Adjustment Centering If the center position cannot be automatically adjusted in the transverse document feed direction, it can be adjusted manually. For details on making this adjustment, contact your technical representative. Original Stop Position If the scanning position cannot be automatically adjusted in the document feed direction, it can be adjusted manually. For details on making this adjustment, contact your technical representative. Centering Auto Adjustment The center position in the transverse document feed direction can be adjusted automatically. For details on making this adjustment, contact your technical representative. Auto Adj. of Stop Position The scanning position in the document feed direction can be adjusted automatically. For details on making this adjustment, contact your technical representative. Parameter Description Default Setting Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-45 ! Detail For the procedure on adjusting the printer, refer to "Adjusting the printer" on page 13-64. For the procedure on adjusting the finisher, refer to "Adjusting the finisher (FS-603)" on page 13-73. The Finisher Adjustment parameters that are available differ depending on the installed finisher. * Available only if optional finisher FS-603 is installed. ** Available only if the saddle stitcher is installed on optional finisher FS-514. For the procedure on adjusting the color registration, refer to "Adjusting the color registration for yellow, magenta and cyan" on page 13-89. For the procedure on adjusting the gradation levels, refer to "Adjusting the gradation levels" on page 13-92. For details on displaying [Erase Leading Edge], contact your technical representative. For details on displaying [Scanner Adjustment] and [ADF Adjustment], contact your technical representative. 13 Utility 13-46 bizhub C252 List/Counter Reset Setting Parameter Description Management List Job Settings List The machine settings can be printed. Paper Size/Type Counter Store combinations of paper sizes and paper types to be counted. Parameter Description Default Setting System Auto Reset Specify the desired length of time until the automatic system reset operation is performed. • Priority Mode: Select the setting ("Copy", "Scan" or "Fax") for the mode that the machine enters when the automatic system reset operation is performed. • System Auto Reset Time: Specify the setting (between 1 and 9 minutes or "OFF") for the desired length of time until the automatic system reset operation is performed. Priority mode: Copy System Auto Reset Time: 1 minute Auto Reset Select the setting (between 1 and 9 minutes or "OFF") for the desired length of time until the automatic panel reset operation is performed for each mode (Copy, Scan and Fax). Copy: 1 minute Scan: 1 minute Fax: 1 minute Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-47 2 Reminder If user authentication or account track operations are being performed, they will be canceled after 1 minute, even if the "System Auto Reset" parameter has been set to "OFF". However, the Enlarge Display mode is not canceled when the "System Auto Reset" parameter is set to "OFF". If user authentication settings have been specified or "Enhanced Security Mode" has been set to "ON", logout from Administrator mode or user authentication mode will be performed according to the "System Auto Reset Time" parameter. Job Reset When account is changed Select whether or not the settings are reset when the user has changed. This machine detects that the user has changed when the optional key counter has been removed or when the [Access] key is pressed after entering user authentication and account track information. Reset When original is set on ADF Select whether or not the settings are reset when a document is loaded into the ADF. Do Not Reset When Next Job is selected Staple Setting: Select whether the same Staple setting from the previous job is set or the setting is canceled when that job begins and the settings for the next job can be specified. OFF Original Set/Bind Direction: Select whether the same Original Direction and Margin settings from the previous job are set or the settings are canceled when that job begins and the settings for the next job can be specified. OFF Reset Data After Job: Select whether the same settings for a scan operation or for a fax transmission from the previous job are set or the settings are canceled when that job is completed and the settings for the next job can be specified. (However, even if "OFF" is selected, the destination is cleared.) ON Parameter Description Default Setting 13 Utility 13-48 bizhub C252 User Box Setting Standard Size Setting 2 Note For details on displaying [Standard Size Setting], contact your technical representative. Parameter Description Default Setting Delete Unused User Box Specify settings for using boxes. For details, refer to the User manual [Box Operations]. Delete Secure Print Documents Auto Delete Secure Document Specify settings for using boxes. For details, refer to the User manual [Box Operations]. 1 day Parameter Description Default Setting Original Glass Original Size Detect Paper size table 1 or 2 can be selected to change the available settings when the paper size is detected. For details, contact your technical representative. Table 1 Foolscap Size Setting The Foolscap paper size can be changed. There are four Foolscap sizes: 220 e 330 mm, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, and 8 e 13 w. For details, contact your technical representative. 8 e 13 w Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-49 Administrator/machine setting 2 Note When entering the device name while registering the machine address, do not use characters that cannot be used by the operating system. One-Touch registration 2 Note [2 Fax] appears only when fax kit FK-502 is installed or when Internet fax functions are available. Parameter Description Administrator Registration Specify the administrator information displayed in the Service/Administrator Information screen of the Help screens and the From address for sending e-mail from the machine. Input Machine Address The name of the machine and its e-mail address can be registered. The registered machine name is added to the names of files that are sent and to documents saved in boxes. As a default, the machine name is specified as "KMBT-C252". The registered e-mail address is used with Internet faxing. Parameter Description Scan Specify settings for scanning, faxing and using the boxes. For details, refer to the Network Scanner Operations, Facsimile Operations, Network Facsimile Operations and Box Operations of the User manual. Fax User Box One-Touch Registration List The lists of abbreviated destinations, group destinations, program destinations and titles/text can be printed to be checked. For details, refer to the Network Scanner Operations, Facsimile Operations, Network Facsimile Operations and Box Operations of the User manual. 13 Utility 13-50 bizhub C252 User authentication/account track General Settings Description Default Setting Specify settings for user authentication and account track for controlling the use of this machine. • User Authentication: Select either "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)" as the user authentication method. To quit user authentication, select "OFF". • Public User Access: Select whether or not the machine can be used an unregistered user. This parameter is not available if "User Authentication" is set to "OFF". • Account Track: Select whether or not account track is used to control the machine. • Account Track Input Method: To control authentication with an account name and password, select "Account Name & Password". To control authentication with only a password, select "Password Only". No setting can be selected when "Account Track" is set to "OFF". If both user authentication and account track settings have been specified, only "Account Name & Password" can be selected. • When # of Jobs Reach Maximum: To stop the job being printed and begin printing the next job when the limit specified for account track or user authentication is reached, select "Skip Job". To stop the machine when the limit specified for account track is reached, select "Stop Job". • Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track: Select whether or not user authentication and account track are linked. This appears only when "User Authentication" is set to "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)" and "Account Track" is set to "ON". • # of User Counters Assigned for users: Adjust the number of users and accounts that can be registered. Example: When "# of User Counters" is set to "50", 950 accounts can be registered. User Authentication: OFF Account Track: OFF Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-51 User Authentication Setting 2 Note The user authentication parameters appear when "User Authentication" is set to "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)" in the General Settings screen. The account track parameters appear when "Account Track" is set to "ON" in the General Settings screen. Parameter Description Default Setting Administrative Setting User Name List Select whether or not a list of user names is displayed in the user authentication screen. OFF Default Function Permission Operations that are possible with this machine can be limited when authenticating with an external server. Copy: Allow Scan: Allow Fax: Allow Print: Allow User Box: Allow Print TX Function: Allow Public User Key Select whether or not the public user is authenticated with the user authentication screen when "Public User Access" on the General Settings screen is set to "Allow". Do Not Display User Registration The users of this machine can be registered. In addition, the password, output permissions, number of prints allowed, and function permissions can be specified for each user. – User Counter The copy, printing, scan/fax use for each user can be checked. – 13 Utility 13-52 bizhub C252 Account Track Setting Print without Authentication Counter List Parameter Description Account Track Registration The accounts that can use this machine can be registered. Account Track Counter The copy, printer, scan/fax use for each account can be checked. Description Default Setting Select whether or not printing is permitted without specifying a user or account. If printing is permitted, prints are counted for public users. Restrict Description Default Setting The use for each user or account can be checked. Tray 1 Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-53 Network setting Parameter Description TCP/IP Setting Specify settings for using the network. For details, refer to the Network Scanner Operations of the User manual. NetWare Setting httpServer Setting FTP Setting SMB Setting AppleTalk LDAP Setting E-Mail Setting Detail Setting SNMP Setting Bonjour Setting TCP Socket Setting Network Fax Setting Specify settings for network faxing. For details, refer to the Network Facsimile Operations of the User manual. 13 Utility 13-54 bizhub C252 Copier setting Parameter Description Default Setting Auto Zoom (Platen) Select whether or not a Zoom setting is automatically selected when a paper tray is selected (except when "Auto Paper Select" is set) while a document is placed on the original glass. OFF Auto Zoom (ADF) Select whether or not a Zoom setting is automatically selected when a paper tray is selected (except when "Auto Paper Select" is set) while a document is loaded into the ADF. ON Select Tray when APS OFF Select which paper tray is selected when the "Auto Paper Select" setting is canceled. • Tray Before APS ON: The paper tray that was being used before the "Auto Paper Select" setting was selected is selected. • Default Tray: The 1st tray is used. Tray Before APS ON Select Tray for Insert Sheet Select the default paper tray loaded with paper for the cover pages, inserted pages and chapter title pages. Tray 2 Print Jobs During Copy Operation Select whether or not print data or fax data can be accepted for printing while a copy operation is being performed. • Accept: Print data and fax data can be accepted and printed. • Receive Only: Print data and fax data is printed after the copy operation is finished. Accept Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-55 Printer setting Fax setting 2 Note [8 Fax Setting] appears only when fax kit FK-502 is installed or when Internet fax functions are available. Parameter Description I/F Timeout Specify settings for printing. For details, refer to the Print Operations of the User manual. Parallel I/F IEEE 1284/USB Parameter Description Header Information Specify settings for faxing. For details, refer to the Facsimile Operations and the Network Facsimile Operations of the User manual. Header/Footer Position Telephone Line Settings TX/RX Setting Function Setting PBX CN Set Report Settings Job Settings List Multi Line Settings Network Fax Setting Specify settings for network faxing. For details, refer to the Network Facsimile Operations of the User manual. 13 Utility 13-56 bizhub C252 System connection 2 Note [2 Call Remote Center] appears when center registration has been completed with CS Remote Care. Security setting Administrator Password User Box Admin. Setting Administrator Security Level Parameter Description OpenAPI Setting Specify settings for using the network. For details, refer to the Network Scanner Operations of the User manual. Call Remote Center Used by the administrator to call the center when CS Remote Care is connected. Prefix/Suffix Auto Setting This parameter is not available with this machine. Description Default Setting The administrator password used to specify the Administrator mode settings can be specified or changed. The administrator password can contain between 0 and 8 digits (characters). If the "Password Rules" parameter is set to "ON", only an administrator password with 8 digits can be specified. 12345678 Description Specify settings for using boxes. For details, refer to the Box Operations of the User manual. Description Default Setting Specify the range of Administrator mode parameters available to users. • Level 1: "Power Save", "Auto Zoom (Platen)", "Auto Zoom (ADF)", "Select Tray when APS OFF", and "Select Tray for Insert Sheet" are available to users. • Level 2: "Power Save", "Output Setting", "Date/Time Setting", "Daylight Savings Time Setting", "AE Level Adjustment", "Auto Zoom (Platen)", "Auto Zoom (ADF)", "Select Tray when APS OFF", "Select Tray for Insert Sheet", and "Print Jobs During Copy Operation" are available to users. • Prohibit: None of the parameters that are available to users with "Level 1" or "Level 2" are available. Prohibit Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-57 Security Details Parameter Description Default Setting Password Rules Select whether or not passwords are applied. OFF Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error Select the operations that are prohibited if user authentication failed. • [Mode 1]: Operations cannot be performed for a fixed length of time. • [Mode 2]: Operations cannot be performed from the control panel if repeated authentication attempts failed. The number of failed authentication attempts can be set to between 1 and 5 times. If operation of the control panel is restricted, touch [Release], and then select the items whose operation restrictions are canceled. • [User & Group]: Operations for user authentication and account track • [Secure Print]: Operations for confidential documents • [User Box]: Operations for password-protected boxes • [SNMP]: Operations for SNMP v3 Write user authentication Mode 1 Manual Destination Input Select whether or not a recipient can be typed in manually in a recipient input screen. Allow Print Data Capture Select whether or not data for a print job can be captured. For details, refer to the Print Operations of the User manual. Secure Document Access Method The operation method for confidential documents can be viewed. If "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error" is set to "Mode 1", this parameter is set to "Mode 1". If "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error" is set to "Mode 2", this parameter is set to "Mode 2" [Mode 1]: Type in the ID and password for the confidential document, and then select the document. [Mode 2]: Type in the ID for the confidential document, and then type in the password after the document is selected. Mode 1 Restrict Fax TX Select whether or not fax transmissions are prohibited. OFF 13 Utility 13-58 bizhub C252 ! Detail The operation of the "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error" parameter is performed with the following passwords. User authentication passwords, account track passwords, box passwords, passwords for confidential documents, and the administrator password If the control panel cannot be operated even after touching [Release] from the "Prohibit Functions when Auth. Error" parameter to specify the items whose operation restrictions are canceled or if operation is prohibited from a failed attempt to authenticate the administrator password, restart the machine. 2 Reminder When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-59 Enhanced Security Mode HDD Setting Description Settings necessary for applying the Enhanced Security mode appear. Select whether or not to apply enhanced security settings when the necessary settings are specified. For details, contact your technical representative. Parameter Description Default Setting Check HDD Capacity Specify settings for using boxes. For details, refer to the Box Operations of the User manual. Temporary Data Overwrite Setting Select whether or not image data is temporarily written to the hard disk with all operations for copying, scanning, faxing and computer printing. For details on the settings, refer to the User manual [Box Operations]. By specifying a setting on the Temporary Data Overwrite Setting screen, the area of the hard disk where image data is saved can be overwritten after the data is printed or sent, and the data can be erased. This process prevents disclosure of image data on the hard disk. OFF Overwrite All Data Select this parameter to overwrite all data on the entire hard disk when returning or disposing of this machine in order to prevent disclosure of the data. For details on the settings, refer to the User manual [Box Operations]. Before performing this operation, contact your technical representative. Mode 1 HDD Lock Password Specify the password for protecting the data on the hard disk. For details, refer to the Box Operations of the User manual. HDD Formatting Select this parameter to format the hard disk. For details, refer to the Box Operations of the User manual. HDD Encryption Setting Appears when optional security kit is installed. Specify the settings for encrypting the hard disk. When a setting is specified, all data written to the hard disk is encrypted to protect it. If the encryption key is changed, the hard disk will be reformatted. For details, refer to the Box Operations of the User manual. 13 Utility 13-60 bizhub C252 Management Function Setting 2 Note For details on displaying [Function Setting], [Max. No. of Sets to Copy Setting] and [Authentication Time Setting], contact your technical representative. ! Detail When "Network Function Setting" is set to "Disable", the following operations cannot be performed. PC-FAX transmission Using the HDD TWAIN driver to view and retrieve documents in boxes Using the PageScope Box Operator to view and retrieve documents in boxes Using the PageScope Scan Direct to retrieve documents in boxes Using the PageScope Job Spooler to view and retrieve documents in boxes Box operations using the PageScope Web Connection (The Box tab does not appear.) Delete Registered Stamp Parameter Description Default Setting Network Function Setting Specify settings for network functions that are difficult to count when managing operations. Allow Description Select whether or not stamps registered for copy protection can be deleted. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-61 Displaying the Administrator Setting screen The following procedure describes how to display the Administrator Setting Screen. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [3 Administrator Setting]. – An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired button. For "Administrator Setting", press the [3] key in the keypad. 3 Type in the administrator password, and then touch [OK]. 13 Utility 13-62 bizhub C252 For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 14-3. The Administrator Setting screen appears. 2 Note To quit specifying the Utility mode setting, touch [Exit] in the sub display area or press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, touch [Close] in each screen until the desired screen appears. 2 Reminder The default administrator password is "12345678". The administrator of this machine should change the administrator password. Be sure to keep the administrator password in a safe place. If the administrator password is lost, it must be specified by the technical representative. For details, contact the technical representative. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-63 13.5 Overview of weekly timer settings Various weekly timer settings in the Weekly Timer Setting screen can be combined. A general procedure is described below. Requisite 0 If the weekly timer has been set, leave the machine plugged into the electrical outlet even if the machine has been turned off. 0 Press the [Utility/Counter] key, touch [3 Administrator Setting], then [1 System Setting] then [3 Date/Time Setting], and correctly specify the necessary settings. 1 Set "Weekly Timer ON/OFF Setting" to "ON". 2 Specify times for "Time Setting". 3 Specify dates for "Date Setting". 4 Specify the desired settings for "Select Time for Power Save" and "Password for Non-Business Hours". The weekly timer is set. 13 Utility 13-64 bizhub C252 13.6 Adjusting the printer Adjusting the starting print position at the leading edge position The starting print position at the leading edge of each type of paper (with respect to the paper feed direction) can be adjusted. Adjustments can be specified for each paper type. 0 The starting print position is adjusted during manufacturing of the machine. Normally, this position will not need to be adjusted. 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [1 System Setting]. The System Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [2 Printer Adjustment]. The Printer Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [1 Leading Edge Adjustment]. The Leading Edge Adjustment screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the paper type to be set. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-65 7 Press the [Start] key. A test pattern is printed. 8 Check that the distance from the starting print position of the test pattern to the edge of the paper (a) is 4.2 mm. – If the distance is less than 4 mm, touch [+] to increase the adjustment (between 0.2 mm and 3.0 mm). – If the distance is more than 7 mm, touch [–] to reduce the adjustment (between –0.2 mm and –3.0 mm). – To scroll through the values quickly, touch [+] or [–] continuously. 9 Press the [Start] key. The adjusted test pattern is printed. 10 Check the distance from the starting print position of the test pattern to the edge of the paper. – Check that the width has been adjusted to 4.2 mm. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 8 and 9. – To adjust the print position for a different type of paper, return to step 6. 11 Touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. The print position is adjusted. a: 4.2 mm a 13 Utility 13-66 bizhub C252 Adjusting the starting print position at the left edge The starting print position at the left edge of the paper (with respect to the paper feed direction) for each paper tray can be adjusted. Adjustments can be specified for each paper tray. 0 The starting print position is adjusted during manufacturing of the machine. Normally, this position will not need to be adjusted. 0 Only A4 v paper can be used to adjust the bypass tray. 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [1 System Setting]. The System Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [2 Printer Adjustment]. The Printer Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [2 Centering]. The Centering screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the paper tray to be set. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-67 7 Press the [Start] key. A test pattern is printed. 8 Check that the distance from the starting print position of the test pattern to the edge of the paper (b) is 3 mm (± 0.5 mm). – If the distance is less than 2.5 mm, touch [+] to increase the adjustment (between 0.2 mm and 3.0 mm). – If the distance is more than 3.5 mm, touch [–] to reduce the adjustment (between –0.2 mm and –3.0 mm). – If the distance is between 2.5 and 3.5 mm, skip to step 10. – Each time [+] or [–] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. 9 Press the [Start] key. The adjusted test pattern is printed. 10 Adjust the distance from the starting print position of the test pattern to the edge of the paper. – Check that the distance has been adjusted to between 2.5 and 3.5 mm. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 8 and 9. – To adjust the print position for a different paper tray, return to step 6. 11 Touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. The print position is adjusted. b b: 3.0 mm ± 0.5 mm 13 Utility 13-68 bizhub C252 Adjusting the starting print position for the second side The starting print position at the left edge of the paper for the second side during automatic double-sided copying for each paper tray can be adjusted. 0 The starting print position is adjusted during manufacturing of the machine. Normally, this position will not need to be adjusted. 0 Only A4 v paper can be used to adjust the bypass tray. 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [1 System Setting]. The System Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [2 Printer Adjustment]. The Printer Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [3 Centering (Duplex 2nd Side)]. The Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the paper tray to be set. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-69 7 Press the [Start] key. A test pattern is printed. 8 Check that the distance from the starting print position of the test pattern to the left edge of the paper (c) is 3 mm (± 0.5 mm). – If the distance is less than 2.5 mm, touch [+] to increase the adjustment (between 0.2 mm and 3.0 mm). – If the distance is more than 3.5 mm, touch [–] to reduce the adjustment (between –0.2 mm and –3.0 mm). – If the distance is between 2.5 and 3.5 mm, skip to step 10. – Each time [+] or [–] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. 9 Press the [Start] key. The adjusted test pattern is printed. 10 Adjust the distance from the starting print position of the test pattern to the edge of the paper. – Check that the distance has been adjusted to between 2.5 and 3.5 mm. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 8 and 9. – To adjust the print position for a different paper tray, return to step 6. 11 Touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. The print position is adjusted. c c: 3.0 mm ± 0.5 mm 13 Utility 13-70 bizhub C252 Adjusting printing according to the media The print image can be adjusted for each type of paper that is used. 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [1 System Setting]. The System Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [2 Printer Adjustment]. The Printer Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [4 Media Adjustment]. The Media Adjustment screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the paper type to be set. – If the image is distorted with single-sided copying, select a paper type below "Front". – If the image on the back side is distorted with double-sided copying, select a paper type below "Back". Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-71 7 Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the setting between –5 and +5. An adjustment is possible if the size of the white areas in missing print or the white spots is 0.5 mm or less. – For missing print or white spots in the print image, touch [–] to reduce the adjustment. – For uneven printing of the print image, touch [+] to increase the adjustment. – Each time [+] or [–] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. – To cancel the adjustment, touch [Cancel]. 8 Touch [OK]. 9 Touch [Exit]. Try performing the copy cycle again. ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 13 Utility 13-72 bizhub C252 10 Check the printed image, and finish the adjustment if there are no flaws. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 1 through 9. – If the print image flaws are worse, adjust the setting in step 7 in the opposite direction. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-73 13.7 Adjusting the finisher (FS-603) ! Detail For details on the "Fold & Staple" setting, refer to "To bind copies at the center (“Fold & Staple”): Finisher FS-603" on page 4-99. Adjusting the center stapling position The stapling position when printing with the "Fold & Staple" function can be adjusted. 0 Before making any adjustments, use the "Fold & Staple" function to print a single sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [1 System Setting]. The System Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [3 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [1 Center Staple Position]. The Center Staple Position screen appears. 13 Utility 13-74 bizhub C252 6 Compare the width of the left pages of the copy sample with the width of the right pages to check for the center of the paper. – If the staple position is too far to the left of the center of the paper, touch [+] to increase the adjustment (between 1 mm and 7 mm). – If the staple position is too far to the right of the center of the paper, touch [–] to reduce the adjustment (between –1 mm and –7 mm). – To scroll through the values quickly, touch [+] or [–] continuously. 7 Touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. The center stapling position is adjusted. If the stapling position was at the center of the paper in step 6, this completes the procedure. 8 Use the "Fold & Staple" function to print a another sample copy. 9 Check the print result. – Check that the stapling position is adjusted to the center of the paper. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 and 8. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-75 Adjusting the center folding position The half-fold position when printing with the "Fold & Staple" function can be adjusted. 0 Before making any adjustments, use the "Fold & Staple" function to print a single sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [1 System Setting]. The System Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [3 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [2 Half-Fold Position]. The Half-Fold Position screen appears. 13 Utility 13-76 bizhub C252 6 Compare the width of the left pages of the copy sample with the width of the right pages to check for the center of the paper. – If the folding position is too far to the left of the center of the paper, touch [+] to increase the adjustment (between 1 mm and 7 mm). – If the folding position is too far to the right of the center of the paper, touch [–] to reduce the adjustment (between –1 mm and –7 mm). – To scroll through the values quickly, touch [+] or [–] continuously. 7 Touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. The half-fold position is adjusted. If the folding position was at the center of the paper in step 6, this completes the procedure. 8 Use the "Fold & Staple" function to print a another sample copy. 9 Check the print result. – Check that the folding position is adjusted to the center of the paper. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 and 8. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-77 13.8 Adjusting the finisher (FS-514) ! Detail For details on the "Fold & Staple" setting, refer to "To bind copies at the center (“Fold & Staple”): Finisher FS-514" on page 4-101. For details on specifying Punch settings, refer to "Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)" on page 4-93. Adjusting the center folding position The folding position when printing with the "Fold" setting can be adjusted for each paper size and for each paper type. 0 Before making any adjustments, use the "Fold & Staple" function to print a single sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [1 System Setting]. The System Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [3 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 13 Utility 13-78 bizhub C252 5 Touch [2 Fold Position]. The Fold Position screen appears. 6 Touch the buttons for the paper size and paper type to be adjusted. 7 Compare the width of the left pages of the copy sample with the width of the right pages to check for the center of the paper. – If the folding position is too far to the left of the center of the paper, touch [+] to increase the adjustment (between 1 mm and 10 mm). – If the folding position is too far to the right of the center of the paper, touch [–] to reduce the adjustment (between –1 mm and –10 mm). Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-79 – To scroll through the values quickly, touch [+] or [–] continuously. 13 Utility 13-80 bizhub C252 8 Touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. The fold position is adjusted. If the folding position was at the center of the paper in step 7, this completes the procedure. 9 Use the "Fold & Staple" function to print a another sample copy. 10 Check the print result. – Check that the folding position is adjusted to the center of the paper. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 1 and 9. 2 Note If the angle of the center folding position must be adjusted, contact your technical representative. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-81 Adjusting the center stapling position The stapling position when printing with the "Center Staple" setting can be adjusted for each paper size and for each paper type. 0 Adjust the center folding position before adjusting the center stapling position. 0 Before making any adjustments, use the "Fold & Staple" function to print a single sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [1 System Setting]. The System Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [3 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [1 Center Staple Position]. The Center Staple Position screen appears. 6 Touch the buttons for the paper size and paper type to be adjusted. 13 Utility 13-82 bizhub C252 7 Compare the width of the left pages of the copy sample with the width of the right pages to check for the center of the paper. – If the staple position is too far to the left of the center of the paper, touch [+] to increase the adjustment (between 1 mm and 10 mm). – If the staple position is too far to the right of the center of the paper, touch [–] to reduce the adjustment (between –1 mm and –10 mm). – To scroll through the values quickly, touch [+] or [–] continuously. 8 Touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. The center stapling position is adjusted. If the stapling position was at the center of the paper in step 7, this completes the procedure. 9 Use the "Fold & Staple" function to print a another sample copy. 10 Check the print result. – Check that the stapling position is adjusted to the center of the paper. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 1 and 9. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-83 2 Note If the angle of the staple must be adjusted, contact your technical representative. For details on adjusting the center folding position, refer to "Adjusting the center folding position" on page 13-77. 13 Utility 13-84 bizhub C252 Adjusting the horizontal punch position The horizontal position of punched holes when printing with a Punch setting can be adjusted for each paper type. 0 Before making any adjustments, use a Punch setting to print a sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [1 System Setting]. The System Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [3 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [3 Punch Horizontal Position]. The Punch Horizontal Position screen appears. 6 Touch the button for the paper type to be adjusted. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-85 7 Check the horizontal position of the punched holes. – To increase width A, touch [+] to increase the adjustment (between 1 mm and 10 mm). – To decrease width A, touch [–] to decrease the adjustment (between –1 mm and –10 mm). – To scroll through the values quickly, touch [+] or [–] continuously. 8 Touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. The punch horizontal position is adjusted. If no adjustment of the horizontal position of the punched holes was necessary in step 7, this completes the procedure. 9 Use the "Punch" function to print a another sample copy. A A 13 Utility 13-86 bizhub C252 10 Check the print result. – Check that the horizontal position of the punched holes was adjusted. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 1 and 8. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-87 Adjusting the angle of punched holes The angle of punched holes when printing with a Punch setting can be adjusted. 0 Before making any adjustments, use a Punch setting to print a sample copy. Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created. 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [1 System Setting]. The System Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [3 Finisher Adjustment]. The Finisher Adjustment screen appears. 5 Touch [4 Punch Resist Loop Size]. The Punch Resist Loop Size screen appears. 6 Check the angle of the punched holes. – If the punched holes are angled, touch [+] to change the adjustment. If the angle cannot be adjusted by touching [+] or if the paper is wrinkled, touch [–] to change the adjustment. – To scroll through the values quickly, touch [+] or [–] continuously. 13 Utility 13-88 bizhub C252 7 Touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. The angle of the punched holes is adjusted. If no adjustment of the angle of the punched holes was necessary in step 6, this completes the procedure. 8 Use the "Punch" function to print a another sample copy. 9 Check the print result. – Check that the angle of the punched holes was adjusted. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 1 and 9. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-89 13.9 Adjusting the color registration Adjusting the color registration for yellow, magenta and cyan Adjust the color registration if color shifts can be seen in the print result. Color shifts can be adjusted with plain paper, thick paper 1 or thick paper 2. The procedure for adjusting the color registration is the same for yellow, magenta and cyan. The following procedure uses A3-size paper to adjust the color registration for cyan. 0 The test pattern can be printed on A3 w, 11 e 17 w, A4 v or 8-1/2 e 1 v paper that can only be loaded into the 1st tray. 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [1 System Setting]. The System Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [7 Color Registration Adjust]. The Color Registration Adjust screen appears. 5 Touch [3 Color Registration Adjust (cyan)]. The Color Registration Adjust (cyan) screen appears. 13 Utility 13-90 bizhub C252 6 Press the [Start] key. A test pattern is printed. 7 Check the distance from the reference black lines to the cyan lines in the test pattern along the X and Y directions. – If the lines are shifted in the X direction as shown below, touch [–] under "X" to reduce the adjustment (between –1 dot and –6 dots). – If the lines are shifted in the X direction as shown below, touch [+] under "X" to increase the adjustment (between 1 dot and 6 dots). Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-91 – If the lines are shifted in the Y direction as shown below, touch [–] under "Y" to reduce the adjustment (between –1 dot and –6 dots). – If the lines are shifted in the Y direction as shown below, touch [+] under "Y" to increase the adjustment (between 1 dot and 6 dots). – Each time [+] or [–] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment. – If the lines are not shifted from the reference lines, skip to step 10. 8 Press the [Start] key. The adjusted test pattern is printed. ? When is the adjustment applied? % The adjustment is applied when the [Start] key is pressed. To cancel the adjustment, touch [Cancel] instead of pressing the [Start] key. 9 Check the print result. – If there is no shift between the black and cyan lines, continue with step 10. – If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 7 and 8. 10 Touch [OK]. – To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 13 Utility 13-92 bizhub C252 13.10 Adjusting the gradation levels Adjust the gradation levels if there are changes in the color gradations of the print image. The following color gradation adjustments can be performed. - [Copy]: The adjustment is made with stress on increasing the number of images stored in the memory. - [Printer (Gradation)]: The adjustment is made with stress on the gradations in images. - [Printer (Resolution)]: The adjustment is made with stress on the reproducibility of text and lines. The procedure for adjusting the gradation levels of the copy is described below. Requisite 0 Before adjusting the gradation levels, be sure to restart the machine. When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off. 0 After replacing an imaging unit, be sure to adjust the gradation levels. 0 The test pattern is printed on plain paper from a paper tray loaded with one of the following sizes (listed in order of priority): A3 w, 11 e17 w, A4 v or 8-1/2 e 11 v. Paper in the bypass tray cannot be selected. 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [1 System Setting]. The System Setting screen appears. 3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment]. The Expert Adjustment screen appears. 4 Touch [8 Gradation Adjustment]. The Gradation Adjustment screen appears. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-93 5 Touch the button for the mode to be adjusted. 6 Press the [Start] key. A test pattern is printed. 13 Utility 13-94 bizhub C252 7 Place the printed test pattern on the original glass. – Be sure to load the paper in the orientation shown on the screen. 8 Place on top of the test pattern 10 or more sheets of blank paper of the same size as the printed test pattern page. ? Why are blank pages placed on top of the test pattern? % Place 10 sheets of blank paper on top of the test pattern while it is being scanned in order to prevent the document transfer belt of the ADF or the original cover pad of the original cover from being visible. If the document transfer belt or the original cover pad is visible through the pattern, the gradation levels may not be correctly adjusted. 9 Close the original cover, or the ADF if it is installed. 10 Press the [Start] key. The printed test pattern is scanned. When the test pattern is scanned, the gradation levels are automatically adjusted based on the scanned image. 11 Repeat steps 6 through 10 three times. 12 Touch [Close]. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-95 13.11 Authentication method User authentication and account track settings can be specified to limit the use of this machine. User authentication settings are specified to manage individuals, and account track settings are specified to manage groups and multiple users. By specifying both user authentication and account track settings, the number of prints made by each group can be managed for each individual user. 2 Note A total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered on this machine. If an authentication mode is set, the authentication screen is displayed while this machine is in standby. In order to use this machine when user authentication or account track settings are specified, the user name and password must be entered. For details, refer to "Controlling each user’s use of this machine (user authentication)" on page 3-41. User authentication and account track User authentication and account track can be used to specify the following settings. - User authentication – Limits on the available functions (copy operations, scanning operations, fax operations and printing) – Counters for printing/scanning by each user – Limits on using color or black printing and on the number of copies that can be set – Management of personal boxes by each owner – Delete and restrict jobs of other users - Account track – Counters for printing/scanning from each account – Limits on using color or black printing and on the number of copies that can be set 13 Utility 13-96 bizhub C252 When user authentication and account track are synchronized This setup is used when the machine is used by multiple departments and the use by each employee is managed by each department. With this setup, totals can be maintained on each employee (each user) and on each department (each account). To manage the use of this machine in this way, specify the following authentication settings. 2 Note The account track and user authentication settings can be specified separately. Check the differences between these features, and then specify the appropriate settings. For details on external server authentication, refer to the User manual [Network Scanner Operations]. User 1 User 2 Account Group A Group B Parameter on General Settings Screen Settings User Authentication Select "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)". Account Track Select "ON", and then specify the account name and password. Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track Select "Synchronize". Account Name (on User Registration screen) Select an account name if "ON (MFP)" was selected. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-97 When user authentication and account track are used separately This setup is used when the machine is used by multiple employees with each employee performing multiple duties, which are to be totaled separately. With this setup, totals can be maintained on each employee (each user) and on each duty of the employee (each account). In addition, totals can be maintained on each employee (each user) and each duty (each account) even if the same duty is performed by two different employees. To manage the use of this machine in this way, specify the following authentication settings. User 1 User 2 Account Group A Group B Group C Parameter on General Settings Screen Settings User Authentication Select "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)". Account Track Select "ON", and then specify the account name and password. Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track Select "Do Not Synchronize". 13 Utility 13-98 bizhub C252 To select an authentication method 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [1 General Settings]. The General Settings screen appears. 4 Beside "User Authentication", touch the button for the desired setting. – To cancel user authentication, touch [OFF]. – To use the user authentication function from an external server, touch [ON (External Server)], and then select the server type. – To use the user authentication function of this machine, touch [ON (MFP)]. 5 Beside "Public User Access", touch the button for the desired setting. – To prohibit unregistered users from using this machine, touch [Restrict]. – To allow this machine to be used when a user name or password is not entered even though user authentication settings have been applied, touch [Allow]. 6 Beside "Account Track", touch the button for the desired setting. – To cancel account tracking, touch [OFF]. – To use the account track function, touch [ON]. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-99 7 Beside "Account Track Input Method", touch the button for the desired setting. – To allow this machine to be used after the account name and password are entered in the account track screen, touch [Account Name & Password]. – To allow this machine to be used after the password is entered in the account track screen, touch [Password Only]. 8 Touch [Fwd. ]. The second screen is displayed. 9 Beside "When # of Jobs Reach Maximum", touch the button for the desired setting. – To skip the job when the limit specified with account track is reached, touch [Skip Job]. – To stop the machine when the limit specified with account track is reached, touch [Stop Job]. 10 Beside "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track", touch the button for the desired setting. – Synchronize: If "ON (MFP)" is set and "Account Track" is set to "ON", this setting allows this machine to be used simply by entering user authentication information the first time that the machine is used if the corresponding account was specified during user registration. If "ON (External Server)" is set and "Account Track" is set to "ON", this setting allows the machine to be used simply by entering user authentication information after the machine has been used once with the appropriate user authentication and account track information entered. 13 Utility 13-100 bizhub C252 – Do Not Synchronize: This setting requires that all information be entered for user authentication and account track each time that the machine is used. 11 Beside "# of Counters Assigned for Users", specify the desired setting. – Press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then use the keypad to specify the desired value (between 1 and 999). – If user authentication and account track settings have been applied, counters can be assigned to both accounts and users, and counts for both can be totaled. 12 Touch [OK]. – If the setting for "User Authentication" or "Account Track" was changed, the message "Are you sure you want to clear all data?" appears. 13 Touch [Yes]. The authentication method is set. Continue by specifying settings for user authentication and account track. 2 Reminder Do not differentiate between uppercase and lowercase letters in the user name for the external server. Since the C252 cannot differentiate between uppercase and lowercase letters, the operation may not be performed correctly. 2 Note "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" appears if "User Authentication" is set to "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)" and "Account Track" is set to "ON". If "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" is set to "Synchronize", even when "Public User Access" is set to "Allow", "Public User Access" changes to "Restrict". Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-101 ! Detail For details on external server authentication, refer to the User manual [Network Scanner Operations]. If both user authentication and account track settings have been applied, "Account Track Input Method" is set to "Account Name & Password". A public user can be set to provide temporary access to this machine. If public user access is permitted, we recommend placing limitation on the machine functions that can be used. For details, refer to "User registration" on page 13-107. If account track settings have been applied while "User Authentication" is set to "ON (External Server)", type in the user name and password in the user authentication screen, and then type in the account name and password in the account track screen. If "ON (MFP)" is set and "Account Track" is set to "ON", but the corresponding account was not specified when the user was registered, user authentication and account track information must be entered each time that the machine is used, even if "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" has been set to "Synchronize". If "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" was set to "Do Not Synchronize", use by a public user is not permitted. 2 Note "# of User Counters" appears if "User Authentication" is set to "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)" and "Account Track" is set to "ON". If the number of user counters is set to "50", up to 950 accounts can be registered. If [No] was touched, the management data is not cleared; however, the settings cannot be changed. If the setting for any of the following is changed, the data is not cleared. "Public User Access", "When # of Jobs Reach Maximum", or "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. 13 Utility 13-102 bizhub C252 13.12 User authentication setting User authentication settings can be specified. Administrative setting—user name list User authentication settings can be specified to display [List] in the user authentication screen and the User Name screen. Touch [List] to display a list of registered user names from which the desired user name can simply be selected. (The default setting is "OFF".) 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [2 User Authentication Setting]. The User Authentication Setting screen appears. ? Can [2 User Authentication Setting] be selected? % [2 User Authentication Setting] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "OFF". 4 Touch [1 Administrative Setting]. 5 Touch [User Name List]. Buttons for the available settings appear. 6 Touch the button for the desired setting. Whether a user name list button appears or not is set. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-103 2 Note To limit machine use by authorized users, specify settings in the User Registration screen. 13 Utility 13-104 bizhub C252 Default function permission If external server authentication was selected, limitations can be placed on the machine functions that can be used by an authorized user. (The default setting is "Allow".) The following operations can be limited. - Copy operations - Scan operations - Fax operations - Printing operations - Saving documents on the hard disk - Printing transmission functions To specify the default function permissions 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [2 User Authentication Setting]. The User Authentication Setting screen appears. ? Can [2 User Authentication Setting] be selected? % [2 User Authentication Setting] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "OFF". 4 Touch [1 Administrative Setting]. 5 Touch [Default Function Permission]. The Default Function Permission screen appears. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-105 6 Touch the buttons for the desired settings. 7 Touch [OK]. The default function permissions are set. 2 Note To limit machine use by authorized users, specify settings in the User Registration screen. If "Print Scan / Fax From Box" setting is used to scan or fax a document saved in a box, printing of the document can be prevented. 13 Utility 13-106 bizhub C252 Authenticating public users If user authentication settings have been specified and public user access is permitted, the authentication screen does not appear when logging on if "Public User Key" is set to "Do Not Display". (The default setting is "Do Not Display".) 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [2 User Authentication Setting]. The User Authentication Setting screen appears. ? Can [2 User Authentication Setting] be selected? % [2 User Authentication Setting] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "OFF". 4 Touch [1 Administrative Setting]. 5 Touch [Public User Key]. Buttons for the available settings appear. 6 Touch the button for the desired setting. The machine is set to display [Public User Access]. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-107 User registration The password, printing permissions, number of prints allowed, and function permissions can be specified for each user of this machine. As an example, the following procedure describes how to register a user with authentication performed by the machine. 0 A total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered on this machine. 0 If "Public User Access" on the General Settings screen is set to "Allow", a public user is added. 0 If "Account Track" on the General Settings screen is set to "ON", the number of users set for "# of User Counters" can be registered. 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [2 User Authentication Setting]. The User Authentication Setting screen appears. ? Can [2 User Authentication Setting] be selected? % [2 User Authentication Setting] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "OFF". 4 Touch [2 User Registration]. 5 Touch the button for the desired user. The User Registration screen appears. 13 Utility 13-108 bizhub C252 6 Touch [User Name]. The User Name screen appears. 7 Type in the user name (up to 64 characters), and then touch [OK]. – For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 14-3. – Once a user name is registered, it cannot be changed. – A user name that has already been registered cannot be used again. The user name is set. 8 Touch [User Password]. – If "Account Track Input Method" was set to "Password Only", the same password cannot be registered more than once. The Password screen appears. ? Can [User Password] be selected? % [User Password] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "ON (External Server)". Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-109 9 Type in the password (up to 64 characters), and then touch [OK]. A screen for retyping the password appears. 10 Retype the password specified in step 9, and then touch [OK]. The user password is set. 11 Touch [E-Mail Address]. The E-Mail Address screen appears. 12 Type in the e-mail address (up to 320 characters), and then touch [OK]. The e-mail address is set. If the e-mail address exceeds 116 characters, [Details] appears in the User Registration screen. Touch [Details] to display the E-Mail Address Details screen and the entire e-mail address. 13 Touch [Account Name]. The Account Name screen appears. 14 Touch the button for the desired account, and then touch [OK]. The account is set. – Before an account name can be selected, accounts must have been registered. For details on registering accounts, refer to "Account track registration" on page 13-117. 15 Touch [Output Permission]. The Output Permission screen appears. 13 Utility 13-110 bizhub C252 16 Beside "Print" and "Send", touch the button for the desired settings. – To permit the user to output, touch [Allow]. – To prohibit the user to output, touch [Restrict]. – Touch [All Users] to apply the settings in the current screen to all registered users. Touch [All Users], and then touch [OK] in the two screens that appear to display a message and apply the settings to all users. At this time, do not turn off the machine with the main power switch. – If "Color" of the "Print" is set to "Restrict", printing is not possible with the "Full Color", "2 Color" or "Single Color" settings. – If "Black" of the "Print" is set to "Restrict", printing is not possible with the "Black" setting. – If both "Color" and "Black" of the "Print" are set to "Restrict", the message "Copying is restricted." appears if authentication was completed correctly. – If "Color" is set to "Restrict" under "Send", color scanning is not possible. 17 Touch [OK]. The output permissions are set. 18 Touch [Max. Allowance Set]. The Max. Allowance Set screen appears. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-111 19 Touch [Total Allowance] or [Individual Allowance]. – To specify the maximum number of combined color and black prints allowed, touch [Total Allowance]. – To separately specify the maximum number of color and black prints allowed, touch [Individual Allowance]. 20 Touch [No Limit] or [Limit]. 21 Using the keypad, type in the maximum number allowed. – If "Individual Allowance" was selected, touch [Edit] beside the print mode set to "Limit", and then use the keypad to type in the maximum number allowed. – Touch [All Users] to apply the settings in the current screen to all registered users. Touch [All Users], and then touch [OK] in the two screens that appear to display a message and apply the settings to all users. At this time, do not turn off the machine with the main power switch. 22 Touch [OK]. The maximum number of prints allowed are set. 23 Touch [Function Permission]. The Function Permission screen appears. 13 Utility 13-112 bizhub C252 24 Touch the button for the desired setting for each operation. – To permit the operation to be performed, touch [Allow]. – To prohibit the operation to be performed, touch [Restrict]. – Touch [All Users] to apply the settings in the current screen to all registered users. Touch [All Users], and then touch [OK] in the two screens that appear to display a message and apply the settings to all users. At this time, do not turn off the machine with the main power switch. – If "Print Scan / Fax From Box" setting is used to scan or fax a document saved in a box, printing of the document can be prevented. – Depending on the function limitation settings that are specified, a different Basic screen may appear when logging on. The Basic screen that appears changes in the following order: Copy Scan Fax Box. – If no operation is permitted, user authentication cannot be performed. 25 Touch [OK]. The function permissions are set. 26 Touch [OK]. – To erase the current user, touch [Cancel]. – To delete the selected user information, touch [Delete]. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-113 User counter This function is used to check the following data for each user. Copy + Print This count shows the total number of copies and printouts made. - Total: Shows the total number of copies and printouts made using all Color settings, the "Black" setting, the "Full Color" setting, the "2 Color" setting and the "Single Color" setting - Max Allowance: Shows the limits set for the user for the number of copies and printouts that can be made using all Color settings (Total), the color settings (Full Color, Single Color, and 2 Color) and the "Black" setting - Large Size: Shows the total number of copies and printouts made on paper specified as large-size paper using all Color settings, the "Black" setting, the "Full Color" setting, the "2 Color" setting and the "Single Color" setting Copy This count shows the total number of copies made. - Total: Shows the total number of copies made using all Color settings, the "Black" setting, the "Full Color" setting, the "2 Color" setting and the "Single Color" setting - Large Size: Shows the total number of copies made on paper specified as large-size paper using all Color settings, the "Black" setting, the "Full Color" setting, the "2 Color" setting and the "Single Color" setting Print This count shows the total number of printouts made. - Total: Shows the total number of printouts made using all Color settings, the "Black" setting, the "Full Color" setting, and the "2 Color" setting - Large Size: Shows the total number of printouts made on paper specified as large-size paper using all Color settings, the "Black" setting, the "Full Color" setting, and the "2 Color" setting Scan/Fax - Total: Shows the total number of pages scanned/total number of black and color prints in the Scan and Fax modes - Large Size: Shows the total number of pages scanned/total number of black and color prints in the Scan and Fax modes for paper specified as large-size paper - Fax TX: Shows the total number of pages transmitted in Fax mode Original Counter - Shows the number of document pages that were scanned Paper Counter - Shows the number of pages used for printing 13 Utility 13-114 bizhub C252 2 Note Counting automatically continues with user counters for external server authentication. If "Public User Access" on the General Settings screen was set to "Allow", "public" is added to the list of counters. If "User Box Admin." was set to "Allow", "Box Admin" is added to the list of counters. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-115 To check the counter 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [2 User Authentication Setting]. The User Authentication Setting screen appears. ? Can [2 User Authentication Setting] be selected? % [2 User Authentication Setting] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "OFF". 4 Touch [3 User Counter]. 5 Touch the button for the desired user. The User Counter screen for the selected user appears. 6 Touch the button for the counter to be viewed, and then check the counter. – To clear the counters for the current user, touch [Clear Counter] in the User Counter screen for the current user. A confirmation message appears, asking whether the counter should be cleared. To clear the counters for the current user, touch [Yes]. The maximum number allowed is not cleared. 13 Utility 13-116 bizhub C252 – To clear the counters for all users, touch [Reset All Counters] in the User Counter screen containing a list of all users. A confirmation message appears, asking whether the counters should be cleared. To clear the counters for all users, touch [Yes]. The maximum number allowed is not cleared. 7 Touch [Close]. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-117 13.13 Account track setting 2 Note A total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered on this machine. Account track registration The password, printing permissions, and number of prints allowed can be specified for each account using this machine. The following procedure describes how to specify accounts when "Account Track Input Method" on the General Settings screen is set to "Account Name & Password". 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [3 Account Track Setting]. The Account Track Setting screen appears. 4 Touch [1 Account Track Registration]. 13 Utility 13-118 bizhub C252 5 Touch the button for the desired account. The Account Track Registration screen appears. 6 Touch [Account Name]. The Account Name screen appears. If “Account Name & Password” was selected: If “Password Only” was selected: Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-119 7 Type in the account name (up to 8 characters), and then touch [OK]. – For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 14-3. – If [Name] was displayed, type in the account name (up to 20 characters), and then touch [OK]. – If "Account Name & Password" was selected, the same account name cannot be used more than once. The account name is set. 8 Touch [Password]. – If "Account Track Input Method" was set to "Password Only", the same password cannot be registered more than once. The Password screen appears. 9 Type in the password (up to 8 characters), and then touch [OK]. A screen for retyping the password appears. 10 Retype the password specified in step 9, and then touch [OK]. The account password is set. 11 Touch [Output Permission]. The Output Permission screen appears. 13 Utility 13-120 bizhub C252 12 Beside "Print" and "Send", touch the button for the desired settings. – To permit outputting by the account, touch [Allow]. – To prohibit outputting by the account, touch [Restrict]. – Touch [All Accounts] to apply the settings in the current screen to all registered accounts. Touch [All Accounts], and then touch [OK] in the two screens that appear to display a message and apply the settings to all accounts. At this time, do not turn off the machine with the main power switch. – If "Color" of the "Print" is set to "Restrict", printing is not possible with the "Full Color", "2 Color" or "Single Color" settings. – If "Black" of the "Print" is set to "Restrict", printing is not possible with the "Black" setting. – If both "Color" and "Black" of the "Print" are set to "Restrict", the message "Copying is restricted." appears if authentication was completed correctly. – If "Color" is set to "Restrict" under "Send", color scanning is not possible. 13 Touch [OK]. The output permissions are set. 14 Touch [Max. Allowance Set]. The Max. Allowance Set screen appears. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-121 15 Touch [Total Allowance] or [Individual Allowance]. – To specify the maximum number of combined color and black prints allowed, touch [Total Allowance]. – To separately specify the maximum number of color and black prints allowed, touch [Individual Allowance]. 16 Touch [No Limit] or [Limit]. 17 Using the keypad, type in the maximum number allowed. – If "Individual Allowance" was selected, touch [Edit] beside the print mode set to "Limit", and then use the keypad to type in the maximum number allowed. – Touch [All Accounts] to apply the current settings to all other registered accounts. Touch [All Accounts], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear to apply the settings in the current screen to all accounts. At this time, do not turn off the machine with the main power switch. 18 Touch [OK]. The maximum number of prints allowed is set. 19 Touch [OK]. – To erase the current account, touch [Cancel]. – To delete the selected account information, touch [Delete]. 13 Utility 13-122 bizhub C252 Account track counter This function is used to check the following data for each account. Copy + Print This count shows the total number of copies and printouts made. - Total: Shows the total number of copies and printouts made using all Color settings, the "Black" setting, the "Full Color" setting, the "2 Color" setting and the "Single Color" setting - Max Allowance: Shows the limits set for the account for the number of copies and printouts that can be made using all Color settings (Total), the color settings (Full Color, Single Color, and 2 Color) and the "Black" setting - Large Size: Shows the total number of copies and printouts made on paper specified as large-size paper using all Color settings, the "Black" setting, the "Full Color" setting, the "2 Color" setting and the "Single Color" setting Copy This count shows the total number of copies made. - Total: Shows the total number of copies made using all Color settings, the "Black" setting, the "Full Color" setting, the "2 Color" setting and the "Single Color" setting - Large Size: Shows the total number of copies made on paper specified as large-size paper using all Color settings, the "Black" setting, the "Full Color" setting, the "2 Color" setting and the "Single Color" setting Print This count shows the total number of printouts made. - Total: Shows the total number of printouts made using all Color settings, the "Black" setting, the "Full Color" setting, and the "2 Color" setting - Large Size: Shows the total number of printouts made on paper specified as large-size paper using all Color settings, the "Black" setting, the "Full Color" setting, and the "2 Color" setting Scan/Fax - Total: Shows the total number of pages scanned/total number of black and color prints in the Scan and Fax modes - Large Size: Shows the total number of pages scanned/total number of black and color prints in the Scan and Fax modes for paper specified as large-size paper - Fax TX: Shows the total number of pages transmitted in Fax mode Original Counter - Shows the number of document pages that were scanned Paper Counter - Shows the number of pages used for printing Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-123 2 Note If "User Box Admin." was set to "Allow" and only account track settings have been specified, "Box Admin" appears at the end of the list of counters. 13 Utility 13-124 bizhub C252 To check the counter 1 Display the Administrator Setting screen. – For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator Setting screen" on page 13-61. 2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track]. The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. 3 Touch [3 Account Track Setting]. The Account Track Setting screen appears. 4 Touch [2 Account Track Counter]. 5 Touch the button for the desired account. The Account Track Counter screen for the selected account appears. 6 Touch the button for the counter to be viewed, and then check the counter. – To clear the counters for the current account, touch [Clear Counter] in the Account Track Counter screen for the current account. A confirmation message appears, asking whether the counter should be cleared. To clear the counters for the current account, touch [Yes]. The maximum number allowed is not cleared. – To clear the counters for all accounts, touch [Reset All Counters] in the Account Track Counter screen containing a list of all accounts. A confirmation message appears, asking whether the counters should be cleared. To clear the counters for all accounts, touch [Yes]. The maximum number allowed is not cleared. 7 Touch [Close]. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-125 13.14 Password rules If password rules are applied and already specified passwords do not meet the password rules, those passwords are not accepted when they are entered. In that case, the administrator should temporarily turn off the password rules, then specify the passwords according to the following conditions. Conditions of the password rules Administrator Password User Password /Account Password User Box Password Password for the confidential document Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering/changing 8 alphanumeric characters (casesensitive) • A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot be registered. • The same password as one before being changed cannot be registered. Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering/changing 8 or more alphanumeric characters (case-sensitive) • A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot be registered. • The same password as one before being changed cannot be registered. Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering/changing 8 alphanumeric characters (casesensitive) • A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot be registered. • The same password as one before being changed cannot be registered. Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering/changing 8 alphanumeric characters (casesensitive) A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot be registered. 13 Utility 13-126 bizhub C252 2 Note Use the administrator password when specifying settings on the Administrative Setting screen. Use the user password/account password when user authentication/account track settings have been applied. For details on the "User Box Password" and "Password for the confidential document", refer to the Box Operations of the User manual. Specify 8 characters (numbers, * or #) as the fax transmission password for boxes. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-127 13.15 Enhanced security settings When the enhanced security setting is applied on this machine, various security settings are also changed in order to increase security when managing scan data. Restrictions are applied to user operations, public user access is prohibited, and box operations and print jobs are limited. There are various settings that must first be specified or are forcibly set in order for "Enhanced Security Mode" to be set to "ON". Before setting "Enhanced Security Mode" to "ON", be sure to check the settings for the security functions. 2 Reminder If there are settings that are incompatible with the enhanced security settings, "Enhanced Security Mode" cannot be set to "ON". ! Detail Certain conditions must be met in order for the enhanced security settings to be applied. For details, contact your technical representative. The settings that must be specified or are forcibly set when "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON" cannot be changed. 13 Utility 13-128 bizhub C252 Required settings The following settings must first be specified in order to set "Enhanced Security Mode" to "ON". ! Detail If "Account Track" is set to "ON" in the General Settings screen, set "Account Track Input Method" to "Account Name & Password". If "Password Only" is selected, the setting for "Prohibit Functions When Auth. Error" is not changed, even when "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON". [SSL] appears when a certificate is issued from PageScope Web Connection. Administrator Setting commands Settings User Authentication/Account Track—General Settings— User Authentication Select "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)". System Connection—OpenAPI Setting—SSL The button must be displayed. Security Setting/Administrator Password Set to a password that meets the password rules. Security Setting—HDD Setting—HDD Lock Password Otherwise, install the optional security kit, and specify an encryption key. The hard disk locking password is set. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-129 Changed settings For increased security, the following settings are also set when "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON". 2 Note The number of times for checking for "Prohibit Functions When Auth. Error" can be changed to between 1 and 3. A changed setting cannot be changed when "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "OFF". When "Password Rules" is set to "ON", a password that does not meet the password rules is considered a failed attempt during authentication. For details on the password rules, refer to "Password rules" on page 13-125. For details on the changed network settings, refer to the User manual [Network Scanner Operations]. Administrator Setting commands Changed settings System Setting—Restrict User Access—Restrict Access to Job Settings—Registering and Changing Address Set to "Restrict". User Authentication/Account Track—General Settings— Public User Access Set to "Restrict". User Authentication/Account Track—User Authentication Setting—Administrative Setting—User Name List Set to "OFF". User Authentication/Account Track—Print Without Authentication Set to "Restrict". Security Setting—User Box Admin. Setting Set to "Restrict". Security Setting—Security Details—Password Rules Set to "ON". Security Setting—Security Details—Prohibit Functions When Auth. Error Set to "Mode 2" and three times or less for checking. Security Setting—Security Details—Secure Document Access Method Set to "Mode 2". Security Setting—HDD Setting—Temporary Data Overwrite Setting Set to "Mode 2". 13 Utility 13-130 bizhub C252 User operation limitations When "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON", an icon appears in the screen and limitations are placed on the user for the following operations. - A public user cannot use this machine. - The list of users does not appear in the user authentication screen. - When user authentication has failed the specified number of times, the control panel can no longer be operated. If operation of the control panel is restricted, touch [Release], and then select the items whose operation restrictions are canceled. - The recipient cannot be changed by the user. - This machine’s counter data cannot be retrieved by PageScope Net Care or PageScope VISUALCOUNT-MASTER. - An application performing the write operation with SNMP v1/v2c cannot be connected. - Write users using SNMP v3 must be authenticated. 2 Note For details on the limitations placed on the user for box operations, refer to the User manual [Box Operations]. For details on the limitations placed on the user for printing, refer to the User manual [Print Operations]. For details on canceling operation restrictions applied when authentication failed, refer to "Security setting" on page 13-56. Utility 13 bizhub C252 13-131 13.16 Viewing the status of the consumables This section describes the information that can be viewed after pressing the [Utility/Counter] key, then touching [4 Check Consumable Life]. From the Unit Life Indicator screen, the status (usage level) of the following consumables can be viewed. - Imaging Unit (C) - Imaging Unit (M) - Imaging Unit (Y) - Imaging Unit (K) - Fusing Unit - Transfer Unit The usage levels are shown in graphs. 2 Note The consumables mentioned above are replaceable. For replacements, contact your technical representative. Displaying the unit life indicator screen 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Touch [4 Check Consumable Life]. 13 Utility 13-132 bizhub C252 – An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired button. For "Check Consumable Life", press the [4] key in the keypad. The Unit Life Indicator screen appears. – To print the list of usage levels, touch [Print], and then press the [Start] key. 2 Note To quit specifying the Utility mode setting, touch [Exit] in the sub display area or press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, cancel the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax, Scan or Box mode appears. 14 Appendix Appendix 14 bizhub C252 14-3 14 Appendix 14.1 Entering text The following procedure describes how to use the keyboard that appears in the touch panel for typing in the names of registered accounts and custom paper sizes. The keypad can also be used to type in numbers. Any of the following keyboards may appear. Example Password input screen: Screen for entering the name of a custom paper size: 14 Appendix 14-4 bizhub C252 Touching [Shift] switches the keyboard display between lowercase letters (numbers) and uppercase letters (symbols). Appendix 14 bizhub C252 14-5 To type text % Touch the button for the desired character from the keyboard that appeared. – To type in uppercase letters or symbols, touch [Shift]. – Numbers can also be typed in with the keypad. The entered characters appear in the text box. 2 Note To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. To clear all entered text, press the [C] (clear) key. ! Detail To change a character in the entered text, touch [ ] and [ ] to move the cursor to the character to be changed, touch [Delete], and then type in the desired letter or number. List of available characters Type Characters Alphanumeric characters/symbols 14 Appendix 14-6 bizhub C252 14.2 Glossary The words used in Copy mode are described below. Abbreviation ADF Automatic document feeder; Can be used to automatically scan the document A AE Level Adjustment Set this parameter to adjust the background of the document. The higher the setting, the more that the document background is emphasized. (AE = Auto exposure) Adjust Color Set these parameters to adjust the quality of color copies. APS "Auto Paper Select" setting ATS Automatic paper-tray-switching feature (ATS = Auto Tray Switch) Auto Zoom Select this setting to automatically select the appropriate zoom ratio after a document is placed on the original glass or loaded into the ADF and the paper size is selected. Auto Paper Select Select this setting to detect the document placed on the original glass or loaded into the ADF, then automatically select paper of the same size if "×1.0" is selected or select the paper size appropriate for the specified zoom ratio. B Background Color Set this function to copy the document using one of the 18 colors available as the color of the background (blank areas). Background Removal Select a setting to adjust the density of the background color of the document to one of nine levels. Blue Set this parameter to adjust the level of blue in the image, for example, if you wish to emphasize the blue of water or the sky. Brightness Set this parameter to make the image either lighter or darker. Appendix 14 bizhub C252 14-7 C Change Tray Settings Touch this button to specify a paper size not loaded in a paper tray or to copy on paper other than plain paper. Chapters Set this function to specify chapter title pages that must be printed on the front side of the paper when printing double-sided copies. Color Balance Set this parameter to adjust the balance in the concentrations of cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y) and black (K). Each color can be finely adjusted to any of 19 levels between –3 and +3. Combine Originals Select a setting to arrange reduced copies of multiple document pages on a single copy page. The settings for the number of pages that can be combined are "2 in 1", "4 in 1" and "8 in 1". Contrast Set this parameter to adjust the contrast between light and dark. Copy Density Set this parameter to finely adjust the copy density to any of 19 levels between –3 and +3. Copy Protection Set this function to print hidden text in order to prevent improper copying. When a document printed with copy protection text is copied, the hidden text appears clearly repeated in all pages of the copies so that the reader knows that it is a copy. Cover Mode Set this function to add paper from the specified paper tray to the copies as a cover page. D Density Select a setting to adjust the density of the print image to one of nine levels. Duplex 2nd-Side Select this setting to switch the image transfer current of this machine when copying on paper that has already been printed on one side. E Edit Color Set the functions and parameters that are available to adjust the print image as desired 14 Appendix 14-8 bizhub C252 F Fold & Staple Set this function to fold the copies in half and staple them together at the center. Finishing Select from the settings that are available for sorting and finishing copies when they are fed into the copy exit tray. G Glossy Select this setting to print with a glossy finish. Green Set this parameter to adjust the level of green in the image, for example, if you wish to emphasize the green of forests and trees. Group Select this setting to separate the copies of each page in the document. The specified number of copies of the second page is printed after all copies of the first page are finished. H Hue Set this parameter to make the image either more reddish or more bluish. I Insert Image Set this function to later scan multiple images from the original glass and insert them at the desired locations in a document scanned with the ADF, then feed out all copies together. Insert Sheet Set this function to insert paper from the specified paper tray into the copies as chapter title pages. Appendix 14 bizhub C252 14-9 M Margin Select the setting for the position of the binding margin for the loaded document. Selecting the appropriate setting prevents the copy from being printed upside-down when making double-sided copies from single-sided documents or when making single-sided copies from double-sided documents. Memory Scan Scans a document exceeding the maximum 100 pages that can be loaded into the ADF by scanning the document in separate batches. The document can be scanned and treated as a single copy job. In addition, the scanning location can be switched between the original glass and the ADF during the scanning operation. Minimal Select this setting to produce a copy with the original image slightly reduced. Mirror Image Set this function to produce a copy in the mirror image of the original document. Mixed Original Select this setting to detect the size of each document page and print a copy on paper of the appropriate size when a document with different page sizes is loaded together into the ADF. N Neg-/Pos. Reverse Set this function to copy the document with the light- and dark-colored areas or the colors (gradations) of the image inversed. O Offset Select this setting to separate copies that are fed out. OHP Interleave Set this function to insert paper between overhead projector transparencies that are being copied. This prevents overhead projector transparencies from sticking together. Original Type Select the setting for the image type of the document to better adjust the copy quality. Original Direction Select the setting for the orientation that the document is placed on the original glass or loaded into the ADF. 14 Appendix 14-10 bizhub C252 P Paper Select settings for the type and size of paper to be printed on. Proof Copy Press this key to print a single sample copy and stop the machine so that it can be checked before printing a large number of copies. This prevents copy errors from occurring in a large number of copies. Punch Select the setting to punch holes in the copies for filing. R Red Set this parameter to adjust the level of red in the image, for example, if you wish to redden skin tones. S Saturation Set this parameter to adjust the degree of vividness of the colors in the image. Save in User Box Temporarily saves the job on the hard disk so that it can later be recalled and used again Sharpness Set this parameter to emphasize the edges of text so that they can be read more easily. In addition, this parameter can be used to adjust the document image. Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert Select from the functions that are available to edit copies as desired Simplex/Duplex Select the setting to specify if the scanned document and the printed copy are printed on just one side or both sides. Sort Select this setting to separate each set of the copies. The second copy set is printed after all of the first copy set is finished. Staple Select a setting to staple copies together. Appendix 14 bizhub C252 14-11 T Text Enhancement Select a setting for the reproduction quality of text when copying documents consisting of text that overlaps images such as illustrations or graphs (text with a background). Thick Original Select this setting when loading thick documents or document pages pasted together into the ADF. If this setting is selected when thick documents are scanned with the ADF, there is a smaller chance of a paper misfeed occurring. X XY Zoom Touch this button to use the keypad to specify the zoom ratio for producing an enlarged/reduced copy of the loaded document. Z Zoom Specify the zoom ratio of the copy. 14 Appendix 14-12 bizhub C252 14.3 Index Numerics 1-sided/2-sided print 4-59 1st tray 3-6, 3-49, 6-12 2nd tray 3-6, 3-55, 6-13 3rd tray 3-6, 3-55, 6-14 4th tray 3-6, 3-55, 6-14 A Accessibility mode 5-25 Account track 3-46, 13-50 Accounts 13-95 Active jobs 12-13 ADF 3-3, 4-9, 6-27, 7-6, 8-29 Adjust color parameters 1-19, 9-63 Administrator settings 3-46, 13-38, 13-49, 13-61 Authentication method 13-95 Auto paper select 4-44, 8-10 Auto zoom setting 4-46 Automatic duplex unit 3-6, 6-11, 7-6 Automatic panel reset 3-35 Automatic paper tray switching 8-9 Automatic system reset 3-35 B Background color 1-36, 9-60 Background removal 4-70, 4-73 Basic screen 3-25 Binding 4-96 Blue parameter 1-25, 9-63 Book copy 9-30 Booklet 9-51 Booklet original 9-36 Brightness 1-21, 1-28, 9-63 Bypass tray 3-6, 3-59, 6-10 C Capacities 8-5 Caution notations and labels 2-19 Center binding 4-96 Center erase 4-99, 4-101, 9-31 Chapters 9-21 Checking jobs 12-3 Cleaning 11-3 Clearing a paper misfeed in a paper/media tray 6-12 Clearing a paper misfeed in finisher FS-501 6-31 Clearing a paper misfeed in finisher FS-603 6-35 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADF 6-27 Clearing a paper misfeed in the automatic duplex unit 6-11 Clearing a paper misfeed in the bypass tray 6-10 Clearing a paper misfeed in the fusing unit 6-19 Clearing a paper misfeed in the LCT 6-15 Clearing a paper misfeed in the right-side door 6-16 Clearing a staple jam 10-22 Clearing a staple jam in finisher FS-501 10-24 Clearing a staple jam in finisher FS-603 10-26 Color balance 1-26, 9-63 Color gradations 13-92 Color parameters 1-19, 9-63 Color settings 1-34, 1-35, 4-40 Combine originals settings 4-77 Consumable status 13-131 Contrast 1-29, 9-63 Control panel 3-22 Appendix 14 bizhub C252 14-13 Control panel angle 3-28 Control panel settings 5-25 Copier setting 13-33, 13-54 Copy density 1-33, 9-63 Copy paper 8-3 Copy programs 5-11, 5-15 Copy settings 5-3 Copy type settings 4-59 Counters 11-9 Cover mode 9-7 Cover pages 9-7 Current jobs 12-13 Custom paper size setting 8-15 D Date/time stamp 9-77 Default settings 13-32 Deleting a printing/reserved job 12-8 Deleting a stopped/reserved job 4-106 Density settings 4-70, 4-71 Destination register 13-23, 13-49 Display setting 13-30 Distribution numbers 9-77, 9-85 Document selection 4-59 Double-sided copies 4-62 E Emptying the waste container 10-39 Enlarge display timer setting 5-28 Enlarging 4-50 Entering text 14-3 Erasing center 4-99, 4-101, 9-31 Erasing frame/borders 9-71 Error message 6-3, 6-6, 6-46, 6-47, 6-49, 6-50, 11-12 Error messages 6-56 F Fax setting 13-55 Features 1-8 Feeding documents 4-9 Finisher FS-501 3-16, 6-31, 7-10, 10-24 Finisher FS-514 3-19, 7-11 Finisher FS-603 3-14, 6-35, 7-9, 10-26 Finishing settings 4-81 Folding position adjustment 13-75, 13-77 Fusing unit 6-19 G Glossary 14-6 Gradation levels 13-92 Green parameter 1-24, 9-63 Group setting 4-86 H Held jobs 12-13 Help menu 5-18, 5-22 Help screens 5-18, 5-24 Hole-punch waste 10-39 Hole-punching 4-93 Hue 1-21, 1-32, 9-63 I Image centering/rotation 9-73 Image repeat 9-40 Initial setting 13-32 Insert image 9-16 Insert sheet 9-11 Interrupting a copy job 5-9 14 Appendix 14-14 bizhub C252 J Job details 12-12 Job history 12-14 Job list 12-3 Job separator JS-601 3-16, 7-11 Job settings 12-10 K Key repeat start/interval time 5-25 L LCT 3-3, 3-6, 3-57, 6-15 Leading edge adjustment 13-64 Left edge adjustment 13-66 Legal restrictions on copying 1-45 Loading paper/media 3-49, 3-55, 3-57, 3-59 Low power mode 3-36, 3-38 M Machine setting 13-49 Mailbin kit MT-501 3-18, 7-13 Main unit 3-3, 7-3 Malfunction detected 6-3 Managing jobs 12-3 Manual conventions 1-40 Margin setting 4-32, 9-68 Memory full 6-47 Message display time 5-31 Messages 6-56 Meter count 11-9 Mirror image 1-39, 9-56 Misfeed 6-6, 6-10, 6-11, 6-12, 6-14, 6-15, 6-16, 6-19, 6-27, 6-31, 6-35 Misfeed detected 6-6 Mixed original setting 4-24 Mode check 5-3 Mode memory 5-11, 5-15 Multi-page document scanning 4-18 N Negative/positive reverse 1-37, 9-54 Network setting 13-53 Next job reservation 4-103 Numbering 9-81, 9-85 O OHP interleave 9-3 Operating environment 2-21 Original direction setting 4-28 Original glass 4-11, 8-31 Original image type settings 4-65 Original settings 4-24 Output tray OT-601 3-19, 7-12 Oversized paper setting 8-22 P Page numbering 9-77, 9-81 Panel reset 3-35 Paper capacities 8-5 Paper feed cabinet PC-103 7-7 Paper feed cabinet PC-203 7-8 Paper feed cabinet PC-403 7-8 Paper misfeed 6-6, 6-10, 6-11, 6-12, 6-14, 6-15, 6-16, 6-19, 6-27, 6-31, 6-35 Paper misfeed location 6-8 Paper settings 4-43, 8-10 Paper size setting 4-45, 8-12 Paper sizes 8-3 Paper storage 8-8 Appendix 14 bizhub C252 14-15 Paper/media types and capacities 8-5 Part names/functions 3-3 Password rules 13-125 Poster mode 9-45 Power source 2-21 Preset zoom ratios 4-50 Preventive maintenance time 11-12 Printer setting 13-35, 13-55 Printing priority 12-19 Program job 9-25 Proof copy 5-6 Punch kit PK-501 3-14, 7-10 Punch kit PK-510 3-19, 7-12 Punch settings 4-93 Punching horizontal position adjustment 13-84 Punching resist loop size adjustment 13-87 R Red parameter 1-23, 9-63 Reducing 4-50 Regulation notices 2-12 Replacing a staple cartridge for finisher FS-501 10-10 Replacing a toner cartridge 10-3 Replacing parts/supplies 6-49, 6-50 Replacing the staple cartridge 10-9 Replacing the staple cartridge for finisher FS-603 10-13 Replacing the waste toner box 10-46 Replenish paper 6-46 Reserving a copy job 4-103 S Saddle stitcher SD-503 3-18, 7-12 Safety information 2-3 Sample copy 5-6 Saturation 1-21, 1-30, 9-63 Scanner setting 13-35 Scanning 3-32, 4-13, 4-18 Security setting 13-56 Separate scan setting 4-13 Set numbering 9-77, 9-85 Set zoom ratios 4-56 Sharpness 1-31, 9-63 Simplex/duplex settings 4-59 Single-sided copies 4-60 Sleep mode 3-37, 3-38 Sort setting 4-84 Sound setting 5-33 Space requirements 2-20 Special paper/media 8-6 Special paper/media setting 8-25 Specifications 7-3 Staple cartridge 10-9, 10-10, 10-13 Staple jam 10-22, 10-24, 10-26 Stapling 4-88 Stapling position adjustment 13-73, 13-81 Starting print position 13-64, 13-66 Stopping printing/scanning 4-105 Stored jobs 12-15, 12-17 System connection 13-56 System reset 3-35 System setting 13-27, 13-38 14 Appendix 14-16 bizhub C252 T Test print 5-6 Text enhancement 4-70, 4-75 Text entry 14-3 Text quality adjustment 4-75 Thick original setting 4-26 Toner cartridge 10-3 Touch panel adjustment 5-36 Troubleshooting 6-3 Troubleshooting reference tables 6-52 Turning off 3-34 Turning on 3-30 U Unit life indicator 13-131 User authentication 3-41, 13-50, 13-95 User manuals 1-43 Utility mode parameters 13-3 Utility setting 13-36 Utility settings 13-27 W Waste container 10-39 Waste toner box 10-44 Weekly timer 3-39, 13-63 Wide paper setting 8-22 Z Zoom minimal setting 4-49 Zoom ratio setting 4-51, 4-57 Zoom settings 4-46 Fiery® Print Server Workflow Examples © 2009 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered under Legal Notices for this product. 45087253 1 September 2009 CONTENTS 3 CONTENTS INTRODUCTION 5 Terminology and conventions 5 About this document 6 MIXED MEDIA 7 What is Mixed Media? 7 Example: Workflow with Mixed Media 7 Items required for this example 8 IMPOSITION 11 What is imposition? 11 Example: Workflow with imposition 11 Items required for this example 12 PPML WITH IMPOSITION 15 What is PPML and how do you impose it? 15 Example: PPML workflow with imposition 15 Items required for this example 16 VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 19 What is variable data printing? 19 Variable data printing languages 19 Sending variable data jobs to the Print Server 19 What is FreeForm and how is it used with variable data print jobs? 20 Example: Variable data workflow using FreeForm 20 Items required for this example 21 CONTENTS 4 VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 2 AND MIXED MEDIA 24 What is FreeForm 2 and how is it used with variable data print jobs? 24 What is Mixed Media and how can it be used in variable data print jobs? 25 Example: Variable data workflow with FreeForm 2 and Mixed Media 25 Items required for this example 26 HOT FOLDERS 29 What is a Hot Folder? 29 Example: Workflow with Hot Folders 29 Items required for this example 30 COMPOSE WITH PAPER CATALOG 33 What is Compose? 33 What is Paper Catalog and how is it used with Compose? 34 Example: Workflow with Compose and Paper Catalog 35 Items required for this example 36 INDEX 39 INTRODUCTION 5 INTRODUCTION This document provides examples of complex printing scenarios and an overview of the Print Server features used in the examples. The example workflows illustrate how you can combine features to create jobs. Each workflow includes cross-references to help you locate more information about performing each task. For information about supported operating systems and system requirements, see Welcome. Terminology and conventions This document uses the following terminology and conventions. Term or convention Refers to Copier The copier or printer Titles in italics Other documents in this set Topics for which additional information is available by starting Help in the software Tips and information Important information Important information about issues that can result in physical harm to you or others INTRODUCTION 6 About this document This document covers the following topics: • Mixed Media concepts and how Mixed Media is used in an example workflow • Variable Data Printing (VDP) concepts with FreeForm and how VDP is used in an example workflow using FreeForm • Imposition concepts with PPML (Personalized Print Markup Language) and how imposition is used in an example variable data printing workflow using Impose and PPML • Printing to a Hot Folder on the network and an example workflow using Hot Folders • Compose and Paper Catalog concepts and how to create a job with Compose and Paper Catalog MIXED MEDIA 7 MIXED MEDIA This chapter provides an overview of Mixed Media and an example workflow that includes Mixed Media. NOTE: Mixed Media is not supported for all Print Servers. To determine if Mixed Media is supported for your particular Print Server, see Utilities. What is Mixed Media? The Mixed Media feature allows you to print ranges of pages on different types of media. For example, you can use Mixed Media to specify a heavy stock for the cover, add blank pages, insert colored media on designated pages, and specify duplex pages within a single print job. Specify Mixed Media settings when you print a job from an application with the printer driver. Define and modify the Mixed Media settings of jobs already sent to the Print Server from Command WorkStation or define Mixed Media settings in the Hot Folders application. For more information about Mixed Media, see Utilities. Example: Workflow with Mixed Media A geology professor at Ocean Crest University wants to print her new course book for the fall semester. The new course book consists of eight chapters. She wants her students to be able to find the information they want easily and quickly. To ensure this, each chapter divider in the book is printed on heavy media. The chapter text is printed on plain media and the front and back covers are printed on heavy media. The professor sends her request, along with the book file in PDF (Portable Document Format) (Geology101.pdf ), to the university’s in-house production department. MIXED MEDIA 8 The following diagram illustrates the components of the course book. Items required for this example • Geology101.pdf • Print Server • Command WorkStation with Mixed Media • Heavy media for the front and back covers • Heavy media for chapter dividers • Plain media for the chapter text Front cover printed on heavy media Back cover printed on heavy media Chapter dividers on heavy media Chapters printed on plain media Completed course book MIXED MEDIA 9 Mixed Media workflow Print Server 1 2 3 8 7 6 5 4 Print Server Step Task For more information 1 The professor creates the PDF and sends the file to the university’s in-house production department. 2 The operator in the production department downloads the file to Command WorkStation. Command WorkStation Help MIXED MEDIA 10 To use Mixed Media in Command WorkStation, your downloaded file must be a non-raster file. To remove raster information from a file in Command WorkStation, right-click the file and select Remove Raster Data. You can duplicate this workflow with a PostScript file instead of a PDF. 3 The operator selects the job in Command WorkStation, chooses Properties from the Actions menu, and clicks the Media icon on the Job Properties toolbar. The operator applies the following settings: a) From New Page Range in Mixed Media, the operator types 2, 32, 64, 98, 124 for the defined media pages (the pages that divide the chapters), specifies a heavy media, indicates which tray contains the heavy media, clicks Add Definition, and then clicks Close. b) From New Insert in Mixed Media, the operator specifies inserting a blank page after the last page to distinguish the end of the print job, clicks Insert, and then clicks Close. c) The operator specifies front and back covers that print on front only, cover stock, and which tray contains the media, and then clicks OK (if applicable). d) The operator clicks the Layout icon and specifies duplex, clicks OK, and then saves the file. Utilities 4 The operator processes and holds the job. Command WorkStation Help 5 The operator previews the job. Command WorkStation Help 6 The operator prints the job. NOTE: The operator can also print one set as a proof before printing multiple copies. Command WorkStation Help 7 The operator retrieves the job from the copier. 8 The job is printed with a front and back cover and dividers for each chapter. Step Task For more information IMPOSITION 11 IMPOSITION This chapter provides an overview of imposition and an example workflow using imposition. NOTE: Imposition is not supported for all Print Servers. To determine if Imposition is supported for your particular Print Server, see Utilities. What is imposition? Imposition is the process of arranging individual pages of a book, booklet, or brochure on a large sheet. The pages are laid out such that when the sheet is printed, folded, and cut, the pages are in the correct orientation and order. The Print Server supports Impose. Impose is a server-based imposition application that allows you to edit and assemble entire documents on the Print Server before you process the files. For more information about imposition, see Command WorkStation Help. Example: Workflow with imposition The manager of Company ABC wants to make sure that she has enough business cards to distribute when she is managing her company’s booth at the Consumer Electronics Show. She sends a request to a local print shop to print 600 cards. The print shop imposes her business cards on an 11x17 page. Since the card design incorporates text on the back, the job must be duplexed. Company ABC’s standard business card size is 2 x3.25. The print shop calculates that they can impose 25 cards on one 11x17 page. IMPOSITION 12 The following graphic illustrates how the business cards are imposed. Items required for this example • Card.pdf • Print Server • Command WorkStation with Impose (requires a dongle) • 11x17 heavy media, such as card stock • Paper cutter 11x17 page 2x3.25 business card 5 rows 5 columns { IMPOSITION 13 Imposition workflow Print Server 1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5 Step Task For more information 1 Company ABC creates the 2x3.25 business card, saves the file as Card.pdf, and then sends the file to the print shop. Printing 2 The operator at the print shop downloads the file to Command WorkStation. Command WorkStation Help IMPOSITION 14 When you use Impose, your downloaded file must be a non-raster file. To remove raster information from a file with Command WorkStation, right-click the file and select Remove Raster Data. 3 The operator selects the job in Command WorkStation, chooses Impose from the Actions menu, and then applies the following settings. a) From the Settings pane, the operator selects Gangup and selects Repeat. b) The Operator specifies 11x17, landscape, and duplex. c) Under Layout, the operator specifies five rows and five columns. d) Under Scale, the operator specifies the scale at 100%. e) The operator turns on printer’s marks and sets the offset X and Y to 0.125 pt. f) The operator saves the job. Utilities 4 The operator selects Card.pdf.dbp in Command WorkStation and selects Preview. Command WorkStation Help 5 The operator prints the job. Command WorkStation Help 6 The operator retrieves the job from the copier. 7 The cards are printed on an 11x17 page. 8 The operator follows the printer’s marks and cuts the business cards. Step Task For more information PPML WITH IMPOSITION 15 PPML WITH IMPOSITION This chapter provides an overview of PPML and imposition, and an example workflow of an imposed job using PPML. NOTE: Imposition and PPML are not supported for all Print Servers. To determine if Imposition is supported for your particular Print Server, see Utilities. To determine if PPML is supported for your particular Print Server, see Printing. What is PPML and how do you impose it? Personal Print Markup Language (PPML) is an XML-based language for variable data printing. PPML enables faster printing of variable data jobs by allowing a printer to store text elements and graphic elements and reuse them as needed. PPML is a non-vendor-specific language and is considered to be an open industry standard. You can create the master and variable elements of a job as a PPML file in a variable data printing application, such as Pageflex Persona, and then print the job to the Print Server. Impose PPML as you would any other job (see page 11). Impose the PPML job on a sheet to print the pieces in a particular order so that when the job is printed, it is cut and stacked in the correct order. For more information about PPML, see Variable Data Printing. Example: PPML workflow with imposition Dr. Jones is a veterinarian who has just moved his practice to a new neighborhood and wants to inform his current customers, and possible new ones, of his new location, phone number, and hospital hours. He decides to send out 30,000 5x8 mailer cards. The front of each card has a picture of his dog, Max, with information about his practice, and the back of the card has each customer’s name and address with a bar code. Dr. Jones sends his order to a print shop along with the PDF of his mailer and the Microsoft Excel file database, including address information about his customers and neighborhood residents. The print shop creates the merged master and variable document in Pageflex Persona to create the JonesMailer.ppml file. For more information about Pageflex Persona, see the documentation that accompanies the application. PPML WITH IMPOSITION 16 To save time and money, four cards are printed on both sides of a single 11x17 page. To expedite the mailings and reduce costly postage charges, the cards are imposed so that after the pages are cut, the cards easily stack with the zip codes in the correct sort order. The following diagram illustrates how the job is imposed and sorted. Items required for this example • Windows computer with Pageflex Persona • JonesMailer.ppml • Print Server • Command WorkStation with Impose PPML WITH IMPOSITION 17 PPML workflow with imposition Print Server 1 2 3 6 5 4 7 Step Task For more information 1 The operator at the print shop creates the merged master and variable document in Pageflex Persona to create the JonesMailer.ppml file. For more information about Pageflex Persona, see the documentation that accompanies the application. 2 The operator at the print shop downloads the file to Command WorkStation. Command WorkStation Help 3 The operator selects the job in Command WorkStation and chooses Impose from the Actions menu. a) The operator selects Gangup and Cut and Stack. b) The operator specifies 11x17, landscape, and duplex. c) Under Layout, the operator specifies two rows and two columns. d) Under Scale, the operator specifies the scale at 100%. e) The operator turns on printer’s marks. Command WorkStation Help PPML WITH IMPOSITION 18 Check the Impose Control Strip to match the set information. This is useful if certain pages of your job do not print correctly and you must reprint specific pages. Print one document to verify that the master and variable information matches. Make sure that the scale size in Impose is set to 100%, otherwise the cards do not print with the specified 5x8 size and are adjusted to print to the scale value entered. 4 The operator prints the job. Command WorkStation Help 5 The operator retrieves the job from the copier. 6 The mailers are stacked and ready to cut. 7 The operator checks the Impose Control Strip to match the set information. Command WorkStation Help. Step Task For more information VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 19 VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM This chapter provides an overview of variable data printing, and an example workflow that uses FreeForm to create a variable data job. What is variable data printing? Variable data printing links a copier to databases that contain the content for printed documents. Content consists of text and images (including graphics and photographs) in electronic form. Variable data printing is used for direct-mail advertising or other targeted mailings. It typically combines a set of master elements that are common across copies of a document with a set of variable elements that change from copy to copy. An example is a brochure that greets customers by name and may include other personal information about the customer obtained from a marketing database. Background elements, illustrations, and text blocks that do not change across copies of the brochure comprise the master elements. The customer name and other customer-specific information comprise the variable elements. For more information, see Variable Data Printing. Variable data printing languages The Print Server may be compatible with the following variable data printing languages: • FreeForm and FreeForm 2 • Personalized Print Markup Language (PPML) • Creo Variable Print Specification (VPS) NOTE: To determine what variable data printing languages are supported for your particular Print Server, see Printing. Sending variable data jobs to the Print Server You can create the master and variable data in most software programs, and assign the master and variable data from Command WorkStation, Hot Folders, or the printer driver. If you create your master and variable data in PPML or Creo VPS format from a supported thirdparty application, such as Pageflex Persona or Atlas PrintShop Mail, you can send your variable job directly to the Print Server through these applications. You can also download your file using Hot Folders. For more information about how to send variable data printing to the Print Server, see Variable Data Printing. VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 20 What is FreeForm and how is it used with variable data print jobs? FreeForm allows you to use print options to define and store master-element documents, called FreeForm masters, on the Print Server. You can send a variable-element job to the Print Server with instructions to combine the job with a particular FreeForm master. For more information, see Variable Data Printing. Example: Variable data workflow using FreeForm Ocean Crest University wants to promote their three schools through a mailing to prospective students. The students will be able to request information about the different campuses and programs. Students can reply via a postage-paid business reply card integrated into the mailer. The document is personalized with the prospective student’s name, address, and a personal web link. The design is graphic-intensive to attract the attention of the reader. It is printed on 11x17 paper and folded three times, in order to qualify for the standard “letter” mail rate at the post office. To create this mail piece, the in-house production department decides to use the caching capabilities of FreeForm. FreeForm allows them to store a rasterized version of the graphic intensive layout in memory, since these elements are common to all pages (send and process once). The variable text (address, name, and web link) is printed separately and merged with the layout at the Print Server. The production department creates the master document with all the common elements and saves the file in PDF format (College_Master.pdf ). Next, they create the variable document in Microsoft Word (College_Variable.doc) and link the variable information to their database file (College_data.xls). NOTE: No specialized variable printing software is used to build this job. You can use any page layout application to create the FreeForm master and any mail merge function, such as Microsoft Word Mail Merge, to build and print the variable data. For more information about how to use the Mail Merge feature in Microsoft Word, see the documentation that accompanies Microsoft Word. VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 21 The following diagram illustrates the components of the mailer. Items required for this example • College_Master.pdf • College_Variable.doc • College_data.xls • Print Server • Print Server printer driver with FreeForm • Windows computer with Adobe Acrobat, Microsoft Word, and Microsoft Excel installed Master file Database file VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 22 Variable data printing workflow using FreeForm Print Server Print Server 1 2 5 4 3 6 Step Task For more information 1 The operator in the production department opens College_Master.pdf in Acrobat. 2 The operator prints the file to the Print Server, specifying 11x17 and duplex, and choosing 1 for Create Master in the printer driver. Printing VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 23 You cannot send FreeForm jobs to the Direct connection. If Two-Way Communication is enabled in the printer driver, the printer driver detects what masters already reside on the Print Server. Use stored FreeForm masters as often as needed with multiple sets of variable elements. For more information about Two-Way Communication, see the printer driver Help. If the administrator clears the Print Server, all FreeForm masters are deleted. For more information about administrator functions, see Configuration and Setup. 3 The operator opens the College_Variable. doc in Microsoft Word. The variable document also opens the College_data.xls file, since the two documents are linked. If the documents are not linked, Word prompts the operator for the location of the Data Source File. The operator selects Data Merge in Word. Microsoft Word documentation 4 The operator prints the file to the Print Server, specifying 11x17 and duplex, and choosing 1 for Use Master in the printer driver. The master file and variable file are combined on the Print Server. Printing 5 The operator retrieves the job from the copier. 6 The mailer includes the combined master and variable data. Step Task For more information VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 2 AND MIXED MEDIA 24 VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 2 AND MIXED MEDIA This chapter provides an overview of how to use Mixed Media with FreeForm 2 variable data printing jobs, and provides an example workflow that uses variable data printing and Mixed Media. NOTE: Mixed Media and FreeForm 2 is not supported for all Print Servers. See Utilities to determine if Mixed Media is supported for your particular Print Server. See Printing to determine if FreeForm 2 is supported for your particular Print Server. What is FreeForm 2 and how is it used with variable data print jobs? FreeForm 2 extends the functionality of FreeForm (see “Variable Data Printing with FreeForm” on page 19). FreeForm 2 requires a third-party variable data printing application that supports FreeForm 2 technology, such as Atlas PrintShop Mail. Using the third-party printing application and FreeForm 2, you can create multiple page masters, allowing more customization to your documents. You can still use any master created in another application, and then use a third-party application that supports FreeForm 2, such as PrintShop Mail, to combine the design and database information. Multiple masters allow you to define more than one master file for your job, while drawing from the same database of variable information. For example, if you own a movie rental company, you may maintain a database of customer names, addresses, and the last five movies the customer rented, categorized by genre. As a promotion, you want to send a coupon booklet with a new movie rental release pictured on the front cover. You want to customize your mailer with a movie of a similar genre as the last movie the customer rented. The variable information, such as the customer names and addresses, is always drawn from the database. However, the different movie images are defined by the multiple masters. For more information about FreeForm 2, see Variable Data Printing. VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 2 AND MIXED MEDIA 25 What is Mixed Media and how can it be used in variable data print jobs? The Mixed Media feature allows you to print ranges of pages on different types of media. For more information, see “What is Mixed Media?” on page 7. Variable data printing links a copier to databases that contain the content for printed documents. For more information, see “Variable Data Printing with FreeForm” on page 19. Use variable data print jobs with Mixed Media to create custom jobs, such as mailers. For example, use the variable information to create booklet mailers that greet customers by name, and print the booklet cover on a different medium than the body of the mailer. The Mixed Media you specify for your job is applied for every record, relative to the record start. For example, if Mixed Media is set to print Page 1 with cover stock, the first page of every record is printed on cover stock. Example: Variable data workflow with FreeForm 2 and Mixed Media To announce its new line of children’s styles, Banana Rama is creating a promotional mailer that targets customers by ethnicity, gender, and age. The company has compiled a database of customers by name and attributes, such as ethnicity, gender, and age. For the promotional mailer, Banana Rama also draws from a content database consisting of images of children of different ages, gender, and ethnicity wearing the new Banana Rama clothes; images of typical gadgets enjoyed by these children; and background graphics. Using a variable data application, such as PrintShop Mail and images that match the targeted individual, Banana Rama creates, in one print run, a mailer targeting parents of girls aged 7 to 10 years and customized mailers targeting parents of boys in different age groups. The mailers feature images of children in the targeted age group wearing Banana Rama clothing and playing with their favorite toys. Each promotional mailer includes a cover sheet with the customer’s name and a discount coupon. The Banana Rama girls’ clothing line is more extensive, so the mailer targeting girls includes additional pages advertising the girls’ fashions. Since the promotional mailer may vary in length, depending on whether it is targeted toward a boy or a girl, a blank page is added between each mailer to indicate when a new mailer starts. The print shop that received Banana Rama’s mailer request uses Atlas PrintShop Mail to create the master and variable document as a .psm project file. For more information about PrintShop Mail, see the documentation that accompanies the application. VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 2 AND MIXED MEDIA 26 The following diagram illustrates the components of the mailer. Items required for this example • Atlas PrintShop Mail • FreeForm 2 • BananaRama.psm • BananaRama_V.ps • Print Server • Command WorkStation with Mixed Media • Cover stock • Plain media Girls template Boys template Letter/coupon template Graphics Database VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 2 AND MIXED MEDIA 27 Variable data workflow with FreeForm 2 and Mixed Media Print Server Print Server 1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5 Step Task For more information 1 The print shop operator opens the BananaRama.psm file in PrintShop Mail, specifies FreeForm 2, and then prints the file to the Print Server. In the Print dialog box, the operator sends both the master and variable data. The Print Server receives a master and variable PostScript document. Variable Data Printing For more information about PrintShop Mail, see the documentation that accompanies the application. 2 The operator selects the BananaRama_V.ps file from Command WorkStation. Command WorkStation Help 3 The operator chooses Properties from the Actions menu and clicks the Media icon on the Job Properties toolbar. The operator applies the following settings: a) The operator specifies a front cover, cover stock, and the tray for the media, and then clicks OK. b) From New Insert in Mixed Media, the operator specifies inserting a blank page after the last page, indicates the tray for the media, clicks Insert, and then clicks Close. Utilities VARIABLE DATA PRINTING WITH FREEFORM 2 AND MIXED MEDIA 28 4 The operator processes and holds the job. Command WorkStation Help 5 The operator previews the job. Command WorkStation Help 6 The operator prints the job. Command WorkStation Help 7 The operator retrieves the job from the copier. 8 The job prints with the merged variable and master information with a blank sheet between records. Step Task For more information HOT FOLDERS 29 HOT FOLDERS This chapter provides an overview of Hot Folders and an example workflow using Hot Folders. NOTE: Hot Folders is not supported for all Print Servers. To determine if Hot Folders is supported for your particular Print Server, see Utilities. What is a Hot Folder? Hot Folders is a software application that streamlines network printing tasks. A Hot Folder is a folder to which you can assign a group of print options, along with a Print Server print queue. To print a document, drag and drop the file onto the Hot Folder. You can create multiple Hot Folders, each with different settings and different Print Server connections. Depending on the configuration of the Hot Folder, jobs are routed to a Print Server with settings that you have configured. Hot Folder software runs as a background utility, continuously monitoring Hot Folders for new jobs. For more information about Hot Folders, see Hot Folders Help. Example: Workflow with Hot Folders Greg works for Company ABC and wants to print 25 copies of his new business cards. Company ABC has configured a network Hot Folder called “BusinessCards,” so that their employees can drop their business card .pdf file directly onto the Hot Folder for printing. Greg creates his business cards using the required company business card template, and saves the file as GregCard.pdf. The business card template ensures that the cards are printed optimally, using the imposition settings specified in the BusinessCards Hot Folder. After the cards are printed, an operator in the company print shop cuts the cards and places them in interoffice mail for the employee. Company ABC business cards are 2x3.25 inches in size. HOT FOLDERS 30 The following graphic illustrates how the business cards are imposed. Items required for this example • GregCard.pdf • Print Server • Hot Folder configured on the network • 11x17 heavy media, such as card stock • Paper cutter 11x17 page 2x3.25 business card 5 rows { 5 columns HOT FOLDERS 31 Imposition workflow Print Server 1 2 3 4 7 6 5 HOT FOLDERS 32 Step Task For more information 1 The operator at Company ABC creates a Hot Folder on the network, names it “BusinessCards,” and applies the following Hot Folder settings. a) From Job Properties, the operator specifies 25 copies. b) From Layout, the operator selects Impose and clicks Edit Impose Template. c) From the Settings pane, the operator selects Gangup and selects Repeat. d) The Operator specifies 11x17, landscape, and duplex. e) Under Layout, the operator specifies five rows and five columns. f) Under Scale, the operator specifies the scale at 100%. g) The operator turns on printer’s marks and sets the offset X and Y to 0.125 pt., saves the template, and closes Impose. h) The operator makes sure the template is selected and clicks OK. Hot Folders Help 2, 3 Greg drops the file GregCard.pdf on the BusinessCards Hot Folder. Hot Folders Help 4 The job prints. 5 The operator retrieves the job from the copier. 6 The cards are printed on an 11x17 page. 7 The operator follows the printer’s marks and cuts the business cards. COMPOSE WITH PAPER CATALOG 33 COMPOSE WITH PAPER CATALOG This chapter provides an overview of Compose and Paper Catalog and provides an example workflow using both applications to create a printed piece that incorporates colored covers and operator-specified chapter starts. NOTE: Compose and Paper Catalog are not supported for all Print Servers. To determine if Compose and Paper Catalog are supported for your particular Print Server, see Utilities. What is Compose? Compose allows you to prepare a job (spooled or held in Command WorkStation) for printing. For a single job, use Compose to: • Preview a job as thumbnails and full screen previews. • Set chapter starts and identify and apply finishing options. • Specify different media for front and back covers, body pages, and sections. • Insert blank sheets or other documents. • Edit a document using Adobe Acrobat and Enfocus PitStop. Compose is a dynamic application that displays and enables options based on the Print Server selected for the job. For example, if a job contains mixed media settings that were set in the printer driver or Command WorkStation, these settings appear when you view the job in Compose. For more information about Compose, see Command WorkStation Help. COMPOSE WITH PAPER CATALOG 34 What is Paper Catalog and how is it used with Compose? Paper Catalog is a system-based paper warehouse database. Paper Catalog stores the attributes of any media stock available in a production print shop. The Paper Catalog database resides on the Print Server and is not affected when you restart or clear the Print Server. Paper Catalog allows administrators to: • Define multiple media attribute combinations and assign unique names to each combination. • Assign color profiles for each media. • Select predefined media when a job is submitted. • Specify which Paper Catalog columns are available for users. • Centrally maintain a Paper Catalog database. Paper Catalog allows operators to: • Select predefined media when a job is submitted. Once the administrator defines the Paper Catalog, the operator chooses the media for the job from Compose. When the operator views the job with Compose thumbnails, the operator clearly sees the settings applied for that paper catalog entry, such as the color of the media. For more information about Paper Catalog and additional ways to access it, see Utilities and Paper Catalog Help. COMPOSE WITH PAPER CATALOG 35 Example: Workflow with Compose and Paper Catalog The Company ABC Human Resources Manager has created a new benefits handbook. The handbook is a single PDF document without blank pages between chapters. The manager wants the front and back covers of the published piece printed on heavy gold media and she wants each chapter to start on a right-hand page. The Human Resources Manager sends her request, with the attached book file in PDF format (Benefits.pdf ), to the company’s in-house production department. The production department uses Compose to reformat the book, adding front and back covers and designating chapter starts. Gold is Company ABC’s signature color. All published company documentation must have gold covers. The production department administrator has already added gold covers to the Paper Catalog. The following illustration shows the components of the handbook. Front cover printed on gold heavy media Back cover printed on gold heavy media Chapters printed on plain media Completed handbook COMPOSE WITH PAPER CATALOG 36 Items required for this example • Benefits.pdf • Print Server • Command WorkStation with Compose and Paper Catalog • Company ABC Gold cover stock for the front and back covers • Plain media for the chapter text The administrator first defines Company ABC Gold cover stock in the Paper Catalog database. The administrator also assigns the media to the appropriate tray in Tray and Paper Association. For more information, see Paper Catalog Help. For information about the Paper Catalog database, see Command WorkStation Help. COMPOSE WITH PAPER CATALOG 37 Compose workflow using Paper Catalog Print Server 1 2 3 5 8 7 6 4 COMPOSE WITH PAPER CATALOG 38 Step Task For more information 1 The production department administrator defines Company ABC gold cover stock in the Paper Catalog. She assigns the media to the appropriate copier trays, using Paper Tray Association. Command WorkStation Help 2 The Human Resources Manager creates the PDF and sends the file to the company’s in-house production department. 3 The operator in the production department downloads the file to Command WorkStation. Command WorkStation Help 4 The operator right-clicks the job, chooses Properties, specifies that the job prints duplex and indicated that the job is stapled. Command WorkStation Help 5 The operator selects the job in Command WorkStation, chooses Compose from the Actions menu, chooses Thumbnail view, and then applies the following settings: a) The operator selects all the pages of the job, right-clicks and chooses Assign Media, and selects letter-size media. b) The operator right-clicks the first page of the job, chooses Assign Media, and selects Co. ABC Cover from Choose Paper Catalog. She repeats this for the last page of the job. c) The operator selects the first page of the first chapter and clicks Chapter Start. She repeats this for each chapter in the handbook. d) The operator clicks Reader view to display the thumbnails as a user would see the pages when reading it as a book, and then checks the thumbnails to make sure that the pagination is correct. e) The operator clicks Save. Command WorkStation Help 6 The operator prints the job. NOTE: The operator can print one set as a proof before printing multiple copies. Command WorkStation Help 7 The operator retrieves the job from the copier. 8 The job is printed with gold front and back covers, as specified from Paper Catalog, and the first page of each chapter prints on a right-hand page. INDEX 39 C Compose and Paper Catalog components of job 36 described 33 diagram 37 procedure 38 workflow example 35 Creo Variable Print Specification (VPS) 19 F FreeForm components of job 21 described 20 diagram 22 procedure 22 workflow example 20 FreeForm 2 and Mixed Media components of job 26 defined 24 diagram 27 procedure 27 workflow example 25 H Hot Folders components of job 30 described 29 diagram 31 procedure 32 workflow example 29 I Impose described 11 non-raster file requirement 14 imposition components of job 12 described 11 diagram 13 procedure 13 workflow example 11 M master elements 19 Mixed Media components of job 8 described 7 diagram 9 non-raster file requirement 10 procedure 9 workflow example 7 multiple master pages, defining 24 P Personal Print Markup Language (PPML) 15, 19 PPML and imposition components of job 16 described 15 diagram 17 procedure 17 workflow example 15 printing scenarios business card template for company, Hot Folders 31 business cards, imposed 13 course book printed in plain and heavy media with chapter dividers 9 handbook with plain and heavy media 37 mailer cards, imposed and sorted 17 personalized mailer with business reply card 22 promotional mailer using variable demographic data 27 R raster information, removing 10, 14 V variable data printing described 19 languages compatible with 19 using FreeForm 20 FreeForm 2 and Mixed Media 24 workflow examples 20, 25 INDEX Fiery® PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery® PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server Color Printing © 2010 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered under Legal Notices for this product. 45093733 29 July 2010 CONTENTS 3 CONTENTS INTRODUCTION 7 Terminology and conventions 7 About this document 8 Key features of ColorWise 9 Color management in Command WorkStation 10 COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 11 About this chapter 11 Managing color on the Fiery PRO80 12 Descriptions of ColorWise print options 13 Auto Trapping 13 Black Detection 13 Black Overprint 14 Black Text and Graphics 15 CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method 16 CMYK/Grayscale Source or Device Link 17 Combine Separations 18 Composite Overprint 19 Gray (RGB) and Gray (CMYK) 20 Output Profile 20 PDF/X Output Intent 21 RGB/Lab Rendering Intent 22 RGB Source or Device Link 23 Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source 24 Spot Color Matching 25 Substitute Colors 26 CONTENTS 4 Specifying ColorWise print options 26 Setting default values in Command WorkStation 28 Setting print options in the printer driver 29 COLOR PROFILES 36 Color files 36 Installing additional ICC profiles on your computer 37 Other color files 42 Managing profiles on the Fiery PRO80 45 CALIBRATION 46 Calibration methods 46 Calibrating with Command WorkStation 47 Printer calibration with Fiery PRO80 calibration 48 Calibrating from the printer touch panel 49 Calibration with Web LCD enabled (default) 49 Calibration with Web LCD disabled 51 Managing calibration sets 52 Using the output profiles and calibration sets 53 Adding custom calibration sets 55 Adding custom calibration sets and output profiles 55 Understanding calibration 62 An overview of calibration 62 How calibration works 62 Scheduling calibration 63 Checking calibration status 64 SPOT-ON 65 Using Spot-On 65 CONTENTS 5 IMPORTING DENSITY MEASUREMENTS 68 Simple ASCII Import File Format 68 Example of 1D Status T density for EFI 21 patch page 69 Example of 1D Status T density for EFI 34 patch page 69 Example of 1D Status T density for an arbitrary page 70 INDEX 71 INTRODUCTION 7 INTRODUCTION This document explains how to manage color output on the Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server and provides information about calibration and color profiles. This document is part of a set that includes documentation for users and system administrators. For a complete description of your Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server, see the other documents available at your site. For more information about supported operating systems and system requirements, see Welcome. Terminology and conventions This document uses the following terminology and conventions. Term or convention Refers to Aero Fiery PRO80 (in illustrations and examples) Fiery PRO80 Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server Mac OS Apple Mac OS X Printer 80C-KM printer and 70-60C-KM printer Titles in italics Other documents in this set Windows Microsoft Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2003/2008/2008 R2 Topics for which additional information is available by starting Help in the software Tips and information INTRODUCTION 8 About this document This document is organized to supply you with key information about managing the color output of your Fiery PRO80. To manage color in general, you use Command WorkStation. You can also manage color for a specific job by setting print options in the printer driver or in the job properties in Command WorkStation and Hot Folders. This document covers the following topics: • Setting values for ColorWise print options • Managing color profiles and other color files • Calibrating the Fiery PRO80 to achieve consistent color output • Managing spot colors • Importing calibration measurement data from a text file NOTE: The Glossary in the Fiery Color Reference defines words in bold, for example, output profile, that appear throughout this document. Color terms and concepts, such as “color space,” “spot color,” “gamut,” and “source profile,” are used throughout this document. If you are new to desktop color, or if any terms are unfamiliar, see the Fiery Color Reference. A warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the equipment safely, always pay attention to these warnings. A caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the equipment safely, always pay attention to these cautions. Operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the equipment correctly, and avoid damage to the equipment or property. Term or convention Refers to INTRODUCTION 9 Key features of ColorWise ColorWise is the color management system (CMS) built into the Fiery PRO80 and designed to provide both casual and expert users with the best color output for a variety of purposes. The ColorWise default settings provide high-quality, out-of-box color from many Windows and Mac OS applications. This allows casual users to achieve quality output without knowing about or changing any color settings on the Fiery PRO80. ColorWise also allows expert users to obtain the best color output. ColorWise features allow you to modify printing results. Depending on your particular needs, you can: • Set the behavior of CMYK printing to emulate offset press standards. • Match PANTONE and other spot colors for the best match when printing using four-color press conditions or presses with extra, custom plates. • Select a rendering intent for RGB printing. Rendering intents allow for rich, saturated printing of presentation graphics, smooth, accurate printing of photographs, and relative or absolute colorimetric rendering for specialized needs. • Define the source of incoming RGB color data for better color conversion of RGB data with no source information. • Determine whether RGB data is converted into the full gamut of the printer or is first converted into the gamut of another device, such as a press standard. This feature is useful for making one device behave like another for RGB data. It also allows you to evaluate the appearance of an RGB file under different printing conditions without having to convert the RGB file to CMYK first. ColorWise color management (ColorWise) offers an open color architecture, allowing users to customize the Fiery PRO80 to meet new printing needs as they arise. ColorWise supports ICC profiles, which are industry standard color profiles that describe the color behavior of a device. Note that ICC specification version 4 profiles (profile version 4.2.0.0) are supported as well as version 2. Downloading ICC profiles to the Fiery PRO80 enables the Fiery PRO80 to simulate a custom press (or another printer), as well as accurately print colors from a particular monitor or scanner. In addition, you can create customized ICC profiles for the printer. INTRODUCTION 10 Color management in Command WorkStation Designed to give flexible control of color printing, Command WorkStation includes the following color management tools: • Color management Command WorkStation allows you to set the default settings of the ColorWise print options for the Fiery PRO80. These default settings are applied to all print jobs sent to the Fiery PRO80, unless a user overrides them for an individual job by changing settings in the printer driver or in Job Properties. • Profiles Command WorkStation allows you to manage all of the ICC profiles used in Fiery PRO80 workflows. You can also create custom profiles by editing existing CMYK source or output profiles and saving them as new profiles. The AutoGray feature allows you to adjust the gray balance of output profiles. • Calibrator For consistent color, calibrate the Fiery PRO80 on a regular basis. Command WorkStation includes an easy-to-use calibrator, which allows you to calibrate using either the scanning unit that is part of the printer or an optional spectrophotometer or densitometer (see “Calibration” on page 46). Command WorkStation also allows you to use any Status T densitometer by importing data in a standard file format (see “Importing Density Measurements” on page 68). In this case, it is important to note that the quality of the instrument used determines the quality of the calibration. • Spot-On (spot colors) Spot-On is a spot color (named color) manager. If Spot-On is available for your Fiery PRO80 and is enabled, you can adjust and manage lists of spot colors and their CMYK equivalents. The matching lists of spot colors and CMYK values are known as spot color dictionaries. Spot-On allows you to edit spot color definitions on the Fiery PRO80 and create custom spot color definitions and dictionaries. Installing and starting Command WorkStation on a Windows or Mac OS computer is described in Utilities. Command WorkStation can be installed from the User Software DVD or from the Fiery PRO80 over the network. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 11 COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS The ColorWise color management system provides print options that affect the output of objects in various color spaces. By specifying the appropriate settings for each print option, you can obtain the expected results for your jobs. About this chapter This chapter provides an overview of the ColorWise management system, which controls color on the Fiery PRO80 (see page 12), and detailed explanations of each print option. For the location of each print option, see the following table. This chapter also provides information about PostScript printer drivers and instructions for setting the ColorWise print options for Windows and Mac OS computers. For information about printer drivers, see page 29. ColorWise print option See Auto Trapping page 13 Black Detection page 13 Black Overprint page 14 Black Text and Graphics page 15 CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method page 16 CMYK/Grayscale Source or Device Link page 17 Combine Separations page 18 Composite Overprint page 19 Gray (RGB and CMYK) page 20 Output Profile page 20 PDF/X Output Intent page 21 RGB/Lab Rendering Intent page 22 RGB Source or Device Link page 23 Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source page 24 Spot Color Matching page 25 Substitute Colors page 26 COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 12 Managing color on the Fiery PRO80 Applications allow you to generate color data for the Fiery PRO80 in many different color spaces. The most common type of color data produced from office applications is RGB, while prepress applications generally produce CMYK data. Desktop applications also generate spot colors, such as PANTONE colors. To complicate matters, a single page may contain a mix of RGB, CMYK, and spot colors. The Fiery PRO80 allows you to control the printing of mixed-color documents with features that apply specifically to RGB, CMYK, or spot color data. The following diagram illustrates the print options in the Fiery PRO80 color management process that affect color data conversions. You can access these print options when you send a print job to the Fiery PRO80. Most of these options and settings are described in subsequent sections of this chapter. RGB Source or Device Link is the only color option that applies strictly to RGB color data. The other options that affect RGB color also affect the more rarely used Lab, XYZ, and other calibrated color spaces. NOTE: With PostScript 3, a PostScript job can include calibrated CMYK (or CIEBasedDEFG) data. The RGB/Lab Rendering Intent print option, which normally affects only RGB data, affects calibrated CMYK data as well. The RGB Source or Device Link setting does not affect calibrated CMYK data. RGB data ➪ RGB Source Gray (RGB) RGB/Lab Rendering Intent Brightness Black Text and Graphics Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source Output Profile CMYK data ➪ CMYK/Grayscale Source CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method Gray (CMYK) Brightness Black Text and Graphics Combine Separations Output Profile ➪ ➪ Spot color data ➪ Spot Color Matching Fiery PRO80 color processor Color data sent to printer COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 13 Descriptions of ColorWise print options The following sections provide detailed explanations of the ColorWise print options and how these options affect print jobs. NOTE: For information about the following print options, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. • Halftone Simulation • Paper Simulation • 2-Color Print Mapping Auto Trapping Trapping is a technique where the size of objects is modified so that colors printed next to each other overlap slightly, to prevent white spaces between two colors. These white spaces, or “halos,” can be caused by factors such as misregistration, the physical properties of the toners, and the stiffness of the media. This illustration shows the same image with and without trapping. If you enable the Auto Trapping option, trapping is applied to all of the objects in a job. The Fiery PRO80 is shipped with trapping values that are optimized for a Fiery-driven print device using regular paper. If these values do not provide the results necessary for the media that you use, and if Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition is configured on the Fiery PRO80, you can modify the values to meet your requirements. For more information, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. Black Detection The Black Detection option allows you to specify whether or not to detect black-and-white pages before printing your job. • Off: Select Off if your job consists of black-and-white text pages combined with a significant number of color pages. • On: Select On if you are printing a predominantly black-and-white job. Black-and-white only pages will print with the proper billing information. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 14 Black Overprint The Black Overprint option allows you to specify whether or not black text or black text and graphics, defined as RGB=0, 0, 0, or as CMYK=0%, 0%, 0%, 100%, overprints colored backgrounds. • Text: Black text overprints colored backgrounds, eliminating white gaps and reducing the halo effect or misregistration of colors. You can choose this setting only if the Black Text and Graphics option is set to Pure Black On. • Text & Graphics: Black text and graphics overprint colored backgrounds, eliminating white gaps and reducing halo effects or misregistration of colors. You can choose this setting only if the Black Text and Graphics option is set to Pure Black On. • Off: Black text or text/graphics knocks out colored backgrounds. NOTE: Before sending the print job to the printer, PostScript applications may perform their own black overprint conversions. One example of how you might use this setting is a page that contains black text on a light blue background. The background blue is CMYK=40%, 30%, 0%, 0%. The black text is CMYK=0%, 0%, 0%, 100%. • With Black Overprint set to Text or Text & Graphics, the final text or text/graphic portions of the page are overprinted, or combined with the underlying color. Black colors generated by applications (for example, RGB=0, 0, 0 or CMYK=0%, 0%, 0%, 100%) are printed using the black toner. This means that black text and line art does not exhibit halftone artifacts (as long as the printer is calibrated correctly). No transition in cyan and magenta toners occurs. The quality of the output is improved, because it does not show artifacts near the edges of the black text. • With Black Overprint Off, the border of the text or text/graphics is on an edge that has cyan and magenta toners on one side (outside the text) and black toner on the other side (inside the text). This transition may cause visible artifacts due to the practical limitations of the printer. NOTE: The reproduction of CMYK components is affected by the CMYK/Grayscale Source setting and calibration curve when CMYK is not 0%, 0%, 0%, 100%. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 15 Black Text and Graphics The Black Text and Graphics option affects black text and vector graphics. Under most circumstances, set this option to Pure Black On. When Black Text and Graphics is set to Pure Black On, black colors generated by applications (for example, RGB=0, 0, 0 or CMYK=0%, 0%, 0%, 100%) are printed using black toner only. The black text and line art do not exhibit halftone artifacts (as long as the printer is calibrated correctly) and are not misregistered, since one toner is used. In addition, this setting eliminates blasting. This option must be set to Pure Black On if you want to set the Black Overprint option to Text or Text/Graphics. For some jobs, it is preferable to set this option to Normal, for example, if the page includes gradient fills that use black. The following table describes the behavior of the Black Text and Graphics option with black data defined in different color spaces. NOTE: Use the Black Text and Graphics option only when printing composites, not when printing separations. NOTE: PostScript applications, such as QuarkXPress, may convert elements defined as RGB=0, 0, 0 to four-color CMYK black before sending the job to the Fiery PRO80. These elements are not affected by the Black Text and Graphics option. For more information, see Fiery Color Reference. Color Black Text and Graphics = Normal Black Text and Graphics = Pure Black On or Rich Black On RGB=0,0,0 (all other RGB values are unaffected by the Black Text and Graphics setting) RGB=0,0,0 is printed according to the definition for RGB=0,0,0 in the output profile. This may be a rich black using all toners if the output profile specifies a rich black, or may be K-only if the output profile specifies K-only for RGB=0,0,0. The output is affected by the calibration curve. RGB=0,0,0 is printed as K-only, using the black toner (Pure Black On) or 100% K plus 50% Cyan (Rich Black On) using black and cyan toners. All other RGB values are unaffected by the Black Text and Graphics setting. CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100% (all other CMYK values are unaffected by the Black Text and Graphics setting) CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100% may be printed as K-only or as a rich black using all toners, depending on the CMYK/Grayscale Source setting. If CMYK/Grayscale Source is set to a specific profile, CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100% prints as K-only and the amount of black toner is limited by the CMYK Source profile and the calibration curve. Setting CMYK/Grayscale Source to ColorWise Off disables the CMYK Source profile and the calibration curve. In this case, the black toner is not limited by the calibration curve. CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100% is printed as K-only, using the black toner (Pure Black On) or 100% K plus 50% Cyan (Rich Black On) using black and cyan toners, regardless of the CMYK/ Grayscale Source and CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method settings. All other CMYK values are unaffected by the Black Text and Graphics setting. Setting CMYK/Grayscale Source to ColorWise Off disables the CMYK source profile and the calibration curve. In this case, the black toner is not limited by the calibration curve. Spot Colors (unaffected by the Black Text and Graphics setting) Standard spot color processing Standard spot color processing COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 16 CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method The CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method allows you to define your preferred CMYK-to-CMYK conversion technique. • Quick applies one-dimensional transfer curves to adjust output densities in the cyan, magenta, yellow, and black channels. This technique leads to eye-pleasing color output from your printer because pure primary colors are not “contaminated” by other colorants. While it is the fastest simulation method and perfect for drafts, avoid using it for final documents that are used as press proofs. Other techniques offer the color simulation accuracy required by proofing applications. • Full (Source GCR) provides a complete and accurate simulation based on colorimetric transformations. Hues are preserved, even for primary colors. The Gray Component Replacement level specified in the original (source) document is preserved. Process black expressed in CMY is reproduced using CMY toner. Full (Source GCR) is recommended for the highest quality press proofing applications. • Full (Output GCR) is a complete and accurate simulation method based on colorimetric transformations. Hues are preserved, even for primary colors. With this method, the Gray Component Replacement (GCR) level that was specified in the original document is not preserved. Instead, all CMYK data is reseparated using the GCR level specified by the output profile. This simulation technique is similar to traditional ICC color matching methods and is more appropriate than Full (Source GCR) for full color printing designed for the press, but reproduced on your printer. NOTE: When you specify Pure Black On for Black Text and Graphics and Full (Output GCR) or Full (Source GCR) for CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method, the black text and graphics in your document are printed with 100% black-only toner. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 17 CMYK/Grayscale Source or Device Link The CMYK/Grayscale Source or Device Link print option allows you to print press proofs or simulations. This setting specifies the offset press standard or other color printing device that you want to simulate. This option affects CMYK data only. When you specify a setting other than None or ColorWise Off for the CMYK/Grayscale Source, the Fiery PRO80 overrides source color space definitions or profiles that other color management systems may have specified. For example, if your document contains an embedded CMYK profile, the CMYK/Grayscale Source setting overrides it. In cases where you do not want this setting to override another specified source color space, choose None. In the printer driver, you can view an unlimited number of custom Full simulations created using Command WorkStation. The number of custom simulations is limited by the available disk space on the Fiery PRO80. The CMYK/Grayscale Source setting you specify depends on the press standard for which the CMYK data was separated. • For images that were separated using a custom separation (such as a separation produced with an ICC profile), choose the corresponding profile on the Fiery PRO80 with the CMYK/Grayscale Source setting. • For images that were separated for SWOP, choose SWOP as the CMYK/Grayscale Source setting. To properly simulate a printed image that was separated using an ICC profile, the same profile must be present on the Fiery PRO80. For more information about importing ICC profiles to the Fiery PRO80, see Command WorkStation Help. Two settings are available if you want no CMYK simulation: • The None setting sends your original CMYK data to the printer with calibration applied, but without conversions to simulate another printer. The None setting is recommended if you use another color management system instead of ColorWise (for example, ColorSync or Photoshop). In this case, the Fiery PRO80 is expecting to receive CMYK data already in the device color space of the Fiery PRO80. The Fiery PRO80 will not convert the data, but it will apply calibration. • The ColorWise Off setting sends your original CMYK data to the printer without calibration applied and without conversions to simulate another printer. The CMYK data is still subject to maximum density constraints, however. The ColorWise Off setting is not available as a setting in Command WorkStation and cannot be the default CMYK/Grayscale Source setting. You choose this setting for a specific job. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 18 NOTE: When you print with the ColorWise Off setting, make sure the options you choose in your application do not cause the application to modify CMYK data. If you enable PostScript Color Management or include an embedded profile, the color data sent by the application is similar to Lab color. When you print with settings like Let Printer Determine Colors or Let Photoshop Determine Colors, the application either converts the CMYK data or tags it for color management. You must specify No Color Management in the application when you print with the ColorWise Off setting. Combine Separations The Combine Separations setting specifies how to print separated CMYK data. It supports: Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black. With the Fiery Graphic Arts Package or Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition, you can combine an unlimited number of spot color separations along with the CMYK separations. For more information, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. • Off prints each separation individually. • On combines separations as a single, composite-color document, and automatically makes the settings for the following print options: Color Mode (CMYK) and Black Overprint (Off ). The results of combining the multiple plates are predictable and accurate, regardless of the original application used. This feature also fully supports DCS 2.0 file formats when included in a PostScript print job from a page layout application. The following applications have been tested with Mac OS and Windows for compatibility with the Combine Separations option: • Adobe Illustrator • Adobe InDesign • Adobe PageMaker • Adobe FreeHand • QuarkXPress For information about using the Combine Separations option with applications such as Photoshop, see Fiery Color Reference. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 19 Composite Overprint When overlapping objects are printed, the foreground object can either overprint or knock out the background object. With overprinting, the color of the background object shows through the foreground object where they overlap, and the resulting color is a combination of the colors of the two objects. With a knock-out, the foreground object hides the background object where they overlap. The Composite Overprint print option allows you to print overprinted objects as specified in the source file. By default, the Composite Overprint print option is off and overlapping objects print as knockouts. NOTE: The Composite Overprint option does not overprint the foreground object if it is an RGB object. The Composite Overprint print option is supported for PostScript and PDF jobs produced by the following applications: • Adobe Acrobat • Adobe Illustrator • Adobe InDesign • Adobe FreeHand • QuarkXPress • CorelDRAW The 2-Color Print Mapping option is ignored when Composite Overprint is enabled. A job with more than 32 spot colors may not print as expected. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 20 Gray (RGB) and Gray (CMYK) When Gray (RGB) is enabled, any RGB color where R=G=B is printed using only black toner instead of processed black. Similarly, when Gray (CMYK) is enabled, any CMYK color where C=M=Y=0 and K=any value is printed using only black toner instead of processed black. You can choose to apply the Gray (RGB) or Gray (CMYK) option to either Text and Graphics or to Text, Graphics, and Images. The following limitations apply: • The Gray (RGB) or Gray (CMYK) option has no effect on a job that is pre-separated. • If CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method is set to Quick, the Gray (CMYK) setting does not affect the output. • If Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source is enabled, the Gray (RGB) option is set to Off. Likewise, if the Gray (RGB) option is not set to Off, you cannot enable Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source. • If Black Text and Graphics is set to Pure Black On or Rich Black On, it takes precedence over Gray (RGB) or Gray (CMYK) for 100% black text and graphics. • If a gray is specified as a spot color, the Gray (RGB) or Gray (CMYK) option does not affect that gray. Output Profile Because the output profile is applied to all data in the print job, make sure the profile you select is the right one for your job. The default output profile consists of a profile for your printer that describes its color characteristics and a calibration target that describes the expected behavior of the printer. Use Command WorkStation to import your own output profile to the Fiery PRO80. Imported output profiles that do not already include a calibration target are at first associated with the calibration target that is tied to the default output profile. You can edit calibration target D-Max values separately. Select the Use Media Defined Profile setting to automatically apply the output profile associated with the media type used in a print job rather than setting a specific output profile. For more information, see Command WorkStation Help. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 21 PDF/X Output Intent PDF/X is a subset of the PDF specification. PDF files can contain a variety of elements (text, graphics, even animations) and it is not always obvious how these elements should be displayed or printed. PDF/X was designed with a focus on high quality printing. It excludes the use of PDF features that are not appropriate for graphic arts and adds features that prevent ambiguities related to printing. A PDF/X compliant document contains embedded information about the intended printing conditions for the document. The PDF/X Output Intent option, when enabled for a PDF/X job, specifies that the Fiery PRO80 use the PDF/X output intent embedded in the PDF/X document. Typically, whether you use this option depends on whether you are using the Fiery PRO80 for proofing or for production (final) printing. Prints for proofing are expected to look exactly like the output of the final production device, regardless of the capabilities of the Fiery PRO80 or the printer. For instance, when proofing Newsprint, you want the color gamut of the printer to be very limited compared to its capabilities. In production, you usually want to maximize the use of the printer gamut by applying specific color features of the Fiery PRO80 or the printer. Even in production, however, you might choose to limit the color gamut in order to achieve consistency in the color produced by different devices. The PDF/X Output Intent option only affects PDF/X files (conforming to the PDF/X3 or PDF/X-1a standard). It has no effect on non-PDF files or PDF files that are not PDF/X compliant. Profiles specified by PDF/X files must be embedded in the files, not referenced from an external locations. NOTE: With the Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition option, you can use a Hot Folders filter to determine if a PDF file is PDF/X compliant. For information about this Hot Folders filter, see Hot Folders Help. When PDF/X Output Intent is enabled and no other setting conflicts, the Fiery PRO80 processes a PDF/X compliant file in a way that produces results defined by the intents and source color spaces embedded in the file. The Fiery PRO80 ignores the CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method and CMYK/Grayscale Source options. The rendering intents in the PDF/ X file are used and the printed output is limited to the color gamut specified by the output profile embedded in the file. When PDF/X Output Intent is disabled, the Fiery PRO80 ignores the PDF/X output intent. You can specify the PDF/X Output Intent print option for a job in Job Properties in Command WorkStation but not when you print from the printer driver. PDF/X files can be imported directly to the Fiery PRO80 using Command WorkStation or Hot Folders, but printer drivers always convert PDF before sending a job to the Fiery PRO80. The PDF/X Output Intent option does not appear in the printer driver. When you enable PDF/X Output Intent, you must set the RGB Source option to None so that the rendering intent embedded in the PDF/X file will be used. The PDF/X Output Intent and RGB Source options are both accessed from Expert Settings in the Color icon of Job Properties. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 22 RGB/Lab Rendering Intent The RGB/Lab Rendering Intent option specifies a rendering intent for color conversions. To control the appearance of images, such as prints from office applications or RGB photographs from Photoshop, select the appropriate rendering intent. The Fiery PRO80 allows you to choose from the four rendering intents currently found in industry standard ICC profiles. Fiery PRO80 rendering intent Best used for Equivalent ICC rendering intent Photographic: Typically results in less saturated output than presentation rendering when printing out-of-gamut colors. This style preserves tonal relationships in images. Photographs, including scans and images from stock photography CDs and digital camera images. Image, Contrast, and Perceptual Presentation: Creates saturated colors but does not match printed colors precisely to displayed colors. In-gamut colors, such as flesh tones, are rendered well. This style is similar to the Photographic rendering intent. Artwork and graphs in presentations. In many cases, this style can be used for mixed pages that contain presentation graphics and photographs. Saturation, Graphics Relative Colorimetric: Provides white-point transformation between the source and destination white points. For example, the bluish white color (gray) of a monitor is replaced by paper white. This style avoids visible borders between blank spaces and white objects. Advanced use when color matching is important, but you prefer white colors in the document to print as paper white. This style may also be used with PostScript color management to affect CMYK data for simulation purposes. Relative Colorimetric Absolute Colorimetric: Provides no white point transformation between the source and destination white points. For example, the bluish white color (gray) is not replaced by paper white. Situations when exact colors are needed and visible borders are not distracting. This style may also be used with PostScript color management to affect CMYK data for simulation purposes. Absolute Colorimetric COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 23 RGB Source or Device Link The RGB Source or Device Link setting allows you to define the characteristics of the RGB data in your document so that the appropriate color conversion occurs on the Fiery PRO80. Commonly used monitor color spaces are available from the printer driver and the Fiery PRO80. For others, use Command WorkStation to download custom monitor or scanner profiles. When you specify a setting other than None for the RGB Source, the Fiery PRO80 overrides source color space definitions or profiles that other color management systems may have specified. For example, if your document contains an embedded RGB profile, the RGB Source setting overrides it. In cases where you do not want this setting to override another specified source color space, choose None. When you specify a setting other than None, because the color space definitions are overridden, the output from the Fiery PRO80 is consistent across platforms. The Fiery PRO80 RGB Source options are as follows: • EFIRGB specifies an EFI-defined color space recommended for users who have no detailed information about their RGB data. • sRGB (PC) specifies the definition of a Windows computer monitor profile used as the default. • Apple Standard specifies the definition of a Mac OS computer monitor profile used as the default. • Adobe RGB (1998) is an Adobe-defined color space, used in pre-press as the default working space in Photoshop 5. • eciRGB is the European Color Initiative (ECI) recommended space for use as an RGB working color space and color data exchange format for ad agencies, publishers, reproduction and printing houses. • Fiery RGB is an EFI-defined color space recommended for users of office applications. This color space is similar to EFIRGB but is larger and can provide a more desirable blue output. • None instructs the Fiery PRO80 to allow the RGB sources you defined elsewhere, such as in the application, to be used. When you set RGB Source to None, the appearance of colors is not independent of the file type. For example, RGB EPS files looks different from RGB TIFF files. With RGB Source set to None, PostScript RGB data that contains a source color space definition is converted using the RGB/Lab Rendering Intent option (see “RGB/Lab Rendering Intent” on page 22). Non-PostScript RGB data and PostScript RGB data that does not contain a source color space definition are converted using the EFIRGB source profile and Presentation rendering intent. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 24 Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source The Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source option determines how RGB colors (as well as Lab and XYZ colors) are converted to CMYK. The name of this option is meant to be descriptive, because the option defines the color spaces that are used by the Fiery PRO80 to “separate” the RGB data into CMYK values. The two choices available for this option determine whether RGB data is converted into the full gamut of the printer (Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source disabled) or is first converted into the gamut of another digital printer or press standard (Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source enabled). This feature helps make one device behave like another for RGB data. For example, if a high-quality ICC profile is available for another print device, the printer can simulate the behavior of that device. Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source is also useful for prepress applications. For example, it allows you to experiment with the appearance of an RGB scan under different press printing conditions, without having to convert the RGB data to CMYK data for each condition. When the desired printing condition is found, convert the file to CMYK, using the same CMYK/Grayscale Source that you used during the experimentation. NOTE: Use the Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source print option in conjunction with the Output Profile or CMYK/Grayscale Source print options. • Enabled converts all RGB colors into the CMYK color space for a specified simulation (select the desired simulation with the CMYK/Grayscale Source print option). • Disabled converts all RGB colors into the CMYK color space of your printer. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 25 Spot Color Matching The Spot Color Matching option provides automatic matching of spot colors with their best CMYK equivalents. • On: The Fiery PRO80 uses a built-in table to generate the closest CMYK matches of spot colors your printer can produce. (New tables are generated when you add new output profiles.) With Spot-On, the Fiery PRO80 uses the CMYK matches determined through Spot-On (see page 65). • Off: The Fiery PRO80 processes the spot color as CMYK data and uses CMYK equivalents defined by the spot color manufacturer, such as PANTONE. These are the same CMYK equivalents used by applications that include spot color libraries. NOTE: Spot colors that are not included in the built-in table are treated as CMYK. For jobs that include spot colors, set Spot Color Matching to On unless you are printing press simulations. In that case, set Spot Color Matching to Off and choose the appropriate CMYK/ Grayscale Source (see page 17). For a PDF job that includes spot colors that are not included in the built-in table, setting Spot Color Matching to On retains the original spot colors. The Fiery PRO80 references the built-in table to generate the closest CMYK matches of the original spot color. NOTE: Use Spot Color Matching only when printing composites, not when printing separations. Spot Color Matching and the PANTONE Coated Color Reference The PANTONE Coated Color Reference prints differently depending on the Spot Color Matching setting (see Fiery Color Reference). • On: The Fiery PRO80 uses a built-in table or, with Spot-On, the Spot-On color dictionaries to generate the best matches for the PANTONE colors that your printer can produce. The PANTONE number is displayed below each swatch. For more information about Spot-On, see page 65. • Off: The Fiery PRO80 prints swatches using the CMYK values recommended by Pantone, Inc. (and used by applications that provide PANTONE color libraries). The CMYK values used to generate the color, as well as the PANTONE number of the color, are printed below each swatch. These CMYK values are printed through the selected CMYK/ Grayscale Source and Output Profile settings. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 26 Substitute Colors Spot-On allows you to create a list of substitute colors. These are colors that, when called for in a document by their RGB or CMYK values, are substituted with a different color having the CMYK values from the Spot-On color dictionary. This permits exact color control and overrides individual RGB and CMYK colors. To enable substitute colors for a job, select the Substitute Colors option. For more information about creating and using substitute colors, see Command WorkStation Help. Specifying ColorWise print options To modify Fiery PRO80 printing behavior, do any of the following: • Specify default values for ColorWise options in Color Setup in Command WorkStation. You can also set default values from Fiery PRO80 Setup, as described in Configuration and Setup. The defaults apply to all subsequent print jobs unless you override them. A job uses the Fiery PRO80 default settings (unless otherwise specified) at the time it is processed for printing, and not at the time it is sent to the Fiery PRO80 Hold queue. • Specify ColorWise options for an individual print job using the menus that appear in the printer driver. • Specify ColorWise options for a job printed through Hot Folders using the Job Properties settings in Hot Folders. • Specify ColorWise options for a job already submitted and held at the Fiery PRO80 using the Job Properties settings in Command WorkStation. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 27 For the location of each print option, see the following table. ColorWise print option Color window of printer driver or Job Properties Basic Settings of printer driver, Job Properties, or Color Setup Expert Settings of printer driver, Job Properties, or Color Setup Auto Trapping ✔ Black Detection ✔ Black Overprint ✔ Black Text and Graphics ✔ CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method ✔ ✔ CMYK/Grayscale Source or Device Link ✔ ✔ Combine Separations ✔ Composite Overprint ✔ Gray (RGB and CMYK) ✔ ✔ Output Profile ✔ ✔ PDF/X Output Intent ✔ (Job Properties only) RGB/Lab Rendering Intent ✔ ✔ RGB Source or Device Link ✔ ✔ Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source ✔ Spot Color Matching ✔ ✔ Substitute Colors ✔ COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 28 Setting default values in Command WorkStation Command WorkStation allows you to set the default values for the ColorWise print options and print settings for the Fiery PRO80. These settings are applied to all print jobs sent to the Fiery PRO80, unless a user overrides them for an individual job by changing settings in the printer driver. These default settings can also be overridden using Command WorkStation Job Properties. In addition, the defaults set in Command WorkStation are automatically reflected in the printer driver and in Fiery PRO80 Setup (for those options that can be set in Setup). The ColorWise print option settings are in the Color Management tab under the Color Setup tab in the Device Center. For more information, see Command WorkStation Help. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 29 Setting print options in the printer driver The printer driver writes a PostScript file containing the instructions generated by your application and the settings for the ColorWise print options you selected. The printer driver then sends the PostScript file to the Fiery PRO80. The Fiery PRO80 performs PostScript processing and color conversions and sends raster color data to the printer. Setting print options for Windows This section explains how to set color management print options with the Adobe and Microsoft PostScript printer drivers for Windows, PostScript 3 printer drivers that take full advantage of the color features of the Fiery PRO80. Before you proceed, do the following: • Install the printer driver and the Fiery PRO80 PPD (see Printing). • Set up the Fiery PRO80 for printing (see Printing). NOTE: The following illustrations and instructions do not apply to all applications. Many applications, such as Adobe PageMaker, Photoshop, Adobe Illustrator, QuarkXPress, and CorelDRAW, have other color management options in addition to those presented in the printer driver. For information about specific applications, see Fiery Color Reference. Use the following procedure to set the color options for Windows computers. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 30 TO SET PRINT OPTIONS FOR WINDOWS COMPUTERS 1 Choose Print in your application. 2 Select Fiery PRO80 as your printer and click Properties. In the Properties dialog box, the Fiery Printing tab is displayed. 3 Click the Color icon. 4 Specify the settings for the print options in the Color window. For information about ColorWise print options, see page 13. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 31 5 Click Expert Settings. The Advanced Edit dialog box appears. NOTE: If the Basic Settings and Expert Settings buttons are not active, make sure that Two- Way Communication is enabled. For information about enabling Two-Way Communication, see printer driver Help. 6 Click Server Defaults to display the default values currently set on the Fiery PRO80. 7 Specify settings for the ColorWise print options in each of the tabs. For most users, the default settings provide adequate color control. For information about individual print options, see page 13. 8 Click OK to save the settings and close the Advanced Edit window. 9 Click OK to close the Properties window, and then click OK to send your job. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 32 Setting print options in Mac OS This section explains how to set color management print options with the printer drivers for Mac OS. Before you proceed, do the following: • Install the Fiery PRO80 PPD (see Printing). • Set up the Fiery PRO80 for printing (see Printing). TO SET PRINT OPTIONS FOR MAC OS X COMPUTERS 1 Choose Print in your application. The Print dialog box appears. 2 Mac OS X v10.5 and 10.6: Expand the dialog box, if necessary, by clicking the arrow next to the Printer name. 3 Mac OS X v10.3.9 and 10.4.x: Click Copies & Pages, choose ColorSync from the drop-down list, and choose In Printer from the Color Conversion list. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 33 Mac OS X v10.5 and 10.6: Click Preview, choose Color Matching from the drop-down list, and select In Printer. 4 Choose Fiery Features from the drop-down list. 5 Select Two-Way Communication. For information about enabling Two Way Communication, see printer driver Help. 6 Click Full Properties. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 34 7 Click the Color icon. The Color pane appears. 8 Specify settings for the print options in the Color pane. For information about ColorWise print options, see page 13. COLORWISE PRINT OPTIONS 35 9 Click Expert Settings. The Advanced Edit window appears. NOTE: Alternatively, you can click Basic Settings to display the Color Management window, which also displays ColorWise print options. However, not all of the print options appear in the Color Management window. 10 Click Server Defaults to display the default values currently set on the Fiery PRO80. 11 Specify settings for the ColorWise print options in each of the tabs. For most users, the default settings provide adequate color control. For information about individual print options, see page 26. 12 Click OK to save the settings and close the Advanced Edit window. The Color pane reappears. 13 Click OK to close the Printing Preferences window, and then click Print to send your job. COLOR PROFILES 36 COLOR PROFILES The Fiery PRO80 includes by default a number of RGB and CMYK profiles that you can use for printing through the RGB Source, CMYK/Grayscale Source, and Output Profile settings for a job. For more information about these options, see ColorWise Print Options. You can manage the profiles on the Fiery PRO80 using Command WorkStation. You can import or delete other profiles as well. Color files The User Software DVD includes a number of files, including color profiles, that are useful for color management. To add color profiles to the Fiery PRO80: • Install them on your computer. • Use Command WorkStation to import them to the Fiery PRO80. For information about importing profiles to the Fiery PRO80 using Command WorkStation, see Command WorkStation Help. COLOR PROFILES 37 Installing additional ICC profiles on your computer You can install (copy) additional ICC profiles from the User Software DVD or the Fiery PRO80 to your computer. Use the ICC profiles with applications that support ICC standards, such as Adobe Photoshop. Location on User Software DVD Profiles Adobe ICC Profiles folder (inside the Windows Color Files\ICC Profiles folder or Mac Color Files: ICC Profiles folder) These profiles were created by Adobe Systems, Inc. For more information, see the documents included in the folder. CMYK Profiles: • EuropeISOCoatedFOGRA27.icc • EuroscaleUncoated.icc • JapanColor2001Coated.icc • JapanColor2001Uncoated.icc • JapanColor2002Newspaper.icc • JapanWebCoated.icc • USSheetfedCoated.icc • USSheetfedUncoated.icc • USWebCoatedSWOP.icc • USWebUncoated.icc RGB Profiles: • AdobeRGB1998.icc • AppleRGB.icc • ColorMatchRGB.icc • sRGB Color Space Profile.icm COLOR PROFILES 38 ECI folder (inside the Windows Color Files\ICC Profiles folder or Mac Color Files: ICC Profiles folder) These profiles were created by the European Color Initiative (ECI). For more information, see the documents included in the CMYK Profiles folder and the RGB Profiles folder, as well as the ECI web site at www.eci.org. CMYK Profiles: • ISOcoated_v2_300_eci.icc • ISOcoated_v2_eci.icc • ISOuncoated.icc • ISOuncoatedyellowish.icc • ISOwebcoated.icc • SC_paper_eci.icc RGB Profiles: • ECI-RGB.V1.0.icc • eciRGB_v2.icc • eciRGB_v2_ICCv4.icc Location on User Software DVD Profiles COLOR PROFILES 39 EFI Support folder (inside the Windows Color Files\ICC Profiles folder or Mac Color Files: ICC Profiles folder) These profiles were created by EFI. For more information, see the General Requirements for Applications in Commercial Offset Lithography (GRACoL) web site at www.gracol.org, the Fogra web site at www.fogra.org, and the Specifications Web Offset Publications (SWOP) web site at www.swop.org. CMYK Profiles: • EFIEURO.icc • EFISWOP.icc • Enterprise CMYK.icc • GRACoL2006_Coated1_EFI.icc: • ISOCoated.icc • ISOCoated_FOGRA39L_EFI.icc • ISOUncoated_FOGRA29L_EFI.icc • SWOP2006_Coated3_EFI.icc • SWOP2006_Coated5_EFI.icc Japan Profiles: • EFIDIC.ICC • EFIJMPA2.icc • JC2001_type1_EFI.icc • JC2001_type2_EFI.icc • JC2001_type3_EFI.icc • JC2001_type4_EFI.icc • TOYO Offset Coated 2.0.icc RGB Profiles: • EFISRGB.ICC • Fiery RGB v2.icc • Fiery RGB v4.icc • Fiery RGB v5.icc • RGB D65 (Splash).icc Location on User Software DVD Profiles COLOR PROFILES 40 For most ICC-aware applications, you must install the files in a folder named Color (Windows) or a folder named Profiles in the Library: ColorSync folder (Mac OS). For use with the Fiery PRO80, you can copy the files to a folder of your choice. TO INSTALL ICC PROFILES ON A WINDOWS COMPUTER FROM THE USER SOFTWARE DVD 1 Insert the User Software DVD into the DVD drive. 2 Open the folder containing the profile. 3 Right-click the profile that you want, and then click Install Profile. The profiles are installed automatically to the Windows\System32\spool\drivers\color folder on your computer. TO INSTALL ICC PROFILES ON A MAC OS COMPUTER FROM THE USER SOFTWARE DVD 1 Insert the User Software DVD into the DVD drive. 2 Open the folder containing the profile. 3 Copy the profiles into Library: ColorSync: Profiles. NOTE: You must log on with Administrator privileges. TO INSTALL ICC PROFILES ON A WINDOWS COMPUTER FROM THE FIERY PRO80 OVER THE NETWORK 1 Browse for the Fiery PRO80 over the network, using either the IP address or the DNS server name. 2 Type the user name and password, if required. Consult your administrator to see if this information is required. 3 Double-click the PC_User_SW directory. 4 Open the ICC folder. 5 Right-click the profile that you want, and then click Install Profile. The profiles are installed automatically to the Windows\System32\spool\drivers\color folder on your computer. COLOR PROFILES 41 TO INSTALL COLORSYNC PROFILES ON A MAC OS COMPUTER FROM THE FIERY PRO80 OVER THE NETWORK 1 Choose Connect to Server from the Go menu. 2 Type smb:// followed by the IP address of the Fiery PRO80 and click Connect. If you cannot locate your Fiery PRO80, contact your administrator. 3 Type the user name and password if required. Ask your administrator if this information is required. 4 Double-click the Mac_User_SW directory. 5 Open the ColorSync folder. 6 Copy the profiles into Library: ColorSync: Profiles. NOTE: You must log on with Administrator privileges. On Mac OS, see the ColorSync documentation for setting ColorSync profiles, such as EFIRGB. COLOR PROFILES 42 Other color files You can copy additional color files from the User Software DVD or the Fiery PRO80. These files are useful for color matching and for calibration. Windows Color Files folder or Mac Color Files folder CMYK Color Reference.ps: An 11-page, Letter-size PostScript file used for reference when defining CMYK colors in applications. PANTONE Book.ps: A 20-page, Letter-size PostScript file that indicates the closest equivalent of PANTONE coated colors that the Fiery PRO80 and your printer model can produce. The method used to print the PANTONE Book.ps file differs, depending on the Spot Color Matching setting. For more information, see “Spot Color Matching” on page 25. RGB page 01.doc: A Microsoft Word file that you can print to view available RGB colors. RGB page 02.ppt: A Microsoft PowerPoint file that you can print to view available RGB colors. Color Bars folder (inside the Windows Color Files folder or Mac Color Files folder) FieryColorBar.eps: Used for the Control Bar feature. For more information about Control Bar, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. Ugra Fogra-MediaWedge V2.2x_EFIv1.eps: Used for the Ugra/ FOGRA Media Wedge feature. For more information about this feature, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. PS Files folder (inside the Windows Color Files\Calibration Files folder or Mac Color Files: Calibration Files folder) Custom21.ps, Custom34.ps, Standard21.ps, and Standard34.ps: PostScript files of color patches for obtaining measurements. The numbers in the file names refer to the number of patches on the page. The Custom files allow you to download measurement patches that incorporate the current calibration set of the printer. The Standard files allow you to download standard measurement patches that bypass the current calibration set of the printer. NOTE: These files are provided for expert users and should not be used for day-to-day calibration. COLOR PROFILES 43 Halftone Calibration Files folder (inside the Windows Color Files\Calibration Files folder or Mac Color Files: Calibration Files folder) Images of measurement pages for various calibration instruments and page sizes, used for calibrating the Fiery PRO80 for different halftone screens. Files are provided for Adobe Photoshop and for other applications. For more information about halftone calibration, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. NOTE: For the X-Rite DTP32 Series II densitometer, use the calibration file for the X-Rite DTP32 densitometer. NOTE: Files for the ED-100 densitometer are provided. However, the ED-100 is not a supported measurement device. Photoshop folder (inside the Windows Color Files\ Calibration Files \Halftone Calibration Files folder or Mac Color Files: Calibration Files: Halftone Calibration Files folder) The following halftone calibration files are provided for Adobe Photoshop: DTP32_A3.psd DTP32_A4.psd DTP32_Letters.psd DTP32_Tabloid.psd DTP41_A3.psd DTP41_A4.psd DTP41_Letters.psd DTP41_Tabloid.psd ED100_A3.psd ED100_A4.psd ED100_Letters.psd ED100_Tabloid.psd ES1000_A3.psd ES1000_A4.psd ES1000_Letters.psd ES1000_Tabloid.psd NOTE: For the X-Rite DTP32 Series II densitometer, use the calibration file for the X-Rite DTP32 densitometer. NOTE: Files for the ED-100 densitometer are provided. However, the ED-100 is not a supported measurement device. COLOR PROFILES 44 Other Applications folder (inside the Windows Color Files\Calibration Files\Halftone Calibration Files folder or Mac Color Files: Calibration Files: Halftone Calibration Files folder) The following halftone calibration files are provided for other applications (besides Adobe Photoshop): DTP32_A3.eps DTP32_A4.eps DTP32_Letters.eps DTP32_Tabloid.eps DTP41_A3.eps DTP41_A4.eps DTP41_Letters.eps DTP41_Tabloid.eps ED100_A3.eps ED100_A4.eps ED100_Letters.eps ED100_Tabloid.eps ES1000_A3.eps ES1000_A4.eps ES1000_Letters.eps ES1000_Tabloid.eps NOTE: For the X-Rite DTP32 Series II densitometer, use the calibration file for the X-Rite DTP32 densitometer. NOTE: Files for the ED-100 densitometer are provided. However, the ED-100 is not a supported measurement device. COLOR PROFILES 45 Managing profiles on the Fiery PRO80 Command WorkStation allows you to import ICC profiles to the Fiery PRO80, export profiles, delete profiles (except for default profiles), and set the properties of profiles. You can also create custom CMYK source or output profiles by editing an existing profile and then saving it as a new profile. These features are in the Profiles tab under the Resources tab in the Device Center. For more information, see Command WorkStation Help. CALIBRATION 46 CALIBRATION Calibrating the Fiery PRO80 ensures consistent and reliable color output. Calibrate the Fiery PRO80 using the Calibrate feature in Command WorkStation with the printer’s built-in scanner, a densitometer or a spectrophotometer. If you defined a custom halftone screen, you must calibrate the Fiery PRO80 for that halftone screen before you print a job with it. For more information, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. Changing calibration has the potential to affect all jobs for all users, so consider limiting the number of people authorized to perform calibration. Set an Administrator password to control access to calibration (see Configuration and Setup). Calibration methods You can calibrate the Fiery PRO80 using the following methods: All of these calibration methods except for ColorCal from the printer touch panel are performed through Command WorkStation. For more information about each of these methods, see Command WorkStation Help. Term Refers to ColorCal (in Command WorkStation) Calibration method that uses the printer’s built-in scanner to measure toner density values ColorCal from the printer touch panel Calibration method that uses the printer’s built-in scanner to measure toner density values DTP32 or DTP32 Series II X-Rite DTP32 or DTP32 Series II automatic densitometer DTP41 X-Rite DTP41 automatic spectrophotometer ES-1000 Spectrophotometer ES-1000 hand-held spectrophotometer CALIBRATION 47 Calibrating with Command WorkStation The Calibrate feature in Command WorkStation allows you to calibrate the Fiery PRO80 using the measurement method of your choice. The Calibrate feature is in the Tools tab under the General tab in the Device Center. For more information, see Command WorkStation Help. NOTE: Multiple users can be connected to one Fiery PRO80 with Command WorkStation, but only one user at a time can use the Calibrate feature. If you try to calibrate when another user is using Command WorkStation to calibrate, an error message appears. NOTE: You can disable calibration (and color management) for CMYK data in a job by using the ColorWise Off setting for the CMYK/Grayscale Source option. For more information, see “CMYK/Grayscale Source or Device Link” on page 17. You might want to disable calibration for testing purposes, for example. 1 Click to start calibration 1 CALIBRATION 48 Printer calibration with Fiery PRO80 calibration When you calibrate the Fiery PRO80 using Calibrator in Command WorkStation, by default Calibrator calibrates the printer before printing the measurement page. We recommend that you calibrate the printer before calibrating the Fiery PRO80, but if the printer has been calibrated recently, you might choose to skip printer calibration. TO DISABLE CALIBRATION OF THE PRINTER WHEN YOU PRINT THE MEASUREMENT PAGE 1 Click Print in the Calibrator main window. The Print Options window appears. 2 Click Show Advanced Options. The Engine Calibration option is displayed. This option is set to On by default. 3 Choose Off in the Engine Calibration list. 4 Specify settings for other options and click Print. The measurement page is printed immediately, without any delay for calibrating the printer. When you calibrate the Fiery PRO80 using ColorCal in Calibrator and you choose to calibrate the scanner first, the printer is not calibrated before it prints the scanner measurement page, but only before it prints the ColorCal measurement page. CALIBRATION 49 Calibrating from the printer touch panel You can calibrate the Fiery PRO80 from the printer touch panel using ColorCal, without using Command WorkStation. If an Administrator password has been set, you will need it to perform calibration from the printer touch panel. For instructions on using the printer touch panel, see Configuration and Setup. Calibration with Web LCD enabled (default) If the Web LCD feature of the Fiery PRO80 is enabled (the default condition), use the following procedure to calibrate from the printer touch panel. NOTE: For more information about the Web LCD feature, see Configuration and Setup. TO USE COLORCAL FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL WITH WEB LCD ENABLED 1 When the printer is Idle, press Controller on the Machine tab to enter the Fiery PRO80 display. 2 Press the Tools tab, and then press Calibrate. 3 If an Administrator password is set on the Fiery PRO80, enter it and press Login. 4 Choose the calibration set from the list and press OK. 5 Choose the paper source for the measurement page and press OK. The ColorCal measurement page is comprised of swatches of color that are measured by the printer’s scanner and then compared to the target color values. 6 To print the scanner measurement page and calibrate the scanner before calibrating the Fiery PRO80, select Scanner Calibration Page and press Continue. If you clear this option, only the ColorCal measurement page is printed, and the scanner calibration is skipped. We recommend that you always calibrate the scanner before calibrating the Fiery PRO80. 7 Retrieve the measurement pages. 8 Place the grayscale strip and Color Control patches according to the instructions on the scanner measurement page, and press Continue to initiate the scan. Wait for the scan to complete. 9 When the display indicates that the measurement was successful, press Continue. CALIBRATION 50 10 Place the grayscale strip according to the instructions on the ColorCal measurement page. Place the grayscale strip face-down on the printer glass (platen). Place the strip along the top edge of the printer so that it is centered between the paper width marks on the printer. Place the color measurement page face-down over the grayscale strip. Make sure the patches on the grayscale strip do not overlap the color patches. Close the platen glass cover, being careful not to move the grayscale strip and color measurement page. 11 Press Continue to initiate the scan. Wait for the scan to complete. 12 When the display indicates that the measurement was successful, press Continue. 13 To print a Comparison Page, press Print Comparison Page. You can examine the Comparison Page to decide if the calibration is successful. 14 If the calibration is successful, press Apply & Finish to save the measurements. 1 Place grayscale strip face down 2 Place color measurement page face down over grayscale strip 1 2 CALIBRATION 51 Calibration with Web LCD disabled If the Web LCD feature of the Fiery PRO80 is disabled, use the following procedure to calibrate from the printer touch panel. NOTE: For more information about the Web LCD feature, see Configuration and Setup. TO USE COLORCAL FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL WITH WEB LCD DISABLED 1 When the printer is Idle, press Controller on the Machine tab to enter the Fiery PRO80 display. 2 Press Calibration. 3 Choose the Calibration Set. 4 For Tray, choose the paper source for the measurement page. Make sure that the paper loaded in the tray matches the paper size and media type displayed. The color measurement page consists of swatches of color that are measured by the printer’s scanner and then compared to the target color values. 5 For Engine Calibration, press the setting to change it from Disable to Enable or from Enable to Disable. If Engine Calibration is enabled, the printer is calibrated before the measurement page is printed. We recommend that you calibrate the printer before calibrating the Fiery PRO80, but if the printer has been calibrated recently, you might choose to skip printer calibration. 6 To calibrate the scanner first, press Adjust Scanner, and then press Print. Otherwise, skip to step 10. A scanner measurement page is printed. 7 Retrieve the scanner measurement page and place it on the printer glass as directed. See the scanner measurement page for directions on how to place the page correctly on the printer glass. 8 On the printer touch panel, press Scan. 9 When the display indicates that the scanner adjustment is complete, press OK. 10 Press Print. The color measurement page is printed. 11 Retrieve the color measurement page. CALIBRATION 52 12 Place the grayscale strip face-down on the printer glass. Place the strip along the top edge of the printer so that it is centered between the paper width marks on the printer. 13 Place the color measurement page face-down over the grayscale strip. Make sure the patches on the grayscale strip do not overlap the color patches. Close the platen glass cover, being careful not to move the grayscale strip and color measurement page. 14 On the printer touch panel, press Scan. 15 Wait for the display to indicate that the calibration is complete. 16 To print a comparison of this calibration with the default calibration, press Compare and then press Print. You can use this comparison to check the calibration results. 17 Press Apply to save the measurements and overwrite any previous calibration data in the calibration set. 18 Press Close to return to the Machine display. Managing calibration sets Every output profile on the Fiery PRO80 must be associated with a calibration set. The calibration set provides the Fiery PRO80 with measurements of the density response of the printer toners for specific printing conditions (for example, media type). This data, along with the expected density response of the printer, allows the Fiery PRO80 to apply corrections to color values that are sent to the printer, to achieve the calibrated output. For more information, see “An overview of calibration” on page 62. An output profile can be associated with only one calibration set, but the same calibration set can be used by more than one output profile. A calibration set must be associated with at least one output profile, otherwise the calibration set will never be used for printing. 1 Place grayscale strip face down 2 Place color measurement page face down over grayscale strip 1 2 CALIBRATION 53 Using the output profiles and calibration sets The Fiery PRO80 is shipped with one or more output profiles. You may obtain good color quality with the factory-supplied output profiles and their associated calibration sets (see scenarios 1 and 2 in the table below). However, you may need to create custom calibration sets and output profiles depending on your situation (see scenarios 3 and 4 in the following table). NOTE: Recommended papers are chosen for quality, as well as other factors, such as feeding reliability and quality of transfer. Your paper Action See 1 Recommended paper for a factory-supplied output profile (the paper that the profile is based on) You will obtain acceptable color when you print with the output profile. You do not need to create a calibration set or custom profile. See “Recommended paper and print settings” on page 54 to find out the recommended paper for an output profile. 2 Paper similar to a factorysupplied profile’s recommended paper You might be able to use the output profile. The print settings required for your paper (for example, media type and media weight) must match the print settings required by the recommended paper. If the color quality is sufficient, you do not need to create a calibration set or custom profile. The output profile name usually indicates the general type of paper (for example, plain, coated, or heavy). To find out the print settings required for the recommended paper, see “Recommended paper and print settings” on page 54. 3 Paper that is similar to a factory-supplied profile’s recommended paper but uses different print settings You might still be able to use a factory-supplied output profile, if you create a custom calibration set and use it to calibrate the Fiery PRO80 with your paper. For more information, see “Adding custom calibration sets” on page 55. 4 Paper that does not yield acceptable color with any factory-supplied profile You must create a custom calibration set and a custom profile. For more information, see “Adding custom calibration sets and output profiles” on page 55. CALIBRATION 54 Recommended paper and print settings You can check the recommended paper and print settings for a particular output profile using Profile Manager and Calibrator. TO FIND THE RECOMMENDED PAPER AND PRINT SETTINGS FOR AN OUTPUT PROFILE 1 In Command WorkStation, in Device Center, go to Color Setup > Color Management. 2 Select the Output Profile and note the name of the calibration set displayed to the right. 3 In Device Center, go to General > Tools and click Calibrate. Calibrator starts in a separate window. 4 Under Calibration Set, select Manage. The Manage Calibration Settings window appears. 5 Select the calibration set from the list. The recommended paper and the required print settings are displayed. 6 Click Cancel to close the window. CALIBRATION 55 Adding custom calibration sets If you are printing on a paper that is similar to the recommended paper but uses different print settings, you might still be able to use the output profile, but you must create a custom calibration set. If the color quality is sufficient, you do not need to create a custom profile (see scenario 3 in the table under “Using the output profiles and calibration sets” on page 53). You can add a new calibration set that you can then select when performing calibration. You can delete a custom calibration set. You cannot delete a factory-supplied calibration set. For instructions on adding a custom calibration set, see Command WorkStation Help. Adding custom calibration sets and output profiles If you determine that none of the factory-supplied output profiles yields acceptable color with your paper, you must create a custom calibration set in Calibrator and a custom profile using profile-generating software such as Fiery Color Profiler Suite (see scenario 4 in the table under “Using the output profiles and calibration sets” on page 53). For example, if you print with a halftone screen setting other than the default (Dot 1), the resulting color using the default calibration set might not be acceptable. You can create a custom calibration set and specify a new screen setting, and then also specify the same screen when you create a custom profile. NOTE: Before creating a custom calibration set and custom output profile, make sure that the printer is calibrated (if calibration is supported on the printer). For information about performing printer calibration, see the documentation that accompanies the printer. Calibration on the Fiery PRO80 requires that each output profile contains a calibration target. If an output profile does not contain a calibration target, when you import the output profile to the Fiery PRO80, the calibration target from the default output profile is added to the imported profile. The procedures in this section describe how to make sure that an appropriate calibration target is added to your custom output profile when you import it to the Fiery PRO80 and associate it with a custom calibration set. Using Fiery Color Profiler Suite If you use Fiery Color Profiler Suite to create a custom output profile, you do not have to perform any procedures to add a calibration target to the output profile. Color Profiler Suite can create a profile that contains a calibration target. • First, create a custom calibration set using Calibrator in Command WorkStation. • Next, create a custom output profile using Color Profiler Suite and install it on the Fiery PRO80. CALIBRATION 56 TO CREATE A CUSTOM CALIBRATION SET ON THE FIERY PRO80 1 In Command WorkStation, in Device Center, go to General > Tools and click Calibrate. Calibrator starts in a separate window. 2 For Calibration Set, select Manage. The Manage Calibration Settings window appears. 3 Choose a calibration set from the list. Choose the calibration set that is the most similar to your paper. For example, the calibration set might be for the same brand of paper but a different weight. 4 Type a new Recommended Paper description, choose the printer settings for the custom calibration set, and click Save. 5 Type a name for the custom calibration set and select an output profile to associate it with. Select any output profile for now. You will change this association to your custom output profile after you create the profile. 6 Click OK. The custom calibration set will be used when you print with its associated output profile. TO CREATE A CUSTOM OUTPUT PROFILE IN COLOR PROFILER SUITE V3.0 1 In Color Profiler Suite, start Printer Profiler and click Print Patches. 2 Proceed through the screens in sequence to create a profile. 3 On the Welcome screen, click Select Fiery Server and choose the Fiery PRO80. The Fiery PRO80 must be connected to your network. 4 In the Print Patches screen, click Expert Settings, make sure that the Optimize Calibration option is selected, and click OK. 5 When you print the measurement page, choose the same Image Halftone Mode setting that you chose when you created the new calibration set. 6 When you save the profile, click Install on Fiery Server and make sure the Fiery PRO80 is selected. 7 In the Profile Settings window that appears when you save the profile, under Calibration, choose the custom calibration set that you created and click OK. The custom output profile is installed on the Fiery PRO80 and associated with your custom calibration set. When you print a job using this output profile, the calibration set is used as well. CALIBRATION 57 Using a profile-generating application other than Fiery Color Profiler Suite If you use a profile-generating application other than Fiery Color Profiler Suite to create a custom output profile, follow the instruction in this section. To create the calibration target, you print a page of color patches on the Fiery PRO80 using your paper and measure the page using Calibrator. Next, you copy the calibration target to a temporary output profile and set this profile as the default output profile. When you import your custom output profile, the calibration target is added from the temporary output profile. Follow these procedures to use custom calibration sets and output profiles. • Print a measurement page. • Measure the measurement page. • Create a custom calibration set and a temporary output profile. • Set up the calibration target in the temporary output profile. • Create a custom output profile and save it to your computer. • Import the custom output profile to the Fiery PRO80. • Delete the temporary output profile. TO PRINT THE MEASUREMENT PAGE 1 Load your paper in the printer. 2 Locate the file for the measurement page on the User Software DVD. Choose the file for your page size and measurement instrument. The files are located in the Photoshop and Other Applications folders inside the following folders on the User Software DVD: • Windows Color Files\Calibration Files\Halftone Calibration Files • Mac Color Files: Calibration Files: Halftone Calibration Files 3 Start Command WorkStation and connect to the Fiery PRO80. 4 Import the measurement page file to the Hold queue of the Fiery PRO80. For instructions, see Command WorkStation Help. 5 Double-click the job in the Job Center window. The Job Properties window appears. CALIBRATION 58 6 Select the following print settings and click OK. • Set the media settings appropriate for your paper. For example, choose the media type that corresponds to your paper and the input tray that contains your paper. Choose the halftone screen that you will use to print. Be sure you also choose this setting when you create the custom calibration set and output profile. • Set the CMYK/Grayscale Source option to ColorWise OFF. With this setting, the job is printed without calibration. • Set the desired halftone setting, if available. 7 Right-click the job and choose Print. The measurement page is printed. TO MEASURE THE MEASUREMENT PAGE 1 In Command WorkStation, in Device Center, go to General > Tools and click Calibrate. 2 Make a note of the selected calibration set. For this procedure, you can use any existing calibration set. 3 Select Expert mode, click Save to File, and save the measurements for the currently selected calibration set to a file on your computer. If you do not need to preserve the existing measurements (for example, you have not calibrated the Fiery PRO80 using this calibration set), you can skip this step. 4 Measure the measurement page. For instructions, see the section in Command WorkStation Help for your measurement device. Do not print the measurement page in Calibrator. Use the measurement page you have already printed. 5 Click Apply to save the measurements. CALIBRATION 59 TO CREATE A CUSTOM CALIBRATION SET AND TEMPORARY DEFAULT OUTPUT PROFILE 1 In Calibrator, create a custom calibration set. For instructions, see Command WorkStation Help. You must choose an existing calibration set that the custom calibration set is based on. Choose the same calibration set that you used to measure the measurement page. The measurements are copied to the custom calibration set you create. In the custom calibration set, be sure to choose the same Screen setting that you used to print the measurement page. When you create a custom calibration set, you associate it with a copy of an existing output profile. You can choose any output profile; this association is temporary. You will not use the copied output profile to print. 2 If you saved the current measurements to a file in the previous procedure, you can restore the measurements. • Select the correct calibration set. • Click From File under Get Measurements, select the file, and click Open. • Click Apply to save the measurements. Alternatively, you can restore the factory default measurements. • Select the correct calibration set. • Click Restore Device, and then click OK. TO SET UP THE CALIBRATION TARGET USING A TEMPORARY DEFAULT OUTPUT PROFILE 1 In Calibrator, select Expert mode. 2 Make sure that your custom calibration set is selected. 3 Choose Measurements vs. Target under View Measurements (optional) and click View. 4 Make a note of the Measured D-Max values for C, M, Y, and K. Be sure to note the Measured values, not the Target values. 5 In Command WorkStation, in Device Center, choose Resources > Profiles. 6 Select the output profile that you created when you created the custom calibration set and click Edit. You will use this profile as a temporary profile to set the D-Max values of your custom output profile. CALIBRATION 60 7 Change the D-Max values to the values you recorded in step 4. 8 Click Save, type the name if needed, and then click Save again to save the edited profile. 9 In Device Center, choose Color Setup > Color Management. 10 For the Output Profile option, select the profile that you just edited. The profile becomes the default output profile. TO CREATE A CUSTOM OUTPUT PROFILE 1 Print the color profiling patches. Before printing the color profiling patches: • Set the same print settings as in your custom calibration set. Be sure to use the same Screen setting. • Set the output profile to be the temporary default output profile (the one you saved in the previous procedure). • Set the CMYK/Grayscale Source option to None. This ensures that your patches print only with the proper correction from calibration, without any other CMYK conversions. 2 Measure the color profiling patches and create the new output profile using a profilegenerating application. For the procedures to create output profiles, see the documentation that accompanies the application. 3 Save the custom output profile to the default folder for profiles on your computer. Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista/Server 2008: Windows\System32\spool\drivers\color Mac OS X: Library: ColorSync: Profiles TO IMPORT THE CUSTOM OUTPUT PROFILE TO THE FIERY PRO80 1 In Device Center, choose Resources > Profiles. 2 Click Import and go to the location of your custom output profile. 3 Select your custom output profile, choose Output next to Import Profile As and click Import. The profile is imported to the Fiery PRO80, and the Output Profile Settings window appears. The calibration target from the default output profile is copied to the custom output profile. 4 In the Output Profile Settings window, confirm that your custom calibration set is selected. When the custom output profile is imported, the calibration set from the default output profile is associated with the custom output profile. 5 Click OK to save changes and close the Output Profile Settings window. CALIBRATION 61 Your custom output profile now has the correct calibration target and is associated with your custom calibration set. You no longer need the temporary default output profile and can delete it from the Fiery PRO80. TO DELETE THE TEMPORARY DEFAULT OUTPUT PROFILE 1 In Device Center, choose Color Setup > Color Management. 2 For the Output Profile option, select a profile that is not the temporary default output profile you are going to delete. The profile becomes the default output profile. 3 In Device Center, choose Resources > Profiles. 4 Select the temporary output profile and click Delete. 5 Click Yes. CALIBRATION 62 Understanding calibration The following sections describe important concepts and suggestions for understanding calibration. An overview of calibration Calibration generates curves that adjust for the difference between the actual toner densities (measurements) and the response expected by the output profile. • Measurements represent the actual color behavior of the printer. • Calibration sets are sets of measurements that represent the output of specific combinations of media-related options. • Each output profile contains a calibration target that describes the expected behavior of the printer. After you calibrate the Fiery PRO80, a calibration set is stored. This calibration set is used when it is associated with an output profile. Every output profile has an associated calibration set. If you have not specified one, the calibration set associated with the default output profile is used. If you change the calibration after a saved job has been processed (RIPped), you do not have to reprocess (reRIP) the job. The new calibration affects the job without reprocessing. How calibration works Although the needs of most users are met by the default calibration set, the Fiery PRO80 allows you to choose a calibration set to customize calibration for specialized jobs. Calibration allows you to: • Maximize the color reproduction capabilities of the Fiery PRO80. • Ensure consistent color quality over time. • Produce consistent output across Fiery PRO80 servers. • Achieve better color matches when reproducing spot colors, such as PANTONE colors or other named color systems. • Optimize the Fiery PRO80 for using ColorWise rendering intents, CMYK simulations, and ICC profiles. Success in obtaining satisfactory print quality from the Fiery PRO80 depends on many factors. Among the most important are establishing and maintaining optimal toner densities. The density is the measure of the light absorbed by a surface. By carefully regulating toner densities, you obtain consistent printed color. CALIBRATION 63 Even with a calibrated system, toner density is affected by the settings of printer, humidity, and temperature. Density also tends to drift over time. Uneven toner density on paper affects calibration results. Regular measurement detects day-to-day variations in density, gradation, and color reproduction, and calibration corrects them. Calibration works by creating calibration curves on the Fiery PRO80 that compensate for the difference between actual (measured) and desired (target) density values. These calibration curves are the graphic equivalent of transfer functions, which are mathematical descriptions of changes that are made to the initial data. Transfer functions are often graphed as input or output curves. The Fiery PRO80 generates calibration curves after comparing measured values to the final target values for each of the four toner colors. The target values are based on the output profile specified. Measurements Measurement files contain numerical values that correspond to the toner density produced by the printer when it prints solid cyan, magenta, yellow, and black, and graduated tints of those colors. To create a measurement file, print a page of color patches. Measure the patches using a color measurement instrument connected to a computer on the network, or if it is available, the print device’s scanner. The new measurements are automatically downloaded to the Fiery PRO80. Output profiles and calibration sets Output profiles and calibration sets define desired calibration results. One or more output profiles and calibration sets are provided with the Fiery PRO80. When you calibrate the Fiery PRO80, select the calibration set that corresponds to the typical printing jobs at your site. This same calibration set can be associated with one or more output profiles. For more information about output profiles, see page 20. Scheduling calibration Calibrate the Fiery PRO80 at least once a day, depending on the volume of print jobs. If it is very important to maintain consistent color, or your printer is subject to wide fluctuations in temperature or humidity, calibrate every few hours. For optimal performance, calibrate whenever there is a noticeable change in print quality or printing results are not as expected. If you must split a print job into two or more batches to print at different times, it is important to calibrate before you print each batch. You should also calibrate the Fiery PRO80 after printer maintenance. However, because the printer may be less stable immediately after maintenance, wait until you have printed approximately 50 pages before you calibrate. CALIBRATION 64 NOTE: Because printed output from the printer is very sensitive to changes in temperature and humidity, do not install the printer near a window, in direct sunlight, or near a heater or air conditioner. Paper is also sensitive to climate changes. Store it in a cool, dry, stable environment, and keep reams sealed until they are used. To monitor print quality, print the following color pages: • Color Charts (from Command WorkStation or the printer touch panel) • Color reference pages included in the User Software DVD (see page 42) These pages include fully saturated color patches and pale tints of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. Images with skin tones offer a good basis for comparison. Save and periodically compare the pages you print. If a noticeable change in appearance occurs, calibrate the Fiery PRO80. When you examine the Test Page, all color patches should be visible, even though they may be very faint in the five to two percent range. Each patch set should show uniform gradation from patch to patch as the color lightens from 100% to zero. If the solid density patches (100% cyan, magenta, yellow, or black) look less saturated over time, show the pages to your printer service technician to determine whether adjusting the printer can improve output. Checking calibration status To verify whether the Fiery PRO80 is calibrated, which calibration set and output profile were used, and when the printer was last calibrated, perform the following: • Print a Configuration page or Test Page from the printer touch panel or Command WorkStation. For instructions on printing the Configuration page, see Configuration and Setup. • In the Calibrate feature of Command WorkStation, select a calibration set. The last calibration and the user who performed it are displayed. SPOT-ON 65 SPOT-ON The Spot Color Matching print option automatically matches spot colors with their best CMYK equivalents so that spot colors can be simulated using the CMYK toner of the printer. However, you may want to adjust the default CMYK equivalents to achieve a better match for your specific printing conditions. You can modify spot colors using the Spot-On spot color editor in Command WorkStation. In addition to managing “named” colors, Spot-On allows you to create a list of “substitute” colors. These are colors that, when called for in a document by their RGB or CMYK values, are substituted with a different color having the CMYK values from the Spot-On color dictionary. This permits exact color control and overrides individual RGB and CMYK colors. If Two-Color Print Mapping is enabled, Spot-On also allows you to assign spot colors and process colors to the generic colors that are used in a job. The Two-Color Print Mapping feature is designed for print shop operators to do the proofing for a two-color press. You can print a two-color job to a two-color device by mapping the colors in a job to the colors that are already created on the device. For information about Two-Color Print Mapping, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. Using Spot-On Spot-On allows you to adjust and manage lists of spot colors and their CMYK equivalents. The matching lists of spot colors and CMYK values are known as Spot Color Dictionaries. Spot-On allows you to maintain multiple Spot Color Dictionaries for each output profile on the Fiery PRO80. To use Spot-On, you must specify the output profile associated with the Spot Color Dictionary that you want to edit. If you select Output profile X and redefine PANTONE 123 from 30%M to 50%M using Spot-On, you will get 50%M when you print a job with Output profile X. If you print a job with Output profile Y, you will get the original value. SPOT-ON 66 If you select Output profile X and create a custom color named “My Purple” and define it as 80%C 40%M, ColorWise automatically calculates the Lab values using Output profile X and creates new CMYK values for use with Output profile Y. The Spot-On feature is in the Spot Colors tab under the Resources tab in the Device Center. For more information about using Spot-On, see Command WorkStation Help. NOTE: To use the Spot-On features with named colors, you must enable the Spot Color Matching print option. For more information about this option, see page 25. NOTE: Spot colors identified by names are printed with their defined CMYK values. Edits to an output profile made in Command WorkStation do not affect how spot colors print. Some Spot-On features require that a job be displayed with correct colors on your monitor. To display the colors correctly on your monitor, you must set up the monitor display according to the manufacturer’s recommendations, and specify the correct monitor profile for your monitor. SPOT-ON 67 Specify the following settings for the monitor display: • At the monitor: Brightness, Contrast, and Color Temperature • From the control panel of the operating system: Resolution, Refresh rate, and Number of colors For more information about setting up your monitor and the monitor profile, see the documentation that accompanies the monitor. NOTE: The edits to a job made with the color adjustment features in ImageViewer affect all colors in the job, including spot colors. For more information about ImageViewer, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. NOTE: You cannot use the Substitute Colors and Postflight features at the same time. These print options are constrained from the printer driver. IMPORTING DENSITY MEASUREMENTS 68 IMPORTING DENSITY MEASUREMENTS This chapter describes Simple ASCII File Format (SAIFF), which you can use to import density measurements from measurement devices into Command WorkStation for calibration. To use your own measurement data from an alternate measurement instrument, rather than make measurements directly in Command WorkStation, record your individual readings in a text file, structured as described in this chapter. You can then import the data by clicking From File under Get Measurements in the Calibrate feature of Command WorkStation. Simple ASCII Import File Format This format describes Status T measurement data for import into Command WorkStation. The three possible file formats are: • 1D Status T density for EFI 21 patch page • 1D Status T density for EFI 34 patch page • 1D Status T density for other pages (maximum of 256 patches per toner) The file format is ASCII and has no tabs. A single space or multiple spaces are used as delimiters. Blank lines are not allowed. Each line in the file represents four patches (C, M, Y, K) of a specific toner value. Comments may be on any line in the file. Comment lines must start with a pound sign (#) followed by a space. (A line with a pound sign followed by any character other than a space has been reserved.) Comments must be on a line by themselves. Each line of data contains five values. The first number is the sequential patch number (for EFI 21 and EFI 34 pages) or the toner value percentage (for other pages). The four values that follow are the density values of C, M, Y, and K of the corresponding patch. Lines are ordered either by increasing sequential patch numbers, or by increasing the toner percentage. For Windows computers, the file extension must be .cm0 or cm1. For Mac OS computers, the file type must be ‘TEXT’. Measurement data in EFI 21 and EFI 34 are paper-relative. For other pages, if the first line corresponds to zero toner value, Command WorkStation assumes that the measurement data is absolute and adjusts it to become paper-relative by subtracting the density values of the first line from the remaining patches. IMPORTING DENSITY MEASUREMENTS 69 Example of 1D Status T density for EFI 21 patch page This file format is used to specify the Status T density measurements of the EFI 21 patch page. The value in the first column is the patch number. The first patch must be 1 and the last must be 21. #!EFI 3 # EFI ColorWise 2.0 Data type: 1DST21 # Cyan Magent Yellow Black 1 0.0300 0.0400 0.0200 0.0400 2 0.0600 0.0700 0.0800 0.0700 3 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000 (…more data…) 20 1.6700 1.3400 0.8900 1.6700 21 1.7200 1.4300 0.9300 1.7500 Example of 1D Status T density for EFI 34 patch page This file format is used to specify the Status T density measurements of the EFI 34 patch page. The value in the first column is the patch number. The first patch must be 1 and the last must be 34. #!EFI 3 # EFI ColorWise 2.0 Data type: 1DST34 # Cyan Magent Yellow Black 1 0.0300 0.0400 0.0200 0.0400 2 0.0600 0.0700 0.0800 0.0700 3 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000 (…more data…) 33 1.6700 1.3400 0.8900 1.6700 34 1.7200 1.4300 0.9300 1.7500 IMPORTING DENSITY MEASUREMENTS 70 Example of 1D Status T density for an arbitrary page This file format is used to specify the Status T density measurements of a user-defined patch page. The value in the first column is the toner percentage of the patch. The first percentage must be 0 and the last percentage must be 100. The percentages must increase in between. #!EFI 3 # EFI ColorWise 2.0 Data type: 1DST # percnt Cyan Magent Yellow Black 0.0000 0.0300 0.0400 0.0200 0.0400 0.3922 0.0600 0.0700 0.0800 0.0700 1.1765 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000 (…more data…) 98.0000 1.6700 1.3400 0.8900 1.6700 100.0000 1.7200 1.4300 0.9300 1.7500 INDEX 71 A Absolute Colorimetric rendering intent 22 Adobe RGB setting, RGB Source or Device Link option 23 Apple Standard setting, RGB Source or Device Link option 23 Auto Trapping option 13 B Black Detection option 13 Black Overprint option 14 Black Text and Graphics option 15 C calibration See also ColorCal, measurements checking status of 64 curves 63 from print device panel, Web LCD disabled 51 from print device panel, Web LCD enabled 49 importing density measurements 68 measurement file, creating 63 measurement page 63 measurements 62 overview 62 scheduling 63 target 55, 62, 63 Calibration Files folder 42 calibration set 52 custom 53, 55 print settings 54 recommended paper 54 CMYK Color Reference.ps 42 CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method option 16 CMYK/Grayscale Source or Device Link option 17 Color Bars folder 42 Color Chart 64 color files 42 color management system (CMS) 9 color patches in Test Page 64 measuring 63 PostScript files of 42 color profiles See ICC profiles color reference files 42 color reference pages 64 color space 12 ColorCal calibration from print device panel 49 ColorWise color management system ICC profile support 9 key features 9 workflow diagram 12 ColorWise Off 17 ColorWise options, specifying 26 Combine Separations option 18 Command WorkStation Calibrate feature 47 Spot-On feature 66 Composite Overprint option 19 composites, printing 15, 18, 25 Configuration page 64 Contrast ICC rendering intent 22 custom calibration set 53, 55 custom output profile 53, 55 custom profiles, creating 45 custom simulations 17 Custom21.ps 42 Custom34.ps 42 D density 62, 64 density measurements, importing 68 DTP32 or DTP32 Series II densitometer terminology 46 DTP41 spectrophotometer terminology 46 INDEX INDEX 72 E eciRGB setting, RGB Source or Device Link option 23 EFIRGB, RGB Source or Device Link option 23 ES-1000 spectrophotometer terminology 46 F Fiery RGB setting, RGB Source or Device Link option 23 FieryColorBar.eps 42 Full (Output GCR) setting, CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method option 16 Full (Source GCR) setting, CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method option 16 G Graphics ICC rendering intent 22 Gray (RGB) and Gray (CMYK) options 20 H Halftone Calibration Files folder 43 I ICC profiles described 9 installing 37 rendering intents 22 Image ICC rendering intent 22 M Mac Color Files folder 42 Mac OS color management options 32 measurements page 63 N None setting, RGB Source or Device LInk option 23 O Other Applications folder 44 output profile calibration set 52 custom 53, 55 Spot-On 65 Output Profile option 20 output profiles 63 P PANTONE Book.ps 42 PANTONE Coated Color Reference 25 passwords, for calibration 46 patches page 63 PDF/X 21 PDF/X Output Intent option 21 Perceptual ICC rendering intent 22 Photographic rendering intent 22 Photoshop folder 43 PostScript color issues 12, 14, 15, 23 PowerPoint, RGB color reference file 42 PPD 29, 32 Presentation rendering intent 22 print options Mac OS 32 Windows 29 printer drivers Mac OS 32 Windows 29 profiles custom 45 described 9 installing 37 managing 45 rendering intents 22 Q Quick setting, CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method option 16 R Relative Colorimetric rendering intent 22 rendering intents 12 RGB images defining source profiles for 23 PostScript and non-PostScript conversion 23 RGB page 01 42 RGB page 02 42 RGB Source or Device Link option 23 RGB/Lab Rendering Intent option 22 S SAIFF format 68 Saturation ICC rendering intent 22 Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source option 24 INDEX 73 separations printing 15, 18, 25 target color space 24 separations, unlimited 18 simulations, custom 17 Spot Color Dictionaries 65 Spot Color Matching option 25 spot colors, CMYK equivalents 25, 65 Spot-On 65 named colors 66 RGB or CMYK values 65 Spot Color Matching 66 substitute colors 65 sRGB, RGB Source or Device Link option 23 Standard21.ps 42 Standard34.ps 42 Status T 68 Substitute Colors vs. Postflight 67 Fiery® PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery® PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server Configuration and Setup © 2010 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered under Legal Notices for this product. 45093721 29 July 2010 CONTENTS 3 CONTENTS INTRODUCTION 7 Terminology and conventions 7 About this document 8 Battery information for the European Union and EEA 9 CONNECTING TO THE NETWORK 10 Fiery PRO80 on the network 10 Stages of installation on the network 11 Summary of Fiery PRO80 network installation 12 Network Server Setup requirements 13 Windows networks 13 AppleTalk networks 13 UNIX networks 14 PREPARING FOR FIERY PRO80 SETUP 15 Levels of access and control 15 Users and Groups 15 Fiery PRO80 print connections 18 WebTools 19 Additional security features 20 Controlling E-mail access to the Fiery PRO80 20 Restricting IP addresses, ports, and MAC addresses 20 Secure Printing 20 LDAP authentication 20 CONTENTS 4 Connecting network cable to the Fiery PRO80 21 Back view of the Fiery PRO80 21 Ethernet connection 22 About Setup 22 Setup from the printer touch panel 22 Setup from a network computer 22 SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 23 Fiery PRO80 Setup from the printer touch panel (new version) 24 Illustration of printer touch panel (new version) 24 Accessing Setup options 25 About the printer touch panel Setup interface 26 Types of Setup screens 26 Saving changes 26 Menu tabs 27 Setup options 29 Fiery PRO80 Setup from the Legacy LCD 31 Illustration of the Legacy LCD 31 Legacy LCD menus 32 Accessing Legacy LCD Setup options 33 About the Legacy LCD Setup interface 34 Types of Setup screens 34 Saving changes 34 Server Setup options 35 Network Setup 1 options 36 Network Setup 2 options 38 SETUP FROM A NETWORK COMPUTER 39 Accessing Configure from a network computer 39 Using Configure 40 CONTENTS 5 SETUP OPTION REFERENCE 41 PS and PCL Setup options 41 Productivity Setup options 44 CONFIGURING WEBTOOLS 45 Configuring the Fiery PRO80 and computers for WebTools 45 ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 46 Administrator functions 46 Setting passwords 47 Passwords from a network computer 47 Changing the Windows XP system password 48 Updating system and user software 49 Before updating the Fiery PRO80 49 System Updates 50 Check for Product Updates (Software Downloads Site) 56 Clearing the Fiery PRO80 57 Backing up the entire Fiery PRO80 57 Remote connection to the Fiery PRO80 58 Restoring Fiery PRO80 settings 58 Saving and restoring the Fiery PRO80 configuration 58 USB printing 59 Managing e-mail address books 60 VDP Search Path 63 Setting common global search paths 63 Allowing users to define a search path for a single job 64 Printing the Configuration page 65 Determining the IP address of the Fiery PRO80 65 CONTENTS 6 Maintaining optimal Fiery PRO80 performance 66 Shutting down, rebooting, and restarting the Fiery PRO80 67 Ejecting a CD/DVD from the Fiery PRO80 68 TROUBLESHOOTING 69 Troubleshooting the Fiery PRO80 69 Runtime error messages 69 Cannot connect to the Fiery PRO80 with utilities 70 Cannot connect to the Fiery PRO80 with Command WorkStation 71 INDEX 73 INTRODUCTION 7 INTRODUCTION This document describes how to set up network servers and user computers to use the Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server so that users can print to it as a high-performance networked printer. For general information about using the printer, your computer, your software, or your network, see the documentation that accompanies those products. Setting up the network environment correctly requires the presence and active cooperation of the network administrator. Detailed instructions on configuring networks is beyond the scope of this document. For information, see the documentation that accompanies your network. For information about supported operating systems and system requirements, see Welcome. Terminology and conventions This document uses the following terminology and conventions. Term or convention Refers to Aero Fiery PRO80 (in illustrations and examples) Fiery PRO80 Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server Mac OS Apple Mac OS X Printer 80C-KM printer and 70-60C-KM printer Titles in italics Other documents in this set Windows Microsoft Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2003/2008/2008 R2 Topics for which additional information is available by starting Help in the software Tips and information INTRODUCTION 8 About this document This document covers the following topics: • Network connectors on the Fiery PRO80 • Information specific to the Fiery PRO80 about setting up network servers NOTE: For information about network servers, see the documentation that accompanies your network. • System security through access levels and passwords • Setup of the Fiery PRO80 from the printer touch panel • Setup of the Fiery PRO80 from a network computer • Setup of the Fiery PRO80 to allow users to use WebTools • Administration of the Fiery PRO80 • Troubleshooting Administrator functions described in other documentation are summarized on page 46. A warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the equipment safely, always pay attention to these warnings. A caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the equipment safely, always pay attention to these cautions. Operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the equipment correctly, and avoid damage to the equipment or property. Term or convention Refers to INTRODUCTION 9 Battery information for the European Union and EEA This symbol indicates that the batteries and accumulators used in this product must be disposed of separately from your household waste in accordance with EU Directive 2006/66/ EC (“Directive”) and local requirements. If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown, in accordance with the Directive, this indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or accumulator at a concentration above an applicable threshold specified in the Directive. Batteries and accumulators must not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste. Users of batteries and accumulators must use the available collection framework for the return, recycling and treatment of batteries and accumulators. If your product contains non-removable batteries, the entire product is already covered by the EU WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment) Directive and should be handed over to an authorized collection site for WEEE. The collection site will take appropriate measures for the recycling and treatment of the product, including the batteries. Customer participation in the collection and recycling of batteries and accumulators is important to minimize any potential effects of batteries and accumulators on the environment and human health due to substances used in batteries and accumulators. In the EU, there are separate collection and recycling schemes for batteries and accumulators. To find out more about recycling schemes for batteries and accumulators available in your area, please contact your local city office, waste authority, or waste disposal facility. CONNECTING TO THE NETWORK 10 CONNECTING TO THE NETWORK This chapter summarizes the stages in setting up the Fiery PRO80. Fiery PRO80 on the network When the Fiery PRO80 is connected to a network, it behaves as a networked printer. The Fiery PRO80 supports the following network protocols (rules that enable computers on a network to communicate with each other): • AppleTalk, Bonjour • TCP/IP, which also includes the BOOTP, DHCP, FTP, HTTP, IMAP, IPP, IPv4, IPv6, LDAP, LPD, NBT, POP3, Port 9100, SMB, SMTP, SNMP, SNTP, and SSL/TLS protocols These protocols can run concurrently on the same cable. Computers that use other protocols can print through a server that uses one of the supported protocols. The Fiery PRO80 is auto-sensing, and handles all connections simultaneously. CONNECTING TO THE NETWORK 11 Stages of installation on the network Installation can be performed by a network or printing administrator. The stages of a successful installation are: 1 Configuring the network environment Configure network servers to provide users with access to the Fiery PRO80 as a networked printer. For information about configuring network servers in Windows and UNIX network environments as they relate specifically to the Fiery PRO80, see page 13. For information about using your network, see the documentation that accompanies your network. 2 Physically connecting the Fiery PRO80 to a functioning network Prepare a network node for the Fiery PRO80. Obtain cable, route it to the location where the Fiery PRO80 is to be installed, and attach the cable to the network connector of the Fiery PRO80. For details, see page 21. 3 Setting up the Fiery PRO80 Configure the Fiery PRO80 for your printing and network environment (see page 23). 4 Preparing user computers for printing Install the files needed for printing, install user software, and connect the user computers to the network. The software installation is described in Printing. 5 Administering the Fiery PRO80 Monitor and maintain system performance and troubleshoot problems that may arise (see “Administering the Fiery PRO80” on page 46). CONNECTING TO THE NETWORK 12 Summary of Fiery PRO80 network installation Fiery PRO80 available on the network Network server configuration Network server Configure network servers to specify Fiery PRO80 print queues and Fiery PRO80 users. Connection Fiery PRO80 Prepare a network node. Connect the Fiery PRO80 to the network. If you use the Fiery Advanced Controller Interface, connect it to the network. Fiery PRO80 Setup Configure default settings for the options in the Setup menus. Client computer Setup On computers where users print to the Fiery PRO80: • Install the appropriate printer files and connect to one or more print connections. • Install utilities and an Internet browser on computers where users will use them. • Verify the Fiery PRO80 in the list of printers. CONNECTING TO THE NETWORK 13 Network Server Setup requirements This section provides basic information about configuring the Fiery PRO80 and using it on the network. It does not explain network functions for printing in general. Only information specific to the Fiery PRO80 is presented. Setting up the network environment correctly requires the presence and active cooperation of the network administrator. Detailed instructions on configuring networks is beyond the scope of this document. For information, see the documentation that accompanies your network. Configure the network and servers, and ensure that there is a live network connection before you configure network settings in Setup. This allows the Fiery PRO80 to query the network for zones, servers, and server-based queues. Whenever you change the configuration of the Fiery PRO80, printer, or network at your site, alter the settings to correspond to the changed environment. Changing network or port settings may require that you make changes to other Setup options, as well. Windows networks • The FieryPRO80 requires a valid IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address. Enter these addresses manually or use DHCP or BOOTP protocols to assign them dynamically. Make sure the Fiery PRO80 name and address are listed in a domain name server (DNS) or hosts name database used by your system. If more than one Fiery PRO80 print connection is published (for example, if both the Print queue and Hold queue are published), consider creating a printer for each print connection, so that users can print to each connection directly. • Configure the Fiery PRO80 with the correct Windows domain name. This is especially important for Windows printing, also known as SMB printing. To use Microsoft Active Directory, you must assign the Fiery PRO80 to a domain. If you assign the Fiery PRO80 to a workgroup, you cannot use Active Directory. AppleTalk networks AppleShare servers require no special configuration. To allow Mac OS X computers to access Bonjour printers, you must enable Bonjour in Setup. CONNECTING TO THE NETWORK 14 UNIX networks • When you configure a UNIX workstation with the lpr protocol and connect to the Fiery PRO80 over a TCP/IP network, you can print directly to the Fiery PRO80. • Setting up UNIX workstations requires an administrator with root privileges. After the initial configuration, UNIX users submit print jobs to a named printer. • The FieryPRO80 is a printer controller that understands lpr protocols. • The FieryPRO80 has a remote printer name you must use in order to communicate with it successfully. Regardless of the UNIX system you use, the name that you use for the remote printer (or rp in the /etc/printcap file) in configuring the network for the Fiery PRO80 must be one of the following: print hold name of virtual printer Computers on a TCP/IP network can print directly to the Fiery PRO80 as a remote printer, or can print to a Windows Server 2003/Server 2008/Server 2008 R2 server or UNIX workstation acting as a print server. PREPARING FOR FIERY PRO80 SETUP 15 PREPARING FOR FIERY PRO80 SETUP To prepare for printing at your site, you must do some initial Fiery PRO80 configuration (or “Setup”) to specify the network environment and the types of printing you do. Before you perform Setup, decide the levels of access to implement, such as passwords and other security features that the Fiery PRO80 offers. Because many of these security features are interconnected, review the information in this chapter to plan for an effective security system, and then perform Setup accordingly. Levels of access and control When you configure the Fiery PRO80 during Setup, you implement a particular level of control by configuring these elements: • Users and Groups • Print connections • Access to WebTools Users and Groups With Configure, you create users, assign passwords to users, create groups with particular privileges, and assign users to the groups. Several groups are provided by default, and you can create new groups. All users in a group have the same privileges. In addition to assigning the users that you have created to a group, you can add users from your organization’s global address list if you have LDAP services enabled on the Fiery PRO80. The following discussion is an overview designed to help you prepare a security strategy. For more information, including specific procedures, see Configure Help. You can view detailed information about users and groups that you have created from Configure in Command WorkStation. For more information, see Command WorkStation Help. PREPARING FOR FIERY PRO80 SETUP 16 User authentication The term “user authentication” means the Fiery PRO80 verifies that the user who is sending a job belongs to a group, and the group has printing privileges (“Print in B&W” or “Print in Color and B&W”). By default, the Fiery PRO80 does not enforce user authentication. That is, even if you assign passwords to users and assign users to groups, no authentication occurs unless you clear the “Allow users to print without authentication” option (in Configure > Users and Groups). If this option is selected, anyone can print to the Fiery PRO80. NOTE: You cannot enable Fiery PRO80 authentication and printer authentication at the same time. If you require users to specify their user name and password (that is, you have cleared the “Allow users to print without authentication” option), users must type this information in the printer driver when they print. Users must specify their user name and password if they create files from the printer driver for printing later (such as an e-mail attachment that will be sent to the Fiery PRO80). Because jobs that are sent through FTP do not require a printer driver, you can specify that FTP jobs are authenticated (see Configure > Network > Services > FTP > Require Password for Printing). Passwords When you create a new user in Configure > Users and Groups, you assign a password to the user. In other areas of the system, you can also set passwords for these areas: • Default admin user in Administrators group • Default operator user in Operators group • Windows system password NOTE: The Administrator and Operator passwords are separate from the Windows system password. By default, the Administrator password is set on the Fiery PRO80. Change the Administrator password periodically to protect the Fiery PRO80 from accidental or malicious changes to Setup. For more information, see “Setting passwords” on page 47. Users in the Administrators and Operators groups have privileges in addition to the explicit ones that you set when you create groups. Examples of these privileges are provided in the following sections. PREPARING FOR FIERY PRO80 SETUP 17 Administrator privileges Users in the Administrators group have the highest level of control. Administrator privileges include: • Configuring the Fiery PRO80 from Configure or the printer touch panel • Adding and deleting groups • Adding and deleting users • Setting and changing passwords for users • Deleting, printing, exporting, and viewing the Job Log • Deleting, viewing, and modifying users’ print jobs • Clearing the Fiery PRO80 of all job data • Printing in black-and-white or color • Publishing print connections • Deleting fonts • Controlling print jobs from the job management tools • Overriding job settings • Setting default settings for print options • Calibrating the Fiery PRO80 Operator privileges Users in the Operators group control print jobs from the job management tools, including the following: • Viewing the Job Log • Deleting, viewing, and modifying other users’ print jobs • Printing in black-and-white or color Guest privileges (no password) A user does not need a password to log on as a Guest from the job management tools. A Guest can view the status of active jobs but cannot make changes to jobs or to the Fiery PRO80 state. PREPARING FOR FIERY PRO80 SETUP 18 Fiery PRO80 print connections The Fiery PRO80 supports three print connections: Hold queue, Print queue, and Direct connection. You enable, or “publish,” these print connections to users on the network when you configure Printer Setup. All published connections are constantly checked for the presence of jobs. The Print queue and Direct connection give users more direct access to the Fiery PRO80 than the Hold queue. Therefore, do not publish the Print queue and the Direct connection in environments where maximum control is required. In addition, you can enable the Printed queue, which is a storage area for the most recent jobs from the Print queue. The Printed queue allows users to reprint those jobs by using the job management tools (for example, Command WorkStation). NOTE: To use the utilities and WebTools, you must enable at least one print connection. Hold queue Jobs sent to the Hold queue are spooled to the Fiery PRO80 hard disk drive for printing at a later time, or for reprinting. Because the Hold queue is a storage area, jobs sent to it cannot proceed through the printing process until the operator intervenes using the job management tools. Print queue The Print queue is the standard Fiery PRO80 queue. Jobs sent to the Print queue are processed and printed in the order in which they are received. Jobs prioritized by an operator with the job management tools and jobs sent via the Direct connection take priority over jobs sent to the Print queue. Direct connection The Direct connection transmits jobs directly to the Fiery PRO80, but only when the Fiery PRO80 is idle. If the Fiery PRO80 is busy, the job remains at the user’s computer until the Fiery PRO80 is ready. The job is then processed as soon as the previous job is finished and before the next queued job is processed. In most cases, jobs sent to the Direct connection are not stored on the Fiery PRO80 hard disk, and cannot be selected for reprinting, moving, or deletion. Therefore, the Direct connection provides a measure of security for sensitive files. Jobs sent to the Direct connection do appear in the Job Log, for accounting purposes. PREPARING FOR FIERY PRO80 SETUP 19 Some types of jobs printed to the Direct connection cause temporary files to be stored on the Fiery PRO80 hard disk, but do not appear in any of the job management tools. These job types are the following: • PDF jobs • TIFF jobs • Jobs with settings for any of the following print options: – Reverse order printing (for large jobs) – Booklet Maker – Mixed Media – Combine Separations NOTE: To download fonts to the Fiery PRO80, you must publish the Direct connection. WebTools The Fiery PRO80 supports Internet or intranet access with WebTools from Windows and Mac OS computers. To enable use of WebTools, see “Configuring WebTools” on page 45. Home Home provides you with current information about the jobs processing and printing on the Fiery PRO80. To use this WebTool, you do not need a password. For more information, see Utilities. Downloads Downloads allows users to download installers for printer drivers and other software directly from the Fiery PRO80. To use this WebTool, you do not need a password. For more information, see Printing and Utilities. Docs Docs allows users to access, manage, and modify jobs in their mailboxes on the Fiery PRO80, and submit jobs to the Fiery PRO80. For more information, see WebTools Docs Help. Configure Configure allows you to view and modify Fiery PRO80 options from a network computer. This function requires an Administrator password. For more information, see page 39. PREPARING FOR FIERY PRO80 SETUP 20 Additional security features In addition to the traditional security features such as passwords, you can use these features to keep the Fiery PRO80 secure: • E-mail access • IP addresses, ports, and MAC addresses • Secure Printing • LDAP authentication Controlling E-mail access to the Fiery PRO80 Because you can allow users to print file attachments in e-mail messages sent to the Fiery PRO80, the Fiery PRO80 accepts only valid attachments (for example, PostScript or PDF files). Typically, viruses transmitted via e-mail require execution by the receiver. Attachments that are not valid files are discarded by the Fiery PRO80. Because file types such as .BAT, .VBS, and .EXE could launch harmful virus activity, the Fiery PRO80 does not process these file types. The Fiery PRO80 also ignores e-mails in RTF (Rich Text Format) or HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) format, and any included JavaScript code. You can define lists of authorized e-mail addresses on the Fiery PRO80. Any e-mail that the Fiery PRO80 receives from an e-mail address not in the authorized list is deleted. For more information, see page 60. Restricting IP addresses, ports, and MAC addresses To restrict unauthorized connections to the Fiery PRO80, you can permit only users whose IP addresses or MAC addresses are within a defined range. You can also close unnecessary ports to reject inbound access from the network. Commands or jobs sent from unauthorized IP addresses or ports are ignored by the Fiery PRO80. Secure Printing This option allows the printing of highly sensitive or confidential files. A user printing a file with the printer driver assigns a password to the job. The user must then enter the password at the printer to print the job. For more information, see Printing. LDAP authentication When you enable LDAP communication to retrieve names and other information for people at your organization, you can specify the type of authentication. For more information, see Configure Help. PREPARING FOR FIERY PRO80 SETUP 21 Connecting network cable to the Fiery PRO80 This section includes an illustration of the Fiery PRO80 back panel, and provides information about connecting the Fiery PRO80 to the network. Back view of the Fiery PRO80 1 USB ports (x2) 2 Network port (RJ-45) 3 USB ports (x4) 4 Printer interface 1 2 3 4 PREPARING FOR FIERY PRO80 SETUP 22 Ethernet connection For Ethernet connections, the Fiery PRO80 supports Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cabling for these network speeds: • 10BaseT: Category 3 or higher • 100BaseTX: Category 5 or higher (4-pair/8-wire, short-length) • 1000BaseT: Category 5e or higher (4-pair/8-wire, short-length) TO CONNECT TO THE NETWORK 1 Power off the printer and the Fiery PRO80. For information about the proper procedures, see page 67. 2 Connect the cable from the network to the appropriate network connector (RJ-45) on the back of the Fiery PRO80. 3 Power on the Fiery PRO80 and the printer. About Setup Setup configures the Fiery PRO80 to communicate with other devices and manage print jobs. Perform Setup the first time you turn on the Fiery PRO80, after new system software is loaded, or any time Server software is reinstalled. When the network or user printing environment changes, change the options accordingly. Setup from the printer touch panel Perform initial Setup from the printer touch panel. After the initial Setup, you can change Setup options from a network computer (page 39). If you do not set options in the Setup menus, the Fiery PRO80 uses default settings. You must choose settings appropriate for the printing environment at your site. Setup from a network computer To set up the Fiery PRO80 from a network computer, use Configure (page 39). Access Configure from WebTools or Command WorkStation. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 23 SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL Setup is required the first time the Fiery PRO80 is turned on after new system software is loaded. If you do not configure a particular Setup option, the Fiery PRO80 uses default settings. Make sure that the settings are appropriate for the printing environment at your site. The Fiery PRO80 is equipped with two different types of printer touch panel Setup interfaces: • The new version of Setup: The new version of Setup provides a condensed list of Setup options to allow for quick configuration of the Fiery PRO80. For more information, see “Fiery PRO80 Setup from the printer touch panel (new version)” on page 24. • The Legacy LCD: This is a previous version of Setup that provides three groups of Setup options: Server Setup, Network Setup 1, Network Setup 2. For information on Legacy LCD Setup, see “Fiery PRO80 Setup from the Legacy LCD” on page 31. When the Enhanced Security Mode is set on the printer, use the Legacy LCD. Additional Setup is also available from Configure. For more information about Configure Setup, see Configure Help. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 24 Fiery PRO80 Setup from the printer touch panel (new version) Setup allows you to configure the Fiery PRO80 to communicate with other devices and manage print jobs sent to it. Illustration of printer touch panel (new version) The printer touch panel allows you to view status information about jobs printed to the Fiery PRO80, print system pages, and set up printing. The printer touch panel includes the following parts: 1 2 Item Description Controller button Controls functions on the Fiery PRO80 Selection buttons Select an option or menu and proceed to the next option or menu SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 25 Accessing Setup options When you access Setup options, make sure that no one is printing to the Fiery PRO80. TO ACCESS SETUP WHEN THE FIERY PRO80 IS IDLE 1 Make sure that the information screen on the printer touch panel reads Idle. If Printing or RIPping appears, the Fiery PRO80 is processing, and you must wait until the system finishes and reaches the Idle state. 2 Press Controller on the printer touch panel. 3 Press the Setup button. 4 Press the Administrator Password field, enter your password, and then press OK. 5 Press Login. 6 Perform Setup. This is the minimum required for initial Setup. Later, you can complete the remaining Setup menus, from a network computer. NOTE: This Setup screen does not display when Enable Web Services is disabled, the DHCP server is down, or the network does not have a DHCP server. When this occurs, the printer touch panel displays “The server appears to be offline” and you cannot access the above Setup screen. If this happens, press Enable Legacy LCD. This displays a previous version of Setup named Legacy LCD. From the Legacy LCD Setup screen, specify the IP address manually and make sure that Web Services is enabled. The new Setup screen is available after the Fiery PRO80 reboots. 7 Change the Administrator password to protect your Setup from unauthorized changes. For more information, see page 47. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 26 About the printer touch panel Setup interface When you perform Setup from the printer touch panel, you select one menu after another and enter information about your Fiery PRO80 and your network and printing environment. When you perform a function from the printer touch panel that prompts you for the Administrator password, you must enter it promptly. Otherwise, the printer touch panel returns to Idle, and you must start over. Types of Setup screens There are different types of Setup options: Saving changes After you enter the settings, you must save the changes. You are usually prompted to do so. If you choose Yes, your settings overwrite previous settings. If you choose No, your previous settings are retained. If necessary, the Fiery PRO80 restarts after you exit the Setup menu. Multiple choice questions Possible choices appear as buttons on the touch panel (for example, Yes or No, or a list of settings from which to choose). The currently selected value is highlighted. Press the button for the desired option on the touch panel. Information entry options You must specify the information for your site (the printer name or IP address, for example). Use the keyboard provided on the printer touch panel to enter information. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 27 Menu tabs In addition to performing Setup, you can use the printer touch panel to view status information about jobs printed to the Fiery PRO80, print system pages, and set up printing. The menu provides many of the same options available from Command WorkStation. For information about the job management features, see Utilities. Jobs tab The Jobs tab displays properties of currently printing and queued jobs, and allows you to print jobs. From Jobs you can also access the following commands: Suspend Printing Suspend communication between the Fiery PRO80 and the printer. Use this command if you want to interrupt the current job so that you can perform maintenance tasks. Jobs continue to process on the Fiery PRO80. After you complete the maintenance tasks, choose Resume Printing to continue printing jobs from the Fiery PRO80. Resume Printing Resume communication between the printer and the Fiery PRO80 after you have selected Suspend Printing. Secure Print Allows you to print a job with a secure password. USB Media Server Print a file from a USB device to one of the published print connections. For more information about printing, see Printing. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 28 Tools tab The Tools tab displays options that are installed on the Fiery PRO80. You can also print system pages and activity logs. Setup tab The Setup tab allows you to configure the Fiery PRO80 so that it can be operational on your network. Use Setup from the printer touch panel to perform minimum network Setup to put the Fiery PRO80 on the network. Use Configure to specify any remaining Setup options. Configure can be accessed from WebTools or from Command WorkStation. PS/PCL Test Page: Allows you to confirm that the Fiery PRO80 is properly connected to the printer, and provides color and grayscale samples to troubleshoot problems with the printer or the Fiery PRO80. Settings on the Test Page may include: Server Name, color settings, printer model, and date and time the Test Page was printed. Configuration: Prints the Configuration page, which gives the current server and device configuration. This page lists general information about the hardware and software configuration of the Fiery PRO80, the current options for all Setup settings, information about the current calibration, and the IP address of the Fiery PRO80. Color Charts: Prints samples of the RGB, CMY, and PANTONE colors available from the Fiery PRO80. PS/PCL Font List: Prints a list of all fonts currently on the Fiery PRO80 hard disk drive. Job Log: Prints a log of the last 55 jobs. E-mail Log: Prints a log listing recent e-mail activity. This E-mail log is useful to the network administrator. NOTE: To print the E-mail log, you must first enable the appropriate service. See Configure Help. FTP Log: Prints a log listing recent FTP activity. Calibrate: Calibrate the Fiery PRO80 using ColorCal. For more information, see Color Printing. If an Administrator password has been set, you must enter it to access Calibration. Align Trays: Adjust the placement of text and images on a page so that they are correctly aligned on the sheet of paper and both sides of a duplex sheet have the exact same alignment. For more information about this function, see Command WorkStation Help. Restart Fiery: Resets the server software but does not reboot the entire system. Network access to the Fiery PRO80 is temporarily interrupted and all currently processing jobs are aborted and might be lost. Clear Server: Allows you to clear all queued print jobs from the Fiery PRO80 Print, Hold, and Printed queues. Clear Server also clears all jobs archived on the Fiery PRO80 hard disk, the index of archived jobs, and all FreeForm masters. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 29 Setup options When you perform Fiery PRO80 Setup from the printer touch panel, you configure the Fiery PRO80 to receive jobs over the network systems that are used at your site, including setting network addresses and names to be used by computers, servers, and the Fiery PRO80 when they communicate with each other. Before performing Setup, confirm that the Fiery PRO80 is connected to an active network because the Fiery PRO80 queries the network for zones, servers, and server-based queues. If you perform Network Setup without a connected and functioning network, default settings are used that may not meet your needs. Configure options only for the network systems that are currently used at your site. If your network requirements change, you can change Setup at any time. If the Fiery PRO80 is configured to enable more than one protocol, it automatically switches to the correct protocol when it receives a print job. The submenus and options appear in sequence. Default values, where applicable, are underlined. Words shown in italics indicate that a product- or site-specific value is displayed. Server Name Default server name Enter a name for the Fiery PRO80 (up to 15 characters long). This is the name by which the Fiery PRO80 appears on the network. NOTE: If you have more than one Fiery PRO80, do not give them the same name. Ethernet Speed Auto, 10 Mbps Half-Duplex, 100 Mbps Half-Duplex, 10 Mbps Full-Duplex, 100 Mbps Full- Duplex Choose the appropriate speed of the network. Choose Auto in any of these cases: • The network speed is unknown. • The network environment is mixed. • The network uses 1Gbps. IPv4 Address Type Automatic, Manual Choose whether to allow the Fiery PRO80 to obtain its Ethernet IP address automatically by searching the network. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 30 IP Address 127.0.0.1 If you choose Manual, enter the Fiery PRO80 IP address for Ethernet. This IP address, unlike an IP address set automatically, remains the same if you restart the Fiery PRO80. You must change the default to a valid address for your network. Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Set the subnet mask for printing with TCP/IP on your network. Confirm the subnet mask setting with your network administrator before proceeding. Gateway Type Automatic, Manual Choose the method for obtaining the gateway address for printing with TCP/IP. Gateway Address 127.0.0.1 If you answered Manual to the previous option, set the gateway address for printing with TCP/IP on your network. Enable Web Services On, Off Select Yes to make the WebTools available to users. TCP/IP must be enabled on the Fiery PRO80 and on user workstations. A Java-enabled Web browser and a valid IP address or DNS host name are required for each user computer. If you select Off, you will only have access to Legacy LCD Setup once the Fiery PRO80 reboots. If you want to revert back to the newer version of Setup, Web Services and Web LCD must be enabled in the Legacy LCD (page 38). For more information about the Legacy LCD, see page 31. Enable Remote Desktop Enabled, Disabled Select Enabled to enable Remote Desktop, a Microsoft application that allows remote computers to manage and control the Windows desktop features of the Fiery PRO80. For information about enabling Remote Desktop on a computer, see page 58. Login timeout 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 45 seconds, never Specify the amount of time the Fiery PRO80 times out after you log in. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 31 Fiery PRO80 Setup from the Legacy LCD The Legacy LCD displays when Enable Web Services is disabled, the DHCP server is down, or the network does not have a DHCP server. To access the new version of Setup, as described on page page 31, from the Legacy LCD Setup screen, specify the Fiery PRO80 IP address and make sure that Web Services is enabled. The new Setup screen is available after the Fiery PRO80 reboots. Legacy LCD Setup provides the following groups of options: • Server Setup to specify system options • Network Setup 1 to specify information such as the IP address and Ethernet speed for network systems that transmit print jobs to the Fiery PRO80 • Network Setup 2 to specify information about WINS and Web Services Illustration of the Legacy LCD The Legacy LCD allows you to view status information about jobs printed to the Fiery PRO80, print system pages, and set up printing. The printer touch panel includes the following parts: Touch panel display 1 Controller button 2 Selection buttons 1 2 Item Description Controller button Controls functions on the Fiery PRO80 Selection buttons Select an option or menu and proceed to the next option or menu SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 32 Legacy LCD menus The Fiery PRO80 Legacy LCD menus provide many of the same options available from Command WorkStation. Choose the following commands: Job List Displays properties of currently printing and queued jobs, and allows you to print jobs, including Secure Print jobs. Print Pages Prints the following system pages from the Fiery PRO80: PS Test Page: Confirms that the Fiery PRO80 is properly connected to the printer, and provides color and grayscale samples to troubleshoot problems with the printer or the Fiery PRO80. Settings on the Test Page may include: Server Name, color settings, printer model, and date and time the Test Page was printed. Configuration: Provides general information about the hardware and software configuration of the Fiery PRO80, the current settings for Setup, the current calibration, and the IP address of the Fiery PRO80. Job Log: Prints a log of the last 55 jobs. Color Charts: Prints samples of the RGB, CMY, and PANTONE colors available from the Fiery PRO80. PS Font List: Prints a list of all fonts currently on the Fiery PRO80 hard disk. E-mail Log: Prints a log listing recent e-mail activity. FTP Log: Prints a log listing recent FTP activity. NOTE: To print the E-mail or FTP log, you must enable the appropriate service. For more information, see Configure Help. Calibration Calibrates the Fiery PRO80 using ColorCal. For more information, see Color Printing. If an Administrator password has been set, you must enter it to access Calibration. Setup Enters the Setup menu and changes Setup option settings. Restart Fiery Resets the server software but does not reboot the entire system. Network access to the Fiery PRO80 is temporarily interrupted and all currently processing jobs are aborted and might be lost. Shut Down Fiery Shuts down all Fiery PRO80 activity properly. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 33 Accessing Legacy LCD Setup options When you access Legacy LCD Setup options, make sure that no one is printing to the Fiery PRO80. TO ACCESS LEGACY LCD SETUP WHEN THE FIERY PRO80 IS IDLE 1 Make sure that the information screen on the printer touch panel reads Idle. If Printing or RIPping appears, the Fiery PRO80 is processing, and you must wait until the system finishes and reaches the Idle state. 2 Press Controller on the printer touch panel. 3 Press the Setup button. 4 Press the Administrator Password field, enter your password, and then press OK. 5 At the main Setup window, press the button for the Setup that you want to access. 6 Perform Server Setup, Network Setup 1, and Network Setup 2, in that order. This is the minimum required for initial Setup. Later, you can complete the remaining Setup menus, from a network computer. 7 Change the Administrator password to protect your Setup from unauthorized changes. For information, see page 47. Stop/Start Sample Print Allows the user to verify the quality of a long print job while it is printing. A sample sheet from the job is printed to a separate output tray while the main job is printing. Configure the type of Sample Print action in Setup. To receive a Sample Print, press Start Sample Print. To cancel the Sample Print, press Stop Sample Print. Suspend Print Suspends communication between the Fiery PRO80 and the printer. Use this command to interrupt the current Fiery PRO80 job and use the printer to make copies or print another job first. Jobs continue to process on the Fiery PRO80. After you make copies or complete maintenance tasks, choose Resume Printing to continue printing jobs from the Fiery PRO80. Resume Print Resumes communication between the printer and the Fiery PRO80 after you select Suspend Printing. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 34 About the Legacy LCD Setup interface When you perform Setup from the Legacy LCD, you select one menu after another and enter information about your Fiery PRO80 and your network and printing environment. When you perform a function from the printer touch panel that prompts you for the Administrator password, you must enter it promptly. Otherwise, the printer touch panel returns to Idle, and you must start over. Types of Setup screens There are different types of Setup options: Saving changes After you enter the settings, you must save the changes. You are usually prompted to do so. If you choose Yes, your settings overwrite previous settings. If you choose No, your previous settings are retained. If necessary, the Fiery PRO80 restarts after you exit the Setup menu. Multiple choice questions Possible choices appear as buttons on the touch panel (for example, Yes or No, or a list of settings from which to choose). The currently selected value is highlighted. Press the button for the desired option on the touch panel. Information entry options You must specify the information for your site (the printer name or IP address, for example). Use the keyboard provided on the printer touch panel to enter information. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 35 Server Setup options Server Setup lets you specify system information that pertains to the Fiery PRO80 and users. To access the menu, follow the instructions on page 25. The submenus and options appear in sequence. Default values, where applicable, are underlined. Words shown in italics indicate that a product- or site-specific value is displayed. Server Name Default server name Enter a name for the Fiery PRO80 (up to 15 characters long). This is the name by which the Fiery PRO80 appears on the network. NOTE: If you have more than one Fiery PRO80, do not assign them the same name. Date Date Confirm the correct system date in the standard format for your use. The date appears on the Job Log. NOTE: The Fiery PRO80 uses the current date and time as configured on the printer. Therefore, if the printer date and time are correct, you do not need to set them here. Time Time Confirm the correct system time. Enter the time based on the 24-hour clock in the format HH:MM (Hours:Minutes). The time appears on the Job Log. Remote Desktop Enabled, Disabled Select Enabled to enable Remote Desktop, a Microsoft application that allows remote computers to manage and control the Windows desktop features of the Fiery PRO80. For information about enabling Remote Desktop on a computer, see page 58. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 36 Network Setup 1 options When you perform Network Setup, you configure the Fiery PRO80 to receive jobs over the network systems that are used at your site, including setting network addresses and names to be used by computers, servers, and the Fiery PRO80 when they communicate with each other. Before performing Network Setup, confirm that the Fiery PRO80 is connected to an active network, because the Fiery PRO80 queries the network for zones, servers, and server-based queues. If you perform Network Setup without a connected and functioning network, default settings are used that may not meet your needs. Default settings for options, where applicable, are underlined. Ethernet Speed Auto, 10Mbps, 100Mbps, 10FD, 100FD Choose the appropriate speed of the network. Choose Auto Detect in any of these cases: • The network speed is unknown. • The network environment is mixed. • The network uses 1Gbps. TCP/IP Configuration Manual, DHCP, BOOTP Choose the method by which the Fiery PRO80 obtains its Ethernet IP address. Depending on your network and the protocol you select in the following option (DHCP or BOOTP), the IP address can change. Select Manual to assign the Fiery PRO80 a static IP address. IP Address 127.0.0.1 If you selected Manual for the TCP/IP Configuration option, enter the Fiery PRO80 IP address. This IP address, unlike an IP address set automatically, remains the same if you restart the Fiery PRO80. You must change the default to a valid address for your network. Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 This option lets you modify the subnet mask for printing with TCP/IP over Ethernet. NOTE: Confirm the subnet mask setting with your network administrator before proceeding. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 37 Default Gateway Automatic, Custom Choose whether to assign automatically the gateway address for printing with TCP/IP. If you choose Custom, enter the gateway address in the following option. Gateway Address 127.0.0.1 Set the gateway address for printing with TCP/IP on your network. TCP/IP Version 6 Enabled, Disabled Choose Enabled to allow the Fiery PRO80 to retrieve an IPv6 address from the network. SETUP FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 38 Network Setup 2 options With Network Setup 2, you configure the Fiery PRO80 for WINS and Web Services. WINS Server Config WINS Disabled, Automatic, Custom Broadcasts from SMB devices cannot pass across a router without a WINS name server. Setting up the WINS name server is outside the scope of this document. To find out if a name server is available, contact your network administrator. Enabling Windows Printing enables Server Message Block (SMB), the file and printer sharing protocol built into Windows. Enabling SMB allows the Fiery PRO80 to be listed on the network so that Windows users can print to a particular print connection (Hold, Print, or Direct) on the Fiery PRO80 without any other networking software. For information about setting up a Windows computer for Windows printing, see Printing, and the documentation that accompanies Windows. Windows printing runs via TCP/IP, so you must configure TCP/ IP on the Fiery PRO80 and on all computers that use Windows printing. If you select Automatic, the Fiery PRO80 obtains the IP address for the WINS server automatically. If you choose Custom, you can enter the IP address manually in the following option. WINS IP Address 127.0.0.1 Change the default address to the correct IP address for the WINS Name Server. Obtain the correct address from your network administrator. Set Domain Name Name Enter the name of the workgroup or domain. Web Services Enabled, Disabled Select Enabled to make WebTools available to users. TCP/IP must be enabled on the Fiery PRO80 and user workstations. A Java-enabled Web browser and a valid IP address or DNS host name are required for each user computer. For information about browser and computer requirements, see Welcome. Web LCD Enabled, Disabled Select Enable to allow the new version of Setup to be available after the Fiery PRO80 reboots. Once the new version of Setup is enabled, the Legacy LCD will be disabled. To re-enable the Legacy LCD disable Enable Web Services from the new Setup version (page 30). For more information about the new version of Setup, see page 24. SETUP FROM A NETWORK COMPUTER 39 SETUP FROM A NETWORK COMPUTER After you perform initial Setup from the printer touch panel, you can change most Setup options from a network computer using Configure. To use Configure from a network computer, you must know the Fiery PRO80 Administrator password. Accessing Configure from a network computer To set up the Fiery PRO80 from a network computer, use Configure. You can access Configure in the following ways: • WebTools from a supported Internet browser • Command WorkStation TO ACCESS CONFIGURE FROM AN INTERNET BROWSER 1 Start your Internet browser and type the IP address of the Fiery PRO80. 2 Click Fiery WebTools. 3 Click the Configure tab. 4 Click Launch Configure. 5 Log on with Administrator privileges. TO ACCESS CONFIGURE FROM COMMAND WORKSTATION 1 Start Command WorkStation. 2 Log on with Administrator privileges. 3 Choose Configure from the Server menu. Regardless of the method you use, the following dialog box appears. SETUP FROM A NETWORK COMPUTER 40 Using Configure For information about using Configure and setting options, see Configure Help. Configure Help can be accessed from WebTools Configure and from Command WorkStation. SETUP OPTION REFERENCE 41 SETUP OPTION REFERENCE This chapter describes the default settings that you can set for the following sets of options: • PS (PostScript) • PCL Although a PCL printer driver is not provided, the Fiery PRO80 can process PCL jobs. The PCL Setup options supply default settings for options that are not already defined in the job. • Productivity For more information about print options, see Printing. For setup options not listed this section, refer to Configure Help. PS and PCL Setup options To determine the current Setup defaults, print the Server Configuration page from Command WorkStation. To access PS Setup options Choose Configure > PDL > PS. To access PCL Setup options Choose Configure > PDL > PCL. Option Settings (default is underlined) Description Allow Courier Substitution Yes, No Specify whether to substitute Courier for fonts that are unavailable when you download files to the Fiery PRO80, or when you print a document for which you do not have the corresponding printer font. If this option is set to No, jobs with fonts that are unavailable on the Fiery PRO80 hard disk generate a PostScript error and do not print. This setting does not apply to PDF files; font substitution occurs automatically in PDF files. Append CR to LF Yes, No Specify whether to append a carriage return to each line feed. Color Mode CMYK, Grayscale Specify whether to print color (CMYK) or Grayscale images to the Fiery PRO80 by default. CMYK gives you full color prints. Select CMYK as the Color Mode before performing calibration on the Fiery PRO80. Grayscale converts all colors into shades of gray. SETUP OPTION REFERENCE 42 Convert Paper Sizes No, Letter/11x17->A4/A3, A4/A3->Letter/11x17 Convert paper sizes in documents automatically to the default paper sizes specified. For example, if you select Letter/ 11x17->A4/A3, a letter size document is automatically printed on A4 paper. This option works in conjunction with the Default Paper Sizes option. For example, if Convert Paper Sizes is set to Letter/ 11x17->A4/A3, and Default Paper Sizes is set to US, jobs are printed A4/A3 size. This also includes Fiery PRO80 system pages such as the Start Page, Test Page, and Job Log. Default Paper Sizes US, Metric (default is US in the United States, Metric elsewhere) Print on US paper sizes (for example, Letter, Legal, 11x17), or Metric paper sizes (for example, A4 or A3) by default. When no page size is defined within a PostScript file, jobs are printed on Letter paper if you selected US; or A4 paper if you selected Metric. Default Orientation Portrait, Landscape This PCL option determines whether the text or image will be oriented along the short edge of the paper (portrait) or along the long edge of the paper (landscape). Font Number 0-999 The font number designates the default font for the Fiery PRO80. To determine font numbers, print the internal PCL Font List. The standard fonts are listed in order. The font numbers, however, are not displayed. Font Pitch (char/in) 0.44-99.99 (default is 10.00) If the default PCL font selected in Font Number represents a fixed pitch scalable font, determine the width of scalable type. Pitch is measured by characters per inch, so 10-pitch type fits ten characters per inch. Font Size (pt) 4.0-999.75 (default is 12.00) If the default PCL font selected in Font Number represents a proportionally spaced scalable font, determine the point size (height) of the font. Font Source Internal, Soft Font Specify the PCL font source to be enabled. Form Length (lines) 5-128 (default is 60) This option sets the number of lines to be printed per page in PCL jobs. Offset Jobs On, Off Specify whether to have jobs offset after they are printed. You must have a finisher installed. If you set this option to Off, all offset functions are disabled, including those that occur between jobs. Paper Color White, Non-White Specify the default paper color. Paper Size for System Pages US, Metric (default is US in the United States, Metric elsewhere) Specify the paper size that PCL system pages print on. System pages are pages that you print from the printer touch panel, such as the PCL Font List. Option Settings (default is underlined) Description SETUP OPTION REFERENCE 43 Paper Type Plain, Coated-GL, Coated-ML, Coated-GO, Coated-MO, Fine, Color Specific Specify the paper type. Paper Weight Specify the weight of the paper. For a list of the supported paper weights, see the documentation that accompanies your printer. Print Cover Page Yes, No Print a cover page (job summary) containing the name of the user who sent the job, the document name, the server name, the time the job was printed, the number of pages printed, and the status of the job. If a PostScript error occurs and the Print to PS Error option is set to Yes, the cover page lists the PostScript error message instead of the job status. Print Master Yes, No Select Yes to print a FreeForm master when created and printed to the Fiery PRO80. The master is retained on the Fiery PRO80 after printing unless deleted later. Select No only to process and hold a FreeForm master on the Fiery PRO80. Print to PS Error Yes, No Specify whether the Fiery PRO80 should print the available portion of a print job when it encounters a PostScript error. Select Yes to print the portion of the job that was processed before the error occurred. Select No to cancel the print job entirely when a PostScript error is encountered. Leave this option at No unless you encounter printing problems. Punched Paper Punched, Not Punched Specify whether the printer punches the paper. Scale to Fit On, Off Specify whether to scale a document size to a selected paper size if the document size is different from the paper size. With the Off setting, if the document size is larger than the selected paper size, the document is cropped to the paper size when printed. Symbol Set ASCII, Roman_8, ECMA-94 L1, PC_8... Choose the PCL symbol set that best matches the needs of users printing to the Fiery PRO80. Use PDF XObjects On, Off Specify whether images in PDF files are cached to reduce the need to reprocess the same image in a file. Option Settings (default is underlined) Description SETUP OPTION REFERENCE 44 Productivity Setup options To determine the current Setup defaults, print the Configuration page from Command WorkStation. • To access Productivity Setup options Choose Configure > Server > Productivity. Option Settings (default is underlined) Description Job Batching On, Off Select this option if you want to treat multiple print jobs as a single job in the printer job list and in accounting information. CONFIGURING WEBTOOLS 45 CONFIGURING WEBTOOLS WebTools allow you to manage your Fiery PRO80 remotely from the Internet or your company’s intranet. The Fiery PRO80 has its own home page, from which you can select the WebTool that you want to use. For information about using WebTools, see Utilities. Also, for many of the WebTools, you can consult Help. Configuring the Fiery PRO80 and computers for WebTools WebTools provide access to many Fiery PRO80 functions via the Internet (or intranet), providing additional flexibility in remote management. After WebTools are enabled, you can access them from a network computer. TO ENABLE ACCESS TO WEBTOOLS, ENSURE THE FOLLOWING ITEMS ARE ENABLED • A valid, unique IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address for the Fiery PRO80. Print a Configuration page to acquire the Fiery PRO80 IP address. See page 65. • Web Services is enabled. – To enable from the new version of Setup, see page 30. – To enable from the Legacy LCD, see page 38. TO SET UP A COMPUTER TO ACCESS WEBTOOLS 1 Enable TCP/IP networking on the user computer. 2 Assign the computer a valid, unique IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address, if required. 3 Install an Internet browser that supports the Java language and frames. Make sure that Java is enabled. For more information about supported browsers and WebTools requirements, see Welcome. TO ACCESS WEBTOOLS 1 Start your Internet browser and type the IP address or DNS name of the Fiery PRO80. 2 Click Fiery WebTools. 3 Click the tab corresponding to the WebTool that you want to use. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 46 ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 This chapter provides tips on managing Fiery PRO80 printing, performance, and security. Administrator functions Administration features are included with the user software and are built into the Fiery PRO80. The following table describes where to find information about these features. For this information See Address books for E-mail Printing page 60 Administrator and Operator passwords page 47 Backing up the entire Fiery PRO80 page 57 Clearing the Fiery PRO80 page 57 Configuration page page 65 Connecting the Fiery PRO80 to the network page 21 IP Address of Fiery PRO80 page 65 Job Log Setup Configure Help Network servers, setting up to manage and share printing services Documentation for your network servers Network servers, setting up with information specific to the Fiery PRO80 page 10 Optimizing Fiery PRO80 performance page 66 Printer default settings page 41 Printing Publishing the Direct connection, Print queue, or Hold queue to users Configure Help Remote Desktop connection page 58 Saving and restoring Fiery PRO80 configuration settings page 58 Setting up printing, installing printer drivers, installing user software Printing Shutting down, rebooting, and restarting the Fiery PRO80 page 67 ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 47 Setting passwords You can set or change the passwords for users of the Fiery PRO80. Anyone who is a member of the Administrators group can modify the Setup options and control the flow and order of print jobs with the job management tools. To create users, assign passwords, and add users to groups, use Configure. For more information, see Configure Help. To set the password for the user named “admin” in the Administrators group, use Configure. Keep track of the passwords that you set. Passwords from a network computer You can change the Administrator and Operator passwords from WebTools Configure or from Configure in Command WorkStation. For more information, see Configure Help. System software updates page 49 Troubleshooting Fiery PRO80 Setup page 69 USB printing page 59 Variable data printing, setting search path for common objects page 63 WebTools page 45 Windows XP system password page 47 For this information See ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 48 Changing the Windows XP system password The Fiery PRO80 is set with a Windows XP system password. To ensure network security in your environment, the administrator must change the password. TO CHANGE THE WINDOWS XP PASSWORD FOR THE FIERY PRO80 1 From the Fiery Advanced Controller Interface, press Ctrl+Alt+Delete on the Windows keyboard. The Windows Security dialog box appears. NOTE: If you are using the Welcome screen on Windows XP, the Windows Task Manager dialog box appears. To access the Windows Security dialog box, you must disable the Welcome screen. From the Windows XP control panel, access User Accounts, select the Change the way users log on or log off option, and then clear the Use the Welcome screen option. 2 In the Windows Security dialog box, click Change Password, and then type the following. For example, to change to “Fiery.2”: User name: administrator Log on to: \\Aero Old Password: Fiery.1 New Password: Fiery.2 Confirm New Password: Fiery.2 3 Click OK. The new password, Fiery.2, is now set. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 49 Updating system and user software Using the tools System Updates and Check for Product Updates (Software Downloads Site), you can obtain updates to Fiery PRO80 System Software and User Software from a secure site on the Internet (referred to throughout this documentation as the Update Server). Before updating the Fiery PRO80 Keep in the mind the following before updating the Fiery PRO80 using System Updates or Check for Product Updates: • If you reinstall system software onto the Fiery PRO80 HDD from DVDs, all patches and updates previously downloaded and installed are deleted and must be reinstalled. You should obtain the most recent patches from the Update Server immediately after system software is reinstalled. • If the Fiery PRO80 is behind a firewall and unable to access the Internet, the site administrator can configure a proxy server at the customer’s organization to allow the Fiery PRO80 to receive updates (see page 53). • While updates are being installed, you cannot print to the Fiery PRO80. Schedule the automatic updates when no one plans to print. While updates are being installed, the Fiery PRO80 may need to reboot several times. • To view updates that have already been installed, print the Configuration page or access Check Now and click the History tab (see “Using Check Now” on page 53). Check Now is available when you access System Updates directly from the Fiery Advanced Controller Interface. • The list that is displayed when you access Check for Product Updates (Software Downloads Site) may include: – Updates that are unavailable through System Updates and/or are not approved for all users. – Updates that may already be installed on some Fiery PRO80 print servers. To help you choose the updates to download, compare the list displayed with the Fiery PRO80 print server’s Configuration Page > Updates log. NOTE: Check Now is not available when you access System Updates from Command WorkStation or WebTools. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 50 System Updates System Updates allows you to schedule regular inquiries to an Update Server on the Internet for available Fiery PRO80 updates. The Fiery PRO80 checks automatically for updates by contacting the Update Server periodically. System Updates also allows users to obtain updated versions of Fiery PRO80 user software (utilities) and install them onto client computers that connect to the Fiery PRO80. The updated applications are first downloaded from the Update Server to a partition on the Fiery PRO80 HDD. Users access the Fiery PRO80 over the Internet and download the updated applications onto client computers and then manually install them. You can also view and download updates at any time using the Check Now feature from the Fiery Advanced Controller Interface. Use Check Now to view and manually download updates that are available for installation (Patches tab) and/or view a list of updates that have already been installed (History tab). You can also launch Check Now by clicking an update notification in the task bar on the Fiery PRO80 monitor. Access System Updates in the following ways: • Directly from the Fiery Advanced Controller Interface • From a client computer through WebTools > Configure tab > Launch Configure • From a client computer through Command WorkStation > Server menu > Configure > Server > System Update For detailed instructions, see “To schedule System Updates” on page 51. Make sure to review “Before updating the Fiery PRO80” on page 49 before scheduling System Updates. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 51 TO SCHEDULE SYSTEM UPDATES 1 Access System Update. You can access System Updates directly from the Fiery Advanced Controller Interface or from a client computer using WebTools or Command WorkStation. If you access System Updates directly from the Fiery Advanced Controller Interface, an additional feature, Check Now, is available (see page 53). Check Now lists the updates that are currently available (Patches tab) and the updates that have already been installed (History tab). NOTE: Check Now is not available when you access System Updates from Command WorkStation or WebTools. NOTE: While updates are being installed, you cannot print to the Fiery PRO80. Schedule the automatic updates when no one plans to print. The Fiery PRO80 may also need to reboot several times during the update process. From the Fiery Advanced Controller Interface From a client using Command WorkStation From a client using WebTools • Click Start > All programs > Fiery > System Updates. • Start Command WorkStation. • Log on with Administrator privileges. • Choose Configure from the Server menu. • Choose Server > System Update. • Launch a Web browser, type the IP address or DNS name of the Fiery PRO80, and then press Enter. • Click the Configure tab, and click Launch Configure. • Log on with Administrator privileges. • Choose Configure > Server > System Update. • Choose System Update from the Server menu. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 52 2 Select “Check for important system updates” (or “Enable System Updates” in Command WorkStation or WebTools). 3 Specify how often the Fiery PRO80 is to contact the Update Server. This feature sets a schedule for installing, downloading and/or notifying of updates. 4 Choose a method for updating the Fiery PRO80 operating software, system software, and utility software: • Automatically download and install updates (preferred method): Automatically downloads updates to the Fiery PRO80 and installs them. Your intervention is not required. • Download updates and send notification: Automatically downloads updates to the Fiery PRO80 but does not install them; sends a notification that updates have been downloaded. After the updates are downloaded, you install the updates manually. • Send notification when updates are available: A notification displays in the Fiery PRO80 task bar when new updates are available for download from the Update Server. To manually download the updates to the Fiery PRO80, access Check Now by clicking the notification in the task bar. Not available when accessed from WebTools or Command WorkStation ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 53 5 If you use a proxy server to connect through a firewall to the Update Server, click Proxy Settings, select Enable Proxy, and type the appropriate information in the following fields: • Address: proxy server IP address • Port: port used by the proxy server • User Name: user name for accessing the proxy server • Password: password for accessing the proxy server 6 In the Proxy Settings window, click Save. 7 Click Apply. Using Check Now Check Now is available when you access System Updates directly from the Fiery Advanced Controller Interface. Use Check Now to view updates that are available for installation (Patches tab) and updates that have already been installed (History tab). NOTE: Check Now is not available when you access System Updates from Command WorkStation or WebTools. TO VIEW AND INSTALL UPDATES USING CHECK NOW 1 At the Fiery PRO80, click Start > All Programs > Fiery > System Updates. The System Update Preferences dialog box appears. 2 Click Check Now at the bottom of the screen, and then do any of the following: • To view a description of an update, select it in the list. • To install the update, click Install. • To view updates that have already been installed, click the History tab. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 54 • To close the window without installing an update, click the X in the upper-right corner. Enabling Remote Desktop Remote Desktop is a Microsoft application that allows client computers to manage and control the Windows desktop features of the Fiery PRO80. You can enable Remote Desktop to access the Check Now feature (page 53) of System Updates on Fiery PRO80s that are not equipped with FACI. Remote Desktop must be enabled in both Fiery PRO80 Setup and on the client computer, as described in the following procedure. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 55 TO ENABLE REMOTE DESKTOP 1 Enable Remote Desktop on the Fiery PRO80 from the printer touch panel. See “Enable Remote Desktop” on page 30. Or, enable Remote Desktop on the Fiery PRO80 from a networked computer: • Launch a Web browser, type the IP address or DNS name of the Fiery PRO80, and then press Enter. • Click Fiery WebTools. • Click the Configure tab, and click Launch Configure. • Log on with Administrator privileges. • Choose Configure > Server > General. • Select Enable Remote Desktop. • Click Apply. • Click Reboot. 2 Enable Remote Desktop on the client computer: • Choose Start > All Programs > Accessories > Communications > Remote Desktop Connection. • Make sure that the Fiery PRO80 is Idle, and then type the IP address or DNS name of the Fiery PRO80 and click Connect. • Type the Administrator password, if prompted. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 56 Check for Product Updates (Software Downloads Site) Check for Product Updates (also known as the Software Downloads Site) allows you to access the Update Server to view and manually download all available updates for Fiery PRO80 System and User Software. You can access Check for Product Updates from the Configure tab in WebTools. Check for Product Updates is especially useful if your Fiery PRO80 cannot access the Internet, is behind a firewall, or is otherwise unable or not configured to seek and accept automatic updates from the Update Server (for instance, if you do not want—or the Fiery PRO80 is unable—to take advantage of the auto-download/auto-installation/auto-notification features available through System Updates). For detailed instructions, see “To install updates using Check for Product Updates” on page 56. Make sure to review “Before updating the Fiery PRO80” on page 49 before using Check for Product Updates. TO INSTALL UPDATES USING CHECK FOR PRODUCT UPDATES 1 Launch a Web browser, type the IP address or DNS name of the Fiery PRO80, and then press Enter. 2 Click Fiery WebTools. 3 Click the Configure tab, and then click Check for Product Updates. A window appears listing available updates. NOTE: The list that is displayed when you access Check for Product Updates may include: • Updates that are unavailable through System Updates and/or are not approved for all users. • Updates that may already be installed on some Fiery PRO80 print servers. To help you choose which updates to download, compare the list displayed with the Fiery PRO80 print server’s Configuration page > Updates log. 4 For each update you want to download, click the file name under Download and then select Save to download the update file to a location on the client computer. 5 When the updates files have been downloaded, browse to the location of the update file on the client computer and handle it according to the file type, circumstances, and site conditions. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 57 Clearing the Fiery PRO80 The Clear Server command allows you to clear all queued print jobs from the Fiery PRO80 Print, Hold, and Printed queues. Jobs can also be deleted, individually or as a group, using Command WorkStation. Clear Server also clears all jobs archived on the Fiery PRO80 hard disk, the index of archived jobs, and all FreeForm masters. TO CLEAR THE FIERY PRO80 FROM COMMAND WORKSTATION • In Command WorkStation, choose Clear Server from the Server menu. For more information, see Command WorkStation Help. Back up your original data on your own media at the same time you store and save data on the Fiery PRO80 hard disk. Never damage or reset the Fiery PRO80 hard disk, and do not turn off the system while accessing the hard disk. For instructions on how to turn on and turn off the Fiery PRO80, see page 67. If the Fiery PRO80 hard disk or system software experiences technical difficulties, data stored and saved on the Fiery PRO80 hard disk may be irretrievably lost. If problems with the hard disk occur, extended storage of the following data cannot be assured: • Third-party fonts • Print jobs • Color profiles, including profiles downloaded or edited with Spot-On • Job notes and instructions • Scanned image data • Jobs edited with Impose • Variable data documents • E-mail Service Address Book • FieryPRO80 configuration information (list of all the settings in effect for the current Setup) Backing up the entire Fiery PRO80 With the Fiery Clone Tool, you can the copy of the contents of the Fiery PRO80 hard disk to an image file, and then save the image file to a folder on the Fiery PRO80 hard disk or a USB storage device connected to the Fiery PRO80. For more information, see the documentation that accompanies the Fiery Clone Tool. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 58 Remote connection to the Fiery PRO80 You can access the Fiery PRO80 from a remote Windows computer. This type of connection allows you to use the Fiery Advanced Controller Interface as if you were using it locally. TO CONNECT TO THE FIERY PRO80 FROM A REMOTE COMPUTER 1 Enable the Remote Desktop option in Setup. For information, see page 30. 2 In WebTools Configure, make sure that port 3389 is enabled. 3 From the remote computer, choose Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications > Remote Desktop Connection. 4 Type the IP address or DNS name of the Fiery PRO80 and click Connect. 5 Type the Administrator password, if prompted. Restoring Fiery PRO80 settings You can restore the Fiery PRO80 to a group of settings that you have already saved. Saving and restoring the Fiery PRO80 configuration You can save the current configuration of the Fiery PRO80 and restore it later, if necessary. To save and restore settings, use Configure. For information, see Configure Help. The following settings are saved (if your Fiery PRO80 supports them): • Settings made in Setup (except Server Name) • Impose templates saved in the default directory for these files on the Fiery PRO80 • Address books • Virtual printer settings • Users and Groups information (logon names and passwords) • Custom spot colors ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 59 USB printing Users can save PS, EPS, TIFF, and PDF files to a USB device and print those files on the Fiery PRO80. To print files automatically when you connect the USB drive to the Fiery PRO80, save the files to specific folders or to the root level on the USB drive. For more information about USB printing, see Printing. TO SET UP A USB DEVICE FOR AUTOMATIC PRINTING 1 Configure, at a minimum, the following USB printing options in Configure > Network > Port > USB: • Select Enable USB Port. • For Default Queue, choose the connection to which the Fiery PRO80 downloads files that do not specify a connection. • Set USB Media Autoprint to Print All. 2 At a computer, create folders at the top (root) level of the USB device named Print, Hold, and Direct. 3 Save the files from the computer to the USB drive. Files copied to the Print, Hold, and Direct folders are downloaded to the corresponding print connection on the Fiery PRO80 when you connect the USB device to the Fiery PRO80. Files copied to the root level of the device (and any folder under the root level that is not named for a print connection) are downloaded to the queue that you configured for USB printing. Prepare the USB device with the correct folder structure and appropriate files before the device is connected to the Fiery PRO80. Because file processing begins as soon as you connect the device to the Fiery PRO80, there is no time to do any file management tasks such as moving files to a different folder or deleting files. 4 Remove the USB device from the computer and connect it to the USB port on the Fiery PRO80. For the location of the USB port, see page 21. Make sure that the USB device is properly stopped before you disconnect it from the computer. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 60 Managing e-mail address books You can manage e-mail/Internet Fax addresses by sending e-mail messages in a particular format to the Fiery PRO80. Management features are overwriting the address book, adding new addresses, removing addresses, and retrieving current addresses on the Fiery PRO80. Users use the address books when they send attachment files to the Fiery PRO80. NOTE: E-mail messages can be sent only from an administrator account. The Fiery PRO80 supports the following address books: Admin allows members to modify the address book, get the current address book from the Fiery PRO80, cancel a job, or receive the status of a job. However, membership in this address book does not provide the same privileges as the Administrator password (page 47) does. Print includes users who have print access. Only users whose e-mail addresses are in the Print address book are authorized to submit jobs via e-mail to the Fiery PRO80. Unauthorized users receive an e-mail reply that their job was not accepted by the Fiery PRO80 for printing. User includes users who have scanning access. Fax is used for Scan to Internet FAX. This address book is used for sending scan files via Internet FAX to the Fiery PRO80. You cannot use addresses in the address book to send an e-mail to the Fiery PRO80. Corporate is an LDAP address book used for Scan to E-mail. It allows users to send files with Remote Scan to a list of addresses registered on an LDAP server. NOTE: Perform LDAP Setup before setting this address book. For more information, see Configure Help. When a print job is submitted via e-mail, the Fiery PRO80 first checks the Print address book. If the user’s e-mail address does not match any entry in the Print address book, the job does not print. Instead, the user receives an e-mail stating that the print job was not accepted. The default wildcard character “@” is stored in the Print address book. This allows any user to print to the Fiery PRO80 until the administrator adds the first entry in the Print address book. To manage address books, send an e-mail to the Fiery PRO80 with commands in the Subject and Message fields. The Fiery PRO80 responds by e-mail with information about each request, as described in the following table. To add or remove more than one address at a time, list the addresses on separate lines in the message field of the e-mail. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 61 Task Administrator subject field Administrator message field E-mail response subject field E-mail response message field To retrieve a specific address book #GetAddressBook name of address book For example: #GetAddressBook Admin Address Book name of address book For example: Address Book Admin List of addresses in the specified address book To add an address to an address book #AddAddressTo name of address book For example: #AddAddressTo Print name@domain or “display name” Added to Address Book name of address book For example: Added to Address Book Print List of addresses added to the address book The Fiery PRO80 also lists any addresses that cannot be added and includes the reason. To clear an address book #ClearAddressBook name of address book For example: #ClearAddressBook User Address Book name of address book cleared or Address Book name of address book not cleared For example: Address Book User cleared If the address book is not cleared, the reason is given. To delete an address from an address book #DeleteAddressFrom name of address book For example: #DeleteAddressFrom User name@domain or “display name” Removed from Address Book name of address book For example: Removed from Address Book User Deleted Address 1 Deleted Address 2 The Fiery PRO80 also lists any addresses that cannot be deleted and includes the reason. To receive help for e-mail services #Help RE: Help Provides troubleshooting e-mail syntax ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 62 TO RETRIEVE AN ADDRESS BOOK FROM THE FIERY PRO80 1 Start your e-mail application. 2 Open a new message window. 3 Type the e-mail address of the Fiery PRO80 in the To line. 4 Type the command and the address book name in the Subject line. For example, to retrieve the User address book, type “#GetAddressBook User.” 5 Send the message. The return message includes the addresses of the specified address book. 6 Copy the addresses to a text file or save the message for your records. TO RESTORE AN ADDRESS BOOK TO THE FIERY PRO80 1 Start your e-mail application. 2 Open a new message window. 3 Type the e-mail address of the Fiery PRO80 in the To line. 4 Type the command and the address book name in the Subject line. For example, to restore the User address book, type “#GetAddressTo User.” 5 Copy the addresses to the body of the e-mail with each address on a separate line. You can include nicknames. However, when a nickname or address is longer than one line, edit it to fit on one line. 6 Send the message. 7 In the return e-mail message, confirm that the addresses were restored correctly. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 63 VDP Search Path In Configure > PDL > VDP, use the following information to set the file search path for VDP objects. Setting common global search paths A file search path specifies where common VDP resources (for example, PostScript images and fonts) are stored, on a network computer or on the Fiery PRO80. The Fiery PRO80 searches predefined paths until it finds the necessary resources. If the resource is not found, the job fails. Inform users of the paths that you specify so that their jobs can access the resources. The Fiery PRO80 searches paths for VDP resources in the following order: • Path that the user specifies in the job See “Allowing users to define a search path for a single job” on page 64. • Paths that you define in Configure for common global objects • Path that the application specifies for VPS or PPML resources when it generates the data stream For any of these paths, the Fiery PRO80 searches the folder, and then the subfolders within that folder. After the Fiery PRO80 locates the first resource, it attempts to locate the second resource in the same folder. If the second resource is not found in the same folder, the Fiery PRO80 searches according to the original order. TO SPECIFY A GLOBAL PATH FOR COMMON VDP OBJECTS 1 In Configure, choose PDL > VDP. For information about accessing Configure, see page 39. 2 Click Add. 3 In the window that appears, type the path name or click Browse to locate the path. If you type the path name, use the format of a mapped drive (for example, Z:\folder) or a UNC (for example, \\computer name\folder). 4 If the path is located on a computer that requires authentication, select Remote Server Authentication, and then enter the appropriate user name and password. 5 Click OK. 6 To add more paths, click Add and repeat these steps. 7 Click Apply. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 64 Allowing users to define a search path for a single job A user can enter a single search path when the user sends the job from a Windows printer driver, or when someone later overrides the job to include a search path. The path must be fewer than 256 characters, and in the format of a mapped drive (for example, Z:\folder) or a UNC (for example, \\computer name\folder). To use a mapped drive, it must be recognized by the Fiery PRO80. For example, if the user specifies a path on the user’s computer (for example, C:\My Documents\VDP), the Fiery PRO80 assumes this is the C:\ drive on the Fiery PRO80. In another example, if “Z:” is a network drive that users access on their network, the Fiery PRO80 does not know the location to which “Z:” refers. Therefore, you must map a drive so that the Fiery PRO80 also recognizes the location where resources are stored. The following procedure assumes that you use the Fiery Advanced Controller Interface. If you do not have the Fiery Advanced Controller Interface, but your Fiery PRO80 supports Remote Desktop, connect to the Fiery PRO80 with Remote Desktop and use the following procedure. TO MAP A DRIVE TO A LETTER RECOGNIZED BY THE FIERY PRO80 1 From a Windows Explorer window, choose Tools > Map Network Drive. One method of accessing an Explorer window is to choose Start >Documents > My Documents. 2 From the Drive menu, choose a letter that is not currently mapped. 3 In the path field, type the UNC of the network computer that contains the shared resources, or click Browse and locate the computer on the network. 4 Click Finish. 5 If you are prompted to enter a network password, type Administrator in the Connect As field, type the password in the Password field, and then click OK. 6 Inform the user to use the drive letter in the VDP search path when the user sends the job to the Fiery PRO80. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 65 Printing the Configuration page The Configuration page lists the settings in effect for the current Setup. After you perform Setup, print a Configuration page to confirm your settings. Post the current Configuration page near the Fiery PRO80 for quick reference. Users need the information on this page, such as the current printer default settings. TO PRINT THE CONFIGURATION PAGE FROM COMMAND WORKSTATION • In Command WorkStation, choose File > Print > Server Configuration. TO PRINT THE CONFIGURATION PAGE FROM THE PRINTER TOUCH PANEL 1 At the printer touch panel, press the Controller button. 2 Press the Tools tab. 3 Press Configuration. Determining the IP address of the Fiery PRO80 If you must know the IP address of the Fiery PRO80, you can determine it from the Control Panel without printing a Configuration page. TO DETERMINE THE IP ADDRESS 1 When the Fiery PRO80 reaches Idle, press any button on the Control Panel. 2 In the menu that appears, press the button next to IP Address. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 66 Maintaining optimal Fiery PRO80 performance The Fiery PRO80 does not require maintenance. Beyond the obvious requirements of servicing and maintaining the printer and replenishing consumables, you can improve the overall performance of your system by doing the following: • Make the best use of your network connections. Publish only connections that will be used. The Fiery PRO80 constantly checks all published connections, even if they are inactive. Review the published connections by printing a Configuration page. Eliminate the connections that are not being used. It is easy to re-establish them when needed. • Leave less urgent jobs to times when there is less network traffic or printing. You can print recurring print jobs or jobs that are not urgent to the Hold queue. At low-traffic times, the administrator or a user of the job management tools with Operator privileges can move (or copy) all the Hold queue jobs to the Print queue for printing. • Reduce unnecessary network communication. Large numbers of users running Fiery utilities, especially with frequent updates, may have a significant effect on Fiery PRO80 performance. • Make sure that you have adequate disk space on the Fiery PRO80. Periodically review the list of jobs in the Hold queue, and the number of jobs being retained in the Printed queue. An administrator can print or delete jobs that are in the Printed queue and Hold queue. Consider printing or offloading inactive jobs. If disk space on the Fiery PRO80 is frequently low, you can disable the Printed queue and choose not to publish the Hold queue (in Printer Setup). To move or remove queued jobs, use the job management tools. When you free up disk space by removing inactive jobs, new jobs are spooled and printed more quickly. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 67 Shutting down, rebooting, and restarting the Fiery PRO80 Generally, you can leave the Fiery PRO80 and the printer running all the time. This section describes how to shut down and restart the Fiery PRO80 when necessary. When you need to shut down the Fiery PRO80, fonts downloaded to the Fiery PRO80 are not deleted. Jobs in the Printing, Processing, and Held jobs lists are not deleted and are available for printing when you reboot or restart the Fiery PRO80. Restarting the Fiery PRO80 resets the system software, but does not reboot the entire system. Network access to the Fiery PRO80 is temporarily interrupted and all currently processing jobs are terminated. If you use a USB thumb drive, remove it before rebooting. Otherwise, the Fiery PRO80 does not reboot. TO SHUT DOWN THE FIERY PRO80 FROM THE CONTROL PANEL 1 Make sure that the Fiery PRO80 is not receiving, processing, or printing any files. If the system has just finished processing, wait at least five seconds after the system reaches Idle before beginning the shutdown procedure. 2 Press the Menu button to display the Functions menu. 3 Select Shutdown System. TO RESTART OR REBOOT THE FIERY PRO80 FROM THE CONTROL PANEL 1 When the Fiery PRO80 reaches Idle, press any button on the Control Panel. 2 Press the Menu button to display the Functions menu. 3 In the menu that appears, press the button next to Restart Server. 4 In the next menu, press the button next to Restart Server or Reboot System. ADMINISTERING THE FIERY PRO80 68 Ejecting a CD/DVD from the Fiery PRO80 Use of the CD/DVD drive is primarily for service technicians when they install system software. If you shut down the Fiery PRO80, the CD/DVD is ejected automatically. TO EJECT A CD/DVD 1 When the Fiery PRO80 reaches Idle, press any button on the Control Panel. 2 In the menu that appears, press the button next to Eject CD/DVD. TROUBLESHOOTING 69 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter provides troubleshooting tips. Troubleshooting the Fiery PRO80 Startup diagnostics are described in the documentation for service technicians. Contact your authorized service/support center if you see startup error messages on Command WorkStation or if the Fiery PRO80 does not reach the Idle state. Runtime error messages For error messages related to canceling jobs and printing, including the Disk Full message and alerts to load media, see Command WorkStation Help. You can turn on PostScript error reporting as a print option from Mac OS applications. Printer not found Most failures to find a printer on the network are due to conflicting or missing name or address settings for the Fiery PRO80. You must enter names in specific places. The required names are: • TCP/IP host name (also known as the DNS name), which is defined by your organization. Enter the host name as the Server Name in Fiery PRO80 Setup. • Remote printer (internal machine) name. Use one of the following: print hold direct NOTE: If you change the DNS name (TCP/IP host name) of the Fiery PRO80, you must reconfigure one of the utilities on each computer. TROUBLESHOOTING 70 For the appropriate name, see the following table. Cannot connect to the Fiery PRO80 with utilities If users cannot connect to the Fiery PRO80, check the following: Fiery PRO80 Setup: The appropriate network protocol must be enabled, with the correct parameters (for example, for TCP/IP, the IP address), and you must publish the Print queue or Hold queue. You can check these settings quickly by printing a Configuration page. On the client computer: The appropriate network protocols must be loaded. In this location For this item TCP/IP networks See Setup Server Name option Administrator defines name page 29 Windows hosts file host name DNS name (TCP/IP host name) page 10 Windows setup for TCP/IP lpd host name DNS name (TCP/IP host name) page 13 Name of printer on lpd host machine print, hold, or direct UNIX /etc/printcap file (BSD) rp line print, hold, or direct page 14 Solaris lpadmin queuename print, hold, or direct Add New Server dialog box, when configuring a utility Server Name DNS name (TCP/IP host name) Utilities TROUBLESHOOTING 71 Cannot connect to the Fiery PRO80 with Command WorkStation If a problem occurs while you are connecting to the Fiery PRO80, an error message is displayed. The problem can occur when: • The FieryPRO80 is initially turned on. • The FieryPRO80 restarts. • You have changed settings affecting the server address and have not reconfigured the connection to the server. If you experience this problem, try the following solutions, in this order: • A remote computer running utilities or WebTools may be interfering by obtaining status information. If possible, close the remote application, and try to connect again. • Restart the Command WorkStation software and try to connect again. • Restart the Fiery PRO80. INDEX 73 Numerics 1000BaseT 22 100BaseTX 22 10BaseT 22 A access levels, setting 15 Active Directory 13 administrator functions 46 installing the server 11 password 47 privileges 17 Allow Courier Substitution option 41 Append CR to LF option 41 C Calibration command 32 changing Administrator password 47 host name or DNS name 69 characters per inch 42 check for product updates 56 Check Now feature, system updates 50, 53 Clear Server command 57 client setup overview 11 WebTools 45 CMYK printing by default 41 Color Charts 28, 32 Color Mode option 41 Command WorkStation Configuration page 65 problems connecting to server 71 Setup from 39 Configuration page printing 28, 32, 65 troubleshooting connection problems 70 Configure (WebTool) 19 configuring a proxy server, system updates 53 connecting network cable 21 Convert Paper Sizes option 42 Courier font, substitution with 41 cover page, printing at end of job 43 D date, setting 35 Default Gateway option 37 Default Paper Sizes option 42 Direct connection described 18 required for downloading fonts 19 disk space 66 DNS (Domain Name Server) implications of changing 69 listing server name 13 Docs WebTool 19 downloading fonts, Direct connection requirement 19 Downloads (WebTool) 19 E E-mail Log 28, 32 Enable Auto IP Configuration option 29 enabling WebTools 38 error messages 43 runtime 69 Ethernet connector 22 Port Setup 29, 36 speed 29, 36 F Font Number (PCL) option 42 fonts pitch 42 printer fonts on server 28, 32 printing Font List 28 printing font list 32 size 42 source 42 substitution 41 Form Length option 42 FreeForm master 43 FTP Log 28, 32 Functions menu 27 INDEX INDEX 74 G Gateway Address option 37 Gateway Type option 30 gateway, assigning address automatically 30 H Hold queue, described 18 Home (WebTool) 19 host name, registering on network 13, 69 I improving server performance 66 installing server on network 11 Internet, accessing server with WebTools 19 IP address assigning automatically 29 assigning manually 30 for Ethernet Setup 30 static 30 IP Address option 36 J Java to support Internet browser 45 Job Batching 44 Job Log clearing jobs from 57 described 32 printing manually 28 job management tools, deleting jobs with 57 L line feed, PCL jobs 41 LPR (TCP/IP), UNIX 14 M maintaining server performance 66 N naming the server 29, 35, 69 network installation summary 11, 12 protocols supported 10 TCP/IP 12 Network Setup 36 O Offset Jobs option 42 Operator password privileges 17 Orientation option 42 P PANTONE 28, 32 Paper Color option 42 Paper Size for System Pages option 42 paper size used by default 42 Paper Type option 43 Paper Weight option 43 passwords Administrator privileges 17 Administrator, changing 47 Operator privileges 17 setting 16 PDF files, font substitution in 41 Pitch option 42 Points option 42 Port Setup, Ethernet Setup 29, 36 PostScript error 43 Print Cover Page option 43 Print Master option 43 Print Pages command 32 Print queue, described 18 Print to PostScript Error option 43 Printed queue 18 printer connection failure 69 not found 69 not in Chooser 69 printing CMYK by default 41 Configuration page 28, 32 connections 18 cover page for each job 43 Font List 28 font list 32 reprinting previously printed jobs 18 server information pages 32 Productivity Setup options 44 protocols, network 10 proxy server 53 publishing connections, overview 18 Punched Paper option 43 Q queues, clearing all 57 R Remote Desktop connecting from user computer 58 Setup option 35 INDEX 75 remote desktop, enabling for system updates 54 reprinting jobs 18 Restart command 32 Resume Printing command 27, 33 RJ-45 connector 22 S Sample Print command 33 Scale to Fit option 43 Secure Print 32 server back view showing connectors 21 maintaining and improving performance 66 naming 29, 35 Setup 22 touch panel display 24, 31 Server Name option 35 Server Setup 29 Server Setup 35 Set Domain Name option, Windows printing 38 Setup accessing 24, 31 administrative functions 46 from a network computer 39 Network Setup 36 screen types 26, 34 Server Setup 35 summary 24 Setup command 32 Shut Down command 32 SMB, see Windows printing Subnet Mask option 30, 36 Suspend Printing command 27, 33 Symbol Set option 43 System Date option 35 system software updating 49, 50, 52, 53, 54, 56 system software, updating 49 System Time option 35 system updates 50 cautions 49 check for product updates 50 Check Now feature 50, 53 enabling a proxy server 53 enabling Remote Desktop 54 scheduling 52 T TCP/IP Ethernet Setup 29 host name 69 with UNIX workstations 14 TCP/IP Version 6 option 37 terminology, general 7 Test Page, printing 32 time, setting 35 touch panel display accessing Setup 24, 31 illustrated 24, 31 troubleshooting Command WorkStation connection problems 71 connection to printer fails 69 Printer not found in the selection list of utilities 70 Printer not found on TCP/IP or IPX networks 69 twisted pair cable 22 U UNIX on TCP/IP network 14 printcap file 70 remote printer name 70 updating the system 49, 50, 52, 53, 56 USB printing 59 Use PDF XObjects option 43 Use WINS Name Server option 38 using check for product updates 56 using system updates 50 W Web Services option 38 WebTools Configure 19 Docs 19 Downloads 19 enabling 38 Home 19 Windows printing domain issues 13 setting domain or workgroup 38 Fiery® Color Server Fiery Color Reference © 2009 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered under Legal Notices for this product. 45087207 1 September 2009 CONTENTS 3 CONTENTS INTRODUCTION 7 About this document 7 For additional information 7 OVERVIEW OF COLOR MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS 8 Understanding color management systems 8 How color management works 9 Using ColorWise and application color management 10 Using ColorWise color management tools 11 USING COLOR MANAGEMENT WORKFLOWS 12 Understanding workflows 12 Standard recommended workflow 14 Choosing colors 15 Understanding color models 16 Optimizing for output type 17 Maintaining color accuracy 18 MANAGING COLOR IN OFFICE APPLICATIONS 19 Using office applications 19 Color matching with office applications 20 Working with office applications 20 Defining colors 20 Working with imported files 21 Selecting options when printing 21 Output profiles 22 Ensuring color accuracy when you save a file 22 CONTENTS 4 MANAGING COLOR IN POSTSCRIPT APPLICATIONS 23 Working with PostScript applications 23 Color matching with PostScript applications 24 Using color reference pages to match color 24 Using the CMYK Color Reference 24 Using the PANTONE reference 25 Working with imported objects 25 Mixing object types (Advanced color management) 26 Using CMYK source profiles 26 Using application-defined halftones 27 Ensuring color accuracy when you save a file 27 MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 28 Specifying color settings 28 Configuring Photoshop color settings 28 Saving files from Photoshop 31 Choosing a file format 31 Selecting options when printing 34 Advanced tips for using PostScript color management 36 MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS 38 Adobe InDesign 39 InDesign color settings 39 Importing objects 41 Selecting options when printing 42 QuarkXPress 45 Importing objects 45 Selecting options when printing 45 Optional color management from QuarkXPress 46 CONTENTS 5 MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS 47 Adobe Illustrator 47 Note about color models in Illustrator 47 Illustrator color settings 48 Saving files for importing into other documents 50 Specifying print options 50 Using Illustrator color management 53 CorelDRAW 53 Defining colors 53 Importing objects 54 Saving files for importing into other documents 54 Specifying print options 54 Optional color management in CorelDRAW 55 MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE ACROBAT 56 Specifying color settings 57 Selecting options when printing 58 DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 60 The properties of color 60 The physics of color 61 CIE color model 62 Hue, saturation, and brightness 62 Additive and subtractive color systems 64 Understanding color gamut 67 Printing techniques 67 Halftone and continuous tone devices 68 Using color effectively 68 General guidelines 69 Color wheel 69 Color and text 71 CONTENTS 6 Raster images and vector graphics 72 Optimizing files for processing and printing 73 Resolution of raster images 73 Scaling 74 BIBLIOGRAPHY 75 GLOSSARY 77 INDEX 89 INTRODUCTION 7 INTRODUCTION This document provides a reference for information about optimizing color printing with the Color Server and improving color quality and performance for all Color Server models. Specific features and options may vary, depending on the Color Server model at your site. NOTE: The term “printer” is used throughout this document to denote a supported printer or copier. The term “toner” refers to toner or ink. About this document This document provides an overview of general color concepts, with a specific focus on color management for print output. It describes multiple scenarios (called workflows) during which color information can be specified. It also provides application notes that explain how to print to the Color Server from popular Microsoft Windows and Apple Mac OS applications. Color terms and concepts, such as “color space,” “spot color,” “gamut,” and “source profile” appear in bold throughout this document. If you are new to desktop color, or if any terms are unfamiliar, see the “Glossary” on page 77. For additional information This document is one in a set of documentation that includes documents for both users and system administrators. For a description of all of the available documentation, see Welcome. All other documents should be available at your site. For more information, see the following documents as directed. For additional information about the topics discussed in this document, see: • Color Printing: For detailed information about the color printing options and settings available with your Color Server, as well as the ColorWise color management system built into your Color Server. • Printing: For information about how to set the ColorWise print options. For information about performing color management tasks and using Command WorkStation, see Command WorkStation Help. For general information about printing in color, see “Desktop Color Primer” on page 60 and the sources in the “Bibliography” on page 75. OVERVIEW OF COLOR MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS 8 OVERVIEW OF COLOR MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS To create successful color documents and presentations, you can take advantage of the features of color management software as they are implemented by the Color Server and on your desktop computer. This chapter is devoted to various elements of color management that contribute to predictable color results. Understanding color management systems A color management system (CMS) is a “translator” between the color space of the source device (for example, a monitor or scanner) and the color space of the destination device (for example, the printer). It compares the color space in which the source object is created to the color space in which the job is output, and adjusts the colors in the document to maintain consistency across different devices. A CMS typically uses a device-independent color space, such as CIELAB, as its intermediate color space. To perform its translation, a CMS needs information about the color space of the source object and the gamut of the printer. This information is provided through profiles, often created by the manufacturers of the computer monitor or printer. The end product of a CMS conversion is a printed document or object file in the gamut of a particular printer. Progress is being made toward standardization in the field of digital color management systems. Windows and Mac OS operating systems support an industry standard format developed by the International Color Consortium (ICC). This ICC format is implemented on Windows and Mac OS computers. Other software developers are also incorporating CMSs into high-end applications. The Color Server CMS, ColorWise, supports this standard profile format. You can use the EFI Color Profiler Suite (an optional software package) to create color profiles that are fully compliant with ICC standards, evaluate the profiles, edit them, and test them. EFI Color Profiler Suite includes a spectrophotometer that you can use to create profiles. OVERVIEW OF COLOR MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS 9 How color management works Before you can print a color document, the color data in it must be converted to the gamut of the printer. Whether performed by the Color Server or a host-based CMS, the process of converting color data for a printer is the same: the CMS interprets RGB object data according to a specified source profile and adjusts both RGB and CMYK data according to a specified output profile, also called a destination profile by some color management systems. The source profile defines the RGB color space of the object’s source: characteristics such as the white point, gamma, and type of phosphor used. The output profile defines the gamut of an output device, such as a printer. The Color Server (or host-based CMS) uses a deviceindependent color space to translate between the source color space and the color space of the output device. The Color Server allows you to specify default and override settings for the source color space information and the output profile information (see Color Printing). When you use these settings, you do not need to use the features of other color management systems. Your Color Server software includes ICC profile for use with other color management systems, although conflicts may arise when the Color Server CMS is used in conjunction with a host CMS. You can also use color management systems to adjust color data to the gamut of an output device other than the one to which you are printing. This process of simulating another output device is commonly used for proofing jobs that are printed on an offset press. For more information about the Color Server simulation feature, see Color Printing. The type of print job and the final output device, Color Server or offset press, determines the workflow that provides the best results. For information about choosing workflows, see “Using Color Management Workflows” on page 12. Input data Printed data or file Color manageme nt system Device-independent color space Source profile Output profile OVERVIEW OF COLOR MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS 10 Using ColorWise and application color management The Color Server CMS, ColorWise, is designed to provide casual and expert users the best color output for a variety of purposes. Several applications also provide their own CMS. This document describes how to optimize print output using ColorWise color management and application color management. The Color Server intelligently manages the printed appearance of RGB, CMYK, and spot colors. You can allow the Color Server to manage color for most color printing jobs without adjusting any settings. A desktop (host-based) CMS uses ICC profiles to convert colors from one device gamut to another (see “Desktop Color Primer” on page 60). The color data is converted when it passes from one application to another or when the job is sent to the printer; thus, the processing occurs on your computer, as opposed to the Color Server. Conventional color management systems typically address only color conversions, and they occupy your computer processor. When you use ColorWise, jobs leave your computer and are processed faster on the Color Server. The advantages to ColorWise color management versus desktop (application) color management include the following: • Relieving your computer from performing additional processing. Delaying color conversions until the color data reaches the Color Server frees your computer so that you can continue working. Color conversions on the Color Server are, in most cases, much faster than similar conversions on a host computer. • Eliminating the potential for undesirable color management-related conflicts, such as iterative color conversions and inconsistent color between applications. The Color Server applies global corrections to specific groups of RGB, CMYK, and spot colors to avoid such conflicts. • Accepting RGB files in addition to larger CMYK files from applications, which minimizes network traffic and enables jobs to print faster. ColorWise uses ICC profiles to convert colors to the device gamut or simulate other devices, such as an offset printing press. ColorWise manages color conversions for all users printing to the Color Server from Windows and Mac OS computers. It allows users to follow a simple workflow with minimal intervention using robust default settings, while giving advanced users the control and precision that they need. OVERVIEW OF COLOR MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS 11 Using ColorWise color management tools Your Color Server user software includes several types of color reference pages that allow you to see the range of colors that can be printed on your printer. For predictable color, use the color reference pages when defining the colors in your document. The available resources are as follows: RGB Color Reference: A Microsoft Word file and a Microsoft PowerPoint file that allow you to view the colors available in the standard palettes of office applications and see how those colors print on the Color Server (see “Color matching with office applications” on page 20). CMYK Color Reference: An 11-page, downloadable PostScript file of CMYK color patches (see “Using the CMYK Color Reference” on page 24). Process Simulation of PANTONE Solid Coated Colors: A 19-page, downloadable PostScript file of color patches showing the CMYK equivalents of PANTONE Coated colors. This file prints differently, depending on the setting of the Spot Color Matching option (see “Using the PANTONE reference” on page 25). In addition, you can print RGB, CMYK, and PANTONE color charts from the Color Server. USING COLOR MANAGEMENT WORKFLOWS 12 USING COLOR MANAGEMENT WORKFLOWS A workflow is the path a print job follows from creation to destination. The workflow of any job includes points at which decisions are made about how to define, use, and translate color. The choices made, and the point at which they are made, impact the color output produced. This chapter introduces issues with color management in specific desktop applications and discusses the interaction between those applications and ColorWise color management. Understanding workflows The term “workflow” is used to describe the path a job follows from its creation in a desktop application to final printed output. The Color Server supports a variety of workflows with different levels of complexity. There are several points at which color management can be performed on a job (see the illustration on page 13). The information provided at each step (for example, the type of color used) impacts the workflow of the job. Always consider the complexity of the workflow. Every time colors are converted, performance and color accuracy are affected. A workflow with a minimum number of steps minimizes the risk of error. USING COLOR MANAGEMENT WORKFLOWS 13 Application and operating system color management: Turn off Disable any CMS provided by the application or operating system to ensure that the Color Server receives color data properly and prints it accurately. For information, see the documentation that accompanies your application. NOTE: Color management between the display device and the application cannot be disabled. Select colors based on the desired output (see “Choosing colors” on page 15). Select file format based on the desired output. EPS data is not manipulated. Other formats can be used if the file is saved with the appropriate settings. Use the ColorWise CMS as described in this document and Color Printing. Operating system color options: Disabled Disable any CMS provided by the operating system. Calibrate as described in Color Printing. Perform regular maintenance as recommended by the printer manufacturer. Use the paper stock, toner, and other materials recommended by the printer manufacturer. CMYK DOCUMENT Spot RGB SAVE AS (File Format) PRINT Set ColorWise print options Color Server Calibration Device maintenance Optimal output USING COLOR MANAGEMENT WORKFLOWS 14 Standard recommended workflow The Color Server is highly optimized for the specific printer it supports. ColorWise addresses issues unique to your printer, including halftones, individual toner response, interactions among toners, natural smoothness of blends, and the capability to render spot and custom colors. The Color Server distinguishes text and graphics from image elements, so that black channel information can be preserved while parameters used for CMYK color separations are maintained. The recommended standard color workflow uses ColorWise calibration and color management. The Color Server comes into play near the end of the color workflow. For this workflow: • Bypass any color management of printed output in the application and operating system. This ensures that the colors you select reach the Color Server and ColorWise in a usable form. Consider, however, that ColorWise fully supports color management from applications and printer drivers (see “Using ColorWise and application color management” on page 10). • Set the CMYK/Grayscale Source option in ColorWise to match the CMYK color space used in the application to select the colors. Any CMYK/Grayscale Source setting (except ColorWise Off, if available) applies calibration, so the response of the printer appears stable. Some examples of CMYK/Grayscale Source settings are SWOP or ISO Coated in the U.S., Euroscale in Europe, and DIC or Japan Color in Japan. If colors have been selected specifically for your calibrated Color Server, set CMYK/Grayscale Source to None. • Set other ColorWise print options as appropriate. For a list and descriptions of ColorWise print options that affect CMYK, RGB, spot, and other colors, see Color Printing. USING COLOR MANAGEMENT WORKFLOWS 15 Choosing colors When working with color materials, whether they are presentations, illustrations, or complicated page designs, you make aesthetic decisions about the colors you use. After you set a goal, you must make the best use of the capabilities of your Color Server to realize your design in print. Your color printing system becomes an ally in this creative process to the extent that results are predictable: • If you designed a poster to print on the Color Server, you want the printed colors to match the design specification. • If you are printing presentations on the Color Server, you want to preserve the vivid colors that you see on the monitor. • If you are working with color that is to be printed on an offset press, you want the Color Server output to match other prepress proofs or PANTONE color swatch books. The colors that you define when creating a file in an application, and the color management tools within the application that you use, impact how the file is processed (workflow) and the final output that you can expect. Use color management to control color output by performing the following tasks: • Select a color model: Different types of applications use different color models. The color model you select, and whether or when data is converted from one color model to another, influences the final color output. • Optimize for output type: The type of final output influences your color and application choices. • Use color matching tools: The Color Server provides several tools to preview colors available on a device and define them within an application. USING COLOR MANAGEMENT WORKFLOWS 16 Understanding color models You can define colors in several different color models, most commonly RGB, CMYK, and a spot color matching system (such as PANTONE). Depending on the application you use, you may or may not have a choice of the color model. RGB colors are used when you take output from an RGB device such as a digital camera or scanner. Another use of the RGB color model is for displaying colors on a monitor. CMYK colors are what most printers use. spot colors, such as PANTONE, are special inks manufactured to run on an offset printing press. Spot colors can be simulated using CMYK toners (also known as process colors). With the Spot Color Matching print option, you can determine how spot colors are printed at the Color Server: • Spot Color Matching On uses color tables built into the Color Server to simulate the spot color with the closest equivalent available using the CMYK toners of the copier/printer connected to the Color Server. If your Color Server supports the Spot-On application in Command WorkStation, you can customize the spot color definitions used by ColorWise. • Spot Color Matching Off instructs the Color Server to simulate the spot color using CMYK equivalents defined by the spot color manufacturer. These are the same CMYK values used by applications that include spot color libraries. This CMYK combination is then printed with the CMYK/Grayscale Source setting that you choose, such as SWOP or DIC. The color model used by your application determines the methods available for choosing colors, as well as the way color data is transmitted to the Color Server: • Office applications, such as word processing, spreadsheet, and presentation graphics applications, use the RGB color model. They typically transmit only RGB data to the Color Server. • Illustration applications use both the RGB and CMYK color models, but typically transmit only CMYK data to the Color Server. • Pixel-editing applications use both the RGB and CMYK color models. They transmit RGB or CMYK data to the Color Server. USING COLOR MANAGEMENT WORKFLOWS 17 Optimizing for output type You can use the Color Server for on-demand color printing and color proofing. On-demand color printing refers to those jobs for which the Color Server is the final print device. Printing jobs to the Color Server in preparation for printing on an offset press is referred to as color proofing. Both types of Color Server print jobs can use RGB, CMYK, and spot colors. NOTE: The term “on-demand” applies to producing printed output when it is needed. You may be familiar with the term “short-run,” which usually applies to the volume of a printing task. Although these terms do not mean exactly the same thing, “on-demand” in this document applies also to short-run printing scenarios. Because you can print as many pages as you need and reprint jobs quickly, the Color Server performs equally well in either environment. The type of printing you plan for a document, on-demand color printing on the Color Server versus color proofing for eventual printing on an offset press, determines the way you define colors, as well as the print option settings you choose. • For on-demand color printing on the Color Server, use any application and define colors in RGB or CMYK. If your application supports it, you can also choose colors from the PANTONE color library. Choose the appropriate settings for print options affecting color output (for descriptions of the print options, see Color Printing). • For color proofing, use a PostScript-defined color in CMYK or choose colors from color libraries, such as the PANTONE color library. Placed objects can also be defined in RGB or CMYK. Choose the appropriate settings for print options affecting color output (see Color Printing). NOTE: The Color Server allows you to use RGB or CMYK data when printing proofs for an offset press run. However, sending data to an imagesetter usually requires CMYK data. Characteristics of on-demand jobs Characteristics of offset proofs Bright, saturated colors are often desirable. Require the printed colors to match those from another set of CMYK printing conditions. Colors are achieved using the full range of colors available, referred to as the full gamut of the printer or, more simply, device CMYK. Colors that are specified for an offset press require CMYK simulation that is optimized for proofing on the printer. USING COLOR MANAGEMENT WORKFLOWS 18 Maintaining color accuracy For the colors you see on your monitor to match those on your printed output, they must go through color management, including precise calibration of your monitor and Color Server. If viewing colors on the monitor is critical, consider using a professional profiling software package and instrument, such as the EFI Color Profiler Suite, to create a monitor profile. A monitor profile enables the application to compensate for the color behavior of the monitor when displaying colors. As a result, colors previewed on the monitor more closely match the colors in your printed output. If you are not equipped or inclined to maintain accurate monitor color management, you can opt for an easier approach. Determine which is more important to you: printed colors or on-screen colors. • If printed colors are your priority, choose colors from printed samples. By using sample colors, you ensure that your printed output remains consistent, regardless of how the colors appear on different monitors. Print the palette of available colors from business applications and select colors from the printed samples. Color reference files are included on the User Software CD or DVD. (For more information, see “Color matching with office applications” on page 20 and “Color matching with PostScript applications” on page 24.) You can also print color charts from the Color Server and select colors by name or number from the printed samples. Advanced applications allow you to define colors in the easier-to-control spot and CMYK color spaces. For more information about color selection, see “Choosing colors” on page 15. • If on-screen (displayed) colors are more important, trust your eyes and your monitor. Visually select colors on your monitor, but be aware that colors are optimized only for your monitor. When the document is opened on other monitors, the colors may look different. Even though printed colors may not match those on your monitor, they still print to the Color Server with good results. MANAGING COLOR IN OFFICE APPLICATIONS 19 MANAGING COLOR IN OFFICE APPLICATIONS The ColorWise color management system provides complete color management for jobs printed from office applications and other applications that do not generate PostScript. This chapter provides instructions for printing color documents from applications such as word processing, spreadsheet, and presentation graphics applications. Use these instructions with the Microsoft Office applications. Using office applications The Color Server must receive PostScript instructions to print a document. Many applications do not create these PostScript instructions, relying on the printer driver to create them. Included in this category are most word processing, spreadsheet, and presentation graphics applications. These applications use operating system features to render images for display or printing. The term “office applications” is used in this document to refer to these types of applications. All office applications handle color similarly, using the same RGB color model used for the color monitor. Most office applications allow you to choose colors from a palette of preselected colors. Some allow you to add new colors to the palette using a color picker. Although some applications allow you to specify color using the CMYK, HSL, and HSV color models, these applications always send RGB color data to the Color Server. (An exception to this is a CMYK EPS format file placed in a document, which is sent as CMYK data.) When working with color in office applications, consider the following: • The range of colors that can be displayed in RGB on your monitor is much larger than the range of colors that can be printed on your printer. When you print the document, out-of-gamut RGB colors are mapped to the colors your printer can produce. • Office applications send only RGB data to the Color Server. You control the rendering style of the color conversion with your selection of a rendering intent. Each rendering intent uses a different color rendering style and has a different way of mapping unprintable colors to the color gamut of your printer. For more information about color rendering intents, see Color Printing. MANAGING COLOR IN OFFICE APPLICATIONS 20 Color matching with office applications Your Color Server user software includes two RGB color reference pages, a Microsoft Word file and a Microsoft PowerPoint file. You can print these files using different RGB print options to see how the colors appear when printed to the Color Server. For best results, print the color reference page using the same print options you plan to use for your final document. Select the colors that you want to use from the printed version of the RGB color reference page and use those colors in your document. Working with office applications Before printing from these applications, make sure that the appropriate printer driver and the Color Server PPD (PostScript Printer Description) are installed on your computer, as described in Printing. Defining colors Office applications use the RGB color model. The only way to use CMYK or PANTONE colors is to define them in Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) format files with an illustration or page layout application, and then place these files in Microsoft Office documents. Colors in EPS files are preserved until they reach the Color Server (assuming no PostScript color management information was included). Office applications display EPS files at low resolution, but the EPS objects are printed at full resolution. In general, use EPS files only when RGB colors are impractical in your specific workflow. EPS files are useful when large or complex objects must be printed at full resolution or exceed the memory allocation of some office applications. RGB Color Reference (Microsoft PowerPoint) MANAGING COLOR IN OFFICE APPLICATIONS 21 Working with imported files Your application may allow you to import a variety of file formats. If you encounter printing problems when using other imported file formats, such as TIFF and PICT, EPS files are recommended. NOTE: If you cannot import EPS elements, it may be necessary to perform a “custom install” of your office applications. Even when there are no user-defined color management options within office applications, color conversions occur when you import objects or page elements that were not defined in RGB. To avoid such conversions with imported files, use the EPS file format for non-RGB artwork that is to be imported into office applications. All RGB objects placed in a document are affected by the settings you choose for the RGB print options. Mixing imported object types (Advanced color management) If you place multiple RGB objects, mixed non-photographic and photographic, into an office application file, a single rendering intent may not optimize output for all the objects. In this case, you can have the photographic objects bypass the rendering intent altogether. To accomplish this, open the photographic object in CMYK mode with a pixel-editing application, such as Adobe Photoshop, save the object in an EPS format file, and then import it into the document. Selecting options when printing With regard to Color Server printing, all office applications behave in the same manner. To specify print options and color management settings, follow the instructions in Color Printing. To specify these options, you must use a PostScript Level 2 (or later) printer driver, such as an Adobe PostScript printer driver. Because office applications send RGB data to the Color Server, your choice of RGB print option settings is important. Specify the appropriate RGB print options for the desired color effect (see Color Printing). MANAGING COLOR IN OFFICE APPLICATIONS 22 Output profiles All color data in a job is affected by the output profile on the Color Server. This profile may be the one designed for your device and shipped with the Color Server, or it may be a custom profile created at your site (see Color Printing). If necessary, print the Test Page to see which profile is the active default on the Color Server. Ensuring color accuracy when you save a file To ensure color accuracy, take the following steps: • When saving CMYK EPS files, do not include PostScript color management information. This minimizes the risk of conflicting data and multiple color conversions. PostScript color management causes your CMYK colors to be interpreted by the Color Server as though they were supplied in the Lab color space and, as a result, processed by RGB print options, rather than your CMYK Source and CMYK Processing Method settings. • Include ICC color information in files. ColorWise does not conflict with this information, and such data is useful for identifying the specific color space used by your files. • Do not include halftone and transfer functions. • Turn off color management in the printer driver. On Windows computers, on the Color Management tab of the printer’s Properties, make sure that no color profiles are associated with the printer. On Mac OS computers, in the ColorSync settings of the printer driver, set the Color Conversion option to In Printer and the Quartz Filter option to None. MANAGING COLOR IN POSTSCRIPT APPLICATIONS 23 MANAGING COLOR IN POSTSCRIPT APPLICATIONS This chapter provides guidelines for using applications that can write their own PostScript, such as some illustration, pixel editing, and page layout applications. For information about using specific applications, see “Managing Color in Adobe Photoshop” on page 28, “Managing Color in Page Layout Applications” on page 38, or “Managing Color in Illustration Applications” on page 47. Working with PostScript applications Most applications used for illustration, pixel editing, and page layout can create the PostScript information they send to a PostScript printer or save in PostScript files. Adobe Illustrator, Photoshop, Adobe InDesign, and QuarkXPress are all PostScript applications. PostScript applications work with color in many different ways. Most allow you to choose process colors (by entering percentages for cyan, magenta, yellow, and black), as well as named colors from a spot color system, such as PANTONE. When you print composites, these applications send process-color equivalents for named spot colors to the Color Server. In some applications, you can also choose colors using the RGB, HSB, HSL, or other color models. Generally, PostScript applications send color information to the Color Server as CMYK data. An exception to this is an RGB object placed in a document, which is sent directly to the Color Server (unless you specify special color management settings in the application). In addition, some PostScript applications that allow you to define colors in RGB or other color models also send data to the Color Server in those color spaces. NOTE: If your Color Server supports the Postflight application, you can use PostFlight to analyze the color spaces used in a particular job. Color controls in PostScript applications are typically designed for printing on an offset press. Some adjustments may be required for printing to the Color Server. Displayed versions of colors you choose in these applications may not match Color Server output exactly, and named colors may not print accurately on the Color Server, since these colors typically require custom inks. MANAGING COLOR IN POSTSCRIPT APPLICATIONS 24 Color matching with PostScript applications All PostScript applications support CMYK. Some also support RGB and other color models based on monitor display values. PostScript applications also allow you to choose named colors using one or more color libraries, such as PANTONE (see page 25). We highly recommend that you use printed color reference pages to ensure predictable color printing results with the Color Server or match your Color Server output to colors produced by other printers. Using color reference pages to match color Your Color Server user software includes several color reference pages. By choosing colors for your documents from these printed reference pages and specifying the corresponding CMYK values, you ensure that you print the same color from your device. NOTE: For best results, calibrate the Color Server before printing the reference pages. NOTE: Using the reference pages does not match monitor colors to printed colors. For this, you must use a color management system and calibrate your monitor. Using the CMYK Color Reference Use the CMYK Color Reference included with your Color Server user software to see how various cyan, magenta, yellow, and black combinations look when printed on your printer. To print the CMYK Color Reference, download the file to a recently calibrated Color Server. The printed pages display groups of color patches in graduated combinations of yellow, magenta, and cyan, and smaller patches that include 25%, 50%, and 75% black. Use these pages to pick colors and specify process color values in your application. The file is included on the User Software CD or DVD. MANAGING COLOR IN POSTSCRIPT APPLICATIONS 25 Using the PANTONE reference Use the PANTONE reference (Process Simulation of PANTONE Solid Coated Colors) included with your Color Server user software to help ensure predictable results with colors chosen from the PANTONE color library. The information printed by this reference varies depending on the Spot Color Matching setting. • Spot Color Matching On prints patches that simulate the spot color with the closest equivalent available using the CMYK toners of the copier/printer connected to the Color Server. The CMYK values used to produce the color, as well as the PANTONE color name/number, are printed below each patch. • Spot Color Matching Off prints patches of the CMYK equivalents of PANTONE colors as defined by PANTONE. (These are the same CMYK values defined in applications that include PANTONE libraries.) The CMYK values used to produce the color, as well as the PANTONE color name/number, are printed below each patch. To print the reference, download the file to the Color Server. The file is included on the User Software CD or DVD. If the default Spot Color Matching setting on the Color Server is not the setting that you want to use for printing the PANTONE colors, download the file to the Hold queue, and then override the Spot Color Matching setting using Command WorkStation. For more information about using Command WorkStation, see Command WorkStation Help. Working with imported objects You can import objects into documents created in illustration applications (such as Illustrator) and page layout applications (such as QuarkXPress). The recommended formats for objects imported into page layout documents are EPS (also known as EPSF) and TIFF (Tag Image File Format). If you encounter a problem using a TIFF format object, use the EPS file format. Support for importing other file formats may be provided by individual applications. All RGB objects placed in a document are affected by the RGB print options. The ColorWise CMS applies the specified RGB/Lab Source setting to all RGB data, and then uses the specified rendering intent to perform a color conversion. An exception to this occurs if you assign ICC profiles to RGB objects using the application’s color management tools (see the following section). In this case, the application performs the color conversion of the object and sends CMYK data to the Color Server. MANAGING COLOR IN POSTSCRIPT APPLICATIONS 26 Mixing object types (Advanced color management) If you place multiple RGB objects, mixed non-photographic and photographic, in a file, a single rendering intent may not optimize output for all the objects. In this case, you can have the photographic objects bypass the rendering intent altogether. To accomplish this, separate the object into CMYK data with a pixel-editing application, such as Photoshop, and perform color correction. Save the file as an EPS or TIFF format file, and then import it into the document. You can save the RGB object in TIFF format and assign it an ICC profile and rendering intent when you import it into the document, if your application supports this feature. Using CMYK source profiles You can specify a CMYK source profile and a CMYK processing method for a job (see Color Printing). The CMYK print options affect all CMYK color data sent by the page layout or illustration application, and can also affect RGB data in a page layout application if the Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source option is enabled. • If the document contains CMYK objects that were separated for an offset press standard, apply the corresponding CMYK source profile. For example, for objects separated for SWOP, choose SWOP as the CMYK source profile. NOTE: If you print separations to the Color Server and choose to use the Combine Separations feature in conjunction with the Full (Source GCR) or Full (Output GCR) CMYK processing methods, the result may not match that of the same page printed as composite. • If the document contains CMYK objects that were separated according to the color characteristics of a custom ICC profile (not a press standard profile), specify the corresponding profile as the CMYK source profile on the Color Server. For more information about copying CMYK source profiles to the Color Server with Command WorkStation, see Command WorkStation Help. MANAGING COLOR IN POSTSCRIPT APPLICATIONS 27 Using application-defined halftones If your site has installed the Graphic Arts Package (not available for all Color Server models), you can define halftones from several PostScript applications and use them when printing. The results may vary, depending on the application. To define a halftone, use the application to adjust the Frequency and Angle values of the halftone. When you print the job, choose Application Defined for the halftone screen print option. The Frequency and Angle settings in the Application Defined halftone are used regardless of whether the setting for Combine Separations is set to On or Off. For special instructions on printing separations with Photoshop, see “Selecting options when printing” on page 34. NOTE: In general, using halftones is not recommended, because the printed output will have visible dots of toner, rather than smooth blends. Use halftones only when necessary to achieve a specific style of printed output. Ensuring color accuracy when you save a file To ensure color accuracy, take the following steps: • When saving CMYK EPS files, do not include PostScript color management information. This minimizes the risk of conflicting data and multiple color conversions. PostScript color management causes your CMYK colors to be interpreted by the Color Server as though they were supplied in the Lab color space and, as a result, processed by RGB print options, rather than your CMYK Source and CMYK Processing Method settings. • Include ICC color information in files. ColorWise does not conflict with this information, and such data is useful for identifying the specific color space used by your files. • Do not include halftone and transfer functions. • Turn off color management in the printer driver. On Windows computers, on the Color Management tab of the printer’s Properties, make sure that no color profiles are associated with the printer. On Mac OS computers, in the ColorSync settings of the printer driver, set the Color Conversion option to In Printer and the Quartz Filter option to None. MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 28 MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP This chapter covers features of Adobe Photoshop CS3 for Windows and Mac OS. The illustrations show the Windows user interface, but the information and instructions apply equally to the Mac OS version of Photoshop, unless otherwise specified. Before using Photoshop, install the RGB source profile and CMYK source profile or output profile that you will use when printing to the Color Server. For more information about transferring profiles to or from the Color Server, see Command WorkStation Help. Before printing from Photoshop, make sure that the appropriate printer driver and Color Server PPD (PostScript Printer Description) are installed on your computer, as described in Printing. Specifying color settings The following sections outline the recommended color settings for Photoshop in a Color Server workflow. These color settings include: Working Spaces: Default color spaces used when working with RGB, CMYK, grayscale, and spot colors. ICC color profiles describe the gamut and color characteristics of these working spaces. Color Management Policies: Instructions that tell Photoshop what to do when it encounters color data from a color space other than the specified working space. Configuring Photoshop color settings Photoshop uses a sophisticated CMS that handles document colors for a variety of colormanaged workflows. By customizing color settings, you specify the amount of color management that you want to use while working in Photoshop. MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 29 TO SPECIFY COLOR SETTINGS FOR PHOTOSHOP 1 Choose Color Settings from the Edit menu. The Color Settings dialog box appears. NOTE: If More Options appears (rather than Fewer Options), click More Options. 2 Choose the desired working space profile for each color mode in the Working Spaces area. A working space specifies the color profile for documents that have no color profile associations or documents that are newly created. It also defines the color space of a document converted to RGB, CMYK, or Grayscale color modes, and the spot colors in a document. MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 30 Choose an appropriate ICC profile to embed when saving a file for each color space. Use the following guidelines for specifying working spaces: • For RGB, choose the profile for the default RGB color space used by the Color Server, for example, Fiery RGB or EFIRGB. New RGB documents you create in Photoshop will use this working space. • For CMYK, choose a profile that describes your target press (such as SWOP, DIC, or Japan Color) if you are a prepress user. If you are a user who prints final output, choose an output profile that describes the device connected to the Color Server. To use a devicespecific output profile, you must copy the profile from the Color Server to your computer (see Command WorkStation Help). New CMYK documents you create in Photoshop will use the specified working space. • For guidelines on specifying the Gray working space, see the documentation that accompanies Photoshop. 3 In the Color Management Policies area, choose Preserve Embedded Profiles from the RGB, CMYK, and Gray menus. 4 Select the following options: Profile Mismatches: Ask When Opening, Ask When Pasting Missing Profiles: Ask When Opening These options allow you to override the color management policies when opening documents or importing color data. We recommend that you use these settings so that you are notified before any application color management is applied. 5 In the Conversion Options area, choose settings for converting between color spaces. Choose Adobe (ACE) from the Engine menu to use the built-in color management engine for Photoshop. Choose a rendering intent from the Intent menu that optimizes the color quality of the conversion. For information about choosing the rendering intent, see the documentation that accompanies Photoshop. Select the Use Black Point Compensation and Use Dither (8-bit/channel images) options to optimize the quality of color conversions. MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 31 6 Clear the Desaturate Monitor Colors By and Blend RGB Colors Using Gamma options in the Advanced Controls area. Clearing these options helps to ensure a match between your monitor display and the printed output. 7 Click Save to save the current group of color settings. The Save dialog box appears. 8 Name the settings file, accept the default saved location, and then click Save. Switch to your saved settings at any time by choosing the group name from the Settings menu at the top of the Color Settings dialog box. NOTE: You can apply the saved color settings in other Adobe Creative Suite applications. You can also apply the saved color settings to all Adobe Creative Suite applications at once using Adobe Bridge. 9 Click OK to apply the settings and close the Color Settings dialog box. Saving files from Photoshop Before saving a file from Photoshop, perform any necessary rotating, cropping, and resizing. This speeds processing when printing from the application in which the object is placed. When saving a document, you have the option to embed a color profile in the document. If you will send the document to the Color Server, we recommend that you disable this option. Choosing a file format We recommend that you use EPS or TIFF file formats to save RGB objects that will be imported into other documents and printed to the Color Server. You can import EPS and TIFF files into virtually all page layout applications. NOTE: Although TIFF files generally display better when imported into other applications, their color and resolution characteristics may be altered by the application into which they are imported. EPS files are not modified by the applications into which they are imported. MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 32 TO SAVE A DOCUMENT FROM PHOTOSHOP 1 Choose Save As from the File menu. The Save As dialog box appears. 2 Specify settings in the Save As dialog box. • Browse to a location for the document. • Specify a file name and format. • Clear the ICC Profile option (Windows) or Embed Color Profile option (Mac OS). MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 33 3 Click Save. If you chose Photoshop EPS as the format, the EPS Options dialog box appears. 4 Specify EPS options, and then click OK. • Choose a TIFF preview option. A TIFF preview is compatible with Windows and Mac OS computers. • Do not select the PostScript Color Management option. For more information about PostScript color management, see the following section. • Do not select Include Transfer Function or Include Halftone Screen. NOTE: If you choose JPEG encoding, save a backup of the original object with Binary encoding until you see the printed results of the JPEG file. Occasionally, the compression used for JPEG encoding produces unwanted artifacts. If you see unexpected results in the printed output of a JPEG file, revert to Binary encoding. If you experience problems printing the document in which you placed the object, substitute an ASCII version of the same object and reprint the document. Binary encoding is much more compact than ASCII encoding, but occasionally causes printing problems with some system configurations. MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 34 Selecting options when printing You can print RGB or CMYK objects from Photoshop. • When you print an RGB object, you choose whether the conversion to CMYK is performed by the Color Server (using ColorWise RGB print options), PostScript (using the PostScript Color Management option), or Photoshop built-in color management. • When you print a CMYK object, you can print composites or color separations. NOTE: Make sure that the Color Server Combine Separations print option is set to Off. To print separations, use the Separation option in the Photoshop pane of the print dialog box. For instructions, see the documentation that accompanies Photoshop. TO PRINT OBJECTS FROM PHOTOSHOP 1 Choose Print (or Print with Preview in Photoshop CS2) from the File menu. The Print dialog box appears. 2 Choose Output. 1 Choose Output 2 Choose Encoding method 1 2 MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 35 3 Choose an Encoding method. NOTE: If you choose JPEG encoding, save a backup of the original object with Binary encoding until you see the printed results of the JPEG file. Occasionally, the compression used for JPEG encoding produces unwanted artifacts. If you see unexpected results in the printed output of a JPEG file, revert to Binary encoding. 4 Choose Color Management. 5 Choose No Color Management from the Color Handling menu to specify the color space for printing the object. Photoshop does not convert object data to another color space before sending it to the Color Server. 6 Click Print. The operating system Print dialog box appears. 7 Windows: Click Preferences, and then click the Fiery Printing tab in the dialog box that appears. 8 Select the desired print options. For information about setting ColorWise print options, see Color Printing. 9 Windows: Click OK. 10 Click Print. 1 Choose Color Management 2 Choose Color Handling 1 2 MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 36 Advanced tips for using PostScript color management Use the following information to implement alternative, more complex, color workflows with Photoshop. Saving EPS documents with PostScript color management If you select the PostScript Color Management option (in the EPS Options dialog box) when you save a CMYK or RGB EPS file, Photoshop embeds PostScript color information, which is independent of ICC profiles, in the resulting document. This information is intended for PostScript devices like the Color Server. Printing RGB EPS files saved with PostScript color management When you print an RGB EPS file that contains an embedded profile to the Color Server, you can use the working space information from the embedded RGB profile as an RGB source definition for Color Server rendering intents. To use this source color space information from the embedded profile with Color Server rendering intents, choose None as the ColorWise RGB/Lab Source when you print. This applies when you print directly from Photoshop or when the same RGB EPS file is output from another application. To override the embedded profile in an EPS file using an RGB source profile on the Color Server, choose anything except None as the Color Server RGB source profile. Printing RGB objects with Photoshop PostScript color management If you select an RGB color space and decide to use PostScript color management, Photoshop sends RGB data to the Color Server along with the PostScript color information defining this RGB color space. When you select the PostScript Color Management option, a rendering intent is used to perform color conversions to CMYK. NOTE: The included RGB source color space information is overridden by the ColorWise RGB/Lab Source setting, unless it is set to None. The ColorWise Rendering Intent option specified takes effect if the ColorWise RGB/Lab Source option is set to None. For fastest print times, choose JPEG encoding, but inspect printed output carefully for unwanted artifacts that may appear as a result of JPEG compression. If you see unexpected results in the printed output, reprint the job using Binary or ASCII encoding. MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE PHOTOSHOP 37 Printing CMYK EPS files saved with PostScript color management If you select the Photoshop PostScript Color Management option when you save a CMYK EPS object, Photoshop embeds PostScript color information that defines the CMYK source color space of the object. When you print a CMYK EPS file that contains PostScript color information to the Color Server, RGB print options are used instead of ColorWise CMYK source profile and processing method options. Choose the appropriate setting for the Rendering Intent option. Printing CMYK objects with Photoshop PostScript color management If you select a CMYK color space and decide to use PostScript color management, Photoshop sends CMYK data to the Color Server along with the PostScript color information defining this CMYK color space. When you select the PostScript Color Management option, a rendering intent is used to perform color conversions to the CMYK color space of the Color Server. The destination color space for the rendering intents is determined by the Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source print option. If the Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source option is enabled, the CMYK object is printed according to all specified CMYK/Grayscale Source and CMYK Processing Method settings. If the Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source option is not enabled, the CMYK object is converted to the CMYK color space of the selected output profile. Setting the Color Server print option Spot Color Matching to On has an effect only if you use the Photoshop Multi-Channel feature to define spot channels, and then save the object in EPS format and open it in another application. For more information, see the documentation that accompanies Photoshop. Photoshop converts spot colors to CMYK values when you work in CMYK mode. • If the object was separated for an offset press standard, apply the corresponding CMYK/ Grayscale Source setting. For example, if the object is separated for SWOP, choose SWOP as the CMYK/Grayscale Source setting. • If Photoshop is configured for a custom separation using an ICC profile, choose the corresponding profile for the ColorWise CMYK/Grayscale Source option. The previous custom CMYK setting requires that the same profile used for separation in Photoshop also reside on the Color Server. For more information about downloading CMYK Source profiles to the Color Server with Command WorkStation, see Command WorkStation Help. MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS 38 MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS This chapter provides instructions for printing color documents from Adobe InDesign CS3 and QuarkXPress 7 for Windows and Mac OS. The illustrations show the Windows user interface, but the information and instructions apply equally to the Mac OS version of each application, unless otherwise specified. Before using these applications, install the RGB source profile and the CMYK source profile or output profile that you will use when printing to the Color Server. For more information about transferring profiles to or from the Color Server, see Command WorkStation Help. Before printing from these applications, make sure that the appropriate printer driver and Color Server PPD (PostScript Printer Description) are installed on your computer, as described in Printing. MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS 39 Adobe InDesign The following sections outline the recommended settings for using Adobe InDesign CS3 with the Color Server. InDesign color settings When using ColorWise color management, turn off the InDesign color management features. TO DISABLE INDESIGN COLOR MANAGEMENT 1 Choose Color Settings from the Edit menu. The Color Settings dialog box appears. 2 Select Advanced Mode. In Advanced Mode, a more extensive list of options is displayed. MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS 40 3 Choose the desired working space profile for each mode in the Working Spaces area. Use the following guidelines for specifying working spaces: • For RGB, choose the profile for the default RGB color space used by the Color Server, for example, Fiery RGB or EFIRGB. • For CMYK, choose a profile that describes your target press (such as SWOP, DIC, or Japan Color) if you are a prepress user. If you are a user who prints final output, choose an output profile that describes the device connected to the Color Server. To use a devicespecific output profile, you must copy the profile from the Color Server to your computer (see Command WorkStation Help). 4 In the Color Management Policies area, choose Preserve Embedded Profiles from the RGB and CMYK menus. 5 Select the following options: Profile Mismatches: Ask When Opening, Ask When Pasting Missing Profiles: Ask When Opening These options allow you to override the color management policies when opening documents or importing color data. We recommend that you use these settings so that you are notified before any application color management is applied. 6 In the Conversion Options area, choose settings for converting between color spaces. Choose Adobe (ACE) from the Engine menu to use the built-in color management engine for InDesign. Choose a rendering intent from the Intent menu that will optimize the color quality of the conversion. For information about choosing the rendering intent, see the documentation that accompanies InDesign. Select the Use Black Point Compensation option to optimize the quality of color conversions. 7 Click Save to save the current group of color settings. The Save dialog box appears. 8 Name the settings file, accept the default saved location, and click Save. Switch to your saved settings at any time by choosing the group name from the Settings menu at the top of the Color Settings dialog box. NOTE: You can apply the saved color settings in other Adobe Creative Suite applications. You can also apply the saved color settings to all Adobe Creative Suite applications at once using Adobe Bridge. 9 Click OK to apply the settings and close the Color settings dialog box. MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS 41 Importing objects All RGB objects placed in a document, except for RGB TIFF objects, are affected by your RGB print settings. For best results with placed objects, follow the instructions in “Working with imported objects” on page 25. Disable InDesign color management when placing objects in a document. TO DISABLE INDESIGN COLOR MANAGEMENT WHEN IMPORTING OBJECTS 1 Choose Place from the File menu. The Place dialog box appears. 2 Select the Show Import Options option. 3 Select the file that you want to import and click Open. 4 Click the Color tab. 5 Choose Use Document Default from the Profile menu. 6 Choose Use Document Image Intent from the Rendering Intent menu. 7 Click OK. MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS 42 Selecting options when printing Use the standard Color Server printer driver interface to select print options from InDesign. TO SET PRINT OPTIONS FROM INDESIGN 1 Choose Print from the File menu. 2 Choose the Color Server device name from the Printer menu. 3 Select Output. Output options appear. 4 Choose Composite Leave Unchanged from the Color menu. 1 Choose the device name 2 Select Output 3 Choose Color setting 1 2 3 MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS 43 5 Select Graphics. Graphics options appear. 6 Choose Level 3 from the PostScript menu. If you encounter problems, you can also use Level 2. 7 Select Color Management. Color management options appear. 1 Select Graphics 2 Choose PostScript setting 1 2 1 Select Color Management 2 Choose Color Handling setting 1 2 MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS 44 8 Confirm that Color Handling is set to No Color Management. 9 Click Setup (Windows) or Printer (Mac OS) at the bottom of the dialog box. The operating system Print dialog box appears. 10 Windows: Click Preferences, and then click the Fiery Printing tab in the dialog box that appears. 11 Select the desired print options. For information about setting ColorWise print options, see Color Printing. 12 Windows: Click OK. 13 Click Print, and then click Print again. MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS 45 QuarkXPress Importing objects Only RGB objects saved in EPS format are affected by RGB print options. For best results with placed objects, follow the instructions in “Working with imported objects” on page 25. Selecting options when printing The following procedure provides instructions on printing files to the Color Server. TO SET PRINT OPTIONS IN QUARKXPRESS 1 Choose Print from the File menu. 2 Choose the Color Server device from the Printer menu. 3 Choose the Color Server PPD from the PPD menu. 1 Choose the Color Server 2 Choose PPD for the Color Server 1 2 MANAGING COLOR IN PAGE LAYOUT APPLICATIONS 46 4 Select Color. Color management options appear. 5 Choose Composite from the Mode menu. 6 Choose As Is from the Setup menu. Use this setting if you want the color managed by the Color Server. This means that each color in the document should be described in the space from which the color was created. 7 Click Properties. 8 Click the Fiery Printing tab in the dialog box that appears. The standard printer driver interface for the Color Server appears. 9 If the document contains spot colors, choose the appropriate Spot Color Matching setting. 10 Select the desired print options, and then click OK. For information about setting ColorWise print options, see Color Printing. 11 Click Print. Optional color management from QuarkXPress If you have color management requirements that are not offered by ColorWise, such as managing color on devices not controlled by the Color Server, consider using the QuarkXPress color management features. For more information, see the documentation that accompanies QuarkXPress. 1 Select Color 2 Choose Mode setting 3 Choose Setup setting 1 2 3 MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS 47 MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS This chapter provides instructions for using Illustrator for Windows and Mac OS and CorelDRAW for Windows. The illustrations show the Windows user interface, but the information and instructions apply equally to the Mac OS version of Illustrator, unless otherwise specified. You can print directly from an illustration application or use it to create and save files that will be imported into a page layout document. To print from an illustration application, use the printer driver and print settings recommended in Color Printing. As a general rule, use the EPS file format when saving files with an illustration application. When an EPS file is imported into another application, the color information in the imported object is not changed by the application. Before using these applications, install the RGB source profile and CMYK source profile or output profile that you will use when printing to the Color Server. For more information about transferring profiles to or from the Color Server, see Command WorkStation Help. Before printing from these applications, make sure that the appropriate printer driver and Color Server PPD (PostScript Printer Description) are installed on your computer, as described in Printing. NOTE: This document provides instructions for printing composites only. For information about printing color separations, see the documentation that accompanies the application. Adobe Illustrator The following sections provide guidelines for working with Adobe Illustrator CS3. Note about color models in Illustrator In Illustrator, you can set the Document Color Mode to RGB color or CMYK color. All elements in a file are created in the selected color model. When you print the file, the data is sent to the Color Server in the color model that you specified. MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS 48 Illustrator color settings Illustrator uses a sophisticated color management system that can handle both RGB and CMYK colors for a variety of color-managed workflows. By customizing color settings, you specify the amount of color management that you want to use while working in Illustrator. Illustrator color settings include the following: Working spaces: Default color spaces to use when working with RGB and CMYK documents. ICC color profiles describe the gamut and color characteristics of these working spaces. Color management policies: Instructions that tell Illustrator what to do when it encounters color data from a color space other than the specified working space. The following procedure outlines the recommended color settings for Illustrator in a Color Server workflow. TO SPECIFY COLOR SETTINGS 1 Choose Color Settings from the Edit menu. The Color Settings dialog box appears. 2 Select Advanced Mode. In Advanced Mode, a more extensive list of options is displayed. MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS 49 3 Choose the appropriate working space profile for each mode in the Working Spaces area. • For RGB, choose the profile for the default RGB color space used by the Color Server, for example, Fiery RGB or EFIRGB. New RGB documents you create in Illustrator will use this working space. • For CMYK, choose a profile that describes your target press (such as SWOP, DIC, or Japan Color) if you are a prepress user. If you are a user who prints final output, choose an output profile that describes the device connected to the Color Server. To use a devicespecific output profile, you must copy the profile from the Color Server to your computer (see Command WorkStation Help). New CMYK documents you create in Illustrator will use the specified working space. 4 In the Color Management Policies area, choose Preserve Embedded Profiles from the RGB and CMYK menus. 5 Select the following options: Profile Mismatches: Ask When Opening, Ask When Pasting Missing Profiles: Ask When Opening These options allow you to override the color management policies when opening documents or importing color data. We recommend that you use these settings so that you are notified before any application color management is applied. 6 In the Conversion Options area, choose settings for converting between color spaces. Choose Adobe (ACE) from the Engine menu to use the built-in color management engine for Illustrator. Choose a rendering intent from the Intent menu that optimizes the color quality of the conversion. For information about choosing the rendering intent, see the documentation that accompanies Illustrator. Select the Use Black Point Compensation option to optimize the quality of color conversions. 7 Click Save to save the current group of color settings. The Save dialog box appears. 8 Name the settings file, accept the default saved location, and then click Save. Switch to your saved settings at any time by choosing the group name from the Settings menu at the top of the Color Settings dialog box. NOTE: You can apply the saved color settings in other Adobe Creative Suite applications. You can also apply the saved color settings to all Adobe Creative Suite applications at once using Adobe Bridge. 9 Click OK to apply the settings and close the Color settings dialog box. MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS 50 Saving files for importing into other documents When saving files in Illustrator for importing into other types of documents, use the EPS file format. Illustrator can save color information in both RGB and CMYK. The ColorWise RGB print options affect color output of RGB artwork saved in Illustrator EPS and imported into other kinds of documents (even when both RGB and CMYK artwork exist in the same file). In the case of Illustrator files imported into Photoshop, however, vector data from the Illustrator file is rasterized into bitmap (or raster) format in Photoshop, and the final color space of the bitmap data is determined by the color mode that you set in Photoshop. Specifying print options The following procedure explains how to set print options when printing a document from Illustrator to the Color Server. TO SET PRINT OPTIONS IN ILLUSTRATOR 1 Choose Print from the File menu. The Print dialog box appears. 2 Choose the Color Server device from the Printer menu. 3 Select Color Management. Color management options appear. 4 Choose Let Illustrator determine colors from the Color Handling menu. 1 Choose the device name 2 Select Color Management 3 Choose Color Handling setting 4 Choose Printer Profile 1 2 3 4 MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS 51 5 Make sure that the Printer Profile setting matches the displayed Document Profile setting. 6 Select Output. Output options appear. 7 Choose Composite from the Mode menu. 1 Select Output 2 Choose Mode setting 1 2 MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS 52 8 Select Graphics. Graphics options appear. 9 Choose Language Level 3 from the PostScript menu. If you encounter problems, you can also use Level 2. 10 Click Setup (Windows) or Printer (Mac OS) at the bottom of the dialog box. The operating system Print dialog box appears. 11 Windows: Click Preferences, and then click the Fiery Printing tab in the dialog box that appears. 12 If necessary, click ColorWise and select RGB print settings. Specify these settings only if your CMYK document contains placed RGB objects. In all other cases, colors remain unaffected by the settings. 13 If the document contains spot colors, choose the appropriate Spot Color Matching setting. 14 Select the desired print options. For information about setting ColorWise print options, see Color Printing. 15 Windows: Click OK. 16 Click Print, and then click Print again. 1 Select Graphics 2 Choose PostScript setting 1 2 MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS 53 Using Illustrator color management If you have color management requirements that are not offered by ColorWise, such as managing color on devices not controlled by the Color Server, consider using the Illustrator color management features. For more information, see the documentation that accompanies Illustrator. CorelDRAW The following sections describe the recommended color settings for CorelDRAW X3 for Windows. Defining colors Any colors defined in CorelDRAW X3 are sent to the device in CMYK, even those colors defined using other color models. For best results, use the color definition methods described in “Color matching with PostScript applications” on page 24. You can control the conversion of RGB colors defined in CorelDRAW by specifying settings in the Color Management dialog box. To display the Color Management dialog box, chooseColor Management from the Tools menu in the CorelDRAW main window. TO DISABLE COLOR MANAGEMENT IN CORELDRAW 1 Choose Color Management from the Tools menu. 2 Choose Color Management Off from the Settings list and click OK. 1 Color Management Off 1 MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS 54 Importing objects All RGB objects placed in a document are affected by the RGB print settings. For best results with placed objects, follow the instructions in “Working with imported objects” on page 25. Saving files for importing into other documents When saving files in CorelDRAW for importing into other types of documents, use the EPS file format. CorelDRAW saves all color information in CMYK, so RGB print options have no effect on color output of artwork saved with CorelDRAW and imported into other kinds of documents. In the case of CorelDRAW files imported into Photoshop, however, vector data from the CorelDRAW file is rasterized into bitmaps in Photoshop, and the final color space of the bitmap data is determined by the color mode that you set in Photoshop. Specifying print options This section explains how to set print options when printing from CorelDRAW to the Color Server. TO SET PRINT OPTIONS IN CORELDRAW 1 Choose Print from the File menu. 2 On the General tab, select the correct print device from the Name list. 1 Print device name appears here 2 Printer driver/PPD name appears here 1 2 MANAGING COLOR IN ILLUSTRATION APPLICATIONS 55 3 On the Misc tab, clear the Apply ICC profile option. If this option is selected, CorelDRAW color management settings are used to convert RGB colors and objects to CMYK. 4 On the General tab, click Properties. The Properties window appears. 5 Click the ColorWise icon, and then click Expert Settings to specify ColorWise print options. 6 If a document contains placed RGB objects, choose RGB print settings for your device. With the exception of placed RGB objects, these settings have no effect on colors printed with CorelDRAW. 7 If the document contains spot colors, choose the appropriate Spot Color Matching setting. 8 Click OK, and then click Print to print the document. Optional color management in CorelDRAW If you have color management requirements that are not offered by ColorWise, such as managing color on devices not controlled by the Color Server, consider using the CorelDRAW color management features. For more information, see the documentation that accompanies CorelDRAW. 1 Clear this option to use ColorWise color management 1 MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE ACROBAT 56 MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE ACROBAT This chapter covers features of Adobe Acrobat 7.0 Professional for Windows and Mac OS. The illustrations show the Windows user interface, but the information and instructions apply equally to the Mac OS version of Acrobat, unless otherwise specified. Before using Acrobat, install the RGB source profile and CMYK source profile or output profile that you will use when printing to the Color Server. For more information about transferring profiles to or from the Color Server, see Command WorkStation Help. Before printing from Acrobat, make sure that the appropriate printer driver and the Color Server PostScript printer description file (PPD) are installed on your computer, as described in Printing. MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE ACROBAT 57 Specifying color settings When using ColorWise color management, turn off the Acrobat color management features. TO SPECIFY COLOR SETTINGS FOR ACROBAT 1 Choose Preferences from the Edit menu (Windows) or Acrobat menu (Mac OS). NOTE: If Enfocus Pitstop is installed, choose Preferences > General from the Edit menu. 2 Select Color Management. Color management preferences appear. 3 Choose the desired working space profile for each color mode in the Working Spaces area. • For RGB, choose the profile for the default RGB color space used by the Color Server, for example, Fiery RGB or EFIRGB. • For CMYK, choose a profile that describes your target press (such as SWOP, DIC, or Japan Color) if you are a prepress user. If you are a user who prints final output, choose an output profile that describes the device connected to the Color Server. To use a devicespecific output profile, you must copy the profile from the Color Server to your computer (see Command WorkStation Help). • For guidelines on specifying the Grayscale working space, see the documentation that accompanies Acrobat. 4 Clear the Output Intent overrides working spaces option. 5 Click OK. 1 Select Color Management 2 Choose profiles 3 Clear Output Intent overrides working spaces 1 2 3 MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE ACROBAT 58 Selecting options when printing You can use the standard Color Server printer driver interface to select print options from Acrobat. TO PRINT A PDF DOCUMENT FROM ACROBAT 1 Choose Print from the File menu. The Print dialog box appears. 2 Choose the Color Server device from the Name menu (Windows) or Printer menu (Mac OS). 3 Windows: Clear the Print color as black option. 4 Click Advanced. 1 Select Color Server 2 Clear Print color as black 1 2 MANAGING COLOR IN ADOBE ACROBAT 59 5 Select Output. 6 Choose Same as Source (No Color Management) from the Color Profile list. Acrobat does not convert object data to another color space before sending it to the Color Server. 7 Click OK, and then click OK again (Windows) or click Print (Mac OS). 1 Select Output 2 Choose Color Profile 1 2 DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 60 DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER This chapter covers concepts that are basic to printing in color, including: • Properties of color • Printing techniques • Effective use of color • Raster images and vector graphics • File optimization for processing and printing If you are already familiar with color theory and digital color printing, proceed to “Optimizing files for processing and printing” on page 73 for information about optimizing files for printing. The properties of color This section introduces concepts that are basic to color theory. You will encounter some of these concepts (such as hue, saturation, and brightness) when you work with color in applications; others provide useful background information. Color is a complex topic, so consider this a starting point for experimentation and further research. DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 61 The physics of color The human eye can see electromagnetic radiation at wavelengths between 400 nanometers (purplish blue) and 700 nanometers (red). This range is called the visible spectrum of light. We see pure spectral light as intensely saturated or pure colors. Sunlight at midday, which we perceive as white or neutral light, is composed of light from across the visible spectrum in more or less equal proportions. Shining sunlight through a prism separates it into its spectral components, resulting in the familiar rainbow of colors illustrated in the following figure. Like the sun, most light sources we encounter in our daily environment emit a mixture of light wavelengths, although the particular distribution of wavelengths can vary considerably. Light from a tungsten light bulb, for example, contains much less blue light than sunlight. Tungsten light appears white to the human eye, which, up to a point, can adjust to the different light sources. However, color objects appear different under tungsten light than they do in sunlight because of the different spectral makeup of the two light sources. The mixture of light wavelengths emitted by a light source is reflected selectively by different objects. Different mixtures of reflected light appear as different colors. Some of these mixtures appear as relatively saturated colors, but most appear as grays or impure hues of a color. DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 62 CIE color model In the 1930s, the Commission Internationale de l’Eclairage (CIE) defined a standard color space, a way of defining colors in mathematical terms, to help in the communication of color information. This color space is based on research on the nature of color perception. The following CIE chromaticity diagram is a two-dimensional model of color vision. The arc around the top of the horseshoe encompasses the pure, or spectral, colors from blue-violet to red. Although the CIE chromaticity diagram is not perceptually uniform, some areas of the diagram seem to compress color differences relative to others, it is a good tool for illustrating some interesting aspects of color vision. By mixing any two spectral colors in different proportions, we can create all the colors found on the straight line drawn between them in the diagram. It is possible to create the same gray by mixing blue-green and red light or by mixing yellow-green and blue-violet light. This is possible because of a phenomenon peculiar to color vision called metamerism. The eye does not distinguish individual wavelengths of light. Therefore, different combinations of spectral light can produce the same perceived color. Purple colors, which do not exist in the spectrum of pure light, are found at the bottom of the diagram. Purples are mixtures of red and blue light—the opposite ends of the spectrum. Hue, saturation, and brightness A color can be described in terms of three varying characteristics, called the HSB color model: • Hue: Tint (the qualitative aspect of a color—red, green, or orange) • Saturation: The purity of the color • Brightness: Relative position between white and black DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 63 While the CIE chromaticity diagram illustrated earlier conveys hue and saturation, a three-dimensional color model is required to add the brightness component, as illustrated in the following figure. Many computer applications include dialog boxes in which you choose colors by manipulating hue, saturation, and brightness. For example, some applications use a color picker that can be reconfigured according to your preference (as illustrated in the following figure). Brightness Saturation Hue DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 64 Additive and subtractive color systems Color devices used in desktop publishing and printing simulate the range of visible colors using a set of primary colors that are combined to create other colors. There are two methods for creating a range of colors from a set of primary colors. Computer monitors and scanners are based on the additive color model. Printing technologies, including the Color Server and offset presses, are based on the subtractive color model. Additive (RGB) color Color devices that use the additive color model create a range of colors by combining varying amounts of red, green, and blue light. These colors are called the additive primaries (illustrated in the following figure). White is created by adding the maximum amount of red, green, and blue light available. Black occurs wherever all three colors are absent. Grays are created by adding equal amounts of all three color together. Combining varying amounts of any two of the additive primaries creates a third, saturated hue. DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 65 A familiar device that is based on this color model is the computer monitor, illustrated in the following figure. Monitors have red, green, and blue phosphors that emit varying amounts of light to display a given color. Scanners create digital representations of colors by measuring their red, green, and blue components through colored filters. Subtractive (CMY and CMYK) color The subtractive color model is the basis for color printing, color photographic prints, and transparencies. While the additive color model simulates the visible spectrum of color by adding light of three primary hues, the subtractive color model starts with a “white” or neutral light source containing light of many wavelengths. Inks, toners, or other colorants are used to selectively absorb (subtract) certain wavelengths of light that otherwise would be reflected or transmitted by the media in use. DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 66 The subtractive primaries are cyan, magenta, and yellow; they absorb red, green, and blue light, respectively (as illustrated in the following figure). Combining any two subtractive primaries creates a new color that is relatively pure or saturated. For example, you can make red by combining magenta and yellow, which absorb green and blue light, respectively. White occurs when no colorant is applied. In theory, combining all three subtractive primaries yields black, but due to deficiencies of cyan, magenta, and yellow colorants, combining these three primaries actually yields a muddy brown. Black colorant is added to compensate for the deficiencies of cyan, magenta, and yellow colorants. Consequently, color printing uses four process colors: Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and blacK (CMYK). The use of black toner produces neutral solid blacks and allows for improved rendering of black text. DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 67 Understanding color gamut Different color reproduction techniques have different color capabilities, or gamuts. Color transparency films have comparatively large gamuts, as do color monitors. The color gamut that can be produced using process inks or CMYK toners on paper is smaller. This is why some colors that can be displayed on a color monitor, especially bright saturated colors, cannot be reproduced exactly by your Color Server, nor can they be reproduced on a press using process colors. Moreover, different printers have different gamuts. Some colors your printer can produce cannot be reproduced on an offset press, and vice versa. The following figure illustrates this concept of differing gamuts. You must account for the gamut of your printer when designing on a color monitor. When printed, colors that fall outside the printer gamut are “mapped” to printable colors. This process, referred to as gamut mapping, takes place when color data is converted or adjusted to meet the gamut requirements of a printer. The Color Server is specially designed to perform gamut mapping at high speed with high-quality results. It provides these color management features automatically, using either built-in default settings or settings you select for a particular print job. For added flexibility, you can also use the Color Server color management system in combination with the color management systems on Windows and Mac OS computers. Printing techniques Until recently, most color printing was done on printing presses using one of several printing techniques, such as offset lithography, flexography, or gravure. All traditional printing techniques require lengthy preparation before a press run can take place. Short-run color printing, including Color Server printing, eliminates most of this preparation. By streamlining the process of color printing, the Color Server makes short print runs economically feasible. In contemporary offset lithographic printing, digital files from desktop computers are output to an imagesetter, which creates film separations. The film is used to make a prepress proof, which is an accurate predictor of the final print job and allows you to make corrections before going to press. Once the proof is approved, the printer makes plates from the film and runs the print job on the press. 1 Color transparency film 2 RGB monitor 3 Offset press (white) 4 Other print device 1 2 3 4 DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 68 With the Color Server, you simply print the file. The Color Server processes the PostScript information in the file and sends four bitmaps (one each for cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) to the printer. The ease of Color Server printing makes possible experimentation that would be too costly on a press, allowing unlimited fine-tuning of color and design elements. Halftone and continuous tone devices Halftoning is used in offset printing to print each process color at a different intensity, allowing millions of different colors to be reproduced using only the four process colors. Depending on the required intensity of a given color, toner is placed on paper in dots of different size. The grid of dots used for each toner color is called a screen. Halftone screens are aligned to unique angles designed to eliminate interference patterns called moiré that can arise with halftoning. Some color printers are commonly referred to as continuous tone (contone) devices. They do not use traditional halftone patterns and angles. Contone devices are capable of varying the intensity of individual dots. Even if your color printing is done exclusively on the Color Server, you will encounter concepts from offset printing if you use high-end graphics applications. For example, color controls in illustration applications, such as Adobe Illustrator, are geared toward specifying color for offset printing using process and spot colors. Many applications allow you to specify the halftone used for each printing plate. Using color effectively The ability to print in color can greatly increase the effectiveness of your message, whether you are printing a presentation or newsletter (short-run printing), or proofing an ad concept that will later be printed on a press (color proofing). Some potential benefits of using color include: • Conveying information rapidly by using color cues • Making use of the emotive aspects of different colors • Increasing impact and message retention Color can also be a source of distraction and discord if it is used poorly. This section outlines some guidelines and concepts to consider as you approach designing color materials. DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 69 General guidelines To create successful color materials, consider the following: • Use color to aid comprehension, rather than applying colors indiscriminately. In presentations, graphs, and charts, use color to highlight patterns and emphasize differences. • Use color sparingly. In general, fewer colors work better than many colors. • Use red as an accent color. Red is particularly effective when used in otherwise monochromatic materials. • Consider the tastes of your target audience when choosing colors. • Keep a file of printed color pieces that appeal to you or strike you as effective. Refer to it for ideas when designing your own documents. Color wheel A color wheel like the one in the following figure is a helpful tool for understanding the interrelation of colors. The colors on one side of the color wheel, from magenta to yellow, appear to most people to be warm colors, while those on the other side, from green to blue, appear to be cool. The distance between two colors on the color wheel can help predict how they will appear when seen side by side. DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 70 Colors opposite one another on the color wheel are called complements (see example a in the following figure), and create a striking contrast side by side. This can be the basis for a bold graphical design, but it is an effect you should use with discretion, since it can be visually fatiguing. Other bold combinations to consider are split complements—a color and the two colors adjacent to its complement (example b)—and triads (three colors evenly spaced on the color wheel (example c). Colors adjacent to one another on the color wheel result in subtle harmonies. The color wheel simplifies color relationships for the purpose of clarity, showing only saturated or pure colors. Adding the myriad variations of each hue to the palette (more or less saturated, darker, or lighter) creates a wealth of possibilities. Taking a pair of complements from the color wheel and varying the saturation and brightness of one or both colors produces a very different result from the pure complements. Combining a light tint of a warm color with a darker shade of its cooler complement often gives pleasing results. Combining a darker shade of a warm color with a light tint of its cooler complement produces an unusual effect that may appeal to you. Once you have mastered the concept of the color wheel, you have a good framework for experimenting with color combinations. Many books targeted at graphic designers show groups of preselected color combinations. Some are organized by themes or moods, and some are based on a custom color system, such as PANTONE. The more you develop a critical facility for judging color combinations, the more you will trust your own eye for color. For a selection of books about design, see the “Bibliography” on page 75. a b c DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 71 Color and text It is not a coincidence that the overwhelming majority of text you see is printed in black on white paper. Text in black on white is highly legible and is not fatiguing to read for extended periods. For many color materials, using black text on a white background and confining color to graphic elements and headings is a good choice. When used skillfully, color text can add flair to documents printed on paper. This technique is widely used in presentations. When using color text, avoid dazzling text and background combinations created from primary complements, especially red and cyan or red and blue. They are visually fatiguing and hard to read. Color text is more legible when distinguished from its background by a difference in lightness, for example, dark blue text on a light beige background. In addition, using many different colors in a string of text makes for a confused appearance and is hard to read. However, using a single highlight color is an effective way to draw the reader’s eye to selected words. For color text samples, see the following figure. When using color text, keep in mind that small font sizes typically do not print in color with the same sharpness as in black. In most applications, black text prints exclusively in black toner, while color text usually prints with two or more toners. Any misregistration between the different toners on paper causes color text to lose definition. You can make test prints to find the smallest point size at which color text prints clearly. When using high-end graphics applications that allow you to specify color as percentages of cyan, magenta, yellow, black, you can create pure cyan or pure magenta text that prints with the same sharpness as black text. (Pure yellow text is extremely hard to read on anything but a dark or complementary background.) STOP! STOP! Exceptio probat regulam de rebus non exceptis. De gustibus non est disputandum. DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 72 Raster images and vector graphics Two broad categories of artwork can be printed from a personal computer to a color printer: raster images and vector graphics. A raster image, also referred to as a bitmap, is composed of a grid of pixels, each assigned a particular color value (as illustrated in example a in the following figure). The grid, when sufficiently enlarged, resembles a mosaic made from square tiles. Examples of raster images include scans and images created in painting or pixel-editing applications, such as Photoshop and Corel Painter. The amount of data found in a raster image depends on its resolution and bit depth. The resolution of a raster describes the compactness of the pixels and is specified in pixels per inch (ppi). The bit depth is the number of bits of information assigned to each pixel. Black and white raster images require only one bit of information per pixel. Grayscale images require 8 bits per pixel. For photographic quality color, 24 bits of RGB color information are required per pixel, yielding 256 levels of red, green, and blue. For CMYK images, 32 bits per pixel are required. When printing raster artwork, the quality of the output depends on the resolution of the source raster. If the raster resolution is too low, individual pixels become visible in the printed output as small squares. This effect is sometimes called “pixelation.” In vector graphics, picture objects are defined mathematically as lines or curves between points—hence the term “vector” (see example b). Picture elements can have solid, gradient, or patterned color fills. Vector artwork is created in illustration and drawing applications, such as Illustrator and CorelDRAW. Page layout applications, such as QuarkXPress, also allow you to create simple vector artwork with their drawing tools. PostScript fonts are vector-based, as well. Vector artwork is resolution-independent. You can scale it to any size and resolution without danger of pixels becoming visible in printed output. a b DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 73 Optimizing files for processing and printing The following sections provide information about how to create image files that produce the highest possible print quality while minimizing the processing time and disk space they require. Resolution of raster images While a 72-ppi raster image appears sharp on a monitor, the same image would likely appear pixelated when printed to the Color Server. Color printers are capable of much greater detail than computer monitors, and require correspondingly higher resolution image files. However, high-resolution files can be large and, therefore, cumbersome to transmit over a network, process for printing, store on disk, and edit. Beyond a certain threshold, a higher image resolution greatly increases file size while having a minimal effect on output quality. The optimal image resolution depends on the resolution of the final print device. Aim for the resolution that optimizes both file size and output quality. The resolution of a raster image, along with its bit depth and physical dimensions, determine its file size. The following table shows the file sizes of color raster images at different dimensions and resolutions. In this table, the shaded areas indicate that 200 ppi is typically the best trade-off between image quality and file size. However, higher resolutions (for example, 250 to 300 ppi) may be necessary for offset printing, when quality is of the utmost importance, or for images containing sharp diagonal lines. To find the best image resolution for your purposes, make test prints of some raster artwork at different resolutions. Start with a high-resolution image (400 ppi) and save versions at progressively lower resolutions, down to 100 ppi, using a pixel-editing application, such as Photoshop. Always save a copy of the original high-resolution version, in case you must revert to it. The high-resolution data cannot be recreated from a lower resolution version. File size at 100 ppi 150 ppi 200 ppi 400 ppi 600 ppi Image size RGB/CMYK RGB/CMYK RGB/CMYK RGB/CMYK RGB/CMYK 3"x 4" 0.4/0.5 MB 0.8/1.0 MB 1.4/1.8 MB 5.5/7.3 MB 12.4/16.5 MB 5"x7" 1.0/1.3 MB 2.3/3.0 MB 4.0/5.3 MB 16.0/21.4 MB 36.1/48.1 MB 8.5"x11" 2.7/3.6 MB 6.0/8.0 MB 10.7/14.3 MB 42.8/57.1 MB 96.4/128.5 MB 11"x17" 5.4/7.1 MB 12.0/16.1 MB 21.4/28.5 MB 85.6/114.1 MB 192.7/256.9 MB DESKTOP COLOR PRIMER 74 Print the files and examine the output. You will likely begin to see a marked deterioration in output quality at resolutions below 200 ppi, while above 200 ppi the improvement may be very subtle. Raster images prepared for offset printing may need to be at higher resolutions than necessary for proofing on your Color Server. Scaling Ideally, each raster image should be saved at the actual size, and it will be placed in the document at the optimal resolution for the printer. If the image resolution is correct for the printer, there is no quality advantage to be gained by scaling an image to a percentage of its actual size. If you scale a large image to a percentage of its actual size, you incur unnecessary file transfer time, because the image data for the entire large image is sent to the printer. If an image is placed multiple times at markedly different sizes in a document, save a separate version of the image at the correct size for each placement. If you must place an image at greater than 100% in a document, remember that the output image resolution is affected. For example, if you scale a 200 ppi image to 200%, the image is printed at 100 ppi. 100 ppi 200 ppi 300 ppi 400 ppi 500 ppi 600 ppi Image resolution Image quality BIBLIOGRAPHY 75 BIBLIOGRAPHY Books Bruno, Michael H., ed. Pocket Pal: A Graphic Arts Production Handbook. Nineteenth Edition. International Paper, 2004. Fraser, Bruce and Blatner, David. Real World Adobe Photoshop CS2. Berkeley: Peachpit Press, 2006. Hunt, R.W.G. The Reproduction of Colour. Sixth Edition. Wiley, 2004. Kieran, Michael. The Color Scanning Success Handbook. Toronto: DPA Communications Corp., 1997. (Out of print) Kieran, Michael. Understanding Desktop Color. Second Edition. Berkeley: Peachpit Press, 1994. Lawler, Brian P. Adobe Print Publishing Guide. Second Edition. Adobe Press, 2006. Margulis, Dan. Professional Photoshop: The Classic Guide to Color Correction. Fifth Edition. Berkeley: Peachpit Press, 2006. Miller, Marc D. and Zaucha, Randy. The Color Mac. Second Edition. Hayden Books, 1995. (Out of print) The Color Guide and Glossary: Communication, measurement, and control for Digital Imaging and Graphic Arts. X-Rite Incorporated, 2004. (Available from X-Rite dealers or via the X-Rite web site, www.xrite.com.) World Wide Web sites International Color Consortium: www.color.org Graphic Arts Information Network: www.gain.net Seybold Seminars Online: www.seyboldseminars.com Adobe Systems Incorporated: www.adobe.com GLOSSARY 77 GLOSSARY This Glossary contains some terms that are industry concepts and may not be explicitly referenced in the documentation set. A additive color model A system in which colors are produced by combining red, green, and blue light (the additive primaries). An RGB video monitor is based on an additive color model. additive primaries Red, green, and blue light used in additive color systems. When blended together in proper amounts, these colors of light produce white. artifact A visible defect in an image, usually caused by limitations in the input or output process (hardware or software); a blemish or error. B banding Visible steps between shades in a color gradient. bit depth Amount of information used for each pixel in a raster image. Black-and-white images require only one bit per pixel. Grayscale images with 256 shades of gray require 8 bits (or 1 byte) per pixel. Photographic quality color images can require 24 bits per pixel (RGB images) or 32 bits per pixel (CMYK images). Bitmap (BMP) A graphics file format established by Microsoft; native to the Windows operating system. bitmap (or raster) An image made up of small squares arranged in a grid. Each square in the grid is a pixel. The number of pixels per inch defines the resolution of a bitmap. GLOSSARY 78 blasting An undesirable effect that occurs when excess amounts of toner, possibly combined with certain types of paper stock, cause objects in an image to spread beyond the boundaries defined in the file. brightness Both the saturation and lightness of product color. C calibration The process of adjusting the basic setting of a monitor, printer, or other device to standard values in order to ensure uniform and consistent results over time. Calibration helps assure predictable and consistent printing results. calibration target (or calibration set) A set of measurements that describe the expected density response of a printing device. Calibration targets are associated with the output profile of the device. CIE The International Commission on Illumination, abbreviated as CIE from its French title Commission Internationale de l’Eclairage, is an organization devoted to international cooperation and exchange of information among its member countries on all matters relating to the science and art of lighting. The CIE developed mathematical models to quantify light sources, objects and observers as a function of wavelength, which led to the development of a basic color space for plotting colors. CIEbased colors (A, ABC, DEF, DEFG) Device-independent color spaces that are produced by color management outside of the Color Server, such as application software, operating systems, or printer drivers, and are applied at the user’s computer. CMS See color management system. CMYK A subtractive color model that uses cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (process colors), and is used in color printing; a color model used in the printing of colors in four-color process printing. coated media Media that is coated to enhance print quality. The coating allows the media to be printed without allowing significant toner or ink absorption, thereby preventing blurriness or lack of contrast. GLOSSARY 79 color channel A single-color image that can be edited separately from the other color channels in a color space; for example, the red channel of an RGB image. color gamut See gamut. color management system (CMS) System used to match color across different input, display, and output devices. color rendering dictionary See CRD (Color Rendering Dictionary). color separation The process of separating a color image into the color components for printing: cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. Also refers to the four sheets of film that result from the process of separating a color image. color space A model for representing color in terms of measurable values, such as the amount of red, green, and blue in an image. RGB and CMYK color spaces correspond to color devices (monitors and printers, respectively). Other color spaces, such as CIE Lab, are based on mathematical models and are device-independent (that is, not based on the color response of a particular device). See gamut. colorant An ink, dye, toner, paint, or other pigment that modifies the color of media to which it is applied. ColorWise See ColorWise color management. ColorWise color management An ICC-open color management solution, which is an easy-to-use system that addresses the needs of both casual and experienced color management users. component In variable data printing, an element such as text, a graphic, or a photograph that is printed on a page. composite printer Any output device that can print directly in color without first creating color separations. A composite print can be used as an early proof of an offset print job. GLOSSARY 80 consumable Material such as ink, toner, paper, or lubricants that must be replenished regularly in order for the print device to function properly. continuous tone (contone) A photographic image that contains gradient tones from black to white (such as a 35mm transparency or a photograph). Continuous tones cannot be reproduced in that form for printing, but must be screened to translate the image into dots. CRD (Color Rendering Dictionary) A feature that maintains the best possible translation of color from one color device to another. A CRD is used by the color management system or the PostScript interpreter of the Color Server when converting data between color spaces. The Color Server includes several CRDs, each of which provides a different color rendering intent. custom color system A system of named color swatches that can be matched on press using spot colors or approximated using process colors. PANTONE and TruMatch are examples of custom color systems. D DCS (Desktop Color Separation) A data file standard that assists in making color separations with desktop publishing systems. Five files are created: four color files (one each for C, M, Y, and K) and a composite color preview file of the color image. DCS allows an image-editing application to perform color separation and pass it through to final output with its integrity intact. densitometer An instrument commonly used in the graphic arts industry to measure density according to a specified standard. density A measurement of the light-absorbing quality of a photographic or printed image. desktop color separation See DCS. device-dependent colors Colors directly related to their representation on an output device. Color values map directly or via simple conversions to the application of device colorants, such as quantities of ink or intensities of display phosphors. Device-dependent colors are controlled precisely for a particular device, but the results may not be consistent between different devices. Examples of device-dependent color spaces are DeviceRGB, DeviceCMYK, and DeviceGray. GLOSSARY 81 device-independent colors Colors described using a model based on human visual perception instead of being device-specific. DIC A Japanese standard of specifications for separations, proofs, and color printing. E Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) A PostScript file format designed to be embedded in another PostScript stream. Euroscale A European standard of specifications for separations, proofs, and color printing. F flexography A printing technology that uses flexible raised-image plates. Flexography can be used to print on non-flat materials such as cans. four-color printer A printing device that uses cyan, magenta, yellow, and black ink or toner. G gamma A numeric value representing the relationship (gamma curve) between the input and output values of a color device. If gamma equals 1, input values are mapped exactly to output values. gamut A range of colors. A device gamut is the range of colors that a print device can produce. An image gamut is the range of colors in a particular image. gamut mapping The conversion of color coordinates from one device’s gamut to another, usually accomplished with algorithms or look-up tables. GCR See gray component replacement. GLOSSARY 82 GDI (Graphics Device Interface) Graphics and display technology used by Windows computers. GDI applications rely on GDI (rather than the PostScript language) to send text and pictures to a print device. GIF (Graphics Interchange Format) A standard for bitmap graphics of up to 256 colors used for posting photographic images on Internet or intranet pages; rarely used for professional printing. gradient A smooth transition between two different colors or two shades of a color. Graphics Device Interface See GDI. Graphics Interchange Format See GIF. gravure A printing technology that uses an etched cylinder that has been immersed in ink. The ink that remains in the etched areas is applied to the paper. The non-etched surfaces of the cylinder are non-printing areas. gray component replacement (GCR) A method for improving wet ink trapping and reducing ink costs in process color printing. In shadow, midtone, and quarter-tone areas where all three process colors (C, M, Y) overprint, the gray components of those colors are reduced and replaced by black. H halftoning A method for representing an original continuous tone image using a pattern of dots, lines, or other patterns. HSB A color model where each color is represented by its hue, saturation, and brightness components; supported by most color applications. HSL A color model in which each color is represented by its hue, saturation, and lightness components. GLOSSARY 83 I ICC profile An industry standard color profile format developed by the International Color Consortium (ICC) that describes the color capabilities, including the gamut, of a color device based on the differences between an ideal and the current device. The ideal is often provided by the manufacturer as a color reference file. ICC profiles are implemented on Mac OS computers in ColorSync and on Windows computers in Image Color Matching (ICM). The Color Server color management system, ColorWise, supports ICC profiles. imagesetter Raster-based film output device; a high-resolution laser output device that writes bitmapped data onto photosensitive paper or film. J JPEG A graphics file format defined by the Joint Photographic Experts Group committee of International Standards Organization (ISO); a standard for digital compression of still image graphic data. L Lab A uniform device-independent color space in which colors are located within a threedimensional rectangular coordinate system. The three dimensions are lightness (L), redness/ greenness (a) and yellowness/blueness (b). (Also referred to as L*a*b* and CIELab.) M metamerism Phenomenon in which two colors composed of different combinations of light wavelengths appear identical under a specific light source, but may look different under other light sources. The colors are called “metamers.” moiré An undesirable pattern in images made using halftone screens. Moiré can be caused by the improper line frequency of the screens, improper screen angles, improper alignment of halftone screens, or by the combination of a halftone screen with patterns in the image. GLOSSARY 84 N named color A color that is defined according to a custom color system. For example, PANTONE 107 C is a named color; also referred to as a spot color. O office applications Software applications commonly used for business purposes, including presentation, spreadsheet, and word processing applications. offset lithography Printing in which ink is transferred from printing plates to a rubber blanket, and then from the blanket to paper. output See output profile. output profile A file that describes the color characteristics of a printing device. The output profile is associated with a calibration target that defines the expected density response of the print device. P PANTONE System One of the best known color specification systems used by designers and printers to communicate color. Available in Coated, Uncoated, and Matte, each swatch book contains a series of colors that can be referenced based on the assigned PANTONE notation. PDF (Portable Document Format) An open file format specification that describes text and graphics in documents. phosphor Material used in making computer monitors; phosphors glow and emit red, green, and blue light when struck by an electron beam, thus creating an image. photographic rendering A color rendering intent that preserves tonal relationships in images. Unprintable colors are mapped to printable colors in a way that retains differences in lightness, sacrificing color accuracy as necessary. GLOSSARY 85 pixel The smallest distinct element of a raster image. The term is a combination of the words “picture” and “element.” PostScript A device-independent page description language that is used to print and display pictures and text. PostScript 3 includes many enhancements to older versions of PostScript, including improved image quality and color. PPD (PostScript Printer Description) A file containing information about particular PostScript capabilities of the print device. The information in the PPD is presented via the printer driver. prepress proof A print made from a set of film separations or other file to simulate the results of printing. A prepress proof is the last opportunity to catch problems before the print job goes to press. presentation graphics rendering A color rendering intent that creates saturated colors but does not match printed colors precisely to displayed colors. It is appropriate for bright saturated colors used in illustrations and graphs. process colors The colors used in printing to simulate full-spectrum color images: Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, blacK (CMYK). profile Systematically describes how a color maps to a particular space. By identifying a source profile and an output profile, you initiate the appropriate workflow to maintain consistent color values. R raster image Electronic representation of a page or image using a grid of points called pixels. rendering intent The style of color rendering, or gamut mapping, designed for a particular type of color job. An example of a rendering intent is Photographic rendering (also referred to as Image rendering or Contrast rendering), which is designed for photographic images. GLOSSARY 86 resolution The number of pixels per inch (ppi) in a bitmap image or the number of dots per inch (dpi) that a device can render. RGB An additive color model that makes a range of colors by combining red, green, and blue light, called the additive primaries. Commonly used to refer to the color space, mixing system, or monitor in color computer graphics. S solid color rendering A color rendering intent intended for use when color accuracy is crucial. Unprintable colors are mapped to the closest printable colors. Solid color rendering does the best job of preserving the saturation of displayed colors. source color space The color environment of the originating source of a colored element, including scanners and color monitors. source profile A file used by a color management system to determine the characteristics of the color values specified in a source digital image. spectral light The wavelengths of electromagnetic radiation emitted by a given light source that can be seen by the human eye. spectrophotometer An instrument commonly used in the graphic arts industry to measure spectral light according to a specified standard. spot color A color that is printed on its own separation plate when separations are specified. A spot color is printed using a custom ink for that color, in contrast to process colors, which are printed using combinations of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. (Also referred to as a named color.) Status T A spectral response for graphic arts reflection densitometers defined by ANSI (American National Standards Institute). substrate The material upon which a job is printed. GLOSSARY 87 subtractive color model A system in which color is produced by combining colorants such as paint, inks, or dyes on media such as paper, acetate, or transparent film. All printing devices use the subtractive color model. subtractive primaries Cyan, magenta, and yellow colorants used in subtractive color systems for color printing. Combining the subtractive primaries produces darker colors. Black is added to the subtractive primaries to compensate for deficiencies of the toners or inks, and for more efficient black printing. SWOP The abbreviation for Specifications for Web Offset Publications. A standard of specifications for separations, proofs, and color printing on a web offset press (not a sheet-fed press). T TIFF (Tag Image File Format) A common format for exchanging raster graphics (bitmap) images between applications. trapping Printing technique in which some objects are printed slightly larger or smaller than you have specified in an application in order to prevent white edges around these objects. U undercolor removal (UCR) A method for improving wet ink trapping and reducing ink costs in process color printing. In shadow areas where all three process colors (C, M, Y) overprint, the amounts of those colors are reduced and replaced by black. V vector graphic Graphic illustration created on computers where picture objects are defined mathematically as lines or curves between points. These mathematical definitions are interpreted by an image language such as PostScript. Vector images include artwork created with illustration applications (such as Adobe Illustrator or Macromedia FreeHand) and page layout applications (such as Adobe PageMaker). W white point The color temperature of any white light source, typically expressed in degrees Kelvin (for example, 6500 K, typical for the white of a monitor). INDEX 89 A accent color 69 Acrobat 56 to 59 additive color model 64 additive primaries 64 Adobe (ACE) conversion option Illustrator 49 InDesign 40 Photoshop 30 Adobe Acrobat, see Acrobat Adobe Illustrator, see Illustrator Adobe InDesign, see InDesign Adobe Photoshop, see Photoshop B bit depth, of raster images 72, 73 Blend RGB Colors Using Gamma, Photoshop setting 31 brightness 60, 62 C charts, using color in 69 choosing color 15 CIE chromaticity diagram 62, 63 color model 62 CIELAB color space 8 CMY color model 19 CMYK Color Reference 11, 24 CMYK EPS, Photoshop 37 CMYK processing method 26 CMYK source profile 26 color accent color 69 additive model 64 CMY model 19 complements 70 controlling printing results 15 custom color systems 23 HSB model 23, 62 HSL model 19, 23 HSV model 19 physics of 61 process colors 68 properties of 60 reference pages 11 RGB model 19, 23 split complements 70 subtractive model 64, 65 subtractive primaries 66 text 71 theory 60 triads 70 using effectively 68 to 71 wheel 69 color management Acrobat 57 basics 8 to 9 ColorWise 10 CorelDRAW 53 Illustrator 48 InDesign 39 monitor 18 Photoshop 28 QuarkXPress 46 color management system (CMS) 8 color matching systems, see custom color systems color monitors, see monitors Color Profiler Suite 8, 18 color proofing 17 color theory 60 color wheel 69 ColorSync 8 ColorWise 8, 10 Combine Separations, Photoshop 34 Commission Internationale de l’Eclairage, see CIE complements, color 70 compression, JPEG 33, 35, 36 computer monitors, see monitors continuous tone devices 68 Conversion Options, Photoshop setting 30 CorelDRAW 53 to 55 custom color systems 23, 70 INDEX INDEX 90 D Desaturate Monitor Colors by, Photoshop setting 31 device profiles 8 Document Color Mode, Illustrator 47 documentation 7 E EFIRGB Photoshop 30, 40, 49, 57 Encoding, Photoshop setting 35 EPS (Encapsulated PostScript) about 25 defining colors 21 imported objects 25 PostScript color management 36 with CorelDRAW 54 with illustration applications 47 with Illustrator 50 with Photoshop 31 EPS CMYK, Photoshop 37 EPS RGB 36 Excel, see Microsoft Office F file size, of raster images 10, 73 font size, for color text 71 G gamma 9 gamut of monitors 67 of photographic transparencies 67 Graphic Arts Package 27 graphs, using color in 69 gravure 67 H halftone screen 27 halftoning 68 HSB color model 23, 62 HSL color model 19, 23 HSV color model 19 hue, saturation, and brightness 60, 62 I ICC profiles about 30 included with user software 9 ICC standard for color management systems 8 illustration applications 47 Illustrator 23, 47 InDesign 39 to 44 International Color Consortium 8 J JPEG 33, 35, 36 L light 61 to 62 line art, see vector graphics M metamerism 62 Microsoft Excel, see Microsoft Office Microsoft Office 19 to 22 Microsoft PowerPoint, see Microsoft Office Microsoft Word, see Microsoft Office misregistration of colors 71 moiré 68 monitor color management 18 monitors color model 65 gamut of 67 phosphors 65 Multi-channel, Photoshop 37 N named colors 23 O office applications 16, 19 to 22 offset lithographic printing 67 offset press print jobs, workflow issues 17 offset press printing 67 on-demand printing 17 output profile color conversion 9 with office applications 22 P page layout applications 38 painting applications 72 PANTONE color system 23, 24 reference 11 phosphors 9, 65 photographic prints 65 photographic transparencies 65, 67 Photoshop color management with 23 importing CorelDRAW data 54 using 28 to 37 INDEX 91 Photoshop Multi-channel 37 physics of color 61 pixel-editing applications 72, 73 Postflight 23 PostScript applications color handling 23 using color in 23 to 27 PostScript Color Management, Photoshop option 33, 36 PostScript printer drivers 21 PowerPoint, see Microsoft Office prepress proof 67 presentation print jobs, using color in 69 printing raster images 72 techniques 67 prism 61 process colors 24, 66, 68 profiles, device 8 proofing color 17 prepress 67 Q QuarkXPress 23, 45 QuarkXPress color management 46 R raster images about 72 to 74 bit depth 72, 73 file size 73 for offset press printing 74 printing 72 resolution 73 to 74 scaling of 74 registration of colors 71 rendering intent 19 bypassing 21, 26 RGB color model 19, 23 RGB Color Reference 11, 20 RGB EPS 36 RGB source color space, see source color space S saturation 60, 62 scaling of raster images 74 scanners 64, 65 screens, used in halftoning 68 Separations, printing with Photoshop 34 short-run printing 17 source color space 9 spectral colors 62 spectral components of light 61, 62 split complements 70 Spot Color Matching option with Photoshop 37 with PostScript applications 25 spot colors 23, 24 Spot-On 16 subtractive color model 64, 65 subtractive primaries 66 sunlight 61 T text font size 71 using color with 71 TIFF objects assigning ICC profiles to 26 preview 33 recommended for imported objects 25, 31 tint 62 transparencies (photographic) 65, 67 triads 70 V vector graphics 72 visible spectrum of light 61 W white point 9 Word, see Microsoft Office workflow, recommended 14 working Fiery® PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery® PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server Fiery Graphic Arts Package © 2010 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered under Legal Notices for this product. 45093739 29 July 2010 CONTENTS 3 CONTENTS INTRODUCTION 7 Terminology and conventions 7 About this document 8 Fiery Graphic Arts Package 9 Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition 10 Available options 11 Enabling the feature at the Fiery PRO80 11 Updating the status of Fiery Graphic Arts Package 11 Updating the status on Windows 11 Updating the status on Mac OS X 12 Setting up your monitor and the monitor profile 13 PAPER SIMULATION WHITE POINT EDITING 14 Paper simulation workflow 14 Printing with default Paper Simulation 14 Paper Simulation print option 15 Paper Simulation White Point editing 15 Printing with custom paper simulation values 16 SPOT-ON WITH TWO-COLOR PRINT MAPPING 18 Setting up Two-Color Print Mapping 19 Printing a job with Two-Color Print Mapping 20 CONTENTS 4 COLOR SETUP FEATURES 22 Control Bar 22 Control Bar workflow 23 Printing with the default Control Bar 23 Setting up a custom Control Bar 25 Printing with a custom Control Bar 25 Configurable Auto Trapping 26 Configurable Auto Trapping workflow 26 Printing with default Auto Trapping 26 Setting up configurable Auto Trapping 28 Printing with configurable Auto Trapping 28 Progressives 29 Progressives workflow 29 Printing with the default Progressives 30 Setting up Progressives 31 Printing with custom Progressives 31 Halftone Simulation 32 Halftone Simulation workflow 32 Halftone Simulation print option 32 Printing with pre-defined halftone screens 33 Setting up custom Halftone Simulation 34 Printing with custom halftone screens 34 Supported applications 35 Calibrating for custom halftone screens 35 SOFT PROOFING 38 IMAGEVIEWER 39 Accessing ImageViewer 39 CONTENTS 5 PREFLIGHT 42 HOT FOLDERS FILTERS 43 POSTFLIGHT 44 About Postflight 45 Postflight Test Page 45 Postflight color-coded pages 45 Postflight reports 46 Postflight print option 48 Postflight workflow 48 Scenario 1: Diagnose an unexpected color 50 Scenario 2: Check the calibration status 52 Scenario 3: Check the quality of the output profile 53 Scenario 4: Diagnose a color problem of a specific object 54 MULTIPLE PLATE SEPARATIONS 55 Multiple plate separations workflow 55 Combine Separations print option 56 Supported applications 56 PAPER SIMULATION 57 Paper Simulation workflow 57 Paper Simulation print option 58 CONTENTS 6 UGRA/FOGRA MEDIA WEDGE 59 Printing the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge 59 Reading the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge 60 Using the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge for quality control 60 INTEGRATED ALTONA VISUAL TEST 61 Altona Visual Test file 61 Interpreting test results 62 Using a PDF/X workflow not compatible with Altona 64 INDEX 65 INTRODUCTION 7 INTRODUCTION This document explains the Fiery Graphic Arts Package features and how they work. Because of the flexibility of the controls Fiery Graphic Arts Package provides, users in any environment can benefit from the Fiery Graphic Arts Package features. Novice users can use the default settings to obtain optimal results. Expert users with specific needs and requirements in graphic arts and other markets can also obtain optimal results by customizing the settings. Terminology and conventions The documentation for the Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server uses the following terminology and conventions. Term or convention Refers to Aero Fiery PRO80 (in illustrations and examples) Fiery PRO80 Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server Mac OS Apple Mac OS X Printer 80C-KM printer and 70-60C-KM printer Titles in italics Other documents in this set Windows Microsoft Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2003/2008/2008 R2 Fiery Graphic Arts Package Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition Topics for which additional information is available by starting Help in the software Tips and information INTRODUCTION 8 About this document This document describes the features that are available through print options and utilities such as Command WorkStation. The features are organized as follows: • Features accessible from Command WorkStation – Paper Simulation White Point Editing describes the white point editing feature. – Spot-On with Two-Color Print Mapping describes the feature used to map document colors with print colors. – Color Setup describes the following features: Control Bar, Auto Trapping, Progressives, and Halftone Simulation. – ImageViewer describes how to start the ImageViewer application. – Soft Proofing describes the Soft Proof feature. – Preflight describes how to perform the Preflight check of your job. • Features accessible from utilities other than Command WorkStation – Hot Folders Filters describes the filters features. • Other features – Postflight describes the Postflight feature and its workflow examples. – Multiple Plate Separations describes the combine separation feature for more than four plates. – Paper Simulation describes the fixed Paper Simulation feature. – Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge describes the color test file called the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge. – Integrated Altona Visual Test describes the test integrated in the Fiery PRO80 to check for PDF/X compatibility as tested by the Altona Test Suite. A warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the equipment safely, always pay attention to these warnings. A caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the equipment safely, always pay attention to these cautions. Operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the equipment correctly, and avoid damage to the equipment or property. Term or convention Refers to INTRODUCTION 9 Fiery Graphic Arts Package The following features are included in Fiery Graphic Arts Package: Feature Where to set values or access Print option name See Halftone screening Command WorkStation: Color Setup Halftone Simulation Color Setup Features Soft proofing Command WorkStation: Preview Soft Proofing Multiple plate separations Combine Separation Multiple Plate Separations Fixed paper simulation Paper Simulation Paper Simulation INTRODUCTION 10 Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition The following features are included in Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition: Feature Where to set values or access Print option name See Paper simulation white point editing Command WorkStation: Paper Simulation Paper Simulation Paper Simulation White Point Editing Spot-On: two-color print mapping Command WorkStation: Spot-On Two-Color Print Mapping Spot-On with Two-Color Print Mapping Control bar Command WorkStation: Color Setup Control Bar Color Setup Features Configurable auto trapping Command WorkStation: Color Setup Auto Trapping Color Setup Features Progressives Command WorkStation: Color Setup Progressives Color Setup Features Halftone screening Command WorkStation: Color Setup Halftone Simulation Color Setup Features Soft proofing Command WorkStation: Preview Soft Proofing ImageViewer Command WorkStation: ImageViewer ImageViewer Preflight Command WorkStation: Preflight Preflight Hot Folders file filters Hot Folders Hot Folders filters Postflight Command WorkStation: ImageViewer Postflight Postflight Multiple plate separations Combine Separation Multiple Plate Separations Fixed paper simulation Paper Simulation Paper Simulation Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge Integrated Altona Visual Test Integrated Altona Visual Test INTRODUCTION 11 Available options The following feature package is available for the Fiery PRO80. Enabling the feature at the Fiery PRO80 The Fiery Graphic Arts Package option or the Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition option must be enabled at the Fiery PRO80 before you can access its features from your computer. A service technician enables the option at your site using the Feature Update or Restore/Update Server Software CD and the hardware key (dongle). To check whether the option is enabled at the Fiery PRO80, do one of the following: • Print the Configuration page (see Configuration and Setup). • Check the information on the General Info tab of the Device Center. Updating the status of Fiery Graphic Arts Package If the Fiery Graphic Arts Package option or the Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition option is enabled at the Fiery PRO80, you must update the status of the option on your computer before you can access its features from your computer. Updating the status on Windows Use the following procedure to update the status of Fiery Graphic Arts Package on a Windows computer. NOTE: Before updating the status on a Windows computer, you must install the printer driver. For information about installing the printer driver, see Printing. Fiery Graphic Arts Package Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition To use Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition features Fiery PRO80 Optional Optional Upgrade to Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition or Upgrade Fiery Graphic Arts Package to Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition INTRODUCTION 12 TO UPDATE THE STATUS ON A WINDOWS COMPUTER 1 Open the Printers (or Printers and Faxes) window. 2 Right-click the Fiery PRO80 and choose Properties. The Properties dialog box appears. 3 Click the Installable Options tab. 4 Select the Two-Way Communication option. 5 Type the IP address or DNS name and click Update. NOTE: If you use the Point and Print method to install the printer driver and printer description file, you must enable Two-Way Communication on the monitor at the Fiery PRO80 for each connection (print, hold, or direct) before you install them on your computer. For more information about Point and Print, see Printing. 6 Verify that Fiery Graphic Arts Package or Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition appears under Installed Options. 7 Click OK to close the dialog box. Updating the status on Mac OS X Use one of the following procedures to update the status of Fiery Graphic Arts Package on a computer running Mac OS X. NOTE: Before updating the status on a computer running Mac OS X, install the printer driver. For information about installing the printer driver, see Printing. TO UPDATE THE STATUS ON A COMPUTER RUNNING MAC OS X V10.5 AND 10.6 1 Choose System Preferences from the Apple menu and then choose Print & Fax. The Print & Fax dialog box appears. 2 In the Printer List, select the Fiery PRO80 and click Options & Supplies. 3 Click the Driver tab. 4 Select Fiery Graphic Arts Package or Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition from the GA Package list. 5 Click OK to apply changes. 6 Quit System Preferences. INTRODUCTION 13 TO UPDATE THE STATUS ON A COMPUTER RUNNING MAC OS X V10.4.X 1 Start Printer Setup Utility. 2 Select the Fiery PRO80 in the Printer List. 3 Choose Show Info from the Printer menu. The Printer Info dialog box appears. 4 Choose Installable Options. 5 Select Fiery Graphic Arts Package or Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition from the GA Package list. 6 Click Apply Changes. 7 Close the dialog box. Setting up your monitor and the monitor profile Some Fiery Graphic Arts Package features require that a job be displayed with correct colors on your monitor. The following features require the correct monitor display: • Paper Simulation White Point editing (see page 14) • Soft Proofing from Command WorkStation (see page 38) • ImageViewer previewing from Command WorkStation (see page 39) To display the colors correctly on your monitor, you must set up the monitor display according to the manufacturer’s recommendations and specify the correct monitor profile for your monitor. Specify the following settings for the monitor display: • At the monitor: Brightness, Contrast, and Temperature • From the control panel of the operating system: Resolution, Refresh rate, and Number of colors For more information about setting up your monitor and the monitor profile, see the documentation that accompanies the monitor. PAPER SIMULATION WHITE POINT EDITING 14 PAPER SIMULATION WHITE POINT EDITING Although an ICC profile contains a definition of “white,” the white may not always visually match the human eye, requiring a perceptual adjustment. The Paper Simulation White Point editing feature allows you to perceptually adjust the hue, brightness, and saturation of the simulated paper white defined in the ICC profile. Paper simulation workflow You can print a job with the Paper Simulation feature set to On from the printer driver without customizing paper simulation. Many jobs may print satisfactorily with the fixed default Paper Simulation setting. However, you can customize the paper simulation by editing the white point values with Command WorkStation. After you customize the values, print the job with the custom paper simulation values from the printer driver by setting the Paper Simulation print option to On. To print a job with the fixed Paper Simulation setting, use the procedure on page 14. For more information about editing Paper Simulation White Point values and printing with custom paper simulation values, see page 15. Printing with default Paper Simulation Use the following procedure to print a job with the fixed Paper Simulation value. NOTE: The procedures for printing a job from a Mac OS or a Windows computer are similar. TO PRINT A JOB WITH DEFAULT PAPER SIMULATION 1 Choose Print from your application. 2 Select Fiery PRO80 as your printer and click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears with the Fiery Printing tab selected. 3 Click the Color icon. 4 Click Expert Settings. The Advanced Edit dialog box appears. 5 Under the Color Input tab, select Paper Simulation. 6 Click OK to close the Advanced Edit dialog box. 7 Click OK to close the Properties dialog box. 8 Click Print. The job prints with the default Paper Simulation White Point setting. PAPER SIMULATION WHITE POINT EDITING 15 Paper Simulation print option The following values are available for the Paper Simulation print option: • Off (Default) • On NOTE: If you have not edited the Paper Simulation White Point values with Command WorkStation and selected On for this option, your job is printed with the default Paper Simulation values. If you edited the values, your job is printed with the custom Paper Simulation values. Paper Simulation White Point editing Your job may print satisfactorily with the fixed Paper Simulation setting. However, you can customize the Paper Simulation setting by editing the Paper Simulation White Point values with Command WorkStation. NOTE: To display the colors correctly with your monitor, you must set the monitor and monitor settings correctly. For more information, see Command WorkStation Help. To edit a custom profile, do the following: • Select a CMYK Source Profile. • Link the CMYK source profile to an output profile. To access the Paper Simulation White Point dialog box, see the instructions in Command WorkStation Help. NOTE: If Paper Simulation is set to On, and you have defined a substitute color as C=0, M=0, Y=0, K=0, the values defined in Substitute Colors override those for Paper Simulation. For information about Substitute Colors, see Command WorkStation Help. PAPER SIMULATION WHITE POINT EDITING 16 Printing with custom paper simulation values After you edit the paper simulation values in Command WorkStation, you can print a document with the custom paper simulation values from the printer driver. You can also override the setting in Job Properties. NOTE: The procedures for printing a job from a Windows or Mac OS computer are fundamentally the same. The following procedure uses illustrations from a Mac OS computer. Use the following procedure to print a job with the custom paper simulation values. TO PRINT A JOB WITH EDITED PAPER SIMULATION VALUES 1 Choose Print in your application. The print dialog box appears. 2 Mac OS X v10.5 and 10.6: Expand the dialog box, if necessary, by clicking the arrow next to the Printer name. 3 Mac OS X v10.4.x: Click Copies & Pages, choose ColorSync from the drop-down list, and then choose In Printer from the Color Conversion list. Mac OS X v10.5 and 10.6: Click Preview, choose Color Matching from the drop-down list, and then select In Printer. 4 Choose Fiery Features from the drop-down list. 5 Select Two-Way Communication. For information about enabling Two-Way Communication, see printer driver Help. 6 Click Full Properties, and then click the Color icon. The Color pane appears. PAPER SIMULATION WHITE POINT EDITING 17 7 Click Expert Settings. The Advanced Edit dialog box appears. 8 Under the Color Input tab, select the following settings. • Choose the custom profile from the CMYK/Grayscale Source list. Choose the profile you saved after editing the Paper Simulation White Point values. • Select Full (Output GCR) for the CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method option. • Select Paper Simulation. 9 Under the Output tab, choose the output profile that you linked to the custom CMYK Source profile from the Output Profile list. 10 Click OK. The Color pane reappears. 11 Click OK, and then click Print. The job is printed using your custom CMYK Source profile with the edited White Point values. SPOT-ON WITH TWO-COLOR PRINT MAPPING 18 SPOT-ON WITH TWO-COLOR PRINT MAPPING In addition to managing “named” colors, the Spot-On spot color editor in Command WorkStation allows you to assign spot colors and process colors to the generic colors that are used in a job. The Two-Color Print Mapping feature is designed for print shop operators to do the proofing for a two-color press. You can print a two-color job to a two-color device by mapping the colors in a job to the colors that are already created on the device. For information about managing named colors with Spot-On, see Command WorkStation Help. NOTE: The RGB colors in a document are first converted to CMYK colors and then the Two-Color Print Mapping is applied. The following limitations apply when you use the Two-Color Print Mapping feature: • The settings for Two-Color Print Mapping are ignored when the Composite Overprint and Combine Separation features are enabled. • Postflight does not report on Two-Color Print Mapping, because Postflight reports the source state of a document. The color space that the printer receives before any conversions is reported in Postflight. • You cannot select the Two-Color Print Mapping and Substitute Color options at the same time. Also, you cannot select a substitute color to be used in the Two-Color Print Mapping feature. SPOT-ON WITH TWO-COLOR PRINT MAPPING 19 Setting up Two-Color Print Mapping In the Two-Color Print Mapping feature, the colors that are used in a job are mapped with the colors to print. From Spot-On, open the Define 2-Color Print Mapping window and then reassign the document colors to the named or custom colors to print with. When the Two-Color Print Mapping print option is enabled for a job, Fiery PRO80 replaces the document colors with the colors you defined in the Define 2-Color Print Mapping window. To define the color mappings in the Define 2-Color Print Mapping window, see the instructions in Command WorkStation Help. 1 Click to open the Define 2-Color Print Mapping window 1 SPOT-ON WITH TWO-COLOR PRINT MAPPING 20 Printing a job with Two-Color Print Mapping After you map the colors in the Define 2-Color Print Mapping window in Spot-On, you can print a two-color job from the printer driver. You can also override the print option setting using Command WorkStation Job Properties. NOTE: When you print a job, select the same output profile from the printer driver as you selected when you set up Two-Color Print Mapping in Spot-On. Otherwise, print mappings that are defined in Spot-On have no effect. NOTE: The procedures for printing a job from a Mac OS and a Windows computer are similar. TO PRINT A TWO-COLOR JOB 1 Open a document in your application. 2 Choose Print. 3 Mac OS X v10.5 and 10.6: Expand the dialog box, if necessary, by clicking the arrow next to the Printer name. 4 Mac OS X v10.4.x: Click Copies & Pages and choose Fiery Features from the drop-down list. Mac OS X v10.5 and 10.6: Click Preview and choose Fiery Features from the drop-down list. SPOT-ON WITH TWO-COLOR PRINT MAPPING 21 5 Click Full Properties, and then click the Color icon. The Color pane appears. 6 Select 2-Color Print Mapping. 7 Click OK and then click Print. The job is printed with the mapping you defined in Spot-On. COLOR SETUP FEATURES 22 COLOR SETUP FEATURES With Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition, Color Setup in Command WorkStation offers the following customizable features: • Control Bar (see page 22) • Auto Trapping (see page 26) • Progressives (see page 29) • Halftone Simulation (see page 32) For information about Color Setup, see Command WorkStation Help. Control Bar Control Bar allows you to add a static color bar and dynamic job information to each printed page at a user-defined location. The feature can be set as a server default or overridden on a per-job basis. The default Control Bar is designed to fit the Fiery PRO80 default paper size, Letter/A4, or larger. You can create Control Bars for other paper sizes. NOTE: If a Control Bar does not fit on the page, it will be clipped. NOTE: If a background color is defined as “white” for a user-defined Control Bar, it must be defined in the CMYK color space for the Paper Simulation feature to take effect. For more information about Paper Simulation, see page 14. COLOR SETUP FEATURES 23 Control Bar workflow The default Control Bar provides a color bar and dynamic job information. Print a job with the default Control Bar by setting the Control Bar print option to On from the printer driver. Many jobs print satisfactorily with the default Control Bar, but if you require your own color bars, create them by defining custom values in the Control Bar Definition dialog box. After you define a custom Control Bar in the Control Bar pane in Color Setup, you can print a job with the custom Control Bar from the printer driver. To print a job with the default Control Bar, see the following section. To print a job with a custom Control Bar, see page 25. Printing with the default Control Bar Print a job with the default Control Bar by setting the Control Bar print option to On from the printer driver. TO PRINT A JOB WITH THE DEFAULT CONTROL BAR 1 Choose Print from your application. 2 Select Fiery PRO80 as your printer and click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears, with the Fiery Printing tab selected. 3 Click the Job Info icon. COLOR SETUP FEATURES 24 4 Under Reporting, select On for the Control Bar print option. 5 Click OK. 6 Click Print. The job is printed with the default Control Bar. 1 Static color bar 2 Job information 1 2 COLOR SETUP FEATURES 25 Setting up a custom Control Bar The custom Control Bar feature is in the Control Bar tab under the Color Setup tab in the Device Center. For more information about using Control Bar, see Command WorkStation Help. Printing with a custom Control Bar The procedure to print a job with a custom Control Bar is basically the same as to print with the default Control Bar (see page 23). Use the following procedure to print with a custom Control Bar. TO PRINT A JOB WITH A CUSTOM CONTROL BAR 1 Choose Print from your application. 2 Select Fiery PRO80 as your printer and click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears with the Fiery Printing tab selected. 3 Click the Job Info icon. 4 Select On for the Control Bar print option. 5 Click OK. 6 Click Print. The job is printed with the Control Bar specified in the Control Bar Definition dialog box. COLOR SETUP FEATURES 26 Configurable Auto Trapping Trapping is a technique where some objects are printed slightly larger or smaller than you have specified in an application, in order to prevent white edges around the objects. These white edges, or “halos,” can be caused by factors such as misregistration, the physical properties of the toners, and the stiffness of the media. The configurable Auto Trapping feature provides you with advanced trapping settings and gives you full control over their values. The Fiery PRO80 is shipped with values that are optimized for the print device using regular paper, but if these values do not provide the results necessary for the media that you use, modify the values to meet your requirements. Configurable Auto Trapping workflow The fixed values are set as default for Auto Trapping. The Fiery PRO80 applies these fixed values when you set Auto Trapping to On, with generally good results. However, to customize the values for Auto Trapping, define the values in the Auto Trapping pane in Color Setup. After you define the values, print a job with Auto Trapping set to On from the printer driver. Printing with default Auto Trapping You can print a job with default Auto Trapping by setting the Auto Trapping print option to On from the printer driver. COLOR SETUP FEATURES 27 TO PRINT A JOB WITH DEFAULT AUTO TRAPPING 1 Choose Print from your application. 2 Select Fiery PRO80 as your printer and click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears with the Fiery Printing tab selected. 3 Click the Color icon. 4 Select On for the Auto Trapping print option. 5 Click OK. 6 Click Print. The job is printed with the default Auto Trapping values. COLOR SETUP FEATURES 28 Setting up configurable Auto Trapping In Command WorkStation, the configurable Auto Trapping feature is in the Trapping tab under the Color Setup tab in Device Center. For more information about using Trapping, see Command WorkStation Help. Printing with configurable Auto Trapping After you define the Auto Trapping values, print a job with the Auto Trapping feature by setting the Auto Trapping print option to On from the printer driver. You can also change the setting for this print option in a job using Command WorkStation Job Properties. NOTE: If the Auto Trapping values are changed, reRIPping is required to print a job with the new values. Use the procedure on page 23 to print a job with custom Auto Trapping values from the printer driver. The job is printed with the Auto Trapping values defined in the Auto Trapping pane. COLOR SETUP FEATURES 29 Progressives The term “Progressives” refers to printing variations in a multi-color document. The variations may use from one to all of the available color channels in a print device. The majority of printing processes that involve more than one or two colorants apply the colorants sequentially. Traditionally, progressives are the intermediate states after some and before all colorants have been applied. The Progressives feature is more flexible, because it allows you to select which color is printed, using up to four sheets per original document page. NOTE: The Progressives feature is designed to show you the toner separations used by the job on the print device. The feature is not intended to be used to proof for another non-Fiery driven print device. NOTE: Progressives show the separations that the Fiery PRO80 sends to the print device, not the separations contained in the job source file. NOTE: Progressives is a “reporting” feature. It is not designed to be used with production features such as VDP and Imposition. Progressives is offered for diagnostic situations. With high volume applications or production environments, use Progressives only on the individual pages that need testing. Progressives workflow You can inspect the result of each channel with the default values for color channels in Progressives. However, if you must customize the selection of color channels or number of sheets to print, you can do so by specifying the color channels in the Progressives pane in Color Setup. After specifying the color channels, print a job with the customized Progressives by setting the print option to On from the printer driver. NOTE: You cannot use the Progressives and Postflight features at the same time. A constraint is set for these print options from the printer driver. NOTE: Clearing plates in ImageViewer does not have an effect on a Progressives job printed from ImageViewer. It prints with the values specified in the Progressives pane. For more information, see “ImageViewer” on page 39. COLOR SETUP FEATURES 30 Printing with the default Progressives Print a job with the default Progressives by setting the Progressives print option to On from the printer driver. TO PRINT A JOB WITH THE DEFAULT PROGRESSIVES 1 Choose Print from your application. 2 Select Fiery PRO80 as your printer and click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears with the Fiery Printing tab selected. 3 Click the Job Info icon. 4 Select Progressives. 5 Click OK. 6 Click Print. The job is printed with the default Progressives. COLOR SETUP FEATURES 31 Setting up Progressives The Progressives feature is in the Progressives tab under the Color Setup tab in the Device Center. For more information about setting up custom Progressives, see Command WorkStation Help. Printing with custom Progressives After specifying the color channels, print a job with custom Progressives by setting the Progressives print option to On from the printer driver. NOTE: Alternatively, you can send a job with the default Progressives setting and change the print option setting using Command WorkStation Job Properties. Use the same procedure on page 30 to print a job with the Progressives option from the printer driver. The printed job reflects the Progressives settings you defined in the Progressives pane. COLOR SETUP FEATURES 32 Halftone Simulation When proofing, we recommend that you print in contone mode, which uses the best color in the Fiery system. For advanced proofing purposes, Fiery Graphic Arts Package offers usercontrolled halftone generation. Halftoned proofs simulate, with reasonable accuracy, the final dots imaged on films or plates for offset printing. The halftone screening feature allows you to define the custom screening functions applied to your print job. Halftone Simulation workflow You can select pre-set halftone screens to print jobs with good results. When you must customize the values for a halftone screen, define a custom halftone in your application or in Command WorkStation, and then select the screen in the Halftone Simulation print option from the printer driver. For information about the print option and the procedure to print with the pre-defined halftone screens, see the following section. For information about the Halftone Simulation pane and the procedure to specify custom halftone screen values, see Command WorkStation Help. Halftone Simulation print option Access the halftone screening feature through the Halftone Simulation print option. Select from the following option items: • Application Defined: Uses a pre-defined halftone screen specified in an application. For information about the supported applications, see page 35. • Newsprint: Uses a pre-defined halftone screen that looks and feels like a newspaper. • User Defined Screen1/2/3: Applies a user-defined halftone screen based on the settings in Color Setup in Command WorkStation. NOTE: Use Newsprint and User Defined Screen1/2/3 with all applications, including Microsoft Office. COLOR SETUP FEATURES 33 Printing with pre-defined halftone screens Use the following procedure to print a job with a pre-defined default halftone screen from the printer driver. TO PRINT A JOB WITH A DEFAULT HALFTONE SCREEN 1 Choose Print from your application. 2 Select Fiery PRO80 as your printer and click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears with the Fiery Printing tab selected. 3 Click the Image icon. 4 Select a pre-defined halftone screen from the Halftone Simulation list. For more information, see page 32. 5 Click OK to close the Properties dialog box. 6 Click Print. The job is printed to the Fiery PRO80 with the pre-defined halftone screen. COLOR SETUP FEATURES 34 Setting up custom Halftone Simulation In Command WorkStation, the Halftone Simulation feature is in the Halftone Simulation tab under the Color Setup tab in Device Center. For more information about setting up custom Halftone Simulation screens, see Command WorkStation Help. Printing with custom halftone screens After specifying the halftone screen values for User Screen 1, User Screen 2, or User Screen 3, select a corresponding custom screen name from the printer driver. Use the same procedure on page 33 to print a job with a custom halftone screen. NOTE: Alternatively, you can send a job with a default halftone screen and change the print option setting using Command WorkStation Job Properties. The printed job reflects the settings you defined on the Halftone Simulation pane. COLOR SETUP FEATURES 35 Supported applications The following applications have been tested with Mac OS and Windows for compatibility with the Application Defined setting in the Halftone Simulation print option. Other applications should work as well, as long as they are using standard PostScript conversions on halftone screen definitions and the parameters used in the definitions are kept within the physical limitations of the printer. • Adobe Acrobat • Adobe Illustrator • Adobe InDesign • Adobe PageMaker • Adobe FreeHand • QuarkXPress Calibrating for custom halftone screens When color quality is important, make sure that the Fiery PRO80 is calibrated for the particular halftone screen that you use. Changing a halftone screen usually modifies the color response of the printer. The best color is achieved when an Output profile that is associated with the appropriate calibration response is selected at print time. However, when custom halftones are specified, the Fiery PRO80 does not have adequate information about the resulting color response. For this reason, achieving good color with custom halftone screens is often possible only when you perform custom halftone calibration and use a profile based on this custom halftone. Use the following procedure to calibrate the Fiery PRO80 for custom halftone screens. COLOR SETUP FEATURES 36 TO CALIBRATE THE FIERY PRO80 FOR CUSTOM HALFTONE SCREENS 1 Prepare the measurement instrument you use for calibration. 2 On the User Software DVD, open the folder that contains the custom halftone calibration files. The folder locations for Mac OS and Windows are as follows: Mac OS: Mac Color Files:Calibration Files:Halftone Calibration Files:Photoshop or Other Applications Windows: Windows Color Files\Calibration Files\Halftone Calibration Files\Photoshop or Other Applications The folder contains images of the measurement pages for various instruments and page sizes. If you print halftone screens only from Adobe Photoshop, open the Photoshop folder. Otherwise, open the Other Applications folder. NOTE: When opening or printing these files, do not “color-manage” using PostScript Color Management or ICC profiles that provide color conversions. 3 From Photoshop, open the image file that corresponds to your instrument and page size. From other applications, open a blank document and place the EPS file that matches your instrument and page size. The images were prepared for the final sheet page size. If you are placing an image, do so using no margins. Ignore warnings that the image may be clipped. NOTE: If you use these measurement pages with the Fiery PRO80 standard halftone screens, make sure to set the print option that controls the screen. COLOR SETUP FEATURES 37 4 Print the measurement page using your custom halftone and other print option settings. This page is now the custom calibration measurement page. You must print this measurement page with the CMYK/Grayscale Source print option set to ColorWise OFF, which prints the page without calibration. NOTE: To calibrate your printer, you must print CMYK patches in the raw state of the printer. Except for the Output Profile print option, the ColorWise print options are irrelevant and will be ignored. Use the Output Profile setting that corresponds to the type of paper you are using. To increase the speed and reliability of the calibration, print your measurement page, with the appropriate print option settings, to a PostScript file. The next time you calibrate, download this PostScript file. Retaining this file in the Hold queue of the Fiery PRO80 makes the calibration process faster. 5 Use the Calibrate feature in Command WorkStation to perform the calibration. NOTE: Do not use the Print button to generate the measurement page. Use the measurement page that you printed in step 4. For information about calibration, see Color Printing. SOFT PROOFING 38 SOFT PROOFING The Soft Proofing feature allows you to view accurate color previews of print jobs on a monitor. Use soft proofs to preview colors as they will appear when the job is printed. You access Soft Proofing through the Preview window in Command WorkStation. The Soft Proofing feature applies a specified color profile to the preview of a job to compensate for the unique display characteristics of your monitor. As a result, the preview provides a more accurate representation of how the job will appear when printed. For information about using Soft Proofing, see Command WorkStation Help. IMAGEVIEWER 39 IMAGEVIEWER ImageViewer allows you to soft proof and adjust colors in a job before it is printed. You can use the preview in ImageViewer to verify job placement, orientation, and content, as well as general color accuracy. If the job contains halftone screened settings, the preview shows a composite view of all separations at the dot level. You can select to display the plate data for each process color independently or in combination with the other colors, allowing inspection of individual plate data or a combination of any range of plates. Accessing ImageViewer Start ImageViewer from the Actions menu or Preview window of Command WorkStation. TO START IMAGEVIEWER FROM THE ACTIONS MENU 1 In Job Center in Command WorkStation, select the job that you want to preview. NOTE: ImageViewer recognizes only jobs that show processed/held (dark yellow) status. Processed/held jobs are also indicated by the raster job icon (page icon ringed with a halo). 2 If needed, choose Process and Hold from the Actions menu to move the job to processed/ held status. IMAGEVIEWER 40 3 To start ImageViewer, do one of the following: • Choose ImageViewer from the Actions menu. • Right-click the selected job and choose ImageViewer from the menu that appears. The ImageViewer main window appears. IMAGEVIEWER 41 TO START IMAGEVIEWER FROM THE PREVIEW WINDOW 1 In Job Center in Command WorkStation, select the job that you want to preview. NOTE: ImageViewer recognizes only jobs that show processed/held (dark yellow) status. 2 If needed, choose Process and Hold from the Actions menu to move the job to processed/held status. 3 Choose Preview from the Actions menu. Page thumbnails appear in the Preview window. 4 To start ImageViewer, select the thumbnail of the page that you want to soft proof, and click the ImageViewer button. The ImageViewer main window appears. For information about using ImageViewer, see Command WorkStation Help. 1 ImageViewer button 1 PREFLIGHT 42 PREFLIGHT The Preflight feature performs a simple check of the most common areas of error to ensure that the job will print successfully and to the expected quality on the selected printing device. The categories of errors that Preflight checks are: • Fonts • Spot Colors • Image Resolution • VDP Resources • Hairlines • Overprint • PostScript This feature is accessible from Command WorkStation. For more information about Preflight, see Command WorkStation Help. HOT FOLDERS FILTERS 43 HOT FOLDERS FILTERS This chapter describes the Hot Folders filters that convert various files to PostScript or PDF (Portable Document Format), or preflight certain files. Some of these filters are included in Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition and are available if Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition is enabled. Hot Folders filters allow you to convert certain file formats to PostScript or PDF or to preflight files for conformity. File conversion and preflighting take place on your computer in the Hot Folders application, which saves Fiery PRO80 resources. You can print files directly from Hot Folders filters without starting the application from which they were created. The filters included with Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition are: • General – EPS – JPEG – PDF – TIFF • Color Separated – DCS – TIFF/IT-P1 • Special – CT/LW – ExportPS – PDF2Go For information about using the filters in the Hot Folders application, see Hot Folders Help. For information about operating systems that support Hot Folders, see Welcome. For information about installing the Hot Folders application, see Utilities. POSTFLIGHT 44 POSTFLIGHT The Postflight feature helps you determine why some printed jobs may not deliver expected color. Acting as a diagnostic and training tool for all users, it provides helpful global and object-specific information about how a job is actually received and processed by the Fiery PRO80. Use Postflight to troubleshoot color problems with a previously printed job or as a preventive measure. You can print the original document (or RIPped and previewed) with all objects (images, graphics, and text) color-coded. A report explains what color spaces are used in the job and what print options affect those spaces. The report also provides information about the printing environment, such as calibration date, time, and method. Print a Test Page to verify the condition of the printing environment. Postflight is a powerful analysis tool that enumerates in its reports not only those color spaces that are used by visible objects, but any color space called by a job. This can be very useful in diagnosing puzzling situations that may require correction. For example: using one specific combination of a printer driver, an OS, and a desktop publishing application emitting separations for plates, you might find that: 1) the Postflight color-coded pages show the Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow separations in the “DeviceGray” color space, while the Black separation is shown in the “DeviceCMYK” color space and 2) the Postflight report enumerates: DeviceGray, DeviceCMYK and DeviceRGB. What once required a PostScript expert to decipher can now be interpreted in minutes using Postflight reports. The Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow pages are defined in “DeviceGray”, the Black page is using the “K” channel of DeviceCMYK, and the job is calling for the RGB color space, without applying it on any user-visible object. POSTFLIGHT 45 About Postflight When the Postflight print option is set to values other than Off, it provides the following information to help you identify possible problems: Postflight Test Page, Postflight colorcoded pages, and Postflight reports. Postflight Test Page You can print the Postflight Test Page alone or in combination with the color-coded pages. The Test Page is printed using the exact same media and global settings (such as calibration) as your job. However, color objects on this page are printed independently of the userspecified source color definitions (such as CMYK simulation and RGB). If the color on this page is not accurate, the problem lies with the printing environment (such as the calibration, output profile, or print device). If the color on this page prints correctly but objects in your job do not print in expected colors, it is likely that the problem lies with the color setting specific to these objects. Problems with objects can be: wrong color values for text and graphics, bad quality images, or out-of-gamut colors. Postflight color-coded pages With this option, Postflight prepares a color-coded version of the original document that displays each object with a color corresponding to the color space that the Fiery PRO80 received for the object. The colors used to represent the color spaces for objects are as follows: • Gray objects: Gray • CMYK objects: Cyan • RGB objects: Red • Device-Independent objects: Indigo • Spot color objects: Yellow By reviewing the colors for all objects, you can identify the print option settings that affect the color conversion of the objects and make appropriate modifications. POSTFLIGHT 46 Postflight reports You can print reports on color-coded pages, either alone or combined with the color-coded document. These reports are printed on the Fiery PRO80 default paper size (Letter for US, A4 for metric) and use the default calibrated color mode. The reports provide a document header with information (such as job name, date and time printed, and user name), a ColorWise global settings page, and object-specific settings pages. All pages include the job name, postflight date/time, and pagination in the bottom margin. • ColorWise global settings page provides information that affects every object in a job, such as Calibration Set, the date the Fiery PRO80 was calibrated, the method used for calibration, and the output profile that was used. • Object-specific settings pages provide a list of the settings that were used to process every object in each color space, thus suggesting the locations to correct problems. For example, if you see a problem with an object that is displayed in Cyan in a color-coded page, review the settings listed in the CMYK Objects page and try changing those settings. • Spot colors page lists all spot colors. For spot colors, the Postflight report lists the colors that are used in a job. It also indicates whether these colors are defined in the Fiery PRO80. When a spot color is defined in the Fiery PRO80, a patch is printed next to the color name. When a color is not defined in the Fiery PRO80, a white patch with an X is printed. POSTFLIGHT 47 Important notes on Postflight reports The main purpose of Postflight is to help you detect, diagnose, and prevent color-related problems. In contrast to generic preflight software, which attempts to predict how a job would be processed, a postflighted job is fully processed by the Fiery PRO80, allowing accurate reporting on the settings with which the job processed. This Postflight feature is especially useful in cases where a workflow that was used to submit a job inadvertently converts colors. This conversion occurs with some printer drivers, printing options, and conversions to PDF. This report focuses on color processing and does not list every printing option that affects your job. For more information about the ColorWise print options, see Color Printing. NOTE: Postflight reports list only those color spaces that were submitted to the Fiery PRO80 with your job. You may occasionally find that a job produces a Postflight report that includes information about color spaces that you cannot locate in the job’s color-coded pages. This occurs when an object in the color space is used in the job but is masked by another object, when an object is very light (for example, 0% of a spot color), or when the specific application or printer driver asks the Fiery PRO80 to process a particular color space but does not use it for user-visible objects. NOTE: A Postflight report contains only one page on global settings, and it can include only one Test Page. Therefore, Postflight cannot describe an entire job accurately unless all pages are printed with the same options and on the same media. This is the case, for instance, with Mixed Media jobs, because they can use multiple output profiles, up to one profile per media in the job. If the page range is set to the pages that use one media only, Postflight produces reliable results for the specified range. NOTE: Postflight is a “reporting” feature that is designed for diagnostic purposes. It is not designed for use with production features such as VDP and Imposition. For high-volume applications in production environments, use Postflight only on the individual pages that need testing. POSTFLIGHT 48 Postflight print option Access the Postflight feature through the Postflight print option. The following values are available for the Postflight print option: • Off (Default) • Concise Report • Test Page • Color-Coded Pages • All Components (Color-Coded document pages, Test Page, and Concise Report) NOTE: Select a portion of a job to print the Postflight pages by selecting the appropriate page range of a job from the printer driver. Postflight workflow The default settings in the ColorWise print options are such that in most cases you should not have to change them. However, there may be times when you receive unexpected colors for your job. Postflight is a procedure performed after you print a document and receive unexpected or inadequate color. If you have access to Command WorkStation, Postflight also helps you catch color problems before you actually print. Postflight processes your job and collects information about the color objects throughout. The information is then displayed in Color-Coded document pages, a Test Page, and a Concise Report. NOTE: The background defined in the Paper Simulation is not indicated as a CMYK object in the Postflight reports. For more information about Paper Simulation, see page 14. NOTE: You cannot use Postflight at the same time that you use the following features: Progressives, Substitute Colors, or Combine Separations. Constraints are set for these print options from the printer driver. POSTFLIGHT 49 The following scenarios show how Postflight can be helpful to users who demand high color quality. To diagnose an unexpected color (see page 50) Use Postflight to diagnose unexpected color in a job, or determine which print or calibration settings apply to a job. To check the calibration status prior to printing a job (see page 52) Consider the following before printing a job: • The FieryPRO80 may include many calibration sets. Which calibration set applies to my job? • When was the Fiery PRO80 last calibrated? • Which instrument was used for the last calibration? To check the quality of the output profile (see page 53) If you are considering using a new paper for which you do not have a custom profile, or if you suspect that the output profile for your print device may not precisely describe its color behavior, check your output profile by printing the Postflight Test Page. To diagnose a color problem of a specific object (see page 54) When experts have verified that the calibration is correct and that the global settings, including the output profile, are correct, but the color of a specific object is still not as intended, you can print a color-coded document and diagnose the problem. The detailed procedures of these scenarios are described in the following sections. NOTE: For each of the following procedures, instead of printing the report to the Fiery PRO80, you can also send it to the Hold queue of the Fiery PRO80 and preview the information (of a job with raster data) in ImageViewer. For more information about ImageViewer, see ImageViewer. To view the color of a job correctly, you must set your monitor and monitor profile correctly. For more information about the monitor and monitor profiles, see page 13. NOTE: The procedures for printing a job from a Windows and a Mac OS computer are similar. POSTFLIGHT 50 Scenario 1: Diagnose an unexpected color Use the following procedure to print a job with Postflight set to Off. TO PRINT A JOB 1 Open a job from your application. 2 Choose Print. 3 Select Fiery PRO80 as your printer and click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears with the Fiery Printing tab selected. 4 Click each option icon, and specify the values for each print option. 5 Click the Job Info icon. 6 Choose Off from the Postflight menu. 7 Click OK to close the Properties dialog box. 8 Click Print. The job is printed to the Fiery PRO80. After you print a job, use the following procedure to diagnose an unexpected color and print the job with edited color settings. POSTFLIGHT 51 TO DIAGNOSE AN UNEXPECTED COLOR AND PRINT WITH EDITED COLOR SETTINGS 1 Click the Job Info icon. 2 Choose All Components from the Postflight menu. For information about the components of Postflight, see page 45. 3 Click OK to close the Properties dialog box. 4 Click Print. Postflight Test Page, color-coded document pages, and Postflight Reports are printed. 5 Review all Postflight pages. For information about the Postflight pages, see page 45. 6 Make appropriate changes based on all Postflight pages. For more information about the changes, see the following section. 7 Choose Off from the Postflight menu. 8 Click OK. 9 Click Print. The job with the edited color settings is printed to the Fiery PRO80. 10 Return to Step 1, if needed. Repeat the steps until you get satisfactory color results. Making changes After reviewing the Postflight information, determine what changes are necessary and apply the changes. Depending on your printing environment, the condition of the print device, and the color settings, possible changes are as follows: • Correct problems with the print device (see the documentation that accompanies the print device). • Calibrate the Fiery PRO80 (see Color Printing). • Edit the colors of the output profile with Command WorkStation (see Command WorkStation Help). • Change the default settings in Command WorkStation (see Command WorkStation Help). • Change the job specific print option settings using Command WorkStation Job Properties. POSTFLIGHT 52 Scenario 2: Check the calibration status Use the following procedure to check the calibration status prior to printing a job. TO CHECK THE CALIBRATION STATUS AND PRINT WITH THE OPTIMUM CALIBRATION CONDITION 1 Click the Job Info icon. 2 Choose Concise Report from the Postflight menu. For information about Postflight reports, see page 46. 3 Click OK. 4 Click Print. The Concise Report page is printed. 5 Review the information in the ColorWise global settings page. 6 Perform calibration, if needed. If service has been performed on the print device since the last calibration, or calibration has not been performed, perform calibration using the Calibration Set specified in the Postflight report. For more information about calibration, see Color Printing. 7 Choose Off from the Postflight menu. 8 Click OK. 9 Click Print. 10 The job is printed to the newly calibrated Fiery PRO80. POSTFLIGHT 53 Scenario 3: Check the quality of the output profile Use the following procedure to check the quality of the output profile of the print device. TO CHECK THE QUALITY OF OUTPUT PROFILE AND PRINT WITH THE OPTIMUM OUTPUT PROFILE 1 Click the Job Info icon. 2 Choose Test Page from the Postflight menu. For information about the Postflight Test Page, see page 45. 3 Click OK. 4 Click Print. The Postflight Test Page is printed to the Fiery PRO80. 5 Review the quality of the color on the Postflight Test Page. NOTE: Make sure that this page was printed with the same media and print option settings as the job. 6 Review the instructions on the Postflight Test Page. 7 Edit the color of the output profile, or create a profile, if needed. It may be necessary to customize the output profile or create one to get optimal results on the media the job is using. 8 Choose Off from the Postflight menu. 9 Click OK. 10 Click Print. The job is printed to the Fiery PRO80 with the edited or newly created output profile. POSTFLIGHT 54 Scenario 4: Diagnose a color problem of a specific object Use the following procedure to diagnose a color problem. TO DIAGNOSE A COLOR PROBLEM OF A SPECIFIC OBJECT AND PRINT WITH THE EDITED COLOR SETTINGS 1 Click the Job Info icon. 2 Choose Color-Coded Pages from the Postflight menu. For information about Postflight color-coded pages, see page 45. 3 Click OK. 4 Click Print. Postflight color-coded pages are printed to the Fiery PRO80. NOTE: Alternatively, you can send the Postflight color-coded pages to the Hold queue of the Fiery PRO80 and preview them using ImageViewer. To preview the pages using ImageViewer, make sure that your monitor is set up according to the manufacturer’s recommendations and that the correct monitor profile is specified for your monitor. For information about monitor profiles, see page 13. 5 Review the Postflight color-coded pages. 6 Make changes to the color settings, if needed. For information about the ColorWise print options for various color spaces, see Color Printing. NOTE: Use the Color-Coded Pages Only setting to send a job to another print device that has a specific color-space requirement. For example, a document targeted to a CMYK-only press must have only Cyan-colored objects. 7 Choose Off from the Postflight menu. 8 Click OK. 9 Click Print. The job is printed to the Fiery PRO80 with the edited color settings. MULTIPLE PLATE SEPARATIONS 55 MULTIPLE PLATE SEPARATIONS The Multiple Plate Separations feature allows you to combine the multiple pre-separated color plates of a PostScript job into a composite color print. It supports: Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, and one or more spot colors. The results of combining the multiple plates are predictable and accurate, regardless of the original application used. This feature also fully supports DCS 2.0 file formats when included in a PostScript print job from a page layout application. Multiple plate separations workflow Use the following procedure to print a composite color print from the printer driver. NOTE: The procedures for printing a composite color print from a Windows and a Mac OS computer are similar. TO PRINT A COMPOSITE COLOR PRINT 1 Open a color-separated document in a supported application. 2 Choose Print. 3 Select Fiery PRO80 as your printer and click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears with the Fiery Printing tab selected. 4 Click the Color icon. 5 Select Combine Separations. 6 Click OK, and then click Print. A composite color print is printed to the Fiery PRO80. MULTIPLE PLATE SEPARATIONS 56 Combine Separations print option Access the Multiple Plates Separations feature through the Combine Separations print option from the printer driver. The following values are available for the Combine Separations print option: • Off (Default) • On Supported applications The following applications have been tested with Mac OS and Windows for compatibility with the Multiple Plates Separations feature: • Adobe Illustrator • Adobe InDesign • Adobe PageMaker • Adobe FreeHand • QuarkXPress PAPER SIMULATION 57 PAPER SIMULATION The Paper Simulation feature gives you the benefit of the absolute colorimetric rendering that renders the white point of the source color space as a visible color in the output profile color space. Paper Simulation workflow Use the following procedure to print a job with the fixed Paper Simulation feature On. NOTE: The procedures for setting the Paper Simulation print option from a Windows and a Mac OS computer are similar. TO PRINT WITH THE FIXED PAPER SIMULATION FEATURE ON 1 Choose Print from an application. 2 Select Fiery PRO80 as your printer and click Properties. The Properties dialog box appears with the Fiery Printing tab selected. 3 Click the Color icon, and then click Expert Settings. The Advanced Edit dialog box appears. PAPER SIMULATION 58 4 Select Paper Simulation and click OK. 5 Click OK, and then click Print. The job is printed with the fixed Paper Simulation feature. Paper Simulation print option Turn the Paper Simulation feature on or off through the print option from the printer driver. • On: Performs Absolute Colorimetric rendering. • Off (Default): Performs Relative Colorimetric rendering. UGRA/FOGRA MEDIA WEDGE 59 UGRA/FOGRA MEDIA WEDGE Ugra (the Graphic Technology Research Association of Switzerland) and FOGRA (the Graphic Technology Research Association of Germany) are organizations that support standardization and quality control. Together, they developed the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge CMYK v2.0, a control device used to evaluate hard copy proofs. One version of the the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge, which is supported by the Fiery PRO80 with Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition enabled, is customized for the ES-1000 spectrophotometer. The Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge, as printed on the Fiery PRO80, includes the standard color patches as well as the printer resolution, Fiery PRO80 model name, and other static information required by Ugra/FOGRA. Adding the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge to any job allows you to check the color accuracy and consistency of the printer by measuring the colors in the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge with the ES-1000 and supporting software, and comparing the measurements to reference values. Printing the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge There are two ways to include the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge in a job: • By incorporating the Ugra FOGRA-MediaWedge V2.2x.EPS file in the source document. This file is available on the User Software DVD, in the Color Bars folder inside the Windows Color Files folder or Mac Color Files folder. • By enabling the Control Bar print option. The Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge is the default Control Bar image. For more information about the Control Bar print option, see “Control Bar” on page 22. NOTE: This version of the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge is different from the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge used in the Integrated Altona Visual Test. For more information about the Integrated Altona Visual Test, see Integrated Altona Visual Test. UGRA/FOGRA MEDIA WEDGE 60 The Ugra FOGRA-MediaWedge V2.2x.EPS file is not an ordinary EPS file. Printing this file is supported only on a Fiery PRO80 with the Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition enabled. The file will not print if modified and saved as another version. You cannot currently use Compose, Impose, or QDM to embed the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge image in a PDF file. Reading the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge This version of the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge is optimized for the ES-1000. Other stripreading or spot-reading spectrophotometers may be used, if supported by their applications. EFI Color Verifier (part of Fiery Color Profiler Suite) is the quality control application officially supported to measure the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge as printed by the Fiery PRO80. Reference measurements are not supplied with the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge. With the appropriate software, such as Fiery Color Profiler Suite, you can create your own reference measurements, extract them from reference ICC profiles, or load them from standards. Using the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge for quality control You can use the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge to compare digital proofs with print standards, print runs with print standards, and digital proofs with print runs. It was originally designed to check the accuracy and consistency of CMYK values when compared to the international ISO 12642 standard, but this is not its exclusive usage: when the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge is printed in a job, you can measure the color accuracy and consistency of the output device for any printing condition, whether CMYK simulation or device CMYK color. INTEGRATED ALTONA VISUAL TEST 61 INTEGRATED ALTONA VISUAL TEST The Altona Test Suite is a project of the European Color Initiative (ECI). The test suite is suited for evaluating RIPs as well as other components in composite PDF workflows for print proofing or print production. Even if you are not yet using PDF/X3, you can use the Altona Test Suite to identify the weaknesses and limitations of a PDF workflow. The Integrated Altona Visual Test feature of the Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition allows you to verify the level of PDF/X support provided by the software and hardware used in a composite PDF workflow. You perform this test by printing the free version of the Altona Visual Test document on the Fiery PRO80 using the PDF workflow you want to verify. The Fiery PRO80 adds information to the printed output that can be used to determine: • If the workflow used to send PDF documents to the Fiery PRO80 is PDF/X compatible. • If a PDF/X workflow is compatible with the limited interpretation of PDF/X by Altona. • If the color quality of a PDF/X workflow meets a standard. The Integrated Altona Visual Test simplifies the setup and verification of PDF workflows. You can verify Altona PDF/X compliance without having to purchase the Altona Test Suite Application Kit. Altona Visual Test file You can obtain the free version of the Altona Visual Test file that you need for the Integrated Altona Visual Test at the ECI website (www.eci.org). Go to the Downloads area and download altona_visual_1v2a_x3.pdf. This PDF file must be imported to the Fiery PRO80 using Command WorkStation or Hot Folders, not printed through the printer driver. The printer driver converts a PDF file to PostScript, and therefore some PDF/X embedded information is lost. A PDF/X workflow cannot include printing through a printer driver. INTEGRATED ALTONA VISUAL TEST 62 For PDF/X compliance as tested by Altona, set the following settings for the Altona Visual Test job in Command WorkStation Job Properties: Scaling the Altona Visual Test file and any file designed with resolution-dependent objects often leads to artifacts such as moirés. For more information about these print options, except for Scale, see Color Printing. For more information about Scale, see Printing. If you use all of these settings, the Altona Visual Test File output will indicate PDF/X compliance as tested by Altona. Interpreting test results The Altona Visual Test file produces the printed page shown below. The Fiery PRO80 inserts the test results in the lower left area. Print option Setting Location in Job Properties PDF/X Output Intent Enabled Expert Color Settings (in Color) Composite Overprint Enabled Color RGB Source None Expert Color Settings (in Color) Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source Enabled Expert Color Settings (in Color) Scale 100% (no scaling) Layout 1 Test result area 1 INTEGRATED ALTONA VISUAL TEST 63 The following table indicates how to read the test results: If the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge, shown in the figure below, is printed in the test result area, the workflow is PDF/X compatible for Altona testing. It is therefore correct to visually and colorimetrically inspect the page. If you have a spectrophotometer, such as the ES-1000, and quality control software, such as EFI Color Verifier, you can proceed with measurements to evaluate the degree of color matching. The version of the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge inserted by the Fiery PRO80 is scaled and positioned for easy reading by a strip-reading instrument. NOTE: Be sure to use the free version of the Altona Visual Test file, not the purchased one. The purchased version always includes a version of the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge in the bottom left area, whether the workflow is valid or not. In addition, the version of the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge printed by the purchased version cannot be read conveniently by a strip-reading instrument. The Integrated Altona Visual Test confirms if your workflow maintains PDF integrity and if it produces valid output that can be used for further analysis and interpretation. To formally determine the level of PDF/X compliance, refer to Adobe published documentation. For information on how to interpret printed Altona pages, refer to the documentation available from the European Color Initiative (ECI). For information on the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge and how to use it for quality control in user designed workflows, see Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge. Test result Indicates Blank File printed to a Fiery PRO80 without the Integrated Altona Visual Test feature or workflow is not PDF/X compatible. A message indicating that the test file was not processed with optimal settings for Altona Workflow is not compatible with PDF/X as tested by Altona. Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge (a standard set of color bars) Workflow is compatible with PDF/X as tested by Altona. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 10 20 40 60 80 100 User: Version EFI 2007 Device: EFI Fiery Demo Copyright Fogra 2007 Liz.: 2FO180107 Resolution: 600 dpi Ugra/Fogra-Medienkeil CMYK-EPS V2.2x ID: 85377533 INTEGRATED ALTONA VISUAL TEST 64 Using a PDF/X workflow not compatible with Altona If text appears in the test result area instead of the Ugra/FOGRA Media Wedge, you cannot use the page for further Altona testing because the workflow is not PDF/X compatible as tested by Altona. However, the Fiery PRO80 is not limited to the Altona interpretation of PDF/X. In particular, if you are using the Fiery PRO80 for production printing rather than proofing, you might choose job settings that are not PDF/X compatible as tested by Altona. For example, you might choose to: • Disable the Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source option in production PDF/X workflows, to exploit the maximum gamut of the printer. • Scale down the document to increase margins or scale it up to reduce margins. • Use FieryPRO80-specific options, such as Image Smoothing, that would alter the images in the Altona Visual Test file but would enhance your production output. To get the best possible output from the Altona Test Suite, refer to the information about the Altona Visual Test File at http://www.efi.com/support/production/fiery/production/how-to/sys8/ Altona helps verify PDF/X compliance, with some bias towards ISO color standards. We recommend that you do not limit yourself to ISO color. PDF/X lets you define your own color spaces and take advantage of the wider color gamut often possible with digital printers. For more information about PDF/X and how to create compliant documents, refer to documents and information available from Adobe. INDEX 65 A Altona 59 Auto Trapping about 26 configurable 26 configuring 28 default 27 printing 28 workflow 26 C color accuracy 59 color consistency 59 colors, proofing 38, 39 Combine Separations print option 56 Command WorkStation Auto Trapping configuration 28 Control Bar feature 25 halftone calibration 37 Halftone Simulation feature 34 Paper Simulation white point editing 15 Progressives feature 31 Two-Color Print Mapping definition 19 Control Bar about 22 custom 25 default control bar 23 print option 23 printing 25 workflow 23 custom Control Bar 25 E EFI Color Verifier 60, 63 F Fiery Color Profiler Suite 60 FOGRA 59 G graphic arts features 9, 10 H halftone calibration files 36 Halftone Simulation Application Defined 32 calibrating 35 customizing 34 Newsprint 32 print option 32 printing 33, 34 User Defined Screen 32 workflow 32 Hot Folders filters 43 I ImageViewer, accessing 39 Integrated Altona Visual Test 59, 61 J jobs, viewing soft proof of 38, 39 M monitor profile, specifying 13 monitor, setting up 13 Multiple plate separations workflow 55 O output profile Paper Simulation 15, 17, 57 Postflight 49, 51, 53 Spot-On 20 P Paper Simulation fixed values 14, 57 Full (Output GCR) 17 print option 15, 58 printing 16, 57 white point editing 15 workflow 14, 57 PDF/X compatibility 61 PDF/X Output Intent 62 INDEX INDEX 66 Postflight about 45 accurate reporting 47 calibration status 49, 52 color problems 49, 54 color-coded pages 45, 54 ColorWise global settings page 46 ColorWise print options 47 Concise Report 52 global settings page 52 Hold queue 54 ImageViewer 54 information 51 making changes 51 monitor profile 54 Object-specific settings pages 46 Paper Simulation 48 print option 48 quality of output profile 49, 53 Spot colors 46 Test Page 45, 53 unexpected colors 49, 50 vs. Combine Separations 48 vs. Progressives 48 vs. Substitute Colors LEGAL NOTICES This product documentation is protected by copyright, and all rights are reserved. No part of it may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means for any purpose without express prior written consent from Electronics for Imaging, Inc. (“EFI”), except as expressly permitted herein. Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of EFI. This product documentation is provided in conjunction with the EFI software (“Software”) and any other EFI product described in this documentation. The Software is furnished under license and may only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of the EFI Software End User License Agreement set forth below. Patents This product may be covered by one or more of the following U.S. Patents: 5,109,241, 5,150,454, 5,170,182, 5,212,546, 5,260,878, 5,276,490, 5,278,599, 5,335,040, 5,343,311, 5,398,107, 5,424,754, 5,442,429, 5,459,560, 5,467,446, 5,506,946, 5,517,334, 5,537,516, 5,543,940, 5,553,200, 5,563,689, 5,565,960, 5,583,623, 5,596,416, 5,615,314, 5,619,624, 5,625,712, 5,640,228, 5,666,436, 5,682,421, 5,729,665, 5,745,657, 5,760,913, 5,799,232, 5,818,645, 5,835,788, 5,859,711, 5,867,179, 5,937,153, 5,940,186, 5,959,867, 5,970,174, 5,982,937, 5,995,724, 6,002,795, 6,025,922, 6,035,103, 6,041,200, 6,065,041, 6,081,281, 6,112,665, 6,116,707, 6,122,407, 6,134,018, 6,141,120, 6,166,821, 6,173,286, 6,185,335, 6,201,614, 6,209,010, 6,215,562, 6,219,155, 6,219,659, 6,222,641, 6,224,048, 6,225,974, 6,226,419, 6,238,105, 6,239,895, 6,256,108, 6,269,190, 6,271,937, 6,278,901, 6,279,009, 6,289,122, 6,292,270, 6,299,063, 6,310,697, 6,321,133, 6,327,047, 6,327,050, 6,327,052, 6,330,071, 6,330,363, 6,331,899, 6,337,746, 6,340,975, 6,341,017, 6,341,018, 6,341,307, 6,347,256, 6,348,978, 6,356,359, 6,366,918, 6,369,895, 6,381,036, 6,400,443, 6,429,949, 6,449,393, 6,457,823, 6,476,927, 6,487,568, 6,490,696, 6,501,565, 6,519,053, 6,539,323, 6,543,871, 6,546,364, 6,549,294, 6,549,300, 6,550,991, 6,552,815, 6,559,958, 6,572,293, 6,590,676, 6,599,325, 6,606,165, 6,616,355, 6,618,157, 6,633,396, 6,636,326, 6,637,958, 6,643,317, 6,647,149, 6,657,741, 6,660,103, 6,662,199, 6,678,068, 6,679,640, 6,687,016, 6,707,563, 6,741,262, 6,748,471, 6,753,845, 6,757,436, 6,757,440, 6,778,700, 6,781,596, 6,786,578, 6,816,276, 6,825,943, 6,832,865, 6,836,342, 6,850,335, 6,856,428, 6,857,803, 6,859,832, 6,866,434, 6,874,860, 6,879,409, 6,885,477, 6,888,644, 6,905,189, 6,930,795, 6,950,110, 6,956,966, 6,962,449, 6,967,728, 6,974,269, 6,977,752, 6,978,299, 6,992,792, 7,002,700, 7,023,570, 7,027,187, 7,027,655, 7,031,015, 7,046,391, 7,054,015, 7,058,231, 7,064,153, 7,073,901, 7,081,969, 7,090,327, 7,093,046, 7,095,518, 7,095,528, 7,097,369, 7,099,027, 7,105,585, 7,116,444, 7,177,045, 7,177,049, 7,177,472, 7,204,484, 7,206,082, 7,212,312, 7,229,225, 7,233,397, 7,233,409, 7,239,403, 7,245,400, 7,248,752, 7,259,768, 7,259,893, 7,280,090, 7,296,157, 7,301,665, 7,301,667, 7,301,671, 7,302,095, 7,302,103, 7,304,753, 7,307,761, 7,342,686, 7,343,438, 7,349,124, 7,365,105, 7,367,060, 7,367,559, 7,389,452, 7,396,119, 7,396,864, 7,397,583, 7,397,961, 7,426,033, 7,431,436, 7,433,078, 7,453,596, 7,460,265, 7,460,721, 7,461,377, 7,463,374, 7,466,441, 7,471,403, 7,480,070, 7,489,422, 7,495,812, 7,506,253, 7,522,311, 7,522,770, 7,528,974, 7,532,347, 7,552,207, 7,552,923, 7,554,687, 7,562,957, 7,564,583, 7,574,545, 7,574,546, 7,579,388, 7,587,336, 7,587,468, 7,598,964, 7,600,867, 7,630,106, 7,636,180, 7,648,293, RE36,947, RE38,732, D341,131, D406,117, D416,550, D417,864, D419,185, D426,206, D439,851, D444,793. Trademarks Auto-Count, BioVu, BioWare, ColorWise, Command WorkStation, Digital StoreFront, DocBuilder, DocBuilder Pro, DocStream, EDOX, the EFI logo, Electronics for Imaging, Fabrivu, Fiery, the Fiery logo, Fiery Driven, the Fiery Driven logo, Inkware, Jetrion, MicroPress, OneFlow, PressVu, Printellect, PrinterSite, PrintFlow, PrintMe, PrintSmith Site, Prograph, RIP-While-Print, Ultravu, and VUTEk are registered trademarks of Electronics for Imaging, Inc. in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and/or certain other foreign jurisdictions. BestColor is a registered trademark of Electronics for Imaging GmbH in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office. AutoCal, Balance, ColorPASS, Dynamic Wedge, EFI, Estimate, Fast-4, Fiery Link, Fiery Prints, Fiery Spark, the Fiery Prints logo, FreeForm, Hagen, Logic, Pace, Printcafe, PrintSmith, Print to Win, PSI, PSI Flexo, Rastek, RIPChips, Screenproof, SendMe, Splash, Spot-On, UltraTex, UV Series 50, VisualCal, and WebTools are trademarks of Electronics for Imaging, Inc. Best, the Best logo, Colorproof, PhotoXposure, Remoteproof, and Screenproof are trademarks of Electronics for Imaging GmbH. All other terms and product names may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners, and are hereby acknowledged. LEGAL NOTICES 2 Third-Party Notifications APPLE, INC. (“APPLE”) MAKES NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, REGARDING THE APPLE SOFTWARE. APPLE DOES NOT WARRANT, GUARANTEE, OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE APPLE SOFTWARE IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, CURRENTNESS, OR OTHERWISE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE APPLE SOFTWARE IS ASSUMED BY YOU. THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES IS NOT PERMITTED BY SOME STATES. THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT WILL APPLE, ITS DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR INDIRECT DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, AND THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE APPLE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF APPLE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. BECAUSE SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. Apple’s liability to you for actual damages from any cause whatsoever, and regardless of the form of the action (whether in contract, tort [including negligence], product liability, or otherwise), will be limited to $50. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the Software or in the documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 2001. Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of PANTONE color data and/or software. Certified PDF is a registered trademark of Enfocus, patent pending. PitStop Professional, PitStop Extreme, PitStop Server, Instant PDF, StatusCheck, CertifiedPDF.net, Instant Barcode, and PDF Workflow Suite are product names of Enfocus. Enfocus products and the use of Enfocus products are under license from Markzware under U.S. Patent No. 5,963,641. Enfocus is an EskoArtwork Company. The Software may contain various components which are subject to different licenses, including the EFI modified version of the Linux kernel binary image, certain LGPL libraries, certain other open source libraries and tools, and software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (www.apache.org). By using the Software or any of the incorporated components, you agree to be bound by the terms and conditions of their respective licenses. The respective copyright notices, acknowledgments and licenses can be found on the Fiery WebTools home page. As a reminder, the term "Software" as used in the EFI Software End User License Agreement does not include any open source software that is contained in the product, and the terms of the EFI Software End User License Agreement do not apply to open source software. Regulatory Notices and Markings THE FOLLOWING REGULATORY NOTICES AND MARKINGS APPLY IF THE EFI PRODUCT YOU RECEIVED INCLUDES EQUIPMENT. WARNING: FCC Regulations state that any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment. Refer to the Class Compliance sticker affixed to the back of your Fiery (or, in the case of embedded systems, to the sticker affixed to the print engine) to identify the appropriate classification (A or B, below) for this product. FCC Class A Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Industry Canada Class A Notice This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Avis de Conformation Classe A de l’Industrie Canada Cet appareil numérique de la Classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. LEGAL NOTICES 3 FCC Class B Declaration of Conformity This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. In order to maintain compliance with FCC regulations, shielded cables must be used with this equipment. Operation with non-approved equipment or unshielded cables is likely to result in interference to radio and TV reception. The user is cautioned that changes and modifications made to the equipment without the approval of the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment. Industry Canada Class B Notice This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Avis de Conformation Classe B de l’Industrie Canada Cet appareil numérique de la Classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. RFI Compliance Notice This equipment has been tested concerning compliance with the relevant RFI protection requirements both individually and on a system level (to simulate normal operation conditions). However, it is possible that these RFI Requirements are not met under certain unfavorable conditions in other installations. It is the user who is responsible for compliance of his particular installation. Dieses Gerät wurde sowohl einzeln als auch in einer Anlage, die einen normalen Anwendungsfall nachbildet, auf die Einhaltung der Funkentstörbestimmungen geprüft. Es ist jedoch möglich, dass die Funkentstörbestimmungen unter ungünstigen Umständen bei anderen Gerätekombinationen nicht eingehalten werden. Für die Einhaltung der Funkentstörbestimmungen einer gesamten Anlage, in der dieses Gerät betrieben wird, ist der Betreiber verantwortlich. Compliance with applicable regulations depends on the use of shielded cables. It is the user who is responsible for procuring the appropriate cables. Die Einhaltung zutreffender Bestimmungen hängt davon ab, dass geschirmte Ausführungen benützt werden. Für die Beschaffung richtiger Ausführungen ist der Betreiber verantwortlich. CE Marking (Declaration of Conformity) This product complies with the following EU directives: 93/68/EEC, 2002/96/EC, and 2006/66/EC. This declaration is valid for the area of the European Union. LEGAL NOTICES 4 EFI SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“LICENSE AGREEMENT”) CAREFULLY. THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND ELECTRONICS FOR IMAGING, INC. (“EFI”) REGARDING THE EFI SOFTWARE (“SOFTWARE”). YOU AGREE THAT THIS AGREEMENT IS LIKE ANY WRITTEN NEGOTIATED AGREEMENT SIGNED BY YOU. BY CLICKING TO ACKNOWLEDGE YOUR AGREEMENT DURING REVIEW OF AN ELECTRONIC VERSION OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT OR BY INSTALLING, COPYING OR BY OTHERWISE USING THE SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS ENFORCEABLE AGAINST YOU AND ANY LEGAL ENTITY (E.G., SYSTEM INTEGRATOR, CONSULTANT OR CONTRACTOR) THAT INSTALLS OR USES THE SOFTWARE ON YOUR BEHALF. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY, OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE, AND RETURN THE SOFTWARE TO YOUR PLACE OF PURCHASE FOR A FULL REFUND IN ACCORDANCE WITH ITS REFUND POLICIES. NOTICE TO PARTIES THAT ACT AS AN AGENT OF AN END USER OR OTHERWISE DO NOT INTEND TO BE END USERS OF THE SOFTWARE: IF YOU CLICK TO ACCEPT AN ELECTRONIC VERSION OF THIS AGREEMENT, OR INSTALL, COPY OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE AS AN AGENT ACTING ON BEHALF OF THE INTENDED LICENSEE, THEN YOU WILL BE DEEMED TO BE THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE AND BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT UNLESS YOU (I) DELIVER THE TANGIBLE MEDIA CONTAINING THE SOFTWARE AND THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT TO THE LICENSEE PRIOR TO PROVIDING THE LICENSEE ACCESS TO THE SOFTWARE, AND (II) REMOVE AND DESTROY ANY COPIES OF THE SOFTWARE IN YOUR POSSESSION. IF YOU HAVE EXECUTED A SEPARATE SIGNED WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH EFI FOR THE SOFTWARE, IN THE EVENT OF ANY CONFLICTING TERMS AND CONDITIONS BETWEEN SUCH WRITTEN AGREEMENT AND THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT, THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE WRITTEN AGREEMENT SHALL CONTROL. License EFI grants you a limited, non-exclusive license to use the Software solely in accordance with the terms and conditions of this License Agreement, solely as specified in the EFI product documentation, and solely with the product(s) specified in the EFI product documentation (“Product(s)”). Some third-party materials distributed with the Software may be subject to other terms and conditions, which are typically found in a separate license agreement or “Read Me” file located near such third party materials. The term “Software” as used in this License Agreement shall mean the EFI software (including software provided by third party suppliers) and all documentation, downloads, on-line materials, bug fixes, patches, releases, release notes, updates, upgrades, technical support materials, and information regarding the EFI software. The terms and conditions of this License Agreement shall apply to and govern your use of all such items; however EFI may provide other written terms with an update, release or upgrade. The Software is licensed, not sold. You may use the Software solely for the purposes described in the EFI product documentation. You may not rent, lease, sublicense, lend, or otherwise distribute the Software or use the Software in any time sharing, service bureau, or similar arrangement. Certain Software may only be installed at a single, physical location and any relocation of such Software will require EFI’s written consent. You may not make or have made, or permit to be made, any copies of the Software or portions thereof, except one (1) backup or archive copy for the purposes permitted in this License Agreement; provided, however, that under no circumstances may you make or have made, or permit to be made, any copies of any portion of the Software that is included on any portion of the controller board or hardware of a product. Any copies of the Software that you are permitted to make pursuant to this Agreement must contain the same copyright and other proprietary notices that appear on or in the Software. EFI may occasionally verify the number of copies and configurations, and/or the physical location of Software in use by you. Any such verification shall be conducted during normal business hours and in such a manner as not to unreasonably interfere with your normal business activities. In the event such verification discloses an underpayment of fees, you shall promptly pay such underpaid fees to EFI in accordance with EFI’s then-current price list. You agree not to localize, translate, disassemble, decompile, decrypt, reverse engineer, unbundle, repackage, discover the source code of, modify, create derivative works of, or in any way change any part of the Software. As between you and EFI, you assume all risk and are solely responsible for any and all liability resulting from your use of the Software in a way that violates (or that produces content that violates) any law or the rights of others including, without limitation, laws concerning copyright infringement or privacy. LEGAL NOTICES 5 Intellectual Property Rights You acknowledge and agree that all rights, title, and interest, including all intellectual property rights, in and relating to the Software, all EFI Products, and all copies, modifications, and derivative works thereof, are solely owned by and shall remain with EFI and its suppliers. Except for the express limited license granted in this License Agreement, no right or license of any kind is granted. You receive no rights or license under any patents, copyrights, trade secrets, trademarks (whether registered or unregistered), or other intellectual property. You agree not to adopt, register, or attempt to register any EFI trademark or trade name or any confusingly similar mark, URL, internet domain name, or symbol as your own name or the name of your affiliates or products, and agree not to take any other action which impairs or reduces the trademark rights of EFI or its suppliers. Excluded License Notwithstanding anything to the contrary, you are not licensed to (and you agree that you will not) integrate or use the Software in any manner that would cause the Software in whole or in part to become subject to any of the terms of an Excluded License. “Excluded License” means any license that requires as a condition of use, modification and/ or distribution of software subject to the Excluded License, that such software or other software combined and/or distributed with such software be (i) disclosed or distributed in source code form; (ii) licensed for the purpose of making derivative works; or (iii) redistributable at no charge. Updates If the Software is an upgrade or update to a previous version of the Software, you must possess a valid license to such previous version in order to use such upgrade or update. All upgrades and updates are provided to you on a license exchange basis. You agree that by using an upgrade or update you voluntarily terminate your right to use any previous version of the Software. As an exception, you may continue to use previous versions of the Software after you use the upgrade or update only to assist you in the transition to the upgrade or update, provided that the upgrade or update and the previous versions are installed on the same device. Upgrades and updates may be licensed to you by EFI with additional or different terms. Confidentiality The Software, including its structure, organization, and code, constitutes valuable trade secrets and confidential, proprietary information of EFI and its suppliers and you may not distribute or disclose the Software. You may, however, permanently transfer all of your rights under this License Agreement to another person or legal entity provided that: (1) such a transfer is authorized under all applicable export laws and regulations, including the laws and regulations of the United States, including the United States Export Administration Regulations; (2) you transfer to the person or entity all of the Software (including all copies, updates, upgrades, media, printed documentation, and this License Agreement); (3) you retain no copies of the Software, including no backup, archival, or other copies, however stored; and (4) the recipient agrees to all of the terms and conditions of this License Agreement. Termination Unauthorized use, copying, or disclosure of the Software, or any breach of this License Agreement will result in automatic termination of this license and will make available to EFI other legal remedies. In the event of termination, you must destroy all copies of the Software and all component parts thereof. All provisions of this License Agreement relating to confidentiality of the Software, disclaimers of warranties, limitation of liability, remedies, damages, governing law, jurisdiction, venue, EFI’s intellectual property rights, and Adobe Software shall survive any termination of this license. If the Software contains a License Key, upon termination, EFI may immediately and without notice, execute the License Key, defined as a programming code, intentionally inserted into the Software, which if executed, renders the Software or portions thereof inoperable. YOU ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT THE SOFTWARE MAY CONTAIN A LICENSE KEY AND THAT EXECUTION OF SUCH LICENSE KEY SHALL RENDER THE SOFTWARE OR A PORTION THEREOF INOPERABLE. YOU FURTHER ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT THE LICENSE KEY IS NOT A VIRUS AND THAT IN THE EVENT THAT THE LICENSE KEY IS EXECUTED DUE TO YOUR BREACH, YOU MAY BE OBLIGATED TO PAY EFI’S THEN CURRENT FEE TO REACTIVATE THE SOFTWARE, PLUS ANY OTHER APPLICABLE FEES, INCLUDING LICENSE FEES. LEGAL NOTICES 6 Limited Warranty and Disclaimer EFI warrants that the Software, if used as specified in the EFI product documentation, will perform substantially in accordance with the EFI product documentation for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt when used on the recommended operating system, platform, and hardware configuration. All warranty claims must be made, along with proof of purchase, within such ninety (90) day period. EFI makes no warranty or representation that the Software will meet your specific requirements, that the operation of the Software will be uninterrupted, secure, fault-tolerant, or error free, or that all defects in the Software will be corrected. EFI makes no warranty, implied or otherwise, regarding the performance or reliability of any other Products or services or any third party products (software or hardware) or services. THE INSTALLATION OF ANY THIRD PARTY PRODUCTS OTHER THAN AS AUTHORIZED BY EFI WILL VOID THIS WARRANTY. USE, MODIFICATION, AND/OR REPAIR OF THE SOFTWARE OR AN EFI PRODUCT OTHER THAN AS AUTHORIZED BY EFI WILL VOID THIS WARRANTY. FURTHER, THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS VOID IF A PROBLEM WITH THE SOFTWARE ARISES FROM ACCIDENT, ABUSE, MISAPPLICATION, ABNORMAL USE, VIRUS, WORM, OR SIMILAR CIRCUMSTANCE. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, EXCEPT FOR THE EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY SET FORTH ABOVE (“LIMITED WARRANTY”), EFI MAKES AND YOU RECEIVE NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES RELATING TO THE SOFTWARE, ANY PRODUCT AND/OR ANY SERVICES, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED, STATUTORY, OR IN ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT OR ANY OTHER COMMUNICATION. EFI AND ITS SUPPLIERS SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, REPRESENTATIONS, AND CONDITIONS, INCLUDING THOSE OF SECURITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. THERE IS NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE AND/OR ANY PRODUCT WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED, FAULT-TOLERANT, SECURE, OR ERROR-FREE. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY, AND THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF EFI AND ITS SUPPLIERS, RELATING TO ANY AND ALL SOFTWARE, PRODUCTS, SERVICES, AND/OR APPLICABLE WARRANTIES SHALL BE, AT EFI’S OPTION, (1) TO REPAIR OR REPLACE THE SOFTWARE THAT DOES NOT MEET THE LIMITED WARRANTY; OR (2) PROVIDE A REFUND OF THE PRICE PAID (IF ANY) FOR THE SOFTWARE THAT DOES NOT MEET THE LIMITED WARRANTY. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THIS SECTION, EFI AND ITS SUPPLIERS SHALL PROVIDE NO REFUNDS, RETURNS, EXCHANGES, OR REPLACEMENTS. Limitation of Liability TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, YOU AGREE THAT THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF EFI AND ITS SUPPLIERS FOR ALL CLAIMS RELATED TO ANY SOFTWARE, PRODUCT, SERVICES, AND/OR THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT, REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION (WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT, UNDER STATUTE, OR OTHERWISE), SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT PAID BY YOU, IF ANY, FOR THE EFI SOFTWARE. YOU AGREE THAT SUCH AMOUNT IS SUFFICIENT TO SATISFY THE ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT AND THAT SUCH A LIABILITY IS A FAIR AND REASONABLE ESTIMATE OF ANY LOSS AND DAMAGE LIKELY TO BE SUFFERED IN THE EVENT OF ANY WRONGFUL ACT OR OMISSION BY EFI AND/OR ITS SUPPLIERS. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL EFI AND ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE SOFTWARE, PRODUCTS OR SERVICES, LOST PROFITS OR DATA, THIRD PARTY CLAIMS, OR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT, RELIANCE, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, RELATED TO ANY SOFTWARE, PRODUCT, SERVICES AND/ OR THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF EFI AND ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. YOU AGREE THAT THE PRICE OF THE EFI SOFTWARE REFLECTS THIS ALLOCATION OF RISK. YOU ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY AND DISCLAIMERS FORM AN ESSENTIAL ELEMENT OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT, WITHOUT WHICH EFI WOULD NOT HAVE LICENSED THE EFI SOFTWARE TO YOU. BECAUSE SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW SOME OR ALL OF THE EXCLUSIONS AND/OR LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY HEREIN, SOME OR ALL OF THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS AND LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. LEGAL NOTICES 7 Export Restrictions The Software and EFI Products are subject to the export laws and regulations of the United States, including the United States Export Administration Regulations. The license granted to you herein is conditioned upon your compliance with all applicable export laws and regulations, including the export laws and regulations of the United States. You represent and agree that you will not use, disclose, distribute, transfer, export, or re-export any portion of the Software or any EFI Product in any form in violation of any applicable export laws and regulations, including the export laws and regulations of the United States. In addition, if the Software is identified as an export controlled item under the applicable export laws and regulations, you represent and warrant that you are not a citizen of, or located within, an embargoed or otherwise restricted nation and that you are not otherwise prohibited under such laws and regulations from receiving the Software. Consent to Use of Data You agree that EFI may collect and use anonymously aggregated technical information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the Software. Subject to EFI’s then-current privacy policy and applicable laws and regulations, EFI may: (i) use this information to improve its products or to provide customized services or technologies to you; (ii) transfer this information to its affiliates, agents, and partners; and (iii) transfer this information to the United States and/or any other country where EFI and its affiliates, agents, and partners maintain facilities. Adobe Software The Software may contain the following Adobe Systems Incorporated (“Adobe”) materials: (a) software included as part of the printing system, including PostScript® software, Font Programs (digitally-encoded machine-readable outline data encoded in special format and in encrypted form used to produce various typefaces) and other Adobe software (collectively, “Printing Software”), and (b) other software which runs on a computer system for use in conjunction with the Printing Software (“Host Software”). The following terms are applicable to the materials provided by Adobe: 1. Printing Software. You may use the Printing Software (in object code form only) (i) on a single output device that contains an embedded controller; OR (ii) for Printing Software residing on a host computer, on up to the authorized number of central processing units (“CPUs”) for which you are licensed, for imaging to the licensed output device(s), solely for your own internal business purposes. You may not change the name of any driver software file or driver software icon without consent of EFI. You may use Roman character Font Programs and Adobe Type Manager® to reproduce weights, styles, and versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (“Typefaces”) on up to five (5) computers for use with the Printing Software. 2. Host Software. You may install the Host Software in a single location on a hard disk or other storage device on one (or the authorized number of) computer(s) for which you are licensed (“Permitted No. of Computers”), and, provided that the Host Software is configured for network use, install and use the Host Software on a single file server for use on a single local area network for either (but not both) of the following purposes: (i) permanent installation onto a hard disk or other storage device on the Permitted No. of Computers; or (ii) use of the Host Software over such network, provided the use of the Host Software does not exceed the Permitted No. of Computers. You may make one backup copy of the Host Software (which shall not be installed or used). You are hereby notified that Adobe Systems Incorporated, a Delaware corporation located at 345 Park Avenue, San Jose, CA 95110-2704 (“Adobe”) is a third-party beneficiary to this License Agreement to the extent that this License Agreement contains provisions which relate to your use of any software, font programs, typefaces, and/or trademarks licensed or supplied by Adobe. Such provisions are made expressly for the benefit of Adobe and are enforceable by Adobe in addition to EFI. ADOBE WILL HAVE NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER TO YOU FOR ANY ADOBE SOFTWARE OR TECHNOLOGY LICENSED HEREUNDER. U.S. Government Restricted Rights Use, duplication, or disclosure of the Software by the United States Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 or DFARS 227.7202-3 - 227.7202-4 and, to the extent required under U.S. federal law, the minimum restricted rights as set out in FAR 52.227-14, Restricted Rights Notice (June 1987) Alternate III(g)(3) (June 1987) or FAR 52.227-19 (June 1987). To the extent any technical data is provided pursuant to the Agreement, such data is protected per FAR 12.211 and DFARS 227.7102-2 and to the extent explicitly required by the U.S. Government, is subject to limited rights as set out in DFARS 252.227.7015 (November 1995) and DFARS 252.227-7037 (September 1999). In the event that any of the above referenced agency regulations are modified or superseded, the subsequent equivalent regulation shall apply. The name of the Contractor is Electronics for Imaging, Inc. LEGAL NOTICES 8 Governing Law and Jurisdiction The rights and obligations of the parties related to this License Agreement will be governed in all respects by the laws of the State of California exclusively, as such laws apply to contracts between California residents performed entirely within California. The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods and any other similar convention does not apply to this License Agreement. For all disputes related to the Software, Products, services, and/or this License Agreement, you consent to the exclusive personal jurisdiction and venue of the state courts in San Mateo County, California and the federal court for the Northern District of California. General This Agreement is the entire agreement held between us and supersedes any other communications or advertising with respect to the Software, Products, Services, and any other subject matter covered by this License Agreement. If any provision of the License Agreement is held invalid, such provision shall be deemed modified to the extent necessary to be enforceable and the other provisions in this License Agreement shall continue in full force and effect. EFI is a registered trademark of Electronics for Imaging, Inc. in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and/or certain other foreign jurisdictions. If you have any questions, see the EFI web site at www.efi.com. Electronics for Imaging, Inc. 303 Velocity Way Foster City, CA 94404 USA Copyright © 2004-2010 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. All rights reserved. Part Number: 45091181 7 January 2010 Fiery® PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery® PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server Printing © 2010 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered under Legal Notices for this product. 45093727 29 July 2010 CONTENTS 3 CONTENTS INTRODUCTION 7 Terminology and conventions 7 About this document 8 User software 9 System requirements 9 PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 10 Installing the Mac OS X printer driver files 10 Installing from the User Software DVD 11 Downloading printer drivers using WebTools 12 Downloading printer drivers from the Fiery PRO80 13 Uninstalling printer driver files 14 Setting up the Fiery PRO80 for printing 15 Setting up printing with Mac OS X v10.5 or v10.6.x 15 Setting up printing with Mac OS X v10.4.x 19 Setting up printing with Mac OS X v10.3.9 23 Adding a non-English printer on Mac OS X v10.5 or v10.6 26 Configuring Installable Options 26 Using Desktop Printer (optional) 26 Printing from Mac OS X computers 27 Selecting the Fiery PRO80 in the Printer List 28 Setting print options and printing from Mac OS X applications 30 Defining and printing custom page sizes 37 Viewing the printer status 38 CONTENTS 4 PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 39 Installing Windows printer drivers 39 Installing printer drivers by Point and Print 40 Downloading printer drivers using WebTools 42 Downloading printer drivers from the Fiery PRO80 43 Installing printer drivers from the User Software DVD 44 Installing and connecting to a virtual printer 47 Uninstalling printer drivers 49 Setting up the Fiery PRO80 for printing 50 Setting up printing connections 50 Completing the SMB printing connection 50 Completing Standard TCP/IP Port (Raw or LPR) printing connections 51 Completing IPP connections 54 Configuring installable options 57 Printing from Windows computers 58 Setting print options and printing from Windows applications 59 Specifying default print options for print jobs 65 Customizing the Quick Access icon 66 Defining and printing custom page sizes 67 Viewing the printer status 67 Saving files to print at a remote location 67 PRINTING METHODS 68 Configuring and using Job Monitor 69 Configuring the connection 69 Using Job Monitor 69 E-mail Service 69 Printing using an e-mail client 70 Managing print jobs with e-mail commands 72 CONTENTS 5 Printing from a USB device 73 FTP printing 74 Printing and retrieving a secure print job 75 Sample printing 76 Using Sample Print 76 Job Batching 77 Cancelling batch jobs 77 Using Command WorkStation Print Next and Rush Print commands with batch jobs 77 Accounting batch jobs 77 PRINT OPTIONS 78 About printer drivers and printer description files 78 Setting print options 79 Print option override hierarchy 79 Print options and default settings 80 Job Info options 81 Media options 83 Layout options 85 Color options 94 Image options 98 Finishing options 100 Variable Data Printing (VDP) options 102 Stamping/Watermark options 103 Overriding print option settings 104 CONTENTS 6 Additional information 105 Auto Trapping 105 Booklet Maker 105 Booklet Maker in the printer driver 107 Booklet Maker in Job Properties 108 Booklet Maker: 1-up Perfect binding 113 Document size and Paper size 115 Duplex printing 116 Fold options 117 Gang-up printing 118 Image Shift 119 Mixed Media 119 Output Delivery 121 Paper Catalog 122 Punch and Punch Holes 123 Scale 124 Scale to Fit 124 Sorter Mode 124 Staple option 125 Text Thinning/Reversed Text Enhancement 126 Halftoned Text Enhancement 126 Text Smoothing Enhancement 126 User Authentication 127 INDEX 129 INTRODUCTION 7 INTRODUCTION This document describes how to install the printer drivers and printer description files for the Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server, set up the Fiery PRO80 for printing, and print from Apple Mac OS and Microsoft Windows computers. It also provides information about the Fiery PRO80 print options and describes several printing methods that can be used to print to the Fiery PRO80. For information about setting up network servers and clients to use the Fiery PRO80, see Configuration and Setup. For general information about using the color printer, your computer, application software, or network, see the documentation that accompanies those products. For information about supported operating systems and system requirements, see Welcome. Terminology and conventions This document uses the following terminology and conventions. Term or convention Refers to Aero Fiery PRO80 (in illustrations and examples) Fiery PRO80 Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server Mac OS Mac OS X Printer 80C-KM printer and 70-60C-KM printer Titles in italics Other documents in this set Windows Microsoft Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2003/2008/2008 R2 Topics for which additional information is available by starting Help in the software Tips and information INTRODUCTION 8 About this document This document covers the following topics: • Installing printer files on Mac OS computers • Setting up the Fiery PRO80 for printing from Mac OS computers • Printing from Mac OS computers • Installing printer files on Windows computers • Setting up the printing connections on Windows computers • Printing from Windows computers • FieryPRO80 print options • Using other printing methods to print to the Fiery PRO80 A warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the equipment safely, always pay attention to these warnings. A caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the equipment safely, always pay attention to these cautions. Operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the equipment correctly, and avoid damage to the equipment or property. Term or convention Refers to INTRODUCTION 9 User software The following table lists the user software that is described in this document. This is the user software you need for setting up basic printing on the Fiery PRO80. Other documents may describe other user software depending on what you are trying to accomplish. When you install user software on a Windows computer, you use the Fiery User Software Installer. System requirements For information about supported operating systems and system requirements, see Welcome. User software Description PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file and associated files (for Windows) Files that provide information about the Fiery PRO80 and your particular printer model to your application and printer driver. PostScript Printer Description (PPD/Plugin) files (for Mac OS X) Files that are used with the PostScript printer driver that allow the Fiery PRO80 to appear in the Print and Page Setup dialog boxes of popular applications. The Fiery PRO80 PPDs provide information about the printer to your application and printer driver. PageMaker PPD files Files that allow you to print to the Fiery PRO80 from Adobe PageMaker. You must install the appropriate PPD in PageMaker. See the PageMaker documentation for instructions. PostScript screen fonts (for Mac OS X) PostScript/TrueType screen fonts that correspond to the printer fonts installed on the Fiery PRO80. For a complete list of PostScript/ TrueType fonts installed on the Fiery PRO80, print a Font List. For more information, see Command WorkStation Help. Job Monitor (for Windows) Monitor the status of connected Fiery PRO80s and print jobs sent to them. Job Monitor is automatically installed when the printer driver is installed on a Windows computer. For more information, see “Configuring and using Job Monitor” on page 69. Printer Delete Utility (for Windows) Uninstall the Windows printer driver. For more information, see “Uninstalling printer drivers” on page 49. Fiery Software Uninstaller Utility (for Mac OS X) Uninstall the Mac OS X printer and associated printer driver files. For more information, see “Uninstalling printer driver files” on page 14. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 10 PRINTING FROM MAC OS X To set up the Fiery PRO80 as a PostScript printer on a Mac OS X computer, install the printer driver files that correspond to your printer and set up the Fiery PRO80 for printing. Printer drivers provide a way to communicate information about print jobs between your applications, the Fiery PRO80, and the printer. For the location of each procedure, see the following table. Installing the Mac OS X printer driver files The Mac OS X printer driver files are provided on the User Software DVD or can be downloaded from the Fiery PRO80 over the network or using WebTools. The following sections describe how to install the printer files for the Fiery PRO80. You can install printer drivers as follows: • From the User Software DVD • From WebTools, using the Downloads tab to download the printer driver files before installing the printer driver NOTE: WebTools is available if the administrator has enabled Internet access to the Fiery PRO80. • From the Fiery PRO80 by downloading the printer driver files over the network before installing the printer driver For the location of each procedure, see the following table. Procedure See Installing the Mac OS X printer files page 10 Printing from Mac OS X computers page 27 Setting up the Fiery PRO80 for printing page 15 Procedure See Downloading printer drivers from the Fiery PRO80 page 13 Downloading printer drivers using WebTools page 12 Installing printer drivers from the User Software DVD page 11 Uninstalling printer driver files page 14 PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 11 Installing from the User Software DVD The User Software DVD provides the following software for Mac OS X (see the OSX:Printer Driver folder): • OSX Installer: Installs the printer driver files required to print from Mac OS X. • Language folders: Printer description files that are installed by OSX Installer. You do not need to open these folders or install them manually on your computer. The appropriate files are installed by OSX Installer. TO INSTALL THE PRINTER DRIVER FILES FOR MAC OS X 1 Quit all open applications. 2 Mac OS X v10.3.9 and v10.4.x: Make sure that the Printer Setup Utility is not running on your computer. Printer Setup Utility updates the list of available printers when it starts. If a printer description file is added while Printer Setup Utility is running, you cannot select the associated printer model until you restart. Mac OS X v10.5.x and v10.6.x: Proceed to step 3. 3 Insert the User Software DVD into the DVD drive. 4 Open the OSX : Printer Driver folder on the User Software DVD. If you are installing from a folder you downloaded from WebTools or the Fiery PRO80, browse to the Printer Driver folder on your desktop. 5 Double-click the OSX Installer icon to start installing the printer driver. 6 Follow the on-screen instructions. The OSX Installer installs the printer driver files that correspond to the Fiery PRO80. 7 When copying is complete, click Quit. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 12 Downloading printer drivers using WebTools WebTools allows you to download installers for printer drivers to your computer directly from the Fiery PRO80. Before you download the printer driver files, the administrator must enable Internet access to the Fiery PRO80. For more information about setting up and starting WebTools, see Utilities. TO DOWNLOAD PRINTER DRIVERS WITH WEBTOOLS 1 Start your Internet or intranet browser and type the DNS name or IP address of the Fiery PRO80. 2 Click the Downloads tab. 3 Click the link for the printer drivers that you want to install (Printer Files for Mac OS X). A file named OSX.dmg is downloaded to your desktop. The file contains a folder named Printer Driver in a compressed format. If your Internet browser is equipped with an expander utility, such as StuffIt Expander, the folder decodes and decompresses automatically. If the Printer Driver folder does not automatically decode and decompress, double-click the file to start the utility that performs that function. 4 Open the OSX : Printer Driver folder. 5 Double-click the OSX Installer icon to start installing the printer driver. Follow the on-screen instructions. For instructions on installing the printer driver for Mac OS X, see page 11. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 13 Downloading printer drivers from the Fiery PRO80 You can download printer driver files to your computer directly from the Fiery PRO80 over the network. TO DOWNLOAD PRINTER DRIVER FILES FROM THE FIERY PRO80 1 In the Finder, choose Connect to Server from the Go menu. 2 Type SMB:// followed by the name or IP address of the Fiery PRO80 and click Connect. If you cannot locate your Fiery PRO80, contact your administrator. 3 Type the user name and password in the SMB/CIFS File System Authentication dialog box. The “Guest” account can be used as the default. The Guest account does not require a password. If the Guest account cannot be used, ask your network administrator for an account. 4 Select the Mac_User_SW folder from the shared volume list and click OK. 5 Open the OSX : Printer Driver folder. 6 Double-click the OSX Installer icon to start installing the printer driver. Follow the on-screen instructions. For instructions on installing the printer driver for Mac OS X, see page 11. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 14 Uninstalling printer driver files The Fiery Software Uninstaller utility is installed and used locally. You do not need to connect to the Fiery PRO80 before you use the software. The Fiery Software Uninstaller is available from the OSX folder of the User Software DVD. You can also download it to your computer directly from the Fiery PRO80 over the network. TO INSTALL AND USE THE FIERY SOFTWARE UNINSTALLER UTILITY 1 Copy the Fiery Software Uninstaller.dmg to the Desktop from the User Software DVD or the Mac_User_SW folder from the shared volume list on the Fiery PRO80. 2 On the Desktop, double-click the Fiery Software Uninstaller.dmg. The Fiery Software Uninstaller opens in the Finder showing the Fiery Software Uninstaller icon and an arrow pointing to a link to the Applications folder. 3 Select the Fiery Software Uninstaller icon on the left and drag it onto the Applications folder to install. 4 Browse to the Applications folder and double-click the Fiery Software Uninstaller icon. 5 Click the Printers tab if it is not selected. 6 Select a printer from the Installed Printers list and do one of the following: • Click Remove Printer and Driver to remove the printer along with its printer driver files. If you want to remove the printer and the associated printer driver, you can select only one printer at a time. • Click Remove Printer to remove only the printer from the Installed Printers list, but leave the printer driver installed. The utility can remove only printers that are not currently in use or open on the Dock. NOTE: If more than one printer uses a printer driver, removing the printer driver also removes all printers using that driver. 7 To confirm that you wish to delete the printer, type your password in the dialog box and click OK. 8 Click the Drivers tab to view the installed printer drivers. 9 Close the Fiery Software Uninstaller dialog box. TO DELETE THE FIERY SOFTWARE UNINSTALLER UTILITY • Delete the Fiery Software Uninstaller icon from the Mac OS X Applications folder. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 15 Setting up the Fiery PRO80 for printing The following section describes how to set up the Fiery PRO80 on a Mac OS X computer. NOTE: The steps for setting up the Fiery PRO80 on a computer with Mac OS X v10.6.x, Mac OS X v10.5.x, Mac OS X v10.4.x, and Mac OS X v10.3.9 are different. Any differences are noted in the following sections. For the location of each procedure, see the following table. Setting up printing with Mac OS X v10.5 or v10.6.x Use the following procedures to set up the Fiery PRO80 on a computer with Mac OS X v10.5 or v10.6.x. TO SET UP THE FIERY PRO80 FROM THE PRINT DIALOG BOX 1 Open a file in your application. 2 Choose Print from the File menu. The Print dialog box appears. 3 Select Add Printer from the Printer list. In the dialog box that appears, select a printer connection. Use one of the printer connections in the following table to add a printer. Procedure See Adding a non-English printer on Mac OS X v10.5 and v10.6 page 26 Configuring Installable Options page 26 Setting up printing with Mac OS X v10.3.9 page 23 Setting up printing with Mac OS X v10.4.x page 19 Setting up printing with Mac OS X v10.5 or v10.6.x page 15 Using Desktop Printer (optional) page 26 PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 16 TO SET UP THE FIERY PRO80 USING PRINT & FAX 1 Choose System Preferences from the Apple menu, and then choose Print & Fax. The Print & Fax dialog box appears. 2 Click the “+” button to add a printer. In the dialog box that appears, select a printer connection. Use one of the following connections to add a printer. TO ADD A PRINTER WITH THE DEFAULT (BONJOUR OR APPLETALK) CONNECTION 1 Click the Default icon in the dialog box. The Default pane appears. The names of printers with default connections are listed. The virtual printers that are configured at the Fiery PRO80 are also listed. NOTE: The names of the virtual printers appear as in the Printer Name list. Printing connection See AppleTalk page 18 Default (Bonjour or AppleTalk) page 16 IP Printer page 17 PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 17 2 Select the Fiery PRO80 from the list. The information about the selected printer appears at the bottom of the Default pane. The appropriate PPD file for the Fiery PRO80 is automatically selected. If your administrator configured the Secure Access printing at the Fiery PRO80, the PPD file for Secure Access printing is selected. 3 Click Add. AppleTalk: The Fiery PRO80 name appears in the Printer List of the Print & Fax dialog box. Bonjour: The Installable Options pane in the Print & Fax dialog box appears. Click Continue to return to the Print & Fax dialog box. The Fiery PRO80 name appears in the Printer List. 4 Choose Fiery PRO80 from the Printer List. 5 Click Options & Supplies, and then click the Driver tab. 6 Specify the installable option settings, and then click OK. TO ADD A PRINTER WITH THE IP PRINTER CONNECTION 1 Click the IP icon in the dialog box. The IP pane appears. 2 LPD printing: Select Line Printer Daemon - LPD from the Protocol list, type the Fiery PRO80 IP address or DNS name in the Address field, and then type the print connection (print, hold or direct) in the Queue field. Proceed to step 4. IP printing: Select Internet Printing Protocol - IPP from the Protocol list and type the Fiery PRO80 IP address or DNS name in the Address field. Proceed to step 3. The IP address or DNS name appears in the Name field. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 18 3 Type “ipp/” followed by the print connection (print, hold, or direct, or name of virtual printer) in lowercase letters in the Queue field. NOTE: The Fiery PRO80 requires a queue name. Do not leave the Queue field empty. 4 For Mac OS X v10.5.x: Choose “Select a driver to use” from the Print Using menu. For Mac OS X v10.6.x: Choose “Select Printer Software” from the Print Using menu. 5 Type Fiery PRO80 in the search filter to narrow the search, and then select the PPD file from the list. 6 Click Add. The Installable Options pane in the Print & Fax dialog box appears. 7 Click Continue. The Fiery PRO80 with its IP address appears in the Printer List. 8 Choose Fiery PRO80 from the Printer List. 9 Click Options & Supplies, and then click the Driver tab. 10 Specify the installable option settings, and then click OK. For information about configuring installable options, see printer driver Help. TO ADD A PRINTER WITH THE APPLETALK CONNECTION NOTE: Use this procedure if the Fiery PRO80 is in a different AppleTalk zone than your computer. If the Fiery PRO80 is in the same zone, it is displayed as a default following the procedure on page 16. 1 Click the AppleTalk icon in the dialog box. The AppleTalk pane appears. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 19 2 Select the AppleTalk zone for the Fiery PRO80 from the list. The AppleTalk printers in the specified zone are listed. The virtual printers that are configured at the Fiery PRO80 are also listed. NOTE: The names of the virtual printers appear as in the Name list. 3 Select the Fiery PRO80 name in the Printer List and click Add. The Fiery PRO80 name appears in the Printer List of the Print & Fax dialog box. 4 Choose Fiery PRO80 from the Printer List. 5 Click Options & Supplies, and then click the Driver tab. 6 Specify the installable option settings, and then click OK. Setting up printing with Mac OS X v10.4.x Use the following procedures to set up the Fiery PRO80 on a computer with Mac OS X v10.4.x. TO SET UP THE FIERY PRO80 FROM THE PRINT DIALOG BOX 1 Open a file in your application. 2 Choose Print from the File menu. The Print dialog box appears. 3 Select the Add Printer from the Printer list. In the dialog box that appears, select a printer connection. Use one of the printer connections in the following table to add a printer. TO SET UP THE FIERY PRO80 USING PRINTER SETUP UTILITY 1 In the Finder, choose Utilities from the Go menu. 2 Start Printer Setup Utility. The Printer List dialog box appears. 3 Click Add. In the dialog box that appears, select a printer connection. Use one of the printer connections in the following table to add a printer. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 20 TO SET UP THE FIERY PRO80 USING PRINT & FAX 1 Choose System Preferences from the Apple menu, and then choose Print & Fax. The Print & Fax dialog box appears. 2 Click the “+” button to add a printer. In the dialog box that appears, select a printer connection. Use one of the following connections to add a printer. TO ADD A PRINTER WITH THE DEFAULT BROWSER (BONJOUR OR APPLETALK) CONNECTION NOTE: Bonjour printers are available to Mac OS X v10.4.x computers only if Bonjour is enabled on the Fiery PRO80. 1 Click Default Browser in the Printer Browser dialog box. The Default Browser pane appears. The names of printers with default connections are listed. The virtual printers that are configured at the Fiery PRO80 are also listed. If the printer is not listed in the Printer Name list, click More Printers. NOTE: The names of the virtual printers appear as in the Name list. Printing connection See AppleTalk page 22 Default Browser (Bonjour or AppleTalk) page 20 IP Printer page 21 PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 21 2 Select the Fiery PRO80 from the list. The information about the selected printer appears at the bottom of the Default Browser pane. The appropriate PPD file for the Fiery PRO80 is automatically selected. 3 Click Add. AppleTalk: The Fiery PRO80 name appears in the Printer List of the Print & Fax dialog box. Bonjour: The Installable Options pane in the Printer Browser dialog box appears. Click Continue to return to the Print & Fax dialog box. The Fiery PRO80 name appears in the Printer List. 4 Choose Fiery PRO80 from the Printer List and click Show Info. 5 In the Printer Info dialog box, choose Installable Options, specify the installable option settings, and then click Apply Changes. 6 Close the Printer Info dialog box. TO ADD A PRINTER WITH THE IP PRINTER CONNECTION 1 Click IP Printer in the Printer Browser dialog box. The IP Printer pane appears. 2 LPD printing: Select Line Printer Daemon - LPD from the Protocol list, type the Fiery PRO80 IP address or DNS name in the Address field, and then type the print connection (print, hold or direct) in the Queue field. Proceed to step 6. IP printing: Select Internet Printing Protocol - IPP from the Protocol list and type the Fiery PRO80 IP address or DNS name in the Address field. Proceed to step 3. The IP address or DNS name appears in the Name field. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 22 3 Type “ipp/” followed by the print connection (print, hold, or direct, or name of virtual printer) in lowercase letters in the Queue field. NOTE: The Fiery PRO80 requires a queue name. Do not leave the Queue field empty. 4 Print Using: Choose the appropriate manufacturer name or model, and then select the file for the Fiery PRO80 PPD. 5 Click Add. The Installable Options pane in the Printer Browser dialog box appears. 6 Click Continue. The Fiery PRO80 with its IP address appears in the Printer List. 7 Choose Fiery PRO80 from the Printer List and click Show Info. 8 In the Printer Info dialog box, choose Installable Options, specify the installable option settings, and then click Apply Changes. For information about configuring installable options, see printer driver Help. 9 Close the Printer Info dialog box. TO ADD A PRINTER USING THE APPLETALK CONNECTION NOTE: Use this procedure if the Fiery PRO80 is in a different AppleTalk zone than your computer. If the Fiery PRO80 is in the same zone, it is displayed as a default following the procedure on page 20. 1 Click Default Browser or IP Printer in the Printer Browser dialog box. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 23 2 Click More Printers. The dialog box with a list of other connections appears. 3 Select AppleTalk from the connection list. The AppleTalk pane appears. 4 Select the AppleTalk zone for the Fiery PRO80 from the list. The AppleTalk printers in the specified zone are listed. The virtual printers that are configured at the Fiery PRO80 are also listed. NOTE: The names of the virtual printers appear as in the Name list. 5 Select the Fiery PRO80 name in the Name list and click Add. The Fiery PRO80 name appears in the Printer List dialog box. 6 Choose Fiery PRO80 from the Printer List and click Show Info. 7 In the Printer Info dialog box, choose Installable Options, specify the installable option settings, and then click Apply Changes. 8 Close the Printer Info dialog box. Setting up printing with Mac OS X v10.3.9 Use the following steps for setting up the Fiery PRO80 on a computer with Mac OS X v10.3.9. TO SET UP THE FIERY PRO80 FOR PRINTING 1 In the Finder, choose Utilities from the Go menu. 2 Start Printer Setup Utility or Print Center. The Printer List dialog box appears. 3 Click Add. In the dialog box that appears, select a printer connection. Use one of the following connections to add a printer. Printing connection See AppleTalk page 24 LPD/LPR page 25 PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 24 TO ADD A PRINTER WITH THE APPLETALK CONNECTION 1 Select AppleTalk from the list. The AppleTalk pane appears. 2 Select the AppleTalk zone for the Fiery PRO80 from the zone pop-up list. The AppleTalk printers in the specified zone are listed. The Virtual Printers that are configured at the Fiery PRO80 are also listed. NOTE: The names of the virtual printers appear as in the Name list. 3 Select the Fiery PRO80 name in the Name list. 4 Click Add. The appropriate PPD file for the Fiery PRO80 is automatically selected. The Fiery PRO80 name appears in the Printer List. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 25 TO ADD A PRINTER WITH THE LPD/LPR CONNECTION 1 Select IP Printing from the list. The IP Printing pane appears. 2 Select LPD/LPR from the Printer Type list. 3 Type the Fiery PRO80 IP address in the Printer Address field. 4 Type the virtual printer name in the Queue Name field or leave it blank for the default queue. 5 Select the appropriate model from the Printer Model list. The Model Name pane appears in the dialog box. 6 Select the PPD file from the Model Name list. 7 Click Add. The Fiery PRO80 with its IP address appears in the Printer List. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 26 Adding a non-English printer on Mac OS X v10.5 or v10.6 When adding a non-English Fiery PRO80 printer on Mac OS X v10.5 or 10.6, you must navigate to Other to select the correct printer driver for your language. TO ADD A NON-ENGLISH PRINTER 1 Open the Add Printer dialog box. The list of available Bonjour printers is displayed. 2 Select the Fiery PRO80 from the list. 3 From the Print Using menu, select Other. 4 Navigate to Library > Printers > PPDs > Contents > Resources, and open the language folder that corresponds to the language that you are using on your system. 5 Select the Fiery PRO80 from the list. 6 Click Open, and then click Add. Configuring Installable Options To use the print options for the printer and Fiery PRO80 appropriately, you must configure the Fiery PRO80 from your computer for the options that are installed on the printer. Configure the options manually. For information about configuring installable options, see printer driver Help. Using Desktop Printer (optional) After adding Fiery PRO80 to the Printer List in Print & Fax or the Printer Setup Utility, you can create and use the Desktop Printer feature. For information about the Desktop Printer feature, see printer driver Help. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 27 Printing from Mac OS X computers You can print to the Fiery PRO80 just as you would print to any other printer from a Mac OS X application. Select the Fiery PRO80 as the current printer in the Printer List and print the file from the application. In addition to this method, you can download files to the Fiery PRO80 using Hot Folders or the Docs WebTool, and print documents using Command WorkStation (see Utilities). After you install the Fiery PRO80 printer driver files using the OSX Installer and set up the Fiery PRO80 for printing, you can print directly from most Mac OS X applications. Using the appropriate PPD file, you can control the Fiery PRO80 printing features by specifying print options from the Print dialog boxes. For more information about the Fiery PRO80 print options, see page 80. To achieve optimal printing results from specific applications, see Color Printing, Fiery Color Reference, and Command WorkStation Help. For the location of each procedure, see the following table. Procedure See Defining and printing custom page sizes page 37 Selecting the Fiery PRO80 in the Printer List page 28 Setting print options and printing from Mac OS X applications page 30 Viewing the printer status page 38 PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 28 Selecting the Fiery PRO80 in the Printer List Before you print a job, you must select the Fiery PRO80 from the Printer List. Use the following procedure to select the Fiery PRO80 as your default printer. TO SELECT THE FIERY PRO80 AS THE DEFAULT PRINTER WITH MAC OS X V10.5 OR MAC OS X V10.6 1 Make sure that the Fiery PRO80 is connected to the network and turned on. 2 Choose System Preferences from the Apple menu, and then choose Print & Fax. The Print & Fax dialog box appears. The printers that are set up for printing are listed. The virtual printers that are configured at the Fiery PRO80 and set up for printing are also listed. 3 To make the Fiery PRO80 the default printer, select it from the Default Printer menu. 4 Close the window. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 29 TO SELECT THE FIERY PRO80 AS THE DEFAULT PRINTER WITH MAC OS X V10.4.X 1 Make sure that the Fiery PRO80 is connected to the network and turned on. 2 In the Finder, choose Utilities from the Go menu. 3 Start Printer Setup Utility. The Printer List dialog box appears. The printers that are set up for printing are listed. The virtual printers that are configured at the Fiery PRO80 and set up for printing are also listed. 4 Select the Fiery PRO80 in the Printer List to specify it as your current printer. 5 Click the Make Default icon. The Fiery PRO80 is now your default printer. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 30 Setting print options and printing from Mac OS X applications In Mac OS X applications, print options are set from the Page Setup dialog box and the Print dialog box. For information about specific print options, see Print Options. NOTE: Some default print options are set by your administrator during Setup. For information about the current server default settings, contact your administrator or the operator. NOTE: The following procedure uses Mac OS X v10.5 illustrations. TO SET PRINT OPTIONS AND PRINT FROM MAC OS X 1 Open a file and choose Page Setup from the application’s File menu. 2 For Settings, choose Page Attributes. For Format for, choose the Fiery PRO80. The Paper Size option in the Page Setup dialog box is the same as the Document Size print option on the Fiery Features Media tab. Document Size is the page size defined in your original application’s Print setup (or Page Setup) dialog box. The Paper Size print option on the Fiery Features Media tab is the size of the actual sheet of paper on which your job will print. The default value of the actual paper size is the paper size set in the Page Setup dialog box. 3 Select the Page settings for your print job. 4 Click OK. 5 Choose Print from the application’s File menu. 6 Choose the Fiery PRO80 as your printer. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 31 7 Choose Fiery Features from the drop-down list. NOTE: For information about Two-Way Communication, see page 38. For information about using presets, see printer driver Help. 8 Click Customize to specify the options shown in the Quick Access window. You can select a shortcut from the Available Shortcuts list and add it to the Current Shortcuts list, as well as remove a shortcut from the Current Shortcuts list. Click OK to save your changes. For information about customizing the Quick Access view, see printer driver Help. 1 Fiery Features 2 Customize button 3 Full Properties button 4 Presets 5 Two-Way Communication 1 2 3 4 5 PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 32 9 Click Full Properties in the Quick Access pane. The Job Info tab is displayed in the Printing Preferences dialog box. 10 Type your user name or domain\user name in the User Name field if User Authentication is enabled on the Fiery PRO80 under User Authentication. 11 Type your local password or domain password in the Password field if User Authentication is enabled on the Fiery PRO80 under User Authentication. 12 Type information in the Notes field under Job Notes. 13 Type instructions to the operator about the job in the Instructions field. These instructions can be displayed in Command WorkStation, but do not appear in the Job Log. These instructions can be edited by the operator. 14 Type public in the Account Name and Account Password fields to send public jobs on the volume track. The volume track must be enabled on the 80C-KM printer and 70-60C-KM printer. 15 If you are sending a secure print job, type a password in the Secure Print field. 16 Type values for the other fields, as required. For information about these fields, see page 80. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 33 17 Click the Color icon and specify the color profile options for the job. In the Color Mode area, select a color mode for the job. NOTE: To view the basic and expert color settings from the Fiery PRO80 in this dialog box, make sure that Two-Way Communication is enabled. For information about enabling Two-Way Communication, see printer driver Help. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 34 18 To use basic color management features, such as the printer color settings, click Basic Settings. To revert to the Fiery PRO80 default color settings, click Server Defaults. To edit advanced color management features, such as RGB/Lab Rendering Intent, click Expert Settings and proceed to step 19. Otherwise, proceed to step 21. Two-Way Communication On PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 35 19 To edit the advanced color management features, such as RGB/Lab Rendering Intent, click Expert Settings. The Expert Color Settings Advanced Edit dialog box appears. The advanced edit controls are divided into three tabbed categories: Color Input, Gray & Black Processing, and Output. 20 After you edit the expert settings, click OK. To revert to the Fiery PRO80 default color settings, click Server Defaults. 21 Specify the color settings for the print job and click OK. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 36 22 Choose other printer-specific options. These print options are specific to the Fiery PRO80 and the printer. These options override settings in Fiery PRO80 Printer Setup but can be changed from Command WorkStation. If you choose Printer’s default, the job prints according to the settings specified in Setup. For more information about these options and overrides, see Print Options. Some print options that are selectable from an application or are provided by Mac OS are similar to the print options that are specific to the Fiery PRO80 and the printer. In these cases, use the print options specific to the Fiery PRO80 and the printer that appear in the Fiery Features menu. The application may not set up the file properly for printing on the Fiery PRO80, resulting in unexpected finishing, printing errors, or longer processing time. When you print to your selected printer, make sure to clear the Collated check box in the Copies & Pages pane of the Mac OS X v10.4 or earlier printer driver or in the main pane of the Mac OS X v10.5 printer driver. If you select an invalid setting or combination of settings when printing a document, no error message appears. For example, you may be able to select duplex printing on transparency media. Invalid settings and combinations are ignored by the Fiery PRO80. 23 Click the VDP icon to specify variable data printing options. For more information about VDP print options, see page 102. PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 37 24 Click the Stamping icon to specify a watermark for the print job. For more information about watermarks, see printer driver Help. 25 Click the Printer icon to view printer status. For more information about monitoring printer status, see printer driver Help. 26 Click the remaining print option icons to specify the appropriate settings for the print job and click OK. 27 From your application, click Print to send your print job. Defining and printing custom page sizes With custom page sizes, you define the dimensions of a printed page. After you define a custom page size, you can use it from within an application without redefining it each time you print. When you create custom page sizes, specify Width dimensions to correspond with the shorter side of your job and specify Height dimensions to correspond with the longer side of your job. Set custom page sizes in this way, regardless of the orientation settings in the application. The printer driver custom size range is 100 x 140mm to 330 x 1200mm for the 80C-KM printer. The printer driver custom page size range is 100mm x 148mm to 330mm x 1200mm for the 70-60C-KM printer. However, the actual maximum paper size the Fiery PRO80 can print is 330mm x 487mm. The Fiery PRO80 supports a minimum custom page size of 1.0 inch x 1.0 inch (25.4mm x 25.4mm). Consult your service representative about printing banners and posters. For information about defining and printing custom pages sizes, see printer driver Help. Height Width Width Height Portrait Landscape PRINTING FROM MAC OS X 38 Viewing the printer status If you enabled a TCP/IP network, you can retrieve printer status and color settings from the Fiery PRO80 and display them in the printer driver using the Two-Way Communication option. The printer status includes the current paper and toner levels. You can set the color settings on the Fiery PRO80 using Command WorkStation. For more information about color print options, see Color Printing or Command WorkStation Help. For information about enabling Two-Way Communication, see printer driver Help. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 39 PRINTING FROM WINDOWS To set up the Fiery PRO80 as a printer on a Windows computer, install the printer driver files that correspond to your printer and set up the Fiery PRO80 for printing. Printer drivers provide a way to communicate information about print jobs between your applications, the Fiery PRO80, and the printer. For the location of each procedure, see the following table. Installing Windows printer drivers Installing printer drivers and printer description files is the first step in setting up the Fiery PRO80 as a PostScript printer. You can install printer drivers as follows: • From the Fiery PRO80 through Point and Print using SMB printing • From WebTools, using the Downloads tab to download the printer driver files before installing the printer driver NOTE: WebTools is available if the administrator has enabled Internet access to the Fiery PRO80. • From the Fiery PRO80 by downloading the printer driver files over the network before installing the printer driver • From the User Software DVD NOTE: Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows Server 2008 R2 have a User Account Control (UAC) feature. You must be the administrator or a user with administrator privileges to install printer drivers. NOTE: If the Fiery PRO80 printer driver is already installed, you must uninstall it before you install a new driver (see “Uninstalling printer drivers” on page 49). Procedure See Installing Windows printer drivers page 39 Printing from Windows computers page 58 Setting up the Fiery PRO80 for printing page 50 PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 40 For the location of each procedure, see the following table. Installing printer drivers by Point and Print SMB printing (also known as Windows or WINS printing) allows you to install PostScript printer drivers on your computer from the Fiery PRO80 using Point and Print, and print to a particular connection (Print queue, Hold queue, Direct connection or Virtual Printer). Each connection (print, hold, direct or virtual printer) requires a separate installation. Repeat the procedure for each connection. When you install the printer driver using Point and Print, you cannot configure installable options manually. The installed options are displayed as the Fiery PRO80 configuration in the printer driver. For more information, see “Configuring installable options” on page 57. BEFORE YOU BEGIN Ask your administrator to do the following in Setup on the Fiery PRO80: • Assign the Fiery PRO80 a valid IP address. Ask your administrator for the IP address or DNS name required in the following procedure. • Configure the Fiery PRO80 for SMB printing. NOTE: SMB printing is referred to as Windows Printing in Setup and on the Configuration page. For more information, see Configuration and Setup or Configure Help. Procedure See Downloading printer drivers from the Fiery PRO80 page 43 Downloading printer drivers using WebTools page 42 Installing and connecting to a virtual printer page 47 Installing printer drivers by Point and Print page 40 Installing printer drivers from the User Software DVD page 44 Uninstalling printer drivers page 49 PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 41 TO SET UP SMB PRINTING ON WINDOWS COMPUTERS 1 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003: Right-click Network Neighborhood or My Network Places, and select Find Computer or Search for Computers. Windows Vista/Server 2008: Click Start, choose Control Panel, double-click Network and Sharing Center, and then click the View computers and devices link. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then under the Network and Sharing Center heading, click the View network computers and devices link. 2 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003: Type the name or IP address of the Fiery PRO80 and click Search Now or Search. Windows Vista/Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Type the name of the Fiery PRO80 in the Search field and click Enter. Windows Server 2008: Type the name or \\IP address of the Fiery PRO80 in the Search field and click Enter. If you cannot locate the Fiery PRO80, contact your Fiery PRO80 administrator. 3 Double-click the name of the Fiery PRO80 to display enabled print connections. NOTE: For a description of each print connection, see Configuration and Setup. 4 Double-click the connection that you want to set up (print, hold, direct, or virtual printer). The files are installed on your computer. NOTE: You may receive a message that you are about to connect to a printer on the Fiery PRO80, which will automatically install a printer driver on your machine. Click Yes to continue. 5 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers. Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes. Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes. Windows Vista: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then double-click Printers. Windows Server 2008: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and under Classic View, double-click Printers. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Click Start and choose Devices and Printers. The printer is displayed in the Printers or Printers and Faxes window. 6 Right-click the Fiery PRO80 icon and choose Properties. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 42 7 Click Print Test Page on the General tab. If the Test Page prints successfully, you are ready to print from the computer. 8 Repeat the previous steps for the other connections that you want to set up. Downloading printer drivers using WebTools WebTools allows you to download installers for printer drivers to your computer directly from the Fiery PRO80. Download the printer driver files from the Fiery PRO80 using WebTools and then follow the procedures on page 44 to install the printer driver. Before you download the printer driver files, the administrator must set specific Fiery PRO80 options in Setup. You must also prepare each client computer to communicate with the Fiery PRO80 over the Internet or intranet. For more information about Setup, see Configuration and Setup. For more information about setting up and starting WebTools, see Utilities. TO DOWNLOAD PRINTER DRIVER FILES WITH WEBTOOLS 1 Start your Internet or intranet browser and type the DNS name or IP address of the Fiery PRO80. 2 Click the Downloads tab. 3 Click the link for the item that you want to install. For Windows printer drivers, click the Printer Files link under the Windows heading. 4 If a dialog box prompts you to open the file or save it to disk, choose to save it to disk. 5 Browse to the location where you want to save the PRNTDRVE.EXE file and click Save. The file is downloaded from the Fiery PRO80. This compressed file is an archive that contains multiple files. 6 Double-click the PRNTDRVE.EXE file to extract the files. Depending on your operating system, you might be prompted to select a location to extract the files to. Follow the instructions for your operating system to install the printer driver. The procedures are the same as for installing from the DVD, except that after you click Have Disk, you browse to the location where you extracted the files, rather than to the DVD. For instructions on installing the Windows printer driver, see “To install and complete the print connection for Windows” on page 44. For more information, see WebTools Downloads Help. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 43 Downloading printer drivers from the Fiery PRO80 You can download printer drivers files to your computer directly from the Fiery PRO80 over the network, and then install them following the procedures in “Installing printer drivers from the User Software DVD” on page 44. TO DOWNLOAD PRINTER DRIVER FILES FROM THE FIERY PRO80 1 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003: Right-click Network Neighborhood or My Network Places, and select Find Computer or Search for Computers. Windows Vista/Server 2008: Click Start, choose Control Panel, double-click Network and Sharing Center, and then click the View computers and devices link. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Click Start, choose Control Panel, choose Network and Internet, and then under the Network and Sharing Center heading, click the View network computers and devices link. 2 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003: Type the name or IP address of the Fiery PRO80 and click Search Now or Search. Windows Vista/Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Type the name of the Fiery PRO80 in the Search field and click Enter. Windows Server 2008: Type the name or \\IP address of the Fiery PRO80 in the Search field and click Enter. If you cannot locate your Fiery PRO80, contact your administrator. 3 Double-click the name of the Fiery PRO80. A folder called PC_User_SW is displayed along with the enabled print connections. 4 Double-click the PC_User_SW folder and browse to the English\Prntdrvr\Ps_drvr folder. Follow the instructions for your operating system to install the printer driver. The procedures are the same as for installing from the DVD, except that after you click Have Disk, you browse to the Win_2K_XP_VISTA folder on your desktop, rather than to the DVD. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 44 Installing printer drivers from the User Software DVD The following procedures describe installing the printer driver from the User Software DVD. To install the printer driver on a Windows Server 2003/Server 2008/Server 2008 R2 or Windows 7 computer, select the same PPD (oemsetup.inf ) file as for Windows 2000/XP/ Vista, described in the following procedure. NOTE: The following procedures use Windows XP illustrations. This procedure describes the installation of a local printer (Port 9100). You can modify the printing protocol later, according to your network type. TO INSTALL AND COMPLETE THE PRINT CONNECTION FOR WINDOWS 1 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers. Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes. Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes. Windows Vista: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then double-click Printers. Windows Server 2008: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and under Classic View, double-click Printers. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Click Start and choose Devices and Printers. 2 Windows 2000/XP: Double-click the Add Printer icon and click Next. Windows Server 2003: Double-click the Add a printer icon and click Next. Windows Vista/Server 2008/Server 2008 R2/Windows 7: Click Add a printer. 3 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003: Specify printing using a Local printer, clear the “Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer” option, and then click Next. Windows Vista/Server 2008/Server 2008 R2/Windows 7: Select Add a local printer. 4 Select Create a New Port, choose Standard TCP/IP Port from the Type of port menu, and then click Next. 5 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003: Click Next in the Welcome to the Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard dialog box. The Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard dialog box appears. Proceed to step 6. Windows Vista/Server 2008/Server 2008 R2/Windows 7: Select the Device Type, type the Hostname or IP address of the Fiery PRO80, and then click Next. Proceed to step 9. 6 Type the printer name or IP address of the Fiery PRO80 and click Next. Windows 2000/Server 2003: Proceed to step 7. Windows XP: Select the Device Type and click Next. 7 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003: Make sure that Generic Network Card is selected as Standard for Device Type and click Next. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 45 8 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003: Click Finish to close the Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard dialog box. NOTE: If the device is not found on the network, the device is displayed instead of the Finish button. If a device is not found on the network, that could be for one of the following reasons: • FieryPRO80 is not powered on • Network is not connected • FieryPRO80 is not configured properly • IP address is not correct If you encounter one of the situations mentioned, you can continue to set up the port by configuring the port manually. See “To set up Standard TCP/IP Port (Raw or LPR) for Windows” on page 51 and follow steps 11 to 14 before proceeding to step 9. 9 Click Have Disk in the dialog box displaying lists of manufacturers and printers. The Install From Disk dialog box prompts you for the disk. 10 Insert the User Software DVD into the DVD drive, type the name of the DVD drive (for example, D:\), and then click Browse. Browse to the English\Prntdrvr\Ps_drvr\Win_2K_XP_VISTA folder. If you are installing from the files you downloaded from the Fiery PRO80 using the Downloads tab in WebTools, browse to prntdrvr\Prntdrvr\Ps_drvr\Win_2K_XP_VISTA and click Open. 11 Make sure that “oemsetup.inf” or “oemsetup” is selected and click Open. The path is copied to the Install From Disk dialog box. 12 Verify that the path is correct and click OK. 13 In the Printers box, select your printer and click Next. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 46 NOTE: Select the printer driver without “eu” for US (the default Document Size is Letter) or with “eu” for International (the default Document Size is A4). 14 Type a name for the Fiery PRO80 in the Printer name field, indicate whether you want to make it the default printer, and then click Next. This name is used in the Printers window and the queues window. 15 Follow the on-screen instructions. Do not share the printer and do not print a Test Page at this time. Continue with the printer driver installation and at the last screen, click Finish. The necessary files are installed on your hard disk. When installation is complete, the Printers window appears with an icon for the newly installed printer. Now you are ready to configure the installable options (see “Configuring installable options” on page 57). To set up a connection other than port 9100, proceed to “Setting up printing connections” on page 50. To use the printer driver, you must select the following options on the Advanced tab of the printer driver after installation is complete: • Spool print documents • Start printing immediately • Print spooled documents first PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 47 Installing and connecting to a virtual printer A virtual printer allows you to print to the Fiery PRO80 using a predefined set of job settings. You do not have to set print options manually. Before you can print to a virtual printer, the administrator must create and configure the virtual printer using Command WorkStation. After the virtual printer is set up, you can install the printer driver and printer description files on your computer from the Fiery PRO80 using Point and Print. For more information about setting up virtual printers, see Command WorkStation Help. When you install the printer driver using Point and Print, you cannot configure installable options manually. Installable options are configured automatically. The installed options are displayed in the printer driver when you select the Two-Way Communication option. TO SET UP A VIRTUAL PRINTER ON WINDOWS COMPUTERS USING THE USER SOFTWARE DVD 1 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003: Right-click Network Neighborhood or My Network Places and select Find Computer or Search for Computers. Windows Vista/Server 2008: Right-click Network and choose Open from the menu. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Click Start, choose Control Panel, choose Network and Internet, and then under the Network and Sharing Center heading, click the View network computers and devices link. 2 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003: Type the name or IP address of the Fiery PRO80 and click Search Now or Search. Windows Vista/Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Type the name of the Fiery PRO80 in the Search field and click Enter. Windows Server 2008: Type the name or \\IP address of the Fiery PRO80 in the Search field and click Enter. If you cannot locate the Fiery PRO80, contact your network administrator. 3 Double-click the Fiery PRO80 name to display enabled print connections. Virtual printers are listed along with the Print queue, Hold queue, and Direct connection (if those connections are enabled). Virtual printers usually have names that indicate the type of job they are set up for. 4 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers. Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes. Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes. Windows Vista: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then double-click Printers. Windows Server 2008: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and under Classic View, double-click Printers. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Click Start and choose Devices and Printers. 5 Windows 2000/XP: Double-click the Add printer icon and click Next. Windows Server 2003: Double-click the Add a printer icon and click Next. Windows Vista/Server 2008: Click Add a printer. 6 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003: Click Local Printer and click Next. Windows Vista/Server 2008: Select Add a local printer. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 48 7 Click Create a New Port, choose Local Port from the menu, and then click Next. 8 In the Port Name dialog box, type the name of the Fiery PRO80 server, followed by the printing connection, and then click OK. Type the port name as follows: \\Aero\print where Aero is the name of the Fiery PRO80 and print is the printing connection. 9 In the dialog box displaying lists of manufacturers and printers, click Have Disk. You will now install the printer driver from the User Software DVD. 10 Type the name of the DVD drive and browse to the Prntdrvr\Ps_drvr\Win_2K_XP_VISTA folder. 11 Make sure that “oemsetup.inf” or “oemsetup” is selected, and then click Open. 12 Verify that the path is correct in the Install From Disk dialog box and click OK. 13 Follow the on-screen instructions. The virtual printer is displayed in the Printers or Printers and Faxes window. You can print to a virtual printer as you would print to the Fiery PRO80. Depending on how the virtual printer is configured, you may not be able to set some print options. Enabling Two-Way Communication You must enable Two-Way Communication to automatically update your printer driver to reflect the options currently installed on the printer. NOTE: You must log on with Administrator privileges to add or change the installable options after the Windows Vista, Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2 printer driver is installed. For more information, see “Configuring installable options for Windows Vista/Windows 7/ Server 2008 R2 printer driver” on page 57. TO ENABLE TWO-WAY COMMUNICATION 1 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers. Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes. Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes. Windows Vista: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then double-click Printers. Windows Server 2008: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and under Classic View, double-click Printers. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Click Start and choose Devices and Printers. 2 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista: Right-click the Fiery PRO80 icon and choose Properties. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Right-click the Fiery PRO80 icon and choose Printer properties. 3 Click the Installable Options tab. 4 Select Two-Way Communication. 5 Type the Fiery PRO80 IP address or DNS name. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 49 6 Select Update Fiery Driver When Opened to display the printer’s current default settings when the printer driver is opened. 7 Click Update. NOTE: To confirm that Two-Way Communication is enabled, click the About tab and check that the Fiery PRO80 name and other server information are displayed. 8 Click OK. Uninstalling printer drivers All of the installation of user software on a Windows computer is performed through the Fiery User Software Installer. The procedures in Utilities describe installing from the User Software DVD. The Printer Delete Utility is installed and used locally. You do not need to connect to the Fiery PRO80 before you use the software. TO USE PRINTER DELETE UTILITY 1 Click Start, choose Programs, and then choose Fiery. 2 Click PrinterDeleteUtility. The Printer Delete Utility dialog box appears. Any Fiery PRO80 printer drivers found on your computer are listed. 3 To delete a printer, select the check box next to the printer name and click Delete the Selected Printers. To delete all the installed printer drivers, select the Delete All Printer Drivers check box. 4 Click OK to delete the selected printer driver(s). 5 When you finish deleting printer drivers, click Exit and restart your computer. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 50 Setting up the Fiery PRO80 for printing To print from Windows computers, you or the administrator must perform the following tasks to set up a connection other than port 9100: • Set up network servers, if any. • Set up the Fiery PRO80 to accept print jobs from your computer. • Configure a port on each Windows computer for the network type. Setting up printing connections The Fiery PRO80 supports the following printing connections: • SMB • Standard TCP/IP (RAW or LPR) • IPP or IPP over SSL • Bonjour for Windows NOTE: For more information about Bonjour, see the Apple Inc. website. For the location of each procedure, see the following table. Completing the SMB printing connection If your network does not have a Windows server, Windows computers can still print to the Fiery PRO80. This method of printing is SMB printing (also known as Windows or WINS printing). When users send print jobs, computers running Windows operate in a peer-to-peer environment and communicate directly with the Fiery PRO80. Enabling SMB printing allows the Fiery PRO80 to be listed on the network, so that Windows clients can print to a particular print connection (Print queue, Hold queue, Direct connection or Virtual Printer) on the Fiery PRO80 without using other networking software. Windows printing runs via TCP/IP. You must configure TCP/IP on the Fiery PRO80 and on all computers that use SMB printing. After you enable SMB printing on the Fiery PRO80, you can set up the Windows or SMB connection and install the printer driver in one procedure. For more information, see “Installing printer drivers by Point and Print” on page 40. Procedure See Completing IPP connections page 54 Completing Standard TCP/IP Port (Raw or LPR) printing connections page 51 Completing the SMB printing connection page 50 Configuring installable options page 57 PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 51 Completing Standard TCP/IP Port (Raw or LPR) printing connections After you install the PostScript and printer driver files, you can add or configure the Setup for the Standard TCP/IP Port (Raw or LPR) connection as follows: • Prepare the Fiery PRO80 to accept print jobs using Standard TCP/IP Port (Raw or LPR) protocols. • Enable LPD or Port 9100 on the Fiery PRO80. • Configure the computer for the TCP/IP connection. For more information about Setup, see Configure Help. Before you complete the following procedure, contact your system administrator for the IP address assigned to the Fiery PRO80. The TCP/IP protocol should be installed as a default on the Windows computer. For Port 9100, you can set up the connection and install the printer driver in one procedure. NOTE: You can also set up the LPR Port connection by installing Print Services for UNIX, which is supplied as an add-on Windows component. For more information, see the documentation that accompanies Windows. TO SET UP STANDARD TCP/IP PORT (RAW OR LPR) FOR WINDOWS NOTE: The following procedures use Windows XP illustrations. 1 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers. Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes. Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes. Windows Vista/Server 2008: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then double-click Printers. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Click Start and choose Devices and Printers. 2 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista: Right-click the Fiery PRO80 icon and choose Properties. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Right-click the Fiery PRO80 icon and choose Printer properties. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 52 3 Click the Ports tab. 4 To add a new port, click Add Port. To change the port settings, proceed to step 11. 5 Windows 2000/XP/Server2003: Select Standard TCP/IP Port from the list of Available port types and click New Port Type. Windows Vista/Server 2008: Double-click Standard TCP/IP Port from list. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Select Standard TCP/IP Port from the list of Available port types and click New Port. The Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard dialog box appears. 6 Click Next. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 53 7 Type the Fiery PRO80 IP address. 8 Click Next. 9 Make sure that Generic Network Card is selected as Standard for Device Type and click Next. 10 Click Finish to close the Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard dialog box, and then click Close in the Printer Ports dialog box. To change the default setting, proceed to step 11. If you do not want to change the default setting, the setting is now completed. NOTE: Port 9100 was set as the default setting in the preceding procedure. 11 Click Configure Port on the Ports tab of the Properties dialog box. The Configure Standard TCP/IP Port Monitor dialog box appears. 12 To use LPR printing, select LPR in the Protocol area and LPR Byte Counting Enabled in the LPR Settings area. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 54 NOTE: You can also proceed without selecting LPR Byte Counting Enabled. To use Port 9100 printing, select Raw in the Protocol area. The port number 9100 automatically appears in the Raw Settings area. This is the default port number. You can print to the printer connection selected for Port 9100 printing on the Fiery PRO80. To specify a specific port number, see the following step. 13 Type the name of the print connection. For LPR, enter print or hold for Queue Name or published virtual printer name. The Direct connection is not supported for LPR printing. For Port 9100, type the following port numbers for each print connection in the Raw Settings area: Fiery PRO80 default: 9100 direct: 9101 print: 9102 hold: 9103 NOTE: Type the number exactly as shown. 14 Click OK to close the Configure Standard TCP/IP Port Monitor dialog box. NOTE: The Fiery PRO80 supports printing in the IPv6 environment on Windows Server 2008/ Server 2008 R2, Windows 7, and Windows Vista. NOTE: LPR printing in the IPv6 environment is supported on the Windows XP/Server 2003 computer from a command line, but other methods may work. 15 Click Apply in the Fiery PRO80 Properties dialog box, and then click OK. Completing IPP connections With Internet Printing Protocol (IPP), print jobs are sent to the Fiery PRO80 over the Internet. Before you begin, perform the following tasks: • Make sure that the Fiery PRO80 is configured for TCP/IP printing and IPP printing. For more information, see Configure Help. • Specify the printing destination on your computer. NOTE: IPP over SSL connections is supported. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 55 TO SET UP IPP PRINTING WITH WINDOWS 1 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers. Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes. Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes. Windows Vista: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then double-click Printers. Windows Server 2008: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then double-click Printers under Classic View. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Click Start and choose Devices and Printers. 2 Windows 2000/XP: Double-click the Add Printer icon and click Next. Windows Server 2003: Double-click the Add a printer icon and click Next. Windows Vista/Server 2008/Server 2008 R2/Windows 7: Click Add a printer. 3 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003: Select Network printer and click Next. Windows Vista: Select Add a network printer. Windows Server 2008/Server 2008 R2/Windows 7: Select Add a network, wireless, or Bluetooth printer. 4 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista: Select Connect to a printer on the Internet or your intranet. Windows Server 2008/Server 2008 R2/Windows 7: If the printer search takes a long time, click Stop, and then click “The printer that I want isn’t listed.” 5 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista: In the URL field, type the IP address or DNS name of the Fiery PRO80, followed by “ipp/” and then the name of the connection (hold, direct, print, or name of virtual printer). For example, http://10.10.10.150/ipp/print or http://DNS name of the Fiery PRO80/ipp/print sends the job to the Print queue on the Fiery PRO80. For IPP over SSL, type https, instead of http. NOTE: The ipp/print in the example is case sensitive. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 56 Windows Server 2008/Server 2008 R2/Windows 7: Click Select a printer by name, and in the URL field, type the IP address or DNS name of the Fiery PRO80, followed by “ipp/” and the name of the connection (hold, direct, print, or name of virtual printer). NOTE: For example, http://10.10.10.150/ipp/print or http://DNS name of Fiery PRO80/ipp/ print sends the job to the Print queue on the Fiery PRO80. NOTE: The URL for the printer is not case-sensitive. 6 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista: Click Next. The Connect to Printer dialog box appears. Windows Server 2008/Server 2008 R2/Windows 7: Click Next. 7 Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista: Click OK. The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears. Windows Server 2008/Server 2008 R2/Windows 7: Click Install driver. 8 If you are installing the PostScript printer for the first time, follow the procedure “To install and complete the print connection for Windows” on page 44, step 9. 9 Indicate whether you want to make the Fiery PRO80 the default printer and click Next. 10 Click Finish. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 57 Configuring installable options After you complete the printer driver installation, you must configure the Fiery PRO80 for the options installed on the printer to allow the Fiery PRO80 to take advantage of the printer options. Configure the options manually, or for TCP/IP network connections, use the Two-Way Communication option to configure the options automatically. For information about specifying installable options, see printer driver Help. Configuring installable options for Windows Vista/Windows 7/Server 2008 R2 printer driver Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows Server 2008 R2 have a User Account Control (UAC) feature. You must log on with Administrator privileges to add or change the installable options after the printer driver is installed. TO CHANGE INSTALLABLE OPTIONS 1 Windows Vista: Open the Printers Control Panel. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Open the Devices and Printers Control Panel. 2 Windows Vista: Right-click the Fiery PRO80 printer icon, choose Run as administrator, and then choose Properties. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Right-click the Fiery PRO80 printer icon, choose Run as administrator, and then choose Printer properties. The User Account Control dialog box opens. 3 Choose the User that has administrator privileges, type the password, and then click OK. 4 Windows Vista: Right-click the Fiery PRO80 printer icon again and choose Properties. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Right-click the Fiery PRO80 printer icon again and choose Printer properties. 5 Click the Installable Options tab and make your selections. 6 Click Apply, and then click OK. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 58 Printing from Windows computers You can print to the Fiery PRO80 just as you would print to any other printer from a Windows application. You can print from a networked Windows computer or a computer using Windows (WINS) printing. The following table includes other methods to print to the Fiery PRO80 and the location in which to find more information. After you install the Fiery PRO80 printer driver and configure the proper port, you can print directly from most Windows applications. Set the print options for the job and choose Print from your application. To achieve optimal printing results from specific applications, see Color Printing, Fiery Color Reference, and Command WorkStation Help. NOTE: The following procedures use Windows XP illustrations, unless specified. For the location of each procedure, see the following table. For more information See Downloading certain types of files to the Fiery PRO80 using the Docs WebTools Utilities Printing documents using E-mail Services “E-mail Service” on page 69 Printing documents using Hot Folders Utilities Setting up the Windows environment for printing with Windows servers connected to the Fiery PRO80 Configuration and Setup Procedure See Customizing the Quick Access icon page 66 Defining and printing custom page sizes page 67 Saving files to print to a remote location page 67 Setting print options and printing from Windows applications page 59 Specifying default print options page 65 Viewing the printer status page 67 PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 59 Setting print options and printing from Windows applications To print from Windows platforms, install the PostScript printer driver. For instructions, see “Installing Windows printer drivers” on page 39. Be sure to configure the options on the Advanced tab of the printer driver after installation is complete, as described on page 44. If you print to a virtual printer, you may not be able to set some print options, depending on how the virtual printer is configured. The following procedures explain how to use the printer driver to specify print options for a particular job and print it to the Fiery PRO80. You can also set default print settings using the driver. For information about specific print options, see Print Options. NOTE: The following procedures use Windows XP illustrations. TO SET PRINT OPTIONS FOR A SPECIFIC WINDOWS PRINT JOB USING THE PRINTER DRIVER 1 Choose Print in your application. 2 Select the Fiery PRO80 as your printer and click Properties. 3 Click the Fiery Printing tab. The Fiery Printing tab serves as the control center for all frequently used printing functions. For information about using presets, see printer driver Help. NOTE: For a list of print options, see page 80. 1 Presets (Job Templates), see Help 2 Print Option icons 3 Customize (Shortcuts), see Help 4 Job View 5 Printer Status 6 Help 1 2 3 5 4 6 PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 60 4 Click the Job Info icon. 5 Type a user name and password in the User Authentication area. The user name that you type in the User Authentication area can be your network domain\user name or a local user name. Check with your system administrator about the requirements for your system. If you do not have a user name and password or you want to send jobs as a public user, select the I’m a Guest option. The Fiery PRO80 must be configured to allow guest printing. With external authentication enabled, jobs are printed directly to the Fiery PRO80. With internal authentication, jobs are printed to the Fiery PRO80 if public user is enabled on the 80C-KM printer and 70-60C-KM printer. The printed jobs use the public account for job accounting. Otherwise, clear the I'm a Guest option. If you are not using a network user name and password, you can type your domain\user name and password in the fields provided. Click Validate to validate the user name and password. When the Use Windows Login option is selected, the LDAP domain user name and password are used as an authenticated user name. This is available only if the user is logged on to the Windows computer as a domain user. 6 Type information in the Notes field. Type user and job identification information for managing purposes, or other information that is required at your site. The information that you type in this field can be viewed and edited by the operator in Command WorkStation and also appears in the Job Log. For more information about Command WorkStation, see Utilities and Command WorkStation Help. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 61 7 Type instructions to the operator about the job in the Instructions field. These instructions are displayed in Command WorkStation, but do not appear in the Job Log. These instructions can be edited by the operator. 8 Type public in the Account Name and Account Password fields to send public jobs on the volume track. The volume track must be enabled on the 80C-KM printer and 70-60C-KM printer. 9 Type a password in the Secure Print field if you are sending a secure print job. 10 Type values for the other fields, as required. For information about these fields, see page 80. 11 Click the Color icon and specify the color profile options for the job. In the Color Mode area, select a color mode for the job. NOTE: To display the basic and expert color settings from the Fiery PRO80 in this dialog box, make sure that Two-Way Communication is enabled. For information about enabling Two-Way Communication, see printer driver Help. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 62 12 To use basic color management features, such as printer color settings, click Basic Settings. To revert to the Fiery PRO80 default color settings, click Server Defaults. To edit advanced color management features, such as RGB/Lab Rendering Intent, click Expert Settings and proceed to step 13. Otherwise, proceed to step 15. Two-Way Communication On PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 63 13 To edit advanced color management features, such as RGB/Lab Rendering Intent, click Expert Settings. The Expert Color Settings Advanced Edit dialog box appears. The advanced edit controls are divided into three tabbed categories: Color Input, Gray & Black Processing, and Output. 14 After you edit the expert settings, click OK. To revert to the Fiery PRO80 default color settings, click Server Defaults. 15 Specify the color settings for the print job and click OK. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 64 16 Choose other printer-specific options. 17 Click the VDP icon to specify variable data printing options. For more information about VDP print options, see “Variable Data Printing (VDP) options” on page 102. 18 Click the Stamping icon to specify a watermark for the print job. For more information about watermarks, see printer driver Help. 19 Click the Printer icon to view printer status. For more information about monitoring printer status, see printer driver Help. 20 Click the remaining print option icons to specify the appropriate settings for the print job and click OK. The settings that you make for these print options override settings that the administrator specified in Fiery PRO80 Printer Setup, but can be overridden from Command WorkStation. For information about these options and overrides, see page 79. For more information about Command WorkStation, see Utilities and Command WorkStation Help. Some print options are available only if a particular installable option has been configured. For information about configuring installable options, see “Configuring installable options” on page 57. If you choose Printer’s default, the job prints according to the settings that the administrator specified in Setup. For more information, see page 79. NOTE: If you specify incompatible print settings, the Conflict dialog box provides instructions to resolve the conflict. 21 From your application, click OK to send your print job. Make sure that the Fiery PRO80 is selected as your current printer. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 65 NOTE: Some print options that are selectable from an application are similar to print options that are specific to the Fiery PRO80 and the printer. In these cases, use the print options specific to the Fiery PRO80 and the printer. These options appear in the Fiery Printing tab. The application may not set up the file properly for printing on the Fiery PRO80, resulting in unexpected finishing, printing errors, or longer processing time. NOTE: With the E-mail Notification feature enabled in the printer driver, you receive an e-mail notification after your job is printed or when a printing error occurs. For more information about the E-mail Notification feature, see printer driver Help. Specifying default print options for print jobs To set default print options, use the following procedure. TO SET DEFAULT PRINT OPTIONS FOR WINDOWS PRINT JOBS USING THE POSTSCRIPT PRINTER DRIVER 1 Windows 2000: Click Start, choose Settings, and then choose Printers. Windows XP: Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes. Windows Server 2003: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then choose Printers and Faxes. Windows Vista/Server 2008: Click Start, choose Control Panel, and then double-click Printers. Windows 7/Server 2008 R2: Click Start and choose Devices and Printers. 2 Right-click the Fiery PRO80 icon and choose Printing Preferences. 3 If the Fiery Printing tab is not displayed, click it. 4 Specify the default settings for your print job, as described on page 59. 5 Click OK to close the dialog box. PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 66 Customizing the Quick Access icon The Quick Access icon is on the Fiery Printing tab. You can customize it with the print options you use frequently. This saves time because you do not have to open all of the other print option icons if you only want to set the options in Quick Access. Quick Access initially contains a default group of print options. You can remove these options and add others. NOTE: When you place a print option in Quick Access, it still appears under its appropriate print option icon. You can set the option from either location. For more information about customizing the Quick Access icon, see printer driver Help. 1 Quick Access icon 2 Customize (Shortcuts) 1 2 PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 67 Defining and printing custom page sizes With custom page sizes, you define the dimensions of a printed page. After you define a custom page size, you can use it from within an application without redefining it each time you print. When you create custom page sizes, specify Width dimensions to correspond with the shorter side of your job and specify Height dimensions to correspond with the longer side of your job. Set custom page sizes in this way, regardless of the orientation settings in the application. The printer driver custom size range is 100 x 140mm to 330 x 1200mm for the 80C-KM printer. The printer driver custom page size range is 100mm x 148mm to 330mm x 1200mm for the 70-60C-KM printer. However, the actual maximum paper size the Fiery PRO80 can print is 330mm x 487mm. The Fiery PRO80 supports a minimum custom page size of 1.0 inch x 1.0 inch (25.4mm x 25.4mm). Consult your service representative about printing banners and posters. For more information about defining and printing custom page sizes, see printer driver Help. Viewing the printer status If you enabled a TCP/IP network, you can retrieve printer status and color settings from the Fiery PRO80 and display them in the printer driver using the Two-Way Communication option. If you have enabled Two-Way Communication for your printer, you can monitor the status of the printer, including the levels of consumable materials, such as paper and toner. For more information about enabling Two-Way Communication, see printer driver Help. Saving files to print at a remote location If you do not have an Fiery PRO80 onsite and are preparing files to take to a service bureau or other location, print the final files to the File port (as opposed to one of the local ports). You can also print to the File port to create a file to download using the Docs WebTool. For instructions on printing to the File port, see the documentation that accompanies Windows. Height Width Width Height Portrait Landscape PRINTING METHODS 68 PRINTING METHODS In addition to printing jobs from the Fiery PRO80 printer driver, you can print jobs using these methods: • Job Monitor displays information about the jobs sent to the Fiery PRO80 and reprints them. • E-mail Service submits jobs to the Fiery PRO80 as e-mail attachments. • USB device prints files saved on a USB drive. • FTP printing prints to the Fiery PRO80 using the FTP protocol. • Secure printing requires that a password be entered at the Fiery PRO80 before a job is printed. • Sample printing prints sample pages from a long job to ensure print quality. • Job Batching prints a collection of print jobs as a single job in the printer job list and accounting information. For the location of each procedure, see the following table. Procedure See Configuring and using Job Monitor page 69 E-mail Service page 69 FTP printing page 74 Job Batching page 77 Printing and retrieving a secure print job page 75 Printing from a USB device page 73 Sample printing page 76 PRINTING METHODS 69 Configuring and using Job Monitor Use Job Monitor to monitor the status of Fiery PRO80 and view information about the print jobs sent to them. NOTE: Job Monitor is not supported on Windows Server 2003/2008/2008 R2, Windows XP/ Vista, Windows 7 64-bit version, or Mac OS X. Configuring the connection When you send your first print job to the Fiery PRO80, Job Monitor opens and establishes a connection to the Fiery PRO80. If you installed and configured printer drivers for more than one printer, Job Monitor automatically establishes connections to all the Fiery PRO80 printers. The Job Monitor icon ( ) appears on the desktop and in the Windows taskbar of your computer. Job Monitor is automatically installed when you choose the printer driver to install on your computer. To use Job Monitor, you must enable it in the printer driver. TO ENABLE JOB MONITOR • Select the Monitor my Print Job check box on the Printer tab of the printer driver. TO DISABLE JOB MONITOR • Clear the Monitor my Print Job check box on the Printer tab of the printer driver. Using Job Monitor For information about using Job Monitor, see Job Monitor Help and printer driver Help. E-mail Service E-mail Service allows you to control the Fiery PRO80 using your current e-mail infrastructure, print to remote locations, and bypass firewalls. E-mail Service is not application-specific. You can use any e-mail infrastructure. The Fiery PRO80 supports internal address books. Administrators can retrieve, add, delete, and clear addresses from the address books by sending requests through e-mail. For more information about address books, see Configuration and Setup. To set up E-mail Service, see Configure Help. PRINTING METHODS 70 Use E-mail Service in the following ways: • Print a job from an e-mail application. To print with an e-mail client, you send a file as an e-mail attachment. E-mail Service extracts the file and sends it to the Fiery PRO80. The attachment can be in any format the Fiery PRO80 recognizes (PostScript, PDF, or TIFF). NOTE: E-mail Service does not process files with .vbs, .exe, or .bat extensions. • Manage jobs using an e-mail application. You can manage your print jobs by submitting e-mail commands to the Fiery PRO80 using e-mail. • Scan to E-mail. You can scan a document and send it to an e-mail address as an attachment or URL. For more information about Scan to E-mail, see Utilities. Printing using an e-mail client You can submit print jobs to the Fiery PRO80 in the form of an e-mail attachment using your e-mail application. When you send an e-mail with an attachment, E-mail Service extracts the file and sends it to the Fiery PRO80 Print queue. The file format must be one supported by the Fiery PRO80. By default, anyone can print with an e-mail client, unless the Print address book has been set up by the administrator. If the Print address book has been set up and your e-mail address is not in it, you cannot send files to the Fiery PRO80 via e-mail. For more information about address books, see Configuration and Setup. When User Authentication is enabled on the Fiery PRO80, the e-mail attachment must have the appropriate user name and password when it is printed through e-mail printing. As part of creating the e-mail attachment with the Fiery PRO80 printer driver, type the appropriate user name and password in the Job Info tab of the printer driver. The user name and password must match those defined by the administrator in the Users and Groups section of Configure. For information about Users and Groups, see Configure Help. NOTE: The Direct connection is not supported by the e-mail client feature. NOTE: The following illustrations depict the Microsoft Outlook e-mail application. PRINTING METHODS 71 TO PRINT USING AN E-MAIL CLIENT 1 Open your e-mail application. 2 Type the Fiery PRO80 e-mail address in the To: line. 3 Type text in the Subject line or leave the Subject line blank. 4 Attach the file that you want to print. The attachment can be in any format the Fiery PRO80 recognizes (PostScript, PDF, or TIFF). NOTE: If your attachment exceeds the file size limitation set by your e-mail system administrator, the e-mail is not sent. 5 Optionally, you can type text in the body of the message. The text is printed with the file. NOTE: HTML-formatted e-mail messages are not supported, and might not print as they appear on the remote workstation. Send e-mail messages in plain text format. 6 Send the e-mail. The file is sent to the Fiery PRO80 and the job is printed. After the Fiery PRO80 receives the job, you are sent an e-mail notification that the print job was accepted. The e-mail provides a job identification (ID). Use the job IDs to manage jobs with e-mail commands (see “Managing print jobs with e-mail commands” on page 72). The e-mail notification indicates any current error at the printer. After the job is printed, you are sent a second e-mail notification that indicates the job printed successfully. PRINTING METHODS 72 Managing print jobs with e-mail commands You can manage your print jobs by submitting commands to the Fiery PRO80 using e-mail. You can cancel a job, check job status, and get help on a job. When you send a command, the Fiery PRO80 returns an e-mail response. TO MANAGE PRINT JOBS WITH E-MAIL COMMANDS 1 In your e-mail application, type the Fiery PRO80 e-mail address in the To: line. 2 Type one of the following commands in the Subject line: To check the status of a job, type #JobStatus in the Subject line. You receive a reply to your job status query. You can only get the status of the job if you sent the job or are an administrator. To cancel a job, type #CancelJob in the Subject line. You receive a notification indicating that the job has been cancelled and did not print to the Fiery PRO80. You can only cancel a job if you sent the job or are an administrator. To get help, type #Help in the Subject line. You receive an e-mail response that contains links that allow you to cancel jobs, check job status, and search and manage address books. Click any of the links to perform a command. 3 Send the e-mail to the Fiery PRO80. PRINTING METHODS 73 Printing from a USB device You can print files on a USB device to the Fiery PRO80. To do so, save files to the USB device and download them directly to the Fiery PRO80. You can print files that originated on Mac OS X or Windows computers. You can print files automatically from a USB device to one of the standard print queues on the Fiery PRO80 (Print, Hold, or Direct) or to published virtual printers (if supported). Verify with your administrator that these connections are published in Setup. For more information about virtual printers, see Command WorkStation Help. Before you print files from a USB device, ask your administrator to configure the appropriate options. For more information about configuring the appropriate options, see Configuration and Setup or Configure Help. Automatic printing To print automatically to Print, Hold, or Direct queues, or to published virtual printers with the Print All setting, set up folders on your USB device with the names print, hold, direct, and the names of any published virtual printers. When you plug the USB device into a USB port on the Fiery PRO80, the files in those folders are sent automatically to the corresponding queues. TO PRINT FILES FROM THE USB DEVICE 1 Configure the USB printing options in Setup. 2 Create folders at the top (root) level of the USB device named print, hold, direct, and virtual printer. 3 Save the files (PS, EPS, TIFF, and PDF) from the user’s computer to the USB device. Files copied to the print, hold, direct, or virtual printer folders are downloaded to the corresponding print connection on the Fiery PRO80 automatically when you connect the USB device to the Fiery PRO80. Files copied to the root level of the USB device are downloaded to the Print queue. 4 Remove the USB device from the computer and connect it to the USB connector on the Fiery PRO80. Make sure that the USB device is properly stopped before you disconnect it from the computer. For the location of the USB port, see Configuration and Setup. PRINTING METHODS 74 FTP printing If FTP Services are enabled on the Fiery PRO80, the Fiery PRO80 is set up as an FTP server. You can send jobs to the Fiery PRO80 using FTP printing. For more information about configuring FTP Services, see Configure Help. You can use any FTP client software. Before you use FTP printing, the FTP client software requires the following information (see your administrator): • IP address or DNS name for the Fiery PRO80 • Directory or path to send the job to, such as the Print Queue, Hold Queue, or published virtual printers (if supported) NOTE: You cannot print to the Direct connection using FTP printing. • User name and password (if required) You can send PostScript (PS), Tagged Image File Format (TIFF), and Portable Document Format (PDF) files to the Fiery PRO80. Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) files are not supported for FTP printing. TO PRINT FILES TO THE FIERY PRO80 USING THE FTP PROTOCOL 1 Connect to the Fiery PRO80 with your FTP client software. Folders corresponding to the Print queue and Hold queue are displayed. Folders for any published virtual printer are also displayed. 2 Navigate to the folder representing the print connection or published virtual printer. 3 Upload your job to the folder that you want. After the job is printed, it is deleted from the Fiery PRO80. PRINTING METHODS 75 Printing and retrieving a secure print job The Secure Print feature offers a level of security for confidential or sensitive print jobs, which print only when you are present at the printer. To use this feature, you first enter an arbitrary password into the Secure Print field in the printer driver when you send your job to the Fiery PRO80. To print your job, you re-enter the password at the Fiery PRO80 printer touch panel as described in the following procedures. TO SEND A SECURE PRINT JOB 1 In your application, select File > Print. 2 Windows: Click the Job Info icon. Mac OS X: Choose Fiery Features from the drop-down list, click Full Properties, and then click the Job Info icon of the Printing Preferences dialog box. 3 Enter an arbitrary password in the Secure Print field. NOTE: The password is limited to alphanumeric characters (do not use symbols). For more information about entering the password, see page 32 or page 61. 4 Make any other changes to job properties and send your job to the Fiery PRO80. 5 Click OK to close the Fiery PRO80 Properties dialog box. 6 Click OK or Print to close the Print dialog box. TO RETRIEVE A SECURE PRINT JOB 1 On the 80C-KM printer and 70-60C-KM printer, press the User Box button. 2 Press System User Box. 3 Press Secure Print User Box. 4 Press the Use/File button. 5 Enter the ID, and then press OK. 6 Enter the password, and then press OK. Secure jobs are shown on the printer touch panel. NOTE: The Secure Print ID and Job Password are set in the printer driver. 7 Select the job and press the Start button on the 80C-KM printer and 70-60C-KM printer. PRINTING METHODS 76 Sample printing The Sample Print feature allows you to print extra pages to an easily accessible output tray during a long print job, to verify that the printer is performing as expected. For example, when a job is currently printing to a closed elevator (such as, 1000 pages to an output tray that cannot be opened until the entire job is completed), you can use the sample print function to print a separate page or finished output set to an open output tray to verify the output. If the output is unsatisfactory, you can take corrective action. Sample Print should only be used with printers that have multiple output trays, and is useful when one of the output trays is closed and not easily accessed during printing. The Sample Print default settings for the specified Fiery PRO80 can be set up in Configure. For more information, see Configure Help. When the job is printing, you can initiate a sample print from Command WorkStation. For more information about Sample Print, see Command WorkStation Help. Using Sample Print You can print an extra sheet or output set as follows: • Once during the printing of a job • Every N-sheets during the currently printing job • Every N-sheets until cancelled (can span jobs) When the job is printing, you can initiate a sample print. The default setup values are applied and any existing sample print command in progress is overridden. If Start Sample Print appears dimmed or unavailable, the Fiery PRO80 is already performing a sample print or it is not available for the specified Fiery PRO80. TO INITIATE A SAMPLE PRINT • While a job is printing, initiate a sample print from Server > Start Sample Print. After sample print has been initiated, the Fiery PRO80 performs the sample print based on the options specified in Configure. TO CANCEL A SAMPLE PRINT • While a job is printing, cancel a sample print from Server > Stop Sample Print. The Fiery PRO80 cancels the previously requested sample print command. PRINTING METHODS 77 Job Batching Job Batching provides a way for the Fiery PRO80 to send print jobs to the printer to make sure the job can print (if the print job is overly complex) or print faster by minimizing cycle down times. A batch job is a collection of jobs sent to the copier as a single job. The batch job is shown as a single job in the printer job list and accounting information. The Fiery PRO80 can continue adding pages to an existing batch job, as long as the pages are processed and ready for printing. Job Batching functionality can be enabled or disabled by the administrator. For more information about configuring Job Batching, see Configuration and Setup. Cancelling batch jobs When the Fiery PRO80 cancels a job in a batch either through an error or user intervention, it cancels that job and resends the remainder of the jobs from that batch as a new batch job in addition to any other queued batch jobs. This functionality maintains the ability to print jobs in the desired order, including user-defined changes such as cancel, print next, and rush print. Using Command WorkStation Print Next and Rush Print commands with batch jobs Print Next and Rush Print commands in Command WorkStation cannot be applied to batch jobs. If you apply a Print Next command to a job that is not part of the batch job, the Fiery PRO80 stops adding jobs to the batch job and then prints the Print Next job after the current batch job finishes printing. If you apply a Rush Print command to a job that is not part of the batch job, the Fiery PRO80 stops adding pages to the batch job at an appropriate place in the job and then prints the Rush Print job after the current batch job finishes printing. The Fiery PRO80 sends the remaining pages of the interrupted job (as necessary) and continues printing normally. Accounting batch jobs When the Fiery PRO80 batches jobs together, it lists each original job while the printer lists only the resulting batched job. This can create a discontinuity between the Fiery PRO80 job list or job log, and the printer job list or job log. The total media counts, however, remain consistent between the Fiery PRO80 and the printer. PRINT OPTIONS 78 PRINT OPTIONS This chapter describes printer drivers and PPD (PostScript Printer Description) files, Fiery PRO80 print options, and where to set print options. About printer drivers and printer description files The Fiery PRO80 receives files from computers on the network, processes (RIPs) the files, and then sends them to the printer. Windows and Mac OS computers communicate with the Fiery PRO80 by means of a printer driver and PPD files. The driver allows you to use special features of the Fiery PRO80 from the Print dialog box. A printer driver manages printing communication between your application and the printer. It interprets the instructions generated by the application, merges those instructions with printer-specific options you set, and then translates all information into Adobe PostScript, a language the printer understands. In other words, the printer driver writes a PostScript file based on your original file and the options you set from the Print dialog box. A printer driver also allows you to select print options for your printer. To do this, the printer driver must be matched with a PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file for your Fiery PRO80. A PPD file contains information about the features and capabilities of a particular device (for example, what paper sizes and media types are supported). The printer driver reads the information in the PPD file and presents the information to you in the form of options you select in the Print dialog box. The PPD file for the Fiery PRO80 includes information about the features of both the printer and the Fiery PRO80. For information about the specific print options for the Fiery PRO80, see the tables that begin on page 81. PRINT OPTIONS 79 Setting print options Print options give you access to the special features of your printer and the Fiery PRO80. You can specify print options in these areas: • Setup Some settings are specified during Setup by the administrator. For information about the current default server settings, contact the administrator or the operator. • Applications With the printer drivers provided, you can specify job settings when you print a job. For more information, see “Setting print options and printing from Windows applications” on page 59 and “Setting print options and printing from Mac OS X applications” on page 30. • Color Setup Set the default CMYK/Grayscale Source, CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method, RGB/Lab Source, Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source, Output Profile, RGB/Lab Rendering Intent, Spot Color Matching, Gray (CMYK), Gray (RGB), Black Text and Graphics, and Black Overprint settings. For information about using Color Setup, see Color Printing. • Hot Folders Assign a group of print options to a Hot Folder. When you specify print options for a Hot Folder, the print options are assigned to all jobs sent through that Hot Folder. These print options override any default options. For information, see Hot Folders Help. • Overrides in Command WorkStation To change job settings from Command WorkStation, double-click a job to display the Properties dialog box. For more information, see Command WorkStation Help. Print option override hierarchy The override hierarchy is as follows: • A user’s printer driver settings override the Fiery PRO80 Setup settings. • Settings assigned to Hot Folders override the user’s printer driver settings. • Settings made from the job management tools (Command WorkStation Job Properties) override the user’s printer driver settings. PRINT OPTIONS 80 Print options and default settings If you do not use the printer driver interface to configure a particular option, the Fiery PRO80 prints the job with the default setting. For options that the administrator configures, choosing Printer’s default results in the Fiery PRO80 printing the job with the factory default. For options that cannot be configured in Setup, the Fiery PRO80 prints the job with a preconfigured Printer’s default setting. When you select the printer driver for US, the default Document Size is Letter or for International, the default Document Size is A4. For more information, see the following tables. To determine the current Setup defaults, print the Configuration page from Command WorkStation. For information about how to print a Configuration page, see Configuration and Setup. Note: A job uses the Fiery PRO80 default settings (unless otherwise specified) at the time it is processed for printing, and not at the time it is sent to the Fiery PRO80 Hold queue. The print option tables are organized according to the printer driver icons (tabs). For quick access, use the following links: Printer driver icon See Quick Access (shortcuts) page 30 or page 66 Job Info page 81 Media page 83 Layout page 85 Color page 94 Image page 98 Finishing page 100 Variable Data Printing (VDP) page 102 Stamping/Watermark page 103 PRINT OPTIONS 81 Job Info options Option Information Copies The maximum number of copies is 9999. Print Range Specify the page range or odd/even pages to print. For VDP jobs, a range of Records can be selected for printing. For imposed VDP jobs, a range of Records & Sheets can be printed. For imposed jobs, a range of Sheet IDs can be selected for printing. This option is only accessible from Command WorkStation. Schedule Printing Specify if you want to perform advance print scheduling based on date and time. If you select On, select the date and time for the print job. The job is printed based on the date and time set on the Fiery PRO80, not the client workstation. NOTE: If multiple jobs are selected and defined with the same date and time setting, job order is based on alphabetic order of the file names. User Authentication: User Name If User Authentication is enabled on the Fiery PRO80, specify your User Name to print a job. Type your user name or domain\user name for user authentication. User Authentication: Password If User Authentication is enabled on the Fiery PRO80, specify your User Password to print a job. Type your local password or domain password for user authentication. NOTE: When the internal authentication of the printer is used and the Enhanced Security mode is set on the printer, it is not necessary to enter the password. User Authentication: Use Windows Login If you are logged on to your Windows computer, select Use Windows Login for user authentication. This option appears when you log on to your domain on your Windows computer. For more information, see Configuration and Setup. User Authentication: I’m a Guest Select On to allow guest printing. Guest printing must be set to On at the Fiery PRO80. In Command WorkStation, the management of jobs is determined by how you log on to the Fiery PRO80. Notes Specify information about the job. This field has a 31-character (alphanumeric and special characters) limit. Instructions Specify instructions for the operator about the job. This field has a 127-character (alphanumeric and special characters) limit. Secure Print Use the Secure Print feature when printing sensitive or confidential documents. Specify an arbitrary password and re-enter it when you are present at the copier. For information, see the documentation that accompanies your copier. Account Name Enter up to eight characters (alphanumeric) for account tracking purposes. For more information, see the documentation that accompanies your printer. PRINT OPTIONS 82 Account Password Enter up to eight characters (alphanumeric) for account tracking purposes. For more information, see the documentation that accompanies your printer. Print Queue Action Select the job action associated with a published queue. Select Print to send the file directly to printing. Select Print and Hold to save the raster file after printing. Select Process and Hold to RIP (process), but not print a job. This option is invalid if your job is sent to the Direct connection. Control Bar Specify On to print a Control Bar (for print job identification) in the margin. This option is available as part of the Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition. For more information, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. Printer’s default reflects the setting specified in Color Setup in Command WorkStation. Progressives Specify On to enable the Progressives feature, a diagnostic tool used to show toner separations. This feature uses the Progressives values specified in Color Setup in Command WorkStation. This option is available as part of the Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition. For more information, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. NOTE: The Progressives and Postflight features cannot be used at the same time. Postflight Specify whether or not you want to use the Postflight feature, a diagnostic tool that allows you to analyze how data is processed by the Fiery PRO80. This option is available as part of the Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition. For more information, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. NOTE: The Progressives and Postflight features cannot be used at the same time. Option Information PRINT OPTIONS 83 Media options Option Information Paper Catalog Click Select to access the Paper Catalog utility, which retrieves all paper information from the printer. For information about accessing Paper Catalog, see page 122. For information about using Paper Catalog, see Command WorkStation Help. Access to Paper Catalog requires Two-Way Communication. For information about establishing Two- Way Communication, see printer driver Help. Paper Color If you are using color media for your print job, specify Non-White. NOTE: Printer’s default reflects the setting specified in Fiery PRO80 Setup. Input Tray Specify the paper tray to use for your job. NOTE: Paper size, 9x11, is a special size to make 8.5x11 tab size. After you print the job on 9x11, 8.5x11 tab size can be made by using an index cutter to cut on the marks. NOTE: Two-sided tab (index) printing of 9x11 paper size is not supported. Auto Tray Select automatically uses the tray containing the paper size specified for the job. This setting also allows the printer to automatically switch between trays, if the current tray becomes empty, while continuing to print. NOTE: If you enable tray alignment, Input Tray cannot be set to Auto Tray Select. Paper Weight Specify the weight of the paper used for your print job. For a list of the supported paper weights, see the documentation that accompanies your printer. NOTE: Printer’s default reflects the setting specified in Fiery PRO80 Setup. Document Size Document Size is the page size defined in your application’s Print setup (or Page setup) dialog box. In cases when printing one document page per sheet of paper, Document Size is usually the same as Paper Size. However, it may differ when printing booklets or imposing multiple document pages on a single sheet. Document Size may also differ from Paper Size when you use the Scale or Scale to Fit options, in which case the document page size is scaled at a given percent to fit a certain paper size. The following sizes are handled as standard sizes in the printer driver, but possibly as custom sizes on the 80C-KM printer and 70-60C-KM printer: ISO B4, ISO B5, ISO B5S, and ISO B6S. You can, however, contact your service representative. To change Document size, Orientation, and Mirror print option settings, click the Document Setting tab in the Windows printer driver’s Printing Preferences dialog box. NOTE: The default is Letter in the U.S. and A4 elsewhere. For more information about Document size and Paper size, see page 115. For information about Scale and Scale to fit, see page 124. For information about printing custom page sizes, see page 37 and page 67. Paper Type Specify the type of paper used for your print job. NOTE: Printer’s default reflects the setting specified in Fiery PRO80 Setup. PRINT OPTIONS 84 Punched Paper Specify Punched when you insert pre-punched media. NOTE: Printer’s default reflects the setting specified in Fiery PRO80 Setup. Tray Alignment Select On to enable Tray Alignment, a feature that adjusts the placement of text and images so that they are properly aligned for duplex printing. For information about using Tray alignment, see Command WorkStation Help. NOTE: If you enable tray alignment, Input Tray cannot be set to Auto Tray Select. Paper Size Paper Size defines the size of the sheet of paper on which your job prints. It is the size of the physical sheet of paper in the printer tray. To assign Paper Size, do one of the following: • Select the size from the available list • Click Custom to select a non-standard paper size. • Select Same as document size to print one document page per sheet of paper. The following sizes are handled as standard sizes in the printer driver, but possibly as custom sizes on the 80C-KM printer and 70-60C-KM printer: ISO B4, ISO B5, ISO B5S, and ISO B6S. You can, however, contact your service representative. The default size is Letter in the U.S. and A4 elsewhere. For information about Paper size and Document size, see page 115. Mixed Media Use Mixed Media to specify different media types, paper source, and chapter-based finishing for pages, or ranges of pages, within a print job. For more information, see page 119. For information about using Mixed Media in Command WorkStation, see Utilities. Option Information PRINT OPTIONS 85 Layout options The Driver has four layout modes: • Normal: use these options for printing standard documents, from 1 to 16 document pages per sheet (page 85). • Gangup: use these options for speed printing imposition modes (page 86). For additional information, see page 118. • Booklet: use these options for printing documents in booklet layout (page 87). For additional information, see page 105. • Impose: use imposition layouts for custom printing, binding, and trimming (page 93). Normal Option Information Scale Specify an increase or decrease in the scale of your print job. When using the manual Scale option, you cannot specify Scale to Fit. For more information, see page 124. Scale to Fit Specify whether to scale your job to fit to a paper size. When using the Scale to Fit option, you cannot use the manual Scale option. For more information, see page 124. Duplex Specify whether a job is printed single-sided or double-sided (duplex), by selecting a binding method. For more information, see page 116. Rotate 180 (check box) Specify On to rotate the pages of a job 180 degrees. Orientation Override Depending on the application you are using, a landscape job might print with the incorrect orientation. If this occurs, use this option to correct the orientation for your job. This option is only accessible from Command WorkStation. Print Border Select On to print borders around each page in your print job. Pages per Sheet Specify the number of document pages per sheet of paper for your print job. NOTE: This option is invalid if your job is sent to the Direct connection. Page Order Specify the layout direction when the Pages per sheet option is set to 2-up or greater. PRINT OPTIONS 86 Gangup options Option Information Gangup Select On to specify options for speed printing imposition modes. Gang-up type Select Step & repeat to speed print a job by printing two document pages on each sheet. When the printed sheets are cut in half, the result is two complete sets of the same document. Select Cut & stack to speed print a job by printing two document pages side by side. When the printed sheets are cut in half and stacked together, the result is one complete set of the document (in faster printing time). For more information, see page 118. Paper Size Paper Size defines the size of the sheet of paper on which your job prints. It is the size of the physical sheet of paper in the printer tray. To assign Paper Size, do one of the following: • Select the size from the available list. • Choose Select From Paper Catalog to access a dynamic database that stores the media attributes of any paper available for printing from the Fiery PRO80. • Select Custom Paper Size to select a non-standard paper size. • Select Same as document size to print one document page per sheet of paper. The default size is Letter in the U.S. and A4 elsewhere. For information about Paper size and Document size, see page 115. For information about printing custom page sizes, see page 37 and page 67. For information about accessing Paper Catalog, see Utilities. For information about using Paper Catalog, see Command WorkStation Help. Shrink to fit Shrink to fit automatically scales down or reduces the document page size to fit the imageable area of the selected paper size specified from the Paper size menu. Shrink to fit does not scale up or enlarge. When Shrink to fit is set to Off, page contents print at 100%. Increase gutter by 0/-50–50 mm (0.1 mm increments) 0/-1.969–1.969 in (.001 inch increments) Increase gutter by controls the amount of space between adjacent pages on a sheet to adjust for trimming or other finishing options. Specify a positive value to increase the amount of blank space between adjacent pages. Specify a negative value to decrease the amount of blank space between adjacent pages. Duplex Select Off for simplex (single-sided) printing. Specify Right and Left Bind for duplex (double-sided) printing with both sides using the same top edge. For more information, see page 116. PRINT OPTIONS 87 Booklet options NOTE: You can use the Booklet Maker Wizard to specify your booklet options by clicking Launch Wizard. Option Information Booklet Select On to specify options for printing documents in booklet layout. Click Launch Wizard to specify how to arrange the pages of the job in special layouts for folding or cutting after printing. Booklet Type Booklet Type is a combination of binding method, which determines how the signatures of the booklet are folded and imposed, and binding edge, which determines the location of the spine of the booklet. For more information, see Booklet Maker Help. For information about 1-up Perfect binding booklet options, see page 90. Paper size: Paper Size for 2-up Paper Size for 2-up defines the size of the sheet of paper (unfolded) on which a booklet is printed. To select a Paper size for a booklet, do one of the following: • Select from the list of available sizes. • Choose Select From Paper Catalog to access a dynamic database that stores the media attributes of any paper available for printing from the Fiery PRO80. • Select Custom Paper Size to create a non-standard Paper size. • Select Same as document size to print one document page per sheet of paper. The default Paper Size is Letter in the U.S. and A4 elsewhere. For information about Paper size and Document size in booklets, see page 115 and Booklet Maker Help. For information about accessing Paper Catalog, see Utilities. For information about using Paper Catalog, see Command WorkStation Help. For information about printing custom page sizes, see page 37 and page 67. Paper size: Shrink to fit Shrink to fit automatically scales down or reduces the document page size to fit the imageable area of the selected paper size specified from the Paper size menu. Shrink to fit does not scale up or enlarge. When Shrink to fit is set to Off, page content prints at 100%. For more information, see Booklet Maker Help. The Shrink to fit option is available only in Advanced mode. Subset Size: Number of sheets in a subset (saddle) When Nested Saddle is selected, use this option to specify the number of sheets in each subset. This option appears only when Nested Saddle is selected. Page alignment: Align pages Align pages positions page content in relation to the center of one-half the paper size or the spine, the center of the sheet where the fold occurs. At the center positions page content in the center of one-half the specified paper size. At the spine aligns page content with the spine or center fold of your booklet. For more information, see Booklet Maker Help. PRINT OPTIONS 88 Page alignment: Increase gutter by 0/-50–50 mm (0.1 mm increments) 0/-1.969–1.969 in (.001 inch increments) Increase gutter by controls the amount of space between adjacent pages to adjust for binding or other finishing options. Specify a positive value to increase the amount of blank space between adjacent pages. Specify a negative value to decrease the amount of blank space between adjacent pages. For more information, see Booklet Maker Help. Page alignment: Compensate creep Compensate creep for adjusts the position of the page content to counteract the shift that occurs when sheets are folded to create Saddle and Nested Saddle booklets. Select Plain when printing Saddle or Nested Saddle booklets with a large number of pages. Select Thick when printing Saddle or Nested Saddle booklets on heavyweight paper. For more information, see Booklet Maker Help. Cover: Content input Select Front & Back Separately to include cover content (individual pages in your document) as part of your booklet print job. Select Pre-Printed (use insert) to insert a pre-printed cover that will be added to the body pages from an inserter tray. For more information, see Booklet Maker Help. Cover: Front Cover When Front & Back Separately is selected, use the Front Cover option to define how the content of the front cover is printed. Select Print on outside to print only on the outside of the front cover (the inside of the front cover will be blank). Select Print on inside to print only on the inside of the front cover (the outside of the front cover will be blank). Select Print on both sides to print on both the inside and outside of the front cover. Select Do not print if you do not want any content printed on the front cover. When you add a cover, blank pages may be inserted depending on the allocation of pages to signatures. For more information, see Booklet Maker Help. Option Information PRINT OPTIONS 89 Cover: Back Cover When Front & Back Separately is selected, use the Back Cover option to define how the content of the back cover is printed. Select Print on outside to print only on the outside of the back cover (the inside of the back cover will be blank). Select Print on inside to print only on the inside of the back cover (the outside of the back cover will be blank). Select Print on both sides to print on both the inside and outside of the back cover. Select Do not print if you do not want any content printed on the back cover. When you add a cover, blank pages may be inserted depending on the allocation of pages to signatures in the job. For more information, see Booklet Maker Help. Cover: Define Cover Click Define Cover to specify the following cover options: Booklet cover source (Saddle only), Color mode, Media, Paper color, Punched paper, Paper type, and Paper weight. NOTE: Set the Paper Weight and Paper Size options for the document in the Media tab before you set the Booklet cover source option. Option Information PRINT OPTIONS 90 1-up Perfect Binding Booklet options Option Information 1-up Perfect Binding The 1-up Perfect binding method prints single body pages that are stacked together, so that the edges may be trimmed (if desired) and glued, and then wrapped by a cover sheet. To print a 1-up Perfect binding booklet, your printer must be equipped with an advanced finisher that supports Perfect binding. Specify Left Binding for a book that reads from left to right, with the spine (binding edge) at left. Specify Right Binding for a book that reads from right to left, with the spine (binding edge) at right. Specify Top Binding for a book that reads from top to bottom, with the spine (binding edge) at the top. For more information, see Booklet Maker Help. Units Specify the units for the booklet. Body Paper Size Body Paper Size defines the paper size for the body pages of the booklet. To select a Body Paper Size for your booklet, do one of the following: • Select from the list of available sizes in the Body Paper Size menu. • Choose Select From Paper Catalog to access a dynamic database that stores the media attributes of any paper available for printing from the Fiery PRO80. • Select Custom Paper Size to create a non-standard paper size, using the Custom Page Size width (feed edge) and height dimensions. • Select Same as Document Size to print one document page per sheet of paper. The default Document size is Letter in the US and A4 elsewhere. Select Edit to define media attributes for the body paper size, such as Color mode, Input tray, Paper type, and Paper weight. For information about Paper size and Document size in booklets, see page 115 and Booklet Maker Help. For information about accessing Paper Catalog, see Utilities. For information about using Paper Catalog, see Command WorkStation Help. For information about printing custom page sizes, see page 37 and page 67. PRINT OPTIONS 91 Cover Paper Size Specify the paper size for the booklet cover. To select a Cover Paper Size for your booklet, do one of the following: • Select from the list of available sizes in the Cover Paper Size menu. • Choose Select From Paper Catalog to access a dynamic database that stores the media attributes of any paper available for printing from the Fiery PRO80. • Select Custom Paper Size to create a non-standard paper size, using the Custom Page Size width (feed edge) and height dimensions. The default Document size is Letter in the US and A4 elsewhere. Select Edit to define media attributes for the cover paper size, such as Booklet cover source, Color mode, Paper type, and Paper weight. NOTE: Set the Paper Weight and Paper Size options for the document in the Media tab before you set the Booklet cover source option. For more information, see Booklet Maker Help. For information about accessing Paper Catalog, see Utilities. For information about using Paper Catalog, see Command WorkStation Help. For information about printing custom page sizes, see page 37 and page 67. Cover Content: Content input Specify Front & Back Separately to include cover content (individual pages in your document) as part of your booklet print job. This is the default setting. Specify Front & Back Together to include cover content as part of the booklet in a custom document size larger than that of the body pages. Specify Pre-printed to insert a pre-printed cover that will be merged with the body pages of your booklet, which print separately. For information about Cover options, see Booklet Maker Help. Cover Content: Front Cover The following options allow you to quickly decide whether your front cover prints duplex, singlesided, or both sides blank, without needing to add blank pages in your original document. Specify Print on outside to print the cover content only on the outside of the front cover (the inside of the front cover will be blank). This is the default setting. Specify Print on inside to print the cover content only on the inside of the front cover (the outside of the front cover will be blank). Specify Print on both sides to print on both the inside and outside of the front cover. Specify Do not print if you do not want any content printed on the front cover. When you add a cover, blank pages may be inserted depending on the allocation of pages to signatures. For information about cover options, see Booklet Maker Help. NOTE: The front cover content pages must be specified as the first and second pages within the source document. NOTE: This option is available when the Content input option is Front & Back Separately. Option Information PRINT OPTIONS 92 Cover Content: Back Cover Specify Print on outside to print the cover content only on the outside of the back cover (the inside of the back cover will be blank). This is the default setting. Specify Print on inside to print the cover content only on the inside of the back cover (the outside of the back cover will be blank). Specify Print on both sides to print on both the inside and outside of the back cover. Specify Do not print if you do not want any content printed on the back cover. When you add a cover, blank pages may be inserted depending on the allocation of pages to signatures. For information about cover options, see Booklet Maker Help. NOTE: The back cover content pages must be specified as the second to last and last pages within the source document. NOTE: This option is available when the Content input option is Front & Back Separately. Cover Content: Spine Width Specify the value for the spine width of the booklet. The spine width value is used to determine the trim amount, and cover paper size. When the Cover input option is Front & Back Separately, the spine width value is used to determine the distance between the front and back cover content. When the Cover input option is Front & Back Together or Pre-printed, the cover content has already been printed or included in the document source, therefore the spine width does not alter the cover layout. Cover Content: Spine Content Specify None if you wish to not print on the spine of the booklet. This is the default setting. Specify Document Page to print content on the spine of the booklet. Printing of the spine is achieved by using the last document page as the spine. For top binding, the spine content is rotated 180 degrees to ensure the spine content is in the correct orientation for reading. NOTE: This option is available when the Content input option is Front & Back Separately. Body Position: Booklet Scaling Specify Shrink to Body Size to automatically scale down the document page to fit the paper size specified from the Body Paper Size menu. Specify None when booklet scaling is not necessary. This is the default setting. Body Position: Align Pages Align Pages positions page content in relation to the center of one-half the paper size or the spine, the center of the sheet where the fold occurs. At the spine aligns the body page content flush against the binding edge. This is the default setting. At the center aligns the body page content horizontally and vertically centered within the body page. You can fine tune the alignment of the page content vertically (parallel to the spine) or horizontally (perpendicular to the spine) by specifying values. For information about centering adjustments, see Booklet Maker Help. Option Information PRINT OPTIONS 93 Impose options The Impose option is only accessible from Command WorkStation. Body Position Custom Adjustment Vertically 0.00 (-50.0-50.0mm) (-1.969 to 1.969 in.) You can fine tune the alignment of the body page content vertically (parallel to the spine) by specifying a value. Specify a positive value to increase the amount of blank space between the body pages and the binding edge. Specify a negative value to decrease the amount of blank space between the body pages and the binding edge. Body Position Custom Adjustment Horizontally 0.00 (-50.0-50.0mm) (-1.969 to 1.969 in.) You can fine tune the alignment of the body page content horizontally (perpendicular to the spine) by specifying a value. Specify a positive value to increase the amount of blank space between the body pages and the binding edge. Specify a negative value to decrease the amount of blank space between the body pages and the binding edge. Cover Position 0.00 (-50.0-50.0mm) (-1.969 to 1.969 in.) Specify the placement of the cover content to be centered vertically and horizontally within the cover sheet. Specify a positive value to increase the amount of blank space between the cover pages and the spine. Specify a negative value to decrease the amount of blank space between the cover pages and spine. Option Information Option Information Impose Select On to specify an imposition layout for the job. Templates Specify an imposition layout template for the job. The available templates are Default Template, 1-up full Bleed, 2-up perfect, 2-up saddle, 3-up trifold brochure, 4-up gate fold, 4-up head to head, 4-up z fold. PRINT OPTIONS 94 Color options . Option Information Color Mode Specify the color mode for the current print job. Select CMYK for a full-color document. Select Grayscale for a grayscale or black-and-white document. Choose Basic Settings to specify color print options and settings. Choose Expert Settings to edit other color print options and settings, including Black Overprint, Black Text and Graphics, Gray (CMYK), and Gray (RGB). For information about Expert Settings, see page 95. Auto Trapping Specify whether the job should automatically reduce white gaps for text and graphics. Setting this option to On may result in graphics or text surrounded with borders. For more information, see page 105. Black Detection When printing jobs with both black-and-white and color pages, use this option to detect black-andwhite pages before the job prints. Select Off if the job contains a significant number of color pages. Select On if the job is predominantly black and white. For more information, see Color Printing. Composite Overprint Select On to overprint objects that are specified in the source PostScript or PDF file. Design applications are typically set to knock out objects. To overprint, you must first change the settings in the source application. When the Composite Overprint option is then set to On, the overprinting commands specified in the source application take place, provided the output is composite and consistent with the separations output. For more information, see Color Printing. Combine Separations When printing separations from supported desktop publishing applications: Select On to combine separations on a single page. Select Off to view separations as four individual black-and-white pages, each representing one color plate. For more information, see Color Printing. Substitute Colors Select On to use the Substitute Color Values defined in the Spot-On module. For more information, see Color Printing. 2-Color Print Mapping Specify if you want to replace spot colors with generic colors when you are creating a print job. This option is available as part of the Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition. For more information, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. PRINT OPTIONS 95 Expert Settings options To access the following options, click Expert Settings. Expert Settings has three modes: • Color Input: use these options for color printing (page 95). • Gray & Black Processing: use these options for grayscale or black & white printing (page 97). • Output: specify the output profile to use for printing document (page 97). Color Input Option Information CMYK/Grayscale Source Specify the simulation goal to be used for the current print job. For more information, see Color Printing. CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method Specify the simulation method for CMYK print jobs. Select Full (Source GCR) for a more complete and accurate simulation. Full (Source GCR) applies colorimetric transformations that adjust hue as well as output density and produces output that maintains the same amount of black as the source document. Select Full (Output GCR) to apply the same simulation method as Full (Source GCR), except that the output produced contains a black amount determined by the Output Profile. Select Quick to use one-dimensional transfer curves to adjust density output of individual color channels. For more information, see Color Printing. Paper Simulation Specify to adjust the color according to the shade of the paper stock used as printable CMYK values in the output color space. This option is available as part of the Fiery Graphic Arts Package. For more information, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. RGB Source Specify a source color space definition for printing RGB images, objects, and text. For more information, see Color Printing. PRINT OPTIONS 96 RGB/Lab Rendering Intent Specify a default CRD (color rendering dictionary) for color conversion when printing RGB images, objects, and text. Select Presentation to print files with artwork, graphics and text. The result is similar to Photographic, with well-rendered flesh tones and more saturated colors. Select Photographic to print photographs, including scanned and digital camera images. The result is less saturated than Presentation style. Select Relative Colorimetric when color matching is important, but you also want to print white as paper white. The white point transformation eliminates borders between blank spaces and white objects. Select Absolute Colorimetric when exact colors are required and visible borders are not distracting. There is no white point transformation. For more information, see Color Printing. Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source Select for RGB jobs when you want to simulate an output device other than the device to which you are printing. For more information, see Color Printing. Spot Color Matching Select Off to print specified PANTONE colors in your job using the current CMYK/Grayscale Source and CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method. Select On to activate the PANTONE Lookup Table. The Fiery PRO80 prints specified PANTONE colors in your job by matching the CMYK print blend to the same color from the PANTONE library. For more information, see Color Printing. PDF/X Output Intent Specify On to enable the PDF/X Output Intent feature to use the embedded output intent for PDF/X compliant print jobs. To use PDF/X Output Intent, you must set the RGB/Lab Source to None. For information about the PDF/X Output Intent feature, see Color Printing. This option is only accessible from Command WorkStation. Option Information PRINT OPTIONS 97 Gray & Black Processing Output Option Information Gray (CMYK) Select these settings to print a CMYK job using black toner instead of process black. This option renders the selected object types (Text/Graphics or Text/Graphics/Images) in grayscale using black only, when C=M=Y=0 and K=n, where n is not zero. Graphics refer to vector graphics and Images refer to raster images. This option is designed to use black efficiently, by using only black toner (rather than four-color process black). For more information, see Color Printing. Gray (RGB) Select these settings to print an RGB job using black toner instead of process black. This option renders the selected object types (Text/Graphics or Text/Graphics/Images) in grayscale using black only, when R=G=B. Graphics refer to vector graphics and Images refer to raster images. This option is designed to use black efficiently, by using only black toner (rather than four-color process black). For more information, see Color Printing. Black Text and Graphics Select Normal to print black text and graphics as a four-color black using C, M, Y, and K toner, and to use normal PostScript rendering. Select Pure Black On to print black text and graphics as a one-color black, using black toner only. Select Rich Black On to print black text and graphics as richer looking black, by layering a small amount of Cyan toner underneath the black toner to make the black even darker. This option is automatically set to Pure Black On if the Black Overprint option is enabled. For more information, see Color Printing. Black Overprint (for pure black) Select Text to overprint black text. Select Text/Graphics to overprint black text and graphics. For more information, see Color Printing. Option Information Default Output Profile Specify the output profile to use for the current print job. For information about output profiles, see Color Printing. PRINT OPTIONS 98 Image options For information about options specified in Setup, see Configuration and Setup. Option Information Halftone Simulation Specify a halftone screening method for your print job. Select Application Defined to use the screening set by the application. Select Newsprint for a look similar to that of a newspaper. Select User Defined 1-3 to use the screening set by the Fiery PRO80. The User Defined Screen 1-3 settings reflect the setting specified in Color Setup in Command WorkStation. For more information, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. Brightness Select 85% for a substantially lighter image, 115% for a substantially darker image, or use one of the settings in between. Image Smoothing Select On to minimize pixilation output when printing low-resolution images. Image Quality Specify the type of image quality for the job. The Image Quality option affects the fineness of images in the job; there is a trade-off with processing speed. Resolution Specify the resolution of the print job (specified in dots-per-inch). Glossy Specify to set printing to gloss an image to reflect light like a photograph. This option is available only for the 70-60C-KM printer. Image Halftone Screen Specify if you want to switch between line or dot screens for the image. If Stochastic is selected, then set the Text Thinning/Reversed Text Enhancement option to OFF and the Resolution option to 600dpi. If Resolution is set for 1200dpi, specify the same setting for this option and the Text and Graphics Halftone Screen option. When Dot1, Dot2, Line1, or Line2 is specified for a job and the job is printed, you must select Permission in the Image Quality Setting screen on the printer touch panel. In order to use these line screen options, they must be installed. For information about installable options, see printer driver Help. Text and Graphics Halftone Screen Specify if you want to switch between line or dot screens for text and graphics. If Resolution is set for 1200dpi, specify Same as image for this option. When Dot1, Dot2, Line1, or Line2 is specified for a job and the job is printed, you must select Permission in the Image Quality Setting screen on the printer touch panel. In order to use these line screen options, they must be installed. For information about installable options, see printer driver Help. PRINT OPTIONS 99 Toner Reduction Select On to reduce all CMYK output values by a copier-specified percentage. Select Draft Mode to conserve toner and significantly lighten the entire image. NOTE: This option is designed to protect the copier’s fuser. It is typically used for thin paper (for example, 64-74 gsm) printed with heavy toner coverage, which may jam the copier fuser. Use maximum CMY density This option is designed to create solid, saturated colors. It is typically used to print text and graphics, not photographic images. Select On to print 100% C, M, Y (or R, G, B) at the maximum density that the printer is capable of printing, regardless of calibration. C, M, Y (or R, G, B) values less than 100% still print at the calibrated density value. For best results, set the CMYK/Grayscale Source or RGB/Lab Source to None. If you set Toner Reduction to On, you override this setting. Text Thinning/Reversed Text Enhancement Select On to sharpen the contrast of thin text printed against a color or black-and-white background. When you select this option, thin text becomes bolder. For more information, see page 126. Text Smoothing Enhancement Select On to smooth the edges of text and graphics. This option can be set only at 600dpi. For more information, see page 126. Halftoned Text Enhancement Select On to sharpen text by adding an outline to the edge of halftone text and graphics. For more information, see page 126. Apply enhancements to: Text and graphics Text, graphics and images Choose the objects to apply the enhancements to. This option controls whether the edge enhancement options are applied to the objects such as text and graphics, or text, graphics, and images. When Text and graphics is specified, the raster image is not specified. When Text, graphics and images is specified, the bitmap character is specified also. This option applies to the three outline enhancement options: • Text Thinning/Reversed Text Enhancement • Text Smoothing Enhancement • Halftoned Text Enhancement Option Information PRINT OPTIONS 100 Finishing options Option Information Pile Allow Specify On for jobs that are both stacked and printed so that the printer allows continuous printing of the job to one of the Stacker Main Trays. If Stacker Auto is specified for the Output Tray option, the Stacker Main Tray is selected automatically even if this option is set to Off. Sorter Mode Specify how to output multiple-page/multiple-copy jobs. For more information, see page 124. Staple Specify whether and how to staple the job. For more information, see page 125. NOTE: To arrange your job in Booklet layout with saddle stitching, specify Center with the Booklet Maker Saddle option specified. In order to use this option, a staple finisher must be installed. For information about installing finishers and other installable options, see printer driver Help. Output Tray Specify the output tray to use for your print job when a Finisher is installed. When the Output Tray is set to Auto, jobs with booklet and finishing options specified are sent to the appropriate output tray. Other jobs are sent to the Sub Tray near the printer. In order to specify Stacker Auto, the Stacker + Stacker finisher must be installed on the printer. For information about installing finishers and other installable options, see printer driver Help. When the Stacker + Stacker finisher is installed, two Stacker Main Trays are automatically selected. When two Stacker Main Trays are full, refer to the printer touch panel for further instructions. Fold Specify how you want your job to be folded. For more information, see page 117. NOTE: When you select a Fold option, Output Delivery is automatically set to Face Down - Normal Order. It is not possible to print a folded job face up or in reverse order. A finisher must be installed to use this option. For information about installing finishers and other installable options, see printer driver Help. Print Side Specify whether the pages of your folded job print with the imageable area on the inside or outside of the folded sheet. For more information, see page 117. Punch Specify the position of the hole punch for your print job. To specify the number of holes, use the separate Punch Holes option. A finisher must be installed to use this option. For information about installing finishers and other installable options, see printer driver Help. For more information, see page 123. PRINT OPTIONS 101 Saddle Stitch Trimming Specify if you want to enable the trimmer for saddle-stitch booklets. A finisher must be installed to use this option. For information about installing finishers and other installable options, see printer driver Help. Output Delivery Select Face down - normal order to print your document on the bottom of the sheet of paper (the document outputs from the printer with the text facing down) in normal (1-N) order. Select Face up - normal order to print your document on the top of the sheet of paper in normal (1-N) order. Select Face down - reverse order to print your document on the bottom of the sheet of paper (the document outputs from the printer with the text facing down) in reverse (N-1) order. Select Face up - reverse order to print your document on the top of the sheet of paper in reverse (N-1) order. NOTE: When you select a Fold option, Output Delivery is automatically set to Face down-normal order. NOTE: For more information, see page 121. Punch Holes Specify the number of holes for your print job. To specify the position of punched holes, use the separate Punch option. A finisher must be installed to use this option. For information about installing finishers and other installable options, see printer driver Help. The number of holes differs depending on the finisher configuration: For US, 2-holes, 3-holes (default) or Multi Punch For EU, 2-holes, 4-holes (default) or Multi Punch For more information, see page 123. Image Shift Adjust an image for duplex printing by shifting the image horizontally, in the direction of paper travel, relative to the leading edge. For more information, see page 119. Perfect Binder Trim Specify to use the Perfect Binder Trim for the job. Option Information PRINT OPTIONS 102 Variable Data Printing (VDP) options The Fiery PRO80 is compatible with the following variable data printing languages: • FreeForm and FreeForm 2 • Personalized Print Markup Language (PPML) • Creo Variable Print Specification (VPS) When creating VDP documents, the following settings for the master document and variable document must match: • Color Mode • Combine Separations • Duplex • Paper Size • Staple The following setting for the variable document overrides the corresponding settings in the master document: • Output Tray • Page Order • Paper Type • Sorter Mode Option Information Create Master To create a FreeForm master from this job, specify a number to assign to the FreeForm master file. Command WorkStation allows you to select up to 100 FreeForm Masters. For more information, see Variable Data Printing. Use Master For variable data print jobs, specify a FreeForm master number to be used for the job. Command WorkStation allows you to select up to 100 FreeForm Masters. For more information, see Variable Data Printing. Preview Master Click to generate a low-resolution image of your master page. Print Master Use this option to verify or confirm your Master page. For more information, see Variable Data Printing. Printer’s default reflects the setting specified in Fiery PRO80 Setup. Remove White PPT Background Select On when using PowerPoint to create variable data in conjunction with FreeForm. PRINT OPTIONS 103 Stamping/Watermark options File Search Path Some PPML and other types of jobs do not contain all of the variable data job resources in a single file. In these cases, on a job per job basis, specify the location of the variable data job external resources so that the Fiery PRO80 can access them. For more information, see Variable Data Printing. Pages Per Record Use this option to define record-based (rather than job-based) finishing, based on the number entered. This option is used with the Define Record Length option. For more information, see Variable Data Printing. Define Record length This feature allows you to process a PDF or PostScript file like a variable data print job, and to apply record-based finishing. This option is used in connection with the Pages Per Record option. For more information, see Variable Data Printing. Use PDF XObjects Specify On to use PDF XObjects, a feature that recognizes objects (text, images, vectors) within a PostScript or PDF file and caches the image, reducing the need to reRIP (re-process) image data for faster printing. For more information, see Variable Data Printing. This option is only accessible from Command WorkStation. Option Information Option Information Watermarks Select standard text for your watermark from the pull-down menu. To create your own watermark, click New. To modify a standard watermark, select from the pull-down menu and click Edit. To remove a watermark from the list, select from the pull-down menu and click Delete. For more information about using watermarks, see printer driver Help. Print Watermarks: First Page Only Use this option to print watermarks on only the first page. For more information about using watermarks, see printer driver Help. PRINT OPTIONS 104 Overriding print option settings Print option settings that were specified in the printer driver can be overridden in Command WorkStation Job Properties. TO OVERRIDE JOB PROPERTIES 1 In Command WorkStation, right-click a held job in the Job Center view. 2 Choose Properties from the pop-up menu. 3 Specify the number of copies to print, and then click Print. You can override most print options in the printer driver and Command WorkStation Job Properties. Exceptions are listed in the following table: Printer driver tab Option Driver Win Driver Mac CWS JOB INFO Print Range X Print Queue Action X X Secure Print X X Account Name X X Account Password X X User Authentication: Username X X User Authentication: Password X X User Authentication: Use Windows Login X User Authentication: I’m a Guest X MEDIA Document Size X LAYOUT: Normal Rotate 180 (check box) X EXPERT SETTINGS PDF/X Output Intent X X IMAGE Toner Reduction X X VARIABLE DATA PRINTING Preview Master X X Use PDF XObjects X STAMPING/WATERMARK Watermarks X X Print Watermarks: First Page Only X X PRINT OPTIONS 105 Additional information The following sections provide additional information about print options. For more information about options, see the tables that begin on page 80. Auto Trapping Trapping is a technique to print some objects slightly larger or smaller than specified in an application, in order to prevent white edges around the objects. These white edges, or “halos,” can be caused by factors such as misregistration, the physical properties of the toners, and the stiffness of the media. The Auto Trapping feature provides you with advanced trapping settings and gives you full control over their values. For more information, see Color Printing. Booklet Maker Booklet Maker is the imposition tool that allows you to quickly print documents in booklet format, without the need for more involved page imposition programs. Booklet Maker provides advanced settings, while streamlining the booklet-making process by displaying only the options and controls relevant to your selections. Booklet Maker is capable of imposing jobs from nearly any application. Booklet Maker can be accessed in the printer driver when you print a job, or in Command WorkStation Job Properties, where you can modify a job’s properties. NOTE: Mixed media jobs, and variable data jobs are not supported when using Booklet Maker. PRINT OPTIONS 106 The following booklet layouts are available: Saddle binding: In Saddle binding, signatures are folded together as a group, and then stapled or stitched along the center fold, which forms the spine of the booklet. Nested Saddle binding: The Nested Saddle binding method combines saddle and perfect binding methods by stacking two or more saddles (also called “groups” or “subsets”) together along the common fold, then gluing them together at the fold to form the spine. Perfect binding: In Perfect binding, separate folded pages are printed and stacked in booklet order. Finished pages are stitched adjacent to one another for trimming or gluing. For Booklet Maker options and available settings, see the table that begins on page 87. For information about using Booklet Maker options, see Booklet Maker Help. Saddle (left) binding Saddle (right) binding 1 Saddle (top) binding 1 1 Nested Saddle (left) binding Nested Saddle (right) binding Nested Saddle (top) binding Front Back Perfect booklet PRINT OPTIONS 107 Booklet Maker in the printer driver You can choose to work with Booklet Maker in the printer driver in two ways: • Using the Booklet Maker wizard Recommended for first-time or novice users • Specifying settings in the main Booklet Maker dialog box Recommended for experienced or advanced users For Booklet Maker options and available settings in the printer driver, see the table that begins on page 87. To use Booklet Maker to print a booklet from the printer driver, use one of the procedures below. TO ACCESS BOOKLET MAKER FROM THE WINDOWS PRINTER DRIVER 1 In your application, choose File > Print. 2 Select the Fiery PRO80 as your printer, and then click Properties. 3 In the printer driver, click the Layout icon, and select the Booklet option. For information about using Booklet Maker options, see Booklet Maker Help. TO ACCESS BOOKLET MAKER FROM THE MAC OS X PRINTER DRIVER 1 In your application, choose File > Print. 2 Select the Fiery PRO80 as your printer, and then choose Fiery Features from the drop-down list. 3 Click Full Properties in the Quick Access pane. 4 In the printer driver, click the Layout icon, and select the Booklet option. For information about using Booklet Maker options, see Booklet Maker Help. PRINT OPTIONS 108 Booklet Maker in Job Properties You can choose to work with Booklet Maker in Job Properties in two ways: • Using the Booklet Maker wizard Recommended for first-time or novice users • Specifying settings in the main Booklet Maker dialog box Recommended for experienced or advanced users To access Booklet Maker from Command WorkStation Job Properties, use the following procedure. TO ACCESS BOOKLET MAKER FROM COMMAND WORKSTATION 1 Double-click your print job in the Active Jobs window, or right-click the job and select Properties from pull-down menu. 2 Select the Layout icon in the Job Properties window. 3 Select the Booklet option. 4 Click the Basic tab to access the Booklet Maker wizard, or click the Advanced tab to access all of the Booklet Maker settings in one dialog box. For information about using Booklet Maker options, see Command WorkStation Help. About Booklet Maker imposition Imposition is the process of printing multiple pages on single sheets of paper. When the imposed sheets are folded together as signatures, the pages follow in sequential or reading order. Booklet Maker is designed for 2-up imposition, which imposes four individual pages from your document on a single sheet that is printed duplex. The 80C-KM printer and 70-60C-KM printer is equipped with an advanced finisher, that also allows 1-up Perfect Binding. For more information, see “Booklet Maker: 1-up Perfect binding” on page 113. The order in which pages are imposed is determined by the binding method you select. PRINT OPTIONS 109 Booklet Maker and Impose Booklet Maker settings are supported by Impose, if enabled. You can open a job with Booklet Maker settings in Impose to preview the imposition layout or further modify the imposition layout, if necessary. Impose translates and maps all Booklet Maker settings to Impose commands. NOTE: When a job with Booklet Maker settings has been edited in the Impose window, the job can no longer be edited in Booklet Maker. Impose offers more settings that cannot be mapped to Booklet Maker settings. For more information about Impose, see Utilities. Main Booklet Maker window In the Booklet Maker main window, Booklet Maker dynamically displays all of the controls applicable to creating a booklet. TO CREATE A BOOKLET 1 Select a Booklet Type: Saddle, Nested Saddle, or Perfect. For 1-up Perfect binding, see “Booklet Maker: 1-up Perfect binding” on page 113. 2 Select a binding edge: Left, Top, or Right. 3 Specify a Paper size. 4 Select Shrink to Fit, if required. 5 Specify Page Alignment. 6 Specify Creep compensation, if required. Creep compensation is available for Saddle and Nested Saddle booklets. 7 Specify cover settings, if you selected a Saddle booklet in step 1. NOTE: Cover settings are only available for Saddle booklets. For more information, see “Adding a cover” on page 111. 8 Click OK to save your settings, Cancel to cancel the job, or Print to print your job. PRINT OPTIONS 110 Booklet Maker wizard In the Booklet Maker wizard, accessed by clicking Launch Wizard, the windows display the steps in the booklet-making process. TO NAVIGATE THE WIZARD • To advance from one window to the next, click Next. • To return to previous windows, click Back. • To cancel settings and exit Booklet Maker, click Cancel. TO CREATE A BOOKLET USING THE WIZARD 1 Click Launch Wizard. 2 Specify the Booklet Type (binding method) and Binding edge, and then click Next. 3 If Saddle was selected for Booklet Type, specify cover and content settings, and then click Next. 4 Specify Paper size for the body, and then click Next. If Saddle was selected for Booklet Type and Cover was selected, specify the paper setting for the cover, and then click Next. 5 If Nested Saddle was selected for Booklet Type, specify number of sheets in a subset. 6 Specify Page alignment and gutters, and then click Next. If Saddle or Nested Saddle was selected for Booklet Type, specify Creep compensation. 7 View the settings summary. 8 Click Finish to save your booklet, Back to change any settings, or Cancel to cancel the job. PRINT OPTIONS 111 Adding a cover Covers are an option for Saddle booklets only. TO INSERT A PRE-PRINTED COVER 1 In the main Booklet Maker window, select Saddle for Booklet Type and a binding edge. 2 Specify the required settings for Paper Size and Page Alignment for the body of the booklet. 3 Specify Pre-Printed from the Cover Content input menu. 4 Click Define Cover and specify media and paper size from the Media menu, and the source tray from the Booklet Cover Source menu. NOTE: Set the Paper Weight and Paper Size options for the document in the Media tab before you set the Booklet cover source option. 5 Click OK. TO SPECIFY AN INLINE COVER 1 In the main Booklet Maker window, select Saddle for Booklet Type and a binding edge. 2 Specify the required settings for Paper Size and Page Alignment for the body of the booklet. 3 Choose Front & Back Separately from the Cover Content input menu. 4 Specify the Front Cover and Back Cover settings. 5 Click Define Cover and specify media and paper size from the Media menu, and the source tray for the inline covers from the Booklet Cover Source menu. NOTE: Set the Paper Weight and Paper Size options for the document in the Media tab before you set the Booklet cover source option. 6 Click OK. NOTE: When you print an inline cover with top-edge binding, the outside back cover automatically rotates 180 degrees to match the orientation of the front cover. PRINT OPTIONS 112 Cover options For Saddle only, Booklet Maker includes two cover options, either pre-printed or inline, for which you can specify media. You can specify additional options for an inline cover. • Content Input: Select from Front and Back Separately or Pre-Printed. • Front and Back Separately: Select this option to specify an inline cover that prints the cover pages and body pages as a single job. Separate pages from your document are imposed on a single sheet that forms the cover of your booklet. You can specify an inline cover when your original document includes the cover pages and/ or cover artwork for your booklet. The cover content may be the first and last pages of your document, or the first two and last two pages of your document, or any combination. If you select this option, you can specify the Front Cover and Back Cover options below. • Pre-Printed: Select this option to insert a pre-printed cover that will be merged with the body pages of your booklet, which print separately. If you select this option, the Front Cover and Back Cover options below are disabled. • Front Cover and Back Cover: These options allow you to quickly decide whether your front and back covers print duplex, single-sided, or both sides blank, without needing to add blank pages in your original document. With top-edge binding that includes a cover, the outside of the back cover automatically rotates 180 degrees to match the orientation of the front cover. • Define Cover: This option allows you to select a media and size for your cover pages, which may be trimmed. You can also specify the Booklet Cover Source tray for the cover media. This option is available for both pre-printed and inline covers. NOTE: Set the Paper Weight and Paper Size options for the document in the Media tab before you specify the Booklet cover source tray. Printing Booklet Maker jobs Booklet Maker does not support jobs sent to the Direct queue. Booklet Maker print jobs must be sent to the Print queue or Hold queue. TO CHANGE THE UNIT OF MEASUREMENT FOR A BOOKLET 1 In Command WorkStation, go to Edit > Preferences. 2 Click the Size tab. 3 Select the unit of measurement (millimeters, points, or inches). 4 Click OK. Changes are not effective until the next time Command WorkStation is started. PRINT OPTIONS 113 Booklet Maker: 1-up Perfect binding The 1-up Perfect binding method prints single body pages that are stacked together, so that the edges may be trimmed (if desired) and glued, and then wrapped by a cover sheet. You can access the 1-up Perfect binding method from the printer driver or Command WorkStation Job Properties. NOTE: If the printer is equipped with an advanced finisher, such as a Perfect binder, the option of 1-up Perfect binding may be available. When you print a 1-up Perfect booklet, the printer will calculate the spine width based on the number of sheets and the thickness of the paper. After the job has printed, go to Command WorkStation, open Job Properties for the job, and click the Layout icon. Job Properties will show the actual spine width that was measured by the printer as “Detected Value” under the Spine width option. The actual measured spine width number can be used for preparing the accurate cover paper size for subsequent printing of the same 1-up Perfect booklet. NOTE: Do not print anything on the inner side of the cover sheet (the area glued to the book block). Doing so can prevent the cover sheet and book block from adhering properly. For 1-up Perfect binding print options and available settings, see the table that begins on page 90. To print a 1-up Perfect booklet, you must select 1-up Perfect as the booklet type. TO ACCESS BOOKLET MAKER FROM THE PRINTER DRIVER 1 In your application, choose File > Print. 2 Select the Fiery PRO80 as your printer, and then click Properties. Mac OS X: Choose Fiery Features from the drop-down list, click Full Properties in the Quick Access pane, and then click the Layout icon. Windows: Click the Layout icon. 3 Select the Booklet option. 4 Choose 1-up Perfect for the Booklet Type. 5 Specify a binding edge: Left, Top, or Right. Perfect binding method PRINT OPTIONS 114 6 Specify the booklet print options, such as cover page content, body position, and cover position. NOTE: If you are using the simplex print mode for the body set, click Edit for Body Paper Size, and then select Off for Duplex in the Media dialog box. 7 Specify Auto or Perfect Binder Main Tray for Output Tray under the Finishing icon. 8 Click OK in the Properties dialog box. 9 Click Print in the Print dialog box. TO PRINT A 1-UP PERFECT JOB FROM COMMAND WORKSTATION 1 Send a job to the Held queue of Command WorkStation. 2 Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Mac OS) the job in the Job Center view and choose Properties. 3 In the Job Properties dialog box, click the Layout icon. 4 Select the Booklet option. 5 Click Start Wizard to use the Booklet Maker wizard to specify the booklet properties. 6 Choose 1-up Perfect for the Booklet Type. 7 Specify a binding edge: Left, Top, or Right. 8 Specify the booklet print options, such as cover page content, body position, and cover position. NOTE: If you are using the simplex print mode for the body set, click Edit for Body Paper Size, and then select Off for Duplex in the Media dialog box. 9 Specify Auto or Perfect Binder Main Tray for Output Tray under the Finishing icon. 10 Click Print in the Job Properties dialog box. PRINT OPTIONS 115 Document size and Paper size Document size is the page size defined in your application’s Print setup (or Page setup) dialog box. Paper size is the size of the actual sheet of paper on which your job is printed. It may be useful to think of Document size as digital input (the page size defined in your original document) and Paper size as the physical output (the actual size of the paper in the printer tray). In cases when you print one document page per sheet of paper, Document size is usually the same as the Paper size. However, Document size may differ from Paper size when you print booklets or impose multiple document pages on a single sheet. The following illustrations show examples of possible relationships between Document size and Paper size. Note that the orientation of all pages shown is Landscape. Document size may also differ from Paper size when using the Scale or Scale to Fit options. The Scale option reduces or enlarges the document page at a specified percent. The Scale to Fit option automatically reduces or enlarges the document image to fit the selected Paper size. For information about Scale and Scale to Fit, see page 124. For information about Document size and Paper size in booklet printing, see Booklet Maker Help. Document size (input) Paper size (output) Document size is the same as Paper size. Scaling is 100%. Letter Letter Tabloid Document size scaled to fit on Letter Paper size. Scaling is 50%. Tabloid 11x17 Letter A4 Document size scaled to fit on A3 Paper size. Scaling is 141%. A4 A3 A A A A A A PRINT OPTIONS 116 Duplex printing TO PRINT DUPLEX (DOUBLE-SIDED) PAGES 1 In your application, choose File > Print and do one of the following. Mac OS X: Select the Fiery PRO80 as your printer, choose Fiery Features from the drop-down list, click Full Properties in the Quick Access pane, and then select Normal on the Layout tab. Windows: Select the Fiery PRO80 as your printer, click Properties, and then click the Layout icon. 2 Choose one of the Duplex settings: Right and Left Bind: Prints the top of the image on Side 1, on the same edge of the page as the top of the image on Side 2. Top Bind: Prints the top of the image on Side 1, on the opposite edge of the page from the top of the image on Side 2. The following table shows how the Duplex settings correspond to printed output. 3 Print the job. Right and Left Bind Top Bind Portrait Landscape 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 PRINT OPTIONS 117 Fold options The following types of fold are supported: NOTE: When you select a folding option, Output Delivery is automatically set to Face downnormal order. It is not possible to print folded jobs face up or in reverse order. The Print Side option allows you to specify whether text/images print on the inside or outside of the folded sheet. Tri-Fold-in/Multi-Tri-Fold-in supports one sheet only. Special finishers must be installed to use the Fold options. For information about finishers and other installable options, see printer driver Help. Half-Fold Tri-Fold-in/Multi-Tri-Fold-in Gate Fold Tri-Fold-Out Z Fold Double Parallel Fold Multi Half Fold PRINT OPTIONS 118 Gang-up printing The Fiery PRO80 includes two speed-printing options: Step & repeat: Select this option to speed print a job so that the first page of your document is printed twice on the first sheet. The next sheet duplicates the data on the second page, the next sheet duplicates the data on the third page, and so on. When the printed sheets are cut in half, the result is two complete sets of the same document. Cut & stack: Select this option to speed print a job so that when the sheets are stacked and cut from the central position, the job is numbered in order and separated as two stacks. The print order is such that when the sheets are cut in half, you can combine them to form a single complete set of the document, in faster printing time. For available options and settings, see the table on page 86. TO ACCESS GANG-UP PRINT FROM THE WINDOWS PRINTER DRIVER 1 In your application, choose File > Print. 2 Select the Fiery PRO80 as your printer and click Properties. 3 In the printer driver, click the Layout icon and select the Gangup option. TO ACCESS GANG-UP PRINT FROM THE MAC OS X PRINTER DRIVER 1 In your application, choose File > Print. 2 Select the Fiery PRO80 as your printer and choose Fiery Features from the drop-down list. 3 Click Full Properties in the Quick Access pane. 4 In the printer driver, click the Layout icon and select the Gangup option. Front only Front Back Single-sided Duplex (double-sided) Front only Front Back Single-sided Duplex (double-sided) PRINT OPTIONS 119 Image Shift Image Shift allows you to specify how much the image on each page should be shifted relative to the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) axis. Moving the job content in this manner enables you to allow for various finishing options, such as stapling and binding. Image Shift prevents the image from being clipped. NOTE: This option is available in the printer drivers or Command WorkStation. NOTE: This option is effective only for jobs in which Pages per sheet is set to 1-up. TO DEFINE IMAGE SHIFT FOR A PRINT JOB 1 In your application, choose File > Print and do one of the following. Mac OS X: Select the Fiery PRO80 as your printer, choose Fiery Features from the drop-down list, click Full Properties in the Quick Access pane, and then click the Finishing icon. Windows: Select the Fiery PRO80 as your printer, click Properties, and then click the Finishing icon. 2 Expand the Image Shift option and click Image Shift. 3 Select the units of measurement. 4 Type the Front and Back image shift settings in the X and Y axis fields. You can also use the arrow buttons to shift the image settings. NOTE: The maximum value for both X and Y axes is 999.99 points/13.89 inches/352.77 mm. 5 To align front and back images proportionately, select Align front and back images. 6 Click Apply to save your settings, and then click OK. Mixed Media The Mixed Media feature allows you to define the chapter divisions of a print job and to print certain pages, or ranges of pages, on varying types of media. For example, you can use this option to add blank pages or to specify duplex pages within a single print job. You can also use Mixed Media to specify chapter-based finishing options, which treat each chapter as a separate finishing or duplexing set. You can access Mixed Media from Command WorkStation or the printer driver. Instructions for accessing and using Mixed Media are provided in the Command WorkStation online Help. Features specific to the Fiery PRO80 are described in Utilities. The following procedure describes how to access and print using Mixed Media from the printer driver. PRINT OPTIONS 120 TO ACCESS MIXED MEDIA FROM THE PRINTER DRIVER 1 Select Print from your application. Mac OS X: Select the Fiery PRO80 as your printer, choose Fiery Features from the drop-down list, click Full Properties in the Quick Access pane, and then click the Media icon. Windows: Select the Fiery PRO80 as your printer, click Properties, and then click the Media icon. 2 Expand the Mixed Media option to specify settings. 3 Select from the following options: Chapter Start Page(s): Use this option to designate chapter divisions, using comma-separated values (for example: 4,9,17) to designate the start of each new chapter. NOTE: It is not necessary to type the first page; page numbers refer to the numbering of the original document. Define Each Chapter As A Separate Finishing Set: Select this option to apply finishing options (such as stapling or sorting) or double-sided printing to each chapter created with the Chapter Start Page(s) option. For double-sided printing, using this option forces each starting page to use a right-side page, adding a preceding left-sided blank, if necessary. NOTE: If you use the Chapter Start Page(s), Define Cover, or Define Each Chapter As A Finishing Set, all media specified in the Paper Size per chapter must share the same dimensions (for example, all Letter, all Tabloid, or all A4). Define Cover: Use this option to assign page attributes (Color mode, Duplex, Glossy, Tab shift, Paper color, Punched paper, Paper type, Paper weight, Paper size, and Input tray) to front and back cover pages. New Page Range: Use this option to assign page attributes (Color mode, Duplex, Glossy, Tab shift, Paper Color, Punched paper, Paper type, Paper weight, Paper size, and Input tray) to specific pages, or ranges of pages. After you set page attributes, select Add Definition to save your settings. New Insert: Use this option to assign page attributes (Paper color, Punched paper, Paper type, Paper weight, Paper size, and Input tray) to blank pages. 4 After you set page attributes, click Add Definition (for Page Range) or Insert (for Blank pages). 5 Click OK. NOTE: You can save up to 100 different settings for the Selection List in the Mixed Media dialog box. The way you define Mixed Media in the Windows and Mac OS X printer drivers is similar to the way you define it in Command WorkStation. For more information and detailed procedures, see Utilities. PRINT OPTIONS 121 Output Delivery Output Delivery allows you to specify how the stack of copies is delivered in the output tray. Select Face up for sheets delivered into the output tray with copies facing up, with Normal order for the first sheet on the top of the stack, or Reverse order for the first sheet on the bottom of the stack. Select Face down for sheets delivered into the output tray with copies facing down, with Normal order for the first sheet on the top of the stack, or Reverse order for the first sheet on the bottom of the stack. NOTE: When using a finisher that reverses the order of the stack, you can specify Reverse order so that when the stack is fed through the finisher, the pages are delivered in the correct order. 1 Face up - normal order 2 Face up - reverse order 1 2 1 Face down - normal order 2 Face down - reverse order 1 2 PRINT OPTIONS 122 Paper Catalog Paper Catalog is a system-based paper warehouse database that stores the attributes of any media that is available for printing from the Fiery PRO80. After the media types have been added at the printer touch panel, you can select media from those listed for your job. The following procedure describes how to access Paper Catalog from the printer driver. TO ACCESS PAPER CATALOG FROM THE PRINTER DRIVER 1 Establish Two-Way Communication between your computer and the Fiery PRO80 by entering the IP Address or DNS name in Properties. For information about establishing Two-Way Communication, see printer driver Help. 2 Select Print from your application. Mac OS X: Select the Fiery PRO80 as your printer, choose Fiery Features from the drop-down list, click Full Properties in the Quick Access pane, and then click the Media icon. Windows: Select the Fiery PRO80 as your printer, click Properties, and then click the Media icon. 3 Select the required media from the Paper Catalog pull-down menu. 4 Click Select Media to view the entire database and the full descriptions of paper attributes. For information about accessing Paper Catalog from Command WorkStation, see Utilities. For information about using Hot Folders, see Utilities. PRINT OPTIONS 123 Punch and Punch Holes Punch positions vary according to paper size, paper type, number of pages, and feed direction. The number of holes differs depending on the finisher destination: • US, 2-Holes, 3-Holes, or Multi Punch, with 3-Holes the default • EU, 2-Holes, 4-Holes, or Multi Punch, with 4-Holes the default The following table illustrates the number of holes and punch positions. NOTE: Multi Punch is supported only on Letter for US and A4 for International paper sizes. For information about configuring the printer driver for finishers and other installed options, see printer driver Help. Punch setting Portrait Landscape Left Right Top Left Right Top 2-Holes 3-Holes 4-Holes Multi Punch PRINT OPTIONS 124 Scale The operator can specify a scaling override in Command WorkStation, but the override is applied to any scaling value already set in the active job. For example, if a user sends a job with a scaling value of 50% and the operator specifies a Scale override of 300%, the job is printed at 150% of the original document size, that is, 50% of 300%. Scale to Fit The Scale to Fit option allows you to scale a job to a Paper size different from the Document size. When you set this option to On, the image is increased or reduced in size to fit the imageable area of the paper size you select from the Paper Size menu. When you set this option to Off, the original document size is printed without any scaling, even if you select a larger paper size. Sorter Mode Sorting and collating is supported on the printer with a finisher attached. Sort: Copies of a complete job are collated and output in the same direction, arranged in this page order: 1-2-3, 1-2-3, 1-2-3. Group: Copies of a complete job are output in the same direction, arranged in this page order: 1-1-1, 2-2-2, 3-3-3. Offset Sort: Copies of a complete job are output in the same direction, arranged in this page order: 1-2-3, 1-2-3, 1-2-3. This option includes offset stacking. Offset Group: Copies of a complete job are output, arranged in this page order: 1-1-1, 2-2-2, 3-3-3. This option includes offset stacking. Document size Letter Paper size 11 x17 Scale to Fit set to On Scale to Fit set to Off PRINT OPTIONS 125 Staple option Stapling is supported on the printer with the Staple Finisher attached. Off: Disables the stapler. Left Corner: The job is stapled with one staple along one corner of the left page edge. Right Corner: The job is stapled with one staple along one corner of the right page edge. Left 2 Position: The job is stapled with two staples along the left side page edge. Right 2 Position: The job is stapled with two staples along the right side page edge. Top 2 Position: The job is stapled with two staples along the top side page edge. Center: The job is printed like a booklet with staples in the center of the page. When you specify Left Corner, Right Corner, or Center stapling, you can select a different heavy media (paste board) for the cover pages of your print job. For information about installing optional finishers, see printer driver Help. Left Corner Right Corner Left 2 Position Right 2 Position Top 2 Position Center A A A A A A A PRINT OPTIONS 126 Text Thinning/Reversed Text Enhancement When Text Thinning/Reversed Text Enhancement is set to On, the printer performs a reversed text enhancement that slims and defines text with an outline. Select On to sharpen the contrast of thin text printed against a color or black-and-white background. NOTE: In general, with white text against dark background, thin text will become bolder. Halftoned Text Enhancement When Halftoned Text Enhancement is set to On, the printer adds a gray-text outline to the edge of halftone text and graphics to reduce the appearance of jagged edges. Text Smoothing Enhancement When Texts Smoothing Enhancement is set to On, the printer smooths the edges of text and graphics to reduce the appearance of jagged edges. Text Thinning/Reversed Text Enhancement OFF Text Thinning/Reversed Text Enhancement ON Text Thinning/Reversed Text Enhancement OFF Text Thinning/Reversed Text Enhancement ON Halftoned Text Enhancement OFF Halftoned Text Enhancement ON Text Smoothing Enhancement OFF Text Smoothing Enhancement ON PRINT OPTIONS 127 User Authentication If Users and Groups user authentication has been enabled in the Fiery PRO80 Setup, you must enter a valid user name and password to send a print job to the Fiery PRO80. In Command WorkStation, the management of jobs is determined by how you have logged on to the Fiery PRO80. For Mac OS X: Select the Job Info icon and type logon information in the User Name and Password fields. Use Windows Login: Choose this option if you are already logged on to a Windows computer. Otherwise, type your Windows network logon information in the Username and Password fields. Validate: Click to validate user authorization and to confirm printing privileges. To validate, Two-Way Communication must be activated. For information on establishing Two-Way Communication, see printer driver Help. I’m a guest: Choose this option to activate guest printing privileges. By default, guest printing is permitted. For information about enabling Users and Groups user authentication in the Configure WebTool, see Configuration and Setup. INDEX 129 Numerics 1-up Perfect binding method 90 Align Pages option 92 Back Cover option 92 Body Paper Size option 90 Body Position Custom Adjustment Horizontally option 93 Body Position Custom Adjustment Vertically option 93 Booklet Scaling option 92 Content input option 91 Cover Paper Size option 91 Cover Position option 93 Front Cover option 91 Spine Content option 92 Spine Width option 92 units 90 1-up Perfect booklets 113 2-Color Print Mapping option 94 A Account Name field 32, 61 Account Name option 81 Account Password field 32, 61 Account Password option 82 Align Pages option 92 AppleTalk connection, Mac OS X 18, 22, 24 Auto Trapping option 94, 105 automatic rotation 111 B Back Cover option 92 binding method 87, 90 binding options 109 Black Detection option 94 Black Overprint option 97 Black Text and Graphics option 97 Booklet layout mode 87 Booklet Maker 1-up Perfect binding method 90 1-up Perfect booklets 113 Align pages option 87 Back Cover option 89 binding method 87 Cover Content option 88 Creep compensation 88 Define Cover option 89 Front Cover option 88 Gutter option 88 Increase gutter by option 88 Nested Saddle booklets 106 Page Alignment 87 Paper size 86 Paper size for 2-up 87 Shrink to fit option 87 Booklet Maker settings 109 Booklet Maker wizard 107, 108, 110 Booklet option 105 Booklet Scaling option 92 Booklet type 1-up Perfect binding 113 binding method 87 Brightness option 98 C CMYK mode 94 CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method option 95 CMYK/Grayscale Source option 95 Color mode 94 Color print options setting 33, 61 Color Setup, job overrides 79 Combine Separations option 94 Command WorkStation, printing files from 27 Composite Overprint option 94 Control Bar 82 Copies option 81 INDEX INDEX 130 cover inline 111 pre-printed 111 selecting media for 112 Cover Content Input option 88, 91 Cover Position option 93 cover settings 109, 111 Create Master option 102 Creep compensation 88 custom page size, see defining a custom page size, printing a custom page size D Default Browser connection 16, 20 Default Output Profile option 97 default print options 30, 65 Define Record Length 103 defining a custom page size Windows 67 defining Image Shift 119 Docs tab in WebTools 27, 58 Document Size option 83, 104 Downloads tab in WebTools 12, 42 Duplex (double-sided) option 86, 116 Duplex option 85 duplex printing 108, 112 duplex printing see Duplex (double-sided) option E E-mail Service about 70 Manage print jobs 72 Expert Color Settings Advanced Edit dialog box 35, 63 F Fiery Features 31 Fiery Software Uninstaller Utility deleting 14 installing and using 14 on User Software DVD 9 File port, saving files to 67 File Search Path 103 finishing options 108 first-time use 107, 108 Fold option 100, 117 FreeForm Preview Master option 104 Print Master option 102 Front Cover option 91 FTP Printing 74 G Gang-up print Cut & stack 118 Gang-up type 86 Gutter option 86 Increase gutter by option 86 Shrink to fit option 86 Step & repeat 118 Gang-up type 86 Gangup layout mode 86 Glossy option 98 Gray (CMYK) option 97 Gray (RGB) option 97 Gray Text Outlining option 99 Grayscale mode 94 gutters 86, 88 H Halftone Simulation 98 Halftoned Text Enhancement option 99 Hot Folders 27 job overrides 79 I I’m a Guest 81, 104, 127 Image Halftone Screen option 98 Image Quality option 98 Image Shift option 101 Image Shift, defining 119 Image Smoothing option 98 Impose layout mode 93 imposition 108 Input Tray option 83 installable options configuring 57 configuring for Windows Vista 57 installing Job Monitor 69 printer driver from User Software DVD 44 printer drivers from server 43 printer drivers using Point and Print 40 virtual printers using Point and Print 47 installing printer drivers 13 Instructions field 32, 81 IP Printer connection 17, 21 IPP connection 55 INDEX 131 J Job Batching 77 Job Info icon 60 Job Monitor configuring connection 69 installing 69 on User Software DVD 9 using 69 job overrides 2-Color Print Mapping option 94 Auto Trapping option 94 Black Detection option 94 Black Overprint option 97 Black Text and Graphics option 97 Brightness option 98 CMYK/Grayscale Processing Method option 95 CMYK/Grayscale Source option 95 Combine Separations option 94 Composite Overprint option 94 Duplex option 85 Fold option 100 Glossy option 98 Image Halftone Screen option 98 Image Quality option 98 Image Shift option 101 Image Smoothing option 98 Input Tray option 83 Output Delivery option 121 Output Tray option 100 Paper Simulation option 95 Paper Size option 115 PDF/X Output Intent 96 Perfect Binder Trim option 101 Pile Allow option 100 Print Queue Action option 82, 104 print settings 79 Punch Holes option 101 RGB/Lab Rendering Intent option 96 RGB/Lab Source option 95 Saddle Stitch Trimmer option 101 Scale to Fit option 85 Schedule Printing option 81 Separate RGB/Lab to CMYK Source option 96 Staple option 100, 125 Stapler Mode option 100 Substitute Colors option 94 Text and Graphics Halftone Screen option 98 Use Windows Login option 81, 104 L Language folders 11 Layout option see Pages per sheet Line Printer Daemon - LPD 17, 21 LPD/LPR connection, Mac OS X 25 LPR connection 51 M Mac OS X AppleTalk connection 18, 22, 24 Default Browser connection 16, 20 deleting printer driver files 14 Fiery Software Uninstaller utility 14 IP Printer connection 17, 21 Line Printer Daemon - LPD 17, 21 LPD/LPR connection 25 PPD 27 printer driver installation 10 printer driver setup 15 selecting printers 28 Mac OS X applications, printing from 27 Manage print jobs with e-mail commands 72 managing print jobs 72 measurement units specifying 112 Mixed Media 84, 119 N Nested Saddle booklets 106 Notes field 32, 60 Notes option 81 O Orientation Override option 85 OSX Installer 11, 27 Output Delivery 101 Output Delivery option 121 Output Tray option 100 overrides, of job settings 79 overriding Printer Setup settings 64 INDEX 132 P Page Order option 85 Page Setup dialog box 30 Pages Per Record 103 Pages per sheet option 85 Paper Catalog 83, 122 Paper Color option 83 Paper Simulation option 95 Paper Size option 84, 115 Paper Type option 83 Paper Weight option 83 Password 81, 104 PDF/X Output Intent 96 Perfect Binder Trim option 101 Perfect booklet setting 106 PIle Allow option 100 Point and Print 40 Postflight 82 PostScript fonts 9 PostScript Printer Description file, see PPD PostScript printer description files, see PPDs PostScript printer driver deleting 49 download using WebTools 42 installing from User Software DVD 44 installing using Point and Print 40 PostScript printer drivers, explained 78 PPD Mac OS X 27 overview 9 Windows 45 PPDs (PostScript printer description files) options 79 Preview Master option 102, 104 Print Border option 85 Print dialog box 30 Print Master option 102 print options 59 in Full Properties of Quick Access window 32 setting 30 Print Queue Action option 82, 104 Print Range option 81 Print Side option 100 printer default settings, where to set 79 Printer Delete Utility 49 on User Software DVD 9 printer drivers downloading with WebTools 12 installing 10 setting up 15 Printer Setup Utility 11 Printer’s default 64 printing from an application 59 from Mac OS X applications 27 to File port 67 using an E-mail client 70 printing a custom page size Windows 67 printing connections, supported types 50 printing duplex pages 85 Prntdrve.exe file 42 Progressives 82 Punch Holes option 101, 123 Punch option 100, 123 Punched Paper option 84 Pure Black see Black Text and Graphics Q Quick Access window, customizing 31 R reading layout 108 Remove White PPT Background option 102 Resolution option 98 RGB/Lab Rendering Intent option 96 RGB/Lab Source option 95 Rich Black see Black Text and Graphics RIPping 78 rotation automatic 111 S Saddle Stitch Trimmer option 101 Sample Print 76 Scale option 85, 124 Scale to Fit option 85, 124 Schedule Printing option 81 Section Name option 104 Section Password option 104 Secure Print field 32 Secure Print option 81, 104 Secured Print option 75 INDEX 133 selecting printers Mac OS X 28 Separate RGB/Lab to CYMK Source option 96 sheet 108 Shrink to fit 86, 87 single-sided printing 112 SMB printing completing connection 50 setup 41 Sorter option 100, 124 speed printing see Gang-up print Spine Content option 92 Spine Width option 92 Spot Color Matching option 96 Standard Booklet setting 106 Staple option 100, 125 Stapler Mode option 100 Step & repeat 118 subset 110 Substitute Colors option 94 T TCP/IP connection 51 Text and Graphics Halftone Screen option 98 Text Smoothing Enhancement option 99 Text Thinning/Reversed Text Enhancement option 99 Toner Reduction option 99, 104 top binding with a cover 112 Tray Alignment option 84 trays, copier 83 trimming Saddle Stitch 101 Two-Way Communication 38, 48, 67 U USB device 73 automatic printing 73 printing files from 73 Use Master option 102 Use Maximum CMY density option 99 Use PDF XObject 103, 104 Use Windows Login 127 Use Windows Login option 81, 104 User Authentication 60, 127 for Mac OS 127 I’m a Guest 127 Password 127 Password option 81, 104 password option 32 Use Windows Login 127 Use Windows Login option 81, 104 User Name option 81 user name option 32 Username 127 Username option 104 User Software DVD installing printer driver files from 10, 11 Username option 81, 104 Users and Groups user authentication 127 V Variable Data Printing Define Record Length 103 Pages Per Record 103 Variable Data Printing (VDP) Create Master option 102 Preview Master option 102, 104 Use Master option 102 Use PDF XObjects 103, 104 virtual printers installing using Point and Print 47 setting up 47 W Watermarks option 103 First Page Only setting 103 WebTools Docs tab 27, 58 Downloads tab 12, 42 Windows IPP connection 55 LPR or Port 9100 connection 51 printer driver, installing from User Software DVD 44 TCP/IP connection Fiery® Print Server Variable Data Printing © 2009 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered under Legal Notices for this product. 45087237 1 September 2009 CONTENTS 3 CONTENTS INTRODUCTION 5 Terminology and conventions 5 About this document 6 OVERVIEW 7 Overview of variable data printing 7 Variable data job components 8 Print Server variable data printing 9 Compatible variable data printing languages 9 Print Server core features for variable data printing 10 PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS 12 Printing variable data documents using FreeForm 12 How FreeForm works 12 Creating the master document 13 Creating the variable document 14 Combining the FreeForm master with the variable document 15 Guidelines 16 Previewing master documents in the Windows printer driver 21 Printing variable data documents with FreeForm 2 21 Imposing variable data jobs 23 Imposing FreeForm jobs with Impose 23 Imposing FreeForm 2 jobs with Impose 24 Imposing other variable data jobs with Impose 24 INDEX 25 INTRODUCTION 5 INTRODUCTION This document provides information about variable data printing (VDP) and describes the variable data printing features that may be supported by the Print Server, including: • Compatible variable data printing languages such as FreeForm and FreeForm 2 • Imposing variable data jobs with Impose NOTE: For information about supported variable data languages and features, see Printing. Terminology and conventions This document uses the following terminology and conventions. Term or convention Refers to Copier The copier or printer Titles in italics Other documents in this set Topics for which additional information is available by starting Help in the software Tips and information Important information Important information about issues that can result in physical harm to you or others INTRODUCTION 6 About this document The document covers the following topics: • Basic concepts of variable data printing • Supported Print Server features and compatible variable data printing languages • Instructions for printing variable documents with FreeForm and FreeForm 2 • Instructions for printing and submitting other variable data job formats, such as PPML and Creo VPS. NOTE: For detailed information about printing variable data jobs using third-party variable data printing applications, see the documentation that accompanies the application. For example scenarios of popular variable data printing workflows, see Workflow Examples. OVERVIEW 7 OVERVIEW This chapter describes variable printing technology and discusses the components that may be supported with your Print Server that allow you to create variable data print jobs. NOTE: For information about supported variable data languages and features, see Printing. For specific variable data printing scenarios and workflows, see Workflow Examples. Overview of variable data printing Variable data printing is typically used for personalized mailings, such as direct-mail advertising. It involves combining a set of master elements that are common across copies of a document (reusable data) with a set of variable elements that change from copy to copy. When you use variable data printing, you create personalized communications with elements that have special appeal to your targeted audience. An example of variable data printing is a brochure that greets customers by name and may include other personal information about the customer obtained from a marketing database. Background elements, illustrations, and text blocks that do not change across copies of the brochure are master elements. The customer’s name and other customer-specific information are variable elements. In its simplest form, you can use variable data printing as a basic mail merge. However, you can also dynamically assemble images, charts, text, and other objects to create attractive, highly customized documents. Variable data printing uses digital printing technology that customizes communication by linking databases that contain the content for printed documents to a print device, such as the copier. The customized communication includes rules that specify the selection of content from the database and the placement of that content in the document. The following two variable data printing technologies describe how reusable data is specified within a variable data printing language. Page-based technology describes static, reusable data (the master element) in terms of entire pages. Each page element is called a master page. Page-based languages are more suitable for simple, predictable layouts. FreeForm is a page-based language. For more information about FreeForm, see “Printing variable data documents” on page 12. Element-based technology describes static, reusable data in terms of elements or objects. Element-based technology allows you to use many separate objects within a page as static elements or variable elements individually. OVERVIEW 8 Element-based variable data jobs use reusable objects for the variable elements in the job, such as images. Because these elements are frequently accessed, they are stored on the Print Server and cached as a group. Variable data job components A typical variable data print job includes the following major components: • Content Content includes the text, images, or photographs placed in different areas of your document. You can create static or variable content using a variety of applications, such as Adobe Photoshop or Microsoft Word. • Database A database is a table containing all the changeable or variable elements in a printed document, such as text, graphics, and photographs. You can use a database created in popular desktop programs, such as Microsoft Excel or FileMaker Pro. The data must be organized into records and fields (categories) for each record. For example, in a database about people, a person is a record and the information about that person, such as name, address, and phone number, is a field. • Business rules Business rules, created in a variable data printing application, specify what variable content to use and where to place it within your document. According to these predefined rules, which are described by “if ” and “then” statements, the variable data application uses particular elements from databases to create personalized pages and documents that contain different text and images for a specific audience. For example, you can set up a rule to print specific content for a specific age range. • Layout Layout encompasses the design or page layout of your document in any desktop publishing or word processing application. The layout must accommodate space for variable text and images. • Variable data print applications Variable data print applications combine master elements and variable information and prepare the document for printing. For FreeForm, you do not need a dedicated variable data print application. • Print device The print device is the output device that turns digital files into hardcopy documents. This can be any printer, copier, or digital press that supports variable data printing. OVERVIEW 9 The following diagram shows the variable data printing components. Print Server variable data printing The Print Server combines variable data printing languages, third-party variable data printing applications, and Print Server core features to integrate into many existing workflows. For more information about variable data printing workflows, see Workflow Examples. Compatible variable data printing languages The Print Server is compatible with the following variable data printing languages: • FreeForm and FreeForm 2 FreeForm and FreeForm 2 are used with variable data solutions. FreeForm technology reusable data is RIPped only once, enabling the copier to run faster. FreeForm supports the creation of master elements and variable data from any desktop application or computer platform. Within the application, the master page is assigned a number from 1 to 100. FreeForm options are found in the driver and job management tools. For more information about FreeForm, see “Printing variable data documents” on page 12. FreeForm 2 expands FreeForm technology by allowing you to determine page conditions and rules for printing a job containing multiple master pages. It also allows you to define the boundaries of each record in the data stream. This means defining a start and end for each record. Unlike FreeForm, FreeForm 2 requires a variable data printing application (for example, PrintShop Mail) that specifically supports FreeForm 2. For more information about FreeForm 2, see “Printing variable data documents” on page 12. 1 Layout 2 Database 3 Business rules 4 Content 5 Variable data application 6 Print device 1 2 3 4 5 6 OVERVIEW 10 • Personalized Print Markup Language (PPML) version 2.2 PPML, an XML- based language developed by PODi, is considered an industry standard. PPML allows the copier to store text elements and graphic elements and reuse them as needed, making variable data jobs print faster. The Print Server accepts zipped and non-zipped PPML jobs. To print documents in PPML format, use a third-party software application that is compatible with PPML format, such as Pageflex Persona. Send the PPML job to the Print Server or download the PPML file using Command WorkStation or Hot Folders. NOTE: PPML version 2.2 files were created using either the IMPOSITION or PRINT_LAYOUT commands specified from the PPML application are not supported on the Print Server. Instead, specify these options from Command WorkStationusing Impose. • Creo Variable Print Specification (VPS) Creo VPS is an extension of the PostScript language developed by Creo. A Creo VPS file consists of a Header section and a Booklet section. The Header section contains the global objects for the entire job. The Booklet section contains one copy of a personalized document. Page elements are reusable objects as defined in the Creo VPS format. All of the page elements must be packaged inside of the Creo VPS file. To print, you must have an application that emits the Creo VPS data stream, such as Atlas PrintShop Mail or Creo Darwin Desktop. You can download a Creo VPS file using Command WorkStation or Hot Folders. Print Server core features for variable data printing By integrating variable data support into the Print Server’s core features, such as Impose and Mixed Media, you can create custom layouts and apply different media and finishing options to your variable data jobs. You can also manage reusable objects for a variable data job using VDP Resources. Impose with variable data printing imposition The Print Server is compatible with variable data printing imposition with Impose for the following variable data printing languages: • FreeForm and FreeForm 2 variable data jobs • PPML • Creo VPS For information about imposing a variable data job, see “Imposing FreeForm jobs with Impose” on page 23. For more information about imposition layouts, see Command WorkStation Help. OVERVIEW 11 Hot Folders with variable data printing imposition You can impose a variable data job using Hot Folders when you submit it to the Print Server. You must set up a proper variable data printing imposition template for the specific Hot Folder in the Hot Folders application. For information about imposing a variable data job with Hot Folders, see Hot Folders Help. For information about variable data imposition options, see Command WorkStation Help. Mixed media with variable data printing You can apply Mixed Media settings to all variable data printing jobs, including imposed variable data jobs.When using Mixed Media settings, the Print Server recognizes each variable data record as a separate job. For a variable data job that is not imposed, the Mixed Media settings are applied to all records of the variable data job. For an imposed variable data job, the Mixed Media settings are applied to the output sets of the variable data job. For more information about setting Mixed Media for a job, see Utilities. VDP Resources Reusable objects are required images that you must download to the Print Server for variable data jobs that contain variable elements. These reusable objects are stored on the Print Server and cached as a group. The VDP Resources feature available from Command WorkStation allows you to manage disk space on the Print Server by viewing the list of the reusable objects and deleting them, or allowing them to reside for future variable data jobs. VDP Resources is compatible with the following variable data printing languages: • FreeForm • PPML • Creo VPS For more information about using VDP Resources, see Command WorkStation Help. PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS 12 PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS With FreeForm technology, you can use print options to define master documents and assign them to variable data jobs sent to the Print Server. This chapter explains how to do the following: • Print documents with FreeForm • Create a master and variable document • Print documents with FreeForm 2 using a third-party variable data application • Print other variable data formats • Impose a variable data job NOTE: For information about supported variable data languages and features, see Printing. Printing variable data documents using FreeForm You can use FreeForm to print variable data documents. This section provides an overview of FreeForm and describes how to create and combine master and variable elements. Guidelines and tips are discussed at the end of the section. How FreeForm works FreeForm variable data printing sends the master-element data for the job to the Print Server and rasterizes it separately from the variable-element data. The master-element data is stored on the Print Server in rasterized form as a FreeForm master, and can be used as often as required with multiple sets of variable-element data. Because the FreeForm master job is preRIPped and stored on the Print Server, the only RIP time required for variable data print jobs is the time necessary to RIP the variable-element data. You can use FreeForm masters for any fixed-element data you might combine with different data from day to day. For example, you can store a letterhead template as a FreeForm master and use it repeatedly as the background for different letter content (the variable-element data). FreeForm allows you to create the master and variable documents using any application. You can create the two documents using different applications or computer platforms. To create the master document, use a page layout or graphics application. To create the variable document, use a word processing application that has a mail merge feature, a page layout application that supports scripting, or a database application. PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS 13 You control FreeForm functions with the Create Master and Use Master print options. Set these options in the printer driver when you send a job, or instruct the operator to set them with job overrides from Command WorkStation. After the master document is RIPped, it appears in VDP Resources in the Device Center from Command WorkStation. You can also use Command WorkStation to monitor and manage all the FreeForm masters stored on the Print Server. For more information, see Command WorkStation Help. Creating the master document Before you can use FreeForm, you must create a master document and a variable document. This includes creating the layout for the combined document, as well as individual elements. In a page layout or graphics application, arrange the master elements (text and graphics that do not change) on one or more pages, leaving space for the variable elements. After you finalize the design of the master document, print it to the Print Server and specify that a FreeForm master be created from the job (see page 18). Master document 1 Space for variable elements 2 Unchanging master elements 1 2 PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS 14 Creating the variable document You can create the variable document with a word processing application that provides a mail merge function, a database application, or a page layout application that supports scripting. In all cases, information is taken from a list or database and merged into an existing document that is designed to accept the information. Each application has different controls for this function. For detailed instructions, see the documentation that accompanies the application. Before you add variable elements to the master document, format them to conform to the layout of the master document. To do this, create a document with the correct formatting, and then add the variable information in the appropriate places. NOTE: You must create a variable document with the same page count as the master page document. For example, if a master document has a record length of four pages, all the variable documents must have a record length of four pages. Add empty pages to the last record of the variable document, if necessary. After you create a variable document, print it to the Print Server and specify that it be combined with the corresponding FreeForm master (see page 18). Variable document 1 Variable element 1 1 1 1 PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS 15 Combining the FreeForm master with the variable document When you print a variable document to the Print Server, specify the FreeForm master created from your master document with the Use Master print option. The Print Server combines the raster data of the variable document with the previously RIPped FreeForm master, creating a new raster data file. A master document can include more than one page. When you print a variable document and specify a FreeForm master that contains multiple pages, the variable pages are combined with the master pages in a cyclical fashion. The following example illustrates how a variable document combines with a two-page master document. Combined document PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS 16 Pages 1 and 2 of the variable document are combined with Pages 1 and 2, respectively, of the master document. The cycle of master pages then starts over, and Pages 3 and 4 of the variable document are combined, respectively, with Pages 1 and 2, again, of the master document. This pattern continues for each subsequent set of pages in the variable document. Guidelines This section provides some suggestions to help you print variable data jobs correctly. • Ask your administrator or operator about how FreeForm master numbers are assigned at your site. • You cannot specify the Use Master option and Create Master option in the same job. • Single page FreeForm Masters are limited to single-sided output. You cannot duplex a singe page FreeForm Master. • Do not send your variable printing jobs to the Direct connection. If you send a variable data job to the Direct connection, the job does not process. • Use the Notes and Instructions fields to communicate instructions about your job to the operator. Combined document PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS 17 • Give your jobs unique and descriptive names. You and the operator must be able to easily identify your jobs if there are many jobs in the queues, the FreeForm master numbers are reassigned, or you must refer to another job in the Notes or Instructions fields. The Create Master and Use Master options do not allow the use of the following special characters when you specify a name: |, /, \, *,?, “, ', `,:, <, >, or special control characters FreeForm 2 master names cannot begin with “form” or “formU”. Character length for FreeForm 2 master names is limited to 64 characters. • Consider the restrictions on Print Options when using FreeForm. The master file and the variable file must use identical paper size and orientation settings. Each job is limited to a single paper size, even when mixed media is applied. Finishing options and paper tray selection, as specified in the variable data file take precedence over master job settings, if these settings are different. Only FreeForm supports the Create Master and Use Master settings in the Command WorkStation and printer driver Job Property window. For more information about these restrictions, see Printing. • You cannot designate an imposed job (.dbp) to be a Master for any type of FreeForm job. • Only the variable data file needs to be imposed for FreeForm and FreeForm 2. • FreeForm 2 jobs require record boundary settings, as produced by the application, for use with VDP imposition and record-based finishing. PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS 18 TO PRINT VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS USING FREEFORM 1 Create a master document. The following example illustrates one page of a master document for a tri-fold brochure created with a page layout application. 2 Print the master document to the Print Server with the Create Master print option set to one of the FreeForm Master numbers. You can also set the Create Master option to None and instruct the operator to use overrides from Command WorkStation to create a FreeForm master from this job. For more information, see Command WorkStation Help. To print your FreeForm master to ensure that it is correct before you merge it with variable data, enable the Print Master feature after the file is sent to the Print Server (see Printing). PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS 19 3 Create the variable document. You can create the variable document using a different file, a different application, or a different computer platform than you used to create the master document, but some print options must be the same (for details, see page 17). The following example illustrates one page of the variable document for the tri-fold brochure. The data in this document can be as simple as a name and address, or as complex as multiple, graphics and photographic elements. NOTE: To impose the job, see “Imposing FreeForm jobs with Impose” on page 23. PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS 20 4 Print the variable document to the Print Server with the Use Master print option set to the appropriate FreeForm master number. The FreeForm master number can be one you set when you send the master document or one assigned by the operator. To preview the master page, click Preview Master from the printer driver to generate a low-resolution image of the master page. FreeForm master numbers can be overridden from Command WorkStation. Consult the operator to make sure that the FreeForm master number you specify is the correct one for the FreeForm master you want to use. To check the job before it prints, instruct the operator to Process and Hold the job so that you can preview it from Command WorkStation. The following example illustrates the FreeForm master and variable document combined. The variable data is overlaid on the master document. PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS 21 Previewing master documents in the Windows printer driver After a master document is created, you can preview it from the Windows printer driver. This feature allows you to conveniently select your master document when you print using FreeForm. TO PREVIEW MASTER DOCUMENTS IN THE WINDOWS PRINTER DRIVER 1 Choose Print in your application. 2 Select the Print Server as your printer and click Properties. 3 Click the Fiery Printing tab. 4 Click the VDP icon. 5 Click Update to retrieve the list of FreeForm master names from the Print Server. The FreeForm master numbers and names appear in the Create Master and Use Master options. NOTE: You must enable Two-Way Communication to retrieve the list of FreeForm master names. To enable this feature, see the printer driver help. 6 Select the master document that you want to preview from the Use Master option and click Preview Master. The FreeForm Master Preview window appears. 7 Click Close. Printing variable data documents with FreeForm 2 FreeForm 2 extends the functionality of FreeForm. FreeForm 2 requires a third-party variable data printing application that supports FreeForm 2, such as PrintShop Mail. Using the thirdparty printing application and FreeForm, you can create multiple page masters, allowing more personalization and customization to your documents. You can still use another master created in any application, and then use a third-party application that supports FreeForm 2, such as PrintShop Mail, to combine the design and database information. FreeForm 2 and the third-party variable data printing application allow you to specify page conditions that determine rules for individual master pages. These rules, described by “if ” and “then” statements in each master page, allow you to skip or print pages within a master file. For more information about creating page conditions, see the documentation that accompanies your third-party variable data printing application. FreeForm 2 also provides the option to delete a specified FreeForm master from the Print Server hard disk after its corresponding variable data job has been successfully RIPped and printed. You can set this feature in a third-party application that supports the clearing of FreeForm masters. For more information about deleting FreeForm masters, see the documentation that accompanies the third-party printing application. PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS 22 TO PRINT A VARIABLE DATA JOB USING FREEFORM 2 1 Open the variable document in the third-party variable data printing application that supports FreeForm 2, such as PrintShop Mail. NOTE: To impose the job, see “Imposing FreeForm 2 jobs with Impose” on page 24. 2 Select FreeForm 2 when you send the variable document. For more information about creating a variable data job or printing variable data jobs, see the documentation that accompanies your third-party application. 3 Print the document. When you send a PPML or Creo VPS job to the Print Server and you must reference external resources, the Print Server automatically searches for the global images using File Search Paths created in Setup. For more information, see Configuration and Setup. If you know the path location, you can also search for external resources on a job by job basis. Before you print the job, indicate the File Search Path. TO SEARCH FOR EXTERNAL RESOURCES FOR CREO VPS OR PPML JOBS USING THE FILE SEARCH PATH 1 Download the Creo VPS or PPML job to the Print Server using a third -party variable data application that supports the variable data printing language. 2 In Command WorkStation, select the Creo VPS or PPML job and right-click to choose Job Properties. 3 Click the VDP icon and enter the File Search Path location. NOTE: The File Search Path server must be set up by the administrator. For more information, see Configuration and Setup. 4 Process the Creo VPS or PPML job. NOTE: If the Print Server cannot find the reusable objects for the job, the job does not process. Make sure that you enter the correct File Search Path location. PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS 23 Imposing variable data jobs If variable data Imposition is enabled on the Print Server, you can impose FreeForm and FreeForm 2 jobs, as well as jobs using other supported variable data languages. You can impose a variable data job using Hot Folders. For more information, see Hot Folders Help. When you submit a variable data job to Command Workstation, open Impose to impose the job. The printed job merges and imposes the variable and master file. When you impose a variable data job, you can choose a single record imposition scheme or a multiple records imposition scheme. For more information, see Command WorkStation Help. Imposing FreeForm jobs with Impose You can select Imposition settings for a FreeForm variable data job. Imposition must be enabled on the Print Server. TO IMPOSE A FREEFORM JOB 1 Download any PS or PDF file as a master job to the Print Server. 2 Open Command WorkStation, select the master job, and then click Properties. 3 Select the Create Master print option, and assign the master job a number. 4 Send the master job to Print or to Process and Hold. 5 Download the variable data file to the Print Server. 6 In Command WorkStation, select the variable data file, and then click Properties. 7 Select the Use Master print option and select the master job number. 8 Select the variable data file and click Impose. Select Imposition settings for the variable data job. For more information about Imposition settings, see Command WorkStation Help. 9 Process the variable job. PRINTING VARIABLE DATA DOCUMENTS 24 Imposing FreeForm 2 jobs with Impose You can select Imposition settings for a FreeForm 2 variable data job. Imposition must be enabled on the Print Server. TO IMPOSE A FREEFORM 2 JOB 1 Download the master job using a third-party variable data application that supports FreeForm 2. 2 Open Command WorkStation and process the master job. 3 Download the variable job to the Hold queue using a third-party variable data application that supports FreeForm 2. 4 Select the variable job and choose Impose. Select Imposition settings for the variable data job. For more information about Imposition settings, see Command WorkStation Help. 5 Process the variable job. Imposing other variable data jobs with Impose You can select Imposition settings for other variable data jobs. Imposition must be enabled on the Print Server. TO IMPOSE OTHER VARIABLE DATA PRINTING JOBS 1 Download the Creo VPS or PPML job to the Print Server using a third-party variable data application that supports the variable data printing language. 2 Select the job and click Impose. Select Imposition settings for the variable data job. For more information about Imposition settings, see the Command WorkStation Help. 3 Process the variable data printing job. INDEX 25 B business rules component 8, 9 C content component 8, 9 Create Master option 13 Creo Variable Print Specification (VPS) compatibility with Impose 10 described 10 jobs, imposing 24 searching for external resources with File Search Path 22 D database component 8, 9 E element-based technology 7 F File Search Path 22 FreeForm creating a master document 13 creating a variable document 14 described 9, 12 jobs, imposing with Impose 23 master document combining with variable document 14 previewing from the printer driver 21 printing guidelines 16 variable data documents 12 FreeForm 2 creating multiple page masters with 21 described 9 jobs, imposing with Impose 24 printing using third party printing application 22 variable data documents 21 FreeForm2 described 21 H Hot Folders 11 described 11 imposing variable data jobs with 11 I Impose feature 10 imposing Creo VPS jobs 24 FreeForm 2 jobs 5, 24 FreeForm jobs 23 PPML jobs 24 J job management tools 9 defined 10 L layout component 8, 9 M master documents adding variable elements to 19 creating 18 master elements 7 Mixed Media settings, applying 11 P page-based technology 7 PPML (Personalized Print Markup Language) compatibility with Impose 10 described 10 searching for external resources with File Search Path 22 printing FreeForm 2 jobs 21 FreeForm jobs 12 R reusable data 7 reusable objects 8 INDEX INDEX 26 T terminology 5 U Use Master option 13 V variable data jobs element-based 8 imposing 23 FreeForm 23 FreeForm 2 24 major components 8 printing FreeForm 18 FreeForm 2 21 variable data printing languages Creo VPS 10 FreeForm and FreeForm 2 9 Print Server Setup Roadmap [Title] User Documentation PDF User Documentation disc Print Server User Software disc(s) Welcome Welcome Configuration and Setup Configuration and Setup Welcome Utilities Printing Printing See the Configuration page for the server name or IP address. Part Number: 45082475 ©2009 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. All rights reserved. LEGEND Minimum (printer driver only): Set up a TCP/IP port (Windows user computers). Install the printer driver from the User Software disc(s). Update the printer driver to include Print Server options. Full (printer driver and utilities): Install user software from the User Software disc(s) on user computers. User software can also be downloaded from the Downloads WebTool. Install user software on user computers (choose Minimum or Full user software installation). Print a sample document from a user computer. Install user documentation on user computers. Print a Configuration page. 4 1 2 3 5 Effectuez la configuration du serveur d’impression. Dans la plupart des cas, la configuration par défaut suffit. Il peut être nécessaire de configurer le périphérique d’impression; voir Configuration et installation. Remarque : Si vous modifiez la configuration par défaut du serveur d’impression, imprimez une autre page de configuration. [Titre] ©2009 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. Tous droits réservés. LÉGENDE Minimale (pilote d’imprimante uniquement) : Configurez un port TCP/IP (ordinateurs Windows). Installez le pilote d’imprimante à partir du ou des disques des Logiciels utilisateur. Mettez le pilote d’imprimante à jour pour qu’il comprenne les options du serveur d’impression. Complète (pilote d’imprimante et utilitaires) : Installez les logiciels utilisateur à partir du ou des disques des Logiciels utilisateur sur les différents ordinateurs. Les logiciels utilisateur peuvent également être téléchargés à partir du WebTool Téléchargements. Imprimez une page de configuration à partir du serveur d’impression. Utilisez ce résumé de configuration si : • votre serveur d’impression a été déballé puis branché par un technicien de maintenance et se trouve sous tension. • votre serveur d’impression a été intégré à un réseau TCP/IP qui comprend des postes utilisateur fonctionnant sous Windows®. Résumé de configuration du serveur d’impression Disque(s) Logiciels Disque de la documentation utilisateur utilisateur PDF de la documentation utilisateur Serveur d’impression Installez la documentation utilisateur sur les différents ordinateurs. Installez les logiciels utilisateur sur les différents ordinateurs (choisissez l’installation minimale ou complète). Bienvenue Configuration et installation Bienvenue Configuration et installation Impression Imprimez un document test à partir d’un poste utilisateur. Voir la page de configuration pour connaître le nom du serveur ou l’adresse IP. Bienvenue Impression Utilitaires 4 1 2 3 5 Führen Sie die unten skizzierten Schritte aus, wenn… • Ihr Druckserver aufgestellt und von einem Servicetechniker eingerichtet wurde und eingeschaltet ist. • Ihr Druckserver einem TCP/IP-Netzwerk mit Anwendercomputern unter Windows® hinzugefügt wurde. Konfigurieren Sie den Druckserver (Setup). In vielen Fällen ist die Standardkonfiguration ausreichend. Eventuell muss auch das Ausgabegerät konfiguriert werden (siehe Konfiguration und Setup). Hinweis: Drucken Sie nach einer Änderung an der Standardkonfiguration des Druckservers eine neue Konfigurationsseite. Druckserver - Setup-Übersicht ©2009 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Installieren Sie die Anwenderdokumentation auf den Client- Computern. Drucken Sie die Konfigurationsseite des Druckservers. Installieren Sie die Anwendersoftware auf den Client- Computern (Installationstyp Minimal oder Vollständig). Minimal (nur Druckertreiber): Richten Sie (auf dem Windows Computer) einen TCP/IP-Port ein. Installieren Sie den Druckertreiber von der CD-ROM bzw. DVD. Aktualisieren Sie im Druckertreiber die installierbaren Optionen. Vollständig (Druckertreiber und Dienstprogramme): Installieren Sie die Anwendersoftware von der CD-ROM bzw. DVD. Die Anwendersoftware steht auch als Download bereit (über Komponente Downloads der WebTools). Senden Sie vom Client-Computer ein Testdokument an den Druckserver. Einführung und erste Schritte Dienstprogramme Drucken Einführung und erste Schritte Konfiguration und Setup Konfiguration und Setup Servername und IP-Adresse sind auf der Konfigurationsseite vermerkt. PDF-Datei der Anwenderdokumentation Datenträger mit Anwendersoftware Druckserver Datenträger mit Anwenderdokumentation Drucken [Titel] Einführung und erste Schritte LEGENDE 4 1 2 3 5 Eseguire la configurazione del server di stampa. Nella maggior parte dei casi, le impostazioni predefinite di configurazione sono sufficienti. Potrebbe essere necessario configurare l’unità di stampa; vedere Configurazione e impostazione. Nota: Se si cambia la configurazione predefinita del server di stampa, stampare un’altra pagina di configurazione. ©2009 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. Tutti i diritti riservati. [Titolo] Guida alla configurazione del server di stampa Disco della documentazione per l’utente PDF della documentazione per l’utente Disco del software utente Server di stampa Usare questo roadmap se… • il server di stampa è stato disimballato e collegato da un tecnico dell’assistenza ed è acceso. • il server di stampa è stato aggiunto a una rete TCP/IP che include computer Windows®. Installare la documentazione per l’utente sui computer. Stampare la pagina di configurazione dal server di stampa. Installare il software utente sui computer (selezionare l’installazione Minima o Completa del software utente). Minima (solo driver di stampa): Configurare una porta TCP/IP (computer Windows). Installare il driver di stampa dal disco (o dai dischi) del software utente. Aggiornare il driver di stampa in modo da includere le opzioni del server di stampa. Completa (driver di stampa e programmi di utilità): Installare il software utente dal disco (o dai dischi) del software utente. È possibile scaricare il software utente anche mediante Scaricamenti di WebTools. Il nome del server o l’indirizzo IP sono riportati sulla pagina di configurazione. Stampare un documento campione da un computer. Guida introduttiva Stampa Programmi di utilità Stampa Guida introduttiva Configurazione e impostazione Configurazione e impostazione Guida introduttiva LEGENDA 4 1 2 3 5 Realice la Configuración del servidor de impresión. En la mayoría de los casos, la configuración por omisión es suficiente. Es posible que sea necesaria la configuración del dispositivo de impresión; consulte Instalación y configuración. Nota: Si cambia la configuración del servidor de impresión por omisión, imprima otra página Configuración. ©2009 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. Reservados todos los derechos. [Título] Instrucciones de configuración del servidor de impresión LEYENDA Disco de documentación del usuario PDF de documentación del usuario Disco(s) de software del usuario Servidor de impresión Utilice estas Instrucciones si... • su servidor de impresión ha sido desembalado y conectado por un técnico de servicio y está encendido. • su servidor de impresión ha sido agregado a una red TCP/IP que incluye computadoras de usuario Windows®. Instale la documentación del usuario en las computadoras de usuario. Imprima una página Configuración desde el servidor de impresión. Instale el software de usuario en las computadoras de usuario (seleccione la instalación de software del usuario Mínima o Completa). Mínima (sólo controlador de impresora): Configure un puerto TCP/IP (computadoras de usuario Windows). Instale el controlador de impresora desde los discos de software del usuario. Actualice el controlador de impresora para inclir las opciones del servidor de impresión. Completa (controlador de impresora y utilidades): Instale el software del usuario desde los discos de software del usuario. El software del usuario también puede descargarse desde Descargas de WebTools. Bienvenida Utilidades Impresión Consulte la página Configuración para ver el nombre del servidor o la dirección IP. Imprima un documento de ejemplo desde una computadora de usuario. Impresión Instalación Bienvenida y configuración Instalación y configuración Bienvenida 4 1 2 3 5 Bem-vindo Utilitários Impressão Impressão ©2009 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. Todos os direitos são reservados. LEGENDA [Título] Guia de configuração do Servidor de impressão Formato PDF da documentação do usuário Disco(s) do software do usuário Servidor de impressão Utilize este Guia se... • o servidor de impressão foi desembalado e conectado por um técnico de manutenção e está ligado. • o servidor de impressão foi adicionado a uma rede TCP/IP que inclui computadores de usuários de Windows®. Instale a documentação do usuário nos computadores deles. Imprima uma Página de configuração no servidor de impressão. Execute uma Configuração para o servidor de impressão. Na maioria dos casos, a Configuração padrão é suficiente. Pode ser necessário configurar o dispositivo de impressão; consulte Configuração e instalação. Se você alterar a definição padrão de Configuração do servidor de impressão, imprima outra Página de configuração. Instale o software do usuário nos computadores deles (selecione a instalação do software do usuário Minima ou Completa). Minima (somente o driver da impressora): Configure a porta TCP/IP (computadores de usuários do Windows). Instale o driver da impressora a partir do(s) disco(s) do software do usuário. Atualize o driver da impressora para incluir as opções do servidor de impressão. Completa (driver da impressora e utilitários): Instale o software do usuário a partir do(s) disco(s) do software do usuário nos computadores deles. Também é possível fazer o download do software do usuário com o WebTool Download. Consulte a Página de configuração para obter o nome do servidor ou endereço IP. Imprima um documento de amostra a partir do computador do usuário. Configuração Bem-vindo e instalação Configuração e instalação Bem-vindo Disco de documentação do usuário 4 1 2 3 5 Gebruik deze roadmap als... • uw afdrukserver door een servicemonteur uitgepakt en aangesloten is en ingeschakeld is. • uw afdrukserver toegevoegd is aan een TCP/IP-netwerk met Windows®- gebruikerscomputers. Voer de setup van de afdrukserver uit. In de meeste gevallen volstaat de standaard setupconfiguratie. Mogelijk zijn instellingen voor het afdrukapparaat nodig. Raadpleeg Configuratie en instellingen. Opmerking: Als u de standaardconfiguratie met instellingen voor de afdrukserver wijzigt, moet u een nieuwe configuratiepagina afdrukken. ©2009 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. Alle rechten voorbehouden. [Titel] Setupgids voor de afdrukserver Druk vanaf een gebruikerscomputer een voorbeelddocument af. Minimaal (alleen printerstuurprogramma): Stel een TCP/IP-poort in (Windowsgebruikerscomputers). Installeer het printerstuurprogramma vanaf de schijven met gebruikerssoftware. Update het printerstuurprogramma met de opties voor de afdrukserver. Volledige (printerstuurprogramma’s en hulpprogramma’s): Installeer de gebruikerssoftware vanaf de schijven met gebruikerssoftware op de gebruikerscomputers. U kunt de gebruikerssoftware ook downloaden met de WebTool Downloads. Raadpleeg de configuratiepagina voor de servernaam of het IP-adres. Installeer de gebruikersdocumentatie op de gebruikerscomputers. Druk de configuratiepagina van de afdrukserver af. Schijf met gebruikersdocumentatie PDF met gebruikersdocumentatie Schijf of schijven met gebruikerssoftware Afdrukserver Welkom Welkom Configuratie en instellingen Configuratie en instellingen Welkom Hulpprogramma’s Afdrukken Installeer de gebruikerssoftware op de gebruikerscomputers (kies een Minimale of Volledige installatie van de gebruikerssoftware). Afdrukken LEGENDE 4 1 2 3 5 Ställ in skrivarservern. I de flesta fall räcker det med standardinställningskonfigurationen. Utskriftsenheten kanske behöver ställas in, se Konfiguration och inställning. Obs! Om du ändrar utskriftsserverns standardkonfiguration bör du skriva ut en ny konfigurationssida. ©2009 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. Med ensamrätt. TECKENFÖRKLARING Skriv ut ett provdokument från någon användares dator. Minimal (endast skrivardrivrutin): Ställ in en TCP/IP-port (användare med Windows-datorer). Installera skrivardrivrutinen från skivan/skivorna med användarprogram. Uppdatera skrivardrivrutinen så att den innehåller skrivarserveralternativ. Fullständig (skrivardrivrutin och hjälpprogram): Installera användarprogrammet från skivan/skivorna med användarprogram på användarnas datorer. Det går även att hämta användarprogrammet från WebTool Downloads. Fiery® PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery® PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server Utilities © 2010 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered under Legal Notices for this product. 45093745 29 July 2010 CONTENTS 3 CONTENTS INTRODUCTION 7 Terminology and conventions 8 About this document 9 About Help 9 INSTALLING USER SOFTWARE 10 Preparing for installation on Windows computers 10 Installing user software on a Windows computer 11 Installing user software on a Mac OS computer 13 Uninstalling user software on a Mac OS computer 14 Uninstalling user software on a Windows computer 14 COMMAND WORKSTATION 15 Command WorkStation utilities 16 Installing Command WorkStation 17 Configuring the connection to the Fiery PRO80 17 Using Command WorkStation 19 About Help 19 Additional features 20 Mixed Media 20 Insert Tabs 25 Soft Proofing 28 ImageViewer 28 Troubleshooting 29 Command WorkStation cannot connect to the Fiery PRO80 29 Command WorkStation does not respond 29 CONTENTS 4 FIERY SEEQUENCE SUITE 30 About SeeQuence Suite Kits 30 Installing and enabling Fiery SeeQuence Suite 31 Installing SeeQuence software 31 Enabling SeeQuence software 31 About Help 33 PAPER CATALOG 34 Installing Paper Catalog 34 Tray Association and Paper Catalog 34 Specifying Paper Catalog media for jobs 35 Changing or deleting a Paper Catalog entry 37 REMOTE SCAN 38 Installing and configuring Remote Scan 38 Installing Remote Scan 38 Configuring Remote Scan 39 Using Remote Scan 40 Initiating a scan 40 Specifying scan settings 40 Retrieving scans using Docs 40 Scanning to Mailboxes 41 FIERY BRIDGE 42 Installing Fiery Bridge 42 Using Fiery Bridge 42 HOT FOLDERS 43 Installing Hot Folders 43 Upgrading from a previous version of Hot Folders 43 Using Hot Folders 44 CONTENTS 5 WEBTOOLS 45 Setting up WebTools 45 Accessing the WebTools home page 46 Using WebTools 47 Home 47 Downloads 47 Docs 47 Configure 47 INDEX 49 INTRODUCTION 7 INTRODUCTION The Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server media pack includes a set of software utilities that allow you to manage the Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server, as well as the print workflow and content of jobs on the Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server. This document provides an overview of how to install, configure, and use the following Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server utilities: • Command WorkStation • Fiery SeeQuence Suite – Fiery SeeQuence Preview – Fiery SeeQuence Impose – Fiery SeeQuence Compose • Paper Catalog • Remote Scan • Fiery Bridge • Hot Folders • WebTools INTRODUCTION 8 Terminology and conventions This document uses the following terminology and conventions. Term or convention Refers to Aero Fiery PRO80 (in illustrations and examples) Fiery PRO80 Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server Mac OS Apple Mac OS X Printer 80C-KM printer and 70-60C-KM printer Titles in italics Other documents in this set Windows Microsoft Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2003/2008/2008 R2 Topics for which additional information is available by starting Help in the software Tips and information A warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the equipment safely, always pay attention to these warnings. A caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the equipment safely, always pay attention to these cautions. Operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the equipment correctly, and avoid damage to the equipment or property. INTRODUCTION 9 About this document This document covers the following topics: • Command WorkStation monitors and manages the print workflow of jobs on the Fiery PRO80. • Fiery SeeQuence Suite integrates document preparation activities at both the sheet level and page level in one visual interface. – Fiery SeeQuence Preview provides a pre-RIP soft proof of each sheet surface of a job. Changes dynamically to display any changes made in preparing documents for printing. – Fiery SeeQuence Impose applies imposition layouts to jobs for custom printing, binding, and cutting purposes. – Fiery SeeQuence Compose defines the chapter divisions of a job, printing ranges of pages on varying types of media, inserting blank media between pages, and tab media containing text labels. • Paper Catalog defines and stores the attributes of printing media in a system-based paper warehouse database. • Remote Scan initiates and retrieves a scan on the printer from a remote computer on the network. Includes the Scan TWAIN plug-in module. • Fiery Bridge accesses scanned documents in your Fiery PRO80 mailbox directly from a client Windows computer. • Hot Folders stores frequently used print options when printing PostScript and PDF files on the Fiery PRO80. • WebTools manages your Fiery PRO80 remotely from the Internet or your company’s intranet. For information about using color management, see Color Printing. About Help Detailed instructions on using most Fiery PRO80 utilities are provided in the online Help. Wherever appropriate, this document refers you to Help for additional information and explains how to access Help for each utility. INSTALLING USER SOFTWARE 10 INSTALLING USER SOFTWARE This chapter describes the installation of Fiery PRO80 user software on Windows and Mac OS computers. You can install Fiery PRO80 user software in the following ways: • From the User Software DVD • From the Fiery PRO80, using the Internet or intranet • From the Fiery PRO80 directly, over the network If you have previously installed any Fiery PRO80 user software on your computer, the Installer allows you to uninstall those applications during the process. Preparing for installation on Windows computers Before installing Fiery PRO80 software on a Windows computer, be sure to complete the following: • To use Fiery PRO80 user software on a Windows computer, you must install the Sun Java file, Java Runtime Environment (JRE), provided in the Common Utilities folder on the User Software DVD. If the correct Sun Java file is not installed, the Fiery User Software Installer installs it automatically before installing the Fiery PRO80 software. NOTE: The recommended version of Sun Java JRE is provided on the User Software DVD. • To install the Fiery PRO80 software, you must install Service Pack 2 on a Windows XP computer. If not, a warning message alerts you to install the Service Pack. After you install Sun Java JRE, a Java Web Start shortcut is created on your computer desktop. The shortcut is not intended for use with Fiery PRO80 software and can be deleted. Different versions of Sun Java JRE can be installed on your computer. The Fiery PRO80 software automatically finds the correct version, so you do not need to uninstall other versions of Sun Java JRE required for third-party applications. INSTALLING USER SOFTWARE 11 Installing user software on a Windows computer All installation of user software on a Windows computer is done through the Fiery User Software Installer. The following procedures describe installing from the User Software DVD, over the network, or over the Internet, and modifying the user software. The only applications that are not installed by the Fiery User Software Installer are Adobe Acrobat and Enfocus PitStop, for use with Fiery SeeQuence Suite. For more information, see “Installing and enabling Fiery SeeQuence Suite” on page 31. TO INSTALL USER SOFTWARE ON A WINDOWS COMPUTER FROM THE USER SOFTWARE DVD 1 Insert the User Software DVD into the DVD drive of the computer. The Installer Welcome screen appears. 2 Follow the on-screen instructions. Do not attempt to install user software by opening the individual folders for the applications. To modify or remove user software after you have installed it on your computer, use the User Software DVD and the following procedure. INSTALLING USER SOFTWARE 12 TO MODIFY USER SOFTWARE USING THE USER SOFTWARE DVD INSTALLER 1 Insert the User Software DVD into the DVD drive of your computer. 2 On the window that appears, select Add/Remove, Repair, or Remove. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions. If your computer does not have a DVD drive, you can install the user software from the Fiery PRO80 over the network. Ask your network administrator for the IP address or the DNS server name of the Fiery PRO80. You can also install the user software from the Fiery PRO80 over the Internet. Ask your network administrator for the IP address. Use your Internet browser to access WebTools. For complete information about browser and system requirements, see Welcome. TO INSTALL USER SOFTWARE ON A WINDOWS COMPUTER OVER THE NETWORK 1 Click Start, choose Run, and then type the IP address or DNS server name of the Fiery PRO80. 2 Type the user name and password, if required. Ask your network administrator if a password is required. 3 Double-click the PC_User_SW directory. 4 Double-click the Master Installer icon. 5 Follow the on-screen instructions. TO INSTALL USER SOFTWARE ON A WINDOWS COMPUTER USING WEBTOOLS 1 Start your Internet browser. 2 Type the IP address or DNS name of the Fiery PRO80. The Fiery PRO80 home page appears. If the home page for the printer appears instead of the WebTools page, click the WebTools link. 3 Click the Downloads tab. 4 Click the link for the software that you want to install. 5 Choose Run to open the file or Save to save it to your computer. If you choose Run, proceed to step 8. If you choose Save, proceed to step 6. 6 Browse to the location where you want to save the USERSWMI.exe file and click Save. The file is downloaded from the Fiery PRO80. 7 Double-click the USERSWMI.exe file. INSTALLING USER SOFTWARE 13 8 Type the Fiery PRO80 URL, http://, when prompted. 9 Follow the on-screen instructions. For complete instructions on how to use Downloads, see WebTools Downloads Help. For more information about WebTools and Downloads, see page 45. Do not attempt to install user software by opening the individual folders for the applications. Always use the Fiery User Software Installer. Installing user software on a Mac OS computer Installation of user software on a Mac OS computer is done separately for each application. If necessary, you can uninstall the user software using the Fiery Software Uninstaller. The following procedures describe installing and uninstalling user software. For information about installing printer drivers, see Printing. TO INSTALL USER SOFTWARE ON A MAC OS COMPUTER FROM THE USER SOFTWARE DVD 1 Insert the User Software DVD into the DVD drive of your computer. 2 Browse to the OSX folder. 3 Double-click the Installer icon for the application that you want to install. 4 Follow the on-screen instructions. You can also install the user software from the Fiery PRO80 over the Internet. Ask your network administrator for the IP address. Use your Internet browser to access WebTools. For complete information about browser and system requirements, see Welcome. TO INSTALL USER SOFTWARE ON A MAC OS COMPUTER OVER THE NETWORK 1 Choose Connect to Server from the Go menu. 2 Type smb:// followed by the IP address of the Fiery PRO80 and click Connect. If you cannot locate the Fiery PRO80, contact your network administrator. 3 Type the user name and password, if required. Ask your network administrator if a password is required. 4 Select the smb shared volume that you want to connect to. 5 Select Mac_User_SW and click OK. 6 Open the OSX folder. 7 Double-click the Installer icon for the application that you want to install. 8 Follow the on-screen instructions. INSTALLING USER SOFTWARE 14 TO INSTALL USER SOFTWARE ON A MAC OS COMPUTER OVER THE INTERNET 1 Start your Internet browser. 2 Type the IP address or DNS name of the Fiery PRO80. The Fiery PRO80 home page appears. 3 Click the Downloads tab. 4 Click the link for the software that you want to install. The osxutils.dmg file is downloaded to your computer. and a virtual disk appears on your desktop. 5 Follow the on-screen instructions. For complete instructions on how to use Downloads, see WebTools Downloads Help. For more information about WebTools and Downloads, see page 45. Uninstalling user software on a Mac OS computer To remove user software after you have installed it on your Mac OS computer, use the Fiery Software Uninstaller utility and the following procedure. TO UNINSTALL USER SOFTWARE ON A MAC OS COMPUTER 1 Insert the User Software DVD into the DVD drive of your computer. 2 Browse to the OSX folder. 3 Click the icon for the Fiery Software Uninstaller. 4 Select the software that you want to uninstall and follow the on-screen instructions. Uninstalling user software on a Windows computer To remove user software after you install it on your Windows computer, use the Fiery User Software Installer. See “To modify user software using the User Software DVD Installer” on page 12. COMMAND WORKSTATION 15 COMMAND WORKSTATION Command WorkStation enhances the user experience and improves productivity. The crossplatform application allows operators to manage jobs on the Fiery PRO80 and administrators to configure the Fiery PRO80 for printing. Command WorkStation includes the Job Center for job management, Device Center for server management, and Fiery SeeQuence Suite for preparing jobs for printing. In the Job Center and Device Center views, the Server List shows all of the Fiery PRO80 servers that you are connected to. You can switch between servers, and add or remove them from the list. Information about consumables on the printer, tray association status, and errors and alerts is available. • Job Center displays the tools for managing jobs in the print queues and previewing processed jobs. The status of jobs is shown. You can search for jobs and access features from the customizable toolbar. • Device Center gives you access to all the resources of the Fiery PRO80. From the Device Center, you can access Setup and tools such as Calibrator and Backup and Restore. You can perform Color Setup, configure virtual printers, and create Paper Catalog entries. Command WorkStation allows you to perform the following tasks: • View the print status of jobs on the Fiery PRO80 • Hold, process, and print jobs • Override user-assigned print option settings • Preview the page content of a job • Reorder pages in a job and combine pages from different jobs • Create and use FreeForm master files for variable data printing • Archive job files • View job logs of recent print activity • Define virtual printers • Manage fonts • Access Fiery SeeQuence Suite • Merge jobs • Access color management settings COMMAND WORKSTATION 16 Command WorkStation utilities Command WorkStation provides access to the following utilities: • Backup and Restore • Booklet Maker • Calibrator • Color Management • Configure • Fiery JDF • Job Properties • Paper Catalog • Quick Doc Merge • Tray Alignment • Tray Association • Fiery SeeQuence Suite (option) • Fiery SeeQuence Impose (option) • Fiery SeeQuence Compose (option) COMMAND WORKSTATION 17 Installing Command WorkStation Install Command WorkStation on a Windows or Mac OS computer with a network connection to the Fiery PRO80. For a complete list of system requirements, see Welcome. The installer for Command WorkStation is provided on the User Software DVD as part of the Fiery User Software Installer (Windows) or as a separate application (Mac OS X). To install Command WorkStation, see “Installing user software” on page 10. Configuring the connection to the Fiery PRO80 The first time you start Command WorkStation, you are prompted to configure the connection to the Fiery PRO80. You can also edit the configuration whenever there is any change to your Fiery PRO80 or network, such as a changed server name or IP address. If you change Fiery PRO80 Setup information, do so before you reconfigure the connection. BEFORE YOU BEGIN • Print the FieryPRO80 Configuration page. For instructions on printing the Configuration page, see Configuration and Setup on the User Documentation CD. The Fiery PRO80 Configuration page contains information you need when configuring the connection, such as the IP address of the Fiery PRO80. For TCP/IP installations, you can use the DNS name instead of the IP address. Make sure that the Fiery PRO80 is registered in a Domain Name Server (DNS) on your network. For more information, contact your network administrator. TO CONFIGURE THE CONNECTION FOR COMMAND WORKSTATION 1 Start Command WorkStation: Windows: Programs > Fiery > Fiery Command WorkStation 5 Mac OS: Applications: Fiery: Command WorkStation 5: Command WorkStation 2 Type the DNS name or IP address and click Add to add the server to the Disconnected Servers list. If no Fiery PRO80 is found, click the icon, search by a range of IP addresses or by the IP address and subnet mask, and then click Go. Or, select Auto Search. COMMAND WORKSTATION 18 All available servers appear in the Available Servers list. To search for a particular server in the Available Servers list, type the server name in the Filter by keyword field. Select the Fiery PRO80 that you want to use, click Add, and then click Connect. The Login dialog box appears. 3 Select Administrator, Operator, or Guest and type the appropriate password, if required. Ask your administrator for passwords for the Fiery PRO80 that you want to connect to. For information about setting passwords and the default Administrator password for the Fiery PRO80, see Configuration and Setup. 4 Click Log In. Command WorkStation is now connected to the Fiery PRO80. For information about managing and connecting additional Fiery PRO80 servers, see Command WorkStation Help. COMMAND WORKSTATION 19 Using Command WorkStation After you install and configure Command WorkStation, you can begin using it to monitor and manage jobs on the Fiery PRO80. About Help For instructions on using Command WorkStation features, see Command WorkStation Help. The Help menu offers access to the following kinds of Help: • Online Help provides procedural information. • How To accesses the EFI web page, which provides demo scripts and sample files. • What’s New describes the new features of Command WorkStation. TO ACCESS COMMAND WORKSTATION HELP 1 Start Command WorkStation. Select the Fiery PRO80 from the Server List dialog box and log on to the server. For information about setting passwords and the default Administrator password for the Fiery PRO80, see Configuration and Setup. 2 Choose Help, How To, or What’s New from the Help menu. COMMAND WORKSTATION 20 Additional features The following sections describe how to use additional features of Command WorkStation that are not discussed in Command WorkStation Help. Mixed Media The Mixed Media feature allows you to define the chapter divisions of a job, print ranges of pages on varying types of media, insert blank media between pages, and insert tab media containing text labels (if the printer supports tab printing). The following guidelines and restrictions apply to Mixed Media settings: • The Mixed Media window restricts you from specifying settings that conflict with any media, page size, or finishing settings that have been specified for the job in the Job Properties dialog box or printer driver. • When two or more Mixed Media settings are in conflict with each other, the Mixed Media window highlights the setting names in red, signaling you to resolve the conflict. • When you specify print options (in the Job Properties dialog box or printer driver) after specifying Mixed Media settings, certain print options may conflict with the page-specific Mixed Media settings. You must resolve the conflict by choosing different print options or removing certain Mixed Media specifications. • Mixed Media settings affect the use of output color profiles when the “Use media defined profile” option is selected in Color Setup. For more information, see Color Printing. • If counters are configured for the printer, blank media inserted between pages count as printed pages. Basic instructions for accessing and using Mixed Media are provided in Command WorkStation Help. Features specific to the Fiery PRO80 are described in the following procedures. COMMAND WORKSTATION 21 TO DEFINE MIXED MEDIA SPECIFICATIONS 1 Select or right-click a spooled/held job in the Job Center view and choose Properties from the Actions menu, or double-click a job. 2 Click the Media icon and scroll down to Mixed Media. The Mixed Media window lists any previously defined media settings and includes buttons for defining, modifying, and removing settings. 3 For Chapter Start Page(s), type the page numbers on which you want to start new chapter sections. Type page numbers as comma-separated values (for example: 4,9,17) to designate the start of each new chapter. This feature forces each starting page to use a right-side page, adding a preceding left-sided blank, if required. NOTE: It is not necessary to type the first page, and page numbers refer to the numbering of the original document. If you use the Chapter Start Page(s) feature, all media specified in the Paper menu per chapter must share the same dimensions (for example, all Letter, all Tabloid, or all A4). COMMAND WORKSTATION 22 4 To apply finishing options (for example, stapling or sorting) to each chapter created using the Chapter Start feature, select the “Define Each Chapter As A Separate Finishing Set” option. NOTE: Not all finishing options can be applied to chapters that contain mixed sizes of media (for example, Letter and A4). 5 To define properties for front and back covers, click Define Cover. For more information, see “To define cover media settings” on page 23. 6 To define properties for individual pages or page ranges, click New Page Range. For more information, see “To define media for specific pages” on page 24. 7 To insert tab media, click New Tab. The Insert Tab dialog box appears. For information about defining tab settings, see page 25. NOTE: The Insert Tab feature is not available for imposed jobs. 8 To insert blank pages, click New Insert. For more information, see “To insert blank pages” on page 25. 9 To modify or delete a current definition, select it in the Mixed Media Definition list, and click Edit or Remove. If you click Edit, enter new settings for the definition and click Modify. 10 After you finish defining Mixed Media settings, click OK to close the Mixed Media dialog box and Job Properties. The Mixed Media settings are applied to the job. NOTE: You can save up to 100 different settings for the Selection list in the Mixed Media window. COMMAND WORKSTATION 23 TO DEFINE COVER MEDIA SETTINGS 1 In the Mixed Media window, click Define Cover. The Cover Media dialog box appears. 2 To define identical front cover and back cover media, select the “Apply the same settings for both front and back cover” option. To define media settings for the front or back cover individually, select the Front Cover or Back Cover option. 3 Choose other settings, as required, from the pull-down menus. 4 Choose the required media from the Media menu. To select media from Paper Catalog, choose Choose from Paper Catalog from the Media menu. The media that you selected appears in the main Cover Media window. For more information about Paper Catalog, see page 34. 5 Click OK to return to the Mixed Media window. Cover Media settings override settings defined in the Page/Page Range Media dialog box. COMMAND WORKSTATION 24 TO DEFINE MEDIA FOR SPECIFIC PAGES 1 In the Mixed Media window, click New Page Range. The Page/Page Range Media dialog box appears. 2 Type pages and page ranges as comma-separated values (for example: 3,9–14,18). 3 Choose other settings, as required, from the pull-down menus. If you assign a new media type to the back side of a duplexed sheet, a blank page is inserted to force the assigned page content to the front side of the next sheet. 4 Choose the required media from the Media menu. To select media from Paper Catalog, select Choose from Paper Catalog from the Media menu. The media that you selected appears in the main Page Range window. For more information about Paper Catalog, see page 34. 5 Click Add Definition after each media setting that you define. 6 Click Close to return to the Mixed Media window. COMMAND WORKSTATION 25 TO INSERT BLANK PAGES 1 Click New Insert in the Mixed Media window. The Insert Blank dialog box appears. 2 Indicate whether to insert the blank before or after the target page. Define the target page as the first or last page in the document, or as a specific numbered page. 3 Choose other settings, as required, from the pull-down menus. 4 Choose the required media from the Media menu. To select media from Paper Catalog, select Choose from Paper Catalog from the Media menu. The media that you selected appears in the main Insert Blank window. For more information about Paper Catalog, see page 34. 5 Click Insert after each blank page that you define. 6 Click Close to return to the Mixed Media window. Insert Tabs The Insert Tabs feature allows you to automatically insert tab pages throughout a job. This feature accommodates various sizes and types of tab media stock. You can insert the tab text and override text attributes on a per-job basis. NOTE: When you configure counters for the printer, printed tab pages count as black-andwhite pages, provided colors are calibrated to use pure black toner. Expelled tabs are not counted as printed pages. NOTE: If installed, the Stacker Main Tray can be selected for tab paper in the Insert Tabs feature from Command WorkStation. However, the Stacker Main Tray must be set up by the Service Technician, otherwise you cannot print a tab size document from the Stacker Main Tray. You cannot use the sorter with tab paper from the Stacker Main tray. COMMAND WORKSTATION 26 TO INSERT TAB PAGES 1 Select or right-click a spooled/held job in the Job Center view and choose Properties from the Actions menu, or double-click a job. 2 Click the Media icon and scroll down to Mixed Media. 3 Click New Tab in the Mixed Media window. The Insert Tab dialog box appears. 4 Type the number of tab positions included in a complete tab set in the “Number of tabs in a set” field. This specification ensures that tab text is printed in the correct tab positions. For example, tab positions in a set consisting of ten tabs are distinct from tab positions in a set consisting of five tabs. 5 Specify other settings, as required, for the tab stock. Paper Size values refer to the dimensions of the stock, including the tabbed portion. 6 Choose the required media from the Paper Catalog menu. You can also click the Select button to open the Paper Catalog window, select the required media, and then click OK. The media that you selected appears in the main Insert Tab window. For more information about Paper Catalog, see page 34. COMMAND WORKSTATION 27 7 To specify attributes for the tab text, type the number of tabs in the “Number of tabs to insert” field, and then click Insert. Use the following procedure to define the tab text. TO SPECIFY TAB TEXT 1 In the Tabs Text dialog box, select the “Apply the same text attributes for all tabs” option if you want all the tabs to use the same text attributes. 2 Click Insert. 3 Click Text Attributes. Specify the rotation, alignment, font, and size attributes of the tab text, and then click OK. 4 Indicate where you want each tab inserted in the document. • In the Page field, type the page number where you want the tab inserted. • Select Before to insert the tab before the page number, or clear this check box. NOTE: If you define a tab to be inserted between an odd-numbered page and an evennumbered page in a duplex job, the tab is inserted after the odd-numbered page on the first sheet, and the even-numbered page is printed on the next sheet. 5 Type the desired tab text for each tab in the Tab Text field. To define text attributes for each tab individually, click Text Attributes for that tab. 6 After you type the tab text, click OK to close the Insert Tab dialog box. The Mixed Media window displays the current tab settings in the Mixed Media Definition list. 7 To modify media settings for the tabs, select the tab description in the Mixed Media Definition list, and then click Edit. 8 To apply your Insert Tab settings to the document, click OK to close the Mixed Media window and Job Properties. COMMAND WORKSTATION 28 Output Tray for Unused Tabs Unused tabs can be sent to a specific output tray. For example, if you print a three-tab job and are using tab paper that has five tabs in a set, the fourth and fifth tabs are unused. To select the output tray for unused tabs, click New Tab in the Mixed Media window, select Output Tray to Kick Out Unused Tabs, and then choose the output tray from the drop-down menu. From Insert Tab, specify: • Number of tabs in the set of tab paper that you are using • Tab positions • Page number of tabs NOTE: Output Tray to Kick Out Unused Tabs is only available when you print multiple copies for your tab job. You cannot specify a finisher for the unused tab paper output tray if that finisher is not used for your job. If a paper jam occurs, note the position of the tab on the last page of output, and load the tab paper starting with the next tab position. Soft Proofing Soft Proofing allows you to view accurate color previews of print jobs on a monitor. This feature is available only if you have the Graphic Arts Package installed and enabled on the Fiery PRO80. For information about using Soft Proofing, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. ImageViewer If the Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition is installed and enabled on the Fiery PRO80, you can use ImageViewer to preview and adjust colors on a job that has been processed and held. For information about using ImageViewer, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. NOTE: When available, ImageViewer replaces the standard full-screen preview window described in Command WorkStation Help. COMMAND WORKSTATION 29 Troubleshooting When troubleshooting basic connection and software problems with Command WorkStation, see the following sections. For additional troubleshooting information, see Command WorkStation Help. Command WorkStation cannot connect to the Fiery PRO80 If you cannot connect to the Fiery PRO80 or locate the Fiery PRO80 from your computer, contact the network administrator. The administrator may need to troubleshoot your network connections and check settings on the servers that you print to. If settings have changed, it may be necessary to reconfigure the Fiery PRO80 (see Configuration and Setup). If you can connect to the Fiery PRO80 with another utility, you may need to reconfigure the Command WorkStation connection to the Fiery PRO80 (see page 17). If you configured the Fiery PRO80 and set up client computers and network servers according to the instructions in Configuration and Setup, print a Test Page. If you can print the Test Page, but still cannot print a document from a remote computer, ask your network administrator to troubleshoot the network connection. If you cannot connect and cannot print a Test Page, check the printer touch panel for error information. Command WorkStation does not respond If Command WorkStation is unresponsive, use the following troubleshooting guidelines. IF THE COMMAND WORKSTATION WINDOWS DO NOT UPDATE 1 Log off and then quit Command WorkStation. 2 Restart Command WorkStation or restart the computer. If the Command WorkStation windows do not update or no jobs are displayed, and the mouse has no effect (you cannot select a job or a window, use a right mouse command, or select a menu item), the Fiery PRO80 is offline or network communication has failed. TO FORCE AN EXIT FROM COMMAND WORKSTATION 1 On a Windows computer, press Ctrl-Alt-Delete and use the Program Manager to close Command WorkStation. On a Mac OS X computer, choose Apple menu > Force Quit, select Command WorkStation, and then click Force Quit. Or, press Command+Option+Esc, select Command WorkStation, and then click Force Quit. 2 At the Fiery PRO80, disconnect and reconnect the network cable, and then try printing a Test Page or Configuration page. 3 If printing fails, restart the Fiery PRO80. FIERY SEEQUENCE SUITE 30 FIERY SEEQUENCE SUITE Fiery SeeQuence Suite is an integrated job preparation tool, which offers the following modes, depending on what (if any) client dongle is available: • Preview provides a pre-RIP job preview. • Fiery SeeQuence Compose allows you to define the chapter divisions of a job, print ranges of pages on varying types of media, insert blank media between pages, and insert tab media containing text labels (if the printer supports tab printing). • Fiery SeeQuence Impose applies imposition layouts to jobs for custom printing, binding, and trimming. Also applies impositions to variable data jobs and saves imposed jobs as PDF files. • Fiery SeeQuence Suite integrates Impose and Compose features in the Preview window. About SeeQuence Suite Kits Fiery SeeQuence Suite software is available in the following optional kit configurations: • Fiery SeeQuence Impose kit (includes the Adobe Acrobat/Enfocus PitStop DVD and a dongle) • Fiery SeeQuence Compose kit (includes the Adobe Acrobat/Enfocus PitStop DVD and a dongle) • Fiery SeeQuence Suite kit, which includes both SeeQuence Impose and SeeQuence Compose (includes the Adobe Acrobat/Enfocus PitStop DVD and a single dongle) SeeQuence Impose and SeeQuence Compose are supported on both Windows and Mac OS computers. For information about system requirements, see Welcome. NOTE: SeeQuence Suite, SeeQuence Impose, and SeeQuence Compose are optional upgrade kits for Command WorkStation. You must have the software kit-specific dongle installed on your computer to use the full functionality of the optional software. If you do not have the dongle installed, SeeQuence runs in Demo mode. In Demo mode, imposed jobs print with a watermark, and you can save imposed jobs in .dbp format to the Fiery PRO80. You can save imposed jobs in Adobe PDF format to a hard drive and the Fiery PRO80 when you are in Demo mode, but they are saved with a watermark. FIERY SEEQUENCE SUITE 31 Installing and enabling Fiery SeeQuence Suite The following Fiery SeeQuence options kits are available for purchase for use with Command WorkStation: • SeeQuence Impose (includes a dongle) • SeeQuence Compose (includes a dongle) • SeeQuence Suite, which includes both SeeQuence Impose and SeeQuence Compose (includes a single dongle) The following sections describe how to install and enable SeeQuence Suite. Installing SeeQuence software SeeQuence Suite software is installed with Command WorkStation software. For information about installing Command WorkStation software, see pages 10 and 17. Enabling SeeQuence software SeeQuence Impose and SeeQuence Compose are dongle-protected features of Command WorkStation that work in conjunction with Adobe Acrobat and the Enfocus PitStop plug-in. You must install a special dongle on each computer that runs the SeeQuence software. This section explains how to install the dongle and the required software. You will need the following items: • Dongle: A USB dongle included in one of the following option kits: – Fiery SeeQuence Impose kit – Fiery SeeQuence Compose kit – Fiery SeeQuence Suite kit, which includes both SeeQuence Impose and SeeQuence Compose (includes a single dongle) NOTE: If you purchased an earlier version of Impose or Compose, use the dongles that you already own to enable SeeQuence Impose or SeeQuence Compose. • Adobe Acrobat/Enfocus PitStop DVD: Included in the SeeQuence Suite option kits. Contains installers for Adobe Acrobat version 9 and Enfocus PitStop, a plug-in module for Acrobat, for both Windows and Mac OS X. NOTE: Acrobat must be installed on the same computer as the SeeQuence software to preview .ps files. You do not need Acrobat or PitStop to preview .pdf files. Installing Command WorkStation installs the core SeeQuence software. If it is not already installed, you must install Command WorkStation (see page 17). FIERY SEEQUENCE SUITE 32 To enable SeeQuence software on a computer (or the Fiery PRO80, if it supports and is equipped with a monitor, keyboard, and mouse), do the following: • If not already installed—Install Command WorkStation from the Fiery Command WorkStation version 5 DVD for this Fiery PRO80. • Install the dongle provided in your kit directly on the computer. One dongle is required for each client computer. • Install Acrobat and PitStop from the installer DVD (Windows or Mac OS) provided in this kit. NOTE: If you are enabling SeeQuence software on the Fiery PRO80, the following procedures assume that you have logged on to the Fiery PRO80 with Administrator privileges and typed the appropriate password. To ensure network security, the system administrator may change this password frequently. Ask your administrator for the password. TO INSTALL THE DONGLE 1 If Command WorkStation is installed and running on the client computer, exit Command WorkStation. NOTE: If Command WorkStation is running, the dongle installation (described in step 2) will fail. 2 Unpack the dongle and install it directly into the computer’s USB connector. Insert the dongle into the USB connector of the computer. Make sure that the dongle is securely installed in the connector. Install Acrobat and PitStop, as described in the following procedure. TO INSTALL ACROBAT AND PITSTOP 1 If the latest versions of Adobe Acrobat and Enfocus PitStop are not installed, uninstall the current versions of Adobe Acrobat and Enfocus PitStop that are resident on the computer. NOTE: SeeQuence supports Acrobat 7, 8, and 9 on Windows computers and Acrobat 8 and 9 on Mac OS computers. • Close all open applications. • Follow the instructions for your computer for removing programs. • After you finish uninstalling earlier versions of Acrobat and PitStop, restart the computer. 2 Close all software applications that are currently running on the computer. FIERY SEEQUENCE SUITE 33 3 Insert the Adobe Acrobat/Enfocus PitStop DVD (Windows or Mac OS) into the DVD drive. 4 If the Installer does not start automatically, navigate to the root level of the DVD and double-click Setup.exe (Windows) or Setup.app (Mac OS). 5 On Mac OS X, click Install and follow the on-screen instructions. On Windows, select the language and click Next. The SeeQuence software option that you purchased is now fully enabled. About Help SeeQuence Suite Help is part of Command WorkStation Help. For instructions on using SeeQuence Impose and Compose, see Command WorkStation Help. The Help menu offers access to the following kinds of Help: • Online Help provides procedural information. • How To accesses the EFI web site that provides demo scripts and sample files. • What’s New describes the new features of Command WorkStation. • Go Online accesses the EFI website where you can find out more about Command WorkStation features. TO ACCESS COMMAND WORKSTATION HELP 1 Start Command WorkStation. Select the Fiery PRO80 from the Server List dialog box and log on to the server. (See “Configuring the connection to the Fiery PRO80” on page 17.) 2 Choose Help, How To, or What’s New from the Help menu. Or press F1 when the cursor is in an area of the main Command WorkStation window. PAPER CATALOG 34 PAPER CATALOG Paper Catalog is a system-based paper warehouse database that stores attributes of any media available for printing from the Fiery PRO80. Paper Catalog allows you to define custom catalog entries based on any combination of attributes you desire. You can customize any of the media attributes that are available for a catalog entry. You can then select media for your job from those listed. Installing Paper Catalog Paper Catalog is installed by default with Command WorkStation. For information about installing Command WorkStation, see page 15. For information about configuring Command WorkStation, see “Configuring the connection to the Fiery PRO80” on page 17. For instructions on how to use the standard Paper Catalog features, see Command WorkStation Help. For instructions on how to access Command WorkStation Help, see page 19. Tray Association and Paper Catalog When using Tray Association with Paper Catalog, note the following restrictions. If a tray is loaded with a standard size, for example, A4, Tray Association lists both the standard letter size and the custom size closest to A4, but in Paper Catalog, you can only select a media entry with the standard paper size. If a tray is loaded with a custom size paper, in Paper Catalog you can select a media with that custom size or another custom size paper for the job, but you cannot select a standard paper size, even one that is close to the custom paper size. PAPER CATALOG 35 Specifying Paper Catalog media for jobs This section describes how to specify Paper Catalog media for use with a print job. You can specify Paper Catalog media from the following interfaces: • Command WorkStation • Job Properties in Command WorkStation • Mixed Media Setup in Command WorkStation • Hot Folders • SeeQuence Impose • SeeQuence Compose • Printer driver (for instructions, see Printing) NOTE: The following procedures assume that one or more Paper Catalog entries have already been defined by an administrator. For information about how to define Paper Catalog entries, see the Paper Catalog section of Command WorkStation Help. TO ACCESS PAPER CATALOG FROM COMMAND WORKSTATION • To open Paper Catalog from Command WorkStation, choose Paper Catalog from the Server menu or click the Paper Catalog icon on the toolbar. TO SPECIFY PAPER CATALOG MEDIA FROM JOB PROPERTIES 1 Select a job in the Job Center and choose Properties from the Command WorkStation Actions menu. 2 Click the Media icon in Job Properties. 3 Choose Paper Catalog from the Media menu, and choose the required media from the Paper Catalog menu. NOTE: If you specify a paper catalog entry and then use Job Properties to change the page size (or another attribute associated with the paper catalog entry), the paper catalog assignment is canceled. Job Properties subsequently displays “none defined” for Paper Catalog. PAPER CATALOG 36 TO SPECIFY PAPER CATALOG MEDIA FROM MIXED MEDIA SETUP 1 Select or right-click a spooled/held job in the Job Center and choose Properties from the Actions menu, or double-click a job. 2 Click the Media icon in Job Properties and scroll down to Mixed Media. 3 Choose Paper Catalog from the Media menu in the Cover Media, Page Range, or Insert Blank windows, and choose the required media from the Paper Catalog menu. If Insert Tab is supported, choose from the Paper Catalog menu in the Insert Tab dialog box. For more information about Mixed Media Setup, see the Mixed Media section of Command WorkStation Help. TO SPECIFY PAPER CATALOG MEDIA FROM SEEQUENCE COMPOSE 1 Select a spooled/held job in the Job Center and choose Compose from the Actions menu. 2 Select a page, or pages, in the Page View pane of the Compose window, and choose Assign Media from the Actions menu. 3 Choose Paper Catalog from the Media menu and select the required media. For information about using Compose, see the Compose section of Command WorkStation Help. Compose Help also includes information about how to apply Paper Catalog entries to your job. TO SPECIFY PAPER CATALOG MEDIA FROM SEEQUENCE IMPOSE 1 Select a spooled/held job in the Job Center and choose Impose from the Actions menu. 2 Click the Edit button beside the Sheet menu. 3 Choose Paper Catalog from the Media menu and select the required media. For information about using Impose, see the Impose section of Command WorkStation Help. Impose Help also includes information about how to apply Paper Catalog entries to your job. TO SPECIFY PAPER CATALOG MEDIA FROM HOT FOLDERS 1 Select Job Settings and click Define in the Folder Properties dialog box. 2 Click the Media icon in Job Properties. 3 Choose Paper Catalog from the Media menu, and choose the required media from the Paper Catalog menu. 4 Click OK to return to Hot Folders Properties. PAPER CATALOG 37 Changing or deleting a Paper Catalog entry If a Paper Catalog media entry is selected for a job in the Held or Printed list, the Paper Catalog entry is locked, and you cannot modify or delete the entry. To make changes to the Paper Catalog entry, you must delete the job from the list, or change the Paper Catalog setting in Job Properties. REMOTE SCAN 38 REMOTE SCAN Remote Scan is a collection of software components that allow you to scan documents from the printer glass or through the printer’s automatic document feeder (ADF) and send the scanned images to specific destinations. Remote Scan consists of the following components: • Remote Scan (which includes the TWAIN plug-in module) allows you to remotely initiate and retrieve a scan from a printer. • Scan to E-mail allows you to send the scan file by e-mail as an attachment or URL. • Scan to FTP allows you to send the scan file to an FTP server. • Scan to Mailbox allows you to send the scan to a mailbox on the Fiery PRO80, from which it can be retrieved. • Scan to Disk allows you to scan directly to any hard disk on the network, such as your local hard disk. • Scan to Hold queue allows you to scan to the Fiery PRO80 Hold queue, for document merging and editing. • Docs WebTool allows you to retrieve scanned jobs from mailboxes on the Fiery PRO80. Installing and configuring Remote Scan You can use the Remote Scan TWAIN plug-in module with the following applications: • Adobe Acrobat v8.0/9.0 • Adobe Photoshop CS2/CS3 • PaperPort Pro v10.0/11.0 (Windows only) • Omnipage Pro v16.0 (Windows only) The following sections describe how to install and configure Remote Scan. Installing Remote Scan To install and use the Remote Scan plug-in module, you must have a Windows or Mac OS computer with a network connection. For detailed system requirements, see Welcome. The installer for Remote Scan is located on the User Software DVD. To install Remote Scan, see “Installing user software on a Windows computer” on page 11 and “Installing user software on a Mac OS computer” on page 13. REMOTE SCAN 39 Configuring Remote Scan The first time you start Remote Scan, you must configure the connection to the Fiery PRO80. Before you configure the connection, you must have the correct IP address. Make sure that the Fiery PRO80 is registered in a Domain Name Server (DNS) on your network. When you open Remote Scan, the Scan Configuration dialog box appears. For instructions on configuring the connection to the Fiery PRO80 for the first time, see page 39. For complete instructions on configuring and modifying the connection to the Fiery PRO80, see Remote Scan Help. If you previously configured a connection to the Fiery PRO80, it appears in the main Remote Scan window, and you can immediately initiate a scan, retrieve scans initiated at the printer touch panel, and use Remote Scan Help. TO CONFIGURE THE CONNECTION TO THE FIERY PRO80 1 When you start Remote Scan the first time, the Configuration window appears. In the Server Name or IP Address fields, type the DNS name or IP address of the Fiery PRO80. 2 Select Use Nickname to enter another name to distinguish the Fiery PRO80. This name does not have to match the actual Server Name of the Fiery PRO80. 3 Type the name of the device connected to the Fiery PRO80. You can specify any name for the device name, but the field must be populated. 4 Click the green arrow to add the Fiery PRO80 to My Fiery List. 5 Click OK. If the administrator has enabled LDAP, you must enter the LDAP server account name and password when prompted. TO ACCESS REMOTE SCAN HELP 1 Start Remote Scan or open the Remote Scan plug-in module. 2 Click Help. 3 Use the Contents, Index, or Search panes to navigate to the Remote Scan Help topics. REMOTE SCAN 40 Using Remote Scan With the Remote Scan application and Remote Scan TWAIN plug-in module, you can initiate and retrieve scan files remotely by accessing a mailbox, which is set up at the printer control panel. All scans are stored on the Fiery PRO80 hard disk and retrieved through the network. You can open the scan file in a host application, such as Photoshop, and send it to the Fiery PRO80 Hold queue, an e-mail address, or an FTP server, or save it to any hard disk on the network. You can then retrieve files using Remote Scan, the Docs WebTool, or Command WorkStation. Initiating a scan The Fiery PRO80 uses a scan to hard disk drive (HDD) feature that allows you to use the Fiery PRO80 Control Panel to scan an image from the printer glass (platen) or automatic document feeder (ADF) into Fiery PRO80 memory, and save it in a Mailbox. You can then retrieve the image from the Mailbox with Remote Scan or the Docs WebTool. For more information, see “Scanning to Mailboxes” on page 41. When scanning a job at the printer control panel, you can also scan to e-mail or FTP. For information about initiating a scan or creating an address book from the printer touch panel, see the documentation that accompanies your scanner. Additionally, you can scan a job directly to the Hold queue, so that you can use the document merging and editing features of Command WorkStation. For more information about using these features, see Command WorkStation Help. Specifying scan settings When you initiate a scan, specify scan settings. Scan settings are printer specific options. For specific scan settings, see the documentation that accompanies your scanner. Retrieving scans using Docs You can retrieve scan jobs in the Fiery PRO80 Mailboxes to your remote workstation using the Docs WebTool. To access Mailboxes, you must set a predefined user name and password. For instructions on using Docs, see page 47. For additional information about setting up Mailboxes, see the following section. REMOTE SCAN 41 Scanning to Mailboxes You can only scan to a Mailbox if the Mailbox has been created in advance. Ask the Fiery PRO80 administrator to create a Mailbox for you or advise you of what Mailboxes are available. You can create Mailboxes on the Mailbox web page, or in the Users and Groups setup in WebTools Configure. To access the Mailbox web page, open your web browser and type the IP address of the Fiery PRO80 in the Address field. On the Mailbox web page, you can create a Mailbox without creating a user account. Once a mailbox has been created, it appears as a group in the Users and Groups page of WebTools Configure. In WebTools Configure, when you create an account in Users and Groups and assign it scan privileges, a Mailbox of the same name as the account is created. NOTE: The Mailbox name cannot exceed 16 characters. In WebTools Configure, you can use a maximum of 72 characters for the name of an account. If you use more than 16 characters for a Mailbox name or an account for scan users, the Mailbox is not recognized. Do not exceed 16 characters, whether you create the name on the Mailbox web page or in WebTools Configure. FIERY BRIDGE 42 FIERY BRIDGE Fiery Bridge is an application that allows you to access scanned documents in your Fiery PRO80 mailbox directly from a client Windows computer. Fiery Bridge makes your mailbox accessible as if it were a standard network drive, allowing you to browse its contents using Windows. You can open a scanned document from an appropriate application on your computer, just as you would open any file on your computer. Fiery Bridge is an alternative to transferring scanned documents from a Fiery PRO80 using Remote Scan or WebTools and can simplify your scanning workflow. You can even use Fiery Bridge in combination with Hot Folders to create an automated workflow. Installing Fiery Bridge Install Fiery Bridge on a Windows computer that has a network connection to the Fiery PRO80. The installer for Fiery Bridge is provided on the User Software DVD. Before you install the utility, read the guidelines described in “Preparing for installation on Windows computers” on page 10. To install Fiery Bridge, see “Installing user software on a Windows computer” on page 11. Using Fiery Bridge TO START FIERY BRIDGE • Choose Start > All Programs > Fiery > Fiery Bridge or double-click the Fiery Bridge shortcut on your desktop. For complete instructions on how to use the standard Fiery Bridge features, see Fiery Bridge Help. TO ACCESS FIERY BRIDGE HELP 1 Start Fiery Bridge. 2 Choose Help > Help. HOT FOLDERS 43 HOT FOLDERS Hot Folders is a utility that allows you to store and reuse frequently used print options when printing PostScript and PDF files on the Fiery PRO80. With Hot Folders, you can do the following: • Create special folders (hot folders) that assign specific print settings and print queues to jobs • Print jobs to the Fiery PRO80 by dragging and dropping them onto hot folders on your computer’s desktop • Monitor the status of jobs sent to hot folders Installing Hot Folders The Hot Folders installer is located on the User Software DVD. Before installing the utility, make sure that you complete the preliminary procedures described on page 10. To install Hot Folders on a Windows computer, see page 11. To install Hot Folders on a Mac OS computer, see page 13. Upgrading from a previous version of Hot Folders Hot Folders includes a migration assistant that detects the previous version of Hot Folders and upgrades any existing Hot Folders settings to work in the latest version. The migration takes place only once during the installation of Hot Folders or Command WorkStation. The Migration Assistant summary window indicates whether or not a Hot Folder transferred successfully to the new version, and in case of failure, allows you to retry once during installation without exiting the Migration Assistant. HOT FOLDERS 44 TO MIGRATE FOLDER SETTINGS FROM AN EARLIER VERSION OF HOT FOLDERS 1 Install Hot Folders and allow the migration assistant to detect the previous version. NOTE: The Migration Assistant window only appears if there is a previous version of Hot Folders already installed. (Previous versions include: on Windows, all 2.x versions; on Mac OS, all 1.x versions.) 2 Click OK and follow on-screen instructions. NOTE: Do not click Cancel when migration is in progress. Cancelling the operation may cause permanent damage to the Hot Folders being upgraded. 3 Check the Migration summary in the Migration Assistant window. If migration is successful, you will see the successful icon ( ) next to each Hot Folder. If migration fails, or only partially succeeds, you will see the failed icon ( ) next to the Hot Folders that failed to migrate, with any details highlighted in the lower pane. 4 In case of failure, click Retry to attempt migration again before exiting the Migration Assistant. NOTE: Retrying will generate a new summary, checking only the files that failed. 5 Click OK. Using Hot Folders For complete instructions on how to use the standard Hot Folders features, see Hot Folders Help. If the Fiery Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition is installed and enabled on the Fiery PRO80, you can use additional file format filters with Hot Folders. For information about using these file format filters, see Fiery Graphic Arts Package. TO ACCESS HOT FOLDERS HELP 1 Start Hot Folders. 2 Choose Help > EFI Hot Folders Help. WEBTOOLS 45 WEBTOOLS WebTools allow you to manage your Fiery PRO80 remotely from the Internet or your company’s intranet. The Fiery PRO80 has its own home page, where you can select the following WebTools: • Home provides current information about the jobs processing and printing on the Fiery PRO80. • Downloads allows remote users to download installers (for drivers, PPDs, and other software) directly from the Fiery PRO80. • Docs allows remote users to access jobs on the Fiery PRO80 over the Internet or intranet. • Configure allows the Fiery PRO80 administrator to view and modify Setup options remotely from a Windows computer. Setting up WebTools WebTools are accessed through the home page of the Fiery PRO80 web site and do not require special installation. However, WebTools do require initial Setup by the Fiery PRO80 administrator. To enable network users to access and use WebTools, the administrator must set specific options in Network Setup and Printer Setup. For information about these specific Setup options, see Configuration and Setup. The administrator also must prepare each user’s computer to communicate with the Fiery PRO80 over the Internet or intranet. WEBTOOLS 46 TO SET UP CLIENT COMPUTERS TO USE WEBTOOLS 1 Enable TCP/IP networking. 2 Make sure that the workstation has a valid, unique IP address. 3 Make sure that a supported Internet browser is installed on the computer. For more information on supported browsers, see Welcome. 4 Make sure that Java is enabled in your Internet browser. In addition, make sure that you have completed the preliminary procedures described on page 10. NOTE: If the client computer is running Windows XP with Service Pack 2 (SP2) installed, Pop-up Blocker is turned on by default. With this function turned on, a warning message appears when you access WebTools, and your access to WebTools is denied. To gain access, do one of the following: • Change the Pop-up Blocker setting by clicking the warning message and choosing from one of the selections that appears. • Turn off Pop-up Blocker in Internet Explorer from the Tools menu or in Internet Options. For more information, see Internet Explorer Help, or the documentation that accompanies your Windows system. Accessing the WebTools home page Use your Internet browser to access WebTools. For complete information about browser and system requirements, see Welcome. 1 Start your Internet browser. 2 Type the IP address or DNS name of the Fiery PRO80. The Fiery PRO80 home page appears. If the home page for the printer appears instead of the WebTools page, click the WebTools link. 3 Click the tab for the WebTool that you want to use. WEBTOOLS 47 Using WebTools The following sections describe how to use the WebTools. Home Home lets you view jobs that are currently processing and printing on the Fiery PRO80. Printing and processing information is updated every 30 seconds. For complete instructions on how to use Home, see Home Help. Downloads The Downloads WebTool allows you to download installers (for drivers, PPDs, and other Fiery PRO80 software) directly from the Fiery PRO80. For complete instructions on how to use Downloads, see Downloads Help. Docs Docs allows you to access jobs on the Fiery PRO80 over the Internet or intranet. You can: • Manage and distribute jobs in your mailbox. Mailboxes are set up in the Configure WebTool. • Control and modify jobs. • Submit jobs to the Fiery PRO80. For complete instructions on how to use Docs, see Docs Help. Configure Configure allows the Fiery PRO80 administrator to view and modify Setup options remotely from a Windows computer. For information about using Configure, see Configuration and Setup. Before using Configure, make sure you have completed the Configure preparation procedure described on page 10. For complete instructions on how to use Configure, see Configure Help. INDEX 49 A accessing Help 19 for Command WorkStation 19 for Fiery Bridge 42 for Hot Folders 44 for Remote Scan 39 for SeeQuence Suite 33 ADF (automatic document feeder) 38 Administrator login 18, 19 Adobe Acrobat and Enfocus PitStop description 31 installing 32 B blank pages, inserting 22 C chapter definition for jobs 21 color management 9 Command WorkStation accessing Help 19 Device Center 15 Job Center 15 Compose, about 30 Configuration page description 17 printing 17 Configure WebTool 47 configuring connection 39 server 47 WebTools 45, 46 configuring connection to server for Command WorkStation 17 Remote Scan 39 conventions 8 cover media 23 cover settings 22 D Device Center 15 Docs WebTool 47 Domain Name Server (DNS) 17 dongle for SeeQuence Compose 30 for SeeQuence Impose 30 for SeeQuence Suite 30 downloading software 47 Downloads WebTool 47 drag-and-drop printing 43 E EFI ImageViewer 28 enabling SeeQuence Suite 31 F Fiery Bridge accessing Help 42 description 42 installing 42 using 42 Fiery User Software Installer 11, 13 Fiery utilities, configuring the connection to server 39 file format filters 44 full-screen preview 28 G graphic arts features file format filters 44 Graphic Arts Package, Premium Edition ImageViewer 28 INDEX INDEX 50 H Help for Command WorkStation 19 for Fiery Bridge 42 for Hot Folders 44 for Paper Catalog 34 for Remote Scan 39 for SeeQuence Suite 33 for WebTools 47 Home WebTool 47 Hot Folders accessing Help 44 description 43 installing 43 using 44 I icons, in documentation 8 ImageViewer 28 Impose, about 30 imposing jobs 30 imposition layouts 30 Insert Tabs 26 inserting blank pages 22 tabs 26 installing Compose 31 Fiery Bridge 42 Hot Folders 43 Impose 31 Paper Catalog 34 SeeQuence Suite 31 user software 10 installing on Mac OS 13 IP address 17 J Java 46 Java file 10 installing 10 Java runtime Environment (JRE) 10 Job Center 15 jobs chapter definitions 21 cover media 23 mixed media definitions 20 VDP 30 L logging in to the server 18 M Mailbox name 41 Mailboxes, scanning to 41 media definitions 20 media settings cover 22 Mixed Media 20 P Paper Catalog accessing from Command WorkStation 35 changing or deleting an entry 37 description 34 installing 34 specifying media from Compose 36 from Hot Folders 36 from Impose 36 from Job Properties 35 from Mixed Media 36 Paper Catalog, specifying media from 26 paper definitions 20 preview window 28 printing with frequently used print options 43 product names terminology 8 R Remote Scan accessing Help 39 configuring connection to server 39 description 38 using 40 remote setup 47 S scan settings, specifying 40 scans initiating 40 retrieving from Mailboxes 41 retrieving from WebTools 40 SeeQuence Compose See Compose 30 SeeQuence Impose See Impose 30 INDEX 51 SeeQuence Suite accessing Help 33 description 30 kits 30 SeeQuence Suite See Impose and Compose 30 server setup 47 servers. searching for 17 Sun Java JRE 10 T tab insertion 26 media 26 tab printing 22, 25 text attributes 27 tab text, specifying 27 tabs, unused 28 terminology 8 terminology for product names 8 text attributes on tabs 27 text on tabs, specifying 27 troubleshooting Command WorkStation 29 U user software for SeeQuence Suite 31 installing from media 10 installing on Mac OS 13 installing on Windows 11 installing over the Internet 10 installing over the network 10 modifying on Windows 12 V VDP jobs imposing 30 W WebTools Configure 47 configuring 46 Docs 47 Downloads 47 Home Fiery® PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery® PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server Welcome © 2010 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. The information in this publication is covered under Legal Notices for this product. 45093713 29 July 2010 WELCOME 3 WELCOME This Welcome document provides system requirements and an overview of how to set up the Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server so that you can begin printing. It describes the initial tasks you must perform and points you to sections in the user documentation where the procedures are described in detail. This document also provides a description of the user documentation on the User Documentation CD and instructions on printing documents. This document assumes that you have already installed the printer components. Details about the printer, network, remote computers, software applications, and Microsoft Windows are beyond the scope of this document. Read the “Safety warnings” on page 18 before operating the Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server. Terminology and conventions This document uses the following terminology and conventions. Term or convention Refers to Aero Fiery PRO80 (in illustrations and examples) Fiery PRO80 Fiery PRO80 80C-KM Color Server and Fiery PRO80 70-60C-KM Color Server Mac OS Apple Mac OS X Printer 80C-KM printer and 70-60C-KM printer Titles in italics Other documents in this set Windows Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2003/2008/2008 R2 Topics for which additional information is available by starting Help in the software Tips and information WELCOME 4 About the documentation This document is part of a set provided to users and system administrators of Fiery PRO80 on the User Documentation CD, in PDF (Portable Document Format). These files can be viewed online from your computer or printed using Adobe Reader. When viewed online, these files contain links and cross-references that allow you to quickly and easily locate needed information. The following comprise the documentation set for your Fiery PRO80: • Print Server Setup Roadmap provides a graphical overview of the minimum Setup requirements to have the Fiery PRO80 function on your network. • Welcome provides an introduction to the Fiery PRO80 and the user documentation. • Configuration and Setup explains configuration and administration of the Fiery PRO80 for supported platforms and network environments. It also includes guidelines for providing printing services to users. • Printing describes how to install the printer drivers on Windows and Mac OS computers, establish printing connections for different networks, and print from users’ computers. This document describes print options and features that you access from the printer driver, Command WorkStation job overrides, and Hot Folders job properties. • Utilities describes how to scan and how to install, configure, and use the software utilities included on the User Software DVD. • Color Printing explains how to manage color output on the Fiery PRO80. This document provides information about color, including how to calibrate the Fiery PRO80 and set color print options from Windows and Mac OS computers. • Fiery Graphic Arts Package addresses the specific needs and requirements of graphic arts professionals and commercial print shops. It explains the Fiery Graphic Arts Package (FGAP) and FGAP Premium Edition features. • Fiery Color Reference provides an overview of color management concepts and workflows, and describes how to manage color from various applications. A warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the equipment safely, always pay attention to these warnings. A caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the equipment safely, always pay attention to these cautions. Operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the equipment correctly, and avoid damage to the equipment or property. Term or convention Refers to WELCOME 5 • Workflow Examples explains complicated printing scenarios and provides cross-references to relevant information in the documentation set. • Variable Data Printing supplements the information in Workflow Examples with reference information about VDP (variable data printing). This document provides an overview of FreeForm and where to set FreeForm options. • Release Notes provide last-minute product information and workarounds for some of the problems you may encounter. • For the Network Scanner Guide, see the User’s Guide CD for the printer. Installing user documentation NOTE: You can install user documentation directly from the User Documentation CD. You can view the documentation from the CD or copy the language folder that you want to your desktop. If you copy the files to your computer, keep all of the files in the language folder. Do not rename the files, or the cross-reference links will not work properly. TO INSTALL USER DOCUMENTATION ON A CLIENT COMPUTER FROM THE USER DOCUMENTATION CD 1 Insert the User Documentation CD into the CD-ROM drive. The contents of the CD are displayed. On Mac OS X, the disk icon is displayed and you must click it to display the contents of the CD. 2 Browse to the language folder that you want to access. You can then choose to copy the documents that you want to your hard disk drive or, if there is an Acrobat link inside the folder, click the link to download the documentation from the Internet. Viewing user documentation View or print the PDF files provided using Reader or Acrobat. For information about installing Reader, visit the Adobe web site. Once you install Reader, double-click a PDF icon to open the file. You can search for a word or phrase across the Fiery PRO80 documentation set by examining all the documents within a specific language folder on the User Documentation CD. For information about using this and other features of Reader, see the Help that accompanies the application. NOTE: You can view the documentation from the CD or copy the language folder to your desktop. If you copy the files to your computer, keep all of the files in the language folder. Do not rename the files, or the cross-reference links will not work properly. WELCOME 6 About Help Most of the user software, utilities, and printer drivers contain Help that is accessible from Help buttons or the main toolbar menus. Help provides detailed procedures on using the application and, in some cases, provides additional detail. The documentation refers you to Help for more information, as appropriate. Space requirements for Fiery PRO80 installation Make sure there is enough space near the printer for Fiery PRO80 installation at your site. You need a minimum of 8 inches (20 cm) at the back and sides of the Fiery PRO80, as shown in the following illustration. System requirements for user computers To install the Fiery PRO80 user software on a Windows or Mac OS computer, the computer must be equipped with a built-in or external DVD-ROM drive. The following table lists the minimum system requirements. 20 cm/8 inches minimum 20 cm/8 inches minimum Back panel of the Fiery PRO80 Front panel of the Fiery PRO80 WELCOME 7 Minimum requirements for Windows Mac OS Operating system The following Windows versions (with latest service packs) are supported for printer drivers: • Windows 2000 Professional, Server, Advanced Server The following Windows versions (with latest service packs) are supported for printer drivers and Fiery applications: • Windows XP (32- and 64-bit) Home, Professional • Windows Vista (32- and 64-bit) Home Basic Edition, Home Premium Edition, Ultimate Edition, Business Edition, Enterprise Edition • Windows Server 2003 (32- and 64-bit) Standard Edition, Enterprise Edition, Datacenter Edition • Windows Server 2003 SP1 (64-bit), R2 (32- and 64-bit) NOTE: Fiery Remote Scan is not supported with Windows Server 2003 SP1, 64-bit • Windows 7 (32- and 64-bit) Home Premium, Professional, Ultimate • Windows Server 2008 (32- and 64-bit) Standard Edition, Enterprise Edition, Datacenter Edition, Web Server (32 and 64-bit) • Windows Server 2008 R2 (64-bit) Foundation Edition, Standard Edition, Enterprise Edition, Datacenter Edition, Web Server, Itanium-based NOTE: Fiery applications are supported on 64-bit operating systems, however they run in 32-bit mode only. The following Mac OS versions are supported for printer drivers: • Mac OS v10.3.9 and later (Power PC Mac OS computers) • Mac OS v10.4 and later (Intelbased and Power PC Mac OS computers) Mac OS versions supported for Fiery applications: • Mac OS v10.4 and later (Intelbased Mac OS computers) • Mac OS v10.5 (PowerPC G5 and Intel-based Mac OS computers) NOTE: Hot Folders is only supported on PowerPC G5 and Intel-based Mac OS computers. • Mac OS v10.6.x HDD required for printing and utilities (except Command WorkStation) 500MB available hard disk space for installation (2GB hard disk space recommended for writing full previews of raster files and handling large files) 80MB available hard disk space for installation (500MB hard disk space recommended for writing full previews of raster files and handling large files) Memory for printing and utilities 1GB of RAM for printing and operating utilities Networking protocol TCP/IP Networking protocol for Fiery utilities TCP/IP TCP/IP, EtherTalk, and AppleTalk WELCOME 8 WebTools Java-enabled Web browser: • Mac OS X: Safari v3.1; Firefox v3.5 and earlier • Windows: Internet Explorer 6, 7, and 8; Firefox v3.5 and earlier NOTE: Microsoft releases frequent updates to Internet Explorer. Because support cannot be guaranteed for all versions, use the versions specified for best results. A monitor and video memory that supports 16-bit color at a minimum resolution of 800x600 A TCP/IP-enabled network and the Fiery PRO80 IP address or DNS name Web Services enabled on the Fiery PRO80 Command WorkStation 1.0GHz or greater Pentium 4 processor 1.6GHz or greater 500MB available hard disk space for application installation 2GB available hard disk space for application use A monitor that supports 16-bit color at a minimum resolution of 1024x768 SeeQuence (Impose and Compose) on Command WorkStation In addition to requirements for Command WorkStation: • Dongle to be installed on USB port for every client workstation • Acrobat/PitStop software Minimum requirements for Windows Mac OS WELCOME 9 BASIC STEPS TO PRINT The following section includes a basic workflow for setting up your Fiery PRO80 in order to print documents. It takes you from printing a Configuration page and configuring Setup to installing printer drivers to print a job. Detailed instructions for all of these procedures are found in other documents in the documentation set. For a summary of supported Fiery PRO80 documents, see page 4. These instructions assume that a service technician has unpacked and connected the Fiery PRO80 and that the Fiery PRO80 and printer are powered on. In some cases, initial print device settings may be required (see Configuration and Setup). The following steps assume that you are adding the Fiery PRO80 to a TCP/IP network that includes Windows XP user computers. Although this example is specific to a Windows XP TCP/IP environment, users in other computer environments may also benefit from these instructions. WELCOME 10 Step 1 Print a Configuration page from the printer touch panel Print the Configuration page and note the available setup options. You will define the Fiery PRO80 name and IP address in “Step 2” on page 11. When you perform Fiery PRO80 Setup and install the printer driver, you will need to reference this information. 1 Press the Controller button on the printer touch panel. 2 Press the Tools tab. 3 Press Configuration. The Configuration page prints. 4 Review the default Fiery PRO80 settings on the printed page and determine if they are compatible with your network environment. If you change these settings, print another Configuration page to verify the changes. WELCOME 11 Step 2 Set up the Fiery PRO80 from the printer touch panel The Fiery PRO80 is equipped with two different types of printer touch panel Setup interfaces: • The new version of Setup. The new version of Setup provides a condensed list of Setup options to allow for quick configuration of the Fiery PRO80. • The Legacy LCD. This is an earlier version of Setup that provides the following groups of Setup options: Server Setup, Network Setup 1, and Network Setup 2. • The following instructions use the new version of Setup. For more information about the different types of Setup, see Configuration and Setup. 1 Make sure that the information screen on the printer touch panel reads Idle. If Printing or RIPping appears, the Fiery PRO80 is processing, and you must wait until the system finishes and reaches the Idle state. 2 Press the Controller button on the printer touch panel. 3 Press Setup. 4 Press the Administrator Password field, enter your password, and then press OK. WELCOME 12 5 Press Login. 6 Perform Setup. This is the minimum required for initial Setup. Later, you can complete the remaining Setup menus, from a network computer. NOTE: This Setup screen is not displayed when the Enable Web Services option is cleared, the DHCP server is down, or the network does not have DHCP server. When this occurs, the printer touch panel displays “The server appears to be offline” and you cannot access the Setup screen. If this happens, press Enable Legacy LCD. This displays an earlier version of Setup named Legacy LCD. From the Legacy LCD Setup screen, enter the IP address manually and make sure that Enable Web Services is selected. The new Setup screen is available after the Fiery PRO80 reboots. For more information about Legacy LCD and the printer touch panel Setup options, see Configuration and Setup. WELCOME 13 Step 3 Install PostScript printer drivers on user computers for TCP/IP printing From a user’s Windows XP computer: 1 Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes. 2 Click Add a printer. 3 Click Next. 4 Select “Local printer attached to this computer” and click Next. 5 Select Create a new port, choose Standard TCP/IP Port, and then click Next. The Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard dialog box appears. 6 Click Next. WELCOME 14 7 Type the Fiery PRO80 IP address or DNS name and click Next. 8 Make sure that Generic Network Card is selected as Standard for Device Type and click Next. 9 Click Finish. 10 Click Have Disk in the dialog box displaying lists of manufacturers and printers. 11 Insert the User Software DVD into your computer and browse to the English\Prntdrvr\Ps_drvr\Win_2K_XP_VISTA folder. Make sure that Oemsetup.inf or Oemsetup is selected, click Open, and then click OK. 12 Select the Fiery PRO80 printer driver as your printer and click Next. 13 Type a name for the Fiery PRO80 in the Printer name field, indicate whether you want to make it the default printer, and then click Next. 14 Select Do not share this printer and click Next. 15 Select No to printing a Test Page, click Next, and then click Finish. The necessary files are installed to your hard disk. When installation is complete, the Printers window appears, with an icon for the newly installed printer. WELCOME 15 Step 4 Configure the printer driver to include Fiery PRO80 and printer installed options From a user’s Windows XP computer: 1 Click Start and choose Printers and Faxes. 2 In the Printers window, select the Fiery PRO80 printer driver icon. 3 Choose Properties from the File menu. 4 Click the Installable Options tab. 5 Select Two-Way Communication. 6 Type the Fiery PRO80 IP address or DNS name. 7 Select Update Fiery Driver When Opened to display the printer’s current default settings when the printer driver is opened. 8 Click Update. Options such as finishing units that are installed on the Fiery PRO80 are displayed in the printer driver and are available the next time you print a job. 9 Click OK. For more information about installing printer driver options, see printer driver Help. WELCOME 16 Step 5 Print a job From a user’s Windows XP computer: 1 From your application, choose Print from the File menu. 2 Select the Fiery PRO80 printer driver and click Properties. 3 Specify FieryPRO80 job options, such as Copies and finishing options, and then click OK. 4 Click OK again. After completing the basic steps to print, you may want to explore these additional topics, depending on your printing environment: • Creating secure user groups and assigning user passwords (see Configure Help) • Managing and editing jobs submitted to the Fiery PRO80 using utilities such as Command WorkStation (see Utilities and Color Printing) • Calibrating your printer to simulate a different printing environment or optimize color output (see Color Printing) WELCOME 17 Shutting down, rebooting and restarting the Fiery PRO80 You may have to shut down the Fiery PRO80 for service. When you do, network access to the printer is interrupted. Before you remove or attach any cables to the Fiery PRO80 to perform service, shut down the Fiery PRO80. If necessary, you can restart the Fiery PRO80. Restarting the Fiery PRO80 from FieryBar resets the Fiery PRO80 system software without restarting the system entirely. Rebooting the Fiery PRO80 from the Windows Start menu restarts the system entirely. TO SHUT DOWN THE FIERY PRO80 FROM THE CONTROL PANEL 1 Make sure that the Fiery PRO80 is not receiving, processing, or printing any files. If the system has just finished processing, wait at least 5 seconds after the system reaches Idle before beginning the shutdown procedure. 2 Press Menu to display the Functions menu. 3 Choose Shutdown System. TO RESTART OR REBOOT THE FIERY PRO80 FROM THE CONTROL PANEL 1 When the Fiery PRO80 reaches Idle, press any button on the Control Panel. 2 Press Menu to display the Functions menu. 3 In the menu that appears, press the button next to Restart Server. 4 In the next menu, press the button next to Restart Server or Reboot System. The Fiery PRO80 is heavy. Use caution when you lift the unit. Never lift the Fiery PRO80 by the top panel. The top panel does not support the weight of the system. WELCOME 18 Safety warnings The Fiery PRO80 printer touch panel is a liquid crystal display (LCD) that is made of glass and can break. Do not subject it to strong shocks. If the printer touch panel breaks and the liquid crystal material leaks out, do not inhale, ingest, or touch it. If the material gets on your skin or clothing, wash it off with soap and water immediately. Fiery PRO80 batteries may contain perchlorate material. Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the Fiery PRO80. This may result in a fire or electrical shock. Use only the power cord supplied in the package. Do not scratch, abrade, place a heavy object on, heat, twist, bend, pull on, or damage the power cord. Use of a damaged power cord (with exposed core wire or broken wire) may result in a fire. Connect the power cord to an electrical outlet that is equipped with a grounding terminal. Use only the specified power source voltage. Failure to do so may result in a fire or electrical shock. Connect the power plug directly into a wall outlet with the same configuration as the plug. Do not use an adapter. Doing so results in inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity, grounding) to the Fiery PRO80, and may result in a fire or electrical shock. Do not use an extension cord. It may result in a fire or electrical shock. Do not unplug and plug in the power cord with a wet hand, as an electrical shock may result. Plug the power cord all the way into the power outlet. Failure to do this may result in a fire or electrical shock. Do not tug the power cord when unplugging the power cord. Pulling on the power cord may damage the cord, resulting in a fire or electrical shock. Do not keep using the Fiery PRO80 if the Fiery PRO80 becomes inordinately hot, emits smoke, unusual odor, or noise. Immediately turn off the power switch, unplug the power cord from the power outlet, and call your authorized service representative. Do not apply excessive pressure to the panel. This changes the color of the panel. Users in California, U.S. must dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions. User Manual FS-520 Contents-1 Contents 1 Introduction 2 Precautions for installation and use 2.1 Caution notations and labels........................................................... 2-3 2.2 Space requirements ......................................................................... 2-4 2.3 Finisher FS-520 ................................................................................. 2-6 2.4 Standard/optional equipment.......................................................... 2-8 2.5 Replenishing staples ........................................................................ 2-9 Inserting a new staple cartridge into Finisher FS-520 ................... 2-9 2.6 Disposing punch waste.................................................................. 2-12 Emptying waste basket of Finisher FS-520 ................................. 2-12 2.7 Paper information........................................................................... 2-14 2.8 Specifications ................................................................................. 2-16 Finisher FS-520............................................................................ 2-16 3 Copying operations 3.1 Using Finisher FS-520 ...................................................................... 3-3 Output to the primary (main) tray ................................................... 3-3 Output to the secondary (sub) tray ................................................ 3-4 3.1.1 Non-sort/collate/uncollate output to the primary (main) tray......... 3-5 3.1.2 Stapling output to the primary (main) tray ..................................... 3-7 3.1.3 Collate/uncollate output to the secondary (sub) tray................... 3-10 3.1.4 Punching file holes in copies (Punch) .......................................... 3-12 3.2 Cover sheet feeding (paper inserter) ............................................ 3-15 3.3 Using Finisher FS-520 manually .................................................... 3-17 Contents-2 FS-520 4 Finisher adjustment (FS-520) outlines 03 Punch Adjustment/01 Vertical Position Adj. .............................. 4-3 03 Punch Adjustment/02 Horizontal Position Adj,.......................... 4-3 03 Punch Adjustment/03 Registration Adjustment......................... 4-3 03 Punch Adjustment/04 Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adj. ............. 4-3 06 Paper Inserter Tray Size Adj. ..................................................... 4-3 07 Output Quantity Limit................................................................. 4-3 08 Curl Adjustment ......................................................................... 4-3 1 Introduction Introduction 1 FS-520 1-3 1 Introduction Finisher FS-520 is an optional device newly added to the configuration of ineo+ 6500 options. Please refer to this manual for the operation and safety information on the finisher, and keep this manual inside the user manual of the main body, readily available for reference. Also, be sure to read Chapter 1 "Introduction/Safety Information" of the ineo+ 6500 User manual. Develop GmbH 1 Introduction 1-4 FS-520 2 Precautions for installation and use Precautions for installation and use 2 FS-520 2-3 2 Precautions for installation and use 2.1 Caution notations and labels Safety precaution notations and labels appear on this machine at the following positions. Be very careful that an accident does not occur when operations such as removing paper misfeeds are performed. 2 Reminder Do not remove caution labels or notations. If any caution label or caution notation is soiled, please clean to make legible. If you cannot make them legible, or if the caution label or notation is damaged, please contact your service representative. Finisher FS-520 2 Precautions for installation and use 2-4 FS-520 2.2 Space requirements To ensure that machine operation, consumables replenishing, part replacement, and regular maintenance can easily be performed, adhere to the recommended space requirements detailed below. Be sure to choose a level and solid floor for the installation place. Combination size the main body and options may be different for the installation environment. 1619 899 2142 1021 950 293 1021 1619 393 205 410 760 718 656 2419 1160 1177 100 85 100 Main body + DF-609 + LU-202 + FS-520 + PI-502 Main body + DF-609 + LU-202 + FS-520 + PI-502 (side-view) Unit: mm Precautions for installation and use 2 FS-520 2-5 2 Reminder Be sure to allow a clearance of 200 mm or more at the back of this machine for the ventilation duct. 2 Precautions for installation and use 2-6 FS-520 2.3 Finisher FS-520 2 3 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Precautions for installation and use 2 FS-520 2-7 External view Internal view No. Name Description 1 Finisher door Opens to the internal finisher to allow clearing mishandled paper, replenishing staples, and emptying waste basket of punch kit. 2 Primary (Main) tray Holds sets output in Non-sort mode, Collate mode (offset), or Staple mode. 3 Secondary (Sub) tray Holds sets output in Non-sort mode. No. Name Description 1 Secondary (Sub) tray conveyance lever Opens rightward to remove mishandled paper. 2 Paper inserter conveyance lever Opens leftward to remove mishandled paper. 3 Punch kit PK-512/PK-513 (option) Punches file holes in the output copies. 4 Entrance lever Opens downward to remove mishandled paper. 5 Stacker conveyance lever Opens lower-leftward to remove mishandled paper. 6 Staple cartridge Holds staple case to be replaced when supplying staples. 7 Stacker unit handle Withdraws unit to allow removal of mishandled paper and replacement of staple cartridge. 2 Precautions for installation and use 2-8 FS-520 2.4 Standard/optional equipment PI-502 PK-512 PK-513 FS-520 DF-609 OC-506 key counter main body IC-303 IC-304 IC-408 LU-502 HT-503 HT-504 PF-601 Precautions for installation and use 2 FS-520 2-9 2.5 Replenishing staples Inserting a new staple cartridge into Finisher FS-520 When the staple cartridge of the Finisher FS-520 becomes empty, the Staple Cartridge indicator lights in red in the option status area of the Machine Status Screen. 1 Open the Finisher door. 2 Pull out the stacker unit. – Pull out the stacker unit slowly by holding the stacker unit handle until it stops. 2 Precautions for installation and use 2-10 FS-520 3 Remove the staple cartridge. – Hold the lever on the staple cartridge, and then pull the cartridge down to remove it. 4 Remove the empty staple case from the staple cartridge. 5 Insert the new staple case into the staple cartridge. – Do not remove the staples remaining inside the cartridge; otherwise, the first sheet output after the replenishment will not be stapled. Precautions for installation and use 2 FS-520 2-11 6 Return the stacker unit to its original position. 7 Close the Finisher door. 2 Precautions for installation and use 2-12 FS-520 2.6 Disposing punch waste Emptying waste basket of Finisher FS-520 When the waste basket of Punch kit PK-512/PK-513 installed in Finisher FS-520 becomes full, the Punch Waste Basket indicator lights in red in the option status area of the Machine Status Screen. 1 Open the Finisher door. 2 Withdraw the waste basket. Precautions for installation and use 2 FS-520 2-13 3 Empty the waste basket. 4 Return the waste basket to its original position, then close the Finisher door securely. 2 Precautions for installation and use 2-14 FS-520 2.7 Paper information Finisher FS-520 provides the following functions. - Straight delivery using primary (main) tray: Outputs sorted/grouped sets normally to the primary (main) tray. - Straight delivery using secondary (sub) tray: Outputs sorted/grouped sets normally to the secondary (sub) tray. - Offset delivery: Outputs sorted/grouped sets to the primary (main) tray, having each set offset by approx. 30 mm upon exit. - Staple delivery: Staples each set with one staple at the corner or two staples along the edge. Punch mode is available using Finisher FS-520 with Punch kit PK-512/PK-513 installed. Sheet insertion is available using Finisher FS-520 with Post inserter PI-502 installed. Paper information Weight Primary (main) tray: 60 to 300 g/m2 Secondary (sub) tray: 50 to 300 g/m2 Staple: 60 to 209 g/m2 Capacity Secondary (sub) tray Max. 100 sheets Primary (main) tray (normal) 500 sheets (80 g/m2) (A5 w/v, B6 w, 5.5" e 8.5" w/v) 3,000 sheets (80 g/m2) (A4 w/v, B5 w/v, 16K w/v, 8.5" e 11" w/v, 7.25" e 10.5" w/v) 1,500 sheets (80 g/m2) (SRA3w, SRA4w, A3 w, B4 w, Foolscap, 8K w, 12" e 18" w, 11" e 17" w, 8.5" e 14" w, Wide size (max. 320 mm e 450 mm)) Tray capacity varies depending on paper weight. • ~80 g/m2 : 1,500 sheets • 81~135 g/m2 : 1,000 sheets • 136~209 g/m2 : 700 sheets • 210~300 g/m2 : 500 sheets Primary (main) tray (Staple) Max. 50 sheets (80 g/m2) per set 2-9 sheets stapled: 100 sets (150-417mm in length)/ 50 sets (others) 10-20 sheets stapled: 50 sets 21-30 sheets stapled: 30 sets 31-40 sheets stapled: 25 sets 41-50 sheets stapled: 20 sets Paper Inserter PI-502 Upper/Lower tray Max. 200 sheets (50 to 200 g/m2) Punch Kit PK-512/ PK-513 Unlimited Precautions for installation and use 2 FS-520 2-15 Stapling capacity Paper Size Secondary (sub) tray Standard Size: SRA3 w, SRA4 w/v, A3 w, B4 w, Foolscap, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 8K w, 16K w/v, 13" e 19" w, 12" e 18" w, 11" e 17" w, 8.5" e 14" w, 8.5" e 11" w/v, 5.5" e 8.5"w/v Custom Size: Max. 330 mme 487mm to Min. 100 mm e 148 mm Tab Paper: A4 v, 8.5" e 11" v Primary (main) tray (Normal) Standard Size: SRA3 w*1, SRA4 w, A3 w, B4 w, Foolscap, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 w*1/v, B6 w*1, 8K w, 16K w/v, 12" e 18" w, 11" e 17" w, 8.5" e 14" w, 8.5" e 11" w/v, 5.5" e 8.5" w*1/v *1: 5.5" e 8.5" w, SRA3 w, A5 w and B6 w are available for straight output only. Custom Size*2: Max. 314 mme 458 mm to Min. 182 mm e 148 mm *2: Max. 314 mme 458 mm to Min. 128 mm e 148 mm for straight output only. Tab Paper: A4 v, 8.5" e 11" v Primary (main) tray (Staple) Standard Size: SRA4 w, A3 w, B4 w, Foolscap, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, 8K w, 16K w/v, 12" e 18" w, 11" e 17" w, 8.5" e 14" w, 8.5" e 11" w/v, 5.5" e 8.5" v Custom Size: Max. 314 mme 458 mm to Min. 182 mm e 148 mm Tab Paper: A4 v, 8.5" e 11" v Paper information Paper weight Paper type Normal paper High quality paper Colored paper Coated paper 64 to 80 g/m2 50 sheets 50 sheets 50 sheets 40 sheets 81 to 105 g/m2 40 sheets 30 sheets 30 sheets 25 sheets 106 to 135 g/m2 30 sheets 30 sheets 25 sheets 20 sheets 136 to 209 g/m2 20 sheets 20 sheets 15 sheets --- 2 Precautions for installation and use 2-16 FS-520 2.8 Specifications Finisher FS-520 Item Description Name FS-520 Finisher type Offset catch tray Output tray Primary (main) and secondary (sub) trays Function Straight delivery (collated, uncollated) Offset delivery (collate and offset, uncollate and offset) Staple delivery (corner staple, 2 staples) Paper Types See page 2-14 for details. Paper Sizes See page 2-14 for details. Paper tray capacity See page 2-14 for details. Maximum power consumption 80 W or less Dimensions 424 (674.5 when primary (main) tray is attached/ 790.5 when the tray is pulled out) (W) e 656 (D) e 990 (H) mm Weight Approx. 60 kg 3 Copying operations Copying operations 3 FS-520 3-3 3 Copying operations 3.1 Using Finisher FS-520 The Finisher FS-520 has a primary (main) tray and a secondary (sub) tray, each of which has the following output modes. Output to the primary (main) tray Combined with the output modes above except staple mode, you can also choose to output face up or face down, and output front to back or back to front. Example: Make 3 copied sets from 4 original sheets Mode Description Non-sort Non-sort mode simply means that the offset-stacker finisher modes are not selected. Copies will be stacked upon exit without being offset by sorted sets. Collate Collate mode outputs multiple copies of the original set, having each sorted set offset by 30mm upon exit Uncollate Uncollate mode groups together multiple copies of each original and offsets the sets by 30mm upon exit. Staple Staple mode offsets and staples each sorted set. Non-sort Staple Collated Uncollated 1 oblique staple Offset by 30mm Offset by 30mm 2 staples 3 Copying operations 3-4 FS-520 Output to the secondary (sub) tray Combined with the output modes above, you can also choose to output face up or face down, and output front to back or back to front. Example: Make 3 copied sets Mode Description Collate Collate mode outputs multiple copies of the original set. No offset output is available. Uncollate Uncollate mode groups together multiple copies of each original. No offset output is available. Face down collated Face down uncollated Face up collated Face up uncollated Copying operations 3 FS-520 3-5 3.1.1 Non-sort/collate/uncollate output to the primary (main) tray A machine with Finisher FS-520 installed is set to collate output to the primary (main) tray by default, regardless of whether or not to be equipped with other optional devices. Please select an output mode by following the procedures below. ! Detail You can change the initial output mode in the Utility setting. For details, see ineo+ 6500 User manual. For detailed specifications, see "Paper information" on page 2-14 and "Specifications" on page 2-16. 1 Position the original. 2 Touch [Output Appli.] on the Copy Screen. The Output Application Screen will be displayed. Output tray positions are indicated as square marks on the front image of the machine, and the tray mark currently selected appears highlighted. If the primary (main) tray is not selected, touch [Output Tray] to select it. 3 Select the desired output mode. – For Non-sort output, cancel both [Collate] and [Uncollate]. – For Collate output, touch [Collate] to highlight it. – For Uncollate output, touch [Uncollate] to highlight it. – Select output face (Face Down/Face Up), and output order (1 to N/N to 1) as needed. 3 Copying operations 3-6 FS-520 4 Touch [OK] on the Output Application Screen. The specified output mode icon will be displayed on the Copy Screen. 2 Reminder The primary (main) tray gradually goes down while printed materials are output. DO NOT allow any object to interfere with the operation of the tray on the left side of the finisher, as any interference may cause damage to the finisher. Be careful not to exceed the finisher tray capacity when selecting the print quantity, otherwise unexpected trouble may be caused. Copying operations 3 FS-520 3-7 3.1.2 Stapling output to the primary (main) tray Copies will be stapled in this mode. Follow the procedure below to select the stapling position and number of staples: Top Left/ Top Right (Corner Staple), Left/Top/Right (2 Position Staple). ! Detail For detailed specifications, see "Paper information" on page 2-14 and "Specifications" on page 2-16. 1 Position the original. 2 Touch [Staple] on the Copy Screen. – Stapled sheets will be delivered to the primary (main) tray. The Output Application icon shows the stapling position currently selected. If you want to change the stapling position, proceed to the following steps. 3 Touch [Output Appli.] on the Copy Screen. The Output Application Screen will be displayed. 3 Copying operations 3-8 FS-520 4 Touch [Staple] to select the stapling position. The Staple Setting Screen will be displayed. 5 Touch the desired stapling position key to select it. 6 Touch [OK]. – To restore the previous setting, touch [Cancel]. – To release the Staple function with the current stapling position setting remained, touch [Function Off]. The Output Application Screen will be restored. 7 Touch [OK] on the Output Application Screen. The specified output mode icon will be displayed on the Copy Screen. Copying operations 3 FS-520 3-9 2 Reminder The primary (main) tray gradually goes down while printed materials are output. DO NOT allow any object to interfere with the operation of the tray on the left side of the finisher, as any interference may cause damage to the finisher. Be careful not to exceed the finisher tray capacity when selecting the print quantity, otherwise unexpected trouble may be caused. 3 Copying operations 3-10 FS-520 3.1.3 Collate/uncollate output to the secondary (sub) tray A machine with Finisher FS-520 installed is set to Collate output to the primary (main) tray by default, regardless of whether or not to be equipped with other optional devices. Change the output tray and select the desired output mode by following the procedure below. ! Detail For detailed specifications, see "Paper information" on page 2-14 and "Specifications" on page 2-16. 1 Position the original. 2 Touch [Output Appli.] on the Copy Screen. The Output Application Screen will be displayed. 3 Select the secondary (sub) tray as the output tray. – Touch [Output Tray] to display the Output Tray Selection Screen. Copying operations 3 FS-520 3-11 – Touch the tray position key of the secondary (sub) tray to highlight it, then touch [OK]. 4 Select the desired output mode. – For Collate output, touch [Collate] to highlight it. – For Uncollate output, touch [Uncollate] to highlight it. – Select output face (Face Down/Face Up), and output order (1 to N/N to 1) as needed. 5 Touch [OK] on the Output Application Screen. The specified output mode icon will be displayed on the Copy Screen. 2 Reminder Be careful not to exceed the finisher tray capacity when selecting the print quantity, otherwise unexpected trouble may be caused. 3 Copying operations 3-12 FS-520 3.1.4 Punching file holes in copies (Punch) The Finisher FS-520 with Punch kit PK-512/PK-513 installed can punch file holes in output copies. 2 Reminder Do not punch special paper type such as labels, tracing paper, etc. Otherwise, machine trouble may occur. Be sure that the side guide plates of the paper tray are securely aligned to the paper; otherwise the copies may not be punched in position. ! Detail For detailed specifications, see "Paper information" on page 2-14 and "Specifications" on page 2-16. 80 mm 80 mm 70 mm 21 mm 21 mm Copying operations 3 FS-520 3-13 1 Position the original. 2 Touch [Punch] on the Copy Screen. – Punched sheets will be delivered to the primary (main) tray. The Output Application icon shows the number of punch holes and punch position currently selected. If you want to change the number of punch holes and punch position, proceed to the following steps. 3 Touch [Output Appli.] on the Copy Screen. The Output Application Screen will be displayed. 4 Touch [Hole-Punch]. The Hole-Punch Screen will be displayed. 3 Copying operations 3-14 FS-520 5 Touch the desired punch key to select it. 6 Touch [OK]. – To restore the previous setting, touch [Cancel]. – To release the Punch function with the current number of punch holes and punch position setting remained, touch [Function Off]. The Output Application Screen will be restored. 7 Touch [OK] on the Output Application Screen. The specified output mode icon will be displayed on the Copy Screen. 2 Reminder Be careful not to exceed the finisher tray capacity when selecting the print quantity, otherwise unexpected trouble may be caused. Copying operations 3 FS-520 3-15 3.2 Cover sheet feeding (paper inserter) The Finisher FS-520 with Paper inserter PI-502 installed can attach cover sheets to output copies. Using Insert Sheet function, cover sheets loaded in the upper and lower trays of the paper inserter will be attached as a front cover and/or back cover or insertion sheet to output copies, and also using Staple mode, a covered and stapled book can be made. Cover sheet Copied set with covers and insertions Copied set with cover attached in staple mode attached 3 Copying operations 3-16 FS-520 0 Upper/Lower tray capacity: 200 sheets ( paper) or within 30 mm thick each 0 Use ADF. 0 The cover paper size should be the same as copy paper size. 0 Cover paper loaded in the paper inserter cannot be copied. 1 Load cover paper into the upper and lower trays of the paper inserter. 2 Use Insert Sheet function to attach covers to the output copies. Upper tray Lower tray Copying operations 3 FS-520 3-17 3.3 Using Finisher FS-520 manually The Finisher FS-520 with Paper inserter PI-502 installed can be operated manually, using the operation panel provided on the paper inserter. Place a set of paper into the lower tray. Upper tray cannot be used. Available finishing modes according to the optional configuration are described below. - Finisher FS-520 + Paper inserter PI-502 – Staple (1 staple/2 staples) - Finisher FS-520 + Paper inserter PI-502 + Punch kit PK-512/PK-513 – Staple (1 staple/2 staples) – Punch 0 Paper should be placed only in the lower tray of the paper inserter. Upper tray cannot be used. 0 Staple (1 staple/2 staples) and Punch can be used in combination. Start/Stop button 1 oblique staple 2 parallel staples Punch 3 Copying operations 3-18 FS-520 1 Place a set of paper in the lower tray of the paper inserter. – Staple (1 staple/2 staples): Place paper face UP. – Punch: Place paper face UP. – Align the guide plate with the paper. 2 Press Staple mode selection button and Punch button to select the desired mode. – To select Staple (1 staple/2 staples), press Staple mode selection button to turn on the desired mode lamp. – To select Punch, press Punch button to turn on the lamp. To use Staple in combination, turn on the desired Staple mode lamp. To select only the Punch mode, turn off all the other mode lamps. 3 Press Start/Stop button. ? Do you want to stop the output operation? % Press Start/Stop button on the operation panel of paper inserter. Lower tray Staple mode selection button Punch button Start/Stop button 4 Finisher adjustment (FS-520) outlines Finisher adjustment (FS-520) outlines 4 FS-520 4-3 4 Finisher adjustment (FS-520) outlines Use this function to make the following the fine adjustments on Finisher FS-520. For details, see ineo+ 6500 User manual. ! Detail The target adjustment items vary depending upon the configuration of installed options. 03 Punch Adjustment/01 Vertical Position Adj. % Perform this adjustment for the center position of punch holes operated by the Punch Kit PK-512/PK-513. 03 Punch Adjustment/02 Horizontal Position Adj, % Perform this adjustment for the position of punch holes in the feeding direction operated by the Punch Kit PK-512/PK-513. 03 Punch Adjustment/03 Registration Adjustment % Perform this adjustment for the skew of the punch position made by the Punch Kit PK-512/PK-513 in duplex copying or cover sheet feeding using the paper inserter. 03 Punch Adjustment/04 Paper Edge Detect Sensor Adj. % Perform this adjustment to detect the paper edge to be used as reference point of punching operation. 06 Paper Inserter Tray Size Adj. % Perform the size adjustment for the Upper tray and Lower tray of the Paper Inserter PI-502. 07 Output Quantity Limit % Specify the output quantity limit of stapled sets. 08 Curl Adjustment % This adjustment can be used to adjust the compression fixing amount of paper exit decurler roller if any crease appears in printed sheets output from FS-520. 4 Finisher adjustment (FS-520) outlines IC-601 ColorCentro (IC-601) ColorCentro (IC-601) Contents-1 Contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome .......................................................................................................................................... 1-2 1.1.1 Composition of User's Guide............................................................................................................. 1-2 1.1.2 User's Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.2 Conventions used in this manual .................................................................................................. 1-4 1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual ............................................................................................................. 1-4 1.2.2 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-5 2 Overview of the Color Centro 2.1 Color Centro .................................................................................................................................... 2-2 2.1.1 Roles of Color Centro ........................................................................................................................ 2-2 2.2 Control Panel Layout ...................................................................................................................... 2-4 2.3 Operating environment................................................................................................................... 2-6 2.3.1 Connectable computers and operating system................................................................................. 2-6 2.3.2 Interfaces used for connection .......................................................................................................... 2-6 2.4 Setup procedure ............................................................................................................................. 2-8 3 Precautions for Installation 3.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 3-2 3.2 Installer ............................................................................................................................................ 3-2 3.2.1 Operating environment of the installer............................................................................................... 3-2 3.2.2 Settings of this machine .................................................................................................................... 3-2 4 Installation of Color Centro 4.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 4-2 4.2 Installing Color Centro ................................................................................................................... 4-2 5 Basic Information 5.1 Launch Color Centro ...................................................................................................................... 5-2 5.1.1 Login .................................................................................................................................................. 5-2 5.2 Screens of Color Centro................................................................................................................. 5-4 5.2.1 [Launcher] screen............................................................................................................................... 5-4 5.2.2 Function Screens ............................................................................................................................... 5-5 5.3 Exit from Color Centro.................................................................................................................... 5-9 6 How to Use Color Centro 6.1 Color Setting of the Main Body...................................................................................................... 6-2 6.1.1 Color Settings .................................................................................................................................... 6-2 6.2 Daily Management .......................................................................................................................... 6-3 6.2.1 Calibration on Color Centro ............................................................................................................... 6-3 6.3 Adjustment for individual Hues...................................................................................................... 6-4 6.3.1 Tone Curve Adjustment ..................................................................................................................... 6-4 6.3.2 Spot Color.......................................................................................................................................... 6-4 6.3.3 Alternative Color ................................................................................................................................ 6-4 6.4 Color Setting Workflows by Color Centro .................................................................................... 6-5 6.4.1 Color Settings by using Default Profile .............................................................................................. 6-5 6.4.2 Color Settings by using the Color Configuration Management Function .......................................... 6-5 ColorCentro (IC-601) Contents-2 6.4.3 Color Settings by using Functions of both Profile Management and Color Default Settings............ 6-6 7 Calibration 7.1 Outline of Calibration...................................................................................................................... 7-2 7.1.1 [Calibration] screen ............................................................................................................................ 7-2 7.1.2 Menu of [Calibration] screen.............................................................................................................. 7-3 7.1.3 Basic operation of [Calibration] screen.............................................................................................. 7-3 7.2 Select the Calibration Method ....................................................................................................... 7-5 7.3 Select the Instrument ..................................................................................................................... 7-6 7.4 Print the Chart ................................................................................................................................. 7-7 7.5 Chart Measurement ........................................................................................................................ 7-8 7.6 Remeasurement.............................................................................................................................. 7-9 7.7 Confirm Measurement Result...................................................................................................... 7-10 7.8 Register the Calibration Data ...................................................................................................... 7-12 7.9 Reset the Calibration Data........................................................................................................... 7-13 8 Tone Curve Adjustment 8.1 Outline of Tone Curve Adjustment ................................................................................................ 8-2 8.1.1 [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen........................................................................................................ 8-2 8.1.2 Menu of [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen ......................................................................................... 8-4 8.1.3 Basic operation of [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen ......................................................................... 8-5 8.2 Select Sample Image...................................................................................................................... 8-6 8.2.1 [Sample Picture] screen..................................................................................................................... 8-6 8.2.2 Menu of [Sample Picture] screen....................................................................................................... 8-7 8.2.3 Select Sample Image......................................................................................................................... 8-7 8.3 Confirm Sample Image................................................................................................................... 8-8 8.4 Load the Tone Curve ...................................................................................................................... 8-9 8.4.1 [Tone Curve Management] screen..................................................................................................... 8-9 8.4.2 Menu of [Tone Curve Management] screen..................................................................................... 8-10 8.4.3 Load the Tone Curve ....................................................................................................................... 8-11 8.5 Create the New Tone Curve......................................................................................................... 8-12 8.6 Adjust the Brightness/Contrast ................................................................................................... 8-13 8.6.1 [Brightness/Contrast] tab................................................................................................................. 8-13 8.6.2 Brightness/Contrast Adjustment...................................................................................................... 8-14 8.7 Adjust the Each Color................................................................................................................... 8-15 8.7.1 [Adjust Each Color] tab .................................................................................................................... 8-15 8.7.2 Basic operation of [Adjust Each Color] tab...................................................................................... 8-16 8.8 Confirmation Print......................................................................................................................... 8-18 8.9 Save the Tone Curve..................................................................................................................... 8-19 8.10 Tone Curve Management............................................................................................................. 8-20 8.11 Reset the Tone Curve ................................................................................................................... 8-23 9 Spot Color 9.1 Outline of Spot Color ...................................................................................................................... 9-2 9.1.1 [Spot Color] screen ............................................................................................................................ 9-2 9.1.2 Menu of [Spot Color] screen.............................................................................................................. 9-3 9.1.3 Basic Operation of [Spot Color] screen ............................................................................................. 9-4 9.2 Load the Spot Color Table ............................................................................................................. 9-5 9.2.1 [Spot Color Table Management] screen ............................................................................................ 9-5 9.2.2 Menu of [Spot Color Table Management] screen.............................................................................. 9-6 9.2.3 Load the Spot Color Table................................................................................................................. 9-7 9.3 Create the New Spot Color Table.................................................................................................. 9-8 9.4 Select the Spot Color / Add the New Spot Color ......................................................................... 9-9 9.5 Adjust the Spot Color Manually................................................................................................... 9-10 ColorCentro (IC-601) Contents-3 9.6 Adjustment of Spot Color with the Printed Chart ...................................................................... 9-11 9.7 Save the Spot Color Table............................................................................................................ 9-13 9.8 Change the Priority of the Spot Color Table .............................................................................. 9-14 9.9 Spot Color Table Management.................................................................................................... 9-15 9.10 Spot Color Table Management.................................................................................................... 9-19 9.11 Initialize the Spot Color Screen ................................................................................................... 9-21 10 Alternative Color 10.1 Outline of Alternative Color.......................................................................................................... 10-2 10.1.1 [Alternative Color Management] screen........................................................................................... 10-2 10.1.2 Menu of [Alternative Color Management] screen ............................................................................ 10-4 10.1.3 Basic Operation of [Alternative Color Management] screen............................................................ 10-4 10.2 Select the Alternative Color / Add the New Alternative Color .................................................. 10-5 10.3 Adjust the Input Color................................................................................................................... 10-7 10.4 Adjust the Output Color................................................................................................................ 10-8 10.5 Change the Priority of the Alternative Color ............................................................................ 10-11 10.6 Register the Alternative Color ................................................................................................... 10-12 10.7 Alternative Color Management.................................................................................................. 10-13 11 Profile Management 11.1 Outline of Profile Management.................................................................................................... 11-2 11.1.1 [Profile Management] screen ........................................................................................................... 11-2 11.1.2 Menu of [Profile Management] screen ............................................................................................. 11-4 11.2 RGB Source Profile Management ............................................................................................... 11-5 11.2.1 Copy from the Image Controller ...................................................................................................... 11-5 11.2.2 Delete............................................................................................................................................... 11-5 11.2.3 Change the Information ................................................................................................................... 11-6 11.2.4 Export from the Image Controller .................................................................................................... 11-7 11.2.5 Import (Register) to the Image Controller ........................................................................................ 11-8 11.3 CMYK Target Profile Management ............................................................................................. 11-9 11.3.1 Copy from the Image Controller ...................................................................................................... 11-9 11.3.2 Delete............................................................................................................................................... 11-9 11.3.3 Change the Information ................................................................................................................. 11-10 11.3.4 Export from the Image Controller .................................................................................................. 11-11 11.3.5 Import (Register) to the Image Controller ...................................................................................... 11-12 11.4 Create the CMYK Target Profile ................................................................................................ 11-13 11.4.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler ......................................................................................................... 11-13 11.4.2 Set the Profile Name and the Destination...................................................................................... 11-14 11.4.3 Select the Measurement Method................................................................................................... 11-15 11.4.4 Chart Measurement ....................................................................................................................... 11-16 11.4.5 Select UCR/GCR Setting ............................................................................................................... 11-17 11.4.6 Enter the Comment........................................................................................................................ 11-18 11.4.7 Confirm and Complete the Profile ................................................................................................. 11-19 11.5 Printer Profile Management ....................................................................................................... 11-20 11.5.1 Copy from the Image Controller .................................................................................................... 11-20 11.5.2 Delete............................................................................................................................................. 11-21 11.5.3 Change the Information ................................................................................................................. 11-22 11.5.4 Export from the Image Controller .................................................................................................. 11-23 11.5.5 Import (Register) to the Image Controller ...................................................................................... 11-24 11.6 Create the Printer Profile ........................................................................................................... 11-25 11.6.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler ......................................................................................................... 11-26 11.6.2 Set the Profile Name and the Destination...................................................................................... 11-26 11.6.3 Select Measurement Method / Paper Setting................................................................................ 11-27 11.6.4 Chart Measurement ....................................................................................................................... 11-28 ColorCentro (IC-601) Contents-4 11.6.5 Select UCR/GCR Setting ............................................................................................................... 11-30 11.6.6 Enter the Comment........................................................................................................................ 11-30 11.6.7 Confirm and Complete the Profile ................................................................................................. 11-31 11.7 RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile Management ......................................................................... 11-32 11.7.1 Copy from the Image Controller .................................................................................................... 11-32 11.7.2 Delete............................................................................................................................................. 11-32 11.7.3 Change the Information ................................................................................................................. 11-33 11.7.4 Export from the Image Controller .................................................................................................. 11-34 11.7.5 Import (Register) to the Image Controller ...................................................................................... 11-34 11.8 Create the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile.............................................................................. 11-36 11.8.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler ......................................................................................................... 11-36 11.8.2 Set the Profile Name and the Destination...................................................................................... 11-37 11.8.3 Determine the Profiles.................................................................................................................... 11-38 11.8.4 Customize the Color Conversions ................................................................................................. 11-40 11.8.5 Enter the Comment........................................................................................................................ 11-41 11.8.6 Confirm and Complete the Profile ................................................................................................. 11-42 11.9 Edit the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile................................................................................... 11-43 11.9.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler ......................................................................................................... 11-43 11.9.2 Set the Profile Name and the Destination...................................................................................... 11-44 11.9.3 Adjust the Point Color / Profile Curve............................................................................................ 11-45 11.9.4 Complete the Profile ...................................................................................................................... 11-49 11.10 CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile Management ...................................................................... 11-50 11.10.1 Copy from the Image Controller .................................................................................................... 11-50 11.10.2 Delete............................................................................................................................................. 11-50 11.10.3 Change the Information ................................................................................................................. 11-51 11.10.4 Export from the Image Controller .................................................................................................. 11-52 11.10.5 Import (Register) to the Image Controller ...................................................................................... 11-52 11.11 Create the CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile........................................................................... 11-54 11.11.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler ......................................................................................................... 11-54 11.11.2 Set the Profile Name and the Destination...................................................................................... 11-55 11.11.3 Determine the Profiles.................................................................................................................... 11-56 11.11.4 Customize the Color Conversions ................................................................................................. 11-58 11.11.5 Enter the Comment........................................................................................................................ 11-59 11.11.6 Confirm the Calculation Result ...................................................................................................... 11-60 11.11.7 Select the Task .............................................................................................................................. 11-60 11.11.8 Execute the Measurement Feedback ............................................................................................ 11-61 11.11.9 Complete the Profile ...................................................................................................................... 11-64 11.12 Edit the CMYK -CMYK Device Link Profile............................................................................... 11-65 11.12.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler and Select the Task ........................................................................ 11-65 11.12.2 Confirm the Procedure................................................................................................................... 11-66 11.12.3 Set the Profile Name and the Destination...................................................................................... 11-67 11.12.4 Execute the Measurement Feedback ............................................................................................ 11-68 11.12.5 Adjust the Point Color / Profile Curve............................................................................................ 11-68 11.12.6 Complete the Profile ...................................................................................................................... 11-73 12 Color Default Settings 12.1 Outline of Color Default Settings................................................................................................. 12-2 12.1.1 [Color Default Settings] screen ........................................................................................................ 12-2 12.1.2 Menu of [Color Default Settings] screen .......................................................................................... 12-5 12.1.3 Basic operation of [Color Default Settings] screen.......................................................................... 12-5 12.2 Confirm the name of Default Color Configuration..................................................................... 12-6 12.3 Default Manual Settings ............................................................................................................... 12-7 12.3.1 Set the Default Settings of the RGB-CMYK Conversion ................................................................. 12-7 12.3.2 Set the Default Settings of the CMYK-CMYK Conversion .............................................................. 12-7 12.3.3 Set the Other Default Settings ......................................................................................................... 12-7 ColorCentro (IC-601) Contents-5 12.4 Set Color Verification.................................................................................................................... 12-9 12.5 Return to Factory Default........................................................................................................... 12-10 12.6 Color Default Settings ................................................................................................................ 12-11 13 Color Configuration Management 13.1 Outline of Color Configuration Management ............................................................................. 13-2 13.1.1 Outline of Profile Set ........................................................................................................................ 13-2 13.1.2 Outline of Color Configuration ......................................................................................................... 13-2 13.1.3 [Color Configuration Management] screen...................................................................................... 13-3 13.1.4 Menu of [Color Configuration Management] screen........................................................................ 13-6 13.2 Create the new Color Configuration ........................................................................................... 13-7 13.2.1 Set the Name of Color Configuration............................................................................................... 13-7 13.2.2 Select the Profile Set ....................................................................................................................... 13-7 13.2.3 Set the Default Profile Set Setting / Paper Type Default Setting. .................................................... 13-7 13.2.4 Set the Color Conversion Option..................................................................................................... 13-8 13.2.5 Register the Color Configuration ..................................................................................................... 13-9 13.3 Edit the Color Configuration ...................................................................................................... 13-10 13.4 Color Configuration Management............................................................................................. 13-11 13.4.1 Change the Default Color Configuration........................................................................................ 13-11 13.4.2 Copy the Color Configuration ........................................................................................................ 13-11 13.4.3 Delete the Color Configuration ...................................................................................................... 13-11 13.4.4 Import (Register) / Export the Color Configuration ........................................................................ 13-12 13.4.5 Reset the Default Color Configuration ........................................................................................... 13-13 13.5 Create the Profile Set ................................................................................................................. 13-14 13.5.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler ......................................................................................................... 13-15 13.5.2 Specify the Profile Set Name......................................................................................................... 13-15 13.5.3 Determine the Profiles.................................................................................................................... 13-16 13.5.4 Customize the Color Conversions ................................................................................................. 13-17 13.5.5 Enter the Comment........................................................................................................................ 13-19 13.5.6 Confirm the Calculation Result ...................................................................................................... 13-19 13.5.7 Select the Task .............................................................................................................................. 13-20 13.5.8 Execute the Measurement Feedback ............................................................................................ 13-20 13.5.9 Complete the Profile Set ................................................................................................................ 13-21 13.6 Edit the Component Profile of Profile Set................................................................................. 13-22 13.6.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler ......................................................................................................... 13-23 13.6.2 Set the Profile Set Name and the Destination ............................................................................... 13-24 13.6.3 Determine the Profiles.................................................................................................................... 13-25 13.6.4 Recalculate Profile Set................................................................................................................... 13-26 13.6.5 Customize the Color Conversions ................................................................................................. 13-26 13.6.6 Enter the Comment........................................................................................................................ 13-28 13.6.7 Confirm and Complete the Profile ................................................................................................. 13-29 13.7 Improve the Accuracy of the Profile Set................................................................................... 13-30 13.7.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler ......................................................................................................... 13-30 13.7.2 Set the Profile Set Name and the Destination ............................................................................... 13-31 13.7.3 Execute the Measurement Feedback ............................................................................................ 13-32 13.7.4 Complete the Profile Set ................................................................................................................ 13-35 13.8 Adjust the Color Conversions of Profile Set............................................................................. 13-36 13.8.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler ......................................................................................................... 13-36 13.8.2 Set the Profile Set Name and the Destination ............................................................................... 13-37 13.8.3 Adjust the Point Color / Profile Curve............................................................................................ 13-38 13.8.4 Complete the Profile Set ................................................................................................................ 13-42 13.9 Profile Set Management............................................................................................................. 13-43 13.9.1 Export Profiles................................................................................................................................ 13-43 13.9.2 Copy the Profile Set ....................................................................................................................... 13-44 13.9.3 Delete............................................................................................................................................. 13-45 ColorCentro (IC-601) Contents-6 13.9.4 Refresh the List (Reload)................................................................................................................ 13-46 13.9.5 Confirm the Detail Info ................................................................................................................... 13-46 13.9.6 Change the Profile Set Information................................................................................................ 13-47 13.9.7 Export the Profile Set ..................................................................................................................... 13-48 13.10 Environmental Setting ................................................................................................................ 13-49 14 Other Functions 14.1 Re-login on Connection Switching.............................................................................................. 14-2 14.2 List Operation................................................................................................................................ 14-3 14.2.1 Sorting by List Item.......................................................................................................................... 14-3 14.2.2 Move of Row.................................................................................................................................... 14-3 14.2.3 Display/Non-Display List Item.......................................................................................................... 14-3 14.3 Print Set Up Information............................................................................................................... 14-4 14.4 Suspend and Restart .................................................................................................................... 14-5 14.4.1 Suspend the Operation.................................................................................................................... 14-5 14.4.2 Restart the Suspended Operation ................................................................................................... 14-5 15 Troubleshooting 15.1 Cannot start Color Centro............................................................................................................ 15-2 15.2 Cannot Adjust Color ..................................................................................................................... 15-3 16 Appendix 16.1 Glossary ......................................................................................................................................... 16-2 16.2 Index............................................................................................................................................... 16-6 1 Introduction ColorCentro (IC-601) 1-2 1.1 Welcome 1 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome Thank you for purchasing this machine. This User's Guide describes the functions, operating instructions, precautions for correct operation, and simple troubleshooting guidelines of this machine. In order to obtain maximum performance from this product and use it effectively, please read this User's Guide as necessary. 1.1.1 Composition of User's Guide Printed manual Overview [Operation Quick Guide] This guide mainly describes how to use frequently used functions. Please refer to this guide for quick comprehension of various features available on the machine. [Safety Information] This guide describes trademarks, licenses and copyrights concerning this machine. It also provides precautions and requests that should be followed to ensure safe usage of this machine. Please be sure to read this guide before using the machine. User's guide CD manuals Overview [User's Guide - Copier] This guide describes an outline of the machine and copy operations. • Configuration and specifications of the main body and options • Turning on/off the machine • Paper information • Making a basic copy and setting procedures • Supplies, disposals, and handling of output paper • Quality adjustments • Applications, output settings, and job list • Troubleshooting [User's Guide - POD Administrator's Reference] This guide provides you with detailed information on machine management and how to customize the machine according to your daily use. • Both Sides Adjustment, Curl Adjustment • Controller settings • Adjustment, Utility Menu Screen • Network settings, PageScope Web Connection • Web Utilities [User's Guide - Printer (IC-601)] This guide describes the setting of the printer driver and utility tool. • Adobe PS driver • PostScript3 Plug-in driver • Web Connection [User's Guide - ColorCentro (IC-601)] This guide describes the management of color when using IC-601 image controller. • Calibration • Tone Curve Adjustment • Adjusting spot color • Setting alternative color • Profile Management • Setting color defaults • Managing color configuration ColorCentro (IC-601) 1-3 1.1 Welcome 1 1.1.2 User's Guide This User's Guide is intended for users ranging from those using this machine for the first time to administrators. It describes basic operations, functions that enable more convenient operations, maintenance procedures, simple troubleshooting operations, and various setting methods of this machine. Note that basic technical knowledge about the product is required to enable users to perform maintenance work or troubleshooting operations. Limit your maintenance and troubleshooting operations to the areas explained in this manual. Should you experience any problems, please contact our service representative. [User's Guide - Network Scanner (IC-306)] This guide describes the operation of the IC-306 network scanner function. • Scan to E-Mail • Scan to HDD • Scan to FTP • Scan to SMB • Scan to Queue [User's Guide - Network Scanner (IC-601)] This guide describes the operation of the IC-601 network scanner function. • Scan to E-Mail • Scan to HDD • Scan to FTP • Scan to SMB [User's Guide - Security] This guide describes the security functions. Please refer to this guide for how to use the Enhanced Security mode, and for detailed machine operation in Enhanced Security mode. User's guide CD manuals Overview ColorCentro (IC-601) 1-4 1.2 Conventions used in this manual 1 1.2 Conventions used in this manual 1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual Symbols are used in this manual to express various types of information. The following describes each symbol related to correct and safe usage of this machine. Safety Information 7 WARNING - This symbol indicates that a failure to heed the instructions may lead to death or serious injury. 7 CAUTION - This symbol indicates that negligence of the instructions may lead to mishandling that may cause injury or property damage. NOTICE This symbol indicates a risk that may result in damage to this machine or originals. Follow the instructions to avoid property damage. Procedural instruction 0 This check symbol indicates that it is a precondition for steps or information that you should be noted before performing the steps. 1 This format number "1" represents the first step. 2 This format number represents the order of serial steps. % This symbol indicates a supplementary explanation of a procedural instruction. % This symbol indicates transition of the control panel to access a desired menu item. % The relevant image is shown. The operation procedures are described using instruction. ColorCentro (IC-601) 1-5 1.2 Conventions used in this manual 1 d Reference This symbol indicates a reference. View the reference as required. Key symbols [ ] Key names on the touch panel or computer screen, or a name of user's guide are indicated by these brackets. Bold text Key names, part names, product names and option names on the Control Panel are indicated in bold text. 1.2.2 Original and paper indications Paper size The following explains the indication for originals and paper described in this manual. When indicating the original or paper size, the Y side represents the width and the X side the length. Paper indication w indicates the paper size with the length (X) being longer than the width (Y). v indicates the paper size with the length (X) being shorter than the width (Y). 2 Overview of the Color Centro ColorCentro (IC-601) 2-2 2.1 Color Centro 2 2 Overview of the Color Centro This chapter describes the overview and connection environment of "Color Centro" that is an attached utility to the image controller to provide the printer function of the main body. 2.1 Color Centro Color Centro is an application which allows you to execute color management of the image controller. For details of the image controller, refer to "User's Guide - Printer (IC-601)". 2.1.1 Roles of Color Centro Color Centro is an application to realize suitable color printing of the main body, which edits and manages some profiles and color tables which are used for translation processes and color adjustment in the image controller. This application enables to use the following 7 functions; Function Description 1 Calibration You can create an adjustment data for the main body by measuring its output condition. 2 Tone Curve Adjustment You can manually adjust the output density against the input density instructions for each color of CMYK. 3 Spot Color You can manually adjust hue of Spot Color (Special color or named color) with the density of CMYK. 4 Alternative Color You can manually adjust the hue of specific RGB or CMYK color with the density of CMYK. You can also select an alternative color from Spot Color. 5 Profile Management You can copy, create, edit, import or export profiles of 5 types. 6 Color Default Settings You can manually set Color Default Settings of RGB, CMYK, and others. You can also confirm the default color configuration. 7 Color Configuration Management You can make and edit Color Configurations or Profile Sets. ColorCentro (IC-601) 2-3 2.1 Color Centro 2 Image Controller Main Body Job RIP Printing Processing Print Out Color Conversions Profile Spot Color Alternative Color Color Adjustments Calibration Tone Curve Adjustment Processing Color Centro + Color Default Settings + Color Configuration Management ColorCentro (IC-601) 2-4 2.2 Control Panel Layout 2 2.2 Control Panel Layout No. Item Description 1 Keypad Enters values for various settings, including print quantity and password. 2 Reset Restores machine to the initial settings. 3 Power LED Lights up in red when the main power switch is turned on, then turns green when the sub power switch is turned on. 4 Data LED Flashes while receiving print data. 5 Interrupt Stops copying/printing/scanning in progress to allow a simple copying job. 6 Stop Ceases the machine operation; deletes the stored memory. 7 Proof Copy Displays the adjustments made on the Quality Adjustment Screen to check. 8 Start Activates various machine operations. 9 Start LED Lights in blue when machine operation is available. It turns orange if any operation cannot be started. 10 C (Clear) Allows change in entered numeric value. 11 Access Sets the machine to allow the operation only when a user/account name and password are entered, if user authentication or account track function is activated. 12 Mode Check Displays settings of the print job in progress or those already set to check. ColorCentro (IC-601) 2-5 2.2 Control Panel Layout 2 7 CAUTION Do not press hard or pointed objects against the touch panel on the control panel. - Otherwise, the glass may be scrached or break and you may be injured. Use fingers to operate the touch panel. 7 CAUTION Stop the operation immediately when the Service Call Screen is displayed and copying cannot be continued any more. - Otherwise, an unexpected trouble may be caused. Write down the report code as stated on the second line of the message, turn off the sub power switch and main power switch in this order, and then disconnect from the power socket. Contact your service representative and inform them of the report code. NOTICE Be sure not to turn off the main power switch in usual operation. Be sure not to turn off the main power switch before turning off the sub power switch. Be sure not to turn off the main power switch while the following messages are displayed after turning off the sub power switch. [Cooling in progress / Power will be off when completed] [Power off in progress / Please do not turn the main power switch off] Turning off the main power switch with these messages displayed may cause serious machine trouble such as toner fixation. d Reference Refer to User's Guide (POD Administrator's Reference) for how to turn off the power. 13 Utility/Counter Displays the Utility Menu Screen and various counters. 14 Mode Memory Registers/Recalls the desired copy settings. Also recalls previous job settings. 15 Accessibility Adjusts the response time in touch panel and control panel key operation. 16 Help Displays the Help Screen that provides information on how to operate the screen currently displayed on the touch panel. Also provides information on various supplies and disposals when pressed with the Machine Screen displayed. 17 Brightness adjustment dial Adjusts the brightness of the touch panel by being turned. 18 Power Save Enables temporary use of the machine when the Power Save LED is lit. Also, activates power-saving mode when pressed while the machine is inactive. 19 Power Save LED Lights when any power-saving mode is activated, or machine power is off due to the timer function. 20 Touch panel Displays various screens to allow the function setting. No. Item Description ColorCentro (IC-601) 2-6 2.3 Operating environment 2 2.3 Operating environment This section describes the system requirements for using Color Centro and the interfaces used for connection. 2.3.1 Connectable computers and operating system Make sure that the computer to be connected meets the following conditions. Windows 2.3.2 Interfaces used for connection To connect Color Centro to the image controller, use the Ethernet via a network connection. It supports 1000Base-T, 100Base-TX, and 10Base-T standards. Connection diagram The printer cables are connected to the Ethernet port of the image controller. Back side of the machine Operating system Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista/Server 2008/7 (including 64 bit version) CPU Intel Pentium4 3GHz or more HDD 3GB or more Memory 1GB or more / Memory capacity as recommended for your operating system Sufficient memory resource is required for your operating system and the applications to be used. Drive CD-ROM drive Display 1024x768 pixels or more ColorCentro (IC-601) 2-7 2.3 Operating environment 2 1. Ethernet port (1000Base-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T) 1 ColorCentro (IC-601) 2-8 2.4 Setup procedure 2 2.4 Setup procedure To use Color Centro, you must complete the setup in advance. The setup refers to a series of procedures for connecting the image controller to the computer and installing Color Centro to the computer. Perform the setup using the following procedures. 1 Connect this machine to the computer. 2 Check that the computer to be used is connected to the network. 3 Specify the IP address of the image controller. 4 Install Color Centro. % Specify the network port for the printer driver according to the connection method or protocol. Reference - When you execute the calibration using the measurement instrument, install the driver of the measurement instrument. After installing, execute the measurement test and confirm that there is no problem on the connection. d Reference For details on the connectable interfaces, refer to page 2-6. For details on the network settings and confirmation of IP address of the image controller, refer to [User's Guide - POD Administrator's Reference]. 3 Precautions for Installation ColorCentro (IC-601) 3-2 3.1 Introduction 3 3 Precautions for Installation The following describes the information necessary to install Color Centro. 3.1 Introduction This chapter describes the information you should keep in mind before installing Color Centro. Before the procedure for installing Color Centro, confirm the operating system of your computer and the network environment. 3.2 Installer You can confirm the Microsoft .Net Framework 2.0, which is necessary for the start of Color Centro, by using this installer. When the Microsoft .Net Framework 2.0 is not installed, the installation screen of the Microsoft .Net Framework 2.0 is displayed at the installation of Color Centro. In this case, install the Microsoft .Net Framework 2.0 following the instruction on the screen. 3.2.1 Operating environment of the installer Reference - Installing the driver to Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista/Server 2008/7-based computers requires the administrator authority. - The installer supports installation in both IPv4/IPv6 environments of Windows Vista/Server 2008//7 only. Note that it does not support [Secure Printing] (IPPS) in Windows Vista/Server 2008/7 and [Internet Printing] (IPP) in the IPv6 environment. 3.2.2 Settings of this machine Before you can use this machine through the network connection, you must configure the network settings for this machine. Operating system Windows 2000 Professional (Service Pack 4 or later) Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 3 or later) Windows Server 2003, Standard Edition (Service Pack 2 or later) Windows Server 2003, Enterprise Edition (Service Pack 2 or later) Windows XP Professional e64 Edition (Service Pack 2 or later) Windows Server 2003, Standard e64 Edition (Service Pack 2 or later) Windows Server 2003, Enterprise e64 Edition (Service Pack 2 or later) Windows Vista Business (Service Pack 2 or later) * Windows Vista Enterprise (Service Pack 2 or later) * Windows Vista Ultimate (Service Pack 2 or later) * Windows Server 2008 Standard (Service Pack 2 or later) * Windows Server 2008 Enterprise (Service Pack 2 or later) * Windows Server 2008 Standard without Hyper-V (Service Pack 2 or later) * Windows Server 2008 Enterprise without Hyper-V(Service Pack 2 or later) * Windows 7 Professional * Windows 7 Enterprise * Windows 7 Ultimate * • * Supports 32-bit (e86)/64-bit (e64) environment. CPU Intel Pentium4 3GHz or more HDD 3GB or more Memory 1GB or more / Memory capacity as recommended for your operating system Sufficient memory resource is required for your operating system and the applications to be used. Display 1024x768 or more ColorCentro (IC-601) 3-3 3.2 Installer 3 TCP/IP Settings for the machine In [TCP/IP Settings] of this machine, specify the IP address. d Reference For details on TCP/IP Settings of this machine, refer to [User's Guide - POD Administrator's Reference]. 4 Installation of Color Centro ColorCentro (IC-601) 4-2 4.1 Introduction 4 4 Installation of Color Centro This chapter describes the procedure for installing Color Centro using the installer. 4.1 Introduction Before installing Color Centro, confirm the description of page 3-2. 4.2 Installing Color Centro 1 Insert the installation CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer. % Make sure that the installer starts, and then go to Step 2. % If the installer does not start, double-click [Setup.exe] on the CD-ROM, and then go to Step 2. % When installing the driver on a Windows Vista/Server 2008/7-based computer, click [Allow] or [Continue] if the [User Account Control] window appears. 2 Select a language, and then click [OK]. 3 Click [Next]. [License Agreement] screen appears. ColorCentro (IC-601) 4-3 4.2 Installing Color Centro 4 4 Confirm the content. When you agree all the terms, click [I accept the terms in the license agreement] and click [Next]. % If you disagree, you will not be able to install the driver. % In the language display box, you can change the language used with the license agreement as required. 5 Select the destination folder and click [Next]. % By default, Color Centro is installed to C:\Program Files\KONICA MINOLTA\Color Centro. % If you want to change the destination folder, click [Change] and select the desired location on the displayed screen and click [OK]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 4-4 4.2 Installing Color Centro 4 6 Click [Install]. 7 Click [Finish]. The installation is complete. % After completing installation, the short cut icon appears on the desktop. 5 Basic Information ColorCentro (IC-601) 5-2 5.1 Launch Color Centro 5 5 Basic Information This chapter describes launch procedure, exit procedure, and screens of Color Centro. 5.1 Launch Color Centro This section describes how to launch Color Centro. To use Color Centro, it is necessary to connect to the image controller. You can not launch Color Centro without connecting to the image controllers. By connecting to the image controller, Color Centro can acquire the information of the main body. You can switch the connection when there are two or more image controllers. 5.1.1 Login To launch Color Centro, login procedure is necessary first. 0 To login, the IP address and the port number are necessary. When the port number is unknown, confirm the JSP settings of the image controller. (default: 30081) 0 Confirm that the image controller can communicate. 0 Color Centro is the Java Application. When the Java application is blocked by the firewall, [Windows Security Alert] screen is displayed. In this case, select the option corresponding to your network environment, and click [Allow access] to allow the communication by Java application on your network. 1 Select [Start] ->[All Programs] -> [KONICA MINOLTA] -> [Color Centro] -> [KONICA MINOLTA Color Centro]. % Or double-click the short cut key on the Desktop screen. [Login] screen and [Launcher] screen appears. % [Launcher] screen is not available until login is completed. 2 Enter the IP address and the port number (30081 - 30090) of the image controller to which you want to connect Color Centro into [Destination] of [Login] screen, and click [OK]. Color Centro launches, and [Launcher] becomes available. % If the IP address is 192.168.0.1 and the port number is 30081, separate the IP address and the port number with a colon, and enter "192.168.0.1:30081". ColorCentro (IC-601) 5-3 5.1 Launch Color Centro 5 % You can select the IP address and the port number which were used before, from [Current Destination]. The input number is kept even after exiting Color Centro. % When you have connected to the image controller already, the IP address and the port number of the image controller you connected are displayed on [Current Destination]. % When you click [Cancel], the login process is canceled and you can't start Color Centro. % When you click [Help], the [Help] screen appears. d Reference For how to operate to switch the image controller, refer to page 14-2. ColorCentro (IC-601) 5-4 5.2 Screens of Color Centro 5 5.2 Screens of Color Centro This section describes the screens of Color Centro. 5.2.1 [Launcher] screen This section describes [Launcher] screen which appears after launching Color Centro. [Launcher] screen is the top screen which displays the screen to use the functions of Color Centro. Menu of [Launcher] screen The menu items of the [Launcher] screen are as follows; Item Description [Calibration] When you click, [Calibration] screen to execute the calibration appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Tone Curve Adjustment] When you click, [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen to adjust the tone curve appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Spot Color] When you click, [Spot Color] screen to adjust the spot color appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Alternative Color] When you click, [Alternative Color] screen to adjust the alternative color appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Profile Management] When you click, [Profile Management] screen to manage the profiles appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Color Default Settings] When you click, [Color Default Settings] screen to set the color default settings appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Color Configuration Management] When you click, [Color Configuration Management] screen to manage the Color Configuration appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. Status bar Displays the IP address and the port number of the image controller connected currently. Menu Menu Items Description [File] [Login] Displays [Login] screen. You can connect to the image controller which is different from the image controller currently connected. [Print Set Up Information] You can print the settings of the image controller currently connected. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-4. [Exit] Closes Color Centro. For how to operate it, refer to page 5-9. ColorCentro (IC-601) 5-5 5.2 Screens of Color Centro 5 5.2.2 Function Screens This section describes the following 7 screens displayed from [Launcher] screen. - [Calibration] screen - [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen - [Spot Color] screen - [Alternative Color] screen - [Profile Management] screen - [Color Default Settings] screen - [Color Configuration Management] screen These screens can be displayed at the same time, but the multiple screens of the same function can't be displayed at the same time. The [Launcher] screen is displayed while these screens are displayed. Every function screen is launched from [Launcher] screen. When you want to close these screens, select [File] menu - [Close], respectively. [Calibration] screen Using this screen, you can execute the calibration of the image controller. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Edit] [Calibration] Displays [Calibration] screen to execute the calibration. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Tone Curve Adjustment] Displays [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen to adjust the tone curve. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Spot Color] Displays [Spot Color] screen to adjust the spot color. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Alternative Color] Displays [Alternative Color] screen to adjust the alternative color. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Color Default Settings] Displays [Color Default Settings] screen to set the color default settings. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Color Configuration Management] Displays [Color Configuration Management] screen to manage the Color Configuration. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Profile Management] Displays [Profile Management] screen to manage the profiles. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Help] [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. [Version] Displays the version of Color Centro. Menu Menu Items Description ColorCentro (IC-601) 5-6 5.2 Screens of Color Centro 5 [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen Using this screen, you can adjust the tone curve processing of the image controller. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Spot Color] screen Using this screen, you can adjust the spot color table and spot color of the image controller. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. ColorCentro (IC-601) 5-7 5.2 Screens of Color Centro 5 [Alternative Color] screen Using this screen, you can adjust the alternative color table of the image controller. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Profile Management] screen Using this screen, you can manage the color profiles. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. ColorCentro (IC-601) 5-8 5.2 Screens of Color Centro 5 [Color Default Settings] screen Using this screen, you can set the color default settings used by the image controller. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. [Color Configuration Management] screen Using this screen, you can manage the combination of profiles of several types as the Profile Set used by the image controller, and you can manage the color settings used by the image controller as the Color Configuration. For how to operate it, refer to page 7-2. ColorCentro (IC-601) 5-9 5.3 Exit from Color Centro 5 5.3 Exit from Color Centro This section describes how to exit from Color Centro. The procedures to exit from Color Centro are as follows; % On [Launcher] screen, select [File] menu - [Exit]. Color Centro is terminated. % Similar operation can be done when you click [x] of the [Launcher] screen. % The connection of the image controller currently connected is terminated. % If function screens launched from [Launcher] screen are under use, the confirmation message appears. In this case, click [OK] if you want to close all the screens. 6 How to Use Color Centro ColorCentro (IC-601) 6-2 6.1 Color Setting of the Main Body 6 6 How to Use Color Centro 6.1 Color Setting of the Main Body For proper use of Color Centro, this section describes the color settings of the main body. The color printing of the main body is processed according to the adjustment which is executed by both of the printer engine and the image controller. The adjustment on the printer engine mainly functions as the outputting adjustment for the paper, but the adjustment on the image controller functions, not only as the adjustment related to the data translation process, but also as the color settings related to the entire system. Color Centro is an application which enables you to execute the color settings for the image controller which functions as mentioned above. 6.1.1 Color Settings Color Centro connects to the image controller and allows you to execute the color settings for the image controller. By using Color Centro, you can execute the color settings on the following 7 screens: - [Calibration] screen - [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen - [Spot Color] screen - [Alternative Color] screen - [Profile Management] screen - [Color Default Settings] screen - [Color Configuration Management] screen In those, the Calibration is the base of various color settings. This is because it measures the output condition of the main body to set the data this becomes the reference value of the entire system for the color printings. It also readjusts the main body, comparing with the reference value. In the following cases, the color settings by use of Color Centro are indispensable; - when the main body is installed - when the paper is changed - when the color management policy is changed (e.g. from sRGB to AdobeRGB etc) To consistently maintain proper color output, daily management is necessary. And, when the special hue is used, the adjustment for individual hue is necessary. For detailed information on daily management, refer to page 6-3. For detailed information on the adjustment for individual hue, refer topage 6-4. ColorCentro (IC-601) 6-3 6.2 Daily Management 6 6.2 Daily Management Daily color management is necessary to consistently maintain proper color output. In the following cases, you should execute the color settings using Color Centro. - 30 minutes after turning on the power of the main body in the morning. - Every time 1000 sheets are output. - The screen settings or paper type have changed. - When it is worried that the change of environment conditions has a bad influence on hue. - Before output whose hue is very important. Especially, you should execute a calibration process at least once a day. We recommend executing any of workflows described on page 6-5 or combination of those for daily management of color settings. 6.2.1 Calibration on Color Centro The calibration is a function to specify the data which become the basis values for the entire system about color printing and also to adjust the basis value. Therefore, calibration is one of the main operations of daily maintenance. There are two methods for calibration of the main body. One is the automatic calibration by the internal sensor of the RU option of the main body. The other is the manual calibration using Color Centro and the instrument. When you print the job in which the color accuracy is important, or you change the paper type, set the reference value of the entire system by calibration. When the RU option isn't installed to the main body, execute the calibration by Color Centro. When it is installed, select the calibration method. In addition, fine adjustment of the reference value is necessary along with the time passage. Determining the necessity of the fine adjustment of the reference value from the view point of the actual printed color, execute the calibration. d Reference For detailed information on how to operate the function, refer to page 7-2. ColorCentro (IC-601) 6-4 6.3 Adjustment for individual Hues 6 6.3 Adjustment for individual Hues Color Centro can execute not only the color settings for the entire system, but also adjustment for individual hues. Color Centro allows you to execute the following adjustments; - The Tone Curve Adjustment: You can adjust the input/output density curve per each color of CMYK. - Spot Color: You can adjust the conversion of special color. - Alternative Color: You can adjust the conversion of alternative color. 6.3.1 Tone Curve Adjustment The Tone Curve Adjustment is adjustment for output density curve of each color of CMYK. This function of Color Centro enables to adjust the brightness and the contrast for the entire image. Operation of adjustment can be done with dragging the slider or the point of curve. You can operate viewing the preview of the adjustment result. d Reference For detailed information on how to operate the function, refer to page 7-2. 6.3.2 Spot Color In the image controller, some spot color tables, "DIC", "CF", and "HKS" are registered at factory shipping. Use of the Spot Color Adjustment function of Color Centro enables to create the new spot color table, duplicate the registered spot color table, and edit it. By this function, to replace the spot color which is specified by the application with CMYK values which Color Centro defines is enabled and the outputting is executed. d Reference For detailed information on how to operate the function, refer to page 7-2. 6.3.3 Alternative Color One alternative color table per color (RGB color/CMYK color) is stored in the image controller. The alternative color table replaces the specific RGB color/CMYK color within job with CMYK color (alternative color). Use of the Color Centro enables to set and adjust the alternative color table in the image controller. Color Centro also enables to select the alternative color from the spot color. By this function, you can adopt the spot color to the alternative color as the processing of the image controller when the spot color can't be specified by the application. d Reference For detailed information on how to operate the function, refer to page 7-2. ColorCentro (IC-601) 6-5 6.4 Color Setting Workflows by Color Centro 6 6.4 Color Setting Workflows by Color Centro This section describes color setting workflows by Color Centro. To consistently maintain proper color output, we recommend to execute any of the following workflows or combination of those for daily management of color settings. 6.4.1 Color Settings by using Default Profile The procedure of the simplest workflow is below: In this workflow, color setting is executed by using the default profile registered into the image controller at factory shipping. 1 Set the default profile. % Use the profile registered into the image controller at factory shipping. If you create a new profile, the measurement instrument is necessary. % The default profile is set by using Color Default Settings function or Color Configuration Management function. % For detailed information of Color Default Setting function, refer to page 7-2. % For detailed information of Color Configuration Management function, refer to page 7-2. 2 Execute the calibration. % When the main body has a scanner part, you can execute the calibration using its scanner part. Unless, prepare the measurement instrument and use it. % For detailed information of Calibration function, refer to page 7-2. 3 Execute the fine adjustment using Tone Curve Adjustment function, Spot Color Adjustment function, Alternative Adjustment function, etc. % For detailed information of Tone Curve Adjustment function, refer to page 7-2. % For detailed information of Spot Color Adjustment function, refer to page 7-2. % For detailed information of Alternative Adjustment function, refer to page 7-2. 4 Repeat above steps as needed. The default color settings which are set on this function are applied to the job without settings by the printer driver and to the direct printing job. 6.4.2 Color Settings by using the Color Configuration Management Function The procedure of a recommended workflow, which makes use of functions of Color Centro efficiently, is below: This workflow needs the measurement instrument. Workflow Description Color Settings by using Default Profile This is the simplest workflow. If you don’t have much knowledge about profile, we recommend to use this workflow. For detailed information, refer to page 6-5. Color Settings by using the Color Configuration Management Function This is a recommended workflow which makes use of functions of Color Centro efficiently. You can execute the proper color settings with an easy procedure. For detailed information, refer to page 6-5. Color Settings by using Functions of both Profile Management and Color Default Settings This is a workflow which is to examine proper setting as setting the individual profile using functions of Color Centro. When you get proper result of the examination, we recommend that you shift to a workflow described in page 6-5 to execute the color settings more efficiently. For detailed information, refer to page 6-6. ColorCentro (IC-601) 6-6 6.4 Color Setting Workflows by Color Centro 6 1 Execute the calibration with the measurement instrument, and register the calibration data into the image controller. % For detailed information on how to select the calibration method, refer topage 7-2. % Here, execute the calibration as the preparation of creation of the profile. When the fine adjustment is necessary along with the time passage, execute the calibration each time. 2 Adjust the color setting of the image controller using a profile set in Color Configuration Management function. % You can create or edit profile, Profile Set and Color Configuration as required. % For detailed information on how to confirm the name of Default Color Configuration, refer topage 7-2. By Using Color Configuration Management function, it is useful that you can create a Profile Set that collects profiles which correspond to each paper type, and Color Configuration which consolidates several Profile Sets. "Select Nearest Profile Set", one of the Color Configuration Management functions, allows to select the Profile Set easily. 6.4.3 Color Settings by using Functions of both Profile Management and Color Default Settings The procedure of a workflow, which is to examine proper setting as setting an individual profile using functions of Color Centro, is below: This workflow needs the measurement instrument. 1 Execute the calibration with the measurement instrument, and register the calibration data into the image controller. % For detailed information of Calibration function, refer to page 7-2. % Here, execute the calibration as the preparation of creation of the profile. When the fine adjustment is necessary along with the time passage, execute the calibration each time. 2 Create necessary profile using Profile Management function. % For detailed information of Profile Management function, refer to page 7-2. 3 Set the default of the color settings of the image controller by selecting created profile in Color Default Setting function. % For detailed information of Color Default Setting function, refer to page 7-2. 4 Repeat above steps as needed. When you repeat the process of both profile creation and default color setting and get proper color settings, you can execute the color settings efficiently by setting the Color Configuration and Profile Set using Color Configuration Management function. We recommend that you shift to a workflow described inpage 6-5 to execute the color settings more efficiently. 7 Calibration ColorCentro (IC-601) 7-2 7.1 Outline of Calibration 7 7 Calibration 7.1 Outline of Calibration Use of the Calibration function of Color Centro enables to print the measuring chart, measure the chart by measuring instrument, create the calibration data, and register the calibration data to the image controller. The image controller can save one calibration data. To maintain consistent color printing, it is necessary to register the adequate calibration data according to the environment and the condition of the main body. Executing adequate calibration increases the stability of color printing of the main body on print job. The calibration is a function to specify the data which become the reference values for the entire system about color printing and also to adjust the reference value. Therefore, calibration is one of the main operations of daily maintenance. 7.1.1 [Calibration] screen The calibration function of Color Centro uses [Calibration] screen. [Calibration] screen appears by clicking [Calibration] button on the [Launcher] screen. To close this screen, select [Close] from [File] menu. The [Calibration] screen is composed as follows; Item Description [Use "Color Density Control" (RU)] When it is checked, it gives priority to the use of the internal sensor of the RU option of the main body for calibration. When you check this, make settings on the main body beforehand. For manual calibration, remove the check mark. [1. Instrument] Select [Scan Calibration], [i1Pro], [i1iSis No Filter], [i1iSis (UV Filter)], or [Spectrolino]. [2. Chart Output] - [Output] Executes chart printing. [3. Chart Measurement] - [Measure] Executes chart measurement. [Display Mode] - [Measurement Result] When [Measurement Result] is checked, the result curve of measurement is displayed on curve view area. When both of [Measurement Result] and [Registered] are checked, both curves appear. When there is no check mark on both, no curve appears. ColorCentro (IC-601) 7-3 7.1 Outline of Calibration 7 List Items The list items of the measurement result list on the [Calibration] screen are as follows; List Operations The list of the [Calibration] screen can be sorted by list item. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-3. 7.1.2 Menu of [Calibration] screen The menu items of the [Calibration] screen are as follows; 7.1.3 Basic operation of [Calibration] screen This section describes basic operation of [Calibration] screen. 1 Select the calibration method. % For detailed information on how to select the calibration method, refer topage 7-5. 2 Select the instrument. % For detailed information on how to select the instrument, refer to page 7-6. 3 Print the measurement chart. % For detailed information on how to print the measurement chart, refer to page 7-7. 4 Execute chart measurement. If necessary, execute remeasurement of chart. % For detailed information on how to execute chart measurement, refer to page 7-8. [Display Mode] - [Registered] When [Registered] is checked, the registered curve in the image controller is displayed on curve view area. When both of [Measurement Result] and [Registered] are checked, both curves appear. When there is no check mark on both, no curve appears. (curve view area) According to settings of [Display Mode], the result curve and/or the registered curve is/are displayed on curve view area. (measurement result list) Displays the measurement result list. [Create] Registers the measurement result in the image controller. [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. Status bar Displays the IP address and the port number of the image controller connected currently. Item Description Item Description [No.] Displays the number of the measurement result list. (measurement date/time) Displays the measurement date/time. Menu Menu Items Description [File] [Login] When you connect another image controller, the [Login] screen appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-2. [Reset] Resets the calibration data in the image controller to the settings of factory shipping. Discards the current measurement result and settings displayed on this screen, and resets the screen. [Close] Closes this screen and exits this function. [Help] [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. [Version] Displays the version of Color Centro. ColorCentro (IC-601) 7-4 7.1 Outline of Calibration 7 % For detailed information on how to execute remeasurement of chart, refer to page 7-9. 5 Confirm the measurement result. % For detailed information on how to confirm the measurement result, refer topage 7-10 6 Register the calibration data. % For detailed information on how to save, refer to page 7-12. 7 If necessary, reset the [Calibration] screen. % For detailed information on how to reset, refer to page 7-13. ColorCentro (IC-601) 7-5 7.2 Select the Calibration Method 7 7.2 Select the Calibration Method There are two methods for calibration of the main body. One is the automatic calibration by the internal sensor of the RU option of the main body. The other is the manual calibration using Color Centro and the instrument. When you print the job in which the color accuracy is important, or you change the paper type, set the reference value of the entire system by calibration. When the RU option isn't installed to the main body, execute the calibration by Color Centro. When it is installed, select the calibration method. In addition, fine adjustment of the reference value is necessary along with the time passage. Determining the necessity of the fine adjustment of the reference value from the view point of the actual printed color, execute the calibration. This section describes how to calibrate using the instrument on Color Centro. Calibration on Color Centro When you use the internal sensor of the RU option of the main body, you can't execute calibration with the instrument because the internal sensor generates calibration data automatically. When you set both of the internal sensor of the RU option of the main body and instrument at the same time, outputting might be different with those you expected. Therefore, set as follows; 1 Set the main body function of the color density control to OFF, and remove the check from [Use "Color Density Control" (RU)] on [Calibration] screen. [1. Instrument] becomes available, and you can execute the calibration with instrument. % At the first display of [Calibration] screen, [Use "Color Density Control" (RU)] is not checked. % The last status of this check mark is succeeded to the next launch of this screen. % Go to the step described on page 7-6. ColorCentro (IC-601) 7-6 7.3 Select the Instrument 7 7.3 Select the Instrument This section describes how to select the instrument for measurement. 0 To use the instrument, you need to install the device driver of the instrument to your computer. 1 From [Calibration] screen - [1. Instrument], select [Scan Calibration], [i1Pro], [i1iSis No Filter], [i1iSis (UV Filter)], or [Spectrolino]. % When you select [Scan Calibration], you can execute the calibration with the scanner of the main body. In this case, [Output], [Measure ], and [Register to controller] are not available. In addition, [Display Mode] becomes [Registered] and you can't change it. % When you have connected to the main body on which the scanner part isn't installed, [Scan Calibration] is not available. % When you use Spectroscan or i1iO, remove the measurement head from its stage. Then, you can use it as [Spectroline] or [i1Pro]. % Go to the step described on page 7-7. ColorCentro (IC-601) 7-7 7.4 Print the Chart 7 7.4 Print the Chart To execute calibration with the instrument, the chart (measurement patch chart) corresponding to the selected instrument is necessary. This section describes how to print the chart. 0 The chart pattern and available paper size differ according to the selected instrument. 1 Click [2. Chart Output] - [Output]. [Print Chart] screen appears. 2 Specify [Paper Tray], [Paper Size], and [Copies]. % According to the instrument, adequate [Paper Size] differs. % When you select [Spectrolino] or [i1Pro] as the instrument, select [A3] or [Tabloid]. % When you select [i1iSis No Filter] or [i1iSis (UV Filter)], select [A3], [A4], [Tabloid] or [Letter]. % Specify the number (from [1] to [5]) in [Copies]. 3 Select [Paper Type] and [Screen Setting]. % For [Paper Type], you can select [Plain Paper], [Fine], [Color Specific], [Coated GL], [Coated ML], [Coated GO], or [Coated MO]. % From [Screen Setting], you can select [Dot1], [Dot2], [Line1], [Line2], or [Stochastic]. 4 Click [Print]. Chart printing is executed. % On the chart, Print Date, Output Number of Sets, and No. are printed. % Go to the step described on page 7-8. ColorCentro (IC-601) 7-8 7.5 Chart Measurement 7 7.5 Chart Measurement This section describes how to measure the printed chart with the selected instrument. 0 According to the selected instrument, measurement operations differ. For detailed information on how to operate, refer to user's guide of each instrument. 0 You can't change the instrument while measuring. 1 Connect the instrument to your computer. 2 Click [3. Chart Measurement] - [Measure]. [Measurement] screen appears. 3 From [Calibration Target], select the paper type. 4 Click [Start]. Measurement starts. After finishing measurement, the result of measurement is displayed in the list, and patches are colored in the preview area. % According to the selected instrument, the operation screen appears. Then, follow the instruction of the screen. % To stop the measurement, click [Stop]. % After acquirement of measurement data, [OK] becomes available. % Before measurement, patches are displayed in gray, but after measurement, patches are displayed in color. % The value of each patch appears in the measurement result list. % When you click a color patch of the preview area, the corresponding line is selected in the measurement result list. On the other hand, when you select the line in the measurement result list, the corresponding color patch is selected in the preview area. 5 Click [OK]. [Measurement] screen closes, and [Calibration] screen appears. The measurement result appears in the list of [Calibration] screen. % When you click [Cancel], the measurement result is discarded and [Measurement] screen is closed to return to [Calibration] screen. % The list of [Calibration] screen displays all measurement results, until the time when [Calibration] screen is closed or reset. % When you execute remeasurement, go to the step described on page 7-9. % When you view the measurement result, go to the step described on page 7-10. ColorCentro (IC-601) 7-9 7.6 Remeasurement 7 7.6 Remeasurement This section describes how to obtain the multiple measurement results with succeeding measurement. 0 According to the selected instrument, measurement operations differ. For detailed information on how to operate, refer to user's guide of each instrument. 0 You can't change the instrument while measuring. 1 Click [3. Chart Measurement] - [Measure]. [Measurement] screen appears. 2 From [Calibration Target], select the paper type. 3 Click [Start]. Measurement starts. % According to the selected instrument, the operation screen appears. Then, follow the instruction of the screen. % To stop the measurement, click [Stop]. % After acquirement of measurement data, [OK] becomes available. % When you click a color patch of the preview area, the corresponding line is selected in the measurement result list. On the other hand, when you select the line in the measurement result list, the corresponding color patch is selected in the preview area. 4 Click [OK]. [Measurement] screen closes, and [Calibration] screen appears. The measurement result selected on [Measurement] screen appears in the list of [Calibration] screen. % The measurement result is added to the list of [Calibration] screen at each remeasurement. % The measurement results can be recorded up to 10 in the list of [Calibration] screen. % At 11th measurement, the first measurement result is discarded. % When you click [Cancel], the measurement result is discarded and [Measurement] screen is closed to return to [Calibration] screen. % The list of [Calibration] screen displays all measurement results, until the time when [Calibration] screen is closed or reset. 5 After measurement, click the line of measurement result to adopt from the list. % Go to the step described on page 7-10. ColorCentro (IC-601) 7-10 7.7 Confirm Measurement Result 7 7.7 Confirm Measurement Result All measurement results appear in the list of [Calibration] screen. The list displays all measurement results, until the time when [Calibration] screen is closed or reset. This section describes how to confirm the measurement result. d Reference For detailed information on how to reset [Calibration] screen, refer to page 7-13. To Confirm the Measurement Result Curve 1 Check [Display Mode] - [Measurement Result]. 2 From the list, select the measurement result of which you want to display curve. The selected measurement result is displayed on the curve view area. % Go to the step described on page 7-12. ColorCentro (IC-601) 7-11 7.7 Confirm Measurement Result 7 To Confirm Registered Curve % Check [Display Mode] - [Registered] when you want to view the registered curve in the image controller. The registered curve in the image controller is displayed on the curve view area. % When both of [Measurement Result] and [Registered] are checked, both curves appear. % When there is no check mark on both of [Measurement Result] and [Registered], no curve appears. % Go to the step described on page 7-12. ColorCentro (IC-601) 7-12 7.8 Register the Calibration Data 7 7.8 Register the Calibration Data The image controller can save one calibration data. The calibration data acquired by measurement can be adopted to the output by registration in the image controller. This section describes how to register the calibration data. 1 From the list of [Calibration] screen, select the measurement result to register. % Measurement results other than the selected one on the [Calibration] screen are discarded when the [Calibration] screen closes. 2 Click [Registration]. Registration in image controller is executed. After completing registration, [Complete] screen appears. % Similar operation can be done when you select [Register] from the right click menu on the selected line. 3 Click [OK]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 7-13 7.9 Reset the Calibration Data 7 7.9 Reset the Calibration Data The list displayed on the [Calibration] screen remains, until the time when [Calibration] screen is closed or reset. This section describes how to reset [Calibration] screen and clear the list of measurement result. 1 From the [File] menu, select [Reset]. The confirmation message appears. 2 Click [OK]. The measurement results are cleared, and the calibration data which was set at factory shipping appears. 8 Tone Curve Adjustment ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-2 8.1 Outline of Tone Curve Adjustment 8 8 Tone Curve Adjustment 8.1 Outline of Tone Curve Adjustment The Tone Curve Adjustment is adjustment for output density curve of each color of CMYK. This function of Color Centro enables to adjust the brightness and the contrast for the entire image. Operation of adjustment can be done with dragging the slider or the point of curve. You can operate viewing the preview of the adjustment result. The tone curve can be registered/saved to both of the image controller and computer. The tone curve registered to the image controller can be adopted to the output. You can specify the tone curve to use as default from among registered tone curves when you use "Color Default Settings" function or "Color Configuration Management" function. You can also specify the tone curve to use from the printer driver for each job. 8.1.1 [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen The tone curve adjustment function of Color Centro uses [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen appears by clicking [Tone Curve Adjustment] button on the [Launcher] screen. To close this screen, select [Close] from [File] menu. [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen is composed as follows; Item Description (sample image name) The name of sample image selected using [Select Sample] appears at the left box of the [Select Sample]. At the first launching of this screen, "Preset [Human]" appears in there. From subsequent launching, the name of sample image selected before appears. [Select Sample] Displays [Sample Picture] screen, and select sample image. (tone curve name) The name of tone curve loaded using [Load Tone Curve] appears at the left box of the [Load Tone Curve]. [Load Tone Curve] Displays [Tone Curve Management] screen, and select the tone curve to load. You can operate to manage the tone curve on [Tone Curve Management] screen. [Before Adjustment] Displays the image before adjustment. [After Adjustment] Displays the image after adjustment. Every adjustment is reflected on the screen immediately. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-3 8.1 Outline of Tone Curve Adjustment 8 [<<], [<], [>], and [>>] When multiple images are included in the Hold job of the image controller selected on [Sample Picture] screen, click the button to display the first image, the previous image, the next image, and the last image. When you select [Hold] on [Sample Picture], these are available. (This function isn't available as of June, 2010) [CCW] Rotates the image by 90 degrees to left. [CW] Rotates the image by 90 degrees to right. [Scale Down] Displays the image shrinked. You can scale down the image size until the whole image appears. [Scale Up] Displays the image enlarged. You can scale up the image size selecting the magnification from among 4 levels which are 2, 4, 8, and 16 times. (curve view area) Reflects the setting of [Brightness/Contrast] tab and [Adjust Each Color] tab. You can adjust the tone curve by adding the point on the curve and moving the added point. (vertical axis box) Displays the output density (%) of the selected point on the curve view area. You can specify the value to move the selected point. (horizontal axis box) Displays the input density (%) of the selected point on the curve view area. You can specify the value to move the selected point. [Brightness/Contrast] tab Displays the sheet to adjust brightness and contrast. For detailed information, refer to page 7-10. [Brightness/Contrast] tab [Reset] Discards the current settings of [Brightness/Contrast] tab, and returns to the last saved settings. [Adjust Each Color] tab Displays the sheet to adjust each color. For detailed information, refer to page 7-12. [Adjust Each Color] tab [Reset] Discards the current settings of [Adjust Each Color] tab, and returns to the last saved settings. [Proof Print] Adopts the setting and execute printing to confirm the result of adjustment. (This function isn't available as of June, 2010) [Save] Saves the result of adjustment. [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. Status bar Displays the IP address and the port number of the image controller connected currently. Item Description ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-4 8.1 Outline of Tone Curve Adjustment 8 8.1.2 Menu of [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen The menu items of the [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen are as follows; Menu Menu Items Description [File] [Login] When you connect another image controller, the [Login] screen appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-2. [New Tone Curve] Creates the new tone curve. [Tone Curve Management] Displays [Tone Curve Management] screen to select the tone curve which you want to load. You can operate to manage the tone curve on [Tone Curve Management] screen. [Select Sample] Displays [Sample Picture] screen to select sample image. [Proof Print] Adopts the setting and execute printing to confirm the result of adjustment. (This function isn't available as of June, 2010) [Close] Closes this screen and exits this function. [View] [Previous Page] It is available when multiple images are included in the job of the image controller selected on [Sample Picture] screen. Displays the image of the previous page. (This function isn't available as of June, 2010) [Next Page] It is available when multiple images are included in the job of the image controller selected on [Sample Picture] screen. Displays the image of the next page. (This function isn't available as of June, 2010) [First Page] It is available when multiple images are included in the job of the image controller selected on [Sample Picture] screen. Displays the image of the first page. (This function isn't available as of June, 2010) [Last Page] It is available when multiple images are included in the job of the image controller selected on [Sample Picture] screen. Displays the image of the last page. (This function isn't available as of June, 2010) [Rotation (Clockwise)] Rotates the image by 90 degrees to right. [Rotation (Counter clockwise)] Rotates the image by 90 degrees to left. [Scale Up] Displays the image enlarged. You can scale up the image size selecting the magnification from among 4 levels which are 2, 4, 8, and 16 times. [Scale Down] Displays the image shrinked. You can scale down the image size until the whole image appears. [Display only before adjustment] Displays only the image of [Before Adjustment] on the screen. [Display only after adjustment] Displays only the image of [After Adjustment] on the screen. [Display before and after the adjustment] Displays both of [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment] on the screen. [Help] [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. [Version] Displays the version of Color Centro. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-5 8.1 Outline of Tone Curve Adjustment 8 8.1.3 Basic operation of [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen This section describes basic operation of [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. 1 Select the sample image to confirm the conditions where the tone curve is adopted. % For detailed information on how to select the sample image, refer to page 7-5. 2 Confirm the sample image displayed at [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment]. % For detailed information on how to confirm the sample image, refer topage 7-7. 3 Load the tone curve to make adjustment. Or, create the new tone curve. % For detailed information on how to load the tone curve, refer topage 7-8. % For detailed information on how to create the tone curve, refer topage 8-12. 4 If necessary, adjust the brightness and the contrast, or set each color adjustment. Or, click on the curve to add the point and drag the added point to adjust the curve. % For detailed information on how to adjust the brightness and the contrast, refer topage 7-10. % For detailed information on how to set each color adjustment, refer topage 7-12. % For detailed information on how to operate the point, refer topage 8-16. 5 Save the adjusted tone curve. % For detailed information on how to save, refer to page 8-19. 6 If necessary, execute some management operations for the tone curve. % For detailed information on how to manage, refer to page 8-20. 7 If necessary, reset the tone curve. % For detailed information on how to reset, refer to page 8-23. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-6 8.2 Select Sample Image 8 8.2 Select Sample Image When you adopt the tone curve to the sample image, you can confirm the conditions of [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment]. You can select the image which was set at factory shipping, as the sample image. This section describes how to select the sample image. The sample image is selected on [Sample Picture] screen. 8.2.1 [Sample Picture] screen The [Sample Picture] screen is composed as follows; Item Description [Preset] Allows you to use the image which was set at factory shipping, as a sample image. [Hold (Cont...)] Allows you to use a hold job in the image controller which is connected currently, as the sample. (This function isn't available as of June, 2010) (list) According to the selection of [Preset] / [Hold (Cont...)], displays either of the list of images which were set at factory shipping or the list of hold jobs of the image controller which is connected currently. (This function isn't available as of June, 2010) (image preview area) Displays the image selected from the list. [<], (input box), [>] When multiple images are included in the Hold job of the image controller, click the button to display the previous image or the next image. Or, displays the image on the preview area when the number of it is entered into the input box. When you select [Hold] on Sample Picture, these are available. (This function isn't available as of June, 2010) [OK] Uses the selected image as the sample image. [Sample Picture] screen is closed to return to [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. Displays the selected image in [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment]. [Cancel] Discards the current settings and closes [Sample Picture] screen to return to [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. Status bar Displays the IP address and the port number of the image controller connected currently. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-7 8.2 Select Sample Image 8 8.2.2 Menu of [Sample Picture] screen The menu items of the [Sample Picture] screen are as follows; 8.2.3 Select Sample Image This section describes how to select the sample image. 1 Click [Select Sample] on the [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. [Sample Picture] screen appears % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Select Sample]. 2 From the list, select the image for use as the sample image. According to the selection, the preview appears. 3 Confirm the image and click [OK]. [Sample Picture] screen is closed to return to [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. The name of the sample image appears on [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen and the specified image is displayed on [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment]. % When you click [Cancel], the current settings are discarded and [Sample Picture] screen is closed to return to [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. % When you confirm the image, go to the step described on page 7-7. Menu Menu Items Description [File] [Login] When you connect another image controller, the [Login] screen appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-2. [Reload] Reloads the information of the image controller connected currently. [Cancel] Discards the current settings, and closes the screen. [Help] [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. [Version] Displays the version of Color Centro. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-8 8.3 Confirm Sample Image 8 8.3 Confirm Sample Image The sample image specified on [Sample Picture] is displayed on [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment] of [Tone Curve Adjustment]. The sample images are enlarged/shrinked automatically to display the whole image in the area of [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment]. At this time, the proportion of height and width isn't changed. This section describes how to confirm the sample image displayed on [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment]. To confirm the image by moving within the preview area % Drag the mouse within the area of [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment]. The preview moves to the direction of dragging within the area of [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment]. % Both preview of [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment] move at the same time. To confirm the image by rotating the preview % Click [CCW] or [CW]. Both preview of [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment] rotate to the specified direction. % When you click additionally, those rotate to the specified direction according to additional click times. At this time, the image isn't enlarged/shrinked. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [CCW] or [CW]. To confirm the image by enlarging/shrinking the preview % Click [Scale Up] or [Scale Down]. Both preview of [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment] are enlarged/shrinked. % []You can scale up the image size selecting the magnification from among 4 levels which are 2, 4, 8, and 16 times. % []You can scale down the image size until the whole image appears. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Scale Up] or [Scale Down]. % Similar operation can be done when you press [+] key or [-] key on the keyboard. To display/hide images of [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment] % Select [File] menu - [Display only before adjustment], [Display only after adjustment], or [Display Both]. According to the selection, [Before Adjustment] and/or [After Adjustment] appear(s). After confirming, when you load the tone curve, go to the step described on page 8-9. When you create the new tone curve, go to the step described on page 8-12. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-9 8.4 Load the Tone Curve 8 8.4 Load the Tone Curve In the image controller, there is the tone curve registered at factory shipping. You can also register the tone curve which you adjusted on [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. Color Centro can load these tone curves and also make adjustment. The tone curve registered at factory shipping in the image controller can't be adjusted and overwritten. When you want to adjust the tone curve registered at factory shipping, load the duplication of it which was made beforehand and adjust the duplication. For detailed information on how to duplicate, refer to page 8-20. This section describes how to load the tone curve. You can select the tone curve to load on [Tone Curve Management] screen. 8.4.1 [Tone Curve Management] screen [Tone Curve Management] screen is composed as follows; Item Description (tree view) Displays the places where the tone curve are saved ([Controller], [Local], and [Network]) in the tree format. (list) According to the selection of the tree view, displays the saved tone curves. [Copy] Makes a duplication of the selected tone curve from the list within [Controller], when [Controller] is selected on the tree view. [Delete] Deletes the tone curve selected from the list. [Reload] Updates the information of the list. [Change Table Information] Changes the table information (Saved Name, Memo) of the tone curve which is selected from the list. [Export]/[Register] Exports the selected tone curve on the list to [Local] / [Network], when [Controller] is selected on the tree view. Registers the tone curve selected on the list to [Controller], when a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view. [Open] Loads the selected tone curve on the list to [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. [Cancel] Closes this screen and exits this function. [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. Status bar Displays the IP address and the port number of the image controller connected currently. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-10 8.4 Load the Tone Curve 8 List Items The list items of the measurement result list on the [Tone Curve Management] screen are as follows; When [Controller] is selected on the tree view, "*" mark is added after the name of the tone curve which was registered at factory shipping. In addition, a red "@" mark is added before the name of the tone curve which was registered at factory shipping. List Operations The list of the [Tone Curve Management] screen can be sorted by list item. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-3. When you display [Tone Curve Management] screen first after launching Color Centro, the list is displayed in ascending order of [Tone Curve Name] (in case of [Controller]), or [File Name] (in case of [Local] or [Network]). 8.4.2 Menu of [Tone Curve Management] screen The menu items of the [Tone Curve Management] screen are as follows; Item Description [File Name] Displays the saved file name of the tone curve when [Local] or [Network] is selected on the tree view. [Tone Curve Name] Displays the tone curve name. [Created Date/Time] Displays the date/time when the new tone curve was created. [Update Date/Time] Displays the date/time when the tone curve was updated. [Memo] Displays the memo which was set to the tone curve. Menu Menu Items Description [File] [Login] When you connect another image controller, the [Login] screen appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-2. [Reload] Updates the information of the list. [Sort] Sorts the content of the list by the selected list item. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-3. [Change Table Information] Changes the table information (Saved Name, Memo) of the torn curve which is selected from the list. [Delete] Deletes the tone curve selected from the list. [Copy] Makes a duplication of the selected tone curve from the list within [Controller], when [Controller] is selected on the tree view. [Export] Exports the selected tone curve on the list to [Local] / [Network], when [Controller] is selected on the tree view. [Create] Registers the tone curve selected on the list to [Controller], when a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view. [Close] Closes this screen and exits this function. [Help] [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. [Version] Displays the version of Color Centro. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-11 8.4 Load the Tone Curve 8 8.4.3 Load the Tone Curve This section describes how to load the tone curve. The tone curve registered at factory shipping in the image controller can't be adjusted and overwritten. When you want to adjust the tone curve registered at factory shipping, load the duplication of it which was made beforehand and adjust the duplication. For detailed information on how to duplicate, refer to page 8-20. 1 Click [Load Tone Curve] on the [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. [Tone Curve Management] screen appears. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Tone Curve Management]. 2 From the tree view, select the place to save the tone curve. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 3 From the list, select the tone curve to load. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 4 Click [Open]. [Tone Curve Management] screen is closed to return to [Tone Curve Adjustment ] screen. Selected tone curve is loaded and the settings appear to [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. % When you click [Cancel], [Tone Curve Management] screen is closed to return to [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. % When you adjust the tone curve, go to the step described on page 7-10. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-12 8.5 Create the New Tone Curve 8 8.5 Create the New Tone Curve This section describes how to create the new tone curve. 1 Select [File] menu - [New Tone Curve] on [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. On the left of [Load Tone Curve], "New" appears. % The name of the new tone curve is set at saving. % Go to the step described on page 7-10. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-13 8.6 Adjust the Brightness/Contrast 8 8.6 Adjust the Brightness/Contrast You can adjust the tone curve using brightness/contrast adjustment, each color adjustment, and curve view on [Torn Curve Adjustment] screen. The result of adjustment is reflected to the preview area immediately. As for the tone curve adjustment, it is efficient to adjust the brightness/contrast of all colors at first, and adjust each color next. This section describes how to adjust the brightness/contrast of the tone curve. 8.6.1 [Brightness/Contrast] tab The brightness/contrast adjustment uses [Brightness/Contrast] tab of [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. The [Brightness/Contrast] tab is composed as follows; The result of adjustment of [Brightness/Contrast] can be adjusted additionally by operations to points on the curve in the curve view area of [Tone Curve Adjustment]. For detailed information on how to operate the point, refer topage 8-16. Item Description [Brightness] slider Adjusts the brightness by moving the slider to left/right. [Brightness] box Specifies the value to apply as the brightness. [Contrast] slider Adjusts the contrast by moving the slider to left/right. [Contrast] box Specifies the value to apply as the contrast. [Undo] Sets [Brightness] box and [Contrast] box set to "0", and resets the settings of [Brightness/Contrast] tab. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-14 8.6 Adjust the Brightness/Contrast 8 8.6.2 Brightness/Contrast Adjustment This section describes how to adjust with [Brightness/Contrast] tab. The brightness adjustment function is to adjust the tone curve by changing the middle point value of the brightness of the entire image. The brightness adjustment is the adjustment of the output value at base point where the input value (horizontal axis) in curve view area is 50%. When the slider is moved to the right (when the input value to the input box is large) the images is made brighter, and when the slider is moved to the left (when the input value to the input box is small) the image is made darker. The contrast adjustment function is to adjust the gradation for the bright part and the dark part of the entire image. The contrast adjustment is the adjustment of the output value at base point where the input values (horizontal axis) in curve view area are 25% and 75%. When the slider is moved to the right (when the input value to the input box is large) the contrast is made stronger, and when the slider is moved to the left (when the input value to the input box is small) the contrast is made weaker. The adjustment using [Brightness/Contrast] tab adjusts each color of CMYK collectively. For detailed information on how to set each color adjustment, refer topage 7-12. 1 Click [Brightness/Contrast] tab on the [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. [Brightness/Contrast] tab appears. 2 Drag the [Brightness] slider to left/right. You can also specify by entering the value (from "-25" to "25") into [Brightness] box. The value of the adjustment is reflected to curve view area and to preview of [After Adjustment]. 3 Drag and move the [Contrast] slider to left/right. You can also specify by entering the value (from "-25" into "25") to [Contrast] box. The value of the adjustment is reflected to curve view area and to preview of [After Adjustment]. 4 Confirm the preview of [After Adjustment], and repeat step 2 and step 3 as required. % When you adjust each color, go to the step described on page 7-12. % When you execute confirmation print to confirm the result of tone curve adjustment, go to the step described on page 7-13. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-15 8.7 Adjust the Each Color 8 8.7 Adjust the Each Color You can adjust the tone curve using brightness/contrast adjustment, each color adjustment, and curve view on [Torn Curve Adjustment] screen. The result of adjustment is reflected to the preview area immediately. As for the tone curve adjustment, it is efficient to adjust the brightness/contrast of all colors at first, and adjust each color next. This section describes how to adjust each color. 8.7.1 [Adjust Each Color] tab The each color adjustment uses [Adjust Each Color] tab of [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. The [Adjust Each Color] tab is composed as follows; Item Description [Combination] Lets you select [CMYK], [CMY/K], or [C/M/Y/K]. When you select [CMYK], you can adjust the consolidated tone curve of CMYK. When you select [CMY/K], you can adjust the consolidated tone curve of CMY and the tone curve of K. When you select [C/M/Y/K], you can adjust the tone curves of each color of CMYK. [View] Displays a check box to display/hide the tone curve per item of the combination selected from [Combination]. According to the selection from [Combination], the number and target (color) of the check box differ. [Adjustment] Displays a radio button to select whether you execute the tone curve adjustment or not per item of the combination selected from [Combination]. According to the selection of [Combination], the number and target (color) of the radio button differ. [Undo] Discards the current settings of [Adjust Each Color] tab, and returns to the last saved settings. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-16 8.7 Adjust the Each Color 8 8.7.2 Basic operation of [Adjust Each Color] tab This section describes how to adjust with [Adjust Each Color] tab. Select the Combination The selected combination, the view settings and the settings of adjustment target on [Adjust Each Color] tab define the range of the adjustment by operation of points in the curve view area. Specify on each color whether you want to display the tone curve or hide and whether you execute adjustment or not, using [View] check box and [Adjustment] radio button which displayed per item of the combination selected from [Combination]. When [View] is checked, the tone curve of the color checked is displayed on curve view area. When [Adjustment] is selected, the tone curve of the color selected can be adjusted by operation of points in the curve view area. When check mark of [View] for one color was not selected and you select [Adjustment] for the same color, [View] is checked automatically. Basic operation 1 Click [Adjust Each Color] tab on the [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. [Adjust Each Color] tab appears. 2 Select [CMYK], [CMY/K], or [C/M/Y/K] from [Combination]. According to the selection from [Combination], [View] check box per each color and [Adjustment] radio button per each color appear. 3 When you want to display the tone curve of one color, check the check box of that color. 4 When you want to adjust the tone curve of one color, select the radio button of that color. 5 Adjust the tone curve by operation of points in the curve view area. % For detailed information on how to operate the point, refer topage 8-16. % When you execute confirmation print to confirm the result of tone curve adjustment, go to the step described on page 7-13. Adjust with Point/Reference Point When you select [Adjust Each Color] tab, you can use the point/reference points to adjust. The point (small, black square) appears at both ends of the curve view area. You can adjust the tone curve by dragging and moving this point. You can also add the point by clicking on the curve. You can adjust the tone curve by dragging and moving this added point (small, red square). In addition, the position of 25%, 50%, and 75% may be added automatically on the curve as reference points according to the settings of [Brightness/Contrast] tab. You can also adjust the tone curve by dragging and moving the reference point. Those points and reference points can be used for adjustment of the tone curve as follows; How to drag Description Before Adjustment After Adjustment Drag the points (at both ends) upward or downward You can change the entire inclination. Then, you can adjust the whole range of the output values. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-17 8.7 Adjust the Each Color 8 You can set the complex tone curve by moving/adding the point mentioned above. - You can add the point up to 13. - You can't select the multiple points at the same time. - Similar operation can be done when you press up/down key on the keyboard in stead of dragging. - When you select the added point and you press [Delete] key on the keyboard, you can delete the selected point. However, you can't delete the beginning point and the ending point. - The input boxes of vertical/horizontal axises display the value of the selected point. When you select the point and you enter the value into the input boxes respectively, you can move the selected point to specified position. Drag the added points which are adjacent to the both end points, to the left or to the right. The 0 point (beginning point) and 100 point (ending point) can't be moved to the left or the right, but the adjacent point can be moved to 1% or 99%. When you drag the added point which is adjacent to the end point, you can set the adjacent section from the both ends near the same height (output value). Drag the added/ reference point upward/ downward/ left/right Dragging the added/ reference points upward/downward/ left/right, you can set the circular arc or an S-shaped curve that is centering on this point. When the whole curve is made to circular arc, the brightness goes up. When the S-shaped curve is enlarged, the contrast becomes strong. You can drag to left or right, within the range from the next of the previous point (value of the position is 1% greater) to before the next point (value of the position is 1% less). How to drag Description Before Adjustment After Adjustment ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-18 8.8 Confirmation Print 8 8.8 Confirmation Print This section describes how to execute confirmation print to confirm the result of tone curve adjustment. (This function isn't available as of June, 2010) 1 Click [Confirmation Print] on the [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. [Confirmation Print] screen appears. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Confirmation Print]. 2 Specify [Paper Tray], [Paper Size], and [Orientation ]. 3 When you select the hold job in which multiple images are included, as a sample image, specify the page number in [Print Page] to execute confirmation print. % When you select another image, [Print Page] is "1" and you can't change it. % The confirmation print outputs only 1 page. 4 Check [Print Image of Before Adjustment ], when you want to print the image before adjustment. 5 Click [Confirmation Print]. Confirmation printing is executed. % When you save the adjusted tone curve, go to the step described on page 8-19. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-19 8.9 Save the Tone Curve 8 8.9 Save the Tone Curve This section describes how to save the adjusted tone curve. When you register the settings to the image controller, the adjusted tone curve can be adopted to the output. When the tone curve is saved in [Local] or [Network], the tone curve is saved as the tone curve profile (Extension: ".xml"). 1 Click [Save] on the [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. [Save] screen appears. 2 Specify the name of the tone curve to [Saved Name] within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters. 3 From the tree view of [Destination Folder], select the place to save the tone curve. The list appears according to the selection. % When Controller is selected on the tree view, "*" mark is added after the name of the tone curve which was registered at factory shipping. In addition, a red @ mark is added before the name of the tone curve which was registered at factory shipping. 4 If necessary, enter the description to [Memo]. 5 Click [Save]. When you select [Controller] as the destination folder, the tone curve is saved in the image controller. When you select [Local] or [Network] as the destination folder, the tone curve is saved as the tone curve profile (Extension: ".xml"). % When there is the tone curve with the same name, the confirmation message of overwriting appears. To save with another name, click [Cancel]. To overwrite, click [OK]. % You can specify the tone curve to use as default from among registered tone curves in the image controller when you use "Color Default Settings" function or "Color Configuration Management" function. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-20 8.10 Tone Curve Management 8 8.10 Tone Curve Management This section describes how to manage the saved tone curve. The management of the tone curve uses [Tone Curve Management] screen. For detailed information of [Tone Curve Management], refer topage 8-9. Copy the Tone Curve You can make a duplication of the tone curve in the image controller, to the image controller. The tone curve registered at factory shipping in the image controller can't be adjusted and overwritten. When you want to adjust the tone curve registered at factory shipping, load the duplication of it which was made beforehand and adjust the duplication. 1 From the tree view of [Tone Curve Management] screen, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 2 From the list, select the tone curve to copy. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 3 Click [Copy]. [Change Table Information] screen appears. % When you select the multiple tone curves, [Copy] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Copy] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Copy]. 4 Specify [Saved Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 onebyte alpha-numerical characters). % You can't specify the same name with those registered in the image controller. 5 Click [OK]. The duplication of the tone curve is generated in the image controller. Export the Tone Curve You can export the tone curve of the image controller to [Local] or [Network] as the tone curve profile (Extension: .xml). 1 From the tree view of [Tone Curve Management] screen, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 2 From the list, select the tone curve to export. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 3 Click [Export]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-21 8.10 Tone Curve Management 8 [Save to Local] screen appears. % When you select the multiple tone curves, [Export] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Export] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Export]. 4 Specify the saving place and file name for the tone curve to export, and click [Save]. Exporting to the specified place as profile is executed. [Save to Local] screen is closed to return to [Tone Curve Management] screen. Register the Tone Curve to the Image Controller You can register the tone curve of [Local] or [Network] in [Controller]. When you register the tone curve to the image controller, the adjusted tone curve can be adopted to the output. 1 From tree view of [Tone Curve Management], select [Local] or [Network] where the tone curve profile (Extension: ".xml") is saved. The list appears according to the selection. 2 From the list, select the tone curve to register. 3 Click [Registration]. [Register] screen appears. % When you select the multiple tone curves, [Register] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Register] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Register]. 4 Specify [Saved Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 onebyte alpha-numerical characters). % You can't specify the same name with those registered in the image controller. 5 Click [OK]. The tone curve is registered to [Controller]. [Register] screen is closed to return to [Tone Curve Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-22 8.10 Tone Curve Management 8 Delete the Tone Curve You can delete the tone curve. 1 From the tree view and the list of [Tone Curve Management] screen, select the tone curve to delete. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. % You can delete the multiple tone curves. 2 Click [Delete]. Confirmation screen appears. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Delete]. 3 To delete, click [OK]. The selected tone curve is deleted. % When you select the multiple tone curves, all of those are deleted at a time. % You can't restore the tone curve you have deleted. Change the Tone Curve Information You can change the tone curve information (Saved Name, Memo). 1 From the tree view and the list of [Tone Curve Management] screen, select the tone curve to change the information. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 2 Click [Change Table Information]. [Change Table Information] screen appears. % When you select the multiple tone curves, [Change Table Information] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Change Table Information]. 3 Edit [Saved Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) as required. % When you change the saved name of the tone curve in the image controller, you can't specify the same name with those registered in the image controller. 4 Click [OK]. The tone curve information is changed. ColorCentro (IC-601) 8-23 8.11 Reset the Tone Curve 8 8.11 Reset the Tone Curve This section describes how to reset the adjustment result of [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. 0 Reset is executed immediately. 1 Click [Undo of ][Brightness/Contrast] tab or [Adjust Each Color] tab on [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen. The current settings are discarded immediately and, the last saved tone curve appears. 9 Spot Color ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-2 9.1 Outline of Spot Color 9 9 Spot Color 9.1 Outline of Spot Color The spot color is called a special color, meaning the color with a specific name. In general, the name of the ink provided by the ink manufacturer becomes a name of the spot color. In the image controller, some spot color tables, "DIC", "CF", and "HKS" are registered at factory shipping. Within the spot color table, each spot color and the definition values of it are stored. The definition values are used to output after converting the spot color specified by the application to CMYK. Use of the Spot Color Adjustment function of Color Centro enables to create the new spot color table, duplicate the registered spot color table, and edit it. By this function, to replace the spot color which is specified by the application with CMYK values which Color Centro defines is enabled, and the outputting is executed. 9.1.1 [Spot Color] screen The spot color adjustment function of Color Centro uses [Spot Color] screen. [Spot Color] screen appears by clicking [Spot Color] button on [Launcher] screen. To close this screen, select [Close] from [File] menu. The [Spot Color] screen is composed as follows; Item Description (table name) The name of spot color table loaded using [Table] appears in the left box of the [Table]. On launching this screen, "Unselected" appears there. [Table] Displays [Spot Color Table Management] screen to allow you to select the spot color table to load. You can operate to manage the spot color table on [Spot Color Table Management] screen. (spot color name) The name of spot color selected from the list appears in the left box of the [Rename]. [Rename] Changes the spot color name currently selected from the list. (spot color list) Displays the content of the selected spot color table as a list. [Add] Creates the new spot color. [Delete] Deletes the spot color selected from the spot color list. [Copy] Duplicates the spot color selected from the spot color list with the changed name. [Manual Adjustment] - [C], [M], [Y], [K] Allows you to adjust manually the selected spot color using [C], [M], [Y], and [K]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-3 9.1 Outline of Spot Color 9 List Items The list items of the list on the [Spot Color] screen are as follows; The list is displayed in order of [Color Name]. 9.1.2 Menu of [Spot Color] screen The menu items of the [Spot Color] screen are as follows; [Before Adjustment] Displays the conditions of spot color before adjustment. [After Adjustment] Displays the conditions of spot color after adjustment. [Test Print] Prints the spot color selected currently; both of the color before adjustment and the color after adjustment. [Adjustment by Printing the Chart] - [Step] Specifies the degree of color patch variation on the chart for adjustment. The chart of color patch variation at the specified degrees is displayed on the preview area. [Print Chart] Executes chart printing. (chart view area) Displays the preview of the chart according to the setting of [Step]. Displays the preview again after chart printing according to the settings of [No.] and [Group]. [No.] Specifies the color number on the printed chart. [Group] Specifies the color group on the printed chart. [OK] Updates the chart preview after confirming the input values of [No.] and [Group]. [Save] Saves the spot color with the set content. [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. Status bar Displays the IP address and the port number of the image controller connected currently. Item Description Item Description [Saved] Displays marks when the adjustment result of spot color isn't saved. [Before Adjustment] Displays the color before adjustment. [After Adjustment] Displays the color after adjustment. [Color Name] Displays the spot color name. [C(%)], [M(%)], [Y(%)], [K(%)] Displays the CMYK values of the spot color. Menu Menu Items Description [File] [Login] When you connect another image controller, the [Login] screen appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-2. [New Table] Creates the new spot color table. [Table] Displays [Spot Color Table Management] screen to select the spot color table to load. You can operate to manage the spot color table on [Spot Color Table Management] screen. [Reset] Discards the current measurement result and settings displayed on this screen, and resets the screen. [Close] Closes this screen and exits this function. [Help] [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. [Version] Displays the version of Color Centro. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-4 9.1 Outline of Spot Color 9 9.1.3 Basic Operation of [Spot Color] screen This section describes basic operation of [Spot Color] screen. 1 Load the spot color table to make adjustment. Or, create the spot color table. % For detailed information on how to load the spot color table, refer topage 7-5. % For detailed information on how to create the spot color table, refer topage 9-8. 2 Select the spot color to make adjustment. Or, create the spot color. % For detailed information on how to add the spot color, refer topage 7-7. 3 Execute adjustment manually. % For detailed information on how to adjust the spot color manually, refer topage 7-8. 4 Execute adjustment using the chart printed with spot color. % For detailed information on how to adjust the chart, refer topage 7-10. 5 Save the adjusted spot color table. % For detailed information on how to save, refer to page 7-12. 6 If necessary, change the priority. % For detailed information on how to change the priority, refer topage 7-13. 7 If necessary, execute some management operations for the spot color table and spot color. % For detailed information on how to manage, refer to page 9-15 and page 9-19. 8 If necessary, initialize the [Spot Color] screen. % For detailed information on how to initialize, refer to page 9-21. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-5 9.2 Load the Spot Color Table 9 9.2 Load the Spot Color Table In the image controller, there is the spot color table registered at factory shipping. You can also register the spot color table which you adjusted on [Spot Color] screen. Use of the Spot Color Adjustment function of Color Centro enables to load the spot color table and adjust the spot color in the loaded spot color table. This section describes how to load the spot color table. You can select the spot color table to load on [Spot Color Table Management] screen. 9.2.1 [Spot Color Table Management] screen [Spot Color Table Management] screen is composed as follows; List Items The list items of the list on the [Spot Color Table Management] screen are as follows; Item Description (tree view) Displays the places where the spot color tables are saved ([Controller], [Local], and [Network]) in the tree format. (list) According to the selection of the tree view, displays the saved spot color tables. [Priority] Using and , specifies the priority within the multiple spot color tables with same table name registered in the image controller. [Factory Default] Resets the priority to the factory default. [Copy] Makes a duplication of the selected spot color table from the list within [Controller], when [Controller] is selected on the tree view. [Delete] Deletes the spot color table selected from the list. [Reload] Updates the information of the list. [Change Table Information] Changes the table information (Table Name, Memo) of the spot color table which is selected from the list. [Export]/[Register] Exports the selected spot color table on the list to [Local] / [Network], when [Controller] is selected on the tree view. Registers the spot color table selected on the list to [Controller], when a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view. [Open] Loads the selected spot color table on the list to [Spot Color] screen. [Cancel] Discards the current settings and closes the screen. [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. Status bar Displays the IP address and the port number of the image controller connected currently. Item Description [File Name] Displays the saved file name of the spot color table when [Local] or [Network] is selected on the tree view. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-6 9.2 Load the Spot Color Table 9 When [Controller] is selected on the tree view, the list is displayed per group of [Table Name] in which the spot color tables have the same name. Within the group, displays in order of priority. You can change the order of priority. For detailed information on how to change the order of priority, refer topage 7-13. When [Controller] is selected on the tree view, "*" mark is added after the name of the spot color table which was registered at factory shipping. In addition, a red @ mark is added before the name of the spot color table which was registered at factory shipping. List Operations The list of [Spot Color Table Management] screen can be sorted by [Table Name] (in case of [Controller]), or [File Name] (in case of [Local] or [Network]). For how to operate it, refer to page 14-3. When you display [Spot Color Table Management] screen first after launching Color Centro, the list is displayed in ascending order of [Table Name] (in case of [Controller]), or [File Name](in case of [Local] or [Network]). When [Controller] is selected on the tree view, the list is displayed in ascending order of [Table Name] per group. 9.2.2 Menu of [Spot Color Table Management] screen The menu items of the [Spot Color Table Management] screen are as follows; [Table Name] Displays the spot color table name. [Created Date/Time] Displays the date/time when the new spot color table was created. [Update Date/Time] Displays the date/time when the spot color table was updated. [Memo] Displays the memo which was set to the spot color table. Item Description Menu Menu Description [File] [Login] When you connect another image controller, the [Login] screen appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-2. [Reload] Updates the information of the list. [Sort] Sorts the content of the list by the selected list item. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-3. [Change Table Information] Changes the table information (Table Name, Memo) of the spot color table which is selected from the list. [Delete] Deletes the spot color table selected from the list. [Copy] Makes a duplication of the selected spot color table from the list within [Controller], when [Controller] is selected on the tree view. [Export] Exports the selected spot color table on the list to [Local] / [Network], when [Controller] is selected on the tree view. [Create] Registers the spot color table selected on the list to [Controller], when a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view. [Close] Discards the current settings and closes the screen. [Help] [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. [Version] Displays the version of Color Centro. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-7 9.2 Load the Spot Color Table 9 9.2.3 Load the Spot Color Table This section describes how to load the spot color table. The spot color table registered at factory shipping in the image controller can't be adjusted and overwritten. When you want to adjust the spot color table registered at factory shipping, load the duplication of it which was made beforehand and adjust the duplication. For detailed information on how to duplicate, refer to page 8-20. 1 Click [Table] on [Spot Color] screen. [Spot Color Table Management] screen appears. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Table]. 2 From the tree view, select the place to save the spot color table. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 3 From the list, select the spot color table to load. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 4 Click [Open]. [Spot Color Table Management] screen is closed to return to [Spot Color] screen. Selected spot color table is loaded and the spot color appears to [Spot Color] screen. % When you click [Cancel], [Spot Color Table Management] screen is closed to return to [Spot Color] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-8 9.3 Create the New Spot Color Table 9 9.3 Create the New Spot Color Table You can create the new spot color table and add the new spot color. This section describes how to create the new spot color table. To create the new spot color table, use [Spot Color] screen. 1 Select [File] menu - [Create New Table] on [Spot Color]] screen. On the left of [Table], "New" appears. 2 Add the new spot color. % For detailed information on how to add the spot color, refer topage 7-7. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-9 9.4 Select the Spot Color / Add the New Spot Color 9 9.4 Select the Spot Color / Add the New Spot Color This section describes how to select the spot color and how to add the new spot color. Select the Spot Color % Select the spot color to adjust from the list of [Spot Color]. On the left of [Rename], the name of the selected spot color appears. % When you want to save the current settings and you want to create the new spot color on base of the selected spot color, make the duplication of it and adjust the duplication. For detailed information on how to duplicate/delete/rename the spot color in the spot color table, refer topage 9-19. % For detailed information on how to adjust the spot color, refer topage 7-8 and page 7-10. Add the New Spot Color 1 Click [New] on [Spot Color] screen. [New] screen appears. 2 Specify the name of the new spot color to [Color Name] and click [OK]. On the left of [Rename], the name specified appears. % The CMYK values of the new color are all "0". Then, [C(%)], [M(%)], [Y(%)] and [K(%)] of the list display "0". % For detailed information on how to adjust the spot color, refer topage 7-8 and page 7-10. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-10 9.5 Adjust the Spot Color Manually 9 9.5 Adjust the Spot Color Manually You can adjust the CMYK values of the spot color on [Spot Color] screen. The result of adjustment is reflected to the preview area immediately. You can also print to confirm the colors of [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment]. This section describes how to adjust the spot color manually. To adjust the spot color manually, use [Spot Color] screen. 1 Specify the CMYK values to [Manual Adjustment] - [C], [M], [Y] and [K] for the spot color selected from the list on [Spot Color] screen. According to the settings, the preview area of [Manual Adjustment] - [Before Adjustment] and [After Adjustment] are updated. % For each color, specify the value (from "0" to "100"). % When you input below the decimal point, the value rounded down is displayed. % Similar operation can be done when you change the value of [C(%)], [M(%)], [Y(%)] and [K(%)] of the list on [Spot Color] screen. 2 Confirm the preview of [After Adjustment], and repeat step 1 as required. 3 Click [Test Print]. [Confirmation Print] screen appears. 4 Specify [Paper Tray] and [Paper Size]. 5 Click [Print]. Test printing is executed. 6 Confirm the test printing and repeat step 1 to step 5 as required. % When you execute fine adjustment, go to the step described on page 7-10. % When you save the adjusted spot color, go to the step described on page 7-12. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-11 9.6 Adjustment of Spot Color with the Printed Chart 9 9.6 Adjustment of Spot Color with the Printed Chart You can execute fine adjustment of the spot color after CMYK adjustment using the printed chart. This section describes how to adjust with the printed chart. To print the chart, use [Spot Color] screen. On [Adjustment by Printing Chart], you can print the chart on which the value of the selected spot color is regarded as the center value. You can print the color chart where the color is varied with 8 steps based on the center value of CMYK values specified by the degree of variation (%), per 9 groups where the conversion method of CMYK differs. From the printed chart, specify the No. of the color patch and Group to adopt those to the spot color and fix the CMYK values. 1 Specify the step number to [Adjustment by Printing the Chart] - [Step] (from "1" to "10"). The chart in which the CMYK values are varied per the specified value is displayed on the preview area. 2 Click [Print Chart]. [Print Chart] screen appears. 3 Specify [Paper Tray], [Paper Size]. 4 Click [Print]. Chart printing is executed. % When you click [Print Chart], [No.] and [Group] become available. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-12 9.6 Adjustment of Spot Color with the Printed Chart 9 5 Confirm the printed chart. 6 Specify the number of the color patch and group which you adopt the spot color to [No.] and [Group], and click [OK]. The specified color is displayed on [After Adjustment]. 7 Confirm the preview of [After Adjustment], and repeat step 6 as required. % When you save the adjusted spot color, go to the step described on page 7-12. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-13 9.7 Save the Spot Color Table 9 9.7 Save the Spot Color Table This section describes how to save the adjusted step color table. To save the spot color table, use [Spot Color] screen. When you save the spot color table to the image controller, the spot color table is registered into the image controller. When you register the spot color table, the adjusted spot color table can be adopted to the output according to the priority of the spot color table. When the spot color table is saved in [Local] or [Network], the spot color table is saved as the spot color table profile (Extension: ".spo"). 1 Click [Save] on [Spot Color] screen. [Save] screen appears. 2 Specify the name of the spot color table to [Table Name] within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters. % You can save the spot color table of the same name with those registered in the image controller. When you add the new spot color, it is added on the same table. When you adjust the existed color, it is updated. When you delete the existed color, it is deleted from the table. 3 From the tree view of [Destination Folder], select the place to save the spot color table. The list appears according to the selection. % When [Controller] is selected on the tree view, "*" mark is added after the name of the spot color table which was registered at factory shipping. In addition, a red @ mark is added before the name of the spot color table which was registered at factory shipping. 4 If necessary, enter the description into [Memo]. 5 Click [Save]. When you select [Controller] as the destination folder, the spot color table is saved in the image controller. When you select [Local] or [Network] as the destination folder, the spot color table is saved as the spot color table profile (Extension: ".spo"). % The priority of the newly saved spot color table becomes the top among the spot color tables of the same name (group). When you change the priority of the spot color table in the image controller, go to the step described on page 7-13. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-14 9.8 Change the Priority of the Spot Color Table 9 9.8 Change the Priority of the Spot Color Table This section describes how to change the priority of the spot color table among the multiple spot color tables of the same name (group) which are registered in the image controller. To change the priority, use [Spot Color Table Management] screen. The priority defines which spot color table is adopted to the spot color specified by the application. 1 Click [Table] on [Spot Color] screen. [Spot Color Table Management] screen appears. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Table]. 2 From the tree view, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 3 From the list, select the spot color table to change the priority. % The list is displayed per group of the same [Table Name]. Within the group, tables are displayed in order of priority. % "*" mark is added after the name of the spot color table which was registered at factory shipping. In addition, a red @ mark is added before the name of the spot color table which was registered at factory shipping. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 4 Click or to change the position of the selected spot color table. The position of the selected spot color table moves within the group of [Table Name]. % Click [Factory Default] when you want to reset the priority settings of the spot color table which was registered at factory shipping. In this case, the priority of the spot color table created by user is not changed. 5 Close [Spot Color Table Management] screen after changing the priority. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-15 9.9 Spot Color Table Management 9 9.9 Spot Color Table Management This section describes how to manage the saved spot color table. The management of the spot color table uses [Spot Color Table Management] screen. For detailed information of [Spot Color Table Management], refer topage 9-2. Copy the Spot Color Table The spot color table registered at factory shipping in the image controller can't be adjusted and overwritten. When you want to adjust the spot color table registered at factory shipping, load the duplication of it which was made beforehand and adjust the duplication. 1 From the tree view of [Spot Color Table Management] screen, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 2 From the list, select the spot color table to copy. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 3 Click [Copy]. [Change Table Information] screen appears. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Copy] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Copy]. 4 Specify [Table Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 one-byte alpha-numerical characters). % You can save the spot color table of the same name with those in the image controller. 5 Click [OK]. The duplication of the spot color table is generated in the image controller. % The priority of the duplicated spot color table becomes the top among the spot color tables of the same name (group). When you change the priority of the spot color table in the image controller, refer to page 7-13. Export the Spot Color Table as Profile You can export the spot color table of the image controller to [Local] or [Network] as the spot color table profile (Extension: ".spo"). 1 From the tree view of [Spot Color Table Management] screen, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 2 From the list, select the spot color table to export. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. % You can export the spot color table which was registered at factory shipping. 3 Click [Export]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-16 9.9 Spot Color Table Management 9 [Save to Local] screen appears. % When you select the multiple spot color tables, [Export] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Export] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Export]. 4 Specify the saving place and file name for the spot color table to export, and click [Save]. Exporting to the specified place as profile is executed. [Save to Local] screen is closed to return to [Spot Color Table Management] screen. Register the Spot Color Table to the Image Controller You can register the spot color table of [Local] or [Network] in "Controller" (Extension: [.spo]). When you register the spot color table profile as the spot color table, the adjusted spot color table can be adopted to the output according to the priority of the spot color table. 1 From tree view of [Spot Color Table Management], select [Local] or [Network] where the spot color table profile is saved. The list appears according to the selection. 2 From the list, select the spot color table profile to register. 3 Click [Registration]. [Register] screen appears. % When you select the multiple spot color tables, [Register] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Register] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Register]. 4 Specify [Table Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 one-byte alpha-numerical characters). % You can save the spot color table of the same name with those registered in the image controller. 5 Click [OK]. The spot color table is registered to [Controller]. [Register] screen is closed to return to [Spot Color Table Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-17 9.9 Spot Color Table Management 9 % The priority of the registered spot color table become top among the spot color tables of the same name (group). When you change the priority of the spot color table in the image controller, refer to page 7-13. % When the profile is created by exporting the spot color table registered at factory shipping and you register it, the registered spot color table becomes available for adjustment. Delete the Spot Color Table You can delete the spot color table. 1 From the tree view and the list of [Tone Curve Management] screen, select the spot color table to delete. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 2 Click [Delete]. Confirmation screen appears. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Delete]. % When you select the spot color table which was registered at factory shipping, [Delete] isn't available. 3 To delete, click [OK]. The selected spot color table is deleted. % When you select the multiple spot color tables, all of those are deleted at a time. % You can't restore the spot color table you have deleted. Change the Spot Color Table Information You can change the spot color table information. 1 From the tree view and the list of [Spot Color Table Management] screen, select the spot color table to change the information. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 2 Click [Change Table Information]. [Change Table Information] screen appears. % When you select the multiple spot color tables, [Change Table Information] isn't available. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-18 9.9 Spot Color Table Management 9 % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Change Table Information]. 3 Edit [Table Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 one-byte alpha- numerical characters) as required. % But, you can't change the table name of the spot color table which was registered at factory shipping. 4 Click [OK]. The spot color table information is changed. % The priority of the spot color table of which information was changed becomes the top among the spot color tables of the same name (group). When you change the priority of the spot color table in the image controller, refer to page 7-13. Change the Priority of the Spot Color Table You can reset the priority settings of the spot color table which was registered at factory shipping. 1 Click [Spot Color Table Management] - [Factory Default]. Confirmation screen appears. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 2 Click [Yes] when you want to reset the priority settings of the spot color table which was registered at factory shipping. The priority is reset to the factory default. In this case, the priority of the spot color table created by user is not changed. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-19 9.10 Spot Color Table Management 9 9.10 Spot Color Table Management This section describes how to manage the spot color stored in the spot color table. The management of the spot color uses [Spot Color] screen. For detailed information of [Spot Color] screen, refer to page 9-2. Rename the Spot Color 1 Select the spot color to rename from the list of [Spot Color] On the left of [Rename], the name of the selected spot color appears. 2 Click [Rename] on [Spot Color] screen. [Rename] screen appears. 3 Specify the changed name to [Color Name], and click [OK]. On the left of [Rename], the name specified appears. % You can't store the spot color of the same name with other spot color in the spot color table. % To save the changed name, save the spot color table. For detailed information on how to save the spot color table, refer topage 7-12. Copy the Spot Color You can duplicate the spot color within the same spot color table. When you adjust the spot color, original settings of the spot color is overwritten. When you want to save the current settings, make the duplication of it. 1 Select the spot color to duplicate from the list of [Spot Color]. On the left of [Rename], the name of the selected spot color appears. 2 Click [Copy]. [Change Table Information] screen appears. % When you select the multiple spot colors, [Copy] isn't available. 3 Specify the name to [Saved Name] within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters. % You can't save the spot color of the same name with the spot color in the spot color table. 4 Click [OK]. The duplication of the spot color is generated in the spot color table. % To save the copied spot color, save the spot color table. For detailed information on how to save the spot color table, refer topage 7-12. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-20 9.10 Spot Color Table Management 9 Delete the Spot Color You can delete the spot color within the spot color table. 1 Select the spot color to delete from the list of [Spot Color]. On the left of [Rename], the name of the selected spot color appears. 2 Click [Delete]. Confirmation screen appears. 3 To delete, click [OK]. The selected spot color is deleted. % When you select the multiple spot colors, all of those are deleted at a time. % You can't restore the spot color you have deleted. % To fix the deleting of the spot color, save the spot color table. For detailed information on how to save the spot color table, refer topage 7-12. ColorCentro (IC-601) 9-21 9.11 Initialize the Spot Color Screen 9 9.11 Initialize the Spot Color Screen The loaded spot color table and the result of spot color adjustment displayed on the [Spot Color] screen remain, until the time when screen is closed or reset. This section describes how to initialize [Spot Color] screen and how to erase the loaded information and the result of adjustment, without saving. 1 Select the spot color to initialize from the list of [Spot Color]. 2 From the [File] menu, select [Initialize]. The confirmation message appears. 3 Click [OK]. The result of adjustment is erased from the screen. 10 Alternative Color ColorCentro (IC-601) 10-2 10.1 Outline of Alternative Color 10 10 Alternative Color 10.1 Outline of Alternative Color One alternative color table per color (RGB color/CMYK color) is stored in the image controller. The alternative color table replaces the specific RGB color/CMYK color within job with CMYK color (alternative color). You can set the alternative colors (64 for RGB and 64 for CMYK) to the alternative color table which is in the controller. (total 128) Use of the Color Centro enables to set and adjust the alternative color table in the image controller. Color Centro also enables to select the alternative color from the spot color. By this function, you can adopt the spot color to the alternative color as the processing of the image controller when the spot color can't be specified by the application. When you use the spot color as the alternative color, adjust the spot color to use beforehand. For detailed information on how to adjust the spot color, refer topage 7-2. 10.1.1 [Alternative Color Management] screen The alternative color management function of Color Centro uses [Alternative Color Management] screen. [Alternative Color Management] screen appears by clicking [Alternative Color] button on the [Launcher] screen. To close this screen, select [Close] from [File] menu. The composition of [Alternative Color Management] screen differs per tab. When [RGB] tab is selected, [Alternative Color Management] screen is composed as follows; When [CMYK] tab is selected, [Alternative Color Management] screen is composed as follows; ColorCentro (IC-601) 10-3 10.1 Outline of Alternative Color 10 List Items The composition of the list on [Alternative Color Management] screen differs per tab. When [RGB] tab is selected, the list on [Alternative Color Management] screen is composed as follows; Item Description [RGB] Displays the screen to set the alternative color for specific RGB color within the job. [CMYK] Displays the screen to set the alternative color for specific CMYK color within the job. (list) Displays the content of the alternative color table that is in the connecting image controllers for RGB or CMYK (it depends on [RGB] / [CMYK] tab selection). [Show Device Value] Allows you to set when you select [CMYK] tab. When you check, you can specify the color with the device value (from 0 to 255; 256 steps). When you remove the check, you can specify the color with % (from 0 to 100). [Original] Displays the original color to which the alternative color can be set. [After Adjustment] Displays the color of the alternative color. Every adjustment is reflected on the screen immediately. [R], [G], [B] Displays the RGB values of the original color. [C], [M], [Y], [K] Displays the CMYK values of the alternative color. [Select from Spot Color] Click to set the alternative color from the spot color. [Priority] Allows you to set the priority when there are multiple alternative colors for one original color using and . [Add] Adds the new alternative color setting. [Delete] Deletes the alternative color setting you selected from the alternative color table. [Copy] Duplicate the alternative color setting. [Create] Registers the adjustment result in the image controller. [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. Status bar Displays the IP address and the port number of the image controller connected currently. Item Description [Original] Displays the original color to which the alternative color can be set. [R], [G], [B] Displays the RGB values of the original color. ColorCentro (IC-601) 10-4 10.1 Outline of Alternative Color 10 When [CMYK] tab is selected, the list on [Alternative Color Management] screen is composed as follows; Displays the alternative color for the same original color in order of priority. You can change the order of priority. For detailed information on how to change the order of priority, refer topage 7-13. 10.1.2 Menu of [Alternative Color Management] screen The menu items of the [Alternative Color Management] screen are as follows; 10.1.3 Basic Operation of [Alternative Color Management] screen This section describes basic operation of [Alternative Color Management] screen. 1 Select the input color of the alternative color setting. Or, create the new input color of the alternative color setting. % For detailed information on how to select the input color, refer to page 10-5. 2 Set the input color of the alternative color setting. % For detailed information on how to set the input color, refer to page 7-7. 3 Specify the output color of the alternative color setting. % For detailed information on how to specify the output color, refer to page 10-8. 4 If necessary, change the priority. % For detailed information on how to change the priority, refer topage 7-13. 5 Register the alternative color setting. % For how to register it, refer to page 10-12. 6 If necessary, execute some management operations for the alternative color setting. % For detailed information on how to manage, refer to page 10-13. [After Adjustment] Displays the color of the alternative color. Every adjustment is reflected on the screen immediately. [C], [M], [Y], [K] Displays the CMYK values of the alternative color. Item Description [Original] Displays the original color to which the alternative color can be set. [C], [M], [Y], [K] Displays the CMYK values of the original color. [After Adjustment] Displays the color of the alternative color. Every adjustment is reflected on the screen immediately. [C], [M], [Y], [K] Displays the CMYK values of the alternative color. Item Description Menu Menu Items Description [File] [Login] When you connect another image controller, the [Login] screen appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-2. [Reload] Reload the information of the image controller connected currently. [Close] Closes this screen and exits this function. [Help] [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. [Version] Displays the version of Color Centro. ColorCentro (IC-601) 10-5 10.2 Select the Alternative Color / Add the New Alternative Color 10 10.2 Select the Alternative Color / Add the New Alternative Color When you adjust the existed alternative color setting, select the original color (input color) to which the alternative color can be set. When you add the new alternative color setting to the existed alternative color table, add the new input color. This section describes how to select the input color and how to add the new input color. Select the Input Color This section describes how to select the original color (input color) to which the alternative color can be set. 1 Click [RGB] tab or [CMYK] tab on [Alternative Color Management] screen. The list of each tab is displayed. % When you select the RGB input color, click [RGB] tab. % When you select the CMYK input color, click [CMYK] tab. 2 From the list, click the line of the alternative color (input color) which you adjust. The color which is displayed in [Original] of the selected line, is selected as the input color. % When you adjust the selected input color, go to the step described on page 7-7. % When you adjust the alternative color without adjustment of the input color, go to the step described on page 10-8. % The list displays the content of the alternative color table that is in the connecting image controllers for RGB or CMYK (it depends on [RGB] / [CMYK] tab selection). % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted alternative color settings when the adjustment result has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 10-12. % When you want to save the current alternative color setting and you want to create the new setting on base of the selected setting, make the duplication of it and adjust the duplication. For details on how to copy the alternative color and how to delete it, refer to page 10-13. Add the New Alternative Color 1 Click [RGB] tab or [CMYK] tab on [Alternative Color Management] screen. The list of each tab is displayed. % When you add the RGB input color, click [RGB] tab. % When you add the CMYK input color, click [CMYK] tab. 2 Click [New] on [Alternative Color Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 10-6 10.2 Select the Alternative Color / Add the New Alternative Color 10 One line is added on the list. At the added line of the list, the RGB values displayed are all "255" and the CMYK values displayed are all "0". % When you adjust the added input color, go to the step described on page 7-7. % When you adjust the alternative color without adjustment of the input color, go to the step described on page 10-8. ColorCentro (IC-601) 10-7 10.3 Adjust the Input Color 10 10.3 Adjust the Input Color This section describes how to adjust the selected original color (input color) and how to adjust the added input color. When you don't need to adjust the selected input color or added input color, go to the step described on page 10-8. When you want to save the current input color setting and you want to create the new setting on base of the selected setting, make the duplication of it and adjust the duplication. For details on how to copy the alternative color setting and how to delete it, refer to page 10-13. 1 When you select [CMYK] tab and select the input color, check [Show Device Value]. % When you check, you can specify the input color with the device value (from "0 " to "255"; 256 steps) % When you remove the check, you can specify the color with %. 2 Specify the RGB/CMYK values which are set in the input color to the input boxes under [Adjust] - [Original]. According to the settings, the preview area of [Adjust] - [Original] and [Original] on the list are updated. % When you select [RGB] tab, specify the value from "0" to "255" for each color. % When you select [CMYK] tab and check [Show Device Value], specify the value from "0" to "255" for each color. % When you select [CMYK] tab and remove the check of [Show Device Value], specify the value from "0" to "100" for each color. % When you input below the decimal point, the value rounded down is displayed. % Similar operation can be done when you change the RGB/CMYK values on the right of [Original] of the list. 3 Confirm the preview of [Original], and repeat from step 1 to step 2 as required. % When you adjust the output color to alternate, go to the step described on page 10-8. ColorCentro (IC-601) 10-8 10.4 Adjust the Output Color 10 10.4 Adjust the Output Color This section describes how to adjust the output color. To adjust the output color, there are two methods. One is a method of specifying the value and the other is a method of selecting from the spot color. Specify the Value 1 Specify the CMYK values which are set to the output color to the input boxes under [Adjust] - [After Adjustment]. According to the settings, the preview area of [Adjust] - [After Adjustment] and [After Adjustment] on the list are updated. % When you select [CMYK] tab and remove the check of [Show Device Value], specify the value from "0" to "100" for each color. % When you input below the decimal point, the value rounded down is displayed. % Similar operation can be done when you change the CMYK values on the right of [After Adjustment] of the list. 2 Confirm the preview of [After Adjustment], and repeat step 1 as required. % When you register the adjustment result, go to the step described on page 10-12. Select from Spot Color You can adopt the spot color to the alternative color as the processing of the image controller when the spot color can't be specified by the application. When you use the spot color as the alternative color, adjust the spot color to use beforehand. For detailed information on how to adjust the spot color, refer to page 9-2. 1 Click [Select from Spot Color]. [Select from Spot Color] screen appears. ColorCentro (IC-601) 10-9 10.4 Adjust the Output Color 10 2 Click [Table]. [Spot Color Select] screen appears. 3 From the tree view, select the place to save the spot color table. The list appears according to the selection. 4 From the list, select the spot color table to select the spot color. 5 Click [OK]. [Spot Color Select] screen is closed to return to [Select from Spot Color] screen. Selected spot color table is loaded, and the spot color appears on [Select from Spot Color] screen. 6 From the list, select the spot color to specify as the output color. The selected spot color is displayed to [Color]. 7 Click [OK]. [Select from Spot Color] screen is closed to returns to [Alternative Color Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 10-10 10.4 Adjust the Output Color 10 % When you click [Cancel], [Select from Spot Color] screen is closed to return to [Alternative Color Management] screen. 8 Confirm the preview of [After Adjustment], and repeat from step 1 to step 7 as required. % When you change the priority of the alternative color settings, go to the step described on page 7-13. % When you register the adjustment result, go to the step described on page 10-12. ColorCentro (IC-601) 10-11 10.5 Change the Priority of the Alternative Color 10 10.5 Change the Priority of the Alternative Color This section describes how to change the priority of the alternative color settings in the alternative color table. The priority defines which alternative color setting is adopted to output when there are multiple alternative color settings for one input color. When only one alternative color settings is for one input color, the priority setting isn't necessary. 1 From the list of [ Alternative Color Management] screen, select the alternative color setting to change the priority. % Displays the alternative color for the same input color in order of priority. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted alternative color settings when the adjustment result has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 10-12. 2 Click or to change the position of the selected alternative color setting. The position of the selected alternative color moves. % When you register the adjustment result, go to the step described on page 10-12. ColorCentro (IC-601) 10-12 10.6 Register the Alternative Color 10 10.6 Register the Alternative Color This section describes how to register the alternative color settings displayed on [Alternative Color Management] to the alternative color table which is used by the image controller. When you register the settings to the image controller, the adjusted alternative color can be adopted to the output. 1 Click [Register] on [Alternative Color Management] screen. The alternative color settings are registered to the alternative color table which is in the controller. ColorCentro (IC-601) 10-13 10.7 Alternative Color Management 10 10.7 Alternative Color Management This section describes how to manage the alternative color. Copy the Alternative Color You can duplicate the alternative color settings displayed on [Alternative Color Management] within the same alternative color table. When you adjust the alternative color using the existed alternative color setting, original settings of the alternative color is overwritten. When you want to save the current settings, make the duplication of it. 1 Select the alternative color setting to duplicate from the list of [Alternative Color Management]. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted alternative color settings when the adjustment result has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 10-12. 2 Click [Copy]. The duplication of the alternative color setting is generated in the alternative color table. % When you select the multiple alternative color settings, [Copy] isn't available. ColorCentro (IC-601) 10-14 10.7 Alternative Color Management 10 Delete the Alternative Color Setting You can delete the alternative color setting. 1 Select the alternative color setting to delete from the list of [Alternative Color Management]. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted alternative color settings when the adjustment result has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 10-12. 2 Click [Delete]. Confirmation screen appears. 3 To delete, click [OK]. The selected alternative color setting is deleted. % When you select the multiple alternative color settings, all of those are deleted at a time. % You can't restore the alternative color setting you have deleted. 11 Profile Management ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-2 11.1 Outline of Profile Management 11 11 Profile Management 11.1 Outline of Profile Management Use of the Color Centro enables to manage several profiles which are saved to the Local computer, Network computer, and the image controller, and are necessary for the color printing. The types of profile which Color Centro manages are as follows; - RGB Source Profile - CMYK Target Profile - Printer Profile - RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile - CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile In addition, Color Centro can register 50 profiles at the maximum to the image controller when the size of each profile is 10 MB or less. Color Centro manages profiles, and also it creates and edits those by starting the "Color Centro Profiler" utility. 11.1.1 [Profile Management] screen The profile management function of Color Centro uses [Profile Management] screen. [Profile Management] screen appears by clicking [Profile Management] button on the [Launcher] screen. To close this screen, select [Close] from [File] menu. [Profile Management] screen is composed as follows; Item Description [RGB Source Profile] According to the selection of the tree view, displays the saved RGB source profile. [CMYK Target Profile] According to the selection of the tree view, displays the saved CMYK target profile. [Printer Profile] According to the selection of the tree view, displays the saved printer profile. [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] According to the selection of the tree view, displays the saved RGBCMYK device link profile. [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] According to the selection of the tree view, displays the saved CMYK-CMYK target profile. (tree view) Displays the places where the profiles are saved ([Controller], [Local], and [Network]) in the tree format. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-3 11.1 Outline of Profile Management 11 List Items According to the selection of the tree view and profile type, the list items displayed on [Profile Management] screen are changed. The list items of the measurement result list on the [Profile Management] screen are as follows; When [Controller] is selected on the tree view, "*" mark is added after the name of the profile which was registered at factory shipping (default registered color profile). In addition, a red "@" mark is added before the name of the profile which is set as default on the current color setting. List Operations The list of the [Profile Management] screen can be sorted by list item. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-3. When you display [Profile Management] screen first after launching Color Centro, the list is displayed in ascending order of [Profile Name] (in case of [Controller]), or [File Name] (in case of [Local] or [Network]). (list) According to the selection of the buttons and the tree view on the screen, displays the saved profiles. [New] Starts "Color Centro Profiler" utility and creates the new profile. [Edit] Starts "Color Centro Profiler" utility and edits the selected profile from the list. [Copy] Makes a duplication of the selected profile from the list within [Controller], when [Controller] is selected on the tree view. [Delete] Deletes the profile selected from the list. [Reload] Updates the information of the list. [Change Table Information] Changes the table information (Saved Name, Memo) of the profile which is selected from the list. [Export]/[Register] Exports the selected profile on the list to [Local] / [Network], when [Controller] is selected on the tree view. Registers the profile selected on the list to [Controller], when a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view. [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. Status bar Displays the IP address and the port number of the image controller connected currently. Item Description Item Description [Profile Name] (in case of [Controller]) / [File Name] (in case of [Local] or [Network]) Displays the profile name (in case of [Controller]) or the file name of the profile. [Created Date/Time] (in case of [Controller]) Displays the created date/time of the profile. [Update Date/Time] Displays the date/time when the profile was updated. [Profile Name] (in case of [Local] or [Network]) Displays the profile name. [Paper Type] (in case of [Printer Profile]) Displays the paper type which the printer profile corresponds. [Memo] Displays the description of the profile. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-4 11.1 Outline of Profile Management 11 11.1.2 Menu of [Profile Management] screen The menu items of the [Profile Management] screen are as follows; Menu Menu Items Description [File] [Login] When you connect another image controller, the [Login] screen appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-2. [Profile Type] From the displayed sub menu, allows you to select the profile type to display on the list. [Reload] Updates the information of the list. [Sort] Sorts the content of the list by the selected list item. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-3. [Change Table Information] Changes the table information (Saved Name, Memo) of the profile which is selected from the list. [Delete] Deletes the profile selected from the list. [Copy] Makes a duplication of the selected profile from the list within [Controller], when [Controller] is selected on the tree view. [New] Starts "Color Centro Profiler" utility and creates the new profile. [Edit] Starts "Color Centro Profiler" utility and edits the selected profile from the list. [Export] Exports the selected profile on the list to [Local] / [Network], when [Controller] is selected on the tree view. [Import] Imports the profile selected on the list to [Controller], when [Local] or [Network] is selected on the tree view. [Close] Closes this screen and exits this function. [Help] [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. [Version] Displays the version of Color Centro. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-5 11.2 RGB Source Profile Management 11 11.2 RGB Source Profile Management This section describes how to copy, delete, reload, change table information, export, and import the RGB source profile. 11.2.1 Copy from the Image Controller You can make a duplication of the RGB source profile in the image controller, to the image controller. 1 Click [RGB Source Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [RGB Source Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 3 From the list, select the RGB source profile to copy. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 4 Click [Copy]. [Change Table Information] screen appears. % When you select the multiple RGB source profiles, [Copy] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Copy] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Copy]. 5 Specify [Saved Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 onebyte alpha-numerical characters). % You can't save the RGB source profile of the same name with those in the image controller. 6 Click [OK]. The duplication of the RGB source profile is generated in the image controller. 11.2.2 Delete You can delete the saved RGB source profile. 1 Click [RGB Source Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [RGB Source Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view and the list, select the RGB source profile to delete. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-6 11.2 RGB Source Profile Management 11 % You can delete the multiple RGB source profiles. 3 Click [Delete]. Confirmation screen appears. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Delete]. % When you select the RGB source profile which was registered at factory shipping, [Delete] isn't available. 4 To delete, click [Yes]. The selected RGB source profile is deleted. % When you select the multiple RGB source profiles, all of those are deleted at a time. % You can't restore the RGB source profile you have deleted. 11.2.3 Change the Information You can change the information of the saved RGB source profile. 1 Click [RGB Source Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [RGB Source Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view and the list, select the RGB source profile to change the information. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 3 Click [Change Table Information]. [Change Table Information] screen appears. % When you select the multiple RGB source profiles, [Change Table Information] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Change Table Information]. 4 Edit [Saved Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) as required. % But, you can't change the table name of the RGB source profile which was registered at factory shipping. 5 Click [OK]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-7 11.2 RGB Source Profile Management 11 The RGB source profile information is changed. 11.2.4 Export from the Image Controller You can export the RGB source profile of the image controller to [Local] or [Network]. 1 Click [RGB Source Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [RGB Source Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 3 From the list, select the RGB source profile to register. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 4 Click [Export]. [Save to Local] screen appears. % When you select the multiple RGB source profiles, [Export] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Export] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Export]. 5 Specify the saving place and file name for the RGB source profile to export, and click [Save]. Exporting to the specified place is executed. [Save to Local] screen is closed to return to [Profile Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-8 11.2 RGB Source Profile Management 11 11.2.5 Import (Register) to the Image Controller You can import (register) the RGB source profile of [Local] or [Network] in [Controller]. 1 Click [RGB Source Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [RGB Source Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 Select the places from [Local] or [Network] of the tree format, where the RGB source profiles are saved. The list appears according to the selection. 3 From the list, select the RGB source profile to import. 4 Click [Import]. [Import] screen appears. % When you select the multiple RGB source profiles, [Import] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Import] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Import]. 5 Specify [Saved Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 onebyte alpha-numerical characters). % You can't save the RGB source profile of the same name with those in the image controller. 6 Click [OK]. The RGB source profile is registered to [Controller]. [Import] screen is closed to return to [Profile Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-9 11.3 CMYK Target Profile Management 11 11.3 CMYK Target Profile Management This section describes how to copy, delete, reload, change table information, export, and import the CMYK target profile. 11.3.1 Copy from the Image Controller You can make a duplication of the CMYK target profile in the image controller, to the image controller. 1 Click [CMYK Target Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [CMYK Target Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 3 From the list, select the CMYK target profile to copy. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 4 Click [Copy]. [Change Table Information] screen appears. % When you select the multiple CMYK target profiles, [Copy] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Copy] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Copy]. 5 Specify [Saved Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 onebyte alpha-numerical characters). % You can't save the CMYK target profile of the same name with those in the image controller. 6 Click [OK]. The duplication of the CMYK target profile is generated in the image controller. 11.3.2 Delete You can delete the saved CMYK target profile. 1 Click [CMYK Target Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [CMYK Target Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view and the list, select the CMYK target profile to delete. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-10 11.3 CMYK Target Profile Management 11 % You can delete the multiple CMYK target profiles. 3 Click [Delete]. Confirmation screen appears. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Delete]. % When you select the CMYK target profile which was registered at factory shipping, [Delete] isn't available. 4 To delete, click [Yes]. The selected CMYK target profile is deleted. % When you select the multiple CMYK target profiles, all of those are deleted at a time. % You can't restore the CMYK target profile you have deleted. 11.3.3 Change the Information You can change the information of the saved CMYK target profile. 1 Click [CMYK Target Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [CMYK Target Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view and the list, select the CMYK target profile to change the information. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 3 Click [Change Table Information]. [Change Table Information] screen appears. % When you select the multiple CMYK target profiles, [Change Table Information] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Change Table Information]. 4 Edit [Saved Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) as required. % But, you can't change the table name of the CMYK target profile which was registered at factory shipping. 5 Click [OK]. The CMYK target profile information is changed. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-11 11.3 CMYK Target Profile Management 11 11.3.4 Export from the Image Controller You can export the CMYK target profile of the image controller to [Local] or [Network]. 1 Click [CMYK Target Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [CMYK Target Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 3 From the list, select the CMYK target profile to register. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 4 Click [Export]. [Save to Local] screen appears. % When you select the multiple CMYK target profiles, [Export] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Export] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Export]. 5 Specify the saving place and file name for the CMYK target profile to export, and click [Save]. Exporting to the specified place is executed. [Save to Local] screen is closed to return to [Profile Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-12 11.3 CMYK Target Profile Management 11 11.3.5 Import (Register) to the Image Controller You can import (register) the CMYK target profile of [Local] or [Network] in [Controller]. 1 Click [CMYK Target Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [CMYK Target Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 Select the places from [Local] or [Network] of the tree format, where the CMYK target profiles are saved. The list appears according to the selection. 3 From the list, select the CMYK target profile to import. 4 Click [Import]. [Import] screen appears. % When you select the multiple CMYK target profiles, [Import] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Import] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Import]. 5 Specify [Saved Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 onebyte alpha-numerical characters). % You can't save the CMYK target profile of the same name with those in the image controller. 6 Click [OK]. The CMYK target profile is registered to [Controller]. [Import] screen is closed to return to [Profile Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-13 11.4 Create the CMYK Target Profile 11 11.4 Create the CMYK Target Profile This section describes how to create the new CMYK target profile by launching Color Centro Profiler. The wizard screen appears by launching Color Centro Profiler. Following the instructions of the screen, you can create the CMYK target profile. The flow of the wizard is as follows; The following buttons appear on the wizard screen. Use those as required. - [Next]: Click this button when you go to the next screen after completing the setting of the displayed current screen. - [Back]: Click this button when you back to the previous screen. - [Cancel]: Click this button when you cancel the operation. - [Suspend the Operation]: This button appears when suspending and restarting of the operation are available. Click this button when you want to suspend your operation temporarily and restart thereafter. The setting you made can be saved to the file. For detailed information on how to suspend and restart your operation, refer to page 14-5. 11.4.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler You can create the CMYK target profile by using Color Centro Profiler. 1 Click [CMYK Target Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [CMYK Target Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 Click [New]. Confirmation of Procedure Name and Destination Settings Measurement Setting Chart Measurement UCR/GCR Level Setting Entering Comment Calculation Complete * Calculation is executed. * Use Measurement Instrument. * You can skip the Chart Measurement by Measurement Data File. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-14 11.4 Create the CMYK Target Profile 11 Color Centro Profiler is launched as wizard. [Confirmation of procedure] screen appears. 3 Confirm the contents, click [Next]. [Name Settings] screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-14. 11.4.2 Set the Profile Name and the Destination 1 Specify the name of CMYK target profile you create to [CMYK Target Profile Name] of [Name Settings] screen. % There is no need to enter the extension because of being added automatically. % You can't save the profile of the same name with those registered at factory shipping in the image controller. % You can't use "DEVICE" (not only the capital letter but also the small letter) for the profile name when you save the profile to the image controller. 2 Click [Browse]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-15 11.4 Create the CMYK Target Profile 11 [Select Destination Folder] screen appears. 3 Select the destination folder for saving the CMYK target profile you create and click [OK]. The destination folder and file name are displayed on [Destination Folder] and [File Name] of [Name Settings] screen. 4 Click [Next]. The Select Measurement Method screen appears. % When there is the profile with the same name, the confirmation message of overwriting appears. To save with another name, click [Cancel]. To overwrite, click [OK]. % Go to the step described on page 11-15. 11.4.3 Select the Measurement Method 1 Select [New Measurement] or [Use Existing Measurement File]. % When you select [New Measurement], go to the step 4. % When you select [Use Existing Measurement File], go to the step 2. 2 Click [Browse]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-16 11.4 Create the CMYK Target Profile 11 [Open] screen appears. 3 Select the measurement data file (.mcd) and click [Open]. The name of measurement data file appears in [Existing Measurement File]. 4 Click [Next]. % When you select [New Measurement], Chart Measurement screen appears. In this case, go to the step described on page 11-16. % When you select [Use Existing Measurement File], the UCR/GCR Setting screen appears. In this case, go to the step described on page 11-17. 11.4.4 Chart Measurement On the Chart Measurement screen, select the instrument and start the measurement. 0 To use the instrument, you need to install the device driver of the instrument to your computer. 0 The chart pattern and available paper size differ according to the selected instrument. 0 According to the selected instrument, measurement operations differ. For detailed information on how to operate, refer to user's guide of instrument respectively. 1 From [Instrument], select the instrument to use for measurement. According to the selection, the chart image appears on the upper-right of the screen. % [i11Sis (UV Filer)] returns the measurement result with the UV cut filter. 2 Click [Start] to start measurement. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-17 11.4 Create the CMYK Target Profile 11 % According to the selected instrument, the operation screen appears. Then, follow the instruction of the screen. % The current position of measurement appears on the chart image of the upper-right of the screen. % To stop the measurement, click [Stop]. % After acquirement of measurement data, [Save the Result] becomes available. % The value of each patch appears in the measurement result list. 3 Click [Save the Result] after completing measurement. [Save As] screen appears. 4 Specify the saving place and file name, and click [Save]. Returns to the Chart Measurement screen after saving the measurement result file. 5 Click [Next]. the UCR/GCR Setting screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-17. 11.4.5 Select UCR/GCR Setting On the UCR/GCR Setting screen, select the UCR/GCR level concerning the generation of the Black separation on CMYK separation process. 1 Select the UCR/GCR level from [UCR/GCR Setting] of the UCR/GCR Setting screen. % You can set the amount of CMY to be replaced with Black. % [Level 1 - Minimum Black Skeleton (Recommended)] decreases the amount of the generation of the Black separation most. % [Level 5 - Max Black: Full Black] increases the amount of the generation of the Black separation most. 2 Click [Next]. The Comment screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-18. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-18 11.4 Create the CMYK Target Profile 11 11.4.6 Enter the Comment On the Comment screen, enter the comment to embed to the profile you create, as required. You can confirm the comment when you select the profile on Color Centro Profiler. 1 Enter the comment to [Comment (Optional)]. 2 Click [Next]. Profile is calculated and generated. After completing calculation, the Calculation Result screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-19. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-19 11.4 Create the CMYK Target Profile 11 11.4.7 Confirm and Complete the Profile On the Calculation Result screen, displays the list of the setting of the generated CMYK-CMYK target profile. 1 Confirm the setting which is displayed on the Calculation Result screen. 2 Click [Next]. The Complete Profile screen appears. 3 Click [Finish]. The wizard is completed. % When you launch Color Centro Profiler by clicking [CMYK Target Profile] of [Profile Management], Color Centro Profiler is closed to return to [Profile Management] screen. % When you create the CMYK-CMYK device link profile with Color Centro Profiler, the Profile Determination screen appears. % When you create or edit the profile set with Color Centro Profiler, the wizard screen (the Profile Determination screen) appears, respectively. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-20 11.5 Printer Profile Management 11 11.5 Printer Profile Management This section describes how to copy, delete, reload, change table information, export and import the printer profile. 11.5.1 Copy from the Image Controller You can make a duplication of the printer profile in the image controller, to the image controller. 1 Click [Printer Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [Printer Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 3 From the list, select the printer profile to copy. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 4 Click [Copy]. [Change Table Information] screen appears. % When you select the multiple printer profiles, [Copy] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Copy] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Copy]. 5 Specify the name to [Saved Name] within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters. % You can't save the printer profile of the same name with those in the image controller. 6 Select [Paper Type Link]. 7 Edit [Memo] (within 128 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) as required. 8 Click [OK]. The duplication of the printer profile is generated in the image controller. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-21 11.5 Printer Profile Management 11 11.5.2 Delete You can delete the saved printer profile. 1 Click [Printer Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [Printer Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view and the list, select the printer profile to delete. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. % You can delete the multiple printer profiles. 3 Click [Delete]. Confirmation screen appears. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Delete]. % When you select the printer profile which was registered at factory shipping, [Delete] isn't available. 4 To delete, click [Yes]. The selected printer profile is deleted. % When you select the multiple printer profiles, all of those are deleted at a time. % You can't restore the printer profile you have deleted. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-22 11.5 Printer Profile Management 11 11.5.3 Change the Information You can change the information of the saved printer profile. 1 Click [Printer Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [Printer Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view and the list, select the printer profile to change the information. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 3 Click [Change Table Information]. [Change Table Information] screen appears. % When you select the multiple printer profiles, [Change Table Information] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Change Table Information]. 4 Specify the name to [Saved Name] within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters as required. % You can't save the printer profile of the same name with those in the image controller. % But, you can't change the table name of the printer profile which was registered at factory shipping. 5 Select [Paper Type Link], as required. 6 Edit [Memo] (within 128 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) as required. 7 Click [OK]. The printer profile information is changed. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-23 11.5 Printer Profile Management 11 11.5.4 Export from the Image Controller You can export the printer profile of the image controller to [Local] or [Network]. 1 Click [Printer Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [Printer Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 3 From the list, select the printer profile to register. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 4 Click [Export]. [Save to Local] screen appears. % When you select the multiple printer profiles, [Export] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Export] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Export]. 5 Specify the saving place and file name for the printer profile to export, and click [Save]. Exporting to the specified place is executed. [Save to Local] screen is closed to return to [Profile Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-24 11.5 Printer Profile Management 11 11.5.5 Import (Register) to the Image Controller You can import (register) the printer profile of [Local] or [Network] in [Controller]. 1 Click [Printer Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [Printer Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 Select the places from [Local] or [Network] of the tree format, where the printer profiles are saved. The list appears according to the selection. 3 From the list, select the printer profile to import. 4 Click [Import]. [Import] screen appears. % When you select the multiple printer profiles, [Import] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Import] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Import]. 5 Specify the name to [Saved Name] within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters. % You can't save the printer profile of the same name with those in the image controller. 6 Select [Paper Type Link]. 7 Edit [Memo] (within 128 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) as required. 8 Click [OK]. The printer profile is registered to [Controller]. [Import] screen is closed to return to [Profile Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-25 11.6 Create the Printer Profile 11 11.6 Create the Printer Profile This section describes how to create the new printer profile by launching Color Centro Profiler. The wizard screen appears by launching Color Centro Profiler. Following the instructions of the screen, you can create the printer profile. The flow of the wizard is as follows; The following buttons appear on the wizard screen. Use those as required. - [Next]: Click this button when you go to the next screen after completing the setting of the displayed current screen. - [Back]: Click this button when you back to the previous screen. - [Cancel]: Click this button when you cancel the operation. - [Suspend the Operation]: This button appears when suspending and restarting of the operation are available. Click this button when you want to suspend your operation temporarily and restart thereafter. The setting you made can be saved to the file. For detailed information on how to suspend and restart your operation, refer to page 14-5. Confirmation of Procedure Name and Destination Settings Measurement/Paper Info/other Settings Model Confirmation Chart Measurement UCR/GCR Level Setting Entering Comment Calculation Complete * Calculation is executed. * Use Measurement Instrument. * You can skip the Chart Measurement by Measurement Data File. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-26 11.6 Create the Printer Profile 11 11.6.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler You can create the printer profile by using Color Centro Profiler. 1 Click [Printer Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [Printer Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 Click [New]. Color Centro Profiler is launched as wizard. [Confirmation of procedure] screen appears. 3 Confirm the contents, click [Next]. [Name Settings] screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-26. 11.6.2 Set the Profile Name and the Destination 1 Specify the name of printer profile you create to [Printer Profile Name] of [Name Settings] screen. % There is no need to enter the extension because of being added automatically. % You can't save the profile of the same name with those registered at factory shipping in the image controller. % You can't use "DEVICE" (not only the capital letter but also the small letter) for the profile name when you save the profile to the image controller. 2 Click [Browse]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-27 11.6 Create the Printer Profile 11 [Select Destination Folder] screen appears. 3 Select the destination folder for saving the printer profile you create and click [Open]. The destination folder and file name are displayed on [Destination Folder] and [File Name] of [Name Settings] screen. 4 Click [Next]. The Select Measurement Method / Paper Setting screen appears. % When there is the profile with the same name, the confirmation message of overwriting appears. To save with another name, click [Cancel]. To overwrite, click [OK]. % Go to the step described on page 11-27. 11.6.3 Select Measurement Method / Paper Setting On the Select Measurement Method / Paper Setting screen, you can select the measurement method and set the related paper setting. 1 From [Measurement Setting], select [New Measurement] or [Use Existing Measurement File]. % When you select [New Measurement], go to the step 5. % When you select [Use Existing Measurement File], go to the step 2. 2 Click [Browse]. [Open] screen appears. 3 Select the measurement data file (.mcd) and click [Open]. The name of measurement data file appears in [Existing Measurement File]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-28 11.6 Create the Printer Profile 11 4 When you set [Paper Type], [Paper Color], [Glossy Mode], and [Paper Weight] using the tray information and paper profile of the main body, you can display [Get paper Information] screen by clicking [Get Tray/Paper Profile information]. % When you connect to the image controller which is for the selected printer, [Get Tray/Paper Profile information] is available. % When you use [Get Tray/Paper Profile information], go to the step 6. % When you set [Paper Type], [Paper Color], [Paper Weight] and [Glossy Mode] manually, go to step 7. 5 On [Get paper Information] screen, select [Get Tray Information] or [Get Paper Profile] and select the tray information or paper profile which you use then click [OK]. The information you get is displayed to [Tray / Paper Profile Information]. [Paper Type], [Paper Color], [Paper Weight] and [Glossy Mode] are set automatically. 6 Select paper type, paper color, paper weight and glossy mode which you use from [Paper Type], [Paper Color], [Weight Unit], [Glossy Mode] and [Paper Weight]. % When you use [Get Tray/Paper Profile information], you can't set manually [Paper Type], [Paper Color], [Paper Weight] and [Glossy Mode]. 7 Click [Next]. % When you select [New Measurement] from [Measurement Setting], the Chart Measurement screen appears. In this case, go to the step described on page 11-28. % When you select [Use Existing Measurement File] from [Measurement Setting], the UCR/GCR Setting screen appears. In this case, go to the step described on page 11-30. 11.6.4 Chart Measurement On the Chart Measurement screen, select the instrument and start the measurement. 0 To use the instrument, you need to install the device driver of the instrument to your computer. 0 The chart pattern and available paper size differ according to the selected instrument. 0 According to the selected instrument, measurement operations differ. For detailed information on how to operate, refer to user's guide of instrument respectively. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-29 11.6 Create the Printer Profile 11 1 From [Instrument], select the instrument to use for measurement. According to the selection, the chart image appears on the upper-right of the screen. % [i11Sis (UV Filer)] returns the measurement result with the UV cut filter. 2 Specify the copy number of the chart outputting to [Copies]. 3 Click [Output] to print the chart. 4 Click [Start] to start measurement. % According to the selected instrument, the operation screen appears. Then, follow the instruction of the screen. % The current position of measurement appears on the chart image of the upper-right of the screen. % To stop the measurement, click [Stop]. % After acquirement of measurement data, [Save the Result] becomes available. % The value of each patch appears in the measurement result list. 5 Click [Save the Result] after completing measurement. [Save As] screen appears. 6 Specify the saving place and file name, and click [Save]. Returns to the Chart Measurement screen after saving the measurement result file. 7 Click [Next]. the UCR/GCR Setting screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-30. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-30 11.6 Create the Printer Profile 11 11.6.5 Select UCR/GCR Setting On the UCR/GCR Setting screen, select the UCR/GCR level concerning the generation of the Black separation on CMYK separation process. 1 Select the UCR/GCR level from [UCR/GCR Setting] of the UCR/GCR Setting screen. % You can set the amount of CMY to be replaced with Black. % [Level 1 - Minimum Black Skeleton (Recommended)] decreases the amount of the generation of the Black separation most. % [Level 5 - Max Black: Full Black] increases the amount of the generation of the Black separation most. 2 Click [Next]. The Comment screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-30. 11.6.6 Enter the Comment On the Comment screen, enter the comment to embed to the profile you create, as required. You can confirm the comment when you select the profile on Color Centro Profiler. 1 Enter the comment to [Comment (Optional)]. 2 Click [Next]. Profile is calculated and generated. After completing calculation, the Calculation Result screen appears. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-31 11.6 Create the Printer Profile 11 % Go to the step described on page 11-31. 11.6.7 Confirm and Complete the Profile On the Calculation Result screen, displays the list of the setting of the generated printer profile. 1 Confirm the setting which is displayed on the Calculation Result screen. 2 Click [Next]. The Complete Profile screen appears. 3 Click [Finish]. The wizard is completed. % When you launch Color Centro Profiler by clicking [Printer Profile] of [Profile Management], Color Centro Profiler is closed to return to [Profile Management] screen. % When you create the RGB-CMYK device link profile with Color Centro Profiler, the Profile Determination screen appears. % When you create the CMYK-CMYK device link profile with Color Centro Profiler, the Profile Determination screen appears. % When you create or edit the profile set with Color Centro Profiler, the wizard screen (the Profile Determination screen) appears, respectively. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-32 11.7 RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile Management 11 11.7 RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile Management This section describes how to copy, delete, reload, change table information, export and import the RGBCMYK device link profile. 11.7.1 Copy from the Image Controller You can make a duplication of the RGB-CMYK device link profile in the image controller, to the image controller. 1 Click [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 3 From the list, select the RGB-CMYK device link profile to copy. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 4 Click [Copy]. [Change Table Information] screen appears. % When you select the multiple RGB-CMYK device link profiles, [Copy] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Copy] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Copy]. 5 Specify [Saved Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 onebyte alpha-numerical characters). % You can't save the RGB-CMYK device link profile of the same name with those in the image controller. 6 Click [OK]. The duplication of the RGB-CMYK device link profile is generated in the image controller. 11.7.2 Delete You can delete the saved RGB-CMYK device link profile. 1 Click [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view and the list, select the RGB-CMYK device link profile to delete. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-33 11.7 RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile Management 11 % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. % You can delete the multiple RGB-CMYK device link profiles. 3 Click [Delete]. Confirmation screen appears. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Delete]. % When you select the RGB-CMYK device link profile which was registered at factory shipping, [Delete] isn't available. 4 To delete, click [Yes]. The selected RGB-CMYK device link profile is deleted. % When you select the multiple RGB-CMYK device link profiles, all of those are deleted at a time. % You can't restore the RGB-CMYK device link profile you have deleted. 11.7.3 Change the Information You can change the information of the saved RGB-CMYK device link profile. 1 Click [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view and the list, select the RGB-CMYK device link profile to change the information. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 3 Click [Change Table Information]. [Change Table Information] screen appears. % When you select the multiple RGB-CMYK device link profiles, [Copy] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Change Table Information]. 4 Edit [Saved Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) as required. % But, you can't change the table name of the RGB-CMYK device link profile which was registered at factory shipping. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-34 11.7 RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile Management 11 5 Click [OK]. The RGB-CMYK device link profile information is changed. 11.7.4 Export from the Image Controller You can export the RGB-CMYK device link profile of the image controller to [Local] or [Network]. 1 Click [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 3 From the list, select the RGB-CMYK device link profile to export. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 4 Click [Export]. [Save to Local] screen appears. % When you select the multiple RGB-CMYK device link profiles, [Export] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Export] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Export]. 5 Specify the saving place and file name for the RGB-CMYK device link profile to export, and click [Save]. Exporting to the specified place is executed. [Save to Local] screen is closed to return to [Profile Management] screen. 11.7.5 Import (Register) to the Image Controller You can import (register) the RGB-CMYK device link profile of [Local] or [Network] in [Controller]. 1 Click [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 Select the places from [Local] or [Network] of the tree format, where the RGB-CMYK device link profiles are saved. The list appears according to the selection. 3 From the list, select the RGB-CMYK device link profile to import. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-35 11.7 RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile Management 11 4 Click [Import]. [Import] screen appears. % When you select the multiple RGB-CMYK device link profiles, [Import] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Import] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Import]. 5 Specify [Saved Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 onebyte alpha-numerical characters). % You can't save the RGB-CMYK device link profile of the same name with those in the image controller. 6 Click [OK]. The RGB-CMYK device link profiles are registered to [Controller]. [Import] screen is closed to return to [Profile Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-36 11.8 Create the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 11.8 Create the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile This section describes how to create the new RGB-CMYK device link profile by launching Color Centro Profiler. The wizard screen appears by launching Color Centro Profiler. Following the instructions of the screen, you can create the RGB-CMYK device link profile. The flow of the wizard is as follows; The following buttons appear on the wizard screen. Use those as required. - [Next]: Click this button when you go to the next screen after completing the setting of the displayed current screen. - [Back]: Click this button when you back to the previous screen. - [Cancel]: Click this button when you cancel the operation. - [Suspend the Operation]: This button appears when suspending and restarting of the operation are available. Click this button when you want to suspend your operation temporarily and restart thereafter. The setting you made can be saved to the file. For detailed information on how to suspend and restart your operation, refer to page 14-5. 11.8.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler You can create the RGB-CMYK device link profile by using Color Centro Profiler. 1 Click [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 Click [New]. Confirmation of Procedure Name and Destination Settings Profile Creation Profile Settings Color Conversion Setting Entering Comment Calculation Complete * As required, you can create profiles. * Calculation is executed. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-37 11.8 Create the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 Color Centro Profiler is launched as wizard. [Confirmation of procedure] screen appears. 3 Confirm the contents, click [Next]. [Name Settings] screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-37. 11.8.2 Set the Profile Name and the Destination 1 Specify the name of RGB-CMYK device link profile you create to [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile Name] of [Name Settings] screen. % There is no need to enter the extension because of being added automatically. % You can't save the profile of the same name with those registered at factory shipping in the image controller. % You can't use "DEVICE" (not only the capital letter but also the small letter) for the profile name when you save the profile to the image controller. 2 Click [Browse]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-38 11.8 Create the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 [Select Destination Folder] screen appears. 3 Select the destination folder for saving the RGB-CMYK device link profile you create and click [OK]. The destination folder and file name are displayed on [Destination Folder] and [File Name] of [Name Settings] screen. 4 Click [Next]. The Profile Determination screen appears % When there is the profile with the same name, the confirmation message of overwriting appears. To save with another name, click [Cancel]. To overwrite, click [OK]. % Go to the step described on page 11-38. 11.8.3 Determine the Profiles On the Profile Determination screen, specify the printer profile and the RGB source profile which are used by RGB-CMYK device link profile. In addition, you can create the printer profile as required. 1 Specify the name of printer profile which is used by RGB-CMYK device link profile. When you use the existed printer profile, click [Browse]. When you create the new printer profile, click [Create]. % When you click [Browse], [Load Printer Profile] screen appears. In this case, go to the step 2. % When you click [Create], go to step described from page 11-26 to page 11-31. 2 On the screen displayed by clicking [Browse] of [Load Printer Profile], select a printer profile to use and click [Open]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-39 11.8 Create the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 The selected printer profile appears on [Load Printer Profile]. As required, set [Paper Type], [Paper Color], [Paper Weight] and [Glossy Mode]. Then, click [Finish] to return to the Profile Determination screen. 3 Specify the RGB source profile which is used by RGB-CMYK device link profile. When you use [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB] which are preset to the image controller, select [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB]. When you specify the other RGB source profile, select [Other] and click [Browse]. % When you click [Browse], go to step 4. % When you select [sRGB] or [AdobeRGB], go to step 5. 4 On the screen displayed by clicking [RGB Source Profile] - [Browse], select the RGB source profile used and click [Open]. The selected RGB source profile is displayed below [Other] of [RGB Source Profile]. 5 Click [Next]. The Customize Color Conversions screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-40. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-40 11.8 Create the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 11.8.4 Customize the Color Conversions On the Customize Color Conversions screen, you can set the rendering intent. 1 From [RGB-CMYK Conversion] - [Rendering Intent], select the rendering intent. % [Perceptual] is the setting to represent the color near to the color which is before conversion. % [Saturation] is the setting to represent the color which maintains as much as possible the brightness of the color which is before conversion. % When you make all contents of the setting on the screen the same content as recommended setting, click [Undo]. 2 Click [Confirmation Print] for the test printing. [Confirmation Print] screen appears. 3 Specify the setting of confirmation printing and click [Print]. % Click [Browse] to display the screen to select the image for printing. % Click [Select Tray] to display the screen to specify the tray used by confirmation printing. % From [Screen Setting], select the screen setting used by confirmation printing. % Specify the port number used by confirmation printing to [Port Number]. % When you click [Cancel], [Confirmation Print] screen is closed to return to the Customize Color Conversions screen. 4 Confirm the result of test printing. 5 Click [Next]. The Comment screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-41. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-41 11.8 Create the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 11.8.5 Enter the Comment On the Comment screen, enter the comment to embed to the profile you create, as required. You can confirm the comment when you select the profile on Color Centro Profiler. 1 Enter the comment to [Comment (Optional)]. 2 Click [Next]. Profile is calculated and generated. After completing calculation, the Calculation Result screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-42. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-42 11.8 Create the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 11.8.6 Confirm and Complete the Profile On the Calculation Result screen, displays the list of the setting of the generated RGB-CMYK device link profile. 1 Confirm the setting which is displayed on the Calculation Result screen. 2 Click [Next]. The Complete Profile screen appears. 3 Click [Finish]. The wizard is completed. Color Centro Profiler is closed to return to [Profile Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-43 11.9 Edit the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 11.9 Edit the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile This section describes how to edit the RGB-CMYK device link profile by launching Color Centro Profiler. Color Centro Profiler enables the adjustment of the point color per object and the adjustment of the profile curve. The wizard screen appears by launching Color Centro Profiler. Following the instructions of the screen, you can edit the RGB-CMYK device link profile. The flow of the wizard is as follows; The following buttons appear on the wizard screen. Use those as required. - [Next]: Click this button when you go to the next screen after completing the setting of the displayed current screen. - [Back]: Click this button when you back to the previous screen. - [Cancel]: Click this button when you cancel the operation. - [Suspend the Operation]: This button appears when suspending and restarting of the operation are available. Click this button when you want to suspend your operation temporarily and restart thereafter. The setting you made can be saved to the file. For detailed information on how to suspend and restart your operation, refer to page 14-5. 11.9.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler You can edit the RGB-CMYK device link profile by using Color Centro Profiler. 1 Click [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view and the list, select the RGB-CMYK device link profile to edit. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 3 Click [Edit]. Confirmation of Procedure Name and Destination Settings Point Color/ Profile Curve Adjustment Entering Comment Calculation Confirmation of Result Complete * Calculation is executed. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-44 11.9 Edit the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 Color Centro Profiler is launched as wizard. [Confirmation of procedure] screen appears. 4 Confirm the contents, click [Next]. [Name Settings] screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-44. 11.9.2 Set the Profile Name and the Destination 1 Specify the name of RGB-CMYK device link profile you edit to [RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile Name] of [Name Settings] screen. % When you save the RGB-CMYK device link profile with another name or to another place, enter the profile name and go to step 2. % When you overwrite the RGB-CMYK device link profile in which some settings are edited, go to step 4. % You can't save the profile of the same name with those registered at factory shipping in the image controller. % You can't use "DEVICE" (not only the capital letter but also the small letter) for the profile name when you save the profile to the image controller. 2 Click [Browse]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-45 11.9 Edit the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 [Select Destination Folder] screen appears. 3 Select the destination folder for saving the RGB-CMYK device link profile you edit and click [OK]. The destination folder and file name are displayed on [Destination Folder] and [File Name] of [Name Settings] screen. 4 Click [Next]. The Point Color Adjustment/Profile Curve Adjustment screen appears. % When there is the profile with the same name, the confirmation message of overwriting appears. To save with another name, click [Cancel]. To overwrite, click [OK]. % Go to the step described on page 11-45. 11.9.3 Adjust the Point Color / Profile Curve On the Point Color Adjustment/Profile Curve Adjustment screen, you can execute the adjustment of the specified color outputting and profile curve. 1 When you execute the adjustment of the point color and the adjustment of the profile curve, click [Adjust]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-46 11.9 Edit the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 The Adjustment screen appears. 2 If necessary, adjust the point color as follows; % When you add the new point color, execute the operation described on page 11-47. % When you edit the existing point color, execute the operation described on page 11-47. % When you delete the existing point color, execute the operation described on page 11-48. 3 If necessary, execute the adjustment of the profile curve. % For detailed information on how to adjust the profile curve, refer topage 11-48. 4 Click [Confirmation Print] for the test printing. [Confirmation Print] screen appears. 5 Specify the setting of confirmation printing and click [Print]. % Click [Browse] to display the screen to select the image for printing. % Click [Select Tray] to display the screen to specify the tray used by confirmation printing. % From [Screen Setting], select the screen setting used by confirmation printing. % Specify the port number used by confirmation printing to [Port Number]. % When you click [Cancel], [Confirmation Print] screen is closed to return to the Adjustment screen. 6 Confirm the result of test printing and click [OK]. The Adjustment is closed to return to the Point Color Adjustment/Profile Curve Adjustment screen. 7 Click [Next]. Profile is calculated and generated. After completing calculation, the Complete screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-49. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-47 11.9 Edit the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 Add the New Spot Color 1 Click [New]. A numbered line is added on [Adjustment Point]. 2 Specify the value (0 to 255) of the added point color of the added line to [R], [G] and [B]. Or, select the color from [Color Setting] screen displayed by clicking [Color Palette]. And click [OK]. The new input color is displayed on [Pointed Color]. 3 From [Effective Range], select the effective range. The color conversion result of the adjusted point is displayed on [Result] and [After adj.]. In addition, the color of [Result] is displayed on the upper-left of the Sample Color (below the [Result]) and the color of [After adj.] is displayed on the upper-right. % When you select [Narrow], the result of adjustment has influence on the color range which includes only the near colors to the input color. % When you select [Wide], the result of adjustment has influence on the color range which includes the colors which are away from the input color. % When you select [Normal], it has influence on the middle range between [Narrow] and [Wide]. % You can specify [Effective Range] per adjustment point. % The values displayed on [Result] and [After adj.] are the value to which Input curve and color conversion table are applied. (Output curve is not applied to the curve yet.) 4 Enter the value into [Add. Value] to make the value of [After adj.] the target value. % When you discard the setting of [Add. Value], click [Undo] of [Point Color Adjustment]. Edit the Existing Point Color 1 From [Adjustment Point], select the adjustment point (input color) to edit. The input color is displayed on the lower of the Sample Color (below [Result]). 2 From [Effective Range], select the effective range. The color conversion result of the adjusted point is displayed on [Result] and [After adj.]. In addition, the color of [Result] is displayed on the upper-left of the Sample Color and the color of [After adj.] is displayed on the upper-right. % When you select [Narrow], the result of adjustment has influence on the color range which includes only the near colors to the input color. % When you select [Wide], the result of adjustment has influence on the color range which includes the colors which are away from the input color. % When you select [Normal], it has influence on the middle range between [Narrow] and [Wide]. % You can specify [Effective Range] per adjustment point. % The values displayed on [Result] and [After adj.] are the value to which Input curve and color conversion table are applied. (Output curve is not applied to the curve yet.) ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-48 11.9 Edit the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 3 Enter the value into [Add. Value] to make the value of [After adj.] the target value. % When you discard the setting of [Add. Value], click [Undo] of [Point Color Adjustment]. Delete the Existing Point Color 1 From [Adjustment Point], select the adjustment point (input color) to delete. 2 Click [Delete]. The selected adjustment point is deleted. Adjust the Profile Curve 1 From [Adjustment Curve], select [Input] or [Output]. % When you execute the adjustment of input curve, select [Input]. % When you execute the adjustment of output curve, select [Output]. 2 Select the combination of colors from [Combination]. According to the selection from [Combination], [View] check box per each color and [Adjustment] radio button per each color appear. % When you select [Input], select [R/G/B] or [RGB]. % When you select [Output], select [C/M/Y/K], [CMY/K] or [CMYK]. % When you select [R/G/B] or [C/M/Y/K], you can adjust the profile curves of each color. % When you select [RGB] or [CMYK], you can adjust the consolidated profile curves of RGB or CMYK. % When you select [CMY/K], you can adjust the consolidated profile curve of CMY and the profile curve of K. 3 When you want to display the profile curve of one color, check [View] of that color. % When you want to hide the profile curve of one color, remove the check mark from [View] of that color. 4 When you want to adjust the profile curve of one color, select [Adj.] of that color. % When check mark of [View] for one color is not selected and you select [Adj.] for the same color, [View] is checked automatically. 5 To execute the adjustment of the profile curve, you can drag and move the beginning point/ending point (at both ends of the profile curve) and adjustment points (added by the clicking on the profile curve). % The selected adjustment point appears as a small red square. % By clicking [Previous] or [Next], you can switch the point selection to the previous or the next. % You can move the selected point by entering the coordinate values into the input boxes which are on the center of vertical/horizontal axises. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-49 11.9 Edit the RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 % When you want to delete the added point, drag it to the adjacent point or drop it outside of the profile curve area. % When you want to reset the adjusted setting, click [Undo] of [Profile Curve Adjustment]. 11.9.4 Complete the Profile After completing calculation, the Complete Profile screen appears. 1 Click [Finish]. The wizard is completed. Color Centro Profiler is closed to return to [Profile Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-50 11.10 CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile Management 11 11.10 CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile Management This section describes how to copy, delete, reload, change table information, export, and import the CMYKCMYK device link profile. 11.10.1 Copy from the Image Controller You can make a duplication of the CMYK-CMYK device link profile in the image controller, to the image controller. 1 Click [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 3 From the list, select the CMYK-CMYK device link profile to copy. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 4 Click [Copy]. [Change Table Information] screen appears. % When you select the multiple CMYK-CMYK device link profiles, [Copy] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Copy] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Copy]. 5 Specify [Saved Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 onebyte alpha-numerical characters). % You can't save the CMYK-CMYK device link profile of the same name with those in the image controller. 6 Click [OK]. The duplication of the CMYK-CMYK device link profile is generated in the image controller. 11.10.2 Delete You can delete the saved CMYK-CMYK device link profile. 1 Click [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view and the list, select the CMYK-CMYK device link profile to delete. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-51 11.10 CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile Management 11 % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. % You can delete the multiple CMYK-CMYK device link profiles. 3 Click [Delete]. Confirmation screen appears. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Delete]. % When you select the CMYK-CMYK device link profile which was registered at factory shipping, [Delete] isn't available. 4 To delete, click [Yes]. The selected CMYK-CMYK device link profile is deleted. % When you select the multiple CMYK-CMYK device link profiles, all of those are deleted at a time. % You can't restore the CMYK-CMYK device link profile you have deleted. 11.10.3 Change the Information You can change the information of the saved CMYK-CMYK device link profile. 1 Click [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view and the list, select the CMYK-CMYK device link profile to change the information. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 3 Click [Change Table Information]. [Change Table Information] screen appears. % When you select the multiple CMYK-CMYK device link profiles, [Copy] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Change Table Information]. 4 Edit [Saved Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) as required. % But, you can't change the table name of the CMYK-CMYK device link profile which was registered at factory shipping. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-52 11.10 CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile Management 11 5 Click [OK]. The CMYK-CMYK device link profile information is changed. 11.10.4 Export from the Image Controller You can export the CMYK-CMYK device link profile of the image controller to [Local] or [Network]. 1 Click [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. 3 From the list, select the CMYK-CMYK device link profile to export. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 4 Click [Export]. [Save to Local] screen appears. % When you select the multiple CMYK-CMYK device link profiles, [Export] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Export] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Export]. 5 Specify the saving place and file name for the CMYK-CMYK device link profile to export, and click [Save]. Exporting to the specified place is executed. [Save to Local] screen is closed to return to [Profile Management] screen. 11.10.5 Import (Register) to the Image Controller You can import (register) the CMYK-CMYK device link profile of [Local] or [Network] in [Controller]. 1 Click [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 Select the places from [Local] or [Network] of the tree format, where the CMYK-CMYK device link profiles are saved. The list appears according to the selection. 3 From the list, select the CMYK-CMYK device link profile to import. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-53 11.10 CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile Management 11 4 Click [Import]. [Import] screen appears. % When you select the multiple CMYK-CMYK device link profiles, [Import] isn't available. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Import] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Import]. 5 Specify [Saved Name] (within 31 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Memo] (within 128 onebyte alpha-numerical characters). % You can't save the CMYK-CMYK device link profile of the same name with those in the image controller. 6 Click [OK]. The CMYK-CMYK device link profiles registered to [Controller]. [Import] screen is closed to return to [Profile Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-54 11.11 Create the CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 11.11 Create the CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile This section describes how to create the new CMYK-CMYK device link profile by launching Color Centro Profiler. The wizard screen appears by launching Color Centro Profiler. Following the instructions of the screen, you can create the CMYK-CMYK device link profile. The flow of the wizard is as follows; The following buttons appear on the wizard screen. Use those as required. - [Next]: Click this button when you go to the next screen after completing the setting of the displayed current screen. - [Back]: Click this button when you back to the previous screen. - [Cancel]: Click this button when you cancel the operation. - [Suspend the Operation]: This button appears when suspending and restarting of the operation are available. Click this button when you want to suspend your operation temporarily and restart thereafter. The setting you made can be saved to the file. For detailed information on how to suspend and restart your operation, refer to page 14-5. 11.11.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler You can create the CMYK-CMYK device link profile by using Color Centro Profiler. 1 Click [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 Click [New]. Confirmation of Procedure Name and Destination Settings Profile Creation Profile Settings Color Conversion Setting Entering Comment Calculation Confirmation of Result Task Selection Measurement Feedback Complete * As required, you can create profiles. * Calculation is executed. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-55 11.11 Create the CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 Color Centro Profiler is launched as wizard. [Confirmation of procedure] screen appears. 3 Confirm the contents, click [Next]. [Name Settings] screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-55. 11.11.2 Set the Profile Name and the Destination 1 Specify the name of CMYK-CMYK device link profile you create to [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile Name] of [Name Settings] screen. % There is no need to enter the extension because of being added automatically. % You can't save the profile of the same name with those registered at factory shipping in the image controller. % You can't use "DEVICE" (not only the capital letter but also the small letter) for the profile name when you save the profile to the image controller. 2 Click [Browse]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-56 11.11 Create the CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 [Select Destination Folder] screen appears. 3 Select the destination folder for saving the CMYK-CMYK device link profile you create and click [OK]. The destination folder and file name are displayed on [Destination Folder] and [File Name] of [Name Settings] screen. 4 Click [Next]. The Profile Determination screen appears % When there is the profile with the same name, the confirmation message of overwriting appears. To save with another name, click [Cancel]. To overwrite, click [OK]. % Go to the step described on page 11-56. 11.11.3 Determine the Profiles On the Profile Determination screen, specify the printer profile and the CMYK target profile which are used by CMYK-CMYK device link profile. In addition, you can create the printer profile and the CMYK target profile as required. 1 Specify the name of printer profile which is used by CMYK-CMYK device link profile. When you use the existed printer profile, click [Browse]. When you create the new printer profile, click [Create]. % When you click [Browse], [Load Printer Profile] screen appears. In this case, go to the step 2. % When you click [Create], go to step described from page 11-26 to page 11-31. 2 On the screen displayed by clicking [Browse] of [Load Printer Profile], select a printer profile to use and click [Open]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-57 11.11 Create the CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 The selected printer profile appears on [Load Printer Profile]. As required, set [Paper Type], [Paper Color], [Paper Weight] and [Glossy Mode]. Then, click [Finish] to return to the Profile Determination screen. 3 Specify the CMYK target profile which is used by CMYK-CMYK device link profile. When you use the existed CMYK target profile, click [Browse]. When you create the new CMYK target profile, click [Create]. % When you click [Browse], go to step 4. % When you click [Create], go to step described from page 11-14 to page 11-19. 4 On the screen displayed by clicking [CMYK Target Profile] - [Browse], select the CMYK target profile used and click [Open]. The selected CMYK target profile is displayed to [Selected Profile] of [CMYK Target Profile]. 5 Click [Next]. The Customize Color Conversions screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-58. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-58 11.11 Create the CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 11.11.4 Customize the Color Conversions On the Customize Color Conversions screen, you can set the rendering intent, the preserve mid-tone and preserve solid. 1 From [CMYK-CMYK Conversion] - [Rendering Intent], select the rendering intent. % [Relative Colorimetric] is the setting to execute color conversion regarding the paper color as completely white. The paper color parts are represented as colorlessness after color conversion. % [Absolute Colorimetric] is the setting to execute color conversion maintaining the measurement value of the paper color. The paper color parts are represented with the color near the actual paper color after color conversion. When you select [Absolute Colorimetric], [Preserve Mid-Tone] and [Preserve Solid] are not available. % When you make all contents of the setting on the screen the same content as recommended setting, click [Undo]. 2 When you set the preserve mid-tone for one color, check [Preserve Mid-Tone] of that color. % [Preserve Mid-Tone] is a setting to recompose the color after the color conversion as the same one color which has composed the color before the color conversion. % The setting of [C], [M], [Y] and [K] is the setting for the color composed of C/M/Y/K only. % The setting of [R] is the setting for the color composed of [M] and [Y]. % The setting of [G] is the setting for the color composed of [C] and [Y]. % The setting of [B] is the setting for the color composed of [C] and [M]. % In some cases, you can't set [Preserve Mid-Tone] and [Preserve Solid] at the same time. 3 When you set the preserve solid for one color, check [Preserve Solid] of that color. % [Preserve Solid] is a setting to represent the solid part after the color conversion with the same color which is used for the solid part before the color conversion. % The setting of [C], [M], [Y], and [K] is the setting about the color composed of C/M/Y/K only, % The setting of [R] is the setting for the color composed of [M] and [Y]. % The setting of [G] is the setting for the color composed of [C] and [Y]. % The setting of [B] is the setting for the color composed of [C] and [M]. % In some cases, you can't set [Preserve Mid-Tone] and [Preserve Solid] at the same time. 4 Click [Confirmation Print] for the test printing. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-59 11.11 Create the CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 [Confirmation Print] screen appears. 5 Specify the setting of confirmation printing and click [Print]. % Click [Browse] to display the screen to select the image for printing. % Click [Select Tray] to display the screen to specify the tray used by confirmation printing. % From [Screen Setting], select the screen setting used by confirmation printing. % Specify the port number used by confirmation printing to [Port Number]. % When you click [Cancel], [Confirmation Print] screen is closed to return to the Customize Color Conversions screen. 6 Confirm the result of test printing. 7 Click [Next]. The Comment screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-59. 11.11.5 Enter the Comment On the Comment screen, enter the comment to embed to the profile you create, as required. You can confirm the comment when you select the profile on Color Centro Profiler. 1 Enter the comment to [Comment (Optional)]. 2 Click [Next]. Profile is calculated and generated. After completing calculation, the Calculation Result screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-60. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-60 11.11 Create the CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 11.11.6 Confirm the Calculation Result Calculation Result screen displays the list of the setting of the generated CMYK-CMYK device link profile. 1 Confirm the setting which is displayed on the Calculation Result screen. 2 Click [Next]. The Select Task screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-60. 11.11.7 Select the Task On the Select Task screen, you can select whether to finish or to execute Measurement Feedback. 1 Select [Finish] or [Execute Measurement Feedback]. % The measurement feedback is the operation to improve the accuracy of the CMYK-CMYK conversion. 2 Click [Next]. % When you select [Finish], the Complete screen appears. Go to the step described on page 11-64. % When you select [Execute Measurement Feedback], the Measurement Feedback screen appears. Go to the step described on page 11-61. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-61 11.11 Create the CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 11.11.8 Execute the Measurement Feedback On the Measurement Feedback screen, you can execute the operation to improve the accuracy of the CMYKCMYK conversion. By repeating measurement with the instrument, you can acquire the best measurements to apply it to the profile. 0 To use the instrument, you need to install the device driver of the instrument to your computer. 0 The chart pattern and available paper size differ according to the selected instrument. 0 According to the selected instrument, measurement operations differ. For detailed information on how to operate, refer to user's guide of instrument respectively. 1 To start the measurement feed back, click [Adjust]. [Feedback] screen appears. 2 Click [Measure]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-62 11.11 Create the CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 [Measurement] screen appears. 3 From [Instrument], select the instrument to use for measurement. According to the selection, the chart image appears on the upper-right of the screen. % [i11Sis (UV Filer)] returns the measurement result with the UV cut filter. 4 Specify the copy number of the chart outputting to [Copies]. 5 Click [Output] to print the chart. 6 Click [Start] to start measurement. % According to the selected instrument, the operation screen appears. Then, follow the instruction of the screen. % The current position of measurement appears on the chart image of the upper-right of the screen. % For detailed information on how to operate, refer to user's guide of each instrument. % To stop the measurement, click [Stop]. % After acquirement of measurement data, [Save the Result] becomes available. % The value of each patch appears in the measurement result list. 7 Click [Save the Result] after completing measurement. [Save As] screen appears. 8 Specify the saving place and file name, and click [Save]. [Measurement] screen returns after saving the measurement result file. 9 Click [OK]. [Feedback] screen returns. On [Feedback] screen, the measurement data is displayed. 10 Click [Execute Feedback]. Profile is calculated. After completing calculation, [Measurement] screen appears. 11 Repeat from step 4 to step 9. On [Feedback] screen, the new measurement data is added. The attained level which indicates the improvement of the accuracy is displayed on [Attained Level] % The attained level is indicated in 3 levels. The maximum level of the attained level is indicated as "***". ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-63 11.11 Create the CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 12 Confirm [Attained Level] and repeat the operation from step 10 to step 11 up to the target level. On [Feedback] screen, the new measurement data is added. % You can repeat these operations 8 times at the maximum. % When you reach the maximum level and click [Execute Feedback], the warning screen is displayed. When you execute the feedback, click [OK]. When you finish the feedback, click [Cancel]. 13 Confirm [Attained Level] is reached to the target level, and select the number of the feedback (n times) which acquires the value to adopt for profile from [Measurement Feedback to Apply]. 14 Click [OK]. [Feedback] screen is closed to return to the Measurement Feedback screen. 15 Click [Confirmation Print] for the test printing. [Confirmation Print] screen appears. 16 Specify the setting of confirmation printing and click [Print]. % Click [Browse] to display the screen to select the image for printing. % Click [Select Tray] to display the screen to specify the tray used by confirmation printing. % From [Screen Setting], select the screen setting used by confirmation printing. % Specify the port number used by confirmation printing to [Port Number]. % When you click [Cancel], [Confirmation Print] screen is closed to return to the Measurement Feedback screen. 17 Confirm the result of test printing and click [Next]. The Complete Profile screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-64. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-64 11.11 Create the CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile 11 11.11.9 Complete the Profile On the Complete the Profile screen, finish the task. 1 Click [Finish]. The wizard is completed. Color Centro Profiler is closed to return to [Profile Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-65 11.12 Edit the CMYK -CMYK Device Link Profile 11 11.12 Edit the CMYK -CMYK Device Link Profile This section describes how to edit the CMYK -CMYK device link profile by launching Color Centro Profiler. Color Centro Profiler enables the measurement feedback, the adjustment of the point color per object and the adjustment of the profile curve. The wizard screen appears by launching Color Centro Profiler. Following the instructions of the screen, you can edit the CMYK -CMYK device link profile. The flow of the wizard is as follows; The following buttons appear on the wizard screen. Use those as required. - [Next]: Click this button when you go to the next screen after completing the setting of the displayed current screen. - [Back]: Click this button when you back to the previous screen. - [Cancel]: Click this button when you cancel the operation. - [Suspend the Operation]: This button appears when suspending and restarting of the operation are available. Click this button when you want to suspend your operation temporarily and restart thereafter. The setting you made can be saved to the file. For detailed information on how to suspend and restart your operation, refer to page 14-5. 11.12.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler and Select the Task You can edit the CMYK-CMYK device link profile by using Color Centro Profiler. 1 Click [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] on [Profile Management] screen. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Profile Type] and select [CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] from the displayed sub menu. 2 From the tree view and the list, select the CMYK-CMYK device link profile to edit. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. 3 Click [Edit]. Confirmation of Procedure Name and Destination Settings Point Color/ Profile Curve Adjustment Entering Comment Calculation Confirmation of Result Complete Task Selection Confirmation of Procedure Name and Destination Settings Measurement Feedback Entering Comment Calculation Confirmation of Result Complete * Calculation is executed. * According to task selection, wizard branches. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-66 11.12 Edit the CMYK -CMYK Device Link Profile 11 Color Centro Profiler is launched as wizard. Select Task screen appears. 4 Select [Execute Measurement Feedback] or [Execute "Point Color Adjustment/Profile Curve Adjustment] and click [Next]. The Confirmation of procedure screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-66. 11.12.2 Confirm the Procedure According to the selection of the task, the content of the Confirmation of procedure differ. This section describes the example on which you select [Execute the Measurement Feedback]. 1 Confirm the content of the Confirmation of procedure screen, and click [Next]. [Name Settings] screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-67. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-67 11.12 Edit the CMYK -CMYK Device Link Profile 11 11.12.3 Set the Profile Name and the Destination The content of [Name Settings] do nor differ even if you select either on the Select Task screen. 1 Specify the name of CMYK-CMYK device link profile on [CMYK-CMYK device link Name] of [Name Settings] screen to edit. % When you save the CMYK -CMYK device link profile with another name or to another place, enter the profile name and go to step 2. % When you overwrite the CMYK -CMYK device link profile in which some settings are edited, go to step 4. % You can't save the profile of the same name with those registered at factory shipping in the image controller. % You can't use "DEVICE" (not only the capital letter but also the small letter) for the profile name when you save the profile to the image controller. 2 Click [Browse]. [Select Destination Folder] screen appears. 3 Select the destination folder for saving the CMYK -CMYK device link profile you edit and click [OK]. The destination folder and file name are displayed on [Destination Folder] and [File Name] of [Name Settings] screen. 4 Click [Next]. According to the selection on the Select Task screen, the Measurement Feedback screen or the Point Color Adjustment/Profile Curve Adjustment screen appears. % When there is the profile with the same name, the confirmation message of overwriting appears. To save with another name, click [Cancel]. To overwrite, click [OK]. % When you select [Execute Measurement Feedback] on the Select Task screen, the Measurement Feedback screen appears. Go to the step described on page 11-68. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-68 11.12 Edit the CMYK -CMYK Device Link Profile 11 % When you select [Execute "Point Color Adjustment/Profile Curve Adjustment"] on the Select Task screen, the Point Color Adjustment/Profile Curve Adjustment screen appears. Go to the step described on page 11-68. 11.12.4 Execute the Measurement Feedback On the Measurement Feedback screen, you can execute the measurement with the instrument. The operation of the Measurement Feedback screen is the same with page 11-61. % Execute the step described on page 11-61. The Complete Profile screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-73. 11.12.5 Adjust the Point Color / Profile Curve On the Point Color Adjustment/Profile Curve Adjustment screen, you can execute the adjustment of the specified color outputting and profile curve. 1 When you execute the adjustment of the point color and the adjustment of the profile curve, click [Adjust]. The Adjustment screen appears. 2 If necessary, adjust the point color as follows; % When you add the new point color, execute the operation described on page 11-70. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-69 11.12 Edit the CMYK -CMYK Device Link Profile 11 % When you edit the existing point color, execute the operation described on page 11-70. % When you delete the existing point color, execute the operation described on page 11-71. 3 If necessary, execute the adjustment of the profile curve. % For detailed information on how to adjust the profile curve, refer topage 11-71. 4 Click [Confirmation Print] for the test printing. [Confirmation Print] screen appears. 5 Specify the setting of confirmation printing and click [Print]. % Click [Browse] to display the screen to select the image for printing. % Click [Select Tray] to display the screen to specify the tray used by confirmation printing. % From [Screen Setting], select the screen setting used by confirmation printing. % Specify the port number used by confirmation printing to [Port Number]. % When you click [Cancel], [Confirmation Print] screen is closed to return to the Adjustment screen. 6 Confirm the result of test printing and click [OK]. The Adjustment is closed to return to the Point Color Adjustment/Profile Curve Adjustment screen. 7 Click [Next]. Profile is calculated and generated. After completing calculation, the Complete screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-73. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-70 11.12 Edit the CMYK -CMYK Device Link Profile 11 Add the New Spot Color 1 Click [New]. A numbered line is added on [Adjustment Point]. 2 Specify the value (0 to 100) of the added point color of the added line to [C], [M], [Y] and [K]. The new input color is displayed on [Pointed Color]. 3 From [Effective Range], select the effective range. The color conversion result of the adjusted point is displayed on [Result] and [After adj.]. In addition, the color of [Result] is displayed on the upper-left of the Sample Color (below the [Result]) and the color of [After adj.] is displayed on the upper-right. % When you select [Narrow], the result of adjustment has influence on the color range which includes only the near colors to the input color. % When you select [Wide], the result of adjustment has influence on the color range which includes the colors which are away from the input color. % When you select [Normal], it has influence on the middle range between [Narrow] and [Wide]. % You can specify [Effective Range] per adjustment point. % The values displayed on [Result] and [After adj.] are the value to which Input curve and color conversion table are applied. (Output curve is not applied to the curve yet.) 4 Enter the value into [Add. Value] to make the value of [After adj.] the target value. % When you discard the setting of [Add. Value], click [Undo] of [Point Color Adjustment]. Edit the Existing Point Color 1 From [Adjustment Point], select the adjustment point (input color) to edit. The input color is displayed on the lower of the Sample Color (below [Result]). 2 From [Effective Range], select the effective range. The color conversion result of the adjusted point is displayed on [Result] and [After adj.]. In addition, the color of [Result] is displayed on the upper-left of the Sample Color and the color of [After adj.] is displayed on the upper-right. % When you select [Narrow], the result of adjustment has influence on the color range which includes only the near colors to the input color. % When you select [Wide], the result of adjustment has influence on the color range which includes the colors which are away from the input color. % When you select [Normal], it has influence on the middle range between [Narrow] and [Wide]. % You can specify [Effective Range] per adjustment point. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-71 11.12 Edit the CMYK -CMYK Device Link Profile 11 % The values displayed on [Result] and [After adj.] are the value to which Input curve and color conversion table are applied. (Output curve is not applied to the curve yet.) 3 Enter the value into [Add. Value] to make the value of [After adj.] the target value. % When you discard the setting of [Add. Value], click [Undo] of [Point Color Adjustment]. Delete the Existing Point Color 1 From [Adjustment Point], select the adjustment point (input color) to delete. 2 Click [Delete]. The selected adjustment point is deleted. Adjust the Profile Curve 1 From [Adjustment Curve], select [Input] or [Output]. % When you execute the adjustment of input curve, select [Input]. % When you execute the adjustment of output curve, select [Output]. 2 Select the combination of colors from [Combination]. According to the selection from [Combination], [View] check box per each color and [Adjustment] radio button per each color appear. % When you select [Input] or [Output], in both cases, select [C/M/Y/K], [CMY/K] or [CMYK]. % When you select [C/M/Y/K], you can adjust the profile curves of each color of CMYK. % When you select [CMYK], you can adjust the consolidated tone profile of CMYK. % When you select [CMY/K], you can adjust the consolidated profile curve of CMY and the profile curve of K. 3 When you want to display the profile curve of one color, check [View] of that color. % When you want to hide the profile curve of one color, remove the check mark from [View] of that color. 4 When you want to adjust the profile curve of one color, select [Adj.] of that color. % When check mark of [View] for one color was not selected and you select [Adj.] for the same color, [View] is checked automatically. 5 To execute the adjustment of the profile curve, you can drag and move the beginning point/ending point (at both ends of the profile curve) and adjustment points (added by the clicking on the profile curve). % The selected adjustment point appears as a small red square. % By clicking [Previous] or [Next], you can switch the point selection to the previous or the next. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-72 11.12 Edit the CMYK -CMYK Device Link Profile 11 % You can move the selected point by entering the coordinate values into the input boxes which are on the center of vertical/horizontal axises. % When you want to delete the added point, drag it to the adjacent point or drop it outside of the profile curve area. % When you want to reset the adjusted setting, click [Undo] of [Profile Curve Adjustment]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 11-73 11.12 Edit the CMYK -CMYK Device Link Profile 11 11.12.6 Complete the Profile On the Complete the Profile screen, finish the task. 1 Click [Finish]. The wizard is completed. Color Centro Profiler is closed to return to [Profile Management ] screen. 12 Color Default Settings ColorCentro (IC-601) 12-2 12.1 Outline of Color Default Settings 12 12 Color Default Settings 12.1 Outline of Color Default Settings Use of the Color Centro enables to adjust the default color settings of the image controller. The default color settings which are set on this function are applied to the job without settings by the printer driver, to the direct printing job and to the job in which the default settings of the image controller is used. By using Color Centro, you can create and edit the color profile. You can also manage, create and edit the Color Configuration. For detailed information, refer to page 7-2. This chapter describes how to change the default settings of the color profile by using Color Centro. 12.1.1 [Color Default Settings] screen The color default setting function of Color Centro uses [Color Default Settings] screen. [Color Default Settings] screen appears by clicking [Color Default Settings] button on the [Launcher] screen. To close this screen, select [Close] from [File] menu. The composition of [Color Default Settings] screen differs per tab. When [RGB] tab is selected, [Color Default Settings] screen is composed as follows; When [CMYK] tab is selected, [Color Default Settings] screen is composed as follows; ColorCentro (IC-601) 12-3 12.1 Outline of Color Default Settings 12 When [Other Settings] tab is selected, [Color Default Settings] screen is composed as follows; Item Description [Default Color Configuration Settings] Displays the Default Color Configuration of the image controller. The Default Color Configuration is set on the Color Configuration Management function. For detailed information, refer to page 7-2. [RGB] Displays the screen for the RGB data processing. [CMYK] Displays the screen for the CMYK data processing. [Other Settings] Displays the screen for the common processing of RGB/CMYK. ColorCentro (IC-601) 12-4 12.1 Outline of Color Default Settings 12 [RGB] [No Color Conversion] Appears when [RGB] tab is clicked. Select this when the image controller doesn't execute the color conversion for the RGB data or uses the embedded RGB profile as default. [Use RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] Appears when [RGB] tab is clicked. Select this when you use the RGB-CMYK device link profile as default. When you check, select the RGBCMYK device link profile for Image, Graphic, and Text respectively. [Use RGB Source Profile] Appears when [RGB] tab is clicked. Select this when you use the RGB source profile as default. When you check, select the RGB source profile. [Rendering] Appears when [RGB] tab is clicked. Select the default rendering setting for Image, Graphic, and Text respectively. [RGB Simulation] Appears when [RGB] tab is clicked. Check when you use the RGB simulation as default. [CMYK] [No Color Conversion] Appears when [CMYK] tab is clicked. Select this to use the embedded CMYK target profile as default. [Use CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] Appears when [CMYK] tab is clicked. Select this when you use the CMYK-CMYK device link profile as default. [Use CMYK Target Profile] Appears when [CMYK] tab is clicked. Select this when you use the CMYK target profile as default. [Paper Simulation] Appears when [CMYK] tab is clicked. Check when you execute the Paper Simulation as default. [Other Settings] [Printer Profile] Appears when [Other Settings] tab is clicked. Specifies the default printer profile. [Paper Type Link] Appears when [Other Settings] tab is clicked. Check when you enable the paper type link as default. [Tone Curve] Appears when [Other Settings] tab is clicked. Specifies the default tone curve. [Pure Black] Appears when [Other Settings] tab is clicked. Specifies whether to use the pure black or not. Specifies the pure black setting. [Gray Replacement] Appears when [Other Settings] tab is clicked. Check when you use the gray replacement as default. [Black Overprint] Appears when [Other Settings] tab is clicked. Check when you execute the black overprint as default. [Composite Overprint] Appears when [Other Settings] tab is clicked. Check when you execute the composite overprint as default. [Use Spot Color] Appears when [Other Settings] tab is clicked. Check when you use the spot color as default. [Other Settings] [Use Alternative Color Conversion] Appears when [Other Settings] tab is clicked. Check when you execute the alternative color conversion as default. [Create] Registers the adjustment result in the image controller. [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. Status bar Displays the IP address and the port number of the image controller connected currently. Item Description ColorCentro (IC-601) 12-5 12.1 Outline of Color Default Settings 12 12.1.2 Menu of [Color Default Settings] screen The menu items of the [Color Default Settings] screen are as follows; 12.1.3 Basic operation of [Color Default Settings] screen This section describes basic operation of [Color Default Settings] screen. 1 Confirm the name of Default Color Configuration. % For detailed information on how to confirm the name of Default Color Configuration, refer topage 10-5. 2 Set the default settings of the RGB-CMYK conversion manually. % For detailed information on how to set the RGB-CMYK conversion, refer to page 12-7. 3 Set the default settings of the CMYK-CMYK conversion manually. % For detailed information on how to set the CMYK-CMYK conversion, refer to page 12-7 4 Set the default settings of other settings manually. % For detailed information on how to set the other settings, refer topage 12-7 5 Set the color bar and the color setting information which is printed on the job outputting. % For detailed information on how to set the color bar and the color setting information, refer to page 12-9 6 If necessary, reset the color default setting to the factory default. % For how to operate it, refer to page 9-21. 7 Register the settings in the image controller. % For how to register it, refer to page 10-12. Menu Menu Items Description [File] [Login] When you connect another image controller, the [Login] screen appears. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-2. [Return to Factory Default] Resets the color default setting to the factory default. [Refresh] Reloads the information of the image controller connected currently. [Color Verification] Allows you to set the color bar and the color setting information which is printed on the job outputting. [Close] Closes this screen and exits this function. [Help] [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. [Version] Displays the version of Color Centro. ColorCentro (IC-601) 12-6 12.2 Confirm the name of Default Color Configuration 12 12.2 Confirm the name of Default Color Configuration This section describes how to confirm the name of Default Color Configuration. 1 Confirm [Default Color Configuration Settings] on [Color Default Setting] screen. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted Color Default Settings when the Color Default Settings has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 10-12. ColorCentro (IC-601) 12-7 12.3 Default Manual Settings 12 12.3 Default Manual Settings This section describes how to set the Color Default Settings of the image controller manually. The Color Default Settings function is used on screens displayed par 3 tabs. 12.3.1 Set the Default Settings of the RGB-CMYK Conversion On [RGB] tab - [Color Default Settings] screen, you can set the default settings for the conversion processing when the input data is RGB. 1 Click [RGB] tab. [RGB] tab appears. 2 When you don't execute the color conversion, select [No Color Conversion]. 3 When you use RGB-CMYK device link profile, check [Use RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile]. Then, select the RGB-CMYK device link profile for Image, Graphic, and Text respectively. 4 When you use RGB source profile, check [Use RGB Source Profile]. Then, select the RGB source profile to use. 5 From [Rendering] - [Image], select the rendering method for Image. 6 From [Rendering] - [Graphic], select the rendering method for Graphic. 7 From [Rendering] - [Text], select the rendering method for Text. 8 Check [Use RGB Simulation] when you use RGB Simulation. % Go to the step described on page 12-7. 12.3.2 Set the Default Settings of the CMYK-CMYK Conversion On [CMYK] tab - [Color Default Settings] screen, you can set the default settings for the conversion processing when the input data is CMYK. 1 Click [CMYK] tab. [CMYK] tab appears. 2 When you don't execute the color conversion, select [No Color Conversion]. 3 When you use CMYK-CMYK device link profile, check [Use CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile]. Then, select the CMYK-CMYK device link profile for Image, Graphic, and Text respectively. 4 When you use CMYK target profile, check [Use CMYK Target Profile]. Then, select the CMYK target profile to use. 5 Check [Use Paper Simulation] when you use RGB Simulation. % Go to the step described on page 12-7. 12.3.3 Set the Other Default Settings On [Other Settings] tab - [Color Default Settings] screen, you can set the default settings for the other conversion processing. 1 Click [Other Settings] tab. [Other Settings] tab appears 2 Select the printer profile from [Printer Profile]. 3 Check [Paper Type Link] when you enable the paper type link function. ColorCentro (IC-601) 12-8 12.3 Default Manual Settings 12 4 From [Tone Curve], select the default tone curve. 5 Select the setting of Pure Black from [Pure Black]. 6 Check [Gray Replacement] when you use Gray Replacement. 7 Check [Use Black Overprint] when you use Black Overprint. 8 Check [Black Overprint] when you use Black Overprint. 9 Check [Use Spot Color] when you use Spot Color. 10 Check [Use Alternative Color Conversion] when you use Alternative Color Conversion. % When you register the settings to the image controller, go to the step described on page 10-12. ColorCentro (IC-601) 12-9 12.4 Set Color Verification 12 12.4 Set Color Verification This section describes how to set the color bar and the color setting information. 1 From [File] menu, select [Color Verification]. [Color Verification] appears. 2 Click [The Color Setting Information] when you set the content of the color setting information for printing. % When you check [Date/Time], [Job Name], [User name], [Calibration Date/Time], [Printer Name], [RGB Color Conversion], [CMYK Color Conversion], [Tone Curve Name], [Spot Color], [Alternative Color Function], [Black Handling], or [Composite Overprint], you can set as the printing items on the job outputting. % From [Number of Lines], select the number of lines (1 to 5 lines). % From [Print Position], select the radio button to set the printing position. 3 When you set the color bar, check [Color Bar] and set the printing items. % Select [Use Registered Image] when you use the color patch which was registered at factory shipping. % Select [New Registration] when you use the eps file you specify, % When you select [New Registration] and check [User name], [Calibration Date/Time], [Printer Name], [RGB color Conversion], [CMYK Color Conversion], [Tone Curve Name], [Spot Color], [Alternative Color Function], [Black Handling] or [Composite Overprint], you can set as the printing items on the job outputting. % From [Print Position], select the radio button to set the printing position. 4 When you want to discard the current settings and use the registered settings at factory shipping, click [Initialize]. 5 When you register the settings of the color information and the color bar, click [Register]. [Color Verification] is closed to return to [Color Default Settings] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 12-10 12.5 Return to Factory Default 12 12.5 Return to Factory Default This section describes how to return the Color Default Settings of the image controller to the factory default. The factory default settings are as follows; 1 From the [File] menu, select [Initialize]. The confirmation message appears. 2 Click [OK]. Resets the priority to the factory default. % When you want to register the initialized settings of Color Default, go to the step described on page 10-12. [RGB] tab Check Job [No Color Conversion] OFF [Use RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile] OFF [Use RGB Source Profile] ON [Rendering] Saturation RGB Simulation OFF [CMYK] tab Check Job [No Color Conversion] OFF [Use CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile] OFF [Use CMYK Target Profile] ON [Paper Simulation] OFF [Other Settings] tab Check Job [Printer Profile] Fir Coat Paper [Paper Type Link] OFF [Tone Curve] Default Tone Curve [Pure Black] Text/Graphic [Gray Replacement] OFF [Black Overprint] ON [Composite Overprint] OFF [Use Spot Color] OFF [Use Alternative Color Conversion] OFF ColorCentro (IC-601) 12-11 12.6 Color Default Settings 12 12.6 Color Default Settings This section describes how to register the settings of [Color Default Settings] to the image controller as the default settings. 1 Click [Register] on [Color Default Settings] screen. Registration in image controller is executed. 13 Color Configuration Management ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-2 13.1 Outline of Color Configuration Management 13 13 Color Configuration Management 13.1 Outline of Color Configuration Management Use of the Color Centro enables to set and manage "Profile Set" which is consolidated with several device link profiles and several device profiles which are used for one paper type. In addition, you can set and manage "Color Configuration" which is consolidated with several Profile Sets (used for all paper types) and other information of color settings. These functions of Color Centro allow you to execute the color setting adequately by only specifying the Color Configuration without executing the complex and various settings. 13.1.1 Outline of Profile Set The objects which compose the job are images, graphics and texts. In addition, there are RGB objects and CMYK objects. For use of this main body, you can set the device link profiles which are appropriate for all these objects. In addition to the profiles, on the color printing, to consider about the adequate hue corresponding to the paper type and outputting is also necessary. Therefore, the color setting needs the complex operations. For more efficient color settings, Color Centro manages the Profile Set which is integrated with all profiles (9 types) which are used for one paper type. The Profile Set includes the property information of the Profile Set (created date, updated date, etc.) besides the paper information and profile information. Color Centro manages the Profile Set by using the database. 13.1.2 Outline of Color Configuration To correspond to the multiple paper types, Color Configuration is consolidated with the multiple Profile Sets. When you specify one Color Configuration, to correspond to all paper types which are used on the printing job is enabled. The Color Configuration includes the basic color settings and the tone curve information as follows; Several Profiles Property Information Paper Information Profile Set RGB Source Profile CMYK Target Profile Printer Profile RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile (Image) RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile (Graphic) RGB-CMYK Device Link Profile (Text) CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile (Image) CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile (Graphic) CMYK-CMYK Device Link Profile (Text) Paper Type Paper Weight Paper Color Paper Catalogue Name Basic Color Settings Tone Curve Information Spot Color Tone Curve Adjustment (ON/OFF) Black Overprint (ON/OFF) Tone Curve Name to use Alternative Color ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-3 13.1 Outline of Color Configuration Management 13 The Color Configuration includes the property information of the Color Configuration (created date, updated date, etc.) besides the mentioned above. Color Centro manages the Color Configuration by using the database. The Profile Set can be used on the multiple Color Configuration and multiple Color Configurations can be registered. "Select Nearest Profile Set", one of the Color Configuration Management functions allows to select the Profile Set easily and you can set the Color Configurations easily, too. When you register several Color Configurations correspond to various cases, you can apply the color settings which are corresponding to the all paper types used in the job only by selecting. (The default color settings, which are set on the Color Default Settings of Color Centro, are applied to the job without settings by the printer driver and to the direct printing job.) 13.1.3 [Color Configuration Management] screen The Color Configuration management function of Color Centro uses [Color Configuration Management] screen. RGB Simulation (ON/OFF) Pure Black (OFF/Text/Text & Graphic) Grey Replacement (ON/OFF) Composite Overprint (OFF/Image Quality/Speed) Basic Color Settings Tone Curve Information Spot Color (ON/OFF) Black Overprint (ON/OFF) Alternative Color (ON/OFF) RGB Simulation (ON/OFF) Pure Black (OFF/Text/Text & Graphic) Gray Replacement Composite Overprint (OFF/High Quality/High Speed) Use Tone Curve Adjustment (ON/OFF) Tone Curve Name Default Profile Set Paper Type Default Basic Color Setting Information Tone Curve Setting Information Several Profiles Property Information Paper Infomration Profile Set (maximum 16) Color Configuration ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-4 13.1 Outline of Color Configuration Management 13 [Color Configuration Management] screen appears by clicking [Color Configuration Management] button on the [Launcher] screen. To close this screen, select [Close] from [File] menu. [Color Configuration Management] screen is composed as follows; Item Description (Color Configuration list) Displays the Color Configuration of the image controller connected currently. [Color Configuration] - [New] Creates the new Color Configuration. [Color Configuration] - [Edit] Edits the Color Configuration. [Color Configuration] - [Delete] Deletes the selected Color Configuration from the list. [Color Configuration] - [Copy] Makes a duplication of the selected Color Configuration from the list within [Controller]. [Selected Color Configuration Name] Displays the name of Color Configuration selected from the list. (Profile Set list) Displays the Profile Set of the image controller connected currently. [Profile Set] - [New] Starts "Color Centro Profiler" utility and creates the new Profile Set. [Profile Set] - [Edit] Starts "Color Centro Profiler" utility and edits the selected Profile Set. [Profile Set] - [Search] Searches the Profile Set and displays the search result to the list. [Default Profile Set Setting / Paper Type Default Setting] - [Setting] Allows you to set the default Profile Set of the Color Configuration. [Color Conversion Option Settings] - [Setting] Allows you to set the color conversion option of the Color Configuration. [Create] Registers the settings in the image controller. [Cancel] Discards the current settings. [Reload] Updates the information of the list. [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-5 13.1 Outline of Color Configuration Management 13 List Items The Color Configuration list and Profile Set list are displayed on [Color Configuration Management] screen. The list items of the Color Configuration list are as follows; The list items of the Profile Set list are as follows; On the Profile Set list, "*" mark is added after the name of the Profile Set which was registered at factory shipping (default registered Profile Set). List Operations The list of the [Color Configuration Management] screen can be sorted by list item. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-3. When you display [Color Configuration Management] screen first after launching Color Centro, the list is displayed in ascending order of [Color Configuration Name] (in case of Color Configuration list), or [Profile Set Name] (in case of Profile Set list). The list of the [Color Configuration Management] screen can be sorted by list item. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-3. The list of the [Color Configuration Management] screen can switch the display of the list item to non-display. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-3. Item Description [Color Configuration Default] Displays the check mark when the Color Configuration is used as default. [Color Configuration Name] Displays the name of Color Configuration. [Created Date/Time] Displays the date/time when the new Color Configuration was created. [Update Date/Time] Displays the date/time when the Color Configuration was updated. [Memo] Displays the description of the profile. Item Description [ON] Displays the check mark when the Profile Set is used by the Color Configuration. [Default Profile Set] Displays the check mark when the Profile Set is used as default. [Profile Set Name] Displays the name of Profile Set. [Registered Name of Paper Profile] Displays the registered name of paper profile. [Paper Type Default] Displays the name of paper type setting used as default. [Paper Type] Displays the paper type. [Paper Weight] Displays the paper weight. [Paper Color] Displays the paper color. [RGB Source Type] Displays the RGB source type of the Profile Set. [CMYK Target Type] Displays the CMYK target type of the Profile Set. [Created Date/Time] Displays the created date/time of the Profile Set. [Update Date/Time] Displays the date/time when the Profile Set was updated. [Memo] Displays the description of the profile. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-6 13.1 Outline of Color Configuration Management 13 13.1.4 Menu of [Color Configuration Management] screen The menu items of the [Color Configuration Management] screen are as follows; Menu Menu Items Description [File] [New] Creates the new Color Configuration. [Edit] Edits the selected Color Configuration from the list. [Delete] Deletes the selected Color Configuration from the list. [Copy] Makes a duplication of the selected Color Configuration from the list. [Reload] Updates the information of the list. [Set to Default Color Configuration] Sets the selected Color Configuration from the list to the Default Color Configuration. [Back to the Factory Default] Resets the Default Color Configuration to the factory default. [Import/Export] Imports (Registers) or Export the Color Configuration. [Close] Closes this screen and exits this function. [Help] [Help] Displays the Help of this screen. [Version] Displays the version of Color Centro. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-7 13.2 Create the new Color Configuration 13 13.2 Create the new Color Configuration This section describes how to create the new Color Configuration. 13.2.1 Set the Name of Color Configuration 1 Click [New] of the Color Configuration list. The added line is displayed at the bottom of the Color Configuration list and "New Created Configuration Name" is displayed. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [New]. 2 Specify the name of the new Color Configuration to [New Created Configuration Name]. % Go to the step described on page 13-7. 13.2.2 Select the Profile Set % When you want to use the Profile Set, check [Use] on the Profile Set list. % For detailed information on how to create the new Profile Set, refer to page 13-14. % For detailed information on how to edit the Profile Set, refer to page 13-22page 13-30page 13-36. % Go to the step described on page 13-7. 13.2.3 Set the Default Profile Set Setting / Paper Type Default Setting. Specify the name of Profile Set to use as default in the new Color Configuration you create. 1 Click [Default Profile Set Setting / Paper Type Default Setting] - [Setting]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-8 13.2 Create the new Color Configuration 13 [Default Profile Set Setting / Paper Type Default Setting] screen appears. % [Default Profile Set], [Profile Set Name], [Paper Type Default] and [Paper Type] are displayed on the list on the left of the screen. % [Registered Name of Paper Profile], [Paper Weight], [Paper Color], [RGB Source Type], [CMYK Target Type], [Created Date/Time], [Updated Date/Time] and [Memo] are displayed on the list on the right of the screen. % The list on the left of the screen can be sorted by list item. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-3. % Both lists can switch the display of the list item to non-display. For how to operate it, refer to page 14-3. 2 To set the Profile Set manually, remove the check mark of [Select Nearest Profile Set]. To set the Profile Set automatically, check [Select Nearest Profile Set]. % When you check [Select Nearest Profile Set], go to step 4. 3 When you set the Profile Set manually, check [Default Profile Set] of the name of Profile Set to set as default. 4 Click [OK] and return to [Color Configuration Management] screen. % Go to the step described on page 13-8. 13.2.4 Set the Color Conversion Option Specify the Color Conversion setting to use as default for the Color Configuration you create. 1 Click [Color Conversion Option Settings] - [Setting]. [Color Conversion Settings] appears. 2 Select the setting of Pure Black from [Use Pure Black]. 3 Check [Use Gray Replacement] when you use Gray Replacement. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-9 13.2 Create the new Color Configuration 13 4 Check [Use Black Overprint] when you use Black Overprint. 5 Select the setting of Composite Overprint from [Use Composite Overprint]. 6 Check [Use Spot Color] when you use Spot Color. 7 Check [Use Alternative Color Conversion] when you use Alternative Color Conversion. 8 Check [Use RGB Simulation] when you use RGB Simulation. 9 Check [Use Tone Curve Adjustment] and specify the torn curve when you use Tone Curve Adjustment. 10 If necessary, enter the description to [Memo]. 11 Click [OK] and return to [Color Configuration Management] screen. % Go to the step described on page 13-9. 13.2.5 Register the Color Configuration This section describes how to register the settings to the image controller. 1 Click [Register] on [Color Configuration Management] screen. % When there is the Color Configuration with the same name, it is registered as another name automatically. In this case, the confirmation message appears. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-10 13.3 Edit the Color Configuration 13 13.3 Edit the Color Configuration This section describes how to edit the Color Configuration. 1 From the Color Configuration list, select the Color Configuration to edit. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted Color Configuration when the Color Configuration has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 13-9. 2 Click [Color Configuration] - [Edit]. The name of the selected Color Configuration is displayed to [Editing Color Configuration Name]. 3 When you want to use the Profile Set, check [Use] on the Profile Set list. % For detailed information on how to create the new Profile Set, refer to page 13-14. % For detailed information on how to edit the Profile Set, refer to page 13-22page 13-30page 13-36. 4 Click [Default Profile Set Setting / Paper Type Default Setting] - [Setting] and set Default Profile Set Setting / Paper Type Default Setting. % For how to operate it, refer to page 13-7. 5 Click [Color Conversion Option Settings] - [Setting] and specify the Color Conversion Option Settings. % For how to operate it, refer to page 13-8. 6 Registers the settings in the image controller. % For how to operate it, refer to page 13-9. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-11 13.4 Color Configuration Management 13 13.4 Color Configuration Management This section describes how to manage the Color Configuration. 13.4.1 Change the Default Color Configuration 1 From the Color Configuration list, select the Color Configuration you use as default. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted Color Configuration when the Color Configuration has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 13-9. 2 Click [Color Configuration] - [Edit]. The name of the selected Color Configuration is displayed to [Editing Color Configuration Name]. 3 From [File] menu, select [Set to Default Color Configuration]. [Color Configuration Default] of the selected Color Configuration is checked. 4 Register the settings in the image controller. % For how to operate it, refer to page 13-9. 13.4.2 Copy the Color Configuration 1 From the Color Configuration list, select the Color Configuration to copy. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted Color Configuration when the Color Configuration has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 13-9. 2 Click [Copy]. % When you select the multiple Color Configurations, [Copy] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Copy]. The duplication of the Color Configuration is generated in the image controller. 13.4.3 Delete the Color Configuration You can delete the Color Configuration. 1 From the Color Configuration list, select the Color Configuration to delete. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted Color Configuration when the Color Configuration has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 13-9. 2 Click [Delete]. Confirmation screen appears. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Delete]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-12 13.4 Color Configuration Management 13 3 To delete, click [Yes]. The selected Color Configuration is deleted. % When you select the multiple Color Configurations, all of those are deleted at a time. % You can't restore the Color Configuration you have deleted. 13.4.4 Import (Register) / Export the Color Configuration Export the Color Configuration 1 From the [File] menu, select [Import/Export]. [Import/Export] screen appears. 2 From the tree view, select [Controller]. The list appears according to the selection. 3 From the list, select the Color Configuration to export. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, click [Reload]. 4 Click [Export]. [Export] screen appears. % When you select multiple Color Configurations, those are exported in order of the displayed list. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Export] isn't available. 5 Specify the saving place and file name for the Color Configuration to export, and click [Save]. Exporting to the specified place is executed. [Save to Local] screen is closed to return to [Import/Export] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-13 13.4 Color Configuration Management 13 % When you select multiple Color Configurations, [Export] screen is displayed at the frequency which is equal to the number of the selected Color Configurations. In this case, go to the step 5. Import (Register) the Color Configuration 1 From the [File] menu, select [Import/Export]. [Import/Export] screen appears. 2 Select the places from [Local] or [Network] of the tree format, where the Color Configurations are saved. The list appears according to the selection. 3 From the list, select the Color Configuration to import. 4 Click [Import]. % Similar operation can be done when you select [Import] from the right click menu on the selected line. % When you select multiple Color Configurations, those are imported in order of the displayed list. % When a folder other than [Controller] is selected on the tree view, [Import] isn't available. The tone curve is registered to [Controller]. [Import/Export] screen is closed to return to [Color Configuration Management] screen. 13.4.5 Reset the Default Color Configuration 1 From [File] menu, select [Back to the Factory Default]. The confirmation message appears. 2 Click [OK]. The current Default Color Configuration is reset to the Default Color Configuration which was registered at factory shipping. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-14 13.5 Create the Profile Set 13 13.5 Create the Profile Set This section describes how to create the new Profile Set by launching Color Centro Profiler. The wizard screen appears by launching Color Centro Profiler. Following the instructions of the screen, you can create the Profile Set. The created Profile Set is saved to the image controller. The flow of the wizard is as follows; The following buttons appear on the wizard screen. Use those as required. - [Next]: Click this button when you go to the next screen after completing the setting of the displayed current screen. - [Back]: Click this button when you back to the previous screen. - [Cancel]: Click this button when you cancel the operation. - [Suspend the Operation]: This button appears when suspending and restarting of the operation are available. Click this button when you want to suspend your operation temporarily and restart thereafter. The setting you made can be saved to the file. For detailed information on how to suspend and restart your operation, refer to page 14-5. Confirmation of Procedure Name Settings Profile Creation Profile Settings Color Conversion Setting Entering Comment Calculation Confirmation of Result Task Selection Measurement Feedback Complete * As required, you can create profiles. * Calculation is executed. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-15 13.5 Create the Profile Set 13 13.5.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler You can create the Profile Set by using Color Centro Profiler. 1 Click [Profile Set] - [New] on [Color Configuration Management] screen. Color Centro Profiler is launched as wizard.[Confirmation of procedure] screen appears. 2 Confirm the contents, and click [Next]. [Name Settings] screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-14. 13.5.2 Specify the Profile Set Name 1 Specify the name of Profile Set you create to [Profile Set Name] of [Name Settings] screen. % You can't save the Profile Set of the same name with those registered at factory shipping in the image controller. % You can't use "DEVICE" (not only the capital letter but also the small letter) for the Profile Set name when you save the profile to the image controller. 2 Click [Next]. The Profile Determination screen appears % When there is the Profile Set with the same name, the confirmation message of overwriting appears. To save with another name, click [Cancel]. To overwrite, click [OK]. % Go to the step described on page 13-16. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-16 13.5 Create the Profile Set 13 13.5.3 Determine the Profiles On the Profile Determination screen, specify the printer profile, the CMYK target profile and the RGB source profile which are used by Profile Set. In addition, you can create the printer profile and the CMYK target profile as required. 1 Specify the name of printer profile which is used by Profile Set. When you use the existed printer profile, click [Browse]. When you create the new printer profile, click [Create]. % When you click [Browse], [Load Printer Profile] screen appears. In this case, go to the step 2. % When you click [Create], go to step described from page 11-27 to page 11-31. 2 On the screen displayed by clicking [Browse] of [Load Printer Profile], select a printer profile to use and click [Open]. The selected printer profile appears on [Load Printer Profile]. As required, set [Paper Type], [Paper Color], [Paper Weight] and [Glossy Mode]. Then, click [Finish] to return to the Profile Determination screen. 3 Specify the CMYK target profile which is used by Profile Set. When you use the existed CMYK target profile, click [Browse]. When you create the new CMYK target profile, click [Create]. % When you click [Browse], go to step 4. % When you click [Create], go to step described from page 11-14 to page 11-19. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-17 13.5 Create the Profile Set 13 4 On the screen displayed by clicking [CMYK Target Profile] - [Browse], select the CMYK target profile used and click [Open]. The selected CMYK target profile is displayed to [Selected Profile] of [CMYK Target Profile]. 5 Specify the RGB source profile which is used by Profile Set. When you use [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB] which are preset to the image controller, select [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB]. When you specify the other RGB source profile, select [Other] and click [Browse]. % When you click [Browse], go to step 6. % When you select [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB], go to step 7. 6 On the screen displayed by clicking [RGB Source Profile] - [Browse], select the RGB source profile used and click [Open]. The selected RGB source profile is displayed below [Other] of [RGB Source Profile]. 7 Click [Next]. The Customize Color Conversions screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 13-17. 13.5.4 Customize the Color Conversions On the Customize Color Conversions screen, you can set the rendering intent of CMYK-CMYK conversion, the preserve mid-tone / preserve solid of CMYK object (CYMK image, CMYK graphic and CMYK text) and the rendering intent of RGB object (RGB image, RGB graphic and RGB text). 1 From [CMYK-CMYK Conversion] - [Rendering Intent], select the rendering intent. % [Relative Colorimetric] is the setting to execute color conversion regarding the paper color as completely white. The paper color parts are represented as colorlessness after color conversion. % [Absolute Colorimetric] is the setting to execute color conversion maintaining the measurement value of the paper color. The paper color parts are represented with the color near the actual paper color after color conversion. When you select [Absolute Colorimetric], [Preserve Mid-Tone] and [Preserve Solid] are not available. % When you make all contents of the setting on the screen the same content as recommended setting, click [Undo]. 2 For [CMYK Image], [CMYK Graphic] and [CMYK Text], when you set the preserve mid-tone for one color, check [Preserve Mid-Tone] of that color. % [Preserve Mid-Tone] is a setting to recompose the color after the color conversion as the same one color which has composed the color before the color conversion. % The setting of [C], [M], [Y] and [K] is the setting for the color composed of C/M/Y/K only. % The setting of [R] is the setting for the color composed of [M] and [Y]. % The setting of [G] is the setting for the color composed of [C] and [Y]. % The setting of [B] is the setting for the color composed of [C] and [M]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-18 13.5 Create the Profile Set 13 % In some cases, you can't set [Preserve Mid-Tone] and [Preserve Solid] at the same time. 3 For [CMYK Image], [CMYK Graphic] and [CMYK Text], when you set the preserve solid for one color, check [Preserve Solid] of that color. % [Preserve Solid] is a setting to represent the solid part after the color conversion with the same color which is used for the solid part before the color conversion. % The setting of [C], [M], [Y], and [K] is the setting about the color composed of C/M/Y/K only, % The setting of [R] is the setting for the color composed of [M] and [Y]. % The setting of [G] is the setting for the color composed of [C] and [Y]. % The setting of [B] is the setting for the color composed of [C] and [M]. % In some cases, you can't set [Preserve Mid-Tone] and [Preserve Solid] at the same time. 4 From [RGB-CMYK Conversion] of [ RGB Image] , [RGB Graphic] and [RGB Text] on the Customize Color Conversions screen, select the rendering intent for each object. % [Perceptual (RGB Image)] is the recommended setting of RGB Image to represent the color near to the color which is before conversion. % [Saturation (RGB Graphic, Text)] is the recommended setting of RGB Graphic/Text to represent the color which maintains as much as possible the brightness of the color which is before conversion. 5 Click [Confirmation Print] for the test printing. [Confirmation Print] screen appears. 6 Specify the setting of confirmation printing and click [Print]. % Click [Browse] to display the screen to select the image for printing. % Click [Select Tray] to display the screen to specify the tray used by confirmation printing. % From [Screen Setting], select the screen setting used by confirmation printing. % Specify the port number used by confirmation printing to [Port Number]. % When you click [Cancel], [Confirmation Print] screen is closed to return to the Customize Color Conversions screen. 7 Confirm the result of test printing. 8 Click [Next]. The Comment screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 13-19. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-19 13.5 Create the Profile Set 13 13.5.5 Enter the Comment On the Comment screen, enter the comment to embed in the Profile Set you create, as required. You can confirm the comment when you select the Profile Set on Color Centro Profiler. 1 Enter the comment to [Comment (Optional)]. 2 Click [Next]. Profile Set is calculated and generated. After completing calculation, the Calculation Result screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 13-19. 13.5.6 Confirm the Calculation Result Calculation Result screen displays the list of the setting of the generated Profile Set. 1 Confirm the setting which is displayed on the Calculation Result screen. 2 Click [Next]. The Select Task screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 13-20. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-20 13.5 Create the Profile Set 13 13.5.7 Select the Task On the Select Task screen, you can select whether to finish or to execute Measurement Feedback. 1 Select [Finish] or [Execute Measurement Feedback]. % The measurement feedback is the operation to improve the accuracy of the CMYK-CMYK conversion. 2 Click [Next]. % When you select [Finish], the Complete screen appears. Go to the step described on page 11-64. % When you select [Execute Measurement Feedback], the Measurement Feedback screen appears. Go to the step described on page 13-20. 13.5.8 Execute the Measurement Feedback On the Measurement Feedback screen, you can execute the measurement with the instrument. The operation of the Measurement Feedback screen is the same with page 13-32. % On the Measurement Feedback screen, execute the step described on page 13-32. The Complete Profile Set screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-64. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-21 13.5 Create the Profile Set 13 13.5.9 Complete the Profile Set On the Complete the Profile Set screen, finish the task. 1 Click [Finish]. The wizard is completed. Color Centro Profiler is closed to return to [Color Configuration Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-22 13.6 Edit the Component Profile of Profile Set 13 13.6 Edit the Component Profile of Profile Set This section describes how to edit the component profile of Profile Set by launching Color Centro Profiler. The wizard screen appears by launching Color Centro Profiler. Following the instructions of the screen, you can edit the component profile of Profile Set. The flow of the wizard is as follows; The following buttons appear on the wizard screen. Use those as required. - [Next]: Click this button when you go to the next screen after completing the setting of the displayed current screen. - [Back]: Click this button when you back to the previous screen. - [Cancel]: Click this button when you cancel the operation. - [Suspend the Operation]: This button appears when suspending and restarting of the operation are available. Click this button when you want to suspend your operation temporarily and restart thereafter. The setting you made can be saved to the file. For detailed information on how to suspend and restart your operation, refer to page 14-5. Confirmation of Procedure Name and Destination Settings Profile Creation Profile Settings Recalculation Setting Color Conversion Setting Entering Comment Calculation Confirmation of Result Complete * As required, you can create profiles. * Calculation is executed. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-23 13.6 Edit the Component Profile of Profile Set 13 13.6.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler You can edit the Profile Set by using Color Centro Profiler. 1 Click [Profile Set] - [Edit] on Color Configuration Management screen. [Color Centro Profiler] screen appears. 2 From the list, select the Profile Set to edit and click [Modify]. Color Centro Profiler is launched as wizard.[Confirmation of procedure] screen appears. 3 Confirm the contents, and click [Next]. [Name Settings] screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 13-24. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-24 13.6 Edit the Component Profile of Profile Set 13 13.6.2 Set the Profile Set Name and the Destination 1 Specify the name of Profile Set you edit in [Profile Set Name] of [Name Settings] screen. % When you save the Profile Set with another name or to another place, enter the profile name and go to step 2. % When you overwrite the Profile Set in which some settings are edited, go to step 4. % You can't save the Profile Set of the same name with those registered at factory shipping in the image controller. % You can't use "DEVICE" (not only the capital letter but also the small letter) for the Profile Set name when you save the profile to the image controller. 2 Click [Browse]. [Select Destination Folder] screen appears. 3 Select the destination folder for saving the Profile Set you edit and click [OK]. The destination folder and file name are displayed on [Destination Folder] and [File Name] of [Name Settings] screen. 4 Click [Next]. The Profile Determination screen appears. % When there is the profile with the same name, the confirmation message of overwriting appears. To save with another name, click [Cancel]. To overwrite, click [OK]. % Go to the step described on page 13-25. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-25 13.6 Edit the Component Profile of Profile Set 13 13.6.3 Determine the Profiles On the Profile Determination screen, as required, change the printer profile, the CMYK target profile and the RGB source profile which are used by Profile Set. In addition, you can create the printer profile and the CMYK target profile as required. 1 Specify the name of printer profile which is used by Profile Set. When you use the existed printer profile, click [Browse]. When you create the new printer profile, click [Create]. % When you click [Browse], [Load Printer Profile] screen appears. In this case, go to the step 2. % When you click [Create], go to step described from page 11-27 to page 11-31. 2 On the screen displayed by clicking [Browse] of [Load Printer Profile], select a printer profile to use and click [Open]. The selected printer profile appears on [Load Printer Profile]. As required, set [Paper Type], [Paper Color], [Paper Weight] and [Glossy Mode]. Then, click [Finish] to return to the Profile Determination screen. 3 Specify the CMYK target profile which is used by Profile Set. When you use the existed CMYK target profile, click [Browse]. When you create the new CMYK target profile, click [Create]. % When you click [Browse], go to step 4. % When you click [Create], go to step described from page 11-14 to page 11-19. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-26 13.6 Edit the Component Profile of Profile Set 13 4 On the screen displayed by clicking [CMYK Target Profile] - [Browse], select the CMYK target profile used and click [Open]. The selected CMYK target profile is displayed to [Selected Profile] of [CMYK Target Profile]. 5 Specify the RGB source profile which is used by Profile Set. When you use [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB] which are preset to the image controller, select [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB]. When you specify the other RGB source profile, select [Other] and click [Browse]. % When you click [Browse], go to step 6. % When you select [sRGB] or [AdobeRGB], go to step 7. 6 On the screen displayed by clicking [RGB Source Profile] - [Browse], select the RGB source profile used and click [Open]. The selected RGB source profile is displayed below [Other] of [RGB Source Profile]. 7 Click [Next]. The Recalculate Profile Set screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 13-26. 13.6.4 Recalculate Profile Set On the Recalculate Profile Set screen, you can set to recalculate Profile Set and replace the device link profiles. 1 Check [Recalculate] of the device link profile which you want to recalculate. 2 On the screen displayed by clicking [Browse] of the device link profile which you want to replace, select the device link profile to use. % The device link profiles can be set per object. 3 Click [Next]. % The Customize Color Conversions screen appears when you have set to recalculate or replace the device link profile which was made on Color Centro Profiler. In this case, go to the step described on page 13-26. The Comment screen appears when you have set to recalculate or replace the device link profile which was not made on Color Centro Profiler or when you have not set to recalculate and replace. In this case, go to the step described on page 13-28. 13.6.5 Customize the Color Conversions When you have set to recalculate or replace the device link profile which was made on Color Centro Profiler, set the color conversions on the Customize Color Conversions screen. On the Customize Color Conversions screen, according to the setting on the Recalculate Profile Set screen, you can set the rendering intent of CMYK-CMYK conversion, the preserve mid-tone / preserve solid of CMYK ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-27 13.6 Edit the Component Profile of Profile Set 13 object (CYMK image, CMYK graphic and CMYK text) and the rendering intent of RGB object (RGB image, RGB graphic and RGB text). 0 You can't set the rendering intent when you replace all objects with the device link profile which was made / was not made on Color Centro Profiler. 1 From [CMYK-CMYK Conversion] - [Rendering Intent], select the rendering intent. % [Relative Colorimetric] is the setting to execute color conversion regarding the paper color as completely white. The paper color parts are represented as colorlessness after color conversion. % [Absolute Colorimetric] is the setting to execute color conversion maintaining the measurement value of the paper color. The paper color parts are represented with the color near the actual paper color after color conversion. When you select [Absolute Colorimetric], [Preserve Mid-Tone] and [Preserve Solid] are not available. % When you make all contents of the setting on the screen the same content as recommended setting, click [Undo]. 2 For [CMYK Image], [CMYK Graphic] and [CMYK Text], when you set the preserve mid-tone for one color, check [Preserve Mid-Tone] of that color. % [Preserve Mid-Tone] is a setting to recompose the color after the color conversion as the same one color which has composed the color before the color conversion. % The setting of [C], [M], [Y] and [K] is the setting for the color composed of C/M/Y/K only. % The setting of [R] is the setting for the color composed of [M] and [Y]. % The setting of [G] is the setting for the color composed of [C] and [Y]. % The setting of [B] is the setting for the color composed of [C] and [M]. % In some cases, you can't set [Preserve Mid-Tone] and [Preserve Solid] at the same time. 3 For [CMYK Image], [CMYK Graphic] and [CMYK Text], when you set the preserve solid for one color, check [Preserve Solid] of that color. % [Preserve Solid] is a setting to represent the solid part after the color conversion with the same color which is used for the solid part before the color conversion. % The setting of [C], [M], [Y], and [K] is the setting about the color composed of C/M/Y/K only, % The setting of [R] is the setting for the color composed of [M] and [Y]. % The setting of [G] is the setting for the color composed of [C] and [Y]. % The setting of [B] is the setting for the color composed of [C] and [M]. % In some cases, you can't set [Preserve Mid-Tone] and [Preserve Solid] at the same time. 4 From [RGB-CMYK Conversion] of [ RGB Image] , [RGB Graphic] and [RGB Text] on the Customize Color Conversions screen, select the rendering intent for each object. % [Perceptual (RGB Image)] is the recommended setting of RGB Image to represent the color near to the color which is before conversion. % [Saturation (RGB Graphic, Text)] is the recommended setting of RGB Graphic/Text to represent the color which maintains as much as possible the brightness of the color which is before conversion. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-28 13.6 Edit the Component Profile of Profile Set 13 5 Click [Confirmation Print] for the test printing. [Confirmation Print] screen appears. 6 Specify the setting of confirmation printing and click [Print]. % Click [Browse] to display the screen to select the image for printing. % Click [Select Tray] to display the screen to specify the tray used by confirmation printing. % From [Screen Setting], select the screen setting used by confirmation printing. % Specify the port number used by confirmation printing to [Port Number]. % When you click [Cancel], [Confirmation Print] screen is closed to return to the Customize Color Conversions screen. 7 Confirm the result of test printing. 8 Click [Next]. The Comment screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 13-28. 13.6.6 Enter the Comment On the Comment screen, enter the comment to embed in the Profile Set you create, as required. You can confirm the comment when you select the Profile Set on Color Centro Profiler. 1 Enter the comment to [Comment (Optional)]. 2 Click [Next]. Profile Set is calculated and generated. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-29 13.6 Edit the Component Profile of Profile Set 13 After completing calculation, the Calculation Result screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 11-42. 13.6.7 Confirm and Complete the Profile Calculation Result screen displays the list of the setting of the generated Profile Set. 1 Confirm the setting which is displayed on the Calculation Result screen. 2 Click [Next]. The Complete Profile Set screen appears. 3 Click [Finish]. The wizard is completed. Color Centro Profiler is closed to return to [Color Configuration Management] screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-30 13.7 Improve the Accuracy of the Profile Set 13 13.7 Improve the Accuracy of the Profile Set You can improve the accuracy of the Profile Set by using the Measurement Feedback screen. On the Measurement Feedback screen, by repeating measurement with the instrument, you can acquire the best measurements to apply it to the profile. Although you can execute the measurement feedback when you edit the profile/Profile Set, this section describes how to execute the measurement feedback for Profile Set by launching Color Centro Profiler. The wizard screen appears by launching Color Centro Profiler. Following the instructions of the screen, you can execute the measurement feedback. The flow of the wizard is as follows; The following buttons appear on the wizard screen. Use those as required. - [Next]: Click this button when you go to the next screen after completing the setting of the displayed current screen. - [Back]: Click this button when you back to the previous screen. - [Cancel]: Click this button when you cancel the operation. - [Suspend the Operation]: This button appears when suspending and restarting of the operation are available. Click this button when you want to suspend your operation temporarily and restart thereafter. The setting you made can be saved to the file. For detailed information on how to suspend and restart your operation, refer to page 14-5. 13.7.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler 1 Click [Profile Set] - [Edit] on Color Configuration Management screen. [Color Centro Profiler] screen appears. * As required, execute the measurement per object. * Calculation is executed. Confirmation of Procedure Name and Destination Settings Measurement Feedback Calculation Complete ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-31 13.7 Improve the Accuracy of the Profile Set 13 2 From the list, select the Profile Set to execute the measurement feedback and click [Measurement Feedback]. Color Centro Profiler is launched as wizard.[Confirmation of procedure] screen appears. 3 Confirm the contents, and click [Next]. [Name Settings] screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 13-31. 13.7.2 Set the Profile Set Name and the Destination 1 Specify the name of Profile Set you edit in [Profile Set Name] of [Name Settings] screen. % When you save the Profile Set with another name or to another place, enter the profile name and go to step 2. % When you overwrite the Profile Set in which some settings are edited, go to step 4. % You can't save the Profile Set of the same name with those registered at factory shipping in the image controller. % You can't use "DEVICE" (not only the capital letter but also the small letter) for the Profile Set name when you save the profile to the image controller. 2 Click [Browse]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-32 13.7 Improve the Accuracy of the Profile Set 13 [Select Destination Folder] screen appears. 3 Select the destination folder for saving the Profile Set you edit and click [OK]. The destination folder and file name are displayed on [Destination Folder] and [File Name] of [Name Settings] screen. 4 Click [Next]. The Measurement Feedback screen appears. % When there is the Profile Set with the same name, the confirmation message of overwriting appears. To save with another name, click [Cancel]. To overwrite, click [OK]. % Go to the step described on page 13-32. 13.7.3 Execute the Measurement Feedback You can execute the measurement feedback per CMYK object (CMYK Image, CMYK Graphic and CMYK Text). It is executed on The Measurement Feedback screen. 0 To use the instrument, you need to install the device driver of the instrument to your computer. 0 The chart pattern and available paper size differ according to the selected instrument. 0 According to the selected instrument, measurement operations differ. For detailed information on how to operate, refer to user's guide of instrument respectively. 1 To start the measurement feed back, click [Adjust] of the CMYK object to execute. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-33 13.7 Improve the Accuracy of the Profile Set 13 [Feedback] screen appears. 2 Click [Measure]. [Measurement] screen appears. 3 From [Instrument], select the instrument to use for measurement. According to the selection, the chart image appears on the upper-right of the screen. % [i11Sis (UV Filer)] returns the measurement result with the UV cut filter. 4 Specify the copy number of the chart outputting to [Copies]. 5 Click [Output] to print the chart. 6 Click [Start] to start measurement. % According to the selected instrument, the operation screen appears. Then, follow the instruction of the screen. % The current position of measurement appears on the chart image of the upper-right of the screen. % For detailed information on how to operate, refer to user's guide of each instrument. % To stop the measurement, click [Stop]. % After acquirement of measurement data, [Save the Result] becomes available. % The value of each patch appears in the measurement result list. 7 Click [Save the Result] after completing measurement. [Save As] screen appears. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-34 13.7 Improve the Accuracy of the Profile Set 13 8 Specify the saving place and file name, and click [Save]. [Measurement] screen returns after saving the measurement result file. 9 Click [OK]. [Feedback] screen returns. On [Feedback] screen, the measurement data is displayed. 10 Click [Execute Feedback]. Profile is calculated. After completing calculation, [Measurement] screen appears. 11 Repeat from step 4 to step 9. On [Feedback] screen, the new measurement data is added. The attained level which indicates the improvement of the accuracy is displayed on [Attained Level] % The attained level is indicated in 3 levels. The maximum level of the attained level is indicated as "***". 12 Confirm [Attained Level] and repeat the operation from step 10 to step 11 up to the target level. On [Feedback] screen, the new measurement data is added. % You can repeat these operations 8 times at the maximum. % When you reach the maximum level and click [Execute Feedback], the warning screen is displayed. When you execute the feedback, click [OK]. When you finish the feedback, click [Cancel]. 13 Confirm [Attained Level] is reached to the target level, and select the number of the feedback (n times) which acquires the value to adopt for profile from [Measurement Feedback to Apply]. 14 Click [OK]. [Feedback] screen is closed to return to the Measurement Feedback screen. 15 Repeat from step 1 to step 14 for other CMYK objects. The Measurement Feedback screen returns. 16 Click [Confirmation Print] for the test printing. [Confirmation Print] screen appears. 17 Specify the setting of confirmation printing and click [Print]. % Click [Browse] to display the screen to select the image for printing. % Click [Select Tray] to display the screen to specify the tray used by confirmation printing. % From [Screen Setting], select the screen setting used by confirmation printing. % Specify the port number used by confirmation printing to [Port Number]. % When you click [Cancel], [Confirmation Print] screen is closed to return to the Measurement Feedback screen. 18 Confirm the result of test printing and click [Next]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-35 13.7 Improve the Accuracy of the Profile Set 13 The Complete Profile Set screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 13-35. 13.7.4 Complete the Profile Set On the Complete the Profile Set screen, finish the task. 1 Click [Finish]. The wizard is completed. [Color Centro Profiler] screen returns. 2 On [Color Centro Profiler] screen, from the [File] menu, select [Exit]. [Color Configuration Management] screen returns. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-36 13.8 Adjust the Color Conversions of Profile Set 13 13.8 Adjust the Color Conversions of Profile Set On the Point Color Adjustment/Profile Curve Adjustment screen, you can execute the adjustment of the color conversions of the Profile Set. Although you can execute the point color adjustment/profile curve adjustment when you edit the profile/Profile Set, this section describes how to execute the point color adjustment/profile curve adjustment for Profile Set by launching Color Centro Profiler. The wizard screen appears by launching Color Centro Profiler. Following the instructions of the screen, you can execute the point color adjustment/profile curve adjustment. The flow of the wizard is as follows; The following buttons appear on the wizard screen. Use those as required. - [Next]: Click this button when you go to the next screen after completing the setting of the displayed current screen. - [Back]: Click this button when you back to the previous screen. - [Cancel]: Click this button when you cancel the operation. - [Suspend the Operation]: This button appears when suspending and restarting of the operation are available. Click this button when you want to suspend your operation temporarily and restart thereafter. The setting you made can be saved to the file. For detailed information on how to suspend and restart your operation, refer to page 14-5. 13.8.1 Launch Color Centro Profiler 1 Click [Profile Set] - [Edit] on Color Configuration Management screen. [Color Centro Profiler] screen appears. Confirmation of Procedure Name and Destination Settings Point Color/ Profile Curve Adjustment Calculation Complete * As required, execute the measurement per object. * Calculation is executed. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-37 13.8 Adjust the Color Conversions of Profile Set 13 2 From the list, select the Profile Set to execute the point color adjustment/profile curve adjustment, and click [Adjustment]. Color Centro Profiler is launched as wizard. [Confirmation of procedure] screen appears. 3 Confirm the contents, and click [Next]. [Name Settings] screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 13-37. 13.8.2 Set the Profile Set Name and the Destination 1 Specify the name of Profile Set you edit in [Profile Set Name] of [Name Settings] screen. % When you save the Profile Set with another name or to another place, enter the profile name and go to step 2. % When you overwrite the Profile Set in which some settings are edited, go to step 4. % You can't save the Profile Set of the same name with those registered at factory shipping in the image controller. % You can't use "DEVICE" (not only the capital letter but also the small letter) for the Profile Set name when you save the profile to the image controller. 2 Click [Browse]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-38 13.8 Adjust the Color Conversions of Profile Set 13 [Select Destination Folder] screen appears. 3 Select the destination folder for saving the Profile Set you edit and click [OK]. The destination folder and file name are displayed on [Destination Folder] and [File Name] of [Name Settings] screen. 4 Click [Next]. The Point Color Adjustment/Profile Curve Adjustment screen appears. % When there is the Profile Set with the same name, the confirmation message of overwriting appears. To save with another name, click [Cancel]. To overwrite, click [OK]. % Go to the step described on page 13-38. 13.8.3 Adjust the Point Color / Profile Curve You can execute the point color adjustment/profile curve adjustment per CMYK object (CMYK Image, CMYK Graphic and CMYK Text). 1 To execute the point color adjustment/profile curve adjustment, click [Adjust] of the CMYK object to execute. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-39 13.8 Adjust the Color Conversions of Profile Set 13 The Adjustment screen appears. 2 If necessary, adjust the point color as follows; % When you add the new point color, execute the operation described on page 11-47. % When you edit the existing point color, execute the operation described on page 11-47. % When you delete the existing point color, execute the operation described on page 11-48. 3 If necessary, execute the adjustment of the profile curve. % For detailed information on how to adjust the profile curve, refer topage 11-48. 4 Repeat from step 1 to step 3 for other CMYK object. The Point Color Adjustment/Profile Curve Adjustment screen appears. 5 Click [Confirmation Print] for the test printing. [Confirmation Print] screen appears. 6 Specify the setting of confirmation printing and click [Print]. % Click [Browse] to display the screen to select the image for printing. % Click [Select Tray] to display the screen to specify the tray used by confirmation printing. % From [Screen Setting], select the screen setting used by confirmation printing. % Specify the port number used by confirmation printing to [Port Number]. % When you click [Cancel], [Confirmation Print] screen is closed to return to the Adjustment screen. 7 Confirm the result of test printing and click [OK]. The Adjustment is closed to return to the Point Color Adjustment/Profile Curve Adjustment screen. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-40 13.8 Adjust the Color Conversions of Profile Set 13 8 Click [Next]. Profile is calculated and generated. After completing calculation, the Complete Profile screen appears. % Go to the step described on page 13-42. Add the New Spot Color 1 Click [New]. A numbered line is added on [Adjustment Point]. 2 Specify the value (0 to 255) of the added point color of the added line to [R], [G] and [B]. Or, select the color from [Color Setting] screen displayed by clicking [Color Palette]. And click [OK]. The new input color is displayed on [Pointed Color]. 3 From [Effective Range], select the effective range. The color conversion result of the adjusted point is displayed on [Result] and [After adj.]. In addition, the color of [Result] is displayed on the upper-left of the Sample Color (below the [Result]) and the color of [After adj.] is displayed on the upper-right. % When you select [Narrow], the result of adjustment has influence on the color range which includes only the near colors to the input color. % When you select [Wide], the result of adjustment has influence on the color range which includes the colors which are away from the input color. % When you select [Normal], it has influence on the middle range between [Narrow] and [Wide]. % You can specify [Effective Range] per adjustment point. % The values displayed on [Result] and [After adj.] are the value to which Input curve and color conversion table are applied. (Output curve is not applied to the curve yet.) 4 Enter the value into [Add. Value] to make the value of [After adj.] the target value. % When you discard the setting of [Add. Value], click [Undo] of [Point Color Adjustment]. Edit the Existing Point Color 1 From [Adjustment Point], select the adjustment point (input color) to edit. The input color is displayed on the lower of the Sample Color (below [Result]). 2 From [Effective Range], select the effective range. The color conversion result of the adjusted point is displayed on [Result] and [After adj.]. In addition, the color of [Result] is displayed on the upper-left of the Sample Color and the color of [After adj.] is displayed on the upper-right. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-41 13.8 Adjust the Color Conversions of Profile Set 13 % When you select [Narrow], the result of adjustment has influence on the color range which includes only the near colors to the input color. % When you select [Wide], the result of adjustment has influence on the color range which includes the colors which are away from the input color. % When you select [Normal], it has influence on the middle range between [Narrow] and [Wide]. % You can specify [Effective Range] per adjustment point. % The values displayed on [Result] and [After adj.] are the value to which Input curve and color conversion table are applied. (Output curve is not applied to the curve yet.) 3 Enter the value into [Add. Value] to make the value of [After adj.] the target value. % When you discard the setting of [Add. Value], click [Undo] of [Point Color Adjustment]. Delete the Existing Point Color 1 From [Adjustment Point], select the adjustment point (input color) to delete. 2 Click [Delete]. The selected adjustment point is deleted. Adjust the Profile Curve 1 From [Adjustment Curve], select [Input] or [Output]. % When you execute the adjustment of input curve, select [Input]. % When you execute the adjustment of output curve, select [Output]. 2 Select the combination of colors from [Combination]. According to the selection from [Combination], [View] check box per each color and [Adjustment] radio button per each color appear. % When you select [Input], select [R/G/B] or [RGB]. % When you select [Output], select [C/M/Y/K], [CMY/K] or [CMYK]. % When you select [R/G/B] or [C/M/Y/K], you can adjust the profile curves of each color. % When you select [RGB] or [CMYK], you can adjust the consolidated profile curves of RGB or CMYK. % When you select [CMY/K], you can adjust the consolidated profile curve of CMY and the profile curve of K. 3 When you want to display the profile curve of one color, check [View] of that color. % When you want to hide the profile curve of one color, remove the check mark from [View] of that color. 4 When you want to adjust the profile curve of one color, select [Adj.] of that color. % When check mark of [View] for one color was not selected and you select [Adj.] for the same color, [View] is checked automatically. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-42 13.8 Adjust the Color Conversions of Profile Set 13 5 To execute the adjustment of the profile curve, you can drag and move the beginning point/ending point (at both ends of the profile curve) and adjustment points (added by the clicking on the profile curve). % The selected adjustment point appears as a small red square. % By clicking [Previous] or [Next], you can switch the point selection to the previous or the next. % You can move the selected point by entering the coordinate values into the input boxes which are on the center of vertical/horizontal axises. % When you want to delete the added point, drag it to the adjacent point or drop it outside of the profile curve area. % When you want to reset the adjusted setting, click [Undo] of [Profile Curve Adjustment]. 13.8.4 Complete the Profile Set On the Complete the Profile Set screen, finish the task. 1 Click [Finish]. The wizard is completed. [Color Centro Profiler] screen returns. 2 On [Color Centro Profiler] screen, from the [File] menu, select [Exit]. [Color Configuration Management] screen returns. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-43 13.9 Profile Set Management 13 13.9 Profile Set Management On [Color Centro Profiler] screen, you can manage Profile Set. This section describes how to manage the new Profile Set by launching Color Centro Profiler. 13.9.1 Export Profiles You can export profiles form the Profile Set. 1 Click [Profile Set] - [Edit] on Color Configuration Management screen. [Color Centro Profiler] screen appears. 2 From the tree view and the list of [Management of the Existing Profile sets], select the Profile Set to export the profile. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [File] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted Profile Set when the Profile Set has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 13-9. 3 Click [Export Profiles]. [Export Profiles] appears. 4 When you save the exported profiles to the folder with the name of the Profile Set, check [Create New Folder with Profile Set Name]. 5 On the screen displayed by clicking [Browse], select the place to save the profiles and click [OK]. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-44 13.9 Profile Set Management 13 When you check [Create New Folder with Profile Set Name], the folder with the name of the Profile Set is created at the selected place. 6 On [Select Export Profile Type], check the profile to export and click [OK]. The selected profiles are exported to the specified place. [Export Profiles] screen is closed and the confirmation message appears. 7 Click [OK] on the confirmation message. [Color Centro Profiler] screen returns. 8 On [Color Centro Profiler] screen, from the [File] menu, select [Exit]. [Color Configuration Management] screen returns. 13.9.2 Copy the Profile Set You can make a duplication of the Profile Set in the image controller, to the image controller. In addition, the Profile Set saved on the local/network computer can be saved with another name to the local/network computer. 1 Click [Profile Set] - [Edit] on Color Configuration Management screen. [Color Centro Profiler] screen appears. 2 From the tree view and the list of [Management of the Existing Profile sets], select the Profile Set to copy. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [View] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted Profile Set when the Profile Set has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 13-9. 3 Click [Copy]. When you select the Profile Set in the image controller, [Copy Profile Set] screen appears. When you select the Profile Set on the local/network computer, [Save as] screen appears. % When you select the multiple Profile Sets, [Copy] isn't available. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-45 13.9 Profile Set Management 13 % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Copy]. 4 Specify [Profile Set Name] (in case of the image controller) or [File Name] (in case of local/network). % You can't save the Profile Set of the same name with those in the image controller. % When you copy to the image controller, specify the Profile Set Name within 96 one-byte alpha-numerical characters. 5 Click [OK] (in case of the image controller) or [Save] (in case of local/network). The duplication of the Profile Set is generated. % When there is the Profile Set with the same name, [Copy Profile Set] screen appears again. In this case, specify another Profile Set name and click [OK]. 6 On [Color Centro Profiler] screen, from the [File] menu, select [Exit]. [Color Configuration Management] screen returns. 13.9.3 Delete 1 Click [Profile Set] - [Edit] on Color Configuration Management screen. [Color Centro Profiler] screen appears. 2 From the tree view and the list of [Management of the Existing Profile sets], select the Profile Set to delete. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [View] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted Profile Set when the Profile Set has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 13-9. 3 Click [Delete]. The confirmation message appears. % You can delete the multiple Profile Sets. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Delete]. 4 Click [OK] on the confirmation message. Profile is deleted. 5 On [Color Centro Profiler] screen, from the [File] menu, select [Exit]. [Color Configuration Management] screen returns. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-46 13.9 Profile Set Management 13 13.9.4 Refresh the List (Reload) 1 Click [Profile Set] - [Edit] on Color Configuration Management screen. [Color Centro Profiler] screen appears. 2 From the tree view and the list of [Management of the Existing Profile sets], select the folder to reload. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [View] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted Profile Set when the Profile Set has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 13-9. 3 Click [Reload]. The list is updated. 4 On [Color Centro Profiler] screen, from the [File] menu, select [Exit]. [Color Configuration Management] screen returns. 13.9.5 Confirm the Detail Info 1 Click [Profile Set] - [Edit] on Color Configuration Management screen. [Color Centro Profiler] screen appears. 2 From the tree view and the list of [Management of the Existing Profile sets], select the Profile Set to confirm the detail information. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [View] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted Profile Set when the Profile Set has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 13-9. 3 Click [Detail Info]. [Detail Information] screen appears. % When you select the multiple Profile Sets, [Detail Info] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [View] menu - [Change Table Information]. 4 Confirm the content and click [OK]. [Detail Information] is closed. 5 On [Color Centro Profiler] screen, from the [File] menu, select [Exit]. [Color Configuration Management] screen returns. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-47 13.9 Profile Set Management 13 13.9.6 Change the Profile Set Information 1 Click [Profile Set] - [Edit] on Color Configuration Management screen. [Color Centro Profiler] screen appears. 2 From the tree view and the list of [Management of the Existing Profile sets], select the Profile Set to change the information. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [View] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted Profile Set when the Profile Set has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 13-9. 3 Click [Change Info]. [Change Profile Set Information] appears. % When you select the multiple RGB source profiles, [Change Info] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Change Info]. 4 Edit [Profile Set Name] (within 96 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) and [Comment (Optional)] (within 192 one-byte alpha-numerical characters) as required. % You can't change to the same name of the existed Profile Set in the image controller. 5 Click [OK]. The Profile Set information is changed. % When there is the Profile Set with the same name, [Copy Profile Set] screen appears. In this case, specify another Profile Set name and click [OK]. 6 On [Color Centro Profiler] screen, from the [File] menu, select [Exit]. [Color Configuration Management] screen returns. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-48 13.9 Profile Set Management 13 13.9.7 Export the Profile Set You can export the RGB source profile of the image controller to Local or Network. 1 Click [Profile Set] - [Edit] on Color Configuration Management screen. [Color Centro Profiler] screen appears. 2 From the tree view and the list of [Management of the Existing Profile sets], select the Profile Set to export. % For detailed information on how to connect another controller, refer to page 14-2. % When you reload the information of the image controller connected currently, select [View] menu - [Reload]. Executing of reload discards the adjusted Profile Set when the Profile Set has not been registered yet in the image controller. Register the settings before executing of reload, as required. For how to register it, refer to page 13-9. 3 Click [Export]. [Save As] screen appears. % When you select the multiple Profile Sets, [Export] isn't available. % Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Export]. 4 Specify the saving place and file name for the Profile Set to export, and click [Save]. Exporting to the specified place is executed. 5 On [Color Centro Profiler] screen, from the [File] menu, select [Exit]. [Color Configuration Management] screen returns. ColorCentro (IC-601) 13-49 13.10 Environmental Setting 13 13.10 Environmental Setting You can select the monitor profile to match the adjustment point and the adjusted color accurately on the monitor when the point color adjustment is executed. This section describes how to set the monitor profile as the environmental setting of Color Centro Profiler. 1 Click [Profile Set] - [Edit] on Color Configuration Management screen. [Color Centro Profiler] screen appears. 2 From the [Tool] menu, select [Environmental setting]. [Environmental setting] screen appears. 3 On the screen displayed by clicking [Browse], select the monitor profile to use and click [OK]. The selected monitor profile is applied. 4 On [Color Centro Profiler] screen, from the [File] menu, select [Exit]. [Color Configuration Management] screen returns. 14 Other Functions ColorCentro (IC-601) 14-2 14.1 Re-login on Connection Switching 14 14 Other Functions 14.1 Re-login on Connection Switching When you connect to the image controller which is different from the image controller currently connected, operate as follows; 0 When there are unregistered settings for the image controller connecting currently connected, register those to the image controller or save those to the local/network computer, as required. 0 To login, the IP address and the port number are necessary. When the port number is unknown, confirm the JSP settings of the image controller. (default: 30081) 0 Confirm that the image controller can communicate. 1 Select [File] menu - [Login] on the screen you are using. When the system can not find any unregistered/unsaved information, [Login] screen appears. % When you use the screen on which tree view is displayed, similar operation can be done by selecting other image controller on the tree view. % Similar operation can be done when you use [File]menu of [Launcher]. % While [Login] screen is displayed, [Launcher] screen is not available until login is completed. 2 Enter the IP address and the port number (30081 - 30090) of the image controller to which you want to connect "Color Centro" into [Destination] of [Login] screen, and click [OK]. % If the IP address is 192.168.0.1 and the port number is 30081, separate the IP address and the port number with a colon, and enter "192.168.0.1:30081". % You can select the IP address and the port number which were used before, from [Current Destination]. The input number is kept even after exiting Color Centro. % When you click [Cancel], the login process is canceled. % When you click [Help], the [Help] screen appears. % When there is unregistered/unsaved information on the current screen, or some screens are under use, the confirmation message appears. In this case, click [OK] if you want to close all the screens. When you want to register/save the unregistered/unsaved information to the image controller/computer, select [Cancel] and redo step 1 after necessary operation for registration/saving. ColorCentro (IC-601) 14-3 14.2 List Operation 14 14.2 List Operation 14.2.1 Sorting by List Item You can sort the content by the list item on the following lists; - List of [Tone Curve Adjustment] screen - List of [Spot Color Table Management] screen ([Table Name] (in case of [Controller]), or [File Name] (in case of [Local]/[Network]), only) - List of [Profile Management] screen - List of [Color Configuration Management] screen (other than [Memo]) - Left list of [Default Profile Set Setting / Paper Type Default Setting] screen - List of [Import/Export] screen You can sort the list by clicking the list item name which becomes the key of sorting. When you click the item name, small triangle appears to the right of the name and you can confirm the order (upward: ascending order / downward: descending order). You can switch ascending order and descending order by clicking. Similar operation can be done when you select [File] menu - [Sort]. (Some screens don't have [Sort] menu) 14.2.2 Move of Row You can move the row of the following list; - List of [Color Configuration Management] screen (other than [Memo]) When you drag the item name to the right or left, you can move the position of the row. However, you can't move the following rows; [Color Configuration Default] and [Color Configuration Name] of the Color Configuration list, [Default Profile Set] and [Profile Set Name] of the Profile Set list. 14.2.3 Display/Non-Display List Item You can switch the row from display to non-display or its reverse on the following list; - List of [Color Configuration Management] screen - List of[ Default Profile Set Setting / Paper Type Default Setting] (other than [Profile Set Name] and [Paper Type]). When you right click on the item name, sub menu appears. By selecting the row name from the sub menu, you can switch the row from display to non-display. However, you can't switch the following rows to non-display; [Color Configuration Default] and [Color Configuration Name] of the Color Configuration list, [Default Profile Set] and [Profile Set Name] of the Profile Set list. ColorCentro (IC-601) 14-4 14.3 Print Set Up Information 14 14.3 Print Set Up Information You can print the settings of the image controller currently connected. 1 On [Launcher] screen, select [File] menu - [Print Set Up Information]. [Print Set Up Information] screen appears. % The IP address and the port number of the image controller you connected are displayed on [Current Destination]. 2 Confirm the port number of the image controller you connected is displayed to [Current Destination]. 3 From [Item], select the item to print. 4 From [Paper Tray], select the paper tray for printing of the setting list and click [Print]. The setting list is printed. ColorCentro (IC-601) 14-5 14.4 Suspend and Restart 14 14.4 Suspend and Restart When you click [Suspend the Operation] on the wizard screen of Color Centro Profiler, [Save As] screen appears. Using the saved file, you can restart the operation. 14.4.1 Suspend the Operation This section describes how to save the suspended operation to the file. 1 Click [Suspend the Operation] on the wizard screen. [Save As] screen appears. 2 Specify the file name and the destination folder for saving the current operation and click [Save]. Current operations are saved and the wizard screen is closed. 14.4.2 Restart the Suspended Operation When you click [Suspend the Operation] on the wizard screen of Color Centro Profiler, [Save As] screen appears. This section describes how to restart the operation using the saved file. 1 Click [Profile Set] - [Edit] on Color Configuration Management screen. [Color Centro Profiler] screen appears. ColorCentro (IC-601) 14-6 14.4 Suspend and Restart 14 2 Click [Restart Suspended Operation]. [Open] screen appears. 3 Specify the file with the suspended operation and click [Open]. The wizard screen when operation was suspended is displayed. 15 Troubleshooting ColorCentro (IC-601) 15-2 15.1 Cannot start Color Centro 15 15 Troubleshooting This section describes how to solve issues and problems that you may encounter while using the printer. 15.1 Cannot start Color Centro If you cannot start Color Centro, check the following items in order from beginning to end. When the above troubleshooting does not eliminate the problem, refer to the [User's Guide - POD Administrator's Reference]. Problem Possible Cause Remedy Cannot start There is a possibility that the Microsoft .Net Framework 2.0 is not installed. When the Microsoft .Net Framework 2.0 is not installed, install it. [Windows Security Alert] appears. Color Centro may be blocked by the firewall. Allow the communication by Java application on your network. Cannot connect to the network. The network cable may be disconnected. Check that the cable is correctly connected. An error may have occurred on this machine. Check the control panel of this machine. Cannot connect to the image controller. IP address and the port number may be wrong. Confirm the JSP settings of the image controller. An error may have occurred on the image controller. Check the control panel of this machine. ColorCentro (IC-601) 15-3 15.2 Cannot Adjust Color 15 15.2 Cannot Adjust Color Problem Possible Cause Remedy Cannot print with the adjusted color conversion When printing from the application which has the color management function such as Adobe Reader9, the application might execute another color conversion. Print after enabling "Color management by the printer" on each application. For detailed information on how to change the color setting in each application, refer to help and the manual etc. of each application. On measurement, "BAR or MARK is not found" is displayed and can not execute measurement There may be problem on recognizing the bar (black bold line) or the mark (diamond mark at right and left) on the chart. Confirm the manual of the measurement instrument. A dotted line for the cutout on the chart might be a cause of the recognition error of the measurement instrument. When you cut the chart along and slightly inside the dotted line, normal recognition might be done. 16 Appendix ColorCentro (IC-601) 16-2 16.1 Glossary 16 16 Appendix 16.1 Glossary Item Description 10Base-T/ 100Base-TX/ 1000Base-T A set of specifications under the Ethernet standards. Cables made of 2 stranded copper wire rods are used. Communication speed is 10Mbps with 10Base-T, 100Mbps with 100Base-TX, and 1000Mbps with 1000Base-T. Adobe® Flash® Software or its file format developed by Adobe Systems Inc. (formerly by Macromedia, Inc.), used to create a content by compiling vector-graphic animations and sounds. The software allows handling interactive contents using keyboard or mouse. The files can be kept relatively compact and accessed from a Web browser with dedicated plug-in software. AppleTalk The generic name for the protocol suite developed by Apple Computer for computer networking. bit The abbreviation for binary digit. The smallest unit of information (data quantity) handled by a computer or printer. A bit uses only a 0 or a 1 to indicate data. BMP The abbreviation for bitmap. This is a file format for saving image data. (The file extension is ".bmp".) Commonly used on Windows platforms. BMP covers the color depth from monochrome (2 values) to full color (16,777,216 colors). BMP images are not suitable for compressed storage. Bonjour A Macintosh network technology, automatically detecting a device connected to the network for automatic configuration. Previously called "Rendezvous", and has been changed to "Bonjour" since Mac OS X v10.4. BOOTP The abbreviation for Bootstrap Protocol. The protocol is used for a client computer on the TCP/IP network to load network configuration automatically from a server. Instead of BOOTP, DHCP, an advanced protocol based on BOOTP, is typically used today. Brightness Brightness of a display or other screen. Byte A byte indicates a unit of information (data quantity) handled by a computer or printer. A byte consists of eight bits. client A computer using services provided by servers via the network. Default Gateway A device, such as a computer or router, used as a "gateway" to access computers on different LANs. DHCP The acronym for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. The protocol is used for a client computer on the TCP/IP network to load network configuration automatically from a server. Just using a DHCP server to centrally manage IP addresses of the DHCP clients enables you to construct a network without IP address conflicts or other troubles. DNS Abbreviation of Domain Name Systems. DNS allows for obtaining the IP address corresponding to a host name in network environments. This system enables a user to access other computers on the network by specifying host names instead of elusive and non-intuitive IP addresses. DPI (dpi) Abbreviation of Dots Per Inch. Unit of resolution used with printers, scanners, etc. This indicates the number of dots used to represent an inch. The higher this value, the higher the resolution. Driver Software to act intermediately between the computer and peripheral devices. Ethernet Standard for the LAN transmission line. Frame type A type of communication format used in NetWare environments. For mutual communication, the same frame type is required. FTP Abbreviation of File Transfer Protocol. A protocol used to transfer files on the TCP/IP network such as Internet, Intranet, etc. Gateway Hardware or software serving as a point connecting networks. A gateway not only connects networks but also changes data formats, addresses, and protocols according to the connected networks. ColorCentro (IC-601) 16-3 16.1 Glossary 16 Gray Scale A form of presenting monochrome image by using the gradation information shifting from black to white. Hard disk Mass storage device to save data. The data is retained even after the power is turned off. Host Name Name of a device on the network. HTTP Abbreviation of HyperText Transfer Protocol. A protocol used to transmit or receive data between a web server and client (web browser, etc.). Files of image, voice, animation, etc. correlated with the document can be exchanged including the expression form and other information. Install To install hardware, operating systems, applications, printer drivers, or other software on to a computer. IP Address A code (address) to identify individual network devices on the Internet. IPv4 (Internet Protocol version 4), a protocol widely used today, adopts a 32-bit number for an IP address separated into four sections. An example of an IPv4 IP address is: 192.168.1.10. On the other hand, IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), the next generation protocol, adopts 128-bit IP addresses. An IP address is allocated to all computers and other devices connected to the Internet. IPP The acronym for Internet Printing Protocol. This is a protocol used to send or receive print data or control printers via the Internet or other TCP/IP network. IPP can also send and print data to printers in remote areas via the Internet. IPX One of the protocols used for NetWare. IPX runs in the network layer of the OSI reference model. IPX/SPX The abbreviation for Internetwork Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange. This is a protocol developed by Novell, Inc., typically used in NetWare environments. LAN The acronym for Local Area Network. This is a network constructed by connecting computers on the same floor, in the same building, or in neighboring buildings. Local printer A printer connected to a parallel or USB port of a computer. LPD The acronym for Line Printer Daemon. This is a platform-independent printer protocol running on the TCP/IP network. The protocol was originally developed for BSD UNIX, and has become one of the printing protocols typically used among general computers. LPR/LPD The acronym for Line Printer Request/Line Printer Daemon. This is a printing method implemented via networks, used for Windows NT or UNIX based systems. It uses TCP/IP to output printing data from Windows or UNIX to a printer on the network. MAC address MAC is the acronym for Media Access Control. A MAC address is an ID number unique to each Ethernet card, enabling sending or receiving data to or from other Ethernet cards. A Mac address is a 48-bit number. The first 24 bits are controlled by IEEE and used to allocate a unique number to each manufacture, whereas the latter 24 bits are used by each manufacturer to assign a unique number to each card. Memory Unit to save data temporarily. Some types of memory retain data even after the power is turned off, while others not. NDPS The acronym for Novell Distributed Print Services. This provides a high performance printing solution in NDS environments. Using NDPS for the print server simplifies and automates complicated management activities related to printer use. For example, you can print to a desired printer or automatically download the printer driver for a newly installed printer. NDPS print servers also integrate management related to the network printers. NDS The acronym for Novell Directory Services. This allows the centralized management in a hierarchical structure of shared resources such as servers, printers and users information on the network, as well as the access privilege and other information related to the users. NetBEUI The abbreviation for NetBIOS Extended User Interface. This is a network protocol developed by IBM. NetBEUI enables you to construct a small-scale network simply by configuring computer names. NetBIOS Abbreviation of Network Basic Input Output System. This is a communication interface developed by IBM. NetWare A network operating system developed by Novell. This uses NetWare IPX/SPX for the communication protocol. Item Description ColorCentro (IC-601) 16-4 16.1 Glossary 16 Nprinter/ Rprinter A remote printer support module used when using a printer server in NetWare environments. Rprinter is used for NetWare 3.x, and Nprinter for NetWare 4.x. OHP/OHT A transparent sheet used for OHP (Overhead projector). This is used for presentations. OS Abbreviation of Operating System. Basic software to control the computer system. Windows, MacOS, and Unix are examples. Outline font A type of fonts represented using lines and curves to display an outline of a character. Larger-size characters can be displayed on a screen or printed with no jagged edges. PDF Abbreviation of Portable Document Format. One of electronic documents (extension: .pdf). PDF is a PostScript based format, and can be viewed using Adobe Acrobat Reader, a free viewer software. PDL The acronym for Page Description Language. This is a language used to instruct a page printer about images being printed on each page. Peer-to-peer A type of network where the connected devices can be communicate with each other without using a dedicated server. Plug and play A mechanism used to immediately detect a peripheral device when it is plugged into a computer, and search for an appropriate driver automatically, so that the device becomes operable. PostScript A typical page-descriptive language developed by Adobe and commonly used for high quality printing. PPD The acronym for PostScript Printer Description. This is a file with the description of resolution, available paper sizes, and other information specific to a PostScript printer model. Preview A function allowing you to view a result image before being actually processed for printing or scanning. Print job A print request transmitted from a computer to a printing device. Print queue A software system used by a spooler to save generated print jobs. Printer buffer A memory area temporarily used for processing data of print jobs. Printer driver Software acting as an intermediate between the computer and printer. Property Attribute information. When using a printer driver, different functions can be configured by utilizing its properties. By using properties of a file, you can check the attribute information about the file. Protocol Rules by which a computer communicates with other computer or peripheral device. Proxy server A server that is installed to act as an intermediary connection between each client and different servers to effectively ensure security over the entire system for Internet connections. PServer A print server module available in NetWare environments. This module monitors, changes, pauses, restarts, or cancels print jobs. Queue name A logical printer name required for LPD/LPR printing. Queue Name A name assigned to each device for allowing printing to the device via network. Resolution Degree how correctly the details of images or prints can be reproduced. RGB The acronym for Red, Green, and Blue. The RGB are the primary three colors used for monitor and other devices, producing any of the full colors by changing their brightness ratio. RIP The acronym for Raster Image Processor. RIP extracts picture images from text data created using PostScript or other page description language. This processor is usually integrated into a printer. Samba UNIX server software which uses SMB (Server Message Block) to make UNIX system resources available to Windows environments. Screen font A type of fonts used for displaying characters and symbols on a CRT or other monitor. Shared printer A printer connected to a server on the network and configured to be used by multiple computers. SLP The acronym for Service Location Protocol. This is a protocol that provides capabilities such as finding services or automatic client configuration on the TCP/IP network. Item Description ColorCentro (IC-601) 16-5 16.1 Glossary 16 SMB Abbreviation of Server Message Block. A protocol used mainly to realize sharing of files or printers through the network between Windows. SMTP Abbreviation of Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. A protocol to transmit or transfer the electronic mails. SNMP The acronym for Simple Network Management Protocol. This is a management protocol in the TCP/IP network environments. Spool The acronym for Simultaneous Peripheral Operation On-Line. Data to be output to a printer is not sent directly to the printer, but is temporarily stored in another location. The stored data is then sent collectively to the printer. Subnet mask A value used to divide a TCP/IP network into small networks (subnetworks). This is used to identify how many higher-order bits of an IP address are used for the network address. TCP/IP Abbreviation of Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. It is a de facto standard protocol widely used for the Internet. An IP address is used to identify each network device. Touch & Print A feature that allows documents sent from the printer driver to be printed simply by placing your finger or IC card on the authentication unit connected to the printer when the user authentication is enabled. In order to use the Touch & Print feature, an authentication unit must be connected to this machine, and the vein patterns or the ID of the IC card for each user must be registered. TrueType A type of outline font developed by Apple and Microsoft, and currently used as a standard font type for Macintosh and Windows. This type of font can be used both for display and printing. Uninstall To delete software installed on a computer USB The acronym for Universal Serial Bus. This is a general-purpose interface defined for connecting a mouse, printer, and other devices with a computer. Web browser Software to access web pages. Typical Web browsers include Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator. WINS The acronym for Windows Internet Naming Service. This is a service, available in Windows environments, to call the name server responsible for conversion between a computer name and an IP address. XPS Abbreviation of XML Paper Specification. This is one of the electronic document formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. It is first supported in Windows Vista. Item Description ColorCentro (IC-601) 16-6 16.2 Index 16 16.2 Index A Adjust the Each Color ................................................8-15 Alternative Color ................................................ 5-7, 10-2 B Brightness/Contrast ...................................................8-13 C Calibration ........................................................... 5-5, 7-2 Chart .................................................................. 7-7, 9-11 CMYK Target Profile ...................................... 11-9, 11-13 Color Centro Profiler ................................................13-49 Color Configuration Management ..................... 5-8, 13-2 Color Default Settings ................................................12-2 Composition of User's Guide ......................................1-2 Control Panel ...............................................................2-4 Conventions used in this manual ................................1-4 G Glossary .....................................................................16-2 I Input Color .................................................................10-7 Installation ...................................................................4-2 Instrument ....................................................................7-6 L Launcher ......................................................................5-4 Login ............................................................................5-2 O Operating environment ................................................2-6 Output Color ..............................................................10-8 Overview of the Color Centro ......................................2-2 P Paper indication ...........................................................1-5 Paper size ....................................................................1-5 Precautions for Installation ..........................................3-2 Print Set Up Information ............................................14-4 Printer Profile ...........................................................11-25 Profile Management .......................................... 5-7, 11-2 Profile Set ..................................................................13-2 R RGB Source Profile ....................................................11-5 S Spot Color ........................................................... 5-6, 9-2 Spot Color Table ..........................................................9-5 T TCP/IP Settings ...........................................................3-3 Tone Curve Adjustment ....................................... 5-6, 8-2 Trouble .......................................................................15-2 http://konicaminolta.com 163/211 GDI User Manual GDI Printer Controller Contents-1 Contents 1 Introduction Copyright ....................................................................................... 1-4 1.1 Software end user license agreement............................................ 1-5 1.2 Explanation of manual conventions................................................ 1-8 Safety advices................................................................................ 1-8 Sequence of action ........................................................................ 1-8 Tips ................................................................................................ 1-9 Special text markings..................................................................... 1-9 1.3 Operating environment .................................................................. 1-10 System requirements ................................................................... 1-10 Recommended operating environment ....................................... 1-10 1.4 Installing the printer driver ............................................................ 1-10 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2.1 Printer driver settings dialog box.................................................... 2-3 Displaying the settings dialog box ................................................. 2-3 Printing Preferences dialog box..................................................... 2-5 Properties dialog box..................................................................... 2-7 2.2 Device Options tab ........................................................................... 2-9 Device Options............................................................................. 2-10 Memory ........................................................................................ 2-10 2.3 Common operations....................................................................... 2-11 Common items............................................................................. 2-11 Easy Set ....................................................................................... 2-12 2.4 Setup tab ......................................................................................... 2-14 Orientation.................................................................................... 2-14 Original Size ................................................................................. 2-15 Edit Custom ................................................................................. 2-17 Output Size .................................................................................. 2-20 Zoom............................................................................................ 2-21 Copy............................................................................................. 2-21 Collate .......................................................................................... 2-22 Paper Source ............................................................................... 2-23 Paper Type................................................................................... 2-24 Contents-2 GDI Printer Controller Output Method.............................................................................. 2-24 Using secure printing .................................................................... 2-25 Specifying secure printing from the printer driver ........................ 2-25 Printing from the machine............................................................. 2-26 2.5 Layout tab ........................................................................................ 2-28 Combination ................................................................................. 2-29 Combination Details...................................................................... 2-30 Double-sided printing ................................................................... 2-31 2.6 Per Page Setting tab ....................................................................... 2-32 Front Cover Page.......................................................................... 2-33 Front Cover Paper Source ............................................................ 2-33 Media Type ................................................................................... 2-33 2.7 Watermark tab ................................................................................. 2-34 Watermark Select ......................................................................... 2-34 Creating a new watermark............................................................ 2-35 Editing a watermark ...................................................................... 2-37 2.8 Quality tab ........................................................................................ 2-40 Resolution ..................................................................................... 2-40 Adjustment.................................................................................... 2-41 3 Control panel operations 3.1 Printing operations............................................................................ 3-3 Control panel .................................................................................. 3-3 Printer indicator .............................................................................. 3-5 Starting the print operation............................................................. 3-5 Canceling a print job....................................................................... 3-6 Using the manual bypass tray ........................................................ 3-8 Power Save mode......................................................................... 3-10 4 Troubleshooting 4.1 Checking error messages ................................................................ 4-3 4.2 Main error messages ........................................................................ 4-4 4.3 Print data when an error occurs ...................................................... 4-5 With a "MACHINE TROUBLE" error ............................................... 4-5 Temporary errors ............................................................................ 4-5 5 Specifications 1 Introduction Introduction 1 GDI Printer Controller 1-3 1 Introduction Thank you for purchasing this machine. This manual provides the information required to use this machine as a GDI printer. Be sure to read this manual before performing any operations. For precautions concerning the use and safety of the machine, refer to the User manual provided with the machine. Store the CD-ROM and User manual provided with the machine in a safe place. Trademarks and copyright - KONICA MINOLTA, the KONICA MINOLTA logo, and The essentials of imaging are registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. - PageScope and bizhub are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC. - Netscape is a registered trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation in the United States and other countries. - Novell and Novell NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other countries. - Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. - Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat and PostScript are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. - Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation. - PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company Limited. - All other product and brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations. 1 Introduction 1-4 GDI Printer Controller Copyright © 2007 Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Note - This User manual may not be reproduced in part or in full without permission. - Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. will not be held liable for any incidents caused by using this printing system or User manual. - Information included in this User manual is subject to change without notice. - Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. maintains the copyright of the printer drivers. Introduction 1 GDI Printer Controller 1-5 1.1 Software end user license agreement PLEASE READ CAREFULLY THE LICENSE AGREEMENT BELOW BEFORE OPENING THE PACKAGE OF THIS SOFTWARE ("SOFTWARE"), DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE. OPENING THE PACKAGE, OR DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED YOUR LAWFUL ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS BELOW. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THEM, DO NOT DOWNLOAD, INSTALL, USE THE SOFTWARE, NOR OPEN THE PACKAGE. 1. COPYRIGHT AND INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS This is a license agreement and not an agreement for sale. Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc.("Konica Minolta") owns, or has been licensed from other owners ("Konica Minolta Licensor"), copyrights and other intellectual property rights of the Software, and any and all rights and title to the Software and any copy made from it are retained by Konica Minolta or Konica Minolta Licensor. In no event, this Agreement shall be deemed to assign any copyright and/or any intellectual property rights of the Software from Konica Minolta or Konica Minolta Licensor to you. The Software is protected by copyright laws and international treaty provisions. 2. LICENSE Konica Minolta hereby grant to you a non-exclusive and limited license, and you may: (i) install and use the Software only on your computer(s) connected with Konica Minolta product for which this Software is designed; (ii) allow users of the computers described above to use the Software, provided that you assure that all such users comply with the terms of this Agreement; (iii) use the Software only for your own customary business or personal purpose; (iv) make one copy of the Software only for backup purpose in the support of the normal and intended use of the Software. (v) transfer the Software to other party by transferring a copy of this Agreement and all documentation along with the Software, provided that (a) you must, at the same time, either transfer to such other party or destroy all your other copies of the Software, (b) such transfer of possession terminates your license from Konica Minolta, and (c) you must assure that such other party has agreed to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement. If such other party does not accept such terms and conditions then you shall not transfer any copy of the Software. 1 Introduction 1-6 GDI Printer Controller 3. RESTRICTIONS (1) You shall not without the written consent of Konica Minolta: (i) use, copy, modify, merge or transfer copies of the Software except as provided herein; (ii) reverse engineer, reverse assemble, reverse compile or any other way analyze the Software; or (iii) sublicense, rent, lease or distribute the Software or any copy thereof. (iv) remove, use, or alter any trademark, logo, copyright or other proprietary notices, legends, symbols or labels in the Software. (2) You agree that you will not export the Software in any form in violation of any applicable laws and regulations regarding export control of any country. 4. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES (1) If the Software is furnished on CD-ROM(s) or other tangible object that is used for storage of digital data (hereinafter collectively "Storage Medium"), Konica Minolta warrants the Storage Medium to be free from the defects in material and workmanship under normal use, for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of delivery to you. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE FOREGOING EXPRESS WARRANTIES APPLICABLE TO STORAGE MEDIUM ONLY, THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED TO YOU "AS IS" WITHOUT ANY WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. KONICA MINOLTA, ITS AFFILIATE COMPANIES AND KONICA MINOLTA LICENSOR DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. (2) IN NO EVENT WILL KONICA MINOLTA, ITS AFFILIATE COMPANIES NOR KONICA MINOLTA LICENSOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA, OR ANY OTHER INDIRECT, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES THAT RESULT FROM USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL OR OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES, EVEN IF KONICA MINOLTA, ITS AFFILIATE COMPANIES OR KONICA MINOLTA LICENSOR HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY YOU BASED ON A THIRD PARTY CLAIM. (3) The disclaimer of warranty hereunder does not affect your statutory rights. In case of the disclaimer is not allowed by applicable law, the disclaimer shall only apply to you to the maximum extent permitted by the law. Introduction 1 GDI Printer Controller 1-7 5. TERMINATION You may terminate this license at any time by destroying the Software and all your copies of it. This Agreement shall also terminate if you fail to comply with any terms hereof. Upon such termination, you must immediately destroy all copies of the Software in your possession. 6. GOVERNING LAW This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of Japan. 7. SEVERABILITY In the event that any part or parts of this agreement shall be held illegal or null and void by any court or administrative body of competent jurisdiction, such determination shall not effect the remaining parts of this agreement and they shall remain in full force and effect as if such part or parts determined illegal or void had not been included. 8. NOTICE TO US GOVERNMENT END USERS The Software is a "commercial item," as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (October 1995), consisting of "commercial computer software" and "commercial computer software documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (September 1995). Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 1995), all U.S. Government End Users shall acquire the Software with only those rights set forth herein. YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT, UNDERSTAND IT, AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. NEITHER PARTY SHALL BE BOUND BY ANY OTHER STATEMENTS OR REPRESENTATIONS THAT ARE INCONSISTENT WITH THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. NO AMENDMENT TO THIS AGREEMENT IS EFFECTIVE UNLESS WRITTEN AND SIGNED BY PROPERLY AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES OF EACH PARTY. BY OPENING THE PACKAGE, DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE YOU AGREE TO ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. 1 Introduction 1-8 GDI Printer Controller 1.2 Explanation of manual conventions The marks and text formats used in this manual are described below. Safety advices 6 DANGER Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in fatal or critical injuries in fact of electrical power. % Observe all dangers in order to prevent injuries. 7 WARNING Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in serious injuries or property damage. % Observe all warnings in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use of the machine. 7 CAUTION Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in slight injuries or property damage. % Observe all cautions in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use of the machine. Sequence of action 1 The number 1 as formatted here indicates the first step of a sequence of actions. 2 Subsequent numbers as formatted here indicate subsequent steps of a sequence of actions. ? Text formatted in this style provides additional assistance. % Text formatted in this style describes the action that will ensure the desired results are achieved. An illustration inserted here shows what operations must be performed. Introduction 1 GDI Printer Controller 1-9 Tips 2 Note Text highlighted in this manner contains useful information and tips to ensure safe use of the machine. 2 Reminder Text highlighted in this manner contains information that should be reminded. ! Detail Text highlighted in this manner contains references for more detailed information. Special text markings [Stop] key The names of keys on the control panel are written as shown above. MACHINE SETTING Display texts are written as shown above. 1 Introduction 1-10 GDI Printer Controller 1.3 Operating environment System requirements The following environment is required so that the printer driver can be used. - Intel Pentium 200 MHz - Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003, Windows XP (Service Pack 2 or later), Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4 or later), Windows Me, or Windows 98 SE, Windows Vista x64 Edition, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows XP Professional x64 Edition - 128 MB RAM (Windows XP/Server 2003), 64 MB RAM (Windows 2000/Me/98 SE) - USB port compliant with USB Revision 2.0 - CD-ROM/DVD drive 2 Note The printer driver is not compatible with Windows 95/98/NT 4.0. Recommended operating environment Pentium 4/1.6 GHz 256 MB RAM 1.4 Installing the printer driver % Please refer to the folder "Installation" of the CD. 2 Specifying printer driver settings Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-3 2 Specifying printer driver settings Descriptions on the printer driver settings available when printing from a computer are provided below. 2.1 Printer driver settings dialog box Displaying the settings dialog box Select the printer in the Printers and Faxes window (the Printers window in Windows Vista/2000/Me/98 SE), and then display the printer driver settings dialog box. The settings specified in this dialog box are applied to all applications. 1 Open the Printers and Faxes window (or the Printers window). – For Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [Start] button, and then click "Printers and Faxes". – For Windows Vista, click the [Start] button, click "Control Panel", click "Hardware and Sound", and then click "Printers". – For Windows 2000/Me/98 SE, click the [Start] button, point to "Settings", and then click "Printers". 2 In the Printers and Faxes window (or the Printers window), select the printer icon for this machine. 3 Select the command for displaying the printer driver settings dialog box. – With Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista/2000, right-click the icon for the installed printer, and then click "Printing Preferences". – With Windows Me/98 SE, click "Properties" on the "File" menu. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-4 GDI Printer Controller The following printer driver settings dialog box appears. 2 Note To change the settings for each job to be printed, click the [Properties] button (or the [Preferences] button) in the Print dialog box, which appears when "Print" is clicked in the application. The settings specified in the dialog box displayed from the Print dialog box are only applied temporarily, and the settings return to those in the printer driver settings dialog box when the application is exited. A program containing specified driver settings can be registered and recalled when needed by using the Easy Set function. For details on the Easy Set function, refer to "Easy Set" on page 2-12. To display the Device Options tab in Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista/ 2000, right-click the icon for the installed printer in the Printers and Faxes window (or the Printers window), and then click "Properties". Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-5 Printing Preferences dialog box Printing settings can be specified from the printer driver settings dialog box. 2 Note To display the Printing Preferences dialog box in Windows XP/ Server 2003/Vista/2000, right-click the icon for the installed printer in the Printers and Faxes window (or the Printers window), and then click "Printing Preferences". To display the Printing Preferences dialog box in Windows Me/98 SE, click "Properties" on the "File" menu of the Printers window. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-6 GDI Printer Controller Tab Item Description Setup Orientation Select the paper orientation of the document. Original Size Specify the paper size for the document. [Edit Custom] button Specify a user-defined paper size. Output Size Specify the size of paper to be printed on. If this size is different from the original document size, the image will automatically be enlarged or reduced. Zoom Specify the enlargement or reduction ratio. Copy Specify the number of copies to be printed. Collate Select whether multiple copies of a multi-page document is to be printed by set or by page. Paper Source Select the paper drawer that is to be used. Paper Type Select the type of paper that is to be used. Output Method Select the output method. Layout Combination Multiple document pages can be printed together on a single sheet of paper. [Combination Details] button Settings such as the number of pages printed on a single sheet of paper and the printing order can be specified as combination details. Double Sides Select whether pages are printed double-sided. Binding Position Select the binding position. Per Page Setting Front Cover Page Select whether a document page is printed on the front cover. Front Cover Paper Source Select the paper drawer loaded with paper for the front cover. Media Type Select the type of paper used for the front cover. Watermark Watermark Select Select whether the document is printed overlapping a watermark (text stamp). 1st Page Only Select if the watermark is printed only on the first page. [New] button Create new watermarks. [Edit] button Change the watermarks. [Delete] button Delete a watermark. Quality Resolution Specify the print resolution. [Adjustment] button Specify the brightness and contrast. About - Shows the software version information. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-7 Properties dialog box Installed options can be selected from the Properties dialog box for the printer driver. 2 Reminder If the options installed on the machine are not specified from the Device Options tab, the functions available with the option cannot be used from the printer driver. Be sure to specify the corresponding settings when options are installed. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-8 GDI Printer Controller 2 Note To display the Device Options tab, right-click the icon for the installed printer in the Printers and Faxes window (or the Printers window), and then click "Properties". Tab Item Description Device Options Device Options Specify the settings for the installed paper drawers. Memory Specify the size of the installed memory. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-9 2.2 Device Options tab % Specify whether or not options are installed so that the options installed on the machine can be used from the printer driver. 2 Reminder If the options installed on the machine are not specified from the Device Options tab, the functions available with the option cannot be used from the printer driver. Be sure to specify the corresponding settings when options are installed. 2 Note To display the Device Options tab, right-click the icon for the installed printer in the Printers and Faxes window (or the Printers window), and then click "Properties". 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-10 GDI Printer Controller Device Options % Specify the settings for the installed paper drawers. – From the "Device Options" list, double-click the names of installed paper drawers to specify that it is installed. Double-click the name again to return the setting to "Not Installed". Memory % Specify the size of the installed memory. – Click [,] on the right side of the "Memory" box, and then select the size of the installed memory. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-11 2.3 Common operations This section contains descriptions of buttons and functions common to all tabs of the dialog box. The actual buttons may appear differently depending on the operating system. Common items Button Description [OK] button Click this button to apply the specified settings and close the dialog box. [Cancel] button Click this button to cancel the specified settings (not apply them) and close the dialog box. [Apply] button Click this button to apply the specified settings without closing the dialog box. This button is not displayed on the setting screen that appears when the [Properties] button (or the [Preferences] button) is clicked in the Print dialog box of the application. [Help] button When this button is clicked, help information for the currently displayed settings appears. Preview Shows a preview of the specified paper settings or shows the printer status. Click the button in the lower-left corner of the preview to change it between [Paper View] and [Printer View] and to select the preview display. When the [Paper View] preview is selected, a sample page layout for the currently selected settings is displayed so that an image of the print result can be checked. When the [Printer View] preview is selected, an image of the printer configuration, including the options, such as the paper drawers, currently installed on the machine, is displayed. The paper drawers selected in the "Paper Source" list on the Setup tab appear in light blue. Easy Set The currently specified settings can be registered as a program to be recalled later. Paper View Printer View 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-12 GDI Printer Controller Easy Set The currently specified settings can be registered as a program to be recalled later when you wish to use those settings again. 1 Change the driver settings on the Setup and Layout tabs. 2 In the "Easy Set" box, type the name of the program. 3 Click the [Save] button. The settings program is registered. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-13 2 Note To recall a registered program, select it from the list. To change the name of the registered program, select the program from the list, and then type in the new program name. The button changes to the [Rename] button. To change the program name, click the [Rename] button. To delete a registered program, select the program from the list. The button changes to the [Delete] button. To delete the program name, click the [Delete] button. If "Factory Default" is selected from the list, all settings return to their defaults. A maximum of 20 characters can be entered for the registered name. A maximum of 31 programs can be registered. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-14 GDI Printer Controller 2.4 Setup tab From the Setup tab, settings can be specified for the document and paper to be printed on. The number of copies to be printed and the orientation of the printed image can also be specified. Orientation % Select whether to print the document in the portrait or landscape orientation. Portrait Landscape Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-15 Original Size % From the drop-down list, click the paper size for the document to select it. The following standard paper sizes are available. Setting Actual size Letter 8 1/2 e 11 in. Legal 8 1/2 e 14 in. 11 e 17 11 e 17 in. A3 297 e 420 mm A4 210 e 297 mm A5 148 e 210 mm B4 257 e 364 mm B5 182 e 257 mm Env.Com10 4 1/8 e 9 1/2 in. Env.DL 110 e 220 mm Env.C6Envelope 114 e 162 mm FLS 8 1/4 e 13 210 e 330 mm FLS 8 1/2 e 13 216 e 330 mm FLS 220 e 330 mm FLS 8 1/8 e 13 1/4 206 e 337 mm FLS 8 e 13 203 e 330 mm 11 e 14 11 e 14 in. Invoice 5 1/2 e 8 1/2 in. Env.You-1 120 e 176 mm Env.You-4 105 e 235 mm Env.You-6 98 e 190 mm 8K 270 e 390 mm 16K 195 e 270 mm Hagaki 100 e 148 mm Env.C6 3/4 3 5/8 e 6 1/2 in. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-16 GDI Printer Controller 2 Note If "Hagaki" is selected, select the "Hagaki" paper setting for Tray 1 from the control panel of the machine. "Hagaki" and the envelope and non-standard sizes can be selected when "Paper Source" is set to "Auto", "Tray 1" or "Bypass". When "Paper Type" is set to "OHP", only "Letter" and "A4" are available. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-17 Edit Custom A paper size that does not appear in the list can be registered as a custom size. 1 Click the [Edit Custom] button on the Setup tab. The Custom Size Settings dialog box appears. 2 Click the [New] button. The Custom Size Settings dialog box enlarges to display settings for specifying the paper size. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-18 GDI Printer Controller 3 In the "Name" box, type the name of the paper size. 4 In the "Dimensions" group box, specify the width and length of the paper. – To change the units for specifying the paper size, select the desired setting in the "Unit" group box. 5 Click the [OK] button in the lower-right corner of the Custom Size Settings dialog box. The paper size settings in the Custom Size Settings dialog box are hidden. 6 Click the [OK] button in the Custom Size Settings dialog box. The non-standard size is registered and can be selected from the list of paper sizes. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-19 2 Note To change the width and length of a registered non-standard size, select the paper size in the Custom Size Settings dialog box, click the [Edit] button, and then change the settings. The name cannot be changed. To delete a registered non-standard size, select the paper size in the Custom Size Settings dialog box, and then click the [Delete] button. A maximum of 20 characters can be entered for the registered name. A maximum of 32 sizes can be registered. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-20 GDI Printer Controller Output Size % Select the size of paper that is to be used for printing. – The available standard paper sizes are same as those available in the "Original Size" list. – If the paper size is different from the size selected in the Original Size list, the document image will be printed enlarged or reduced so that it fits in the selected paper size. – The enlargement/reduction ratio to be used for printing can be checked in the Paper preview. 2 Note If "Manual" is selected in the "Zoom" group box, a setting cannot be selected from the "Output Size" list. If any setting other than "Off" is selected in the "Combination" list on the Layout tab, a setting cannot be selected from the "Output Size" list. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-21 Zoom 1 Specify the enlargement or reduction ratio to be used for printing. 2 Select "Manual", and then type in a number between 25% and 400%, or click the arrows to specify a setting. 2 Note If any setting other than "Same as Original Size" is selected in the "Output Size" list, "Manual" cannot be selected. Copy 1 Specify the number of copies to be printed. 2 Type in a number between 1 and 99, or click the arrows to specify a setting. Reduced Original Enlarged 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-22 GDI Printer Controller Collate % When printing multiple copies of the same document, select whether the entire document is printed one copy at a time or whether the specified number of copies are printed one page at a time. – When the "Collate" check box is selected, the entire document is printed one copy at a time. For example, if "Copy" is set to "5", the entire document (from the first page to the last page) is printed five times. – When the "Collate" check box is cleared, the specified number of copies are printed one page at a time. For example, if "Copy" is set to "5", the first page of the document is printed five times, and then the second page is printed five times. Printing continues until the last page is printed five times. 2 Note Depending on the application being used, the Collate setting may not be applied. If Collate is specified from the printer driver, Collate cannot be used in the application. If "1" is specified in the "Copy" box, Collate is not available. Check box selected Check box cleared Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-23 Paper Source % Select the paper drawer loaded with the paper. – If "Auto" is selected, the paper drawer loaded with paper of the size specified in the "Output Size" list is used. – The available settings differ depending on the options that are installed. – Settings: Tray 1, Tray 2 through Tray 5 (options), Bypass 2 Note If "Hagaki" or an envelope or non-standard size is selected in the "Original Size" list, only "Tray 1" and "Bypass" are available. Only "Tray 1" and "Bypass" are available when "Paper Type" is set to "OHP", "Thick Paper" or "Envelope". Tray Bypass tray 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-24 GDI Printer Controller Paper Type % Select the type of paper to be printed on. – Settings: Plain Paper, OHP, Thick Paper, Envelope 2 Note A setting can be selected only when "Paper Source" is set to "Tray 1" or "Bypass". "OHP" can be selected only when "Original Size" is set to "Letter" or "A4". Output Method % Select the printing method. – Not only can data be printed directly, but "Secure Print" is also available, which requires a password for printing from this machine. – Settings: Print, Secure Print 2 Note "Secure Print" is available only if the optional expanded memory unit is installed. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-25 Using secure printing A password can be specified for a document. The document printed from a computer is temporarily saved in the machine’s memory and is printed when the password is entered with the machine’s control panel. Select this setting when printing highly confidential documents. Specifying secure printing from the printer driver 1 Click the Setup tab. 2 From the "Output Method" drop-down list, select "Secure Print". A screen appears, allowing you to type in the password. 3 Type in the password, and then click the [OK] button. – Specify the 4-digit password between 0000 and 9999. 4 The print job is sent. – Normal printing is performed when printing is specified from an application. Entering the password 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-26 GDI Printer Controller Printing from the machine The password must be entered from the control panel of the machine in order to print a document with a password specified when "Secure Print" is selected in the printer driver. 1 Check that the "Printer" indicator is flashing or is lit, and then press the [Printer] key. The Print mode screen appears. 2 Check that the key icon appears in the upper-right corner of the screen. – The key icon appears if the memory contains a secure print document. 3 Press the [Access] key. PRINTER MODE PRINT WAITING Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-27 4 When "PASSWORD: – – – –" appears, type in the password. – Type in the same numbers specified as the password from the printer driver. 5 Check that the document can be printed. If the password is correct, the following screen appears, and the job is printed. 2 Note If there are multiple secure print jobs with the same password, all of those secure print jobs are printed. PRINTER MODE PASSWORD:---- ______ACCEPTED_____ PASSWORD:**** 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-28 GDI Printer Controller 2.5 Layout tab % From the Layout tab, select the number of document pages to be printed on a single sheet of paper. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-29 Combination Multiple document pages can be printed together on a single sheet of paper. Use combined printing to economize on the number of printed pages. % From the drop-down list, select the number of pages to be printed on a single sheet of paper. – For example, if "2 in 1" is selected, two pages will be printed on a single sheet of paper. If "Off" is selected, one page is printed on a single sheet of paper. – Settings: Off, 2 in 1, 4 in 1, 6 in 1, 9 in 1, 16 in 1 2 in 1 4 in 1 6 in 1 9 in 1 16 in 1 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-30 GDI Printer Controller Combination Details % Click the [Combination Details] button to specify the printing order and whether or not to print page outlines. Item Description Combination Select the number of pages to be printed on a single sheet of paper. This is the same setting selected in the "Combination" list on the Layout tab. Order When multiple pages are printed on a single sheet of paper, select the direction and order for printing the pages. Settings: Border Line Select this check box to print an outline around each page when multiple pages are printed on a single sheet of paper. Upper Left- Columns Upper Right- Columns Upper Left- Rows Upper Right- Rows Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-31 Double-sided printing Document pages can be printed on both sides of the paper. Print on both sides when binding a multi-page document. 1 Click the Layout tab. 2 From the "Double Sides" drop-down list, select "Double Sided". 2 Note From the "Binding Position" drop-down list, select the desired binding position. 2 Note Double sided printing is available only when the optional automatic duplex unit is installed. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-32 GDI Printer Controller 2.6 Per Page Setting tab % From the Per Page Setting tab, specify whether or not a cover page is added. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-33 Front Cover Page % Select whether or not a cover page is added and whether or not a document page is printed on the cover page. – Settings: Front Cover Paper Source % Select the paper drawer loaded with the paper for the cover pages. – Settings: Tray 1, Tray 2 through Tray 5 (options), Bypass Media Type % Select the type of paper to be used for the cover page. – Settings: Plain Paper, OHP, Thick Paper, Envelope Item Description None No cover page is added, and the entire document is printed on paper from the same paper drawer. Blank A blank sheet of paper from the paper drawer specified in the "Front Cover Paper Source" list is added as a cover page. Printed The first page of the document is printed on paper from the paper drawer specified in the "Front Cover Paper Source" list and is added as a cover page. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-34 GDI Printer Controller 2.7 Watermark tab From the Watermark tab, specific text can be printed in the background as a watermark. Watermark Select 1 Click the Watermark tab. 2 From the Watermark Select list, select the watermark to be printed. – Settings: No Watermark, CONFIDENTIAL, COPY, DO NOT COPY, DRAFT, FINAL, PROOF, TOP SECRET 3 To print the watermark only on the first page, select the "1st Page Only" check box. – To print the watermark on all pages, clear the check box. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-35 Creating a new watermark A new watermark can be registered. 1 Click the Watermark tab. 2 Click the [New] button. The New dialog box appears. 3 In the "Watermark Text" box, type in the text to be used as the watermark. – A maximum of 20 characters can be entered for the text. – A maximum of 32 watermarks can be registered (including "No Watermark"). 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-36 GDI Printer Controller 4 Specify the desired settings. – Font: Select the font for the watermark. Any font installed on the computer can be selected. – Bold: Select to use bold text. – Italic: Select to use italic text. – Size: Specify a character size between 7 and 300 points. – Angle: Specify the angle that the text is printed on the paper. A setting between 0° and 359° can be specified. – Darkness: Specify the density of the text. A setting between 10% and 100% can be specified. – Offset from Center: Specify the horizontal and vertical positions for the location where the text is to be printed. Settings between -100 and 100 can be specified. – The position can also be changed by using the sliders below and to the right of the preview image. 5 Click the [Add] button. The watermark is added to the "Watermark Select" list. Horizontal direction: Reducing the number moves the text to the left. Vertical direction: Increasing the number moves the text up. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-37 Editing a watermark A registered watermark can be edited to change the text, size and position. 1 Click the Watermark tab. 2 From the list, select the watermark to be edited. 3 Click the [Edit] button. The Edit dialog box appears. 4 Specify the desired settings. – Watermark Text: Type in the watermark text. – Font: Select the font for the watermark. Any font installed on the computer can be selected. – Bold: Select to use bold text. – Italic: Select to use italic text. – Size: Specify a character size between 7 and 300 points. – Angle: Specify the angle that the text is printed on the paper. A setting between 0° and 359° can be specified. – Darkness: Specify the density of the text. A setting between 10% and 100% can be specified. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-38 GDI Printer Controller – Offset from Center: Specify the horizontal and vertical positions for the location where the text is to be printed. Settings between -100 and 100 can be specified. – A maximum of 20 characters can be entered for the text. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-39 – The position can also be changed by using the sliders below and to the right of the preview image. 5 Click the [OK] button. The watermark is changed. 2 Note To delete a registered watermark, select the watermark from the list, and then click the [Delete] button. Horizontal direction: Reducing the number moves the text to the left. Vertical direction: Increasing the number moves the text up. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-40 GDI Printer Controller 2.8 Quality tab From the Quality tab, settings for the print quality can be specified. Resolution % From the drop-down list, select "600 e 600 dpi" or "300 e 300 dpi" as the print resolution. 2 Note When "600 × 600 dpi" is selected, the print quality is increased, but the printing time is longer than if "300 × 300 dpi" is selected. Specifying printer driver settings 2 GDI Printer Controller 2-41 Adjustment % Click the [Adjustment] button to specify the brightness and contrast. Item Description Brightness Adjust the brightness of the printed image. A setting between -50 and 50 can be specified. The larger the number, the higher the contrast and the more distinct the image. Contrast Adjust the contrast of the printed image. A setting between -50 and 50 can be specified. The larger the number, the brighter the image. 2 Specifying printer driver settings 2-42 GDI Printer Controller 3 Control panel operations Control panel operations 3 GDI Printer Controller 3-3 3 Control panel operations Descriptions on the printing operations that can be performed from the control panel of the machine are provided below. 3.1 Printing operations The default mode of the machine is the Copy mode. Normally, when printing is performed from a connected computer, printing begins automatically. For details, refer to "Starting the print operation" on page 3-5. To print with "Bypass" selected in the "Paper Source" list on the Setup tab, refer to "Using the manual bypass tray" on page 3-8. Control panel 1 2 3 4 5 8 7 6 No. Item Description 1 Display • While print data is being received, ">>PRINTER:Printing" appears in the display. • In addition, if the [Printer] key is pressed while the machine is receiving print data (the Printer indicator is lit), the paper source and paper size settings and the user name for the current print job appear. 2 [OK] key • Press this key to select the function shown in the display. 3 [+], [,], [*] and [)] keys • Press these keys to change the menu shown in the display. 3 Control panel operations 3-4 GDI Printer Controller 2 Note The [Fax] key and the fax function keys can be used only if the optional fax kit is installed on the machine. The [Scan] key can be used only if the optional fax kit and optional network interface card NC-503 or image controller IC-206 are installed on the machine. 4 Printer indicator • This indicator flashes when the machine is receiving print data. • This indicator lights up when the machine is printing the print data. (The indicator lights up if data is being received at the same time.) • This indicator goes off if there is no print data. • Refer to "Printer indicator" on page 3-5. 5 [Printer] key • Press this key when the machine is receiving print data (Printer indicator is lit) to display the Printer mode screen. • To return to the mode before entering Printer mode, press this key while the Printer mode screen is displayed. • If there is no print data in the machine’s memory, the Printer mode screen does not appear, even if the [Printer] key is pressed. 6 [Clear/Stop] key • To cancel the current print job while print data is being received, press the [Printer] key, and then press this key when the Printer mode screen appears. Refer to "Canceling a print job" on page 3-6. 7 Start indicator • This indicator lights up in orange when the machine is receiving print data. 8 Caution indicator • This indicator lights up when an error or malfunction has occurred. No. Item Description Control panel operations 3 GDI Printer Controller 3-5 Printer indicator The "Printer" indicator shows the status of the printer data sent from the computer. Starting the print operation Normally, printing begins when printing is performed from a connected computer. - Normally, when printing is performed from a connected computer, printing begins automatically. - If a print operation is performed from a connected computer while the machine is copying, printing begins automatically when no copy operation is performed for 30 seconds. - When using the optional fax kit: If print data is received while fax data is being received, the printing of print data has priority. After the reception job is completed in Fax mode, the print data is printed, and then the fax is printed. - While printing, copy settings can be specified and fax operations can be performed. (Copies and faxes are printed after printouts are printed.) Printer indicator Printing status Flashing • The machine is receiving print data. The indicator also flashes in other modes. • An error has occurred in the machine. Lit • Print data is being printed. Instead of flashing, the indicator remains lit when data is being received during printing. Off • There is no print data in the machine’s memory. 3 Control panel operations 3-6 GDI Printer Controller Canceling a print job Printing of a print job can be canceled from the control panel of the machine’s control panel. However, a print job can only be canceled from the control panel while the machine is in Printer mode. 1 Check that the Printer indicator is flashing or is lit, and then press the [Printer] key. 2 Check that "PRINTER MODE PRINTING" appears in the machine’s display. – The message that appears differs depending on the status of the machine. 3 Press the [Clear/Stop] key. The confirmation message "JOB CANCEL" appears. PRINTER MODE User01 PRINTING LTR JOB CANCEL NO YES Control panel operations 3 GDI Printer Controller 3-7 4 Press the [+] or [,] key to select "YES", and then press the [OK] key. – To continue printing, select "No". – If no key is pressed within five seconds, printing continues. "ACCEPTED" appears in the display and the print job is canceled. If any of the following messages appear in the display, the print job can also be canceled by repeating steps 2 and 3 from the procedure described above. - PAPER EMPTY - PAPER JAM - PAPER SIZE ERROR - RESET PAPER - NO SUITABLE PAPER - UPPER TRAY FULL - REMOVE PAPER IN BYPASS TRAY - LOAD PAPER - INCORRECT PAPER SIZE - MEDIA TYPE ERROR - *RECEIVING* - FRONT COVER OPEN - 1st SIDE COVER OPEN - DUPLEX COVER OPEN - TONER EMPTY ______ACCEPTED______ NO YES 3 Control panel operations 3-8 GDI Printer Controller Using the manual bypass tray Follow the procedure described below when using the manual bypass tray to print one page at a time. 1 From the computer, display the Setup tab for the printer driver, and then select "Bypass" in the "Paper Source" list (page 2-23). 2 Perform the print operation from the computer. 3 When the message "PRINTER MODE LOAD PAPER" appears, load paper into the manual bypass tray. – Insert one sheet of paper with the front side facing down, lightly sliding the paper as much as possible into the feed slot. – Slide the paper guides to fit the size of paper being loaded. PRINTER MODE User01 LOAD PAPER( ) Control panel operations 3 GDI Printer Controller 3-9 4 Repeat step 3 as often as necessary until printing of the document is finished. 2 Note Be sure to load the paper into the manual bypass tray after the print operation is performed from the computer. Follow the procedure described below if the paper is loaded into the manual bypass tray before the print operation is performed from the computer. Remove the paper from the manual bypass tray. Press the [Reset] key. Press the [Printer] key. Perform step 3 of the procedure. Load the paper into the manual bypass tray one sheet at a time. If the multi bypass tray (optional) is installed, printing from it can be performed in the same way as with any other paper drawer since the multi bypass tray can be loaded with 100 sheets of paper. The multi bypass tray can be loaded with 10 envelopes, 20 OHP transparencies, 20 postcards, 20 label sheets or 100 sheets of plain paper. 3 Control panel operations 3-10 GDI Printer Controller Power Save mode If print data is received while the machine is in Power Save mode, the mode is canceled. When print data is received, the data is printed after the machine has finished warming up. 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting 4 GDI Printer Controller 4-3 4 Troubleshooting Descriptions of the errors that may occur while printing from a computer and the procedures for correcting the error are provided below. If a problem occurs during computer printing, check the following. 4.1 Checking error messages If a computer printing error occurs while any screen other than the Printer mode screen is displayed, the Caution indicator lights up and the message "Check Printer Mode" appears in the machine’s display. In this case, perform the following procedure. 1 Press the [Printer] key. The Print mode screen appears. 2 Check the error message that currently appears in the display, and then perform the desired operation to correct the error. PAPER: TEXT/PHOTO ZOOM :100% Check Printer Mode LTR ______CAUTION_______ LOAD PAPER( ) NO SUITABLE PAPER 4 Troubleshooting 4-4 GDI Printer Controller 4.2 Main error messages The main error messages that appear in the Printer mode screen are described below. Error message Cause Remedy PAPER SIZE ERROR The size of paper specified with the printer driver is different from the size of paper loaded in the paper drawer. Pull open the paper drawer with the size error, and then close it again. Check if a custom paper size has been entered, and correct the paper size from Utility mode. NO SUITABLE PAPER "Auto" is selected in the "Paper Source" list in the printer driver, but paper of the specified size is not loaded. Load paper of the specified size into a paper drawer. INCORRECT PAPER SIZE Paper of the size specified in the printer driver is not loaded in the specified paper drawer. Change the paper size from Utility mode, and then load paper of the appropriate size into a paper drawer. If the multi bypass tray (optional) is used for printing, printing begins when the appropriate paper is loaded. PAPER EMPTY Either no paper is loaded in the specified paper drawer or the specified paper drawer is not installed on the machine. Load paper of the specified size into the specified paper drawer. MEDIA TYPE ERROR Paper of the type specified in the printer driver is not loaded in the specified paper drawer. Load the appropriate paper into a paper drawer, and then change the paper type from Utility mode. If the multi bypass tray (optional) is used for printing, printing begins when the appropriate paper is loaded. MEMORY NEAR FULL The image data received from the computer has exceeded the capacity of the memory. Press any key. Turn the machine off, then on again. SECURE PRINT IS NOT AVAILABLE Since the expanded memory unit is not installed, the "Secure Print" setting cannot be selected. The job is cancelled. NOT ACCEPTED PASSWORD Since the secure print password is incorrect, the document cannot be printed. Type in the correct password. Troubleshooting 4 GDI Printer Controller 4-5 4.3 Print data when an error occurs The operation performed with the print data when an error occurs differs depending on the type of error that occurred. With a "MACHINE TROUBLE" error This error indicates that a severe operating malfunction occurred. When this error message appears in the display, the machine cannot receive any print data. Contact your technical representative. Temporary errors When the following easily corrected errors occur, the print data currently in the memory is saved. Printing automatically restarts as soon as the error is corrected. - PAPER JAM - INCORRECT PAPER SIZE - PAPER SIZE ERROR - FRONT COVER OPEN - 1st SIDE COVER OPEN - DUPLEX COVER OPEN - NO SUITABLE PAPER - PAPER EMPTY - MEDIA TYPE ERROR 2 Note If any of the errors listed above appears, the print job in the memory can be canceled. For details, refer to "Canceling a print job" on page 3-6. 4 Troubleshooting 4-6 GDI Printer Controller 5 Specifications Specifications 5 GDI Printer Controller 5-3 5 Specifications * The print speed is measured under the following printing conditions. Paper is fed from Tray 1. Specification Print speed* bizhub 163: 16 ppm (when printing on A4/Letter v paper at 300 e 300 dpi) 12 ppm (when printing on A4/Letter v paper at 600 e 600 dpi) bizhub 211: 21 ppm (when printing on A4 v paper at 300 e 300 dpi) 20 ppm (when printing on Letter v paper at 300 e 300 dpi) 12 ppm (when printing on A4/Letter v paper at 600 e 600 dpi) Memory Shared with machine Interface port Compliant with USB Revision 2.0 Printer language GDI Font Windows Supported operating systems Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003, Windows XP (Service Pack 2 or later), Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4 or later), Windows Me, Windows 98 SE, Windows Vista x64 Edition, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows XP Professional x64 Edition or Windows Terminal Server (Windows 2000 Server/ Windows Server 2003) 5 Specifications 5-4 GDI Printer Controller Instruction booklet 252988361A_ENG LFF/LFFn Dear customer Dear customer For your security and comfort, we urge you to carefully read the chapter Security, page 1 before attempting use. In buying this multifunction machine, you have opted for a quality product. Your device satisfies all of the different needs of a modern office automation tool. This machine allows you to scan and fax in color and black and white, to print and copy in black and white. You can connect the multifunction device to your PC (Microsoft Windows 98SE/ME/2000/XP/Vista 32-bit). Install the software included to use the multifunction device as a printer. Besides, you can scan, edit and save documents through your PC. If you have a WLAN adaptor (optional) you can communicate with a personal computer wirelessly. WLAN is an optional working only with a specific adaptor that you can obtain from your retailer. Thanks to its navigator and its multitask access, it is powerful, user-friendly and easy to use. The multifunction machines, come with a 600 dpi scanner and a black and white laser printer offering a printing speed of 16 ppm. The Companion Suite Pro LL software provided allows you to use your multifunction machine as a scanner and a printer from a personal computer. It also gives you the ability to manage your multifunction machine. - I - Contents Contents Dear customer I Security 1 Security directives 1 Positions of Safety labels on the machine 2 Symbols for the main power switch 2 Declaration of conformity 2 Notice to Users in EU Countries 2 Environment 3 The packaging 3 Batteries and rechargeable batteries 3 The product 3 Software use license 4 Definition 4 License 4 Property 4 Duration 4 Warranty 4 Responsibility 4 Development 4 Applicable law 5 Registered trademarks 5 Prohibited reproductions 5 Installation 6 Location conditions 6 Cautions of use 6 Paper recommendations 7 Loading paper in the main unit tray 7 Handling of paper 7 Humidity control 7 Use of envelopes 7 EP Cartridge recommendations 7 Terminal description 8 Command panel 9 Accessing terminal menus 9 Packaging contents 10 Device installation (depending on model) 10 Installing the document feeder 10 Feed cassette paper insertion 10 Cartridge installation 11 Paper delivery stop 12 Starting your device 12 Device connection 12 Paper insertion in the manual input tray 13 Copy 14 Simple copy 14 ECO mode copy 14 Advanced copying 14 Special setup for the copying 15 Resolution setup 15 Zoom setup 15 Assembled copy setup 15 Analysis origin setup 15 Contrast setup 15 Brightness setup 15 Paper type setup 16 Paper tray selection 16 Sheet-feed analysis margins setup 16 Analysis margins setup 16 Left and right printing margins setup 16 Top and bottom printing margins setup 16 Format paper setup 16 Fax 17 Fax transmission 17 Print a header page (depending on model) 17 Immediate transmission 17 Delayed transmission 17 Transmission with auto redial 18 Fax reception 18 Relay broadcast 18 Fax answering machine 19 Saving an access code 19 Activating / Deactivating the answering machine 19 Printing fax messages stored in the memory 19 Fax rerouting 19 Activating rerouting 19 Setting the re-direction contact 19 Printing rerouted documents 19 Rerouting fax messages to a USB memory key 20 Activating rerouting 20 Printing rerouted documents 20 Transmission waiting queue 20 Performing immediate transmission from the waiting queue 20 Consulting or modifying the waiting queue 20 Deleting a transmission on hold 20 Printing a document in waiting or in deposit 20 Printing the waiting queue 20 Cancelling a transmission in progress 21 MailBoxes (MBX Fax) 21 Creating an MBX 21 Modifying the features of a MBX 21 Printing the contents of a MBX 21 Deleting a MBX 22 Printing the MBX list 22 MBX deposit in your fax 22 MBX deposit in a remote fax 22 MBX polling from a remote fax 22 Deposit and Polling 22 Placing a document in deposit 22 Polling a deposited document 23 SMS 24 SMS Parameters 24 Presentation of the sender 24 SMS Center transmission number 24 Sending an SMS 24 Parameters/Setup 25 Date/Time 25 Your fax number/Your name 25 Type of network 25 Geographical settings 25 Country 25 Network 25 Language 26 Local prefix 26 Prefix 26 Transmission report 26 Document feed type 26 Economy period 26 Reception Mode 27 Reception without paper 27 - II - Contents Number of copies 27 Fax or PC reception 27 Received faxes reduction mode 27 Technical Parameters 28 Printing the functions guide 30 Printing the logs 30 Print the list of setups 30 Font printing 30 Lock the machine 30 Lock the keyboard 30 Lock the numbers 31 Lock the SMS service 31 Read the counters 31 Sent pages counter 31 Received pages counter 31 Scanned pages counter 31 Printed pages counter 31 Display the consumables status 31 Calibrate your scanner 31 Directory 32 Creating subscribers record 32 Creating subscribers list 32 Modifying a record 32 Deleting a record or a list 33 Printing the directory 33 Games and entertainment 34 Sudoku (depending on the model) 34 Print a grid 34 Print the solution to a grid 34 Local network settings 35 Selecting the type of your local network 35 Ethernet network settings (model network) 35 Automatic configuration 35 Manual configuration 35 IP address 35 Sub-network mask 35 Gateway address 35 IEEE Address (or Ethernet address) or MAC address 35 NetBIOS names 35 Name servers 35 WLAN network 36 Type of radio network 36 Radio infrastructure network 36 Radio ad-hoc network 36 Radio networks (WLAN) 36 Connect your WLAN adaptor 36 Configure your network 37 Creating or rejoining a network 37 Referring to or changing your network parameters 37 An example of how an AD-HOC network may be set up 39 Setting up a multifunction machine 39 Setting up the PC 39 Message service (model network) 40 Information required to set up message service 40 Configuring initialisation parameters 40 Access to servers parameters 40 Access to SMTP authentification parameters 40 Sending an E-Mail 40 Sending an E-mail text 40 Scan to FTP 41 Simply put the file in an FTP server 41 Connection configuration 41 Standard settings 41 Selecting the connection type 41 Selecting the transmission type 41 Modifying the connection period (Periodic type) 41 Modifying the connection time(s) (Set Times type) 42 Selecting the print mode for the deposit notice 42 Printing the Internet settings 42 Mail sorting 42 F@X Only mode 42 PC Only mode 42 PC share mode 42 USB memory key 43 Use of the USB memory key 43 Print your documents 43 Print the list of files located in the key 43 Print the files located in the key 43 Delete your files located in the key 44 Analyse the USB memory key content 44 Save a document on a USB memory key 44 Activate/deactivate file automatic deletion on a USB memory key 45 PC Features 46 Introduction 46 Configuration requirements 46 Installation 46 Install the software on your PC 46 Connections 48 USB Connection 48 Network connection 48 Uninstall the software from your PC 49 Multifunction Terminal's Supervision 50 Checking the connection between the PC and the multifunction machine 50 MF Director 50 Graphical presentation 50 Utilities and applications activation 50 MF Monitor 51 Graphical presentation 51 Display the consumable status 51 Scan To 51 Companion Suite Pro LL functionalities 51 Document analysis 51 Analysis with Scan To 52 Analysis from a TWAIN compatible software 52 Character recognition software (OCR) 52 Printing 52 Printing with the multifunction machine 52 Address book 53 Add a contact to the terminal address book 53 Add a group to the terminal address book 53 Manage the address book 54 Modify the information related to a contact 54 Modify a group 54 Delete a contact or a group from the address book 54 Print the address book 54 Import or export a directory 54 Import a directory 54 Save your address book 54 Fax communications 54 - III - Contents Presentation of the Fax window 54 Send a fax 55 Send a fax from the hard disk or the terminal 55 Send a fax from application 55 Receive a fax 56 Follow-up of fax communications 56 The outbox 56 The send memory (items sent) 56 The outbox log 56 The inbox log 57 Fax parameters 57 Access to fax parameters 57 Description of the tab Log and Report 57 Description of the tab Fax Parameters 57 Cover sheet 58 Creating a cover sheet 58 Description of the tab Cover page 59 Creating a cover page template 59 SMS Communication 60 Presentation of the SMS window 60 Send an SMS 61 Follow-up of SMS 61 The outbox 61 The outbox log 62 The sent item memory (items sent) 62 SMS Parameters 62 Access to SMS parameters 62 Description of the tab Logs and reports 62 Maintenance 63 Service 63 General information 63 Toner cartridge replacement 63 Issues with smart cards 63 Cleaning 64 Scanner reading system cleaning 64 Printer cleaning 64 Printer external cleaning 64 Printer issues 64 Error messages 64 Paper jam 64 Scanner issues 65 Miscellaneous issues 65 Communication errors 65 Transmission from the feeder 66 Transmission from memory 66 Communication error codes 66 General codes 66 Specifications 67 Physical specifications 67 Electrical specifications 67 Environmental specifications 67 Peripheral specifications 67 Consumable specifications 68 - 1 - 1 - Security - Declaration of conformity - Environment - Licence Security Security directives Before turning on your device, check that the outlet that you are going to plug it into conforms to the indications shown on the information plate (voltage, current, power network frequency) located on your device. This device shall be connected to a single phase power network. The device shall not be installed on bare ground. Batteries and rechargeable batteries, packaging and electric and electronic equipment (EEE), shall be thrown away, as specified by the Instructions of the ENVIRONMENT chapter of this manual. Because of the device model, the power connector is the only way to disconnecting the device from the power network, that is why it is imperative to apply the following safety measures: your device shall be connected to a power outlet located nearby. The outlet shall be easily accessible. Your device is delivered with a grounded power cord. It is imperative to connect a grounded connector to a grounded outlet connected to the building earthing. For installation conditions and safe use precautions, refer to chapter Installation, page 6. Repairs-maintenance: Repairs and maintenance should only be carried out by a qualified technician. No user serviceable parts inside the machine. To reduce the risk of electrical shock, you shall not proceed with these operations yourself, because by opening or removing the lids, you could expose yourself to two hazards: - The laser beam can cause irreversible eye damage. - Avoid contact with powered parts because it can lead to electrical shock with unfortunate consequences. APPAREIL A RAYONNEMENT LASER DE CLASSE 1 CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT PRODUCTO LASER DE CLASE 1 APARECCHIO LASER DI CLASSE 1 - 2 - 1 - Security - Declaration of conformity - Environment - Licence Positions of Safety labels on the machine The device has warning labels at the positions shown below. For your safety, you must never touch these surfaces when you remove a paper jam or when you replace the EP cartridge. Symbols for the main power switch In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch: - means POWER ON. - means POWER OFF. Declaration of conformity Notice to Users in EU Countries The tagging attests to the product's compliance with the demands of the R&TTE 1999/5/CE directive. For users security, in accordance with the 73/23/CE directive. For electromagnetic disturbances, in accordance with the 89/336/CE directive. The manufacturer declares that the products are manufactured in accordance with the APPENDIX II of the R&TTE 1999/5/CE directive. - 3 - 1 - Security - Declaration of conformity - Environment - Licence Environment The preservation of the environment is of importance to the manufacturer. The manufacturer wishes to service the installations with respect to the environment and has chosen to integrate the environmental performance in the whole lifecycle of its products, throughout manufacturing, release, use and disposal. The packaging The (green point) logo indicates that a contribution is given to an approved national organization to improve the packaging salvage and recycling infrastructures. To make recycling easier, follow local rules and regulations concerning sorting and disposal of such waste. Batteries and rechargeable batteries If your product contains batteries or rechargeable batteries, these shall be disposed of at the designated collecting centers. The product The crossed bin symbol on the product indicates that it belongs to the electric and electronic equipment family. Therefore, according to European regulations you are requested to dispose of it at the selected collection areas: - to distribution centers in case of equivalent equipment purchase, - to the available local collecting centers (dump, selective collection, etc.). In doing so, you will participate in the "Waste of Electric and Electronic Equipment reuse and development scheme" which will help prevent potential effects on the environment and human health. The purpose of the International ENERGY STAR® Program is to promote the development and popularization of energy-efficient office equipment. As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, the manufacturer has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR® guidelines for energy efficiency. - 4 - 1 - Security - Declaration of conformity - Environment - Licence Software use license CAREFULLY READ ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE PRESENT LICENSE BEFORE OPENING THE SEALED ENVELOPE CONTAINING THE SOFTWARE. OPENING THIS ENVELOPE INDICATES THAT YOU ACCEPT THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS. In case you should not accept the terms of this license, the CD-ROM packaging should be returned to the retailer unopened, along with the other components of the product. The purchase price of this product will be refunded. No refunds will be made for products if the CD-ROM packaging have been opened, if components are missing or if the reimbursement request is made after ten (10) days from the purchase date, your receipt is the proof of purchase. Definition The Software designates programs and associated documentation. License - This license allows you to use this Software on personal computers on a local network. You only have permission to use this Software to print on one multifunction machine; you can not lend the Software or authorize anyone to use it. - You are allowed to make a back up copy. - This license is non-exclusive and non-transferable. Property The manufacturer or its providers hold the Software property right. You only become the owner of the CD-ROM. You shall not modify, adapt, decompile, translate, create any derived piece, rent or sell the Software or the documentation. Any rights not explicitly approved are reserved by the manufacturer or its providers. Duration This license remains valid until cancelled. You can cancel it by destroying the program and the documentation as well as any other copies of them. This license will automatically be canceled in case you do not respect the terms of this license. If the license is rendered invalid, you agree to destroy all copies of the program and the associate documentation. Warranty The Software is provided "as is" with no warranties what so ever, whether expressed or implied, including without limitation, any warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose; all the risks concerning the results and performance of this Software are assumed by the buyer. In case the program should appear defective, all the repair and service expenses will be covered by the buyer. Nevertheless, the license holder benefits from the following warranty: we guarantee that the CD-ROM on which the Software is recorded is free from hardware or manufacturing faults if used in normal conditions, the guarantee is valid for ninety (90) days from the delivery date, the copy of the receipt being the proof of purchase. In case of a CD-ROM fault that due to accident or misuse, the CD-ROM will not be replaced as per the warranty. Responsibility If the CD-ROM is not working properly, send it to the retailer together with a copy of the receipt. It is the retailer's sole responsibility to replace the CD-ROM. Nobody, not even the manufacturer who is involved in the creation, realization, merchantability and delivery of this program would be responsible for direct, indirect or immaterial damages, such as, but not limited to, loss of information, loss of time, execution loss, loss of revenue, loss of customers, due to the use or inability to use the program. Development With a constant concern for improvement, the manufacturer reserves the right to modify the Software specifications without any notice. In case of modification, your user right does not give you access to free updates. - 5 - 1 - Security - Declaration of conformity - Environment - Licence Applicable law This license is under the French law. Any dispute following the interpretation or execution of this license will be submitted to the Paris Court. Given the continuous technology development, the manufacturer reserves the right to modify the technical specifications indicated for this product, at any time, without prior notice, and/or to stop manufacturing of the product. All the names of the products and brands that could be trademarks registered by their respective owners are recognized in the present document. Registered trademarks Given the technical evolution, the manufacturer reserves the right to modify the technical specifications of this product and/or to stop its manufacturing at any time and without notice. Companion Suite Pro is a registered trademark of Sagem Communication. Adobe® and the Adobe® products referred to here are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. PaperPort11SE is a registered trademark of ScanSoft. Microsoft® Windows® 98, Microsoft® Windows® Millennium®, Microsoft® Windows NT®, Microsoft® Windows 2000®, Microsoft® Windows XP®, Microsoft® Windows Vista® and any other Microsoft® product referred to here are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation registered and/or used in the United States and/or in other countries. All the other brands or products referred to as examples or in order to give additional information are registered trademarks of their respective owners. The informations contents of this user manual are subject to change without notice. Prohibited reproductions Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law. Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law : - bank notes; - checks; - bonds; - stock certificates; - bank drafts; - passports; - driver's licenses. The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive. If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying or printing certain items, consult with your legal advisor. - 6 - 2 - Installation Installation Location conditions By choosing an appropriate location, you preserve the longevity of the machine. Check that the selected location has the following characteristics: - Choose a well ventilated location. - Make sure not to obstruct the ventilation grids located on the left and right sides of the device. During the installation, make sure to place the machine thirty centimeters away from the surrounding objects so all the lids can be easily opened. - Make sure that this location does not present any ammonia nor any other organic gasses emission hazard. - The ground outlet (refer to the security notices presented in the Security chapter) to which you plan to connect the machine must be located close to this one and have an easy access. - Make sure that the machine is not directly exposed to sun light. - Make sure not to place the machine in an area exposed to an air flow generated by an air conditioning, heating or ventilation system, nor in an area subject to large temperature or humidity variations. - Choose a solid and horizontal surface on which the machine will not be exposed to intense vibrations. - Keep the machine away from any object that could obstruct its ventilation ports. - Do not place the machine close to hangings or any other flammable objects. - Choose a location where splashes of the water and other liquids are limited. - Make sure that this location is dry, clean and dust free. Cautions of use Take into account the important precautions below when using the machine. Running environment: - Temperature: 10 °C to 32 °C with a maximum amplitude of 10 °C per hour. - Humidity: 15 to 80 % of ambient humidity (without condensation), with a maximum amplitude of 20 % per hour. Terminal: The section below describes the precautions to be taken when using the machine: - Never turn the machine off and never open the lids while printing. - Never use gas or flammable liquids, or objects generating magnetic field close to the machine. - When you unplug the power cord, always hold the connector without pulling the cord. A damaged cord presents a potential fire hazard or an electric shock hazard. - Never touch the power cord with wet hands. You risk getting an electric shock. - Always unplug the power cord before moving the machine. Otherwise, you could risk having the cord damaged and create a fire hazard or an electric shock hazard. - Always unplug the power cord when you plan not to use the machine for a long period of time. - Never put objects on the power cord, never pull it and never fold it. This could cause a fire hazard or an electric shock hazard. - Always make sure that the machine is not sitting on the power cord or any other electric device communication cables. Make sure also that neither cord nor cable is introduced to the machine inner mechanism. This would expose you to a machine malfunction risk or to a fire hazard. - Make sure that the printer is unplugged from the power outlet before connecting or disconnecting an interface cable to the printer (use a shielded interface cable). - Never try to remove any fixed pane or hood. The machine contains high voltage circuits. Any contact with these circuits can cause an electric shock risk. Make sure to place the machine in well ventilated premises. When in operation, the printer generates a small amount of ozone. An unpleasant smell can come from the printer if it is used intensively in poorly ventilated premises. For a secure use, make sure you place the machine in well ventilated premises. - 7 - 2 - Installation - Never try to modify the machine. This could cause a fire hazard or an electric shock hazard. - Always make sure that paper clips, staples or other small metallic items do not get inside the machine via the ventilation ports or other ports. Such items create fire hazards or electric shock hazards. - Prevent water and any other liquid from spilling on the machine or near to it. Any contact of the machine with water or liquid can cause a fire hazard or an electric shock hazard. - If liquid or metallic item gets accidentally inside the machine, turn it off immediately, unplug the power cord and contact your retailer. Otherwise, you will face a fire hazard or an electric shock hazard. - In case of heat, smoke, unusual smell or abnormal noise emissions, turn the machine off, unplug the power cord immediately and contact your retailer. Otherwise, you will face a fire hazard or an electric shock hazard. - Avoid using the machine during an "electric storm", this can cause an electric shock hazard due to lightning. - Never move the terminal during printing. - Always lift the terminal when you wish to move it. Paper recommendations Loading paper in the main unit tray - Insert paper with the face down, and adjust paper guides to the paper format to avoid feed failure, skewing, and paper jams. - Amount of loaded paper must not exceed the loading mark. If the loading mark is exceeded, this may cause feed failure, skewing, and paper jams. - Adding paper in the pile must be avoided because it may cause double feeding. - When withdrawing the cassette from the main unit, always support it with both hands to avoid doing drop it. - If you use paper already printed by your machine or another printer, the printing quality may not be optimal. Handling of paper - Curling must be corrected before printing. Curls must not exceed 10 mm. - Care must be taken with storage to prevent feed faults and image defects due to leaving the paper in conditions of high humidity. Humidity control - Paper which has become damp, or paper which has been left unused for a very long time. - After opening the paper, it must be kept in a plastic bag. - Paper with waved ends, paper which is creased, paper with crumples, and any other non-normal paper must not be used. Use of envelopes - Feeding can be done only through the manual feed. - Recommended area should be the area which excludes 15 mm from the leading edge, 10 mm from and both the left and right edges, and the rear edge. - A few lines may be given in solid print at the part of being overlapped. - Envelopes which are not recommended may lead to improper printing (refer to the paragraph Peripheral specifications, page 67). - Curled envelope after printing should be fixed manually. - Small crumples on the edge of the wide side of envelopes. Smearing, or less clear printing may appear on the reverse side. - Set envelope by pressing the folding line of four edges properly after releasing air inside. Set envelope in a proper position after aligning in case it is bent or warped. EP Cartridge recommendations - Must not be stood on the side, or held upside down. - 8 - 2 - Installation Terminal description Front side Back side Control panel Document feeder Paper output Manual Paper tray Master USB Cartridge access cover Manual paper feed setup guides input tray (USB key) Smart card insertion point Fold-down stop for paper delivery connection Slave USB connection (for PC) On/Off switch Power supply cord connection Paper jam cover Telephone cable socket Additional telephone cable socket Master USB connection (USB key) (model network) LAN Connection (model standard) - 9 - 2 - Installation Command panel Accessing terminal menus All terminal functions and settings are available via the menu and are associated to a specific menu command. For example, the menu command 51 launches the printing of the functions list (the functions list stores the list of all terminal menus, sub-menus and their identification number). Two methods are available to access menu items : the step by step method or the shortcut method. To print the functions list whitch details the Step by step method: 1 Press 􀀙. 2 Use the 􀀙 or 􀀘 button to browse the menu and select 5 - PRINT. Confirm with OK. 3 Use the 􀀙 or 􀀘 button to browse the menu PRINT and select 51-FUNCTIONS LIST. Confirm with OK. To print the functions list with with the shortcut method: 1 Press on 􀀙. 2 Enter 51 with the numerical keypad to directly print the functions list. COL 1 2 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 3 23 24 25 4 5 6 7 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 1. Screen. 2. Digital keypad. 3. Alphabetical keypad. 4. Key 􀃍: deletes the character to the left of the cursor. 5. Key : input or line feed. 6. Key : access to special characters. 7. Key : Shift. 8. Key SCAN: document analysis to the PC or a media (USB key). 9. Key COPY: local copy. 10. Key STOP PRINT: stops the current PC printing. 11. Key : sending of an SMS (Short Message Service). 12. Key : sending of a fax. 13.Key : access to directory and quick dial numbers. 14. Key : line manual connection, listen for tone during fax sending. 15. Key : multiple contact sending (fax, e-mail or SMS). 16. Key : Validation. 17. Key OK: confirms the displayed selection. 18. Key 􀀙: menu access and navigation down the menus. 19. Key C: back to the previous menu and input correction. 20. Key 􀀘: navigation up the menus. 21. Key : stops the current operation. 22. Key ECO: sets up the activation delay. 23. Key : color analysis mode selection. 24. Key : analysis resolution setup. 25. Key : contrast setup. 26. Icon : Superfin resolution. 27. Icon : Photo resolution. 28. Icon : Fin resolution. 29. Icon : colour mode. 30. Icon : activity on the telephone line. 31. Icon : Fax mode. 32. Icon : external answering machine mode. - 10 - 2 - Installation Packaging contents The packaging contains the items listed below: Multifunction device Control panel (depending on model) 1 toner cartridge 1 installation guide and 1 PC installation CD ROM 1 power cord 1 telephone cord 1 initialisation card (depending on model) Device installation (depending on model) 1 Unpack the device. 2 Install the device respecting the security notices stated at the beginning of this booklet. 3 Remove all stickers from the machine. 4 Remove the plastic protection film from the screen. 5 Place the control panel in front of the machine, insert the control panel in its back slots (A). 6 Push the front side of the control panel (B) to clip it. Installing the document feeder 1 Secure the document feeder by fitting the two clips (B) in the notches (A) provided for this purpose. Feed cassette paper insertion Your device accepts a number of formats and types of papers (refer to the paragraph Consumable specifications, page 68). Before inserting paper, refer to the paragraph Paper recommendations, page 7. A B B A B - 11 - 2 - Installation 1 Remove the paper feed cassette completely. 2 Push the lower panel down until it clicks. 3 Setup the back side feed cassette stop by pushing the "PUSH" lever (A). Then adjust the lateral paper guides to the paper format by pushing lever (B) located on the left guide. Adjust the length paper guide to the paper format by pushing lever (C). 4 Take a paper stack, pull the paper off and align it on a flat surface. 5 Put the paper stack in the feed cassette (ex: 200 sheets of 80 g/m² paper). 6 Put the feed cassette back in its location. Cartridge installation 1 Stand in front of the machine. 2 Push the left and right sides of the cover and pull it towards you at the same time. 3 Unpack the new cartridge. Gently roll the cartridge 5 or 6 times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge. Thoroughly rolling the cartridge will assure the maximum copies per cartridge. 4 Insert the cartridge in its slot by pushing it until it clicks (last move down) as shown on the picture below. 5 Close the cover. You can use paper weighing between 60 and 105 g/m2. PUSH B A C - 12 - 2 - Installation Paper delivery stop Adjust the paper delivery stop, depending on the format of the document to be printed. Do not forget to raise the flap to prevent the sheets from falling down. Starting your device Device connection 1 Plug the end of the telephone line into the terminal socket and the other end into the wall telephone socket. 2 For the model network, plug end of the LAN cord (as provided by your network administrator) into port of your fax machine and the other end into your local network port dedicated to your fax machine. 3 Make sure that the On/Off switch is on Off (O position). 4 Connect the power cord to the device. Plug the power cord to outlet on the wall 5 Press the On/Off button to turn on the device (I position). 6 (*) After initialisation, "WAITING FOR INIT CARD" appears on the screen. Insert the initialisation card provided in the card reader as indicated on the picture. 7 (*) After an analysis phase, "INIT. OK - REMOVE CARD" appears on the screen. Remove the initialisation card from the drive. Before plugging the power cord, it is imperative to refer to the Security directives, page 1. - 13 - 2 - Installation 8 By default, the machine is set to operate in the UK in English. To modify this parameter, refer to Country, page 25. 9 Set the date and time, refer to Date/Time, page 25. (*) depending on model Paper insertion in the manual input tray The manual input tray allows you to use various paper formats with greater weightings than the one used in the paper feed cassette (refer to the paragraph Consumable specifications, page 68). Only one sheet or envelope can be fed at a time. 1 Spread the manual feed guides to the maximum. 2 Insert a sheet or an envelope in the manual input tray. 3 Adjust the paper guides against the right and left edges of the sheet or the envelope. Before inserting paper, refer to the paragraph Paper recommendations, page 7. You can use paper, which weights between 52 and 160 g/m². Before printing, check that the paper format you are using matches the paper format set on the printer (refer to Copy, page 14). - 14 - 3 - Copy Copy Your machine has the function to make one or more copies. You can also setup several parameters in order to make copies at your will. Simple copy In this case, the default parameters are applied. 1 Place the document to be copied in the automatic document feeder, printed face on the top. or Place the document to be copied face down on the glass, respecting the indications around the glass. 2 Press the button twice. The copy is made using the default parameters. ECO mode copy The ECO mode enables you to reduce the amount of toner consumed on the page so as to save your printing costs. When the ECO mode is used, the toner consumption is reduced and the print density becomes lighter. 1 Place the document to be copied in the automatic document feeder, printed face on the top. or Place the document to be copied face down on the glass, respecting the indications around the glass. 2 Press the button. 3 Press the button. Advanced copying The sophisticated copy allows to do custom setups for the current copy. 1 Place the document to be copied in the automatic document feeder, face printed on the top. or Place the document to be copied face down on the glass, respecting the indications around the glass. 2 Press the button. 3 Enter the number of copies that you want and confirm with the OK button. 4 Choose the paper tray AUTOMATIC or MANUAL with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙, then confirm with the OK button. 5 Choose with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙 the printing option (see examples below) depending on the copy mode that you want: - Combined mode (document feeder): 1 Page onto 1, 2 Pages onto 1, or 4 Pages onto 1. - Poster mode (flat-bed scanner): 1 Page to 1, 1 Page to 4 or 1 page to 9. Confirm with the OK button. 6 Adjust the desired zoom level, from 25% TO 400% with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙, confirm with the OK button (only available in 1 Page to 1 copy mode). 7 Adjust the desired origin values with the digital keyboard buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙 then confirm with the OK button. 8 Choose the resolution depending on the printing quality that you want DRAFT, AUTO, QUALITY TEXT or PHOTO with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙, then confirm with the OK button. After step 1, you can directly enter the number of copies with the numerical keypad and press the OK button to validate. Then refer to step 4. COPY COPY ECO COPY Analyzed sheets 1 2 1 3 2 4 2 pages to 1 4 pages to 1 MOSAÏC Copy mode 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 1 page to 1 1 Output POSTER Copy mode Analyzed sheets 1 page to 4 1 page to 9 1 page to 1 Output A A A A - 15 - 3 - Copy 9 Adjust the contrast level with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙, then confirm with the OK button. 10 Adjust the desired brightness level with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙, then confirm with the OK button. 11 Choose the paper type NORMAL, THICK with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙, then confirm with the OK button. Special setup for the copying Setups done through this menu become the device default setups after you confirm. Resolution setup The RESOLUTION parameter allows you to setup the photocopy resolution. 􀀙 841 - ADVANCED FCT/COPY/RESOLUTION 1 Choose the resolution with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙 according to the following table: 2 Confirm your choice by pressing the OK button. Zoom setup The ZOOM parameter allows you to reduce or enlarge an area of a document by choosing the origin and the zoom level to apply to the document, from 25 to 400 %. 􀀙 842 - ADVANCED FCT/COPY/ZOOMING 1 Enter the desired zoom level with the Alpanumerical keyboard or choose among predefined values with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm your choice by pressing the OK button. Assembled copy setup 􀀙 843 - ADVANCED FCT/COPY/ASSEMBLED The ASSEMBLED parameter allows you to assemble or disassemble your copies. Enter the desired setting and confirm your choice by pressing the OK button. Analysis origin setup If you want, you can change the origin of the scanner. By entering new values for X and Y in mm (X < 209 and Y < 280), you move the analysed area as shown on the diagram below. 􀀙 844 - ADVANCED FCT/COPY/ORIGIN 1 Select the X and Y coordinates with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙. 2 Setup the desired coordinates with the digital keyboard or the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙, confirm your choice by pressing on the OK button. Contrast setup The CONTRAST parameter allows to choose the photocopy contrast. 􀀙 845 - ADVANCED FCT/COPY/CONTRAST 1 Setup the desired level of contrast with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙, confirm by pressing the OK button. 2 You can also directly setup the desired contrast with the button, press several times on this button until the desired setup without using the Menu 845. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Brightness setup The BRIGHTNESS parameter allows to lighten or darken your original document. 􀀙 846 - ADVANCED FCT/COPY/LUMINOSITY 1 Setup the desired brightness with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm your choice by pressing the OK button. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. When the quality of the printing is not satisfying, you can proceed to a calibration (see Calibrate your scanner, page 31). Parameter Signification DRAFT Low resolution. AUTO Standard resolution for documents containing text and graphics. QUALITY TEXT Optimal resolution for documents containing text. PHOTO Optimal resolution for documents containing photographies. You can also change the resolution by pressing the button. y DEBUT FEUILLE FIN FEUILLE x Analysed area BEGIN. OF SHEET END OF SHEET - 16 - 3 - Copy Paper type setup 􀀙 851 - ADVANCED FCT/SCAN. & PRINT/PAPER TYPE 1 Select the paper NORMAL or THICK that you use with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm your setup by pressing the OK button. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Paper tray selection The Automatic selection can have two meanings depending on the paper format defined on the paper trays. The following table describes the different cases. 􀀙 852 - ADVANCED FCT/SCAN. & PRINT/TRAY PAPER 1 Select the default paper tray to use, AUTOMATIC or MANUAL, with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm by pressing the OK button. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Sheet-feed analysis margins setup If you want to, you can offset the lateral margins of the document to the left or right during the analysis with your sheet-feed scanner. 􀀙 853 - ADVANCED FCT/SCAN. & PRINT/ S.F. MARGINS 1 Setup the left / right margins offsets (by 0.5 mm steps) with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm by pressing the OK button. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Analysis margins setup If you want to, you can offset the lateral margins of the document to the left or right during the analysis with your flat-bed scanner. 􀀙 854 - ADVANCED FCT/SCAN. & PRINT/ FLATBED MARG 1 Setup the left / right margins offsets (by 0.5 mm steps) with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm by pressing the OK button. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Left and right printing margins setup If you want to, you can offset the lateral margins of the document to the left or right during printing. 􀀙 855 - ADVANCED FCT/SCAN. & PRINT/ PRINTER MARG 1 Setup the left / right margins offsets (by 0.5 mm steps) with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm by pressing the OK button. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Top and bottom printing margins setup If you want to, you can offset the lateral margins of the document towards the top or the bottom during printing. 􀀙 856 - ADVANCED FCT/SCAN. & PRINT/TOP PRINT. 1 Setup the top / bottom margins offsets (by 0.5 mm steps) with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm by pressing the OK button. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Format paper setup This menu allows you to define the default paper format of the manual tray and the main tray. You can also setup the default scanning width. 􀀙 857 - ADVANCED FCT/SCAN. & PRINT/ PAPER FORMAT 1 Select the paper tray for which you want to define a default paper format with the buttons 􀀘 and 􀀙. 2 Confirm by pressing the OK button. 3 Choose the paper format with the buttons 􀀘 or 􀀙 according to the following table: 4 Confirm by pressing the OK button. 5 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Default tray Tray used for copy Same paper format in the trays AUTOMATIC Selection between the main tray and the manual tray. MANUAL The manual tray is used. Different paper format in the trays AUTOMATIC The main tray is used MANUAL The manual tray is used. Paper tray Available paper format MAN. TRAY A5, A4, Legal and Letter AUTO. TRAY A5, A4, Legal and Letter SCANNER LTR/LGL and A4 - 17 - 4 - Fax Fax This chapter describes all the fax processing and configuration functions. You will also find a section describing fax mailboxes. Fax transmission Print a header page (depending on model) A header page is stored in your terminal. To send your fax using this header page, you can print it at any time and fill in your details. 1 Select 􀀙30 - FAX /HEADER PAGE. 2 Select : 301 - LOCAL, to print a header page according to the country configured on the terminal, 302 - INTERNAT, to print a bilingual header page, the language of the country configured on the terminal and English. The separator between the two languages is "/". Example of the international header page: Immediate transmission 1 Place the document to be copied in the automatic document feeder, face printed on the top. or Place the document to be copied face down on the glass, respecting the indications around the glass. 2 Enter the fax number or choose your dialling mode then press . The icon flashes during the call phase, it stays lit when both faxes are in communication. 3 At the end of transmission the initial screen is displayed. Delayed transmission This function allows you to transmit a document at a later time. To program a postponed transmission you need to identify the subscriber number, transmission time, feeder type and number of pages. To delay the transmission time of your document : 1 Place the document to be copied in the automatic document feeder, face printed on the top. or Place the document to be copied face down on the glass, respecting the indications around the glass. 2 Select 􀀙31 - FAX / TRANSMISSION. 3 Enter the subscriber number you wish to program at a different time or choose your dialling mode and confirm with OK. 4 Next to the current time, enter the new time and confirm with OK. 5 Choose B & W SCAN or COLOR SCAN. 6 Adjust the contrast and confirm with OK. 7 Select the feed type, FEEDER or MEMORY and confirm with OK. 8 You may enter the number of pages before transmission and confirm with OK. 9 Confirm postponed transmission by pressing key . Your document is stored and will be sent at the new time. If English is the language configured on the terminal. The header page will only be printed in English. When sending in "Deferred Send" mode, make sure that the document is located in the right direction. - 18 - 4 - Fax Transmission with auto redial This function allows you to monitor the dialling operation during a fax transmission. In this case, the maximum transmission rate will be 14400 bps. This function allows for example: • to hear if the subscriber’s fax is engaged and if so, choose the moment when the line is clear to start the document transmission. • to control the communication progress in case of uncertain numbers, etc. To take the line manually: 1 Place the document in the fax feeder. 2 Press . 3 If necessary, set the sound level with navigator 􀀘 or 􀀙 keys. 4 If not already done, enter the subscriber number. As soon as you hear the remote fax tone, the line is clear and you can start the transmission. 5 Press to start the document transmission. Fax reception Fax reception depends on the parameter settings of your machine. The following parameters let you customize the printing of received faxes : - Reception Mode, page 27; - Reception without paper, page 27; - Number of copies, page 27; - Fax or PC reception, page 27; - Received faxes reduction mode, page 27; - Technical Parameters, page 28. The following tables gives which tray is used to print received fax depending on the default tray and the paper format in both trays. Default tray set to Manual: Default tray set to Automatic: Relay broadcast Your fax machine (initiator) can relay a document, in other words, transmit a document to your subscribers via a remote fax and with a precise relay list. To do this the initiator fax and the remote fax must both have the relay function. To relay you need to supply the remote fax with the document and the relay list number. The remote fax will then transmit this document to all subscribers on the list. Once the relay is activated by your fax and as soon as the document is received by the remote fax, the document is printed before relaying to all subcribers on the list. To activate relay from your fax machine: 1 Insert the document to relay. 2 Select 􀀙37 - FAX / BROADCAST. 3 Enter the remote fax number where you will relay to or choose your dialling mode and press OK. 4 Enter the relay list number used by the remote fax and press OK. If your machine is set in order to print a transmission report (Transmission report, page 26), the reduced copy of the document first page will not be printed and it notifies you that the communication is manual. The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. Manual tray paper format Main tray paper format Action A4,Letter and Legal A4,Letter and Legal The fax is printed on manual tray. A4,Letter and Legal A5 The fax is printed on manual tray. A5 A4,Letter and Legal An error message is displayed on the screen. The paper on manual tray is incompatible. A5 A5 An error message is displayed on the screen. The paper on manual tray is incompatible. Manual tray paper format Main tray paper format Action A4,Letter and Legal A4,Letter and Legal The fax is printed with an automatic selection of tray. A4,Letter and Legal A5 An error message is displayed on the screen. The paper on automatic tray is incompatible. A5 A4,Letter and Legal The fax is printed on the main tray. A5 A5 An error message is displayed on the screen. The paper on automatic tray is incompatible. - 19 - 4 - Fax 5 You may enter the time you wish to transmit the document next to the current time and press OK. 6 If you wish to modify the document feed type, select one of the options FEEDER or MEMORY, then press OK. 7 If you wish, you may enter the number of pages of your documents before transmitting. 8 Activate relay by pressing key . The document in the feeder will be relayed either immediately or at a later time (according to your choice) to the remote fax which will relay the document. Fax answering machine The Fax answering machine allows you to keep confidential documents in storage and to avoid printing them as you receive them. The indicator light lets you know the state of your Fax answering machine: • Light on: the answering machine is on. • Blinking: your fax has documents in storage or is in the process of receiving faxes. • Light off: memory full, the terminal cannot receive any more documents. You can assure document confidentiality by using the 4 digit access code. Once saved, you will require this access code for: • printing fax messages in memory, • activating or deactivating the fax answering machine. Saving an access code 􀀙383 - FAX / FAX ANSW. / ANSWER CODE 1 Enter the code (4 digits) and confirm with OK. 2 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Activating / Deactivating the answering machine 􀀙382 - FAX / FAX ANSW. / ACTIVATION 1 If you saved an access code for your fax answering machine, enter it and validate with OK. 2 Select the required option WITH or WITHOUT answering machine and confirm you choice with OK. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Printing fax messages stored in the memory 􀀙381 - FAX / FAX ANSW. / PRINT 1 If you have defined an access code for your fax answering machine, enter it and press OK. Documents received and stored in the memory are printed. Fax rerouting This function is used to reroute faxes received to a directory contact. To use this function, you have to perform two operations: 1 Activate rerouting. 2 Set the rerouting address of the fax. Activating rerouting 􀀙391 - FAX / REROUTING / ACTIVATION 1 Using the keys 􀀙 and 􀀘 within the navigator, select option WITH. 2 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Setting the re-direction contact 􀀙392 - FAX / REROUTING / CALL NUMBER 1 Using the keys 􀀙 and 􀀘 within the navigator, select the subscriber from the directory. 2 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Printing rerouted documents 􀀙393 - FAX / REROUTING / COPY 1 Using the keys 􀀙 and 􀀘 within the navigator, select the COPY option (local printout of the information relayed to your device) either WITH or WITHOUT. 2 Confirm with OK. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. If the function WITHOUT is selected, the menus 392 and 393 will not be included in the functions overview, when it is printed out (see Setting the re-direction contact, page 19, Printing rerouted documents, page 19 and Printing the functions guide, page 30). Make sure that the subscriber exists in the directory (Directory, page 32 ). - 20 - 4 - Fax Rerouting fax messages to a USB memory key This function allows you to reroute received fax messages to a USB memory key connected to your terminal. The USB memory key then becomes the terminal reception memory. Fax messages that are rerouted are therefore saved on the USB memory key with format Tiff and are named as follows : "FAXYYMMDDHHMMSS" where YYMMDDHHMMSS corresponds to the fax reception date and time. You can also print fax messages rerouted to your USB memory key automatically by activating menu 052 PRINT. Activating rerouting 􀀙051 - MEDIA / FAX ARCHIVING / ACTIVATION 1 Using the keys 􀀙 and 􀀘 within the navigator, select option WITH and confirm your choice with OK. 2 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Printing rerouted documents 􀀙052 - MEDIA / FAX ARCHIVING / PRINT 1 Using the keys 􀀙 and 􀀘, select the copy option WITH to print all rerouted documents automatically. 2 Confirm your choice with OK. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Transmission waiting queue This function lets you obtain a recap of all documents queuing, for transmission, including those in deposit or in delayed transmission, etc. It allows you to: • Consult or modify the waiting queue. In this waiting queue the documents are coded the following way: Order number in the queue / document status / subscriber’s telephone number. Documents may have the following status: - TX: transmission - REL: relay - DOC: in deposit - POL: polling - MBX: send to mailbox - PMB: mailbox polling - TR: ongoing commands - SMS: SMS transmission • Immediately perform a transmission from the waiting queue, • Print a document in storage, waiting to be transmitted or in deposit, • Print the waiting queue, in order to get the status of each document in the queue, by either: - queue order number, - document name or number, - scheduled transmission time (fax), - operation type regarding the document: transmission from memory, delayed transmission, deposit, - number of pages of the document, - document size (percentage of space stored in memory) • Cancel a transmission request in the waiting queue. Performing immediate transmission from the waiting queue 􀀙 61 - COMMANDS / PERFORM 1 Select the document in the waiting queue and confirm your choice with OK or to immediately perform the selected transmission. Consulting or modifying the waiting queue 􀀙 62 - COMMANDS / MODIFY 1 In the waiting queue select the required document and confirm your choice with OK. 2 You may now modify the parameters of the given document then confirm your modifications by pressing . Deleting a transmission on hold 􀀙 63 - COMMANDS / CANCEL 1 In the waiting queue select the desired document and confirm your choice with OK. Printing a document in waiting or in deposit 􀀙 64 - COMMANDS / PRINT 1 In the waiting queue select the desired document and confirm your choice with OK. Printing the waiting queue 􀀙65 - COMMANDS / PRINT LIST A document called ** COMMAND LIST ** is printed. Before activating this function, connect the USB memory key to the terminal. The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. - 21 - 4 - Fax Cancelling a transmission in progress Cancelling a transmission in progress is possible no matter what the type of transmission but varies depending on whether the transmission is a single call number or a multi-call number. • For a single call number from the memory, the document is erased from the memory. • For a multi-call number, only the call number in progress at the time of the cancellation is erased from the transmission queue. To cancel transmission in progress: 1 Press . A message will ask you to confirm cancellation by pressing a second time. 2 Press to confirm cancellation in progress. If your machine is set to print a transmission report, it will print that the communication was cancelled by the user. MailBoxes (MBX Fax) There are 32 mailboxes (MBX), enabling you to transmit documents in complete confidence using an access code (named MBX code), to all subscribers equipped with a fax compatible to yours. MBX 00 is public. It is handled directly by the terminal to record the messages of the fax TAD as soon as this is put into service. MBX’s 01 to 31 are private. Each is password-protected. They can be used to receive documents confidentially. The use and access to MBX 01 - 31 are conditioned by the initialisation, defined by a MBX code (if needed) and a mnenonic (its S.I.D.). Later you may: • modify the features of an MBX, • print the contents of an MBX, only possible if the MBX contains one or more documents (with a star next to the MBX). When the contents of an MBX have been printed it becomes empty, • delete an MBX, only if the MBX is initialised and empty, • print the the list of your fax machine’s MBX’s. You may receive and send through an MBX in complete confidentiality. When depositing a document into your MBX, the access code is not needed. All documents deposited in a MBX are added to the ones already present. In polling, the MBX’s are only accessible with an MBX code. You may perform MBX deposits or polls by: • depositing a document in a fax MBX, • transmitting to deposit a document in a remote fax MBX, • performing document poll from a remote fax. Creating an MBX 􀀙 71 - MAILBOXES / CREATE MBX 1 Select a free MBX out of the 31 MBX or directly enter the number of a free MBX and confirm with OK. 2 Select option MAILBOX CODE and press OK. Value 0000 is always displayed. 3 Enter the code of your choice, if needed, and press OK. 4 Select option MAILBOX NAME and press OK. 5 Enter this MBX’s S.I.D. (20 characters max.) and press OK. The MBX is initialised. If you wish to initialise another, press C and repeat the same procedure. 6 To exit the MBX, press . Modifying the features of a MBX 􀀙 71 - MAILBOXES / CREATE MBX 1 Select the desired MBX out of the 31 MBX’s, or enter the number of the MBX directly and press OK. 2 Enter the code of this MBX, if there is one, and confirm with OK. 3 Select the menu MAILBOX CODE or MAILBOX NAME, then confirm your choice with OK. 4 Perform data modification of the menu and confirm with OK. If needed, repeat the last two steps for the other menu. Printing the contents of a MBX 􀀙 73 - MAILBOXES / PRINT MBX 1 Select the desired MBX out of the 31 MBX’s, or enter the number of the MBX directly and press OK. 2 Enter the code of this MBX, if there is one, and confirm with OK. All documents found in the MBX are printed and the MBX is emptied. - 22 - 4 - Fax Deleting a MBX Before deleting an MBX, you need to make sure it is empty, by printing its content. 􀀙 74 - MAILBOXES / DELETE MBX 1 Select the desired MBX out of the 31 MBX’s, or enter the number of the MBX directly and press OK. 2 Enter the code of this MBX, if there is one, and confirm with OK. 3 Press OK to confirm the MBX deletion. The MBX is deleted and will appear as a free MBX in the list. Printing the MBX list 􀀙75 - MAILBOXES / PRT MBX LIST The list gives the status of each MBX. MBX deposit in your fax 1 Insert the document in the fax machine’s feeder. 2 Select 􀀙72 - MAILBOXES / DEPOSIT MBX and confirm with OK. 3 Select the desired MBX out of the 31 MBX’s, or enter the number of the MBX directly and press OK. The document is placed in the feeder and saved in the selected MBX. MBX deposit in a remote fax 1 Insert the document in the fax machine’s feeder. 2 Select 􀀙35 - FAX / MBX SENDING and confirm with OK. 3 Enter your subscriber’s number for MBX deposit or choose your dialling mode and validate with OK. 4 Enter the subscriber’s MBX number and confirm with OK. 5 If you wish to delay transmission, enter the new transmission time next to the current time and press OK. 6 If you wish to modify the document feed type, select one of the options FEEDER or MEMORY, and press OK. 7 If you wish, you may enter the number of pages of your document before transmitting and confirm with OK. 8 Confirm the transmission request to a remote MBX fax by pressing key . In the case of an immediate transmission, the document is sent immediately. If the document is set for a postponed transmission, the document will be stored in the memory and sent at the requested time. MBX polling from a remote fax 􀀙36 - FAX / MBX POLLING 1 Enter your subscriber’s number for MBX polling or choose your dialling mode and confirm with OK. 2 Enter the subscriber MBX number and press OK. 3 Enter this MBX access code and press OK. 4 If you wish to delay the poll time, enter the departure time next to the current time and press OK. 5 Confirm the MBX poll request by pressing . As soon as the remote fax is subscribed, either immediately or later, the document(s) in the remote fax MBX are receveid in your fax. Deposit and Polling You may deposit a document in your fax and keep it available to one or more subscribers who can obtain a fax of this document by calling your fax with the POLL function. Setting the machine for document deposits, you must define the type: • SIMPLE- it may be polled only once from the memory or feeder, • MULTIPLE- it may be polled as many times as necessary from the memory. Setting the machine for polled documents, you must define the poll number, then depending on the type of poll you may: • launch an immediate poll, • program a delayed poll with a chosen time, • launch a multi-poll, either immediately or later. Placing a document in deposit 1 Insert the document to deposit in the feeder. 2 Select 􀀙34 - FAX / POLLING TX and confirm with OK. 3 Choose the deposit type, according to the table below: Please check for remote fax compatibility. - 23 - 4 - Fax 3 Confirm deposit by pressing OK. Polling a deposited document 􀀙33 - FAX / POLLING RX 1 Enter the number of the party whose document you want to poll or choose your dialling mode. You can poll several documents using the key . 2 Depending on the type of poll, you should: Menu Procedure Simple 1 Select FEEDER or MEMORY. 2 If necessary, adjust the contrast and confirm with OK. 3 Enter the number of pages that you wish to deposit. Multiple 1 If necessary, adjust the contrast and confirm with OK. 2 Enter the number of pages that you wish to deposit. Menu Procedure Immediate poll 1 Press . Delayed poll 1 Press OK. 2 Next to the current time, enter the time you wish to poll the document and press . - 24 - 5 - SMS SMS Thanks to the SMS button, you can send an SMS to subscribers all over the world. An SMS (Short Message Service) is a service which permits short written messages to be sent to mobile phones or other SMScompatible devices. The number of characters you can send per message is dependent upon the service provider and the country you are sending your SMS from (e.g. France 160 characters, Italy 640 characters). The SMS service is dependent upon the country and the service provider. SMS Parameters Presentation of the sender This setting allows you to show the name or the number of the sender when sending an SMS. 􀀙 41 - SMS SERVICE / SENDER 1 Select the option WITH or WITHOUT presentation of the sender using the 􀀘 or 􀀙 keys. 2 Validate with OK. SMS Center transmission number This setting allows you to enter the transmission number for the SMS Server. Your Internet provider will provide you with this number. 􀀙 421 - SMS SERVICE / INIT. SMS / SERVER 1 Enter the number of the transmission server using the digital keypad. 2 Validate with OK. Sending an SMS 1 Press the key. 2 Write your SMS using the alphabetical keypad. To do so, an editor is at your disposal: • for upper case letters, use the 􀃏 key, • to move inside the data entry field, use 􀀙 and 􀀘, • to move in the text from one word to another, press CTRL and one of the navigator keys (􀀙 or 􀀘). • to go to the next line, use , • to delete a character (by moving the cursor to the left), use 􀃍 or C. 3 Validate with OK. 4 Dial the number of the recipient (mobile phone or any other SMS-compatible device) in one of the following ways: • dial the number using the digital keypad, • enter the first letters of the recipient name, • press the key until the required name appears (names are classified in alphabetical order). Your SMS may be sent to only one person or to several people. To send an SMS: • to only one person, press OK to confirm, • to several people: 5 Press the key and enter the next recipient's number. 6 Repeat the operations as many times as required (10 persons max.). Press OK to validate the last recipient; "SENDING SMS" is displayed as the SMS is being sent. • If SMS appears, then the SMS has been put on hold and a further attempt will take place a couple of minutes later. To immediately execute or cancel transmission, refer to paragraph Transmission waiting queue, page 20. • To check the SMS has been sent properly, you may print the transmission/reception log (refer to paragraph Printing the logs, page 30). There is a special scale of charges for the SMS service. - 25 - 6 - Parameters/Setup Parameters/Setup You can setup your machine as you like depending on the use. You will find in this chapter description of the functions. You can print the functions guide and the available setup of your multifunction machine. Date/Time At any moment you may change the date and time on your multifunction machine. 􀀙21 - SETUP / DATE/TIME 1 Press 􀀙, enter 21 using the keypad. Confirm with OK. 2 Enter the numbers of the required time and date one after another (for example November 8 2004 at 9h33, press 0 8 1 1 0 4 0 9 3 3) and press OK to confirm. 3 To exit this menu, press . Your fax number/Your name Your multifunction machine will print out your fax number and your name on each document it transmits if you save these settings. 􀀙22 - SETUP / NUMBER/NAME 1 Press 􀀙, enter 22 using the keypad. Confirm with OK. 2 Enter your fax number (20 digits max.) and press OK to confirm. 3 Enter your name (20 characters max) then press OK to confirm. For example, if you want to type the letter C, press the key C until it appears on the screen. 4 To exit this menu, press . Type of network You can connect your fax to either a PSTN or a private network such as private automatic branch exchange (PABX). You must select the network which is in use. To select the type of network: 􀀙251 - SETUP / TEL. NETWORK / NETWORK TYPE 1 Select option PABX or PSTN then confirm your choice with OK. 2 To exit this menu, press . Geographical settings These settings will enable you to use your machine in different preset countries using different languages. Country By choosing a country, you initialise: • the settings for the public telephone network, • the language by default. To select the country: 􀀙201 - SETUP / GEOGRAPHICAL / COUNTRY 1 Select the required option and press the OK key to confirm. 2 To exit this menu, press . Network This setting enables you to manually set the type of public telephone network (PSTN) for a country, so that your machine can communicate over the public telephone network in compliance with the applicable standards. By default, setting a country using the 􀀙201 OK command automatically sets the type of PSTN to use in the selected country. To manually select the type of public telephone network: 􀀙202 - SETUP / GEOGRAPHICAL / NETWORK 1 Select the required option and press the OK key to confirm. 2 To exit this menu, press . To benefit from this feature, you must set SENDING HEADER to WITH (Technical Parameters, page 28). If none of the options in the list is suitable, select the "OTHER" option. These settings are different from the NETWORK TYPE, which allows you to choose between public and private network. - 26 - 6 - Parameters/Setup Language This setting enables you to choose the menu language of your choice. By default, the multifunction machine is set to English. 􀀙203 - SETUP / GEOGRAPHICAL / LANGUAGE 1 Select the required language using 􀀙 and 􀀘, then press the OK key to confirm. 2 To exit this menu, press . Local prefix This function is used when your fax is installed with a private network, behind a company’s PABX. It allows you to program an additional automatic local prefix (to be defined), enabling you to automatically exit the company’s telephone network system, but only under certain conditions: • the company’s internal numbers, where a prefix is not required, must be short numbers less than the minimal size (to be defined, for example France has 10 digits), • the outside numbers requiring a prefix, must be long numbers greater or equal to the minimal size (to be defined, for example France has 10 digits). Programming your fax with the local prefix consists of two steps: 1 defining the minimal size (or equal) of the company’s outside numbers, 2 defining the outgoing local prefix of the company’s telephone network. This prefix will automatically be added as soon as an external number is dialled. Prefix 􀀙252 - SETUP / TEL. NETWORK / PREFIX 1 You can change the default value for the minimal size of the company’s outside numbers and validate with OK. The minimal size will range between 1 and 30. 2 Enter the outgoing local prefix of the company’s telephone network (maximum 5 characters) and validate with OK. 3 To exit this menu, press . Transmission report You may print a transmission report for all communications over the telephone network (PSTN). You may choose between more than one criteria for printing reports: • WITH: a report is given when the transmission was properly performed or when it is completely abandoned (but there is only one report per request), • WITHOUT: no transmission report, however, your fax will note all transmissions that took place in its log, • ALWAYS: a report is printed with each transmission, • ON ERROR: a report is printed only if the transmission failed or is abandoned. With each transmission report from memory, a reduced version of the first page is automatically reproduced. To select the report type: 􀀙231 - SETUP / SEND / SEND REPORT 1 Select the required option WITH, WITHOUT, ALWAYS or ON ERROR and confirm your choice with OK. 2 To exit this menu, press . Document feed type You may choose the way you want to feed your documents: • from memory, transmission will take place only after memory storage of the document and dialling. It allows you to get your originals back quickly to free up the machine. • from the feeder of the sheet-feed scanner, transmission will occur after dialling and paper scanning. It allows transmission of larger documents. To select the way you want to feed your documents: 􀀙232 - SETUP / SEND / MEMORY SEND. 1 Select the option MEMORY or FEEDER and validate your choice with OK. In feeder mode, reduced images will not appear on the transmission report. 2 To exit this menu, press . Economy period This function allows you to defer a fax transmission to "offpeak hours" and thus reduce the cost of your communications. The economy period, via the telephone network (at offpeak hours), is preset by default from 7.00 pm to 7.30 am. Nevertheless you may change this time slot. If none of the options in the list is suitable, select the "OTHER" option. If you define a local prefix, do not add it to the numbers stored in the directory, it will be automatically dialled with each number. - 27 - 6 - Parameters/Setup To modify the economy period: 􀀙233 - SETUP / SEND / ECO PER. 1 Enter the hours of the new economy period and confirm your selection with the key OK. To use the economy period: 􀀙32 - FAX / ECO TRANS. 1 Enter the call number and confirm with OK. 2 Choose SCAN B & W or COLOR SCAN. 3 Adjust the contrast and confirm with OK. 4 Select the feed type, FEEDER or MEMORY and confirm with OK. 5 You may enter the number of pages before transmission and confirm with OK. Reception Mode This function enables you, if you have an external device (telephone, answering machine) plugged in to the EXT socket on your terminal or to the telephone plug adapter, to select the device receiving faxes and/or voice messages. You may choose between the following reception modes : • MANUAL : the terminal does not receive any documents automatically. When you answer your telephone and realise that you are receiving a fax, you should press the button on the terminal to receive the fax. • FAX : the Fax reception mode is launched on the terminal systematically. • FAX-ANSWER. : the terminal handles reception of fax messages automatically, the external device handles reception of telephone communications automatically. Press the #0 buttons on your telephone to cancel fax detection. To set the reception mode: 􀀙241 - SETUP / RECEPTION / MODE 1 Select the required option and confirm with OK. 2 To exit this menu, press . Reception without paper Your fax offers you the possibility to either accept or refuse document reception if your printer is unavailable (no paper...). If your fax printer is unavailable, you may choose between two modes of reception: • reception mode WITHOUT PAPER, your fax saves the incoming messages in the memory, • reception mode WITH PAPER, your fax refuses all incoming subscribers. To select the reception mode: 􀀙242 - SETUP / RECEPTION / REC. PAPER 1 Select the option WITH PAPER or WITHOUT PAPER and confirm your choice with OK. Number of copies You may print incoming documents more than once (1 to 99). To set the number of each document received: 􀀙243 - SETUP / RECEPTION / NBR OF COPIES 1 Enter the wanted number of copies and confirm with OK. At each document reception, your fax will print the number of copies requested. Fax or PC reception This menu, combined with a software program installed on your PC will enable you to select the machine you wish to receive the documents on: • fax, • PC, • PC if available, fax otherwise. 􀀙244 - SETUP / RECEPTION / PC RECEPT. For more details, please refer to PC Features, page 46. Received faxes reduction mode This menu allows you to reduce received faxes for printing. This adjustment can be automatic or manual. Automatic mode: This mode automatically resizes received faxes. If you have connected a telephone to the EXT socket on your terminal or to a telephone plug adaptor, we recommend that you set the reception mode to MANUAL. When you receive a call, you pick up using this telephone and you hear the particular fax tone. You can: - press the button on your terminal or buttons #7 on your telephone to receive the fax Paper out is indicated by a beep and a message on the screen. Received faxes are then stored in memory (icon flashing) to be printed as soon as you add paper into the feeder. - 28 - 6 - Parameters/Setup To set automatic mode: 􀀙246 - SETUP / RECEPTION / REDUCTION 1 Select Automatic and confirm with OK. 2 To exit this menu, press . Manual mode: The machine proposes a 70 to 100 % reduction. Outside these values, the machine beeps for error. This fixed reduction will be used when printing received documents, regardless of the used paper format. To set the manual mode: 􀀙246 - SETUP / RECEPTION / REDUCTION 1 Select FIXED and confirm with OK. 2 Enter the reduction value (between 70 and 100) and confirm with OK. 3 To exit this menu, press . Technical Parameters As delivered your machine is preset by default. However, you may adjust it to meet your requirements by resetting the technical parameters. To set the technical parameters: 􀀙29 - SETUP / TECHNICALS 1 Select the desired parameter and confirm with OK. 2 With the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘, modify the parameter settings by following the table below and press OK. Parameter Signification 1 - Scanning mode Default value of the scan mode resolution for the documents to be transmitted. 2 - TX header If this parameter is on, your header will appear on all documents sent to your subscribers with your name, number, date and number of pages. Warning: If you send a fax from the document loader, the transmission header will not appear on the document your correspondent receives. 3 - TX speed Transmission speed for outgoing documents. For a quality telephone line (compatible, no echo), communications occur at maximum speed. However, it may be necessary to restrict the transmission speed for some calls. 4 - Echo protect If this parameter is on, the on-line echo will be reduced during long distance calls. 6 - EPT mode For some long distance calls (satellite), the on-line echo may disturb the call. 7 - COM. display Choice between transmission speed displayed or number of the page in progress. 8 - Eco energy Choosing the printer standby delay: the printer will switch to standby after a delay (in minutes) of NONoperation or during the period of time of your choice. 10 - RX header If this parameter is on, all documents received by your fax will include the subscriber’s header with his name, number (if available) fax print date and the page number. 11 - RX speed Transmission speed for incoming documents. For a quality telephone line (compatible, no echo), communications occur at maximum speed. However, it may be necessary to restrict the transmission speed for some calls. 12 - Rings Number of rings to automatically start your machine. 13 - Discard size The Discard Size parameter only defines the printing of received faxes . The number of lines of a document can be too high for the printing paper format. This parameter defines the threshold beyond which the extra lines are printed on a second page. Bellow this threshold, extras lines are deleted. If you choose With, the threshold is set on 3 centimeters. If you choose Without, the threshold is set on 1 centimeter. Parameter Signification - 29 - 6 - Parameters/Setup 20 - E.C.M. This parameter helps correct the calls made on disturbed telephone lines. It is used when the lines are weak or too noisy. Transmission times may be longer. 25 - TEL Impedance This parameter lets you choose between a complex impedance and a 600 Ohm impedance, depending on the telephone network your terminal is connected to. 73 - Improve rep @ This parameter lets you automatically register the Internet address of your subscribers fax during a call (if available). 74 - Erase mailbox When the fax machine receives an e-mail with an attachment and cannot open it, it erases the message from the ISP MBX, prints and transmits with a notice of uncomprehension to the message sender. At E-mail reception, the fax does not destroy the MBX message, it prints a notice of uncomprehension asking you to recuperate this message with your computer equipment. This parameter is useful only if you have PC equipment. The memory capacity is limited, you need to empty your MBX or else new messages may not be received. 75 - Text Attchmt. Editing YES / NO and printing the received Internet documents. 76 - Attchmt format Default format of document sent on the Internet: PDF : monochrome or colour IMAGE : monochrome (TIFF) or colour (JPEG) 77 - LAN speed To define the communication speed of the peripheral units in relation to the implemented Local Area Network (LAN). 80 - Toner save Makes printing lighter to save toner cartridge ink. 81 - Font number Starts the printing of the log list. This parameter lets you set the default PCL font. The possible values are included between 5 and 128 inclus. The default value is 0 (Courier). Parameter Signification 82 - Form lines This parameter lets you set the number of lines per page. This variable is linked to the PJL variables: PAPER and ORIENTATION. If you modify one of these variables, the Form Lines variable is automatically updated (only for the print job in progress) to respect the same spacing. The possible values are included between 5 and 128 inclus. The default value is 60. 83 - Font pitch This parameter lets you set the default font spacing, in characters per inch (the default font must be of type non-proportional). The possible values are included between 0,44 and 99,99 inclus. The default value is 10,00. 84 - Ptsize This parameter lets you set the default font height, in points (the default font must be of type proportional). The possible values are included between 4,00 and 999,75 (by step of 0,25). The default value is 12,00. 85 Line termin. This parameter lets you define line breaks conversion: , and . The possible values are included between 0 and 3. The default value is 0. 86 Orientation This parameter lets you set the page orientation: portrait or landscape. The default value is "portrait". 90 - RAW Port RAW network print port connection. 91 - Printer error timeout Time-out before document being printed is deleted following a print error in PC print mode. 92 - Printer wait timeout Wait time-out for data from PC before the task is deleted in PC print. 93 - Replace format Page format change. This parameter allows you to print a LETTER format document on A4 pages using the LETTER/A4 setting. 94 - Printer class Printing in PCL-/Postscript Mode Printing in GDI mode Parameter Signification - 30 - 6 - Parameters/Setup Printing the functions guide 􀀙 51 - PRINT / FUNCTIONS LIST 1 Press on 􀀙 and enter 51 with the digital keypad. The printing of the functions guide starts. Printing the logs The incoming and outgoing logs list the last 30 transmissions (incoming and outgoing) made by your machine. An automatic print out will take place after every 30 transmissions. However, you may request a print out at any time. Each log (incoming or outgoing) contains a table with the following information: • date and time of the incoming or outgoing document, • subscriber’s number or E-mail address, • transmission mode (Normal, Fine, SFine or Photo), • number of pages sent or received, • call duration, • incoming or outgoing results: noted CORRECT if properly transmitted, or information codes for special calls (polling, manual subscribers, etc.) • reason for call error (example: your subscriber does not answer) To print the logs: 􀀙52 - PRINT / LOGS 1 Press on 􀀙 and enter 52 with the digital keypad. The printing of the logs starts. Print the list of setups To print the list of setups: 􀀙54 - PRINT / SETUP 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 54 with the digital keypad. The printing of the list of setups starts. Font printing You can print the list of fonts installed on your terminal at any time. To print PCL fonts: 􀀙57 - PRINT / PCL FONTS To print SG Script fonts: 􀀙58 - PRINT / SGSCRIPT FONTS Lock the machine This function prevents non-authorized people from accessing the machine. An access code will be required every time someone wants to use the device. After each use, the device will lock automatically. Before that you have to enter a lock code. 􀀙811 - ADVANCED FCT / LOCK / LOCKING CODE 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 811 with the digital keyboard. 2 Enter your lock code (4 digits) with the keyboard, confirm with OK. 3 Enter again your lock code (4 digits) with the keyboard, confirm with OK. 4 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Lock the keyboard Everytime you use your machine, you will have to enter your code. 􀀙812 - ADVANCED FCT / LOCK / LOCK KEYBD. 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 812 with the keyboard. 2 Enter the lock code and confirm with OK. 3 With the buttons 􀀙 or 􀀘, choose WITH and confirm with OK. 4 Quit this menu by pressing the button. 95 - Symbol set This parameter lets you set the default character set. The possible values are included between CS1 and CS30 inclus. The default value is CS1 (Roman8). 96 - NBR. WEP Keys Number of WEP keys allowed (from 1 to 4). The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. The incoming and outgoing logs are printed on the same page. Parameter Signification The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. If a code is already registered, enter the old code before typing the new one. - 31 - 6 - Parameters/Setup Lock the numbers This function locks dialling and the numerical keypad is disabled. Transmissions are only possible from numbers included in the directory. To access the number interlocking option: 􀀙813 - ADVANCED FCT / LOCK / LOCK NUMBER 1 Enter the four-digit interlock code with the keypad. 2 Press key OK to confirm. 3 With keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 of the navigator, select the option DIRECT ONLY. 4 Press key OK to confirm. 5 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Lock the SMS service This function prevents access to the SMS service. To access the SMS service locking menu: 􀀙815 - ADVANCED FCT / LOCK / LOCK SMS 1 Enter the four-digit locking code with the numerical keypad. 2 Press key OK to confirm. 3 Enter the four-digit locking code again to confirm it. 4 Press key OK to confirm. When a code is already registered in the machine, you will have to enter this registered code first before you can type and register a new one. Read the counters This function allows you to view the activity counters for your machine at any time. According to your needs, you can read the counters for: • sent pages, • received pages, • scanned pages, • printed pages. Sent pages counter To view the number of pages sent from your machine: 􀀙821 - ADVANCED FCT / COUNTERS / SENT PAGES 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 821 with the keyboard. 2 The number of sent pages appears on the screen. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Received pages counter To view the number of pages received on your machine: 􀀙822 - ADVANCED FCT / COUNTERS / RECEIVED PG 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 822 with the keyboard. 2 The number of received pages appears on the screen. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Scanned pages counter To view the number of pages scanned on your machine: 􀀙823 - ADVANCED FCT / COUNTERS / SCANNED PAGE 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 823 with the keyboard. 2 The number of scanned pages appears on the screen. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Printed pages counter To view the number of pages printed on your machine: 􀀙824 - ADVANCED FCT / COUNTERS / PRINTED PG 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 824 with the keyboard. 2 The number of printed pages appears on the screen. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Display the consumables status You can read at any time the remaining toner in the cartridge. This level appears in percentage. 􀀙86 - ADVANCED FCT / CONSUMABLES 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 86 with the keyboard. 2 The available toner percentage appears on the screen. 3 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Calibrate your scanner You can do this operation when the quality of photocopied documents is not satisfactory anymore. 􀀙80 - ADVANCED FCT / CALIBRATION 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 80 with the keyboard, confirm with OK. 2 The scanner is triggered and a calibration is done automatically. 3 At the end of the calibration, the machine comes back to the screen saver. - 32 - 7 - Directory Directory Your multifunction machine lets you create a directory by memorising subscriber records and subscriber lists. Your machine can store up to 250 subscriber records, which you can group in 20 subscriber lists. For all subscriber records or subscriber lists you may create, consult, modify or delete contents. You can also print the directory. Furthermore, your machine lets you create and manage your phone directory from your PC Kit. For more information on this feature, refer to chapter PC Features. Creating subscribers record To create subscribers record: 􀀙 11 - DIRECTORY / NEW CONTACT 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 11 with the digital keypad. 2 Enter the NAME of your contact with the alphanumerical keypad (20 characters maximum), confirm with OK. 3 Enter the TEL number of your contact with the digital keypad (30 digits maximum), confirm with OK. 4 Choose the RECORD NO from your directory with the digital keypad or accept the displayed number, and confirm with OK. At this stage, you may associate an e-mail address or an FTP address to your subscriber. If you do not wish to do so, confirm with OK and refer to step 5. To associate an e-mail address: • Enter the E-Mail address of your subscriber and confirm with OK. • Define the attachment format (Image or PDF) then confirm with OK. • Refer to step 5. Or to associate an FTP address : • Do not enter the e-mail address and confirm with OK. • Enter the FTP address of the contact (for example: 134.1.22.9), then confirm with OK. • Enter the FTP user name (for example: Durand) then confirm with OK. • Enter the password of the FTP user, then confirm with OK.. • If necessary, enter the file destination directory (when this field is not completed, the files are stored directly under the root) of the FTP server (for example: server name / Durand). Confirm with OK. • Define the attachment format (Image or PDF) then confirm with OK. • Refer to step 5. 5 Select W. ASSOC. KEY if you want to assign a shortcut key (letter) to your subscriber record. The first available letter appears, use 􀀙 or 􀀘 to choose another letter. Confirm with OK. 6 Select the appropriate transmission RATE to send faxes among the values 2400, 4800, 7200, 9600, 12000, 14400 and 33600 using 􀀙 or 􀀘. Confirm with OK. The maximum speed can be used if the telephone line is of good quality, meaning appropriate, without echo. Creating subscribers list To create subscribers list: 􀀙 12 - DIRECTORY / NEW GROUP 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 12 with the digital keypad. 2 Enter the LIST NAME with the alphanumerical keypad (20 characters maximum), confirm with OK. 3 CALLED NUMBER: use 􀀙 ou 􀀘 to select from existing records the contacts of your list and confirm with OK. Repeat this operation for each subscriber you want to add to your list. 4 Enter the GROUP NUMBER assigned to your list with the digital keypad or accept the displayed number, and confirm with OK. Modifying a record To modify a subscribers record or list: 􀀙 13 - DIRECTORY / MODIFY 1 Press 􀀙, enter 13 with the digital keypad. 2 With 􀀙 or 􀀘, browse the directory and select the record or list you want to modify by pressing OK. 3 With 􀀙 or 􀀘, browse the entries of the selected record or list. Press on OK when the entry you want to modify appears on screen. 4 The cursor appears at the end of the line. Press on C to delete characters. 5 Enter the new entry and confirm with OK. 6 Repeat the operations for each line you want to modify. If your multifunction machine is connected to a PABX, you may insert a pause for dial tone after the outgoing local prefix dialling. To do so, insert the character "/" after the local prefix. In the directory, the letter G placed next to a name identifies a subscribers group. - 33 - 7 - Directory Deleting a record or a list To delete a subscribers record or list: 􀀙 14 - DIRECTORY / CANCEL 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 14 with the keypad. 2 With 􀀙 or 􀀘, browse the directory and select the record or list you want to delete by pressing OK. 3 Press on OK to confirm the deletion. 4 Repeat the operations for each record or list you want to delete. Printing the directory To print the directory: 􀀙 15 - DIRECTORY / PRINT 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 15 with the keypad. The printing of the directory starts, in alphabetical order. The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. - 34 - 8 - Games and entertainment Games and entertainment Sudoku (depending on the model) Sudoku is a Japanese puzzle. The game is in a grid format of three squares by three squares to be distributed in fields in zones of 3 × 3. Depending on the level of difficulty, more or fewer numbers are already entered at the start of the game. The aim of the game is to distribute the numbers 1 to 9 between the boxes in such a way that each number appears only once in each row, column and in each of the nine grids. There is only one solution. Print a grid 1 Press 􀀙, 5 and OK. 2 Select SUDOKU using the 􀀙 or 􀀘 button. 3 Confirm with OK. 4 Select PRINT GRID using the 􀀙 or 􀀘 button. 5 Select the level of difficulty EASY LEVEL, INTERMEDIATE LEVEL, DIFFICULT LEVEL, EVIL LEVEL using the 􀀙 or 􀀘 button 6 Confirm with OK. 7 Choose the grid you want by entering the number on the numeric keypad (1 to 100). 8 Confirm with OK. 9 Choose the number of copies you want by entering a number from 1 to 9 on the numeric keypad. 10 Confirm with OK. 11 The number of copies of the grid requested is printed. Print the solution to a grid 1 Press 􀀙, 5 and OK. 2 Select SUDOKU using the 􀀙 or 􀀘 button 3 Confirm withOK. 4 Select PRT SOLUT using the 􀀙 ou 􀀘. 5 Select the level of difficulty EASY LEVEL, INTERMEDIATE LEVEL, DIFFICULT LEVEL, EVIL LEVEL using the 􀀙 or 􀀘 button. 6 Confirm with OK. 7 Choose the grid you want by entering the number on the numeric keypad (1 to 100). 8 Confirm with OK. 9 Choose the number of copies you want by entering a number from 1 to 9 on the numeric keypad. 10 Confirm with OK. 11 The number of copies of the solution to the grid requested is printed. - 35 - 9 - WLAN network Local network settings You may connect your multifunction terminal to an Ethernet or a wireless network. However, practical knowledge of your computer configuration is required to set up a network. Selecting the type of your local network This parameter allows you to configure your terminal accordingly to the type of network you will install it in. 􀀙 26 - SETUP/LOCAL NETWORK 1 Select the desired network type using the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons - WLAN if using a wireless network - LAN ETHERNET if using a wired network 2 Confirm with OK. Ethernet network settings (model network) Automatic configuration We recommend that you carry out a manual configuration of your terminal. The automatic configuration of the local network settings may be considered, if your local network features a DHCP or BOOTP server that can dynamically assign addresses to the peripheral devices present on the LAN. To automatically configure the local network settings: 􀀙 271 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/IP CONFIG. 1 Choose Automatic and press OK to confirm. The terminal scans the local network for a DHCP or BOOTP server that can assign it its settings dynamically (the message Self-conf is displayed). 2 Once the message Self-conf has disappeared, check for the IP Address, Sub-network mask and Gateway address. If these are missing, you should carry out a manual configuration (see below). Manual configuration To configure your terminal manually, you should obtain the usual information used to set a peripheral device (IP address, sub-network mask, network and gateway address). To configure the local network setting manually: 􀀙 271 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/IP CONFIG. 3 Choose Manual and press OK to confirm. IP address 􀀙 272 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/IP ADDRESS 1 Enter the IP address of your terminal and press OK to confirm. Sub-network mask 􀀙 273 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/SUBNET MASK 1 Enter the sub-network mask of your terminal and press OK to confirm. Gateway address 􀀙 274 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/GATEWAY 1 Enter the IP address of the network gateway and press OK to confirm. IEEE Address (or Ethernet address) or MAC address 􀀙 275 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/IEEE ADDRESS The Ethernet card of your terminal already has an unmodifiable, yet consultable, IEEE address. NetBIOS names These names, which can be used with the network options, are used to identify your terminal machine from a PC connected to a local network (for instance with the name "IMP-NETWORK-1"). 􀀙 276 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/NETBIOS 1 􀀙 277 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/NETBIOS 2 1 Enter the selected name (15 characters max) and press OK to confirm. Name servers The WINS1 and WINS2 servers, used with the network options, allow access to terminals on other sub-networks by means of their NetBIOS name. 􀀙 278 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/WINS SRV. 1 􀀙 279 - SETUP/LAN ETHER/WINS SRV. 2 1 Enter the IP address of each server, then validate with OK. If the terminal is set up in Automatic configuration mode (menu 􀀙271), these addresses can be filled in automatically by certain DHCP servers. - 36 - 8 - WLAN network WLAN network You can connect your machine to a PC using a USB cable or make a wireless connection (via radio) with a PC or network. If you have a WLAN adaptor, you can incorporate your machine as a network printer into a radio network. Type of radio network A radio network or WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network) is created when at least two computers, printers or other peripheral devices communicate with each other in a network via radio waves (high frequency waves). The transmission of data in the radio network is based on the standards 802.11b and 802.11g. According to how the network is set up, it may be described as an infrastructure network or an ad-hoc network. Radio infrastructure network In an infrastructure network, several devices communicate via a central access point (a gateway or router). All data is sent to the access point (gateway or router) from where it is re-distributed. Radio ad-hoc network In an ad-hoc network, the devices communicate directly with each other without passing through an access point. The speed of communication across the whole radio network is as fast as the weakest connection in the network. The speed of communication is also dependent on spatial distance between transmitter and receiver, as well as the number of barriers, such as walls or ceilings. Radio networks (WLAN) Three steps are necessary to incorprate your machine into a radio network (WLAN): 1 Configure the network to your PC. 2 Set up the parameters for your machine so that it can function in a network. 3 Having set up the parameters your device, install the Companion Suite LL software onto your PC with the necessary printer drivers. Connect your WLAN adaptor Your machine belongs to a new generation of terminals that you can incorporate into a WLAN network using a WLAN USB key. Beware, when you are using a wireless connection, that certain items of medical equipment, sensitive or security systems may be affected by the radio transmissions of your device; in all cases, please follow safety guidelines closely. The PC and all other devices must have their parameters set up to the same network as the multifunction machine. All the details needed for setting up the device, such as the network names (SSID), type of radio network, WEP key, IP address or subnetwork mask, must match the specifications of the network. You will find these details on your PC or on the Access Point. To find out how to set up the parameters for your PC, please consult the users’ manual for your WLAN adaptor. For large networks, please seek the advice of your network administrator. - 37 - 9 - WLAN network 1 Plug your WLAN USB key into the USB port of your machine. Configure your network Creating or rejoining a network Before attempting to use a WLAN adaptor on your machine, you must enter the parameters that will allow a WLAN network to recognise your machine. On your machine you will find simple instructions that guide you step by step through the set-up of your network. Just follow them! 􀀙 281 - SETUP / WLAN / CONFIG. ASS. 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select CONFIG. ASS. using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select NEW NETWORK using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 SSID appears on the screen, enter the name of your network using the numerical keypad, pressing the keys one after the other until you obtain the name you want (32 characters maximum) and confirm with OK. 6 AD-HOC MODE or INFRA. MODE appear on the screen. Go back to the beginning of the chapter and make your choice. Select one of these modes and confirm with OK. - If you choose AD-HOC mode, the sub-menu CHANNEL appears, enter a figure between 1 and 13 and confirm with OK. 7 WITHOUT SECURITY or WITH SECURITY appear on the screen. Select the option you want and confirm with OK. - If you choose WITH SECURITY the sub-menu WEP KEY 1 appears, enter the key number (1 to 4 maximum) that you are using on your network. 8 IP CONF.: MANU or IP CONF.: AUTO appear on the screen. If you choose to set up the system manually, go to the next paragraph and enter the parameters IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK and GATEWAY. 9 At the end of this procedure, you return to the main menu of CONFIG. ASS. 10 Exit this menu by pressing the key. Referring to or changing your network parameters Each of the parameters of your network may be changed as your network develops. 􀀙 2822 - SETUP / WLAN / PARAMETERS / IP ADDRESS 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select PARAMETERS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select IP ADDRESS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. Your machine’s network radio adaptor transmits data using the radio protocol IEEE 802.11g; it can also be incorporated into an existing IEEE 802.11b network. When connecting to your machine, only use the approved adaptor. Other transmitting or receiving adaptors may damage your device. Irrespective of whether you use your machine in an infrastructure or ad-hoc network, you must set up certain network and security parameters (for example, the Service-Set-ID (SSID) and the WEP key). These must match the network’s specifications. We recommend that the settings of your WLAN network should only be changed by a person with a good knowledge of the configuration of your computer. If you choose and exisiting network, steps 5 and 6 ( and possibly 7) are carried out automatically. The WEP key number may be configured in the menu: 􀀙 29 - SETUP / TECHNICALS / WEP KEYS NBR - 38 - 8 - WLAN network 5 The dumber of your IP address will appear in the format 000.000.000.000. Enter the new IP address for your machine in the format displayed and confirm with OK. 6 Exit this menu by pressing the key. 􀀙 2823 - SETUP / WLAN / PARAMETERS / SUBNET MASK 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select PARAMETERS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select SUBNET MASK using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 The number of your subnet mask will appear in the format 000.000.000.000. Enter the new submask of your machine in the format displayed and confirm with OK. 6 Exit this menu by pressing the key. 􀀙 2824 - SETUP / WLAN / PARAMETERS / GATEWAY 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select PARAMETERS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select GATEWAY using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 The number of your gateway will appear in the format 000.000.000.000. Enter the new gateway for your machine in the format displayed and confirm with OK. 6 Exit this menu by pressing the key. 􀀙 2825 - SETUP /WLAN / PARAMETERS / SSID 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select PARAMETERS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select SSID using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 The name of your network will appear on the screen. Enter the new name of your network and confirm with OK. 6 Exit this menu by pressing the key. 􀀙 2826 - SETUP / WLAN / PARAMETERS / MODE 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select PARAMETERS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select MODE using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 The symbol >>, tells you that your network is in active mode. 6 Select one of the modes and confirm with OK. - If you choose the AD-HOC MODE, the submenu CHANNEL will appear; enter a number between 1 and 13 and confirm with OK. 7 Exit this menu by pressing the key. 􀀙 2827 - SETUP / WLAN / PARAMETERS / SECURITY This parameter allows you to make your network secure. 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select PARAMETERS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select SECURITY using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 Choose WITH or WITHOUT and confirm by OK. If you choose WITH, enter a password: - In a 64 bit security configuration, the password must contain five characters exactly. - In a 128 bit security configuration, the password must contain 13 characters exactly. 6 Exit this menu by pressing the key. 􀀙 2828 - SETUP / WLAN / PARAMETERS / HOSTNAME In an AD-HOC network, the devices communicate directly with each other without passing through an access point. The speed of communication across the whole AD-HOC radio network is as fast as the weakest connection in the network. The speed of communication is also dependent on spatial distance between transmitter and receiver, as well as the number of barriers, such as walls or ceilings. You may also enter the password using the hexadecimal system, if this is the case: - For a 64 bit security configuration, the password must contain exactly 10 hexadecimal characters. - For a 128 bit security configuration, the password must contain exactly 26 hexadecimal characters. - 39 - 9 - WLAN network The machine name allows you to identify your machine on the network via a PC (for example with the name "PRINTNETWORK- 1"). 1 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 2 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select PARAMETERS using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select HOSTNAME using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 Type in the desired name (15 characters maximum) and confirm with OK. 6 Exit this menu by pressing the key. Once your connection has been set up, you must install the network printer driver "Laser Pro LL Network" on your PC so that you can print your documents. Refer to the paragraph Network connection, page 48. An example of how an AD-HOC network may be set up An example of how to configure an Ad-hoc network without security protection using the following parameters: • network name: "house" • radio type: "ad-hoc" • channel: "1" • PC’s IP address: "169.254.0.1" • PC’s subnetwork mask: "255.255.0.0" • PC’s gateway: "0.0.0.0" • IP address of the multifunction machine: "169.254.0.2" • subnetwork mask of the multifunction machine: "255.255.0.0" • multifunction machine’s gateway: "0.0.0.0" Setting up a multifunction machine 1 Plug the WLAN USB key into the USB connector of the multifunction machine. 2 Type in 􀀙, select the menu SETUP using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 3 Select WLAN using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 4 Select CONFIG. ASS. using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 5 Select NEW NETWORK using the keys 􀀙 or 􀀘 and confirm with OK. 6 SSID appears on the screen, enter "house" using the numerical keypad and confirm with OK. 7 Select the mode AD-HOC MODE and confirm with OK. 8 Enter "1" in the field CHANNEL and confirm with OK. 9 Select WITHOUT SECURITY and confirm with OK. 10 Select IP CONF.: MANU and confirm with OK. 11 Enter "169.254.0.2" in the field IP ADDRESS and confirm with OK. 12 Enter "255.255.0.0" in the field SUBNET MASK and confirm with OK. 13 Enter "0.0.0.0" in the field GATEWAY and confirm with OK. 14 At the end of this process, you return to the main menu of ASS. CONFIG. 15 Exit this menu by pressing the key. Once the network has been set up, the LED of the WLAN USB key should be on. You must now set up the PC. Setting up the PC For this section, refer to the instructions supplied by the manufacturer of the WLAN USB key to help you to find and join the "house" network. 1 You may need to install the software for the WLAN USB key on the PC, if this has not already been done. 2 Plug WLAN USB key into a USB port on the PC. 3 Use the software of the WLAN USB key to detect the network. 4 Join the network "house" once this has been detected. 5 Now set up the WLAN network connection of your PC. To do this, you must configure the element Protocol Internet (TCP/IP) for the WLAN connection that has been created. If this element is set up in such a way as to obtain an IP address automatically, you must change it to manual mode to set up the TCP/IP address ("169.254.0.1" in our example), the subnet mask ("255.255.0.0" in our example) and the default gateway ("0.0.0.0" in our example). 6 Enter OK. To guide you through this stage, refer to the paragraph “Setting the parameters for a connection” in the manufacturer’s instructions. - 40 - 10 - Message service (model network) Message service (model network) Your terminal lets you send and receive emails via your local network. To do so, you must connect your terminal to a local network. You must also configure the message service settings. Information required to set up message service Your network administrator must provide you the following elements: • message service identifier • message service password • email address • servers’identifiers (SMTP, POP, DNS1 and DNS2) Configuring initialisation parameters 􀀙91 - E-MAIL / SUPPLIER 1 Select the LOCAL NETWORK from the list and confirm with OK. 􀀙921 - E-MAIL / INIT ETHERNET / MESS. SERV 1 Enter Email Identifier, press OK. 2 Enter Email Password, press OK. 3 Enter E-mail Adr, press OK. Access to servers parameters 􀀙922 - E-MAIL / INIT ETHERNET / SERVERS 1 Enter Smtp, press OK. 2 Enter Pop3, press OK. 3 Enter Dns 1 (primary), press OK. 4 Enter Dns 2 (secondary), press OK. Access to SMTP authentification parameters 􀀙923- E-MAIL / INIT ETHERNET / SMTP AUTHENT. 1 In the ACTIVATION menu, select WITH to activate SMTP authentification then validate with OK key. 2 In the SETTINGS menu, select ID.MESS.SERV to keep the same identification parameters as in the messaging service or AUTHENT. SPEC. to define other identification parameters, then validate by pressing OK key. 3 When you select AUTHENT. SPEC, carry out the two following operations: 4 Enter the IDENTIFIER then validate with OK key. 5 Enter the PASSWORD then validate with OK key. Sending an E-Mail 1 Place the document to be copied in the automatic document feeder, face printed on the top. or Place the document to be copied face down on the glass, respecting the indications around the glass. 2 Enter the addressee’s E-mail address or choose your dialling mode. 3 Enter the address of who you want to receive a copy of the document (CC:), and press OK to confirm. 4 Enter the object for mail (80 characters max.) and press OK. 5 Enter the text with the alphabetical keypad (100 lines of 80 characters) and confirm with OK. To go to the next line, use key . 6 Press OK to confirm. 7 Select B&W SCAN to send a black and white document or COLOUR SCAN to send a color document, and validate with OK key (this setting can be changed at any time during the send procedure, using the colour key). 8 Enter the name of the attachment and validate with OK key. 9 If necessary, change the attachment format: PDF or IMAGE and validate with OK key. 10 If you have started to scan with the flat scanner, the unit will scan the other pages. Put your second page to scan, select NEXT and validate with OK. 11 Press OK to confirm. 12 Set contrast and resolution if necessary. The document is scanned and the mail sent to memory. It will be sent during the next connection to the local network. Sending an E-mail text You can send a typed message to an E-mail mailbox. Access through the menu. : 􀀙95 - E-MAIL /SEND EMAIL 1 Enter the addressee’s E-mail address or choose your dialling mode. 2 Enter the address of who you want to receive a copy of the document (CC:), and press OK to confirm. 3 Enter the object for mail (80 characters max.) and press OK. 4 Enter the text with the alphabetical keypad (100 lines of 80 characters) and confirm with OK. To go to the next line, use key . Choosing No Access disables access to local network functions. - 41 - 10 - Message service (model network) 5 Press OK to confirm. The mail is memorised and will be sent at the next connection to the local network. Scan to FTP The scan to FTP function enables you to put your TIFF, JPEG and PDF files in an FTP server, for example, for archiving. To connect to the FTP server, you must know the name of the FTP user and the PASSWORD. When sending files, the machine connects to the FTP server using the defined connection parameters. Simply put the file in an FTP server 1 Place the document to be copied in the automatic document feeder, face printed on the top. or Place the document to be copied face down on the glass, respecting the indications around the glass. 2 Press key SCAN. A choice screen is displayed. 3 Select Scan to FTP with keys 􀀘 or 􀀙 then press OK key OK. 4 Enter the FTP address of the server or select it from the directory by pressing the key. 5 Enter the name of the FTP user (operation prohibited when the address is in the directory). 6 Enter the password of the FTP user (operation not necessary when the address is selected in the directory). 7 Validate with OK key. 8 Select B&W SCAN to send a document in black and white or COLOUR SCAN to send a document in colour. Validate with OK key (this setting may be changed at any time during the send procedure with the colour key). 9 Enter the name of the attachment and validate with OK key. 10 If necessary, change the attachment format: PDF or IMAGE and validate with OK key. If you have started to scan with the flat scanner, the unit will scan the other pages. Put your second page to scan, select NEXT and validate with OK. Connection configuration The settings are divided into several categories: • the standard settings define the connection type and frequency to the local network as well as the transmission type for your documents, • the E-mail sorting defines treatment for all stored Email messages received. Standard settings Your machine has two types of settings that let you define: • The type and frequency of the connection to your ISP. • Type of transmission over the Internet. At any moment you may print the settings of your machine to know their status. Selecting the connection type 􀀙941 - E-MAIL / SETTINGS / CONNEC. TYPE 1 Select one of the connection options among Set Times, Periodic or On Demand and press OK to confirm. Selecting the transmission type 􀀙942 - E-MAIL / SETTINGS / SEND TYPE 1 Select one of the send options Immediate or During cnx then press OK to validate. Modifying the connection period (Periodic type) 􀀙943 - E-MAIL / SETTINGS / PERIOD 1 With the Periodic mode, enter the new connection period by means of the numerical keypad (between 00:01 am and 11:59 pm) and press OK to confirm. A local network connection will be established every three hours (default value). SET TIMES an Internet connection is established every day at 9:00 am, 12:30 am and 5:00 pma. a. To avoid Internet access saturation, the automatic connection will occur in reality 12 minutes, give or take, around the requested time. PERIODIC an Internet connection is established every 3 hours1 (default value). ON DEMAND an Internet connection is established at your request by IMMED. ACCESS. IMMEDIATE document transmission will occur immediately at each transmission request. DURING CONNECTIONS transmissions will only occur at programmed connections of SET TIMES or PERIODIC TYPE. - 42 - 10 - Message service (model network) Modifying the connection time(s) (Set Times type) 􀀙943 - E-MAIL / SETTINGS / TIME STTINGS 1 After selecting the Set Times mode, use the 􀀘 and 􀀙 keys to place the cursor under the figure to be modified. Enter the new connection time(s) by means of the numeric keypad (value between 00:01 and 23:59) and validate with the OK key. Selecting the print mode for the deposit notice 􀀙944 - E-MAIL / SETTINGS / DEPOSIT NOTICE 1 Select one of the deposit notice options With, Without, Always or On Error and press OK to confirm. Printing the Internet settings 􀀙946 - E-MAIL / SETTINGS / PRINT The Internet settings are printed. These settings may also be printed together with all the other settings of your machine (refer to paragraph Printing the logs, page 30). Mail sorting This function lets you choose the mode for all Internet documents stored in your mail box. You have three choices:. Vous avez le choix entre trois possibilités : • F@x only, lets you poll and print E-Mails in your machine. • PC only, lets you keep your E-Mails in you mailbox for later use with a computer (no E-Mail poll), • PC share lets you: - if your PC and fax have two different addresses, transfer all mails or only those with attachments to a PC, - if your PC and fax share the same address, use the fax as a printer for E-Mails for the PC. 􀀙 96 - E-MAIL / SORT MESSAGES F@X Only mode 1 Select option F@x only and press OK to confirm. All E-Mails are polled and printed. PC Only mode 1 Select option PC only and press OK to confirm. The E-mails are neither polled nor printed and they may be used with a computer. At each connection, the number of E-mails in your mailbox is displayed on the screen. PC share mode 1 Select option PC share and press OK to confirm. You may choose to transfer your E-mails to a PC or use the fax as an E-mail printer. To transfer the E-Mails to a PC: 2 Select option With PC Trans. and press OK to confirm. 3 Enter the E-Mail address of the computer you wish to transfer your E-Mail and press OK to confirm. 4 Select your option from the table below and press OK to confirm. To use the fax as an E-Mail printer: 1 Select option W/O PC Trans and press OK to confirm. 2 Select your option from the table below and validate with OK. At each connection, the number of E-mails still present in your mailbox are displayed on the screen. Menu Description SEND ALL MAILS All E-Mails are sent to the PC. UNUSABLE ATTAC The fax machine polls and prints the usable E-mails and transfers to the PC mailbox all the E-mails containing attachments it cannot use. Menu Description DELETE MAILS The E-mails opened and read by the fax (w/o attachment) are erased after the fax has printed. SAVE MAILS The E-mails opened and read by the fax are not erased. - 43 - 11 - USB memory key USB memory key You can connect a USB memory Key on the front side of your machine. The files stored in TXT, TIFF and JPEG formats will be analysed and you will be able to use the following actions: - print the stored files contained in your USB memory key1, - delete the files contained in your USB memory key, - run an analysis on the contents of the inserted USB memory key, - digitalise a document on your USB memory key, - fax archiving (see section Rerouting fax messages to a USB memory key, page 20). Use of the USB memory key Print your documents You can print the stored files or a list of the files located in the USB memory key. Print the list of files located in the key To print the list of files located in the key: 􀀙 01 - MEDIA / PRINT DOC. / LIST 1 Insert the USB memory key on the front side of the machine respecting theinsertion way. MEDIA ANALYSIS appears on the screen. 2 Select PRINT DOC. with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. 3 Select LIST with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. 4 The list is shown in a table with the following information: - the analyzed files are indexed in an incremental 1 by 1 order, - the files name with their extension, - the date of the files last save, - the files size in Kbytes. Print the files located in the key To print the files located in the key: 􀀙 01 - MEDIA / PRINT DOC. / FILE 1 Insert the USB memory key on the front side of the machine respecting the way of insertion. MEDIA ANALYSIS appears on the screen. 2 Select PRINT DOC. with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. 3 Select FILE with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. 4 You have three possibilities to print your files: - ALL, to print all the files located in the USB memory key. Select ALL with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. The printing is started automatically. - SERIES, to print a series of files located in the USB memory key. Select SERIES with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. FIRST FILE and the first indexed file appears on the screen. Select with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons the first file of the series to print and confirm with OK. A star (􀃄) appears on the left side of the file. LAST FILE appears on the screen. Select with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons the last file of the series to print and confirm with OK. Press the button. COPIES NUMBER appears on the screen, enter the desired number of copies with the digital keypad and confirm with OK. Select the printing format: A4 or 10x15 and confirm with OK. Select the printing format: THICK or NORMAL and confirm with OK to start printing. 1. It may be possible that some TIFF files of your USB memory key cannot be printed due to data format limitation. Always respect the insertion way when you connect a USB memory key to the machine. Do not disconnect your USB memory key while the machine is reading its contents or writing contents. The printing is not possible on A5 paper format. - 44 - 11 - USB memory key - SELECTION, to print one or several files located in the USB memory key. Select with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons the file to print and confirm with OK. A star (􀃄) appears on the left side of the file. Repeat this step for each file you want to print. Press the button. COPIES NUMBER appears on the screen, enter the desired number of copies with the digital keypad and confirm with OK. Select the printing format: A4 or 10x15 and confirm with OK. Select the printing format: THICK or NORMAL and confirm with OK to start printing. 5 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Delete your files located in the key You can delete files located in your USB memory key. 􀀙 06 - MEDIA / DELETE / MANUAL 1 Insert your USB memory key on the front side of your machine respecting the way of insertion. MEDIA ANALYSIS appears on the screen. 2 Select DELETE with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. 3 Select MANUAL with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. 4 You have three possibilities to delete your files: - ALL, to delete all the files located in the USB memory key. Select ALL with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. You come back to the previous menu. - SERIE, to delete a series of files located in the USB memory key. Select SERIE with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons and confirm with OK. FIRST FILE and the first indexed file appears on the screen. Select with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons the first file of the series to delete and confirm with OK. A star (􀃄) appears on the left of the file. LAST FILE appears on the screen, select with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons the last file of teh series to delete and confirm with OK. A star (􀃄) appears on the left side of the file. Press the button. You come back to the previous menu. - SELECTION, to delete only one or several files located in the USB memory key. Select with the 􀀙 or 􀀘 buttons the file to delete and confirm with OK. A star (􀃄) appears on the left side of the file. Repeat this step for each file you want to delete. Press the button. You come back to the previous menu. 5 Quit this menu by pressing the button. Analyse the USB memory key content After a period of inactivity, your machine will return to the main menu. To view the USB memory key again please proceed as follows: 􀀙 07 - MEDIA / MEDIA ANALYSIS 1 Press on 􀀙, enter 07 with the keyboard. 2 The USB memory key analysis is started. 3 You can print or delete the detected files located in your USB memory key. Refer to the previous chapters. Save a document on a USB memory key This function allows you to digitise and save a document directly in the folder SCAN on a USB memory key. The folder SCAN is created by the application. 1 Place the document to be copied face down on the glass. 2 Insert the USB memory key in the USB connector of your multifunction device. The USB memory key analysis is started. When the analysis is finished, the MEDIA menu is displayed. 3 Select SCAN TO with the 􀀘 or 􀀙 buttons then confirm with the OK button. Before digitalising a document, make sure that your USB memory key has sufficient disk space. If not, you can: • delete manually the files, see section Delete your files located in the key, page 44, or • activate the option that deletes automatically the oldest files located in the SCAN folder, see section Activate/ deactivate file automatic deletion on a USB memory key, page 45. - 45 - 11 - USB memory key 4 Choose the COLOUR between BLACK&WHITE and COLOUR with the 􀀘 or 􀀙 buttons and the button OK. 5 With the alphanumeric keyboard, give a name to the scan file (up to 20 characters) and confirm with OK. 6 Choose the scan format between IMAGE and PDF, and confirm to start the scan and the recording of the document. IMAGE allows to have the same kind of file as a photo. PDF is a format for the digital documents creation. The beginning button immediately starts the scan and sends a file to the support with the parameters defined in the analysis format. Activate/deactivate file automatic deletion on a USB memory key This option, when activated, deletes automatically the oldest files in the folder SCAN on the USB memory key, in order to save a new digitalised document when the disk space is insufficient. To activate this option, proceed as follows : 􀀙 0621 - MEDIA / DELETE / AUTOMATIC/ SCAN MODE 1 Select WITH with the 􀀘 or 􀀙 buttons then confirm with the OK button. To deactivate this option, proceed as follows : 􀀙 0621 - MEDIA / DELETE / AUTOMATIC/ SCAN MODE 1 Select WITHOUT with the 􀀘 or 􀀙 buttons then confirm with the OK button. You can also access this function in two other ways: • by pressing the SCAN button of the machine deck then by selecting SCAN-TOMEDIA. • By pressing the 􀀙 button from the screen saver then by typing 03 on the digital keyboard. With the IMAGE format, if you have selected: • BLACK&WHITE, the picture will be saved in TIFF format. • COLOUR, the picture will be saved in JPEG format. You can choose the image resolution that will be digitized to the USB memory key; the default resolution is DRAFT. Press the button several times and select the resolution you require • Scanning in BLACK&WHITE : - Icon: text resolution. - Icon: photo resolution. - Icon: auto resolution. • Scanning in COLOUR : - Icon: text resolution. - Icon: auto resolution. This option is ineffective when the SCAN folder is empty and the USB memory key is full. You must then delete manually the files in order to free up disk space, see section Delete your files located in the key, page 44. - 46 - 11 - PC Features PC Features Introduction The Companion Suite Pro software allows the connection of a personal computer with a compatible multifunction machine. From the PC, you can: - manage the multifunction machine, allowing you to set it up according to your needs, - print your documents on the multifunction machine from your usual applications, - scan colour, grey scale or black and white documents and edit them on your PC, or process them into text using the character recognition software (OCR), Configuration requirements The minimum configuration requirements for your personal computer are: Supported operation systems: - Windows 98SE, - Windows Millennium, - Windows 2000 with at least Service Pack 3, - Windows XP (Home and Pro), - Windows Vista 32-bit. Processor: - 500 MHz for Windows 98SE, - 800 MHz for Windows Me or 2000, - 1 GHz for Windows XP (Home and Pro), - 1 GHz for Windows Vista 32-bit. A CD-ROM drive A free USB port 600 Mbytes of available disk space for the installation RAM memory: - 128 Mbytes minimum for Windows 98, Me, and 2000, - 192 Mbytes minimum for Windows XP (Home and Pro). - 1 GByte for Windows Vista 32-bit. Installation Install the software on your PC Turn your PC on. Open an ADMINISTRATOR account session unless working in 98SE and ME environments. 1 Open the CD-ROM drive, insert the installation CDROM and close the drive. 2 An installation procedure is automatically run (Auto run). 3 A screen titled COMPANION SUITE PRO LL appears. This screen allows you to install and uninstall the software, access the product's user guides or browse the CD-ROM contents. 4 Place your cursor on PRODUCT INSTALLATION and confirm with left-click of the mouse. 5 The Products Installation screen appears. Place your cursor on FULL and confirm by left-click with the mouse. The multifonction machine components only appear if your Windows Installer version is older than 2.0. The installation resumes, a progress bar appears. You can stop the program's installation by clicking on the STOP THE INSTALL button. After search and analysis of the PC components and the multifunction machine's components, you need to restart your PC for the modifications to take effect. Click on the OK button. The FULL installation copies on your hard disk the software required for the good execution of the Companion Suite Pro kit, which is: - Companion Suite Pro (machine management software, printer drivers, scanner, ...), - Adobe Acrobat Reader, - PaperPort (OS > Windows 2000). You may already be the owner of a version of the software available in the installation CDROM. In this case use the CUSTOM installation, select the software that you want to install on your hard drive and confirm your choice. - 47 - 11 - PC Features 6 After restart, the InstallShield Wizard screen shows the progress of the assistant preparation. You can stop the procedure at any time by clicking on the CANCEL button. 7 The welcome screen appears. 8 Click on the NEXT button to launch the installation of the COMPANION SUITE PRO kit on your PC. 9 To continue, you need to accept the proposed license agreement. 10 Click on the YES button. 11 Click on the NEXT button. 12 The final installation is ready to be executed. 13 Click on the INSTALL button. 14 A screen informs you of the installation progress. 15 The Companion Suite Pro software is installed on your PC. 16 Click on the CONTINUE button to copy the utilities and PaperPort SE software that come along with the kit. 17 At the end of the installation, you need to restart your PC to update the system files. - 48 - 11 - PC Features 18 Select your choice and click on the FINISH button. 19 Your "Companion Suite Pro" kit is successfully installed on your PC. You can start the multifunction machine's management software from the menu START > PROGRAMS > COMPANION SUITE > COMPANION SUITE PRO LL > MF DIRECTOR or by clicking on the icon MF DIRECTOR located on your desktop. Connections Make sure that your multifunction machine is powered off. USB Connection The connection between the PC and the machine requires a USB 2.0 shielded cable no more than 3 meters long. 1 Locate your USB cable connectors and connect as shown below on the picture. 2 Power on your multifunction machine. The ADD HARDWARE assistant window appears. 3 Click on the NEXT button to finish the installation. 4 Select FIND THE APPROPRIATE DRIVER FOR MY HARDWARE (RECOMMENDED). Click on the NEXT button. 5 Select the location where the system has to look for the driver. Only the CD-ROM DRIVES checkbox has to be ticked. Click on the NEXT button. The search takes a few moments. 6 A window informs you that the driver has been located. Click on the NEXT button. 7 A screen informs you that the XML interface software has been installed. Click on the FINISH button. The ADD HARDWARE assistant window appears. 8 Click on the NEXT button. 9 Select FIND THE APPROPRIATE DRIVER FOR MY HARDWARE (RECOMMENDED). Click on the NEXT button. 10 Select the location where the system shall look for the driver. Only the CD-ROM DRIVES checkbox has to be ticked. Click on the NEXT button. The search takes a few moments. 11 A window informs that the driver has been located. Click on the NEXT button. 12 A screen informs you that the COMPANION SUITE PRO F@X ACTIVITIES software has been installed. Click on the FINISH button. You can now use the multifunction machine to print or scan your documents. Network connection You may connect your multifunction terminal to an Ethernet or a wireless network (model network only). 1 Run the MF Director application by clicking on the icon located on your desktop or from the menu START > PROGRAMS > COMPANION SUITE > COMPANION SUITE PRO LL > ADD PRINTER. 2 Click on the NEXT button to run the installation procedure. It is possible to add LAN printers without installing the Companion Suite Pro software on Windows 2000, XP, and Vista. From the Windows menu Start > Parameters > Printers and faxes, select "Add Printer" and follow the instructions on screen. It is recommended to install the Companion Suite Pro software first and then to connect the USB cable to your machine. If you connect the USB cable before installing the Companion Suite Pro software the recognition system (plug and play) identifies automatically that new hardware has been added. To start your machine drivers installation, follow the instructions on screen. If a window asking about the location of the drivers pops up, then indicate the installation CD-ROM. 0 The Companion Suite Pro LL software shall be installed to perform this operation. - 49 - 11 - PC Features 3 The next screen shows the list of compatible hardware found on the network. You can make another search on the network by clicking on the REFRESH button. Remark: A hardware device may not appear in the list in which case click on the NOT IN THE LIST button. The next window appears. Type the IP address or the NetBIOS name of the hardware that you wish to add. You can test the connection between the PC and the hardware by clicking on the TEST button. Click on the OK button. 4 Select what you wish to add from the hardware list. Click on the NEXT button. 5 For the model network, with a LAN connection, you must choose one printer among the list. Nota: the PCL printer is more fast in the most case. 6 The next window lists the different features of the printer that are about to be installed. Click on the NEXT button. 7 The window indicating that the installation procedure was successful pops up. Click on the FINISH button. Uninstall the software from your PC Run the programs removal from the menu START > PROGRAMS > COMPANION SUITE > COMPANION SUITE PRO LL > UNINSTALL. 1 A preparation screen appears. 2 Select REMOVE and confirm your choice by clicking on the NEXT button. 3 A confirmation screen appears. Click on OK button to continue the COMPANION SUITE PRO LL program removal. 4 A preparation screen appears. You can cancel the removal by clicking on CANCEL. - 50 - 11 - PC Features 5 You need to restart your system at the end of the procedure. Close all open programs, select YES, I WANT TO RESTART MY COMPUTER NOW and click on the FINISH button. Multifunction Terminal's Supervision The software that you have installed contains two multifunction machine management applications, MF DIRECTOR and MF MONITOR, which allow you to: - check whether the multifunction machine is connected to your PC, - monitor the multifunction machine activitie, - monitor the status of the multifunction machine consumables from the PC, - quickly access the graphic editor applications, OCR etc. To manage the multifunction machine, run the MF Director application by clicking on the icon located on your desktop or from the menu START > PROGRAMS > COMPANION SUITE > COMPANION SUITE PRO LL > MF DIRECTOR. Checking the connection between the PC and the multifunction machine To check if the connection between the devices is good, run the MF MONITOR software from the icon located on the desktop and check that the same information is displayed on the multifunction machine (for instance the date). MF Director This graphical Interface allows you to run the utilities and the software to manage your multifunction machine. Graphical presentation Run the application by clicking on the MF Director icon located on your desktop or from the menu START > PROGRAMS > COMPANION SUITE > COMPANION SUITE PRO LL > MF DIRECTOR. By default, MF DIRECTOR is displayed with dark blue rounded shape. You can modify its shape and color by right-clicking with the mouse. Utilities and applications activation The COMPANION SUITE PRO graphical interface allows you to run the following utilities and software: - get HELP from the current documentation, - run the PaperPort software (Doc Manager). To run a software or utility contained in the COMPANION SUITE PRO kit, place the cursor on it and left-click with the mouse. - 51 - 11 - PC Features MF Monitor Graphical presentation Run the application by clicking on the MF Monitor icon located on your desktop or from the menu START > PROGRAMS > COMPANION SUITE > COMPANION SUITE PRO LL > COMPANION MONITOR. From this screen you can monitor the information or configure your multifunction machine from the tabs: - COMPANION: Presents the multifunction machine screen. - CONSUMABLES: Displays the consumables status. - SCAN TO: Scan Mode and Resolution parameters setup, these parameters will be taken into account when clicking on the SCAN button from the machine. Display the consumable status The following information will be available from the Consumables tab: - current consumables status, - number of printed pages, - number of scanned pages. Scan To The setup of this tab, becomes the default setup for the scanner. Remark: The function SCAN TO can only be used if the application is running. If this is not the case, activate it. 1 Select the Scan To tab. 2 Select one of the possible choices: - colour, - grayscale, - black and white. 3 Select the scanner resolution (72 dpi to 4800 dpi). 4 Confirm your choices by clicking on the OK button. Companion Suite Pro LL functionalities Document analysis The document analysis can be carried out in two ways: • either by the SCAN TO function (application accessible from the MF Director window or from the SCAN button from the machine), • or directly from a TWAIN standard compatible application. - 52 - 11 - PC Features Analysis with Scan To Run the application by clicking on the MF Director icon located on your desktop or from the menu START > PROGRAMS > COMPANION SUITE > COMPANION SUITE PRO LL > MF DIRECTOR. 1 Left-click with the mouse on the SCAN TO graphical image or click the SCAN button from your machine. 2 You can follow the ongoing digitisation on a screen. 3 At the end of the digitisation, the scanned picture appears in the PaperPort window. Analysis from a TWAIN compatible software 1 Run the picture editor application and then run the acquisition command. The document analysis window appears. 2 Setup the parameters (contrast, resolution, ...) before starting the digitisation. 3 Once the document is digitised, you can archive it or edit it. Character recognition software (OCR) The character recognition function allows to create a usable data file for desktop applications from a hardcopy document or from a picture. The character recognition only works for printed characters, such as printer outputs or typed text. Nevertheless you can request for a handwritten text block to be kept intact (a signature for instance) by outlining it. Given your machine environment and the character recognition from your machine, the OCR is done with a Drag&drop of a document from the PaperPort to the Notepad icon. Printing You have the possibility to print your documents via the USB connection or the Wifi connection. During the installation of the software, the LASER PRO LL printer driver will be installed automatically onto your pc. This will allow you to print your documents on the machine via the USB connection. The LASER PRO LL NETWORK printer driver allows to print via the wireless connection. This driver is installed when you add a network printer. Printing with the multifunction machine To print a document with the machine from your PC is like printing a document in Windows (use the PRINT command from the FILE menu of the currently open application on the screen). Select the LASER PRO LL printer to print via the USB connection or the LASER PRO LL NETWORK printer to print via the Wifi connection. If the PaperPort software is not installed on your hard drive, the scanned picture will appear on your desktop in TIFF format. For more details about the usage of this software, check the on-line help of the product. The LASER PRO LL printer becomes the default printer when the Companion Suite Pro software is installed. - 53 - 11 - PC Features Address book The address book enables you to store the numbers of the contacts you call the most frequently. The purpose of this function is to facilitate dialing your contact’s number when you want to send an SMS or fax. If you want, you can print the list of numbers stored in the Directory. You also have the possibility of creating groups of contacts from the Address book. Like this, you can group together all contacts from, for example, a given company or the same service, etc, to which you frequently send common documents. Add a contact to the terminal address book 1 Click on the link ADDRESS BOOK of the window MF DIRECTOR. The address book is displayed on the screen. 2 Select the terminal address book. 3 Click on NEW and select CONTACT in the displayed menu. The input window for the contact data is displayed.. 4 Enter the contact name as well as the fax or GSM telephone number, the fax transmission rate with this person, the associated quick dial key, the E-mail address and the default transmission format (Pdf or Image). Click on OK. The new contact is added to the list. Add a group to the terminal address book 1 Click the link ADDRESS BOOK of the window MF DIRECTOR. 2 Select the terminal address book. 3 Click NEW and select GROUP in the displayed menu. 4 Enter the name of the group. The group may consist of contacts from the address book or new contacts. 1st case: group members are from the address book. Click SELECT THE MEMBERS. The selection window is displayed. Select a contact or a group in the zone ADDRESS BOOK, click on (to add a contact to the group you can also double click on it). Click on OK. 2nd case: adding new contacts. Click on NEW then add the personal data of the new contact, as in the procedure for adding a contact. 5 As soon as the group is complete, click on OK. The new group is added to the list. - 54 - 11 - PC Features Manage the address book When you are working in the directory, you can perform different operations: - print a list of contacts in your address book, - delete a contact or a group in your address book, - search for a contact or a group of contacts in the address book using the first letters of the name, - check the datasheet of a contact or a group in order to modify it. Modify the information related to a contact 1 Select the contact whose data you want to modify, using the mouse. 2 Click on PROPERTIES. 3 Make the necessary changes in the window ADDRESS BOOK. 4 Click on OK. Modify a group 1 Select the group in the address book list. 2 Cllick on PROPERTIES. 3 Make the necessary changes. 4 Click on OK. Delete a contact or a group from the address book 1 Select the name of the contact or the name of the group you want to delete, using the mouse. 2 Click on DELETE. Print the address book 1 Click on PRINT. The list of the address book is printed on the terminal (if no contact is selected). Import or export a directory Import a directory Importing a directory makes it possible to exchange address book entries between two devices without having to enter contacts one by one manually. Directories can be imported from files in EAB format. EAB files are automatically generated during export. 1 Select IMPORT in the menu FILE of the window ADDRESS BOOK. 2 Select the file to import, click on OPEN. Save your address book This operation lets you save your address book to a file in EAB format. 1 Select EXPORT in the menu FILE of the window ADDRESS BOOK. 2 Enter the name of the file and select the destination directory, then click on SAVE. Fax communications The fax communication enables you to: - send documents as faxes from one of the scanners of your terminal, from the hard disk or from the screen of your PC, - to receive fax documents, - to monitor communications through various services: the inbox, the outbox, the sent items, the outbox log and the inbox log. Parameters are available to modify the way your terminal works with regard to fax communications. You can modify these parameters to adapt the fax communications to your requirements. For this procedure, refer to paragraph Fax parameters, page 57. Presentation of the Fax window When a contact is deleted from the directory, it is automatically deleted from any group in which it may be included. Item Action 1 Create a new fax to send. 2 Delete a fax using one of the fax manager directories. Except for directories SENT LOG and RECEPTION LOG for which the effect of this command is to delete the entire log 3 Print a fax from one of the Fax manager directories. 4 Display a fax with the Viewer. 5 Access to the address book. 123456789 - 55 - 11 - PC Features Send a fax Send a fax from the hard disk or the terminal 1 Click the icon of the window MF DIRECTOR. 2 Click NEW then click FAX. 3 Select no zone SOURCES, SCANNER if your document is in paper format or MEMORY if the document is a computer file located on your hard disk (this file must be in TIFF or FAX format). 4 To send your fax to a contact, enter his number in the field RECIPIENTS and click on or select a contact (or group) from one of the directories in the field ADDRESS BOOK and click on the button . Repeat this operation as many times as necessary (use the button to delete a contact from the list of contacts). 5 If necessary, adjust the advanced options (send later and resolution) in the tab ADVANCED OPTIONS. 6 To add a cover sheet, select the tab COVER PAGE then click the box WITH THE COVER PAGE. Select the cover sheet you want to add from the pop-down menu, or create a new one. For more information, refer to paragraph Cover sheet, page 58. 7 Click OK to send your fax to all contacts in your list of contacts. Your send request can then be checked, if necessary, in the outbox. Send a fax from application This method is used to directly send a document you have created using a desktop software without printing it beforehand. 1 From your desktop software, select FILE > PRINT. 2 Select the printer COMPANION SUITE FAX and click OK. The fax oubox window is displayed. 6 Stop sending a fax (only enabled for the outbox). 7 Display all faxes in the selected directory in the Fax manager. 8 Fax preview. 9 Fax manager directories. Item Action - 56 - 11 - PC Features 3 To send your fax to a contact, enter his number in the field RECIPIENTS and click the button or select a contact (or a group) from one of the directories in the field ADDRESS BOOK and click the button . Repeat this operation as many times as necessary (use the button Erase to delete a contact from the list of contacts). 4 If necessary, adjust the advanced options (send later and resolution) in the tab ADVANCED OPTIONS. 5 To add a cover sheet, select the tab COVER PAGE then click the box WITH THE COVER PAGE. Select the cover sheet you want to add from the pop-down menu, or create a new one. For more information, refer to paragraph Cover sheet, page 58. 6 Click OK to send your fax to all contacts in your list of contacts. 7 Your send request can then be checked, if necessary, in the outbox. Receive a fax The window MF Manager and MF Director show, using different messages, the reception of a fax. The icon is displayed at the bottom of the window MF Manager and the icon appears in the task bar. You can automatically print faxes on reception. To do this, you have to define this parameter, refer to paragraph Fax parameters, page 57. Follow-up of fax communications Follow-up of fax communications is by means of: - an outbox, - an inbox, - a sent item memory, - an outbox log, - an inbox log. These services enable you to always know exactly what communications are taking place on the terminal, whether sending or receiving. The outbox and inbox logs are automatically printed when their contents fill an A4 page. After automatic printout, the terminal creates a new log. The outbox In the fax outbox, there are the following: - the requests being sent, - the send later requests, - the requests for which one or more send attempts have already been made, and which will soon be redialed, - the rejected requests (calls not put through). The requests are classed in the order in which they are executed. The rejected requests are filed at the end of the list so that they are more accessible if you want to work with them (request a new send) or delete them. The send memory (items sent) The sent memory is used to keep all faxes you have sent. The information in the send memory is: - the recipient of the fax, - the date the fax was created, - the date the fax was sent, - the size of the fax. The outbox log The outbox log is used to keep a history of all fax communications (successful or rejected) that your Terminal processes. The log is printed automatically as soon as an A4 page is filled. The information held in the log is: - the recipient of the fax, - the date the fax was sent, - the status (sent, rejected ...). The button DELETE deletes the entire log, and not simply the selected message(s). - 57 - 11 - PC Features The inbox log The inbox log is used to keep a history of all faxes received by your Terminal. The log is printed automatically as soon as an A4 page is filled. The information held in the inbox log is: - the sender of the fax, - the date and reception of the fax, - the status. Fax parameters Access to fax parameters 1 Click on the icon of the window MF DIRECTOR. 2 Select TOOLS > OPTION > FAX. 3 Make the adjustments require, referring to the description of parameters below and click OK. Description of the tab LOG AND REPORT Description of the tab FAX PARAMETERS The button DELETE deletes the entire log, and not simply the selected message(s). Field Description Automatic printing of a received document The fax is automatically printed when received. Printing of a inbox report A report is printed out for each fax received. Printing of inbox log The log is automatically printed when it fills an A4 page. Automatic printing of a sent document The fax is automatically printed when it is sent. Printing of an outbox report An outbox report is printed after each fax is sent Printing of the outbox log The log is automatically printed when it fills an A4 page. Field Description Transmission speed Fax default transmission speed. Line number Number of the line where your terminal is connected. Dialling prefix This dialing prefix shall be automatically inserted in front of the number before sending on this line. Type of dialing Must be parametered according to the type of switchboard your terminal is connected to. Header Displays a Communication Identification Line (LIC) on the documents you send or on the documents you receive. ECM Corrects communication errors due to line disturbance. This option ensures that received documents are integral. On the other hand, communication times may be longer if the line is bad. Number of attempts Number of attempts the Terminal must make if send fails. Interval between attempts Duraton between two send attempts. - 58 - 11 - PC Features Cover sheet The cover sheet is part of a fax document automatically generated by your terminal, on which there is information concerning the sender, the recipient, the date, the time sent, comments, etc... This page may be sent alone or in front of a fax document, but always at the same time as the document. A document may be sent with a cover sheet from the multifunction terminal or from the central processing unit. In the latter case, some of the information in the cover sheet may be provided by yourself when making the send request. It is necessary to create model cover sheets before sending a document using them. On the other hand, once the cover sheet is created, a model cover sheet may be used for all documents sent. Your terminal offers the possibility of creating and customizing some model cover sheets which you can choose when sending a fax. Creating a cover sheet 1 From the tab COVER PAGE, click on the button NEW. 2 Select the model cover sheet you have created using the menu FILE. A window with the model cover sheet you have created is displayed: 3 Click on the icon to display the available fields. To add a field, proceed as follows: - Select the field you want to insert by clicking the field palette. A stamp replaces the cursor of your mouse. - Click the location where you want to put the field on the model. - You can move or enlarge the field as you like. 4 As soon as fields are inserted, save the cover sheet. This cover sheet can be selected in the tab COVER PAGE of the fax send window. It is necessary to create a model cover sheet before sending a fax with it. Adjust the size of your field so that the text is readable. - 59 - 11 - PC Features Description of the tab COVER PAGE Creating a cover page template Creating a cover page creates a template which fields (fax number, comment, subject and so on) will be automatically filled by the Fax Application depending on the information provided for each recipient of a document. To create this cover page template, there are two major steps: • First step : Create a background image with the logos and the layout that you wish. • Second step : Add the field that you want to be displayed in the cover page: fax number, comment, subject and so on. As mentioned before, these fields will be filled by Fax application at emission time. For the first step, there are two methods to create the background image. You can either • Option (A): Draw this background image in your preferred application (such as Word, Excel,...), OR • Option (B): Scan a sheet of paper containing the layout of the cover page. Details about Option A and B: • Option (A): Open the application that you want to use to edit the background (Word, Wordpad...). Draw the background image then print this document in the printer named "Companion Suite Fax". At that point the MFSendFax dialog is displayed: Add any recipient to the recipient list, click on the tab ADVANCED OPTIONS, select resolution FINE as shown below: Finally click on the button SAVE AS DRAFT in the lower right corner (this is the button with the floppy disk icon). The background image is created in the directory C:\Program Files\Companion Suite Pro LM\Documents\FAX\Temporary and has the file extension .fax Field Description Name of the cover sheet Either the name of the page selected by default or the page you have selected to use. Sender You can enter information concerning the sender. Destination: Name, Company, Department You can enter information concerning the recipient. If the word Auto is entered in one of the fields, the field is updated during sending if the recipient is listed in the directory, favorites, a group or a distribution list. Comments This is an editing window with all the basic functions of a text editor so that you can enter a text which will be sent in the cover sheet. Preview of the model The preview enables you to see the cover sheet you are going to send. - 60 - 11 - PC Features • Option (B): Launch MFMANAGER, select NEW FAX, select the scanner source as shown below : Add any recipient to the recipient list, click on the tab ADVANCED OPTIONS, select resolution FINE as shown below: Finally click on the button SAVE AS DRAFT in the lower right corner (this is the button with the floppy disk icon). The background image is created in the directory C:\Program Files\Companion Suite Pro LM\Documents\FAX\Temporary and has the file extension .fax. Whether you choose Option A or B, you end up with a background image with extension .fax, which is located in C:\Program Files\Companion Suite Pro LM\Documents\FAX\Temporary. You can now proceed to the second step right below. For the second step: Now that the background image is created in directory in C:\Program Files\Companion Suite Pro LM\Documents\FAX\Temporary, you can add the fields on top of the background image. Please follow the procedure below: (a)Launch MFMANAGER, select NEW FAX, click on the tab COVER PAGE, and check the check box named WITH THE COVER PAGE. (b)Click on the button NEW, this displays a new window with the title CREATION OF THE COVER PAGE. (c)Press the button OPEN in the toolbar, change the file filter to *.fax and browse to the directory C:\Program Files\Companion Suite Pro LM\Documents\FAX\Temporary that contains the background image that you have created in the First step. (d)Click on the button FIELDS in the toolbar, a window pops up allowing you to add the fields on top of the background image. (e)Click on the button SAVE to save the Cover Page template and exit this window. (f)The window NEW FAX is displayed, you can now choose the Cover Page template that you want to use. When you double click the preview image in the lower right corner, another window pops up giving you a preview of the cover page with the fields filled with the recipient's information. SMS Communication Sending SMSs is via the modem of your Multifunction Laser. For more details, refer to the User Manual of your Multifunction Laser. Your PC Kit can be used to easily send faxes to a single recipient or to multiple recipients using the distribution groups. Communications being sent are monitored by means of the outbox, the outbox log and the outbox memory (items sent). Presentation of the SMS window 􀃎 The SMS service is available depending on the countries and the operators. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - 61 - 11 - PC Features Send an SMS 1 Click on the icon SMS of the window MF DIRECTOR. 2 Click on NEW then on SMS. 3 Enter your message in the field CONTENT OF MESSAGE provided for this purpose. You can use the buttons and the "smiley" located to the left of the input field to customize your message, or to automatically insert the date and time. 4 To send your SMS to a contact, enter his / her number in the field TELEPHONE NUMBER of the part CONTACTS and click on or select a recipient (or group) from one of the directories in the field CONTACT LIST and click on . Repeat this operation as many times as necessary (use the button REMOVE to delete a contact from the list of contacts). 5 If necessary, adjust the advanced parameters (to send later or give priority to the SMS) by pressing the button ADVANCED PARAMETERS. 6 Click on OK to send your SMS to all contacts in the field LIST OF RECIPIENTS. Your send request can then be checked, if necessary, in the outbox. Follow-up of SMS SMS communications are monitored by means of: - an outbox, - a sent item memory, - an outbox log. These services make it possible to have complete information on the terminal activity with regard to communications. The outbox log is automatically printed when its contents fill an A4 page. After this automatic printing, the terminal creates a new log. The outbox The following is grouped in the SMS outbox: - requests being sent, - send later requests, - requests for which one or more send attempts have already been made, and which will soon be redialed, - requests which have been rejected. Item Action 1 Write an SMS. 2 Delete an SMS from one of the SMS manager directories. Except for the directory SEND LOG for which the effect of this command is to delete the entire log. 3 Print an SMS from one of the SMS manager directories. 4 Display an SMS with the Viewer. 5 Access to the address book. 6 Stop SMS sending (only enabled for the outbox). 7 Displays all SMSs in the directory selected in the Fax manager. 8 SMS preview. 9 SMS manager directories. - 62 - 11 - PC Features The outbox log The outbox log is used to keep the entire history of SMS communications (successful or rejected) that have been processed by your terminal. The log is automatically printed as soon as an A4 page is complete. The information in the sent box is: - the SMS recipient, - the date of sending of the SMS, - the status (sent, rejected, etc...). The sent item memory (items sent) The sent item memory is used to keep a copy of all SMS messages you have sent. The information in the sent item memory is: - the SMS recipient, - the date of creation of the SMS, - the date of sending of the SMS, - the size of the SMS. SMS Parameters Access to SMS parameters 1 Click the icon SMS of the window MF DIRECTOR. 2 Select TOOLS > OPTIONS > SMS. 3 Make any adjustments required in relation to the description of the parameters above and validate with OK. Description of the tab LOGS AND REPORTS The button DELETE deletes the entire log and not simply the message(s) selected. Field Description Automatic printing of a sent document The SMS is automatically printed when it is sent. Printing of a send report An outbox report is printed after each fax is sent. Printing of the outbox log The log is automatically printed when it fills an A4 page. - 63 - 12 - Maintenance Maintenance Service General information To ensure that your machine is kept in the best conditions, it is recommended that you periodically clean the inner parts. Please respect the following rules while using this machine: - Do not leave the scanner cover open. - Do not try to lubricate the device. - Do not close the scanner cover violently or do not apply vibrations to the machine. - Do not open the cartridge access cover while printing. - Do not try to disassemble the machine - Do not use paper which would has stayed in the tray for too long. Toner cartridge replacement Your machine comes with a current consumable management system. It tells you if your toner cartridge is close to its end of cycle. The following message will appear on your machine screen. To quit this screen, press OK. To replace the toner cartridge, proceed as shown below. When the following message is displayed on the screen: 1 Press OK. 2 Stand in front of the device. 3 Push on the left and right sides of the cover and pull it towards you. 4 Raise and remove the toner cartridge from the machine. 5 Unpack the new cartridge and insert it into the slot as indicated in the diagram below. 6 Close the cover. The following message appears: 7 Press OK. 8 When this message appears, insert the smart card provided with the new toner cartridge as shown on the picture below. 9 A wait message appears. The smart card is read. Remove the smart card from the reader, your machine is ready to print again. Issues with smart cards If you use a smart card that has already been used, the machine will display: then, If you use a defective smart card, the machine will display: For your safety, it is imperative to refer to the security directives presented in chapter Security, page 1. TONER NEAR END After this message has been displayed, you are able to change the cartridge. TONER EMPTY REPLACE OPEN FRONT COVER REPLACE TONER HAVE YOU CHANGED THE TONER? INSERT THE TONER CARD PLEASE WAIT NEW TONER REMOVE CARD PLEASE WAIT REMOVE CARD ALREADY USED PLEASE WAIT - 64 - 12 - Maintenance then, If the C button is pressed while the smart card is being read, the machine displays: Cleaning Scanner reading system cleaning When one or more vertical lines appear on the copies, clean the glass of the scanner. 1 Open the scanner cover until it is standing in vertical position. 2 Wipe the glass with a soft lint-free cloth soaked with mild alcohol. 3 Close the scanner cover. 4 Make a copy to check that the symptoms have disappeared. Printer cleaning Dust, dirtiness and paper debris on the external and internal surfaces of the printer can affect its operation. We advise that it is cleaned regularly. Printer external cleaning Clean the external part of the printer with a soft cloth soaked in mild detergent. Printer issues Error messages When the printer encounters any of the problems described below, the corresponding message is shown on the machine display. Paper jam When printing, a sheet of paper may get stuck in the printer or the paper tray and cause a paper jam. In case of a paper jam in the machine, the following message appears: 1 Open the paper jam cover located at the back of the machine. 2 Remove the jammed sheet of paper and close the cover. 3 Open and close the consumable cover. The printer starts again automatically. UNKNOWN CARD REMOVE CARD ACTION CANCELLED REMOVE CARD Message Action CHECK TONER Check the presence of a toner cartridge in the machine. TONER NEAR END Indicates that your consumable will need changing soon. REPLACE PAPER Add paper in tray. HEATING Message displayed when starting the machine. CLOSE COVER PRINTER The printer front cover is open, close it. TONER EMPTY REPLACE Replace the toner cartridge. PAPER JAM REMOVE TONER A sheet of paper is jammed in the machine. Take out the toner cartridge and remove the jammed paper sheet. Take out the paper tray and remove the jammed paper sheet. Then open and close the consumable cover. PAPER JAM EXTERNAL TRAY A sheet of paper is jammed in the machine. Open the paper jam cover. Remove the jammed paper sheet. Then open and close the consumable cover. PAPER EMPTY Add paper in the paper tray. PAPER JAM EXTERNAL TRAY The fusion unit can reach a very high temperature during the operation. To prevent any harm, do not touch this area. Message Action - 65 - 12 - Maintenance In case of paper jam, the following message appears: 1 Remove the toner cartridge and check if a sheet is jammed. 2 Remove the sheet of paper which causes the paper jam. 3 Put the toner cartridge in the machine, or remove the paper tray and remove the sheet of paper which causes the paper jam. 4 Check that the paper sheets in the paper tray are correctly placed. 5 Replace the paper tray in the machine. Scanner issues When a paper jam occurs, the following message appears: 1 Open the scanner cover. 2 Remove the jammed paper without tearing it. The following message appears: 3 Close the scanner cover. Miscellaneous issues When turning on the terminal, nothing is displayed on the screen. Check the connection between the power cord and the outlet. The terminal does not detect the presence of the document inserted in the scanner document feeder. The message READY does not appear on the screen. At the start and during scanning, REMOVE DOCUMENT appears on the screen. 1 Remove the document or press key . 2 Check the thickness of the document (50 sheets of paper of 80 g/m2). 3 Iron out the sheets if needed. 4 Help the sheets along. The terminal does not receive any faxes. 1 Check that the telephone line cable is correctly plugged in. 2 Check that there is a tone signal on the telephone line by means of the key . You receive a blank page. 1 Make a photocopy of a document; if it is correct then your fax is functioning normally. 2 Call back the subscriber and have him resend the document. It was probably sent with the sheet inserted backwards. You cannot send a fax. 1 Check that the telephone line cable is correctly plugged in. 2 Check the tone by pressing the key . 3 Check the prefix is correctly programmed and used. Communication errors If the communication fails, the terminal advises you of an automatic retry later. Example of what is displayed: PAPER JAM REMOVE TONER REMOVE DOCUMENT CONFIRM CLOSE COVER SCANNER 1 2 Current time FRI 12 DEC 20:13 Time of next try 0142685014 20:18 - 66 - 12 - Maintenance Transmission from the feeder You have the choice between: • waiting until the transmission takes place at the given time, • restarting the transmission immediately by pressing , • abandoning transmission by pressing . To eject the document, press again. Transmission from memory You have the choice between: • waiting until the transmission takes place at the given time, • restarting the transmission using the transmission queue. In this case, for a document composed of several pages, the transmission will take place from the page where the error occured, • abandoning the transmission by deleting the corresponding command in the transmission line. The terminal makes at most 5 automatic redials. The nontransmitted document is automatically deleted from the memory and a transmission report is then printed together with an error code and the cause for transmission failure (see the communication error codes). Communication error codes The communication error codes appear in the logs and transmission reports. General codes Code 01 - Busy or no fax answer This code appears after 6 unsatisfactory attempts. Call later. Code 03 - User break A communication has been stopped by the user pressing the key . Code 04 - Non programmed number A number saved as a one-touch key or abbreviated number is not valid, check it. (Example: a delayed transmission was programmed with a one-touch key and this key has been deleted in the meantime). Code 05 - Scanning default An incident occurred with the scanner, for example, the sheet is jammed. Code 06 - Printer default An incident occurred in the printer: no paper, paper jam, opened cover... In the reception mode, this incident appears only if the reception parameter is switched to WITHOUT PAPER. Code 07 - Disconnected The link has been cut (bad line). Check the number and try again. Code 08 - Quality The document you sent was not well received. Contact your subscriber to see if you need to send again. Code 0A - No document to be polled You tried to poll a document from a subscriber who had not prepared his document (no deposit) or the password entered was incorrect. Code 0B - Wrong number of pages There is a difference between the number of pages indicated during preparation for the transmission and the number of pages sent. Check the number of pages in the document. Code 0C - Received document error Ask the subscriber who called you to check the length of his document (it may be too long to be completely received). Code 0D - Transmission failed Ask the sender to resend the document. Code 13 - Memory full Your fax can no longer receive since its memory is full. There are too many received unprinted documents or too many documents in the transmission line. Print the received documents and delete or transmit immediately the documents in the transmission line. Code 14 - Memory full Received document memory full. Print all received documents. Code 15 - Unknown mailbox number You wish to deposit a document in a subscriber’s mailbox. The mailbox number does not exist. Code 16 - No Relay Bcst list Nr x You requested a document relay from a remote fax but the fax has not programmed the list of subscribers requested. Code 17 - Unknown mailbox number You wish to recover a document from a subscriber’s mailbox. The mailbox number does not exist. Code 18 - Relay Bcst impossible You requested a document relay from a remote fax which does not have the relay broadcast function. Code 19 - Subscriber has stopped The communication has been stopped by your subscriber. (Example: a fax wanted to poll your fax but there is no document deposited). Code 1A - Disconnected The transmission has not started. The telephone line is busy. Code 1B - Transmission failed During transmission: start again. During reception: ask your subscriber to resend the document. Code 50 - Server error Check the number configured for the SMS server or a communication error occured during data transmission. - 67 - 12 - Maintenance Specifications Physical specifications Electrical specifications Environmental specifications Peripheral specifications Printer Copier Scanner Printing supports PC connection Dimensions: 412 x 447 x 386 mm Weight: 13 kg Power supply: Single phase 220-240 V - 50/60 Hz - 4.5 A Electric consumption: 12 W typical in powersave 16 W typical in standby 340 W average during printing Operating temperature: In operation: + 10 °C to 32 °C Acceptable humidity level: In operation: 15 % to 80 % HR (without condensation) Type: Laser (on normal paper) Resolution: 600 dpi Speed: 16 ppm maximuma a. Printing speed may vary depending on used operating systems, computer specifications, software applications, connection modes (LAN, USB or WLAN), paper formats as well as file types and sizes. Preheating time: 21 sec. First page out time: 13 sec. Type: Autonomous Black and White Copy speed: 16 ppm maximum Resolution: 600 dpi Multiple copies: 99 pages maximum Zoom range: 25 % to 400 % Type: Color scanner Color depth: 36 bits Resolution: 600 dpi (optical) 2400 dpi (interpolated) Software compatibility: TWAIN Maximum paper format: Letter Main paper tray capacity: 250 sheets maximum (60 g/m²), 200 sheets maximum (80 g/m²) Output tray capacity: 50 sheets Main tray paper format: A4, A5, Legal, Letter 60 to 105 g/m² paper Paper format for manual printing: A4, A5, Legal, Letter, B5, exec, A6 52 to 160 g/m² paper Slave USB 2.0 port (PC connection) Master USB 2.0 port (Wlan connection, reader, USB memory key reader) Operating System: Windows 98 SE, 2000, ME, XP, Vista 32-bit - 68 - 12 - Maintenance Consumable specifications Reference paper Specifications are subject to changes for improvement without notice. Guide de l‘utilisateur . bizhub 164 Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction 1.1 Energy Star® ................................................................................................................................... 1-3 Définition d'un produit ENERGY STAR®........................................................................................... 1-3 1.2 Marques déposées et copyrights.................................................................................................. 1-4 Copyright ........................................................................................................................................... 1-4 Remarque........................................................................................................................................... 1-4 LICENCE D'UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL........................................................................................... 1-4 1.3 Conseils de sécurité ....................................................................................................................... 1-6 Symboles d'avertissement et de précaution ..................................................................................... 1-6 Signification des symboles ................................................................................................................ 1-6 1.4 Déclarations réglementaires........................................................................................................ 1-10 Marquage CE (Déclaration de conformité) à l'usage des utilisateurs de l'Union européenne (UE) . 1-10 À l'intention des utilisateurs des pays non soumis aux réglementations de Classe B.................... 1-10 Sécurité laser ................................................................................................................................... 1-10 Rayonnement laser interne .............................................................................................................. 1-10 Pour les utilisateurs européens........................................................................................................ 1-11 Pour les utilisateurs danois .............................................................................................................. 1-11 Pour les utilisateurs finnois et suédois............................................................................................. 1-11 Pour les utilisateurs norvégiens ....................................................................................................... 1-11 Étiquette de sécurité laser ............................................................................................................... 1-12 Émission d'ozone............................................................................................................................. 1-12 Niveau sonore (à l'intention des Européens uniquement) ............................................................... 1-12 Pour les pays membres de l'UE uniquement................................................................................... 1-13 Pour les pays membres de l'UE uniquement................................................................................... 1-13 1.5 Avertissements et étiquettes de précaution .............................................................................. 1-14 1.6 Espace requis................................................................................................................................ 1-15 1.7 Précautions d'utilisation............................................................................................................... 1-16 Alimentation ..................................................................................................................................... 1-16 Environnement ................................................................................................................................. 1-16 Stockage de copies ......................................................................................................................... 1-16 Précautions à prendre pour le transport .......................................................................................... 1-16 1.8 Cadre juridique de la copie .......................................................................................................... 1-17 1.9 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel ....................................................................................... 1-18 1.9.1 Symboles utilisés dans ce manuel................................................................................................... 1-18 Pour utiliser cette machine en toute sécurité .................................................................................. 1-18 Instruction de procédure.................................................................................................................. 1-18 Symboles clés.................................................................................................................................. 1-19 1.9.2 Indications concernant l'original et le papier ................................................................................... 1-19 Format papier................................................................................................................................... 1-19 Indication papier .............................................................................................................................. 1-19 2 Nomenclature et fonctions 2.1 Options............................................................................................................................................. 2-3 2.2 Unité principale ............................................................................................................................... 2-4 2.2.1 Extérieur de l'unité principale............................................................................................................. 2-4 2.2.2 Intérieur de l'unité principale.............................................................................................................. 2-5 2.2.3 Control Panel ..................................................................................................................................... 2-6 Table des matières-2 bizhub 164 3 Découvrir cette machine 3.1 Allumer ou éteindre la machine..................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2 Opérations de base......................................................................................................................... 3-4 3.2.1 Charger du papier .............................................................................................................................. 3-4 Charger du papier dans le Magasin 1................................................................................................ 3-4 Chargement du papier dans le Plateau d'introduction manuelle....................................................... 3-5 Configurer un format personnalisé .................................................................................................... 3-6 3.2.2 Placer les originaux............................................................................................................................ 3-6 3.2.3 Opérations élémentaires de copie ..................................................................................................... 3-7 4 Touches du Control Panel 4.1 Control Panel et fonctions ............................................................................................................. 4-3 4.2 Indications affichées à l'Écran....................................................................................................... 4-4 5 Fonction Copie 5.1 Fonctions Copie disponibles.......................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2 Paramètres de base........................................................................................................................ 5-5 5.3 Réglages Application ([FONCTION COPIE]) ................................................................................. 5-7 5.3.1 [COPIE CAR.IDENTITÉ]...................................................................................................................... 5-7 5.3.2 [ORIGINAUX MIXTES]........................................................................................................................ 5-8 [2en1] ................................................................................................................................................. 5-8 [4en1] ................................................................................................................................................. 5-9 5.3.3 [TRI].................................................................................................................................................. 5-10 [TRI] + [MODE CROISÉ] ................................................................................................................... 5-10 5.3.4 [EFFACEMENT] ................................................................................................................................ 5-11 5.3.5 [SÉPARATION LIVRE] ...................................................................................................................... 5-12 [EFFACEMENT] + [SÉPARATION LIVRE]......................................................................................... 5-13 5.4 Avec [MODE MÉMOIRE]............................................................................................................... 5-15 Enregistrer les réglages Copie ......................................................................................................... 5-15 Rappeler un programme de copie ................................................................................................... 5-15 5.5 Tableau d'association des fonctions .......................................................................................... 5-16 6 Installer le pilote 6.1 Précautions d'installation............................................................................................................... 6-3 6.1.1 Environnement ................................................................................................................................... 6-3 6.1.2 Raccordement à l'ordinateur ............................................................................................................. 6-3 6.2 Installation Plug and Play............................................................................................................... 6-4 6.2.1 Installer le pilote sous Windows Vista/Server 2008 ........................................................................... 6-4 6.2.2 Installer le pilote sous Windows XP/Server 2003 .............................................................................. 6-5 6.2.3 Installer le pilote sous Windows 2000................................................................................................ 6-5 6.3 Installer avec le programme d'installation ................................................................................... 6-7 6.3.1 Installer le pilote sous Windows 7...................................................................................................... 6-7 6.4 Désinstaller le pilote ....................................................................................................................... 6-8 6.4.1 Désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante..................................................................................................... 6-8 6.4.2 Désinstaller le pilote scanner ............................................................................................................. 6-9 bizhub 164 Table des matières-3 7 Fonctions Imprimante 7.1 Opérations Impression ................................................................................................................... 7-3 Annuler une tâche d'impression ........................................................................................................ 7-3 Mode Veille ........................................................................................................................................ 7-3 7.2 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante............................................................................................... 7-4 7.2.1 Paramètres communs........................................................................................................................ 7-4 7.2.2 Onglet [Installation] ............................................................................................................................ 7-5 7.2.3 Onglet [Mise en page] ........................................................................................................................ 7-6 7.2.4 Onglet [Réglages par page] ............................................................................................................... 7-7 7.2.5 Onglet [Filigrane] ................................................................................................................................ 7-8 7.2.6 Onglet [Qualité] .................................................................................................................................. 7-9 7.2.7 Onglet [À propos] ............................................................................................................................... 7-9 8 Fonction de numérisation 8.1 Pilote scanner TWAIN..................................................................................................................... 8-3 8.1.1 Numériser un document .................................................................................................................... 8-3 8.1.2 Paramètres du pilote scanner TWAIN................................................................................................ 8-4 8.2 Pilote scanner WIA.......................................................................................................................... 8-5 8.2.1 Numériser un document .................................................................................................................... 8-5 8.2.2 Paramètres du pilote scanner WIA .................................................................................................... 8-5 Régler la qualité depuis les [Paramètres personnalisés] ................................................................... 8-6 9 [MENU] 9.1 [FONCTION COPIE]......................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.2 [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE] ..................................................................................................................... 9-4 9.3 [MODE UTILITAIRE]........................................................................................................................ 9-5 9.3.1 [PARAMÈTRES MACHINE] ................................................................................................................ 9-6 9.3.2 [MÉM.FORMAT PERSO] .................................................................................................................... 9-7 9.3.3 [GESTION UTILISAT.] ........................................................................................................................ 9-7 9.3.4 [RÉGLAGE TRAVAIL] ......................................................................................................................... 9-8 9.3.5 [PARAM. COPIE]................................................................................................................................ 9-9 9.4 [TOTAL PAGES]............................................................................................................................. 9-10 10 Entretien 10.1 Papier ............................................................................................................................................. 10-3 10.1.1 Vérifier le papier ............................................................................................................................... 10-3 Message de rechargement .............................................................................................................. 10-3 Précautions relatives à l'utilisation du papier .................................................................................. 10-3 Stockage du papier.......................................................................................................................... 10-3 10.1.2 Charger du papier ............................................................................................................................ 10-4 Charger du papier dans le Magasin 1.............................................................................................. 10-4 Chargement du papier dans le Plateau d'introduction manuelle..................................................... 10-5 10.2 Toner .............................................................................................................................................. 10-6 10.2.1 Vérifier le toner ................................................................................................................................. 10-6 Message de Remplacement ............................................................................................................ 10-6 Remplacement de la cartouche de toner......................................................................................... 10-6 10.3 Procédure de nettoyage............................................................................................................... 10-9 Vitre d'exposition, Control Panel ..................................................................................................... 10-9 Parois externes, Presse-original ...................................................................................................... 10-9 Table des matières-4 bizhub 164 11 Dépannage 11.1 Lorsqu'un problème est détecté (Appel S.A.V.) ......................................................................... 11-3 11.2 Tableau de dépannage ................................................................................................................. 11-4 Dépannage élémentaire ................................................................................................................... 11-4 Principaux messages et leurs solutions........................................................................................... 11-7 11.3 Remédier aux bourrages papier .................................................................................................. 11-9 Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau de section de transport vertical ................................. 11-10 Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau de la section Prise papier .......................................... 11-11 Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau de la section de sortie................................................ 11-12 Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau Plateau d'introduction manuelle (en option) .............. 11-12 12 Caractéristiques 12.1 Papier ............................................................................................................................................. 12-3 Types papier et capacités................................................................................................................ 12-3 12.2 Caractéristiques machine ............................................................................................................ 12-4 bizhub 164 ....................................................................................................................................... 12-4 12.3 Option............................................................................................................................................. 12-6 Plateau d'introduction multi-feuilles MB-503 .................................................................................. 12-6 13 Annexe 13.1 Glossaire ........................................................................................................................................ 13-3 14 Index 14.1 Index des éléments....................................................................................................................... 14-3 14.2 Index des touches......................................................................................................................... 14-5 1 Introduction bizhub 164 1-3 1.1 Energy Star® 1 1 Introduction Merci d'avoir acheté cette machine. Ce guide de l'utilisateur décrit les fonctions, les instructions, les précautions d'utilisation et les procédures de dépannage élémentaires relatives à cette machine. Ce manuel contient aussi des notes et des précautions dont il faut tenir compte pour exploiter cette machine en toute sécurité. Pour tirer le maximum de ce produit et l'utiliser efficacement, veuillez lire ce guide de l'utilisateur selon les besoins. Les illustrations contenues dans ce manuel peuvent représenter l'équipement réel avec de légères différences. 1.1 Energy Star® En tant que Partenaire ENERGY STAR®, nous avons pu déterminer que cet appareil satisfait aux Directives ENERGY STAR® en matière d'efficience énergétique. Définition d'un produit ENERGY STAR® Un produit ENERGY STAR® intègre une fonction spéciale qui lui permet de basculer automatiquement en "mode d'économie d'énergie" à l'issue d'une certaine période d'inactivité. Un produit ENERGY STAR® utilise l'énergie avec plus d'efficacité, vous permet d'économiser de l'argent sur vos factures d'électricité et contribue à protéger l'environnement. 1 Marques déposées et copyrights 1-4 bizhub 164 1.2 1.2 Marques déposées et copyrights KONICA MINOLTA, le logo KONICA MINOLTA, et "The essentials of imaging" sont des marques déposées de KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. bizhub est une marque déposée de KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Microsoft et Windows sont des marques déposées ou des marques commerciales de Microsoft Corporation aux États-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Tous les autres produits ou noms de marque sont des marques commerciales ou des marques déposées de leurs propriétaires respectifs. Copyright © 2010 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Tous droits réservés. Remarque Toute reproduction partielle ou totale du guide de l'utilisateur est interdite sans autorisation. KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC. ne pourra être tenu pour responsable en cas d'incidents causés par l'utilisation de ce système d'impression ou de ce guide de l'utilisateur. Les informations figurant dans le guide de l'utilisateur sont susceptibles d'être modifiées sans préavis. KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. reste le détenteur du copyright des pilotes d'imprimante. LICENCE D'UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL Ce package contient les éléments suivants fournis par KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. (KMBT) : logiciel inclus comme partie intégrante du système d'impression ("Logiciel d'impression"), les données vectorisées numériquement encodées et lisibles par la machine codées au format spécial et sous forme cryptée ("Programmes de polices"), un autre logiciel fonctionnant sur un système informatique à utiliser en association avec le logiciel d'impression ("Logiciel Hôte") ainsi que de la documentation écrite explicative ("Documentation"). L'utilisation du terme "Logiciel" renvoie au logiciel d'impression, aux programmes de polices et/ou au logiciel hôte et regroupe également l'ensemble des mises à jour, des versions modifiées, des ajouts et des copies du logiciel. L'accord de licence du Logiciel est soumis aux termes du présent contrat. KMBT vous accorde une sous-licence non-exclusive pour utiliser le Logiciel et la Documentation sous réserve que vous respectiez les points suivants : 1. Vous pouvez utiliser le Logiciel et les Programmes de polices associés pour reproduire des images sur le ou les périphérique(s) de sortie sous licence, uniquement pour vos propres besoins professionnels internes. 2. En plus de la licence pour les Programmes de polices mentionnés à la section 1 ci-dessus, vous pouvez utiliser les programmes de polices romaines pour reproduire les poids, les styles et les versions des lettres, chiffres, caractères et symboles ("Types de caractères") sur l'afficheur ou l'écran pour vos propres besoins professionnels internes. 3. Vous pouvez faire une copie de sauvegarde du Logiciel Hôte, à condition que votre copie de sauvegarde ne soit pas installée ni utilisée sur un autre ordinateur. Par dérogation aux restrictions cidessus, vous pouvez installer le logiciel sur plusieurs ordinateurs uniquement pour utilisation avec un ou plusieurs systèmes d'impression fonctionnant avec le Logiciel d'impression. 4. Vous pouvez céder ses droits dans le cadre de ce contrat à un cessionnaire de tous les droits et intérêts que le titulaire de la licence possède sur ledit Logiciel ou ladite Documentation ("Cessionnaire") sous réserve de remettre au cessionnaire toutes les copies du dit Logiciel ou de ladite Documentation. et le cessionnaire accepte d'être lié par toutes les clauses et conditions du présent Contrat. 5. Vous vous engagez à ne pas modifier, adapter ni traduire le Logiciel et la Documentation. 6. Vous acceptez de ne pas essayer de modifier, désassembler, décoder, de décompiler le Logiciel ni de faire de l'ingénierie inverse. 7. Le titre et la propriété du Logiciel et de la Documentation restent ceux de KMBT et de son concédant de licence. 8. Les marques commerciales seront utilisées conformément aux pratiques en cours, y compris en ce qui concerne l'identification du nom du propriétaire de la marque commerciale. Les marques commerciales ne peuvent être utilisées que pour identifier les impressions produites par le Logiciel. L'utilisation d'une quelconque marque commerciale ne vous accorde aucun droit de propriété sur cette dernière. bizhub 164 1-5 1.2 Marques déposées et copyrights 1 9. Vous n'avez pas le droit de louer, donner à bail, sous-licencier, prêter ni transférer des versions ou des copies du Logiciel que le Concessionnaire n'utilise pas, ou un Logiciel enregistré sur un support non utilisé, sauf en tant que partie du transfert permanent de tout le Logiciel et de toute la Documentation tel que décrit ci-dessus. 10. EN AUCUN CAS, KMBT OU SON CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE NE SAURAIT ÊTRE TENU POUR RESPONSABLE A VOTRE PLACE EN CAS DU MOINDRE DOMMAGE IMMATÉRIEL, ACCESSOIRE INDIRECT, DOMMAGE-INTERÊTS PUNITIF OU SPÉCIAL, Y COMPRIS LES PERTES DE BÉNÉFICES OU LES PERTES D'ÉCONOMIES, MÊME SI LA POSSIBILITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES A ÉTÉ SIGNALÉ A KMBT OU EN CAS DE PLAINTE D'UN TIERS. KMBT OU SON CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE DÉMENT TOUTES GARANTIES QUANT AU LOGICIEL, EXPLICITE OU IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, SANS RESTRICTION, TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE DE VALEUR COMMERCIALE, D'APTITUDE À UN EMPLOI PARTICULIER, TOUTE PROPRIÉTÉ ET NON-VIOLATION DE DROITS DE TIERS. CERTAINS ÉTATS OU JURIDICTIONS N'AUTORISANT PAS L'EXCLUSION OU LA LIMITATION DES DOMMAGES ACCIDENTELS, CONSÉCUTIFS OU SPÉCIAUX, LES LIMITATIONS SUSMENTIONNÉES PEUVENT NE PAS S'APPLIQUER À VOUS. 11. Avis aux utilisateurs finaux appartenant à l'administration US : le Logiciel est un "article commercial" tel que défini dans la disposition 48 C.F.R. 2.101 et comprend le "logiciel commercial" et la "documentation du logiciel commercial" tels que définis dans la disposition 48 C.F.R. 12.212. En accord avec les termes du 48 C.F.R. 12.212 et 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 à 227.7202-4, tous les utilisateurs finals du gouvernement américain achètent le Logiciel uniquement avec les droits énoncés au présent. 12. Vous acceptez de ne pas exporter le Logiciel sous quelque forme que ce soit en infraction de toute législation et réglementation en vigueur en matière de contrôle des exportations de n'importe quel pays. 1 Conseils de sécurité 1-6 bizhub 164 1.3 1.3 Conseils de sécurité Ce chapitre contient des instructions détaillées relatives à l'exploitation et à la maintenance de cette machine. Pour utiliser au mieux cet appareil, tous les opérateurs doivent lire avec attention ce guide et respecter à la lettre les instructions qui y figurent. Veuillez lire la section suivante avant de brancher la machine au secteur. Il contient en effet des informations importantes quant à la sécurité de l'utilisateur et la prévention des problèmes liés à l'équipement. Veuillez conserver ce guide à portée de la main et à proximité de la machine. Veuillez-vous observer impérativement toutes les précautions figurant dans chaque chapitre de ce guide. Référence - Certaines parties du contenu de ce chapitre peuvent ne pas correspondre au produit acheté. Symboles d'avertissement et de précaution Les indicateurs suivants sont utilisés sur les étiquettes d'avertissement ou dans les guides pour classifier le niveau des avertissements de sécurité. Signification des symboles AVERTISSEMENT La négligence de cet avertissement peut entraîner des blessures graves, voire mortelles. ATTENTION Négliger cette précaution peut provoquer des blessures graves, ou des dommages matériels. Un triangle indique un danger contre lequel il y a lieu de se protéger. Ce symbole vous avertit des risques de brûlures. Une ligne diagonale indique une action interdite. Ce symbole met en garde contre un démontage du copieur. Un cercle plein indique une action impérative. Ce symbole signale le débranchement impératif du copieur. Démontage et modification AVERTISSEMENT • N'essayez jamais d'enlever les couvercles et les panneaux fixés sur le produit. Certains produits contiennent des pièces haute-tension ou une source de faisceau laser susceptibles d'électrocuter ou d'aveugler l'opérateur. • N'effectuez aucune modification sur ce produit, il pourrait prendre feu, subir un choc électrique ou tomber en panne. Si le produit utilise un laser, la source de son faisceau risque d'aveugler l'opérateur. Cordon d'alimentation AVERTISSEMENT • Utilisez uniquement le cordon d'alimentation fourni. Si le cordon d'alimentation n'est pas fourni avec le produit, n'utilisez que le cordon d'alimentation et la fiche préconisés dans les INSTRUCTIONS RELATIVES AU CORDON D'ALIMENTATION. L'utilisation d'un autre cordon peut déclencher un incendie ou causer une électrocution. • Le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec le produit ne doit être utilisé qu'avec cette machine et jamais avec un autre appareil, et jamais avec un autre appareil, sous peine d'incendie ou d'électrocution. bizhub 164 1-7 1.3 Conseils de sécurité 1 • Veillez à ne jamais gratter ni éroder le cordon d'alimentation, à ne pas placer d'objet lourd dessus, le chauffer, le tordre, le plier, tirer dessus, ni l'endommager. L'utilisation d'un cordon endommagé (conducteur partiellement à nu, conducteur cassé, etc.) peut entraîner un incendie ou une panne. En présence de l'un de ces symptômes, basculer immédiatement l'interrupteur électrique sur Arrêt, débrancher le cordon, de la prise murale puis contacter le S.A.V. Alimentation AVERTISSEMENT • Utilisez exclusivement la tension d'alimentation spécifiée, sous peine d'incendie ou d'électrocution. • Branchez directement la fiche dans la prise murale de même configuration que la fiche. L'utilisation d'un adaptateur entraîne le branchement de la machine à une source d'alimentation inadéquate (tension, capacité électrique, mise à la terre) et risque de provoquer un incendie ou causer une électrocution. En l'absence d'une prise murale appropriée, le client doit en demander l'installation par un électricien qualifié. • En règle générale, ne pas utiliser d'adaptateur multi-prises ni de rallonge. L'utilisation d'un adaptateur ou d'une rallonge peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. Contacter votre S.A.V. si une rallonge s'avère nécessaire. • Consultez votre technicien de maintenance agréé avant de brancher un autre équipement sur la même prise murale. Une surcharge pourrait entraîner un incendie. ATTENTION • La prise électrique doit se trouver à proximité de l'équipement Sinon, vous ne pourrez pas débrancher la fiche d'alimentation en cas d'urgence. Fiche d'alimentation AVERTISSEMENT • Ne pas débrancher ni brancher le câble avec les mains humides car cela peut provoquer une électrocution. • Insérer la prise de courant à fond dans la prise murale. Un incendie ou une électrocution peut résulter d'un manquement à cette instruction. ATTENTION • Ne pas tirer sur le cordon d'alimentation pour le débrancher. Le fait de tirer directement sur le cordon d'alimentation peut l'endommager et déclencher un feu ou provoquer une électrocution. • Débrancher le cordon d'alimentation plus d'une fois par an et nettoyer la zone entre les bornes de la prise. La poussière qui s'accumule entre les bornes peut provoquer un incendie. Cordon d'alimentation 1 Conseils de sécurité 1-8 bizhub 164 1.3 Mise à la terre AVERTISSEMENT • Brancher le cordon d'alimentation à une prise électrique équipée d'une borne de mise à la terre. Installation AVERTISSEMENT • Ne posez jamais de vase ou autre récipient contenant de l'eau, d'agrafes ou de petits objets métalliques sur le produit. De l'eau ou des objets métalliques qui tomberaient à l'intérieur de la machine sont susceptibles de causer une électrocution, un incendie, ou une panne. Si un objet métallique, de l'eau, ou un corps étranger similaire tombe à l'intérieur de la machine, basculer immédiatement l'interrupteur électrique sur Arrêt, débrancher le cordon, de la prise murale puis contacter le S.A.V. ATTENTION • Une fois ce produit installé, montez-le sur un support stable. Si l'appareil bouge ou tombe, il peut blesser quelqu'un. • N'installez pas ce produit dans un endroit poussiéreux ou exposé à la suie ou à la vapeur, à proximité d'une table de cuisine, d'une baignoire ou d'un humidificateur d'air. Cela pourrait engendre un incendie, une électrocution ou une panne. • Ne placez pas ce produit sur un banc instable ou renversé ou dans un endroit soumis à des vibrations et des chocs importants. Il pourrait tomber et blesser quelqu'un ou provoquer une panne mécanique. • Ne laissez pas le moindre objet obstruer les orifices de ventilation de ce produit. La chaleur pourrait s'accumuler à l'intérieur de la machine et provoquer un incendie ou un quelconque dysfonctionnement. • Ne pas utiliser d'aérosols, de liquides ou de gaz inflammables à proximité de ce produit, il pourrait prendre feu. Ventilation ATTENTION • L'utilisation prolongée de ce produit dans un local mal ventilé ou pour la production d'un grand nombre de copies ou d'impression risque degénérer une odeur d'air de ventilation de la machine. Ventilez correctement la pièce. En cas de problèmes AVERTISSEMENT • Cessez toute utilisation de l'appareil s'il devient exceptionnellement chaud, s'il dégage de la fumée ou fait entendre un bruit insolite. Mettez immédiatement l'interrupteur en position OFF (Arrêt), débranchez le cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale, et contactez votre Service Après-vente. Si vous continuez à l'utiliser dans cet état, elle peut prendre feu, ou être source d'électrocution. bizhub 164 1-9 1.3 Conseils de sécurité 1 • Cessez toute utilisation de l'appareil s'il est tombé ou si son capot a été endommagé. Mettez immédiatement l'interrupteur en position OFF (Arrêt), débranchez le cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale, et contactez votre Service Après-vente. Si vous continuez à l'utiliser dans cet état, elle peut prendre feu, ou être source d'électrocution. ATTENTION • Certaines zones à l'intérieur de l'appareil sont soumises à des températures élevées susceptibles de causer des brûlures. Si vous devez accéder à l'intérieur de la machine pour dégager un serrage papier par exemple, ne toucher pas les zones (autour de l'unité de fixation, etc.) signalées par une étiquette d'avertissement "Caution HOT". Consommables AVERTISSEMENT • Ne pas jeter la cartouche de toner ni du toner dans les flammes. Le toner chaud risque de se diffuser et de provoquer des brûlures ou d'autres dommages. ATTENTION • Ne laissez pas de cartouche toner ou d'unité tambour à portée des enfants. Lécher ou ingérer toute partie de ces objets est nocif pour la santé. • Ne stockez pas les unités de toner et les tambours PC à proximité d'un lecteur de disquettes ou d'une horloge sensibles au magnétisme. Ces appareils pourraient ne plus fonctionner correctement. Déplacement de la machine ATTENTION • Lorsque vous déplacez ce produit, assurez-vous de débrancher le cordon d'alimentation et tous les autres câbles. Tout manquement à cette règle peut endommager le cordon ou les câbles et déclencher un incendie ou provoquer une électrocution ou une panne. • Pour déplacer cette machine, tenez-la toujours par les zones spécifiées dans le Guide de l'utilisateur ou dans d'autres documents. Si l'appareil tombe, il peut causer de graves blessures corporelles. Le produit risque également d'être endommagé ou de ne plus fonctionner correctement. Avant plusieurs congés successifs ATTENTION • Débranchez la machine si vous ne devez pas l'utiliser pendant une période prolongée. En cas de problèmes 1 Déclarations réglementaires 1-10 bizhub 164 1.4 1.4 Déclarations réglementaires Marquage CE (Déclaration de conformité) à l'usage des utilisateurs de l'Union européenne (UE) Ce produit satisfait aux directives UE suivantes : Directives 2006/95/CEE, 2004/108/CEE et 2009/125/CEE. Cette déclaration est valable pour les pays de la Communauté Européenne. Le périphérique doit être utilisé avec un câble interface blindé. L'utilisation de câbles non blindés est susceptible de causer des interférences avec les radiocommunications. En outre, elle est interdite en vertu des directives de l'UE et de la réglementation nationale. À l'intention des utilisateurs des pays non soumis aux réglementations de Classe B AVERTISSEMENT Cette machine est un produit de Classe A. Dans un environnement domestique, ce produit peut être la cause de parasites, auquel cas l'utilisateur pourra être amené à prendre les mesures appropriées. Le périphérique doit être utilisé avec un câble interface blindé. L'utilisation de câbles non blindés est susceptible de causer des interférences avec les radiocommunications. En outre, elle est interdite en vertu des directives de l'UE et de la réglementation nationale. Sécurité laser Ceci est une machine numérique fonctionnant avec un laser. Le laser ne présente aucun danger à condition que la machine soit utilisée conformément aux instructions fournies dans les guides. Comme les radiations émises par le laser sont totalement confinées dans le boîtier de protection, le faisceau laser ne peut pas s'échapper de la machine lors des phases de fonctionnement. Cet appareil est un produit laser de Classe 1 : en d'autres termes, cela signifie qu'elle n'émet pas de rayonnement laser dangereux. Rayonnement laser interne Puissance maximum de rayonnement moyen : 5,3 μW au niveau de l'ouverture laser du bloc de la tête d'impression. Longueur d'onde : 770-800 nm Ce produit utilise une diode laser de Classe 3B émettant un faisceau laser invisible. La diode laser et le miroir polygonal pour le palpage sont intégrés dans l'unité de tête d'impression. Le bloc de tête d'impression N'EST PAS UN ÉLÉMENT RÉPARABLE SUR SITE. Par conséquent, le bloc de tête d'impression ne doit être ouvert en aucune circonstance. Ouverture Laser du bloc de tête d'impression Tête d'impression bizhub 164 1-11 1.4 Déclarations réglementaires 1 Pour les utilisateurs européens Ceci est un laser semi-conducteur. La puissance maximale de la diode laser est de 7mW et sa longueur d'onde est de 770-800 nm. Pour les utilisateurs danois Dansk: Dette er en halvlederlaser. Laserdiodens højeste styrke er 7mW og bølgelængden er 770-800 nm. Pour les utilisateurs finnois et suédois Tämä on puolijohdelaser. Laserdiodin suurin teho on 7mW ja aallonpituus on 770-800 nm. Det här är en halvledarlaser. Den maximala effekten för laserdioden är 7mW och våglängden är 770-800 nm. Pour les utilisateurs norvégiens Dette en halvleder laser. Maksimal effekt till laserdiode er 7mW og bølgelengde er 770-800 nm. ATTENTION L'utilisation de commandes, de réglages ou de procédures d'exploitation autres que celles spécifiées dans ce guide peuvent entraîner une exposition dangereuse aux radiations. ADVARSEL Usynlig laserstråling ved åbning, når sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion. Undgå udsættelse for stråling. Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC60825 sikkerheds kravene. LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT VAROITUS! Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle. VARNING! Om apparaten används på annat sätt än I denna bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1. VARO! Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle. Älä katso säteeseen. VARNING! Osynlig laserstrålning när denna del är öppnad och spärren är urkopplad. Betrakta ej strålen. ADVARSEL Dersom apparatet brukes på annen måte enn spesifisert i denne bruksanvisning, kan brukeren utsettes for unsynlig laserstråling som overskrider grensen for laser klass 1. 1 Déclarations réglementaires 1-12 bizhub 164 1.4 Étiquette de sécurité laser Une étiquette sécurité laser est apposée sur l'extérieur de la machine, à l'emplacement indiqué ci-dessous. Émission d'ozone Installez la machine dans un local bien ventilé Une quantité négligeable d'ozone se dégage au cours du fonctionnement normal de cette machine. Cependant, une odeur désagréable peut se faire sentir dans les pièces dont l'aération est insuffisante et lorsque l'appareil est utilisé de manière prolongée. Pour avoir la certitude de travailler dans un environnement réunissant des conditions de confort, d'hygiène et de sécurité, il est préférable de bien aérer la pièce où se trouve l'appareil. Placer l'appareil dans une pièce bien ventilée Une quantité négligeable d'ozone se dégage pendant le fonctionnement normal de l'appareil. Cependant, une odeur désagréable peut se faire sentir dans les pièces dont l'aération est insuffisante et lorsque l'appareil est utilisé de manière prolongée. Pour avoir la certitude de travailler dans un environnement réunissant des conditions de confort, santé et de sécurité, il est préférable de bien aérer la pièce où se trouve l'appareil. Niveau sonore (à l'intention des Européens uniquement) Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung 3. GPSGV: Der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB(A) oder weniger gemäss EN ISO 7779. bizhub 164 1-13 1.4 Déclarations réglementaires 1 Pour les pays membres de l'UE uniquement Ce symbole signifie : ne pas jeter avec les déchets domestiques. Veuillez vous reporter aux informations de votre collectivité locale ou contactez nos revendeurs pour savoir comment traiter les appareils électriques et électroniques usagés. Le recyclage de ce produit contribuera à préserver les ressources naturelles et à prévenir les potentiels effets néfastes à l'environnement et à la santé humaine qui découleraient d'un rebut inadapté. Pour les pays membres de l'UE uniquement Ce produit est conforme à la Directive RoHS (2002/95/EC). Ce produit n'est pas destiné à être utilisé dans le champ de vision direct sur des postes de travail à terminal vidéo. Afin d'éviter les reflets désagréables sur les postes de travail à terminal vidéo, il ne faut pas placer cet appareil dans le champ de vision direct. Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. Um störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld platziert werden. 1 Avertissements et étiquettes de précaution 1-14 bizhub 164 1.5 1.5 Avertissements et étiquettes de précaution Les avertissements et étiquettes de précaution sont apposés sur la machine, aux endroits suivants. Redoublez de prudence lorsque vous effectuez des opérations comme le dégagement d'un bourrage papier. REMARQUE Ne pas retirer les étiquettes ou les avis de mise en garde. Si une de ces étiquettes devient sale, veuillez la nettoyer afin qu'elle reste lisible. Si vous ne pas les rendre lisibles, ou si l'étiquette ou l'avis de mise en garde est détérioré, veuillez contacter votre technicien S.A.V. Ne pas altérer ou enlever les capots ou panneaux fixés sur cette machine, sinon cela pourrait vous exposer à un rayonnement laser. Le tour de l'unité de fixation est extrêmement chaud. Toucher d'autres endroits que ceux indiqués peut entraîner des brûlures. Ne pas brûler les cartouches toner. Sous l'effet du feu les projections de toner sont dangereuses. AVERTISSEMENT ATTENTION ATTENTION bizhub 164 1-15 1.6 Espace requis 1 1.6 Espace requis Pour permettre et faciliter le fonctionnement, le rechargement en consommables, le remplacement de composants et l'entretien périodique de la machine, respectez les dimensions de dégagement ci-dessous. REMARQUE Veillez à ménager un dégagement de 200 mm (8 pouces) ou plus à l'arrière de cette machine. 570 (22-7/16) bizhub 164 Unité : mm (pouce) 530 (20-7/8) 449 (17-11/16) bizhub 164 + MB-503 Unité : mm (pouce) 928 (36-9/16) 449 (17-11/16) 783 (30-13/16) 607 (23-7/8) 570 (22-7/16) 856 (33-11/16) 927 (36-1/2) 1 Précautions d'utilisation 1-16 bizhub 164 1.7 1.7 Précautions d'utilisation Pour assurer les performances optimales de l'appareil, observez les précautions ci-dessous. Alimentation L'alimentation requise est la suivante : - Utiliser une source de tension la plus basse possible ou avec un minimum de variations de fréquence. – Variation de tension : Maximum ±10% (à 110 V/120 à 127 V/220 à 240 V AC) – Variation de fréquence : Maximum ±3 Hz (à 50 Hz/60Hz) Environnement L'environnement requis pour l'appareil est le suivant : - Température : 10°C (50°F) à 30°C (86°F) avec une variation de 10°C (50°F) maximum en une heure - Humidité : 15% à 85% avec une variation de 10% au maximum par heure Stockage de copies Pour conserver les copies, suivre les recommandations ci-dessous. - Si les copies doivent être conservées pendant une longue période, les stocker dans un endroit protégé de la lumière pour éviter qu'elles ne se décolorent. - Les adhésifs qui contiennent certains solvants (par exemple les colles en aérosols) peuvent dissoudre le toner fixé sur les copies. Précautions à prendre pour le transport Désigner 2 personnes ou plus pour déplacer la machine en la tenant par les endroits indiqués. bizhub 164 1-17 1.8 Cadre juridique de la copie 1 1.8 Cadre juridique de la copie Certains types d'originaux ne doivent jamais être copiés avec l'intention de faire passer les copies de tels originaux pour les originaux. La liste suivante n'est pas exhaustive mais elle doit servir de guide pour un comportement responsable en matière de copie. - Chèques personnels - Chèques de voyage - Mandats - Certificats de dépôt - Obligations ou autres titres de dettes - Titres de valeur - Coupons alimentaires - Timbres poste (oblitérés ou non) - Chèques ou traites tirés par des agences gouvernementales - Timbres fiscaux (oblitérés ou non) - Passeports - Papiers d'immigration - Permis de conduire et carte grise - Actes et titres de propriété - Cartes d'identification, badges ou insignes - Les oeuvres protégées sans l'autorisation du propriétaire des droits Par ailleurs, il est rigoureusement interdit de copier des billets de monnaie nationale ou étrangère, ou de copier des oeuvres d'art sans la permission du propriétaire des droits. Si vous avez des doutes sur la nature d'un original, consultez un conseiller juridique. 1 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1-18 bizhub 164 1.9 1.9 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1.9.1 Symboles utilisés dans ce manuel Les symboles utilisés dans le manuel expriment divers types d'informations. La présentation qui suit décrit chaque symbole associé à l'utilisation correcte et sûre de la machine. Pour utiliser cette machine en toute sécurité 7 AVERTISSEMENT - Ce symbole indique que le non respect des instructions peut entraîner des blessures mortelles ou graves. 7 ATTENTION - Ce symbole indique que la négligence des instructions peut entraîner des fausses manoeuvres susceptibles de provoquer des blessures ou des dommages matériels. REMARQUE Ce symbole indique un risque susceptible d'endommager la machine ou les originaux. Suivez les instructions pour éviter les dommages matériels. Instruction de procédure 0 Cette coche indique une option nécessaire à l'utilisation des conditions ou fonctions prérequises d'une procédure. 1 Ce numéro au format "1" représente la première étape. 2 Ce numéro de format représente l'ordre des différentes étapes. % Ce symbole indique une explication supplémentaire d'instruction de procédure. % Ce symbole indique une transition du Control Panel pour accéder à un élément de menu souhaité. L'Écran correspondant apparaît. dPour info Ce symbole indique une référence. Consulter la référence en cas de besoin. Les procédures d'opération sont décrites par des illustrations. bizhub 164 1-19 1.9 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1 Symboles clés [ ] Les noms des touches sur l'Afficheur ou sur l'écran de l'ordinateur sont placés entre des parenthèses du format suivant. Texte en gras Les noms des touches du Control Panel, les noms de pièces, de produits et d'options sont tous imprimés en gras. 1.9.2 Indications concernant l'original et le papier Format papier Les représentations et symboles utilisés dans le manuel pour décrire les originaux et le papier sont expliqués ci-dessous. Le côté Y représente la largeur et le côté X la longueur dans la détermination de l'original et du format papier. Indication papier w indique un format papier où le côté X (longueur) est plus grand que le côté Y (largeur). v indique un format papier où le côté X (longueur) est plus petit que le côté Y (largeur). 1 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1-20 bizhub 164 1.9 2 Nomenclature et fonctions bizhub 164 2-3 2.1 Options 2 2 Nomenclature et fonctions 2.1 Options N° Nom Description 1 Unité principale L'original est numérisé par la section scanner, puis l'image numérisée est imprimée par la section imprimante. Désigné dans tout ce manuel par les termes "machine", "unité principale", ou "bizhub 164". 2 Plateau d'introduction multi-feuilles MB-503 (Option) Permet de charger au maximum 100 feuilles. Désigné dans ce guide sous le terme Plateau d'introduction manuelle. 1 2 2 Unité principale 2-4 bizhub 164 2.2 2.2 Unité principale 2.2.1 Extérieur de l'unité principale L'illustration représente l'unité principale équipée du Plateau d'introduction multi-feuilles MB-503 en option. N° Nom 1 Couvre-original 2 Presse-original 3 Control Panel 4 Capot côté 1 5 Levier d'ouverture du capot côté 1 6 Plateau d'introduction manuelle (Option) 7 Magasin 1 8 Porte frontale 9 Bac de sortie 10 Interrupteur Marche/Arrêt 11 Cordon d'alimentation 12 Port USB (Type A) USB2.0/1.1 1 2 3 4 5 7 6 8 9 12 11 10 bizhub 164 2-5 2.2 Unité principale 2 2.2.2 Intérieur de l'unité principale L'illustration représente l'unité principale équipée du Plateau d'introduction multi-feuilles MB-503 en option. N° Nom 1 Vitre d'exposition 2 Capot supérieur de l'unité de fixation 3 Unité de fixation 4 Tambour 5 Rouleau prise papier 6 Cartouche toner 7 Réglette Original 1 2 3 5 4 6 7 2 Unité principale 2-6 bizhub 164 2.2 2.2.3 Control Panel N° Nom 1 Écran 2 Quick Settings 3 + , , , * , ) 4 Menu/Select 5 Back/Stop/Reset 6 Start 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 Découvrir cette machine bizhub 164 3-3 3.1 Allumer ou éteindre la machine 3 3 Découvrir cette machine 3.1 Allumer ou éteindre la machine 0 Les réglages par défaut sont les paramètres qui sont immédiatement actifs juste après la mise sur Marche de l'Interrupteur et avant que toute sélection soit effectuée sur le Control Panel, ainsi que ceux qui sont immédiatement actifs après que la touche Back/Stop/Reset a été actionnée en vue d'annuler toutes les sélections effectuées sur le Control Panel. Il est possible de modifier les sélections par défaut. 0 Si aucune opération n'est effectuée pendant un laps de temps spécifié, la machine revient automatiquement aux réglages par défaut. 0 Si aucune opération n'a lieu pendant le délai spécifié, la machine passe automatiquement en mode d'économie d'énergie. Ceci caractérise ce que l'on désigne par mode Veille. Quand la machine est en mode Veille, le voyant de la touche Start reste allumé en vert, mais l'Écran s'éteint. La machine quitte le mode Veille lorsqu'une quelconque touche du Control Panel est actionnée. 0 [Préchauffage] apparaît à l'Écran lorsque l'Interrupteur est mis en position Marche ou que la machine quitte le mode Veille. Charger un original et presser la touche Start lorsque la touche Start est allumée en vert permet de mettre en réserve une tâche de copie. Une fois que la machine a fini de chauffer, l'original est numérisé. 0 Ne pas mettre l'Interrupteur sur Arrêt lorsqu'une tâche ou des données stockées sont en attente d'impression. Les tâches qui restent à imprimer seraient supprimées. 0 Les réglages qui n'ont pas été enregistrés et les tâches qui se trouvent dans la file d'impression sont effacés dès que l'Interrupteur est mis sur la position Arrêt. 0 Avant de remettre l'Interrupteur sur Marche lorsqu'il vient d'être mis sur Arrêt, il faut attendre au moins 10 secondes entre les deux manoeuvres. Négliger cette précaution peut entraîner une anomalie de fonctionnement. 0 Ne pas mettre l'Interrupteur sur Arrêt lorsque des images sont en cours de numérisation, d'envoi ou de réception. Les données en cours de numérisation, d'émission ou de réception seraient supprimées. 0 Ne pas mettre l'Interrupteur sur Arrêt pendant le processus de copie ou d'impression. Cela pourrait causer un bourrage. 1 Pour mettre la machine sous tension, n appuyez sur l'Interrupteur pour le mettre en position Marche. Vérifier que l'Écran s'allume. 2 Pour mettre la machine hors tension, o appuyez sur l'Interrupteur pour le mettre en position Arrêt. dPour info Pour changer les réglages par défaut du mode Copie : Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [PARAM. COPIE]. Pour changer le délai avant de passer au mode Veille : Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [PARAMÈTRES MACHINE] ö [MODE VEILLE]. Pour changer le délai à l'issue duquel la fonction Initialisation du Panneau de contrôle intervient : Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [PARAMÈTRES MACHINE] ö [INIT. P de CONTROL]. 3 Opérations de base 3-4 bizhub 164 3.2 3.2 Opérations de base 3.2.1 Charger du papier Cette section décrit comment charger le papier dans chaque magasin papier. Pour les types de papier à utiliser, voir page 12-3. Charger du papier dans le Magasin 1 0 Assurez-vous que l'original et le papier chargé ont la même orientation. Sinon, certaines parties périphériques de l'image peuvent être perdues. 1 Tirez le Magasin 1. 2 Appuyez vers le bas sur la Plaque guide document jusqu'à ce qu'elle se verrouille en position. % 1. Rouleau prise papier REMARQUE Veillez à ne pas toucher le Rouleau prise papier. 3 Faites glisser les Guides latéraux contre le papier chargé. % Pour charger un format personnalisé, chargez le papier, puis ajustez les Guides latéraux contre le papier chargé. 4 Chargez le papier dans le magasin, face à imprimer orientée vers le haut (c'est la face orientée vers le haut lorsque l'on ouvre la ramette). % Le papier ne doit pas être chargé au-delà du repère de hauteur ,. % Si le papier est gondolé, applatissez-le avant de le charger. % Permet de charger au maximum 250 feuilles de papier ordinaire, ou 20 feuilles de papier carte dans le magasin. 5 Fermez le Magasin 1. 6 Spécifiez le format et le type papier pour Magasin 1. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE] ö [MAG. PAPIER 1]. 1 Paramètres [FORMAT] Sélectionnez le format papier. Pour plus de détails sur la manière de configurer un format personnalisé, voir page 3-6. [TYPE] Sélectionnez le type papier. bizhub 164 3-5 3.2 Opérations de base 3 Chargement du papier dans le Plateau d'introduction manuelle 0 Le Plateau d'introduction manuelle est en option. 0 Assurez-vous que l'original et le papier chargé ont la même orientation. Sinon, certaines parties périphériques de l'image peuvent être perdues. 1 Ouvrez le Plateau d'introduction manuelle et faites glisser les Guides latéraux pour ménager plus d'espace entre elles. % Pour charger du papier de grand format, tirez l'Extension plateau. % 1. Rouleau prise papier REMARQUE Veillez à ne pas toucher le Rouleau prise papier. 2 Insérez le papier aussi loin que possible dans la fente d'introduction, en orientant la face à imprimer vers le bas (c'est la face orientée vers le haut lorsque l'on ouvre la ramette). % L'image sera imprimée sur la face du papier orientée vers le bas. % Le papier ne doit pas être chargé au-delà du repère de hauteur ,. % Si le papier est gondolé, applatissez-le avant de le charger. % Permet de charger au maximum 100 feuilles de papier ordinaire, ou 20 feuilles de papier carte dans le magasin. 3 Faites glisser les Guides latéraux contre le papier chargé. L'écran Réglage papier intro manuel apparaît. % Poussez les Guides latéraux fermement contre les bords du papier. 4 Permet de spécifier le type et le format du papier pour le Plateau d'introduction manuelle. % Pour spécifier le papier en utilisant la fonction Menu, appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE] ö [PAPIER INTRO MANU]. 1 Paramètres [FORMAT] Sélectionnez le format papier. Pour plus de détails sur la manière de configurer un format personnalisé, voir page 3-6. [TYPE] Sélectionnez le type papier. 3 Opérations de base 3-6 bizhub 164 3.2 Configurer un format personnalisé 1 Pour charger un format personnalisé dans le Magasin 1, appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE] ö [FORMAT PAPIER MAG 1] ö [FORMAT] ö [ENTRÉE FORMAT]. Pour charger un format personnalisé dans le Plateau d'introduction manuelle, appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE] ö [FORM.PAP. INTRO MANU] ö [FORMAT] ö [ENTRÉE FORMAT]. 2 Spécifiez la longueur [X] du papier en appuyant sur la touche + ou ,, et appuyez ensuite sur la touche Menu/Select. 3 Spécifiez la largeur [Y] du papier en appuyant sur la touche + ou ,, et appuyez ensuite sur la touche Menu/Select. Le format papier spécifié apparaît à l'Écran. 3.2.2 Placer les originaux 0 Ne placez pas un original d'un poids supérieur à 2kg (4-7/16 lb) sur la Vitre d'exposition. De plus, n'appuyez que modérément pour maintenir un livre ou tout autre original ouvert sur la Vitre d'exposition Sinon, la machine pourrait être endommagée ou une panne pourrait se produire. 0 Pour numériser des livres épais ou des objets volumineux, procédez à la numérisation sans refermer le Couvre-original. Lorsqu'un original est numérisé avec le Couvre-original ouvert, veillez à ne pas regarder directement la surface de la Vitre d'exposition d'où provient une lumière de forte intensité. La lumière émise à travers la Vitre d'exposition n'est pas un rayon laser, cela n'expose donc pas l'utilisateur aux risques associés. 0 Assurez-vous que l'original et le papier chargé ont la même orientation. Sinon, certaines parties périphériques de l'image peuvent être perdues. 1 Relevez le Couvre-original. pour l'ouvrir. 2 Placez l'original, face imprimée vers le bas, sur la Vitre d'exposition. % Chargez l'original de manière à ce que le bord haut soit en face de l'arrière ou du côté gauche de la machine. X Y bizhub 164 3-7 3.2 Opérations de base 3 3 Alignez l'original sur le repère situé dans le coin arrière gauche de la Réglette Original. % S'il s'agit de documents transparents ou translucides, placez une feuille blanche de même format par-dessus le document. % Pour la Copie carte d'identité, éloignez l'original de 4mm (3/16 pouces) de Réglette Original. % Pour des originaux en double-page, comme un livre ou un magazine ouvert, orientez le haut de l'original vers l'arrière de la machine et alignez l'axe médian de l'original avec le repère de la Réglette Original. 4 Refermez le Couvre-original. 3.2.3 Opérations élémentaires de copie 1 Placez l'original, face imprimée vers le bas, sur la Vitre d'exposition. 2 Sur le Control Panel, sélectionnez les réglages Copie voulus. % Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions Copie, voir page 5-5. % Permet de combiner les sélections Copie le plus souvent utilisées et de les enregistrer sur cette machine sous forme de programmes. Ces programmes peuvent ensuite être facilement rappelés. Pour plus de détails sur les programmes, voir page 5-15. 3 Spécifiez le nombre de copies désiré. Appuyez sur la touche + ou , pour augmenter ou diminuer le nombre de copies d'une unité à la fois. % Pour effacer le nombre de copies spécifié, appuyez sur la touche Back/Stop/Reset ö [QUANTITÉ]. 4 Appuyez sur la touche Start. L'original est numérisé et copié. % Pour interrompre l'opération Copie en cours d'exécution, appuyez sur la Back/Stop/Reset touche. % Si l'écran suivant apparaît, placez le nouvel original sur la Vitre d'exposition, et appuyez ensuite sur la touche Menu/Select pour le numériser. Pour lancer l'impression, appuyez sur la touche Start. 3 Opérations de base 3-8 bizhub 164 3.2 4 Touches du Control Panel bizhub 164 4-3 4.1 Control Panel et fonctions 4 4 Touches du Control Panel 4.1 Control Panel et fonctions N° Nom Description 1 Écran Plusieurs écrans de réglage et messages s'affichent à l'écran. 2 Quick Settings Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner un élément de menu sur l'écran du mode Copie. 3 +, ,, *, ) Appuyez sur la touche correspondante pour sélectionner un élément de menu sur l'Écran ou changer son réglage. 4 Menu/Select Appuyez sur cette touche pour valider l'écran du menu. Appuyez également pour appliquer l'élément de menu ou le réglage précédemment sélectionné. 5 Back/Stop/Reset Pendant les opérations Copie/Impression : Suspend l'opération en cours. Écran de Menu : Appuyez pour revenir à l'écran précédent. Écran mode Copie : Appuyez pour effacer les réglages. 6 Start Appuyez sur cette touche pour lancer l'opération Copie. 7 Voyant LED S'allume en continu pour indiquer que la machine est en mode Veille ou est disponible pour recevoir une tâche. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4 Indications affichées à l'Écran 4-4 bizhub 164 4.2 4.2 Indications affichées à l'Écran <Écran de base> <Écran de menu> N° Indication à l'écran Description 1 Nombre de copies Indique le nombre de copies qui a été spécifié. 2 Magasin papier Indique le magasin papier qui est sélectionné. 3 Format papier Indique le format papier sélectionné. 4 Type Papier Indique le type de papier sélectionné. Indique que du papier ordinaire est sélectionné. Indique que la deuxième face de papier ordinaire est sélectionnée. Indique que du papier carte est sélectionné. Indique que la deuxième face de papier carte est sélectionnée. Indique que le papier recyclé est sélectionné. Indique que la deuxième face de papier recyclé est sélectionnée. Indique que le papier dédié est sélectionné. bizhub 164 4-5 4.2 Indications affichées à l'Écran 4 5 Taux Zoom Indique que le taux zoom fixe/manuel a été sélectionné. 6 Qualité Indique le réglage Qualité sélectionné. 7 Densité Indique le niveau de densité pour le réglage Densité sélectionné. 8 Icône/Message Affiche l'icône qui représente un état spécifique de la machine ou une fonction activée. Affiche également un message qui indique l'état de la machine. [COPIE CAR.IDENTITÉ] est actif. [ORIGINAUX MIXTES] est actif. [TRI] est actif. [EFFACEMENT] est actif. [SÉPARATION LIVRE] est actif. Plus de papier. Pour plus de détails sur le chargement du papier, voir page 10-4. Toner presque épuisé. Pour la procédure de remplacement des cartouches toner, voir page 10-6. Une opération d'entretien est nécessaire. Contactez votre technicien S.A.V. Le Tambour devrait être remplacé. Contactez votre technicien S.A.V. Une opération de maintenance est requise et le Tambour devrait être remplacé. Contactez votre technicien S.A.V. La machine est en train de recevoir des données d'impression. Les données d'impression sont en attente dans une file avant impression. N° Indication à l'écran Description 4 Indications affichées à l'Écran 4-6 bizhub 164 4.2 9 Curseur Affiche la touche à utiliser pour spécifier le nombre de copies à réaliser. Appuyez sur la touche + , , , * , ou ) pour spécifier le nombre de copies. Appuyez sur la touche + ou , pour spécifier le nombre de copies. 10 Menu ou fonction Affiche le menu, la fonction ou le réglage. 11 Curseur Affiche la touche à utiliser pour sélectionner et spécifier les réglages. Appuyez sur la touche + ou , pour sélectionner un menu et changer les réglages. Appuyez sur la touche * ou ) pour changer les réglages. N° Indication à l'écran Description 5 Fonction Copie bizhub 164 5-3 5.1 Fonctions Copie disponibles 5 5 Fonction Copie 5.1 Fonctions Copie disponibles Voici les fonctions Copie qui peuvent être utilisées sur cette machine. Paramètres Copie taille réelle Copie agrandie/réduite [COPIE CAR.IDENTITÉ] [2en1] (Portrait) [2en1] (Paysage) [4en1] ([MODÈLE 1]) [4en1] ([MODÈLE 2]) 5 Fonctions Copie disponibles 5-4 bizhub 164 5.1 [TRI] [TRI] + [MODE CROISÉ] [EFFACEMENT GAUCHE] [EFFACEMENT SUP.] [EFF. DES BORDS] [SÉPARATION LIVRE] [SÉPARATION LIVRE] + [EFF. DES BORDS] [SÉPARATION LIVRE] + [EFFAC. CENTRE] [SÉPARATION LIVRE] + [CENTRE + EFF. DES BORDS] Paramètres bizhub 164 5-5 5.2 Paramètres de base 5 5.2 Paramètres de base Permet de configurer les réglages élémentaires nécessaires à la réalisation de copies. Pour plus de détails sur les opérations Copie élémentaires, voir page 3-7. 0 La touche + ou , permet d'augmenter ou de diminuer le nombre de copies d'une unité à la fois indépendamment de l'élément de menu sélectionné. 0 Si le réglage Qualité [PHOTO] est sélectionné, le réglage Densité [AUTO] ne peut pas être sélectionné. 0 Si les conditions suivantes sont remplies, l'autre magasin papier remplace automatiquement le magasin sélectionné qui viendrait à manquer de papier au cours de l'impression des copies. - Installez Plateau d'introduction manuelle en option. - Chargez du papier de même type et format dans le Magasin 1 et Plateau d'introduction manuelle, en veillant à respecter l'orientation du papier. 1 L'élément de menu change en appuyant sur la touche Quick Settings comme illustré ci-dessous. 2 Appuyez sur la touche * ou ) pour changer les réglages. N° Nom Description 1 Nombre de copies Spécifiez le nombre de copies désiré. Appuyez sur la touche + ou , pour changer le nombre de copies d'une unité à la fois et sur la touche * ou ) pour changer le nombre de copies de dix unités à la fois. 2 Magasin papier Sélectionnez le magasin papier contenant le papier désiré. Pour plus de détails sur le chargement du papier, voir page 3-4. 3 Format papier Sélectionnez le format du papier chargé dans le magasin papier. A3w, A4w, A4 v, A5w, A5v, B4w, B5w, B5 v, FLSw, 8Kw, 16Kw, 16Kv, 11 e 17w, LGLw, LTRw, LTRv, INVw, INVv, MEM1w, MEM2w MEM1 et MEM2 sont des formats personnalisés. 5 Paramètres de base 5-6 bizhub 164 5.2 dPour info Pour configurer des formats personnalisés : Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [MÉM.FORMAT PERSO]. 4 Taux Zoom Définissez le taux zoom de l'image à copier. Zoom fixe Permet de sélectionner un taux zoom prédéfini pour copier un original d'un format fixe sur du papier de format fixe. : 50%, 70% (A4%A5, A3%A4), 81% (B4%A4), 100%, 115% (B4%A3), 141% (A5%A4, A4%A3), 200% : 50%, 64% (11 e 17%LTR), 78% (LGR%LTR), 100%, 121% (LGL%11 e 17), 129% (LTR%11 e 17), 200% Zoom manuel Il est possible de spécifier un taux zoom compris entre 50% et 200%. Il faut d'abord sélectionner un zoom fixe, cela permet ensuite de régler le zoom manuel. 5 Qualité Permet de sélectionner le réglage du type d'image de l'original de manière à optimiser la qualité et la densité de la copie. [TEXTE/PHOTO] Sélectionnez cette option lorsque l'original comporte du texte et des photos. Le contour du texte est reproduit avec plus de netteté et les photos sont restituées avec plus de douceur. [TEXTE] Sélectionnez cette option lorsque l'original ne comporte que du texte. Le contour du texte est reproduit avec netteté. [PHOTO] Sélectionnez cette option lorsque l'original ne comporte que des photos. Les photos sont restituées avec plus de douceur. 6 Densité Permet de régler la densité de la copie. [AUTO] Le niveau de densité est automatiquement réglé. Manuelle : Le niveau de densité est réglé manuellement. L'image reproduite est plus claire lorsque la densité est réglée du côté et plus sombre lorsque la densité est réglée du côté . N° Nom Description bizhub 164 5-7 5.3 Réglages Application ([FONCTION COPIE]) 5 5.3 Réglages Application ([FONCTION COPIE]) Permet de configurer les réglages Applications nécessaires à la réalisation de copies. Pour chaque image copie finie, voir page 5-3. Pour plus de détails sur les opérations Copie élémentaires, voir page 3-7. Pour revenir à l'écran de base une fois que les réglages Application ont été définis, appuyez sur la touche Back/Stop/Reset jusqu'à ce que l'écran de base s'affiche. 5.3.1 [COPIE CAR.IDENTITÉ] Cette fonction permet de copier sur une seule page, l'image du recto et l'image du verso d'un carte, un permis de conduire ou une carte d'identité par exemple. L'image du recto issue de la première passe de numérisation est temporairement enregistrée, puis l'image du verso est numérisée puis placée à côté de la première image afin de produire une copie des deux images sur une seule page. 0 Placez l'original de manière à ce que sa partie supérieure soit en face du côté gauche de la machine. 0 Positionnez l'original à 4mm (3/16 pouces) de la Réglette Original. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [FONCTION COPIE] ö [COPIE CAR.IDENTITÉ] ö [ACTIVÉ]. Sous-menu [COPIE CAR.IDENTITÉ] Cette fonction permet de copier sur une seule page, l'image du recto et l'image du verso d'un carte, un permis de conduire ou une carte d'identité par exemple. p. 5-7 [ORIGINAUX MIXTES] Des originaux de plusieurs pages peuvent être réduits pour être ensuite copiés sur une seule feuille de papier. p. 5-8 [TRI] Lorsque des originaux de plusieurs pages sont copiés en plusieurs jeux, les copies sont délivrées en jeux dont chacun contient une copie de chacune des pages originales. p. 5-10 [EFFACEMENT] Il est possible de produire des copies sur lesquelles ont été effacées les zones indésirables à la périphérie du texte de l'original. p. 5-11 [SÉPARATION LIVRE] Une original en double-page, comme un livre ou un magazine ouvert peut être copié sur deux pages distinctes. p. 5-12 5 Réglages Application ([FONCTION COPIE]) 5-8 bizhub 164 5.3 5.3.2 [ORIGINAUX MIXTES] Des originaux de plusieurs pages peuvent être réduits pour être ensuite copiés sur une seule feuille de papier. La fonction Originaux mixtes permet d'économiser le nombre de feuilles utilisées pour la copie. [2en1] Permet de copier les images de deux pages d'original sur une seule feuille de papier. Format original : A4, Format papier : A4, Taux zoom : 70% Format original : A4, Format papier : A4, Taux zoom : 70% Format original : A3, Format papier : A4, Taux zoom : 50% Format original : 11 e 17, Format papier : 8-1/2 e 11, Taux zoom : 50% 0 Le taux zoom est automatiquement réglé sur 70% (Pouce : 64%). Sélectionnez du papier de même format que l'original. 0 Si le format de l'original diffère de celui du papier utilisé, changez manuellement le taux zoom. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [FONCTION COPIE] ö [ORIGINAUX MIXTES] ö [2en1]. bizhub 164 5-9 5.3 Réglages Application ([FONCTION COPIE]) 5 [4en1] Permet de copier les images de quatre pages d'original sur une seule feuille de papier. Deux présentations sont disponibles pour l'ordre de combinaison 4en1 de l'original. Format original : A4, Format papier : A4, Taux zoom : 50% Format original : A5, Format papier : A3, Taux zoom : 100% Format original : 5-1/2 e 8-1/2, Format papier : 11 e 17, Taux zoom : 100% 0 Le taux zoom est automatiquement réglé sur 50% (Pouce : 50%). Chargez du papier de même format que l'original. 0 Si le format de l'original diffère de celui du papier utilisé, changez manuellement le taux zoom. 0 Si des originaux sont placés comme illustré ci-dessous, les images ne sont pas copiées dans l'ordre. Format original : A3, Format papier : A3, Taux zoom : 50% % Appuyez sur al touche Menu/Select ö [FONCTION COPIE] ö [ORIGINAUX MIXTES] ö [4en1]. [MODÈLE 1] [MODÈLE 2] 5 Réglages Application ([FONCTION COPIE]) 5-10 bizhub 164 5.3 dPour info Pour changer l'ordre de copie 4en1 : Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [PARAM. COPIE] ö [4en1 ORDRE COPIE]. 5.3.3 [TRI] Lorsque des originaux de plusieurs pages sont copiés en plusieurs jeux, les copies sont délivrées en jeux dont chacun contient une copie de chacune des pages originales. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [FONCTION COPIE] ö [TRI] ö [ACTIVÉ]. [TRI] + [MODE CROISÉ] Lorsque des copies triées doivent être réalisées dans les conditions suivantes, chaque jeu de copies est automatiquement trié en sortie selon une disposition croisée. - Installez le Plateau d'introduction manuelle en option. - Du papier de même type et de même format doit être chargé dans le sens w dans un magasin papier et dans le sens v dans l'autre magasin papier. - Spécifiez [MODE CROISÉ]. 0 Sélectionnez le magasin papier chargé dans le même sens que l'original. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [FONCTION COPIE] ö [TRI] ö [ACTIVÉ]. dPour info Pour spécifier le mode Croisé : Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [RÉGLAGE TRAVAIL] ö [MODE CROISÉ] ö [MODE CROISÉ]. bizhub 164 5-11 5.3 Réglages Application ([FONCTION COPIE]) 5 5.3.4 [EFFACEMENT] Il est possible de produire des copies en effaçant l'ombre des perforations et des agrafes, ainsi que les zones indésirables à la périphérie du texte de l'original. [EFFACEMENT GAUCHE] [EFFACEMENT HAUT] [EFF. DES BORDS] 0 Placez l'original de manière à ce que sa partie supérieure soit en face du côté arrière de la machine. 0 La largeur d'effacement varie selon le réglage du taux zoom. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [FONCTION COPIE] ö [EFFACEMENT]. dPour info Pour spécifier la largeur d'effacement : Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [PARAM. COPIE] ö [EFFACER RÉGLAGE]. Paramètres [EFFACEMENT GAUCHE] Efface le côté gauche de l'original. [EFFACEMENT HAUT] Efface le côté supérieur de l'original. [EFF. DES BORDS] Efface les quatre côtés de l'original. 5 Réglages Application ([FONCTION COPIE]) 5-12 bizhub 164 5.3 5.3.5 [SÉPARATION LIVRE] Une original en double-page, comme un livre ou un magazine ouvert peut être copié sur deux pages distinctes, l'image de l'original étant divisée environ au niveau du repère figurant sur la Réglette Original. [RELIURE GAUCHE] [RELIURE DROITE] 0 Placez l'original de manière à ce que sa partie supérieure soit en face du côté arrière de la machine. 0 Alignez le centre de l'original avec le repère figurant sur la Réglette Original. 0 Placez l'original dans le sens w et chargez le papier dans le sens v. 0 Chargez du papier dont le format est égal à la moitié du format de l'original. 0 La longueur du papier qui peut être chargé ne devrait pas excéder 216mm (8-1/2 pouces). % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [FONCTION COPIE] ö [SÉPARATION LIVRE]. Paramètres [RELIURE GAUCHE] Sélectionnez cette option si l'original est relié à gauche. La page de gauche de l'original ouvert en double-page est copiée en premier. [RELIURE DROITE] Sélectionnez cette option si l'original est relié à droite. La page de droite de l'original ouvert en double-page est copiée en premier. bizhub 164 5-13 5.3 Réglages Application ([FONCTION COPIE]) 5 [EFFACEMENT] + [SÉPARATION LIVRE] La Séparation Livre permet de produire des copies sur lesquelles l'ombre du pli intérieur de reliure et les zones indésirables autour du texte de l'original ont été effacées. [EFF. DES BORDS] [EFFAC. CENTRE] [EFFAC.CENTRE&CADRE] 0 Placez l'original de manière à ce que sa partie supérieure soit en face du côté arrière de la machine. 0 Alignez le centre de l'original avec le repère figurant sur la Réglette Original. 0 Placez l'original dans le sens w et chargez le papier dans le sens v. 0 La longueur du papier qui peut être chargé ne devrait pas excéder 216 mm (8-1/2 pouces). 0 Chargez du papier dont le format est égal à la moitié du format de l'original. 0 La largeur d'effacement varie selon le réglage du taux zoom. 0 Spécifiez préalablement [SÉPARATION LIVRE]. 5 Réglages Application ([FONCTION COPIE]) 5-14 bizhub 164 5.3 % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [FONCTION COPIE] ö [EFFACEMENT]. dPour info Pour spécifier la largeur d'effacement : Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [PARAM. COPIE] ö [EFFACER RÉGLAGE]. Pour spécifier la Séparation Livre : Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [FONCTION COPIE] ö [SÉPARATION LIVRE]. Paramètres [EFF. DES BORDS] Sélectionnez cette option pour réaliser des copies Séparation Livre sur lesquelles ont été effacées des zones entières autour du texte de l'original en double-page. [EFFAC. CENTRE] Sélectionnez cette option pour réaliser des copies Séparation Livre sur lesquelles a été effacé le pli interne de la reliure de l'original en double-page. [EFFAC.CENTRE&CADRE] Sélectionnez cette option pour réaliser des copies Séparation Livre sur lesquelles ont été effacées des zones entières autour du texte de l'original en double-page et aussi le pli interne de la reliure. bizhub 164 5-15 5.4 Avec [MODE MÉMOIRE] 5 5.4 Avec [MODE MÉMOIRE] Cette fonction permet d'enregistrer les programmes de copie le plus souvent employés et de les rappeler en cas de besoin. Les réglages Copie suivants peuvent être enregistrés. - Nombre de copies - Magasin papier - Taux zoom - Fonctions disponibles avec [FONCTION COPIE] (Copie car.identité, Originaux mixtes, Tri, Effacement, Séparation livre) - Qualité - Densité Enregistrer les réglages Copie Cette fonction permet d'enregistrer les programmes de copie le plus souvent employés et de les rappeler en cas de besoin. 1 Configurez les réglages Copie à enregistrer. 2 Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE] ö [MODE MÉMOIRE] ö [ENREGISTREMENT] 3 Sélectionnez le numéro du programme sous lequel vous voulez enregistrer les réglages. Les réglages Copie en cours sont enregistrés. Rappeler un programme de copie Permet de rappeler un programme enregistré. 1 Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE] ö [MODE MÉMOIRE] ö [RAPPEL]. 2 Sélectionnez le numéro du programme à rappeler. L'Écran indique les réglages Copie enregistrés sous le numéro du programme. 5 Tableau d'association des fonctions 5-16 bizhub 164 5.5 5.5 Tableau d'association des fonctions Matrice de combinaison des fonctions pour le bizhub 164. Codes de combinaison de fonctions o : Les fonctions peuvent être associées. e : Quand on sélectionne le mode B, le mode A est automatiquement annulé. - : Les fonctions ne peuvent être associées. Le mode B ne peut pas être sélectionné. \ : Cette possibilité de combinaison ne peut exister pendant le fonctionnement de la machine. (1) : [SÉPARATION LIVRE] peut être combiné à [TRI]. Cependant, indépendamment du réglage Tri sélectionné, le résultat final est le même. (2) : Si le réglage Qualité [PHOTO] est sélectionné, le réglage Densité [AUTO] ne peut pas être sélectionné. (3) : Après avoir sélectionné le réglage Qualité [PHOTO], la densité passe en mode Manuel. (4) : La fonction est disponible seulement si [SÉPARATION LIVRE] est Activé. (5) : Lorsque le mode B est sélectionné, le taux zoom change pour passer à 100%. Sélection papier manuelle (Magasin 1) Sélection papier manuelle (Plateau d’introduction manuelle) Avec papier Sélection papier manuelle (Plateau d’introduction manuelle) Sans papier Quantité de copies Taux Zoom programmé Taux Zoom Agrandissement/Réduction Texte/Photo Texte Photo Densité manuelle Densité auto Séparation Livre Copie Carte d'identité Copie 2en1 Copie 4en1 Gauche Supérieur Bord Centre Bords + Centre Copie Non-tri Copie Tri Sélection papier manuelle (Magasin 1) Sélection papier manuelle (Plateau d’introduction manuelle) Avec papier Quantité de copies Taux Zoom programmé Taux Zoom Agrandissement/Réduction Texte/Photo Texte Photo Densité manuelle Densité auto Séparation Livre Copie Carte d'identité Copie 2en1 Copie 4en1 Gauche Supérieur Bord Centre Bords + Centre Copie Non-tri Copie Tri o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o x x o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x xx xx x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x - - o(1) o(1) Mode B: Définir en dernier Mode A: Définir en premier Papier Zoom Qualité Densité Nen1 Effacement Tri Tri Effacement Nen1 Densité Qualité Zoom Papier o(1)o(1) x(5) x(5) x(5) x(5) x(5) x(5) x(5) x(5) x(2) x(3) Sélection papier manuelle (Plateau d’introduction manuelle) Sans papier (4) (4) (4) (4) 6 Installer le pilote bizhub 164 6-3 6.1 Précautions d'installation 6 6 Installer le pilote 6.1 Précautions d'installation La section ci-dessous apporte des informations nécessaires à l'installation du pilote d'imprimante/scanner. 6.1.1 Environnement Voici les critères d'environnement d'exploitation pour utiliser le pilote d'imprimante/scanner. 6.1.2 Raccordement à l'ordinateur Connectez cette machine à l'ordinateur par un câble USB. Utilisez un câble USB avec une extrémité de type A (4 broches, mâle) et l'autre de type B (4 broches, mâle). Environnement Système d'exploitation 32bit Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4 ou ultérieur) Windows XP (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur) Windows Server 2003 (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur) Windows Vista (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur) Windows Server 2008 (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur) Windows 7 64bit Windows XP (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur) Windows Server 2003 (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur) Windows Vista (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur) Windows Server 2008 (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur) Windows 7 UC Tout processeur de spécifications égales ou supérieures selon les recommandations applicables à votre système d'exploitation. Mémoire Capacité de mémoire recommandée pour votre système d'exploitation Votre système d'exploitation et les applications à utiliser nécessitent des ressources mémoire suffisantes. Interface USB2.0 (Haute vitesse) Lecteur Lecteur CD-ROM Langue Arabe, Catalan, Tchèque, Danois, Néerlandais, Anglais, Finnois, Français, Allemand, Italien, Coréen, Norvégien, Portugais, Espagnol, Suédois, Chinois (traditionnel), Chinois (simplifié), Thaï, Hongrois, Lituanien, Polonais, Roumain, Russe, Slovaque, Turc 6 Installation Plug and Play 6-4 bizhub 164 6.2 6.2 Installation Plug and Play Le pilote d'imprimante/scanner peut être installée par Plug and Play. L'installation du pilote nécessite des droits d'administration. Si le pilote est installé par Plug and Play, le pilote scanner est installé en premier, et le pilote d'imprimante en dernier. La procédure décrite dans ce manuel concerne l'installation du pilote scanner, puis du pilote d'imprimante. Référence - Le Plug and Play est un moyen facile d'installer le pilote. Cependant, il est possible de recourir à un assistant supplémentaire pour installer le pilote d'imprimante. Pour utiliser cet assistant d'imprimante, sélectionnez le port USB port à raccorder en cliquant sur [Sélectionner un port imprimante]. - Sous Windows 7, utilisez le programme d'installation pour installer le pilote. 6.2.1 Installer le pilote sous Windows Vista/Server 2008 1 Raccordez cette machine à l'ordinateur au moyen d'un câble USB, puis allumez l'ordinateur. REMARQUE Ne branchez ni ne débranchez le câble lorsque vous démarrez l'ordinateur. 2 Mettez cette machine sous tension. La boîte de dialogue [Nouveau Matériel détecté] apparaît. % Si la boîte de dialogue [Nouveau Matériel détecté] n'apparaît pas, éteignez cette machine puis rallumez-la. Dans ce cas, attendez environ 10 secondes avant de rallumer la machine. Si vous la rallumez immédiatement après l'avoir éteinte, elle risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. 3 Cliquez sur [Rechercher et installer le pilote (recommandé)]. La boîte de dialogue demandant d'insérer le disque (CD-ROM) apparaît. % Si la boîte de dialogue [Contrôle de Compte Utilisateur] apparaît, cliquez sur [Autoriser] ou [Continuer]. 4 Cliquez sur [Je ne possède pas ce disque. Indiquez-moi d'autres options]. 5 Insérez le CD-ROM du pilote d'imprimante dans le lecteur CD-ROM de l'ordinateur. 6 Sélectionnez [Parcourir mon ordinateur pour rechercher le pilote (avancé)], puis spécifiez le dossier du pilote désiré. % Sélectionnez un dossier selon le pilote, le système d'exploitation et la langue à utiliser. par ex. : \Win32\English 7 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. % Si la boîte de dialogue [Sécurité Windows] apparaît, cliquez sur [Installer quand même le logiciel de ce pilote]. 8 Lorsque l'installation est terminée, cliquez sur [Fermer]. L'installation du pilote scanner est terminée. La boîte de dialogue [Nouveau Matériel détecté] réapparaît, et l'installation du pilote d'imprimante commence. 9 Répétez les étapes 3 à 8 pour installer le pilote d'imprimante. 10 Lorsque l'installation est terminée, assurez-vous que l'icône de l'imprimante installée est affichée dans la fenêtre [Imprimantes]. 11 Enlevez CD-ROM du lecteur de CD-ROM. Ceci termine l'installation du pilote scanner et du pilote d'imprimante. bizhub 164 6-5 6.2 Installation Plug and Play 6 6.2.2 Installer le pilote sous Windows XP/Server 2003 1 Raccordez cette machine à l'ordinateur au moyen d'un câble USB, puis allumez l'ordinateur. REMARQUE Ne branchez ni ne débranchez le câble lorsque vous démarrez l'ordinateur. 2 Insérez le CD-ROM du pilote d'imprimante dans le lecteur CD-ROM de l'ordinateur. 3 Mettez cette machine sous tension. La boîte de dialogue [Assistant Nouveau Matériel détecté] apparaît. % Si la boîte de dialogue [Assistant Nouveau Matériel détecté] n'apparaît pas, éteignez cette machine puis rallumez-la. Dans ce cas, attendez environ 10 secondes avant de rallumer la machine. Si vous la rallumez immédiatement après l'avoir éteinte, elle risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. % Si une boîte de dialogue contenant le message [Windows Update] apparaît, sélectionnez [Non]. 4 Sélectionnez [Installer à partir d'une liste ou d'un emplacement spécifique (avancé)], et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant >]. 5 Sous [Rechercher le meilleur pilote dans ces emplacements], sélectionnez [Inclure cet emplacement dans la recherche :], et cliquez sur la touche [Parcourir]. 6 Spécifiez le dossier du pilote désiré et cliquez sur [Ouvrir]. % Sélectionnez un dossier selon le pilote, le système d'exploitation et la langue à utiliser. par ex. : \Win32\English 7 Cliquez sur la touche [Suivant >], puis appliquez les instructions des pages suivantes. % Si la boîte de dialogue [Test d'obtention du logo Windows] ou [Signature numérique] apparaît, cliquez sur la touche [Continuer] ou sur [Oui]. 8 Cliquez sur [Terminer]. L'installation du pilote scanner est terminée. La boîte de dialogue [Assistant Nouveau Matériel détecté] réapparaît, et l'installation du pilote d'imprimante commence. 9 Répétez les étapes 4 à 8 pour installer le pilote d'imprimante. 10 Lorsque l'installation est terminée, assurez-vous que l'icône de l'imprimante installée est affichée dans la fenêtre [Imprimantes et télécopieurs]. 11 Enlevez CD-ROM du lecteur de CD-ROM. Ceci termine l'installation du pilote scanner et du pilote d'imprimante. 6.2.3 Installer le pilote sous Windows 2000 1 Raccordez cette machine à l'ordinateur au moyen d'un câble USB, puis allumez l'ordinateur. REMARQUE Ne branchez ni ne débranchez le câble lorsque vous démarrez l'ordinateur. 2 Insérez le CD-ROM du pilote d'imprimante dans le lecteur CD-ROM de l'ordinateur. 3 Mettez cette machine sous tension. La boîte de dialogue [Assistant Nouveau Matériel détecté] apparaît. % Si la boîte de dialogue [Assistant Nouveau Matériel détecté] n'apparaît pas, éteignez cette machine puis rallumez-la. Dans ce cas, attendez environ 10 secondes avant de rallumer la machine. Si vous la rallumez immédiatement après l'avoir éteinte, elle risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement. 4 Cliquez sur [Suivant >]. 5 Sélectionnez [Chercher le pilote adapté à mon matériel (recommandé)], et cliquez sur [Suivant >]. 6 Sélectionnez [Spécifier un emplacement], puis cliquez sur [Suivant >]. 6 Installation Plug and Play 6-6 bizhub 164 6.2 7 Cliquez sur [Parcourir...]. 8 Spécifiez le dossier du pilote désiré et cliquez sur [Ouvrir]. % Sélectionnez un dossier selon le pilote, le système d'exploitation et la langue à utiliser. par ex. : \Win32\English 9 Cliquez sur [OK], puis appliquez les instructions des pages suivantes. 10 Cliquez sur [Terminer]. L'installation du pilote scanner est terminée. La boîte de dialogue [Assistant Nouveau Matériel détecté] réapparaît, et l'installation du pilote d'imprimante commence. 11 Répétez les étapes 4 à 10 pour installer le pilote d'imprimante. 12 Lorsque l'installation est terminée, assurez-vous que l'icône de l'imprimante installée est affichée dans la fenêtre [Imprimantes]. 13 Enlevez CD-ROM du lecteur de CD-ROM. Ceci termine l'installation du pilote scanner et du pilote d'imprimante. bizhub 164 6-7 6.3 Installer avec le programme d'installation 6 6.3 Installer avec le programme d'installation 6.3.1 Installer le pilote sous Windows 7 Le pilote d'imprimante/scanner peut être installé avec le programme d'installation. L'installation du pilote nécessite des droits d'administration. 0 Ne connectez pas le câble USB à la machine avant que l'instruction correspondante ne soit apparue. 0 Le cas échéant, quittez toutes les applications en cours. 1 Insérez le CD-ROM du pilote d'imprimante dans le lecteur CD-ROM de l'ordinateur. % Double-cliquez sur [Setup.exe] sur le CD-ROM, puis passez à l'étape 2. % Si la fenêtre [Contrôle de Compte Utilisateur] apparaît, cliquez sur [Autoriser], [Continuer] ou [Oui]. 2 Dans le menu déroulant, sélectionnez la langue voulue, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 3 Cliquez sur [Suivant >]. 4 Pour accepter tous les termes de l'accord de licence, sélectionnez [J'accepte les termes du Contrat de licence], puis cliquez sur [Suivant >]. 5 Dans le menu déroulant, sélectionnez le modèle approprié, puis cliquez sur [Suivant >]. 6 L'installation du pilote commence. % Si la fenêtre de vérification de l'éditeur [Sécurité Windows] apparaît, cliquez sur [Installer quand même le logiciel de ce pilote]. 7 Une fois seulement que l'instruction s'est affichée, connectez la machine à l'ordinateur par le câble USB. 8 Cliquez sur [Terminer]. 6 Désinstaller le pilote 6-8 bizhub 164 6.4 6.4 Désinstaller le pilote La section ci-dessous explique la procédure de désinstallation du pilote. 6.4.1 Désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante Lorsque vous devez enlever le pilote d'imprimante, par exemple lorsque la réinstallation du pilote d'imprimante est nécessaire, utilisez la procédure suivante. La désinstallation du pilote nécessite des droits d'administration. 1 Ouvrez la fenêtre [Imprimantes], [Imprimantes et télécopieurs] ou la fenêtre [Imprimantes et périphériques]. 2 Sélectionnez l'icône de l'imprimante à désinstaller. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Supprimer] de l'ordinateur pour désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante. % Sous Windows 7, faites un clic droit sur l'icône, puis cliquez sur [Supprimer matériel]. 4 Suivez ensuite les instructions des pages suivantes. Lorsque le pilote d'imprimante a été supprimé, l'icône disparaît de la fenêtre [Imprimantes], de la fenêtre [Imprimantes et télécopieurs] ou de la fenêtre [Imprimantes et périphériques]. 5 Ouvrez [Propriétés du serveur] ou [Propriétés du serveur d'impression]. % Sous Windows 7, ouvrez la fenêtre [Imprimantes et périphériques]. Cliquez sur une icône dans la liste [Imprimantes et télécopieurs] et les [Propriétés du serveur d'impression] apparaissent sur le menu. Cliquez sur [Propriétés du serveur d'impression] dans le menu. % Sous Windows Vista/Server 2008, faites un clic droit dans la zone vierge de la fenêtre [Imprimantes], cliquez sur [Exécuter en tant qu'administrateur] - [Propriétés du serveur]. % Sous Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, cliquez sur le menu [Fichier], puis sur [Propriétés du serveur]. % Si la fenêtre [Contrôle de Compte Utilisateur] apparaît, cliquez sur [Continuer] ou [Oui]. 6 Cliquez sur l'onglet [Pilote]. % Sous Windows 7, cliquez sur [Changer les paramètres du pilote] situé dans le coin inférieur gauche de la fenêtre pour opérer en disposant des droits d'administration. 7 Dans la liste [Pilotes d'imprimante installés :], sélectionnez le pilote d'imprimante à supprimer, puis cliquez sur [Supprimer...]. % Sous Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008, passez à l'étape 8. % Sous Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, passez à l'étape 9. 8 Dans la boîte de confirmation des élément à supprimer, sélectionnez [Supprimer le pilote et les programmes associés.], puis cliquez sur [OK]. 9 Dans la boîte de dialogue vous demandant de confirmer si vous êtes sûr(e) de vouloir supprimer l'imprimante, cliquez sur [Oui]. % Sous Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008, la boîte de dialogue apparaît pour vous permettre de confirmer votre décision. Cliquez sur [Désinstaller]. 10 Fermez les fenêtres et redémarrez l'ordinateur. % Le redémarrage de l'ordinateur est une opération nécessaire. La suppression du pilote d'imprimante est terminée. bizhub 164 6-9 6.4 Désinstaller le pilote 6 Référence - Sous Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, même si le pilote d'imprimante est supprimé par la méthode précédente, le fichier d'information sur le modèle sera conservé sur l'ordinateur. Pour cette raison, le pilote d'imprimante risque de ne pas pouvoir être écrasé lors de la réinstallation de la même version. Dans ce cas, enlevez également le fichiers suivants. – Vérifiez le dossier "C:\WINDOWS\system32\spool\drivers\w32e86" (dossier "C:\WINDOWS\system32\spool\drivers\e64" dans le dossier e64 system, et "C:\WINNT\system32\spool\drivers\w32e86" de Windows 2000), et s'il y a un dossier (fichier décrit dans "oem*.inf" représenté ci-dessous dans Windows 2000) du modèle correspondant, supprimez-le. – Dans le dossier "C:\WINDOWS\inf" (dossier "C:\WINNT\inf" dans Windows 2000), supprimez "oem*.inf" et "oem*.PNF" ("*" inclus dans le nom de fichier indique un numéro différent en fonction de l'environnement de l'ordinateur). Avant de supprimer ces fichiers, ouvrez le fichier inf et vérifiez le nom de modèle décrit dans les toutes dernières lignes pour confirmer qu'il s'agit bien du modèle voulu. Le numéro du fichier PNF est le même que celui du fichier inf. – Sous Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008, cette opération est inutile si vous avez sélectionné [Supprimer le pilote et les programmes associés.]. 6.4.2 Désinstaller le pilote scanner Lorsque vous devez supprimer le pilote scanner, par exemple lorsque la réinstallation du scanner est nécessaire, utilisez la procédure suivante. La désinstallation du pilote nécessite des droits d'administration. 1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer], puis sélectionnez [Tous les programmes] (ou [Programmes]) - [KONICA MINOLTA :*** Scanner] - [UnInstScan]. ("***" indique un nom de modèle.) % Sous Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008, lorsque la fenêtre [Contrôle de Compte Utilisateur] apparaît, cliquez sur [Continuer] ou [Oui]. 2 Cliquez sur [Suivant >]. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue vous demandant de confirmer si vous êtes sûr(e) de vouloir supprimer le scanner, cliquez sur [Oui]. 4 Cliquez sur [Terminer]. 5 Fermez les fenêtres et redémarrez l'ordinateur. % Le redémarrage de l'ordinateur est une opération nécessaire. La suppression du pilote scanner est terminée. 6 Désinstaller le pilote 6-10 bizhub 164 6.4 7 Fonctions Imprimante bizhub 164 7-3 7.1 Opérations Impression 7 7 Fonctions Imprimante 7.1 Opérations Impression Les tâches d'impression sont spécifiées depuis le programme d'application. 1 Ouvrez les données dans l'application, et cliquez sur [Fichier]. Cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimer] dans le menu. 2 Vérifiez que le nom de l'imprimante a été sélectionné dans [Nom de l'imprimante] (ou [Sélectionner une imprimante]). % Si l'imprimante n'est pas sélectionnée, cliquez pour sélectionner l'imprimante. 3 Spécifiez l'étendue d'impression et le nombre de copies à imprimer. 4 Cliquez sur [Propriétés] (ou [Préférences]) pour changer les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante selon les besoins. % Cliquez sur [Propriétés] (ou [Préférences]) dans la fenêtre [Impression] pour afficher la page d'[Options d'impression] du pilote d'imprimante d'où vous pouvez configurer plusieurs fonctions. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-4. 5 Cliquez sur [Imprimer]. L'impression commence. % Si aucune opération Copie n'a lieu pendant 30 secondes lorsque [PRIORITÉ IMPRESS] est réglé sur [PRIORITÉ COPIE], l'impression commence automatiquement. Annuler une tâche d'impression Il est possible d'annuler une tâche d'impression depuis le Control Panel si la machine est en mode Imprimante. 1 Vérifiez que [MODE IMPRIMANTE] apparaît sur l'Écran de la machine et appuyez sur la touche Back/Stop/Reset. 2 Le message de confirmation [ABANDON TRAVAIL] apparaît. 3 Sélectionnez [OUI]. Mode Veille Si des données d'impression sont reçues pendant que la machine est en mode Veille, ce mode est annulé. Lorsque les données d'impression ont été reçues, elles sont imprimées dès que le préchauffage de la machine est terminé. 7 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 7-4 bizhub 164 7.2 7.2 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante Voici une description des paramètres du pilote d'imprimante disponibles permettant d'imprimer depuis un ordinateur. Référence - L'écran de configuration du pilote d'imprimante peut être invoquée depuis la fenêtre [Imprimantes], la fenêtre [Imprimantes et télécopieurs] ou la fenêtre [Imprimantes et périphériques]. Sous Windows XP/Server 2003, cliquez sur la touche [Démarrer] et ensuite sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs]. Sous Windows Vista/Server 2008, cliquez sur la touche [Démarrer] pour ouvrir le [Panneau de configuration], puis cliquez sur [Imprimantes] dans [Matériel et audio]. Sous Windows 2000, cliquez sur [Démarrer], puis sélectionnez [Paramètres] - [Imprimantes]. Sous Windows 7, cliquez sur [Démarrer], puis sur [Imprimantes et périphériques]. 7.2.1 Paramètres communs Cette section décrit les réglages et les touches communs aux divers onglets. Nom d'élément Fonctions [OK] Cliquez sur cette touche pour activer les changements apportés aux paramètres et fermer la fenêtre des propriétés. [Annuler] Cliquez sur cette touche pour désactiver (annuler) les changements apportés aux paramètres et fermer la fenêtre des propriétés. [Appliquer] Cliquez sur cette touche pour appliquer les réglages spécifiés sans refermer la fenêtre Propriétés. [Aide] Cliquez sur cette touche pour afficher l'Aide relative aux éléments de la fenêtre affichée. [Aperçu] Affiche un aperçu des paramètres papier spécifiés ou affiche l'état de l'imprimante. • Sélectionner [Aperçu Page] affiche la mise en page découlant des réglages en vigueur afin de vérifier l'image du résultat en sortie. • Sélectionner [Aperçu Imprimante] affiche une représentation de l'imprimante. Les magasins sélectionnés dans [Source papier] sur l'onglet [Installation] apparaissent en bleu clair. [Conf. aisée] Cliquez sur cette touche pour enregistrer les réglages actuels afin de pouvoir les rappeler ultérieurement. Si [Réglages d'usine par défaut] est sélectionné, tous les réglages reviendront à leurs valeurs par défaut. Un maximum de 32 programmes peut être enregistré (y compris [Réglages d'usine par défaut]). Le nom enregistré peut comporter un maximum de 20 caractères. bizhub 164 7-5 7.2 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 7 7.2.2 Onglet [Installation] Permet de configurer les fonctions élémentaires d'impression comme le format et le type de papier ainsi que la méthode de sortie. Il est possible de sélectionner les même formats et types de papier utilisés avec la machine. Pour les types de papier à utiliser, voir page 12-3. Nom Fonction Description [Orientation] Sélectionnez l'orientation de l'original. [Format doc. original] Sélectionnez le format papier de l'original. [Personnaliser...] Les formats personnalisés souvent utilisés peuvent être enregistrés pour être rappelés ultérieurement lors de la sélection du format de papier. Un nom peut être assigné au format de papier défini pour l'enregistrer. Il est possible d'enregistrer jusqu'à 32 formats. Le nom enregistré peut comporter un maximum de 20 caractères. [Format papier sortie] Spécifiez le format de papier en sortie. S'il est différent du format de l'original et que le zoom est réglé sur [Auto], l'image en sortie sera agrandie ou réduite pour s'adapter au format. [Zoom] Sélectionner un taux d'agrandissement ou de réduction. [Copie] Spécifiez le nombre de copies à imprimer. [Assembler] Cochez cette case pour assembler les pages séquentiellement lors de l'impression de plusieurs jeux de copies. [Source papier] Sélectionnez un magasin papier à utiliser. Cette fonction peut être sélectionnée quand le Plateau d'introduction manuelle est installé sur la machine. Si [Auto] est sélectionné, le magasin papier contenant du papier au format sélectionné dans [Format doc. original] sera utilisé. [Type de média] Sélectionnez un type papier à utiliser pour l'impression. 7 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 7-6 bizhub 164 7.2 7.2.3 Onglet [Mise en page] Sélectionnez le nombre de pages de document à imprimer sur une seule feuille de papier. Nom Fonction Description [Combinaison] Des originaux de plusieurs pages peuvent être imprimés sur une seule feuille de papier. [Détails Combinaison...] Spécifiez l'ordre des pages et l'utilisation de la bordure. [Combinaison] Sélectionnez la condition de combinaison. Il s'agit du même réglage sélectionné dans la liste [Combinaison] de l'onglet [Mise en page]. [Ordre] Sélectionnez le sens et l'ordre des pages à imprimer. Cette opération est possible lorsque Nen1 a été spécifié pour [Combinaison]. [Bordure] Cochez cette case pour imprimer un cadre autour de chaque page. Cette opération est possible lorsque Nen1 a été spécifié pour [Combinaison]. bizhub 164 7-7 7.2 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 7 7.2.4 Onglet [Réglages par page] Spécifiez s'il faut ou non ajouter une page pour la face de couverture. Nom Fonction Description [Couverture recto] Sélectionnez s'il faut joindre une page face de couverture. Vous pouvez choisir d'imprimer la face de couverture comme page vierge ou comme page contenant une image. [Source Papier Couverture] Sélectionnez le magasin papier pour la feuille destinée à la face de couverture. Cette fonction peut être sélectionnée quand le Plateau d'introduction manuelle est installé sur la machine. [Type de média] Sélectionnez le type de papier à utiliser pour la face de couverture. 7 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 7-8 bizhub 164 7.2 7.2.5 Onglet [Filigrane] Permet d'imprimer le document avec un filigrane (Tampon texte) en surimpression. Nom Fonction Description [Sélection Filigrane] Sélectionnez le filigrane à imprimer. [Nouveau...] / [Édition...] Permet d'enregistrer un nouveau filigrane. Un filigrane enregistré peut aussi être modifié ainsi que ses paramètres. Il est possible d'enregistrer un maximum de 32 filigranes (y compris [Sans Filigrane]). [Texte du filigrane] Entrez le texte à imprimer en filigrane. Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 20 caractères. [Police] Sélectionnez la police. [Gras] Sélectionnez s'il faut utiliser un texte en gras. [Italique] Sélectionnez s'il faut utiliser un texte en italique. [Format] Spécifiez la taille. Vous pouvez spécifier un réglage entre 7 et 300 points. [Angle] Spécifiez l'angle selon lequel le texte doit être imprimé sur le papier. Vous pouvez spécifier un réglage de 0° à 359°. [Noirceur] Indiquez la densité du texte. Vous pouvez spécifier un réglage de 10% à 100%. [Décaler à partir du centre] Sélectionner la position verticale et la position latérale. Vous pouvez spécifier les positions à l'aide des barres de défilement situées sous et à droite de l'image. [Supprimer] Cliquez sur cette touche pour supprimer le filigrane sélectionné. [Premiere page uniquement] Cocher cette case pour imprimer le filigrane sur la première page uniquement. bizhub 164 7-9 7.2 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 7 7.2.6 Onglet [Qualité] Spécifiez la qualité d'impression. 7.2.7 Onglet [À propos] Affiche les informations sur la version du pilote d'imprimante. Nom Fonction Description [Définition] Sélectionnez la résolution d'impression. [600 e 600] Les originaux sont imprimés à 600 e 600 dpi. [300 e 600] Les originaux sont imprimés à 300 e 600 dpi. [Réglages] Cliquez sur cette touche pour corriger la qualité d'image. [Brillance] Permet de régler la luminosité de l'image imprimée. [Contraste] Permet de régler la balance de densité de l'image imprimée. 7 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 7-10 bizhub 164 7.2 8 Fonction de numérisation bizhub 164 8-3 8.1 Pilote scanner TWAIN 8 8 Fonction de numérisation 8.1 Pilote scanner TWAIN Cette section décrit les fonctions du pilote scanner TWAIN. 8.1.1 Numériser un document L'opération de numérisation peut être effectuée depuis des applications compatibles TWAIN. Le mode opératoire dépend de l'application utilisée. À titre d'exemple, c'est la procédure avec Adobe Acrobat 7.0 Professionnel qui est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Placez le document face vers le bas, sur la Vitre d'exposition. % Pour plus de détails sur le positionnement des originaux, voir page 3-6. 2 Lancez l'application sur l'ordinateur. 3 Cliquez sur [File]. 4 Pointez sur [Create PDF], puis cliquez sur [From Scanner]. 5 Sélectionnez le périphérique dans la boîte de dialogue, spécifiez les réglages voulus, et cliquez sur [Scan]. 6 Spécifier les réglages nécessaires. % Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-4. 7 Cliquez sur [Scan]. La numérisation commence. % Pour arrêter la numérisation, cliquez sur [Cancel] ou appuyez sur [Esc]. 8 Pilote scanner TWAIN 8-4 bizhub 164 8.1 8.1.2 Paramètres du pilote scanner TWAIN Paramètres [Document Size] Sélectionnez le format papier à numériser. [Scan Mode] [Text] Convient à la plupart des documents texte. [Photo] Convient à la plupart des documents photographiques. [Resolution] [150 dpi e 150 dpi] C'est la résolution normale pour des caractères de taille standard (par ex. documents dactylographiés/ traitement de texte) et pour une numérisation optimale. [300 dpi e 300 dpi] Résolution supérieure pour les caractères de petite taille (par ex. sur des journaux). [600 dpi e 600 dpi] Résolution la plus élevée pour les données image. [Brightness] Permet de régler la luminosité de l'image. [Help] Cliquez sur cette touche pour afficher les fichiers d'aide. [About] Cliquez sur cette touche pour afficher les informations sur la version. [Scan] Cliquez sur cette touche pour numériser une image. [Close] Cliquez sur cette touche pour fermer la fenêtre Propriétés. bizhub 164 8-5 8.2 Pilote scanner WIA 8 8.2 Pilote scanner WIA Cette section décrit les fonctions du pilote scanner WIA. 8.2.1 Numériser un document L'opération de numérisation peut être effectuée depuis des applications compatibles WIA. Le mode opératoire dépend de l'application utilisée. À titre d'exemple, c'est la procédure avec Adobe Photoshop 7.0 qui est décrite ci-dessous. 1 Placez le document face vers le bas, sur la Vitre d'exposition. % Pour plus de détails sur le positionnement des originaux, voir page 3-6. 2 Lancez l'application sur l'ordinateur. 3 Cliquez sur [Fichier]. 4 Pointez sur [Importer], puis cliquez sur [Support WIA]. % Si un message apparaît dans une boîte de dialogue, vérifiez son contenu et cliquez sur [OK]. 5 Spécifier les réglages nécessaires. % Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-5. 6 Cliquez sur [Numériser]. La numérisation commence. % Pour arrêter la numérisation, cliquez sur [Annuler] ou appuyez sur [Esc]. 8.2.2 Paramètres du pilote scanner WIA Paramètres [Texte ou photo en noir et blanc] L'image est numérisée avec la qualité prédéfinie. [Résolution] : 300 [Luminosité] : 0 [Paramètres personnalisés] Permet de régler la qualité de l'image numérisée. [Aperçu] Une image numérisée apparaît. Faites glisser le rectangle de sélection sur l'image pour déterminer une zone. [Numériser] Cliquez sur cette touche pour numériser une image. [Annuler] Cliquez sur cette touche pour fermer la fenêtre Propriétés. 8 Pilote scanner WIA 8-6 bizhub 164 8.2 Régler la qualité depuis les [Paramètres personnalisés] % Sélectionnez [Paramètres personnalisés], puis cliquez sur [Ajuster la qualité de la photo numérisée]. Paramètres [Apparence] Affiche une image test. [Résolution] [150] C'est la résolution normale pour des caractères de taille standard (par ex. documents dactylographiés/ traitement de texte) et pour une numérisation optimale. [300] Résolution supérieure pour les caractères de petite taille (par ex. sur des journaux). [600] Résolution la plus élevée pour les données image. [Luminosité] Permet de régler la luminosité de l'image. [Type d'image] [Texte ou photo en noir et blanc] est actif. [Remise à zéro] Cliquez sur cette touche pour restaurer les réglages précédents. [OK] Cliquez sur cette touche pour appliquer les réglages modifiés. [Annuler] Cliquez sur cette touche pour fermer la fenêtre Propriétés. Réglage usine [Résolution] [300] [Luminosité] [0] [Type d'image] [Texte ou photo en noir et blanc] 9 [MENU] bizhub 164 9-3 9.1 [FONCTION COPIE] 9 9 [MENU] Vous pouvez configurer les réglages de multiples fonctions Copie sur le Control Panel. La section suivante décrit le [MENU] qui apparaît à l'Écran ainsi que les fonctions qui peuvent être sélectionnées. 9.1 [FONCTION COPIE] Permet de configurer les réglages Applications nécessaires à la réalisation de copies. Pour plus de détails, voir page 5-7. Paramètres [FONCTION COPIE] Permet de configurer les réglages Applications nécessaires à la réalisation de copies. p. 9-3 [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE] Configurez le papier destiné au magasin ainsi que la qualité et la densité voulues pour réaliser des copies. p. 9-4 [MODE UTILITAIRE] Configurez les fonctions et réglages de cette machine. p. 9-5 [TOTAL PAGES] Vous pouvez vérifier le nombre total d'impressions depuis la mise en service de la machine. p. 9-10 9 [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE] 9-4 bizhub 164 9.2 9.2 [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE] Configurez le papier destiné au magasin papier. Spécifiez aussi la qualité et la densité pour régler la qualité de l'image sur la copie. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE]. Paramètres [SÉLECTION MAGASIN] Sélectionnez le magasin papier contenant le papier désiré. Pour plus de détails sur le chargement du papier, voir page 3-4. [MAG. PAPIER 1] [FORMAT] Sélectionnez le format du papier chargé dans le magasin papier. [TYPE] Sélectionnez le type du papier chargé dans le magasin papier. [PAPIER INTRO MANU] [FORMAT] Sélectionnez le format du papier chargé dans le magasin papier. [TYPE] Sélectionnez le type du papier chargé dans le magasin papier. [TAUX ZOOM] [FIXE] Permet de sélectionner un zoom constant pour copier un original d'un format fixe sur du papier de format fixe. [MANUEL] Il est possible de spécifier un taux zoom compris entre 50% et 400%. [QUALITÉ] [TEXTE/PHOTO] Sélectionnez cette option lorsque l'original comporte du texte et des photos. Le contour du texte est reproduit avec plus de netteté et les photos sont restituées avec plus de douceur. [TEXTE] Sélectionnez cette option lorsque l'original ne comporte que du texte. Le contour du texte est reproduit avec netteté. [PHOTO] Sélectionnez cette option lorsque l'original ne comporte que des photos. Les photos sont restituées avec plus de douceur. [DENSITÉ] [AUTO] Le niveau de densité est automatiquement réglé. [MANUEL] Le niveau de densité est réglé manuellement. [MODE MÉMOIRE] Permet de combiner les sélections Copie le plus souvent utilisées et de les enregistrer sur cette machine sous forme de programmes. Ces programmes peuvent ensuite être rappelés aisément. Il est possible d'enregistrer jusqu'à 2 programmes. [RAPPEL] Permet de rappeler un programme. [ENREGISTREMENT] Permet d'enregistrer un programme. bizhub 164 9-5 9.3 [MODE UTILITAIRE] 9 9.3 [MODE UTILITAIRE] La section suivante décrit les fonctions Copie/Impression qui peuvent être sélectionnés dans le [MODE UTILITAIRE]. Réglage usine [SÉLECTION MAGASIN] [MAG.1] [MAG. PAPIER 1] [FORMAT] : [A4v] [FORMAT] : [Letterv] [TYPE] : [STANDARD] [PAPIER INTRO MANU] [FORMAT] : [A4v] [FORMAT] : [Letterv] [TYPE] : [STANDARD] [QUALITÉ] [TEXTE/PHOTO] [DENSITÉ] [AUTO] Paramètres [PARAMÈTRES MACHINE] Permet de spécifier les paramètres relatifs au système d'exploitation de la machine. p. 9-6 [MÉM.FORMAT PERSO] Il est possible d'enregistrer un maximum de 2 formats personnalisés. p. 9-7 [GESTION UTILISAT.] Permet de procéder aux opérations de maintenance nécessaires au bon fonctionnement de la machine. p. 9-7 [RÉGLAGE TRAVAIL] Permet de configurer les réglages pour chaque magasin papier et chaque sortie. p. 9-8 [PARAM. COPIE] Permet de configurer les valeurs initiales des réglages Copie. p. 9-9 9 [MODE UTILITAIRE] 9-6 bizhub 164 9.3 9.3.1 [PARAMÈTRES MACHINE] Permet de spécifier les paramètres relatifs au système d'exploitation de la machine. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [PARAMÈTRES MACHINE]. Paramètres [INIT. P de CONTROL] Spécifiez un délai à l'issue duquel la fonction Initialisation du Panneau de contrôle interviendra, si aucune opération n'a été effectuée pendant ce délai. Lorsque la fonction Initialisation du Panneau de contrôle intervient, la machine revient automatiquement aux réglages initiaux. [MODE VEILLE] Spécifiez le délai à l'issue duquel le mode Veille interviendra si aucune opération n'est effectuée. [VEILLE RAPIDE] Spécifiez si le mode Veille doit être immédiatement restauré après l'exécution d'une tâche d'impression effectuée alors que la machine est en mode Veille. [DÉSACTIVER] Passe en mode Veille lorsque le délai spécifié dans le réglage du [MODE VEILLE] s'est écoulé. [ACTIVER] Passe en mode Veille immédiatement après que la tâche d'impression a été réalisée. [DENSITÉ (LIVRE)] Permet de régler le niveau de densité de l'image. [MODE1] Dans ce mode, les copies sont effectuées avec la même densité que l'original. [MODE2] Dans ce mode, la densité de la copie est éclaircie avec pour avantage de réduire les tâches sur la copie. [DENSITÉ IMPRESS.] Sélectionnez l'un des 7 niveaux de densité pour imprimer depuis un ordinateur. [CONTRASTE LCD] Permet de régler la luminosité de l'Écran. [RGL VITESSE TOUCHE] [HEURE DÉBUT] Spécifiez un délai avant que la valeur ne commence à changer lorsqu'une touche est maintenue enfoncée. [INTERVALLE] Spécifiez le délai avant que la valeur ne change pour le nombre suivant. [LANGUE] Spécifiez la langue de dialogue à l'Écran. Réglage usine [INIT. P de CONTROL] [1 min] [MODE VEILLE] [15 min] [VEILLE RAPIDE] [ACTIVER] [DENSITÉ (LIVRE)] [MODE1] [DENSITÉ IMPRESS.] [CONTRASTE LCD] [RGL VITESSE TOUCHE] [HEURE DÉBUT] : [1s] [INTERVALLE] : [0.1s] [LANGUE] [FRANÇAIS] bizhub 164 9-7 9.3 [MODE UTILITAIRE] 9 9.3.2 [MÉM.FORMAT PERSO] Les formats de papier personnalisés fréquemment utilisés peuvent être enregistrés et rappelés en cas de besoin. Il est possible d'enregistrer un maximum de 2 formats personnalisés. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [MÉM.FORMAT PERSO]. 9.3.3 [GESTION UTILISAT.] Lorsque la température ambiante change de manière considérable (quand le chauffage est allumé en hiver par exemple) ou lorsque la machine fonctionne dans un endroit très humide, de la condensation peut se former sur la surface du Tambour à l'intérieur de la machine, avec pour effet une dégradation de la qualité d'impression de la machine. Utilisez cette fonction pour sécher le Tambour et éliminer la condensation. 0 L'opération de séchage du tambour prend environ 1 minute. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [GESTION UTILISAT.]. Paramètres [MÉMOIRE 1] Permet d'enregistrer les formats papier personnalisés. La longueur du papier [X] peut être réglée entre 140 mm et 432mm. [MÉMOIRE 2] La largeur du papier [Y] peut être réglée entre 90mm et 297mm. Réglage usine [MÉMOIRE 1] [X] : 140mm, [Y] : 90mm [MÉMOIRE 2] [X] : 140mm, [Y] : 90mm Paramètres [DÉHUM. PHOTOCOND.] Permet de démarrer le séchage du tambour. 9 [MODE UTILITAIRE] 9-8 bizhub 164 9.3 9.3.4 [RÉGLAGE TRAVAIL] Permet de configurer les réglages papier pour chaque magasin papier et chaque sortie. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [RÉGLAGE TRAVAIL]. Paramètres [SÉLECTION MAGASIN] Spécifiez le magasin papier à afficher pour le réglage initial. [MAG.1] Affiche Magasin 1 comme magasin papier par défaut. [INTRO MULTI MAN.] Affiche le Plateau d'introduction manuelle comme magasin papier par défaut. [MAG. PAPIER 1] [FORMAT] Sélectionnez le format du papier chargé dans le magasin papier. [TYPE] Sélectionnez le type du papier chargé dans le magasin papier. [PAPIER INTRO MANU] [FORMAT] Sélectionnez le format du papier chargé dans le magasin papier. [TYPE] Sélectionnez le type du papier chargé dans le magasin papier. [PRIORITÉ IMPRESS] Spécifiez s'il faut donner la priorité aux tâches d'impression lorsque la machine reçoit une tâche d'impression alors que des copies sont en cours d'impression. [COPIE] L'opération Copie devient prioritaire 30 secondes après l'impression des copies. Si aucune opération n'est effectuée dans les 30 secondes qui suivent l'impression des copies ou la dernière opération Copie, la machine exécutera la tâche d'impression éventuelle. [IMPRIMER] Si les tâches d'impression ont été définies comme prioritaires, la machine exécute une tâche d'impression immédiatement après l'impression des copies. [MODE CROISÉ] Spécifiez si les copies doivent ou non être délivrées en mode décalé alternatif lorsque les conditions nécessaires au mode Croisé sont remplies. bizhub 164 9-9 9.3 [MODE UTILITAIRE] 9 9.3.5 [PARAM. COPIE] Permet de configurer les valeurs initiales des réglages Copie. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [MODE UTILITAIRE] ö [PARAM. COPIE]. Réglage usine [SÉLECTION MAGASIN] [MAG.1] [MAG. PAPIER 1] [FORMAT] : [A4v] [FORMAT] : [Letterv] [TYPE] : [STANDARD] [PAPIER INTRO MANU] [FORMAT] : [A4v] [FORMAT] : [Letterv] [TYPE] : [STANDARD] [PRIORITÉ IMPRESS] [COPIE] [MODE CROISÉ] [OFF] Paramètres [RÉGLAGE QUALITÉ] [TEXTE/PHOTO] Sélectionnez cette option lorsque l'original comporte texte et photos. Le contour du texte est reproduit avec plus de netteté et les photos sont restituées avec plus de douceur. [TEXTE] Sélectionnez cette option lorsque l'original ne comporte que du texte. Le contour du texte est reproduit avec netteté. [PHOTO] Sélectionnez cette option lorsque l'original ne comporte que des photos. Les photos sont restituées avec plus de douceur. [PRIORITÉ DENSITÉ] [AUTO] Le niveau de densité est automatiquement réglé. [MANUEL] Le niveau de densité est réglé manuellement. [NIVEAU DENSITÉ] [AUTO] Sélectionnez l'un des 3 niveaux de densité pour le paramètre de densité [AUTO]. [MANUEL] Sélectionnez l'un des 9 niveaux de densité pour le paramètre de densité [MANUEL]. [EFFACER RÉGLAGE] Spécifiez la largeur d'effacement entre 5 mm et 20mm (par pas de 1mm) lorsque des copies sont à réaliser avec le réglage [EFFACEMENT GAUCHE], [EFFACEMENT HAUT] ou [EFF. DES BORDS] sélectionné pour le paramètre [EFFACEMENT]. [GAUCHE] Efface le côté gauche de l'original. [HAUT] Efface le côté supérieur de l'original. [CADRE] Efface les quatre bords autour de l'original. [PRIORITÉ TRI] Spécifiez si les copies doivent être triées au moment où elles sont éjectées dans le bac de sortie. 9 [TOTAL PAGES] 9-10 bizhub 164 9.4 9.4 [TOTAL PAGES] Vous pouvez vérifier le nombre total d'impressions depuis la mise en service de la machine. % Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select ö [TOTAL PAGES]. [ORDRE COPIE 4en1] Spécifiez l'ordre de combinaison de l'original pour la fonction 4en1. [MODÈLE 1] [MODÈLE 2] Réglage usine [PRIORITÉ QUALITÉ] [TEXTE/PHOTO] [PRIORITÉ DENSITÉ] [AUTO] [NIVEAU DENSITÉ] [AUTO] : [MANUEL] : [EFFACER RÉGLAGE] Réglage Effacement : [GAUCHE] Largeur d'effacement : [GAUCHE] : 10mm [HAUT] : 10mm [CADRE] : 10mm [PRIORITÉ TRI] [OFF] [ORDRE COPIE 4en1] [MODÈLE 1] Paramètres Paramètres [TOTAL COMPT] Affiche le nombre total de pages imprimées depuis la mise en service de la machine. [COMPT FORM] Indique le nombre total de copies ou d'impressions réalisées sur le format de papier spécifié. C'est le technicien SAV qui devrait configurer la machine pour déterminer le format papier qui fait l'objet du comptage. [TOTAL SCAN] Affiche le nombre total de pages numérisées depuis la mise en service de la machine. (Les numérisations effectuées dans le cadre de la copie ne sont pas prises en compte.) 10 Entretien bizhub 164 10-3 10.1 Papier 10 10 Entretien 10.1 Papier 10.1.1 Vérifier le papier Message de rechargement Si un magasin papier manque de papier au cours de l'impression, le message [MAGASIN VIDE CHARG.PAP] apparaît. Vérifiez le magasin papier, puis chargez du papier dans le magasin papier. Précautions relatives à l'utilisation du papier Ne pas utiliser les types de papier suivants. Négliger ces précautions peut conduire à une réduction de la qualité d'impression, de bourrage ou de détérioration de la machine. - Papier imprimé sur imprimante thermique ou à jet d'encre - Papier plié, gondolé, froissé ou déchiré - Papier qui est resté hors de son emballage pendant longtemps - Papier humide, papier perforé, ou papier présentant des trous de perforation - Papier extrêmement lisse, extrêmement rugueux, ou inégal - Papier traité, comme du papier carbone, papier thermosensible ou manosensible - Papier torsadé ou gaufré - Papier de forme non-standard (papier non rectangulaire) - Papier qui comporte de la colle, des agrafes ou des trombones - Papier étiqueté - Papier avec rubans, crochets, boutons, etc. - Transparent Stockage du papier Rangez le papier dans un endroit frais, sombre et peu humide. Si le papier devient humide, cela peut entraîner un bourrage. Rangez le papier à plat et non sur le côté. Du papier gondolé peut entraîner un bourrage. 10 Papier 10-4 bizhub 164 10.1 10.1.2 Charger du papier Cette section décrit comment charger le papier dans chaque magasin papier. Si l'impression s'arrête parce que le magasin papier est vide, chargez du papier dans le magasin. Pour les types de papier à utiliser, voir page 12-3. Charger du papier dans le Magasin 1 0 Assurez-vous que l'original et le papier chargé ont la même orientation. Sinon, certaines parties périphériques de l'image peuvent être perdues. 1 Tirez le Magasin 1. 2 Appuyez vers le bas sur la Plaque guide documents jusqu'à ce qu'elle se verrouille en position. % 1. Rouleau prise papier REMARQUE Veillez à ne pas toucher le Rouleau prise papier. 3 Faites glisser Guides latéraux au format du papier chargé. % Pour charger un format personnalisé, chargez le papier, puis ajustez les Guides latéraux contre le papier chargé. 4 Chargez le papier dans le magasin, face à imprimer orientée vers le haut (c'est la face orientée vers le haut lorsque l'on ouvre la ramette). % Le papier ne doit pas être chargé au-delà du repère de hauteur ,. % Si le papier est gondolé, applatissez-le avant de le charger. % Permet de charger au maximum 250 feuilles de papier ordinaire, ou 20 feuilles de papier carte dans le magasin. 5 Fermez le Magasin 1. 6 Appuyez sur la touche Start pour redémarrer l'impression. 1 bizhub 164 10-5 10.1 Papier 10 Chargement du papier dans le Plateau d'introduction manuelle 0 Le Plateau d'introduction manuelle est en option. 0 Assurez-vous que l'original et le papier chargé ont la même orientation. Sinon, certaines parties périphériques de l'image peuvent être perdues. 1 Faites glisser les Guides latéraux pour ménager un espace entre eux. % 1. Rouleau prise papier REMARQUE Veillez à ne pas toucher le Rouleau prise papier. 2 Insérez le papier aussi loin que possible dans la fente d'introduction, en orientant la face à imprimer vers le bas (c'est la face orientée vers le haut lorsque l'on ouvre la ramette). % L'image sera imprimée sur la face du papier orientée vers le bas. % Le papier ne doit pas être chargé au-delà du repère de hauteur ,. % Si le papier est gondolé, applatissez-le avant de le charger. % Permet de charger au maximum 100 feuilles de papier ordinaire, ou 20 feuilles de papier carte dans le magasin. 3 Faites glisser Guides latéraux au format du papier chargé. % Poussez les Guides latéraux fermement contre les bords du papier. 4 Appuyez sur la touche Start pour redémarrer l'impression. 1 10 Toner 10-6 bizhub 164 10.2 10.2 Toner 10.2.1 Vérifier le toner Message de Remplacement Lorsqu'il est temps de remplacer la cartouche toner, un message d'avertissement apparaît en bas de l'Écran. Quand ce message apparaît, préparez-vous à remplacer la Cartouche Toner selon les instructions de votre contrat d'entretien. Lorsqu'il est temps de remplacer la cartouche toner, le message ci-dessous apparaît et la machine s'arrête. Remplacez la Cartouche Toner selon les instructions figurant dans votre contrat d'entretien. Remplacement de la cartouche de toner 0 N'utilisez que des cartouches toner prévues spécifiquement pour cette machine. L'utilisation de tout autre type de cartouches peut endommager la machine. Pour plus de détails, contactez votre service après-vente. 7 ATTENTION Précautions pour éviter de renverser le toner - Veillez à ne pas renverser de toner dans l'appareil, sur les vêtements ou sur les mains. - Si les mains sont en contact avec le toner, lavez les immédiatement à l'eau et au savon. - En cas de projection de toner dans les yeux, les rincer immédiatement à l'eau puis consultez un médecin. 7 ATTENTION Maniement du toner et des bouteilles de toner - Ne pas brûler le toner ni les cartouches de toner. - Des projections de toner peuvent causer des brûlures. bizhub 164 10-7 10.2 Toner 10 1 Ouvrez le Panneau avant de la machine. 2 Faites tourner la cartouche vide en sens anti-horaire pour la déverrouiller. 3 Tirez la cartouche toner vers l'extérieur. 4 Déballez la cartouche de toner, et secouez-la en effectuant de 5 à 10 mouvements de va-et-vient. 5 Insérez légèrement la cartouche dans la machine. Tout en maintenant la protection de la cartouche vers le haut, enlevez l'adhésif de protection. 10 Toner 10-8 bizhub 164 10.2 6 Insérez la cartouche toner dans la machine. % Veillez à ce que la flèche sur le fond de la cartouche soit en face du repère , figurant sur la machine, comme illustré ci-contre. 7 Faites tourner la cartouche toner en sens horaire pour la verrouiller. 8 Fermez le Panneau avant de la machine. % Quand le Panneau avant est refermée, le réapprovisionnement en toner commence automatiquement. bizhub 164 10-9 10.3 Procédure de nettoyage 10 10.3 Procédure de nettoyage REMARQUE Assurez-vous d'éteindre la machine avant de la nettoyer. Vitre d'exposition, Control Panel REMARQUE N'appuyez trop fort pas sur le Control Panel cela pourrait endommager les touches et l'Écran. % Nettoyez la surface avec un chiffon doux et sec. Parois externes, Presse-original REMARQUE N'utilisez jamais de dissolvants ou de solvants comme le benzène pour nettoyer le Presse-original. % Essuyez la surface avec un chiffon doux humidifié avec un détergent ménager neutre. 10 Procédure de nettoyage 10-10 bizhub 164 10.3 11 Dépannage bizhub 164 11-3 11.1 Lorsqu'un problème est détecté (Appel S.A.V.) 11 11 Dépannage Ce chapitre décrit les procédures de dépannage. 11.1 Lorsqu'un problème est détecté (Appel S.A.V.) Si l'incident qui s'est produit ne peut pas être corrigé par l'utilisateur, le message [PROBLÈME MACHINE APPEL S.A.V. (C####)] (écran Appel services techniques) apparaît. Normalement le code d'incident commençant par "C" apparaît sur l'écran Appel services techniques. REMARQUE Quand ce message apparaît, éteignez la machine, et attendez environ 10 secondes avant de la rallumer. Si le message reste affiché, il se peut que la machine soit endommagée. Dans ce cas, il convient de contacter immédiatement votre SAV selon la procédure ci-dessous. 1 Notez pas écrit le code d'incident affiché sur l'écran Appel SAV. 2 Mettez l'Interrupteur sur Arrêt. 3 Débranchez la machine. 4 Contactez le S.A.V. et indiquez le code d'erreur que vous avez noté. 11 Tableau de dépannage 11-4 bizhub 164 11.2 11.2 Tableau de dépannage Dépannage élémentaire Voici les procédures de dépannage élémentaire. Si le problème subsiste à l'issue de l'opération décrite, contactez votre S.A.V. Description du problème Cause/Point à vérifier Remède La machine ne démarre pas quand l'Interrupteur est mis sur la position Marche L'alimentation électrique est-elle présente à la sortie de la prise murale ? Insérez correctement la prise de courant dans la prise murale. La protection du circuit électrique ne s'est-elle pas déclenchée ? Réarmez le disjoncteur du circuit électrique. Rien ne s'affiche à l'Écran Le voyant de la touche Start estil allumé en vert ? La machine est passée en mode Veille. Appuyez sur l'une des touches du Control Panel pour annuler le mode Veille. (p. 3-3) L'opération de copie ne démarre pas. Le Capot supérieur de l'unité de fixation/1er capot supérieur de la machine est-il ouvert ? Refermez soigneusement le Capot supérieur de l'unité de fixation/1er capot supérieur de la machine. La machine vient d'être allumée et se trouve encore en préchauffage. Le préchauffage de la machine prend environ 30 secondes après qu'elle a été mise sous tension. Attendez la fin du cycle de préchauffage. Un message d'erreur ou une icône sont-ils affichés à l'Écran ? Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'Écran. L'impression est trop claire. La densité est-elle réglée vers le pôle le plus clair ? Appuyez sur la touche ) (foncé) dans le paramètre de densité pour sélectionner la densité voulue. (p. 5-5) Le papier est-il humide ? Remplacez le papier. (p. 3-4) L'impression est trop foncée. La densité est-elle réglée vers le pôle le plus foncé ? Appuyez sur la touche * (clair) dans le paramètre de densité pour sélectionner la densité voulue. (p. 5-5) L'original a-t-il été suffisamment plaqué contre la Vitre d'exposition ? Placez l'original de manière à ce qu'il soit bien plaqué contre la Vitre d'exposition. (p. 3-6) L'image est partiellement obscurcie ou floue. Le papier est-il humide ? Remplacez le papier. (p. 3-4) L'original a-t-il été suffisamment plaqué contre la Vitre d'exposition ? Placez l'original de manière à ce qu'il soit bien plaqué contre la Vitre d'exposition. (p. 3-6) bizhub 164 11-5 11.2 Tableau de dépannage 11 Il y a des taches ou des points sombres sur toute la page imprimée. Les sorties imprimées présentent des rayures. La Vitre d'exposition est-elle sale ? Essuyez la surface de la Vitre d'exposition avec un chiffon doux et sec. (p. 10-9) Le Presse-original est-il sale ? Nettoyez le Presse-original avec un chiffon doux imbibé d'un détergent neutre. (p. 10-9) L'original a-t-il été imprimé sur un support très translucide, comme du papier photosensible diazo ou des transparents de rétroprojection ? Placez une feuille de papier vierge par-dessus l'original. (p. 3-6) La copie concerne-t-elle un original recto-verso ? Si vous copiez un original fin recto-verso, le contenu du verso risque par transparence d'être reproduit sur le recto de la copie. Appuyez sur la touche * (clair) dans le paramètre de densité pour régler le niveau de densité. (p. 5-5) L'image est imprimée en biais. L'original est-il correctement positionné ? Positionnez correctement l'original contre la Réglette Original. (p. 3-6) Les Guides latéraux sont-ils correctement positionnés contre le bord du papier ? Faites glisser les Guides latéraux contre le bord du papier. Du papier recourbé a-t-il été chargé dans le plateau ? Aplatissez le papier avant de le charger. La page imprimée est gondolée. Le papier utilisé se gondole-t-il facilement (le papier recyclé, par exemple) ? Enlevez la ramette de papier du magasin papier, retournez-la et rechargez-la dans le magasin. Remplacez le papier. (p. 3-4) Le bord de l'image imprimée est sale. Le Presse-original est-il sale ? Nettoyez le Presse-original avec un chiffon doux imbibé d'un détergent neutre. (p. 10-9) Le format papier sélectionné est-il plus grand que l'original ? (Avec un taux zoom de 100%) Sélectionnez un format de papier copie identique au format de l'original. Ou bien, vous pouvez aussi réaliser une copie agrandie par un taux zoom approprié permettant de l'adapter au format du papier. (p. 5-5) Le format ou l'orientation de l'original sont-ils différent de ceux du papier ? (Avec un taux zoom de 100%) Sélectionnez une orientation papier identique à celle de l'original. La copie a-t-elle été réduite à un format plus petit que l'original ? (lorsqu'un taux zoom réduit a été spécifié) Sélectionnez un taux zoom qui ajuste le format de l'original au format de papier souhaité. Ou bien, vous pouvez aussi réaliser une copie réduite par un taux zoom approprié permettant de l'adapter au format du papier. (p. 5-5) Description du problème Cause/Point à vérifier Remède 11 Tableau de dépannage 11-6 bizhub 164 11.2 Apparition du message "Imprimante non connectée" ou "Erreur d'impression" sur l'écran de l'ordinateur. Le pilote d'imprimante spécifié lors de l'impression peut ne pas être pris en charge par le contrôleur d'imprimante. Vérifiez le nom de l'imprimante spécifiée. Il se peut que le câble USB soit débranché. Vérifiez que le câble est correctement branché. Erreur possible sur la machine. Vérifiez l'Écran de cette machine. Mémoire insuffisante. Effectuez un test d'impression pour vérifier si l'impression est possible. Le processus d'impression sur l'ordinateur est terminé mais l'impression ne démarre pas. Le pilote d'imprimante spécifié lors de l'impression peut ne pas être pris en charge par le contrôleur d'imprimante. Vérifiez le nom de l'imprimante spécifiée. Il se peut que le câble USB soit débranché. Vérifiez que le câble est correctement branché. Erreur possible sur la machine. Vérifiez l'Écran de cette machine. Tâches encore en attente de traitement. Attendez que le traitement de la tâche en cours soit terminé. Mémoire de l'ordinateur insuffisante. Effectuez un test d'impression pour vérifier si l'impression est possible. Impossible de sélectionner des éléments dans le pilote d'imprimante. Certaines fonctions ne peuvent pas se combiner. Les éléments qui apparaissent en gris ne peuvent pas être configurés. Apparition d'un message de "conflit" indiquant "Configuration impossible" ou "La fonction va être annulée". Vous essayez de configurer des fonctions qui ne peuvent pas être combinées. Vérifiez les fonctions spécifiées, et ensuite spécifiez des fonctions qui peuvent être combinées. Impression impossible à partir des paramètres configurés. Le paramétrage est peut-être incorrect. Vérifiez le réglage de chaque élément du pilote d'imprimante. Les fonctions sélectionnées peuvent être combinées dans le pilote d'imprimante, mais pas forcément sur cette machine. Il se peut que le format papier et l'orientation spécifiés dans l'application priment sur les réglages du pilote d'imprimante lors de l'impression. Configurez les réglages correctement dans l'application. La combinaison échoue ; les pages ne sont pas combinées, mais imprimées séparément. Des originaux de différentes orientations ont été combinés. Rectifiez les orientations des originaux. Les images ne sont correctement imprimées. Mémoire de l'ordinateur insuffisante. Simplifiez les images pour réduire le volume des données. Le papier n'est pas prélevé dans la source papier spécifiée. Le papier n'est pas prélevé dans la source papier spécifiée si cette source papier contient du papier de format ou d'orientation différents. Chargez du papier de format ou d'orientation appropriés dans la source papier désirée. Description du problème Cause/Point à vérifier Remède bizhub 164 11-7 11.2 Tableau de dépannage 11 Principaux messages et leurs solutions En cas d'affichage d'un message autre que ceux mentionnés ci-dessous, suivez les instructions données dans le message. "#" indique le magasin papier. 1 représente le Magasin 1, et représente le Plateau d'introduction manuelle. "XXX" indique le format papier. Apparition d'un message indiquant "Scanner pas prêt" sur l'écran de l'ordinateur. La machine n'a pas démarré. Éteignez la machine, puis vérifiez que le câble USB est correctement connecté. Après avoir vérifié le câble USB, rallumez la machine. Il se peut qu'un "crash" système se soit produit sur l'ordinateur ou sur la machine pendant la transmission. Le câble USB n'était pas correctement connecté pendant la transmission. Apparition d'un message indiquant "Scanner occupé" sur l'écran de l'ordinateur. Si une tâche de numérisation TWAIN est envoyée en même temps qu'une tâche de copie, la machine risque de s'arrêter pendant la numérisation. Attendez que l'opération Copie/ Numérisation soit terminée. Apparition d'un message indiquant "Erreur en lecture données" sur l'écran de l'ordinateur. Une erreur s'est produite alors que la machine était en train de lire les données pendant la numérisation. Éteignez la machine, puis vérifiez que le câble USB est correctement connecté. Après avoir vérifié le câble USB, rallumez la machine. Apparition d'un message indiquant "Erreur machine" sur l'écran de l'ordinateur. Il pourrait y avoir un problème avec la transmission des commandes entre le pilote TWAIN et la machine. Vérifiez le câble USB connecté à la machine. Description du problème Cause/Point à vérifier Remède Message Origine Remède [BOURRAGE PAPIER OUVRIR PORTE CÔTÉ 1] Un bourrage papier s'est produit dans la machine. Ouvrez la Porte côté 1 et enlevez le papier coincé, et appuyez ensuite sur la touche Start. (p. 11-9) Tout le papier coincé n'a pas été retiré de l'intérieur de la machine. Ouvrez la Porte côté 1 et enlevez tout le papier coincé, et appuyez ensuite sur la touche Start. (p. 11-9) [MÉMOIRE PLEINE] Le volume des données de l'image numérisée a dépassé la capacité de la mémoire. Appuyez sur une touche quelconque du Control Panel ou éteignez puis rallumez la machine. (Les données numérisées et/ou les données image reçues seront effacées.) Diminuez la résolution et réessayez. (p. 7-9, p. 8-4, p. 8-6) Les données image reçues de l'ordinateur ont dépassé la capacité de la mémoire. [MÉM. FICHIER PLEINE] Le nombre des fichiers de données image numérisées par le scanner a atteint le maximum. 11 Tableau de dépannage 11-8 bizhub 164 11.2 [ERREUR FORMAT PAPIER RÉINSÉR.PAP. (#XXX)] Les images sont imprimées sur du papier d'un format différent de celui de l'original. Recharger du papier d'un format approprié dans le magasin papier, et appuyez ensuite sur la touche Start. (p. 10-4) Les images sont imprimées sur du papier d'un format différent de celui spécifié par le pilote d'imprimante. [PAPIER NON CONFORME CHARGER PAPIER (XXX)] [Auto] est sélectionné dans la liste [Source papier] du pilote d'imprimante, mais le papier du format spécifié n'est pas chargé. [FORMAT PAP.INCORRECT (#XXX)%(#XXX)] Le papier du format spécifié dans le pilote d'imprimante n'est pas chargé dans le magasin papier spécifié. [MAGASIN VIDE CHARGER PAPIER (#XXX)] Le magasin a manqué de papier pendant la copie/impression. [ERREUR TYPE MÉDIA (#XXX)%(#XXX)] Le papier du type spécifié dans le pilote d'imprimante n'est pas chargé dans le magasin papier spécifié. Chargez du papier du format approprié dans le magasin papier et changez le type papier dans le mode Menu, et appuyez ensuite sur la touche Start. (p. 9-4) [PORTE AVANT OUVERTE FERMER PORTE AVANT] Le Panneau avant de la machine est ouvert ou mal fermé. Fermez correctement le Panneau avant de la machine. [PORTE COTÉ1 OUVERTE FERMER PORTE COTÉ 1] La Porte côté 1 de la machine est ouverte ou mal fermée. Fermez correctement la Porte côté 1 de la machine. [TONER VIDE REMPLACER TONER] Le toner est épuisé. La copie ou l'impression ne sont plus possibles. Remplacez la cartouche vide par une cartouche de toner neuve. (p. 10-6) [APPEL MAINTENANCE (M1) APPEL SAV] Une opération d'entretien est nécessaire. Contactez votre technicien S.A.V. [APPEL MAINTENANCE (M2) APPEL SAV] Le Tambour devrait être remplacé. Contactez votre technicien S.A.V. [ÉCHEC CONNEXION PC] Une erreur s'est produite alors que la machine était en train de lire les données pendant la numérisation. Éteignez la machine, puis vérifiez que le câble USB est correctement connecté. Après avoir vérifié le câble USB, rallumez la machine. Si l'erreur subsiste, contactez votre service après vente. Message Origine Remède bizhub 164 11-9 11.3 Remédier aux bourrages papier 11 11.3 Remédier aux bourrages papier Si un bourrage papier se produit, le message [BOURRAGE PAPIER OUVRIR PORTE COTÉ 1] apparaît. Suivez la procédure décrite ci-après pour dégager le bourrage papier. 7 ATTENTION - La zone autour de l' Unité de fixation est extrêmement chaude. Toucher d'autres endroits que ceux qui sont indiqués peut entraîner des brûlures. En cas de brûlure, rincer la peau à l'eau froide puis consultez un médecin. % 1. Unité de fixation 7 ATTENTION - Veillez à ne pas renverser de toner dans l'appareil, sur les vêtements ou sur les mains. - Si les mains sont en contact avec le toner, lavez les immédiatement à l'eau et au savon. - En cas de projection de toner dans les yeux, les rincer immédiatement à l'eau puis consultez un médecin. REMARQUE Toucher la surface du Tambour peut causer une dégradation de la qualité de la copie. Veillez à ne pas toucher la surface du Tambour. % 1. Tambour 1 1 11 Remédier aux bourrages papier 11-10 bizhub 164 11.3 Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau de section de transport vertical 1 Ouvrez la Porte côté 1 de la machine. 2 Ouvrez le Capot supérieur de l'unité de fixation. % Relevez le Capot supérieur de l'unité de fixation jusqu'à ce qu'il se verrouille en position. 3 Retirez lentement le papier. 4 Refermez le Capot supérieur de l'unité de fixation. 5 Refermez la Porte côté 1 de la machine. bizhub 164 11-11 11.3 Remédier aux bourrages papier 11 Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau de la section Prise papier 1 Ouvrez la Porte côté 1 de la machine. 2 Retirez lentement le papier. 3 Refermez la Porte côté 1 de la machine. 4 Tirez le Magasin 1. 5 Enlevez tout le papier du Magasin 1, et rechargez le magasin à nouveau. 11 Remédier aux bourrages papier 11-12 bizhub 164 11.3 6 Faites glisser Guides latéraux au format du papier chargé. REMARQUE Assurez-vous que les Guides latéraux sont bien poussés contre les bords du papier chargé. 7 Fermez le Magasin 1. Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau de la section de sortie 1 Retirez lentement le papier. Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau Plateau d'introduction manuelle (en option) 1 Enlevez tout le papier du Plateau d'introduction manuelle. 2 Ouvrez la Porte côté 1 de la machine. bizhub 164 11-13 11.3 Remédier aux bourrages papier 11 3 Retirez lentement le papier. 4 Refermez la Porte côté 1 de la machine. 5 Rechargez le papier dans le Plateau d'introduction manuelle. 11 Remédier aux bourrages papier 11-14 bizhub 164 11.3 12 Caractéristiques bizhub 164 12-3 12.1 Papier 12 12 Caractéristiques Ce chapitre décrit les spécifications du papier, de la machine, et des options. Dans un souci d'amélioration constante, cette spécification produit est susceptible de modification sans préavis. 12.1 Papier Types papier et capacités * Papier fin et autres papiers spéciaux. En ce qui concerne le grammage du papier, contactez votre SAV. REMARQUE Si le format papier ou le type papier n'est pas correctement spécifié, cela peut entraîner un bourrage ou une dégradation de l'image. Assurez-vous de spécifier correctement les réglages papier. Si vous devez charger du papier ordinaire, du papier recyclé, carte 1, ou carte 2, et dont une face comporte des images imprimées, sélectionnez [***-R] pour chaque type papier dans le paramètre Papier. ("***" indique un type papier.) Type papier Grammage du papier Capacité de papier Papier ordinaire Papier recyclé Papier spécial* 64 g/m2 à 90 g/m2 (17 lb à 23-15/16 lb) Magasin 1 : 250 feuilles Plateau d'introduction multi-feuilles MB-503 : 100 feuilles Carte 1 91 g/m2 à 120 g/m2 (24-3/16 lb à 31-15/16 lb) Magasin 1 : 20 feuilles Plateau d'introduction multi-feuilles MB-503 : 20 feuilles Carte 2 121 g/m2 à 157 g/m2 (32-3/16 lb à 41-3/4 lb) Magasin 1 : 20 feuilles Plateau d'introduction multi-feuilles MB-503 : 20 feuilles 12 Caractéristiques machine 12-4 bizhub 164 12.2 12.2 Caractéristiques machine bizhub 164 Caractéristiques Type Imprimante/Scanner de bureau Porte-document Fixe Photo conducteur OPC Source lumineuse LED Système copie Copie laser électrostatique Système développement Système de développement HMT bi-composant à sec Système de fixation Rouleau de fixation Définition 600 dpi e 600 dpi Originaux Type Feuilles, livres ouverts (doubles-pages), objets en trois dimensions Dimensions Max. A3 (11 e 17) Poids 2 kg (4-7/16 lb) (Objets en 3 dimensions) Type papier copie Papier ordinaire/Papier recyclé/Papier spécial (64 g/m2 à 90 g/m2 (17 lb à 23-15/16 lb)), Carte 1 (91 g/m2 à 120 g/m2 (24-3/16 lb à 31-15/16 lb)), Carte 2(121 g/m2 à 157 g/m2 (32-3/16 lb à 41-3/4 lb)) Format du papier copie A3w à A5 v, 11 e 17w à 8-1/2 e 11 v, FLS*, 16Kw/v, 8Kw Largeur : 90 mm à 297 mm (3-9/16 à 11-11/16), Longueur : 140mm à 432mm (5-1/2 à 17) * Cinq types de format FLS sont disponibles : 220mme 330mmw, 8-1/2 e 13w, 8-1/4 e 13w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4w, et 8 e 13w. Chacun de ces formats peut être sélectionné. Pour plus de détails, contactez votre service après-vente. Capacité du magasin (A4 v (8-1/2 e 11 v)) Magasin 1 Papier ordinaire/Papier recyclé/Papier spécial : 250 feuilles Carte 1/2 : 20 feuilles Capacité Bac de sortie Papier ordinaire/ Papier recyclé/ Papier spécial 250 feuilles (A4 v (8-1/2 e 11v)) 125 feuilles (Sauf A4 v (8-1/2 e 11 v)) Carte 10 feuilles Temps de préchauffage 29 sec. ou moins (température ambiante : 23°C (73,4°F)) La durée de préchauffage peut varier en fonction de l'environnement d'exploitation et de l'utilisation. Largeur de rognage d'image Bord supérieur, Bord inférieur, Bord droit, Bord gauche : 4mm (3/16) Première copie (en impression sur A4 v (8-1/2 e 11v)) 8,0 sec. ou moins Le délai avant production de la première copie dépend du mode utilisé. Vitesse de copie (Avec impression A4v (8-1/2 e 11v)) Papier ordinaire : 16 feuilles/min. Carte 1/2 : 7 feuilles/min. Agrandissement copie : Taille réelle : 100% Agrandissement : 115%, 141%, 200% Réduction : 81%, 70%, 50% Manuel : 50% à 200% (par pas de 1%) : Taille réelle : 100% Agrandissement : 121%, 129%, 200% Réduction : 78%, 64%, 50% Manuel : 50% à 200% (par pas de 1%) bizhub 164 12-5 12.2 Caractéristiques machine 12 Nombre de copies réalisées en continu 1 à 99 feuilles Réglage de la densité Réglage automatique de densité, Réglage manuel de densité (9 niveaux) Alimentation AC 220 V à 240 V, 3,5 A, 50/60Hz Consommation électrique max. 800W ±10% Dimensions Largeur 570mm (22-7/16) Profondeur 530 mm (20-7/8) Hauteur 449 mm (17-11/16) Encombrement machine Largeur 928mm (36-9/16) Profondeur 530 mm (20-7/8) Hauteur 449 mm (17-11/16) (Lorsque le Plateau d'introduction manuelle est utilisé) Taille mémoire 32Mo Poids Approx. 23,5 kg (Approx. 51-13/16 lb) Caractéristiques 12 Option 12-6 bizhub 164 12.3 12.3 Option Plateau d'introduction multi-feuilles MB-503 Caractéristiques Type papier copie Papier ordinaire/Papier recyclé/Papier spécial (64 g/m2 à 90 g/m2 (17 lb à 23-15/16 lb)), Carte 1 (91 g/m2 à 120 g/m2 (24-3/16 lb à 31-15/16 lb)), Carte 2 (121 g/m2 à 157 g/m2 (32-3/16 lb à 41-3/4 lb)) Format du papier copie A3w à A5 v, 11 e 17w à 8-1/2 e 11 v, FLS*, 16Kw/v, 8Kw Largeur : 90 mm à 297 mm (3-9/16 à 11-11/16), Longueur : 140mm à 432mm (5-1/2 à 17) * Cinq types de format FLS sont disponibles : 220mme 330mmw, 8-1/2 e 13w, 8-1/4 e 13w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4w, et 8 e 13w. Chacun de ces formats peut être sélectionné. Pour plus de détails, contactez votre service après-vente. Capacité du magasin (A4 v (8-1/2 e 11 v)) Papier ordinaire/Papier recyclé/Papier spécial : 100 feuilles Carte 1/2 : 20 feuilles Alimentation Fournie par la machine Consommation électrique max. 8W ou moins Dimensions Largeur 446mm (17-9/16) Profondeur 469 mm (18-7/16) Hauteur 82 mm (3-1/4) Poids Approx. 1,6 kg (Approx. 3-1/2 lb) 13 Annexe bizhub 164 13-3 13.1 Glossaire 13 13 Annexe 13.1 Glossaire Les termes utilisés pour les fonctions Copie, Impression, et Numérisation sont expliqués ci-dessous. Terme Description Aperçu Fonction vous permettant d'afficher une image avant de passer à l'impression ou la numérisation proprement dite. Bit Acronyme de binary digit (chiffre binaire). La plus petite unité d'information (quantité de données) gérée sur un ordinateur ou une imprimante. Un bit ne peut prendre que de valeurs 0 ou 1 pour indiquer les données. BMP Abréviation de bitmap. Format de fichier utilisé pour l'enregistrement de données images. (L'extension de fichier est ".bmp".) Généralement utilisé sur les platesformes Windows. BMP couvre l'intensité de la couleur monochrome (2 valeurs) ou couleur (16 777 216 couleurs). Les images BMP ne conviennent pas au stockage en format compressé. Définition La valeur de la résolution exprime la précision de reproduction des détails d'un objet sur une image ou un objet d'impression. Dégradé Les niveaux de dégradés d'une image. Plus les niveaux sont nombreux, plus ils sont à même de reproduire une variation nuancée. Désinstaller Désinstaller. DPI (dpi) Acronyme de Dots Per Pouce (Points par pouce). Unité de définition utilisée par les imprimantes et les scanners. Indique le nombre de points par pouce. Plus la valeur est élevée, plus la définition est importante. Extension de fichier Caractères ajoutés au nom du fichier pour reconnaître le format de fichier. L'extension de fichier, précédée par un point, est ajoutée à la suite du nom d'un fichier. Installer C'est l'implantation de matériel, des systèmes d'exploitation, des applications, des pilotes d'imprimante ou d'autres logiciels sur un ordinateur. Mémoire Mémoire destinée au stockage temporaire des données. Certains types de mémoire conservent les données même après la mise hors tension, d'autres pas. Par défaut Un réglage initial. Il s'agit des réglages sélectionnés à l'avance et activés lors de la mise en marche de la machine, ou des réglages sélectionnés à l'avance et activés lors de l'activation de la fonction. PDF Abréviation de Portable Document Format. Il s'agit d'un document formaté électroniquement et présente l'extension de fichier ".pdf". Le PDF est basé sur un format PostScript, et il peut être affiché grâce au logiciel gratuit Adobe Acrobat Reader. Pilote Logiciel fonctionnant comme passerelle entre un ordinateur et un périphérique. Pilote d'imprimante Logiciel fonctionnant comme passerelle entre un ordinateur et une imprimante. Pilote Scanner Logiciel fonctionnant comme passerelle entre un ordinateur et un scanner. Pixel La plus petite unité constitutive d'une image. Plug and Play Mécanisme de détection immédiate d'un périphérique raccordé à un ordinateur et de recherche automatique d'un pilote approprié pour rendre le périphérique opérationnel. Propriétés Informations d'attribut. Quand vous utilisez un pilote d'imprimante, plusieurs fonctions peuvent être spécifiées dans les propriétés du fichier. Les propriétés d'un fichier vous permettent de vérifier les informations d'attribut du fichier. Système d'exploitation Abréviation de système d'exploitation. Logiciel de base utilisé pour contrôler le système d'un ordinateur. Windows est un OS. Travail d'impression Demande d'impression transmise par un ordinateur à un périphérique d'impression. 13 Glossaire 13-4 bizhub 164 13.1 TWAIN Une norme d'interface définie entre périphériques de mise en image englobant les scanners et les appareils photo numériques et les applications comportant un logiciel graphique. Pour utiliser un périphérique compatible TWAIN, il faut installer le pilote TWAIN approprié USB Abréviation de Universal Serial Bus. Il s'agit d'une interface générale définie pour connecter une souris, une imprimante et autres périphériques à un ordinateur. WIA Acronyme de Windows Imaging Acquisition. Fonction permettant d'importer les données image depuis des périphériques d'acquisition d'image, y compris les scanners et appareils photo numériques. Pour utiliser un périphérique compatible WIA, il faut installer le pilote WIA approprié Terme Description 14 Index bizhub 164 14-3 14.1 Index des éléments 14 14 Index 14.1 Index des éléments 2en1 5-8 4en1 5-9 A Affichage 2-6, 4-3 Alimentation 1-16 Appel S.A.V. 11-3 Avec mode mémoire 5-15 Avertissements et étiquettes de précaution 1-14 B Bac de sortie 2-4 Back/Stop/Reset 2-6, 4-3 C Capacités papier 12-3 Capot côté 1 2-4 Caractéristiques 12-3 Caractéristiques machine 12-4 Cartouche toner 2-5 Chargement du papier 3-4, 10-4 Chargement du papier dans l'introducteur manuel 3-5 Chargement du papier dans le plateau d'introduction manuelle 10-5 Charger du papier dans le Magasin 1 3-4, 10-4 Combinaison 7-6 COMPT FORM 9-10 Configurer un format personnalisé 3-6 Conseils de sécurité 1-6 CONTRASTE LCD 9-6 Copie 7-5 COPIE CAR.IDENTITÉ 5-7 Cordon d'alimentation 2-4 Couvercle supérieur de l'unité de fixation 2-5 Couvre-original 2-4, 10-9 Curseur 4-6 D Densité 4-5, 5-6 Déclarations réglementaires 1-10 Définition 7-9 Déhum. photocond. 9-7 Désinstaller le pilote 6-8 Désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante 6-8 Désinstaller le pilote scanner 6-9 E Effacement 5-11 Effacement + Séparation livre 5-13 Enregistrer les réglages Copie 5-15 Entretien 10-3 Environnement 1-16, 6-3 Espace requis 1-15 Extérieur de l'unité principale 2-4 F Face 2-4 Fonction Copie 5-3, 5-7, 9-3 Fonction de numérisation 8-3 Fonctions Imprimante 7-3 Format de l'original 7-5 Format de sortie 7-5 Format papier 4-4, 5-5 G Gestion Utilisateur 9-7 I Icône/Message 4-5 Incidents 11-3 Indications affichées 4-4 Init. P de Control 3-3 Initialisation automatique 9-6 Installation Plug and Play 6-4 Installer avec le programme d'installation 6-7 Installer le pilote 6-3 Installer le pilote sous Windows 2000 6-5 Installer le pilote sous Windows 7 6-7 Installer le pilote sous Windows Vista/ Server 2008 6-4 Installer le pilote sous Windows XP/ Server 2003 6-5 Interrupteur Marche/Arrêt 2-4 Intérieur de l'unité principale 2-5 L Langue 9-6 Levier d'ouverture du capot côté 1 2-4 M Magasin 1 2-4 Magasin papier 4-4, 5-5 Marques déposées et copyrights 1-4 Menu 9-3 Menu ou fonction 4-6 Menu/Select 2-6, 4-3 Message de rechargement 10-3 Message de Remplacement 10-6 MÉM.FORMAT PERSO 9-7 Mode croisé 9-8 Mode Veille 3-3, 7-3, 9-6 14-4 bizhub 164 14 Index des éléments 14.1 N Nombre de copies 4-4, 5-5 Numérisation d'un document 8-5 Numériser un document 8-3 O Onglet À propos de 7-9 Onglet Configurer 7-5 Onglet Disposition 7-6 Onglet Filigrane 7-8 Onglet Qualité 7-9 Onglet Réglages par page 7-7 Opérations Impression 7-3 Option 12-6 Options 2-3 Ordre copie 4en1 9-10 Orientation 7-5 ORIGINAUX MIXTES 5-8 P Page face de couverture 7-7 Panneau de contrôle 2-4, 2-6, 4-3, 10-9 Papier 10-3, 12-3 Param. base 5-5 PARAM. COPIE 9-9 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 7-4 Paramètres du pilote scanner TWAIN 8-4 Paramètres du pilote scanner WIA 8-5 PARAMÈTRES MACHINE 9-6 Paramètres Tâche 9-8 Pilote scanner TWAIN 8-3 Pilote scanner WIA 8-5 Placer les originaux 3-6 Plateau d'introduction manuelle 2-4 Plateau d'introduction multi-feuilles 2-3, 12-6 Port USB (type A) USB2.0/1.1 2-4 Priorité Tri 9-9 Procédure de nettoyage 10-9 Programmes 9-4 Q Qualité 4-5, 5-6 Quick Settings 2-6, 4-3 R Raccordement à l'ordinateur 6-3 Rappeler un programme de copie 5-15 Remédier aux bourrages papier 11-9 Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau de la section de sortie 11-12 Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau de la section Prise papier 11-11 Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau de section de transport vertical 11-10 Remédier aux bourrages papier au niveau du Plateau d'introduction manuelle 11-12 Remplacement de la cartouche de toner 10-6 Revêtement 10-9 RÉGLAGE EFFACENT. 9-9 Réglage Travail Copie 9-4 Réglages Application 5-7 Régler la qualité depuis les Réglages personnalisés 8-6 Réglette Original 2-5 RGL VITESSE TOUCHE 9-6 Rouleau prise papier 2-5 S Séparation Livre 5-12 Source papier 7-5 Start 2-6, 4-3 T Tableau d’association des fonctions 5-16 Tableau de dépannage 11-4 Tambour 2-5 Taux zoom 4-5, 5-6 Tâches copie en file d'attente 3-3 Toner 10-6 TOTAL COMPT 9-10 TOTAL PAGES 9-10 TOTAL SCAN 9-10 Tri 5-10, 7-5 Tri+ Mode croisé 5-10 Type papier 4-4, 7-5 Types de papier 12-3 U Unité de fixation 2-5 Utilitaires 9-5 V Veille rapide 9-6 Vitre d'exposition 2-5, 10-9 Voyant LED 4-3 Vue 7-4 Z Zoom 7-5 bizhub 164 14-5 14.2 Index des touches 14 14.2 Index des touches 2en1 5-8 4en1 5-9 A Ajustement 7-9 C COMPT FORM 9-10 CONTRASTE LCD 9-6 COPIE CAR.IDENTITÉ 5-7 D DEHUM. PHOTOCOND. 9-7 Densité 9-4 DENSITÉ (LIVRE) 9-6 DENSITÉ IMPRESS. 9-6 Définition 8-4, 8-6 Départ 2-6, 4-3 Détails Combinaison... 7-6 Disposition Copie 4en1 9-10 E EFF. DES BORDS 5-11, 5-14 EFFAC. CENTRE 5-14 EFFAC.CENTRE&CADRE 5-14 EFFACEMENT 5-11, 5-13 EFFACEMENT GAUCHE 5-11 EFFACEMENT SUP. 5-11 ENREGISTREMENT 5-15 F FONCTION COPIE 5-7, 9-3 I INIT. P de CONTROL 9-6 L Langue 9-6 Luminosité 8-4, 8-6 M MAG. PAPIER 1 9-4, 9-8 Menu 9-3 Menu/Sélect. 2-6, 4-3 MÉM.FORMAT PERSO 9-7 Mode croisé 5-10, 9-8 MODE MÉMOIRE 5-15, 9-4 Mode Scanner 8-4 Mode Utilisateur 9-7 Mode Veille 9-6 Modifier format personnalisé... 7-5 N NIVEAU DENSITÉ 9-9 O ORIGINAUX MIXTES 5-8 P PAPIER INTRO MANU 9-4, 9-8 PARAM. COPIE 9-9 PARAMÈTRES MACHINE 9-6 Paramètres Tâche 9-8 PRIORITÉ DENSITÉ 9-9 PRIORITÉ IMPRESS 9-8 PRIORITÉ MAG 9-8 PRIORITÉ QUALITÉ 9-9 PRIORITÉ TRI 9-9 Q Qualité 9-4 R RAPPEL 5-15 Relié gauche 5-12 RELIURE DROITE 5-12 Retour/Arrêt/Réinitialiser 2-6, 4-3 RÉGL. TRAV. COPIE 9-4 RÉGLAGE EFFACENT. 9-9 Réglages personnalisés 8-6 Réglages rapides 2-6, 4-3 RGL VITESSE TOUCHE 9-6 S SÉLECTION MAGASIN 9-4 Séparation Livre 5-12, 5-13 T TAUX ZOOM 9-4 TOTAL COMPT 9-10 TOTAL PAGES 9-10 TOTAL SCAN 9-10 TRI 5-10 U Utilitaires 9-5 V VEILLE RAPIDE 9-6 14 Index des touches 14-6 bizhub 164 14.2 Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) User’s Guide . bizhub 423/363/283/223 Contents-1 Table of contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome .......................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.1 User's guides ..................................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.2 User's Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.2 Use conditions................................................................................................................................. 1-4 1.3 Conventions used in this manual .................................................................................................. 1-5 1.3.1 Symbols used in this manual ............................................................................................................. 1-5 To use this machine safely................................................................................................................. 1-5 Procedural instruction........................................................................................................................ 1-5 Key symbols....................................................................................................................................... 1-6 1.3.2 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6 Original and paper sizes .................................................................................................................... 1-6 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6 2 Overview 2.1 Overview of each function ............................................................................................................. 2-3 2.1.1 Supported function table ................................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.2 Key layout after the function is expanded ......................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.3 Functions available with expanded functions.................................................................................... 2-4 3 Assigning Application Keys 3.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.1.1 Key layout after the function is expanded ......................................................................................... 3-3 3.1.2 [Application Menu] ............................................................................................................................. 3-4 3.2 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2.................................................................................... 3-5 3.2.1 [Application Key Settings] .................................................................................................................. 3-5 4 Web Browser Function 4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 4-3 4.1.1 Available operations with the Web Browser function ........................................................................ 4-3 4.1.2 Specifications..................................................................................................................................... 4-4 Specifications for Web Browser ........................................................................................................ 4-4 Restrictions on Flash Player .............................................................................................................. 4-4 4.2 Displaying Web Browser ................................................................................................................ 4-5 4.3 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser............................................................. 4-6 4.3.1 Restricting the use of the Web browser in the MFP .......................................................................... 4-6 [Web Browser Setting] ....................................................................................................................... 4-6 4.3.2 Restricting the use of Web browser for each user ............................................................................ 4-7 [Function Permission]......................................................................................................................... 4-7 4.3.3 Restricting the use of local contents ................................................................................................. 4-8 [Web browser contents access]......................................................................................................... 4-8 4.4 Basic operation ............................................................................................................................... 4-9 4.4.1 Screen components........................................................................................................................... 4-9 4.4.2 Operating instructions...................................................................................................................... 4-10 Operation using the Touch Panel .................................................................................................... 4-10 Operation using the Keypad ............................................................................................................ 4-10 4.4.3 How to enter text ............................................................................................................................. 4-10 Entering text..................................................................................................................................... 4-10 Contents-2 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.4.4 Screen display mode ....................................................................................................................... 4-11 [Normal]............................................................................................................................................ 4-11 [Just-Fit Rendering].......................................................................................................................... 4-11 [Smart-Fit Rendering]....................................................................................................................... 4-11 4.4.5 Specifying speaker volume.............................................................................................................. 4-11 4.5 Toolbar ........................................................................................................................................... 4-12 4.5.1 Description of the toolbar ................................................................................................................ 4-12 4.5.2 [Favorites] - [List].............................................................................................................................. 4-13 List of favorites................................................................................................................................. 4-13 4.5.3 [Favorites] - [Add]............................................................................................................................. 4-13 4.5.4 [Address] .......................................................................................................................................... 4-14 4.5.5 [History] ............................................................................................................................................ 4-14 [Display History] ............................................................................................................................... 4-14 4.5.6 [Print]................................................................................................................................................ 4-15 4.5.7 [Menu] .............................................................................................................................................. 4-15 4.6 Configuring the Web Browser settings....................................................................................... 4-16 4.6.1 [Page Operation] .............................................................................................................................. 4-16 4.6.2 [Display]............................................................................................................................................ 4-16 4.6.3 [Manage windows] ........................................................................................................................... 4-17 4.6.4 [Settings] .......................................................................................................................................... 4-17 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file .......................................................................... 4-18 4.7.1 Printing a document file ................................................................................................................... 4-18 4.7.2 Displaying a document file............................................................................................................... 4-20 4.7.3 Saving a document file .................................................................................................................... 4-21 4.8 Uploading a document file ........................................................................................................... 4-22 4.8.1 Restrictions ...................................................................................................................................... 4-22 4.8.2 Uploading a scanned document file ................................................................................................ 4-22 4.8.3 Uploading a document file in a User Box ........................................................................................ 4-23 5 PageScope Web Connection (Web Browser Function) 5.1 Using PageScope Web Connection .............................................................................................. 5-3 5.1.1 Prior check......................................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.1.2 How to access ................................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2 Screen components........................................................................................................................ 5-4 5.3 Logging in and logging out ............................................................................................................ 5-5 5.3.1 Login .................................................................................................................................................. 5-5 5.3.2 Logout................................................................................................................................................ 5-5 5.4 Using the User Box function .......................................................................................................... 5-6 5.4.1 Open User Box .................................................................................................................................. 5-6 [Open User Box]................................................................................................................................. 5-6 [File List] ............................................................................................................................................. 5-7 5.4.2 Document operations ........................................................................................................................ 5-8 Printing a document........................................................................................................................... 5-8 Deleting a document........................................................................................................................ 5-10 6 Image Panel 6.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 6-3 Features ............................................................................................................................................. 6-3 6.2 Displaying the Image Panel............................................................................................................ 6-4 6.3 Operating Image Panel................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.3.1 Screen components........................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.3.2 General operation .............................................................................................................................. 6-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 Contents-3 6.3.3 Reading a document.......................................................................................................................... 6-8 Scanning a document ........................................................................................................................ 6-8 Retrieving from User Box................................................................................................................... 6-9 Retrieving a document from an external memory............................................................................ 6-10 Using data saved in a cellular phone or PDA .................................................................................. 6-11 6.3.4 Editing the document....................................................................................................................... 6-12 [Preview]........................................................................................................................................... 6-12 [Document/Page] - [Edit Document] ................................................................................................ 6-12 [Document/Page] - [Combine Documents]...................................................................................... 6-13 [Document/Page] - [Document Settings] ......................................................................................... 6-14 [Return to Scan Dest.]...................................................................................................................... 6-14 6.3.5 Specifying a destination................................................................................................................... 6-15 Printing............................................................................................................................................. 6-15 Specifying destinations.................................................................................................................... 6-16 Saving a document in an external memory ..................................................................................... 6-16 6.3.6 Checking the send tray .................................................................................................................... 6-17 Send Tray......................................................................................................................................... 6-17 [Check TX Tray]................................................................................................................................ 6-17 6.3.7 Sending data from a cellular phone or PDA .................................................................................... 6-18 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book ................................................................................... 6-19 6.4.1 Specifications of photo data............................................................................................................ 6-19 6.4.2 Registering photo data .................................................................................................................... 6-20 6.5 Customizing Image Panel ............................................................................................................ 6-22 6.5.1 Customizing the Read Data area ..................................................................................................... 6-22 6.5.2 Customizing the Document Destination area .................................................................................. 6-23 6.5.3 Deleting a registered shortcut icon.................................................................................................. 6-24 7 PDF Processing Function 7.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 7-3 Available operations with the PDF processing function .................................................................... 7-3 7.2 PDF document properties .............................................................................................................. 7-4 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature ............................................................ 7-5 7.3.1 Password-based encryption.............................................................................................................. 7-5 7.3.2 Digital ID-based encryption ............................................................................................................... 7-6 7.4 Direct Print....................................................................................................................................... 7-8 8 Searchable PDF function 8.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 8-3 Precautions when creating searchable PDF files .............................................................................. 8-3 Recognizable character size.............................................................................................................. 8-3 8.2 Configuring the OCR operation setting ........................................................................................ 8-4 [OCR Operation Setting] .................................................................................................................... 8-4 8.3 Configuring the searchable PDF setting....................................................................................... 8-5 9 My Panel Function 9.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.1 Available operations with My Panel ................................................................................................... 9-3 Customizable items ........................................................................................................................... 9-3 Functions available by linking to the Web browser ........................................................................... 9-3 Functions available with Image Panel................................................................................................ 9-4 9.1.2 My Panel acquisition procedure ........................................................................................................ 9-4 9.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Panel function ..................................................................................... 9-4 9.2 Displaying My Panel........................................................................................................................ 9-5 9.2.1 Main Menu ......................................................................................................................................... 9-5 9.2.2 Displaying Main Menu........................................................................................................................ 9-5 Contents-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 Customizing My Panel.................................................................................................................... 9-6 9.3.1 [My Panel Settings] ............................................................................................................................ 9-6 9.3.2 Displaying [My Panel Settings]........................................................................................................... 9-7 9.3.3 [Language Setting] ............................................................................................................................. 9-8 9.3.4 [Measurement Unit Settings].............................................................................................................. 9-8 9.3.5 [Copier Settings] ................................................................................................................................ 9-9 [Default Tab]....................................................................................................................................... 9-9 [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] .................................................................................................... 9-9 [Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4] ............................................................................................. 9-10 [Default Tab Density Settings].......................................................................................................... 9-10 9.3.6 [Scan/Fax Settings] .......................................................................................................................... 9-11 [Default Tab]..................................................................................................................................... 9-11 [Address Book Index Default] .......................................................................................................... 9-11 [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] .................................................................................................. 9-12 [Default Address Book] .................................................................................................................... 9-12 [Default Address Type]..................................................................................................................... 9-12 9.3.7 [User Box Settings] .......................................................................................................................... 9-13 [Default Tab]..................................................................................................................................... 9-13 [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] .................................................................................................. 9-13 9.3.8 [Color Selection Settings] ................................................................................................................ 9-14 9.3.9 [Main Menu Settings] ....................................................................................................................... 9-15 Main menu button............................................................................................................................ 9-15 Registering a main menu button...................................................................................................... 9-15 9.3.10 [Initial Screen Settings] .................................................................................................................... 9-16 10 My Address function 10.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 10-3 10.1.1 Classification of address books....................................................................................................... 10-3 Public address book ........................................................................................................................ 10-3 My Address Book ............................................................................................................................ 10-3 10.1.2 My Address Book acquisition procedure......................................................................................... 10-4 10.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Address function ............................................................................... 10-4 10.2 Registering and editing a destination ......................................................................................... 10-5 10.2.1 Address Book .................................................................................................................................. 10-5 10.2.2 Group ............................................................................................................................................... 10-6 10.3 Copying destinations between address books.......................................................................... 10-8 10.3.1 Copying destinations from the public address book to My Address Book..................................... 10-8 10.3.2 Copying destinations from My Address Book to the public address book ..................................... 10-9 10.4 Using My Address Book when sending a document............................................................... 10-10 10.4.1 Specifying destinations.................................................................................................................. 10-10 10.4.2 Searching for destinations ............................................................................................................. 10-10 11 Index 11.1 Index by item ................................................................................................................................. 11-3 11.2 Index by button.............................................................................................................................. 11-4 1 Introduction bizhub 423/363/283/223 1-3 1.1 Welcome 1 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome Thank you for purchasing this machine. This User's Guide describes the overview and usage of functions available by registering an optional license kit to this machine, and functions available by connecting it to an application. To use each function effectively, please read this User's Guide. 1.1.1 User's guides Printed manual Overview [Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations] This manual describes operating procedures and the functions that are most frequently used in order to enable you to begin using this machine immediately. This manual contains notes and precautions that should be followed to ensure safe usage of this machine. Please be sure to read this manual before using this machine. This manual describes details on trademarks and copyrights. • Trademarks and copyrights User's guide DVD manuals Overview [User's Guide Copy Operations] This manual describes details on copy mode operations and the settings of this machine. • Specifications of originals and copy paper • Copy function • Maintaining this machine • Troubleshooting [User's Guide Enlarge Display Operations] This manual describes details on operating procedures of the enlarge display mode. • Copy function • Scanning function • G3 fax function • Network fax function [User's Guide Print Operations] This manual describes details on printer functions. • Printer function • Setting the printer driver [User's Guide Box Operations] This manual describes details on user box functions. • Saving data in user boxes • Retrieving data from user boxes • Transferring and printing data from user boxes [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations] This manual describes details on transmitting scanned data. • E-mail TX, FTP TX, SMB TX, Save in User Box, Web- DAV TX, Web Services • G3 fax • IP Address Fax, Internet Fax [User's Guide Fax Driver Operations] This manual describes details on the fax driver function that transmits faxes directly from a computer. • PC-FAX [User's Guide Network Administrator] This manual describes details on setting methods for each function using the network connection. • Network settings • Settings using PageScope Web Connection 1 Use conditions 1-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 1.2 1.1.2 User's Guide This User's Guide is intended for users ranging from those using this machine for the first time to administrators. It describes basic operations, functions that enable more convenient operations, simple troubleshooting operations, and various setting methods of this machine. Note that basic technical knowledge about the product is required to enable users to perform troubleshooting operation. Limit your troubleshooting operations to the areas explained in this manual. Should you experience any problems, please contact our service representative. 1.2 Use conditions Enabling i-Option LK-101 v2 allows you to access the Internet from the Control Panel of the MFP. Users will bear a responsibility for contents accessed, downloaded, and uploaded using Web Browser in the MFP, and other communicated contents. Users shall conform to the company rules and laws of the country where this machine is used. Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. and its group businesses will not bear any responsibility for use of the Internet by users. [User's Guide Advanced Function Operations] This manual describes details on functions that become available by registering the optional license kit and by connecting to an application. • Web browser function • Image panel • PDF Processing Function • Searchable PDF • My panel and My address functions User's guide DVD manuals Overview bizhub 423/363/283/223 1-5 1.3 Conventions used in this manual 1 1.3 Conventions used in this manual 1.3.1 Symbols used in this manual Symbols are used in this manual to express various types of information. The following describes each symbol related to correct and safe usage of this machine. To use this machine safely 7 WARNING - This symbol indicates that a failure to heed the instructions may lead to death or serious injury. 7 CAUTION - This symbol indicates that negligence of the instructions may lead to mishandling that may cause injury or property damage. NOTICE This symbol indicates a risk that may result in damage to this machine or documents. Follow the instructions to avoid property damage. Procedural instruction 0 This check mark indicates an option that is required in order to use conditions or functions that are prerequisite for a procedure. 1 This format number "1" represents the first step. 2 This format number represents the order of serial steps. % This symbol indicates a supplementary explanation of a procedural instruction. % This symbol indicates transition of the Control Panel to access a desired menu item. This symbol indicates a desired page. The operation procedures are described using illustrations. 1 Conventions used in this manual 1-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 1.3 dReference This symbol indicates a reference. View the reference as required. Key symbols [ ] Key names on the touch panel or computer screen, or a name of user's guide are indicated by these brackets. Bold text This presents a key name, part name, product name or option name on the control panel. 1.3.2 Original and paper indications Original and paper sizes The following explains the indication for originals and paper described in this manual. When indicating the original or paper size, the Y side represents the width and the X side the length. Original and paper indications w indicates the paper size with the length (X) being longer than the width (Y). v indicates the paper size with the length (X) being shorter than the width (Y). 2 Overview bizhub 423/363/283/223 2-3 2.1 Overview of each function 2 2 Overview 2.1 Overview of each function The following describes the overview of each function. Reference - To use the advanced function, an optional Upgrade Kit UK-203 is required. - A Hard Disk must be installed in the MFP in order to use the advanced function. - For details on the license kit registration and enabling functions on MFPs, refer to the [Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations]. - To connect the function to the application, enable it at the application side. For details on enabling the function, refer to the manual for the corresponding application. 2.1.1 Supported function table The following table shows the supported functions for the license kits and applications. 2.1.2 Key layout after the function is expanded Adding the Web Browser function, Image Panel function or My Panel function changes the usage of the User Box, Fax/Scan, and Copy keys on the Control Panel. - The User Box key functions as an Application Menu, and the Fax/Scan and Copy keys function as application keys. - Press Application Menu to display the [Application Menu], which allows you to switch to the added function. - To fit the use status, the function to be assigned to the application key can be changed. For details, refer to page 3-3. Web Browser Image panel PDF processing Searchable PDF i-Option LK-101 v2 o o − − i-Option LK-102 − − o − i-Option LK-105 − − − o My Panel My Address PageScope My Panel Manager o o 2 Overview of each function 2-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 2.1 2.1.3 Functions available with expanded functions The following describes the overview of each function. For details, refer to the reference described below. Reference - When the accounting management device is installed in the MFP, Image Panel cannot be used. Function Overview Reference Web Browser This function can be used by registering i-Option LK-101 v2 in the MFP. By using the Control Panel of the MFP connected to the network, you can access to the Internet or intranet and display or print the contents. Also, through a Web browser, you can operate PageScope Web Connection of the MFP connected to the network and use documents saved in User Boxes. p. 4-3 p. 5-3 Image Panel This function can be used by registering i-Option LK-101 v2 in the MFP. Image Panel is a new intuitive and easy-to-understand panel interface. This panel helps you easily image the entire operation flow from loading to sending a document. You can add photo data to the one-touch destinations using Page- Scope Web Connection. The registered photo data is applied to the address list of Image Panel. p. 6-3 PDF processing This function can be used by registering i-Option LK-102 in the MFP. Performs password- or digital ID-based encryption of PDF, adds a digital signature, and configures property settings when distributing documents in the PDF format using the scan or User Box function. p. 7-3 Searchable PDF This function is available when i-Option LK-105 is registered with the MFP. You can create a text searchable PDF file by pasting transparent text data on the area of a document in which characters are recognized through an OCR process. You can create a searchable PDF file when saving or sending an original in the PDF format using the scan or User Box functions. p. 8-3 My Panel This function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. Available by centrally managing the environment of the Control Panel customized by the user depending on the application (My Panel), and then obtaining My Panel on the MFP selected by the user. p. 9-3 My Address This function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. Available by centrally managing the personal address book (My Address Book) by the server, and then obtaining My Address Book on the MFP selected by the user. p. 10-3 3 Assigning Application Keys bizhub 423/363/283/223 3-3 3.1 Overview 3 3 Assigning Application Keys 3.1 Overview The following describes the key layout and [Application Menu] of the Control Panel. 3.1.1 Key layout after the function is expanded Adding the Web Browser function, Image Panel function or My Panel function allows User Box to function as Application Menu, and Fax/Scan and Copy as application keys. Reference - The Web Browser and Image Panel functions can be used by registering i-Option LK-101 v2 in the MFP. - The My Panel function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. No. Name Description 1 Application menu Press this key to display the [Application Menu]. You cannot assign a different function to this key. If a function is added, attach a Application Menu sticker (included in the Upgrade Kit UK-203) to change the key name on the Control Panel. For details, refer to page 3-4. 2 Application key 1 The fax/scan function is assigned by default. The administrator can assign a different function to this key. If the function assigned to the key is changed, attach a sticker describing the new function (included in the Upgrade Kit UK-203) to change the key name on the Control Panel. For details on assigning a function, refer to page 3-5. 1 2 3 3 Overview 3-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 3.1 3.1.2 [Application Menu] Press Application Menu to display the [Application Menu]. To use a function not assigned to the application key 1 or 2, you can switch functions to a desired one from the [Application Menu]. 3 Application key 2 The copy function is assigned by default. The administrator can assign a different function to this key. If the function assigned to the key is changed, attach a sticker describing the new function (included in the Upgrade Kit UK-203) to change the key name on the Control Panel. For details on assigning a function, refer to page 3-5. No. Name Description bizhub 423/363/283/223 3-5 3.2 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2 3 3.2 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2 To fit the use status, the function to be assigned to the application keys 1 and 2 can be changed. 3.2.1 [Application Key Settings] To assign a function to the application keys 1 and 2, use [Application Key Settings]. 1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility]. 2 Press [Administrator Settings]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [System Settings]. 5 In [System Settings] (2/2), press [Application Key Settings]. 6 Select an application key ([Key 1] or [Key 2]) to which you assign a function. 3 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2 3-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 3.2 7 Select a function to be assigned. 8 Press [OK]. The function is assigned to the application key. 4 Web Browser Function bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-3 4.1 Overview 4 4 Web Browser Function 4.1 Overview The Web Browser function prints, displays, and saves contents on the Internet or intranet by accessing them from the Control Panel of the MFP connected to the network. Reference - This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-101 v2 registered. 4.1.1 Available operations with the Web Browser function The Web Browser function allows you to perform the following operations. - Displaying and printing Web contents on the Internet or intranet. - Displaying, printing, and saving a document file on the Internet or intranet. - Uploading a scanned document file or a document file saved in a User Box to a server on the Internet or intranet. - Sharing documents in the User Box of MFPs on the network using PageScope Web Connection. - When the My Panel function is available, you can personalize the user operation environment of the Web browser by linking the Web browser with My Panel. dReference For details on using PageScope Web Connection from the Control Panel, refer to page 5-3. For details on My Panel, refer to page 9-3. 4 Overview 4-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.1 4.1.2 Specifications Specifications for Web Browser The following shows the major specifications of the Web Browser installed in the MFP. Restrictions on Flash Player There are following restrictions on the Flash Player installed in Web Browser. - The function to generate an event by key operations is not supported. - The functions to paste or obtain data such as character strings from the clipboard are not supported. - The context menu is not supported. - The print function of Flash is not supported. - The functions to execute JavaScript from Flash or operate Flash from JavaScript are not supported. - The screen without a window (pop-up) is not supported. - The favorite function of Flash is not supported. - The function to communicate data in real time using the Flash Media Server is not supported. - The XMLSocket-based communication function is not supported. Item Specifications Browser engine NetFront Supported protocols HTTP (HTTP/0.9, 1.0, 1.1), HTTPS, TCP/IP Supported markup language HTML 4.01, XHTML 1.1/Basic Supported style sheet Part of CSS1 and 2 Supported script language Part of JavaScript 1.5, ECMAScript 3rd Edition, Ajax (limited to the scope supported by JavaScript) Supported DOM Part of Level 1 and 2 Supported format JPEG, BMP, PNG, GIF, animation GIF, PDF, Flash 7.0 and earlier Supported SSL/TLS versions SSL 2.0, SSL 3.0, TLS 1.0 Supported character codes Japanese (Shift_JIS), Japanese (ISO-2022-JP), Japanese (EUC-JP), Chinese Simplified (GB2312), Chinese Traditional (Big5), Western European (ISO-8859- 1), Unicode (UTF-8) Display mode Normal, Just-Fit Rendering, Smart-Fit Rendering PDF viewer Adobe® Reader® LE Flash player Adobe® Flash® Player 7 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-5 4.2 Displaying Web Browser 4 4.2 Displaying Web Browser In [Application Menu], press [Web Browser]. The page specified as the home is displayed. Reference - If a login user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel and the user presses [Web Browser], the Web browser setting and information related to the user is downloaded to the MFP from the server. If the user has specified a personal home page, that page is displayed. - When the Web browser starts, you can specify whether to display the home page or the last page that was visited. For details, refer to page 4-17. dReference For details on the [Application Menu], refer to page 3-4. For details on My Panel, refer to page 9-3. 4 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser 4-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.3 4.3 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser If you do not want to allow use of the Web browser in the MFP, you can restrict its use without disabling the license kit. Also, you can restrict use of the Web browser for each user. 4.3.1 Restricting the use of the Web browser in the MFP If you do not want to allow use of the Web browser, you can restrict its use without disabling the license kit. [Web Browser Setting] 1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility]. 2 Press [Administrator Settings]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [Network Settings]. 5 In [Network Settings] (2/2), press [Web Browser Setting]. 6 Select [Invalid], and then press [OK]. Reference - If [Web Browser Setting] is set to [Invalid], [Web Browser] is hidden in the [Application Menu]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-7 4.3 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser 4 4.3.2 Restricting the use of Web browser for each user If user management is performed in the MFP, you can restrict use of the Web browser for each user. [Function Permission] 1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility]. 2 Press [Administrator Settings]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [User Authentication/ Account Track]. 5 In [User Authentication Settings], press [User Registration]. 6 Select the user you want to restrict use of the Web browser, and press [Edit]. % If you want to restrict public users to use the Web browser, press [ ] and select [Public]. 7 Press [Function Permission]. 8 In [Function Permission] (3/3), specify [Web Browser] to [Restrict], and press [OK]. Reference - This setting is not available if [Invalid] is specified in [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings] ö[Web Browser Setting]. - Configuring the function permission of the public user is available when public user access is allowed in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[General Settings]ö[Public User Access]. - If users are managed in the external server, you can configure the default settings for function permissions to users who log in to the MFP using external server authentication for the first time. To configure it, select [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings] ö[Administrative Settings]ö[Default Function Permission]ö[Web Browser]. For details on [Default Function Permission], refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 4 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser 4-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.3 4.3.3 Restricting the use of local contents If the Web browser is used through the use of an application that interacts with the Web browser, you can access the files (pre-installed contents, image files, help files, etc.) saved in the HDD of the MFP from the Web browser. The administrator can restrict the use of files saved in the HDD of the MFP from the Web browser as required. Reference - For details on the application that interacts with the Web browser, contact your service representative. [Web browser contents access] 1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility]. 2 Press [Administrator Settings]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [Security Settings]. 5 Press [Security Details]. 6 In [Security Details] (4/4), specify [Web browser contents access] to [Restrict], and press [OK]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-9 4.4 Basic operation 4 4.4 Basic operation 4.4.1 Screen components The Web browser screen has the following components. Reference - When the optional local connection kit is installed in the MFP, sound from Web pages or Flash contents can be output through the speaker in the local connection kit. The speaker volume can be adjustable using the speaker icon. For details, refer to page 4-11. No. Name Description 1 Toolbar Operates Web Browser or configure the Web Browser settings. It is always displayed on the Web Browser screen. For details, refer to page 4-12. 2 Scroll bar Appears on the right of the screen when all display contents are not displayed vertically in one screen. Appears at the bottom of the screen when all display contents are not displayed horizontally in one screen. 3 Window When multiple windows are displayed, you can switch the window using the tab located at the bottom of the screen. Press [e] in the active tab to close the window. 4 Icon The icon that represents the connection status appears when loading contents. If the optional local connection kit is installed in the MFP, the speaker icon is displayed. 1 4 3 2 4 Basic operation 4-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.4 4.4.2 Operating instructions Operate Web Browser mainly on the Touch Panel. You can perform some of the operations from the Keypad of the Control Panel. Reference - Using the Stylus Pen to operate the Touch Panel provides operating comfort. Operation using the Touch Panel Operate Web Browser mainly on the Touch Panel. - To select an item, press a desired item. - If a link is provided in the contents, press the link to jump to it. - If you need to enter characters, press the entry form in the dialog box or contents. The keyboard screen appears. To enter characters, use the keyboard screen. - To scroll the screen, press [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] on the scroll bar. Operation using the Keypad You can use the Keypad in the Control Panel to enter numeric values or select items in the list. 4.4.3 How to enter text If you need to enter characters, press the entry form in the dialog box or contents. The keyboard screen appears. Entering text Press the character you want to enter in the keyboard screen. - To enter uppercase letters or symbols, press [Shift]. - You can also enter numbers using the Keypad. Reference - To change a character in the entered text, press [ ] or [ ] to move the cursor to the character to be changed, press [Delete], and then enter the desired letter or number. - To delete all characters entered, press C (clear) in the Control Panel. - To revert to the setting when the keyboard was displayed, press [Undo]. - Some buttons may not appear, depending on the characters being entered. - When entering character codes on multiple lines is allowed, the linefeed button appears. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-11 4.4 Basic operation 4 4.4.4 Screen display mode There are three types of display modes for the Web Browser screen. [Normal] This is the display mode same as that for the normal Web Browser. Content is not adjusted to the screen size. Scroll the screen horizontally and vertically when browsing it. (The default is set to [Normal]. ) [Just-Fit Rendering] The content layout is maintained and a page is displayed by reducing its width to fit the screen. Scroll the screen horizontally and vertically when browsing it. [Smart-Fit Rendering] The table is divided and laid out vertically to fit the width of the screen. Scroll the screen horizontally and vertically when browsing it. The layout may be changed depending on the page to be displayed. dReference For details on changing the display mode, refer to page 4-16. 4.4.5 Specifying speaker volume When the optional local connection kit is installed in the MFP, sound from Web pages or Flash contents can be output through the speaker in the local connection kit. If a speaker is connected to the MFP, the speaker icon is displayed at the bottom left of the Web browser. Press the speaker icon to display the Volume screen where you can control the speaker volume. - To increase the volume one level, press [Higher], or the # key on the Control Panel. - To reduce the volume one level, press [Lower], or the * key on the Control Panel. - Pressing [Mute] outputs no sound. In addition, the speaker icon changes to the speaker mute icon. 4 Toolbar 4-12 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.5 4.5 Toolbar The toolbar on the top of the Web Browser screen allows you to perform various operations and configure various settings. 4.5.1 Description of the toolbar The following shows the functions of the buttons on the toolbar. Icon Name Description Back Brings you back to the previous page. Next Brings you to the next page. Reload/Abort Reloads the currently displayed page to update the contents. If you press this button while loading a page, the loading stops. Home Displays the page registered as the home. By default, "http://www.konicaminolta.com/" is registered. For details on changing the home page, refer to page 4-16. [Favorites] - [List] Displays the list of registered favorites. For details, refer to page 4-13. [Favorites] - [Add] Adds the URL of the currently displayed page to the favorites. Adding a URL to the favorites requires the administrator authority. For details, refer to page 4-13. [Address] Brings you to the screen to enter a URL. For details, refer to page 4-14. [History] Displays the list of pages displayed up till then. For details, refer to page 4-14. [Print] Prints the currently displayed contents. For details, refer to page 4-15. [Menu] Configure the Web browser settings. There are two types of menus; one for the user and one for the administrator. For details, refer to page 4-15. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-13 4.5 Toolbar 4 4.5.2 [Favorites] - [List] Press [List] to display the list of the registered favorites using the thumbnails. Selecting a favorite allows you to access the corresponding URL. Reference - If the user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel, the list of favorites for the user who is managed in the server is displayed. List of favorites Press to display the list of operations available for the item. From this list, select the desired operation. The following shows the available operations. 4.5.3 [Favorites] - [Add] (Adding a URL to the favorites requires the administrator authority. ) Pressing [Add] prompts you to enter the administrator password. Enter the administrator password and press [OK]. The registration screen appears. Check the contents and press [OK]. The URL of the displayed page is added to the favorites. The MFP can hold up to 100 favorites. - To register the thumbnail images of the page to be added to the favorites, select the [Register Thumbnail] check box on the registration screen. - It is registered with the title previously given to the contents. To change the title, press the entry form for the title on the registration screen, and then change the title. Reference - For users using the Web browser by linking to My Panel, administrator authority is not required. My Panel can hold up to 20 favorites for each user. Item Description [List View]/[Thumbnail View] Switches the favorites display between the list display and thumbnail view. [Address View]/[Title View] Switches the display of favorites between the address view and title view. [Delete All] Deletes all registered favorites. Deleting the favorites requires the administrator authority. [Close] Closes the list of favorites. Item Description [Open New Window] Opens the selected favorite with a new window. [Edit] Edits the title and address of the selected favorite. Editing the favorites requires the administrator authority. [Up] Brings you above the selected favorite. Use this button when the list of favorites is displayed in the list view. [Down] Brings you below the selected favorite. Use this button when the list of favorites is displayed in the list view. [Delete] Deletes the selected favorite. Deleting the favorites requires the administrator authority. [Close] Closes this screen. 4 Toolbar 4-14 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.5 4.5.4 [Address] Press [Address] to display the screen for entering the address. Press the entry form to display the keyboard screen. Enter the URL of the page to be displayed, and press [OK] or [Open New Window]. Press [Input History] to display the list of input history. You can reference the past inputs. The MFP can hold up to 100 input history records. Reference - If you display the screen for entering the address, you see the URL of the page being displayed. To delete the URL currently shown, display the keyboard screen and press [Delete]. Press C (clear) in the Control Panel to delete all data entries. - If the user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel, the list of input history records for the user who is managed in the server is displayed. My Panel can hold up to 20 input history records for each user. 4.5.5 [History] Press [History] to display the display history screen. From the list of display history, select a page to be displayed again. The MFP can hold up to 100 display history records. Reference - If the user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel, the list of display history records for the user who is managed in the server is displayed. My Panel can hold up to 20 display history records for each user. [Display History] Press to display the list of operations available for the item. From this list, select the desired operation. The following shows the available operations. Item Description [Address View]/[Title View] Switches the display history between the address view and title view. [Delete All] Deletes all registered entries in the display history. Deleting the display history requires the administrator authority. [Close] Closes the list of display history. Item Description [Open New Window] Loads the selected display history with a new window. [Delete] Deletes the selected display history. Deleting the display history requires the administrator authority. [Close] Closes this screen. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-15 4.5 Toolbar 4 4.5.6 [Print] Press [Print] to display the Print screen. Configure the print settings, and then press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. The displayed contents are printed. Reference - If you attempt to print a Web page or JPEG or other image that takes up a large amount of memory, a scan error may occur and printing will be disabled. - The setting value of [Finishing] varies depending on which options are installed. – The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. – The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. – The Fold and Center Staple & Fold functions can be used when a saddle stitcher is installed on the optional finisher. 4.5.7 [Menu] Press [Menu] to configure the Web Browser settings. There are two types of menus; one for the user and one for the administrator. For details, refer to page 4-16. Item Description [Paper] Select the size of paper for printing. [Simplex/Duplex] Select whether to print in 2-sided mode. [Stamp Settings] Specify whether to print the [Title], [URL], [Date/Time], and [Page Number]. [Finishing] Configure settings for collating, grouping, offsetting. stapling, hole punching, folding, or binding. 4 Configuring the Web Browser settings 4-16 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.6 4.6 Configuring the Web Browser settings Pressing [Menu] in the tool bar displays the menu for the user. Users can only view the Web browser operation settings and information. The administrator of the MFP can configure the operating environment and security settings in addition to the Web browser operation settings. To display the administrator menu, press [Administrator] in the menu screen, and enter the administrator password. 4.6.1 [Page Operation] In the [Page Operation] tab, configure the settings for page operation. Reference - Items with * are displayed only for the administrator menu. - [Use for Home Page] is displayed for users using the Web browser by linking to My Panel. 4.6.2 [Display] In the [Display] tab, configure settings for displaying contents. The administrator of the MFP can configure the settings to hide or display images and animations, enable or disable JavaScript, and make detailed setting related to the contents display. Item Description [Use for Home Page]* Registers the displayed page as the home page. [Page Memo] Displays the page saved as a page memo. Selecting the page memo from the list displays the corresponding page. Press to display the list of operations available for the item. From this list, select the desired operation. [Save as Page Memo] Saves the displayed page as it is. [Zoom Display] Press [Zoom Display] to display the key to enlarge or reduce the page display size. Press the key to adjust the page display size. Item Description [Display Mode] Select the display mode for Web Browser from [Normal], [Just-Fit Rendering], and [Smart-Fit Rendering]. For details, refer to page 4-11. [Encoding] Specify the encode type to be used when displaying contents. [Detail Settings] Configure settings for displaying contents. • [Image]: Select this check box to display images. • [Animation]: Select this check box to display animation GIF. • [Table]: Select this check box to recognize the table in HTML and adjust the layout. • [JavaScript]: Select this check box to enable JavaScript in contents. • [CSS]: Select this check box to enable CSS in contents. • [Ward Wrap]: Select this check box to enable the word wrap in contents. • [Line Boundary Char. Check]: Select this check box to enable the line boundary character check in contents. • [Rapid-Render]: Select this check box to enable the Rapid-Render function. • [Pop-Up Window]: Select this check box to allow displaying the pop-up window. • [Offline Permission]: Select this check box to allow the use of the contents off-line. • [Auto Flash Playback]: Select this check box to automatically play a Flash content. • [Enable Offline Display]: Select this check box to enable viewing of the contents off-line. Displayed when [Offline Permission] is allowed by the administrator. [Color Selection Setting] Select a color for the selected item ([Green], [Blue], [Yellow], or [Orange]). bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-17 4.6 Configuring the Web Browser settings 4 4.6.3 [Manage windows] In the [Manage windows] tab, operate the window. Up to five windows can be opened. 4.6.4 [Settings] The [Settings] tab allows you to check and reset the Web browser information. The administrator of the MFP can configure the operating environment and security settings of the Web browser. Reference - Items with * are displayed only for the administrator menu. - The following settings are available for users using the Web browser by linking to My Panel. – [Startup Settings] – Setting for deleting [Cookies] – Setting for deleting [Authentication Information] - My Panel can hold up to 20 items of cookies and authentication information for each user. Item Description [Create new window] Displays the contents of the URL registered as the home page with a new window. [Open in new window] Displays the link destination page with a new window. [Close active window] Closes the active window. [Close other windows] Closes all windows. This is not selectable when only one window is open. Item Description [Startup Settings]* Specify whether to display the page registered as the home page or the last page being displayed when you exited Web Browser previously, at the startup of Web Browser. [Security]* Configure SSL or TLS setting, or display a root certificate or CA certificate. [Cookies]* Configure settings to receive and delete cookies. This menu is also used to delete all cookies saved in the MFP. [Cache]* Configure settings to use and delete caches. This menu is also used to delete all caches saved in the MFP. [Proxy]* Configure the settings for use of proxy. To use the proxy, register the address and port for the proxy server. If proxy authentication is required, register the ID and password for use in proxy authentication. [Authentication Information]* Specify the timing to delete the authentication information you have entered in the contents. This menu is also used to delete all authentication information saved in the MFP. [Access Log]* Check for access history of all users. You can check the [ID], [User Name], [URL] and [Access]. [Web Browser Information] Displays Web Browser information. [Reset] Restart the Web browser. 4 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4-18 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.7 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file If a link to a document file is provided in the displayed contents, you can print, display, or save the document file. - The PDF and XPS formats are supported for the document files. - You cannot display an XPS file. Press the link to the document file in the contents to display the top screen of the document file. 4.7.1 Printing a document file Press [Print] to display the Print screen. Configure the print settings, and then press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. The document file is downloaded and printed. Item Description [Paper] Select the size of paper for printing. [Simplex/Duplex] Select whether to print in 2-sided mode. [Stamp Settings] Press this button to specify whether to print a [Date/Time] and [Page Number]. [Finishing] Configure settings for collating, grouping, offsetting. stapling, hole punching, folding, or binding. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-19 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4 Reference - If you attempt to print a document file that takes up a large amount of memory, a scan error may occur and printing will be disabled. - If the downloaded PDF is encrypted, it is saved in the Encryption PDF User Box without being printed. - The setting value of [Finishing] varies depending on which options are installed. – The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. – The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. – The Fold and Center Staple & Fold functions can be used when a saddle stitcher is installed on the optional finisher. 4 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4-20 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.7 4.7.2 Displaying a document file Press [View] to display the link destination PDF file. The toolbar on the top of the screen allows you to enlarge, reduce, print, or save the PDF file. Key Description Brings you back to the top page. Brings you back to the previous page. Brings you to the next page. Brings you to the last page. Rotates the display 90 degrees clockwise. Increases the zoom ratio. Reduces the zoom ratio. Displays according to the width of the display area. Displays the entire page. Select the User Box to save the document file. Configure the print settings, and print the document file. Displays the splash window (displayed momentarily when the software activates). Closes the screen. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-21 4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file 4 4.7.3 Saving a document file Press [Save]. The User Box selection screen is displayed. Select the User Box to save the file, press [OK], and then [Start] or Start. Then the document file is saved in the User Box. Reference - To save a document file to a User Box, you must register the User Box in the MFP in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. - When printing a document file (full color) that was saved in a User Box from the Web browser, you cannot specify [Zoom] or [Combine]. 4 Uploading a document file 4-22 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.8 4.8 Uploading a document file If document files are shared on the server, you can upload a scanned document file or a document file in a User Box to the server using a Web Browser. This section explains how to upload a document file, using the following upload site as an example. Example 4.8.1 Restrictions Note that there are following restrictions to use this function. - PDF, TIFF, or XPS is the type of a document file that can be uploaded. A document cannot be divided to upload. - Multiple document files cannot be uploaded at the same time. - The user cannot manually edit the file name text box. - If you perform one of the following operations after selecting a document file to be uploaded, the job is deleted together with the selected document file. – The System Auto Reset function has been started. – The Web browser has been closed. – The upload site has been updated by operating the toolbar of the Web browser. – The Web browser has been restarted. – The user has logged out during login processing. – The sub power switch has been turned off. – Reset has been pressed to reset the panel. 4.8.2 Uploading a scanned document file The following explains the procedure to upload a scanned document file. Reference - This procedure is not available for users who are disabled from scanning data. - The file format cannot be set to JPEG when scanning an original to be uploaded. 1 Display the upload site using the Web browser of the MFP. 2 Press the button to select a document file to be uploaded. % In this example, press [Browse]. Item Description [Browse] Press this button to select a document file to be uploaded. "type" is set to "file" in the Input tag of HTML. [OK] Press this button to upload a document file. "type" is set to "submit" in the Input tag of HTML. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-23 4.8 Uploading a document file 4 3 Press [Scan]. 4 Place the original to be uploaded on the MFP. 5 Configure the scan settings, and press [Start] or the Start key. % If Proof Copy is selected, you can check finishing. After scanning is completed, the file name is displayed in the text box. 6 Press the button to start uploading. % In this example, press [OK]. Uploading of a document file then starts. 4.8.3 Uploading a document file in a User Box The following explains the procedure to upload a document file retrieved from a User Box. Reference - This procedure is not available for users who are disabled from accessing the saved documents. - Before uploading a document file in a User Box, create a User Box to save the document file in. - Only the Public User Box and Personal User Box can be selected. - The file format cannot be set to JPEG when selecting a document file to be uploaded from a User Box. When selecting a JPEG document file saved in a User Box, the file format is changed to PDF. If necessary, specify the appropriate file format before uploading a document file. - When uploading a document file saved in a User Box while Page Separation is enabled, Page Separation is canceled and changed to Multi Page. 1 Display the upload site using the Web browser of the MFP. 2 Press the button to select a document file to be uploaded. % In this example, press [Browse]. 4 Uploading a document file 4-24 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.8 3 Press the [User Box] key. 4 Select a desired User Box, and press [Use Document]. 5 Select a document file to be uploaded, and press [File Settings]. % Select multiple document files and press [Combine]; they can be combined as one file. The combination order can be changed as required. % Select a document file and press [Document Details] to check the date and time the document file was saved and to preview the image. 6 Configure the file setting, and press [Start] or the Start key. % Press [Application] to configure the stamp or page number print setting. The file name appears in the text box. 7 Press the button to start uploading. % In this example, press [OK]. Uploading of a document file then starts. 5 PageScope Web Connection (Web Browser Function) bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-3 5.1 Using PageScope Web Connection 5 5 PageScope Web Connection (Web Browser Function) 5.1 Using PageScope Web Connection PageScope Web Connection is a device management utility that is supported by the HTTP server built in this machine. To use this utility, directly access the MFP connected to the network using Web Browser. To use this utility using Web Browser installed in the MFP, only the User Box function is available. This chapter describes how to use documents in the User Box of the MFP on the network by operating PageScope Web Connection using the Web Browser installed in the MFP. Reference - This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-101 v2 registered. - i-Option LK-101 v2 must be registered also in the MFP access destination. - For details on using the Web Browser installed in the MFP, refer to page 4-3. - To operate PageScope Web Connection from a Web browser of your computer, you can use various functions such as the status check, setting change, and network setting functions of the MFP. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 5.1.1 Prior check The most recent information may not appear in PageScope Web Connection screens because older versions of pages are saved in the cache for the Web browser. In addition, problems may occur when the cache is used. When using PageScope Web Connection, disable the cache for the Web browser. Reference - Changing the cache settings requires the administrator authority. 1 Press [Menu] on the toolbar of the Web browser. 2 Press [Administrator]. 3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press the [Settings] tab, and then select [Cache]. 5 Clear the [Use cache] check box, and then press [OK]. 5.1.2 How to access Start the Web browser, and then specify the IP address of the MFP to be accessed. 1 Press [Address] on the toolbar of the Web browser. 2 Press the entry form to display the keyboard screen. 3 Enter the IP address of the MFP to be accessed, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [OK] or [Open New Window]. The PageScope Web Connection screen appears. Reference - If you have specified to not receive cookies for Web browser settings, PageScope Web Connection screen does not appear. For details on configuring cookie settings, refer to page 4-17. - If you display the screen for entering the address, you see the URL of the page being displayed. To delete the URL currently shown, display the keyboard screen and press [Delete]. Press C (clear) in the Control Panel to delete all URL entries. 5 Screen components 5-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.2 5.2 Screen components The PageScope Web Connection screen is constructed as shown below. No. Name Description 1 KONICA MINOLTA logo Press the logo to go to the KONICA MINOLTA Web site (http://www.konicaminolta. com/). 2 PageScope Web Connection logo Press the logo to display the version information for PageScope Web Connection. 3 Login user name Displays the icon of the current mode and the name of the user who is logged on (public, registered user, or account). 4 [Logout] Press this button to log out from the current mode. 5 Contents display Displays the contents of PageScope Web Connection. 3 4 5 1 2 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-5 5.3 Logging in and logging out 5 5.3 Logging in and logging out If you have specified to perform User Authentication or Account Track on the MFP, the login screen appears after displaying PageScope Web Connection. Reference - If you have not specified to perform User Authentication or Account Track, the screen displayed when you logged in as a public user appears. - To use PageScope Web Connection using the Web Browser installed in the MFP, its administrator mode is not available. 5.3.1 Login Select whether to log in as a public user or registered user. If External Server Authentication is selected, select an external authentication server. Enter the required information, and press [Login]. Select a display language if necessary. Reference - The User Boxes that can be accessed vary depending on the logged in user or account track. 5.3.2 Logout Press [Logout] on the upper right of the screen to display a logout confirmation screen. Press [OK]. The login screen appears again. 5 Using the User Box function 5-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.4 5.4 Using the User Box function To use PageScope Web Connection using the Web Browser installed in the MFP, the following operations are available as the User Box function. - Operating documents in the User Box on the MFP being used or a different MFP connected to the network. - Using the Public, Personal, and Group User Boxes as User Box Types. - Displaying, printing, and deleting a document in the User Box. 5.4.1 Open User Box Logging in using PageScope Web Connection displays the list of User Boxes (Public, Personal, and Group User Boxes) registered in the accessed MFP. [Open User Box] Select a desired User Box name ([User Box Name]) at User Box List. Alternatively, directly enter a User Box number ([User Box Number]) and User Box password ([User Box Password]), and then press [OK]. Reference - When you select a User Box name ([User Box Name]) with a password specified in [User Box List], a screen for entering the password appears. [Open User Box] [User Box List] Item Description [User Box Number] Enter the User Box number to be opened. [User Box Password] If a password is set to the target User Box, enter the password. Item Description [Search from Index] Switch the index display according to the indexes selected when creating a User Box. [Page (Display by 50 cases)] When this machine contains 50 or more User Boxes, specify the desired page to change the display. User Box List Displays the [User Box Number], [User Box Name], [Type] and [Time Stored]. A key icon appears beside User Boxes where a password has been specified. bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-7 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 [File List] Select a User Box in [Open User Box]. The basic information of the User Box is displayed with a list of the documents saved in the User Box. Item Description [Thumbnail View] Specify whether to view the thumbnail images of the document. Set to [OFF] for list display. [Specify operation] Select an operation. For details, refer to page 5-8. [Changes the display] Press this button to display the [Select] check box beside all documents with which the selected operation can be performed. [Select] Displays a check box beside all documents with which the selected operation can be performed. [Thumbnail] Displays thumbnail images of the document. [Document Name] Displays the name of the document. [Number of Originals] Displays the number of originals in a document. [Edit Name] Press this button to change the document name. 5 Using the User Box function 5-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.4 5.4.2 Document operations A selected document can be printed or deleted. Printing a document 1 Select [Print] from [Specify operation], and then press [Changes the display]. A check box appears beside all printable documents. 2 Select the check box for the document to be printed, and then press [Print Setting]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-9 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 3 Configure necessary settings, and then press [OK]. % In [Page Range], select whether to print all pages of the selected document or to print by specifying a page range. % In [Change order], you can change the print order when printing multiple documents. 4 Press [Open File]. 5 Press [Print]. % If [View] is pressed, a PDF file appears. To print the displayed PDF file, press . 6 Configure print settings, and then press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. Reference - If the [Function Version] of the destination MFP is not [Version 3], press [Open File] in Step 4 to display the PDF file on the panel. To print the displayed PDF file, press . To check the function version of the MFP, select [Device Information] in [Utility]. 5 Using the User Box function 5-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.4 Deleting a document 1 Select [Delete] from [Specify operation], and then press [Changes the display]. A check box appears beside the documents that can be deleted. 2 Select the check box for the document to be deleted, and then press [Delete]. % Select the [Check/Uncheck (applied to all the documents )] check box to select all documents. bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-11 5.4 Using the User Box function 5 3 Check the document name to be deleted, and then press [OK]. The document is deleted. 5 Using the User Box function 5-12 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.4 6 Image Panel bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-3 6.1 Overview 6 6 Image Panel 6.1 Overview Image Panel is a new intuitive and easy-to-understand panel interface. Reference - This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-101 v2 registered. - If [User Authentication/ Account Track] ö [Scan to Authorized Folder Settings] is set to [Limit] in [Administrator Settings], Image Panel cannot be used. Features Image Panel divides the operation workflow into three processes, "reading a document", "editing a document", and "specifying a destination", which can be operated on one screen. This allows you to easily understand the entire operation workflow and operation in progress. Image Panel focuses on operability. Therefore, the functions available in Image Panel are limited compared with the conventional panel. When the My Panel and My Address function are available, you can customize the Image Panel screen as a user-specific screen. dReference For details on the My Panel function, refer to page 9-3. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-3. 6 Displaying the Image Panel 6-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.2 6.2 Displaying the Image Panel In [Application Menu], press [Image Panel] to display the Image Panel top screen. dReference For details on the [Application Menu], refer to page 3-4. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-5 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6.3.1 Screen components The Image Panel screen consists of the following. No. Name Description 1 Login Information area Displays the user name and icon of the user who is currently logged in. 2 Read Data area Scan a document, retrieve a document from a User Box or external memory, and send data from a cellular phone or PDA. 3 Desktop area Documents read in the Read Data area are displayed in a thumbnail view or list view. 4 List Display/Thumbnail View switching Switches the desktop area display between the list display and thumbnail view. 5 Message area Displays an auxiliary message such as operating instructions. 6 Status area Displays the date and current time. If an alert occurs, an alert icon appears. 7 Edit tool area Edit the page, combine and change settings of the document after it is scanned. 8 Send Tray/Edit Tool display switching Switches the display between the send tray and edit tool display. For details on the send tray, refer to page 6-17. 9 Document Destination area Specify a destination of the read document from [Print] or [Destination List]. 1 3 4 5 6 9 8 7 2 6 Operating Image Panel 6-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 6.3.2 General operation The following describes the operation flow from document reading processing to sending processing by showing operations of Image Panel in order of "reading a document", "editing a document", and "specifying a destination". Reference - You can specify a destination first, and then read a document. In the Read Data area, read or retrieve a document. • To scan a document, place the document, and then press [Scan]. Configure the scan settings as needed, and then start to read the document. For details, refer to page 6-8. • To use a document saved in a User Box, select the User Box from [Document Source List], and select the document you want to retrieve. For details, refer to page 6-9. • To use a document saved in an external memory, select [External Memory] from [Document Source List], and select the document you want to retrieve. For details, refer to page 6-10. • To use data saved in a cellular phone or PDA, select [Mobile] from [Document Source List]. For details, refer to page 6-11. Select [Scan] Select [Document Source List]. In the Edit Tool area, edit the read document. For details, refer to page 6-12. In the Document Destination area, specify a destination of the read document. • To print, press [Print]. For details, refer to page 6-15. • To send the document, select a destination from [Destination List]. For details, refer to page 6-16. • To save data in an external memory, press [External Memory] in the Destination List screen. For details, refer to page 6-16. Select [Print]. Select [Destination List] bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-7 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 If you specify an address, the send tray appears. For details, refer to page 6-17. Press Start to send the document. • To send data from a cellular phone or PDA, press Start to display a PIN code. Enter the PIN code in the cellular phone or PDA to send data to the MFP. Data is sent to the specified destination. For details, refer to page 6-18. 6 Operating Image Panel 6-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 6.3.3 Reading a document Scan a document, retrieve a document from a User Box or external memory, and send data from a cellular phone or PDA. Scanning a document Press [Scan] to display the Scan Settings screen. Configure the scan settings as needed, and then press [Scan]. Reference - Only one document can be scanned. Item Description [Original Type] Select the image quality from [Text], [Text/Photo], [Photo], [Dot Matrix Original] and [Copied Paper] according to the contents of the original to be scanned. [Simplex/Duplex] Select either to scan a 1-sided original or 2-sided original. [Resolution] Select the scan resolution from [200 e 100dpi (Standard)], [200 e 200dpi (Fine)], [300 e 300dpi], [400 e 400dpi (Super Fine)] and [600 e 600dpi (Ultra Fine)]. [File Type] Select a file type from [PDF], [Compact PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS] and [Compact XPS]. Select whether to save the whole scanned pages as one file, or to divide a file in specified number of pages in order to save data. You cannot select [Multi Page] if [JPEG] is selected for file type. To send divided files by attaching them to an E-mail, specify [E-mail Attachment Method]. Select [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail] to attach all divided files to one E-mail message. Select [One (1) File per E-Mail] to send E-mail messages for each divided file. Selecting [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Outline PDF]. If i-Option LK-102 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF]or [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Encryption] and [PDF Document Properties]. For details on the function, refer to page 7-3. If i-Option LK-105 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF]or [Compact PDF] for the file type allows you to specify [Searchable PDF]. For details on the function, refer to page 8-3. [Density] Adjust the density for scanning. [Color] Select the scan color from [Auto Color], [Full Color], [Gray Scale] and [Black]. [Document Name] Specify the document name. [Separate Scan] Press this button to divide scanning of the document into several times. It is useful for the following cases. • When the number of pages of a document is too many, and it cannot be loaded into the ADF • When placing the originals on the original glass • When 1-sided originals and 2-sided originals are mixed bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-9 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 Retrieving from User Box Select a User Box from [Document Source List] to display the Use Document screen. Select a document to be retrieved, and then press [OK]. Reference - If a password has been specified for the selected User Box, the password input screen appears. Enter the password. - Only one User Box can be selected. - Up to 10 documents can be retrieved from a User Box at one time. - If a User Box is specified as a destination, you cannot retrieve more than one document. - You cannot specify the User Box, from which you retrieved the document, as the destination. Item Description [Edit Name] Press this button to change the name of the selected document. [Document Details] Press this button to check the detailed information or preview image of the selected document. 6 Operating Image Panel 6-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 Retrieving a document from an external memory Select [External Memory] from [Document Source List] to display the list of documents saved in the external memory. Select a document to be retrieved, and then press [OK]. Reference - To retrieve a document from an external memory, you must configure the following settings in the MFP depending on the purpose of the document to be used. – To print a retrieved document, in [Administrator Settings]ö[System Settings]ö[User Box Settings] ö[External Memory Function Settings], set [Print Document] to [ON]. To additionally perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[Print] to [Allow] for each user. – To save a retrieved document in a User Box, in [Administrator Settings]ö[System Settings]ö[User Box Settings]ö[External Memory Function Settings], set [External Memory Document Scan] to [ON]. To additionally perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[External Memory Document Scan] to [Allow] for each user. - The available file formats are PDF, TIFF, JPEG, and XPS. - Up to 200 documents can be retrieved from an external memory. - To open a folder, select the one you want to open, and then press [Open]. - You cannot specify a JPEG document together with any other format at the same time. - If a document has been retrieved from an external memory, you cannot read the document using [Scan] or [Document Source List]. - You can only specify either [Print] or a User Box as a destination of a document retrieved from an external memory. Also, you can specify only one User Box as a destination. To save a document in a User Box, you must create a User Box and register the User Box in the address book in advance. - If other than User Box is specified as a destination, you cannot select [External Memory]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-11 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 Using data saved in a cellular phone or PDA Select [Mobile] from [Document Source List]. Selecting [Mobile/PDA] and pressing [OK] displays the cellular phone icon on the desktop area. Reference - To connect the MFP to a cellular phone or PDA, install the optional Local Interface Kit EK-605 in the MFP. Additionally, configure the following settings in the MFP. – Set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[Bluetooth Setting] to [Enable]. Also, set [Administrator Settings]ö[System Connection]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] to [Allow]. – To perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA] to [Allow] for each user. - If [Mobile/PDA] is selected, you cannot read a document using [Scan] or [Document Source List]. - You can only specify either [Print] or a User Box as a destination for sending data from a cellular phone or PDA. Also, you can specify only one User Box as a destination. To save a document in a User Box, you must create a User Box and register the User Box in the address book in advance. - If other than [Print] or a User Box is specified as a destination, you cannot select [Mobile]. - This machine supports RepliGo version 2.1.0.9. - To print an XHTML file, since a linked file is retrieved using the WebDAV client function, you must configure the following settings in the MFP in advance. – Set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[WebDAV Settings]ö[WebDAV Client Settings] to [ON]. – To connect via a proxy, register a proxy server in [Proxy Server Address] of [WebDAV Client Settings]. Additionally, set [User Settings]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting]ö[Proxy Server Use] to [Yes]. – In [User Settings]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting]ö[Link File Error Notification], specify the operation for the machine to execute when it is unable to retrieve the linked file. dReference For details on how to send data from a cellular phone or PDA, refer to page 6-18. The function to connect the MFP to a cellular phone or PDA is available even if the license kit is not registered. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations] and [User's Guide Print Operations]. Item Specifications Communication protocol Bluetooth Ver. 2.0 + EDR Supporting profile OPP/BPP/SPP Supporting file type PDF/CPDF/XPS/CXPS/TIFF/JPEG/XHTML/RepliGo Supporting XHTML file Character code: UTF-8, Shift-JIS, ISO-8859 Extension of link file: JPEG, JPG, PNG 6 Operating Image Panel 6-12 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 6.3.4 Editing the document Edit the read document. Reference - When using data saved in a cellular phone or PDA, you cannot check the preview image or edit the data. [Preview] Press this button to check the detailed information or preview image of the selected document. Reference - For a document retrieved from an external memory, the [Preview] function is not available. - For a combined document, the preview function is available only for the first document. [Document/Page] - [Edit Document] Edit the pages of a selected document. You can rotate the page that has been scanned in the wrong direction, or delete an unnecessary page. For a document consisting of multiple pages, you can move pages to change the page order. Also, you can preview the pages to check the page content. Reference - If you have selected multiple documents, the edit page function is not available. - If you have selected a combined document, the edit page function is not available. Item Description [Odd Page] Press this button to select the odd page. [Even Page] Press this button to select the even page. [Preview /Set Range] Press this button to preview the page. [Delete Page] Press this button to delete the selected page. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-13 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 [Document/Page] - [Combine Documents] Combine selected multiple documents. You can use [Move] to change the combination order. Reference - You can only select either [Print] or [Destination List] as a destination of a combined document. - Up to 10 documents can be combined at one time. - You cannot combine a scanned document with a document retrieved from a User Box. [Rotate Page] Press this button to rotate the selected page. The allowable rotation angles are left 90 degrees, right 90 degrees, and 180 degrees. [Move Page] Press this button to change the order by moving the selected page. While checking the thumbnail images, you can select the moving position. Item Description 6 Operating Image Panel 6-14 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 [Document/Page] - [Document Settings] Configure settings for sending the selected document. You can change the resolution of the document, file type, and color setting. Reference - If you have selected multiple documents, the document setting function is not available. - If you have selected a document retrieved from an external memory, the document setting function is not available. [Return to Scan Dest.] Press [Return to Scan Dest.] to restore the selected document to the source location. - The scanned document is deleted from the MFP. - The document retrieved from a User Box is restored to the source User Box. Item Description [Resolution] Select the scan resolution from [Settings when saving], [200 e 100dpi (Standard)], [200 e 200dpi (Fine)], [300 e 300dpi], [400 e 400dpi (Super Fine)] and [600 e 600dpi (Ultra Fine)]. [File Type] Select the file format for sending data from [PDF], [Compact PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS] and [Compact XPS]. Select whether to save the whole scanned pages as one file, or to divide a file in specified number of pages in order to save data. You cannot select [Multi Page] if [JPEG] is selected for file type. To send divided files by attaching them to an E-mail, specify [E-mail Attachment Method]. Select [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail] to attach all divided files to one E-mail message. Select [One (1) File per E-Mail] to send E-mail messages for each divided file. Selecting [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Outline PDF]. If i-Option LK-102 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF]or [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Encryption] and [PDF Document Properties]. For details on the function, refer to page 7-3. If i-Option LK-105 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF]or [Compact PDF] for the file type allows you to specify [Searchable PDF]. For details on the function, refer to page 8-3. [Color] Select the scan color for sending data from [Use Existing Color Setting], [Full Color], [Gray Scale] and [Black]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-15 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3.5 Specifying a destination Specify a destination of the read document. Printing Press [Print] to print data directly from the MFP. Configure the print settings, and then press [OK]. Reference - If you have scanned multiple documents, the print setting function will not be available. - When you print a combined document, [Combine] and [Zoom] are not available. - When printing a document with an embedded password using the password copy function, you cannot specify [Combine] or [Zoom]. For details on the password copy function, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. - When you print a document that has been retrieved from an external memory, [Combine] and [Zoom] are not available. - When you print a document of JPEG, XPS, or Compact XPS format that has been retrieved from an external memory, [2-Sided] is not available. Also, Staple and Punch are not available for the [Finishing] setting. - When printing data saved in a cellular phone or PDA, you can only check the print settings. To change print settings, select [User Settings]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting]ö[Print]. Reference - The setting value of [Finishing] varies depending on which option is installed. – The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. – The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. - [Continuous Print] is displayed when multiple documents are combined using the editing tool, and then [Print] is selected as a destination. Item Description [Copies:] Specify the number of copies to be printed using the Keypad. [Print] Select whether to print in 2-sided mode. [Finishing] Press this button to configure settings for collating, grouping, stapling, or hole punching. [Combine] Press this button to specify whether to combine pages. Multiple pages of a document can be combined and printed on a single page. [Zoom] Press this button to specify a zoom ratio for the document. [Continuous Print] This function is available when printing combined documents in the 2-sided print mode. Multiple document are printed continuously when they are combined. When printing in 2-Sided mode, and the document ends on the front side of a sheet of paper, select whether to start printing of the next document on the back side of the sheet or on the front side of a new sheet. 6 Operating Image Panel 6-16 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 Specifying destinations From [Destination List], select an address to which you want to send a document. Press the [Search] tab to reference one-touch destinations registered in the main unit. Press the [Group] tab to reference the group list registered in the main unit. Reference - If you have read multiple documents, the User Box function will not be available. - If My address function is available, pressing [My Address] allows you to view My Address Book. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-3. - If you have specified an address, you can check the send tray by pressing [Verify Address Tray/ Remote Address Setting]. - E-mail addresses for which a certificate is registered are displayed with a key icon. - You can only specify User Boxes as an address book destination of a document retrieved from an external memory or a document saved in a cellular phone or PDA. Saving a document in an external memory Select [External Memory] from [Destination List], and press [OK]. Reference - To save data in an external memory, in [Administrator Settings]ö[System Settings]ö[User Box Settings] ö[External Memory Function Settings], set [Save Document] to [ON]. To additionally perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[Save to External Memory] to [Allow] for each user. - If [Print] or a destination is specified as a destination, you cannot select [External Memory]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-17 6.3 Operating Image Panel 6 6.3.6 Checking the send tray Send Tray If you specify an address, the send tray appears. The send tray displays the icon for the destination you have specified. [Check TX Tray] Press the icon of the send tray to display the Check Send To screen, where you can check the list of specified destinations. If an E-mail address is specified as a destination, you can specify settings for the E-mail encryption and digital signature attachment. No. Name Description 1 Dest. Settings icon Press the Dest. Settings icon to display the Check Send To screen, where you can check the list of specified destinations. 2 Destination icon Displays the icons for destinations. Press the icon for the desired destination to display the Check Send To screen, where you can check the detail information of the destination. 1 2 Item Description [Remote Address Settings] Press this button to configure settings for E-mail encryption based on S/MIME and digital signature attachment. This setting is available when [ON] is selected for [S/MIME Communication Settings] of [Administrator Settings], and E-mail is selected. [Detail] Press this button to check the detailed information of the address. 6 Operating Image Panel 6-18 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 Reference - To encrypt an E-mail message and attach a digital signature using S/MIME, set [Administrator Settings] ö[Network Settings]ö[E-Mail Settings]ö[S/MIME Communication Settings] to [ON]. - To encrypt an E-mail, a certificate must be registered in the E-mail address. - To attach a digital signature to an E-mail message, the device certificate must be registered in the MFP. Also, set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[E-Mail Settings]ö[S/MIME Communication Settings]ö[Digital Signature] to [Always add signature] or [Select when sending]. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 6.3.7 Sending data from a cellular phone or PDA Selecting a destination and pressing Start displays the PIN code on the Control Panel. Specify the data you want to use and the MFP to send data in the cellular phone or PDA. Then enter the PIN code to send data to the MFP. Reference - You can only specify either [Print] or a User Box as a destination for sending data from a cellular phone or PDA. Also, you can specify only one User Box as a destination. To save a document in a User Box, you must create a User Box and register the User Box in the address book in advance. – For details on how to create a User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. – For details on how to register a destination to the address book, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. - For the operation of a cellular phone or PDA, refer to the operation manual of the cellular phone or PDA. - The communication speed may be reduced or communication may be interrupted by obstacles, signal quality, magnetic field or static electricity. - Documents and image data may not be sent correctly depending on the security setting of the cellular phone or PDA. [Delete] Press this button to delete the selected address. Item Description bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-19 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book 6 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book From the Web browser on your computer, you can use PageScope Web Connection to add photo data to registered one-touch destinations. The registered photo data is applied to the [Destination List] of Image Panel. dReference For details on PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. 6.4.1 Specifications of photo data The specifications for registerable photo data are as shown below. Reference - Photo data is not enlarged or reduced during photo data registration process. Item Specifications File Type BMP format, 24-bit color, uncompressed Image size 48 e 48 pixels Data size 6,966 bytes 6 Registering a photo in the address book 6-20 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.4 6.4.2 Registering photo data Register photo data by operating PageScope Web Connection from the Web browser on your computer. Reference - To add photo data to the address book, you must register one-touch destinations in advance. - When the My Address function is available, you can add photo data to one-touch destinations in My Address Book. - Photo data can be registered in My Address Book only when you log in as a registered user. 1 Log in to the user mode or administrator mode. 2 Select [Store Address]. 3 Select [Photo/Icon]. 4 Select the one-touch destination to which you want to add photo data, and then click [Edit]. % When the photo data is registered, [Photo/Icon] is displayed in [Photo]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-21 6.4 Registering a photo in the address book 6 5 Select [Register Photo]. 6 Click [Browse], and then specify the folder where the photo data you want to add is saved. 7 Press [OK]. The photo data is added to the one-touch destination. 6 Customizing Image Panel 6-22 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.5 6.5 Customizing Image Panel When the My Panel and My Address function are available, you can customize the Image Panel screen as a user-specific screen. To customize the Image Panel screen, the following conditions are required. - The My Panel and My Address functions are available on the MFP. - Perform user authentication, and then log in as a registered user. dReference For details on the My Panel function, refer to page 9-3. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-3. 6.5.1 Customizing the Read Data area Shortcut icons for frequently used User Boxes can be registered in the Read Data area. 1 In [Data Source], press [Document Source List]. 2 Press [Customize Basic Screen]. 3 Select the User Box you want to register in the basic screen, and select the location in the Read Data area. % If you have selected a location that is already registered in the basic screen, the data is overwritten. % You cannot register a User Box that is already registered in the basic screen to another location in the basic screen. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-23 6.5 Customizing Image Panel 6 4 Press [OK]. A shortcut icon is registered. 6.5.2 Customizing the Document Destination area Shortcut icons for frequently used destinations can be registered in the Document Destination area. 1 Press [Destination List] in the [Data Destination] area. 2 Press [Customize Basic Screen]. 3 Select the destination you want to register in the basic screen, and select the location in the Document Destination area. % If you have selected a location that is already registered in the basic screen, the data is overwritten. % You cannot register a destination that is already registered in the basic screen to another location in the basic screen. 6 Customizing Image Panel 6-24 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.5 4 Press [OK]. A shortcut icon is registered. 6.5.3 Deleting a registered shortcut icon 1 Press [Customize Basic Screen]. 2 Select an icon you want to delete. 3 Press [Delete]. 4 Press [OK]. The shortcut icon is deleted. 7 PDF Processing Function bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-3 7.1 Overview 7 7 PDF Processing Function 7.1 Overview The PDF processing function allows you to specify the security level for distributing a scanned document and a document saved in a User Box, such as by encrypting a document or adding a digital signature as required. Reference - This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-102 registered. Available operations with the PDF processing function The PDF processing function allows you to perform the following operations. - Configuring the PDF document property settings when distributing it with the scan or User Box function (p. 7-4). - Encrypting a PDF document using a password or digital ID (public key) when distributing it with the scan or User Box function (p. 7-5). - Adding a digital signature when distributing an encrypted PDF document (p. 7-5). - An AES-encrypted PDF document can be printed using the direct print mode (p. 7-8). dReference For details on the scan function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. For details on User Box functions, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. 7 PDF document properties 7-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 7.2 7.2 PDF document properties Selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] as a file type when distributing a scanned document or document saved in a User Box allows you to configure the PDF document property settings. Reference - When saving a document in a User Box using [Save Document] of the User Box function, you cannot configure the PDF document property settings. - When sending a document in a User Box in the PDF format to other device using PageScope Web Connection, you can configure the PDF document property settings. Item Description [Title] If [No] is selected for [Apply file name.], specify the title of the PDF document (up to 64 characters). [Apply file name.] Specify whether to apply the file name as the name of the PDF document. [Author] Enter the author of the PDF document (up to 64 characters). When user authentication is performed, the login name is entered as the author name. [Subject] Enter the sub-title of the PDF document (up to 64 characters). [Keywords] Enter the keywords of the PDF document (up to 64 characters). bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-5 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature 7 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature Selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] as a file type when distributing a scanned document or document saved in a User Box allows you to enhance security for the PDF document by encrypting it using a password or the digital ID of a user (public key). When a device certificate is registered in the MFP, a PDF document can be distributed with a digital signature added. Adding a digital signature certifies the author (MFP) of the sent document and guarantees that the document has not been modified after being signed. Reference - Using PageScope Web Connection, you can encrypt and add a digital signature to send a document in a User Box to another device in the PDF format. - To add a digital signature, it is necessary to encrypt the PDF document using a password or digital ID. 7.3.1 Password-based encryption To encrypt a document using a password, configure the following settings. Item Description [Encryption Target] Select an encryption target. Selecting [Other than Metadata] excludes the item specified in [PDF Document Properties] from the encryption target. Selecting [Other than Metadata] does not allow you to select [Low Level] for Encryption Level. [Encryption Type] Select [Password]. [Signature] When a device certificate has been registered in the MFP, specify whether to add a digital signature. For details on registering a device certificate in the MFP, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. [Encryption Level] Select an encryption level. • [Low Level]: RC4 encoding method (40-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 3.0 or later • [High Level 1]: RC4 encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 5.0 or later • [High Level 2]: AES encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 7.0 or later [Password] Enter the password required to open a PDF document. Enter the password twice for confirmation. [Document Permissions] Enter the password required to change the document permissions. Enter the password twice for confirmation. You cannot use the same password as that specified in [Password]. After you have configured document permissions, press [Detail Settings] to configure the detailed permission settings. The set values vary depending on the encryption level. 7 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature 7-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 7.3 [Detail Settings] 7.3.2 Digital ID-based encryption To encrypt a document using the digital ID of a user, configure the following settings. Item Description [Printing Allowed] Specify whether to permit printing of a PDF document. [Low Resolution] is selectable when [High Level 1] or [High Level 2] is selected for Encryption Level. [Enable copying of text, images and other content] Specify whether to enable copying of text, images and other content. [Changes Allowed] Specify the permission level related to making changes to a PDF document. • Select [Inserting, deleting and rotating pages] to insert, delete or rotate the page. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Filling in form fields and signing.] to enter information in the form and add a digital signature. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Commenting, filling in form fields and signing] to add comments, enter information in the form and add a digital signature. • Select [Page layout, filling in form fields and signing.] to insert, delete or rotate the page, enter information in the form and add a digital signature. Configure this setting for encryption at a lower security level. • Select [Any except extracting pages] to edit a document, create the form field and enter information to it, add comments, and add a digital signature. Item Description [Encryption Target] Select an encryption target. Selecting [Other than Metadata] excludes the item specified in [PDF Document Properties] from the encryption target. [Encryption Type] Select [Digital ID]. Select [Digital ID] to display the screen for selecting destinations. The screen for selecting an address displays a list of E-mail addresses with registered digital IDs for S/MIME sending. Specify a digital ID to be used for encryption by selecting an E-mail address. Selecting [Same as destination] uses the digital ID of the address; you do not need to specify a digital ID on this screen. Specification of the digital ID is independent of specification of an address; therefore, you need to specify an address separately. [Signature] When a device certificate has been registered in the MFP, specify whether to add a digital signature. For details on registering a device certificate in the MFP, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-7 7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature 7 [Detail Settings] Reference - Digital ID-based encryption requires registering the certificate of a user in an E-mail address in advance. For details on registering the certificate of a user in an E-mail address, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator]. - You can specify up to 100 digital IDs. - The specifiable digital ID depends on the apply level of a user. - When saving a PDF document in a User Box, you cannot encrypt it using a digital ID. - When encrypting a PDF document and creating a searchable PDF document at the same time, the following settings are not available if [Adjust Rotation] is set to [Adjust] in the searchable PDF setting. [Adjust Rotation] is set to [Adjust] by default. Change the setting as necessary. – [Encryption Type]: [Digital ID] – [Encryption Level]: [High Level 2] – [Encryption Target]: [Other than Metadata] – [Signature]: [Yes] - For details on the searchable PDF function, refer to page 8-3. [Encryption Level] Select an encryption level. To encrypt a document using a digital ID, you cannot select [Low Level] for Encryption Level. • [High Level 1]: RC4 encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 5.0 or later • [High Level 2]: AES encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 7.0 or later Item Description [Printing Allowed] Specify whether to permit printing of a PDF document. [Enable copying of text, images and other content] Specify whether to enable copying of text, images and other content. [Changes Allowed] Specify the permission level related to making changes to a PDF document. • Select [Inserting, deleting and rotating pages] to insert, delete or rotate the page. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Filling in form fields and signing.] to enter information in the form and add a digital signature. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level. • Select [Commenting, filling in form fields and signing] to add comments, enter information in the form and add a digital signature. • Select [Any except extracting pages] to edit a document, create the form field and enter information to it, add comments, and add a digital signature. Item Description 7 Direct Print 7-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 7.4 7.4 Direct Print An AES-encrypted PDF document can be printed in the direct print mode. User PageScope Web Connection to print documents in the direct print mode. Log in as a public user or registered user, and then select [Direct Print]. Click [Browse] to locate the file, and then click [OK]. dReference For details on PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations]. 8 Searchable PDF function bizhub 423/363/283/223 8-3 8.1 Overview 8 8 Searchable PDF function 8.1 Overview Searchable PDF refers to a function that creates a text searchable PDF file by pasting transparent text data on the area of a document in which characters are recognized through an OCR process. You can create a searchable PDF file when saving or sending an original in the PDF or compact PDF format using the scan or User Box function. The searchable PDF function supports multiple languages. When creating a searchable PDF file, select an appropriate language according to the original for correct OCR processing. Also, you can improve the accuracy of OCR processing by automatically correcting the page direction. If you want to manage paper-based documents in electronic format, it will be convenient to use the searchable PDF function to convert documents into a text-searchable PDF file. Reference - This function is available when i-Option LK-105 is registered with the MFP. - For details on the scan function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. - For details on User Box functions, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. Precautions when creating searchable PDF files Depending on the original condition, there may be some problems recognizing the text, the text may become garbled, or other problems may arise. Example - The characters that the MFP does not support will not be correctly recognized. - If any language different from that used in the original is selected when creating a searchable PDF file, text will not be correctly recognized. - If the page direction is not set to be corrected automatically, and the direction of the specified original does not match the direction of the text, text will not be correctly recognized. dReference For details on the setting to automatically correct the page direction, refer to page 8-5. Recognizable character size Reference - When creating a searchable PDF file, a resolution over 300 dpi cannot be specified for scanning. Japanese European language Asian language Resolution 200 dpi 12 pt to 142 pt 9 pt to 142 pt 20 pt to 142 pt 300 dpi 8 pt to 96 pt 6 pt to 96 pt 12 pt to 96 pt 8 Configuring the OCR operation setting 8-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 8.2 8.2 Configuring the OCR operation setting Before creating a searchable PDF file, you can specify whether to give priority to accuracy or speed for OCR processing. [OCR Operation Setting] 1 Press Utility/Counter. 2 Press [User Settings]. 3 Press [Scan/Fax Settings]. 4 In [Scan/Fax Settings] (2/2), press [OCR Operation Setting]. 5 Select the OCR operation, and press [OK]. % [Prioritize Quality]: Give priority to recognition accuracy of an original text. Also, inclination of the original is adjusted automatically. % [Prioritize Speed]: Give priority to OCR processing speed. Inclination of the original is not adjusted. bizhub 423/363/283/223 8-5 8.3 Configuring the searchable PDF setting 8 8.3 Configuring the searchable PDF setting You can create a searchable PDF file by selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] for file type when saving or sending an original in the PDF format using the Scan and User Box functions. dReference For details on how to specify the file type when using the Scan function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. For details on how to specify the file type when using the User Box function, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations]. Reference - If [Compact PDF] is selected for [File Type] to create a searchable PDF file, the OCR processing speed may be faster than when [PDF] is selected. - When creating a searchable PDF file, [Resolution] cannot be set to [400 e 400dpi (Super Fine)] or [600 e 600dpi (Ultra Fine)]. - To create a searchable PDF file and encrypt a PDF file at the same time, if any of the following settings are specified, [Adjust Rotation] cannot be set to [Adjust] in the PDF encryption setting. – [Encryption Type]: [Digital ID] – [Encryption Level]: [High Level 2] – [Encryption Target]: [Other than Metadata] – [Signature]: [Yes] - For details on how to encrypt a PDF file, refer to page 7-5. - For [Japanese], [Chinese], [Korean] and [Taiwanese], the text direction (vertical or horizontal writing) is recognized automatically. However, for [Chinese], [Korean] and [Taiwanese], if both vertical and horizontal text directions are used on the same page, the original is processed based on one or the other. - Downloading or sending a document configured as a searchable PDF file and saved in a User Box using PageScope Web Connection causes the searchable PDF setting to be canceled and a text search to be disabled. Item Description [Language Selection] Select a language to use to create a searchable PDF file. Text will not be correctly recognized unless an appropriate language is selected according to the original. [Adjust Rotation] Specify whether to automatically rotate each page to correct it according to the text direction detected through an OCR process. If the page direction is not corrected automatically, and the direction of the specified original does not match the direction of the text, text will not be correctly recognized. 8 Configuring the searchable PDF setting 8-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 8.3 9 My Panel Function bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-3 9.1 Overview 9 9 My Panel Function 9.1 Overview The My Panel function allows the user to centrally manage the environment of the Control Panel customized by the user according to the application (My Panel), and to obtain My Panel on the MFP selected by the user. Using My Panel provides the same operationality on multiple MFPs in network environment. dReference This function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. For details on enabling the function, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. You can also configure My Panel settings using the PageScope My Panel Manager. For details, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. 9.1.1 Available operations with My Panel My Panel allows you to personalize the Control Panel so that frequently-used functions are preferentially displayed. Also, if the Web browser or Image Panel is available, by linking it with PageScope My Panel Manager, you can manage the Web browser settings and information for each user, and personalize the Image Panel screen. Customizable items My Panel allows you to customize the following items. - Specification of a language displayed on the Control Panel - Specification of a measurement unit to be displayed when entering numbers - Initial display settings for the basic screen of the Copy function and registration of short-cut keys and setting value keys to be arranged in the basic screen - Initial display settings for the basic screen of the fax/scan function and registration of shortcut keys - Initial display settings for the basic screen of the User Box function and registration of shortcut keys - Specification of the color of selected buttons of the Control Panel - Display of the My Panel main menu - Display of the initial screen of the Control Panel Functions available by linking to the Web browser You can personalize the operation environment of the Web browser by linking the Web browser with My Panel. My Panel allows you to manage the following settings and information for each user. - Home page - Favorites - Display history of contents - URL input history - Cookie - Authentication information dReference Register a home page and favorites using the Web browser. Display history, input history, cookies, authentication information are automatically stored in the server as the user uses the Web browser. For details on how to use the Web browser, refer to page 4-3. You can edit the registration information of a home page and favorites using PageScope My Panel Manager. For details, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. 9 Overview 9-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.1 Functions available with Image Panel By linking the Image Panel with My Panel or My Address Book, you can register shortcuts for the document source and destination in the basic screen of Image Panel to personalize the operation environment of Image Panel. Also, you can refer to My Address Book to specify a destination to send data to. dReference For details on customizing the Image Panel screen, refer to page 6-22. For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-3. 9.1.2 My Panel acquisition procedure Perform user authentication on the selected MFP. If the user authentication is succeeded, the MFP automatically accesses the server to obtain My Panel of the user who is logged in. The user can use My Panel while logged in to the MFP. My Panel is not available after the user logs out. 9.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Panel function The following are restrictions on the use of My Panel. - Registering, editing and deleting My Panel are available only for the user who owns the My Panel. The administrator of the MFP cannot operate My Panel. - When you access My Panel for the first time, the language, measurement unit and color selection settings comply with the settings in the MFP. - When you access My Panel for the first time, the main menu of My Panel is displayed in the initial screen. - Only the setting memory (copy program and fax/scan program) registered on the MFP you use is available. - Depending on the functions or option installation status of the MFP on which My Panel is used, the operating environment specified as My Panel may not be available. - When registering, editing, or deleting My panel, an error may occur depending on the connection status to the server. If an error occurs, check the network connection. My Panel is available My Panel is available Server (manages My Panel) (3) Obtain My Panel (2) Access the server (1) Perform authentication My Panel is not available • Authentication failed • Log out • Failed to obtain My Panel,etc. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-5 9.2 Displaying My Panel 9 9.2 Displaying My Panel 9.2.1 Main Menu Main Menu appears first when displaying My Panel. In Main Menu, you can freely lay out frequently used functions and shortcut keys to the setting memory. In Main Menu, 12 types of shortcut keys can be registered. For details on configuring settings for Main Menu, refer to page 9-15. 9.2.2 Displaying Main Menu When using the My Panel function, you can change the initial screen to be displayed after user authentication is succeeded. To display Main Menu for My Panel from a different initial screen, use the [Application Menu]. In [Application Menu], press [My Panel] to display Main Menu of My Panel. dReference The initial screen displayed after user authentication is succeeded can be changed in [My Panel Settings] Settings. For details, refer to page 9-16. For details on the [Application Menu], refer to page 3-4. 9 Customizing My Panel 9-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 9.3 Customizing My Panel Customize My Panel in [My Panel Settings] of [Utility]. 9.3.1 [My Panel Settings] Customizable items are as follows. Item Description [Language Setting] Select a language to be used on My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-8. [Measurement Unit Settings] Select a measurement unit to be used when displaying values on My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-8. [Copier Settings] Specify the initial display settings for the basic screen of the Copy function and register short-cut keys and setting value keys to be arranged in the basic screen. For details, refer to page 9-9. [Scan/Fax Settings] Initial display settings for the basic screen of the fax/scan function and registration of shortcut keys For details, refer to page 9-11. [User Box Settings] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen of the User Box function and register shortcut keys. For details, refer to page 9-13. [Color Selection Settings] Select a color for the selected buttons on My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-14. [Main Menu Settings] Register the main menu buttons on the Main Menu screen of My Panel. For details, refer to page 9-15. [Initial Screen Settings] Specify the initial screen to be displayed after user authentication is succeeded. For details, refer to page 9-16. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-7 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.2 Displaying [My Panel Settings] When the My Panel function is available, [My Panel Settings] appears in [Utility]. 1 Log in as a registered user. 2 Press Utility/Counter. 3 Press [My Panel Settings]. The My Panel Settings screen appears. 9 Customizing My Panel 9-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 9.3.3 [Language Setting] Select a language to be used on My Panel from the languages available on the MFP. 9.3.4 [Measurement Unit Settings] Select a length unit to be used on My Panel. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-9 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.5 [Copier Settings] Specify the initial display settings for the basic screen of the Copy function and register short-cut keys and setting value keys to be arranged in the basic screen. [Default Tab] Configure the default display settings for the basic screen in the copy mode. [Basic] displays normal basic display. [Quick Copy] displays the setting items of basic settings screen in a single screen. It can be used to specify multiple setting at one time. [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] Lay out shortcut keys for frequently used copy application functions on the basic screen. Up to two shortcut keys can be laid out. Even if you log in to another model and register a function in [Shortcut Key 1] and/or [Shortcut Key 2], [OFF] is displayed for this machine when that function is not available with this machine. (Example: [Density], [Background Removal]) In addition, displaying a page with which to register a function in [Shortcut Key 1] and/or [Shortcut Key 2] when that function is not available causes [OFF] to be selected. If [OK] is selected, [OFF] is set for [Shortcut Key 1] and [Shortcut Key 2]. As a result, shortcut keys are not displayed even if you log in to another model. 9 Customizing My Panel 9-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 [Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4] Arrange the setting values of the Copy function and copy program keys in the basic screen. By arranging the frequently-used setting values and copy program keys in the basic screen, you can configure the copy settings easily only by pressing the key. You can arrange up to four keys. Even if you log in to another model and register a function in [Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4], [OFF] is displayed for this machine when that function is not available with this machine. (Example: [Color]) Displaying a page with which to register a function in [Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4] when that function is not available causes [OFF] to be selected. If [OK] is selected, [OFF] is set for [Quick Settings 1] and [Quick Settings 4]. As a result, quick setting keys are not displayed even if you log in to another model. dReference To arrange a copy program in the basic screen, you must register the copy program in advance. For details on how to register a copy program, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. [Default Tab Density Settings] Place the key to adjust the copy density on the basic screen. Reference - When placing the density adjustment key on the basic screen, [Quick Settings 3] and [Quick Settings 4] are not available. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-11 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.6 [Scan/Fax Settings] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen of the fax/scan function and register shortcut keys. [Default Tab] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen in the fax/scan function. [Address Book Index Default] To use the public address book, specify the type of an index to be displayed initially in [Address Book]. By default, [My Address Book] is selected. dReference For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-3. 9 Customizing My Panel 9-12 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] Lay out shortcut keys for frequently used fax/scan application functions on the basic screen. Up to two shortcut keys can be laid out. [Default Address Book] Configure settings for the default screen of [Address Book]. [Default Address Type] When displaying an address book by address type, specify an address type to be displayed by default. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-13 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.7 [User Box Settings] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen of the User Box function and register shortcut keys. [Default Tab] Configure the default display settings for the basic screen (after User Box is pressed on the Control Panel) in the User Box mode. [Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] Lay out shortcut keys for User Boxes frequently used when using a User Box document on the basic screen. Up to two shortcut keys can be laid out. 9 Customizing My Panel 9-14 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 9.3.8 [Color Selection Settings] Select a color for the selected buttons on My Panel. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-15 9.3 Customizing My Panel 9 9.3.9 [Main Menu Settings] Customize the main menu of My Panel. You can freely lay out frequently used functions and shortcut keys to the setting memory (copy programs and fax/scan programs) in Main Menu. Main menu button The shortcut key displayed in Main Menu is called the main menu button, and up to 12 types can be registered. To register the set memory (copy programs and fax/scan programs) as main menu buttons, press [Icon] to select icons for the setting memory to be displayed on Main Menu. Registering a main menu button [Function], [Copy Function Settings], [Scan/Fax Function Settings], [Copy Program Settings], and [Scan/Fax Program Settings] can be assigned as main menu buttons. Item Description [Function] Registers a shortcut key to each of [Copy], [Scan/Fax], [User Box], [Image Panel], and [Web Browser] functions. Shortcut key for the Web Browser or Image Panel functions can be registered in Main Menu only when its function is enabled. [Copy Function Settings] Register shortcut keys in Copy Function Settings for each of [Paper Setting], [Zoom], [Duplex/Combine], and [Finishing]. [Scan/Fax Function Settings] Register shortcut keys in Scan/Fax Function Settings for each of [Scan Settings], [Original Settings] and [Comm. Settings]. [Copy Program Settings] Register a shortcut key to the copier setting memory (copy program) registered in the MFP. Press [Icon] in the Main Menu Settings screen. You can select setting memory icons to be displayed on Main Menu. The shortcut key for the setting memory is available only on the MFP with the setting memory registered. For details on registering the copier setting memory (copy program), refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]. [Scan/Fax Program Settings] Register a shortcut key to the fax/scan setting memory (fax/scan program) registered in the MFP. Press [Icon] in the Main Menu Settings screen. You can select setting memory icons to be displayed on Main Menu. The shortcut key for the setting memory is available only on the MFP with the setting memory registered. For details on registering the fax/scan setting memory (fax/scan program), refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 9 Customizing My Panel 9-16 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 9.3.10 [Initial Screen Settings] Specify the initial screen to be displayed after user authentication is succeeded. By default, the My Panel main menu is displayed as the initial screen. Reference - Shortcut key for the Web Browser or Image Panel functions can be registered in the initial screen only when its function is enabled. 10 My Address function bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-3 10.1 Overview 10 10 My Address function 10.1 Overview The My Address function allows the user to centrally manage the personal address book (My Address Book) on the server, and to obtain My Address Book on the MFP selected by the user. Using My Address Book allows you to use the same address book on multiple MFPs in your network environment without registering addresses individually on each MFP. dReference This function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. For details on enabling the function, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. You can also add entries to My Address Book using PageScope My Panel Manager. For details, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual. 10.1.1 Classification of address books When the My Address function is available, you can use the following two kinds of address books. Public address book Public address book refers to an address book accessible to anyone registered in the main unit of the MFP selected by the user. The public address book is provided with the following features. - In the public address book. one-touch destinations, groups, and programs can be registered. - Since the public address book is registered in the main unit of the MFP, available destinations depend on the selected MFP. - The user or administrator can register, edit, or delete the public address book. - If registration and editing of destinations by a user is restricted by the administrator, registration or editing of the public address book is not possible. My Address Book My Address Book refers to a server-managed address book accessible only to the user. My Address Book is provided with the following features. - In My Address Book, one-touch destinations and groups can be registered. - Since the My Address function is obtained from the server on the MFP selected by the user, it is available on any MFP in which the My Address function is available. - Only the specified user can register, edit or delete My Panel. 10 Overview 10-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 10.1 10.1.2 My Address Book acquisition procedure Perform user authentication on the selected MFP. If the user authentication is succeeded, the MFP automatically accesses the server to obtain My Address Book of the user who is logged in. The user can use My Address Book while logged in to the MFP. My Address Book is not available after the user logs out. 10.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Address function There are following restrictions on My Address Book. - Only the user who owns My Address Book can register, edit or delete My Address Book. The administrator of the MFP cannot operate My Address Book. - My Address Book can contain up to 100 one-touch destinations and up to 10 groups (up to 100 onetouch destinations per group). - If the number of registered destinations in My Address Book exceeds the maximum value, a new destination cannot be registered. - Program cannot be registered in My Address Book. - Destination search by index is not possible in My Address Book. - User Box is available only on the MFPs with registered destinations. - Depending on the MFP settings or options installed in the MFP on which My Address Book is used, sending that has been specified in the address book may not be performed. - When registering, editing, or deleting My address book, an error may occur depending on the connection status to the server. If an error occurs, check the network connection. My Address Book is available My Address Book is available Server (manages My Address Book) (3) Obtain My Address Book (2) Access the server (1) Perform authentication My Address Book is not available • Authentication failed • Log out • Failed to obtain My Panel, etc. bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-5 10.2 Registering and editing a destination 10 10.2 Registering and editing a destination Register frequently used personal addresses in My Address Book. Addresses can be registered using any of the following methods. - Using the Control Panel of the MFP - Using PageScope Web Connection from a computer on the network - Using the PageScope My Panel Manager In My Address Book, one-touch destinations and groups can be registered. This section describes how to register addresses from the Control Panel of the MFP. 10.2.1 Address Book Frequently used fax numbers and E-mail addresses, and registered User Boxes can be registered as onetouch destinations. Up to 100 one-touch destinations can be registered in My Address Book. 1 Log in as a registered user. 2 Press Utility/Counter. 3 Press [One-Touch/User Box Registration]. 4 Press [Create One-Touch Destination]. 5 Press [Address Book (Personal)]. % To add one-touch destinations to the shared address book, press [Address Book (Public)]. A list of personal one-touch destinations appears. 6 Press [New]. % To edit a registered destination, select the destination, and then press [Edit]. % To delete a registered address, select the destination, and then press [Delete]. % To check a registered address, select the address, and then press [Check Job Set.]. 10 Registering and editing a destination 10-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 10.2 7 Select the type of address to be registered, and then configure settings for required items. dReference For details of the address book entries, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 10.2.2 Group Multiple one-touch destinations in My Address Book can be grouped, and registered as a group. In My Address Book, up to 10 groups (up to 100 one-touch destinations per group) can be registered. 1 Log in as a registered user. 2 Press Utility/Counter. 3 Press [One-Touch/User Box Registration]. 4 Press [Create One-Touch Destination]. 5 Press [Group]. A list of groups appears. 6 Press [Personal], and then press [New]. % To edit a registered group, select the group, and then press [Edit]. % To delete a registered group, select the group, and then press [Delete]. % To check a registered group, select the group, and then press [Check Job Set.]. % Press [Public] to display the public groups. bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-7 10.2 Registering and editing a destination 10 7 Check that a personal group is selected as a registration destination, and then configure settings for required items. % Select [Select Group]. The addresses registered in My Address Book are displayed. Select onetouch destination to be grouped. dReference For details on registration contents of the group, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]. 10 Copying destinations between address books 10-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 10.3 10.3 Copying destinations between address books Registered one-touch destinations can be copied between the public address book and My Address Book. Reference - Groups cannot be copied between the public address book and My Address Book. 10.3.1 Copying destinations from the public address book to My Address Book Addresses registered in the public address book can be copied to My Address Book. 1 Display [Create One-Touch Destination]. 2 Press [Address Book (Public)]. 3 Select the type of address to be copied. A list of registered address books of the selected address type appears. 4 Select an address to be copied, and then press [Copy to Personal Addr.]. 5 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen, and then press [OK]. The selected address is copied. bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-9 10.3 Copying destinations between address books 10 10.3.2 Copying destinations from My Address Book to the public address book Destinations registered in My Address Book can be copied to the public address book. 1 Display [Create One-Touch Destination]. 2 Press [Address Book (Personal)]. A list of personal one-touch destinations appears. 3 Select an address to be copied, and then press [Copy to Shared Addr.]. 4 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen, and then press [OK]. The selected address is copied. 10 Using My Address Book when sending a document 10-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 10.4 10.4 Using My Address Book when sending a document Use My Address Book to specify a destination when sending a document using the Scan/Fax functions, or sending a document in a User Box. 10.4.1 Specifying destinations When the My Address function is available, the following screen appears when specifying an address. Addresses registered in My Address Book appears by address type. Select the desired destination. To select an address registered in the public address book, press [Public]. 10.4.2 Searching for destinations If a desired address is not found, you can search for it. In the screen for specifying a destination, press [Search]. To search for destinations based on the registered address type, press [Address Type]. To search for destinations based on the name and a part of registration contents, press [Detail Search]. 11 Index bizhub 423/363/283/223 11-3 11.1 Index by item 11 11 Index 11.1 Index by item A Accessing 5-3 Acquiring my panel 9-4 Address book 10-5 Application key 3-3, 3-5 Application menu 3-4 C Cache 5-3 Cellular phone/PDA 6-11, 6-18 Customizing 3-5, 6-22, 9-6 D Deleting 5-10 Display mode of web browser 4-11 Displaying 4-20 E Entering text in web browser 4-10 External memory 6-16 F Flash player 4-4 G Group 10-6 I Image panel 2-4, 6-3, 6-4, 6-22 Image panel operation 6-6 J Just-fit rendering 4-11 L Logging in 5-5 Logging out 5-5 M Main menu 9-5 My address 2-4, 10-3 My address book 10-3, 10-10 My address book acquisition 10-4 My panel 2-4, 9-3, 9-5 My panel settings 9-6 O OCR 8-4 Opening user boxes 5-6 Operating web browser 4-10 P PageScope Web Connection 5-3 PDF processing 2-4, 7-3 Photo 6-19 PIN code 6-18 Print 6-15 Printing 4-18, 5-8 Public address book 10-3 R Restriction of web browser 4-6 Restrictions on my address 10-4 Restrictions on my panel 9-4 S Saving 4-21 Scanning 6-8 Screen components of image panel 6-5 Screen components of PageScope Web Connection 5-4 Screen components of web browser 4-9 Searchable PDF 2-4, 8-3, 8-5 Send tray 6-17 Smart-fit rendering 4-11 Speaker 4-11 Specifications 4-4, 6-19 Specifications for web browser 4-4 T Toolbar 4-12 U Upload 4-22 User box 5-6, 6-9 W Web browser 2-4, 4-3, 4-5 Web browser information 4-17 Web browser settings 4-16 11-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 11 Index by button 11.2 11.2 Index by button A Access log 4-17 Address 4-14 Address Book (Personal) 10-5 Address Book Index Default 9-11 Application key 1 3-3 Application key 2 3-4 Application Key Settings 3-5 Application menu 3-4 Application menu key 3-3 Authentication information 4-17 C Cache 4-17 Cellular Phone 6-11 Color Selection Settings 9-14 Combine Documents 6-13 Cookie 4-17 Copier Settings 9-9 Copy to Personal Addr. 10-8 Copy to Shared Addr. 10-9 D Default Address Book 9-12 Default Address Type 9-12 Default Tab 9-9, 9-11, 9-13 Default Tab Density Settings 9-10 Destination List 6-16 Digital ID 7-6 Direct Print 7-8 Display 4-16 Document Settings 6-14 Document Source List 6-9 Document/Page 6-12, 6-13, 6-14 E Edit Document 6-12 Encryption 7-5 External memory 6-10, 6-16 F Favorites (Add) 4-13 Favorites (List) 4-13 Function Permission 4-7 G Group 10-6 H History 4-14 I Initial Screen Settings 9-16 L Language Setting 9-8 M Main Menu Settings 9-15 Manage windows 4-17 Measurement Unit Settings 9-8 Menu 4-16 My Panel Settings 9-6 O OCR operation setting 8-4 P Page Operation 4-16 Password 7-5 PDF Document Properties 7-4 Photo/Icon 6-20 Preview 6-12 Print 4-15, 6-15 Proxy 4-17 Q Quick Settings 9-10 R Return to Scan Dest. 6-14 S Scan 6-8 Scan/Fax Settings 9-11 Security 4-17 Settings 4-17 Shortcut key 9-9, 9-12, 9-13 U User Box Settings 9-13 W Web browser contents access 4-8 Web browser setting 4-6 Opérations de Fonction Avancée (i-Option) Guide de l’utilisateur . bizhub 423/363/283/223 Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction 1.1 Bienvenue ........................................................................................................................................ 1-3 1.1.1 Guides de l'utilisateur ........................................................................................................................ 1-3 1.1.2 Guide de l'utilisateur .......................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.2 Conditions d'utilisation................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.3 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel ......................................................................................... 1-5 1.3.1 Symboles utilisés dans ce manuel..................................................................................................... 1-5 Pour utiliser cette machine en toute sécurité .................................................................................... 1-5 Instruction de procédure.................................................................................................................... 1-5 Symboles clés.................................................................................................................................... 1-6 1.3.2 Indications concernant l'original et le papier ..................................................................................... 1-6 Formats de l'original et du papier ...................................................................................................... 1-6 Indications concernant l'original et le papier ..................................................................................... 1-6 2 Présentation 2.1 Présentation des fonctions ............................................................................................................ 2-3 2.1.1 Tableau des fonctions prises en charge ............................................................................................ 2-3 2.1.2 Distribution des touches après extension de la fonction................................................................... 2-3 2.1.3 Extensions de fonctions disponibles ................................................................................................. 2-4 3 Attribution des touches d'application 3.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.1.1 Distribution des touches après extension de la fonction................................................................... 3-3 3.1.2 [Menu Application] ............................................................................................................................. 3-4 3.2 Personnalisation des touches d'application 1 et 2...................................................................... 3-5 3.2.1 [Réglage Touche Application] ............................................................................................................ 3-5 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................... 4-3 4.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Navigateur Web................................................................. 4-3 4.1.2 Caractéristiques ................................................................................................................................. 4-4 Caractéristiques du Navigateur Web................................................................................................. 4-4 Restrictions avec Flash Player ........................................................................................................... 4-4 4.2 Affichage du Navigateur Web ........................................................................................................ 4-5 4.3 Configuration des réglages permettant d'utiliser le navigateur Web ........................................ 4-6 4.3.1 Interdiction d'utilisation du navigateur Web sur l'imprimante multifonction...................................... 4-6 [Réglage Navigateur Web] ................................................................................................................. 4-6 4.3.2 Interdiction d'utilisation du navigateur Web individualisée................................................................ 4-7 [Autoriser Fonction]............................................................................................................................ 4-7 4.3.3 Interdiction d'utiliser les contenus locaux.......................................................................................... 4-8 [Accès Contenu Navigat. Web] .......................................................................................................... 4-8 4.4 Fonctionnement de base................................................................................................................ 4-9 4.4.1 Composition de l'écran...................................................................................................................... 4-9 4.4.2 Instructions d'utilisation ................................................................................................................... 4-10 Opération à l'aide de l'écran tactile ................................................................................................. 4-10 Opération à l'aide du pavé numérique............................................................................................. 4-10 4.4.3 Saisie de texte.................................................................................................................................. 4-10 Saisie de texte.................................................................................................................................. 4-10 Table des matières-2 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.4.4 Mode d'affichage de l'écran ............................................................................................................ 4-11 [Normal]............................................................................................................................................ 4-11 [Rendu Parfait] ................................................................................................................................. 4-11 [Rendu intelligent] ............................................................................................................................ 4-11 4.4.5 Spécifier le volume du haut-parleur................................................................................................. 4-11 4.5 Barre d'outils ................................................................................................................................. 4-12 4.5.1 Description de la barre d'outils ........................................................................................................ 4-12 4.5.2 [Signet] – [Affichage] ........................................................................................................................ 4-13 Liste des favoris ............................................................................................................................... 4-13 4.5.3 [Signet] – [Ajout] ............................................................................................................................... 4-13 4.5.4 [Adresse] .......................................................................................................................................... 4-14 4.5.5 [Histor.]............................................................................................................................................. 4-14 [Afficher Historique].......................................................................................................................... 4-14 4.5.6 [Impr.] ............................................................................................................................................... 4-15 4.5.7 [Menu] .............................................................................................................................................. 4-15 4.6 Configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web............................................................................... 4-16 4.6.1 [Opération Page] .............................................................................................................................. 4-16 4.6.2 [Affichage] ........................................................................................................................................ 4-17 4.6.3 [Gérer fenêtres] ................................................................................................................................ 4-17 4.6.4 [Réglages] ........................................................................................................................................ 4-18 4.7 Impression, affichage ou enregistrement d'un fichier document ............................................ 4-19 4.7.1 Imprimer un fichier document.......................................................................................................... 4-19 4.7.2 Afficher un fichier document............................................................................................................ 4-21 4.7.3 Enregistrer un fichier document....................................................................................................... 4-22 4.8 Chargement d'un fichier de document ....................................................................................... 4-23 4.8.1 Restrictions ...................................................................................................................................... 4-23 4.8.2 Chargement d'un fichier de document numérisé ............................................................................ 4-23 4.8.3 Chargement d'un fichier de document dans une boîte ................................................................... 4-25 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5.1 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection............................................................................................ 5-3 5.1.1 Vérification préalable.......................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.1.2 Modalité d'accès................................................................................................................................ 5-3 5.2 Composition de l'écran .................................................................................................................. 5-4 5.3 Connexion et déconnexion ............................................................................................................ 5-5 5.3.1 Connexion.......................................................................................................................................... 5-5 5.3.2 Déconnexion ...................................................................................................................................... 5-5 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte ................................................................................................................. 5-6 5.4.1 Connexion de boîte............................................................................................................................ 5-6 [Connexion de boîte].......................................................................................................................... 5-6 [Liste de fichiers] ................................................................................................................................ 5-7 5.4.2 Opérations sur le document .............................................................................................................. 5-8 Imprimer un document....................................................................................................................... 5-8 Supprimer un document .................................................................................................................. 5-10 6 Image Panel 6.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................... 6-3 Fonctions ........................................................................................................................................... 6-3 6.2 Afficher Image Panel ...................................................................................................................... 6-4 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel................................................................................................................ 6-5 6.3.1 Composition de l'écran...................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.3.2 Opérations générales......................................................................................................................... 6-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 Table des matières-3 6.3.3 Lecture d'un document...................................................................................................................... 6-8 Numérisation d'un document ............................................................................................................ 6-8 Récupération dans Boîte Utilisateur .................................................................................................. 6-9 Récupérer un document d'une mémoire externe ............................................................................ 6-10 Utilisation de données enregistrées sur un téléphone cellulaire ou un PDA ................................... 6-11 6.3.4 Editer le document........................................................................................................................... 6-12 [Aperçu]............................................................................................................................................ 6-12 [Document/Page] – [Modifier document] ......................................................................................... 6-13 [Document/Page] – [Combiner Documents] .................................................................................... 6-14 [Document/Page] – [Réglages Document] ....................................................................................... 6-14 [Retour à Dest. Numér.] ................................................................................................................... 6-15 6.3.5 Spécifier une destination ................................................................................................................. 6-16 Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 6-16 Spécifier des destinations................................................................................................................ 6-17 Enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe...................................................................... 6-18 6.3.6 Vérifier le magasin d'envoi ............................................................................................................... 6-18 Magasin Envoi.................................................................................................................................. 6-18 [Vérifier Mag. EMI]............................................................................................................................ 6-19 6.3.7 Envoi de données d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un PDA............................................................... 6-20 6.4 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses...................................................................... 6-21 6.4.1 Spécifications relatives aux données photo .................................................................................... 6-21 6.4.2 Enregistrer des données photo........................................................................................................ 6-22 6.5 Personnaliser Image Panel .......................................................................................................... 6-24 6.5.1 Personnaliser la zone de lecture des données ................................................................................ 6-24 6.5.2 Personnaliser la zone Destinataire Document ................................................................................. 6-25 6.5.3 Supprimer une icône de raccourci enregistrée................................................................................ 6-26 7 Fonction de traitement PDF 7.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................... 7-3 Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Traitement PDF.................................................................. 7-3 7.2 Propriétés des documents PDF..................................................................................................... 7-4 7.3 Crypter un document PDF et ajouter une signature numérique ................................................ 7-5 7.3.1 Cryptage commandé par mot de passe ............................................................................................ 7-5 7.3.2 Cryptage commandé par ID numérique ............................................................................................ 7-6 7.4 Impression directe .......................................................................................................................... 7-8 8 Fonction PDF adressable 8.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................... 8-3 Précautions à prendre pour la création de fichiers PDF adressables................................................ 8-3 Taille de caractère reconnaissable .................................................................................................... 8-3 8.2 Configuration du réglage de reconnaissance optique OCR....................................................... 8-4 [Réglage Opération ROC] .................................................................................................................. 8-4 8.3 Configuration du réglage PDF adressable ................................................................................... 8-5 9 Fonction My Panel (Mon Panneau) 9.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec My Panel.............................................................................................. 9-3 Eléments personnalisables ................................................................................................................ 9-3 Fonctions disponibles via le navigateur Web .................................................................................... 9-4 Fonctions disponibles sur Image Panel ............................................................................................. 9-4 9.1.2 Procédure d'acquisition de My Panel ................................................................................................ 9-5 9.1.3 Restrictions d'utilisation de la fonction My Panel .............................................................................. 9-5 9.2 Afficher My Panel ............................................................................................................................ 9-6 9.2.1 Menu principal ................................................................................................................................... 9-6 9.2.2 Affichage du menu principal .............................................................................................................. 9-6 Table des matières-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 Personnaliser My Panel.................................................................................................................. 9-7 9.3.1 [Réglages Mon Panneau] ................................................................................................................... 9-7 9.3.2 Affichage des [Réglages Mon Panneau] ............................................................................................ 9-8 9.3.3 [Réglage Langue] ............................................................................................................................... 9-9 9.3.4 [Réglage Unité de mesure]................................................................................................................. 9-9 9.3.5 [Réglages Copieur]........................................................................................................................... 9-10 [Onglet par Défaut]........................................................................................................................... 9-10 [Touche Raccourci 1] – [Touche Raccourci 2] ................................................................................. 9-10 [Régl. rapides 1] – [Régl. rapides 4] ................................................................................................. 9-11 [Réglages par défaut de l'onglet Densité] ........................................................................................ 9-11 9.3.6 [Paramètres Numérisation/Fax] ....................................................................................................... 9-12 [Onglet par Défaut]........................................................................................................................... 9-12 [Carnet d‘Adresses par Défaut]........................................................................................................ 9-12 [Touche Raccourci 1] – [Touche Raccourci 2] ................................................................................. 9-13 [Carnet d'adresses par défaut] ........................................................................................................ 9-13 [Type adresse par défaut] ................................................................................................................ 9-13 9.3.7 [Réglages Boîte] ............................................................................................................................... 9-14 [Onglet par Défaut]........................................................................................................................... 9-14 [Touche Raccourci 1] – [Touche Raccourci 2] ................................................................................. 9-14 9.3.8 [Param. Sélection Couleur] .............................................................................................................. 9-15 9.3.9 [Réglages Menu Principal] ............................................................................................................... 9-15 Touche Menu principal .................................................................................................................... 9-15 Enregistrer une touche dans le menu principal ............................................................................... 9-16 9.3.10 [Réglage Ecran par défaut] .............................................................................................................. 9-16 10 Fonction My Address 10.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................. 10-3 10.1.1 Classification des carnets d'adresses ............................................................................................. 10-3 Carnet d'adresses public ................................................................................................................. 10-3 My Address Book ............................................................................................................................ 10-3 10.1.2 Procédure d'acquisition de My Address Book ................................................................................ 10-4 10.1.3 Restrictions d'utilisation de la fonction My Address........................................................................ 10-4 10.2 Enregistrement et modification d'une destination .................................................................... 10-5 10.2.1 Carnet d'adresses............................................................................................................................ 10-5 10.2.2 Groupe ............................................................................................................................................. 10-6 10.3 Copier des destinations dans plusieurs carnets d'adresses.................................................... 10-8 10.3.1 Copier les destinations du carnet d'adresses public dans My Address Book ................................ 10-8 10.3.2 Copier les destinations du carnet d'adresses public dans My Address Book ................................ 10-9 10.4 Utiliser My Address Book pour envoyer un document............................................................ 10-10 10.4.1 Spécifier des destinations.............................................................................................................. 10-10 10.4.2 Rechercher des destinations ......................................................................................................... 10-10 11 Index 11.1 Index des éléments....................................................................................................................... 11-3 11.2 Index des touches......................................................................................................................... 11-4 1 Introduction bizhub 423/363/283/223 1-3 1.1 Bienvenue 1 1 Introduction 1.1 Bienvenue Nous vous remercions d'avoir acheté cet appareil. Ce guide de l'utilisateur présente les fonctions qui prennent effet dès l'enregistrement d'un kit licence en option sur la machine. Il décrit aussi les fonctions disponibles dès qu'une application est connectée. La lecture de ce guide de l'utilisateur vous permettra d'exploiter au mieux chacune de ces fonctions. 1.1.1 Guides de l'utilisateur Manuel sur papier Présentation [Guide rapide Opérations Copie/Impression/ Fax/Numérisation/Boîte] Ce guide décrit les procédures et les fonctions d'utilisation les plus fréquemment utilisées afin de vous permettre d'utiliser immédiatement cette machine. Ce manuel contient aussi des notes et des précautions dont il faut tenir compte pour exploiter cette machine en toute sécurité. Assurez-vous de lire ce manuel avant d'utiliser la machine. Ce manuel fournit des informations détaillées sur les marques commerciales et les droits de reproduction. • Marques de fabrique et copyrights Manuels Guide de l'utilisateur sur DVD Présentation [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie] Ce guide décrit en détails les opérations en mode Copie et les réglages de cette machine. • Caractéristiques des originaux et du papier copie • Fonction Copie • Entretien de la machine • Incidents [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Zoom Écran] Ce manuel détaille les procédures d'exploitation du mode Zoom Écran. • Fonction Copie • Fonction Numérisation • Fonction Fax G3 • Fonction Fax réseau [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression] Ce manuel décrit en détail les fonctions d'imprimante. • Fonctions Imprimante • Configuration du pilote d'imprimante [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte] Ce manuel décrit en détail les fonctions Boîte. • Enregistrer des données dans des boîtes • Extraire les données des boîtes • Transfert et impression des données des boîtes utilisateur [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax réseau] Ce manuel décrit en détail le transfert de données numérisées. • Emission E-mail, Envoi FTP, Emission SMB, Enregistrement dans Boîte utilisateur, Emission WebDAV, Services Web • Fax G3 • Adresse IP Fax, Fax Internet [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Pilote Fax] Ce manuel détaille la fonction du pilote Fax qui permet d'envoyer les fax directement d'un ordinateur. • FAX PC 1 Conditions d'utilisation 1-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 1.2 1.1.2 Guide de l'utilisateur Ce guide de l'utilisateur s'adresse à tous les types d'utilisateurs, depuis les utilisateurs novices jusqu'aux administrateurs. Il décrit les opérations de base, les fonctions destinées à une utilisation plus pratique, les opérations de dépannage élémentaires et plusieurs méthodes de réglage de cette machine. Veuillez noter qu'une connaissance de base du produit est requise afin de permettre aux utilisateurs d'effectuer les opérations de dépannage. Limitez vos interventions de dépannage aux seules sections expliquées dans ce manuel. En cas de problèmes, veuillez contacter le SAV. 1.2 Conditions d'utilisation L'activation de l'Option Internet LK-101 v2 vous permet d'accéder à Internet depuis le Panneau de contrôle de l'imprimante multifonction. Les contenus auxquels les utilisateurs ont accès et qu'ils téléchargent et transmettent à l'aide du navigateur Web de l'imprimante multifonction ou par tout autre moyen restent de leur responsabilité. Les utilisateurs doivent respecter les règles de l'entreprise et les lois en vigueur dans le pays d'implantation de la machine. Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. et les sociétés du groupe n'assumeront aucune responsabilité pour l'exploitation d'Internet par les utilisateurs. [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau] Ce manuel décrit en détail méthodes de réglage pour chaque fonction avec la connexion réseau. • Paramètres Réseau • Réglages à l'aide de PageScope Web Connection [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations de Fonction Avancée] Ce guide détaille les fonctions disponibles à l'enregistrement du kit de licence et en se connectant à une application. • Fonction Navigateur Web • Image Panel • Fonctions de traitement PDF • PDF adressable • Fonctions My Panel et My Address Manuels Guide de l'utilisateur sur DVD Présentation bizhub 423/363/283/223 1-5 1.3 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1 1.3 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1.3.1 Symboles utilisés dans ce manuel Les symboles utilisés dans le manuel expriment divers types d'informations. La présentation qui suit décrit chaque symbole associé à l'utilisation correcte et sûre de la machine. Pour utiliser cette machine en toute sécurité 7 AVERTISSEMENT - Ce symbole indique que le non respect des instructions peut entraîner des blessures mortelles ou graves. 7 ATTENTION - Ce symbole indique que la négligence des instructions peut entraîner des fausses manoeuvres susceptibles de provoquer des blessures ou des dommages matériels. REMARQUE Ce symbole indique un risque de dommages matériels pour la machine ou les documents. Respectez les consignes afin d'éviter tout dommage matériel. Instruction de procédure 0 Cette coche indique une option nécessaire à l'utilisation des conditions ou fonctions prérequises d'une procédure. 1 Le chiffre "1" ainsi formaté représente la première étape. 2 Ce numéro de format représente l'ordre des différentes étapes. % Ce symbole indique une explication supplémentaire d'instruction de procédure. % Ce symbole indique une transition du panneau de contrôle pour accéder à l'élément de menu souhaité. Ce symbole indique la page désirée. Les procédures opératoires sont décrites à l'aide d'illustrations. 1 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 1.3 dPour info Ce symbole indique une référence. Consulter la référence en cas de besoin. Symboles clés [ ] Le nom des touches de l'écran tactile ou de l'écran d'ordinateur ainsi que le nom des guides d'utilisateur sont indiqués entre crochets. Texte en gras Les noms de touches du panneau de contrôle, de pièces, de modèles et d'options sont tous indiqués en texte gras. 1.3.2 Indications concernant l'original et le papier Formats de l'original et du papier Les représentations et symboles utilisés dans le manuel pour décrire les originaux et le papier sont expliqués ci-dessous. Le côté Y représente la largeur et le côté X la longueur dans la détermination de l'original et du format papier. Indications concernant l'original et le papier w indique un format papier où le côté X (longueur) est plus grand que le côté Y (largeur). v indique un format papier où le côté X (longueur) est plus petit que le côté Y (largeur). 2 Présentation bizhub 423/363/283/223 2-3 2.1 Présentation des fonctions 2 2 Présentation 2.1 Présentation des fonctions La description suivante présente l'ensemble des fonctions. Référence - La disponibilité de la fonction avancée est subordonnée à l'utilisation du kit de mise à niveau UK-203 fourni en option. - Un Disque dur doit être installé dans le MFP (Produit multifonctions) pour pouvoir utiliser les fonctions avancées. - Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement du kit de licence et sur l'activation de fonctions sur les imprimantes multifonction, reportez-vous au [Guide rapide Opérations Copie/Impression/Fax/ Numérisation]. - Pour associer la fonction à l'application, vous devez l'activer depuis l'application utilisée. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de la fonction, reportez-vous au manuel relatif à l'application. 2.1.1 Tableau des fonctions prises en charge Le tableau suivant indique les fonctions prises en charge pour les kits licence et les applications. 2.1.2 Distribution des touches après extension de la fonction L'ajout de la fonction Navigateur Web, Image Panel ou My Panel modifie l'utilisation des touches Boîte, Fax/Numérisation et Copie du panneau de contrôle. - La touche Boîte fonctionne comme une touche du Menu Application et les touches Fax/Numérisation et Copie fonctionnent comme des touches d'application. - Appuyez sur Menu Application pour afficher le [Menu Application] qui vous permet de basculer vers la fonction ajoutée. - Pour prendre en compte l'état d'utilisation, il est possible de modifier la fonction qui doit être assignée à la touche d'application. Pour plus de détails, voir page 3-3. Navigateur Web Image Panel Traitement PDF PDF adressable Option Internet LK-101 v2 o o − − Option Internet LK-102 − − o − Option Internet LK-105 − − − o My Panel My Address PageScope My Panel Manager o o 2 Présentation des fonctions 2-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 2.1 2.1.3 Extensions de fonctions disponibles La description suivante présente l'ensemble des fonctions. Pour plus de détails, reportez-vous à la référence décrite ci-dessous. Référence - Si le dispositif de gestion de compte est installé sur l'imprimante multifonction, l'utilisation d'Image Panel est impossible. Fonction Présentation Référence Navigateur Web Enregistrez l'Option Internet LK-101 v2 de l'imprimante multifonction afin d'utiliser cette fonction. Le panneau de contrôle de l'imprimante multifonction connectée au réseau vous permet d'accéder à Internet ou un intranet et d'en afficher et imprimer le contenu. Avec un navigateur Web, vous pouvez aussi accéder via PageScope Web Connection à l'imprimante multifonction connectée au réseau et aux documents enregistrés dans ses boîtes utilisateurs. p. 4-3 p. 5-3 Image Panel Enregistrez l'Option Internet LK-101 v2 de l'imprimante multifonction afin d'utiliser cette fonction. Image Panel est une nouvelle interface intuitive et facile à comprendre du panneau. Ce "panneau" vous aide à facilement visualiser le cycle d'opérations complet depuis le chargement jusqu'à l'émission d'un document. Vous pouvez ajouter des données photo aux destinations en numérotation abrégée à l'aide de PageScope Web Connection. Les données photographiques enregistrées sont appliquées à la liste d'adresses d'Image Panel. p. 6-3 Traitement PDF Enregistrez l'Option Internet LK-102 v2 de l'imprimante multifonction afin d'utiliser cette fonction. Exécute le cryptage de PDF commandé par mot de passe ou ID numérique, ajoute une signature numérique et configure les réglages des propriétés pour la distribution de documents au format PDF à l'aide de la fonction Numérisation ou Boîte. p. 7-3 PDF adressable Cette fonction est disponible lorsque l'Option Internet LK-105 est enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction. Vous pouvez créer un fichier PDF adressable en collant les données texte transparent dans la zone du document où les caractères sont reconnus par un processus de lecture optique. Vous pouvez créer un fichier PDF adressable en enregistrant ou envoyant un original au format PDF à l'aide des fonctions Numérisation ou Boîte utilisateur. p. 8-3 My Panel (Mon Panneau) Cette fonction est utilisée avec PageScope My Panel Manager. Gestion centralisée de l'environnement du panneau de contrôle personnalisé par l'utilisateur en fonction de l'application (My Panel), puis obtention de My Panel sur l'imprimante multifonction sélectionnée par l'utilisateur. p. 9-3 My Address (Mon adresse) Cette fonction est utilisée avec PageScope My Panel Manager. Gestion centralisée du carnet d'adresses personnel (My Address Book) par le serveur, puis obtention de My Address Book sur l'imprimante sélectionnée par l'utilisateur. p. 10-3 3 Attribution des touches d'application bizhub 423/363/283/223 3-3 3.1 Présentation 3 3 Attribution des touches d'application 3.1 Présentation La description suivante présente la distribution des touches et le [menu Application] du panneau de contrôle. 3.1.1 Distribution des touches après extension de la fonction L'ajout de la fonction Navigateur Web, Image Panel ou My Panel permet à la touche Boîte de fonctionner comme une touche Menu Application et à Fax/Numérisation et Copie comme des touches d'application. Référence - Enregistrez l'Option Internet LK-101 v2 afin d'utiliser les fonctions Navigateur Web et Image Panel de l'imprimante multifonction. - La fonction My Panel est utilisée en association avec PageScope My Panel Manager. N°. Nom Description 1 Menu Application Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher le [Menu Application]. Il n'est pas possible d'affecter une fonction différente à cette touche. Si vous ajoutez une fonction, fixez un autocollant Menu Application (inclus dans le kit de mise à niveau UK-203) pour modifier le nom de la touche sur le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails, voir page 3-4. 3 Présentation 3-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 3.1 3.1.2 [Menu Application] Appuyez sur la touche Menu Application pour afficher le [Menu Application]. Si vous désirez utiliser une fonction qui n'est pas affectée à la touche d'application 1 ou 2, vous pouvez permuter les fonctions de la touche concernée dans le [Menu Application]. 2 Touche d'application 1 La fonction Fax/Numérisation est attribuée par défaut. L'administrateur peut assigner une fonction différente à cette touche. Si vous modifiez la fonction attribuée à la touche, fixez un autocollant décrivant la nouvelle fonction (inclus dans le kit de mise à niveau UK-203) pour changer le nom de la touche sur le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails sur l'affectation d'une fonction, voir page 3-5. 3 Touche d'application 2 La fonction Copie est attribuée par défaut. L'administrateur peut assigner une fonction différente à cette touche. Si vous modifiez la fonction attribuée à la touche, fixez un autocollant décrivant la nouvelle fonction (inclus dans le kit de mise à niveau UK-203) pour changer le nom de la touche sur le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails sur l'affectation d'une fonction, voir page 3-5. N°. Nom Description bizhub 423/363/283/223 3-5 3.2 Personnalisation des touches d'application 1 et 2 3 3.2 Personnalisation des touches d'application 1 et 2 Pour prendre en compte l'état d'utilisation, il est possible de modifier les fonctions qui doivent être assignées aux touches d'application 1 et 2. 3.2.1 [Réglage Touche Application] Pour attribuer une fonction aux touches d'application 1 et 2, utilisez [Réglage Touche Application]. 1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur pour afficher l'écran [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur [Réglages Système]. 5 Dans [Réglage Système] (2/2), appuyez sur [Param. Touche Application]. 6 Sélectionnez une touche d'application ([Touche 1] ou [Touche 2]) pour y attribuer une fonction. 3 Personnalisation des touches d'application 1 et 2 3-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 3.2 7 Sélectionnez la fonction concernée. 8 Appuyez sur [OK]. La fonction est attribuée à la touche d'application. 4 Fonction Navigateur Web bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-3 4.1 Présentation 4 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4.1 Présentation La fonction Navigateur Web imprime, affiche et enregistre des contenus Internet ou Intranet en y accédant depuis le panneau de contrôle de l'imprimante multifonction connectée au réseau. Référence - Enregistrez l'Option Internet LK-101 v2 afin d'utiliser cette fonction de l'imprimante multifonction. 4.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Navigateur Web La fonction Navigateur Web vous permet d'effectuer les opérations suivantes. - Afficher et imprimer les contenus Web sur Internet ou l'intranet. - Afficher, imprimer et enregistrer un fichier document sur Internet ou l'intranet. - Téléchargement d'un fichier de document numérisé ou d'un fichier de document enregistré dans une Boîte utilisateur sur un serveur sur Internet ou l'Intranet. - Partager les documents des boîtes utilisateur des imprimantes multifonction sur le réseau à l'aide PageScope Web Connection. - Lorsque la fonction My Panel est disponible, vous pouvez personnaliser l'environnement d'utilisation du navigateur Web en le connectant à My Panel. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation de PageScope Web Connection depuis le panneau de contrôle, voir page 5-3. Pour plus d'informations sur My Panel, voir page 9-3. 4 Présentation 4-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.1 4.1.2 Caractéristiques Caractéristiques du Navigateur Web Les caractéristiques principales du navigateur Web installé sur l'imprimante multifonction sont les suivantes. Restrictions avec Flash Player Les restrictions liées au module Flash Player installé dans le Navigateur Web. - La fonction permettant de générer un événement par une pression de touche n'est pas prise en charge. - Les fonctions permettant de coller ou d'obtenir des données telles que des chaînes de caractères du presse-papier ne sont pas prises en charge. - Le menu contextuel n'est pas pris en charge. - La fonction d'impression de Flash n'est pas prise en charge. - Les fonctions permettant d'exécuter JavaScript depuis Flash ou d'exploiter Flash depuis JavaScript ne sont pas prises en charge. - Les écrans ne comportant pas de fenêtres instantanées ne sont pas pris en charge. - La fonction Signet de Flash n'est pas prise en charge. - La fonction permettant d'envoyer/recevoir des données en temps réel au moyen du Flash Media Server n'est pas prise en charge. - La fonction de communication via XMLSocket n'est pas prise en charge. Élément Caractéristiques Moteur du navigateur NetFront Protocoles pris en charge HTTP (HTTP/0.9, 1.0, 1.1), HTTPS, TCP/IP Langage de balisage pris en charge HTML 4.01, XHTML 1.1/De base Feuille de style prise en charge Partie de CSS1 et 2 Langage script pris en charge Partie de JavaScript 1.5, ECMAScript 3e édition, Ajax (limité au contenu pris en charge par JavaScript) DOM pris en charge Partie du niveau 1 et 2 Format pris en charge JPEG, BMP, PNG, GIF, animation GIF, PDF, Flash 7.0 et antérieur Versions SSL/TLS prises en charge SSL 2.0, SSL 3.0, TLS 1.0 Codes de caractères pris en charge Japonais (Maj_JIS), japonais (ISO-2022-JP), japonais (EUC-JP), chinois simplifié (GB2312), chinois traditionnel (Big5), Europe occidentale (ISO-8859-1), Unicode (UTF-8) Mode d'affichage Normal, Rendu Parfait, Rendu intelligent PDF Viewer Adobe® Reader® LE Flash Player Adobe® Flash® Player 7 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-5 4.2 Affichage du Navigateur Web 4 4.2 Affichage du Navigateur Web Dans le [Menu Application], appuyez sur [Navigateur Web]. La page spécifiée comme page d'accueil apparaît. Référence - Si un utilisateur connecté utilise le navigateur Web associé à My Panel et que cet utilisateur appuie sur [Navigateur Web], le réglage Navigateur Web et les informations associées à l'utilisateur sont téléchargés du serveur sur l'imprimante multifonction. Si l'utilisateur a défini une page d'accueil personnelle, celle-ci s'affiche. - Au lancement du navigateur Web, vous pouvez spécifier l'affichage de la page d'accueil ou de la dernière page visitée. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-18. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur le [Menu Application], voir page 3-4. Pour plus d'informations sur My Panel, voir page 9-3. 4 Configuration des réglages permettant d'utiliser le navigateur Web 4-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.3 4.3 Configuration des réglages permettant d'utiliser le navigateur Web Si vous souhaitez interdire l'utilisation du navigateur Web sur l'imprimante multifonction, vous pouvez le faire sans désactiver le kit de licence. Vous pouvez également interdire l'utilisation du navigateur Web individuellement. 4.3.1 Interdiction d'utilisation du navigateur Web sur l'imprimante multifonction Si vous souhaitez interdire l'utilisation du navigateur Web, vous pouvez le faire sans désactiver le kit de licence. [Réglage Navigateur Web] 1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur pour afficher l'écran [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur [Réglages Réseau]. 5 Dans [Réglages Réseau] (2/2), appuyez sur [Réglage Navigateur Web]. 6 Sélectionnez [Non valide] et appuyez sur [Valider]. Référence - Si [Réglage Navigateur Web] est réglé sur [Non valide], [Navigateur Web] est masqué dans le [Menu Application]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-7 4.3 Configuration des réglages permettant d'utiliser le navigateur Web 4 4.3.2 Interdiction d'utilisation du navigateur Web individualisée Si la gestion des utilisateurs est effectuée sur l'imprimante multifonction, vous pouvez interdire l'utilisation du navigateur Web individuellement. [Autoriser Fonction] 1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur pour afficher l'écran [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur [Identification Utilisateur/Suivi Compte]. 5 Dans [Système d'Authentification], appuyez sur [Enregistrement Utilisateur]. 6 Sélectionnez l'utilisateur auquel vous souhaitez interdire l'utilisation du navigateur Web et appuyez sur [Modifier]. % Si vous souhaitez interdire l'utilisation du navigateur Web aux utilisateurs publics, appuyez sur [ ] et sélectionnez [Public]. 7 Appuyez sur [Autoriser Fonction]. 8 Dans [Autoriser Fonction] (3/3), réglez [Navigateur Web] sur [Interdit] et appuyez sur [Valider]. Référence - Le réglage n'est pas disponible si [Non valide] est spécifié dans [Réglages Administrateur]ö [Réglages Réseau]ö[Réglage Navigateur Web]. - La configuration de l'autorisation de la fonction aux utilisateurs publics est disponible lorsque l'accès utilisateur public est autorisé dans [Réglages Administrateur]ö[Identification Utilisateur/ Suivi Compte]ö[Système d'authentification]ö[Accès Util. Public]. - Si la gestion des utilisateurs est réalisée sur le serveur externe, vous pouvez configurer les réglages par défaut d'autorisation de la fonction pour les utilisateurs qui se connectent à l'imprimante multifonction en utilisant l'Authentification Serveur Externe la première fois. Pour procéder à cette configuration, sélectionnez [Réglages Administrateur]ö[Identification Utilisateur/Suivi Compte]ö[Réglages Identification Utilisateur]ö[Param. admin.]ö[Autoris. par défaut Fonction]ö[Navigateur Web]. Pour plus d'informations sur [Autoris. par défaut Fonction], reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. 4 Configuration des réglages permettant d'utiliser le navigateur Web 4-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.3 4.3.3 Interdiction d'utiliser les contenus locaux Si le navigateur Web est utilisé en interaction avec une application, vous pouvez accéder par le navigateur Web aux fichiers (contenus préinstallés, fichiers d'images, fichiers d'aide, etc.) enregistrés sur le disque dur de l'imprimante multifonction. L'administrateur peut interdire l'utilisation des fichiers enregistrés sur le disque dur de l'imprimante multifonction depuis le navigateur Web selon les besoins. Référence - Pour plus d'informations sur l'interaction de l'application avec le navigateur Web, contactez le SAV. [Accès Contenu Navigat. Web] 1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur pour afficher l'écran [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Sécurité]. 5 Appuyez sur [Détails Sécurité]. 6 Dans [Détails Sécurité] (4/4), réglez [Accès Contenu Navigat. Web] sur [Interdit] et appuyez sur [Valider]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-9 4.4 Fonctionnement de base 4 4.4 Fonctionnement de base 4.4.1 Composition de l'écran L'écran Navigateur Web se compose des éléments suivants. Référence - Lorsque le kit de connexion locale est installé en option sur l'imprimante multifonction, le haut-parleur du kit permet d'entendre le son des pages Web ou des contenus Flash. Vous pouvez régler le son du haut-parleur avec l'icône. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-11. N°. Nom Description 1 Barre d'outils Permet d'exploiter le Navigateur Web ou de configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web. Elle est affichée en permanence sur l'écran Navigateur Web. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-12. 2 Barre de défilement Apparaît à droite de l'écran lorsque le contenu d'affichage déborde l'écran verticalement. Apparaît en bas de l'écran lorsque le contenu d'affichage déborde l'écran horizontalement. 3 Fenêtre En cas d'affichage de plusieurs fenêtres, vous pouvez changer de fenêtre en vous servant des onglets situés au bas de l'écran. Appuyez sur [e] de l'onglet actif pour fermer la fenêtre. 4 Icône L'icône qui représente l'état de connexion apparaît au chargement du contenu. L'icône apparaît si le kit de connexion locale est installé en option sur l'imprimante multifonction. 1 4 3 2 4 Fonctionnement de base 4-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.4 4.4.2 Instructions d'utilisation Utilisez le Navigateur Web principalement sur le panneau de contrôle. Vous pouvez effectuer certaines opérations à partir du pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle. Référence - Le stylet procure un confort d'utilisation sur l'écran tactile. Opération à l'aide de l'écran tactile Utilisez le Navigateur Web principalement sur le panneau de contrôle. - Pour sélectionner un élément, il suffit d'appuyer dessus. - Si un lien figure dans le contenu, appuyez dessus pour y accéder. - Si vous devez saisir des caractères, appuyez sur le champ de saisie de la boîte de dialogue ou du contenu. Un clavier apparaît à l'écran. Tapez les caractères sur le clavier de l'écran. - Pour faire défiler l'écran, appuyez sur [ ], [ ], [ ] ou sur [ ] de la barre de défilement. Opération à l'aide du pavé numérique Vous pouvez utiliser le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle pour entrer des valeurs numériques ou sélectionner des articles dans la liste. 4.4.3 Saisie de texte Si vous devez saisir des caractères, appuyez sur le champ de saisie de la boîte de dialogue ou du contenu. Un clavier apparaît à l'écran. Saisie de texte Appuyez sur le caractère que vous voulez saisir sur le clavier de l'écran. - Pour entrer des caractères en majuscules ou des symboles, appuyez sur [Maj.]. - Vous pouvez aussi saisir des nombres à l'aide du pavé numérique. Référence - Pour changer un caractère individuel dans le texte saisi, appuyez sur [ ] ou [ ] pour déplacer le curseur sur le caractère à modifier, puis appuyez sur [Eff.] et tapez ensuite la lettre ou le chiffre désiré. - Pour supprimer tous les caractères saisis, appuyez sur la touche C (effacer) du panneau de contrôle. - Pour annuler le réglage quand le clavier est affiché, appuyez sur [Rétablir]. - Certains boutons peuvent ne pas s'afficher en fonction des caractères saisis. - Si la saisie de codes de caractères sur plusieurs lignes est autorisée, le bouton de saut de ligne apparaît. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-11 4.4 Fonctionnement de base 4 4.4.4 Mode d'affichage de l'écran Il existe trois types de mode d'affichage de l'écran Navigateur Web. [Normal] Ce mode d'affichage correspond à celui d'un navigateur Web normal. L'affichage du contenu n'est pas ajusté à la taille de l'écran. Faites défiler l'écran horizontalement et verticalement pour parcourir le contenu. (Le défaut est réglé sur [Normal]). [Rendu Parfait] La disposition du contenu est conservée et la page est affichée après réduction pour que toute sa largeur soit visible. Faites défiler l'écran horizontalement et verticalement pour parcourir le contenu. [Rendu intelligent] Le tableau est divisé et redistribué verticalement pour correspondre à la largeur de l'écran. Faites défiler l'écran horizontalement et verticalement pour parcourir le contenu. La disposition peut s'en trouver modifiée selon la page à afficher. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur le changement du mode d'affichage, voir page 4-17. 4.4.5 Spécifier le volume du haut-parleur Lorsque le kit de connexion locale est installé en option sur l'imprimante multifonction, le haut-parleur du kit permet d'entendre le son des pages Web ou des contenus Flash. Si un haut-parleur est connecté à l'imprimante multifonction, l'icône haut-parleur s'affiche en bas à gauche du navigateur Web. Appuyez sur l'icône haut-parleur pour afficher l'écran Volume qui vous permet de régler le volume du haut-parleur. - Pour augmenter le volume au niveau supérieur, appuyez sur [Plus clair] ou sur la touche # du panneau de contrôle. - Pour réduire le volume au niveau inférieur, appuyez sur [Plus foncé] ou sur la touche * du panneau de contrôle. - Une pression sur [Sourdine] coupe le son. De plus, l'icône de haut-parleur se change en icône de hautparleur muet. 4 Barre d'outils 4-12 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.5 4.5 Barre d'outils La barre d'outils située en haut de l'écran Navigateur Web permet d'effectuer différentes opérations et de configurer différents paramètres. 4.5.1 Description de la barre d'outils Le tableau suivant indique les fonctions des touches de la barre d'outils. Icône Nom Description Verso Retour à la page précédente. Suiv. Affiche la page suivante. Actualiser/ Annuler Recharge la page affichée pour en mettre à jour le contenu. Si vous appuyez sur cette touche pendant que vous chargez une page, le chargement est interrompu. Home Affiche la page enregistrée comme page d'accueil. "http://www.konicaminolta.com/" est la page enregistrée par défaut. Pour plus de détails sur la page d'accueil, voir page 4-16. [Signet] – [Affichage] Affiche la liste des favoris enregistrés. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-13. [Signet] – [Ajout] Ajoute l'URL de la page actuellement affichée à la liste des favoris. L'ajout d'une adresse URL aux favoris nécessite l'autorité administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-13. [Adresse] Affiche l'écran de saisie des URL. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-14. [Histor.] Affiche la liste des pages affichées jusque là. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-14. [Impr.] Imprime le contenu de la page affichée. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-15. [Menu] Configuration des paramètres Navigateur Web. Il y a deux types de menu : un pour l'utilisateur et l'autre pour l'administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-15. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-13 4.5 Barre d'outils 4 4.5.2 [Signet] – [Affichage] Appuyez sur [Liste] pour afficher la liste des favoris enregistrés à l'aide de vignettes. La sélection d'un favori permet d'accéder à l'URL correspondante. Référence - Si l'utilisateur se sert du navigateur Web associé à My Panel, la liste des favoris de l'utilisateur géré par le serveur s'affiche. Liste des favoris Appuyez sur pour afficher la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément concerné. Sélectionnez l'opération souhaitée dans la liste. Le tableau suivant indique les opérations disponibles. 4.5.3 [Signet] – [Ajout] (L'ajout d'une adresse URL aux favoris nécessite l'autorité administrateur). En appuyant sur [Ajout], vous êtes invité(e) à entrer le mot de passe administrateur. Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur et appuyez sur [Valider]. L'écran d'enregistrement apparaît. Vérifiez le contenu et appuyez sur [OK]. L'URL de la page affichée est ajoutée à la liste des favoris. L'imprimante multifonction peut gérer 100 favoris au maximum. - Pour enregistrer les vignettes de la pages à ajouter aux favoris, cochez la case [Enregistrer Vignette] dans l'écran d'enregistrement. - L'enregistrement est effectué sous le titre donné précédemment au contenu. Pour changer le titre, appuyez sur le champ de saisie du titre dans l'écran d'enregistrement et modifiez le titre. Référence - L'accès au navigateur Web en association avec My Panel ne nécessite pas l'autorité administrateur. My Panel peut gérer un maximum de 20 favoris par utilisateur. Élément Description [Vue Liste]/ [Vue Vignettes] Permet de choisir entre afficher la liste des favoris ou leurs vignettes. [Vue Adresse]/ [Vue Titre] Permet d'afficher les favoris en visualisant au choix leur adresse ou leur titre. [Supprimer tout] Supprime tous les favoris enregistrés. La suppression de favoris nécessite l'autorité administrateur. [Fermer] Referme la liste des favoris. Élément Description [Ouvrir une nouvelle fenêtre] Ouvre le favori sélectionné dans une nouvelle fenêtre. [Editer] Permet d'éditer l'intitulé et l'adresse du favori sélectionné. La modification de favoris nécessite l'autorité administrateur. [Haut] Vous positionne au-dessus du favori sélectionné. Utilisez cette touche lorsque les favoris sont affichés en Vue Liste. [Bas] Vous positionne au-dessous du favori sélectionné. Utilisez cette touche lorsque les favoris sont affichés en Vue Liste. [Supprimer] Supprime le favori sélectionné. La suppression de favoris nécessite l'autorité administrateur. [Fermer] Referme cet écran. 4 Barre d'outils 4-14 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.5 4.5.4 [Adresse] Appuyez sur [Adresse] pour afficher l'écran de saisie de l'adresse. Appuyez sur le champ de saisie pour afficher un clavier à l'écran. Entrez l'URL de la page à afficher et appuyez sur [Valider] or [Ouvrir une nouvelle fenêtre]. Appuyez sur [Historique Saisie] pour afficher la liste de l'historique de saisie. Vous pouvez référencer les saisies précédentes. L'imprimante multifonction a une capacité de 100 dossiers d'historique de saisie. Référence - Si l'écran de saisie d'adresse est affiché, vous voyez l'URL de la page affichée. Pour supprimer l'URL actuellement affiché, affichez le clavier à l'écran et appuyez sur [Eff.]. Appuyez sur la touche C (effacer) du panneau de contrôle pour supprimer toutes les entrées de données. - Si l'utilisateur se sert du navigateur Web associé à My Panel, la liste des dossiers d'historique de saisie de l'utilisateur géré par le serveur s'affiche. My Panel peut gérer un maximum de 20 dossiers d'historique de saisie par utilisateur. 4.5.5 [Histor.] Appuyez sur [Histor.] pour afficher l'écran Afficher Historique. Dans la liste d'affichage de l'historique, sélectionnez la page que vous voulez afficher à nouveau. L'imprimante multifonction a une capacité de 100 dossiers d'historique d'affichage. Référence - Si l'utilisateur se sert du navigateur Web associé à My Panel, la liste des dossiers d'historique d'affichage de l'utilisateur géré par le serveur s'affiche. My Panel peut gérer un maximum de 20 dossiers d'historique d'affichage par utilisateur. [Afficher Historique] Appuyez sur pour afficher la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément concerné. Sélectionnez l'opération souhaitée dans la liste. Le tableau suivant indique les opérations disponibles. Élément Description [Vue Adresse]/ [Vue Titre] Permet d'afficher l'historique en visualisant au choix l'adresse ou le titre. [Supprimer tout] Supprime toutes les entrées enregistrées dans l'affichage de l'historique. La suppression de l'historique d'affichage nécessite l'autorité administrateur. [Fermer] Ferme la liste d'affichage de l'historique. Élément Description [Ouvrir une nouvelle fenêtre] Charge l'affichage d'historique sélectionné dans une nouvelle fenêtre. [Supprimer] Supprime l'affichage d'historique sélectionné. La suppression de l'historique d'affichage nécessite l'autorité administrateur. [Fermer] Referme cet écran. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-15 4.5 Barre d'outils 4 4.5.6 [Impr.] Appuyez sur [Impression] pour afficher l'écran d'impression. Configurez les réglages d'impression et appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle. Le contenu affiché est imprimé. Référence - Si vous essayez d'imprimer une page Web ou une image JPEG ou autre qui utilise une grande partie de la mémoire, une erreur de numérisation est susceptible de se produire et de désactiver l'impression. - La valeur de réglage de [Finition] varie en fonction des options installées. – Les réglages d'Agrafage sont uniquement disponibles si le module de finition en option est installé. – Les réglages de perforation sont uniquement disponibles si le kit de perforation est installé sur le module de finition en option. – Les fonctions de pliage et d'agrafage central + pliage peuvent être utilisées lorsqu'une Piqueuse à cheval est installée sur l'unité de finition en option. 4.5.7 [Menu] Appuyez sur [Menu] pour configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web. Il y a deux types de menu : un pour l'utilisateur et l'autre pour l'administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-16. Élément Description [Papier] Sélectionnez le format du papier pour l'impression. [Recto/Recto-Vers] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer en mode recto-verso. [Réglages Tampon] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer le [Titre], l'[URL], la [Date/Heure], ainsi que le [Numéro Page]. [Finition] Configurez les réglages d'assemblage, de groupage, d'agrafage, de perforation ou de pliage/reliure. 4 Configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web 4-16 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.6 4.6 Configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web Le fait d'appuyer sur [Menu] dans la barre d'outils permet d'afficher le menu de l'utilisateur. Les utilisateurs peuvent seulement visualiser les réglages opératoires et les informations du navigateur Web. L'administrateur de l'imprimante multifonction peut configurer l'environnement d'exploitation et les paramètres sécurité en plus des réglages opératoires du navigateur Web. Pour afficher le menu administrateur, appuyez sur [Administrateur] dans l'écran du menu, puis entrez le mot de passe administrateur. 4.6.1 [Opération Page] Configurez les réglages opération page sous l'onglet [Opération Page]. Référence - Les éléments portant le signe * sont uniquement affichés pour le menu administrateur. - L'élément [Utiliser en tant que page d'accueil] ne s'affiche uniquement que pour les utilisateurs se servant du navigateur Web en association avec My Panel. Élément Description [Utiliser en tant que page d'accueil]* Enregistre la page affichée comme page d'accueil. [Mémo Page] Affiche la page enregistrée comme mémo page. Il suffit de sélectionner le Mémo Page dans la liste pour afficher la page correspondante. Appuyez sur pour afficher la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément concerné. Sélectionnez l'opération souhaitée dans la liste. [Enreg. comme Mémo Page] Enregistre la page affichée telle quelle. [Affichage Zoom] Appuyez sur [Affichage Zoom] pour faire apparaître la touche permettant d'agrandir ou réduire le format d'affichage de la page. Appuyez sur la touche pour modifier le format d'affichage de la page. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-17 4.6 Configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web 4 4.6.2 [Affichage] Sous l'onglet [Affichage], configurez les réglages d'affichage des contenus. L'administrateur de l'imprimante multifonction peut configurer les réglages afin de masquer ou non les images ou animations, activer ou désactiver JavaScript et effectuer des réglages détaillés d'affichage des contenus. 4.6.3 [Gérer fenêtres] L'onglet [Gérer fenêtres] permet de gérer l'affichage des fenêtres. Il est possible d'ouvrir un maximum de cinq fenêtres. Élément Description [Mode d'affichage] Sélectionnez le mode d'affichage de l'écran du Navigateur Web en choisissant entre [Normal], [Rendu Parfait] et [Rendu intelligent]. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-11. [Codage] Spécifiez le type de codage à utiliser pour l'affichage des contenus. [Paramètres Détaillés] Configurez les paramètres d'affichage des contenus. • [Image] : cochez cette case pour afficher les images. • [Animation] : cochez cette case pour afficher les animations GIF. • [Tableau] : cochez cette case pour identifier le tableau en HTML et ajuster la mise en page en conséquence. • [JavaScript] : cochez cette case pour activer le JavaScript du contenu. • [CSS] : cochez cette case pour activer le CSS du contenu. • [Retour ligne auto] : cochez cette case pour activer le retour ligne auto du contenu. • [Contrô Conto Ligne Caract] : cochez cette case pour activer le contrôle de délimitation du nombre de caractères par ligne dans le contenu. • [Rendu Rapide] : cochez cette case pour activer la fonction Rendu Rapide. • [Fenêtre instantanée] : cochez cette case pour permettre l'affichage de la fenêtre instantanée. • [Autorisation hors ligne] : cochez cette case pour permettre l'utilisation des contenus hors ligne. • [Lecture Auto Flash] : cochez cette case pour lire automatiquement un contenu Flash. • [Activer Affichage hors ligne] : cochez cette case pour activer la visualisation des contenus hors ligne. Cette commande est affichée lorsque l'[Autorisation hors ligne] est accordée par l'administrateur. [Réglage Sélection des couleurs] Déterminez une couleur pour l'élément sélectionné ([Vert], [Bleu], [Jaune], or [Orange]). Élément Description [Créer nouvelle fenêtre] Affiche le contenu de l'URL enregistrée comme page d'accueil dans une nouvelle fenêtre. [Ouvrir ds nlle fenêtre] Affiche la liste de liens dans une nouvelle fenêtre. [Fermer la fenêtre active] Ferme la fenêtre active. [Fermer les autres fenêtres] Ferme toutes les fenêtres. Cet élément ne peut pas être sélectionné s'il n'y a qu'une seule fenêtre d'ouverte. 4 Configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web 4-18 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.6 4.6.4 [Réglages] L'onglet [Réglages] vous permet de vérifier et de réinitaliser les informations concernant le navigateur Web. L'administrateur de l'imprimante multifonction peut configurer les réglages opératoires et de sécurité du navigateur Web. Référence - Les éléments portant le signe * sont uniquement affichés pour le menu administrateur. - Les réglages suivants sont accessibles aux utilisateurs se servant du navigateur Web en se connectant à My Panel. – [Réglage Démarrage] – Réglage de suppression des [Cookies] – Réglage de suppression des [Informations d'authentification] - My Panel peut contenir jusqu'à 20 éléments de cookies et d'informations d'authentification par utilisateur. Élément Description [Réglage Démarrage]* Permet de spécifier la page à afficher au prochain démarrage du Navigateur Web en choisissant entre la page enregistrée comme page d'accueil ou la dernière page affichée en fin de session. [Sécurité]* Configure le paramètre SSL ou TLS ou afficher un certificat racine ou un certificat CA. [Cookies]* Permet de configurer les réglages de réception et de suppression des cookies. Ce menu permet aussi de supprimer tous les cookies enregistrés sur l'imprimante multifonction. [Cache]* Permet de configurer les réglages d'utilisation et de suppression des caches. Ce menu permet aussi de supprimer tous les caches enregistrés sur l'imprimante multifonction. [Proxy]* Permet de configurer les réglages d'utilisation du serveur proxy. Enregistrez l'adresse et le port du serveur proxy, utilisez-le. Si l'authentification proxy est nécessaire, enregistrez l'ID et le code d'accès à utiliser dans l'authentification proxy. [Informations d'authentification]* Spécifiez le délai au bout duquel supprimer les informations d'authentification entrées dans les contenus. Ce menu permet aussi de supprimer toutes les informations d'authentification enregistrées sur l'imprimante multifonction. [Journal Accès]* Permet d'établir l'historique des accès de tous les utilisateurs. Vous pouvez vérifier par [ID], [Nom d'utilisateur], [URL] et par [Accès]. [Infos Navigateur Web] Affiche les informations concernant le Navigateur Web [Réinitialiser] Redémarrez le navigateur Web. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-19 4.7 Impression, affichage ou enregistrement d'un fichier document 4 4.7 Impression, affichage ou enregistrement d'un fichier document Vous pouvez imprimer, afficher ou enregistrer un fichier document si le lien d'accès vers ce document figure dans le contenu affiché. - Les formats PDF et XPS sont pris en charge pour les fichiers documents. - Vous ne pouvez pas afficher un fichier XPS. Appuyez sur le lien du fichier document dans le contenu pour afficher le premier écran du fichier document. 4.7.1 Imprimer un fichier document Appuyez sur [Impression] pour afficher l'écran d'impression. Configurez les réglages d'impression et appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle. Le fichier document est téléchargé et imprimé. Élément Description [Papier] Sélectionnez le format du papier pour l'impression. [Recto/Recto-Vers] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer en mode recto-verso. [Réglages Tampon] En appuyant sur cette touche vous pouvez préciser si vous souhaitez imprimer la [date et l'heure] et les [numéros de page]. [Finition] Configurez les réglages d'assemblage, de groupage, d'agrafage, de perforation ou de pliage/reliure. 4 Impression, affichage ou enregistrement d'un fichier document 4-20 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.7 Référence - Si vous essayez d'imprimer un fichier document qui utilise une grande quantité de mémoire, une erreur de numérisation est susceptible de se produire et de désactiver l'impression. - Si le PDF téléchargé est crypté, il est enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur PDF crypté sans être imprimé. - La valeur de réglage de [Finition] varie en fonction des options installées. – Les réglages d'Agrafage sont uniquement disponibles si le module de finition en option est installé. – Les réglages de perforation sont uniquement disponibles si le kit de perforation est installé sur le module de finition en option. – Les fonctions de pliage et d'agrafage central + pliage peuvent être utilisées lorsqu'une Piqueuse à cheval est installée sur l'unité de finition en option. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-21 4.7 Impression, affichage ou enregistrement d'un fichier document 4 4.7.2 Afficher un fichier document Appuyez sur [Voir] pour afficher le fichier PDF de destination. La barre d'outils en haut de l'écran permet d'agrandir, réduire, imprimer ou enregistrer le fichier PDF. Touche Description Retour à la première page. Retour à la page précédente. Affiche la page suivante. Affiche la dernière page. Rotation de l'affichage de 90° dans le sens horaire. Augmente le taux de zoom. Réduit le taux de zoom. Affiche en fonction de la largeur de la zone d'affichage. Affiche la page entière. Sélection de la Boîte Utilisateur pour enregistrer le fichier document. Configure les réglages d'impression et imprime le fichier document. Affiche la fenêtre Splash (affichage momentané pendant l'activation du logiciel). Ferme l'écran. 4 Impression, affichage ou enregistrement d'un fichier document 4-22 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.7 4.7.3 Enregistrer un fichier document Appuyez sur [Enregistr.]. L'écran de sélection des boîtes est affiché. Sélectionnez la boîte utilisateur dans laquelle enregistrer le fichier, appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Départ] ou Départ. Le fichier document est alors enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur. Référence - La boîte doit être enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction préalablement à l'enregistrement d'un fichier document. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. - Pendant l'impression d'un fichier document (en couleur) enregistré dans une boîte utilisateur à partir du navigateur Web, vous ne pouvez pas spécifier la commande [Zoom] ou [Combinaison]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-23 4.8 Chargement d'un fichier de document 4 4.8 Chargement d'un fichier de document Si des fichiers de document sont partagés sur le serveur, vous pouvez charger un fichier de document numérisé ou un fichier de document dans une Boîte utilisateur sur le serveur via un navigateur Web. Cette section explique comment charger un fichier de document en utilisant le site de chargement suivant à titre d'exemple. Exemple 4.8.1 Restrictions Notez que l'utilisation de cette fonction est liée aux restrictions suivantes. - PDF, TIFF ou XPS est le type de fichier de document qu'il est possible de charger. Un document ne peut pas être divisé pour chargement. - Plusieurs fichiers de document peuvent être chargés simultanément. - L'utilisateur ne peut pas modifier manuellement la zone de texte du nom de fichier. - Si vous procédez à l'une des opérations suivantes après avoir sélectionner un fichier de document à charger, la tâche est supprimée en même temps que le fichier de document sélectionné. – La fonction Réinitialisation Auto Système a été lancée. – Le Navigateur Web a été fermé. – Le site de chargement a été mis à jour par actionnement de la barre d'outils du navigateur Web. – Le Navigateur Web a été relancé. – L'utilisateur s'est déconnecté pendant le traitement de la procédure de connexion. – L'Interrupteur auxiliaire d'alimentation a été coupé. – Initial. a été actionné pour réinitialiser l'écran. 4.8.2 Chargement d'un fichier de document numérisé Ce qui suit explique la procédure de chargement d'un fichier de document numérisé. Référence - Cette procédure n'est pas disponible pour les utilisateurs désactivés pour la numérisation de données. - Le format de fichier ne peut pas être réglé sur JPEG lors de la numérisation d'un original à charger. 1 Affichez le site de chargement à l'aide du navigateur Web du MFP. 2 Appuyez sur le bouton pour sélectionner un fichier de document à charger. % Dans cet exemple, appuyez sur [Parcourir]. Élément Description [Parcourir] Appuyez sur ce bouton pour sélectionner un fichier de document à charger. "type" est réglé sur "fichier" dans le tag d'entrée de HTML. [OK] Appuyez sur ce bouton pour charger un fichier de document. "type" est réglé sur "soumettre" dans le tag d'entrée de HTML. 4 Chargement d'un fichier de document 4-24 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.8 3 Appuyez sur [Numérisation]. 4 Placer l'original à charger sur le MFP. 5 Configurez les paramètres de numérisation et appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Démarrer. % Si Épreuve est sélectionné, vous pouvez vérifier la finition. Une fois la numérisation terminée, le nom de fichier s'affiche dans la zone de texte. 6 Appuyez sur le bouton pour commencer à charger. % Dans cet exemple, appuyez sur [OK]. Le chargement d'un fichier de document commence alors. bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-25 4.8 Chargement d'un fichier de document 4 4.8.3 Chargement d'un fichier de document dans une boîte Ce qui suit explique la procédure de chargement d'un fichier de document récupéré dans une boîte. Référence - Cette procédure n'est pas disponible pour les utilisateurs pour lesquels l'accès aux documents enregistrés a été désactivé. - Avant de charger un fichier de document dans une boîte, créez une boîte utilisateur dans laquelle enregistrer le fichier de document. - Vous ne pouvez sélectionner que la Boîte Public et une Boîte Privée. - Le format de fichier ne peut pas être réglé sur JPEG en cas de sélection d'un fichier de document à charger depuis une boîte. Lors de la sélection d'un fichier de document JPEG enregistré dans une boîte, le format de fichier est changé en PDF. Si nécessaire, spécifiez le format de fichier approprié avant de charger un fichier de document. - Lors du chargement d'un fichier de document enregistré dans une boîte alors que la Séparation de page est activée, cette fonction est annulée et changée en Multi-pages. 1 Affichez le site de chargement à l'aide du navigateur Web du MFP. 2 Appuyez sur le bouton pour sélectionner un fichier de document à charger. % Dans cet exemple, appuyez sur [Parcourir]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Boîte Utilis.]. 4 Sélectionnez une boîte utilisateur et appuyez sur [Utiliser document] 5 Sélectionnez un fichier de document à charger et appuyez sur [Réglages fichier]. % Sélectionnez plusieurs fichiers de document et appuyez sur [Combiner] ; ils peuvent être combinés en un seul fichier. L'ordre de combinaison peut être modifié à loisir. % Sélectionnez un fichier de document et appuyez sur [Détails document] pour vérifier la date et l'heure à laquelle le fichier de document a été enregistré et pour afficher un aperçu de l'image. 6 Configurez les paramètres du fichier et appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Démarrer. % Appuyez sur [Application] pour configurer le paramètre d'impression du tampon ou de numéro de page. Le nom de fichier apparaît dans la zone de texte. 4 Chargement d'un fichier de document 4-26 bizhub 423/363/283/223 4.8 7 Appuyez sur le bouton pour commencer à charger. % Dans cet exemple, appuyez sur [OK]. Le chargement d'un fichier de document commence alors. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-3 5.1 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection 5 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5.1 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection PageScope Web Connection est un utilitaire de gestion de périphériques supporté par le serveur HTTP incorpore à la machine. Pour utiliser cet utilitaire, accédez directement à l'imprimante multifonction connectée au réseau à l'aide de Navigateur Web. Pour utiliser cet utilitaire à l'aide du Navigateur Web installé sur l'imprimante multifonction, seule la fonction Boîte est disponible. Ce chapitre décrit la manière d'utiliser les documents de la boîte de l'imprimante multifonction sur le réseau en exploitant PageScope Web Connection au moyen du Navigateur Web installé sur l'imprimante. Référence - Enregistrez l'Option Internet LK-101 v2 afin d'utiliser cette fonction de l'imprimante multifonction. - L'Option Internet LK-101 v2 doit être enregistrée également dans la destination d'accès de l'imprimante multifonction. - Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation du Navigateur Web installé sur l'imprimante multifonction, voir page 4-3. - Pour utiliser PageScope Web Connection à partir d'un Navigateur Web installé sur votre ordinateur, vous pouvez utiliser plusieurs fonctions de l'imprimante multifonction telles que les fonctions de vérification d'état, de modification de réglages et de paramétrage du réseau. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. 5.1.1 Vérification préalable Les informations les plus récentes peuvent ne pas apparaître sur les écrans de PageScope Web Connection parce que d'anciennes versions des pages sont enregistrées dans le cache du navigateur Internet. De plus, des problèmes peuvent survenir quand vous utilisez le cache. Quand vous utilisez PageScope Web Connection, désactivez le cache du navigateur Internet. Référence - La modification des réglages du cache nécessite l'autorité administrateur. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu] dans la barre d'outils du Navigateur Web. 2 Appuyez sur [Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Réglages] et sélectionnez [Cache]. 5 Décochez la case [Utiliser cache] et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. 5.1.2 Modalité d'accès Lancez le navigateur Web et spécifiez l'adresse IP de l'imprimante multifonction à atteindre. 1 Appuyez sur [Adresse] dans la barre d'outils du navigateur Web. 2 Appuyez sur le champ de saisie pour afficher un clavier à l'écran. 3 Entrez l'adresse IP de l'imprimante multifonction à atteindre, et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] ou [Ouvrir une nouvelle fenêtre]. L'écran PageScope Web Connection apparaît. 5 Composition de l'écran 5-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.2 Référence - Si vous avez dénié la réception de cookies dans les paramètres du navigateur Web, l'écran de PageScope Web Connection n'apparaît pas. Pour plus de détails sur la configuration des réglages cookies, voir page 4-18. - Si l'écran de saisie d'adresse est affiché, vous voyez l'URL de la page affichée. Pour supprimer l'URL actuellement affiché, affichez le clavier à l'écran et appuyez sur [Eff.]. Appuyez sur la touche C (effacer) du panneau de contrôle pour supprimer toutes les entrée URL. 5.2 Composition de l'écran La conception de l'écran PageScope Web Connection est la suivante. N°. Nom Description 1 Logo KONICA MINOLTA Appuyez sur le logo pour accéder au site Web KONICA MINOLTA (http://konicaminolta.com/). 2 Logo PageScope Web Connection Appuyez sur le logo pour afficher les informations relatives à la version de PageScope Web Connection. 3 Nom utilisateur de connexion Affiche l'icône du mode actuel et le nom de l'utilisateur connecté (public, utilisateur ou compte enregistrés). 4 [Déconnexion] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vous déconnecter du mode en cours. 5 Affichage du contenu Affiche le contenu de PageScope Web Connection. 3 4 5 1 2 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-5 5.3 Connexion et déconnexion 5 5.3 Connexion et déconnexion Si vous avez spécifié l'authentification utilisateur ou compte département sur l'imprimante multifonction, l'écran de connexion apparaît après l'affichage de PageScope Web Connection. Référence - Si vous n'avez pas spécifié l'authentification utilisateur ou compte département sur l'imprimante multifonction, l'écran qui apparaît indique que vous êtes connecté en tant qu'utilisateur public. - Lorsque vous utilisez PageScope Web Connection à l'aide du navigateur Web installé sur l'imprimante multifonction, le mode administrateur n'est pas disponible. 5.3.1 Connexion Précisez si la connexion doit se faire comme utilisateur public ou utilisateur enregistré. Si vous avez précisé une authentification par serveur externe, sélectionnez un serveur externe d'identification. Entrez les informations requises et appuyez sur [Connexion]. Sélectionnez le cas échéant une langue d'affichage. Référence - Les boîtes utilisateur accessibles dépendent de l'utilisateur ou du compte département connecté. 5.3.2 Déconnexion Appuyez sur [Déconnexion] dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran pour afficher un écran de confirmation de déconnexion. Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran de connexion réapparaît. 5 Utiliser la fonction Boîte 5-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.4 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte Si vous accédez à PageScope Web Connection par le navigateur Web de l'imprimante multifonction, les opérations suivantes sont disponibles dans le cadre de la fonction Boîte. - Exploitation des documents de la boîte utilisateur de l'imprimante multifonction en cours d'utilisation par une différente imprimante multifonction connectée au réseau. - Utilisation des types de boîte publique, privée ou de groupe. - Affichage, impression et suppression d'un document de la boîte utilisateur. 5.4.1 Connexion de boîte La connexion avec PageScope Web Connection affiche la liste des boîtes (publiques, privées et de groupes) enregistrées sur l'imprimante multifonction à laquelle on accède. [Connexion de boîte] Sélectionnez un nom de boîte ([Nom Bte Util.]) dans la liste de boîtes. Alternativement, vous pouvez saisir directement un numéro de boîte ([N° Bte Ut.]) et un mot de passe de boîte ([Mot de passe de boîte]), puis appuyez sur [OK]. Référence - Lorsque vous sélectionnez un nom de boîte ([Nom Bte Util.]) pour laquelle il est spécifié un mot de passe dans la [Liste des boîtes], l'écran de saisie du mot de passe apparaît. [Connexion de boîte] [Liste des boîtes] Élément Description [N° Bte Ut.] Entrez le numéro de la boîte à ouvrir. [Mot de passe de boîte] Si un mot de passe est assigné à la boîte concernée, entrez le mot de passe. Élément Description [Rechercher dans l'index] Change l'affichage de l'index selon les index sélectionnés lors de la création d'une boîte utilisateur. [Page (affichage par 50 boîtes)] Quand cette machine contient 50 boîtes utilisateur ou davantage, spécifiez la page désirée pour changer l'affichage. Liste des boîtes Affiche le [N° Bte Ut.], le [Nom Bte Util.], le [Type] et le l'[Heure enregistrée]. Une touche avec icône apparaît à côté de chaque boîte utilisateur pour laquelle un mot de passe a été spécifié. bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-7 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte 5 [Liste de fichiers] Sélectionnez une boîte dans [Connexion de boîte]. Les informations de base de la boîte s'affichent ainsi que la liste des documents enregistrés dans la boîte. Élément Description [Vue Vignettes] Permet d'afficher les vignettes des documents. Réglez sur [OFF (NON)] pour l'affichage de liste. [Spécifiez l'opération] Permet la sélection d'une opération. Pour plus de détails, voir page 5-8. [Modifier l'affichage] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher la case [Sélectionner] à côté de tous les documents pour lesquels l'opération sélectionnée peut être exécutée. [Sélectionner] Affiche une case à côté de tous les documents avec lesquels l'opération sélectionnée peut être exécutée. [Vignette] Affiche le document sous forme de vignette. [Nom Document] Affiche le nom du document. [Nombre d'originaux] Affiche le nombre d'originaux d'un document. [Modif. nom] Appuyez sur cette touche pour modifier le nom du document. 5 Utiliser la fonction Boîte 5-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.4 5.4.2 Opérations sur le document Le document sélectionné peut être imprimé ou supprimé. Imprimer un document 1 Sélectionnez [Impression] dans [Spécifiez l'opération] et appuyez sur [Modifier l'affichage]. Une case à cocher apparaît en regard de tous les documents imprimables. 2 Cochez la case du document à imprimer et appuyez ensuite sur [Réglage impression]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-9 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte 5 3 Configurez les réglages nécessaires et appuyez sur [OK]. % Dans la [Plage de pages], sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer la totalité des pages du document sélectionné, ou bien spécifier les pages à imprimer. % Dans [Changer l'ordre], vous pouvez changer l'ordre d'impression en cas d'impression de plusieurs documents. 4 Appuyez sur [Ouvrir Fichier]. 5 Appuyez sur [Impression]. % En cas de pression sur [Voir], un fichier PDF s'affiche. Pour imprimer le fichier PDF affiché, appuyez sur . 6 Configurez les réglages d'impression et appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle. Référence - Si la [Version de fonction] de la destination MFP n'est pas [Version 3], appuyez sur [Ouvrir fichier] à l'étape 4 pour afficher le fichier PDF sur l'écran. Pour imprimer le fichier PDF affiché, appuyez sur . Pour vérifier la version de fonction du MFP, sélectionnez [Infos périphérique] sous [Utilitaire]. 5 Utiliser la fonction Boîte 5-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.4 Supprimer un document 1 Sélectionnez [Supprimer] dans [Spécifiez l'opération] et appuyez sur [Modifier l'affichage]. Une case à cocher apparaît à côté des documents qui peuvent être supprimés. 2 Cochez la case du document à supprimer, et appuyez ensuite sur [Supprimer]. % Cochez la case [Cocher/Décocher (s'applique à tous les documents)] pour sélectionner tous les documents. bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-11 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte 5 3 Cochez le nom du document à supprimer et appuyez sur [OK]. Le document est supprimé. 5 Utiliser la fonction Boîte 5-12 bizhub 423/363/283/223 5.4 6 Image Panel bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-3 6.1 Présentation 6 6 Image Panel 6.1 Présentation Image Panel est une nouvelle interface intuitive et facile à comprendre du panneau. Référence - Enregistrez l'Option Internet LK-101 v2 afin d'utiliser cette fonction de l'imprimante multifonction. - L'utilisation d'Image Panel est impossible si [Identification Utilisateur/Suivi Compte] ö [Réglages Numériser vers Dossier Autorisé] est réglé sur [Limiter] dans [Réglages Administrateur]. Fonctions Image Panel divise le processus d'opération en trois séquences, à savoir la "lecture d'un document", la "modification d'un document" et la "spécification d'un destinataire", qui peuvent être exécutées sur un seul écran. Ceci permet d'appréhender facilement à la fois le processus dans son ensemble et l'opération en cours. Image Panel se concentre sur l'opérabilité. Pour cette raison, les fonctions disponibles dans Image Panel sont limitées en comparaison avec le panneau conventionnel. Lorsque les fonctions My Panel et My Address sont disponibles, elles permettent de personnaliser l'écran Image Panel en un écran spécifique à l'utilisateur. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la fonction My Panel, voir page 9-3. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction My Address, voir page 10-3. 6 Afficher Image Panel 6-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.2 6.2 Afficher Image Panel Dans le [Menu Application], appuyez sur [Image Panel] pour afficher le premier écran Image Panel. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur le [Menu Application], voir page 3-4. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-5 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6.3.1 Composition de l'écran L'écran Image Panel se compose des éléments suivants. N°. Nom Description 1 Zone Informations de connexion Affiche le nom et l'icône de l'utilisateur actuellement connecté. 2 Zone de lecture des données Permet de numériser un document, de récupérer un document d'une boîte utilisateur ou d'une mémoire externe et d'envoyer des données depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un PDA. 3 Zone Desktop Les documents lus dans la zone de lecture des données sont affichés en vue Vignettes ou en vue Liste. 4 Echange Affichage Liste/Vue Vignettes Permet de modifier l'affichage de la zone bureau en basculant entre Liste et Vignettes. 5 Zone des messages Affiche un message auxiliaire tel que les instructions d'utilisation. 6 Zone d'état Affiche la date et l'heure actuelle. En cas d'alerte, une icône d'alerte apparaît. 7 Zone Outil d'édition Modifie la page, combine et modifie les paramètres du document après numérisation. 8 Echange Magasin Envoi/Affichage Outil d'édition Permet d'interchanger l'affichage Magasin Envoi et Outil d'édition. Pour plus de détails sur le magasin envoi, voir page 6-18. 9 Zone Destinataire Document Spécifiez une destination du document lu dans [Impression] ou [Liste destination]. 1 3 4 5 6 9 8 7 2 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 6.3.2 Opérations générales Cette section décrit le processus des opérations depuis la lecture du document jusqu'au traitement d'envoi en présentant les séquences d'Image Panel en commençant par la "lecture d'un document", puis la "modification d'un document" et enfin la "spécification d'un destinataire". Référence - Vous pouvez spécifier un destinataire avant de lire le document. La zone Lecture des données permet de numériser ou de récupérer un document. • Pour numériser un document, placez-le et appuyez sur [Numéris.]. Configurez les paramètres de numérisation souhaités et lancez la lecture du document. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-8. • Pour accéder à un document enregistré dans une boîte utilisateur, sélectionnez la boîte utilisateur dans [Liste Source Document] et sélectionnez le document que vous souhaitez récupérer. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-9. • Pour accéder à un document enregistré dans une mémoire externe, sélectionnez [Mémoire externe] dans [Liste Source Document] et sélectionnez le document que vous souhaitez récupérer. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-10. • Pour utiliser des données enregistrées sur un téléphone cellulaire ou un PDA, sélectionnez [Mobile] dans [Liste Source Document]. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-11. Sélectionnez [Numéris.] Sélectionnnez [Liste Source Document]. Dans la zone Outil d'édition, modifiez le document numérisé. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-12. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-7 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 Dans la zone Destinataire Document, sélectionnez le destinataire du document numérisé. • Pour imprimer, appuyez sur [Impression]. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-16. • Pour envoyer le document, sélectionnez un destinataire dans [Liste Destinat.]. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-17. • Pour enregistrer des données dans une mémoire externe, appuyez sur [Mémoire externe] sur l'écran Liste destination. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-18. Sélectionnez [Impression]. Sélectionnez [Liste Destinat.] Si vous spécifiez une adresse, le magasin d'envoi apparaît. Pour plus d'informations, voir page 6-18. Appuyez sur Départ pour envoyer le document. • Pour envoyer les données depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un PDA, appuyez sur Départ pour afficher un code PIN. Entrez le code PIN dans le téléphone cellulaire ou le PDA pour envoyer les données à l'imprimante multifonction. Les données sont envoyées à la destination spécifiée. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-20. 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 6.3.3 Lecture d'un document Permet de numériser un document, de récupérer un document d'une boîte utilisateur ou d'une mémoire externe et d'envoyer des données depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un PDA. Numérisation d'un document Appuyez sur [Numéris.] pour afficher l'écran des paramètres de numérisation. Configurez les paramètres de numérisation et appuyez sur [Numéris.]. Référence - Vous ne pouvez numériser qu'un seul document à la fois. Élément Description [Type original] Sélectionnez la qualité d'image dans [Texte], [Texte/Photo], [Photo], [Original Tramé] et [Papier copié] en fonction du contenu de l'original à numériser. [Recto/Recto-Vers] Permet de spécifier un original recto ou recto-verso. [Définition] Permet de sélectionner une résolution de numérisation entre [200 e 100 dpi (Standard)], [200 e 200 dpi (Fin)], [300 e 300 dpi], [400 e 400 dpi (Super Fin)] et [600 e 600 dpi (Ultra Fin)]. [Type Fichier] Sélection du format du fichier d'envoi des données entre [PDF], [PDF compact], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS] et [XPS compact]. Permet d'enregistrer la totalité des pages numérisées en un seul fichier ou de le diviser en plusieurs fichiers. Vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Multi Page] en sélectionnant [JPEG] comme type de fichier. Pour envoyer des fichiers divisés en pièces jointes d'E-mails, spécifiez [Méthode Pièce jointe à E-mail]. Sélectionnez [Envoi de tous les fichiers en un (1) E-mail] pour joindre tous les fichiers divisés à un seul message E-mail. Sélectionnez [Un (1) fichier par E-Mail] pour envoyer un message E-mail pour chaque fichier séparé. La sélection de [PDF compact] comme type de fichier permet de spécifier [Contour PDF]. Si l'Option Internet LK-102 est enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction, la sélection de [PDF] ou de [PDF compact] comme type de fichier vous permet de spécifier [Cryptage] et [Propriétés Document PDF]. Pour plus d'informations sur la fonction, voir page 7-3. Si l'Option Internet LK-105 est enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction, la sélection de [PDF] ou de [PDF compact] comme type de fichier vous permet de spécifier [PDF adressable]. Pour plus d'informations sur la fonction, voir page 8-3. [Contraste] Réglez la densité de numérisation. [Couleur] Sélection de la couleur de numérisation entre [Couleur Auto], [Couleurs], [Échelle de gris] et [Noir]. [Nom Document] Spécifiez le nom du document. [Numér. Séparée] Appuyez sur cette touche pour diviser la numérisation du document en plusieurs fois. Utile dans les cas suivants. • Lorsque le nombre de pages du document dépasse la capacité du chargeur ADF. • En cas d'utilisation de la vitre d'exposition • En cas d'originaux mixtes recto et recto-verso bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-9 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 Récupération dans Boîte Utilisateur Sélectionnez une boîte utilisateur dans [Liste Source Document] pour afficher l'écran Utiliser document. Sélectionnez le document à récupérer et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. Référence - Si un mot de passe a été spécifié pour la boîte sélectionnée, l'écran de saisie du mot de passe apparaît. Entrez le mot de passe. - Vous ne pouvez sélectionner qu'une seule boîte. - Vous pouvez récupérer jusqu'à 10 documents à la fois. - Si vous spécifiez une boîte utilisateur comme destination, vous ne pouvez pas récupérer plus d'un document. - Vous ne pouvez pas spécifier comme destination la boîte utilisateur dans laquelle vous avez récupéré le document. Élément Description [Modif. nom] Appuyez sur cette touche pour modifier le nom du document sélectionné. [Détails Document] Appuyez sur ce bouton pour vérifier les informations détaillées ou afficher l'aperçu du document sélectionné. 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 Récupérer un document d'une mémoire externe Sélectionnez [Mémoire externe] dans [Liste Source Document] pour afficher la liste des documents enregistrés dans la mémoire externe. Sélectionnez le document à récupérer et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. Référence - Pour récupérer un document d'une mémoire externe, vous devez configuer les réglages suivants sur l'imprimante multifonction en fonction du propos du document à utiliser. – Pour imprimer un document récupéré, dans [Réglages Administrateur]ö[Réglages Système]ö [Réglages Boîte Utilisateur]ö[Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe], réglez [Imprimer document] sur [ON (OUI)]. Pour effectuer par ailleurs une identification utilisateur, dans [Réglages Administrateur]ö [Identification Utilisateur/Suivi Compte]ö[Réglages Authentification Utilisateur]ö[Enregistrement Utilisateur], réglez [Autoriser Fonction]ö[Impression] sur [Permis] pour chaque utilisateur. – Pour enregistrer un document récupéré dans une boîte utilisateur, dans [Réglages Administrateur]ö [Réglages Système]ö[Réglages Boîte Utilisateur]ö[Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe], réglez [Numérisation Document Mémoire Externe] sur [ON (OUI)]. Pour effectuer par ailleurs une identification utilisateur, dans [Réglages Administrateur]ö[Identification Utilisateur/Suivi Compte]ö[Réglages Authentification Utilisateur]ö[Enregistrement Utilisateur], réglez [Autoriser Fonction]ö [Numérisation Document Mémoire Externe] sur [Permis] pour chaque utilisateur. - Les formats de fichiers disponibles pour l'impression sont PDF, JPEG, TIFF et XPS. - Il est possible de récupérer jusqu'à 200 documents provenant d'une mémoire externe. - Pour ouvrir un dossier, sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur [Ouvrir]. - La spécification simultanée d'un document JPEG et d'un autre format est impossible. - Vous ne pouvez pas lire un document récupéré d'une mémoire externe à l'aide de [Numéris.] ou [Liste Source Document]. - Vous pouvez seulement spécifier [Impression] ou une boîte utilisateur comme destination d'un document récupéré d'une mémoire externe. De plus, vous ne pouvez spécifier qu'une seule boîte utilisateur comme destination. Pour enregistrer un document dans une boîte utilisateur, vous devez créer une boîte utilisateur et l'enregistrer dans le carnet d'adresses au préalable. - Si vous choisissez une destination autre qu'une boîte utilisateur, vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Mémoire externe]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-11 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 Utilisation de données enregistrées sur un téléphone cellulaire ou un PDA Sélectionnez [Mobile] dans [Liste Source Document]. Après sélection de [Mobile/PDA] et pression de la touche [OK], l'icône téléphone cellulaire s'affiche dans la zone du bureau. Référence - Pour connecter l'imprimante multifonction à un téléphone cellulaire ou à un PDA, installez l'option Kit d'interface locale EK-605 sur l'imprimante multifonction. Configurez également les réglages suivants sur l'imprimante multifonction. – Réglez [Réglages Administrateur]ö[Réglages Réseau]ö[Réglage Bluetooth] sur [Activer]. Réglez aussi [Réglages Administrateur]ö[Connexion Système]ö[Réglage Téléphone cellulaire/PDA] sur [Permis]. – Pour effectuer par ailleurs une identification utilisateur, dans [Réglages Administrateur]ö[Identification Utilisateur/Suivi Compte]ö[Réglages Authentification Utilisateur]ö[Enregistrement Utilisateur], réglez [Autoriser Fonction]ö[Téléphone cellulaire/PDA] sur [Permis] pour chaque utilisateur. - Si vous sélectionnez [Mobile/PDA], vous ne pouvez pas lire un document à l'aide de [Numéris.] ou [Liste Source Document]. - Vous pouvez uniquement spécifier [Impression] ou une boîte utilisateur comme destination pour envoyer des données d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un PDA. De plus, vous ne pouvez spécifier qu'une seule boîte utilisateur comme destination. Pour enregistrer un document dans une boîte utilisateur, vous devez créer une boîte utilisateur et l'enregistrer dans le carnet d'adresses au préalable. - Si vous choisissez une destination autre que [Impression] ou une boîte utilisateur, vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Mobile]. - Cette machine est compatible avec RepliGo version 2.1.0.9. - Pour imprimer un fichier XHTML, vous devez configurer les réglages suivants sur l'imprimante au préalable, dans la mesure où un fichier de liaison est récupéré à l'aide de la fonction client WebDAV. – Réglez [Réglages Administrateur]ö[Réglages Réseau]ö[Réglages WebDAV]ö[Réglages Client WebDAV] sur [ON (OUI)]. – Pour établir la connexion via un serveur mandataire, enregistrez un serveur proxy dans [Adresse du serveur proxy] des [Réglages Client WebDAV]. Réglez aussi [Réglages Utilisateur]ö[Réglage Téléphone cellulaire/PDA]ö[Utilisation Serveur Proxy] sur [Oui]. – Dans [Réglages Utilisateur]ö[Réglage Téléphone cellulaire/PDA]ö[Notification Erreur Fichier Liaison], spécifiez l'opération que la machine doit exécuter lorsqu'elle est incapable de récupérer un fichier de liaison. Élément Caractéristiques Protocole de communication Bluetooth Ver. 2.0 + EDR Profil de support OPP/BPP/SPP Type de fichier de support PDF/CPDF/XPS/CXPS/TIFF/JPEG/XHTML/RepliGo Fichier XHTML de support Code de caractère : UTF-8, Shift-JIS, ISO-8859 Extension du fichier de liaison : JPEG, JPG, PNG 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-12 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur la manière d'envoyer des données depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un PDA, voir page 6-20. La fonction permettant la connexion de l'imprimante multifonction à un téléphone cellulaire ou à un PDA est disponible même si le kit de licence n'est pas enregistré. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte] et au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. 6.3.4 Editer le document Editer le document en lecture. Référence - Lorsque vous utilisez des données enregistrées sur un téléphone cellulaire ou un PDA, vous ne pouvez pas vérifier l'image d'aperçu ni modifier les données. [Aperçu] Appuyez sur ce bouton pour vérifier les informations détaillées ou afficher l'aperçu du document sélectionné. Référence - La fonction [Aperçu] n'est pas disponible dans le cas de documents récupérés d'une mémoire externe. - Dans le cas de combinaison de documents, la fonction d'aperçu est disponible uniquement pour le premier document. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-13 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 [Document/Page] – [Modifier document] Editer les pages d'un document sélectionné. Vous avez la possibilité de pivoter les pages numérisées dans le mauvais sens ou de supprimer les pages inutiles. Vous pouvez modifier l'ordre des pages d'un document composé de plusieurs pages. Vous pouvez également faire un aperçu des pages pour vérifier leur contenu. Référence - La fonction Éditer Page n'est pas disponible lorsque vous sélectionnez plusieurs documents. - La fonction Éditer Page n'est pas disponible en cas de combinaison de documents. Élément Description [Pg Impaire] Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner les pages impaires. [Page paire] Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner les pages paires. [Aperçu/Déf. Plage] Appuyez sur cette touche pour faire visualiser les pages. [Suppr. page] Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer la page sélectionnée. [Pivoter Page] Appuyez sur cette touche pour pivoter la page sélectionnée. Les angles de rotation autorisée sont 90° à gauche, 90° à droite et 180°. [Déplacer Page] Appuyez sur ce bouton pour modifier l'ordre de pagination en déplaçant la page sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner la position désirée en déplaçant la vignette de la page correspondante à l'endroit voulu. 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-14 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 [Document/Page] – [Combiner Documents] Cette fonction permet de combiner plusieurs documents sélectionnés. Vous pouvez utiliser la touche [Déplacer] pour modifier l'ordre de combinaison. Référence - Vous pouvez uniquement sélectionner [Impression] ou [Liste Destinat.] comme destination d'un document combiné. - Vous pouvez combiner un maximum de 10 documents à la fois. - Vous ne pouvez combiner un document numérisé à un document récupéré d'une boîte utilisateur. [Document/Page] – [Réglages Document] Permet de configurer les réglages pour l'envoi du document sélectionné. Vous pouvez modifier la résolution du document, le type de fichier et ajuster les couleurs. Référence - La fonction Réglages Document n'est pas disponible lorsque vous sélectionnez plusieurs documents. - Si vous avez sélectionné un document provenant d'une mémoire externe, la fonction Réglages Document n'est pas disponible. Élément Description [Définition] Permet de sélectionner une résolution de numérisation entre Réglages pendant l'enregistrement, [][200 e 100 dpi (Par défaut),][200 e 200 dpi (Fin),] [300 e 300] dpi, [400 e 400 dpi (Super fin) et][600 e 600 dpi (Ultra Fin).] bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-15 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 [Retour à Dest. Numér.] Appuyez sur [Retour à Dest. Numér.] pour restaurer la localisation source du document sélectionné. - Le document numérisé est supprimé de l'imprimante multifonction. - Le document provenant d'une boîte retourne dans la boîte source. [Type Fichier] Sélection du format du fichier d'envoi des données entre [PDF], [PDF compact], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS] et [XPS compact]. Permet d'enregistrer la totalité des pages numérisées en un seul fichier ou de le diviser en plusieurs fichiers. Vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Multi Page] en sélectionnant [JPEG] comme type de fichier. Pour envoyer des fichiers divisés en pièces jointes d'E-mails, spécifiez [Méthode Pièce jointe à E-mail]. Sélectionnez [Envoi de tous les fichiers en un (1) E-mail] pour joindre tous les fichiers divisés à un seul message E-mail. Sélectionnez [Un (1) fichier par E-Mail] pour envoyer un message E-mail pour chaque fichier séparé. La sélection de [PDF compact] comme type de fichier permet de spécifier [Contour PDF]. Si l'Option Internet LK-102 est enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction, la sélection de [PDF] ou de [PDF compact] comme type de fichier vous permet de spécifier [Cryptage] et [Propriétés Document PDF]. Pour plus d'informations sur la fonction, voir page 7-3. Si l'Option Internet LK-105 est enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction, la sélection de [PDF] ou de [PDF compact] comme type de fichier vous permet de spécifier [PDF adressable]. Pour plus d'informations sur la fonction, voir page 8-3. [Couleur] Sélection des couleurs de numérisation entre [Utiliser réglage couleur existant], [Couleur], [Échelle de gris] et [Noir]. Élément Description 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-16 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 6.3.5 Spécifier une destination Spécifie le destinataire du document en lecture. Impression Appuyez sur [Impression] pour imprimer des données directement de l'imprimante multifonction. Configurez les réglages d'impression et appuyez sur [OK]. Référence - La fonction Réglage impression n'est pas disponible lorsque vous sélectionnez plusieurs documents. - [Combinaison] et [Zoom] ne sont pas compatibles avec l'impression de documents combinés. - Lorsque vous imprimez un document à mot de passe intégré à l'aide de la fonction Copie via mot de passe, vous ne pouvez pas spécifier [Combinaison] ni [Zoom]. Pour plus d'informations sur la fonction Copie via mot de passe, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. - Les options [Combinaison] et [Zoom] ne sont pas disponibles à l'impression d'un document provenant d'une mémoire externe. - L'option [Recto-Verso] n'est pas disponible à l'impression d'un document au format JPEG, XPS ou XPS Compact XPS provenant d'une mémoire externe. Les paramètres Agrafage et Perforation sont également inaccessibles dans les réglages de finition.[] - Lorsque vous imprimez des données enregistrées sur un téléphone cellulaire ou un PDA, seuls les réglages d'impression vous sont accessibles. Pour changer les réglages d'impression, sélectionnez [Réglages utilisateur]ö[Réglage Téléphone cellulaire/PDA]ö[Impression]. Élément Description [Copies] Spécifiez le nombre de copies à imprimer à l'aide du pavé numérique. [Impression] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer en mode recto-verso. [Finition] Appuyez sur cette touche pour configurer les réglages Assemblé, Groupe, Agrafage ou Perforation. [Combinaison] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier la combinaison de pages. Il est possible d'imprimer plusieurs pages d'un document sur une seule page. [Zoom] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier le taux de zoom du document. [Impression continue] Cette fonction est disponible à l'impression de documents combinés en mode recto-verso. Les documents combinés sont imprimés en continu. En cas d'impression en mode recto-verso, précisez si vous souhaitez démarrer l'impression du document suivant au verso ou au recto d'une nouvelle page lorsque la dernière page du document en cours d'impression figure au recto. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-17 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 Référence - La valeur de réglage de [Finition] varie en fonction de l'option installée. – Les réglages d'Agrafage sont uniquement disponibles si le module de finition en option est installé. – Les réglages de perforation sont uniquement disponibles si le kit de perforation est installé sur le module de finition en option. - [Impression continue] s'affiche lorsque vous combinez plusieurs documents avec l'outil d'édition et que vous sélectionnez [Impression] comme destination. Spécifier des destinations Dans [Liste Destinat.], sélectionnez une adresse à laquelle vous souhaitez envoyer un document. Appuyez sur l'onglet [Recher simple] pour vous reporter aux destinations en numérotation abrégée enregistrées dans l'unité principale. Appuyez sur l'onglet [Groupe] pour vous reporter à la liste des groupes enregistrés dans l'unité principale. Référence - En cas de lecture de plusieurs documents, la fonction Boîte n'est pas disponible. - Si la fonction My address est disponible, vous pouvez visualiser votre carnet d'adresses en appuyant sur [My Address]. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction My Address, voir page 10-3. - Si vous avez spécifié une adresse, vous pouvez vérifier le magasin d'envoi en appuyant sur [Vérifier Réglage Bac Adresse/Adresse distante]. - Les adresses E-mail pour lesquelles un certificat est enregistré, sont affichées avec une touche à icône. - Vous pouvez uniquement spécifier des boîtes utilisateur comme destination de carnet d'adresse d'un document récupéré d'une mémoire externe ou d'un document enregistré sur un téléphone cellulaire ou sur un PDA. 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-18 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 Enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe Sélectionnez [Mémoire externe] dans [Liste Destinat.] et appuyez sur [OK]. Référence - Pour enregistrer des données dans une mémoire externe, dans [Réglages Administrateur]ö[Réglages Système]ö[Réglages Boîte Utilisateur]ö[Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe], réglez [Enregistre document] sur [ON (Oui)]. Pour effectuer par ailleurs une identification utilisateur, dans [Réglages Administrateur]ö[Identification Utilisateur/Suivi Compte]ö[Réglages Authentification utilisateur]ö [Enregistrement utilisateur], réglez [Autoiser Fonction]ö[Enregistrer dans Mémoire Externe] sur [Permis] pour chaque utilisateur. - Si vous choisissez [Impression] ou un destinataire comme destination, vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Mémoire externe]. 6.3.6 Vérifier le magasin d'envoi Magasin Envoi Si vous spécifiez une adresse, le magasin d'envoi apparaît. Le magasin d'envoi affiche l'icône de la destination spécifiée. N°. Nom Description 1 Icône Paramètre Destination Appuyez sur l'icône Vérifier Adresse pour afficher l'écran Vérifier Destinataire où vous pouvez vérifier la liste des destinations spécifiées. 2 Icône Destination Affiche les icônes des destinations. Appuyez sur l'icône de la destination désirée pour afficher l'écran Vérifier Envoi dans lequel vous pouvez vérifier les informations détaillées de la destination. 1 2 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-19 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 [Vérifier Mag. EMI] Appuyez sur l'icône du magasin d'envoi pour afficher l'écran Vérifier Destinataire où vous pouvez vérifier la liste des destinations spécifiées. Si la destination spécifiée est une adresse E-mail, vous pouvez spécifier les réglages de cryptage E-mail et d'insertion de signature numérique. Référence - Pour crypter un message E-mail et joindre une signature numérique à l'aide de S/MIME, réglez [Réglages Administrateur]ö[Réglages Réseau]ö[Réglages E-Mail]ö[Réglages Communication S/MIME] sur [ON (Oui)]. - Un certificat doit être enregistré dans l'adresse E-mail pour pouvoir crypter un E-mail. - Pour ajouter une signature numérique à un message E-mail, le certificat de périphérique doit être enregistré sur cette machine. Réglez aussi [Réglages Administrateur]ö[Réglages Réseau]ö [Réglages E-Mail]ö[Réglages Communication S/MIME]ö[Signature numérique] sur [Toujours signer] ou [Sélect. à l'envoi]. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. Élément Description [Réglages Adresse Distante] Appuyez sur ce bouton pour configurer les réglages de cryptage selon le protocole S/MIME et de la signature numérique. Ce réglage est disponible si vous sélectionnez [ON (Oui)] pour [Réglages Communication S/MIME] des [Réglages Administrateur] et si vous sélectionnez E-mail. [Info.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier les informations détaillées de l'adresse. [Eff.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer l'adresse sélectionnée. 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-20 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.3 6.3.7 Envoi de données d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un PDA La sélection d'une destination et la pression de la touche Départ affichent le code PIN sur le panneau de contrôle. Spécifiez les données que vous voulez utiliser et l'imprimante multifonction où envoyer les données du téléphone cellulaire ou du PDA. Entrez ensuite le code PIN pour envoyer les données sur l'imprimante multifonction. Référence - Vous pouvez uniquement spécifier [Impression] ou une boîte utilisateur comme destination pour envoyer des données d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un PDA. De plus, vous ne pouvez spécifier qu'une seule boîte utilisateur comme destination. Pour enregistrer un document dans une boîte utilisateur, vous devez créer une boîte utilisateur et l'enregistrer dans le carnet d'adresses au préalable. – Pour plus d'information sur la manière de créer une boîte utilisateur, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. – Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une destination dans le carnet d'adresses, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. - À propos du fonctionnement d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un PDA, reportez-vous au manuel d'utilisation du téléphone ou du PDA correspondant. - La vitesse de communication peut être réduite ou la communication peut être interrompue par des obstacles, la qualité des signaux, un champ magnétique ou l'électricité statique. - Les documents et les données d'image peuvent ne pas être envoyés correctement en fonction du réglage de sécurité du téléphone cellulaire ou du PDA. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-21 6.4 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses 6 6.4 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses Le navigateur Web de votre ordinateur vous permet d'accéder à PageScope Web Connection pour ajouter des données photo à des destinations enregistrées en numérotation abrégée. Les données photographiques enregistrées sont appliquées à la [Liste Destinat.] d'Image Panel. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur PageScope Web Connection, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. 6.4.1 Spécifications relatives aux données photo Les spécifications nécessaires à l'enregistrement des données photo sont indiquées ci-dessous. Référence - Pendant le processus d'enregistrement des données photo, celles-ci ne sont pas agrandies ni réduites. Élément Caractéristiques Type Fichier Format BMP, couleur 24-bit, non compressé Format image 48 e 48 pixels Taille des données 6966 octets 6 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses 6-22 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.4 6.4.2 Enregistrer des données photo Enregistrer des données photo en utilisant PageScope Web Connection à partir du navigateur Web de votre ordinateur. Référence - Pour ajouter des données photo au carnet d'adresses, vous devez enregistrer à l'avance des destinations en numérotation abrégée. - Lorsque la fonction My Address est disponible, vous pouvez ajouter des données photo aux destinations en numérotation abrégée dans My Address Book. - Vous devez être connecté en tant qu'utilisateur enregistré pour pouvoir ajouter des données photo dans My Address Book. 1 Connectez-vous en mode utilisateur ou en mode administrateur. 2 Sélectionnez [Enr. Dest.]. 3 Sélectionnez [Photo/Icône.] 4 Sélectionnez la destination en numérotation abrégée à laquelle vous souhaitez ajouter des données photo, puis cliquez sur [Editer]. % Lorsque les données photo sont enregistrées, [Photo/Icône] est affiche dans [Photo]. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-23 6.4 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses 6 5 Sélectionnez [Enregistrer photo]. 6 Cliquez sur [Browse] et spécifiez le dossier où sont enregistrées les données photo que vous souhaitez ajouter. 7 Appuyez sur [OK]. Les données photo sont ajoutées à la destination en numérotation abrégée. 6 Personnaliser Image Panel 6-24 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.5 6.5 Personnaliser Image Panel Lorsque les fonctions My Panel et My Address sont disponibles, elles permettent de personnaliser l'écran Image Panel en un écran spécifique à l'utilisateur. Pour personnaliser l'écran Image Panel, les conditions requises sont les suivantes. - Les fonctions My Panel et My Address sont disponibles sur l'imprimante multifonction. - Connectez-vous en tant qu'utilisateur enregistré dans l'authentification utilisateur. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la fonction My Panel, voir page 9-3. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction My Address, voir page 10-3. 6.5.1 Personnaliser la zone de lecture des données Des icônes de raccourci peuvent être enregistrées dans la zone de lecture des données pour les boîtes fréquemment utilisées. 1 Dans [Source Données], appuyez sur [Liste Source Document]. 2 Appuyez sur [Personnal. Écran De base]. 3 Sélectionnez la boîte utilisateur que vous voulez enregistrer dans l'écran de base et sélectionnez l'emplacement dans la zone de lecture des données. % Si vous avez sélectionné un emplacement déjà enregistré dans l'écran de base, les données sont écrasées. % Vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer une boîte utilisateur déjà enregistrée dans l'écran de base à un autre endroit de l'écran. bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-25 6.5 Personnaliser Image Panel 6 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. Une icône de raccourci est enregistrée. 6.5.2 Personnaliser la zone Destinataire Document Des icônes de raccourci peuvent être enregistrées dans la zone Destinataire Document pour les destinations fréquemment utilisées. 1 Appuyez sur [Liste Destinat.] [dans la zone Destin. Données.] 2 Appuyez sur [Personnal. Écran De base]. 3 Sélectionnez la destination que vous souhaitez enregistrer dans l'écran de base et sélectionnez l'emplacement dans la zone de destination des documents. % Si vous avez sélectionné un emplacement déjà enregistré dans l'écran de base, les données sont écrasées. % Vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer une destination déjà enregistrée dans l'écran de base à un autre endroit de l'écran. 6 Personnaliser Image Panel 6-26 bizhub 423/363/283/223 6.5 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. Une icône de raccourci est enregistrée. 6.5.3 Supprimer une icône de raccourci enregistrée 1 Appuyez sur [Personnal. Écran De base]. 2 Sélectionnez l'icône que vous voulez supprimer. 3 Appuyez sur [Supprimer]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'icône de raccourci est supprimée. 7 Fonction de traitement PDF bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-3 7.1 Présentation 7 7 Fonction de traitement PDF 7.1 Présentation La fonction de traitement PDF vous permet de spécifier le niveau de sécurité pour la distribution de documents numérisés et enregistrés dans une boîte utilisateur, comme le cryptage du document ou l'ajout de signature numérique s'il y a lieu. Référence - Il est possible d'utiliser cette fonction sur l'imprimante multifonction si l'Option Internet LK-102 est enregistrée. Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Traitement PDF La fonction de traitement PDF vous permet d'effectuer les opérations suivantes. - Configuration des réglages des propriétés du document pour sa distribution avec la fonction de numérisation ou boîte (p. 7-4). - Cryptage d'un document PDF à l'aide d'un mot de passe ou d'un ID numérique (touche Public) lors de sa distribution avec la fonction de numérisation ou boîte (p. 7-5). - Ajout d'une signature numérique lors d'une distribution sous forme de document PDF crypté (p. 7-5). - Un document PDF crypté par AES peut être imprimé en mode d'impression directe (p. 7-8). dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la fonction de numérisation, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions de boîte utilisateur, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. 7 Propriétés des documents PDF 7-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 7.2 7.2 Propriétés des documents PDF La sélection du type de fichier [PDF] ou [PDF compact] pour la distribution de documents numérisés ou enregistrés dans une boîte vous permet de configurer les paramètres des propriétés de documents PDF. Référence - Lors de l'enregistrement d'un document dans la boîte utilisateur par la commande [Enregistrer document] de la fonction Boîte, vous ne pouvez pas configurer les paramètres des propriétés de documents PDF. - Lorsque vous envoyez un document de boîte au format PDF dans un autre périphérique à l'aide de PageScope Web Connection, vous pouvez configurer les paramètres des propriétés de documents PDF. Élément Description [Titre] Si vous sélectionnez [Non] pour [Appliq. Nom fichier], spécifiez le titre du document PDF (jusqu'à 64 caractères). [Appliq. Nom fichier] Permet d'appliquer le nom de fichier comme nom du document PDF. [Auteur] Entrée de l'auteur du document PDF (64 caractères maxi.). Lorsque l'authentification utilisateur est exécutée, le nom de connexion est entré comme nom d'auteur. [Sujet] Entrée du sous-titre du document PDF (64 caractères maxi.). [Mots-clés] Entrée ds mots-clés du document PDF (64 caractères maxi.). bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-5 7.3 Crypter un document PDF et ajouter une signature numérique 7 7.3 Crypter un document PDF et ajouter une signature numérique La sélection du type de fichier [PDF] ou [PDF compact] pour la distribution de documents numérisés ou enregistrés dans une boîte permet d'améliorer la sécurité des documents PDF en les cryptant à l'aide du mot de passe ou de l'ID numérique de l'utilisateur (touche Public). L'enregistrement d'un certificat de périphérique sur l'imprimante permet d'ajouter une signature numérique aux documents PDF distribués. L'ajout d'une signature numérique certifie l'auteur (imprimante multifonction) du document envoyé et garantit que le document n'a pas été modifié après la signature. Référence - Avec PageScope Web Connection, vous pouvez procéder au cryptage d'un document et y ajouter une signature numérique pour l'envoyer dans une boîte utilisateur vers un autre périphérique au format PDF. - Pour ajouter une signature numérique, il est nécessaire de crypter le document PDF à l'aide d'un mot de passe ou d'un ID numérique. 7.3.1 Cryptage commandé par mot de passe Pour crypter un document par un mot de passe, spécifiez les réglages suivants. Élément Description [Cible de cryptage] Sélection d'une cible de cryptage. La sélection de [Sauf métadonnées] [exclut l'élément spécifié dans Propriétés Document PDF de la cible de cryptage.] La sélection de [Sauf métadonnées] ne vous permet pas de sélectionner un [niveau faible] de cryptage. [Type de cryptage] Sélectionnez [Code d'accès]. [Signature] Si l'imprimante multifonction est dotée d'un certificat de périphérique, permet de spécifier l'ajout d'une signature numérique. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un certificat de périphérique sur la MFP, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. [Niveau de cryptage] Sélection d'un niveau de cryptage. • [Niveau faible] : méthode de codage RC4 (la longueur de clé est de 40 bits), gérée par Acrobat 3.0 ou ultérieur • [Niveau élevé 1] : méthode de codage RC4 (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits), gérée par Acrobat 5.0 ou ultérieur • [Niveau élevé 2] : méthode de codage AES (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits), gérée par Acrobat 7.0 ou ultérieur [Code d'accès] Entrez le mot de passe requis pour ouvrir un document PDF. Entrez une nouvelle fois le code pour confirmation. [Permissions Document] Entrez le mot de passe permettant de changer les permissions document. Entrez une nouvelle fois le code pour confirmation. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le même mot de passe que celui spécifié sous [Code d'accès]. Après avoir configuré les permissions du document, appuyez sur [Paramètres Détaillés] pour configurer les réglages détaillés des autorisations. Les valeurs définies dépendent du niveau de cryptage. 7 Crypter un document PDF et ajouter une signature numérique 7-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 7.3 [Paramètres Détaillés] 7.3.2 Cryptage commandé par ID numérique Configurez les réglages suivants pour crypter un document à l'aide de l'ID numérique d'un utilisateur. Élément Description [Impression Autorisée] Permet de spécifier les modalités d'impression autorisées pour un document PDF. [Permettre seulement Basse résolution] peut être sélectionné si le niveau de cryptage est réglé sur [Niveau élevé 1] ou [Niveau élevé 2]. [Extraire Documents/ Images] Permet d'activer la copie de texte, d'images et d'autres contenus. [Modifier Permissions] Permet de spécifier le niveau de permission relatif à la modification d'un document PDF. • La sélection de [Insérer/Supprimer/Pivoter pages] permet d'insérer, supprimer ou pivoter des pages. Ce paramétrage est associé au cryptage à niveau de sécurité élevé. • La sélection de [Entrer Texte et insérer Signature dans les champs appropriés] permet d'entrer les informations dans les champs et d'ajouter une signature numérique. Ce paramétrage est associé au cryptage à niveau de sécurité élevé. • La sélection de [Créer Annotations, entrer Texte et insérer Signature dans les champs appropriés] permet d'ajouter des annotations, d'entrer des informations dans les champs de saisie et d'ajouter une signature numérique. • La sélection de [Spécifier Mise en page, Entrer Texte + Insérer Signature dans les champs appropriés] permet d'insérer, supprimer ou pivoter les pages, d'entrer des informations dans les champs de saisie et d'ajouter une signature numérique. Ce paramétrage est associé au cryptage à faible niveau de sécurité. • La sélection de [Tout sauf l'extraction de pages] permet de modifier un document, de créer un champ de saisie et d'y entrer les informations, de faire des annotations et d'ajouter une signature numérique. Élément Description [Cible de cryptage] Sélection d'une cible de cryptage. La sélection de [Sauf métadonnées] exclut l'élément spécifié dans [Propriétés Document PDF] de la cible de cryptage. [Type de cryptage] Sélectionnez [ID numérique]. Sélectionnez [ID numérique] pour afficher l'écran permettant de sélectionner des destinations. L'écran de sélection d'adresse affiche la liste des adresses E-mail dotées d'ID numériques enregistrés pour l'envoi S/MIME. Spécifiez l'ID numérique à utiliser pour le cryptage en sélectionnant une adresse E-mail. La sélection de [Même que destination] utilise l'ID numérique de l'adresse ; vous n'avez pas besoin de spécifier un ID numérique sur cet écran. La spécification de cet ID numérique est indépendante de la spécification d'une adresse ; vous devez donc spécifier une adresse séparément. bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-7 7.3 Crypter un document PDF et ajouter une signature numérique 7 [Paramètres Détaillés] Référence - Le cryptage commandé par ID numérique nécessite l'enregistrement préalable du certificat de l'utilisateur dans l'adresse E-mail. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un certificat d'utilisateur dans une adresse E-mail, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. - Il est possible de spécifier 100 ID numériques maximum. - L'ID numérique spécifiable dépend du niveau appliqué à l‘utilisateur. - Lorsque vous enregistrez un document PDF dans une boîte, il n'est pas possible de le crypter par un ID numérique. - Lors du cryptage d'un document PDF et de la création simultanée d'un document PDF recherchable, les paramètres suivants ne sont pas disponibles si [Ajuster rotation] est réglé sur [Ajuster] dans le réglage du PDF recherchable. Par défaut [Ajuster Rotation] est réglé sur [Ajuster]. Modifiez le réglage en fonction des besoins. – [Type de cryptage] : [ID numérique] – [Niveau de cryptage] : [Niveau élevé 2] – [Cible de cryptage] : [Sauf métadonnées] – [Signature] : [Oui] - Pour plus d'informations sur la fonction PDF adressable, voir page 8-3. [Signature] Si l'imprimante multifonction est dotée d'un certificat de périphérique, permet de spécifier l'ajout d'une signature numérique. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un certificat de périphérique sur la MFP, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. [Niveau de cryptage] Sélection d'un niveau de cryptage. Le cryptage d'un document avec un ID numérique ne permet pas de sélectionner [Niveau faible] pour le niveau de cryptage. • [Niveau élevé 1] : méthode de codage RC4 (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits), gérée par Acrobat 5.0 ou ultérieur • [Niveau élevé 2] : méthode de codage AES (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits), gérée par Acrobat 7.0 ou ultérieur Élément Description [Impression Autorisée] Permet de spécifier les modalités d'impression autorisées pour un document PDF. [Extraire Documents/ Images] Permet d'activer la copie de texte, d'images et d'autres contenus. [Modifier Permissions] Permet de spécifier le niveau de permission relatif à la modification d'un document PDF. • La sélection de [Insérer/Supprimer/Pivoter pages] permet d'insérer, supprimer ou pivoter des pages. Ce paramétrage est associé au cryptage à niveau de sécurité élevé. • La sélection de [Entrer Texte et insérer Signature dans les champs appropriés] permet d'entrer les informations dans les champs et d'ajouter une signature numérique. Ce paramétrage est associé au cryptage à niveau de sécurité élevé. • La sélection de [Créer Annotations, entrer Texte et insérer Signature dans les champs appropriés] permet d'ajouter des annotations, d'entrer des informations dans les champs de saisie et d'ajouter une signature numérique. • La sélection de [Tout sauf l'extraction de pages] permet de modifier un document, de créer un champ de saisie et d'y entrer les informations, de faire des annotations et d'ajouter une signature numérique. Élément Description 7 Impression directe 7-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 7.4 7.4 Impression directe Un document PDF crypté par AES peut être imprimé en mode d'impression directe. Utilisez PageScope Web Connection pour imprimer les documents en mode d'impression directe. Connectez-vous comme utilisateur public ou comme utilisateur enregistré, et sélectionnez [Impression directe]. Cliquez sur [Browse] pour localiser le fichier et cliquez sur [OK]. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur PageScope Web Connection, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. 8 Fonction PDF adressable bizhub 423/363/283/223 8-3 8.1 Présentation 8 8 Fonction PDF adressable 8.1 Présentation PDF adressable renvoie à une fonction qui crée un fichier PDF adressable en collant des données texte transparent dans la zone du document où les caractères sont reconnus par un processus de lecture optique. Vous pouvez créer un fichier PDF adressable en enregistrant ou envoyant un original au format PDF ou PDF compact à l'aide de la fonction Numérisation ou Boîte utilisateur. La fonction PDF adressable prend en charge plusieurs langues. Lorsque vous créez un fichier PDF adressable, sélectionnez la langue appropriée à l'original pour permettre un traitement de lecture optique correct. Vous pouvez aussi améliorer la précision du traitement de lecture optique en corrigeant automatiquement l'orientation des pages. Si vous souhaitez gérer des documents papier au format électronique, il est recommandé d'utiliser la fonction PDF adressable pour convertir les documents en fichier PDF adressable. Référence - Cette fonction est disponible lorsque l'Option Internet LK-105 est enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction. - Pour plus de détails sur la fonction de numérisation, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. - Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions de boîte utilisateur, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. Précautions à prendre pour la création de fichiers PDF adressables Selon l'état des originaux, la reconnaissance du texte peut être problématique, le texte risque d'être tronqué ou d'autres problèmes peuvent se produire. Exemple - Les caractères qui ne sont pas pris en charge par l'imprimante multifonction ne seront pas reconnus correctement. - Si une langue différente de celle de l'original est sélectionnée à la création d'un fichier PDF adressable, le texte ne sera pas reconnu correctement. - Si la correction automatique d'orientation des pages n'est pas activée et que l'orientation de l'original spécifié ne correspond pas à l'orientation du texte, celui-ci ne sera pas reconnu correctement. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage de correction automatique d'orientation des pages, voir page 8-5. Taille de caractère reconnaissable Référence - Lors de la création d'un fichier PDF recherchable, il est impossible de spécifier une résolution supérieure à 300 dpi pour la numérisation. Japonais Langue européenne Langue asiatique Définition 200 dpi 12 pt à 142 pt 9 pt à 142 pt 20 pt à 142 pt 300 dpi 8 pt à 96 pt 6 pt à 96 pt 12 pt à 96 pt 8 Configuration du réglage de reconnaissance optique OCR 8-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 8.2 8.2 Configuration du réglage de reconnaissance optique OCR Avant de créer un fichier PDF adressable, vous pouvez spécifier si vous donnez la priorité à la précision ou la vitesse d'exécution pour le traitement OCR. [Réglage Opération ROC] 1 Appuyez sur Utilitaires/Compteur. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Numérisation/Fax]. 4 Dans [Paramètres Numérisation/Fax] (2/2), appuyez sur [Réglage Opération ROC]. 5 Sélectionnez le traitement OCR et appuyez sur [Valider]. % [Priorité Qualité] : priorité est donnée à la précision de reconnaissance d'un texte original. L'inclinaison des originaux est aussi réglée automatiquement. % [Priorité Vitesse] : priorité est donnée à la vitesse d'exécution du traitement OCR. L'inclinaison des originaux n'est pas réglée automatiquement. bizhub 423/363/283/223 8-5 8.3 Configuration du réglage PDF adressable 8 8.3 Configuration du réglage PDF adressable Vous pouvez créer un fichier PDF adressable en sélectionnant [PDF] ou [PDF compact] comme type de fichier lorsque vous enregistrez ou envoyez un original au format PDF en utilisant les fonctions Numérisation et Boîte Utilisateur. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur la manière de spécifier le type de fichier en utilisant la fonction Numérisation, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Pour plus d'informations sur la manière de spécifier le type de fichier en utilisant la fonction Boîte Utilisateur, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. Référence - Si vous sélectionnez [PDF compact] comme [Type Fichier] pour créer un fichier PDF adressable, la vitesse de traitement OCR peut être plus grande que lorsque vous sélectionnez [PDF]. - Lors de la création d'un fichier PDF adressable, [Définition] ne peut pas être réglé sur [400 e 400 dpi (Super Fin)] ou [600 e 600 dpi (Ultra Fin)]. - Pour créer un fichier PDF recherchable et crypter simultanément un fichier PDF, si l'un des paramètres suivants est spécifié, [Ajuster rotation] ne peut pas être réglé sur [Ajuster] dans le paramètre de cryptage PDF. – [Type de cryptage] : [ID numérique] – [Niveau de cryptage] : [Niveau élevé 2] – [Cible de cryptage] : [Sauf métadonnées] – [Signature] : [Oui] - Pour plus de détails sur la manière de crypter un fichier PDF, voir page 7-5. - Pour le [Japanese], le [Chinese], le [Korean] et le [Taiwanese], l'orientation du texte (écriture verticale ou horizontale) est reconnue automatiquement. Toutefois, pour le [Chinese], le [Korean] et le [Taiwanese], si les deux orientations de texte verticale et horizontale sont utilisées sur la même page, le traitement de l'original repose sur l'une ou l'autre orientation. - Le téléchargement ou l'envoi d'un document configuré comme fichier PDF recherchable et enregistré dans une Boîte Utilisateur avec PageScope Web Connection entraîne l'annulation du réglage PDF et l'abandon de la recherche du texte. Élément Description [Sélection Langue] Sélectionnez la langue à utiliser pour créer un fichier PDF adressable. Pour une reconnaissance correcte du texte, la langue sélectionnée doit être appropriée à l'original. [Ajuster Rotation] Spécifiez si vous souhaitez la rotation automatique de chaque page pour corriger l'orientation en fonction de l'orientation du texte détectée par la reconnaissance optique OCR. Si la correction automatique d'orientation des pages n'est pas activée et que l'orientation de l'original spécifié ne correspond pas à l'orientation du texte, celui-ci ne sera pas reconnu correctement. 8 Configuration du réglage PDF adressable 8-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 8.3 9 Fonction My Panel (Mon Panneau) bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-3 9.1 Présentation 9 9 Fonction My Panel (Mon Panneau) 9.1 Présentation La fonction My Panel permet la gestion centrale de l'environnement du panneau de contrôle personnalisé par l'utilisateur conformément à l'application (My Panel) et la mise à disposition de My Panel sur l'imprimante multifonction sélectionnée par l'utilisateur. L'utilisation de My Panel procure la même opérationnalité sur plusieurs imprimantes multifonction en réseau. dPour info Cette fonction est utilisée avec PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de cette fonction, reportez-vous au manuel PageScope My Panel Manager. Vous pouvez aussi configurer les réglages My Panel à l'aide de PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails, reportez-vous au manuel PageScope My Panel Manager. 9.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec My Panel My Panel vous permet de personnaliser le panneau de contrôle pour afficher de préférence les fonctions les plus fréquemment utilisées. Par ailleurs, si le navigateur Web ou Image Panel est disponible, vous pouvez l'associer à PageScope My Panel Manager pour gérer les réglages du navigateur Web et les informations de chaque utilisateur et personnaliser l'écran Image Panel. Eléments personnalisables My Panel vous permet de personnaliser les éléments suivants. - Spécification de la langue affichée sur le panneau de contrôle - Spécification d'une unité de mesure à afficher lors de la saisie de nombres - Réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Copie et de enregistrement des touches de raccourci et de valeurs de réglage à disposer dans l'écran de base - Réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Fax/Numérisation et de l'enregistrement des touches de raccourci - Réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Boîte et de l'enregistrement des touches de raccourci - Spécification de la couleur des touches sélectionnées du panneau de contrôle - Affichage du menu principal de My Panel - Affichage de l'écran d'accueil du panneau de contrôle 9 Présentation 9-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.1 Fonctions disponibles via le navigateur Web Vous pouvez personnaliser l'environnement d'utilisation du navigateur Web en le connectant à My Panel. My Panel vous permet de gérer les réglages suivants et les informations de chaque utilisateur. - Page d'accueil - Favoris - Historique d'affichage des contenus - Historique de saisie URL - Cookie - Informations d'authentification dPour info Enregistrez une page d'accueil et des favoris à l'aide du navigateur Web. L'historique d'affichage et de saisie, les cookies et les informations d'authentification sont automatiquement sauvegardées dans le serveur au fur et à mesure que l'utilisateur se sert du navigateur Web. Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation du navigateur Web, voir page 4-3. Vous pouvez modifier les informations d'enregistrement d'une page d'accueil et des favoris à l'aide de PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails, reportez-vous au manuel PageScope My Panel Manager. Fonctions disponibles sur Image Panel En associant Image Panel à My Panel ou My Address Book, vous pouvez enregistrer des raccourcis de source document et de destination dans l'écran de base d'Image Panel afin de personnaliser l'environnement d'utilisation d'Image Panel. Vous pouvez aussi vous référer à My Address Book pour spécifier une destination à laquelle envoyer des données. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la personnalisation de l'écran, voir page 6-24. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction My Address, voir page 10-3. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-5 9.1 Présentation 9 9.1.2 Procédure d'acquisition de My Panel Procédez à l'authentification utilisateur sur l'imprimante multifonction sélectionnée. Si l'authentification utilisateur est validée, l'imprimante multifonction se connecte automatiquement au serveur pour obtenir My Panel à l'intention de l'utilisateur connecté. L'utilisateur peut se servir de My Panel pendant qu'il est connecté à l'imprimante multifonction. My Panel n'est pas disponible après la déconnexion de l'utilisateur. 9.1.3 Restrictions d'utilisation de la fonction My Panel Les restrictions suivantes s'appliquent à l'utilisation de My Panel. - Les fonctions d'enregistrement, d'édition et de suppression de My Panel sont uniquement accessibles aux utilisateurs disposant de My Panel. L'Administrateur de l'imprimante multifonction ne peut pas effectuer d'opérations sur My Panel. - Lorsque vous accédez à My Panel pour la première fois, les réglages de langue, d'unité de mesure et de couleur sont conformes aux réglages de l'imprimante multfonction. - Lorsque vous accédez à My Panel pour la première fois, l'écran initial du panneau de contrôle affiche le menu principal de My Panel. - Seule la mémoire de réglage (programme Copie et programme Fax/Numérisation) enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction que vous utilisez est disponible. - Selon les fonctions ou des options installées sur l'imprimante multifonction sur laquelle My Panel est utilisé, il se peut que l'environnement opératoire spécifié en tant que My Panel ne soit pas disponible. - L'enregistrement, l'édition, ou la suppression de My Panel peut causer une erreur en fonction de l'état de connexion au serveur. En cas d'erreur, vérifiez la connexion réseau. My Panel est disponible My Panel est disponible Serveur (gestion de Mon Panneau) (3) Obtention de My Panel (2) Accès au serveur (1) Procédure d'authentification My Panel n'est pas disponible • Échec d'authentification • Déconnexion • Échec d'obtention de My Panel,etc. 9 Afficher My Panel 9-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.2 9.2 Afficher My Panel 9.2.1 Menu principal Le menu principal apparaît en premier lorsque My Panel s'ouvre. Le menu principal vous permet de disposer librement les fonctions et touches de raccourci les plus fréquemment utilisées dans la mémoire des réglages. Dans le menu principal, vous pouvez enregistrer 12 types de touches de raccourci. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration des réglages du menu principal, voir page 9-15. 9.2.2 Affichage du menu principal Une fois que l'utilisateur a accédé à la fonction My Panel, il peut alors modifier l'écran initial qui doit s'afficher après que l'identification utilisateur a été reconnue valide. Pour afficher le menu principal de My Panel depuis un écran initial différent, utilisez le [Menu Application]. Dans le [Menu Application], appuyez sur [My Panel] pour afficher le menu principal de My Panel. dPour info L'écran initial qui s'affiche après une identification valide peut être modifié dans les réglages [Réglages Mon Panneau]. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-16. Pour plus d'informations sur le [Menu Application], voir page 3-4. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-7 9.3 Personnaliser My Panel 9 9.3 Personnaliser My Panel Personnalisez My Panel dans [Réglages Mon Panneau] des [Utilitaires]. 9.3.1 [Réglages Mon Panneau] Les éléments personnalisables sont les suivants. Élément Description [Réglage Langue] Sélectionnez la langue à utiliser dans My Panel. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-9. [Réglage Unité de mesure] Sélectionnez l'unité de mesure à utiliser pour afficher les valeurs dans My Panel. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-9. [Réglages Copieur] Spécifiez les réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Copie et de enregistrement des touches de raccourci et de valeurs de réglage à disposer dans l'écran de base Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-10. [Paramètres Numérisation/Fax] Réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Fax/Numérisation et de l'enregistrement des touches de raccourci Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-12. [Réglages Boîte] Configurez les réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Boîte et enregistrez les touches de raccourci. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-14. [Param. Sélection Couleur] Sélectionnez une couleur pour les touches sélectionnées dans My Panel. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-15. [Réglages Menu Principal] Enregistrez les touches du menu principal sur l'écran Menu principal de My Panel. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-15. [Réglage Ecran par défaut] Spécifiez l'écran initial qui s'affiche après validation de l'identification utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-16. 9 Personnaliser My Panel 9-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 9.3.2 Affichage des [Réglages Mon Panneau] Lorsque la fonction My Panel est disponible, [Réglages Mon Panneau] figure dans [Utilitaires]. 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré. 2 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglages Mon Panneau]. L'écran Réglages Mon Panneau apparaît. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-9 9.3 Personnaliser My Panel 9 9.3.3 [Réglage Langue] Sélectionnez la langue à utiliser dans My Panel parmi les langues disponibles sur l'imprimante multifonction. 9.3.4 [Réglage Unité de mesure] Sélectionnez l'unité de longueur à utiliser dans My Panel. 9 Personnaliser My Panel 9-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 9.3.5 [Réglages Copieur] Spécifiez les réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Copie et de enregistrement des touches de raccourci et de valeurs de réglage à disposer dans l'écran de base [Onglet par Défaut] Configurez les réglages d'affichage par défaut pour l'écran De base en mode Copie. [De base] propose un affichage normal de base. [Copie rapide] affiche les éléments de réglage de l'écran des réglages de base sur un seul écran. Cette commande peut servir à spécifier plusieurs réglages à la fois. [Touche Raccourci 1] – [Touche Raccourci 2] Dispose les touches de raccourci des fonctions de l'application copie les plus fréquemment utilisées dans l'écran de base. Seulement deux touches de raccourci peuvent être mises en place. Même si vous vous connectez à un autre modèle et enregistrez une fonction sous [Touche Raccourci 1] et/ou [Touche Raccourci 2], [NON] s'affiche pour indiquer que cette fonction n'est pas disponible sur cette machine. (Exemple : [Densité], [Suppression Fond]) De plus, l'affichage d'une page permettant d'enregistrer une fonction dans [Touche Raccourci 1] et/ou [Touche Raccourci 2] alors que cette fonction n'est pas disponible, entraîne la sélection de [NON]. Si [OK] est sélectionné, le réglage [NON] est imposé à [Touche Raccourci 1] et [Touche Raccourci 2]. Il en résulte que les touches de raccourci ne s'affichent pas même si vous vous connectez à un autre modèle. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-11 9.3 Personnaliser My Panel 9 [Régl. rapides 1] – [Régl. rapides 4] Attribuent les valeurs de réglage des touches de programme de copie et de la fonction Copie dans l'écran de base. L'attribution des valeurs de réglages les plus fréquemment utilisées et des touches de programme copie dans l'écran de base vous permet de configurer facilement les réglages copie par une simple pression de la touche. Vous pouvez attribuer un maximum de quatre touches. Même si vous vous connectez à un autre modèle et enregistrez une fonction sous [Régl. Rapides 1] - [Régl. Rapides 4], [OFF] s'affiche pour indiquer que cette fonction n'est pas disponible avec cette machine. (Exemple : [Couleur]) L'affichage d'une page permettant d'enregistrer une fonction dans [Régl. Rapides 1] - [Régl. Rapides 4] alors que cette fonction n'est pas disponible, entraîne la sélection de [NON].Si [OK] est sélectionné, le réglage [NON] est imposé à [Régl. Rapides 1] et [Régl. Rapides 4]. Il en résulte que les touches Réglages rapides ne s'affichent pas même si vous vous connectez à un autre modèle. dPour info Pour attribuer un programme copie dans l'écran de base, vous devez enregistrer ce programme au préalable. Pour plus d'information sur l'enregistrement d'un programme copie, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. [Réglages par défaut de l'onglet Densité] Placez la touche pour ajuster la densité de copie sur l'écran de base. Référence - Lors du transfert de la touche de réglage de densité vers l'écran de base, [Régl. rapides 3] et [Régl. rapides 4] ne sont pas disponibles. 9 Personnaliser My Panel 9-12 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 9.3.6 [Paramètres Numérisation/Fax] Configurez les réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Fax/Numérisation et enregistrez les touches de raccourci. [Onglet par Défaut] Configurez les réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Fax/Numérisation. [Carnet d‘Adresses par Défaut] Pour utiliser le carnet d'adresse public, spécifiez le type d'index à afficher initialement dans [Carnet Adresses]. Par défaut, c'est [Mon Carnet Adresses] qui est sélectionné. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la fonction My Address, voir page 10-3. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-13 9.3 Personnaliser My Panel 9 [Touche Raccourci 1] – [Touche Raccourci 2] Dispose les touches de raccourci des fonctions de l'application fax/numérisation les plus fréquemment utilisées dans l'écran de base. Seulement deux touches de raccourci peuvent être mises en place. [Carnet d'adresses par défaut] Configurez les réglages de l'écran par défaut de [Carnet Adresses]. [Type adresse par défaut] Pour afficher un carnet d'adresses par type d'adresse, spécifiez un type d'adresse à afficher par défaut. 9 Personnaliser My Panel 9-14 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 9.3.7 [Réglages Boîte] Configurez les réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Boîte et enregistrez les touches de raccourci. [Onglet par Défaut] Configurez les réglages d'affichage par défaut de l'écran de base (après pression de la touche Boîte sur le panneau de contrôle) en mode Boîte. [Touche Raccourci 1] – [Touche Raccourci 2] Disposez les touches de raccourci des boîtes fréquemment utilisées pour les documents boîtes sur l'écran de base. Seulement deux touches de raccourci peuvent être mises en place. bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-15 9.3 Personnaliser My Panel 9 9.3.8 [Param. Sélection Couleur] Sélectionnez une couleur pour les touches sélectionnées dans My Panel. 9.3.9 [Réglages Menu Principal] Personnalise le menu principal de My Panel. Le menu principal vous permet de disposer librement les fonctions et touches de raccourci les plus fréquemment utilisées dans la mémoire des réglages (programmes Copie et programmes Fax/Numérisation). Touche Menu principal La touche de raccourci affichée dans le menu principal est appelée touche du menu principal et il est possible d'enregistrer jusqu'à 12 types. Pour enregistrer la mémoire des réglages (programmes copie et programmes fax/numérisation) comme touches du menu principal, appuyez sur la touche [Icône] pour sélectionner les icônes de mémoire des réglages à afficher dans le menu principal. 9 Personnaliser My Panel 9-16 bizhub 423/363/283/223 9.3 Enregistrer une touche dans le menu principal [Fonction], [Réglages Fonction Copie], [Réglage Fonct. Numéris./Fax], [Réglage Programme Copie] et [Réglage Progr. Numéris./Fax] peuvent constituer des touches du menu principal. 9.3.10 [Réglage Ecran par défaut] Spécifiez l'écran initial qui s'affiche après validation de l'identification utilisateur. Par défaut, le menu principal My Panel est affiché comme écran initial. Référence - L'enregistrement d'une touche de raccourci pour les fonctions Navigateur Web ou Image Panel dans l'écran initial n'est possible que si elles sont activées. Élément Description [Fonction] Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pour chacune des fonctions [Copie], [Numéris./Fax], [Boîte Utilis.], [Image Panel] et [Navigateur Web]. L'enregistrement d'une touche de raccourci pour les fonctions Navigateur Web ou Image Panel dans le menu principal n'est possible que si elles sont activées. [Réglage Fonction Copie] Permet d'enregistrer des touches de raccourci dans les réglages Fonction Copie pour chaque réglage [Réglage Papier], [Zoom], [R-Verso/ Combin.] et [Finition]. [Réglage Fonct. Numéris./Fax] Permet d'enregistrer des touches de raccourci des réglages de la fonction Numérisation/Fax pour chaque réglage [Réglages Numérisation], [Réglages Original] et [Réglages Comm.]. [Réglage Programme Copie] Enregistrez une touche de raccourci pour la mémoire des réglages du copieur (programme copie) enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction. Appuyez sur [Icône] dans l'écran Réglages Menu Principal. Vous pouvez sélectionner les icônes de mémoire des réglages à afficher dans le menu principal. La touche de raccourci correspondant à la mémoire des réglages est disponible uniquement sur l'imprimante multifonction où la mémoire est enregistrée. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de la mémoire des réglages du copieur (programme copie), reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. [Réglage Progr. Numéris./Fax] Enregistrez une touche de raccourci pour la mémoire des réglages de fax/ numérisation (programme fax/numérisation) enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction. Appuyez sur [Icône] dans l'écran Réglages Menu Principal. Vous pouvez sélectionner les icônes de mémoire des réglages à afficher dans le menu principal. La touche de raccourci correspondant à la mémoire des réglages est disponible uniquement sur l'imprimante multifonction où la mémoire est enregistrée. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de la mémoire des réglages de fax/numérisation (programme fax/numérisation), reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 10 Fonction My Address bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-3 10.1 Présentation 10 10 Fonction My Address 10.1 Présentation Grâce à la fonction My Address, le carnet d'adresses personnel (My Address Book) est géré centralement sur le serveur, et l'utilisateur peut accéder au carnet d'adresses personnel My Address Book de l'imprimante sélectionnée. L'utilisation de My Address Book vous permet de vous servir du même carnet d'adresses sur plusieurs imprimantes multifonction de votre réseau sans avoir à enregistrer les adresses individuellement sur chacune des imprimantes. dPour info Cette fonction est utilisée avec PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de cette fonction, reportez-vous au manuel PageScope My Panel Manager. Vous pouvez aussi ajouter des entrées à My Address Book à l'aide de PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails, reportez-vous au manuel PageScope My Panel Manager. 10.1.1 Classification des carnets d'adresses Lorsque la fonction My Address est disponible, vous pouvez utiliser les deux sortes de carnets d'adresses suivantes. Carnet d'adresses public Le carnet d'adresses public est un carnet d'adresses accessible à tout utilisateur enregistré sur l'unité principale de l'imprimante multifonction qu'il a sélectionnée. Le carnet d'adresse public propose les fonctions suivantes. - Dans le carnet d'adresses public, il est possible d'enregistrer des destinations en numérotation abrégée, des groupes et des programmes. - Du fait que le carnet d'adresses public est enregistré dans l'unité principale de l'imprimante multifonction, les destinations disponibles dépendent de l'imprimante sélectionnée. - L'utilisateur ou l'administrateur peut enregistrer, modifier ou supprimer le carnet d'adresses public. - Si l'administrateur a activé l'interdiction des fonctions d'enregistrement et d'édition de destinations par les utilisateurs, l'enregistrement ou l'édition du carnet d'adresses public est impossible. My Address Book My Address Book est un carnet d'adresses géré par le serveur et accessible uniquement par l'utilisateur. My Address Book propose les fonctions suivantes. - Les destinations en numérotation abrégée et les groupes peuvent être enregistrés dans My Address Book. - Du fait que la fonction My Address est retournée par le serveur sur l'imprimante multifonction sélectionnée par l'utilisateur, elle est disponible sur n'importe quelle imprimante multifonction pour peu qu'elle dispose de la fonction My Address. - Seul l'utilisateur spécifié peut enregistrer, modifier, ou supprimer My Panel. 10 Présentation 10-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 10.1 10.1.2 Procédure d'acquisition de My Address Book Procédez à l'authentification utilisateur sur l'imprimante multifonction sélectionnée. Si l'authentification utilisateur est validée, l'imprimante multifonction se connecte automatiquement au serveur pour obtenir My Address Book à l'intention de l'utilisateur connecté. L'utilisateur peut se servir de My Address Book pendant qu'il est connecté à l'imprimante multifonction. My Address Book n'est pas disponible après la déconnexion de l'utilisateur. 10.1.3 Restrictions d'utilisation de la fonction My Address Les restrictions suivantes s'appliquent à My Address Book. - Seul l'utilisateur qui dispose de My Address Book peut enregistrer, modifier ou supprimer My Address Book. L'Administrateur de l'imprimante multifonction ne peut pas effectuer d'opérations sur My Address Book. - My Address Book peut contenir 100 destinations en numérotation abrégée et 10 groupes maximum (100 destinations en numérotation abrégée par groupe maximum). - Si le nombre de destinations enregistrées dans My Address Book correspond à la valeur maximale autorisée, il n'est pas possible d'enregistrer une nouvelle destination. - Les destinations programmées ne peuvent pas être enregistrées dans My Address Book. - La recherche de destinations par index est impossible dans My Address Book. - L'opération Boîte est disponible uniquement sur les imprimantes multifonction sur lesquelles des destinations sont enregistrées. - En fonction de ses réglages ou des options installées sur l'imprimante multifonction laquelle My Address Book est utilisés, l'émission spécifiée dans le carnet d'adresses peut ne pas être possible. - L'enregistrement, l'édition, ou la suppression de My Address Book peut causer une erreur en fonction de l'état de connexion au serveur. En cas d'erreur, vérifiez la connexion réseau. My Address Book est disponible My Address Book est disponible Serveur (Gestion de My Address Book) (3) Obtention de My Address Book (2) Accès au serveur (1) Procédure d'authentification My Address Book n'est pas disponible • Échec d'authentification • Déconnexion • Échec d'obtention de My Panel,etc. bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-5 10.2 Enregistrement et modification d'une destination 10 10.2 Enregistrement et modification d'une destination My Address Book permet d'enregistrer les destinations privées fréquemment utilisées. Vous pouvez enregistrer les adresses au moyen de l'une des méthodes suivantes. - Par le panneau de contrôle de l'imprimante multifonction - Par PageScope Web Connection depuis un ordinateur du réseau - Par PageScope My Panel Manager Les destinations en numérotation abrégée et les groupes peuvent être enregistrés dans My Address Book. Cette section décrit la modalité d'enregistrement des adresses sur le panneau de contrôle de l'imprimante multifonction. 10.2.1 Carnet d'adresses Vous pouvez enregistrer les numéros de fax et les adresses E-mail f ainsi que les boîtes enregistrées fréquemment utilisés en numérotation abrégée. Vous pouvez enregistrer dans le carnet d'adresses jusqu'à 100 destinataires en numérotation abrégée. 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré. 2 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur. 3 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-Touche/Boîte]. 4 Appuyez sur [Créer Destination 1-Touche]. 5 Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Privé)]. % Pour ajouter des destinations en numérotation abrégée au carnet d'adresses partagé, appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Public)]. La liste des destinations en numérotation abrégée apparaît. 10 Enregistrement et modification d'une destination 10-6 bizhub 423/363/283/223 10.2 6 Appuyez sur [Nouveau]. % Pour modifier une destination enregistrée, sélectionnez-la et appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier]. % Pour supprimer une adresse enregistrée, sélectionnez-la et appuyez ensuite sur [Eff.]. % Pour vérifier une adresse enregistrée, sélectionnez l'adresse souhaitée et appuyez ensuite sur [Vér. Par. Tâches]. 7 Sélectionnez le type d'adresse à enregistrer, puis configure les réglages des éléments requis. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur les entrées du carnet d'adresses, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner Réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 10.2.2 Groupe Vous pouvez regrouper et enregistrer plusieurs destinations en numérotation abrégée du carnet d'adresses en tant que groupe. My Address Book permet d'enregistrer jusqu'à 10 groupes (enregistrement maximum de 100 destinations en numérotation abrégée par groupe). 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré. 2 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur. 3 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-Touche/Boîte]. 4 Appuyez sur [Créer Destination 1-Touche]. 5 Appuyez sur [Groupe]. La liste des groupes apparaît. bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-7 10.2 Enregistrement et modification d'une destination 10 6 Appuyez sur [Privé], puis sur [Nouveau]. % Pour modifier un groupe enregistré, sélectionnez-le et appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier]. % Pour supprimer un groupe enregistré, sélectionnez-le et appuyez ensuite sur [Eff.]. % Pour vérifier un groupe enregistré, sélectionnez-le et appuyez ensuite sur [Vér. Par. Tâches.]. % Appuyez sur [Public] pour afficher les groupes publics. 7 Assurez-vous de sélectionner un groupe privé comme destination d'enregistrement, puis configurez les réglages des éléments requis. % Sélectionnez [Régl. Groupe Destina]. Les adresses enregistrées dans My Address Book sont affichées. Sélectionnez une destination en numérotation abrégée à inclure dans un groupe. dPour info [Pour plus de détails sur le contenu d'enregistrement du groupe, reportez-vous au Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner Réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 10 Copier des destinations dans plusieurs carnets d'adresses 10-8 bizhub 423/363/283/223 10.3 10.3 Copier des destinations dans plusieurs carnets d'adresses Les destinations en numérotation abrégée enregistrées peuvent être copiées de My Address Book vers le carnet d'adresses public et réciproquement. Référence - Les groupes ne peuvent pas être copiés de My Address Book d'adresses vers le carnet d'adresses public et réciproquement. 10.3.1 Copier les destinations du carnet d'adresses public dans My Address Book Les adresses enregistrées dans le carnet d'adresses public peuvent être copiées dans My Address Book. 1 Affichez [Créer Destination 1-Touche]. 2 Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Public)]. 3 Sélectionnez le type d'adresse à copier. La liste des carnets d'adresses enregistrés du type d'adresse sélectionné apparaît. 4 Sélectionnez l'adresse à copier, et appuyez ensuite sur [Copier vers Adr pers]. 5 Sélectionnez [Oui] sur l'écran de confirmation et appuyez sur [Valider]. L'adresse sélectionnée est copiée. bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-9 10.3 Copier des destinations dans plusieurs carnets d'adresses 10 10.3.2 Copier les destinations du carnet d'adresses public dans My Address Book Les destinations enregistrées dans My Address Book peuvent être copiées dans le carnet d'adresses public. 1 Affichez [Créer Destination 1-Touche]. 2 Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Privé)]. La liste des destinations en numérotation abrégée apparaît. 3 Sélectionnez l'adresse à copier, et appuyez ensuite sur [Copier vers Adr Part]. 4 Sélectionnez [Oui] sur l'écran de confirmation et appuyez sur [Valider]. L'adresse sélectionnée est copiée. 10 Utiliser My Address Book pour envoyer un document 10-10 bizhub 423/363/283/223 10.4 10.4 Utiliser My Address Book pour envoyer un document Utilisez My Address Book pour spécifier une destination lorsque vous envoyez un document avec les fonctions Fax/Numérisation ou lorsque vous envoyez un document dans une boîte. 10.4.1 Spécifier des destinations Si vous utilisez les fonctions My Address, l'écran suivant apparaît lorsque une adresse doit être spécifiée. Les adresses enregistrées dans My Address Book apparaissent par type d'adresse. Sélectionnez la destination souhaitée. Pour sélectionner une adresse enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses public, appuyez sur [Public]. 10.4.2 Rechercher des destinations Si vous ne trouvez pas une adresse, vous pouvez lancer une recherche. Dans l'écran de spécification d'adresse, appuyez sur [Recher simple]. Pour rechercher des destinations d'après le type d'adresse enregistrée, appuyez sur [Type d'adresse]. Pour effectuer une recherche de destinations sur le nom et une partie du contenu d'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Recherche détaillée]. 11 Index bizhub 423/363/283/223 11-3 11.1 Index des éléments 11 11 Index 11.1 Index des éléments A Accès 5-3 Accès aux boîtes 5-6 Acquérir My Panel 9-5 Acquisition de My Address Book 10-4 Affichage 4-21 B Barre d'outils 4-12 Boîte utilisateur 5-6, 6-9 C Cache 5-3 Caractéristiques 4-4, 6-21 Caractéristiques du Navigateur Web 4-4 Carnet d'adresses 10-5 Carnet d'adresses public 10-3 Charger 4-23 Code PIN 6-20 Composition de l'écran d'Image Panel 6-5 Composition de l'écran de PageScope Web Connection 5-4 Composition de l'écran Navigateur Web 4-9 Connexion 5-5 D Déconnexion 5-5 E Enregistrement 4-22 F Flash Player 4-4 G Groupe 10-6 H Haut-parleur 4-11 I Image Panel 2-4, 6-3, 6-4, 6-24 Impression 4-19, 5-8, 6-16 Infos Navigateur Web 4-18 Interdiction du navigateur Web 4-6 M Magasin Envoi 6-18 Menu Application 3-4 Menu Comm 9-6 Mémoire externe 6-18 Mode d'affichage du Navigateur Web 4-11 My Address 2-4, 10-3 My Address Book 10-3, 10-10 My Panel 2-4, 9-3, 9-6 N Navigateur Web 2-4, 4-3, 4-5 Numérisation 6-8 O OCR 8-4 P PageScope Web Connection 5-3 Paramètres Navigateur Web 4-16 PDF adressable 2-4, 8-3, 8-5 Personnalisation 3-5, 6-24, 9-7 Photo 6-21 R Rendu intelligent 4-11 Rendu Parfait 4-11 Restrictions dans My Address 10-4 Restrictions sur My Panel 9-5 Réglages My Panel 9-7 S Saisie de texte dans Navigateur Web 4-10 Suppression 5-10 T Téléphone cellulaire/PDA 6-11, 6-20 Touche d'application 3-3, 3-5 Traitement PDF 2-4, 7-3 U Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-6 Utiliser le Navigateur Web 4-10 11-4 bizhub 423/363/283/223 11 Index des touches 11.2 11.2 Index des touches A Accès au contenu du navigateur Web 4-8 Affichage 4-17 Aperçu 6-12 C Cache 4-18 Carnet Adresses (Privé) 10-5 Carnet d'adresses par Défaut 9-12 Carnet d'adresses par défaut 9-13 Combiner Documents 6-14 Cookie 4-18 Copier vers Carnet partagé 10-9 Copier vers Carnet privé 10-8 Cryptage 7-5 D Destinataire 4-14 Document/Page 6-13, 6-14 G Gestion des fenêtres 4-17 Groupe 10-6 H Histor. 4-14 I ID numérique 7-6 Impression 4-15, 6-16 Impression directe 7-8 Informations d'authentification 4-18 J Journal Accès 4-18 L Lecture 6-8 Liste des destinations 6-17 Liste Source Document 6-9 M Menu 4-16 Menu Application 3-4 Mémoire externe 6-10, 6-18 Modifier document 6-13 Mot de passe 7-5 O Onglet par Défaut 9-10, 9-12, 9-14 Opération Page 4-16 P Param. Sélection Couleur 9-15 Paramètres Numérisation/Fax 9-12 Permission Fonction 4-7 Photo/Icône 6-22 Propriétés des documents PDF 7-4 Proxy 4-18 R Retour à Dest. Numér. 6-15 Réglage Boîte Utilisateur 9-14 Réglage Ecran par défaut 9-16 Réglage Langue 9-9 Réglage Navigateur Web 4-6 Réglage Reconnaissance optique OCR 8-4 Réglage Touche Application 3-5 Réglage Unité de mesure 9-9 Réglages 4-18 Réglages Copieur 9-10 Réglages Document 6-14 Réglages Menu Principal 9-15 Réglages My Panel 9-7 Réglages par défaut de l'onglet Densité 9-11 Réglages rapides 9-11 S Sécurité 4-18 Signet (Affichage) 4-13 Signet (Ajout) 4-13 T Téléphone cellulaire 6-11 Touche d'application 1 3-4 Touche d'application 2 3-4 Touche de raccourci 9-10, 9-13, 9-14 Touche du menu Application 3-3 Type d'adresse par défaut Guide du scanner réseau pour le Fiery S300 50C-KM Prenez connaissance du contenu de ce manuel avant d'imprimer. Conservez-le à portée de la main afin de pouvoir vous y référer en cas de besoin. 1 Introduction Merci d’avoir acheté le S300 50C-KM. Ce Guide du scanner réseau comprend des instructions relatives à l’utilisation des fonctions et à la sécurité. Lisez-le attentivement. Lisez attentivement ce manuel avant d'effectuer des opérations de numérisation ou d'utiliser l'équipement de quelle manière que ce soit. MARQUES : • Fiery et le logo Fiery sont des marques déposées de Electronics For Imaging, Inc. au Bureau américain des marques et des brevets et dans d’autres juridictions étrangères. • Command WorkStation, WebTools, WebScan et EFI sont des marques de Electronics For Imaging, Inc. • Microsoft, MS, Windows et MS-DOS sont des marques déposées ou des marques de Microsoft Corporation aux Etats- Unis et/ou dans d’autres pays. • Macintosh et PowerMac sont des marques déposées ou des marques de Apple Computer, Inc. aux Etats-Unis et/ou dans d’autres pays. • Adobe, Adobe Logo, Acrobat, le logo Acrobat, PostScript et le logo PostScript sont des marques commerciales ou des marques déposées d'Adobe Systems, Inc. • Les autres noms de sociétés et de produits employés dans ce manuel sont des marques commerciales ou déposées de leurs sociétés respectives. Copyright © 2005 Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. DISPENSE • Aucune partie de ce manuel ne peut être utilisée ou reproduite sans autorisation. • Le fabricant et le fournisseur déclinent toute responsabilité quant à des incidents résultant de l'utilisation du système d'impression et de ce manuel. • Les informations contenues dans ce Guide du scanner réseau sont soumises à des modifications sans préavis. 2 TABLE DES MATIERES Introduction ...................................................................................................................... 1 À propos de ce manuel .................................................................................................... 4 Chapitre 1 : Présentation des fonctions de numérisation.....................................6 1-1 Classification des fonctions de numérisation............................................................... 7 Fonctions de numérisation : définition .................................................................................. 7 Numérisation vers e-mail ...................................................................................................... 7 Disque dur............................................................................................................................. 9 FTP ..................................................................................................................................... 10 Numérisation vers FILE D’ATTENTE.................................................................................. 11 1-2 Avant utilisation ............................................................................................................. 12 Position/Description du tableau de commande................................................................... 12 Ecran à cristaux liquides ..................................................................................................... 13 1-3 Fonctionnement de base ............................................................................................... 13 Structure ............................................................................................................................. 13 Ecran [Sélect. objet émission]............................................................................................. 14 Écran [Réglages de base du scanner]................................................................................ 15 Saisie de texte .................................................................................................................... 16 Chapitre 2 : Avant d’utiliser les fonctions de numérisation................................18 2-1 Présentation.................................................................................................................... 19 2-2 Enregistrement de destinations (E-Mail)...................................................................... 19 Enregistrement d’une adresse e-mail ................................................................................. 19 Révision et suppression de l’adresse e-mail....................................................................... 20 2-3 Enregistrement d’emplacements de stockage (Disque dur) ...................................... 20 Enregistrement d’un numéro de boîte................................................................................. 21 Révision et suppression du numéro de boîte...................................................................... 22 2-4 Enregistrement de destinations (FTP) ......................................................................... 22 Enregistrement d’un serveur FTP....................................................................................... 22 Révision et suppression d’un serveur FTP ......................................................................... 25 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation ....................................... 26 3-1 Activation du mode numérisation ................................................................................ 27 3-2 Sélection de la destination ............................................................................................ 27 Sélection de la destination (E-Mail) .................................................................................... 27 Sélection de l’emplacement de stockage (Disque dur) ....................................................... 31 Sélection de la destination (FTP)........................................................................................ 33 Sélection de la destination (FILE D'ATTENTE) .................................................................. 35 3-3 Positionnement du document d’origine....................................................................... 35 3-4 Définition des fonctions du scanner ............................................................................ 35 NOM DE FICHIER .............................................................................................................. 36 MODE COULEUR............................................................................................................... 37 FORMAT DE FICHIER ....................................................................................................... 37 MODE NUMERISATION..................................................................................................... 37 FORMAT NUMERIS. .......................................................................................................... 37 QUALITE............................................................................................................................. 38 AGR./RED........................................................................................................................... 38 TABLE DES MATIERES (suite) 3 DENSITÉ NUMÉR. ............................................................................................................. 39 RÉGLAGE COULEUR........................................................................................................ 39 AUTRES ............................................................................................................................. 40 Pleine page......................................................................................................................... 41 Direction de l’original........................................................................................................... 41 Type de document d’origine................................................................................................ 41 3-5 Lancement de la numérisation...................................................................................... 42 3-6 Vérification de l’état et des réglages du scanner ........................................................ 42 Affichage du statut de fonctionnement................................................................................ 42 Vérification des paramètres de numérisation...................................................................... 42 Modifiez les paramètres actuels ......................................................................................... 43 Chapitre 4 : Importation des données numérisées.............................................. 44 4-1 Récupération depuis un disque dur ............................................................................. 45 Comment lire des données numérisées ............................................................................. 45 Comment supprimer des données numérisées .................................................................. 45 4-2 Images numérisées vers FTP ou E-mail....................................................................... 46 4-3 Images numérisées vers FILE D’ATTENTE.................................................................. 46 Comment utiliser des données numérisées........................................................................ 46 Comment supprimer des données numérisées .................................................................. 47 Chapitre 5 : Mode responsable .............................................................................. 48 5-1 Mode responsable.......................................................................................................... 49 Passage en mode responsable .......................................................................................... 49 5-2 Modification/Suppression de la destination ................................................................ 49 Chapitre 6 : Dépannage ..........................................................................................50 6-1 Impossible d’utiliser le scanner .................................................................................... 51 Lorsque vous ne parvenez pas à vous connecter au scanner............................................ 51 Lorsque vous ne pouvez pas numériser ............................................................................. 51 Annexe......................................................................................................................52 Annexe-1 Caractéristiques du produit............................................................................. 53 Caractéristiques des fonctions de numérisation du produit ................................................ 53 Index .........................................................................................................................54 4 À propos de ce manuel Ce manuel présente les fonctions du scanner réseau de ce serveur couleur S300 50C-KM. Ce chapitre explique la composition du manuel et les conventions utilisées. Ce manuel part du principe que l’utilisateur sait utiliser les fonctions de base d’un ordinateur et d’un copieur. Pour connaître les fonctions plus avancées des ordinateurs Windows et Macintosh, veuillez consulter les manuels d’utilisation de ces systèmes d’exploitation. Pour connaître les autres fonctions de ce serveur couleur S300 50C-KM, veuillez consulter les manuels d’utilisation correspondants. Composition du manuel Ce manuel se compose des 6 chapitres suivants : Chapitre 1 : Présentation des fonctions de numérisation Ce chapitre présente les fonctions du scanner et indique comment utiliser le tableau de commande. Chapitre 2 : Avant d’utiliser les fonctions de numérisation Ce chapitre explique les opérations effectuées précédemment pour enregistrer les destinations afin de transmettre/stocker les données de numérisation. Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation Ce chapitre explique comment utiliser les fonctions du scanner réseau. Chapitre 4 : Importation des données numérisées Ce chapitre explique comment importer depuis les destinations les données numérisées à transmettre/stocker dans un ordinateur. Chapitre 5 : Mode responsable Ce chapitre porte sur le mode Responsable utilisé avec les paramètres des fonctions du scanner. Chapitre 6 : Dépannage Ce chapitre explique les procédures à suivre en cas de défaillance du scanner. Annexe Décrit les caractéristiques du contrôleur d’impression. Conventions employées dans ce manuel Les abréviations suivantes sont employées dans ce manuel : Dénomination de chaque produit • S300 50C-KM Serveur couleur S300 50C-KM → contrôleur d’impression Autres • Fonctions du scanner réseau → Fonctions du scanner Utilitaires de ce produit Le système de numérisation et le système d’impression utilisent les utilitaires suivants : Pour connaître les fonctions avancées de ces utilitaires, veuillez vous reporter au manuel d’utilisation du contrôleur d’impression. • Command WorkStation Utilitaire permettant de gérer les travaux. Cette application permet de gérer les données de numérisation stockées par la fonction Numérisation vers FILE D’ATTENTE (p.11). • Application Fiery Remote Scan Application permettant d’exécuter la fonction de numérisation à distance du contrôleur d’impression. Cette application permet d’accéder à des données numérisées sur le disque dur du copieur et de les transférer sur un serveur FTP ou vers une adresse e-mail sous forme de pièce jointe. À propos de ce manuel (suite) 5 • Fiery Remote Scan Plug-in Plug -in compatible TWAIN. Cette application permet d’accéder depuis un ordinateur du réseau aux données numérisées stockées sur le disque dur du copieur grâce à des applications compatibles. • Fiery WebTools - WebScan Utilitaires Web à utiliser avec votre navigateur. Cet utilitaire permet de récupérer les données numérisées sur le contrôleur d’impression. Comment lire ce manuel 3-2 Selecting the Destination When you press [SCAN] button, scanning features is activated and the screen appears. On the screen, yo , or and set items corresponded with your selection. You can select multiple destinations. In this ter setting of items for the destination already selected and omit the proced ear the settings for the destination already selected. E-Mail:Å@ “Selecting the Destination (E-Mail)” on page 46. HDD:Å@ “Selecting the Storage Location (HDD)” on page 55. FTP:Å@ “Selecting the Destination (FTP)” on page 60. QUEUE:Å@ “Selecting the Destination (QUEUE)” on page 66. mmended to activate the printer mode or copy mode by pressing the tton of the control panel. Control Panel screen (E-Mail) screen screen Reference Reference Reference Reference 1. ol panel. The yed on the LCD screen. 2. cted once by touching the same transmission r you have selected an E-Mail address / Box No. / , please operate it after removing selections of those by touching the same. MEMO Ce document contient des boîtes de légende. Les types de boîtes de légende affichées ainsi sont les suivants : Explique les mesures de précaution et les restrictions qui s'appliquent au matériel et au logiciel. Explique les principes des fonctions ainsi que d'autres fonctions qui ne sont pas compatibles entre elles. Indique des points importants sur les procédures d'utilisation. Explications destinées à compléter le texte du document. Indique une page à consulter pour plus d'informations. Consultez cette page, le cas échéant. Astuces et conseils sur les procédures d'utilisation. Attention Cette page n'existe pas dans le document. [ ] sont utilisés pour les termes affichés à l'écran. Décrit les procédures d'utilisation. Affiche un objet et la fonction d'une procédure. Décrit le statut du matériel et du logiciel à la fin d'une opération. [Select [Select Tran ssion Object] ], [FTP] [QUEUE] [Select Transmission Object] [Select Tran ssion Object] [Select Transmission Object] mission Object] Important MEMO Référence Conseils 6 Chapitre 1 : Présentation des fonctions de numérisation 1-1 Classification des fonctions de numérisation ............................7 1-2 Avant utilisation...........................................................................12 1-3 Fonctionnement de base ............................................................13 7 Chapitre 1 : Présentation des fonctions de numérisation 1-1 Classification des fonctions de numérisation ●Fonctions de numérisation : définition Les fonctions de numérisation permettent de numériser un document original sous forme de données image (données numérisées) depuis le chargeur RADF ou la vitre d’exposition du copieur sur le disque dur du contrôleur d’impression, puis de transmettre/stocker les données numérisées. Tous les documents originaux peuvent être copiés et numérisés grâce aux fonctions de numérisation. Vous pouvez également numériser et transmettre/stocker immédiatement des documents d’origine de plusieurs formats. “Type de document d’origine” à la page 41. IMPORTANT Pour utiliser les fonctions de numérisation, vous devez configurer les paramètres réseau du contrôleur d’impression. Veuillez consulter le manuel d'utilisation du contrôleur d'impression pour des informations sur les paramètres réseau. Quatre types de fonctions de numérisation Les fonctions de numérisation sont classées dans quatre groupes en fonction de l’objet d’émission : • Numérisation vers e-mail : Transmettez un e-mail avec un fichier joint (travail numérisé) à l’adresse spécifiée. • Numérisation vers disque dur : Enregistrez les données numérisées sur le disque dur du contrôleur d’impression. • Numérisation vers FTP : Téléchargez les données numérisées sur le serveur FTP désigné. • Numérisation vers FILE D’ATTENTE : Stockez les données numérisées sous forme de file d’attente sur le contrôleur d’impression. Lors de la numérisation, vous pouvez sélectionner l’objet d’émission. Vous pouvez également sélectionner plusieurs objets en une seule opération. MEMO Vous pouvez récupérer les données numérisées enregistrées avec la fonction Numérisation vers disque dur sur un ordinateur du réseau. “Récupération depuis un disque dur” à la page 45. ●Numérisation vers e-mail Vous pouvez transmettre les données image (données numérisées) numérisées depuis le chargeur RADF ou la vitre d’exposition du copieur sous forme de fichier joint par e-mail ou envoyer un e-mail comportant un lien URL vers l’emplacement de stockage des données numérisées. Référence Référence Original Numérisation vers e-mail Contrôleur d'impression Numérisation Copieur Serveur FTP Serveur de messagerie Numérisation vers FTP Numérisation vers disque dur Numérisation vers FILE D'ATTENTE Internet 1-1 Classification des fonctions de numérisation (suite) 8 Chapitre 1 : Présentation des fonctions de numérisation MEMO La fonction Numérisation vers e-mail permet de garantir que votre message atteint votre serveur interne (SMTP). Vous pouvez toutefois rencontrer des problèmes sur Internet ou avec le serveur du destinataire. Il est toutefois recommandé de demander un accusé de réception indépendant. Veuillez vous reporter au "Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation" (p. 26) pour connaître les procédures. Transmission d’un fichier joint La fonction Numérisation vers e-mail transmet les données numérisées sous forme de fichier joint d’un e-mail. Transmission de l’URL La fonction Numérisation vers e-mail permet d’envoyer un e-mail comportant un lien URL vers les données numérisées figurant sur le disque dur du copieur si la taille des données numérisées dépasse une limite prédéfinie. Les données numérisées sont alors stockées sur le disque dur d’un contrôleur d’impression et l’URL indiquant l'emplacement est automatiquement envoyée dans un e-mail. MEMO Pour des informations sur les restrictions appliquées à la taille des fichiers à transmettre, reportez-vous au manuel d'utilisation du contrôleur d'impression. Options à définir avec la fonction Numérisation vers e-mail Adresse e-mail Définissez les adresses e-mail en sélectionnant une adresse e-mail dans les adresses enregistrées ou en la saisissant manuellement. Pour des informations sur l’enregistrement d’une adresse, reportez-vous à la section “Enregistrement de destinations (E-Mail)” à la page 19. Titre Le mot par défaut du titre est “Le nom de fichier a été numérisé”. Vous pouvez toutefois le modifier lorsque le copieur effectue des opérations. Pour des informations sur la modification du titre, reportez-vous à la section “Définition du titre” à la page 30. Format de fichier Changez la première phrase par “Les pièces jointes et les données numérisées peuvent être enregistrées sous forme de fichiers JPEG, TIFF ou PDF. Pour des informations sur la modification du format de fichier, reportez-vous à la section “FORMAT DE FICHIER” à la page 37. Nom de fichier Le nom d’un fichier joint/d’un fichier à stocker est automatiquement généré, mais vous pouvez le modifier à votre convenance. Pour des informations sur la modification du nom de fichier, reportez-vous à la section “NOM DE FICHIER” à la page 36. Contrôleur d'impression Serveur SMTP Serveur POP Internet Original Numérisation Copieur 1-1 Classification des fonctions de numérisation (suite) 9 Chapitre 1 : Présentation des fonctions de numérisation Texte d’un e-mail La phrase suivante figure automatiquement dans le texte d’un e-mail lorsque vous transmettez un message sous forme de fichier joint. “Les documents suivants ont été numérisées sur le Fiery et joints à cet e-mail : Pièce(s) jointe(s) (Nom de fichier)” Les phrases suivantes figurent automatiquement dans le texte d'un e-mail lors de la transmission d'une URL. “Les documents suivants ont été numérisés sur le Fiery et peuvent être téléchargés depuis : URL(s) Téléchargez le document dans le jour qui suit. (Remarque : cette restriction s’applique uniquement si la fonction de suppression automatique est définie sur 1 journée) Téléchargez le document dans les 7 jours qui suivent. (Remarque : cette restriction s’applique uniquement si la fonction de suppression automatique est définie sur 7 jours. La durée pendant laquelle le fichier réside sur le Fiery n’est pas indiquée si la fonction de suppression automatique n’est pas activée.)” ATTENTION • Vous ne pouvez pas modifier le texte d’un e-mail depuis le tableau de commande. Pour des informations sur la modification du texte, veuillez consulter le manuel d’utilisation du contrôleur d’impression. • La fonction Numérisation vers e-mail peut endommager les données numérisées du fait de l’état du réseau ou pour toute autre raison. Vérifiez si les données numérisées ne sont pas corrompues. ●Disque dur Vous pouvez stocker les données image (données numérisées) sur le disque dur du contrôleur d'impression. Des boîtes agissent sur le disque dur comme des dossiers et les données numérisées sont sauvegardées dans la boîte sélectionnée. Vous pouvez récupérer les données stockées dans une boîte grâce à un ordinateur du réseau. Veuillez vous reporter au "Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation" (p. 26) pour connaître les procédures. MEMO Aucune limite de taille ne s’applique aux données numérisées pouvant être stockées dans chaque boîte. La limite maximale de fichiers dépend de l’espace disponible sur le disque dur. Original Contrôleur d'impression Numérisation Copieur Disque dur 1-1 Classification des fonctions de numérisation (suite) 10 Chapitre 1 : Présentation des fonctions de numérisation Options à définir pour la fonction Numérisation vers disque dur Numéro de boîte Définissez un numéro de boîte avec des nombres de moins de quatre chiffres ou sélectionnez un numéro de boîte parmi ceux déjà enregistrés. “Sélection de l’emplacement de stockage (Disque dur)” à la page 31. ●FTP Vous pouvez transmettre les données image (données numérisées) vers un serveur FTP. Vous pouvez accéder aux données numérisées que vous avez transmises au serveur FTP depuis un ordinateur distant, puis les télécharger. MEMO • Le fichier journal sur la transmission des données numérisées vers FTP est stocké sur le contrôleur d’impression. • Vous pouvez imprimer un fichier journal à l’aide de Command WorkStation. Pour des informations sur l’impression, veuillez consulter le manuel d’utilisation du contrôleur d’impression. Veuillez vous reporter au "Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation" (p. 26) pour connaître les procédures. Options à définir pour la fonction Numérisation vers FTP Nom de profil Définissez le nom du profil en sélectionnant un nom de profil dans la liste des noms de profil enregistrés ou en le saisissant manuellement. Pour des informations sur l’enregistrement d’un nom de profil, reportez-vous à la section “Enregistrement d’un serveur FTP” à la page 22. MEMO Vous pouvez sélectionner/enregistrer un profil contenant des informations nécessaires pour établir une connexion vers un serveur FTP. “Sélection de la destination (FTP)” à la page 33. Adresse d’hôte Lorsque vous ne trouvez pas le profil enregistré de votre choix, saisissez manuellement l’adresse d’hôte. Pour des informations sur l’enregistrement d’une adresse d’hôte (nom du serveur FTP/adresse IP), veuillez vous reporter à la section “Enregistrement d’un serveur FTP” à la page 22. Chemin d’accès aux fichiers Lorsque vous ne trouvez pas le profil enregistré de votre choix, saisissez manuellement le chemin d’accès aux fichiers. Pour des informations sur l’enregistrement d’un chemin d’accès aux fichiers, reportez-vous à la section “Enregistrement d’un serveur FTP” à la page 22. Référence Contrôleur d'impression Serveur FTP Internet Original Numérisation Copieur Référence 1-1 Classification des fonctions de numérisation (suite) 11 Chapitre 1 : Présentation des fonctions de numérisation Numéro de port Selon vos besoins, définissez le numéro de port manuellement. Pour des informations sur le paramétrage d’un numéro de port, reportez-vous à la section “Enregistrement d’un serveur FTP” à la page 22. Connexion (nom d’utilisateur) Sélectionnez un nom d’utilisateur parmi ceux préenregistrés afin de vous connecter au serveur FTP ou définissez la connexion (nom d’utilisateur) manuellement. Pour des informations sur l’enregistrement d’un nom d’utilisateur, reportez-vous à la section “Enregistrement d’un serveur FTP” à la page 22. Mot de passe Sélectionnez le mot de passe requis pour la connexion (nom d’utilisateur) ou définissez le mot de passe correspondant à la connexion (nom d’utilisateur) manuellement. Pour des informations sur l’enregistrement d’un mot de passe, reportez-vous à la section “Enregistrement d’un serveur FTP” à la page 22. ATTENTION La fonction Numérisation vers FTP peut endommager les données numérisées du fait de l’état du réseau ou pour toute autre raison. Vérifiez si les données numérisées ne sont pas corrompues. ●Numérisation vers FILE D’ATTENTE Vous pouvez stocker les données image (données numérisées) sous forme de fichier PDF (Portable Document Format) dans le contrôleur d’impression et les utiliser pour un travail d’impression (file d’attente). Vous pouvez modifier ou imprimer les données numérisées stockées sous forme de file d’attente à l’aide de Command WorkStation. Veuillez vous reporter au "Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation" (p. 26) pour connaître les procédures. MEMO • La version du PDF est 1.4. • Pour des informations sur Command WorkStation, veuillez consulter le manuel d’utilisation du contrôleur d’impression. Original Contrôleur d'impression Numérisation Copieur FILE D'ATTENTE 12 Chapitre 1 : Présentation des fonctions de numérisation 1-2 Avant utilisation ●Position/Description du tableau de commande MEMO Pour des informations sur les détails de chaque fonction, veuillez consulter le manuel d’utilisation du copieur. 1. Ecran à cristaux liquides L’écran à cristaux liquides affiche le statut du contrôleur d’impression, les menus utilisés pour les réglages, les options de sélection et autres informations similaires. Pour procéder aux réglages, appuyez sur la touche affichée à l’écran. 2. Touche [CONTROLE] Cette touche permet d’afficher l’écran [MODE CONTROLE]. 3. Touche [AIDE] Cette touche permet d’afficher un écran d’aide sur la fonction sélectionnée. 4. Touche [IMPRIMANTE] Cette touche permet de passer en mode imprimante. (inutilisable à partir d’août 2003.) 5. Touche [SCANNER] Cette touche permet de passer en mode scanner. 6. Touche [COPIEUR] Cette touche permet de passer en mode copie. 7. Voyant [PROGRAMMATEUR] Ce voyant s'allume s’allume lorsque le programmateur est activé. 8. Touche [ECONOMIE D’ENERGIE] Cette touche permet d’activer le mode d’économie d’énergie lorsque le copieur est inactif ou d’activer le mode interruption du programmateur lorsque le programmateur est activé. 9. Touche [INTERRUPTION] L’impression en cours est arrêtée pour lancer la copie. 10.Touche [EPREUVE] Cette touche permet d’imprimer une copie afin de confirmer les réglages effectués. 11.Touche [ARRET] Cette touche permet d’arrêter la copie ou l’impression. 1 23 4 5 6 7 89 10 11 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 19 20 1-3 Fonctionnement de base (suite) 13 Chapitre 1 : Présentation des fonctions de numérisation 12.Touche [DEPART] L’impression mise en attente reprend ou la numérisation commence. 13.Touche [ANNUL.] Cette touche permet de supprimer les caractères numériques saisis. 14.PAVE NUMERIQUE Permet de saisir des valeurs numériques. 15.Touche [COMPTEUR] Cette touche permet d'afficher l'écran Compteur ou d'accéder à des modes de programmation afin de définir des fonctions spéciales. 16.Touche [AUTO] Cette touche permet de réinitialiser les réglages par défaut. 17.Touche [PROGRAMME] Cette touche affiche l’écran permettant de sélectionner les fonctions de stockage/rappel de programme. 18.Touche [CODE] Lorsque vous ne pouvez pas effectuer de copie en raison des limitations imposées sur le mot de passe ECM, appuyez sur Cette touche. Cette touche permet d’afficher l’écran dans lequel vous pouvez saisir le mot de passe. Saisissez le mot de passe approprié afin d’effectuer la copie. 19.Touche de réglage du contraste Cette touche permet de régler le contraste de l’écran à cristaux liquides. 20.Voyant de l’indicateur d’alimentation Ce voyant s’allume/s’éteint selon l’état de l’alimentation électrique. ●Ecran à cristaux liquides Sélectionnez des options en appuyant sur la touche correspondante qui apparaît sur l’écran à cristaux liquides. Lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche ou ouvrez un écran de paramétrage, la touche sélectionnée est affichée et ses couleurs sont inversées (noir sur blanc) ou interverties (blanc sur noir). Touches communes à tous les écrans de paramétrage [OK] : Les résultats de l’opération sont appliqués. [ANNULER] : Les résultats de l’opération sont annulés. Lorsque le copieur est sous tension, si vous appuyez sur la touche [SCANNER] du tableau de commande, l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] est affiché sur l’écran à cristaux liquides. MEMO L’affichage de l’écran à cristaux liquides est différent entre les Etats-Unis et les autres pays. 1-3 Fonctionnement de base ●Structure L’opération de numérisation fait appel au tableau de commande du photocopieur. Les opérations de base sont les suivantes. 1-3 Fonctionnement de base (suite) 14 Chapitre 1 : Présentation des fonctions de numérisation MEMO Pour des informations sur l’enregistrement des destinations, reportez-vous aux pages suivantes. • Numérisation vers e-mail : “Enregistrement de destinations (E-Mail)” à la page 19. • Numérisation vers disque dur : “Enregistrement d’emplacements de stockage (Disque dur)” à la page 20. • Numérisation vers FTP : “Enregistrement de destinations (FTP)” à la page 22. ●Ecran [Sélect. objet émission] L’écran [Sélect. objet émission] apparaît lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche [SCANNER] du tableau de commande. MEMO Lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche [SCANNER] du tableau de commande, la touche [E-Mail] est sélectionné dans l’écran [Sélect. objet émission]. L’écran [Sélect. objet émission] permet de sélectionner l’objet d’émission à appliquer aux données numérisées en appuyant sur les touches [E-Mail], [Disque dur], [FTP] ou [FILE D’ATTENTE]. Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs objets d’émission pour transmettre/stocker les données numérisées. MEMO Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs objets d’émission. L’écran [Sélect. objet émission] bascule vers un écran différent selon la destination à chaque pression sur [E-Mail], [Disque dur] ou [FTP]. MEMO • A l’inverse, aucun autre écran n’apparaît lorsque vous appuyez sur [FILE D’ATTENTE]. • Vous pouvez quitter le mode objet d’émission sélectionné en appuyant de nouveau sur le même bouton. L’écran [Réglages de base du scanner] apparaît lorsque vous appuyez sur [OK] dans l’écran [Sélect. objet émission]. MEMO Lorsque vous appuyez sur [ADRESSE] dans l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner], l’affichage revient à l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] avec les paramètres que vous avez saisis. Vous pouvez également rechercher une adresse e-mail, un numéro de boîte ou un serveur FTP et répertorier toutes les destinations enregistrées. Référence Référence Référence 1-3 Fonctionnement de base (suite) 15 Chapitre 1 : Présentation des fonctions de numérisation MEMO • Les adresses e-mail enregistrées sont affichées. • Lorsque plus de 12 adresses e-mail sont enregistrées, et sont affichées dans la partie inférieure gauche de l’écran. L’écran suivant apparaît lorsque vous appuyez sur . L’écran précédent réapparaît lorsque vous appuyez sur . MEMO • Les numéros de boîte enregistrés sont affichés. • Lorsque plus de 12 numéros de boîte sont enregistrés, et sont affichées dans la partie inférieure gauche de l’écran. L’écran suivant apparaît lorsque vous appuyez sur . L’écran précédent réapparaît lorsque vous appuyez sur . MEMO • Les noms de profil enregistrés sont affichés. • Lorsque plus de 12 noms de profil sont enregistrés, et sont affichées dans la partie inférieure gauche de l’écran. L’écran suivant apparaît lorsque vous appuyez sur . L’écran précédent réapparaît lorsque vous appuyez sur . MEMO A l’inverse, lorsque vous appuyez sur [FILE D’ATTENTE], l’écran ne change pas. ●Écran [Réglages de base du scanner] L’écran [Réglages de base du scanner] apparaît lorsque vous appuyez sur [OK] dans l’écran [Sélect. objet émission]. L’écran [Réglages de base du scanner] permet de définir différents réglages de base pour numériser les données image. Lorsque vous appuyez sur [ADRESSE], l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] réapparaît avec les réglages effectués. MEMO Lorsque l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner] apparaît, vous pouvez retourner à l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] en procédant comme suit : • Appuyez sur [ANNULER] sur l’écran à cristaux liquides • Appuyez sur la touche [AUTO] du tableau de commande la touche [AUTO] annule tous les réglages que vous avez effectués et affiche l’écran [Sélect. objet émission]. Pour lancer une numérisation et transmettre/stocker des données, appuyez sur la touche [DEPART] du tableau de commande. MEMO Vous pouvez confirmer les réglages actuels dans l’écran [Mode contrôle réglages] qui apparaît lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche [CONTROLE] du tableau de commande. L'écran [Réglages de base du scanner] permet de régler les options suivantes : NOM DE FICHIER Lorsque vous appuyez sur [NOM DE FICHIER], l’écran [Entrer le nom de fichier] apparaît. Le nom de fichier peut comporter 26 caractères. Pour des informations sur un nom de fichier, reportez-vous à la section “NOM DE FICHIER” à la page 36. MODE COULEUR Vous pouvez sélectionner le mode couleur pour la numérisation en [NOIR], [COULEUR] ou [AUTO]. Pour des informations sur le mode couleur, reportez-vous à la section “MODE COULEUR” à la page 37. FORMAT DE FICHIER Vous pouvez sélectionner le format de fichier utilisé pour les pièces jointes d’un e-mail, enregistré sur le disque dur ou téléchargé sur un serveur FTP. Pour des informations sur le format de fichier, reportez-vous à la section “FORMAT DE FICHIER” à la page 37. 1-3 Fonctionnement de base (suite) 16 Chapitre 1 : Présentation des fonctions de numérisation MODE NUMERISATION Cette fonction permet de déterminer si le document original est en mode recto verso ou recto seul. Pour des informations sur le mode de numérisation, reportez-vous à la section “MODE NUMERISATION” à la page 37. FORMAT NUMERIS. Cette fonction permet de déterminer si le format de numérisation est détecté automatiquement ou si l’utilisateur le définit manuellement à chaque numérisation. Pour des informations sur le format de numérisation, reportez-vous à la section “FORMAT NUMERIS.” à la page 37. QUALITE Cette fonction permet de sélectionner la résolution de numérisation. Pour des informations sur la qualité, reportez-vous à la section “QUALITE” à la page 38. AGR./RED. Cette fonction permet de définir ou non le taux de restitution. Pour des informations sur l’agrandissement/la réduction, reportez-vous à la section “AGR./RED.” à la page 38. Pleine page (FONCTION) Normalement, l'image numérisée est entourée d'une marge en haut, en bas, à gauche et à droite, où les données sont supprimées. Cette fonction permet de numériser le document jusqu'aux bords. Pour des informations sur la numérisation pleine page, reportez-vous à la section “Pleine page” à la page 41. ORIGINAUX SPECIAUX (FONCTION) Lorsque vous appuyez sur [ORIGINAUX SPECIAUX], l’écran [ORIGINAUX SPECIAUX] apparaît. Pour des informations sur les originaux spéciaux, reportez-vous aux sections “Direction de l’original” à la page 41 et “Type de document d’origine” à la page 41. RÉGLAGE IMAGE (FONCTION) L'image de l'original peut être modifiée après sa lecture. Pour plus d'informations, voir “DENSITÉ NUMÉR.” à la page 39, “RÉGLAGE COULEUR” à la page 39 et “AUTRES” à la page 40. ●Saisie de texte Saisissez le nom de l’entrée ou une adresse e-mail dans l’écran [Entrée au clavier] qui apparaît lorsque vous appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. Ecran [Entrée au clavier] L’écran [Entrée au clavier] permet de saisir des lettres et des lettres spéciales. Utilisez le PAVE NUMERIQUE du tableau de commande pour saisir des nombres. MEMO Pour modifier la disposition par défaut du clavier, contactez votre service après-vente. Il existe trois sortes d'écrans Clavier : • L’écran [Entrée minuscules] L’écran [Entrée minuscules] apparaît lorsque vous appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. Lorsque l’écran [Entrée majuscules] apparaît, l’écran [Entrée minuscules] s’affiche si vous appuyez sur [Capital/ Minuscule]. Lorsque l’écran [Entrée symboles] apparaît, l’écran [Entrée minuscules] s’affiche si vous appuyez sur [Alphabet]. 1-3 Fonctionnement de base (suite) 17 Chapitre 1 : Présentation des fonctions de numérisation • L’écran [Entrée majuscules] Lorsque l’écran [Entrée minuscules] apparaît, l’écran [Entrée majuscules] s’affiche si vous appuyez sur [Capital/ Minuscule]. Lorsque l’écran [Entrée symboles] apparaît, l’écran [Entrée majuscules] s’affiche si vous appuyez sur [Alphabet] puis sur [Capital/Minuscule]. • L’écran [Entrée symboles] Lorsque l’écran [Entrée minuscules] ou [Entrée majuscules] apparaît, l’écran [Entrée symboles] s’affiche si vous appuyez sur [Signe]. Saisie de texte MEMO Utilisez le PAVE NUMERIQUE du tableau de commande pour saisir des nombres. 1. Confirmez l’apparition de l’écran [Entrée au clavier] (Minuscule/Majuscule/Symbole) souhaité. Si vous souhaitez travailler dans un autre écran, appuyez sur [Alphabet] / [Capital/Minuscule] / [Signe] 2. Appuyez sur les touches alphabétiques de l’écran à cristaux liquides pour entrer les lettres. Les lettres entrées apparaissent en haut de l’écran. MEMO • Un signe “|” représentant une position d’entrée clignote en plus des lettres affichées en haut de l’écran. • Lorsque vous appuyez sur [Supprimer], une lettre placée avant le signe est supprimée. • Lorsque vous appuyez sur , le signe se déplace vers la gauche. • Lorsque vous appuyez sur , le signe se déplace vers la droite. 3. Confirmez les lettres saisies, puis appuyez sur [OK] dans l’écran à cristaux liquides. L’affichage retourne à l'écran qui était affiché avant que vous appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. Les lettres saisies apparaissent à l’écran. 18 Chapitre 2 : Avant d’utiliser les fonctions de numérisation 2-1 Présentation.................................................................................19 2-2 Enregistrement de destinations (E-Mail) ...................................19 2-3 Enregistrement d’emplacements de stockage (Disque dur) ...20 2-4 Enregistrement de destinations (FTP)....................................... 22 19 Chapitre 2 : Avant d’utiliser les fonctions de numérisation 2-1 Présentation Cette section indique les procédures d’enregistrement des destinations des données numérisées à suivre avant d’utiliser les fonctions de numérisation. Vous pouvez auparavant enregistrer les éléments suivants : • Numérisation vers e-mail : Adresse e-mail “Enregistrement de destinations (E-Mail)” à la page 19. • Numérisation vers disque dur : Numéro de boîte “Enregistrement d’emplacements de stockage (Disque dur)” à la page 20. • Numérisation vers FTP : Nom de profil “Enregistrement de destinations (FTP)” à la page 22. Adresse d’hôte Chemin d’accès aux fichiers Connexion (nom d’utilisateur) Mot de passe Numéro de port MEMO Numérisation vers FILE D’ATTENTE ne nécessite aucune information pour enregistrer des données numérisées. 2-2 Enregistrement de destinations (E-Mail) Vous pouvez auparavant enregistrer des destinations pour Numérisation vers e-mail. La destination utilisée avec Numérisation vers e-mail est une adresse e-mail. Vous pouvez enregistrer une adresse e-mail avec le tableau de commande ou l’utilitaire Web pour le copieur. Cette section explique comment enregistrer depuis le tableau de commande. MEMO Pour des informations sur l’utilitaire Web pour le copieur, consultez le manuel d’utilisation du copieur. ●Enregistrement d’une adresse e-mail 1. Appuyez sur la touche [SCANNER] du tableau de commande. L’écran [Sélect. objet émission] apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. 2. Assurez-vous que [E-Mail] est bien sélectionné. Si [E-Mail] n’est pas sélectionné, appuyez sur [E-Mail]. MEMO Vous pouvez quitter le mode objet d’émission sélectionné en appuyant de nouveau sur le même bouton. 3. Appuyez sur [Entrer l’adresse manuel.] ([ADRESSE I/P MANUEL.]). L’écran [Entrer adresse émission] apparaît. MEMO Si vous sélectionnez de nouveau [E-Mail] après avoir utilisé la fonction Numérisation vers e-mail sans quitter le mode numérisation, le nom de l’entrée et l’adresse e-mail que vous avez saisis sont affichés. 4. Assurez-vous que [Nom de l’entrée] est bien sélectionné. Lorsque [Nom de l’entrée] n’est pas sélectionné, appuyez sur [Nom de l’entrée]. Référence Référence Référence 2-3 Enregistrement d’emplacements de stockage (Disque dur) (suite) 20 Chapitre 2 : Avant d’utiliser les fonctions de numérisation 5. Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. 6. Saisissez le nom de l’entrée, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. Le nom de l’entrée saisi apparaît à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. MEMO • Le nom de l’entrée ne doit pas comporter plus de 24 caractères alphanumériques. • Saisissez un nombre au pavé numérique du tableau de commande. • Pour des informations sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section “Saisie de texte” à la page 16. 7. Appuyez sur [Adresse e-mail]. [Adresse e-mail] est mise en surbrillance. 8. Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. 9. Saisissez l’adresse e-mail, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. L’adresse e-mail saisie apparaît à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. MEMO • Saisissez l’adresse e-mail (54 caractères alphanumériques). Vous ne pouvez utiliser que les symboles suivants : @, - (trait d’union), _(trait de soulignement), (espace) • Saisissez un nombre au pavé numérique du tableau de commande. • Pour des informations sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section “Saisie de texte” à la page 16. 10.Vérifiez les éléments saisis, puis appuyez sur [ENTREE]. Les éléments définis sont enregistrés. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] (E-Mail). Le nom de l’entrée saisi apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. MEMO Si vous ne saisissez aucun nom d’entrée lors de l’enregistrement, l’adresse e-mail tient lieu de nom d’entrée. ●Révision et suppression de l’adresse e-mail. Utilisez l’utilitaire Web pour le copieur ou le mode responsable afin de réviser et de supprimer une adresse e-mail enregistrée. “Modification/Suppression de la destination” à la page 49. Pour de plus amples informations sur l’utilitaire Web pour le copieur, consultez le manuel d’utilisation du copieur. 2-3 Enregistrement d’emplacements de stockage (Disque dur) Vous pouvez auparavant enregistrer des emplacements de stockage pour Numérisation vers disque dur. L’emplacement de stockage utilisé avec Numérisation vers disque dur est une boîte sur le disque dur du contrôleur d’impression. Vous pouvez enregistrer des numéros de boîte avec le tableau de commande ou l’utilitaire Web pour le copieur. Cette section explique comment entrer des numéros de boîte depuis le tableau de commande. MEMO Pour des informations sur l’utilitaire Web pour le copieur, consultez le manuel d’utilisation du copieur. Vous pouvez sélectionner des numéros de boîte compris entre 0000 et 9999. Référence 2-3 Enregistrement d’emplacements de stockage (Disque dur) (suite) 21 Chapitre 2 : Avant d’utiliser les fonctions de numérisation Il est recommandé d’attribuer un numéro de boîte (de 0001 à 9999) aux utilisateurs et de leur communiquer ces numéros à l'avance. ●Enregistrement d’un numéro de boîte 1. Appuyez sur [SCANNER] sur le tableau de commande. L’écran [Sélect. objet émission] apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. 2. Appuyez sur [Disque dur]. L'écran [Sélect. objet émission] (Disque dur) s'affiche. Si des emplacements de stockage sur le disque dur sont déjà enregistrés, leur nom d’entrée apparaît. MEMO Vous pouvez quitter le mode objet d’émission sélectionné en appuyant de nouveau sur le même bouton. 3. Appuyez sur [Entrer l’adresse manuel.] ([ADRESSE I/P MANUEL.]). L’écran [Entrer numéro de boîte disque dur] apparaît. MEMO Si vous sélectionnez de nouveau [Disque dur] après avoir utilisé la fonction Numérisation vers disque dur sans quitter le mode numérisation, le nom de l’entrée et le numéro de boîte que vous avez saisis sont affichés. 4. Assurez-vous que [Nom de l’entrée] est bien sélectionné. Lorsque [Nom de l’entrée] n’est pas sélectionné, appuyez sur [Nom de l’entrée]. 5. Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. 6. Saisissez le nom de l’entrée, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Entrer numéro de boîte disque dur]. Le nom de l’entrée saisi apparaît à l’écran [Entrer numéro de boîte disque dur]. MEMO • Le nom de l’entrée ne doit pas comporter plus de 24 caractères alphanumériques. • Saisissez des nombres au pavé numérique du tableau de commande. • Pour des informations sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section “Saisie de texte” à la page 16. 7. Appuyez sur [Numéro de boîte]. [Numéro de boîte] est mis en surbrillance. 8. Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. 9. Saisissez le numéro de boîte au PAVE NUMERIQUE du tableau de commande, puis appuyez sur [OK] dans l’écran à cristaux liquides. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Entrer numéro de boîte disque dur]. Le numéro de boîte saisi apparaît à l’écran [Entrer numéro de boîte disque dur]. MEMO • Entrez 4 chiffres du numéro de boîte dans l’espace correspondant au numéro de boîte. Si vous entrez « 1 », le numéro de boîte est "0001". • Lorsque vous entrez des nombres, ces nombres se déplacent vers la gauche un par un. 10.Confirmez le réglage, puis appuyez sur [ENTREE]. Les éléments définis sont enregistrés. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] (Disque dur). Le nom de l’entrée saisi apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. 2-4 Enregistrement de destinations (FTP) (suite) 22 Chapitre 2 : Avant d’utiliser les fonctions de numérisation MEMO Si vous ne saisissez aucun nom d’entrée lors de l’enregistrement, le numéro de boîte tient lieu de nom d’entrée. ●Révision et suppression du numéro de boîte Utilisez l’utilitaire Web pour le copieur ou le mode responsable afin de réviser et de supprimer un numéro de boîte enregistré. “Modification/Suppression de la destination” à la page 49. Pour de plus amples informations sur l’utilitaire Web pour le copieur, consultez le manuel d’utilisation du copieur. 2-4 Enregistrement de destinations (FTP) Vous pouvez auparavant enregistrer des destinations pour Numérisation vers FTP. La destination utilisée avec Numérisation vers FTP est le serveur FTP. Vous pouvez enregistrer le serveur FTP avec le tableau de commande ou l’utilitaire Web pour le copieur. Cette section explique comment enregistrer un serveur FTP depuis le tableau de commande. MEMO Pour des informations sur l’utilitaire Web pour le copieur, consultez le manuel d’utilisation du copieur. ●Enregistrement d’un serveur FTP 1. Appuyez sur le la touche [SCANNER] dans le tableau de commande. L’écran [Sélect. objet émission] apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. 2. Appuyez sur [FTP]. L'écran [Sélect. objet émission] (FTP) s'affiche. Si la destination (FTP) est déjà enregistrée, le nom de profil s'affiche. MEMO Vous pouvez quitter le mode objet d’émission sélectionné en appuyant de nouveau sur le même bouton. 3. Appuyez sur [Entrer l’adresse manuel.] ([ADRESSE I/P MANUEL.]). L’écran [Entrer adresse émission] apparaît. MEMO Si vous sélectionnez de nouveau [FTP] après avoir utilisé la fonction Numérisation vers FTP sans quitter le mode numérisation, les lettres que vous avez saisies sont affichées. 4. Assurez-vous que [Nom de profil] est bien sélectionné. Lorsque [Nom de profil] n’est pas sélectionné, appuyez sur [Nom de profil]. 5. Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. 6. Saisissez le nom de profil, puis appuyez sur [OK]. Le nom de profil est le nom qui apparaît à l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] (FTP). L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. Le nom de profil saisi apparaît à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. Référence 2-4 Enregistrement de destinations (FTP) (suite) 23 Chapitre 2 : Avant d’utiliser les fonctions de numérisation MEMO • Le nom de profil ne doit pas comporter plus de 10 caractères alphanumériques. • Saisissez des nombres au pavé numérique du tableau de commande. • Pour des informations sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section “Saisie de texte” à la page 16. 7. Appuyez sur [Adresse d’hôte]. [Adresse d’hôte] est mise en surbrillance. 8. Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. 9. Saisissez l’adresse d’hôte, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’adresse d’hôte est l’adresse du serveur FTP. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. L’adresse d’hôte saisie apparaît à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. MEMO • L’adresse d’hôte ne doit pas comprendre plus de 63 caractères. • Saisissez un nombre au pavé numérique du tableau de commande. • Pour des informations sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section “Saisie de texte” à la page 16. 10.Appuyez sur [Chemin d’accès aux fichiers]. [Chemin d’accès aux fichiers] est mis en surbrillance. 11.Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. 12.Saisissez le chemin d’accès aux fichiers, puis appuyez sur [OK]. Le chemin d’accès aux fichiers est le chemin d’accès au répertoire figurant sur le serveur FTP. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. Le chemin d’accès aux fichiers saisi apparaît à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. MEMO • Le chemin d’accès aux fichiers ne doit pas comprendre plus de 127 caractères. • Saisissez des nombres au pavé numérique du tableau de commande. • Pour des informations sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section “Saisie de texte” à la page 16. 13.Appuyez sur [Connexion]. [Connexion] est mise en surbrillance. 14.Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. MEMO La touche [Anonyme] affichée n’apparaît pas sur un écran de clavier type. 15.Saisissez l’ID de connexion ou appuyez sur [Anonyme] si le serveur FTP n’est pas configuré pour authentifier l'utilisateur, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’ID de connexion est l’ID dont a besoin l’utilisateur pour accéder au répertoire figurant sur le serveur FTP. Lorsque vous appuyez sur [Anonyme], le mot “Anonyme” apparaît en haut de l’écran à cristaux liquides. Appuyez sur [OK] pour retourner à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. L’ID de connexion saisi ou « Anonyme » apparaît à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. 2-4 Enregistrement de destinations (FTP) (suite) 24 Chapitre 2 : Avant d’utiliser les fonctions de numérisation MEMO • L’ID de connexion ne doit pas comprendre plus de 47 caractères. • Saisissez des nombres au pavé numérique du tableau de commande. • Pour des informations sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section “Saisie de texte” à la page 16. 16.Appuyez sur [Mot de passe]. [Mot de passe] est mis en surbrillance. 17.Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. 18.Saisissez le mot de passe, puis appuyez sur [OK]. Saisissez le mot de passe correspondant à l’ID de connexion. Appuyez sur [OK] pour retourner à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. Le mot de passe saisi apparaît en astérisques (*) à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. MEMO • Le mot de passe ne doit pas comprendre plus de 25 caractères. • Saisissez des nombres au pavé numérique du tableau de commande. • Pour des informations sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section “Saisie de texte” à la page 16. 19.Appuyez sur [NUMERO DE PORT], le cas échéant. L’écran [Entrer numéro de port] apparaît. “21” est le numéro de port par défaut. IMPORTANT Une modification incorrecte du numéro de port peut créer des embouteillages sur le réseau. Ne changez pas le numéro de port sans consulter l’administrateur réseau. MEMO • Vous pouvez définir le numéro de port sur 65565. • Changez-le uniquement si cela s’avère nécessaire. 20.Saisissez le NUMERO DE PORT à l’aide des touches numériques de l’écran à cristaux liquides, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. MEMO • Le [Numéro de port] peut comprendre jusqu’à cinq caractères. • Lorsque vous saisissez le premier chiffre, la valeur par défaut (“21 ») est effacée. • “21” et “00021” correspondent à la même valeur. • Lorsque vous appuyez sur [AUTO], la valeur par défaut est restaurée. 21.Appuyez sur [PARE-FEU], le cas échéant. 22.Pour utiliser le pare-feu lors de la transmission, activez-le, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. MEMO Veuillez contacter votre administrateur réseau pour savoir comment utiliser le [Pare-feu]. 23.Confirmez les réglages, puis appuyez sur [ENTREE]. Les éléments définis sont enregistrés. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] (FTP). Le nom de profil saisi apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. 2-4 Enregistrement de destinations (FTP) (suite) 25 Chapitre 2 : Avant d’utiliser les fonctions de numérisation MEMO L’[ENTREE] devient effective lorsque vous avez appuyé sur toutes les touches ([Nom de profil], [Adresse d’hôte], [Chemin d’accès aux fichiers], [Connexion] et [Mot de passe]). ●Révision et suppression d’un serveur FTP Utilisez l’utilitaire Web pour le copieur ou le mode responsable afin de réviser et de supprimer un serveur FTP enregistré. “Modification/Suppression Référence de la destination” à la page 49. 26 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation 3-1 Activation du mode numérisation.............................................. 27 3-2 Sélection de la destination .........................................................27 3-3 Positionnement du document d’origine....................................35 3-4 Définition des fonctions du scanner .........................................35 3-5 Lancement de la numérisation................................................... 42 3-6 Vérification de l’état et des réglages du scanner .....................42 27 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation 3-1 Activation du mode numérisation Pour numériser des documents, appuyez sur [SCANNER] sur le tableau de commande du copieur. Vous ne pouvez pas activer le mode numérisation si : • Un message d’erreur apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. MEMO Pour des informations sur les messages d’erreur, veuillez consulter le manuel d’utilisation du copieur. 3-2 Sélection de la destination Lorsque vous appuyez sur [SCANNER], la numérisation est activée et l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] apparaît. L’écran [Sélect. objet émission] permet de sélectionner les touches [E-Mail], [Disque dur], [FTP] ou [FILE D’ATTENTE] et de définir les options correspondantes. MEMO Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs destinations. Dans ce cas, sélectionnez la destination suivante après avoir paramétré les options de la destination déjà sélectionnée. Appuyez sur [SCANNER] pour conserver et modifier les paramètres de la destination déjà sélectionnée. • E-Mail : “Sélection de la destination (E-Mail)” à la page 27. • Disque dur : “Sélection de l’emplacement de stockage (Disque dur)” à la page 31. • FTP : “Sélection de la destination (FTP)” à la page 33. • FILE D’ATTENTE : “Sélection de la destination (FILE D'ATTENTE)” à la page 35. Une fois l’opération de numérisation terminée, appuyez sur la touche [COPIEUR] du tableau de commande pour activer le mode copie. ●Sélection de la destination (E-Mail) [E-Mail] est sélectionné lorsque l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] apparaît après que vous ayez sélectionné la touche [SCANNER] du tableau de commande. Lorsque vous sélectionnez [E-Mail] (Numérisation vers e-mail), vous pouvez définir le titre et l’adresse e-mail, puis transmettre les données numérisées sous forme de fichier joint. MEMO Si la taille des données numérisées excède une limite prédéfinie, l’URL menant à l’emplacement des données numérisées est envoyée par e-mail. Pour des informations sur les restrictions appliquées à la taille des fichiers joints, reportez-vous au manuel d'utilisation du contrôleur d'impression. Vous pouvez également sélectionner d’autres destinations pour [HDD], [FTP] et/ou [FILE D’ATTENTE] lors d’une numérisation. Vous pouvez sélectionner les destinations (adresse e-mail) en procédant comme suit : • Sélectionnez une destination parmi celles déjà enregistrées Page 28 • Sélectionnez une destination parmi celles déjà enregistrées grâce à la fonction de recherche Page 28 • Définissez la destination en la saisissant manuellement Page 29 Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence 3-2 Sélection de la destination (suite) 28 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation Pour des informations sur le titre, reportez-vous à la section “Définition du titre” à la page 30. MEMO Les adresses comprennent 512 caractères, "," et "(espace)" compris. Sélection parmi des destinations déjà enregistrées ATTENTION Si vous avez sélectionné l’autre objet d’émission ou l’autre destination, ignorez la procédure 1 afin de conserver et de modifier les réglages déjà effectués. 1. Appuyez sur la touche [SCANNER] du tableau de commande. L’écran [Sélect. objet émission] apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. 2. Assurez-vous que [E-Mail] est bien sélectionné. Si [E-Mail] n’est pas sélectionné, appuyez sur [E-Mail]. MEMO Vous pouvez quitter le mode objet d’émission sélectionné en appuyant de nouveau sur le même bouton. 3. Sélectionnez le nom de l’entrée (adresse e-mail) dans la liste. Sélectionnez le nom de l’entrée (adresse e-mail) dans la liste des adresses enregistrées sur l’écran à cristaux liquides. Les adresses comprennent 512 caractères maximum. MEMO Pour sélectionner plusieurs adresses e-mail, reportez-vous à la section “Définitions de plusieurs destinations” à la page 31. 4. Définissez le titre à votre convenance. “Définition du titre” à la page 30. 5. Positionnez le document d’origine. “Positionnement du document d’origine” à la page 35. Sélection de destinations déjà enregistrées grâce à la fonction de recherche ATTENTION Si vous avez sélectionné l’autre objet d’émission ou l’autre destination, ignorez la procédure 1 afin de conserver et de modifier les réglages déjà effectués. 1. Appuyez sur la touche [SCANNER] du tableau de commande. L’écran [Sélect. objet émission] apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. 2. Assurez-vous que [E-Mail] est bien sélectionné. Si [E-Mail] n’est pas sélectionné, appuyez sur [E-Mail]. MEMO Vous pouvez quitter le mode objet d’émission sélectionné en appuyant de nouveau sur le même bouton. 3. Appuyez sur [RECHERCHER]. L’écran [Rechercher un objet d’émission] apparaît. 4. Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. Référence Référence 3-2 Sélection de la destination (suite) 29 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation 5. Saisissez la première lettre du nom d’entrée à rechercher. L’écran [Résultats de la recherche] apparaît. Le nom d’entrée correspondant à la condition apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. MEMO • Saisissez des nombres au pavé numérique du tableau de commande. • Pour des informations sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section “Saisie de texte” à la page 16. 6. Sélectionnez le nom de l’entrée dans la liste. Sélectionnez le nom de l’entrée dans la liste des résultats de la recherche sur l’écran à cristaux liquides. Les adresses comprennent 512 caractères maximum. MEMO • Pour sélectionner plusieurs adresses e-mail, reportez-vous à la section “Définitions de plusieurs destinations” à la page 31. • Vous pouvez alors appuyer sur la touche [TOUT CHOIX] pour afficher tous les noms d’entrée enregistrés comme précédemment. 7. Définissez le titre à votre convenance. “Définition du titre” à la page 30. 8. Positionnez le document d’origine. “Positionnement du document d’origine” à la page 35. Définition de la destination par saisie manuelle ATTENTION Si vous avez sélectionné l’autre objet d’émission ou l’autre destination, ignorez la procédure 1 afin de conserver et de modifier les réglages déjà effectués. 1. Appuyez sur la touche [SCANNER] du tableau de commande. L’écran [Sélect. objet émission] apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. 2. Assurez-vous que [E-Mail] est bien sélectionné. Si [E-Mail] n’est pas sélectionné, appuyez sur [E-Mail]. MEMO Vous pouvez quitter le mode objet d’émission sélectionné en appuyant de nouveau sur le même bouton. 3. Appuyez sur [Entrer l’adresse manuel.] ([ADRESSE I/P MANUEL.]). L’écran [Entrer adresse émission] apparaît. MEMO Si vous sélectionnez de nouveau [E-Mail] après avoir utilisé la fonction Numérisation vers e-mail sans quitter le mode numérisation, le nom de l’entrée et l’adresse e-mail que vous avez saisis sont affichés. 4. Assurez-vous que [Nom de l’entrée] est bien sélectionné. Lorsque [Nom de l’entrée] n’est pas sélectionné, appuyez sur [Nom de l’entrée]. 5. Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. 6. Saisissez le nom de l’entrée, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. Le nom de l’entrée saisi apparaît à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. Référence Référence 3-2 Sélection de la destination (suite) 30 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation MEMO • Le nom de l’entrée ne doit pas comporter plus de 24 caractères alphanumériques. • Saisissez des nombres au pavé numérique du tableau de commande. • Pour des informations sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section “Saisie de texte” à la page 16. 7. Appuyez sur [Adresse e-mail]. [Adresse e-mail] est mise en surbrillance. 8. Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. 9. Saisissez l’adresse e-mail, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. L’adresse e-mail saisie apparaît à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. MEMO • Saisissez l’adresse e-mail (54 caractères alphanumériques). Vous ne pouvez utiliser que les symboles suivants : @, - (trait d’union), _(trait de soulignement), (espace) • Saisissez des nombres au pavé numérique du tableau de commande. • Pour des informations sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section “Saisie de texte” à la page 16. • Pour sélectionner plusieurs adresses e-mail, reportez-vous à la section “Définitions de plusieurs destinations” à la page 31. • Si vous appuyez sur [ENTREE] à ce stade, vous pouvez enregistrer les éléments saisis et l’affichage retourne à l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] dans lequel le nom d’entrée que vous avez saisi est sélectionné. 10.Définissez le titre à votre convenance. “Définition du titre” à la page 30. 11.Positionnez le document d’origine. “Positionnement du document d’origine” à la page 35. ATTENTION Une adresse e-mail saisie manuellement n’est pas enregistrée lorsque vous appuyez sur [OK]. Une adresse email souvent utilisée doit être enregistrée lorsque vous appuyez sur [ENTREE]. “Enregistrement de destinations (E-Mail)” à la page 19. Définition du titre Le titre de l’e-mail est “Le nom de fichier a été numérisé”. (Par défaut). Toutefois, lorsque vous sélectionnez de nouveau [EMail] après avoir utilisé Numérisation vers e-mail sans avoir quitté le mode numérisation, le titre saisi précédemment n’est pas effacé. Modifiez le titre en procédant comme suit : 1. Appuyez sur [TITRE] à l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] (E-Mail) ou [Entrer adresse émission]. L’écran [Entrée titre] apparaît. 2. Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. 3. Saisissez le titre de l’adresse e-mail, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] ou [Entrer adresse émission]. Référence Référence Référence 3-2 Sélection de la destination (suite) 31 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation MEMO • Le titre ne doit pas comporter plus de 45 caractères alphanumériques. • Saisissez des nombres au pavé numérique du tableau de commande. • Pour des informations sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section “Saisie de texte” à la page 16. Définitions de plusieurs destinations Vous pouvez définir plusieurs destinations avec la fonction Numérisation vers e-mail. MEMO Les adresses comprennent 512 caractères maximum. 1. Appuyez sur [OK] à l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] (E-Mail), [Entrer adresse émission] ou [Résultats de la recherche]. L'écran [Réglages de base du scanner] s'affiche. 2. Appuyez sur [ADRESSE]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Entrer adresse émission]. 3. Définition d’une autre adresse e-mail avec les procédures suivantes : • sélection dans la liste d’adresses enregistrées Page 28 • sélection dans la liste d’adresses enregistrées avec la fonction de recherche Page 28 • définition de l’adresse par saisie manuelle Page 29 ●Sélection de l’emplacement de stockage (Disque dur) Lorsque vous sélectionnez [Disque dur] (Numérisation vers disque dur), vous pouvez stocker les données numérisées en désignant le numéro de boîte du contrôleur d’impression grâce au PAVE NUMERIQUE du tableau de commande du copieur. Vous pouvez sélectionner la destination (numéro de boîte) en procédant comme suit : • Sélectionnez une destination parmi celles déjà enregistrées Page 31 • Sélectionnez une destination parmi celles déjà enregistrées avec la fonction de recherche Page 32 • Définissez la destination par saisie manuelle Page 32 ATTENTION Vous ne pouvez sélectionner qu'une seule destination (Numéro de boîte). Sélection de la destination parmi celles déjà enregistrées ATTENTION Si vous avez sélectionné l’autre objet d’émission ou l’autre destination, ignorez la procédure 1 afin de conserver et de modifier les réglages déjà effectués. 1. Appuyez sur la touche [SCANNER] du tableau de commande. L’écran [Sélect. objet émission] (E-Mail) apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. 2. Appuyez sur [Disque dur]. L'écran [Sélect. objet émission] (Disque dur) s'affiche. MEMO Vous pouvez quitter le mode objet d’émission sélectionné en appuyant de nouveau sur le même bouton. Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence 3-2 Sélection de la destination (suite) 32 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation 3. Sélectionnez le nom de l’entrée dans la liste. Sélectionnez le nom de l’entrée dans la liste des numéros de boîte enregistrés sur l’écran à cristaux liquides. 4. Positionnez le document d’origine. “Positionnement du document d’origine” à la page 35. Sélection d’une destination parmi celles déjà enregistrées avec la fonction de recherche ATTENTION Si vous avez sélectionné l’autre objet d’émission ou l’autre destination, ignorez la procédure 1 afin de conserver et de modifier les réglages déjà effectués. 1. Appuyez sur la touche [SCANNER] du tableau de commande. L’écran [Sélect. objet émission] (E-Mail) apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. 2. Appuyez sur [Disque dur]. L'écran [Sélect. objet émission] (Disque dur) s'affiche. MEMO Vous pouvez quitter le mode objet d’émission sélectionné en appuyant de nouveau sur le même bouton. 3. Appuyez sur [RECHERCHER]. L’écran [Rechercher un objet d’émission] apparaît. 4. Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. 5. Saisissez la première lettre du nom d’entrée à rechercher. L’écran [Résultats de la recherche] apparaît. Le nom d’entrée correspondant à la condition apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. MEMO • Saisissez des nombres au pavé numérique du tableau de commande. • Pour des informations sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section “Saisie de texte” à la page 16. 6. Sélectionnez le nom de l’entrée dans la liste. Sélectionnez le nom de l’entrée dans la liste des résultats de la recherche sur l’écran à cristaux liquides. MEMO Vous pouvez alors appuyer sur la touche [TOUT CHOIX] pour afficher tous les noms d’entrée enregistrés comme précédemment. 7. Positionnez le document d’origine. “Positionnement du document d’origine” à la page 35. Définition de la destination par saisie manuelle 1. Suivez la même procédure (étape 1 à 9) de la section “Enregistrement d’emplacements de stockage (Disque dur)” à la page 20. ATTENTION Si vous avez sélectionné l’autre objet d’émission ou l’autre destination, ignorez la procédure 1 afin de conserver et de modifier les réglages déjà effectués. 2. Confirmez les éléments saisis. MEMO Si vous appuyez sur [ENTREE] à ce stade, vous pouvez alors enregistrer les éléments saisis et l’affichage retourne à l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] dans lequel le nom d’entrée que vous avez saisi est sélectionné. Référence Référence 3-2 Sélection de la destination (suite) 33 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation 3. Positionnez le document d’origine. “Positionnement du document d’origine” à la page 35. ●Sélection de la destination (FTP) Lorsque vous sélectionnez [FTP] (Numérisation vers FTP), vous pouvez télécharger les données numérisées sur un serveur FTP. Vous pouvez sélectionner les destinations (serveur FTP) en procédant comme suit : • Sélectionnez une destination parmi celles déjà enregistrées Page 33 • Sélectionnez des destinations parmi celles déjà enregistrées grâce à la fonction de recherche Page 33 • Définissez la destination par saisie manuelle Page 34 ATTENTION Vous ne pouvez sélectionner qu'une seule destination (serveur FTP). Pour des informations sur le réglage d’un numéro de port, reportez-vous à la section “Enregistrement d’un serveur FTP” à la page 22. Pour des informations sur le pare-feu, reportez-vous à la section “Enregistrement d’un serveur FTP” à la page 22. Sélection parmi des destinations déjà enregistrées ATTENTION Si vous avez sélectionné l’autre objet d’émission ou l’autre destination, ignorez la procédure 1 afin de conserver et de modifier les réglages déjà effectués. 1. Appuyez sur la touche [SCANNER] du tableau de commande. L’écran [Sélect. objet émission] apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. 2. Appuyez sur [FTP]. L'écran [Sélect. objet émission] (FTP) s'affiche. MEMO Vous pouvez quitter le mode objet d’émission sélectionné en appuyant de nouveau sur le même bouton. 3. Sélectionnez le nom de profil dans la liste figurant sur l'écran à cristaux liquides. Sélectionnez le nom de profil dans la liste des noms de profil enregistrés sur l’écran à cristaux liquides. 4. Selon vos besoins, définissez le numéro de port. “Enregistrement d’un serveur FTP” à la page 22. 5. Positionnez le document d’origine. “Positionnement du document d’origine” à la page 35. Sélection de destinations parmi celles déjà enregistrées grâce à la fonction de recherche ATTENTION Si vous avez sélectionné l’autre objet d’émission ou l’autre destination, ignorez la procédure 1 afin de conserver et de modifier les réglages déjà effectués. Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence 3-2 Sélection de la destination (suite) 34 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation 1. Appuyez sur la touche [SCANNER] du tableau de commande. L’écran [Sélect. objet émission] apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. 2. Appuyez sur [FTP]. L'écran [Sélect. objet émission] (FTP) s'affiche. MEMO Vous pouvez quitter le mode objet d’émission sélectionné en appuyant de nouveau sur le même bouton. 3. Appuyez sur [RECHERCHER]. L’écran [Rechercher un objet d’émission] apparaît. 4. Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. 5. Saisissez la première lettre du nom de profil à rechercher. L’écran [Résultats de la recherche] apparaît. Le nom de profil correspondant à la condition apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. MEMO • Saisissez des nombres au pavé numérique du tableau de commande. • Pour des informations sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section “Saisie de texte” à la page 16. 6. Sélectionnez le nom de profil dans la liste figurant sur l'écran à cristaux liquides. Sélectionnez le nom de profil dans la liste des noms de profil enregistrés sur l’écran à cristaux liquides. MEMO Vous pouvez alors appuyer sur la touche [TOUT CHOIX] pour afficher tous les noms de profil enregistrés comme précédemment. 7. Selon vos besoins, définissez le numéro de port. “Enregistrement d’un serveur FTP” à la page 22. 8. Positionnez le document d’origine. “Positionnement du document d’origine” à la page 35. Définition de la destination par saisie manuelle 1. Suivez la même procédure (étape 1 à 18) de la section “Enregistrement de destinations (FTP)” à la page 22. ATTENTION Si vous avez sélectionné l’autre objet d’émission ou l’autre destination, ignorez la procédure 1 afin de conserver et de modifier les réglages déjà effectués. 2. Confirmez les éléments saisis. MEMO Si vous appuyez sur [ENTREE] à ce stade, vous pouvez alors enregistrer les éléments saisis et l’affichage retourne à l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] dans lequel le nom de profil que vous avez saisi est sélectionné. Référence Référence 3-3 Positionnement du document d’origine (suite) 35 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation 3. Selon vos besoins, définissez le numéro de port. “Enregistrement d’un serveur FTP” à la page 22. 4. Positionnez le document d’origine. “Positionnement du document d’origine” à la page 35. ATTENTION Une adresse e-mail saisie manuellement n’est pas enregistrée lorsque vous appuyez sur [OK]. Une adresse email souvent utilisée doit être enregistrée lorsque vous appuyez sur [ENTREE]. “Enregistrement de destinations (FTP)” à la page 22. ●Sélection de la destination (FILE D'ATTENTE) Lorsque vous sélectionnez [FILE D’ATTENTE] (Numérisation vers file d’attente), vous pouvez stocker les données numérisées sous forme de données de travaux d’impression dans le contrôleur d’impression. 1. Appuyez sur la touche [SCANNER] du tableau de commande. L’écran [Sélect. objet émission] apparaît à l’écran à cristaux liquides. 2. Appuyez sur [FILE D’ATTENTE]. MEMO Vous pouvez quitter le mode objet d’émission sélectionné en appuyant de nouveau sur le même bouton. 3-3 Positionnement du document d’origine Après avoir procédé aux réglages dans l’écran [Sélect. objet émission], placez le document d’origine sur le chargeur RADF ou la vitre d’exposition du copieur. Direction des originaux La direction dans laquelle les applications liront les images varie selon le sens dans lequel vous placez les originaux. MEMO Les formats de papier admis pour la numérisation et le mode de chargement des originaux sont identiques à ceux du mode Copie. Pour plus d'informations, consultez le manuel d’utilisation du copieur. Å @Å@ 3-4 Définition des fonctions du scanner Lorsque vous appuyez sur [OK] après avoir placé le document d’origine sur le chargeur RADF ou la vitre d’exposition du copieur, l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner] apparaît. Référence Référence Référence 3-4 Définition des fonctions du scanner (suite) 36 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation MEMO Appuyez sur [Adresse] dans l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner] pour retourner à l’écran [Sélect. objet émission]. L’écran [Réglages de base du scanner] permet de régler divers paramètres de numérisation. • NOM DE FICHIER Page 36 • MODE COULEUR Page 37 • FORMAT DE FICHIER Page 37 • MODE NUMERISATION Page 37 • FORMAT NUMERIS. Page 37 • QUALITE Page 38 • AGR./RED. Page 38 • DENSITÉ NUMÉR. Page 39 • RÉGLAGE COULEUR Page 39 • AUTRES Page 40 • Pleine page (FONCTION) Page 41 • Direction de l’original (ORIGINAUX SPECIAUX (FONCTION)) Page 41 • Réglages spéciaux (ORIGINAUX SPECIAUX (FONCTION)) Page 41 ●NOM DE FICHIER Le nom de fichier est automatiquement saisi lors de la numérisation. Vous pouvez toutefois définir/modifier le nom de fichier dans l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner]. ATTENTION Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser les caractères suivants dans les noms de fichier. Ces caractères peuvent endommager gravement le réseau ou le système de fichiers. Caractères inutilisables : \ / : ;, * ? '' < > | 1. Appuyez sur [OK] dans l’écran [Sélect. objet émission]. L'écran [Réglages de base du scanner] s'affiche. 2. Appuyez sur [NOM DE FICHIER]. L’écran [Entrer le nom du fichier] apparaît. MEMO Vous pouvez quitter le mode objet d’émission sélectionné en appuyant de nouveau sur le même bouton. 3. Appuyez sur [Indication touche entrée]. L’écran [Entrée au clavier] apparaît. Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence Référence 3-4 Définition des fonctions du scanner (suite) 37 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation 4. Saisissez le nom de fichier, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner]. MEMO • Le nom de fichier ne doit pas comporter plus de 26 caractères alphanumériques. • Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser de symboles autres que "-", "_", ".", “(espace)”. • Saisissez des nombres au pavé numérique du tableau de commande. • Pour des informations sur la saisie de texte, reportez-vous à la section “Saisie de texte” à la page 16. 5. Vérifiez les éléments saisis, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner]. ●MODE COULEUR Vous pouvez sélectionner le mode Couleur [ÉCHELLE DE GRIS], [NOIR] ou [COULEUR]). MEMO JPEG ne prend pas en charge le [NOIR]. ●FORMAT DE FICHIER Vous pouvez choisir le format de fichier [JPEG], [TIFF] ou [PDF]. Lorsque vous numérisez plusieurs documents à la fois, vous ne pouvez pas changer le format des fichiers un par un. MEMO JPEG ne prend pas en charge le [NOIR]. ●MODE NUMERISATION Cette fonction permet de déterminer si le document original est en mode recto-verso ou recto seul. Si le chargeur RADF n'est pas installé, il est impossible de sélectionner [Recto verso]. ●FORMAT NUMERIS. Utilisez cette fonction pour définir le format du papier pour la numérisation. Vous pouvez sélectionner [AUTO] ou [REGLAGE FORMAT]. La valeur par défaut est [AUTO]. Lorsque [AUTO] est sélectionné, le format du document d’origine à lire est le même que le format par défaut en mode copie. Pour procéder au [REGLAGE FORMAT] : 1. Appuyez sur [REGLAGE FORMAT]. Un écran contextuel apparaît. 2. Sélectionnez le format de papier, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner]. Par exemple, si un original A3 est chargé et que vous sélectionnez B5, la numérisation s'effectue dans une zone en format B5. Formats de papier disponibles : • Etats-Unis A3 / A4R / A4 / A5R / A5 / B4 / B5R / B5 / B6R / 11x17 / 8,5x14 / 8,5x11R / 8,5x11 / 5,5x8,5R / 5,5x8,5 / PAGE ENTIERE • Autres A3 / A4R / A4 / A5R / A5 / A6R / B4 / B5R / B5 / B6R / 11x17 / 8,5x14 / 8,5x11R / 8,5x11 / 5,5x8,5R / 5,5x8,5 / F4 / PLEINE PAGE 3-4 Définition des fonctions du scanner (suite) 38 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation ●QUALITE Cette fonction permet de sélectionner la résolution. Vous pouvez sélectionner [600 ppp], [400 ppp], [300 ppp] ou [200 ppp]. MEMO Si vous devez changer la valeur [QUALITE] par défaut, contactez votre service après-vente. MEMO Le tableau suivant indique le nombre d’originaux pouvant être numérisés. (Format de fichier ; JPEG, TIFF, PDF) MEMO La taille des données et le nombre d'originaux pouvant être lus dépendent des données numérisées. Notez que les chiffres indiqués dans le tableau ne sont fournis qu'à titre indicatif. ●AGR./RED. Appuyez sur ce bouton pour modifier le taux d'agrandissement ou de réduction du document numérisé. Vous pouvez sélectionner [ZOOM] ou [1:1]. La valeur par défaut est [1:1]. Pour effectuer un [ZOOM] ; taux de restitution définis : 1. Appuyez sur [ZOOM]. Un écran contextuel apparaît. 2. Sélectionnez les taux de restitution définis dans les groupes [RE], puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner]. MEMO La valeur des taux de restitution définis est identique à la celle de la valeur par défaut en mode copie. Pour effectuer un [ZOOM] ; taux de restitution optionnels : 1. Appuyez sur [ZOOM]. Un écran contextuel apparaît. 2. Appuyez sur , ou . Vous pouvez sélectionner pour zoomer avec le même taux. Vous pouvez sélectionner pour définir le zoom avec un taux de direction verticale. Vous pouvez sélectionner pour définir le zoom avec un taux de direction horizontale. 3. Saisissez le taux, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner]. Qualité Taille des données pages possibles à lire 200 ppp 420KB environ 110 000 pages 300 ppp 810KB environ 58 000 pages 400 ppp 1200KB environ 37 000 pages 600 ppp 2300KB environ 20 000 pages 3-4 Définition des fonctions du scanner (suite) 39 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation MEMO Les taux de restitution optionnels changent selon la résolution de lecture. Pour 200 ppp : 75-400 % Pour 300 ppp : 75-400 % Pour 400 ppp : 38-400 % Pour 600 ppp : 25-400 % ●DENSITÉ NUMÉR. Une fois l'image lue, sa densité peut être modifiée (plus claire ou plus foncée). Lorsque vous numérisez une page de journal, de papier recyclé ou de tout autre original dont le fond n'est pas très blanc, vous pouvez augmenter ou diminuer la densité de l'image avec la fonction Réglage fond. 1. Appuyez sur [RÉGLAGE IMAGE]. L'écran Réglage image s'affiche. 2. Appuyez sur [DENSITÉ NUMÉR.]. L’écran Densité numérisation apparaît. 3. Appuyez sur la touche [-1] à [-4] pour diminuer la densité ; sur la touche [+1] à [+4] pour l'augmenter. MEMO • Pour revenir au réglage antérieur à la modification, appuyez sur [ANNULER]. • Pour revenir au réglage initial, appuyez sur [RAPPEL STANDARD]. 4. Pour régler la densité du fond, appuyez sur [RÉGLAGE FOND]. 5. Appuyez sur la touche [-1] à [-4] pour augmenter la densité ; sur la touche [+1] à [+4] pour la diminuer. MEMO • Pour revenir au réglage antérieur à la modification, appuyez sur [ANNULER]. 6. Appuyez sur [OK] pour revenir à l'écran Réglage image. MEMO • Pour revenir au réglage antérieur à la modification, appuyez sur [ANNULER]. • Pour revenir au réglage initial, appuyez sur [RAPPEL STANDARD]. 7. Appuyez sur [OK] pour revenir à l'écran Réglages de base du scanner. Si le réglage sélectionné de [DENSITÉ NUMÉR.] et de [FOND] n'est pas [STD], la touche [RÉGLAGE IMAGE] est inversée sur l'écran Réglages de base du scanner. ●RÉGLAGE COULEUR Le rouge, le vert et le bleu de l'image numérisée peuvent être réglés individuellement. 1. Appuyez sur [RÉGLAGE IMAGE]. L'écran Réglage image s'affiche. 2. Appuyez sur [RÉGLAGE COULEUR]. L'écran Réglage couleur s'affiche. 3. Appuyez sur une touche quelconque. 3-4 Définition des fonctions du scanner (suite) 40 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation 4. Appuyez sur la touche [-1] à [-4] pour diminuer la densité de la couleur ; sur la touche [+1] à [+4] pour l'augmenter. (par exemple, pour régler la couleur rouge) MEMO • Pour revenir au réglage antérieur à la modification, appuyez sur [ANNULER]. 5. Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran Réglage couleur réapparaît. MEMO • Pour revenir au réglage antérieur à la modification, appuyez sur [ANNULER]. • Pour revenir au réglage initial, appuyez sur [RAPPEL STANDARD]. 6. Appuyez sur [OK] pour revenir à l'écran Réglages de base du scanner. Si le réglage sélectionné de [RÉGLAGE COULEUR] n'est pas [STD], la touche [RÉGLAGE IMAGE] est inversée sur l'écran Réglages de base du scanner. MEMO • Pour revenir au réglage antérieur à la modification, appuyez sur [ANNULER]. • Pour revenir au réglage initial, appuyez sur [RAPPEL STANDARD]. ●AUTRES La netteté du profil de l'image ("PRÉCISION") et l'opposition entre les zones claires et foncées de l'image ("CONTRASTE") peuvent être modifiées. 1. Appuyez sur [RÉGLAGE IMAGE]. L'écran Réglage image s'affiche. 2. Appuyez sur [AUTRES]. L’écran Autres apparaît. 3. Appuyez sur [PRÉCISION] et réglez la netteté de l'image. 4. Appuyez sur la touche [-1] à [-4] pour adoucir le profil de l'image ; sur la touche [+1] à [+4] pour augmenter sa précision. MEMO Pour revenir au réglage antérieur à la modification, appuyez sur [ANNULER]. 5. Appuyez sur [OK]. L’écran Autres réapparaît. 6. Appuyez sur [CONTRASTE] et réglez le contraste de l'image. 7. Appuyez sur la touche [-1] à [-4] pour diminuer le contraste ; sur la touche [+1] à [+4] pour l'augmenter. MEMO Pour revenir au réglage antérieur à la modification, appuyez sur [ANNULER]. 8. Appuyez sur [OK]. L’écran Autres réapparaît. 3-4 Définition des fonctions du scanner (suite) 41 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation MEMO • Pour revenir au réglage antérieur à la modification, appuyez sur [ANNULER]. • Pour revenir au réglage initial, appuyez sur [RAPPEL STANDARD]. 9. Appuyez sur [OK] pour revenir à l'écran Réglages de base du scanner. Si le réglage sélectionné de la [PRÉCISION] et du [CONTRASTE] n'est pas [STD], la touche [RÉGLAGE IMAGE] est inversée sur l'écran Réglages de base du scanner. ●Pleine page Normalement, l'image numérisée est entourée d'une marge en haut, en bas, à gauche et à droite, où les données sont supprimées. Cette fonction permet de numériser le document jusqu'aux bords. Utilisez cette fonction pour numériser le document jusqu’aux bords. ●Direction de l’original Utilisez cette fonction pour choisir le sens de chargement des originaux. MEMO Il est possible que le format de fichier ne permette pas de définir la direction de l'original. PDF : Définissable JPEG : Non définissable TIFF : Non définissable 1. Appuyez sur [ORIGINAUX SPECIAUX]. Un écran contextuel apparaît. 2. Sélectionnez l’orientation du document à numériser, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner]. 3. Pour lire les données à l'écran, sélectionnez [RELIURE], puis [RELIURE DROITE&GAUCHE] ou [RELIURE EN HAUT] et appuyez sur [OK]. L’écran [Réglages de base du scanner] s'affiche. ●Type de document d’origine Utilisez cette fonction pour définir le type du document d’origine. 1. Appuyez sur [ORIGINAUX SPECIAUX]. Un écran contextuel apparaît. 2. Appuyez sur [REGLAGES SPECIAUX]. Un écran contextuel apparaît. 3. Lorsque vous numérisez plusieurs originaux de formats différents, appuyez sur [Formats différents]. Lorsque vous numérisez des originaux pliés en Z, appuyez sur [Originaux pliés en Z]. Si tous les originaux ou quelques-uns des originaux sont du même format, vérifiez que [Normal] est sélectionné. MEMO Le compagnon TWAIN ne peut pas traiter des originaux de formats différents. 4. Lorsque les originaux sont épais, appuyez sur [Epais]. Lorsque les originaux sont fins, appuyez sur [Fin]. Pour du papier normal, vérifiez que [Normal] est sélectionné. 3-5 Lancement de la numérisation (suite) 42 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation 5. Si le format de l'original n'est pas standard ou s'il s'agit d'un intercalaire avec index, sélectionnez le format [Non STD] ou [Intercalaire]. 6. Vérifiez les éléments sélectionnés, puis appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran mentionné dans la procédure 1. 7. Appuyez sur [OK]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner]. 3-5 Lancement de la numérisation Après avoir procédé aux réglages nécessaires dans l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner], appuyez sur [DEPART] sur le tableau de commande pour lancer la numérisation. Une fois la numérisation lancée, l’écran à cristaux liquides affiche de nouveau l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] ([Mode de numérisation de base]). Lorsque le tableau de commande du copieur se trouve en mode numérisation, aucun travail d'impression n'est envoyé et, par conséquent, aucune page n'est imprimée. Passez le tableau de commande en mode copie en appuyant sur la touche [COPIEUR] lorsque vous n’avez pas besoin d’utiliser les fonctions de numérisation. MEMO Si AUTO est activé, l’écran à cristaux liquides retourne automatiquement en mode copie après avoir défini le temps écoulé. 3-6 Vérification de l’état et des réglages du scanner ●Affichage du statut de fonctionnement Les messages suivants sont affichés afin d'indiquer le déroulement du processus de numérisation : NUMERISATION EN COURS DE LECTURE Un travail de numérisation est en cours de lecture. NUMERISATION EN COURS D'ENVOI Un travail de numérisation est envoyé au contrôleur d'impression. IMPRESSION DU TRAVAIL DE NUMERISATION EN ATTENTE Un travail de numérisation a été effectué, mais son impression est en attente, car un travail d'impression est en cours de traitement. NUMERISATION INTERROMPUE La lecture d'un travail de numérisation a été interrompue. INCIDENT PAPIER PENDANT LA NUMERISATION Un incident papier est survenu pendant la lecture d'un travail de numérisation. MEMO Lorsque le tableau de commande du copieur se trouve en mode numérisation, aucun travail d'impression n'est envoyé et, par conséquent, aucune page n'est imprimée. Passez le tableau de commande en mode copie en appuyant sur la touche [COPIEUR] lorsque vous n’avez pas besoin d’utiliser les fonctions de numérisation. Si AUTO est activé, l’écran à cristaux liquides retourne automatiquement en mode copie après avoir défini le temps écoulé. ●Vérification des paramètres de numérisation Vous pouvez vérifier les paramètres de numérisation afin d’afficher chaque réglage du scanner à l’écran à cristaux liquides. 3-6 Vérification de l’état et des réglages du scanner (suite) 43 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation des fonctions de numérisation Vous pouvez les vérifier lorsque l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner] est affiché en procédant comme suit : MEMO Lorsqu’un écran autre que l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner] est affiché, vous ne pouvez pas contrôler les réglages du scanner. 1. Appuyez sur la touche [CONTROLE] dans le tableau de commande. L’écran [MODE CONTROLE] apparaît. Cet écran présente les paramètres de numérisation actuels. [MODIFIER PARAMETRES] permet de modifier les paramètres actuels. ●Modifiez les paramètres actuels 1. Appuyez sur l’élément pour modifier les paramètres. L’élément sélectionné est modifié. 2. Appuyez sur [MODIFIER PARAMETRES]. Lorsque vous sélectionnez l’élément à la procédure 1 dont les réglages apparaissent dans l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner], l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner] apparaît. Si vous sélectionnez l’élément à la procédure 1 qui ne comporte aucun paramètre dans l'écran [Réglages de base du scanner], l’écran de réglage d’un élément apparaît. Par exemple, lorsque vous sélectionnez [Adresse e-mail], l’écran [Sélect. objet émission] apparaît et [E-Mail] est sélectionné. 3. Modifiez les réglages, puis appuyez sur [OK]. Lorsque vous sélectionnez l’élément à la procédure 1 dont les réglages apparaissent dans l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner], l’affichage retourne à l’écran [MODE CONTROLE]. Vous pouvez alors confirmer les réglages que vous avez modifiés à la procédure 2 dans cet écran. Si vous sélectionnez un élément lors de la procédure 1 qui ne comporte aucun paramètre dans l'écran [Réglages de base du scanner], l’affichage retourne à l’écran [Réglages de base du scanner]. Dans ce cas, procédez comme à l’accoutumée et numérisez le document. Vous pouvez également retourner à l’écran [MODE CONTROLE] en appuyant sur la touche [CONTROLE] du tableau de commande. MEMO Lorsque vous modifiez les autres paramètres un par un, suivez la même procédure (étapes 1 à 3). 4. Pour quitter l’écran [MODE CONTROLE], appuyez sur [QUITTER]. 44 Chapitre 4 : Importation des données numérisées 4-1 Récupération depuis un disque dur ..........................................45 4-2 Images numérisées vers FTP ou E-mail....................................46 4-3 Images numérisées vers FILE D’ATTENTE ...............................46 45 Chapitre 4 : Importation des données numérisées 4-1 Récupération depuis un disque dur Comment lire des données numérisées Utilisez l’utilitaire du copieur pour lire des données numérisées stockées sur le disque dur du contrôleur d’impression. Vous pouvez importer les données numérisées selon les méthodes suivantes : • Lire des données numérisées avec WebScan • Lire des données numérisées avec l’application Fiery Remote Scan • Lire des données numérisées avec le compagnon Fiery Remote Scan compatible TWAIN Dans ces utilitaires “Boîte aux lettres” signifie “(Numéro de) Boîte” lors de l’importation des données numérisées. MEMO Pour connaître les fonctions avancées de ces utilitaires, veuillez vous reporter au manuel d’utilisation du contrôleur d’impression. WebScan WebScan est l’un des “Fiery WebTools” qui permettent d’utiliser les fonctions de numérisation du contrôleur d'impression dans votre navigateur. Lancez WebScan et définissez le numéro de boîte dans la colonne “Zone Boîte aux lettres” qui contient les travaux de numérisation (données numérisées stockées). Sélectionnez un travail de numérisation dans la liste pour le lire sur votre ordinateur (enregistrement local). Application Fiery Remote Scan Fiery Remote Scan est une application qui permet d’utiliser les fonctions de numérisation à distance du contrôleur d’impression. Lancez l’application Fiery Remote Scan, connectez-vous au contrôleur d’impression et définissez le numéro de boîte dans la colonne “Boîte aux lettres”. Les travaux de numérisation (données numérisées stockées) sont répertoriés dans cette colonne. Sélectionnez un travail de numérisation dans la liste. Vous pouvez l’envoyer sous forme de fichier joint à un e-mail, le télécharger sur un serveur FTP et le lire sur votre ordinateur (enregistrement local). Fiery Remote Scan compatible Le Fiery Remote Scan est compatible TWAIN et vous pouvez donc l’utiliser depuis une application compatible TWAIN. Lancez une application compatible TWAIN, sélectionnez [Fichier] - [Lire] - [Fiery Remote Scan 5] (le nom de commande diffère selon les applications), connectez-vous au contrôleur d’impression à partir de la boîte de dialogue affichée et définissez le numéro de boîte dans la colonne “Boîte aux lettres” qui contient les travaux de numérisation (données numérisées stockées). Sélectionnez un travail de numérisation dans la liste, puis cliquez sur la touche [IMPORTER]. Vous pouvez le lire sur votre ordinateur (enregistrement local). ●Comment supprimer des données numérisées Les données numérisées stockées sur le disque dur sont automatiquement supprimées chaque jour ou chaque semaine selon le paramètre défini dans le contrôleur d’impression. MEMO Pour des informations sur la fonction de suppression automatique, consultez l’administrateur du contrôleur d’impression. Vous pouvez les supprimer manuellement en procédant comme suit : • Suppression des données numérisées avec WebScan • Suppression des données numérisées avec l’application Fiery Remote Scan • Suppression des données numérisées avec le Fiery Remote Scan compatible TWAIN • Suppression des données numérisées avec Command WorkStation Dans ces utilitaires “Boîte aux lettres” signifie “(Numéro de) Boîte” lors de la suppression des données numérisées. 4-2 Images numérisées vers FTP ou E-mail (suite) 46 Chapitre 4 : Importation des données numérisées MEMO Pour connaître les fonctions avancées de ces utilitaires, veuillez vous reporter au manuel d’utilisation du contrôleur d’impression. WebScan Application Fiery Remote Scan Fiery Remote Scan compatible Etablissez la liste des travaux de numérisation en utilisant les mêmes procédures que celles utilisées pour la lecture des travaux de numérisation (données numérisées stockées), sélectionnez un travail de numérisation à supprimer, puis cliquez sur la touche [SUPPRIMER]. Command WorkStation Command WorkStation est un utilitaire permettant de gérer les travaux. L’administrateur du contrôleur d’impression peut supprimer toutes les données numérisées stockées dans toutes les boîtes en même temps. 4-2 Images numérisées vers FTP ou E-mail Vous pouvez recevoir des données numérisées sous forme de fichier joint à un e-mail par l’intermédiaire d’une application de messagerie. Vous pouvez télécharger des données numérisées téléchargées sur un serveur FTP grâce à un client FTP. Pour connaître les fonctions plus avancées de ces applications, veuillez consulter les manuels d’utilisation de ces applications. 4-3 Images numérisées vers FILE D’ATTENTE ●Comment utiliser des données numérisées Vous pouvez modifier, imprimer et sauvegarder des données numérisées enregistrées sous forme de file d’attente du contrôleur d’impression depuis un ordinateur sur un réseau grâce à Command WorkStation. MEMO Pour des informations détaillées sur Command WorkStation, veuillez consulter le manuel d’utilisation du contrôleur d’impression. Original Numérisation vers e-mail Contrôleur d'impression Numérisation Copieur Serveur FTP Serveur de messagerie Numérisation vers FTP Internet 4-3 Images numérisées vers FILE D’ATTENTE (suite) 47 Chapitre 4 : Importation des données numérisées Command WorkStation Command WorkStation est un utilitaire permettant de gérer les travaux. Lancez Command WorkStation, connectez-vous au serveur, puis cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur une file d’attente enregistrée en tant que fichier PDF dans la liste [Travail actif] afin de d’éditer, d’imprimer ou de sauvegarder des travaux d’impression. MEMO Numérisation vers FILE D’ATTENTE stocke les données numérisées sous forme de fichier PDF (Portable Document Format). ●Comment supprimer des données numérisées Vous pouvez supprimer des données numérisées enregistrées sous forme de file d’attente du contrôleur d’impression depuis un ordinateur sur un réseau grâce à Command WorkStation. MEMO Pour des informations détaillées sur Command WorkStation, veuillez consulter le manuel d’utilisation du contrôleur d’impression. Command WorkStation Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur une file d’attente enregistrée en tant que fichier PDF dans la liste [Travail actif], puis sélectionnez [SUPPRIMER]. 48 Chapitre 5 : Mode responsable 5-1 Mode responsable....................................................................... 49 5-2 Modification/Suppression de la destination ............................. 49 49 Chapitre 5 : Mode responsable 5-1 Mode responsable L’administrateur peut utiliser le mode responsable pour modifier ou supprimer la destination déjà enregistrée dans ce mode. ●Passage en mode responsable 1. Appuyez sur la touche [COPIEUR] dans le tableau de commande. L’écran [Mode de copie de base] apparaît. 2. Appuyez sur la touche [AIDE] dans le tableau de commande. L’écran [MODE AIDE] apparaît. 3. Appuyez sur [MODE RESPONSABLE]. 4. Si un mot de passe a été défini, saisissez le mot de passe de responsable. Si aucun mot de passe n’a été défini, passez à l’étape 5. MEMO Pour plus d'informations sur les mots de passe, consultez le manuel d’utilisation du copieur. 5. Appuyez sur [OK]. L’écran [Mode responsable] qui apparaît permet de passer en mode responsable. 5-2 Modification/Suppression de la destination L’administrateur peut modifier ou supprimer la destination. MEMO Vous pouvez utiliser l’utilitaire Web pour le copieur afin de réviser et de supprimer un numéro de boîte enregistré. 1. Affichez l’écran [Mode responsable]. 2. Appuyez sur puis sur [18. Réglages émission numérisation]. L’écran [Réglages émission numérisation] apparaît. MEMO Lorsque vous appuyez sur , l’écran suivant/précédent apparaît. 3. Appuyez sur la destination pour la modifier ou la supprimer. 4. Appuyez sur [MODIFIER] ou [SUPPRIMER]. Lorsque vous appuyez sur [MODIFIER], vous pouvez modifier et enregistrer manuellement la destination en suivant les mêmes procédures que celles utilisées pour un enregistrement courant. Lorsque vous appuyez sur [SUPPRIMER], la destination sélectionnée est supprimée. 5. Appuyez sur [OK] pour fermer l’écran [Modifier/Supprimer adresse]. L’affichage retourne à l’écran [Mode responsable]. 50 Chapitre 6 : Dépannage 6-1 Impossible d’utiliser le scanner ................................................. 51 51 Chapitre 6 : Dépannage 6-1 Impossible d’utiliser le scanner ●Lorsque vous ne parvenez pas à vous connecter au scanner Lorsqu’un message d’erreur apparaît lorsque vous tentez d’accéder au scanner, effectuez les contrôles suivants : MEMO Consultez votre administrateur réseau pour tout problème ou question relatif à vos paramètres réseau. 1. Vérifiez si l’adresse IP du scanner a été correctement saisie. Si l’adresse IP n’est pas correcte, entrez l’adresse qui convient. Si l’adresse IP saisie est correcte, passez à l’étape 2. 2. A l’invite DOS, exécutez un test ping par l’intermédiaire de l’hôte de destination sur l’adresse IP du scanner. par exemple : C:\>ping 192.168.101.152 Si le test ping échoue, vérifiez si l’alimentation principale du copieur est en position marche et vérifiez également les connexions du câble réseau. Si le test ping réussit, passez à l’étape 3. 3. Vérifiez si le routeur IP est correctement défini. Si ce n’est pas le cas, définissez-le correctement. Si le routeur IP est correctement configuré, passez à l’étape 4. 4. Effectuez le routage jusqu’au scanner pour vérifier si le réseau fonctionne. Résolvez les défaillances rencontrées. En l’absence d’erreur et si la connexion au scanner ne peut toujours pas être établie, contactez votre service aprèsvente. ●Lorsque vous ne pouvez pas numériser Lorsque vous ne pouvez pas numériser, vérifiez si [3. Réglage de la fonction ECM] ([3. Réglage de la fonction ECK]) - [Allumer/Eteindre le scanner] est positionné sur [ECM Activé] ([EKC Activé]) en mode responsable. Pour des informations détaillées sur le [3. Réglage de la fonction ECM] ([3. Réglage de la fonction ECK]), veuillez consulter le manuel d’utilisation du copieur ou celui du contrôleur d’impression. 52 Annexe Annexe-1 Caractéristiques du produit .............................................53 53 Annexe Annexe-1 Caractéristiques du produit Pour connaître les caractéristiques du copieur et du contrôleur d’impression, veuillez vous reportez au manuel d’utilisation correspondant. ●Caractéristiques des fonctions de numérisation du produit • Protocole pris en charge TCP/IP • Résolution de numérisation 200 ppp, 300 ppp, 400 pppi, 600 ppp • Vitesse de numérisation 37 pages/minute (A4/8,5 x 11) • Plage de numérisation Identique au copieur • Fonction Numériser vers e-mail/Numériser vers disque dur/Numériser vers FTP/ Numériser vers FILE D’ATTENTE • Tau de restitution Change selon la résolution de lecture. Pour 200 ppp : 75 – 400 % Pour 300 ppp : 75 – 400 % Pour 400 ppp : 38 – 400 % Pour 600 ppp : 25 – 400 % • Formats de papier lisibles A3 / A4R / A4 / A5 / A5R / B4 / B5R / B5 / B6R / 8,5x11R / 8,5x11 / 5,5x8,5 / 5,5x8,5R / 8,5Rx14 / 11x17 / POSTC / PLEINE PAGE • Nombres de pages pouvant être stockées sur le disque dur Dépend de la résolution et du contenu du document (documents A4, format de fichier ; JPEG, TIFF, PDF) Pour 200 ppp : environ. 110 000 pages Pour 300 ppp : environ. 58 000 pages Pour 400 ppp : environ. 37 000 pages Pour 600 ppp : environ. 20 000 pages • Zone imprimable La zone imprimable diffère entre le recto et le verso d’une feuille de papier • Standard (non “Pleine page”) Recto : Sup. 3 mm / Faces 2 mm / Inf. 3 mm Verso : Sup. 4 mm / Faces 2 mm / Inf. 4 mm • Pleine page (format de papier standard uniquement) Recto : Sup. 0 mm / Faces 0 mm / Inf. 0 mm Verso : Sup. 0mm / Faces 0mm / Inf. 0mm • Fonctions spéciales Page par page, Formats différents, Original plié en Z, Pleine page 54 Index A Adresse d’hôte............................................ 10, 19 Adresse e-mail............................................... 8, 19 AGR./RED................................................... 16, 38 Application Fiery Remote Scan .......... 4, 45, 46 C Chemin d’accès aux fichiers..................... 10, 19 Command WorkStation........................ 4, 46, 47 Connexion ................................................... 11, 19 D Direction de l’original ......................................... 41 Disque dur ................... 7, 9, 19, 20, 27, 31, 45 E ECM (EKC) ......................................................... 51 Ecran à cristaux liquides........................... 12, 13 E-Mail .................................................... 19, 27, 46 E-mail .............................................................. 7, 19 F Fiery Remote Scan .............................................. 5 Fiery Remote Scan compatible................ 45, 46 Fiery S300 50C-KM ............................................. 4 Fiery WebTools .................................................... 5 FILE D’ATTENTE........................ 11, 27, 35, 46 Fonctions du scanner réseau............................. 4 FORMAT DE FICHIER.............................. 15, 37 Format de fichier .................................................. 8 FORMAT NUMERIS.................................. 16, 37 FTP............................ 7, 10, 19, 22, 27, 33, 46 I IMPRESSION DU TRAVAIL DE NUMERISATION EN ATTENTE................. 42 INCIDENT PAPIER PENDANT LA NUMERISATION........................................... 42 M MODE COULEUR...................................... 15, 37 MODE NUMERISATION........................... 16, 37 Mode responsable ............................................. 49 Modification de la destination........................... 49 Mot de passe .............................................. 11, 19 N NOM DE FICHIER ..................................... 15, 36 Nom de fichier....................................................... 8 Nom de profil ............................................... 10, 19 NUMERISATION EN COURS D'ENVOI ........ 42 NUMERISATION EN COURS DE LECTURE.... 42 NUMERISATION INTERROMPUE................. 42 Numérisation vers FILE D’ATTENTE ........ 7, 19 Numéro de boîte ......................................... 10, 19 Numéro de port ........................................... 11, 19 O ORIGINAUX SPECIAUX .................................. 16 P PAVE NUMERIQUE.......................................... 13 Pleine page .................................................. 16, 41 Q QUALITE...................................................... 16, 38 R REGLAGE FORMAT......................................... 37 S Serveur couleur Fiery S300 50C-KM................ 4 Suppression de la destination.......................... 49 T Titre ................................................................. 8, 30 Touche................................................................. 12 Touche [AIDE] .................................................... 12 Touche [ANNUL.]............................................... 13 Touche [ARRET]......................................... 12, 13 Touche [AUTO] .................................................. 13 Touche [CODE].................................................. 13 Touche [COMPTEUR]....................................... 13 Touche [CONTROLE] ....................................... 12 Touche [COPIEUR] ........................................... 12 Touche de réglage du contraste...................... 13 Touche [ECONOMIE D’ENERGIE]................. 12 Touche [EPREUVE] .......................................... 12 Touche [IMPRIMANTE] .................................... 12 Touche [INTERRUPTION] ............................... 12 Touche [PROGRAMME]................................... 13 Touche [SCANNER].......................................... 12 Type de document d’origine............................. 41 V Vérification des paramètres de numérisation .. 42 Voyant de l’indicateur d’alimentation .............. 13 Voyant [PROGRAMMATEUR]......................... 12 Index (suite) 55 W WebScan................................................ 5, 45, 46 Z ZOOM .................................................................. 38 2005.6 Fiery S300 50C-KM_scn_ug_fr_v20 Page 1 of 3 PP1300W-Cleaning.doc Cleaning the PagePro 1300W/1350W Exterior Never spray cleaning solutions directly on the printer’s surface; the spray could penetrate through the air vents of the printer and damage the internal circuits. Do not spill water or detergent into the printer; otherwise the printer will be damaged and an electric shock may occur. Pick-up Roller 1. Turn off the printer, unplug the power cord, and disconnect all interface cables before cleaning. 2. Grab the front cover grip and open the front cover. 3. Pull the handle of the imaging cartridge toward you, and then pull out the imaging cartridge. Do not expose the imaging cartridge to light for a long period of time. If the drum cartridge is exposed to light, decreased image quality may result. Page 2 of 3 PP1300W-Cleaning.doc The fusing unit is extremely hot. Touching any part near the fusing unit may result in burns. Do not touch the image transfer roller inside the printer, otherwise decreased image quality may result. 4. Wipe the pick-up roller with a soft, dry cloth. 5. Align the imaging cartridge with the guides in the printer, and then insert the cartridge. Do not insert the imaging cartridge at an angle or with extreme force, otherwise the printer may be damaged. Page 3 of 3 PP1300W-Cleaning.doc 6. Press on the front cover grip and close the front cover. Page 1 of 3 PP1300W-Cleaning.doc Cleaning the PagePro 1300W/1350W Exterior Never spray cleaning solutions directly on the printer’s surface; the spray could penetrate through the air vents of the printer and damage the internal circuits. Do not spill water or detergent into the printer; otherwise the printer will be damaged and an electric shock may occur. Pick-up Roller 1. Turn off the printer, unplug the power cord, and disconnect all interface cables before cleaning. 2. Grab the front cover grip and open the front cover. 3. Pull the handle of the imaging cartridge toward you, and then pull out the imaging cartridge. Do not expose the imaging cartridge to light for a long period of time. If the drum cartridge is exposed to light, decreased image quality may result. Page 2 of 3 PP1300W-Cleaning.doc The fusing unit is extremely hot. Touching any part near the fusing unit may result in burns. Do not touch the image transfer roller inside the printer, otherwise decreased image quality may result. 4. Wipe the pick-up roller with a soft, dry cloth. 5. Align the imaging cartridge with the guides in the printer, and then insert the cartridge. Do not insert the imaging cartridge at an angle or with extreme force, otherwise the printer may be damaged. Page 3 of 3 PP1300W-Cleaning.doc 6. Press on the front cover grip and close the front cover. C650/C550/C451/C353/C253/C203 Opérations de Fonction Avancée (i-Option) Advanced Function Operations Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction 1.1 À propos de ce guide...................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.1 Structure de ce guide de l'utilisateur ................................................................................................ 1-3 1.1.2 Explication des conventions ............................................................................................................. 1-4 Recommandations de sécurité ......................................................................................................... 1-4 Séquence d'actions........................................................................................................................... 1-4 Astuces.............................................................................................................................................. 1-4 Texte avec format spécial ................................................................................................................. 1-5 2 Présentation 2.1 Présentation des fonctions ............................................................................................................ 2-3 2.1.1 Affectation des touches d'application............................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.2 Fonctions LK-101 ............................................................................................................................. 2-3 2.1.3 Fonctions LK-102 ............................................................................................................................. 2-3 2.1.4 Fonctions connectées au moyen de PageScope My Panel Manager .............................................. 2-4 2.2 Pour activer les fonctions LK-101/LK-102 ................................................................................... 2-5 Enregistrement du LK-101/LK-102 ................................................................................................... 2-5 Achat du Certificat-clé ...................................................................................................................... 2-5 Envoyer un code-requête ................................................................................................................. 2-6 Enregistrement sur le License Management Server (LMS) ............................................................... 2-8 Activation des fonctions LK-101/LK-102 ........................................................................................ 2-10 3 Affectation des touches d'application 3.1 Personnaliser les touches d'application....................................................................................... 3-3 3.1.1 Touche d'application et menu Application........................................................................................ 3-3 Touche d'application......................................................................................................................... 3-3 Menu Application ............................................................................................................................. 3-4 3.1.2 Param. Touche Application ............................................................................................................... 3-4 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4.1 Présentation..................................................................................................................................... 4-3 4.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Navigateur Web ................................................................ 4-3 4.1.2 Caractéristiques ................................................................................................................................ 4-3 4.2 Affichage du Navigateur Web......................................................................................................... 4-4 4.3 Onglet par défaut du Navigateur Web........................................................................................... 4-5 4.3.1 Organisation de l'écran ..................................................................................................................... 4-5 4.3.2 Instructions d'utilisation .................................................................................................................... 4-6 Opération par l'écran tactile.............................................................................................................. 4-6 Opération par le panneau de contrôle .............................................................................................. 4-6 4.3.3 Saisie des lettres/chiffres .................................................................................................................. 4-6 4.3.4 Mode d'affichage .............................................................................................................................. 4-7 Normal............................................................................................................................................... 4-7 Rendu Parfait..................................................................................................................................... 4-7 Rendu intelligent................................................................................................................................ 4-7 4.4 Barre d'outils ................................................................................................................................... 4-8 4.4.1 Description de la barre d'outils ......................................................................................................... 4-8 4.4.2 Signet (Affichage) .............................................................................................................................. 4-9 4.4.3 Signet (Ajout) ..................................................................................................................................... 4-9 4.4.4 Adresse ............................................................................................................................................. 4-9 4.4.5 Histor. ................................................................................................................................................ 4-9 Table des matières-2 Advanced Function Operations 4.4.6 Impr.................................................................................................................................................. 4-10 4.4.7 Menu................................................................................................................................................ 4-10 4.5 Configurer le Navigateur Web ...................................................................................................... 4-11 4.5.1 Opération Page ............................................................................................................................... 4-11 4.5.2 Vue................................................................................................................................................... 4-11 4.5.3 Activer Onglet .................................................................................................................................. 4-11 4.5.4 Réglages.......................................................................................................................................... 4-12 4.6 Imprimer/Afficher un fichier PDF ................................................................................................. 4-13 4.6.1 Imprimer un fichier PDF................................................................................................................... 4-13 4.6.2 Afficher un fichier PDF..................................................................................................................... 4-14 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5.1 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection............................................................................................. 5-3 5.1.1 Présentation....................................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.1.2 Accéder à PageScope Web Connection ........................................................................................... 5-3 5.1.3 Cache du navigateur Internet ............................................................................................................ 5-4 5.2 Organisation de l'écran................................................................................................................... 5-5 5.3 Connexion et déconnexion ............................................................................................................. 5-6 5.3.1 Connexion.......................................................................................................................................... 5-6 5.3.2 Déconnexion...................................................................................................................................... 5-7 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte.................................................................................................................. 5-8 5.4.1 Connexion à une boîte....................................................................................................................... 5-8 Liste de fichiers.................................................................................................................................. 5-9 5.4.2 Opérations sur le document ............................................................................................................ 5-10 Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 5-10 Suppression..................................................................................................................................... 5-12 6 Image Panel 6.1 Présentation..................................................................................................................................... 6-3 6.2 Afficher Image Panel ....................................................................................................................... 6-4 6.3 Opérations sur Image Panel ........................................................................................................... 6-5 6.3.1 Organisation de l'écran...................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.3.2 Séquence opératoire ......................................................................................................................... 6-6 6.3.3 Numériser des documents ................................................................................................................ 6-8 Numéris. ............................................................................................................................................ 6-8 Charger depuis un boîte utilisateur.................................................................................................... 6-9 Charger depuis la mémoire externe ................................................................................................ 6-10 6.3.4 Modifier............................................................................................................................................ 6-11 Aperçu ............................................................................................................................................. 6-11 Combiner Documents...................................................................................................................... 6-11 Retour à Dest. Numér. ..................................................................................................................... 6-11 6.3.5 Spécifier destination ........................................................................................................................ 6-12 Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 6-12 Spécifiez un destinataire ................................................................................................................. 6-13 Enregistrer dans mémoire externe .................................................................................................. 6-14 6.3.6 Envoyer vers .................................................................................................................................... 6-14 6.4 Personnaliser Image Panel ........................................................................................................... 6-15 6.4.1 Personnaliser la zone Source Données........................................................................................... 6-15 6.4.2 Personnaliser la zone Destin. Données ........................................................................................... 6-17 6.4.3 Supprimer une icône de raccourci enregistrée ............................................................................... 6-19 7 Enregistrement Photo 7.1 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses ........................................................................ 7-3 7.1.1 Spécifications relatives aux données photo...................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.2 Enregistrer une photo ........................................................................................................................ 7-4 Advanced Function Operations Table des matières-3 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8.1 Fonctions Traitement PDF.............................................................................................................. 8-3 8.1.1 Présentation ...................................................................................................................................... 8-3 8.1.2 Propriétés des documents PDF ........................................................................................................ 8-4 8.1.3 Cryptage et Signature numérique du fichier PDF ............................................................................. 8-5 Cryptage par mot de passe .............................................................................................................. 8-5 Cryptage par ID numérique............................................................................................................... 8-6 8.1.4 Impres. dir. ........................................................................................................................................ 8-7 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9.1 Présentation..................................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.1 Paramètres personnalisables ............................................................................................................ 9-3 9.1.2 Organigramme des fonctions Mon Panneau .................................................................................... 9-4 9.1.3 Restrictions concernant les fonctions Mon Panneau........................................................................ 9-4 9.2 Afficher Mon Panneau .................................................................................................................... 9-5 9.2.1 Écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau............................................................................................... 9-5 9.2.2 Afficher l'écran Menu Comm............................................................................................................. 9-5 9.3 Personnaliser Mon Panneau .......................................................................................................... 9-6 9.3.1 Réglages Mon Panneau .................................................................................................................... 9-6 9.3.2 Afficher l'écran Réglages Mon Panneau ........................................................................................... 9-6 9.3.3 Réglage Langue ................................................................................................................................ 9-7 9.3.4 Réglage Unité de mesure.................................................................................................................. 9-7 9.3.5 Réglages Copieur.............................................................................................................................. 9-8 Onglet par Défaut .............................................................................................................................. 9-8 Touches de raccourci........................................................................................................................ 9-8 9.3.6 Paramètres Numérisation/Fax........................................................................................................... 9-9 Onglet par Défaut .............................................................................................................................. 9-9 Carnet d'adresses par Défaut ........................................................................................................... 9-9 Touches de raccourci...................................................................................................................... 9-10 Carnet adresses par défaut............................................................................................................. 9-10 9.3.7 Param. Sélection Couleur................................................................................................................ 9-11 9.3.8 Réglages Menu Principal................................................................................................................. 9-11 Écran Réglages Menu Principal ...................................................................................................... 9-11 Enregistrer les touches de menu principal...................................................................................... 9-12 9.3.9 Réglage Écran par défaut................................................................................................................ 9-13 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10.1 Présentation................................................................................................................................... 10-3 10.1.1 Classement du carnet d'adresses................................................................................................... 10-3 Carnet d'adresses public ................................................................................................................ 10-3 Mon Carnet d'adresses................................................................................................................... 10-3 10.1.2 Organigramme des fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses ................................................................... 10-4 10.1.3 Restrictions relatives aux fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses.......................................................... 10-4 10.2 Enregistrement ou édition d'une adresse................................................................................... 10-5 10.2.1 Carnet Adresses.............................................................................................................................. 10-5 10.2.2 Groupe ............................................................................................................................................ 10-7 10.3 Copier des adresses enregistrées d'un carnet à l'autre ........................................................... 10-9 10.3.1 Copier les adresses du carnet public sur Mon Carnet d'adresses ................................................. 10-9 10.3.2 Copier les adresses de Mon Carnet d'adresses sur le carnet d'adresses public......................... 10-10 10.4 Utiliser Mon Carnet d'adresses lors de l'envoi......................................................................... 10-11 10.4.1 Spécifier une adresse.................................................................................................................... 10-11 10.4.2 Rechercher une adresse ............................................................................................................... 10-11 11 Index Table des matières-4 Advanced Function Operations 1 Introduction Advanced Function Operations 1-3 Introduction 1 1 Introduction Nous vous remercions d'avoir porté votre choix sur nos produits. Ce guide de l'utilisateur présente les fonctions qui prennent effet dès l'enregistrement d'un kit licence en option ; il décrit aussi celles qui sont disponibles dès que des applications se connectent à l'imprimante multifonctions (MFP). La lecture de ce guide de l'utilisateur vous permettra d'exploiter au mieux ces fonctions. Ces fonctions avancées sont prises en charge par les modèles suivants. bizhub C650/C550/C451/C353/C253/C203 Afin d'utiliser cette machine correctement et en toute sécurité, assurez-vous de lire le guide de l'utilisateur qui l'accompagne. Si vous souhaitez consulter les marques déposées et les copyrights, reportez-vous au guide de l'utilisateur. Les illustrations figurant dans ce guide de l'utilisateur peuvent présenter de légères différences avec la machine réelle. 1.1 À propos de ce guide Ce guide de l'utilisateur présente les fonctions qui prennent effet dès l'enregistrement d'un kit licence en option et celles qui sont disponibles dès que des applications se connectent à l'imprimante multifonctions MFP. Ce guide de l'utilisateur s'adresse aux personnes qui ont une connaissance élémentaire du fonctionnement des ordinateurs et de cette machine. Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation des systèmes d'exploitation ou des applications Windows ou Macintosh, voir leurs manuels respectifs. 1.1.1 Structure de ce guide de l'utilisateur Ce manuel comprend les chapitre suivants : Chapitre 1 Introduction Chapitre 2 Présentation Chapitre 3 Affectation des touches d'application Chapitre 4 Fonction Navigateur Web Chapitre 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) Chapitre 6 Image Panel Chapitre 7 Enregistrement Photo Chapitre 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF Chapitre 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau Chapitre 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses Chapitre 11 Index 1 Introduction 1-4 Advanced Function Operations 1.1.2 Explication des conventions Les repères et mises en forme utilisés dans le présent manuel sont décrits ci-dessous. Recommandations de sécurité 6 DANGER Le manquement aux instructions ainsi indiquées peut entraîner des blessures graves ou mortelles, en ce qui concerne l'alimentation électrique. % Respectez toutes les indications de danger afin d'éviter les blessures. 7 AVERTISSEMENT Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures graves ou des dommages matériels. % Respectez tous les avertissements pour éviter les blessures et utiliser la machine en toute sécurité. 7 ATTENTION Tout manquement aux instructions signalées de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures légères ou des dommages matériels. % Respectez toutes les indications sous le titre Attention pour éviter les blessures et utiliser la machine en toute sécurité. Séquence d'actions 1 Le chiffre 1 ainsi formaté indique la première étape d'une séquence d'actions. 2 Les chiffres suivants, ainsi présentés, indiquent les étapes suivantes de la procédure. ? Le texte signalé ainsi offre une assistance supplémentaire. % Le texte ainsi formaté décrit l'action permettant d'obtenir le résultat escompté. Astuces 2 Remarque Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des informations utiles et des astuces pour garantir l'utilisation en toute sécurité de la machine. 2 Rappel Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des informations importantes (Rappel). ! Détails Le texte présenté de cette manière contient des références à des informations plus détaillées. Toute illustration placée ici indique les opérations qui doivent être effectuées. Advanced Function Operations 1-5 Introduction 1 Texte avec format spécial Touche [Arrêt] Les noms des touches du panneau de contrôle sont illustrées comme ci-dessus. REGLAGE MACHINE Les textes affichés se présentent sous la forme ci-dessus. 1 Introduction 1-6 Advanced Function Operations 2 Présentation Advanced Function Operations 2-3 Présentation 2 2 Présentation 2.1 Présentation des fonctions Ce chapitre donne un aperçu des fonctions concernées. Pour plus de détails sur chaque fonction, voir la section correspondante. ! Détails La disponibilité des fonctions avancées est subordonnée à l'utilisation du kit de mise à niveau, UK-201 fourni en option. 2.1.1 Affectation des touches d'application L'utilisation des touches d'application permet de basculer l'affichage entre le navigateur Web, Image Panel ou Mon Panneau. En outre, les touches d'application peuvent être personnalisées. Pour plus de détails, voir "Affectation des touches d'application" à la page 3-3. 2.1.2 Fonctions LK-101 L'enregistrement du LK-101 sur la MFP rend disponibles les fonctions suivantes. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement du LK-101 sur la MFP, voir "Pour activer les fonctions LK-101/LK-102" à la page 2-5. Si la MFP est équipée d'un système de chargement, il n'est pas possible d'enregistrer le LK-101. Si l'identification est effectuée par PageScope Authentication Manager, la fonction de navigation Web n'est pas disponible. 2.1.3 Fonctions LK-102 L'enregistrement du LK-102 sur la MFP rend disponibles les fonctions suivantes. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement du LK-102 sur la MFP, voir "Pour activer les fonctions LK-101/LK-102" à la page 2-5. Fonction Présentation Page de référence Navigateur Web Le panneau de contrôle de la MFP connectée au réseau vous permet d'accéder à Internet ou un intranet et d'en afficher et imprimer le contenu. Avec un navigateur Web, vous pouvez aussi accéder via PageScope Web Connection, à la MFP connectée au réseau et aux documents enregistrés dans ses boîtes utilisateurs. p. 4-3 p. 5-3 Image Panel Image Panel est une nouvelle interface utilisateur du panneau de contrôle ; elle offre une opérabilité renouvelée orientée vers une utilisation intuitive et conviviale. p. 6-3 Enregistrement Photo Via PageScope Web Connection, il est possible d'ajouter des données photo à une adresse déjà enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses. Les photos enregistrées s'affichent dans la Liste des destinations d'Image Panel. p. 7-3 Fonction Présentation Page de référence Traitement PDF Lors de l'envoi de documents au format PDF au moyen des fonctions de numérisation ou les fonctions Boîte utilisateur, il est possible de crypter un fichier PDF par un mot de passe ou un identifiant numérique, d'ajouter une signature numérique et de spécifier les propriétés. p. 8-3 2 Présentation 2-4 Advanced Function Operations 2.1.4 Fonctions connectées au moyen de PageScope My Panel Manager Les fonctions suivantes sont disponibles après association aux applications. Pour utiliser la fonction souhaitée, définissez l'environnement, puis activez-la depuis l'application. ! Détails Ces fonctions ne sont disponibles que si elles sont combinées à PageScope Enterprise Suite, fournie en option distincte. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur la définition de l'environnement, voir le manuel relatif à l'application. Les fonctions à associer aux applications devraient être activées depuis l'application utilisée. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de la fonction, voir le manuel relatif à l'application. Fonction Présentation Page de référence Mon Panneau La fonction Mon Panneau, l'environnement du panneau de contrôle (Mon Panneau), personnalisé par un utilisateur en fonction de l'application, est géré de manière centralisée sur le serveur et l'utilisateur peut obtenir le tableau Mon Panneau auprès de la MFP sélectionnée. p. 9-3 Mon Carnet d'adresses Grâce à la fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses, le carnet d'adresses personnel (Mon Carnet d'adresses) est géré centralement sur le serveur, et l'utilisateur peut accéder au carnet d'adresses personnel Mon Carnet d'adresses de la MFP sélectionnée. p. 10-3 Advanced Function Operations 2-5 Présentation 2 2.2 Pour activer les fonctions LK-101/LK-102 Pour utiliser les fonctions des LK-101/LK-102, ces derniers doivent être enregistrés sur la MFP. Cette section décrit la procédure permettant d'enregistrer le LK-101/LK-102 sur une MFP. 1 Achetez le certificat-clé relatif au LK-101/LK-102. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Achat du Certificat-clé" à la page 2-5. 2 Envoyez depuis le panneau de contrôle de la MFP, un code requête. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Envoyer un code-requête" à la page 2-6. 3 Depuis l'ordinateur, procédez à l'enregistrement auprès du License Management Server (LMS). – Pour plus de détails, voir "Enregistrement sur le License Management Server (LMS)" à la page 2-8. 4 Depuis le panneau de contrôle de la MFP, activez les fonctions des LK-101/LK-102. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Activation des fonctions LK-101/LK-102" à la page 2-10. Enregistrement du LK-101/LK-102 Il existe deux méthodes pour enregistrer le LK-101/LK-102 sur la MFP. - Depuis le panneau de contrôle de la MFP - Depuis PageScope Web Connection C'est la procédure d'enregistrement depuis le panneau de contrôle de la MFP qui est décrite ici. Achat du Certificat-clé % En préparant le Certificat-clé du LK-101/LK-102 à l'avance, vous l'aurez sous la main au moment voulu. Le certificat-clé se compose des éléments suivants : - Numéro de clé - Nom de la fonction - URL du site Web du License Management Server (LMS) ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur l'achat du certificat-clé du LK-101/LK-102, contactez votre technicien SAV. 2 Présentation 2-6 Advanced Function Operations Envoyer un code-requête 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur]. 3 Tapez le mot de passe administrateur et appuyez sur [Valider]. 4 Appuyez sur [Suivt]. 5 Appuyez sur [Paramètres de Licence]. Advanced Function Operations 2-7 Présentation 2 6 Appuyez sur [Obtenir Code Requête]. 7 Appuyez sur [Oui] et ensuite sur [Valider]. 8 Appuyez sur [Impression] pour imprimer le code-requête. 2 Présentation 2-8 Advanced Function Operations Enregistrement sur le License Management Server (LMS) 1 Accédez au site Web du License Management Server (LMS). 2 Sélectionnez une langue. 3 Tapez le numéro de série et le code-requête obtenu après l'envoi d'un code-requête, puis cliquez sur la touche [Next]. 4 Tapez le numéro de clé contenu dans le certificat-clé, sélectionnez les options d'enregistrement, puis cliquez sur la touche [Next]. Advanced Function Operations 2-9 Présentation 2 5 Confirmez les informations d'enregistrement, et cliquez sur la touche [Generate License Code]. 6 Le Code de Licence est établi. L'activation des fonctions du LK-101/LK-102 est subordonnée au Code de Licence. 2 Présentation 2-10 Advanced Function Operations Activation des fonctions LK-101/LK-102 1 Sur l'écran Paramètres de Licence, dans Réglages Administrateur, appuyez sur [Installer Licence]. 2 Appuyez sur [Sélectionner Fonct.], puis sélectionnez chaque fonction pour indiquer si elle doit être activée ou non. 3 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 4 Appuyez sur [Code de Licence], et entrez le code de licence qui a été émis. Advanced Function Operations 2-11 Présentation 2 5 Appuyez sur [Installer]. 6 Appuyez sur [Oui] et ensuite sur [Valider]. 2 Remarque Après avoir activé la fonction, placez l'interrupteur en position Arrêt, puis patientez 10 secondes environ avant de le ramener en position Marche. Sinon, la machine pourrait ne pas fonctionner correctement. Sur l'écran Paramètres de Licence, dans Réglages Administrateur, appuyez sur [Liste fonctions activées] pour consulter la liste des fonctions activées. 2 Présentation 2-12 Advanced Function Operations 3 Affectation des touches d'application Advanced Function Operations 3-3 Affectation des touches d'application 3 3 Affectation des touches d'application 3.1 Personnaliser les touches d'application Les touches d'application peuvent être personnalisées afin d'utiliser les fonctions avancées de la MFP. 3.1.1 Touche d'application et menu Application Touche d'application Les fonctions ajoutées en tant que fonctions avancées peuvent être assignées à des touches d'application. 2 Remarque Si l'assignation des touches d'application est changé, collez les étiquettes autocollantes appropriées fournies avec le kit de mise à niveau UK-201 sur le panneau de contrôle afin de remplacer les indications d'origine selon les besoins. 1 2 3 No. Nom du composant Description 1 Touche du menu Application Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher le menu Application. Il n'est pas possible d'affecter une autre fonction à cette touche. Pour plus de détails sur le menu Application, voir "Menu Application" à la page 3-4. 2 Touche d'application 1 Par défaut, elle est assignée au mode Numérisation/Fax. L'administrateur peut assigner une autre fonction à cette touche. Pour plus de détails sur l'affectation des fonctions, voir "Param. Touche Application" à la page 3-4. 3 Touche d'application 2 Par défaut, elle est affectée au mode Copie. L'administrateur peut assigner une autre fonction à cette touche. Pour plus de détails sur l'affectation des fonctions, voir "Param. Touche Application" à la page 3-4. 3 Affectation des touches d'application 3-4 Advanced Function Operations Menu Application % Pour utiliser les fonctions avancées de la MFP, appuyez sur la touche [Menu Application] ([Boîte]) pour afficher le menu Application. – Si vous désirez utiliser des fonctions non affectées à la touche d'application 1 ou 2, vous pouvez basculer l'affichage de l'écran de chaque fonction depuis le menu Application. 3.1.2 Param. Touche Application Les "Param. Touche Application" vous permettent d'assigner les fonctions avancées aux touches d'application. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires/Compteur] pour afficher l'écran Utilitaires. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur]. 3 Tapez le mot de passe administrateur et appuyez sur [Valider]. 4 Appuyez sur [Réglage Système]. 5 Sur l'écran Réglage Système (2/2), appuyez sur [Param. Touche Application]. Advanced Function Operations 3-5 Affectation des touches d'application 3 6 Sélectionnez la touche d'application à affecter à la fonction. 7 Sélectionnez la fonction concernée. – Si l'identification est effectuée via PageScope Authentication Manager, la fonction Navigateur Web ne peut pas être assignée aux touches d'application. 8 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 3 Affectation des touches d'application 3-6 Advanced Function Operations 4 Fonction Navigateur Web Advanced Function Operations 4-3 Fonction Navigateur Web 4 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4.1 Présentation La fonction Navigateur Web permet d'accéder aux divers contenus Internet ou intranet depuis le panneau de contrôle de la MFP connectée au réseau, et de les afficher ou les imprimer. ! Détails Cette fonction est disponible sur la MFP pour laquelle le LK-101 est enregistré. 4.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Navigateur Web La fonction Navigateur Web permet les opérations suivantes : - Afficher et imprimer les contenus disponibles sur Internet ou intranet. - Afficher et imprimer les fichiers PDF sur Internet ou intranet. - Utiliser PageScope Web Connection d'une autre MFP en cours d'utilisation ou connectée au réseau afin de gérer des documents contenus dans les boîtes utilisateur. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation de PageScope Web Connection, voir "PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web)" à la page 5-3. 4.1.2 Caractéristiques Les caractéristiques principales du navigateur Web installé sur la MFP sont les suivantes. Rubrique Caractéristiques techniques Moteur du navigateur NetFront Protocoles pris en charge HTTP, HTTPS, TCP/IP Langages de balisage/ script pris en charge HTML, CSS, JavaScript Formats image pris en charge JPEG, BMP, PNG, GIF, Animation GIF, PDF Versions SSL/TLS prises en charge SSL 2.0, SSL 3.0, TLS 1.0 Codes de caractères pris en charge Japonais (Shift-JIS), Japonais (ISO-2022-JP), Japonais (EUC-JP), Chinois simplifié (GB2312), Chinois traditionnel (Big5), Occidental (ISO-8859-1), Unicode (UTF-8) Modes d'affichage Normal, Rendu Parfait, Rendu intelligent Option Adobe® Reader® LE 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4-4 Advanced Function Operations 4.2 Affichage du Navigateur Web Affichez le Navigateur Web par le menu Application. % Appuyez sur [Navigateur Web] sur le menu Application pour afficher une page spécifiée comme page d'accueil. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur le menu Application, voir "Affectation des touches d'application" à la page 3-3. Advanced Function Operations 4-5 Fonction Navigateur Web 4 4.3 Onglet par défaut du Navigateur Web 4.3.1 Organisation de l'écran L'écran Navigateur Web se compose des éléments suivants : 2 Remarque Le stylet fourni avec le kit de mise à niveau UK-201 en option facilite l'utilisation de l'écran tactile. 2 1 4 3 No. Nom du composant Description 1 Barre d'outils Sert à l'utilisation et à la configuration du Navigateur Web. La barre d'outils est située sur l'écran du Navigateur Web. Pour plus de détails sur la barre d'outils, voir "Barre d'outils" à la page 4-8. 2 Barre de défilement Si l'écran ne peut pas afficher un contenu sur toute sa longueur, la barre de défilement apparaît sur le côté droit. Si l'écran ne peut pas afficher un contenu sur toute sa largeur, la barre de défilement apparaît en bas de l'écran. 3 Onglets Les onglets sont affichés. Chaque onglet gère plusieurs contenus et permet de les afficher alternativement. Appuyez sur [x] dans le coin de l'onglet actif pour fermer ce dernier. 4 Icône Une icône s'affiche pendant le chargement d'un contenu. 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4-6 Advanced Function Operations 4.3.2 Instructions d'utilisation Opération par l'écran tactile Utilisez l'écran tactile principalement pour le Navigateur Web installé sur la MFP. - Un contact direct sur l'écran tactile permet d'accéder à une page via un lien ou de sélectionner un élément. - Une pression dans un champ de saisie figurant dans un contenu fait apparaître un écran comportant un clavier pour permettre la saisie de caractères. - Pour faire défiler l'écran, appuyez sur , l'écran défile alors jusqu'à un certain point. - Diverses opérations et configurations sont possibles à partir des touches de la barre d'outils située en haut de l'écran. Opération par le panneau de contrôle Vous pouvez utiliser le clavier du panneau de contrôle et presser la touche voulue pour introduire des chiffres ou sélectionner des éléments dans une liste. 4.3.3 Saisie des lettres/chiffres Une pression dans un champ de saisie figurant dans un dialogue ou un contenu fait apparaître un écran comportant un clavier pour permettre la saisie de caractères. % Appuyez sur la touche du caractère voulu sur le clavier affiché à l'écran. – Pour entrer des caractères en majuscules ou des symboles, appuyez sur [Maj.]. – Le clavier permet aussi d'introduire des chiffres. ! Détails Pour enregistrer un historique de formulaire, appuyez sur "Saisie" dans la liste déroulante Historique Saisie afin d'afficher un clavier à l'écran. Pour changer un caractère individuel dans le texte saisi, appuyez sur et pour déplacer le curseur sur le caractère à modifier, appuyez sur [Eff.] et tapez ensuite la lettre ou le chiffre désiré. Pour effacer tous les caractères introduits jusque-là, appuyez sur [C]. Pour reprendre le réglage quand le clavier est affiché, appuyez sur [Rétablir]. Certains boutons peuvent ne pas s'afficher en fonction des caractères saisis. Lorsque la saisie est possible sur plusieurs lignes, la touche Retour chariot (nouvelle ligne) apparaît. Advanced Function Operations 4-7 Fonction Navigateur Web 4 4.3.4 Mode d'affichage L'écran Navigateur Web offre les trois types d'affichage suivants. Normal L'affichage est le même qu'un Navigateur Web classique, c'est-à-dire sans tenir compte de la taille de l'écran. Les barres de défilement, haut/bas et droite/gauche permettent de voir toutes les parties du contenu. Par défaut, l'affichage est en mode Normal. Rendu Parfait La disposition est conservée et la page est affichée après réduction pour que toute sa largeur soit visible. Pour visualiser le haut ou le bas de la page, utilisez la barre de défilement haut/bas. Rendu intelligent Un tableau vertical permet d'afficher la page sur toute la largeur de l'écran. Pour visualiser le haut ou le bas de la page, utilisez la barre de défilement haut/bas. L'organisation de la page peut s'en trouver modifiée selon la page à afficher. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur le changement du mode d'affichage, voir "Vue" à la page 4-11. 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4-8 Advanced Function Operations 4.4 Barre d'outils La barre d'outils en haut de l'écran Navigateur Web permet d'effectuer diverses opérations et configurations. 4.4.1 Description de la barre d'outils Voici la description de chaque touche de la barre d'outils : Icône Nom du composant Description Retour Revient à la page précédente. Suiv. Affiche la page suivante. Actualiser/Annuler Recharge la page affichée pour en mettre à jour le contenu. Annule l'opération pendant le rechargement de la page. Page d'accueil Affiche la page enregistrée comme page d'accueil. Par défaut, c'est la page "http://konicaminolta.com/" qui est enregistrée comme page d'accueil. Pour plus de détails sur la page d'accueil, voir "Opération Page" à la page 4-11. Signet (Affichage) Affiche la liste des signets enregistrés. Pour plus de détails, voir "Signet (Affichage)" à la page 4-9. Signet (Ajout) Ajoute l'URL de la page actuelle à la liste des signets. Pour plus de détails, voir "Signet (Ajout)" à la page 4-9. Adresse Entrez l'URL de la page désirée pour l'afficher. Pour plus de détails, voir "Adresse" à la page 4-9. Histor. Affiche la liste des pages affichées jusque là. Pour plus de détails, voir "Histor." à la page 4-9. Impr. Imprime le contenu de la page affichée. Pour plus de détails, voir "Impr." à la page 4-10. Menu Permet de modifier la configuration du navigateur Web. Pour plus de détails, voir "Menu" à la page 4-10. Advanced Function Operations 4-9 Fonction Navigateur Web 4 4.4.2 Signet (Affichage) % Appuyez sur [Affichage] pour afficher la liste des signets enregistrés. Sélectionnez le signet permettant d'accéder à l'URL désirée. – Appuyez sur pour consulter la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément puis sélectionnez l'opération voulue. Les opérations suivantes sont disponibles. 4.4.3 Signet (Ajout) % Appuyez sur [Ajout] pour ajouter l'URL de la page actuelle à la liste des signets. Le titre enregistré est celui que porte le contenu lors de l'accès à la page. Pour changer l'intitulé, éditez le titre depuis la liste des signets après l'avoir ajouté à la liste. 4.4.4 Adresse 1 Appuyez sur [Adresse] pour afficher l'écran de saisie d'adresse. 2 Appuyez sur le champ de saisie pour afficher un clavier à l'écran. 3 Tapez l'URL désirée, et appuyez sur [Valider] ou [Ouv. av. Nouv.Onglet]. 4 Appuyez sur [Historique Saisie] pour afficher la liste historique et voir vos saisies précédentes. ! Détails Vous pouvez constater que l'URL de la page actuelle a été entrée dans l'écran de saisie d'adresse. Il est possible de supprimer l'URL en appuyant sur [Supprimer] après avoir affiché un clavier à l'écran. Toutes les URL introduites peuvent être supprimées d'un coup en appuyant sur la touche [C] (Effacer) du panneau de contrôle. 4.4.5 Histor. 1 Appuyez sur [Histor.] pour afficher l'écran qui liste l'historique d'affichage. – Vous pouvez sélectionner dans la liste la page à laquelle vous désirer accéder une nouvelle fois. 2 Appuyez sur pour consulter la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément puis sélectionnez l'opération voulue. Les opérations suivantes sont disponibles. Rubrique Description Ouv. av. Nouv.Onglet Charge le signet sélectionné dans un nouvel onglet. Modifier Permet d'éditer l'intitulé et l'adresse du signet sélectionné. Affichage Adresse Affiche la liste des signets par adresse. Affichage Titre Affiche la liste des signets par intitulé. Déplacer vers le haut Déplace vers le haut le signet sélectionné. Déplacer vers le bas Déplace vers le bas le signet sélectionné. Supprimer Supprime le signet sélectionné. Supprimer tout Supprime tous les signets enregistrés. Rubrique Description Ouv. av. Nouv.Onglet Charge l'historique sélectionné dans un nouvel onglet. Affichage Adresse Affiche la liste historique par adresse. Affichage Titre Affiche la liste historique par titre. Supprimer Supprime l'historique sélectionné. Supprimer tout Supprime tous les historiques. 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4-10 Advanced Function Operations 4.4.6 Impr. 1 Appuyez sur [Impr.] pour afficher un écran permettant d'imprimer une page Web. 2 Appuyez sur [Départ] ou appuyez sur la touche [Départ] après avoir spécifié les paramètres d'impression afin d'imprimer le contenu actuel. ! Détails Les éléments proposés à la sélection diffèrent selon les options installées. 4.4.7 Menu % Appuyez sur [Menu] pour changer la configuration du Navigateur Web. ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur le menu, voir "Configurer le Navigateur Web" à la page 4-11. Rubrique Description Couleur Permet de spécifier un mode couleur. Impression recto verso Spécifiez si l'impression doit être recto-verso ou non. Papier Spécifiez le format du papier. Impression Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non imprimer le titre, la date ou l'URL. Le titre et la date sont imprimés en tête de page tandis que l'URL est imprimée en pied de page. Finition Permet de spécifier les modes Tri, Groupe, Décalé, Agrafage, et Perforation. Advanced Function Operations 4-11 Fonction Navigateur Web 4 4.5 Configurer le Navigateur Web % Appuyez sur [Menu] sur la barre d'outils afin de changer la configuration du Navigateur Web. 4.5.1 Opération Page L'onglet Opération Page vous permet d'enregistrer la page d'accueil et d'utiliser le Mémo Page. 4.5.2 Vue L'onglet Vue permet de configurer l'affichage des contenus. 4.5.3 Activer Onglet L’onglet Activer Onglet permet de gérer les onglets. ! Détails Il est possible d'ouvrir un maximum de cinq onglets. Rubrique Description Utiliser pour Page d'accueil Enregistre la page actuelle comme page d'accueil. Mémo Page Affiche la liste des pages enregistrées comme Mémo Page. Il suffit de sélectionner le Mémo Page dans la liste pour afficher la page désirée. Appuyez sur pour consulter la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément puis sélectionnez l'opération voulue. Enreg. comme Mémo Page Enregistre la page actuelle telle qu'elle apparaît à l'écran. Rubrique Description Mode Affichage Sélectionnez le mode d'affichage de l'écran du Navigateur Web en choisissant entre "Normal", "Rendu Parfait" et "Rendu intelligent". Pour plus de détails sur le mode d'affichage, voir "Mode d'affichage" à la page 4-7. Codage Spécifiez le code de caractères pour l'affichage des contenus. Réglages avancés Permet de configurer en détail l'affichage des contenus. Image : Cochez cette case pour afficher les images. Animation : Cochez cette case pour afficher les animations GIF. Table : Cochez cette case pour identifier une liste et ajuster la mise en page en conséquence. JavaScript : Cochez cette case pour activer le JavaScript intégré au contenu. CSS : Cochez cette case pour activer le CSS intégré au contenu. Retour ligne auto : Cochez cette case pour activer le retour ligne auto dans un contenu. Vérification césures Japonais : Cochez cette case pour activer le contrôle des césures en Japonais dans un contenu. Rendu Rapide : Cochez cette case pour activer la fonction Rendu Rapide. Fenêtre Instantanée : Cochez cette case pour afficher les fenêtres instantanées. Sélect. couleur de copie imprim. Sélectionnez la couleur pour l'élément sélectionné en choisissant entre Vert, Bleu, Jaune ou Orange. Rubrique Description Créer Nouvel Onglet Affiche le contenu de l'URL enregistrée comme page d'accueil dans un nouvel onglet. Ouv. av. Nouv.Onglet Affiche dans un nouvel onglet la page liée. Fermer cet onglet Ferme l'onglet actif. Fermer autres Onglets Fermer tous les onglets. Cet élément ne peut pas être sélectionné s'il n'y a qu'un seul onglet d'ouvert. 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4-12 Advanced Function Operations 4.5.4 Réglages L'onglet Réglages permet de spécifier les paramètres relatifs à la sécurité, cookies, cache et proxy, et d'afficher les informations concernant le navigateur. Rubrique Description Sécurité Permet d'activer le SSL/TLS, d'afficher le Certificat racine ou le Certificat CA, ou d'importer le certificat client. Cookies Spécifie l'autorisation ou le rejet des cookies, et permet la suppression des cookies. Cache Active et configure le cache, ou supprime le cache. Proxy Active et configure le serveur proxy. Lorsque le proxy est activé, enregistrez l'adresse et le port du serveur proxy. Historique Formulaire Permet de sélectionner s'il faut ou non enregistrer l'historique des formulaires. L'historique des formulaires peut aussi être supprimé. Infos Navigateur Web Affiche les informations concernant le Navigateur Web. Advanced Function Operations 4-13 Fonction Navigateur Web 4 4.6 Imprimer/Afficher un fichier PDF Si le contenu affiché à l'écran comporte un lien pointant vers un fichier PDF, il est possible d'imprimer ou d'afficher ce fichier PDF. % Dans le contenu affiché à l'écran, appuyez sur le lien pointant vers un fichier PDF afin de faire apparaître l'écran suivant. 4.6.1 Imprimer un fichier PDF 1 Appuyez sur [Impression] pour afficher l'écran permettant d'imprimer un fichier PDF. 2 Une fois les réglages de l'impression effectués selon les besoins, appuyez sur [Départ] ou appuyez sur la touche [Départ] pour télécharger puis imprimer le fichier PDF. ! Détails Si le fichier PDF est crypté, le fichier PDF est enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur PDF au lieu d'être imprimé. Les éléments proposés à la sélection diffèrent selon les options installées. Rubrique Description Couleur Permet de spécifier un mode couleur. Impression recto verso Spécifiez si l'impression doit être recto-verso ou non. Papier Spécifiez le format du papier. Finition Permet de spécifier les modes Tri, Groupe, Décalé, Agrafage, et Perforation. 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4-14 Advanced Function Operations 4.6.2 Afficher un fichier PDF % Appuyez sur [Voir] pour afficher fichier PDF lié. – La barre d'outils en haut de l'écran permet d'agrandir, de réduire ou d'imprimer le fichier PDF. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) Advanced Function Operations 5-3 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5.1 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection Grâce au navigateur Web installé sur la MFP, vous pouvez utiliser l'instance PageScope Web Connection de la MFP connectée au réseau et accéder aux documents enregistrés dans ses boîtes utilisateurs. ! Détails Cette fonction est disponible sur la MFP pour laquelle le LK-101 est enregistré. Il est nécessaire également que le LK-101 soit enregistré sur la MFP de destination. 5.1.1 Présentation PageScope Web Connection est un utilitaire de gestion de périphérique supporté par le serveur HTTP intégré au contrôleur de l'imprimante. Grâce au navigateur Web vous pouvez accéder directement à la MFP connectée au réseau, et utiliser PageScope Web Connection. On peut généralement accéder à PageScope Web Connection depuis le navigateur Web d'un ordinateur, bien que l'on puisse aussi y accéder depuis le navigateur Web éventuellement installé sur la MFP. Si vous accédez à PageScope Web Connection depuis le navigateur Web d'un ordinateur, diverses opérations (vérifier l'état de la MFP, modifier les réglages, ou configurer le réseau), sont disponibles. En revanche si vous accédez à PageScope Web Connection depuis le navigateur Web installé sur la MFP, seule la fonction Boîte Utilisateur est accessible depuis la MFP. Ce chapitre décrit la manière d'utiliser PageScope Web Connection via le navigateur Web installé sur la MFP. 5.1.2 Accéder à PageScope Web Connection 1 Lancez le navigateur Web sur la MFP. 2 Dans la barre d'outils, appuyez sur [Adresse]. 3 Appuyez sur le champ de saisie pour afficher un clavier à l'écran. 4 Tapez l'adresse IP de la MFP à atteindre, et appuyez ensuite sur [Valider]. 5 Appuyez sur [Valider] ou [Ouv. av. Nouv.Onglet]. L'écran PageScope Web Connection apparaît. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Navigateur Web, voir "Fonction Navigateur Web" à la page 4-3. ! Détails Vous pouvez constater que l'URL de la page actuelle a été entrée dans l'écran de saisie d'adresse. Il est possible de supprimer l'URL en appuyant sur [Supprimer] après avoir affiché un clavier à l'écran. Toutes les URL introduites peuvent être supprimées d'un coup en appuyant sur la touche [C] (Effacer) du panneau de contrôle. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5-4 Advanced Function Operations 5.1.3 Cache du navigateur Internet Les informations les plus récentes peuvent ne pas apparaître sur l'écran PageScope Web Connection parce que ce sont d'anciennes versions des pages qui sont enregistrées dans la mémoire cache du navigateur Internet. De plus, des problèmes peuvent survenir quand vous utilisez le cache. Quand vous utilisez PageScope Web Connection, désactivez le cache du navigateur Internet. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu] dans la barre d'outils du navigateur Web. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet Réglages, puis sélectionnez "Cache". 3 Décochez la case "Utiliser cache", et appuyez ensuite sur [Valider]. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur les réglages du navigateur Web, voir "Configurer le Navigateur Web" à la page 4-11. Advanced Function Operations 5-5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5 5.2 Organisation de l'écran Les pages de PageScope Web Connection sont conçues comme décrit ci-dessous. 6 3 4 5 1 2 No. Nom Description 1 Logo KONICA MINOLTA Appuyez sur le logo pour accéder au site Web KONICA MINOLTA (http://konicaminolta.com/). 2 Logo PageScope Web Connection Appuyez sur le logo pour afficher les informations relatives à la de version de PageScope Web Connection. 3 Nom utilisateur de connexion Affiche l'icône du mode actuel et le nom de l'utilisateur connecté (public, nom d'utilisateur et nom de compte enregistrés). 4 [Déconnexion] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vous déconnecter du mode actuel. 5 Aide Vous permet de consulter le manuel d'aide en ligne. 6 Table des matières Affiche le contenu de PageScope Web Connection. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5-6 Advanced Function Operations 5.3 Connexion et déconnexion Si l'identification utilisateur ou compte département est effectué sur la MFP, l'écran de connexion apparaît pour permettre l'utilisation de PageScope Web Connection. ! Détails Si l'identification utilisateur ou compte département n'est pas effectué sur la MFP, l'écran qui apparaît indique que vous êtes connecté en tant qu'utilisateur public. PageScope Web Connection ne peut pas être utilisé en mode Administrateur si on y accède depuis le navigateur Web de la MFP. 5.3.1 Connexion Précisez si la connexion doit se faire comme utilisateur public ou utilisateur enregistré. % Entrez les informations nécessaires, et appuyez ensuite sur [Connexion]. – Vous pouvez sélectionner la langue d'affichage s'il y a lieu. 2 Remarque Les boîtes accessibles dépendent de l'utilisateur ou du compte connecté. Advanced Function Operations 5-7 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5 5.3.2 Déconnexion % Appuyez sur [Déconnexion] en haut et à droite de l'écran. Un écran de confirmation de connexion apparaît. – Appuyez sur [OK] pour revenir à l'écran de connexion. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5-8 Advanced Function Operations 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte Si vous accédez à PageScope Web Connection par le navigateur Web de la MFP, les opérations suivantes sont disponibles dans le cadre de la fonction Boîte. - Gérer les documents contenus dans le boîtes utilisateur de la MFP en cours d'utilisation ou d'une autre MFP connectée au réseau. - Disposer de trois types de boîtes : Boîte utilisateur publique, Boîte utilisateur privée et Boîte Groupe. - Afficher, imprimer et supprimer les documents de la boîte. 5.4.1 Connexion à une boîte Lorsque vous vous connectez via PageScope Web Connection, cela fait apparaître la liste des boîtes (publiques, privées et groupe) créées dans la MFP visitée. % Dans la liste des boîtes utilisateur, sélectionnez le nom de la boîte voulue ou tapez le numéro et le mot de passe de la boîte, et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. ! Détails Si vous appuyez sur le nom d'une boîte utilisateur alors qu'un mot de passe a été spécifié pour protéger la boîte, une page s'affiche pour permettre l'introduction du mot de passe. Connexion de boîte Liste des boîtes Rubrique Description N° Bte Ut. Entrez le numéro de la boîte utilisateur à ouvrir. Mot de passe de boîte Entrez le mot de passe si la boîte utilisateur en a reçu un. Rubrique Description Rechercher dans l'index Affiche la liste des boîtes utilisateur à l'index sous lequel la boîte a été enregistrée lors de sa création. Page (affichage par 50 boîtes) Spécifie la page à afficher s'il y a plus de 50 boîtes utilisateur. Liste des boîtes Affiche le numéro de boîte, le nom de boîte, le type de boîte et la date/heure de création. Une touche avec icône apparaît à côté chaque boîte utilisateur pour laquelle un mot de passe a été spécifié. Advanced Function Operations 5-9 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5 Liste de fichiers % Sélectionnez une boîte dans "Connexion de boîte" pour afficher l'écran comportant les informations élémentaires de la boîte utilisateur ainsi que la liste des documents enregistrés dans la boîte utilisateur. Rubrique Description Vue Vignettes Indiquez si les documents doivent être ou non affichés sous forme de miniatures. Spécifiez l'opération Sélectionnez l'opération à effectuer sur le document. Pour plus de détails, voir "Opérations sur le document" à la page 5-10. [Modifier l'affichage] Affiche la case "Sélectionner" à côté des documents compatibles avec l'opération sélectionnée. Sélectionner Une case à cocher apparaît à côté des documents sur lesquels l'opération sélectionnée peut être effectuée. Vignette Affiche les documents sous forme de miniatures. Nom Document Affiche le nom du document. Nombre d'originaux Affiche le nombre d'originaux. [Modif. nom] Il est possible de changer le nom du document. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5-10 Advanced Function Operations 5.4.2 Opérations sur le document Les documents sélectionnés peuvent être imprimés ou supprimés. Impression 1 Sélectionnez "Impression" dans "Spécifiez l'opération", et appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier l'affichage]. Une case à cocher apparaît à côté des documents qui peuvent être imprimés. 2 Cochez la case à côté du document voulu, et appuyez ensuite sur [Réglage impression]. Advanced Function Operations 5-11 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5 3 Spécifiez les réglages voulus, et appuyez sur [OK]. – Sous "Plage de pages", sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer la totalité des pages du document sélectionné, ou bien spécifiez les pages à imprimer. – "Changer l'ordre" vous permet de modifier l'ordre d'impression lorsqu'il s'agit d'imprimer plusieurs documents. 4 Appuyez sur [Ouvrir Fichier]. Une fois le téléchargement terminé, le fichier PDF du document s'affiche à l'écran. 5 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5-12 Advanced Function Operations Suppression 1 Sélectionnez "Supprimer" dans "Spécifiez l'opération", et appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier l'affichage]. Une case à cocher apparaît à côté des documents qui peuvent être supprimés. 2 Cochez la case à côté du document voulu, et appuyez ensuite sur [Supprimer]. – Cocher la case "Cocher/Décocher (s'applique à tous les documents)" permet de sélectionner tous les documents. Advanced Function Operations 5-13 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5 3 Confirmez le nom du document à supprimer, et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5-14 Advanced Function Operations 6 Image Panel Advanced Function Operations 6-3 Image Panel 6 6 Image Panel 6.1 Présentation Image Panel est une nouvelle interface utilisateur du panneau de contrôle ; qui offre une nouvelle opérabilité associée à une utilisation intuitive et conviviale. ! Détails Cette fonction est disponible sur la MFP pour laquelle le LK-101 est enregistré. Dans Image Panel, la séquence des opérations comprend trois étapes : "numérisation des documents", "édition", et "spécification de la destination", toutes ces opérations pouvant être effectuées sur le même écran. Cela permet de garder une vue globale des opérations qui s'enchaînent et de savoir précisément quelle est la fonctions en cours. En outre, l'amélioration de l'interface a conduit à ne pas inclure dans Image Panel certaines des fonctions présentes sur les anciens modèles. Si les fonctions Mon Panneau et les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont disponibles sur la MFP, vous pouvez personnaliser l'écran Image Panel. 6 Image Panel 6-4 Advanced Function Operations 6.2 Afficher Image Panel Affichez Image Panel par le menu Application. % Appuyez sur [Image Panel] dans le menu Application pour afficher Image Panel. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur le menu Application, voir "Affectation des touches d'application" à la page 3-3. Advanced Function Operations 6-5 Image Panel 6 6.3 Opérations sur Image Panel 6.3.1 Organisation de l'écran L'écran Image Panel se compose des éléments suivants : 1 3 4 5 6 2 8 7 9 No. Nom Description 1 Zone Informations de connexion Affiche le nom et l'icône de l'utilisateur actuellement connecté. 2 Zone Source Données Sélectionnez "Numéris.", "Liste Bte Util." ou "Média" pour numériser les documents. 3 Zone Desktop Affiche sous forme de vignettes ou de liste, les documents numérisés issus de la zone Numérisation des données. 4 Sélecteur Liste/Vignette Cette touche permet de modifier l'affichage de la zone Desktop en basculant entre Liste et Vignettes. 5 Zone des messages Affiche des messages supplémentaires pour préciser une procédure par exemple. 6 Zone d'état Affiche la date et l'heure actuelle. Affiche aussi des icônes d'alerte confirmant un avertissement. 7 Zone Envoyer vers/ Outil d'édition Dans la zone Envoyer vers, la destination sélectionnée dans la zone Destin. Données s'affiche sous forme d'icône. L'outil d'édition permet de modifier les documents numérisés. 8 Sélecteur Envoyer vers/ Outil d'édition Cette touche permet de basculer l'affichage entre la zone Envoyer vers et la zone Outil d'édition. 9 Zone Destin. Données Spécifiez la destination des documents numérisés. 6 Image Panel 6-6 Advanced Function Operations 6.3.2 Séquence opératoire Cette section décrit la séquence d'opérations sur Image Panel, à partir de la capture des documents jusqu'à leur envoi, à savoir dans l'ordre, "numériser", "éditer les documents" et "en spécifier la destination". 2 Remarque Il est possible également de spécifier d'abord la destination, et de numériser ensuite les documents. 1 Numérisez le document dans la zone Source Données. – Pour numériser un original, mettez-le en place et appuyez ensuite sur [Numéris.]. – Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation selon les besoins puis lancez la numérisation. Pour plus de détails, voir "Numéris." à la page 6-8. – Pour accéder à un document enregistré dans une boîte utilisateur, sélectionnez la boîte utilisateur dans [Liste Bte Util.], et sélectionnez le document à charger. Pour plus de détails, voir "Charger depuis un boîte utilisateur" à la page 6-9. – Pour accéder à un document enregistré en mémoire externe, sélectionnez l'onglet Média dans l'écran Liste Bte Util., puis sélectionnez le document à charger. Pour plus de détails, voir "Charger depuis la mémoire externe" à la page 6-10. Advanced Function Operations 6-7 Image Panel 6 2 Dans la zone Outil d'édition, modifiez le document numérisé selon vos besoins. Pour plus de détails, voir "Modifier" à la page 6-11. 3 Spécifiez la destination des documents numérisés dans la zone Destin. Données. – Pour imprimer le document, appuyez sur [Impression]. Pour plus de détails, voir "Impression" à la page 6-12. – Pour envoyer le document, sélectionnez la destination dans la [Liste Destinat.]. Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifiez un destinataire" à la page 6-13. 6 Image Panel 6-8 Advanced Function Operations – Pour l'enregistrer dans la mémoire externe, appuyez sur [Média] dans l'écran Liste Destinat. Pour plus de détails, voir "Enregistrer dans mémoire externe" à la page 6-14. Une fois qu'une destination a été spécifiée, la zone Envoyer vers apparaît. Pour plus de détails, voir "Envoyer vers" à la page 6-14. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ] pour lancer l'émission des données. 6.3.3 Numériser des documents Sélectionnez "Numéris." ou "Liste Bte Util." pour numériser les documents. Numéris. 1 Appuyez sur [Numéris.] pour afficher l'écran Param. Numéris. 2 Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation selon les besoins. 3 Appuyez sur [Numéris.]. Rubrique Description Type original Sélectionnez la qualité image en fonction du contenu de l'original. Recto/Recto-Vers Sélectionnez un mode de numérisation pour numériser une seule face ou les deux faces de l'original. Définition Sélectionnez la résolution de la numérisation. Couleur Précisez si l'original doit être numérisé en couleur ou en noir et blanc. Type Fichier Sélectionnez le format de fichier pour enregistrer les données numérisées. Contraste Réglez la densité de la numérisation. [Numér. Séparée] Il est possible de diviser l'opération de numérisation en plusieurs sessions pour divers types de documents, par exemple lorsque toutes les pages d'un document ne peuvent être chargées dans l'ADF, lorsqu'on utilise la vitre d'exposition ou lorsque des documents recto sont combinés à des documents recto-verso. Advanced Function Operations 6-9 Image Panel 6 Charger depuis un boîte utilisateur La sélection d'une boîte utilisateur dans "Liste Bte Util." fait apparaître l'écran Utiliser document. % Sélectionnez le document à numériser et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. ! Détails Si la boîte utilisateur sélectionnée est protégée par mot de passe, l'écran permettant d'introduire le mot de passe apparaît. Entrez le mot de passe. Si vous avez spécifié "Boîte Utilis." comme destination, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner ensemble plusieurs documents. Si vous avez spécifié "Impression" comme destination, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner ensemble plusieurs documents. Si toute destination autre que "Boîte Utilis." est spécifiée comme destination, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner des documents à copier. Une sélection multiple peut comporter un maximum de 10 documents. Rubrique Description [Modif. nom] Renomme le document sélectionné. [Détails Document] Permet de vérifier les informations détaillées et d'afficher un aperçu du document sélectionné. 6 Image Panel 6-10 Advanced Function Operations Charger depuis la mémoire externe 1 Sélectionnez l'onglet Média dans l'écran Liste Bte Util. pour afficher la liste des documents qui se trouvent en mémoire externe. 2 Pour ouvrir un dossier, sélectionnez le dossier voulu, et appuyez ensuite sur [Ouvrir]. – Les fichiers qui peuvent être chargés depuis la mémoire externe sont les fichiers de type PDF, TIFF, JPEG et XPS. 3 Sélectionnez le document à charger. 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. – Il n'est pas possible de charger en même temps plusieurs documents. ! Détails Pour raccorder une mémoire externe, un kit de connexion locale en option est nécessaire. Pour charger un document depuis une mémoire externe, réglez "Imprimer Document" dans "Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe" sur "Oui". En outre, pour que l'Identification utilisateur puisse intervenir, "Impression" dans "Autoriser fonction" doit être réglé sur "Permis". Si vous chargez un document depuis une mémoire externe, seule l'opération "Impression" peut être spécifiée comme destination. Si PageScope Authentication Manager est utilisé comme serveur d'identification et que l'identification s'effectue par l'unité d'identification (type biométrique) AU-101 ou par l'unité d'identification (type carte IC) AU-202, il n'est pas possible d'imprimer depuis une mémoire externe. Advanced Function Operations 6-11 Image Panel 6 6.3.4 Modifier Modifiez le document numérisé selon les besoins. Aperçu Permet de vérifier les informations détaillées et d'afficher un aperçu du document sélectionné. Combiner Documents Plusieurs documents peuvent être combinés en un seul document. % Appuyez sur [Déplacer] pour changer l'ordre des documents à combiner. Retour à Dest. Numér. % Appuyez sur "Retour à Dest. Numér." pour ramener le document sélectionné à l'emplacement source. Une fois la numérisation effectuée, les documents sont supprimés. Les documents chargés depuis une boîte utilisateur sont réintégrés dans la boîte utilisateur. 6 Image Panel 6-12 Advanced Function Operations 6.3.5 Spécifier destination Spécifiez la destination des documents numérisés. Impression 1 Appuyez sur [Impression] pour changer l'ordre des documents à combiner. 2 Spécifiez les réglages d'impression. 3 Appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. ! Détails Les éléments proposés à la sélection diffèrent selon les options installées. Rubrique Description Copies Sur le clavier, spécifiez l'étendue des pages et le nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer. Impression Indiquez si le mode d'impression doit être recto-verso ou non. Finition Permet de spécifier la configuration Tri, Groupe, Décalé, Agrafage, Perforation, Réglage Position Agrafage et Réglage Position Perforation. Advanced Function Operations 6-13 Image Panel 6 Spécifiez un destinataire 1 Dans la [Liste Destinat.], sélectionnez la destination du document à envoyer. 2 Appuyez sur [Recher simple] pour afficher les destinations enregistrées sur la machine. ! Détails Si les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont disponibles, appuyez sur l'onglet Mon Adresse pour afficher Mon Carnet d'adresses. Pour plus de détails sur Mon Carnet d'adresses, voir "Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses" à la page 10-3. Si vous avez chargé ensemble plusieurs documents, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner "Boîte Utilis." comme destination. Si vous avez chargé des documents à copier, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner une autre destination que "Boîte Utilis.". 6 Image Panel 6-14 Advanced Function Operations Enregistrer dans mémoire externe 1 Sélectionnez [Média] sur l'écran Liste Destinat. 2 Appuyez sur [OK]. Seuls les documents numérisés et chargés peuvent être enregistrés dans la mémoire externe. ! Détails Pour raccorder une mémoire externe, un kit de connexion locale en option est nécessaire. Pour enregistrer en mémoire externe, réglez "Enregistrer document" dans "Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe" sur "ON". En outre, pour que l'identification utilisateur soit effectuée, "Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe" dans "Autoriser fonction" doit être réglé sur "Permis". Si vous avez spécifié "Impression", il n'est pas possible de sélectionner [Média] comme destination. 6.3.6 Envoyer vers Une fois qu'une destination a été spécifiée, la zone Envoyer vers apparaît. Les documents numérisés et les destinations sont affichés en tant qu'icônes en bas de l'écran. % Appuyez sur les icônes voulues pour afficher le détail des données et les destinations spécifiées. Advanced Function Operations 6-15 Image Panel 6 6.4 Personnaliser Image Panel Si les fonctions Mon Panneau et les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont disponibles sur la MFP, l'écran Image Panel peut être personnalisé. ! Détails Pour personnaliser l'écran Image Panel, l'environnement requis est le suivant. Les fonctions Mon Panneau et les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont disponibles sur la MFP. L'identification utilisateur a été effectuée et l'utilisateur est connecté en tant que utilisateur enregistré. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions Mon Panneau, voir "Fonctions Mon Panneau" à la page 9-3. Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses, voir "Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses" à la page 10-3. 6.4.1 Personnaliser la zone Source Données Dans la zone Source Données, vous pouvez enregistrer une icône de raccourci pointant vers une boîte utilisateur souvent utilisée. 1 Dans "Source Données", appuyez sur [Liste Bte Util.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Enreg. Bureau/Modifier]. 6 Image Panel 6-16 Advanced Function Operations 3 Sélectionnez la boîte utilisateur à enregistrer dans la zone Desktop, et sélectionnez dans la zone Numérisation des données l'emplacement où vous voulez enregistrer l'icône. – La boîte utilisateur qui est enregistrée dans la zone Desktop ne peut pas être déplacée vers un autre emplacement du bureau. – Si vous sélectionnez un emplacement du bureau dans lequel une autre icône est enregistrée, l'icône sera alors écrasée. 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. Ceci enregistre l'icône de raccourci de la boîte utilisateur. Advanced Function Operations 6-17 Image Panel 6 6.4.2 Personnaliser la zone Destin. Données Dans la zone Destin. Données, vous pouvez enregistrer une icône de raccourci pointant vers une destination souvent utilisée. 1 Dans la zone Destin. Données, appuyez sur [Liste Destinat.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Enreg. Bureau/Modifier]. 3 Sélectionnez la destination à enregistrer dans la zone Desktop, et sélectionnez dans la zone de destination des données l'emplacement où vous voulez enregistrer l'icône. – La destination qui est enregistrée dans la zone Desktop ne peut pas être déplacée vers un autre emplacement du bureau. – Si vous sélectionnez un emplacement du bureau dans lequel une autre icône est enregistrée, l'icône sera alors écrasée. 6 Image Panel 6-18 Advanced Function Operations 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. Ceci enregistre l'icône de raccourci de la destination. Advanced Function Operations 6-19 Image Panel 6 6.4.3 Supprimer une icône de raccourci enregistrée 1 Appuyez sur [Enreg. Bureau/Modifier]. 2 Sélectionnez l'icône à supprimer. 3 Appuyez sur [Supprimer]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. Ceci supprime l'icône de raccourci. 6 Image Panel 6-20 Advanced Function Operations 7 Enregistrement Photo Advanced Function Operations 7-3 Enregistrement Photo 7 7 Enregistrement Photo 7.1 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses Via PageScope Web Connection, il est possible d'ajouter des données photo à une adresse déjà enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses. Pour enregistrer des données photo dans une entrée du carnet d'adresses, l'adresse doit avoir été préalablement enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses. ! Détails Cette fonction est disponible sur la MFP pour laquelle le LK-101 est enregistré. Les photos enregistrées s'affichent dans la Liste des destinations d'Image Panel. 7.1.1 Spécifications relatives aux données photo L'enregistrement des données photo est subordonné aux spécifications suivantes : ! Détails Il se peut que les données photo ne soient pas mises à l'échelle pour l'enregistrement. Rubrique Caractéristiques techniques Type fichier Format BMP, couleur 24-bit, non compressé Format image 48 e 48 pixels Taille des données 6 966 octets 7 Enregistrement Photo 7-4 Advanced Function Operations 7.1.2 Enregistrer une photo Pour enregistrer des données photo, utilisez PageScope Web Connection. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur PageScope Web Connection, voir le guide de l'utilisateur correspondant. ! Détails Pour enregistrer des données photo dans une entrée du carnet d'adresses, l'adresse doit avoir été préalablement enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses. Si la fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses est disponible, elle vous permet d'enregistrer des données photo dans une entrée du carnet d'adresses Mon Carnet d'adresses. Pour enregistrer des données photo dans une entrée du carnet d'adresses, vous devez vous connecter en tant qu'utilisateur enregistré. 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré ou comme Administrateur. 2 Sélectionnez l'onglet Enr. Dest. 3 Sélectionnez le menu "Photo/Icône". Advanced Function Operations 7-5 Enregistrement Photo 7 4 Sélectionnez l'entrée voulue dans le carnet d'adresses, puis cliquez sur la touche [Modifier]. – Si une photo est enregistrée, "Photo" apparaît dans la colonne "Photo/Icône". 5 Sélectionnez "Enregistrer photo". 6 Cliquez sur la touche [Browse], puis spécifiez l'emplacement source de la photo à enregistrer. 7 Cliquez sur la touche [OK]. 7 Enregistrement Photo 7-6 Advanced Function Operations 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF Advanced Function Operations 8-3 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8.1 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8.1.1 Présentation Les fonctions Traitement PDF permettent les opérations suivantes : - Si vous désirez envoyer des documents au moyen des fonctions numérisation/boîte utilisateur, et que vous sélectionnez le format de fichier PDF ou PDF compact, vous pouvez spécifier les propriétés du fichier PDF. - Lors de l'envoi de documents au moyen des fonctions de numérisation/boîte utilisateur, et que vous sélectionnez le format de fichier PDF ou PDF compact, il est possible de crypter le fichier PDF par un mot de passe ou un identifiant numérique. - Pour transmettre un fichier PDF crypté, vous pouvez créer une signature numérique en utilisant le certificat de la MFP. - La fonction d'impression directe vous permet d'imprimer des documents contenus dans un fichier PDF crypté par AES. ! Détails Cette fonction est disponible sur la MFP pour laquelle le LK-102 est enregistré. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur la fonction numérisation/boîte utilisateur, voir le guide de l'utilisateur pour chaque fonction. 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8-4 Advanced Function Operations 8.1.2 Propriétés des documents PDF Si vous désirez envoyer des documents au moyen des fonctions numérisation/boîte utilisateur, et que vous sélectionnez le format de fichier "PDF" ou "PDF compact", vous pouvez spécifier les propriétés du fichier PDF. ! Détails Vous pouvez aussi spécifier les propriétés PDF lorsque vous envoyez un document au format PDF dans une boîte utilisateur d'un autre périphérique au moyen de PageScope Web Connection. Lors de l'enregistrement d'un document dans la boîte utilisateur par la commande "Enregistrer document" de la fonction Boîte Utilis., il n'est pas possible de spécifier les propriétés PDF. Rubrique Description Titre Spécifiez un intitulé pour le fichier PDF si [Non] est sélectionné pour "Appliq. Nom fichier". Appliq. Nom fichier Spécifiez si le nom de fichier doit ou non être utilisé comme titre du fichier PDF. Auteur Spécifiez le nom de l'auteur. Pour procéder à l'identification, c'est l'ID utilisateur est spécifié pour le nom d'auteur. Sujet Spécifiez le sujet du fichier PDF. Mots-clés Spécifiez les mots-clés du fichier PDF. Advanced Function Operations 8-5 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8 8.1.3 Cryptage et Signature numérique du fichier PDF Lors de l'envoi de documents numérisés ou enregistrés dans la boîte utilisateur, si vous sélectionnez "PDF" ou "PDF compact" comme format de fichier, vous pouvez crypter les fichiers PDF par un mot de passe ou un identifiant numérique personnel. Si un certificat est enregistré sur la MFP, vous pouvez signer numériquement un fichier PDF avant de transmettre les données. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un certificat sur la MFP, voir le Guide de l'Utilisateur – Administrateur Réseau. ! Détails Vous pouvez aussi spécifier le cryptage et la signature numérique du fichier PDF lorsque vous envoyez un document au format PDF dans une boîte utilisateur d'un autre périphérique au moyen de PageScope Web Connection. Cryptage par mot de passe % Pour crypter un fichier par un mot de passe, spécifiez les réglages suivants. Rubrique Description Cible de cryptage Sélectionnez la cible de cryptage. Si vous sélectionnez [Sauf métadonnées], vous pouvez exclure de la cible de cryptage les réglages effectués dans "Propriétés des documents PDF". Si vous sélectionnez [Sauf métadonnées], vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Niveau faible] pour "Niveau de cryptage". Type de cryptage Sélectionnez [Code d'accès]. Signature Si une certificat est enregistré sur la MFP, spécifiez s'il faut ou non appliquer une signature numérique. Niveau de cryptage Spécifiez le niveau de cryptage. Niveau faible : méthode de cryptage RC4 (la longueur de clé est de 40 bits) Niveau élevé 1 : méthode de cryptage RC4 (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits) Niveau élevé 2 : méthode de cryptage AES (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits) Code d'accès Entrez le code permettant d'ouvrir le fichier PDF crypté. Entrez une nouvelle fois le code pour confirmation. Permissions Document Entrez le mot de passe permettant de changer les permissions document. Entrez une nouvelle fois le code pour confirmation. Lorsque vous spécifiez les permissions document, appuyez sur [Paramètres Détaillés] pour spécifier les permissions en détail. La plage de réglage varie selon le niveau de cryptage. 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8-6 Advanced Function Operations Paramètres Détaillés Cryptage par ID numérique % Pour crypter un fichier par l'ID numérique de l'utilisateur, spécifiez les réglages suivants. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de l'ID numérique de l'utilisateur (expéditeur) sur la MFP, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur – Administrateur Réseau. Rubrique Description Impression Autorisée Spécifiez si l'impression des fichiers PDF est autorisée ou non. Si vous spécifiez un niveau de cryptage "Niveau élevé 1"/"Niveau élevé 2", vous pouvez préciser aussi [Permettre seulement Basse résolution]. Extraire Documents/Images Indiquez si vous souhaitez autoriser ou non la copie de texte, d'images et d'autres contenus. Modifier Permissions Sélectionnez le niveau de permission approprié de modification du document, y compris la signature des données, la saisie et les remarques. Rubrique Description Cible de cryptage Sélectionnez la cible de cryptage. Si vous sélectionnez [Sauf métadonnées], vous pouvez exclure de la cible de cryptage les réglages effectués dans "Propriétés des documents PDF". Type de cryptage Appuyez sur [ID numérique]. Sélectionnez [ID numérique] pour afficher l'écran permettant de sélectionner une destination. Sélectionnez la destination enregistrée, ou lancez une recherche LDAP pour sélectionner la destination pour laquelle un ID numérique est enregistré. Sélectionnez [Même que destination] pour associer l'ID numérique à la destination. Il est possible de spécifier 100 ID numériques maximum. ! Détails Sélectionnez [ID numérique] pour afficher l'écran permettant de sélectionner une destination. Les carnets d'adresses e-mail en transmission S/MIME et associés à un ID numérique apparaissent à l'écran. Après avoir sélectionné le carnet d'adresses désiré, vous pouvez spécifier l'application de l'ID numérique pour le cryptage. Même si vous spécifiez un ID numérique, la destination n'en sera pas spécifiée pour autant. Il faut d'abord spécifier la destination des données. L'ID numérique dépend du niveau d'autorisation d'accès affecté à l'utilisateur. Lorsque vous enregistrez un document dans la boîte utilisateur, il n'est pas possible de crypter les fichiers PDF par un ID numérique. Signature Si une certificat est enregistré sur la MFP, spécifiez s'il faut ou non appliquer une signature numérique. Niveau de cryptage Spécifiez le niveau de cryptage. Si vous avez opté pour un cryptage par ID numérique, vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Niveau faible] dans "Niveau de cryptage". Niveau élevé 1 : méthode de cryptage RC4 (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits) Niveau élevé 2 : méthode de cryptage AES (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits) Advanced Function Operations 8-7 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8 8.1.4 Impres. dir. La fonction d'impression directe vous permet d'imprimer des documents contenus dans un fichier PDF crypté par AES. Pour effectuer une impression directe, utilisez PageScope Web Connection. 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur public ou comme utilisateur enregistré, et sélectionnez l'onglet Impres. dir. 2 Cliquez sur la touche [Browse] pour sélectionner le fichier, puis cliquez sur la touche [Imprimer]. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur PageScope Web Connection, voir le guide de l'utilisateur correspondant. 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8-8 Advanced Function Operations 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau Advanced Function Operations 9-3 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9.1 Présentation Les fonctions Mon Panneau gèrent de manière centralisée l'environnement du panneau de contrôle (Mon Panneau) et permettent de le personnaliser en fonction de l'application utilisée pour obtenir Mon Panneau sur la MFP sélectionnée par l'utilisateur. Les fonctions Mon Panneau garantissent le même niveau d'opérabilité sur multiple MFP dans un environnement réseau. Cette fonction n'est disponible que si elle est combinée à PageScope Enterprise Suite, fournie en option distincte. ! Détails Cette fonction est utilisée avec PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de cette fonction, voir le manuel de PageScope My Panel Manager. D'autre part, PageScope My Panel Manager permet de spécifier les réglages concernant Mon Panneau. Pour plus de détails, voir PageScope My Panel Manager. 9.1.1 Paramètres personnalisables Mon Panneau permet de personnaliser les éléments suivants. - Réglage de langue d'affichage du panneau de contrôle. - Réglage du système d'unité affiché à l'écran lors de la saisie de valeurs numériques. - Organisation des touches de raccourci sur l'écran de base en mode Copie et des paramètres de l'écran de base. - Organisation des touches de raccourci sur l'écran de base en mode Numérisation/Fax et des paramètres de l'écran de base. - Sélection couleur du panneau de contrôle. - Affichage du menu principal de Mon Panneau. - Affichage de l'écran d'accueil du panneau de contrôle. ! Détails Si les fonctions Mon Panneau et les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont disponibles sur la MFP, l'écran Image Panel peut être personnalisé. Pour plus de détails, voir "Personnaliser Image Panel" à la page 6-15. 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9-4 Advanced Function Operations 9.1.2 Organigramme des fonctions Mon Panneau Cette section décrit la séquence opératoire des fonctions Mon Panneau. L'utilisateur procède à l'identification utilisateur pour la MFP sélectionnée. Si l'Identification utilisateur est validée, la MFP se connecte automatiquement au serveur pour obtenir Mon Panneau à l'intention de l'utilisateur connecté. Mon Panneau est disponible pendant la connexion de l'utilisateur. Dès que l'utilisateur se déconnecte, Mon Panneau est désactivé. ! Détails En cas d'échec de la connexion au serveur, vérifiez la connexion réseau. 9.1.3 Restrictions concernant les fonctions Mon Panneau Mon Panneau s'accompagne des restrictions suivantes. - Seul l'utilisateur peut enregistrer, modifier, ou supprimer Mon Panneau. L'Administrateur de la MFP ne peut pas effectuer d'opérations sur Mon Panneau. - Si Mon Panneau n'est pas personnalisé, la langue, le système d'unité, et sélection couleur du panneau de contrôle sont conformes aux réglages de la MFP. - Si Mon Panneau n'est pas personnalisé, l'écran initial du panneau de contrôle affiche le menu principal de Mon Panneau. - Seuls les réglages copieurs et les réglages numérisation/fax enregistrés dans la mémoire de la MFP sont disponibles. - Selon les fonctions de la MFP ou des options installées sur la MFP sur laquelle Mon Panneau est utilisé, il se peut que l'environnement opératoire spécifié en tant que Mon Panneau ne soit pas disponible. - L'enregistrement, l'édition, ou la suppression de Mon Panneau peut causer une erreur si la connexion au serveur n'est pas de qualité satisfaisante. En cas d'erreur, vérifiez la connexion réseau. (1) Identification utilisateur Serveur (Gestion de Mon Panneau) Mon Panneau activé Mon Panneau activé (3) Envoi de Mon Panneau (2) Accès au serveur Mon Panneau désactivé Advanced Function Operations 9-5 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9 9.2 Afficher Mon Panneau 9.2.1 Écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau C'est l'écran Menu Comm qui apparaît en premier lorsque Mon Panneau s'ouvre. L'utilisateur peut organiser librement les fonctions et raccourcis fréquemment utilisés et en mémoriser les réglages sur l'écran Menu Comm. Le menu principal permet d'enregistrer douze types de touches de raccourcis. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des réglages de l'écran Menu Comm, voir "Réglages Menu Principal" à la page 9-11. 9.2.2 Afficher l'écran Menu Comm Une fois que l'utilisateur a accédé aux fonctions Mon Panneau, il peut alors modifier l'écran initial qui doit s'afficher après que l'identification utilisateur a été reconnue valide. C'est dans le menu Application que l'on peut modifier l'écran initial permettant d'accéder au Menu Comm de Mon Panneau. % Appuyez sur [Mon Panneau] sur l'écran Menu Application pour accéder à l'écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau. 2 Remarque L'écran initial qui s'affiche après une identification valide peut être modifié dans [Réglages Mon Panneau]. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglage Écran par défaut" à la page 9-13. Pour plus de détails sur le menu Application, voir "Affectation des touches d'application" à la page 3-3. 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9-6 Advanced Function Operations 9.3 Personnaliser Mon Panneau % Pour personnaliser Mon Panneau, utilisez les [Réglages Mon Panneau] du menu "Utilitaires". 9.3.1 Réglages Mon Panneau Vous pouvez spécifier les éléments suivants. 9.3.2 Afficher l'écran Réglages Mon Panneau Lorsque les fonctions Mon Panneau sont activées, le menu Utilitaires affiche [Réglages Mon Panneau]. 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré. 2 Appuyez sur [Utilitaires/Compteur]. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglages Mon Panneau]. Rubrique Description Réglage Langue Spécifiez la langue à utiliser pour le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglage Langue" à la page 9-7. Réglage Unité de mesure Spécifiez l'unité pour l'affichage des valeurs numériques sur le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglage Unité de mesure" à la page 9-7. Réglages Copieur Spécifiez les réglages pour l'écran de base en mode Copie et pour les touches de raccourcis. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglages Copieur" à la page 9-8. Paramètres Numérisation/ Fax Spécifiez les réglages pour l'écran de base en mode Numérisation/Fax et pour les touches de raccourcis. Pour plus de détails, voir "Paramètres Numérisation/Fax" à la page 9-9. Param. Sélection Couleur Spécifiez la sélection couleur du panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails, voir "Param. Sélection Couleur" à la page 9-11. Réglages Menu Principal Spécifiez les réglages de l'écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglages Menu Principal" à la page 9-11. Réglage Écran par défaut Spécifiez les réglages de l'écran initial qui s'affiche après validation de l'identification utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglage Écran par défaut" à la page 9-13. Advanced Function Operations 9-7 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9 L'écran Réglages Mon Panneau apparaît. 9.3.3 Réglage Langue % Spécifiez parmi les langues disponibles sur la MFP la langue à utiliser pour le panneau de contrôle. 9.3.4 Réglage Unité de mesure % Sélectionnez "mm (val.numérique)", "pouce (val.numér.)", ou "pouce (fraction)" comme unité de longueur à utiliser dans le panneau de contrôle. 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9-8 Advanced Function Operations 9.3.5 Réglages Copieur Spécifiez les réglages pour l'écran de base en mode Copie et pour les touches de raccourcis. Onglet par Défaut Spécifiez les réglages de l'écran de base en mode Copie depuis l'écran de base ou depuis l'écran Copie rapide. L'écran de base est l'affichage normal de base. En ce qui concerne l'écran Copie rapide, les paramètres de l'écran de base s'affichent sur un seul écran afin de faciliter les réglages multiples. Touches de raccourci Les touches de raccourci pointant vers des fonctions d'application fréquemment utilisées peuvent être ajoutées à l'écran de base en mode Copie. Seulement deux touches de raccourci peuvent être programmées. ! Détails Si l'icône du contrôleur image est affichée, alors une seule touche de raccourci peut être programmée dans l'écran de base. Advanced Function Operations 9-9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9 9.3.6 Paramètres Numérisation/Fax Spécifiez les réglages pour l'écran de base en mode Numérisation/Fax et pour les touches de raccourcis. Onglet par Défaut % Spécifiez l'onglet par défaut du mode Numérisation/Fax, en sélectionnant "Recherche LDAP", "Vérif. histor", "Carnet Adresses" ou "Saisie dir". Carnet d'adresses par Défaut % Si vous utilisez le carnet d'adresses public, spécifiez le type d'index à afficher dans "Sélect. d''adresse enregis.". Par défaut, c'est [Mon Carnet Adresses] qui est sélectionné. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur Mon Carnet d'adresses, voir "Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses" à la page 10-3. 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9-10 Advanced Function Operations Touches de raccourci Les touches de raccourci pointant vers des fonctions d'application fréquemment utilisées peuvent être ajoutées à l'écran de base en mode Numérisation/Fax. Seulement deux touches de raccourci peuvent être programmées. ! Détails Si l'icône du contrôleur image est affichée, alors une seule touche de raccourci peut être programmée dans l'écran de base. Carnet adresses par défaut Sélectionnez comme méthode d'affichage "Carnet adresses par défaut", "Index" ou "Type d'adresse". Advanced Function Operations 9-11 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9 9.3.7 Param. Sélection Couleur Pour la couleur indiquant que les touches du panneau de contrôle sont sélectionnées, choisissez "Vert", "Bleu", "Jaune", ou "Vermillon". 9.3.8 Réglages Menu Principal Spécifiez les réglages de l'écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau. L'utilisateur peut organiser librement les fonctions et raccourcis fréquemment utilisés et en mémoriser les réglages sur l'écran Menu Comm. Écran Réglages Menu Principal Les touches de raccourci à afficher sur l'écran Menu Comm s'appellent touches de menu principal et il est possible d'enregistrer jusqu'à 12 types de touches. Pour enregistrer en mémoire l'icône de raccourci comme touche de menu principal, appuyez sur [Icône]. 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9-12 Advanced Function Operations Enregistrer les touches de menu principal Diverses fonctions, la configuration de la fonction copie, la configuration de la fonction numérisation/fax, les réglages copieurs mémorisés et les réglages numérisation/fax mémorisés sont respectivement affectées à des touches de menu principal. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement du réglage Programme Copie et du réglage Programme Numérisation/Fax, voir le guide de l'utilisateur correspondant. ! Détails Si la fonction Navigateur Web ou la fonction Image Panel est activée, les touches peuvent être définies sur l'écran Menu Comm. Si l'identification est effectuée via PageScope Authentication Manager, la fonction Navigateur Web ne peut pas être assignée aux touches de menu principal. Rubrique Description Fonction Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pour chacune des fonctions Copie, Numérisation/Fax, Boîte Utilisateur, Image Panel, ou Navigateur Web. Réglage Fonction Copie Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pour chaque fonction du mode couleur, paramètre papier, réglage zoom, recto-verso/combinaison, et finition. Réglage Fonction Numérisation/Fax Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pour chacune des fonctions Numérisation/ Fax, notamment le réglage de numérisation, le réglage de l'original, et le réglage communication. Réglage Programme Copie Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pointant vers la mémoire de réglage Copie enregistrée sur la MFP. Sur l'écran Menu Comm, appuyez sur [Icône] pour enregistrer l'icône de raccourci pointant vers la mémoire de réglage. La touche de raccourci pour la mémoire de réglage Copie ne peut être utilisée que sur la MFP enregistrée. Réglage Progr. Numéris./ Fax Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pointant vers la mémoire de réglage Numérisation/Fax enregistrée sur la MFP. Sur l'écran Menu Comm, appuyez sur [Icône] pour enregistrer l'icône de raccourci pointant vers la mémoire de réglage. La touche de raccourci pointant vers la mémoire de réglage Numérisation/Fax ne peut être utilisée que sur la MFP enregistrée. Advanced Function Operations 9-13 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9 9.3.9 Réglage Écran par défaut % Spécifiez l'écran initial qui doit apparaître une fois que l'identification utilisateur a été effectuée depuis le Menu Comm, ou les modes Copie, Numérisation/Fax, Boîte utilisateur, Image Panel, ou Navigateur Web. Par défaut, c'est l'écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau qui apparaît. ! Détails Si la fonction Navigateur Web ou la fonction Image Panel est activée, cet écran peut être spécifié comme écran initial. Si l'identification est effectuée via PageScope Authentication Manager, la fonction Navigateur Web ne peut pas être spécifiée comme écran initial. 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9-14 Advanced Function Operations 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses Advanced Function Operations 10-3 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10.1 Présentation Grâce à la fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses, le carnet d'adresses personnel (Mon Carnet d'adresses) est géré centralement sur le serveur, et l'utilisateur peut accéder au carnet d'adresses personnel Mon Carnet d'adresses de la MFP sélectionnée. Cette fonction n'est disponible que si elle est combinée à PageScope Enterprise Suite, fournie en option distincte. ! Détails Cette fonction est utilisée avec PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de cette fonction, voir le manuel de PageScope My Panel Manager. D'autre part, PageScope My Panel Manager permet de spécifier les réglages concernant Mon Carnet d'adresses. Pour plus de détails, voir le manuel PageScope My Panel Manager. 10.1.1 Classement du carnet d'adresses Lorsque les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont activées, les carnets d'adresses sont classés dans l'un des deux types suivants. L'utilisateur connecté à la MFP peut accéder aux deux types de carnet d'adresses. Carnet d'adresses public Le carnet d'adresses public est un carnet d'adresses accessible à tout utilisateur enregistré sur la machine de la MFP qu'il a sélectionnée. Le carnet d'adresses public permet d'enregistrer les adresses, les destinations de groupe et les destinations programmées. Du fait que le carnet d'adresses public est enregistré sur la machine de la MFP, les adresses disponibles sont celles qui sont enregistrées sur la MFP. Le carnet d'adresses public peut être enregistré, modifié ou supprimé par l'utilisateur ou l'Administrateur. ! Détails Si l'enregistrement ou l'édition d'adresses sont interdits par les réglages Administrateur, ces opérations ne sont pas possibles. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une adresse, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur – Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax réseau. Mon Carnet d'adresses Mon Carnet d'adresses est un carnet d'adresses accessible seulement à l'utilisateur géré par le serveur. Dans Mon Carnet d'adresses, l'utilisateur peut enregistrer des adresses et des destinations de groupe fréquemment appelées. Du fait que Mon Carnet d'adresses est retourné par le serveur et exploité sur la MFP sélectionnée par l'utilisateur, ce carnet peut être utilisé sur n'importe quelle MFP pour peu qu'elle dispose des fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses. Seul l'utilisateur peut enregistrer, modifier, ou supprimer Mon Carnet d'adresses. 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10-4 Advanced Function Operations 10.1.2 Organigramme des fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses Cette section décrit la séquence opératoire des fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses. L'utilisateur procède à l'identification utilisateur pour la MFP sélectionnée. Si l'Identification utilisateur est validée, la MFP se connecte automatiquement au serveur pour obtenir Mon Carnet d'adresses à l'intention de l'utilisateur connecté. Mon Carnet d'adresses est disponible pendant la connexion de l'utilisateur. Dès que l'utilisateur se déconnecte, Mon Carnet d'adresses est désactivé. ! Détails En cas d'échec de la connexion au serveur, vérifiez la connexion réseau. 10.1.3 Restrictions relatives aux fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses Mon Carnet d'adresses présente les restrictions suivantes. - Seul l'utilisateur peut enregistrer, modifier, ou supprimer Mon Carnet d'adresses. L'administrateur de la MFP ne peut pas effectuer d'opérations sur Mon Carnet d'adresses. - Mon Carnet d'adresses permet d'enregistrer jusqu'à 100 adresses et 10 destinations de groupe (enregistrement maximum de 100 adresses par groupe). - Dès que le nombre d'adresses enregistrées dans Mon Carnet d'adresses atteint le maximum, il n'est plus possible d'enregistrer de nouvelles adresses. - Les destinations programmées ne peuvent pas être enregistrées dans Mon Carnet d'adresses. - Mon Carnet d'adresses ne permet pas la recherche dans une base ou par index. - Les adresses de la boîte utilisateur ne peuvent être utilisées que sur la MFP sur laquelle les destinations sont enregistrées. - En fonction de ses réglages ou des options installées sur la MFP sur laquelle Mon Carnet d'adresses est utilisés, il se peut que l'émission spécifiée pour [Sélect. d’adresse enregis.] ne soit pas possible. - L'enregistrement, l'édition ou la suppression de Mon Carnet d'adresses peut causer une erreur si la connexion au serveur n'est pas de qualité satisfaisante. En cas d'erreur, vérifiez la connexion réseau. Mon Carnet d'adresses activé Mon Carnet d'adresses activé Serveur (Gestion de Mon Carnet d'adresses) (2) Accès au serveur (3) Obtention de Mon Carnet d'adresses Mon Carnet d'adresses activé (1) Identification utilisateur Advanced Function Operations 10-5 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10 10.2 Enregistrement ou édition d'une adresse Mon Carnet d'adresses permet d'enregistrer les destinations privées fréquemment utilisées. Plusieurs méthodes d'enregistrement sont disponibles : - Par le panneau de contrôle de la MFP - Depuis PageScope Web Connection sur un ordinateur du réseau - Par PageScope My Panel Manager Les adresses et destinations de groupe peuvent être enregistrées dans Mon Carnet d'adresses. Cette section décrit la méthode d'enregistrement au moyen du panneau de contrôle de la MFP. 10.2.1 Carnet Adresses Les numéros de fax, les adresses e-mail ou les boîtes utilisateur enregistrées peuvent être sauvegardés dans le carnet d'adresses. Mon Carnet d'adresses permet d'enregistrer 100 adresses maximum. 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré. 2 Appuyez sur [Utilitaires/Compteur]. 3 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-Touche/Boîte]. 4 Appuyez sur [Créer Destination 1-Touche]. 5 Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Privé)]. – Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Public)] pour enregistrer les adresses dans le carnet d'adresses privé. – Si l'enregistrement ou l'édition d'adresses sont interdits par les réglages Administrateur, ces opérations ne sont pas possibles. Pour plus de détails, consultez votre Administrateur. La liste des adresses enregistrées dans le carnet d'adresses (privé) apparaît. 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10-6 Advanced Function Operations 6 Appuyez sur [Nouveau]. – Pour modifier une adresse enregistrée, sélectionnez l'adresse voulue, et appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier]. – Pour supprimer une adresse enregistrée, sélectionnez l'adresse voulue, et appuyez ensuite sur [Eff.]. – Pour vérifier une adresse enregistrée, sélectionnez l'adresse souhaitée et appuyez ensuite sur [Vér.Par. Tâches.]. 7 Sélectionnez le type de destination à enregistrer, puis spécifiez les réglages des éléments requis. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une adresse, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur – Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax réseau. Advanced Function Operations 10-7 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10 10.2.2 Groupe On peut, en les regroupant, enregistrer plusieurs adresses dans Mon Carnet d'adresses et constituer ainsi une destination de groupe. Mon Carnet d'adresses permet d'enregistrer jusqu'à 10 destinations de groupe (enregistrement maximum de 100 destinations par groupe). 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré. 2 Appuyez sur [Utilitaires/Compteur]. 3 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-Touche/Boîte]. 4 Appuyez sur [Créer Destination 1-Touche]. 5 Appuyez sur [Groupe]. La liste des destinations de groupe enregistrées apparaît. 6 Appuyez sur [Privé], puis sur [Nouveau]. – Pour éditer une destination de groupe enregistrée, sélectionnez la destination de groupe voulue, et appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier]. – Pour supprimer une destination de groupe enregistrée, sélectionnez la destination de groupe voulue, et appuyez ensuite sur [Eff.]. – Pour vérifier une destination de groupe enregistrée, sélectionnez la destination de groupe souhaitée et appuyez ensuite sur [Vér.Par. Tâches.]. – Appuyez sur [Public] pour afficher les destinations de groupe publiques. 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10-8 Advanced Function Operations 7 Assurez-vous de sélectionner [Groupe Privé] comme destination, puis spécifiez les réglages des éléments requis. – Lorsque l'on sélectionne [Destinataire], les adresses enregistrées dans Mon Carnet d'adresses s'affichent. Sélectionnez les adresses à grouper. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement des destinations de groupe, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur – Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax réseau. Advanced Function Operations 10-9 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10 10.3 Copier des adresses enregistrées d'un carnet à l'autre Les adresses enregistrées peuvent être copiées de Mon Carnet d'adresses vers le carnet d'adresses public et réciproquement. ! Détails En revanche, les destinations de groupe ne peuvent pas être échangées entre ces deux types de carnets d'adresses. 10.3.1 Copier les adresses du carnet public sur Mon Carnet d'adresses Les adresses enregistrées du carnet d'adresses public peuvent être copiées sur Mon Carnet d'adresses. 1 Affichez l'écran Créer Destination 1-Touche. 2 Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Public)]. 3 Sélectionnez le type de destination voulu. La liste des adresses du type de destination sélectionné s'affiche. 4 Sélectionnez l'adresse à copier, et appuyez ensuite sur [Copier vers Adr pers]. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue de confirmation, sélectionnez [Oui], et appuyez ensuite sur [Valider]. L'adresse sélectionnée est copiée. 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10-10 Advanced Function Operations 10.3.2 Copier les adresses de Mon Carnet d'adresses sur le carnet d'adresses public Les adresses enregistrées de Mon Carnet d'adresses peuvent être copiées sur le carnet d'adresses public. 1 Affichez l'écran Créer Destination 1-Touche. 2 Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Privé)]. La liste des adresses enregistrées dans le carnet d'adresses (privé) apparaît. 3 Sélectionnez l'adresse à copier, et appuyez ensuite sur [Copier vers Adr Part]. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue de confirmation, sélectionnez [Oui], et appuyez ensuite sur [Valider]. L'adresse sélectionnée est copiée. Advanced Function Operations 10-11 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10 10.4 Utiliser Mon Carnet d'adresses lors de l'envoi Lorsque l'on envoie un document en mode Numérisation/Fax ou un document enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur, il est possible de spécifier l'adresse voulue figurant dans Mon Carnet d'adresses. 10.4.1 Spécifier une adresse Si vous utilisez les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses, l'écran suivant apparaît lorsque une adresse doit être spécifiée. Les adresses enregistrées dans Mon Carnet d'adresses s'affichent en fonction du type de destination. Sélectionnez une touche correspondant à la destination désirée. % Pour spécifier une adresse enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses public, appuyez sur [Public]. 10.4.2 Rechercher une adresse Si l'adresse voulue n'est pas localisée, elle peut faire l'objet d'une recherche. % Appuyez sur [Recher simple] sur l'écran de recherche d'adresse. – [Type d'adresse] sert à chercher l'adresse selon le type. – [Recherche détaillée] sert à chercher l'adresse d'après le nom de l'adresse ou une partie des données qu'elle contient. 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10-12 Advanced Function Operations 11 Index Advanced Function Operations 11-3 Index 11 11 Index A Activer Onglet 4-11 Adresse 4-9 Animation 4-11 B Barre d'outils 4-8 Boîte 5-8 C Cache 4-12, 5-4 Caractéristiques techniques 4-3 Carnet Adresses 10-5 Carnet d'adresses 10-3, 10-9 Carnet d'adresses public 10-3 Certificat-clé 2-5 Codage 4-11 Code d'accès 8-5 Code-requête 2-6 Connexion 5-6 Connexion à une boîte 5-8 Conventions du manuel 1-4 Cookies 4-12 Cryptage 8-5 CSS 4-11 D Déconnexion 5-7 E Enregistrement Photo 2-3, 7-3 Envoyer vers 6-14 É Écran Réglages Menu Principal 9-11 F Fenêtre Instantanée 4-11 G Groupe 10-7 H Histor. 4-9 Historique Formulaire 4-12 I ID numérique 8-6 Image 4-11 Image Panel 2-3, 6-3 Impres. dir. 8-7 Impression 4-10, 5-10 Infos Navigateur Web 4-12 J JavaScript 4-11 L License Management Server (LMS) 2-5, 2-8 Liste 4-11 Liste de fichiers 5-9 LK-101 2-3, 2-5 LK-102 2-3, 2-5 M Menu 4-10 Menu Application 3-4 Menu Principal 9-5 Mémoire externe 6-10, 6-14 Mémos Page 4-11 Mode Affichage 4-11 Mon Carnet d'adresses 2-4, 10-3 Mon Panneau 2-4, 9-3 N Navigateur Web 2-3, 4-3, 4-11 O Opération Page 4-11 P Page d'accueil 4-11 PageScope My Panel Manager 2-4 PageScope Web Connection 5-3, 7-3 Paramètres Numérisation/Fax 9-9 Paramètres Sélect. Couleur 9-11 Paramètres Touche Application 3-4 PDF 4-13, 8-5 Personnaliser 3-3, 6-15, 9-3 Propriétés des documents PDF 8-4 Proxy 4-12 R Rendu intelligent 4-7 Rendu Parfait 4-7 Rendu Rapide 4-11 Retour ligne auto 4-11 Réglage Écran d'accueil 9-13 Réglage Langue 9-7 Réglage Progr. Numéris./Fax 9-12 Réglage Programme Copie 9-12 Réglage Unité de Mesure 9-7 Réglages Copieur 9-8 Réglages Mon Panneau 9-6 S Sécurité 4-12 Sélect. couleur de copie imprim. 4-11 11-4 Advanced Function Operations Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Table des matières 1 Introduction 1.1 Nous voulons faire de vous un client satisfait...........................1-1 1.2 Explication des conventions........................................................1-2 1.3 Explication des concepts de base et symboles.........................1-3 Alimentation Papier ....................................................................1-3 “Largeur” et “Longueur” ..............................................................1-3 Orientation papier .......................................................................1-4 Portrait et Paysage.....................................................................1-4 Icônes d'affichage.......................................................................1-5 Icône de niveau de papier ..........................................................1-5 1.4 Energy Star® .................................................................................1-6 Définition d'un produit ENERGY STAR® ...................................1-6 1.5 Les composants et leurs fonctions.............................................1-7 1.6 Nomenclature et fonctions.........................................................1-11 Copieur .....................................................................................1-11 Accessoires ..............................................................................1-14 2 Conseils de sécurité 2.1 Symboles d’avertissement et de précaution ..............................2-1 2.2 Signification des symboles..........................................................2-1 AVERTISSEMENT .....................................................................2-2 ATTENTION ...............................................................................2-3 2.3 Précautions en utilisation quotidienne.......................................2-5 2.4 Instructions destinées à l’utilisateur...........................................2-6 Label CE (déclaration de conformité) .........................................2-6 For New Zealand Users:.............................................................2-6 2.5 Sécurité laser.................................................................................2-7 Rayonnement laser interne ........................................................2-7 CDRH Regulation .......................................................................2-8 Pour les utilisateurs européens ..................................................2-8 Pour les utilisateurs danois.........................................................2-8 Pour les utilisateurs finnois et suédois .......................................2-9 Pour les utilisateurs norvégiens..................................................2-9 Etiquette Sécurité Laser ..........................................................2-10 Émission d'ozone .....................................................................2-10 Niveau sonore ..........................................................................2-10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 2.6 Précautions d’installation ......................................................... 2-11 Lieu d'implantation ................................................................... 2-11 Alimentation ............................................................................. 2-11 Espace requis .......................................................................... 2-12 2.7 Précautions d’utilisation............................................................ 2-13 Environnement......................................................................... 2-13 Utilisation correcte ................................................................... 2-13 Transport du copieur................................................................ 2-15 Manipulation des consommables............................................. 2-15 Stockage de copies.................................................................. 2-15 2.8 Cadre juridique de la copie........................................................ 2-16 3 Fonctions disponibles 3.1 Fonctions utiles ............................................................................ 3-1 Copier un livre ou un magazine ................................................. 3-1 Copie pour Livret........................................................................ 3-4 Agrafage automatique des pages pendant la copie................... 3-6 Imprimer des copies multiples de tickets ................................... 3-8 Copier tout en effaçant une zone autour du document ........... 3-12 Economiser le papier ............................................................... 3-15 Economiser l'électricité ............................................................ 3-17 4 Avant de réaliser des copies 4.1 Noms des pièces du panneau de contrôle et leurs fonctions ....................................................................................... 4-1 4.2 Vérifier les réglages ..................................................................... 4-3 Pour vérifier les réglages ........................................................... 4-3 Pour modifier les réglages ......................................................... 4-4 4.3 Opérations Accessibilité Utilisateur ........................................... 4-5 Modifier le réglage de l'affichage de l'écran (fonction “Mode Ecran”) ............................................................. 4-6 Modifier le paramétrage des touches (fonction “Vitesse Touche”)........................................................ 4-7 Modifier le délai d'Initialisation automatique (fonction “Ecran Confirmation”) .................................................. 4-8 Changer la durée d'affichage de l'écran “Travail enregistré” (fonction “Ecran Notification”) ..................... 4-9 Modifier le volume des bips et des alarmes (fonction “Paramétrage Sons”)................................................. 4-10 4.4 Agrandir les fenêtres de l’écran tactile..................................... 4-11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4.5 Mettre le copieur sous tension et hors tension .......................4-12 Mise en route du copieur ..........................................................4-12 Quand le copieur est mis sous tension.....................................4-12 Arrêt du copieur ........................................................................4-13 Quand le copieur est mis hors tension .....................................4-14 Initialisation automatique ..........................................................4-14 Mode Economie d'énergie........................................................4-15 Mode Veille...............................................................................4-15 4.6 Régler l’inclinaison du panneau de contrôle............................4-16 4.7 Utilisation de l’écran tactile........................................................4-17 Description de l'écran tactile.....................................................4-17 Sélections par défaut................................................................4-17 Utilisation de l'écran tactile .......................................................4-18 Description des écrans .............................................................4-19 Écran Liste Tâches...................................................................4-20 Vérifier l'état d'une tâche ..........................................................4-21 Vérifier l'ordre d'impression ......................................................4-22 Contrôler/supprimer des éléments figurant sur la liste de l'écran Impression ..............................................4-23 Rappel Mémoire .......................................................................4-24 Utiliser la fonction Rappel Mémoire..........................................4-25 5 Opérations élémentaires de copie 5.1 Réalisation de copies ...................................................................5-1 5.2 Arrêter une opération de copie ...................................................5-3 Arrêter/Reprendre/Supprimer une tâche de copie......................5-3 5.3 Interrompre une tâche de copie...................................................5-4 Interrompre une opération de copie ...........................................5-4 5.4 Effectuer des copies sur comptes ..............................................5-6 Utiliser le paramètre “Contrôle Département” ............................5-6 Pour réaliser des copies sur des comptes validés ....................5-6 6 Fonctions auxiliaires 6.1 Fonction “Couverture” .................................................................6-1 Ajouter des pages de couverture................................................6-1 Procéder aux réglages de la fonction “Couverture”....................6-3 6.2 Fonction “Intercalaires” ..............................................................6-4 Insérer des pages (Intercalaires) entre les copies......................6-4 Procéder aux réglages de la fonction “Intercalaires” .................6-5 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6.3 Fonction “Encart transparent”.................................................... 6-6 Insérer des pages entre des copies de transparents................. 6-6 Procéder à des réglages de la fonction “Encart transparent” ............................................................................... 6-7 6.4 Fonction “Marge” ......................................................................... 6-8 Réaliser des copies avec marge de reliure ............................... 6-8 Pour procéder à des réglages de la fonction “Marge” ............... 6-9 6.5 Fonction “Effacement bords” ................................................... 6-10 Effacer des portions de copies................................................. 6-10 Pour procéder à des réglages de la fonction “Effacement bords” ................................................................. 6-11 6.6 Fonction “Multi-image” ............................................................. 6-12 Impression multicopie du même original sur une seule feuille ....................................................................... 6-12 Pour procéder à des réglages de la fonction “Multi-image” ........................................................................... 6-12 6.7 Fonction “Diffusion” ................................................................. 6-14 Imprimer des numéros de diffusion sur les jeux de copies.................................................................................. 6-14 Procéder aux réglages de la fonction “Diffusion” .................... 6-14 6.8 Fonction “Filigrane” .................................................................. 6-16 Procéder aux réglages de la fonction “Filigrane” ..................... 6-16 6.9 Fonction “Tampon” ................................................................... 6-17 Réaliser des copies avec la fonction “Tampon” ....................... 6-17 6.10 Fonction “Inversion Noir/Blanc” .............................................. 6-19 Inverser les zones noires et les zones blanches sur les copies ........................................................................... 6-19 Procéder au réglage de la fonction “Inversion Noir/Blanc” ............................................................................... 6-19 6.11 Fonction “Lecture fragmentée” ................................................ 6-20 Numériser un document en plusieurs fois................................ 6-20 Réaliser des copies avec la fonction “Lecture fragmentée”.............................................................................. 6-20 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7.1 Ecrans du mode Utilitaires...........................................................7-1 Écran Utilitaires ..........................................................................7-1 Ecran Choix utilisateur................................................................7-1 Ecran Compteurs........................................................................7-2 Ecran Rappel programme ..........................................................7-2 Ecran Mode utilisateur................................................................7-2 Ecrans Mode Gestion Administrateur.........................................7-3 7.2 Fonctions du Choix utilisateur ....................................................7-4 7.3 Procédure de configuration standard.........................................7-6 Pour définir la fonction “Rappel mémoire” ..................................7-6 Pour définir la fonction “Détection originaux mixtes” ..................7-7 Pour définir la fonction “Langue d'Affichage”..............................7-8 Pour définir la fonction “Mode Orig. > Copie par défaut” ............7-9 Pour définir la fonction “Papier Auto / Taux Auto” ...................7-10 Pour définir la fonction “Magasin prioritaire” ............................7-11 Pour définir la fonction “Papier dédié” ......................................7-12 Pour définir la fonction “Taux prioritaire 2en1, 4en1 et livret”.....................................................................................7-14 Pour définir la fonction “Economie d'énergie” ..........................7-15 Pour définir la fonction “Mise en veille” ....................................7-16 Pour définir la fonction “Extinction écran”.................................7-17 Pour définir la fonction “Initialisation automatique”...................7-18 Pour définir la fonction “Initialisation / retrait cmpt clé” .............7-19 Pour définir la fonction “Disposition copie 4en1” .....................7-20 Pour définir la fonction “Mode densité” ....................................7-21 Pour définir la fonction “Densité copie”.....................................7-22 Pour définir la fonction “Densité impression” ...........................7-23 Pour définir la fonction “Priorité finition” ...................................7-24 Pour définir la fonction “Tri sélectif” .........................................7-25 Pour définir la fonction “Réceptacle” (en option) ......................7-26 Pour définir la fonction “Originaux plus petits”..........................7-27 Pour définir la fonction “Déshumidification Scanner”................7-28 Pour définir la fonction “Agrafage centre/Marquage pli” (seulement si le module de finition ou le kit agrafage à cheval est installé) .................................................................7-29 Pour définir la fonction “Densité (ADF)” (uniquement si l'introducteur/retourneur de document est installé) ...............7-30 7.4 Enregistrer un tampon composé d’une image ........................7-31 Enregistrer un tampon-image...................................................7-31 7.5 Voir les compteurs (fonction “Compteurs”).............................7-33 Pour voir les compteurs............................................................7-33 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7.6 Utiliser les programmes Copie.................................................. 7-34 Pour mémoriser un programme de copie ................................ 7-34 Pour supprimer un programme de copie ................................. 7-35 Pour utiliser un programme de copie ....................................... 7-36 7.7 Fonctions du Mode utilisateur .................................................. 7-37 Pour régler le volume des avertissements sonores (fonction “Bip de confirmation” et “Volume Alarme”)................ 7-37 Pour nettoyer l'écran tactile (fonction “Nettoyage écran”)........ 7-39 Pour déshumidifier l'introducteur/retourneur de document (fonction “Déshumidification”) ................................. 7-40 Pour faire l'appoint en toner (fonction “Apport toner”).............. 7-41 8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8.1 Ecrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur................................... 8-1 Pour afficher les écrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur......... 8-1 8.2 Réglages préalables..................................................................... 8-3 Spécifier la date et l'heure.......................................................... 8-3 Pour régler la date et l'heure...................................................... 8-3 Pour définir le fuseau horaire ..................................................... 8-5 Pour définir le fuseau horaire ..................................................... 8-5 8.3 Paramètres administrateur .......................................................... 8-6 Modifier le code d'accès administrateur..................................... 8-6 Pour définir le code d'accès administrateur ............................... 8-6 Restriction du nombre de copies ............................................... 8-8 Pour spécifier le nombre maximal de copies qui peut être imprimé ............................................................................... 8-8 Désactiver Mode Veille .............................................................. 8-9 Pour désactiver le mode Veille .................................................. 8-9 8.4 Paramètres Contrôle Département ........................................... 8-10 Mode Contrôle Département.................................................... 8-10 Pour définir le mode Contrôle Département ............................ 8-11 Données d'information sur le compte....................................... 8-13 Pour imprimer les données d'informations sur les comptes..... 8-13 Effacer tous les compteurs ...................................................... 8-14 Modifier les informations sur les comptes................................ 8-15 8.5 Configurer l’enregistrement de comptes ................................. 8-16 Enregistrement de comptes ..................................................... 8-16 Pour enregistrer des comptes.................................................. 8-16 Compteur Département ........................................................... 8-19 Pour vérifier le nombre de tirages effectué par chaque compte ..................................................................................... 8-19 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8.6 Paramétrer l’accès à la machine................................................8-20 Verrouillage d'accès (Access Lock)..........................................8-20 Procéder aux réglages de la fonction “Access Lock” ...............8-20 8.7 Configurer les fonctions logicielles (Soft Switch) ...................8-21 Paramétrage de la réinitialisation du mode Copie avec introducteur/retourneur de document installé (Mode 429) ..............................................................................8-22 8.8 Lever le verrouillage ...................................................................8-23 Déverrouillage ..........................................................................8-23 9 Papier Copie 9.1 Caractéristiques papier ................................................................9-1 Types de papier..........................................................................9-1 Formats papier ...........................................................................9-2 Capacité de papier .....................................................................9-3 9.2 Papier à éviter................................................................................9-4 9.3 Zone d’impression ........................................................................9-5 9.4 Stockage du papier.......................................................................9-5 9.5 Sélection automatique de la source papier ................................9-6 Conditions préalables .................................................................9-6 Ordre de sélection d'un magasin alternatif .................................9-6 9.6 Chargement du papier..................................................................9-7 Chargement du papier dans le 1er, 2ème, 3ème et 4ème magasin........................................................................9-8 Chargement du papier dans le magasin grande capacité ....................................................................................9-10 Chargement du papier dans le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles..............................................................................9-11 Pour charger du papier ordinaire .............................................9-11 Pour charger des cartes postales.............................................9-12 Pour charger des enveloppes...................................................9-13 Pour charger des transparents de rétroprojection ....................9-14 Pour charger des planches d'étiquettes ...................................9-14 Pour définir un format de papier non-standard (personnalisé)...........................................................................9-15 Pour enregistrer un format de papier non-standard (personnalisé)...........................................................................9-17 Pour sélectionner un format de papier non-standard (personnalisé)...........................................................................9-19 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 9.7 Sélectionner le réglage Papier .................................................. 9-20 Pour sélectionner le papier chargé dans un magasin .............. 9-20 Pour sélectionner le papier chargé dans le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles....................................................... 9-20 10 Documents originaux 10.1 Introduction du document......................................................... 10-1 Utilisation de l'introducteur/retourneur de document................ 10-1 Types de document ................................................................ 10-1 Document de formats uniformes.............................................. 10-1 Documents pour le mode Détection originaux mixtes.............. 10-1 Originaux de largeurs mixtes ................................................... 10-2 Précautions relatives aux originaux ......................................... 10-3 10.2 Chargement de l’original dans l’introducteur/retourneur de document .............................................................................. 10-4 Chargement du document ....................................................... 10-4 Pour charger un document de formats mixtes (fonction “Détection Originaux Mixtes”).................................... 10-6 10.3 Positionnement des documents sur la vitre d’exposition...... 10-8 Pour positionner des documents en feuilles ............................ 10-9 Pour positionner des documents transparents ou translucides............................................................................ 10-10 Pour positionner des livres ou des magazines ...................... 10-11 10.4 Chargement de documents pour des applications spécifiques................................................................................ 10-12 Description du tableau ........................................................... 10-12 Originaux rectos..................................................................... 10-13 Originaux recto/verso avec reliure à gauche ......................... 10-19 Originaux recto/verso avec reliure en haut ............................ 10-25 10.5 Documents de grand format ................................................... 10-31 Précautions concernant les copies A3 L/B4 L ....................... 10-31 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11.1 Spécifier les paramètres de finition ......................................... 11-1 Réglages Finition disponibles .................................................. 11-1 Considérations sur l'utilisation des paramètres “Tri” et “Groupe”............................................................................... 11-4 Tri décalé ................................................................................. 11-4 Tri croisé .................................................................................. 11-4 Groupe décalé ......................................................................... 11-5 Groupe croisé .......................................................................... 11-5 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Réaliser des copies avec le paramètre Agrafage.....................11-6 Réaliser des copies avec le paramètre “Perforation” ...............11-8 Marquage pli et Pliage..............................................................11-9 Notes relatives à la position d'agrafage..................................11-10 Notes sur le nombre de jeux qu'il est possible d'agrafer ........11-12 Notes sur la position de perforation........................................11-12 11.2 Spécifier une sélection Zoom..................................................11-13 Sélectionner un taux Zoom.....................................................11-14 Spécifier un taux zoom personnalisé (“Taux Perso”) ............11-15 Pour entrer un taux zoom personnalisé..................................11-15 Pour mémoriser les taux zoom personnel et minimal.............11-16 Pour rappeler un taux zoom personnalisé enregistré en mémoire.............................................................................11-16 Pour spécifier des échelles verticales et horizontales différentes (réglage “Zoom X/Y”) ............................................11-17 11.3 Sélectionner les réglages Orig. > Copie .................................11-18 Paramètres Orig. > Copie.......................................................11-18 Pour spécifier les paramètres Orig. > Copie...........................11-21 Copier un document relié .......................................................11-23 Copier un livre ........................................................................11-25 Copier des pages d'un livre sur deux pages recto/verso........11-28 Sélection rapide des paramètres par défaut...........................11-30 11.4 Spécifier une densité copie......................................................11-31 Sélectionner un paramètre de densité....................................11-31 Sélectionner le réglage “Texte” .............................................11-31 Sélectionner le réglage “Photo” .............................................11-32 Sélectionner le réglage “Texte/Photo” ...................................11-33 12 Messages de l’écran tactile 12.1 Quand le message “Prêt à copier. Ajouter du toner.” s’affiche........................................................................................12-1 12.2 Quand le message “Ajouter du toner.” s’affiche .....................12-2 Pour remplacer la cartouche de toner ......................................12-2 12.3 Quand le message “Agrafeuse vide.” s’affiche .......................12-5 Pour remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes destinée au module de finition ...............................................................12-5 Pour remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes du kit agrafage à cheval ....................................................................................12-8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12.4 En cas de serrage papier ......................................................... 12-11 Localisation des serrages papier ........................................... 12-11 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document .......................................................................... 12-12 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans la section de fixation .......... 12-14 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans l'unité recto-verso............... 12-18 Retrait d'un serrage dans le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles .......................................................................... 12-18 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans le 1er ou 2ème magasin papier ...................................................................... 12-19 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans le 3ème ou 4ème magasin papier ...................................................................... 12-20 Pour retirer un serrage papier dans le magasin grande capacité ..................................................................... 12-21 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans le module de finition intégré ........................................................................ 12-22 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans le kit bac courrier ............... 12-24 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans le kit agrafage à cheval.................................................................................. 12-26 12.5 Quand le message “Agrafage impossible.” s’affiche ........... 12-27 Retrait des agrafes coincées ................................................. 12-27 12.6 Quand le message “Le collecteur de déchets de perforation est plein.” s’affiche............................................... 12-31 Pour vider le collecteur de déchets de perforation................. 12-31 13 Incidents 13.1 Principaux messages et leurs solutions .................................. 13-1 13.2 En cas de copies incorrectes .................................................... 13-3 13.3 Dysfonctionnement du copieur................................................. 13-6 14 Annexe 14.1 Caractéristiques techniques ..................................................... 14-1 Copieur Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 ............................................... 14-1 Introducteur/retourneur de document AFR-19 ......................... 14-3 Originaux de largeurs mixtes ................................................... 14-3 Unité recto/verso AD-16........................................................... 14-4 Module alternateur SB-1 .......................................................... 14-4 Magasin d'alimentation papier PF-124..................................... 14-4 Magasin d'alimentation papier deux directions PF-210 ........... 14-5 Magasin grande capacité PF-122 ............................................ 14-5 Module de finition intégré FN-117............................................ 14-6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Kit bac supplémentaire AK-1 ...................................................14-7 Kit bac courrier MK-1................................................................14-7 Kit de perforation PK-6 .............................................................14-7 Kit agrafage à cheval SK-1.......................................................14-8 Séparateur travaux JS-203.......................................................14-8 14.2 Entretien du copieur ...................................................................14-9 Nettoyage .................................................................................14-9 Revêtement ..............................................................................14-9 Vitre d'exposition ......................................................................14-9 Panneau de contrôle ................................................................14-9 Vitre d'exposition ....................................................................14-10 14.3 Table d’association des fonctions ..........................................14-11 Codes de combinaison de fonctions.......................................14-14 14.4 Tableaux format papier et taux zoom .....................................14-16 Formats papier .......................................................................14-16 Taux de zoom.........................................................................14-17 14.5 Consommables .........................................................................14-20 Papier .....................................................................................14-20 Cartouche de toner.................................................................14-20 Cartouche d'agrafes ...............................................................14-21 14.6 Index...........................................................................................14-22 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Introduction 1 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 1-1 1 Introduction 1.1 Nous voulons faire de vous un client satisfait Merci d'avoir porté votre choix sur Konica Minolta. Pour une performance optimale et une utilisation efficace de votre copieur, le présent manuel vous apporte des informations sur les sujets suivants :
Éléments et accessoires du copieur
Premiers pas . . .
Les fonctions en détail
Combiner les fonctions
Réglages Utilitaires
Incidents : cause et action Veuillez lire ce manuel attentivement et le conserver à portée de main pour pouvoir vous y reporter en cas de besoin. Rangez-le dans son logement à l'arrière du copieur. Les services ci-dessous restent à votre disposition pour vous fournir des informations supplémentaires et une assistance concrète en cas de panne :
le service après-vente Konica Minolta Lorsque vous demandez de l'assistance, munissez-vous du numéro de série (voir la plaque d'identification de votre photocopieur) et de la date d'achat du photocopieur : nous pourrons ainsi vous dépanner rapidement et efficacement en cas d'anomalie de fonctionnement. . . . Car nous voulons que vous soyez un client satisfait. 1 Introduction 1-2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 1.2 Explication des conventions Les repères et mises en forme utilisés dans le présent manuel sont décrits ci-dessous. AVERTISSEMENT Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures graves ou mortelles.  Pour une utilisation sûre du copieur, il y a lieu de prendre en compte tous les avertissements. ATTENTION Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures graves ou des dommages matériels.  Pour une utilisation sûre du copieur, il y a lieu de prendre en compte tous les avertissements.  Note* (*Peut aussi apparaître sous “Important” ou “Conseil”) Le texte mis en valeur de cette manière contient des informations utiles et des conseils destinés à une utilisation sûre du copieur. 1 Le chiffre 1 ainsi formaté indique la première étape d'une séquence d'actions. 2 Les nombres suivants ainsi formatés indiquent les étapes successives d'une série d'actions. ? Le texte formaté dans ce style offre une assistance supplémentaire.  Le texte ainsi formaté décrit l'action permettant d'obtenir le résultat escompté. Touche [Copie] Les noms des touches du panneau de contrôle apparaissent dans le format indiqué ci-dessus. L'illustration figurant ici indique quelles opérations doivent être effectuées. Introduction 1 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 1-3 1.3 Explication des concepts de base et symboles On trouvera ci-dessous la signification des mots et symboles utilisés dans le présent manuel. Alimentation Papier En impression, l'alimentation papier se fait du côté droit du copieur et le papier sort dans le plateau de sortie du haut ou dans l'option de sortie à gauche, face imprimée vers le bas. Le sens d'introduction du papier est illustré par les flèches dans le schéma ci-dessous. “Largeur” et “Longueur” En ce qui concerne les dimensions mentionnées dans le présent manuel, la première valeur fait toujours référence à la largeur du papier (“Y” dans l'illustration) et la deuxième valeur à la longueur (“X”). 1 Introduction 1-4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Orientation papier Orientation longitudinale ( ) Si la largeur (Y) du papier est inférieure à la longueur (X), l'orientation du papier est dite verticale ou “en portrait”, indiquée par “L” ou . Orientation transversale ( ) Si la largeur (Y) du papier est supérieure à la longueur (X), l'orientation du papier est horizontale ou “en paysage”, indiquée par, “C” ou . Portrait et Paysage Portrait En orientation “portrait” le papier disposé verticalement, comme un portrait. Paysage En orientation “paysage” le papier est disposé horizontalement, comme un paysage. Introduction 1 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 1-5 Icônes d’affichage Papier ordinaire Papier épais Transparents de rétroprojection Enveloppe Icône de niveau de papier Les icônes représentées ici peuvent s'afficher pour indiquer qu'un manque papier effectif ou imminent. La réserve de papier est épuisée. 1 Introduction 1-6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 1.4 Energy Star® En tant que Partenaires ENERGY STAR®, nous avons pu déterminer que cet appareil satisfait les Directives ENERGY STAR® en matière d'efficience énergétique. Définition d’un produit ENERGY STAR® Un produit ENERGY STAR® intègre une fonction spéciale qui lui permet de basculer automatiquement en “mode d'économie d'énergie” à l'issue d'une certaine période d'inactivité. Un produit ENERGY STAR® utilise l'énergie avec plus d'efficacité, vous permet d'économiser de l'argent sur vos factures d'électricité et contribue à protéger l'environnement. Introduction 1 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 1-7 1.5 Les composants et leurs fonctions 1 2 3 4 6 5 8 7 No. Nom de la pièce Description 1 Introducteur/retourneur de document AFR-19 (en option) Introduit automatiquement une feuille de document à la fois pour la numérisation du recto, puis retourne automatiquement la feuille du document pour la numérisation du verso. Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “introducteur/ retourneur de document”. 2 Kit couvre-original OC-6 (en option) Permet de maintenir en place le document chargé. Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “couvre-original”. 3 Meuble copie CD-4M (en option) On peut installer le copieur sur le meuble copie. L'utilisation du meuble copie permet d'installer le copieur au sol. Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “meuble copie”. 4 Magasin grande capacité PF-122 (en option) Cassette de grande contenance pour 2500 feuilles de papier. Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “magasin grande capacité”. 5 Magasin d'alimentation papier deux directions PF-210 (en option) Magasin d'approvisionnement papier à deux niveaux. Chaque bac d'alimentation peut contenir 500 feuilles de papier. Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “magasin d'alimentation papier”. 6 Séparateur travaux JS-203 (en option) Permet de séparer les pages imprimées Tirez le levier pour retirer le papier. • Pour pouvoir utiliser le séparateur travaux, le module alternateur doit être installé. 7 Unité recto/verso AD-16 Retourne automatiquement les pages et les imprime sur chaque face. Désignée dans ce manuel sous le terme “unité recto/verso”. Pour utiliser l'unité recto-verso, le module alternateur est nécessaire. 8 Module alternateur SB-1 Il permet de retourner la page lors d'une copie recto-verso. Il est nécessaire pour utiliser l'unité recto-verso. 1 Introduction 1-8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11 10 9 13 12 No. Nom de la pièce Description 9 Magasin d'alimentation papier PF124 (en option) Equipé d'un magasin papier qui peut contenir 500 feuilles (pour unité d'alimentation papier supérieure seulement). Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “magasin d'alimentation papier”. 10 Module de finition intégré FN-117 (en option) Assure la finition des pages imprimées, selon le mode de finition choisi (tri ou agrafage), puis éjecte les pages Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “module de finition”. 11 Kit bac supplémentaire AK-1 (en option) Lorsque cette option est installée sur le module de finition, elle permet d'augmenter le nombre de bacs pour la séparation des pages imprimées. Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “3ème plateau de sortie papier”. 12 Kit agrafage à cheval SK-1 (en option) Lorsque cette option est installée sur le module de finition, les sélections Agrafage, Perforation, Marque de pliage et Livret sont disponibles comme fonctions de Finition. Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “kit agrafage à cheval”. 13 Kit bac courrier MK-1 (en option) Lorsque cette option est installée sur le module de finition, les pages imprimées peuvent être séparées et éjectées dans le bac approprié assigné à une personne ou un groupe spécifique. • Cette option ne peut être utilisées qu'avec les impressions commandées par l'ordinateur. Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “kit bac courrier”. Introduction 1 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 1-9 * Les options internes ne sont pas représentées. 14 Kit de perforation PK-6 (en option)* Lorsque cette option est installée sur le module de finition, la perforation devient possible. Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “kit de perforation”. 15 Mémoire 32 Mo/64 Mo/ 128 Mo M32-4/M64-2/M128-3 (en option)* Augmente la mémoire du copieur jusqu'à 192 Mo maximum (64 Mo de mémoire standard + 32/64/128 Mo de mémoire supplémentaire). L'extension de la mémoire permet d'augmenter le nombre de pages qui pourront être conservées en mémoire. Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “extension mémoire”. 16 Kit disque dur HDD6 (en option)* Permet de stocker un plus grand nombre de pages. Augmente le nombre de pages qui peuvent être numérisées. Permet aussi de multiples tâches de numérisation. • Pour bénéficier de l'extension des fonctions grâce au kit disque dur HDD-6, les contrôleurs d'imprimante, en option, Pi3505e ou Pi3505e/PS, doivent être installés. Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “disque dur”. 17 Contrôleur d'imprimante Pi3505e, Pi3505e/PS (en option) Contrôleur d'imprimante interne. Il permet d'utiliser ce copieur comme une imprimante informatique. Pour plus de détails, voir le manuel de l'utilisateur du contrôleur d’imprimante. 18 Kit Internet fax & numérisation réseau SU-3 (en option)* Kit interne Internet fax & numérisation réseau. Vous pouvez utiliser ce copieur comme scanner réseau ou comme télécopieur Internet. Pour de plus amples détails, consultez le manuel d'utilisation du mode Scanner. 19 Kit numérisation réseau SU-2 (en option)* Kit de de numérisation réseau interne. Vous pouvez utiliser ce copieur comme scanner réseau. Pour de plus amples détails, consultez le manuel d'utilisation du mode Scanner. 20 Carte interface réseau NC-4 (en option)* Elle est nécessaire pour utiliser ce copieur comme imprimante, scanner, ou comme fax Internet. Pour de plus amples détails, consultez le manuel d'utilisation du mode Scanner ou le manuel du contrôleur d’imprimante. 21 Kit interface parallèle (en option)* Utilisé comme imprimante, ce copieur reçoit les données d'impression au moyen d'une connexion parallèle (IEEE1284). • Quant le kit interface parallèle est installé, il faut lui adjoindre le contrôleur d’imprimante Pi3505e ou Pi3505e/PS, en option, ainsi que la carte interface réseau NC-4. No. Nom de la pièce Description 1 Introduction 1-10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Comment utiliser le séparateur travaux (JS-203) ? Permet de séparer les pages imprimées. Tirer le levier pour retirer le papier. Introduction 1 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 1-11 1.6 Nomenclature et fonctions Copieur 9 8 6 3 1 2 4 10 5 11 7 No. Nom de la pièce Description 1 Porte droite Ouvrir pour dégager un serrage papier. 2 Levier de déverrouillage de la porte droite Permet de débloquer la porte droite. 3 Plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles Sert à l'alimentation manuelle du papier pour effectuer des copies ou des impressions. Peut recevoir 150 feuilles de papier. Peut aussi recevoir du papier spécial. Voir page 9-11. 4 Extension plateau Tirez l'extension plateau pour charger du papier de grand format. 5 Guide papier S'ajuste à la largeur du papier. 6 Levier de déverrouillage Ouvrir pour dégager un serrage papier. 7 Indicateur de niveau papier A mesure que diminue la quantité de papier contenue dans le magasin papier, la zone en rouge augmente. 8 Porte frontale Ouvrir pour remplacer la cartouche de toner. Voir page 12-2. 9 Plateau de sortie papier Reçoit les pages éjectées du copieur, face imprimée orientée vers le bas. 10 Butée papier Empêche les pages imprimées de tomber du plateau de sortie papier. Utilisation subordonnées à l'installation du module de Tri (en option). 11 Écran tactile Afficheur à cristaux liquides sur le panneau de contrôle. Permet de spécifier divers paramètres de copie ou de changer de fonctions. 1 Introduction 1-12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 * Les options internes ne sont pas représentées. 20 19 18 17 12 13 16 15 No. Nom de la pièce Description 12 Couvre-document Permet de maintenir le document bien plaqué contre la vitre d'exposition. 13 Vitre d’exposition Pour scanner un document en introduction manuelle, le placer sur la vitre d'exposition. Placez le document, face imprimée vers le bas, sur la vitre d’exposition. 14 Module alternateur * Intégré à l'imprimante pour retourner le papier lors de l'impression de pages recto-verso. 15 Unité recto-verso Retourne les pages imprimées et permet ainsi l'impression automatique de pages recto-verso. Pour utiliser l'unité recto-verso, le module alternateur est nécessaire. Désignée dans ce manuel sous le terme “unité recto/ verso”. 16 Porte de l'unité recto-verso Ouvrir pour remédier à un serrage à l'intérieur de l'unité recto-verso. 17 1er magasin papier Contient jusqu'à 500 feuilles de papier. Il est possible de régler librement le format du papier, voir page 9-8. 18 2ème magasin papier Contient jusqu'à 500 feuilles de papier. Il est possible de régler librement le format du papier, voir page 9-8. 19 Panneau de contrôle Permet de démarrer la copie ou de spécifier diverses sélections. 20 Réglette document Sert à aligner le document. Introduction 1 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 1-13 21 22 23 No. Nom de la pièce Description 21 Connecteur de l'introducteur/retourneur de document Utilisé pour connecter le segment d'interconnexion de l'introducteur/retourneur de document. 22 Interrupteur d’alimentation Sert à mettre le copieur sous et hors tension, voir page 4-12. 23 Prise pour cordon d'alimentation Utilisée pour connecter le câble d'alimentation de l'imprimante. 1 Introduction 1-14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Accessoires Introducteur/retourneur de document Magasin d'alimentation papier (PF-124/PF-210)* * PF-210: Equipé d'un magasin papier qui peut contenir 500 feuilles (pour unité d'alimentation papier supérieure seulement). 2 5 1 6 8 9 10 11 3 13 4 12 7 No. Nom de la pièce Description 1 Guide document S'ajuste à la largeur du document. 2 Plateau d'introduction documents Charge, face imprimée vers le haut, les documents à copier. 3 Plateau sortie document Récupère les documents copiés. 4 Témoin d'impression S'allume en continu ou clignote pour indiquer l'état du copieur. 5 Butée papier Empêche les documents de tomber du plateau sortie document. No. Nom de la pièce Description 6 Levier de déverrouillage du battant inférieur droit Permet de débloquer le battant inférieur droit. 7 3ème magasin papier Chaque bac d'alimentation peut contenir 500 feuilles de papier. 8 4ème magasin papier Il est possible de régler librement le format du papier. Introduction 1 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 1-15 Module de finition intégré (FN-117) Kit bac courrier (MK-1) Précautions pour l'utilisation du module de finition, du kit agrafage à cheval et du kit bac courrier.
Ne placez pas d'objets sur le kit agrafage à cheval et sur le kit Bacs à courrier.
Ne placez pas d'objets sous les plateaux de sortie papier du module de finition. No. Nom de la pièce Description 9 2ème plateau de sortie papier (plateau copies triées) Recueille les pages qui ont été triées. 10 1er plateau de sortie papier (plateau copies non-triées) Reçoit les pages imprimées qui ne sont pas triées (réalisées avec la sélection “Non-Tri”). No. Nom de la pièce Description 11 Bac courrier Récupère les copies triées. 12 Couvercle du plateau de sortie papier Ouvrir pour dégager un serrage papier. 13 Porte de dégagement de serrage papier Ouvrir pour dégager un serrage papier. 1 Introduction 1-16 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Magasin grande capacité (PF-122) Kit bac supplémentaire (AK-1 ) Kit agrafage à cheval (SK-1) 15 18 14 16 17 19 No. Nom de la pièce Description 14 3ème magasin papier (LCC*) Contient jusqu'à 2500 feuilles de papier. 15 Battant inférieur droit Ouvrir pour dégager un serrage papier. 16 Bouton de déverrouillage du magasin Appuyez sur ce bouton pour charger le papier. No. Nom de la pièce Description 17 3ème plateau de sortie papier Récupère les pages imprimées. No. Nom de la pièce Description 18 Plateau de sortie papier Récupère les pages imprimées. 19 Porte de dégagement de serrage papier Ouvrir pour dégager les serrages papier qui se produisent dans le module de finition. Conseils de sécurité 2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 2-1 2 Conseils de sécurité Ce chapitre contient des instructions détaillées relatives à l'exploitation et à la maintenance de cette machine. Pour utiliser au mieux cet appareil, tous les opérateurs doivent lire avec attention ce guide et respecter à la lettre les instructions qui y figurent. Veuillez conserver ce guide à portée de la main et à proximité de la machine. * Ver06 Certains points du présent chapitre peuvent ne pas correspondre au produit acheté. 2.1 Symboles d’avertissement et de précaution 2.2 Signification des symboles Veuillez lire ce chapitre avant d'utiliser la machine. Il contient en effet des informations importantes quant à la sécurité de l'utilisateur et la prévention des problèmes liés à l'équipement. Assurez-vous de bien observer l'ensemble des précautions énumérées dans ce guide. La négligence de cet avertissement peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles. Le non-respect de cette précaution peut provoquer des blessures graves, ou des dommages matériels. AVERTISSEMENT ATTENTION Un triangle indique un danger contre lequel il y a lieu de se protéger. Ce symbole avertit d'un risque de brûlure. Une ligne diagonale indique une action interdite. Ce symbole met en garde contre un démontage du copieur. Un cercle noir indique une action impérative. Ce symbole signale le débranchement impératif du copieur. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 AVERTISSEMENT • Ne pas modifier ce produit, il pourrait prendre feu, subir un choc électrique ou tomber en panne. Si le produit utilise un laser, la source de son faisceau risque d'aveugler l'opérateur. • Ne pas essayer d'enlever les couvercles et les panneaux fixés sur le produit. Certains produits contiennent à l'intérieur des pièces haute-tension ou une source de faisceau laser susceptibles d'électrocuter ou d'aveugler l'opérateur. • N'utiliser que le cordon d'alimentation fourni. Si le cordon d'alimentation n'est pas livré, n'utilisez que le cordon et la fiche qui sont spécifiés dans les INSTRUCTIONS relatives au CORDON D'ALIMENTATION. L'utilisation d'un autre cordon peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. • Le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec le produit ne doit être utilisé qu'avec cette machine et jamais avec un autre appareil. Négliger cette précaution peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. • N'utiliser que la tension d'alimentation spécifiée. Un incendie ou une électrocution peuvent résulter d'un manquement à cette instruction. • Ne pas utiliser d'adapteur multiprises pour brancher tout autre périphérique ou toute autre machine. L'utilisation d'une prise d'alimentation acceptant une valeur de courant supérieure à celle indiquée peut déclencher un feu ou être source d'électrocution. Ne pas débrancher ni brancher le câble avec les mains humides car cela peut provoquer une électrocution. Insérer la prise de courant à fond dans la prise murale. Un incendie ou une électrocution peut résulter d'un manquement à cette instruction. • Ne jamais gratter ni éroder le cordon d'alimentation, ne pas placer d'objet lourd dessus, ne pas le chauffer, le tordre, le plier, ne pas tirer dessus, ni l'endommager. L'utilisation d'un cordon d'alimentation endommagé (conducteur exposé, fil cassé ou dénudé, etc.) peut provoquer un incendie ou une panne. Dès que l'une de ces conditions apparaît, placez immédiatement l'interrupteur sur Arrêt (OFF), débranchez la fiche de la prise murale, puis appelez le S.A.V. • En principe, n'utilisez pas de prolongateur. L'utilisation d'une rallonge peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. Contacter votre S.A.V. si une rallonge s'avère nécessaire. Ne pas poser de vase ni aucun autre récipient contenant de l'eau ni d'agrafes ou de petits objets métalliques sur le produit. L'eau renversée ou les objets métalliques tombés à l'intérieur du produit peuvent déclencher le feu ou provoquer une électrocution ou une panne. Si un morceau de métal, de l'eau ou tout autre corps étranger tombe à l'intérieur du produit, couper immédiatement l'alimentation, débrancher le cordon d'alimentation de la prise et contacter le technicien du Service Aprèsvente. Conseils de sécurité 2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 2-3 ATTENTION • Si cet appareil devient exceptionnellement chaud, ou s'il dégage de la fumée ou fait entendre un bruit insolite, ne continuez pas à l'utiliser. Mettez immédiatement l'interrupteur en position OFF (Arrêt), débranchez le câble d'alimentation de la prise murale, et contactez votre Service Après-vente. Si vous continuez à l'utiliser dans cet état, il peut prendre feu, ou être source d'électrocution. • Ne continuez pas à utiliser cet appareil s'il est tombé ou si son capot a été endommagé. Mettez immédiatement l'interrupteur en position OFF (Arrêt), débranchez le câble d'alimentation de la prise murale, et contactez votre Service Après-vente. Si vous continuez à l'utiliser dans cet état, il peut prendre feu, ou être source d'électrocution. Ne pas jeter la cartouche de toner ni du toner dans les flammes. Le toner chaud risque de se diffuser et de provoquer des brûlures ou d'autres dommages. Brancher le cordon d'alimentation à une prise électrique équipée d'une borne de mise à la terre. • Ne pas utiliser d'aérosols, de liquides ou de gaz inflammables à proximité de ce produit, il pourrait prendre feu. • Ne laissez pas de cartouche toner ou d'unité tambour à portée des enfants. Lécher ou ingérer toute partie de ces objets est nocif pour la santé. • Ne pas laisser le moindre objet obstruer les orifices de ventilation de ce produit. La chaleur pourrait s'accumuler à l'intérieur du produit et provoquer un incendie ou un quelconque dysfonctionnement. • Ne pas installer ce produit dans un endroit directement exposé aux rayons du soleil ou près d'un climatiseur ou d'un appareil de chauffage. Les variations de température occasionnées à l'intérieur du produit peuvent provoquer un dysfonctionnement, déclencher un feu ou provoquer une électrocution. • Ne pas installer ce produit dans un endroit poussiéreux ou exposé à la suie ou à la vapeur, à proximité d'une table de cuisine, d'une baignoire ou d'un humidificateur d'air. Un feu, une électrocution ou une panne peut se produire. • Ne pas placer ce produit sur un banc instable ou renversé ou dans un endroit soumis à des vibrations et des chocs importants. Il pourrait tomber et blesser quelqu'un ou provoquer une panne mécanique. • Une fois ce produit installé, montez-le sur un support stable. Si l'appareil bouge ou tombe, il peut blesser quelqu'un. • Ne pas stocker les unités de toner et les tambours PC à proximité d'un lecteur de disquettes ou d'une horloge sensibles au magnétisme. Ces appareils pourraient ne plus fonctionner correctement. Le compartiment de ce produit contient des zones soumises à de hautes températures, susceptibles d'entraîner des brûlures. Lors de la vérification de l'intérieur de la machine, à la recherche d'une anomalie comme un serrage papier par exemple, ne touchez pas les zones (autour de l'unité de fixation, etc.) qui sont indiquées par l'étiquette d'avertissement “ATTENTION - TRÈS CHAUD”. Ne placer aucun objet autour de la prise d'alimentation, celle-ci serait difficile à débrancher en cas d'urgence. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 La prise électrique murale devra être implantée près de la machine et facilement accessible, surtout en cas d'urgence car la fiche du cordon peut être dure à extraire de la prise. • Toujours utiliser ce produit dans un local bien ventilé. L'exploitation du produit dans un local mal ventilé pendant une longue période peut mettre votre santé en danger. Aérer la pièce à intervalles réguliers. • A chaque fois que vous déplacez ce produit, assurez-vous de débrancher le cordon d'alimentation et tous les autres câbles. Tout manquement à cette règle peut endommager le cordon ou les câbles et déclencher un feu ou provoquer une électrocution ou une panne. • Pour déplacer cet appareil, tenez-le toujours par les zones spécifiées dans le Manuel d'Utilisation ou dans d'autres documents. Si l'appareil tombe, il peut causer de graves blessures corporelles. Le produit risque également d'être endommagé ou de ne plus fonctionner correctement. • Débrancher le cordon d'alimentation plus d'une fois par an et nettoyer la zone entre les bornes de la prise. La poussière qui s'accumule entre les bornes peut provoquer un incendie. • Toujours tenir et tirer la prise lorsque vous débranchez le cordon. Le fait de tirer directement sur le cordon d'alimentation peut l'endommager et déclencher le feu ou provoquer une électrocution. Conseils de sécurité 2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 2-5 2.3 Précautions en utilisation quotidienne • Les cartouches toner, les unités tambour PC, ainsi que d'autres composants ou consommables ne doivent pas être stockés à la lumière directe du soleil ni à température élevée et/ou à l'humidité; cela pourrait dégrader la qualité de l'image et des dysfonctionnements pourraient en résulter. • Ne pas essayer de remplacer l'unité de toner et le tambour photoconducteur dans un endroit exposé aux rayons du soleil. Si le photoconducteur est exposé à la lumière intense, l'image risque d'être de mauvaise qualité. • Ne pas déballer une unité de toner ou un tambour photoconducteur avant que leur utilisation ne soit devenue nécessaire. Ne pas laisser traîner une unité déballée. Installez la immédiatement ou l'image risque d'être de mauvaise qualité. • Ne pas conserver les unités de toner et les photoconducteurs en position verticale ou à l'envers, sinon l'image risque d'être de mauvaise qualité. • Ne pas jeter ou laisser tomber une unité de toner ou un photoconducteur, sinon l'image risque d'être de mauvaise qualité. • Ne pas utiliser ce produit dans un endroit qui génère de l'ammoniac ou d’autres gaz et produits chimiques. Tout manquement à cette règle peut réduire la durée d'utilisation du produit, provoquer des dommages ou diminuer les performances. • N'utilisez pas ce produit dans un environnement dont la température excède la plage spécifiée dans le Manuel d'Utilisation, cela pourrait provoquer une panne ou un dysfonctionnement. • NE PAS essayer d'alimenter ce copieur avec du papier agrafé, du papier carbone ou des feuilles d'aluminium, ce qui pourrait entraîner un dysfonctionnement ou un feu. Ne pas toucher ni égratigner la surface de l'unité de toner, du rouleau de développement ni du photoconducteur, sinon l'image risque d'être de mauvaise qualité. Utiliser les fournitures et les consommables recommandés par le vendeur. L'utilisation de fournitures ou de consommables non recommandés risque d'entraîner une mauvaise qualité de l'image et des pannes. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 2.4 Instructions destinées à l’utilisateur Label CE (déclaration de conformité) Ce produit est conforme aux Directives de l'UE suivantes : 89/336/EEC, 73/23/EEC, 93/68/EEC, et 1999/5/EC. Cette déclaration concerne la zone de l'Union Européenne. Cet appareil doit être utilisé avec des câbles d'interface blindés. L'utilisation de câbles non-blindés est susceptible de causer des interférences avec les radiocommunications. En outre, elle est interdite en vertu des directives de l'UE. For New Zealand Users: The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom’s network service. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom “111” Emergency Service. The call log incorporated in this equipment does not record all answered calls. The call log, therefore may not agree with the Telecom account which may include calls not shown on the log. This equipment should not be used under any circumstances which may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers. Not all telephones will respond to incoming ringing when connected to the extension socket. Conseils de sécurité 2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 2-7 2.5 Sécurité laser Ceci est un appareil numérique qui fonctionne au moyen d'un laser. Ce laser ne présente aucun risque à condition d'être utilisé conformément aux instructions de ce manuel. Du fait que les rayonnements émis par le laser sont entièrement confinés à l'intérieur d'une enceinte de protection, les rayons laser ne peuvent fuir de la machine à aucune phase de toute opération relevant de l'utilisation normale. Cet appareil est certifié Produit laser de Classe 1, ce qui signifie qu'il ne génère aucun rayonnement laser dangereux. Rayonnement laser interne Puissance maximale de rayonnement moyen : 28,9 μW à l'ouverture laser de l'unité de tête d'impression. Longueur d'onde : 770-795 nm Ce produit utilise une diode laser de Classe 3b qui émet un rayon laser invisible. La diode laser et le miroir polygonal pour le palpage sont intégrés dans l'unité de tête d'impression. L'unité de tête d'impression n'est PAS UN ÉLÉMENT NÉCESSITANT UN ENTRETIEN SUR PLACE : Par conséquent, l'unité de tête d'impression ne doit être ouverte en aucune circonstance. L'illustration ci-dessus indique l'emplacement de l'ouverture laser, au travers de laquelle l'utilisateur ne doit JAMAIS regarder directement. Tête Ouverture laser de l'unité de tête d'impression d'impression 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 CDRH Regulation This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under Radiation Performance Standard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990. Compliance is mandatory for Laser products marketed in the United States and is reported to the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS). This means that the device does not produce hazardous laser radiation. The label shown on page 2-10 indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States. This is a semiconductor laser. The maximum power of the laser diode is 5 mW and the wavelength is 770-795 nm. Pour les utilisateurs européens Ceci est un laser à semi-conducteurs. La puissance maximale de la diode laser est de 5 mW et sa longueur d'onde est de 770-795 nm. Pour les utilisateurs danois Dansk: Dette er en halvlederlaser. Laserdiodens højeste styrke er 5mW og bølgelængden er 770-795 nm. CAUTION Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure. ATTENTION L'utilisation de commandes ou de réglages, l'application de procédures autres que celles spécifiées dans ce manuel peuvent entraîner une exposition dangereuse au rayonnement. ADVARSEL Usynlig laserstråling ved åbning, når sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion. Undgå udsættelse for stråling. Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC60825 sikkerheds kravene. Conseils de sécurité 2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 2-9 Pour les utilisateurs finnois et suédois Tämä on puolijohdelaser. Laserdiodin sunrin teho on 5 mW ja aallonpituus on 770-795 nm. Det här är en halvledarlaser. Den maximala effekten för laserdioden är 5 mW och våglängden är 770-795 nm. Pour les utilisateurs norvégiens Dette en halvleder laser. Maksimal effekt till laserdiode er 5 mW og bølgelengde er 770-795 nm. LOUKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT VAROITUS! Laitteen Käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle. VARNING! Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i denna bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1. VARO! Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle. Älä katso säteeseen. VARNING! Osynlig laserstrålning när denna del är öppnad och spärren är urkopplad. Betrakta ej strålen. ADVERSEL Dersom apparatet brukes på annen måte enn spesifisert i denne bruksanvisning, kan brukeren utsettes for unsynlig laserstråling som overskrider grensen for laser klass 1. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Etiquette Sécurité Laser Une Etiquette Sécurité Laser est apposée sur l'extérieur de la machine, à l'emplacement indiqué ci-dessous. Émission d’ozone ATTENTION Placer l’appareil dans une pièce largement ventilée.  Une quantité d’ozone négligeable se dégage pendant le fonctionnement de l’appareil quand celui-ci est utilisé normalement. Cependant, une odeur désagréable peut se faire sentir dans les pièces dont l’aération est insuffisante et lorsque l’appareil est utilisé de manière prolongée. Pour avoir la certitude de travailler dans un environnement réunissant des conditions de confort, santé et de sécurité, il est préférable de bien aérer la pièce ou se trouve l’appareil. Niveau sonore Pour les utilisateurs européens Réglementation sur le bruit des machines 3 GSGV, 18.01.1991 : Le niveau de pression acoustique pour l'utilisateur est égal ou inférieur à 70 dB(A) conformément à la norme européenne EN 27779. MINOLTA CO., LTD 2, Higashiakatsuchi, Yawata-cho, Toyokawa-shi Aichi-ken 442-8585, Japan MANUFACTURED: THIS PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR CHAPTER I, SUBCHAPTER J. 0946-7101-14 CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT For United States For Europe For 3rd Area Conseils de sécurité 2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 2-11 2.6 Précautions d'installation Lieu d'implantation Afin d'assurer une sécurité optimale ainsi que les meilleures performances de votre copieur, il est recommandé de l'installer dans un endroit qui répond aux conditions suivantes : - loin de rideaux ou de matières facilement inflammables. - dans un endroit à l'abri de l'eau et d'autres liquides. - dans un endroit à l'abri du soleil. - dans un endroit à l'abri de la ventilation d'une climatisation ou de la bouche d'un chauffage, et non exposé à des températures très basses ou très élevées. - dans un endroit bien ventilé. - dans un endroit ne présentant pas un taux d'humidité élevé. - dans un endroit qui ne soit pas trop poussiéreux. - sur un support qui ne soit pas sujet à des vibrations. - sur un support stable et horizontal. - dans un endroit où il n'y a pas génération d'ammoniac ou d'un autre gaz organique. - dans un endroit qui n'expose pas directement l'opérateur aux émanations se dégageant du copieur. - dans un endroit qui ne se trouve pas à proximité d'un appareil de chauffage. Alimentation L'alimentation requise est la suivante :
Fluctuation de tension : Maximum ±10%
Variation de fréquence : maximum ±0,3 Hz  Utiliser une source de tension la plus basse possible ou avec un minimum de variations de fréquence. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Espace requis Afin de faciliter le réapprovisionnement des consommables et l’intervention du Service Après-vente, il est souhaitable d’assurer les distances minimales indiquées ci-dessous.  Remarque Veillez à conserver un dégagement de 100 mm (4 pouces) ou davantage au dos du copieur pour la canalisation de ventilation. Unité : mm (pouce) 1500 (59) 328 710 (28) 100 1116 (44) 384 422 1138 (44-3/4) (15) (13) (16-1/2) (24-1/4) 1312 (51-3/4) 1757 (69-1/4) (12-3/4) 324 (4-3/4) 121 616 (4) Conseils de sécurité 2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 2-13 2.7 Précautions d’utilisation Environnement L'environnement requis pour le copieur est le suivant :
Température : 15°C (59°F) à 35°C (95°F) avec une fluctuation de 10°C (18°F) au maximum par heure
Humidité : 15% à 85% avec une fluctuation de 10% au maximum par heure Utilisation correcte Pour assurer les performances optimales du copieur, suivre les précautions ci-dessous. - Ne jamais poser d'objets lourds sur la vitre d'exposition et la préserver des heurts. - Ne jamais ouvrir les portes du copieur ni éteindre le copieur pendant la production de copies ; cela entraînerait un serrage papier. - Ne jamais approcher d'objets magnétiques ni utiliser un liquide inflammable près du copieur.  S'assurer que la fiche secteur est correctement branchée à la prise de courant en permanence. - S'assurer que la fiche secteur du copieur est toujours visible.  Toujours débrancher le copieur de la prise de courant lors de longues périodes d'inutilisation.  Toujours maintenir une bonne ventilation lorsque vous effectuez un grand nombre de copies. ATTENTION Si un orifice de ventilation est obstrué en surface, la chaleur s’accumule à l’intérieur du copieur et peut provoquer un dysfonctionnement ou un feu.  Ne pas laisser le moindre objet obstruer les orifices de ventilation. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 ATTENTION Le tour de l’unité de fixation est extrêmement chaud.  Veiller à ne pas toucher les pièces entourant l'unité de fixation, à l'exception de celles mentionnées dans le présent manuel, afin de réduire les risques de brûlures. En particulier, bien faire attention à ne pas toucher les pièces signalées par une étiquette d'avertissement, ainsi que les zones à proximité.  En cas de brûlure, rincer la peau à l'eau froide puis consulter un médecin. Conseils de sécurité 2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 2-15 Transport du copieur Si vous devez faire transporter le copieur sur une longue distance, veuillez préalablement consulter votre S.A.V. Manipulation des consommables Prendre les précautions suivantes lors de l'utilisation des consommables (cartouche de toner, papier, etc.).  Stocker les consommables dans un endroit qui répond aux conditions suivantes : à l'abri du soleil loin d'un appareil de chauffage non soumis à un taux élevé d'humidité pas trop poussiéreux  Stocker le papier qui a été extrait de son emballage mais qui n'a pas été chargé dans le magasin dans un sac en plastique dans un endroit frais et à l'abri de la lumière. - Utiliser exclusivement du toner spécialement fabriqué pour ce copieur. Ne jamais utiliser d'autres types de toner. - Garder tous les consommables hors de la portée des enfants. ATTENTION Précautions relatives à la manipulation de toner :  Veillez à ne pas renverser de toner dans le copieur, sur les vêtements ou sur les mains.  Si les mains sont en contact avec le toner, les laver immédiatement à l'eau et au savon.  En cas de projection de toner dans les yeux, les rincer immédiatement à l'eau puis consulter un médecin. Stockage de copies  Si les copies doivent être conservées pendant une longue période, les stocker dans un endroit protégé de la lumière pour éviter qu'elles ne se décolorent. - Les adhésifs qui contiennent certains solvants (par exemple les colles en aérosols) peuvent dissoudre le toner fixé sur les copies. 2 Conseils de sécurité 2-16 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 2.8 Cadre juridique de la copie Certains types de documents ne doivent jamais être copiés avec l'intention de faire passer les copies pour l'original. La liste suivante n'est pas exhaustive mais elle doit servir de guide pour un comportement responsable en matière de copie. Instruments financiers
Chèques personnels
Chèques de voyage
Mandats
Certificats de dépôt
Obligations ou autres titres de dettes
Titres de valeur Documents officiels
Coupons alimentaires
Timbres poste (oblitérés ou non)
Chèques ou traites tirés par des agences gouvernementales
Timbres fiscaux (oblitérés ou non)
Passeports
Papiers d'immigration
Permis de conduire et carte grise
Actes et titres de propriété Divers
Cartes d'identification, badges ou insignes
Les oeuvres protégées sans l'autorisation du propriétaire des droits Par ailleurs, il est rigoureusement interdit de copier des billets de monnaie nationale ou étrangère ou des oeuvres d'art sans la permission du propriétaire des droits. Si vous avez des doutes sur la nature des documents, consultez un conseiller juridique. Fonctions disponibles 3 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 3-1 3 Fonctions disponibles 3.1 Fonctions utiles L'installation des accessoires en option permet d'augmenter la fonctionnalité de ce copieur. Copier un livre ou un magazine Il est possible de dupliquer les pages individuelles d'un livre ou d'un magazine sur des copies recto-verso (une page par côté) et dans l'ordre original des pages. 1 Placez le document sur la vitre d'exposition, en l'alignant sur le repère Livre de la réglette document.  Lancez la copie dans l'ordre croissant de pagination. 2 Appuyez sur [Orig. > Copie], puis appuyez sur [Livre]. Original Copie 3 Fonctions disponibles 3-2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 3 Pour la reliure, appuyez sur [Livre Standard] ou [Livre Inversé], puis appuyez sur [Séparation]. Ensuite, appuyez sur [Entrée]. 4 Appuyez sur [Recto/Verso], puis appuyez sur [Ordre des pages]. 5 Appuyez sur [Livre], puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Fonctions disponibles 3 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 3-3 7 Lorsque le message indiqué cicontre apparaît, tournez la page du livre ou du magazine, repositionnez le document original sur la vitre d'exposition, puis appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. 8 Répétez l'étape 7, et une fois que la dernière page a été numérisée, appuyez sur [Fin]. Puis, appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. 3 Fonctions disponibles 3-4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Copie pour Livret On peut copier un document à la manière d'un livre afin de pouvoir assembler facilement les pages pour en faire un livret.  Remarque Pour la procédure suivante, l’introducteur/retourneur de document, en option, doit être installé. 1 Chargez le document dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document.  Le document peut aussi être placé sur la vitre d'exposition. 2 Appuyez sur [Orig. > Copie], puis appuyez sur [4en1/Livret]. Original Copie Fonctions disponibles 3 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 3-5 3 Appuyez sur [Création Livret], puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. 5 Une fois que toutes les copies sont imprimées, pliez les pages en deux pour former un livret.  Conseil Si le kit Agrafage à cheval est installé, il est possible de sélectionner la marquage du pli ou le pliage. Pour plus de détails, voir “Marquage pli et Pliage” à la page 11-9. 3 Fonctions disponibles 3-6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Agrafage automatique des pages pendant la copie Chaque jeu de copies peut être facilement agrafé.  Remarque Pour la procédure suivante, l’introducteur/retourneur de document et le module de finition, en option, doivent être installés. 1 Chargez le document dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document.  Le document peut aussi être placé sur la vitre d'exposition. 2 Appuyez sur [Finition]. Original Copie Agrafage Fonctions disponibles 3 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 3-7 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Tri]. 4 Appuyez sur [Agrafage 2 points]. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. 3 Fonctions disponibles 3-8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Imprimer des copies multiples de tickets On peut facilement réaliser des tickets pour un concert ou d'autres sortes de manifestations. A titre d'exemple, voici la procédure pour réduire de 50% un document de 210 mm × 74 mm et pour le copier sur du papier épais de format A4.  Important La copie de certains types de documents tombe sous le coup de la loi. Copier de tels documents est un délit sanctionné par la loi. (Pour plus de détails, voir “Cadre juridique de la copie” à la page 2-16.)  Remarque Si le document est placé directement sur la vitre d’exposition et que le format est détecté automatiquement, le document sera numérisé au format standard. Si le document n’est pas d’un format standard, mesurez d’abord le format du document. 1 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier. Original Copie Fonctions disponibles 3 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 3-9 2 Ouvrez le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles et chargez-le en papier.  Il peut contenir jusqu'à 50 feuilles de papier épais. 3 Appuyez sur [Papier]. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton de sélection de l'introducteur/retourneur de document, puis appuyez sur [Modif. Support]. 5 Appuyez sur [Carte], puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  Si c'est du papier d'un format non-standard qui est chargé, appuyez sur [Format personnel], puis spécifiez le format du papier. (Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-15.) 3 Fonctions disponibles 3-10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6 Appuyez sur [Zoom]. 7 Appuyez sur [× 0,5]. 8 Appuyez sur [Fonctions Auxiliaires], et puis appuyez sur [Multi-image]. 9 Appuyez sur [Entrée format]. Fonctions disponibles 3 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 3-11 10 Appuyez sur [Format personnel]. 11 Appuyez sur [X]. Puis, entrez sur le clavier numérique la longueur du côté X du document.  Dans cet exemple, réglez la longueur du côté X à “210”. 12 Appuyez sur [Y]. Puis, entrez sur le clavier numérique la longueur du côté Y du document.  Dans cet exemple, réglez la longueur du côté Y à “74”. 13 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Vous obtenez seize tickets de 105 mm × 37 mm copiés sur une feuille de papier. 3 Fonctions disponibles 3-12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Copier tout en effaçant une zone autour du document Afin de copier des documents qui présentent des marques, des en-têtes, ou des perforations indésirables, il est possible à l'impression de la copie, d'en effacer un cadre ou un côté.  Remarque La position et la largeur de la zone à effacer peuvent être spécifiées de manière à obtenir un effacement approprié au document à copier. La largeur de la zone effacée renvoie à la proportion du document qui sera effacée. Si l’on réalise des agrandissements ou des réductions, la même largeur sera effacée, et on obtiendra à l’impression une copie agrandie ou réduite. 1 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier. Original Copie Fonctions disponibles 3 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 3-13 2 Appuyez sur [Fonctions Auxiliaires], et puis appuyez sur [Effacement bords]. 3 Sélectionnez la position voulue de la zone d'effacement. (Exemple : Effacer un cadre) 4 Appuyez sur les touches flèches haut et bas, pour spécifier la largeur de la zone d'effacement. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 3 Fonctions disponibles 3-14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Fonctions disponibles 3 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 3-15 Economiser le papier La copie recto-verso et la copie 2en1 sont très utiles pour économiser les tirages papier ou pour réduire l'épaisseur d'un document volumineux. Voici à titre d'exemple, la procédure permettant d'imprimer deux pages individuelles d'un document sur une copie recto-verso.  Remarque Pour la procédure suivante, l’introducteur/retourneur de document, en option, doit être installé.  Conseil La copie recto-verso 2en1 et la copie recto 4en1 réduisent à un quart l’utilisation du papier, et la copie recto-verso 4en1 la réduit à un huitième. 1 Chargez le document dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document.  Le document peut aussi être placé sur la vitre d'exposition. Original Copie Copie recto-verso Copie 2en1 3 Fonctions disponibles 3-16 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 2 Appuyez sur [Orig. > Copie], puis appuyez sur [4en1/Livret]. 3 Appuyez sur [2en1 Recto/Verso]. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Fonctions disponibles 3 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 3-17 Economiser l’électricité Ce copieur peut être mis en mode Economie d'énergie. Pour cela, on peut utiliser le mode Economie d'énergie et le mode Veille pour que le copieur passe automatiquement dans un mode d'économie d'énergie lorsqu'il n'a pas été utilisé pendant une durée spécifiée. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Paramètres Utilisat.]. 3 Appuyez sur [3/6].  Pour spécifier les paramètres du mode Economie d'énergie, continuez à l'étape 4.  Pour spécifier les paramètres du mode Veille, passez à l'étape 7. 4 Appuyez sur [Economie d'énergie]. 3 Fonctions disponibles 3-18 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 5 Appuyez sur la touche [C] pour effacer la valeur courante, puis spécifiez sur le clavier la durée d'inactivité désirée à l'issue de laquelle le copieur passera en mode Economie d'énergie. 6 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 7 Appuyez sur [Mise en veille]. 8 Spécifiez sur le clavier la durée d'inactivité désirée à l'issue de laquelle le copieur passera en mode Veille. Fonctions disponibles 3 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 3-19 9 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 3 Fonctions disponibles 3-20 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Avant de réaliser des copies 4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4-1 4 Avant de réaliser des copies 4.1 Noms des pièces du panneau de contrôle et leurs fonctions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 12 11 10 9 8 17 16 15 14 13 No. Nom de la pièce Fonction 1 Écran tactile Affiche divers écrans et messages. Appuyez sur les éléments affichés sur l'écran tactile pour sélectionner des fenêtres et spécifier des réglages. 2 Touche Numérisation + Appuyez pour utiliser les fonctions de Numérisation IP. (Le kit Internet fax & numérisation réseau ainsi que la carte interface réseau doivent être installés.) 3 Touche Numérisation Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Numérisation. (La carte interface réseau, et le kit de numérisation réseau ou le kit Internet fax & numérisation réseau doivent être installés.) 4 Touche Copie Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Copie. 5 Interrupteur secondaire Permet d'allumer et d'éteindre le copieur. 6 Touche Code Appuyez sur cette touche lorsque vous devez entrer un code d'accès. • Si le paramètre “Mode Contrôle Dpt” est réglé sur “OFF”, une pression sur cette touche n'aura aucun effet. 7 Touche Interruption • Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Interruption. • Pour annuler le mode Interruption, appuyez une nouvelle fois sur la touche [Interruption]. . . . suite à la page suivante 4 Avant de réaliser des copies 4-2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8 Touche Initialisation Appuyez sur cette touche pour ramener tous les modes et toutes les fonctions à leurs valeurs par défaut. 9 Touche [C] (correction) • Appuyez pour remettre le nombre de copies sur “1”. • Appuyez pour effacer une sélection, comme le taux zoom ou le format, définie à l'aide du clavier numérique. 10 Touche Stop • Appuyez pour arrêter une opération de copie. • Appuyez sur cette touche pour arrêter la numérisation d'un document. 11 Touche Impression Appuyez sur cette touche pour lancer une opération de copie ou de numérisation. 12 Clavier numérique Permet d'entrer une valeur numérique, le nombre de copies par exemple. 13 Touche [Utilitaires] Permet d'afficher l'écran Utilitaires. Pour plus de détails, voir “7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires”. 14 Touche [Mode Contrôle] • Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher la liste de tous les réglages spécifiés. A partir de cette liste, on peut afficher un écran permettant de modifier un paramètre correspondant. • A partir de cet écran, on peut aussi enregistrer les paramètres courants en tant que programme de copie. 15 Touche [Accessibilité] Appuyez sur cette touche pour activer ou désactiver les fonctions d'accessibilité utilisateur. 16 Touche [Zoom Ecran] Appuyez sur cette touche pour agrandir les fenêtres qui apparaissent sur l'écran tactile. 17 Molette [Contraste] Permet de régler le contraste de l'écran tactile. No. Nom de la pièce Fonction Avant de réaliser des copies 4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4-3 4.2 Vérifier les réglages Les sélections courantes peuvent être revues. De plus, on peut modifier les paramètres spécifiés ou les sauvegarder pour utilisation ultérieure. Quatre écrans vous permettent de vérifier les réglages. Pour vérifier les réglages 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Mode contrôle] sur le panneau de contrôle. Le premier écran apparaît pour indiquer les réglages actuels. 2 Appuyez sur [Suite] pour afficher le deuxième, troisième ou quatrième écran des réglages.  Appuyez sur [Retour] pour revenir au précédent écran des réglages. 3 Appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base.  Conseil Pour changer un réglage, appuyez sur le bouton de la fonction que vous voulez modifier. L’écran permettant de modifier le paramétrage de la fonction sélectionnée apparaît. Dans cet écran, vous pouvez modifier le paramétrage selon vos besoins. 4 Avant de réaliser des copies 4-4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour modifier les réglages 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Mode contrôle] sur le panneau de contrôle. Le premier écran apparaît pour indiquer les réglages actuels. 2 Affichez l'écran qui contient le paramètre que vous désirez modifier.  Pour passer d'un écran à l'autre, appuyez sur [Suite] et [Retour]. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton correspondant au paramètre que vous désirez modifier. L'écran permettant de spécifier le réglage apparaît. 4 Modifiez le paramétrage selon la procédure correspondante. Avant de réaliser des copies 4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4-5 4.3 Opérations Accessibilité Utilisateur Diverses fonctions, comme le mode d'écran et le volume des alarmes, peuvent être précisées afin de faciliter l'utilisation du copieur. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Accessibilité] du panneau de contrôle. 2 Appuyez sur [Valide] ou [Initialise].  Les fonctions d'accessibilité utilisateur peuvent être activées ou désactivées.  Lorsque les fonctions d'accessibilité utilisateur sont activées, la touche [Accessibilité] s'allume en vert. Lorsque les fonctions d'accessibilité utilisateur sont désactivées, la touche [Accessibilité] reste éteinte. 4 Avant de réaliser des copies 4-6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Modifier le réglage de l’affichage de l’écran (fonction “Mode Ecran”) Sélectionner l'affichage des fenêtres de l'écran tactile en noir sur fond blanc ou en blanc sur fond noir. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Accessibilité] du panneau de contrôle. 2 Appuyez sur [Mode Ecran]. 3 Appuyez sur [Ecran Inversé] pour afficher les fenêtres en blanc sur fond noir. Pour restaurer l'affichage normal des fenêtres, appuyez sur [Ecran Normal]. 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. Ecran Normal Ecran Inversé Avant de réaliser des copies 4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4-7 Modifier le paramétrage des touches (fonction “Vitesse Touche”) En tenant une touche enfoncée, le caractère ou le chiffre correspondant peut être entré de manière répétée. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Accessibilité] du panneau de contrôle. 2 Appuyez sur [Vitesse Touche]. 3 Appuyez sur les touches fléchées pour régler les durées et les intervalles.  Délai : Durée de maintien à l'issue de laquelle la répétition de la touche commence  Intervalle : Durée (en secondes) pendant laquelle une touche doit être maintenue appuyée avant que le caractère correspondant ne soit entré de manière répétée. Exemple: Quand la touche [1] est maintenue appuyée:  Conseil Appuyez sur [Contrôle] pour vérifier les réglages spécifiés. 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 1 1 1 1 ... Intervalle Délai Heure 4 Avant de réaliser des copies 4-8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Modifier le délai d’Initialisation automatique (fonction “Ecran Confirmation”) Si aucune opération n'est effectuée pendant le délai spécifié, l'affichage de l'écran tactile revient à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Pour de plus amples détails sur la manière de spécifier le délai d'initialisation automatique, veuillez vous reporter au chapitre “7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires”. Sur “Ecran Confirmation”, vous pouvez spécifier d'allonger ou non la durée d'affichage de l'écran de confirmation d'extension de l'initialisation pendant laquelle il s'affiche juste avant d'être automatiquement effacé.  Remarque Les fonctions Economie d’énergie, de Veille, et d’Extinction écran sont toujours accessibles et modifiables même quand la fonction Initialisation automatique est configurée. Lorsque vous paramétrez l’Initialisation automatique, il convient de définir un délai plus court que les durées définies pour les fonctions Economie d’énergie, Veille et Extinction écran. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Accessibilité] du panneau de contrôle. 2 Appuyez sur [Ecran Confirmation]. 3 Sélectionnez le délai désiré à l'issue duquel s'affichera la fenêtre demandant de confirmer l'initialisation du copieur.  Appuyez sur [30 sec.], [60 sec.], [90 sec.] ou [120 sec.].  Pour restaurer immédiatement l'écran Fonctions de Base sans afficher la fenêtre demandant de confirmer l'initialisation du copieur, appuyez sur [Sans]. 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. Avant de réaliser des copies 4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4-9 Changer la durée d’affichage de l’écran “Travail enregistré” (fonction “Ecran Notification”) Cet écran permet de spécifier la durée d'affichage de l'écran “Travail enregistré.” qui invite à confirmer un numéro de réception ou un numéro de travail une fois que l'opération de copie est terminée. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Accessibilité] du panneau de contrôle. 2 Appuyez sur [Ecran Notification]. 3 Sélectionnez la valeur désirée pour la durée.  Appuyez sur [3 sec.], [10 sec.] ou [60 sec.].  Pour laisser l'écran “Travail enregistrée” affiché tant que la touche [Entrée] n'a pas été activée, appuyez sur [Sans Limite]. 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 4 Avant de réaliser des copies 4-10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Modifier le volume des bips et des alarmes (fonction “Paramétrage Sons”) Il est possible de spécifier le volume du bip qui retentit lors d'une pression sur les boutons de l'écran tactile, ainsi que le volume des alarmes qui se font entendre en cas d'anomalie. En temps normal, on spécifiera un faible volume sonore, mais cette fonction est pratique si les circonstances nécessitent une augmentation temporaire du volume. Le volume général peut se définir dans Gestion Utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir “Pour régler le volume des avertissements sonores (fonction “Bip de confirmation” et “Volume Alarme”)” à la page 7-37. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Accessibilité] du panneau de contrôle. 2 Appuyez sur [Paramétrage Sons]. 3 Sélectionnez la valeur désirée pour le volume. 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. Avant de réaliser des copies 4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4-11 4.4 Agrandir les fenêtres de l’écran tactile Appuyez sur la touche [Zoom Ecran] pour agrandir les fenêtres qui apparaissent sur l'écran tactile. Appuyez une nouvelle fois sur la touche [Zoom Ecran] pour restaurer les fenêtres à leur taille standard. Les opérations habituelles peuvent être effectuées sur l'écran tactile, même lorsque les fenêtres sont agrandies. Appuyez sur cette zone pour faire défiler l'écran vers le coin supérieur gauche. Appuyez sur cette flèche pour faire défiler l'écran vers le haut. Appuyez sur cette zone pour faire défiler l'écran vers le coin supérieur droit. Appuyez sur cette flèche pour faire défiler l'écran vers la gauche. Quand le bord gauche de l'écran est atteint, l'écran défile d'une ligne vers le haut et fait apparaître le bord droit. Appuyez sur cette flèche pour faire défiler l'écran vers la droite. Quand le bord droit de l'écran est atteint, l'écran défile d'une ligne vers le haut et fait apparaître le bord gauche. Appuyez sur cette zone pour faire défiler l'écran vers le coin inférieur gauche. Appuyez sur cette flèche pour faire défiler l'écran vers le bas. Appuyez sur cette zone pour faire défiler l'écran vers le coin inférieur droit. 4 Avant de réaliser des copies 4-12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4.5 Mettre le copieur sous tension et hors tension Mise en route du copieur 1 Placez l'interrupteur en position “I”. 2 Assurez-vous que l'interrupteur secondaire est en position MARCHE (enfoncé). Quand le copieur est mis sous tension  Quelques secondes après que le copieur ait été mis sous tension, le message “Pré-chauffage en cours. Prêt en lecture.” apparaît sur l'écran tactile et le voyant de la touche [Impression] s'allume en vert. Lorsque le voyant de la touche [Impression] s'allume en vert, il est alors possible de mettre une tâche en file d'attente. Si l'interrupteur général est sur Marche et que l'interrupteur secondaire est sur Arrêt, il n'est pas possible d'effectuer des copies. MARCHE ARRÊT Avant de réaliser des copies 4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4-13 Arrêt du copieur 1 Appuyez sur [Liste tâches] pour vérifier qu'il n'y a plus de travaux en attente. 2 Enlevez toutes les pages imprimées qui pourraient rester dans le plateau de sortie papier. 3 Appuyez sur l'interrupteur secondaire pour éteindre le copieur. 4 Placez l'interrupteur général en position “O”.  Conseil Normalement, il n’est pas nécessaire de mettre l’interrupteur général sur “O”.  Remarque Quand vous éteignez le copieur pour le rallumer aussitôt, attendez cinq secondes avant de le rallumer. Si ce délai n’est pas respecté entre la mise hors tension et la mise sous tension, il se peut que le copieur ne fonctionne pas correctement. N’éteignez pas le copieur pendant que des opérations de copie ou d’impression sont en cours, cela pourrait entraîner un serrage papier. N’éteignez pas le copieur pendant qu’il est en train de numériser ou d’envoyer ou de recevoir des données, sinon les données de numérisation ou de transmission seront perdues. N’éteignez pas le copieur alors qu’une tâche en file d’attente ou que des données mémorisées sont en attente d’impression, sinon les tâches seront effacées. 4 Avant de réaliser des copies 4-14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Quand le copieur est mis hors tension
Les paramètres qui n'ont pas été programmés seront effacés.
Les tâches en attente d'impression sont effacées.
Les données numérisées à l'aide de la fonction “Numérisation vers mémoire” sont effacées.
Les données de numérisation qui pourraient être imprimées à l'aide de la fonction “Rappel Mémoire” sont effacées. Initialisation automatique Une fois que le délai spécifié s'est écoulé, ces paramètres seront ramenés à leurs valeurs par défaut. Conditions à l'initialisation automatique
1 minute, ou un délai personnalisé à compter de la dernière opération effectuée sur la machine (le paramètre usine ou par défaut est de 1 minute).
La carte magnétique est enlevée du contrôleur de données, ou bien le compteur clé est retiré.  Remarque Les paramètres spécifiant si l’initialisation automatique doit avoir lieu ou non, ainsi que le délai après lequel elle doit avoir lieu, peuvent être modifiés. Pour plus de détails, voir “Procédure de configuration standard” à la page 7-6. Avant de réaliser des copies 4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4-15 Mode Economie d’énergie Afin d'économiser l'énergie, le copieur passera automatiquement en mode d'attente (mode Economie d'énergie) si aucune opération n'est effectuée pendant un laps de temps spécifié. Lorsque le copieur passe en mode Economie d'énergie, le voyant de la touche [Impression] reste allumé en vert, mais l'écran tactile s'éteint. Dès lors, le copieur diminue la température de l'unité de fixation et passe en Mode Economie d'énergie. Conditions au passage en mode Economie d'énergie
15 minutes, ou un délai personnalisé à compter de la dernière opération effectuée sur la machine (le paramètre usine ou par défaut est de 15 minutes).  Remarque Pour quitter le mode Economie d’énergie, appuyez sur n’importe quelle touche du panneau de contrôle, ou bien appuyez sur l’écran tactile. Tant que l’impression est en pause, le copieur ne passe pas en mode Economie d’énergie. Les paramètres spécifiant si le mode Economie d’énergie doit être utilisé ou non, ainsi que le délai après lequel il doit commencer, peuvent être modifiés. Pour plus de détails, voir “Procédure de configuration standard” à la page 7-6. Mode Veille Dans le but d'économiser l'énergie, le chauffage du copieur s'éteint et le copieur passe automatiquement en mode Veille si aucune opération n'est effectuée après un laps de temps spécifié. Conditions au passage en mode Veille
Le copieur n'est pas utilisé pendant une minute.  Remarque Pour quitter le mode Veille, appuyez sur n’importe quelle touche du panneau de contrôle, ou bien appuyez sur l’écran tactile. Les paramètres spécifiant si le mode Veille doit être utilisé ou non, ainsi que le délai après lequel il doit commencer, peuvent être modifiés. Pour plus de détails, voir “Procédure de configuration standard” à la page 7-6. 4 Avant de réaliser des copies 4-16 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4.6 Régler l’inclinaison du panneau de contrôle Le panneau de contrôle peut être réglé selon trois angles d'inclinaison. Réglez le panneau à l'inclinaison qui convient le mieux à l'utilisation.  Tirez le levier de déblocage du panneau de contrôle, puis réglez l'inclinaison de ce dernier. Position haute (position de base) Position intermédiaire Position inférieure 2 3 1 Avant de réaliser des copies 4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4-17 4.7 Utilisation de l’écran tactile Description de l’écran tactile A la mise sous tension du copieur, l'écran représenté ci-dessous apparaît sur l'écran tactile. Cet écran s'appelle écran des Fonctions de Base. L'écran indique avec des messages et des graphiques, les paramètres actuellement sélectionnés, les réglages disponibles et l'état du copieur. Sélections par défaut Les paramètres actifs au moment où le copieur est mis sous tension s'appellent les paramètres par défaut. Ces paramètres par défaut servent de référence pour tous les paramètres qui doivent être spécifiés. Pour modifier les paramètres par défaut, veuillez vous reporter à “Procédure de configuration standard” à la page 7-6.
Nombre de copies : 1
Finition : Non-Tri
Zoom : 1,000 (Taille réelle)
Papier : Papier Auto
Densité: Exposition Auto (mode Texte/Photo)
Orig. Ö Copie : Recto Ö Recto 4 Avant de réaliser des copies 4-18 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Utilisation de l’écran tactile Pour activer une fonction ou sélectionner un réglage, appuyez légèrement sur la fonction ou le réglage souhaité apparaissant sur l'écran tactile. ATTENTION Veiller à ne pas endommager l’écran tactile.  Ne jamais appuyer trop fort sur l'écran tactile et ne jamais utiliser un objet dur ou pointu pour effectuer une sélection sur l'écran tactile.  Conseil Il est possible de changer la langue d’affichage, à l’aide de la fonction “Langue d’Affichage” de l’écran Choix utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir “Procédure de configuration standard” à la page 7-6. Les paramètres par défaut peuvent être modifiés au moyen des diverses fonctions de l’écran Choix utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir “Procédure de configuration standard” à la page 7-6. Avant de réaliser des copies 4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4-19 Description des écrans Écran Sélections 1. Onglets 2. Afficheur des messages 3. Fonctions et réglages 4. Paramètres 5. Zone additionnelle disponibles de message sélectionnés No. Nom d’élément Description 1 Touches écran Chaque écran permet d'accéder à des fonctions qui peuvent être spécifiées. Appuyer sur une touche pour afficher l'écran correspondant. 2 Afficheur des messages La position actuelle du copieur, les instructions, avertissements, conseils et autres données, notamment le nombre de copies sélectionné, sont indiqués ici. 3 Fonctions et réglages disponibles La sélection d'un écran permet d'afficher certaines fonctions qui peuvent être spécifiées. Appuyez sur un bouton de fonction pour afficher les paramètres correspondants. 4 Paramètres sélectionnés Les paramètres courants sont indiqués à l'aide de graphiques. 5 Zone additionnelle de message • L'état de la tâche est indiqué à l'aide de graphiques. • Cette zone indique la quantité de mémoire restante et comporte les avertissements graphiques relatifs au manque de toner ou au manque de papier dans un magasin papier. 4 Avant de réaliser des copies 4-20 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Écran Liste Tâches Cet écran permet de visualiser l'état du fonctionnement du copieur ainsi que l'ordre d'impression des travaux en attente. L'écran Liste Tâches compte cinq onglets.
Tâche : Affiche une liste d'opérations en cours de réalisation
Ordre Impr. : Affiche l'ordre des documents qui sont en cours ou en attente d'impression ou de copie.
Impr. : Affiche l'état d'impression des documents en cours de copie ou d'impression.
Com. : Non utilisé
Doc. : Non utilisé Avant de réaliser des copies 4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4-21 Vérifier l’état d’une tâche 1 Appuyez sur [Liste Tâches]. 2 Sélectionnez la tâche dont vous désirez vérifier l'état.  Conseil L’écran affiche le statut de quatre tâches maximum. Pour voir l’état d’une tâche qui n’apparaît pas à l’écran, appuyez sur les flèches. 3 Vérifiez les détails, puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  Pour supprimer la tâche sélectionnée, appuyez sur [Efface]. 4 Avant de réaliser des copies 4-22 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Vérifier l’ordre d’impression 1 Appuyez sur [Liste Tâches]. 2 Appuyez sur [Ordre Impr.]. 3 Vérifiez l'ordre d'impression.  Pour voir d'autres parties de la liste, appuyez sur les flèches. L'écran permet d'afficher jusqu'à 8 éléments dans l'ordre d'impression. 4 Après avoir contrôlé les informations voulues, appuyez sur [Entrée]. Avant de réaliser des copies 4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4-23 Contrôler/supprimer des éléments figurant sur la liste de l’écran Impression 1 Appuyez sur [Liste Tâches]. 2 Appuyez sur [Impr.]. 3 Sélectionnez la tâche dont vous désirez vérifier l'état.  Pour voir d'autres parties de la liste, appuyez sur les flèches. 4 Après avoir contrôlé les informations voulues, appuyez sur [Entrée].  Remarque Pour supprimer la tâche sélectionnée, appuyez sur [Efface]. 4 Avant de réaliser des copies 4-24 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Rappel Mémoire Une fois que l'impression d'une tâche de copie est terminée, l'image qui vient d'être copiée peut être réimprimée sans qu'il soit besoin de recharger l'original.  Remarque La fonction Rappel Mémoire n’est disponible que si la fonction “Rappel Mémoire” (Choix utilisateur du mode Utilitaires) est réglée sur “ON”. Pour plus de détails, voir “Ecran Choix utilisateur” à la page 7-1.  Conseil La fonction Rappel Mémoire ne peut pas être utilisée dans les cas suivants : Un nouveau document a été numérisé. (La touche [Impression] a été activée.) Le copieur a été éteint. La touche [Initialisation] a été activée pendant que l’impression était arrêtée. Avant de réaliser des copies 4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4-25 Utiliser la fonction Rappel Mémoire 1 Lorsque l'opération de copie est terminée, appuyez sur [Liste Tâches]. 2 Appuyez sur [Rappel Mémoire - en attente]. Les informations relatives à la tâche conservée en mémoire s'affichent. 3 Appuyez sur [Rappel Mémoire]  Pour supprimer la tâche conservée en mémoire, appuyez sur [Efface].  Conseil A ce stade, il est possible de modifier le réglage Finition ainsi que le nombre de copies. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées.  Conseil Après avoir copié des documents confidentiels, appuyez sur la touche [Efface] pour supprimer les données de la mémoire. 4 Avant de réaliser des copies 4-26 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Opérations élémentaires de copie 5 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 5-1 5 Opérations élémentaires de copie 5.1 Réalisation de copies Voici décrite ci-dessous la procédure permettant de réaliser des copies élémentaires. 1 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier.  Pour plus de détails, voir “10 Documents originaux”. 2 Assurez-vous que le voyant de la touche [Copie] est allumé en vert et que le copieur est en mode Copie.  L'écran Fonctions de Base apparaît sur l'écran tactile. 3 Spécifiez tous les réglages copie nécessaires.  Pour modifier le format du papier (magasin papier), appuyez sur [Papier]. Pour plus de détails, voir “Spécifier le réglage Papier” (page 9-20).  Pour changer le taux zoom, appuyez sur [Zoom]. Pour plus de détails, voir “Spécifier une Sélection Zoom” (page 11-13).  Pour trier, agrafer ou perforer les copies, appuyez sur [Finition]. Pour plus de détails, veuillez vous reporter à “Spécifier les paramètres de finition” (page 11-1).  Pour copier un livre ou effectuer une copie en utilisant moins de papier, appuyez sur [Orig. > Copie]. Pour plus de détails, voir “Sélectionner les paramètres Orig. > Copie” (page 11-18). 5 Opérations élémentaires de copie 5-2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510  Pour modifier la densité, appuyez sur [Densité]. Pour plus de détails, voir “Spécifier une Densité copie” (page 11-31).  Pour effacer une marge sur la copie, insérer un intercalaire lors de la copie sur des transparents de rétroprojection, ou pour effectuer toute autre opération particulière, appuyez sur [Fonctions Auxiliaires]. Pour plus de détails, veuillez vous reporter au chapitre “6 Fonctions auxiliaires”. 4 Tapez sur le clavier numérique le nombre de copies désiré.  Le Di3510 permet d'imprimer jusqu'à 999 copies. Le Di3010 ou le Di2510 permettent d'imprimer jusqu'à 99 copies.  Pour modifier la valeur, appuyez sur la touche [C], puis tapez la valeur correcte.  Conseil Il est possible de limiter le nombre de copies au moyen de l’écran Gestion Administrateur du mode Utilitaires. Pour plus de détails, veuillez vous reporter au chapitre “8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur”. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. Opérations élémentaires de copie 5 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 5-3 5.2 Arrêter une opération de copie Pour annuler une tâche de copie, suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous. Arrêter/Reprendre/Supprimer une tâche de copie 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Stop] pendant que la tâche est en cours d'impression. L'opération de copie s'arrête. 2 Le message “Cycle copie temporairement suspendu.” s'affiche. 3 Pour reprendre un travail qui a été suspendu, appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. L'opération de copie reprend. 4 Pour supprimer l'opération de copie suspendue, sélectionnez le bouton correspondant à la tâche que vous désirez supprimer. La tâche est supprimée. 5 Opérations élémentaires de copie 5-4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 5.3 Interrompre une tâche de copie Il est possible de suspendre la tâche de copie en cours afin de copier un autre document. Ceci est pratique pour effectuer rapidement des copies d'un petit document sans avoir à attendre la fin de l'impression d'un document volumineux.  Remarque Si certaines fonctions ont été spécifiées, il se peut que l’interruption de l’opération de copie ne soit pas possible. En outre, certaines fonctions ne sont pas disponibles lorsqu’une tâche de copie est suspendue. Le copieur ne passera pas en mode Interruption (l’opération de copie peut être suspendue en activant la touche [Interruption]) pendant qu’un document est en cours de numérisation. Pour plus de détails, voir “Table d’association des fonctions” à la page 14-11. Interrompre une opération de copie 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Interruption] pendant une tâche d'impression.  Le voyant de la touche [Interruption] s'allume.  Le message “Copieur en Mode Interruption de Cycle.” s'affiche.  Les paramètres de copie sont restaurés à leurs valeurs par défaut. (Les paramètres de copie en vigueur avant que la tâche ne soit interrompue ainsi que le nombre de copies restant sont sauvegardés.)  Si aucune opération n'est effectuée dans la minute qui suit l'activation de la touche [Interruption], le mode Interruption est automatiquement annulé. 2 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier. 3 Sélectionnez les paramètres copie désirés. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression].  La numérisation du document commence. Opérations élémentaires de copie 5 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 5-5 5 Quand la copie effectuée en mode prioritaire est achevée, appuyez sur la touche [Interruption]. Le voyant de la touche [Interruption] s'éteint et le mode Interruption est annulé. Les paramètres de copie en vigueur avant que la tâche ne soit interrompue sont restaurés et l'opération de copie qui avait été suspendue reprend automatiquement. 5 Opérations élémentaires de copie 5-6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 5.4 Effectuer des copies sur comptes Utiliser le paramètre “Contrôle Département” Il est possible de limiter le nombre de copies autorisé pour chaque compte enregistré. On peut gérer les comptes en appuyant sur la touche [Gestion comptes] de l'écran 1 Administrateur (qui s'affiche en appuyant sur [Gestion Administrateur] sur l'écran Utilitaires). Les paramètres de Gestion Administrateur devraient être spécifiés par l'administrateur.  Remarque Les paramètres du Mode Gestion Administrateur ne peuvent pas être définis sans entrer préalablement le code d’accès Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur le code d’accès Administrateur, consultez votre S.A.V. Pour réaliser des copies sur des comptes validés Pour la gestion des comptes avec [100 Comptes 1] et [100 Comptes 2]. 1 Si vous avez spécifié [100 Comptes 1] l'écran ci-contre s'affiche.  Si vous avez spécifié [100 Comptes 2], une pression sur la touche [Code] fera apparaître l'écran ci-contre. 2 Sur le clavier numérique, introduisez le code d'accès à 6 chiffres. Opérations élémentaires de copie 5 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 5-7 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Code]. L'écran Fonctions de Base apparaît. 4 Effectuez les copies avec les paramètres de copie désirés. 5 Lorsque vous avez terminé l'opération de copie, appuyez sur la touche [Code]. L'écran de saisie du code d'accès réapparaît. Pour gérer des comptes avec [1000 Comptes]. 1 Si vous sélectionnez [1000 Comptes], l'écran de saisie Numéro de Compte s'affiche. 2 Introduisez le numéro de compte approprié (de 1 à 999) dans l'écran de Saisie du Numéro de compte, et appuyez sur la touche [Code]. L'écran Fonctions de Base s'affiche. 3 L'opération de copie peut se dérouler avec le mode Copie désiré. 4 Une fois la copie terminée, appuyez une nouvelle fois sur la touche [Code]. L'écran Sélections est affiché sur l'écran de Saisie du Numéro de Compte. 5 Opérations élémentaires de copie 5-8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Fonctions auxiliaires 6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6-1 6 Fonctions auxiliaires Ce chapitre décrit la réalisation de copies à l'aide des Fonctions Auxiliaires. 6.1 Fonction “Couverture” Ajouter des pages de couverture Lorsque l'on copie deux feuilles ou plus, il est possible d'ajouter des pages de couverture réalisées sur du papier différent de celui qui est utilisé pour la copie du document.  Remarque Chargez le papier destiné aux pages de couverture dans un autre magasin que celui qui contient le papier destiné à la copie du document. Chargez le papier destiné aux pages de couverture en respectant la même orientation et le même format que le papier destiné à la copie du document. L’introducteur/retourneur de document, en option, doit être installé. Paramètres du mode Couverture
Face : Non copiée Dos : Sans
Face : Non copiée Dos : Non copiée 3 2 1 3 2 1 Original Copie 3 2 1 3 2 1 6 Fonctions auxiliaires 6-2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510
Face : Non copiée Dos de couverture : Copiée
Face : Copiée Dos : Sans
Face : Copiée Dos : Non copiée
Face : Copiée Dos : Copiée 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 Fonctions auxiliaires 6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6-3 Procéder aux réglages de la fonction “Couverture” 1 Chargez le document dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document. 2 Appuyez sur [Fonction Auxiliaire], puis appuyez sur [Couverture]. 3 Sélectionnez les paramètres voulus pour la Face et pour le Dos, puis appuyez sur la touche située audessous de “Support couverture”. 4 Sélectionnez le magasin papier qui contient le papier destiné aux pages de couverture, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée].  Si l'on appuie sur [Annul.], le réglage est abandonné. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. 6 Fonctions auxiliaires 6-4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6.2 Fonction “Intercalaires” Insérer des pages (Intercalaires) entre les copies Lorsque l'on copie deux feuilles ou plus, il est possible d'insérer des intercalaires réalisés sur du papier différent de celui qui est utilisé pour la copie du document.  Conseil Aux endroits où vous désirez insérer des intercalaires, insérez du papier d’une orientation ou d’un format différent de l’original, puis chargez le document dans l’introducteur/retourneur de document. Chargez le papier destiné aux intercalaires dans un autre magasin que celui qui contient le papier destiné à la copie du document. Chargez le papier destiné aux intercalaires en respectant la même orientation et le même format que le papier destiné à la copie du document. Cette fonction en peut pas être utilisée en même temps que la fonction “Couverture”. Cette fonction en peut pas être combinée avec l’impression Livret et Originaux mixtes.  Remarque L’introducteur/retourneur de document, en option, doit être installé. Paramètres d’Intercalaires
Non copiée
Copiée 5 3 4 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 Fonctions auxiliaires 6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6-5 Procéder aux réglages de la fonction “Intercalaires” 1 Chargez le document dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document. 2 Appuyez sur [Fonction Auxiliaire], puis appuyez sur [Intercalaires]. 3 Sélectionnez le paramètre Intercalaire [Copiée] ou le paramètre [Non copiée], puis appuyez sur la touche située audessous “Support intercalaire”. 4 Sélectionnez le magasin papier qui contient le papier destiné aux intercalaires, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée].  Si l'on appuie sur [Annul.], le réglage est abandonné. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. 6 Fonctions auxiliaires 6-6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6.3 Fonction “Encart transparent” Insérer des pages entre des copies de transparents Lorsque l'on copie des transparents de rétroprojection, il est possible d'insérer du papier (encarts) entre les transparents.  Conseil Chargez le papier destiné aux encarts dans un magasin papier et chargez les transparents dans le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles. Paramètres Encart transparent
Non copiée
Copiée 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 Fonctions auxiliaires 6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6-7 Procéder à des réglages de la fonction “Encart transparent” 1 Chargez le document dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document ou placez-le sur la vitre d'exposition. 2 Appuyez sur [Fonction Auxiliaire], et appuyez sur [Encart transparent]. 3 Sélectionnez le paramètre Encart transparent [Copiée] ou le paramètre [Non copiée], puis appuyez sur la touche au-dessous de “Support encart”. 4 Sélectionnez le magasin papier qui contient le papier destiné aux transparents, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée].  Si l'on appuie sur [Annul.], le réglage est abandonné. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. 6 Fonctions auxiliaires 6-8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6.4 Fonction “Marge” Réaliser des copies avec marge de reliure On peut réaliser des copies comportant des marges de reliure et dont l'image peut être décalée d'un côté afin que le texte reste apparent une fois que les copies sont reliées. Paramètres Marge
La marge peut être positionnée sur le côté gauche ou sur la tête de la feuille de papier.
Il est possible de spécifier la largeur de la marge de reliure. L'image du document est décalée vers la droite pour ménager une marge sur le bord gauche de la copie. L'image du document est décalée vers le bas pour ménager une marge sur le bord supérieur de la copie. Original Copie Original Copie Fonctions auxiliaires 6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6-9 Pour procéder à des réglages de la fonction “Marge” 1 Chargez le document dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document ou placez-le sur la vitre d'exposition. 2 Appuyez sur [Fonction Auxiliaire], puis appuyez sur [Marge]. 3 Sélectionnez le réglage Marge voulu.  Conseil Si le paramètre Position reliure à gauche est sélectionné, le recto et le verso de la copie seront imprimés dans le même sens. Si le paramètre Position reliure en haut est sélectionné pour copie recto-verso, le recto de la page sera imprimé tête en bas. 4 Appuyez sur les flèches pour spécifier la largeur de la marge de reliure, puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  Si l'on appuie sur [Annul.], le réglage est abandonné. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. 1 2 1 2 Original Copie 1 2 1 2 Original Copie 6 Fonctions auxiliaires 6-10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6.5 Fonction “Effacement bords” Effacer des portions de copies Lorsque l'on copie des documents qui comportent des perforations, il est possible d'imprimer les pages de sorte qu'une partie de l'original soit effacée. Paramètres Effacement bords
Effacement du bord gauche du document.
Effacement du bord supérieur du document.
Effacement d'un cadre autour du document. A A Original Copie A A A A Fonctions auxiliaires 6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6-11 Pour procéder à des réglages de la fonction “Effacement bords” 1 Chargez le document dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document ou placez-le sur la vitre d'exposition. 2 Appuyez sur [Fonctions Auxiliaires], et puis appuyez sur [Effacement bords]. 3 Sélectionnez le paramètre Effacement bords désiré. 4 Appuyez sur les flèches pour spécifier la zone d'effacement, puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  Si l'on appuie sur [Annul.], le réglage est abandonné. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. 6 Fonctions auxiliaires 6-12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6.6 Fonction “Multi-image” Impression multicopie du même original sur une seule feuille La fonction “Multi-image” peut être utilisé de la manière indiquée cidessous.
Pour copier une page de format A4, taille réelle, sur une feuille de papier de format A3
Pour réduire une page de format A4 et imprimer plusieurs copies sur une feuille de papier A4 Pour procéder à des réglages de la fonction “Multi-image” 1 Chargez le document dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document ou placez-le sur la vitre d'exposition. 2 Appuyez sur [Fonctions Auxiliaires], et puis appuyez sur [Multi-image]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée format].  Pour activer la détection automatique du format de l'original, appuyez sur [Détection auto.]. A A A A A A A A Fonctions auxiliaires 6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6-13 4 Sélectionnez le format du document.  Si l'original est d'un format nonstandard, appuyez sur [Format personnel], puis spécifiez le format du document. 5 Appuyez sur [X]. Sur le clavier numérique tapez la dimension du côté X du papier qui est chargé. 6 Appuyez sur [Y]. Sur le clavier numérique tapez la dimension du côté X du papier qui est chargé. 7 Appuyez sur [Entrée].  Si l'on appuie sur [Annul.], le réglage est abandonné. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. 6 Fonctions auxiliaires 6-14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6.7 Fonction “Diffusion” Imprimer des numéros de diffusion sur les jeux de copies Il est possible d'imprimer, en arrière-plan sur chaque jeu de copies, un numéro de diffusion.  Conseil Si la fonction “Diffusion” est utilisée, le paramètre de Finition “Tri” est sélectionné. Lorsque le numéro “999” a été imprimé, la numérotation reprend à “000”. Procéder aux réglages de la fonction “Diffusion” 1 Chargez le document dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document ou placez-le sur la vitre d'exposition. 2 Appuyez sur [Fonction Auxiliaire], et puis appuyez sur [Marquage Image]. 3 Appuyez sur [Diffusion]. Fonctions auxiliaires 6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6-15 4 Spécifiez les paramètres désirés pour les N° de diffusion.  Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le premier numéro de diffusion à imprimer.  Si vous avez sélectionné [Seulement la 1ère], le numéro de diffusion ne sera imprimé que sur la première page de chaque jeu de copies.  Si vous avez sélectionné [Toutes les pages], le numéro de diffusion sera imprimé sur toutes les pages de chaque jeu de copies.  Appuyez sur [+ Foncé], [Normal] ou [+ Clair] pour spécifier la densité d'impression du numéro de diffusion. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée].  Si l'on appuie sur [Annul.], le réglage est abandonné. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. 6 Fonctions auxiliaires 6-16 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6.8 Fonction “Filigrane” Il est possible d'imprimer un filigrane sur l'arrière-plan des copies. Procéder aux réglages de la fonction “Filigrane” 1 Chargez le document dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document ou placez-le sur la vitre d'exposition. 2 Appuyez sur [Fonction Auxiliaire], et puis appuyez sur [Marquage Image]. 3 Appuyez sur [Filigrane]. 4 Sélectionnez le filigrane à imprimer ainsi que les pages sur lesquelles le filigrane figurera.  Si vous avez sélectionné [Seulement la 1ère], le filigrane ne sera imprimé que sur la première page de chaque jeu de copies.  Si vous avez sélectionné [Toutes les pages] le filigrane sera imprimé sur toutes les pages. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée].  Si l'on appuie sur [Annul.], le réglage est abandonné. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. Fonctions auxiliaires 6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6-17 6.9 Fonction “Tampon” Cette fonction permet d'imprimer sur les copies un filigrane réalisé avec une image numérisée apparaissant en arrière-plan. Voir “Enregistrer un tampon composé d’une image” à la page 7-31 pour les méthodes d'enregistrement.  Remarque Le disque dur en option doit être installé. Réaliser des copies avec la fonction “Tampon” 1 Chargez le document dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document ou placez-le sur la vitre d'exposition. 2 Appuyez sur [Fonction Auxiliaire], et puis appuyez sur [Marquage Image]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Tampon]. 4 Appuyez sur [Régl.], sélectionnez le numéro d'enregistrement puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  Vous pouvez vérifier ceci en sélectionnant [Visu.], en appuyant sur la touche [Impression], et en copiant l'image enregistrée. 6 Fonctions auxiliaires 6-18 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 5 Sélectionnez la position voulue pour l'impression.  Si vous avez sélectionné [Seulement la 1ère], l'image ne sera imprimée que sur la première page.  Si vous avez sélectionné [Toutes les pages] l'image sera imprimée sur toutes les pages. 6 Appuyez sur [Entrée].  Si l'on appuie sur [Annul.], le réglage est abandonné. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. Fonctions auxiliaires 6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6-19 6.10 Fonction “Inversion Noir/Blanc” Inverser les zones noires et les zones blanches sur les copies Il est possible d'imprimer des copies en inversant les zones blanches et les zones foncées de l'image originale.  Conseil La couleur du numéro de diffusion et du filigrane ne sera pas inversée. L’inversion noir/blanc ne peut plus avoir lieu une fois que l’original a été numérisé. Procéder au réglage de la fonction “Inversion Noir/Blanc” 1 Chargez le document dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document ou placez-le sur la vitre d'exposition. 2 Appuyez sur [Fonction Auxiliaire], puis appuyez sur [Inversion Noir/ Blanc]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. 6 Fonctions auxiliaires 6-20 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 6.11 Fonction “Lecture fragmentée” Numériser un document en plusieurs fois Lorsque l'on doit copier un document qui comprend de nombreuses pages, il est possible de le diviser et de le numériser en plusieurs lots, pour ensuite l'imprimer en un seul document.  Conseil Si la mémoire arrive à saturation pendant la numérisation, la numérisation est interrompue. Si cela se produit, appuyez sur la touche [Impression] pour imprimer les pages qui ont été numérisées avant l’arrêt de la numérisation. Réaliser des copies avec la fonction “Lecture fragmentée” 1 Chargez le document dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document ou placez-le sur la vitre d'exposition. 2 Appuyez sur [Fonction Auxiliaire], et puis appuyez sur [Lecture fragmentée]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le document est numérisé. 4 Une fois que le premier lot a été numérisé, chargez la deuxième partie du document dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document, ou placez-la sur la vitre d'exposition, puis appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. 5 Une fois que tous les lots du document ont été numérisés, appuyez sur [Fin]. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-1 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7.1 Ecrans du mode Utilitaires Ce chapitre décrit les divers programmes de copie et les réglages disponibles dans le mode Utilitaires. Écran Utilitaires Cet écran apparaît lorsque l'on appuie sur la touche [Utilitaires]. Les écrans suivants apparaissent lorsque l'on appuie sur la touche correspondant. Ecran Choix utilisateur Cet écran propose des fonctions permettant de spécifier divers réglages par défaut pour le copieur. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Ecran Compteurs Cet écran indique le nombre total de copies qui ont été imprimées depuis l'installation du copieur. Ecran Rappel programme On peut rappeler à partir de cet écran une tâche de copie programmée. Ecran Mode utilisateur Cet écran propose diverses fonctions permettant d'utiliser le copieur de manière correcte et sûre. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-3 Ecrans Mode Gestion Administrateur Il y a deux écrans : Gestion Administrateur 1 et Gestion Administrateur 2. Avant de pouvoir afficher ces écrans, il faut entrer le code d'accès Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions disponibles dans les écrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur, veuillez vous reporter à “8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur”. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7.2 Fonctions du Choix utilisateur Voici les fonctions disponibles dans l'écran Choix utilisateur. La modification des réglages des fonctions suivantes changera les paramètres par défaut (c'est-à-dire, les réglages automatiquement restaurés lorsque le copieur est mis sous tension ou quand on appuie sur la touche [Initialisation]). Les réglages en gras représentent les réglages par défaut. Onglet Fonction Paramètres 1/6 Rappel mémoire Oui, Non Détection originaux mixtes Oui, Non Langue d'Affichage Japonais, Anglais, Allemand, Français, Hollandais, Italien, Espagnol, Portugais, Norvégien, Danois, Suédois, Finnois 2/6 Mode Orig. Ö Copie par défaut Recto Ö R-V, R-V Ö R-V, Recto Ö Recto Papier Auto/Taux Auto Papier Auto, Taux Auto, Manuel Magasin prioritaire 1er magasin papier Papier dédié Normal, Recto seulement, Recyclé, Spécial Taux prioritaire 2en1, 4en1 et Livret Oui, Non 3/6 Economie d'énergie 1 à 240 minutes, 15 minutes Mise en veille 1 à 240 minutes, 15 minutes Extinction écran 1 à 240 minutes, 1 minute Initialisation automatique Pas d’initialisation, 30 secondes, 1 min, 2 min, 3 min, 5 min Initialisation / Retrait cmpt clé Oui, Non Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-5 4/6 Disposition copie 4en1 , Mode densité Auto, Manuel Texte, Photo, Texte/Photo Densité copie Auto + Clair, Normal, + Foncé Manuel Entre “+ Clair” et “+ Foncé”, neuf niveaux distincts peuvent être sélectionnés. Densité impression -2, -1, 0, 1, 2 Priorité finition Non-Tri, Tri, Groupe, Agrafage en coin*, Agrafage 2 points*, Perforation* *Options 5/6 Tri sélectif Oui, Non Réceptacle Spécifiez le réceptacle du module de finition (option). Originaux “Plus Petits” Oui, Non Déshum. scanner Spécifiez l'heure de déshumidification du scanner. Agrafage centre / Marquage pli Marque de pliage (-10 à +10, 0) Agrafage au centre (-10 à +10, 0) 6/6 Densité (ADF) Mode 1, Mode 2 Onglet Fonction Paramètres 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7.3 Procédure de configuration standard Voici les procédures permettant de modifier chacun des paramètres du Choix Utilisateur. Pour définir la fonction “Rappel mémoire” Cette fonction permet de spécifier si la dernière image copiée peut être ou non rappelée et imprimée une nouvelle fois. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [1/6], et puis appuyez sur [Rappel mémoire]. 4 Appuyez sur [Oui] ou [Non], puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  Si vous avez sélectionné [Oui], les données de l'image précédemment copiée peuvent être réimprimées, même un fois que l'opération de copie est terminée ou que le copieur est en attente. 5 Appuyez sur [ENTRÉE] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-7 Pour définir la fonction “Détection originaux mixtes” Cette fonction permet de spécifier si la fonction “Détection originaux mixtes” doit ou non être activée par défaut. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [1/6], puis appuyez sur [Détection originaux mixtes] 4 Appuyez sur [Oui] ou [Non], puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour définir la fonction “Langue d’Affichage” Cette fonction permet de spécifier la langue des fenêtres qui s'affichent sur l'écran tactile. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [1/6], puis appuyez sur [Langue d'Affichage]. 4 Choisissez la langue souhaitée puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-9 Pour définir la fonction “Mode Orig. > Copie par défaut” Cette fonction permet de spécifier le paramétrage par défaut pour Orig. Ö Copie. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [2/6], puis appuyez sur [Mode Orig. > Copie par défaut]. 4 Choisissez les réglages souhaités puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour définir la fonction “Papier Auto / Taux Auto” Cette fonction permet de spécifier si le paramètre Papier “Papier Auto”, le paramètre Zoom “Taux Auto” ou le paramètre “Manuel” seront définis comme paramètres par défaut. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [2/6], puis appuyez sur [Papier Auto / Taux Auto]. 4 Choisissez les réglages souhaités puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-11 Pour définir la fonction “Magasin prioritaire” Vous avez la possibilité de spécifier le papier qui est sélectionné en priorité (magasin papier). Par exemple, si vous spécifiez un magasin qui contient le papier utilisé le plus souvent (papier recyclé, papier une face, par exemple), ce magasin sera prioritaire en ce qui concerne l'alimentation en papier. Cependant, cette fonction sera inopérante avec la fonction Papier Auto, ou lorsque le papier est soumis à des limitations. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [2/6], et puis appuyez sur [Magasin prioritaire]. 4 Sélectionnez le magasin papier voulu puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour définir la fonction “Papier dédié” Cette fonction permet de spécifier le type de papier par défaut pour un magasin donné, lorsque par exemple, du papier recyclé est chargé dans un magasin particulier.  Conseil Si un magasin donné est réglé pour recevoir du papier spécial, le papier contenu dans ce magasin ne sera pas sélectionné par le mode Sélection automatique du papier. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [2/6], et puis appuyez sur [Papier dédié]. 4 Sélectionnez le magasin qui contient le papier dédié, sélectionnez le type de papier, puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  : Recyclé Ce mode implique que ce magasin ne sera pas sélectionné en mode Sélection automatique du papier. Par exemple, Lorsque l'on dispose à la fois de papier ordinaire et de papier recyclé dans des magasins respectifs, mais que le papier le plus utilisé est le papier ordinaire, la sélection de ce mode signifie que le papier ordinaire sera prioritaire sur l'autre.  : Recto seulement La sélection de ce mode signifie que la copie recto-verso sur le papier contenu de ce magasin ne sera pas possible. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-13  : Spécial La sélection de ce mode signifie que ce magasin ne sera pas pris en compte dans la Sélection automatique du papier. Si vous utilisez du papier de couleur pour les couvertures ou les encarts, cette option permet de réduire les risques d'erreur de manipulation. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour définir la fonction “Taux prioritaire 2en1, 4en1 et livret” Cette fonction permet de spécifier si le paramètre Zoom prédéfini, approprié au document et au format du papier, sera activé ou non lorsque l'on sélectionne une copie 2en1 ou 4en1. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [2/6], puis appuyez sur [Taux prioritaire 2en1, 4en1 et livret]. 4 Appuyez sur [Oui] ou [Non], puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  Si vous avez sélectionné [Non], spécifiez les paramètres Zoom pour la copie 2en1 et 4en1. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-15 Pour définir la fonction “Economie d’énergie” Cette fonction permet de spécifier à quel moment le copieur passera automatiquement en mode Economie d'énergie lorsqu'aucune opération n'a été effectuée sur le copieur à l'issue d'un laps de temps défini. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [3/6], puis appuyez sur [Economie d'énergie]. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [C] pour effacer la valeur.  Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le délai souhaité, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. (Spécifiez un délai compris entre 1 et 240 minutes.) 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-16 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour définir la fonction “Mise en veille” Cette fonction permet de spécifier la durée d'inactivité à l'issue de laquelle le copieur éteint automatiquement le chauffage de l'imprimante. Pour afficher [Désactivé], vous devez d'abord afficher [Désactivé] dans Spécification des Paramètres Administrateurs. Pour plus de détails, voir “Paramètres administrateur” à la page 8-6. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [3/6], puis appuyez sur [Mise en veille]. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [C] pour effacer la valeur.  Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le délai souhaité, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. (Spécifiez un délai compris entre 1 et 240 minutes.)  La sélection de la touche [Désactivé] signifie que les fonctions de mise en veille seront désormais inopérantes. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-17 Pour définir la fonction “Extinction écran” Cette fonction permet de spécifier à quel moment l'éclairage de l'écran s'éteindra automatiquement lorsqu'aucune opération n'a été effectuée sur le copieur à l'issue d'un délai défini. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [3/6], puis appuyez sur [Extinction écran]. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [C] pour effacer la valeur.  Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le délai souhaité, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. (Spécifiez un délai compris entre 1 et 240 minutes.)  Conseil Si les paramètres de préchauffage et de veille sont courts parce que la fonction Extinction écran est désactivée, le rétro-éclairage sera éteint à l’issue de la durée de préchauffage ou de veille. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-18 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour définir la fonction “Initialisation automatique” Cette fonction permet de spécifier à quel moment l'écran Fonctions de Base s'affiche automatiquement si aucune opération n'est effectuée sur le copieur pendant qu'un programme ou un paramétrage est en cours de spécification. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [3/6], puis appuyez sur [Initialisation automatique]. 4 Sélectionnez le délai souhaité avant que l'écran Fonctions de Base ne s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  Le délai à l'issue duquel l'écran Fonctions de Base s'affiche, peut être réglé à 30 secondes, 1, 2, 3 ou 5 minutes, ou sur “Pas d’init”. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-19 Pour définir la fonction “Initialisation / retrait cmpt clé” Une pression sur la touche [Code] pendant la spécification de paramètres utilisateur permet de définir si les paramètres par défaut doivent être ou non restaurés à leurs valeurs d'usine, sauf toutefois quand la carte magnétique du contrôleur de données est retirée. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [3/6], puis appuyez sur [Initialisation / retrait cmpt clé]. 4 Appuyez sur [Oui] ou [Non], puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-20 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour définir la fonction “Disposition copie 4en1” Cette fonction permet de spécifier la disposition des pages pour les copies 4en1. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [4/6], puis appuyez sur [Disposition copie 4en1]. 4 Sélectionnez la disposition des pages pour les copies 4en1, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-21 Pour définir la fonction “Mode densité” Ceci permet de spécifier les paramètres par défaut pour la densité d'impression / mode copie. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [4/6], et puis appuyez sur [Mode densité]. 4 Choisissez les réglages souhaités puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  La densité de sortie par défaut peut être réglée sur [Auto] ou sur [Manuel].  Le type image original peut être réglé sur [Texte], [Photo] ou sur [Texte/Photo]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-22 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour définir la fonction “Densité copie” Ceci permet de spécifier les paramètres par défaut pour le niveau de densité d'impression auto et manuelle. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [4/6], puis appuyez sur [Densité copie]. 4 Choisissez les réglages souhaités puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  Le niveau Auto de densité copie peut être réglé sur [+ Clair], [Normal] ou [+ Foncé].  Le niveau Manuel de densité copie peut être réglé par pas d'une unité à la fois. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-23 Pour définir la fonction “Densité impression” Ceci permet de spécifier les paramètres par défaut sur l'un des 5 niveaux de densité d'impression, de -2 à 2. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [4/6], et puis appuyez sur [Densité impression]. 4 Choisissez les réglages souhaités puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-24 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour définir la fonction “Priorité finition” Ceci permet de spécifier les modes de finition par défaut qui s'appliqueront prioritairement. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [4/6], et puis appuyez sur [Priorité finition]. 4 Choisissez les réglages souhaités puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-25 Pour définir la fonction “Tri sélectif” Cette fonction permet de spécifier si les sélections “Tri” et les sélections “Non-Tri” seront ou non automatiquement activées en fonction du nombre de pages que comporte le document. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [5/6], puis appuyez sur [Tri sélectif]. 4 Appuyez sur [Oui] ou [Non], puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  Si vous avez sélectionné [Oui], le paramètre “Non-Tri” est automatiquement sélectionné lorsqu'un document ne comportant qu'une seule page est chargé dans l'introducteur/ retourneur de document, et le paramètre “Tri” est automatiquement sélectionné lorsqu'un document comprenant plusieurs pages est chargé dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-26 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour définir la fonction “Réceptacle” (en option) Cette fonction permet de spécifier comment les copies et les impressions à partir de l'ordinateur seront réparties et vers quel plateau de sortie elles seront dirigées.  Conseil [Réceptacle] ne s’affiche que si le module de finition ou le séparateur travaux est installé. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [5/6], et puis appuyez sur [Réceptacle]. 4 Sélectionnez les paramètres Réceptacle appropriés, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-27 Pour définir la fonction “Originaux plus petits” Cette fonction permet de spécifier si un original de petite dimension peut ou non être copié lorsque l'on appuie sur la touche [Impression]. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [5/6], puis appuyez sur [Originaux plus petits]. 4 Appuyez sur [Oui] ou [Non], puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  Si vous avez sélectionné [Oui], la copie peut être réalisée en utilisant le papier spécifié.  Si vous avez sélectionné [Non], un message apparaît pour indiquer qu'il faut sélectionner le papier. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-28 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour définir la fonction “Déshumidification Scanner” Il est possible d'activer la fonction de déshumidification automatique afin d'éviter la formation de condensation lors d'un changement soudain de température. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [5/6], puis appuyez sur [Déshum. scanner]. 4 Sur le clavier, spécifiez l'heure de début de la déshumidification, puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  Spécifiez l'heure en utilisant le format 24 heures.  Pour effacer la valeur, appuyez sur la touche [C]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-29 Pour définir la fonction “Agrafage centre/Marquage pli” (seulement si le module de finition ou le kit agrafage à cheval est installé) Lorsque le kit agrafage à cheval, en option, (y compris le module de finition), ceci permet de contrôler le décalage des marques de pliage créées en mode Création Livret, et de tout agrafage central spécifié. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [5/6], puis appuyez sur [Agrafage centre / marquage pli]. 4 Utilisez les flèches pour régler la position, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-30 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour définir la fonction “Densité (ADF)” (uniquement si l’introducteur/retourneur de document est installé) Cette fonction permet de régler le niveau de densité lorsque l'on utilise l'introducteur/retourneur de document. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [6/6], et puis appuyez sur [Densité (ADF)]. 4 Choisissez le réglage par défaut souhaité puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  Le réglage de gauche est le plus indiqué pour numériser des documents ordinaires (par exemple, ceux qui sont créés avec une application de traitement de texte).  Le réglage de droite est le plus indiqué pour numériser des documents pâles (par exemple, ceux qui sont écrits au crayon). 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-31 7.4 Enregistrer un tampon composé d’une image Avant de pouvoir utiliser la fonction auxiliaire “Tampon”, il faut d'abord enregistrer une image. On peut enregistrer cinq images maximum. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction “Tampon image”, voir “Fonction “Tampon”” à la page 6-17.  Remarque Le disque dur en option doit être installé. Enregistrer un tampon-image 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Choix utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée mém. Image]. 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée], puis sur la touche d'enregistrement désirée.  Pour effacer une image déjà enregistrée, appuyez sur [Efface], et appuyez ensuite sur le numéro correspondant à l'image que vous voulez effacer. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-32 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510  Pour vérifier une image déjà enregistrée, appuyez sur [Visu], et appuyez sur le numéro correspondant à l'image que vous voulez contrôler. 5 Sélectionnez le format du document image. Appuyez sur [Entrée]. Pour continuer à numériser un document image de format normal, passez à l'étape 9.  Pour numériser un document image de format non-standard, appuyez sur [Format personnel]. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [C] pour effacer la valeur courante, puis saisissez sur le clavier numérique la dimension du côté X du document image (entre 25 et 432 mm). Appuyez sur [Y], puis appuyez sur la touche [C] pour effacer la valeur courante. Saisissez sur le clavier numérique la dimension du côté Y du document image (entre 25 et 297 mm). 7 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 8 Placez le document sur la vitre d'exposition, puis sélectionnez l'orientation du document. 9 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. L'image est numérisée. Le tampon image est enregistré. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-33 7.5 Voir les compteurs (fonction “Compteurs”) La fonction “Compteurs” permet de visualiser les compteurs suivants. Pour voir les compteurs 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Compteurs]. 3 Après avoir vérifié les divers compteurs, appuyez sur [Sortie].  Il y a deux écrans pour les compteurs. Pour voir le second écran, appuyez sur [Suite]. 4 Appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Compteur Fonction Compteur Total Ce compteur indique le nombre total de copies et de tirages imprimante effectués depuis que le copieur a été installé. Compteur Total Copieur Ce compteur indique le nombre total de copies qui ont été réalisées. Compteur Format Copieur Ce compteur indique le nombre total de copies effectuées sur le format papier spécifié. (Le format de papier lu par le compteur devrait être défini par le Centre S.A.V.) Compteur Recto/Verso Copieur Ce compteur indique le nombre total de copies recto/verso qui ont été réalisées. Compteur Total Imprimante Ce compteur indique le nombre total de tirages imprimante qui ont été réalisés. Compteur Imprimante Format Ce compteur indique le nombre total de tirages imprimante effectués, à partir de l'ordinateur, sur le format papier spécifié. (Le format de papier lu par le compteur devrait être défini par le Centre S.A.V.) Compteur Imprim. Recto/ Verso Ce compteur indique le nombre total de tirages imprimante recto/verso qui ont été réalisés. Compteur Scanner Ce compteur indique le nombre total de pages qui ont été numérisées. Compteurs Total départements Ces compteurs indiquent le nombre total de copies et de tirages imprimante réalisés pour chaque compte actuellement enregistré. (Un compteur distinct apparaît pour chaque compte enregistré.) 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-34 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7.6 Utiliser les programmes Copie Il est possible d'enregistrer jusqu'à 10 ensembles de réglages copie en tant que programmes copie. Pour mémoriser un programme de copie 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Mode Contrôle]. 2 Appuyez sur [Entrée], et appuyez sur le numéro sous lequel vous désirez enregistrer le programme de copie.  Les touches numériques où le signe n'apparaît pas ont déjà reçu un programme de copie. Si l'on sélectionne une touche numérique qui comporte déjà un programme copie, ce dernier sera écrasé par le nouvel enregistrement. 3 Appuyez sur [Visu.], puis appuyez sur un bouton de numéro. 4 Vérifiez les paramètres programmés.  Pour afficher le second écran, appuyez sur [Suite]. Pour revenir à l'écran 1/2, appuyez sur [Retour]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Mode Contrôle, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-35 Pour supprimer un programme de copie Il est possible de supprimer individuellement les programmes copie. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Mode Contrôle]. 2 Appuyez sur [Entrée mémoire]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche numérique correspondant au programme copie que vous voulez supprimer, puis appuyez sur [Efface].  Le programme copie est supprimé et le signe apparaît sur la touche. 4 Appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Mode Contrôle, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-36 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour utiliser un programme de copie 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Rappel programme]. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton du numéro correspondant au programme copie que vous voulez utiliser.  Seuls ne s'affichent que les boutons qui comportent un programme copie. 4 Vérifiez les paramètres, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Placez le document et appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-37 7.7 Fonctions du Mode utilisateur A partir de l'écran Mode Utilisateur, il est possible de spécifier les paramètres suivants et aussi de réaliser les opérations suivantes.
Volume du bip de confirmation
Volume alarme
Nettoyage écran
Déshumidification
Apport toner Pour régler le volume des avertissements sonores (fonction “Bip de confirmation” et “Volume Alarme”) Vous avez la possibilité de régler le volume du signal sonore qui accompagne toute action sur les touches du copieur et ou celui des alarmes. La procédure suivante indique comment régler le volume des ces deux types d'avertissements sonores. Il est possible en outre, de personnaliser aisément les volumes sonores selon les utilisateurs.  [Bip de confirm.] : Cette fonction permet de régler le volume du bip qui accompagne chaque pression sur un bouton de l'écran tactile. (Valeur par défaut : 3)  [Volume Alarme] : Cette fonction permet de régler le niveau sonore de l'alarme qui retentit en cas de serrage papier ou si l'on a spécifié une opération incorrecte. (Valeur par défaut : 3) 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-38 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Mode Utilisateur] puis appuyez sur la touche correspondant au bip que vous désirez régler. 3 Utilisez les flèches pour sélectionner le volume désiré, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-39 Pour nettoyer l’écran tactile (fonction “Nettoyage écran”) L'activation de la fonction Nettoyage écran vous permet de nettoyer l'écran sans risque d'appuyer accidentellement sur les touches. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Mode Utilisateur], puis appuyez sur [Nettoyage écran].  Pour annuler cette fonction, appuyez sur la touche [Initialisation]. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-40 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour déshumidifier l’introducteur/retourneur de document (fonction “Déshumidification”) Lorsque le local est soumis à des changements rapides de température ou à une humidité élevée, de la condensation peut se former sur la surface du tambour photosensible ou du scanner du copieur, avec pour conséquence la production d'images floues. Si cela se produit, la fonction “Déshumid.” vous permettra d'éliminer la condensation (en 5 minutes environ). Si vous désirez programmer cette fonction à heure fixe chaque jour : Pour plus de détails, voir “Pour définir la fonction “Déshumidification Scanner”” à la page 7-28.  Remarque Condensation : phénomène par lequel l’eau contenue dans l’air se dépose sur le tambour photosensible ou sur le scanner, sous la forme de gouttelettes d’eau. Tambour photosensible : élément du copieur qui est en contact avec copie film.  Remarque Si vous voulez éliminer la condensation du tambour photosensible, contactez votre technicien S.A.V. La copie reste possible pendant la déshumidification. (Cependant, la déshumidification sera interrompue.) Pour spécifier le moment où la déshumidification doit commencer, veuillez vous reporter à page 7-28. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Mode utilisateur], puis appuyez sur [Déshumid.]. L'opération de déshumidification commence. Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7-41 Pour faire l’appoint en toner (fonction “Apport toner”) Cette fonction est à utiliser quand les copies présentent temporairement un aspect pâle malgré une quantité suffisante de toner dans le copieur, comme par exemple, juste après le remplacement de la cartouche de toner ou lorsque l'on vient de copier une grande quantité de documents comportant d'importantes zones imprimées. Dans de tels cas, on peut procéder à un apport de toner au moyen de cette fonction. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Mode utilisateur], puis appuyez sur [Apport toner]. L'apport toner est effectué. 7 Fonctions du mode Utilitaires 7-42 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8-1 8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8.1 Ecrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur Pour afficher les écrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur La procédure suivante permet d'afficher les écrans du Mode Administrateur. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Mode Administrateur]. 3 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le code administrateur à 8 chiffres (mot de passe Admin.).  Remarque Si le code administrateur (mot de passe Admin.) tapé est incorrect, le message suivant “Code incorrecte, nouvel essai.” apparaît, accompagné par un signal sonore. Suivez les instructions du message qui s’affiche, puis tapez le code administrateur correct. Si le code administrateur (mot de passe Admin.) tapé est incorrect à trois reprises, le message “Le code Admin. est désactivé. Accés au mode Administrateur impossible.” s’affiche, l’accès au mode administrateur est refusé, et le mot de passe correspondant ne sera pas accepté. Pour pouvoir à nouveau accéder au mode administrateur, il faut éteindre puis rallumer la machine. 8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8-2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Conservez le code administrateur (mot de passe Admin.) en lieu sûr et confidentiel. 4 Appuyez sur [Admin. 1] ou [Admin. 2] pour afficher l'écran désiré.  Pour plus de détails sur l'écran Gestion Administrateur 1, voir page 8-3. Pour plus de détails sur l'écran Gestion Administrateur 2, voir page 8-20. 5 A partir de l'écran qui s'affiche, appuyez sur la touche correspondant à l'opération que vous voulez effectuer ou à la fonction dont vous voulez modifier le paramétrage.  Remarque Si vous spécifiez [1000 Comptes] ou [OFF] dans le mode Contrôle dépt, la touche [Enregistrement Compte] et la touche [Compteurs Comptes] en s’affichent pas. Pour plus de détails, voir “Pour définir le mode Contrôle Département” à la page 8-11. Gestion Administrateur 2 Gestion Administrateur 1 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8-3 8.2 Réglages préalables Spécifier la date et l’heure Spécifiez la date et l'heure de manière à ce qu'elles figurent correctement sur les rapports. Pour régler la date et l’heure 1 Suivez la procédure décrite dans “Pour afficher les écrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur” à la page 8-1 pour afficher l'écran du mode Gestion Administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [Admin. 1], puis appuyez sur [Paramètres Initiaux]. 3 Appuyez sur [Date/Heure]. 4 Appuyez sur [Date/Heure]. 5 Tapez sur le clavier numérique la date et l'heure courantes, puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  Pour taper à nouveau la valeur saisie, appuyez sur la touche [C].  Appuyez sur les boutons respectifs correspondant à l'année, le mois, le jour, l'heure et les minutes, et tapez les valeurs sur le clavier numérique. 8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8-4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510  Saisir 4 chiffres pour l'année.  Spécifiez l'heure en utilisant le format 24 heures. 6 Continuez à appuyer sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8-5 Pour définir le fuseau horaire Spécifiez la différence d'heure avec le fuseau du méridien de Greenwich (l'heure et la date figurent sur les bandeaux des courriers qui sont envoyés). Pour définir le fuseau horaire 1 Suivez la procédure décrite dans “Pour afficher les écrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur” à la page 8-1 pour afficher l'écran du mode Gestion Administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [Admin. 1], puis appuyez sur [Paramètres Initiaux]. 3 Appuyez sur [Date/Heure]. 4 Appuyez sur [Fuseau]. 5 Utilisez les flèches pour régler la position, puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  La différence d'heure peut se régler par pas de 30 minutes. 6 Continuez à appuyer sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8-6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8.3 Paramètres administrateur Modifier le code d’accès administrateur Voici la procédure permettant de définir ou de modifier le code d'accès Administrateur. Pour définir le code d’accès administrateur 1 Suivez la procédure décrite dans “Pour afficher les écrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur” à la page 8-1 pour afficher l'écran du mode Gestion Administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [Admin. 1], puis appuyez sur [Param. Admin.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Entrée Code Administrateur]. 4 Appuyez sur [Code Actuel], puis tapez sur le clavier numérique les huit chiffres du code administrateur en vigueur (mot de passe Admin.).  Pour effacer le texte saisi, appuyez sur la touche [C].  Pour revenir à l'écran précédent, appuyez sur [Annul.].  Remarque Si le code administrateur saisi est incorrect, le message “Entrée incorrecte. Entrer le code Administrateur.” s’affiche. Tapez le code administrateur correct. Si la fonction “Access Lock” est réglée sur “ON”, toute saisie incorrecte du code administrateur est comptée comme tentative non autorisée d’accéder à la machine. Après trois tentatives, l’écran Utilitaires apparaît, l’accès au mode administrateur est refusé, et le code administrateur (mot de passe Admin.) n’est plus Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8-7 accepté. Pour pouvoir à nouveau accéder au mode administrateur, il faut éteindre puis rallumer la machine. 5 Appuyez sur [Nouveau Code], puis tapez sur le clavier numérique les huit chiffres du nouveau code administrateur (mot de passe Admin.).  Pour effacer le texte saisi, appuyez sur la touche [C].  Pour revenir à l'écran précédent, appuyez sur [Annul.].  Remarque Si le code administrateur saisi comporte moins de 8 chiffres, le message “Entrée incorrecte. Entrer le code Administrateur.” s’affiche. Tapez un code administrateur à 8 chiffres. 6 Appuyez sur [Nouveau Code (idem)], puis retapez sur le clavier numérique les huit chiffres du nouveau code administrateur (mot de passe Admin.).  Pour effacer le texte saisi, appuyez sur la touche [C].  Pour revenir à l'écran précédent, appuyez sur [Annul.].  Remarque Si le code administrateur saisi comporte moins de 8 chiffres, le message “Entrée incorrecte. Entrer le code Administrateur.” s’affiche. Tapez un code administrateur à 8 chiffres. 7 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8-8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Restriction du nombre de copies Ceci permet de spécifier le nombre maximal de copies qui peut être imprimé. Pour spécifier le nombre maximal de copies qui peut être imprimé 1 Suivez la procédure décrite dans “Pour afficher les écrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur” à la page 8-1 pour afficher l'écran du mode Gestion Administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [Admin. 1], puis appuyez sur [Param. Admin.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Nbr de jeux maxi.]. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, spécifiez le nombre maximal désiré, puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  On peut spécifier des nombres compris entre 1 et 99. 5 Continuez à appuyer sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8-9 Désactiver Mode Veille Ce paramètre permet de désactiver la fonction Veille qui éteint automatiquement l'imprimante lorsqu'aucune opération n'a été effectuée à l'issue d'un délai défini. Pour désactiver le mode Veille 1 Suivez la procédure décrite dans “Pour afficher les écrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur” à la page 8-1 pour afficher l'écran du mode Gestion Administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [Admin. 1], puis appuyez sur [Param. Admin.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Désactiv. veille]. 4 Appuyez sur [Oui] ou [Non], puis appuyez sur [Entrée].  Si vous avez sélectionné [Oui], [Pas d’init] apparaît dans l'écran de la fonction “Mise en veille ”, qui est disponible dans l'écran Choix Utilisateur. 5 Sur l'écran Choix utilisateur [3/6], sélectionnez [Non] par le réglage du mode Veille. 6 Continuez à appuyer sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8-10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8.4 Paramètres Contrôle Département Mode Contrôle Département Il permet de gérer le nombre de copies et le nombre d'impression pour chaque compte. Le Contrôle Département permet aussi de limiter le nombre d'utilisateurs.
[100 Comptes 1] Tapez le code de sécurité pour effectuer des copies. Ou bien, vous pouvez aussi configurer les points suivants pour chaque compte :  Nom de compte : pour programmer ou changer le nom de compte  Code Sécurité : pour programmer ou changer le code de sécurité  Numéro de compte : pour programmer le numéro de compte  Plafond impression : pour limiter le nombre maximal d'impressions qui peut être effectué pour chaque compte  Compteur de copies : affiche la valeur totale pour chaque compte. Permet aussi de remettre le compteur à zéro.
[100 Comptes 2] Il est possible d'effectuer des copies que le code de sécurité ait été entré ou non. Ou bien, si le code d'accès enregistré est introduit, il est possible de configurer les points suivants pour chaque compte :  Nom de compte : pour programmer ou changer le nom de compte  Code d'accès enregistré : pour programmer ou changer le code d'accès enregistré.  Numéro de compte : pour programmer ou changer le numéro de compte  Plafond impression : pour limiter le nombre maximal d'impressions qui peut être effectué pour chaque compte  Compteur de copies : affiche la valeur totale pour chaque compte. Permet aussi de remettre le compteur à zéro.
[1000 Comptes] Tapez le numéro du compte pour faire des copies. Ou bien, vous pouvez aussi configurer les points suivants pour chaque compte :  Compteur de copies : affiche la valeur totale pour chaque compte. Permet aussi de remettre le compteur à zéro. Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8-11 Pour définir le mode Contrôle Département Vous pouvez contrôler le nombre de pages que chaque compte peut copier. 1 Suivez la procédure décrite dans “Pour afficher les écrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur” à la page 8-1 pour afficher l'écran du mode Gestion Administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [Admin. 1], puis appuyez sur [Gestion Comptes]. 3 Appuyez sur [Mode contrôle dpt]. 4 Sélectionnez les méthodes d'information voulues et appuyez sur la touche [Entrée]. 5 Ceci permet de définir les informations par défaut sur le compte. Sélectionnez [Oui], et appuyez sur [Entrée].  Remarque Pour programmer ou changer les données d’information sur un compte, veuillez définir les informations par défaut sur ce compte. Toutefois, en fonction de la méthode d’information sur le compte qui a été spécifiée, il se peut que l’écran par défaut ne s’affiche pas. 8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8-12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510  Remarque Lorsque vous choisissez [100 Comptes 1] ou [100 Comptes 2], veuillez programmer pour chaque compte, son nom et autres informations. Veuillez vous reporter à “Enregistrement de compte” pour plus de détails. 6 Continuez à appuyer sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base.  Remarque C’est seulement si l’on choisit [100 Comptes 1] ou [100 Comptes 2] que [Enregistrement comptes] ou [Compteur Comptes] s’affiche sur l’écran Administrateur1. Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8-13 Données d’information sur le compte Lorsque vous procédez au paramétrage du Contrôle Département, vous pouvez confirmer l'utilisation faite par chaque compte ou remettre à zéro les compteurs. Ou bien, en mode de Gestion 100 Comptes, vous pouvez aussi changer les numéros de comptes, les plafonds d'impressions et les codes d'accès. Vous pouvez également remettre à zéro tous les compteurs en une seule fois. Pour imprimer les données d’informations sur les comptes 1 Suivez la procédure décrite dans “Pour afficher les écrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur” à la page 8-1 pour afficher l'écran du mode Gestion Administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [Admin. 1], puis appuyez sur [Gestion Comptes]. 3 Appuyez sur [Données ctrl dpt]. 4 Chargez du papier A4 L dans le magasin 1, et appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les données de Contrôle Département s'impriment. 5 Continuez à appuyer sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8-14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Effacer tous les compteurs 1 Suivez la procédure décrite dans “Pour afficher les écrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur” à la page 8-1 pour afficher l'écran du mode Gestion Administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [Admin. 1], puis appuyez sur [Gestion Comptes]. 3 Appuyez sur [Données ctrl dpt]. 4 Sélectionnez le numéro de page du compteur que vous désirez effacer.  Conseil Si vous voulez effacer en une seule fois tous les compteurs totaux des comptes, appuyez sur [RàZ tous les compteurs]. 5 Sélectionnez les touches des comptes que vous voulez remettre à zéro, et appuyez sur la touche [C].  Conseil Si vous désirez abandonner la remise à zéro des comptes, appuyez sur la touche [Interruption]. Si vous voulez remettre à zéro les compteurs totaux d’autres comptes, répétez les étapes 4 et 5. 6 Continuez à appuyer sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8-15 Modifier les informations sur les comptes 1 Suivez la procédure décrite dans “Pour afficher les écrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur” à la page 8-1 pour afficher l'écran du mode Gestion Administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [Admin. 1], puis appuyez sur [Gestion Comptes]. 3 Appuyez sur [Mode contrôle dpt]. 4 Sélectionnez le numéro de page du compteur que vous désirez modifier. 5 Sélectionnez les comptes que vous voulez remettre à zéro, et appuyez sur la touche [C]. 6 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez la valeur de remplacement. 7 Continuez à appuyer sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8-16 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8.5 Configurer l’enregistrement de comptes Enregistrement de comptes On peut enregistrer des comptes pour les départements d'une entreprise ou pour des personnes individuelles. Il est possible de limiter le nombre d'impressions pour chaque compte, ou de spécifier un code d'accès, ou de contrôler l'utilisation non autorisée du copieur. En mode Gestion Administrateur, le Gestion 100 Comptes est nécessaire. Pour plus de détails, voir “Pour définir le mode Contrôle Département” à la page 8-11. Pour enregistrer des comptes 1 Suivez la procédure décrite dans “Pour afficher les écrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur” à la page 8-1 pour afficher l'écran du mode Gestion Administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [Admin. 1] et appuyez sur [Enregistrement Compte]. 3 Sélectionnez la touche de compte à programmer ou à modifier. 4 Appuyez sur [Nom du Compte]. Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8-17 5 Pour entrer le nom du compte, utilisez le clavier alphabétique qui apparaît sur l'écran tactile. 6 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 7 Appuyez sur [Code d'Accès], et tapez le code d'accès correspondant au compte. 8 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 9 Appuyez sur [No.], et tapez le numéro du compte sur le clavier numérique. 10 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8-18 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11 Appuyez sur [Nb Pages Imp. Max.], et sur le clavier numérique, tapez le plafond (limite supérieure) des impressions autorisées. 12 Appuyez sur [Entrée].  Conseil Si vous désirez modifier les informations programmées, répétez la procédure à partir de l’étape 3, et tapez les nouvelles informations. Pour supprimer des informations programmées, appuyez sur la touche [Efface]. 13 Continuez à appuyer sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8-19 Compteur Département Il est possible de vérifier le nombre de tirages réalisé par chaque compte. Pour vérifier le nombre de tirages effectué par chaque compte 1 Suivez la procédure décrite dans “Pour afficher les écrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur” à la page 8-1 pour afficher l'écran du mode Gestion Administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [Admin. 1], puis appuyez sur [Compteur dpt]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au compte que vous voulez visualiser, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 4 Après avoir vérifié le compteur, appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Continuez à appuyer sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. 8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8-20 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8.6 Paramétrer l’accès à la machine Verrouillage d’accès (Access Lock) La fonction “Access Lock” permet de spécifier si (“Oui”) ou (“Non”) l'accès au mode Administrateur, aux travaux d'impression dans les boîtes aux lettres et aux boîtes Utilisateur est contrôlé. Si la fonction “Access Lock” est réglée sur “Oui”, le nombre de tentatives infructueuses à accéder au mode Administrateur, aux travaux d'impression dans les boîtes aux lettres et aux boîtes Utilisateur sera enregistré. Après trois tentatives infructueuses, l'accès à la machine est refusé. Pour pouvoir à nouveau accéder au mode Administrateur, il faut éteindre puis rallumer la machine. Toutefois, pour permettre de restaurer l'accès aux travaux d'impression dans les boîtes aux lettres et aux boîtes Utilisateur, le verrouillage doit être levé. Pour plus de détails, voir le manuel d'utilisation du contrôleur d’imprimante. Procéder aux réglages de la fonction “Access Lock” 1 Suivez la procédure décrite dans “Pour afficher les écrans du Mode Gestion Administrateur” à la page 8-1 pour afficher l'écran du mode Gestion Administrateur. 2 Appuyez sur [Admin. 2], puis appuyez sur [Access Lock]. 3 Pour activer la fonction “Access Lock”, appuyez sur [Oui]. Pour désactiver la fonction Access Lock, appuyez sur [Non]. 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée].  Pour revenir à l'écran précédent, appuyez sur [Annul.]. 5 Continuez à appuyer sur [Entrée] pour revenir à l'écran Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur [Sortie] pour revenir à l'écran Fonctions de Base. Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8-21 8.7 Configurer les fonctions logicielles (Soft Switch) Ces commutateurs logiciels affectant les fonctions peuvent être réglés selon vos besoins.  Remarque Ne modifiez aucun mode ou bits qui ne soit pas mentionné dans ce manuel. Référence : le tableau ci-dessous donne des exemples d'équivalences en bits (binaire) et en hexadécimal (base 16). Réglages Soft Switch Mode spécification Spécifie le paramètre du réglage soft switch sur 3 chiffres. Spécification en bits Nombre à 8 chiffres comprenant le mode. Chaque bit de 0 à 7 est spécifié par un nombre binaire (0 ou 1) pour configurer les fonctions. Spécification HEX Permet de régler les fonctions au moyen de nombres hexadécimaux (combinaison de 0 à 9 et A à F). Par exemple, la spécification en bits “0011 0000” serait “30” en langage hexadécimal. Décimal Spécification en bits (binaire) Spécification HEX (hexadécimal) 0 0000 0000 00 1 0000 0001 01 2 0000 0010 02 3 0000 0011 03 4 0000 0100 04 5 0000 0101 05 6 0000 0110 06 7 0000 0111 07 8 0000 1000 08 9 0000 1001 09 10 0000 1010 0A 11 0000 1011 0B 12 0000 1100 0C 13 0000 1101 0D 14 0000 1110 0E 15 0000 1111 0F 8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8-22 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Paramétrage de la réinitialisation du mode Copie avec introducteur/ retourneur de document installé (Mode 429) Il est possible de spécifier le délai à l'issue duquel le mode Copie est réinitialisé une fois qu'une copie réalisée avec l'introducteur/retourneur de document est terminée. Réglages d'usine Réglage Les cellules grises représentent le réglage en sortie d'usine. 16 0001 0000 10 : : : 255 1111 1111 FF Décimal Spécification en bits (binaire) Spécification HEX (hexadécimal) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Valeur 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 (HEX: 00) Bit Description Valeur Instruction 7, 6 00 * Ne changez pas ces bits. 5 Spécifie si le mode Copie sera ou non réinitialisé une fois qu'une tâche de copie réalisée avec l'introducteur/retourneur de document est terminée. 0 Ne pas effacer 1 Effacer 4, 3, 2, 1, 0 00000 * Ne changez pas ces bits. Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8-23 8.8 Lever le verrouillage Déverrouillage Si la fonction “Access Lock” est réglée sur “Oui” et que le contrôleur d'imprimante, en option, est installé, le verrouillage doit être levé pour restaurer l'accès interdit après plusieurs tentatives infructueuses d'accéder aux travaux dans les boîtes aux lettres et aux boîtes Utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir le manuel d'utilisation du contrôleur d’imprimante. De plus, pour restaurer l'accès après plusieurs tentatives d'accès infructueuses au mode Administrateur, éteignez puis rallumez la machine. 8 Opérations du Mode Gestion Administrateur 8-24 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Papier Copie 9 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 9-1 9 Papier Copie 9.1 Caractéristiques papier Utiliser du papier conforme aux caractéristiques suivantes. Types de papier * LCC : Magasin grande capacité 2 : Disponible— : Non disponible Type de papier Papier ordinaire Support spécial Papier recyclé Source papier, etc. 56 à 90 g/m2 91 à 210 g/m2 60 à 90 g/m2 Plateau d’introduction multifeuilles 2 2 2 1er magasin papier 2 — 2 2ème magasin papier 2 — 2 3ème magasin papier (LCC*) 2 — 2 3ème magasin papier 2 — 2 4ème magasin papier 2 — 2 Copie recto-verso 2 — 2 Type de papier Support spécial Transparents de rétroprojection Cartes postales Feuilles d’étiquettes Enveloppes Source papier, etc. Plateau d’introduction multifeuilles 2 2 2 2 1er magasin papier — — — — 2ème magasin papier — — — — 3ème magasin papier (LCC*) — — — — 3ème magasin papier — — — — 4ème magasin papier — — — — Copie recto-verso — — — — 9 Papier Copie 9-2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Formats papier Papier de format non-standard * LCC : Magasin grande capacité — : Non disponible Papier de format standard * LCC : Magasin grande capacité 2 : Disponible— : Non disponible Source papier Largeur papier Longueur papier Plateau d’introduction multifeuilles 90 mm à 297 mm 140 mm à 432 mm 1er magasin papier — — 2ème magasin papier — — 3ème magasin papier (LCC*) — — 3ème magasin papier — — 4ème magasin papier — — Format papier A3 L B4 L A4 L A4 C B5 L B5 C A5 L A5 C Source papier, etc. Plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1er magasin papier 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 — 2ème magasin papier 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 — 3ème magasin papier (LCC*) — — — 2 — — — — 3ème magasin papier 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 — 4ème magasin papier 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 — Copie recto-verso 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 — Format papier B6 L Source papier, etc. Plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles 2 1er magasin papier — 2ème magasin papier — 3ème magasin papier (LCC*) — 3ème magasin papier — 4ème magasin papier — Copie recto-verso 2 Papier Copie 9 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 9-3 Capacité de papier * LCC : Magasin grande capacité — : Non disponible  Remarque Le 3ème magasin papier (magasin grande capacité), le 3ème magasin papier et le 4ème magasin papier sont en option. Si l’unité recto-verso en option est utilisée pour effectuer des copies recto-verso, on peut seulement utiliser du papier ordinaire et du papier recyclé. Si l’on utilise le module de finition pour le tri/groupe, la perforation et l’agrafage, seul le papier ordinaire peut être utilisé. Le paramétrage du format papier pour le 3ème magasin papier (magasin grande capacité) peut être modifié pour permettre le chargement de papier de format Letter. Contactez votre technicien Type de papier Papier ordinaire Support spécial Papier recyclé Source papier, etc. 56 à 90 g/m2 91 à 210 g/m2 60 à 90 g/m2 Plateau d’introduction multifeuilles 150 feuilles 100 feuilles 150 feuilles 1er magasin papier 500 feuilles — 500 feuilles 2ème magasin papier 500 feuilles — 500 feuilles 3ème magasin papier (LCC*) 2.500 feuilles — 2.500 feuilles 3ème magasin papier 500 feuilles — 500 feuilles 4ème magasin papier 500 feuilles — 500 feuilles Type de papier Support spécial Source papier, etc. Transparents de rétroprojection Cartes postales Feuilles d’étiquettes Enveloppes Plateau d’introduction multifeuilles 50 feuilles 50 feuilles 50 feuilles 10 feuilles 1er magasin papier — — — — 2ème magasin papier — — — — 3ème magasin papier (LCC*) — — — — 3ème magasin papier — — — — 4ème magasin papier — — — — 9 Papier Copie 9-4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 S.A.V. pour modifier ce format de papier. 9.2 Papier à éviter Les types de papier suivants ne devraient pas être utilisés car cela pourrait entraîner une détérioration de la qualité d'impression, des serrages papier ou une détérioration de la machine.
Transparents de rétroprojection qui ont déjà été introduits dans la machine Même si le transparent est toujours vierge, ne le réemployez pas.
Papier imprimé sur imprimante thermique ou à jet d'encre
Papier extrêmement épais ou extrêmement fin
Papier plié, gondolé, froissé ou déchiré
Papier qui est resté hors de son emballage pendant longtemps
Papier humide
Papier perforé ou poinçonné
Papier extrêmement lisse, extrêmement rugueux, ou inégal
Papier traité, comme du papier carbone, papier thermosensible ou manosensible
Papier torsadé ou gaufré
Papier de formats divers
Papier hors norme (non rectangulaire)
Papier qui comporte de la colle, des agrafes ou des trombones
Papier étiqueté
Papier accolé de rubans, crochets, boutons, etc.
Papier gondolé ou froissé
Papier à dessin, papier couché ou papier pour imprimante jet d'encre Papier Copie 9 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 9-5 9.3 Zone d’impression Toute partie de l'image qui se trouve dans la zone indiquée ci-dessous ne peut être copiée.
Marge de 4 ± 2 mm (en taille réelle) à partir du haut de page (A)
Marge de 4 ± 2 mm (en taille réelle) à partir du bas de page (B)
Marge de 4 ± 2 mm (en taille réelle) des deux côtés de la page (C) Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation du copieur comme imprimante pilotée par un ordinateur sous réserve que le contrôleur d'imprimante soit installé, veuillez vous reporter au manuel du contrôleur d'imprimante. 9.4 Stockage du papier Prendre les précautions suivantes pour le stockage du papier.
Stocker le papier dans un endroit qui répond aux conditions suivantes :  A l'abri de la lumière directe du soleil  A l'abri des flammes  A l'abri de l'humidité excessive  A l'abri d'un environnement poussiéreux
Le papier sorti de son emballage devrait être placé dans un sac en plastique et entreposé dans un endroit frais et obscur.
Garder le papier hors de la portée des enfants. A : 4 ± 2 mm (en taille réelle) B : 4 ± 2 mm (en taille réelle) C : 4 ± 2 mm (en taille réelle) Sens sortie papier 9 Papier Copie 9-6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 9.5 Sélection automatique de la source papier Si le magasin papier sélectionné manque de papier pendant l'impression d'une tâche de copie et qu'un magasin différent contient le papier répondant aux conditions suivantes, ce second magasin sera automatiquement sélectionné pour que l'impression puisse se poursuivre. Si le magasin grande capacité (LCC) est installé, on peut réaliser en continu un maximum de 3650 copies (avec du papier A4 C). C'est un avantage indéniable lorsque l'on imprime un grand nombre de pages ou pour réaliser de nombreuses copies en continu. Conditions préalables
Le papier est du même format.
Le papier est du même type.
Le papier est positionné selon la même orientation. Pour réaliser un grand nombre de copies en continu, chargez tous les magasins avec du papier répondant aux conditions ci-dessus. Ordre de sélection d’un magasin alternatif Lorsqu'un magasin différent est sélectionné automatiquement, c'est le magasin suivant dans la liste ci-après qui est choisi en priorité. 1er magasin A 2ème magasin A 3ème magasin A 4ème magasin A Plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles  Remarque Lorsque vous placez un support spécial comme des transparents ou des planches d’étiquettes dans le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles, la fonction de changement automatique de magasin peut démarrer et introduire du papier non désiré. Nous vous recommandons de procéder aux sélections Papier dédié dans les Paramètres Spécial du Choix utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir Paramètres du Choix utilisateur, dans la section Utilisation Experte du Manuel d’utilisation. Papier Copie 9 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 9-7 9.6 Chargement du papier Lors du chargement du papier veillez à observer les précautions suivantes.
Si le papier est gondolé, applatissez-le avant de le charger.
Chargez le papier de manière à ce que le haut de la ramette ne dépasse pas le repère Ä ou ne dépassez pas le nombre de feuilles spécifié dans les caractéristiques du magasin.
Assurez-vous que les guides papier sont bien poussés contre les bords de la ramette.
Pour rajouter du papier, enlevez d'abord le papier restant dans le magasin, y adjoindre le nouveau papier, puis bien aligner le papier dans la pile nouvellement constituée avant de la charger dans le magasin.  Conseil Il est recommandé de remplir les magasins seulement après utilisation complète du papier chargé. 9 Papier Copie 9-8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Chargement du papier dans le 1er, 2ème, 3ème et 4ème magasin Chargez du papier dans le 1er ou le 2ème magasin, ou dans le magasin d'alimentation à deux directions, en option et le magasin d'alimentation papier (3ème ou 4ème magasin) comme indiqué ci-dessous. 1 Tirez le magasin à recharger en papier. 2 Faites coulisser les guides papier pour recevoir le papier à charger.  Remarque Assurez-vous que les guides papier sont fermement logés dans leurs rainures. 3 Chargez la ramette dans le magasin de sorte que le dessus du papier (la face orientée vers le haut lors de l'ouverture de l'emballage) soit tourné vers le haut.  Remarque Veillez à ne pas toucher la feuille de Mylar. Mylar Papier Copie 9 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 9-9 4 Réajustez les guides papier aux dimensions du papier. 5 Fermez le magasin papier. 9 Papier Copie 9-10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Chargement du papier dans le magasin grande capacité Chargez le papier dans le magasin grande capacité selon les indications ci-dessous. 1 Appuyez sur la touche d'ouverture du magasin.  Remarque Lorsque l’alimentation électrique est coupée, la cassette papier ne peut pas être libérée, même en manoeuvrant le bouton de déverrouillage du magasin. 2 Chargez la pile de papier dans le côté droit du magasin de manière à ce que le dessus de la ramette (la face orientée vers le haut lors de l'ouverture de l'emballage) soit placé vers le haut.  Remarque Veillez à ne pas toucher la feuille de Mylar. 3 Chargez la pile de papier dans le côté gauche du magasin, côté face vers le haut. Mylar Papier Copie 9 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 9-11 Chargement du papier dans le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles L'utilisation du plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles est indiquée pour imprimer sur papier ordinaire, cartes postales, enveloppes, transparents de rétroprojection et planches d'étiquettes. Pour copier sur le bord inférieur du papier chargé.  Remarque Pour sélectionner un autre choix que papier ordinaire, les paramètres doivent être sélectionnés sur l’écran. Le format papier ne peut pas être sélectionné avec le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles lorsqu’une tâche d’impression est en cours ou en file d’attente. De plus, la fonction “Encart” ne peut pas être spécifiée en même temps. Pour charger du papier ordinaire 1 Ouvrez le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles. Tirez l'extension plateau pour charger du papier de grand format. 2 Ajustez les guides papier aux dimensions du papier, puis introduisez le papier aussi loin que possible dans la fente d'exposition.  Remarque Le papier ne doit pas être chargé au -delà du repère de hauteur Ä. Assurez-vous que les guides papier sont bien poussés contre les bords de la ramette. Extension plateau Guides papier 9 Papier Copie 9-12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour charger des cartes postales  Chargez les cartes postales, côté court comme tête de page, comme indiqué sur l'illustration, et face à imprimer orientée vers le bas.  Remarque Ne chargez pas plus de 50 cartes postales. Ne chargez pas les cartes postales dans le sens transversal. Après avoir chargé du papier, spécifiez à l’écran le type de papier pour le plateau d’introduction multifeuilles. Papier Copie 9 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 9-13 Pour charger des enveloppes  Chargez les enveloppes, rabat orienté vers le haut, comme représenté sur l'illustration.  Remarque Avant de charger une pile d’enveloppes, applatissez-la pour en évacuer tout l’air qu’elle contient, et veillez à ce que les rabats soient bien applatis, sinon les enveloppes pourraient se froisser ou provoquer un serrage papier. Ne chargez pas plus de 10 enveloppes. Après avoir chargé du papier, spécifiez à l’écran le type de papier pour le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles.  Remarque Ne chargez pas les enveloppes dans le sens transversal. Ne placez pas les enveloppes avec le rabat orienté vers le bas. 9 Papier Copie 9-14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour charger des transparents de rétroprojection  Chargez les transparents dans le même sens que le document.  Remarque Ne chargez pas plus de 50 transparents. Après avoir chargé du papier, spécifiez à l’écran le type de papier pour le plateau d’introduction multifeuilles. Pour charger des planches d’étiquettes 1 Chargez les planches d'étiquettes dans le même sens que le document. 2 Placez les documents face à imprimer orientée vers le bas.  Remarque Ne chargez pas plus de 50 planches d’étiquettes. Après avoir chargé du papier, spécifiez à l’écran le type de papier pour le plateau d’introduction multifeuilles. Papier Copie 9 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 9-15 Pour définir un format de papier non-standard (personnalisé) Si du papier de format non standard a été chargé, il est nécessaire de spécifier le format. Pour faciliter la sélection, il est possible de programmer deux formats nonstandard de papier. Pour plus de détails, veuillez vous reporter à la section suivante.  Remarque Si vous ne souhaitez pas spécifier de format non standard, appuyez sur la touche [Initialisation], ou patientez jusqu’à ce que le délai de réinitialisation automatique soit écoulé, ce qui ramène ma machine à ses paramètres par défaut. 1 Appuyez sur [Papier]. 2 Appuyez sur le bouton de sélection de l'introducteur/retourneur de document, puis appuyez sur [Modif. Support]. 3 Appuyez sur [Format personnel]. L'écran Format personnel apparaît. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [X] puis sur la touche [C]. Puis, entrez sur le clavier numérique la longueur du côté X du document. 9 Papier Copie 9-16 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Y] puis sur la touche [C]. Puis, entrez sur le clavier numérique la longueur du côté Y du document. 6 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. Papier Copie 9 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 9-17 Pour enregistrer un format de papier non-standard (personnalisé) Il est possible de mémoriser deux formats de papier non-standard. L'enregistrement des formats de papier fréquemment utilisés permet de les sélectionner rapidement.  Remarque Si vous ne souhaitez pas définir un format personnalisé, appuyez sur la touche [Initialisation], ou patientez jusqu’à ce que le délai d’inactivité soit écoulé pour que l’initialisation automatique intervienne et ramène la machine à ses paramètres par défaut. 1 Appuyez sur le bouton de sélection de l'introducteur/retourneur de document, puis appuyez sur [Modif. Support]. 2 Appuyez sur [Format personnel]. L'écran Format personnel apparaît. 3 Appuyez sur [Enregistr. Format Pap]. 9 Papier Copie 9-18 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4 Appuyez sur la touche [X] puis sur la touche [C]. Puis, entrez sur le clavier numérique la longueur du côté X du document. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Y] puis sur la touche [C]. Puis, entrez sur le clavier numérique la longueur du côté Y du document. 6 Appuyez sur [1] ou sur [2].  Si un format papier a déjà été enregistré sous la touche sélectionnée, le format précédemment assigné à cette touche sera effacé et le nouveau format de papier sera enregistré.  Pour enregistrer un autre format personnel de papier, répétez les étapes 4, 5 et 6. 7 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. Ceci achève l'enregistrement des formats personnels de papier. Papier Copie 9 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 9-19 Pour sélectionner un format de papier non-standard (personnalisé) On peut effectuer des copies en utilisant le format papier personnalisé de enregistré en mémoire. 1 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier. 2 Appuyez sur [Papier]. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton de sélection de l'introducteur/retourneur de document, puis appuyez sur [Modif. Support]. 4 Appuyez sur [Format personnel]. 5 Appuyez sur [1] ou sur [2] pour sélectionner le format personnel de papier enregistré en mémoire, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. 9 Papier Copie 9-20 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 9.7 Sélectionner le réglage Papier Pour effectuer des copies, il est possible de sélectionner le papier chargé dans un magasin ou dans le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles. Pour sélectionner le papier chargé dans un magasin 1 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier. 2 Appuyez sur [Papier]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au magasin papier contenant le format papier désiré, puis appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. Pour sélectionner le papier chargé dans le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles 1 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier. 2 Appuyez sur [Papier]. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton de sélection de l'introducteur/retourneur de document, puis appuyez sur [Modif. Support]. 4 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au type de papier chargé dans le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-1 10 Documents originaux 10.1 Introduction du document Utilisation de l’introducteur/retourneur de document L'introducteur/retourneur de document introduit, numérise et éjecte une page à la fois d'un document multi-feuilles. Pour que l'introducteur/ retourneur de document puisse fonctionner correctement, il convient de charger le type correct de document. L'utilisation d'un document de type incorrect peut entraîner un serrage papier ou endommager le copieur. Types de document Document de formats uniformes Documents pour le mode Détection originaux mixtes Documents originaux rectos Documents recto-verso Document de formats mixtes Documents originaux rectos Documents recto-verso Type de papier Papier ordinaire (35 à 128 g/m2) Papier ordinaire (50 à 128 g/m2) Format du document A3 L, B4 L, A4 L/C, B5 L/C, A5 L/C, B6 L Documents originaux rectos Documents recto-verso Type de papier Papier ordinaire (50 à 128 g/m2) Format du document Veuillez vous reporter à “Originaux de largeurs mixtes”. 10 Documents originaux 10-2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Originaux de largeurs mixtes 2 : Copie possible — : Copie impossible Largeur maximum du document 297 mm 257 mm 210 mm 182 mm 148 mm 123 mm Détection des originaux de largeurs mixtes A3 L A4 C B4 L B5 C A4 L A5 C B5 L A5 L B6 L 297 mm A3 L 2 2 — — — — — — — A4 C 2 2 — — — — — — — 257 mm B4 L 2 2 2 2 — — — — — B5 C 2 2 2 2 — — — — — 210 mm A4 L 2 2 2 2 2 2 — — — A5 C — — 2 2 2 2 — — — 182 mm B5 L — — 2 2 2 2 2 — — 148 mm A5 L — — — — — — 2 2 — 123 mm B6 L — — — — — — — 2 2 Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-3 Précautions relatives aux originaux Les types de documents suivants ne devraient pas être chargés dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document, sinon l'original pourrait être endommagé ou un serrage papier pourrait se produire. Il vaut mieux placer ces documents sur la vitre d'exposition. Documents sur papier spécial
Documents pliés (pliés en deux ou en accordéon)
Documents très translucides ou transparents, comme du papier photosensible diazo
Documents comportant des perforations de reliure
Documents avec de nombreuses perforations de classeur, comme du papier volant
Documents revêtus, comme du papier thermosensible ou du papier carbone
Papier pour imprimante à jet d'encre
Documents qui viennent juste d'être imprimés avec ce copieur Documents sur du papier qui ne se prête pas à l'introduction
Documents gondolés
Documents froissés ou déchirés
Transparents de rétroprojection Si du papier de format non-standard présente un format proche d'un format standard, la copie est possible en utilisant la sélection “Papier Auto” ou “Taux Auto”. 10 Documents originaux 10-4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10.2 Chargement de l’original dans l’introducteur/ retourneur de document Chargement du document 1 Faites coulisser les guides pour qu'ils correspondent au format du document. 2 Chargez les documents à faxer ou copier, face vers le haut.  Remarque Il est possible de charger un document de 80 pages maximum. La hauteur de la pile des pages du document ne doit pas dépasser le repère de hauteur. 3 Puis, faites coulisser les guides pour qu'ils correspondent au format du document.  Remarque Veillez à charger le document correctement, sinon les pages risqueraient d’être introduites de travers. Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-5 4 Appuyez sur [Original Direction], puis sélectionnez le paramètre qui convient à votre document.  Remarque Si l’orientation du document est différente de celle qui est sélectionnée sous Original Direction, certaines opérations de copie, comme la copie 2en1 ou 4en1, ne seront pas imprimées correctement. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. L'introduction commence par la page qui se trouve en haut de la pile. 10 Documents originaux 10-6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour charger un document de formats mixtes (fonction “Détection Originaux Mixtes”) Grâce à la détection des documents de largeurs mixtes, il est possible de numériser et de copier un jeu d'originaux de divers formats avec l'introducteur/retourneur de document. 1 Empilez les pages du document, face vers le haut, comme indiqué sur l'illustration, et veillez à ce que toutes les pages soient alignées contre le bord supérieur et contre le bord gauche. 2 Faites coulisser les guides pour qu'ils correspondent à la page la plus grande. 3 Chargez le document de manière à ce que toutes les pages soient alignées le long du guide document vers l'arrière du copieur. 4 Puis, faites coulisser les guides pour qu'ils correspondent au format du document.  Veillez à charger le document correctement, sinon les pages risqueraient d'être introduites de travers.  Remarque Certaines combinaisons de formats de document ne sont pas compatibles avec la fonction “Détection Originaux Mixtes”. Pour plus de détails, voir page 10-2. Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-7 5 Dans l'écran Fonctions de Base, appuyez sur [Originaux Mixtes]. 6 Sélectionnez les paramètres de copie désirés, puis appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. 10 Documents originaux 10-8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10.3 Positionnement des documents sur la vitre d’exposition La méthode de positionnement dépend du type de document à copier, il convient donc de s'assurer que l'original est positionné correctement. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation de l'introducteur/retourneur de document, veuillez vous reporter à “Chargement de l'original dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document”, page 10-4. Pour placer le document directement sur la vitre d'exposition, relevez de 15° ou plus, le couvre-original ou l'introducteur/retourneur de document, comme indiqué ci-dessous. 15 15 Chargement horizontal Chargement vertical Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-9 Pour positionner des documents en feuilles Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour copier du papier ordinaire ou des documents qui ne peuvent pas être introduits dans l'introducteur/ retourneur de document. 1 Soulevez le couvre-original, ou l'introducteur/retourneur de document s'il est installé, puis placez le doucement sur la vitre d'exposition, face orientée vers le bas. 2 Placez le document de manière à l'aligner avec la flèche située dans le coin supérieur gauche des réglettes document. 3 Refermez doucement le couvreoriginal ou l'introducteur/retourneur de document, s'il est installé. 10 Documents originaux 10-10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour positionner des documents transparents ou translucides Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous, pour copier des documents comme des transparents de rétroprojection ou du papier calque ou du papier photosensible diazo. 1 Soulevez le couvre-original, ou l'introducteur/retourneur de document s'il est installé, puis placez le document sur la vitre d'exposition, face orientée vers le bas. 2 Placez le document de manière à l'aligner avec la flèche située dans le coin supérieur gauche des réglettes document. 3 Placez une feuille de papier vierge de même format au dessus de l'original. 4 Refermez doucement le couvreoriginal ou l'introducteur/retourneur de document, s'il est installé. Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-11 Pour positionner des livres ou des magazines Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous pour copier des documents reliés, comme des livres ou des magazines. 1 Dans l'écran Fonctions de Base, appuyez sur [Orig > Copie] et appuyez sur [Livre]. Procédez ensuite aux autres sélections. 2 Ouvrez le couvre-original ou l'introducteur/retourneur de document, s'il est installé. 3 Placez le document face orientée vers le bas sur la vitre d'exposition, le haut du livre orienté vers l'arrière du copieur, et le milieu du livre aligné avec le repère Livre de la réglette document. 4 Refermez doucement le couvre-original ou l'introducteur/retourneur de document, s'il est installé.  Remarque Pour copier des documents épais, procédez à la copie dans refermer le couvre-original ou l’introducteur/retourneur de document. Pendant la numérisation du document, couvre-original ou introducteur/retourneur de document ouvert, ne regardez pas directement la lumière intense visible à travers la vitre d’exposition. Si le document n’est pas positionné correctement, les copies ne seront pas imprimées dans la séquence correcte. Soulevez, de 15° ou plus, le couvre-original ou l’introducteur/ retourneur de document s’il est installé. Ne posez pas d’objets de plus de 3 kg sur la vitre d’exposition. Si vous placez un livre sur la vitre d’exposition, n’appuyez pas trop fort dessus, cela pourrait endommager la vitre d’exposition.  Conseil Pour plus de détails, voir “Copier un livre” à la page 11-25. 10 Documents originaux 10-12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10.4 Chargement de documents pour des applications spécifiques La méthode d'introduction de documents la plus appropriée et les paramètres copies pour des applications spécifiques sont décrits cidessous. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des divers paramètres copie, veuillez vous reporter à “11 Spécification des paramètres Copie”. Description du tableau * Un tiret (—) indique qu'aucun paramètre ne devrait être sélectionné. 1. Indique si l'original et la copie désirée sont recto ou recto/verso. 2. Indique à quoi ressemblera la copie. 3. Indique comment le document devrait être positionné (page 10-4). 4. Indique la sélection Copie en vigueur. (Recto, Recto-verso, 2en1 ou 4en1) sur l'écran Orig. Ö Copie (page 11-18). 5. Indique la sélection Finition en vigueur. (Agrafage en coin, Agrafage 2 points, ou Perforation) (page 11-1). 6. Indique le paramètre Marge sélectionné, à partir de l'écran Orig. Ö Copie, si une marge a été spécifiée pour le document (page 11-23). 7. Indique le paramètre Marge sélectionné, à partir de l'écran Auxiliaire si une marge de reliure a été spécifiée pour la copie (section Utilisation Experte). 8. Indique la position d'agrafage ou de perforation qui doit être sélectionnée (page 11-6 et page 11-8). 1. Original Recto Ö Copie Recto Copie désirée 4. Paramètre Copie 5. Paramètre Finition 6. Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) 7. Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) 8. Position de reliure Recto Agrafage en coin — — — 3. 1 2 3 2. Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-13 Originaux rectos Original recto Ö Copie recto Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Recto Agrafage en coin — — — Recto Agrafage en coin — — — Recto Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto Agrafage en coin — — — Recto Agrafage en coin — — — Recto Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 1 2 1 2 Document : Papier vertical 1 2 1 2 1 2 10 Documents originaux 10-14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Recto 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Original recto Ö Copie recto Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Document : Papier vertical 12 34 12 34 12 34 Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-15 Recto 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Original recto Ö Copie recto Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 Document : Papier vertical 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 10 Documents originaux 10-16 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Original recto Ö Copie recto/verso Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Recto/ verso Agrafage en coin — — — Recto/ verso Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto/ verso Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto/ verso Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso Agrafage en coin — — — Recto/ verso Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto/ verso Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 3 1 2 3 2 1 3 Document : Papier vertical 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-17 Recto/ verso 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Original recto Ö Copie recto/verso Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 5 4 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 Document : Papier vertical 12 3 5 4 6 12 34 56 12 34 56 10 Documents originaux 10-18 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Recto/ verso 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Original recto Ö Copie recto/verso Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 7 8 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Document : Papier vertical 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-19 Originaux recto/verso avec reliure à gauche Original recto/verso relié à gauche Ö Copie recto Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Recto Agrafage en coin — — — Recto Agrafage en coin — — — Recto Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto Agrafage en coin — — Recto Agrafage en coin — — Recto Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto Perforation Agrafage 2 points — Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 1 2 1 2 Document : Papier vertical 1 2 1 2 1 2 10 Documents originaux 10-20 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Recto 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — Original recto/verso relié à gauche Ö Copie recto Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Document : Papier vertical 12 34 12 34 12 34 Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-21 Recto 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — Original recto/verso relié à gauche Ö Copie recto Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 Document : Papier vertical 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 10 Documents originaux 10-22 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Original recto/verso relié à gauche Ö Copie recto/verso Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Recto/ verso Agrafage en coin — — — Recto/ verso Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto/ verso Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto/ verso Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso Agrafage en coin — Recto/ verso Perforation Agrafage 2 points — Recto/ verso Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 3 1 2 3 2 1 3 Document : Papier vertical 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-23 Recto/ verso 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Agrafage en coin — Recto/ verso 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — Original recto/verso relié à gauche Ö Copie recto/verso Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 5 4 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 Document : Papier vertical 12 3 5 4 6 12 34 56 12 34 56 10 Documents originaux 10-24 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Recto/ verso 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Agrafage en coin — Recto/ verso 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — Recto/ verso 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Original recto/verso relié à gauche Ö Copie recto/verso Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 7 8 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 7 8 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Document : Papier vertical 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-25 Originaux recto/verso avec reliure en haut Original recto/verso relié en haut Ö Copie recto Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Recto Agrafage en coin — — Recto Agrafage en coin — — Recto Perforation Agrafage 2 points — Recto Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto Agrafage en coin — — — Recto Agrafage en coin — — — Recto Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 1 2 1 2 Document : Papier vertical 1 2 1 2 1 2 10 Documents originaux 10-26 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Recto 2en1 Agrafage en coin — Recto 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — Recto 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Original recto/verso relié en haut Ö Copie recto Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Document : Papier vertical 12 34 12 34 12 34 Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-27 Recto 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — Recto 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Original recto/verso relié en haut Ö Copie recto Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 Document : Papier vertical 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 10 Documents originaux 10-28 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Original recto/verso relié en haut Ö Copie recto/verso Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Recto/ verso Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso Agrafage en coin — Recto/ verso Perforation Agrafage 2 points — Recto/ verso Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto/ verso Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso Agrafage en coin — — — Recto/ verso Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto/ verso Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 3 1 2 3 2 1 3 Document : Papier vertical 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-29 Recto/ verso 2en1 Agrafage en coin — Recto/ verso 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — Recto/ verso 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Recto/ verso 2en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Original recto/verso relié en haut Ö Copie recto/verso Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 5 4 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 Document : Papier vertical 12 3 5 4 6 12 34 56 12 34 56 10 Documents originaux 10-30 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Recto/ verso 4en1 Agrafage en coin — Recto/ verso 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — Recto/ verso 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Agrafage en coin — — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — Recto/ verso 4en1 Perforation Agrafage 2 points — — — Original recto/verso relié en haut Ö Copie recto/verso Copie désirée Paramètre Copie Paramètre Finition Paramètre Marge (Ecran Orig. Ö Copie) Paramètre Marge (Ecran Fonction Auxiliaire) Position de reliure Document : Papier horizontal 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 7 8 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Document : Papier vertical 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 Documents originaux 10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 10-31 10.5 Documents de grand format Précautions concernant les copies A3 L/B4 L Lorsque vous effectuez des copies de format A3 L ou B4 L, observez les précautions suivantes concernant l'orientation du document et les positions relatives à l'agrafage 2 points ou à la perforation. Si vous chargez l'un des types de document suivants, sélectionnez le paramètre Direction Original dans l'écran Orig. Ö Copie. A page 11-21 Pour la réalisation de copies A3 L ou B4 L, les paramètres “Agrafage 2 points” et “Perforation” ne sont pas disponibles avec les positions suivantes. A 10 Documents originaux 10-32 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-1 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11.1 Spécifier les paramètres de finition Divers paramètres de finition permettent de trier, de grouper, d'agrafer ou de perforer les copies. Sur l'écran tactile, appuyez sur [Fonctions de Base], puis appuyez sur [Finition]. L'écran qui apparaît indique les réglages Finition disponibles. Réglages Finition disponibles
Non-Tri Les copies sont éjectées et empilées les unes sur les autres à mesure qu'elles sont imprimées.
Tri Les copies sont automatiquement réparties en un nombre de jeux spécifié dont chacun comporte une copie de chaque page. 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510
Groupe Les copies sont automatiquement réparties en piles contenant des copies de la même page. Seulement quand le module de finition est installé
Agrafage en coin Les copies imprimées avec le paramètre “Tri” ou “Groupe” sont automatiquement agrafées ensemble dans leur coin supérieur gauche.  Remarque Il n’est pas possible d’agrafer du papier épais, des enveloppes, ni des transparents de rétroprojection. Seulement quand le module de finition est installé
Agrafage 2 points Les copies imprimées avec le paramètre “Tri” ou “Groupe” sont automatiquement agrafées en deux endroits le long du bord gauche.  Remarque Il n’est pas possible d’agrafer du papier épais, des enveloppes, ni des transparents de rétroprojection. Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-3 Seulement quand le module de finition est installé
Perforation Les copies sont perforées de manière à pouvoir les archiver dans un classeur. Ce paramètre peut être combiné à un paramètre “Non-Tri”, “Tri”, “Groupe” ou Agrafage.  Remarque Les enveloppes et les transparents de rétroprojection ne peuvent pas être perforés. Seulement quand le module de finition et le kit agrafage à cheval sont installés
Marquage pli et Agrafage 2 points Marque automatiquement le pli du papier copie en mode d'impression Livret et effectue une agrafage en deux points du milieu.  Remarque Il n’est pas possible d’effectuer le marquage du pli et l’agrafage 2 points sur du papier épais et des enveloppes.  Conseil Par défaut, le paramètre “Non-Tri” ou “Tri” est automatiquement sélectionné en fonction du nombre de pages que comporte le document. Le réglage par défaut est “Non-Tri”. Ce paramètrage par défaut peut être modifié à l’aide de la fonction correspondante dans l’écran Choix utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir “Procédure de configuration standard” à la page 7-6. 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Considérations sur l’utilisation des paramètres “Tri” et “Groupe”
Lorsqu'un document est placé sur la vitre d'exposition et que l'on utilise le paramètre “Tri”, la copie s'effectue automatiquement à l'aide de la fonction “Lecture fragmentée”. Pour plus de détails, voir “Fonctions auxiliaires” à la page 6-1.
Si le module de finition ou le kit bac courrier est installé, chaque jeu de copie est éjecté et décalé alternativement d'un côté puis de l'autre.
Si le plateau travaux est installé, mais que le module de finition ou le kit bac courrier ne l'est pas, chaque jeu de copies est éjecté et empilé selon une disposition croisée. Conditions pour le tri croisé
Du papier de même type doit être chargé horizontalement dans un magasin papier et verticalement dans un autre magasin.
La fonction “Détection Originaux Mixtes” ne doit pas être sélectionnée.
Aucune des fonctions suivantes ne doit être sélectionnée “Perforation”, “Intercalaires”, “Couverture” et “Multi-image”.
Il n'est pas possible de sélectionner un magasin papier.
Le papier de format A4 ou B5 est chargé horizontalement ou verticalement.
Si un module de finition est installé, le tri croisé n'est pas possible. Tri décalé Chaque jeu de copie est éjecté et décalé alternativement d'un côté puis de l'autre. Tri croisé Chaque jeu de copies est éjecté et empilé selon une disposition croisée. Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-5 Groupe décalé Chaque jeu de pages est éjecté et décalé alternativement d'un côté puis de l'autre. Groupe croisé Chaque jeu de pages est éjecté et empilé selon une disposition croisée. 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Réaliser des copies avec le paramètre Agrafage 1 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier.  Pour plus de détails, voir “10 Documents originaux”. 2 Appuyez sur [Tri], et après avoir sélectionné le mode de tri désiré, appuyez sur l'une des deux touches d'agrafage.  Si “Agrafage en coin” a été sélectionné, passez à l'étape 6.  Si “Agrafage 2 points” était sélectionné, poursuivez à l'étape 3. 3 Appuyez sur [Choix position]. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton correspondant à la position d'agrafage désirée. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées.  Remarque Il n’est pas possible de sélectionner un paramètre d’agrafage si une autre tâche a été interrompue. Lorsque vous réalisez des copies avec un paramètre d’agrafage, veillez à la position d’agrafage sélectionnée. Pour plus de détails, voir page 11-10. Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-7 Si “Agrafage en coin” a été sélectionné, la position d’agrafage ne peut pas être spécifiée. Cependant, si le paramètre “Agrafage en coin” est utilisé en même temps que le paramètre “Perforation”, la position d’agrafage ne peut pas être spécifiée. Lorsqu’un document est placé sur la vitre d’exposition et que l’on utilise un paramètre d’agrafage, la copie s’effectue automatiquement à l’aide de la fonction “Lecture fragmentée”. Pour plus de détails, voir “Fonctions auxiliaires” à la page 6-1. Lors de la copie avec un paramètre d’agrafage, assurez-vous de ne pas dépasser le nombre de pages qui peuvent être agrafées ensemble. Si vous ne définissez pas la position d’agrafage, celle-ci sera automatiquement spécifiée. 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Réaliser des copies avec le paramètre “Perforation” 1 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier.  Pour plus de détails, voir “10 Documents originaux”. 2 Sélectionnez “Non-Tri”, “Tri” ou “Groupe”, puis appuyez sur [Perfo.]. 3 Appuyez sur [Choix position]. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton correspondant à la position de perforation désirée.  Pour activer la spécification automatique de la perforation, appuyez sur [Sans]. 5 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées.  Conseil Si l’opération de copie a été lancée sans que la position de perforation n’ait été spécifiée ou que “Sans” a été sélectionné, la position de perforation sera automatiquement spécifiée sur la base de l’orientation du document, comme représenté sur l’illustration. Pour ajuster la position des perforations, contactez votre technicien S.A.V. Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-9 Marquage pli et Pliage Si les kits en option, c'est à dire le module de finition, et le kit agrafage à cheval sont installés, vous pouvez définir une marque de pli permettant de plier le papier en deux. Vous pouvez en plus spécifier un agrafage 2 points au centre du papier. Avant de sélectionner le paramètre “Marquage Pli”, veillez à sélectionner le paramètre “Création Livret” dans l'écran Orig. Ö Copie. (Veuillez vous reporter à page 11-21.) 1 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier. 2 Sélectionnez “Non-Tri”, “Tri” ou “Groupe”, puis appuyez sur [Marquage Pli].  Si vous utilisez l'Agrafage central, (pliage), sélectionnez la touche [Agrafage 2 points]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées.  Remarque Le Marquage pli et l’Agrafage 2 points peuvent être réalisés sur du papier de format A3, B4, A4, et B5. Il est possible d’agrafer de 2 à 15 feuilles. Le Marquage pli et l’Agrafage 2 points ne sont possibles que sur du papier ordinaire ou recyclé. 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Notes relatives à la position d’agrafage L'emplacement d'agrafage varie selon le format et l'orientation du papier. Veuillez vous reporter au tableau suivant pour sélectionner le papier en vue d'une opération de copie. Lorsque le paramètre “Agrafage en coin” est sélectionné : Quand le module de finition (FN-117) est installé Icône à l'écran Orientation document Position d'agrafage Introduction à partir de l'introducteur/retourneur de document Numérisation à partir de la vitre d'exposition Format du document : A4 C Format du document : A4 C Format de papier : A4 C Format du document : A4 C Format du document : A4 C Format de papier : A4 C Format du document : A4 L Format du document : A4 L Format de papier : A4 C Format du document : A4 L Format du document : A4 L Format de papier : A4 L Formats de document : A3 L, B4 L Formats de document : A3 L, B4 L Formats de papier : A3 L, B4 L Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-11 Lorsque le paramètre “Agrafage 2 points” est sélectionné : Quand le module de finition (FN-117) est installé Icône à l'écran Orientation document Position d'agrafage Introduction à partir de l'introducteur/retourneur de document Numérisation à partir de la vitre d'exposition Format du document : A4 C Format du document : A4 C Format de papier : A4 C Format du document : A4 C Format du document : A4 C Format de papier : A4 L Format du document : A4 L Format du document : A4 L Format de papier : A4 C Format du document : A4 L Format du document : A4 L Format de papier : A4 L Formats de document : A3 L, B4 L Formats de document : A3 L, B4 L Formats de papier : A3 L, B4 L 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Notes sur le nombre de jeux qu’il est possible d’agrafer Lors de la copie avec un paramètre d'agrafage, il se peut que des pages tombent ou ne soient plus alignées. Nous recommandons de ne pas dépasser le nombre de jeux agrafables indiqué ci-dessous. Notes sur la position de perforation Lors de la copie avec le paramètre “Perforation”, veillez à l'orientation du document. Nombre maximal de jeux Nombre de pages reliées Module de finition (A3 L à B6 C) 2 feuilles 100 jeux 3 à 5 feuilles 80 jeux 6 à 10 feuilles 60 jeux 11 à 20 feuilles 40 jeux 21 à 30 feuilles 33 jeux 31 à 40 feuilles 25 jeux 41 à 50 feuilles 20 jeux Quand le module de finition (FN-117) et le kit agrafage à cheval sont installés Icône à l'écran Orientation document Introduction à partir de l'introducteur/ retourneur de document Numérisation à partir de la vitre d'exposition Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-13 11.2 Spécifier une sélection Zoom Il est possible de réaliser des copies réduites ou agrandies d'un document. Sur l'écran tactile, appuyez sur [Fonctions de Base], puis appuyez sur [Zoom]. L'écran qui apparaît indique les réglages Zoom disponibles. Il existe huit sélections pour modifier le taux zoom.
Taux Auto Ce paramètre sélectionne automatiquement taux zoom le plus approprié en fonction du document chargé et du format de papier spécifié.
Pleine page (1/1) Cela définit une copie à la même échelle que l'original (× 1,000).
Agrandissement (Agran) Cette option propose des sélections zoom permettant de réaliser des copies agrandies à partir de formats ordinaires de documents sur des formats standard de papier. Par exemple :  Un document au format A4 peut être copié sur un papier de format supérieur A3.  Un document au format B4 peut être copié sur un papier de format supérieur A3.
Réduction (Réduc) Cette option propose des sélections zoom permettant de réaliser des copies réduites à partir de formats ordinaires de documents sur des formats standard de papier. Par exemple :  Un document au format A3 peut être copié sur un papier de format inférieur A4.  Un document au format B4 peut être copié sur un papier de format inférieur A4. 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510
Minimal (Mini) Cette option permet de réduire légèrement la copie (× 0,930).  Le réglage “Mini” garantit que toute partie de l'original située au bord de la page ne sera pas tronquée sur la copie.  Le taux zoom du réglage “Mini” peut être modifié par l'un des facteurs compris entre × 0,900 et × 0,999.
Zooming Il est possible de spécifier n'importe quel facteur zoom compris entre × 0,250 et × 4,000.  Appuyez sur les flèches pour sélectionner le taux zoom voulu. A chaque pression sur une flèche, le taux zoom augmente ou diminue par pas de 0,001.
Taux Perso Il est possible de spécifier n'importe quel facteur zoom compris entre × 0,250 et × 4,000.  Tapez sur le clavier numérique le taux zoom voulu.  Il est possible de mémoriser deux taux zoom entrés sur le clavier numérique.
Zoom X/Y On peut changer le format de la copie en spécifiant diverses échelles (entre × 0,250 et × 4,000) pour les dimensions verticales et horizontales. Sélectionner un taux Zoom 1 Appuyez sur [Zoom]. L'écran qui apparaît indique les réglages Zoom disponibles. 2 Sélectionnez le réglage Zoom désiré. Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-15 Spécifier un taux zoom personnalisé (“Taux Perso”) Pour entrer un taux zoom personnalisé 1 Appuyez sur [Zoom]. L'écran qui apparaît indique les réglages Zoom disponibles. 2 Appuyez sur [Taux perso]. 3 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le taux zoom voulu (entre × 0,250 et × 4,000). 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. Le taux zoom que vous avez tapé s'affiche comme le taux zoom personnalisé. 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-16 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour mémoriser les taux zoom personnel et minimal 1 Appuyez sur [Zoom]. L'écran qui apparaît indique les réglages Zoom disponibles. 2 Appuyez sur [Taux Perso]. 3 Appuyez sur [Mémorise Zoom]. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le taux zoom voulu (entre × 0,250 et × 4,000).  Pour enregistrer un taux zoom Minimal, tapez le taux zoom voulu, compris entre × 0,900 et × 0,999. Le taux zoom saisi s'affiche. 5 Appuyez sur [1], [2] ou [Réduc. minimale]. 6 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. Le taux zoom qui a été saisi est enregistré en mémoire. Pour rappeler un taux zoom personnalisé enregistré en mémoire 1 Appuyez sur [Zoom]. L'écran qui apparaît indique les réglages Zoom disponibles. 2 Appuyez sur [Taux Perso]. 3 Appuyez sur [1], [2] ou [Réduc. minimale]. 4 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. Le taux zoom qui a été saisi est rappelé. Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-17 Pour spécifier des échelles verticales et horizontales différentes (réglage “Zoom X/Y”) 1 Appuyez sur [Zoom]. L'écran qui apparaît indique les réglages Zoom disponibles. 2 Appuyez sur [Taux Perso]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Zoom X/Y]. L'écran Zoom X/Y apparaît. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez la longueur voulue pour le côté X (entre × 0,250 et × 4,000). 5 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez la longueur voulue pour le côté Y (entre × 0,250 et × 4,000). 6 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. Le taux zoom qui a été saisi est appliqué. 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-18 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11.3 Sélectionner les réglages Orig. > Copie Sur l'écran tactile, appuyez sur [Orig. > Copie]. L'écran qui apparaît indique les réglages disponibles pour l'original et la copie. Paramètres Orig. > Copie
Recto Ö Recto Une copie recto est réalisée à partir d'un original recto.
Recto Ö Recto/verso Une copie recto/verso est réalisée à partir de deux originaux recto.
Recto Ö Recto 2en1 Une copie recto est réalisée à partir de deux originaux recto.
Recto Ö Recto/verso 2en1 Une copie recto/verso est réalisée à partir de quatre originaux recto.
Recto/verso Ö Recto Seulement si l'introducteur/ retourneur de document est installé : Deux copies recto sont réalisées à partir d'un original recto/verso.
Recto/verso Ö Recto/verso Seulement si l'introducteur/ retourneur de document est installé : Une copie recto/verso est réalisée à partir d'un original recto/verso. Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-19
Recto/verso Ö Recto 2en1 Seulement si l'introducteur/ retourneur de document est installé : Une copie recto est réalisée à partir d'un original recto/verso.
Recto/verso Ö Recto/verso 2en1 Seulement si l'introducteur/ retourneur de document est installé : Une copie recto/verso est réalisée à partir de deux originaux recto/verso.
Recto Ö Recto 4en1 Une copie recto est réalisée à partir de quatre originaux recto.
Recto Ö Recto/verso 4en1 Une copie recto/verso est réalisée à partir de huit originaux recto.
Recto Ö Création Livret Une copie recto/verso est réalisée à partir de quatre originaux recto.
Recto/verso Ö Recto/verso -4en1 Seulement si l'introducteur/ retourneur de document est installé : Une copie recto/verso est réalisée à partir de deux originaux recto/verso. 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-20 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510
Recto/verso Ö Recto/verso -4en1 Seulement si l'introducteur/ retourneur de document est installé : Une copie recto/verso est réalisée à partir de deux originaux recto/verso.
Livre (Séparation) Ö Recto Deux copies recto sont réalisées à partir d'un original relié.
Livre (Double page) Ö Recto Une copie recto est réalisée à partir d'un original relié.
Livre (Séparation) Ö Recto/verso Une copie recto/verso est réalisée à partir d'un original relié.
Livre (Double Page) Ö Recto/verso Une copie recto/verso est réalisée à partir d'un original relié. Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-21 Pour spécifier les paramètres Orig. > Copie 1 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier.  Pour plus de détails, voir “10 Documents originaux”. 2 Appuyez sur [Orig > Copie]. 3 Sélectionnez le paramètre correspondant au type de document à copier. (Pour l'exemple ci-contre, appuyez sur [Recto].) 4 Sélectionnez le paramètre correspondant au type de copie désiré. (Pour l'exemple ci-contre, appuyez sur [Recto/Verso].) 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-22 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510  Pour sélectionner les paramètres “2en1 Recto/Verso”, “Création Livret”, “4en1 Recto” ou “4en1 Recto/Verso”, appuyez sur [4en1/Livret].  Choisissez le type de copie souhaité, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 5 Appuyez sur [Direction Original].  Sélectionnez un paramètre Direction Original si le document est chargé dans un sens différent de l'orientation standard. 6 Sélectionnez le paramètre approprié pour l'orientation du document. 7 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-23 Copier un document relié Il est possible de régler la position de numérisation pour les documents reliés. Il est possible de voir la largeur de la marge de reliure lorsque l'on réalise des copies en sélectionnant le paramètre “Recto > Recto/Verso” ou “Recto/Verso > Recto”. 1 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier.  Pour plus de détails, voir “10 Documents originaux”. 2 Appuyez sur [Orig > Copie]. 3 Appuyez sur [Marge]. 4 Sélectionnez la position appropriée pour la marge de reliure.  Il y a deux positions pour la reliure comme l'indique l'illustration ci-contre. Original avec marge de reliure Original sans marge de reliure Position reliure à gauche Position reliure en haut 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-24 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 5 Appuyez sur les grandes flèches pour sélectionner la largeur désirée de la marge de reliure.  La marge de reliure peut être définie entre 0 mm et 20 mm, par pas de 1 mm. 6 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées.  Conseil Si le paramètre Position reliure à gauche est sélectionné, le recto et le verso de la copie seront imprimés dans le même sens. Si le paramètre Position reliure en haut est sélectionné pour copie recto-verso, le recto de la page sera imprimé tête en bas. Pour régler la largeur de la zone effacée en bas de page sur le recto, contactez votre technicien S.A.V. Original Copie 1 2 1 2 Original Copie 1 2 1 2 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-25 Copier un livre 1 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier.  Pour plus de détails, voir “10 Documents originaux”. 2 Appuyez sur [Orig > Copie]. 3 Appuyez sur [Livre]. 4 Sélectionnez le paramètre approprié pour la position de reliure du livre (“Livre standard” ou “Livre inversé”). 5 Faites votre sélection selon que vous désirez copier deux pages du livre sur une seule page (“Double page”) ou sur deux pages distinctes (“Séparation”). 6 Pour effacer une zone autour du texte ou le long de la reliure, appuyez sur [Effacement livre]. Sur feuilles volantes En tableau 2 pages 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-26 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 7 Sélectionnez le réglage Effacement désiré.  Conseil Les pages peuvent être copiées avec une zone vierge encadrant le texte. Les pages peuvent être copiées avec une zone vierge le long de la reliure. Les pages peuvent être copiées avec une zone vierge encadrant le texte et le long de la reliure. 8 Appuyez sur les touches flèches haut et bas, pour spécifier la largeur de la zone d'effacement. Effacement Cadre Effacement Centre Effacement Cadre et Centre Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-27  Conseil La zone d’effacement peut être définie entre 5 mm et 20 mm, par pas de 1 mm. Par défaut la largeur de la zone d’effacement le long de la reliure est de 12 mm. Pour modifier cette valeur par défaut, contactez votre technicien S.A.V. 9 Appuyez sur [Entrée]. 10 Sélectionnez les paramètres copie désirés.  Remarque Si vous appuyez sur [Livre], il n’est pas possible de sélectionner [2en1 Recto] ou [4en1 / Livret]. 11 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-28 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Copier des pages d’un livre sur deux pages recto/verso 1 Dans l'écran Fonctions de Base, appuyez sur [Orig > Copie], puis appuyez sur [Livre]. L'écran Livre apparaît. 2 Sélectionnez le paramètre approprié pour la position de reliure du livre (“Livre standard” ou “Livre inversé”). 3 Appuyez sur [Séparation], puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. 4 Appuyez sur [Recto/Verso]. 5 Appuyez sur [Ordre des pages]. 6 Sélectionnez le paramètre correspondant à l'ordre des pages souhaité, et appuyez sur [Entrée]. Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-29  Conseil Ordre des pages Livre Les deux côtés, droit et gauche, sont imprimés en recto/verso. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Les copies sont imprimées. 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-30 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Sélection rapide des paramètres par défaut Le paramètre Orig. Ö Copie par défaut est “Recto > Recto”. Ce paramètre par défaut peut être modifié en “Recto > Recto/Verso” ou “Recto/Verso > Recto/Verso”.  Conseil Les paramètres par défaut peuvent être modifiés au moyen des diverses fonctions de l’écran Choix utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir “Procédure de configuration standard” à la page 7-6. Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-31 11.4 Spécifier une densité copie Sélectionner un paramètre de densité Sur l'écran tactile, appuyez sur [Densité]. L'écran qui apparaît indique les réglages Densité disponibles. Sélectionnez le paramètre approprié pour le document à copier (“Texte”, “Photo” ou “Texte/Photo”). Ensuite, réglez la densité selon les besoins.  Conseil Le paramètre Densité “Auto” est le réglage par défaut. Ce paramètrage par défaut de la Densité peut être modifié à l’aide de la fonction correspondante dans l’écran Choix utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir “Procédure de configuration standard” à la page 7-6. Sélectionner le réglage “Texte” Sélectionnez le paramètre “Texte” si vous désirez faire ressortir les contours et reproduire avec netteté les documents comportant du texte. Densité “Auto” : La densité est automatiquement réglée en fonction du document. 1 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier.  Pour plus de détails, voir “10 Documents originaux”. 2 Appuyez sur [Densité]. 3 Appuyez sur [Texte]. 4 Appuyez sur [Auto], ou appuyez sur [+ Clair] ou [+ Foncé] pour sélectionner le réglage Densité désiré. 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-32 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Sélectionner le réglage “Photo” Sélectionnez le réglage “Photo” pour copier des documents comportant des demi-teintes comme des photographies par exemple. 1 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier.  Pour plus de détails, voir “10 Documents originaux”. 2 Appuyez sur [Densité]. 3 Appuyez sur [Photo]. 4 Appuyez sur [+ Clair] ou [+ Foncé] pour sélectionner le réglage Densité désiré.  Remarque Le paramètre Densité “Auto” ne peut pas être sélectionné si le paramètre “Photo” est sélectionné. La sélection du paramètre “Auto” sélectionne automatiquement le paramètre “Texte”. Spécification des paramètres Copie 11 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 11-33 Sélectionner le réglage “Texte/Photo” Sélectionnez le réglage “Texte/Photo” pour copier des documents comportant à la fois des photos et du texte. 1 Placez le(s) document(s) à copier.  Pour plus de détails, voir “10 Documents originaux”. 2 Appuyez sur [Densité]. 3 Appuyez sur [Texte/Photo]. 4 Appuyez sur [Auto], ou appuyez sur [+ Clair] ou [+ Foncé] pour sélectionner le réglage Densité désiré..  Conseil Si le paramètre Densité “Auto” est sélectionné, la densité de la copie sera ajustée selon les besoins. Cependant, on peut éclaircir ou foncer la densité à l’aide de la fonction correspondante sur l’écran Choix utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir “Procédure de configuration standard” à la page 7-6. 11 Spécification des paramètres Copie 11-34 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-1 12 Messages de l’écran tactile 12.1 Quand le message “Prêt à copier. Ajouter du toner.” s’affiche Lorsque le toner est sur le point de s'épuiser, le message “Ajouter du toner” apparaît. A compter de l'apparition de ce message, vous pouvez encore imprimer 1000 pages environ, mais il convient cependant de remplacer la cartouche de toner dès que possible. Pour plus de détails, voir “Pour remplacer la cartouche de toner” à la page 12-2. 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12.2 Quand le message “Ajouter du toner.” s’affiche Quand il n'y a plus de toner, le message ci-dessous s'affiche et l'impression ne peut plus se poursuivre. Pour remplacer la cartouche de toner 1 Ouvrez la porte frontale. 2 Tirez le tiroir toner aussi loin que possible. 3 Relevez le support de la cartouche de toner. Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-3 4 Avec précautions, retirez la cartouche vide.  Ne jetez pas la cartouche vide. Conservez-la pour la remettre à votre technicien S.A.V. 5 Tapez 4 ou 5 fois une des extrémités de la cartouche de toner contre une surface dure, un bureau ou une table par exemple, et répétez l'opération pour l'autre extrémité.  Il se peut que le toner contenu dans la cartouche se soit compacté, veillez par conséquent à ne pas négliger cette étape pour bien le décompacter. 6 Secouez la nouvelle cartouche de toner 5 fois environ. 7 Insérez la nouvelle cartouche, l'adhésif de protection étant orienté vers le haut. 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8 Rabaissez le support de cartouche toner jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en position. Saisissez l'adhésif de protection situé sur la cartouche, et tirez-le lentement vers vous. 9 Repliez le support de cartouche toner, puis repoussez le tiroir toner. 10 Fermez la porte frontale FN4.  Remarque Quand la porte frontale est refermée, le réapprovisionnement en toner commence automatiquement. Pendant le réapprovisionnement en toner, n’éteignez pas le copieur et n’ouvrez aucune autre porte.  Conseil Si l’impression présente une certaine pâleur alors que la cartouche toner vient juste d’être remplacée, procédez à un apport toner. (Pour plus de détails, voir “Fonctions du Mode utilisateur” à la page 7-37.) Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-5 12.3 Quand le message “Agrafeuse vide.” s’affiche Quand il n'y a plus d'agrafes, le message ci-dessous s'affiche et l'agrafage ne peut plus être poursuivi. Suivre la procédure suivante pour remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes.  Remarque Ne remplacez la cartouche d’agrafes que lorsque ce message s’est affiché. La machine pourrait être endommagée si la cartouche d’agrafes est retirée avant l’apparition de ce message. Pour remplacer la cartouche d’agrafes destinée au module de finition 1 Ouvrez la porte frontale. 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 2 Tirez le support de la cartouche d'agrafes vers vous. 3 Appuyez sur la zone marquée “PUSH” pour déverrouiller le porteagrafes. 4 Retirez la cartouche vide du support de cartouche. 5 Insérez la cartouche neuve dans le support, puis retirez avec précaution la butée de maintien. Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-7 6 Insérez le support de cartouche réapprovisionné jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en position. 7 Fermez la porte frontale FN4. 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pour remplacer la cartouche d’agrafes du kit agrafage à cheval 1 Tout en maintenant le plateau de sortie papier, retirez la cartouche d'agrafes. 2 Appuyez sur la zone marquée “PUSH” pour déverrouiller le porteagrafes. 3 Retirez la cartouche vide du support de cartouche. Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-9 4 Insérez la cartouche neuve dans le support de cartouche. 5 Retirez la butée de maintien avec précaution. 6 Insérez le support de cartouche réapprovisionné jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en position. ATTENTION Faites attention lors de l’installation du support de cartouche d’agrafes.  Assurez-vous que le support de cartouche d'agrafes est inséré dans le bon sens. 7 Rabaissez le plateau de sortie papier. 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 8 Ouvrez puis refermez la porte de dégagement de serrage papier. Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-11 12.4 En cas de serrage papier Localisation des serrages papier 1 2 5 6 8 9 10 7 3 4 Message Description Message Description 1 Serrage papier dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document (page 12-12) 6 Serrage papier dans le 3ème ou 4ème magasin papier (page 12-20) 2 Serrage papier dans la section de fixation (page 12-14) 7 Serrage papier dans le magasin grande capacité (page 12-21) 3 Serrage papier dans l'unité recto-verso (page 12-18) 8 Serrage papier dans le module de finition intégré (page 12-22) 4 Serrage papier dans le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles (page 12-18) 9 Serrage papier dans le kit bac courrier (page 12-24) 5 Serrage papier dans le 1er ou 2ème magasin papier (page 12-19) 10 Serrage papier dans le kit agrafage à cheval (page 12-26) 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Retrait d’un serrage papier dans l’introducteur/retourneur de document Suivez les instructions affichées sur l'écran tactile pour ouvrir le guide document et retirer tout papier coincé. 1 Tirez vers le haut le levier de la porte de dégagement des serrages, puis ouvrez la porte. 2 Retirez avec soin tout document coincé. 3 Relevez le levier du guide document. 4 Tournez la molette pour éjecter tout document serré. Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-13 5 Tout en soutenant de la main droite, le plateau d'introduction documents, retirez avec précaution tout papier coincé. 6 Ramenez le guide document à sa position d'origine, puis refermez la porte de dégagement des serrages. 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Retrait d’un serrage papier dans la section de fixation ATTENTION Le tour de l’unité de fixation est extrêmement chaud.  Toucher d'autres endroits que ceux indiqués peut entraîner des brûlures. En cas de brûlure, rincer la peau à l'eau froide puis consultez un médecin. 1 Tirez vers le haut le levier de dégagement de la porte droite, et ouvrez la porte. Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-15 ATTENTION Toucher la surface du rouleau de transfert image peut entraîner une dégradation de la qualité de la copie.  Veillez à ne pas toucher la surface du rouleau de transfert image. 2 Retirez avec soin tout papier coincé. 3 Ouvrez le guide de l'unité de fixation. Rouleau de transfert image 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-16 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 4 Retirez avec soin tout papier coincé. 5 Ouvrez le guide d'aiguillage et retirez avec précaution tout papier coincé dans le module alternateur. 6 Retirez avec précaution tout papier coincé dans l'unité de fixation  Remarque Si le serrage papier se présente de l’une des façons suivantes, contactez votre technicien S.A.V. : Le papier est enroulé autour du rouleau de transfert image. Le papier est plié ou déchiqueté par le rouleau de transfert image. Le papier s’est déchiré au moment du retrait et une partie est restée coincée dans l’unité de fixation. Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-17 7 Retirez avec précaution tout papier coincé autour du rouleau de transfert image. 8 Retirez avec soin tout papier coincé. 9 Fermez la porte droite. 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-18 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Retrait d’un serrage papier dans l’unité recto-verso 1 Ouvrez la porte de l'unité rectoverso. 2 Retirez avec soin tout papier coincé. 3 Fermez la porte de l'unité rectoverso. Retrait d’un serrage dans le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles 1 Retirez tout papier coincé dans le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles. 2 Si le papier coincé ne peut être retiré, tirez le levier de la plaque coulissante du plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles, puis tirez la plaque coulissante vers vous. 3 De la main gauche, appuyez vers le bas sur la plaque coulissante et retirez avec précaution tout papier coincé. 4 Ramenez le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles à sa position initiale. Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-19 Retrait d’un serrage papier dans le 1er ou 2ème magasin papier 1 Ouvrez le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles. 2 Tirez vers le haut le levier de déverrouillage de la porte inférieure droite de l'unité d'alimentation papier indiquée dans le message affiché sur l'écran tactile. 3 Retirez avec soin tout papier coincé. 4 Refermez la porte inférieure droite. 5 Refermez le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles. 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-20 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Retrait d’un serrage papier dans le 3ème ou 4ème magasin papier 1 Tirez vers le haut le levier de déverrouillage de la porte inférieure droite de l'unité d'alimentation papier indiquée dans le message affiché sur l'écran tactile. 2 Retirez avec soin tout papier coincé. 3 Refermez la porte inférieure droite. Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-21 Pour retirer un serrage papier dans le magasin grande capacité 1 Tirez vers le haut le levier de déverrouillage de la porte inférieure droite de l'unité d'alimentation papier indiquée dans le message affiché sur l'écran tactile. 2 Retirez avec soin tout papier coincé. 3 Refermez la porte inférieure droite. 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-22 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Retrait d’un serrage papier dans le module de finition intégré 1 Ouvrez la porte frontale. 2 Abaissez le levier “FN1” puis retirez tout papier coincé. 3 Tournez la molette “FN2”. Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-23 4 Si le kit de perforation est installé : Tirez le collecteur de déchets de perforation. 5 Abaissez le levier “FN3”, puis retirez tout papier coincé. 6 Ramenez le levier “FN1” et le levier “FN3” à leur position d'origine. 7 Si le kit de perforation est installé : Repoussez le collecteur de déchets de perforation à sa position initiale. 8 Abaissez le levier “FN4”. 9 Tournez la molette “FN5” ou la molette “FN6”, puis retirez tout papier coincé 10 Ramenez le levier “FN4” à sa position d'origine. 11 Fermez la porte frontale. 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-24 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Retrait d’un serrage papier dans le kit bac courrier 1 Ouvrez la porte frontale. 2 Tournez la molette “FN5” ou la molette “FN6”, puis retirez tout papier coincé. 3 Tout en appuyant vers le bas sur le levier “FN7”, retirez tout papier coincé. Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-25 4 Tirez la poignée “FN8” pour ouvrir la porte de dégagement des serrages. 5 Retirez tout papier coincé dans le bac courrier. 6 Refermez la porte de dégagement des serrages. 7 Fermez la porte frontale. 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-26 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Retrait d’un serrage papier dans le kit agrafage à cheval 1 Ouvrez la porte frontale. 2 Tournez la molette “FN5” ou la molette “FN6”, puis retirez tout papier coincé. 3 Retirez tout le papier du plateau de sortie papier. 4 Ouvrez la porte de dégagement des serrages, puis retirez tout papier coincé. 5 Refermez la porte de dégagement des serrages. 6 Fermez la porte frontale. Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-27 12.5 Quand le message “Agrafage impossible.” s’affiche Retrait des agrafes coincées Lorsque un module de finition est installé et que les agrafes sont coincées, le message ci-après apparaît. Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous pour dégager les agrafes coincées. Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous pour retirer le papier et les agrafes.  Remarque Quand le message “Agrafage impossible.” apparaît, dégagez les agrafes coincées selon les indications ci-dessous. Négliger la procédure suivante et/ou tirer en force le papier pour le dégager peut endommager “l’unité d’agrafage”. 1 Retirez tout le papier du module de finition. 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-28 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 2 Ouvrez la porte frontale. 3 Abaissez le levier “FN1” puis retirez tout papier coincé. 4 Tournez la molette “FN2”. 5 Si le kit de perforation est installé : Tirez le collecteur de déchets de perforation. Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-29 6 Abaissez le levier “FN3”, puis retirez tout papier coincé. 7 Ramenez le levier “FN1” et le levier “FN3” à leur position d'origine. 8 Si le kit de perforation est installé : Repoussez le collecteur de déchets de perforation à sa position initiale. 9 Abaissez le levier “FN4”. 10 Tournez la molette “FN5” ou la molette “FN6”, puis retirez tout papier coincé. 11 Ramenez le levier “FN4” à sa position d'origine. 12 Tournez la molette vers la gauche pour déplacer l'agrafeuse vers l'avant. 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-30 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 13 Tirez le support de la cartouche d'agrafes vers vous. 14 Remontez le guide porte-agrafes, puis extraire une bande d'agrafes. 15 Ramenez le guide à sa position d'origine. 16 Insérez le support de la cartouche d'agrafes jusqu'à ce qu'il s'enclenche en position. 17 Fermez la porte frontale FN4.  Remarque S’il est toujours impossible de procéder à l’agrafage, même après avoir appliqué la procédure ci-dessus, contactez votre technicien S.A.V. Messages de l'écran tactile 12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 12-31 12.6 Quand le message “Le collecteur de déchets de perforation est plein.” s’affiche Si le kit de perforation est monté sur le module de finition, le message suivant s'affichera dès que le collecteur de déchets de perforation est plein. Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour vider le collecteur de déchets de perforation. Pour vider le collecteur de déchets de perforation Videz et réinstallez le collecteur de déchets de perforation de la manière décrite ci-dessous. 1 Ouvrez la porte frontale. 12 Messages de l'écran tactile 12-32 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 2 Tirez le collecteur de déchets de perforation. 3 Videz le collecteur de déchets de perforation. 4 Insérez le collecteur de déchets de perforation et ramenez-le à sa position d'origine. 5 Fermez la porte frontale FN4. Incidents 13 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 13-1 13 Incidents 13.1 Principaux messages et leurs solutions Message Origine Remède Incident détectée. Appeler le S.A.V. et indiquer le code affiché ci-dessous : Un dysfonctionnement s'est produit et le copieur ne peut pas imprimer. Informez votre technicien S.A.V. du code affiché sur l'écran tactile. Ajouter du toner. Le toner est épuisé, le copieur ne peut donc effectuer de copies. Remplacez la cartouche de toner. (“Quand le message “Ajouter du toner.” s’affiche” à la page 12-2) Le tambour PC doit être remplacé. Appeler le S.A.V. Le tambour PC a atteint sa limite de vie opérationnelle, le copieur ne peut donc effectuer de copies. Contactez votre technicien S.A.V. L'Unité Image doit être remplacée. Appeler le S.A.V. L'unité image a atteint sa limite de vie opérationnelle, le copieur ne peut donc effectuer de copies. Contactez votre technicien S.A.V. Agrafeuse vide. Remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes. Il n'y a plus d'agrafes. Remplacez la cartouche d'agrafes. (“Quand le message “Agrafeuse vide.” s’affiche” à la page 12-5) La date de la révision périodique du copieur arrive à échéance. Contactez votre technicien S.A.V. Appuyez sur pour afficher le code. Quand vous contactez le technicien S.A.V., indiquez-lui le code. Remettre le nombre suivant des pages d'originaux : OO Après avoir dégagé un serrage papier, il est nécessaire de recharger certaines pages qui ont déjà été introduites dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document. Chargez les pages du document indiquées dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document. XXXXXXXX impossible (espace mémoire insuffisante). Presser Impression pour continuer. La mémoire étant saturée, aucune autre page ne peut être numérisée. Imprimez les pages ou supprimez des tâches en file d'attente afin de libérer une partie de la mémoire. Ce mode est incompatible avec le mode XXXXXXXX. Les fonctions sélectionnées ne peuvent être associées. Effectuez les copies à l'aide d'une de ces fonctions uniquement. 13 Incidents 13-2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Pause. Lors de la réalisation de copies 2en1 en numérisation manuelle, la seconde page du document n'a pu être numérisée. Positionnez la seconde page du document ou appuyez sur page [Fin]. Fermer correctement les sections indiquées par des flèches. La porte ou le capot indiqué par la flèche est ouvert. Vérifiez que tous les capots et les portes sont bien fermées. Le crédit copies de votre compte est épuisé. Contacter l'administrateur. Le nombre total de copies défini par l'administrateur a été atteint. Demandez à l'administrateur de réinitialiser la limite. Le travail sélectionné excède le crédit copies accordé. Le travail ne peut être effecué. Contacter l'administrateur. Le nombre total de copies de travaux à imprimer défini par l'administrateur a été atteint. Demandez à l'administrateur de réinitialiser la limite des travaux à imprimer. Message Origine Remède Incidents 13 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 13-3 13.2 En cas de copies incorrectes Symptôme Cause possible Remède L'impression est trop claire. Le paramètre Densité “Auto” est réglé trop clair. Réglez la fonction “Densité copie” sur l'écran Choix utilisateur. Vous pouvez aussi annuler le réglage Densité “Auto”, puis sélectionner le paramètre voulu. Un réglage Densité trop claire a été sélectionné. Appuyez sur [Densité], puis sélectionnez un réglage de Densité plus foncée. De nombreux documents contenant des grandes zones imprimées ou des photos ont été imprimées. La densité d'impression était foncée et a réduit l'approvisionnement en toner. Utilisez la fonction “Apport Toner” du mode Utilitaires pour faire l'appoint en toner. La cartouche de toner vient d'être remplacée. L'approvisionnement en toner a été réduit. Utilisez la fonction “Apport Toner” du mode Utilitaires pour faire l'appoint en toner jusqu'à ce que la densité de copie soit plus foncée. Le toner est épuisé et le message “Ajouter toner.” apparaît sur l'écran tactile. Remplacez la cartouche toner par une cartouche neuve. Le papier est humide. Remplacez le papier. L'impression est trop foncée. Le paramètre Densité “Auto” est réglé trop foncé. Réglez la fonction “Densité copie” sur l'écran Choix Utilisateur. Vous pouvez aussi annuler le réglage Densité “Auto”, puis sélectionner le paramètre voulu. Un réglage Densité trop foncée a été sélectionné. Appuyez sur [Densité], puis sélectionnez un réglage de Densité plus claire. La vitre d'exposition est sale. Nettoyez la surface de la vitre d'exposition avec un chiffon doux et sec. Le document n'a pas été suffisamment plaqué contre la vitre d'exposition. Placez le document de manière à ce qu'il touche étroitement la vitre d'exposition. 13 Incidents 13-4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 L'impression est floue. Le papier est humide. Remplacez le papier. Le document n'a pas été suffisamment plaqué contre la vitre d'exposition. Placez le document de manière à ce qu'il touche étroitement la vitre d'exposition. Il y a des taches ou des points sombres sur toute la page imprimée. Les copies présentent des rayures. La vitre d'exposition est sale. Nettoyez la surface de la vitre d'exposition avec un chiffon doux et sec. Le tapis du couvre-document est sale. Essuyez le tapis du couvredocument avec un chiffon doux imbibé d'un détergent neutre. L'original est imprimé sur un support très translucide, comme du papier photosensible diazo ou des transparents de rétroprojection. Placez une feuille de papier vierge par dessus le document. La copie concerne un document recto-verso. En cas de copie d'un original recto-verso fin, l'information contenue au verso de l'original risque d'apparaître au recto de la copie. Appuyez sur [Densité], puis sélectionnez une densité d'arrière plan plus claire. L'image n'est pas alignée correctement sur le papier. Le document n'est pas correctement placé. Placez correctement l'original contre les réglettes document. Si l'introducteur/retourneur de document est installé, ajustez correctement les guides document au format de l'original. Le document n'est pas placé correctement dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document. Ouvrez l'introducteur/ retourneur de document, et placez correctement l'original contre les réglettes document. La vitre d'exposition est sale (pendant l'utilisation de l'introducteur/retourneur de document). Nettoyez la surface de la vitre d'exposition avec un chiffon doux et sec. Les réglettes document ne sont pas complètement poussées contre l'original. Faites coulisser les réglettes contre les bords du document. Du papier gondolé a été chargé dans le magasin. Aplatissez le papier avant de le charger. Symptôme Cause possible Remède Incidents 13 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 13-5 * Si le problème persiste après avoir effectué les opérations décrites ci-dessus, contactez votre technicien S.A.V. La page imprimée est gondolée. Le papier utilisé se gondole facilement (le papier recyclé, par exemple). Retirez la pile de papier du magasin, retournez-la et rechargez-la dans le magasin. Remplacer le papier par du papier non humide. Le bord de la page imprimée est sale. Le tapis du couvre-document est sale. Essuyez le tapis du couvredocument avec un chiffon doux imbibé d'un détergent neutre. Le format papier sélectionné est plus grand que le document (avec un zoom réglé sur “× 1,000”). Sélectionnez un format de papier copie identique au format de l'original. Ou bien réglez le zoom sur “Taux Auto” pour agrandir la copie au format de papier souhaité. L'orientation du document est différente de l'orientation de la copie (le paramètre Zoom étant réglé sur “× 1,000”). Sélectionnez un format de papier copie identique au format de l'original. Ou bien sélectionnez une orientation copie identique à celle du document. Le format de réduction copie est inférieur au format de papier copie (sélection zoom personnel). Sélectionnez un taux zoom qui ajuste le format du document au format de papier souhaité. Ou bien réglez le zoom sur “Taux Auto” pour agrandir la copie au format de papier souhaité. Symptôme Cause possible Remède 13 Incidents 13-6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 13.3 Dysfonctionnement du copieur Symptôme Cause possible Remède Rien ne s'affiche sur l'écran tactile. S'il n'y a que le voyant de la touche [Impression] d'allumé, le copieur est en mode Economie d'énergie ou en mode Veille. Appuyez sur n'importe quelle touche sur l'écran tactile pour quitter le mode Economie d'énergie. Le copieur n'a pas été allumé. Vérifiez que l'interrupteur général est réglé sur “I” et que l'interrupteur auxiliaire est en position enfoncée. Le réglage de la molette contrôle contraste de l'écran tactile est trop clair ou trop foncé. Tout en regardant l'écran tactile, ajustez la molette contrôle contraste. La fonction Extinction écran est-elle réglée sur Non? Veuillez appuyer sur une touche du panneau de contrôle ou de l'écran tactile. Veuillez modifier les paramètres Extinction écran. Voir “Pour définir la fonction “Extinction écran”” à la page 7-17. Le voyant vert de la touche [Impression] ne s'allume pas. Aucun code d'accès n'a été entré. Tapez le code d'accès selon la procédure décrite dans “Effectuer des copies sur comptes”. Aucune copie n'est produite même s'il l'on appuie sur la touche [Impression]. La tâche d'impression ou de copie est en file d'attente pour impression. Appuyez sur [Liste Tâches] pour vérifier les tâches en file d'attente. Veuillez attendre que l'impression démarre. Le copieur vient juste d'être mis en route et est encore en préchauffage. Après la mise sous tension, il faut environ 17 secondes pour que le copieur chauffe. Veuillez attendre que le copieur est achevé son préchauffage. Le copieur ne fonctionne pas correctement. Prenez connaissance des messages affichés sur l'écran tactile. La machine ne peut pas être mise en mode Copie. Le copieur est en mode Interruption (le voyant “Interruption” est allumé). Appuyez une nouvelle fois sur la touche [Interruption] pour annuler le mode Interruption. Incidents 13 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 13-7 * Si le problème persiste bien que toutes les opérations décrites ci-dessus aient été effectuées, éteignez le copieur, débranchez le cordon d'alimentation et contactez votre technicien S.A.V. La machine ne peut pas être allumée. Le cordon d'alimentation est débranché de la prise murale. Insérez la prise de courant à fond dans la prise murale. Le disjoncteur du circuit électrique s'est déclenché. Réenclenchez le disjoncteur du circuit électrique. Symptôme Cause possible Remède 13 Incidents 13-8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Annexe 14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14-1 14 Annexe 14.1 Caractéristiques techniques Copieur Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Caractéristiques Type Bureau Plateau Plateau fixe (numérisation par miroir) Revêtement du tambour OPC Système copie Copie laser numérique Système développement Méthode de développement MTHG Système fixation Système de rouleaux chauffés Résolution 600 dpi Document Types : Feuilles, livres Format : Maximum A3 L, Poids : 3 kgs Types de papier • Papier ordinaire (56 g/m2 à 90 g/m2), • Papier recyclé (56 g/m2 à 90 g/m2). • Papier dédié : papier épais (91 g/m2 à 210 g/m2) transparents de rétroprojection, cartes postales, enveloppes, planches d'étiquettes L'introduction n'est possible que par le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles. Le papier dédié ne peut être utilisé qu'avec le plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles. Formats papier 1er magasin, 2ème magasin • Format métrique : A3 L, B4 L, A4 L/C, B5 L/C, A5 L • En pouces : Ledger L (11 × 17 L ), Legal L (8-1/2 × 14 L), Letter L/C (8-1/2 × 11 L/C) (Largeur : 3-1/2 à 11-3/4", Longueur : 5-1/2 à 17") Plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles A3 L, B4 L, A4 L/C, B5 L/C, A5 L/C, B6 L (Largeur : 90 mm à 297 mm, Longueur : 140 mm à 432 mm) Capacité de papier 1er magasin, 2ème magasin • Papier ordinaire, papier recyclé : 550 feuilles chacun. (64 g/m2) Plateau d’introduction multi-feuilles • Papier ordinaire, papier recyclé : 150 feuilles • Papier dédié : 50 feuilles • Enveloppes : 10 unités Temps de préchauffage Moins de 17 secondes quand l'interrupteur général est en position ON et moins de 115 secondes quand l'interrupteur secondaire est sur ON (à température ambiante (23°C)). 14 Annexe 14-2 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Première copie Di3510 moins de 4,8 secondes (avec du papier A4 C chargé dans le 1er magasin) Di3010/Di2510 moins de 5,3 secondes (avec du papier A4 C chargé dans le 1er magasin) Vitesse Di3510 Avec du papier A4 C chargé dans le 1er magasin : 35 feuilles/min. (A4 C) Di3010 Avec du papier A4 C chargé dans le 1er magasin : 30 feuilles/min. (A4 C) Di2510 Avec du papier A4 C chargé dans le 1er magasin : 25 feuilles/min. (A4 C) Taux • Taille réelle : x1,000 • Facteurs d'agrandissement : ×1,154, ×1,414, ×1,545 et ×2,000 • Taux de réduction : ×0,816, ×0,707 et ×0,500, minimal (×0,930) • Taux de Zoom : ×0,250 à ×4,000 (par pas de 0,001) Multicopie 1 à 999 feuilles Contrôle densité Automatique, manuel et photo manuel Image perdue Tête de page : 4 mm; Queue de page : 4 mm; Bord arrière : 4 mm; Bord avant : 4 mm Alimentation requise 220-240 V : 10 A 50/60 Hz Consommation de courant Moins de 1365 W+10% Dimensions 677 mm (largeur) × 710 mm (profondeur) × 718 mm (hauteur) Mémoire 64 MB Poids 74 kg Caractéristiques Annexe 14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14-3 Introducteur/retourneur de document AFR-19 Originaux de largeurs mixtes 2 : Copie possible — : Copie impossible Caractéristiques Méthodes introduction document Papier ordinaire : Documents originaux recto et rectoverso Fonction “Détection Originaux Mixtes” : Divers formats de documents recto et recto/verso Type de papier document Méthode standard : Papier ordinaire • Recto : 35 g/m2 à 128 g/m2 • Recto-verso : 50 g/m2 à 128 g/m2 Fonction “Détection originaux mixtes” : Papier ordinaire (50 g/m2 à 128 g/m2) Format papier document Papier ordinaire : A3 L, B4 L, A4 L/C, B5 L/C, A5 C Documents de formats mixtes : Voir le tableau ci-dessous. Capacité alimentation documents Maximum 80 feuilles (80 g/m2) Alimentation requise Assurée par l'unité principale Consommation de courant Moins de 48 W Dimensions 582 mm (largeur) × 558 mm (profondeur) × 145 mm (hauteur) Poids Moins de 9,4 kg Largeur maximum du document 297 mm 257 mm 210 mm 182 mm 148 mm 123 mm Détection des originaux de largeurs mixtes A3 L A4 C B4 L B5 C A4 L A5 C B5 L A5 L B6 L 297 mm A3 L 2 2 — — — — — — — A4 C 2 2 — — — — — — — 257 mm B4 L 2 2 2 2 — — — — — B5 C 2 2 2 2 — — — — — 210 mm A4 L 2 2 2 2 2 2 — — — A5 C — — 2 2 2 2 — — — 182 mm B5 L — — 2 2 2 2 2 — — 148 mm A5 L — — — — — — 2 2 — 123 mm B6 L — — — — — — — 2 2 14 Annexe 14-4 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Unité recto/verso AD-16 Module alternateur SB-1 Magasin d’alimentation papier PF-124 Caractéristiques Type de papier Papier ordinaire, papier recyclé (56 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) Format papier A3 L, B4 L, A4 L/C, A5 L Alimentation requise Assurée par l'unité principale Consommation de courant Moins de 10 W Dimensions 89 mm (largeur) × 419 mm (profondeur) × 358 mm (hauteur) Poids Environ 2,2 kg Caractéristiques Type de papier Papier ordinaire, papier recyclé (56 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) Format papier A3 L, B4 L, A4 L/C, A5 L Alimentation requise Assurée par l'unité principale Consommation de courant Moins de 15 W Dimensions 338 mm (largeur) × 481 mm (profondeur) × 148 mm (hauteur) Poids Environ 1,7 kg Caractéristiques Type de papier Papier ordinaire, papier recyclé (56 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) Format papier A3 L, B4 L, A4 L/C, B5 L/C Capacité de papier 500 feuilles (80 g/m2) Alimentation requise Assurée par l'unité principale Consommation de courant Moins de 15 W Dimensions 570 mm (largeur) × 548 mm (profondeur) × 263 mm (hauteur) Poids Environ 22 kg Annexe 14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14-5 Magasin d’alimentation papier deux directions PF-210 Magasin grande capacité PF-122 Caractéristiques Type de papier Papier ordinaire, papier recyclé (56 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) Format papier A3 L, B4 L, A4L/C, B5L/C, A5 L Capacité de papier 500 feuilles × 2 magasins (80 g/m2) Alimentation requise Assurée par l'unité principale Consommation de courant Moins de 15 W Dimensions 570 mm (largeur) × 548 mm (profondeur) × 263 mm (hauteur) Poids Environ 27 kg Caractéristiques Type de papier Papier ordinaire (56 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) Format papier A4 C Capacité de papier 2.500 feuilles (80 g/m2) Alimentation requise Assurée par l'unité principale Consommation de courant Moins de 45 W Dimensions 570 mm (largeur) × 564 mm (profondeur) × 263 mm (hauteur) Poids Environ 26 kg 14 Annexe 14-6 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Module de finition intégré FN-117 Plateaux de sortie 1er magasin, 2ème magasin Paramètres • Fonctions normales : Sélections “Non-Tri”, “Tri”, “Tri”/ “Agrafage”, “Groupe” et “Agrafage à cheval” • Fonctions Perforation : Réglages “Non-Tri”/ “Perforation”, “Tri”/“Perforation” et “Tri”/“Agrafage”/ “Perforation” Type de papier • Papier ordinaire (56 g/m2 à 90 g/m2), • Carte postale (190 g/m2) • Enveloppes, transparents de rétroprojection, planches d'étiquettes. Format papier A3 L, A4 L/C Capacité de papier 1er magasin • Papier ordinaire (56 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) (A4 L ou plus petit) : Maximum 200 feuilles • Cartes postales, enveloppes, transparents de rétroprojection et planches d'étiquettes : Maximum 20 feuilles 2ème magasin • Papier ordinaire (56 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) (A4 L ou plus petit) : Maximum 1000 feuilles • B4 L : Maximum 500 feuilles • Cartes postales, enveloppes, transparents de rétroprojection et planches d'étiquettes : Maximum 20 feuilles Sélection “Agrafage” Sur papier avec impression dense : 2 à 50 feuilles Sélection “Perforation” (en option) Nombre de trous : 4 Alimentation requise Assurée par l'unité principale Consommation de courant Moins de 66 W Dimensions 319 (435) mm (largeur) × 558 mm (profondeur) × 573 mm (hauteur) (Les valeurs entre parenthèses sont les mesures valables lorsqu'un plateau média est installé.) Poids Environ 21,4 kg (y compris l'unité de transport horizontale) Accessoires 1 cartouche d'agrafes MS-5D (5.000 agrafes) Annexe 14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14-7 Kit bac supplémentaire AK-1 Kit bac courrier MK-1 Kit de perforation PK-6 Caractéristiques Nombre de bacs 1 bac Capacité de papier • Papier ordinaire (56 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) : Maximum 200 feuilles • cartes postales, enveloppes, transparents de rétroprojection, planches d'étiquettes : Maximum 20 feuilles Dimensions 282 mm (largeur) × 368 mm (profondeur) × 57 mm (hauteur) Poids Environ 0,7 kg Caractéristiques Nombre de bacs 4 bacs Type de papier Papier ordinaire, papier recyclé (56 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) Format papier A4 C Capacité de papier Maximum 125 feuilles (80 g/m2) × 4 Dimensions 624 mm (largeur) × 503 mm (profondeur) × 390 mm (hauteur) Poids Environ 8 kg (poids de l'unité), moins de 12 kg (poids brut) Alimentation requise Assurée par le module de finition Caractéristiques Nombre de trous 4 trous Type de papier Papier ordinaire, papier recyclé (60 g/m2 à 163 g/m2) Format papier A3 L, A4 C Alimentation requise Assurée par le module de finition Dimensions 114 mm (largeur) × 461 mm (profondeur) × 136 mm (hauteur) Poids Environ 1,9 kg 14 Annexe 14-8 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Kit agrafage à cheval SK-1 Séparateur travaux JS-203 Caractéristiques Nombre de bacs 1 bac Type de papier Papier ordinaire, papier recyclé (56 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) Format papier A3 L, A4 L Capacité de papier Papier ordinaire (56 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) : 200 feuilles Sélection “Agrafage” Sur papier avec impression dense : 2 à 15 feuilles Dimensions 445 (576) mm (largeur) × 203 (281) mm (profondeur) × 478 mm (hauteur) (Les valeurs entre parenthèses sont les mesures valables lorsqu'un plateau média est installé.) Poids 9,3 kg Accessoires 1 cartouche d'agrafes MS-2C (2.000 agrafes) Alimentation requise Assurée par le module de finition Caractéristiques Nombre de bacs 1 bac (en considérant les bacs du copieur comme 2 bacs) Type de papier Papier ordinaire, papier recyclé (56 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) Papier dédié : papier épais (91 g/m2 à 210 g/m2), transparents de rétroprojection, cartes postales, enveloppes, planches d'étiquettes) Format papier A3 L, A4 L/C Capacité de papier JS-203 100 feuilles (80 g/m2) Plateau de sortie copies 250 feuilles (80 g/m2) Dimensions 450 mm (largeur) × 443 mm (profondeur) × 75 mm (hauteur) Poids Environ 1,7 kg Annexe 14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14-9 14.2 Entretien du copieur Nettoyage Mettez l'interrupteur en position “O” avant de nettoyer le copieur. Revêtement  Nettoyez la surface du copieur avec un chiffon doux imbibé d'un détergent neutre. Vitre d’exposition  Nettoyez la surface de la vitre d'exposition avec un chiffon doux et sec. Panneau de contrôle  Nettoyez la surface du panneau de contrôle avec un chiffon doux et sec.  Remarque De trop fortes pressions peuvent détériorer le panneau de contrôle ou l’écran tactile. De plus, pour nettoyer le panneau de contrôle ou l’écran tactile, ne jamais utiliser de détergent ménager ou de produit de nettoyage pour les vitres. 14 Annexe 14-10 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Vitre d’exposition 1 Nettoyez la surface de la vitre d'exposition avec un chiffon doux et sec. Annexe 14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14-11 14.3 Table d’association des fonctions 14 Annexe 14-12 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Annexe 14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14-13 14 Annexe 14-14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Codes de combinaison de fonctions Icône Description Les fonctions peuvent être associées. — Les fonctions ne peuvent être associées. La deuxième fonction ne peut être sélectionnée. La fonction sélectionnée en dernier est prioritaire. Aucun message d'avertissement ne s'affiche. La fonction sélectionnée en premier sera annulée. Lorsque l'on effectue des copies recto/verso à partir de documents recto, les deuxièmes fonctions ne peuvent pas être sélectionnées et un message d'avertissement apparaît. \ Ceci n'est pas une association satisfaisante du fait que la première fonction est annulée quand des sélections différentes requises en même temps sont spécifiées. En outre, les autres réglages simultanés sont nécessaire pour le réglage sélectionné en second. La fonction sélectionnée en premier est prioritaire. Un message d'avertissement s'affiche. La deuxième fonction ne peut être sélectionnée. Le réglage Zoom “Taux Auto” est sélectionné. Le réglage “Tri” est automatiquement sélectionné. Le réglage zoom spécifié à l'aide de la fonction “Taux prioritaire 2en1, 4en1 et Livret” du Choix utilisateur est rappelé. La fonction sélectionnée en premier n'est pas effectuée. La fonction sélectionnée en second n'est pas effectuée. Le réglage zoom spécifié à l'aide de la fonction “Taux prioritaire 2en1, 4en1 et Livret” du Choix utilisateur est rappelé. Le réglage “Agrafage 2 points” est automatiquement modifié en “Agrafage centre”. Le réglage “Agrafage en coin” ne peut pas être sélectionné. Ces fonctions ne peuvent pas être sélectionnées si le document est introduit dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document. La fonction sélectionnée en premier est prioritaire. Aucun message d'avertissement ne s'affiche. La fonction sélectionnée en second n'est pas effectuée. Ces fonctions ne peuvent pas être sélectionnées si le document est introduit dans l'introducteur/retourneur de document. La fonction sélectionnée en second est prioritaire. Aucun message d'avertissement ne s'affiche. La fonction sélectionnée en premier n'est pas effectuée. Le réglage change selon le paramétrage spécifié dans l'écran Choix utilisateur. Les réglages peuvent être spécifiés mais la fonction sélectionnée en premier n'est pas effectuée. La fonction peut être sélectionnée mais le réglage n'est pas appliqué. Ce réglage ne peut pas être sélectionné car le réglage “Création Livret” n'est pas sélectionné. Annexe 14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14-15 *a La fonction sélectionnée en premier n'est pas effectuée si la copie concerne des originaux de formats mixtes. (*2) *b La fonction sélectionnée en second n'est pas effectuée si la copie concerne des originaux de formats mixtes. (*2) Ce réglage ne peut pas être sélectionné car le réglage “Création Livret” est sélectionné. Ce réglage ne peut pas être sélectionné car le réglage “Livre” est sélectionné. Ce réglage ne peut pas être sélectionné car le réglage “Livre” ne peut être sélectionné. ■ Un message d'avertissement devrait s'afficher. ■ Les réglages peuvent être sélectionnés, mais la fonction sera automatiquement annulée, ou elle ne sera pas effectuée. Icône Description 14 Annexe 14-16 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14.4 Tableaux format papier et taux zoom Formats papier Format papier Format métrique Format anglais A3 + 311 mm × 457 mm 12-1/4" × 18" A3 297 mm × 420 mm 11-3/4" × 16-1/2" A4 210 mm × 297 mm 8-1/4" × 11-3/4" A5 148 mm × 210 mm 5-3/4" × 8-1/4" A6 105 mm × 148 mm 4-1/4" × 5-3/4" B4 257 mm × 364 mm 10" × 14-1/4" B5 182 mm × 257 mm 7-1/4" × 10" B6 128 mm × 182 mm 5" × 7-1/4" Format papier Format anglais Format métrique Ledger 11" × 17" 279 mm × 432 mm 11" × 14" 11" × 14" 279 mm × 356 mm Computer 10-1/8" × 14" 257 mm × 356 mm 10" × 14" 10" × 14" 254 mm × 356 mm 9-1/4" × 14" 9-1/4" × 14" 236 mm × 356 mm Legal 8-1/2" × 14" 216 mm × 356 mm Foolscap Government Legal 8-1/2" × 13" 216 mm × 330 mm Foolscap 8" × 13" 203 mm × 330 mm Foolscap 8-2/3" × 13" 220 mm × 330 mm Foolscap Folio 8-1/4" × 13" 210 mm × 330 mm 8-1/4" × 11-3/4" 8-1/4" × 11-3/4" 210 mm × 301 mm Letter 8-1/2" × 11" 216 mm × 279 mm Government Letter 8" × 10-1/2" 203 mm × 267 mm Quarto 8" × 10" 203 mm × 254 mm Statement Invoice 5-1/2" × 8-1/2" 140 mm × 216 mm 4" × 6" 4" × 6" 102 mm × 152 mm Annexe 14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14-17 Taux de zoom Formats métriques Format papier document Format papier souhaité Taux zoom A3 297 mm × 420 mm 11-3/4" × 16-1/2" A4 × 0,707 A5 × 0,500 B4 × 0,866 B5 × 0,610 A4 210 mm × 297 mm 8-1/4" × 11-3/4" A5 × 0,707 A6 × 0,500 B5 × 0,866 B6 × 0,610 A3 × 1,414 B4 × 1,224 A5 148 mm × 210 mm 5-3/4" × 8-1/4" A6 × 0,707 B6 × 0,866 A4 × 1,414 A3 × 2,000 B4 × 1,733 B5 × 1,224 A6 105 mm × 148 mm 4-1/4" × 5-3/4" A4 × 2,000 A5 × 1,414 B5 × 1,733 B6 × 1,224 B4 257 mm × 364 mm 10" × 14-1/4" A4 × 0,816 A5 × 0,577 B5 × 0,707 B6 × 0,500 A3 × 1,154 B5 182 mm × 257 mm 7-1/4" × 10" A5 × 0,816 A6 × 0,577 B6 × 0,707 A3 × 1,640 A4 × 1,154 B4 × 1,414 14 Annexe 14-18 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 B6 128 mm × 182 mm 5" × 7-1/4" A6 × 0,816 A4 × 1,640 A5 × 1,154 B4 × 2,000 B5 × 1,414 Formats métriques Format papier document Format papier souhaité Taux zoom Formats anglais Format papier document Format papier souhaité Taux zoom Ledger 11" × 17" 279,4 mm × 431,8 mm 11" × 14" × 0,823 Legal × 0,722 Foolscap × 0,764 Letter × 0,647 Invoice × 0,500 11" × 15" 279,4 mm × 381 mm 11" × 14" × 0,933 Legal × 0,772 Foolscap × 0,772 Letter × 0,733 Invoice × 0,500 11" × 14" 279,4 mm × 355,6 mm Legal × 0,772 Foolscap × 0,772 Letter × 0,772 Invoice × 0,500 Legal 8-1/2" × 14" 215,9 mm × 355,6 mm Foolscap × 0,928 Letter × 0,785 Invoice × 0,607 11" × 17" × 1,214 Foolscap 8-1/2" × 13" 215,9 mm × 330,2 mm Letter × 0,846 Invoice × 0,647 11" × 17" × 1,294 11" × 14" × 1,076 Letter 8-1/2" × 11" 215,9 mm × 279,4 mm Invoice × 0,647 11" × 17" × 1,294 11" × 14" × 1,272 Annexe 14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14-19 Taux zoom = format papier copie/format document 1" (1 pouce) = 25,4 mm 1 mm = 0,0394" (pouce) Invoice 5-1/2" × 8-1/2" 139,7 mm × 215,9 mm 11" × 17" × 2,000 11" × 14" × 1,647 Legal × 1,545 Foolscap × 1,529 Letter × 1,294 Formats anglais Format papier document Format papier souhaité Taux zoom 14 Annexe 14-20 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14.5 Consommables Afin que cette machine puisse fonctionner au mieux de ses capacités, elle nécessite les consommables suivants. Pour obtenir des copies de la meilleure qualité, nous vous recommandons d'utiliser les consommables spécifiés. Pour plus d'informations sur l'achat des consommables, veuillez contacter votre Service Après-vente. Papier En plus du papier ordinaire, du papier épais et des transparents de rétroprojection sont également disponibles.  Remarque Afin de protéger de l’humidité les ramettes de papier ouvertes, rangez le papier dans un sac en plastique et conservez-le dans un endroit frais et à l’abri de la lumière. Cartouche de toner Le toner est cette poudre noire qui permet de reproduire du texte et des lignes.  Remarque Utiliser exclusivement du toner spécialement fabriqué pour ce copieur. Ne jetez pas les cartouches vides. Veuillez plutôt les ranger dans leur boîte et remettez-les à votre Service Après-vente. Annexe 14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14-21 Cartouche d’agrafes MS-5D pour le module de finition Agrafes pour reliure La cartouche contient 5 000 agrafes. MS-2C pour le kit agrafage à cheval Agrafes pour reliure La cartouche contient 2 000 agrafes. 14 Annexe 14-22 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14.6 Index 1er magasin papier ........................................................................... 1-12 1er plateau de sortie papier .............................................................. 1-15 2ème magasin papier ....................................................................... 1-12 2ème plateau de sortie papier .......................................................... 1-15 3ème magasin papier ..............................................................1-14, 1-16 3ème plateau de sortie papier .......................................................... 1-16 4ème magasin papier ....................................................................... 1-14 A Accessibilité ........................................................................................ 4-5 Afficheur des messages .................................................................... 4-19 Agrafage 2 points .............................................................................. 11-2 Agrafage centre / Marquage pli ......................................................... 7-29 Agrafage en coin ............................................................................... 11-2 Agrandir les fenêtres de l'écran tactile .............................................. 4-11 Alimentation ...................................................................................... 2-11 Alimentation Papier ............................................................................. 1-3 Apport toner ...................................................................................... 7-41 Approvisionnement papier .................................................................. 1-5 Arrêter une opération de copie ........................................................... 5-3 B Bac courrier ....................................................................................... 1-15 Battant inférieur droit ......................................................................... 1-16 Bouton de déverrouillage du magasin .............................................. 1-16 Butée papier .............................................................................1-11, 1-14 C Cadre juridique de la copie ............................................................... 2-16 Caractéristiques papier ....................................................................... 9-1 Caractéristiques techniques .............................................................. 14-1 Cartouche de toner ......................................................................... 14-20 Cartouches d'agrafes ...................................................................... 14-21 Changer la cartouche de toner ......................................................... 12-2 Chargement de documents pour des applications spécifiques ....... 10-12 Annexe 14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14-23 Chargement du papier .........................................................................9-7 Magasin grande capacité .............................................................9-10 Magasin papier ..............................................................................9-8 Plateau d’introduction multifeuille ................................................9-11 Code Administrateur ............................................................................8-6 Compteur enfichable .........................................................................7-19 Compteurs .........................................................................................7-33 Connecteur de l'introducteur/retourneur de document ......................1-13 Consommables ................................................................................14-20 Contrôle Département .......................................................................8-10 Contrôleur d'imprimante ......................................................................1-9 Couvercle du plateau de sortie papier ...............................................1-15 Couverture ................................................................................... 6-1, 6-3 Couvre-document ..............................................................................1-12 D Date et heure .......................................................................................8-3 Densité .................................................................................... 7-21, 7-23 Déshumidification scanner ................................................................7-28 Détection originaux mixtes ........................................................ 7-7, 10-6 Déverrouillage ...................................................................................8-23 Diffusion .............................................................................................6-14 Disque dur ...........................................................................................1-9 Document relié ................................................................................11-23 E Effacement bords .................................................................... 6-10, 6-11 Effectuer des copies sur comptes .......................................................5-6 Encart transparent ...............................................................................6-6 Enregistrement de comptes ...............................................................8-16 Entretien du copieur ..........................................................................14-9 Environnement ..................................................................................2-13 Espace requis ....................................................................................2-12 Exposition ........................................................................................11-31 Extension plateau ..............................................................................1-11 Extinction écran .................................................................................7-17 14 Annexe 14-24 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 É Écran Liste Tâches ........................................................................... 4-20 Écran tactile .............................................................................1-11, 4-17 F Filigrane ............................................................................................ 6-16 Fonctions et réglages disponibles ..................................................... 4-19 Fonctions utiles ................................................................................... 3-1 Format Auto ...................................................................................... 7-10 Format personnel .............................................................................. 9-15 Formats papier ................................................................................ 14-16 Fuseau horaire .................................................................................... 8-5 G Groupe .............................................................................................. 11-2 Groupe croisé ................................................................................... 11-5 Groupe décalé .................................................................................. 11-5 Guide document ................................................................................ 1-14 Guide papier ..................................................................................... 1-11 I Indicateur de niveau papier ............................................................... 1-11 Initialisation automatique .........................................................4-14, 7-18 Intercalaire ...................................................................................6-4, 6-5 Interrompre une tâche de copie .......................................................... 5-4 Interrupteur d’alimentation ................................................................ 1-13 Introducteur/retourneur de document ........................................1-7, 14-3 Introduction du document ................................................................. 10-1 Introducteur/retourneur de document .......................................... 10-4 Inversion Noir/Blanc .......................................................................... 6-19 K Kit agrafage à cheval ....................................................... 1-8, 1-16, 14-8 Kit bac courrier ...........................................................................1-8, 14-7 Kit bac supplémentaire .................................................... 1-8, 1-16, 14-7 Kit couvre-original ............................................................................... 1-7 Annexe 14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14-25 Kit de perforation ....................................................................... 1-9, 14-7 L Lecture fragmentée ...........................................................................6-20 Levier de déverrouillage de la porte droite ........................................1-11 Levier de déverrouillage du battant inférieur droit .............................1-14 Lieu d'implantation .............................................................................2-11 Livre ..................................................................................... 11-20, 11-25 M Magasin d’alimentation papier deux directions .......................... 1-7, 14-5 Magasin grande capacité .................................................1-7, 1-16, 14-5 Magasin prioritaire .............................................................................7-11 Marge ..................................................................................................6-8 Messages ..........................................................................................13-1 Mettre le copieur sous tension et hors tension ..................................4-12 Meuble copie .......................................................................................1-7 Mémoire ...............................................................................................1-9 Mode Administrateur ...........................................................................8-1 Mode Contrôle Département ...............................................................5-6 Mode Economie d'énergie ....................................................... 4-15, 7-15 Mode utilisateur .................................................................................7-37 Mode Utilitaires ....................................................................................7-1 Mode Veille .............................................................................. 4-15, 7-16 Module alternateur ................................................................... 1-12, 14-4 Module de finition ................................................................................1-8 Module de finition intégré .......................................................... 1-8, 14-6 Multicopie Copie 2en1 ...................................................................................7-14 Copie 4en1 ......................................................................... 7-14, 7-20 Multi-Image ........................................................................................6-12 N Nettoyage écran ................................................................................7-39 Non-Tri ...............................................................................................11-1 14 Annexe 14-26 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 O Opérations élémentaires de copie ...................................................... 5-1 Orientation papier ............................................................................... 1-4 Originaux de largeurs mixtes ...................................................10-2, 14-3 P Panneau de contrôle ..................................................................1-12, 4-1 Clavier numérique ......................................................................... 4-2 Écran tactile ................................................................................... 4-1 Interrupteur secondaire ................................................................. 4-1 Molette Contraste .......................................................................... 4-2 Touche Accessibilité ...................................................................... 4-2 Touche Affichage large ................................................................. 4-2 Touche C (Correction) ................................................................... 4-2 Touche Code ................................................................................. 4-1 Touche Copie ................................................................................ 4-1 Touche Impression ........................................................................ 4-2 Touche Initialisation ....................................................................... 4-2 Touche Interruption ....................................................................... 4-1 Touche Mode Contrôle .................................................................. 4-2 Touche Numérisation .................................................................... 4-1 Touche Numérisation + ................................................................. 4-1 Touche Stop .................................................................................. 4-2 Touche Utilitaires ........................................................................... 4-2 Papier .............................................................................................. 14-20 Papier Auto ....................................................................................... 7-10 Papier de format non-standard ......................................................... 9-15 Papier dédié ...................................................................................... 7-12 Paramètre Agrafage .......................................................................... 11-6 Paramètre Perforation ....................................................................... 11-8 Paramètre Zoom ............................................................................. 11-13 Paramètre Zoom X/Y ...................................................................... 11-17 Paramètres Administrateur ................................................................. 8-6 Paramètres Orig.>Copie ................................................................. 11-18 Spécification .............................................................................. 11-21 Paramètres sélectionnés .................................................................. 4-19 Paysage .............................................................................................. 1-4 Perforation ........................................................................................ 11-3 Plateau d'introduction documents ..................................................... 1-14 Plateau d’introduction multifeuille ..................................................... 1-11 Annexe 14 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 14-27 Plateau de sortie papier ........................................................... 1-11, 1-16 Plateau sortie document ....................................................................1-14 Porte de dégagement de serrage papier ................................. 1-15, 1-16 Porte de l'unité recto-verso ................................................................1-12 Porte droite ........................................................................................1-11 Porte frontale .....................................................................................1-11 Portrait .................................................................................................1-4 Positionnement des documents Vitre d’exposition ..........................................................................10-8 Précautions d'utilisation .....................................................................2-13 Prise pour cordon d'alimentation .......................................................1-13 Programme Copie .............................................................................7-34 R Rappel mémoire ........................................................................ 4-24, 7-6 Recto ...............................................................................................11-18 Recto 2en1 ......................................................................................11-18 Recto 4en1 ......................................................................................11-19 Recto/verso .....................................................................................11-18 Recto/verso 2en1 ............................................................................11-18 Recto/verso 4en1 ............................................................................11-19 Remplacement de la cartouche d’agrafes Kit agrafage à cheval ...................................................................12-8 Module de finition .........................................................................12-5 Retrait des agrafes coincées ...........................................................12-27 Réceptacle .........................................................................................7-26 Réglage Papier ..................................................................................9-20 Réglages préalables ............................................................................8-3 Réglette document ............................................................................1-12 S Serrage papier 1er ou 2ème magasin papier .....................................................12-19 3ème ou 4ème magasin papier .................................................12-20 Introducteur/retourneur de document ........................................12-12 Kit agrafage à cheval .................................................................12-26 Kit bac courrier ...........................................................................12-24 Magasin grande capacité ...........................................................12-21 Module de finition .......................................................................12-22 14 Annexe 14-28 Di2510/Di3010/Di3510 Plateau d’introduction multifeuille .............................................. 12-18 Unité recto-verso ....................................................................... 12-18 Zone de fixation ......................................................................... 12-14 Serrages papier Emplacement ............................................................................ 12-11 Sélection automatique de la source papier ......................................... 9-6 Sélection Langue ................................................................................ 7-8 Sélections par défaut ........................................................................ 4-17 Séparateur travaux ....................................................................1-7, 14-8 Soft switch ......................................................................................... 8-21 Spécifier la date et l'heure ................................................................... 8-3 Stockage du papier ............................................................................. 9-5 T Table d’association des fonctions ................................................... 14-11 Tampon ............................................................................................. 6-17 Tampon image .................................................................................. 7-31 Taux de zoom ................................................................................. 14-17 Témoin d'impression ......................................................................... 1-14 Touche Identifiant ............................................................................. 7-19 Touches écran .................................................................................. 4-19 Transparents de rétroprojection .................................................9-1, 9-14 Tri ...................................................................................................... 11-1 Tri décalé .......................................................................................... 11-4 U Unité recto-verso ......................................................................1-12, 14-4 V Vérifier les réglages ............................................................................ 4-3 Vider le collecteur de déchets de perforation .................................. 12-31 Vitre d’exposition ............................................................................... 1-12 Z Zone additionnelle de message ........................................................ 4-19 Zone d’impression ............................................................................... 9-5 Guide de l'utilisateur magicolor 3730DN A0VD-9571-00B x-1 Remerciements Nous vous remercions d'avoir acheté une magicolor 3730DN. Vous avez fait un excellent choix. Votre magicolor 3730DN est spécialement conçue pour atteindre des performances optimales dans les environnements Windows, Macintosh et Linux. Marques KONICA MINOLTA et le logo KONICA MINOLTA sont des marques ou marques déposées de KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. magicolor et PageScope sont des marques ou marques déposées de KONICA MINOLTA PRINTING SOLUTIONS U.S.A., INC. Toutes les autres marques ou marques déposées mentionnées sont la propriété de leurs détenteurs respectifs. Copyright Notice Copyright © 2010 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC., Marunouchi Center Building, 1-6-1 Marunouchi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, 100-0005, Japon. Tous droits réservés. Ce document ne peut être copié, en totalité ou en partie, ni transposé sur quel que support ou traduit dans quelle que langue que ce soit sans l'autorisation écrite expresse de KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Avis KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. se réserve le droit de modifier le contenu de ce guide ainsi que le matériel qu'il décrit sans avis préalable. Ce document a été rédigé avec toute la rigueur requise pour éviter inexactitudes et lacunes. Toutefois, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. ne couvre en aucune manière toute forme de garantie, expresse ou implicite, de commercialisation et d'adaptation à des fins particulières que pourrait induire ce guide. KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. décline toute responsabilité concernant des erreurs pouvant être contenues dans ce guide ou des dommages fortuits, particuliers ou indirects pouvant résulter de la fourniture de ce guide ou de son emploi pour utiliser le matériel ou être liés au fonctionnement du matériel ainsi utilisé. x-2 ACCORD DE LICENCE LOGICIEL Ce package contient les éléments suivants fournis par KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. (KMBT) : le logiciel faisant partie intégrante du système d'impression ("Logiciel d'impression"), les données numériques de contour lisibles par la machine, codées au format spécial et sous forme cryptée ("Programmes de polices"), un autre logiciel fonctionnant sur un système informatique à utiliser avec le Logiciel d'impression ("Logiciel hôte"), et des instructions écrites connexes ("Documentation"). Le terme "Logiciel" s'emploie pour désigner le Logiciel d'impression, les Programmes de polices et/ou le Logiciel hôte, ainsi que toutes mises à jour, versions modifiées, compléments et copies du Logiciel. Le Logiciel vous est fourni sous licence selon les termes et conditions du présent Accord. KMBT vous accorde une sous-licence d'exploitation non exclusive du Logiciel et de sa Documentation, à condition que vous acceptiez ce qui suit : 1.Vous pouvez utiliser le Logiciel et les Programmes de polices associés pour imprimer sur le(s) périphérique(s) de sortie sous licence, exclusivement à vos propres fins d'exploitation interne. 2.Outre la licence pour les Programmes de polices mentionnés au paragraphe 1 ci-dessus, vous pouvez utiliser des Programmes de polices Roman pour reproduire des tailles, styles et versions de lettres, chiffres, caractères et symboles ("Polices") à l'écran, pour répondre à vos propres besoins professionnels. 3.Vous pouvez faire une copie unique de sauvegarde du Logiciel hôte, à condition que cette copie ne soit pas installée ou utilisée sur un quelconque ordinateur. Nonobstant les restrictions ci-dessus, vous pouvez installer le Logiciel hôte sur un nombre illimité d'ordinateurs exclusivement destinés à être utilisés avec un ou plusieurs systèmes d'impression fonctionnant avec le Logiciel d'impression. 4.Vous pouvez attribuer tous les droits stipulés dans cet Accord à un dépositaire des droits et intérêts de tous les bénéficiaires de cette licence Logiciel et Documentation ("Dépositaire"), à condition de transférer au Dépositaire toutes les copies du Logiciel et sa Documentation associée. Le Dépositaire accepte d'être lié par tous les termes et conditions de cet Accord. 5.Vous acceptez de ne pas modifier, adapter ou traduire le Logiciel et sa Documentation. 6.Vous acceptez de ne pas tenter d'altérer, dissocier, décoder, contrefaire ou décompiler le Logiciel. 7.KMBT et ses concédants ayants droit conservera le titre et la propriété du Logiciel et de sa Documentation ainsi que de toutes leurs éventuelles reproductions. 8.L'utilisation de noms de marques se fera conformément à la pratique courante, notamment avec mention du nom de leurs propriétaires respectifs. Les noms de marques ne peuvent être utilisés qu'à des fins d'identification de l'imprimé produit par le Logiciel. Cette utilisation ne vous confère aucun droit de propriété sur la marque citée dans ce contexte. 9.Vous ne pouvez pas louer, céder en bail, sous-licencier, prêter ou transférer des versions ou copies du Logiciel. Le Logiciel ne sera pas utilisé sur support inhabituel, sauf dans le cadre d'un transfert permanent de l'ensemble Logiciel et Documentation mentionné plus haut. 10.VOUS NE POURREZ EN AUCUN CAS TENIR KMBT OU AGRÉÉ POUR RESPONSABLE DE DOMMAGES CONSÉQUENTS, FORTUITS, INDIRECTS, PUNITIFS OU SPÉCIAUX, Y COMPRIS DE PERTES PÉCUNIAIRES, MÊME SI KMBT A ÉTÉ AVERTI DE L'ÉVENTUALITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES, OU DE TOUTE PLAINTE ÉMANANT D'UNE TIERCE PARTIE. KMBT OU AGRÉÉ REJETTE TOUTES FORMES DE GARANTIE CONCERNANT LE LOGICIEL, EXPRESSE OU IMPLICITE, INCLUANT SANS LIMITATION, DES GARANTIES DE x-3 COMMERCIALISATION ET D'ADAPTATION À DES FINS PARTICULIÈRES, ET DES DROITS DE TITRE ET D'EXCLUSIVITÉ DE TIERCES PARTIES. L'EXCLUSION OU LA LIMITATION DE DOMMAGES FORTUITS, CONSÉQUENTS OU SPÉCIAUX N'EST PAS AUTORISÉE DANS CERTAINS ÉTATS OU SOUS CERTAINES JURIDICTIONS. PAR CONSÉQUENT, LES LIMITATIONS CI-DESSUS PEUVENT NE PAS VOUS CONCERNER. 11.Avis aux utilisateurs finaux dans l'Administration U.S. : Le Logiciel est un "objet commercial" tel que défini à l'article 48 C.F.R.2.101, consistant en un "logiciel informatique commercial" et en une "documentation de logiciel informatique commercial" comme mentionnés à l'article 48 C.F.R. 12.212. Conformément aux articles 48 C.F.R. 12.212 et 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 à 227.7202-4, le Logiciel est acquis par tout utilisateur final dans l'Administration U.S. avec les seuls droits stipulés dans le présent Accord. 12.Vous acceptez de ne pas exporter le Logiciel sous une forme quelconque contrevenant à toutes les lois et réglementations en vigueur pour le contrôle d'exportation dans tout pays. Pour les pays membres de l'UE seulement Ce symbole signifie : Ne jeter pas ce produit avec vos déchets ménagers ! Il convient de se conformer aux instructions de mise au rebut édictées par les autorités locales. En cas de remplacement du produit usagé, contacter notre distributeur qui en assurera la mise au rebut appropriée. Le recyclage de ce produit permettra de préserver les ressources naturelles et de prévenir les effets nuisibles à l'environnement et à la santé qui résulteraient d'une gestion inappropriée de ce déchet. Ce produit est conforme à la directive RoHS (2002/95/CE). Table des matières x-4 Table des matières Remerciements...........................................................................................x-1 Marques......................................................................................................x-1 Copyright Notice.........................................................................................x-1 Avis.............................................................................................................x-1 ACCORD DE LICENCE LOGICIEL..............................................................x-2 Pour les pays membres de l'UE seulement................................................x-3 1Introduction ....................................................................................................1-1 Présentation de l'imprimante .......................................................................1-2 Espace requis.............................................................................................1-2 Composants de l'imprimante......................................................................1-3 Vue avant..............................................................................................1-3 Vue arrière.............................................................................................1-4 Impression..................................................................................................1-4 2A propos du logiciel .......................................................................................2-1 CD/DVD Pilote et Utilitaire Imprimante .......................................................2-2 Pilotes d'imprimante...................................................................................2-2 Utilitaires.....................................................................................................2-2 Documentation.....................................................................................2-3 Contents x-5 Configuration Système requise ....................................................................2-4 Sélection des paramètres par défaut du pilote (Windows) ........................2-5 Windows 7/Vista/Serveur 2008/XP/Serveur 2003/2000.......................2-5 Désinstallation du pilote d'imprimante (Windows) .....................................2-6 Windows 7/Vista/Serveur 2008/XP/Serveur 2003/2000.......................2-6 Affichage des paramètres du pilote d'imprimante (Windows) ..................2-7 Windows 7............................................................................................2-7 Windows Vista/Serveur 2008................................................................2-7 Windows XP/Serveur 2003...................................................................2-7 Windows 2000......................................................................................2-7 Utiliser le pilote d'imprimante ......................................................................2-8 Accessibles sur tous les onglets.................................................................2-8 OK.........................................................................................................2-8 Annuler..................................................................................................2-8 Appliquer...............................................................................................2-8 Aide.......................................................................................................2-8 Easy Set................................................................................................2-8 Aperçu de l'imprimante.........................................................................2-9 Aperçu du format..................................................................................2-9 Aperçu du filigrane................................................................................2-9 Aperçu de la qualité..............................................................................2-9 Par défaut.............................................................................................2-9 Onglet Paramètres de base......................................................................2-10 Onglet Mise en page.................................................................................2-10 Onglet Calque...........................................................................................2-10 Onglet Filigrane.........................................................................................2-11 Onglet Qualité...........................................................................................2-11 Onglet Version..........................................................................................2-11 Limitations des fonctions du pilote d'imprimante installé avec Point and Print..................................................................................2-12 3Panneau de commande et menu de configuration de l'imprimante .........3-1 Présentation du panneau de commande ....................................................3-2 Voyants et touches du panneau de commande.........................................3-3 Écran des messages...................................................................................3-4 Présentation du menu de configuration ......................................................3-5 Menu Principal............................................................................................3-5 PAGES SPÉCIALES....................................................................................3-6 LANGUE ..........................................................................................................3-7 MOTEUR .........................................................................................................3-9 RÉSEAU ........................................................................................................3-12 UTILIS. CONSOM. ........................................................................................3-16 INTERFACE ..................................................................................................3-17 USER SERVICE/SERVICE PERSON.........................................................3-17 x-6 Table des matières 4 Utilisation des supports ................................................................................4-1 Spécifications des supports .........................................................................4-2 Types de support ...........................................................................................4-4 Papier standard (Papier recyclé).................................................................4-4 Papier épais................................................................................................4-5 Enveloppes.................................................................................................4-6 Etiquettes....................................................................................................4-7 Papier à en-tête..........................................................................................4-8 Cartes..........................................................................................................4-9 Brillant.......................................................................................................4-10 Zone imprimable.......................................................................................4-11 Enveloppes...............................................................................................4-12 Marges de page........................................................................................4-12 Chargement des supports ..........................................................................4-13 Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle)..................................................................4-13 Charger du Papier ordinaire................................................................4-14 Autres supports..................................................................................4-15 Enveloppes.........................................................................................4-15 Chargement de planches d'étiquettes/de Cartes/ de Supports Épais et Brillant..............................................................4-17 Bac 2.........................................................................................................4-18 Charger du Papier ordinaire................................................................4-18 Chargement de planches d'étiquettes/de Cartes/ de Supports Épais et Brillant..............................................................4-21 Impression recto-verso ...............................................................................4-24 Bac de sortie ................................................................................................4-26 Stockage des supports ...............................................................................4-27 5Remplacement des consommables ............................................................5-1 Remplacement des consommables ............................................................5-2 A propos des cartouches de toner.............................................................5-2 Remplacement d'une cartouche de toner..................................................5-7 Remplacement du kit de toner usagé WB-P03........................................5-14 Remplacement du rouleau de transfert TF-P04.......................................5-17 Remplacement de l'unité de courroie de transfert TF-P05.......................5-20 Remplacement de l'unité de fixation FU-P02...........................................5-27 6Entretien de l'imprimante ..............................................................................6-1 Entretien de l'imprimante ..............................................................................6-2 Nettoyage de l'imprimante ...........................................................................6-4 Extérieur......................................................................................................6-4 Rouleaux d'entraînement papier.................................................................6-5 Nettoyage des rouleaux d'entraînement papier (Bac 2).......................6-5 Nettoyage des lentilles laser de l'imprimante.............................................6-6 Contents x-7 7 Résolution de problèmes ..............................................................................7-1 Introduction ....................................................................................................7-2 Impression d'une page de configuration .....................................................7-2 Prévention des bourrages papier .................................................................7-3 Description du chemin papier ......................................................................7-4 Suppression des bourrages papier ..............................................................7-5 Messages de bourrage et procédures correctives.....................................7-6 Suppression d'un bourrage dans le Bac 2...........................................7-7 Suppression d'un bourrage dans l'unité Recto-verso........................7-11 Suppression d'un bourrage dans l'unité de fixation...........................7-12 Suppression d'un bourrage dans le Bac 1 (alimentation manuelle) et le Rouleau de transfert..............................7-18 Résolution de problèmes de bourrage ......................................................7-21 Résolution d'autres problèmes ..................................................................7-25 Résolution de problèmes de qualité ..........................................................7-30 Messages d'état, d'erreur et de maintenance ..........................................7-36 Messages d'état standard........................................................................7-36 Messages d'erreur....................................................................................7-37 Messages de maintenance.......................................................................7-43 AAnnexe ...........................................................................................................A-1 Spécifications techniques ............................................................................A-2 Imprimante..................................................................................................A-2 Durée de vie des consommables...............................................................A-5 Protection de l'environnement ....................................................................A-7 Qu'est-ce qu'un produit ENERGY STAR ?...........................................A-7 x-8 Table des matières 1 Introduction 1-2 Présentation de l'imprimante Présentation de l'imprimante Espace requis Pour permettre une utilisation aisée de l'imprimante et faciliter les opérations de remplacement des consommables et de maintenance, il est recommandé de respecter les indications d'espace requis détaillées ci-dessous. Vue avant845 mm (33,3")200 mm (7,9")419 mm (16,5")226 mm (8,90")483 mm (19,0")346 mm (13,6")137 mm (5,4") Vue latérale1029 mm (40,5")200 mm (7,9")520 mm (20,5")309 mm (12,2") Présentation de l'imprimante 1-3 Composants de l'imprimante Les illustrations ci-dessous vous permettent de localiser les différents composants de l'imprimante auxquels il est fait référence dans ce guide. Vue avant67891011121345123 1—Panneau de contrôle 2—Bac de sortie 3—Butée papier 4—Bac 1 (alimentation manuelle) 5—Bac 2 6—Capot d'éjection 7—Unité de fixation FU-P02 8—Capot latéral droit 9—Rouleau de transfert TF-P04 10—Unité de courroie de transfert TF-P05 11—Capot avant 12—Flacon de toner usagé WB-P03 13—Cartouche(s) de toner 1312910 1-4 Présentation de l'imprimante Vue arrière12345 1—Interrupteur Marche/Arrêt 2—Prise du cordon secteur 3—Port USB 4—Port Interface Ethernet 10Base-T/100Base-TX 5—Grilles d'aération Impression 􀀕􀀢L'imprimante risque d'être endommagée si l'on tente d'imprimer alors que les cartouches de toner fournies ne sont installées; assurez-vous de bien installer les cartouches de toner fournies avant d'utiliser l'imprimante. 2 A propos du logiciel 2-2 CD/DVD Pilote et Utilitaire Imprimante CD/DVD Pilote et Utilitaire Imprimante Pilotes d'imprimante Système d'exploitation Utilisation/Avantages Windows 7/Vista/Serveur 2008/XP/Serveur 2003/2000 Ces pilotes permettent d'accéder à toutes les fonctions de l'imprimante, y compris les fonctions de finition et de mise en page avancée. Voir aussi "Affichage des paramètres du pilote d'imprimante (Windows)" à la page 2-7. Windows 7/Vista/Serveur 2008/XP/Serveur 2003 pour 64bit Macintosh OS X (10.2.8/10.3.9/10.4/10.5/10.6) 􀀕􀀢Pour plus de détails sur l'installation des pilotes d'imprimante Windows, consultez le Guide d'installation. 􀀕􀀢Pour plus de détails sur les pilotes Macintosh, consultez le Guide de référence sur le CD/DVD Documentation. Utilitaires Utilitaires Utilisation/Avantages PageScope Net Care Device Manager Permet d'accéder à des fonctions de gestion de l'imprimante telles que l'écran d'état et les paramètres réseau. Pour plus de détails, consultez le Guide de l'utilisateur PageScope Net Care Device Manager sur le CD/DVD Pilote et Utilitaire Imprimante. CD/DVD Pilote et Utilitaire Imprimante 2-3 Documentation Documentation Utilisation/Avantages Guide d'installation Ce guide fournit des détails sur les opérations initiales à exécuter pour utiliser cette imprimante, comme la configuration de l'imprimante et l'installation des pilotes. Guide de l'utilisateur (ce manuel) Ce guide fournit des détails sur les opérations quotidiennes générales, comme l'utilisation des pilotes et du panneau de commande et le remplacement des consommables. Guide de référence Ce guide fournit des détails sur l'installation le pilote Macintosh, sur la spécification des paramètres réseau, et sur l'utilitaire de gestion de l'imprimante. Guide de service et d'assistance La fiche Besoin d'aide ? fournit des informations sur l'assistance et l'entretien du produit. 2-4 Configuration Système requise Configuration Système requise 􀂄Un PC –Pentium 2 : 400 MHz (Pentium 3 : 500 MHz ou supérieur recommandé) –PowerPC G3 ou supérieur (G4 ou supérieur est recommandé) –Macintosh équipé d'un processeur Intel 􀂄Système d'exploitation –Microsoft Windows 7 Édition Familiale Premium/Professionnel/Ultimate, Windows 7 Édition Familiale Premium/Professionnel/Ultimate x64, Windows Serveur 2008 Standard/Entreprise, Windows Serveur 2008 Standard/Entreprise x64, Windows Vista Édition Familiale Basique/Édition Familiale Premium/Ultimate/Business/Entreprise, Windows Vista Édition Familiale Basique /Édition Familiale Premium /Ultimate/Business /Entreprise x64, Windows XP Édition Familiale/Professionnel (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur), Windows XP Édition Professionnel x64, Windows Serveur 2003, Windows Serveur 2003 x64, Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4 ou ultérieur) –Mac OS X (10.2.8/10.3.9/10.4/10.5/10.6; Il est recommandé d'installer le dernier correctif logiciel) 􀂄Espace requis sur le disque dur –Environ 20 Mo d'espace mémoire disponible pour le pilote d'imprimante –Environ 128 Mo d'espace mémoire disponible pour le traitement d'images 􀂄Capacité RAM recommandée pour le système d'exploitation 􀂄Lecteur de CD-ROM/DVD 􀂄Interface E/S –Port Interface Ethernet 10Base-T/100Base-TX –Port USB 2.0 compatible haute vitesse 􀀕􀀢Pour plus de détails sur le pilote d'imprimante Macintosh, consultez le Guide de référence sur le CD/DVD Pilote et Utilitaire Imprimante. Sélection des paramètres par défaut du pilote 2-5 Sélection des paramètres par défaut du pilote (Windows) Avant d'utiliser l'imprimante, il est conseillé de vérifier/modifier les paramètres par défaut du pilote. En outre, si des options matérielles sont installées, il convient de les "déclarer" dans le pilote. Windows 7/Vista/Serveur 2008/XP/Serveur 2003/2000 1Sélectionnez les propriétés de l'imprimante comme suit: –(Windows 7) Dans le menu Démarrer, cliquez sur Périphériques et imprimantes pour ouvrir le dossier Périphériques et imprimantes. Faites un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante KONICA MINOLTA magicolor 3730, puis cliquez sur Options d'impression. –(Windows Vista/Serveur 2008) Depuis le menu Démarrer, cliquez sur Panneau de configuration, puis sur Matériel et audio et enfin sur Imprimantes pour ouvrir le dossier des Imprimantes. Faites un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante KONICA MINOLTA magicolor 3730, puis cliquez sur Options d'impression. –(Windows XP/Serveur 2003) Dans le menu Démarrer, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs afin d'ouvrir le répertoire Imprimantes et télécopieurs. Faites un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante KONICA MINOLTA magicolor 3730, puis sélectionnez Options d'impression. –(Windows 2000) Dans le menu Démarrer, sélectionnez Paramètres, puis Imprimantes afin d'ouvrir le répertoire Imprimantes. Faites un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante KONICA MINOLTA magicolor 3730, puis sélectionnez Options d'impression. 2Sélectionnez l'onglet De base. Sélectionnez les réglages par défaut de votre imprimante, par exemple le format de papier implicitement utilisé. 3Cliquez sur Appliquer. 4Cliquez sur OK pour fermer la boîte de dialogue Options d'impression. 2-6 Désinstallation du pilote d'imprimante (Windows) Désinstallation du pilote d'imprimante (Windows) Cette section décrit comment désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante si nécessaire. 􀀕􀀢Des droits d'administration sont nécessaires pour désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante. 􀀕􀀢Si la fenêtre Contrôle de compte d'utilisateur apparaît lors de la désinstallation sous Windows Vista, cliquez sur la touche Permis ou sur la touche Continuer. Windows 7/Vista/Serveur 2008/XP/Serveur 2003/2000 1Fermez toutes les applications. 2Sélectionnez le programme de désinstallation comme suit : –(Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008/XP/Server 2003) Depuis le menu Démarrer, choisissez Tous les programmes, KONICA MINOLTA, magicolor 3730, et enfin Désinstaller. –(Windows 2000) Depuis le menu Démarrer, sélectionnez Programmes, KONICA MINOLTA, magicolor 3730, et ensuite Désinstaller. 3Dans la boîte de dialogue Désinstaller qui s'affiche, sélectionnez le nom du pilote à désinstaller, et cliquez sur le bouton Désinstaller. 4Le pilote d'imprimante sera désinstallé de votre ordinateur. Affichage des paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2-7 Affichage des paramètres du pilote d'imprimante (Windows) Windows 7 1Dans le menu Démarrer, cliquez sur Périphériques et imprimantes pour ouvrir le dossier Périphériques et imprimantes. 2Faites un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante KONICA MINOLTA magicolor 3730, puis cliquez sur Options d'impression. Windows Vista/Serveur 2008 1Dans le menu Démarrer, sélectionnez Panneau de configuration, puis Matériel et audio et cliquez sur Imprimantes pour ouvrir le répertoire Imprimantes. 2Faites un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante KONICA MINOLTA magicolor 3730, puis cliquez sur Options d'impression. Windows XP/Serveur 2003 1Dans le menu Démarrer, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs afin d'ouvrir le répertoire Imprimantes et télécopieurs. 2Faites un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante KONICA MINOLTA magicolor 3730, puis sélectionnez Options d'impression. Windows 2000 1Dans le menu Démarrer, pointez sur Paramètres et cliquez ensuite sur Imprimantes pour afficher le répertoire Imprimantes. 2Faites un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante KONICA MINOLTA magicolor 3730, puis sélectionnez Options d'impression. 2-8 Utiliser le pilote d'imprimante Utiliser le pilote d'imprimante Accessibles sur tous les onglets Les boutons décrits ci-dessous se trouvent sur tous les onglets. OK Cliquez sur Valider pour quitter la boîte de dialogue Propriétés en sauvegardant toutes les modifications effectuées. Annuler Cliquez sur Annuler pour quitter la boîte de dialogue Propriétés sans sauvegarder les modifications effectuées. Appliquer Cliquez sur Appliquer pour sauvegarder les modifications effectuées sans fermer la boîte de dialogue Propriétés. Aide Cliquez sur Aide pour ouvrir le fichier d'aide en ligne. Easy Set Permet de sauvegarder les paramètres courants. Pour sauvegarder les paramètres actuels, spécifiez les paramètres souhaités et cliquez ensuite sur Enregistrer. Spécifiez les paramètres décrits ci-dessous et cliquez ensuite sur OK. 􀂄Nom : saisissez le nom de la configuration de paramètres à enregistrer. 􀂄Commentaire : ajoutez un bref commentaire sur les paramètres à enregistrer. Ensuite, la configuration enregistrée peut être sélectionnée dans la liste déroulante. Pour modifier le paramètre enregistré, cliquez sur Éditer. Pour restaurer les paramètres sur tous les onglets à leurs valeurs par défaut, sélectionnez Par défaut dans la liste déroulante. Utiliser le pilote d'imprimante 2-9 Aperçu de l'imprimante Cliquez sur ce bouton radio pour afficher une image de l'imprimante dans la zone graphique. Cette touche change en touche Aperçu du format (lorsqu'un onglet autre que Filigrane ou Qualité est sélectionné), en touche Aperçu du filigrane (lorsque l'onglet Filigrane est sélectionné) ou en touche Aperçu de la qualité (lorsque l'onglet Qualité est sélectionné). 􀀕􀀢Cette touche n'apparaît pas sur l'onglet Version. Aperçu du format Cochez ce bouton radio pour afficher un aperçu de la mise en page. Si cette touche est sollicitée, elle se transforme en touche Aperçu de l'imprimante. 􀀕􀀢Cette touche n'apparaît pas sur l'onglet Filigrane, l'onglet Qualité et l'onglet Version. Aperçu du filigrane Cliquez sur cette touche pour afficher un aperçu du filigrane. Si cette touche est sollicitée, elle se transforme en touche Aperçu de l'imprimante. 􀀕􀀢Cette touche n'apparaît que lorsque l'onglet Filigrane est sélectionné. Aperçu de la qualité Cliquez sur le bouton pour afficher un aperçu des paramètres sélectionnés sur l'onglet Qualité. Si cette touche est sollicitée, elle se transforme en touche Aperçu de l'imprimante. 􀀕􀀢Cette touche n'apparaît que lorsque l'onglet Qualité est sélectionné. Par défaut Cliquez sur le bouton pour restaurer les paramètres à leurs valeurs par défaut. 􀀕􀀢Cette touche n'apparaît pas sur l'onglet Version. 2-10 Utiliser le pilote d'imprimante 􀀕􀀢Si cette touche est sollicitée, les valeurs par défaut des paramètres affichés dans la boîte de dialogue sont rétablies. Les paramètres des autres onglets ne sont pas modifiés. Onglet Paramètres de base Cet onglet propose les fonctions suivantes : 􀂄Spécifier l'orientation du support d'impression 􀂄Spécifier le format du document original 􀂄Sélectionner le format papier en sortie 􀂄Enregistrer/modifier les formats papier personnalisé 􀂄Appliquer un facteur de zoom (agrandissement/réduction) aux documents 􀂄Spécifier le nombre de copies 􀂄Activer/désactiver l'assemblage des travaux 􀂄Spécifier la source d'alimentation papier 􀂄Spécifier le type de support d'impression 􀂄Sélectionner le papier utilisé pour la 1ère page Onglet Mise en page Cet onglet propose les fonctions suivantes : 􀂄Imprimer plusieurs pages d'un document sur une même page (Miniatures) 􀂄Imprimer une copie agrandie et en imprimer plusieurs pages. 􀂄Spécifier l'impression Livret 􀂄Appliquer une rotation à 180 degrés de l'image imprimée 􀂄Spécifier l'impression recto-verso (2 faces) 􀂄Spécifier les paramètres de décalage d'image Onglet Calque 􀀕􀀢Veillez à ce que le format et l'orientation du calque à utiliser correspondent au format et à l'orientation de votre travail d'impression. De plus, si vous avez défini des paramètres "Miniatures" ou "Livret" dans le pilote, le calque ne pourra être ajusté en fonction de ces paramètres. L'onglet Calque propose les fonctions suivantes : 􀂄Sélectionner la forme de calque à utiliser Utiliser le pilote d'imprimante 2-11 􀂄Ajouter, modifier ou supprimer des fichiers calque 􀂄Sélectionner si la forme doit être imprimée sur toutes sur toutes les pages ou seulement sur la première page Onglet Filigrane L'onglet Filigrane propose les fonctions suivantes : 􀂄Sélectionner le filigrane à utiliser 􀂄Ajouter, modifier ou supprimer des filigranes 􀂄Ajuster la position du filigrane 􀂄Imprimer le filigrane sur l'arrière-plan 􀂄Imprimer le filigrane sur la première page seulement d'un document 􀂄Imprimer le filigrane de manière répétitive sur toutes les pages d'un document Onglet Qualité L'onglet Qualité propose les fonctions suivantes : 􀂄Alterner l'impression couleur et l'impression noir et blanc 􀂄Spécifier la correspondance couleur pour imprimer les documents 􀂄Spécifier la résolution pour le tirage imprimé 􀂄Sélectionner si le mode Trait est utilisé ou non 􀂄Activer ou désactiver le mode Impression économique 􀂄Régler le contraste (Contraste) 􀂄Régler l'obscurité d'une image (Luminosité) 􀂄Régler la saturation de l'image imprimée (Saturation) 􀂄"Saturation" n'est disponible que si "Correspondance couleurs" a été activé. 􀂄Régler la netteté de l'image imprimée (Netteté) 􀂄"Netteté" n'est disponible que si "Correspondance couleurs" a été désactivé. Onglet Version 􀂄L'onglet Version permet de consulter les informations relatives au pilote d'imprimante. 2-12 Utiliser le pilote d'imprimante Limitations des fonctions du pilote d'imprimante installé avec Point and Print Si l'opération Point and Print est exécutée avec les combinaisons serveur/client suivantes, certaines fonctions du pilote d'imprimante seront limitées. 􀂄Combinaisons serveur/client Serveur : Windows Serveur 2003/XP/2000/Serveur 2008/Vista/7 Client : Windows Serveur 2003/XP/2000/Serveur 2008/Vista/7 􀂄Cependant si le serveur fonctionne sous Windows 2000, un client fonctionnant sous une Édition x64 ou Windows Serveur 2008 n'est pas compatible. 􀂄Les paramètres Serveur ne sont pas retournés dans les fonctions suivantes. Aperçu de l'imprimante, Calque 3 Panneau de commande et menu de configuration de l'imprimante 3-2 Présentation du panneau de commande Présentation du panneau de commande Au sommet, l'imprimante est équipée d'un panneau de commande qui vous permet d'intervenir sur son fonctionnement. Ce panneau comporte aussi un écran qui affiche son état d'activité ainsi que des messages d'avertissement.87345621Écran des messages Présentation du panneau de commande 3-3 Voyants et touches du panneau de commande N° Présentation Description 1 Ready Allumé, l'impression est possible. 2 Error Allumé ou clignotant, une erreur s'est produite une erreur ou il s'agit d'un avertissement. 3 􀂄Annule un menu ou un choix affiché 􀂄Permet d'annuler un travail en cours de traitement ou d'impression: 1.Appuyez sur la touche Cancel. 2.Appuyez sur la touche Menu/Select. Le travail d'impression est annulé. 4 􀂄Pour entrer dans l'arborescence des menus 􀂄Pour descendre dans l'arborescence 􀂄Pour appliquer le paramètre affiché 5 􀂄Pour monter dans l'arborescence des menus 􀂄Dans une option de menu pouvant être sélectionnée et modifiée caractère par caractère, cette touche permet de remonter dans la liste des caractères disponibles 6 􀂄Pour déplacer la curseur vers la droite 􀂄Pour descendre dans l'arborescence 7 􀂄Pour descendre dans l'arborescence des menus 􀂄Dans une option de menu pouvant être sélectionnée et modifiée caractère par caractère, cette touche permet de remonter dans la liste des caractères disponibles 8 􀂄Pour déplacer le curseur vers la gauche 􀂄Pour remonter dans l'arborescence 3-4 Présentation du panneau de commande Écran des messages Cet écran affiche l'état courant de l'imprimante, la quantité de toner restante, ainsi que tous les messages d'erreur pouvant survenirREADY12YKCM N° Détails 1 Affichage de l'état courant de l'imprimante. 2 􀂄Affichage des messages d'erreur. 􀂄Lors d'une mise à jour du firmware, le type de firmware mis à jour ainsi que la progression de la mise à jour s'affichent. . Présentation du menu de configuration 3-5 Présentation du menu de configuration Le menu de configuration, accessible sur le panneau de commande de l'imprimante, se présente comme suit. Menu PrincipalMENU LANGUEMENU MOTEURMENU INTERFACEPRÊTMENU RÉSEAUMENU PAGES SPÉCIALESMENU UTILIS. CONSOM. 3-6 Présentation du menu de configuration PAGES SPÉCIALES Ce menu permet d'imprimer les informations de l'imprimante comme la page de configuration.IMPRESSION PAGE CONFIGIMPRESSION PLAN MENUMENU PAGES SPÉCIALES 􀀕􀀢Toutes les valeurs par défaut définies en usine apparaissent en gras. PAGE CONFIG Réglages IMPRESSION/ANNULER Imprime la page de configuration. PLAN MENU Réglages IMPRESSION/ANNULER Imprime l'arborescence des menus. LANGUE 3-7 LANGUE Ce menu permet de changer la langue d'affichage.LANGUE RÉGLÉE FRENCHLANGUE RÉGLÉE GERMANLANGUE RÉGLÉE SPANISHMENU LANGUELANGUE RÉGLÉE ITALIANLANGUE RÉGLÉE ENGLISHLANGUE RÉGLÉE PORTUGUESELANGUE RÉGLÉE JAPANESELANGUE RÉGLÉE SLOVAKLANGUE RÉGLÉE POLISHLANGUE RÉGLÉE HUNGARIANLANGUE RÉGLÉE CZECHLANGUE RÉGLÉE RUSSIAN 3-8 LANGUE 􀀕􀀢Toutes les valeurs par défaut définies en usine apparaissent en gras. LANGUE RÉGLÉE Réglages ENGLISH/FRENCH/GERMAN/ITALIAN/PORTUGUESE/SPANISH/CZECH/JAPANESE/SLOVAK/HUNGARIAN/RUSSIAN/POLISH Sélectionnez la langue des écrans qui apparaissent dans la fenêtre des messages. MOTEUR 3-9 MOTEUR Ce menu permet de spécifier les réglages concernant les fonctions du moteur de l'imprimante (comme ÉCON. ÉNERGIE et MOTEUR REMPLACER CONSOM).MOTEUR REMPLACER CONSOMRESTAURER PAR DÉF. UTILIS.REMPLACER CONSOM ROULEAU TRANS.REMPLACER CONSOM COURROIE TRANS.REMPLACER CONSOM UNITE FIXATIONCPTE RECT. N/BECON. ÉNERGIECONTR AUTOMOTEUR SERVICEMENU MOTEURTOTAL RECTOSCPTE RECT. COUL.VER. BOOTVER. FPGACOULEUR CALIBRAGEVER. MOTEURVER. CONTRÔLEUR 3-10 MOTEUR 􀀕􀀢Toutes les valeurs par défaut définies en usine apparaissent en gras. ECON. ÉNERGIE Réglages 120 minutes/60 minutes/30 minutes/15 minutes Pour spécifier le délai au bout duquel l'imprimante doit passer en mode Écon. énergie. 􀀕􀀢La machine ne passe pas en mode Écon. énergie si du papier a été chargé dans le Bac 1. CONTR AUTO Réglages ON/OFF Pour définir si l'impression doit ou non se poursuivre lorsque que le format ou le type de papier chargé dans le bac sélectionné est différent de celui défini pour le travail d'impression. Si CONTR AUTO est réglé sur ON, l'impression continue automatiquement dans chacun des cas suivants. L'impression aura lieu même su le format du support est différent. Format/Type papier différent: DÉCALAGE FORMAT (page 7-38)/DÉCALAGE TYPE (page 7-38)/METTRE SUP.BAC X (page 7-42) MOTEUR SERVICE TOTAL RECTOS Affiche le compteur de pages. CPTE RECT. COUL. Affiche le compteur total pages pour l'impression couleur. CPTE RECT. N/B Affiche le compteur total pages pour l'impression noir et blanc. VER. BOOT Affiche la version boot. VER. FPGA Affiche la version FPGA. VER. CONTRÔLEUR Affiche la version du contrôleur. VER. MOTEUR Affiche la version du moteur. COULEUR CALIBRAGE Réglages OUI/NON Si OUI est sélectionné, le calibrage couleur est effectué. MOTEUR 3-11 MOTEUR REMPLACER CONSOM REMPLACER CONSOM COURROIE TRANS. Réglages OUI/NON Réinitialise le compteur de la courroie de transfert. REMPLACER CONSOM ROULEAU TRANS. Réglages OUI/NON Réinitialise le compteur du rouleau de transfert. REMPLACER CONSOM UNITE FIXATION Réglages OUI/NON Réinitialise le compteur de l'unité de fixation. RESTAURER PAR DÉF. UTILIS. Réglages OUI/NON Permet de restaurer les valeurs par défaut de l'imprimante. Quand cette option est sélectionnée, l'imprimante redémarre automatiquement. 3-12 RÉSEAU RÉSEAU Ce menu permet de définir les paramètres d'interface. 􀀕􀀢Redémarrez l'imprimante après avoir changé les réglages dans les menus DHCP,BOOTP et ARP/PING.ADR. IP ACTIVÉE AUTOM.ADR. IP ACTIVÉE SPÉCIFIC.ADRESSE IP xxx.xxx.xxx.xxxBOOTP:xxPORTAIL xxx.xxx.xxx.xxxADRESSE IPxxx.xxx.xxx.xxxMENU RÉSEAUIPP:xxSNMP:xxADRESSE MACDHCP:xxMASQUE S-RÉSEAU xxx.xxx.xxx.xxxARP/PING:xxHTTP:xxBONJOUR:xxVITESSE/DUP/NÉG. AUTO/AUTO/ONVITESSE/DUP/NÉG. 100M/HALF/OFFVITESSE/DUP/NÉG. 100M/FULL/OFFVITESSE/DUP/NÉG. 10M/FULL/OFFVITESSE/DUP/NÉG. 10M/HALF/OFFMODES FORCÉS xx/xx/xx RÉSEAU 3-13 􀀕􀀢Toutes les valeurs par défaut définies en usine apparaissent en gras. ADR. IP ACTIVÉE Réglages AUTOM./SPÉCIFIC. Sélectionnez si l'adresse doit être automatiquement attribuée ou spécifiée manuellement (SPÉCIFIC.). Si SPÉCIFIC. est sélectionné, les paramètres de ADRESSE IP, MASQUE S-RÉSEAU et PORTAIL peuvent être spécifiés. Si l'adresse IP est spécifiée manuellement, DHCP, BOOTP et ARP/PING sont automatiquement réglés sur OFF. ADRESSE IP Réglages 000.000.000.000 Pour définir l'adresse IP de cette imprimante sur le réseau. Spécifiez les valeurs avec les touches , , , et . 􀀕􀀢Si ADR. IP ACTIVÉE est réglé sur SPÉCIFIC., cet élément de menu apparaît. MASQUE S-RÉSEAU Réglages 000.000.000.000 Pour définir l'adresse IP de cette imprimante sur le réseau. Spécifiez les valeurs avec les touches , , , et . 􀀕􀀢Si RÉGL ADRESSE IP est réglé sur SPÉCIFIC., cet élément de menu apparaît. PORTAIL Réglages 000.000.000.000 Pour définir l'adresse IP de cette imprimante sur le réseau. Spécifiez les valeurs avec les touches , , , et . 􀀕􀀢Si ADR. IP ACTIVÉE est réglé sur SPÉCIFIC., cet élément de menu apparaît. 3-14 RÉSEAU DHCP: Réglages ON/OFF Pour spécifier si l'adresse IP doit ou non être automatiquement acquise. ON: l'adresse IP est automatiquement acquise. OFF: l'adresse IP n'est pas automatiquement acquise. BOOTP: Réglages ON/OFF Pour spécifier si l'adresse IP doit ou non être automatiquement acquise. ON: l'adresse IP est automatiquement acquise. OFF: l'adresse IP n'est pas automatiquement acquise. ARP/PING: Réglages ON/OFF Pour spécifier si l'adresse IP doit ou non être automatiquement acquise. ON: l'adresse IP est automatiquement acquise. OFF: l'adresse IP n'est pas automatiquement acquise. ADRESSE MAC Affiche l'adresse MAC. HTTP: Réglages ON/OFF Si ON est sélectionné, le protocole HTTP est activé. Si OFF est sélectionné, le protocole HTTP est désactivé. BONJOUR: Réglages ON/OFF Si ON est sélectionné, le protocole Bonjour est activé. Si OFF est sélectionné, le protocole Bonjour est désactivé. IPP: Réglages ON/OFF Si ON est sélectionné, le protocole IPP est activé. Si OFF est sélectionné, le protocole IPP est désactivé. 􀀕􀀢Si HTTP est réglé sur OFF, l'IPP ne peut pas être sélectionné. RÉSEAU 3-15 SNMP: Réglages ON/OFF Si ON est sélectionné, le protocole SNMP est activé. Si OFF est sélectionné, le protocole SNMP est désactivé. MODES FORCÉS VITESSE/DUP/NÉG. Réglages AUTO/AUTO/ON, 100M/FULL/OFF, 100M/HALF/OFF, 10M/FULL/OFF, 10M/HALF/OFF Spécifiez la vitesse de transmission du réseau et la méthode de transmission en communication bidirectionnelle. 3-16 UTILIS. CONSOM. UTILIS. CONSOM. Ce menu permet d'afficher le niveau restant des consommables (comme TONER et ROUL. TRANSFERT).TONER C xx% RESTANTTONER M xx% RESTANTCOUR. TRANSFERT xxx% RESTANTMENU UTILIS. CONSOM.TONER Y xx% RESTANTTONER K xx% RESTANTROUL. TRANSFERT xxx% RESTANTUNITE FIXATION xxx% RESTANT 􀀕􀀢Toutes les valeurs par défaut définies en usine apparaissent en gras. TONER K Affiche la quantité de toner noir restante. TONER C Affiche la quantité de toner cyan restante. TONER M Affiche la quantité de toner magenta restante. TONER Y Affiche la quantité de toner jaune restante. ROUL. TRANSFERT Affiche en pourcentage la durée écoulée du cycle de vie du rouleau de transfert. COUR. TRANSFERT Affiche en pourcentage la durée écoulée du cycle de vie de la courroie de transfert. UNITE FIXATION Affiche en pourcentage la durée écoulée du cycle de vie de l'unité de fixation. INTERFACE 3-17 INTERFACE Ce menu permet de définir les paramètres de déconnexion de l'interface.DÉLAI RÉSEAUMENU INTERFACEDÉLAI USB 􀀕􀀢Toutes les valeurs par défaut définies en usine apparaissent en gras. DÉLAI USB Réglages 300/60/15 Spécifiez le délai avant interruption de la communication avec via l'interface USB. DÉLAI RÉSEAU Réglages 300/60/15 Spécifiez le délai avant interruption de la communication via l'interface réseau. USER SERVICE/SERVICE PERSON Ce menu permet au technicien de maintenance de régler l'imprimante et d'effectuer des opérations d'entretien. L'opérateur ne peut pas à y accéder. 3-18 INTERFACE 4 Utilisation des supports 4-2 Spécifications des supports Spécifications des supports Quels types et formats de support peut-on utiliser ? Support Format Bac* Recto-verso (2 faces) Pouces Millimètres Letter 8,5 x 11,0 215,9 x 279,4 1/2 Oui Letter Plus 8,5 x 12,7 215,9 x 322,3 1 Oui Legal 8,5 x 14,0 215,9 x 355,6 1 Oui Statement 5,5 x 8,5 139,7 x 215,9 1/2 Non Executive 7,25 x 10,5 184,2 x 266,7 1/2 Oui A4 8,2 x 11,7 210,0 x 297,0 1/2 Oui A5 5,9 x 8,3 148,0 x 210,0 1/2 Non A6 4,1 x 5,8 105,0 x 148,0 1/2 Non B5 (JIS) 7,2 x 10,1 182,0 x 257,0 1/2 Oui B6 5,0 x 7,2 128,0 x 182,0 1/2 Non Folio 8,25 x 13,0 210,0 x 330,0 1 Oui SP Folio 8,5 x 12,69 215,9 x 322,3 1 Oui Foolscap 8,0 x 13,0 203,2 x 330,2 1 Oui Quarto R-U 8,0 x 10,0 203,2 x 254,0 1/2 Non Letter officiel 8,0 x 10,5 203,2 x 266,7 1/2 Oui Legal officiel 8,5 x 13,0 215,9 x 330,2 1 Oui Photo 4" x 6"/10 x 15 4,0 x 6,0 101,6 x 152,4 1/2 Non 16 K 7,7 x 10,6 195,0 x 270,0 1/2 Oui Kai 16 7,3 x 10,2 185,0 x 260,0 1/2 Oui Kai 32 5,1 x 7,3 130,0 x 185,0 1/2 Non Oficio Mexico 8,5 x 13,5 216,0 x 343,0 1 Oui Carte Japon 3,9 x 5,8 100,0 x 148,0 1 Non Carte Japon D 5,8 x 7,9 148,0 x 200,0 1 Non B5 (ISO) 6,9 x 9,8 176,0 x 250,0 1 Non Enveloppe #10 4,125 x 9,5 104,8 x 241,3 1 Non Enveloppe DL 8,7 x 4,3 220,0 x 110,0 1 Non Enveloppe C6 6,4 x 4,5 162,0 x 114,0 1 Non Enveloppe Monarch 7,5 x 3,875 190,5 x 98,4 1 Non Enveloppe Chou #3 4,7 x 9,2 120,0 x 235,0 1 Non Format personnalisé 3,6 à 8,5 x 5,8 à 14,0 92,0 à -216,0 x 148,0 à -356,0 1** Oui*** Format personnalisé 3,6 à 8,5 x 5,8 à 11,7 92,0 à 216,0 x 148,0 à 297,0 2 Oui*** Notes: *Bac 1= Alimentation manuelle **Bien que la largeur maximale prise en charge soit de 216,0 mm (8,5"), le format Enveloppe DL (largeur : 220 mm (8,7")) peut être chargé. ***Le format minimal possible pour l'impression recto-verso (2 faces) est 182,0 x 257,0 mm (7,2" x 10,1"). Le format minimal possible pour l'impression recto-verso (2 faces) est 216,0 x 356,0 mm (8,5" x 14,0"). ****Le format minimal possible pour l'impression recto-verso (2 faces) est 182,0 x 257,0 mm (7,2" x 10,1"). Le format minimal possible pour l'impression recto-verso (2 faces) est 216,0 x 297,0 mm (8,5" x 11,69"). Spécifications des supports 4-3 􀀕􀀢Pour des formats personnalisés, utilisez le pilote de l'imprimante pour définir les paramètres dans les plages indiquées en page précédente. 􀀕􀀢Si vous utilisez du papier de format personnalisé avec le Bac 2, la conception du bac permet de charger du papier d'une largeur supérieure à 210 mm (8,25") en laissant flotter la queue de feuille lorsque la largeur est supérieure à 279 mm (11,0") (longueur maximum : 297 mm (11,7")). Si vous utilisez ces formats de papier personnalisé, servez-vous de l'Alimentation manuelle; sinon, ne chargez pas plus de 100 feuilles dans le Bac 2. 4-4 Types de support Types de support Rangez les supports sur une surface plane et régulière, en les laissant dans leur emballage d'origine tant que vous n'êtes pas prêt à les utiliser. Pour obtenir la liste des supports homologués, visitez printer.konicaminolta.com. 􀀕􀀢Avant d'imprimer un grand nombre d'exemplaires sur du papier spécial (autre que le papier standard), imprimer une épreuve pour contrôler la qualité de l'impression. Papier standard (Papier recyclé) Capacité Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle) 1 feuille. Bac 2 Jusqu'à 250 feuilles, suivant le grammage utilisé. Orientation Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle) Face imprimable vers le bas Bac 2 Face imprimable vers le haut Choix pilote Papier standard (Papier recyclé) Poids 60–90 g/m2 Impression recto-verso Voir les formats acceptés en page 4-2. Conseils d'utilisation : Utilisez des supports adaptés pour imprimantes laser sur papier ordinaire, tels que du papier standard ou recyclé d'usage courant. N'utilisez pas les types de supports suivants : 􀂄Supports traités en surface (tels que papier carbone et papier couleur ayant subi un traitement) 􀂄Supports thermocollants non autorisés (comme le papier thermocollant et le papier-transfert thermocollant) 􀂄Supports pour transfert à froid 􀂄Supports pour presse d'imprimerie 􀂄Supports spécifiques pour imprimantes jet d'encre (papier ultra-fin, papier brillant, film brillant, cartes postales, etc.) 􀂄Papier pré-imprimé sur une autre machine : –Papier pré-imprimé sur une imprimante jet d'encre Types de support 4-5 –Papier pré-imprimé sur un système d'impression laser et de copie monochrome ou couleur –Papier pré-imprimé sur une imprimante thermique –Papier pré-imprimé sur une toute autre imprimante ou télécopieur 􀂄Supports poussiéreux 􀂄Papier mouillé (ou humide) 􀀕􀀢Stockez les supports dans un local où l'humidité relative se situe entre 35% et 85%. Le toner n'adhère pas sur supports humides. 􀂄Papier pelliculé 􀂄Papier adhésif 􀂄Papier plié, froissé, gondolé, gaufré, déformé ou plissé 􀂄Papier ajouré, perforé ou déchiré 􀂄Papier trop souple, trop rigide, trop fibreux 􀂄Papier avec recto et verso de texture (rugosité) différente 􀂄Papier trop fin ou trop épais 􀂄Supports chargés d'électricité statique 􀂄Supports laminés ou dorés; trop lumineux 􀂄Supports ne résistant pas à la température de fixation (180°C [356°F]) 􀂄Papier non découpé à angles droits ou de dimensions non uniformes 􀂄Papier avec colle, adhésif, agrafes, attaches, crochets ou oeillets 􀂄Papier acide 􀂄Et tout autre support non homologué Papier épais Le papier d'épaisseur supérieure à 90 g/m2 est considéré comme un support épais. Il est possible d'imprimer en continu sur un support épais. Selon la qualité du support utilisé et votre environnement d'impression, il se peut toutefois que des problèmes d'alimentation papier surviennent. Si tel est le cas, arrêtez l'impression en continu et imprimez les feuilles une à une. Capacité Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle) 1 feuille papier épais. Bac 2 Jusqu'à 20 feuilles de papier épais, selon leur épaisseur. 4-6 Types de support Enveloppes Imprimez seulement sur le recto (face où doit figurer l'adresse du destinataire). Certaines zones de l'enveloppe sont en triple épaisseur (face+dos+rabat) L'impression risque de présenter des manques ou des caractères estompés. Vous pouvez imprimer en continu sur des enveloppes. Selon la qualité du support utilisé et votre environnement d'impression, il se peut toutefois que des problèmes d'alimentation papier surviennent. Si tel est le cas, arrêtez l'impression en continu et imprimez les feuilles une à une. Capacité Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle) 1 enveloppe. Bac 2 Non supportée Orientation Face imprimable vers le bas Choix pilote Enveloppe Impression recto-verso Non supportée Utiliser des enveloppes : 􀂄de bureau courantes pour l'impression laser avec fermeture en diagonale, pliures et bords francs et rabats préencollés ordinaires 􀀕􀀢Les enveloppes à rabats gommés risquent de se coller en passant dans les rouleaux chauffants. Il vaut donc mieux utiliser des enveloppes à rabats enduits de colle émulsionnée. 􀂄Homologuées pour impression laser 􀂄Sèches Orientation Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle) Face imprimable vers le bas Bac 2 Face imprimable vers le haut Choix pilote Épais 1 (91–150 g/m2) Épais 2 (151–210 g/m2) Poids 91–210 g/m2 Impression recto-verso Voir page 4-2 pour connaître les formats pris en charge. Types de support 4-7 N'utilisez pas des enveloppes : 􀂄Avec rabats autocollants 􀂄Avec rubans adhésifs, attaches métalliques, clips ou bandes amovibles 􀂄Avec fenêtres transparentes 􀂄De texture trop grossière (ex. : enveloppes renforcées) 􀂄Composées de matière fusible, volatile, décolorante ou émettrice de vapeurs nocives 􀂄Pré-scellées Etiquettes Une planche d'étiquettes se compose d'une face recto (zone imprimable) et d'une face verso adhésive, recouverte d'une feuille de protection : 􀂄La face recto doit répondre aux spécifications Papier standard. 􀂄La face recto doit entièrement recouvrir la feuille de protection, et ne doit laisser apparaître aucune substance adhésive en surface. Il est possible d'imprimer des planches d'étiquettes en continu. Selon la qualité du support utilisé et votre environnement d'impression, il se peut toutefois que des problèmes d'alimentation papier surviennent. Si tel est le cas, arrêtez l'impression en continu et imprimez les planches une à une. Pour toute information concernant l'impression d'étiquettes, consultez la documentation de votre application. Capacité Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle) 1 planche d'étiquettes Bac 2 Jusqu'à 20 planches d'étiquettes, selon leur épaisseur Orientation Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle) Face imprimable vers le bas Bac 2 Face imprimable vers le haut Choix pilote Étiquette Impression recto-verso Non supportée Utilisez des planches d'étiquettes comme suit : 􀂄Recommandées pour imprimantes laser 4-8 Types de support N'utilisez pas des planches d'étiquettes 􀂄Comportant des étiquettes facilement détachables ou des feuilles de protection décollées 􀂄Laissant apparaître toute substance adhésive en surface 􀀕􀀢Les étiquettes de ces planches peuvent rester collées dans l'unité de fixation et provoquer des bourrages. 􀂄Prédécoupées ou perforéesPlanche pleine page (sans étiquettes prédécoupées)N'utilisez pasUtilisezPlanche d'étiquettes avec feuille de protection siliconée Papier à en-tête Il est possible d'imprimer en continu sur du papier à en-tête. Selon la qualité du support utilisé et votre environnement d'impression, il se peut toutefois que des problèmes d'alimentation papier surviennent. Si tel est le cas, arrêtez l'impression en continu et imprimez les planches une à une. Pour toute information concernant l'impression sur papier à en-tête, consultez la documentation de votre application. Capacité Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle) 1 feuille. Bac 2 Jusqu'à 20 feuilles, selon le format et l'épaisseur du support chargé Orientation Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle) Face imprimable vers le bas Bac 2 Face imprimable vers le haut Choix pilote Papier à en-tête Impression recto-verso Non supportée Types de support 4-9 Cartes Vous pouvez imprimer en continu sur des cartes. Selon la qualité du support utilisé et votre environnement d'impression, il se peut toutefois que des problèmes d'alimentation papier surviennent. Si tel est le cas, arrêtez l'impression en continu et imprimez les planches une à une. Pour toutes informations concernant l'impression de cartes, consultez la documentation de votre application. Capacité Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle) 1 carte postale. Bac 2 Jusqu'à 20 cartes, selon leur épaisseur Orientation Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle) Face imprimable vers le bas Bac 2 Face imprimable vers le haut Choix pilote Cartes Impression recto-verso Non supportée Conseils d'utilisation : 􀂄Recommandé pour imprimantes laser Éviter d'utiliser des cartes : 􀂄Couchées 􀂄Conçues pour imprimantes jet d'encre 􀂄Pré-coupées ou perforées 􀂄Pré-imprimées ou multicolores 􀀕􀀢Si les cartes à imprimer sont déformées, aplanissez-les avant de les charger dans le bac 1/2. 4-10 Types de support 􀂄Pliée ou froissée Brillant Il est possible d'imprimer en continu sur du support brillant. Selon la qualité du support utilisé et votre environnement d'impression, il se peut toutefois que des problèmes d'alimentation papier surviennent. Si tel est le cas, arrêtez l'impression en continu et imprimez les planches une à une. Pour toute information concernant l'impression de supports brillants, consultez la documentation de votre application. Capacité Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle) 1 feuille de support brillant Bac 2 Jusqu'à 20 feuilles de support brillant, selon leur épaisseur. Orientation Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle) Face imprimable vers le bas Bac 2 Face imprimable vers le haut Choix pilote Brillant 1 (100–128 g/m2 ) Brillant 2 (129–158 g/m2 ) Poids 100–158 g/m2 Impression recto-verso Non supportée Types de support 4-11 Zone imprimable Sur tous les formats de support la zone imprimable se situe à 4,2 mm (0,165") maximum des quatre bords.AAAAZoneimprimablea = 4,2mm (0,165") Chaque format de support a sa propre zone imprimable, zone maximale dans laquelle l'impression peut se faire clairement et sans distorsion. Cette zone est limitée par deux contraintes matérielles (la taille physique du support et les marges requises par l'imprimante) et logicielles (espace mémoire disponible pour le tampon de cadres pleine page). La zone imprimable garantie pour tous les formats de support correspond à la taille de la page moins une marge de 4,2 mm (0,165") tout autour de la feuille. 􀀕􀀢Lors de l'impression en couleur sur un support de format Legal, les limitations suivantes s'appliquent. 􀁺La zone imprimable est de 347,2 mm (13,7") depuis le bord avant du papier. (Toutefois, il existe une zone non imprimable de jusqu'à 4,2 mm (0,165") à partir du bord avant.) 􀁺La marge inférieure est de 14,2 mm (0,56"). 4-12 Types de support Enveloppes Les enveloppes ne peuvent être imprimées que sur le recto (côté où l'adresse du destinataire est rédigée). Par ailleurs, l'impression au recto dans la zone chevauchant le rabat arrière ne peut pas être garantie. L'emplacement de cette zone diffère selon le type de l'enveloppe.a = 4,2 mm (0,165")Zone non-imprimableZone imprimable non garantieZone imprimable garantieRecto (imprimable)Recto (non-imprimable)AAAA 􀀕􀀢L'orientation d'impression des enveloppes est définie par l'application utilisée. 􀀕􀀢Lorsque vous chargez des enveloppes, saisissez-les par le milieu pour les insérer. Marges de page Les marges se définissent dans votre application. Certaines applications permettent de personnaliser des tailles et marges de page, d'autres n'offrent qu'un choix de tailles et marges standard. Avec un format standard, une perte partielle de l'image est possible (due aux contraintes de la zone imprimable). Si votre application permet de personnaliser le format de page, utiliser les dimensions indiquées pour la zone imprimable afin d'obtenir les meilleurs résultats. Chargement des supports 4-13 Chargement des supports Comment charger les supports ? Remarque Ne pas mélanger les supports de types et de formats différents au risque de provoquer des problèmes d'alimentation ou des problèmes machine Remarque Les bords du papier sont coupants et peuvent causer des blessures. Pour recharger du papier, retirez tout d'abord les feuilles restantes du magasin. Joignez-les à celles qui sont à charger, puis égalisez les bords du paquet et placez celui-ci dans le bac. Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle) Pour des détails sur les types et formats de supports qui peuvent être imprimés à partir du Bac 1, voir "Spécifications des supports" à la page 4-2. 􀀕􀀢Si du papier est chargé dans le Bac 1 lorsque la machine est mise sous tension, une erreur BOURRAGE SUPP. se produira. Veillez à enlever tout le papier du Bac 1 avant de mettre la machine sous tension. 􀀕􀀢Si du papier est chargé dans le Bac 1 lorsque la machine est en train d'imprimer, une erreur BOURRAGE SUPP. se produira. Attendez que l'impression soit terminée avant de charger du papier dans le Bac 1. Pour introduire une seconde feuille de papier, attendez que la première page soit entièrement éjectée, et que le voyant PRÊT s'allume en orange avant de charger du papier dans le Bac 1. 4-14 Chargement des supports Charger du Papier ordinaire 1Faites glisser les guides papier afin de les écarter. 2Chargez le papier dans le bac, face imprimable vers le bas. 3Faites glisser les guides papier contre les bords de la pile. Chargement des supports 4-15 Autres supports Lors du chargement d'un autre support que du papier standard, réglez le mode du support (Enveloppe, Étiquettes, Épais 1, Épais 2, Brillant 1, Brillant 2 ou Carte) dans le pilote pour une qualité d'impression optimale. Enveloppes 1Faites glisser les guides papier afin de les écarter. 2Chargez l'enveloppe dans le bac avec les rabats orientés vers le haut. 􀀕􀀢Avant le chargement, aplatir les enveloppes pour chasser l'air qui s'y trouve et faites en sorte que les rabats soient bien pliés, sinon les enveloppes peuvent se froisser ou provoquer un bourrage. 􀀕􀀢Le bac ne peut contenir qu'une enveloppe à la fois. 4-16 Chargement des supports 􀀕􀀢Les enveloppes avec rabat sur le bord long (Enveloppes C6, Monarch et DL) doivent être chargées avec les rabats orientés vers le haut. 􀀕􀀢Lorsque vous chargez des enveloppes, saisissez-les par le milieu pour les insérer. 3Faites glisser les guides papier contre les bords de l'enveloppe. 4Insérez le support aussi loin que possible et maintenez-le en place jusqu'à ce qu'il soit entraîné dans la machine. Chargement des supports 4-17 Chargement de planches d'étiquettes/de Cartes/de Supports Épais et Brillant 1Faites glisser les guide papier afin de les écarter. 2Chargez le support dans le bac avec la face imprimable orientée vers le bas. 3Faites glisser les guides papier contre les bords du support chargé. 4-18 Chargement des supports 4Insérez le support aussi loin que possible et maintenez-le en place jusqu'à ce qu'il soit entraîné dans la machine. Bac 2 Charger du Papier ordinaire 1Ouvrez le Bac 2. 2Appuyez sur le volet de compression du papier afin de le verrouiller. Chargement des supports 4-19 3Faites glisser les guides papier afin de les écarter. 4Chargez les feuilles dans le bac, face imprimable vers le haut. 􀀕􀀢Ne pas dépasser le repère ,. Ce bac ne peut contenir que 250 feuilles de papier standard (80 g/m2 [22 lb]) à la fois. 4-20 Chargement des supports 5Faites glisser les guides papier contre les bords de la pile. 6Refermez le Bac 2. 􀀕􀀢Le papier ne peut pas être prélevé dans le Bac 2 si le Bac 1 contient du papier. Pour utiliser le Bac 2, enlevez tout le papier du Bac 1. Chargement des supports 4-21 Chargement de planches d'étiquettes/de Cartes/de Supports Épais et Brillant 1Ouvrez le Bac 2. 2Appuyez sur le volet de compression du papier afin de le verrouiller. 3Faites glisser les guides papier afin de les écarter. 4-22 Chargement des supports 4Chargez les feuilles dans le bac, face imprimable vers le haut. 􀀕􀀢Le magasin ne peut contenir que 20 feuilles de support à la fois. 5Faites glisser les guides papier contre les bords de la pile. Chargement des supports 4-23 6Refermez le Bac 2. 􀀕􀀢Le papier ne peut pas être prélevé dans le Bac 2 si le Bac 1 contient du papier. Pour utiliser le Bac 2, enlevez tout le papier du Bac 1. 4-24 Impression recto-verso Impression recto-verso Sélectionnez du papier fortement opaque pour l'impression duplex (recto-verso). L'opacité se juge à la faculté du papier à cacher ce qui est écrit de l'autre côté de la page. Si le papier est de faible opacité (translucide), ce qui est imprimé sur un côté transparaîtra sur l'autre. Vérifiez les valeurs des marges dans votre application. Pour vérifier la qualité de l'opacité, imprimez seulement quelques feuilles. Remarque Seuls le papier standard et les supports épais, 60–210 g/m2 (16–55,9 lb bond) peuvent être automatiquement imprimés recto-verso. Voir "Spécifications des supports" à la page 4-2. L'impression recto-verso des enveloppes, papiers à en-tête, étiquettes, cartes postales ou supports brillants n'est pas prise en charge. Comment imprimer automatiquement en recto-verso ? L'impression en mode recto-verso ne peut se faire que sur magicolor 3730DN. Dans votre application, vérifiez la manière de définir les marges pour une impression recto-verso. Les options de position de reliure sont les suivantes. 13121 Si vous sélectionnez l'option "Bord court", les pages s'impriment de manière à être reliées au sommet et tournées de bas en haut. 111123 vous sélectionnez l'option "Bord long", les pages s'impriment de manière à être reliées sur le côté gauche et être tournées de droite à gauche. Impression recto-verso 4-25 En outre, si l'option "Miniatures" a été définie avec "Livret", une impression recto-verso automatique est exécutée. L'option "Livret" vous permet de définir les paramètres suivants : 1123 Si vous sélectionnez l'option "Reliure gauche", les pages imprimées peuvent être pliées pour former un livret relié à gauche. 33112 Si vous sélectionnez l'option "Reliure droite", les pages imprimées peuvent être pliées pour former un livret relié à droite. 1Chargez du papier standard dans le bac. 2Dans le pilote de l'imprimante, sélectionnez l'impression recto-verso (onglet Mise en page dans Windows). 3Cliquez sur OK. 􀀕􀀢En recto-verso automatique, la page verso s'imprime avant la page recto. 4-26 Bac de sortie Bac de sortie Tous les imprimés arrivent dans le bac de sortie au sommet de l'imprimante, face vers le bas. Ce bac contient 200 feuilles (A4/Letter) de 80 g/m2 (22 lb). 􀀕􀀢Ne laissez pas les imprimés s'accumuler dans le bac de sortie, car cela risque de provoquer des bourrages, de recourber excessivement le papier et de créer de l'électricité statique. 􀀕􀀢Si le papier se gondole et tombe hors du bac de sortie lors de l'impression de papier épais, déployez la butée papier à l'extrémité de l'extension du bac avant d'imprimer. Stockage des supports 4-27 Stockage des supports Comment stocker les supports ? 􀂄Rangez les supports sur une surface plane et régulière, en les laissant dans leur emballage d'origine jusqu'au moment de les utiliser. Des supports stockés depuis trop longtemps hors de leur emballage risquent d'être trop secs et de provoquer des bourrages. 􀂄Si les supports ont été déballés, les replacer dans leur emballage d'origine, et les stocker sur une surface plane, dans un local frais et à l'abri de la lumière. 􀂄Rangez-les en les préservant d'une trop grande humidité, des rayons du soleil, d'une chaleur excessive (supérieure à 35°C [95°F]) et de la poussière. 􀂄Évitez de les entreposer au contact d'autres objets ou de les ranger à la verticale. Avant d'utiliser des supports qui ont été stockés, effectuez un essai d'impression afin de vérifier la qualité du résultat. 4-28 Stockage des supports 5 Remplacement des consommables 5-2 Remplacement des consommables Remplacement des consommables Remarque La défaut d'observation des instructions décrites dans ce manuel peut entraîner l'annulation de votre garantie. Remarque Si un message d'erreur (REMETTRE TONER, FIN TRANSFERT, etc.) apparaît, imprimez la page de configuration, puis vérifiez l'état des autres consommables. Pour des détails sur les messages d'erreur, voir "Messages d'erreur" à la page 7-37. Pour imprimer la page de configuration, voir "Impression d'une page de configuration" à la page 7-2. A propos des cartouches de toner Votre imprimante utilise quatre cartouches de toner : noir, jaune, magenta et cyan. Manipulez les cartouches de toner avec précaution, en évitant de renverser du toner sur vous ou dans l'imprimante. 􀀕􀀢Lors du remplacement de cartouches de toner, n'installez que des cartouches neuves. En cas d'installation d'une cartouche de toner usagée, la quantité de toner risque de ne pas être clairement indiquée. 􀀕􀀢Ne pas ouvrir la cartouche de toner inutilement. Si du toner se répand, éviter de l'inhaler ou de le laisser entrer en contact avec la peau. 􀀕􀀢Si du toner entre en contact avec les mains, les laver immédiatement avec du savon et de l'eau. 􀀕􀀢En cas d'inhalation de toner, rechercher l'air frais et se gargariser abondamment à l'eau. En cas de toux ou autre manifestation, consulter un médecin. 􀀕􀀢Si du toner touche les yeux, les rincer immédiatement à l'eau pendant au moins 15 minutes. Si l'irritation persiste, consulter un médecin. 􀀕􀀢Si du toner pénètre dans la bouche, se rincer la bouche et boire ensuite 1 à 2 tasses d'eau. Si nécessaire, consulter un médecin. 􀀕􀀢Stocker les cartouches de toner hors de portée des enfants. Remplacement des consommables 5-3 􀀕􀀢Pour des informations de recyclage, visiter les sites suivants : États-Unis : printer.konicaminolta.com/products/recycle/index.asp Europe : printer.konicaminoltaeurope.com/cleanplanet/ Autres régions : printer.konicaminolta.com Remarque L'utilisation de cartouches de toner non originales peut entraîner des performances instables. De plus, tout dommage causé par l'utilisation de cartouches de toner non originales n'est pas couvert par la garantie, même si ledit dommage survient pendant la période de garantie. (Bien qu'il ne soit pas certain que le dommage résulte de l'utilisation de cartouches de toner non originales, nous recommandons vivement d'utiliser des cartouches de toner d'origine.) 5-4 Remplacement des consommables Pour remplacer une cartouche de toner, se reporter au tableau ci-dessous. Les cartouches KONICA MINOLTA indiquées sont homologuées pour une qualité et une vitesse optimales sur votre type d'imprimante. Le type de votre imprimante et les numéros de référence des cartouches figurent sur l'étiquette de renouvellement consommables (face interne du capot supérieur). Type Imprimante N° Référence Imprimante Type de cartouche de toner N° Référence Cartouche Toner AM A0VD 017 Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Noir (K) A0WG 01F Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Jaune (Y) A0WG 06F Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Magenta (M) A0WG 0CF Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Cyan (C) A0WG 0HF Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Noir (K) A0WG 02F Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Jaune (Y) A0WG 07F Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Magenta (M) A0WG 0DF Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Cyan (C) A0WG 0JF EU A0VD 027 Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Noir (K) A0WG 01H Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Jaune (Y) A0WG 06H Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Magenta (M) A0WG 0CH Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Cyan (C) A0WG 0HH Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Noir (K) A0WG 02H Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Jaune (Y) A0WG 07H Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Magenta (M) A0WG 0DH Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Cyan (C) A0WG 0JH AP A0VD 047 Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Noir (K) A0WG 01K Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Jaune (Y) A0WG 06K Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Magenta (M) A0WG 0CK Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Cyan (C) A0WG 0HK Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Noir (K) A0WG 02K Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Jaune (Y) A0WG 07K Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Magenta (M) A0WG 0DK Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Cyan (C) A0WG 0JK Remplacement des consommables 5-5 􀀕􀀢Pour une qualité et une vitesse optimales, n'utiliser que les cartouches de toner KONICA MINOLTA authentiques correspondant au TYPE de votre imprimante. GC A0VD 087 Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Noir (K) A0WG 01N Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Jaune (Y) A0WG 06N Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Magenta (M) A0WG 0CN Cartouche Toner Capacité standard - Cyan (C) A0WG 0HN Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Noir (K) A0WG 02N Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Jaune (Y) A0WG 07N Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Magenta (M) A0WG 0DN Cartouche Toner Haute capacité - Cyan (C) A0WG 0JN Type Imprimante N° Référence Imprimante Type de cartouche de toner N° Référence Cartouche Toner 5-6 Remplacement des consommables Stocker les cartouches de toner : 􀂄Dans leur emballage d'origine jusqu'au moment de les utiliser. 􀂄Dans un local sec et frais, à l'abri du soleil (et de la chaleur). La température de stockage ne doit pas dépasser 35°C (95°F) et l'humidité 85 % sans condensation. Lorsqu'une une cartouche de toner est déplacée d'un lieu frais en un lieu chaud et humide, une condensation, nuisible à la qualité d'impression, peut se former. Avant d'utiliser la cartouche, la laisser s'adapter au nouvel environnement pendant environ une heure. 􀂄Bien à plat. Ne pas renverser les cartouches ; le toner se trouvant à l'intérieur de la cartouche risque de se compacter ou d'être distribué de manière irrégulière. 􀂄A l'abri de l'air marin et de vapeurs corrosives (d'aérosols par exemple). Remplacement des consommables 5-7 Remplacement d'une cartouche de toner Remarque En remplaçant une cartouche, veiller à ne pas répandre du toner. Si cela se produit, essuyer aussitôt avec un chiffon doux et sec. Remarque Ne touchez pas la surface de la cartouche OPC car cela risque de nuire à la qualité d'impression. Le message TONER X BAS (où "X" représente la couleur du toner) apparaît lorsqu'une cartouche de toner devient vide. Suivez les instructions ci-après pour remplacer la cartouche de toner. 1Sur l'écran des messages, vérifiez la couleur de la cartouche de toner à remplacer. 5-8 Remplacement des consommables 2Ouvrez le capot avant de l'imprimante. 3Tirez le flacon de toner usagé vers le haut pour le déverrouiller. Remplacement des consommables 5-9 4Sortez doucement le flacon de toner usagé de l'imprimante en le tirant par ses poignées. 􀀕􀀢Ne pas renverser le flacon de toner usagé retiré au risque de répandre du toner usagé. 5Tout en appuyant sur la zone marquée "Push" sur la cartouche de toner à remplacer, sortir entièrement la cartouche de l'imprimante en la faisant coulisser. Dans la procédure décrite, nous procédons au remplacement de la cartouche de toner jaune (Y). Remarque Mettre la cartouche de toner au rebut conformément à la réglementation en vigueur. Ne pas l'incinérer. Pour plus de détails, voir "A propos des cartouches de toner" à la page 5-2. 6Vérifiez la couleur de la nouvelle cartouche à installer. 􀀕􀀢Pour éviter de renverser du toner, laisser la cartouche de toner dans son sachet d'emballage jusqu'à la fin de l'étape 5. 5-10 Remplacement des consommables 7Retirez la cartouche de son emballage. 8Prendre la cartouche de toner aux deux extrémités et la secouer deux fois de suite comme indiqué ci-contre. 􀀕􀀢Ne pas saisir le corps de la cartouche de toner car cela risque de l'abîmer et de nuire à la qualité d'impression. Remplacement des consommables 5-11 9Retirez la bande de protection du côté droit de la cartouche de toner. 10Retirez le cache de protection de la cartouche de toner. Enlever la bande d'emballage de la cartouche de toner. 11Retirez le papier de la cartouche de toner. Retirez le cache de protection de la cartouche de toner. 5-12 Remplacement des consommables 12Veillez à ce que la nouvelle cartouche de toner soit de la même couleur que celle du compartiment dans lequel elle va être placée, puis l'introduire dans l'imprimante. 􀀕􀀢Insérez entièrement la cartouche de toner. 13Vérifiez que la cartouche de toner est bien installée et retirer son ruban et son étrier de protection. 14Enfoncez le flacon de toner usagé jusqu'à ce qu'il se verrouille en place. Remplacement des consommables 5-13 15Refermez le capot avant. 􀀕􀀢Lors de la fermeture du capot avant, appuyez sur la zone du capot avec de petites projections. 5-14 Remplacement des consommables Remplacement du kit de toner usagé WB-P03 Lorsque le flacon de toner usagé est presque plein, le message BOUT. RÉCUP. PLEINE apparaît dans l'écran des messages. L'imprimante s'arrête et ne redémarre pas tant que ce réservoir n'est pas remplacé. 1Ouvrez le capot avant de l'imprimante. 2Tirez le flacon de toner usagé vers le haut pour le déverrouiller. Remplacement des consommables 5-15 3Sortez doucement le réceptacle de l'imprimante en le tirant par ses poignées. 􀀕􀀢Ne pas renverser le flacon de toner usagé retiré au risque de répandre du toner usagé. 4Sortez le nouveau réservoir de toner usagé de son emballage. Mettre le réservoir plein dans le sachet plastique fourni et le placer dans la boîte d'emballage. Remarque Mettre le flacon de toner usagé au rebut conformément à la réglementation en vigueur. Ne pas s'en débarrasser en le brûlant. 5Enfoncez le flacon de toner usagé jusqu'à ce qu'il se verrouille en place. 5-16 Remplacement des consommables 6Refermez le capot avant. 􀀕􀀢Lors de la fermeture du capot avant, appuyez sur la zone du capot avec de petites projections. 􀀕􀀢Si le flacon de toner usagé n'est pas intégralement inséré, le capot avant ne pourra pas se fermer. Remplacement des consommables 5-17 Remplacement du rouleau de transfert TF-P04 Lorsqu'il est temps de remplacer le rouleau de transfert, le message FIN ROUL. TRANS. apparaît. L'impression peut continuer en dépit de ce message, mais étant donné que la qualité d'impression est amoindrie, il est préférable de changer aussitôt le rouleau de transfert. 1Ouvrez le capot latéral droit. 2Tout en enfonçant les leviers vers l'intérieur, déplacer le presse-rouleau dans votre direction. 5-18 Remplacement des consommables 3Tout en continuant à appuyer sur les leviers, déplacez le rouleau de transfert. 4Préparez un nouveau rouleau de transfert. 5Tout en appuyant sur les leviers, insérez l'axe du rouleau de transfert dans les roulements. 6Poussez sur les leviers jusqu'à ce qu'ils s'enclenchent en position. Remplacement des consommables 5-19 7Refermez le capot latéral droit. 8Remettez le compteur à zéro dans le menu MENU MOTEUR/MOTEUR SERVICE/MOTEUR REMPLACER CONSOM/REMPLACER CONSOM ROULEAU TRANS. 5-20 Remplacement des consommables Remplacement de l'unité de courroie de transfert TF-P05 Quand il est temps de remplacer la courroie de transfert, le message FIN TRANSFERT apparaît. L'impression peut continuer en dépit de ce message, mais étant donné que la qualité d'impression en est significativement affectée, il est préférable de changer immédiatement la courroie de transfert. 1Éteignez l'imprimante et débranchez le cordon secteur et les câbles d'interface. 2Ouvrez le capot avant de l'imprimante. Remplacement des consommables 5-21 3Retirez toutes les cartouches toner et le flacon de toner usagé. 􀀕􀀢Pour plus de détails sur la dépose des cartouches toner ou du flacon de toner usagé, voir "Remplacement d'une cartouche de toner" à la page 5-7. 􀀕􀀢Couvrir la cartouche de toner retirée pour la protéger des rayons directs du soleil. 􀀕􀀢Ne pas pencher la cartouche de toner retirée au risque de répandre du toner. 􀀕􀀢Ne pas pencher le flacon de toner usagé sinon du toner usagé pourrait se répandre. 4Ouvrez le capot latéral droit. 5-22 Remplacement des consommables 5Insérez la feuille de protection dans l'unité dans le sens de la flèche jusqu'à la butée. 6Actionnez les guides vers le bas. 7Tout en maintenant les poignées, sortir avec précaution l'unité de courroie de transfert. 􀀕􀀢Veillez à maintenir la courroie de transfert de niveau ; sinon la courroie de transfert risque d'être rayée. Remplacement des consommables 5-23 8Préparez une nouvelle courroie de transfert. 􀀕􀀢Veillez à ne pas toucher la surface de la courroie. 􀀕􀀢Ne pas enlever pas ce levier bleu. 9Retirez les caches de protection de la courroie de transfert. 10Introduire la nouvelle courroie de transfert sur ses rails. 􀀕􀀢Insérez l'unité intégralement jusqu'à ce qu'elle s'enclenche en position. 􀀕􀀢Veillez à maintenir la courroie de transfert de niveau ; sinon la courroie de transfert risque d'être rayée. 5-24 Remplacement des consommables 11Actionnez les guides vers le haut. 12Tirez la feuille de protection. 13Refermez le capot latéral droit. Remplacement des consommables 5-25 14Installez toutes les cartouches toner et le flacon de toner usagé. 􀀕􀀢Pour plus de détails sur l'installation des cartouches toner ou du flacon de toner usagé, voir "Remplacement d'une cartouche de toner" à la page 5-7. 15Refermez le capot avant. 􀀕􀀢Lors de la fermeture du capot avant, appuyez sur la zone du capot avec de petites projections. 5-26 Remplacement des consommables 16Rebranchez le cordon secteur et allumez l'imprimante. 17Remettez le compteur à zéro dans le menu MENU MOTEUR/MOTEUR SERVICE/MOTEUR REMPLACER CONSOM/REMPLACER CONSOM COURROIE TRANS. Remplacement des consommables 5-27 Remplacement de l'unité de fixation FU-P02 Lorsqu'il est temps de remplacer l'unité de fixation, le message FIN UNITÉ FUSION apparaît. L'impression peut continuer en dépit de ce message, mais étant donné que la qualité d'impression en est significativement affectée, il est préférable de changer immédiatement l'unité de fixation. 1Éteignez l'imprimante. Remarque Certaines pièces à l'intérieur de la machine atteignent des températures très élevées pouvant provoquer de graves brûlures. Après avoir éteint l'imprimante, attendez environ 20 minutes et vérifiez que la section de l'unité de fixation est à température ambiante avant d'intervenir. 2Ouvrez le capot latéral droit. 3Ouvrez le capot d'éjection. 5-28 Remplacement des consommables 4Ouvrez le capot de l'unité de fixation. 5Tirez les 2 leviers vers le bas. 6Sortez l'unité de fixation. Remplacement des consommables 5-29 7Préparez une nouvelle unité de fixation. 􀀕􀀢Veillez à ne pas toucher la surface du rouleau. 8Actionnez vers le bas les 2 leviers d'une unité de fixation neuve. 9Insérez l'unité de fixation intégralement jusqu'à ce qu'elle s'enclenche en position. 5-30 Remplacement des consommables 10Relevez les deux leviers. 11Fermez le capot de l'unité de fixation. 12Refermez le capot d'éjection. Remplacement des consommables 5-31 13Refermez le capot latéral droit. 􀀕􀀢Si la porte du côté droit a du mal à se fermer, vérifiez que l'unité de fixation est bien insérée à fond. 14Remettez le compteur à zéro dans le menu MENU MOTEUR/MOTEUR SERVICE/MOTEUR REMPLACER CONSOM/REMPLACER CONSOM UNITE FIXATION. 5-32 Remplacement des consommables 6 Entretien de l'imprimante 6-2 Entretien de l'imprimante Entretien de l'imprimante ATTENTION Lisez attentivement toutes les étiquettes de sécurité (avertissements et consignes) et veillez à en respecter les instructions. Ces étiquettes se trouvent au dos des portes et à l'intérieur de l'imprimante. Prenez soin de votre imprimante pour préserver sa durée de vie. Tout dégât causé par négligence n'est pas couvert par la garantie. Nettoyez l'intérieur et l'extérieur de l'imprimante régulièrement pour éliminer poussières et résidus de papier amoindrissant ses performances et la qualité d'impression. Gardez les directives suivantes à l'esprit. AVERTISSEMENT ! Avant tout, débranchez le cordon secteur et tous les câbles d'interface. Veillez à ne pas répandre de l'eau ou du détergent dans l'imprimante, au risque de provoquer des dégâts ou de vous électrocuter. ATTENTION L'unité de fixation est brûlante. Elle met environ une heure pour refroidir, le capot latéral droit de l'imprimante étant en position ouverte. 􀂄En nettoyant l'intérieur de l'imprimante ou en supprimant des bourrages, veillez à ne pas toucher l'unité de fixation ou d'autres pièces brûlantes. 􀂄Ne posez aucun objet sur l'imprimante. 􀂄Pour nettoyer l'imprimante, utilisez un chiffon doux. 􀂄Ne vaporisez jamais de produit détergent directement sur l'imprimante car il risque de s'infiltrer par les grilles d'aération et d'endommager les circuits internes. 􀂄Pour le nettoyage, évitez d'utiliser des solutions abrasives ou corrosives ou contenant des solvants (alcool ou benzène). 􀂄Commencez toujours par appliquer le produit de nettoyage (détergent doux) sur une petite surface de l'imprimante pour en vérifier le résultat. 􀂄N'utilisez jamais des tampons abrasifs ou rugueux (paille de fer ou matière plastique). 􀂄Fermez toujours les portes doucement. N'exposez jamais l'imprimante à des vibrations excessives. Entretien de l'imprimante 6-3 􀂄Ne recouvrez jamais l'imprimante avec un capot de protection tout de suite après l'avoir utilisée. Éteindre la machine et attendre qu'elle refroidisse. 􀂄Ne laissez pas les capots de l'imprimante ouverts pendant une durée prolongée, plus particulièrement dans les locaux bien éclairés ; la lumière risque d'endommager les cartouches de toner. 􀂄N'ouvrez pas les capots de l'imprimante quand elle est fonctionnement. 􀂄Ne tapotez pas les bords de vos paquets de feuilles sur l'imprimante. 􀂄L'imprimante ne doit jamais être démontée ou lubrifiée. 􀂄Ne basculez pas l'imprimante. 􀂄Ne touchez pas aux contacts électriques, engrenages ou dispositifs laser, au risque d'endommager l'imprimante et d'affaiblir la qualité d'impression. 􀂄Ne laissez pas les imprimés s'accumuler excessivement dans le bac de sortie car ils peuvent provoquer des bourrages et se recourber excessivement. 􀂄Assurez-vous que deux personnes sont disponibles pour soulever l'imprimante en cas de déplacement.27 kg60 lbs Maintenez l'imprimante à l'horizontale pour éviter de renverser du toner. 􀂄Pour soulever l'imprimante, procédez toujours comme représenté sur l'illustration de droite. 􀂄Si la peau entre en contact avec du toner, laver à l'eau froide ou à l'aide d'un détergent doux. ATTENTION Si du toner entre en contact avec les yeux, se rincer les yeux immédiatement à l'eau froide et consulter un ophtalmologiste. 􀂄Avant de rebrancher l'imprimante, assurez-vous de bien remonter toutes les pièces retirées pour le nettoyage. 6-4 Nettoyage de l'imprimante Nettoyage de l'imprimante ATTENTION Avant de procéder au nettoyage, éteignez l'imprimante et débranchez le cordon secteur. Extérieur Panneau de contrôleGrille d'aérationExtérieur de l'imprimante Nettoyage de l'imprimante 6-5 Rouleaux d'entraînement papier L'accumulation de poussière de papier et autres débris sur les rouleaux d'entraînement peut provoquer des problèmes d'alimentation des feuilles. Nettoyage des rouleaux d'entraînement papier (Bac 2) 1Tirez le bac. 2Nettoyez les rouleaux de transfert papier en les essuyant avec un chiffon doux et sec. 6-6 Nettoyage de l'imprimante 3Fermez le bac. Nettoyage des lentilles laser de l'imprimante Cette imprimante est équipée de quatre lentilles laser. Nettoyez chacune d'elles comme indiqué ci-après. L'outil de nettoyage des lentilles laser doit être fixé à l'intérieur du Bac 2. 1Tirez le Bac 2. Nettoyage de l'imprimante 6-7 2Retirez le capot. 􀀕􀀢Comme le capot sera réutilisé plus tard, ne le ramenez pas dans sa position d'origine. 3Sortez l'outil de nettoyage du Bac 2. 4Fermez le bac 2. 6-8 Nettoyage de l'imprimante 5Ouvrez le capot avant de l'imprimante. 6Déposez le flacon de toner usagé et la cartouche de toner de la couleur de la lentille laser à nettoyer. 􀀕􀀢Pour plus de détails sur la dépose d'une cartouche toner ou du flacon de toner usagé, voir "Remplacement d'une cartouche de toner" à la page 5-7. 􀀕􀀢Ne renversez pas la cartouche de toner retirée au risque de répandre du toner. Nettoyage de l'imprimante 6-9 􀀕􀀢Ne renversez pas le flacon de toner usagé sinon du toner usagé pourrait se répandre. 7Fixez le capot sur la cartouche de toner enlevée. 8Insérez l'outil de nettoyage des lentilles laser dans l'ouverture de l'unité image, sortez-le et répétez ce mouvement d'avant en arrière 2 ou 3 fois. 9Installez toutes les cartouches toner et le flacon de toner usagé. 􀀕􀀢Pour plus de détails sur l'installation d'une cartouche toner ou du flacon de toner usagé, voir "Remplacement d'une cartouche de toner" à la page 5-7. 6-10 Nettoyage de l'imprimante 10Refermez le capot avant. 􀀕􀀢Lors de la fermeture du capot avant, appuyez sur la zone du capot qui présente de petites projections. 11Tirez le Bac 2. 12Remettez l'outil de nettoyage des lentilles laser sur son support à l'intérieur du bac 2. Nettoyage de l'imprimante 6-11 13Fermez le capot. 14Fermez le bac 2. 15Effectuez ce nettoyage pour chaque lentille laser. 􀀕􀀢La barrette de nettoyage pour lentille laser est fournie avec l'imprimante. Rangez cet outil en lieu sûr afin de ne pas l'égarer. 6-12 Nettoyage de l'imprimante 7 Résolution de problèmes 7-2 Introduction Introduction Ce chapitre vous fournit des informations utiles pour résoudre des problèmes d'impression éventuels, ou pour le moins, vous indique où vous adresser pour obtenir de l'aide. Impression de la page de configuration page 7-2 Prévention des bourrages papier page 7-3 Description du chemin papier page 7-4 Suppression des bourrages papier page 7-5 Résolution de problèmes de bourrage page 7-21 Résolution d'autres problèmes page 7-25 Résolution de problèmes de qualité page 7-30 Messages d'état, d'erreur et de maintenance page 7-36 Impression d'une page de configuration Imprimez une page de configuration pour vérifier si l'imprimante fonctionne correctement ou afficher ses paramètres de configuration. Appuyez (1 fois) sur la touche Jusqu'à ce que l'écran affiche : PRÊT MENU PAGES SPÉCIALES IMPRESSION PAGE CONFIG PAGE CONFIG PRINT? La page de configuration s'imprime et l'écran des messages affiche à nouveau PRÊT. Prévention des bourrages papier 7-3 Prévention des bourrages papier S'assurer que... Le support répond aux spécifications de l'imprimante. Le support repose bien à plat dans le bac, notamment le bord avant. L'imprimante est installée sur une surface plane et robuste. Le support est stocké dans un endroit sec à l'abri de toute humidité. Vous ajustez toujours les guides papier après avoir chargé le support (un guide mal ajusté peut être à l'origine d'une mauvaise qualité d'impression, de bourrages, voire de dégât matériel). Le papier est chargé avec la face imprimable orientée vers le haut (le côté imprimable des feuilles est en général indiqué sur l'emballage du papier). Éviter... D'utiliser un support plié, froissé ou trop recourbé. De laisser des doubles feuilles s'alimenter dans l'imprimante (retirer le papier et aérer les feuilles pour supprimer toute adhérence). De charger différents types, formats, grammages de support à la fois dans le même magasin. De surcharger les bacs d'alimentation papier. De laisser les imprimés s'accumuler dans le bac de sortie (ce bac peut contenir 200 feuilles—un bourrage peut survenir si le remplissage du bac dépasse cette capacité). 7-4 Description du chemin papier Description du chemin papier Le schéma ci-dessous indique le chemin emprunté par le papier dans l'imprimante et facilite la localisation des bourrages.32185476 1Cartouche de toner 6Bac 2 2Bac de sortie 7Unité de tête d'impression 3Unité de fixation FU-P02 8Unité de courroie de transfert TF-P05 4Unité Recto-verso 5Bac 1 (Alimentation manuelle) Suppression des bourrages papier 7-5 Suppression des bourrages papier Pour éviter tout dégât, retirer toujours les feuilles à l'origine du bourrage doucement, sans les déchirer. Tout morceau de papier restant dans l'imprimante, quelle que soit sa taille, peut obstruer le chemin papier et provoquer d'autres bourrages. Ne jamais recharger des feuilles retirées d'un bourrage. Remarque Avant son passage dans l'unité de fixation, l'image n'est pas 'fixée' sur le support. En retirant les feuilles d'un bourrage, il convient par conséquent de ne pas toucher la face imprimée, le toner pourrait salir les mains de l'opérateur. Veillez aussi à ne pas répandre du toner dans l'imprimante. ATTENTION Le toner non fixé peut salir vos mains, vos vêtements ou tout ce qu'il touche. Sur les vêtements, il suffit d'épousseter légèrement la poudre, et de nettoyer toute trace résiduelle à l'aide d'eau froide, et non chaude. Sur la peau, il se lave facilement à l'eau froide ou avec un savon doux. ATTENTION Si du toner entre en contact avec les yeux, se rincer les yeux immédiatement à l'eau froide et consulter un ophtalmologiste. Après avoir supprimé un bourrage, si le message de bourrage reste affiché sur l'écran du panneau de commande, ouvrez et refermez les capots de l'imprimante. Normalement, cela efface le message. 7-6 Suppression des bourrages papier Messages de bourrage et procédures correctives Message de bourrage... Voir procédure... BOURRAGE SUPP. BAC 2 page 7-7 BOURRAGE SUPP. RECTO/VERSO INF. page 7-11 BOURRAGE SUPP. RECTO/VERSO SUP. page 7-11 BOURRAGE SUPP. UNITÉ FUSION page 7-12 BOURRAGE SUPP. SORTIE page 7-12 BOURRAGE SUPP. BAC 1 page 7-18 BOURRAGE SUPP. ROUL. TRANSFERT page 7-18 BOURRAGE SUPP. NON DÉFINI page 7-7, page 7-11, page 7-12, page 7-18 Suppression des bourrages papier 7-7 Suppression d'un bourrage dans le Bac 2 1Ouvrez le capot latéral droit. 2Retirez doucement la feuille coincée. 7-8 Suppression des bourrages papier ATTENTION La zone autour de l'unité de fixation peut atteindre une température très élevée. Ne toucher aucune autre pièce que celles indiquées il y a risque de brûlure. En cas de brûlure, rafraîchir immédiatement la peau à l'eau froide et rechercher des soins médicaux. Remarque Tout contact avec la surface de la courroie de transfert image ou du rouleau de transfert image risque de nuire à la qualité d'impression. Par conséquent, veillez à ne pas toucher ces composants. Suppression des bourrages papier 7-9 3Refermez le capot latéral droit. 4Ouvrez le Bac 2 et retirez toutes les feuilles chargées dans ce magasin. 5Ventilez les feuilles et égaliser les bords du paquet. 7-10 Suppression des bourrages papier 6Rechargez le support face vers le haut dans le Bac 2. 􀀕􀀢S'assurer qu'il repose bien à plat. 􀀕􀀢Ne pas charger du papier au-delà du repère ,. 7Refermez le Bac 2. Suppression des bourrages papier 7-11 Suppression d'un bourrage dans l'unité Recto-verso 1Soulevez le loquet du capot latéral droit afin de l'ouvrir. 2Retirez doucement la feuille coincée. 3Refermez le capot latéral droit. 7-12 Suppression des bourrages papier Suppression d'un bourrage dans l'unité de fixation 1Ouvrez le capot latéral droit. 2Ouvrez le capot d'éjection. 3Relevez les 2 leviers. Suppression des bourrages papier 7-13 4Ouvrez le capot de l'unité de fixation. 5Retirez doucement la feuille coincée. 7-14 Suppression des bourrages papier 􀀕􀀢S'il n'est pas possible de dégager la feuille coincée en la tirant par le bas, tirez-la par le dessus de l'unité de fixation. Suppression des bourrages papier 7-15 ATTENTION La zone autour de l'unité de fixation peut atteindre une température très élevée. Ne toucher aucune autre pièce que celles indiquées il y a risque de brûlure. En cas de brûlure, rafraîchir immédiatement la peau à l'eau froide et rechercher des soins médicaux. Remarque Tout contact avec la surface de la courroie de transfert image ou du rouleau de transfert image risque de nuire à la qualité d'impression. Par conséquent, veillez à ne pas toucher ces composants. 7-16 Suppression des bourrages papier 6Fermez le capot de l'unité de fixation. 7Poussez les 2 leviers vers le bas. 8Refermez le capot d'éjection. Suppression des bourrages papier 7-17 9Refermez le capot latéral droit. 7-18 Suppression des bourrages papier Suppression d'un bourrage dans le Bac 1 (alimentation manuelle) et le Rouleau de transfert 􀀕􀀢Si du papier est chargé dans le Bac 1 lorsque la machine est mise sous tension, une erreur BOURRAGE SUPP. se produira. Veillez à enlever tout le papier du Bac 1 avant de mettre la machine sous tension. 􀀕􀀢Si du papier est chargé dans le Bac 1 lorsque la machine est en train d'imprimer, une erreur BOURRAGE SUPP. se produira. Attendez que l'impression soit terminée avant de charger du papier dans le Bac 1. Pour introduire une seconde feuille de papier, attendez que la première page soit entièrement éjectée, et que le voyant PRÊT s'allume en orange avant de charger du papier dans le Bac 1. 1Soulevez le loquet du capot latéral droit afin de l'ouvrir. 2Retirez doucement la feuille coincée. Suppression des bourrages papier 7-19 ATTENTION La zone autour de l'unité de fixation peut atteindre une température très élevée. Ne toucher aucune autre pièce que celles indiquées il y a risque de brûlure. En cas de brûlure, rafraîchir immédiatement la peau à l'eau froide et rechercher des soins médicaux. Remarque Tout contact avec la surface de la courroie de transfert image ou du rouleau de transfert image risque de nuire à la qualité d'impression. Par conséquent, veillez à ne pas toucher ces composants. 7-20 Suppression des bourrages papier 3Refermez le capot latéral droit. Résolution de problèmes de bourrage 7-21 Résolution de problèmes de bourrage 􀀕􀀢Des bourrages fréquents dans une zone particulière signifient que cette zone nécessite d'être révisée, réparée ou nettoyée. Ils peuvent aussi se produire si vous utilisez un support non accepté. Symptôme Origine Solution Plusieurs feuilles s'alimentent en même temps dans l'imprimante. Les bords avant des feuilles ne sont pas alignés. Retirez les feuilles du magasin, aligner leurs bords avant et les replacer dans le bac. Le support utilisé est humide. Retirez le support humide chargé et le remplacer par un support sec. Le message de bourrage reste affiché. Le capot latéral droit doit être ouvert et refermé pour réinitialiser l'imprimante. Ouvrez puis refermez capot latéral droit de l'imprimante. Une ou plusieurs feuilles sont restées coincées dans l'imprimante. Vérifiez à nouveau le chemin papier pour vous assurer d'avoir retiré toutes les feuilles coincées. Du papier était chargé dans le Bac 1 lorsque la machine a été mise sous tension ou le capot avant a été ouvert puis refermé. Enlevez tout le papier du Bac 1, puis ouvrez le capot de droite pour vérifier qu'il n'y a pas de papier coincé. 7-22 Résolution de problèmes de bourrage Bourrages dans l'unité recto-verso. Le support utilisé n'est pas pris en charge (format, épaisseur, type, etc., non accepté). N'utiliser que des supports homologués KONICA MINOLTA. Voir "Spécifications des supports" à la page 4-2. Seuls le papier standard et les supports épais, 60–210 g/m2 (16–55,9 lb) peuvent être automatiquement imprimés recto-verso. Voir "Spécifications des supports" à la page 4-2. Assurez-vous de ne pas avoir les types de support dans le Bac 1 ou 2. N'imprimez pas en recto-verso (2 faces) des enveloppes, des étiquettes, du papier à en-tête, des cartes postales ou du papier brillant. Des feuilles peuvent être restées coincées. Vérifiez à nouveau le chemin papier dans l'unité recto-verso et retirez toute feuille coincée pouvant encore s'y trouver. Symptôme Origine Solution Résolution de problèmes de bourrage 7-23 Les feuilles se coincent dans l'imprimante. Du papier a été chargé dans le Bac 1 pendant que la machine était en train d'imprimer. Si du papier est chargé dans le Bac 1 lorsque la machine est en train d'imprimer, une erreur BOURRAGE SUPP. se produira. Enlevez tout le papier du Bac 1, puis ouvrez le capot de droite pour vérifier qu'il n'y a pas de papier coincé. Avant de charger la seconde feuille de papier dans le Bac 1, attendez que la première page soit entièrement éjectée et que le voyant PRÊT se soit allumé en orange. Le support n'est pas correctement placé dans le bac. Retirez les feuilles coincées et rechargez le support dans le bac comme il convient. Le magasin contient des feuilles dépassant la limite de remplissage. Retirez les feuilles excédentaires et rechargez la quantité de feuilles appropriée. Les guides papier ne sont pas bien ajustés au format utilisé. Ajustez ces guides dans le bac papier en fonction du format utilisé. Le support chargé est gondolé ou froissé. Retirez les feuilles, les lisser puis les recharger. Si les bourrages persistent, ne pas utiliser ce support. Le support utilisé est humide. Retirez le support humide chargé et le remplacer par un support sec. Les enveloppes se chargent dans le Bac 2. Les enveloppes se chargent exclusivement dans le Bac 1. La planche d'étiquettes recommandée est orientée dans le mauvais sens dans le Bac 1 ou 2. Chargez les planches d'étiquettes conformément aux instructions du fabricant. La face imprimable des enveloppes n'est pas tournée du bon côté dans le Bac 1. Chargez les enveloppes dans le Bac 1 avec les rabats orientés vers le haut. Symptôme Origine Solution 7-24 Résolution de problèmes de bourrage Le support utilisé n'est pas pris en charge (format, épaisseur, type, etc., non accepté). N'utiliser que des supports homologués KONICA MINOLTA. Voir "Spécifications des supports" à la page 4-2. Les rouleaux d'entraînement papier doivent être nettoyés. Nettoyez les rouleaux d'entraînement papier. Pour plus de détails, voir "Rouleaux d'entraînement papier" à la page 6-5. Symptôme Origine Solution Résolution d'autres problèmes 7-25 Résolution d'autres problèmes 􀀕􀀢Pour obtenir des informations sur les consommables, accédez au site www.q-shop.com. Symptôme Origine Solution L'imprimante ne s'allume pas. Le cordon secteur n'est pas bien branché sur la prise de courant. Éteignez l'imprimante, vérifiez le branchement du cordon secteur, et rallumez l'imprimante. La prise utilisée pour l'imprimante est défectueuse. Branchez un autre appareil électrique sur cette prise pour vérifier son fonctionnement. L'interrupteur Marche/Arrêt n'est pas sur la position (Marche). Basculez l'interrupteur sur la position O (Arrêt), puis sur la position I (Marche). La prise utilisée pour l'imprimante a une tension ou fréquence non conforme aux spécifications. Utilisez une prise de courant conforme aux spécifications mentionnées en Annexe A, "Spécifications techniques". L'imprimante n'imprime pas les données qui lui sont envoyées. Un message d'erreur est affiché sur l'écran du panneau de commande. Procédez selon les indications du message affiché. Le travail est annulé car des paramètres d'authentification utilisateur ou de suivi de compte sont définis. Cliquez sur le bouton Authentification Utilisateur/Suivi de compte dans le pilote de l'imprimante, et saisissez les informations requises avant d'imprimer. Le message TONER BAS s'affiche beaucoup plus tôt que prévu. Une cartouche de toner est défectueuse. Retirez les cartouches et vérifiez qu’elles ne sont pas endommagées. Remplacez celles qui sont endommagées . Vous imprimez des pages avec un fort taux de couverture en toner. Reportez-vous aux spécifications fournies en Annexe A. 7-26 Résolution d'autres problèmes Impossible d'imprimer la page de configuration. Le magasin papier est vide. Vérifiez que le Bac 1 (au moins) est chargé, bien en place et fermé. Il y a un bourrage. Localisez et supprimez ce bourrage. L'impression est trop lente. L'imprimante est réglée sur un mode d'impression lente (par exemple supports épais). L'impression sur support spécial est plus lente. Si du papier standard est utilisé, s'assurer que le type de support approprié est défini dans le pilote. Le mode économie d'énergie est activé. Dans ce mode, le démarrage de l'impression prend quelque temps. Si vous ne désirez pas utiliser ce mode, contactez l'Assistance Technique. Le travail d'impression est très complexe. Patienter. Aucune action requise. Une cartouche de toner destinée à une autre région ou non homologuée est installée (T/C X INCORRECT est affiché sur l'écran des messages). Installez la cartouche de toner KONICA MINOLTA homologuée pour votre type d'imprimante. Des pages blanches sont produites en cours d'impression. Une ou plusieurs cartouches de toner sont vides ou défectueuses. Vérifiez les cartouches de toner. L'image ne s'imprime pas si les cartouches sont vides. Le support utilisé ne convient pas. Vérifiez que le type de support sélectionné dans le pilote est le même que celui chargé dans le bac. La machine ne passe pas en mode Écon. énergie. Du papier a été chargé dans le Bac 1. Enlevez tout le papier du Bac 1. Symptôme Origine Solution Résolution d'autres problèmes 7-27 Impossible de charger du papier dans le Bac 1. La machine est passée en mode Écon. énergie. Lorsque la machine est disponible, chargez du papier dans le Bac 1. Les pages ne s'impriment pas toutes. Câble d'interface inapproprié ou imprimante non configurée pour le câble et le port utilisés. Vérifiez le câble d'interface. La touche Cancel a été activée. Vérifiez que la touche Cancel n'a pas été activée lors de votre impression. Le magasin papier est vide. Vérifiez que les bacs contiennent du support, et sont bien en place. Vous imprimez avec un fichier calque créé par un pilote incompatible. Imprimez le fichier calque à l'aide d'un pilote approprié. La machine a tenté de prélever du papier dans le Bac 2 alors que du papier était chargé dans le Bac 1. Le papier ne peut pas être prélevé dans le Bac 2 si le Bac 1 contient du papier. Pour utiliser le Bac 2, enlevez tout le papier du Bac 1. L'imprimante se réinitialise ou s'éteint souvent. Le cordon secteur n'est pas bien branché sur la prise de courant. Éteignez l'imprimante, vérifiez le branchement du cordon secteur, et rallumez l'imprimante. Une erreur système est survenue. Communiquez l'erreur à votre Assistance technique. Symptôme Origine Solution 7-28 Résolution d'autres problèmes Vous rencontrez des problèmes d'impression duplex (recto-verso). Le support n'est pas approprié ou les paramètres ne sont pas correctement définis. S'assurer d'imprimer sur le support approprié. 􀂄Voir "Spécifications des supports" à la page 4-2. 􀂄N'imprimez pas en recto-verso (2 faces) des enveloppes, des étiquettes, du papier à en-tête, des cartes postales ou du papier brillant. 􀂄Assurez-vous de ne pas avoir les types de support dans le Bac 1 ou 2. Vérifiez que votre document comporte plus d'une page. Dans le pilote Windows (Mise en page/Type d'impression), sélectionnez "Recto-verso". Pour une impression de miniatures sur pages recto-verso, activez "Assembler" sur l'onglet Paramètres de base du pilote. Désactivez la fonction Assembler dans votre application. L'impression de miniatures en copies multiples ne se fait pas correctement. La fonction Assembler est activée à la fois dans le pilote de l'imprimante et dans votre application. Pour une impression de miniatures en copies multiples, activez "Assembler" sur l'onglet Paramètres de base du pilote. Désactivez la fonction Assembler dans votre application. L'imprimante émet un bruit inhabituel. Un objet se trouve coincé dans l'imprimante. Éteignez l'imprimante et retirez l'objet. En cas d'échec, contactez l'Assistance technique. Symptôme Origine Solution Résolution d'autres problèmes 7-29 Impossible d'accéder à l'utilitaire Web. Le mot de passe Administrateur pour PageScope Web Connection est incorrect. Le mot de passe Administrateur pour PageScope Web Connection doit comporter 0 caractères minimum et 16 caractères maximum. Pour des détails sur le mot de passe Administrateur de PageScope Web Connection, consultez le Guide de référence sur le CD/DVD Pilote et Utilitaire Imprimante. L'imprimé est froissé. Le support est humide ou a été mouillé. Retirez le support humide chargé et le remplacer par un support sec. Une défectuosité existe peut-être au niveau du rouleau de transfert ou de l'unité de fixation. Vérifiez l'état de ces pièces. Si nécessaire, contacter votre Assistance technique avec l'information d'erreur. Le support utilisé n'est pas pris en charge (format, épaisseur, type, etc., non accepté). N'utiliser que des supports homologués KONICA MINOLTA. Voir "Spécifications des supports" à la page 4-2. Les pages imprimées n'ont pas été chargées de manière uniforme. Le support chargé est très recourbé. Retirez le support chargé dans le bac, retournez-le et rechargez-le. Les guides papier dans le bac d'alimentation sont trop éloignés des bords de la pile de feuilles chargées. Plaquez les guides papier contre les bords de la pile de feuilles chargées dans le bac d'alimentation. Symptôme Origine Solution 7-30 Résolution de problèmes de qualité Résolution de problèmes de qualité Symptôme Origine Solution Rien ne s'imprime ou des points blancs apparaissent sur la page imprimée. Une ou plusieurs cartouches toner sont peut-être défectueuses. Retirez la cartouche et vérifiez qu'elle n'est pas endommagée. Remplacez celles qui sont endommagées. Le support utilisé est humide. Vérifiez l'humidité ambiante dans le local de stockage des supports. Retirez le support humide chargé et le remplacer par un support sec. Le type de support défini dans le pilote ne correspond pas à celui qui est chargé dans le bac. Chargez le support approprié dans le bac. La prise de courant ne répond pas aux spécifications de l'imprimante. Utilisez une prise de courant répondant aux spécifications de l'imprimante. Plusieurs feuilles s'alimentent en même temps dans l'imprimante. Retirez les feuilles du bac et vérifiez si elles adhèrent les unes aux autres. Aérer le papier standard ou tout autre support utilisé et le replacer dans le bac. Le support n'est pas correctement chargé dans le(s) bac(s). Retirez le paquet de feuilles chargées dans le bac et alignez-en les bords. Rechargez-le dans le bac et réajustez les guides papier. Impression tout en noir ou autre couleur. Une ou plusieurs cartouches toner sont peut-être défectueuses. Retirez les cartouches et vérifiez qu'elles ne sont pas endommagées. Remplacez celles qui sont endommagées. Résolution de problèmes de qualité 7-31 L'image est trop pâle ; sa densité est faible. Les lentilles laser doivent être nettoyées. Nettoyez les lentilles laser. Le support utilisé est humide. Retirez le support humide chargé et le remplacer par un support sec. L'une des cartouches de toner est presque vide. Remplacer la cartouche de toner. Une ou plusieurs cartouches toner sont peut-être défectueuses. Retirez les cartouches et vérifiez qu'elles ne sont pas endommagées. Remplacez celles qui sont endommagées. Le type de support n'est pas bien défini. Pour imprimer des enveloppes, des étiquettes, du papier à en-tête, des cartes postales, du papier épais ou brillant, spécifiez le type de support approprié dans le pilote d'imprimante. L'imprimé est trop foncé. Une ou plusieurs cartouches toner sont peut-être défectueuses. Retirez les cartouches et vérifiez qu’elles ne sont pas endommagées. Remplacez celles qui sont endommagées . L'image est floue; le fond est légèrement maculé ; l'imprimé manque de brillant. Une ou plusieurs cartouches toner sont peut-être défectueuses. Retirez les cartouches et vérifiez qu’elles ne sont pas endommagées. Remplacez celles qui sont endommagées . Symptôme Origine Solution 7-32 Résolution de problèmes de qualité L'impression ou la densité couleur n'est pas homogène. Une ou plusieurs cartouches de toner sont défectueuses ou presque vides. Retirez les cartouches et vérifiez qu’elles ne sont pas endommagées. Remplacez celles qui sont endommagées . L'imprimante ne repose pas sur une surface plane. Placez l'imprimante sur une surface robuste et plane. L'impression n'est pas régulière ou l'image est mouchetée. Le support utilisé est humide. Vérifiez l'humidité ambiante dans le local de stockage des supports. Retirez le support humide chargé et le remplacer par un support sec. Le support utilisé n'est pas pris en charge (format, épaisseur, type, etc., non accepté). N'utiliser que des supports homologués KONICA MINOLTA. Voir "Spécifications des supports" à la page 4-2. Une ou plusieurs cartouches toner sont peut-être défectueuses. Retirez les cartouches de toner et vérifiez qu'elles ne sont pas endommagées. Remplacez celles qui sont endommagées. L'image n'est pas assez fixée ou se gomme facilement. Le support utilisé est humide. Retirez le support humide chargé et le remplacer par un support sec. Le support utilisé n'est pas pris en charge (format, épaisseur, type, etc., non accepté). N'utiliser que des supports homologués KONICA MINOLTA. Voir "Spécifications des supports" à la page 4-2. Le type de support n'est pas bien défini. Pour imprimer des enveloppes, des étiquettes, du papier à en-tête, des cartes postales, du papier épais ou brillant, spécifiez le type de support approprié dans le pilote d'imprimante. Symptôme Origine Solution Résolution de problèmes de qualité 7-33 Il y a des traces de toner ou des parasites sur l'imprimé. Une ou plusieurs cartouches de toner sont peut-être défectueuses ou incorrectement installées. Retirez les cartouches et vérifiez qu’elles ne sont pas endommagées. Remplacez celles qui sont endommagées . Il y a des traces de toner sur le verso de la page (qu'il soit ou non imprimé). Il y a du toner dans le chemin papier. Imprimer plusieurs pages blanches en série pour enlever le toner. Une ou plusieurs cartouches toner sont peut-être défectueuses. Retirez les cartouches et vérifiez qu'elles ne sont pas endommagées. Remplacez celles qui sont endommagées. Des motifs anormaux (blancs, noirs ou en couleur) se répètent à intervalles réguliers. Les lentilles laser doivent être nettoyées. Nettoyez les lentilles laser. Une cartouche de toner est peut-être défectueuse. Retirez les cartouches toner qui sont à l'origine de l'image anormal. Remplacez la cartouche par une cartouche neuve. Symptôme Origine Solution 7-34 Résolution de problèmes de qualité Défauts d'image. Les lentilles laser doivent être nettoyées. Nettoyez les lentilles laser. Une cartouche de toner fuit. Retirez les cartouches et vérifiez qu’elles ne sont pas endommagées. Remplacez celles qui sont endommagées . Une cartouche de toner est peut-être défectueuse. Retirez les cartouches toner qui sont à l'origine de l'image anormal. Remplacez la cartouche par une cartouche neuve. Des lignes ou bandes latérales apparaissent sur l'image. L'imprimante ne repose pas sur une surface plane. Placez l'imprimante sur une surface robuste et plane. Il y a du toner dans le chemin papier. Imprimer plusieurs pages blanches à la suite pour enlever le toner. Une ou plusieurs cartouches toner sont peut-être défectueuses. Retirez les cartouches et vérifiez qu’elles ne sont pas endommagées. Remplacez celles qui sont endommagées . Restitution des couleurs aberrante. Une ou plusieurs cartouches toner sont peut-être défectueuses. Retirez les cartouches toner et vérifiez que le toner est également réparti sur chaque rouleau de cartouche, et réinstaller les cartouches toner. Une ou plusieurs cartouches de toner sont vides ou presque vides. Vérifiez si le message TONER X BAS ou REMETTRE TONER X apparaît sur le panneau de commande. Si nécessaire, remplacer la cartouche de la couleur indiquée. Registration couleurs incorrecte : les couleurs se fondent et varient d'une page à l'autre. Une ou plusieurs cartouches toner sont peut-être défectueuses. Retirez les cartouches et vérifiez qu’elles ne sont pas endommagées. Remplacez celles qui sont endommagées . Le support utilisé est humide. Retirez le support humide chargé et le remplacer par un support sec. Symptôme Origine Solution Résolution de problèmes de qualité 7-35 Si le problème persiste, même après avoir suivi toutes les instructions ci-dessus, contacter votre Assistance technique en lui communiquant l'information d'erreur. Pour savoir qui contacter, consultez la fiche Besoin d'aide. La couleur reproduite est médiocre ou très faible en densité. Une ou plusieurs cartouches toner sont peut-être défectueuses. Retirez les cartouches et vérifiez qu’elles ne sont pas endommagées. Remplacez celles qui sont endommagées . Symptôme Origine Solution 7-36 Messages d'état, d'erreur et de maintenance Messages d'état, d'erreur et de maintenance Les messages d'état, d'erreur et de service s'affichent sur l'écran des messages du panneau de commande et vous fournissent des indications sur l'état de fonctionnement de l'imprimante et vous aident à identifier certains problèmes. Ils s'effacent dès que la condition ayant provoqué leur affichage est modifiée. Messages d'état standard Message : Signification : Action : CALIBRAGE Après remplacement d'une cartouche de toner ou après le redémarrage de l'imprimante pour cause de variations ambiantes, l'imprimante s'interrompt automatiquement pour effectuer un cycle AIDC (Contrôle Auto-Densité Image). Ce processus assure un fonctionnement sûr et fiable de l'imprimante et une qualité d'impression optimale. Aucune action requise. ANNULATION TÂCHE Le travail est en cours d'annulation. ÉCON. ÉNERGIE Le mode Économie d'énergie est activé afin de réduire la consommation électrique de l'imprimante durant ses périodes d'inactivité. Lors de la réception d'un travail d'impression, l'imprimante repasse en mode d'alimentation normal. FW CONTRÔLEUR MISE À JOUR Mise à jour du firmware en cours. FW MOTEUR MISE À JOUR FW CONTRÔLEUR TÉLÉCHARGEMENT Le firmware est en cours de téléchargement. FW MOTEUR TÉLÉCHARGEMENT Messages d'état, d'erreur et de maintenance 7-37 Messages d'erreur FW CONTRÔLEUR TÉLÉC. COMPLET Le téléchargement du firmware est achevé. Aucune action requise. FW MOTEUR TÉLÉC. COMPLET IMPRESSION L'imprimante est en train d'imprimer. TRAITEMENT L'imprimante traite des données. PRÊT L'imprimante est allumée et prête à recevoir des données. REDÉMARRER L'imprimante est en train de redémarrer. PRÉCHAUF. L'imprimante effectue son cycle de préchauffage. ATTENDRE Il y a eu une interruption d'au moins une seconde pendant le traitement des données. Message : Signification : Action : VIE FUS. COURTE Le remplacement du fixateur est imminent. Prévoyez le remplacement du fixateur. FIN UNITÉ FUSION L'unité de fixation est arrivée en fin de vie. Remplacez l'unité de fixation et réinitialisez le compteur dans le menu MOTEUR SERVICE / MOTEUR REMPLACER CONSOM / REMPLACER CONSOM UNITE FIXATION. 􀀕􀀢L'impression peut se poursuivre mais le résultat de l'impression n'est pas garanti. T/C X INCORRECT La cartouche de toner X est de type non homologué. Installez une cartouche de toner KONICA MINOLTA de type adéquat (AM, EU, AP ou GC). Voir page 5-7. Message : Signification : Action : 7-38 Messages d'état, d'erreur et de maintenance DÉCALAGE FORMAT Le format de support défini dans le pilote ne correspond pas au type/format de celui qui est chargé. Chargez un support de format correct. DÉCALAGE TYPE Le type de support défini dans le pilote ne correspond pas au type/format de celui qui est chargé. Chargez un support de type correct. BAC 2 VIDE Le Bac 2 est vide. Chargez un support dans le bac indiqué. Le Bac 2 n'est pas correctement installé. Installez correctement le bac indiqué. REMETTRE TONER X La cartouche de toner X est vide. Remplacer la cartouche de toner. TONER X BAS Le niveau du toner X est bas et après l'impression de 1 200 pages Letter/A4 à un taux de couverture de 5%, la cartouche devra être remplacée. Préparez la cartouche de toner couleur indiquée. TRANSFERT FIN Il est bientôt temps de remplacer la courroie de transfert. Prévoyez de remplacer l'unité courroie de transfert. FIN TRANSFERT La courroie de transfert est arrivée en fin de vie. Remplacez l'unité courroie de transfert et réinitialisez le compteur dans le menu MOTEUR SERVICE / MOTEUR REMPLACER CONSOM / REMPLACER CONSOM COURROIE TRANS. 􀀕􀀢L'impression peut se poursuivre mais le résultat de l'impression n'est pas garanti. Message : Signification : Action : Messages d'état, d'erreur et de maintenance 7-39 ROUL. TRANS. FIN Il est bientôt temps de remplacer le rouleau de transfert. Prévoyez de remplacer le rouleau de transfert. FIN ROUL. TRANS. Le rouleau de transfert est arrivé en fin de vie. Remplacez le rouleau de transfert et réinitialisez le compteur dans le menu MOTEUR SERVICE / MOTEUR REMPLACER CONSOM / REMPLACER CONSOM ROULEAU TRANS. 􀀕􀀢L'impression peut se poursuivre mais le résultat de l'impression n'est pas garanti. RÉCUP. PLEIN Le flacon de toner usagé est presque plein. Préparez un nouveau kit de toner usagé à installer. ERR. DISP. USB Une erreur s'est produite sur le périphérique USB connecté. Vérifiez le périphérique. ERR. DISP. RES. Une erreur s'est produite sur le périphérique réseau connecté. Vérifiez le périphérique. ERR. TRAV. R/V Une erreur s'est produite pendant l'impression recto-verso (2 faces). Assurez-vous de charger le support correct. ERR. ALIMENTATION Le format de support défini dans le pilote ne correspond pas au type/format de celui qui est chargé. Chargez un support de format correct. COUVERCLE OUVERT AVANT Le capot avant de l'imprimante est ouvert. Fermez le capot avant de l'imprimante. Message : Signification : Action : 7-40 Messages d'état, d'erreur et de maintenance COUVERCLE OUVERT CÔTÉ Le capot latéral droit de l'imprimante est ouvert. Fermez le capot latéral droit de l'imprimante. TIROIR OUVERT BAC 2 Le Bac 2 est ouvert. Installez correctement le Bac 2. ENLEVER PAPIER BAC 1 Il reste du papier dans le Bac 1. Enlevez tout le papier du Bac 1. ERR. FORMAT/TYPE RECTO/VERSO Le support chargé est incompatible avec l'impression recto-verso (2 faces). Assurez-vous de charger le support correct. ERREUR VIDEO UNDER RUN L'image d'impression est trop détaillée pour la vitesse de transmission. Appuyez sur la touche Cancel pour annuler le travail d'impression. Réduisez la quantité de données à imprimer et réessayez d'imprimer. ERREUR FW TÉLÉCHARG. Le téléchargement du firmware a échoué. Essayez de télécharger à nouveau. ERREUR COULEUR REGIST.1 Une erreur d'enregistrement couleur s'est produite. Appuyez sur la touche Cancel pour annuler le travail d'impression. Éteindre puis rallumer la machine. ERREUR COULEUR REGIST.2 Une erreur d'enregistrement couleur s'est produite. Appuyez sur la touche Cancel pour annuler le travail d'impression. Éteindre puis rallumer la machine. ERREUR IDC SENSOR Une erreur de capteur IDC s'est produite. Appuyez sur la touche Cancel pour annuler le travail d'impression. Éteindre puis rallumer la machine. Message : Signification : Action : Messages d'état, d'erreur et de maintenance 7-41 ERREUR CAPTEUR ENV. Une erreur de capteur d'environnement s'est produite. Appuyez sur la touche Cancel pour annuler le travail d'impression. Éteindre puis rallumer la machine. ERREUR DÉPASSEM. MÉM. L'imprimante a reçu plus de données qu'elle ne peut en traiter avec la capacité mémoire installée. Appuyez sur la touche Cancel pour annuler le travail d'impression. Réduisez la quantité de données à imprimer et réessayez d'imprimer. BOURRAGE SUPP. RECTO/VERSO INF. Bourrage dans l'unité recto-verso. Reportez-vous à "Messages de bourrage et procédures correctives" à la page 7-6, et dégagez le support coincé. BOURRAGE SUPP. RECTO/VERSO SUP. Bourrage dans l'unité recto-verso. BOURRAGE SUPP. ROUL. TRANSFERT Bourrage au niveau du rouleau de transfert. La feuille alimentée dans l'imprimante est restée coincée juste avant d'être éjectée dans le bac de réception. BOURRAGE SUPP. BAC 1 Bourrage dans le Bac 1. BOURRAGE SUPP. BAC 2 Un support s'est coincé lors du prélèvement dans le Bac 2. BOURRAGE SUPP. SORTIE Un support s'est coincé dans la fente de sortie. BOURRAGE SUPP. NON DÉFINI Un support s'est coincé dans un emplacement non spécifié. Message : Signification : Action : 7-42 Messages d'état, d'erreur et de maintenance BOURRAGE SUPP. UNITÉ FUSION Bourrage en sortie de l'unité de fixation. Reportez-vous à "Messages de bourrage et procédures correctives" à la page 7-6, et dégagez le support coincé. Les cartouches de toner fournies ne sont pas installées. Veillez à installer les cartouches de toner fournies. TONER X NON INSTALLÉ La cartouche de toner X n'est pas installée ou n'est pas d'un type homologué. Installez une cartouche de toner homologuée par KONICA MINOLTA. METTRE SUP.BAC X "FORMAT" "TYPE" Le bac X (Bac 1 ou 2) a été défini dans le pilote d'imprimante pour l'impression mais le bac X est vide. Chargez le support approprié dans le bac indiqué. BOUT. RÉCUP. PLEINE Le flacon de toner usagé est plein. Installez un nouveau flacon de toner usagé. Message : Signification : Action : Messages d'état, d'erreur et de maintenance 7-43 Messages de maintenance Ces messages signalent des défauts de fonctionnement plus graves qui ne peuvent être corrigés que par un technicien de maintenance agréé. Dans ce cas, éteignez l'imprimante et rallumez-la. Si le problème persiste, contactez votre fournisseur local ou votre service de maintenance agréé. Message : Signification : Action : ERREUR FATALE CODE: XXXX Une erreur a été détectée au niveau du composant "XXXX" indiqué dans le message. Les informations d'erreur apparaissent au bas de l'écran des messages. Redémarrez l'imprimante. Cela a souvent pour effet d'effacer le message d'erreur et l'impression peut reprendre. Si le problème persiste, contactez votre Support technique. 7-44 Messages d'état, d'erreur et de maintenance A Annexe A-2 Spécifications techniques Spécifications techniques Imprimante Type Imprimante couleur de bureau, à double rayon laser, de format A4 Système d'impression Système d'impression électro-photographique Système d'exposition 4 diodes laser et 1 miroir polygonal Système de développement Toner SMT mono-composant Résolution 2 400dpi x 600dpi x 1bit 1 200dpi x 600dpi x 1bit 600dpi x 600dpi x 1bit Délai de sortie de la première impression Recto seul Monochrome/Couleur : 16,0 secondes pour format A4 (papier standard) 15,9 secondes pour format Letter (papier standard) Vitesse d'impression Recto seul Monochrome/Couleur : 24,0 pages par minute sur format A4 ou Letter (papier standard) 25,0 pages par minute sur format A4 ou Letter (papier standard) Recto-verso (2 faces) Monochrome/Couleur : 24,0 feuilles par minute pour format A4 (papier standard : 2 pages ou moins) 25,0 feuilles par minute pour format Letter (papier standard : 2 pages ou moins) Spécifications techniques A-3 Formats des supports d'impression Bac 1 (alimentation manuelle) Largeur papier :92 à 216 mm (3,6 à 8,5") Longueur papier :148 à 356 mm (5,8 à 14,0") Bac 2 Largeur papier : 92 à 216 mm (3,6 à 8,5") Longueur papier : 148 à 297 mm (5,8 à 11,7") Types de papier/Support d'impression •Papier standard (60 à 90 g/m2) •Recyclé (60 à 90 g/m2) •Enveloppes •Papier à en-tête •Étiquette •Papier Épais 1 (91 à 150 g/m2) •Papier Épais 2 (151 à 210 g/m2) •Cartes •Brillant 1 (100 à 128 g/m2) •Brillant 2 (129 à 158 g/m2) Capacité d'alimentation Bac 1 (alimentation manuelle) Standard/Recycl: 1 feuille Enveloppe:1 enveloppe Étiquette/Carte postale/Épais 1/Épais 2/Brillant 1/ Brillant 2/Papier à en-tête: 1 feuille Bac 2 Standard/Recycl: 250 feuilles Étiquettes/Carte/Épais 1/Épais 2/Brillant 1/ Brillant 2/En-tête : 20 feuilles Capacité de sortie Bac de sortie : 200 feuilles (papier standard 80 g/m2) Température ambiante (en fonctionnement) 10 à 30°C (50 à 86°F) 􀀕􀀢Fluctuations inférieures à 10°C (18°F) en l'espace d'une heure. Humidité ambiante (en fonctionnement) 15 à 85% 􀀕􀀢Fluctuations de plus de 10% en l'espace d'une heure. A-4 Spécifications techniques Préchauffage 120 V : 38 secondes en moy. 220 V : 41 secondes en moy. 240 V : 36 secondes en moy. 􀀕􀀢Délai avant que l'imprimante soit prête à imprimer après mise sous tension à température ambiante (23 °C) Alimentation électrique 120 V, 60 Hz 220 à 240 V, 50 à 60 Hz Consommation électrique 120 V : 1000 W ou moins 220 à 240 V: 1100 W ou moins Ampérage 120 V : 9,4 A ou moins 220 à 240 V : 5,2 W ou moins Niveau de bruit En fonctionnement : 52 dB ou moins En veille : 39 dB ou moins Dimensions externes de l'imprimante Hauteur : 330 mm (13,0") Largeur : 419 mm (16,5") Profondeur : 523 mm (20,6") En excluant certaines pièces saillantes et le bac d'alimentation manuelle Poids Environ 22,0 kg (48,5 lb) (sans consommables) Environ 26,8 kg (59,1 lb) (avec consommables) Interface Compatible USB 2.0 (High Speed), Ethernet 10Base-T/100Base-TX Mémoire standard 32 Mo Durée de vie de la machine 400 000 pages max. et pas plus de 5 ans Spécifications techniques A-5 Durée de vie des consommables Remplaçables par l'utilisateur Élément Durée de vie moyenne Cartouche de toner Cartouche standard fournie: 2 000 pages (K)(en continu) 1 000 pages (Y,M,C)(en continu) Cartouche de remplacement (Capacité standard): 3 000 pages (en continu) Cartouche de remplacement (Grande capacité): 5 000 pages (en continu) Coefficient de rendement déclaré conforme à ISO/IEC 19798. 􀀕􀀢La longévité de la cartouche de toner est plus réduite en cas d'impression intermittente. Kit toner usagé WB-P03 36 000 pages (Monochrome) (en continu) 9 000 pages (Couleur) (en continu) Rouleau de transfert TF-P04 100 000 pages (travaux de 2 pages) Unité de courroie de transfert TF-P05 100 000 pages (travaux de 2 pages) Unité de fixation FU-P02 100 000 pages (travaux de 2 pages) 􀀕􀀢Les valeurs ci-dessus indiquent le nombre de pages imprimées en mode recto seul sur papier de format A4/Letter avec une couverture toner de 5%. La durée de vie effective peut varier (être plus courte) suivant les paramètres d'impression (taux de couverture toner, format papier, etc.), le mode d'impression continu ou intermittent (à savoir impression fréquente de travaux d'une seule page) ou le type de support utilisé (ex. : support épais). Elle peut en outre varier suivant les conditions d'utilisation ambiantes de température et d'humidité. 􀀕􀀢Qu'ils impriment en couleur ou en noir et blanc, les imprimantes couleurs consomment une faible quantité de chaque toner pendant l'opération d'initialisation lors de la mise sous et hors tension de la machine et durant les réglages automatiques pour préserver la qualité d'impression. Même si une erreur de manipulation survient pendant l'impression en noir et blanc, du toner couleur est consommé et risque de devoir être remplacé. A-6 Spécifications techniques Remplaçables par le service de maintenance Élément Durée de vie moyenne Entraînement papier 300 000 pages Protection de l'environnement A-7 Protection de l'environnement En tant que partenaire ENERGY STAR®, nous avons fait en sorte que cette machine soit conforme aux Directives ENERGY STAR en matière de consommation d'énergie. Qu'est-ce qu'un produit ENERGY STAR ? Un produit ENERGY STAR est doté d'une fonction spéciale lui permettant de passer automatiquement en "mode de consommation d'énergie réduite" au bout d'un certain délai d'inactivité. Un produit ENERGY STAR utilise l'énergie plus efficacement, réduit la consommation et les factures d'électricité et contribue à la protection de l'environnement. Index Index A-8 B Bac de sortie ...............................4-26 Bourrages Bac 1 .........................................7-18 Bac 2 ...........................................7-7 Section d'entraînement papier .7-18 Unité de fixation ........................7-12 Unité recto-verso ......................7-11 Brillant .........................................4-10 C Cartes ............................................4-9 Chargement des supports .........4-13 Chemin papier ..............................7-4 Consommables Cartouche de toner .....................5-2 Kit toner usagé WB-P03 ...........5-14 Rouleau de transfert TF-P04 ....5-17 Unité de courroie de transfert TF-P05 .....................................5-20 Unité de fixation FU-P02 ..........5-27 E Entretien .......................................6-2 Enveloppes ...................................4-6 É Écran des messages ...................3-4 Étiquettes .....................................4-7 I Impression recto-verso .............4-24 Imprimante Composants ...............................1-3 Index A-9 M Menu de configuration .................3-5 Messages ....................................7-36 Messages d'erreur .....................7-37 Messages de maintenance ........7-43 P Panneau de contrôle ....................3-2 Papier à en-tête ............................4-8 Papier épais ..................................4-5 Papier standard ............................4-4 Pilote d'imprimante ......................2-8 Affichage .....................................2-7 Désinstallation ............................2-6 Onglet Calque ...........................2-10 Onglet Mise en page .................2-10 Onglet Paramètres de base ......2-10 Onglet Qualité ...........................2-11 Pilote d'imprimante (PPD) Affichage .....................................2-7 Désinstallation ............................2-6 Prévention des bourrages papier .....................................7-3 Problèmes de bourrage .............7-21 Chemin papier ............................7-4 Correction ...................................7-5 Prévention ...................................7-3 Q Qualité d'impression ..................7-30 R Résolution de problèmes .............7-1 S Stockage des supports ..............4-27 Support Chargement ..............................4-13 Chemin papier ............................7-4 Prévention des bourrages ...........7-3 Suppression des bourrages ........7-5 Zone imprimable .......................4-11 T Type de support Brillant ......................................4-10 Cartes .........................................4-9 Enveloppes ................................4-6 Étiquettes ...................................4-7 Papier à en-tête .........................4-8 Papier épais ...............................4-5 Papier standard ..........................4-4 Z Zone imprimable ........................4-11 C650/C550/C451/C353/C253/C203 Opérations de Fonction Avancée (i-Option2) Advanced Function Operations Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction Termes et conditions......................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1 À propos de ce guide...................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.1.1 Structure de ce guide de l'utilisateur ................................................................................................ 1-3 1.1.2 Explication des conventions ............................................................................................................. 1-4 Recommandations de sécurité ......................................................................................................... 1-4 Séquence d'actions........................................................................................................................... 1-4 Astuces.............................................................................................................................................. 1-4 Texte avec format spécial ................................................................................................................. 1-5 2 Présentation 2.1 Présentation des fonctions ............................................................................................................ 2-3 2.1.1 Affectation des touches d'application............................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.2 Fonctions i-Option LK-101 ............................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.3 Fonctions i-Option LK-102 ............................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.4 Fonctions connectées au moyen de PageScope My Panel Manager .............................................. 2-4 2.2 Pour activer les fonctions i-Option LK-101/LK-102 .................................................................... 2-5 Enregistrement de l'i-Option LK-101/LK-102 ................................................................................... 2-5 Achat de l'i-Option LK-101/LK-102 .................................................................................................. 2-5 Envoyer un code-requête ................................................................................................................. 2-6 Enregistrement sur le License Management Server (LMS) ............................................................... 2-8 Activation des fonctions i-Option LK-101/LK-102.......................................................................... 2-10 3 Affectation des touches d'application 3.1 Personnaliser les touches d'application....................................................................................... 3-3 3.1.1 Touche d'application et menu Application........................................................................................ 3-3 Touche d'application......................................................................................................................... 3-3 Menu Application ............................................................................................................................. 3-4 3.1.2 Param. Touche Application ............................................................................................................... 3-4 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4.1 Présentation..................................................................................................................................... 4-3 4.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Navigateur Web ................................................................ 4-3 4.1.2 Caractéristiques ................................................................................................................................ 4-3 4.2 Affichage du Navigateur Web......................................................................................................... 4-4 4.3 Onglet par défaut du Navigateur Web........................................................................................... 4-5 4.3.1 Organisation de l'écran ..................................................................................................................... 4-5 4.3.2 Instructions d'utilisation .................................................................................................................... 4-6 Opération par l'écran tactile.............................................................................................................. 4-6 Opération par le panneau de contrôle .............................................................................................. 4-6 4.3.3 Saisie des lettres/chiffres .................................................................................................................. 4-6 4.3.4 Mode d'affichage .............................................................................................................................. 4-7 Normal............................................................................................................................................... 4-7 Rendu Parfait..................................................................................................................................... 4-7 Rendu intelligent................................................................................................................................ 4-7 Table des matières-2 Advanced Function Operations 4.4 Barre d'outils.................................................................................................................................... 4-8 4.4.1 Description de la barre d'outils.......................................................................................................... 4-8 4.4.2 Favoris (Écrans) ................................................................................................................................. 4-9 4.4.3 Favoris (Ajouter) ................................................................................................................................. 4-9 4.4.4 Adresse.............................................................................................................................................. 4-9 4.4.5 Histor. ................................................................................................................................................ 4-9 4.4.6 Impr.................................................................................................................................................. 4-10 4.4.7 Menu................................................................................................................................................ 4-10 4.5 Configurer le Navigateur Web ...................................................................................................... 4-11 4.5.1 Opération Page ............................................................................................................................... 4-11 4.5.2 Vue................................................................................................................................................... 4-11 4.5.3 Activer Onglet .................................................................................................................................. 4-11 4.5.4 Réglages.......................................................................................................................................... 4-12 4.6 Imprimer/Afficher un fichier PDF ................................................................................................. 4-13 4.6.1 Imprimer un fichier PDF................................................................................................................... 4-13 4.6.2 Afficher un fichier PDF..................................................................................................................... 4-14 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5.1 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection............................................................................................. 5-3 5.1.1 Présentation....................................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.1.2 Accéder à PageScope Web Connection ........................................................................................... 5-3 5.1.3 Cache du navigateur Internet ............................................................................................................ 5-4 5.2 Organisation de l'écran................................................................................................................... 5-5 5.3 Connexion et déconnexion ............................................................................................................. 5-6 5.3.1 Connexion.......................................................................................................................................... 5-6 5.3.2 Déconnexion...................................................................................................................................... 5-7 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte.................................................................................................................. 5-8 5.4.1 Connexion à une boîte....................................................................................................................... 5-8 Liste de fichiers.................................................................................................................................. 5-9 5.4.2 Opérations sur le document ............................................................................................................ 5-10 Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 5-10 Suppression..................................................................................................................................... 5-12 6 Image Panel 6.1 Présentation..................................................................................................................................... 6-3 6.2 Afficher Image Panel ....................................................................................................................... 6-4 6.3 Opérations sur Image Panel ........................................................................................................... 6-5 6.3.1 Organisation de l'écran...................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.3.2 Séquence opératoire ......................................................................................................................... 6-6 6.3.3 Numériser des documents ................................................................................................................ 6-9 Numéris. ............................................................................................................................................ 6-9 Charger depuis un boîte utilisateur.................................................................................................. 6-10 Charger depuis la mémoire externe ................................................................................................ 6-11 6.3.4 Modifier............................................................................................................................................ 6-12 Aperçu ............................................................................................................................................. 6-12 Combiner Documents...................................................................................................................... 6-12 Retour à Dest. Numér. ..................................................................................................................... 6-12 6.3.5 Spécifier destination ........................................................................................................................ 6-13 Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 6-13 Spécifiez un destinataire ................................................................................................................. 6-14 Enregistrer dans mémoire externe .................................................................................................. 6-15 6.3.6 Envoyer vers .................................................................................................................................... 6-15 Advanced Function Operations Table des matières-3 6.4 Personnaliser Image Panel........................................................................................................... 6-16 6.4.1 Personnaliser la zone Source Données........................................................................................... 6-16 6.4.2 Personnaliser la zone Destin. Données........................................................................................... 6-18 6.4.3 Supprimer une icône de raccourci enregistrée ............................................................................... 6-20 7 Enregistrement Photo 7.1 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses........................................................................ 7-3 7.1.1 Spécifications relatives aux données photo ..................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.2 Enregistrer une photo........................................................................................................................ 7-4 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8.1 Fonctions Traitement PDF.............................................................................................................. 8-3 8.1.1 Présentation ...................................................................................................................................... 8-3 8.1.2 Propriétés des documents PDF ........................................................................................................ 8-4 8.1.3 Cryptage et Signature numérique du fichier PDF ............................................................................. 8-5 Cryptage par mot de passe .............................................................................................................. 8-5 Cryptage par ID numérique............................................................................................................... 8-6 8.1.4 Impres. dir. ........................................................................................................................................ 8-7 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9.1 Présentation..................................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.1 Paramètres personnalisables ............................................................................................................ 9-3 9.1.2 Organigramme des fonctions Mon Panneau .................................................................................... 9-4 9.1.3 Restrictions concernant les fonctions Mon Panneau........................................................................ 9-4 9.2 Afficher Mon Panneau .................................................................................................................... 9-5 9.2.1 Écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau............................................................................................... 9-5 9.2.2 Afficher l'écran Menu Comm............................................................................................................. 9-5 9.3 Personnaliser Mon Panneau .......................................................................................................... 9-6 9.3.1 Réglages Mon Panneau .................................................................................................................... 9-6 9.3.2 Afficher l'écran Réglages Mon Panneau ........................................................................................... 9-6 9.3.3 Réglage Langue ................................................................................................................................ 9-7 9.3.4 Réglage Unité de mesure.................................................................................................................. 9-7 9.3.5 Réglages Copieur.............................................................................................................................. 9-8 Onglet par Défaut .............................................................................................................................. 9-8 Touches de raccourci........................................................................................................................ 9-8 9.3.6 Paramètres Numérisation/Fax........................................................................................................... 9-9 Onglet par Défaut .............................................................................................................................. 9-9 Carnet d'adresses par Défaut ........................................................................................................... 9-9 Touches de raccourci...................................................................................................................... 9-10 Carnet adresses par défaut............................................................................................................. 9-10 9.3.7 Param. Sélection Couleur................................................................................................................ 9-11 9.3.8 Réglages Menu Principal................................................................................................................. 9-11 Écran Réglages Menu Principal ...................................................................................................... 9-11 Enregistrer les touches de menu principal...................................................................................... 9-12 9.3.9 Réglage Écran par défaut................................................................................................................ 9-12 Table des matières-4 Advanced Function Operations 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10.1 Présentation................................................................................................................................... 10-3 10.1.1 Classement du carnet d'adresses................................................................................................... 10-3 Carnet d'adresses public................................................................................................................. 10-3 Mon Carnet d'adresses ................................................................................................................... 10-3 10.1.2 Organigramme des fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses ................................................................... 10-4 10.1.3 Restrictions relatives aux fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses .......................................................... 10-4 10.2 Enregistrement ou édition d'une adresse ................................................................................... 10-5 10.2.1 Carnet Adresses .............................................................................................................................. 10-5 10.2.2 Groupe............................................................................................................................................. 10-7 10.3 Copier des adresses enregistrées d'un carnet à l'autre............................................................ 10-9 10.3.1 Copier les adresses du carnet public sur Mon Carnet d'adresses ................................................. 10-9 10.3.2 Copier les adresses de Mon Carnet d'adresses sur le carnet d'adresses public ......................... 10-10 10.4 Utiliser Mon Carnet d'adresses lors de l'envoi......................................................................... 10-11 10.4.1 Spécifier une adresse .................................................................................................................... 10-11 10.4.2 Rechercher une adresse................................................................................................................ 10-11 11 Index 1 Introduction Advanced Function Operations 1-3 Introduction 1 1 Introduction Nous vous remercions d'avoir porté votre choix sur nos produits. Ce guide de l'utilisateur présente les fonctions qui prennent effet dès l'enregistrement d'un kit licence en option ; il décrit aussi celles qui sont disponibles dès que des applications se connectent à l'imprimante multifonctions (MFP). La lecture de ce guide de l'utilisateur vous permettra d'exploiter au mieux ces fonctions. Ces fonctions avancées sont prises en charge par les modèles suivants. bizhub C650/C550/C451/C353/C253/C203 Afin d'utiliser cette machine correctement et en toute sécurité, assurez-vous de lire le guide de l'utilisateur qui l'accompagne. Si vous souhaitez consulter les marques déposées et les copyrights, reportez-vous au guide de l'utilisateur. Les illustrations figurant dans ce guide de l'utilisateur peuvent présenter de légères différences avec la machine réelle. Termes et conditions L'activation de l'i-Option LK-101 vous permet d'accéder à Internet depuis le panneau de contrôle de la machine. Les activités et le contenu auquel vous accédez, que vous téléchargez ou que vous communiquez grâce aux indications du présent manuel restent de votre responsabilité exclusive. Ces activités sont également soumises aux règles de votre entreprises ainsi qu'à toute réglementation nationale applicable. KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. et toutes les sociétés KONICA MINOLTA rejettent toute responsabilité quant à l'utilisation faite de l'Internet. 1.1 À propos de ce guide Ce guide de l'utilisateur présente les fonctions qui prennent effet dès l'enregistrement d'un kit licence en option et celles qui sont disponibles dès que des applications se connectent à l'imprimante multifonctions MFP. Ce guide de l'utilisateur s'adresse aux personnes qui ont une connaissance élémentaire du fonctionnement des ordinateurs et de cette machine. Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation des systèmes d'exploitation ou des applications Windows ou Macintosh, voir leurs manuels respectifs. 1.1.1 Structure de ce guide de l'utilisateur Ce manuel comprend les chapitre suivants : Chapitre 1 Introduction Chapitre 2 Présentation Chapitre 3 Affectation des touches d'application Chapitre 4 Fonction Navigateur Web Chapitre 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) Chapitre 6 Image Panel Chapitre 7 Enregistrement Photo Chapitre 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF Chapitre 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau Chapitre 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses Chapitre 11 Index 1 Introduction 1-4 Advanced Function Operations 1.1.2 Explication des conventions Les repères et mises en forme utilisés dans le présent manuel sont décrits ci-dessous. Recommandations de sécurité 6 DANGER Le manquement aux instructions ainsi indiquées peut entraîner des blessures graves ou mortelles, en ce qui concerne l'alimentation électrique. % Respectez toutes les indications de danger afin d'éviter les blessures. 7 AVERTISSEMENT Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures graves ou des dommages matériels. % Respectez tous les avertissements pour éviter les blessures et utiliser la machine en toute sécurité. 7 ATTENTION Tout manquement aux instructions signalées de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures légères ou des dommages matériels. % Respectez toutes les indications sous le titre Attention pour éviter les blessures et utiliser la machine en toute sécurité. Séquence d'actions 1 Le chiffre 1 ainsi formaté indique la première étape d'une séquence d'actions. 2 Les chiffres suivants, ainsi présentés, indiquent les étapes suivantes de la procédure. ? Le texte signalé ainsi offre une assistance supplémentaire. % Le texte ainsi formaté décrit l'action permettant d'obtenir le résultat escompté. Astuces 2 Remarque Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des informations utiles et des astuces pour garantir l'utilisation en toute sécurité de la machine. 2 Rappel Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des informations importantes (Rappel). ! Détails Le texte présenté de cette manière contient des références à des informations plus détaillées. Toute illustration placée ici indique les opérations qui doivent être effectuées. Advanced Function Operations 1-5 Introduction 1 Texte avec format spécial Touche [Arrêt] Les noms des touches du panneau de contrôle sont illustrées comme ci-dessus. REGLAGE MACHINE Les textes affichés se présentent sous la forme ci-dessus. 1 Introduction 1-6 Advanced Function Operations 2 Présentation Advanced Function Operations 2-3 Présentation 2 2 Présentation 2.1 Présentation des fonctions Ce chapitre donne un aperçu des fonctions concernées. Pour plus de détails sur chaque fonction, voir la section correspondante. ! Détails La disponibilité des fonctions avancées est subordonnée à l'utilisation du kit de mise à niveau, UK-201 fourni en option. 2.1.1 Affectation des touches d'application L'utilisation des touches d'application permet de basculer l'affichage entre le navigateur Web, Image Panel ou Mon Panneau. En outre, les touches d'application peuvent être personnalisées. Pour plus de détails, voir "Affectation des touches d'application" à la page 3-3. 2.1.2 Fonctions i-Option LK-101 L'enregistrement de l'i-Option LK-101 sur la MFP rend disponibles les fonctions suivantes. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de l'i-Option LK-101 sur la MFP, voir "Pour activer les fonctions i-Option LK-101/LK-102" à la page 2-5. Si la MFP est équipée d'un système de chargement, Image Panel et les fonctions d'enregistrement de photos ne sont pas disponibles. 2.1.3 Fonctions i-Option LK-102 L'enregistrement de l'i-Option LK-102 sur la MFP rend disponibles les fonctions suivantes. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement du i-Option LK-102 sur la MFP, voir "Pour activer les fonctions i-Option LK-101/LK-102" à la page 2-5. Fonction Présentation Page de référence Navigateur Web Le panneau de contrôle de la MFP connectée au réseau vous permet d'accéder à Internet ou un intranet et d'en afficher et imprimer le contenu. Avec un navigateur Web, vous pouvez aussi accéder via PageScope Web Connection, à la MFP connectée au réseau et aux documents enregistrés dans ses boîtes utilisateurs. p. 4-3 p. 5-3 Image Panel Image Panel est une nouvelle interface utilisateur du panneau de contrôle ; elle offre une opérabilité renouvelée orientée vers une utilisation intuitive et conviviale. p. 6-3 Enregistrement Photo Via PageScope Web Connection, il est possible d'ajouter des données photo à une adresse déjà enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses. Les photos enregistrées s'affichent dans la Liste des destinations d'Image Panel. p. 7-3 Fonction Présentation Page de référence Traitement PDF Lors de l'envoi de documents au format PDF au moyen des fonctions de numérisation ou les fonctions Boîte utilisateur, il est possible de crypter un fichier PDF par un mot de passe ou un identifiant numérique, d'ajouter une signature numérique et de spécifier les propriétés. p. 8-3 2 Présentation 2-4 Advanced Function Operations 2.1.4 Fonctions connectées au moyen de PageScope My Panel Manager Les fonctions suivantes sont disponibles après association aux applications. Pour utiliser la fonction souhaitée, définissez l'environnement, puis activez-la depuis l'application. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur la définition de l'environnement, voir le manuel relatif à l'application. Les fonctions à associer aux applications devraient être activées depuis l'application utilisée. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de la fonction, voir le manuel relatif à l'application. Fonction Présentation Page de référence Mon Panneau La fonction Mon Panneau, l'environnement du panneau de contrôle (Mon Panneau), personnalisé par un utilisateur en fonction de l'application, est géré de manière centralisée sur le serveur et l'utilisateur peut obtenir le tableau Mon Panneau auprès de la MFP sélectionnée. p. 9-3 Mon Carnet d'adresses Grâce à la fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses, le carnet d'adresses personnel (Mon Carnet d'adresses) est géré centralement sur le serveur, et l'utilisateur peut accéder au carnet d'adresses personnel Mon Carnet d'adresses de la MFP sélectionnée. p. 10-3 Advanced Function Operations 2-5 Présentation 2 2.2 Pour activer les fonctions i-Option LK-101/LK-102 Pour utiliser les fonctions des i-Option LK-101/LK-102, ces derniers doivent être enregistrés sur la MFP. Cette section décrit la procédure permettant d'enregistrer l’i-Option LK-101/LK-102 sur une MFP. 1 Faites l'acquisition de l'i-Option LK-101/LK-102. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Achat de l'i-Option LK-101/LK-102" à la page 2-5. 2 Envoyez depuis le panneau de contrôle de la MFP, un code requête. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Envoyer un code-requête" à la page 2-6. 3 Depuis l'ordinateur, procédez à l'enregistrement auprès du License Management Server (LMS). – Pour plus de détails, voir "Enregistrement sur le License Management Server (LMS)" à la page 2-8. 4 Depuis le panneau de contrôle de la MFP, activez les fonctions des i-Option LK-101/LK-102. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Activation des fonctions i-Option LK-101/LK-102" à la page 2-10. Enregistrement de l'i-Option LK-101/LK-102 Il existe deux méthodes pour enregistrer l’i-Option LK-101/LK-102 sur la MFP. - Depuis le panneau de contrôle de la MFP - Depuis PageScope Web Connection C'est la procédure d'enregistrement depuis le panneau de contrôle de la MFP qui est décrite ici. Achat de l'i-Option LK-101/LK-102 % Faites l'acquisition de l'i-Option LK-101/LK-102 à l'avance. L'i-Option LK-101/LK-102 contient le certificat-clé. Le certificat-clé se compose des éléments suivants : - Numéro de clé - Nom de la fonction - URL du site Web du License Management Server (LMS) ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur l'achat de l'i-Option LK-101/LK-102, contactez votre S.A.V. 2 Présentation 2-6 Advanced Function Operations Envoyer un code-requête 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur]. 3 Tapez le mot de passe administrateur et appuyez sur [Valider]. 4 Appuyez sur [Suivt]. 5 Appuyez sur [Paramètres de Licence]. Advanced Function Operations 2-7 Présentation 2 6 Appuyez sur [Obtenir Code Requête]. 7 Appuyez sur [Oui] et ensuite sur [Valider]. 8 Appuyez sur [Impression] pour imprimer le code-requête. 2 Présentation 2-8 Advanced Function Operations Enregistrement sur le License Management Server (LMS) 1 Accédez au site Web du License Management Server (LMS). 2 Sélectionnez une langue. 3 Tapez le numéro de série et le code-requête obtenu après l'envoi d'un code-requête, puis cliquez sur la touche [Next]. 4 Tapez le numéro de clé contenu dans le certificat-clé, sélectionnez les options d'enregistrement, puis cliquez sur la touche [Next]. Advanced Function Operations 2-9 Présentation 2 5 Confirmez les informations d'enregistrement, et cliquez sur la touche [Generate License Code]. Le Code de Licence est établi. L'activation des fonctions de l'i-Option LK-101/LK-102 est subordonnée au Code de Licence. 2 Présentation 2-10 Advanced Function Operations Activation des fonctions i-Option LK-101/LK-102 1 Sur l'écran Paramètres de Licence, dans Réglages Administrateur, appuyez sur [Installer Licence]. 2 Appuyez sur [Sélectionner Fonct.], sélectionnez la fonction à activer, puis sélectionnez [Oui] pour "Activer". 3 Appuyez sur [Valider]. Advanced Function Operations 2-11 Présentation 2 4 Appuyez sur [Code de Licence], et entrez le code de licence qui a été émis. 5 Appuyez sur [Installer]. 6 Appuyez sur [Oui] et ensuite sur [Valider]. 2 Remarque Après avoir activé la fonction, placez l'interrupteur en position Arrêt, puis patientez 10 secondes environ avant de le ramener en position Marche. Sinon, la machine pourrait ne pas fonctionner correctement. Sur l'écran Paramètres de Licence, dans Réglages Administrateur, appuyez sur [Liste fonctions activées] pour consulter la liste des fonctions activées. 2 Présentation 2-12 Advanced Function Operations 3 Affectation des touches d'application Advanced Function Operations 3-3 Affectation des touches d'application 3 3 Affectation des touches d'application 3.1 Personnaliser les touches d'application Les touches d'application peuvent être personnalisées afin d'utiliser les fonctions avancées de la MFP. 3.1.1 Touche d'application et menu Application Touche d'application Les fonctions ajoutées en tant que fonctions avancées peuvent être assignées à des touches d'application. 2 Remarque Si l'assignation des touches d'application est changé, collez les étiquettes autocollantes appropriées fournies avec le kit de mise à niveau UK-201 sur le panneau de contrôle afin de remplacer les indications d'origine selon les besoins. 1 2 3 No. Nom du composant Description 1 Touche du menu Application Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher le menu Application. Il n'est pas possible d'affecter une autre fonction à cette touche. Pour plus de détails sur le menu Application, voir "Menu Application" à la page 3-4. 2 Touche d'application 1 Par défaut, elle est assignée au mode Numérisation/Fax. L'administrateur peut assigner une autre fonction à cette touche. Pour plus de détails sur l'affectation des fonctions, voir "Param. Touche Application" à la page 3-4. 3 Touche d'application 2 Par défaut, elle est affectée au mode Copie. L'administrateur peut assigner une autre fonction à cette touche. Pour plus de détails sur l'affectation des fonctions, voir "Param. Touche Application" à la page 3-4. 3 Affectation des touches d'application 3-4 Advanced Function Operations Menu Application % Pour utiliser les fonctions avancées de la MFP, appuyez sur la touche [Menu Application] ([Boîte]) pour afficher le menu Application. – Si vous désirez utiliser des fonctions non affectées à la touche d'application 1 ou 2, vous pouvez basculer l'affichage de l'écran de chaque fonction depuis le menu Application. 3.1.2 Param. Touche Application Les "Param. Touche Application" vous permettent d'assigner les fonctions avancées aux touches d'application. 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires/Compteur] pour afficher l'écran Utilitaires. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur]. 3 Tapez le mot de passe administrateur et appuyez sur [Valider]. 4 Appuyez sur [Réglage Système]. 5 Sur l'écran Réglage Système (2/2), appuyez sur [Param. Touche Application]. Advanced Function Operations 3-5 Affectation des touches d'application 3 6 Sélectionnez la touche d'application à affecter à la fonction. 7 Sélectionnez la fonction concernée. 8 Appuyez sur [Valider]. 3 Affectation des touches d'application 3-6 Advanced Function Operations 4 Fonction Navigateur Web Advanced Function Operations 4-3 Fonction Navigateur Web 4 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4.1 Présentation La fonction Navigateur Web permet d'accéder aux divers contenus Internet ou intranet depuis le panneau de contrôle de la MFP connectée au réseau, et de les afficher ou les imprimer. ! Détails Cette fonction est disponible sur la MFP pour laquelle le i-Option LK-101 est enregistré. 4.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Navigateur Web La fonction Navigateur Web permet les opérations suivantes : - Afficher et imprimer les contenus disponibles sur Internet ou intranet. - Afficher et imprimer les fichiers PDF sur Internet ou intranet. - Utiliser PageScope Web Connection d'une autre MFP en cours d'utilisation ou connectée au réseau afin de gérer des documents contenus dans les boîtes utilisateur. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation de PageScope Web Connection, voir "PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web)" à la page 5-3. 4.1.2 Caractéristiques Les caractéristiques principales du navigateur Web installé sur la MFP sont les suivantes. Le module Flash Player installé sur la MFP ne prend pas en charge les éléments suivants: - La fonction permettant de déclencher un événement par une pression sur une touche. - La fonction permettant de coller ou d'acquérir depuis le presse-papier des données comme des chaînes de caractères - Le menu contextuel. - La fonction d'impression Flash. - La fonction permettant d'exécuter JavaScript depuis Flash ou de d'utiliser Flash par JavaScript. - Les écrans ne comportant pas des fenêtres-éclair. - La fonction Flash Signet. - La fonction permettant d'envoyer/recevoir des données en temps réel au moyen du Flash Media Server. - La fonction permettant de communiquer via XMLSocket. Rubrique Caractéristiques techniques Moteur du navigateur NetFront Protocoles pris en charge HTTP, HTTPS, TCP/IP Langages de balisage/ script pris en charge HTML, CSS, JavaScript Formats pris en charge JPEG, BMP, PNG, GIF, Animation GIF, PDF Versions SSL/TLS prises en charge SSL 2.0, SSL 3.0, TLS 1.0 Codes de caractères pris en charge Japonais (Shift-JIS), Japonais (ISO-2022-JP), Japonais (EUC-JP), Chinois simplifié (GB2312), Chinois traditionnel (Big5), Occidental (ISO-8859-1), Unicode (UTF-8) Modes d'affichage Normal, Rendu Parfait, Rendu intelligent PDF Viewer Adobe® Reader® LE Flash Player Adobe® Flash® Player 7 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4-4 Advanced Function Operations 4.2 Affichage du Navigateur Web Affichez le Navigateur Web par le menu Application. % Appuyez sur [Navigateur Web] sur le menu Application pour afficher une page spécifiée comme page d'accueil. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur le menu Application, voir "Affectation des touches d'application" à la page 3-3. Advanced Function Operations 4-5 Fonction Navigateur Web 4 4.3 Onglet par défaut du Navigateur Web 4.3.1 Organisation de l'écran L'écran Navigateur Web se compose des éléments suivants : 2 Remarque Le stylet fourni avec le kit de mise à niveau UK-201 en option facilite l'utilisation de l'écran tactile. 2 1 4 3 No. Nom du composant Description 1 Barre d'outils Sert à l'utilisation et à la configuration du Navigateur Web. La barre d'outils est située sur l'écran du Navigateur Web. Pour plus de détails sur la barre d'outils, voir "Barre d'outils" à la page 4-8. 2 Barre de défilement Si l'écran ne peut pas afficher un contenu sur toute sa longueur, la barre de défilement apparaît sur le côté droit. Si l'écran ne peut pas afficher un contenu sur toute sa largeur, la barre de défilement apparaît en bas de l'écran. 3 Onglets Les onglets sont affichés. Chaque onglet gère plusieurs contenus et permet de les afficher alternativement. Appuyez sur [x] dans le coin de l'onglet actif pour fermer ce dernier. 4 Icône Une icône s'affiche pendant le chargement d'un contenu. 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4-6 Advanced Function Operations 4.3.2 Instructions d'utilisation Opération par l'écran tactile Utilisez l'écran tactile principalement pour le Navigateur Web installé sur la MFP. - Un contact direct sur l'écran tactile permet d'accéder à une page via un lien ou de sélectionner un élément. - Une pression dans un champ de saisie figurant dans un contenu fait apparaître un écran comportant un clavier pour permettre la saisie de caractères. - Pour faire défiler l'écran, appuyez sur , l'écran défile alors jusqu'à un certain point. - Diverses opérations et configurations sont possibles à partir des touches de la barre d'outils située en haut de l'écran. Opération par le panneau de contrôle Vous pouvez utiliser le clavier du panneau de contrôle et presser la touche voulue pour introduire des chiffres ou sélectionner des éléments dans une liste. 4.3.3 Saisie des lettres/chiffres Une pression dans un champ de saisie figurant dans un dialogue ou un contenu fait apparaître un écran comportant un clavier pour permettre la saisie de caractères. % Appuyez sur la touche du caractère voulu sur le clavier affiché à l'écran. – Pour entrer des caractères en majuscules ou des symboles, appuyez sur [Maj.]. – Le clavier permet aussi d'introduire des chiffres. ! Détails Pour enregistrer un historique de formulaire, appuyez sur "Saisie" dans la liste déroulante Historique Saisie afin d'afficher un clavier à l'écran. Pour changer un caractère individuel dans le texte saisi, appuyez sur et pour déplacer le curseur sur le caractère à modifier, appuyez sur [Eff.] et tapez ensuite la lettre ou le chiffre désiré. Pour effacer tous les caractères introduits jusque-là, appuyez sur [C]. Pour reprendre le réglage quand le clavier est affiché, appuyez sur [Rétablir]. Certains boutons peuvent ne pas s'afficher en fonction des caractères saisis. Lorsque la saisie est possible sur plusieurs lignes, la touche Retour chariot (nouvelle ligne) apparaît. Advanced Function Operations 4-7 Fonction Navigateur Web 4 4.3.4 Mode d'affichage L'écran Navigateur Web offre les trois types d'affichage suivants. Normal L'affichage est le même qu'un Navigateur Web classique, c'est-à-dire sans tenir compte de la taille de l'écran. Les barres de défilement, haut/bas et droite/gauche permettent de voir toutes les parties du contenu. Par défaut, l'affichage est en mode Normal. Rendu Parfait La disposition est conservée et la page est affichée après réduction pour que toute sa largeur soit visible. Pour visualiser le haut ou le bas de la page, utilisez la barre de défilement haut/bas. Rendu intelligent Un tableau vertical permet d'afficher la page sur toute la largeur de l'écran. Pour visualiser le haut ou le bas de la page, utilisez la barre de défilement haut/bas. L'organisation de la page peut s'en trouver modifiée selon la page à afficher. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur le changement du mode d'affichage, voir "Vue" à la page 4-11. 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4-8 Advanced Function Operations 4.4 Barre d'outils La barre d'outils en haut de l'écran Navigateur Web permet d'effectuer diverses opérations et configurations. 4.4.1 Description de la barre d'outils Voici la description de chaque touche de la barre d'outils : Icône Nom du composant Description Retour Revient à la page précédente. Suiv. Affiche la page suivante. Actualiser/Annuler Recharge la page affichée pour en mettre à jour le contenu. Annule l'opération pendant le rechargement de la page. Page d'accueil Affiche la page enregistrée comme page d'accueil. Par défaut, c'est la page "http://konicaminolta.com/" qui est enregistrée comme page d'accueil. Pour plus de détails sur la page d'accueil, voir "Opération Page" à la page 4-11. Favoris (Écrans) Affiche la liste des favoris enregistrés. Favoris (Ajouter) Ajoute l'URL de la page actuelle à la liste des favoris. Adresse Entrez l'URL de la page désirée pour l'afficher. Pour plus de détails, voir "Adresse" à la page 4-9. Histor. Affiche la liste des pages affichées jusque là. Pour plus de détails, voir "Histor." à la page 4-9. Impr. Imprime le contenu de la page affichée. Pour plus de détails, voir "Impr." à la page 4-10. Menu Permet de modifier la configuration du navigateur Web. Pour plus de détails, voir "Menu" à la page 4-10. Advanced Function Operations 4-9 Fonction Navigateur Web 4 4.4.2 Favoris (Écrans) % Appuyez sur [Affichage] pour afficher la liste des favoris enregistrés. Sélectionnez le favori permettant d'accéder à l'URL désirée. – Appuyez sur pour consulter la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément puis sélectionnez l'opération voulue. Les opérations suivantes sont disponibles. 4.4.3 Favoris (Ajouter) % Appuyez sur [Ajout] pour ajouter l'URL de la page actuelle à la liste des favoris. Le titre enregistré est celui que porte le contenu lors de l'accès à la page. Pour changer l'intitulé, éditez le titre depuis la liste des favoris après l'avoir ajouté à la liste. 4.4.4 Adresse 1 Appuyez sur [Adresse] pour afficher l'écran de saisie d'adresse. 2 Appuyez sur le champ de saisie pour afficher un clavier à l'écran. 3 Tapez l'URL désirée, et appuyez sur [Valider] ou [Ouv. av. Nouv.Onglet]. 4 Appuyez sur [Historique Saisie] pour afficher la liste historique et voir vos saisies précédentes. ! Détails Vous pouvez constater que l'URL de la page actuelle a été entrée dans l'écran de saisie d'adresse. Il est possible de supprimer l'URL en appuyant sur [Supprimer] après avoir affiché un clavier à l'écran. Toutes les URL introduites peuvent être supprimées d'un coup en appuyant sur la touche [C] (Effacer) du panneau de contrôle. 4.4.5 Histor. 1 Appuyez sur [Histor.] pour afficher l'écran qui liste l'historique d'affichage. – Vous pouvez sélectionner dans la liste la page à laquelle vous désirer accéder une nouvelle fois. 2 Appuyez sur pour consulter la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément puis sélectionnez l'opération voulue. Les opérations suivantes sont disponibles. Rubrique Description Ouv. av. Nouv.Onglet Charge le favori sélectionné dans un nouvel onglet. Modifier Permet d'éditer l'intitulé et l'adresse du favori sélectionné. Affichage Adresse Affiche la liste des favoris par adresse Affichage Titre Affiche la liste des favoris par titre. Déplacer vers le haut Déplace vers le haut le favori sélectionné. Déplacer vers le bas Déplace vers le bas le favori sélectionné. Supprimer Supprime le favori sélectionné. Supprimer tout Supprime tous les favoris enregistrés. Rubrique Description Ouv. av. Nouv.Onglet Charge l'historique sélectionné dans un nouvel onglet. Affichage Adresse Affiche la liste historique par adresse. Affichage Titre Affiche la liste historique par titre. Supprimer Supprime l'historique sélectionné. Supprimer tout Supprime tous les historiques. 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4-10 Advanced Function Operations 4.4.6 Impr. 1 Appuyez sur [Impr.] pour afficher un écran permettant d'imprimer une page Web. 2 Appuyez sur [Départ] ou appuyez sur la touche [Départ] après avoir spécifié les paramètres d'impression afin d'imprimer le contenu actuel. ! Détails Les éléments proposés à la sélection diffèrent selon les options installées. 4.4.7 Menu % Appuyez sur [Menu] pour changer la configuration du Navigateur Web. ! Détails Pour plus de détails sur le menu, voir "Configurer le Navigateur Web" à la page 4-11. Rubrique Description Couleur Permet de spécifier un mode couleur. Impression recto verso Spécifiez si l'impression doit être recto-verso ou non. Papier Spécifiez le format du papier. Impression Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non imprimer le titre, la date ou l'URL. Le titre et la date sont imprimés en tête de page tandis que l'URL est imprimée en pied de page. Finition Permet de spécifier les modes Tri, Groupe, Décalé, Agrafage, et Perforation. Advanced Function Operations 4-11 Fonction Navigateur Web 4 4.5 Configurer le Navigateur Web % Appuyez sur [Menu] sur la barre d'outils afin de changer la configuration du Navigateur Web. 4.5.1 Opération Page L'onglet Opération Page vous permet d'enregistrer la page d'accueil et d'utiliser le Mémo Page. 4.5.2 Vue L'onglet Vue permet de configurer l'affichage des contenus. 4.5.3 Activer Onglet L’onglet Activer Onglet permet de gérer les onglets. ! Détails Il est possible d'ouvrir un maximum de cinq onglets. Rubrique Description Utiliser pour Page d'accueil Enregistre la page actuelle comme page d'accueil. Mémo Page Affiche la liste des pages enregistrées comme Mémo Page. Il suffit de sélectionner le Mémo Page dans la liste pour afficher la page désirée. Appuyez sur pour consulter la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément puis sélectionnez l'opération voulue. Enreg. comme Mémo Page Enregistre la page actuelle telle qu'elle apparaît à l'écran. Rubrique Description Mode Affichage Sélectionnez le mode d'affichage de l'écran du Navigateur Web en choisissant entre "Normal", "Rendu Parfait" et "Rendu intelligent". Pour plus de détails sur le mode d'affichage, voir "Mode d'affichage" à la page 4-7. Codage Spécifiez le code de caractères pour l'affichage des contenus. Réglages avancés Permet de configurer en détail l'affichage des contenus. Image : Cochez cette case pour afficher les images. Animation : Cochez cette case pour afficher les animations GIF. Table : Cochez cette case pour identifier une liste et ajuster la mise en page en conséquence. JavaScript : Cochez cette case pour activer le JavaScript intégré au contenu. CSS : Cochez cette case pour activer le CSS intégré au contenu. Retour ligne auto : Cochez cette case pour activer le retour ligne auto dans un contenu. Vérification césures Japonais : Cochez cette case pour activer le contrôle des césures en Japonais dans un contenu. Rendu Rapide : Cochez cette case pour activer la fonction Rendu Rapide. Fenêtre Instantanée : Cochez cette case pour afficher les fenêtres instantanées. Sélect. couleur de copie imprim. Sélectionnez la couleur pour l'élément sélectionné en choisissant entre Vert, Bleu, Jaune ou Orange. Rubrique Description Créer Nouvel Onglet Affiche le contenu de l'URL enregistrée comme page d'accueil dans un nouvel onglet. Ouv. av. Nouv.Onglet Affiche dans un nouvel onglet la page liée. Fermer cet onglet Ferme l'onglet actif. Fermer autres Onglets Fermer tous les onglets. Cet élément ne peut pas être sélectionné s'il n'y a qu'un seul onglet d'ouvert. 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4-12 Advanced Function Operations 4.5.4 Réglages L'onglet Réglages permet de spécifier les paramètres relatifs à la sécurité, cookies, cache et proxy, et d'afficher les informations concernant le navigateur. Rubrique Description Sécurité Permet d'activer le SSL/TLS, d'afficher le Certificat racine ou le Certificat CA, ou d'importer le certificat client. Cookies Spécifie l'autorisation ou le rejet des cookies, et permet la suppression des cookies. Cache Active et configure le cache, ou supprime le cache. Proxy Active et configure le serveur proxy. Lorsque le proxy est activé, enregistrez l'adresse et le port du serveur proxy. Historique Formulaire Permet de sélectionner s'il faut ou non enregistrer l'historique des formulaires. L'historique des formulaires peut aussi être supprimé. Infos Navigateur Web Affiche les informations concernant le Navigateur Web. Advanced Function Operations 4-13 Fonction Navigateur Web 4 4.6 Imprimer/Afficher un fichier PDF Si le contenu affiché à l'écran comporte un lien pointant vers un fichier PDF, il est possible d'imprimer ou d'afficher ce fichier PDF. % Dans le contenu affiché à l'écran, appuyez sur le lien pointant vers un fichier PDF afin de faire apparaître l'écran suivant. 4.6.1 Imprimer un fichier PDF 1 Appuyez sur [Impression] pour afficher l'écran permettant d'imprimer un fichier PDF. 2 Une fois les réglages de l'impression effectués selon les besoins, appuyez sur [Départ] ou appuyez sur la touche [Départ] pour télécharger puis imprimer le fichier PDF. ! Détails Si le fichier PDF est crypté, le fichier PDF est enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur PDF au lieu d'être imprimé. Les éléments proposés à la sélection diffèrent selon les options installées. Rubrique Description Couleur Permet de spécifier un mode couleur. Impression recto verso Spécifiez si l'impression doit être recto-verso ou non. Papier Spécifiez le format du papier. Finition Permet de spécifier les modes Tri, Groupe, Décalé, Agrafage, et Perforation. 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4-14 Advanced Function Operations 4.6.2 Afficher un fichier PDF % Appuyez sur [Voir] pour afficher fichier PDF lié. – La barre d'outils en haut de l'écran permet d'agrandir, de réduire ou d'imprimer le fichier PDF. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) Advanced Function Operations 5-3 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5.1 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection Grâce au navigateur Web installé sur la MFP, vous pouvez utiliser l'instance PageScope Web Connection de la MFP connectée au réseau et accéder aux documents enregistrés dans ses boîtes utilisateurs. ! Détails Cette fonction est disponible sur la MFP pour laquelle l’i-Option LK-101 est enregistré. Il est nécessaire également que l’i-Option LK-101 soit enregistré sur la MFP de destination. 5.1.1 Présentation PageScope Web Connection est un utilitaire de gestion de périphérique supporté par le serveur HTTP intégré au contrôleur de l'imprimante. Grâce au navigateur Web vous pouvez accéder directement à la MFP connectée au réseau, et utiliser PageScope Web Connection. On peut généralement accéder à PageScope Web Connection depuis le navigateur Web d'un ordinateur, bien que l'on puisse aussi y accéder depuis le navigateur Web éventuellement installé sur la MFP. Si vous accédez à PageScope Web Connection depuis le navigateur Web d'un ordinateur, diverses opérations (vérifier l'état de la MFP, modifier les réglages, ou configurer le réseau), sont disponibles. En revanche si vous accédez à PageScope Web Connection depuis le navigateur Web installé sur la MFP, seule la fonction Boîte Utilisateur est accessible depuis la MFP. Ce chapitre décrit la manière d'utiliser PageScope Web Connection via le navigateur Web installé sur la MFP. 5.1.2 Accéder à PageScope Web Connection 1 Lancez le navigateur Web sur la MFP. 2 Dans la barre d'outils, appuyez sur [Adresse]. 3 Appuyez sur le champ de saisie pour afficher un clavier à l'écran. 4 Tapez l'adresse IP de la MFP à atteindre, et appuyez ensuite sur [Valider]. 5 Appuyez sur [Valider] ou [Ouv. av. Nouv.Onglet]. L'écran PageScope Web Connection apparaît. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Navigateur Web, voir "Fonction Navigateur Web" à la page 4-3. ! Détails Vous pouvez constater que l'URL de la page actuelle a été entrée dans l'écran de saisie d'adresse. Il est possible de supprimer l'URL en appuyant sur [Supprimer] après avoir affiché un clavier à l'écran. Toutes les URL introduites peuvent être supprimées d'un coup en appuyant sur la touche [C] (Effacer) du panneau de contrôle. Si le navigateur Web est configuré de manière à ne pas accepter les Cookies, la page de PageScope Web Connection ne peut pas s'afficher. Pour plus de détails sur la configuration du navigateur en termes de Cookies, voir "Réglages" à la page 4-12. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5-4 Advanced Function Operations 5.1.3 Cache du navigateur Internet Les informations les plus récentes peuvent ne pas apparaître sur l'écran PageScope Web Connection parce que ce sont d'anciennes versions des pages qui sont enregistrées dans la mémoire cache du navigateur Internet. De plus, des problèmes peuvent survenir quand vous utilisez le cache. Quand vous utilisez PageScope Web Connection, désactivez le cache du navigateur Internet. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu] dans la barre d'outils du navigateur Web. 2 Appuyez sur l'onglet Réglages, puis sélectionnez "Cache". 3 Décochez la case "Utiliser cache", et appuyez ensuite sur [Valider]. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur les réglages du navigateur Web, voir "Configurer le Navigateur Web" à la page 4-11. Advanced Function Operations 5-5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5 5.2 Organisation de l'écran Les pages de PageScope Web Connection sont conçues comme décrit ci-dessous. 6 3 4 5 1 2 No. Nom Description 1 Logo KONICA MINOLTA Appuyez sur le logo pour accéder au site Web KONICA MINOLTA (http://konicaminolta.com/). 2 Logo PageScope Web Connection Appuyez sur le logo pour afficher les informations relatives à la de version de PageScope Web Connection. 3 Nom utilisateur de connexion Affiche l'icône du mode actuel et le nom de l'utilisateur connecté (public, nom d'utilisateur et nom de compte enregistrés). 4 [Déconnexion] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vous déconnecter du mode actuel. 5 Aide Vous permet de consulter le manuel d'aide en ligne. 6 Table des matières Affiche le contenu de PageScope Web Connection. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5-6 Advanced Function Operations 5.3 Connexion et déconnexion Si l'identification utilisateur ou compte département est effectué sur la MFP, l'écran de connexion apparaît pour permettre l'utilisation de PageScope Web Connection. ! Détails Si l'identification utilisateur ou compte département n'est pas effectué sur la MFP, l'écran qui apparaît indique que vous êtes connecté en tant qu'utilisateur public. PageScope Web Connection ne peut pas être utilisé en mode Administrateur si on y accède depuis le navigateur Web de la MFP. 5.3.1 Connexion Précisez si la connexion doit se faire comme utilisateur public ou utilisateur enregistré. % Entrez les informations nécessaires, et appuyez ensuite sur [Connexion]. – Vous pouvez sélectionner la langue d'affichage s'il y a lieu. 2 Remarque Les boîtes accessibles dépendent de l'utilisateur ou du compte connecté. Advanced Function Operations 5-7 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5 5.3.2 Déconnexion % Appuyez sur [Déconnexion] en haut et à droite de l'écran. Un écran de confirmation de connexion apparaît. – Appuyez sur [OK] pour revenir à l'écran de connexion. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5-8 Advanced Function Operations 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte Si vous accédez à PageScope Web Connection par le navigateur Web de la MFP, les opérations suivantes sont disponibles dans le cadre de la fonction Boîte. - Gérer les documents contenus dans le boîtes utilisateur de la MFP en cours d'utilisation ou d'une autre MFP connectée au réseau. - Disposer de trois types de boîtes : Boîte utilisateur publique, Boîte utilisateur privée et Boîte Groupe. - Afficher, imprimer et supprimer les documents de la boîte. 5.4.1 Connexion à une boîte Lorsque vous vous connectez via PageScope Web Connection, cela fait apparaître la liste des boîtes (publiques, privées et groupe) créées dans la MFP visitée. % Dans la liste des boîtes utilisateur, sélectionnez le nom de la boîte voulue ou tapez le numéro et le mot de passe de la boîte, et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. ! Détails Si vous appuyez sur le nom d'une boîte utilisateur alors qu'un mot de passe a été spécifié pour protéger la boîte, une page s'affiche pour permettre l'introduction du mot de passe. Connexion de boîte Liste des boîtes Rubrique Description N° Bte Ut. Entrez le numéro de la boîte utilisateur à ouvrir. Mot de passe de boîte Entrez le mot de passe si la boîte utilisateur en a reçu un. Rubrique Description Rechercher dans l'index Affiche la liste des boîtes utilisateur à l'index sous lequel la boîte a été enregistrée lors de sa création. Page (affichage par 50 boîtes) Spécifie la page à afficher s'il y a plus de 50 boîtes utilisateur. Liste des boîtes Affiche le numéro de boîte, le nom de boîte, le type de boîte et la date/heure de création. Une touche avec icône apparaît à côté chaque boîte utilisateur pour laquelle un mot de passe a été spécifié. Advanced Function Operations 5-9 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5 Liste de fichiers % Sélectionnez une boîte dans "Connexion de boîte" pour afficher l'écran comportant les informations élémentaires de la boîte utilisateur ainsi que la liste des documents enregistrés dans la boîte utilisateur. Rubrique Description Vue Vignettes Indiquez si les documents doivent être ou non affichés sous forme de miniatures. Spécifiez l'opération Sélectionnez l'opération à effectuer sur le document. Pour plus de détails, voir "Opérations sur le document" à la page 5-10. [Modifier l'affichage] Affiche la case "Sélectionner" à côté des documents compatibles avec l'opération sélectionnée. Sélectionner Une case à cocher apparaît à côté des documents sur lesquels l'opération sélectionnée peut être effectuée. Vignette Affiche les documents sous forme de miniatures. Nom Document Affiche le nom du document. Nombre d'originaux Affiche le nombre d'originaux. [Modif. nom] Il est possible de changer le nom du document. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5-10 Advanced Function Operations 5.4.2 Opérations sur le document Les documents sélectionnés peuvent être imprimés ou supprimés. Impression 1 Sélectionnez "Impression" dans "Spécifiez l'opération", et appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier l'affichage]. Une case à cocher apparaît à côté des documents qui peuvent être imprimés. 2 Cochez la case à côté du document voulu, et appuyez ensuite sur [Réglage impression]. Advanced Function Operations 5-11 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5 3 Spécifiez les réglages voulus, et appuyez sur [OK]. – Sous "Plage de pages", sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer la totalité des pages du document sélectionné, ou bien spécifiez les pages à imprimer. – "Changer l'ordre" vous permet de modifier l'ordre d'impression lorsqu'il s'agit d'imprimer plusieurs documents. 4 Appuyez sur [Ouvrir Fichier]. Une fois le téléchargement terminé, le fichier PDF du document s'affiche à l'écran. 5 Appuyez sur [Impression]. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5-12 Advanced Function Operations Suppression 1 Sélectionnez "Supprimer" dans "Spécifiez l'opération", et appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier l'affichage]. Une case à cocher apparaît à côté des documents qui peuvent être supprimés. 2 Cochez la case à côté du document voulu, et appuyez ensuite sur [Supprimer]. – Cocher la case "Cocher/Décocher (s'applique à tous les documents)" permet de sélectionner tous les documents. Advanced Function Operations 5-13 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5 3 Confirmez le nom du document à supprimer, et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5-14 Advanced Function Operations 6 Image Panel Advanced Function Operations 6-3 Image Panel 6 6 Image Panel 6.1 Présentation Image Panel est une nouvelle interface utilisateur du panneau de contrôle ; qui offre une nouvelle opérabilité associée à une utilisation intuitive et conviviale. ! Détails Cette fonction est disponible sur la MFP pour laquelle le i-Option LK-101 est enregistré. Dans Image Panel, la séquence des opérations comprend trois étapes : "numérisation des documents", "édition", et "spécification de la destination", toutes ces opérations pouvant être effectuées sur le même écran. Cela permet de garder une vue globale des opérations qui s'enchaînent et de savoir précisément quelle est la fonctions en cours. En outre, l'amélioration de l'interface a conduit à ne pas inclure dans Image Panel certaines des fonctions présentes sur les anciens modèles. Si les fonctions Mon Panneau et les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont disponibles sur la MFP, vous pouvez personnaliser l'écran Image Panel. 6 Image Panel 6-4 Advanced Function Operations 6.2 Afficher Image Panel Affichez Image Panel par le menu Application. % Appuyez sur [Image Panel] dans le menu Application pour afficher Image Panel. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur le menu Application, voir "Affectation des touches d'application" à la page 3-3. Advanced Function Operations 6-5 Image Panel 6 6.3 Opérations sur Image Panel 6.3.1 Organisation de l'écran L'écran Image Panel se compose des éléments suivants : 1 3 4 5 6 2 8 7 9 No. Nom Description 1 Zone Informations de connexion Affiche le nom et l'icône de l'utilisateur actuellement connecté. 2 Zone Source Données Sélectionnez "Numéris.", "Liste Bte Util." ou "Média" pour numériser les documents. 3 Zone Desktop Affiche sous forme de vignettes ou de liste, les documents numérisés issus de la zone Numérisation des données. 4 Sélecteur Liste/Vignette Cette touche permet de modifier l'affichage de la zone Desktop en basculant entre Liste et Vignettes. 5 Zone des messages Affiche des messages supplémentaires pour préciser une procédure par exemple. 6 Zone d'état Affiche la date et l'heure actuelle. Affiche aussi des icônes d'alerte confirmant un avertissement. 7 Zone Envoyer vers/ Outil d'édition Dans la zone Envoyer vers, la destination sélectionnée dans la zone Destin. Données s'affiche sous forme d'icône. L'outil d'édition permet de modifier les documents numérisés. 8 Sélecteur Envoyer vers/ Outil d'édition Cette touche permet de basculer l'affichage entre la zone Envoyer vers et la zone Outil d'édition. 9 Zone Destin. Données Spécifiez la destination des documents numérisés. 6 Image Panel 6-6 Advanced Function Operations 6.3.2 Séquence opératoire Cette section décrit la séquence d'opérations sur Image Panel, à partir de la capture des documents jusqu'à leur envoi, à savoir dans l'ordre, "numériser", "éditer les documents" et "en spécifier la destination". 2 Remarque Il est possible également de spécifier d'abord la destination, et de numériser ensuite les documents. 1 Numérisez le document dans la zone Source Données. – Pour numériser un original, mettez-le en place et appuyez ensuite sur [Numéris.]. – Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation selon les besoins puis lancez la numérisation. Pour plus de détails, voir "Numéris." à la page 6-9. – Pour accéder à un document enregistré dans une boîte utilisateur, sélectionnez la boîte utilisateur dans [Liste Bte Util.], et sélectionnez le document à charger. Pour plus de détails, voir "Charger depuis un boîte utilisateur" à la page 6-10. – Pour accéder à un document enregistré en mémoire externe, sélectionnez l'onglet Média dans l'écran Liste Bte Util., puis sélectionnez le document à charger. Pour plus de détails, voir "Charger depuis la mémoire externe" à la page 6-11. Advanced Function Operations 6-7 Image Panel 6 2 Dans la zone Outil d'édition, modifiez le document numérisé selon vos besoins. – Pour plus de détails, voir "Modifier" à la page 6-12. 3 Spécifiez la destination des documents numérisés dans la zone Destin. Données. – Pour imprimer le document, appuyez sur [Impression]. Pour plus de détails, voir "Impression" à la page 6-13. – Pour envoyer le document, sélectionnez la destination dans la [Liste Destinat.]. Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifiez un destinataire" à la page 6-14. 6 Image Panel 6-8 Advanced Function Operations – Pour l'enregistrer dans la mémoire externe, appuyez sur [Média] dans l'écran Liste Destinat. Pour plus de détails, voir "Enregistrer dans mémoire externe" à la page 6-15. Une fois qu'une destination a été spécifiée, la zone Envoyer vers apparaît. Pour plus de détails, voir "Envoyer vers" à la page 6-15. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ] pour lancer l'émission des données. Advanced Function Operations 6-9 Image Panel 6 6.3.3 Numériser des documents Sélectionnez "Numéris." ou "Liste Bte Util." pour numériser les documents. Numéris. 1 Appuyez sur [Numéris.] pour afficher l'écran Param. Numéris. 2 Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation selon les besoins. 3 Appuyez sur [Numéris.]. ! Détails Le mode numérisation permet de ne numériser qu'un seul document à la fois. Rubrique Description Type original Sélectionnez la qualité image en fonction du contenu de l'original. Recto/Recto-Vers Sélectionnez un mode de numérisation pour numériser une seule face ou les deux faces de l'original. Définition Sélectionnez la résolution de la numérisation. Couleur Précisez si l'original doit être numérisé en couleur ou en noir et blanc. Type Fichier Sélectionnez le format de fichier pour enregistrer les données numérisées. Contraste Réglez la densité de la numérisation. [Numér. Séparée] Il est possible de diviser l'opération de numérisation en plusieurs sessions pour divers types de documents, par exemple lorsque toutes les pages d'un document ne peuvent être chargées dans l'ADF, lorsqu'on utilise la vitre d'exposition ou lorsque des documents recto sont combinés à des documents recto-verso. 6 Image Panel 6-10 Advanced Function Operations Charger depuis un boîte utilisateur La sélection d'une boîte utilisateur dans "Liste Bte Util." fait apparaître l'écran Utiliser document. % Sélectionnez le document à numériser et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. ! Détails Si la boîte utilisateur sélectionnée est protégée par mot de passe, l'écran permettant d'introduire le mot de passe apparaît. Entrez le mot de passe. Il n'est possible de sélectionner qu'une seule boîte. Il est possible de sélectionner un maximum de 10 documents dans la boîte. Pour charger depuis l'écran Copie, un document enregistré dans une boîte, les seules destinations disponibles à la sélection sont "Impr." et "Boîte Utilis.". Si vous avez spécifié "Boîte Utilis." comme destination, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner ensemble plusieurs documents. Si vous avez spécifié "Impression" comme destination, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner ensemble plusieurs documents. Rubrique Description [Modif. nom] Renomme le document sélectionné. [Détails Document] Permet de vérifier les informations détaillées et d'afficher un aperçu du document sélectionné. Advanced Function Operations 6-11 Image Panel 6 Charger depuis la mémoire externe 1 Sélectionnez l'onglet Média dans l'écran Liste Bte Util. pour afficher la liste des documents qui se trouvent en mémoire externe. 2 Pour ouvrir un dossier, sélectionnez le dossier voulu, et appuyez ensuite sur [Ouvrir]. – Les fichiers qui peuvent être chargés depuis la mémoire externe sont les fichiers de type PDF, TIFF, JPEG et XPS. 3 Sélectionnez le document à charger. 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. ! Détails Pour raccorder une mémoire externe, un kit de connexion locale en option est nécessaire. Pour charger un document depuis une mémoire externe, réglez "Imprimer Document" dans "Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe" sur "Oui". En outre, pour que l'Identification utilisateur puisse intervenir, "Impression" dans "Autoriser fonction" doit être réglé sur "Permis". Il n'est possible de charger qu'un seul document. Si un document a déjà été chargé par numérisation ou depuis une boîte, il n'est pas possible de charger un document contenu dans une mémoire externe. Si vous chargez un document depuis une mémoire externe, seule l'opération "Impression" peut être spécifiée comme destination. 6 Image Panel 6-12 Advanced Function Operations 6.3.4 Modifier Modifiez le document numérisé selon les besoins. Aperçu Permet de vérifier les informations détaillées et d'afficher un aperçu du document sélectionné. ! Détails Il n'est pas possible d'afficher l'aperçu d'un document chargé depuis une mémoire externe. S'il s'agit d'un document combiné, seul l'aperçu du premier document peut être affiché. Combiner Documents Plusieurs documents peuvent être combinés en un seul document. % Appuyez sur [Déplacer] pour changer l'ordre des documents à combiner. ! Détails S'il s'agit d'un document combiné, il est possible de sélectionner "Impr." ou "Liste Destinat." comme destination des données. Retour à Dest. Numér. % Appuyez sur "Retour à Dest. Numér." pour ramener le document sélectionné à l'emplacement source. Une fois la numérisation effectuée, les documents sont supprimés. Les documents chargés depuis une boîte utilisateur sont réintégrés dans la boîte utilisateur. Advanced Function Operations 6-13 Image Panel 6 6.3.5 Spécifier destination Spécifiez la destination des documents numérisés. Impression 1 Appuyez sur [Impression] pour changer l'ordre des documents à combiner. 2 Spécifiez les réglages d'impression. 3 Appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. ! Détails Si plusieurs documents ont été numérisés, il n'est pas possible de spécifier les réglages d'impression. Les éléments proposés à la sélection diffèrent selon les options installées. Rubrique Description Copies Sur le clavier, spécifiez l'étendue des pages et le nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer. Impression Indiquez si le mode d'impression doit être recto-verso ou non. Finition Permet de spécifier la configuration Tri, Groupe, Décalé, Agrafage, Perforation, Réglage Position Agrafage et Réglage Position Perforation. 6 Image Panel 6-14 Advanced Function Operations Spécifiez un destinataire 1 Dans la [Liste Destinat.], sélectionnez la destination du document à envoyer. 2 Appuyez sur [Recher simple] pour afficher les destinations enregistrées dans les carnets d'adresses de la machine. ! Détails Si les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont disponibles, appuyez sur l'onglet Mon Adresse pour afficher Mon Carnet d'adresses. Pour plus de détails sur Mon Carnet d'adresses, voir "Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses" à la page 10-3. Si vous avez chargé ensemble plusieurs documents, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner "Boîte Utilis." comme destination. Si un document est chargé depuis une mémoire externe, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner "Liste Destinat.". Si l'on charge un document enregistré dans une boîte depuis l'écran Copie, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner une autre destination que "Boîte Utilis.". Advanced Function Operations 6-15 Image Panel 6 Enregistrer dans mémoire externe 1 Sélectionnez [Média] sur l'écran Liste Destinat. 2 Appuyez sur [OK]. ! Détails Pour raccorder une mémoire externe, un kit de connexion locale en option est nécessaire. Pour enregistrer en mémoire externe, réglez "Enregistrer document" dans "Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe" sur "ON". En outre, pour que l'identification utilisateur soit effectuée, "Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe" dans "Autoriser fonction" doit être réglé sur "Permis". Si vous spécifiez "Impr." comme destination, ou sélectionnez une destination dans "Liste Destinat.", il n'est pas possible de sélectionner [Média]. Seuls les documents numérisés peuvent être enregistrés dans la mémoire externe. 6.3.6 Envoyer vers Une fois qu'une destination a été spécifiée, la zone Envoyer vers apparaît. Les documents numérisés et les destinations sont affichés en tant qu'icônes en bas de l'écran. % Appuyez sur les icônes voulues pour afficher le détail des données et les destinations spécifiées. 6 Image Panel 6-16 Advanced Function Operations 6.4 Personnaliser Image Panel Si les fonctions Mon Panneau et les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont disponibles sur la MFP, l'écran Image Panel peut être personnalisé. ! Détails Pour personnaliser l'écran Image Panel, l'environnement requis est le suivant. Les fonctions Mon Panneau et les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont disponibles sur la MFP. L'identification utilisateur a été effectuée et l'utilisateur est connecté en tant que utilisateur enregistré. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions Mon Panneau, voir "Fonctions Mon Panneau" à la page 9-3. Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses, voir "Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses" à la page 10-3. 6.4.1 Personnaliser la zone Source Données Dans la zone Source Données, vous pouvez enregistrer une icône de raccourci pointant vers une boîte utilisateur souvent utilisée. 1 Dans "Source Données", appuyez sur [Liste Bte Util.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Enreg. Bureau/Modifier]. Advanced Function Operations 6-17 Image Panel 6 3 Sélectionnez la boîte utilisateur à enregistrer dans la zone Desktop, et sélectionnez dans la zone Numérisation des données l'emplacement où vous voulez enregistrer l'icône. – La boîte utilisateur qui est enregistrée dans la zone Desktop ne peut pas être déplacée vers un autre emplacement du bureau. – Si vous sélectionnez un emplacement du bureau dans lequel une autre icône est enregistrée, l'icône sera alors écrasée. 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. Ceci enregistre l'icône de raccourci de la boîte utilisateur. 6 Image Panel 6-18 Advanced Function Operations 6.4.2 Personnaliser la zone Destin. Données Dans la zone Destin. Données, vous pouvez enregistrer une icône de raccourci pointant vers une destination souvent utilisée. 1 Dans la zone Destin. Données, appuyez sur [Liste Destinat.]. 2 Appuyez sur [Enreg. Bureau/Modifier]. 3 Sélectionnez la destination à enregistrer dans la zone Desktop, et sélectionnez dans la zone de destination des données l'emplacement où vous voulez enregistrer l'icône. – La destination qui est enregistrée dans la zone Desktop ne peut pas être déplacée vers un autre emplacement du bureau. – Si vous sélectionnez un emplacement du bureau dans lequel une autre icône est enregistrée, l'icône sera alors écrasée. Advanced Function Operations 6-19 Image Panel 6 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. Ceci enregistre l'icône de raccourci de la destination. 6 Image Panel 6-20 Advanced Function Operations 6.4.3 Supprimer une icône de raccourci enregistrée 1 Appuyez sur [Enreg. Bureau/Modifier]. 2 Sélectionnez l'icône à supprimer. 3 Appuyez sur [Supprimer]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. Ceci supprime l'icône de raccourci. 7 Enregistrement Photo Advanced Function Operations 7-3 Enregistrement Photo 7 7 Enregistrement Photo 7.1 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses Via PageScope Web Connection, il est possible d'ajouter des données photo à une adresse déjà enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses. Pour enregistrer des données photo dans une entrée du carnet d'adresses, l'adresse doit avoir été préalablement enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses. ! Détails Cette fonction est disponible sur la MFP pour laquelle l’i-Option LK-101 est enregistré. Les photos enregistrées s'affichent dans la Liste des destinations d'Image Panel. 7.1.1 Spécifications relatives aux données photo L'enregistrement des données photo est subordonné aux spécifications suivantes : ! Détails Il se peut que les données photo ne soient pas mises à l'échelle pour l'enregistrement. Rubrique Caractéristiques techniques Type fichier Format BMP, couleur 24-bit, non compressé Format image 48 e 48 pixels Taille des données 6 966 octets 7 Enregistrement Photo 7-4 Advanced Function Operations 7.1.2 Enregistrer une photo Pour enregistrer des données photo, utilisez PageScope Web Connection. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur PageScope Web Connection, voir le guide de l'utilisateur correspondant. ! Détails Pour enregistrer des données photo dans une entrée du carnet d'adresses, l'adresse doit avoir été préalablement enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses. Si la fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses est disponible, elle vous permet d'enregistrer des données photo dans une entrée du carnet d'adresses Mon Carnet d'adresses. Pour enregistrer des données photo dans une entrée du carnet d'adresses, vous devez vous connecter en tant qu'utilisateur enregistré. 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré ou comme Administrateur. 2 Sélectionnez l'onglet Enr. Dest. 3 Sélectionnez le menu "Photo/Icône". Advanced Function Operations 7-5 Enregistrement Photo 7 4 Sélectionnez l'entrée voulue dans le carnet d'adresses, puis cliquez sur la touche [Modifier]. – Si une photo est enregistrée, "Photo" apparaît dans la colonne "Photo/Icône". 5 Sélectionnez "Enregistrer photo". 6 Cliquez sur la touche [Browse], puis spécifiez l'emplacement source de la photo à enregistrer. 7 Cliquez sur la touche [OK]. 7 Enregistrement Photo 7-6 Advanced Function Operations 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF Advanced Function Operations 8-3 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8.1 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8.1.1 Présentation Les fonctions Traitement PDF permettent les opérations suivantes : - Si vous désirez envoyer des documents au moyen des fonctions numérisation/boîte utilisateur, et que vous sélectionnez le format de fichier PDF ou PDF compact, vous pouvez spécifier les propriétés du fichier PDF. - Lors de l'envoi de documents au moyen des fonctions de numérisation/boîte utilisateur, et que vous sélectionnez le format de fichier PDF ou PDF compact, il est possible de crypter le fichier PDF par un mot de passe ou un identifiant numérique. - Pour transmettre un fichier PDF crypté, vous pouvez créer une signature numérique en utilisant le certificat de la MFP. - La fonction d'impression directe vous permet d'imprimer des documents contenus dans un fichier PDF crypté par AES. ! Détails Cette fonction est disponible sur la MFP pour laquelle l’i-Option LK-102 est enregistré. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur la fonction numérisation/boîte utilisateur, voir le guide de l'utilisateur pour chaque fonction. 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8-4 Advanced Function Operations 8.1.2 Propriétés des documents PDF Si vous désirez envoyer des documents au moyen des fonctions numérisation/boîte utilisateur, et que vous sélectionnez le format de fichier "PDF" ou "PDF compact", vous pouvez spécifier les propriétés du fichier PDF. ! Détails Vous pouvez aussi spécifier les propriétés PDF lorsque vous envoyez un document au format PDF dans une boîte utilisateur d'un autre périphérique au moyen de PageScope Web Connection. Lors de l'enregistrement d'un document dans la boîte utilisateur par la commande "Enregistrer document" de la fonction Boîte Utilis., il n'est pas possible de spécifier les propriétés PDF. Rubrique Description Titre Spécifiez un intitulé pour le fichier PDF si [Non] est sélectionné pour "Appliq. Nom fichier". Appliq. Nom fichier Spécifiez si le nom de fichier doit ou non être utilisé comme titre du fichier PDF. Auteur Spécifiez le nom de l'auteur. Pour procéder à l'identification, c'est l'ID utilisateur est spécifié pour le nom d'auteur. Sujet Spécifiez le sujet du fichier PDF. Mots-clés Spécifiez les mots-clés du fichier PDF. Advanced Function Operations 8-5 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8 8.1.3 Cryptage et Signature numérique du fichier PDF Lors de l'envoi de documents numérisés ou enregistrés dans la boîte utilisateur, si vous sélectionnez "PDF" ou "PDF compact" comme format de fichier, vous pouvez crypter les fichiers PDF par un mot de passe ou un identifiant numérique personnel. Si un certificat est enregistré sur la MFP, vous pouvez signer numériquement un fichier PDF avant de transmettre les données. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un certificat sur la MFP, voir le Guide de l'Utilisateur – Administrateur Réseau. ! Détails Vous pouvez aussi spécifier le cryptage et la signature numérique du fichier PDF lorsque vous envoyez un document au format PDF dans une boîte utilisateur d'un autre périphérique au moyen de PageScope Web Connection. Cryptage par mot de passe % Pour crypter un fichier par un mot de passe, spécifiez les réglages suivants. Rubrique Description Cible de cryptage Sélectionnez la cible de cryptage. Si vous sélectionnez [Sauf métadonnées], vous pouvez exclure de la cible de cryptage les réglages effectués dans "Propriétés des documents PDF". Si vous sélectionnez [Sauf métadonnées], vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Niveau faible] pour "Niveau de cryptage". Type de cryptage Sélectionnez [Code d'accès]. Signature Si une certificat est enregistré sur la MFP, spécifiez s'il faut ou non appliquer une signature numérique. Niveau de cryptage Spécifiez le niveau de cryptage. Niveau faible : méthode de cryptage RC4 (la longueur de clé est de 40 bits) Niveau élevé 1 : méthode de cryptage RC4 (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits) Niveau élevé 2 : méthode de cryptage AES (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits) Code d'accès Entrez le code permettant d'ouvrir le fichier PDF crypté. Entrez une nouvelle fois le code pour confirmation. Permissions Document Entrez le mot de passe permettant de changer les permissions document. Entrez une nouvelle fois le code pour confirmation. Lorsque vous spécifiez les permissions document, appuyez sur [Paramètres Détaillés] pour spécifier les permissions en détail. La plage de réglage varie selon le niveau de cryptage. 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8-6 Advanced Function Operations Paramètres Détaillés Cryptage par ID numérique % Pour crypter un fichier par l'ID numérique de l'utilisateur, spécifiez les réglages suivants. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de l'ID numérique de l'utilisateur (expéditeur) sur la MFP, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur – Administrateur Réseau. Rubrique Description Impression Autorisée Spécifiez si l'impression des fichiers PDF est autorisée ou non. Si vous spécifiez un niveau de cryptage "Niveau élevé 1"/"Niveau élevé 2", vous pouvez préciser aussi [Permettre seulement Basse résolution]. Extraire Documents/Images Indiquez si vous souhaitez autoriser ou non la copie de texte, d'images et d'autres contenus. Modifier Permissions Sélectionnez le niveau de permission approprié de modification du document, y compris la signature des données, la saisie et les remarques. Rubrique Description Cible de cryptage Sélectionnez la cible de cryptage. Si vous sélectionnez [Sauf métadonnées], vous pouvez exclure de la cible de cryptage les réglages effectués dans "Propriétés des documents PDF". Type de cryptage Appuyez sur [ID numérique]. Sélectionnez [ID numérique] pour afficher l'écran permettant de sélectionner une destination. Sélectionnez la destination enregistrée, ou lancez une recherche LDAP pour sélectionner la destination pour laquelle un ID numérique est enregistré. Sélectionnez [Même que destination] pour associer l'ID numérique à la destination. Il est possible de spécifier 100 ID numériques maximum. ! Détails Sélectionnez [ID numérique] pour afficher l'écran permettant de sélectionner une destination. Les carnets d'adresses e-mail en transmission S/MIME et associés à un ID numérique apparaissent à l'écran. Après avoir sélectionné le carnet d'adresses désiré, vous pouvez spécifier l'application de l'ID numérique pour le cryptage. Même si vous spécifiez un ID numérique, la destination n'en sera pas spécifiée pour autant. Il faut d'abord spécifier la destination des données. L'ID numérique dépend du niveau d'autorisation d'accès affecté à l'utilisateur. Lorsque vous enregistrez un document dans la boîte utilisateur, il n'est pas possible de crypter les fichiers PDF par un ID numérique. Signature Si une certificat est enregistré sur la MFP, spécifiez s'il faut ou non appliquer une signature numérique. Niveau de cryptage Spécifiez le niveau de cryptage. Si vous avez opté pour un cryptage par ID numérique, vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Niveau faible] dans "Niveau de cryptage". Niveau élevé 1 : méthode de cryptage RC4 (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits) Niveau élevé 2 : méthode de cryptage AES (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits) Advanced Function Operations 8-7 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8 8.1.4 Impres. dir. La fonction d'impression directe vous permet d'imprimer des documents contenus dans un fichier PDF crypté par AES. Pour effectuer une impression directe, utilisez PageScope Web Connection. 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur public ou comme utilisateur enregistré, et sélectionnez l'onglet Impres. dir. 2 Cliquez sur la touche [Browse] pour sélectionner le fichier, puis cliquez sur la touche [Imprimer]. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur PageScope Web Connection, voir le guide de l'utilisateur correspondant. 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF 8-8 Advanced Function Operations 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau Advanced Function Operations 9-3 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9.1 Présentation Les fonctions Mon Panneau gèrent de manière centralisée l'environnement du panneau de contrôle (Mon Panneau) et permettent de le personnaliser en fonction de l'application utilisée pour obtenir Mon Panneau sur la MFP sélectionnée par l'utilisateur. Les fonctions Mon Panneau garantissent le même niveau d'opérabilité sur multiple MFP dans un environnement réseau. ! Détails Cette fonction est utilisée avec PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de cette fonction, voir le manuel de PageScope My Panel Manager. D'autre part, PageScope My Panel Manager permet de spécifier les réglages concernant Mon Panneau. Pour plus de détails, voir PageScope My Panel Manager. 9.1.1 Paramètres personnalisables Mon Panneau permet de personnaliser les éléments suivants. - Réglage de langue d'affichage du panneau de contrôle. - Réglage du système d'unité affiché à l'écran lors de la saisie de valeurs numériques. - Organisation des touches de raccourci sur l'écran de base en mode Copie et des paramètres de l'écran de base. - Organisation des touches de raccourci sur l'écran de base en mode Numérisation/Fax et des paramètres de l'écran de base. - Sélection couleur du panneau de contrôle. - Affichage du menu principal de Mon Panneau. - Affichage de l'écran d'accueil du panneau de contrôle. ! Détails Si les fonctions Mon Panneau et les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont disponibles sur la MFP, l'écran Image Panel peut être personnalisé. Pour plus de détails, voir "Personnaliser Image Panel" à la page 6-16. 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9-4 Advanced Function Operations 9.1.2 Organigramme des fonctions Mon Panneau Cette section décrit la séquence opératoire des fonctions Mon Panneau. L'utilisateur procède à l'identification utilisateur pour la MFP sélectionnée. Si l'Identification utilisateur est validée, la MFP se connecte automatiquement au serveur pour obtenir Mon Panneau à l'intention de l'utilisateur connecté. Mon Panneau est disponible pendant la connexion de l'utilisateur. Dès que l'utilisateur se déconnecte, Mon Panneau est désactivé. ! Détails En cas d'échec de la connexion au serveur, vérifiez la connexion réseau. 9.1.3 Restrictions concernant les fonctions Mon Panneau Mon Panneau s'accompagne des restrictions suivantes. - Seul l'utilisateur peut enregistrer, modifier, ou supprimer Mon Panneau. L'Administrateur de la MFP ne peut pas effectuer d'opérations sur Mon Panneau. - Si Mon Panneau n'est pas personnalisé, la langue, le système d'unité, et sélection couleur du panneau de contrôle sont conformes aux réglages de la MFP. - Si Mon Panneau n'est pas personnalisé, l'écran initial du panneau de contrôle affiche le menu principal de Mon Panneau. - Seuls les réglages copieurs et les réglages numérisation/fax enregistrés dans la mémoire de la MFP sont disponibles. - Selon les fonctions de la MFP ou des options installées sur la MFP sur laquelle Mon Panneau est utilisé, il se peut que l'environnement opératoire spécifié en tant que Mon Panneau ne soit pas disponible. - L'enregistrement, l'édition, ou la suppression de Mon Panneau peut causer une erreur si la connexion au serveur n'est pas de qualité satisfaisante. En cas d'erreur, vérifiez la connexion réseau. (1) Identification utilisateur Serveur (Gestion de Mon Panneau) Mon Panneau activé Mon Panneau activé (3) Envoi de Mon Panneau (2) Accès au serveur Mon Panneau désactivé Advanced Function Operations 9-5 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9 9.2 Afficher Mon Panneau 9.2.1 Écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau C'est l'écran Menu Comm qui apparaît en premier lorsque Mon Panneau s'ouvre. L'utilisateur peut organiser librement les fonctions et raccourcis fréquemment utilisés et en mémoriser les réglages sur l'écran Menu Comm. Le menu principal permet d'enregistrer douze types de touches de raccourcis. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des réglages de l'écran Menu Comm, voir "Réglages Menu Principal" à la page 9-11. 9.2.2 Afficher l'écran Menu Comm Une fois que l'utilisateur a accédé aux fonctions Mon Panneau, il peut alors modifier l'écran initial qui doit s'afficher après que l'identification utilisateur a été reconnue valide. C'est dans le menu Application que l'on peut modifier l'écran initial permettant d'accéder au Menu Comm de Mon Panneau. % Appuyez sur [Mon Panneau] sur l'écran Menu Application pour accéder à l'écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau. 2 Remarque L'écran initial qui s'affiche après une identification valide peut être modifié dans [Réglages Mon Panneau]. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglage Écran par défaut" à la page 9-12. Pour plus de détails sur le menu Application, voir "Affectation des touches d'application" à la page 3-3. 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9-6 Advanced Function Operations 9.3 Personnaliser Mon Panneau % Pour personnaliser Mon Panneau, utilisez les [Réglages Mon Panneau] du menu "Utilitaires". 9.3.1 Réglages Mon Panneau Vous pouvez spécifier les éléments suivants. 9.3.2 Afficher l'écran Réglages Mon Panneau Lorsque les fonctions Mon Panneau sont activées, le menu Utilitaires affiche [Réglages Mon Panneau]. 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré. 2 Appuyez sur [Utilitaires/Compteur]. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglages Mon Panneau]. Rubrique Description Réglage Langue Spécifiez la langue à utiliser pour le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglage Langue" à la page 9-7. Réglage Unité de mesure Spécifiez l'unité pour l'affichage des valeurs numériques sur le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglage Unité de mesure" à la page 9-7. Réglages Copieur Spécifiez les réglages pour l'écran de base en mode Copie et pour les touches de raccourcis. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglages Copieur" à la page 9-8. Paramètres Numérisation/ Fax Spécifiez les réglages pour l'écran de base en mode Numérisation/Fax et pour les touches de raccourcis. Pour plus de détails, voir "Paramètres Numérisation/Fax" à la page 9-9. Param. Sélection Couleur Spécifiez la sélection couleur du panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails, voir "Param. Sélection Couleur" à la page 9-11. Réglages Menu Principal Spécifiez les réglages de l'écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglages Menu Principal" à la page 9-11. Réglage Écran par défaut Spécifiez les réglages de l'écran initial qui s'affiche après validation de l'identification utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglage Écran par défaut" à la page 9-12. Advanced Function Operations 9-7 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9 L'écran Réglages Mon Panneau apparaît. 9.3.3 Réglage Langue % Spécifiez parmi les langues disponibles sur la MFP la langue à utiliser pour le panneau de contrôle. 9.3.4 Réglage Unité de mesure % Sélectionnez "mm (val.numérique)", "pouce (val.numér.)", ou "pouce (fraction)" comme unité de longueur à utiliser dans le panneau de contrôle. 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9-8 Advanced Function Operations 9.3.5 Réglages Copieur Spécifiez les réglages pour l'écran de base en mode Copie et pour les touches de raccourcis. Onglet par Défaut Spécifiez les réglages de l'écran de base en mode Copie depuis l'écran de base ou depuis l'écran Copie rapide. L'écran de base est l'affichage normal de base. En ce qui concerne l'écran Copie rapide, les paramètres de l'écran de base s'affichent sur un seul écran afin de faciliter les réglages multiples. Touches de raccourci Les touches de raccourci pointant vers des fonctions d'application fréquemment utilisées peuvent être ajoutées à l'écran de base en mode Copie. Seulement deux touches de raccourci peuvent être programmées. ! Détails Si l'icône du contrôleur image est affichée, alors une seule touche de raccourci peut être programmée dans l'écran de base. Advanced Function Operations 9-9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9 9.3.6 Paramètres Numérisation/Fax Spécifiez les réglages pour l'écran de base en mode Numérisation/Fax et pour les touches de raccourcis. Onglet par Défaut % Spécifiez l'onglet par défaut du mode Numérisation/Fax, en sélectionnant "Recherche LDAP", "Vérif. histor", "Carnet Adresses" ou "Saisie dir". Carnet d'adresses par Défaut % Si vous utilisez le carnet d'adresses public, spécifiez le type d'index à afficher dans "Carnet Adresses". Par défaut, c'est [Mon Carnet Adresses] qui est sélectionné. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur Mon Carnet d'adresses, voir "Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses" à la page 10-3. 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9-10 Advanced Function Operations Touches de raccourci Les touches de raccourci pointant vers des fonctions d'application fréquemment utilisées peuvent être ajoutées à l'écran de base en mode Numérisation/Fax. Seulement deux touches de raccourci peuvent être programmées. ! Détails Si l'icône du contrôleur image est affichée, alors une seule touche de raccourci peut être programmée dans l'écran de base. Carnet adresses par défaut % Sélectionnez comme méthode d'affichage "Carnet adresses par défaut", "Index" ou "Type d'adresse". Advanced Function Operations 9-11 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9 9.3.7 Param. Sélection Couleur % Pour la couleur indiquant que les touches du panneau de contrôle sont sélectionnées, choisissez "Vert", "Bleu", "Jaune", ou "Vermillon". 9.3.8 Réglages Menu Principal Spécifiez les réglages de l'écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau. L'utilisateur peut organiser librement les fonctions et raccourcis fréquemment utilisés et en mémoriser les réglages sur l'écran Menu Comm. Écran Réglages Menu Principal Les touches de raccourci à afficher sur l'écran Menu Comm s'appellent touches de menu principal et il est possible d'enregistrer jusqu'à 12 types de touches. Pour enregistrer en mémoire l'icône de raccourci comme touche de menu principal, appuyez sur [Icône]. 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau 9-12 Advanced Function Operations Enregistrer les touches de menu principal Diverses fonctions, la configuration de la fonction copie, la configuration de la fonction numérisation/fax, les réglages copieurs mémorisés et les réglages numérisation/fax mémorisés sont respectivement affectées à des touches de menu principal. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement du réglage Programme Copie et du réglage Programme Numérisation/Fax, voir le guide de l'utilisateur correspondant. ! Détails Si la fonction Navigateur Web ou la fonction Image Panel est activée, les touches peuvent être définies sur l'écran Menu Comm. 9.3.9 Réglage Écran par défaut % Spécifiez l'écran initial qui doit apparaître une fois que l'identification utilisateur a été effectuée depuis le Menu Comm, ou les modes Copie, Numérisation/Fax, Boîte utilisateur, Image Panel, ou Navigateur Web. Par défaut, c'est l'écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau qui apparaît. ! Détails Si la fonction Navigateur Web ou la fonction Image Panel est activée, cet écran peut être spécifié comme écran initial. Rubrique Description Fonction Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pour chacune des fonctions Copie, Numérisation/Fax, Boîte Utilisateur, Image Panel, ou Navigateur Web. Réglage Fonction Copie Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pour chaque fonction du mode couleur, paramètre papier, réglage zoom, recto-verso/combinaison, et finition. Réglage Fonction Numérisation/Fax Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pour chacune des fonctions Numérisation/ Fax, notamment le réglage de numérisation, le réglage de l'original, et le réglage communication. Réglage Programme Copie Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pointant vers la mémoire de réglage Copie enregistrée sur la MFP. Sur l'écran Menu Comm, appuyez sur [Icône] pour enregistrer l'icône de raccourci pointant vers la mémoire de réglage. La touche de raccourci pour la mémoire de réglage Copie ne peut être utilisée que sur la MFP enregistrée. Réglage Progr. Numéris./ Fax Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pointant vers la mémoire de réglage Numérisation/Fax enregistrée sur la MFP. Sur l'écran Menu Comm, appuyez sur [Icône] pour enregistrer l'icône de raccourci pointant vers la mémoire de réglage. La touche de raccourci pointant vers la mémoire de réglage Numérisation/Fax ne peut être utilisée que sur la MFP enregistrée. 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses Advanced Function Operations 10-3 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10.1 Présentation Grâce à la fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses, le carnet d'adresses personnel (Mon Carnet d'adresses) est géré centralement sur le serveur, et l'utilisateur peut accéder au carnet d'adresses personnel Mon Carnet d'adresses de la MFP sélectionnée. ! Détails Cette fonction est utilisée avec PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de cette fonction, voir le manuel de PageScope My Panel Manager. D'autre part, PageScope My Panel Manager permet de spécifier les réglages concernant Mon Carnet d'adresses. Pour plus de détails, voir le manuel PageScope My Panel Manager. 10.1.1 Classement du carnet d'adresses Lorsque les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont activées, les carnets d'adresses sont classés dans l'un des deux types suivants. L'utilisateur connecté à la MFP peut accéder aux deux types de carnet d'adresses. Carnet d'adresses public Le carnet d'adresses public est un carnet d'adresses accessible à tout utilisateur enregistré sur la machine de la MFP qu'il a sélectionnée. Le carnet d'adresses public permet d'enregistrer les adresses, les destinations de groupe et les destinations programmées. Du fait que le carnet d'adresses public est enregistré sur la machine de la MFP, les adresses disponibles sont celles qui sont enregistrées sur la MFP. Le carnet d'adresses public peut être enregistré, modifié ou supprimé par l'utilisateur ou l'Administrateur. ! Détails Si l'enregistrement ou l'édition d'adresses sont interdits par les réglages Administrateur, ces opérations ne sont pas possibles. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une adresse, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur – Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax réseau. Mon Carnet d'adresses Mon Carnet d'adresses est un carnet d'adresses accessible seulement à l'utilisateur géré par le serveur. Dans Mon Carnet d'adresses, l'utilisateur peut enregistrer des adresses et des destinations de groupe fréquemment appelées. Du fait que Mon Carnet d'adresses est retourné par le serveur et exploité sur la MFP sélectionnée par l'utilisateur, ce carnet peut être utilisé sur n'importe quelle MFP pour peu qu'elle dispose des fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses. Seul l'utilisateur peut enregistrer, modifier, ou supprimer Mon Carnet d'adresses. 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10-4 Advanced Function Operations 10.1.2 Organigramme des fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses Cette section décrit la séquence opératoire des fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses. L'utilisateur procède à l'identification utilisateur pour la MFP sélectionnée. Si l'Identification utilisateur est validée, la MFP se connecte automatiquement au serveur pour obtenir Mon Carnet d'adresses à l'intention de l'utilisateur connecté. Mon Carnet d'adresses est disponible pendant la connexion de l'utilisateur. Dès que l'utilisateur se déconnecte, Mon Carnet d'adresses est désactivé. ! Détails En cas d'échec de la connexion au serveur, vérifiez la connexion réseau. 10.1.3 Restrictions relatives aux fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses Mon Carnet d'adresses présente les restrictions suivantes. - Seul l'utilisateur peut enregistrer, modifier, ou supprimer Mon Carnet d'adresses. L'administrateur de la MFP ne peut pas effectuer d'opérations sur Mon Carnet d'adresses. - Mon Carnet d'adresses permet d'enregistrer jusqu'à 100 adresses et 10 destinations de groupe (enregistrement maximum de 100 adresses par groupe). - Dès que le nombre d'adresses enregistrées dans Mon Carnet d'adresses atteint le maximum, il n'est plus possible d'enregistrer de nouvelles adresses. - Les destinations programmées ne peuvent pas être enregistrées dans Mon Carnet d'adresses. - Mon Carnet d'adresses ne permet pas la recherche dans une base ou par index. - Les adresses de la boîte utilisateur ne peuvent être utilisées que sur la MFP sur laquelle les destinations sont enregistrées. - En fonction de ses réglages ou des options installées sur la MFP sur laquelle Mon Carnet d'adresses est utilisés, il se peut que l'émission spécifiée pour [Carnet Adresses] ne soit pas possible. - L'enregistrement, l'édition ou la suppression de Mon Carnet d'adresses peut causer une erreur si la connexion au serveur n'est pas de qualité satisfaisante. En cas d'erreur, vérifiez la connexion réseau. Mon Carnet d'adresses activé Mon Carnet d'adresses activé Serveur (Gestion de Mon Carnet d'adresses) (2) Accès au serveur (3) Obtention de Mon Carnet d'adresses Mon Carnet d'adresses activé (1) Identification utilisateur Advanced Function Operations 10-5 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10 10.2 Enregistrement ou édition d'une adresse Mon Carnet d'adresses permet d'enregistrer les destinations privées fréquemment utilisées. Plusieurs méthodes d'enregistrement sont disponibles : - Par le panneau de contrôle de la MFP - Depuis PageScope Web Connection sur un ordinateur du réseau - Par PageScope My Panel Manager Les adresses et destinations de groupe peuvent être enregistrées dans Mon Carnet d'adresses. Cette section décrit la méthode d'enregistrement au moyen du panneau de contrôle de la MFP. 10.2.1 Carnet Adresses Les numéros de fax, les adresses e-mail ou les boîtes utilisateur enregistrées peuvent être sauvegardés dans le carnet d'adresses. Mon Carnet d'adresses permet d'enregistrer 100 adresses maximum. 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré. 2 Appuyez sur [Utilitaires/Compteur]. 3 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-Touche/Boîte]. 4 Appuyez sur [Créer Destination 1-Touche]. 5 Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Privé)]. – Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Public)] pour enregistrer les adresses dans le carnet d'adresses privé. – Si l'enregistrement ou l'édition d'adresses sont interdits par les réglages Administrateur, ces opérations ne sont pas possibles. Pour plus de détails, consultez votre Administrateur. La liste des adresses enregistrées dans le carnet d'adresses (privé) apparaît. 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10-6 Advanced Function Operations 6 Appuyez sur [Nouveau]. – Pour modifier une adresse enregistrée, sélectionnez l'adresse voulue, et appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier]. – Pour supprimer une adresse enregistrée, sélectionnez l'adresse voulue, et appuyez ensuite sur [Eff.]. – Pour vérifier une adresse enregistrée, sélectionnez l'adresse souhaitée et appuyez ensuite sur [Vér.Par. Tâches.]. 7 Sélectionnez le type de destination à enregistrer, puis spécifiez les réglages des éléments requis. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une adresse, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur – Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax réseau. Advanced Function Operations 10-7 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10 10.2.2 Groupe On peut, en les regroupant, enregistrer plusieurs adresses dans Mon Carnet d'adresses et constituer ainsi une destination de groupe. Mon Carnet d'adresses permet d'enregistrer jusqu'à 10 destinations de groupe (enregistrement maximum de 100 destinations par groupe). 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré. 2 Appuyez sur [Utilitaires/Compteur]. 3 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-Touche/Boîte]. 4 Appuyez sur [Créer Destination 1-Touche]. 5 Appuyez sur [Groupe]. La liste des destinations de groupe enregistrées apparaît. 6 Appuyez sur [Privé], puis sur [Nouveau]. – Pour éditer une destination de groupe enregistrée, sélectionnez la destination de groupe voulue, et appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier]. – Pour supprimer une destination de groupe enregistrée, sélectionnez la destination de groupe voulue, et appuyez ensuite sur [Eff.]. – Pour vérifier une destination de groupe enregistrée, sélectionnez la destination de groupe souhaitée et appuyez ensuite sur [Vér.Par. Tâches.]. – Appuyez sur [Public] pour afficher les destinations de groupe publiques. 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10-8 Advanced Function Operations 7 Assurez-vous de sélectionner [Groupe Privé] comme destination, puis spécifiez les réglages des éléments requis. – Lorsque l'on sélectionne [Destinataire], les adresses enregistrées dans Mon Carnet d'adresses s'affichent. Sélectionnez les adresses à grouper. 2 Remarque Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement des destinations de groupe, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur – Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax réseau. Advanced Function Operations 10-9 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10 10.3 Copier des adresses enregistrées d'un carnet à l'autre Les adresses enregistrées peuvent être copiées de Mon Carnet d'adresses vers le carnet d'adresses public et réciproquement. ! Détails En revanche, les destinations de groupe ne peuvent pas être échangées entre ces deux types de carnets d'adresses. 10.3.1 Copier les adresses du carnet public sur Mon Carnet d'adresses Les adresses enregistrées du carnet d'adresses public peuvent être copiées sur Mon Carnet d'adresses. 1 Affichez l'écran Créer Destination 1-Touche. 2 Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Public)]. 3 Sélectionnez le type de destination voulu. La liste des adresses du type de destination sélectionné s'affiche. 4 Sélectionnez l'adresse à copier, et appuyez ensuite sur [Copier vers Adr pers]. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue de confirmation, sélectionnez [Oui], et appuyez ensuite sur [Valider]. L'adresse sélectionnée est copiée. 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10-10 Advanced Function Operations 10.3.2 Copier les adresses de Mon Carnet d'adresses sur le carnet d'adresses public Les adresses enregistrées de Mon Carnet d'adresses peuvent être copiées sur le carnet d'adresses public. 1 Affichez l'écran Créer Destination 1-Touche. 2 Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Privé)]. La liste des adresses enregistrées dans le carnet d'adresses (privé) apparaît. 3 Sélectionnez l'adresse à copier, et appuyez ensuite sur [Copier vers Adr Part]. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue de confirmation, sélectionnez [Oui], et appuyez ensuite sur [Valider]. L'adresse sélectionnée est copiée. Advanced Function Operations 10-11 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10 10.4 Utiliser Mon Carnet d'adresses lors de l'envoi Lorsque l'on envoie un document en mode Numérisation/Fax ou un document enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur, il est possible de spécifier l'adresse voulue figurant dans Mon Carnet d'adresses. 10.4.1 Spécifier une adresse Si vous utilisez les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses, l'écran suivant apparaît lorsque une adresse doit être spécifiée. Les adresses enregistrées dans Mon Carnet d'adresses s'affichent en fonction du type de destination. Sélectionnez une touche correspondant à la destination désirée. % Pour spécifier une adresse enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses public, appuyez sur [Public]. 10.4.2 Rechercher une adresse Si l'adresse voulue n'est pas localisée, elle peut faire l'objet d'une recherche. % Appuyez sur [Recher simple] sur l'écran de recherche d'adresse. – [Type d'adresse] sert à chercher l'adresse selon le type. – [Recherche détaillée] sert à chercher l'adresse d'après le nom de l'adresse ou une partie des données qu'elle contient. 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10-12 Advanced Function Operations 11 Index Advanced Function Operations 11-3 Index 11 11 Index A Activer Onglet 4-11 Adresse 4-9 Animation 4-11 B Barre d'outils 4-8 Boîte 5-8 C Cache 4-12, 5-4 Caractéristiques techniques 4-3 Carnet Adresses 10-5 Carnet d'adresses 10-3, 10-9 Carnet d'adresses public 10-3 Codage 4-11 Code d'accès 8-5 Code-requête 2-6 Connexion 5-6 Connexion à une boîte 5-8 Conventions du manuel 1-4 Cookies 4-12 Cryptage 8-5 CSS 4-11 D Déconnexion 5-7 E Enregistrement Photo 2-3, 7-3 Envoyer vers 6-15 É Écran Réglages Menu Principal 9-11 F Favoris 4-9 Fenêtre Instantanée 4-11 G Groupe 10-7 H Histor. 4-9 Historique Formulaire 4-12 I ID numérique 8-6 Image 4-11 Image Panel 2-3, 6-3 Impres. dir. 8-7 Impression 4-10, 5-10 Infos Navigateur Web 4-12 i-Option LK-101 2-3, 2-5 i-Option LK-102 2-3, 2-5 J JavaScript 4-11 L License Management Server (LMS) 2-5, 2-8 Liste 4-11 Liste de fichiers 5-9 M Menu 4-10 Menu Application 3-4 Menu Principal 9-5 Mémoire externe 6-11, 6-15 Mémos Page 4-11 Mode Affichage 4-11 Mon Carnet d'adresses 2-4, 10-3 Mon Panneau 2-4, 9-3 N Navigateur Web 2-3, 4-3, 4-11 O Opération Page 4-11 P Page d'accueil 4-11 PageScope My Panel Manager 2-4 PageScope Web Connection 5-3, 7-3 Paramètres Numérisation/Fax 9-9 Paramètres Sélect. Couleur 9-11 Paramètres Touche Application 3-4 PDF 4-13, 8-5 Personnaliser 3-3, 6-16, 9-3 Propriétés des documents PDF 8-4 Proxy 4-12 R Rendu intelligent 4-7 Rendu Parfait 4-7 Rendu Rapide 4-11 Retour ligne auto 4-11 Réglage Écran d'accueil 9-12 Réglage Langue 9-7 Réglage Progr. Numéris./Fax 9-12 Réglage Programme Copie 9-12 Réglage Unité de Mesure 9-7 Réglages Copieur 9-8 Réglages Mon Panneau 9-6 11-4 Advanced Function Operations 11 Index S Sécurité 4-12 Sélect. couleur de copie imprim. 4-11 Signature numérique 8-5 Spécifications 7-3 Supprimer 5-12 T Touche d'application 2-3, 3-3 Touche du menu Application 3-3 Traitement PDF 2-3, 8-3 V Vérification césures Japonais 4-11 Vue Important ! En raison des modifications apportées à la spécification de l'interface utilisateur, les images de l'interface utilisateur illustrées dans les guides de l'utilisateur peuvent différer légèrement des descriptions qui en sont faites. Les boutons "Annul", "OK", "Ferm.", "Oui" et "Non" ont été remplacés par des icônes et le texte de leur description peut encore contenir les mots "Annul", "OK", "Ferm.", "Oui" et "Non". Précédente conception : Nouvelle conception : bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Vérification du nom et de la fonction de chaque pièce de cette machine (bizhub C554/C454) Recto.................................................................................................................................................. 1-3 Face arrière ........................................................................................................................................ 1-5 Intérieur .............................................................................................................................................. 1-6 2 Vérification du nom et de la fonction de chaque pièce de cette machine (bizhub C364/C284/C224) Recto.................................................................................................................................................. 2-3 Face arrière ........................................................................................................................................ 2-5 Intérieur .............................................................................................................................................. 2-6 3 Vérification du nom et de la fonction de chaque composant optionnel 3.1 Vérification de la liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C554/C454)................................... 3-3 Recto.................................................................................................................................................. 3-7 Face arrière ........................................................................................................................................ 3-9 3.2 Vérification de la liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C364/C284/C224)............................................................................................................. 3-10 Recto................................................................................................................................................ 3-14 Face arrière ...................................................................................................................................... 3-16 3.3 Unité de finition FS-535, Piqueuse à cheval SD-512, Kit de perforation PK-521 .................... 3-18 3.4 Séparateur du travail JS-602........................................................................................................ 3-20 3.5 Pliage en Z ZU-606........................................................................................................................ 3-21 3.6 Unité d'insertion PI-505 ................................................................................................................ 3-23 3.6.1 Nom et fonction de chaque pièce.................................................................................................... 3-23 3.6.2 Unité d'insertion ............................................................................................................................... 3-24 Touches sur le panneau de contrôle................................................................................................ 3-24 Finition en utilisant l'unité d'insertion............................................................................................... 3-25 3.7 Unité de finition FS-533, Kit de perforation PK-519................................................................... 3-26 3.8 Séparateur du travail JS-506........................................................................................................ 3-27 3.9 Unité de finition FS-534, Piqueuse à cheval SD-511, Kit de perforation PK-520 .................... 3-28 3.10 Unité grande capacité LU-301/LU-204 ....................................................................................... 3-31 4 Vérifier les types de papier disponibles 5 Vérification des spécifications de cette machine Le type de cette machine .................................................................................................................. 5-3 Papier................................................................................................................................................. 5-3 Spécifications mécaniques ................................................................................................................ 5-5 Chargeur de document double numérisation (uniquement pour bizhub C554/C454)....................... 5-5 Environnement d'exploitation ............................................................................................................ 5-6 Spécifications communes.................................................................................................................. 5-6 Fonction Copie................................................................................................................................... 5-7 Fonctions de numérisation................................................................................................................. 5-8 Fonctions Imprimante ...................................................................................................................... 5-10 Fonction réseau ............................................................................................................................... 5-13 Table des matières-2 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 6 Vérifier les spécifications des composants optionnels Fonction fax (Kit fax FK-511) ............................................................................................................. 6-3 Chargeur automatique recto-verso DF-624....................................................................................... 6-4 Chargeur de document double numérisation DF-701 ....................................................................... 6-4 Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 ............................................................................................... 6-5 Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 ............................................................................................... 6-5 Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410 ............................................................................................... 6-6 Unité grande capacité LU-301........................................................................................................... 6-6 Unité grande capacité LU-204........................................................................................................... 6-7 Unité de finition FS-535 ..................................................................................................................... 6-7 Piqueuse à cheval SD-512............................................................................................................... 6-10 Kit de perforation PK-521 ................................................................................................................ 6-11 Séparateur du travail JS-602 ........................................................................................................... 6-11 Unité de pliage en Z ZU-606............................................................................................................ 6-12 Unité d'insertion PI-505 ................................................................................................................... 6-12 Unité de finition FS-534 ................................................................................................................... 6-13 Piqueuse à cheval SD-511............................................................................................................... 6-15 Kit de perforation PK-520 ................................................................................................................ 6-16 Unité de finition FS-533 ................................................................................................................... 6-16 Kit de perforation PK-519 ................................................................................................................ 6-18 Séparateur du travail JS-506 ........................................................................................................... 6-18 Unité d'authentification AU-102....................................................................................................... 6-20 Unité d'authentification AU-201....................................................................................................... 6-21 7 Utilisation de l'Unité d'authentification (type biométrique) 7.1 Unité d'authentification (type biométrique) .................................................................................. 7-3 7.2 État de l'unité d'authentification.................................................................................................... 7-4 7.3 Opérations requises pour utiliser cette fonction (pour l'administrateur) .................................. 7-5 7.3.1 Configuration des paramètres d'authentification de cette machine.................................................. 7-5 7.3.2 Enregistrement des informations concernant l'authentification utilisateur ........................................ 7-7 7.4 Connexion à cette machine ......................................................................................................... 7-10 7.5 Utilisation de Data Administrator (pour l'administrateur) ......................................................... 7-11 7.5.1 Data Administrator ........................................................................................................................... 7-11 7.5.2 Configuration de l'environnement d'exploitation ............................................................................. 7-11 Installation de BioDriver (pilote USB) (Windows 7) .......................................................................... 7-11 Installation de BioDriver (pilote USB) (Windows Vista) .................................................................... 7-12 Installation de BioDriver (pilote USB) (Windows XP)........................................................................ 7-13 Installation du PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification biométrique AU-102 ....... 7-13 7.5.3 Enregistrement des informations concernant l'authentification utilisateur ...................................... 7-14 8 Utiliser l'Unité d'authentification (type carte IC) 8.1 Unité d'authentification (type carte IC) ......................................................................................... 8-3 8.2 Opérations requises pour utiliser cette fonction (pour l'administrateur) .................................. 8-4 8.2.1 Configuration des paramètres d'authentification de cette machine.................................................. 8-4 8.2.2 Enregistrement des informations concernant l'authentification utilisateur ........................................ 8-7 8.3 Connexion à cette machine ........................................................................................................... 8-9 8.4 Utilisation de Data Administrator (pour l'administrateur) ......................................................... 8-10 8.4.1 Data Administrator ........................................................................................................................... 8-10 8.4.2 Configuration de l'environnement d'exploitation ............................................................................. 8-10 Installation du Pilote de carte IC (pilote USB) (Windows 7) ............................................................. 8-10 Installation du Pilote carte IC (pilote USB) (Windows Vista) ............................................................ 8-11 Installation du Pilote carte IC (pilote USB) (Windows XP)................................................................ 8-12 Installation du PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification par carte IC AU-201 ....... 8-12 8.4.3 Enregistrement des informations concernant l'authentification utilisateur ...................................... 8-13 1 Vérification du nom et de la fonction de chaque pièce de cette machine (bizhub C554/C454) bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 1-3 1 1 Vérification du nom et de la fonction de chaque pièce de cette machine (bizhub C554/C454) Recto N° Nom Description 1 Chargeur de document double numérisation Introduit et numérise automatiquement les originaux par pages. Cette unité numérise un original recto-verso simplement en exigeant que le papier soit introduit une seule fois dans la machine sans inversion. Dans le manuel, cette unité est désignée ADF. 2 Levier de déblocage du capot gauche Utilisé pour ouvrir le Capot gauche. 3 Capot gauche Ouvrez le Capot gauche pour éliminer le bourrage papier. 4 Réglette latérale Ajustez cette réglette le long de la largeur de l'original. 5 Bac des originaux Chargez l'original dans ce magasin face vers le haut. Ouvrez le Bac des originaux pour éliminer un bourrage papier dans le Chargeur ADF. 6 Panneau de contrôle Utilisé pour configurer divers paramètres de cette machine. 7 Bac de sortie des originaux L'original numérisé sort dans ce bac. 8 Stylet Utilisé pour sélectionner un menu à l'Écran tactile, ou pour entrer des caractères. 9 Port USB (type A) USB 2.0/1.1 Utilisé pour connecter une unité de mémoire externe (unité de mémoire USB) à cette machine. 1 1-4 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 10 Porte de droite Ouvrez cette porte pour dégager un bourrage papier. 11 Levier de déblocage de la porte de droite Utilisé pour verrouiller la Porte de droite. 12 Introducteur manuel Utilisez ce magasin pour imprimer ou copier sur un papier au format irrégulier, des transparents, des cartes postales (4 e 6 (Carte A6)), des enveloppes ou des planches d'étiquettes. L'introducteur manuel peut contenir jusqu'à 150 feuilles de papier ordinaire, 20 feuilles d'Épais 1, 20 feuilles d'Epais 1+, 20 feuilles d'Épais 2, 20 feuilles d'Épais 3, 20 feuilles d'Épais 4, 20 feuilles de transparents, 20 feuilles de cartes postales (4 e 6 (Carte A6)), planches d'étiquettes ou papier à onglets et 10 feuilles d'enveloppes ou de papier bannière. 13 Témoin Manque papier Clignote en orange lorsqu'un magasin va manquer de papier, et s'allume en continu lorsque le papier est épuisé. 14 Magasin 1, Magasin 2 Permet de charger au maximum 500 feuilles. Ces magasins peuvent contenir jusqu'à 150 feuilles d'Épais 1, d'Epais 1+, d'Épais 2 et d'Épais 3, respectivement. 15 Porte frontale inférieure Ouvrez cette porte pour remplacer le Réservoir de toner usagé ou l'Unité image et pour nettoyer la Vitre de la tête d'impression. 16 Porte frontale supérieure Ouvrez cette porte pour remplacer une Cartouche de toner. 17 Voyant Données Clignote en bleu lorsque cette machine reçoit une tâche. Si une tâche est actuellement spoulée, ce voyant devient bleu. 18 Voyant d'état (voyant d'impression) Clignote en blanc durant l'impression normale. 19 Touche Alimentation Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Éco Énergie. Lorsque l'alimentation est désactivée, la machine entre en mode économie d'énergie, et la LED de la touche Alimentation devient orange. 20 Voyant d'état (voyant d'avertissement ou d'arrêt) Indique l'état de cette machine en clignotant ou en s'allumant. Clignotant orange : Avertissement Allumé orange : La machine s'est arrêtée. N° Nom Description bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 1-5 1 Face arrière N° Nom Description 1 Cordon d'alimentation Utilisé pour alimenter cette machine. 2 Port USB (type A) USB 2.0/1.1 Utilisé pour connecter l'Unité d'authentification AU-102 ou l'Unité d'authentification AU-201. 3 Port USB (type B) USB 2.0/1.1 Connecter à ce port lorsque cette machine est utilisée comme imprimante USB. 4 Connecteur réseau (10Base-T/ 100Base-TX/1000Base-T) Connecter à ce port lorsque cette machine est utilisée comme imprimante réseau ou comme scanner réseau. 1 1-6 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 Intérieur N° Nom Description 1 Vitre d'exposition Utilisée pour charger l'original. 2 Levier du capot de l'unité de fixation Ouvrez ce levier pour éliminer un bourrage papier dans l'unité de fixation. 3 Unité de fixation Utilisé pour mélanger le toner au papier à l'aide de la chaleur et de la pression. 4 Unité recto-verso automatique Utilisée pour inverser le papier lors d'une impression recto-verso. 5 Unité tambour Utilisée pour créer une image imprimée. 6 Languette de déblocage Utilisée pour enlever l'Unité tambour. 7 Nettoyeur fil de charge Utilisé pour nettoyer le Fil de charge électrostatique lorsqu'une erreur d'image se produit. 8 Réservoir de toner usagé Utilisé pour récupérer les toners usagés. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 1-7 1 9 Nettoyeur tête d'impression Utilisé pour nettoyer la surface de la Vitre de la tête d'impression lors du remplacement de l'Unité tambour. 10 Interrupteur principal Actionner cet interrupteur pour mettre la machine en marche ou l'arrêter. 11 Cartouche de toner Cette machine utilise une Cartouche de toner en quatre couleurs : cyan (C), magenta (M), jaune (Y), et noir (K). Une image pleine couleur est créée par la combinaison des quatre couleurs de toner. 12 Compteur total Compte le nombre de pages imprimées jusqu'à ce jour. 13 Vitre de numérisation Utilisée pour numériser une image d'original lors de l'utilisation de l'ADF. 14 Réglette Original Charger l'original le long de cette réglette. Cette réglette est aussi utilisée pour mesurer le format de l'original chargé. 15 Guide d'ouverture et de fermeture Le levier qui verrouille le guide pour numériser le face arrière d'un original. Ouvrir ce guide pour dégager un bourrage papier ou pour nettoyer la Vitre de numérisation (arrière). 16 Vitre de numérisation (arrière) Utilisée pour nettoyer la face arrière d'un original lors de l'utilisation de l'ADF. N° Nom Description 1 1-8 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 2 Vérification du nom et de la fonction de chaque pièce de cette machine (bizhub C364/C284/C224) bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 2-3 2 2 Vérification du nom et de la fonction de chaque pièce de cette machine (bizhub C364/C284/C224) Recto N° Nom Description 1 Panneau de contrôle Utilisé pour configurer divers paramètres de cette machine. 2 Stylet Utilisé pour sélectionner un menu à l'Écran tactile, ou pour entrer des caractères. 3 Port USB (type A) USB 2.0/1.1 Utilisé pour connecter une unité de mémoire externe (unité de mémoire USB) à cette machine. 4 Porte de droite Ouvrez cette porte pour dégager un bourrage papier. 5 Levier de déblocage de la porte de droite Utilisé pour verrouiller la Porte de droite. 6 Introducteur manuel Utilisez ce magasin pour imprimer ou copier sur un papier au format irrégulier, des transparents, des cartes postales (4 e 6 (Carte A6)), des enveloppes ou des planches d'étiquettes. L'introducteur manuel peut contenir jusqu'à 150 feuilles de papier ordinaire, 20 feuilles d'Épais 1, 20 feuilles d'Epais 1+, 20 feuilles d'Épais 2, 20 feuilles d'Épais 3, 20 feuilles d'Épais 4, 20 feuilles de transparents, 20 feuilles de cartes postales (4 e 6 (Carte A6)), planches d'étiquettes ou papier à onglets et 10 feuilles d'enveloppes ou de papier bannière. 7 Témoin Manque papier Clignote en orange lorsqu'un magasin va manquer de papier, et s'allume en continu lorsque le papier est épuisé. 2 2-4 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 8 Magasin 1, Magasin 2 Permet de charger au maximum 500 feuilles. Ces magasins peuvent contenir jusqu'à 150 feuilles d'Épais 1, d'Epais 1+, d'Épais 2 et d'Épais 3, respectivement. 9 Porte frontale Ouvrez cette porte pour remplacer la Cartouche de toner, le Réservoir de toner usagé ou l'Unité tambour et pour nettoyer la Vitre de la tête d'impression. 10 Voyant Données Clignote en bleu lorsque cette machine reçoit une tâche. Si une tâche est actuellement spoulée, ce voyant devient bleu. 11 Bac de sortie Récupère les pages imprimées. 12 Voyant d'état (voyant d'impression) Clignote en blanc durant l'impression normale. 13 Touche Alimentation Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Éco Énergie. Lorsque l'alimentation est désactivée, la machine entre en mode économie d'énergie, et la LED de la touche Alimentation devient orange. 14 Voyant d'état (voyant d'avertissement ou d'arrêt) Indique l'état de cette machine en clignotant ou en s'allumant. Clignotant orange : Avertissement Allumé orange : La machine s'est arrêtée. N° Nom Description bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 2-5 2 Face arrière N° Nom Description 1 Cordon d'alimentation Utilisé pour alimenter cette machine. 2 Port USB (type A) USB 2.0/1.1 Utilisé pour connecter l'Unité d'authentification AU-102 ou l'Unité d'authentification AU-201. 3 Port USB (type B) USB 2.0/1.1 Connecter à ce port lorsque cette machine est utilisée comme imprimante USB. 4 Connecteur réseau (10Base-T/ 100Base-TX/1000Base-T) Connecter à ce port lorsque cette machine est utilisée comme imprimante réseau ou comme scanner réseau. 2 2-6 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 Intérieur N° Nom Description 1 Vitre d'exposition Utilisée pour charger l'original. 2 Levier du capot de l'unité de fixation Ouvrez ce levier pour éliminer un bourrage papier dans l'unité de fixation. 3 Unité de fixation Utilisé pour mélanger le toner au papier à l'aide de la chaleur et de la pression. 4 Unité recto-verso automatique Utilisée pour inverser le papier lors d'une impression recto/verso. 5 Unité tambour Utilisée pour créer une image imprimée. 6 Languette de déblocage Utilisée pour enlever l'Unité tambour. 7 Nettoyeur fil de charge Utilisé pour nettoyer le Fil de charge électrostatique lorsqu'une erreur d'image se produit. 8 Réservoir de toner usagé Utilisé pour récupérer les toners usagés. 9 Nettoyeur tête d'impression Utilisé pour nettoyer la surface de la Vitre de la tête d'impression lors du remplacement de l'Unité tambour. 10 Interrupteur principal Actionner cet interrupteur pour mettre la machine en marche ou l'arrêter. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 2-7 2 11 Cartouche de toner Cette machine utilise une Cartouche de toner en quatre couleurs : cyan (C), magenta (M), jaune (Y), et noir (K). Une image pleine couleur est créée par la combinaison des quatre couleurs de toner. 12 Compteur total Compte le nombre total de pages imprimées jusqu'à ce jour. 13 Vitre de numérisation Utilisée pour numériser une image d'original lors de l'utilisation de l'ADF. 14 Réglette Original Charger l'original le long de cette réglette. Cette réglette est aussi utilisée pour mesurer le format de l'original chargé. N° Nom Description 2 2-8 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3 Vérification du nom et de la fonction de chaque composant optionnel bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3-3 3.1 Vérification de la liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C554/C454) 3 3 Vérification du nom et de la fonction de chaque composant optionnel 3.1 Vérification de la liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C554/C454) Vérification de la lis 3 te des composants optionnels (bizhub C554/C454) 3-4 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3.1 N° Nom Description 1 Unité principale Numérise l'original dans la section numérisation et imprime une image numérisée dans la section imprimante. Cette unité est désignée sous le terme "machine", "unité principale" ou "C554/C454" dans le manuel. 2 Kit Fax FK-511 Permet d'utiliser cette machine comme un télécopieur. Ce kit permet en outre de connecter plusieurs lignes téléphoniques. 3 Unité d'authentification AU-102 Permet d'identifier l'utilisateur en lisant les motifs des veines du doigt. La Table de travail WT-506 est requise pour l'installation de l'Unité d'authentification AU-102. Dans le manuel, cette unité est désignée Unité d'authentification. 4 Unité d'authentification AU-201 Procède à l'authentification de l'utilisateur en lisant les informations enregistrées sur la carte IC. Le Kit de montage MK-735 est requis pour l'installation de l'Unité d'authentification AU-201. Cette unité peut également être installée sur la Table de travail WT-506. Dans le manuel, cette unité est désignée Unité d'authentification. 5 Table de travail WT-506 Offre un espace plan permettant de poser temporairement un original ou d'autres objets. Également utilisée quand Unité d'authentification est installée. 6 Support clavier KH-102 Installer ce support pour utiliser un clavier externe. Pour plus de détails sur les claviers externes, contactez votre S.A.V. 7 Kit de sécurité SC-508 Supporte le pare-copie et les fonctions de copie du mot de passe afin de prévenir une copie non autorisée. 8 Kit de montage MK-730 Utilisé pour imprimer des données sur du papier bannière. 9 Contrôleur image IC-414 Contrôleur image intégré. Installez cette unité améliore la qualité de l'impression. Le Kit d'interface vidéo VI-506 est requis pour l'installation du Contrôleur image IC-414. De même, le Bureau DK-510, le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410, le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 ou le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 doit être installé sur cette machine. 10 Unité grande capacité LU-301 Permet de charger jusqu'à 3000 feuilles de format 8-1/2 e 11 (A4). Dans le manuel, cette unité est désignée Unité grande capacité. Pour installer l'Unité grande capacité, le Bureau DK-510 ou le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410, le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 ou le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 doit être installé sur cette machine. 11 Unité grande capacité LU-204 Permet de charger jusqu'à 2500 feuilles de format SRA3 ou 11 e 17 (A3). Pour changer le format papier, contactez votre S.A.V. Dans le manuel, cette unité est désignée Unité grande capacité. Pour installer l'Unité grande capacité, le Bureau DK-510 ou le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410, le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 ou le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 doit être installé sur cette machine. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3-5 3.1 Vérification de la liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C554/C454) 3 12 Bureau DK-510 Utilisé pour installer cette machine sur le sol. Cette unité est désignée sous le terme Bureau dans le manuel. • Cette option risque de ne pas être disponible selon la zone commerciale. 13 Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410 Vous permet de charger jusqu'à 2 500 feuilles au format 8-1/2 e 11 (A4). Cette unité est désignée sous le terme MGC (intégré) dans le manuel. 14 Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 Permet de charger au maximum 500 feuilles dans le magasin du haut et autant dans le magasin du bas. Cette unité est désignée sous le terme Meuble double d'alimentation papier dans le manuel. 15 Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 Permet de charger au maximum 500 feuilles dans le magasin du haut et d'utiliser le plateau du bas comme casier de rangement. Cette unité est désignée sous le terme Meuble simple d'alimentation papier dans le manuel. 16 Bureau DK-705 Utilisé pour installer cette machine sur le sol. Cette unité est désignée sous le terme Bureau dans le manuel. • Cette option risque de ne pas être disponible selon la zone commerciale. 17 Piqueuse à cheval SD-511 Installez cette unité sur l'Unité de finition FS-534. Cette unité prend en charge la fonction pliage/reliure. Dans le manuel, elle est désignée Piqueuse à cheval. 18 Unité de finition FS-534 Trie, assemble et agrafe le papier imprimé avant de l'éjecter. Pour installer l'Unité de finition FS-534, le Bureau DK-510, le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410, le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 ou le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 doit être installé sur cette machine. 19 Kit de perforation PK-520 Installez cette unité sur l'Unité de finition FS-534. Cette unité prend en charge la fonction perforation. 20 Piqueuse à cheval SD-512 Installez cette unité sur l'Unité de finition FS-535. Cette unité prend en charge la fonction pliage/reliure. Dans le manuel, elle est désignée Piqueuse à cheval. 21 Unité de finition FS-535 Unité de finition installée dans bizhub C554. Trie, assemble et agrafe le papier imprimé avant de l'éjecter. Pour installer l'Unité de finition FS-535, le Bureau DK-510 ou le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410, le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 ou le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 doit être installé sur cette machine. 22 Kit de perforation PK-521 Installez cette unité sur l'Unité de finition FS-535. Cette unité prend en charge la fonction perforation. 23 Unité de pliage en Z ZU-606 Installez cette unité sur l'Unité de finition FS-535 pour permettre le pliage Z ou perforer des trous. Dans le manuel, cette unité est désignée Unité de pliage en Z. 24 Séparateur du travail JS-602 Installez cette unité sur l'Unité de finition FS-535. Récupère les pages imprimées. Dans le manuel, cette unité est désignée Séparateur du travail. 25 Unité d'insertion PI-505 Installez cette unité sur l'Unité de finition FS-535 pour permettre l'insertion d'une page de garde entre les feuilles copiées ou imprimées. Cette unité vous permet également une utilisation manuelle de l'unité de finition (seul le magasin inférieur est disponible). N° Nom Description Vérification de la lis 3 te des composants optionnels (bizhub C554/C454) 3-6 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3.1 26 Bac de sortie OT-506 Récupère les pages imprimées. 27 Unité de finition FS-533 Installez cette unité sur le bac de sortie de cette machine. Trie, assemble et agrafe le papier imprimé avant de l'éjecter. 28 Kit de perforation PK-519 Installez cette unité sur l'Unité de finition FS-533. Cette unité prend en charge la fonction perforation. 29 Séparateur du travail JS-506 Installez cette unité sur le bac de sortie de cette machine. Cette unité trie les feuilles imprimées. Dans le manuel, cette unité est désignée Séparateur du travail. Les options suivantes sont intégrées à cette machine et ne sont pas représentées sur la figure ci-dessus. 30 Unité Tampon SP-501 Tamponne un original numérisé lors de l'envoi d'un fax. Cette unité permet de vérifier si l'original a été numérisé. 31 Tampon de rechange Émission 2 Tampon de remplacement pour l'Unité Tampon SP-501. 32 Kit d'interface locale EK-606 Installez cette unité lorsque vous utilisez le clavier externe. Cette unité est équipée d'un haut-parleur. Pour plus de détails sur les claviers externes, contactez votre S.A.V. 33 Kit d'interface locale EK-607 Installez cette unité pour la connexion au clavier externe ou à un périphérique Bluetooth. Cette unité est équipée d'un haut-parleur et d'un récepteur pour la communication Bluetooth. Pour plus de détails sur les claviers externes, contactez votre S.A.V. 34 Kit d'interface vidéo VI-506 Cette unité est requise pour l'installation du Contrôleur image IC-414. 35 Option Internet LK-101 v3 Supporte la fonction de navigateur Web qui fait partie des fonctions avancées. 36 i-Option LK-102 v3 Supporte la fonction de traitement PDF qui fait partie des fonctions avancées. 37 i-Option LK-105 v3 Supporte la fonction de PDF rechercheable qui fait partie des fonctions avancées. 38 i-Option LK-106 Utilisée pour ajouter une police code à barres qui fait partie des polices spéciales. 39 i-Option LK-107 Utilisée pour ajouter une police unicode qui fait partie des polices spéciales. 40 i-Option LK-108 Utilisée pour ajouter une police OCR qui fait partie des polices spéciales. 41 Kit de mise à jour UK-204 Installez cette unité lorsque vous utilisez le navigateur Web, le traitement PDF, les PDF rechercheables, Mon Panneau, Mon Adresse, ou les polices spéciales. Les options ci-après ne sont pas représentées sur la figure. 42 Chauffage HT-509 Empêche l'humidité d'affecter le papier. Pour installer le Chauffage HT-509, le Bureau DK-510, le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410, le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 ou le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 doit être installé sur cette machine. 43 Boîtier d'alimentation MK-734 Met en marche/arrête le déshumidificateur/chauffage. 44 Kit de montage MK-735 Requis pour l'installation de l'Unité d'authentification AU-201. N° Nom Description bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3-7 3.1 Vérification de la liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C554/C454) 3 Recto L'illustration ci-dessus montre l'unité principale équipée du Bac de sortie OT-506 et du Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410. L'illustration ci-dessus montre l'unité principale équipée du Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 ou du Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 et du Bac de sortie OT-506. N° Nom Description 1 Bac de sortie Récupère les pages imprimées. 2 Témoin Manque papier Clignote en orange lorsqu'un magasin va manquer de papier, et s'allume en continu lorsque le papier est épuisé. 3 MGC (intégré) Vous permet de charger jusqu'à 2 500 feuilles. Ce magasin peut contenir jusqu'à 1 000 feuilles d'Épais 1, d'Epais 1+, d'Épais 2 et d'Épais 3. Vérification de la lis 3 te des composants optionnels (bizhub C554/C454) 3-8 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3.1 N° Nom Description 4 Porte inférieure droite Ouvrez cette porte pour éliminer un bourrage papier dans l'unité de transport du Magasin 3 ou du Magasin 4. 5 Levier de déblocage de la porte inférieure droite Utilisé pour verrouiller la Porte inférieure droite. 6 Magasin 3 Permet de charger au maximum 500 feuilles. Ce magasin peut contenir jusqu'à 150 feuilles d'Épais 1, d'Epais 1+, d'Épais 2 et d'Épais 3. 7 Magasin 4/Casier de rangement Utilisé comme Casier de rangement lors de l'installation du Meuble simple d'alimentation papier. Ce casier vous permet de charger jusqu'à 500 feuilles lorsque le Meuble double d'alimentation papier est installé. Ce magasin peut contenir jusqu'à 150 feuilles d'Épais 1, d'Epais 1+, d'Épais 2 et d'Épais 3. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3-9 3.1 Vérification de la liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C554/C454) 3 Face arrière L'illustration ci-dessous présente l'unité principale équipée du Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210, du Kit fax FK-511 et du Boîtier d'alimentation MK-734. N° Nom Description 1 Interrupteur d'alimentation du chauffage Utilisé pour mettre en marche ou arrêter le déshumidificateur/ chauffage. Cette fonction empêche l'humidité d'affecter le papier lorsque le chauffage est mis en marche. Le déshumidificateur/chauffage est disponible lorsque vous achetez le Meuble simple/double d'alimentation papier, le MGC (intégré) ou le Bureau. 2 Prise combiné téléphonique (TEL PORT1) Utilisée pour connecter un cordon téléphonique. Connectez le cordon à ce connecteur seulement pour utiliser une ligne téléphonique. 3 Prise combiné téléphonique (TEL PORT2) Utilisée pour connecter un cordon téléphonique. 4 Prise téléphonique 2 (LINE PORT2) Permet de connecter un poste d'abonné. 5 Prise téléphonique 1 (LINE PORT1) Permet de connecter un poste d'abonné. Connectez le cordon à ce connecteur seulement pour utiliser une ligne téléphonique. Vérification de la 3 liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C364/C284/C224) 3-10 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3.2 3.2 Vérification de la liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C364/C284/C224) bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3-11 3.2 Vérification de la liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C364/C284/C224) 3 N° Nom Description 1 Unité principale Numérise l'original dans la section numérisation et imprime une image numérisée dans la section imprimante. Cette unité est désignée sous le terme "machine", "unité principale" ou "C364/C284/C224" dans le manuel. 2 Couvre-original OC-511 Utilisé pour fixer les originaux chargés. Il est désigné sous le terme Couvre-original dans le manuel. 3 Chargeur automatique recto-verso DF-624 Introduit et numérise automatiquement les originaux par pages. De plus, cette unité retourne et numérise automatiquement les originaux recto-verso. Dans le manuel, cette unité est désignée ADF. 4 Chargeur de document double numérisation DF-701 Introduit et numérise automatiquement les originaux par pages. Cette unité numérise un original recto-verso simplement en exigeant que le papier soit introduit une seule fois dans la machine sans inversion. Dans le manuel, cette unité est désignée ADF. 5 Kit Fax FK-511 Permet d'utiliser cette machine comme un télécopieur. Ce kit permet en outre de connecter plusieurs lignes téléphoniques. 6 Unité d'authentification AU-102 Permet d'identifier l'utilisateur en lisant les motifs des veines du doigt. La Table de travail WT-506 est requise pour l'installation de l'Unité d'authentification AU-102. Dans le manuel, cette unité est désignée Unité d'authentification. 7 Unité d'authentification AU-201 Procède à l'authentification de l'utilisateur en lisant les informations enregistrées sur la carte IC. Le Kit de montage MK-735 est requis pour l'installation de l'Unité d'authentification AU-201. Cette unité peut également être installée sur la Table de travail WT-506. Dans le manuel, cette unité est désignée Unité d'authentification. 8 Table de travail WT-506 Offre un espace plan permettant de poser temporairement un original ou d'autres objets. Également utilisée quand Unité d'authentification est installée. 9 Kit de sécurité SC-508 Supporte le pare-copie et les fonctions de copie du mot de passe afin de prévenir une copie non autorisée. 10 Support clavier KH-102 Installer ce support pour utiliser un clavier externe. Pour plus de détails sur les claviers externes, contactez votre S.A.V. 11 Kit de montage MK-730 Utilisé pour imprimer des données sur du papier bannière. 12 Contrôleur image IC-414 Contrôleur image installé dans bizhub C364/bizhub C284. Installez cette unité améliore la qualité de l'impression. Le Kit d'interface vidéo VI-506 est requis pour l'installation du Contrôleur image IC-414. De même, le Bureau DK-510, le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410, le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 ou le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 doit être installé sur cette machine. 13 Bureau DK-705 Utilisé pour installer cette machine sur le sol. Cette unité est désignée sous le terme Bureau dans le manuel. • Cette option risque de ne pas être disponible selon la zone commerciale. Vérification de la 3 liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C364/C284/C224) 3-12 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3.2 14 Bureau DK-510 Utilisé pour installer cette machine sur le sol. Cette unité est désignée sous le terme Bureau dans le manuel. • Cette option risque de ne pas être disponible selon la zone commerciale. 15 Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410 Vous permet de charger jusqu'à 2 500 feuilles au format 8-1/2 e 11 (A4). Cette unité est désignée sous le terme MGC (intégré) dans le manuel. 16 Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 Permet de charger au maximum 500 feuilles dans le magasin du haut et autant dans le magasin du bas. Cette unité est désignée sous le terme Meuble double d'alimentation papier dans le manuel. 17 Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 Permet de charger au maximum 500 feuilles dans le magasin du haut et d'utiliser le plateau du bas comme casier de rangement. Cette unité est désignée sous le terme Meuble simple d'alimentation papier dans le manuel. 18 Unité de finition FS-534 Trie, assemble et agrafe le papier imprimé avant de l'éjecter. Pour installer l'Unité de finition FS-534, le Bureau DK-510, le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410, le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 ou le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 doit être installé sur cette machine. 19 Piqueuse à cheval SD-511 Installez cette unité sur l'Unité de finition FS-534. Cette unité prend en charge la fonction pliage/reliure. Dans le manuel, elle est désignée Piqueuse à cheval. 20 Kit de perforation PK-520 Installez cette unité sur l'Unité de finition FS-534. Cette unité prend en charge la fonction perforation. 21 Unité de finition FS-533 Installez cette unité sur le bac de sortie de cette machine. Trie, assemble et agrafe le papier imprimé avant de l'éjecter. 22 Kit de perforation PK-519 Installez cette unité sur l'Unité de finition FS-533. Cette unité prend en charge la fonction perforation. 23 Séparateur du travail JS-506 Installez cette unité sur le bac de sortie de cette machine. Cette unité trie les feuilles imprimées. Dans le manuel, cette unité est désignée Séparateur du travail. Les options suivantes sont intégrées à cette machine et ne sont pas représentées sur la figure ci-dessus. 24 Unité Tampon SP-501 Tamponne un original numérisé lors de l'envoi d'un fax. Cette unité permet de vérifier si l'original a été numérisé. 25 Tampon de rechange Émission 2 Tampon de remplacement pour l'Unité Tampon SP-501. 26 Kit d'interface locale EK-606 Installez cette unité lorsque vous utilisez le clavier externe. Cette unité est équipée d'un haut-parleur. Pour plus de détails sur les claviers externes, contactez votre S.A.V. 27 Kit d'interface locale EK-607 Installez cette unité pour la connexion au clavier externe ou à un périphérique Bluetooth. Cette unité est équipée d'un haut-parleur et d'un récepteur pour la communication Bluetooth. Pour plus de détails sur les claviers externes, contactez votre S.A.V. 28 Kit d'interface vidéo VI-506 Cette unité est requise pour l'installation du Contrôleur image IC-414 sur bizhub C364 ou bizhub C284. N° Nom Description bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3-13 3.2 Vérification de la liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C364/C284/C224) 3 29 Option Internet LK-101 v3 Supporte la fonction de navigateur Web qui fait partie des fonctions avancées. 30 i-Option LK-102 v3 Supporte la fonction de traitement PDF qui fait partie des fonctions avancées. 31 i-Option LK-105 v3 Supporte la fonction de PDF rechercheable qui fait partie des fonctions avancées. 32 i-Option LK-106 Utilisée pour ajouter une police code à barres qui fait partie des polices spéciales. 33 i-Option LK-107 Utilisée pour ajouter une police unicode qui fait partie des polices spéciales. 34 i-Option LK-108 Utilisée pour ajouter une police OCR qui fait partie des polices spéciales. 35 Kit de mise à jour UK-204 Installez cette unité lorsque vous utilisez le navigateur Web, le traitement PDF, les PDF rechercheables, Mon Panneau, Mon Adresse, ou les polices spéciales. Les options ci-après ne sont pas représentées sur la figure. 36 Chauffage HT-509 Empêche l'humidité d'affecter le papier. Pour installer le Chauffage HT-509, le Bureau DK-510, le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410, le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 ou le Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 doit être installé sur cette machine. 37 Boîtier d'alimentation MK-734 Met en marche/arrête le déshumidificateur/chauffage. 38 Kit de montage MK-735 Requis pour l'installation de l'Unité d'authentification AU-201. N° Nom Description Vérification de la 3 liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C364/C284/C224) 3-14 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3.2 Recto L'illustration ci-dessus montre l'unité principale équipée du Chargeur automatique recto-verso DF-624 et du Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410. L'illustration ci-dessus montre l'unité principale équipée du Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 ou du Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 et du Chargeur automatique recto-verso DF-624. N° Nom Description 1 Presse-original Permet de maintenir en place les originaux chargés. 2 Témoin Manque papier Clignote en orange lorsqu'un magasin va manquer de papier, et s'allume en continu lorsque le papier est épuisé. 3 MGC (intégré) Vous permet de charger jusqu'à 2 500 feuilles. Ce magasin peut contenir jusqu'à 1 000 feuilles d'Épais 1, d'Epais 1+, d'Épais 2 et d'Épais 3. 4 Molette de dégagement de bourrage Tournez cette molette pour enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage papier dans le Chargeur ADF. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3-15 3.2 Vérification de la liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C364/C284/C224) 3 N° Nom Description 5 Levier de déblocage du capot gauche Utilisé pour ouvrir le Capot gauche. 6 Capot gauche Ouvrez le Capot gauche pour éliminer le bourrage papier. 7 Réglette latérale Ajustez cette réglette le long de la largeur de l'original. 8 Bac des originaux Chargez l'original dans ce magasin face vers le haut. Ouvrez le Bac des originaux pour éliminer un bourrage papier dans le Chargeur ADF. 9 Bac de sortie des originaux L'original numérisé sort dans ce bac. Ouvrez le Bac de sortie des originaux pour éliminer un bourrage papier dans le Chargeur ADF. 10 Porte inférieure droite Ouvrez cette porte pour éliminer un bourrage papier dans l'unité de transport du Magasin 3 ou du Magasin 4. 11 Levier de déblocage de la porte inférieure droite Utilisé pour verrouiller la Porte inférieure droite. 12 Magasin 3 Permet de charger au maximum 500 feuilles. Ce magasin peut contenir jusqu'à 150 feuilles d'Épais 1, d'Epais 1+, d'Épais 2 et d'Épais 3. Vérification de la 3 liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C364/C284/C224) 3-16 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3.2 Face arrière L'illustration ci-dessous présente l'unité principale équipée du Chargeur automatique recto-verso DF-624, du Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210, du Kit fax FK-511 et du Boîtier d'alimentation MK-734. 13 Magasin 4/Casier de rangement Utilisé comme Casier de rangement lors de l'installation du Meuble simple d'alimentation papier. Ce casier vous permet de charger jusqu'à 500 feuilles lorsque le Meuble double d'alimentation papier est installé. Ce magasin peut contenir jusqu'à 150 feuilles d'Épais 1, d'Epais 1+, d'Épais 2 et d'Épais 3. N° Nom Description N° Nom Description 1 Interrupteur d'alimentation du chauffage Utilisé pour mettre en marche ou arrêter le déshumidificateur/ chauffage. Cette fonction empêche l'humidité d'affecter le papier lorsque le chauffage est mis en marche. Le déshumidificateur/chauffage est disponible lorsque vous achetez le Meuble simple/double d'alimentation papier, le MGC (intégré) ou le Bureau. 2 Prise combiné téléphonique (TEL PORT1) Utilisée pour connecter un cordon téléphonique. Connectez le cordon à ce connecteur seulement pour utiliser une ligne téléphonique. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3-17 3.2 Vérification de la liste des composants optionnels (bizhub C364/C284/C224) 3 3 Prise combiné téléphonique (TEL PORT2) Utilisée pour connecter un cordon téléphonique. 4 Prise téléphonique 2 (LINE PORT2) Permet de connecter un poste d'abonné. 5 Prise téléphonique 1 (LINE PORT1) Permet de connecter un poste d'abonné. Connectez le cordon à ce connecteur seulement pour utiliser une ligne téléphonique. N° Nom Description 3 Unité de finition FS-535, Piqueuse à cheval SD-512, Kit de perforation PK-521 3-18 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3.3 3.3 Unité de finition FS-535, Piqueuse à cheval SD-512, Kit de perforation PK-521 N° Nom Description 1 Bac de sortie 2 Récupère les pages imprimées. 2 Bac de sortie 1 Récupère les pages imprimées. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3-19 3.3 Unité de finition FS-535, Piqueuse à cheval SD-512, Kit de perforation PK-521 3 3 Porte frontale Ouvrez cette porte pour dégager un bourrage papier ou des agrafes coincées, ou encore pour remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes. 4 Capot de l'unité de transport horizontal Ouvrez ce capot pour enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage dans le sens horizontal de transport. 5 Molette de dégagement de bourrage [FS7] Tournez cette molette pour enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage dans l'unité de finition. 6 Levier de guidage [FS6] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 7 Levier de guidage [FS8] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 8 Molette de dégagement de bourrage [FS5] Tournez cette molette pour enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage dans l'unité de finition. 9 Levier de guidage [FS3] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 10 Levier de guidage [FS4] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 11 Kit de perforation L'installation de l'unité de perforation sur l'unité de finition permet de perforer les feuilles imprimées pour les archiver. 12 Bac à déchets de perforation Enlevez cette boîte pour éliminer les chutes de perforation. 13 Levier de guidage [FS9] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 14 Cartouche d'agrafes Retirez cette cartouche de l'unité de finition pour dégager un bourrage papier ou remplacer une cartouche d'agrafes. 15 Poignée [SD2] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 16 Poignée [SD1] Saisir cette poignée pour tirer ou repousser la Piqueuse à cheval. 17 Molette de dégagement de bourrage [SD3] Tournez cette molette pour enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage dans l'unité de finition. 18 Piqueuse à cheval Tirez cette unité pour dégager un bourrage papier ou des agrafes coincées, ou encore pour remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes. 19 Bac de sortie Pliage Utilisé pour sortir le papier plié/relié. 20 Molette de dégagement de bourrage [FS2] Tournez cette molette pour enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage dans l'unité de finition. 21 Levier de guidage [FS1] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 22 Cartouche d'agrafes Tirez cette cartouche de la Piqueuse à cheval pour dégager des agrafes coincées, ou encore pour remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes. 23 Levier de guidage [SD4] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 24 Levier de guidage [SD5] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 25 Capot de sortie Ce capot s'ouvre automatiquement à la sortie du papier. N° Nom Description 3 Séparateur du travail JS-602 3-20 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3.4 3.4 Séparateur du travail JS-602 N° Nom Description 1 Bac de sortie Récupère les pages imprimées. 2 Couvercle du séparateur du travail Ouvrez cette porte pour dégager un bourrage papier. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3-21 3.5 Pliage en Z ZU-606 3 3.5 Pliage en Z ZU-606 N° Nom Description 1 Pliage en z/Unité de transport Retirez cette unité pour dégager le bourrage papier. 2 Levier de guidage [FN1] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 3 Bac à déchets de perforation Enlevez cette boîte pour éliminer les chutes de perforation. 4 Porte frontale Ouvrez cette porte pour dégager un bourrage papier ou pour éliminer les confettis de perforation. 5 Levier de guidage [FN6] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 6 Levier de guidage [FN7] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 7 Levier de guidage [FN8] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 3 Pliage en Z ZU-606 3-22 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3.5 8 Poignée [FN2] Utilisez cette poignée pour insérer et sortie le pliage en Z. 9 Molette de dégagement de bourrage [FN5] Tournez cette molette pour enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage dans l'unité pliage en Z. 10 Levier de guidage [FN3] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 11 Molette de dégagement de bourrage [FN4] Tournez cette molette pour enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage dans l'unité pliage en Z. N° Nom Description bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3-23 3.6 Unité d'insertion PI-505 3 3.6 Unité d'insertion PI-505 3.6.1 Nom et fonction de chaque pièce N° Nom Description 1 Panneau de contrôle de l'unité d'insertion Utilisez ce panneau en cas d'utilisation manuelle de l'unité de finition. Pour de plus amples détails sur la procédure d'utilisation de l'unité d'insertion, reportezvous à la page 3-24. 2 Guide papier du magasin inférieur Lors du chargement du papier à couverture, faites glisser ce guide pour le faire correspondre au format du papier. 3 Magasin inférieur Chargez le papier à couverture dans ce magasin. 4 Magasin supérieur Chargez le papier à couverture dans ce magasin. 5 Guide papier du magasin supérieur Lors du chargement du papier à couverture, faites glisser ce guide pour le faire correspondre au format du papier. 6 Levier de déblocage de l'unité supérieure Pour dégager un bourrage papier, levez ce levier et faites glisser l'unité supérieure vers la gauche. 3 Unité d'insertion PI-505 3-24 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3.6 3.6.2 Unité d'insertion Touches sur le panneau de contrôle Quand l'Unité d'insertion PI-505 est installée sur l'Unité de finition FS-535, vous pouvez commander manuellement l'Unité d'insertion FS-535 à l'aide du Panneau de contrôle de l'unité d'insertion. N° Nom Description 1 Lampe d'agrafage en coin Indique que l'agrafage en coin est sélectionné. 2 Lampe agrafage centre + pliage Indique que l'agrafage au milieu est sélectionné. 3 Finition Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner la finition. 4 Lampe 2 trous Indique que 2 trous est sélectionné. 5 Lampe 3 trous Indique que 3 trous est sélectionné. 6 Sélec. Perfo. Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner le type de trou perforé. 7 Marche/Arrêt Appuyez sur cette touche pour démarrer les opérations d'insertion de feuilles. Si vous appuyez sur cette touche durant le fonctionnement, cette unité s'arrête. 8 Lampe 4 trous Indique que 4 trous est sélectionné. 9 Lampe pliage en trois Indique que Pliage en 3 est sélectionné. 10 Lampe agrafage en 2 points Indique que Agrafage 2 points est sélectionné. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3-25 3.6 Unité d'insertion PI-505 3 Finition en utilisant l'unité d'insertion 0 Seul le magasin inférieur peut être utilisé comme magasin papier. Le magasin supérieur n'est pas disponible. 1 Mettre du papier dans le bac inférieur de l'unité d'insertion et ajuster la réglette latérale au format du papier. % Chargez l'original de manière à ce que le bord haut soit en face de l'arrière de la machine. % Pour utiliser l'agrafage en coin ou l'option en 2 points, chargez le papier face vers le haut. % Pour la perforation, chargez le papier face vers le haut. % Pour la reliure, chargez le côté rection du papier relié face vers le bas. % Pour le Pliage en 3, charger l'extérieur du papier plié en trois face vers le bas. 2 Appuyez sur la touche Finition et sur la touche Sélec. Perfo et sélectionnez la finition souhaitée. % Pour configurer les réglages de finition, appuyez sur la touche Finition pour allumer la LED. Pour configurer les réglages de perforation, appuyez sur la touche Sélec. Perfo. pour allumer la LED. % Les réglages de perforation sont disponibles en combinaison avec l'option d'agrafage en coin ou en deux points. 3 Appuyez sur la touche Marche/arrêt. % En cas d'actionnement de la touche Marche/Arrêt en cours d'opération, celle-ci sera interrompue. 3 Unité de finition FS-533, Kit de perforation PK-519 3-26 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3.7 3.7 Unité de finition FS-533, Kit de perforation PK-519 N° Nom Description 1 Molette de dégagement de bourrage [FS1] Tournez cette molette pour enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage dans l'unité de finition. 2 Levier de déblocage du kit de perforation [FS2] Utilisé pour ouvrir le kit de perforation lors du retrait du bac à déchets de perforation. 3 Kit de perforation Vous pouvez perforer les feuilles imprimées afin de les archiver en installant le kit de perforation sur l'unité de finition. 4 Cartouche d'agrafes Retirez cette cartouche de l'unité de finition pour dégager un bourrage papier ou remplacer une cartouche d'agrafes. 5 Levier de déblocage Utilisé pour débloquer et déplacer l'unité de finition et l'unité principale afin d'éliminer un bourrage papier. 6 Bac de sortie Récupère les pages imprimées. 7 Extension plateau Tirez ce magasin pour manipuler du papier de plus de 8-1/2 e 11 (A4) de long w. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3-27 3.8 Séparateur du travail JS-506 3 3.8 Séparateur du travail JS-506 N° Nom Description 1 Bac de sortie 1 Récupère les pages imprimées. 2 Bac de sortie 2 Récupère les pages imprimées. 3 Unité de finition FS-534, Piqueuse à cheval SD-511, Kit de perforation PK-520 3-28 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3.9 3.9 Unité de finition FS-534, Piqueuse à cheval SD-511, Kit de perforation PK-520 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3-29 3.9 Unité de finition FS-534, Piqueuse à cheval SD-511, Kit de perforation PK-520 3 N° Nom Description 1 Bac de sortie 2 Récupère les pages imprimées. 2 Bac de sortie 1 Récupère les pages imprimées. 3 Porte frontale Ouvrez cette porte pour dégager un bourrage papier ou des agrafes coincées, ou encore pour remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes. 4 Capot de l'unité de transport horizontal Ouvrez ce capot pour enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage dans le sens horizontal de transport. 5 Agrafeuse Déplacez cette unité vers l'avant pour dégager un bourrage papier. 6 Levier de guidage [FS2] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 7 Molette de dégagement de bourrage [FS1] Tournez cette molette pour enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage dans l'unité de finition. 3 Unité de finition FS-534, Piqueuse à cheval SD-511, Kit de perforation PK-520 3-30 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3.9 8 Molette de dégagement de bourrage [FS5] Tournez cette molette pour enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage dans l'unité de finition. 9 Bac à déchets de perforation Enlevez cette boîte pour éliminer les chutes de perforation. 10 Cartouche d'agrafes Retirez cette cartouche du kit de perforation pour dégager un bourrage papier ou remplacer une cartouche d'agrafes. 11 Levier de guidage [FS4] Tournez ce levier pour dégager un bourrage. 12 Numérot Activez la numérotation pour déplacer l'agrafeuse vers l'avant pour dégager un bourrage papier. 13 Poignée [SD2] Tournez cette poignée pour dégager un bourrage papier. 14 Piqueuse à cheval Tirez cette unité pour dégager un bourrage papier ou des agrafes coincées, ou encore pour remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes. 15 Molette de dégagement de bourrage [SD3] Tournez cette molette pour enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage dans l'unité de finition. 16 Poignée [SD1] Saisir cette poignée pour tirer ou repousser la Piqueuse à cheval. 17 Unité de transport [FS3] Ouvrez ce capot pour enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage dans l'unité de transport. 18 Kit de perforation L'installation de l'unité de perforation sur l'unité de finition permet de perforer les feuilles imprimées pour les archiver. 19 Capot supérieur Ouvrez ce capot pour enlever le papier à l'origine du bourrage dans l'unité de finition. 20 Cartouche d'agrafes Tirez cette cartouche de la Piqueuse à cheval pour dégager des agrafes coincées, ou encore pour remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes. 21 Poignée [SD5] Tournez cette poignée pour dégager un bourrage papier. 22 Poignée [SD4] Tournez cette poignée pour dégager un bourrage papier. 23 Bac de sortie Pliage Utilisé pour récupérer les pages imprimées via la fonction pliage/reliure. N° Nom Description bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3-31 3.10 Unité grande capacité LU-301/LU-204 3 3.10 Unité grande capacité LU-301/LU-204 N° Nom Description 1 Porte supérieure Ouvrez cette porte pour charger le papier. 2 Rouleau prise papier Tourne lorsque le papier est alimenté dans la machine. 3 Témoin Manque papier Clignote en orange lorsqu'un magasin va manquer de papier, et s'allume en continu lorsque le papier est épuisé. 4 Levier de déblocage Appuyez sur cette touche pour déconnecter le Unité grande capacité de l'unité principale. 3 Unité grande capacité LU-301/LU-204 3-32 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 3.10 4 Vérifier les types de papier disponibles bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 4-3 4 4 Vérifier les types de papier disponibles Type de papier Grammage du papier Capacité de papier Papier fin 13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2) Magasin 1 : 500 feuilles Magasin 2 : 500 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 : 500 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 : 500 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410 : 2 500 feuilles Unité grande capacité LU-301 : 3000 feuilles Unité grande capacité LU-204 : 2500 feuilles Papier ordinaire Papier recyclé Recto seul*1 Papier spécial*2 Papier à en-tête*3 Papier couleur*4 Papier Util. 1*5 Papier Util. 2*5 15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) Introducteur manuel : 150 feuilles Magasin 1 : 500 feuilles Magasin 2 : 500 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 : 500 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 : 500 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410 : 2 500 feuilles Unité grande capacité LU-301 : 3000 feuilles Unité grande capacité LU-204 : 2500 feuilles Épais 1 Papier Util. 3*5 24-3/16 lb à 31-15/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 120 g/m2) Introducteur manuel : 20 feuilles Magasin 1 : 150 feuilles Magasin 2 : 150 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 : 150 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 : 150 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410 : 1 000 feuilles Magasin grande capacité LU-301 : 2500 feuilles Unité grande capacité LU-204 : 2000 feuilles Épais 1+ Papier Util. 4*5 32-3/16 lb à 41-3/4 lb (121 g/m2 à 157 g/m2) Introducteur manuel : 20 feuilles Magasin 1 : 150 feuilles Magasin 2 : 150 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 : 150 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 : 150 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410 : 1 000 feuilles Unité grande capacité LU-301 : 1750 feuilles Unité grande capacité LU-204 : 1450 feuilles Épais 2 Papier Util. 5*5 42 lb à 55-5/8 lb (158 g/m2 à 209 g/m2 Introducteur manuel : 20 feuilles Magasin 1 : 150 feuilles Magasin 2 : 150 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 : 150 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 : 150 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410 : 1 000 feuilles Unité grande capacité LU-301 : 1550 feuilles Unité grande capacité LU-204 : 1250 feuilles 4 4-4 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 *1 Papier qui n'a pas à être imprimé sur les deux faces (par exemple, lorsqu'une des faces est déjà imprimée). *2 Papier fin et autres papiers spéciaux. *3 Papier sur lequel est imprimé une raison sociale, du texte prédéfini ; etc. *4 Papier couleur. *5 Papier enregistré comme l'un des types fréquemment utilisés. Pour les réglages relatifs au grammage du papier et l'ajustement du support, contactez votre S.A.V. REMARQUE Tout papier autre que le papier ordinaire, comme les transparents et le papier de couleur, est appelé papier spécial. Lors du chargement de papier spécial dans le magasin, spécifiez le type de papier correct. Sinon, cela peut causer un bourrage papier ou une erreur image. Conseils - Pour les réglages relatifs au grammage du papier et l'ajustement du support, contactez votre S.A.V. - Pour imprimer sur le verso d'une feuille déjà imprimée, chargez le papier dans l'Introducteur manuel, et sélectionnez [Rect-Vers Face 2] dans le réglage papier, ce qui améliore la qualité d'impression de l'image. [Rect-Vers Face 2] est disponible lorsque le papier ordinaire, Épais 1, Épais 1+, Épais 2, Épais 3 ou Épais 4 est sélectionné pour une impression à partir de l'Introducteur manuel. - Si vous sélectionnez papier fin, Épais 3, ou Épais 4 pour l'impression, la qualité image qui en résulte pourrait ne pas être conforme aux attentes. - Ne pas utiliser de papier plus fin que 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 (A5). - Pour charger de l'Épais 4 dans le magasin papier, placez le papier 8-1/2 e 11 ou A4 dans le sens v et le papier 11 e 17 ou A3 dans le sens w. - Lorsque vous chargez un transparent dans le magasin, placez-les dans le sens v. - Les transparents ne peuvent être imprimés qu'en noir. - Le Kit de montage MK-730 est nécessaire pour imprimer sur le papier bannière. Épais 3 Papier Util. 6*5 55-7/8 lb à 68-1/8 lb (210 g/m2 à 256 g/m2) Introducteur manuel : 20 feuilles Magasin 1 : 150 feuilles Magasin 2 : 150 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 : 150 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 : 150 feuilles Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410 : 1 000 feuilles Unité grande capacité LU-301 : 1300 feuilles Unité grande capacité LU-204: 1000 feuilles Épais 4 68-3/8 lb à 79-13/16 lb (257 g/m2 à 300 g/m2) Introducteur manuel : 20 feuilles Transparent - Introducteur manuel : 20 feuilles Cartes postales (4 e 6 (Carte A6 - Introducteur manuel : 20 feuilles Enveloppe - Introducteur manuel : 10 feuilles Planche d'étiquettes - Introducteur manuel : 20 feuilles Papier à onglets - Introducteur manuel : 20 feuilles Papier rouleau 33-13/16 lb à 55-7/8 lb (127 g/m2 à 210 g/m2) Introducteur manuel : 10 feuilles Type de papier Grammage du papier Capacité de papier 5 Vérification des spécifications de cette machine bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 5-3 5 5 Vérification des spécifications de cette machine Le type de cette machine Papier Élément Caractéristiques Type Scanner, imprimante, bureau ou autonome (avec le Bureau, le Meuble d'alimentation papier ou le MGC (intégré) installé) Porte-document Stationnaire (numérisation miroir) Photo conducteur OPC Source lumineuse Illumination via une source lumineuse LED Système copie Copie laser électrostatique Système de développement Système de développement HMT bi-composant à sec Système de fixation Fixation par courroie Type Port d'introduction du papier (nombre maximal de feuilles à charger) Unité recto-verso automatique Magasin 1 Magasin 2 Introducteur manuel Types de papier disponibles Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)) o (500 feuilles) o (500 feuilles) - o Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) o (500 feuilles) o (500 feuilles) o (150 feuilles) o Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) Papier spécial (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) En-tête (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) Papier couleur (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) Papier spécial recto (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) o (500 feuilles) o (500 feuilles) o (150 feuilles) - Épais 1 (24-3/16 lb à 31-15/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 120 g/m2)) o (150 feuilles) o (150 feuilles) o (20 feuilles) o 5 5-4 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 *1 Il existe six types de Foolscap : 8-1/2 e 13-1/2 w, 220mm e 330 mm w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, et 8 e 13 w. Chacun de ces formats peut être sélectionné. Pour plus de détails, contacter le S.A.V. *2 Papier bannière Largeur : 8-1/4 à 11-11/16 pouces (210 mm à 297 mm) Longueur : 18 à 47-1/4 pouces (457,3 mm à 1200 mm) Épais 1+ (32-3/16 lb à 41-3/4 lb (121 g/m2 à 157 g/m2)) o (150 feuilles) o (150 feuilles) o (20 feuilles) o Épais 2 (42 lb à 55-5/8 lb (158 g/m2 à 209 g/m2)) o (150 feuilles) o (150 feuilles) o (20 feuilles) o Épais 3 (55-7/8 lb à 68-1/8 lb (210 g/m2 à 256 g/m2)) o (150 feuilles) o (150 feuilles) o (20 feuilles) o Épais 4 (68-3/8 lb à 79-13/16 lb (257 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)) - - o (20 feuilles) - Transparent - - o (20 feuilles) - Cartes postales (4 e 6 (Carte A6)) - - o (20 feuilles) o Papier à onglets - - o (20 feuilles) - Enveloppe - - o (10 feuilles) - Planche d'étiquettes - - o (10 feuilles) - Papier rouleau (33-13/16 lb à 55-7/8 lb (127 g/m2 à 210 g/m2)) - - o (10 feuilles) - Formats admissibles 11 e 17 w à 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, A3 w à A5 w, B4 w, B5 w/v, 8 e 13 w*1, 16K v, 8K w 12-1/4 e 18 w à 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, SRA3 w, A3 w à A5 w, B4 w, B5 w/v, 8 e 13 w*1, 16K v, 8K w 12 e 18 w à 5- 1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 4 e 6 w, Papier bannière* 2, SRA3 w, A3 w à A6 w, Carte A6 w, B4 w à B6 w, 8 e 13 w*1, 16K w/v, 8K w Largeur : 3-9/16 pouces à 12-5/8 pouces (90mm à 320 mm), Longueur : 5-1/2 à 47-1/4 pouces (139,7 mm à 1200 mm) 12-1/4 e 18 w à 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w, 4 e 6 w, SRA3 w, A3 w à A6 w, Carte A6 w, B4 w à B6 w, ISO-B5 w/v, 8 e 13 w*1, 16K w/v, 8K w Largeur : 3-15/16 à 12-5/8 pouces (100 mm à 320 mm), longueur : 5-13/16 à 18 pouces (148 mm à 457,2 mm) Type Port d'introduction du papier (nombre maximal de feuilles à charger) Unité recto-verso automatique Magasin 1 Magasin 2 Introducteur manuel bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 5-5 5 Spécifications mécaniques Chargeur de document double numérisation (uniquement pour bizhub C554/C454) Élément Caractéristiques Alimentation bizhub C554/C454 AC 120 V, 16 A, 60 Hz (AC 220 V à 240 V, 9,0 A, 50/60 Hz) bizhub C364/C284/C224 AC 120 V, 12 A, 60 Hz (AC 220 V à 240 V, 8,0 A, 50/60 Hz) Consommation électrique max. bizhub C554/C454 1 920 W (2 000 W) bizhub C364/C284/C224 1 500 W (1 580 W) Dimensions bizhub C554/C454 Largeur 24-3/16 pouces (615mm) e Profondeur 26-15/16 pouces (685mm) e Hauteur 36-1/4 pouces (921 mm) bizhub C364/C284/C224 Largeur 24-3/16 pouces (615mm) e Profondeur 26-15/16 pouces (685mm) e Hauteur 30-11/16 pouces (779 mm) Encombrement machine bizhub C554/C454 Largeur 36-7/8 pouces (937mm) e Profondeur 49-1/16 pouces (1 246 mm) e Hauteur 51-7/16 pouces (1 307 mm) Montre les dimensions lorsque le Magasin papier est sorti et lorsque l'Extension magasin de l'Introducteur manuel et l'ADF sont ouverts. bizhub C364/C284/C224 Largeur 36-7/8 pouces (937 mm) e Profondeur 47-13/16 pouces (1 214 mm) e Hauteur 30-11/16 pouces (779 mm) Ceci montre les dimensions lorsque le Magasin papier est tiré et que l'Extension magasin de l'Introducteur manuel est ouverte. Poids bizhub C554/C454 Environ 220-7/16 lb (100 kg) bizhub C364/C284/C224 Environ 185-3/16 lb (84 kg) Élément Caractéristiques Fonction d'introduction de l'original Original recto seul, original recto-verso, originaux de formats différents Types d'originaux Recto seul Papier fin (9-5/16 lb à 13-1/16 lb (35 g/m2 à 49 g/m2)) Papier ordinaire (13-5/16 lb à 43-3/8 lb (50 g/m2 à 163 g/m2)) Recto-Verso Papier ordinaire (13-5/16 lb à 43-3/8 lb (50 g/m2 à 163 g/m2)) Orig. Mixtes Papier ordinaire (13-5/16 lb à 34-1/16 lb (50 g/m2 à 128 g/m2)) Format original Originaux recto/recto-verso : 11 e 17 w à 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, A3 w à A6 w Capacité de chargement des originaux Originaux recto/recto-verso : 100 feuilles max. (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2)) Vitesse de numérisation 80 feuilles/min (En numérisation au format Letter (8-1/2 e 11 v) ou A4 v) Alimentation Fournie par la machine Consommation électrique max. 60 W ou moins Dimensions Largeur 24-1/16 pouces (611mm) e Profondeur 19-13/16 pouces (503 mm) e Hauteur 5-9/16 pouces (142 mm) Poids Approx. 26-7/16 lb (12 kg) 5 5-6 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 Environnement d'exploitation Spécifications communes Élément Caractéristiques Conditions ambiantes d'exploitation Température : 10 à 30°C (50 à 86°F) Humidité : 15% à 85% HR Élément Caractéristiques Temps de préchauffage Période comprise entre le moment où le mode Alimentation auxiliaire OFF est débloqué et le moment où cette machine est prête pour l'impression alors que l'Interrupteur principal est placé sur Marche (température ambiante : 23°C (73,4°F)) bizhub C554 Couleurs : 25 s ou moins Noir : 23 s ou moins bizhub C454 25 sec. ou moins bizhub C364 20 sec. ou moins bizhub C284/C224 18 sec. ou moins Période comprise entre le moment où l'Interrupteur principal a été placé sur Marche et le moment où cette machine est prête pour l'impression (température ambiante : 23°C (73,4°F)) bizhub C554 Couleurs : 25 s ou moins Noir : 23 s ou moins bizhub C454 25 sec. ou moins bizhub C364/C284/C224 20 sec. ou moins La durée de préchauffage peut varier en fonction de l'environnement d'exploitation et de l'utilisation. Temps de copie (impression) rapide (En impression lettre (8-1/2 e 11 v) ou A4 v bizhub C554 Couleurs : 4,6 s ou moins Noir : 4,1 s ou moins bizhub C454 Couleurs : 5,5 s ou moins Noir : 4,6 s ou moins bizhub C364 Couleurs : 6,9 s ou moins Noir : 5,3 sec. ou moins bizhub C284 Couleurs : 7,7 sec. ou moins Noir : 5,9 s ou moins bizhub C224 Couleurs : 8,3 s ou moins Noir : 6,9 s ou moins Taille mémoire (capacité disque dur) 2 048 Mo (250 Go) bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 5-7 5 Fonction Copie Élément Caractéristiques Définition Numérisation 600 dpi e 600 dpi Écriture 1200 dpi e 1200 dpi Originaux Type Feuilles, livres ouverts (doubles-pages), objets en trois dimensions Dimensions Max. 11 e 17 w (A3 w) Poids 4-7/16 lb (2 kg) Largeur de rognage d'image En haut 3/16 pouces (4,2 mm) (Papier fin : 3/16 pouces (5,0 mm)) En bas 1/8 pouce (3,0 mm) À droite 1/8 pouce (3,0 mm) À gauche 1/8 pouce (3,0mm) Zone imprimable maximum Pour papier 12-1/4 e 18 pouces (311,1mm e 457,2 mm) : 11-15/16 e 17-11/16 pouces (302,6mm e 448,7 mm) Vitesse de copie (En impression lettre (8-1/2 e 11 v) ou A4 v Couleurs (Recto/Recto- Verso) bizhub C554 Papier ordinaire : 55 feuilles/min (Lorsque le papier est alimenté à partir de l'Introducteur manuel : 51 feuilles/min) Épais 1/Épais 1+/Épais 2/Épais 3/Épais 4 : 28 feuilles /min (Lorsque le papier est alimenté à partir de l'Introducteur manuel : 27 feuilles/min) bizhub C454 Papier ordinaire : 45 feuilles/min (Lorsque le papier est alimenté à partir de l'Introducteur manuel : 44 feuilles/min) Épais 1/Épais 1 + : 28 feuilles/min. Épais 2/Épais 3/Épais 4 : 23 feuilles/min. bizhub C364 Papier ordinaire : 36 feuilles/min. Épais 1/Épais 1+/Épais 2/Épais 3/Épais 4 : 18 feuilles/min. bizhub C284 Papier ordinaire : 28 feuilles/min. Épais 1/Épais 1+/Épais 2/Épais 3/Épais 4 : 14 feuilles/min. bizhub C224 Papier ordinaire : 22 feuilles/min. Épais 1/Épais 1+/Épais 2/Épais 3/Épais 4 : 14 feuilles/min. Noir (Recto/ Recto-Verso) bizhub C554 Papier ordinaire : 55 feuilles/min (Lorsque le papier est alimenté à partir de l'Introducteur manuel : 53 feuilles/min) Épais 1/Épais 1+/Épais 2/Épais 3/Épais 4 : 28 feuilles/min. (Lorsque le papier est alimenté à partir de l'Introducteur manuel : 27 feuilles/min.) bizhub C454 Papier ordinaire : 45 feuilles/min. Épais 1/Épais 1+ : 28 feuilles/min. Épais 2/Épais 3/Épais 4 : 23 feuilles/min. bizhub C364 Papier ordinaire : 36 feuilles/min. Épais 1/Épais 1+/Épais 2/Épais 3/Épais 4 : 18 feuilles/min. bizhub C284 Papier ordinaire : 28 feuilles/min. Épais 1/Épais 1+/Épais 2/Épais 3/Épais 4 : 14 feuilles/min. bizhub C224 Papier ordinaire : 22 feuilles/min. Épais 1/Épais 1+/Épais 2/Épais 3/Épais 4 : 14 feuilles/min. 5 5-8 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 Fonctions de numérisation Agrandissement copie Grandeur nature : 100,0% +/- 0,5% Agrandir la taille : Zone en pouces : 121,4%, 129,4%, 154,5%, 200,0% Zone en centimètres : 115,4%, 122,4%, 141,4%, 200,0% Réduire la taille : Zone en pouces : 78,5%, 73,3%, 64,7%, 50,0% Zone en centimètres : 86,6%, 81,6%, 70,7%, 50,0% Manuel : 25,0 à 400,0% (par pas de 0,1%) Nombre de copies réalisées en continu 1 à 9999 feuilles Réglage de la densité Densité copie Réglage manuel de la densité (9 niveaux) Densité du fond Réglage manuel ou automatique de la densité (9 niveaux), suppression du fond Nombre de feuilles chargées dans le Bac de sortie Papier ordinaire 250 feuilles Papier fin 100 feuilles Épais 10 feuilles Transparent 1 feuille Élément Caractéristiques Élément Caractéristiques Plage numérisable Max. 11 e 17 w (A3 w) Originaux Type Feuilles, livres ouverts (doubles-pages), objets en trois dimensions Dimensions Max. 11 e 17 w (A3 w) Poids 4-7/16 lb (2 kg) Format papier numérisable 11 e 17 w à 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 4 e 6 w/v, A3 w à B6 w, Carte A6 w/v, 8 e 13 w*1, 16K w/v, 8K w *1 Il existe six types de Foolscap : 8-1/2 e 13-1/2 w, 220 mm e 330 mm w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, et 8 e 13 w. Chacun de ces formats peut être sélectionné. (Par défaut : 8 e 13 w) Pour plus de détails, veuillez contacter votre S.A.V. Largeur de rognage d'image En haut 3/16 pouces (4,2 mm) (Papier fin : 3/16 pouces (5,0mm)) En bas 1/8 pouce (3,0mm) À droite 1/8 pouce (3,0 mm) À gauche 1/8 pouce (3,0 mm) Résolution de numérisation Pousser : 200 dpi/300 dpi/400 dpi/600 dpi Tirer : 100 dpi/200 dpi/300 dpi/400 dpi/600 ppp Fonction Réglages E-Mail FTP PC (SMB) Boîte Utilisateur WebDAV Envoi serveur de numérisation PC (DPWS) Fonctions spéciales Originaux mixtes, Papier fin, Original plié en Z, Original bannière, Dépoussiérer, Retrait original vierge, Position de reliure, Effacement, Effacement centre, Original livre, Séparation livre, Direction original, Marge perdue, Tampon/Composition, Date/Heure, Tête/Pied de page, Netteté bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 5-9 5 SMB Systèmes d'exploitation compatibles Windows Windows XP Familial/Professionnel Windows Serveur 2003, toutes éditions Windows Vista, chaque édition Windows Server 2008 La fonction DFS supporte seulement l'environnement configuré par les systèmes d'exploitation du serveur Windows ci-après. Windows Serveur 2003, toutes éditions Windows Server 2008 La fonction d'hébergement direct supporte les systèmes d'exploitation suivants. Windows XP Windows Vista (La fonction IPv6 est uniquement prise en charge dans Windows Vista.) Samba Série 2.2.x Série 3.x Novell Netware Netware 6.5 (SP6 ou ultérieur) Ordinateur compatible Ordinateur Compatible avec les spécifications de l'OS. Mémoire Compatible avec les spécifications de l'OS. Réseau Ordinateur avec protocole TCP/IP correctement configuré Disque dur Requiert un espace mémoire de 20 Mo ou plus. TWAIN Pilote Pilote TWAIN, pilote HDD TWAIN Systèmes d'exploitation compatibles Windows XP Édition familiale (SP3 ou ultérieur) Windows XP Professionnel (SP3 ou ultérieur) Windows XP Professional x64 Edition (SP3 ou ultérieur) Windows Vista Home Basic (SP2 ou ultérieur)* Windows Vista Home Premium (SP2 ou ultérieur)* Windows Vista Ultimate (SP2 ou ultérieur)* Windows Vista Business (SP2 ou ultérieur)* Windows Vista Enterprise (SP2 ou ultérieur)* Windows 7 Home Basic* Windows 7 Home Premium* Windows 7 Professional* Windows 7 Enterprise* Windows 7 Ultimate* * Supporte l'environnement 32-bit (x86) ou 64-bit (x64). Élément Caractéristiques 5 5-10 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 Fonctions Imprimante Élément Caractéristiques Type Contrôleur d'imprimante intégré Mémoire disponible 2048 Mo (commune à l'unité principale) Taille du disque dur 250 Go (commune à l'unité principale) I/F Ethernet (1000Base-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T) USB 2.0/1.1 Langage de l'imprimante Émulation PCL5e/c Émulation PCL XL ver 2.1 Émulation (3016) PostScript 3 XPS ver.1.0 Définition 1200 dpi e 1200 dpi Largeur de rognage d'image En haut 3/16 pouces (4,2 mm) (Papier fin : 3/16 pouces (5,0 mm)) En bas 3/16 pouce (4,2 mm) À droite 3/16 pouce (4,2 mm) À gauche 3/16 pouce (4,2 mm) Zone imprimable maximum Pour papier 12-1/4 e 18 pouces (311,1mm e 457,2mm) : 11-15/16 e 17-11/16 pouces (302,6mm e 448,7 mm) Nombre de feuilles chargées dans le Bac de sortie Papier ordinaire 250 feuilles Papier fin 100 feuilles Épais 10 feuilles Transparent 1 feuille Polices (polices intégrées) Polices européennes 80 Japonais HG Mincho L HG P Mincho L HG Gothic B HG P Gothic B <Émulation Postscript 3> Polices européennes 137 Japonais HG Mincho L HG Gothic B Ordinateur compatible IBM PC et sa machine compatible Macintosh (PowerPC, Intel Processor : Mac OS X 10.4/10.5/10.6/10.7 seulement) bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 5-11 5 Pilote d'imprimante Pilote KONICA MINOLTA PCL (Pilote PCL) Windows XP Édition familiale (Service Pack 1 ou ultérieur) Windows XP Professionnel (Service Pack 1 ou ultérieur) Windows Serveur 2003, Édition standard (Service Pack 1 ou ultérieur) Windows Serveur 2003, Édition entreprise (Service Pack 1 ou ultérieur) Windows Serveur 2003 R2, Édition standard Windows Serveur 2003 R2, Édition entreprise Windows XP Professionnel e64 Édition Windows Serveur 2003, Standard e64 Édition Windows Serveur 2003, Entreprisee64 Édition Windows Serveur 2003 R2, Standard e64 Édition Windows Serveur 2003 R2, Entreprise e64 Édition Windows Vista Business * Windows Vista Entreprise * Windows Vista Home Basic * Windows Vista Home Premium * Windows Vista Ultimate * Windows Serveur 2008 Standard * Windows Serveur 2008 Entreprise * Windows Serveur 2008 R2 Standard Windows Serveur 2008 R2 Entreprise Windows 7 Home Basic * Windows 7 Home Premium * Windows 7 Professionnel * Windows 7 Entreprise * Windows 7 Ultimate * * Prend en charge l'environnement 32-bit (e86) ou 64-bit (e64). Élément Caractéristiques 5 5-12 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 Pilote d'imprimante Pilote KONICA MINOLTA PostScript (Pilote PS) Windows XP Édition familiale (Service Pack 1 ou ultérieur) Windows XP Professionnel (Service Pack 1 ou ultérieur) Windows Serveur 2003, Édition standard (Service Pack 1 ou ultérieur) Windows Serveur 2003, Édition entreprise (Service Pack 1 ou ultérieur) Windows Serveur 2003 R2, Édition standard Windows Serveur 2003 R2, Édition entreprise Windows XP Professionnel e64 Édition Windows Serveur 2003, Standard e64 Édition Windows Serveur 2003, Entreprisee64 Édition Windows Serveur 2003 R2, Standard e64 Édition Windows Serveur 2003 R2, Entreprise e64 Édition Windows Vista Business * Windows Vista Entreprise * Windows Vista Home Basic * Windows Vista Home Premium * Windows Vista Ultimate * Windows Serveur 2008 Standard * Windows Serveur 2008 Entreprise * Windows Serveur 2008 R2 Standard Windows Serveur 2008 R2 Entreprise Windows 7 Home Basic * Windows 7 Home Premium * Windows 7 Professionnel * Windows 7 Entreprise * Windows 7 Ultimate * * Prend en charge l'environnement 32-bit (e86) ou 64-bit (e64). Pilote XPS KONICA MINOLTA (pilote XPS) Windows Vista Business * Windows Vista Enterprise * Windows Vista Home Basic * Windows Vista Home Premium * Windows Vista Ultimate * Windows Server 2008 Standard * Windows Server 2008 Enterprise * Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise Windows 7 Home Basic * Windows 7 Home Premium * Windows 7 Professional * Windows 7 Enterprise * Windows 7 Ultimate * * Supporte l'environnement 32-bit (e86) ou 64-bit (e64). Pilote PostScript PPD (PS-PPD) Mac OS 9.2 ou ultérieur Mac OS X 10.2.8/10.3/10.4/10.5/10.6/10.7 Élément Caractéristiques bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 5-13 5 Fonction réseau *1 Requiert le Kit d'interface locale EK-607. *2 Lors de l'utilisation de Lotus Domino Server et du réglage de la condition de recherche sur "OU", la fonction ne marchera pas correctement. Pilote Fax Pilote KONICA MINOLTA PCL (Pilote PCL) Windows XP Édition familiale (Service Pack 1 ou ultérieur) Windows XP Professionnel (Service Pack 1 ou ultérieur) Windows Serveur 2003, Édition standard (Service Pack 1 ou ultérieur) Windows Serveur 2003, Édition entreprise (Service Pack 1 ou ultérieur) Windows Serveur 2003 R2, Édition standard Windows Serveur 2003 R2, Édition entreprise Windows XP Professionnel e64 Édition Windows Serveur 2003, Standard e64 Édition Windows Serveur 2003, Entreprisee64 Édition Windows Serveur 2003 R2, Standard e64 Édition Windows Serveur 2003 R2, Entreprise e64 Édition Windows Vista Business * Windows Vista Entreprise * Windows Vista Home Basic * Windows Vista Home Premium * Windows Vista Ultimate * Windows Serveur 2008 Standard * Windows Serveur 2008 Entreprise * Windows Serveur 2008 R2 Standard Windows Serveur 2008 R2 Entreprise Windows 7 Home Basic * Windows 7 Home Premium * Windows 7 Professionnel * Windows 7 Entreprise * Windows 7 Ultimate * * Prend en charge l'environnement 32-bit (e86) ou 64-bit (e64). Élément Caractéristiques Élément Caractéristiques Type Incorporé Type de trame Ethernet 802.2 Ethernet 802.3 Ethernet II Ethernet SNAP Type de câble 1000Base-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T Connecteur RJ-45 Performance Bluetooth *1 Protocole de communication : Bluetooth 2.0 + EDR Profiles supportés : OPP/BPP/SPP Protocoles pris en charge TCP/IP(IPv4/IPv6), BOOTP, ARP, ICMP, DHCP, DHCPv6, AutoIP, SLP, SNMP, FTP, LPR/LPD, RAW Socket, SMB over TCP/IP, IPP, HTTP, POP, SMTP, LDAP, NTP, SSL, IPX, AppleTalk, Bonjour, NetBEUI, WebDAV, DPWS, S/MIME, IPsec, DNS, DynamicDNS, LLMNR, LLTD, SSDP, SOAP Serveurs LDAP supportés OpenLDAP 2.1x, Active Directory, Exchange 5.5/2000/2003, serveur Sun Java Directory (serveur Netscape/iPlanet Directory), Novell NetWare 5.x/6.x NDS, Novell eDirectory 8.6/8.7, LotusDominoServer(5.x/6.x) *2 Protocole LDAP géré Protocole LDAP Version 3 (la version 2 n'est pas prise en charge) Versions SSL supportées SSL3.0 et TLS1.0 (Un certificat x.509 doit être installé sur le serveur.) Multiprotocole Autodétection Réglages Sauvegardée dans la mémoire non volatile 5 5-14 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 6 Vérifier les spécifications des composants optionnels bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 6-3 6 6 Vérifier les spécifications des composants optionnels Fonction fax (Kit fax FK-511) Élément Caractéristiques Mémoire disponible 2048 Mo (standard) Nombre de pages stockées 10 000 pages (pour un original d'environ 700 caractères au format 8-1/2 e 11 (A4) enregistré en résolution [Fin]) Lignes éligibles Lignes téléphoniques d'abonnés (y compris les réseaux Fax) Lignes PBX Résolution de numérisation Ultra Fin : 600 dpi e 600 dpi Super Fin : 16 dot/mm e 15,4 line/mm, 400 dpi e 400 dpi Fin : 8 dot/mm e 7,7 line/mm, 200 dpi e 200 dpi Normal : 8 points/mm e 3,85 lignes/mm Les fax sont émis avec l'une des résolutions ci-dessus variant en fonction des capacités de la machine du destinataire. Vitesse de transmission (G3) 2400/4800/7200/9600/12000/14400/16800/19200/21600/24000/26400/ 28800/31200/33600 bps Format de numérisation maximal Vitre d'exposition : 11-11/16 pouces e 17 pouces (297mm e 431,8mm) (format 11 e 17 (A3)) Chargeur ADF : 11-11/16 pouces e 39-3/8 pouces (297mm e 1 000 mm) (Normal, Fin, Super fin) 11-11/16 pouces e 17 pouces (297mm e 432mm) (Ultra Fin, Transmission manuelle) Format d'enregistrement maximal 11-11/16 pouces e 16-9/16 pouces (297mm e 420mm) (format 11 e 17 (A3)) Un original de 39-3/8 pouces (1000mm) ou plus est imprimé sur la base du réglage de la page de séparation. 6 6-4 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 Chargeur automatique recto-verso DF-624 Chargeur de document double numérisation DF-701 Élément Caractéristiques Fonction d'introduction de l'original Original recto seul, original recto-verso, originaux de formats différents Types d'originaux Recto seul Papier fin (9-5/16 lb à 13-1/16 lb (35 g/m2 à 49 g/m2)) Papier ordinaire (13-5/16 lb à 34-1/16 lb (50 g/m2 à 128 g/m2)) Recto-Verso Papier ordinaire (13-5/16 lb à 34-1/16 lb (50 g/m2 à 128 g/m2)) Orig. Mixtes Papier ordinaire (13-5/16 lb à 34-1/16 lb (50 g/m2 à 128 g/m2)) Format original Originaux recto/recto-verso : 11 e 17 w à 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, A3 w à B6 w, cartes postales (4 e 6 (Carte A6)) Capacité de chargement des originaux Originaux recto/recto-verso : 100 feuilles max. (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2)) Vitesse de numérisation 78 feuilles/min (En numérisation au format Letter (8-1/2 e 11 v) ou A4 v) Alimentation Fournie par la machine Consommation électrique max. 60 W ou moins Dimensions Largeur 24-1/16 pouces (611 mm) e Profondeur 19-13/16 pouces (503 mm) e Hauteur 5 pouces (127 mm) Poids Environ 19-13/16 lb (9 kg) Élément Caractéristiques Fonction d'introduction de l'original Original recto seul, original recto-verso, originaux de formats différents Types d'originaux Recto seul Papier fin (9-5/16 lb à 13-1/16 lb (35 g/m2 à 49 g/m2)) Papier ordinaire (13-5/16 lb à 43-3/8 lb (50 g/m2 à 163 g/m2)) Recto-Verso Papier ordinaire (13-5/16 lb à 43-3/8 lb (50 g/m2 à 163 g/m2)) Orig. Mixtes Papier ordinaire (13-5/16 lb à 34-1/16 lb (50 g/m2 à 128 g/m2)) Format original Originaux recto/recto-verso : 11 e 17 w à 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, A3 w à B6 w, cartes postales (4 e 6 (Carte A6)) Capacité de chargement des originaux Originaux recto/recto-verso : 100 feuilles max. (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2)) Vitesse de numérisation 80 feuilles/min (En numérisation au format Letter (8-1/2 e 11 v) ou A4 v) Alimentation Fournie par la machine Consommation électrique max. 60 W ou moins Dimensions Largeur 24-1/16 pouces (611 mm) e Profondeur 19-13/16 pouces (503 mm) e Hauteur 5-9/16 pouces (142 mm) Poids Approx. 26-7/16 lb (12 kg) bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 6-5 6 Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-110 Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-210 Élément Caractéristiques Type de papier Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), recto seul (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), papier spécial (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), en-tête (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), papier couleur (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2), Épais 1 (24-3/16 lb à 31-15/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 120 g/m2)), Epais 1+ (32-3/16 lb à 41-3/4 lb (121 g/m2 à 157 g/m2)), Épais 2 (42 lb à 55-5/8 lb (158 g/m2 à 209 g/m2)), Épais 3 (55-7/8 lb à 68-1/8 lb (210 g/m2 à 256 g/m2)) Format papier 11 e 17 w à 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, A3 w à A5 w, B4 w, B5 w/v, 8 e 13 w*1, 16K v, 8K w *1 Il existe six types de Foolscap : 8-1/2 e 13-1/2 w, 220 mm e 330 mm w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, et 8 e 13 w. Chacun de ces formats peut être sélectionné. Pour plus de détails, contacter le S.A.V. Nombre de feuilles qui peuvent être chargées Magasin 3 Papier fin, papier ordinaire, papier recyclé, papier spécial recto, papier spécial, en-tête, papier couleur : 500 feuilles, Épais 1, Epais 1+, Épais 2, Épais 3 : 150 feuilles Alimentation Fournie par la machine Consommation électrique max. 15 W ou moins Dimensions Largeur 24-3/16 pouces (615mm) e Profondeur 25-11/16 pouces (652 mm) e Hauteur 11-9/16 pouces (294 mm) Poids Environ 48-1/2 lb (22 kg) Configuration de l'unité Magasin papier, 1 niveau Élément Caractéristiques Type de papier Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), recto seul (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), papier spécial (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), en-tête (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), papier couleur (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2), Épais 1 (24-3/16 lb à 31-15/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 120 g/m2)), Epais 1+ (32-3/16 lb à 41-3/4 lb (121 g/m2 à 157 g/m2)), Épais 2 (42 lb à 55-5/8 lb (158 g/m2 à 209 g/m2)), Épais 3 (55-7/8 lb à 68-1/8 lb (210 g/m2 à 256 g/m2)) Format papier 11 e 17 w à 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, A3 w à A5 w, B4 w, B5 w/v, 8 e 13 w*1, 16K v, 8K w *1 Il existe six types de Foolscap : 8-1/2 e 13-1/2 w, 220 mm e 330 mm w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, et 8 e 13 w. Chacun de ces formats peut être sélectionné. Pour plus de détails, contacter le S.A.V. Nombre de feuilles qui peuvent être chargées Magasin du haut (Magasin 3) Papier fin, papier ordinaire, papier recyclé, papier spécial recto, papier spécial, en-tête, papier couleur : 500 feuilles, Épais 1, Epais 1+, Épais 2, Épais 3 : 150 feuilles Magasin du bas (Magasin 4) Papier fin, papier ordinaire, papier recyclé, papier spécial recto, papier spécial, en-tête, papier couleur : 500 feuilles, Épais 1, Epais 1+, Épais 2, Épais 3 : 150 feuilles Alimentation Fournie par la machine Consommation électrique max. 15 W ou moins Dimensions Largeur 24-3/16 pouces (615mm) e Profondeur 25-11/16 pouces (652 mm) e Hauteur 11-9/16 pouces (294 mm) Poids Approx. 52-15/16 lb (24 kg) Configuration de l'unité Magasin papier, 2 niveaux 6 6-6 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 Meuble d'alimentation papier PC-410 Unité grande capacité LU-301 Élément Caractéristiques Type de papier Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), recto seul (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), papier spécial (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), en-tête (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), papier couleur (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2), Épais 1 (24-3/16 lb à 31-15/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 120 g/m2)), Epais 1+ (32-3/16 lb à 41-3/4 lb (121 g/m2 à 157 g/m2)), Épais 2 (42 lb à 55-5/8 lb (158 g/m2 à 209 g/m2)), Épais 3 (55-7/8 lb à 68-1/8 lb (210 g/m2 à 256 g/m2)) Format papier 11 e 17 w à 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, A3 w à A5 w, B4 w, B5 w/v, 8 e 13 w*1, 16K v, 8K w Nombre de feuilles qui peuvent être chargées Papier fin, papier ordinaire, papier recyclé, papier spécial recto, papier spécial, en-tête, papier couleur : 2 500 feuilles, Épais 1, Epais 1+, Épais 2, Épais 3 : 1 000 feuilles Alimentation Fournie par la machine Consommation électrique max. 45 W ou moins Dimensions Largeur 24-3/16 pouces (615 mm) e Profondeur 25-11/16 pouces (652 mm) e Hauteur 11-9/16 pouces (294mm) Poids Environ 50-11/16 lb (23 kg) Élément Caractéristiques Type de papier Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Épais 1 (24-3/16 lb à 31-15/16 lb (91 à 120 g/m2)), Épais1+ (32-3/16 lb à 41-3/4 lb (121 à 157 g/m2)), Épais 2 (42 lb à 55-5/8 lb (158 à 209 g/m2)), Épais 3 (55-7/8 lb à 68-1/8 lb (210 à 256 g/m2) Format papier 8-1/2 e 11 v, A4 v Nombre de feuilles qui peuvent être chargées Papier ordinaire : 3000 feuilles (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2)) / 3300 feuilles (17 lb (64 g/m2)), Épais 1 : 2500 feuilles, Épais 1+ : 1750 feuilles, Épais 2 : 1550 feuilles, Épais 3 : 1300 feuilles Alimentation Fournie par la machine Consommation électrique max. 22 W ou moins Dimensions Largeur 14-7/16 pouces (367 mm) e Profondeur 20-13/16 pouces (528 mm) e Hauteur 15-15/16 pouces (405 mm) Poids Approx. 39-11/16 lb (18 kg) bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 6-7 6 Unité grande capacité LU-204 * Le nombre maximal de feuilles qu'il est possible de charger pour chaque format de papier est de 2 500 feuilles (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2)) ou 2 750 feuilles (17 lb (64 g/m2)). Unité de finition FS-535 Élément Caractéristiques Type de papier Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Épais 1 (24-3/16 lb à 31-15/16 lb (91 à 120 g/m2)), Épais1+ (32-3/16 lb à 41-3/4 lb (121 à 157 g/m2)), Épais 2 (42 lb à 55-5/8 lb (158 à 209 g/m2)), Épais 3 (55-7/8 lb à 68-1/8 lb (210 à 256 g/m2) Format papier* 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w à 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v Nombre de feuilles qui peuvent être chargées Papier ordinaire : 2 500 feuilles (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2))/2 750 feuilles (17 lb (64 g/m2)), Épais 1 : 2 000 feuilles, Épais 1+ : 1 450 feuilles, Épais 2 : 1 250 feuilles, Épais 3 : 1 000 feuilles Alimentation Fournie par la machine Consommation électrique max. 22 W ou moins Dimensions Largeur 24-3/4 pouces (629 mm) e Profondeur 21-7/8 pouces (556mm) e Hauteur 15-15/16 pouces (405 mm) Poids Approx. 55-1/8 lb (25 kg) Élément Caractéristiques Bac de sortie Bac de sortie 1 (Bac auxiliaire), Bac de sortie 2 (Bac principal) Fonction d'introduction Groupe, Tri, Groupe Décalé*, Tri Décalé *, Agraf.* * Délivré dans le Bac de sortie 2 Type de papier Groupe, Tri : papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)). Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Épais (24-3/16 lb à 79-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)), Transparent, Carte postale (4 e 6 (carte A6)), Enveloppe, Planches d'étiquettes, Papier à en-tête, Papier à onglets, Papier bannière* * Délivré dans le Bac de sortie 1 Décalage Groupe, Décalage Tri : Papier fin (13-13/16 lb 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Épais (24-3/16 lb à 79-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)) Agrafer : Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Épais (24-3/16 lb à 55-5/8 lb (91 g/m2 à 209 g/m2)) 6 6-8 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 Format papier 12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w à 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 4 e 6 w, SRA3 w, A3 w à A6 w, B4 w à B6 w, Carte A6 w, 16K w/v, 8K w Largeur : 3-9/16 pouces à 12-5/8 pouces (90mm à 320 mm), Longueur : 5-1/2 à 47-1/4 pouces (139,7 mm à 1200 mm) Groupe/Tri : 12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w à 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 4 e 6 w, SRA3 w, A3 w à A6 w, B4 w à B6 w, Carte A6 w, 16K w/v, 8K w Largeur : 5-1/8 à 12-5/8 pouces (130 mm à 320 mm), longueur : 5-1/2 à 18 pouces (139,7 mm à 457,2 mm) Groupe Décalé/Tri Décalé : 12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w à 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w/v, SRA3 w, A3 w à A5 v, B4 w à B6 w, 16K w/v, 8K w Largeur : 7-3/16 à 12-1/4 pouces (182 mm à 311,15 mm), longueur : 5-7/8 à 18 pouces (148,5 mm à 457,2 mm) Agrafage : 11 e 17 w à 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w/v, A3 w à A5 v, B4 w à B6 v, 16K w/v, 8K w Largeur : 7-3/16 pouces à 12 pouces (182mm à 304,8 mm), Longueur : 5-7/8 pouces à 18 pouces (148,5mm à 457,2mm) Capacité de chargement de papier Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)) 200 feuilles Épais (24-3/16 lb à 79-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)), Transparent, Carte postale (4 e 6 (Carte A6)), Enveloppe, Planches d'étiquettes, Papier à en-tête, Papier index 20 feuilles Papier rouleau Non spécifié Hauteur de charge : 1-1/2 pouces (38 mm) Capacité de chargement de papier Groupe/ Tri Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)) 8-1/2 e 11 w, A4 w ou moins 3000 feuilles 8-1/2 e 14 w, B4 w ou plus 1500 feuilles 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w, A5 w ou plus 500 feuilles Épais (24-3/16 lb à 79-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)) 100 feuilles Transparent, carte postale (4 e 6 (Carte A6)), enveloppe, planche d'étiquettes, papier à en-tête, papier à onglets Non spécifié Élément Caractéristiques bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 6-9 6 Capacité de chargement de papier Groupe Décalé/ Tri Décalé Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)) 8-1/2 e 11 w, A4 w ou moins 3000 feuilles 8-1/2 e 14 w, B4 w ou plus 1500 feuilles B5 v ou moins 500 feuilles Épais (24-3/16 lb à 79-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)) Non spécifié Agrafer Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)) 8-1/2 e 11 w, A4 w ou moins 2 à 9 feuilles 200 copies 10 à 20 feuilles 50 copies 21 à 30 feuilles 30 copies 31 à 40 feuilles 25 copies 41 à 50 feuilles 20 copies 51 à 60 feuilles 15 copies 61 à 100 feuilles 10 copies 8-1/2 e 14 w, B4 w ou plus 2 à 9 feuilles 50 copies 10 à 20 feuilles 50 copies 21 à 30 feuilles 30 copies 31 à 40 feuilles 25 copies 41 à 50 feuilles 20 copies 51 à 60 feuilles 15 copies 61 à 100 feuilles 10 copies Épais (24-3/16 lb à 55-5/8 lb (91 g/m2 à 209 g/m2)) Non spécifié Hauteur de charge : 14-1/2 pouces (369 mm) Nombre max. de feuilles agrafées Papier fin, Papier ordinaire, Papier recyclé (13-13/16 lb à 21-1/4 lb (52 g/m2 à 80 g/m2)) 100 feuilles Valeur de décalage 1-3/16 pouces (30 mm) Alimentation Fournie par la machine Consommation électrique max. 105 W ou moins (quand toutes les options possibles sont installées) Dimensions Largeur : 28-1/2 pouces (724 mm) (Lorsque le magasin est sorti : 34-11/16 pouces (881 mm)) e Largeur : 27-15/16 pouces (709,5 mm) e Hauteur : 40-3/8 pouces (1025 mm) Poids Approx. 140 lb (63,5 kg) Élément Caractéristiques 6 6-10 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 Piqueuse à cheval SD-512 Consommables Agrafes MS-10A Pour EH-1028 (N° Produit 1002 fabriqué par MAX) (5 000 agrafes incluses) e 1 unité Élément Caractéristiques Élément Caractéristiques Fonction d'introduction Agraf. centre + Pliage, Pliage en 2 (Introduction par tapis roulant) Type de papier Pliage, Agrafage : Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Épais (24-3/16 lb à 55-5/8 lb (91 g/m2 à 209 g/m2))* * Ne peut être utilisé que comme page de couverture. Pliage en 2 : Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Épais (24-3/16 lb à 55-5/8 lb (91 g/m2 à 209 g/m2))* * Ne peut être utilisé que feuille à feuille. Pliage en 3 : Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)) Format papier Agrafage centre, Pliage central : 12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w à 8-1/2 e 11 w, A3 w, A4 w, B4 w, 8K w Largeur : 8-1/4 à 12-5/8 pouces (210 mm à 320mm), Longueur : 11 à 18 pouces (279,4 mm à 457,2 mm) Pliage en 3 : 8-1/2 e 11 w, A4 w, 16K w Nombre maximum de feuilles qui peuvent être agrafées au centre 20 feuilles Exemple de nombre de feuilles agrafables : Face de couverture (13-13/16 lb à 55-5/8 lb (52 g/m2 à 209 g/m2)) 1 feuille + Papier fin, Papier ordinaire (13-13/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) 19 feuilles Nombre max. de feuilles pliées Pliage en 2 : 5 feuilles Pliage en 3 : 3 feuilles Capacité du Bac de sortie Pliage Plier au centre Lorsque la longueur du papier est de 13 pouces (330mm) ou plus 1 à 5 feuilles agrafées 35 jeux 6 à 10 feuilles agrafées 30 jeux 11 à 20 feuilles agrafées 15 jeux Lorsque la longueur du papier est de 13 pouces (330mm) ou moins 1 à 5 feuilles agrafées 35 jeux 6 à 10 feuilles agrafées 25 jeux 11 à 20 feuilles agrafées 15 jeux Pliage en 2 Lorsque la longueur du papier est de 13 pouces (330mm) ou plus 1 à 5 feuilles pliées 35 jeux Quand la longueur du papier est inférieure à 13 pouces (330 mm) 1 à 5 feuilles pliées 35 jeux Pliage en 3 Une feuille pliée 50 jeux 2 feuilles pliées 40 jeux 3 feuilles pliées 30 jeux Dimensions Largeur 9-7/16 pouces (239 mm) e Profondeur 22-13/16 pouces (579 mm) e Hauteur 21 pouces (534 mm) bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 6-11 6 Kit de perforation PK-521 Séparateur du travail JS-602 Poids Approx. 51-3/8 lb (23,3 kg), Approx. 7-1/16 lb (3,2 kg) (bac de sortie) Consommables Agrafes SK-602 Pour EH-280 (N° Produit 505 fabriqué par MAX) (5000 agrafes incluses) e 1 unité Alimentation Fournie par l'Unité de finition FS-535. Élément Caractéristiques Élément Caractéristiques Nombre de perforations 2 trous, 3 trous, 4 trous Type de papier Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Épais (24-3/16 lb à 79-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)) Format papier 11 e 17 w à 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w/v, A3 w à A4 w/v, B4 w à B5 w/v, 16K w/v, 8K w Alimentation Fournie par l'Unité de finition FS-535. Dimensions Largeur 5-3/4 pouces (146,2 mm) e Profondeur 25-3/16 pouces (639,2 mm) e Hauteur 9-3/16 pouces (233,8 mm) Poids Approx. 9-15/16 lb (4,5 kg) Élément Caractéristiques Bac de sortie Bac de sortie 3 Fonction d'introduction Groupe, Tri Type de papier Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)) Format papier 11 e 17 w à 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w, A3 w à A5 w, SRA4 w, 16K w/v, 8K w Largeur : 5-1/2 pouces à 7-3/16 pouces (139,7 mm à 182 mm), longueur : 11-11/16 pouces à 17 pouces (297 mm à 431,8 mm) Capacité de chargement de papier Papier ordinaire 21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2) 8-1/2 e 11 w, A4 w 100 feuilles Autre que 8-1/2 e 11 w, A3 w 50 feuilles Dimensions Largeur 13-7/16 pouces (341mm) e Profondeur 21-1/8 pouces (537mm) e Hauteur 5-7/8 pouces (149 mm) Poids Approx. 3-7/8 lb (1,75 kg) 6 6-12 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 Unité de pliage en Z ZU-606 Unité d'insertion PI-505 Élément Caractéristiques Nombre de perforations 2 trous, 3 trous, 4 trous Type de papier quand la perforation est sélectionnée Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)) Format de papier quand la perforation est sélectionnée 11 e 17 w à 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A3 w à A5 w/v, 16K w/v, 8K w Type de pliage Pliage en Z Type de papier quand le pliage en Z est sélectionné Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)) Format de papier quand le pliage en Z est sélectionné 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8K w Alimentation Alimentation depuis la prise de courant Dimensions Largeur 6-5/8 pouces (169 mm) e Profondeur 26 pouces (660 mm) e Hauteur 40-7/16 pouces (1027,5mm) Poids Approx. 99-3/16 lb (45 kg) Élément Caractéristiques Configuration 2 magasins (supérieur et inférieur) Type de papier couverture Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 à 90 g/m2)), Épais (24-3/16 lb à 55-5/8 lb (91 g/m2 à 209 g/m2)) Format de papier couverture 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, A4 w/v à A5 v, B5 w/v, 16K w/v Largeur : 7-3/16 pouces à 12-1/4 pouces (182 mm à 311,1mm) Longueur : 5-1/2 pouces à 11-11/16 pouces (139 mm à 297 mm) 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, A3 w à A5 v, B4, B5 w/v, SRA4 w, 16K w/v, 8K w Largeur : 7-3/16 pouces à 12-1/4 pouces (182 mm à 311,1mm) Longueur : 5-1/2 pouces à 18 pouces (139mm à 457,2mm) Capacité de chargement de papier Papier ordinaire 21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2) 200 feuilles pour chaque magasin Alimentation Fournie par l'Unité de finition FS-535. Dimensions Largeur 20-1/8 pouces (511 mm) e Profondeur 25 pouces (635 mm) e Hauteur 8-11/16 pouces (220 mm) Poids Approx. 23-1/8 lb (10,5 kg) bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 6-13 6 Unité de finition FS-534 Élément Caractéristiques Bac de sortie Bac de sortie 1 (Bac auxiliaire), Bac de sortie 2 (Bac principale), Bac de sortie Pliage (Haut de l'unité RU) Fonction d'introduction Groupe, Tri, Groupe Décalé, Tri Décalé, Agrafage Type de papier Groupe, Tri : Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), Transparent, Carte postale (4 e 6 (Carte A6))*, Enveloppe, Planches d'étiquettes, Papier à entête, Papier à onglets*, Papier bannière* * Délivré dans le Bac de sortie 1 Groupe Décalé/Tri Décalé : Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) Agrafage : Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), Épais (3-9/16 lb à 8-1/4 lb (91 g/m2 à 209 g/m2)) Format papier 12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w à 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 4 e 6 w, A3 w à A6 w, Carte A6, B4 w à B6 w, 16K w/v, 8K w Largeur : 3-9/16 pouces à 12-5/8 pouces (90 mm à 320 mm), Longueur : 5-1/2 à 47-1/4 pouces (139,7 mm à 1200 mm) Groupe/Tri : 12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w à 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A3 w à A6 w, B4 w à B6 w, 16K w/v, 8K w Largeur : 5-1/8 à 12-5/8 pouces (130 mm à 320mm), longueur : 5-1/2 à 18 pouces (139,7mm à 457,2 mm) Groupe Décalé/Tri Décalé : 12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w à 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, SRA3 w, A3 w à A5 v, B4 w à B6 w, 16K w/v, 8K w Largeur : 7-3/16 à 12-5/8 pouces (182mm à 320 mm), longueur : 5-7/8 à 18 pouces (148,5mm à 457,2 mm) Agrafage : 11 e 17 w à 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w/v, A3 w à A5 v, B4 w à B5 w/v, 16K w/v, 8K w Largeur : 7-3/16 à 11-11/16 pouces (182 à 297 mm), Longueur : 5-7/8 à 17 pouces (148,5mm à 431,8 mm) Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) 200 feuilles Épais (24-3/16 lb à 11-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)), Transparent, Carte postale (4 e 6 (Carte A6)), Enveloppe, Planches d'étiquettes, Papier à en-tête, Papier index 20 feuilles Papier rouleau Non spécifié Hauteur de charge : 1-3/8 pouces (35mm) 6 6-14 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 Qualité du papier accepté Groupe/Tri Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15- 11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23- 15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23- 15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) 8-1/2 e 11 w, A4 w ou moins, B5 w/v ou plus 3000 feuilles 8-1/2 e 14 w, B4 w ou plus 1500 feuilles 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A5 w/v ou plus 500 feuilles Épais (24-3/16 lb à 11-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)), Transparent, Carte postale (4 e 6 (Carte A6)), Enveloppe, Planches d'étiquettes, Papier à en-tête, Papier index 20 feuilles Qualité du papier accepté Groupe Décalé/ Tri Décalé Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15- 11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23- 15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23- 15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, A4 w/v, B5 v 3000 feuilles 8-1/2 e 14 w, A4 w, B5 w, B4 w ou plus 1500 feuilles B5 v ou moins 500 feuilles Épais (24-3/16 lb à 11-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)) 20 feuilles Agrafer Papier fin (13- 13/16 lb à 15- 11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23- 15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23- 15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) 2 à 9 feuilles 100 copies 10 à 20 feuilles 50 copies 21 à 30 feuilles 30 copies 31 à 40 feuilles 25 copies 41 feuilles ou plus 20 copies Épais (24-3/16 lb à 11-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)) 20 copies Hauteur de charge : 14-3/4 pouces (375 mm) (8-1/2 e 11 w, A4 w ou moins)/ 7-3/8 pouces (187,5 mm) (8-1/2 e 14 w, B4 w ou plus) Qualité du papier accepté Groupe, Tri, Groupe Décalé, Tri Décalé Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) 8-1/2 e 11 w, A4 w ou moins 500 feuilles 8-1/2 e 14 w, B4 w ou plus 250 feuilles Épais (24-3/16 lb à 11-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)), transparent, carte postale (4 e 6 (Carte A6)), enveloppe, planches d'étiquettes, en-tête, papier bannière, papier à onglets 10 feuilles Capacité de chargement en papier du Agrafer Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) 8-1/2 e 11 w, A4 w ou moins 50 copies 8-1/2 e 14 w, B4 w ou plus 30 copies Épais (91 g/m2 à 209 g/m2) Non spécifié Hauteur de charge : 2-7/8 pouces (73 mm) (8-1/2 e 11 w, A4 w ou moins)/ 1-7/16 pouces (36 mm) (8-1/2 e 14 w, B4 w ou plus) Nombre max. de feuilles agrafées 8-1/2 e 11 w, A4 w ou moins : 50 feuilles 8-1/2 e 14 w, B4 w ou plus : 30 feuilles Exemple de nombres de feuilles agrafées : Épais (55-5/8 lb (209 g/m2)) 2 feuilles + Papier ordinaire (23-15/16 lb (90 g/m2)) 48 feuilles Valeur de décalage 1-3/16 pouces (30 mm) Alimentation Fournie par la machine Consommation électrique max. 40 W ou moins Dimensions Largeur 18-5/8 pouces (472,5 mm) e Profondeur 23 pouces (583,5 mm) e Hauteur 7-11/16 pouces (194,7mm) Poids Approx. 26-7/16 lb (12 kg) Consommables Agrafes SK-602 Pour EH-590 (N° Produit 505 fabriqué par MAX) (5000 agrafes incluses) e 1 unité Élément Caractéristiques 6 6-18 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 Kit de perforation PK-519 Séparateur du travail JS-506 Élément Caractéristiques Nombre de perforations 2 trous, 3 trous, 4 trous Type de papier Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), épais (24-3/16 lb à 41-3/4 lb (91 g/m2 à 157 g/m2)) Format papier 11 e 17 w à 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w/v, A3 w à A4 w/v, B4 w à B5 w/v Alimentation Fournie par l'Unité de finition FS-533. Dimensions Largeur 4-5/16 pouces (110,2mm) e Profondeur 19-1/16 pouces (483,5 mm) e Hauteur 8 pouces (203,2 mm) Poids Environ 7-1/16 lb (3,2 kg) Élément Caractéristiques Bac de sortie Bac de sortie 1, Bac de sortie 2 (magasin de décalage) Fonction d'introduction Groupe, Tri, Groupe décalé*, Tri Décalé* * Délivré dans le Bac de sortie 2 Type de papier Groupe, Tri : papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), épais (24-3/16 lb à 11-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)), transparent, carte postale (4 e 6 (Carte A6)*, enveloppe, planches d'étiquettes, en-tête, papier à onglets*, papier bannière* * Délivré dans le Bac de sortie 2 Groupe Décalé/Tri Décalé : Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), épais (24-3/16 lb à 11-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)) Format papier 12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w à 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, SRA3 w, A3 w à A6 w, B4 w à B6 w, 16K w/v, 8K w Largeur : 3-9/16 à 12-5/8 pouces (90mm à 320mm), longueur : 5-1/2 à 18 pouces (139,7 mm à 457,2 mm) Groupe/Tri : 12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w à 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 4 e 6 w, SRA3 w, A3 w à A6 w, carte A6 w, B4 w à B6 w, 16K w/v, 8K w Largeur : 3-9/16 pouces à 12-5/8 pouces (90 mm à 320 mm), Longueur : 5-1/2 à 47-1/4 pouces (139,7 mm à 1200 mm) Groupe Décalé/Tri Décalé : 11 e 17 w à 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w/v, A3 w à A4 w/v, B4 w à B5 w/v, 16K w/v, 8K w Largeur : 7-3/16 à 12-1/4 pouces (182mm à 311,15 mm), longueur : 5-7/8 à 18 pouces (148,5 mm à 457,2 mm) Qualité du papier accepté Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) 100 feuilles Épais (24-3/16 lb à 11-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)), transparent, carte postale (4 e 6 (Carte A6)), enveloppe, planches d'étiquettes Non spécifié Hauteur de charge : 7/8 pouces (22,5 mm) bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 6-19 6 Qualité du papier accepté Groupe/Tri Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) 150 feuilles (24-3/16 lb à 11-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)), transparent, carte postale (4 e 6 (Carte A6)), planches d'étiquettes 20 feuilles Enveloppe 10 feuilles Papier rouleau 1 feuille Qualité du papier accepté Groupe Décalé/Tri Décalé Papier fin (13-13/16 lb à 15-11/16 lb (52 g/m2 à 59 g/m2)), Papier ordinaire (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)), Papier recyclé (15-15/16 lb à 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2)) 150 feuilles (24-3/16 lb à 11-13/16 lb (91 g/m2 à 300 g/m2)) Non spécifié Hauteur de charge : 1-15/16 pouces (49,9 mm) Quantité de décalage : 1-3/16 pouces (30mm) Alimentation Fournie par la machine Consommation électrique max. 24 W ou moins Dimensions Largeur 19-3/8 pouces (491,9 mm) e Profondeur 18-1/2 pouces (469,5mm) e Hauteur 8-15/16 pouces (226,5 mm) Poids Environ 3-5/16 lb (1,5 kg) Élément Caractéristiques 6 6-20 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 Unité d'authentification AU-102 Élément Caractéristiques Nom Unité d'authentification biométrique AU-102 Système à capteur biométrique Système optique de type transmission Durée de vérification Approx. 1 sec. ou moins Interface USB 2.0 Dimensions Largeur 2-5/16 pouces (59mm) e Profondeur 3-1/4 pouces (82 mm) e Hauteur 2-15/16 pouces (74 mm) Poids Approx. 3/16 lb (96 g) (sans le câble USB) Consommation électrique max. (mA) DC 5 V 500 mA Conditions système (en fonctionnement) Température ambiante 5 à 35°C (41 à 95°F) Humidité 20% à 80% (non condensée) Conditions système (au repos) Température ambiante 0 à 50°C (32 à 122°F) Humidité 20% à 80% (non condensée) Ordinateur compatible Ordinateur Machine compatible PC-AT UC Conforme à l'environnement d'exploitation recommandé pour votre système d'exploitation. Mémoire vive (RAM) Conforme à l'environnement d'exploitation recommandé pour votre système d'exploitation. Emplacement disponible sur disque dur 600 Mo ou plus Monitor 800 e 600 pixels ou plus Réseau Doit être configuré avec les paramètres du protocole TCP/IP ou IPX/SPX corrects. Applications Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 (SP1) ou ultérieur Windows XP : Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 (SP2 ou ultérieur) Windows Vista : Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 (SP1 ou ultérieur) Windows 7 intègre en standard .NET Framework nécessaire à l'utilisation de PageScope Data Administrator. Interface Compatible avec USB 2.0. Systèmes d'exploitation compatibles Pour les systèmes d'exploitation pris en charge, voir le fichier Lisez-moi. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 6-21 6 Unité d'authentification AU-201 Élément Caractéristiques Nom Unité de carte d'authentification AU-201 Dimensions Largeur 3-5/8 pouces (92mm) e Profondeur 2 -1/2 pouces (64 mm) e Hauteur 5/8 pouces (16mm) Poids Approx. 1/4 lb (120 g) Alimentation Alimentation à partir du port USB Conditions système (en fonctionnement) Température ambiante 0 à 40°C (32 à 104°F) Humidité 20% à 85% (non condensée) Conditions système (au repos) Température ambiante -20 à 50°C (-4 à 122°F) Humidité 20% à 85% (non condensée) Division Législation Radio Dispositif de communication lecture/écriture autonome Cartes compatibles FeliCa, TypeA, FCF, FCF campus, FeliCa (carte privée), SSFC, HID (Prox) (nombre de bits : 26bit, 34bit, 35bit, 37bit, 40bit), HID (iClass), ExtraCardType_100 à ExtraCardType_255 Standard acquis VCCI classe B Ordinateur compatible Ordinateur Machine compatible PC-AT UC Conforme à l'environnement d'exploitation recommandé pour votre système d'exploitation. Mémoire vive (RAM) Conforme à l'environnement d'exploitation recommandé pour votre système d'exploitation. Emplacement disponible sur disque dur 600 Mo ou plus Monitor 800 e 600 pixels ou plus Réseau Doit être configuré avec les paramètres du protocole TCP/IP ou IPX/SPX corrects. Applications Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 (SP1) ou ultérieur Windows XP : Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 (SP2 ou ultérieur) Windows Vista : Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 (SP1 ou ultérieur) Windows 7 intègre en standard .NET Framework nécessaire à l'utilisation de PageScope Data Administrator. Interface Compatible avec USB 1.1. Systèmes d'exploitation compatibles Pour les systèmes d'exploitation pris en charge, voir le fichier Lisez-moi. 6 6-22 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 7 Utilisation de l'Unité d'authentification (type biométrique) bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 7-3 7.1 Unité d'authentification (type biométrique) 7 7 Utilisation de l'Unité d'authentification (type biométrique) 7.1 Unité d'authentification (type biométrique) L'Unité d'authentification (type biométrique) est un "système biométrique (authentification biométrique)" qui lit les empreintes digitales afin d'identifier des personnes. Elle offre un système qui rend difficile de se faire passer pour un utilisateur autorisé, ce qui renforce la sécurité. Si cette machine offre la fonction d'authentification utilisateur, vous pouvez vous connecter à la machine ou exécuter un travail d'impression à l'aide de la fonction d'authentification biométrique. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'authentification utilisateur, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur : Web Management Tool]. 7 État de l'unité d'authentification 7-4 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 7.2 7.2 État de l'unité d'authentification L'état de l'unité d'authentification est indiqué par des LED d'indication d'état et des signaux sonores. LED d'indication d'état État Verte État prêt ou numérisation ou authentification achevée Clignotant vert Pendant l'authentification Rouge Échec de la numérisation ou de l'authentification Éteinte L'unité d'authentification n'est pas reconnue Son Bip État Un bip court La numérisation est terminée, le test de numérisation a réussi ou l'authentification est terminée Deux bips courts répétés trois fois Échec de la numérisation Deux bips courts Échec d'Authentification bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 7-5 7.3 Opérations requises pour utiliser cette fonction (pour l'administrateur) 7 7.3 Opérations requises pour utiliser cette fonction (pour l'administrateur) 7.3.1 Configuration des paramètres d'authentification de cette machine Configurez d'abord la fonction d'authentification de cette machine (ON (MFP)). Conseils - Cette machine ne prend pas en charge l'authentification par serveur externe. 1 Tapez sur [Utilitaires] - [Réglages Administrateur] - [Identification Utilisateur/Compte Département] - [Réglages Généraux] - [Identification utilisateur]. 2 Réglez [Réglages Généraux] sur [ON (MFP)], puis tapez sur [Valider]. % Si vous voulez associer les réglages de suivi volume, appuyez sur [Utilitaires] - [Réglages Administrateur] - [Identification Utilisateur/Compte Département] - [Réglages Généraux], et réglez [Synchroniser Authentificat. Utilisateur&Compte Départem] sur [Activer synchronis.]. Si l'identification utilisateur et la gestion de compte doivent être gérés séparément, réglez sur [Ne pas Synchroniser]. 3 Tapez sur [Valider]. Opérations requises 7 pour utiliser cette fonction (pour l'administrateur) 7-6 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 7.3 4 Sélectionnez [Oui], puis tapez sur [Valider]. 5 Appuyez sur [Réglages Périph d'authentification] - [Réglages Généraux] - [Authentification bio], et configurez le réglage suivant. 6 Tapez sur [Fermer]. Réglages Description [Signal sonore] Sélectionnez si un "signal sonore" doit intervenir lorsque l'empreinte digitale a été numérisée avec succès. [ON] est sélectionné par défaut. [Réglages Opérations] Sélectionnez le mode de connexion à cette machine. • [Authentification 1 pour plusieurs]: Placez simplement votre doigt pour vous connecter. • [Authentification 1 pour 1]: entrez le nom de l'utilisateur et positionnez son doigt pour la connexion. [Authentification 1 pour plusieurs] est spécifié par défaut. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 7-7 7.3 Opérations requises pour utiliser cette fonction (pour l'administrateur) 7 7 Au besoin, tapez sur [Régl.déconnexion] pour configurer les réglages de déconnexion automatique. % Sélectionnez s'il faut déconnecter automatiquement une fois que la numérisation de l'original est achevée (par défaut : [Ne pas déconnecter]. 8 Tapez sur [Fermer] pour quitter la configuration de l'authentification de cette machine. 7.3.2 Enregistrement des informations concernant l'authentification utilisateur Une fois que la fonction d'authentification de cette machine (ON (MFP)) a été configurée, enregistrez les informations relatives à l'authentification utilisateur. Il y a deux méthodes pour enregistrer ces informations. - Connectez l'unité d'authentification à cette machine, et utilisez l'Écran tactile pour enregistrer les informations. - Connectez l'unité d'authentification à un ordinateur et utilisez Data Administrator sur un ordinateur pour enregistrer les informations. Cette section explique comment connecter l'unité d'authentification à cette machine et utiliser l'Écran tactile pour enregistrer les informations. Pour la manière d'utiliser Data Administrator pour l'enregistrement, voir page 7-14. REMARQUE Les informations utilisateur sont enregistrées sur le disque dur de cette machine. Si des changements sont apportés au système d'authentification de cette machine ou à la manière dont le disque dur est formaté, les informations utilisateur enregistrées sont effacées. 0 Avant de lancer cette procédure, connectez l'unité d'authentification à cette machine. 1 Tapez sur [Utilitaires] - [Réglages Administrateur] - [Identification Utilisateur/Compte Département] - [Système d'Authentification] - [Enregistrement Utilisateur]. 2 Sélectionnez un numéro d'enregistrement désiré, puis tapez sur [Modifier]. Opérations requises 7 pour utiliser cette fonction (pour l'administrateur) 7-8 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 7.3 3 Entrez le nom d'utilisateur et le code, puis tapez sur [Enregistrer Info Auth.]. % Pour interdire des fonctions accessibles aux utilisateurs, sélectionnez Fonctions autorisées. 4 Tapez sur [Modifier]. % Deux informations d'authentification peuvent être enregistrées pour chaque utilisateur. Pour [Authentification biométrique 1] et [Authentification biométrique 2], enregistrez des doigts différents. Il est conseillé d'enregistrer deux informations d'authentification au cas où vous vous blesseriez au doigt par la suite. 5 Placez votre doigt sur l'unité d'authentification pour en numériser l'empreinte. % Placez votre doigt immobile de manière à ce que la pulpe du doigt soit en contact avec le creux et la saillie de la zone de numérisation. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 7-9 7.3 Opérations requises pour utiliser cette fonction (pour l'administrateur) 7 % Procédez trois fois à la numérisation de l'empreinte digitale. Replacez une seule fois le même doigt sur l'unité d'authentification après la numérisation et tapez ensuite [Numérisation]. % Après avoir numérisé les empreintes digitales, placez le même doigt, et tapez ensuite [Test Authentificat]. Si le test d'authentification a réussi, tapez sur [Nouveau]. En cas d'échec du test d'authentification, réessayez la numérisation. REMARQUE Ne rien placer d'autre que le doigt dans la zone de lecture pendant l'opération de numérisation. Cela risque d'entraîner un dysfonctionnement. Ne pas déconnecter le câble USB de l'unité d'authentification durant la numérisation. Sinon, le système pourrait devenir instable. 6 Tapez sur [Fermer] pour terminer l'enregistrement des informations utilisateur. 7 Connexion à cette machine 7-10 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 7.4 7.4 Connexion à cette machine Les méthodes de connexion varient selon la configuration de l'authentification de cette machine. - [Authentification 1 pour plusieurs] permet à l'utilisateur de se connecter simplement par positionnement de son doigt sur l'unité d'authentification. - [Authentification 1 pour 1] permet à l'utilisateur de se connecter en entrant son nom d'utilisateur et en plaçant son doigt sur l'unité d'authentification. 1 Vérifiez que [Périph. d'authentific.] est sélectionné dans [Méth. d'authentific.]. % Si [Authentification 1 pour 1] est sélectionnée, entrez le nom de l'utilisateur. 2 Placez votre doigt sur l'unité d'authentification. % Placez votre doigt immobile de manière à ce que la pulpe du doigt soit en contact avec le creux et la saillie de la zone de numérisation. L'authentification démarre. En cas de réussite de l'authentification, vous pouvez vous connecter sur cette machine. Conseils - En cas d'échec répété de l'authentification, il se peut que les empreintes digitales ne soient pas correctement enregistrées. Faites une nouvelle tentative de numérisation des empreintes digitales. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 7-11 7.5 Utilisation de Data Administrator (pour l'administrateur) 7 7.5 Utilisation de Data Administrator (pour l'administrateur) 7.5.1 Data Administrator Data Administrator est un outil de gestion permettant de modifier ou d'enregistrer les informations d'authentification ou les informations d'adresse du périphérique cible via un ordinateur du réseau. Avec cet outil vous pouvez importer les informations d'authentification ou les informations d'adresse depuis un périphérique et les réécrire sur le périphérique après modification. 7.5.2 Configuration de l'environnement d'exploitation Installation de BioDriver (pilote USB) (Windows 7) Pour utiliser Data Administrator, définissez l'environnement d'exploitation après avoir configuré les réglages d'authentification de cette machine. Pour cela, installez BioDriver (Pilote USB) de l'unité d'authentification, puis installez PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification biométrique AU-102. 0 Avant d'exécuter le Setup, installez Data Administrator V4.1.15000 ou ultérieur sur votre ordinateur. Pour plus de détails sur l'installation, voir le manuel Data Administrator correspondant. 0 Pour vérifier la version de votre Data Administrator, sélectionnez le menu [Aide] dans Data Administrator, et sélectionnez aussi [Informations de version] - [Version Plug-in]. 0 Le BioDriver (Pilote USB) le plus récent peut être téléchargé depuis notre site Web. 1 Mettez l'Interrupteur principal de cette machine sur Arrêt, et débranchez l'unité d'authentification de cette machine. 2 Installer le BioDriver (pilote USB). % Connectez l'unité d'authentification au port USB de votre ordinateur. REMARQUE Pour connecter ou déconnecter le câble USB, tenez celui-ci par le connecteur. Sinon, la machine pourrait être endommagée ou une panne pourrait se produire. Ne pas connecter un autre matériel USB sur le même port que l'unité d'authentification. Cela réduirait l'alimentation du port USB et entraînerait un échec de l'opération. Pour utiliser le concentrateur (hub) USB, connectez le hub USB auto-alimenté délivrant au moins 500 mA. 3 Ouvrez la fenêtre [Périphériques et imprimantes]. % Ouvrez le [Panneau de contrôle], sélectionnez [Matériel et audio], et cliquez sur [Afficher les périphériques et imprimantes]. Si le [Panneau de contrôle] s'affiche par icônes, double-cliquez sur [Périphériques et imprimantes]. 4 Faites un clic droite sur le nom de périphérique ou sur [Périphérique inconnu] de l'unité d'authentification affiché dans la catégorie [Non Spécifié], puis cliquez sur [Propriétés]. 5 Dans l'onglet [Matériel], cliquez sur [Propriétés]. 6 Dans l'onglet [Général], cliquez sur [Modifier les paramètres]. 7 Dans l'onglet [Pilote], cliquez sur [Mettre à jour le pilote ...]. 8 Dans l'écran permettant de sélectionner la méthode de recherche du pilote, cliquez sur [Rechercher un pilote sur mon ordinateur]. 9 Cliquez sur [Parcourir...]. 10 Sélectionnez le fichier BioDriver (Pilote USB) sur l'ordinateur, puis cliquez sur [OK]. Utilisation 7 de Data Administrator (pour l'administrateur) 7-12 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 7.5 11 Cliquez sur [Suivant], et poursuivez la procédure en suivant les instructions affichées à l'écran. % Si le dialogue de vérification de l'éditeur [Sécurité Windows] apparaît, cliquez sur [Installez ce pilote quand même]. 12 Lorsque l'installation est terminée, cliquez sur [Fermer]. Puis installez PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification biométrique AU-102. Voir page 7-13. Installation de BioDriver (pilote USB) (Windows Vista) Pour utiliser Data Administrator, définissez l'environnement d'exploitation après avoir configuré les réglages d'authentification de cette machine. Pour cela, installez BioDriver (Pilote USB) de l'unité d'authentification, puis installez PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification biométrique AU-102. 0 Avant d'exécuter le Setup, installez Data Administrator V4.1.15000 ou ultérieur sur votre ordinateur. Pour plus de détails sur l'installation, voir le manuel Data Administrator correspondant. 0 Pour vérifier la version de votre Data Administrator, sélectionnez le menu [Aide] dans Data Administrator, et sélectionnez aussi [Informations de version] - [Version Plug-in]. 0 Le BioDriver (Pilote USB) le plus récent peut être téléchargé depuis notre site Web. 1 Mettez l'Interrupteur principal de cette machine sur Arrêt, et débranchez l'unité d'authentification de cette machine. 2 Installer le BioDriver (pilote USB). % Connectez l'unité d'authentification au port USB de votre ordinateur. La boîte de dialogue [Nouveau matériel détecté] apparaît. REMARQUE Pour connecter ou déconnecter le câble USB, tenez celui-ci par le connecteur. Sinon, la machine pourrait être endommagée ou une panne pourrait se produire. Ne pas connecter un autre matériel USB sur le même port que l'unité d'authentification. Cela réduirait l'alimentation du port USB et entraînerait un échec de l'opération. Pour utiliser le concentrateur (hub) USB, connectez le hub USB auto-alimenté délivrant au moins 500 mA. 3 Sélectionnez [Rechercher et installer le pilote logiciel (recommandé)]. 4 Cliquez sur [Parcourir mon ordinateur pour rechercher le pilote (avancé)]. 5 Cliquez sur [Parcourir...]. 6 Sélectionnez le fichier BioDriver (Pilote USB) sur l'ordinateur, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 7 Cliquez sur [Suivant], et poursuivez la procédure en suivant les instructions affichées à l'écran. 8 Lorsque l'installation est terminée, cliquez sur [Fermer]. Puis installez PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification biométrique AU-102. Voir page 7-13. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 7-13 7.5 Utilisation de Data Administrator (pour l'administrateur) 7 Installation de BioDriver (pilote USB) (Windows XP) Pour utiliser Data Administrator, définissez l'environnement d'exploitation après avoir configuré les réglages d'authentification de cette machine. Pour cela, installez BioDriver (Pilote USB) de l'unité d'authentification, puis installez PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification biométrique AU-102. 0 Avant d'exécuter le Setup, installez Data Administrator V4.1.15000 ou ultérieur sur votre ordinateur. Pour plus de détails sur l'installation, voir le manuel Data Administrator correspondant. 0 Pour vérifier la version de votre Data Administrator, sélectionnez le menu [Aide] dans Data Administrator, et sélectionnez aussi [Informations de version] - [Version Plug-in]. 0 Cette opération nécessite des droits d'administration. 0 Le BioDriver (Pilote USB) le plus récent peut être téléchargé depuis notre site Web. 1 Mettez l'Interrupteur principal de cette machine sur Arrêt, et débranchez l'unité d'authentification de cette machine. 2 Connectez l'unité d'authentification au port USB de votre ordinateur. La boîte de dialogue [Assistant Nouveau matériel détecté]. % Si [Connexion Windows à mise à jour Windows] s'affiche, sélectionnez ["Non, pas pour cette fois"] puis cliquez sur [Suivant]. REMARQUE Pour connecter ou déconnecter le câble USB, tenez celui-ci par le connecteur. Sinon, la machine pourrait être endommagée ou une panne pourrait se produire. Ne pas connecter un autre matériel USB sur le même port que l'unité d'authentification. Cela réduirait l'alimentation du port USB et entraînerait un échec de l'opération. Pour utiliser le concentrateur (hub) USB, connectez le hub USB auto-alimenté délivrant au moins 500 mA. 3 Sélectionnez [Installer à partir d'une liste ou d'un emplacement spécifié (utilisateurs expérimentés)], et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant]. 4 Sous [Rechercher le meilleur pilote dans ces emplacements], sélectionnez [Inclure cet emplacement dans la recherche :], et cliquez sur la touche [Parcourir]. 5 Sélectionnez le fichier BioDriver (Pilote USB) sur l'ordinateur, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 6 Cliquez sur [Suivant], et poursuivez la procédure en suivant les instructions affichées à l'écran. 7 Lorsque l'installation est terminée, cliquez sur [Fermer]. Puis installez PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification biométrique AU-102. Voir page 7-13. Installation du PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification biométrique AU-102 0 Le dernier PlugIn Data Administrator peut être téléchargé depuis notre site Web. 1 Cliquez sur setup.exe de PlugIn Data Administrator. 2 Au besoin, sélectionnez la langue d'installation et cliquez sur [OK]. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran pour continuer l'installation. 4 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 5 Sélectionnez [J'accepte les termes du contrat de licence], puis cliquez sur [Suivant]. 6 Cliquer sur [Installer]. 7 Lorsque l'installation est terminée, cliquez sur [Fermer]. Cela constitue l'étape finale de l'installation du PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification biométrique AU-102 et la fin de la configuration. Utilisation 7 de Data Administrator (pour l'administrateur) 7-14 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 7.5 7.5.3 Enregistrement des informations concernant l'authentification utilisateur Pour enregistrer un utilisateur avec Data Administrator, connectez l'unité d'authentification au Port USB de l'ordinateur, et connectez aussi l'ordinateur à cette machine via le réseau. 0 Pour utiliser Data Administrator, définissez préalablement l'environnement d'exploitation. Pour plus de détails sur la procédure d'installation, voir page 7-11. 1 Mettez l'Interrupteur principal de cette machine sur Marche. 2 Démarrez Data Administrator, et importez les informations sur le périphérique de cette machine. % Recommencez la procédure cinq secondes ou plus après avoir connecté l'unité d'authentification. % Pour plus de détails sur la manière d'importer les informations sur le périphérique, voir le manuel Data Administrator correspondant. 3 Dans [Sélection de fonction], sélectionnez [Réglages d'authentification] - [Réglages authentification utilisateur], puis cliquez sur [Ajouter]. 4 Sélectionnez un profil utilisateur, et cliquez sur [OK]. % Pour plus de détails sur les profils, voir le manuel Data Administrator correspondant. L'écran enregistrement de l'utilisateur apparaît. 5 Entrez le nom d'utilisateur et le code, sélectionnez l'onglet [AU-102] et cliquez ensuite sur [Enregistrer Info. Auth.]. % Deux informations d'authentification peuvent être enregistrées pour chaque utilisateur. Pour [Emplacement d'enregistrement1] et [Emplacement d'enregistrement2], enregistrer des doigts différents. Il est conseillé d'enregistrer deux informations d'authentification au cas où vous vous blesseriez au doigt par la suite. 6 Placez votre doigt sur l'unité d'authentification pour en numériser l'empreinte. % Placez votre doigt immobile de manière à ce que la pulpe du doigt soit en contact avec le creux et la saillie de la zone de numérisation. % Procédez trois fois à la numérisation de l'empreinte digitale. Replacez une seule fois le même doigt sur l'unité d'authentification après la numérisation et appuyez ensuite sur [Commencer lecture]. % Après avoir numérisé les empreintes digitales, placez le même doigt et cliquez ensuite sur [Test Authentification]. Si le test d'authentification a réussi, cliquez sur [Enregistrer]. En cas d'échec du test d'authentification, cliquez sur [Réinitialiser] afin de renouveler l'opération de numérisation. 7 Cliquez sur [OK], et enregistrez les informations d'authentification de l'utilisateur suivant. 8 Une fois que l'enregistrement des informations d'authentification est terminé pour tous les utilisateurs, cliquez sur [Exporter vers le périphérique]. % Au besoin, sélectionnez un nom d'utilisateur, et cliquez sur [Éditer] pour changer les informations enregistrées. 9 Cliquez sur [Écriture]. % Data Administrator prend en charge la fonction de copie par lots. Au besoin, vous pouvez écrire en même temps sur plusieurs périphériques les informations d'authentification enregistrées. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 7-15 7.5 Utilisation de Data Administrator (pour l'administrateur) 7 10 Lorsque l'écriture sur cette machine est terminée, cliquez sur [OK]. 11 Déconnectez l'unité d'authentification du port USB de l'ordinateur. REMARQUE Pour connecter ou déconnecter le câble USB, tenez celui-ci par le connecteur. Sinon, la machine pourrait être endommagée ou une panne pourrait se produire. 12 Redémarrer cette machine. REMARQUE Au redémarrage de cette machine, éteignez l'Interrupteur principal puis attendez au moins 10 secondes avant de le rallumer. Ne pas respecter cette procédure peut entraîner un échec de l'opération. 13 Connectez l'unité d'authentification au Port USB de cette machine. REMARQUE Pour connecter ou déconnecter le câble USB, tenez celui-ci par le connecteur. Sinon, la machine pourrait être endommagée ou une panne pourrait se produire. Utilisation 7 de Data Administrator (pour l'administrateur) 7-16 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 7.5 8 Utiliser l'Unité d'authentification (type carte IC) bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 8-3 8.1 Unité d'authentification (type carte IC) 8 8 Utiliser l'Unité d'authentification (type carte IC) 8.1 Unité d'authentification (type carte IC) L'Unité d'authentification (type carte IC) est un système d'"Authentification carte IC" qui lit la carte IC pour procéder à l'authentification des personnes. Si vous enregistrez une carte IC sans contact compatible comme la carte d'identification d'un employé, vous pouvez utiliser cette machine de manière synchrone avec des fonctions où, par exemple, l'utilisateur entre/quitte le système de gestion pour intégrer le système d'authentification. Si cette machine offre la fonction d'authentification utilisateur, vous pouvez vous connecter à cette machine ou exécuter un travail d'impression à l'aide de la fonction d'authentification carte IC. REMARQUE L'Unité d'authentification (type carte IC) doit être installée dans la Table de travail ou dans le Kit de montage MK-735. Le Kit de mise à jour UK-204 ou l'i-Option LK-101 v3 est requis pour l'utilisation de l'Unité d'authentification (type carte IC). dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'authentification utilisateur, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur : Web Management Tool]. Opérations requises 8 pour utiliser cette fonction (pour l'administrateur) 8-4 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 8.2 8.2 Opérations requises pour utiliser cette fonction (pour l'administrateur) 8.2.1 Configuration des paramètres d'authentification de cette machine Cette section donne un exemple de paramétrage des réglages généraux sur [ON (MFP)]. dPour info Vous pouvez également configurer les paramètres de sorte que l'authentification soit effectuée sur le serveur LDAP à l'aide de l'ID de carte enregistré dans la carte d'authentification (LDAP-Auth. Carte IC). La manière de configurer le réglage est expliquée en prenant Web Connection. comme exemple. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur : Web Management Tool]. Configurez d'abord la fonction d'authentification de cette machine (ON (MFP)). 0 Pour configurer les paramètres d'authentification, le S.A.V. doit activer au préalable les paramètres IWS (Internal Web Server). Pour plus de détails, contacter le S.A.V. 1 Tapez sur [Utilitaires] - [Réglages Administrateur] - [Réglage Réseau] - [Réglages IWS]. 2 Sélectionnez [MARCHE], puis tapez sur [Valider]. % Redémarrez cette machine en suivant les instructions à l'écran. 3 Tapez sur [Utilitaires] - [Réglages Administrateur] - [Identification Utilisateur/Compte Département] - [Réglages Généraux] - [Identification utilisateur]. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 8-5 8.2 Opérations requises pour utiliser cette fonction (pour l'administrateur) 8 4 Réglez [Réglages Généraux] sur [ON (MFP)], puis tapez sur [Valider]. % Si vous voulez associer les réglages de suivi volume, appuyez sur [Utilitaires] - [Réglages Administrateur] - [Identification Utilisateur/Compte Département] - [Réglages Généraux], et réglez [Synchroniser Authentificat. Utilisateur&Compte Départem] sur [Activer synchronis.]. Si l'identification utilisateur et la gestion de compte doivent être gérés séparément, réglez sur [Ne pas Synchroniser]. 5 Tapez sur [Valider]. 6 Sélectionnez [Oui], puis tapez sur [Valider]. Opérations requises 8 pour utiliser cette fonction (pour l'administrateur) 8-6 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 8.2 7 Tapez sur [Réglages Périph d'authentification] - [Réglages Généraux] - [Authentificat. carte] et configurez le paramètre suivant. 8 Tapez sur [Fermer]. 9 Au besoin, tapez sur [Régl.déconnexion] pour configurer les réglages de déconnexion automatique. % Sélectionnez s'il faut déconnecter automatiquement une fois que la numérisation de l'original est achevée (par défaut : [Ne pas déconnecter]. 10 Tapez sur [Fermer] pour quitter la configuration de l'authentification de cette machine. Réglages Description [Réglages détaillés carte IC] Appuyez sur ce bouton pour modifier les informations concernant les paramètres du pilote chargeable pour les cartes IC enregistrées sur le navigateur Web de cette machine. Pour plus de détails sur la procédure de paramétrage, consultez le [Guide de l'utilisateur : Opérations de Fonction Avancée]. [Réglages Opérations] Sélectionnez le mode de connexion à cette machine. • [Authentificat. carte] : passez la carte IC sur l'unité d'authentification pour vous connecter. • [Authentificat. carte + Mot de passe] : Passez la carte IC sur l'unité d'authentification, et entrez le mot de passe pour vous connecter. [Authentificat. carte] est spécifié par défaut. [Avis d'authentification carte ID] Indiquez s'il faut notifier l'authentification carte ID au compteur qui surveille l'état de cette machine. [Ignorer] est spécifié par défaut. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 8-7 8.2 Opérations requises pour utiliser cette fonction (pour l'administrateur) 8 8.2.2 Enregistrement des informations concernant l'authentification utilisateur Une fois que la fonction d'authentification de cette machine (ON (MFP)) a été configurée, enregistrez les informations relatives à l'authentification utilisateur. Il y a deux méthodes pour enregistrer ces informations. - Connectez l'unité d'authentification à cette machine, et utilisez l'Écran tactile pour enregistrer les informations. - Connectez l'unité d'authentification à un ordinateur et utilisez Data Administrator sur un ordinateur pour enregistrer les informations. Cette section explique comment connecter l'unité d'authentification à cette machine et utiliser l'Écran tactile pour enregistrer les informations. Pour la manière d'utiliser Data Administrator pour l'enregistrement, voir page 8-13. REMARQUE Les informations utilisateur sont enregistrées sur le disque dur de cette machine. Si des changements sont apportés au système d'authentification de cette machine ou à la manière dont le disque dur est formaté, les informations utilisateur enregistrées sont effacées. 0 Avant de lancer cette procédure, connectez l'unité d'authentification à cette machine. 1 Tapez sur [Utilitaires] - [Réglages Administrateur] - [Identification Utilisateur/Compte Département] - [Système d'Authentification] - [Enregistrement Utilisateur]. 2 Sélectionnez un numéro d'enregistrement désiré, puis tapez sur [Modifier]. 3 Entrez le nom d'utilisateur et le code, puis tapez sur [Enregistrer Info. Auth.]. % Pour interdire des fonctions accessibles aux utilisateurs, sélectionnez Fonctions autorisées. Opérations requises 8 pour utiliser cette fonction (pour l'administrateur) 8-8 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 8.2 4 Tapez sur [Modifier]. 5 Passez ou placez la carte IC au-dessus ou sur l'unité d'authentification, puis tapez sur [Valider]. REMARQUE Pendant la numérisation, ne laissez pas la carte IC à moins de 1-9/16 pouces (40 mm) du lecteur de cartes. 6 Lorsque [Enregistrement terminé] apparaît, tapez sur [Fermer] pour terminer l'enregistrement des informations utilisateur. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 8-9 8.3 Connexion à cette machine 8 8.3 Connexion à cette machine Les méthodes de connexion varient selon la configuration de l'authentification de cette machine. - [Authentificat. carte] vous permet de vous connecter simplement en passant ou en plaçant la carte IC au-dessus ou sur l'unité d'authentification. - Pour [Authentification Carte + Mot de passe], vous pouvez vous connecter en passant ou en plaçant la carte IC au-dessus ou sur l'unité d'authentification et en saisissant le mot de passe. 1 Vérifiez que [Périph. d'authentific.] est sélectionné dans [Méth. d'authentific.]. 2 Passez ou placez la carte IC au-dessus ou sur l'unité d'authentification. % Pour [Authentification Carte + Mot de passe], saisissez le mot de passe et tapez sur [Connexion]. L'authentification démarre. En cas de réussite de l'authentification, vous pouvez vous connecter sur cette machine. Conseils - En cas d'échec répété de l'authentification, il se peut que les informations de la carte IC ne soient pas correctement enregistrées. Réenregistrez une nouvelle fois les informations de la carte IC. Utilisation 8 de Data Administrator (pour l'administrateur) 8-10 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 8.4 8.4 Utilisation de Data Administrator (pour l'administrateur) 8.4.1 Data Administrator Data Administrator est un outil de gestion permettant de modifier ou d'enregistrer les informations d'authentification ou les informations d'adresse du périphérique cible via un ordinateur du réseau. Avec cet outil vous pouvez importer les informations d'authentification ou les informations d'adresse depuis un périphérique et les réécrire sur le périphérique après modification. 8.4.2 Configuration de l'environnement d'exploitation Installation du Pilote de carte IC (pilote USB) (Windows 7) Pour utiliser Data Administrator, définissez l'environnement d'exploitation après avoir configuré les réglages d'authentification de cette machine. Pour exécuter le Setup, installez Pilote carte IC (pilote USB) de l'unité d'authentification, puis installez PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification par carte IC AU-201. 0 Avant d'exécuter le Setup, installez Data Administrator V4.1.15000 ou ultérieur sur votre ordinateur. Pour plus de détails sur l'installation, voir le manuel Data Administrator correspondant. 0 Pour vérifier la version de votre Data Administrator, sélectionnez le menu [Aide] dans Data Administrator, et sélectionnez aussi [Informations de version] - [Version Plug-in]. 0 Le Pilote de carte IC (pilote USB) le plus récent peut être téléchargé depuis notre site Web. 1 Mettez l'Interrupteur principal de cette machine sur Arrêt, et débranchez l'unité d'authentification de cette machine. 2 Installez Pilote carte IC (pilote USB). % Connectez l'unité d'authentification au port USB de votre ordinateur. REMARQUE Pour connecter ou déconnecter le câble USB, tenez celui-ci par le connecteur. Sinon, la machine pourrait être endommagée ou une panne pourrait se produire. Ne pas connecter un autre matériel USB sur le même port que l'unité d'authentification. Cela réduirait l'alimentation du port USB et entraînerait un échec de l'opération. Pour utiliser le concentrateur (hub) USB, connectez le hub USB auto-alimenté délivrant au moins 500 mA. 3 Ouvrez la fenêtre [Périphériques et imprimantes]. % Ouvrez le [Panneau de contrôle], sélectionnez [Matériel et audio], et cliquez sur [Afficher les périphériques et imprimantes]. Si le [Panneau de contrôle] s'affiche par icônes, double-cliquez sur [Périphériques et imprimantes]. 4 Faites un clic droite sur le nom de périphérique ou sur [Périphérique inconnu] de l'unité d'authentification affiché dans la catégorie [Non Spécifié], puis cliquez sur [Propriétés]. 5 Dans l'onglet [Matériel], cliquez sur [Propriétés]. 6 Dans l'onglet [Général], cliquez sur [Modifier les paramètres]. 7 Dans l'onglet [Pilote], cliquez sur [Mettre à jour le pilote ...]. 8 Dans l'écran permettant de sélectionner la méthode de recherche du pilote, cliquez sur [Rechercher un pilote sur mon ordinateur]. 9 Cliquez sur [Parcourir...]. 10 Sélectionnez le fichier IC CardDriver (Pilote USB) sur l'ordinateur, puis cliquez sur [OK]. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 8-11 8.4 Utilisation de Data Administrator (pour l'administrateur) 8 11 Cliquez sur [Suivant], et poursuivez la procédure en suivant les instructions affichées à l'écran. % Si le dialogue de vérification de l'éditeur [Sécurité Windows] apparaît, cliquez sur [Installez ce pilote quand même]. 12 Lorsque l'installation est terminée, cliquez sur [Fermer]. Puis installez PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification par carte IC AU-201. Voir page 8-12. Installation du Pilote carte IC (pilote USB) (Windows Vista) Pour utiliser Data Administrator, définissez l'environnement d'exploitation après avoir configuré les réglages d'authentification de cette machine. Pour exécuter le Setup, installez Pilote carte IC (pilote USB) de l'unité d'authentification, puis installez PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification par carte IC AU-201. 0 Avant d'exécuter le Setup, installez Data Administrator V4.1.15000 ou ultérieur sur votre ordinateur. Pour plus de détails sur l'installation, voir le manuel Data Administrator correspondant. 0 Pour vérifier la version de votre Data Administrator, sélectionnez le menu [Aide] dans Data Administrator, et sélectionnez aussi [Informations de version] - [Version Plug-in]. 0 Le pilote Carte pilote IC (pilote USB) le plus récent peut être téléchargé depuis notre site Web. 1 Mettez l'Interrupteur principal de cette machine sur Arrêt, et débranchez l'unité d'authentification de cette machine. 2 Installez Pilote carte IC (pilote USB). % Connectez l'unité d'authentification au port USB de votre ordinateur. La boîte de dialogue [Nouveau matériel détecté] apparaît. REMARQUE Pour connecter ou déconnecter le câble USB, tenez celui-ci par le connecteur. Sinon, la machine pourrait être endommagée ou une panne pourrait se produire. Ne pas connecter un autre matériel USB sur le même port que l'unité d'authentification. Cela réduirait l'alimentation du port USB et entraînerait un échec de l'opération. Pour utiliser le concentrateur (hub) USB, connectez le hub USB auto-alimenté délivrant au moins 500 mA. 3 Sélectionnez [Rechercher et installer le pilote logiciel (recommandé)]. 4 Cliquez sur [Parcourir mon ordinateur pour rechercher le pilote (avancé)]. 5 Cliquez sur [Parcourir...]. 6 Sélectionnez le fichier Pilote carte IC (pilote USB) sur l'ordinateur, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 7 Cliquez sur [Suivant], et poursuivez la procédure en suivant les instructions affichées à l'écran. % Si le dialogue de vérification de l'éditeur [Sécurité Windows] apparaît, cliquez sur [Installez ce pilote quand même]. 8 Lorsque l'installation est terminée, cliquez sur [Fermer]. Puis installez PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification par carte IC AU-201. Voir page 8-12. Utilisation 8 de Data Administrator (pour l'administrateur) 8-12 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 8.4 Installation du Pilote carte IC (pilote USB) (Windows XP) Pour utiliser Data Administrator, définissez l'environnement d'exploitation après avoir configuré les réglages d'authentification de cette machine. Pour exécuter le Setup, installez Pilote carte IC (pilote USB) de l'unité d'authentification, puis installez PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification par carte IC AU-201. 0 Avant d'exécuter le Setup, installez Data Administrator V4.1.15000 ou ultérieur sur votre ordinateur. Pour plus de détails sur l'installation, voir le manuel Data Administrator correspondant. 0 Pour vérifier la version de votre Data Administrator, sélectionnez le menu [Aide] dans Data Administrator, et sélectionnez aussi [Informations de version] - [Version Plug-in]. 0 Cette opération nécessite des droits d'administration. 0 Le Pilote carte IC (pilote USB) le plus récent peut être téléchargé depuis notre site Web. 1 Mettez l'Interrupteur principal de cette machine sur Arrêt, et débranchez l'unité d'authentification de cette machine. 2 Connectez l'unité d'authentification au port USB de votre ordinateur. La boîte de dialogue [Assistant Nouveau matériel détecté]. % Si l'écran [Connexion Windows à mise à jour Windows] apparaît, sélectionnez ["Non, pas pour cette fois"], puis cliquez sur [Suivant]. REMARQUE Pour connecter ou déconnecter le câble USB, tenez celui-ci par le connecteur. Sinon, la machine pourrait être endommagée ou une panne pourrait se produire. Ne pas connecter un autre matériel USB sur le même port que l'unité d'authentification. Cela réduirait l'alimentation du port USB et entraînerait un échec de l'opération. Pour utiliser le concentrateur (hub) USB, connectez le hub USB auto-alimenté délivrant au moins 500 mA. 3 Sélectionnez [Installer à partir d'une liste ou d'un emplacement spécifié (avancé)], et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant>]. 4 Sous [Rechercher le meilleur pilote dans ces emplacements], sélectionnez [Inclure cet emplacement dans la recherche :], et cliquez sur la touche [Parcourir]. 5 Sélectionnez le fichier IC CardDriver (Pilote USB) sur l'ordinateur, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 6 Cliquez sur [Suivant], et poursuivez la procédure en suivant les instructions affichées à l'écran. 7 Lorsque l'installation est terminée, cliquez sur [Fermer]. Puis installez PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification par carte IC AU-201. Voir page 8-12. Installation du PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification par carte IC AU-201 0 Le dernier PlugIn Data Administrator peut être téléchargé depuis notre site Web. 1 Cliquez sur setup.exe de PlugIn Data Administrator. 2 Au besoin, sélectionnez la langue d'installation et cliquez sur [OK]. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran pour continuer l'installation. 4 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. 5 Sélectionnez [J'accepte les termes du contrat de licence], puis cliquez sur [Suivant]. 6 Cliquer sur [Installer]. 7 Lorsque l'installation est terminée, cliquez sur [Terminer]. Cela constitue l'étape finale de l'installation du PlugIn Data Administrator pour l'unité d'authentification par carte IC AU-201 et la fin de la configuration. bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 8-13 8.4 Utilisation de Data Administrator (pour l'administrateur) 8 8.4.3 Enregistrement des informations concernant l'authentification utilisateur Pour enregistrer un utilisateur avec Data Administrator, connectez l'unité d'authentification au Port USB de l'ordinateur, et connectez aussi l'ordinateur à cette machine via le réseau. 0 Pour utiliser Data Administrator, définissez préalablement l'environnement d'exploitation. Pour plus de détails sur la procédure d'installation, voir page 8-10. 1 Mettez l'Interrupteur principal de cette machine sur Marche. 2 Démarrez Data Administrator, et importez les informations sur le périphérique de cette machine. % Recommencez la procédure cinq secondes ou plus après avoir connecté l'unité d'authentification. % Pour plus de détails sur la manière d'importer les informations sur le périphérique, voir le manuel Data Administrator correspondant. 3 Dans [Sélection de fonction], sélectionnez [Réglages d'authentification] - [Réglages authentification utilisateur], puis cliquez sur [Ajouter]. 4 Sélectionnez un profil utilisateur, et cliquez sur [OK]. % Pour plus de détails sur les profils, voir le manuel Data Administrator correspondant. L'écran enregistrement de l'utilisateur apparaît. 5 Entrez le nom d'utilisateur et code d'accès, et sélectionnez l'onglet [Authentification par carte IC]. 6 Placez la carte IC sur l'unité d'authentification, puis cliquez sur [Commencer lecture]. % En cas de besoin, cliquez sur [Entrer ID carte] pour enregistrer l'ID carte. 7 Cliquez sur [OK], et enregistrez les informations d'authentification de l'utilisateur suivant. 8 Une fois que l'enregistrement des informations d'authentification est terminé pour tous les utilisateurs, cliquez sur [Exporter vers le périphérique]. % Au besoin, sélectionnez un nom d'utilisateur, et cliquez sur [Éditer] pour changer les informations enregistrées. 9 Cliquez sur [Écriture]. % Data Administrator prend en charge la fonction de copie par lots. Au besoin, vous pouvez écrire en même temps sur plusieurs périphériques les informations d'authentification enregistrées. 10 Lorsque l'écriture sur cette machine est terminée, cliquez sur [OK]. 11 Déconnectez l'unité d'authentification du port USB de l'ordinateur. REMARQUE Pour connecter ou déconnecter le câble USB, tenez celui-ci par le connecteur. Sinon, la machine pourrait être endommagée ou une panne pourrait se produire. 12 Redémarrer cette machine. REMARQUE Au redémarrage de cette machine, éteignez l'Interrupteur principal puis attendez au moins 10 secondes avant de le rallumer. Ne pas respecter cette procédure peut entraîner un échec de l'opération. Utilisation 8 de Data Administrator (pour l'administrateur) 8-14 bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 8.4 13 Connectez l'unité d'authentification au Port USB de cette machine. REMARQUE Pour connecter ou déconnecter le câble USB, tenez celui-ci par le connecteur. Sinon, la machine pourrait être endommagée ou une panne pourrait se produire. Guide de l’utilisateur . bizhub 652/552 Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction 1.1 Bienvenue ........................................................................................................................................ 1-3 1.1.1 Guides de l'utilisateur ........................................................................................................................ 1-3 1.1.2 Guide de l'utilisateur .......................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.2 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel ......................................................................................... 1-5 1.2.1 Symboles utilisés dans ce manuel..................................................................................................... 1-5 Pour utiliser cette machine en toute sécurité .................................................................................... 1-5 Instruction de procédure.................................................................................................................... 1-5 Symboles clés.................................................................................................................................... 1-6 1.2.2 Indications concernant l'original et le papier ..................................................................................... 1-6 Formats de l'original et du papier ...................................................................................................... 1-6 Indications concernant l'original et le papier ..................................................................................... 1-6 1.3 Vérifier la fonction à utiliser ........................................................................................................... 1-7 Comprendre le Flux d'opérations ...................................................................................................... 1-7 Utilisation de la structure des menus................................................................................................. 1-7 2 Présentation de la fonction boîte 2.1 Fonctions Boîte ............................................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.1 Fonctions de boîte disponibles.......................................................................................................... 2-3 Enregistrer des documents................................................................................................................ 2-3 Utilisation des documents ................................................................................................................. 2-4 Organisation des documents............................................................................................................. 2-6 2.1.2 Configurer les paramètres d'utilisation des fonctions Boîte .............................................................. 2-7 Enregistrement d'une boîte................................................................................................................ 2-7 Si cette machine est utilisée comme appareil relais .......................................................................... 2-7 Boîte de stockage des données pour réception Mémoire obligatoire............................................... 2-7 2.2 Information ...................................................................................................................................... 2-8 2.2.1 Authentification Utilisateur ................................................................................................................. 2-8 Authentification MFP.......................................................................................................................... 2-8 Authentification par un serveur externe ............................................................................................. 2-8 Authentification Compte Département .............................................................................................. 2-9 2.2.2 Restrictions applicables à l'enregistrement des boîtes ..................................................................... 2-9 Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe.......................................................................................................... 2-9 Bulletin Boîte Utilis. ............................................................................................................................ 2-9 Boîte Emission en relève.................................................................................................................... 2-9 Boîte Réception mémoire .................................................................................................................. 2-9 Boîte Relais ...................................................................................................................................... 2-10 2.2.3 Restrictions concernant le nom de fichier ....................................................................................... 2-10 2.3 Authentification et boîtes utilisateur accessibles...................................................................... 2-11 2.3.1 Lorsque Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département est désactivé .................................. 2-11 2.3.2 Lorsque seule l'Authentification utilisateur est activée.................................................................... 2-11 2.3.3 Lorsque seul Compte Département est activé ................................................................................ 2-12 2.3.4 Lorsque Authentification utilisateur et Compte Département sont activés et synchronisés ........... 2-12 2.3.5 Lorsque Authentification utilisateur et Compte Département sont activés mais pas synchronisés ............................................................................................................................. 2-14 3 Panneau de contrôle/Ecran à cristaux liquides 3.1 Panneau de contrôle....................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2 Écran tactile..................................................................................................................................... 3-5 3.2.1 Éléments de l'écran ........................................................................................................................... 3-5 Icônes qui apparaissent sur le l'écran tactile..................................................................................... 3-5 Table des matières-2 bizhub 652/552 3.2.2 Affichage et utilisation du volet de gauche........................................................................................ 3-6 Liste Tâches....................................................................................................................................... 3-7 Liste Tâches - Supprimer................................................................................................................... 3-7 Liste Tâches - Détails tâche............................................................................................................... 3-8 Infos Boîte ........................................................................................................................................ 3-13 Utilis/Archiv - Détail ......................................................................................................................... 3-14 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche ....................................................................................................... 3-14 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Vérifier Adresse........................................................................... 3-14 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Contenu Réglage Document ...................................................... 3-15 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Réglage communication ............................................................. 3-15 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Réglages E-mail.......................................................................... 3-16 Aperçu.............................................................................................................................................. 3-16 Aperçu.............................................................................................................................................. 3-16 Aperçu (Impression/Combinaison)................................................................................................... 3-17 Aperçu - (Env./Lier EMI) ................................................................................................................... 3-17 4 Flux d'opérations Boîte 4.1 Enregistrer des documents dans des boîtes................................................................................ 4-3 4.2 Impression de documents depuis une boîte ................................................................................ 4-5 4.3 Envoi de documents depuis une boîte.......................................................................................... 4-8 4.4 Enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe............................................................... 4-11 4.5 Enregistrer un document de la mémoire externe vers une Boîte............................................. 4-13 4.6 Impression d'un document depuis une mémoire externe ........................................................ 4-15 4.7 Archiver des documents dans une boîte .................................................................................... 4-17 4.8 Impression d'un document enregistré dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique..................................................................................................................... 4-19 4.9 Enregistrement dans une Boîte utilisateur d'un document archivé dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique................................................................... 4-21 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte .......................................................................................... 4-23 4.10.1 Enregistrer document ...................................................................................................................... 4-23 Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe.......................................................................................................... 4-23 Système ........................................................................................................................................... 4-24 4.10.2 Utilis/Archiv ...................................................................................................................................... 4-26 Impression (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe)...................................................................... 4-26 Envoyer (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) .......................................................................... 4-29 Réglages Archivage (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) ....................................................... 4-32 Application (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) ..................................................................... 4-33 Système ........................................................................................................................................... 4-34 5 Pour accéder au mode Boîte 5.1 Pour accéder au mode Boîte ......................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2 Menu Opération Boîte..................................................................................................................... 5-4 5.2.1 Enregistrer document ........................................................................................................................ 5-4 5.2.2 Utilis/Archiv ........................................................................................................................................ 5-4 6 Enregistrer document 6.1 Enreg. doc. - Présentation ............................................................................................................. 6-3 6.1.1 Fonctions ........................................................................................................................................... 6-3 Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe.......................................................................................................... 6-3 Boîte Annotation ................................................................................................................................ 6-3 Mémoire externe ................................................................................................................................ 6-3 6.1.2 Fenêtre initiale de la fonction Enregistrer document ......................................................................... 6-4 Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe.......................................................................................................... 6-4 Système ............................................................................................................................................. 6-4 6.1.3 Fenêtre Enregistrer document ........................................................................................................... 6-5 6.2 Param. Numéris............................................................................................................................... 6-6 6.2.1 De base - Type original ...................................................................................................................... 6-6 6.2.2 De base - Recto/Recto-Verso............................................................................................................ 6-7 bizhub 652/552 Table des matières-3 6.2.3 De base - Définition ........................................................................................................................... 6-7 6.2.4 De base - Type Fichier....................................................................................................................... 6-8 Type Fichier........................................................................................................................................ 6-8 Cryptage ............................................................................................................................................ 6-9 Cryptage - Paramètres Détaillés........................................................................................................ 6-9 PDF Contours .................................................................................................................................. 6-11 Réglage Numérisation...................................................................................................................... 6-11 6.2.5 De base - Contraste......................................................................................................................... 6-12 6.2.6 De base - Couleur............................................................................................................................ 6-12 6.2.7 Format numérisation ........................................................................................................................ 6-13 Format standard .............................................................................................................................. 6-13 Format Perso ................................................................................................................................... 6-13 Format Photo ................................................................................................................................... 6-14 6.2.8 Réglage image ................................................................................................................................. 6-14 Niveau Suppression Fond................................................................................................................ 6-14 Netteté ............................................................................................................................................. 6-15 6.2.9 Applications - Effacem Bords .......................................................................................................... 6-15 6.2.10 Applications - Page par page .......................................................................................................... 6-16 Méthode Page par page .................................................................................................................. 6-16 Effacem. livre - Effacem Bords ........................................................................................................ 6-16 Effacem. Livre - Effacem. Centre..................................................................................................... 6-17 Position Reliure ................................................................................................................................ 6-17 6.2.11 Numérisation séparée ...................................................................................................................... 6-18 6.3 Réglages Original.......................................................................................................................... 6-19 6.3.1 Original spécial................................................................................................................................. 6-19 6.3.2 Spécifier Direction - Orientation Original ......................................................................................... 6-19 6.3.3 Spécifier Direction - Position Reliure ............................................................................................... 6-20 6.3.4 Dépoussiérer.................................................................................................................................... 6-20 7 Utilis/Archiv 7.1 Présentation des opérations Utilis/Archiv .................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.1 Fonctions Utilis/Archiv ....................................................................................................................... 7-3 Imprimer un document....................................................................................................................... 7-3 Envoi .................................................................................................................................................. 7-3 Archivage ........................................................................................................................................... 7-3 Réglages Application ......................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.2 Détail de l'écran Utiliser document.................................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.3 Si un code d'accès est spécifié pour une boîte................................................................................. 7-4 7.2 Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 7-5 7.2.1 Présentation de l'onglet Impression .................................................................................................. 7-5 Description de l'onglet Impression .................................................................................................... 7-5 Impression ......................................................................................................................................... 7-5 Combinaison...................................................................................................................................... 7-6 7.2.2 Impression ......................................................................................................................................... 7-6 7.2.3 Combinaison...................................................................................................................................... 7-7 Ordre Document ................................................................................................................................ 7-7 Éléments configurables pour combiner et imprimer des documents................................................ 7-7 7.3 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) ................................................................ 7-9 7.3.1 Copies................................................................................................................................................ 7-9 7.3.2 Recto seul/Recto-Verso..................................................................................................................... 7-9 7.3.3 Finition.............................................................................................................................................. 7-10 Tri/Groupe........................................................................................................................................ 7-10 Décalage .......................................................................................................................................... 7-10 Agrafage........................................................................................................................................... 7-10 Réglage Position - Agrafage ............................................................................................................ 7-11 Perforer ............................................................................................................................................ 7-11 Perforation - Réglage Position......................................................................................................... 7-11 Pli/Reliure ......................................................................................................................................... 7-12 7.3.4 Combinaison.................................................................................................................................... 7-13 Table des matières-4 bizhub 652/552 7.3.5 Zoom................................................................................................................................................ 7-14 7.3.6 Impression continue......................................................................................................................... 7-15 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)......................................................... 7-16 7.4.1 Marge page...................................................................................................................................... 7-16 Marge page...................................................................................................................................... 7-16 Décalage Image ............................................................................................................................... 7-16 Décalage Image - Changer Décalage verso .................................................................................... 7-17 7.4.2 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre ............................................................................................................... 7-17 7.4.3 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Couverture .......................................................................................... 7-17 7.4.4 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Insertion Feuille................................................................................... 7-19 7.4.5 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Chapitres ............................................................................................ 7-20 7.4.6 Tampon/Surimpression.................................................................................................................... 7-20 7.4.7 Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure.............................................................................................. 7-21 7.4.8 Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page .......................................................................................... 7-22 Réglages .......................................................................................................................................... 7-22 Param. Insert Feuille ........................................................................................................................ 7-23 7.4.9 Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon................................................................................................... 7-23 7.4.10 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie -Protection Copie.............................................................. 7-24 Type Protection Copie ..................................................................................................................... 7-25 Paramètres Détaillés ........................................................................................................................ 7-25 Position ............................................................................................................................................ 7-25 7.4.11 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Pare-copie ...................................................................... 7-26 Type Pare-copie............................................................................................................................... 7-26 Paramètres Détaillés ........................................................................................................................ 7-27 7.4.12 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP............................................................. 7-27 Type Tampon................................................................................................................................... 7-28 Paramètres Détaillés ........................................................................................................................ 7-28 7.4.13 Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif...................................................................................... 7-28 Type Tampon répétitif...................................................................................................................... 7-29 Paramètres Détaillés ........................................................................................................................ 7-29 Position ............................................................................................................................................ 7-29 7.4.14 Tampon/Surimpression - En-tête/Pied de page.............................................................................. 7-30 Contrôle/Modif. temp....................................................................................................................... 7-30 7.4.15 Tampon/Surimpression - Surimpression enregistrée ...................................................................... 7-31 Réglages .......................................................................................................................................... 7-31 Réglage Surimpression.................................................................................................................... 7-32 7.5 Envoyer .......................................................................................................................................... 7-33 7.5.1 Présentation des réglages Transmission ......................................................................................... 7-33 Description de l'onglet Env. ............................................................................................................. 7-33 Envoyer ............................................................................................................................................ 7-34 Lier EMI............................................................................................................................................ 7-34 7.5.2 Réglages Transmission.................................................................................................................... 7-35 7.5.3 Combinaison .................................................................................................................................... 7-36 Ordre Document .............................................................................................................................. 7-36 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)..................................................................................... 7-37 7.6.1 Carnet Adresses - Recherche simple .............................................................................................. 7-37 Type d'adresse ................................................................................................................................ 7-37 Index ................................................................................................................................................ 7-38 Recherche détaillée ......................................................................................................................... 7-38 Recherche détaillée - Options recherche ........................................................................................ 7-39 7.6.2 Saisie directe.................................................................................................................................... 7-39 7.6.3 Saisie directe - Fax .......................................................................................................................... 7-40 Prochaine Destination...................................................................................................................... 7-40 Quand la fonction Confirm. Adresse (Émiss) est spécifiée : ............................................................ 7-40 7.6.4 Saisie dir. - E-Mail............................................................................................................................ 7-40 Prochaine Destination...................................................................................................................... 7-40 7.6.5 Saisie directe - FAX Internet ............................................................................................................ 7-41 Prochaine Destination...................................................................................................................... 7-41 Capacité Réception Récepteur........................................................................................................ 7-41 bizhub 652/552 Table des matières-5 7.6.6 Saisie directe - Fax Adr. IP .............................................................................................................. 7-42 7.6.7 Saisie Directe - PC (SMB) ................................................................................................................ 7-42 Nom Serveur .................................................................................................................................... 7-42 Chemin fichier .................................................................................................................................. 7-42 Nom d'utilisateur.............................................................................................................................. 7-42 Mot de passe ................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Référence......................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Prochaine Destination...................................................................................................................... 7-43 7.6.8 Saisie directe - FTP.......................................................................................................................... 7-43 Nom Serveur .................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Chemin fichier .................................................................................................................................. 7-43 Nom d'utilisateur.............................................................................................................................. 7-43 Mot de passe ................................................................................................................................... 7-43 Paramètres Détaillés ........................................................................................................................ 7-43 Prochaine Destination...................................................................................................................... 7-43 7.6.9 Saisie directe - WebDAV.................................................................................................................. 7-44 Nom Serveur .................................................................................................................................... 7-44 Chemin fichier .................................................................................................................................. 7-44 Nom d'utilisateur.............................................................................................................................. 7-44 Mot de passe ................................................................................................................................... 7-44 Paramètres Détaillés ........................................................................................................................ 7-44 Prochaine Destination...................................................................................................................... 7-44 7.6.10 Vérif. histor ....................................................................................................................................... 7-45 7.6.11 Recherche Adresse.......................................................................................................................... 7-45 7.6.12 Recherche LDAP - Recherche simple ............................................................................................. 7-46 7.6.13 Recherche LDAP - Recherche Avancée .......................................................................................... 7-46 Nom ................................................................................................................................................. 7-46 Adr. E-Mail ....................................................................................................................................... 7-46 Numéro de Fax ................................................................................................................................ 7-46 Nom ................................................................................................................................................. 7-46 Prénom............................................................................................................................................. 7-46 Ville................................................................................................................................................... 7-46 Nom Entreprise ................................................................................................................................ 7-47 Département .................................................................................................................................... 7-47 OU/ET/DÉBUT/FINIT PAR ............................................................................................................... 7-47 7.6.14 Présentation des réglages document .............................................................................................. 7-47 7.6.15 Réglages Document - Définition ...................................................................................................... 7-47 7.6.16 Réglages Document - Type Fichier ................................................................................................. 7-48 Type Fichier...................................................................................................................................... 7-48 Cryptage .......................................................................................................................................... 7-48 Cryptage - Paramètres Détaillés...................................................................................................... 7-49 Surimpression Tampon.................................................................................................................... 7-50 PDF Contours .................................................................................................................................. 7-51 Réglage Numérisation...................................................................................................................... 7-51 7.6.17 Réglages Document - Couleur......................................................................................................... 7-52 7.6.18 Présentation des Réglages de Communication............................................................................... 7-52 7.6.19 Réglages de Communication - Réglages Ligne .............................................................................. 7-53 Description des réglages Ligne ....................................................................................................... 7-53 EMI Outremer................................................................................................................................... 7-53 ECM OFF ......................................................................................................................................... 7-53 V.34 Désactivé ................................................................................................................................. 7-53 Vérif. Dest. & envoyer....................................................................................................................... 7-54 Sélection ligne.................................................................................................................................. 7-54 7.6.20 Réglages de Communication - Réglages E-Mail ............................................................................. 7-54 Paramètres E-Mail ........................................................................................................................... 7-54 Nom Document................................................................................................................................ 7-54 Titre .................................................................................................................................................. 7-55 De..................................................................................................................................................... 7-55 Corps de texte ................................................................................................................................. 7-56 Table des matières-6 bizhub 652/552 7.6.21 Réglages de Communication - Paramètres URL Dest. ................................................................... 7-56 URL Dest.......................................................................................................................................... 7-56 Recherche détaillée ......................................................................................................................... 7-57 Saisie directe.................................................................................................................................... 7-57 7.6.22 Réglages de Communication - Réglage Méthod Comm................................................................. 7-58 Émission différée.............................................................................................................................. 7-58 Transmission par code (Mot Passe Émission) ................................................................................. 7-59 Transmission F-Code (FonctionTX Code F)..................................................................................... 7-59 7.6.23 Réglages de Communication - Cryptage E-Mail ............................................................................. 7-60 7.6.24 Réglages de Communication - Signature numérique...................................................................... 7-60 7.6.25 Réglages de Communication - Réglages En-tête Fax..................................................................... 7-60 7.6.26 Présentation des réglages Applications .......................................................................................... 7-61 7.6.27 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure....................................................................... 7-61 7.6.28 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page................................................................... 7-61 7.6.29 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon............................................................................ 7-61 7.6.30 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - En-tête/Pied de page....................................................... 7-62 7.6.31 Applications - Impress. par page..................................................................................................... 7-62 7.7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe)............................................................... 7-63 7.7.1 Présentation des réglages Archivage .............................................................................................. 7-63 Description de l'onglet Réglages Archivage .................................................................................... 7-63 7.7.2 Suppression de documents............................................................................................................. 7-64 7.7.3 Modif. Nom ...................................................................................................................................... 7-64 7.7.4 Déplacer les documents .................................................................................................................. 7-64 7.7.5 Copie................................................................................................................................................ 7-65 7.7.6 Enregistrer dans mémoire externe................................................................................................... 7-65 Réglages Document......................................................................................................................... 7-66 Réglages Document - Définition ...................................................................................................... 7-66 Réglages Document - Type Fichier ................................................................................................. 7-67 Réglages Document - Couleur......................................................................................................... 7-67 7.7.7 Détails Document............................................................................................................................. 7-67 Affichage des Informations détaillées.............................................................................................. 7-67 Aperçu.............................................................................................................................................. 7-68 7.8 Applications................................................................................................................................... 7-69 7.8.1 Présentation des réglages Applications .......................................................................................... 7-69 Description de l'onglet Applications ................................................................................................ 7-69 7.8.2 Modif. document.............................................................................................................................. 7-70 Modifier document - Suppr. page.................................................................................................... 7-70 Modifier document - Pivoter Page................................................................................................... 7-71 Modifier document - Déplacer Page................................................................................................ 7-73 Aperçu/Définir Plage ........................................................................................................................ 7-74 Aperçu/Spécification par saisie ....................................................................................................... 7-75 7.8.3 Enregistrer la surimpression ............................................................................................................ 7-76 Enregistrer la surimpression - Nouveau........................................................................................... 7-77 Enregistrer la surimpression - Écraser............................................................................................. 7-78 Paramètres Détaillés ........................................................................................................................ 7-79 7.9 Boîte Utilisateur Bulletin Bord (Système) ................................................................................... 7-80 7.9.1 Présentation des Boîtes Utilisateur Bulletin Bord............................................................................ 7-80 7.9.2 Écran Bte Util. Bulletin Bord ............................................................................................................ 7-80 7.9.3 Impression d'un document dans une boîte Bulletin ........................................................................ 7-80 7.9.4 Suppression d'un document d'une boîte Bulletin............................................................................ 7-80 7.10 Boîte Émis. en relève (Système) .................................................................................................. 7-81 7.10.1 Présentation boîtes Émission en relève ........................................................................................... 7-81 7.10.2 Impression d'un document dans la boîte Émission en relève ......................................................... 7-81 7.10.3 Suppression d'un document dans la boîte Émission en relève....................................................... 7-81 7.11 Boîte Utilisateur Document Sécurisé (Système) ........................................................................ 7-82 7.11.1 Présentation de la boîte Document sécurisé ................................................................................... 7-82 7.11.2 Procédure d'authentification 1......................................................................................................... 7-82 7.11.3 Procédure d'authentification 2......................................................................................................... 7-82 bizhub 652/552 Table des matières-7 7.11.4 Impression - Impression .................................................................................................................. 7-83 Copies.............................................................................................................................................. 7-83 Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 7-83 Finition.............................................................................................................................................. 7-83 Combinaison.................................................................................................................................... 7-83 Zoom................................................................................................................................................ 7-83 Marge page...................................................................................................................................... 7-83 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre ............................................................................................................... 7-83 Tampon/Surimpression.................................................................................................................... 7-83 7.11.5 Réglages Archivage ......................................................................................................................... 7-84 7.12 Boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. (boîte utilisateur Système).................................................... 7-85 7.12.1 Présentation de la Boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig......................................................................... 7-85 7.12.2 Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 7-85 7.12.3 Réglages Archivage ......................................................................................................................... 7-85 7.13 Boîte Annotation (Système) ......................................................................................................... 7-86 7.13.1 Présentation des fonctions Boîte Annotation .................................................................................. 7-86 7.13.2 Impression - Fonction de base ........................................................................................................ 7-86 7.13.3 Impression - Marge page................................................................................................................. 7-86 7.13.4 Impression - Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre- Couverture...................................................................... 7-87 7.13.5 Impression - Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Insertion Feuille ............................................................. 7-87 7.13.6 Impression - Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Chapitres ....................................................................... 7-87 7.13.7 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure......................................................................... 7-87 7.13.8 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page..................................................................... 7-87 7.13.9 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon.............................................................................. 7-87 7.13.10 Préférences d'impression - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Protection Copie ................ 7-87 7.13.11 Préférences d'impression - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Pare-copie.......................... 7-87 7.13.12 Impression - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP........................................ 7-87 7.13.13 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif................................................................. 7-87 7.13.14 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Surimpression enregistrée ................................................. 7-87 7.13.15 Description de l'onglet Env. ............................................................................................................. 7-87 7.13.16 Env. - Saisie dir. - E-mail ................................................................................................................. 7-87 7.13.17 Env. - Saisie dir. - PC (SMB)............................................................................................................ 7-87 7.13.18 Env. - Saisie dir. - FTP ..................................................................................................................... 7-88 7.13.19 Env. - Saisie dir. - WebDAV ............................................................................................................. 7-88 7.13.20 Env. - Vérif. histor............................................................................................................................. 7-88 7.13.21 Env. - Recherche LDAP - Recher simple......................................................................................... 7-88 7.13.22 Env. - Recherche LDAP - Recherche Avancée................................................................................ 7-88 7.13.23 Env. - Réglages Document - Définition............................................................................................ 7-88 7.13.24 Env. - Réglages Document - Type Fichier ....................................................................................... 7-88 7.13.25 Env. - Réglages Document - Couleur .............................................................................................. 7-88 7.13.26 Env. - Réglage communication - Réglages E-Mail .......................................................................... 7-88 7.13.27 Env. - Réglage communication - Paramètres URL Dest. ................................................................ 7-88 7.13.28 Env. - Réglage communication - Cryptage E-Mail .......................................................................... 7-88 7.13.29 Env. - Réglage communication - Signature numérique................................................................... 7-88 7.13.30 Env. - Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure ............................................................ 7-88 7.13.31 Env. - Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page ........................................................ 7-88 7.13.32 Env. - Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon ................................................................. 7-89 7.13.33 Env. - Applications - Impress. par page .......................................................................................... 7-89 7.13.34 Env. - Applications - Changer Texte................................................................................................ 7-89 Texte Numérotation ......................................................................................................................... 7-89 Date/Heure....................................................................................................................................... 7-89 Contraste ......................................................................................................................................... 7-89 Type Numéro ................................................................................................................................... 7-90 Position d'impression ...................................................................................................................... 7-90 7.13.35 Réglages Archivage ......................................................................................................................... 7-91 7.13.36 Applications - Enregistrer la surimpression ..................................................................................... 7-91 Table des matières-8 bizhub 652/552 7.14 Boîte Ré-émission Fax (Système)................................................................................................ 7-92 7.14.1 Présentation de la Boîte Ré-émission Fax....................................................................................... 7-92 7.14.2 Impression - Épreuve....................................................................................................................... 7-92 7.14.3 Env. - Fax ......................................................................................................................................... 7-92 7.14.4 Réglages Archivage - Supprimer ..................................................................................................... 7-93 7.15 Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe (Système) ................................................................................ 7-94 7.15.1 Présentation de la Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe........................................................................ 7-94 7.15.2 Impr/Enreg - Impr/Enreg .................................................................................................................. 7-94 7.15.3 Réglages Archivage - Supprimer ..................................................................................................... 7-94 7.16 Boîte Utilisat. ID & Imprimer (Système)....................................................................................... 7-95 7.16.1 Présentation de la Boîte ID & Imprimer............................................................................................ 7-95 Voir documents................................................................................................................................ 7-95 7.16.2 Impression - Impression .................................................................................................................. 7-95 7.16.3 Réglages Archivage - Supprimer ..................................................................................................... 7-96 7.17 Mémoire externe (Système) ......................................................................................................... 7-97 7.17.1 Dispositif de mémoire externe ......................................................................................................... 7-97 Dispositifs de mémoire externe pris en charge ............................................................................... 7-97 Connexion du dispositif de mémoire externe .................................................................................. 7-97 7.17.2 Écran Mémoire externe.................................................................................................................... 7-98 Entrer un chemin de fichier .............................................................................................................. 7-98 Sélectionner un fichier ..................................................................................................................... 7-98 Imprimer des données PDF cryptées .............................................................................................. 7-98 Déplacement vers le dossier parent ................................................................................................ 7-99 Ouvrir un dossier.............................................................................................................................. 7-99 Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 7-99 Détails Document............................................................................................................................. 7-99 7.17.3 Impression - Fonction de base ........................................................................................................ 7-99 Copies.............................................................................................................................................. 7-99 Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 7-99 Position Reliure ................................................................................................................................ 7-99 Finition............................................................................................................................................ 7-100 Papier............................................................................................................................................. 7-100 7.17.4 Impression - Applications .............................................................................................................. 7-100 Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure............................................................................................ 7-100 Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page ........................................................................................ 7-100 Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon................................................................................................. 7-100 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Protection Copie........................................................... 7-100 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Pare-copie .................................................................... 7-100 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP........................................................... 7-100 Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif.................................................................................... 7-100 7.17.5 Réglages Archivage - Enreg. dans Boîte utilisateur....................................................................... 7-101 7.18 Mobile/PDA (Système)................................................................................................................ 7-101 7.18.1 Environnement d'exploitation ........................................................................................................ 7-101 7.18.2 Mobile/PDA - Imprimer .................................................................................................................. 7-102 Saisie du code PIN......................................................................................................................... 7-102 Vérifier les préférences d'impression............................................................................................. 7-102 7.18.3 Mobile/PDA - Enregistrer ............................................................................................................... 7-103 Saisie du code PIN......................................................................................................................... 7-103 8 Réglages Boîte 8.1 Structure des menus Réglages Boîte ........................................................................................... 8-3 8.1.1 Mode Utilisateur................................................................................................................................. 8-3 8.1.2 Réglages Administrateur.................................................................................................................... 8-4 8.2 Réglage Mode Utilisateur............................................................................................................... 8-6 8.2.1 Création d'une boîte .......................................................................................................................... 8-6 Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe............................................................................................................ 8-6 Supprimer Boîte Vide (Réglages Administrateur)............................................................................... 8-7 Bulletin Boîte Utilis. ............................................................................................................................ 8-7 Boîte Relais ........................................................................................................................................ 8-9 bizhub 652/552 Table des matières-9 8.2.2 Paramètres Affichage Perso - Configurer la boîte ........................................................................... 8-10 Onglet par Défaut............................................................................................................................. 8-10 Touche de raccourci ........................................................................................................................ 8-10 8.2.3 Réglage Mobile/PDA - Notif. Erreur Lien Fichier ............................................................................. 8-11 8.2.4 Réglage Mobile/PDA - Utilisation Serveur Proxy............................................................................. 8-11 8.2.5 Réglage Mobile/PDA - Réglages Impression................................................................................... 8-12 De base - Impression....................................................................................................................... 8-12 De base - Papier .............................................................................................................................. 8-12 De base - Finition............................................................................................................................. 8-12 Applications - Marge........................................................................................................................ 8-13 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure....................................................................... 8-13 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page................................................................... 8-13 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon............................................................................ 8-13 Applications - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Protection Copie ..................................... 8-13 Applications - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Pare-copie............................................... 8-13 Applications - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP...................................... 8-13 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif............................................................... 8-13 8.3 Réglages Administrateur.............................................................................................................. 8-14 8.3.1 Autorisations de boîte ...................................................................................................................... 8-14 Types d'utilisateurs .......................................................................................................................... 8-14 Boîte Public et boîte Privé ou Groupe ............................................................................................. 8-14 8.3.2 Création d'une boîte ........................................................................................................................ 8-15 8.3.3 Créer une boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe ......................................................................................... 8-15 8.3.4 Créer une boîte Bulletin ................................................................................................................... 8-15 8.3.5 Créer un boîte Relais........................................................................................................................ 8-15 8.3.6 Créer une boîte Annotation.............................................................................................................. 8-16 8.3.7 Réglage Maxi. Boîtes ....................................................................................................................... 8-17 Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe.......................................................................................................... 8-17 Gestion Boîte maximum................................................................................................................... 8-18 Réglage Maxi. Boîtes ....................................................................................................................... 8-18 8.3.8 Réglages Boîte................................................................................................................................. 8-19 Supprimer Bte Util. inutilisée............................................................................................................ 8-19 Suppr. Docs Impr. Sécurisée........................................................................................................... 8-19 Délai suppress Impress. sécuris. ..................................................................................................... 8-20 Délai suppress PDF cryptés............................................................................................................. 8-20 Délai Suppress. ID & Impr................................................................................................................ 8-21 Réglage attente doc......................................................................................................................... 8-21 Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe............................................................................................... 8-22 Boîte Util. Autor./Interd. ................................................................................................................... 8-22 Réglage ID & Imprimer Supprimer après impression....................................................................... 8-23 Réglage Délai suppression Document............................................................................................. 8-23 Paramètres ID & Imprimer................................................................................................................ 8-24 8.3.9 Réglage Mobile/PDA........................................................................................................................ 8-24 8.3.10 Réglage administrateur Boîte Utilisateur ......................................................................................... 8-25 Réglage Administrateur de boîtes.................................................................................................... 8-25 Connexion à cette machine comme Administrateur de boîtes........................................................ 8-25 Fonctions Administrateur disponibles ............................................................................................. 8-25 8.3.11 DétailsSécurité ................................................................................................................................. 8-26 Impression sécurisée seulement...................................................................................................... 8-26 8.3.12 Paramétrage HDD............................................................................................................................ 8-26 Vérifier Capacité HDD ...................................................................................................................... 8-26 Écraser données Disque Dur ........................................................................................................... 8-27 Écraser données .............................................................................................................................. 8-28 Mot de passe accès disque dur....................................................................................................... 8-29 Formatage DD.................................................................................................................................. 8-30 Réglage cryptage DD....................................................................................................................... 8-30 8.3.13 Réglages Tampon............................................................................................................................ 8-31 Réglages Horodatage ...................................................................................................................... 8-31 Table des matières-10 bizhub 652/552 9 PageScope Web Connection 9.1 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection............................................................................................ 9-3 9.1.1 Environnement d'exploitation ............................................................................................................ 9-3 9.1.2 Accéder à PageScope Web Connection ........................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.3 Cache du navigateur Internet............................................................................................................. 9-4 Pour Internet Explorer ........................................................................................................................ 9-4 Pour Netscape Navigator................................................................................................................... 9-4 Pour Mozilla Firefox ........................................................................................................................... 9-4 9.1.4 Fonction Aide en ligne ....................................................................................................................... 9-4 9.2 Connexion et déconnexion ............................................................................................................ 9-5 9.2.1 Opérations de connexion et de déconnexion.................................................................................... 9-5 Lorsque Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département est désactivé .................................... 9-5 Quand Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département est activé............................................. 9-7 9.2.2 Déconnexion ...................................................................................................................................... 9-8 9.2.3 Connexion.......................................................................................................................................... 9-9 Options de Connexion ....................................................................................................................... 9-9 Connexion en tant qu'utilisateur public ........................................................................................... 9-10 Connexion en tant qu'utilisateur enregistré ..................................................................................... 9-11 Se connecter en mode Administrateur ............................................................................................ 9-12 Affichage du mode en mode administrateur.................................................................................... 9-13 Connexion en tant qu'Administrateur de boîte ................................................................................ 9-14 9.3 Organisation de la page ............................................................................................................... 9-15 9.4 Présentation du mode Utilisateur................................................................................................ 9-17 9.4.1 Information ....................................................................................................................................... 9-17 9.4.2 Tâche ............................................................................................................................................... 9-18 9.4.3 Boîtes ............................................................................................................................................... 9-18 9.4.4 Impression directe ........................................................................................................................... 9-19 9.4.5 Enregistrement Destination.............................................................................................................. 9-20 9.4.6 Personnaliser ................................................................................................................................... 9-21 9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte............................................................................................. 9-22 9.5.1 Afficher sous forme de liste des documents enregistrés dans une boîte........................................ 9-22 Connexion de boîte.......................................................................................................................... 9-22 Liste de fichiers ................................................................................................................................ 9-23 9.5.2 Imprimer un document..................................................................................................................... 9-24 9.5.3 Envoyer un document à une autre machine .................................................................................... 9-27 9.5.4 Téléchargement des données d'un document sur votre ordinateur................................................ 9-29 9.5.5 Déplacer ou copier un document vers une autre boîte utilisateur ................................................... 9-32 9.5.6 Supprimer un document .................................................................................................................. 9-34 9.6 Présentation du mode Administrateur........................................................................................ 9-36 9.6.1 Entretien........................................................................................................................................... 9-36 9.6.2 Réglage Système ............................................................................................................................. 9-37 9.6.3 Sécurité ............................................................................................................................................ 9-38 9.6.4 Authentification utilisateur/Compte département ............................................................................ 9-39 9.6.5 Réseau ............................................................................................................................................. 9-40 9.6.6 Boîtes ............................................................................................................................................... 9-41 9.6.7 Réglages imprimante ....................................................................................................................... 9-42 9.6.8 Enregistrement Destination.............................................................................................................. 9-43 9.6.9 Réglage Fax ..................................................................................................................................... 9-44 9.6.10 Réglage pour chaque utilisation ...................................................................................................... 9-45 bizhub 652/552 Table des matières-11 10 Annexe 10.1 Liste des messages d'erreur........................................................................................................ 10-3 10.2 Glossaire ........................................................................................................................................ 10-3 11 Index 11.1 Index des éléments....................................................................................................................... 11-3 11.2 Index des touches......................................................................................................................... 11-6 Table des matières-12 bizhub 652/552 1 Introduction bizhub 652/552 1-3 1.1 Bienvenue 1 1 Introduction 1.1 Bienvenue Nous vous remercions d'avoir acheté cet appareil. Ce Guide de l'utilisateur décrit les fonctions, les instructions, les précautions d'utilisation et les procédures de dépannage élémentaires relatives à cette machine. Pour tirer le maximum de ce produit et l'utiliser efficacement, veuillez lire ce guide de l'utilisateur selon les besoins. 1.1.1 Guides de l'utilisateur Guide de l'utilisateur Présentation [Guide rapide Opérations Copie/Impression/ Fax/Numérisation/Boîte] Ce guide décrit les procédures et les fonctions d'utilisation les plus fréquemment utilisées afin de vous permettre d'utiliser immédiatement cette machine. Ce guide contient également des notes et des précautions à suivre pour garantir l'utilisation en toute sécurité de cette machine ainsi que des détails sur les marques de fabrique et les copyrights. Assurez-vous de lire ce manuel avant d'utiliser la machine. [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie] Ce guide décrit en détails les opérations en mode Copie et les réglages de cette machine. • Caractéristiques des originaux et du papier copie • Fonction Copie • Entretien de la machine • Incidents [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Zoom Écran] Ce manuel détaille les procédures d'exploitation du mode Zoom Ecran. • Fonction Copie • Fonction Numérisation • Fonction Fax G3 • Fonction Fax réseau [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression] Ce manuel décrit en détail les fonctions d'imprimante. • Fonctions Imprimante • Configuration du pilote d'imprimante [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte] Ce manuel décrit en détail les fonctions de boîte recourant au disque dur. • Enregistrer des données dans des boîtes • Extraire les données des boîtes • Transfert et impression des données des boîtes utilisateur [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau] Ce manuel décrit en détail le transfert de données numérisées. • Emission E-mail, Envoi FTP, Emission SMB, Enregistrement dans Boîte utilisateur, Emission Web- DAV, Services Web • Fax G3 • Adresse IP Fax, Fax Internet [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Pilote Fax] Ce manuel détaille la fonction du pilote Fax qui permet d'envoyer les fax directement d'un ordinateur. • FAX PC [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau] Ce manuel décrit en détail méthodes de réglage pour chaque fonction avec la connexion réseau. • Paramètres Réseau • Réglages avec PageScope Web Connection 1 Bienvenue 1-4 bizhub 652/552 1.1 1.1.2 Guide de l'utilisateur Ce guide de l'utilisateur s'adresse à des utilisateurs depuis ceux qui utilisent cette machine pour la première fois jusqu'aux administrateurs. Il décrit les opérations de base, les fonctions destinées à une utilisation plus pratique, les opérations de dépannage élémentaires et plusieurs méthodes de réglage de cette machine. Noter toutefois que des connaissances techniques de base sur le produit sont nécessaires pour des travaux d'entretien ou des opérations de dépannage. Limitez vos interventions de dépannage aux seules sections expliquées dans ce manuel. En cas de problèmes, veuillez contacter notre représentant SAV. [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations de Fonction Avancée] Ce manuel décrit en détail les fonctions qui deviennent disponibles après enregistrement du kit de licence en option et en se connectant à une application. • Fonction Navigateur Web • Image Panel • Fonctions de traitement PDF • PDF recherchable • Fonctions My Panel et My Address Guide de l'utilisateur Présentation bizhub 652/552 1-5 1.2 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1 1.2 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1.2.1 Symboles utilisés dans ce manuel Les symboles utilisés dans le manuel expriment divers types d'informations. La présentation qui suit décrit chaque symbole associé à l'utilisation correcte et sûre de la machine. Pour utiliser cette machine en toute sécurité 7 AVERTISSEMENT - Ce symbole indique que le non respect des instructions peut entraîner des blessures mortelles ou graves. 7 ATTENTION - Ce symbole indique que la négligence des instructions peut entraîner des fausses manoeuvres susceptibles de provoquer des blessures ou des dommages matériels. REMARQUE Ce symbole indique un risque de dommages matériels pour la machine ou les documents. Suivez les instructions pour éviter tout dommage matériel. Instruction de procédure 0 Cette coche indique une option nécessaire à l'utilisation des conditions ou fonctions prérequises d'une procédure. 1 Un chiffre présenté ainsi "1" représente la première étape. 2 Ce numéro de format représente l'ordre des différentes étapes. % Ce symbole indique une explication supplémentaire d'instruction de procédure. % Ce symbole indique une transition du panneau de contrôle permettant d'accéder à un élément de menu désiré. Ce symbole indique la page désirée. Les procédures de fonctionnement sont décrites par des illustrations. 1 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1-6 bizhub 652/552 1.2 dPour info Ce symbole indique une référence. Consulter la référence en cas de besoin. Symboles clés [ ] Le nom des touches de l'écran tactile ou de l'écran d'ordinateur ainsi que le nom des guides d'utilisateur sont indiqués entre crochets. Texte en gras Renvoie à un nom de touche, de pièce, de modèle ou d'option du panneau de contrôle. 1.2.2 Indications concernant l'original et le papier Formats de l'original et du papier Indication relative aux originaux et au papier décrits dans ce manuel. Lorsque l'on spécifie un format papier ou d'original, le côté Y représente la largeur et le côté X représente la longueur. Indications concernant l'original et le papier w indique un format papier où le côté X (longueur) est plus grand que le côté Y (largeur). v indique un format papier où le côté X (longueur) est plus petit que le côté Y (largeur). bizhub 652/552 1-7 1.3 Vérifier la fonction à utiliser 1 1.3 Vérifier la fonction à utiliser Ce guide décrit en détail les réglages des fonctions. Comprendre le Flux d'opérations Ce manuel comporte un chapitre "Flux d'opérations Boîte" qui indique comment utiliser les principales fonctions de cette machine. Les tableaux de ce chapitre vous aideront à vous familiariser avec la séquence générale des opérations, comme par exemple, l'enregistrement et l'impression de données. Le lien intégré au tableau permet d'accéder aux pages des réglages de la fonction qui donnent plus de détails. Utilisation de la structure des menus Plusieurs fonctions peuvent être configurées sur cette machine. Pour plus d'informations sur la touche à sélectionner pour accéder à des éléments de réglage spécifiques et voir la liste des éléments configurables, voir les pages Structure des menus pages. Dans les pages de la Structure des menus, chaque touche fait apparaître des fonctions hiérarchisées. Le lien intégré à la Structure des menus permet d'accéder aux pages des réglages de la fonction qui donnent plus de détails. 1 Vérifier la fonction à utiliser 1-8 bizhub 652/552 1.3 2 Présentation de la fonction boîte bizhub 652/552 2-3 2.1 Fonctions Boîte 2 2 Présentation de la fonction boîte 2.1 Fonctions Boîte Les fonctions de boîte permettent de sauvegarder des données de document sur le disque dur interne de la machine pour les imprimer ultérieurement. Les documents que vous pouvez sauvegarder sont les données numérisées pour la copie et les données numérisées enregistrées. Pour enregistrer des données dans une boîte, créez la boîte et enregistrez les données dans la boîte indiquée. Les données enregistrées peuvent selon les besoins être imprimées, envoyées par E-mail, transférées via FTP, ou émises à destination d'un ordinateur. Les fonctions Boîte vous évitent aussi d'avoir à numériser des originaux de manière répétée ou d'enregistrer les données sur chacun des ordinateurs. 2.1.1 Fonctions de boîte disponibles Enregistrer des documents Vous pouvez enregistrer des données dans les boîtes suivantes : *1 Pour plus de détails sur l'envoi depuis un ordinateur de documents à imprimer et leur enregistrement dans la boîte, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations impression]. Boîte utilisateur Description Référence Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe (*1) Permet d'enregistrer un document copié ou numérisé à l'aide de cette machine. Vous pouvez aussi enregistrer un document dont l'instruction d'impression a été émise par un ordinateur connecté au réseau. Certains réglages Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département permettent d'interdire l'accès de certains utilisateurs à certaines boîtes Privé ou Groupe. p. 6-3 Boîte Annotation Permet d'enregistrer les données de document à imprimer et de les transmettre avec ajout de la date et de l'heure ou d'un numéro d'annotation sur les documents enregistrées en mode Numérisation. p. 6-3 Mémoire externe Cet élément apparaît lorsqu'une mémoire externe est installée. • Vous pouvez enregistrer tous les documents numérisés directement sur une mémoire externe connectée à cette machine. • Vous pouvez enregistrer un document archivé dans une Boîte utilisateur dans une mémoire externe. • Vous pouvez enregistrer un fichier archivé dans une mémoire externe dans une Boîte utilisateur. p. 6-3 Mobile/PDA Enregistrer un document enregistré dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique dans la boîte Public, Privée ou Groupe. p. 7-103 2 Fonctions Boîte 2-4 bizhub 652/552 2.1 1 Mobile/PDA 2 Fax 3 Ordinateur 4 Serveur FTP, etc. 5 Original 6 Mémoire externe Utilisation des documents Utilisation des données de document enregistrées dans les boîtes. En fonction de la boîte, les données sont utilisables comme suit : Boîte utilisateur Description Référence Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe (*1) Pour imprimer et envoyer des documents enregistrés. Plusieurs documents peuvent être sélectionnés pour être imprimés ou envoyés. Certains réglages Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département permettent d'interdire l'accès de certains utilisateurs à certaines boîtes Privé ou Groupe. p. 7-9 Bulletin Boîte Utilis. Cet élément apparaît si le kit fax en option est installé. Il permet d'imprimer un document enregistré dans la Boîte Bulletin. p. 7-80 Boîte Émission Dépôt (*2) Cet élément apparaît si le kit fax en option est installé. Il permet d'imprimer des documents envoyés par sent via Dépôt/Relève. p. 7-81 Boîte Utilisateur Document Sécurisé (*3) Permet d'imprimer les documents enregistrés. L'impression est subordonnée à l'introduction d'un ID et d'un code d'accès. p. 7-82 Boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. (*2) Cet élément apparaît si le kit fax en option est installé. Grâce au paramètre de réception mémoire obligatoire, il est possible de confirmer et d'imprimer le document fax reçu. p. 7-85 Boîte Annotation Permet d'imprimer ou d'envoyer les données de document enregistrées en y ajoutant la date et l'heure ou un numéro d'annotation. p. 7-86 Boîte Retransmission Fax (*2) Cet élément apparaît si le kit fax en option est installé. Cette boîte utilisateur vous permet de transférer un document enregistré ou de l'imprimer pour confirmation. p. 7-92 Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe (*4) imprimez un document PDF enregistré et crypté par mot de passe. Les fichiers PDF cryptés enregistrés dans une mémoire externe et envoyés pour des travaux d'impression sont également enregistrés dans cette boîte. L'impression est subordonnée à l'introduction d'un code d'accès prédéfini. p. 7-94 bizhub 652/552 2-5 2.1 Fonctions Boîte 2 *1 Pour plus de détails sur l'envoi depuis un ordinateur de documents à imprimer et leur enregistrement dans la boîte, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations impression]. *2 Pour plus de détails sur l'émission Dépôt, la réception Relève, la réception Mémoire obligatoire et la retransmission de fichiers, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. *3 Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de documents dans la boîte Utilisateur Document sécurisé, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. *4 À propos de l'instruction d'impression d'un PDF crypté, voir le manuel Impression directe PageScope ou la rubrique Impression directe dans l'aide en ligne PageScope Web Connection. 1 Fax 2 Ordinateur 3 E-mail, etc. 4 Serveur FTP, etc. 5 Cellulaire ou PDA 6 Mémoire externe 7 Impression Bte Ut. ID & Impr. Cet élément apparaît quand les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont configurés. Une fois connecté comme utilisateur, vous pouvez imprimer un document envoyé comme tâche d'impression depuis le pilote d'imprimante. p. 7-95 Mémoire externe Cet élément apparaît lorsqu'une mémoire externe est installée. Vous pouvez imprimer des documents enregistrés dans une mémoire externe connectée à cette machine. p. 7-97 Téléphone cellulaire ou PDA Imprimez un document enregistré dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique. Vous pouvez enregistrer un document enregistré dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique dans la boîte Public, Privée ou Groupe. p. 7-102 Boîte utilisateur Description Référence 2 Fonctions Boîte 2-6 bizhub 652/552 2.1 Organisation des documents Permet d'organiser des documents en renommant les documents enregistrés, en changeant les boîtes dans lesquelles ils sont enregistrés et en dupliquant ou en supprimant les documents. 1 Mobile/PDA 2 Mémoire externe Boîte utilisateur Supprimer Modif. Nom Déplacer Copie Enreg. dans Boîte utilisateur Permet d'enregistrer dans une mémoire USB (si une mémoire externe est connectée). Détails Document Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe o o o o - o o Bulletin Boîte Utilis. o - - - - - - Boîte Emission en relève o - - - - - - Boîte utilisateur Document Sécurisé o o - - - - o Boîte Réception mémoire o o - - - - o Boîte Annotation o o - - - - o Boîte Retransmission Fax o - - - - - o Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe o - - - - - o Bte Ut. ID & Impr. o - - - - - o Mémoire externe, mobile/PDA - - - - o - o bizhub 652/552 2-7 2.1 Fonctions Boîte 2 2.1.2 Configurer les paramètres d'utilisation des fonctions Boîte Avant d'utiliser les fonctions de boîte, il faut définir les paramètres suivants. Enregistrement d'une boîte Permet d'enregistrer la boîte dans laquelle les documents seront conservés. Permet de configurer des boîtes à partir de l'écran tactile de la machine ou en utilisant PageScope Web Connection à partir d'un navigateur Web sur un ordinateur du réseau. Référence - Les boîtes utilisateurs suivantes peuvent être configurées. – Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe (p. 8-6) – Boîte Bulletin (si la fonction Bulletin est utilisée) (p. 8-7) – Boîte Annotation (p. 8-16) Si cette machine est utilisée comme appareil relais Si le Fax Kit en option est installé et que vous désirer utiliser cette machine pour l'émission Fax relais, créez une Boîte relais pour stocker temporairement les documents avant d'être réacheminés. (p. 8-9) Pour créer une Boîte relais, spécifiez préalablement le groupe contenant les numéros de fax des destinations relais. Boîte de stockage des données pour réception Mémoire obligatoire Si le Fax Kit en option est installé et que nous ne désirez pas imprimer pendant la réception des données, configurez les réglages de réception Mémoire obligatoire. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la configuration des réglages de réception Mémoire obligatoire, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 2 Information 2-8 bizhub 652/552 2.2 2.2 Information Cette section contient des informations dont il est nécessaire de prendre connaissance avant d'utiliser les fonctions boîte. 2.2.1 Authentification Utilisateur Pour l'utilisation de cette machine, certains périphériques ont été pré-configurés et nécessitent la saisie d'un nom de compte ou d'utilisateur, ainsi que la saisie d'un mot de passe. Contactez l'administrateur pour obtenir les informations de compte ou de nom d'utilisateur permettant d'utiliser les périphériques. Authentification MFP Entrez le nom d'utilisateur et le code d'accès et appuyez sur [Connexion] sur l'écran tactile ou sur la touche Code sur le panneau de contrôle. Authentification par un serveur externe Entrez le nom d'utilisateur et le code d'accès et appuyez sur [Connexion] sur l'écran tactile ou sur la touche Code sur le panneau de contrôle. bizhub 652/552 2-9 2.2 Information 2 Authentification Compte Département Entrez le nom de compte et le code d'accès et appuyez sur [Connexion] sur l'écran tactile ou sur la touche Code sur le panneau de contrôle. Référence - Lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est activée, seules les boîtes accessibles aux utilisateurs connectés sont affichées. Pour plus de détails, voir page 2-11. - Si un utilisateur tape un mot de passe incorrect le nombre de fois spécifié lorsque Mode 2 est sélectionné dans Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification dans Réglages Administrateur, cet utilisateur est bloqué et ne peut plus utiliser le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails sur la désactivation des Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification, contactez votre administrateur. - Si PageScope Authentication Manager est utilisé pour l'authentification, demandez à votre administrateur serveur de vous indiquer la procédure de connexion. - Si vous utilisez l'Unité authentification en option pour l'authentification, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie] pour la procédure de connexion. 2.2.2 Restrictions applicables à l'enregistrement des boîtes Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe Les fonctions Boîte se décomposent en boîtes utilisateur de type Public, utilisables par plusieurs personnes, Privé, utilisables par une seule personne et enfin de type Groupe, accessibles par les utilisateurs connectés en tant que membres du compte propriétaire de la boîte. Voici la liste des limitations qui s'appliquent à ces boîtes utilisateur : - Avant d'enregistrer des documents, il convient de créer d'abord la boîte destinée à les conserver. - Il est possible de créer jusqu'à 1 000 boîtes. - Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 200 documents dans une seule boîte. - Il est possible enregistrer jusqu'à 10 000 pages dans toutes les boîtes utilisateur. - Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 3 000 documents dans toutes les boîtes. Bulletin Boîte Utilis. Référence - Vous pouvez créer jusqu'à 10 boîtes utilisateur Bulletin Bord. - Chaque boîte de bulletin de bord ne peut contenir qu'un seul document. Boîte Emission en relève Chaque boîte utilisateur ne peut contenir qu'un seul document. Boîte Réception mémoire Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 500 documents dans la Boîte Réception Mémoire. 2 Information 2-10 bizhub 652/552 2.2 Boîte Relais Référence - Il est possible de créer jusqu'à 5 boîtes Relais. - Chaque boîte Relais ne peut contenir qu'un seul document. 2.2.3 Restrictions concernant le nom de fichier Permet de nommer le document à enregistrer. Référence - Le nom peut contenir 30 caractères maximum. - Une fois les documents enregistrés, il est possible d'éditer le noms de fichiers. - Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier le nom lors de l'enregistrement des données. Dans le cas contraire, un prédéfini est attribué. En cas d'enregistrement des données sans spécification d'un nom, un nom est créé par combinaison des éléments suivants. Vous trouverez ci-dessous une description des éléments contenu dans un nom de document, par exemple "SMFP11102315230". Élément Description S Ce caractère indique le mode au moment où le document est enregistré. "S" apparaît pour les documents enregistrés sur l'écran du mode Fax/Numérisation ou l'écran de la boîte Utilisateur. C : Copie S : Fax/Numérisation, Boîte utilisateur P : Impression R : Fax reçu MFP Cet élément représente le nom de la machine qui a numérisé les données. Cet élément affiche le nom saisi dans [Nom machine] sous [Entrer Adresse Machine] des [Réglages Administrateur/Machine] dans Réglages Administrateur. Si vous modifiez le nom affiché, saisissez 10 caractères maximum. 11102315230 Ceci indique l'année (2 derniers chiffres), le mois, le jour, l'heure et la minute de numérisation des données. Si une série de documents sont numérisés sont numérisées en même temps (même minute), les deux derniers chiffres sont alors suivis des numéros de série. _0001 Cet élément indique la page lorsque la numérisation porte sur plusieurs pages. Ce numéro n'apparaît pas dans la colonne Nom document ; cependant, il figure automatiquement comme partie intégrante du nom lors de la transmission du fichier. Cet élément de l'émission FTP ou autres est à prendre en compte lorsqu'un serveur présente une restriction sur les noms de fichiers. .TIF Ceci est l'extension du format du fichier spécifié pour les données. Ces caractères n'apparaissent pas dans la colonne Nom document ; cependant, ils figurent automatiquement comme partie intégrante du nom lors de la transmission du fichier. bizhub 652/552 2-11 2.3 Authentification et boîtes utilisateur accessibles 2 2.3 Authentification et boîtes utilisateur accessibles Les boîtes utilisateur accessibles et les permissions correspondantes lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur et Compte Département est activée, sont décrites ci-après. Configurez les paramètres d'authentification utilisateur et de compte département selon les fonctions désirées. 2.3.1 Lorsque Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département est désactivé Référence - Les utilisateurs peuvent accéder à toutes les boîtes Utilisateur Public. - Les boîtes créées par des utilisateurs et les administrateurs sont des boîtes Public. - Les utilisateurs ne peuvent pas créer de boîtes utilisateur si Boîte Util. Autor./Interd. est réglé sur Interdit dans les Réglages Administrateur. 2.3.2 Lorsque seule l'Authentification utilisateur est activée Référence - Les utilisateurs ont accès à toutes les boîtes utilisateur Public et seulement aux boîtes utilisateur Privé qu'ils ont créées. - Les boîtes Privé ne sont pas accessibles aux autres utilisateurs. - Appuyez sur cette touche pour désigner un Administrateur de boîtes. - Un administrateur de boîtes a accès à toutes les boîtes Utilisateur Public et Utilisateur Privé. - Si vous supprimez les données d'authentification en annulant les paramètres d'authentification de l'utilisateur ou à cause d'un changement de méthode d'authentification, toutes les boîtes Privé deviennent des boîtes Public. Création et accès Boîte Utilisateur Public Utilisateur 1 Utilisateur 2 Accès autorisé Boîte Utilisateur Privé de l'utilisateur 2 Boîte Utilisateur Privé de l'utilisateur 1 Boîte Utilisateur Public Administrateur de boîtes Public 2 Authentification et boîtes utilisateur accessibles 2-12 bizhub 652/552 2.3 2.3.3 Lorsque seul Compte Département est activé Référence - Les utilisateurs ont accès à toutes les boîtes Utilisateur Publics et seulement aux boîtes Groupe du compte auxquels ils appartiennent. - Si vous supprimez les données d'authentification en annulant les paramètres Compte Département ou à cause d'un changement de méthode d'authentification, toutes les boîtes Groupe deviennent des boîtes Public. 2.3.4 Lorsque Authentification utilisateur et Compte Département sont activés et synchronisés Du fait que le compte destiné aux utilisateurs a été préalablement enregistré, les utilisateurs ne peuvent pas accéder aux boîtes Groupe des comptes auxquels ils n'appartiennent pas. Compte B Boîte Utilisateur Public Compte A Accès autorisé Boîte Utilisateur Groupe du compte A Boîte Utilisateur Groupe du compte B Compte A Compte B Utilisateur 1 Utilisateur 2 bizhub 652/552 2-13 2.3 Authentification et boîtes utilisateur accessibles 2 Référence - Les utilisateurs ont accès à toutes les boîtes Public, aux seules boîtes Groupe du compte auquel ils appartiennent et aux seules boîtes Privé qu'ils ont créées. - Les boîtes Privé ne sont pas accessibles aux autres utilisateurs. - Appuyez sur cette touche pour désigner un Administrateur de boîtes. - Un administrateur de boîtes a accès à toutes les boîtes Utilisateur Public, à toutes les boîtes Utilisateur Privé ainsi qu'à toutes les boîtes Groupe. - Si vous supprimez les données d'authentification en annulant les paramètres d'authentification de l'utilisateur ou à cause d'un changement de méthode d'authentification, toutes les boîtes Groupe deviennent des boîtes Public. Utilisateur 1 Utilisateur 2 Compte A Compte B Boîte Utilisateur Public Boîte Utilisateur Privé de l'utilisateur 1 Boîte Utilisateur Groupe du compte A Boîte Utilisateur Privé de l'utilisateur 2 Boîte Utilisateur Groupe du compte B Accès autorisé Administrateur de boîtes Public 2 Authentification et boîtes utilisateur accessibles 2-14 bizhub 652/552 2.3 2.3.5 Lorsque Authentification utilisateur et Compte Département sont activés mais pas synchronisés Si le compte de référence d'un utilisateur n'a pas été préalablement enregistré, l'utilisateur doit entrer un nom de compte et le code d'accès pour se connecter. À chaque connexion, l'utilisateur peut accéder aux boîtes Groupe d'un autre compte s'il fait partie de ce dernier. Référence - Les utilisateurs ont accès à toutes les boîtes utilisateur Public et seulement aux boîtes utilisateur Privé qu'ils ont créées. - Les boîtes Privé ne sont pas accessibles aux autres utilisateurs. - Un utilisateur peut accéder aux boîtes Groupe d'un compte simplement en entrant lors de la connexion, le nom de compte et le code d'accès correspondant. - Appuyez sur cette touche pour désigner un Administrateur de boîtes. - Un administrateur de boîtes a accès à toutes les boîtes Utilisateur Public, à toutes les boîtes Utilisateur Privé ainsi qu'à toutes les boîtes Groupe. - Si vous supprimez les données d'authentification en annulant les paramètres d'authentification de l'utilisateur ou à cause d'un changement de méthode d'authentification, toutes les boîtes Groupe deviennent des boîtes Public. Compte A Compte B Utilisateur 1 Utilisateur 1 Accès autorisé Accès autorisé par la saisie d'un nom de compte et d'un code d'accès Administrateur de boîtes Public Boîte Utilisateur Public Boîte Utilisateur Privé de l'utilisateur 1 Boîte Groupe de compte A Boîte Utilisateur Groupe du compte B 3 Panneau de contrôle/Ecran à cristaux liquides bizhub 652/552 3-3 3.1 Panneau de contrôle 3 3 Panneau de contrôle/Ecran à cristaux liquides 3.1 Panneau de contrôle Le panneau de contrôle permet d'effectuer des opérations du mode Boîte Utilisateur. Voici les touches et interrupteurs du panneau de contrôle. No. Nom Description 1 Écran tactile Plusieurs écrans de réglage et messages s'affichent à l'écran. Configurez les divers réglages par une pression directe sur l'écran tactile. 2 Voyant Alimentation S'allume en bleu quand la machine est mise sous tension au moyen de l'interrupteur principal. 3 Interrupteur d'alimentation secondaire Actionnez cet interrupteur pour activer/désactiver les opérations machine, y compris Copie, Impression et Numérisation. En position Arrêt, la machine passe en mode Économie d'énergie. 4 Éco. Énergie Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Éco Énergie. Quand la machine est en mode Économie d'énergie, le voyant de la touche Éco. Énergie s'éclaire en vert et l'écran tactile s'éteint. Pour quitter le mode Économie d'énergie, appuyez une nouvelle fois sur la touche Éco. Énergie. 5 Programmes Appuyez sur cette touche pour conserver les paramètres de copie/ numérisation souhaités en tant que programme ou pour rappeler un programme de copie/numérisation enregistré. 6 Utilitaire/Compteur Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran Utilitaires et l'écran Compteurs. 7 Initialiser Appuyez sur cette touche pour effacer tous les réglages (à l'exception des réglages programmés) sélectionnés sur le panneau de contrôle et l'écran tactile. 3 Panneau de contrôle 3-4 bizhub 652/552 3.1 7 ATTENTION - N'appuyez pas trop fort sur l'écran tactile, sinon vous pourriez le rayer ou l'endommager. Ne jamais appuyer trop fort sur l'écran tactile et ne jamais utiliser un objet dur ou pointu pour effectuer une sélection sur l'écran tactile. 8 Interruption Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Interruption. Quand la machine est en mode Interruption, le voyant de la touche Interruption s'éclaire en vert et le message "Mode Interruption activé." s'affiche à l'écran. Pour annuler le mode Interruption, appuyez une nouvelle fois sur la touche Interruption. 9 Arrêt Une pression sur la touche Arrêt pendant la numérisation a pour effet de suspendre momentanément l'opération. 10 Epreuve Appuyez sur cette touche pour imprimer un exemplaire d'essai avant l'impression d'un grand nombre de copies. Vous pouvez vérifiez la finition au niveau de l'écran tactile en appuyant sur cette touche avant de lancer la numérisation ou la copie. • Cette touche n'est pas disponible lors de l'enregistrement de documents avec la touche Boîte. • Pour contrôler l'aperçu de l'image en cas d'enregistrement dans une boîte utilisateur, appuyez sur la touche Fax/Numérisation. Pour la procédure de vérification de l'aperçu, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 11 Départ Appuyez sur cette touche pour lancer la numérisation. Dès que la machine est prête à commencer l'opération, le voyant de la touche Départ s'éclaire en bleu. Si le voyant de la touche Départ s'éclaire en orange, l'opération ne peut pas commencer. Appuyez sur cette touche pour reprendre une tâche arrêtée 12 Voyant Données Clignote en bleu pendant la réception d'une tâche d'impression. S'éclaire en bleu pendant l'impression des données. 13 C Appuyez sur cette touche pour effacer une valeur (par exemple, le nombre de copies, un taux zoom, un format) introduite au moyen du clavier numérique. 14 Pavé numérique Utilisez cette touche pour saisir le nombre de copies, le taux d'agrandissement, le numéro de fax et d'autres réglages. 15 Aide Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran Guidage. À partir de cet écran, il est possible d'afficher des descriptions des différentes fonctions et détails des opérations. 16 Zoom Ecran Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Zoom Écran. En cas d'utilisation de PageScope Authentication Manager pour l'authentification, l'écran Zoom Écran n'est pas disponible. 17 Accessibilité Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran permettant de configurer les paramètres des fonctions d'accessibilité utilisateur. 18 Code Si les réglages Authentification Utilisateur ou Compte Département ont été appliqués, il faut appuyer sur cette touche après avoir introduit le nom d'utilisateur et le code d'accès (pour l'Authentification Utilisateur) ou bien le nom de compte et le code d'accès (pour le Compte Département), pour pouvoir utiliser cette machine. Cette touche permet également de se déconnecter de la machine. 19 Contraste Permet de régler la luminosité de l'écran tactile. 20 Boîte Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Boîte. Lorsque la machine est en mode Boîte, le voyant de la touche Boîte s'éclaire en vert. 21 Fax/Numérisation Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Fax/Numérisation. Lorsque la machine est en mode Fax/Numérisation, le voyant de la touche Fax/Numérisation s'éclaire en vert. Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions Fax/Numérisation, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 22 Copie Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Copie. (Par défaut, la machine est en mode Copie.) Lorsque la machine est en mode Copie, le voyant de la touche Copie s'éclaire en vert. Pour plus d'informations, consultez le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. No. Nom Description bizhub 652/552 3-5 3.2 Écran tactile 3 3.2 Écran tactile 3.2.1 Éléments de l'écran Icônes qui apparaissent sur le l'écran tactile Certaines icônes indiquant l'état de la machine peuvent apparaître dans la zone d'affichage des icônes. Ci-dessous figurent les icônes disponibles. No. Nom Description 1 Zone des messages C'est là que s'affichent l'état de la machine et le détail des procédures opératoires. 2 Zone d'affichage des fonctions/réglages L'écran affiche les onglets et les touches permettant d'accéder aux écrans des diverses fonctions. Utilisez cette zone pour la configuration des fonctions. Appuyez sur un onglet ou une touche pour afficher l'écran permettant de spécifier les réglages. 3 Zone d'affichage des icônes Affiche des icônes indiquant l'état des tâches et de la machine ainsi que des touches de raccourci. 4 Volet de gauche Affiche plusieurs touches telles que [Liste Tâches] pour afficher les tâches en cours ou mises en file d'attente et [Vérifier Tâche] pour afficher la configuration spécifiée. Pour plus d'information sur l'affichage et la description du volet de gauche, voir page 3-6. 5 Voyants d'alimentation en toner Affiche le niveau toner restant. 4 5 1 2 3 Icône Description Indique que des données sont en cours d'émission à partir de la machine, indépendamment du mode dans lequel elle se trouve. Indique que la machine est en train de recevoir des données, indépendamment du mode en cours. Indique qu'une erreur est survenue lors de l'impression ou de la numérisation. Appuyez sur cette icône pour afficher l'écran contenant un code d'avertissement. Si l'écran d'avertissement a été fermé pendant que l'avertissement s'affichait, appuyez sur cette touche pour ouvrir à nouveau l'écran d'avertissement. 3 Écran tactile 3-6 bizhub 652/552 3.2 3.2.2 Affichage et utilisation du volet de gauche Le volet de gauche de l'écran tactile propose des touches permettant de vérifier l'état des tâches et la configuration de la machine. Les touches suivantes sont disponibles sur le volet de gauche du mode Boîte. Apparaît en présence d'un message indiquant qu'il faut remplacer les consommables ou que la machine nécessite un entretien. Appuyez sur cette icône pour afficher le message, puis procédez au remplacement ou à la procédure d'entretien. S'affiche si une erreur survient lors de la connexion avec le serveur POP. Indique qu'il n'y a pas de papier dans le magasin papier. Indique qu'il reste très peu de papier dans le magasin papier. Indique que le Mode Sécurité Avancée est actif. Indique qu'un périphérique de mémoire externe est connecté à la machine. Indique qu'une mémoire externe non standard a été connecté sur cette machine et que la connexion USB n'est donc pas activée. Indique que la tâche se trouve dans l'état d'attente pour renumérotation parce que, p. ex. la ligne du destinataire est occupée lors de l'envoi avec la fonction Fax G3 ou Fax Adresse IP. Icône Description No. Nom Description 1 [Liste Tâches] Appuyez sur cette touche pour contrôler la tâche en cours d'exécution et consulter le journal des tâches. 2 [Détails Tâche] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier les informations de la boîte utilisateur sélectionnée, ainsi que divers réglages des fonctions Numérisation, Impression et Émission. 3 [Aperçu] Appuyez sur cette touche pour contrôler l'image d'aperçu d'un document enregistré. 1 2 3 bizhub 652/552 3-7 3.2 Écran tactile 3 Liste Tâches Toute commande visant à effectuer une opération comme enregistrer des données dans une boîte ou à imprimer ou à envoyer des documents enregistrés, s'appelle une tâche. Sélectionnez [Liste Tâches] pour afficher la tâche en cours d'exécution. Liste Tâches - Supprimer Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer la tâche en cours et annuler l'opération. Sélectionnez la tâche dans la liste des tâches et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. Vérifiez le message qui apparaît, puis supprimez la tâche. Aucun document dans une Boîte ne sera supprimé même si la tâche actuellement en cours d'exécution est supprimée. 3 Écran tactile 3-8 bizhub 652/552 3.2 Liste Tâches - Détails tâche Appuyez sur cette touche pour voir la liste des tâches en cours d'exécution et le journal des tâches pour confirmation. On distingue les tâches selon les quatre types suivants : Élément Description [Impression] Répertorie toutes les tâches d'impression : copie, impression ordinateur et fax reçus ou rapports. [Env.] Affiche la liste des tâches d'émission fax et scanner. [Recevoir] Affiche la liste des tâches de réception Fax. [Enregistr.] Affiche la liste des tâches d'enregistrement dans la Boîte Utilisateur. Élément Description Éléments de la liste No. : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière est mise dans la file. Nom utili. : Affiche ou le nom d'utilisateur/nom de compte ou le nom d'utilisateur/ nom de compte de l'utilisateur qui a enregistré le document. État : L'état de la tâche (Réception en cours/En file d'attente/Impression en cours/Impress Stoppée/ Erreur d'impression/Enregistr mémoire en cours) est affiché à l'écran. Nom Document : Nom Fichier imprimé. Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente. Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original. Copies : nombre de copies à imprimer. [ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches pour faire apparaître les autres tâches. [Supprimer] Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer la tâche sélectionnée. [Augmenter Priorité] Appuyez sur cette touche pour changer la priorité de la tâche. • Si vous réglez Modifier tâches prioritaires, dans Réglages Administrateur, sur "Interdit", il n'est pas possible de spécifier la priorité des tâches. • S'il est spécifié par réglage que la tâche d'impression en cours peut être suspendue, l'impression s'arrête et l'impression de la tâche devenue prioritaire commence. L'impression de la tâche interrompue redémarre automatiquement une fois que l'impression de la tâche prioritaire est terminée. [Libérer Tâch Att] Appuyez sur cette touche pour modifier les réglages d'une tâche enregistrée ou pour imprimer ou supprimer la tâche. [Vér. par. Tâches] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier les paramètres de la tâche sélectionnée. Appuyez sur [ Retour] ou sur [Suiv ] pour vérifier les paramètres. bizhub 652/552 3-9 3.2 Écran tactile 3 Référence - Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés. - Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles. Référence - Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés. - Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles. - Pour voir les images numérisées, il faut préalablement régler "Affichage Miniature Historique Tâches" sur "Oui" dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus d'informations, consultez le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. [Détail] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier l'état, la source d'enregistrement/ le nom utilisateur, le nom de document, le bac de sortie, l'heure d'enregistrement, le nombre de pages d'original, le nombre de copies ou les infos sur serveur externe, concernant la tâche sélectionnée. Pour supprimer une tâche, appuyez sur [Supprimer]. • Les informations sur le serveur externe disponibles en appuyant sur la touche [Info.] s'affichent uniquement en cas d'utilisation de l'Authentification Serveur Externe. Élément Description Éléments de la liste No. : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière est mise dans la file. Nom utili. : Affiche ou le nom d'utilisateur/nom de compte ou le nom d'utilisateur/ nom de compte de l'utilisateur qui a enregistré le document. Nom Document : Nom Fichier imprimé. Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente. Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original. Copies : nombre de copies à imprimer. Résultat : Affiche le résultat de l'opération (Terminé avec succès/Supprimé à cause d'une erreur/Supprim. par Utilisateur/mode en partie annulé). [ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches pour faire apparaître les autres tâches. [Tâches supprimées]/ [Tâches terminées]/ [Ttes tâches] Appuyez successivement pour afficher le type de tâche. [Détail] Vous pouvez ainsi vérifier le résultat, les détails d'erreur, la source d'enregistrement/ le nom utilisateur, le nom de document, le bac de sortie, l'heure d'enregistrement, l'heure de fin, le nombre de pages d'original, le nombre de copies, le nombre de pages à imprimer ou les informations sur serveur externe concernant la tâche sélectionnée. • Les informations sur le serveur externe disponibles en appuyant sur la touche [Info.] s'affichent uniquement en cas d'utilisation de l'Authentification Serveur Externe. [Image Numérisée] Sélectionnez la tâche pour afficher l'image numérisée. Élément Description 3 Écran tactile 3-10 bizhub 652/552 3.2 Référence - Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés. - Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles. Élément Description Éléments de la liste No. : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière est mise dans la file. Type d'adresse : affiche le type de destination (tel que fax, e-mail, FTP, PC (SMB), WebDAV, TWAIN ou réglage désactivé*). "TWAIN" pour les tâches envoyées via le Service Web. État : Affiche l'état de la tâche (Envoi en cours/En file d'attente/Composition en cours/en attente de recomposition/suppression en cours). Adresse : Affiche le numéro de fax, l'adresse Email, le nom de la boîte, etc. de la machine du destinataire. Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente. Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original. * S'affiche lors de l'envoi de données alors que l'adresse est supprimée. [ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches pour faire apparaître les autres tâches. [Temporisation Tâche Émission] Affiche l'état de l'émission réservée en mémoire. Pour supprimer une tâche, appuyez sur [Supprimer]. [L1][L2] Ces touches apparaissent lorsque deux Kit Fax sont installés. Appuyez sur l'une de ces touches. La liste des tâches de la ligne sélectionnée apparaît. [Supprimer] Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer la tâche sélectionnée. [Recomposer] Sélectionnez une tâche dont l'état est réglé sur "Attente de recomposition" pour procéder à la recomposition du numéro. [Vérifier Paramètres Tâches] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier les paramètres de la tâche sélectionnée. Appuyez sur [ Retour] ou sur [Suiv ] pour vérifier les paramètres. [Détail] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier la source d'enregistrement/le nom utilisateur, le nom de fichier, le type de destination, la destination, l'heure d'enregistrement, la transmission, le nombre de pages d'original et les infos sur serveur externe, concernant la tâche sélectionnée. Pour supprimer une tâche, appuyez sur [Supprimer]. • Les informations sur le serveur externe disponibles en appuyant sur la touche [Info.] s'affichent uniquement en cas d'utilisation de l'Authentification Serveur Externe. • [Type] ne s'affiche que si la destination est un télécopieur, Fax Internet ou Fax adresse IP. Élément Description Éléments de la liste No. : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière est mise dans la file. Type d'adresse : affiche le type de destination (tel que fax, e-mail, FTP, PC (SMB), WebDAV, TWAIN ou réglage désactivé*). "TWAIN" pour les tâches envoyées via le Service Web. Adresse : Affiche le numéro de fax, l'adresse Email, le nom de la boîte, etc. de la machine du destinataire. Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente. Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original. Résultat : Affiche le résultat de l'opération (Terminé avec succès/Supprimé à cause d'une erreur/Supprim. par Utilisateur). "Erreur détectée" s'affiche aussi pour la diffusion. * S'affiche lors de l'envoi de données alors que l'adresse est supprimée. [ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches pour faire apparaître les autres tâches. [Tâches supprimées]/ [Tâches terminées]/ [Ttes tâches] Appuyez successivement pour afficher le type de tâche. bizhub 652/552 3-11 3.2 Écran tactile 3 Référence - Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés. - Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles. - Pour voir les images numérisées, il faut préalablement régler "Affichage Miniature Historique Tâches" sur "Oui" dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus d'informations, consultez le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. Référence - Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés. - Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles. [Liste Comm.] Affiche la liste des tâches d'émission numérisation et fax (envoyées/reçues). Vous pouvez imprimer le Rapport d'activité, le Rapport d'émission et le Rapport de réception dans les écrans Liste respectifs. [Détail] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier le résultat, les détails d'erreur, la source d'enregistrement/le nom utilisateur, le nom de fichier, le type de destination, la destination, l'heure d'enregistrement, la communication, le nombre de pages d'original et les infos sur serveur externe, concernant la tâche sélectionnée. • Les informations sur le serveur externe disponibles en appuyant sur la touche [Info.] s'affichent uniquement en cas d'utilisation de l'Authentification Serveur Externe. • [Type] ne s'affiche que si la destination est un télécopieur, Fax Internet ou Fax adresse IP. [Image Numérisée] Sélectionnez la tâche pour afficher l'image numérisée. Élément Description Éléments de la liste No. : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière est mise dans la file. Nom utili. : Affiche ou le nom d'utilisateur/nom de compte ou le nom d'utilisateur/ nom de compte de l'utilisateur qui a enregistré le document. État : Affiche l'état de la tâche (Réception en cours/Composition en cours (Réception en relève)/En file/Impression en cours/Impress Stoppée/Erreur d'impression/Enregistr. mémoire en cours/Suppression en cours). Nom Document : Affiche le nom le nom du document enregistré ou reçu. Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente. Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original reçues. [ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches pour faire apparaître les autres tâches. [L1][L2] Ces touches apparaissent lorsque deux Kit Fax sont installés. Appuyez sur l'une de ces touches. La liste des tâches de la ligne sélectionnée apparaît. [Supprimer] Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer la tâche sélectionnée. [Recomposer] Sélectionnez une tâche dont l'état est réglé sur "Attente de recomposition" pour procéder à la recomposition du numéro. [Faire suivre] Fait suivre le fax reçu et enregistré dans la mémoire (Réception Mémoire Proxy). Indiquez les destinataires en sélectionnant les destinations enregistrées dans le Carnet d'Adresses ou en saisissant l'adresse directement. [Détail] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier l'état, la source d'enregistrement/le nom utilisateur, le nom de document, le bac de sortie, l'heure d'enregistrement, l'heure de transmission, le nombre de pages d'original ou les infos sur serveur externe concernant la tâche sélectionnée. Pour supprimer une tâche, appuyez sur [Supprimer]. Élément Description 3 Écran tactile 3-12 bizhub 652/552 3.2 Référence - Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés. - Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles. - Pour voir les images reçues, il faut préalablement régler "Affichage Miniature Historique Tâches" sur "Oui" dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus d'informations, consultez le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. Référence - Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés. - Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles. Élément Description Éléments de la liste No. : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière est mise dans la file. Nom utili. : Affiche ou le nom d'utilisateur/nom de compte ou le nom d'utilisateur/ nom de compte de l'utilisateur qui a enregistré le document. Nom Document : Affiche le nom le nom du document enregistré ou reçu. Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente. Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original. Résultat : Affiche le résultat de l'opération (Terminé avec succès/Supprimé à cause d'une erreur/Supprim. par Utilisateur/mode en partie annulé). [ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches pour faire apparaître les autres tâches. [Tâches supprimées]/ [Tâches terminées]/ [Ttes tâches] Appuyez successivement pour afficher le type de tâche. [Liste Comm.] Affiche la liste des tâches d'émission numérisation et fax (envoyées/reçues). Vous pouvez imprimer le Rapport d'activité, le Rapport d'émission et le Rapport de réception dans les écrans Liste respectifs. [Détail] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier le résultat de la tâche, la source d'enregistrement/le nom utilisateur, le nom de fichier, le bac de sortie, l'heure d'enregistrement et le nombre de pages d'original pour la tâche sélectionnée. [Image reçue] Sélectionnez la tâche pour afficher l'image reçue. Élément Description Éléments de la liste No. : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière est mise dans la file. Nom utili. : Affiche ou le nom d'utilisateur/nom de compte ou le nom d'utilisateur/ nom de compte de l'utilisateur qui a enregistré le document. État : Affiche l'état de la tâche (réception, enregistrement dans la mémoire, envoi). Nom Document : Affiche le nom le nom du document enregistré. Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente. Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original. [ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches pour faire apparaître les autres tâches. [Supprimer] Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer la tâche sélectionnée. [Détail] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier l'état, la source d'enregistrement/le nom utilisateur, le nom de document, la Boîte Utilisateur, l'heure d'enregistrement, le nombre de pages d'original ou les infos sur serveur externe concernant la tâche sélectionnée. Pour supprimer une tâche, appuyez sur [Supprimer]. • Les informations sur le serveur externe disponibles en appuyant sur la touche [Info.] s'affichent uniquement en cas d'utilisation de l'Authentification Serveur Externe. bizhub 652/552 3-13 3.2 Écran tactile 3 Référence - Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés. - Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles. - Pour voir les images enregistrées, il faut préalablement régler "Affichage Miniature Historique Tâches" sur "Oui" dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus d'informations, consultez le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. Infos Boîte Affiche les infos boîte correspondant à la boîte sélectionnée. Élément Description Éléments de la liste No. : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière est mise dans la file. Nom utili. : Affiche ou le nom d'utilisateur/nom de compte ou le nom d'utilisateur/ nom de compte de l'utilisateur qui a enregistré le document. Nom Document : Affiche le nom le nom du document enregistré. Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente. Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original. Résultat : Affiche le résultat de l'opération (Terminé avec succès/Supprimé à cause d'une erreur/Supprim. par Utilisateur/mode en partie annulé). [ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches pour faire apparaître les autres tâches. [Tâches supprimées]/ [Tâches terminées]/ [Ttes tâches] Appuyez successivement pour afficher le type de tâche. [Liste Comm.] Affiche la liste des tâches d'émission numérisation et fax (envoyées/reçues). Vous pouvez imprimer le Rapport d'activité, le Rapport d'émission et le Rapport de réception dans les écrans Liste respectifs. [Détail] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier le résultat, les détails d'erreur, la source d'enregistrement/le nom utilisateur, le nom de document, la Boîte Utilisateur, l'heure d'enregistrement, le nombre de pages d'original ou les infos sur serveur externe concernant la tâche sélectionnée. • Les informations sur le serveur externe disponibles en appuyant sur la touche [Info.] s'affichent uniquement en cas d'utilisation de l'Authentification Serveur Externe. [Image enregistrée] Sélectionnez la tâche pour afficher l'image enregistrée. 3 Écran tactile 3-14 bizhub 652/552 3.2 Utilis/Archiv - Détail Appuyez sur [Détail] en bas à gauche de l'écran Utiliser Document pour vérifier l'heure d'enregistrement, le nom utilisateur, le nom du document, le nombre de pages et le numéro de tâche du document sélectionné. Référence - Si vous sélectionnez plusieurs documents, utilisez [ ][ ] pour changer de page. dPour info Pour contrôler l'image d'aperçu, voir page 3-16. Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche Sélectionnez [Env.] ou [Lier EMI] sur l'onglet Env. pour afficher l'écran de saisie des adresses. [Vérif.Régl. Tâche] s'affiche en bas à gauche de l'écran. Référence - Appuyez sur [Vérif. Régl. Tâche] pour vérifier les paramètres suivants : – Vérifier Adresse – Contenu Réglage Document – Paramètres de communication (ne s'affiche pas si Combinaison est activé.) – Réglages E-Mail Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Vérifier Adresse Affiche la liste de destinations enregistrées dans la machine. Référence - Pour ajouter une destination au carnet d'adresses après l'avoir saisie directement, sélectionnez la destination et appuyez sur [Enregistrement Dest.]. - Pour vérifier les informations détaillées, sélectionnez une destination et appuyez sur [Détails]. - Pour supprimer une destination, sélectionnez celle que vous voulez supprimer et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. bizhub 652/552 3-15 3.2 Écran tactile 3 dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une destination dans le carnet d'adresses, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Contenu Réglage Document Permet de consulter la liste des réglages de résolution, de type de fichier et de couleur. Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Réglage communication Permet de contrôler la configuration de la ligne et les paramètres de la méthode de transmission. Appuyez sur [ Verso] ou sur [Suivt ] pour vérifier les paramètres. 3 Écran tactile 3-16 bizhub 652/552 3.2 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Réglages E-mail Vérifiez le nom du document, le sujet, l'adresse d'origine et le corps du message pour envoyer des messages E-mail. Aperçu Vérifiez l'image d'aperçu du document sélectionné avant d'utiliser ou d'archiver les documents. Appuyez sur [Aperçu] pour sélectionner un document. L'image de la première page s'affiche sur le panneau de gauche. Référence - S'il s'agit d'un document de plusieurs pages, seule l'image de la première page peut être affichée. Aperçu Appuyez sur [Détail] Pour agrandir l'aperçu de l'image. Agrandissez l'image du document pour vérifier les détails. L'image peut être agrandie 2 fois, 4 fois ou 8 fois. Pour voir la partie voulue de l'image agrandie, utilisez les barres de défilement à droite et en bas de l'image. bizhub 652/552 3-17 3.2 Écran tactile 3 Aperçu (Impression/Combinaison) Permet d'obtenir un aperçu de la page du résultat d'impression en appuyant sur [Aperçu] - [Détail] sur le volet de gauche si vous avez sélectionné [Imprimer] ou [Combinaison]. Référence - S'il s'agit d'un document de plusieurs pages, il est possible d'obtenir un aperçu de toutes les pages. Aperçu - (Env./Lier EMI) Permet d'obtenir un aperçu de la page du résultat d'émission en appuyant sur [Aperçu] - [Détail] sur le volet de gauche si vous avez sélectionné [Env.] ou [Lier EMI]. Élément Description [ Aperçu Page]/ [Page suiv. ] Si le document enregistré contient plusieurs pages, utilisez ces touches pour faire défiler les pages. [Zoom] Agrandissez l'image du document pour vérifier les détails. L'image peut être agrandie 2 fois, 4 fois ou 8 fois. Pour voir la partie voulue de l'image agrandie, utilisez les barres de défilement à droite et en bas de l'image. [Pivoter Image] : pivote à 180° la page actuellement affichée pour afficher l'image. [Pivoter pages] : sélectionner si le document enregistré comporte plusieurs pages. • Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs images sur la page à pivoter. • [Page impaire] : sélectionnez des images sur les pages aux numéros impairs. • [Page paire] : sélectionnez des images sur les pages aux numéros pairs. • [Sélectionner tout] : sélectionnez des images sur toutes les pages. • [Angle de rotation] : cliquez sur [180°] pour pivoter une page. [Voir Finition] Affiche les réglages spécifiés sous forme d'icônes et de descriptions sur l'image d'aperçu. Annuler [Voir Finition] pour effacer les icônes et texte de sorte que seule l'image apparaisse à l'écran. 3 Écran tactile 3-18 bizhub 652/552 3.2 Référence - Si vous sélectionnez [Reliure EM], la fonction Supprimer Page devient indisponible. - Si vous sélectionnez [Envoyer] pour plusieurs documents, les fonctions de rotation et de suppression de pages deviennent indisponibles. Élément Description [Lecture] Affiche un aperçu des opérations Émission E-mail/PC (FTP)/Émission fichier (SMB)/Émission fichier (WebDAV). [Fax] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'aperçu pour les opérations Fax G3, Fax Adresse IP ou Fax Internet opérations. [ Aperçu Page] / [Page suiv. ] Si le document enregistré contient plusieurs pages, utilisez ces touches pour faire défiler les pages. [Zoom] Agrandissez l'image du document pour vérifier les détails. L'image peut être agrandie 2 fois, 4 fois ou 8 fois. Pour voir la partie voulue de l'image agrandie, utilisez les barres de défilement à droite et en bas de l'image. [Pivoter Image] Si [Numériser] est sélectionné dans [Aperçu] : pivote à 90° la page dans le sens contraire des aiguilles d'une montre pour afficher l'image. : pivote à 90° la page dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre pour afficher l'image. [Pivoter pages] : sélectionner si le document enregistré comporte plusieurs pages. • Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs images sur la page à pivoter. • [Page impaire] : sélectionnez des images sur les pages aux numéros impairs. • [Page paire] : sélectionnez des images sur les pages aux numéros pairs. • [Sélectionner tout] : sélectionnez des images sur toutes les pages. • [Angle de rotation] : sélectionnez [90° gauche], [90° droite] ou [180°] comme angle de rotation. Lorsque la destination est un fax, une image est envoyée à 180 degrés si [90° gauche] est sélectionné dans [Angle de Rotation] et à 0° si [90° droite] est sélectionné. Si TIFF ou JPEG est sélectionné comme format de fichier pour lire un original long, il n'est pas possible de spécifier le mode de rotation. Lorsque [Fax] est sélectionné dans [Aperçu] Une image de page de finition s'affiche en noir et blanc. : pivote à 180° la page actuellement affichée pour afficher l'image. [Pivoter pages] : sélectionner si le document enregistré comporte plusieurs pages. • Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs images sur la page à pivoter. • [Page impaire] : sélectionnez des images sur les pages aux numéros impairs. • [Page paire] : sélectionnez des images sur les pages aux numéros pairs. • [Sélectionner tout] : sélectionnez des images sur toutes les pages. • [Angle de rotation] : cliquez sur [180°] pour pivoter une page. [Suppr. page] S'affiche quand le document enregistré comporte plusieurs pages alors que [Envoyer] est sélectionné. Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs images sur la page à supprimer. [Pg impaire] : sélectionnez des images sur les pages aux numéros impairs pour les supprimer. [Pg paire] : sélectionnez des images sur les pages aux numéros pairs pour les supprimer. Il n'est pas possible de supprimer toutes les pages. [Voir Finition] Permet de voir l'image de finition telle qu'elle est déterminée par l'application des réglages spécifiés. Si vous annulez [Voir Finition], seule l'image apparaît à l'écran. 4 Flux d'opérations Boîte bizhub 652/552 4-3 4.1 Enregistrer des documents dans des boîtes 4 4 Flux d'opérations Boîte 4.1 Enregistrer des documents dans des boîtes Cette section décrit les étapes pour enregistrer des documents dans les boîtes Public. Appuyez sur la touche Boite sur le panneau de contrôle Sélectionnez la boîte désirée et appuyez sur [Enreg. doc.] Configurez le nom du document (p. 6-5), les réglages de numérisation (p. 6-6) et les réglages de l'original (p. 6-19) 4 Enregistrer des documents dans des boîtes 4-4 bizhub 652/552 4.1 Référence - Lors de l'enregistrement d'un original avec un mot de passe intégré, l'écran de saisie du mot de passe s'affiche. Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK] pour lancer l'enregistrement. - Vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer un original avec pare-copie intégré. Chargez l'original Appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle bizhub 652/552 4-5 4.2 Impression de documents depuis une boîte 4 4.2 Impression de documents depuis une boîte Cette section décrit les étapes pour imprimer des documents enregistrés dans les boîtes Public. Appuyez sur la touche Boite sur le panneau de contrôle Sélectionnez la boîte désirée et appuyez sur [Utilis/Archiv] Sélectionnez l'onglet [Impression] Sélectionnez les documents 4 Impression de documents depuis une boîte 4-6 bizhub 652/552 4.2 Si vous avez sélectionné un seul document, appuyez sur [Imprimer] (p. 7-5) En cas de sélection de plusieurs documents et de leur impression avec des fonctions supplémentaires, appuyez sur [Combinaison] (p. 7-6) Configurez l'ordre d'impression (ordre de reliure) (p. 7-7) Configurez les réglages élémentaires et les réglages d'application (p. 7-9, p. 7-16) Configurez les réglages élémentaires et les réglages d'application (p. 7-9, p. 7-16) Pour confirmer le contenu, affichez l'aperçu (p. 3-17) bizhub 652/552 4-7 4.2 Impression de documents depuis une boîte 4 Appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle 4 Envoi de documents depuis une boîte 4-8 bizhub 652/552 4.3 4.3 Envoi de documents depuis une boîte Cette section décrit les étapes pour envoyer des documents enregistrés dans les boîtes Public. Appuyez sur la touche Boite sur le panneau de contrôle Sélectionnez la boîte désirée et appuyez sur [Utilis/Archiv] Sélectionnez l'onglet [Env.] Sélectionnez les documents bizhub 652/552 4-9 4.3 Envoi de documents depuis une boîte 4 Si vous avez sélectionné un seul document, appuyez sur [Envoyer]. (p. 7-33) En cas de sélection de plusieurs documents et de spécification du type de fichier ou d'un tampon, appuyez sur [Lier EMI] (p. 7-33) Configurez l'ordre d'émission (ordre de reliure) (p. 7-7) Spécifiez la destination My Address Book Saisie directe Historique des tâches (l'historique des tâches de fax, de fax Internet ou de fax d'adresse IP ne s'affiche pas lorsque Lier EMI est sélectionné) Recherche Adresse Spécifiez aussi un programme Numérisation/Fax. Pour plus de détails sur les programmes Numérisation/ Fax, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 4 Envoi de documents depuis une boîte 4-10 bizhub 652/552 4.3 Configurez les réglages document, communication et application (p. 7-47) Configurez les réglages document, communication et application (p. 7-47) Pour confirmer le contenu, affichez l'aperçu (p. 3-17) Appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle bizhub 652/552 4-11 4.4 Enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe 4 4.4 Enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe Cette section décrit les étapes pour enregistrer les images numérisées dans la mémoire externe. Appuyez sur Boite sur le panneau de contrôle pendant que la mémoire externe est connectée à la machine Connectez la mémoire externe à la machine et appuyez sur [Enregistrer un document dans la mémoire externe.] Appuyer sur [Enreg. doc.] Appuyez sur [Boîte Utilis.] Sélectionnez l'onglet [Système]. Appuyez sur [Mémoire externe] puis sur [Valider] 4 Enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe 4-12 bizhub 652/552 4.4 Référence - Vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer de document portant un nom contenant les caractères suivants : \ / : * ? < > | - Lors de l'enregistrement d'un original avec un Nom utilisat. intégré, l'écran de saisie du mot de passe s'affiche. Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK] pour lancer l'enregistrement. - Vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer un original avec pare-copie intégré. - En sortie d'usine de la machine, la fonction permettant d'enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe est réglé sur ARRET (pas d'enregistrement). De plus, elle est réglée sur Arrêt (pas d'enregistrement) par les réglages des fonctions utilisateur lorsque l'authentification utilisateur est activée. Pour enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe, changez le réglage pour vous permettre d'enregistrer des documents dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-22. Configurez le nom du document (p. 6-5), les réglages de numérisation (p. 6-6) et les réglages de l'original (p. 6-19) Chargez l'original Appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle bizhub 652/552 4-13 4.5 Enregistrer un document de la mémoire externe vers une Boîte 4 4.5 Enregistrer un document de la mémoire externe vers une Boîte Cette section décrit les étapes d'enregistrement dans une boîte utilisateur d'un document archivé en mémoire externe. Appuyez sur Boite sur le panneau de contrôle pendant que la mémoire externe est connectée à la machine Connectez la mémoire externe à la machine et appuyez sur [Enregistrer un document conenu dans la mémoire externe vers une Boîte.] Sélectionnez l'onglet [Système]. Appuyez sur [Mémoire externe] puis sur [Utilis/Archiv] Appuyez sur l'onglet [Réglages Archivage] Sélectionnez un document et appuyez ensuite sur [Enreg. ds Bte Util] 4 Enregistrer un document de la mémoire externe vers une Boîte 4-14 bizhub 652/552 4.5 Référence - La fonction permettant d'enregistrer des documents dans une mémoire externe a été réglée en usine sur Arrêt (pas d'enregistrement). De plus, elle est réglée sur Arrêt (pas d'enregistrement) par les réglages des fonctions utilisateur lorsque l'authentification utilisateur est activée. Pour enregistrer un document de la mémoire externe vers une Boîte utilisateur, changez le réglage pour vous permettre d'enregistrer des documents dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-22. Spécifiez la Boîte utilisateur et le nom du document (p. 7-101) Appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle bizhub 652/552 4-15 4.6 Impression d'un document depuis une mémoire externe 4 4.6 Impression d'un document depuis une mémoire externe Cette section décrit les étapes pour imprimer des documents enregistrés dans la mémoire externe. Appuyez sur Boite sur le panneau de contrôle pendant que la mémoire externe est connectée à la machine Connectez la mémoire externe à la machine et appuyez sur [Imprimer un document à partir de la mémoire externe.] Sélectionnez l'onglet [Système] et appuyez ensuite sur [Mémoire externe] Appuyez sur [Utilis/Archiv] Sélectionnez un fichier et appuyez sur [Imprimer] (p. 7-98) 4 Impression d'un document depuis une mémoire externe 4-16 bizhub 652/552 4.6 Référence - La fonction permettant d'enregistrer des documents dans une mémoire externe a été réglée en usine sur Arrêt (pas d'enregistrement). De plus, elle est réglée sur Arrêt (pas d'enregistrement) par les réglages des fonctions utilisateur lorsque l'authentification utilisateur est activée. Pour enregistrer un document de la mémoire externe vers une Boîte utilisateur, changez le réglage pour vous permettre d'enregistrer des documents dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-22. Configurez les réglages d'impression (p. 7-99) Appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle bizhub 652/552 4-17 4.7 Archiver des documents dans une boîte 4 4.7 Archiver des documents dans une boîte Cette section décrit les étapes pour archiver des documents enregistrés dans les boîtes Public. Appuyez sur la touche Boite sur le panneau de contrôle Sélectionnez la boîte désirée et appuyez sur [Utilis/Archiv] Sélectionnez l'onglet [Réglages Archivage] Sélectionnez les documents, puis une fonction (p. 7-63) 4 Archiver des documents dans une boîte 4-18 bizhub 652/552 4.7 dPour info Pour supprimer les documents, voir page 7-64. Pour renommer les documents, voir page 7-64. Pour déplacer les documents dans d'autre boîtes, voir page 7-64. Pour copier les documents dans d'autre boîtes, voir page 7-65. Pour enregistrer un document dans la mémoire externe, voir page 7-65. Pour vérifier les informations relatives aux documents ou afficher un aperçu des documents, voir page 7-67. bizhub 652/552 4-19 4.8 Impression d'un document enregistré dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique 4 4.8 Impression d'un document enregistré dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique Cette section décrit les étapes pour imprimer un document enregistré dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique. Appuyez sur la touche Boite sur le panneau de contrôle Sélectionnez l'onglet [Système]. Appuyez sur [Mobile/PDA] puis sur [Utilis/Archiv] Appuyez sur [Impression] Pour vérifier les préférences d'impression, appuyez sur [Vérif. Régl. Impress.] 4 Impression d'un document enregistré dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda 4-20 bizhub 652/552 4.8 dPour info Pour configurer les réglages d'impression depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique, voir page 8-12. Entrez le code PIN affiché sur le panneau de contrôle sur le cellulaire ou l'agenda électronique (p. 7-102) bizhub 652/552 4-21 4.9 Enregistrement dans une Boîte utilisateur d'un document archivé dans un téléphone cellulaire ou 4 4.9 Enregistrement dans une Boîte utilisateur d'un document archivé dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique Cette section décrit les étapes d'enregistrement dans une Boîte utilisateur d'un document archivé dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique Appuyez sur la touche Boite sur le panneau de contrôle Sélectionnez l'onglet [Système]. Appuyez sur [Mobile/PDA] puis sur [Utilis/Archiv] Appuyez sur [Enr. ds Bte Util] Sélectionnez la boîte utilisateur voulue et appuyez ensuite sur [Valider] 4 Enregistrement dans une Boîte utilisateur d'un document archivé dans un téléphone 4-22 bizhub 652/552 4.9 Entrez le code PIN affiché sur le panneau de contrôle sur le cellulaire ou l'agenda électronique (p. 7-103) bizhub 652/552 4-23 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte Cette section décrit la configuration et les réglages des fonctions disponibles en mode Boîte. 4.10.1 Enregistrer document Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe Voici l'architecture des menus permettant d'enregistrer des documents dans des boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe. Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau [Boîte Utilis.] (p. 6-5) [Nom Document] (p. 6-5) [Param. Numéris.] [Type original] (p. 6-6) [Recto/Recto-Vers] (p. 6-7) [Définition] (p. 6-7) [Type Fichier] [Type Fichier] (p. 6-8) [Cryptage] (p. 6-9) [PDF Contours] (p. 6-11) [Réglage Numérisa.] (p. 6-11) [Contraste] (p. 6-12) [Couleur] (p. 6-12) [Format numérisation] (p. 6-13) [Réglage image] [Suppression Fond] (p. 6-14) [Netteté] (p. 6-15) [Applications] [Effacem Bords] (p. 6-15) [Page par page] (p. 6-16) [Numér. Séparée] (p. 6-18) [Réglages Original] [Original spécial] (p. 6-19) [Orig. Mixtes] [Original plié en Z] [Original long] [Spécifier direction] [Orientation Original] (p. 6-19) [Position Reliure] (p. 6-20) [Auto] [Haut] [Gauche] [Dépoussiérer] (p. 6-20) 4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4-24 bizhub 652/552 4.10 Système Voici l'architecture des menus permettant d'enregistrer des documents dans des boîtes Système. Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau [Boîte Annotation] [Boîte Utilis.] (p. 6-5) [Nom Document] (p. 6-5) [Param. Numéris.] [Type original] (p. 6-6) [Recto/Recto-Vers] (p. 6-7) [Définition] (p. 6-7) [Type Fichier] [Type Fichier] (p. 6-8) [Cryptage] (p. 6-9) [PDF Contours] (p. 6-11) [Réglage Numérisa.] (p. 6-11) [Contraste] (p. 6-12) [Couleur] (p. 6-12) [Format numérisation] (p. 6-13) [Réglage image] [Suppression Fond] (p. 6-14) [Netteté] (p. 6-15) [Applications] [Effacem Bords] (p. 6-15) [Page par page] (p. 6-16) [Numér. Séparée] (p. 6-18) [Réglages Original] [Original spécial] (p. 6-19) [Orig. Mixtes] [Original plié en Z] [Original long] [Spécifier direction] [Orientation Original] (p. 6-19) [Position Reliure] (p. 6-20) [Dépoussiérer] (p. 6-20) bizhub 652/552 4-25 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4 [Mémoire externe] [Boîte Utilis.] (p. 6-5) [Nom Document] (p. 6-5) [Param. Numéris.] [Type original] (p. 6-6) [Recto/Recto-Vers] (p. 6-7) [Définition] (p. 6-7) [Type Fichier] [Type Fichier] (p. 6-8) [Cryptage] (p. 6-9) [PDF Contours] (p. 6-11) [Réglage Numérisa.] (p. 6-11) [Contraste] (p. 6-12) [Couleur] (p. 6-12) [Format numérisation] (p. 6-13) [Réglage image] [Suppression Fond] (p. 6-14) [Netteté] (p. 6-15) [Applications] [Effacem Bords] (p. 6-15) [Page par page] (p. 6-16) [Numér. Séparée] (p. 6-18) [Réglages Original] [Original spécial] (p. 6-19) [Orig. Mixtes] [Original plié en Z] [Original long] [Spécifier direction] [Orientation Original] (p. 6-19) [Position Reliure] (p. 6-20) [Dépoussiérer] (p. 6-20) [Mobile/PDA] [Enr. ds Bte Util] (p. 7-101) Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau 4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4-26 bizhub 652/552 4.10 4.10.2 Utilis/Archiv Impression (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) Voici l'architecture des menus pour utiliser ou archiver des documents dans des boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe et pour configurer les réglages d'impression. Voici la description des éléments accessibles grâce aux touches encadrées. Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau [Impression] [Copies] (p. 7-9) [Impression] (p. 7-9) [Recto] [Recto-Verso] [Finition] (p. 7-10) [Tri] (p. 7-10) [Groupe] (p. 7-10) [Décalé] (p. 7-10) [Agraf.] (p. 7-10) [Perfo.] (p. 7-11) [Pli/Reliure] (p. 7-12) [Pliage en 2] [Agraf. Centre+Pliage] [Pliage en 3] [Pliage Z] [Combinaison] (p. 7-13) [Combinais. pages] [Ordre de combinais.] [Zoom] (p. 7-14) [Réglage existant] [Manuel] [Tous formats] [Minimal] [Zoom fixe] [Définir Taux Zoom] [Marge page] (p. 7-16) [Position Marge] [Ajuster valeur] [Décalage Image] (p. 7-16) [Décalage vertical] [Décalage horizontal] [Changer Décalage verso] bizhub 652/552 4-27 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4 [Insér. Feuil/Couv/ Chapitre] [Couverture] (p. 7-17) [Couvert. Face] [Couverture Dos] [Insertion Feuille] (p. 7-19) [Insérer Papier] [Type Encart] [Chapitres] (p. 7-20) [Papier Chapitre] [Tampon/ Surimpression] (p. 7-20) [Date/Heure] (p. 7-21) [Type date] [Type heure] [Pages] [Position impress.] [Détails Texte] [Numéro Page] (p. 7-22) [Numéro Première Page] [Type Numéro Page] [N° 1er chapitre] [Param. Insert Feuille] (p. 7-23) [Position impress.] [Détails Texte] [Tampon] (p. 7-23) [Type Tampon/ Tampons prédéfinis] [Pages] [Taille Texte] [Position impress.] [Sécurité Copie] [Protection Copie] (p. 7-24) [Pare-copie] (p. 7-26) [Copie Prot. MdP] (p. 7-27) [Tampon répétitif] (p. 7-28) [Type Tampon répétitif] (p. 7-29) [Paramètres Détaillés] (p. 7-29) [Position] (p. 7-29) [En-tête/Pied de page] (p. 7-30) [Rappeler En-tête/ Pied de page] [Contrôle] [Surimpression enregistrée] (p. 7-31) [Rappel image surimpression] [Pages] Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau 4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4-28 bizhub 652/552 4.10 [Combinaison] [Copies] (p. 7-9) [Impression] (p. 7-9) [Recto] [Recto-Verso] [Finition] (p. 7-10) [Décalé] (p. 7-10) [Agraf.] (p. 7-10) [Perfo.] (p. 7-11) [Pli/Reliure] (p. 7-12) [Pliage en 2] [Agraf. Centre+ Pliage] [Pliage en 3] [Pliage Z] [Impression continue] (p. 7-15) [Marge page] (p. 7-16) [Position Marge] [Ajuster valeur] [Décalage Image] (p. 7-16) [Décalage vertical] [Décalage horizontal] [Changer Décalage verso] [Tampon/ Surimpression] (p. 7-20) [Date/Heure] (p. 7-21) [Type date] [Type heure] [Pages] [Position Impress.] [Détails Texte] [Numéro Page] (p. 7-22) [Numéro Première Page] [Type Numéro Page] [N° 1er chapitre] [Position Impress.] [Détails Texte] [Tampon] (p. 7-23) [Type Tampon/ Tampons prédéfinis] [Pages] [Taille Texte] [Position Impress.] [Sécurité Copie] (p. 7-24) [Protection Copie] (p. 7-24) [Pare-copie] (p. 7-26) [Copie Prot. MdP] (p. 7-27) [Tampon répétitif] (p. 7-28) [Type Tampon répétitif] (p. 7-29) [Paramètres Détaillés] (p. 7-29) [Position] (p. 7-29) Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau bizhub 652/552 4-29 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4 Envoyer (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) Voici l'architecture du menu Utilis/Archiv - Envoyer pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe. Voici la description des éléments accessibles grâce aux touches encadrées. [En-tête/Pied de page] (p. 7-30) [Rappeler En-tête/ Pied de page] [Contrôle] [Surimpression enregistrée] (p. 7-31) [Rappel image surimpression] [Pages] [Détails Document] [Aperçu] (p. 7-68) Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau [Envoyer] [My Address Book] [Recher simple] (p. 7-37) [Saisie directe] [Fax] (p. 7-40) [Numéro de Fax] [E-mail] (p. 7-40) [FAX Internet] (p. 7-41) [Capacités RÉC (Destinataire)] (p. 7-41) [Fax Adr. IP] (p. 7-42) [Destinataire] [Numéro de port] [Type Destination Machine] [PC (SMB)] (p. 7-42) [Nom Serveur] [Chemin fichier] [Nom utilisat.] [Code d’acces] [Référence] [FTP] (p. 7-43) [Nom Serveur] [Chemin fichier] [Nom utilisat.] [Code d’acces] [Réglages détaillés] 4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4-30 bizhub 652/552 4.10 [WebDAV] (p. 7-44) [Nom Serveur] [Chemin fichier] [Nom utilisat.] [Code d’accès] [Réglages détaillés] [Vérif. histor] (p. 7-45) [Rech. Adresse] (p. 7-45) [Recher simple] (p. 7-46) [Recherch Avancée] (p. 7-46) [Réglages Document] [Définition] (p. 7-47) [Type Fichier] (p. 7-48) [Type Fichier] (p. 7-48) [Cryptage] (p. 7-48) [Surimpression Tampon] (p. 7-50) [PDF Contours] (p. 7-51) [Réglage Numérisa.] (p. 7-51) [Couleur] (p. 7-52) [Utiliser réglage couleur existant] [Couleurs] [Niv.Gris] [Noir] [Réglage communication] [Réglages Ligne] (p. 7-53) [EMI Outremer] (p. 7-53) [ECM OFF] (p. 7-53) [V. 34 OFF] (p. 7-53) [Vérif.Dest. & envoyer] (p. 7-54) [Sélect. ligne] (p. 7-54) [Réglages E-Mail] (p. 7-54) [Nom Document] (p. 7-54) [Sujet] (p. 7-55) [De] (p. 7-55) [Corps txte] (p. 7-56) [Paramètres URL Dest.] (p. 7-56) [My Address Book] [Recherche détaillée] [Saisie directe] [Réglages Méthod Comm.] (p. 7-58) [Émission différée] (p. 7-58) [Mot Passe Emission] (p. 7-59) [Fonction TX Code F] (p. 7-59) Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau bizhub 652/552 4-31 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4 [Cryptage E-Mail] (p. 7-60) [Signature numérique] (p. 7-60) [Réglages En-tête Fax] (p. 7-60) [Applications] [Tampon/ Surimpression] [Date/Heure] (p. 7-21) [Numéro Page] (p. 7-22) [Tampon] (p. 7-61) [En-tête/Pied de page] (p. 7-30) [Impress. par page] (p. 7-62) [Copies] [Recto/ Recto-Verso] [Agrafage] [Lier EMI] [My Address Book] [Recher simple] (p. 7-37) [Saisie directe] [E-mail] (p. 7-40) [PC (SMB)] (p. 7-42) [Nom Serveur] [Chemin fichier] [Nom utilisat.] [Code d’accès] [Référence] [FTP] (p. 7-43) [Nom Serveur] [Chemin fichier] [Nom utilisat.] [Code d’accès] [Réglages détaillés] [WebDAV] (p. 7-44) [Nom Serveur] [Chemin fichier] [Nom d'utilisateur] [Code d’accès] [Réglages détaillés] [Vérif. histor] (p. 7-45) [Rech. Adresse] (p. 7-45) [Recher simple] (p. 7-46) [Recherch Avancée] (p. 7-46) [Réglages Document] [Type Fichier] (p. 7-48) [Type Fichier] (p. 7-48) [Cryptage] (p. 7-48) [Surimpression Tampon] (p. 7-50) [PDF Contours] (p. 7-51) [Réglage Numérisa.] (p. 7-51) Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau 4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4-32 bizhub 652/552 4.10 Réglages Archivage (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) Voici l'architecture du menu Utilis/Archiv - Réglages Archivage pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe. Voici la description des éléments accessibles grâce aux touches encadrées. [Réglage communication] [Réglages E-Mail] (p. 7-54) [Nom Document] (p. 7-54) [Sujet] (p. 7-55) [De] (p. 7-55) [Corps txte] (p. 7-56) [Paramètres URL Dest.] (p. 7-56) [My Address Book] [Recherche détaillée] [Saisie directe] [Cryptage E-Mail] (p. 7-60) [Signature numérique] (p. 7-60) [Applications] [Tampon/ Surimpression] [Date/Heure] (p. 7-21) [Numéro Page] (p. 7-22) [Tampon] (p. 7-61) [En-tête/Pied de page] (p. 7-30) [Impress. par page] (p. 7-62) [Copies] [Recto/ Recto-Verso] [Agrafage] [Détails Document] [Aperçu] (p. 7-68) Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau [Supprimer] (p. 7-64) [Modif. nom] (p. 7-64) [Déplacer] (p. 7-64) [Copie] (p. 7-65) bizhub 652/552 4-33 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4 Application (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) Voici l'architecture du menu Utilis/Archiv - Application pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe. Voici la description des éléments accessibles grâce aux touches encadrées. [Enregistrer dans Mémoire externe] (p. 7-65) [Détails Document] [Aperçu] (p. 7-68) Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau [Modifier document] [Suppr. Page] (p. 7-70) [Pivoter Page] (p. 7-71) [Déplacer Page] (p. 7-73) [Aperçu] (p. 7-75) [Aperçu/Définir Plage] (p. 7-74) [Enregistrer la surimpression] (p. 7-76) [Image Surimpression] [Modifier] [Nouveau] (p. 7-77) [Écraser] (p. 7-78) [Paramètres Détaillés] (p. 7-79) [Contraste] [Détails Document] [Aperçu] 4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4-34 bizhub 652/552 4.10 Système Voici l'architecture du menu Utilis/Archiv pour les boîtes Système. Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau [Bulletin Board Boîte Utilis.] (p. 7-80) [Émis. en relève Boîte Utilis.] (p. 7-81) [Boîte utilisateur Document Sécurisé] [Impression] - [Impression] [Copies] (p. 7-83) [Impression] (p. 7-83) [Recto] [Recto-Verso] [Finition] (p. 7-10) [Assemblé] [Groupe] [Décalage] [Agraf.] [Perfor.] [Pli/Reliure] (p. 7-12) [Combinaison] (p. 7-13) [Combinais. pages] [Ordre de combinais.] [Zoom] (p. 7-14) [Réglage existant] [Manuel] [Tous formats] [Minimal] [Zoom fixe] [Définir Taux Zoom] [Marge page] (p. 7-16) [Position Marge] [Ajuster valeur] [Décalage Image] [Insér.Feuil/ Couv./Chapitre] (p. 7-17) [Paramètres] [Insertion Feuille] [Chapitres] bizhub 652/552 4-35 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4 [Tampon/ Surimpression] (p. 7-20) [Date/Heure] [Numéro de page] [Tampon] [Sécurité Copie] [Tampon répétitif] [Tête/Pied de page] [Surimpression enregistrée] [Réglages Archivage] (p. 7-84) [Supprimer] [Modif. Nom] [Détails Document] [Aperçu] (p. 7-68) [Boîte utilisateur réception mémoire obligatoire] [Impression] (p. 7-85) [Réglages Archivage] (p. 7-85) [Supprimer] [Modif. Nom] [Détails Document] [Aperçu] (p. 7-68) [Boîte Annotation] [Impression] - [Impression] [Copies] (p. 7-9) [Impression] (p. 7-9) [Recto] [Recto-Verso] [Finition] (p. 7-10) [Assemblé] [Groupe] [Décalage] [Agraf] [Perfor] [Pli/Reliure] (p. 7-12) [Combinaison] (p. 7-13) [Combinais. pages] [Ordre de combinais.] [Zoom] (p. 7-14) [Réglage existant] [Manuel] [Tous formats] [Minimal] [Zoom fixe] [Définir Taux Zoom] [Marge page] (p. 7-16) [Position Marge] [Ajuster valeur] [Décalage Image] Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau 4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4-36 bizhub 652/552 4.10 [Insér. Feuil/ Couv/Chapitre] [Couverture] (p. 7-17) [Insertion Feuille] (p. 7-19) [Chapitres] (p. 7-20) [Tampon/ Surimpression] (p. 7-20) [Date/Heure] (p. 7-21) [Numéro Page] (p. 7-22) [Tampon] (p. 7-23) [Sécurité Copie] (p. 7-24) [Tampon répétitif] (p. 7-28) [Surimpression enregistrée] (p. 7-31) [Envoyer] - [Env.] [Carnet Adresses] (p. 7-37) [Saisie directe] [E-mail] (p. 7-40) [PC (SMB)] (p. 7-42) [FTP] (p. 7-43) [WebDAV] (p. 7-44) [Vérif. histor] (p. 7-45) [Rech. Adresse] (p. 7-45) [Recher simple] (p. 7-46) [Recherch Avancée] (p. 7-46) [Réglages Document] [Définition] (p. 7-47) [Type Fichier] (p. 7-48) [Couleur] (p. 7-52) [Réglage communication] [Réglages E-Mail] (p. 7-54) [Paramètres URL Dest.] (p. 7-56) [Cryptage E-Mail] (p. 7-60) [Signature numérique] (p. 7-60) [Applications] [Tampon/Surimpression] (p. 7-61) [Impress. par page] (p. 7-62) [Changer Texte] (p. 7-89) [Réglages Archivage] (p. 7-91) [Supprimer] [Modif. Nom] [Applications] [Enregistrer la surimpression] (p. 7-76) [Détails Document] [Aperçu] (p. 7-68) Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau bizhub 652/552 4-37 4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4 [Boîte Retransmission Fax] [Impression] [Epreuve] (p. 7-92) [Envoyer] [Fax] (p. 7-92) [Réglages Archivage] [Supprimer] (p. 7-93) [Détails Document] [Aperçu] [Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe] [Impr/Enreg] [Impr/Enreg] (p. 7-94) [Réglages Archivage] [Supprimer] (p. 7-94) [Détails Document] [Bte Ut. ID & Impr.] [Impression] [Impression] (p. 7-95) [Réglages Archivage] [Supprimer] (p. 7-96) [Détails Document] [Aperçu] (p. 7-68) [Mémoire externe] [Impression] - [Impression] [Copies] (p. 7-99) [Impression] (p. 7-99) [Recto] [Recto-Verso] [Position Reliure] (p. 7-99) [Haut] [Gauche] [A droite] [Finition] (p. 7-10) [Assemblé] [Groupe] [Décalage] [Agraf] [Perfor] [Pli/Reliure] [Papier] (p. 7-100) [Tampon/ Surimpression] [Date/Heure] (p. 7-21) [Numéro Page] (p. 7-22) [Tampon] (p. 7-23) [Sécurité Copie] (p. 7-24) [Tampon répétitif] (p. 7-28) [Réglages Archivage] [Enreg. ds Bte Util.] [Boîte utilisateur] [Nom Document] [Détails Document] [Mobile/PDA] [Impression] [Vérifier Réglages Impression] (p. 7-102) [Enr. ds Bte Util] (p. 7-103) Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau 4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4-38 bizhub 652/552 4.10 5 Pour accéder au mode Boîte bizhub 652/552 5-3 5.1 Pour accéder au mode Boîte 5 5 Pour accéder au mode Boîte 5.1 Pour accéder au mode Boîte Avant de lancer cette procédure, il convient d'allumer cette machine. Une fois que cette machine est disponible pour copier des données, l'écran Fonctions de base apparaît. Pour accéder au mode Boîte, appuyez sur la touche Boite sur le panneau de contrôle. La fenêtre du mode Boîte apparaît. Appuyez légèrement sur la touche désirée dans la fenêtre pour afficher les menus ou les fonctions. Puis sélectionnez le menu ou la fonction voulue. 5 Menu Opération Boîte 5-4 bizhub 652/552 5.2 5.2 Menu Opération Boîte L'accès au mode Boîte vous permet de sélectionner les menus suivants. 5.2.1 Enregistrer document Numérisez l'original chargé dans cette machine et enregistrez-le dans une boîte. Vous pouvez spécifier le nom ou la qualité image d'un original lors de sont enregistrement. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Enregistrer document, voir page 6-4. Pour plus de détails sur la structure du menu Enregistrer document, voir page 4-23. 5.2.2 Utilis/Archiv Imprimez ou envoyez un document enregistré dans une boîte. Lors de l'impression d'un document, vous pouvez spécifier le nombre de jeux ou les marges de page. Lors de l'envoi d'un document, vous pouvez spécifier le type de fichier. Au besoin, vous pouvez renommer ou déplacer un document enregistré dans une boîte ou copier un document dans une autre boîte. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Utilis/Archiv, voir page 7-3. Pour plus de détails sur structure de menu Utilis/Archiv, voir page 4-26. 6 Enregistrer document bizhub 652/552 6-3 6.1 Enreg. doc. - Présentation 6 6 Enregistrer document 6.1 Enreg. doc. - Présentation 6.1.1 Fonctions La fonction Enregistrer document vous permet de spécifier directement une destination Boîte lors de l'enregistrement d'un document en mode Boîte. Avec la fonction Enregistrer document, les documents sont enregistrés de la même manière que pour les données numérisées. Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe Vous pouvez enregistrer un document copié ou numérisé à l'aide de cette machine. Vous pouvez aussi enregistrer un document dont l'instruction d'impression a été émise par un ordinateur connecté au réseau. Certains réglages Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département permettent de limiter l'accès de certains utilisateurs à certaines boîtes Privé ou Groupe. Boîte Annotation Si vous désirez imprimer ou envoyer un document en y faisant figurer la date et l'heure ou l'image du numéro d'archivage, enregistrez le document dans la boîte Annotation. Pour utiliser cette boîte, sélectionnez l'onglet [Système] et appuyez sur [Boîte Annotation]. Mémoire externe Vous pouvez enregistrer directement tous les documents numérisés dans une mémoire externe connectée à cette machine. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vérifiez que la mémoire externe est raccordée au connecteur USB de cette machine, sélectionnez l'onglet [Système] et appuyez sur [Mémoire externe]. Autrement, sur l'écran qui s'affiche quand la mémoire externe est insérée dans le connecteur USB, appuyez sur [Enregistrer un document dans la mémoire externe.]. Référence - Dans les réglages usine, la fonction permettant d'enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe ou d'enregistrer dans une Boîte un document archivé dans la mémoire externe est réglée sur ARRET (pas d'enregistrement). De plus, elle est réglée sur Arrêt (pas d'enregistrement) par les réglages des fonctions utilisateur lorsque l'authentification utilisateur est activée. Pour enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe, changez le réglage pour vous permettre d'enregistrer des documents dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-22. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur la mémoire externe disponible, voir page 7-97. 6 Enreg. doc. - Présentation 6-4 bizhub 652/552 6.1 6.1.2 Fenêtre initiale de la fonction Enregistrer document Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe Sélectionnez l'onglet [Public], [Privé] ou [Groupe] pour afficher la liste des boîtes dans lesquelles vous pouvez enregistrer un document. Spécifiez ensuite la boîte désirée. Système Sélectionnez l'onglet [Système] pour afficher la liste des boîtes dans lesquelles vous pouvez enregistrer un document. Spécifiez ensuite la boîte désirée. Référence - Si vous sélectionnez [Annotation Boîte Utilis.], spécifiez encore la boîte désirée. bizhub 652/552 6-5 6.1 Enreg. doc. - Présentation 6 6.1.3 Fenêtre Enregistrer document Les éléments de réglage disponibles dans l'écran Enregistrer document sont les suivants. Référence - S'il s'agit d'une mémoire externe, il n'est pas possible de changer la boîte de destination. - Pour enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe, changez le réglage pour vous permettre d'enregistrer des documents dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-22. Élément Description [Boîte Utilis.] Pour les boîtes Public, Privé, Groupe et Annotation, vous pouvez changer de boîte de destination pour enregistrer des documents. Pour changer la boîte, appuyez sur [Boîte Utilis.] et sélectionnez une boîte. • Si aucune boîte ne porte le numéro spécifié, une nouvelle boîte Public est automatiquement créée. [Nom Document] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher un clavier permettant d'entrer le nom du document. Entrez le nom du document à l'aide du panneau de contrôle. [Param. Numéris.] Configurez les réglages détaillés pour numériser le document. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-6. [Réglages Original] Configurez les réglages détaillés pour le type d'original et l'orientation de l'original. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-19. 6 Param. Numéris. 6-6 bizhub 652/552 6.2 6.2 Param. Numéris. Appuyez sur [Param. Numéris.] dans l'onglet Enregistrer document pour configurer les réglages de numérisation détaillés. 6.2.1 De base - Type original Sélectionnez le type d'original en fonction du contenu de l'original. Les types d'original disponibles sont les suivants. Si vous sélectionnez [Texte/Photo] ou [Photo], vous pouvez spécifier également le type de photo. Élément Description [Texte] Original constitué de texte seulement. [Texte/Photo] Original constitué à la fois de texte et photos (demi-teinte). [Photo] Original constitué de photos seulement (demi-teinte). [Original Tramé] Original dont l'impression est globalement pâle. [Papier Copié] Original de densité homogène, imprimé par un copieur ou une imprimante. Élément Description [Papier photo] Sélectionnez ce réglage pour une photo imprimée sur du papier photo. [Photo imprimée] Sélectionnez ce réglage pour des photos imprimées, comme dans les livres ou les magazines. bizhub 652/552 6-7 6.2 Param. Numéris. 6 6.2.2 De base - Recto/Recto-Verso Sélectionnez s'il faut numériser une face ou les deux faces de l'original. 6.2.3 De base - Définition Sélectionnez la résolution de la numérisation. Référence - La quantité de données augmente en fonction de la résolution sélectionnée et il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas enregistrer de données dans une mémoire externe. Si vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer de données, diminuez la résolution et réessayez de les enregistrer. Élément Description [Recto] Numérise une face de l'original. [Recto-Verso] Numérise les deux faces de l'original. [Couv + Recto/Verso] Numérise la première page de l'original comme couverture en mode recto seul, puis numérise les pages restantes en mode recto-verso. 6 Param. Numéris. 6-8 bizhub 652/552 6.2 6.2.4 De base - Type Fichier Sélectionnez le type de fichier pour enregistrer les données numérisées. Type Fichier Les types de fichier disponibles sont les suivants. dPour info Vous pouvez spécifier le format de compression lors de l'enregistrement d'un fichier TIFF en couleurs. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. En fonction des réglages Couleur certains formats de fichier ne peuvent pas être sélectionnés. Ci-après figurent les combinaisons de réglages Type de fichier et Couleur disponibles. Référence - Même si vous avez sélectionné le type de fichier lors de l'enregistrement dans une boîte, vous devez spécifier le type de fichier lors du téléchargement des données du document. - Si vous sélectionnez [JPEG], [Séparation Page] est automatiquement sélectionné et réglé sur [1 Chaq. X page(s)] dans Réglage Numérisation. Élément Description [PDF] Enregistre les données au format PDF. [PDF Compact] Fichier PDF davantage compressé. Ce format est utilise pour enregistrer des données numérisées en couleurs. [TIFF] Enregistre les données au format TIFF. [JPEG] Enregistre les données au format JPEG. [XPS] Enregistre les données au format XPS. [XPS Compact] Enregistre les données dans un fichier XPS, davantage compressé. Couleur Auto Couleurs Niveau de gris Noir PDF o o o o Compact PDF o o o - TIFF o o o o JPEG o o o - XPS o o o o Compact XPS o o o - bizhub 652/552 6-9 6.2 Param. Numéris. 6 Cryptage Si le format de fichier [PDF] ou [PDF compact] est sélectionné, vous pouvez spécifier le niveau de cryptage. Référence - L'écran d'aperçu ne permet pas de vérifier le contenu d'un document crypté. Cryptage - Paramètres Détaillés Configurez les réglages de permission détaillés lorsque la permission document est spécifiée sur l'écran Cryptage. Élément Description [Niveau de cryptage] Sélectionnez le niveau de cryptage. [Code d’accès] Entrez le code d'accès nécessaire à l'ouverture des données cryptées (32 caractères max.). Pour confirmation, saisissez deux fois le mot de passe. [Permissions Document] Entrez le mot de passe nécessaire au changement des permissions document (32 caractères max.). Pour confirmation, saisissez deux fois le mot de passe. 6 Param. Numéris. 6-10 bizhub 652/552 6.2 Appuyez sur [Suivt. ] pour configurer en détail les réglages Modifier Permissions. Élément Description [Impression- Autorisée] Indiquez si vous souhaitez autoriser ou interdire l'impression des données. [Basse résolution] apparaît quand Niveau de cryptage est réglé sur [Niveau Élevé]. [Extraire Documents/ Images] Sélectionnez s'il faut permettre ou interdire l'extraction d'images texte. bizhub 652/552 6-11 6.2 Param. Numéris. 6 PDF Contours Configurez cet élément quand [PDF compact] est sélectionné comme type de fichier. Cette fonction procède au traitement des contours des caractères garantissant une image d'affichage lisse. Elle est également disponible lors de la modification de données avec une application telle que Adobe Illustrator. dPour info Cette fonction vous permet de spécifier la précision du traitement des contours lors de la création de données PDF Contours. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Réglage Numérisation Spécifiez s'il faut enregistrer toutes les pages d'un document dans un fichier ou enregistrer chaque page dans un fichier. Référence - Si vous sélectionnez [Séparation Page] lors de l'enregistrement du document dans une boîte, la sélection Séparation Page est mémorisée et le document est enregistré comme fichier [Multi Page]. - La sélection de Séparation Page est activée lorsque les données sont envoyées vers une destination E-Mail, PC (SMB) ou FTP. Élément Description [Modifier Permissions] Sélectionnez le niveau d'autorisation concernant les modifications du document, y compris la signature, l'introduction ou le commentaire de données. Élément Description [Multi Page] Enregistre toutes les données numérisées dans un seul fichier. Cet élément ne peut pas être spécifié en même temps que [JPEG]. [Séparation Page] Scinde les données numérisées pour enregistrer dans un seul fichier chaque nombre de pages spécifié. Entrez au clavier le nombre de pages à enregistrer dans un fichier. [Méthode Fichier Joint E-mail] Spécifier la méthode à utiliser pour joindre un fichier à un E-mail si Séparation Page est sélectionné. • [Tous fich. envoyés comme un (1) e-mail] : joint tous les fichiers à un seul E-mail. • [Un (1) fichier par e-mail] : joint un fichier à un E-mail. 6 Param. Numéris. 6-12 bizhub 652/552 6.2 6.2.5 De base - Contraste Ajuster le contraste du document numérisé. 6.2.6 De base - Couleur Spécifiez s'il faut numériser l'original en couleur ou en noir et blanc. Élément Description [Couleur Auto] Détecte automatiquement la couleur de l'original et effectue la numérisation en respectant le réglage de l'original. [Couleurs] Numérise l'original en couleurs. [Échelle gris] Sélectionnez ce réglage pour des originaux comportant d'importantes demi-teintes, comme des photos noir et blanc. [Noir] Sélectionnez ce réglage pour des originaux comportant des zones noir et blanc bien distinctes comme des dessins au trait. bizhub 652/552 6-13 6.2 Param. Numéris. 6 Certains réglages Couleur peuvent ne pas être disponibles avec le Type Fichier sélectionné. Ci-après figurent les combinaisons de réglages Type de fichier et Couleur disponibles. 6.2.7 Format numérisation Sélectionnez le format du papier de l'original à numériser. Format standard Appuyez sur [Auto] pour détecter automatiquement le format de la première feuille de l'original au moment de la numérisation. Pour numériser l'original avec un format papier prédéfini, sélectionnez ce format. Format Perso Entrez les dimensions d'un format personnalisé lorsque celui-ci est différent des formats standard. Référence - Sens X : entrez une valeur comprise entre 30 et 432mm (2 et 17 pouces). - Sens Y : entrez une valeur de 2 à 11-11/16 pouces (30,0 à 297,0mm). Couleur Auto Couleurs Niveau de gris Noir PDF o o o o Compact PDF o o o - TIFF o o o o JPEG o o o - XPS o o o o Compact XPS o o o - 6 Param. Numéris. 6-14 bizhub 652/552 6.2 Format Photo Sélectionnez le format 3 e 5 ou 2-1/4 e 3-1/4 pour les photographies. 6.2.8 Réglage image Permet de régler la densité du fond ou la netteté du document numérisé. Niveau Suppression Fond Permet de régler la densité de l'original numérisé. Si vous numérisez un original imprimé sur papier couleur, la couleur du fond peut après numérisation donner une image trop sombre. Pour éviter cela, réglez la densité du fond. Sélectionnez la méthode de suppression du fond et spécifiez le niveau. Pour un réglage automatique de la densité, appuyez sur [Auto]. Référence - Pour éviter que les parties foncées du verso ne soient numérisées par transparence comme ombre sur le recto, sélectionnez [Marge perdue]. - Pour numériser un original qui comporte un fond de couleur comme une carte routière, sélectionnez [Réglage Décolor papier]. bizhub 652/552 6-15 6.2 Param. Numéris. 6 Netteté Ce réglage vous permet d'accentuer le contour des caractères ou autres bords du document numérisé. 6.2.9 Applications - Effacem Bords Configurez le réglage permettant d'effacer les bords d'une double-page d'un livre ouvert. Référence - Si vous avez spécifié la largeur du cadre à effacer dans le réglage Effacem Bords de la fonction Page par page, la même valeur est automatiquement définie pour cette fonction [Effacem Bords]. - Pour effacer tous les bords sur une largeur identique, spécifiez une valeur numérique entre 1/16 et 2 pouces (0,1 et 50,0 mm) sous [Bords]. - Pour spécifier individuellement une largeur différente pour le haut, le bas, la droite et la gauche, appuyez sur la touche correspondante et spécifiez une valeur pour le côté choisi. - Pour ne pas effacer les bords, appuyez sur [Aucune]. 6 Param. Numéris. 6-16 bizhub 652/552 6.2 6.2.10 Applications - Page par page Configurez les réglages pour numériser une double page d'un livre ouvert. Les réglages comprennent la méthode de numérisation, les positions de reliure et l'effacement des zones indésirables. Comme format papier de l'original, sélectionnez le format du livre ouvert. Méthode Page par page Sélectionnez la méthode de numérisation. Effacem. livre - Effacem Bords Configurez le réglage permettant d'effacer les bords d'une double-page d'un livre ouvert. Référence - Si vous avez spécifié la largeur du cadre à effacer dans la fonction Effacem Bords, la même valeur est automatiquement configurée pour ce réglage [Effacem Bords] de la fonction Page par page - Pour effacer tous les bords sur une largeur identique, spécifiez une valeur numérique entre 1/16 et 2 pouces (0,1 et 50,0mm) sous [Bords]. - Pour spécifier individuellement une largeur différente pour le haut, le bas, la droite et la gauche, appuyez sur la touche correspondante et spécifiez une valeur pour le côté choisi. - Pour ne pas effacer les bords, appuyez sur [Aucune]. Élément Description [Double page] Numérise comme page seule une double page d'un livre ouvert. [Séparation] Numérise sur deux pages séparées la double page d'un livre ouvert (gauche et droite). [Couvert. Face] Numérise la première page en couverture. [Pages Couv + Dos] Numérise la première page comme couverture, la deuxième comme dos de couverture et la troisième et les suivantes comme corps de texte. bizhub 652/552 6-17 6.2 Param. Numéris. 6 Effacem. Livre - Effacem. Centre Configurez les réglages pour effacer les ombres autour de la reliure intérieure au centre de l'original. Référence - Utilisez le clavier ou appuyez sur [-] ou [+] pour entrer une valeur numérique pour entrer une valeur numérique entre 1/16 et 1-3/16 pouces (0,1 et 30,0 mm). Position Reliure Si vous avez sélectionné Séparation, Couvert. Face ou Pages Couv + Dos, appuyez sur [Position Reliure], puis sélectionnez la position de reliure. 6 Param. Numéris. 6-18 bizhub 652/552 6.2 6.2.11 Numérisation séparée Il est possible de diviser l'opération de numérisation en plusieurs sessions par types de documents, par exemple lorsque toutes les pages d'un document ne peuvent être chargées dans l'ADF, lorsqu'on place les documents sur la vitre d'exposition ou lorsque des documents recto sont mélangés à des documents recto-verso. Appuyez sur [Numér. séparée] pour mettre la touche en surbrillance. bizhub 652/552 6-19 6.3 Réglages Original 6 6.3 Réglages Original Spécifiez le type d'original chargé, par exemple s'il contient des pages de formats différents ou s'il est plié en Z. Sous Réglages Original, il est possible de sélectionner deux éléments ou davantage en même temps. 6.3.1 Original spécial Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. 6.3.2 Spécifier Direction - Orientation Original Sélectionnez l'orientation de l'original. Après la numérisation du document, les données sont traitées pour une orientation correcte. Élément Table des matières [Orig. Mixtes] Sélectionnez ce paramètre lorsque des originaux de formats différents sont chargés ensemble dans l'ADF. La vitesse de numérisation est diminuée en raison de la détection de chaque page avant d'être numérisée. [Original plié en Z] Sélectionnez ce réglage pour détecter le format d'un original plié en Z chargé dans l'ADF. [Original long] Sélectionner ce réglage pour les originaux plus longs que le format standard. 6 Réglages Original 6-20 bizhub 652/552 6.3 6.3.3 Spécifier Direction - Position Reliure Sélectionnez la position de reliure de l'original lorsque celui-ci est perforé ou agrafé. Si vous numérisez un original recto-verso, la position de reliure est corrigée sur le verso. 6.3.4 Dépoussiérer Permet de réduire l'effet que la salissure de la vitre d'exposition peut avoir sur l'image de numérisation lorsque un original est chargé dans l'ADF. Référence - Si la fonction Dépoussiérer est spécifiée, cela réduit la vitesse de numérisation. - Si la vitre d'exposition est trop sale, nettoyez-la. Pour plus d'informations, consultez le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. Élément Description [Auto] Définit la position de reliure sur le bord long si le format est 11-11/16 pouces (297 mm) ou inférieur ou sur le bord court dans les autres cas. [Haut] Sélectionnez ce réglage si l'original est chargé avec la reliure vers le haut. [A gauche] Sélectionnez ce réglage si l'original est chargé avec la reliure à gauche. 7 Utilis/Archiv bizhub 652/552 7-3 7.1 Présentation des opérations Utilis/Archiv 7 7 Utilis/Archiv 7.1 Présentation des opérations Utilis/Archiv 7.1.1 Fonctions Utilis/Archiv Imprimer un document Vous pouvez imprimer un document enregistré dans une boîte, depuis les modes Copie, Numérisation/Fax, commande d'impression ou réception Fax. Il est possible d'ajouter des réglages de finition, comme le nombre de copies ou réglages d'impression recto-verso lors de l'impression du document. De plus, vous pouvez spécifier Combinaison pour imprimer en même temps deux documents ou plus. Envoi Vous pouvez distribuer un document enregistré dans une boîte en mode Copie, Fax/Numérisation, commande d'impression ou en mode Réception, par exemple par E-mail ou fax. Vous pouvez ajouter des réglages de finition ou d'émission lors de la distribution du document. Vous pouvez aussi spécifier Lier EMI pour sélectionner deux documents ou plus et les distribuer en même temps. Archivage Cette fonction vous permet d'effectuer diverses opérations de classement comme le déplacement ou la copie de documents entre les boîtes. Vous pouvez aussi enregistrer dans la mémoire externe un document archivé dans une Boîte utilisateur. Réglages Application Il est possible de déplacer ou de faire pivoter les pages au sein des documents enregistrés ou d'enregistrer des images de surimpression. 7.1.2 Détail de l'écran Utiliser document Sélectionnez la boîte dont vous voulez imprimer et distribuer les documents. Les écrans suivants s'affichent. Cette section décrit les éléments de réglage et prend la boîte Public comme exemple. 4 6 7 1 2 3 11 12 9 10 13 5 8 7 Présentation des opérations Utilis/Archiv 7-4 bizhub 652/552 7.1 7.1.3 Si un code d'accès est spécifié pour une boîte Si un code d'accès est spécifié pour une boîte, l'écran de saisie du code d'accès apparaît. Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [Valider]. No. Nom Description 1 [Impression] Configurez les réglages pour imprimer les documents sélectionnés. (p. 7-5) 2 [Env.] Configurez la destination et autres réglages pour envoyer les documents sélectionnés. (p. 7-33) 3 [Réglages Archivage] Permet de renommer, déplacer ou copier les documents sélectionnés. (p. 7-63) 4 [Applications] Modifier par page le document sélectionné ou enregistrer une image de surimpression. (p. 7-69) 5 [Enreg. doc.] Sélectionnez cet onglet pour afficher l'écran Enregistrer des documents. Les réglages Utilis/Archiv que vous avez configurés sont annulés. 6 - Affiche le numéro et le nom de la boîte spécifiée. 7 - Affiche la liste des documents enregistrés dans la boîte. 8 [ ][ ] Si la boîte spécifiée contient sept documents ou plus, utilisez [ ] ou [ ] pour faire défiler la liste vers le haut ou vers le bas. 9 [Sélect. Tout] Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner tous les documents dans la boîte spécifiée. 10 [Initial.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour initialiser tous les documents dans la boîte spécifiée. 11 [Afficher Liste]/[Vue Vignettes] Appuyez sur cette touche pour changer le format d'affichage des documents enregistrés. [Vue Vignettes] : Affiche une image réduite de la première page, le nombre de pages et le nom du document pour chaque document. [Afficher Liste] : Affiche l'heure d'enregistrement, le nom d'utilisateur et le nom du document pour chaque document. Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le titre de la colonne [Heure Enreg.], les documents apparaissent alternativement triés dans l'ordre croissant et dans l'ordre décroissant de l'heure d'enregistrement. 12 Réglages Impr./ Réglages Transmission/ Réglages Archivage/Réglages Application Affiche les éléments configurables pour l'onglet sélectionné. 13 [Détails Document] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier les informations détaillées ou l'image d'aperçu du document. bizhub 652/552 7-5 7.2 Impression 7 7.2 Impression 7.2.1 Présentation de l'onglet Impression Description de l'onglet Impression Sélectionnez l'onglet [Impression] pour afficher l'écran suivant. Les éléments de réglage disponibles pour [Impression] sont les suivants. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur les autres éléments, voir page 7-3. Impression Appuyez sur [Impression] pour afficher l'écran suivant. L'écran Impression offre deux catégories d'éléments configurables : [de base] et [Applications]. No. Nom Description 1 [Impression] Configurez les réglages pour imprimer les documents sélectionnés. Si vous avez sélectionné plusieurs documents, la fonction de réglage de l'impression de document n'est pas disponible. (p. 7-6) 2 [Combinaison] Configurez l'ordre d'impression ou un autre réglage pour imprimer deux documents sélectionnés ou plus. (p. 7-7) 2 1 No. Nom Description 1 [de base] Configurez les réglages de base comme le nombre de copies et l'impression recto ou recto-verso. 1 2 7 Impression 7-6 bizhub 652/552 7.2 Combinaison Appuyez sur [Combinaison], puis configurez les réglages Combinaison pour afficher l'écran suivant. L'écran Combinaison offre deux catégories d'éléments configurables : [de base] et [Applications]. 7.2.2 Impression Dans l'écran Impression - Détails Impression, configurez ou changez les fonctions suivantes. Référence - Les réglages d'agrafage sont uniquement disponibles si l'unité de finition en option est installée. 2 [Applications] Configurez les réglages plus complexes comme la marge de page et le tampon. No. Nom Description No. Nom Description 1 [de base] Configurez les réglages de base comme le nombre de copies et l'impression recto ou recto-verso. 2 [Applications] Configurez les réglages plus complexes comme la marge de page et le tampon. 1 2 Élément Description [Copies] Spécifier le nombre de copies. [Impression] Sélectionnez Impression recto ou lmpression recto-verso. [Finition] Configurez les réglages de finition voulus comme tri ou groupe, agrafage, perforation ou pliage ou agrafage centre. [Combinaison] Configurez les réglages pour imprimer plusieurs pages (2, 4 ou 8) sur une seule page lors de l'impression d'un document de plusieurs pages. Spécifiez le nombre de feuilles par page et l'ordre de combinaison. [Zoom] Configurez les réglages pour agrandir ou réduire une image lors de l'impression de documents. Sélectionnez le taux d'agrandissement. [Marge page] La marge de page peut se régler sur la gauche, la droite ou le bas du papier. Il est possible de décaler l'image par rapport à la marge de la page. [Insér. Feuil/Couv/ Chapitre] Configurez les réglages pour insérer une couverture, feuilles intercalaires entre les pages sélectionnées ou des feuilles intercalaires pour séparer les chapitres. [Tampon/ Surimpression] Configurez les réglages pour imprimer des éléments déterminés, comme la date et l'heure ou un tampon. bizhub 652/552 7-7 7.2 Impression 7 - Vous pouvez configurer les réglages de perforation lorsque le Kit de perforation PK-516 ou l'unité de pliage en Z ZU-606 est installé sur l'unité de finition FS-526 en option ou que le Kit de perforation PK-517 est installé sur l'unité de finition FS-527 en option. - Les fonctions de pliage et d'agrafage central + pliage peuvent être utilisées lorsqu'une Piqueuse à cheval est installée sur l'unité de finition en option. 7.2.3 Combinaison Ordre Document Après avoir sélectionné les documents, appuyez sur [Combinaison] pour afficher l'écran de sélection de l'ordre des documents. Les documents seront imprimés dans l'ordre où ils sont affichés sur cet écran. Lorsque cet écran apparaît, les documents sont affichés dans l'ordre où ils ont été sélectionnés. Référence - Pour changer l'ordre, sélectionnez d'abord le document source, puis le document de destination. Si un document possède un filigrane en en-tête, le même filigrane sera également imprimé sur le deuxième document et les suivants. Si un document ne possède pas de filigrane en en-tête, aucun filigrane ne sera imprimé même s'il est spécifié pour le second document et les suivants. Éléments configurables pour combiner et imprimer des documents Sur l'écran Combinaison - Détails Impression, configurez ou changez les réglages des fonctions suivantes. Élément Description [Copies] Spécifier le nombre de copies. [Impression] Sélectionnez Impression recto ou lmpression recto-verso. [Finition] Configurez les réglages de finition voulus comme décalage, agrafage, perforation ou pliage ou agrafage centre. [Impression continue] Configurez cet élément lorsque [Recto-Verso] est sélectionné dans [Impression]. Spécifiez s'il faut, une fois qu'une page impaire d'un document a été imprimée, imprimer la première page du document suivant sur le verso de la dernière page du premier document. [Marge page] La marge de page peut se régler sur la gauche, la droite ou le bas du papier. Il est possible de décaler l'image par rapport à la marge de la page. [Tampon/ Surimpression] Configurez les réglages pour imprimer des éléments déterminés, comme la date et l'heure ou un tampon. 7 Impression 7-8 bizhub 652/552 7.2 Référence - Les réglages d'Agrafage sont uniquement disponibles si l'unité de finition en option est installée. - Vous pouvez configurer les réglages de perforation lorsque le Kit de perforation PK-516 ou l'unité de pliage en Z ZU-606 est installé sur l'unité de finition FS-526 en option ou que le Kit de perforation PK-517 est installé sur l'unité de finition FS-527 en option. - Les fonctions de pliage et d'agrafage central + pliage peuvent être utilisées lorsqu'une Piqueuse à cheval est installée sur l'unité de finition en option. - En mode Combinaison et Impression d'un document, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner la fonction Tri ou Groupe. bizhub 652/552 7-9 7.3 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.3 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7.3.1 Copies Utilisez le pavé numérique pour saisir le nombre de copies. La valeur admissible est de 1 à 9999. Référence - Pour ramener le réglage à 1, appuyez sur la touche [C] du panneau de contrôle. 7.3.2 Recto seul/Recto-Verso Sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer une face ou les deux faces des feuilles de papier. 7 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-10 bizhub 652/552 7.3 7.3.3 Finition Configurez les réglages Tri, Groupe, Finition ainsi que d'autres réglages. Le nombre de trous perforés dépend du pays dans lequel vous vous trouvez. dPour info Lorsque l'unité de finition est installée, vous pouvez changer la méthode d'éjection dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour la fonction Décalage, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. Tri/Groupe Le réglage Tri éjecte les copies par jeux. Le réglage Groupe éjecte les copies par pages. Décalage Sélectionnez Oui pour trier les feuilles par jeux ou par pages de manière à ce que l'utilisateur sache à quel endroit le document est séparé. Lorsque l'unité de finition est installée, les feuilles imprimées sont éjectées et décalées à chaque séparation de document. Lorsque l'unité de finition n'est pas installée, les feuilles imprimées sont éjectées par tri alterné à chaque séparation de document. Agrafage Les feuilles imprimées sont agrafées en coin ou en deux points. bizhub 652/552 7-11 7.3 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Réglage Position - Agrafage Si vous sélectionnez le type d'agrafage, spécifiez la position. L'écran suivant montre un exemple de [2 points]. Perforer Les feuilles imprimées sont perforées pour archivage. Perforation - Réglage Position Spécifiez les positions des trous. 7 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-12 bizhub 652/552 7.3 Pli/Reliure Les réglages suivants sont disponibles lorsqu'une unité de finition est installée. Élément Description [Pliage en 2] Plie les feuilles imprimées avant de les éjecter. [Agraf. Centre+ Pliage] Agrafe les feuilles imprimées en deux points centraux et les plie en deux avant de les éjecter. [Pliage en 3] Sélectionnez ce réglage si vous voulez utiliser du papier dans le sens de la largeur w. Les feuilles imprimées sont pliées en trois sur la longueur. • Cet élément est disponible lorsque l'unité de finition FS-526 est installée. [Pliage Z] Sélectionnez ce réglage si vous voulez utiliser du papier dans le sens de la largeur w. Les feuilles imprimées sont pliées en Z sur la longueur. • Cet élément est disponible lorsque l'unité de pliage en Z ZU-606 est installée. bizhub 652/552 7-13 7.3 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Sélectionnez la fonction désirée. Lorsque l'unité de finition FS-527 est installée Lorsque l'unité de finition FS-526 et l'unité de pliage en Z ZU-606 sont installés : 7.3.4 Combinaison Permet de combiner et d'imprimer sur une seule page un original multi-page. Élément Description [2 en 1] Combine 2 pages d'un original sur une seule page. [4 en 1] Combine 4 pages d'un original sur une seule page. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'ordre de combinaison des pages de l'original. 7 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-14 bizhub 652/552 7.3 7.3.5 Zoom Les images peuvent être agrandies ou réduites lors de l'impression. Spécifiez le taux d'agrandissement. Référence - Indépendamment des réglages Utiliser réglage couleur existant ou Type original, les documents enregistrés au format A4 v peuvent être agrandis pour être imprimés au format A3 w. Pour pivoter et agrandir l'image comme indiqué dans l'exemple, vous devez préalablement régler [Rotation Agrandissement] sur [Permis] dans le menu Utilitaires. Pour plus de détails sur la Rotation Agrandissement, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. [8 en1] Combine 8 pages d'un original sur une seule page. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'ordre de combinaison des pages de l'original. Élément Description Élément Description [Réglage existant] Imprime un document selon taux d'agrandissement qui était spécifié lors de l'enregistrement. [Manuel] Spécifiez le taux d'agrandissement entre 25,0% et 400,0% par incréments de 0,1%. Entrez directement au clavier le taux d'agrandissement. [Tous formats] Imprime un document au format spécifié lors de l'enregistrement, sans agrandissement ou réduction. [Minimal] Réduit légèrement un document pour ménager une marge autour de l'image. [+][-] Appuyez sur cette touche pour régler le taux zoom de l'image par incréments de 0,1%. [Zoom fixe] Spécifiez le taux fixe d'agrandissement prédéfini sur cette machine. Ce réglage est utile pour agrandir ou réduire des documents à un format standard. [Définir Taux Zoom] En plus d'agrandissements fixes, vous pouvez prédéfinir des taux d'agrandissement fréquemment utilisés afin de les utiliser par la suite. • Vous pouvez spécifier au maximum trois taux d'agrandissement. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'agrandissements prédéfinis, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. bizhub 652/552 7-15 7.3 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.3.6 Impression continue Vous pouvez sélectionner ce réglage si vous avez sélectionné Impression recto verso lors de la combinaison et l'impression de documents. Plusieurs documents peuvent être imprimés en continu lorsqu'ils sont combinés et imprimés. Lors de l'impression en mode recto-verso, sélectionnez si la fin d'un document doit être imprimée sur le recto d'une feuille et le début du document suivant sur le recto de la même feuille ou sur le recto de la feuille suivante. Référence - [Oui] : le document suivant est imprimé en continu à partir du verso de la dernière page du document précédent. - [No] : le document suivant est imprimé à partir du recto d'une nouvelle feuille. 7 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-16 bizhub 652/552 7.4 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7.4.1 Marge page La marge de page peut se régler sur la gauche, la droite ou le bas du papier. Elle peut assurer un espace de perforation ou d'agrafage. Marge page Décalage Image Si vous créez une marge de page, l'image peut être décalée en fonction de la position de la marge. Vous pouvez spécifier la distance de décalage pour déplacer l'image vers la gauche, la droite, le haut ou le bas, entre 1/16 et 10 pouces (0,1 à 250,0 mm) et l'adapter à la position de la marge de page. Référence - Spécifiez la largeur de la marge de page par pas de 1/16 pouce (0,1 mm) en appuyant sur [-] ou [+]. - Pour régler la largeur de la marge sur 0 pouce (0 mm), appuyez sur [Sans décalage]. Élément Description [Position Marge] Sélectionnez la position de la marge. [Auto] : une marge de page placée sur le bord long du papier est sélectionnée si la longueur de l'original est de 11-11/16 pouces (297 mm) ou moins. Une marge de page placée sur le bord court du papier est sélectionnée si la longueur de l'original dépasse 11-11/16 pouces (297 mm). [Haut] : sélectionnez ce réglage pour placer une marge en haut. [A gauche] : sélectionnez ce réglage pour placer une marge à gauche. [A droite] : sélectionnez ce réglage pour placer une marge à droite. [Ajuster valeur] Spécifiez la largeur de la marge de page entre 1/16 et 3/4 pouces (0,1 et 20,0 mm). Pour régler la largeur de la marge sur 0 pouce (0 mm), appuyez sur [Aucune]. bizhub 652/552 7-17 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Décalage Image - Changer Décalage verso Pour créer une marge de page en mode Impression recto verso, appuyez sur [Changer Décalage verso] pour spécifier la distance de décalage sur le verso. Vous pouvez spécifier la distance de décalage pour déplacer l'image vers la gauche, la droite, le haut ou le bas, entre 1/16 et 10 pouces (0,1 à 250,0 mm) et l'adapter à la position de la marge de page. Référence - Spécifiez la largeur de la marge de page par pas de 1/16 pouce (0,1 mm) en appuyant sur [-] ou [+]. - Pour régler la largeur de la marge sur 0 pouce (0 mm), appuyez sur [Sans décalage]. 7.4.2 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre Permet de configurer la fonction Couverture, Insertion Feuille ou Chapitres. 7.4.3 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Couverture Les documents sont imprimés avec face et dos de couverture. Élément Description [Paramètres] Imprime les documents avec insertion de faces et dos de couverture. [Insertion Feuille] Lors de l'impression des documents, insère des feuille de papier couleur ou autre type de papier avant les pages spécifiées. [Chapitres] Configurez ce réglage pour imprimer des documents en mode Impression recto verso. Les documents sont imprimés et les pages sont éjectées de manière à ce que les pages spécifiées, la première page de chaque chapitre par exemple, soient obligatoirement sur le recto. 7 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-18 bizhub 652/552 7.4 Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. Voici les réglages Face et Dos de couverture. Référence - Chargez préalablement dans le magasin les feuilles pour les faces et dos de couverture. - Pour pouvoir ajouter une couverture lors de l'impression du document copié et enregistré dans une boîte, l'une des conditions suivantes doit avoir été satisfaite lors de l'enregistrement du document. – Un magasin papier a été spécifié – Les réglages Couverture ont été configurés Élément Description [Couvert. Face]/ [Couverture Dos] Configurez les réglages pour face et dos de couverture. Pour plus de détails, voir le tableau ci-dessous. [Papier] Sélectionnez un magasin dans les cas suivants. • Si [Face (copiée)] ou [Face (vierge)] est sélectionné pour [Couvert. Face] • Si [Dos (copiée)] ou [Dos (vierge)] est sélectionné pour [Couverture Dos] Élément Description Couvert. Face Aucune Aucune couverture n'est jointe au document. Face (copiée) La première page d'un document est imprimée sur la face de couverture. La seconde page du document est imprimée au verso de la page de couverture si l'impression [Recto verso] est sélectionnée. Face (vierge) Une feuille vierge est insérée avant la première page d'un document. Couverture Dos Aucune Aucun dos de couverture n'est joint au document. Dos (copié) La dernière page d'un document est imprimée sur la face de couverture. Les deux dernières pages sont imprimées sur le recto et le verso du dos de couverture si l'impression [Recto verso] est sélectionnée. Dos (vierge) Une feuille vierge est insérée après la dernière page d'un document. bizhub 652/552 7-19 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.4.4 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Insertion Feuille Lors de l'impression des documents, des feuille de papier couleur ou autre type de papier sont insérées avant les pages spécifiées. Il est possible de spécifier jusqu'à 30 positions d'insertion de feuilles dans un original 999 pages maximum. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. Sélectionnez [Copié] ou [Vierge] dans Type Encart. Configurez le réglage de la manière suivante, en fonction de la sélection effectuée : Impression recto ou Impression recto verso. Exemple : Spécification de la page "6" Élément Description Spécification page/[ Tri] Spécifiez une page à laquelle vous voulez insérer une feuille. Appuyez sur une touche de page et entrez au clavier le numéro de page souhaité. Pour trier dans l'ordre croissant les pages entrées, appuyez sur [Tri]. [Insérer Papier] Sélectionnez un magasin dans lequel seront chargées les feuilles à insérer. Vérifiez que les feuilles chargées sont de même format et dans le même sens que le papier destiné à l'impression. [Type Encart] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer un document sur les feuilles insérées (Copie) ou les laisser en blanc (Vierge). Pour plus de détails, voir le tableau ci-dessous. Élément Description [Copie] (quand Recto est sélectionné) Une feuille est insérée en tant que sixième feuille et la sixième page du document est imprimée sur cette feuille. [Copie] (quand Recto-verso est sélectionné) Le verso de la troisième feuille est laissé vierge. Une feuille spécifiée est insérée comme quatrième feuille la sixième et septième pages du document sont imprimées sur cette feuille. [Vierge] (quand Recto est sélectionné) Une feuille spécifiée est insérée après la sixième page. [Vierge] (quand Recto-verso est sélectionné) Une feuille spécifiée est insérée comme quatrième feuille. Lorsque vous spécifiez une page impaire, le verso de la feuille insérée est laissé vierge. 7 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-20 bizhub 652/552 7.4 7.4.5 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Chapitres Vous pouvez configurer ce réglage pour imprimer des documents en mode Impression recto verso. Les documents sont imprimés et les pages sont éjectées de manière à ce que les pages spécifiées, la première page de chaque chapitre par exemple, soient obligatoirement sur le recto. Il est possible de spécifier jusqu'à 30 positions d'insertion de feuilles dans un original 999 pages maximum. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. 7.4.6 Tampon/Surimpression Sur l'écran Tampon/Surimpression, les fonctions suivantes peuvent être configurées. Élément Description Spécification page/[Tri] Spécifiez les pages recto. Appuyez sur une touche de page et entrez au clavier le numéro de page souhaité. Pour trier dans l'ordre croissant les pages entrées, appuyez sur [Tri]. [Papier Chapitre] Pour copier les données du document sur des feuilles de chapitre, sélectionnez [Insertion copie] et sélectionnez un magasin contenant le papier destiné aux feuilles de chapitre. Vérifiez que les feuilles chargées sont de même format et dans le même sens que le papier destiné à l'impression. Élément Description [Date/Heure] Imprime la date et l'heure d'impression sur les pages. [Numéro de page] Le numéro de page est imprimé sur chaque page d'un document. [Tampon] Permet d'imprimer sur les pages une chaîne de caractères prédéfinie, comme "URGENT" par exemple. [Protection copie] Un texte masqué est imprimé sur toutes les pages afin d'éviter la copie non autorisée. [Pare-copie] Un tampon est imprimé sur toutes les pages en guise de pare-copie. bizhub 652/552 7-21 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.4.7 Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure Imprime la date et l'heure d'impression sur les pages. Référence - Impossible de sélectionner [Détails Texte] - [Couleur texte] au cours de l'impression. [Copie Prot. MdP] Un document est imprimé avec un mot de passe intégré sur toutes les pages pour empêcher la copie non autorisée. [Tampon répétitif] Du texte ou une image, est imprimé plusieurs fois sur toutes les pages. [Tête/Pied de page] Les pages sont imprimées avec une tête ou un pied de page. • Cet élément ne s'affiche pas si une tête ou un pied de page ne sont pas enregistrés. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une en-tête ou d'un pied de page, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie] ou le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. [Surimpression enregistrée] Une image enregistrée est incrustée sur les pages imprimées. • Cet élément ne s'affiche pas si aucune image de surimpression n'est enregistrée. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une image de surimpression, voir page 7-76. Élément Description Élément Description [Type date] Sélectionnez le format de la date. [Type heure] Spécifiez si vous souhaitez ajouter l'heure et sélectionnez le format d'affichage de celle-ci. [Pages] Sélectionnez si la date et l'heure doivent être imprimés sur toutes les pages ou uniquement sur la première page. [Position Impress.] Spécifier la position d'impression. Pour procéder à un réglage plus fin de la position d'impression, appuyez sur [Ajuster Position]. Spécifiez la longueur du décalage de la position d'impression vers la gauche, la droite, le haut et le bas en indiquant une valeur comprise entre 1/16 et 1-15/16 pouces (0,1 et 50,0 mm). [Détails Texte] Spécifiez le détails du texte à imprimer. • [Couleur texte] : sélectionnez la couleur d'impression parmi Noir, Rouge, Bleu, Vert, Jaune, Cyan ou Magenta. • [Taille texte] : sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer entre 8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt ou 14 pt. • [Type texte] : sélectionnez le type de police entre Times Roman ou Helvetica. 7 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-22 bizhub 652/552 7.4 7.4.8 Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page Le numéro de page est imprimé sur chaque page du document. Réglages Référence - Impossible de sélectionner [Détails Texte] - [Couleur texte] au cours de l'impression. Élément Description [Numéro Première Page] Spécifiez la première page de la numérotation. [N° 1er chapitre] Spécifiez le numéro du premier chapitre. [Type Numéro Page] Sélectionnez le type d'affichage des numéros de page. [Param. Insert Feuille] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer un numéro de page sur une feuille insérée. Pour les réglages disponibles, voir page 7-23. [Position Impress.] Spécifier la position d'impression. Pour procéder à un réglage plus fin de la position d'impression, appuyez sur [Ajuster Position]. Spécifiez la longueur du décalage de la position d'impression vers la gauche, la droite, le haut et le bas en indiquant une valeur comprise entre 1/16 et 1-15/16 pouces (0,1 et 50,0 mm). [Détails Texte] Spécifiez le détails du texte à imprimer. • [Couleur texte] : sélectionnez la couleur d'impression parmi Noir, Rouge, Bleu, Vert, Jaune, Cyan ou Magenta. • [Taille texte] : sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer entre 8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt ou 14 pt. • [Type texte] : sélectionnez le type de police entre Times Roman ou Helvetica. bizhub 652/552 7-23 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Param. Insert Feuille Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer un numéro de page sur les feuilles insérées. 7.4.9 Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon Permet d'imprimer sur les pages une chaîne de caractères prédéfinie, comme "URGENT" par exemple. Élément Description [Couverture] [Imprimer sur la face et le dos] Le numéro de page est imprimé sur la face et le dos de couverture. [Imprimer sur le dos seulement] Aucun numéro de page n'est imprimé sur la face de couverture. [Ne pas imprimer le número de page] Aucun numéro de page n'est imprimé sur la face ou le dos de couverture. [Copie Feuille Insert] [Imprimer Page #] Le numéro de page est imprimé sur les feuilles copiées insérées. [Ne pas imprimer #] Le numéro de page n'est pas imprimé sur les feuilles copiées insérées. [Ignorer Page(s)] Les feuilles insérées copiées ne sont pas comptées. Les numéros de page ne sont pas imprimés. [Encart (vierge)] [Ne pas imprimer #] Le numéro de page n'est pas imprimé sur les feuilles vierges insérées. [Ignorer Page(s)] Les feuilles insérées vierges ne sont pas comptées. Les numéros de page ne sont pas imprimés. Élément Description [Type Tampon/ Tampons prédéfinis] Sélectionnez un type de tampon, comme par exemple URGENT, REPONSE SOUHAITEE ou COPIE INTERDITE. 7 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-24 bizhub 652/552 7.4 7.4.10 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie -Protection Copie Un texte masqué est imprimé sur toutes les pages afin d'éviter la copie non autorisée. Lorsqu'un document imprimé avec du texte protégé est copié, le texte masqué apparaît clairement sur toutes les pages des copies de façon à ce que le lecteur sache qu'il s'agit d'une copie. Configurez le réglage de la protection copie à appliquer. Vous pouvez appliquer un maximum de huit chaînes ou tampons. En revanche, si vous spécifiez une inclinaison de chaînes ou tampons de 45 degrés (ou de -45 degrés), le nombre de chaînes ou tampons est alors limité à 4. Sur l'écran Protection Copie, vous pouvez configurer les réglages suivants. [Pages] Sélectionnez si la date et l'heure doivent être imprimés sur toutes les pages ou uniquement sur la première page. [Taille Texte] Sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer, entre Minimal ou Standard. [Position d'impression] Spécifier la position d'impression. Pour procéder à un réglage plus fin de la position d'impression, appuyez sur [Ajuster Position]. Spécifiez la longueur du décalage de la position d'impression vers la gauche, la droite, le haut et le bas en indiquant une valeur comprise entre 1/16 et 1-15/16 pouces (0,1 et 50,0 mm). Élément Description Élément Description [Type Protection Copie] Sélectionnez un type de Protection Copie à imprimer. [Paramètres Détaillés] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier le contraste et la taille de texte des Protections Copie à imprimer. [Position] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier l'inclinaison et l'ordre d'impression des Protections Copie à imprimer. bizhub 652/552 7-25 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Type Protection Copie Paramètres Détaillés Appuyez sur [Paramètres Détaillés] pour spécifier le contraste, la trame de fond et d'autres éléments. Position Dans l'écran de réglage Protection Copie, appuyez sur [Position] pour spécifier la position d'impression angulaire du tampon sélectionné ou en laissant un espace. Configurez les réglages suivants. - Inclinaison de la Protection Copie dans la zone (+45 degrés/0 degré/-45 degrés). - Insertion d'un espace entre Protections Copie - Réorganisation de l'ordre d'impression des Protections Copie - Suppression de la Protection Copie ou de l'espace Élément Description [Tampon enregistré] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer les images Tampon qui ont été préalablement enregistrées avec le logiciel utilitaire. • Utiliser Utilitaire Protection Copie pour enregistrer des tampons. Pour plus de détails, voir le manuel de l'utilitaire correspondant. • Les tampons enregistrés peuvent nécessiter plusieurs zones en fonction de leur contenu. [Tampon prédéfini] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer une chaîne standard comme par exemple, Copie non valide, Copie ou Privé, en tant que tampon prédéfini. Un tampon nécessite une zone. [Date/Heure] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer la date et l'heure auxquelles le document a été enregistré. • [Type date] nécessite une zone. • [Type heure] nécessite une zone. [Autre] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier le numéro de la tâche, le numéro de série et le numéro de contrôle de distribution avec lesquels le document a été enregistré. • [Numéro Tâche] : Le numéro de tâche du travail d'impression est imprimé. Un numéro de tâche nécessite une zone. • [Numéro de série] : Le numéro de série de cette machine est imprimé. Le numéro de série nécessite une zone. Le numéro de série est attribué au moment de l'expédition de cette machine. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages, contacter le S.A.V. • [N° Contrôle Distribution] : Le nombre de copies spécifié est imprimé. Le numéro de contrôle de distribution nécessite une zone. Entrez le numéro de contrôle de distribution et sélectionnez "Numéro seul" ou "Mettre zéros devant (8 chiffres au total)" comme format de sortie. Élément Description [Contraste] Sélectionnez la densité entre Clair, Standard ou Foncé. [Trame Protect Copie] Sélectionnez la trame motif et le contraste à appliquer lorsque la copie est reproduite. Sélectionnez la trame entre Texte en relief ou Fond en relief. [Taille Texte] Sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer entre Minimal, Standard ou Grand. [Ecraser Trame] Sélectionnez l'impression de la trame entre Face (Écraser) ou Dos. [Trame du fond] Sélectionnez la trame du fond parmi huit types. Élément Description [Changer Position/ Supprimer] Sélectionnez le tampon de protection copie à changer et appuyez sur [Changer Position]/[Insérer Espace]/[Supprimer]. 7 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-26 bizhub 652/552 7.4 7.4.11 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Pare-copie Pour empêcher la copie non autorisée, cette fonction imprime un texte tel que "Copie invalide" ou "Privé" ou des informations telles que la date/l'heure sur toutes les pages en guise de pare-copie (informations d'interdiction de copie) lors de l'impression. Une page comportant un élément pare-copie ne peut pas être copié ni enregistré dans une boîte utilisateur. Configurez le réglage de l'élément pare-copie à appliquer. Vous pouvez appliquer jusqu'à 6 éléments pare-copie. Pour Pare-copie, vous pouvez configurer les réglages suivants. Type Pare-copie Élément Description [Type Pare-copie] Sélectionnez un type de pare-copie. [Paramètres Détaillés] Spécifiez la trame et la taille de texte du pare-copie sélectionné. Élément Description [Tampon prédéfini] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer une chaîne standard comme par exemple, Copie non valide, Copie ou Privé, en tant que tampon prédéfini. Un tampon nécessite une zone. [Date/Heure] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer la date et l'heure auxquelles le document a été enregistré. • [Type date] nécessite une zone. • [Type heure] nécessite une zone. [Autre] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier le numéro de la tâche, le numéro de série et le numéro de contrôle de distribution avec lesquels le document a été enregistré. • [Numéro Tâche] : Le numéro de tâche du travail d'impression est imprimé. Un numéro de tâche nécessite une zone. • [Numéro de série] : Le numéro de série de cette machine est imprimé. Le numéro de série nécessite une zone. Le numéro de série est attribué au moment de l'expédition de cette machine. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages, contacter le S.A.V. • [N° Contrôle Distribution] : Le nombre de copies spécifié est imprimé. Le numéro de contrôle de distribution nécessite une zone. Entrez le numéro de contrôle de distribution et sélectionnez "Numéro seul" ou "Mettre zéros devant (8 chiffres au total)" comme format de sortie. bizhub 652/552 7-27 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Paramètres Détaillés Appuyez sur [Paramètres Détaillés] pour spécifier le contraste, la trame de fond et d'autres éléments. 7.4.12 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP Pour empêcher la copie non autorisée, cette fonction configure les paramètres de tampon pour un texte tel que "Copie Invalide" ou "Privé" ou des informations telles que la date/l'heure sur toutes les pages du document et imprime avec un mot de passe intégré. Quand une feuille de papier comportant un mot de passe intégré est copiée, numérisée ou enregistrée dans une Boîte Utilisateur, la tâche actuellement en cours est suspendue et l'écran de saisie du mot de passe s'affiche. Dans ce cas, entrez le mot de passe pour exécuter l'opération souhaitée. Pour activer Copie Prot. MdP, sélectionnez [Oui] et appuyez sur [Code d'accès] pour spécifier le mot de passe. Référence - Pour confirmer, entrez le mot de passe deux fois sur le panneau de contrôle. Si un mot de passe est spécifié, vous pouvez configurer un tampon. Vous pouvez appliquer jusqu'à 6 tampons Élément Description [Trame Pare-copie] Spécifiez le contraste d'un élément pare-copie. [Relief Fond] est sélectionné comme trame. [Taille Texte] Sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer entre Minimal, Standard ou Grand. [Trame du fond] Sélectionnez la trame du fond parmi huit types. Élément Description [Type Tampon] Sélectionnez le type de tampon. [Paramètres Détaillés] Spécifiez la trame et la taille de texte de la copie protégée par mot de passe sélectionnée. 7 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-28 bizhub 652/552 7.4 Type Tampon Paramètres Détaillés Appuyez sur [Paramètres Détaillés] pour spécifier le contraste, la trame de fond et d'autres éléments. 7.4.13 Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif Du texte ou une image, est imprimé plusieurs fois sur toutes les pages. Les tampons de Protection Copie permettent d'éviter la recopie. En revanche, les tampons répétitifs peuvent être recopiés. Vous pouvez appliquer un maximum de huit chaînes ou tampons. En revanche, si vous spécifiez une inclinaison de chaînes ou tampons de 45 degrés (ou de -45 degrés), le nombre de chaînes ou tampons est alors limité à 4. Sur l'écran Tampon répétitif, vous pouvez configurer les réglages suivants. Élément Description [Tampon Prédéfini] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer une chaîne standard comme par exemple, Copie non valide, Copie ou Privé, en tant que tampon prédéfini. Un tampon nécessite une zone. [Date/Heure] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer la date et l'heure auxquelles le document a été enregistré. • [Type date] nécessite une zone. • [Type heure] nécessite une zone. [Autre] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier le numéro de la tâche, le numéro de série et le numéro de contrôle de distribution avec lesquels le document a été enregistré. • [Numéro Tâche] : Le numéro de tâche du travail d'impression est imprimé. Un numéro de tâche nécessite une zone. • [Numéro de série] : Le numéro de série de cette machine est imprimé. Le numéro de série nécessite une zone. Le numéro de série est attribué au moment de l'expédition de cette machine. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages, contacter le S.A.V. • [N° Contrôle Distribution] : Le nombre de copies spécifié est imprimé. Le numéro de contrôle de distribution nécessite une zone. Entrez le numéro de contrôle de distribution et sélectionnez "Numéro seul" ou "Mettre zéros devant (8 chiffres au total)" comme format de sortie. Élément Description [Trame Copie Prot. MdP] Spécifiez le contraste d'un motif. [Relief Fond] est sélectionné comme trame. [Taille Texte] Sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer entre Minimal, Standard ou Grand. [Trame du fond] Sélectionnez la trame du fond parmi huit types. Élément Description [Type Tampon répétitif] Sélectionnez un type de Tampon répétitif à imprimer. [Paramètres Détaillés] Spécifiez la couleur, la densité et taille du texte du tampon répétitif à imprimer. bizhub 652/552 7-29 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Type Tampon répétitif Paramètres Détaillés Appuyez sur [Paramètres Détaillés] pour spécifier le contraste, la taille de caractère et d'autres éléments. Position Dans l'écran Tampon répétitif, appuyez sur [Position] pour déterminer la position d'impression du tampon, par exemple, en inclinant le tampon ou en laissant un espace. Configurez les réglages suivants. - Inclinaison du Tampon répétitif dans la zone (+45 degrés/0 degré/-45 degrés). - Insertion d'un espace entre tampons répétitifs - Modification de l'ordre d'impression du tampon répétitif - Suppression du tampon répétitif ou de l'espace [Position] Sélectionnez l'inclinaison ou l'ordre d'impression du tampon répétitif à imprimer. Élément Description Élément Description [Tampon enregistré] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer les images Tampon qui ont été préalablement enregistrées avec le logiciel utilitaire. • Utiliser Utilitaire Protection Copie pour enregistrer des tampons. Pour plus de détails, voir le manuel de l'utilitaire correspondant. • Les tampons enregistrés peuvent nécessiter plusieurs zones en fonction de leur contenu. [Tampon Prédéfini] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer une chaîne standard comme par exemple, Copie non valide, Copie ou Privé, en tant que tampon prédéfini. Un tampon nécessite une zone. [Date/Heure] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer la date et l'heure auxquelles le document a été enregistré. • [Type date] nécessite une zone. • [Type heure] nécessite une zone. [Autre] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier le numéro de la tâche, le numéro de série et le numéro de contrôle de distribution avec lesquels le document a été enregistré. • [Numéro Tâche] : Le numéro de tâche du travail d'impression est imprimé. Un numéro de tâche nécessite une zone. • [Numéro de série] : Le numéro de série de cette machine est imprimé. Le numéro de série nécessite une zone. Le numéro de série est attribué au moment de l'expédition de cette machine. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages, contacter le S.A.V. • [N° Contrôle Distribution] : Le nombre de copies spécifié est imprimé. Le numéro de contrôle de distribution nécessite une zone. Entrez le numéro de contrôle de distribution et sélectionnez "Numéro seul" ou "Mettre zéros devant (8 chiffres au total)" comme format de sortie. Élément Description [Contraste] Sélectionnez la densité entre Clair, Standard ou Foncé. [Taille Texte] Sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer entre Minimal, Standard ou Grand. [Ecraser Trame] Sélectionnez l'impression de la trame entre [Devant (Écraser)], [Transparent] ou [Derrière]. Élément Description [Changer Position/ Supprimer] Sélectionnez le tampon répétitif à changer et appuyez sur [Changer Position]/ [Insérer Espace]/[Supprimer] pour spécifier. 7 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-30 bizhub 652/552 7.4 7.4.14 Tampon/Surimpression - En-tête/Pied de page Configurez les réglages pour insérer la tête ou le pied de page. Pour insérer la tête ou le pied de page, le contenu doit avoir été préalablement enregistré dans Réglages Administrateur. Appuyez sur Contrôle/Modif. temp. pour changer temporairement et imprimer le contenu de la tête et du pied de page enregistrés. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de la tête et du pied de page, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Contrôle/Modif. temp. Dans l'écran Régl. En-tête/Pied de page, appuyez sur [Contrôle/Modif. temp.] pour changer la tête ou le pied de page enregistrés. Élément Description [Rappeler En-tête/ Pied de page] Sélectionnez la tête ou le pied de page parmi ceux qui sont enregistrés. [Contrôle/Modif. temp.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour contrôler ou changer la tête ou le pied de page sélectionné. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-30. [Initial.] Appuyez sur cette touche annuler l'utilisation de la tête et du pied de page temporairement modifiés. bizhub 652/552 7-31 7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Référence - Impossible de sélectionner [Détails Texte] - [Couleur texte] au cours de l'impression. 7.4.15 Tampon/Surimpression - Surimpression enregistrée Réglages Une image enregistrée est incrustée lors de l'impression des pages spécifiées. Sélectionnez [Oui] pour utiliser une image de surimpression. Référence - Les images de surimpression peuvent être enregistrées en mode Copie ainsi qu'en mode Boîte. Une image de surimpression enregistrée en mode Copie peut être utilisée pour imprimer un document conservé dans la Boîte. Une image de surimpression enregistrée depuis une image conservée dans la Boîte peut être utilisée en mode Copie. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une image de surimpression, voir page 7-76. Élément Description [Réglages En-tête], [Réglages Pied de page] Spécifiez s'il faut ou non imprimer un en-tête/un pied de page. Appuyez sur [Impression] pour configurer le réglage suivant. • [Texte] : Spécifiez sur l'écran tactile le texte pour la tête ou pied de page. • [Date/Heure] : Configurez la date et l'heure pour la tête ou pied de page. • [Autres] : Configurez le réglage permettant d'ajouter le numéro de contrôle de distribution, le numéro de tâche ou le numéro de série à la tête ou au pied de page. Le numéro de série est attribué au moment de l'expédition de cette machine. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages, contacter le S.A.V. [Pages] Indiquez si vous voulez imprimer la tête et le pied de page sur toutes les pages ou seulement sur la première page. [Détails Texte] Spécifiez le détails du texte à imprimer. • [Couleur texte] : sélectionnez la couleur d'impression parmi Noir, Rouge, Bleu, Vert, Jaune, Cyan ou Magenta. • [Taille texte] : sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer entre 8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt ou 14 pt. • [Type texte] : sélectionnez le type de police entre Times Roman ou Helvetica. Élément Description [Rappel image surimpression] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer une image de surimpression enregistrée sur le recto ou le verso. Appuyez sur un élément pour sélectionner une image de surimpression et configurer ses réglages. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-32. [Pages] Sélectionnez si l'image de surimpression sélectionnée doit être imprimée sur toutes sur toutes les pages ou seulement sur la première page. 7 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-32 bizhub 652/552 7.4 Réglage Surimpression Sélectionnez une image de surimpression et configurez ses réglages. L'image peut aussi être affichée sous forme d'aperçu. Référence - Voici les trois méthodes permettant de composer une surimpression. – [Transparent] : augmente la luminosité de l'image de surimpression à superposer. Ce réglage permet d'éviter que l'original ne soit masqué par l'image de surimpression composée. – [Composition Fond (Original)] : compose l'original comme fond. L'image de surimpression est superposée à l'original lors de l'impression. – [Derrière] : compose l'image de surimpression comme fond. L'original est superposé à l'image de surimpression lors de l'impression. Élément Description [Vue Vignettes]/ [Affichage Nom] La vue Vignette permet de contrôler les images de surimpression. En mode Nom d'affichage, les images de surimpression peuvent être contrôlées au moyen de leurs noms de fichier. Sélectionnez l'image de surimpression désirée. [Paramètres Détaillés] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier comment composer une image de surimpression. • [Contraste] : entrez au clavier le contraste d'une image de surimpression (au moyen d'une valeur comprise entre 20 et 100%). • [Composition] : sélectionnez Transparent, Composition Fond (Original) ou Derrière pour spécifier comment composer une image de surimpression. [Détails Image] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier les détails de l'image de surimpression y compris l'aperçu image, la taille et la couleur. bizhub 652/552 7-33 7.5 Envoyer 7 7.5 Envoyer 7.5.1 Présentation des réglages Transmission Les fonctions suivantes vous permettent d'envoyer un document enregistré dans une boîte. Grâce à elles, vous pourrez envoyer aisément des données simplement en enregistrant des destinations dans cette machine sans avoir les transférer via des ordinateurs. Description de l'onglet Env. Appuyez sur [Env.] pour afficher l'écran suivant. Les éléments de réglage disponibles pour [Réglages Transmission] sont les suivants. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur les autres éléments, voir page 7-3. Élément Description Fax Permet d'envoyer par fax les données du document. E-mail Envoie les données du document comme fichier joint à un E-mail. Fax Internet Envoie via un intranet ou Internet les données du document comme fichier joint à un E-mail. Fax Adresse IP Envoie des données de document à la destination spécifiée par l'adresse IP (nom serveur) ou l'adresse E-mail de la destination. Èmis. Fichier (SMB) Envoie les données du document dans le dossier partagé de l'ordinateur spécifié. FTP Envoie les données de document au serveur FTP spécifié. WebDAV Envoie au serveur spécifié les données de document, via le réseau. No. Élément Description 1 [Envoyer] Configurez la destination et autres réglages pour envoyer les documents sélectionnés. Si vous avez sélectionné plusieurs documents, [Réglages Document] et [Applications] ne sont pas disponibles. (p. 7-35) 2 [Lier EMI] Configurez l'ordre d'impression ou un autre réglage pour imprimer deux documents sélectionnés ou plus. (p. 7-36) 1 2 7 Envoyer 7-34 bizhub 652/552 7.5 Envoyer Appuyez sur [Env.] pour afficher l'écran suivant. Vous pouvez configurer la destination de l'émission ainsi que d'autres fonctions. Lier EMI Appuyez sur [Lier EMI] pour afficher l'écran suivant après avoir spécifié l'ordre de reliure. Certains types de destination ou de fonction ne s'affichent pas puisque l'émission concerne plusieurs documents. No. Élément Description 1 Configurez les destinations Configurez les destinations. (p. 7-37) 2 Configurez les fonctions Configurez les fonctions qui peuvent être ajoutés lors de l'émission de documents. (p. 7-47) 1 2 No. Élément Description 1 Configurez les destinations Configurez les destinations. (p. 7-37) 2 Configurez les fonctions Configurez les fonctions qui peuvent être ajoutés lors de l'émission de documents. (p. 7-47) 1 2 bizhub 652/552 7-35 7.5 Envoyer 7 7.5.2 Réglages Transmission Appuyez sur [Env.] pour spécifier les destinations et les fonctions qui peuvent être ajoutées lors de l'envoi de documents. Référence - [Saisie dir.] ne s'affiche pas lorsque Saisie Manuelle Destination est réglé sur Interdit dans [Paramètres Sécurité] dans Réglages Administrateur. No. Élément Description 1 [Carnet Adresses] Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner le destinataire parmi les destinations préenregistrées. 2 [Saisie dir.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour entrer directement des destinations non enregistrées. 3 [Vérif. histor] Sélectionnez les destinataires dans le journal d'émission. 4 [Rech. Adresse] Appuyez sur cette touche pour rechercher l'adresse enregistrée lorsque le serveur LDAP est utilisé. 5 [Groupe] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher la liste des adresses Groupe enregistrées. 6 [Recher simple] Appuyez sur cette touche pour rechercher la destination dans le carnet d'adresses. 7 [Réglages Document] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier la résolution, le type de fichier ou la couleur lors de l'envoi d'un document. 8 [Réglage de communication] Appuyez sur cette touche pour configurer les réglages de communication. 9 [Applications] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires comme Tampon ou Impression par page. 1 2 3 4 9 5 6 7 8 7 Envoyer 7-36 bizhub 652/552 7.5 7.5.3 Combinaison Ordre Document Après avoir sélectionné les documents, appuyez sur [Lier ÉMI] pour afficher l'écran de sélection de l'ordre de liaison. Les documents seront envoyés dans l'ordre où ils sont affichés sur cet écran. Lorsque cet écran apparaît, les documents sont affichés dans l'ordre où ils ont été sélectionnés. Référence - Pour changer l'ordre, sélectionnez d'abord le document source, puis le document de destination. bizhub 652/552 7-37 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7.6.1 Carnet Adresses - Recherche simple Permet de rechercher des destinations d'émission. Les méthodes suivantes sont disponibles pour rechercher les destinations enregistrées. Type d'adresse Appuyez sur cette touche pour rechercher la destination par le type d'adresse qui a été spécifié lors de l'enregistrement de la destination. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur le réglage [Carnet adresses par défaut], voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. L'écran [Recher simple] s'affiche après une pression sur [Recher simple] si [Carnet adresses par défaut] est réglé sur [Index] dans [Régl.Utilisateur] - [Param. Affichage Perso] - [Paramètres Numérisation/Fax] dans le menu Utilitaires. No. Élément Description 1 [Type d'adresse] Enregistre les adresses par type enregistré. 1 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-38 bizhub 652/552 7.6 Index L'écran Index apparaît à la lettre qui a été spécifiée lors de l'enregistrement. L'écran [Index] s'affiche après une pression sur [Recher simple] si [Carnet adresses par défaut] est réglé sur [Type d'adresse] dans [Régl.Utilisateur] - [Param. Affichage Perso] - [Paramètres Numérisation/Fax] dans le menu Utilitaires. Recherche détaillée Entrez le nom de la destination ou une partie de l'adresse pour rechercher l'adresse correspondante. Sélectionnez [Nom] ou [Destinataire] et entrez une lettre d'index. No. Élément Description 1 [Index] Affiche les destinations pour chaque index enregistré. 1 bizhub 652/552 7-39 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Recherche détaillée - Options recherche A l'écran Option Recherche, sélectionnez une condition pour l'affichage des options de recherche. Sélectionnez les conditions de recherche supplémentaires et appuyez sur [Valider]. Référence - Pour configurer l'affichage de l'écran option recherche et des options correspondantes, utilisez [Paramètres Option Recherche] au menu Réglage. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 7.6.2 Saisie directe Permet d'entrer comme destinataire une destination non enregistrée. Référence - Lorsque Saisie Manuelle Destination est réglé sur Gestion Individuelle dans [Réglages Sécurité] dans Réglages Administrateur, la saisie directe n'est pas disponible sauf pour Fax. 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-40 bizhub 652/552 7.6 7.6.3 Saisie directe - Fax Entrez le numéro de Fax sur l'écran tactile. Prochaine Destination Appuyez sur cette touche pour continuer à spécifier d'autres destinataires. Quand la fonction Confirm. Adresse (Émiss) est spécifiée : vous êtes invité à ressaisir le numéro de fax après avoir appuyé sur [OK]. Réintroduisez le numéro de fax et appuyez sur [Départ]. Référence - [Prochaine Dest.] peut être sélectionné sur le deuxième écran de saisie. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Confirm. Adresse (Émiss), voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 7.6.4 Saisie dir. - E-Mail Entrez l'adresse e-mail sur l'écran tactile. Référence - Vous pouvez enregistrer les noms d'utilisateur ou les noms de domaine fréquemment utilisés pour les rappeler afin d'envoyer des messages E-mail. Avant d'utiliser cette fonction, il faut enregistrer le préfixe et le suffixe dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur le préfixe et le suffixe, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. Prochaine Destination Appuyez sur cette touche pour continuer à spécifier d'autres destinataires. bizhub 652/552 7-41 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.6.5 Saisie directe - FAX Internet Entrez l'adresse e-mail sur l'écran tactile. Référence - Vous pouvez enregistrer les noms d'utilisateur ou les noms de domaine fréquemment utilisés pour les rappeler afin d'envoyer des messages E-mail. Avant d'utiliser cette fonction, il faut enregistrer le préfixe et le suffixe dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur le préfixe et le suffixe, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. Prochaine Destination Appuyez sur cette touche pour continuer à spécifier d'autres destinataires. Capacité Réception Récepteur Sélectionnez les réglages recevables au niveau de la destination du Fax Internet. Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs paramètres appropriés. Élément Description [Type Compression] Sélectionnez JPEG (couleur), JPEG (niv. de gris), MMR, MR ou MH. [Format papier] Sélectionnez A3, B4 ou A4. [Définition] 600e600 dpi (Ultra Fin), 400e400 dpi (Super Fin), 200e200 dpi (Fin) ou 200e100 dpi (standard). 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-42 bizhub 652/552 7.6 7.6.6 Saisie directe - Fax Adr. IP Entrez la destination du Fax Adresse IP. 7.6.7 Saisie Directe - PC (SMB) Entrez directement l'adresse du PC (SMB). Nom Serveur Spécifiez le nom d'hôte ou l'adresse IP du destinataire sur l'écran tactile. Chemin fichier Entrez le chemin du dossier de destination sur l'écran tactile. Nom d'utilisateur Entrez le nom de l'utilisateur connecté sur l'écran tactile. Élément Description [Destinataire] Entrez l'adresse IP (nom serveur) ou l'adresse E-mail de la destination. [No. de port] Entrez au clavier le numéro de port d'envoi (entrez une valeur de 1 à 65535). [Type Destination Machine] Sélectionnez [Couleur] si la machine de destination accepte l'impression couleur. [Prochaine Destination] Appuyez sur cette touche pour continuer à spécifier d'autres destinataires. bizhub 652/552 7-43 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Mot de passe Entrez le code d'accès de l'utilisateur connecté sur l'écran tactile. Référence Vérifiez les informations du dossier sur l'ordinateur de destination. Prochaine Destination Appuyez sur cette touche pour continuer à spécifier d'autres destinataires. 7.6.8 Saisie directe - FTP Permet d'entrer directement l'adresse FTP. Nom Serveur Spécifiez le nom d'hôte ou l'adresse IP du destinataire sur l'écran tactile. Chemin fichier Entrez le chemin du dossier de destination sur l'écran tactile. Nom d'utilisateur Entrez le nom de l'utilisateur connecté sur l'écran tactile. Appuyez sur [Anonyme] puis entrez "Anonyme". Mot de passe Entrez le code d'accès de l'utilisateur connecté sur l'écran tactile. Paramètres Détaillés Appuyez sur cette touche pour configurer des réglages plus détaillés. Prochaine Destination Appuyez sur cette touche pour continuer à spécifier d'autres destinataires. Élément Description [No de port] Entrez un numéro de port. [Mode PASV] Spécifiez s'il faut utiliser le mode PASV (Passif). [Proxy] Spécifiez s'il faut utiliser ou non un serveur proxy. 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-44 bizhub 652/552 7.6 7.6.9 Saisie directe - WebDAV Entrez directement la destination WebDAV. Nom Serveur Spécifiez le nom d'hôte ou l'adresse IP du destinataire sur l'écran tactile. Chemin fichier Entrez le chemin du dossier de destination sur l'écran tactile. Nom d'utilisateur Entrez le nom de l'utilisateur connecté sur l'écran tactile. Mot de passe Entrez le code d'accès de l'utilisateur connecté sur l'écran tactile. Paramètres Détaillés Appuyez sur cette touche pour configurer des réglages plus détaillés. Prochaine Destination Appuyez sur cette touche pour continuer à spécifier d'autres destinataires. Élément Description [No de port] Entrez un numéro de port. [Proxy] Spécifiez s'il faut utiliser ou non un serveur proxy. [Paramètres SSL] Spécifiez s'il faut ou non utiliser le protocole SSL pour l'envoi. bizhub 652/552 7-45 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.6.10 Vérif. histor L'Historique des tâches affiche les cinq dernières destinations de fax envoyés par cette machine. Vous pouvez sélectionner les destinations dans cet historique. 7.6.11 Recherche Adresse L'onglet [Rech. Adresse] s'affiche lorsque le serveur LDAP est configuré dans Réglages Administrateur. Référence - Pour plus d'informations sur les paramètres du serveur LDAP, voir [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau] - Activation LDAP. - La position d'affichage de l'onglet [Rech. Adresse] varie en fonction des réglages utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-46 bizhub 652/552 7.6 7.6.12 Recherche LDAP - Recherche simple Entrez un mot-clé de recherche et appuyez sur [Lancer recherche] pour rechercher l'adresse de destination sur le serveur LDAP spécifié. 7.6.13 Recherche LDAP - Recherche Avancée Spécifiez plusieurs conditions de recherche pour chercher l'adresse cible. Nom Entrez le nom sur l'écran tactile. Adr. E-Mail Entrez l'adresse e-mail sur l'écran tactile. Numéro de Fax Entrez le numéro de Fax sur l'écran tactile. Nom Entrez le nom de famille sur l'écran tactile. Prénom Entrez le prénom sur l'écran tactile. Ville Entrez le nom de la ville sur l'écran tactile. bizhub 652/552 7-47 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Nom Entreprise Entrez le nom de la société sur l'écran tactile. Département Entrez le département sur l'écran tactile. OU/ET/DÉBUT/FINIT PAR Sélectionnez les conditions de recherche parmi OU, ET, DÉBUT ou FINIT PAR. Si aucune condition n'est spécifiée, appuyez sur [Non]. 7.6.14 Présentation des réglages document Configurez les réglages document comme la résolution ou le type de fichier. 7.6.15 Réglages Document - Définition Sélectionnez la résolution pour l'émission de fax. Référence - Cette fonction n'est pas disponible en cas d'exécution de Lier EMI. 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-48 bizhub 652/552 7.6 7.6.16 Réglages Document - Type Fichier Spécifiez le type de fichier des données à transmettre. Type Fichier Les types de fichier disponibles sont les suivants. Référence - JPEG ne peut être sélectionné lorsque plusieurs documents sont liés pour être envoyés. - Si vous sélectionnez JPEG, [Séparation Page] est automatiquement sélectionné et réglé sur [1 Chaq. X page(s)] dans Réglage Numérisation. - Vous pouvez spécifier le format de compression lors de l'enregistrement d'un fichier TIFF en couleurs. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. - Impossible de sélectionner un PDF compact pendant l'envoi d'une tâche enregistrée dans une boîte depuis le pilote d'imprimante. Cryptage Si le format de fichier [PDF] ou [PDF compact] est sélectionné, vous pouvez spécifier le niveau de cryptage. Élément Description [PDF] Enregistre les données au format PDF. [PDF Compact] Fichier PDF davantage compressé. [TIFF] Enregistre les données au format TIFF. [JPEG] Enregistre les données au format JPEG. [XPS] Enregistre les données au format XPS. [XPS Compact] Enregistre les données dans un fichier XPS, davantage compressé. bizhub 652/552 7-49 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Cryptage - Paramètres Détaillés Configurez les réglages de permission détaillés lorsque les autorisations relatives au document permission sont spécifiées dans [Cryptage]. Appuyez sur [Suivt. ] pour configurer en détail les réglages Modifier Permissions. Élément Description [Niveau de cryptage] Sélectionnez le niveau de cryptage. [Mot de passe] Configurez cet élément si vous sélectionnez le code d'accès pour le type de cryptage. Entrez le code d'accès nécessaire à l'ouverture des données cryptées (32 caractères max.). Pour confirmation, saisissez deux fois le mot de passe. [Permissions Document] Configurez cet élément si vous sélectionnez le code d'accès pour le type de cryptage. Entrez le mot de passe nécessaire au changement des permissions document (32 caractères max.). Pour confirmation, saisissez deux fois le mot de passe. Élément Description [Impression Autorisée] Indiquez si vous souhaitez autoriser ou interdire l'impression des données. [Basse résolution] apparaît quand Niveau de cryptage est réglé sur [Niveau Élevé]. [Extraire Documents/ Images] Sélectionnez s'il faut permettre ou interdire l'extraction d'images texte. 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-50 bizhub 652/552 7.6 Surimpression Tampon Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner la manière de composer le contenu à intégrer au Tampon/Surimpression. Élément Description [Modifier Permissions] Sélectionnez le niveau d'autorisation concernant les modifications du document, y compris la signature, l'introduction ou le commentaire de données. bizhub 652/552 7-51 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 PDF Contours PDF Outline peut être sélectionné quand PDF compact est sélectionné comme type de fichier. Cette fonction procède au traitement des contours des caractères garantissant une image d'affichage lisse. Elle est également disponible lors de la modification de données avec une application telle que Adobe Illustrator. dPour info Cette fonction vous permet de spécifier la précision du traitement des contours lors de la création de données PDF Contours. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Réglage Numérisation Spécifiez un ensemble de données. Élément Description [Image] Sélectionnez ce réglage pour insérer le texte sous forme d'image. [Texte] Sélectionnez ce réglage pour insérer le texte en tant que texte. • La date, l'heure, le numéro de page, la tête ou le pied de page est intégré comme texte. • Le tampon est composé comme une image. Élément Description [Multi Page] Enregistre toutes les données numérisées dans un seul fichier. Cet élément ne peut pas être spécifié en même temps que le type de fichier JPEG. [Séparation Page] Scinde les données numérisées pour enregistrer dans un seul fichier chaque nombre de pages spécifié. Entrez au clavier le nombre de pages à enregistrer dans un fichier. • [Séparation Page] ne peut être sélectionné lorsque plusieurs documents sont liés pour être envoyés. [Méthode Fichier Joint E-mail] Spécifier la méthode à utiliser pour joindre un fichier à un E-mail si Séparation Page est sélectionné. • [Tous fich. envoyés comme un (1) e-mail] : joint tous les fichiers à un seul E-mail. • [Un (1) fichier par e-mail] : joint un fichier à un E-mail. 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-52 bizhub 652/552 7.6 7.6.17 Réglages Document - Couleur Configurez les réglages couleur pour les documents à envoyer. Les données qui ont été enregistrés avec cette machine contiennent les données couleur même si elles sont enregistrées en niveaux de gris ou en noir et blanc ; elles peuvent donc être changées en couleur lors de l'envoi. Référence - Cette fonction n'est pas disponible en cas d'exécution de Lier EMI. - Un document qui a été enregistré en niveaux de gris ou en noir et blanc avec une autre machine ne contient pas les données couleur ; il ne peut donc pas être changé en couleur lors de l'envoi. 7.6.18 Présentation des Réglages de Communication Configurez les lignes de communication, la signature numérique et autres réglages de communication. Élément Description [Utiliser réglage couleur existant] Envoie les documents avec le réglage couleur utilisé lors de l'enregistrement. [Couleurs] Envoie les documents en couleurs. [Niv.Gris] Envoie les documents en niveaux de gris. [Noir] Envoie les documents en noir et blanc. bizhub 652/552 7-53 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.6.19 Réglages de Communication - Réglages Ligne Description des réglages Ligne Configurez les réglages Ligne pour la transmission fax. EMI Outremer Permet d'envoyer des fax à des destinations où les conditions de communication sont médiocres et où la vitesse de transmission est faible. Référence - Cette fonction ne peut pas être utilisée en même temps que les fonctions suivantes. – Émission en relève (TX) – Réception en relève – Bulletin d'affichage ECM OFF Le Mode de Correction d'erreurs (ECM) est désactivé pour l'envoi des données. L'ECM est un mode de correction d'erreur défini par l'ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector). Les télécopieurs équipés d'un dispositif ECM communiquent entre-eux en confirmant que les données envoyées sont sans erreurs. Ainsi, la communication peut être facilitée par l'absence de perturbations dues aux bruits sur la ligne, etc. Si la présence de bruits est fréquente, la communication peut prendre un tout petit peu plus de temps que lorsque l'ECM est désactivé. A la fin de l'opération d'envoi, la machine active automatiquement ECM ON. Référence - Cette machine envoie des fax avec la fonction ECM activée (ECM ON) par défaut sauf si ECM OFF est spécifié. - Cette fonction ne peut pas être utilisée en même temps que les fonctions suivantes. – Réception en relève – Émission en relève (TX) – V.34 Désactivé – Enregistrement Bulletin – Réception Relève Bulletin V.34 Désactivé Le mode de communication V34 est utilisée pour les communications Super G3 par télécopie. Toutefois lorsque la machine distante ou cette machine est connectée à une ligne via un standard (autocommutateur PBX), les conditions de la ligne téléphonique peuvent faire obstacle à l'établissement d'une communication en mode Super G3 mode. Dans ce cas, il est recommandé de désactiver le mode V34 pour envoyer les données. Une fois l'émission terminée, cette machine repasse automatiquement en mode V34. Référence - Cette fonction ne peut pas être utilisée en même temps que les fonctions suivantes. – Réception en relève – Émission en relève (TX) 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-54 bizhub 652/552 7.6 – Enregistrement Bulletin – Réception Relève Bulletin – ECM OFF Vérif. Dest. & envoyer Le numéro de fax spécifié est comparé au numéro de fax distant (CSI) et les données ne sont envoyées que lorsque ces numéros de fax correspondent. S'ils ne correspondent pas, la communication échoue, évitant ainsi une erreur d'émission. Référence - Pour utiliser la fonction Vérif.Dest.& envoyer, il faut préalablement enregistrer le numéro de fax local dans la machine distante. Sélection ligne Vous pouvez spécifier [Ligne 1] ou [Ligne 2] pour envoyer des données quand deux kits Fax en option sont installés. Spécifiez la ligne utilisée pour la transmission. Si vous sélectionnez [Non réglé], c'est la Ligne 1 ou la Ligne 2 qui sera utilisée pour la transmission, selon celle qui est disponible. Si les deux lignes sont libres, la Ligne 1 est utilisée en premier. Référence - Vous ne pouvez pas spécifier une ligne quand [Configuration Ligne 2] est réglé sur [Récept. seulement] dans [Réglage multi lignes]. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Réglage multi lignes, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. - Dans le cas de l'utilisation de deux lignes extérieures ou d'extension, veillez à spécifier la ligne que vous utiliserez. Si vous sélectionnez [Non réglé], une erreur d'envoi peut survenir. 7.6.20 Réglages de Communication - Réglages E-Mail Paramètres E-Mail Spécifiez le nom du document, le sujet, l'adresse d'origine et le corps du message pour l'envoi de messages E-mail. Nom Document Le nom du fichier à enregistrer est affiché. Ce nom du document peut aussi être spécifié sur l'écran [Classer document]. Le nom du document y compris celui spécifié par la suite sera appliqué à cette colonne. Le nombre maximum de caractères autorisé est de 30. bizhub 652/552 7-55 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Titre Le texte spécifié au menu Utilitaires s'affiche automatiquement. Appuyez sur [Saisie dir.] pour modifier le contenu. Le nombre maximum de caractères est de 64. De Affiche l'adresse E-mail de l'Administrateur spécifié dans le menu Utilitaires. Référence - L'adresse e-mail de cette machine est utilisée pour le fax Internet. - Il n'est pas possible de saisir directement l'adresse lorsque [Changer l'adresse expéditeur] est réglé sur Interdit dans les réglages Administrateur - [Réglage Système] - [Accès Restreint Utilisateur] - [Accès Restreint à Param. Tâches]. Pour plus de détails sur le réglage [Changer l'adresse expéditeur], voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-56 bizhub 652/552 7.6 Corps de texte Le corps du texte de l'e-mail tel que spécifié au menu Utilitaires s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Saisie dir.] pour modifier le contenu. La saisie peut comporter 256 caractères maximum. 7.6.21 Réglages de Communication - Paramètres URL Dest. URL Dest. La fonction URL Destination permet de spécifier l'adresse E-mail à laquelle l'achèvement d'une tâche et l'emplacement des données peuvent être notifiées. L'URL contient des informations pointant vers une boîte. Cliquez sur le lien inclus dans le texte pour accéder directement à l'écran de la boîte. Référence - Les destinations que vous pouvez spécifier pour le réglage de l'URL de notification englobent les destinations Boîte de la machine principale, FTP, PC (SMB) et WebDAV. - Paramètres URL Dest. n'est pas actif lors de l'envoi de messages E-mail ou de fax. - Si le mode d'authentification ou le code d'accès Boîte est activé, l'écran de saisie du code d'accès correspondant au mode d'authentification en vigueur apparaît. À l'issue de tous les processus d'authentification, l'écran Boîte apparaît. bizhub 652/552 7-57 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Recherche détaillée Vous pouvez faire une recherche d'adresses e-mail a partir des destinations enregistrées. Entrez le nom de la destination ou une partie de l'adresse pour rechercher l'adresse correspondante. Sélectionnez [Nom] ou [Destinat.] et entrez une lettre d'index. Saisie directe Entrez l'adresse e-mail sur l'écran tactile. Référence - Vous pouvez enregistrer les noms d'utilisateur ou les noms de domaine fréquemment utilisés pour les rappeler afin d'envoyer des messages E-mail. Avant d'utiliser cette fonction, il faut enregistrer le préfixe et le suffixe dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur le préfixe et le suffixe, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-58 bizhub 652/552 7.6 7.6.22 Réglages de Communication - Réglage Méthod Comm. Spécifiez la méthode d'émission ou de réception des données. Émission différée Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi. L'envoi des fax aux heures de tarif réduit tel que la nuit ou le matin tôt peut réduire les coûts de communication. Utilisez le clavier pour spécifier l'heure de début de la communication. Référence - Elle est spécifiée en heures et en minutes. - Il n'est pas possible de spécifier la date. bizhub 652/552 7-59 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Transmission par code (Mot Passe Émission) Cette fonction permet d'envoyer un document en y joignant le code d'accès. Si le télécopieur du destinataire est paramétré pour les réceptions en réseau fermé, le télécopieur de l'expéditeur devrait envoyer un fax avec le même mot de passe que le mot de passe de réception en réseau fermé. Référence - Cette fonction ne peut être utilisée que si la machine distante est un de nos modèles et si elle est compatible avec la réception en réseau fermé. - Entrez le code d'accès au clavier. Transmission F-Code (FonctionTX Code F) Cette fonction permet d'envoyer des documents à une Boîte utilisateur spécifique de la machine distante, en entrant l'Adresse Secondaire et le Mot de passe. La transmission F-Code peut être utilisée pour les transmissions sécurisées et les transmissions relais. Référence - Pour pouvoir utiliser F-Code pour l'émission, la machine distante doit être compatible avec cette fonction. Élément Description Émiss. sécurisée Les documents sont envoyés sur la Boîte de réception confidentielle de la machine distante. Entrez le numéro de la Boîte de destination dans la boîte d'adresse secondaire et entrez le mot de passe dans la boîte Mot de passe. Émission relais Les documents sont envoyés sur la Boîte utilisateur de distribution relais de la machine distante, lorsque la machine distante est compatible avec la fonction de distribution relais. Entrez le numéro de la boîte Relais dans le champ Adresse SUB et le code d'accès dans la case Code d'accès. 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-60 bizhub 652/552 7.6 7.6.23 Réglages de Communication - Cryptage E-Mail Cet élément s'affiche lorsque [Réglages Communication S/MIME] est réglé sur [Activé] dans Réglages Administrateur - [Paramètres réseau] - [Réglages E-Mail]. Spécifiez s'il faut crypter les e-mails envoyés depuis cette machine. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur les réglages de communication S/MIME, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. 7.6.24 Réglages de Communication - Signature numérique Cet élément s'affiche lorsque [Réglages Communication S/MIME] est réglé sur [Activé] dans Réglages Administrateur - [Paramètres réseau] - [Réglages E-Mail]. Sélectionnez s'il faut ajouter une signature numérique aux e-mails envoyés depuis cette machine. Référence - En fonction des Réglages Communication S/MIME, il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas ajouter de signature numérique ou que vous soyez obligé d'en ajouter une. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur les réglages de communication S/MIME, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. 7.6.25 Réglages de Communication - Réglages En-tête Fax Spécifiez s'il faut joindre l'identifiant de l'expéditeur (TTI) lors de l'envoi des documents. Sélectionnez le nom de l'expéditeur dans la liste des noms d'expéditeur. Référence - Pour enregistrer le contenu des Informations d'en-tête à ajouter à l'original, utilisez [Informations En-tête] dans le menu Utilitaires. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. - Pour enregistrer les modalités d'intégration des Informations d'en-tête, utilisez [Position En-tête/Pied pag] dans le menu Utilitaires. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. bizhub 652/552 7-61 7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.6.26 Présentation des réglages Applications Configurez les autres réglages (Tampon/Surimpression et Impress. par page) disponibles pour envoyer les documents. 7.6.27 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-21. 7.6.28 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-22. 7.6.29 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon Permet d'imprimer sur les pages une chaîne de caractères prédéfinie, comme "URGENT" par exemple. Élément Description [Type Tampon/ Tampons prédéfinis] Sélectionnez un type de tampon, comme par exemple URGENT, REPONSE SOUHAITEE ou COPIE INTERDITE. Pages Sélectionnez si la date et l'heure doivent être imprimés sur toutes les pages ou uniquement sur la première page. [Taille Texte] Sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer, entre Minimal ou Standard. [Couleur texte] Sélectionnez la couleur d'impression parmi Noir, Rouge, Bleu, Vert, Jaune, Cyan et Magenta. [Position Impress.] Spécifier la position d'impression. Pour procéder à un réglage plus fin de la position d'impression, appuyez sur [Ajuster Position]. Spécifiez la longueur du décalage de la position d'impression vers la gauche, la droite, le haut et le bas en indiquant une valeur comprise entre 1/16 et 1-15/16 pouces (0,1 et 50,0 mm). 7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-62 bizhub 652/552 7.6 7.6.30 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - En-tête/Pied de page Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-30. 7.6.31 Applications - Impress. par page Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer les documents lors de l'émission. Configurez aussi les réglages d'impression. Élément Description [Copies] Utilisez le pavé numérique pour saisir le nombre de copies. Vous pouvez spécifier un nombre compris entre 1 et 9999. [Recto/ Recto-Verso] Sélectionnez Recto ou Recto-Verso. [Agraf.] Sélectionnez s'il faut agrafer les feuilles imprimées. [Réglage] - [Position - Agrafage] Si vous sélectionnez le type d'agrafage, spécifiez la position. bizhub 652/552 7-63 7.7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7.7.1 Présentation des réglages Archivage Vous pouvez renommer ou supprimer les documents enregistrés dans une Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe afin de pouvoir organiser les documents dans la boîte. Les fonctions disponibles sont les suivantes. Description de l'onglet Réglages Archivage Appuyez sur [Réglages Archivage] pour afficher l'écran suivant. Les éléments de réglage disponibles pour [Réglages Archivage] sont les suivants. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur les autres éléments, voir page 7-3. Élément Description Supprimer Supprime un document devenu inutile, comme un document déjà envoyé ou imprimé. Modif. Nom Permet de renommer un document enregistré. Déplacer Déplace dans une autre boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe les données d'un document enregistré. Copie Copie dans une autre boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe les données d'un document enregistré. Enregistrer dans mémoire externe Enregistre un document d'une boîte utilisateur vers une mémoire externe connectée à cette machine. Détails Document Permet de vérifier la date et l'heure où un document a été enregistré ainsi que de contrôler l'image d'aperçu. No. Élément Description 1 [Supprimer] Supprime le document sélectionné. 2 [Modif. Nom] Permet de renommer le document sélectionné. 3 [Déplacer] Configurez les réglages permettant de déplacer le document sélectionné. 4 [Copie] Configurez les réglages permettant de copier le document sélectionné. 5 [Enregistrer dans Mémoire externe] Enregistre le document sélectionné dans la mémoire externe. 2 3 4 5 1 7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-64 bizhub 652/552 7.7 7.7.2 Suppression de documents Vous pouvez supprimer des fichiers devenus inutiles, comme les fichiers déjà imprimés. Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs fichiers et les supprimer en une seule fois. Après avoir vérifié les détails du document, appuyez sur [Supprimer]. 7.7.3 Modif. Nom Permet de renommer un document enregistré. Entrez un nouveau nom sur l'écran tactile. Référence - Une fois défini, le nouveau nom du document sera utilisé comme nom de fichier. Notez que si vous renommez le document que vous envisagez d'envoyer, il faut tenir compte des critères de nom et autres conditions incontournables établies par le serveur de destination. - Au besoin, il est possible de renommer le document juste avant de l'envoyer. 7.7.4 Déplacer les documents Permet de déplacer dans une autre boîte un document enregistré. Une boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe peut être sélectionnée comme boîte de destination. Sélectionnez la boîte de destination, vérifiez les données du document et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle ou [Départ] sur l'écran tactile. Référence - Le contenu de l'affichage d'une boîte Privé ou Groupe varie en fonction de l'utilisateur connecté. - Il n'est pas nécessaire d'entrer le code d'accès même s'il est spécifié dans la boîte de destination. bizhub 652/552 7-65 7.7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 7.7.5 Copie Copie dans une autre boîte les données d'un document enregistré. Une boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe peut être sélectionnée comme boîte de destination. Sélectionnez la boîte de destination, vérifiez les données du document et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle ou [Départ] sur l'écran tactile. Référence - Le contenu de l'affichage d'une boîte Privé ou Groupe varie en fonction de l'utilisateur connecté. - Il n'est pas nécessaire d'entrer le code d'accès même s'il est spécifié dans la boîte de destination. 7.7.6 Enregistrer dans mémoire externe Vous pouvez enregistrer un document archivé dans une Boîte utilisateur vers une mémoire externe. Appuyez sur [Réglages Document] pour configurer les réglages d'un document à enregistrer. Référence - Pour plus d'informations sur la mémoire externe, voir page 7-97. - Vous pouvez enregistrer plusieurs documents ensemble. - Il est impossible de renommer un document pendant qu'il est en cours d'enregistrement. Avant d'enregistrer un document, changez le nom du fichier comme vous le souhaitez. 7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-66 bizhub 652/552 7.7 Réglages Document Vous pouvez spécifier la résolution, le type de fichier et la couleur du document à enregistrer. Si vous sélectionnez plusieurs documents, les réglages s'appliquent à tous les documents. Réglages Document - Définition Sélectionnez la définition du document à enregistrer. bizhub 652/552 7-67 7.7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7 Réglages Document - Type Fichier Lors de la spécification du type de fichier, sélectionnez [Oui]. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. Réglages Document - Couleur Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-52. 7.7.7 Détails Document Vérifiez les détails d'un document enregistré sur l'écran tactile. Affichage des Informations détaillées Sélectionnez un document et appuyez sur [Détails Document] pour en vérifier les informations. Les informations suivantes sont affichées. Élément Description [Type Fichier] Sélectionnez le type du fichier à enregistrer. [Cryptage] Si le format de fichier PDF ou PDF compact est sélectionné, vous pouvez spécifier le niveau de cryptage. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-48. [PDF Contours] Configurez cet élément quand vous sélectionnez PDF compact comme type de fichier. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-51. Élément Description [Heure Enreg.] Affiche la date et l'heure d'enregistrement du document. [Nom utilisat.] Affiche le nom d'utilisateur ou le mode (NUMÉRIS., COPIE ou IMPRESSION) dans lequel le document a été enregistré. 7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7-68 bizhub 652/552 7.7 Aperçu Sur l'écran Détails du Document, appuyez sur [Aperçu] pour afficher un aperçu du document enregistré. Il est possible de visualiser l'image en taille réelle ou agrandie 2, 4 ou 8 fois. Après avoir changé de format d'affichage, utilisez les barres de défilement à droite et au bas de l'image pour visualiser la section voulue de l'image. Référence - S'il s'agit d'un document de plusieurs pages, seule l'image de la première page peut être affichée. [Nom Document] Affiche le nom du document. [No. de pages] Affiche le nombre de pages du document. [N° Tâche] Affiche le numéro de tâche d'enregistrement du document. [ ][ ] Si plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés, utilisez [ ] ou [ ] pour passer d'un document à l'autre. [Aperçu] Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer à l'écran Aperçu. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-68. Élément Description bizhub 652/552 7-69 7.8 Applications 7 7.8 Applications 7.8.1 Présentation des réglages Applications Vous pouvez modifier un document enregistré dans une boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe en changeant l'ordre des pages ou supprimer des pages du document. Vous pouvez aussi enregistrer l'image d'un document enregistré à superposer aux données imprimées. Les fonctions disponibles sont les suivantes. Description de l'onglet Applications Appuyez sur [Applications] pour afficher l'écran suivant. Les éléments de réglage disponibles pour [Réglages Application] sont les suivants. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur les autres éléments, voir page 7-3. Élément Description Modifier document Supprime, pivote ou déplace la page sélectionnée. Enregistrer la surimpression Enregistre l'image d'un document stocké afin de la superposer aux données imprimées. Détails Document Permet de vérifier la date et l'heure où un document a été enregistré ainsi que de contrôler l'image d'aperçu. No. Élément Description 1 [Modif. document] Supprime, pivote ou déplace la page sélectionnée. 2 [Enregistrer la surimpression] Enregistre l'image d'un document stocké afin de la superposer aux données imprimées. 1 2 7 Applications 7-70 bizhub 652/552 7.8 7.8.2 Modif. document Sélectionnez un document et appuyez sur [Modifier document]. L'écran Modifier document s'affiche. Pour voir l'image d'un document avant de le modifier, appuyez sur [Aperçu/Déf. Plage]. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-74. Modifier document - Suppr. page Vous pouvez supprimer une page spécifique d'un document enregistré. Vous pouvez par exemple supprimer les pages vierges afin de réduire le volume des données. 0 Si vous supprimez la page unique d'un document, c'est le document en entier qui sera supprimé. 0 Il vous sera impossible d'annuler la suppression ou de restaurer les pages supprimées car elles seront écrasées lors de la suppression. Si vous pensez avoir besoin de la version non modifiée du document, faites-en préalablement une copie de sauvegarde. Pour plus de détails sur la copie d'un document, voir page 7-65. 1 Sélectionnez une page à supprimer et appuyez sur [Suppr. page]. % Pour ne sélectionner que les pages impaires, appuyez sur [Pg Impaire]. % Pour ne sélectionner que les pages paires, appuyez sur [Pg paire]. % Après avoir sélectionné [Pg Impaire] ou [Pg paire], vous pouvez sélectionner la page désirée grâce à la touche de page ou annuler la sélection. 2 Vérifiez que la page spécifiée a été supprimée de l'écran. % Pour l'instant, la page spécifiée page n'est pas supprimée du document. % Dans cet exemple, les pages spécifiées (pages 1, 3 et 4) ont été supprimées. 3 Pour supprimer définitivement les pages, appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle. % Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Annuler] pour revenir à l'écran Application. bizhub 652/552 7-71 7.8 Applications 7 4 Vérifiez les informations affichées à l'écran. Pour supprimer les pages, sélectionnez [Enregistrer]. % Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Ne pas enregistrer] pour revenir à l'écran Modifier Document. Les pages sélectionnées sont supprimées et le document est enregistré. Modifier document - Pivoter Page Vous pouvez faire pivoter les pages spécifiées dans un document enregistré. Si vous avez numérisé un original recto-verso, le haut et le bas peuvent être inversés d'une page à l'autre ou l'orientation peut être différente en fonction de l'orientation de l'original. Dans ce cas, vous pouvez faire pivoter les pages sélectionnées de manière à visualiser l'intégralité du document plus facilement. 0 Il sera impossible de restaurer les pages car elles sont écrasées par l'opération de rotation. Si vous pensez avoir besoin de la version non modifiée du document, faites-en préalablement une copie de sauvegarde. Pour plus de détails sur la copie d'un document, voir page 7-65. 1 Sélectionnez une page à faire pivoter et appuyez sur [Pivoter Page]. % Pour ne sélectionner que les pages impaires, appuyez sur [Pg Impaire]. % Pour ne sélectionner que les pages paires, appuyez sur [Pg paire]. % Après avoir sélectionné [Pg Impaire] ou [Pg paire], vous pouvez sélectionner la page désirée grâce à la touche de page ou annuler la sélection. Les images d'aperçu des pages sélectionnées s'affichent en même temps que l'écran de réglage de rotation. 7 Applications 7-72 bizhub 652/552 7.8 2 En contrôlant l'image d'aperçu, sélectionnez l'angle de rotation. % Vous pouvez sélectionner un angle de rotation de 90 degrés à gauche, 90 degrés à droite ou 180 degrés. % Dans cet exemple, c'est [90° à gauche] qui est sélectionné. 3 Appuyez sur [OK]. 4 Si vous êtes sûr de vouloir faire pivoter les pages sélectionnées, appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle. % Dans cet exemple, les pages spécifiées (pages 1 et 2) ont fait l'objet d'une rotation. % Pour l'instant les données du document ne sont pas modifiées. 5 Vérifiez les informations affichées à l'écran. Pour pivoter les pages, sélectionnez [Enregistrer]. % Pour annuler le pivotement, appuyez sur [Ne pas enregistrer] pour revenir à l'écran Modifier Document. Les pages sélectionnées sont pivotées et le document est enregistré. bizhub 652/552 7-73 7.8 Applications 7 Modifier document - Déplacer Page Vous pouvez changer l'ordre des pages d'un document enregistré en déplaçant les pages spécifiées. 0 Il n'est pas possible de faire pivoter la page unique d'un document. 0 Il sera impossible de restaurer les pages car elles sont écrasées par l'opération de déplacement. Si vous pensez avoir besoin de la version non modifiée du document, faites-en préalablement une copie de sauvegarde. Pour plus de détails sur la copie d'un document, voir page 7-65. 0 Vous pouvez entrer directement le numéro de page correspondant à l'endroit où vous voulez déplacer la page sélectionnée. Ceci est utile lorsqu'un document se compose de plusieurs pages. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-75. 1 Sélectionnez une page à déplacer et appuyez sur [Déplacer Page]. % Le déplacement ne peut s'appliquer qu'à une seule page à la fois. Pour déplacer deux pages ou plus, répétez les étapes ci-dessus pour chacune des pages que vous voulez déplacer. % L'exemple montre comment déplacer la page 6 et l'insérer entre les pages 2 et 3. L'écran de réglage de la destination s'affiche. 2 Sélectionnez la position de déplacement en vérifiant sur l'écran. % Pour déplacer la page sélectionnée au début du document, appuyez sur [Haut]. % Pour déplacer la page sélectionnée à la fin du document, appuyez sur [Dern Page]. % Pour déplacer la page sélectionnée et l'insérer entre deux pages, appuyez sur . 3 Appuyez sur [OK]. 7 Applications 7-74 bizhub 652/552 7.8 4 Si vous êtes sûr de vouloir faire déplacer la page sélectionnée, appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle. % Pour l'instant les données du document ne sont pas modifiées. 5 Vérifiez les informations affichées à l'écran. Pour déplacer la page, sélectionnez [Enregistrer]. % Pour annuler le déplacement, appuyez sur [Ne pas enregistrer] pour revenir à l'écran Modifier Document. La page sélectionnée est déplacée et le document est enregistré. Aperçu/Définir Plage Vous pouvez spécifier une étendue de pages et contrôler les images d'aperçu lorsque le document sélectionné comporte plusieurs pages. Vous pouvez aussi changer le format d'affichage. bizhub 652/552 7-75 7.8 Applications 7 Aperçu/Spécification par saisie Cet élément s'affiche lorsque [Déplacer Page] est sélectionné. Lorsque trop de pages sont enregistrées, spécifiez la page de destination en entrant le numéro de page. Voici la procédure permettant de spécifier la destination de l'opération de déplacement. 1 Dans l'écran Déplacer page, appuyez sur [Aperçu]. L'écran Aperçu/Spécifier par saisie s'affiche. 2 Affiche la page précédente ou la page suivante de la destination. % Appuyez sur [ Aperçu Page] ou [Page suiv. ] ou entrez le numéro de page au clavier et appuyez sur [Voir]. % Vous pouvez utiliser [Zoom] pour afficher les pages sélectionnées à la taille réelle ou agrandies 2, 4 ou 8 fois. Après avoir changé de format d'affichage, utilisez les barres de défilement à droite et au bas de l'image pour visualiser la section voulue de l'image. 3 Spécifiez la position d'insertion. Élément Description [ Aperçu Page] Permet un déplacement à la page précédente. [Page suiv. ] Appuyez sur cette touche un déplacement à la page suivante. [Zoom] Il est possible de visualiser l'image en taille réelle ou agrandie 2, 4 ou 8 fois. Après avoir changé de format d'affichage, utilisez les barres de défilement à droite et au bas de l'image pour visualiser la section voulue de l'image. [Régler Plage Pages] Spécifiez l'étendue des pages à vérifier. Entrez au clavier un numéro dans les champs respectifs [De:] et [A:]. Puis, appuyez sur [Afficher page] pour afficher un aperçu de la page de début ou de fin spécifiée. Pour définir les champs [De:] ou [A:] concernant la page en cours d'aperçu, sélectionnez la touche et appuyez sur [Adapter Affichage]. 7 Applications 7-76 bizhub 652/552 7.8 % Pour déplacer la page avant la page affichée, appuyez sur [Avant]. % Pour déplacer la page après la page affichée, appuyez sur [Après]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. 7.8.3 Enregistrer la surimpression Permet d'enregistrer comme image de surimpression un document conservé dans une boîte. Vous pouvez superposer à un document l'image sélectionnée au moyen de [Tampon/Surimpression] dans l'onglet Impression. Cette fonction est utile lorsque vous désirez imprimer les images (comme les logos d'une société ou d'un produit) qui ne sont pas proposées par cette machine (les éléments proposés par cette machine sont les tampons et numéros de page). Référence - Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 100 images de surimpression. - Si vous sélectionnez un document de plusieurs pages, c'est la première page qui est enregistrée comme image de surimpression. bizhub 652/552 7-77 7.8 Applications 7 Enregistrer la surimpression - Nouveau Permet d'enregistrer une nouvelle image de surimpression. 1 Sélectionnez un document et appuyez sur [Enregistrer la surimpression]. 2 Appuyez sur une touche image non enregistrée et appuyez sur [Nouveau]. 3 Entrez le nom de l'image de surimpression à enregistrer et appuyez sur [Valider]. % Le nombre maximum de caractères est de 16. 4 Appuyez sur [Départ]. 7 Applications 7-78 bizhub 652/552 7.8 Enregistrer la surimpression - Écraser Vous pouvez écraser l'image de surimpression enregistrée par une nouvelle. 1 Sélectionnez un document et appuyez sur [Enregistrer la surimpression]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche de l'image à écraser et appuyez sur [Écraser]. 3 Vérifiez le message qui s'affiche, sélectionnez [Écraser]. 4 Appuyez sur [Départ]. L'image de surimpression est écrasée. bizhub 652/552 7-79 7.8 Applications 7 Paramètres Détaillés Configurez le contraste de la dernière image de surimpression enregistrée ou écrasée. % Sélectionnez la touche de l'image de surimpression cible et appuyez sur [Paramètres Détaillés]. Après avoir configuré les réglages, appuyez sur [Valider]. Élément Description [Contraste] Spécifiez la densité de l'image. Entrez au clavier une valeur de densité entre 20 et 100%. 7 Boîte Utilisateur Bulletin Bord (Système) 7-80 bizhub 652/552 7.9 7.9 Boîte Utilisateur Bulletin Bord (Système) 7.9.1 Présentation des Boîtes Utilisateur Bulletin Bord La boîte Bulletin permet d'enregistrer un document à parcourir. Un document enregistré dans la boîte Bulletin est envoyé par la fonction Émission en relève lorsqu'une invitation à émettre est envoyée par la machine distante. 7.9.2 Écran Bte Util. Bulletin Bord Sélectionnez la [Bulletin Board Boîte Utilis.] dans l'onglet [Système] pour afficher les boîtes Bulletin enregistrées. Sélectionnez la boîte Bulletin qui contient le document enregistré dans cette machine. 7.9.3 Impression d'un document dans une boîte Bulletin Il permet d'imprimer un document enregistré dans la Boîte Bulletin. Vérifiez l'aperçu ou les informations du document, appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. 7.9.4 Suppression d'un document d'une boîte Bulletin Un seul document peut être enregistré dans une boîte Bulletin. Pour enregistrer un nouveau document dans la boîte Bulletin, supprimez le document qu'elle contient et envoyez un nouveau document dans la boîte Bulletin. Pour supprimer le document enregistré dans la boîte Bulletin, vérifiez sa source ou son heure d'enregistrement et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. bizhub 652/552 7-81 7.10 Boîte Émis. en relève (Système) 7 7.10 Boîte Émis. en relève (Système) 7.10.1 Présentation boîtes Émission en relève La boîte Émission en relève sert à enregistrer un document à envoyer en réponse à une demande de la part d'un destinataire. Le processus d'envoi et d'enregistrement d'un document spécifique dans la boîte Émission Dépôt s'appelle Émission en relève. 7.10.2 Impression d'un document dans la boîte Émission en relève Vous pouvez imprimer un document enregistré dans la boîte Émission en relève. Vérifiez l'aperçu ou les informations du document, appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Référence - Vous pouvez enregistrer un document dans la boîte Émission en relève en tant qu'image de surimpression. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une image de surimpression, voir page 7-77. 7.10.3 Suppression d'un document dans la boîte Émission en relève Un seul document peut être enregistré dans la boîte Émission en relève. Pour enregistrer un nouveau document dans la boîte Émission en relève, supprimez le document existant et procédez à l'émission en relève, du nouveau document. Pour supprimer le document enregistré dans la boîte Émission en relève, vérifiez sa source ou son heure d'enregistrement et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la procédure d'émission en relève, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 7 Boîte Utilisateur Document Sécurisé (Système) 7-82 bizhub 652/552 7.11 7.11 Boîte Utilisateur Document Sécurisé (Système) 7.11.1 Présentation de la boîte Document sécurisé La boîte Document Sécurisé permet d'enregistrer un document qui a été imprimé avec spécification de l'ID et du code d'accès. Pour imprimer un document, il faut enter l'ID et le code d'accès. La procédure d'authentification varie selon le réglage Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification dans Réglages Administrateur - [Paramètres Sécurité] - [Détails Sécurité]. Pour plus de détails, contactez l'Administrateur de cette machine. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un document sécurisé, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. 7.11.2 Procédure d'authentification 1 La procédure ci-dessous est à appliquer lorsque Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification est réglé sur [Mode 1] dans [Paramètres Sécurité] - [Détails Sécurité] de Réglages Administrateur. 7.11.3 Procédure d'authentification 2 La procédure ci-dessous est à appliquer lorsque Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification est réglé sur [Mode 2] dans [Paramètres Sécurité] - [Détails Sécurité] de Réglages Administrateur. Référence - En cas de sélection de [Mode 2], entrez le code d'accès pour chaque document même si l'ID est identique. C'est parce que vous devez d'abord sélectionner le document avant de saisir le code d'accès. C'est pour cette raison que le niveau de sécurité dans ce mode est plus élevé qu'en mode 1. Appuyez sur [Doc. Sécurisé Boîte Utilis.] Entrez l'ID du document sécurisé Entrez le code d'accès du document sécurisé Une liste de documents apparaît Sélectionnez le document à imprimer et procédez aux réglages d'impression Appuyez sur [Doc. Sécurisé Boîte Utilis.] Entrez l'ID du document sécurisé Une liste de documents apparaît Sélectionnez le document à imprimer et entrez le code d'accès du document sécurisé bizhub 652/552 7-83 7.11 Boîte Utilisateur Document Sécurisé (Système) 7 7.11.4 Impression - Impression Vous pouvez ajouter certaines fonctions à un document enregistré dans la boîte Document sécurisé lors de l'impression du document. Copies Utilisez le pavé numérique pour saisir le nombre de copies. Vous pouvez spécifier un nombre compris entre 1 et 9999. Impression Sélectionnez Recto ou Recto-Verso. Finition Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-10. Combinaison Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-13. Zoom Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-14. Marge page Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-16. Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-17. Tampon/Surimpression Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-20. 7 Boîte Utilisateur Document Sécurisé (Système) 7-84 bizhub 652/552 7.11 7.11.5 Réglages Archivage Permet de gérer un document enregistré dans la Boîte Utilisateur Document Sécurisé. Référence - Pour supprimer en une seule fois tous les documents dans la boîte Document sécurisé, sélectionnez [Réglages Boîte] - [Suppr. Docs Impr. Sécurisée] dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-19. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. Élément Description [Supprimer] Supprime un document devenu inutile, comme un document déjà imprimé. [Modif. nom] Permet de renommer un document enregistré. [Détails Document] Permet de vérifier la date et l'heure où un document a été enregistré ainsi que de contrôler l'image d'aperçu. bizhub 652/552 7-85 7.12 Boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. (boîte utilisateur Système) 7 7.12 Boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. (boîte utilisateur Système) 7.12.1 Présentation de la Boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. La boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. permet d'enregistrer dans la mémoire un document reçu et de l'imprimer selon les besoins. Lorsque la Réception Mémoire obligatoire est activée, un document reçu est automatiquement enregistré dans la boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. Pour vérifier un document enregistré dans la boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig., sélectionnez [Réception Mémoire Obligat. Boîte Utilis.] dans l'onglet [Système], puis entrez le code d'accès qui a été spécifié lorsque la réception Mémoire obligatoire a été activée. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la spécification du code d'accès pour la Réception Mémoire obligatoire, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 7.12.2 Impression Sélectionnez un document à imprimer et appuyez sur [Impression]. Une fois que le document spécifié a été imprimé, les données sont automatiquement supprimées. 7.12.3 Réglages Archivage Il est possible de gérer un document enregistré dans la boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. Élément Description [Supprimer] Permet de supprimer un document qui n'a pas besoin d'être imprimé. [Modif. Nom] Permet de renommer un document enregistré. [Détails Document] Permet de vérifier la date et l'heure où un document a été enregistré ainsi que de contrôler l'image d'aperçu. 7 Boîte Annotation (Système) 7-86 bizhub 652/552 7.13 7.13 Boîte Annotation (Système) 7.13.1 Présentation des fonctions Boîte Annotation Les boîtes Annotation servent à attribuer automatiquement un numéro aux documents enregistrés et à ajouter ce numéro lors de l'impression ou de l'envoi d'un document. Vous pouvez pré-enregistrer le numéro à attribuer lors de la création de la boîte et le changer lors de l'impression ou de l'envoi d'un document. Pour les fonctions que vous pouvez configurer lors de l'impression ou de l'envoi de documents, voir page 7-9 et les sections qui suivent. Sélectionnez [Annotation Boîte Utilis.] dans l'onglet [Système] et appuyez sur [Utilis/Archiv]. Les boîtes Annotation enregistrées s'affichent. Référence - Pour enregistrer la boîte Annotation, procédez depuis Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-16. - En ce qui concerne les types de numéros qui peuvent être imprimés dans les boîtes Annotation, voir page 7-89. - Pour imprimer les numéros spécifiés dans la boîte Annotation sans enregistrer un document dans la boîte, réglez le Délai suppression auto document sur [Rejeter]. Cette fonction est utile pour gérer les numéros qui sont ajoutés aux documents copiés. Spécifiez le Délai suppression auto document lorsque vous créez une boîte Annotation. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-16. Si vous ouvrez une boîte, vous pouvez configurer les réglages d'impression et d'émission. 7.13.2 Impression - Fonction de base Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-9. 7.13.3 Impression - Marge page Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-16. bizhub 652/552 7-87 7.13 Boîte Annotation (Système) 7 7.13.4 Impression - Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre- Couverture Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-17. 7.13.5 Impression - Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Insertion Feuille Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-19. 7.13.6 Impression - Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Chapitres Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-20. 7.13.7 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-21. 7.13.8 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-22. 7.13.9 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-23. 7.13.10 Préférences d'impression - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Protection Copie Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-24. 7.13.11 Préférences d'impression - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Pare-copie Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-26. 7.13.12 Impression - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-27. 7.13.13 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-28. 7.13.14 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Surimpression enregistrée Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-31. 7.13.15 Description de l'onglet Env. Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-33. 7.13.16 Env. - Saisie dir. - E-mail Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-40. 7.13.17 Env. - Saisie dir. - PC (SMB) Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-42. 7 Boîte Annotation (Système) 7-88 bizhub 652/552 7.13 7.13.18 Env. - Saisie dir. - FTP Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-43. 7.13.19 Env. - Saisie dir. - WebDAV Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-44. 7.13.20 Env. - Vérif. histor. Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-45. 7.13.21 Env. - Recherche LDAP - Recher simple Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-46. 7.13.22 Env. - Recherche LDAP - Recherche Avancée Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-46. 7.13.23 Env. - Réglages Document - Définition Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-47. 7.13.24 Env. - Réglages Document - Type Fichier Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-48. 7.13.25 Env. - Réglages Document - Couleur Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-52. 7.13.26 Env. - Réglage communication - Réglages E-Mail Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-54. 7.13.27 Env. - Réglage communication - Paramètres URL Dest. Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-56. 7.13.28 Env. - Réglage communication - Cryptage E-Mail Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-60. 7.13.29 Env. - Réglage communication - Signature numérique Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-60. 7.13.30 Env. - Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-61. 7.13.31 Env. - Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-61. bizhub 652/552 7-89 7.13 Boîte Annotation (Système) 7 7.13.32 Env. - Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-61. 7.13.33 Env. - Applications - Impress. par page Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-62. 7.13.34 Env. - Applications - Changer Texte Texte Numérotation Permet d'ajouter du texte au numéro à imprimer. Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 20 caractères. Date/Heure Sélectionnez le format de l'heure et de la date à imprimer. Contraste Sélectionnez le contraste des numéros d'annotation à imprimer. 7 Boîte Annotation (Système) 7-90 bizhub 652/552 7.13 Type Numéro Sélectionnez le format de sortie (nombre de chiffres) des numéros d'annotation à imprimer. Position d'impression Sélectionnez la position d'impression. bizhub 652/552 7-91 7.13 Boîte Annotation (Système) 7 7.13.35 Réglages Archivage Il est possible de gérer un document enregistré dans une boîte Annotation. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. 7.13.36 Applications - Enregistrer la surimpression Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-76. Élément Description [Supprimer] Supprime un document devenu inutile, comme un document déjà imprimé. [Modif. Nom] Permet de renommer un document enregistré. [Détails Document] Permet de vérifier la date et l'heure où un document a été enregistré ainsi que de contrôler l'image d'aperçu. 7 Boîte Ré-émission Fax (Système) 7-92 bizhub 652/552 7.14 7.14 Boîte Ré-émission Fax (Système) 7.14.1 Présentation de la Boîte Ré-émission Fax La boîte Retransmission Fax sert à enregistrer pour une durée prédéterminée, un document, qui n'a pu être envoyé, à l'issue du nombre de rappels spécifié dans Réglage Paramètre Ligne, parce que la machine distante était occupée. Cette boîte utilisateur vous permet de transférer ultérieurement un document enregistré ou de l'imprimer pour confirmation. Sélectionnez [Ré-émission Boîte Utilis.] dans l'onglet [Système] et appuyez sur [Utilis/Archiv]. La liste des documents enregistrés s'affichent. Référence - Avant qu'un document ne puisse être enregistré dans la boîte Retransmission Fax, il faut activer la boîte Retransmission Fax dans [Réglage fax] dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur ces réglages, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 7.14.2 Impression - Épreuve Avant de retransmettre un document enregistré, vous pouvez l'imprimer pour confirmation. Les données ne sont pas supprimées après avoir été imprimées. Sélectionnez un document à imprimer et appuyez sur [Épreuve]. Vérifiez les informations du document et appuyez sur [Départ]. 7.14.3 Env. - Fax Permet de retransmettre un document enregistré. Sélectionnez un document, sélectionnez l'onglet [Env.] et appuyez sur [Fax]. Référence - Vous pouvez spécifier une nouvelle destination lors de la retransmission d'un document. Vous pouvez spécifier la nouvelle destination dans Carnet d'adresses, Saisie dir. ou Historique tâches. - Vous pouvez configurer les Réglages Transmission lorsque vous retransmettez un document enregistré. Vous pouvez aussi configurer les réglages Ligne et les réglages En-tête Fax. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-53 et page 7-60. - Une fois que le document spécifié a été entièrement envoyé, les données sont automatiquement supprimées. bizhub 652/552 7-93 7.14 Boîte Ré-émission Fax (Système) 7 7.14.4 Réglages Archivage - Supprimer Arrête la retransmission et supprime le document voulu. Sélectionnez un document, sélectionnez l'onglet [Réglages Archivage] et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. 7 Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe (Système) 7-94 bizhub 652/552 7.15 7.15 Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe (Système) 7.15.1 Présentation de la Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe Si vous utilisez PageScope Web Connection ou PageScope Direct Print pour imprimer un fichier PDF enregistré avec un mot de passe spécifié ou si vous imprimez des données PDF cryptées enregistrées dans la mémoire externe, les données sont automatiquement conservées dans la boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe. Sélectionnez [PDF Cryptés Mot de Passe Boîte Utilis.] dans l'onglet [Système] et appuyez sur [Utilis/Archiv]. La liste des documents enregistrés s'affichent. Référence - Lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est activée sur cette machine, seules s'affichent les données PDF cryptées avec mot de passe qui ont été enregistrées par l'utilisateur connecté. 7.15.2 Impr/Enreg - Impr/Enreg Sélectionnez un document à imprimer ou enregistrer et appuyez sur [Impr/Enreg]. Lors de l'impression ou de l'enregistrement d'un document, entrez le mot de passe attribué au fichier PDF. Une fois l'impression ou l'enregistrement terminé, les documents de la Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe sont automatiquement supprimés. Référence - La commande d'impression émise par votre ordinateur spécifie s'il faut imprimer ou enregistrer. Vous ne pouvez pas modifier une commande d'impression en commande d'enregistrement ou inversement. 7.15.3 Réglages Archivage - Supprimer Vous pouvez supprimer un document enregistré si vous n'avez plus besoin de l'imprimer. Sélectionnez un document à supprimer et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. bizhub 652/552 7-95 7.16 Boîte Utilisat. ID & Imprimer (Système) 7 7.16 Boîte Utilisat. ID & Imprimer (Système) 7.16.1 Présentation de la Boîte ID & Imprimer Voir documents Cet élément apparaît quand les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont configurés. Un document enregistré dans cette boîte peut être imprimé par l'utilisateur du document lorsque l'utilisateur est connecté à cette machine. Lorsque vous imprimez sur cette machine un document depuis un ordinateur via le réseau en entrant le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe, le document est temporairement enregistré dans la boîte ID & Imprimer. % Sélectionnez [ID & Imprimer Boîte Utilis.] dans l'onglet [Système] et appuyez sur [Utilis/Archiv]. La liste des documents enregistrés s'affichent. Référence - Lorsque des documents enregistrés sont présents dans la boîte ID & Imprimer, les touches suivantes s'affichent dans l'écran de connexion. Entrez le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe et appuyez sur la touche désirée. – [Lancer Impression] : appuyez sur cette touche pour imprimer les documents enregistrés dans la boîte ID & Imprimer sans se connecter à cette machine. – [Impress. & Connexion] : appuyez sur cette touche pour vous connecter à cette machine et imprimer les documents enregistrés dans la boîte ID & Imprimer. – [Connexion] : appuyez sur cette touche pour vous connecter à cette machine mais sans imprimer les documents. Une fois connecté, vous pouvez imprimer ou supprimer des documents enregistrés dans la boîte ID & Imprimer. - Les documents peuvent être enregistrés dans la boîte ID & Imprimer même lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur n'est pas activée. De plus, les travaux enregistrés par des utilisateur Publics peuvent être enregistrés dans la boîte ID & Imprimer. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-24. - Une fois l'impression des documents terminée, les données de la boîte ID & Imprimer sont automatiquement supprimées. Un écran permettant de confirmer si vous voulez vraiment supprimer les données apparaît en fonction de la configuration des Réglages Administrateur. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'impression d'un document depuis un ordinateur dans la boîte ID & Imprimer, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. 7.16.2 Impression - Impression 1 Sélectionnez un document à imprimer et appuyez sur [Impression]. 7 Boîte Utilisat. ID & Imprimer (Système) 7-96 bizhub 652/552 7.16 2 Sélectionnez si le document doit être supprimé après impression. 7.16.3 Réglages Archivage - Supprimer Sélectionnez un document à supprimer et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. bizhub 652/552 7-97 7.17 Mémoire externe (Système) 7 7.17 Mémoire externe (Système) 7.17.1 Dispositif de mémoire externe Dispositifs de mémoire externe pris en charge Les critères relatifs aux dispositifs de mémoire externe pour cette machine sont les suivants. - Dispositif Mémoire Flash USB compatible avec l'interface USB (1.1/2.0) - Dispositif Mémoire formatée FAT32 - Une capacité mémoire jusqu'à 2 Go est recommandée. - La fonction Sécurité n'a pas été ajoutée, ou elle a été désactivée. Référence - Si la capacité mémoire excède 4 Go, la mémoire USB peut ne pas fonctionner correctement lorsqu'elle est connectée à cette machine. - La mémoire USB ne sera pas utilisable si elle est reconnue comme lecteur multiple par l'ordinateur. Connexion du dispositif de mémoire externe 0 Utilisez le connecteur USB situé du côté le plus proche du panneau de contrôle. N'utilisez pas le connecteur USB situé près du côté arrière car il sert pour les périphériques en option. 0 Ne pas déconnecter le dispositif de mémoire externe pendant l'enregistrement d'un document dans la mémoire externe ou pendant l'impression d'un document enregistré dans la mémoire externe. 0 N'utilisez pas de dispositif USB autre que la mémoire Flash USB (comme un disque dur ou hub USB). 0 Ne pas connecter ni déconnecter la mémoire USB tant que le sablier est visible sur le panneau de contrôle pendant que la machine est active. 0 ne pas déconnecter la mémoire USB juste après l'avoir connectée. % Raccordez le dispositif de mémoire externe au connecteur USB sur le côté latéral de la machine. Lorsque le dispositif de mémoire externe est raccordé, une icône apparaît en bas de l'écran et l'écran suivant s'affiche. Si vous voulez immédiatement utiliser la mémoire externe, sélectionnez le but prévu. Si vous n'utilisez pas la mémoire externe, sélectionnez [Fermer]. 7 Mémoire externe (Système) 7-98 bizhub 652/552 7.17 Référence - L'objet prévu de la mémoire externe à afficher varie en fonction des réglages de l'administrateur. 7.17.2 Écran Mémoire externe Lorsque le dispositif de mémoire externe est connecté, sélectionnez [Mémoire externe] pour afficher la structure des dossiers. Entrer un chemin de fichier Sur l'écran tactile, vous pouvez spécifier le chemin de fichier pointant vers le dossier contenant le document à imprimer. Appuyez sur [Chemin Fichier] et entrez le chemin de fichier. Référence - Assurez-vous que la longueur totale du chemin de fichier et du nom de fichier n'excède pas 250 caractères. Si le nombre de caractères dépasse cette limite, le fichier ne s'affiche pas. Sélectionner un fichier Vous pouvez imprimer les types de fichier suivants : PDF, JPEG, TIFF et XPS. Sélectionnez la liste un document de l'un de ces types. Référence - L'impression recto-verso, la perforation ou l'agrafage ne sont pas compatibles avec les fichiers JPEG et XPS. - L'impression n'est pas possible quand l'impression est interdite par les paramètres de sécurité d'un fichier PDF. - Cette machine prend en charge l'impression de fichiers PDF de Version 1.6 ou antérieure. - Seuls les fichiers d'un type autorisant l'impression s'affichent dans la liste. - L'accès au fichier échoue lorsque la longueur totale du chemin de fichier et du nom de fichier dépasse 250 caractères. - Au maximum, 200 fichiers imprimables peuvent être affichés dans le dossier du chemin de fichier spécifié. Si le dossier contient 200 fichiers ou plus, l'affichage de l'écran de la liste des fichiers risque de prendre plus de temps. Imprimer des données PDF cryptées Pour imprimer les données PDF cryptées enregistrées dans le dispositif de mémoire externe, sélectionnez les données sur l'écran Mémoire externe et imprimez les données. Lorsque la commande d'impression est émise, les données PDF cryptées de la mémoire externe sont enregistrées dans la boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe de cette machine. Accédez à la boîte PDF Crypté Mot de passe de cette machine et imprimez le document. dPour info Pour la boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe, voir page 7-94. bizhub 652/552 7-99 7.17 Mémoire externe (Système) 7 Déplacement vers le dossier parent Pour déplacer un fichier vers le dossier parent, appuyez sur [Haut]. Ouvrir un dossier Pour vérifier le contenu d'un dossier spécifique, appuyez sur [Ouvrir]. Impression Sélectionnez un document à imprimer et appuyez sur [Impression]. L'écran Détails Impression s'affiche. Détails Document Vous pouvez vérifier la date de modification, le nom de fichier et autres propriétés du document sélectionné. 7.17.3 Impression - Fonction de base Appuyez sur [Impression] pour afficher l'écran suivant. Copies Utilisez le pavé numérique pour saisir le nombre de copies. Vous pouvez spécifier un nombre compris entre 1 et 9999. Impression Sélectionnez Recto ou Recto-Verso. Position Reliure Si vous sélectionner Recto-Verso dans [Impression], sélectionnez la position de reliure. 7 Mémoire externe (Système) 7-100 bizhub 652/552 7.17 Finition Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-10. Référence - L'impression recto-verso, la perforation ou l'agrafage ne sont pas compatibles avec les fichiers JPEG et XPS. Papier Sélectionnez un magasin destiné au papier d'impression. 7.17.4 Impression - Applications Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-21. Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-22. Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-23. Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Protection Copie Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-24. Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Pare-copie Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-26. Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-27. Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-28. bizhub 652/552 7-101 7.18 Mobile/PDA (Système) 7 7.17.5 Réglages Archivage - Enreg. dans Boîte utilisateur Cette fonction permet d'enregistrer dans une Boîte utilisateur un document archivé dans la mémoire externe. Spécifiez la Boîte Utilisateur et le nom du document et appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. 7.18 Mobile/PDA (Système) Cette fonction vous permet d'imprimer un document archivé dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique via une communication Bluetooth ou d'enregistrer ce même document dans une Boîte utilisateur. 7.18.1 Environnement d'exploitation Les téléphones cellulaires et les agendas électroniques connectables sur cette machine et le fichier imprimable doivent remplir les conditions suivantes. Référence - Pour imprimer des documents à partir d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un agenda électronique, il vous fait le kit d'interface local EK-605. De même qu'il faut activer les réglages pour une communication Bluetooth. Contactez votre S.A.V au préalable. - Si vous ne pouvez pas accéder au fichier lien en essayant d'afficher un fichier XHTML, soit le document ne sera pas imprimé soit il sera imprimé dans un cadre noir selon le paramétrage dans les [Régl.Utilisateur] - [Réglage Mobile/PDA] - [Notif. Erreur Lien Fichier]. - Pour accéder au fichier de lien pour imprimer un fichier XHTML, les [Réglages WebDAV] de cette machine sont requis. - Pour utiliser un proxy pour la connexion, enregistrez un serveur proxy dans [Réglages Administrateur] - [Paramètres réseau] - [Réglages WebDAV] - [Réglages Client WebDAV] - [Adresse d'hôte] et réglez [Régl.Utilisateur] - [Réglage Mobile/PDA] - [Utilisation Serveur Proxy] sur [Activé]. - La vitesse de communication risque de chuter ou la communication risque d'être coupée en raison d'obstacles, d'un champ magnétique ou de l'électricité statique. - Les documents protégés et les données d'image risquent de ne pas être envoyés en fonction du réglage de sécurité du téléphone cellulaire ou de l'agenda électronique. Élément Description [Boîte utilis.] Sélectionnez la boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe pour y enregistrer des données. [Nom Document] Spécifiez le nom du document à enregistrer. • Si vous sélectionnez plusieurs fichiers, il n'est pas possible de spécifier le nom du document. Protocole de communication Bluetooth Ver. 2.0 + EDR Profil de prise en charge OPP/BPP/SPP Type de fichier pris en charge PDF/CPDF/XPS/CXPS/TIFF/JPEG/XHTML/RepliGo • Pour les types XHTML de fichier, la machine prend en charge le code de caractère d'UTF-8/Shift-JIS/ISO-8859 ainsi que les extensions de fichier de JPEG/ JPG/PNG. • Cette machine prend en charge RepliGo version 2.1.0.8. 7 Mobile/PDA (Système) 7-102 bizhub 652/552 7.18 7.18.2 Mobile/PDA - Imprimer Référence - Pour enregistrer dans une Boîte un fichier archivé dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique ou pour imprimer ce fichier, configurez à l'avance le réglage approprié dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-24. Pour utiliser une communication Bluetooth, le paramètre Bluetooth doit être activé sur cette machine. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. - Si l'authentification utilisateur est spécifiée sur cette machine, même un utilisateur enregistré ne peut imprimer de document à moins que l'impression depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique ne soit autorisée dans le réglage de la machine. Pour les questions relatives à l'authentification utilisateur, contactez l'administrateur de cette machine. Saisie du code PIN Si vous entrez un code PIN à 4 chiffres depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique, une connexion est établie et les données sont envoyées à cette machine pour l'impression. Référence - Recherchez le code PIN dans le manuel d'instructions ou les instructions de réglage du téléphone cellulaire ou de l'agenda électronique. Vérifier les préférences d'impression Vous pouvez vérifier un aperçu des réglages pour imprimer les données reçues. dPour info Pour configurer les paramètres d'impression, sélectionnez [Configuration Téléphone Cellulaire//PDA] dans le menu Utilitaires. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-12. bizhub 652/552 7-103 7.18 Mobile/PDA (Système) 7 7.18.3 Mobile/PDA - Enregistrer Saisie du code PIN Si vous entrez un code PIN à 4 chiffres depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique, une connexion est établie et les données sont envoyées à cette machine pour l'enregistrement dans une Boîte utilisateur. Référence - Recherchez le code PIN dans le manuel d'instructions ou les instructions de réglage du téléphone cellulaire ou de l'agenda électronique. 7 Mobile/PDA (Système) 7-104 bizhub 652/552 7.18 8 Réglages Boîte bizhub 652/552 8-3 8.1 Structure des menus Réglages Boîte 8 8 Réglages Boîte 8.1 Structure des menus Réglages Boîte Voici les menus et éléments permettant de configurer les réglages Boîte dans le menu Utilitaires. 8.1.1 Mode Utilisateur Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau 1 [Enregistrement 1-Touche/Boîte] 2 [Créer Boîte utilisateur] (p. 8-6) 1 [Boîte Utilisat. Public/Privé] (p. 8-6) [Nouveau] [Modifier] [Supprimer] 2 [Boîte Utilisat.] (p. 8-7) [Nouveau] [Modifier] [Supprimer] 3 [Boîte Relais] (p. 8-9) [Nouveau] [Modifier] [Supprimer] 2 [Régl. Utilisateur] 2 [Param. Affichage Perso] 3 [Réglages Boîte] (p. 8-10) [Onglet par Défaut] [Touche Raccourci 1] [Touc. Raccourci 2] [Réglage Mobile/ PDA] [Notif. Erreur Lien Fichier] (p. 8-11) [Utilisation Serveur Proxy] (p. 8-11) [Impression] (p. 8-12) [Impression] [Papier] [Finition] [Marge page] [Tampon/ Surimpression] 8 Structure des menus Réglages Boîte 8-4 bizhub 652/552 8.1 8.1.2 Réglages Administrateur Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau 1 [Réglage Système] 0 [Réglages Boîte] (p. 8-19) 1 [Supprimer Bte util. inutilisée] (p. 8-19) 2 [Supprimer Docs. Impr. sécurisée] (p. 8-19) 3 [Délai suppress Impress. sécuris] (p. 8-20) 4 [Délai suppress PDF cryptés] (p. 8-20) 5 [Délai suppress ID & Imprimer] (p. 8-21) 6 [Réglage attente doc] (p. 8-21) 7 [Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe] (p. 8-22) [Enregistrer document] [Imprimer Document] [Numéris. Document Mémoire Externe] 8 [Boîte Util. Autor./Interd.] (p. 8-22) 9 [Réglage ID & Imprimer Supprimer après impression] (p. 8-23) 0 [Réglage Délai Suppression Doc] (p. 8-23) bizhub 652/552 8-5 8.1 Structure des menus Réglages Boîte 8 3 [Enregistrement 1-Touche/Boîte] 2 [Créer Boîte utilisateur] (p. 8-15) 1 [Boîte Public/ Privé] (p. 8-6) [Nouveau] [Modifier] [Supprimer] [Supprimer Boîte Vide] (p. 8-7) 2 [Boîte Utilisat.] (p. 8-7) [Nouveau] [Modifier] [Supprimer] 3 [Boîte Relais] (p. 8-9) [Nouveau] [Modifier] [Supprimer] 4 [Boîte Annotation] (p. 8-16) [Nouveau] [Modifier] [Supprimer] 4 [Réglage Maxi. Boîtes] (p. 8-17) [Gestion Boîte maximum] [Réglage Maxi. Boîtes] 4 [Identification Utilisateur/Suivi Compte] 2 [Système d'Authentification] 1 [Paramètres admin.] [Paramètres ID & Imprimer] (p. 8-24) 9 [Connexion système] 5 [Réglage Mobile/PDA] (p. 8-24) 0 [Paramètres Sécurité] 2 [Régl Admin Boîte Utilisat] (p. 8-25) 4 [Détails Sécurité] [Impression Sécurisée seulem.] (p. 8-26) 6 [Paramétrage HDD] 1 [Vérifier Capac. Disque Dur] (p. 8-26) 2 [Écraser données Disque Dur] (p. 8-27) [Méthode écrasement] [Priorité cryptage] [Priorité écrasement] 3 [Écraser toutes les données] (p. 8-28) 4 [Code d’accès DD] (p. 8-29) 5 [Formater disque dur.] (p. 8-30) 6 [Réglage cryptage DD] (p. 8-30) 8 [Réglages Tampon] 1 [Régl. Horodatage] (p. 8-31) [Impress.] [Envoi] Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième niveau 8 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8-6 bizhub 652/552 8.2 8.2 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8.2.1 Création d'une boîte Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe Permet de créer une boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe. Vous pouvez configurer les éléments suivants lors de la création d'une boîte. Référence - Pour changer la configuration d'une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Modifier]. - Si [Modifier] est sélectionné, il n'est pas possible de changer le numéro de la boîte. - Pour supprimer une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. Page (1/2) Élément Description [N° Boite] Affiche automatiquement un numéro qui n'a pas encore été attribué. Pour spécifier un numéro de boîte, appuyez sur [N° Boîte], puis entrez au clavier le numéro de boîte (entre 1 et 999999999). [Nom Boîte] Appuyez sur [Nom boîte] et entrez le nom de la boîte sur le panneau de contrôle (maximum 20 caractères). Spécifier des numéros différents pour les boîtes utilisateur permet de créer des boîtes de même nom. [Code d’accès] Spécifiez un code d'accès pour limiter l'accès à la boîte. Appuyez sur [Code d'accès] et entrez le mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle (8 caractères max.). [Index] Sélectionnez le type d'index. [Type] Sélectionnez [Public], [Privé] ou [Groupe] en fonction des réglages Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département. Si vous avez sélectionné [Privé], spécifiez-en l'utilisateur titulaire. Pour sélectionner le titulaire, utilisez la page Changer titulaire. Si vous avez sélectionné [Groupe] indiquez le compte propriétaire. Pour sélectionner le compte propriétaire, utilisez la page Changer propriétaire. bizhub 652/552 8-7 8.2 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8 Page (2/2) Supprimer Boîte Vide (Réglages Administrateur) Recherche et supprime automatiquement une boîte vide si la boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe a été créée dans Réglages Administrateur. Appuyez sur [Supprimer Boîte Vide] dans l'écran Créer boîte. Bulletin Boîte Utilis. Créer Boîte Bulletin. Vous pouvez créer jusqu'à 10 boîtes Bulletin. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. Référence - Pour changer la configuration d'une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Modifier]. - Si [Modifier] est sélectionné, il n'est pas possible de changer le numéro de la boîte. - Pour supprimer une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. Élément Description [Délai suppression auto document] Spécifiez la période entre la date/l'heure d'enregistrement ou de prélèvement d'un document dans une Boîte utilisateur et la date/l'heure de suppression automatique. • Le Délai de suppression peut être spécifié non seulement en nombre de jours mais aussi en heures. Pour spécifier l'heure, entrez la valeur numérique, par pas de 1 minute et dans une plage de 5 minutes à 12 heures. • Pour ne pas supprimer les documents, sélectionnez [Enregistr.]. • La possibilité de cette opération est subordonnée aux Réglages Administrateur. [Récept. confid.] Cet élément apparaît si le kit fax en option est installé. Sélectionnez s'il faut ajouter la fonction Réception confidentielle à une boîte utilisateur. Lors de l'attribution de la fonction Réception confidentielle, entrez le code d'accès de Réception confidentielle. • Pour confirmation, entrez une nouvelle fois le code d'accès de Réception confidentielle. 8 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8-8 bizhub 652/552 8.2 Page (1/2) Page (2/2) Élément Description [N° Boite] Affiche automatiquement un numéro qui n'a pas encore été attribué. Pour spécifier un numéro de boîte, appuyez sur [N° Boîte], puis entrez au clavier le numéro de boîte (entre 1 et 999999999). [Nom Boîte] Appuyez sur [Nom boîte] et entrez le nom de la boîte sur le panneau de contrôle (maximum 20 caractères). Spécifier des numéros différents pour les boîtes utilisateur permet de créer des boîtes de même nom. [Code d’accès] Spécifiez un code d'accès pour limiter l'accès à la boîte. Appuyez sur [Code d'accès] et entrez le mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle (8 caractères max.). [Type Boîte] Sélectionnez [Public], [Privé] ou [Groupe] en fonction des réglages Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département. Si vous avez sélectionné [Privé], spécifiez-en l'utilisateur titulaire. Pour sélectionner le titulaire, utilisez la page Changer titulaire. Si vous avez sélectionné [Groupe] indiquez le compte propriétaire. Pour sélectionner le compte propriétaire, utilisez la page Changer propriétaire. Élément Description [Délai suppression auto document] Spécifiez la période entre la date/l'heure d'enregistrement ou de prélèvement d'un document dans une Boîte utilisateur et la date/l'heure de suppression automatique. • Le Délai de suppression peut être spécifié non seulement en nombre de jours mais aussi en heures. Pour spécifier l'heure, entrez la valeur numérique, par pas de 1 minute et dans une plage de 5 minutes à 12 heures. • Pour ne pas supprimer les documents, sélectionnez [Enregistr.]. bizhub 652/552 8-9 8.2 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8 Boîte Relais Vous pouvez créer jusqu'à cinq boîtes relais. Les éléments de réglage de création et de modification sont les suivants. Référence - Pour changer la configuration d'une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Modifier]. - Si [Modifier] est sélectionné, il n'est pas possible de changer le numéro de la boîte. - Pour supprimer une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de la tête et du pied de page, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Élément Description [N° Boîte.] Affiche automatiquement un numéro qui n'a pas encore été attribué. Pour spécifier un numéro de boîte, appuyez sur [N° Boîte], puis entrez au clavier le numéro de boîte (entre 1 et 999999999). [Nom Boîte] Appuyez sur [Nom boîte] et entrez le nom de la boîte sur le panneau de contrôle (maximum 20 caractères). Spécifier des numéros différents pour les boîtes utilisateur permet de créer des boîtes de même nom. [Destination Relais] Sélectionnez une destination relais pour envoyer les données depuis la boîte relais. Enregistrez à l'avance la destination relais en tant que destination groupe. • Lors de l'enregistrement d'une destination groupe comme destination relais, veillez à appliquer préalablement la numérotation abrégée à la destination groupe. [Mot de passe EMI Relais] Spécifiez un code d'accès pour limiter l'accès à la boîte. Appuyez sur [Mot de passe EMI Relais] et entrez le mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle (8 caractères max.). 8 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8-10 bizhub 652/552 8.2 8.2.2 Paramètres Affichage Perso - Configurer la boîte Vous pouvez personnaliser l'écran Boîte afin de l'adapter à votre environnement de travail. Onglet par Défaut Spécifiez la page Boîte qui doit s'afficher lorsque la touche [Boite] a été actionnée sur le panneau de contrôle. Référence - [Public] : affiche la page Boîte Public. - [Privé] : affiche la page Boîte Privé lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est activée. - [Système] : affiche la page Boîte Système. - [Groupe] : affiche la page Boîte Groupe lorsque Compte Département est activé. Touche de raccourci Cette fonction vous permet d'ajouter 2 touches raccourci au maximum dans la zone en bas à droite de la page. Elle est disponible lors de l'enregistrement de la boîte Système fréquemment utilisée comme touche de raccourci. Référence - Un touche de raccourci s'affiche seulement en mode Boîte une fois que la touche [Boite] a été actionnée. En cas de passage au mode Numérisation/Fax ou Copie, la touche de raccourci de la boîte concernée n'apparaît pas. - Si la Touche de Raccourci 1 est configurée, [Sélection Langue] ne s'affiche pas. bizhub 652/552 8-11 8.2 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8 8.2.3 Réglage Mobile/PDA - Notif. Erreur Lien Fichier Cette fonction vous permet de spécifier le traitement à effectuer s'il vous est impossible d'accéder à un fichier de lien en cas de tentative d'impression d'un fichier XHTML depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique. (par défaut : [MARCHE]) - [MARCHE] : imprime une partie de fichier lien dans un cadre noir. - [ARRÊT] : n'imprime pas un fichier de lien. 8.2.4 Réglage Mobile/PDA - Utilisation Serveur Proxy Cette fonction vous permet de spécifier s'il faut utiliser un serveur proxy pour accéder à un fichier de lien lors de l'impression d'un fichier XHTML depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique. (par défaut : [ARRÊT]) - [MARCHE] : utilise un serveur proxy. - [ARRET] : n'utilise pas de serveur proxy. Référence - En cas d'utilisation d'un serveur proxy pour la connexion, sélectionnez [Réglages Administrateur] - [Paramètres réseau] - [Param. WebDAV] - [Paramètres Client WebDAV] - [Adresse du serveur proxy] pour enregistrer le serveur proxy désiré. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. 8 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8-12 bizhub 652/552 8.2 8.2.5 Réglage Mobile/PDA - Réglages Impression En cas d'utilisation d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un agenda électronique pour imprimer un document via cette machine, configurez les réglages d'impression. De base - Impression Sélectionnez Recto ou Recto-Verso. De base - Papier Sélectionnez le format du papier d'impression si les données envoyées ne contiennent pas d'informations sur le format du papier. De base - Finition Spécifiez Pli/Reliure, Agraf. ou Perfo. bizhub 652/552 8-13 8.2 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8 Référence - Le nombre de trous perforés dépend du pays dans lequel vous vous trouvez. Applications - Marge Sélectionnez la position de la marge. Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-21. Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-22. Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-23. Applications - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Protection Copie Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-24. Applications - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Pare-copie Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-26. Applications - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-27. Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-28. 8 Réglages Administrateur 8-14 bizhub 652/552 8.3 8.3 Réglages Administrateur 8.3.1 Autorisations de boîte Types d'utilisateurs Cette machine est destinée aux utilisateurs de plusieurs niveaux. C'est pourquoi la fonction Boîte propose en plus de l'Administrateur de cette machine, l'élément "Administrateur de boîtes". Voici les types de boîtes accessibles en fonction des types d'utilisateur. Référence - Pour se connecter à cette machine en tant qu'Administrateur de boîtes, effectuez les étapes suivantes lors du réglage Authentification utilisateur. – Entrez "boxadmin" dans la case Nom utilisateur. – Entrez le code d'accès spécifié à la page 8-25 dans la case Code d'accès. Boîte Public et boîte Privé ou Groupe Voici les fonctions disponibles de la (1) boîte Public accessibles à tous les utilisateurs et de la (2) boîte Privé ou Groupe accessibles à certains utilisateurs seulement. *1 Les utilisateurs enregistrés ne peuvent gérer que les boîtes qu'ils ont créées. *2 L'Administrateur de boîtes et l'administrateur peuvent gérer les boîtes sans avoir à entrer le code d'accès même si son introduction a été spécifiée pour les boîtes. Élément Description Utilisateur public Si l'Authentification utilisateur est désactivée, chaque utilisateur est connecté en tant qu'utilisateur Public. Utilisateur enregistré Il s'agit de l'utilisateur enregistré par l'Administrateur lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est activée. Administrateur de boîtes Public Il s'agit de l'utilisateur qui se connecte comme Administrateur de boîtes lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est activée. Cet utilisateur peut accéder à toutes les boîtes, qu'un code d'accès ait été spécifié ou non. Administrateur C'est l'utilisateur responsable de cette machine. Cet utilisateur peut créer, modifier ou supprimer toutes les boîtes utilisateur, qu'elles soient protégées par un code d'accès ou non. Fonction Créer Boîte utilisateur Vérifier, télécharger ou supprimer un document Réglage Changer Boîte Supprimer boîte utilisateur Type Boîte Public Privé ou Groupe Public Privé ou Groupe Public Privé ou Groupe Public Privé ou Groupe Utilisateur public o - o - o - o - Utilisateur enregistré o o o o*1 o o*1 o o*1 Administrateur de boîtes Public o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 Administrateur o o - - o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 bizhub 652/552 8-15 8.3 Réglages Administrateur 8 8.3.2 Création d'une boîte Vous pouvez enregistrer une nouvelle boîte. Voici les types de boîtes qui peuvent être enregistrées. Référence - Si l'Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département sont désactivées, la boîte enregistrée comme boîte Privé ou Groupe est sauvegardée comme boîte Public. Cependant le nom de la boîte reste inchangé. - Quand Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département est activé, entrez l'ID et le code d'accès pour vous connecter à cette machine. Après cela, veillez à appuyer sur [Connexion] ou sur Code sur le panneau de contrôle pour achever le processus d'authentification. Si l'authentification n'est pas complète, il n'est pas possible de créer une boîte Privé ou Groupe. - Si le Kit Fax en option est installé, vous pouvez configurer les réglages Réception confidentielle (Fonction TX code F) comme fonction d'extension d'une boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Réception confidentielle, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. - Si le réglage Authentification utilisateur est configuré, vous pouvez spécifier un Administrateur de boîtes. Un administrateur de boîtes a accès à toutes les boîtes Public, Privé et Groupe. Référence - Si le paramètre [Règles Mot Pass] est activé, vous ne pouvez pas créer de mot de passe contenant moins de huit caractères. - Si le mot de passe de la Boîte utilisateur enregistré contient moins de huit caractères, ajoutez le nombre de caractères manquants avant d'activer Règles Mot Pass. Pour plus de détails sur les règles de mot de passe, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. 8.3.3 Créer une boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-6. 8.3.4 Créer une boîte Bulletin Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-7. 8.3.5 Créer un boîte Relais Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-9. Élément Description Boîte Utilisateur Public Une boîte Public est accessible à tous. Boîte Privé Il s'agit d'une boîte Privé accessible seulement par l'utilisateur connecté lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est activée. Boîte Groupe Il s'agit d'une boîte accessible seulement par l'utilisateur appartenant au compte connecté lorsque Compte Département est activée. Bulletin Boîte Utilis. Il s'agit d'une boîte utilisée pour l'émission Dépôt/Réception Relève Bulletin avec F-codes. Cet élément est disponible si le Kit Fax en option est installé. Boîte Relais Il s'agit d'une boîte servant à enregistrer les données relais lorsque cette machine est utilisée comme station relais pour les transmissions relais avec F codes. Cet élément est disponible si le Kit Fax en option est installé. Boîte Annotation Il s'agit d'une boîte qui sert à imprimer ou envoyer un document enregistré avec la date/heure ou image du numéro d'archivage. Spécifiez le type de texte à ajouter lorsque cette boîte est utilisée. Lors de l'enregistrement de cette boîte, spécifiez le mode Administrateur. 8 Réglages Administrateur 8-16 bizhub 652/552 8.3 8.3.6 Créer une boîte Annotation Permet de créer une boîte Annotation. Vous pouvez configurer les éléments suivants lors de la création d'une boîte. Référence - Pour changer la configuration d'une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Modifier]. - Si [Modifier] est sélectionné, il n'est pas possible de changer le numéro de la boîte. - Pour supprimer une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. Page (1/3) Référence - Si le paramètre [Règles Mot Pass] est activé, vous ne pouvez pas créer de mot de passe contenant moins de huit caractères. - Si le mot de passe de la Boîte utilisateur enregistré contient moins de huit caractères, ajoutez le nombre de caractères manquants avant d'activer Règles Mot Pass. Pour plus de détails sur les règles de mot de passe, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. Page (2/3) Élément Description [N° Boîte.] Affiche automatiquement un numéro qui n'a pas encore été attribué. Pour spécifier un numéro de boîte, appuyez sur [N° Boîte], puis entrez au clavier le numéro de boîte (entre 1 et 999999999). [Nom Boîte] Appuyez sur [Nom boîte] et entrez le nom de la boîte sur le panneau de contrôle (maximum 20 caractères). Spécifier des numéros différents pour les boîtes utilisateur permet de créer des boîtes de même nom. [Code d’accès] Spécifiez un code d'accès pour limiter l'accès à la boîte. Appuyez sur [Code d'accès] et entrez le mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle (8 caractères max.). bizhub 652/552 8-17 8.3 Réglages Administrateur 8 Page (3/3) 8.3.7 Réglage Maxi. Boîtes Spécifiez le nombre maximum de boîtes qui peuvent être créées pour chaque utilisateur. Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe Sélectionnez [Public], [Privé] ou [Groupe] en fonction des réglages Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département. Élément Description [Compte Haut] Sélectionnez si le numéro d'annotation doit être appliqué par tâche ou par page. [Texte Numérotation] Permet d'ajouter du texte au numéro à imprimer (20 caractères max.). [Date/Heure] Sélectionnez le format d'affichage de l'heure et de la date à imprimer. [Contraste] Sélectionnez la densité des numéros d'annotation à imprimer. [Type Numéro] Sélectionnez le format de sortie (nombre de chiffres) des numéros d'annotation à imprimer. [Position d'impression] Sélectionnez la position d'impression. [Texte] Permet d'entrer un texte libre (maximum 40 caractères). Élément Description [Délai suppression auto document] Spécifiez la période entre la date/l'heure d'enregistrement ou de prélèvement d'un document dans une Boîte utilisateur et la date/l'heure de suppression automatique. • Le Délai de suppression peut être spécifié non seulement en nombre de jours mais aussi en heures. Pour spécifier l'heure, entrez la valeur numérique, par pas de 1 minute et dans une plage de 5 minutes à 12 heures. • Pour ne pas supprimer les documents, sélectionnez [Enregistr.]. • Si vous désirez attribuer une annotation à un document mais sans enregistrer ou copier le document, sélectionnez [Rejeter]. 8 Réglages Administrateur 8-18 bizhub 652/552 8.3 Gestion Boîte maximum Pour spécifier le nombre maximum de boîtes, sélectionnez [MARCHE]. Pour ne pas spécifier de limite et autoriser les utilisateurs à créer un nombre indéfini de boîtes, sélectionnez [ARRET]. Réglage Maxi. Boîtes La plage admise pour le nombre maximum de boîtes est 0 à 1 000. Entrez au clavier le nombre maximum de boîtes et appuyez sur [Appliquer] pour le valider. Référence - Si le nombre maximum de boîtes est réglé sur "0", aucune nouvelle boîte ne peut être créée. - Si l'utilisateur sélectionné fixe déjà le nombre de boîtes à 3, la plage admise pour le nombre maximum de boîtes passe de 3 à 1 000. bizhub 652/552 8-19 8.3 Réglages Administrateur 8 8.3.8 Réglages Boîte Supprimer Bte Util. inutilisée Supprime une boîte qui ne contient aucun document, laquelle devient inutile. Pour supprimer une boîte, confirmez le message qui apparaît et sélectionnez [Oui]. Suppr. Docs Impr. Sécurisée Cette fonction supprime tous les documents enregistrés dans la Boîte Document sécurisé. Pour supprimer la boîte, confirmez le message et sélectionnez [Oui]. 8 Réglages Administrateur 8-20 bizhub 652/552 8.3 Délai suppress Impress. sécuris. Spécifiez la période entre la date/l'heure d'enregistrement ou de prélèvement d'un document sécurisé dans une Boîte utilisateur et la date/l'heure de suppression automatique. Référence - Dans Délai de suppression, spécifiez de 5 minutes à 12 heures (par pas de 1 minute), 1 jour, 2 jours, 3 jours, 7 jours ou 30 jours. - Pour ne pas supprimer les documents, sélectionnez [Enregistr.]. Délai suppress PDF cryptés Spécifiez la période entre la date/l'heure d'enregistrement ou de prélèvement d'un document PDF crypté dans une Boîte utilisateur et la date/l'heure de suppression automatique. Référence - Dans Délai de suppression, spécifiez de 5 minutes à 12 heures (par pas de 1 minute), 1 jour, 2 jours, 3 jours, 7 jours ou 30 jours. - Pour ne pas supprimer les documents, sélectionnez [Enregistr.]. bizhub 652/552 8-21 8.3 Réglages Administrateur 8 Délai Suppress. ID & Impr. Spécifiez la période entre la date/l'heure d'enregistrement ou de prélèvement d'un document dans la Boîte ID & Imprimer et la date/l'heure de suppression automatique. Référence - Dans Délai de suppression, spécifiez de 5 minutes à 12 heures (par pas de 1 minute), 1 jour, 2 jours, 3 jours, 7 jours ou 30 jours. - Pour ne pas supprimer les documents, sélectionnez [Enregistr.]. Réglage attente doc. Spécifiez s'il faut enregistrer un document dans une Boîte en cas d'envoi ou d'impression. Référence - Lors de la suppression d'un document après envoi ou impression, sélectionnez [Oui]. Pour afficher un écran de confirmation de suppression lors de l'envoi ou de l'impression, sélectionnez [ON] sur l'écran de sélection de suppression. - Pour supprimer un document après envoi ou impression, sélectionnez [No]. 8 Réglages Administrateur 8-22 bizhub 652/552 8.3 Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe Réglez la fonction Mémoire externe connectée à cette machine sur MARCHE ou ARRET. Référence - En sortie d'usine de la machine, la fonction permettant d'enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe est réglé sur ARRET (pas d'enregistrement). Elle est aussi réglée sur ARRET (pas d'enregistrement) dans le réglage des fonctions utilisateur lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est activée. Pour enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe, changez le réglage pour vous permettre d'enregistrer des documents dans Réglages Administrateur. Boîte Util. Autor./Interd. Spécifiez s'il faut autoriser les fonctions permettant à l'utilisateur de créer, modifier ou supprimer une boîte. Référence - Pour permettre à l'utilisateur d'accéder à ces fonctions, sélectionnez [Permis]. - Pour interdire à l'utilisateur d'accéder à ces fonctions, sélectionnez [Interdire]. Seul l'administrateur peut alors de créer, modifier ou supprimer une boîte. Élément Description [Enregistrer document] Sélectionnez s'il faut enregistrer (MARCHE) ou ne pas enregistrer (ARRET) en mémoire externe des documents numérisés ou des documents archivés dans une Boîte. [Imprimer Document] Sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer (MARCHE) ou ne pas imprimer (ARRET) des documents archivés en mémoire externe en utilisant la fonction [Utilis/Archiv]. [Numérisation Document Mémoire Externe] Numérisez un document en mémoire externe et sélectionnez s'il faut l'enregistrer (MARCHE) ou ne pas l'enregistrer (ARRET) dans une Boîte. bizhub 652/552 8-23 8.3 Réglages Administrateur 8 Réglage ID & Imprimer Supprimer après impression Sélectionnez s'il faut vérifier si le document conservé dans la boîte ID & Imprimer a bien été supprimé après impression. Référence - Pour vérifier auprès de l'utilisateur si le document concerné doit être supprimé, sélectionnez [Confirm.avec Util.]. - Pour supprimer le document concerné après impression sans vérifier auprès de l'utilisateur, sélectionnez [Toujours supprimer]. Réglage Délai suppression Document Cette fonction permet à l'administrateur de spécifier la période entre la date/l'heure d'enregistrement ou de prélèvement d'un document dans une Boîte utilisateur et la date/l'heure de suppression automatique de ce dernier si l'utilisateur ne peut pas spécifier l'heure/la date de suppression du document. Pour spécifier automatiquement l'heure/la date de suppression d'un document, sélectionnez [Oui] et entrez l'heure de suppression. Référence - Dans Délai de suppression, spécifiez de 5 minutes à 12 heures (par pas de 1 minute), 1 jour, 2 jours, 3 jours, 7 jours ou 30 jours. - Pour ne pas supprimer les documents, sélectionnez [Enregistr.]. 8 Réglages Administrateur 8-24 bizhub 652/552 8.3 Paramètres ID & Imprimer Configurez les réglages pour la Boîte ID & Imprimer. Référence - Un tâche d'un utilisateur Public est imprimée ou enregistrée. - Une tâche non autorisée d'un utilisateur est imprimée ou enregistrée lorsque Imprimer sans Authentification est activé. - Pour plus de détails sur l'impression par des utilisateurs publics et la fonction Imprimer sans Authentification, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur - Opérations Impression]. 8.3.9 Réglage Mobile/PDA Sélectionnez s'il faut autoriser/interdire la fonction d'utilisation d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un agenda électronique. Élément Description [ID & Imprimer] [MARCHE] : enregistre dans la boîte ID & Imprimer toutes les tâches d'impression normale et d'Authentification & Impression qui ont été demandées par un utilisateur enregistré. [ARRET] : enregistre dans la boîte ID & Imprimer les tâches et d'Authentification & Impression qui ont été demandées par un utilisateur enregistré. La tâche d'impression normale est réalisée sans être enregistrée dans la boîte. [Utilisat. public] [Imprimer immédiatem.] : Imprime une tâche d'utilisateur Public ou une tâche non autorisée d'un utilisateur sans l'enregistrer dans la boîte. [Enregistr.] : Enregistre une tâche d'utilisateur Public ou une tâche non autorisée d'un utilisateur dans la boîte ID & Imprimer. bizhub 652/552 8-25 8.3 Réglages Administrateur 8 8.3.10 Réglage administrateur Boîte Utilisateur L'Administrateur de boîtes est disponible lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est activée. Si vous vous connectez à cette machine en tant qu'Administrateur de boîtes, vous pouvez référencer le contenu de toutes les boîtes utilisateur crées, que le code d'accès ait été spécifié ou non. Réglage Administrateur de boîtes Pour Définir un administrateur de boîtes, sélectionnez [Permis] et appuyez sur [Réglage Code] pour enregistrer le mot de passe de l'administrateur des boîtes. Référence - Pour confirmation, saisissez deux fois le mot de passe. - Si le paramètre [Règles Mot Pass] est activé, vous ne pouvez pas créer de mot de passe contenant moins de huit caractères. - Si le mot de passe de la Boîte utilisateur enregistré contient moins de huit caractères, ajoutez le nombre de caractères manquants avant d'activer "Règles Mot Pass". Pour plus de détails sur les règles de mot de passe, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. Connexion à cette machine comme Administrateur de boîtes Entrez les éléments suivants sur l'écran de connexion. Nom Utilisateur : boxadmin Mot de passe : code d'accès déterminé dans l'écran Réglage Administrateur de boîtes Fonctions Administrateur disponibles Les fonctions suivantes sont disponibles lorsque vous vous connectez comme Administrateur de boîtes. - Créer une boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe - Vérifier, télécharger ou supprimer des documents enregistrés dans toutes les boîtes - Changer tous les réglages Boîte - Supprimer toutes les boîtes 8 Réglages Administrateur 8-26 bizhub 652/552 8.3 8.3.11 DétailsSécurité Impression sécurisée seulement Utilisez ce réglage pour spécifier l'activation d'Impression Sécurisée seulement, lorsque la commande d'impression est émise depuis le pilote d'imprimante. Pour imprimer un document, il faut enter l'ID et le code d'accès. 8.3.12 Paramétrage HDD Vérifier Capacité HDD Vous pouvez vérifier l'espace occupé et l'espace disponible sur le disque dur. bizhub 652/552 8-27 8.3 Réglages Administrateur 8 Écraser données Disque Dur Vous pouvez spécifier les modalités d'écrasement et de suppression des données du disque dur. Lorsque les données image enregistrées sur le disque dur ne sont plus utiles, cette fonction permet d'écraser ces données dans toutes les zones où elles se trouvent afin de supprimer les données de l'original. Cette fonction supprime aussi la structure des données non-image afin qu'elles ne puissent pas être divulguées même si par exemple le disque dur installé est volé. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. (Par défaut : Mode 1) Référence - Si vous changez le réglage Priorité cryptage ou le réglage Priorité Écrasement, formatez le disque dur après avoir redémarré cette machine. Dans ce cas, les données seront supprimées par le formatage du disque dur. - En ce qui concerne les données supprimées par le formatage du disque dur, voir page 8-30. Élément Description [Mode 1] Écrasement avec 0x00 [Mode 2] Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par la lettre "A" (0x61) Vérifié [Priorité cryptage] Permet d'effectuer un cryptage à un niveau de sécurité plus élevé. Toutefois, dans Réglage cryptage DD, l'écrasement des données s'effectue différemment des réglages [Mode 1] ou [Mode 2]. Spécifiez toujours [Priorité cryptage]. [Priorité écrasement] Toutefois, dans Réglage cryptage DD, l'écrasement des données s'effectue conformément aux réglages [Mode 1] ou [Mode 2]. 8 Réglages Administrateur 8-28 bizhub 652/552 8.3 Écraser données Cette fonction écrase et supprimer toutes les données contenues dans le disque dur. 0 Cette fonction est disponible lorsque cette machine doit être mise au rebut. Avant de procéder à cette opération, veuillez consulter votre S.A.V. 0 Ne jamais manoeuvrer l'interrupteur de la machine pendant l'écrasement et la suppression des données. % Pour écraser et supprimer les données, sélectionnez la Méthode écrasement données disque dur et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. Le processus d'écrasement et de suppression des données intervient une fois que cette machine a été redémarrée. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. Référence - L'exécution du Mode 1 prend 40 minutes environ. Élément Description [Mode 1] Écrasement avec 0x00 [Mode 2] Écrasement par des nombres aléatoires de 1 octet Écrasement par des nombres aléatoires de 1 octet Écrasement par 0x00 [Mode 3] Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par des nombres aléatoires de 1 octet Vérifié [Mode 4] Écrasement par des nombres aléatoires de 1 octet Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff [Mode 5] Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff [Mode 6] Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par données spécifiées de 512 octets [Mode 7] Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par 0xaa [Mode 8] Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par 0xaa Vérifié bizhub 652/552 8-29 8.3 Réglages Administrateur 8 Mot de passe accès disque dur Vous pouvez spécifier le code d'accès permettant de verrouiller le disque dur. 0 Assurez-vous de spécifier un code d'accès tel qu'il ne puisse pas être oublié. En effet, la perte du code d'accès entraînerait un travail de récupération très important. % Spécifiez le code d'accès et redémarrez cette machine. Le code d'accès du disque dur est spécifié. Référence - Entrez un code d'accès disque dur de 20 caractères. Notez que les caractères ne doivent pas être identiques. - Si vous avez déjà spécifié code d'accès du disque dur, [Changer] et [Désactive] apparaissent. Vous pouvez changer ou désactiver le code d'accès du disque dur. 8 Réglages Administrateur 8-30 bizhub 652/552 8.3 Formatage DD Cette fonction permet de formater le disque dur. 0 Pour éteindre puis rallumer l'interrupteur principal, placez d'abord l'interrupteur principal sur Arrêt, puis sur Marche en attendant au moins 10 secondes entre les deux manoeuvres. Négliger cette précaution peut entraîner une anomalie de fonctionnement. % Pour formater le disque dur, sélectionnez [Oui] pour confirmer le message affiché. Une fois le formatage du disque dur terminé, redémarrez cette machine. Référence - L'utilisation de la fonction Exporter de PageScope Web Connection permet de sauvegarder les informations d'enregistrement de l'utilisateur ou les données d'adresse. Pour plus de détails, consulter l'Aide en ligne de PageScope Web Connection. - Voici les données qui sont supprimées par le formatage du disque dur. – Programme – My ress Book – Réglage Méthode d'authentification – Réglage Auth. Utilis. – Réglage Compte Département – Boîte Utilisateur – Réglages Boîte – Documents dans les boîtes utilisateur – Réglage boîte Confidentielle – Réglage Boîte Utilisateur Bulletin Bord Réglage cryptage DD Vous pouvez configurer le réglage du cryptage du disque dur. L'utilisation d'une chaîne de 20 caractères comme mot de passe du disque dur évite qu'un utilisateur prenne facilement connaissance des données conservées dans le disque dur. 0 Assurez-vous de spécifier un mot de passe tel qu'il ne puisse pas être oublié. 0 Le réglage Mot de passe de cryptage doit être configuré par l'administrateur de cette machine. 0 Pour éteindre puis rallumer l'interrupteur principal, placez d'abord l'interrupteur principal sur Arrêt, puis sur Marche en attendant au moins 10 secondes entre les deux manoeuvres. Négliger cette précaution peut entraîner une anomalie de fonctionnement. % Spécifiez le mot de passe de cryptage et redémarrez cette machine. Le réglage Mot de passe de cryptage devient alors disponible. Référence - Entrez les 20 caractères du mot de passe de cryptage. Notez que les caractères ne doivent pas être identiques. - Le réglage Mot de passe de cryptage devient disponible une fois que cette machine a été redémarrée. bizhub 652/552 8-31 8.3 Réglages Administrateur 8 8.3.13 Réglages Tampon Réglages Horodatage Cette fonction permet d'appliquer par mesure de sécurité un tampon prédéfini à tous les documents à produire à partir de cette machine. Spécifiez si un tampon doit être appliqué lors de l'impression ou de l'émission. Pour appliquer les tampons, sélectionnez [Appliquer], puis configurez les réglages du tampon à ajouter en continu. Référence - Voici les types de tampons qui peuvent être appliqués aux données imprimées. – Date/Heure – Numéro de page – Tampon – Sécurité Copie (Protection Copie, Pare-copie, Copie Prot. MdP) – Tampon répétitif – Tête/Pied de page – Surimpression enregistrée - Voici les types de tampons qui peuvent être appliqués aux données envoyées. – Date/Heure – Numéro de page – Tampon – Tête/Pied de page dPour info Pour plus de détails sur le réglage Tampon, voir page 7-20. 8 Réglages Administrateur 8-32 bizhub 652/552 8.3 9 PageScope Web Connection bizhub 652/552 9-3 9.1 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection 9 9 PageScope Web Connection 9.1 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection PageScope Web Connection est un utilitaire de gestion de périphérique supporté par le serveur HTTP intégré au contrôleur de l'imprimante. Vous pouvez par l'intermédiaire d'un navigateur Web sur un ordinateur connecté au réseau, configurer les paramètres de la machine et contrôler l'état de la machine. Cet utilitaire permet de configurer depuis votre ordinateur, certains réglages gérés sur le panneau de contrôle de la machine et facilite la saisie des données. 9.1.1 Environnement d'exploitation 9.1.2 Accéder à PageScope Web Connection 0 Lancez le navigateur Web pour accéder à PageScope Web Connection. 0 Si l'Authentification utilisateur est activée, entrez le nom utilisateur et le code. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-11. 0 Pour plus d'informations sur le paramétrage de l'adresse IP de cette machine, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. 0 PageScope Web Connection dispose de deux modes d'affichage : Flash et HTML. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-9. 1 Démarrez le navigateur Internet. 2 Entrez l'adresse IP de la machine dans la barre d'adresse URL, puis appuyez sur [Entrée]. http:/// Exemple : Si l'adresse IP de cette machine est 192.168.1.20 : - http://192.168.1.20/ Si IPv6 est défini sur "ACTIVE" lorsqu'un navigateur autre que Internet Explorer 6 est utilisé : - Entrez l'adresse IPv6 dans les crochets ([ ]). – http://[IPv6 adresse de la machine]/ Exemple : lorsque l'adresse IPv6 de cette machine est fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f16 : - http://[fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f16]/ - Si IPv6 est réglé sur "ON" et que vous utilisez Internet Explorer, ajoutez préalablement "fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f IPv6_MFP_1" au fichier serveurs et spécifiez l'adresse avec le nom d'hôte. La page de connexion ou du menu principal apparaît. Réseau Ethernet (TCP/IP) Applications informatiques Navigateur Web : • Microsoft Internet Explorer, version 6/7/8 (JavaScript et Cookies activés) • Netscape Navigator 7.02 ou supérieur (JavaScript et Cookies activés) • Mozilla Firefox, version 1.0 ou supérieure (JavaScript et cookies activés) • Netscape Navigator 7.02 ou supérieur (JavaScript et Cookies activés) • Mozilla Firefox, version 1.0 ou supérieure (JavaScript et cookies activés) • Netscape Navigator 7.02 ou supérieur (JavaScript et Cookies activés) • Mozilla Firefox, version 1.0 ou supérieure (JavaScript et cookies activés) Adobe® Flash® Player • Plug-in Ver. 7.0 ou supérieure requis pour sélectionner Flash en tant que format d'affichage. • Plug-in Ver. 9.0 ou supérieure requis pour utiliser Data Management Utility (gestion de données Polices/Macros). 9 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection 9-4 bizhub 652/552 9.1 9.1.3 Cache du navigateur Internet Le navigateur Web dispose de la fonction cache ; par conséquent, il se peut que les dernières informations ne s'affichent pas sur la page lors de l'utilisation de PageScope Web Connection. L'utilisation du cache peut entraîner un échec de l'opération. Quand vous utilisez PageScope Web Connection, désactivez la fonction cache du navigateur Internet. Référence - En fonction des versions, les navigateur Web peuvent proposer des menus et noms de rubriques différents. Pour plus d'informations, voir l'aide du navigateur Internet. - Lorsque la fonction cache est activée, une déconnexion pour dépassement se produit en mode administrateur et cette déconnexion se répète à chaque tentative de connexion. Cela aboutit au blocage du panneau de contrôle de la machine auquel vous n'avez plus accès. Dans ce cas, éteignez puis rallumez la machine. Pour éviter ce problème, désactiver la fonction de cache. Pour Internet Explorer 1 Sélectionnez [Options Internet] dans le menu [Outils]. 2 À l'onglet [Général], sélectionnez [Fichiers Internet Temporaires] - [Paramètres]. 3 Sélectionnez [A chaque visite de la page] et cliquez sur [OK]. Pour Netscape Navigator 1 Sélectionnez [Préférences] dans le menu [Édition]. 2 Sous [Catégorie] à gauche, sélectionnez [Avancé] - [Cache]. 3 Sous [Comparer le document en mémoire cache au document du réseau], sélectionnez [Chaque fois]. Pour Mozilla Firefox 1 Sélectionnez [Options] dans le menu [Outils]. 2 Sélectionnez [Confidentialité] puis cliquez sur [Paramètres] dans la section Vie privée. 3 Cochez la case [Cache] sous [Vie privée], cochez la case [Toujours effacer mes traces personnelles à la fermeture de Firefox] sous [Paramètres] puis cliquez sur [OK]. 9.1.4 Fonction Aide en ligne Après connexion à PageScope Web Connection et avoir cliqué , vous pouvez afficher l'aide en ligne pour la fonction en cours de configuration. Référence - Pour afficher l'aide en ligne, connectez votre ordinateur à Internet. bizhub 652/552 9-5 9.2 Connexion et déconnexion 9 9.2 Connexion et déconnexion 9.2.1 Opérations de connexion et de déconnexion À l'ouverture de PageScope Web Connection, une page de connexion s'affiche lorsque Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département sont activés et la page de connexion s'affiche en mode Utilisateur public si Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département ne sont pas activés. En cas de nouvelle connexion sur cette machine en tant qu'utilisateur différent ou en tant qu'administrateur, déconnectez-vous une fois puis connectez-vous à nouveau Lorsque Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département est désactivé L'utilisateur se connecte automatiquement comme utilisateur public. Pour se connecter comme Administrateur, il faut d'abord se déconnecter. 9 Connexion et déconnexion 9-6 bizhub 652/552 9.2 Il est alors possible de se reconnecter en tant qu'Administrateur. bizhub 652/552 9-7 9.2 Connexion et déconnexion 9 Quand Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département est activé Si PageScope Authentication Manager est utilisé pour l'authentification, demandez à votre administrateur serveur de vous indiquer la procédure de connexion. La page Authentification Utilisateur ou Compte Département s'affiche. Entrer les informations demandées pour vous connecter. Pour se connecter comme utilisateur différent ou comme Administrateur, il faut d'abord se déconnecter. 9 Connexion et déconnexion 9-8 bizhub 652/552 9.2 9.2.2 Déconnexion Cliquez sur [Déconnexion] ou [Vers Écran de connexion] en haut à droite dans la fenêtre. Une page de confirmation de déconnexion apparaît. Cliquez sur [OK] pour revenir à l'écran de connexion. Référence - La page de connexion qui s'affiche peut être différente selon si l'Authentification est activée ou non sur cette machine. - Si vous êtes connecté en tant qu'utilisateur Public, [Vers Écran de connexion] apparaît. Si vous êtes connecté en tant qu'utilisateur enregistré ou administrateur, [Déconnexion] apparaît. - En cas de dépassement du délai d'attente dû à l'absence d'opérations pendant la période spécifiée de connexion ou dû à un changement de l'authentification au niveau du panneau de contrôle lors de la connexion en mode utilisateur, vous êtes automatiquement déconnecté du mode en cours. - Pour plus d'information sur la manière de définir le délai d'attente des modes utilisateur ou administrateur, voir page 9-38. Reconnectez-vous. bizhub 652/552 9-9 9.2 Connexion et déconnexion 9 9.2.3 Connexion PageScope Web Connection permet de se connecter en mode utilisateur ou en mode administrateur. Si nécessaire, vous avez la possibilité de vous connecter en mode utilisateur en tant qu'administrateur ou Administrateur boîte utilisateur, selon le réglage de l'authentification utilisateur ou de l'Administrateur Boîte Utilisateur. Référence - Vous pouvez vous connecter en tant qu'Administrateur boîte utilisateur lorsque Administrateur boîte utilisateur est activé au niveau du panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Administrateur de boîtes, les permissions et le mot de passe, voir page 8-25. - La connexion au mode utilisateur comme Administrateur vous permet des opérations de suppression de travaux, option non disponible en mode administrateur. - A la page de connexion, sélectionnez l'utilitaire de Data Management Utility que vous souhaitez. Pour plus d'informations sur Data Management Utility, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. Options de Connexion Vous pouvez sélectionner diverses options de connexion. Référence - Si la case Flash est cochée au Mode vue, les éléments suivants sont affichés avec la fonction Flash. – Icônes et messages d'état – État de [Magasin Papier] dans [Information] - [Infos Périphérique] – État de [Tâche] Élément Description Langue Sélectionnez la langue d'affichage des informations. Mode vue Sélectionnez Flash ou HTML. • Pour utiliser le logiciel d'affichage, sélectionnez HTML. • Dans un environnement IPv6, sélectionner HTML. • Pour sélectionnez Flash, préparez Flash Player. Aide utilisateur Cochez la case [Affiche une boîte de dialogue lors de l'avertissement.] pour afficher une boîte de dialogue en cas d'avertissement ou pendant une opération après connexion. 9 Connexion et déconnexion 9-10 bizhub 652/552 9.2 Connexion en tant qu'utilisateur public Si Authentification utilisateur n'a pas été activé sur la machine, l'utilisateur sera connecté en tant qu'utilisateur public. Dans la page de connexion, sélectionnez [Utilisateur public] et cliquez sur [Connexion]. bizhub 652/552 9-11 9.2 Connexion et déconnexion 9 Connexion en tant qu'utilisateur enregistré Spécifier le nom d'utilisateur enregistré et le mot de passe pour se connecter lorsque Authentification utilisateur est activé sur cette machine. % Dans la page d'accueil, entrez le nom de l'utilisateur et le mot de passe, puis cliquez sur [Connexion]. Référence - Si Compte Département est activé, entrez également le nom et le code d'accès du compte. - Pour sélectionner un nom d'utilisateur dans une liste, cliquez sur la touche [Liste Utilisateurs]. - Si l'authentification par serveur externe est activée, choisissez un serveur. - Pour vous connecter en mode Utilisateur en tant qu'administrateur, sélectionnez [Administrateur] - [Administrateur (Mode utilisateur)], puis entrez le mot de passe administrateur. - Si [Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification] des Réglages Administrateur est réglé sur Mode 2 et qu'un utilisateur introduit un code d'accès incorrect le nombre de fois spécifié, cet utilisateur sera bloqué et ne pourra plus utiliser la machine. Pour plus de détails sur la désactivation des Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification, contactez votre administrateur. - [Liste Utilisateurs] n'est disponible que lorsque Liste noms utilis. est réglé sur [ON]. Pour plus d'informations, consultez le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. 9 Connexion et déconnexion 9-12 bizhub 652/552 9.2 Se connecter en mode Administrateur Pour configurer le système ou les paramètres réseau, connectez-vous en mode Administrateur. 1 Sélectionnez [Administrateur], puis cliquez sur [Connexion]. 2 Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur, puis cliquez sur [OK]. % Pour vous connecter en mode Utilisateur en tant qu'administrateur, sélectionnez [Administrateur (Mode utilisateur)], puis entrez le mot de passe administrateur. % La connexion en mode administrateur provoque le blocage du panneau de contrôle et ne vous permet pas de l'utiliser. % En fonction de l'état de la machine, il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas vous connecter en mode administrateur. % Si [Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification] dans les Réglages Administrateur est réglé sur Mode 2 et si un utilisateur entre un mot de passe incorrect le nombre de fois spécifié, il n'est plus possible de se connecter en mode Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur le paramètre Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. % La page de saisie du mot de passe varie en fonction des réglages de la machine. % Vous pouvez afficher l'explication des fonctions (Aide) si nécessaire. Pour afficher l'Aide, sélectionnez [ON] dans Réglage Affichage. [Par souris] : pointez le curseur pour afficher l'Aide. [Par focus] : sélectionnez un élément pour afficher l'Aide. bizhub 652/552 9-13 9.2 Connexion et déconnexion 9 Affichage du mode en mode administrateur Dans [Réglages Système] - [Réglage Affichage], le mode d'affichage en mode administrateur peut être sélectionné entre [Affichage Fonction Onglet] ou [Affichage Fonction Liste]. Ce manuel montre un exemple où l'[Affichage Fonction Liste] est configuré comme mode d'affichage. Dans l'autre mode d'affichage, les éléments disponibles sont les mêmes. Dans le réglage par défaut, l'écran est affiché en [Affichage Fonction Onglet]. Dans [Affichage Fonction Onglet], cliquez sur l'icône souhaitée pour changer de menu. Dans [Affichage Fonction Liste], changer de menu dans la zone de liste déroulante. Sélectionnez le menu souhaité dans la zone de liste déroulante, cliquez sur [Afficher]. 9 Connexion et déconnexion 9-14 bizhub 652/552 9.2 Connexion en tant qu'Administrateur de boîte Vous pouvez vous connecter en mode utilisateur en tant qu'administrateur afin de supprimer une tâche, si Authentification utilisateur est activée sur cette machine. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez vous connecter en mode utilisateur en tant qu'Administrateur de boîte, lorsque Administrateur de boîte est activé à l'aide du panneau de contrôle. % Dans la page de connexion, sélectionnez [Administrateur] et cliquez sur [Connexion]. % Pour vous connecter en mode Utilisateur en tant qu'administrateur de boîte, sélectionnez [Administrateur de boîte] puis entrez le mot de passe pour l'administrateur de boîte. Référence - Pour vous connecter en mode Utilisateur en tant qu'administrateur, sélectionnez [Administrateur] - [Administrateur (Mode utilisateur)], puis entrez le mot de passe administrateur. - Si [Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification] dans les Réglages Administrateur est réglé sur Mode 2 et si un utilisateur entre un mot de passe incorrect le nombre de fois spécifié, il n'est plus possible de se connecter en mode Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur le paramètre Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. - La page de saisie du mot de passe varie en fonction des réglages de la machine. - Vous pouvez afficher l'explication des fonctions (Aide) si nécessaire. Pour afficher l'Aide, sélectionnez [ON] dans Réglage Affichage. – [Par souris] : pointez le curseur pour afficher l'Aide. – [Par focus] : sélectionnez un élément pour afficher l'Aide. bizhub 652/552 9-15 9.3 Organisation de la page 9 9.3 Organisation de la page Toute connexion sur PageScope Web Connection affiche la page qui est configurée comme illustré ci-dessous. L'exemple ci-après illustre les rubriques de Information - Info sur le périphérique. Référence - Le contenu des pages de PageScope Web Connection dépend des options installées sur la machine ou des réglages. No. Élément Description 1 Logo KONICA MINOLTA Cliquez sur ce logo pour accéder directement au site Web Konica Minolta à l'adresse suivante : http://www.konicaminolta.com/ 2 Logo PageScope Web Connection Cliquez sur ce logo pour afficher les informations de version de PageScope Web Connection. 3 Nom utilisateur de connexion Affiche l'icône et le nom utilisateur du mode de connexion actuel (utilisateur public, utilisateur enregistré, nom de compte, administrateur, administrateur de boîtes). Cliquez sur le nom d'utilisateur pour afficher le nom de l'utilisateur connecté. 4 Affichage des états Affiche les symboles et les messages indiquant l'état des sections imprimante et scanner de la machine. En cliquant sur l'icône désirée lors de l'apparition d'une erreur, vous affichez les informations (Page Info Consommables, Magasin ou Enregistrement utilisateur page) associées à l'icône vous permettant de vérifier l'état. 5 Afficheur des messages Affiche l'état de fonctionnement de la machine. 3 4 5 6 12 7 8 9 1 2 10 11 9 Organisation de la page 9-16 bizhub 652/552 9.3 6 [Vers Écran de connexion]/ [Déconnexion] Cliquez sur cette touche pour se déconnecter du mode en cours et se reconnecter. Si vous êtes connecté en tant qu'utilisateur Public, [Vers Écran de connexion] apparaît. Si vous êtes connecté en tant qu'utilisateur enregistré ou administrateur, [Déconnexion] apparaît. 7 [Modif. Mot Passe] Cliquez sur cette touche pour accéder à la page de changement du mot de passe utilisateur. Ce bouton apparaît seulement dans la page du mode utilisateur à laquelle vous êtes connecté comme utilisateur enregistré. 8 Aide Vous pouvez afficher l'aide en ligne pour la fonction actuellement configurée. Vous pouvez spécifier l'URL d'aide en ligne dans l'[Assistance en ligne] aux page 9-37. 9 Rafraîchir Cliquez sur cette icône pour actualiser les informations affichées sur la page. 10 Icône Sélectionner la catégorie de la rubrique à afficher. Les icônes suivantes s'affichent en mode Utilisateur. • Information • Tâche • Boîte Utilisateur • Impression directe • Enregistrement Destination • Personnaliser 11 Assistence en ligne Affiche des informations et réglages pour l'icône sélectionnée. Le menu qui apparaît dans cette zone dépend de l'icône sélectionnée. 12 Informations et paramètres Affiche les détails de l'élément sélectionné dans le menu. No. Élément Description bizhub 652/552 9-17 9.4 Présentation du mode Utilisateur 9 9.4 Présentation du mode Utilisateur La connexion en mode utilisateur vous permet de configurer les fonctions suivantes. 9.4.1 Information dPour info Vous pouvez aussi vérifier l'explication du mode utilisateur dans l'aide en ligne de PageScope Web Connection ou le manuel de PageScope Web Connection figurant sur le DVD-ROM d'application. Pour plus d'informations sur l'aide en ligne, voir page 9-4. Élément Description [Info sur le périphérique] Permet de vérifier les composants, les options, les consommables et les compteurs de cette machine. [Assistance en ligne] Permet de vérifier l'assistance en ligne concernant ce produit. [Changer mot de passe utilisateur] Change le mot de passe de l'utilisateur [Information sur l'autorisation des fonctions] Permet de vérifier les information sur les fonction autorisées à l'utilisateur ou au compte. [Informations Configuration Réseau] Permet de vérifier les paramètres réseau de cette machine. [Informations Configuration Impression] Permet de vérifier les réglages du contrôleur d'imprimante de cette machine. [Informations d'impression] Imprime les informations sur les polices ou la configuration. 9 Présentation du mode Utilisateur 9-18 bizhub 652/552 9.4 9.4.2 Tâche 9.4.3 Boîtes dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la gestion des boîtes utilisateur, voir page 9-22. Élément Description [Tâches en cours] Permet de vérifier la tâche en cours d'exécution ou les tâches en file d'attente. [Historiques tâches] Permet de vérifier les tâches exécutées. [Liste communications] Permet de vérifier les tâches d'émission et de réception achevées. Élément Description [Connexion de boîte] Ouvre la boîte qui vient d'être créée (boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) pour vous permettre d'imprimer, envoyer ou télécharger un document enregistré dans la boîte ou de changer le réglage de la boîte. [Créer Boîte utilisateur] Permet de créer une nouvelle boîte. bizhub 652/552 9-19 9.4 Présentation du mode Utilisateur 9 9.4.4 Impression directe Référence - [Impression Directe] risque de ne pas s'afficher en fonction des réglages dans le mode Administrateur. - Un original en couleur est converti en noir et blanc pour l'impression, même si le réglage Impression Directe est défini. [Ouvrir Boîte utilisateur Système] Cette fonction ouvre la boîte Système (Bulletin, Émission dépôt, Réception mémoire ou Boîte relais) pour permettre une opération sur un document enregistré dans la boîte ou de changer le réglage de la boîte. [Ouvrir Boîte utilisateur Système] s'affiche lorsque le Kit Fax en option est installé. [Créer Boîte utilisateur Système] Cette fonction vous permet de créer une nouvelle boîte Bulletin ou une nouvelle boîte Relais. [Créer Boîte utilisateur Système] s'affiche lorsque le Kit Fax est installé. Élément Description Élément Description [Impression directe] Spécifiez un fichier enregistré dans l'ordinateur pour imprimer sur cette machine. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez sélectionner Application pour enregistrer un document dans la boîte Utilisateur spécifié. 9 Présentation du mode Utilisateur 9-20 bizhub 652/552 9.4 9.4.5 Enregistrement Destination [Enregistrement Destination] risque de ne pas s'afficher en fonction des réglages dans le mode Administrateur. Élément Description [Carnet d’adresses] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses enregistré dans cette machine ou d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse. [Groupe] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses Groupe enregistré dans cette machine ou d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse. [Programme] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses Programme enregistré dans cette machine ou d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse. [Temporaire Une-Touche] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses Programme temporaire enregistré dans cette machine ou d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse. [Titre] Vous permet d'enregistrer ou de modifier jusqu'à 10 objets pour l'envoi d'e-mails. [Texte] Vous permet d'enregistrer ou de modifier jusqu'à 10 corps de texte pour l'envoi d'e-mails. bizhub 652/552 9-21 9.4 Présentation du mode Utilisateur 9 9.4.6 Personnaliser Cette fonction vous permet de spécifier l'écran de départ après la connexion. Élément Description [Option] Permet de configurer les réglages affichés sur la page initiale qui apparaît après connexion à cette machine. 9 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9-22 bizhub 652/552 9.5 9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte Le menu [Connexion de boîte] offre les fonctions suivantes. - Afficher sous forme de liste des documents enregistrés dans une boîte - Imprimer un document - Envoyer un document à une autre machine - Télécharger et enregistrer les données du document dans votre ordinateur - Déplacer ou copier un document vers une autre boîte utilisateur - Supprimer un document 9.5.1 Afficher sous forme de liste des documents enregistrés dans une boîte À la connexion, la liste des boîtes utilisateur (boîtes Publique, Personnelle et Groupe) créées dans la MFP connectée. Connexion de boîte Sélectionnez le nom de la boîte désirée dans la liste des boîtes. Vous pouvez aussi entrer le numéro de boîte et le mot de passe, puis cliquez sur [OK]. Référence - Sélectionner un nom de la boîte avec mot de passe affiche la page de saisie du mot de passe. "Connexion de boîte" s'affiche comme illustré ci-dessous en fonction des réglages Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département. - [Connexion de boîte (Public)] s'affiche lorsque Authentification utilisateur n'est pas activé. - [Connexion de boîte (Public/Privé)] : s'affiche lorsque Authentification utilisateur est activé. - [Connexion de boîte (Public/Groupe)] : s'affiche lorsque Compte Département est activé. - [Connexion de boîte (Public/Groupe/Privé)] : s'affiche lorsque Authentification utilisateur et Compte Département sont activés. Élément Description [N° Bte Ut.] Entrez le numéro de la boîte utilisateur à ouvrir. [Mot de passe de boîte] Si un mot de passe est assigné à la boîte concernée, entrez le mot de passe. bizhub 652/552 9-23 9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9 < Liste des boîtes> Liste de fichiers Sélectionner une boîte affiche ses informations de base ainsi qu'une liste des documents enregistrés dans la boîte. Élément Description [Rechercher dans l'index] Affiche la liste des boîtes utilisateur pour chaque index, qui a été sélectionné lors de la création d'une boîte. [Page (affichage par 50 boîtes)] Quand cette machine contient 50 boîtes utilisateur ou davantage, spécifiez la page désirée pour changer l'affichage. [Liste des boîtes] Affiche le numéro de boîte, le nom de la boîte, le type de boîte et la date et l'heure de création. Une boîte avec mot de passe est indiquée par une icône en forme de clé. Élément Description [Réglages Boîte] Cliquez sur cette touche pour changer le nom de la boîte, son index, son extension ou le mot de passe. [Supprimer boîte utilisat] Cliquez sur cette touche pour supprimer la boîte utilisateur affichée. • La suppression d'une boîte efface tous les documents enregistrés dans la boîte. Vue Vignettes Pour afficher chaque document sous forme de vignette, cliquez sur [ON]. Pour ne pas afficher les vignettes, cliquez sur [OFF]. Spécifier l'opération Sélectionnez l'opération voulue, par exemple, imprimer, déplacer, copier ou supprimer un document, l'envoyer à une autre machine ou le télécharger sur votre ordinateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-24. [Modifier l'affichage] Sélectionnez l'opération voulue et cliquez sur cette touche pour afficher la case à cocher "Sélectionner" pour le document qui peut être traité par la fonction cible. 9 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9-24 bizhub 652/552 9.5 Référence - Si 11 documents ou plus sont enregistrés, [Page (Afficher par 10)] s'affiche. 9.5.2 Imprimer un document 1 Sélectionnez [Spécifier l'opération] - [Impression] et cliquez sur [Modifier l'affichage]. La case à cocher Sélectionner s'affiche pour les documents imprimables. Sélectionner Affiche une case à cocher pour le document qui peut être traité par la fonction sélectionnée. Vignette Affiche l'image de la première page lorsque la fonction Vue Vignettes est activée. Nom Document Affiche un nom de document. Nombre d'originaux Affiche le nombre d'originaux d'un document. [Modif. Nom] Cliquez sur cette touche pour renommer un document. Élément Description bizhub 652/552 9-25 9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9 2 Cochez la case du document concerné et cliquez sur [Réglage impression]. 9 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9-26 bizhub 652/552 9.5 3 Configurez les réglages d'impression. % Si plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés alors que Combinaison est réglé sur [OFF], les paramètres De base et Configuration d'application deviennent indisponibles. % [Enregistrer les paramètres d'impression] ne s'affiche pas lorsque plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés. 4 Cliquez sur [OK]. L'impression démarre. 5 Cliquez sur [OK]. Ceci vous renvoie à la page Liste Fichiers. Élément Description [Changer l'ordre] S'affiche lorsque plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés. Cette fonction vous permet de changer l'ordre d'impression. Cliquez sur le document concerné et sélectionnez [Début], [Vers le haut], [Vers le bas], [Fin] ou [Rétablir]. Pour obtenir l'affichage de chaque document par une vignette, cliquez sur [Vue Vignettes]. [Combinaison] S'affiche lorsque plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés. Cette fonction imprime les documents sélectionnés comme un seul travail d'impression. [Paramètre fonctions de base] Spécifiez les réglages Nombre de copies, Impression recto verso, Impression continue et Finition. • Impression continue ne s'affiche pas lorsque plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés. [Configuration d'application] Configurez les réglages détaillés comme Marge de page ou Tampon. Si vous utilisez cette fonction, cliquez sur [Affichage]. [Enregistrer Réglages Impression] Sélectionnez si les réglages doivent être enregistrés. bizhub 652/552 9-27 9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9 9.5.3 Envoyer un document à une autre machine 1 Sélectionnez [Spécifier l'opération] - [Envoyer à un autre périphérique] et cliquez sur [Modifier l'affichage]. La case à cocher Sélectionner s'affiche pour les documents qui peuvent être envoyés. 2 Cochez la case du document concerné et cliquez sur [Réglages Émiss.]. 9 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9-28 bizhub 652/552 9.5 3 Configurez les réglages d'émission. Élément Description [Spécifier destination] Cliquez sur [Chercher dans la liste] pour sélectionner la destination dans le carnet d'adresses. Pour consulter la liste des destinations, cliquez sur [Vérifier Adresse]. bizhub 652/552 9-29 9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9 % Si plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés alors que Lier EMI est réglé sur [OFF], les paramètres Type Fichier ou Configuration d'application deviennent indisponibles. 4 Cliquez sur [OK]. L'émission commence. 5 Cliquez sur [OK]. Ceci vous renvoie à la page Liste Fichiers. 9.5.4 Téléchargement des données d'un document sur votre ordinateur 1 Sélectionnez [Spécifier l'opération] - [Télécharger vers PC] et cliquez sur [Modifier l'affichage]. La case à cocher de sélection d'un document disponible s'affiche. [Changer l'ordre] S'affiche lorsque plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés. Cette fonction vous permet de changer l'ordre d'émission. Cliquez sur le document concerné et sélectionnez [Début], [Vers le haut], [Vers le bas], [Fin] ou [Rétablir]. Pour obtenir l'affichage de chaque document par une vignette, cliquez sur [Vue Vignettes]. [Lier EMI] S'affiche lorsque plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés. Cette fonction envoie les documents sélectionnés comme une seule tâche d'émission. [Type fichier] Spécifiez le type de fichier et le niveau de cryptage d'un fichier à envoyer. [Réglage communication] Configurez les réglages E-Mail ou spécifiez l'Adresse URL de Notification. Si vous utilisez cette fonction, cliquez sur [Affichage]. [Configuration d'application] Configurez les réglages détaillés comme Tampon ou Impress. par page. Si vous utilisez cette fonction, cliquez sur [Affichage]. Élément Description 9 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9-30 bizhub 652/552 9.5 2 Cochez la case du document concerné et cliquez sur [Configuration téléchargement]. 3 Configurez les réglages. bizhub 652/552 9-31 9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9 4 Cliquez sur [OK]. 5 Quand le message [La préparation au téléchargement s'est bien terminée] apparaît, cliquez sur la touche [Télécharger]. La page File Download apparaît. 6 Cliquez sur [Save] (Enregistrer). 7 Spécifiez l'emplacement de destination et le nom de fichier et cliquez sur [Save]. 8 Cliquez sur [Back]. Ceci vous renvoie à la page Liste Fichiers. Élément Description [Changer l'ordre] S'affiche lorsque plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés. Cette fonction recueille les pages dans l'ordre où elles sont affichées et les imprime comme un seul document. Au besoin, vous pouvez changer cet ordre. Cliquez sur le document concerné et sélectionnez [Début], [Vers le haut], [Vers le bas], [Fin] ou [Rétablir]. Pour obtenir l'affichage de chaque document par une vignette, cliquez sur [Vue Vignettes]. [Format du fichier] Sélectionnez le type du fichier à enregistrer. [Plage de pages] Téléchargez toutes les pages ou spécifiez l'étendue des pages successives. 9 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9-32 bizhub 652/552 9.5 9.5.5 Déplacer ou copier un document vers une autre boîte utilisateur 1 Sélectionnez [Spécifier l'opération] - [Déplacer/Copier] et cliquez [Modifier l'affichage]. La case à cocher de sélection d'un document disponible s'affiche. bizhub 652/552 9-33 9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9 2 Cochez la case du document concerné et cliquez sur [Paramètre Copier/Déplacer]. % Il n'est pas possible de sélectionner plusieurs documents. 3 Configurez les réglages. 4 Cliquez sur [OK]. Déplace ou copie le document. 5 Cliquez sur [OK]. Ceci vous renvoie à la page Liste Fichiers. Élément Description [N° Bte Ut.] Sélectionnez dans la Liste des boîtes la boîte d'où déplacer ou copier un document. [Copie] Cochez cette case pour copier le document dans la boîte utilisateur désirée. 9 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9-34 bizhub 652/552 9.5 9.5.6 Supprimer un document 1 Sélectionnez [Spécifier l'opération] - [Supprimer] et cliquez sur [Modifier l'affichage]. La case à cocher de sélection d'un document disponible s'affiche. bizhub 652/552 9-35 9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9 2 Cochez la case du document concerné et cliquez sur [Supprimer]. % Pour sélectionner ou désélectionner tous les documents, cochez la case [Cocher/Décocher]. 3 Cochez le nom du document à supprimer et cliquez sur [OK]. % Pour obtenir l'affichage de chaque document par une vignette, cliquez sur [Vue Vignettes]. 4 Cliquez sur [OK]. Ceci supprime le ou les documents et vous ramène à la page Liste de fichiers. 9 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9-36 bizhub 652/552 9.6 9.6 Présentation du mode Administrateur La connexion en mode administrateur vous permet d'utiliser les fonctions suivantes. Référence - Pour plus d'informations sur le mode Administrateur, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. - Les modes administrateur sont classés en deux modes d'affichage : [Affichage Fonction Onglet] et [Affichage Fonction Liste]. Ce manuel donne un exemple de l'emplacement où se définit l'[Affichage Fonction Liste]. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-13. 9.6.1 Entretien Élément Description [Compteur] Permet de vérifier le compteur de cette machine. [Version ROM] Permet de vérifier la version ROM. [Importer/Exporter] Permet d'enregistrer (exportation) les informations de réglage de cette machine dans un fichier ou de les enregistrer (importer) dans cette machine depuis un fichier. [Paramètres notification statut] Configurez la fonction devant faire l'objet d'un rapport à un utilisateur enregistré, en cas d'erreur sur cette machine. Spécifiez la destination et éléments à notifier à un utilisateur enregistré en cas d'erreur. [Compteur total Réglages de notification] Configurez les réglages pour la notification à l'utilisateur cible du Compteur total par E-mail et enregistrez l'adresse e-mail de la destination. [Réglage date/heure] Spécifiez la date et l'heure affichées sur cette machine. [Configuration Programmateur] Configurez le mode Économie d'énergie ou le Réglage Programmateur hebdomadaire sur cette machine. [Réglage Affichage Code erreur Réseau] Indiquer s'il faut afficher le code d'erreur réseau. bizhub 652/552 9-37 9.6 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9 9.6.2 Réglage Système Référence - Pour utiliser cette machine comme scanner avec le logiciel d'application sous TWAIN, installez le pilote dédiéKONICA MINOLTA TWAIN. Pour plus de détails, voir le manuel du pilote TWAIN sur le DVD livré avec cette machine. [Initialiser] Efface tous les réglages relatifs au réseau, au contrôleur et aux destinations. [Paramètres de Licence] Permet de délivrer une licence et d'activer des fonctions. Vous pouvez aussi émettre un code de requête. [Modifier Police/Macro] Permet d'ajouter une police ou une macro. [Journal de tâches] Vous permet de créer et de télécharger des données de journal des tâches exécutées sur cette machine. Élément Description Élément Description [Paramètres Machine] Change les informations d'enregistrement de la machine. [Enregistrer Information Assistance] Spécifiez les informations d'assistance (comme le nom de contact, l'URL d'entreprise ou l'URL manuelle en ligne) de cette machine. Pour afficher cette information, sélectionnez [Information] - [Assistance en ligne]. [Réseau TWAIN] Spécifiez l'heure à laquelle désactiver le verrouillage des opérations lors de la numérisation (excepté pour la numérisation PUSH). Si nécessaire, configurez les réglages pour activer l'enregistrement ou la lecture d'un document dans ou depuis la mémoire externe. [Configurer la boîte] Permet de définir les fonctions Boîte, comme supprimer des boîtes inutiles ou spécifier le délai de suppression de document. Si nécessaire, configurez les réglages pour activer l'enregistrement ou la lecture d'un document dans ou depuis la mémoire externe. [Réglages Tampon] Permet d'enregistrer un en-tête ou un pied de page. En outre, les [Réglages EMI Fax] permettent d'activer ou de désactiver la fonction Tampon pour l'émission fax. [Réglages Impression Page vierge] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer le contenu de [Tampon/Surimpression] sur des pages vierges. [Régl. Opération Ignorer Tâche] Permet de spécifier s'il faut ignorer une tâche. [Réglage Affichage Flash] Spécifiiez s'il faut autoriser ou interdire l'affichage Flash. 9 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9-38 bizhub 652/552 9.6 9.6.3 Sécurité [Réglage Mot de passe Administrateur] ne s'affiche pas dans les cas suivants : - Le certificat SSL n'est pas installé - Le mode Sécurité Avancée est réglé sur "ON" - [Mode utilisant SSL/TLS] est réglé sur [Aucun] dans [Sécurité] - [Réglages PKI] - [Réglage SSL] même si un certificat de périphérique est déjà enregistré [Réglage Coopération Système] Configurez le réglage automatique de Préfixe/Suffixe ou le réglage d'impression de données dans un téléphone cellulaire. Dans [Application Connection Setting], spécifiez si la connexion entre cette machine et le gestionnaire PageScope My Panel Manager doit être annulée. [Réglage Affichage] Sélectionnez le mode d'affichage en mode administrateur entre [Affichage Fonction Onglet] ou [Affichage Fonction Liste]. [Réglage navigateur PDF Outline] Spécifiez s'il faut détourer le texte. Élément Description Élément Description [Réglages PKI] Enregistrez les certificats de périphérique et configurez les réglages SSL, protocole ou certificat externe. [Réglages Vérification Certificat] Permet de spécifier les éléments pour la validation d'un certificat. [Définition adresse de référence] Lors de l'octroi d'une autorisation d'accès destination, spécifiez un groupe autorisé de référence ou un niveau autorisé d'accès. [Accès Restreint Utilisateur] Permet de spécifie la fonction de restriction des opérations utilisateur. [Sécurité Copie] Spécifiez s'il faut utiliser la fonction pare-copie ou de protection copie. [Déconnexion auto] Permet d'indiquer l'heure de déconnexion automatique du mode administrateur ou utilisateur. [Réglage du mot de passe administrateur] Permet de spécifier le mot de passe de connexion au mode administrateur. bizhub 652/552 9-39 9.6 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9 9.6.4 Authentification utilisateur/Compte département Élément Description [Système d’authentification] Permet de configurer les réglages d'Authentification utilisateur ou de Compte Département sur cette machine. Pour activer l'authentification, configurez le réglage pour le nombre de comptes assignés ou Opération après crédit maximum. [Système Authentific.] Lors de l'activation de l'Authentification utilisateur, permet d'enregistrer l'utilisateur concerné ou de configurer le réglage utilisateur. [Réglage Compte Département] Lors de l'activation de Compte Département, permet d'enregistrer et de modifier le compte concerné. [Paramètres Serveur Externe] Lors de l'activation de l'authentification serveur externe, permet d'enregistrer les réglages du serveur externe. [Réglage Boîte Utilisateur Publique] Permet de spécifier la limite maximum du nombre de Boîte. [Régl. Scan to Home] Configurez le réglage pour envoyer un fichier dans Dossier Accueil. [Réglages Numériser vers Dossier Autorisé] Configurez les réglages pour interdire les destinations d'émission manuelles. 9 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9-40 bizhub 652/552 9.6 9.6.5 Réseau Élément Description [Paramètre TCP/IP] Configurez le paramètre TCP/IP lorsque vous connectez cette machine via réseau. [Réglage E-Mail] Configurez les réglages pour envoyer ou recevoir des E-mails (y compris des fax Internet) et spécifiez la fonction d'extension comme l'authentification E-mail. [Paramètre LDAP] Configurez les réglages pour enregistrer le serveur LDAP. [Paramètre IPP] Permet de configurer le paramètre d'impression IPP. [Paramètre FTP] Configurez les paramètres permettant d'utiliser cette machine comme client ou serveur FTP. [Activation SNMP] Configurez le paramètre SNMP. [Paramètre SMB] Configurez le réglage SMB client, WINS, Impression SMB ou Réglage Hébergement Direct. [Paramètres Services Web] Configurez les réglages pour la numérisation ou l'impression par services Web. [Paramètre Bonjour] Configurez le paramètre Bonjour. [Paramètre NetWare] Configurez le paramètre NetWare. bizhub 652/552 9-41 9.6 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9 9.6.6 Boîtes La connexion en mode Administrateur vous permet de manipuler une boîte sans entrer le mot de passe pour l'ouvrir. [Paramètre AppleTalk] Configurez les paramètres AppleTalk. [Paramètre Network Fax] Configurez les réglages Émission directe SMTP ou Réception directe SMTP. [Paramètres WebDAV] Configurez les réglages WebDAV. [Réglage OpenAPI] Configurez les réglages OpenAPI. [Paramètre TCP Socket] Configurez les réglages Socket TCP pour activer la communication de données entre cette machine et l'application installée sur votre ordinateur. [Paramètres d'authentificat. IEEE802.1X] Permet de configurer les paramètres d'authentificat. IEEE802.1X. [Réglage LLTD] Sélectionner s'il faut activer ou non LLTD. [Réglages SSDP] Configurez les réglages SSDP. [Réglage Bluetooth] Sélectionner s'il faut activer ou non Bluetooth. • Pour activer une communication Bluetooth, contactez au préalable votre S.A.V. Élément Description Élément Description [Connexion de boîte] Ouvre la boîte qui vient d'être créée (boîte Publique, Groupe ou Personnelle) pour vous permettre de changer le réglage de la boîte. • Les opérations sur les documents ne sont pas disponibles en mode Administrateur. • Les opérations sur les boîtes sont disponibles même si un mot de passe a été spécifié pour la boîte concernée. [Créer Boîte utilisateur] Permet de créer une nouvelle boîte. [Ouvrir Boîte utilisateur Système] Ouvrez la Boîte Système (boîte Bulletin, Relais ou Annotation) pour vous permettre de traiter un document enregistré dans la Boîte ou pour changer les paramètres de la boîte utilisateur. • Les boîtes Bulletin et Relais sont disponibles si le Kit Fax en option est installé. [Créer Boîte utilisateur Système] Permet de créer une nouvelle boîte utilisateur Bulletin, Relay ou Annotation. • Les boîtes Bulletin et Relais sont disponibles si le Kit Fax en option est installé. 9 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9-42 bizhub 652/552 9.6 9.6.7 Réglages imprimante Élément Description [Paramètre fonctions de base] Spécifiez les valeurs par défaut de l'imprimante. [Configuration PCL] Spécifiez les valeurs par défaut en mode PCL. [Configuration PS] Spécifiez les valeurs par défaut en mode PS. [Configuration TIFF] Spécifiez le papier pour imprimer les images TIFF. [Paramètre XPS] Configurez les réglages d'impression XPS. [Réglage d'interface] Spécifiez le délai avant déconnexion de l'interface. [Réglages Impression Directe] Configurez les réglages pour activer l'impression directe avec PageScope Web Connection. [Assigner Compte pour Acquérir Infos Périphérique] Sélectionnez s'il faut spécifier un mot de passe pour obtenir les informations de périphérique par l'intermédiaire du pilote d'imprimante. Si [ON] est sélectionné, spécifiez le mot de passe. bizhub 652/552 9-43 9.6 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9 9.6.8 Enregistrement Destination Élément Description [Carnet d’adresses] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses enregistré dans cette machine ou d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse. [Groupe] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses Groupe enregistré dans cette machine ou d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse. [Programme] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses Programme enregistré dans cette machine ou d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse. [Temporaire Une-Touche] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses Programme temporaire enregistré dans cette machine ou d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse. [Titre] Permet d'enregistrer un maximum de 10 titres pour l'envoi d'E-mails. [Texte] Permet d'enregistrer un maximum 10 corps de messages à utiliser lors de l'envoi d'E-mails. [Enregistrement de l'application] Permet d'enregistrer les réglages de l'application et les adresses serveur en cas d'utilisation d'applications telles que RightFax Server enregistrées sur le serveur externe. L'enregistrement des applications et des serveurs permet de se connecter automatiquement au serveur de l'application sélectionnée. • [Enregistrement de l'application] ne s'affiche pas si le Kit Fax en option est installé. [Préfixe/Suffixe] Enregistre le préfixe ou le suffixe à ajouter comme informations de destination lors de l'envoi d'E-mails. 9 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9-44 bizhub 652/552 9.6 9.6.9 Réglage Fax Élément Description [Position En-tête/Pied pag] Configurez le réglage permettant d'imprimer les informations relatives à l'expéditeur ou au destinataire. [Réglage Paramètre Ligne] Permet de spécifier la ligne fax tel que pour la Méthode de numérotation. [Paramètres Émission/Réception] Permet de configurer les réglages Papier, Boîte ou autres, pour l'envoi ou la réception de données. [Réglage Fonction] Permet de configurer les réglages fax pour Récept Mémoire ou Fax Réseau. [Réglage Connexion PBX] Permet de spécifier la ligne extérieure pour la connexion PBX. [Réglage Rapports] Permet de configurer les réglages d'un rapport, comme par exemple le Rapport activité, à produire lors de l'envoi ou de la réception de données. [Réglage multi-lignes] Permet de spécifier les paramètres et fonction de la ligne étendue. • L'élément s'affiche en présence d'une ligne étendue. [Paramètre Network Fax] Permet de configurer le réglage pour l'utilisation du fax réseau. [Informations En-tête] Permet d'enregistrer les informations de l'expéditeur et son numéro de fax, lors de l'envoi de données. [Réglages Qualité Impression Fax] Spécifiez si vous souhaitez corriger un fax G3 reçu en fonction de la définition. • La basse définition équivaut à 200 dpi e 100 dpi, 200 dpi e 200 dpi ou 300 dpi e 300 dpi, la haute définition équivaut à 400 dpi e 400 dpi. bizhub 652/552 9-45 9.6 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9 9.6.10 Réglage pour chaque utilisation Pour un élément nécessitant plusieurs réglages, configurez-les en fonction des instructions qui s'affichent dans la fenêtre. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. - Configurez les réglages pour envoyer un document numérisé - Configurez les réglages d'impression réseau - Interdire l'utilisation de cette machine à certains utilisateurs Référence - Au fur et à mesure que la procédure de réglage progresse, sa progression s'affiche sur la gauche. - En cas d'annulation du réglage, vous serez renvoyé vers l'écran Assistant après que les éléments configurés avant l'annulation ont été appliqués. 9 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9-46 bizhub 652/552 9.6 10 Annexe bizhub 652/552 10-3 10.1 Liste des messages d'erreur 10 10 Annexe 10.1 Liste des messages d'erreur Si un message d'erreur apparaît, exécutez l'opération correspondante décrite ci-dessous. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur les réglages réseau, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. 10.2 Glossaire Message Cause et dépannage Impossible de se connecter au réseau. Vérifiez que le câble du réseau est correctement branché. Assurez- vous par ailleurs de la configuration correcte des paramètres réseau dans Réglage Administrateur. Sélection impossible de l'adresse pour la méthode de communication, pour cause de dépassement du maximum admis d'adresses pour la diffusion. Le nombre de destinations spécifié dépasse le nombre possible de diffusion générale. Réduisez le nombre de destinations de diffusion ou envoyez la transmission en lots multiples. Le document n'a pu être enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur par manque d'espace sur DD. Vérifiez le journal. Le disque dur est plein. Supprimez les données inutiles et réessayez d'enregistrer les données. Le nombre de boîtes utilis. enregistrées a atteint le maximum admissible. Le nombre de boîtes utilis. enregistrées a atteint le maximum admissible. Le nombre de boîtes utilisateur qu'il est possible d'enregistrer a atteint son maximum. Le nombre de documents enregistrés dans la boîte a atteint le nombre maximal autorisé. Le nombre de documents enregistrés dans la boîte a atteint le nombre maximal autorisé. Le nombre de documents qu'il est possible d'enregistrer dans une boîte utilisateur a atteint son maximum. Le nombre de tâches programmées a atteint le maximum admissible. Patienter jusqu'à l'achèvement d'une tâche programmée. Le nombre de tâches qu'il est possible de programmer a atteint son maximum. Veuillez attendre qu'une tâche soit terminée ou supprimez une tâche en cours. Terme Description 10Base-T/ 100Base-TX/1000Base-T Ensemble de caractéristiques appartenant aux normes Ethernet. On utilise des câbles à deux fils torsadés en cuivre. La vitesse de transmission est de 10 Mbps avec 10Base-T, de 100 Mbps avec 100Base-TX et de 1000 Mbps avec 1000Base-T. Adobe® Flash® Logiciel ou format de fichier développé par Adobe Systems Inc. (anciennement Macromedia, Inc.), utilisé pour la création d'animations vectorielles. Le logiciel permet de gérer le contenu interactif à partir du clavier ou de la souris. Les fichiers restent relativement compacts et on peut y accéder à partir d'un navigateur Web équipé du logiciel plug-in dédié. Adresse IP Adresse ou code utilisé pour identifier les périphériques individuels du réseau sur Internet. IPv4 (Protocole Internet version 4), protocole largement utilisé aujourd'hui, adopte un nombre de 32 bits divisé en quatre sections pour une adresse IP. 192.168.1.10 est un exemple d'adresse IP IPv4. En revanche, dans la génération suivante IPv6 (Protocole Internet version 6), les adresses IP sont de 128 bits. Une adresse IP est affectée à chaque ordinateur ou autre périphérique connecté à Internet. 10 Glossaire 10-4 bizhub 652/552 10.2 Aperçu Fonction vous permettant d'afficher une image avant de passer à l'impression ou la numérisation proprement dite. Authentification & Impression Fonction vous permettant d'imprimer le travail envoyé par le pilote de l'imprimante au cours de l'authentification utilisateur. Bit Acronyme de binary digit (chiffre binaire). La plus petite unité d'information (quantité de données) gérée sur un ordinateur ou une imprimante. Un bit ne peut prendre que de valeurs 0 ou 1 pour indiquer les données. BMP Abréviation de bitmap. Format de fichier utilisé pour l'enregistrement de données images. (L'extension du fichier est ".bmp".) Généralement utilisé sur les plates-formes Windows. BMP couvre l'intensité de la couleur monochrome (2 valeurs) ou couleur (16 777 216 couleurs). Les images BMP ne conviennent pas au stockage en format comprimé. Compact PDF Méthode de compression pour réduire le volume des données grâce au format PDF et servant à numériser les documents en couleurs. Le PDF compact présente des performances élevées en termes de compression et pour cela, il identifie les zones de texte et d'images et applique la résolution et la méthode de compression optimisée pour chaque zone. La méthode Compact PDF peut être sélectionnée pour convertir des documents en données à l'aide des fonctions de numérisation de la machine. Compensation de densité C'est une fonction de correction de teinte de couleur utilisée pour les périphériques de sortie, comme les imprimantes et les écrans. Contraste Différence d'intensité entre les parties claires et foncées de l'image (variation Clair/Foncé). "Faible contraste" indique une image à faible variation clair/foncé, alors que "Contraste élevé" indique une image à grande variation clair/foncé. Contraste La quantité de densité d'une image. Définition La valeur de la résolution exprime la précision de reproduction des détails d'un objet sur une image ou un objet d'impression. Dégradé Les niveaux de dégradés d'une image. Plus les niveaux sont nombreux, plus ils sont à même de reproduire une variation nuancée Demi-teinte Méthode d'expression des ombres d'une image en utilisant différentes tailles de points noirs et blancs. Désinstaller Permet de désinstaller des logiciels installés sur un ordinateur DHCP Acronyme de Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol ; utilisé pour un ordinateur client sur le réseau TCP/IP afin de télécharger automatiquement la configuration réseau à partir d'un serveur. La simple utilisation d'un serveur DHCP pour centraliser la gestion des adresses IP des clients DHCP, permet de construire un réseau sans conflits d'adresses IP ou autres problèmes. Disque dur Un périphérique de stockage de masse pour enregistrer les données. Les données sont conservées même après coupure de l'alimentation. DNS Acronyme de Domain Name System. Le système DNS permet d'obtenir l'adresse IP correspondante à un nom d'hôte dans un environnement réseau. Il permet à l'utilisateur d'accéder à d'autres ordinateur du réseau en spécifiant des noms d'hôtes au lieu d'utiliser des adresses IP évasives et non-intuitives. DPI (dpi) Acronyme de Dots Per Inch (Points par pouce). Unité de définition utilisée par les imprimantes et les scanners. Indique le nombre de points par pouce. Plus la valeur est élevée, plus la définition est importante. Ethernet Norme pour les lignes de transmission LAN. Extension de fichier Caractères ajoutés au nom du fichier pour reconnaître le format de fichier. L'extension de fichier est ajoutée au nom après un point, par exemple, ".bmp" ou ".jpg". Fréquence d'écran Indique la densité des points utilisée pour créer l'image. FTP Abréviation de File Transfer Protocol. Protocole utilisé pour le transfert de fichiers sur un réseau Internet, intranet ou autre réseau TCP/IP. Terme Description bizhub 652/552 10-5 10.2 Glossaire 10 FTP anonyme Alors que des sites FTP normaux sont protégés par un nom de compte et un mot de passe, ce type de site FTP est accessible à tout le monde sans mot de passe en saisissant Anonyme comme nom de compte. HTTP Abréviation de File Transfer Protocol. C'est un protocole utilisé pour envoyer et recevoir des données entre un serveur Internet et un client (comme navigateur Web). Le protocole HTTP permet d'échanger des fichiers image, son et vidéo associés à des documents y compris leurs formats de présentation et autres informations. Installer C'est l'implantation de matériel, des systèmes d'exploitation, des applications, des pilotes d'imprimante ou d'autres logiciels sur un ordinateur. IP Auto Fonction permettant d'obtenir automatiquement une adresse IP. Si l'acquisition d'une adresse IP a échoué auprès du DHCP, IP auto permet d'obtenir une adresse IP depuis l'adresse "169.254.0.0". JPEG Acronyme de Joint Photographic Experts Groupe, un des formats de fichier permettant d'enregistrer des données image. (L'extension de fichier est ".jpg".) Le taux de compression est généralement 1/10 à 1/100. JPEG est une méthode efficace de compression des photographies et d'autres images naturelles. Kerberos Système d'authentification réseau utilisé par les systèmes d'exploitation MS à partir de Windows 2000, utilisé comme authentification du répertoire actif. Kerberos met en place un site authentique au sein du réseau proposant des processus d'authentification en deux phases d'ID utilisateurs et l'utilisation de ressources réseau, permettant aux utilisateurs d'être authentifiés en toute sécurité et de manière efficace. LAN Acronyme de Local Area Network. Ce réseau connecte des ordinateurs sur le même étage, dans le même bâtiment ou dans les bâtiments avoisinants. LDAP Acronyme de Lightweight Directory Access Protocol ; protocole utilisé pour l'accès à une base de données capable de gérer des adresses électroniques et des informations d'environnement réseau des utilisateurs sur le réseau Internet, intranet ou autre réseau TCP/IP. Masque sous-réseau Une valeur utilisée pour diviser un réseau TCP/IP en plusieurs petits réseaux (sous-réseaux). Ceci permet d'identifier le nombre de bits supérieurs de l'adresse IP utilisés pour l'adresse réseau. Mémoire Mémoire destinée au stockage temporaire des données. Certains types de mémoire conservent les données même après la mise hors tension, d'autres pas. Mode PASV Abréviation de PASsiVe, mode servant à connecter un serveur FTP derrière un pare-feu. Si ce mode de connexion n'est pas sélectionné, le firewall considère l'accès comme non autorisé et bloque la connexion, empêchant toute transmission de fichiers. Navigateur Web Logiciel utilisé pour afficher les pages Web. Les navigateurs Web typiques comprennent Internet Explorer et Netscape Navigator. Niveau de gris Forme expressive d'une image monochrome utilisant les informations de dégradé du blanc et du noir. Numérisation Lecture d'une image lors d'une numérisation par le scanner, par le déplacement progressif d'une rangée de capteurs d'image. Le sens des capteurs d'image mobiles est appelé Direction de numérisation principale et la direction de l'alignement des capteurs d'image est appelée Sens secondaire de lecture. Numéro de port Numéro utilisé pour identifier un port de communication assigné pour chaque processus basé sur un ordinateur du réseau. Le même port ne peut pas être utilisé par plusieurs processus. Octet Un octet indique une unité d'information (quantité de données) traitée par un ordinateur ou une imprimante. Un octet comporte huit bits. Terme Description 10 Glossaire 10-6 bizhub 652/552 10.2 OS Abréviation de système d'exploitation. Logiciel de base utilisé pour contrôler le système d'un ordinateur. Windows, MacOS et Unix sont des systèmes d'exploitation. Par défaut Un réglage initial. Il s'agit des réglages sélectionnés à l'avance et activés lors de la mise en marche de la machine ou des réglages sélectionnés à l'avance et activés lors de l'activation de la fonction. Passerelle par défaut Périphérique (ordinateur ou routeur) utilisé comme "passerelle" pour accéder à des ordinateurs se trouvant sur divers réseaux LAN. PDF Abréviation de Portable Document Format. Il s'agit d'un document formaté électroniquement avec comme extension de fichier ".pdf". PDF est basé sur le format PostScript, vous pouvez utiliser le logiciel gratuit Adobe Acrobat Reader pour visionner des documents PDF. Pilote Logiciel fonctionnant comme passerelle entre un ordinateur et un périphérique. Pilote d'imprimante Logiciel fonctionnant comme passerelle entre un ordinateur et une imprimante. Pixel Pixel correspond à pixel d'image, unité la plus petite constituant une image. Plug and Play Mécanisme de détection immédiate d'un périphérique raccordé à un ordinateur et de recherche automatique d'un pilote approprié pour rendre le périphérique opérationnel. Police Bitmap Police utilisant une juxtaposition de points pour présenter les caractères. Les caractères Bitmap de grande taille aggravent de manière non négligeable les irrégularités de contour des caractères. PPI Acronyme de Pixels Per Inch, unité de mesure de la résolution, particulièrement pour les écrans et les scanners. Il indique combien il y a de pixels par pouce. Propriétés Informations d'attribut Quand vous utilisez un pilote d'imprimante, plusieurs fonctions peuvent être spécifiées dans les propriétés du fichier. Les propriétés d'un fichier vous permettent de vérifier les informations d'attribut du fichier. Protocole Règle qui permet à un ordinateur de communiquer avec d'autres ordinateurs ou périphériques. Serveur Proxy Serveur installé pour servir de connexion intermédiaire entre chaque client et différents serveurs pour assurer la sécurité de manière efficace sur tout le réseau pour les connexions Internet. SMB Abréviation de Serveur Message Block. Il s'agit de protocole de partage des fichiers et des imprimantes principalement sur un réseau Windows. SSL/TLS Acronyme de Secure Socket Layer/Transport Layer Security ; méthode de codage utilisée pour transférer en toute sécurité les données entre le serveur Internet et le navigateur. TCP/IP Acronyme de Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. Le protocole standard de facto utilisé par Internet. Chaque périphérique du réseau est identifié par une adresse IP. TIFF Acronyme de Tagged Image File Format ; un des formats de fichier utilisé pour enregistrer des données image. (L'extension de fichier est .tif.) En fonction du "tag" indiquant le type de données, les informations de différents formats d'image peuvent être enregistrés dans une seule donnée d'image. TIFF plusieurs pages Fichier TIFF comportant plusieurs pages. TIFF Simple page Fichier TIFF qui ne contient qu'une seule page Tramage Une méthode de présentation du quasi-ombrage de gris en utilisant les couleurs noir et blanc. Cette méthode est plus facile à appliquer que la diffusion d'erreur mais peut conférer une certaines irrégularité à l'image. Travail d'impression Demande d'impression transmise par un ordinateur à un périphérique d'impression. Terme Description bizhub 652/552 10-7 10.2 Glossaire 10 TWAIN Une norme d'interface définie entre périphériques de mise en image englobant les scanners et les appareils photo numériques et les applications comportant un logiciel graphique. Pour utiliser un périphérique compatible TWAIN, il faut installer le pilote TWAIN approprié USB Abréviation de Universal Serial Bus. Il s'agit d'une interface générale définie pour connecter une souris, une imprimante et autres périphériques à un ordinateur. Vignette Fonction permettant d'afficher le contenu d'un fichier image ou document sous forme d'image réduite (l'image affichée lorsque le fichier est ouvert). Terme Description 10 Glossaire 10-8 bizhub 652/552 10.2 11 Index bizhub 652/552 11-3 11.1 Index des éléments 11 11 Index 11.1 Index des éléments A Accès 9-3 Adr. E-Mail 7-46 Affichage des Informations détaillées 7-67 Agraf. - Réglage Position 7-11 Agrafage 7-10 Aide en ligne 9-4 Aperçu 3-16, 7-68 Aperçu/Définir Plage 7-74 Aperçu/Spécification par saisie 7-75 Applications 7-61, 7-69 Applications - Effacem Bords 6-15 Applications - Page par page 6-16 Archivage 4-17 Assemblé 7-10 Authentification Utilisateur 2-8 Authentification Utilisateur/ Compte Département 9-39 B Boîte 9-18, 9-41 Boîte Annotation 6-3, 7-86, 8-16 Boîte Bulletin Board 7-80, 8-7 Boîte Émission relève 7-81 Boîte impression Document Sécurisé 7-82 Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe 7-94 Boîte Relais 8-9 Boîte Ré-émission Fax 7-92 Boîte Util. Autor./Interd. 8-22 Boîte utilisateur réception mémoire obligatoire 7-85 Bte Ut. ID & Impr. 7-95 C Cache du navigateur Internet 9-4 Capacité Réception Récepteur 7-41 Carnet Adresse - Recherche simple 7-37 Changer Texte 7-89 Chapitres 7-20 Chemin fichier 7-42, 7-43, 7-44, 7-98 Combinaison 7-6, 7-13 Configuration de la page 9-15 Contraste 7-89 Contrôle/Modif. temp. 7-30 Copie 7-65 Copies 7-9 Corps de texte 7-56 Couleur 7-67 Créer une boîte utilisateur 8-6, 8-15 Cryptage 6-9, 7-48 Cryptage - Paramètres Détaillés 6-9, 7-49 Cryptage E-Mail 7-60 D Date/Heure 7-21 De 7-55 De base - Couleur 6-12 De base - Type original 6-6 Décalage 7-10 Décalage Image - Changer Décalage verso 7-17 Définition 7-47, 7-66 Délai de suppression des PDF cryptés 8-20 Délai Suppr. Doc. Impr. Sécurisée 8-20 Délai Suppress. ID & Imprimer 8-21 Département 7-47 Déplacer les documents 7-64 Déplacer Page 7-73 Déplacer/Copier 9-32 Dépoussiérer 6-20 Détail 3-12 Détails Document 7-67, 7-99 Détails Sécurité 8-26 Données PDF cryptées 7-98 E ECM OFF 7-53 Effacem. Livre - Effacem Bords 6-16 Effacement Livre - Effacement Centre 6-17 E-mail 7-40 EMI Outremer 7-53 Enreg. dans Boîte utilisateur 7-101 Enregistrement 4-3, 4-11 Enregistrement Destination 9-20, 9-43 Enregistrer dans mémoire externe 7-65 Enregistrer des documents 2-3, 6-3 Enregistrer la surimpression 7-76 Entretien 9-36 Environnement d'exploitation 9-3 Envoi 4-8 Envoyer 7-33, 7-34, 9-27 É Écran tactile 3-5 Écraser 7-78 Écraser données 8-28 Écraser données Disque Dur 8-27 Émission différée 7-58 Émission sur mot de passe 7-59 11-4 bizhub 652/552 11 Index des éléments 11.1 È Èmis. Fichier (SMB) 7-42 F Fax 7-40 Fax Adresse IP 7-42 FAX Internet 7-41 Finition 7-10 Format de Numérisat. 6-13 Format Perso 6-13 Format Photo 6-14 Format standard 6-13 Formatage DD 8-30 FTP 7-43 G Glossaire 10-3 Groupe 7-10 H Historique tâches 7-45 I Icônes 3-5 Impr/Enreg 7-94 Impress. par page 7-62 Impression 4-5, 4-15, 7-5, 7-6, 9-24 Impression - Application 7-16 Impression - Fonction de base 7-9, 7-99 Impression continue 7-15 Impression directe 9-19 Impression sécurisée seulement 8-26 Index 7-38 Information 9-17 Insertion Feuille 7-19 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre 7-17 L Lier EMI 7-34 Liste de fichiers 9-23 Liste des messages d'erreur 10-3 Liste Tâches 3-7 Liste Tâches - Détails tâche 3-8 Liste Tâches - Supprimer 3-7 M Marge 6-17 Marge page 7-16 Mémoire externe 4-11, 4-15, 6-3, 7-97 Méthode Page par page 6-16 Mobile/PDA 7-101 Modif. document 7-70 Modif. Nom 7-64 Mot de passe 7-43, 7-44 Mot de passe Accès DD 8-29 N Netteté 6-15 Nom 7-46 Nom d'hôte 7-42, 7-43, 7-44 Nom d'utilisateur 7-42, 7-43, 7-44 Nom de fichier 2-10 Nom du Document 7-54 Nom Entreprise 7-47 Nombre maximum de boîtes 8-17 Notif. Erreur Lien Fichier 8-11 Nouveau 7-77 Numérisation séparée 6-18 Numéro de page 7-22 Numéro Fax 7-46 O Onglet par Défaut 8-10 Options de recherche 7-39 Organisation des documents 2-6 Original spécial 6-19 OU/ET/DÉBUT/FINIT PAR 7-47 P PageScope Web Connection 9-3 Panneau de contrôle 3-3 Papier 7-100 Param. Insert Feuille 7-23 Paramétrage cryptage DD 8-30 Paramétrage HDD 8-26 Paramètres 7-17 Paramètres Affichage Perso 8-10 Paramètres Détaillés 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-29, 7-43, 7-44, 7-79 Paramètres ID & Imprimer 8-24 Paramètres Numérisation 6-6 Paramètres URL Dest. 7-56 PDF Contours 6-11, 7-51 Perforation - Réglage Position 7-11 Perforer 7-11 Personnaliser 9-21 Pivoter Page 7-71 Pli/Reliure 7-12 Position 7-25, 7-29 Position d'impression 7-90 Prénom 7-46 Prochaine Destination 7-43, 7-44 Protection copie 7-24 R Rech. Adresse 7-45 Recherche détaillée 7-38, 7-57 Recherche LDAP - Recher simple 7-46 Recherche LDAP - Recherche Avancée 7-46 Recto seul/Recto-Verso 7-9 Référence 7-43 Réglage administrateur Boîte Utilisateur 8-25 Réglage attente doc. 8-21 bizhub 652/552 11-5 11.1 Index des éléments 11 Réglage Boîte Utilisateur 8-10, 8-19 Réglage de base - Contraste 6-12 Réglage de base - Définition 6-7 Réglage de base - Recto/Recto-Verso 6-7 Réglage de base - Type Fichier 6-8 Réglage Délai suppression Document 8-23 Réglage Fax 9-44 Réglage ID & Imprimer Supprimer après impression 8-23 Réglage image 6-14 Réglage Ligne 7-53 Réglage Maxi. Boîtes 8-18 Réglage Méthode Communication 7-58 Réglage Mobile/PDA 8-12, 8-24 Réglage Numérisation 6-11, 7-51 Réglage pour chaque utilisation 9-45 Réglage Surimpression 7-32 Réglage Système 9-37 Réglages Administrateur 8-4, 8-14 Réglages Archivage 7-63 Réglages de Communication 7-52 Réglages E-Mail 7-54 Réglages En-tête Fax 7-60 Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe 8-22 Réglages Horodatage 8-31 Réglages imprimante 9-42 Réglages Original 6-19 Réglages Tampon 8-31 Réseau 9-40 S Saisie directe 7-39, 7-57 Saisie du code PIN 7-102 Sécurité 9-38 Sélection ligne 7-54 Signature numérique 7-60 Spécifier Direction - Orientation Original 6-19 Spécifier direction - Position Reliure 6-20 Structure des menus 1-7, 4-23, 8-3 Suppr. Docs Impr. Sécurisée 8-19 Suppr. page 7-70 Suppression de documents 7-64 Suppression Fond 6-14 Supprimer Boîte Vide (Réglages Administrateur) 8-7 Supprimer Bte Util. inutilisée 8-19 Surimpr. enreg. 7-31 Surimpression Tampon 7-50 Système 6-4 T Tampon 7-23 Tampon répétitif 7-28 Tampon/Surimpression 7-20 Tâche 9-18 Texte Numérotation 7-89 Téléchargement 9-29 Tête/Pied de page 7-30 Titre 7-55 Touche de raccourci 8-10 Transmission F-Code 7-59 Type d'adresse 7-37 Type Fichier 6-8, 7-48, 7-67 Type Numéro 7-90 Type Pare-copie 7-26 Type Tampon 7-28 U Utilis/Archiv 7-3 Utilis/Archiv - Détails 3-14 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche 3-14 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Contenu Réglage Document 3-15 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Réglage communication 3-15 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Réglages E-mail 3-16 Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Vérifier Adresse 3-14 Utilisation des documents 2-4 Utilisation serveur proxy 8-11 V V.34 Désactivé 7-53 Vérif. Dest. & envoyer 7-54 Vérification Capacité HDD 8-26 Vérifier les préférences d'impression 7-102 Ville 7-46 Volet de gauche 3-6 W WebDAV 7-44 Z Zoom 7-14 11-6 bizhub 652/552 11 Index des touches 11.2 11.2 Index des touches 2 en 1 7-13 4in1 7-13 8in1 7-14 A Adr. E-Mail 7-46 Afficher Liste 7-4 Afficher Nom 7-32 Agraf. Centre/Pliage 7-12 Aperçu 3-6, 3-16, 7-68 Aperçu/Définir Plage 7-74 Aperçu/Spécification par saisie 7-75 Applications 7-35 Assemblé 7-19, 7-20 Augmenter Priorité 3-8 Auto 6-20 Autre 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29 B Boîte Annotation 7-86, 8-16 Boîte Emission en relève 7-81 Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe 7-94 Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe 8-6 Boîte Relais 8-9 Boîte Réception mémoire 7-85 Boîte Util. Autor./Interd. 8-22 Boîte Utilisateur 6-5 Boîte utilisateur Document Sécurisé 7-82 Bte Ut. ID & Impr. 7-95 Bulletin Boîte Utilis. 7-80, 8-7 C Capacité Réception Récepteur 7-41 Changer Position/Supprimer 7-25, 7-29 Changer Texte 7-89 Chapitres 7-17 Chemin fichier 7-42, 7-43, 7-44 Combinaison 7-5, 7-6, 7-13 Compact PDF 6-8, 7-48 Compact XPS 6-8, 7-48 Contraste 6-12, 7-25, 7-29, 7-79, 7-89, 8-17 Contrôle/Modif. temp. 7-30 Copie 7-19, 7-63, 7-65 Copie livre 6-16 Corps de texte 7-56 Couleur 6-12, 7-52 Couleur Auto 6-12 Couleur Texte 7-61 Couleurs 6-12, 7-52 Couvert. Face 6-16 Couverture + Recto/Verso 6-7 Cryptage 6-9, 7-48 Cryptage E-Mail 7-60 D Date/Heure 7-20, 7-21, 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29, 7-89, 8-17 De 7-55 Destination Relais 8-9 Décalage Image 7-16 Définition 6-7, 7-47 Délai suppress Impress. sécuris. 8-20 Délai suppress PDF cryptés 8-20 Délai Suppress. ID & Impr. 8-21 Département 7-47 Déplacer 7-63 Déplacer les documents 7-64 Dépoussiérer 6-20 Détail 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 3-13, 3-14 Détails Document 7-4, 7-63, 7-67, 7-69, 7-84, 7-85, 7-91, 7-99 Détails Image 7-32 Détails tâche 3-8 Détails Texte 7-21, 7-22, 7-31 Dos (copié) 7-18 Dos (vierge) 7-18 Double page 6-16 E ECM OFF 7-53 Ecraser Trame 7-25, 7-29 Effacement bords 6-15, 6-16 Effacement centre 6-17 E-mail 7-40 EMI Outremer 7-53 Enregistrer document 7-4, 8-22 Enregistrer la surimpression 7-69, 7-76, 7-91 É Écraser 7-78 Écraser données 8-28 Émission différée 7-58 Émission sur mot de passe 7-59 È Èmis. Fichier (SMB) 7-42 F Face (copiée) 7-18 Face (vierge) 7-18 Faire suivre 3-11 Fax 3-18, 7-40, 7-92 Fax Adresse IP 7-42 Fax Internet 7-41 Finition 7-6, 7-7 Format numérisation 6-13 Format Perso 6-13 Format Photo 6-14 Formatage DD 8-30 FTP 7-43 bizhub 652/552 11-7 11.2 Index des touches 11 G Gauche 6-20 Groupe 7-35 H Haut 6-20 I Ignorer Page(s) 7-23 Image 7-51 Impress. par page 7-62 Impression 7-5, 7-95, 7-99 Impression continue 7-7, 7-15 Impression épreuve 7-92 Impression sécurisée seulement 8-26 Imprimer Document 8-22 Imprimer Page # 7-23 Imprimer sur la face et le dos 7-23 Imprimer sur le dos seulement 7-23 Index 7-38, 8-6 Initialiser 7-4 Insertion Feuille 7-17 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre 7-6 Insérer Papier 7-19 J JPEG 6-8, 7-48 L L1 3-10, 3-11 L2 3-10, 3-11 Lecture 3-18 Libérer Tâch Att 3-8 Lier EMI 7-33 Liste Comm. 3-11, 3-12, 3-13 Liste Tâches 3-6, 3-7 M Manuel 7-14 Marge page 7-6, 7-7, 7-16 Mémoire externe 7-97 Minimal 7-14 Mode 1 8-27 Mode 2 8-27 Modif. document 7-69 Modif. Nom 7-63, 7-64, 7-84, 7-85, 7-91 Mot de passe 6-9, 7-43, 7-44, 7-49, 8-6, 8-8, 8-16 Mot de passe accès disque dur 8-29 Mot de passe EMI Relais 8-9 Multi Page 6-11, 7-51 N N° Bte Ut. 8-6, 8-8, 8-9, 8-16 Ne pas imprimer # 7-23 Netteté 6-15 Niv.Gris 6-12, 7-52 Niveau de cryptage 6-9 Niveau Suppression Fond 6-14 Noir 6-12, 7-52 Nom 7-46 Nom Boîte 8-6, 8-8, 8-9, 8-16 Nom d'utilisateur 7-42, 7-43, 7-44 Nom Document 6-5, 7-54 Nom Entreprise 7-47 Nom Serveur 7-42, 7-43, 7-44 Nouveau 7-77 Numéris. Document Mémoire Externe 8-22 Numérisation séparée 6-18 Numéro de Fax 7-46 Numéro de page 7-20, 7-22 O Onglet par Défaut 8-10 Orientation original 6-19 Orig. Mixtes 6-19 Original long 6-19 Original plié en Z 6-19 Original Tramé 6-6 OU/ET/DÉBUT/FINIT PAR 7-47 P Page précédente 3-17, 3-18, 7-75 Page suivante 3-17, 3-18, 7-75 Pages Couv. + Dos 6-16 Papier 7-100 Papier Chapitre 7-20 Papier Copié 6-6 Param. Insert Feuille 7-22 Param. Numéris. 6-5 Paramétrage HDD 8-26 Paramètres 7-17 Paramètres Affichage Perso - Configurer la boîte 8-10 Paramètres Détaillés 6-9, 7-24, 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-29, 7-32, 7-43, 7-44, 7-79 Paramètres ID & Imprimer 8-24 Paramètres URL Dest. 7-56 PDF 6-8, 7-48 Permissions Document 6-9, 7-49 Photo 6-6 Pli/Reliure 7-12 Pliage en 2 7-12 Pliage en 3 7-12 Position 7-24, 7-25, 7-29 Position d'impression 7-21, 7-22, 7-24, 7-61, 7-90, 8-17 Position Reliure 6-17, 6-20 Prénom 7-46 Priorité cryptage 8-27 Priorité écrasement 8-27 Prochaine Destination 7-42, 7-43, 7-44 Protection copie 7-20, 7-21, 7-24 11-8 bizhub 652/552 11 Index des touches 11.2 R Recherche 7-35, 7-37, 7-46 Recherche Avancée 7-46 Recherche détaillée 7-38 Recomposer 3-10, 3-11 Recto seul 6-7 Recto/Recto-Verso 6-7 Recto-Verso 6-7 Référence 7-43 Réglage administrateur Boîte Utilisateur 8-25 Réglage attente doc. 8-21 Réglage communication 7-35 Réglage cryptage DD 8-30 Réglage Délai suppression Document 8-23 Réglage existant 7-14 Réglage ID & Imprimer Supprimer après impression 8-23 Réglage image 6-14 Réglage Maxi. Boîtes 8-17 Réglage Méthode Communication 7-58 Réglage Position 7-11 Réglages Boîte 8-19 Réglages Document 7-35 Réglages E-Mail 7-54 Réglages En-tête Fax 7-60 Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe 8-22 Réglages Horodatage 8-31 Réglages Ligne 7-53 Réglages Original 6-5, 6-19 S Sélect. Tout 7-4 Séparation 6-16 Séparation Page 6-11, 7-51 Signature numérique 7-60 Suppr. Docs Impr. Sécurisée 8-19 Suppr. page 3-18 Suppression 7-64 Supprimer 3-7, 3-8, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 7-63, 7-84, 7-85, 7-91, 7-93, 7-94, 7-96 Supprimer Bte Util. inutilisée 8-19 Surimpression enregistrée 7-21, 7-31 Surimpression Tampon 7-50 T Taille Texte 7-24, 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-29, 7-61 Tampon 7-20, 7-23 Tampon enregistré 7-25, 7-29 Tampon prédéfini 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29 Tampon répétitif 7-21, 7-28 Tampon/Surimpression 7-6, 7-7, 7-61 Tâche 3-6 Tâches effacées 3-9, 3-10, 3-12, 3-13 Tâches terminées 3-9, 3-10, 3-12, 3-13 Temporisation Tâche Émission 3-10 Texte 6-6, 7-51, 8-17 Texte Numérotation 7-89, 8-17 Texte/Photo 6-6 Tête/Pied de page 7-21, 7-30 TIFF 6-8, 7-48 Titre 7-55 Touche de raccourci 8-10 Tous formats 7-14 Toutes tâches 3-9, 3-10, 3-12, 3-13 Trame Copie Prot. MdP 7-28 Trame du fond 7-25, 7-27, 7-28 Trame Pare-copie 7-27 Trame Protect Copie 7-25 Transmission F-Code 7-59 Type d'adresse 7-37 Type Encart 7-19 Type Fichier 6-8, 7-48 Type Numéro 7-90, 8-17 Type original 6-6 U Utiliser réglage couleur existant 7-52 V V.34 Désactivé 7-53 Vérifier Capacité HDD 8-26 Vérifier les réglages Tâche 3-14 Vérifier Paramètres Tâches 3-8, 3-10 Vierge 7-19 Ville 7-46 Voir Finition 3-17, 3-18 Vue Vignettes 7-4, 7-32 W WebDAV 7-44 X XPS 6-8, 7-48 Z Zoom Guide de l’utilisateur . bizhub 652/552 Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction 1.1 Bienvenue ........................................................................................................................................ 1-3 1.1.1 Guides de l'utilisateur ........................................................................................................................ 1-3 1.1.2 Guide de l'utilisateur .......................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.2 Conditions d'utilisation................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.3 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel ......................................................................................... 1-5 1.3.1 Symboles utilisés dans ce manuel..................................................................................................... 1-5 Pour utiliser cette machine en toute sécurité .................................................................................... 1-5 Instruction de procédure.................................................................................................................... 1-5 Symboles clés.................................................................................................................................... 1-6 1.3.2 Indications concernant l'original et le papier ..................................................................................... 1-6 Formats de l'original et du papier ...................................................................................................... 1-6 Indications concernant l'original et le papier ..................................................................................... 1-6 2 Présentation 2.1 Présentation des fonctions ............................................................................................................ 2-3 2.1.1 Tableau des fonctions prises en charge ............................................................................................ 2-3 2.1.2 Distribution des touches après extension de la fonction................................................................... 2-3 2.1.3 Extensions de fonctions disponibles ................................................................................................. 2-4 3 Attribution des touches d'application 3.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.1.1 Distribution des touches après extension de la fonction................................................................... 3-3 3.1.2 [Menu Application] ............................................................................................................................. 3-4 3.2 Personnalisation des touches d'application 1 et 2...................................................................... 3-5 3.2.1 [Réglage Touche Application] ............................................................................................................ 3-5 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................... 4-3 4.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Navigateur Web................................................................. 4-3 4.1.2 Caractéristiques ................................................................................................................................. 4-3 Caractéristiques du Navigateur Web................................................................................................. 4-3 Restrictions avec Flash Player ........................................................................................................... 4-4 4.2 Affichage du Navigateur Web ........................................................................................................ 4-4 4.3 Configuration des réglages permettant d'utiliser le navigateur Web ........................................ 4-5 4.3.1 Interdiction d'utilisation du navigateur Web sur l'imprimante multifonction...................................... 4-5 [Réglage Navigateur Web] ................................................................................................................. 4-5 4.3.2 Interdiction d'utilisation du navigateur Web individualisée................................................................ 4-6 [Autoriser fonction]............................................................................................................................. 4-6 4.3.3 Interdiction d'utiliser les contenus locaux.......................................................................................... 4-7 [Accès au contenu du navigateur Web] ............................................................................................. 4-7 4.4 Fonctionnement de base................................................................................................................ 4-8 4.4.1 Composition de l'écran...................................................................................................................... 4-8 4.4.2 Instructions d'utilisation ..................................................................................................................... 4-9 Opération à l'aide de l'écran tactile ................................................................................................... 4-9 Opération à l'aide du pavé numérique............................................................................................... 4-9 4.4.3 Saisie de texte.................................................................................................................................... 4-9 Saisie de texte.................................................................................................................................... 4-9 4.4.4 Mode d'affichage de l'écran ............................................................................................................ 4-10 [Normal]............................................................................................................................................ 4-10 Table des matières-2 bizhub 652/552 [Rendu Parfait] ................................................................................................................................. 4-10 [Rendu intelligent] ............................................................................................................................ 4-10 4.4.5 Spécifier le volume du haut-parleur................................................................................................. 4-10 4.5 Barre d'outils ................................................................................................................................. 4-11 4.5.1 Description de la barre d'outils ........................................................................................................ 4-11 4.5.2 [Signet] - [Affichage]......................................................................................................................... 4-12 Liste des favoris ............................................................................................................................... 4-12 4.5.3 [Signet] - [Ajout] ............................................................................................................................... 4-12 4.5.4 [Destinataire] .................................................................................................................................... 4-13 4.5.5 [Histor.]............................................................................................................................................. 4-13 [Afficher Historique].......................................................................................................................... 4-13 4.5.6 [Impr.] ............................................................................................................................................... 4-14 4.5.7 [Menu] .............................................................................................................................................. 4-14 4.6 Configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web............................................................................... 4-15 4.6.1 [Opération Page] .............................................................................................................................. 4-15 4.6.2 [Affichage] ........................................................................................................................................ 4-16 4.6.3 [Gérér fenêtres] ................................................................................................................................ 4-16 4.6.4 [Réglages] ........................................................................................................................................ 4-17 4.7 Impression, affichage ou enregistrement d'un fichier document ............................................ 4-18 4.7.1 Imprimer un fichier document.......................................................................................................... 4-18 4.7.2 Afficher un fichier document............................................................................................................ 4-20 4.7.3 Enregistrer un fichier document....................................................................................................... 4-21 4.8 Envoyer un fichier document ....................................................................................................... 4-22 4.8.1 Restrictions ...................................................................................................................................... 4-22 4.8.2 Envoi d'un fichier document numérisé ............................................................................................ 4-22 4.8.3 Envoyer un fichier document vers une Boîte utilisateur................................................................... 4-23 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5.1 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection............................................................................................ 5-3 5.1.1 Contrôle préalable.............................................................................................................................. 5-3 5.1.2 Comment accéder à PageScope Web Connection........................................................................... 5-4 5.2 Composition de l'écran .................................................................................................................. 5-5 5.3 Connexion et déconnexion ............................................................................................................ 5-6 5.3.1 Connexion.......................................................................................................................................... 5-6 5.3.2 Déconnexion ...................................................................................................................................... 5-6 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte ................................................................................................................. 5-7 5.4.1 Connexion de boîte............................................................................................................................ 5-7 [Connexion de boîte].......................................................................................................................... 5-7 [Liste de fichiers] ................................................................................................................................ 5-8 5.4.2 Opérations sur le document .............................................................................................................. 5-9 Imprimer un document....................................................................................................................... 5-9 Supprimer un document .................................................................................................................. 5-11 6 Image Panel 6.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................... 6-3 Fonctions ........................................................................................................................................... 6-3 6.2 Afficher Image Panel ...................................................................................................................... 6-4 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel................................................................................................................ 6-5 6.3.1 Composition de l'écran...................................................................................................................... 6-5 6.3.2 Opérations générales......................................................................................................................... 6-6 6.3.3 Lecture d'un document...................................................................................................................... 6-8 Numérisation d'un document ............................................................................................................ 6-8 Récupération dans Boîte Utilisateur .................................................................................................. 6-9 Récupérer un document d'une mémoire externe ............................................................................ 6-10 Utilisation des données archivées dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique ......... 6-11 bizhub 652/552 Table des matières-3 6.3.4 Editer le document........................................................................................................................... 6-12 [Aperçu]............................................................................................................................................ 6-12 [Document/Page] - [Modifier document].......................................................................................... 6-13 [Document/Page] - [Combiner Documents]..................................................................................... 6-14 [Document/Page] - [Réglages Document] ....................................................................................... 6-15 [Retour à Dest. Numér.] ................................................................................................................... 6-15 6.3.5 Spécifier une destination ................................................................................................................. 6-16 Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 6-16 Spécifier des destinations................................................................................................................ 6-17 Enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe...................................................................... 6-17 6.3.6 Vérifier le magasin d'envoi ............................................................................................................... 6-18 Magasin Envoi.................................................................................................................................. 6-18 [Vérifier Mag. EMI]............................................................................................................................ 6-19 6.3.7 Envoi de données d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un PDA............................................................... 6-20 6.4 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses...................................................................... 6-21 6.4.1 Spécifications relatives aux données photo .................................................................................... 6-21 6.4.2 Enregistrer des données photo........................................................................................................ 6-22 6.5 Personnaliser Image Panel .......................................................................................................... 6-24 6.5.1 Personnaliser la zone de lecture des données ................................................................................ 6-24 6.5.2 Personnaliser la zone Destinataire Document ................................................................................. 6-25 6.5.3 Supprimer une icône de raccourci enregistrée................................................................................ 6-26 7 Fonctions de traitement PDF 7.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................... 7-3 Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Traitement PDF.................................................................. 7-3 7.2 Propriétés des documents PDF..................................................................................................... 7-4 7.3 Crypter un document PDF et ajouter une signature numérique ................................................ 7-5 7.3.1 Cryptage commandé par mot de passe ............................................................................................ 7-5 7.3.2 Cryptage commandé par ID numérique ............................................................................................ 7-6 7.4 Impression directe .......................................................................................................................... 7-9 8 Fonction PDF adressable 8.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................... 8-3 Précautions à prendre pour la création de fichiers PDF adressables................................................ 8-3 Taille de caractère reconnaissable .................................................................................................... 8-3 8.2 Configuration du réglage de reconnaissance optique OCR....................................................... 8-4 [Réglage Reconnaissance optique OCR]........................................................................................... 8-4 8.3 Configuration du réglage PDF adressable ................................................................................... 8-5 9 Fonction Mon Panneau 9.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec Mon Panneau ...................................................................................... 9-3 Eléments personnalisables ................................................................................................................ 9-3 Fonctions disponibles via le navigateur Web .................................................................................... 9-3 Fonctions disponibles sur Image Panel ............................................................................................. 9-4 9.1.2 Procédure d'acquisition de Mon Panneau......................................................................................... 9-4 9.1.3 Restrictions d'utilisation de la fonction Mon Panneau....................................................................... 9-5 9.2 Afficher Mon Panneau .................................................................................................................... 9-6 9.2.1 Menu Comm ...................................................................................................................................... 9-6 9.2.2 Affichage du menu principal .............................................................................................................. 9-6 9.3 Personnaliser Mon Panneau.......................................................................................................... 9-7 9.3.1 [Réglages Mon Panneau] ................................................................................................................... 9-7 9.3.2 Affichage des [Réglages Mon Panneau] ............................................................................................ 9-8 9.3.3 [Réglage Langue] ............................................................................................................................... 9-9 9.3.4 [Réglage Unité de mesure]................................................................................................................. 9-9 Table des matières-4 bizhub 652/552 9.3.5 [Réglages Copieur]........................................................................................................................... 9-10 [Onglet par Défaut]........................................................................................................................... 9-10 [Touche Raccourci 1] - [Touche Raccourci 2].................................................................................. 9-10 [Régl. rapides 1] - [Régl. rapides 4].................................................................................................. 9-11 [Réglages Densité Onglet par défaut] .............................................................................................. 9-11 9.3.6 [Paramètres Numérisation/Fax] ....................................................................................................... 9-12 [Onglet par Défaut]........................................................................................................................... 9-12 [Carnet d‘Adresses par Défaut]........................................................................................................ 9-12 [Touche Raccourci 1] - [Touche Raccourci 2].................................................................................. 9-13 [Carnet adresses par défaut]............................................................................................................ 9-13 [Type d’adresse par défaut] ............................................................................................................. 9-13 9.3.7 [Réglages Boîte] ............................................................................................................................... 9-14 [Onglet par Défaut]........................................................................................................................... 9-14 [Touche Raccourci 1] - [Touche Raccourci 2].................................................................................. 9-14 9.3.8 [Param. Sélection Couleur] .............................................................................................................. 9-15 9.3.9 [Réglages Menu Principal] ............................................................................................................... 9-16 Touche Menu principal .................................................................................................................... 9-16 Enregistrer une touche dans le menu principal ............................................................................... 9-16 9.3.10 [Réglage Ecran d'accueil] ................................................................................................................ 9-17 10 Fonction Mon adresse 10.1 Présentation .................................................................................................................................. 10-3 10.1.1 Classification des carnets d'adresses ............................................................................................. 10-3 Carnet d'adresses public ................................................................................................................. 10-3 Mon Carnet Adresses ...................................................................................................................... 10-3 10.1.2 Procédure d'acquisition de Mon Carnet Adresses .......................................................................... 10-4 10.1.3 Restrictions d'utilisation de la fonction Mon adresse...................................................................... 10-4 10.2 Enregistrement et modification d'une destination .................................................................... 10-5 10.2.1 Mon Carnet Adresses ...................................................................................................................... 10-5 10.2.2 Groupe ............................................................................................................................................. 10-6 10.3 Copier des destinations dans plusieurs carnets d'adresses.................................................... 10-8 10.3.1 Copier les destinations du carnet d'adresses public dans Mon Carnet Adresses.......................... 10-8 10.3.2 Copier les destinations du Mon Carnet Adresses dans le carnet d'adresses public ...................... 10-9 10.4 Utiliser Mon Carnet Adresses pour envoyer un document..................................................... 10-10 10.4.1 Spécifier des destinations.............................................................................................................. 10-10 10.4.2 Rechercher des destinations ......................................................................................................... 10-10 11 Index 11.1 Index des éléments....................................................................................................................... 11-3 11.2 Index des touches......................................................................................................................... 11-4 1 Introduction bizhub 652/552 1-3 1.1 Bienvenue 1 1 Introduction 1.1 Bienvenue Nous vous remercions d'avoir acheté cet appareil. Ce guide de l'utilisateur présente les fonctions qui prennent effet dès l'enregistrement d'un kit licence en option sur la machine. Il décrit aussi les fonctions disponibles dès qu'une application est connectée. La lecture de ce guide de l'utilisateur vous permettra d'exploiter au mieux chacune de ces fonctions. 1.1.1 Guides de l'utilisateur Guide de l'utilisateur Présentation [Guide rapide Opérations Copie/Impression/ Fax/Numérisation/Boîte] Ce guide décrit les procédures et les fonctions d'utilisation les plus fréquemment utilisées afin de vous permettre d'utiliser immédiatement cette machine. Ce guide contient également des notes et des précautions à suivre pour garantir l'utilisation en toute sécurité de cette machine ainsi que des détails sur les marques de fabrique et les copyrights. Assurez-vous de lire ce manuel avant d'utiliser la machine. [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie] Ce guide décrit en détails les opérations en mode Copie et les réglages de cette machine. • Caractéristiques des originaux et du papier copie • Fonction Copie • Entretien de la machine • Incidents [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Zoom Écran] Ce manuel détaille les procédures d'exploitation du mode Zoom Écran. • Fonction Copie • Fonction Numérisation • Fonction Fax G3 • Fonction Fax réseau [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression] Ce manuel décrit en détail les fonctions d'imprimante. • Fonctions Imprimante • Configuration du pilote d'imprimante [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte] Ce manuel décrit en détail les fonctions de boîte recourant au disque dur. • Enregistrer des données dans des boîtes • Extraire les données des boîtes • Transfert et impression des données des boîtes utilisateur [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax réseau] Ce manuel décrit en détail le transfert de données numérisées. • Emission E-mail, Envoi FTP, Emission SMB, Enregistrement dans Boîte utilisateur, Emission WebDAV, Services Web • Fax G3 • Adresse IP Fax, Fax Internet [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Pilote Fax] Ce manuel détaille la fonction du pilote Fax qui permet d'envoyer les fax directement d'un ordinateur. • FAX PC [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau] Ce manuel décrit en détail méthodes de réglage pour chaque fonction avec la connexion réseau. • Paramètres Réseau • Réglages à l'aide de PageScope Web Connection 1 Conditions d'utilisation 1-4 bizhub 652/552 1.2 1.1.2 Guide de l'utilisateur Ce guide de l'utilisateur s'adresse à tous les types d'utilisateurs, depuis les utilisateurs novices jusqu'aux administrateurs. Il décrit les opérations de base, les fonctions destinées à une utilisation plus pratique, les opérations de dépannage élémentaires et plusieurs méthodes de réglage de cette machine. Veuillez noter qu'une connaissance de base du produit est requise afin de permettre aux utilisateurs d'effectuer les opérations de dépannage. Limitez vos interventions de dépannage aux seules sections expliquées dans ce manuel. Si vous rencontrez des problèmes, veuillez contacter votre technicien SAV. 1.2 Conditions d'utilisation L'activation de l'i-Option LK-101 v2 ou i-Option LK-103 v2 vous permet d'accéder à Internet à partir du panneau de contrôle de l'imprimante multifonction. Les contenus auxquels les utilisateurs ont accès et qu'ils téléchargent et transmettent à l'aide du navigateur Web de l'imprimante multifonction ou par tout autre moyen restent de leur responsabilité. Les utilisateurs doivent respecter les règles de l'entreprise et les lois en vigueur dans le pays d'implantation de la machine. Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. et les sociétés du groupe n'assumeront aucune responsabilité pour l'exploitation d'Internet par les utilisateurs. L'i-Option LK-103 v2 peut ne pas être disponible selon la zone. Pour plus de détails, contactez le S.A.V. [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations de Fonction Avancée] Ce guide détaille les fonctions disponibles à l'enregistrement du kit de licence et en se connectant à une application. • Fonction Navigateur Web • Image Panel • Fonctions de traitement PDF • PDF adressable • Fonctions Mon Panneau et Mon adresse Guide de l'utilisateur Présentation bizhub 652/552 1-5 1.3 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1 1.3 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1.3.1 Symboles utilisés dans ce manuel Les symboles utilisés dans le manuel expriment divers types d'informations. La présentation qui suit décrit chaque symbole associé à l'utilisation correcte et sûre de la machine. Pour utiliser cette machine en toute sécurité 7 AVERTISSEMENT - Ce symbole indique que le non respect des instructions peut entraîner des blessures mortelles ou graves. 7 ATTENTION - Ce symbole indique que la négligence des instructions peut entraîner des fausses manoeuvres susceptibles de provoquer des blessures ou des dommages matériels. REMARQUE Ce symbole indique un risque de dommages matériels pour la machine ou les documents. Suivez les instructions pour éviter tout dommage matériel. Instruction de procédure 0 Cette coche indique une option nécessaire à l'utilisation des conditions ou fonctions prérequises d'une procédure. 1 Le chiffre "1" ainsi formaté représente la première étape. 2 Ce numéro de format représente l'ordre des différentes étapes. % Ce symbole indique une explication supplémentaire d'instruction de procédure. % Ce symbole indique une transition du panneau de contrôle pour accéder à l'élément de menu souhaité. Ce symbole indique la page désirée. Les procédures opératoires sont décrites à l'aide d'illustrations. 1 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1-6 bizhub 652/552 1.3 dPour info Ce symbole indique une référence. Consulter la référence en cas de besoin. Symboles clés [ ] Le nom des touches de l'écran tactile ou de l'écran d'ordinateur ainsi que le nom des guides d'utilisateur sont indiqués entre crochets. Texte en gras Renvoie à un nom de touche, de pièce, de modèle ou d'option du panneau de contrôle. 1.3.2 Indications concernant l'original et le papier Formats de l'original et du papier Les représentations et symboles utilisés dans le manuel pour décrire les originaux et le papier sont expliqués ci-dessous. Le côté Y représente la largeur et le côté X la longueur dans la détermination de l'original et du format papier. Indications concernant l'original et le papier w indique un format papier où le côté X (longueur) est plus grand que le côté Y (largeur). v indique un format papier où le côté X (longueur) est plus petit que le côté Y (largeur). 2 Présentation bizhub 652/552 2-3 2.1 Présentation des fonctions 2 2 Présentation 2.1 Présentation des fonctions La description suivante présente l'ensemble des fonctions. Référence - La disponibilité de la fonction avancée est subordonnée à l'utilisation du kit de mise à niveau UK-203 fourni en option. - Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement du kit de licence et sur l'activation de fonctions sur les imprimantes multifonction, reportez-vous au [Guide rapide Opérations Copie/Impression/Fax/ Numérisation]. - Pour associer la fonction à l'application, vous devez l'activer depuis l'application utilisée. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de la fonction, reportez-vous au manuel relatif à l'application. 2.1.1 Tableau des fonctions prises en charge Le tableau suivant indique les fonctions prises en charge pour les kits licence et les applications. 2.1.2 Distribution des touches après extension de la fonction L'ajout de la fonction Navigateur Web, Image Panel ou Mon Panneau modifie l'utilisation des touches Boîte, Fax/Numérisation et Copie du panneau de contrôle. - La touche Boîte fonctionne comme une touche du Menu Application et les touches Fax/Numérisation et Copie fonctionnent comme des touches d'application. - Appuyez sur Menu Application pour afficher le [Menu Application] qui vous permet de basculer vers la fonction ajoutée. - Pour prendre en compte l'état d'utilisation, il est possible de modifier la fonction qui doit être assignée à la touche d'application. Pour plus de détails, voir page 3-3. Navigateur Web Image Panel Traitement PDF PDF adressable i-Option LK-101 v2 o o - - i-Option LK-102 - - o - i-Option LK-103 v2 o o o - i-Option LK-105 - - - o Mon Panneau Mon adresse PageScope My Panel Manager o o 2 Présentation des fonctions 2-4 bizhub 652/552 2.1 2.1.3 Extensions de fonctions disponibles La description suivante présente l'ensemble des fonctions. Pour plus de détails, reportez-vous à la référence décrite ci-dessous. Référence - Si le dispositif de gestion de compte est installé sur l'imprimante multifonction, l'utilisation d'Image Panel est impossible. Fonction Présentation Référence Navigateur Web Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonction en enregistrant i-Option LK-101 v2 ou i-Option LK-103 v2 sur l'imprimante multifonction. Le panneau de contrôle de l'imprimante multifonction connectée au réseau vous permet d'accéder à Internet ou un intranet et d'en afficher et imprimer le contenu. Avec un navigateur Web, vous pouvez aussi accéder via PageScope Web Connection à l'imprimante multifonction connectée au réseau et aux documents enregistrés dans ses boîtes utilisateurs. p. 4-3 p. 5-3 Image Panel Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonction en enregistrant i-Option LK-101 v2 ou i-Option LK-103 v2 sur l'imprimante multifonction. Image Panel est une nouvelle interface intuitive et facile à comprendre du panneau. Ce "panneau" vous aide à facilement visualiser le cycle d'opérations complet depuis le chargement jusqu'à l'émission d'un document. Vous pouvez ajouter des données photo aux destinations en numérotation abrégée à l'aide de PageScope Web Connection. Les données photographiques enregistrées sont appliquées à la liste d'adresses d'Image Panel. p. 6-3 Traitement PDF Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonction en enregistrant l'i-Option LK-102 ou LK-103 v2 sur l'imprimante multifonction. Exécute le cryptage de PDF commandé par mot de passe ou ID numérique, ajoute une signature numérique et configure les réglages des propriétés pour la distribution de documents au format PDF à l'aide de la fonction Numérisation ou Boîte. p. 7-3 PDF adressable Cette fonction est disponible lorsque l'i-Option LK-105 est enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction. Vous pouvez créer un fichier PDF adressable en collant les données texte transparent dans la zone du document où les caractères sont reconnus par un processus de lecture optique. Vous pouvez créer un fichier PDF adressable en enregistrant ou envoyant un original au format PDF à l'aide des fonctions Numérisation ou Boîte utilisateur. p. 8-3 Mon Panneau Cette fonction est utilisée avec PageScope My Panel Manager. Gestion centralisée de l'environnement du panneau de contrôle personnalisé par l'utilisateur en fonction de l'application (Mon Panneau), puis obtention de Mon Panneau sur l'imprimante multifonction sélectionnée par l'utilisateur. p. 9-3 Mon adresse Cette fonction est utilisée avec PageScope My Panel Manager. Gestion centralisée du carnet d'adresses personnel (Mon Carnet Adresses) par le serveur, puis obtention de Mon Carnet Adresses sur l'imprimante sélectionnée par l'utilisateur. p. 10-3 3 Attribution des touches d'application bizhub 652/552 3-3 3.1 Présentation 3 3 Attribution des touches d'application 3.1 Présentation La description suivante présente la distribution des touches et le [menu Application] du panneau de contrôle. 3.1.1 Distribution des touches après extension de la fonction L'ajout de la fonction Navigateur Web, Image Panel ou Mon Panneau permet à la touche Boîte de fonctionner comme une touche Menu Application et à Fax/Numérisation et Copie comme des touches d'application. Référence - Vous pouvez utiliser les fonctions Navigateur Web et Image Panel en enregistrant l'i-Option LK-101 v2 ou i-Option LK-103 v2 sur l'imprimante multifunction. - La fonction Mon Panneau est utilisée en association avec PageScope My Panel Manager. N°. Nom Description 1 Menu Application Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher le [Menu Application]. Il n'est pas possible d'affecter une fonction différente à cette touche. Si vous ajoutez une fonction, fixez un autocollant Menu Application (inclus dans le kit de mise à niveau UK-203) pour modifier le nom de la touche sur le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails, voir page 3-4. 3 Présentation 3-4 bizhub 652/552 3.1 3.1.2 [Menu Application] Appuyez sur la touche Menu Application pour afficher le [Menu Application]. Si vous désirez utiliser une fonction qui n'est pas affectée à la touche d'application 1 ou 2, vous pouvez permuter les fonctions de la touche concernée dans le [Menu Application]. 2 Touche d'application 1 La fonction Fax/Numérisation est attribuée par défaut. L'administrateur peut assigner une fonction différente à cette touche. Si vous modifiez la fonction attribuée à la touche, fixez un autocollant décrivant la nouvelle fonction (inclus dans le kit de mise à niveau UK-203) pour changer le nom de la touche sur le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails sur l'affectation d'une fonction, voir page 3-5. 3 Touche d'application 2 La fonction Copie est attribuée par défaut. L'administrateur peut assigner une fonction différente à cette touche. Si vous modifiez la fonction attribuée à la touche, fixez un autocollant décrivant la nouvelle fonction (inclus dans le kit de mise à niveau UK-203) pour changer le nom de la touche sur le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails sur l'affectation d'une fonction, voir page 3-5. N°. Nom Description bizhub 652/552 3-5 3.2 Personnalisation des touches d'application 1 et 2 3 3.2 Personnalisation des touches d'application 1 et 2 Pour prendre en compte l'état d'utilisation, il est possible de modifier les fonctions qui doivent être assignées aux touches d'application 1 et 2. 3.2.1 [Réglage Touche Application] Pour attribuer une fonction aux touches d'application 1 et 2, utilisez [Réglage Touche Application]. 1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur pour afficher l'écran [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur [Réglages Système]. 5 Dans [Réglage Système] (2/2), appuyez sur [Param. Touche Application]. 6 Sélectionnez une touche d'application ([Touche 1] ou [Touche 2]) pour y attribuer une fonction. 3 Personnalisation des touches d'application 1 et 2 3-6 bizhub 652/552 3.2 7 Sélectionnez la fonction concernée. 8 Appuyez sur [OK]. La fonction est attribuée à la touche d'application. 4 Fonction Navigateur Web bizhub 652/552 4-3 4.1 Présentation 4 4 Fonction Navigateur Web 4.1 Présentation La fonction Navigateur Web imprime, affiche et enregistre des contenus Internet ou Intranet en y accédant depuis le panneau de contrôle de l'imprimante multifonction connectée au réseau. Référence - L'i-Option LK-101 v2 ou i-Option LK-103 v2 doit être enregistrée pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction sur l'imprimante multifonction 4.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Navigateur Web La fonction Navigateur Web vous permet d'effectuer les opérations suivantes. - Afficher et imprimer les contenus Web sur Internet ou l'intranet. - Afficher, imprimer et enregistrer un fichier document sur Internet ou l'intranet. - Envoyer un fichier document numérisé ou un fichier document enregistré dans une Boîte utilisateur vers un serveur sur Internet ou Intranet. - Partager les documents des boîtes utilisateur des imprimantes multifonction sur le réseau à l'aide PageScope Web Connection. - Lorsque la fonction Mon Panneau est disponible, vous pouvez personnaliser l'environnement d'utilisation du navigateur Web en le connectant à Mon Panneau. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation de PageScope Web Connection depuis le panneau de contrôle, voir page 5-3. Pour plus d'informations sur Mon Panneau, voir page 9-3. 4.1.2 Caractéristiques Caractéristiques du Navigateur Web Les caractéristiques principales du navigateur Web installé sur l'imprimante multifonction sont les suivantes. Élément Caractéristiques Moteur du navigateur NetFront Protocoles pris en charge HTTP (HTTP/0.9, 1.0, 1.1), HTTPS, TCP/IP Langage de balisage pris en charge HTML 4.01, XHTML 1.1/De base Feuille de style prise en charge Partie de CSS1 et 2 Langage script pris en charge Partie de JavaScript 1.5, ECMAScript 3e édition, Ajax (limité au contenu pris en charge par JavaScript) DOM pris en charge Partie du niveau 1 et 2 Format pris en charge JPEG, BMP, PNG, GIF, animation GIF, PDF, Flash 7.0 et antérieur Versions SSL/TLS prises en charge SSL 2.0, SSL 3.0, TLS 1.0 Codes de caractères pris en charge Japonais (Maj_JIS), japonais (ISO-2022-JP), japonais (EUC-JP), chinois simplifié (GB2312), chinois traditionnel (Big5), Europe occidentale (ISO-8859-1), Unicode (UTF-8) Mode d'affichage Normal, Rendu Parfait, Rendu intelligent PDF Viewer Adobe® Reader® LE Flash Player Adobe® Flash® Player 7 4 Affichage du Navigateur Web 4-4 bizhub 652/552 4.2 Restrictions avec Flash Player Les restrictions liées au module Flash Player installé dans le Navigateur Web. - La fonction permettant de générer un événement par une pression de touche n'est pas prise en charge. - Les fonctions permettant de coller ou d'obtenir des données telles que des chaînes de caractères du presse-papier ne sont pas prises en charge. - Le menu contextuel n'est pas pris en charge. - La fonction d'impression de Flash n'est pas prise en charge. - Les fonctions permettant d'exécuter JavaScript depuis Flash ou d'exploiter Flash depuis JavaScript ne sont pas prises en charge. - Les écrans ne comportant pas de fenêtres instantanées ne sont pas pris en charge. - La fonction Signet de Flash n'est pas prise en charge. - La fonction permettant d'envoyer/recevoir des données en temps réel au moyen du Flash Media Server n'est pas prise en charge. - La fonction de communication via XMLSocket n'est pas prise en charge. 4.2 Affichage du Navigateur Web Dans le [Menu Application], appuyez sur [Navigateur Web]. La page spécifiée comme page d'accueil apparaît. Référence - Si un utilisateur connecté utilise le navigateur Web associé à Mon Panneau et que cet utilisateur appuie sur [Navigateur Web], le réglage Navigateur Web et les informations associées à l'utilisateur sont téléchargés du serveur sur l'imprimante multifonction. Si l'utilisateur a défini une page d'accueil personnelle, celle-ci s'affiche. - Au lancement du navigateur Web, vous pouvez spécifier l'affichage de la page d'accueil ou de la dernière page visitée. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-17. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur le menu [Application], voir page 3-4. Pour plus d'informations sur Mon Panneau, voir page 9-3. bizhub 652/552 4-5 4.3 Configuration des réglages permettant d'utiliser le navigateur Web 4 4.3 Configuration des réglages permettant d'utiliser le navigateur Web Si vous souhaitez interdire l'utilisation du navigateur Web sur l'imprimante multifonction, vous pouvez le faire sans désactiver le kit de licence. Vous pouvez également interdire l'utilisation du navigateur Web individuellement. 4.3.1 Interdiction d'utilisation du navigateur Web sur l'imprimante multifonction Si vous souhaitez interdire l'utilisation du navigateur Web, vous pouvez le faire sans désactiver le kit de licence. [Réglage Navigateur Web] 1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur pour afficher l'écran [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur [Réglages Réseau]. 5 Dans [Réglages Réseau] (2/2), appuyez sur [Réglage Navigateur Web]. 6 Sélectionnez [Non valide] et appuyez sur [Valider]. Référence - Si [Réglage Navigateur Web] est réglé sur [Non valide], [Navigateur Web] est masqué dans le [Menu Application]. 4 Configuration des réglages permettant d'utiliser le navigateur Web 4-6 bizhub 652/552 4.3 4.3.2 Interdiction d'utilisation du navigateur Web individualisée Si la gestion des utilisateurs est effectuée sur l'imprimante multifonction, vous pouvez interdire l'utilisation du navigateur Web individuellement. [Autoriser fonction] 1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur pour afficher l'écran [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur [Identification Utilisateur/Suivi Compte]. 5 Dans [Système d'Authentification], appuyez sur [Enregistrement Utilisateur]. 6 Sélectionnez l'utilisateur auquel vous souhaitez interdire l'utilisation du navigateur Web et appuyez sur [Modifier]. % Si vous souhaitez interdire l'utilisation du navigateur Web aux utilisateurs publics, appuyez sur [ ] et sélectionnez [Public]. 7 Appuyez sur [Autoriser Fonction]. 8 Dans [Autoriser Fonction] (3/3), réglez [Navigateur Web] sur [Interdit] et appuyez sur [Valider]. Référence - Le réglage n'est pas disponible si [Non valide] est spécifié dans [Réglages Administrateur] ö [Réglage Réseau] ö [Réglage Navigateur Web]. - La configuration de l'autorisation de la fonction aux utilisateurs publics est disponible lorsque l'accès utilisateur public est autorisé dans [Réglages Administrateur] ö [Identification Utilisateur/ Suivi Compte] ö [Système d'authentification] ö [Accès util. Public]. - Si la gestion des utilisateurs est réalisée sur le serveur externe, vous pouvez configurer les réglages par défaut d'autorisation de la fonction pour les utilisateurs qui se connectent à l'imprimante multifonction en utilisant l'Authentification Serveur Externe la première fois. Pour configurer les réglages, sélectionnez [Réglages Administrateur] ö [Identification Utilisateur/ Suivi Compte] ö [Système d'Authentification] ö [Param. admin.] ö [Autoris. par défaut Fonction] ö [Navigateur Web]. Pour plus d'informations sur [Autoris. par défaut Fonction], reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. bizhub 652/552 4-7 4.3 Configuration des réglages permettant d'utiliser le navigateur Web 4 4.3.3 Interdiction d'utiliser les contenus locaux Si le navigateur Web est utilisé en interaction avec une application, vous pouvez accéder par le navigateur Web aux fichiers (contenus préinstallés, fichiers d'images, fichiers d'aide, etc.) enregistrés sur le disque dur de l'imprimante multifonction. L'administrateur peut interdire l'utilisation des fichiers enregistrés sur le disque dur de l'imprimante multifonction depuis le navigateur Web selon les besoins. Référence - Pour plus d'informations sur l'interaction de l'application avec le navigateur Web, contactez le SAV. [Accès au contenu du navigateur Web] 1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur pour afficher l'écran [Utilitaires]. 2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur [Param. Sécurité]. 5 Appuyez sur [Détails Sécurité]. 6 Dans [Détails Sécurité] (4/4), réglez [Accès Contenu Navigat. Web] sur [Interdit] et appuyez sur [Valider]. 4 Fonctionnement de base 4-8 bizhub 652/552 4.4 4.4 Fonctionnement de base 4.4.1 Composition de l'écran L'écran Navigateur Web se compose des éléments suivants. Référence - Lorsque le kit de connexion locale est installé en option sur l'imprimante multifonction, le haut-parleur du kit permet d'entendre le son des pages Web ou des contenus Flash. Vous pouvez régler le son du haut-parleur avec l'icône. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-10. N°. Nom Description 1 Barre d'outils Permet d'exploiter le Navigateur Web ou de configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web. Elle est affichée en permanence sur l'écran Navigateur Web. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-11. 2 Barre de défilement Apparaît à droite de l'écran lorsque le contenu d'affichage déborde l'écran verticalement. Apparaît en bas de l'écran lorsque le contenu d'affichage déborde l'écran horizontalement. 3 Fenêtre En cas d'affichage de plusieurs fenêtres, vous pouvez changer de fenêtre en vous servant des onglets situés au bas de l'écran. Appuyez sur [e] de l'onglet actif pour fermer la fenêtre. 4 Icône L'icône qui représente l'état de connexion apparaît au chargement du contenu. L'icône apparaît si le kit de connexion locale est installé en option sur l'imprimante multifonction. 1 4 3 2 bizhub 652/552 4-9 4.4 Fonctionnement de base 4 4.4.2 Instructions d'utilisation Utilisez le Navigateur Web principalement sur le panneau de contrôle. Vous pouvez effectuer certaines opérations à partir du pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle. Référence - Le stylet procure un confort d'utilisation sur l'écran tactile. Opération à l'aide de l'écran tactile Utilisez le Navigateur Web principalement sur le panneau de contrôle. - Pour sélectionner un élément, il suffit d'appuyer dessus. - Si un lien figure dans le contenu, appuyez dessus pour y accéder. - Si vous devez saisir des caractères, appuyez sur le champ de saisie de la boîte de dialogue ou du contenu. Un clavier apparaît à l'écran. Tapez les caractères sur le clavier de l'écran. - Pour faire défiler l'écran, appuyez sur [ ], [ ], [ ] ou sur [ ] de la barre de défilement. Opération à l'aide du pavé numérique Vous pouvez utiliser le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle pour entrer des valeurs numériques ou sélectionner des articles dans la liste. 4.4.3 Saisie de texte Si vous devez saisir des caractères, appuyez sur le champ de saisie de la boîte de dialogue ou du contenu. Un clavier apparaît à l'écran. Saisie de texte Appuyez sur le caractère que vous voulez saisir sur le clavier de l'écran. - Pour entrer des caractères en majuscules ou des symboles, appuyez sur [Maj.]. - Vous pouvez aussi saisir des nombres à l'aide du pavé numérique. Référence - Pour changer un caractère individuel dans le texte saisi, appuyez sur [ ] ou [ ] pour déplacer le curseur sur le caractère à modifier, puis appuyez sur [Eff.] et tapez ensuite la lettre ou le chiffre désiré. - Pour supprimer tous les caractères saisis, appuyez sur la touche C (effacer) du panneau de contrôle. - Pour annuler le réglage quand le clavier est affiché, appuyez sur [Rétablir]. - Certains boutons peuvent ne pas s'afficher en fonction des caractères saisis. - Si la saisie de codes de caractères sur plusieurs lignes est autorisée, le bouton de saut de ligne apparaît. 4 Fonctionnement de base 4-10 bizhub 652/552 4.4 4.4.4 Mode d'affichage de l'écran Il existe trois types de mode d'affichage de l'écran Navigateur Web. [Normal] Ce mode d'affichage correspond à celui d'un navigateur Web normal. L'affichage du contenu n'est pas ajusté à la taille de l'écran. Faites défiler l'écran horizontalement et verticalement pour parcourir le contenu. (Le défaut est réglé sur [Normal]). [Rendu Parfait] La disposition du contenu est conservée et la page est affichée après réduction pour que toute sa largeur soit visible. Faites défiler l'écran horizontalement et verticalement pour parcourir le contenu. [Rendu intelligent] Le tableau est divisé et redistribué verticalement pour correspondre à la largeur de l'écran. Faites défiler l'écran horizontalement et verticalement pour parcourir le contenu. La disposition peut s'en trouver modifiée selon la page à afficher. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur le changement du mode d'affichage, voir page 4-16. 4.4.5 Spécifier le volume du haut-parleur Lorsque le kit de connexion locale est installé en option sur l'imprimante multifonction, le haut-parleur du kit permet d'entendre le son des pages Web ou des contenus Flash. Si un haut-parleur est connecté à l'imprimante multifonction, l'icône haut-parleur s'affiche en bas à gauche du navigateur Web. Appuyez sur l'icône haut-parleur pour afficher l'écran Volume qui vous permet de régler le volume du haut-parleur. - Pour augmenter le volume au niveau supérieur, appuyez sur [Plus clair] ou sur la touche # du panneau de contrôle. - Pour réduire le volume au niveau inférieur, appuyez sur [Plus foncé] ou sur la touche * du panneau de contrôle. - Appuyer sur [Sourdine] désactive le son. L'icône de haut-parleur change d'apparence. bizhub 652/552 4-11 4.5 Barre d'outils 4 4.5 Barre d'outils La barre d'outils située en haut de l'écran Navigateur Web permet d'effectuer différentes opérations et de configurer différents paramètres. 4.5.1 Description de la barre d'outils Le tableau suivant indique les fonctions des touches de la barre d'outils. Icône Nom Description Verso Retour à la page précédente. Suiv. Affiche la page suivante. Actualiser/ Annuler Recharge la page affichée pour en mettre à jour le contenu. Si vous appuyez sur cette touche pendant que vous chargez une page, le chargement est interrompu. Home Affiche la page enregistrée comme page d'accueil. "http://www.konicaminolta.com/" est la page enregistrée par défaut. Pour plus de détails sur la page d'accueil, voir page 4-15. [Signet] - [Affichage] Affiche la liste des favoris enregistrés. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-12. [Signet] - [Ajout] Ajoute l'URL de la page actuellement affichée à la liste des favoris. L'ajout d'une adresse URL aux favoris nécessite l'autorité administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-12. [Adresse] Affiche l'écran de saisie des URL. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-13. [Histor.] Affiche la liste des pages affichées jusque là. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-13. [Impr.] Imprime le contenu de la page affichée. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-14. [Menu] Configuration des paramètres Navigateur Web. Il y a deux types de menu : un pour l'utilisateur et l'autre pour l'administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-14. 4 Barre d'outils 4-12 bizhub 652/552 4.5 4.5.2 [Signet] - [Affichage] Appuyez sur [Liste] pour afficher la liste des favoris enregistrés à l'aide de vignettes. La sélection d'un favori permet d'accéder à l'URL correspondante. Référence - Si l'utilisateur se sert du navigateur Web associé à Mon Panneau, la liste des favoris de l'utilisateur géré par le serveur s'affiche. Liste des favoris Appuyez sur pour afficher la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément concerné. Sélectionnez l'opération souhaitée dans la liste. Le tableau suivant indique les opérations disponibles. 4.5.3 [Signet] - [Ajout] (L'ajout d'une adresse URL aux favoris nécessite l'autorité administrateur). En appuyant sur [Ajout], vous êtes invité(e) à entrer le mot de passe administrateur. Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur et appuyez sur [Valider]. L'écran d'enregistrement apparaît. Vérifiez le contenu et appuyez sur [OK]. L'URL de la page affichée est ajoutée à la liste des favoris. L'imprimante multifonction peut gérer 100 favoris au maximum. - Pour enregistrer les vignettes de la pages à ajouter aux favoris, cochez la case [Enregistrer Vignette] dans l'écran d'enregistrement. - L'enregistrement est effectué sous le titre donné précédemment au contenu. Pour changer le titre, appuyez sur le champ de saisie du titre dans l'écran d'enregistrement et modifiez le titre. Référence - L'accès au navigateur Web en association avec Mon Panneau ne nécessite pas l'autorité administrateur. Mon Panneau peut gérer un maximum de 20 favoris par utilisateur. Élément Description [Vue Liste]/ [Vue Vignettes] Permet de choisir entre afficher la liste des favoris ou leurs vignettes. [Vue Adresse]/ [Vue Titre] Permet d'afficher les favoris en visualisant au choix leur adresse ou leur titre. [Supprimer tout] Supprime tous les favoris enregistrés. La suppression de favoris nécessite l'autorité administrateur. [Fermer] Referme la liste des favoris. Élément Description [Ouvrir une nouvelle fenêtre] Ouvre le favori sélectionné dans une nouvelle fenêtre. [Editer] Permet d'éditer l'intitulé et l'adresse du favori sélectionné. La modification de favoris nécessite l'autorité administrateur. [Haut] Vous positionne au-dessus du favori sélectionné. Utilisez cette touche lorsque les favoris sont affichés en Vue Liste. [Bas] Vous positionne au-dessous du favori sélectionné. Utilisez cette touche lorsque les favoris sont affichés en Vue Liste. [Supprimer] Supprime le favori sélectionné. La suppression de favoris nécessite l'autorité administrateur. [Fermer] Referme cet écran. bizhub 652/552 4-13 4.5 Barre d'outils 4 4.5.4 [Destinataire] Appuyez sur [Adresse] pour afficher l'écran de saisie de l'adresse. Appuyez sur le champ de saisie pour afficher un clavier à l'écran. Entrez l'URL de la page à afficher et appuyez sur [Valider] or [Ouvrir une nouvelle fenêtre]. Appuyez sur [Historique Saisie] pour afficher la liste de l'historique de saisie. Vous pouvez référencer les saisies précédentes. L'imprimante multifonction a une capacité de 100 dossiers d'historique de saisie. Référence - Si l'écran de saisie d'adresse est affiché, vous voyez l'URL de la page affichée. Pour supprimer l'URL actuellement affiché, affichez le clavier à l'écran et appuyez sur [Eff.]. Appuyez sur la touche C (effacer) du panneau de contrôle pour supprimer toutes les entrées de données. - Si l'utilisateur se sert du navigateur Web associé à Mon Panneau, la liste des dossiers d'historique de saisie de l'utilisateur géré par le serveur s'affiche. Mon Panneau peut gérer un maximum de 20 dossiers d'historique de saisie par utilisateur. 4.5.5 [Histor.] Appuyez sur [Histor.] pour afficher l'écran Afficher Historique. Dans la liste d'affichage de l'historique, sélectionnez la page que vous voulez afficher à nouveau. L'imprimante multifonction a une capacité de 100 dossiers d'historique d'affichage. Référence - Si l'utilisateur se sert du navigateur Web associé à Mon Panneau, la liste des dossiers d'historique d'affichage de l'utilisateur géré par le serveur s'affiche. Mon Panneau peut gérer un maximum de 20 dossiers d'historique d'affichage par utilisateur. [Afficher Historique] Appuyez sur pour afficher la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément concerné. Sélectionnez l'opération souhaitée dans la liste. Le tableau suivant indique les opérations disponibles. Élément Description [Vue Adresse]/ [Vue Titre] Permet d'afficher l'historique en visualisant au choix l'adresse ou le titre. [Supprimer tout] Supprime toutes les entrées enregistrées dans l'affichage de l'historique. La suppression de l'historique d'affichage nécessite l'autorité administrateur. [Fermer] Ferme la liste d'affichage de l'historique. Élément Description [Ouvrir une nouvelle fenêtre] Charge l'affichage d'historique sélectionné dans une nouvelle fenêtre. [Supprimer] Supprime l'affichage d'historique sélectionné. La suppression de l'historique d'affichage nécessite l'autorité administrateur. [Fermer] Referme cet écran. 4 Barre d'outils 4-14 bizhub 652/552 4.5 4.5.6 [Impr.] Appuyez sur [Impression] pour afficher l'écran d'impression. Configurez les réglages d'impression et appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle. Le contenu affiché est imprimé. Référence - Si vous essayez d'imprimer une page Web ou une image JPEG ou autre qui utilise une grande partie de la mémoire, une erreur de numérisation est susceptible de se produire et de désactiver l'impression. - La valeur de réglage de [Finition] varie en fonction des options installées. – Les réglages d'Agrafage sont uniquement disponibles si le module de finition en option est installé. – Les réglages de perforation sont uniquement disponibles si le kit de perforation est installé sur le module de finition en option. – Les fonctions de pliage et d'agrafage central + pliage peuvent être utilisées lorsqu'une Piqueuse à cheval est installée sur l'unité de finition en option. 4.5.7 [Menu] Appuyez sur [Menu] pour configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web. Il y a deux types de menu : un pour l'utilisateur et l'autre pour l'administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-15. Élément Description [Papier] Sélectionnez le format du papier pour l'impression. [Recto/Recto-Verso] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer en mode recto-verso. [Réglages Tampon] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer le [Titre], l'[URL], la [Date/Heure], ainsi que le [Numéro Page]. [Finition] Configurez les réglages d'assemblage, de groupage, d'agrafage, de perforation ou de pliage/reliure. bizhub 652/552 4-15 4.6 Configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web 4 4.6 Configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web Le fait d'appuyer sur [Menu] dans la barre d'outils permet d'afficher le menu de l'utilisateur. Les utilisateurs peuvent seulement visualiser les réglages opératoires et les informations du navigateur Web. L'administrateur de l'imprimante multifonction peut configurer l'environnement d'exploitation et les paramètres sécurité en plus des réglages opératoires du navigateur Web. Pour afficher le menu administrateur, appuyez sur [Administrateur] dans l'écran du menu, puis entrez le mot de passe administrateur. 4.6.1 [Opération Page] Configurez les réglages opération page sous l'onglet [Opération Page]. Référence - Les éléments portant le signe * sont uniquement affichés pour le menu administrateur. - L'élément [Utiliser en tant que page d'accueil] ne s'affiche uniquement que pour les utilisateurs se servant du navigateur Web en association avec Mon Panneau. Élément Description [Utiliser en tant que page d'accueil]* Enregistre la page affichée comme page d'accueil. [Mémo Page] Affiche la page enregistrée comme mémo page. Il suffit de sélectionner le Mémo Page dans la liste pour afficher la page correspondante. Appuyez sur pour afficher la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément concerné. Sélectionnez l'opération souhaitée dans la liste. [Enreg. comme Mémo Page] Enregistre la page affichée telle quelle. [Affichage Zoom] Appuyez sur [Affichage Zoom] pour faire apparaître la touche permettant d'agrandir ou réduire le format d'affichage de la page. Appuyez sur la touche pour modifier le format d'affichage de la page. 4 Configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web 4-16 bizhub 652/552 4.6 4.6.2 [Affichage] Sous l'onglet [Affichage], configurez les réglages d'affichage des contenus. L'administrateur de l'imprimante multifonction peut configurer les réglages afin de masquer ou non les images ou animations, activer ou désactiver JavaScript et effectuer des réglages détaillés d'affichage des contenus. 4.6.3 [Gérér fenêtres] L'onglet [Gérer fenêtres] permet de gérer l'affichage des fenêtres. Il est possible d'ouvrir un maximum de cinq fenêtres. Élément Description [Mode d'affichage] Sélectionnez le mode d'affichage de l'écran du Navigateur Web en choisissant entre [Normal], [Rendu Parfait] et [Rendu intelligent]. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-10. [Codage] Spécifiez le type de codage à utiliser pour l'affichage des contenus. [Paramètres Détaillés] Configurez les paramètres d'affichage des contenus. • [Image] : cochez cette case pour afficher les images. • [Animation] : cochez cette case pour afficher les animations GIF. • [Tableau] : cochez cette case pour identifier le tableau en HTML et ajuster la mise en page en conséquence. • [JavaScript] : cochez cette case pour activer le JavaScript du contenu. • [CSS] : cochez cette case pour activer le CSS du contenu. • [Retour ligne auto] : cochez cette case pour activer le retour ligne auto du contenu. • [Contrô Conto Ligne Caract] : cochez cette case pour activer le contrôle de délimitation du nombre de caractères par ligne dans le contenu. • [Rendu Rapide] : cochez cette case pour activer la fonction Rendu Rapide. • [Fenêtre instantanée] : cochez cette case pour permettre l'affichage de la fenêtre instantanée. • [Autorisation hors ligne] : cochez cette case pour permettre l'utilisation des contenus hors ligne. • [Lecture Auto Flash] : cochez cette case pour lire automatiquement un contenu Flash. • [Activer Affichage hors ligne] : cochez cette case pour activer la visualisation des contenus hors ligne. Cette commande est affichée lorsque l'[Autorisation hors ligne] est accordée par l'administrateur. [Réglage Sélection des couleurs] Déterminez une couleur pour l'élément sélectionné ([Vert], [Bleu], [Jaune], or [Orange]). Élément Description [Créer nouvelle fenêtre] Affiche le contenu de l'URL enregistrée comme page d'accueil dans une nouvelle fenêtre. [Ouvrir ds nlle fenêtre] Affiche la liste de liens dans une nouvelle fenêtre. [Fermer la fenêtre active] Ferme la fenêtre active. [Fermer les autres fenêtres] Ferme toutes les fenêtres. Cet élément ne peut pas être sélectionné s'il n'y a qu'une seule fenêtre d'ouverte. bizhub 652/552 4-17 4.6 Configurer les paramètres Navigateur Web 4 4.6.4 [Réglages] L'onglet [Réglages] vous permet de vérifier et de réinitaliser les informations concernant le navigateur Web. L'administrateur de l'imprimante multifonction peut configurer les réglages opératoires et de sécurité du navigateur Web. Référence - Les éléments portant le signe * sont uniquement affichés pour le menu administrateur. - Les réglages suivants sont accessibles aux utilisateurs se servant du navigateur Web en se connectant à Mon Panneau. – [Réglage Démarrage] – Réglage de suppression des [Cookies] – Réglage de suppression des [Informations d'authentification] - Mon Panneau peut contenir jusqu'à 20 éléments de cookies et d'informations d'authentification par utilisateur. Élément Description [Réglage Démarrage]* Permet de spécifier la page à afficher au prochain démarrage du Navigateur Web en choisissant entre la page enregistrée comme page d'accueil ou la dernière page affichée en fin de session. [Sécurité]* Permet de configurer le paramètre SSL ou TLS, ou d'afficher un certificat racine ou un certificat CA. [Cookies]* Permet de configurer les réglages de réception et de suppression des cookies. Ce menu permet aussi de supprimer tous les cookies enregistrés sur l'imprimante multifonction. [Cache]* Permet de configurer les réglages d'utilisation et de suppression des caches. Ce menu permet aussi de supprimer tous les caches enregistrés sur l'imprimante multifonction. [Proxy]* Permet de configurer les réglages d'utilisation du serveur proxy. Enregistrez l'adresse et le port du serveur proxy, utilisez-le. Si l'authentification proxy est nécessaire, enregistrez l'ID et le code d'accès à utiliser dans l'authentification proxy. [Informations d'authentification]* Spécifiez le délai au bout duquel supprimer les informations d'authentification entrées dans les contenus. Ce menu permet aussi de supprimer toutes les informations d'authentification enregistrées sur l'imprimante multifonction. [Journal Accès]* Permet d'établir l'historique des accès de tous les utilisateurs. Vous pouvez vérifier par [ID], [Nom d'utilisateur], [URL] et par [Accès]. [Infos Navigateur Web] Affiche les informations concernant le Navigateur Web [Initialis.] Redémarrez le navigateur Web. 4 Impression, affichage ou enregistrement d'un fichier document 4-18 bizhub 652/552 4.7 4.7 Impression, affichage ou enregistrement d'un fichier document Vous pouvez imprimer, afficher ou enregistrer un fichier document si le lien d'accès vers ce document figure dans le contenu affiché. - Les formats PDF et XPS sont pris en charge pour les fichiers documents. - Vous ne pouvez pas afficher un fichier XPS. Appuyez sur le lien du fichier document dans le contenu pour afficher le premier écran du fichier document. 4.7.1 Imprimer un fichier document Appuyez sur [Impression] pour afficher l'écran d'impression. Configurez les réglages d'impression et appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle. Le fichier document est téléchargé et imprimé. Élément Description [Papier] Sélectionnez le format du papier pour l'impression. [Recto/Recto-Verso] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer en mode recto-verso. [Réglages Tampon] En appuyant sur cette touche vous pouvez préciser si vous souhaitez imprimer la [date et l'heure] et les [numéros de page]. [Finition] Configurez les réglages d'assemblage, de groupage, d'agrafage, de perforation ou de pliage/reliure. bizhub 652/552 4-19 4.7 Impression, affichage ou enregistrement d'un fichier document 4 Référence - Si vous essayez d'imprimer un fichier document qui utilise une grande quantité de mémoire, une erreur de numérisation est susceptible de se produire et de désactiver l'impression. - Si le PDF téléchargé est crypté, il est enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur PDF crypté sans être imprimé. - La valeur de réglage de [Finition] varie en fonction des options installées. – Les réglages d'Agrafage sont uniquement disponibles si le module de finition en option est installé. – Les réglages de perforation sont uniquement disponibles si le kit de perforation est installé sur le module de finition en option. – Les fonctions de pliage et d'agrafage central + pliage peuvent être utilisées lorsqu'une Piqueuse à cheval est installée sur l'unité de finition en option. 4 Impression, affichage ou enregistrement d'un fichier document 4-20 bizhub 652/552 4.7 4.7.2 Afficher un fichier document Appuyez sur [Voir] pour afficher le fichier PDF de destination. La barre d'outils en haut de l'écran permet d'agrandir, réduire, imprimer ou enregistrer le fichier PDF. Touche Description Retour à la première page. Retour à la page précédente. Affiche la page suivante. Affiche la dernière page. Rotation de l'affichage de 90° dans le sens horaire. Augmente le taux de zoom. Réduit le taux de zoom. Affiche en fonction de la largeur de la zone d'affichage. Affiche la page entière. Sélection de la Boîte Utilisateur pour enregistrer le fichier document. Configure les réglages d'impression et imprime le fichier document. Affiche la fenêtre Splash (affichage momentané pendant l'activation du logiciel). Ferme l'écran. bizhub 652/552 4-21 4.7 Impression, affichage ou enregistrement d'un fichier document 4 4.7.3 Enregistrer un fichier document Appuyez sur [Enregistr.]. L'écran de sélection des boîtes est affiché. Sélectionnez la boîte utilisateur dans laquelle enregistrer le fichier, appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Départ] ou Départ. Le fichier document est alors enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur. Référence - La boîte doit être enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction préalablement à l'enregistrement d'un fichier document. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. - Pendant l'impression d'un fichier document (en couleur) enregistré dans une boîte utilisateur à partir du navigateur Web, vous ne pouvez pas spécifier la commande [Zoom] ou [Combinaison]. 4 Envoyer un fichier document 4-22 bizhub 652/552 4.8 4.8 Envoyer un fichier document Si des fichiers documents sont partagés sur le serveur, vous pouvez envoyer un fichier document numérisé ou un fichier document contenu dans une boîte utilisateur vers le serveur à l'aide du navigateur Web. Cette section explique comment envoyer un fichier document en s'appuyant sur l'exemple du site de téléchargement. Exemple 4.8.1 Restrictions L'utilisation de cette fonction est soumise aux restrictions suivantes. - PDF, TIFF ou XPS correspond au type d'un fichier document pouvant être envoyé. Un document ne peut pas être divisé pour être envoyé. - Il n'est pas possible d'envoyer plusieurs fichiers documents simultanément. - L'utilisateur ne peut pas modifier manuellement le nom du fichier. - Si vous exécutez l'une des opérations suivantes après avoir sélectionné un fichier document à envoyer, la tâche est supprimée avec le fichier document sélectionné. – La fonction Réinit. Système Auto a démarré. – Le navigateur Web a été fermé. – Le site de téléchargement a été mis à jour à l'aide de la barre d'outils du navigateur Web. – Le navigateur Web a été redémarré. – L'utilisateur s'est déconnecté lors du processus de connexion. – L'interrupteur d'alimentation auxiliaire a été désactivé. – Initialis. a réinitialisé le panneau. 4.8.2 Envoi d'un fichier document numérisé La procédure suivante explique comment envoyer un fichier document numérisé. Référence - Cette procédure n'est pas disponible aux utilisateurs ne pouvant pas numériser de données. - Le fichier ne peut pas être défini au format JPEG pendant la numérisation d'un original à envoyer. 1 Affichez le site de téléchargement dans le navigateur Web de l'imprimante multifonction. 2 Appuyez sur ce bouton pour sélectionner le fichier document à envoyer. % Dans cet exemple, appuyez sur [Parcourir]. Élément Description [Parcourir] Appuyez sur ce bouton pour sélectionner le fichier document à envoyer. le "type" est défini sur "file" dans la balise HTML INPUT. [OK] Appuyez sur ce bouton pour envoyer un fichier document. le "type" est défini sur "submit" dans la balise HTML INPUT. bizhub 652/552 4-23 4.8 Envoyer un fichier document 4 3 Appuyez sur [Numérisation]. 4 Placez l'original à envoyer sur l'imprimante multifonction. 5 Configurez les paramètres de numérisation, puis appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ. % Si Epreuve est sélectionné, vous pouvez vérifier la finition. Une fois la numérisation terminée, le nom de fichier s'affiche dans la zone de texte. 6 Appuyez sur le bouton pour lancer l'envoi. % Dans cet exemple, appuyez sur [OK]. Envoyer un fichier document, puis démarrer. 4.8.3 Envoyer un fichier document vers une Boîte utilisateur La procédure suivante explique comment envoyer un fichier document récupéré à partir d'une Boîte utilisateur. Référence - Cette procédure n'est pas disponible aux utilisateurs n'ayant pas accès aux documents enregistrés. - Avant d'envoyer un fichier document dans une boîte utilisateur, créez une boîte utilisateur pour y enregistrer le fichier document. - Vous pouvez sélectionner uniquement la Boîte Utilisateur Public et la Boîte Utilisateur Privé. - Le fichier ne peut pas être défini sous le format JPEG pendant la sélection d'un fichier document à envoyer à partir d'une boîte utilisateur. Lorsque vous sélectionnez un fichier document JPEG enregistré dans une boîte utilisateur, le format de fichier passe en PDF. Si nécessaire, spécifiez le format de fichier approprié avant d'envoyer un fichier document. - Pendant l'envoi d'un fichier document enregistré dans une boîte utilisateur avec le paramètre Séparation Page activé, ce paramètre passe à Multi Page. 4 Envoyer un fichier document 4-24 bizhub 652/552 4.8 1 Affichez le site de téléchargement dans le navigateur Web de l'imprimante multifonction. 2 Appuyez sur ce bouton pour sélectionner le fichier document à envoyer. % Dans cet exemple, appuyez sur [Parcourir]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Boîte Utilis.]. 4 Sélectionnez la boîte utilisateur souhaitée, puis appuyez sur [Utiliser Doc.]. 5 Sélectionnez un fichier document à envoyer, puis appuyez sur [Réglages Fichier]. % Sélectionnez plusieurs fichiers documents, puis appuyez sur [Combinaison] ; vous pouvez ensuite les combiner en un fichier unique. L'ordre de combinaison peut être modifié si nécessaire. % Sélectionnez un fichier document, puis appuyez sur [Détails Document] pour vérifier la date et l'heure d'enregistrement du fichier document et prévisualiser l'image. 6 Configurez les paramètres du fichier, puis appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ. % Appuyez sur [Application] pour configurer le tampon ou le nombre de pages. Le nom de fichier apparaît dans la zone de texte. 7 Appuyez sur le bouton pour lancer l'envoi. % Dans cet exemple, appuyez sur [OK]. Envoyer un fichier document, puis démarrer. 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) bizhub 652/552 5-3 5.1 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection 5 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5.1 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection PageScope Web Connection est un utilitaire de gestion de périphériques supporté par le serveur HTTP incorpore à la machine. Pour utiliser cet utilitaire, accédez directement à l'imprimante multifonction connectée au réseau à l'aide de Navigateur Web. Pour utiliser cet utilitaire à l'aide du Navigateur Web installé sur l'imprimante multifonction, seule la fonction Boîte est disponible. Ce chapitre décrit la manière d'utiliser les documents de la boîte de l'imprimante multifonction sur le réseau en exploitant PageScope Web Connection au moyen du Navigateur Web installé sur l'imprimante. Référence - L'i-Option LK-101 v2 ou i-Option LK-103 v2 doit être enregistrée pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction sur l'imprimante multifonction. - L'i-Option LK-101 v2 ou i-Option LK-103 v2 doit être enregistrée également dans la destination d'accès de l'imprimante multifonction. - Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation du Navigateur Web installé sur l'imprimante multifonction, voir page 4-3. - Pour utiliser PageScope Web Connection à partir d'un Navigateur Web installé sur votre ordinateur, vous pouvez utiliser plusieurs fonctions de l'imprimante multifonction telles que les fonctions de vérification d'état, de modification de réglages et de paramétrage du réseau. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. 5.1.1 Contrôle préalable Les informations les plus récentes peuvent ne pas apparaître sur les écrans de PageScope Web Connection parce que d'anciennes versions des pages sont enregistrées dans le cache du navigateur Internet. De plus, des problèmes peuvent survenir quand vous utilisez le cache. Quand vous utilisez PageScope Web Connection, désactivez le cache du navigateur Internet. Référence - La modification des réglages du cache nécessite l'autorité administrateur. 1 Appuyez sur [Menu] dans la barre d'outils du Navigateur Web. 2 Appuyez sur [Administrateur]. 3 Saisissez le mot de passe administrateur, puis appuyez sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Réglages] et sélectionnez [Cache]. 5 Décochez la case [Utiliser cache] et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. 5 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection 5-4 bizhub 652/552 5.1 5.1.2 Comment accéder à PageScope Web Connection Lancez le navigateur Web et spécifiez l'adresse IP de l'imprimante multifonction à atteindre. 1 Appuyez sur [Adresse] dans la barre d'outils du navigateur Web. 2 Appuyez sur le champ de saisie pour afficher un clavier à l'écran. 3 Entrez l'adresse IP de l'imprimante multifonction à atteindre, et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK] ou [Ouvrir une nouvelle fenêtre]. L'écran PageScope Web Connection apparaît. Référence - Si vous avez dénié la réception de cookies dans les paramètres du navigateur Web, l'écran de PageScope Web Connection n'apparaît pas. Pour plus de détails sur la configuration des réglages cookies, voir page 4-17. - Si l'écran de saisie d'adresse est affiché, vous voyez l'URL de la page affichée. Pour supprimer l'URL actuellement affiché, affichez le clavier à l'écran et appuyez sur [Eff.]. Appuyez sur la touche C (effacer) du panneau de contrôle pour supprimer toutes les entrée URL. bizhub 652/552 5-5 5.2 Composition de l'écran 5 5.2 Composition de l'écran La conception de l'écran PageScope Web Connection est la suivante. N°. Nom Description 1 Logo KONICA MINOLTA Appuyez sur le logo pour accéder au site Web KONICA MINOLTA (http://konicaminolta.com/). 2 Logo PageScope Web Connection Appuyez sur le logo pour afficher les informations relatives à la version de PageScope Web Connection. 3 Nom utilisateur de connexion Affiche l'icône du mode actuel et le nom de l'utilisateur connecté (public, utilisateur ou compte enregistrés). 4 [Déconnexion] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vous déconnecter du mode en cours. 5 Affichage du contenu Affiche le contenu de PageScope Web Connection. 3 4 5 1 2 5 Connexion et déconnexion 5-6 bizhub 652/552 5.3 5.3 Connexion et déconnexion Si vous avez spécifié l'authentification utilisateur ou compte département sur l'imprimante multifonction, l'écran de connexion apparaît après l'affichage de PageScope Web Connection. Référence - Si vous n'avez pas spécifié l'authentification utilisateur ou compte département sur l'imprimante multifonction, l'écran qui apparaît indique que vous êtes connecté en tant qu'utilisateur public. - Lorsque vous utilisez PageScope Web Connection à l'aide du navigateur Web installé sur l'imprimante multifonction, le mode administrateur n'est pas disponible. 5.3.1 Connexion Précisez si la connexion doit se faire comme utilisateur public ou utilisateur enregistré. Si vous avez précisé une authentification par serveur externe, sélectionnez un serveur externe d'identification. Entrez les informations requises et appuyez sur [Connexion]. Sélectionnez le cas échéant une langue d'affichage. Référence - Les boîtes utilisateur accessibles dépendent de l'utilisateur ou du compte département connecté. 5.3.2 Déconnexion Appuyez sur [Déconnexion] dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran pour afficher un écran de confirmation de déconnexion. Appuyez sur [OK]. L'écran de connexion réapparaît. bizhub 652/552 5-7 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte 5 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte Si vous accédez à PageScope Web Connection par le navigateur Web de l'imprimante multifonction, les opérations suivantes sont disponibles dans le cadre de la fonction Boîte. - Exploitation des documents de la boîte utilisateur de l'imprimante multifonction en cours d'utilisation par une différente imprimante multifonction connectée au réseau. - Utilisation des types de boîte publique, privée ou de groupe. - Affichage, impression et suppression d'un document de la boîte utilisateur. 5.4.1 Connexion de boîte La connexion avec PageScope Web Connection affiche la liste des boîtes (publiques, privées et de groupes) enregistrées sur l'imprimante multifonction à laquelle on accède. [Connexion de boîte] Sélectionnez un nom de boîte ([Nom Bte Util.]) dans la liste de boîtes. Alternativement, vous pouvez saisir directement un numéro de boîte ([N° Bte Ut.]) et un mot de passe de boîte ([Mot de passe de boîte]), puis appuyez sur [OK]. Référence - Lorsque vous sélectionnez un nom de boîte ([Nom Bte Util.]) pour laquelle il est spécifié un mot de passe dans la [Liste des boîtes], l'écran de saisie du mot de passe apparaît. [Connexion de boîte] [Liste des boîtes] Élément Description [N° Bte Ut.] Entrez le numéro de la boîte à ouvrir. [Mot de passe de boîte] Si un mot de passe est assigné à la boîte concernée, entrez le mot de passe. Élément Description [Rechercher dans l'index] Change l'affichage de l'index selon les index sélectionnés lors de la création d'une boîte utilisateur. [Page (affichage par 50 boîtes)] Quand cette machine contient 50 boîtes utilisateur ou davantage, spécifiez la page désirée pour changer l'affichage. Liste des boîtes Affiche le [N° Bte Ut.], le [Nom Bte Util.], le [Type] et le l'[Heure enregistrée]. Une touche avec icône apparaît à côté de chaque boîte utilisateur pour laquelle un mot de passe a été spécifié. 5 Utiliser la fonction Boîte 5-8 bizhub 652/552 5.4 [Liste de fichiers] Sélectionnez une boîte dans [Connexion de boîte]. Les informations de base de la boîte s'affichent ainsi que la liste des documents enregistrés dans la boîte. Élément Description [Vue Vignettes] Permet d'afficher les vignettes des documents. Réglez sur [OFF (NON)] pour l'affichage de liste. [Spécifiez l'opération] Permet la sélection d'une opération. Pour plus de détails, voir page 5-9. [Modifier l'affichage] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher la case [Sélectionner] à côté de tous les documents pour lesquels l'opération sélectionnée peut être exécutée. [Sélectionner] Affiche une case à côté de tous les documents avec lesquels l'opération sélectionnée peut être exécutée. [Vignette] Affiche le document sous forme de vignette. [Nom Document] Affiche le nom du document. [Nombre d'originaux] Affiche le nombre d'originaux d'un document. [Modif. nom] Appuyez sur cette touche pour modifier le nom du document. bizhub 652/552 5-9 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte 5 5.4.2 Opérations sur le document Le document sélectionné peut être imprimé ou supprimé. Imprimer un document 1 Sélectionnez [Impression] dans [Spécifiez l'opération] et appuyez sur [Modifier l'affichage]. Une case à cocher apparaît en regard de tous les documents imprimables. 2 Cochez la case du document à imprimer et appuyez ensuite sur [Réglage impression]. 5 Utiliser la fonction Boîte 5-10 bizhub 652/552 5.4 3 Configurez les réglages nécessaires et appuyez sur [OK]. % Dans la [Plage de pages], sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer la totalité des pages du document sélectionné, ou bien spécifier les pages à imprimer. % Dans [Changer l'ordre], vous pouvez changer l'ordre d'impression en cas d'impression de plusieurs documents. 4 Appuyez sur [Ouvrir Fichier]. 5 Appuyez sur [Impression]. % Appuyez sur [Voir] pour afficher un fichier PDF. Pour imprimer le fichier PDF affiché, appuyez sur . 6 Configurez les réglages d'impression et appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de contrôle. Référence - Si la [Version Fonction] de l'imprimante multifonction de destination n'est ni la [Version 3] ni la [Version 4], appuyez sur [Ouvrir Fichier] dans l'étape 4 pour afficher le fichier PDF sur le panneau. Pour imprimer le fichier PDF affiché, appuyez sur . Pour vérifier la version actuelle de l'imprimante multifonction, sélectionnez [Info sur le périphérique] dans [Utilitaires]. bizhub 652/552 5-11 5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte 5 Supprimer un document 1 Sélectionnez [Supprimer] dans [Spécifiez l'opération] et appuyez sur [Modifier l'affichage]. Une case à cocher apparaît à côté des documents qui peuvent être supprimés. 2 Cochez la case du document à supprimer, et appuyez ensuite sur [Supprimer]. % Cochez la case [Cocher/Décocher (s'applique à tous les documents)] pour sélectionner tous les documents. 5 Utiliser la fonction Boîte 5-12 bizhub 652/552 5.4 3 Cochez le nom du document à supprimer et appuyez sur [OK]. Le document est supprimé. 6 Image Panel bizhub 652/552 6-3 6.1 Présentation 6 6 Image Panel 6.1 Présentation Image Panel est une nouvelle interface intuitive et facile à comprendre du panneau. Référence - L'i-Option LK-101 v2 ou i-Option LK-103 v2 doit être enregistrée pour pouvoir utiliser cette fonction sur l'imprimante multifonction. - L'utilisation d'Image Panel est impossible si [Identification Utilisateur/Suivi Compte] ö [Réglages Numériser vers Dossier Autorisé] est réglé sur [Limiter] dans [Réglages Administrateur]. Fonctions Image Panel divise le processus d'opération en trois séquences, à savoir la "lecture d'un document", la "modification d'un document" et la "spécification d'un destinataire", qui peuvent être exécutées sur un seul écran. Ceci permet d'appréhender facilement à la fois le processus dans son ensemble et l'opération en cours. Image Panel se concentre sur l'opérabilité. Pour cette raison, les fonctions disponibles dans Image Panel sont limitées en comparaison avec le panneau conventionnel. Lorsque les fonctions Mon Panneau et Mon adresse sont disponibles, elles permettent de personnaliser l'écran Image Panel en un écran spécifique à l'utilisateur. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Mon Panneau, voir page 9-3. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Mon adresse, voir page 10-3. 6 Afficher Image Panel 6-4 bizhub 652/552 6.2 6.2 Afficher Image Panel Dans le [Menu Application], appuyez sur [Image Panel] pour afficher le premier écran Image Panel. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur le [Menu Application], voir page 3-4. bizhub 652/552 6-5 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6.3.1 Composition de l'écran L'écran Image Panel se compose des éléments suivants. N°. Nom Description 1 Zone Informations de connexion Affiche le nom et l'icône de l'utilisateur actuellement connecté. 2 Zone de lecture des données Permet de numériser un document, de récupérer un document d'une boîte utilisateur ou d'une mémoire externe et d'envoyer des données depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un PDA. 3 Zone Desktop Les documents lus dans la zone de lecture des données sont affichés en vue Vignettes ou en vue Liste. 4 Echange Affichage Liste/Vue Vignettes Permet de modifier l'affichage de la zone bureau en basculant entre Liste et Vignettes. 5 Zone des messages Affiche un message auxiliaire tel que les instructions d'utilisation. 6 Zone d'état Affiche la date et l'heure actuelle. En cas d'alerte, une icône d'alerte apparaît. 7 Zone Outil d'édition Modifie la page, combine et modifie les paramètres du document après numérisation. 8 Echange Magasin Envoi/Affichage Outil d'édition Permet d'interchanger l'affichage Magasin Envoi et Outil d'édition. Pour plus de détails sur le magasin envoi, voir page 6-18. 9 Zone Destinataire Document Spécifiez une destination du document lu dans [Impression] ou [Liste destination]. 1 3 4 5 6 9 8 7 2 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-6 bizhub 652/552 6.3 6.3.2 Opérations générales Cette section décrit le processus des opérations depuis la lecture du document jusqu'au traitement d'envoi en présentant les séquences d'Image Panel en commençant par la "lecture d'un document", puis la "modification d'un document" et enfin la "spécification d'un destinataire". Référence - Vous pouvez spécifier un destinataire avant de lire le document. La zone Lecture des données permet de numériser ou de récupérer un document. • Pour numériser un document, placez-le et appuyez sur [Numéris.]. Configurez les paramètres de numérisation souhaités et lancez la lecture du document. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-8. • Pour accéder à un document enregistré dans une boîte utilisateur, sélectionnez la boîte utilisateur dans [Liste Source Document] et sélectionnez le document que vous souhaitez récupérer. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-9. • Pour accéder à un document enregistré dans une mémoire externe, sélectionnez [Mémoire externe] dans [Liste Source Document] et sélectionnez le document que vous souhaitez récupérer. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-10. • Pour utiliser des données enregistrées sur un téléphone cellulaire ou un PDA, sélectionnez [Mobile] dans [Liste Source Document]. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-11. Sélectionnez [Numéris.] Sélectionnnez [Liste Source Document]. Dans la zone Outil d'édition, modifiez le document numérisé. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-12. Dans la zone Destinataire Document, sélectionnez le destinataire du document numérisé. • Pour imprimer, appuyez sur [Impression]. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-16. • Pour envoyer le document, sélectionnez un destinataire dans [Liste Destinat.]. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-17. • Pour enregistrer des données dans une mémoire externe, appuyez sur [Mémoire externe] sur l'écran Liste destination. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-17. bizhub 652/552 6-7 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 Sélectionnez [Impression]. Sélectionnez [Liste Destinat.] Si vous spécifiez une adresse, le magasin d'envoi apparaît. Pour plus d'informations,voir page 6-18. Appuyez sur Départ pour envoyer le document. • Pour envoyer les données depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un PDA, appuyez sur Départ pour afficher un code PIN. Entrez le code PIN dans le téléphone cellulaire ou le PDA pour envoyer les données à l'imprimante multifonction. Les données sont envoyées à la destination spécifiée. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-20. 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-8 bizhub 652/552 6.3 6.3.3 Lecture d'un document Permet de numériser un document, de récupérer un document d'une boîte utilisateur ou d'une mémoire externe et d'envoyer des données depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un PDA. Numérisation d'un document Appuyez sur [Numéris.] pour afficher l'écran des paramètres de numérisation. Configurez les paramètres de numérisation et appuyez sur [Numéris.]. Référence - Vous ne pouvez numériser qu'un seul document à la fois. Élément Description [Type original] Sélectionnez la qualité d'image dans [Texte], [Texte/Photo], [Photo], [Original Tramé] et [Papier copié] en fonction du contenu de l'original à numériser. [Recto/Recto-Verso] Permet de spécifier un original recto ou recto-verso. [Définition] Permet de sélectionner une résolution de numérisation entre [200 e 100 dpi (Standard)], [200 e 200 dpi (Fin)], [300 e 300 dpi], [400 e 400 dpi (Super Fin)] et [600 e 600 dpi (Ultra Fin)]. [Type Fichier] Sélection du format du fichier d'envoi des données entre [PDF], [PDF compact], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS] et [XPS compact]. Permet d'enregistrer la totalité des pages numérisées en un seul fichier ou de le diviser en plusieurs fichiers. Vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Multi Page] en sélectionnant [JPEG] comme type de fichier. Pour envoyer des fichiers divisés en pièces jointes d'E-mails, spécifiez [Méthode Pièce jointe à E-mail]. Sélectionnez [Envoi de tous les fichiers en un (1) E-mail] pour joindre tous les fichiers divisés à un seul message E-mail. Sélectionnez [Un (1) fichier par E-Mail] pour envoyer un message E-mail pour chaque fichier séparé. La sélection de [PDF compact] comme type de fichier permet de spécifier [Contour PDF]. Si l'i-Option LK-102-103 est enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction, la sélection de [PDF] ou de [PDF compact] comme type de fichier vous permet de spécifier [Cryptage] et [Propriétés Document PDF]. Pour plus d'informations sur la fonction, voir page 7-3. Si l'i-Option LK-105 est enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction, la sélection de [PDF] ou de [PDF compact] comme type de fichier vous permet de spécifier [PDF adressable]. Pour plus d'informations sur la fonction, voir page 8-3. [Contraste] Réglez la densité de numérisation. [Couleur] Sélection de la couleur de numérisation entre [Couleur Auto], [Couleurs], [Échelle de gris] et [Noir]. [Nom Document] Spécifiez le nom du document. [Numér. Séparée] Appuyez sur cette touche pour diviser la numérisation du document en plusieurs fois. Utile dans les cas suivants. • Lorsque le nombre de pages du document dépasse la capacité du chargeur ADF • En cas d'utilisation de la vitre d'exposition • En cas d'originaux mixtes recto et recto-verso bizhub 652/552 6-9 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 Récupération dans Boîte Utilisateur Sélectionnez une boîte utilisateur dans [Liste Source Document] pour afficher l'écran Utiliser document. Sélectionnez le document à récupérer et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. Référence - Si un mot de passe a été spécifié pour la boîte sélectionnée, l'écran de saisie du mot de passe apparaît. Entrez le mot de passe. - Vous ne pouvez sélectionner qu'une seule boîte. - Vous pouvez récupérer jusqu'à 10 documents à la fois. - Si vous spécifiez une boîte utilisateur comme destination, vous ne pouvez pas récupérer plus d'un document. - Si [Impression] est spécifié comme destination et que les paramètres d'impression sont modifiés, vous ne pouvez pas récupérer plus d'un document. - Vous ne pouvez pas spécifier comme destination la boîte utilisateur dans laquelle vous avez récupéré le document. Élément Description [Modif. nom] Appuyez sur cette touche pour modifier le nom du document sélectionné. [Détails Document] Appuyez sur ce bouton pour vérifier les informations détaillées ou afficher l'aperçu du document sélectionné. 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-10 bizhub 652/552 6.3 Récupérer un document d'une mémoire externe Sélectionnez [Mémoire externe] dans [Liste Source Document] pour afficher la liste des documents enregistrés dans la mémoire externe. Sélectionnez le document à récupérer et appuyez ensuite sur [OK]. Référence - Pour récupérer un document d'une mémoire externe, vous devez configuer les réglages suivants sur l'imprimante multifonction en fonction du propos du document à utiliser. – Pour imprimer un document récupéré, dans [Réglages Administrateur] ö [Réglage Système] ö [Réglages Boîte] ö [Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe], réglez [Imprimer Document] sur [ON (OUI)]. Pour effectuer par ailleurs une identification utilisateur, dans [Réglages Administrateur] ö [Identification Utilisateur/ Suivi Compte] ö [Système d'Authentification] ö [Enregistrement Utilisateur], réglez [Autoriser fonction] ö [Impression] sur [Permis] pour chaque utilisateur. – Pour enregistrer un document récupéré dans une boîte utilisateur, dans [Réglages Administrateur] ö [Réglage Système] ö [Réglages Boîte] ö [Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe], réglez [Numérisation Document Mémoire externe] sur [ON (OUI)]. Pour effectuer par ailleurs une identification utilisateur, dans [Réglages Administrateur] ö [Identification Utilisateur/ Suivi Compte] ö [Système d'Authentification] ö [Enregistrement Utilisateur], réglez [Autoriser Fonction] ö [Numérisation Document Mémoire externe] sur [Permis] pour chaque utilisateur. - Les formats de fichiers disponibles pour l'impression sont PDF, JPEG, TIFF et XPS. - Il est possible de récupérer jusqu'à 200 documents provenant d'une mémoire externe. - Pour ouvrir un dossier, sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur [Ouvrir]. - La spécification simultanée d'un document JPEG et d'un autre format est impossible. - Vous ne pouvez pas lire un document récupéré d'une mémoire externe à l'aide de [Numéris.] ou [Liste Source Document]. - Vous pouvez seulement spécifier [Impression] ou une boîte utilisateur comme destination d'un document récupéré d'une mémoire externe. De plus, vous ne pouvez spécifier qu'une seule boîte utilisateur comme destination. Pour enregistrer un document dans une boîte utilisateur, vous devez créer une boîte utilisateur et l'enregistrer dans le carnet d'adresses au préalable. - Si vous choisissez une destination autre qu'une boîte utilisateur, vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Mémoire externe]. bizhub 652/552 6-11 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 Utilisation des données archivées dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique Sélectionnez [Mobile] dans [Liste Source Document]. Après sélection de [Mobile/PDA] et pression de la touche [OK], l'icône téléphone cellulaire s'affiche dans la zone du bureau. Référence - Pour connecter l'imprimante multifonction à un téléphone cellulaire ou à un PDA, installez l'option Kit d'interface locale EK-605 sur l'imprimante multifonction. Configurez également les réglages suivants sur l'imprimante multifonction. – Définissez [Réglages Administrateur] ö [Réglage Réseau] ö [Réglage Bluetooth] sur [Activer]. Définissez également [Réglages Administrateur] ö [Connexion Système] ö [Réglage Mobile/PDA] sur [Permis]. – Pour effectuer une identification utilisateur, dans [Réglages Administrateur] ö [Identification Utilisateur/ Suivi Compte] ö [Système d'Authentification] ö [Enregistrement Utilisateur], réglez [Autoriser Fonction] ö [Mobile/PDA] sur [Permis] pour chaque utilisateur. - Si vous sélectionnez [Mobile/PDA], vous ne pouvez pas lire un document à l'aide de [Numéris.] ou [Liste Source Document]. - Vous pouvez uniquement spécifier [Impression] ou une boîte utilisateur comme destination pour envoyer des données d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un PDA. De plus, vous ne pouvez spécifier qu'une seule boîte utilisateur comme destination. Pour enregistrer un document dans une boîte utilisateur, vous devez créer une boîte utilisateur et l'enregistrer dans le carnet d'adresses au préalable. - Si vous choisissez une destination autre que [Impression] ou une boîte utilisateur, vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Mobile]. - Cette machine est compatible avec RepliGo version 2.1.0.8. - Pour imprimer un fichier XHTML, vous devez configurer les réglages suivants sur l'imprimante au préalable, dans la mesure où un fichier de liaison est récupéré à l'aide de la fonction client WebDAV. – Définissez [Réglages Administrateur] ö [Réglage Réseau] ö [Paramètres WebDAV] ö [Paramètres Client WebDAV] sur [ON (OUI)]. – Pour établir la connexion via un serveur mandataire, enregistrez un serveur proxy dans [Adresse du serveur proxy] des [Réglages Client WebDAV]. Réglez aussi [Régl.Utilisateur] ö [Réglage Mobile/PDA] ö [Utilisation Serveur Proxy] sur [Oui]. – Dans [Régl.Utilisateur] ö [Réglage Mobile/PDA] ö [Notif. Erreur Lien Fichier], spécifiez l'opération que la machine doit exécuter si elle ne peut pas récupérer le fichier lié. Élément Caractéristiques Protocole de communication Bluetooth Ver. 2.0 + EDR Profil de support OPP/BPP/SPP Type de fichier de support PDF/CPDF/XPS/CXPS/TIFF/JPEG/XHTML/RepliGo Fichier XHTML de support Code de caractère : UTF-8, Shift-JIS, ISO-8859 Extension du fichier de liaison : JPEG, JPG, PNG 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-12 bizhub 652/552 6.3 dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur la manière d'envoyer des données depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un PDA, voir page 6-20. La fonction permettant la connexion de l'imprimante multifonction à un téléphone cellulaire ou à un PDA est disponible même si le kit de licence n'est pas enregistré. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte] et au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. 6.3.4 Editer le document Editer le document en lecture. Référence - Lorsque vous utilisez des données enregistrées sur un téléphone cellulaire ou un PDA, vous ne pouvez pas vérifier l'image d'aperçu ni modifier les données. [Aperçu] Appuyez sur ce bouton pour vérifier les informations détaillées ou afficher l'aperçu du document sélectionné. Référence - La fonction [Aperçu] n'est pas disponible dans le cas de documents récupérés d'une mémoire externe. - Dans le cas de combinaison de documents, la fonction d'aperçu est disponible uniquement pour le premier document. bizhub 652/552 6-13 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 [Document/Page] - [Modifier document] Editer les pages d'un document sélectionné. Vous avez la possibilité de pivoter les pages numérisées dans le mauvais sens ou de supprimer les pages inutiles. Vous pouvez modifier l'ordre des pages d'un document composé de plusieurs pages. Vous pouvez également faire un aperçu des pages pour vérifier leur contenu. Référence - La fonction Éditer Page n'est pas disponible lorsque vous sélectionnez plusieurs documents. - La fonction Éditer Page n'est pas disponible en cas de combinaison de documents. Élément Description [Pg Impaire] Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner les pages impaires. [Page paire] Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner les pages paires. [Aperçu/Déf. Plage] Appuyez sur cette touche pour faire visualiser les pages. [Suppr. page] Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer la page sélectionnée. [Pivoter Page] Appuyez sur cette touche pour pivoter la page sélectionnée. Les angles de rotation autorisée sont 90° à gauche, 90° à droite et 180°. [Déplacer Page] Appuyez sur ce bouton pour modifier l'ordre de pagination en déplaçant la page sélectionnée. Vous pouvez sélectionner la position désirée en déplaçant la vignette de la page correspondante à l'endroit voulu. 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-14 bizhub 652/552 6.3 [Document/Page] - [Combiner Documents] Cette fonction permet de combiner plusieurs documents sélectionnés. Vous pouvez utiliser la touche [Déplacer] pour modifier l'ordre de combinaison. Référence - Vous pouvez uniquement sélectionner [Impression] ou [Liste Destinat.] comme destination d'un document combiné. - Vous pouvez combiner un maximum de 10 documents à la fois. - Vous ne pouvez combiner un document numérisé à un document récupéré d'une boîte utilisateur. bizhub 652/552 6-15 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 [Document/Page] - [Réglages Document] Permet de configurer les réglages pour l'envoi du document sélectionné. Vous pouvez modifier la résolution du document, le type de fichier et ajuster les couleurs. Référence - La fonction Réglages Document n'est pas disponible lorsque vous sélectionnez plusieurs documents. - Si vous avez sélectionné un document provenant d'une mémoire externe, la fonction Réglages Document n'est pas disponible. [Retour à Dest. Numér.] Appuyez sur [Retour à Dest. Numér.] pour restaurer la localisation source du document sélectionné. - Le document numérisé est supprimé de l'imprimante multifonction. - Le document provenant d'une boîte retourne dans la boîte source. Élément Description [Définition] Permet de sélectionner une résolution de numérisation entre [Réglages pendant l'enregistrement], [200 e 100 dpi (Par défaut)], [200 e 200 dpi (Fin)], [300 e 300 dpi], [400 e 400 dpi (Super fin)] et [600 e 600 dpi (Ultra Fin)]. [Type Fichier] Sélection du format du fichier d'envoi des données entre [PDF], [PDF compact], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS] et [XPS compact]. Permet d'enregistrer la totalité des pages numérisées en un seul fichier ou de le diviser en plusieurs fichiers. Vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Multi Page] en sélectionnant [JPEG] comme type de fichier. Pour envoyer des fichiers divisés en pièces jointes d'E-mails, spécifiez [Méthode Pièce jointe à E-mail]. Sélectionnez [Envoi de tous les fichiers en un (1) E-mail] pour joindre tous les fichiers divisés à un seul message E-mail. Sélectionnez [Un (1) fichier par E-Mail] pour envoyer un message E-mail pour chaque fichier séparé. La sélection de [PDF compact] comme type de fichier permet de spécifier [Contour PDF]. Si l'i-Option LK-102-103 est enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction, la sélection de [PDF] ou de [PDF compact] comme type de fichier vous permet de spécifier [Cryptage] et [Propriétés Document PDF]. Pour plus d'informations sur la fonction, voir page 7-3. Si l'i-Option LK-105 est enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction, la sélection de [PDF] ou de [PDF compact] comme type de fichier vous permet de spécifier [PDF adressable]. Pour plus d'informations sur la fonction, voir page 8-3. [Couleur] Sélection des couleurs de numérisation entre [Utiliser réglage couleur existant], [Couleur], [Échelle de gris] et [Noir]. 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-16 bizhub 652/552 6.3 6.3.5 Spécifier une destination Spécifie le destinataire du document en lecture. Impression Appuyez sur [Impression] pour imprimer des données directement de l'imprimante multifonction. Configurez les réglages d'impression et appuyez sur [OK]. Référence - La fonction Réglage impression n'est pas disponible lorsque vous sélectionnez plusieurs documents. - [Combinaison] et [Zoom] ne sont pas compatibles avec l'impression de documents combinés. - Lorsque vous imprimez un document à mot de passe intégré à l'aide de la fonction Copie via mot de passe, vous ne pouvez pas spécifier [Combinaison] ni [Zoom]. Pour plus d'informations sur la fonction Copie via mot de passe, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. - Si vous imprimez un document récupéré d'une mémoire externe, les options [Combinaison] et [Zoom] ne sont pas disponibles. - L'option [Recto-Verso] n'est pas disponible à l'impression d'un document au format JPEG, XPS ou XPS Compact XPS provenant d'une mémoire externe. Les paramètres Agrafage et Perforation sont également inaccessibles dans les réglages de [Finition]. - Lorsque vous imprimez des données enregistrées sur un téléphone cellulaire ou un PDA, seuls les réglages d'impression vous sont accessibles. Pour changer les réglages d'impression, sélectionnez [Régl.Utilisateur] ö [Réglage Mobile/PDA] ö [Impression]. Référence - La valeur de réglage de [Finition] varie en fonction de l'option installée. – Les réglages d'Agrafage sont uniquement disponibles si le module de finition en option est installé. – Les réglages de perforation sont uniquement disponibles si le kit de perforation est installé sur le module de finition en option. - [Impression continue] s'affiche lorsque vous combinez plusieurs documents avec l'outil d'édition et que vous sélectionnez [Impression] comme destination. Élément Description [Copies] Spécifiez le nombre de copies à imprimer à l'aide du pavé numérique. [Impression] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer en mode recto-verso. [Finition] Appuyez sur cette touche pour configurer les réglages Assemblé, Groupe, Agrafage ou Perforation. [Combinaison] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier la combinaison de pages. Il est possible d'imprimer plusieurs pages d'un document sur une seule page. [Zoom] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier le taux de zoom du document. [Impression continue] Cette fonction est disponible à l'impression de documents combinés en mode recto-verso. Les documents combinés sont imprimés en continu. En cas d'impression en mode recto-verso, précisez si vous souhaitez démarrer l'impression du document suivant au verso ou au recto d'une nouvelle page lorsque la dernière page du document en cours d'impression figure au recto. bizhub 652/552 6-17 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 Spécifier des destinations Dans [Liste Destinat.], sélectionnez une adresse à laquelle vous souhaitez envoyer un document. Appuyez sur l'onglet [Recher simple] pour vous reporter aux destinations en numérotation abrégée enregistrées dans l'unité principale. Appuyez sur l'onglet [Groupe] pour vous reporter à la liste des groupes enregistrés dans l'unité principale. Référence - En cas de lecture de plusieurs documents, la fonction Boîte n'est pas disponible. - Si la fonction Mon adresse est disponible, vous pouvez visualiser votre carnet d'adresses en appuyant sur [Mon adresse]. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Mon adresse, voir page 10-3. - Si vous avez spécifié une adresse, vous pouvez vérifier le magasin d'envoi en appuyant sur [Vérifier Réglage Bac Adresse/Adresse distante]. - Les adresses E-mail pour lesquelles un certificat est enregistré, sont affichées avec une touche à icône. - Vous pouvez uniquement spécifier des boîtes utilisateur comme destination de carnet d'adresse d'un document récupéré d'une mémoire externe ou d'un document enregistré sur un téléphone cellulaire ou sur un PDA. Enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe Sélectionnez [Mémoire externe] dans [Liste Destinat.] et appuyez sur [OK]. Référence - Pour enregistrer des données dans une mémoire externe, dans [Réglages Administrateur] ö [Réglage Système] ö [Réglages Boîte] ö [Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe], réglez [Enregistrer document] sur [ON (OUI)]. Pour effectuer par ailleurs une identification utilisateur, dans [Réglages Administrateur] ö [Identification Utilisateur/ Suivi Compte] ö [Système d'Authentification] ö [Enregistrement Utilisateur], réglez [Autoriser Fonction] ö [Enregistrer dans Mémoire externe] sur [Permis] pour chaque utilisateur. - Si vous choisissez [Impression] ou un destinataire comme destination, vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Mémoire externe]. 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-18 bizhub 652/552 6.3 6.3.6 Vérifier le magasin d'envoi Magasin Envoi Si vous spécifiez une adresse, le magasin d'envoi apparaît. Le magasin d'envoi affiche l'icône de la destination spécifiée. N°. Nom Description 1 Icône Paramètre Destination Appuyez sur l'icône Vérifier Adresse pour afficher l'écran Vérifier Destinataire où vous pouvez vérifier la liste des destinations spécifiées. 2 Icône Destination Affiche les icônes des destinations. Appuyez sur l'icône de la destination désirée pour afficher l'écran Vérifier Envoi dans lequel vous pouvez vérifier les informations détaillées de la destination. 1 2 bizhub 652/552 6-19 6.3 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6 [Vérifier Mag. EMI] Appuyez sur l'icône du magasin d'envoi pour afficher l'écran Vérifier Destinataire où vous pouvez vérifier la liste des destinations spécifiées. Si la destination spécifiée est une adresse E-mail, vous pouvez spécifier les réglages de cryptage E-mail et d'insertion de signature numérique. Référence - Pour crypter un message E-mail et joindre une signature numérique à l'aide de S/MIME, réglez [Réglages Administrateur] ö [Réglage Réseau] ö [Réglages E-Mail] ö [Réglages Communication S/MIME] sur [ON (OUI)]. - Un certificat doit être enregistré dans l'adresse E-mail pour pouvoir crypter un E-mail. - Pour ajouter une signature numérique à un message E-mail, le certificat de périphérique doit être enregistré sur cette machine. Réglez aussi [Réglages Administrateur] ö [Réglage Réseau] ö [Réglages E-Mail] ö [Réglages Communication S/MIME] ö [Signature numérique] sur [Toujours signer] ou [Sélect. à l'envoi]. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. Élément Description [Réglages Adresse Distante] Appuyez sur ce bouton pour configurer les réglages de cryptage selon le protocole S/MIME et de la signature numérique. Ce réglage est disponible si vous sélectionnez [ON (Oui)] pour [Réglages Communication S/MIME] des [Réglages Administrateur] et si vous sélectionnez E-mail. [Info.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier les informations détaillées de l'adresse. [Eff.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer l'adresse sélectionnée. 6 Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-20 bizhub 652/552 6.3 6.3.7 Envoi de données d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un PDA La sélection d'une destination et la pression de la touche Départ affichent le code PIN sur le panneau de contrôle. Spécifiez les données que vous voulez utiliser et l'imprimante multifonction où envoyer les données du téléphone cellulaire ou du PDA. Entrez ensuite le code PIN pour envoyer les données sur l'imprimante multifonction. Référence - Vous pouvez uniquement spécifier [Impression] ou une boîte utilisateur comme destination pour envoyer des données d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un PDA. De plus, vous ne pouvez spécifier qu'une seule boîte utilisateur comme destination. Pour enregistrer un document dans une boîte utilisateur, vous devez créer une boîte utilisateur et l'enregistrer dans le carnet d'adresses au préalable. – Pour plus d'information sur la manière de créer une boîte utilisateur, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. – Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une destination dans le carnet d'adresses, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. - À propos du fonctionnement d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un PDA, reportez-vous au manuel d'utilisation du téléphone ou du PDA correspondant. - La vitesse de communication peut être réduite ou la communication peut être interrompue par des obstacles, la qualité des signaux, un champ magnétique ou l'électricité statique. - Les documents et les données d'image peuvent ne pas être envoyés correctement en fonction du réglage de sécurité du téléphone cellulaire ou du PDA. bizhub 652/552 6-21 6.4 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses 6 6.4 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses Le navigateur Web de votre ordinateur vous permet d'accéder à PageScope Web Connection pour ajouter des données photo à des destinations enregistrées en numérotation abrégée. Les données photographiques enregistrées sont appliquées à la [Liste Destinat.] d'Image Panel. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur PageScope Web Connection, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. 6.4.1 Spécifications relatives aux données photo Les spécifications nécessaires à l'enregistrement des données photo sont indiquées ci-dessous. Référence - Pendant le processus d'enregistrement des données photo, celles-ci ne sont pas agrandies ni réduites. Élément Caractéristiques Type Fichier Format BMP, couleur 24-bit, non compressé Format image 48 e 48 pixels Taille des données 6966 octets 6 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses 6-22 bizhub 652/552 6.4 6.4.2 Enregistrer des données photo Enregistrer des données photo en utilisant PageScope Web Connection à partir du navigateur Web de votre ordinateur. Référence - Pour ajouter des données photo au carnet d'adresses, vous devez enregistrer à l'avance des destinations en numérotation abrégée. - Lorsque la fonction Mon adresse est disponible, vous pouvez ajouter des données photo aux destinations en numérotation abrégée dans Mon Carnet Adresses. - Vous devez être connecté en tant qu'utilisateur enregistré pour pouvoir ajouter des données photo dans Mon Carnet Adresses. 1 Connectez-vous en mode utilisateur ou en mode administrateur. 2 Sélectionnez [Enr. Dest.]. 3 Sélectionnez [Photo/Icône.] 4 Sélectionnez la destination en numérotation abrégée à laquelle vous souhaitez ajouter des données photo, puis cliquez sur [Editer]. % Lorsque les données photo sont enregistrées, [Photo/Icône] est affiche dans [Photo]. bizhub 652/552 6-23 6.4 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses 6 5 Sélectionnez [Enregistrer photo]. 6 Cliquez sur [Browse] et spécifiez le dossier où sont enregistrées les données photo que vous souhaitez ajouter. 7 Appuyez sur [OK]. Les données photo sont ajoutées à la destination en numérotation abrégée. 6 Personnaliser Image Panel 6-24 bizhub 652/552 6.5 6.5 Personnaliser Image Panel Lorsque les fonctions Mon Panneau et Mon adresse sont disponibles, elles permettent de personnaliser l'écran Image Panel en un écran spécifique à l'utilisateur. Pour personnaliser l'écran Image Panel, les conditions requises sont les suivantes. - Les fonctions Mon Panneau et Mon adresse sont disponibles sur l'imprimante multifonction. - Connectez-vous en tant qu'utilisateur enregistré dans l'authentification utilisateur. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Mon Panneau, voir page 9-3. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Mon adresse, voir page 10-3. 6.5.1 Personnaliser la zone de lecture des données Des icônes de raccourci peuvent être enregistrées dans la zone de lecture des données pour les boîtes fréquemment utilisées. 1 Dans [Source Données], appuyez sur [Liste Source Document]. 2 Appuyez sur [Personnal. Écran De base]. 3 Sélectionnez la boîte utilisateur que vous voulez enregistrer dans l'écran de base et sélectionnez l'emplacement dans la zone de lecture des données. % Si vous avez sélectionné un emplacement déjà enregistré dans l'écran de base, les données sont écrasées. % Vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer une boîte utilisateur déjà enregistrée dans l'écran de base à un autre endroit de l'écran. bizhub 652/552 6-25 6.5 Personnaliser Image Panel 6 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. Une icône de raccourci est enregistrée. 6.5.2 Personnaliser la zone Destinataire Document Des icônes de raccourci peuvent être enregistrées dans la zone Destinataire Document pour les destinations fréquemment utilisées. 1 Appuyez sur [Liste Destinat.] dans la zone [Destin. Données]. 2 Appuyez sur [Personnal. Écran De base]. 3 Sélectionnez la destination que vous souhaitez enregistrer dans l'écran de base et sélectionnez l'emplacement dans la zone de destination des documents. % Si vous avez sélectionné un emplacement déjà enregistré dans l'écran de base, les données sont écrasées. % Vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer une destination déjà enregistrée dans l'écran de base à un autre endroit de l'écran. 6 Personnaliser Image Panel 6-26 bizhub 652/552 6.5 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. Une icône de raccourci est enregistrée. 6.5.3 Supprimer une icône de raccourci enregistrée 1 Appuyez sur [Personnal. Écran De base]. 2 Sélectionnez l'icône que vous voulez supprimer. 3 Appuyez sur [Supprimer]. 4 Appuyez sur [OK]. L'icône de raccourci est supprimée. 7 Fonctions de traitement PDF bizhub 652/552 7-3 7.1 Présentation 7 7 Fonctions de traitement PDF 7.1 Présentation La fonction de traitement PDF vous permet de spécifier le niveau de sécurité pour la distribution de documents numérisés et enregistrés dans une boîte utilisateur, comme le cryptage du document ou l'ajout de signature numérique s'il y a lieu. Référence - Cette fonction peut être utilisée sur l'imprimante multifonction si l'Option internet LK-102 ou LK-103 v2 est enregistrée. Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Traitement PDF La fonction de traitement PDF vous permet d'effectuer les opérations suivantes. - Configuration des réglages des propriétés du document pour sa distribution avec la fonction de numérisation ou boîte (p. 7-4). - Cryptage d'un document PDF à l'aide d'un mot de passe ou d'un ID numérique (touche Public) lors de sa distribution avec la fonction de numérisation ou boîte (p. 7-5). - Ajout d'une signature numérique lors d'une distribution sous forme de document PDF crypté (p. 7-5). - Un document PDF crypté par AES peut être imprimé en mode d'impression directe (p. 7-9). dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la fonction de numérisation, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions de boîte utilisateur, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. 7 Propriétés des documents PDF 7-4 bizhub 652/552 7.2 7.2 Propriétés des documents PDF La sélection du type de fichier [PDF] ou [PDF compact] pour la distribution de documents numérisés ou enregistrés dans une boîte vous permet de configurer les paramètres des propriétés de documents PDF. Référence - Lors de l'enregistrement d'un document dans la boîte utilisateur par la commande [Enregistrer document] de la fonction Boîte, vous ne pouvez pas configurer les paramètres des propriétés de documents PDF. - Lorsque vous envoyez un document de boîte au format PDF dans un autre périphérique à l'aide de PageScope Web Connection, vous pouvez configurer les paramètres des propriétés de documents PDF. Élément Description [Titre] Si vous sélectionnez [Non] pour [Appliq. Nom fichier], spécifiez le titre du document PDF (jusqu'à 64 caractères). [Appliq. Nom fichier] Permet d'appliquer le nom de fichier comme nom du document PDF. [Auteur] Entrée de l'auteur du document PDF (64 caractères maxi.). Lorsque l'authentification utilisateur est exécutée, le nom de connexion est entré comme nom d'auteur. [Sujet] Entrée du sous-titre du document PDF (64 caractères maxi.). [Mots-clés] Entrée ds mots-clés du document PDF (64 caractères maxi.). bizhub 652/552 7-5 7.3 Crypter un document PDF et ajouter une signature numérique 7 7.3 Crypter un document PDF et ajouter une signature numérique La sélection du type de fichier [PDF] ou [PDF compact] pour la distribution de documents numérisés ou enregistrés dans une boîte permet d'améliorer la sécurité des documents PDF en les cryptant à l'aide du mot de passe ou de l'ID numérique de l'utilisateur (touche Public). L'enregistrement d'un certificat de périphérique sur l'imprimante permet d'ajouter une signature numérique aux documents PDF distribués. L'ajout d'une signature numérique certifie l'auteur (imprimante multifonction) du document envoyé et garantit que le document n'a pas été modifié après la signature. Référence - Avec PageScope Web Connection, vous pouvez procéder au cryptage d'un document et y ajouter une signature numérique pour l'envoyer dans une boîte utilisateur vers un autre périphérique au format PDF. - Pour ajouter une signature numérique, il est nécessaire de crypter le document PDF à l'aide d'un mot de passe ou d'un ID numérique. 7.3.1 Cryptage commandé par mot de passe Pour crypter un document par un mot de passe, spécifiez les réglages suivants. Élément Description [Cible de cryptage] Sélection d'une cible de cryptage. La sélection de [Sauf métadonnées] exclut l'élément spécifié dans [Propriétés Document PDF] de la cible de cryptage. La sélection de [Sauf métadonnées] ne vous permet pas de sélectionner un [niveau faible] de cryptage. [Type de cryptage] Sélectionnez [Code d'accès]. [Signature] Si l'imprimante multifonction est dotée d'un certificat de périphérique, permet de spécifier l'ajout d'une signature numérique. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un certificat de périphérique sur la MFP, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. [Niveau de cryptage] Sélection d'un niveau de cryptage. • [Niveau faible] : méthode de codage RC4 (la longueur de clé est de 40 bits), gérée par Acrobat 3.0 ou ultérieur • [Niveau élevé 1] : méthode de codage RC4 (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits), gérée par Acrobat 5.0 ou ultérieur • [Niveau élevé 2] : méthode de codage AES (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits), gérée par Acrobat 7.0 ou ultérieur [Code d’accès] Entrez le mot de passe requis pour ouvrir un document PDF. Entrez une nouvelle fois le code pour confirmation. [Permissions Document] Entrez le mot de passe permettant de changer les permissions document. Entrez une nouvelle fois le code pour confirmation. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le même mot de passe que celui spécifié sous [Code d'accès]. Après avoir configuré les permissions du document, appuyez sur [Paramètres Détaillés] pour configurer les réglages détaillés des autorisations. Les valeurs définies dépendent du niveau de cryptage. 7 Crypter un document PDF et ajouter une signature numérique 7-6 bizhub 652/552 7.3 [Paramètres Détaillés] 7.3.2 Cryptage commandé par ID numérique Élément Description [Impression Autorisée] Permet de spécifier les modalités d'impression autorisées pour un document PDF. Permettre seulement [Basse résolution] peut être sélectionné si le niveau de cryptage est réglé sur [Niveau élevé 1] ou [Niveau élevé 2]. [Extraire Documents/ Images] Permet d'activer la copie de texte, d'images et d'autres contenus. [Modifier Permissions] Permet de spécifier le niveau de permission relatif à la modification d'un document PDF. • La sélection de [Insérer/Supprimer/Pivoter pages] permet d'insérer, supprimer ou pivoter des pages. Ce paramétrage est associé au cryptage à niveau de sécurité élevé. • La sélection de [Entrer Texte et insérer Signature dans les champs appropriés] permet d'entrer les informations dans les champs et d'ajouter une signature numérique. Ce paramétrage est associé au cryptage à niveau de sécurité élevé. • La sélection de [Créer Annotations, entrer Texte et insérer Signature dans les champs appropriés] permet d'ajouter des annotations, d'entrer des informations dans les champs de saisie et d'ajouter une signature numérique. • La sélection de [Spécifier Mise en page, Entrer Texte + Insérer Signature dans les champs appropriés] permet d'insérer, supprimer ou pivoter les pages, d'entrer des informations dans les champs de saisie et d'ajouter une signature numérique. Ce paramétrage est associé au cryptage à faible niveau de sécurité. • La sélection de [Tout sauf l'extraction de pages] permet de modifier un document, de créer un champ de saisie et d'y entrer les informations, de faire des annotations et d'ajouter une signature numérique. bizhub 652/552 7-7 7.3 Crypter un document PDF et ajouter une signature numérique 7 Configurez les réglages suivants pour crypter un document à l'aide de l'ID numérique d'un utilisateur. [Paramètres Détaillés] Élément Description [Cible de cryptage] Sélection d'une cible de cryptage. La sélection de [Sauf métadonnées] exclut l'élément spécifié dans [Propriétés Document PDF] de la cible de cryptage. [Type de cryptage] Sélectionnez [ID numérique]. Sélectionnez [ID numérique] pour afficher l'écran permettant de sélectionner des destinations. L'écran de sélection d'adresse affiche la liste des adresses E-mail dotées d'ID numériques enregistrés pour l'envoi S/MIME. Spécifiez l'ID numérique à utiliser pour le cryptage en sélectionnant une adresse E-mail. La sélection de [Même que destination] utilise l'ID numérique de l'adresse ; vous n'avez pas besoin de spécifier un ID numérique sur cet écran. La spécification de cet ID numérique est indépendante de la spécification d'une adresse ; vous devez donc spécifier une adresse séparément. [Signature] Si l'imprimante multifonction est dotée d'un certificat de périphérique, permet de spécifier l'ajout d'une signature numérique. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un certificat de périphérique sur la MFP, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. [Niveau de cryptage] Sélection d'un niveau de cryptage. Le cryptage d'un document avec un ID numérique ne permet pas de sélectionner [Niveau faible] pour le niveau de cryptage. • [Niveau élevé 1] : méthode de codage RC4 (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits), gérée par Acrobat 5.0 ou ultérieur • [Niveau élevé 2] : méthode de codage AES (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits), gérée par Acrobat 7.0 ou ultérieur Élément Description [Impression Autorisée] Permet de spécifier les modalités d'impression autorisées pour un document PDF. [Extraire Documents/ Images] Permet d'activer la copie de texte, d'images et d'autres contenus. [Modifier Permissions] Permet de spécifier le niveau de permission relatif à la modification d'un document PDF. • La sélection de [Insérer/Supprimer/Pivoter pages] permet d'insérer, supprimer ou pivoter des pages. Ce paramétrage est associé au cryptage à niveau de sécurité élevé. • La sélection de [Entrer Texte et insérer Signature dans les champs appropriés] permet d'entrer les informations dans les champs et d'ajouter une signature numérique. Ce paramétrage est associé au cryptage à niveau de sécurité élevé. • La sélection de [Créer Annotations, entrer Texte et insérer Signature dans les champs appropriés] permet d'ajouter des annotations, d'entrer des informations dans les champs de saisie et d'ajouter une signature numérique. • La sélection de [Tout sauf l'extraction de pages] permet de modifier un document, de créer un champ de saisie et d'y entrer les informations, de faire des annotations et d'ajouter une signature numérique. 7 Crypter un document PDF et ajouter une signature numérique 7-8 bizhub 652/552 7.3 Référence - Le cryptage commandé par ID numérique nécessite l'enregistrement préalable du certificat de l'utilisateur dans l'adresse E-mail. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un certificat d'utilisateur dans une adresse E-mail, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau]. - Il est possible de spécifier 100 ID numériques maximum. - L'ID numérique spécifiable dépend du niveau appliqué à l‘utilisateur. - Lorsque vous enregistrez un document PDF dans une boîte, il n'est pas possible de le crypter par un ID numérique. - Lors du cryptage d'un document PDF et de la création simultanée d'un document PDF adressable, les réglages suivants ne sont pas disponibles si [Ajuster Rotation] est réglé sur [Ajuster] dans le paramètre du PDF adressable. [Ajuster Rotation] est réglé sur [Ajuster] par défaut. Modifiez le réglage en fonction des besoins. – [Type de cryptage] : [ID numérique] – [Niveau de cryptage] : [Niveau élevé 2] – [Cible de cryptage] : [Sauf métadonnées] – [Signature] : [Oui] - Pour plus d'informations sur la fonction PDF adressable, voir page 8-3. bizhub 652/552 7-9 7.4 Impression directe 7 7.4 Impression directe Un document PDF crypté par AES peut être imprimé en mode d'impression directe. Utilisez PageScope Web Connection pour imprimer les documents en mode d'impression directe. Connectez-vous comme utilisateur public ou comme utilisateur enregistré, et sélectionnez [Impression directe]. Cliquez sur [Browse] pour localiser le fichier et cliquez sur [OK]. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur PageScope Web Connection, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression]. 7 Impression directe 7-10 bizhub 652/552 7.4 8 Fonction PDF adressable bizhub 652/552 8-3 8.1 Présentation 8 8 Fonction PDF adressable 8.1 Présentation PDF adressable renvoie à une fonction qui crée un fichier PDF adressable en collant des données texte transparent dans la zone du document où les caractères sont reconnus par un processus de lecture optique. Vous pouvez créer un fichier PDF adressable en enregistrant ou envoyant un original au format PDF ou PDF compact à l'aide de la fonction Numérisation ou Boîte utilisateur. La fonction PDF adressable prend en charge plusieurs langues. Lorsque vous créez un fichier PDF adressable, sélectionnez la langue appropriée à l'original pour permettre un traitement de lecture optique correct. Vous pouvez aussi améliorer la précision du traitement de lecture optique en corrigeant automatiquement l'orientation des pages. Si vous souhaitez gérer des documents papier au format électronique, il est recommandé d'utiliser la fonction PDF adressable pour convertir les documents en fichier PDF adressable. Référence - Cette fonction est disponible lorsque l'i-Option LK-105 est enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction. - Pour plus de détails sur la fonction de numérisation, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. - Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions de boîte utilisateur, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. Précautions à prendre pour la création de fichiers PDF adressables Selon l'état des originaux, la reconnaissance du texte peut être problématique, le texte risque d'être tronqué ou d'autres problèmes peuvent se produire. Exemple - Les caractères qui ne sont pas pris en charge par l'imprimante multifonction ne seront pas reconnus correctement. - Si une langue différente de celle de l'original est sélectionnée à la création d'un fichier PDF adressable, le texte ne sera pas reconnu correctement. - Si la correction automatique d'orientation des pages n'est pas activée et que l'orientation de l'original spécifié ne correspond pas à l'orientation du texte, celui-ci ne sera pas reconnu correctement. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage de correction automatique d'orientation des pages, voir page 8-5. Taille de caractère reconnaissable Référence - Lors de la création d'un fichier PDF adressable, la numérisation ne peut pas être effectuée si la définition est supérieure à 300 dpi. Langue européenne Japonais Langue asiatique Définition 200 dpi 9 pt à 142 pt 12 pt à 142 pt 20 pt à 142 pt 300 dpi 6 pt à 96 pt 8 pt à 96 pt 12 pt à 96 pt 8 Configuration du réglage de reconnaissance optique OCR 8-4 bizhub 652/552 8.2 8.2 Configuration du réglage de reconnaissance optique OCR Avant de créer un fichier PDF adressable, vous pouvez spécifier si vous donnez la priorité à la précision ou la vitesse d'exécution pour le traitement OCR. [Réglage Reconnaissance optique OCR] 1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur. 2 Appuyez sur [Régl. Utilisateur]. 3 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Numérisation/Fax]. 4 Dans [Paramètres Numérisation/Fax] (2/2), appuyez sur [Réglage Opération ROC]. 5 Sélectionnez le traitement OCR et appuyez sur [Valider]. % [Priorité Qualité] : priorité est donnée à la précision de reconnaissance d'un texte original. L'inclinaison des originaux est aussi réglée automatiquement. % [Priorité Vitesse] : priorité est donnée à la vitesse d'exécution du traitement OCR. L'inclinaison des originaux n'est pas réglée automatiquement. bizhub 652/552 8-5 8.3 Configuration du réglage PDF adressable 8 8.3 Configuration du réglage PDF adressable Vous pouvez créer un fichier PDF adressable en sélectionnant [PDF] ou [PDF compact] comme type de fichier lorsque vous enregistrez ou envoyez un original au format PDF en utilisant les fonctions Numérisation et Boîte Utilisateur. dPour info Pour plus d'informations sur la manière de spécifier le type de fichier en utilisant la fonction Numérisation, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Pour plus d'informations sur la manière de spécifier le type de fichier en utilisant la fonction Boîte Utilisateur, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte]. Référence - Si vous sélectionnez [PDF compact] comme [Type Fichier] pour créer un fichier PDF adressable, la vitesse de traitement OCR peut être plus grande que lorsque vous sélectionnez [PDF]. - Lors de la création d'un fichier PDF adressable, [Définition] ne peut pas être réglé sur [400 e 400 dpi (Super Fin)] ou [600 e 600 dpi (Ultra Fin)]. - Pour créer un fichier PDF adressable tout en cryptant un fichier PDF, si l'un des réglages suivants est spécifié, [Ajuster Rotation] ne peut pas être réglé sur [Ajuster] dans le paramètre de cryptage du PDF. – [Type de cryptage] : [ID numérique] – [Niveau de cryptage] : [Niveau élevé 2] – [Cible de cryptage] : [Sauf métadonnées] – [Signature] : [Oui] - Pour plus de détails sur le cryptage d'un fichier PDF, voir page 7-5. - Pour le [Japanese], le [Chinese], le [Korean] et le [Taiwanese], l'orientation du texte (écriture verticale ou horizontale) est reconnue automatiquement. Toutefois, pour le [Chinese], le [Korean] et le [Taiwanese], si les deux orientations de texte verticale et horizontale sont utilisées sur la même page, le traitement de l'original repose sur l'une ou l'autre orientation. - Le téléchargement ou l'envoi d'un document configuré comme un fichier PDF recherchable et enregistré dans une Boîte Utilisateur avec PageScope Web Connection entraîne l'annulation du paramètre du PDF recherchable et la désactivation d'une recherche de texte. Élément Description [Sélection Langue] Sélectionnez la langue à utiliser pour créer un fichier PDF adressable. Pour une reconnaissance correcte du texte, la langue sélectionnée doit être appropriée à l'original. [Ajuster Rotation] Spécifiez si vous souhaitez la rotation automatique de chaque page pour corriger l'orientation en fonction de l'orientation du texte détectée par la reconnaissance optique OCR. Si la correction automatique d'orientation des pages n'est pas activée et que l'orientation de l'original spécifié ne correspond pas à l'orientation du texte, celui-ci ne sera pas reconnu correctement. 8 Configuration du réglage PDF adressable 8-6 bizhub 652/552 8.3 9 Fonction Mon Panneau bizhub 652/552 9-3 9.1 Présentation 9 9 Fonction Mon Panneau 9.1 Présentation La fonction Mon Panneau permet la gestion centrale de l'environnement du panneau de contrôle personnalisé par l'utilisateur conformément à l'application (Mon Panneau) et la mise à disposition de Mon Panneau sur l'imprimante multifonction sélectionnée par l'utilisateur. L'utilisation de Mon Panneau procure la même opérationnalité sur plusieurs imprimantes multifonction en réseau. dPour info Cette fonction est utilisée avec PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de cette fonction, reportez-vous au manuel PageScope My Panel Manager. Vous pouvez aussi configurer les réglages Mon Panneau à l'aide de PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails, reportez-vous au manuel PageScope My Panel Manager. 9.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec Mon Panneau Mon Panneau vous permet de personnaliser le panneau de contrôle pour afficher de préférence les fonctions les plus fréquemment utilisées. Par ailleurs, si le navigateur Web ou Image Panel est disponible, vous pouvez l'associer à PageScope My Panel Manager pour gérer les réglages du navigateur Web et les informations de chaque utilisateur et personnaliser l'écran Image Panel. Eléments personnalisables Mon Panneau vous permet de personnaliser les éléments suivants. - Spécification de la langue affichée sur le panneau de contrôle - Spécification d'une unité de mesure à afficher lors de la saisie de nombres - Réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Copie et de enregistrement des touches de raccourci et de valeurs de réglage à disposer dans l'écran de base - Réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Fax/Numérisation et de l'enregistrement des touches de raccourci - Réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Boîte et de l'enregistrement des touches de raccourci - Spécification de la couleur des touches sélectionnées du panneau de contrôle - Affichage du menu principal de Mon Panneau - Affichage de l'écran d'accueil du panneau de contrôle Fonctions disponibles via le navigateur Web Vous pouvez personnaliser l'environnement d'utilisation du navigateur Web en le connectant à Mon Panneau. My Panel vous permet de gérer les réglages suivants et les informations de chaque utilisateur. - Page d'accueil - Favoris - Historique d'affichage des contenus - Historique de saisie URL - Cookie - Informations d'authentification dPour info Enregistrez une page d'accueil et des favoris à l'aide du navigateur Web. L'historique d'affichage et de saisie, les cookies et les informations d'authentification sont automatiquement sauvegardées dans le serveur au fur et à mesure que l'utilisateur se sert du navigateur Web. Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation du navigateur Web, voir page 4-3. 9 Présentation 9-4 bizhub 652/552 9.1 Vous pouvez modifier les informations d'enregistrement d'une page d'accueil et des favoris à l'aide de PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails, reportez-vous au manuel PageScope My Panel Manager. Fonctions disponibles sur Image Panel En associant Image Panel à Mon Panneau ou Mon Carnet Adresses, vous pouvez enregistrer des raccourcis de source document et de destination dans l'écran de base d'Image Panel afin de personnaliser l'environnement d'utilisation d'Image Panel. Vous pouvez aussi vous référer à Mon Carnet Adresses pour spécifier une destination à laquelle envoyer des données. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la personnalisation de l'écran, voir page 6-24. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Mon adresse, voir page 10-3. 9.1.2 Procédure d'acquisition de Mon Panneau Procédez à l'authentification utilisateur sur l'imprimante multifonction sélectionnée. Si l'authentification utilisateur est validée, l'imprimante multifonction se connecte automatiquement au serveur pour obtenir Mon Panneau à l'intention de l'utilisateur connecté. L'utilisateur peut se servir de Mon Panneau pendant qu'il est connecté à l'imprimante multifonction. Mon Panneau n'est pas disponible après la déconnexion de l'utilisateur. Mon Panneau est disponible Mon Panneau est disponible Serveur (gestion de Mon Panneau) (3) Obtention de Mon Panneau (2) Accès au serveur (1) Procédure d'authentification Mon Panneau n'est pas disponible • Échec d'authentification • Déconnexion • Échec d'obtention de Mon Panneau bizhub 652/552 9-5 9.1 Présentation 9 9.1.3 Restrictions d'utilisation de la fonction Mon Panneau Les restrictions suivantes s'appliquent à l'utilisation de Mon Panneau. - Les fonctions d'enregistrement, d'édition et de suppression de Mon Panneau sont uniquement accessibles aux utilisateurs disposant de Mon Panneau. L'Administrateur de l'imprimante multifonction ne peut pas effectuer d'opérations sur Mon Panneau. - Lorsque vous accédez à Mon Panneau pour la première fois, les réglages de langue, d'unité de mesure et de couleur sont conformes aux réglages de l'imprimante multfonction. - Lorsque vous accédez à Mon Panneau pour la première fois, l'écran initial du panneau de contrôle affiche le menu principal de Mon Panneau. - Seule la mémoire de réglage (programme Copie et programme Fax/Numérisation) enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction que vous utilisez est disponible. - Selon les fonctions ou des options installées sur l'imprimante multifonction sur laquelle Mon Panneau est utilisé, il se peut que l'environnement opératoire spécifié en tant que Mon Panneau ne soit pas disponible. - L'enregistrement, l'édition, ou la suppression de Mon Panneau peut causer une erreur en fonction de l'état de connexion au serveur. En cas d'erreur, vérifiez la connexion réseau. 9 Afficher Mon Panneau 9-6 bizhub 652/552 9.2 9.2 Afficher Mon Panneau 9.2.1 Menu Comm Le menu principal apparaît en premier lorsque Mon Panneau s'ouvre. Le menu principal vous permet de disposer librement les fonctions et touches de raccourci les plus fréquemment utilisées dans la mémoire des réglages. Dans le menu principal, vous pouvez enregistrer 12 types de touches de raccourci. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration des réglages du menu principal, voir page 9-16. 9.2.2 Affichage du menu principal Une fois que l'utilisateur a accédé à la fonction Mon Panneau, il peut alors modifier l'écran initial qui doit s'afficher après que l'identification utilisateur a été reconnue valide. Pour afficher le menu principal de Mon Panneau depuis un écran initial différent, utilisez le [Menu Application]. Dans le [Menu Application], appuyez sur [Mon Panneau] pour afficher le menu principal de Mon Panneau. dPour info L'écran initial qui s'affiche après une identification valide peut être modifié dans les réglages [Réglages Mon Panneau]. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-17. Pour plus de détails sur le [Menu Application], voir page 3-4. bizhub 652/552 9-7 9.3 Personnaliser Mon Panneau 9 9.3 Personnaliser Mon Panneau Personnalisez Mon Panneau dans [Réglages Mon Panneau] des [Utilitaires]. 9.3.1 [Réglages Mon Panneau] Les éléments personnalisables sont les suivants. Élément Description [Réglage Langue] Sélectionnez la langue à utiliser dans Mon Panneau. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-9. [Réglage Unité de mesure] Sélectionnez l'unité de mesure à utiliser pour afficher les valeurs dans My Panel. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-9. [Réglages Copieur] Spécifiez les réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Copie et de enregistrement des touches de raccourci et de valeurs de réglage à disposer dans l'écran de base. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-10. [Paramètres Numérisation/Fax] Réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Fax/Numérisation et de l'enregistrement des touches de raccourci. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-12. [Réglages Boîte] Configurez les réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Boîte et enregistrez les touches de raccourci. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-14. [Param. Sélection Couleur] Sélectionnez une couleur pour les touches sélectionnées dans Mon Panneau. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-15. [Réglages Menu Principal] Enregistrez les touches du menu principal sur l'écran Menu principal de Mon Panneau. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-16. [Réglage Ecran par défaut] Spécifiez l'écran initial qui s'affiche après validation de l'identification utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-17. 9 Personnaliser Mon Panneau 9-8 bizhub 652/552 9.3 9.3.2 Affichage des [Réglages Mon Panneau] Lorsque la fonction Mon Panneau est disponible, [Réglages Mon Panneau] figure dans [Utilitaires]. 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré. 2 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur. 3 Appuyez sur [Réglages Mon Panneau]. L'écran Réglages Mon Panneau apparaît. bizhub 652/552 9-9 9.3 Personnaliser Mon Panneau 9 9.3.3 [Réglage Langue] Sélectionnez la langue à utiliser dans Mon Panneau parmi les langues disponibles sur l'imprimante multifonction. 9.3.4 [Réglage Unité de mesure] Sélectionnez l'unité de longueur à utiliser dans Mon Panneau. 9 Personnaliser Mon Panneau 9-10 bizhub 652/552 9.3 9.3.5 [Réglages Copieur] Spécifiez les réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Copie et de enregistrement des touches de raccourci et de valeurs de réglage à disposer dans l'écran de base. [Onglet par Défaut] Configurez les réglages d'affichage par défaut pour l'écran De base en mode Copie. [De base] propose un affichage normal de base. [Copie rapide] affiche les éléments de réglage de l'écran des réglages de base sur un seul écran. Cette commande peut servir à spécifier plusieurs réglages à la fois. [Touche Raccourci 1] - [Touche Raccourci 2] Dispose les touches de raccourci des fonctions de l'application copie les plus fréquemment utilisées dans l'écran de base. Seulement deux touches de raccourci peuvent être mises en place. Même si vous vous connectez à un autre modèle et enregistrez une fonction dans [Touche Raccourci 1] et/ou [Touche Raccourci 2], [OFF (NON)] s'affiche lorsque cette fonction n'est pas disponible sur cette machine. (Exemple : [Contraste], [Suppression Fond]) En outre, si une page avec laquelle enregistrer une fonction dans [Touche Raccourci 1] et/ou [Touche Raccourci 2] est affichée lorsque cette fonction n'est pas disponible, [OFF (NON)] sera sélectionné. Si [OK] est sélectionné, [OFF (NON)] est réglé sur [Touche Raccourci 1] et [Touche Raccourci 2]. Par conséquent, les touches raccourcis ne s'affichent pas même si vous vous connectez sur un autre modèle. bizhub 652/552 9-11 9.3 Personnaliser Mon Panneau 9 [Régl. rapides 1] - [Régl. rapides 4] Attribuent les valeurs de réglage des touches de programme de copie et de la fonction Copie dans l'écran de base. L'attribution des valeurs de réglages les plus fréquemment utilisées et des touches de programme copie dans l'écran de base vous permet de configurer facilement les réglages copie par une simple pression de la touche. Vous pouvez attribuer un maximum de quatre touches. Même si vous vous connectez à un autre modèle et enregistrez une fonction dans [Régl. Rapides 1] - [Régl. Rapides 4], [OFF (NON)] s'affiche pour cette machine lorsque cette fonction n'est pas disponible avec cette machine. (Exemple : [Couleur]) Si une page avec laquelle enregistrer une fonction dans [Régl. Rapides 1] - [Régl. Rapides 4] lorsque cette fonction n'est pas disponible, [OFF (NON)] sera sélectionné. Si [OK] est sélectionné, [OFF (NON)] est réglé sur [Régl. Rapides 1] - [Régl. Rapides 4]. Par conséquent, les réglages rapides ne s'affichent pas même si vous vous connectez sur un autre modèle. dPour info Pour attribuer un programme copie dans l'écran de base, vous devez enregistrer ce programme au préalable. Pour plus d'information sur l'enregistrement d'un programme copie, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. [Réglages Densité Onglet par défaut] Ajuster le contraste de la copie sur l'écran de base sur la barre de réglage. Référence - Lors du réglage du contraste sur l'écran de base, [Régl. Rapides 3] et [Régl. Rapides 4] ne sont pas disponibles. 9 Personnaliser Mon Panneau 9-12 bizhub 652/552 9.3 9.3.6 [Paramètres Numérisation/Fax] Configurez les réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Fax/Numérisation et enregistrez les touches de raccourci. [Onglet par Défaut] Configurez les réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Fax/Numérisation. [Carnet d‘Adresses par Défaut] Pour utiliser le carnet d'adresse public, spécifiez le type d'index à afficher initialement dans [Carnet Adresses]. Par défaut, c'est [Mon Carnet Adresses] qui est sélectionné. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Mon adresse, voir page 10-3. bizhub 652/552 9-13 9.3 Personnaliser Mon Panneau 9 [Touche Raccourci 1] - [Touche Raccourci 2] Dispose les touches de raccourci des fonctions de l'application fax/numérisation les plus fréquemment utilisées dans l'écran de base. Seulement deux touches de raccourci peuvent être mises en place. [Carnet adresses par défaut] Configurez les réglages de l'écran par défaut de [Carnet Adresses]. [Type d’adresse par défaut] Pour afficher un carnet d'adresses par type d'adresse, spécifiez un type d'adresse à afficher par défaut. 9 Personnaliser Mon Panneau 9-14 bizhub 652/552 9.3 9.3.7 [Réglages Boîte] Configurez les réglages d'affichage initiaux de l'écran de base de la fonction Boîte et enregistrez les touches de raccourci. [Onglet par Défaut] Configurez les réglages d'affichage par défaut de l'écran de base (après pression de la touche Boîte sur le panneau de contrôle) en mode Boîte. [Touche Raccourci 1] - [Touche Raccourci 2] Disposez les touches de raccourci des boîtes fréquemment utilisées pour les documents boîtes sur l'écran de base. Seulement deux touches de raccourci peuvent être mises en place. bizhub 652/552 9-15 9.3 Personnaliser Mon Panneau 9 9.3.8 [Param. Sélection Couleur] Sélectionnez une couleur pour les touches sélectionnées dans Mon Panneau. 9 Personnaliser Mon Panneau 9-16 bizhub 652/552 9.3 9.3.9 [Réglages Menu Principal] Personnalise le menu principal de Mon Panneau. Le menu principal vous permet de disposer librement les fonctions et touches de raccourci les plus fréquemment utilisées dans la mémoire des réglages (programmes Copie et programmes Fax/Numérisation). Touche Menu principal La touche de raccourci affichée dans le menu principal est appelée touche du menu principal et il est possible d'enregistrer jusqu'à 12 types. Pour enregistrer la mémoire des réglages (programmes copie et programmes fax/numérisation) comme touches du menu principal, appuyez sur la touche [Icône] pour sélectionner les icônes de mémoire des réglages à afficher dans le menu principal. Enregistrer une touche dans le menu principal [Fonction], [Réglages Fonction Copie], [Réglage Fonct. Numéris./Fax], [Réglage Programme Copie] et [Réglage Progr. Numéris./Fax] peuvent constituer des touches du menu principal. Élément Description [Fonction] Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pour chacune des fonctions [Copie], [Numéris./Fax], [Boîte Utilis.], [Image Panel] et [Navigateur Web]. L'enregistrement d'une touche de raccourci pour les fonctions Navigateur Web ou Image Panel dans le menu principal n'est possible que si elles sont activées. [Réglage Fonction Copie] Permet d'enregistrer des touches de raccourci dans les réglages Fonction Copie pour chaque réglage [Paramètre Papier], [Zoom], [R-Verso/Combin.] et [Finition]. [Réglage Fonct. Numéris./Fax] Permet d'enregistrer des touches de raccourci des réglages de la fonction Numérisation/Fax pour chaque réglage [Réglages Numérisation], [Réglages Original] et [Réglages Comm.]. [Réglage Programme Copie] Enregistrez une touche de raccourci pour la mémoire des réglages du copieur (programme copie) enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction. Appuyez sur [Icône] dans l'écran Réglages Menu Principal. Vous pouvez sélectionner les icônes de mémoire des réglages à afficher dans le menu principal. La touche de raccourci correspondant à la mémoire des réglages est disponible uniquement sur l'imprimante multifonction où la mémoire est enregistrée. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de la mémoire des réglages du copieur (programme copie), reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie]. bizhub 652/552 9-17 9.3 Personnaliser Mon Panneau 9 9.3.10 [Réglage Ecran d'accueil] Spécifiez l'écran initial qui s'affiche après validation de l'identification utilisateur. Par défaut, le menu principal Mon Panneau est affiché comme écran initial. Référence - L'enregistrement d'une touche de raccourci pour les fonctions Navigateur Web ou Image Panel dans l'écran initial n'est possible que si elles sont activées. [Réglage Progr. Numéris./Fax] Enregistrez une touche de raccourci pour la mémoire des réglages de fax/ numérisation (programme fax/numérisation) enregistrée sur l'imprimante multifonction. Appuyez sur [Icône] dans l'écran Réglages Menu Principal. Vous pouvez sélectionner les icônes de mémoire des réglages à afficher dans le menu principal. La touche de raccourci correspondant à la mémoire des réglages est disponible uniquement sur l'imprimante multifonction où la mémoire est enregistrée. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de la mémoire des réglages de fax/numérisation (programme fax/numérisation), reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. Élément Description 9 Personnaliser Mon Panneau 9-18 bizhub 652/552 9.3 10 Fonction Mon adresse bizhub 652/552 10-3 10.1 Présentation 10 10 Fonction Mon adresse 10.1 Présentation Grâce à la fonction Mon adresse, le carnet d'adresses personnel (Mon Carnet Adresses) est géré centralement sur le serveur, et l'utilisateur peut accéder au carnet d'adresses personnel Mon Carnet Adresses de l'imprimante sélectionnée. L'utilisation de Mon Carnet Adresses vous permet de vous servir du même carnet d'adresses sur plusieurs imprimantes multifonction de votre réseau sans avoir à enregistrer les adresses individuellement sur chacune des imprimantes. dPour info Cette fonction est utilisée avec PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de cette fonction, reportez-vous au manuel PageScope My Panel Manager. Vous pouvez aussi ajouter des entrées à Mon Carnet Adresses à l'aide de PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails, reportez-vous au manuel PageScope My Panel Manager. 10.1.1 Classification des carnets d'adresses Lorsque la fonction Mon adresse est disponible, vous pouvez utiliser les deux sortes de carnets d'adresses suivantes. Carnet d'adresses public Le carnet d'adresses public est un carnet d'adresses accessible à tout utilisateur enregistré sur l'unité principale de l'imprimante multifonction qu'il a sélectionnée. Le carnet d'adresse public propose les fonctions suivantes. - Dans le carnet d'adresses public, il est possible d'enregistrer des destinations en numérotation abrégée, des groupes et des programmes. - Du fait que le carnet d'adresses public est enregistré dans l'unité principale de l'imprimante multifonction, les destinations disponibles dépendent de l'imprimante sélectionnée. - L'utilisateur ou l'administrateur peut enregistrer, modifier ou supprimer le carnet d'adresses public. - Si l'administrateur a activé l'interdiction des fonctions d'enregistrement et d'édition de destinations par les utilisateurs, l'enregistrement ou l'édition du carnet d'adresses public est impossible. Mon Carnet Adresses Mon Carnet Adresses est un carnet d'adresses géré par le serveur et accessible uniquement par l'utilisateur. Mon Carnet Adresses propose les fonctions suivantes. - Les destinations en numérotation abrégée et les groupes peuvent être enregistrés dans Mon Carnet Adresses. - Du fait que la fonction Mon adresse est retournée par le serveur sur l'imprimante multifonction sélectionnée par l'utilisateur, elle est disponible sur n'importe quelle imprimante multifonction pour peu qu'elle dispose de la fonction Mon adresse. - Seul l'utilisateur spécifié peut enregistrer, modifier, ou supprimer Mon Panneau. 10 Présentation 10-4 bizhub 652/552 10.1 10.1.2 Procédure d'acquisition de Mon Carnet Adresses Procédez à l'authentification utilisateur sur l'imprimante multifonction sélectionnée. Si l'authentification utilisateur est validée, l'imprimante multifonction se connecte automatiquement au serveur pour obtenir My Address Book à l'intention de l'utilisateur connecté. L'utilisateur peut se servir de Mon Carnet Adresses pendant qu'il est connecté à l'imprimante multifonction. My Address Book n'est pas disponible après la déconnexion de l'utilisateur. 10.1.3 Restrictions d'utilisation de la fonction Mon adresse Les restrictions suivantes s'appliquent à Mon Carnet Adresses. - Seul l'utilisateur qui dispose de Mon Carnet Adresses peut enregistrer, modifier ou supprimer Mon Carnet Adresses. L'Administrateur de l'imprimante multifonction ne peut pas effectuer d'opérations sur Mon Carnet Adresses. - Mon Carnet Adresses peut contenir 100 destinations en numérotation abrégée et 10 groupes maximum (100 destinations en numérotation abrégée par groupe maximum). - Si le nombre de destinations enregistrées dans Mon Carnet Adresses correspond à la valeur maximale autorisée, il n'est pas possible d'enregistrer une nouvelle destination. - Les destinations programmées ne peuvent pas être enregistrées dans Mon Carnet Adresses. - La recherche de destinations par index est impossible dans Mon Carnet Adresses. - L'opération Boîte est disponible uniquement sur les imprimantes multifonction sur lesquelles des destinations sont enregistrées. - En fonction de ses réglages ou des options installées sur l'imprimante multifonction laquelle Mon Carnet Adresses est utilisés, l'émission spécifiée dans le carnet d'adresses peut ne pas être possible. - L'enregistrement, l'édition, ou la suppression de Mon Carnet Adresses peut causer une erreur en fonction de l'état de connexion au serveur. En cas d'erreur, vérifiez la connexion réseau. Mon Carnet Adr. est disponible Mon Carnet Adresses est disponible Serveur (Gestion de Mon Carnet Adr.) (3) Obtention de Mon C. Adr. (2) Accès au serveur (1) Procédure d'authentification Mon Carnet Adr. n'est pas disponible • Échec d'authentification • Déconnexion • Échec d'obtention de Mon Panneau bizhub 652/552 10-5 10.2 Enregistrement et modification d'une destination 10 10.2 Enregistrement et modification d'une destination Mon Carnet Adresses permet d'enregistrer les destinations privées fréquemment utilisées. Vous pouvez enregistrer les adresses au moyen de l'une des méthodes suivantes. - Par le panneau de contrôle de l'imprimante multifonction - Par PageScope Web Connection depuis un ordinateur du réseau - Par PageScope My Panel Manager Les destinations en numérotation abrégée et les groupes peuvent être enregistrés dans Mon Carnet Adresses. Cette section décrit la modalité d'enregistrement des adresses sur le panneau de contrôle de l'imprimante multifonction. 10.2.1 Mon Carnet Adresses Vous pouvez enregistrer les numéros de fax et les adresses E-mail f ainsi que les boîtes enregistrées fréquemment utilisés en numérotation abrégée. Vous pouvez enregistrer dans le carnet d'adresses jusqu'à 100 destinataires en numérotation abrégée. 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré. 2 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur. 3 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-Touche/Boîte]. 4 Appuyez sur [Créer Destination 1-Touche]. 5 Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Privé)]. % Pour ajouter des destinations en numérotation abrégée au carnet d'adresses partagé, appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Public)]. La liste des destinations en numérotation abrégée apparaît. 10 Enregistrement et modification d'une destination 10-6 bizhub 652/552 10.2 6 Appuyez sur [Nouveau]. % Pour modifier une destination enregistrée, sélectionnez-la et appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier]. % Pour supprimer une adresse enregistrée, sélectionnez-la et appuyez ensuite sur [Eff.]. % Pour vérifier une adresse enregistrée, sélectionnez l'adresse souhaitée et appuyez ensuite sur [Vér. Par. Tâches]. 7 Sélectionnez le type d'adresse à enregistrer, puis configure les réglages des éléments requis. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur les entrées du carnet d'adresses, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner Réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 10.2.2 Groupe Vous pouvez regrouper et enregistrer plusieurs destinations en numérotation abrégée du carnet d'adresses en tant que groupe. Mon Carnet Adresses permet d'enregistrer jusqu'à 10 groupes (enregistrement maximum de 100 destinations en numérotation abrégée par groupe). 1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré. 2 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur. 3 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-Touche/Boîte]. 4 Appuyez sur [Créer Destination 1-Touche]. 5 Appuyez sur [Groupe]. La liste des groupes apparaît. bizhub 652/552 10-7 10.2 Enregistrement et modification d'une destination 10 6 Appuyez sur [Privé], puis sur [Nouveau]. % Pour modifier un groupe enregistré, sélectionnez-le et appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier]. % Pour supprimer un groupe enregistré, sélectionnez-le et appuyez ensuite sur [Eff.]. % Pour vérifier un groupe enregistré, sélectionnez-le et appuyez ensuite sur [Vér. Par. Tâches.]. % Appuyez sur [Public] pour afficher les groupes publics. 7 Assurez-vous de sélectionner un groupe privé comme destination d'enregistrement, puis configurez les réglages des éléments requis. % Sélectionnez [Régl. Groupe Destina]. Les adresses enregistrées dans Mon Carnet Adresses sont affichées. Sélectionnez une destination en numérotation abrégée à inclure dans un groupe. dPour info Pour plus de détails sur le contenu d'enregistrement du groupe, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner Réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]. 10 Copier des destinations dans plusieurs carnets d'adresses 10-8 bizhub 652/552 10.3 10.3 Copier des destinations dans plusieurs carnets d'adresses Les destinations en numérotation abrégée enregistrées peuvent être copiées de Mon Carnet Adresses vers le carnet d'adresses public et réciproquement. Référence - Les groupes ne peuvent pas être copiés de Mon Carnet Adresses d'adresses vers le carnet d'adresses public et réciproquement. 10.3.1 Copier les destinations du carnet d'adresses public dans Mon Carnet Adresses Les adresses enregistrées dans le carnet d'adresses public peuvent être copiées dans Mon Carnet Adresses. 1 Affichez [Créer Destination 1-Touche]. 2 Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Public)]. 3 Sélectionnez le type d'adresse à copier. La liste des carnets d'adresses enregistrés du type d'adresse sélectionné apparaît. 4 Sélectionnez l'adresse à copier, et appuyez ensuite sur [Copier vers Adr pers]. 5 Sélectionnez [Oui] sur l'écran de confirmation et appuyez sur [Valider]. L'adresse sélectionnée est copiée. bizhub 652/552 10-9 10.3 Copier des destinations dans plusieurs carnets d'adresses 10 10.3.2 Copier les destinations du Mon Carnet Adresses dans le carnet d'adresses public Les destinations enregistrées dans Mon Carnet Adresses peuvent être copiées dans le carnet d'adresses public. 1 Affichez [Créer Destination 1-Touche]. 2 Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Privé)]. La liste des destinations en numérotation abrégée apparaît. 3 Sélectionnez l'adresse à copier, et appuyez ensuite sur [Copier vers Adr Part]. 4 Sélectionnez [Oui] sur l'écran de confirmation et appuyez sur [Valider]. L'adresse sélectionnée est copiée. 10 Utiliser Mon Carnet Adresses pour envoyer un document 10-10 bizhub 652/552 10.4 10.4 Utiliser Mon Carnet Adresses pour envoyer un document Utilisez Mon Carnet Adresses pour spécifier une destination lorsque vous envoyez un document avec les fonctions Fax/Numérisation ou lorsque vous envoyez un document dans une boîte. 10.4.1 Spécifier des destinations Si vous utilisez les fonctions Mon adresse, l'écran suivant apparaît lorsque une adresse doit être spécifiée. Les adresses enregistrées dans Mon Carnet Adresses apparaissent par type d'adresse. Sélectionnez la destination souhaitée. Pour sélectionner une adresse enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses public, appuyez sur [Public]. 10.4.2 Rechercher des destinations Si vous ne trouvez pas une adresse, vous pouvez lancer une recherche. Dans l'écran de spécification d'adresse, appuyez sur [Recher simple]. Pour rechercher des destinations d'après le type d'adresse enregistrée, appuyez sur [Type d'adresse]. Pour effectuer une recherche de destinations sur le nom et une partie du contenu d'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Recherche détaillée]. 11 Index bizhub 652/552 11-3 11.1 Index des éléments 11 11 Index 11.1 Index des éléments A Accès 5-4 Accès aux boîtes 5-7 Acquérir Mon Panneau 9-4 Acquisition de Mon Carnet Adresses 10-4 Affichage 4-20 B Barre d'outils 4-11 Boîte utilisateur 5-7, 6-9 C Cache 5-3 Caractéristiques 4-3, 6-21 Caractéristiques du Navigateur Web 4-3 Carnet d'adresses 10-5 Carnet d'adresses public 10-3 Code PIN 6-20 Composition de l'écran d'Image Panel 6-5 Composition de l'écran de PageScope Web Connection 5-5 Composition de l'écran Navigateur Web 4-8 Connexion 5-6 D Déconnexion 5-6 E Enregistrement 4-21 Envoi 4-22 F Flash Player 4-4 Fonction Mon Panneau 9-1 G Groupe 10-6 H Haut-parleur 4-10 I Image Panel 2-4, 6-3, 6-4, 6-24 Impression 4-18, 5-9, 6-16 Infos Navigateur Web 4-17 Interdiction du navigateur Web 4-5 M Magasin Envoi 6-18 Menu Application 3-4 Menu Comm 9-6 Mémoire externe 6-17 Mode d'affichage du Navigateur Web 4-10 Mon adresse 2-4, 10-3 Mon Carnet Adresses 10-3, 10-10 Mon Panneau 2-4, 9-3, 9-6 N Navigateur Web 2-4, 4-3, 4-4 Numérisation 6-8 O OCR 8-4 P PageScope Web Connection 5-3 Paramètres Navigateur Web 4-15 PDF adressable 2-4, 8-3, 8-5 Personnalisation 3-5, 6-24, 9-7 Photo 6-21 R Rendu intelligent 4-10 Rendu Parfait 4-10 Restrictions dans Mon adresse 10-4 Restrictions sur Mon Panneau 9-5 Réglages Mon Panneau 9-7 S Saisie de texte dans Navigateur Web 4-9 Suppression 5-11 T Téléphone cellulaire/PDA 6-11, 6-20 Touche d'application 3-3, 3-5 Traitement PDF 2-4, 7-3 U Utilisation d'Image Panel 6-6 Utiliser le Navigateur Web 4-9 11-4 bizhub 652/552 11 Index des touches 11.2 11.2 Index des touches A Accès au contenu du navigateur Web 4-7 Aperçu 6-12 C Cache 4-17 Carnet Adresses (Privé) 10-5 Carnet d'Adresses par Défaut 9-12 Carnet d'adresses par défaut 9-13 Combiner Documents 6-14 Cookie 4-17 Copier vers Carnet partagé 10-9 Copier vers Carnet privé 10-8 Cryptage 7-5 D Document/Page 6-13, 6-14, 6-15 F Favoris (Voir) 4-12 G Gestion des fenêtres 4-16 Groupe 10-6 H Histor. 4-13 I ID numérique 7-6 Impression 4-14 Impression directe 7-9 Informations d'authentification 4-17 J Journal Accès 4-17 L Lecture 6-8 Liste des destinations 6-17 Liste Source Document 6-9 M Menu 4-15 Menu Application 3-4 Mémoire externe 6-10, 6-17 Modif. document 6-13 Mot de passe 7-5 O Onglet par Défaut 9-10, 9-12, 9-14 Opération Page 4-15 P Param. Sélection Couleur 9-15 Paramètres Numérisation/Fax 9-12 Permission Fonction 4-6 Photo/Icône 6-22 Propriétés des documents PDF 7-4 Proxy 4-17 R Retour à Dest. Numér. 6-15 Réglage Boîte Utilisateur 9-14 Réglage Ecran par défaut 9-17 Réglage facile 9-11 Réglage Langue 9-9 Réglage Navigateur Web 4-5 Réglage Reconnaissance optique OCR 8-4 Réglage Touche Application 3-5 Réglage Unité de mesure 9-9 Réglages 4-17 Réglages Copieur 9-10 Réglages Densité Onglet par défaut 9-11 Réglages Document 6-15 Réglages Impres. 6-16 Réglages Menu Principal 9-16 Réglages Mon Panneau 9-7 S Saisir l'adresse 4-13 Sécurité 4-17 Signet (Ajout) 4-12 T Téléphone cellulaire 6-11 Touche d'application 1 3-4 Touche d'application 2 3-4 Touche de raccourci 9-10, 9-13, 9-14 Touche du menu Application 3-3 Type d'adresse par défaut 9-13 V Voir Guide de l’utilisateur x Table des matières bizhub 162/210 x-3 Table des matières 1 Introduction 1.1 Notre objectif : vous satisfaire ........................................................ 1-3 1.2 Marques commerciales et marques déposées ............................. 1-3 1.3 Notices de réglementation .............................................................. 1-4 Marquage Ce (Déclaration de conformité) pour les utilisateurs de l'Union Européenne (UE) ........................................................... 1-4 Pour les utilisateurs se trouvant dans des pays soumis aux réglementations de la Classe B ..................................................... 1-4 Pour les utilisateurs se trouvant dans des pays non soumis aux réglementations de la Classe B ............................................... 1-4 Sécurité laser ................................................................................. 1-5 Rayonnement laser interne ............................................................ 1-5 CDRH regulation ............................................................................ 1-6 Pour les utilisateurs européens ...................................................... 1-6 Pour les utilisateurs danois ............................................................ 1-7 Pour les utilisateurs finnois et suédois ........................................... 1-7 Pour les utilisateurs norvégiens ..................................................... 1-8 Etiquette Sécurité Laser ................................................................. 1-9 Émission d'ozone ........................................................................... 1-9 Niveau sonore .............................................................................. 1-10 1.4 Conseils de sécurité ....................................................................... 1-11 Symboles d'avertissement et de précaution ............................... 1-11 Signification des symboles .......................................................... 1-12 Démontage et modification .......................................................... 1-12 Cordon d'alimentation ................................................................. 1-13 Alimentation ................................................................................. 1-14 Fiche d'alimentation ..................................................................... 1-15 Mise à la terre ............................................................................... 1-16 Installation .................................................................................... 1-17 Ventilation .................................................................................... 1-18 En cas de problèmes ................................................................... 1-19 Consommables ............................................................................ 1-20 En cas de déplacement de l'appareil ........................................... 1-21 En cas d’absence prolongée ....................................................... 1-21 1.5 Energy Star® ................................................................................... 1-22 Partenaire Energy Star® .............................................................. 1-22 Définition d'un produit ENERGY STAR® ..................................... 1-22 x-4 bizhub 162/210 1.6 Explication des conventions ...........................................................1-23 Conseils de sécurité .....................................................................1-23 Séquence des actions ..................................................................1-23 Conseils ........................................................................................1-24 Marquages de texte spéciaux ......................................................1-24 1.7 Explication des concepts de base et symboles ...........................1-25 Alimentation papier .......................................................................1-25 Largeur et longueur .......................................................................1-26 Sens longitudinal et sens transversal ...........................................1-26 2 Précautions 2.1 Précautions d'installation .................................................................2-3 Site d'installation .............................................................................2-3 Alimentation ....................................................................................2-3 Espace requis .................................................................................2-3 2.2 Précautions d'utilisation ...................................................................2-5 Environnement ................................................................................2-5 Utilisation correcte ..........................................................................2-5 Transport de l'appareil ....................................................................2-6 Conservation des consommables ..................................................2-6 Stockage de copies ........................................................................2-6 2.3 Réglementation en matière de copie ..............................................2-8 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3.1 Les composants et leurs fonctions .................................................3-3 3.2 Nomenclature et fonctions ...............................................................3-5 Unité principale ...............................................................................3-5 Intérieur de l'unité principale ...........................................................3-7 Introducteur de documents (en option) ..........................................3-8 Multi-introducteur manuel (en option) .............................................3-9 Unité d'alimentation de papier (en option) ....................................3-10 Séparateur travaux (en option) .....................................................3-11 3.3 Panneau de contrôle .......................................................................3-12 Noms des touches du panneau de contrôle et leurs fonctions ....3-12 Indications affichées .....................................................................3-15 Ajustement angulaire de l'écran ...................................................3-16 3.4 Alimentation électrique ...................................................................3-17 Allumer la machine ........................................................................3-17 Eteindre la machine ......................................................................3-17 3.5 Sélections par défaut ......................................................................3-18 bizhub 162/210 x-5 3.6 Fonctions pratiques ........................................................................ 3-19 Initialisation automatique ............................................................. 3-19 Mode Economie d'énergie ........................................................... 3-19 Auto coupure ............................................................................... 3-20 Tâches copie en file d'attente ...................................................... 3-20 3.7 Papier ............................................................................................... 3-21 Types de papier ........................................................................... 3-21 Formats papier ............................................................................. 3-22 Capacité de papier ....................................................................... 3-23 Papier à ne pas utiliser ................................................................. 3-24 3.8 Zone d'impression .......................................................................... 3-25 3.9 Stockage du papier ........................................................................ 3-26 3.10 Copier avec introduction manuelle du papier .............................. 3-27 Papiers acceptés en introduction manuelle ................................. 3-27 Réglage du multi-introducteur manuel ........................................ 3-28 Chargement de papier ordinaire dans le plateau d'introduction . 3-29 Chargement de cartes postales dans le plateau d'introduction .. 3-30 Chargement d'enveloppes dans le plateau d'introduction .......... 3-31 Chargement de transparents dans le plateau d'introduction ...... 3-33 Chargement de planches d'étiquettes dans le plateau d'introduction ............................................................................... 3-34 Copie sur du papier inséré à la main via l'introducteur manuel ... 3-35 Copie sur du papier inséré à la main via le multi-introducteur manuel .......................................................................................... 3-38 3.11 Sélection de la source papier ........................................................ 3-41 Réaliser des copies avec la fonction Papier Auto ........................ 3-41 Réaliser une copie avec sélection manuelle du format papier .... 3-42 Chargement du papier dédié dans le 1er magasin ...................... 3-42 Sélection automatique de la source papier ................................. 3-43 Ordre de basculement automatique des magasins papier .......... 3-44 3.12 Documents originaux ..................................................................... 3-45 Utilisation de l'introducteur de documents .................................. 3-45 Types de document ..................................................................... 3-45 Document de formats uniformes ................................................. 3-46 Formats de documents de largeurs mixtes (DF-605) .................. 3-46 Précautions relatives aux originaux ............................................. 3-47 3.13 Spécifier une sélection Zoom ........................................................ 3-48 Paramètres Zoom ........................................................................ 3-48 Réaliser des copies avec le paramètre zoom AUTO ................... 3-49 Réaliser des copies avec un paramètre zoom fixe ...................... 3-50 Réaliser des copies avec un paramètre zoom spécifique ........... 3-51 Réaliser des copies avec la fonction Zoom X/Y .......................... 3-52 x-6 bizhub 162/210 3.14 Spécifier la densité de copie ..........................................................3-54 Réaliser des copies après spécification de la densité copie ........3-55 3.15 Interrompre des tâches de copie ...................................................3-56 Interrompre une tâche de copie ..................................................3-56 4 Opérations de copie 4.1 Copies de base ..................................................................................4-3 Opérations élémentaires de copie ..................................................4-3 4.2 Chargement du papier ......................................................................4-5 Chargement du papier dans le 1er magasin papier ........................4-6 Chargement du papier dans le 2ème magasin papier ....................4-8 4.3 Chargement du document ..............................................................4-10 Chargement des documents dans l'introducteur de documents .4-10 Positionnement d'une feuille de document sur la vitre d'exposition ..................................................................................4-12 Positionnement des documents transparents sur la vitre d'exposition ..................................................................................4-13 Positionnement des livres sur la vitre d'exposition .......................4-14 Chargement d'originaux de formats mixtes dans l'introducteur de documents ...............................................................................4-15 4.4 Arrêter une tâche de copie .............................................................4-18 Arrêter/Reprendre/Annuler une tâche de copie ............................4-18 4.5 Vérification des compteurs de la machine ....................................4-19 Pour vérifier les compteurs ...........................................................4-19 4.6 Economiser l'électricité ..................................................................4-21 Spécifier le mode d'économie d'énergie et le mode auto coupure .................................................................................4-21 5 Fonctions utiles 5.1 Spécifier une sélection Zoom ...........................................................5-3 Effectuer un zoom d'un document de format standard et le convertir à un format standard différent .....................................5-3 5.2 Utilisation de la fonction Auto/Photo ..............................................5-5 Réaliser des copies précises d'illustrations ou de photos .............5-5 5.3 Copies sur divers types de supports ...............................................5-7 Pour copier sur des transparents de rétroprojection ......................5-7 Pour copier sur des planches d'étiquettes .....................................5-9 Copier sur des enveloppes (de format non standard) ..................5-12 Copier sur des cartes postales .....................................................5-15 bizhub 162/210 x-7 6 Copies complexes 6.1 Copies recto ...................................................................................... 6-3 Spécifier les paramètres pour les copies 2en1 (ou 4en1) .............. 6-3 Sur la vitre d'exposition ................................................................. 6-3 Utilisation de l'introducteur de documents .................................... 6-5 Spécifier les réglages pour des copies Séparation livre ................ 6-6 6.2 Copies recto-verso ........................................................................... 6-8 Types de copies recto-verso ......................................................... 6-8 Précautions relatives à la copie recto/verso .................................. 6-9 Pour réaliser des copies recto-verso sur la vitre d'exposition ..... 6-10 Pour réaliser des copies recto-verso avec l'introducteur de documents ................................................................................... 6-11 6.3 Finition des copies .......................................................................... 6-12 Fonctions de finition ..................................................................... 6-12 Considérations sur l'utilisation des fonctions de Tri et de Groupe ................................................................................ 6-13 Tri décalé ...................................................................................... 6-14 Tri croisé ...................................................................................... 6-14 Groupe décalé .............................................................................. 6-14 Groupe croisé .............................................................................. 6-14 Spécifier les paramètres de finition (tri à l'aide de la vitre d'exposition) ................................................................................. 6-15 Spécifier les paramètres de finition (à l'aide de l'introducteur de documents) .................................................................................. 6-16 6.4 Effacer des portions de copies ..................................................... 6-17 Précautions relatives à l'emplacement de la marge effacée ....... 6-17 Réaliser des copies avec un réglage d'effacement ..................... 6-18 6.5 Copie avec inversion Nég./Pos. .................................................... 6-19 Réaliser des copies avec la fonction inversion positif/négatif ..... 6-19 6.6 Réaliser des copies pour archivage .............................................. 6-20 Précautions relatives à l'emplacement de la marge de reliure .... 6-20 Réaliser des copies avec la fonction Marge ................................ 6-21 6.7 Travaux copie programmés ........................................................... 6-22 Mémoriser un programme de copie ............................................. 6-22 Rappeler un programme copie .................................................... 6-24 6.8 Codes d'accès ................................................................................ 6-25 Entrer un code d'accès ................................................................ 6-25 x-8 bizhub 162/210 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7.1 Paramètres machine .........................................................................7-4 Sélection du menu PARAMETRES MACHINE ................................7-5 Spécifier REIN. T de BORD ............................................................7-6 Spécifier le MODE ECO. ENERG. ...................................................7-7 Spécifier AUTO COUPURE ............................................................7-8 Spécifier la DENSITE (ADF) .............................................................7-9 Spécifier la DENSITE (LIVRE) ........................................................7-10 Spécifier la DENSITE IMPRESSION .............................................7-10 Spécifier le CONTRASTE LCD ......................................................7-11 Spécifier la LANGUE .....................................................................7-11 7.2 Réglages source papier ..................................................................7-12 Sélection du menu REGL. SOURCE PAPI. ...................................7-13 Spécifier INCH/METRIC ................................................................7-14 Spécifier PAPIER MAGASIN 1 ......................................................7-15 Spécifier le TYPE DE PAPIER .......................................................7-17 7.3 Paramètres de gestion utilisateur ..................................................7-18 Sélection du menu GESTION UTILISATEUR ................................7-18 Procéder à une déshumidification du tambour PC .......................7-19 Effectuer TONER REPLENISHER .................................................7-19 7.4 Paramètres d'administration ..........................................................7-20 Sélection du menu GESTION ADMIN. ..........................................7-21 Spécifier AUTO COUPURE ..........................................................7-22 Activer/désactiver la gestion utilisateur ........................................7-23 Enregistrement des codes d'accès utilisateur ..............................7-24 Modifier/Supprimer des codes d'accès utilisateur .......................7-25 Afficher/Effacer le comptage total pour un compte donné ..........7-27 Effacer les compteurs totaux de tous les comptes ......................7-29 7.5 Paramètres copie ............................................................................7-30 Sélection du menu PARAM COPIE 1 ............................................7-32 Spécifier la PRIORITE PAPIER ......................................................7-33 Spécifier la PRIORITE DENSITE ...................................................7-34 Spécifier DENSITE NIVEAU (A) .....................................................7-35 Spécifier DENSITE NIVEAU (M) ....................................................7-35 Spécifier la POSITION DE RELIURE .............................................7-36 Spécifier le REGLAGE MARGE .....................................................7-36 Spécifier le REGLAGE EFFACEMENT ..........................................7-37 Spécifier PETIT ORIGINAL ............................................................7-38 Sélection du menu PARAM. COPIE 2 ...........................................7-39 Spécifier les ORIGINAUX MIXTES ................................................7-40 Spécifier la PRIORITE COPIE .......................................................7-40 Spécifier SORTIE PRIORITAIRE ...................................................7-41 Spécifier ORDRE COPIE 4EN1 .....................................................7-41 bizhub 162/210 x-9 Spécifier le MODE CROISE .......................................................... 7-42 Spécifier COPIE RECTO/VERSO ................................................. 7-42 8 Messages d'erreur 8.1 Le message TONER VIDE s'affiche ................................................. 8-3 Message TONER VIDE ................................................................... 8-3 Remplacement de la cartouche de toner ....................................... 8-4 8.2 Le message SERRAGE PAPIER s'affiche ....................................... 8-6 Message SERRAGE PAPIER ......................................................... 8-6 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans l'unité recto-verso ..................... 8-7 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans l'unité principale ou 1er magasin .................................................................................... 8-7 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans le 2ème/3ème/4ème/5ème magasin ........................................................................................ 8-10 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans le multi-introducteur manuel ... 8-11 8.3 Le message SERRAGE ORIGINAL s'affiche ................................. 8-13 Message SERRAGE ORIGINAL ................................................... 8-13 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans l'introducteur automatique de documents (DF-502) .................................................................... 8-13 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans l'introducteur/retourneur automatique de documents (DF-605) .......................................... 8-16 8.4 Quelle est la signification de chaque message ? ........................ 8-18 8.5 Si l'on obtient des copies de mauvaise qualité ........................... 8-21 8.6 En cas de copie insatisfaisante ..................................................... 8-23 9 Divers 9.1 Caractéristiques ............................................................................... 9-3 Unité principale bizhub 162/210 .................................................... 9-3 Unité automatique recto-verso AD-504 ......................................... 9-4 Introducteur/retourneur automatique de documents DF-605 ....... 9-5 Introducteur automatique de documents DF-502 ......................... 9-6 Unité d'alimentation papier PF-502 ............................................... 9-6 Magasin de décalage SF-501 ........................................................ 9-7 Séparateur travaux JS-503 ............................................................ 9-7 Multi-introducteur manuel MB-501 ................................................ 9-7 9.2 Entretien de l'appareil ...................................................................... 9-8 Nettoyage ....................................................................................... 9-8 Revêtement .................................................................................... 9-8 Vitre d'exposition ........................................................................... 9-8 Couvre-document .......................................................................... 9-8 Panneau de contrôle ...................................................................... 9-9 x-10 bizhub 162/210 9.3 Tableau d'association des fonctions .............................................9-10 Matrice de combinaison de fonctions pour le bizhub 162 ............9-10 Matrice de combinaison de fonctions pour le bizhub 210 ............9-11 Codes de combinaison de fonctions ............................................9-11 9.4 Tableaux format papier et taux zoom ............................................9-12 Formats papier ..............................................................................9-12 Taux de zoom ...............................................................................9-13 10 Index 1 Introduction Introduction 1 bizhub 162/210 1-3 1 Introduction 1.1 Notre objectif : vous satisfaire Merci d'avoir choisi le 162/210. Ce manuel utilisateur décrit les fonctions, les procédures de fonctionnement, les précautions à prendre et les résolutions de problèmes du bizhub 162/ 210. Avant d'utiliser l'appareil, lisez entièrement ce manuel utilisateur pour assurer un fonctionnement correct et efficace de l'appareil. Après avoir lu le manuel utilisateur, placez-le dans le porte-documents pour pouvoir le consulter à tout moment. Veuillez noter que certaines illustrations de la machine figurant sur le manuel utilisateur peuvent différer de ce que vous voyez en réalité sur votre machine. 1.2 Marques commerciales et marques déposées KONICA MINOLTA, le logo KONICA MINOLTA et The essentials of imaging sont des marques déposées ou des marques commerciales de KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. PageScope et bizhub sont des marques déposées ou des marques commerciales de KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Netscape Communications, le logo Netscape Communications, Netscape Navigator, Netscape Communicator et Netscape sont des marques commerciales de Netscape Communications Corporation. PageScope Box Operator : Ce logiciel est partiellement basé sur le travail du Independent JPEG Group. Compact-VJE Copyright 1986-2003 VACS Corp. 1 Introduction 1-4 bizhub 162/210 1.3 Notices de réglementation Marquage Ce (Déclaration de conformité) pour les utilisateurs de l'Union Européenne (UE) Ce produit est conforme aux directives UE suivantes : Directives 89/336/EEC, 73/23/EEC et 93/68/EEC. La présente déclaration est valable pour la zone de l'Union Européenne. 7 ATTENTION Interférences avec les communications radio. % Cet appareil doit être utilisé avec des câbles d'interface blindés. L'utilisation de câbles non-blindés est susceptible de causer des interférences avec les radiocommunications. En outre, elle est interdite en vertu des directives de l'UE. Pour les utilisateurs se trouvant dans des pays soumis aux réglementations de la Classe B 7 ATTENTION Interférences avec les communications radio. % Cet appareil doit être utilisé avec des câbles d'interface blindés. L'utilisation d'un câble non blindé est susceptible de provoquer des interférences avec les communications radio ; ceci est interdit aux termes des règlements CISPR 22 et des réglementations nationales. Pour les utilisateurs se trouvant dans des pays non soumis aux réglementations de la Classe B 7 AVERTISSEMENT Interférences avec les communications radio. % Cet appareil appartient à la Classe A. Utilisé dans un environnement domestique, ce produit peut provoquer des interférences radio auxquelles il appartient à l'utilisateur de remédier. % Cet appareil doit être utilisé avec des câbles d'interface blindés. L'utilisation d'un câble non blindé est susceptible de provoquer des interférences avec les communications radio ; ceci est interdit aux termes des règlements CISPR 22 et des réglementations nationales. Introduction 1 bizhub 162/210 1-5 Sécurité laser Ceci est un appareil numérique qui fonctionne au moyen d'un laser. Ce laser ne présente aucun risque à condition d'être utilisé conformément aux instructions de ce manuel. Le rayonnement émis par le laser étant entièrement confiné dans une enceinte de protection, aucune fuite du faisceau laser ne peut se produire à l'extérieur de la machine à quelque phase de l'utilisation que ce soit. Cet appareil est homologué comme produit laser de Classe 1 : En d'autres termes, la machine n'émet aucun rayonnement laser dangereux. Rayonnement laser interne Ce produit utilise une diode laser de Classe 3b qui émet un rayon laser invisible. La diode laser et le miroir polygonal pour le palpage sont intégrés dans l'unité de tête d'impression. 7 AVERTISSEMENT Toute manipulation incorrecte risque d'entraîner une exposition dangereuse aux radiations. % La tête d'impression n'est pas un élément réparable sur site. % Par conséquent, l'unité de tête d'impression ne doit être ouverte en aucune circonstance. Spécifications Puissance de rayonnement maximum moyen 6,32 μW au niveau de l'ouverture laser du bloc tête d'impression Longueur d'onde 770-795 nm Tête d'impression Ouverture laser de la tête d'impression 1 Introduction 1-6 bizhub 162/210 CDRH regulation This machine is certified as a class 1 laser product under radiation performance standard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990. Compliance is mandatory for laser products marketed in the United States and is reported to the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS). This means that the device does not produce hazardous laser radiation. The label shown on page 1-9 indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States. 7 CAUTION Incorrect handling may result in hazardous radiation exposure. % Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure. This is a semiconductor laser. The maximum power of the laser diode is 5 mW and the wavelength is 770-795 nm. Pour les utilisateurs européens 7 ATTENTION Toute manipulation incorrecte risque d'entraîner une exposition dangereuses aux radiations. % L'application de commandes, de réglages ou de procédures autres que ceux spécifiés dans ce manuel peut entraîner une exposition dangereuse au rayonnement. Cet appareil comporte un laser à semi-conducteurs. La puissance maximale de la diode laser est de 5 mW et sa longueur d'onde est de 770-795 nm. Introduction 1 bizhub 162/210 1-7 Pour les utilisateurs danois 7 ADVARSEL Usynlig laserstråling ved åbning, når sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion. % Usynlig laserstråling ved åbning, når sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion. Undgå udsættelse for stråling. Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC60825 sikkerheds kravene. Dette er en halvlederlaser. Laserdiodens højeste styrke er 5 mW og bølgelængden er 770-795 nm. Pour les utilisateurs finnois et suédois LOUKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT 7 VAROITUS Tämä on puolijohdelaser. % Laitteen Käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle. Tämä on puolijohdelaser. Laserdiodin sunrin teho on 5 mW ja aallonpituus on 770-795 nm. 7 VARNING Det här är en halvledarlaser. % Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i denna bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1. Det här är en halvledarlaser. Den maximala effekten för laserdioden är 5 mW och våglängden är 770-795 nm. 1 Introduction 1-8 bizhub 162/210 7 VAROITUS Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle. % Älä katso säteeseen. 7 VARNING Osynlig laserstrålning när denna del är öppnad och spärren är urkopplad. % Betrakta ej strålen. Pour les utilisateurs norvégiens 7 ADVARSEL! Dette en halvleder laser. % Dersom apparatet brukes på annen måte enn spesifisert i denne bruksanvisning, kan brukeren utsettes for unsynlig laserstråling som overskrider grensen for laser klass 1. Dette en halvleder laser. Maksimal effekt till laserdiode er 5 mW og bølgelengde er 770-795 nm. Introduction 1 bizhub 162/210 1-9 Etiquette Sécurité Laser Une Etiquette Sécurité Laser est apposée sur l'extérieur de la machine, à l'emplacement indiqué ci-dessous. Émission d'ozone 7 ATTENTION Une quantité d'ozone négligeable se dégage de l’appareil quand celuici est utilisé normalement. Cependant, une odeur désagréable peut se faire sentir dans les pièces dont l'aération est insuffisante et lorsque l'appareil est utilisé pendant de longues périodes. Pour garantir un environnement de travail réunissant confort, santé et sécurité, il est préférable de bien aérer la pièce où se trouve l’appareil. % Placer l’appareil dans une pièce largement ventilée. 7 ATTENTION Une quantité négligeable d’ozone est dégagée pendant le fonctionnement de l’appareil quand celui-ci est utilisé normalement. Cependant, une odeur désagréable peut être ressentie dans les pièces dont l’aération est insuffisante et lorsque une utilisation prolongée de l’appareil est effectuée. Pour avoir la certitude de travailler dans un environnement réunissant des conditions de confort, santé et de sécurité, il est préférable de bien aérer la pièce ou se trouve l’appareil. % Placer l’appareil dans une pièce largement ventilée. 1 Introduction 1-10 bizhub 162/210 Niveau sonore Pour les utilisateurs européens Décret relatif aux bruits des machines 3. GPSGV : Le niveau de pression acousitique max. est de 70 dB(A) ou moins conformément à la norme EN ISO 7779. Introduction 1 bizhub 162/210 1-11 1.4 Conseils de sécurité Ce chapitre contient des instructions détaillées relatives à l'exploitation et à la maintenance de cette machine. Pour utiliser au mieux cet appareil, tous les opérateurs doivent lire avec attention ce guide et respecter à la lettre les instructions qui y figurent. Veuillez lire le chapitre suivant avant de raccorder l'appareil au secteur. Il contient en effet des informations importantes quant à la sécurité de l'utilisateur et la prévention des problèmes liés à l'équipement. Veuillez conserver ce guide à portée de main et à proximité de la machine. Veillez à respecter impérativement toutes les précautions figurant dans chaque chapitre de ce manuel. KM_Ver.01E_C 2 Remarque Certains points du présent chapitre peuvent ne pas correspondre au produit acheté. Symboles d'avertissement et de précaution Les indicateurs suivants sont utilisés sur les étiquettes d'avertissement ou dans ce manuel pour classifier le niveau des avertissements de sécurité. 7 AVERTISSEMENT La négligence de ces avertissements peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. 7 ATTENTION Négliger ces précautions peut provoquer des blessures ou des dommages aux biens d'autrui. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. 1 Introduction 1-12 bizhub 162/210 Signification des symboles Démontage et modification 7 AVERTISSEMENT La négligence de ces avertissements peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. Symbole Signification Exemple Signification Un triangle indique un danger contre lequel il y a lieu de se protéger. Ce symbole indique un risque de brûlure. Une ligne diagonale indique une action interdite. Ce symbole met en garde contre un démontage du copieur. Un cercle noir indique une action impérative. Ce symbole signale le débranchement impératif du copieur. AVERTISSEMENT Symbole • N’essayez pas d'enlever les couvercles et les panneaux fixés sur le produit. Certains produits contiennent à l'intérieur des pièces haute-tension ou une source de faisceau laser susceptibles d'électrocuter ou d'aveugler l'opérateur. • Ne modifiez pas ce produit, il pourrait prendre feu, subir un choc électrique ou tomber en panne. Si le produit utilise un laser, la source de son faisceau risque d'aveugler l'opérateur. Introduction 1 bizhub 162/210 1-13 Cordon d'alimentation 7 AVERTISSEMENT La négligence de ces avertissements peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. AVERTISSEMENT Symbole • N'utilisez que le cordon d'alimentation fourni. Si le cordon d'alimentation n'est pas fourni avec le produit, n'utilisez que le cordon d'alimentation et la fiche préconisés dans les INSTRUCTIONS RELATIVES AU CORDON D'ALIMENTATION. L'utilisation d'un autre cordon peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. • Le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec le produit ne doit être utilisé qu'avec cette machine et jamais avec un autre appareil. Négliger cette précaution peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. • Ne grattez ni érodez jamais le cordon d'alimentation, ne placez pas d'objet lourd dessus, éviter de le chauffer, de le tordre, de le plier, de tirer dessus, de l'endommager. L'utilisation d'un cordon d'alimentation endommagé (âme unifilaire exposée, fil cassé, etc.) pourrait provoquer un incendie ou une panne. En présence de l'une de ces conditions, ETEIGNEZ immédiatement l'appareil, débranchez le cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale et appelez votre technicien SAV. 1 Introduction 1-14 bizhub 162/210 Alimentation 7 AVERTISSEMENT La négligence de ces avertissements peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. 7 ATTENTION Négliger ces précautions peut provoquer des blessures ou des dommages aux biens d'autrui. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. AVERTISSEMENT Symbole • N'utilisez que la tension d'alimentation spécifiée. Un incendie ou une électrocution peuvent résulter d'un manquement à cette instruction. • Branchez la fiche d'alimentation directement dans la prise murale présentant la même configuration que la fiche. L'utilisation d'un adaptateur entraîne le branchement de l'appareil à une source d'alimentation inappropriée (tension, capacité électrique, mise à la terre) et peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. En l'absence d'une prise murale appropriée, le client doit en demander l'installation par un électricien qualifié. • En principe, n’utilisez pas d'adapteur de sortie multiple ni de rallonge. L'utilisation d'un adaptateur ou d'une rallonge peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. Contacter votre S.A.V. si une rallonge s'avère nécessaire. • Veuillez consulter votre technicien SAV agréé avant de brancher un autre équipement sur la même prise murale. La surcharge pourrait déclencher un feu. ATTENTION Symbole • La prise doit se situer à proximité de l'équipement et être aisément accessible. Sinon, vous ne pourrez pas débrancher la fiche d'alimentation en cas d'urgence. Introduction 1 bizhub 162/210 1-15 Fiche d'alimentation 7 AVERTISSEMENT La négligence de ces avertissements peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. 7 ATTENTION Négliger ces précautions peut provoquer des blessures ou des dommages aux biens d'autrui. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. AVERTISSEMENT Symbole • Ne branchez ou débranchez jamais le cordon avec les mains humides sous peine d’électrocution. • Insérez la prise de courant à fond dans la prise murale afin d’éviter tout risque d’incendie ou d’électrocution. ATTENTION Symbole • Ne tirez pas directement sur le cordon d'alimentation pour débrancher l'appareil. Le fait de tirer directement sur le cordon d'alimentation peut l'endommager et déclencher un incendie ou provoquer une électrocution. • Débranchez le cordon d'alimentation plus d'une fois par an et nettoyez la zone entre les bornes de la prise. La poussière qui s'accumule entre les bornes peut provoquer un incendie. 1 Introduction 1-16 bizhub 162/210 Mise à la terre 7 AVERTISSEMENT La négligence de ces avertissements peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. AVERTISSEMENT Symbole • Branchez le cordon d'alimentation à une prise électrique équipée d'une borne de mise à la terre. Introduction 1 bizhub 162/210 1-17 Installation 7 AVERTISSEMENT La négligence de ces avertissements peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. 7 ATTENTION Négliger ces précautions peut provoquer des blessures ou des dommages aux biens d'autrui. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. AVERTISSEMENT Symbole • Ne posez pas de vase ou autre récipient contenant de l'eau ni d'agrafes ou de petits objets métalliques sur le produit. L'eau renversée ou les objets métalliques tombés à l'intérieur de l'appareil pourraient déclencher un incendie, causer une électrocution ou une panne. Si une pièce métallique, de l'eau ou tout autre corps étranger similaire devait tomber dans le produit, COUPEZ immédiatement le courant, débranchez le cordon d'alimentation de la prise et appelez votre technicien SAV. ATTENTION Symbole • Une fois ce produit installé, montez-le sur un support stable. Si l'appareil bouge ou tombe, il peut blesser quelqu'un. • N’installez pas ce produit dans un endroit poussiéreux ou exposé à la suie ou à la vapeur, à proximité d'une table de cuisine, d'une baignoire ou d'un humidificateur d'air. Un feu, une électrocution ou une panne peut se produire. • Ne placez pas ce produit sur un banc instable ou renversé ou dans un endroit soumis à des vibrations et des chocs importants. Il pourrait tomber et blesser quelqu'un ou provoquer une panne mécanique. • Ne laissez pas le moindre objet obstruer les orifices de ventilation de ce produit. La chaleur pourrait s'accumuler à l'intérieur du produit et provoquer un incendie ou un quelconque dysfonctionnement. • N’utilisez pas d'aérosols, de liquides ou de gaz inflammables à proximité de ce produit, il pourrait prendre feu. 1 Introduction 1-18 bizhub 162/210 Ventilation 7 ATTENTION Négliger ces précautions peut provoquer des blessures ou des dommages aux biens d'autrui. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. ATTENTION Symbole • Toujours utiliser ce produit dans un local bien ventilé. L'exploitation du produit dans un local mal ventilé pendant une longue période peut mettre votre santé en danger. Aérez la pièce à intervalles réguliers. Introduction 1 bizhub 162/210 1-19 En cas de problèmes 7 AVERTISSEMENT La négligence de ces avertissements peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. 7 ATTENTION Négliger ces précautions peut provoquer des blessures ou des dommages aux biens d'autrui. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. AVERTISSEMENT Symbole • Cessez toute utilisation de l’appareil s’il devient exceptionnellement chaud, dégage de la fumée ou fait entendre un bruit insolite. Mettez immédiatement l'interrupteur en position OFF (Arrêt), débranchez le câble d'alimentation de la prise murale, et contactez votre Service Après-vente. Si vous continuez à l'utiliser dans cet état, il peut prendre feu ou être source d'électrocution. • Cessez toute utilisation de l’appareil s'il est tombé ou si son capot a été endommagé. Mettez immédiatement l'interrupteur en position OFF (Arrêt), débranchez le câble d'alimentation de la prise murale, et contactez votre Service Aprèsvente. Si vous continuez à l'utiliser dans cet état, il peut prendre feu ou être source d'électrocution. ATTENTION Symbole • L'intérieur de ce produit est constitué de zones soumises à de fortes températures susceptibles de causer des brûlures. Lors de la vérification de l'intérieur de l'unité à la recherche de défauts comme un serrage papier, ne touchez pas les emplacements (autour de l'unité de fixation, etc.) identifiés par une étiquette d'avertissement “Caution HOT”. 1 Introduction 1-20 bizhub 162/210 Consommables 7 AVERTISSEMENT La négligence de ces avertissements peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. 7 ATTENTION Négliger ces précautions peut provoquer des blessures ou des dommages aux biens d'autrui. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. AVERTISSEMENT Symbole • Ne jetez pas la cartouche de toner ni du toner dans les flammes. Le toner chaud risque de se diffuser et de provoquer des brûlures ou d'autres dommages. ATTENTION Symbole • Ne laissez pas de cartouche toner ou d'unité tambour à portée des enfants. Lécher ou ingérer toute partie de ces objets est nocif pour la santé. • Ne stockez pas les unités de toner et les tambours PC à proximité d'un lecteur de disquettes ou d'une horloge sensibles au magnétisme. Ces appareils pourraient ne plus fonctionner correctement. Introduction 1 bizhub 162/210 1-21 En cas de déplacement de l'appareil 7 ATTENTION Négliger ces précautions peut provoquer des blessures ou des dommages aux biens d'autrui. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. En cas d’absence prolongée Quand le kit Fax FK-505 en option n'est pas installé : 7 ATTENTION Négliger ces précautions peut provoquer des blessures ou des dommages aux biens d'autrui. % Ne négligez pas ces conseils de sécurité. ATTENTION Symbole • A chaque fois que vous déplacez ce produit, assurez-vous de débrancher le cordon d'alimentation et tous les autres câbles. Tout manquement à cette règle peut endommager le cordon ou les câbles et déclencher un incendie ou provoquer une électrocution ou une panne. • Pour déplacer cet appareil, tenez-le toujours au niveau des zones spécifiées dans le Manuel de l'Utilisateur ou dans d'autres documents. Si l'appareil tombe, il peut causer de graves blessures corporelles. Le produit risque également d'être endommagé ou de ne plus fonctionner correctement. ATTENTION Symbole • Débranchez l'appareil quand vous ne voulez pas l'utiliser pendant de longues périodes. 1 Introduction 1-22 bizhub 162/210 1.5 Energy Star® Partenaire Energy Star® En tant que Partenaires ENERGY STAR®, nous avons pu déterminer que cet appareil satisfait les Directives ENERGY STAR® en matière d'efficience énergétique. Définition d'un produit ENERGY STAR® Un produit ENERGY STAR® intègre une fonction spéciale qui lui permet de basculer automatiquement en “mode d'économie d'énergie” à l'issue d'une certaine période d'inactivité. Un produit ENERGY STAR® utilise l'énergie avec plus d'efficacité, vous permet d'économiser de l'argent sur vos factures d'électricité et contribue à protéger l'environnement. Introduction 1 bizhub 162/210 1-23 1.6 Explication des conventions Les repères et mises en forme utilisés dans le présent manuel sont décrits ci-dessous. Conseils de sécurité 7 AVERTISSEMENT Les instructions ainsi mises en valeur doivent être respectées sous peine de blessures graves ou de dommages matériels. % Observez tous les avertissements afin de prévenir toute blessure et garantir une utilisation sûre du copieur. 7 ATTENTION Les instructions ainsi mises en valeur doivent être respectées sous peine de blessures légères ou de dommages matériels. % Observez toutes les mises en garde afin de prévenir toute blessure et garantir une utilisation sûre du copieur. Séquence des actions 1 Le chiffre 1 ainsi formaté indique la première étape d'une séquence d'actions. 2 Les nombres suivants ainsi formatés indiquent les étapes successives d'une série d'actions. ? Le texte formaté dans ce style offre une assistance supplémentaire. % Le texte ainsi formaté décrit l'action permettant d'obtenir le résultat escompté. Toute illustration placée ici indique les opérations qui doivent être effectuées. 1 Introduction 1-24 bizhub 162/210 Conseils 2 Remarque Le texte ainsi mis en valeur contient des informations utiles et des conseils pour utiliser votre copieur en toute sécurité. 2 Rappel Le texte ainsi mis en valeur contient des informations à ne pas oublier. ! Détails Le texte ainsi mis en valeur contient des renvois à des informations plus détaillées. Marquages de texte spéciaux Touche [Copie] Les noms des touches du panneau de contrôle apparaissent dans le format indiqué ci-dessus. REGLAGE MACHINE Les textes de l'écran d'affichage sont rédigés comme illustré ci-dessus. Introduction 1 bizhub 162/210 1-25 1.7 Explication des concepts de base et symboles On trouvera ci-dessous la signification des mots et symboles utilisés dans le présent manuel. Alimentation papier En impression, l'alimentation papier se fait du côté droit de l'appareil et le papier sort dans le plateau de sortie du haut ou dans l'option de sortie à gauche, face imprimée vers le bas. Le sens d'introduction du papier est illustré par les flèches dans le schéma ci-dessous. 1 Introduction 1-26 bizhub 162/210 Largeur et longueur A chaque fois que des formats de papier sont mentionnés dans ce manuel, la première valeur représente toujours la largeur du papier et la seconde la longueur. A : Largeur B : Longueur Sens longitudinal et sens transversal Si la largeur (A) du papier est plus longue que la longueur (B), le papier est orienté Paysage, indiqué par w. Si la largeur (A) du papier est plus courte que la longueur (B), le papier est orienté Portrait, indiqué par v. 2 Précautions Précautions 2 bizhub 162/210 2-3 2 Précautions Veuillez prendre les précautions suivantes afin de conserver l'appareil dans les meilleures conditions possibles. 2.1 Précautions d'installation Site d'installation Afin d'assurer une sécurité optimale ainsi que les meilleures performances de votre appareil, il est recommandé de l'installer dans un endroit qui répond aux conditions suivantes : - loin de rideaux ou de matières facilement inflammables. - à l'abri de l'eau et d'autres liquides. - à l'abri du soleil. - à l'abri de la ventilation d'une climatisation ou de la bouche d'un chauffage, et non exposé à des températures très basses ou très élevées. - dans un lieu bien ventilé. - dans un lieu ne présentant pas un taux d'humidité élevé. - à l’abri de la poussière. - sur un support qui ne soit pas sujet à des vibrations. - sur un support stable et horizontal. - dans un lieu où il n'y a pas génération d'ammoniac ou d'un autre gaz organique. - dans un endroit qui n'expose pas directement l'opérateur aux effluents émanant de l'appareil. - dans un lieu éloigné de tout appareil de chauffage. Alimentation L'alimentation requise est la suivante : - Variations de tension : 220-240 V CA ±10% - Fluctuation maximale en fréquence : ±3 Hz Utilisez une source d'alimentation présentant un minimum de fluctuation en tension ou en fréquence. Espace requis Afin de faciliter le réapprovisionnement des consommables et l’intervention du Service Après-Vente, il est souhaitable de respecter les distances minimales indiquées ci-dessous. 2 Précautions 2-4 bizhub 162/210 2 Remarque En raison de la présence d'une bouche d'aération sur le côté gauche de la machine, veillez à ménager un espace de *100 mm ou plus sur ce côté. Ménagez aussi un dégagement de **400 mm ou plus sur le côté droit de la machine de manière à permettre l'ouverture de la porte latérale. Unité : mm 1069 1100 1099 599 **400 1475 375 356 *100 L'introducteur/retourneur automatique de documents DF-605 est installé. Précautions 2 bizhub 162/210 2-5 2.2 Précautions d'utilisation Environnement L'environnement requis pour l'appareil est le suivant : - Température : 10 °C à 30 °C (50 °F à 86 °F) avec des variations qui ne dépasseront pas 10 °C (18 °F) en une heure. - Humidité : 15% à 85% avec une fluctuation de 10% au maximum par heure Utilisation correcte Pour assurer les performances optimales de l'appareil, suivre les précautions ci-dessous : - Ne posez jamais d'objets lourds sur la vitre d'exposition et préservez la des coups. - N'ouvrez jamais les portes de la machine pendant qu'elle copie ou imprime, un serrage papier pourrait en résulter. - N’approchez pas d'objets magnétiques, et n’utilisez jamais d'aérosols ou de liquides inflammables près de l'appareil. - Assurez-vous que la fiche secteur est en permanence branchée correctementà la prise de courant. - Assurez-vous que la fiche secteur de l'appareil est toujours visible. - Débranchez toujours l'appareil de la prise de courant lors de longues périodes d'inutilisation. - Maintenez toujours une bonne ventilation lorsque vous effectuez un grand nombre de copies. 7 AVERTISSEMENT Si la bouche d'aération sur le côté gauche de la machine est obstruée, la chaleur s'accumule à l'intérieur de la machine, ce qui peut provoquer une panne ou un incendie. % Veillez à ménager un espace de 100 mm ou plus sur le côté gauche de la machine pour la bouche d'aération. 2 Précautions 2-6 bizhub 162/210 7 AVERTISSEMENT Le tour de l'unité de fixation est extrêmement chaud. % Afin de réduire le risque de brûlure, ne touchez jamais d'autres zones que celles indiquées dans ce manuel. Faites particulièrement attention à ne pas toucher les pièces signalées par une étiquette d'avertissement, ainsi que les zones à proximité. % En cas de brûlure, rincez la peau à l'eau froide puis consultez un médecin. Transport de l'appareil Si vous devez transporter l'appareil sur une longue distance, consultez au préalable votre S.A.V. Conservation des consommables Lors de la manipulation des consommables (toner, papier, etc.), respectez les consignes suivantes : - Stockez les consommables dans un endroit qui répond aux conditions suivantes : – A l'abri des rayons directs du soleil – Eloigné de tout appareil de chauffage – A l'abri de l'humidité excessive – A l'abri d'un environnement poussiéreux - Conservez dans un sac en plastique le papier déballé mais non chargé dans le magasin et placez-le dans un endroit frais et à l'abri de la lumière. - Utilisez exclusivement du toner spécialement fabriqué pour cet appareil. N’utilisez jamais d'autres types de toner. - Gardez tous les consommables hors de portée des enfants. 7 AVERTISSEMENT Veillez à ne pas renverser de toner dans l'appareil, sur les vêtements ou sur les mains. % Si les mains sont en contact avec le toner, lavez les immédiatement à l'eau et au savon. % En cas de projection de toner dans les yeux, rincez les immédiatement à l'eau puis consulter un médecin. Stockage de copies Si vous devez conserver les copies pendant une longue période, stockez les à l’abri de la lumière pour éviter qu'elles ne se décolorent. Précautions 2 bizhub 162/210 2-7 Les adhésifs qui contiennent certains solvants (par exemple les colles en aérosols) peuvent dissoudre le toner fixé sur les copies. 2 Précautions 2-8 bizhub 162/210 2.3 Réglementation en matière de copie Certains types de documents ne doivent jamais être copiés avec l'intention de faire passer les copies pour l'original. La liste suivante n'est pas exhaustive mais elle doit servir de guide pour un comportement responsable en matière de copie. Instruments financiers - Chèques personnels - Chèques de voyage - Mandats - Certificats de dépôt - Obligations ou autres titres de dettes - Titres de valeur Documents officiels - Coupons alimentaires - Timbres poste (oblitérés ou non) - Chèques ou traites tirés par des agences gouvernementales - Timbres fiscaux (oblitérés ou non) - Passeports - Papiers d'immigration - Permis de conduire et carte grise - Actes et titres de propriété Divers - Cartes d'identification, badges ou insignes - Les oeuvres protégées sans l'autorisation du propriétaire des droits Par ailleurs, il est rigoureusement interdit de copier des billets de monnaie nationale ou étrangère ou des oeuvres d'art sans la permission du propriétaire des droits. Si vous avez des doutes sur la nature des documents, consultez un conseiller juridique. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-3 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3.1 Les composants et leurs fonctions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 9 8 No. Nom de la pièce Description 1 Couvre-original OC-504 Permet de maintenir en place le document chargé. Egalement désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “couvre-original”. De série sur le bizhub 162 En option sur le bizhub 210 2 Introducteur automatique de document DF-502 (en option) Introduit automatiquement une feuille de document à la fois pour la numériser. Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “introducteur de documents”. 3 Introducteur/retourneur automatique de documents DF-605 (en option seulement pour le bizhub 210) Introduit automatiquement une feuille de document à la fois pour la numérisation du recto, puis retourne automatiquement la feuille du document pour la numérisation du verso. Désigné dans le manuel sous le terme “introducteur/retourneur automatique de documents”. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-4 bizhub 162/210 * Les options internes ne sont pas représentées. 4 Unité automatique recto-verso AD-504 (en option pour le bizhub 210 seulement) Retourne automatiquement les pages afin qu'elles puissent être imprimées sur les deux faces. Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “unité recto-verso”. 5 Multi-introducteur manuel MB-501 (en option) Peut recevoir 100 feuilles de papier. Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “multi-introducteur manuel”. 6 Unité d'alimentation papier PF-502 (en option) Equipé d'un bac d'alimentation papier qui contient jusqu'à 250 feuilles de papier. Vous pouvez en installer jusqu'à quatre sur l'unité principale. Désigné dans le manuel sous le terme “2ème magasin”, “3ème magasin”, “4ème magasin” et “5ème magasin”. 7 Meuble DK-703 (en option) La machine peut être placée sur le meuble. L'utilisation du meuble permet d'installer la machine sur le sol. 8 Meuble DK-702 (en option) La machine peut être placée sur le meuble. L'utilisation du meuble permet d'installer la machine sur le sol. 9 Meuble DK-701 (en option) La machine peut être placée sur le meuble. L'utilisation du meuble permet d'installer la machine sur le sol. 10 Séparateur travaux JS-503 (en option) Permet de séparer les pages imprimées. Désigné dans ce manuel sous le terme “séparateur travaux”. 11 Magasin de décalage SF-501* (en option) Permet de décaler les copies et les pages imprimées qui sont éjectées. Si le séparateur travaux est installé, l'unité de décalage ne pourra pas être adjointe. 12 Contrôleur image IC-205* (en option) Contrôleur d'imprimante interne permettant à la machine d'être utilisée comme imprimante d'ordinateur (PCL) Pour plus de détails, voir le manuel utilisateur du contrôleur image IC-205. 13 Carte interface réseau NC-502* (en option) Carte réseau interne autorisant l'impression réseau à partir de Windows ou d'un environnement réseau NetWare Pour plus de détails, voir le manuel de l'utilisateur de la carte interface réseau NC-502. 14 Unité scanner SU-502* (en option) Unité de scanner interne permettant à la machine d'être utilisée comme un scanner configuré au sein d'un réseau informatique Pour plus de détails, voir le manuel utilisateur de l'unité scanner SU-502. 2 Remarque L'unité scanner ne fonctionne pas si le kit Fax FK-505 en option n'est pas installé. 15 Kit Fax FK-505* (en option) Permet à cette machine de fonctionner comme un télécopieur 16 Unité d'extension de mémoire EM-101* (en option) Extension 32 Mo de mémoire augmentant le nombre de pages qui peuvent être traitées par la machine. Désigné dans le manuel sous le terme “extension de mémoire”. 17 Unité d'extension de mémoire EM-102* (en option) Extension 64 Mo de mémoire augmentant le nombre de pages qui peuvent être traitées par la machine. Désigné dans le manuel sous le terme “extension de mémoire”. No. Nom de la pièce Description Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-5 3.2 Nomenclature et fonctions Unité principale 1 2 3 6 4 5 13 14 15 12 9 10 11 8 7 No. Nom de la pièce Description 1 Plateau de sortie des copies Réceptionne les copies et les documents imprimés partie imprimée vers le bas. 2 Porte frontale Ouvez-la pour remplacer la cartouche de toner. (p. 8-4) 3 1er magasin • Contient jusqu'à 250 feuilles de papier. • Il est possible de régler librement le format du papier. • Peut aussi recevoir du papier dédié. (p. 7-13) 4 Introducteur manuel • Sert à l'alimentation manuelle du papier. • L'introduction du papier se fait une feuille à la fois. • Peut aussi recevoir du papier dédié. (p. 3-27) 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-6 bizhub 162/210 5 Levier de déverrouillage Sert à ouvrir et fermer la porte latérale. 6 Porte latérale Ouvrez-la pour dégager un serrage papier. 7 Compteur mécanique (en option) Indique le nombre de copie et de pages d'impression imprimées. 8 Interrupteur Marche/Arrêt Permet d'allumer ou d'éteindre l'appareil. (p. 3-17) 9 Connecteur d'interface parallèle Permet de raccorder le câble parallèle d'un ordinateur. 10 Connecteur RJ45 pour mise en réseau Permet de raccorder le câble réseau lorsque cette machine est utilisée pour le fax Internet, l'impression réseau et la numérisation réseau. 11 Connecteur USB imprimante Permet de raccorder le câble USB d'un ordinateur. 12 Réglette document Utilisée pour aligner le document. (p. 4-12) 13 Couvre-original (en option) Appuie sur le document placé sur la vitre d'exposition. 14 Vitre d'exposition En chargement manuel du document, placez le document sur la vitre d'exposition de manière à ce qu'il puisse être numérisé. Placez le document, face imprimée vers le bas, sur la vitre d’exposition. (p. 4-12) 15 Panneau de contrôle Permet de démarrer la copie ou de spécifier diverses sélections. (p. 3-12) No. Nom de la pièce Description Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-7 Intérieur de l'unité principale 2 1 3 No. Nom de la pièce Description 1 Unité image Crée l'image pour la copie. Le remplacement de l'unité image doit être réalisé par un technicien agréé. 2 Support de la bouteille de toner Ouvrez-le pour remplacer la cartouche de toner. 3 Levier d'appui Permet de dégager les serrages papier dans l'unité de fixation. (p. 8-6) 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-8 bizhub 162/210 Introducteur de documents (en option) 1 2 3 4 No. Nom de la pièce Description 1 Plateau de sortie documents Récupère les documents numérisés. 2 Guide latéraux des originaux S'ajuste à la largeur du document. (p. 4-10) 3 Capot de l'introducteur de documents Ouvrez-le pour dégager un serrage papier. (p. 8-13) 4 Plateau d'introduction documents Permet de maintenir les documents à numériser ; chargez les documents recto vers le haut. (p. 4-10) Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-9 Multi-introducteur manuel (en option) 1 2 No. Nom de la pièce Description 1 Plateau d'introduction manuelle Accepte un chargement de 100 feuilles de papier ordinaire, 20 feuilles de papier dédié, ou 10 enveloppes. (p. 3-29) 2 Extension introducteur manuel Tirez lorsque vous chargez du papier de grand format. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-10 bizhub 162/210 Unité d'alimentation de papier (en option) 1 2 3 4 5 No. Nom de la pièce Description 1 2ème magasin Contient jusqu'à 250 feuilles de papier ordinaire. Vous pouvez installer jusqu'à quatre unités d'alimentation papier. 2 3ème magasin 3 4ème magasin 4 5ème magasin 5 Porte latérale Ouvrez la pour dégager un serrage papier. (p. 8-10) Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-11 Séparateur travaux (en option) Avec le séparateur travaux installé 1 2 3 No. Nom de la pièce Description 1 Voyant du plateau de copie S'allume quand le papier reste dans le plateau de sortie des copies et que le plateau de sortie supérieur est déplacé vers le haut. 2 Plateau de sortie des copies supérieur Recueille les pages imprimées commandées par l'ordinateur. 3 Plateau de sortie des copies inférieur Recueille les copies. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-12 bizhub 162/210 3.3 Panneau de contrôle Noms des touches du panneau de contrôle et leurs fonctions 4 5 6 7 18 14 13 12 10 8 15 1716 1 2 3 19 20 11 9 No. Nom de la pièce Fonction 1 Voyant “Erreur” S'allume ou clignote en cas d'erreur. Voir “Messages d'erreur” à la page 8-3. 2 Touche/voyant [Imprimante] S'allume lorsque les données sont imprimées à partir de l'ordinateur et clignote quand les données sont en cours d'émission. Pour plus de détails, voir le Manuel d'utilisation du contrôleur d’imprimante. 3 Touche [Etat] Permet de visualiser les compteurs. 4 Touche [Utilitaires] Permet de passer en mode Utilitaires et d'en afficher le premier écran. • PARAMETRES MACHINE, REGL. SOURCE PAPI., GESTION UTILISAT., GESTION ADMINIST., PARAM. COPIE 1 & 2 5 Afficheur Permet d'afficher les menus de réglage, les messages d'erreur, ainsi que les paramètres spécifiés comme le nombre de copies et le taux zoom. 6 Touche [Non / C] Efface les caractères saisis. Permet de revenir à l'écran précédent. 7 Touche [Oui] Confirme le réglage actuel. 8 Touche [Papier Auto/Taux Auto] Permet de sélectionner la fonction Papier Auto ou la fonction Taux Auto. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-13 9 Touche [Zoom] , et touches + • Servent à sélectionner un taux prédéfini d'agrandissement ou de réduction. • Permet de sélectionner un taux zoom compris entre × 0,25 et × 4,00 en cas de sélection manuelle du format papier. (Sélection papier manuelle) • Permet de sélectionner un taux zoom compris entre × 0,50 et × 2,00 en cas de sélection automatique du format papier. (Papier Auto) • Permettent aussi de spécifier la sélection supérieure ou la sélection inférieure dans les écrans de réglage et les menus. 10 Touche [Papier] Permet de sélectionner le format du papier à imprimer. 11 Touche [Auto/Photo] * et touches ) • Permet de spécifier la densité de numérisation pour les copies. • Permettent aussi de spécifier la sélection à gauche ou la sélection à droite dans les écrans de réglage. 12 Touche [Effacement] Permet de sélectionner la zone de document à effacer. 13 Touche [Marge] Appuyez pour choisir le mode Marge. 14 Touche [Finition] Permet de sélectionner une fonction Finition pour les copies. 15 Touche [Zoom X/Y] Permet de spécifier différentes échelles sur l'axe vertical et l'axe horizontal. 16 Touche [Neg. Pos.] Permet d'effectuer des copies en dont les zones foncées et les zones claires sont inversées par rapport au document. 17 Touche Copie Permet de choisir entre les fonctions copie 2en1 et 4en1. 18 Touche [Programme Copie] • Permet d'enregistrer des programmes copie. • Ces programmes copie peuvent ensuite être sélectionnés et rappelés. 19 Touche [Séparation Livre] Permet de sélectionner la fonction Séparation Livre. 20 Touche [Original] Permet de choisir la fonction Orig. Recto/Verso et la fonction Orig. Mixtes. No. Nom de la pièce Fonction 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-14 bizhub 162/210 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 31 30 29 28 No. Nom de la pièce Fonction 21 Touche Numérisation Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Numérisation. Le voyant s'allume en vert pour indiquer que la machine est en mode Numérisation. (Disponible seulement lorsque la carte interface réseau NC-502, le kit Fax FK-505 et l'unité scanner SU-502 sont installés.) 22 Touche Fax Inutilisée sur cette machine. 23 Touche Copie Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Copie. Le voyant s'allume en vert pour indiquer que la machine est en mode Copie. 24 Touche Code S'utilise en Gestion Utilisateur. (p. 6-25) 25 Touche Economie d'énergie Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Economie d'énergie. (p. 3-19) 26 Touche Interruption Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Interruption. Le voyant s'allume en vert pour indiquer que la machine est en mode Interruption. Appuyez une nouvelle fois pour annuler le mode Interruption et revenir au mode précédent l'activation du mode Interruption. (p. 3-56) 27 Touche [123/ABC] Inutilisée sur cette machine. 28 Touche Initialisation • Annule toutes les fonctions de copie et en restaure les sélections par défaut. • Supprime toutes les tâches en file d'attente. 29 Touche Stop Arrête l'opération de copie multi-pages. 30 Touche Copie • Démarre l'opération de copie. • Si cette touche est activée pendant que la machine est en préchauffage, la tâche de copie sera placée en file d'attente. (p. 3-20) • Le voyant s'allume en rouge pour indiquer que la machine est prête pour l'opération de copie ou en orange pour indiquer qu'elle n'est pas encore prête. 31 Clavier numérique • Permet de spécifier le nombre de copies. • Permet aussi de saisir des valeurs de réglage. • Les touches [˜] et [#] sont inutilisées sur cette machine. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-15 Indications affichées 1 2 6 7 5 4 3 Ecran du mode Copie Ecran du mode Utilitaires No. Indication à l'écran Description 1 Densité copie (type de document) Indique le type de document pour le réglage de la densité copie. PHOTO, TEXTE, ou TEXTE/P 2 Densité copie (niveau de densité) Indique le niveau de densité pour le réglage de densité copie. 3 Source papier Indique le magasin papier sélectionné. Si on sélectionne papier dédié, le type de papier s'affiche. AUTO, ainsi que le magasin papier et le format papier, ou le type papier. 4 Nombre de copies Indique le nombre de copies qui a été spécifié. 5 Taux zoom Indique le taux zoom actuel. Affiche AUTO ou le réglage actuel du taux zoom. × [X/Y] indique que la fonction Zoom X/Y est sélectionnée. 6 Menu ou nom de fonction • Affiche le menu, la fonction ou les sélections en vigueur. • Affiche les messages lorsqu'une erreur se produit. 7 Messages Affiche les messages relatifs à l'utilisation. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-16 bizhub 162/210 Ajustement angulaire de l'écran L'afficheur peut être réglé selon trois angles d'inclinaison. Réglez l'afficheur à l'inclinaison qui convient le mieux à l'utilisation. % Appuyez sur un bord de l'écran pour en ajuster l'inclinaison. Position haute Position intermédiaire Position inférieure Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-17 3.4 Alimentation électrique Allumer la machine Placez l'interrupteur principal en position “n”. Le voyant de la touche [Copie] s'allume en orange et le message ATTENDRE SVP! s'affiche à l'écran. 2 Remarque Le bizhub 162 a fini de chauffer au bout de 30 secondes et le bizhub 210 a fini de chauffer au bout de 15 secondes (à température ambiante normale (23 °C)). Une tâche de copie peut être placée en file d'attente pendant que la machine est en cours de chauffe. Eteindre la machine 1 Vérifiez que toutes les tâches sont terminées. 2 Placez l'interrupteur principal en position “o”. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-18 bizhub 162/210 3.5 Sélections par défaut Les paramètres qui sont automatiquement sélectionnés à l'extinction de la machine ou lorsque la touche [Initialisation] est activée, s'appellent les “sélections par défaut”. Elles servent de référence à toutes les fonctions. Mode Copie - Nombre de copies : 1 - Densité copie : AUTO - Taux zoom : taille réelle (× 1,00) - Source papier : AUTO (avec l'introducteur de documents installé) - Fonction finition : Non-Tri Vous pouvez personnaliser les sélections par défaut à partir du mode Utilitaires. ! Détails Pour plus de détails, voir “Paramètres copie” à la page 7-30. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-19 3.6 Fonctions pratiques Initialisation automatique Même si l'on n'appuie pas sur la touche [Initialisation], la machine ramènera automatiquement toutes les fonctions et sélections à leurs valeurs par défaut 1 minute après la fin d'un cycle de copie ou après la dernière activation d'une touche quelconque. Le délai avant que l'appareil s'initialise automatiquement peut être réglé sur 30 secondes ou de 1 à 5 minutes. La fonction d'initialisation automatique peut même être désactivée. ! Détails Pour plus de détails, voir “Spécifier REIN. T de BORD” à la page 7-6. Mode Economie d'énergie Vous pouvez, au lieu de mettre l'appareil hors tension, le mettre en attente (Mode Economie d'énergie). Si la machine n'est pas utilisée pendant une période de temps définie, le mode Économie d'énergie est activé automatiquement. La période d'inutilisation par défaut est de 15 minutes. Appuyez sur l'une des touches du panneau de contrôle pour annuler le mode Economie d'énergie. Le délai avant que la machine ne passe en mode Economie d'énergie peut être réglé de 1 à 240 minutes. Quand la machine est en mode Economie d'énergie, le voyant de la touche [Copie] reste allumé en vert, mais l'écran s'éteint. 2 Remarque Si la fonction Auto coupure est activée pendant le mode Economie d'énergie, la machine s'éteint. ! Détails Pour plus de détails, voir “Spécifier le MODE ECO. ENERG.” à la page 7-7. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-20 bizhub 162/210 Auto coupure Avec la fonction Auto coupure, la machine s'éteint automatiquement si aucune opération n'est effectuée pendant un délai spécifié, ceci afin d'économiser l'énergie. Le réglage par défaut est OFF. Tâches copie en file d'attente Vous pouvez placer des tâches de copie en file d'attente en chargeant et en appuyant sur la touche [Copie] pendant que CHAUFFE apparaît dans le coin inférieur droit de l'afficheur. Quand le message CHAUFFE disparaît, la numérisation du document commence et les copies sont réalisées. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-21 3.7 Papier Utilisez un papier conforme aux caractéristiques suivantes. Types de papier o : Disponible — : Non disponible 2 Remarque Les magasins papier 2, 3, 4 et 5 ainsi que le multi-introducteur manuel sont en option. Si l'on effectue des copies recto-verso sur l'unité recto-verso en option, on ne peut utiliser que du papier ordinaire ou recyclé. Type de papier Papier ordinaire Support dédié Papier recyclé Poids (g/m2) Source papier, etc. 60 à 90 g/m2 91 à 157 g/m2 60 à 90 g/m2 Introducteur manuel o o o Multi-introducteur manuel o o o 1er magasin papier o o o 2ème magasin papier o — o 3ème magasin papier o — o 4ème magasin papier o — o 5ème magasin papier o — o Copie recto-verso o — o Type de papier Support dédié Transparents de rétroprojection Cartes postales Feuilles d'étiquettes Enveloppes Source papier, etc. Introducteur manuel o o o o Multi-introducteur manuel o o o o 1er magasin papier o o o o 2ème magasin papier — — — — 3ème magasin papier — — — — 4ème magasin papier — — — — 5ème magasin papier — — — — Copie recto-verso — — — — 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-22 bizhub 162/210 Formats papier Papier de format non-standard Papier de format standard o : Disponible — : Non disponible 2 Remarque Les magasins papier 2, 3, 4 et 5 ainsi que le multi-introducteur manuel sont en option. Si l'on effectue des copies recto-verso sur l'unité recto-verso en option, on ne peut utiliser que du papier ordinaire ou recyclé. Source papier Largeur papier Longueur papier Introducteur manuel 90 mm à 297 mm 140 mm à 432 mm Multi-introducteur manuel 90 mm à 297 mm 140 mm à 432 mm 1er magasin papier 90 mm à 297 mm 140 mm à 432 mm 2ème magasin papier 182 mm à 297 mm 140 mm à 432 mm 3ème magasin papier 182 mm à 297 mm 140 mm à 432 mm 4ème magasin papier 182 mm à 297 mm 140 mm à 432 mm 5ème magasin papier 182 mm à 297 mm 140 mm à 432 mm Format du papier A3 w B4 w A4 w A4 v B5 w B5 v A5 w A5 v Source papier, etc. Introducteur manuel o o o o o o o o Multi-introducteur manuel o o o o o o o o 1er magasin papier o o o o o o o o 2ème magasin papier o o o o o o — o 3ème magasin papier o o o o o o — o 4ème magasin papier o o o o o o — o 5ème magasin papier o o o o o o — o Copie recto-verso o o o o o o — o Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-23 Capacité de papier — : Non disponible 2 Remarque Les magasins papier 2, 3, 4 et 5 ainsi que le multi-introducteur manuel sont en option. Si l'on effectue des copies recto-verso sur l'unité recto-verso en option, on ne peut utiliser que du papier ordinaire ou recyclé. Type de papier Papier ordinaire Support dédié Papier recyclé Poids (g/m2) Source papier, etc. 60 à 90 g/m2 91 à 157 g/m2 60 à 90 g/m2 Introducteur manuel 1 feuille 1 feuille 1 feuille Multi-introducteur manuel 100 feuilles 20 feuilles 100 feuilles 1er magasin papier 250 feuilles 20 feuilles 250 feuilles 2ème magasin papier 250 feuilles — 250 feuilles 3ème magasin papier 250 feuilles — 250 feuilles 4ème magasin papier 250 feuilles — 250 feuilles 5ème magasin papier 250 feuilles — 250 feuilles Type de papier Support dédié Source papier, etc. Transparents de rétroprojection Cartes postales Feuilles d'étiquettes Enveloppes Introducteur manuel 1 feuille 1 carte postale 1 feuille 1 enveloppe Multi-introducteur manuel 20 feuilles 20 cartes postales 20 feuilles 10 envel. 1er magasin papier 20 feuilles 20 cartes postales 20 feuilles 10 envel. 2ème magasin papier — — — — 3ème magasin papier — — — — 4ème magasin papier — — — — 5ème magasin papier — — — — 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-24 bizhub 162/210 Papier à ne pas utiliser Les types de papier suivants ne doivent pas être utilisés. Ils pourraient altérer la qualité d'impression, entraîner des serrages papier ou une détérioration de la machine. - Transparents de rétroprojection ayant déjà été introduits dans la machine Même si le transparent est toujours vierge, ne le réutilisez pas. - Papier imprimé sur imprimante thermique ou à jet d'encre - Papier extrêmement épais ou extrêmement fin - Papier plié, gondolé, froissé ou déchiré - Papier qui est resté hors de son emballage pendant longtemps. - Papier humide - Papier perforé - Papier extrêmement lisse, extrêmement rugueux, ou inégal - Papier traité, comme du papier carbone, papier thermosensible ou manosensible - Papier torsadé ou gaufré - Papier hors norme (non rectangulaire) - Papier qui comporte de la colle, des agrafes ou des trombones - Papier étiqueté - Papier accolé de rubans, crochets, boutons, etc. - Papier gondolé ou froissé - Papier dessin, papier couché ou papier pour imprimante jet d'encre Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-25 3.8 Zone d'impression Toute partie de l'image qui se trouve dans la zone indiquée ci-dessous ne peut être copiée. - Marge de 4 mm (en taille réelle) à partir de la queue du papier (A) - Marge de 4 mm (en taille réelle) à partir de la tête du papier (B) - Marge de 4 mm (en taille réelle) sur les deux bords du papier (C) Pour plus de détails sur l'impression à partir d'un ordinateur, veuillez consulter le manuel utilisateur du Contrôleur d'imprimante. Si le contrôleur image IC-205 en option est installé, consultez le manuel utilisateur du Contrôleur image IC-205. B A C C A : 4 mm (à taille réelle) B : 4 mm (à taille réelle) C : 4 mm (à taille réelle) Sens de sortie du papier 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-26 bizhub 162/210 3.9 Stockage du papier Respectez les précautions suivantes pour le stockage du papier. - Stockez le papier dans un endroit qui répond aux conditions suivantes : – A l'abri de la lumière directe du soleil – A l'abri des flammes – A l'abri de l'humidité excessive – A l'abri de la poussière - Le papier sorti de son emballage doit être placé dans un sac en plastique et entreposé dans un endroit frais et obscur. - Gardez le papier hors de la portée des enfants. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-27 3.10 Copier avec introduction manuelle du papier Vous pouvez introduire le papier à la main si vous souhaitez faire des copies sur du papier qui n'est chargé dans aucun magasin, ou sur du papier dédié, comme les transparents, les cartes ou les cartes postales. Papiers acceptés en introduction manuelle Types de papier : - Papier ordinaire ou recyclé (épaisseur : 60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) - Papier dédié – Cartes (épaisseur : 91 g/m2 à 157 g/m2) – Transparents pour rétroprojecteur – Cartes postales – Feuilles d'étiquettes – Enveloppes Formats papier : - Maximum : 297 mm × 432 mm - Minimum : 90 mm × 140 mm 2 Remarque Avec l'introducteur manuel, on ne peut introduire qu'une page à la fois. Pour plus de détails, voir “Capacité de papier” à la page 3-23. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-28 bizhub 162/210 Réglage du multi-introducteur manuel Réglez l'extension du plateau d'introduction selon le format du papier, comme illustré ci-dessous. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-29 Chargement de papier ordinaire dans le plateau d'introduction Glissez les feuilles de papier une à une dans l'introducteur manuel. Vous pouvez insérer jusqu'à 100 feuilles dans le multi-introducteur manuel. Le papier ne doit pas être chargé dans le multi-introducteur manuel au-delà du repère de , hauteur. 1 Chargez le papier dans le plateau d'introduction. ? Avez-vous pris les précautions nécessaires pour charger le papier ? % Chargez le papier recto vers le bas. % Vérifiez que le papier n'est pas gondolé. 2 Réglez l'extension du plateau d'introduction ainsi que les guides papier selon le format du papier. 2 Remarque Si l'on utilise du papier autre que du papier ordinaire, il faut alors en spécifier le type. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-30 bizhub 162/210 Chargement de cartes postales dans le plateau d'introduction Glissez les feuilles de papier une à une dans l'introducteur manuel. Vous pouvez insérer jusqu'à 20 feuilles dans le multi-introducteur manuel. % Lors du chargement de cartes postales, chargez-les dans le sens w (sens longitudinal), comme indiqué sur l'illustration et face à imprimer orientée vers le bas. 2 Remarque Ne pas charger de cartes postales dans le sens v (sens transversal). Après avoir chargé les cartes postales, spécifiez sur le panneau de contrôle le format et le type du papier destiné à l'introducteur manuel. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-31 Chargement d'enveloppes dans le plateau d'introduction Glissez les feuilles de papier une à une dans l'introducteur manuel. Vous pouvez insérer jusqu'à 10 feuilles dans le multi-introducteur manuel. % Chargez les enveloppes, rabat orienté vers le haut, comme représenté sur l'illustration. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-32 bizhub 162/210 2 Remarque Avant de charger des enveloppes, appuyez fermement sur le paquet afin d'en expulser l'air qu'il contient, et veillez à bien aplatir les rabats, car dans le cas contraire les enveloppes pourraient se froisser ou entraîner un serrage papier. Après avoir chargé les enveloppes, spécifiez sur le panneau de contrôle le format et le type du papier destiné à l'introducteur manuel. 2 Remarque Ne chargez pas les enveloppes dans le sens v (sens transversal). Ne chargez pas les enveloppes avec le rabat orienté vers le bas. Ne chargez pas les enveloppes avec le rabat orienté vers l'arrière. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-33 Chargement de transparents dans le plateau d'introduction Glissez les feuilles de papier une à une dans l'introducteur manuel. Vous pouvez insérer jusqu'à 20 feuilles dans le multi-introducteur manuel. % Chargez les transparents dans le même sens que le document. 2 Remarque Après avoir chargé les transparents, spécifiez sur le panneau de contrôle le format et le type du papier destiné à l'introducteur manuel. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-34 bizhub 162/210 Chargement de planches d'étiquettes dans le plateau d'introduction Glissez les feuilles de papier une à une dans l'introducteur manuel. Vous pouvez insérer jusqu'à 20 feuilles dans le multi-introducteur manuel. % Chargez les planches d'étiquettes dans le même sens que le document. Placez les documents la face à imprimer étant orientée vers le bas. 2 Remarque Après avoir chargé les planches d'étiquettes, spécifiez sur le panneau de contrôle le format et le type du papier destiné à l'introducteur manuel. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-35 Copie sur du papier inséré à la main via l'introducteur manuel 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Ajustez les guides papier aux dimensions du papier. 3 Insérez une feuille de papier recto vers le bas, en la poussant légèrement aussi loin que possible dans la fente d'introduction. Le symbole de l'introducteur manuel ( ) s'affiche sur la dernière ligne de l'écran. ? Une carte ou une carte postale est-elle chargée ? % Vérifiez qu'elle n'est pas gondolée. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. Le menu REGL. SOURCE PAPI. apparaît. 5 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner le type de papier chargé. Sélectionnez l'un des quatre réglages papier suivants. NORMAL OHP CARTE ENVELOPPE 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu FORMAT PAPIER apparaît. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-36 bizhub 162/210 7 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner le format de papier chargé. ? OHP a-t-il été sélectionné à l'étape 5 ? % Faites votre sélection parmi les quatre formats de papier suivants : A4 w A4 v Letter w Letter v ? Avez-vous chargé du papier de format non-standard ? % Appuyez sur la touche [,] et tapez le format papier sur le clavier numérique. Pour plus de détails, voir “Pour copier sur des planches d'étiquettes” à la page 5-9. ? Connaîssez-vous le format du papier FLS ? % Le format FLS par défaut est de 210 mm × 330 mm. Pour modifier le format FLS, veuillez prendre contact avec le service après-vente. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. L'écran principal apparaît. 9 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 10 Appuyez sur la touche [Copie]. Le cycle de copie démarredémarre. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-37 2 Remarque Pour effectuer des copies sur davantage de pages avec les mêmes réglages, introduisez le papier dans l'introducteur manuel pour commencer à réaliser automatiquement les copies. Pour effectuer des copies en continu sur des cartes, des cartes postales, des transparents ou des enveloppes, chargez-les dans le 1er magasin. Si vous spécifiez un papier autre que papier ordinaire et que vous utilisez l'introducteur manuel, l'écran change en conséquence, comme représenté ci-dessous. Cartes Transparents pour rétroprojecteur Cartes postales ou enveloppes 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-38 bizhub 162/210 Copie sur du papier inséré à la main via le multi-introducteur manuel 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Réglez l'extension du plateau d'introduction ainsi que les guides papier selon le format du papier. 3 Insérez le papier recto vers le bas, en la poussant légèrement aussi loin que possible dans la fente d'introduction. Le symbole de l'introducteur manuel ( ) s'affiche sur la dernière ligne de l'écran. ? Des planches de cartes ou de cartes postales sont-elles chargées ? % Vérifiez qu'elles ne sont pas gondolées. 4 Vérifiez que la mention OUI/NON s'affiche sur la dernière ligne de l'écran, puis appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. OUI/NON s'affiche pendant environ 5 secondes une fois que le papier a été chargé dans le multi-introducteur manuel. Le menu REGL. SOURCE PAPI. apparaît. 5 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner le type de papier chargé. Sélectionnez l'un des quatre réglages papier suivants. NORMAL OHP CARTE ENVELOPPE 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu FORMAT PAPIER apparaît. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-39 7 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner le format de papier chargé. ? OHP a-t-il été sélectionné à l'étape 5 ? % Faites votre sélection parmi les quatre formats de papier suivants : A4 w A4 v Letter w Letter v ? Avez-vous chargé du papier de format non-standard ? % Appuyez sur la touche [,] et tapez le format papier sur le clavier numérique. Pour plus de détails, voir “Copies sur divers types de supports” à la page 5-7. ? Connaîssez-vous le format du papier FLS ? % Le format FLS par défaut est de 210 mm × 330 mm. Pour modifier le format FLS, veuillez prendre contact avec le service après-vente. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. L'écran principal apparaît. 9 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 10 Appuyez sur la touche [Copie]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-40 bizhub 162/210 2 Remarque Si vous spécifiez un papier autre que papier ordinaire et que vous utilisez le multi-introducteur manuel, l'écran change en conséquence, comme représenté ci-dessous. Cartes Transparents pour rétroprojecteur Cartes postales ou enveloppes Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-41 3.11 Sélection de la source papier Il y a deux méthodes pour sélectionner le papier copie. - Papier Auto : Si la fonction Papier Auto est sélectionnée, le magasin contenant le papier au format le plus approprié sera sélectionné en fonction du format de l'original et du taux zoom spécifié. - Sélection manuelle du papier : Permet de choisir le papier copie que vous désirez. Réaliser des copies avec la fonction Papier Auto 1 Chargez le document dans l'introducteur de documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Papier Auto / Taux Auto] jusqu'à ce que la fonction Papier Auto soit sélectionnée. AUTO apparaît sur la dernière ligne de l'écran. 3 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Copie]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 2 Remarque Si APS ERR FORMAT s'affiche immédiatement après que la touche [Copie] a été enfoncée, cela indique qu'aucun magasin ne contient de papier au format le plus approprié. Chargez du papier de format approprié, ou appuyez sur la touche [Papier] et sélectionnez le format désiré, puis appuyez une nouvelle fois sur la touche [Copie]. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-42 bizhub 162/210 Réaliser une copie avec sélection manuelle du format papier 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Papier], puis sélectionnez le format papier désiré. Le format de papier sélectionné s'affiche sur la dernière ligne de l'écran. 3 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. Chargement du papier dédié dans le 1er magasin Si du papier spécial (transparents, cartes postales ou cartes) est chargé dans le 1er magasin, réglez d'abord la fonction du 1er magasin dans le menu de réglage de la source de papier. Pour plus de détails, voir “Spécifier PAPIER MAGASIN 1” à la page 7-15. L'écran change selon le type papier défini pour la fonction papier magasin 1, comme illustré ci-dessous. Cartes Transparents pour rétroprojecteur Cartes postales ou enveloppes Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-43 Sélection automatique de la source papier Avec la fonction de basculement automatique de magasin, l'impression peut continuer à partir d'un magasin papier différent si le papier venait à manquer dans le magasin actuellement sélectionné. Elle ne peut être activée que si le magasin papier actuel ainsi qu'un autre magasin papier remplissent les conditions suivantes. - Le papier est du même format. - Le papier est du même type. - Le papier est positionné selon la même orientation. - La fonction type de papier est réglée sur ORDINAIRE, RECYCLE ou RECTO SEUL pour les deux magasins papier. 2 Remarque Si du papier est chargé dans l'introducteur manuel, la fonction de basculement automatique de magasin ne peut être activée. Si le multi-introducteur manuel et le 5ème magasin papier sont installés, vous pouvez imprimer un maximum de 1500 copies sans vous arrêter. Pour réaliser un grand nombre de copies en continu, chargez tous les magasins (à l'exception de l'introducteur manuel) avec du papier qui remplit toutes les conditions ci-dessus. Si aucun magasin ne contient de papier, un message s'affiche pour indiquer que la machine doit être réapprovisionnée en papier. Les opérations de copie peuvent ne pas se poursuivre si du papier est chargé dans d'autres magasins papier que celui indiqué dans le message. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-44 bizhub 162/210 Ordre de basculement automatique des magasins papier Lorsqu'un magasin différent est sélectionné automatiquement, c'est le magasin suivant dans la liste ci-après qui est choisi en priorité. 1er magasin papier % 2ème magasin papier % 3ème magasin papier % 4ème magasin papier % 5ème magasin papier % Multi-introducteur manuel 2 Remarque Si des supports dédiés, des transparents ou des planches d'étiquettes par exemple, sont chargés dans le 1er magasin ou dans le multi-introducteur manuel, la fonction de basculement automatique de magasin peut entraîner une introduction incorrecte du papier. Dans ce cas, il est recommandé de modifier les réglages comme suit. Pour le premier magasin papier, changer le type de papier à l'aide de la fonction Papier Mag.1 du menu Réglage source papier. Pour plus de détails, voir “Spécifier PAPIER MAGASIN 1” à la page 7-15. Pour le multi-introducteur manuel, spécifiez le type de papier après avoir chargé le papier. Pour plus de détails, voir “Copie sur du papier inséré à la main via le multi-introducteur manuel” à la page 3-38. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-45 3.12 Documents originaux Utilisation de l'introducteur de documents L'introducteur de documents introduit, numérise et éjecte une page à la fois d'un document multi-feuilles. Pour que l'introducteur de documents puisse fonctionner correctement, il convient de charger le type correct de document. L'utilisation d'un document de type incorrect peut entraîner un serrage papier ou endommager le document ou la machine. 2 Remarque Pour copier des documents recto-verso, l'introducteur/retourneur automatique de documents DF-605 (pour le bizhub 210) doit être installé. Types de document Documents originaux rectos Documents recto-verso Document de formats mixtes 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-46 bizhub 162/210 Document de formats uniformes Formats de documents de largeurs mixtes (DF-605) o : Copie possible — : Copie impossible Méthode d’introduction document Type de document Format du document Introducteur de documents Documents en feuilles • Documents recto DF-502 Capacité : 50 g/m2 à 110 g/m2 DF-605 Capacité : 35 g/m2 à 128 g/m2 • Documents recto-verso DF-605 Capacité : 50 g/m2 à 128 g/m2 • Documents de formats différents DF-502 Capacité : 60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2 DF-605 Capacité : 50 g/m2 à 128 g/m2 DF-502 A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 w/v DF-605 A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 w/v, B6 w Largeur de document : 90 mm à 297 mm Longueur de document : 210 mm à 432 mm • Avec documents de largeurs mixtes DF-502 A3 w et A4 v B4 w et B5 v DF-605 Veuillez vous reporter au tableau ci-dessous. Vitre d'exposition Documents en feuilles, livres et objets de grandes dimensions Poids maximum : 3 kg A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 w/v Largeur de document : jusqu'à 297 mm Longueur de document : jusqu'à 432 mm Largeur maximale du document 297 mm 257 mm 210 mm 182 mm 182 mm Détection de document de largeur mixte A3 w A4 v B4 w B5 v A4 w A5 v B5 w A5 w 297 mm A3 w o o — — — — — — A4 v o o — — — — — — 257 mm B4 w o o o o — — — — B5 v o o o o — — — — 210 mm A4 w o o o o o o — — A5 v o o o o o o — — 182 mm B5 w — — o o o o o — 148 mm A5 w — — — — — — o o Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-47 Précautions relatives aux originaux Les types de documents suivants ne doivent pas être chargés dans l'introducteur/ retourneur de document. Sinon, l'original pourrait être endommagé ou un serrage papier pourrait se produire. Il vaut mieux placer ces documents sur la vitre d'exposition. Documents sur papier dédié - Documents pliés (pliés en deux ou en accordéon) - Documents très translucides ou transparents, comme du papier photosensible diazo - Documents comportant des perforations de reliure - Documents avec de nombreuses perforations de classeur, comme du papier volant - Documents revêtus, comme du papier thermosensible ou du papier carbone - Papier pour imprimante à jet d'encre - Documents qui viennent juste d'être imprimés avec ce copieur Documents sur du papier qui ne se prête pas à l'introduction - Documents gondolés - Documents froissés ou déchirés - Transparents de rétroprojection Si du papier de format non-standard présente un format proche d'un format standard, la copie est possible en utilisant la fonction Papier Auto ou Taux Auto. 2 Remarque Si un document de format non standard est placé sur la vitre d'exposition, les fonctions Papier Auto et Taux Auto ne seront pas disponibles. Après avoir chargé un document de format non standard, appuyez sur la touche [Papier] pour sélectionner un format papier ou appuyez sur la touche [Zoom] pour sélectionner un taux zoom. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-48 bizhub 162/210 3.13 Spécifier une sélection Zoom La définition d'un taux zoom permet l'agrandissement ou la réduction de copie. Paramètres Zoom Paramètre Zoom Description 1:1 Les copies produites sont de mêmes dimensions que le document (× 1,00). Taux zoom AUTO Permet de sélectionner automatiquement le taux zoom le plus adapté au format du document chargé et au format spécifié pour le papier. Taux zoom prédéfinis Voici les taux zoom les plus fréquents disponibles pour copier sur des formats papier standard, des documents de divers formats standard. × 0,25 × 0,50 × 0,70 (A3 %A4 et B4% B5) × 0,81 (B4 %A4 et B5 %A5) × 1,15 (B4 %A3 et B5 %A4) × 1,41 (A4 %A3 et B5 %B4) × 2,00 × 4,00 × 0,25 et × 4,00 possible uniquement quand le format papier est sélectionné manuellement. Ces paramètres ne sont pas disponibles quand le papier est sélectionné automatiquement. Taux zoom sélectionnéa avec les touches zoom [,] et [+] Les touches [,] et [+] permettent de régler le taux zoom (augmenter ou réduire) par incréments de 0,01. En cas de sélection manuelle du format papier : réglage possible d'un taux zoom compris entre × 0,25 et × 4,00. (Sélection papier manuelle) En cas de sélection automatique du format papier : réglage possible d'un taux zoom compris entre × 0,50 et × 2,00. (Papier Auto) Fonction Zoom X/Y Permet d'effectuer des copies à l'aide de différentes valeurs d'échelle dans le sens vertical et dans le sens horizontal. Les touches [,] et [+] permettent de régler le taux zoom (augmenter ou réduire) par incréments de 0,01. Sens vertical : réglage possible d'un taux zoom entre × 0,50 et × 2,00. Sens horizontal : réglage possible d'un taux zoom entre × 0,50 et × 1,00. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-49 Réaliser des copies avec le paramètre zoom AUTO 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Papier Auto/ Taux Auto] jusqu'à ce que la fonction Taux Auto soit sélectionnée. AUTO apparaît sur la première ligne de l'écran. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Papier] pour sélectionner le format papier désiré. 4 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 5 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-50 bizhub 162/210 Réaliser des copies avec un paramètre zoom fixe 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Zoom] pour sélectionner le taux zoom désiré. Chaque pression sur la touche [Zoom] fait changer le taux zoom selon la séquence suivante. × 1,15 % × 1,41 % × 2,00 % × 4,00 % × 0,25 % × 0,50 % × 0,70 % × 0,81 % × 1,00 ... Les taux zoom × 0,25 et × 4,00 n'apparaissent pas si la fonction Papier Auto est sélectionnée. 3 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-51 Réaliser des copies avec un paramètre zoom spécifique 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Zoom]. 3 Appuyez sur les touches [,] et [+] pour spécifier le taux zoom désiré Le taux zoom se règle par pas de 0,01. 4 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 5 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-52 bizhub 162/210 Réaliser des copies avec la fonction Zoom X/Y 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Zoom X/Y] jusqu'à ce que le voyant Zoom X/Y s'allume. 3 Appuyez sur les touches [,] et [+] pour sélectionner le taux zoom désiré pour la longueur (X). Le taux zoom augmente et diminue par pas de 0,01. ou Appuyez sur la touche [Zoom] pour sélectionner le taux zoom désiré. Chaque pression sur la touche [Zoom] fait changer le taux zoom selon la séquence suivante. × 0,50 % × 0,70 % × 0,81 % × 1,00 % × 0,50 ... ? Voulez-vous revenir à l'écran principal ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. ? Voulez-corriger le taux zoom spécifié ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et répétez l'opération à partir de l'étape 2. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Largeur (Y) Longueur (X) Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-53 5 Appuyez sur les touches [,] et [+] pour sélectionner le taux zoom désiré pour la largeur (X). Le taux zoom augmente et diminue par pas de 0,01. ou Appuyez sur la touche [Zoom] pour sélectionner le taux zoom désiré. Chaque pression sur la touche [Zoom] fait changer le taux zoom selon la séquence suivante. × 0,50 % × 0,70 % × 0,81 % × 1,00 % × 1,15 % × 1,41 % × 2,00 % × 0,50 .... ? Voulez-vous revenir à l'écran principal ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. ? Voulez-corriger le taux zoom spécifié ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et répétez l'opération à partir de l'étape 2. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 7 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 8 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 9 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. Largeur (Y) Longueur (X) 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-54 bizhub 162/210 3.14 Spécifier la densité de copie Réglages Types de document et Densité copie - Réglage TEXTE : Sélectionnez le réglage TEXTE pour copier des documents contenant du texte. Ce réglage permet d'améliorer les contours et de reproduire le texte avec netteté. Ce réglage offre un niveau automatique de densité et 9 niveaux manuels de densité. – Niveau automatique de densité [A] : Le niveau de densité est automatiquement réglé en fonction du document à copier. – Niveaux manuels de densité : Sélectionnez un niveau entre le plus clair et le plus foncé, en fonction du document à copier. - Réglage PHOTO : Sélectionnez ce réglage pour copier des documents comportant des zones en demi-teintes (couleurs intermédiaires) comme dans des photographies. Le niveau automatique de densité [A] ne peut pas être sélectionné si le réglage PHOTO est sélectionné. - Réglage TEXTE/P : Sélectionnez le réglage TEXTE/P pour copier des documents comportant à la fois du texte et des photos. Le niveau automatique de densité et 9 niveaux manuels de densité sont disponibles. – Niveau automatique de densité [A] : Le niveau de densité est automatiquement réglé en fonction du document à copier. – Niveaux manuels de densité : Afin d'éviter que l'image au dos d'articles de journaux ou de magazines ne transparaisse sur la copie, appuyez sur la touche [*] pour sélectionner un niveau de densité plus clair. Pour reproduire des couleurs pâles dans les zones vives de l'image, appuyez sur la touche [)] pour sélectionner un niveau de densité plus foncé. 2 Remarque Sélectionner un niveau de densité trop foncé pourrait résulter en une reproduction sur la copie de la couleur du support du document et sélectionner un niveau de densité trop clair pourrait donner des copies très pâles. Il convient par conséquent de sélectionner le niveau approprié en fonction du document. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-55 Réaliser des copies après spécification de la densité copie 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Auto/Photo] pour choisir l'un des réglages suivants TEXTE/P[A] (AUTO), TEXTE[A] (AUTO), PHOTO, TEXTE/P, ou TEXTE. Le réglage en vigueur s'affiche sur le côté gauche de l'écran. 3 Si le paramètre PHOTO, TEXTE ou TEXTE/P est sélectionné, appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour régler le niveau de densité. 4 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 5 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. Pour réaliser des copies avec un niveau densité clair Pour réaliser des copies avec un niveau de densité foncé 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-56 bizhub 162/210 3.15 Interrompre des tâches de copie Vous pouvez rapidement suspendre des tâches de copies longues et continues en appuyant sur la touche [Interruption] afin d'entreprendre la copie d'un document différent. 2 Remarque Certaines fonctions ne peuvent pas être interrompues. En outre, certaines fonctions ne sont pas disponibles lorsqu'une tâche de copie est suspendue. Pour plus de détails, voir “Tableau d'association des fonctions” à la page 9-10. Si le document est placé sur la vitre d'exposition pour produire des copies 2en1 ou 4en1, il n'est pas possible d'interrompre la tâche de copie. Interrompre une tâche de copie 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Interruption]. Le voyant d'interruption s'allume. L'opération de copie en cours est suspendue. Toutes les fonctions reviennent à leurs réglages par défaut. 2 Sortez le document actuel. Positionnez l'autre document que vous voulez copier. 3 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. Avant de réaliser des copies 3 bizhub 162/210 3-57 6 Une fois que l'autre document est copié, appuyez sur la touche [Interruption]. Le voyant d'interruption s'éteint. Toutes les fonctions de copie reprennent leurs anciens paramètres. 7 Rechargez le document qui a été retiré à l'étape 2. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. La tâche de copie suspendue reprend. 3 Avant de réaliser des copies 3-58 bizhub 162/210 4 Opérations de copie Opérations de copie 4 bizhub 162/210 4-3 4 Opérations de copie 4.1 Copies de base La procédure suivante décrit comment placer le document pour en faire une copie directe. Opérations élémentaires de copie 1 Positionnez l'original. Pour plus détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Spécifiez les paramètres copie voulus. – Papier (p. 3-41) – Zoom (p. 3-48) – Densité copie (p. 3-54) – Copies complexes (p. 6-3) 4 Opérations de copie 4-4 bizhub 162/210 3 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. – Le nombre de copies peut être spécifié entre 1 et 99. – Pour effacer la valeur saisie, appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression] pour démarrer le cycle copie. – Pour arrêter la copie avant que le nombre spécifié ne soit atteint, appuyez sur la touche [Stop]. Opérations de copie 4 bizhub 162/210 4-5 4.2 Chargement du papier Lors du chargement du papier veillez à observer les précautions suivantes. Précautions Illustration Si le papier est gondolé, aplatissez-le avant de le charger. Ne chargez pas de papier au-delà du repère , pour la pile de papier ou au-delà du nombre de feuilles spécifié. Poussez fermement les guides papier contre les bords de la ramette de papier. Si vous procédez à un chargement complémentaire, retirez d'abord tout le papier qui reste dans le magasin, placez-le sur la nouvelle pile de papier, puis chargez-le après en avoir égalisé les bords. 4 Opérations de copie 4-6 bizhub 162/210 Chargement du papier dans le 1er magasin papier 1 Tirez le 1er magasin. ? Avez-vous pris les précautions nécessaires pour tirer le magasin ? % Veillez à ne pas toucher de vos mains la surface du rouleau prise papier. 2 Appuyez vers le bas la plaque guide documents jusqu'à ce qu'elle se verrouille en position. 3 Chargez le papier dans le magasin. ? Avez-vous pris les précautions nécessaires pour charger le papier ? % Le papier ne doit pas être chargé au-delà du repère de hauteur ,. 4 Faites glisser les guides papier contre les bords du papier. ? Le guide papier est-il correctement positionné ? % Assurez-vous que les guides papier sont bien poussés contre les bords de la ramette. Rouleau prise papier Plaque guide documents Opérations de copie 4 bizhub 162/210 4-7 5 Refermez le 1er magasin. 4 Opérations de copie 4-8 bizhub 162/210 Chargement du papier dans le 2ème magasin papier La chargement du papier dans les magasins 3, 4 et 5 s'effectue selon la même méthode, décrite ci-dessous. 1 Tirez le 2ème magasin. 2 Appuyez vers le bas la plaque guide documents jusqu'à ce qu'elle se verrouille en position. 3 Chargez le papier dans le magasin. ? Avez-vous pris les précautions nécessaires pour charger le papier ? % Le papier ne doit pas être chargé au-delà du repère de hauteur ,. 4 Faites glisser les guides papier contre les bords du papier. ? Le guide papier est-il correctement positionné ? % Assurez-vous que les guides papier sont bien poussés contre les bords de la ramette. Plaque guide documents Opérations de copie 4 bizhub 162/210 4-9 5 Refermez le 2ème magasin. 4 Opérations de copie 4-10 bizhub 162/210 4.3 Chargement du document Vous pouvez placer le document sur la vitre d'exposition ou le charger dans l'introducteur de documents (en option). Positionnez correctement le document en fonction du type de document à copier. Chargement des documents dans l'introducteur de documents 7 ATTENTION Serrage papier dû à un introducteur de documents surchargé. % DF-502 : Chargement de 50 pages de document maximum. % DF-605 : Chargement de 80 pages de document maximum. % N’empilez pas de pages au delà du repère ,. % Veillez à ajuster les guides-document en butée contre les bords du document sinon l'introduction pourrait ne pas se faire dans l'axe correct. 1 Faites coulisser vers l'extérieur les guides latéraux des originaux. 2 Chargez dans l'introducteur les pages du document à copier, recto vers le haut. Opérations de copie 4 bizhub 162/210 4-11 3 Ramenez les guides latéraux des originaux au format du document à copier. 4 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 2 Remarque Veillez à charger le document correctement, sinon les pages risqueraient d'être introduites de travers. 4 Opérations de copie 4-12 bizhub 162/210 Positionnement d'une feuille de document sur la vitre d'exposition Suivez la procédure suivante pour positionner du papier normal ou un original qui ne peut être utilisé avec l'introducteur automatique de documents. 1 Relevez l'introducteur automatique de documents ou le couvre-original. 2 Placez le document face vers le bas, sur la vitre d'exposition. 3 Positionnez le document contre les réglettes en haut et à gauche de la vitre d'exposition. 4 Abaissez doucement l'introducteur automatique de documents ou le couvre-original. 5 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. Opérations de copie 4 bizhub 162/210 4-13 Positionnement des documents transparents sur la vitre d'exposition Lorsque vous faites des copies à partir de transparents pour rétroprojecteur, de papier translucide ou d'originaux fortement transparents, placez l'original de la manière suivante. 1 Relevez l'introducteur automatique de documents ou le couvre-original. 2 Placez le document face vers le bas, sur la vitre d'exposition. 3 Positionnez le document contre les réglettes en haut et à gauche de la vitre d'exposition. 4 Placez une feuille de papier vierge de même format au dessus de l'original. 5 Abaissez doucement l'introducteur automatique de documents ou le couvre-original. 6 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 4 Opérations de copie 4-14 bizhub 162/210 Positionnement des livres sur la vitre d'exposition Pour copier un livre ou un magazine ouvert, placez l'original de la manière suivante. 1 Relevez l'introducteur automatique de documents ou le couvre-original. 7 AVERTISSEMENT Vitre d'exposition cassée suite à une manipulation incorrecte. % Ne placez pas sur la vitre d'exposition des livres de plus de 3 kg. Il est également recommandé de ne pas exercer de pression excessive sur l'original, cela pourrait endommager la machine. 2 Placez le livre ouvert contre la vitre d'exposition, le haut du livre orienté vers l'arrière de la machine, et l'axe de reliure aligné avec le repère situé sur la réglette des originaux. 3 Abaissez doucement l'introducteur automatique de documents ou le couvre-original. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Séparation livre]. Le voyant de séparation livre s'allume. 5 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. Opérations de copie 4 bizhub 162/210 4-15 Chargement d'originaux de formats mixtes dans l'introducteur de documents Il est possible de charger en même temps dans l'introducteur de documents un document constitué de pages de différents formats. Précautions pour le chargement de documents de formats mixtes : DF-502 Les documents de formats différents peuvent être copiés seulement si toutes les pages sont de la même largeur. Par exemple : un document composé de pages A3 w- et A4 v. DF-605 Voir “Formats de documents de largeurs mixtes (DF-605)” à la page 3-46. 7 ATTENTION Serrage papier dû à un introducteur de documents surchargé. % DF-502 : Chargement de 50 pages de document maximum. % DF-605 : Chargement de 80 pages de document maximum. % N’empilez pas de pages au delà du repère ,. % Veillez à ajuster les guides-document en butée contre les bords du document sinon l'introduction pourrait ne pas se faire dans l'axe correct. 1 Faites coulisser vers l'extérieur les guides latéraux des originaux. (Papier Auto) Documents Copies 4 Opérations de copie 4-16 bizhub 162/210 2 Chargez, recto vers le haut, les pages du document à copier. 3 Ramenez les guides latéraux des originaux au format du document à copier. 4 Appuyez deux fois sur la touche [Original]. Le voyant orig. mixtes s'allume. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Papier Auto / Taux Auto] jusqu'à ce que la fonction Papier Auto soit sélectionnée. AUTO apparaît sur la dernière page de l'écran. Opérations de copie 4 bizhub 162/210 4-17 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 2 Remarque Veillez à charger le document correctement, sinon les pages risqueraient d'être introduites de travers. 4 Opérations de copie 4-18 bizhub 162/210 4.4 Arrêter une tâche de copie Pour arrêter une tâche de copie, procédez comme suit. Arrêter/Reprendre/Annuler une tâche de copie 1 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre 3 Pendant l'impression, appuyez sur la touche [Stop]. Le message ATTENDRE SVP! s'affiche et l'impression s'arrête. ? Comment reprendre la tâche arrêtée ? % Quand le message PRESS. TOUCHE COPIE REPRENDRE s'affiche, appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. L'impression reprend. ? Comment annuler la tâche arrêtée ? % Quand le message PRESS. TOUCHE COPIE POUR REPRENDRE apparaît, appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. Le message COPIE ANNULEE s'affiche et la tâche est annulée. Arrêt Reprise Annulation Opérations de copie 4 bizhub 162/210 4-19 4.5 Vérification des compteurs de la machine Il est possible de contrôler le nombre d'opérations effectuées par cette machine depuis sa mise en service, en utilisant les fonctions rendues disponibles par l'activation de la touche [Etat]. Voici les éléments qui peuvent être vérifiés à partir du menu compteur de la machine. Pour vérifier les compteurs 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Etat]. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu Compteur Machine apparaît. Compteur machine Description TOTAL COMPT Ce compteur indique le nombre total d'impressions réalisées depuis l’installation de la machine. COMPT FORM Ce compteur indique le nombre total d'impressions réalisées sur le format de papier spécifié. (Le format de papier lu par le compteur devrait être défini par le technicien du S.A.V.) TOTAL SCAN Ce compteur indique le nombre total de numérisations réalisées depuis l’installation de la machine. Cependant, le nombre de pages numérisées pour la réalisation de copies n'est pas pris en compte. 4 Opérations de copie 4-20 bizhub 162/210 3 Appuyez sur les touches [,] et [+] pour sélectionner le compteur que vous voulez vérifier. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. TOTAL PAGES? apparaît. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. L'écran principal apparaît. Opérations de copie 4 bizhub 162/210 4-21 4.6 Economiser l'électricité Le mode Veille et le mode Auto coupure sont extrêmement utiles pour économiser l'énergie. La procédure permettant de spécifier le mode Economie d'énergie et le mode Auto coupure est décrite ci-après. Spécifier le mode d'économie d'énergie et le mode auto coupure 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. Le message PARAMETRES MACHINE apparaît. 2 Sur le clavier numérique, appuyez sur la touche [2]. MODE ECO. ENERG. apparaît. 3 A l'aide du clavier numérique, spécifiez la durée d'inactivité de la machine avant que le mode d'économie d'énergie ne soit activé. La temporisation est réglable de 1 minute à 240 minutes. ? Voulez-vous corriger le réglage ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez le nombre correct. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 5 Sur le clavier numérique, appuyez sur la touche [3]. AUTO COUPURE apparaît. 4 Opérations de copie 4-22 bizhub 162/210 Si la fonction AUTO COUPURE du menu GESTION ADMIN. est réglée sur ACTIVER, l'écran représenté cicontre s'affiche. Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner ON et appuyez ensuite sur la touche [Oui]. 6 A l'aide du clavier numérique, spécifiez la durée d'inactivité de la machine avant qu'elle ne s'éteigne. La temporisation est réglable de 15 minutes à 240 minutes. ? Voulez-vous corriger le réglage ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez le nombre correct. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. L'écran principal apparaît. 5 Fonctions utiles Fonctions utiles 5 bizhub 162/210 5-3 5 Fonctions utiles 5.1 Spécifier une sélection Zoom Effectuer un zoom d'un document de format standard et le convertir à un format standard différent A titre d'exemple, voici la procédure permettant d'agrandir un document de format B5 au format A4. 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Zoom]. B5 > A4 apparaît sur l'écran. A chaque pression sur la touche [Zoom], le taux zoom prédéfini affiché change un réglage à la fois. 5 Fonctions utiles 5-4 bizhub 162/210 3 Vérifiez le réglage du format du papier à imprimer. – Si AUTO est affiché, assurezvous que du papier de format A4 est chargé dans le magasin. – Si AUTO n'est pas affiché, appuyez sur la touche [Papier] jusqu'à ce que AUTO apparaisse à l'écran. – Pour plus de détails sur le changement de la sélection du format de papier relatif au magasin, voir “Réglages source papier” à la page 7-12. 4 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 2 Remarque Si vous effectuez des copies à l'aide de l'introducteur manuel, continuez à charger du papier dans le magasin. Fonctions utiles 5 bizhub 162/210 5-5 5.2 Utilisation de la fonction Auto/Photo Réaliser des copies précises d'illustrations ou de photos Sélectionnez le réglage approprié (TEXTE, PHOTO, ou TEXTE/P) correspondant à la qualité du document à copier afin d'en réaliser la copie la plus précise possible. 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Auto/Photo] pour sélectionner PHOTO ou TEXTE/P. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [*] ou [)] pour sélectionner la densité appropriée pour la couleur et la densité du texte et du papier du document. 5 Fonctions utiles 5-6 bizhub 162/210 4 Vérifiez le réglage du format du papier à imprimer. – Pour sélectionner AUTO ou une source papier spécifique, continuez à appuyer sur la touche [Papier] jusqu'à ce que le format papier désiré s'affiche. 5 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 2 Remarque Si vous effectuez des copies à l'aide de l'introducteur manuel, continuez à charger du papier dans le magasin. Fonctions utiles 5 bizhub 162/210 5-7 5.3 Copies sur divers types de supports Pour copier sur des transparents de rétroprojection A titre d'exemple, la procédure suivante indique comment effectuer des copies sur des transparents chargés dans le 1er magasin. 1 Positionnez les documents format A4. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Réglez les guides papier du premier magasin et charger les transparents dans le même sens que le document. Vous pouvez charger un maximum de 20 transparents. 3 Appuyez deux fois sur la touche [Utilitaires]. REGL. SOURCE PAPI.? apparaît. 5 Fonctions utiles 5-8 bizhub 162/210 4 Sur le clavier numérique, appuyez sur la touche [2]. PAPIER MAG. 1 apparaît. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [*] ou [)] pour sélectionner OHP. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [*] ou [)] pour sélectionner AUTO. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 9 Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. L'écran principal apparaît. 10 Appuyez sur la touche [Papier] pour sélectionner le papier chargé dans le 1er magasin. 11 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 12 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. Fonctions utiles 5 bizhub 162/210 5-9 Pour copier sur des planches d'étiquettes A titre d'exemple, la procédure suivante indique comment effectuer des copies sur des planches d'étiquettes de 200 mm x 250 mm chargées dans le 1er magasin. 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Ajustez les guides papier du premier magasin et chargez les feuilles pour étiquettes de manière à ce que la surface à imprimée soit orientée vers le haut. 3 Appuyez deux fois sur la touche [Utilitaires]. L'indication REGL. SOURCE PAPI. apparaît. 5 Fonctions utiles 5-10 bizhub 162/210 4 Sur le clavier numérique, appuyez sur la touche [2]. PAPIER MAG. 1 apparaît. 5 Appuyez sur le touche [*] ou [)] pour sélectionner CARTE. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [*] ou [)] pour sélectionner “FORMAT ENTRE”. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 9 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez “200” pour la longueur (x). La longueur du papier (x) peut être réglée entre 140 mm et 432 mm. ? Voulez-vous corriger le réglage ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez le nombre correct. 10 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 11 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez “250” pour la largeur (y). La largeur du papier (y) peut être réglée entre 90 mm et 297 mm. ? Voulez-vous corriger le réglage ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez le nombre correct. 12 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Fonctions utiles 5 bizhub 162/210 5-11 13 Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. L'écran principal apparaît. 14 Appuyez sur la touche [Papier] pour sélectionner le papier chargé dans le premier magasin. 15 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 16 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 5 Fonctions utiles 5-12 bizhub 162/210 Copier sur des enveloppes (de format non standard) A titre d'exemple, la procédure suivante indique comment effectuer des copies sur des enveloppes de 200 mm x 150 mm chargées dans l'introducteur manuel. Notez les précautions suivantes : 0 Avant de charger des documents et du papier de format non standard, assurez-vous de mesurer leurs dimensions. Les réglettes originaux sur les bords de la vitre d'exposition permettent de mesurer les documents et le papier. 0 Avant de charger des enveloppes, appuyez dessus pour en chasser l'air qu'elles contiennent et veillez à ce que les plis des rabats soient bien aplatis. 0 Avec l'introducteur manuel, on ne peut introduire qu'une enveloppe à la fois. 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Ajustez les guides papier pour l'introducteur manuel et chargez les enveloppes avec le rabat orienté vers le haut de manière à ce que la face à imprimée soit tournée vers le bas. Fonctions utiles 5 bizhub 162/210 5-13 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. Le menu REGL. SOURCE PAPI. apparaît. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [*] ou [)] pour sélectionner ENVELOPPE. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu FORMAT PAPIER apparaît. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [,]. Le réglage Longueur (x) apparaît. 7 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez “200” pour la longueur (X). La longueur du papier (x) peut être réglée entre 140 mm et 432 mm. ? Voulez-vous corriger la valeur saisie ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez le nombre correct. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. x y 5 Fonctions utiles 5-14 bizhub 162/210 9 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez “150” pour la largeur (y). La largeur du papier (y) peut être réglée entre 90 mm et 297 mm. ? Voulez-vous corriger la valeur saisie ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez le nombre correct. 10 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. L'écran principal apparaît. 11 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 12 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 2 Remarque Si vous effectuez des copies à l'aide de l'introducteur manuel, continuez à charger du papier dans le magasin. x y Fonctions utiles 5 bizhub 162/210 5-15 Copier sur des cartes postales A titre d'exemple, la procédure suivante indique comment effectuer des copies sur des cartes postales de 148 mm x 100 mm chargées dans l'introducteur manuel ou le multi-introducteur manuel. Notez les précautions suivantes : 0 Chargez les cartes postales de manière à ce que la face à imprimer soit orientée vers le bas. 0 Avec l'introducteur manuel, on ne peut introduire qu'une carte postale à la fois. 0 Vous pouvez insérer un maximum de 20 cartes postales dans le multi-introducteur manuel. 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 5 Fonctions utiles 5-16 bizhub 162/210 2 Ajustez les guides papier de l'introducteur manuel ou du multi-introducteur manuel et chargez les cartes postales, côté court en avant. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. L'indication REGL. SOURCE PAPI. apparaît. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [*] ou [)] pour sélectionner ENVELOPPE. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. FORMAT PAPIER apparaît. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [,]. Le réglage Longueur (x) apparaît. Fonctions utiles 5 bizhub 162/210 5-17 7 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez “148” pour la longueur (X). La longueur du papier (x) peut être réglée entre 140 mm et 432 mm. ? Voulez-vous corriger la valeur saisie ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez le nombre correct. 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 9 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez “100” pour la largeur (y). La largeur du papier (y) peut être réglée entre 90 mm et 297 mm. ? Voulez-vous corriger la valeur saisie ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez le nombre correct. 10 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. L'écran principal apparaît. 11 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 12 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 2 Remarque Si vous effectuez des copies à l'aide de l'introducteur manuel, continuez à charger du papier dans le magasin. x y x y 5 Fonctions utiles 5-18 bizhub 162/210 6 Copies complexes Copies complexes 6 bizhub 162/210 6-3 6 Copies complexes 6.1 Copies recto Spécifier les paramètres pour les copies 2en1 (ou 4en1) Sur la vitre d'exposition 1 Ouvrez l'introducteur automatique de documents ou le couvre-original. 2 Placez le document sur la vitre d'exposition. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Copie]. Le voyant 2en1 (ou 4en1) s'allume. Documents Copie 2en1 Documents Copie 4en1 6 Copies complexes 6-4 bizhub 162/210 4 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. ? Connaissez-vous la séquence de copie de la fonction copie 4en1 ? % Il est possible de régler la séquence de copie sur l'un ou l'autre des motifs représentés cicontre. Pour plus de détails, voir “Spécifier ORDRE COPIE 4EN1” à la page 7-41. La sélection par défaut est PATTERN1. 5 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. – Si vous devez imprimer plusieurs copies, appuyez sur la touche [Finition] jusqu'à ce que Tri soit sélectionné. 6 Placez la page de document suivante sur la vitre d'exposition et appuyez sur la touche [Copie]. – Répétez cette étape pour toutes les pages du document. – Le nombre de pages de document numérisées s'affiche. 7 Une fois que vous avez numérisé toutes les pages du document, appuyez sur la touche [Copie]. 2 Remarque Si le document est placé sur la vitre d'exposition pour produire des copies 2en1 ou 4en1, il n'est pas possible d'interrompre la tâche de copie. 1 3 2 4 1 2 3 4 PATTERN1 PATTERN2 Copies complexes 6 bizhub 162/210 6-5 Utilisation de l'introducteur de documents 1 Chargez les documents dans l'introducteur de documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Copie]. Le voyant 2en1 (ou 4en1) s'allume. 3 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. ? Connaissez-vous la séquence de copie de la fonction copie 4en1 ? % Il est possible de régler la séquence de copie sur l'un ou l'autre des motifs représentés cicontre. Pour plus de détails, voir “Spécifier ORDRE COPIE 4EN1” à la page 7-41. La sélection par défaut est PATTERN1. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 1 3 2 4 1 2 3 4 PATTERN1 PATTERN2 6 Copies complexes 6-6 bizhub 162/210 Spécifier les réglages pour des copies Séparation livre 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Séparation livre]. Le voyant de séparation livre s'allume. 3 Pour effacer autour du texte ou le long de la reliure, appuyez sur la touche [Effacer]. ou Pour commencer à copier, poursuivez à l'étape 5. ? Connaissez-vous la largeur de la zone d'effacement ? % La largeur de la zone qui sera effacée, en ce qui concerne le réglage BORDS, est réglable de 5 mm à 20 mm, par pas de 1 mm. La sélection par défaut est 10 mm. % La largeur de la zone d'effacement en ce qui concerne le réglage CENTRE est fixé à 10 mm. % La largeur de la zone effacée pour le paramètre BORDS peut être modifiée. Pour plus de détails, voir “Spécifier le REGLAGE EFFACEMENT” à la page 7-37. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. L'écran principal apparaît. Copies complexes 6 bizhub 162/210 6-7 5 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 6 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 2 Remarque Le réglage de reliure par défaut concerne les livre avec reliure à gauche. Pour copier des livres reliés à droite, changez le type de document à l'aide de la fonction position de reliure. Pour plus de détails, voir “Spécifier la POSITION DE RELIURE” à la page 7-36. Trois options d'effacement sont disponibles. REGLAGE EFFACEM. Description Finition CADRE Les pages copiées comportent un cadre vierge autour du texte. CENTRE Les pages copiées comportent une bande vierge le long de la reliure. TOUT Les pages copiées comportent un cadre vierge autour du texte ainsi qu'une bande vierge le long de la reliure. Documents Copies Documents Copies Documents Copies 6 Copies complexes 6-8 bizhub 162/210 6.2 Copies recto-verso En plus des copies 2en1 ou 4en1 recto-verso, vous popuvez également réaliser des copies recto-verso à partir de documents recto ou recto-verso. 2 Remarque L'unité recto-verso, en option, doit être installée (bizhub 210 uniquement). Le type de copie recto-verso qui peut être réalisé dépend des options qui sont installées. Pour effectuer des copies 2en1 et 4en1, utilisez l'introducteur de documents. Lors de la copie de documents recto-verso, utilisez l'introducteur/retourneur automatique de documents DF-605. Types de copies recto-verso Méthodes de copie rectoverso Affichage Couvreoriginal OC-504 Introducteur automatique de documents DF-502 Introducteur/ retourneur automatique de documents DF-605 Documents recto % Copie recto/verso o o o Document recto/verso % Copie recto/verso o × o Documents recto % Copie 2en1 recto/verso × o o 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 3 1 2 1 2 Copies complexes 6 bizhub 162/210 6-9 Précautions relatives à la copie recto/verso La copie recto-verso n'est pas possible dans les cas suivants : - Les documents recto-verso sont chargés dans l'introducteur automatique de document DF-502. - L'introducteur manuel a été sélectionné. - Du papier dédié (cartes, transparents, enveloppes ou planches d'étiquettes) est chargé. - La fonction TYPE PAPIER est réglée sur RECTO SEUL. - Du papier d'une largeur inférieur à 140 mm a été sélectionné. Documents recto % Copie 4en1 recto/verso × o o Documents recto/verso % Copie 2en1 recto/verso × × o Documents recto/verso % Copie 4en1 recto/verso × × o Méthodes de copie rectoverso Affichage Couvreoriginal OC-504 Introducteur automatique de documents DF-502 Introducteur/ retourneur automatique de documents DF-605 8 1 1 1 7 3 4 3 4 1 2 1 2 7 1 5 1 3 1 2 1 1 7 1 2 5 6 3 1 2 1 2 2 15 2 1 1 15 3 4 3 12 1 2 9 10 7 3 4 3 4 1 2 1 2 6 Copies complexes 6-10 bizhub 162/210 Pour réaliser des copies recto-verso sur la vitre d'exposition 1 Positionnez le premier document sur la vitre d'exposition. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Copie]. Le voyant Recto/Verso s'allume. 3 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Une fois que la page du document est numérisée, le message AUTRE PAGE SCAN=OUI s'affiche. 6 Positionnez le deuxième document. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Une fois que la page de document est numérisée, une copie recto-verso est produite. Copies complexes 6 bizhub 162/210 6-11 Pour réaliser des copies recto-verso avec l'introducteur de documents 1 Chargez les documents dans l'introducteur de documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Copie]. Sélectionnez ainsi la fonction de copie voulue. 3 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 6 Copies complexes 6-12 bizhub 162/210 6.3 Finition des copies Pour copier ou imprimer plus d'un jeu de document, les pages peuvent être réparties par jeux contenant une copie de chaque page (tri) ou par jeux contenant toutes les copies de la même page (groupe). Fonctions de finition Fonction Exemple Fonction Non-tri Les copies s'empilent l'une sur l'autre dans l'ordre où elles sont éjectées. Fonction Tri Les copies sont automatiquement séparées en jeux, chacun d'entre eux contenant une copie de chaque page. Fonction Groupe Les copies sont automatiquement divisées en piles contenant toutes les copies de la même page. Documents Copies Documents Copies Documents Copies Copies complexes 6 bizhub 162/210 6-13 Considérations sur l'utilisation des fonctions de Tri et de Groupe Conditions pour le tri - Le nombre de copies doit être réglé sur 2 ou plus. Conditions pour le tri croisé - Utiliser du papier de format A4 ou B5. - Du papier de même type et de même format doit être chargé horizontalement dans un magasin et verticalement dans un autre magasin. - Le réglage Papier Auto doit être sélectionné. - La fonction Orig. Mixtes ne doit pas être sélectionnée. - La fonction MODE CROISE du mode Utilitaires doit être réglée sur ON. (p. 7-42) - Le plateau de décalage, en option, ne doit pas être installé. 6 Copies complexes 6-14 bizhub 162/210 Tri décalé Chaque jeu de copie est éjecté et décalé alternativement d'un côté puis de l'autre. 2 Remarque Le plateau de décalage, en option, doit être installé. Tri croisé Chaque jeu de copies est éjecté et empilé selon une disposition croisée. Groupe décalé Chaque jeu de pages est éjecté et décalé alternativement d'un côté puis de l'autre. 2 Remarque Le plateau de décalage, en option, doit être installé. Groupe croisé Chaque jeu de pages est éjecté et empilé selon une disposition croisée. Copies complexes 6 bizhub 162/210 6-15 Spécifier les paramètres de finition (tri à l'aide de la vitre d'exposition) 1 Ouvrez l'introducteur automatique de documents ou le couvre-original. 2 Placez le document sur la vitre d'exposition. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Finition] jusqu'à ce que Tri apparaisse. Le voyant “Tri” s'allume. ? Ni le voyant Tri ni le voyant Groupe ne s'allume ? % Le réglage Non-tri est sélectionné. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 6 Placez la page de document suivante sur la vitre d'exposition et appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. – Répétez cette étape pour toutes les pages du document. – Le nombre de pages de document numérisées s'affiche. 7 Une fois que vous avez numérisé toutes les pages du document, appuyez sur la touche [Copie]. 6 Copies complexes 6-16 bizhub 162/210 Spécifier les paramètres de finition (à l'aide de l'introducteur de documents) 1 Chargez les documents dans l'introducteur de documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Finition]. Le voyant de la fonction de finition s'allume. ? Ni le voyant Tri ni le voyant Groupe ne s'allume ? % Le réglage Non-tri est sélectionné. 3 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. Copies complexes 6 bizhub 162/210 6-17 6.4 Effacer des portions de copies Il est possible d'effacer autour des copies, les zones qui semblent manquer de propreté. Précautions relatives à l'emplacement de la marge effacée L'emplacement de la zone d'effacement sur la copie dépend du positionnement du document. Réglage Effacement Vitre d'exposition Introducteur de documents GAUCHE SUP. CADRE 6 Copies complexes 6-18 bizhub 162/210 Réaliser des copies avec un réglage d'effacement 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Effacement]. Le voyant Effacement s'allume. 3 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner GAUCHE, SUP. ou BORDS pour spécifier la zone à effacer. ? Connaissez-vous la largeur de la zone d'effacement ? % La largeur de la zone qui sera effacée, en ce qui concerne les réglages GAUCHE, SUP. et CADRE est réglable, de 5 mm à 20 mm, par pas de 1 mm. La sélection par défaut est 10 mm. % La largeur de la zone effacée pour les paramètres GAUCHE, SUP. et BORDS peut être modifiée à l'aide de la fonction de réglage effacement. Pour plus de détails, voir “Spécifier le REGLAGE EFFACEMENT” à la page 7-37. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. L'écran principal apparaît. 5 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 6 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. Copies complexes 6 bizhub 162/210 6-19 6.5 Copie avec inversion Nég./Pos. Il est possible de produire des copies sur lesquelles les zones les plus claires (la couleur du support) et les plus sombres (texte) sont inversées par rapport au document original. Réaliser des copies avec la fonction inversion positif/négatif 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez la touche [Nég. Pos.]. Le voyant Nég. Pos. s'allume. 3 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. Documents Copies 6 Copies complexes 6-20 bizhub 162/210 6.6 Réaliser des copies pour archivage Il est possible de réaliser des copies qui comportent une marge afin d'en faciliter l'archivage dans des classeurs. Reliure à gauche : Les copies sont imprimées de manière à ce que le corps du document soit légèrement décalé vers la droite afin de créer la marge du côté gauche. Précautions relatives à l'emplacement de la marge de reliure L'emplacement de la marge de reliure sur la copie dépend du positionnement du document. Documents Copies Vitre d'exposition Introducteur de documents Copies complexes 6 bizhub 162/210 6-21 Réaliser des copies avec la fonction Marge 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Marge]. Le voyant Marge s'affiche. ? Connaissez-vous la largeur de la marge qui est créée ? % La largeur de la marge de reliure peut être réglée entre 0 mm et 20 mm, par pas de 1 mm. La sélection par défaut est 10 mm. % Vous pouvez changer la largeur de la marge de reliure à l'aide de la fonction réglage marge. Pour plus de détails, voir “Spécifier la POSITION DE RELIURE” à la page 7-36. 3 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 6 Copies complexes 6-22 bizhub 162/210 6.7 Travaux copie programmés Cette fonction permet de mémoriser les programmes de copie le plus souvent employés et de les rappeler en cas de besoin. 2 Remarque Les programmes copie ne peuvent pas être mémorisés pendant que la machine est en préchauffage ou quand une tâche copie est suspendue (mode Interruption). Mémoriser un programme de copie 1 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. – Il est possible de spécifier un taux zoom compris entre × 0,50 et × 2,00. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Programme Copie]. 3 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner ENREGIST.. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 5 A l'aide des touches [*] et [)], sélectionnez le numéro de programme vers lequel vous voulez stocker le programme de copie. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le cycle de copie démarre. Copies complexes 6 bizhub 162/210 6-23 2 Remarque Si deux programmes copie ont déjà été enregistrés, les paramètres copie précédemment mémorisés sous le numéro de programme actuellement sélectionné seront supprimés et remplacés par les nouveaux. 6 Copies complexes 6-24 bizhub 162/210 Rappeler un programme copie 1 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Programme Copie]. 3 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner RAPPEL. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 5 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner le numéro de programme du programme de copie que vous voulez rappeler. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. Copies complexes 6 bizhub 162/210 6-25 6.8 Codes d'accès Si des codes d'accès ont été spécifiés, l'utilisation de la machine peut être limitée à un utilisateur particulier et le nombre de copies par utilisateur peut être contrôlé. A titre d'exemple, la procédure suivante indique comment saisir le code d'accès pour pouvoir effectuer des copies. 2 Remarque Si des codes d'accès ont été spécifiés, la machine ne peut pas être utilisée tant que le code d'accès n'a pas été tapé. Afin d'utiliser cette fonction, les codes d'accès doivent être spécifiés avec la fonction trace copie. Pour plus de détails, voir “Activer/désactiver la gestion utilisateur” à la page 7-23. Entrer un code d'accès 1 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez les 3 chiffres du code d'accès du compte utilisateur. ? Voulez-vous corriger le code d'accès saisi ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez le nombre correct. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Code]. L'écran du mode Copie s'affiche. 3 Positionnez les documents. Pour plus de détails, voir “Chargement du document” à la page 4-10. 4 Spécifiez les paramètres de copie voulus. Pour plus de détails, voir “Opérations élémentaires de copie” à la page 4-3. 5 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nombre de copies à effectuer. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Impression]. Le cycle de copie démarre. 7 Lorsque vous avez terminé l'opération de copie, appuyez sur la touche [Code]. 6 Copies complexes 6-26 bizhub 162/210 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-3 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires Le mode Utilitaires comprend six menus. 2 Remarque Selon les options qui sont installées, certaines fonctions peuvent ne pas être disponibles. Si une fonction indisponible est sélectionnée, un message d'erreur s'affiche. No. Nom Description 1 PARAMETRES MACHINE Permet de spécifier le paramétrage de l'environnement d'exploitation de la machine. 2 REGL. SOURCE PAPI. Permet de spécifier différents réglages pour chaque magasin papier. 3 GESTION UTILISATEUR Permet de procéder à différentes opérations d'entretien pour préserver l'efficacité de la machine. 4 GESTION ADMIN. Permet de contrôler l'utilisation de la machine. 5 PARAM COPIE 1 Permet de spécifier les réglages par défaut pour chaque fonction de copie. 6 Paramètre Copie 2 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-4 bizhub 162/210 7.1 Paramètres machine A partir du menu PARAMETRES MACHINE, vous pouvez spécifier les divers paramètres de l'environnement d'exploitation de la machine. Veuillez vous reporter au tableau suivant pour chaque fonction. No. Nom Description 1 REIN. T de BORD Permet d'activer la fonction Initialisation Auto ou de sélectionner le délai (0,5 min, 1 min, 2 min, 3 min, 4 min, ou 5 min) après lequel la machine se réinitialise, soit après l'achèvement d'une opération de copie ou d'impression, soit après la dernière opération. Si la fonction Initialisation Auto est activée, toutes les fonctions sont automatiquement ramenées à leurs valeurs par défaut. • Réglage par défaut : 1 min. 2 MODE ECO. ENERG. Si la machine n'est pas utilisée pendant une période de temps définie, le mode Économie d'énergie est activé automatiquement. Le délai après lequel la machine passe en mode Economie d'énergie peut être réglé de 1 à 240 min (par pas d'une minute). • Réglage par défaut : 15 min. 3 AUTO COUPURE Cette fonction sert à définir le délai après lequel la machine s'éteint automatiquement à compter de la fin de la dernière opération. • Le réglage par défaut est “OFF”. 4 DENSITE (ADF) Permet de régler la densité de numérisation lors de l'utilisation de l'introducteur de documents en option. Mode 1 : Pour imprimer des copies éclaircies de documents foncés, afin d'éviter d'obtenir des copies trop sombres. Mode 2 : Pour imprimer des copies de même densité que l'original. • Réglage par défaut : Mode 1 5 DENSITE (LIVRE) Permet de régler la densité lors de la numérisation sur la vitre d'exposition. Mode 1 : Pour imprimer des copies de même densité que l'original. Mode 2 : Pour imprimer des copies éclaircies de documents foncés, afin d'éviter d'obtenir des copies trop sombres. • Réglage par défaut : Mode 1 6 DENSITE IMPRESS. Permet de régler la densité de copie/d'impression sur l'un des 5 niveaux. • Réglage par défaut : . 7 CONTRASTE LCD La luminosité de l'écran peut se régler selon l'un des quatre niveaux. • Réglage par défaut : . 8 LANGUE Permet de sélectionner la langue d'affichage. • Réglage par défaut : anglais. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-5 Sélection du menu PARAMETRES MACHINE 1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires]. PARAMETRES MACHINE? apparaît. 2 Sur le clavier numérique, appuyez sur la touche [1] à [8] selon la fonction de paramètres machine que vous voulez régler. Les fonctions PARAMETRES MACHINE sont les suivantes : 1 REIN. T de BORD 2 MODE ECO. ENERG. 3 AUTO COUPURE 4 DENSITE (ADF) 5 DENSITE (LIVRE) 6 DENSITE IMPRESS. 7 LCD CONTRASTE 8 LANGAGE ? Voulez-vous arrêter de modifier les paramètres machine ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. Le message ARRET REGLAGES? apparaît. % Pour quitter le réglage, appuyez sur [Oui]. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-6 bizhub 162/210 Spécifier REIN. T de BORD 1 Sélectionnez REIN. T de BORD dans le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-5. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner ON ou OFF, puis appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. ? Voulez-vous désactiver la fonction d'initialisation du panneau ? % Sélectionnez OFF. La fonction d'initialisation automatique est désactivée. Le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE réapparaît. 3 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner le délai désiré (min). 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE réapparaît. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-7 Spécifier le MODE ECO. ENERG. 1 Sélectionnez MODE ECO. ENERG. dans le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-5. 2 Sur le clavier numérique, spécifiez le délai voulu à l'issue duquel la machine passera en mode Economie d'énergie. La temporisation est réglable de 1 minute à 240 minutes. ? Voulez-vous effacer la valeur saisie ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez la valeur correcte. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE réapparaît. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-8 bizhub 162/210 Spécifier AUTO COUPURE C'est le réglage de la fonction AUTO COUPURE dans le menu GESTION ADMIN qui détermine si l'auto coupure est possible ou non. 1 Sélectionnez AUTO COUPURE dans le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-5. ? La fonction AUTO COUPURE du menu GESTION ADMIN est-elle réglée sur DESACT ? % Passez à l'étape 4. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner soit ON ou OFF. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, spécifiez le délai voulu à l'issue duquel la machine s'éteindra automatiquement. La temporisation est réglable de 15 minutes à 240 minutes. ? Voulez-vous effacer la valeur saisie ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez la valeur correcte. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE réapparaît. 2 Remarque Si la fonction Auto-coupure se déclenche et que la machine s'éteint, il n’est plus possible d'effectuer des copies ou d'imprimer à partir d'un ordinateur. Pour effectuer des copies ou imprimer à partir d'un ordinateur, allumez la machine. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-9 Spécifier la DENSITE (ADF) 1 Sélectionnez DENSITE (ADF) dans le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-5. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner Mode 1 ou Mode 2. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE réapparaît. 2 Remarque Si l'introducteur de documents n'est pas installé, la mention NON DISPONIBLE apparaît. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-10 bizhub 162/210 Spécifier la DENSITE (LIVRE) 1 Sélectionnez DENSITE (LIVRE) dans le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-5. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner Mode 1 ou Mode 2. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE réapparaît. Spécifier la DENSITE IMPRESSION 1 Sélectionnez DENSITE IMPRESS. dans le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-5. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner l'un des sept niveaux de densité d'impression de CLAIR à FONCE. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE réapparaît. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-11 Spécifier le CONTRASTE LCD 1 Sélectionnez CONTRASTE LCD dans le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-5. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner l'un des quatre niveaux de contraste d'affichage de CLAIR à FONCE. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE réapparaît. Spécifier la LANGUE 1 Sélectionnez LANGUE dans le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-5. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [,] et [+] pour sélectionner la langue voulue. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE réapparaît. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-12 bizhub 162/210 7.2 Réglages source papier A partir du menu REGL. SOURCE PAPI., vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres de chaque magasin. No. Nom Description 1 INCH/METRIC Cette fonction sert à spécifier le système de mesure de format du papier chargé dans chaque magasin. Elle sert à déterminer si le papier chargé est mesuré en centimètres (METRIC), comme les formats A4 et B5, ou mesuré en pouces (INCH), comme le format Letter. Si aucune option particulière n'est sélectionnée, le format sera détecté automatiquement. • Réglage par défaut : système métrique. 2 PAPIER MAG. 1 Cette fonction sert à définir le type de papier (NORMAL, OHP, CARTE ou ENVELOPPE) chargé dans le 1er magasin, ainsi que le format du papier (AUTO ou FORMAT ENTRE). Si le format papier est réglé sur FORMAT ENTRE, entrez le format du papier. • Sélection par défaut : NORMAL et AUTO. 3 TYPE PAPIER Cette fonction sert à spécifier le type du papier chargé dans un magasin, ce qui détermine si le papier sera ou non disponible dans la fonction Papier Auto ou si le magasin sera pris en compte par la fonction de basculement automatique de magasin. Sélectionnez le type de papier (STANDARD, RECYCLE ou DEDIE) afin de spécifier si le papier sera disponible dans la fonction Papier Auto ou si le magasin sera pris en compte par la fonction de basculement automatique de magasin. Si du papier dédié est chargé dans le magasin, il faut sélectionner STANDARD, RECYCLE, DEDIE ou RECTO SEUL. NORMAL La fonction Papier Auto peut être sélectionnée, la fonction de basculement automatique de magasin est disponible et la copie recto-verso est possible. RECYCLE La fonction Papier Auto peut être sélectionnée, la fonction de basculement automatique de magasin est disponible et la copie recto-verso est possible. SPECIAL La fonction Papier Auto ne peut pas être sélectionnée, la fonction de basculement automatique de magasin est indisponible mais la copie recto-verso est possible. RECTO SEUL La fonction Papier Auto peut être sélectionnée, la fonction de basculement automatique de magasin est uniquement disponible lorsque vous faites des copies recto. De plus, il est toujours possible d'effectuer des copies recto-verso. • Réglage par défaut : NORMAL. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-13 Sélection du menu REGL. SOURCE PAPI. 1 Appuyez deux fois sur la touche [Utilitaires]. REGL. SOURCE PAPI.? apparaît. 2 Sur le clavier numérique, appuyez sur la touche [1] ou [3] selon la fonction de réglage de la source papier que vous désirez ajuster. Les fonctions REGL. SOURCE PAPI. sont les suivantes : 1 INCH/METRIC 2 PAPIER MAG 1 3 TYPE PAPIER ? Voulez-vous arrêter de modifier les paramètres de source papier ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. Le message ARRET REGLAGES? apparaît. % Pour quitter le réglage, appuyez sur [Oui]. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-14 bizhub 162/210 Spécifier INCH/METRIC 1 Sélectionnez INCH/METRIC dans le menu REGL. SOURCE PAPI. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-13. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [,] et [+] pour sélectionner un magasin papier. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 4 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner METRIC ou INCH. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu REGL. SOURCE PAPI. réapparaît. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-15 Spécifier PAPIER MAGASIN 1 1 Sélectionnez PAPIER MAG.1 dans le menu REGLAGE SOURCE PAPIER. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-13. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] jusqu'à ce que le type de papier chargé soit sélectionné. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 4 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner AUTO ou FORMAT ENTRE. – AUTO : Le menu REGL SOURCE PAPI. réapparaît. – FORMAT ENTRE : un écran s'affiche pour vous permettre de spécifier le format du papier. 5 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez la longueur (Y) du papier chargé. La plage des longueurs papier admises s'étend de 140 mm à 432 mm. ? Voulez-vous effacer la valeur saisie ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. ? Avez-vous pris les précautions nécessaires pour saisir le format du papier ? % Reportez-vous au schéma cicontre et assurez-vous de spécifier correctement les valeurs de longueur et de largeur. y x 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-16 bizhub 162/210 6 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez la largeur (Y) du papier chargé. La plage des largeurs papier admises s'étend de 90 mm à 297 mm. ? Voulez-vous effacer la valeur saisie ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu REGL. SOURCE PAPI. réapparaît. 2 Remarque Quand la longueur du papier est définie entre 421 mm et 432 mm, la largeur maximale qui peut être spécifiée est de 279 mm. Quand la largeur du papier est définie entre 280 mm et 297 mm, la longueur maximale qui peut être spécifiée est de 420 mm. y x 421 mm à 432 mm Moins de 297 mm (Largeur) ( Longueur) Moins de 420 mm 280 mm à 297 mm (Largeur) (Longueur) Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-17 Spécifier le TYPE DE PAPIER 1 Sélectionnez TYPE PAPIER dans le menu REGLAGE SOURCE PAPIER. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-13. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [,] et [+] pour sélectionner un magasin papier. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 4 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner soit NORMAL, RECYCLE ou SPECIAL, RECTO SEUL. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu REGL. SOURCE PAPI. réapparaît. 2 Remarque RECTO SEUL ne s'affiche que si la machine est équipée de l'unité rectoverso (option uniquement pour le bizhub 210). 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-18 bizhub 162/210 7.3 Paramètres de gestion utilisateur Le menu GESTION UTILISATE permet d'effectuer certaines opérations visant à maintenir les performances de la machine. Sélection du menu GESTION UTILISATEUR 1 Appuyez trois fois sur la touche [Utilitaires]. GESTION UTILISATEUR ? apparaît. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [,] ou [+] pour la fonction de gestion utilisateur que vous voulez effectuer. Les fonctions de gestion utilisateur sont les suivantes : 1 DESHUMIDIF. PHOTOCON 2 TONER REPLENISHER No. Nom Description 1 DEHUMIDIF. PHOTOCON. Lorsque la température ambiante change de manière considérable (quand le chauffage est allumé en hiver par exemple) ou lorsque la machine fonctionne dans un endroit très humide, il peut se former de la condensation sur la surface du tambour PC à l'intérieur de la machine, avec pour effet une dégradation de la qualité d'impression de la machine. Si cela se produit, utilisez cette fonction pour sécher le tambour et éliminer la condensation. L'opération de déshumidification du tambour ne prend que trois minutes. 2 TONER REPLENISHER A la suite de l'impression de nombreux documents comportant d'importantes zones imprimées (photos par exemple) ou de l'impression de nombreuses copies avec inversion négatif/positif, la densité d'impression peut provisoirement devenir plus pâle si un appoint toner n'est pas effectué automatiquement. Si cela se produit, utilisez cette fonction pour forcer l'appoint toner et restaurer la densité à son niveau normal. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-19 Procéder à une déshumidification du tambour PC 1 Sélectionnez DEHUMIDIF. PHOTOCON dans le menu GESTION UTILISATEUR. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-18. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le séchage du tambour commence et l'écran principal apparaît. Effectuer TONER REPLENISHER 1 Sélectionnez TONER REPLENISHER dans le menu GESTION UTILISATEUR. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-18. 2 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. L'appoint toner commence et l'écran principal apparaît. 2 Remarque Pendant que l'appoint toner a lieu, n'éteignez pas la machine et n'ouvrez par la porte frontale. Ne procédez pas à un appoint toner si la densité toner est satisfaisante. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-20 bizhub 162/210 7.4 Paramètres d'administration A partir du menu GESTION ADMIN., vous pouvez régler différentes fonctions de contrôle de l'utilisation de la machine. Pour régler la fonction GESTION ADMIN., il faut saisir le code d'accès administrateur. 2 Remarque L'enregistrement et la configuration du code d'accès administrateur doivent être assurés par le technicien de maintenance. Pour plus de détails, contactez votre Service Après-Vente. L'administrateur de cette machine doit veiller à ne pas égarer le code d'accès administrateur. No. Nom Description 1 AUTO COUPURE Cette fonction permet de spécifier si la fonction Auto Coupure sera ou non active. • Sélection par défaut : ACTIVER 2 TRACE COPIE Il est possible de spécifier 20 comptes au maximum en vue de contrôler l'utilisation de la machine. • Permet d'activer ou de désactiver la gestion utilisateur. • Permet d'enregistrer des codes d'accès aux comptes. • Permet de modifier ou supprimer les codes d'accès aux comptes. • Permet d'afficher ou d'effacer le compteur total d'un compte spécifique. • Permet d'effacer les compteurs totaux de tous les comptes. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-21 Sélection du menu GESTION ADMIN. 1 Appuyez quatre fois sur la touche [Utilitaires]. GESTION ADMIN. ? apparaît. 2 Sur le clavier numérique, appuyez sur la touche [1] ou [2] selon la fonction de gestion administrateur que vous désirez ajuster. Les fonctions GESTION ADMINIST. sont les suivantes : 1 AUTO COUPURE 2 TRACE COPIE ? Voulez-vous arrêter de modifier les réglages de gestion administrateur ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. Le message ARRET REGLAGES? apparaît. % Pour quitter le réglage, appuyez sur [Oui]. 3 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez les 6 chiffres du code d'accès administrateur. ? Voulez-vous corriger le code d'accès administrateur ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez la valeur correcte. 4 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. La fonction désirée apparaît. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-22 bizhub 162/210 Spécifier AUTO COUPURE 1 Sélectionnez AUTO COUPURE dans le menu GESTION ADMIN. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-21. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner ACTIVER. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu GESTION ADMIN. réapparaît. 4 Sélectionnez AUTO COUPURE dans le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-5. 5 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner OFF. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAMETRES MACHINE réapparaît. 2 Remarque Si la fonction auto coupure du menu GESTION ADMIN. est réglée sur DESACT., il n’est plus possible de faire de copies ni d'imprimer à partir d'un ordinateur une fois la fonction Auto Coupure exécutée et la machine éteinte. Pour effectuer des copies ou imprimer à partir d'un ordinateur, rallumez la machine. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-23 Activer/désactiver la gestion utilisateur 1 Sélectionnez TRACE COPIE dans le menu GESTION ADMIN. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-21. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [,] et [+] pour sélectionner MODE TRACE COPIE?. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 4 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner soit ON ou OFF. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. La fonction MODE TRACE COPIE réapparaît. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-24 bizhub 162/210 Enregistrement des codes d'accès utilisateur 1 Sélectionnez TRACE COPIE dans le menu GESTION ADMIN. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-21. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [,] et [+] pour sélectionner ENREG. NO. ACCES?. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le code d'accès désiré (3 chiffres) pour le compte. ? Voulez-vous corriger le code d'accès ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez la valeur correcte. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Un écran s'affiche pour vous permettre de saisir le code d'accès suivant à enregistrer. ? Voulez-vous arrêter d'enregistrer les codes d'accès ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. La fonction Enreg. NO. Accès réapparaît. 2 Remarque Si vous essayez d'enregistrer plus de 20 codes d'accès, le message PLUS DE 20 COMPTES apparaît. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-25 Modifier/Supprimer des codes d'accès utilisateur 1 Sélectionnez TRACE COPIE dans le menu GESTION ADMIN. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-21. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [,] et [+] pour sélectionner ENREG. NO. ACCES ?. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le code d'accès (3 chiffres que vous voulez modifier/supprimer. ? Voulez-vous corriger le code d'accès ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez la valeur correcte. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le message de confirmation qui apparaît vous demande si vous voulez garder ou non le code d'accès enregistré. ? Voulez-vous conserver le code d'accès ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. 7 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner EDITER. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-26 bizhub 162/210 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. – EDITER : Un écran apparaît pour vous permettre de modifier le code d'accès. – SUPPRIMER : Le code d'accès actuel est supprimé. Le message NO. ACCES XXX SUPPRIME apparaît. Pour modifier ou supprimer d'autres codes d'accès, revenez à l'étape 4. 9 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez le nouveau code. 10 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Aprés l'apparition du message NO. ACCES XXX EDITE, un écran apparaît pour vous permettre de saisir le code d'accès suivant à modifier/supprimer. ? Voulez-vous arrêter de modifier/supprimer les codes d'accès ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. La fonction Enreg. NO. Accès réapparaît. 2 Remarque Si le nouveau code d'accès est déjà enregistré, le message NO. ACCES EST UTIL. apparaît. Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez un code d'accès différent. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-27 Afficher/Effacer le comptage total pour un compte donné 1 Sélectionnez TRACE COPIE dans le menu GESTION ADMIN. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-21. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [,] et [+] pour sélectionner DONNEE TRACE COPIE?. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 4 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner AFFICH.. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 6 Appuyez sur les touches [,] et [+] pour sélectionner le code d'accès du compteur que voulez contrôler. ou Tapez le code d'accès désiré sur le clavier numérique. 7 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le comptage total du compte sélectionné s'affiche. ? Voulez-vous quitter sans effacer le compteur ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. La fonction DONNEE TRACE COPIE réapparaît. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-28 bizhub 162/210 8 Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. Le compteur est effacé. ? Voulez-vous rétablir le précédent comptage du compteur ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Interruption]. 9 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. La fonction DONNEE TRACE COPIE réapparaît. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-29 Effacer les compteurs totaux de tous les comptes 1 Sélectionnez TRACE COPIE dans le menu GESTION ADMIN. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-21. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [,] et [+] pour sélectionner DONNEE TRACE COPIE?. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 4 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner EFFACEM.. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le message qui apparaît vous demande de confirmer ou non l'effacement de tous les compteurs. 6 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le message COMPTEURS EFFACES apparaît. La fonction Données Trace Copie réapparaît. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-30 bizhub 162/210 7.5 Paramètres copie A l'allumage de la machine ou lorsque l'on appuie sur la touche [Initialisation], les paramètres par défaut de la machine sont rétablis. En modifiant les paramètres par défaut, vous pouvez changer le mode Initial. Veuillez vous reporter aux tableaux suivants pour les paramètres par défaut de chaque fonction. Menu PARAM. COPIE 1 No. Nom Description 1 PRIORITE PAPIER Cette fonction sert à spécifier le magasin qui sera prioritaire quand le réglage Zoom AUTO est sélectionné. • Sélection par défaut : 1ER 2 PRIORITE DENSITE Cette fonction sert à sélectionner le réglage densité qui sera restauré (TEXTE, PHOTO ou TEXTE/P) après extinction de la machine et après que la touche [Initialisation] ait été activée. • Sélection par défaut : TEXTE/P 3 DENSITE NIVEAU(A) Cette fonction sert à régler le paramètre Densité AUTO sur l'un des trois niveaux entre CLAIR et FONCE. • Sélection par défaut : 4 DENSITE NIVEAU(M) Cette fonction sert à régler le paramètre de Densité manuelle sur l'un des neuf niveaux entre CLAIR et FONCE. • Sélection par défaut : 5 POS. ATTACHEMENT Cette fonction sert à spécifier si la première page d'un livre à numériser se trouve à gauche (reliure à gauche) ou à droite (reliure à droite). • Sélection par défaut : GAUCHE 6 REGLAGE MARGE Cette fonction sert à spécifier la largeur de la zone de reliure (marge) à une valeur comprise entre 0 mm et 20 mm (réglage par pas de 1 mm) pour la copie de documents destinés à être reliés. • Sélection par défaut : 10 mm 7 REGLAGE EFFACEM. Cette fonction sert à spécifier, entre 5 mm et 20 mm (par pas de 1 mm), la largeur d'effacement sur des copies réalisées avec la fonction Effacement réglée sur GAUCHE, SUP. ou CADRE. • Sélection par défaut : les paramètres d'effacement GAUCHE, SUP. et BORDS sont de 10 mm. 8 PETIT ORIGINAL Cette fonction sert à spécifier si la copie est ou non possible après le chargement d'un document dont le format ne peut être automatiquement détecté. • Sélection par défaut : est ACTIVE. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-31 Menu PARAM. COPIE 2 No. Nom Description 1 ORIGINAUX MIXTES Cette fonction sert à définir si la fonction Orig. Mixtes sera ou non sélectionnée au démarrage de la machine ou lorsque le panneau de contrôle est réinitialisé. Cette fonction peut être spécifiée si un introducteur de documents, en option, est installé. • Sélection par défaut : OFF. 2 PRIORITE COPIE Cette fonction sert à définir si la fonction Papier Auto ou taux zoom Auto sera ou non sélectionnée au démarrage de la machine ou lorsque le panneau de contrôle est réinitialisé. • Sélection par défaut : AP (sélection papier auto). 3 SORTIE PRIORITA. Cette fonction permet de spécifier si l'un des modes de finition suivants NON, TRI ou GROUPE sera sélectionné lorsque la machine a été éteinte ou que la touche [Initialisation] a été activée. Cette fonction peut être spécifiée si un introducteur de documents, en option, est installé. • Sélection par défaut : NON. 4 ORDRE COPIE 4EN1 Cette fonction sert à spécifier l'une des options suivantes relatives à l'ordre des pages quand le mode Copie 4en1 a été sélectionné. • Sélection par défaut : PATTERN1. 5 MODE CROISE Cette fonction sert à définir si les copies seront ou non éjectées en tri croisé si par ailleurs les conditions d'une sortie en mode croisé sont remplies. Cette fonction peut être spécifiée si un magasin décalé, en option, est installé. • Sélection par défaut : ON. 6 COPIE RECTO/ VERSO Cette fonction permet de définir si l'impression recto-verso peut être utilisée. L'unité recto-verso, en option, doit être installée (en option pour le bizhub 210 seulement). • Sélection par défaut : OFF. 1 2 3 4 1 3 2 4 PATTERN1 PATTERN2 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-32 bizhub 162/210 Sélection du menu PARAM COPIE 1 1 Appuyez cinq fois sur la touche [Utilitaires]. PARAM COPIE 1? apparaît. 2 Sur le clavier numérique, appuyez sur la touche [1] à [8] selon la fonction de paramètres de copie 1 que vous voulez régler. Les fonctions PARAM. COPIE 1 sont les suivantes : 1 PRIORITE PAPIER 2 PRIORITE DENSITE 3 DENSITE NIVEAU (A) 4 DENSITE NIVEAU (M) 5 POS.ATTACHEMENT 6 REGLAGE MARGE 7 REGLAGE EFFACEMENT 8 PETIT ORIGINAL ? Voulez-vous arrêter de modifier les paramètres de copie 1 ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. Le message ARRET REGLAGES? apparaît. % Pour quitter le réglage, appuyez sur [Oui]. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-33 Spécifier la PRIORITE PAPIER 1 Sélectionnez PRIORITE PAPIER dans le menu PARAM. COPIE 1. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-32. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner un format de papier ou un magasin papier. 1er magasin, 2ème magasin, 3ème magasin, 4ème magasin, 5ème magasin, multi-introducteur manuel 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAM. COPIE 1 réapparaît. 2 Remarque Si plusieurs magasins sont chargés avec du papier de même format et de même type que dans le magasin qui est prioritaire en vertu du réglage de la fonction PRIORITE PAPIER, et si le papier de tous ces magasins est épuisé, un message peut apparaître pour indiquer que le papier soit chargé dans un magasin qui n'est pas prioritaire. Dans ce cas, procédez au chargement du papier selon les indications du message. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-34 bizhub 162/210 Spécifier la PRIORITE DENSITE 1 Sélectionnez PRIORITE DENSITE dans le menu PARAM. COPIE 1. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-32. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner TEXTE, PHOTO ou encore TEXTE/P. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Si vous sélectionnez TEXTE ou TEXTE/P : un écran apparaît pour vous permettre de sélectionner AUTO ou MANUEL. ou Le menu PARAM. COPIE 1 réapparaît. 4 seulement si TEXTE ou TEXTE/P sont sélectionnés Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner AUTO ou MANUEL et appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAM. COPIE 1 réapparaît. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-35 Spécifier DENSITE NIVEAU (A) 1 Sélectionnez DENSITE NIVEAU (A) dans le menu PARAM. COPIE 1. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-32. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner l'un des trois niveaux de densité d'impression de CLAIR à FONCE. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAM. COPIE 1 réapparaît. Spécifier DENSITE NIVEAU (M) 1 Sélectionnez DENSITE NIVEAU (M) dans le menu PARAM. COPIE 1. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-32. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner l'un des neuf niveaux de densité d'impression de CLAIR à FONCE. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAM. COPIE 1 réapparaît. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-36 bizhub 162/210 Spécifier la POSITION DE RELIURE 1 Sélectionnez POS. ATTACHEMENT dans le menu PARAM. COPIE 1. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-32. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner GAUCHE ou DROITE. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAM. COPIE 1 réapparaît. Spécifier le REGLAGE MARGE 1 Sélectionnez REGLAGE MARGE dans le menu PARAM. COPIE 1. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-32. 2 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez la largeur de reliure (marge). La largeur de reliure peut être spécifiée entre 0 mm et 20 mm. ? Voulez-vous corriger le réglage de la marge ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez la valeur correcte. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAM. COPIE 1 réapparaît. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-37 Spécifier le REGLAGE EFFACEMENT 1 Sélectionnez REGLAGE EFFFACEM. dans le menu PARAM. COPIE 1. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-32. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner GAUCHE, SUP. ou BORDS. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. 4 Sur le clavier numérique, tapez la largeur de la zone à effacer. La largeur de la zone à effacer peut être réglée entre 5 mm et 20 mm. ? Voulez-vous corriger le réglage d'effacement ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C] et tapez la valeur correcte. 5 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAM. COPIE 1 réapparaît. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-38 bizhub 162/210 Spécifier PETIT ORIGINAL 1 Sélectionnez PETIT ORIGINAL dans le menu PARAM. COPIE 1. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-32. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner DESACT. ou ACTIVER. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAM. COPIE 1 réapparaît. 2 Remarque Si un document qui ne peut être détecté est chargé et que la fonction est réglée sur ACTIVER, c'est le papier prioritaire qui sera utilisé pour la copie. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-39 Sélection du menu PARAM. COPIE 2 1 Appuyez six fois sur la touche [Utilitaires]. PARAM COPIE 2? apparaît. 2 Sur le clavier numérique, appuyez sur la touche [1] à [6] selon la fonction de paramètres de copie 2 que vous voulez régler. Les fonctions PARAM. COPIE 2 sont les suivantes : 1 ORIGINAUX MIXTES 2 PRIORITE COPIE 3 SORTIE PRIORITA. 4 ORDRE COPIE 4EN1 5 MODE CROISE 6 COPIE RECTO/VERSO ? Voulez-vous arrêter de modifier les paramètres de copie 2 ? % Appuyez sur la touche [Non/C]. Le message ARRET REGLAGES? apparaît. % Pour quitter le réglage, appuyez sur [Oui]. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-40 bizhub 162/210 Spécifier les ORIGINAUX MIXTES 1 Sélectionnez ORIGINAUX MIXTES dans le menu PARAM. COPIE 2. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-39. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner soit ON ou OFF. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAM. COPIE 2 réapparaît. Spécifier la PRIORITE COPIE 1 Sélectionnez PRIORITE COPIE dans le menu PARAM. COPIE 2. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-39. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner AP (Sélection papier auto), AS (taux zoom auto) ou MANUEL. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAM. COPIE 2 réapparaît. Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7 bizhub 162/210 7-41 Spécifier SORTIE PRIORITAIRE 1 Sélectionnez SORTIE PRIORITAIRE dans le menu PARAM COPIE 2. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-39. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner NON, TRI ou GROUPE. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAM. COPIE 2 réapparaît. Spécifier ORDRE COPIE 4EN1 1 Sélectionnez ORDRE COPIE 4EN1 dans le menu PARAM. COPIE 2. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-39. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner PATTERN1 ou PATTERN2. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAM. COPIE 2 réapparaît. 7 Utilisation du mode Utilitaires 7-42 bizhub 162/210 Spécifier le MODE CROISE 1 Sélectionnez MODE CROISE dans le menu PARAM. COPIE 2. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-39. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner ON ou OFF. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAM. COPIE 2 réapparaît. Spécifier COPIE RECTO/VERSO 1 Sélectionnez COPIE RECTO/VERSO dans le menu PARAM. COPIE 2. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-39. 2 Appuyez sur les touches [*] et [)] pour sélectionner ON ou OFF. 3 Appuyez sur la touche [Oui]. Le menu PARAM. COPIE 2 réapparaît. 8 Messages d'erreur Messages d'erreur 8 bizhub 162/210 8-3 8 Messages d'erreur 8.1 Le message TONER VIDE s'affiche Message TONER VIDE Lorsque le toner est sur le point d'être épuisé, le message ci-dessous apparaît. Quand ce message s'affiche, remplacez la cartouche de toner par une neuve. 7 ATTENTION Cartouches toner usagées. % Conservez la cartouche usagée dans la boîte pour éviter de possibles souillures. % Mettez au rebut la cartouche usagée conformément à la réglementation locale. % Utilisez exclusivement du toner spécialement fabriqué pour cet appareil. N'utilisez jamais d'autres types de toner, cela pourrait entraîner des dysfonctionnements. Pour plus de détails, contactez votre Service Après-Vente. 8 Messages d'erreur 8-4 bizhub 162/210 Remplacement de la cartouche de toner 1 Ouvrez la porte frontale. 2 Basculez la cartouche vers l'extérieur, puis retirez-la. 3 En tenant vers le haut la partie operculée de la cartouche, retirez doucement l'adhésif de protection en tirant vers vous. ? Avez-vous pris les précautions nécessaires pour retirer l'adhésif ? % Lors du retrait de l'adhésif, procédez doucement afiin d’éviter toute projection de toner. 4 Insérez la cartouche neuve dans le support de cartouche toner, extrémitße marquée "UP" orientée vers le haut.. ? Avez-vous observé les précautions nécessaires pour insérer la cartouche de toner ? % Comme illustré ci-contre, la languette située sur la cartouche de toner doit s'insérer solidement dans l'encoche du support de cartouche toner. Messages d'erreur 8 bizhub 162/210 8-5 5 Tapez légèrement trois ou quatre fois le fond de la cartouche de toner. 6 Refermez le support de la cartouche de toner, puis refermez la porte frontale. Quand la porte frontale est refermée, le réapprovisionnement en toner commence automatiquement. ? Les copies sont-elles pâles immédiatement après le remplacement de la cartouche de toner ? % Exécutez la fonction Toner Replenisher du mode Utilitaires. Pour plus de détails, voir “Effectuer TONER REPLENISHER” à la page 7-19. 8 Messages d'erreur 8-6 bizhub 162/210 8.2 Le message SERRAGE PAPIER s'affiche Message SERRAGE PAPIER Si un serrage papier se produit pendant la copie ou l'impression, le message ci-dessous apparaît tandis que la copie ou l'impression s'arrêtent. Suivez la procédure décrite ci-après pour dégager le serrage papier. Un message s'affiche sur la dernière ligne de l'écran pour indiquer l'emplacement du serrage. 7 ATTENTION Le tour de l'unité de fixation est extrêmement chaud. % Toucher d'autres endroits que ceux indiqués peut entraîner des brûlures. En cas de brûlure, rincez la peau à l'eau froide puis consultez un médecin. Message Emplacement du serrage papier OUVRIR 1.PORTE COTE Multi-introducteur manuel (p. 8-11) A l'intérieur de l'unité principale ou 1er magasin (p. 8-7) OUVRIR 2. (3./4./5.) PORTE COTE 2ème magasin (3ème/4ème/5ème magasin) (p. 8-10) Messages d'erreur 8 bizhub 162/210 8-7 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans l'unité recto-verso L'unité recto-verso, en option, doit être installé. (bizhub 210 seulement) 1 Ouvrez la porte de l'unité recto-verso. 2 Retirez avec soin tout papier coincé. 3 Fermez la porte de l'unité recto-verso. Retrait d'un serrage papier dans l'unité principale ou 1er magasin 1 Ouvrez la porte latérale de l'unité principale. 2 Tirez vers le bas les leviers d'appui. ? Avez-vous pris les précautions nécessaires pour tirer vers le bas les leviers d'appui ? % Saisissez les leviers d'appui uniquement par leur partie verte pour les tirer vers le bas. 3 Retirez lentement le papier. Leviers d'appui 8 Messages d'erreur 8-8 bizhub 162/210 4 Tout en maintenant la plaque guide appuyée, retirez lentement le papier. 7 ATTENTION Toucher la surface du tambour photoconducteur peut entraîner une dégradation de la qualité de la copie. % Veillez à ne pas toucher la surface du tambour photoconducteur. 5 Tout en tournant la molette du rouleau, retirez lentement le papier. ? Avez-vous pris les précautions nécessaires pour faire tourner le rouleau ? % Ne manoeuvrez que la molette verte pour faire tourner le rouleau. % Veillez à ne pas toucher la surface du tambour photoconducteur. Tambour PC Messages d'erreur 8 bizhub 162/210 8-9 6 Refermez la porte latérale de l'unité principale. 7 Tirez le 1er magasin. 8 Enlevez tout le papier du magasin et replacez-le. 9 Faites glisser les guides papier contre les bords du papier. ? Le guide papier est-il correctement positionné ? % Assurez-vous que les guides papier sont bien poussés contre les bords de la ramette. 10 Refermez le 1er magasin. 8 Messages d'erreur 8-10 bizhub 162/210 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans le 2ème/3ème/4ème/5ème magasin 1 Ouvrez le cache latéral du 2ème/ 3ème/4ème/5ème magasin. 2 Retirez lentement le papier. 3 Fermez le cache latéral du 2ème/ 3ème/4ème/5ème magasin. Messages d'erreur 8 bizhub 162/210 8-11 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans le multi-introducteur manuel 7 ATTENTION Toucher la surface du rouleau de transfert image peut entraîner une dégradation de la qualité de la copie. % Veillez à ne pas toucher la surface du rouleau de transfert image. 1 Enlevez tout le papier du multi-introducteur manuel. 2 Ouvrez la porte latérale de l'unité principale. Rouleau de transfert image 8 Messages d'erreur 8-12 bizhub 162/210 3 Retirez lentement le papier. 4 Refermez la porte latérale de l'unité principale. 5 Rechargez le papier dans le multi-introducteur manuel. Messages d'erreur 8 bizhub 162/210 8-13 8.3 Le message SERRAGE ORIGINAL s'affiche Message SERRAGE ORIGINAL Si un serrage document se produit pendant son introduction, le message cidessous apparaît tandis que la copie ou l'impression s'arrête. En suivant la procédure suivante, retirez le document mal introduit. Retrait d'un serrage papier dans l'introducteur automatique de documents (DF-502) 1 Ouvrez le couvercle de l'introducteur de documents. 2 Enlevez le document du plateau. 8 Messages d'erreur 8-14 bizhub 162/210 3 Relevez l'introducteur automatique de documents. 4 En tournant la molette d'introduction de document dans le sens de la flèche, extrayez doucement l'original. 5 Fermez l'introducteur automatique de documents ainsi que le couvercle de l'introducteur de documents. Messages d'erreur 8 bizhub 162/210 8-15 6 Rechargez dans le plateau les documents que vous avez enlevés à l'étape 2. 2 Remarque Si le message RETOUR 1 (2) ORIG. dans ADF et PRESSER IMPRES. s'affiche à l'écran, chargez également l'une ou les deux pages à l'origine du serrage. 8 Messages d'erreur 8-16 bizhub 162/210 Retrait d'un serrage papier dans l'introducteur/retourneur automatique de documents (DF-605) 1 Tirez en levant le levier du couvercle de l'introducteur de documents. 2 Retirez avec soin tout document coincé. 3 Relevez le levier du guide document. 4 Tournez la molette d'introduction de document pour éjecter tout document serré. Messages d'erreur 8 bizhub 162/210 8-17 5 En soutenant de la main droite le plateau d'introduction de document, retirez tous les documents qui pourraient avoir été coincés. 6 Ramenez le levier du guide document à sa position d'origine et refermez le couvercle de l'introducteur de documents. 8 Messages d'erreur 8-18 bizhub 162/210 8.4 Quelle est la signification de chaque message ? Message Cause Remède SERRAGE PAPIER Un serrage papier s'est produit dans l'unité principale. Ouvrez le couvercle à l'endroit indiqué, puis retirez le papier serré. (“Le message SERRAGE PAPIER s'affiche” à la page 8-6) (En alternance et clignotant) OUVRIR XXX PORTE COTE Tout le papier serré n'a pas été retiré de l'unité principale. Vérifiez dans le message affiché à l'écran, l'emplacement du papier serré et retirez ce dernier. (“Le message SERRAGE PAPIER s'affiche” à la page 8-6) SERRAGE ORIGINAL Un serrage papier s'est produit dans l'introducteur de documents. Tout le papier serré n'a pas été retiré de l’introducteur de documents. Ouvrez le couvercle de l'introducteur de documents, puis retirez le papier serré. (“Le message SERRAGE ORIGINAL s'affiche” à la page 8-13) (En alternance et clignotant) CAPOT ADF OUVERT RETIRER PAPIER DE L'INTRO MANUELLE Du papier est chargé dans le plateau d'introduction manuelle. Enlevez le papier du plateau d'introduction manuelle. CARTER FRONT. OUVERT La porte frontale de l'unité principale est ouverte ou n'est pas correctement fermée. Refermez correctement la porte frontale. (En alternance et clignotant) FERMER CARTER FRONT. PORTE R/V OUVERTE Le couvercle de l'unité rectoverso est ouverte. Refermez correctement le couvercle de l'unité recto-ver- (En alternance so. et clignotant) FERMER PORTE R/V COUVRE ORIGI. OUVERT L'introducteur de documents est relevé alors qu'il contient un document. Refermez correctement l'introducteur de documents. (En alternance et clignotant) FERMER CACHE ORIGI. CAPOT ADF OUVERT Le couvercle de l'introducteur de documents est ouvert. Refermez correctement le couvercle de l'introducteur de (En alternance documents. et clignotant) FERMER CAPOT ADF TONER VIDE Le toner est épuisé. La copie et l'impression ne sont plus possibles. Remplacez la cartouche toner par une cartouche neuve. (“Remplacement de la cartouche de toner” à la page 8-4) (En alternance et clignotant) REMPLACER TONER Messages d'erreur 8 bizhub 162/210 8-19 MAGASIN VIDE Le magasin sélectionné n'a plus de papier. “#” indique le magasin concerné, et “XXX” indique le format de papier. Chargez le papier du format spécifié dans le magasin pa- (En alternance pier spécifié. et clignotant) CHARGER PAPIER (#XXX) POS. ORIGI. DANS ADF Aucun document n'a été chargé dans l'introducteur de documents préalablement au lancement d'une fonction de copie (comme “2en1” ou “Orig.mixtes”) qui fait appel à l'introducteur de documents. Sinon, c'est l'introducteur de documents qui est relevé. Chargez un document dans l'introducteur de documents. Refermez correctement l'introducteur de documents. ENLEVER PAPIER Lors de l'interruption d'une tâche de copie en vue d'effectuer une opération différente de copie, à l'exception de la fonction “Séparation Livre”, le document relatif à la tâche interrompue a été laissé dans l'introducteur de documents. Retirez le document de l'introducteur automatique de documents. TEXTE/P×1,00 ¦[A]§#XXX:EMPTY (Lors de la spécification des sélections copie) Le magasin sélectionné n'a plus de papier. “#” indique le magasin papier, et “XXX” indique le format papier. Chargez du papier du format spécifié dans le magasin indiqué, ou appuyez sur la touche [Papier] et sélectionnez un format papier différent. PAPIER NON CONFORME • Pendant la copie, le format du papier contenu dans le magasin sélectionné a changé. • Pendant la copie de documents de formats mixtes avec la fonction Papier Auto, le papier de format approprié n'a pas pu être trouvé. “#” indique le magasin concerné, et “XXX” indique le format de papier. Chargez du papier du format spécifié, ou appuyez sur la touche [Papier] et sélectionnez un format papier différent. (En alternance et clignotant) CHARGER PAPIER (#XXX) APS ERR FORMAT Pendant la copie avec la fonction Papier Auto, le papier de format approprié n'a pu être trouvé. Chargez du papier de format approprié, ou appuyez sur la touche [Papier] et sélectionnez un format papier différent. AMS ERR FORMAT Pendant la copie avec la fonction Taux Auto, la combinaison du format du document et du format du papier a pour résultat d'excéder les limites ×0,5 et ×2,0 du taux zoom. Chargez du papier de format approprié ou servez-vous des touches [,] et [+] pour spécifier le taux zoom. Message Cause Remède 8 Messages d'erreur 8-20 bizhub 162/210 ERREUR FORMAT PAPIER Le papier chargé dans le magasin papier a provoqué une erreur de format. “#” indique le magasin concerné, et “XXX” indique le format de papier. Tirez pour ouvrir le magasin papier qui présente l'erreur format, puis refermez-le. Vérifiez si un format personnalisé a été spécifié, et corrigez le format papier à l'aide de la fonction appropriée du mode Utilitaires. (En alternance et clignotant) REINI. PAPIER (#XXX) MEMOIRE PLEINE Le volume des données de l'image numérisée a dépassé la capacité de la mémoire. Appuyez sur une touche, ou éteignez puis rallumez la machine. (Cela permet d'effacer de la mémoire les données de numérisation.) (En alternance et clignotant) PRESSER UNE TOUCHE IMPRESSION PC MEMOIRE PLEINE Les données image reçues de l'ordinateur ont dépassé la capacité de la mémoire. Appuyez sur une touche, ou éteignez puis rallumez la machine. (Cela permet d'effacer de la mémoire les données image.) SET PLUG-IN COUNTER Un compteur clé n'est pas inséré. Insérez le compteur clé. RECEPTACLE SUP PLEIN Si le séparateur travaux, en option, est installé et que le plateau copie supérieur a atteint sa capacité maximum, l'impression ne peut pas se poursuivre. Enlevez tout le papier du plateau copie supérieur du sépa- (En alternance rateur travaux. et clignotant) ENLEVER PAPIER ERR. MOUV. PLATEAU Le séparateur travaux, en option, est installé et le papier contenu dans le plateau copie supérieur ou dans le plateau copie inférieur a atteint la capacité maximale au démarrage de la machine, ou quand la copie ou l'impression commence. Enlevez tout le papier du plateau copie supérieur ou dans le plateau copie inférieur du séparateur travaux, puis appuyez sur une touche. (En alternance et clignotant) PRESSER UNE TOUCHE APPEL MAINTENAN.(M1) Une opération d'entretien est nécessaire. Contactez votre technicien S.A.V. APPEL MAINTENAN.(M2) L'unité image doit être remplacée. Contactez votre technicien S.A.V. PROBLEME MACHINE Un problème s'est produit sur la machine. Éteignez puis rallumez la machine. Si le message d'erreur s'affiche encore, contactez votre service après vente. (En alternance et clignotant) (C####) Message Cause Remède Messages d'erreur 8 bizhub 162/210 8-21 8.5 Si l'on obtient des copies de mauvaise qualité Symptôme Cause possible Remède La copie est trop claire. La densité de copie est réglée sur Clair. Avec la touche Auto/Photo [)], sélectionnez une densité copie plus foncée (p. 3-54). Le papier est humide. Changez le papier (p. 4-6). La copie est trop sombre. La densité copie est réglée sur Foncé Avec la touche Auto/Photo [*], sélectionnez une densité copie plus claire (p. 3-54). L'original n'est pas suffisamment plaqué contre la vitre d'exposition. Placez l'original de manière à ce qu'il soit fermement plaqué contre la vitre d'exposition (p. 4-12). La copie est floue. Le papier est humide. Changez le papier (p. 4-6) L'original n'est pas suffisamment plaqué contre la vitre d'exposition. Placez l'original de manière à ce qu'il soit fermement plaqué contre la vitre d'exposition (p. 4-12). La copie présente des tâches ou des souillures. La copie présente des lignes. La surface de la vitre d'exposition est sale. Nettoyez la surface de la vitre d'exposition avec un chiffon doux et sec. (p. 9-8) Le couvre-document est sale. Essuyez le couvre-document avec un chiffon doux imbibé d'un détergent neutre. (p. 9-8) L'original est très transparent. Placez une feuille de papier blanc par dessus l'original (p. 4-13). L'original est recto-verso. En cas de copie d'un original recto-verso fin, l'information contenue au verso de l'original risque d'apparaître au recto de la copie. Avec la touche Auto/Photo [*], sélectionnez une densité copie plus claire pour le fond (p. 3-54). L'unité image a atteint la fin de sa durée de service. Contactez votre technicien S.A.V. Le couvre-document est sale. Essuyez le couvre-document avec un chiffon doux imbibé d'un détergent neutre (p. 9-8). 8 Messages d'erreur 8-22 bizhub 162/210 L'image n'est pas alignée correctement sur le papier. L'original n'est pas correctement positionné. Placez correctement l'original contre les réglettes document (p. 4-12). Si l'introducteur de documents est installé, ajustez correctement les guides latéraux des originaux au format du document (p. 4-10). Le document n'est pas placé correctement dans l'introducteur de documents. Ouvrez l'introducteur de documents, et placez correctement l'original contre les réglettes document (p. 4-12). Les guides latéraux des originaux ne sont pas complètement poussées contre l'original. Faites coulisser les guides latéraux des originaux contre les bords du document. Le papier est trop gondolé. Lissez le papier gondolé et rechargez la pile de papier dans le magasin. Le bord de la copie est sale. Le couvre-document est sale. Essuyez le couvre-document avec un chiffon doux imbibé d'un détergent neutre (p. 9-8). Le format papier sélectionné est supérieur à celui du document (avec un facteur zoom e × 1,00). Sélectionnez un format de papier copie identique au format de l'original (p. 3-41). Sinon, sélectionnez la fonction Taux Auto pour agrandir et adapter la copie au format de papier sélectionné (p. 3-48). L'orientation du document est différente de l'orientation de la copie (le paramètre zoom étant réglé sur × 1,00). Sélectionnez un format de papier copie identique au format de l'original. Ou bien sélectionnez une orientation copie identique à celle du document. La copie a été réduite à une taille inférieure à celle du papier (avec un taux zoom de réduction). Sélectionnez un taux zoom qui fasse correspondre le format de la copie avec celui du papier sélectionné (p. 3-48). Sinon, sélectionnez la fonction Taux Auto pour réduire et adapter la copie au format de papier sélectionné (p. 3-41). Symptôme Cause possible Remède Messages d'erreur 8 bizhub 162/210 8-23 8.6 En cas de copie insatisfaisante Symptôme Cause possible Remède L'afficheur reste vierge. Le voyant [Impression] est-il allumé en vert ? Le mode Economie d'énergie est activé. Appuyez sur l'une des touches du panneau de contrôle pour annuler le mode Economie d'énergie (p. 3-19). La fonction “AUTO COUPURE” a été activée. Placez l'interrupteur principal sur o (p. 3-17). Le voyant [Impression] ne s'allume pas en vert. Un code d'accès utilisateur (section) n'a pas été entré. Tapez le code d'accès utilisateur (section) selon les instructions figurant dans Codes d'accès (p. 6-25). Aucune copie n'est produite même s'il l'on appuie sur la touche [Impression]. Si le voyant “Erreur” du panneau de contrôle s'allume, c'est qu'une erreur s'est produite. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. La machine vient juste d'être allumée et se trouve en préchauffage. A la mise sous tension, il faut patienter moins de 30 secondes avant que la machine ne soit prête à réaliser des copies. Veuillez patienter. La machine ne peut pas être mise en mode Copie. La machine est en mode Interruption (le voyant Interruption est allumé). Appuyez sur la touche [Interruption] pour annuler le mode Interruption (p. 3-56). La machine ne fonctionne pas lorsqu'on l'allume. Le cordon d'alimentation n'est pas branché. Insérer la prise de courant à fond dans la prise murale. Le disjoncteur de la pièce s'est déclenché. Réarmer le disjoncteur. 8 Messages d'erreur 8-24 bizhub 162/210 9 Divers Divers 9 bizhub 162/210 9-3 9 Divers 9.1 Caractéristiques Unité principale bizhub 162/210 Caractéristique bizhub 162 bizhub 210 Type Bureau/Console* Plateau Fixe Revêtement du tambour OPC Système copie Système d'impression électro photographique Système de développement Système HMT Système fixation Système de rouleaux chauffés Résolution 600 dpi × 600 dpi Document • Types : Feuilles, livres, et autres objets en trois dimensions • Format : maximum A3 w, Ledger w (11 × 17 w) • Poids : 3 kg Types de papier • Papier ordinaire (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2), papier recyclé (60 g/m2 à 90 g/m2) • Papier dédié : Papier épais (91 g/m2 à 157 g/m2), transparents, cartes postales, enveloppes et planches d'étiquettes